JP7807010B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to an amusement machine.

Conventionally, there are gaming machines that hold a lottery based on whether a gaming ball enters a starting hole on the gaming board, and if the lottery results in a jackpot, a jackpot symbol is displayed statically on a display device that displays a moving symbol, triggering a jackpot game. Among such gaming machines, gaming machines have been proposed that include an electronic circuit board on which surface-mounted electronic components are mounted (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2020-044017

However, conventional gaming machines equipped with multiple electronic boards on which the above-mentioned surface-mounted electronic components are mounted still have room for improvement in order to prevent a decline in security.

The present invention was made in light of these circumstances, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a decrease in security against tampering with electronic boards.

Effective solutions for achieving the above-mentioned objectives are presented below. Where necessary, explanations of their operation will be provided. For ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations will also be shown in the embodiments of the invention, but are not intended to be limiting.

According to the invention of claim 1,
A gaming machine that includes a plurality of substrates on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, that performs a lottery based on the establishment of a start condition, and that awards a benefit based on the result of the lottery,
The plurality of substrates include:
a main control board that executes processing related to the lottery;
a plurality of performance boards related to the control of a plurality of performance means operable based on the result of the lottery executed by the main control board;
A plurality of electronic components are mounted on the special performance board among the plurality of performance boards,
The plurality of electronic components mounted on the special performance board are:
a special integrated circuit component that controls a special effect means among the plurality of effect means;
a plurality of discrete components electrically connected to the special integrated circuit component;
Among the plurality of discrete components, the special discrete components having a common function include a first special discrete component having a relatively small outer shape among the special discrete components, and a second special discrete component having a relatively large outer shape among the special discrete components mounted on the special performance board;
the first special discrete component and the second special discrete component have different colors in appearance except for the markings of electrical characteristics, and are disposed without any other electronic components between the first special discrete component and the second special discrete component;
It is characterized by:

The gaming machine of the present invention can prevent a decline in security.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a left side view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. This is an oblique view of a pachinko machine seen from the front right. This is an oblique view of a pachinko machine seen from the front left. This is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from behind. This is a front view of a pachinko machine when the pressing operation part of the performance operation unit is in the raised position. This is an oblique view of the pachinko machine from the front right when the pressing operation part of the performance operation unit is in the raised position. This is an oblique view of a pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame open from the main frame and the main frame open from the outer frame. This is an exploded oblique view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, as seen from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, viewed from the rear. FIG. 2 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine. FIG. FIG. This is a perspective view of the outer frame from the front. This is a perspective view of the outer frame from behind. This is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled into its main components as seen from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the left outer frame assembly and the right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the lower outer frame assembly of the outer frame, viewed from the front. 1A is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame as viewed from above the front, and FIG. 1B is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 1A as viewed from below the front. FIG. 2 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine. FIG. FIG. 10 is a left side view of the door frame. FIG. 10 is a right side view of the door frame. This is an oblique view of the door frame from the front right. This is an oblique view of the door frame from the front left. This is a perspective view of the door frame from behind. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame, broken down into its main components, viewed from the front. This is an exploded perspective view of the door frame, broken down into its main components, viewed from the rear. FIG. 1A is a perspective view of a door frame base unit of a door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame base unit, broken down into its main components, viewed from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. (a) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame as seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) as seen from the rear-front, (c) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of a conventional pachinko machine as seen from the front, and (d) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) as seen from the rear. 34(a) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34(a) as seen from the front, and FIG. 34(b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of FIG. 34(a) as seen from the rear. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock in Figure 34(a) from the front, (b) is an explanatory diagram of the cylinder lock shown in a state rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the state in (a), and (c) is an explanatory diagram of the cylinder lock shown in a state rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the state in (a). (a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit from the back. (a) is an exploded oblique view of the ball feeding unit seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded oblique view of the ball feeding unit seen from the rear with the rear case and anti-tamper member removed. (a) is a perspective view of the fall cover unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the fall cover unit as seen from the back. FIG. 10 is a front view of the fall cover unit with the lid member removed. 1A is an enlarged front view showing the handle unit and handle cover unit portions of the door frame, and FIG. 1B is an enlarged perspective view showing the handle unit and handle cover unit portions of the door frame. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit as seen from the front. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit as seen from behind. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the front. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from behind. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line I-I in Figure 41(a). FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view taken along line A in FIG. 1. This is an oblique view of the tray unit of the door frame. This is a perspective view of the plate unit from behind. (a) is a cross-sectional view showing the key parts of the door frame cut horizontally at the lower tray ball supply port, and (b) is a cross-sectional view showing the key parts of a conventional door frame cut at the same location as (a). This is an enlarged plan view showing the ball lending operation unit portion in the tray unit of the door frame. (a) is a perspective view of the performance operation unit seen from the front with the performance operation button facing upward, and (b) is a perspective view of the performance operation unit of (a) seen from the back. This is an exploded oblique view of the performance operation unit, broken down into its main components, viewed from above and the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the performance operation unit, broken down into its main components, viewed from below and in the front. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit when the performance operation unit is in a lowered position and the lower holding member of the lifting spring is at the upper end of its travel, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit when the performance operation unit has moved from the position in (a) to the raised position. This is a cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit when the performance operation unit is in a lowered position and the lifting spring lower holding member is at the lower end of its travel. This is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between the decorative board on the outer periphery of the performance operation unit, the decorative board on the outer side of the button, and the decorative board inside the button in a plan view of the performance operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. (a) is a front view of the dish unit in its normal state, and (b) is a front view of the dish unit when the performance control unit is in the raised position. This is a plan view of a performance operation unit showing an example in which multiple contact detection bodies are provided in the performance operation unit. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic example of an example in which multiple contact detection bodies are connected to one contact detection sensor main body, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic example in which a switching unit is provided between the contact detection sensor main body and multiple contact detection bodies in (a), and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the left dish decorative unit, right dish decorative unit, and performance operation unit of the dish unit can be moved forward and backward, and contact detection bodies are provided on the front and rear of the performance operation unit, etc. FIG. 10A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a decorative contact detection body, and FIG. 10B is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic diagram of another embodiment of the performance operation unit. (a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit from the back. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame left side unit as seen from behind. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line U-U in Figure 62(a). (a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, (c) is an oblique view of the door frame right side unit from the front, and (d) is an oblique view of the door frame right side unit from the back. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the door frame right side unit as seen from behind. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A in Figure 66(a). This is a cross-sectional view taken along line O-O in Figure 66(a). (a) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, showing the two-color molded outer layer of the door frame in an opaque state, and (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit in (a), showing the outer layer in a transparent state while leaving the inner layer intact. A front view showing each decorative substrate of the door frame. This is a plan view showing the decorative board in the part of the door frame's performance operation unit. A rear view showing each decorative substrate provided around the door window of the door frame. FIG. 2 is a front view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine. This is an oblique view of the main body frame from the front right. This is an oblique view of the main body frame from the front left. This is an oblique view of the main body frame as seen from behind. This is an exploded oblique view of the main body frame disassembled into its main components as seen from the front. This is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into its main components and viewed from the rear. (a) is an enlarged oblique view showing the lower left corner of the front of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged oblique view showing the lower left corner of the front of the main body frame when the door frame is opened relative to the main body frame. 10A and 10B are explanatory diagrams showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed relative to the main body frame. 1A is a perspective view of the ball launcher in the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the ball launcher as seen from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the main frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit as seen from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit in the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit as seen from the back. FIG. 1A is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit as viewed from the front, with the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components, and FIG. 1B is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit as viewed from the rear, with the dispensing unit disassembled into its main components. This is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit, cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-to-rear direction. (a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-to-back direction when the ball removal movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line A-A in (a). An explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the door frame fall cover unit and the lower full ball path unit. An explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the main body frame. 1A is a perspective view of a board unit of a main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the back. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from below and behind. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit, seen from the front, disassembled into its main components. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled into its main components and viewed from the rear. This is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut in the center in the left-right direction. 1A is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the locking unit as seen from the rear. 1A is a plan view of the main body frame, and FIG. 1B is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. This is an enlarged view showing the upper part of the main body frame in a perspective view seen from behind. 1A is a perspective view of the spherical tank with tank rails and the like assembled thereto, as seen from above the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of FIG. 1A from below the front. 100(a) is an exploded perspective view seen from the front. FIG. An explanatory diagram showing the area where game balls that overflow from the ball tank at the top of the main body frame circulate. An explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls that have overflowed from the ball tank at the top of the main body frame. An explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls into the bypass passage at the top of the main body frame. FIG. 10 is an enlarged perspective view of the main body frame as seen from behind the hinge side, showing the tank rail and its surroundings. This is an oblique view showing an enlarged portion of the tank rail as viewed from behind of a pachinko machine equipped with a tank rail of another embodiment. 106 in assembled state with the spherical tank, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of (a) seen from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the tank rail etc. of (a) seen from the rear. 107, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rails and the like of FIG. 107, as seen from the rear. FIG. This is a cross-sectional view of the tank rail etc. taken along the kerch line in Figure 107(a). An explanatory diagram showing a cross section of the flow of game balls within the tank rail of Figure 107. (a) is a front view of a board unit of another embodiment, (b) is an oblique view of the board unit of (a) seen from the front right, and (c) is an oblique view of the board unit of (a) seen from the front left. 111(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 111(a) seen from the upper right rear, and FIG. 111(b) is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 111(a) seen from the lower right rear. This is an exploded oblique view of the substrate unit of Figure 111(a) as seen from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the substrate unit of Figure 111(a) as seen from behind. 111(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line K-K in FIG. 111(a), (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line K-K in (a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line K-K in (a). This is a bottom view showing the area behind the door frame in a pachinko machine equipped with the board unit of Figure 111(a). An explanatory diagram showing an example in which a guide piece is provided at the out ball discharge outlet of the out ball passage. 1A is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the out-sensor is detachable, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the out-sensor in FIG. 1A has been detached. (a) is an oblique view of the board unit of the third embodiment, showing the power supply unit, dispensing control unit, and interface unit omitted, viewed from the front right, and (b) is an oblique view of the board unit of (a) viewed from the front left. 119 from the rear right and top right, and FIG. 120 is a perspective view of the board unit of FIG. 119 from the rear right and bottom right. 119A is a plan view of the substrate unit of FIG. 119, FIG. 119B is a cross-sectional view taken along line KO-KO in FIG. 119A, and FIG. 119C is a cross-sectional view taken along line SA-SA in FIG. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line C-C in Figure 121(a). This is an exploded oblique view of the substrate unit of Figure 119 as seen from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the board unit of Figure 119, seen from the rear. 120A is a perspective view of the ball path member of the base unit of FIG. 119 as seen from the front, and FIG. 120B is a perspective view of the ball path member of the base unit of FIG. 119 as seen from the back. An explanatory diagram showing the elimination of ball clogging in the board unit of Figure 119. An explanatory diagram showing the prevention of intrusion of linear illegal tools into the board unit of Figure 119. 120 is an explanatory diagram showing how to remove dust from the board unit of FIG. 119. This is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine, with the center gimmicks and other parts made opaque. This is an oblique view of the game board of Figure 129 seen from the front right. FIG. 130 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 129 as seen from the front left. This is a perspective view of the game board from behind. FIG. 4 is a schematic explanatory diagram of wiring from the function display unit on the main control board. This is a front view of the game board with the center gimmick and other features made transparent. This is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from the front. This is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components and viewed from behind. This is a front view of the game board, showing the front unit cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to reveal the game area where game balls circulate and the obstacle pins. FIG. 2A is a perspective view of the front components and game panel of the game board as seen from the front, and FIG. 2B is a perspective view of the front components and game panel as seen from the back. (a) is a front view showing an enlarged view of the upper right corner of the front component and the game panel, (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the soot line in (a), and (c) is an exploded oblique view of (a) broken down into its main components and viewed from the front. FIG. 1A is a perspective view of the front unit of the gaming board as seen from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the front unit of the gaming board as seen from the back. (a) is an exploded oblique view of the lower right guide passage in the center gimmick as seen from the front, and (b) is a side cross-sectional view of the center gimmick cut left and right at the separation hole in the front member in front of the lower right guide passage, as seen from the right. 1A is a perspective view of the gate member as seen from the front, FIG. 1B is an exploded perspective view of the gate member as seen from the front, and FIG. 1C is an exploded perspective view of the gate member as seen from the rear. 1A is a front view of the gate member, and FIG. 1B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line SEC in FIG. An explanatory diagram showing the flow path of the game ball on the right side of the front unit. An explanatory diagram showing an enlarged view of the first attacker unit and second attacker unit in Figure 144. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board showing the placement of magnetic sensors. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the orientation of a magnetic sensor that can detect magnetic field lines from a magnet, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the orientation of a magnetic sensor that cannot detect magnetic field lines from a magnet, (c) is an explanatory diagram that shows a schematic perspective view of the detection range of a magnetic sensor, (d) is an explanatory diagram that shows the positional relationship between a magnetic sensor and a magnetic body that cannot detect magnetic field lines from a magnet, and (e) is an explanatory diagram that shows the positional relationship between a magnetic sensor and a magnetic body that can detect magnetic field lines from a magnet. (a) is an oblique view showing the state in which a magnetic sensor is held by a holding member, (b) is an exploded oblique view showing the state in which the holding member and the magnetic sensor are separated, and (c) is an exploded view showing the holding member in cross section. FIG. 1A is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as seen from the front, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the back unit of the game board as seen from the back. This is a front view of the back front performance unit in the back unit. (a) is an oblique view of the back front performance unit in the back unit seen from the front, and (b) is an oblique view of the back front performance unit in the back unit seen from the back. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the front performance unit cut near the center in the vertical direction and viewed from above, (b) is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the left part of (a), and (c) is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the right part of (a). This is an exploded oblique view of the rear front left decorative unit of the rear front performance unit, viewed from the front together with the light guide plate. This is an exploded oblique view of the rear front left decorative unit, showing only the rear front left first decorative body, rear front left second decorative body, rear front left third decorative body, and rear front left decorative body base. (a) is a front view of the first decorative body on the front left shown in a transparent state, (b) is a front view of the second decorative body on the front left shown in a transparent state, (c) is a front view of the third decorative body on the front left shown in a transparent state, and (c) is a front view of the base of the front left decorative body shown in a transparent state. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the light guide plate in the back front performance unit and the decorative substrate for illuminating and decorating the light guide plate and the back front left decorative unit from the front, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the light guide plate in the back front performance unit and the decorative substrate for illuminating and decorating the decorative body of the back front lower performance unit from the front. A front view showing the back front left decorative unit illuminated and decorated. 1A is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which a first pattern on the light guide plate is illuminated, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which a second pattern on the light guide plate is illuminated. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the light-emitting configuration of the second pattern of the light guide plate. FIG. This is a front view of the back front performance unit showing the second image on the light guide plate illuminated. This is a front view of the game board showing the state in which the rear upper first decorative part of the rear upper movable decorative body in the rear upper performance unit of the rear unit has been moved to a lowered position facing forward. This is a front view of the game board showing the state in which the rear upper movable decorative body in the rear upper performance unit of the rear unit has been moved to a lowered position and the rear upper second decorative part is facing forward. This is a front view of the game board showing the rear left movable decoration and the rear right movable decoration in the rear lower performance unit of the rear unit moved to their appearance positions. This is a front view of the game board showing the back front lower middle decorative body in the back front lower performance unit of the back unit's back front performance unit in the raised state. This is a front view of the game board showing the state in which the back front left logo decoration, back front upper left logo decoration, back front left sub decoration, and back front left band decoration of the back front left decorative unit 3120 in the back front performance unit of the back unit are illuminated. This is a front view of the game board showing the first image on the light guide plate in the back front performance unit of the back unit illuminated and decorated. This is a front view of the game board showing the first image on the light guide plate in the back front performance unit of the back unit illuminated and the back left movable decorative body and the back right movable decorative body in the back lower performance unit moved to their appearance positions. This is a front view of the game board showing the second image on the light guide plate in the back front performance unit of the back unit illuminated and decorated. FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an outline of the control configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the peripheral control unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit. FIG. 2 is a front view of the peripheral control unit. 1A is a perspective view of a ROM socket having a conversion board, and FIG. 1B is a top view of a control ROM having a leadless package attached to the ROM socket. This is a view taken from the arrow P in Figure 173(a). 10 is a cross-sectional view of a through hole showing an outline of the positional relationship between a through hole formed in a peripheral control board and a through hole formed in a conversion board. FIG. 1A is a perspective view of a control ROM having a leadless package and a ROM socket mounted on a conversion board, and FIG. 1B is a top view of the control ROM having a leadless package attached to the ROM socket. 10A to 10C are schematic diagrams showing the board management numbers of peripheral control boards. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a schematic circuit diagram showing the circuit of the main control board. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram showing a main control input circuit with an error detection function. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram showing a power outage monitoring circuit. This is a schematic circuit diagram showing the circuit of the dispensing control board. FIG. 1A is an oblique view of the main control board box showing the state before the main control board is attached to the cover body and the base body is slid to cover the opening side of the cover body; and FIG. 1B is an oblique view of the main control board box with the cover body and base body sealed by a sealing mechanism. 1A is a perspective view of the setting key switch as seen from the diagonal front right, FIG. 1B is a perspective view of the setting key switch as seen from the diagonal front left, and FIG. 1C is a top view of the setting key switch. 10 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the setting key switch and the cover body of the main control board box. FIG. FIG. 1(a) is a diagram showing the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board on which the setting key switch is mounted; FIG. 1(b) is a diagram showing the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board on which the setting key switch is mounted and the corresponding solder surface (back surface) of the main control board; and FIG. 1(c) is a diagram showing the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board on which the setting key switch is mounted and the corresponding solder surface (back surface) of the main control board. This is a continuation of Figure 186, and is a diagram (part 3) (d) showing the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board on which the setting key switch is mounted and the corresponding solder surface (back surface) of the main control board, and a diagram (part 4) (e) showing the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board on which the setting key switch is mounted and the corresponding solder surface (back surface) of the main control board. 1 is a schematic diagram illustrating an outline of the layout of various electronic components mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board. FIG. This is a schematic diagram of the solder side (back side) of the main control board, explaining an overview of various wiring patterns to the main control MPU of the main control board. FIG. 1A is a schematic diagram illustrating a configuration for covering an insulating coating on the land of a through-hole for an input signal wiring pattern according to the first embodiment formed on the mounting surface (front surface) of a main control board; FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram of a cross section taken along line X-X in FIG. 1A; and FIG. 1C is a schematic diagram of a modified example of FIG. 13A is a schematic diagram illustrating a configuration for covering an insulating coating on the land of a through-hole for an input signal wiring pattern according to the second embodiment formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310; FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram of a cross section along line X-X in FIG. 13A; and FIG. 13C is a schematic diagram of a modified example of FIG. FIG. 10A is a schematic diagram illustrating a configuration for covering an insulating coating on the land of a through-hole for an input signal wiring pattern according to the third embodiment formed on the mounting surface (front surface) of a main control board; FIG. 10B is a schematic diagram of a cross section along line X-X in FIG. 10A; and FIG. 10C is a schematic diagram of a modified example of FIG. FIG. 10A is a schematic diagram illustrating a configuration for covering an insulating coating on the land of a through hole for an input signal wiring pattern according to a fourth embodiment formed on the mounting surface (front surface) of a main control board; FIG. 10B is a schematic diagram of a cross section along line X-X in FIG. 10A; and FIG. 10C is a schematic diagram of a modified example of FIG. 1A is a schematic diagram illustrating the configuration of covering the lands of the through holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board of the first embodiment with an insulating coating; FIG. 1B is a schematic diagram of a cross section along line X-X in FIG. 1A; and FIG. 1C is a schematic diagram of a modified example of FIG. 1B. 10A is a schematic diagram illustrating the configuration of covering the lands of the through holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board of the second embodiment with an insulating coating; FIG. 10B is a schematic diagram of a cross section along line X-X in FIG. 10A; and FIG. 10C is a schematic diagram of a modified example of FIG. 10A is a schematic diagram illustrating the configuration of covering the lands of the through holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board of the third embodiment with an insulating coating; FIG. 10B is a schematic diagram of a cross section along line X-X in FIG. 10A; and FIG. 10C is a schematic diagram of a modified example of FIG. 10B. 10A is a schematic diagram illustrating the configuration of covering the lands of the through holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board of the fourth embodiment with an insulating coating; FIG. 10B is a schematic diagram of a cross section along line X-X in FIG. 10A; and FIG. 10C is a schematic diagram of a modified example of FIG. 1A is a front view showing an enlarged portion of the game board of the first embodiment, and FIG. 1B is a front view showing an enlarged portion of the game board of the second embodiment in the same area as in FIG. 1A. (a) is a front view showing an enlarged portion of the game board of the second embodiment, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the back front left decorative unit of the back front performance unit in (a) in an illuminated state. Figure 199(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the panel board of the game panel in a luminous decorated state. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of a game board according to a third embodiment, showing the panel board and cells disassembled and viewed from the front. (a) is a front view of the function display unit of the second embodiment, (b) is a cross-sectional view along the So-So line in (a), (c) is an oblique view of the function display unit of (a) seen from the front, and (d) is an oblique view of the function display unit of (a) seen from the back. This is an exploded oblique view of the function display unit of Figure 202 as seen from the front. This is an exploded oblique view of the function display unit of Figure 202, seen from the rear. An explanatory diagram schematically showing the relationship between the function display unit of Figure 202 and the player. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the relationship between the function display unit and the player in the third embodiment. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of a function display unit according to a fourth embodiment. (a) is a cross-sectional view showing a second embodiment of the mounting of a magnetic sensor, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the mounting of the magnetic sensor in (a) in an oblique view, (c) is an exploded oblique view showing the mounting of the magnetic sensor in (b) in an exploded manner, and (d) is an exploded oblique view of the mounting of a magnetic sensor shown with a holding member different from that in (c). (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section of an example in which the separation hole of the first member for removing the decorative body also serves as a positioning hole for the second member, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section of an example in which a closed space is formed by the second member behind the separation hole of the first member for removing the decorative body, (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section of the state in (b) in which decorative bodies of different thicknesses are attached, and (d) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section of an example in which the separation hole of the first member for removing the decorative body also serves as an attachment hole for the decorative body. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the first member from the front with a decorative body attached, (b) is a cross-sectional view of (a), and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing the first member from the front with a decorative body different from that of (a) attached. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a horizontally elongated rectangular decorative body and a first member, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a circular decorative body and a first member, (c) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a symmetrically arranged decorative body and a first member, and (d) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a symmetrically arranged decorative body with a different shape from (c) and a first member. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the decorative body and the movable first member from the front, (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line T-T-A in (a), (c) is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between the decorative body and the first member in (a) and (c), (d) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a decorative body of a different form to (a) and the movable first member from the front, and (e) is a cross-sectional view taken along line T-T-A in (d). FIG. 1 is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine. 10 is a time chart showing an example of the amount of balls dispensed calculated in relation to the progress of the stop counter. This is a table showing the conditions for clearing the "amount of balls calculated before the stop state begins" and the "restrictions on play during the stop state." This is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value and play is restricted. 10 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when restrictions on play are lifted when the power is turned back on after being shut off. This is a specific example of a presentation in which the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value at the moment the game ball enters the big prize opening during a jackpot game. This is a specific example of a presentation in which the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value at the time when a game ball enters a general winning slot while a special pattern is being displayed in a changing state. This is the restricted clear pattern table 4 that is selected when the restricted clear pattern selection switch is set to "4." 10 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when a minor abnormality occurs during a normal state or a stop state. 10 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when a serious abnormality occurs during a normal state. 10 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when a serious abnormality occurs during a stoppage state. 10 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when a minor abnormality occurs during the stop preparation state. 10 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when a serious abnormality occurs during the preparation state for stopping the game. This is a specific example of what happens when a minor abnormality occurs during normal or dead-end conditions. This is a specific example of what happens when a serious abnormality occurs during normal or dead-end conditions. This is a specific example of what happens when a minor or major abnormality occurs during the end preparation state. 10 is a time chart showing the transition of advance notice display after advance notice display has started. 10 is a modified example of the restriction clear pattern table 4 when the power is turned on. 10 is a time chart showing the start of output of a special external signal before the start of a stop preparation state and a stop state. This is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when a stop-like state occurs after the stop-state is cleared when the power is turned on. This is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when an advance notice display or an indication that progress is not possible is displayed during standby mode. This is a time chart showing the operation of the movable body when the special pattern does not transition to a stop state during variable display. This is a time chart showing the case where the game transitions to a stop state before the timing of the movable body's operation during the variable display of the special pattern, and the movable body is not operated thereafter. This is a time chart showing the case where the movable body transitions to a stop state during operation while the special pattern is being displayed in a variable manner, and the movable body is not operated thereafter. This is a time chart showing a case where the game transitions to a stop state before the timing of the movable body's operation during the variable display of the special pattern, and the movable body is then operated. This is a specific example of a presentation in which the moving body transitions to a stop state during the movement of the moving body while the special pattern is being displayed in a changing state, and the moving body is not moved thereafter. This is a specific example of a presentation in which the game transitions to a stop state before the timing of the movable body's movement during the changing display of the special pattern, and the movable body is then moved. This is another example of a specific presentation in which the game transitions to a stop state before the timing of the movable body's movement during the variable display of the special pattern, and the movable body is then moved. This is a time chart showing a case where the game transitions to a stop state while the movable body is not moving during the changing display of the special pattern, and then the celebratory movement of the movable body is performed. This is a time chart showing a case where a state is transitioned to a stop state during the operation of a movable body during the variable display of a special pattern, and then a celebratory operation of the movable body is performed. This is a time chart showing a case where the movable body transitions to a stop state during an abnormal stop and a celebratory action of the movable body is performed when the movable body returns to its initial position. 10 is a time chart showing a case where the movable body transitions to a stop state during an abnormal stop of the movable body and does not return to the initial position. 10 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when the game board is replaced when the power is cut off. 10 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when the game board is replaced before the power is cut off. 10 is a table comparing the notification modes regarding light emission and sound in a normal standby state, an energy saving mode, and a stopped state. 10 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when it transitions to an energy saving mode during a stop state. 10 is a table comparing notification modes related to light emission and sound when transitioning to notification mode C during a stop state. 10 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when transitioning to notification mode C during a stop state. This is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when a first manager's operation or a second manager's operation is performed during energy saving mode and the machine transitions to a stop state. This is a time chart showing what happens when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during a small win game. This is a time chart showing the case where the amount of balls dispensed does not reach a specific value during a special jackpot game. This is a time chart showing what happens when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during a special jackpot game. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a process when the main control side power is turned on. This is a flowchart showing the continuation of the processing when the main control side power is turned on in Figure 255. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of main control side timer interrupt processing. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting change process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a setting value confirmation display process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an error display process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of processing when the dispensing control unit is powered on. This is a flowchart showing the continuation of the power-on processing of the dispensing control unit in Figure 261. Following Figure 262, this is a flowchart showing the continuation of the processing when the dispensing control unit is powered on. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a dispensing control unit timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a process performed when a peripheral control unit is powered on; 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric device control processing (step S114). A flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passing process (step S232). 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the performance pre-determination process (step S245). A flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passing process (step S234). 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process processing (step S238). 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal processing (step S280). 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for hit determination processing (step S305). Various tables showing a hit determination table (A), a big hit pattern determination table (B), and a small hit pattern determination table (C). 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281). A flowchart showing the procedure for the first variation pattern setting process (step S282). This is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special pattern change processing (step S283). 10 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop processing (step S284). This is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot control processing (step S235A). FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a rainbow-colored effect. An explanatory diagram showing the grouping of multiple LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing groupings of multiple LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the door frame. FIG. FIG. 10 is a timing diagram showing an example of a rainbow effect. FIG. 10 is a timing diagram showing an example of a rainbow effect during an abnormality. (A) is a front oblique view of the upper rear movable decorative body, and (B) is a cross-sectional view of the upper rear movable decorative body cut along line A-A. FIG. 10 is a timing diagram showing a first modified example of the rainbow effect. FIG. 10 is a timing diagram showing a first modified example of the rainbow effect. FIG. 10 is a timing diagram showing a second modified example of the rainbow effect. FIG. 10 is a timing diagram showing a second modified example of the rainbow effect. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a gold effect. FIG. 10 is a timing diagram showing an example of a gold effect. An explanatory diagram showing an example of a low-expectation gold effect. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of effect processing in a gold effect. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 10 is a timing diagram showing an example of light intensity adjustment during a gold effect. FIG. 10 is a timing diagram showing an example of volume adjustment during a gold effect. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an information display device. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of an information display device. 1A is a schematic front view of a divided game board, and FIG. 1B is a schematic back view of the divided game board. (a) is a rear perspective view of the split game board as seen from the lower left rear before the right game board and left game board that make up the split game board are combined, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the split game board as seen from the lower left rear. This is a schematic front view of the divided game board in Figure 302 (a) after the decoration has been changed. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram illustrating an example of an ID output circuit. FIG. 10 is a circuit diagram illustrating an example of a photosensor information serial output circuit. FIG. 10 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a plurality of ID output circuits. 10 is a list showing a match/mismatch table of combinations. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of a peripheral control unit power-on process capable of performing ID determination. 10 is a table showing how to deal with various errors when power is turned on (specific example 1); This is a table showing various error responses (specific example 1) that do not involve magnetic detection when a performance is in progress after the power is turned on or while waiting for customers. This is a table showing how to deal with various errors (specific example 1) that involve magnetic detection when a performance is in progress after the power is turned on or while waiting for customers. 10 is a table showing how to deal with various errors when power is turned on (specific example 2); This is a table showing various error responses (specific example 2) that do not involve magnetic detection when the performance is in progress after the power is turned on or while waiting for customers. This is a table showing how to deal with various errors (specific example 2) that involve magnetic detection when a performance is in progress after the power is turned on or while customers are waiting. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram illustrating an example of an ID comparison circuit. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a circuit of a relay board provided in a plate unit. This is a circuit showing an example of a modified example of FIG. 316. This is a circuit diagram showing an example of replacing the LED driver that constitutes the ID comparison circuit provided on the frame side decorative board shown in Figure 316 with a serial-parallel conversion circuit. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing an outline of allocation of each unit. FIG. 4 is a circuit diagram showing an example of an ID output circuit in each unit. This is a circuit diagram showing an example of a circuit that further includes a manufacturer identification code (manufacturer identification value) in the ID output circuit in each unit of Figure 321. 1A is a schematic front view of a divided game board on which an ID error determination switch is provided, and FIG. 1B is a schematic rear view of the divided game board on which an ID error determination switch is provided. This is a schematic exploded oblique view of the right-side game board disassembled into the right-side game panel and the right-side back box, viewed from the front. This is a schematic oblique view of a portion of the right rear box of the rear unit of the right-side game board, seen from the front. This is a schematic exploded oblique view of a portion of the right-side game board disassembled into a right-side game panel and a right-side back box, as viewed from the front. This is an example of behavior when changing the setting value when the divided game board 5A, which is composed of a left game board 5AL and a right game board 5AR, is in a compatible (matched) state. This is an example of behavior when changing the setting value when the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible (inconsistent). This is an example of behavior when an illegal magnetism occurs during the execution of the setting change process when the combination of the split game board 5A is incompatible (inconsistent). This is an example of behavior when an unauthorized magnetism occurs during the power-on operation check that is executed after the setting change process is completed when the combination of the split game board 5A is incompatible (inconsistent). This is an example of behavior when changing the setting value when the right game board 5AR is not connected. This is an example of behavior when unauthorized magnetism occurs while the setting change process is being executed while the right-side game board 5AR is not connected. This is an example of behavior when unauthorized magnetism occurs during the power-on operation check that is performed after the setting change process is completed when the right-side game board 5AR is not connected. This is an example of behavior when a setting value confirmation display is performed when the divided game board 5A, which is composed of a left game board 5AL and a right game board 5AR, is in a compatible (matched) state as a combination of the divided game board 5A. This is an example of behavior when a setting value confirmation display is performed when the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible (inconsistent). This is an example of behavior when an illegal magnetism occurs during execution of the setting value confirmation display process when the combination of the split game board 5A is incompatible (inconsistent). This is an example of behavior when an unauthorized magnetism occurs during the power-on operation check that is executed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed when the combination of the split game board 5A is incompatible (inconsistent). This is an example of behavior when the setting value confirmation display is performed when the right-side game board 5AR is not connected. This is an example of behavior when unauthorized magnetism occurs while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed when the right-side game board 5AR is not connected. This is an example of behavior when unauthorized magnetism occurs during the power-on operation check that is executed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed when the right-side game board 5AR is not connected. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing a modified example of the main control board. This is an example of behavior when the transition to confirmation mode is controlled when the combination of the divided game board 5A, which is composed of the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR, is compatible (aligned). This is an example of behavior when the transition to confirmation mode is controlled when the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible (inconsistent). This is an example of behavior when controlling the transition to confirmation mode when the right-side game board 5AR is not connected. This is a time chart showing the start timing of a specific effect. This is a time chart for ending a specific effect. This is a time chart showing the start timing of a specific effect in an abnormal state. This is a time chart for ending a specific effect in an abnormal state. 10 is a timing chart showing an example of a display mode of a performance display device. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the display mode of a performance display device. (A) is a timing chart showing an example of a presentation mode during the second specific presentation, and (B) is a timing chart showing an example of a presentation mode during the first specific presentation. (C) is a timing chart showing an example of a presentation pattern during the second specific presentation. (A) is a timing chart showing an example of a presentation mode during the second specific presentation, and (B) is a timing chart showing an example of a presentation mode during the first specific presentation. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the display mode of a performance display device. An explanatory diagram showing an example of the front mounting surface of a rear left movable decorative substrate provided on a rear left movable decorative body. An explanatory diagram showing a modified example of a rear left movable decorative substrate provided on a rear left movable decorative body. An explanatory diagram showing an example of the rear mounting surface of a rear left movable decorative substrate provided on a rear left movable decorative body. 10A and 10B are schematic diagrams showing a portion of a main control board in another example, (A) a schematic diagram showing the mounting state of electronic components on the mounting surface (surface) of the main control board, and (B) a schematic diagram showing through holes and pads on the mounting surface (surface) of the main control board. 359A and 359B are schematic diagrams showing a portion of a main control board in another example, (A) a schematic diagram showing the wiring pattern on the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board, and (B) a schematic diagram showing the wiring pattern on the solder surface (back surface) y of the main control board. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the mounting surface (front surface) of a main control board in another example. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing a function display unit in another example. 1A is a perspective view showing the front surface (surface) of a magnetic sensor substrate, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view showing the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing the mounting surface of a main control board in another example. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing a portion of the mounting surface (front surface) of a main control board in another example. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing a through hole of a main control board in another example. An explanatory diagram showing a functional display substrate in another example, (A) front mounting surface, (B) rear mounting surface, (C) enlarged view of a portion of the rear mounting surface, and (D) enlarged view of a portion of the rear mounting surface. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing the mounting state of a main control board in another example. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing the mounting state of a main control board in another example. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing the mounting state of a main control board in another example. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing the mounting state of a main control board in another example. FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing the mounting state of a main control board in another example. 10A and 10B are explanatory diagrams showing an example of a mounting state of a sensor substrate in a modified example. An explanatory diagram showing an example of the mounting state of the rear left movable decorative substrate in a modified example. 10A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the mounting state of a main control board in a modified example, and FIG. 10B is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the mounting state of a peripheral control board in a modified example. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pattern and a land. 10A and 10B are perspective views showing first and second attacca units of different shapes attached to a game board. 10 is an oblique view showing the first attacker unit and the second attacker unit removed from the game board. FIG. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing the first attacker unit. (a) is an oblique view showing the first forward/backward moving device with the large prize opening door and the second starting opening door transitioned to a closed state, and (b) is an oblique view showing the first forward/backward moving device with the large prize opening door and the second starting opening door transitioned to an open state. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing the second attacker unit. (a) is a front view showing the second forward/backward moving device with the special prize opening door transitioned to a retracted state, and (b) is a front view showing the second forward/backward moving device with the special prize opening door transitioned to an advanced state. (a) is a bottom view of the first advancing/retreating device viewed from the bottom side with the second starting gate door and the large prize gate door transitioned to an advanced state, and (b) is a bottom view of the first advancing/retreating device viewed from the bottom side with the second starting gate door and the large prize gate door transitioned to a retracted state. (a) is a schematic diagram of the first advancing/retreating device viewed from below, showing the second starting gate door and the large prize gate door in the advanced state; (b) is a schematic diagram of the first advancing/retreating device viewed from below, showing the second starting gate door and the large prize gate door in the retracted state; and (c) and (d) are schematic diagrams of the first advancing/retreating device viewed from below, showing the second starting gate door and the large prize gate door in a malfunctioning state. (a) is a schematic diagram of the first advancing/retreating device viewed from below, showing the second starting gate door and the large prize gate door in the advanced state; (b) is a schematic diagram of the first advancing/retreating device viewed from below, showing the second starting gate door and the large prize gate door in the retracted state; and (c) and (d) are schematic diagrams of the first advancing/retreating device viewed from below, showing the second starting gate door and the large prize gate door in a malfunctioning state. 10A to 10D are schematic diagrams showing the underside of the first forward/backward moving device, showing the underside of the large prize entrance door provided with a different type of viewing section. (a) is a partial rear view of a part of the second advancing/retreating device when the special prize entrance door has been transitioned to a retracted state, as viewed from the rear side, and (b) is a partial rear view of a part of the second advancing/retreating device when the special prize entrance door has been transitioned to an advanced state, as viewed from the rear side. (a) is a schematic diagram of the second advancing/retreating device shown from behind, with the prize entrance door in the retracted state, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the second advancing/retreating device shown from behind, with the prize entrance door in the advanced state. (a) is a top view of the first forward/backward moving device when the second starting gate door and the large prize gate door have been transitioned to an advanced state, and (b) is a top view of the first forward/backward moving device when the second starting gate door and the large prize gate door have been transitioned to a retracted state, when viewed from the top. (a) is a schematic diagram of a top view of the first advancing/retreating device showing the second starting gate door and the large prize gate door in the advanced state, (b) is a schematic diagram of a top view of the first advancing/retreating device showing the second starting gate door and the large prize gate door in the retracted state, and (c) and (d) are schematic diagrams of a top view of the first advancing/retreating device showing the second starting gate door and the large prize gate door in a malfunctioning state. (a) is a schematic diagram of a top view of the first advancing/retreating device showing the second starting gate door and the large prize gate door in the advanced state, (b) is a schematic diagram of a top view of the first advancing/retreating device showing the second starting gate door and the large prize gate door in the retracted state, and (c) and (d) are schematic diagrams of a top view of the first advancing/retreating device showing the second starting gate door and the large prize gate door in a malfunctioning state. (a) is a partial rear view of a part of the second forward/backward moving device when the special prize entrance door has been transitioned to a retracted state, as viewed from the rear side, and (b) is a partial rear view of a part of the second forward/backward moving device when the special prize entrance door has been transitioned to an abnormal retracted state, as viewed from the rear side. (a) is a schematic diagram of the second advancing/retreating device shown from behind, with the prize entrance door in the retracted state, and (b) is a schematic diagram of the second advancing/retreating device shown from behind, with the prize entrance door in the advanced state. (a) is a bottom view of the first advancing/retreating device viewed from the bottom side with the second starting gate door and the large prize gate door transitioned to an advanced state, and (b) is a bottom view of the first advancing/retreating device viewed from the bottom side with the second starting gate door and the large prize gate door transitioned to a retracted state. (a) is a schematic diagram of the first advancing/retreating device viewed from below, showing the second starting gate and the large prize gate in the advanced state; (b) is a schematic diagram of the first advancing/retreating device viewed from below, showing the second starting gate and the large prize gate in the retracted state; and (c) is a schematic diagram of the first advancing/retreating device viewed from below, showing the second starting gate and the large prize gate in a malfunctioning state. 10A to 10C are schematic diagrams showing the first forward/backward moving device from below, showing the second starting gate door and the big prize gate door in a malfunctioning state. 10A to 10D are schematic diagrams showing the first forward/backward moving device from below, showing the large prize entrance door in the advanced state. (a) is a partial rear view of a part of the second forward/backward moving device when the special prize entrance door has been transitioned to a retracted state, as viewed from the rear side, and (b) is a partial rear view of a part of the second forward/backward moving device when the special prize entrance door has been transitioned to an abnormal retracted state, as viewed from the rear side. (a) is a partial rear view of a part of the second forward/backward moving device when the special prize entrance door has transitioned to an advanced state, as viewed from the rear side, and (b) is a partial rear view of a part of the second forward/backward moving device when the special prize entrance door has transitioned to an abnormal advanced state, as viewed from the rear side. (A) An enlarged view showing the area surrounding a test point TP formed on the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310, (B) an enlarged view showing a modified example of a test point formed on a ground line, (C) an enlarged view showing an example of a normal land formed on a ground line, and (D) an enlarged view showing the state in which the solder of a test point formed on a ground line has been welded. FIG. 13 is an enlarged view showing a partial area of a mounting surface 1310x of a main control board 1310 in a modified example. 15 is an enlarged view showing a partial area of a surface (mounting surface) 1510x of a peripheral control board 1510 in a modified example. FIG. These are enlarged views showing an example of a test point TP formed on a signal line of a main control board 1310 in a modified example, where Figure 402(A) is an enlarged view showing an example of a test point TP formed on a signal line of the main control board 1310 and having a normal land 1310s that is not used for mounting electronic components, and Figure 402(B) is an enlarged view showing an example of a test point TP formed on a signal line and having a normal pad 1310k that is not used for mounting electronic components. A flowchart showing a modified example of the main control side timer interrupt processing. This is a front view showing a game board with a back front left decorative unit and a back rear lower performance unit attached. This is an exploded oblique view showing the rear left movable decorative body of the rear lower performance unit. (a) is a rear view showing the back of the rear left movable decorative body of the rear lower performance unit, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of A-A in Figure 351(a). An oblique view showing a portion of the back of the rear left movable decorative body of the rear lower performance unit. This is a cross-sectional view taken along line B-B in Figure 351(a). A cross-sectional view of another embodiment of the rear left movable decorative element. 10A to 10C are front views showing an information display device on which information about games is displayed. 1A is a perspective view showing the front side of the information display device, and FIG. 1B is a perspective view showing the rear side of the information display device. This is a cross-sectional view showing the AA cross section of Figure 356(a). An oblique view showing a portion of the front-side back-upper upper movable decorative body and the back-upper upper first decorative substrate removed from the front-side back-upper movable decorative body. An oblique view showing a portion of the front-side back-upper upper movable decorative body and the back-upper first decorative substrate attached to the front-side back-upper upper movable decorative body. (a) to (d) are rear views showing a portion of the front side, rear rear upper movable decorative body. An oblique view showing a portion of the front-side back-upper upper movable decorative body and the back-upper upper first decorative substrate removed from the front-side back-upper movable decorative body. An oblique view showing a portion of the front-side back-upper upper movable decorative body and the back-upper first decorative substrate attached to the front-side back-upper upper movable decorative body. An exploded oblique view showing the rear-upper movable decorative body and the rear-upper first decorative substrate removed from the rear-upper movable decorative body. An exploded oblique view showing the rear upper movable decorative body in which the rear upper first decorative substrate storage section is stored. This is a rear view showing the front side of the rear-rear-upper movable decorative body. (a) to (f) are rear views showing a portion of the front side, rear rear upper movable decorative body. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view showing the main control unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view showing the main control unit. FIG. 10 is a partially enlarged view showing a conventional cover body and a portion of a main control board visible through the cover body. 10 is a rear view showing the cover body and a portion of the main control board visible through the cover body. FIG. 10 is a rear view showing the cover body and a portion of the main control board visible through the cover body. FIG. FIG. 2 is a rear view showing the cover body and the main control board visible through the cover body. 10A to 10G are partially enlarged views showing a part of the cover body on which molding marks are formed. FIG. 2 is a rear view showing the cover body and a portion of the main control board visible through the cover body. 5A and 5B are partially enlarged views showing a cover body and a part of a main control board visible through the cover body. 10A to 10F are explanatory diagrams showing modified examples of the configuration for preventing unauthorized tampering of electronic components. 10G is an explanatory diagram showing a modified example of a configuration for preventing unauthorized tampering of electronic components.

[1. Overall structure of a pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to one embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the right front, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the left front, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the rear. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the right front when the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. Furthermore, FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine as seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. Figure 11 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, as seen from the front, and Figure 12 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, as seen from the back.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 that is installed in an island facility (not shown) in an amusement hall; a door frame 3 that opens and closes the front of the outer frame 2; a main frame 4 that supports the door frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed and is attached to the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed; and a game board 5 that is detachably attached to the main frame 4 from the front and is visible to the player through the door frame 3, and has a game area 5a into which the player shoots a game ball B (see Figure 89).

The outer frame 2 has a rectangular shape that extends vertically when viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 comprises a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 that are spaced apart laterally and extend vertically; an upper outer frame member 30 that connects the upper ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20; a lower outer frame assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20; an upper outer frame hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end of the upper surface of the upper outer frame member 30; and a lower outer frame hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the left end of the upper surface of the lower outer frame assembly 40.

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island equipment of the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and outer frame lower hinge member 60 coaxially support the main frame upper hinge member 510 and main frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4, allowing the main frame 4 to be mounted so that it can be opened and closed forward around the left side when viewed from the front.

In addition, when the door frame 3 and the main frame 4 are closed, the lower outer frame assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main frame 4 to form part of the enclosure 624 for the main frame speaker 622, and by inverting the phase of the sound output to the rear of the main frame speaker 622 and radiating it forward, the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 closes the play area 5a of the play board 5 into which the game balls B are shot so that it can be seen from the front, stores the game balls B to be shot into the play area 5a, and is equipped with a handle 195 that the player operates to shoot the stored game balls B into the play area 5a. The door frame 3 also decorates the entire front of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the door frame 3 is equipped with a performance operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player, separate from the handle 195. When a player-participation performance is executed, the player can participate in the performance by operating the performance operation unit 301, allowing the player to enjoy the game not only with the game ball B, but also by operating the performance operation unit 301.

The main frame 4 comprises a frame-shaped main frame base unit 500 whose rear can be inserted into the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5; an upper main frame hinge member 510 and a lower main frame hinge assembly 520 for opening and closing the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 and for opening and closing the door frame 3; a main frame reinforcing frame 530 that reinforces the main frame base unit 500; a ball launcher 540 for shooting game balls B into the game area 5a of the game board 5; and a game ball supplied from the island equipment of the game hall. It comprises a payout base unit 550 that receives game balls B, a payout unit 560 that pays out the game balls B received by the payout base unit 550 to the player, a board unit 620 that has a power supply board 630 equipped with a power switch 630a that can turn on the power to the pachinko machine 1 as well as a payout control board 633, a back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main frame base 501, and a locking unit 650 that locks the outer frame 2 and main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and main frame 4.

The main frame 4 holds the game board 5, which has a play area 5a where play is carried out by hitting game balls B, and is used to pay out game balls B to the player and eject used game balls B to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (towards the island equipment of the amusement hall). The main frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is removably stored inside from the front. The main frame 4 is openably attached to a frame-shaped outer frame 2, which is attached to the island equipment of the amusement hall, at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front, and a door frame 3 is openably attached to close the open front side.

The game board 5 comprises a game area 5a where the game ball B is thrown by the player, a front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a generally rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a, a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a main control unit attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and having a main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311. The gaming panel 1100 is equipped with a peripheral control unit 1300, a functional display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310, a peripheral control unit 1500 (see Figure 12) located on the rear of the gaming panel 1100, an effect display device 1600 that is located in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and is capable of displaying specified effect images, a front unit 2000 attached to the front of the gaming panel 1100, and a rear unit 3000 attached to the rear of the gaming panel 1100. The rear unit 3000 is equipped with various effect units that are capable of performing movable effects and light-emitting effects depending on the game status.

The game area 5a of the game board 5 is provided with a plurality of obstacle pins N that come into contact with the game ball B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, as well as a general prize opening 2001, a first start opening 2002, a gate 2003, a second start opening 2004, and a special prize opening 2005 that grant a player a predetermined benefit (e.g., the payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) when a game ball B is accepted or passes through them. The obstacle pins N are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100. The general prize opening 2001, the first start opening 2002, the gate 2003, the second start opening 2004, and the special prize opening 2005 are provided in the front unit 2000.

A player can shoot a game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by operating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180. This allows the player to enjoy operating the handle 195 so that the game ball B is accepted into or passes through the general winning opening 2001, first starting opening 2002, gate 2003, second starting opening 2004, and big winning opening 2005, etc., within the game area 5a.

In addition, the game board 5 can entertain players by displaying predetermined effect images on the effect display device 1600 in response to the game state that changes when the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a, and by performing light-emitting effects and moving effects using the back-front effect unit 3100, back-upper effect unit 3200, back-lower effect unit 3300, etc.

[2. Overall structure of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 13 to 18. Figure 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, Figure 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and Figure 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. Figure 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front, and Figure 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the rear. Figure 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame, broken down into its main components, as seen from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in an amusement hall or the like on which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. When viewed from the front, the outer frame 2 is formed into a rectangular frame that extends vertically.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 comprises a left outer frame assembly 10 and a right outer frame assembly 20 that are spaced apart laterally and extend vertically; an upper outer frame member 30 that connects the upper ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20; a lower outer frame assembly 40 that connects the lower ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20; an upper outer frame hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end of the upper surface of the upper outer frame member 30; and a lower outer frame hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the left end of the upper surface of the lower outer frame assembly 40.

When the main frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main frame 4 to form part of the enclosure 624 for the main frame speaker 622, and is able to invert the phase of sound output to the rear of the main frame speaker 622 and radiate it forward.

The outer frame 2 has an upper outer frame hinge assembly 50 that can detachably support the upper main frame hinge member 510 of the main frame 4. The outer frame 2 can coaxially rotatably support the upper main frame hinge member 510 and the lower main frame hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4 using the upper outer frame hinge assembly 50 and the lower outer frame hinge member 60, allowing the main frame 4 to be attached so that it can be opened and closed forward around the left side when viewed from the front.

[2-1. Left outer frame assembly and right outer frame assembly]
The left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figure 19. Figure 19 is an exploded perspective view of the left outer frame assembly and the right outer frame assembly of the outer frame, respectively, as seen from the front. The left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 each extend vertically and are spaced apart from each other on the left and right. The left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20 coaxially support the upper main frame hinge member 510 and the lower main frame hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4 so that they can rotate about the same axis, thereby attaching the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, the left outer frame assembly 10 comprises a left outer frame member 11 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-to-rear direction, an upper-left connecting member 12 attached to the upper end of the right side surface of the left outer frame member 11, and a lower-left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the left outer frame member 11.

The left outer frame member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape and is formed from an extruded aluminum alloy. The left outer frame member 11 has a recess 11a that is flat and recessed to the right in the rear section of the left side surface, which is one of the three equal sections in the front-to-rear direction; a bulge 11b that bulges to the right from the section on the right side surface opposite the recess 11a; and a hollow 11c that runs vertically through the bulge 11b. The recess 11a and bulge 11b increase the strength and rigidity of the left outer frame member 11, while the hollow 11c reduces its weight.

Furthermore, the left outer frame member 11 has multiple grooves extending vertically formed on both the left and right side surfaces. The multiple grooves on the left side surface are V-shaped, while the multiple grooves on the right side surface are semicircular. The left outer frame member 11 is formed in a symmetrical shape to the right outer frame member 21 of the right outer frame assembly 20, which will be described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 connects the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 comprises a flat horizontal fixing portion 12a extending horizontally, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle of the left edge of the horizontal fixing portion 12a in the fore-and-aft direction, and a pair of flat lower horizontal fixing portions 12c extending downward from both the front and rear of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left edge of the horizontal fixing portion 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper left connecting member 12 is attached to the left outer frame member 11 by inserting the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 12c into the hollow portion 11c of the left outer frame member 11, abutting the horizontal fixing portion 12a against the upper end of the left outer frame member 11, and abutting the front and rear lower horizontal fixing portions 12c against the right side of the left outer frame member 11, and then screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side of the left outer frame member 11. The upper left connecting member 12 is also attached to the upper outer frame member 30 by abutting the horizontal fixing portion 12a against the underside of the left end of the upper outer frame member 30, inserting the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b into the cutout portion 30a on the left side of the upper outer frame member 30, and then screwing a screw into the upper outer frame member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and upper horizontal fixing portion 12b.

The lower left connecting member 13 connects the lower end of the left outer frame member 11 to the left end of the lower outer frame assembly 40 (lower outer frame member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 comprises a flat horizontal fixing portion 13a extending horizontally, a flat upper lateral fixing portion 13b extending upward from the left edge of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward beyond the horizontal fixing portion 13a, a flat lower lateral fixing portion 13c extending downward from a position on the lower edge of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b rearward of the horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a flat abutment portion 13d extending shortly to the right from the rear edge of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower left connecting member 13 is attached to the left outer frame member 11 by abutting the rear surface of the abutment portion 13d against the front surface of the bulge portion 11b of the left outer frame member 11, abutting the left surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b against the right surface of the left outer frame member 11, and aligning the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a with the lower end of the left outer frame member 11, and then screwing a screw into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side of the left outer frame member 11. The lower left connecting member 13 is also attached to the lower outer frame member 41 by abutting the horizontal fixing portion 13a against the upper surface of the left end of the lower outer frame member 41, and inserting the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c into the notch 41a on the left side of the lower outer frame member 41, and then screwing a screw into the lower outer frame member 41 through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c.

Next, the right outer frame assembly 20 comprises a right outer frame member 21 that extends vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-to-rear direction, a right upper connecting member 22 attached to the upper end of the left side of the right outer frame member 21, a right lower connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side of the right outer frame member 21, an upper hook member 24 attached to the upper end of the left side of the right outer frame member 21, and a lower hook member 25 attached to the lower end of the left side of the right outer frame member 21.

The right outer frame member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape and is formed from an extruded aluminum alloy. The right outer frame member 21 has a recess 21a that is flat and recessed to the left in the rear portion of the right side surface, which is one of the three equal parts in the front-to-rear direction; a bulge 21b that bulges leftward from the portion of the left side surface opposite recess 21a; and a hollow portion 21c that runs vertically through bulge 21b. The recess 21a and bulge 21b increase the strength and rigidity of the right outer frame member 21, while the hollow portion 21c reduces its weight.

The right outer frame member 21 also has multiple grooves extending vertically on both the left and right side surfaces. The multiple grooves on the right side surface are V-shaped, while the multiple grooves on the left side surface are semicircular. The right outer frame member 21 is formed in a symmetrical shape to the left outer frame member 11 of the left outer frame assembly 10.

The upper right connecting member 22 connects the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 comprises a flat horizontal fixing portion 22a extending horizontally, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle of the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a in the fore-and-aft direction, and a pair of flat lower horizontal fixing portions 22c extending downward from both the front and rear of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The upper right connecting member 22 is attached to the right outer frame member 21 by inserting the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 22c into the hollow portion 21c of the right outer frame member 21, abutting the horizontal fixing portion 22a against the upper end of the right outer frame member 21, and abutting the front and rear lower horizontal fixing portions 22c against the left side of the right outer frame member 21, and then screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side of the right outer frame member 21. The upper right connecting member 22 is also attached to the upper outer frame member 30 by abutting the horizontal fixing portion 22a against the underside of the right end of the upper outer frame member 30, inserting the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b into the notch 30a on the right side of the upper outer frame member 30, and then screwing a screw into the upper outer frame member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b.

The lower right connecting member 23 connects the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 to the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (lower outer frame member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 comprises a flat horizontal fixing portion 23a extending horizontally, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 23b extending upward from the right edge of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward beyond the horizontal fixing portion 23a, a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from a position on the lower edge of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b rearward of the horizontal fixing portion 23a, and a flat abutment portion 23d extending a short distance to the left from the rear edge of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

The lower right connecting member 23 is attached to the right outer frame member 21 by screwing a screw into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side of the right outer frame member 21, with the rear surface of the abutment portion 23d abutting against the front surface of the bulge portion 21b of the right outer frame member 21, the right side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b abutting against the left side of the right outer frame member 21, and aligning the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a with the lower end of the right outer frame member 21. The lower right connecting member 23 is also attached to the lower outer frame member 41 by screwing a screw into the lower outer frame member 41 through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c with the upper surface of the right end of the lower outer frame member 41 abutting against the upper surface of the right end of the lower outer frame member 41 and inserting the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c into the notch 41a on the right side of the lower outer frame member 41.

The upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 hook onto the outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main frame 4 (described below). The upper hook member 24 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-to-rear direction and includes a flat mounting portion 24a that is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and a flat hook piece 24b that extends leftward from the front edge of the mounting portion 24a and onto which the upper outer frame hook 653 hooks.

The lower hook member 25 has a flat mounting portion 25a that extends vertically with a constant width in the front-to-rear direction and is attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21; a flat hooking piece 25b that extends leftward from the front edge of the mounting portion 25a and into which the lower outer frame hook 653 is attached; and an insertion opening 25c that passes through the hooking piece 25b in the front-to-rear direction and through which the lower outer frame hook 653 can be inserted.

[2-2. Upper outer frame member]
The upper outer frame member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figure 18. The upper outer frame member 30 connects the upper ends of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the right outer frame assembly 20, which are spaced apart laterally. The upper outer frame member 30 has a width in the front-to-rear direction that is approximately the same as the width of the left outer frame member 11 and the right outer frame member 21 in the front-to-rear direction, a constant thickness in the up-down direction, extends in the left-to-right direction, and is made of wood. The upper outer frame member 30 is formed so that its length in the left-to-right direction is the same as the length in the left-to-right direction of the lower outer frame member 41 of the lower outer frame assembly 40, which will be described later.

The upper outer frame member 30 has cutouts 30a at the center of the front-to-rear direction on both the left and right sides, which penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-to-right direction. The upper horizontal fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are inserted into these cutouts 30a on both ends.

The upper outer frame member 30 also has a mounting step 30b at its left end, with the top and front surfaces recessed from the general surface. The upper outer frame hinge assembly 50, described below, is attached to this mounting step 30b.

[2-3. Lower outer frame assembly]
The lower frame assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figure 20. Figure 20 is an exploded perspective view of the lower frame assembly of the outer frame, viewed from the front. The lower frame assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the left and right frame assemblies 10 and 20, which are spaced apart on the left and right, and serves to close off and decorate the area below the door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1.

The lower frame assembly 40 comprises a lower frame member 41 that extends laterally and connects the lower ends of the left and right outer frame assemblies 10 and 20, which are spaced apart laterally; a box-shaped front panel member 42 that is positioned in front of the lower frame member 41, extends laterally along the lower frame member 41, and is open at the rear; a box-shaped rear panel member 43 that is attached to the rear side of the front panel member 42 and to the top surface of the lower frame member 41, extends laterally, and is open at the front; and a ball-jamming prevention mechanism 44 formed at the left end of the top surface of the rear panel member 43.

The lower outer frame member 41 has a width in the front-to-rear direction that is approximately the same as the width of the left outer frame member 11 and the right outer frame member 21 in the front-to-rear direction, a constant thickness in the up-down direction, extends in the left-to-right direction, and is made of wood. The lower outer frame member 41 is formed so that its length in the left-to-right direction is the same as the length of the upper outer frame member 30 in the left-to-right direction.

The lower outer frame member 41 has cutouts 41a at the center of the front-to-rear direction on both the left and right sides, which penetrate vertically and are recessed toward the center in the left-to-right direction. The lower horizontal fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are inserted into these cutouts 41a on both ends. This allows the lower ends of the left outer frame member 11 and the right outer frame member 21 to be connected to each other.

The outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the top surface and has a recess 41b into which the lower part of the back panel member 43 is inserted. The recess 41b extends left and right and extends from a position toward the rear of the center in the front-to-rear direction to the front end. This recess 41b maximizes the volume of the back panel internal space 40a formed by the front panel member 42 and the back panel member 43.

The front panel member 42 has the same left-right length as the outer frame lower member 41 and is formed like a horizontally long rectangular box with a short front-to-back depth relative to its height, with the entire rear side open. The open rear side of the front panel member 42 is closed by the rear panel member 43, which cooperates with the rear panel member 43 to form the front panel internal space 40a that forms part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622. The front panel member 42 has a long hole-shaped opening 42a on the front surface near the right end that penetrates from front to back and extends left to right.

The rear panel member 43 has a length in the left-right direction slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41 and is box-shaped with an open front. By attaching the front panel member 42 to its front surface, the rear panel member 43 cooperates with the front panel member 42 to form the panel internal space 40a, which is part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622. The rear panel member 43 has a cylindrical connecting tube portion 43a in the center of the left-right direction on its top surface, which extends left and right and protrudes upward, communicating with the panel internal space 40a. The connecting tube portion 43a is inclined so that its upper end is positioned higher from the front end, which is flush with the general top surface of the rear panel member 43, toward the rear. In this embodiment, the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a is inclined at a 45-degree angle.

The connecting tube portion 43a has a length in the left-right direction that is approximately one-third the length of the entire rear header panel member 43, and a depth in the front-to-rear direction that is slightly shorter than the depth of the entire rear header panel member 43. The connecting tube portion 43a is provided with multiple ribs 43b that connect the front and rear ends. When the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a is connected to the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main frame 4, thereby communicating with the internal space of the speaker unit 620a and forming an enclosure 624.

The ball jamming prevention mechanism 44 prevents the game ball B from becoming trapped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 by retaining the game ball B at the left end of the top surface of the rear panel member 43, in the area of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

The ball jam prevention mechanism 44 is formed on the left end of the top surface of the rear panel member 43 and includes a flat mounting portion 44a that is designed to accommodate the lower outer frame hinge member 60 (described below), a first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of the mounting portion 44a, a second discharge port 44c that opens upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b on the mounting portion 44a, a standing wall portion 44d that extends upward from the rear and right sides of the mounting portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion 44e that protrudes forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and is sloped so that its upper surface is positioned upward as it extends rearward.

The first discharge opening 44b is formed in a position that coincides with the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later. The first discharge opening 44b and the second discharge opening 44c are formed to a size that allows game balls B to pass through. The first discharge opening 44b and the second discharge opening 44c do not communicate with the panel internal space 40a, but open to the rear surface of the panel rear member 43. Therefore, game balls B that enter the first discharge opening 44b and the second discharge opening 44c can be discharged to the rear of the panel rear member 43.

If an unauthorized tool such as piano wire is inserted through the gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 (described below), the ball-jamming prevention mechanism 44 can prevent the unauthorized tool from entering by using the upright wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a. Even if the tip of the unauthorized tool abuts against the upright wall portion 44d and bends upward, it will abut against the upper end protrusion 44e that protrudes forward from the upper end of the upright wall portion 44d, preventing further entry. This prevents unauthorized activity from being carried out through the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

However, if the rear end of the mounting portion 44a is provided with a standing wall portion 44d, when the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, if a game ball B falls onto the mounting portion 44a for some reason, the standing wall portion 44d will prevent it from moving rearward from the outer frame 2, making it easier for the game ball B to remain on the mounting portion 44a. If a game ball B remains on the mounting portion 44a, the game ball B will become trapped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 when the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2, causing the main frame 4 to be unable to close.

In contrast, the ball jamming prevention mechanism 44 of this embodiment allows game balls B that have fallen onto the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the mounting portion 44a to be discharged to the rear of the curtain board rear member 43 (rear of the outer frame 2) through the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first discharge outlet 44b, or through the second discharge outlet 44c, thereby preventing game balls B from becoming trapped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4.

The lower outer frame assembly 40 comprises a pair of guide members 45 arranged spaced apart on the left and right sides of the upper surfaces of the front panel member 42 and the rear panel member 43; a flat grill member 46 that closes the opening 42a of the front panel member 42 from the rear; a port member 47 with two cylinders extending forward and backward and attached to the inside of the front panel member 42 so as to sandwich the grill member 46 and close the opening 42a; and a frame-shaped seal member 48 that is arranged at the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43.

The pair of guide members 45 are against which the lower end of the door frame 3 abuts when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2. The guide members 45 are made of a low-friction material, which allows the lower end of the main frame 4 to slide easily, making opening and closing easier.

The grill member 46 is a strip-like member extending in the left-right direction and has multiple blades 46b spaced apart in the up-down direction. The blades 46b are inclined so that their front ends are higher than their rear ends (see Figure 47). This grill member 46 allows ventilation between the interior of the front panel member 42 (the panel internal space 40a) and the outside through the gaps between the blades 46b.

The port member 47 uses two cylinders to connect the interior space 40a of the panel (enclosure 624) to the front of the outer frame 2 via the gap between the blades 46b of the grill member 46. The port member 47 is made up of two cylinders with a specified inner diameter and length, and uses the principle of Helmholtz resonance to resonate and amplify the bass sounds emitted rearward (inside the enclosure 624) from the main frame speaker 622, radiating rich bass sounds forward (toward the player) of the outer frame 2. In other words, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, allowing players to hear deep bass sounds.

When the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, the sealing member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a and the lower end of the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 on the main frame 4, preventing sound from leaking from inside the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 between the connecting tube portion 43a and the connecting portion 621c.

The grill member 46 of this embodiment allows the inclined blades 46b to direct air vibrations emitted from the main frame speaker 622 to the outside from the panel interior space 40a, through the notched opening 295b on the lower side of the handle cover 295 of the handle cover unit 290 diagonally upward and forward, into the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 housing the handle unit 180. As a result, when a player inserts their fingers inside the handle cover 295 (front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) and rotates the handle 195 (the device for striking the game ball B), the main frame speaker 622 vibrates, blowing air into the front tube portion 291a, surprising the player and providing an unprecedented performance.

Furthermore, because the port member 47 opens forward, a portion of the sound pressure emitted from the port member 47 through the multiple blades 46b of the grill member 46 is released forward. As a result, the sound effects emitted from the port member 47 can be heard by players seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and other players wandering around the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. This sound effect also attracts the attention of players, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

Furthermore, since the port member 47 is provided in the lower outer frame assembly 40 of the outer frame 2, the volume of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622, which is provided in the main frame 4, can be increased, allowing for the output of a deeper bass sound effect, which entertains the player and prevents a decline in interest.

[2-4. Outer frame upper hinge assembly]
The upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figure 21. Figure 21(a) is an exploded perspective view of the upper hinge assembly of the outer frame when viewed from above the front, and Figure 21(b) is an exploded perspective view of Figure 21(a) when viewed from below the front. The upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the left outer frame assembly 10 and the left end of the upper outer frame member 30, and is used to attach the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that it can rotate about a hinge. The upper hinge assembly 50 includes an upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the left outer frame member 11 and the mounting step 30b of the upper outer frame member 30, a locking member 52 attached to the upper hinge member 51, and a mounting screw 53 that attaches the locking member 52 to the upper hinge member 51.

The upper outer frame hinge member 51 comprises a horizontally extending, flat upper fixing portion 51a attached to the upper surface of the mounting step 30b of the upper outer frame member 30; a flat forward extension portion 51b extending forward from the front edge of the upper fixing portion 51a; a bearing groove 51c extending forward from the middle of the right edge of the forward extension portion 51b to the center of the forward extension portion 51b and penetrating it vertically; a flat horizontal fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left edge of the upper fixing portion 51a; and a flat edge wall portion 51e extending downward from the edge of the forward extension portion 51b from the left edge around the front edge to the opening of the bearing groove 51c and continuing to the horizontal fixing portion 51d. The upper outer frame hinge member 51 is formed by stamping and bending a metal plate using a press molding process. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 (described below) of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 within the bearing groove 51c.

The locking member 52 comprises a strip-shaped locking body 52a extending forward and backward, an operating piece 52b protruding to the right from the rear end of the locking body 52a, a resiliently deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 52c extending left from the rear end of the locking body 52a and then diagonally forward and left, and a mounting hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the locking body 52a. The locking member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The locking member 52 is rotatably attached by mounting screws 53 to the underside of the forward extension portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51, at a position rearward of the bearing groove 51c.

When the locking member 52 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51, the locking body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and extends forward so that the right side surface near the front end can abut against the portion of the edge wall portion 51e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Furthermore, the tip of the elastic portion 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the locking body 52a abuts against the inner circumferential surface of the edge wall portion 51e of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The biasing force of the elastic portion 52c biases the locking member 52 in a direction that causes the front end to rotate leftward around the mounting hole 52d. Therefore, under normal conditions, the right side surface near the front end of the locking body 52a of the locking member 52 abuts against the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space capable of accommodating the upper body frame hinge pin 512 of the upper body frame hinge member 510 is formed in the bearing groove 51c in a position forward of the lock body 52a.

By operating the operating piece 52b of this locking member 52, the locking body 52a can be rotated against the biasing force of the elastic portion 52c. By operating the operating piece 52b, the locking body 52a can be rotated in a direction that moves its front end to the left, thereby retracting the locking body 52a from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, thereby fully opening the bearing groove 51c. This allows the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 to be inserted into or removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Lower outer frame hinge member]
The lower outer frame hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figure 18. The lower outer frame hinge member 60 has a flat horizontal portion 60a extending horizontally, a flat raised portion 60b rising upward from a position on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a rearward of the center in the front-to-rear direction, a lower outer frame hinge pin 60c protruding upward from near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d that penetrates the horizontal portion 60a from top to bottom and is large enough to allow the passage of only one game ball B. This lower outer frame hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate using press molding.

In plan view, the horizontal portion 60a of the lower outer frame hinge member 60 is trapezoidal, with the left edge as the base. The lower outer frame hinge pin 60c is cylindrical and has a truncated cone shape with a narrowed top above the vertical center. This lower outer frame hinge pin 60c is attached to the left near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so that it contacts the center of the rising portion 60b in the front-to-rear direction and extends in an inverted U shape from the left edge of the horizontal portion 60a to the right. This discharge hole 60d is formed to be approximately the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball jamming prevention mechanism 44 in the lower outer frame assembly 40.

When assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear of the horizontal section 60a of the lower outer frame hinge member 60 rests on the mounting section 44a of the rear header panel member 43 of the lower outer frame assembly 40 and is fixed to the rear header panel member 43 with screws (not shown). The raised section 60b is also attached with screws (not shown) to a position forward of the bulge section 11b on the right side of the left outer frame member 11. By inserting the lower outer frame hinge pin 60c into the lower outer frame hinge hole 521a in the lower main frame hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4, the lower outer frame hinge member 60 can cooperate with the upper outer frame hinge member 51 to attach the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

Furthermore, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60d is aligned with the first discharge opening 44b of the ball jamming prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. This allows the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a to fall (discharge) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge opening 44b. In more detail, when the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that falls between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 rolls toward the rear where the gap is wider, as the gap between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 gradually narrows as the main frame 4 is closed, allowing it to be discharged through the discharge hole 60d. In this case, when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2 while assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the discharge hole 60d is formed in a position that is approximately flush with the rear end of the main frame 4. Therefore, game balls B that fall between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4 can be easily prevented from rolling rearward beyond the main frame 4 by being discharged through the discharge hole 60d, making it less likely that game balls B will become trapped in the area of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall structure of the door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 22 to 30. Figure 22 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, Figure 23 is a rear view of the door frame, Figure 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and Figure 25 is a right side view of the door frame. Figure 26 is a perspective view of the door frame as seen from the front right, Figure 27 is a perspective view of the door frame as seen from the front left, and Figure 28 is a perspective view of the door frame as seen from the rear. Figure 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into its main components as seen from the front, and Figure 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled into its main components as seen from the rear.

The door frame 3 is formed in a rectangular shape that extends vertically when viewed from the front, and is roughly the same size as the interior of the outer frame 2. It is attached to the interior of the outer frame 2 via the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed from the front. The door frame 3 closes the play area 5a of the play board 5 into which game balls B are dropped so that it is visible from the front, stores game balls B to be dropped into the play area 5a, and is equipped with a handle 195 that the player operates to shoot the stored game balls B into the play area 5a. The door frame 3 also decorates the entire front of the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame 3 comprises a door frame base unit 100, which has a rectangular, frame-like shape extending vertically when viewed from the front; a glass unit 160 that is removably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and closes the playing area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main frame 4 so that it can be seen from the front; a security cover 170 that is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear; a handle unit 180 that is attached to the lower right corner of the front of the door frame base unit 100; and a handle that covers the outer periphery of the handle unit 180. It comprises a cover unit 290, a tray unit 200 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100, a left side unit 420 attached to the left front of the door frame base unit 100 above the tray unit 200, a right side unit 430 attached to the right front of the door frame base unit 100 above the tray unit, and a top unit 450 attached to the upper front of the door frame base unit 100 above the left side unit 420 and right side unit 430.

The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a vertically elongated quadrilateral (rectangle) exterior shape in front view and a door window 101a that runs through from front to back; a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear of the door frame base 101 in the lower right corner as viewed from the rear; a main relay board 104 attached to the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 near the right edge as viewed from the rear; a sub-relay board 105 attached to the left of the main relay board 104 as viewed from the rear; a rear-handle relay board 106 attached to the left of the sub-relay board 105 as viewed from the rear; a relay board cover 107 that covers the main relay board 104 and part of the sub-relay board 105 from the rear; a rear-handle relay board cover 108 that covers the rear-handle relay board 106; and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable.

The door frame base unit 100 also includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, an upper door frame hinge assembly 120 and a lower door frame hinge member 125 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the rear handle relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 on the right side when viewed from behind.

The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce and rigidify the door frame base 101. The upper door frame hinge assembly 120 and lower door frame hinge member 125 are used to attach the door frame 3 to the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed. The cylinder lock 130 works in conjunction with the locking unit 650 of the main frame 4 to lock and open the door frame 3 and main frame 4, and to lock and open the outer frame 2 and main frame 4.

The ball feeding unit 140 is used to supply game balls B in the upper tray 201 one by one to the ball launcher 540 on the main frame 4. The foul cover unit 150 is used to guide game balls B (foul balls) that are launched by the ball launcher 540 but do not reach the play area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202, and to guide game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202.

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear. The handle unit 180 has a handle 195 that can be rotated by the player, and by operating the handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer periphery of the handle unit 180, the game is played by shooting the game ball B in the upper tray 201 into the game area 5a of the game board 5 using the ball launcher 540.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. Figure 31(a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as seen from the front, and Figure 31(b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. Figure 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components as seen from the front, and Figure 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled into its main components as seen from the rear.

The door frame base unit 100 is hingedly attached to the main frame 4 on its left side when viewed from the front, allowing it to open and close the front of the main frame 4 and making the playing area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main frame 4 visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 comprises a flat, rectangular door frame base 101 with an elongated vertical outline, and a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear of the door frame base 101 in the lower right corner when viewed from behind.

The door frame base unit 100 also includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached to the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 near the right edge when viewed from behind; a door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left of the door frame main relay board 104 when viewed from behind at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101; a handle rear relay board 106 attached to the left of the handle rear relay board 105 when viewed from behind at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101; a handle rear relay board cover 107 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the handle main relay board 104 and part of the handle rear relay board 105 from the rear; a handle rear relay board cover 108 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the handle rear relay board 106 from the rear; and a cable cover 109 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the wiring cable.

The door frame base unit 100 further comprises a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, an upper door frame hinge assembly 120 and a lower door frame hinge member 125 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a ball feeding unit 140 attached above the rear handle relay board 106 on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a foul cover unit 150 attached to the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 on the right side when viewed from behind.

This door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 and a handle cover unit 290 attached to the lower front corners, a tray unit 200 attached to the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 420 attached to the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame right side unit 430 attached to the right outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door frame top unit 450 attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

In addition, a glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 has a square (rectangle) outer shape extending vertically in a front view. The door frame base 101 is provided with a door window 101a that penetrates from front to back and has an inner periphery that is approximately square and extends vertically in a front view. The upper and left and right sides of the door window 101a that form the inner periphery are respectively close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, and the lower side that forms the inner periphery is located approximately one-third of the height in the vertical direction from the bottom end of the door frame base 101. In this way, the door frame base 101 is formed into a frame shape as a whole by the door window 101a that penetrates from front to back. The door frame base 101 is integrally molded from synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 is provided with a handle mounting surface 101b (see Figure 42, etc.) formed in the lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front and inclined so that the left end protrudes slightly forward more than the right end; a cylinder insertion hole 101d that penetrates front to back between the handle mounting surface 101b and the door window 101a and into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 is inserted; and a ball feed opening 101e that penetrates front to back on the left side of the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting surface 101b when viewed from the front, allowing the entrance opening 141a and ball removal opening 141b of the ball feed unit 140 to be seen forward.

The door frame base 101 also has a lower tray ball passage port 101f that penetrates front to back, located to the left of the center in the left-right direction and at approximately the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and exposes the ball discharge port 150d of the fall cover unit 150 to the front; an upper tray ball passage port 101g that penetrates front to front adjacent to the lower edge of the door window 101a near the left end when viewed from the front, and exposes the through ball passage 150a of the fall cover unit 150 to the front; and a glass unit mounting portion 101h that is recessed from the rear to the front along the inner periphery of the door window 101a, and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

The door frame base 101 also has multiple vertical slits 101i formed in the lower left corner when viewed from the front (below the ball passage opening 101g for the upper tray) that run from front to back. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear of the multiple slits 101i. When the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the multiple slits 101i have the speaker opening 211b of the tray unit base 211 of the tray unit 200 located in front of them, and the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 located behind them, allowing sound from the main body frame speaker 622 to be emitted forward.

Furthermore, the door frame base 101 has a through-hole 101j that penetrates from front to back below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting surface 101b. This through-hole 101j is for inserting a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame base unit 100 side and the tray unit 200 side, and is formed to match the through-hole 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, which will be described later.

[3-1b. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. This speaker duct 103 is formed in a cylindrical shape and is attached to a portion of the rear side of the door frame base 101 where multiple slits 101i are formed. When the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the rear end of the cylindrical portion of the speaker duct 103 is located in front of the main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4. This allows sound radiated (output) from the main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4 to be guided forward without being diffused, and can be effectively guided to the front of the pachinko machine 1 (toward the player) through the multiple slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the speaker port 211b in the plate unit base 211 of the plate unit 200.

The speaker duct 103 also has a cable holder 103a on the rear surface below the cylindrical section that holds the connection cable 503. The cable holder 103a is located to the left of the door frame relay board cover 107 when viewed from the front, and holds the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and door frame sub-relay board 105 so that it extends to the left end of the door frame 3.

[3-1c. Door frame main relay board, door frame sub relay board, handle rear relay board]
The door frame main relay board 104, door frame sub-relay board 105, and handle rear relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 32 and 33. The door frame main relay board 104 has a rectangular shape that extends vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear lower part of the door frame base 101 when viewed from behind. The door frame main relay board 104 serves to relay the connection between the handle rear relay board 106 and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and is connected to a portion of the connection cable 503 (see Figures 82 and 83) extending from the main body frame 4.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 has an inverted L-shaped exterior, with a vertically extending rectangle joined to the right of the upper part of the rectangle when viewed from the front. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so that the vertically extending portion is adjacent to the left of the door frame main relay board 104 when viewed from the rear. The door frame sub-relay board 105 relays connections between the interface board 635 of the main frame 4 and the handle decorative board 184 of the handle unit 180, the tray unit relay board 214 of the tray unit 200, the upper left-side decorative board 422 and lower left-side decorative board 423 of the left-side unit 420, the upper right-side decorative board 432 and lower right-side decorative board 433 of the right-side unit 430, and the door frame top relay board of the top unit 450. The remainder of the connection cable 503 extending from the main frame 4 is connected to this board.

The door frame main relay board 104 and door frame sub-relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals protrude rearward. When the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the rear sides of the door frame main relay board 104 and the parts extending up and down of the door frame main relay board 104 and door frame sub-relay board 105 are covered by the door frame relay board cover 107, and the rear side of the remaining part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered by the fall cover unit 150.

The rear handle relay board 106 has a rectangular outer shape that extends left and right, and is attached to the rear of the handle mounting surface 101b below the ball feed opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The rear handle relay board 106 relays the connection between the door frame main relay board 104 and the handle rotation detection sensor 189, handle touch sensor 192, single button operation sensor 194 of the handle unit 180, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. When the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the rear side of the rear handle relay board 106 is covered by the rear handle relay board cover 108.

[3-1d. Door frame relay board cover, handle rear relay board cover, cable cover]
The frame relay board cover 107, the handle rear relay board cover 108, and the cable cover 109 of the frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The frame relay board cover 107 is attached to the rear of the frame base 101 to cover the rear sides of the frame main relay board 104 and part of the frame sub-relay board 105 (the inverted L-shaped portions extending up and down). The frame relay board cover 107 is box-shaped and open on the front and left sides when viewed from the front. When assembled to the frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the frame main relay board 104 and the frame sub-relay board 105, which cover the rear sides, are exposed inside the frame relay board cover 107, and a connection cable 503 can be inserted into the open left side and connected to these terminals.

The handle rear relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear of the handle rear relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear of the intermediate reinforcement frame 114 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and is intended to cover the wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball dispensing operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape that extends left and right, and has openings near the left end of the front surface and in the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction for passing the wiring cable through.

[3-1e. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcement unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat door frame base 101 and provide rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcement unit 110 comprises a left reinforcement frame 111 and a right reinforcement frame 112 which extend vertically and are arranged at a distance from each other on the left and right, an upper reinforcement frame 113 which extends horizontally and connects the upper ends of the left reinforcement frame 111 and the right reinforcement frame 112, an intermediate reinforcement frame 114 whose left end is attached at a position above the lower end of the left reinforcement frame 111 and extends to the right near the right reinforcement frame 112, a cylinder mounting frame 115 which connects the right end of the intermediate reinforcement frame 114 to the right reinforcement frame 112, and multiple hook hook members 116 which are attached at a distance from each other on the rear side of the right reinforcement frame 112 on the left and right sides and on which door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 of the main frame 4 are hooked.

The left reinforcement frame 111 and right reinforcement frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction and extend vertically for a length approximately equal to the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcement frame 112 has multiple insertion holes that are spaced apart in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-to-rear direction. The tips of the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650 are inserted into these insertion holes when the door frame 3 is closed against the main frame 4. The upper reinforcement frame 113 has a constant width in the up-down direction and extends horizontally for a length approximately equal to the left-to-right width of the door frame base 101.

The intermediate reinforcement frame 114 extends left and right with a width wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcement frame 113. The intermediate reinforcement frame 114 has a square cutout 114a cut downward from the top near the left end, and a through-hole 114b that penetrates from front to back near the right end. The cutout 114a is formed in a position that coincides with the upper tray ball passage port 101g of the door frame base 101, and the through-hole 114b is formed in a position that coincides with the through-hole 101j of the door frame base 101.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 comprises a pair of rear pieces arranged laterally and spaced apart, each formed as a rectangular flat plate extending up and down in front view; a pair of side pieces extending forward in a flat plate shape from each of the opposing edges of the pair of rear pieces; and a flat front piece connecting the front end edges of the pair of forward extending pieces. This cylinder mounting frame 115 has a convex shape that protrudes forward in plan view. The left rear piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 is attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, and the right rear piece is attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of this cylinder mounting frame 115.

The hook members 116 are attached to the rear side of the right reinforcement frame 112 in the areas of the insertion holes that penetrate from front to back. These hook members 116 are hooked by the door frame hooks 652 of the locking unit 650.

The left reinforcement frame 111, right reinforcement frame 112, upper reinforcement frame 113, middle reinforcement frame 114, cylinder mounting frame 115, and hook member 116 that make up the door frame reinforcement unit 110 are formed by stamping and bending metal plates using a press molding process. They are assembled with rivets.

The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is composed of a left reinforcement frame 111, a right reinforcement frame 112, and an upper reinforcement frame 113 assembled along the left, right, and upper edges of the door frame base 101, and an intermediate reinforcement frame 114 assembled so as to be positioned below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 with multiple screws (not shown). When this door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the cutout 114a and through-hole 114b of the intermediate reinforcement frame 114 are aligned with the upper tray ball passage opening 101g and through-hole 101j of the door frame base 101, and the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the cylinder insertion hole 101d of the door frame base 101.

[3-1f. Door frame upper hinge assembly]
The upper door-frame hinge assembly 120 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The upper door-frame hinge assembly 120 is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 when viewed from the front. The upper door-frame hinge assembly 120 is used to attach the door frame 3 to the main frame 4 so that the door frame 3 can rotate about a hinge in cooperation with the lower door-frame hinge member 125. The upper door-frame hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a upper door-frame hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, a flange member 123 attached to the upper door-frame hinge pin 122, and a lock spring 124 that biases the upper door-frame hinge pin 122 to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 has a flat mounting piece 121a that is rectangular when viewed from the front, and flat protruding pieces 121b that extend forward from the upper and lower edges of the mounting piece 121a. The mounting piece 121a of the hinge bracket 121 is attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The upper door frame hinge pin 122 is a cylindrical metal rod bent into an L-shape. When assembled into the upper door frame hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 penetrates from below near the front ends of a pair of protruding pieces 121b on the hinge bracket 121, with the upper end extending upward beyond the upper protruding piece 121b, and the horizontally extending portion abutting the underside of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the upper door frame hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511 of the upper main frame hinge member 510 of the main frame 4.

The flange member 123 is an E-ring and is attached to the upper door frame hinge pin 122 at a location between the pair of protruding pieces 121b. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape and is placed around the portion of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 that extends vertically between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 biases the upper door frame hinge pin 122 upward via the flange member 123.

In the upper door frame hinge assembly 120, the upper door frame hinge pin 122 is biased upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 abuts against the underside of the lower protruding piece 121b, restricting further upward movement. In this state, the upper end of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 protrudes a predetermined amount above the top surface of the upper protruding piece 121b.

When the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the upper door-frame hinge pin 122 of the upper door-frame hinge assembly 120 is moved downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 124, the entire upper door-frame hinge pin 122 can be moved downward, and the upper end of the upper door-frame hinge pin 122 can be retracted below the upper surface of the upper protrusion 121b. Therefore, the upper end of the upper door-frame hinge pin 122 of the upper door-frame hinge assembly 120 can be inserted from below into the upper door-frame hinge hole 511a of the upper main-frame hinge member 510, and removed downward. By inserting the upper end of the upper door-frame hinge pin 122 into the upper door-frame hinge hole 511a of the upper main-frame hinge member 510, the upper left end of the door frame 3 in front view can be supported so as to be hinged and rotatable relative to the main frame 4.

In addition, the upper door frame hinge assembly 120 has a vertically extending portion of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 positioned coaxially with the lower door frame hinge pin 126 of the lower door frame hinge member 125 (described below). This allows the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 to hinge rotate the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4 in a favorable condition.

[3-1g. Door frame bottom hinge member]
The lower door frame hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 31 to 33. The lower door frame hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 when viewed from the front. The lower door frame hinge member 125 cooperates with the upper door frame hinge assembly 120 to attach the door frame 3 to the main frame 4 so that the door frame 3 can rotate about the hinge.

The lower door frame hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110 and comprises a flat mounting piece 125a that is rectangular in front view, a flat protruding piece 125b that extends forward from the lower edge of the mounting piece 125a, and a lower door frame hinge pin 126 (see Figure 22, etc.) that protrudes downward from the underside near the front end of the protruding piece 125b.

The mounting piece 125a and protruding piece 125b of the lower door frame hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The lower door frame hinge pin 126 is a cylindrical metal rod with a tapered chamfer on the outer periphery of its lower end. When assembled to the door frame base unit 100, this lower door frame hinge pin 126 is attached to a portion of the protruding piece 125b that is coaxial with the portion of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 of the upper door frame hinge assembly 120 that extends vertically.

This door frame lower hinge member 125 can support the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4 so that the door frame can rotate along the hinge by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame lower hinge hole 522a of the main frame lower hinge assembly 520.

[3-1h. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 34 to 36. Figure 34(a) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of the door frame as seen from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) as seen from the rear-front, (c) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock in a conventional pachinko machine as seen from the front, and (d) is a perspective view of the cylinder lock of (a) as seen from the rear. Figure 35(a) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of Figure 34(a) as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the cylinder lock of Figure 34(a) as seen from the rear. Figure 36(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the movable mechanism of the cylinder lock of Figure 34(a) from the front, (b) is an explanatory diagram of the cylinder lock rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the state of (a), and (c) is an explanatory diagram of the cylinder lock rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the state of (a).

The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 and works in conjunction with the locking unit 650 of the main frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and main frame 4, and to lock and open the outer frame 2 and main frame 4. The cylinder lock 130 comprises a cylindrical cylinder body 131 that extends forward and backward, a keyhole 132 formed in the front end face of the cylinder body 131, and a rotation transmission member 133 located at the rear of the cylinder body 131 that rotates when a regular key inserted in the keyhole 132 is rotated.

The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear, with its rear end attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member 133 is cylindrical (more specifically, a conical cylinder with a diameter that increases toward the rear) with an open rear, and has a pair of notches cut from the rear end toward the front at opposing positions across the central axis. The rotation transmission member 133 is configured so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 can be inserted from the rear; by inserting the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 into the pair of notches, the rotation of the rotation transmission member 133 (the key inserted in the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654, causing it to rotate.

More specifically, the cylinder lock 130 comprises a first cam member 134 located at the rear end of the cylinder body 131 and which rotates when a genuine key inserted in the keyhole 132 is rotated; a second cam member 135 which is rotatably attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 below the cylinder body 131 around an axis in the front-to-rear direction; a strip-shaped first arm 136 which has its upper end rotatably attached to the first cam member 134 at a position to the right of the center of rotation and its lower end rotatably attached to the second cam member 135 at a position to the right of the center of rotation; and a strip-shaped second arm 137 which has its upper end rotatably attached to the first cam member 134 below the center of rotation and its lower end rotatably attached to the second cam member 135 below the center of rotation.

The cylinder lock 130 also includes a rear cover 138 attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 so as to cover the cylinder body 131, first cam member 134, first arm 136, and second arm 137 from the rear, excluding the second cam member 135 (rotation transmission member 133), and rivets 139 that attach the upper and lower ends of each of the first arm 136 and second arm 137 to the first cam member 134 and second cam member 135, respectively, so that they can rotate.

The first cam member 134 has the upper end of the first arm 136 attached to the rear side, and the upper end of the second arm 137 attached to the front side. The second cam member 135 is rotatably attached from the rear side by the cylinder mounting frame 115, and a rotation transmission member 133 is attached to the rear side of the front side of the cylinder mounting frame 115 so as to be rotatable integrally with it. The second cam member 135 has the lower end of the first arm 136 attached to the front side, and the lower end of the second arm 137 attached to the front side, forward of the first arm 136.

For each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, the portion where the first arm 136 is attached and the portion where the second arm 137 is attached are separated by a 90-degree angle around the respective rotation axes. Furthermore, for each of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, the portion where the first arm 136 is attached is located farther from the center of rotation than the portion where the second arm 137 is attached.

The rear cover 138 is removably attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 at its upper end with screws (not shown), with cylindrical shafts 138a that protrude outward from the lower ends of both the left and right sides engaging with L-shaped locking slits 115b in the cylinder mounting frame 115.

This cylinder lock 130 has a cylinder mounting frame 115, cylinder body 131, rotation transmission member 133, first cam member 134, second cam member 135, first arm 136, and second arm 137, all of which are made of metal.

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 is approximately aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion opening 440b of the door frame right side unit 430.

Here, we will explain the conventional cylinder lock 130A. As shown in Figures 34(c) and (d), the conventional cylinder lock 130A has a cylinder body 131 that passes through the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115A from the rear, with its rear end attached to the front piece. This cylinder lock 130A has a rotation transmission member 133 mounted on the axis of the cylinder body 131.

Next, we will explain the operation of the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment. In a conventional cylinder lock 130, as shown in Figures 34(c) and (d), the rotation transmission member 133 is provided on the axis of the cylinder body 131, whereas in the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment, as shown in Figures 34(a) and (b), the rotation transmission member 133 is provided at a position spaced downward from the axis of the cylinder body 131.

In the normal state of this cylinder lock 130, as shown in Figure 36(a), the upper and lower ends of the first arm 136 are attached to the right of the rotation center of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively, and the upper and lower ends of the second arm 137 are attached to the lower of the rotation center of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135, respectively. The cylinder body 131 can be rotated 90 degrees clockwise and counterclockwise from the normal state using a genuine key.

In this state, when the first cam member 134 is rotated counterclockwise via the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 using a key inserted into the keyhole 132, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 move upward. At this time, because the upper end of the first arm 136 is attached to the right of the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, a large force acts from the first arm 136 to rotate the second cam member 135 counterclockwise. However, because the upper end of the second arm 137 is attached below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, almost no force acts from the second arm 137 to rotate the second cam member 135 counterclockwise.

In this way, when the first cam member 134 rotates counterclockwise from its normal state, force is transmitted mainly via the first arm 136, causing the second cam member 135 to rotate counterclockwise, and the rotation transmission member 133 to rotate together with the second cam member 135. The upward force acting due to this counterclockwise rotation of the first cam member 134 is proportional to the left-right distance between the positions where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134 and the center of rotation of the first cam member 134. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates counterclockwise from its normal state, the upward force acting on the first arm 136 decreases, while the upward force acting on the second arm 137 increases.

Therefore, when the first cam member 134 rotates counterclockwise from its normal position by more than 45 degrees, the upward force acting on the second arm 137 becomes greater than that on the first arm 136, causing the second cam member 135 to rotate counterclockwise primarily via the second arm 137. This allows the key inserted into the keyhole 132 to be rotated counterclockwise up to 90 degrees from its normal position (see Figure 36(b)).

When using the key to rotate the key counterclockwise 90 degrees from its normal state and then clockwise 90 degrees to return it to its normal state, the operation is the reverse of the above.

On the other hand, when, from the normal state, the first cam member 134 is rotated clockwise via the cylinder of the cylinder body 131 using a key inserted into the keyhole 132, the first arm 136, whose upper end is attached to the right of the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, moves downward, and the second arm 137, whose upper end is attached below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, moves upward. Because the upper end of the first arm 136 is attached to the right of the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, a large force acts on the first arm 136 to rotate the second cam member 135 clockwise. However, because the upper end of the second arm 137 is attached below the center of rotation of the first cam member 134, almost no force acts on the second arm 137 to rotate the second cam member 135 clockwise.

In this way, when the first cam member 134 rotates clockwise from its normal state, force is transmitted mainly via the first arm 136, causing the second cam member 135 to rotate clockwise, and the rotation transmission member 133 to rotate together with the second cam member 135. The force transmitting the rotation of the first cam member 134 by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 to the second cam member 135 is proportional to the left-right distance between the positions where the first arm 136 and the second arm 137 are attached to the first cam member 134 and the center of rotation of the first cam member 134. Therefore, as the first cam member 134 rotates clockwise from its normal state, the force of the first arm 136 attempting to rotate the second cam member 135 decreases, while the force of the second arm 137 attempting to rotate the second cam member 135 increases.

Therefore, when the first cam member 134 rotates clockwise beyond 45 degrees from its normal position, the force tending to rotate the second cam member 135 from the second arm 137 becomes greater than that from the first arm 136, and the second cam member 135 rotates clockwise primarily via the second arm 137. This allows the key inserted into the keyhole 132 to be rotated clockwise up to 90 degrees from its normal position (see Figure 36(c)).

Note that when the key is used to rotate the lock 90 degrees clockwise from its normal position and then rotate it 90 degrees clockwise to return it to its normal position, the operation is the reverse of the above.

In this way, with the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment, the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 are connected by the first arm 136 and the second arm 137, which are attached at a 90-degree angle from each other, to transmit rotation. Therefore, regardless of the rotational position of the first cam member 134 (the key inserted in the keyhole 132), rotation can be transmitted by at least one of the first arm 136 and the second arm 137, rotating the second cam member 135 (rotation transmission member 133), thereby enabling smooth locking and unlocking of the door frame 3 and main frame 4.

Furthermore, with the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment, rotation is transmitted by the first arm 136 and second arm 137 as a rotation transmission mechanism, so the axis of the rotation transmission member 133 (transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4) can be positioned differently relative to the axis of the cylinder body 131. This makes it possible to change the position of the cylinder body 131 in the door frame 3 to any position without changing the locking unit 650. This allows the cylinder body 131 (keyhole 132) to be positioned in a location that does not interfere with the decoration of the door frame 3, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 with a highly decorative door frame 3.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, even if the position of the cylinder body 131 is changed in the door frame 3, there is no need to change the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4, so the locking unit 650 can be reused, thereby suppressing increases in costs associated with the pachinko machine 1.

In conventional cylinder locks 130A, the rotation transmission member 133 is located at the rear of the cylinder body 131, which could allow a fraudulent individual who is aware of this configuration to insert a tool into the rear of the cylinder body 131 from the front and use the tool to fraudulently rotate the rotation transmission member 133, thereby opening the door frame 3 and committing fraud. In contrast, the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment has the rotation transmission member 133 located away from the axis (rear) of the cylinder body 131. Therefore, even if an individual inserts a tool into the rear of the cylinder body 131 to rotate the rotation transmission member 133, the rotation transmission member 133 cannot be rotated because it is not located in that position, preventing fraudulent activity such as opening the door frame 3 or main frame 4.

Furthermore, in the cylinder lock 130, the second arm 137 connects portions of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 that are spaced apart by a 90-degree rotational angle relative to the first arm 136. Therefore, even if the portions of either the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 attached to the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 are positioned on a line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135, the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 connects the portions that are furthest from the line connecting the center of the first cam member 134 and the center of the second cam member 135. Therefore, even if one of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 is positioned at the dead center of the first cam member 134 and the second cam member 135 and therefore cannot transmit the rotation from the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135, the other of the first arm 136 or the second arm 137 can transmit the rotation from the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135. As a result, there is no significant resistance to the rotation of the first cam member 134 and the key inserted in the keyhole 132 can be rotated smoothly, making it easy to lock and unlock the door. It is also possible to prevent the key inserted in the keyhole from being forced to rotate, preventing damage to the key.

Furthermore, the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted to the rotation transmission member 133, which is located in an eccentric position, by two arms, the first arm 136 and the second arm 137. Therefore, even if one arm is damaged for some reason, the rotation can be transmitted by the remaining arm, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 with a highly reliable cylinder lock 130.

Furthermore, the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted to the rotation transmission member 133, which is located at an eccentric position, by the smooth, rod-shaped (strip-shaped) first arm 136 and second arm 137. If rotation were transmitted by a gear, there is a risk that catching the tip of a tool on the gear teeth would cause the gear to rotate and rotate the rotation transmission member 133. However, by making the first arm 136 and second arm 137 rod-shaped with smooth surfaces, it is possible to make it difficult for the tip of a tool to become caught on the first arm 136 or second arm 137, preventing the rotation transmission member 133 from being rotated by moving the first arm 136 or second arm 137. This reliably prevents the door frame 3 or main frame 4 from being unlocked through unauthorized operation of the locking unit 650.

In the cylinder lock 130 of this embodiment, the first arm 136 and second arm 137 are used as the rotation transmission mechanism for transmitting the rotation of the first cam member 134 to the second cam member 135. However, this is not limited to this. For example, a rotation transmission mechanism using multiple gears, a rotation transmission mechanism using a gear and rack gear, a rotation transmission mechanism using a sprocket and chain, a rotation transmission mechanism using a pulley and belt, etc. may also be used.

[3-1i. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 37 and 38. Figure 37(a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear. Figure 38(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear with the rear case and anti-tamper member removed. The ball feeding unit 140 can feed game balls B supplied from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 one by one to the ball launcher 540 of the main frame 4, and can also eject game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 into the lower tray 202 by operating the upper tray ball ejection button 222.

The ball feeding unit 140 comprises a box-shaped front cover 141 that is open at the rear and has an entrance 141a that penetrates in the front-to-rear direction and through which game balls B are supplied from the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200, and a ball ejection port 141b that opens below the entrance 141a; a rear cover 142 that is box-shaped and has an open front and closes the rear end of the front cover 141, and has a ball supply port 142a that supplies game balls B that enter through the entrance 141a of the front cover 141 that penetrates in the front-to-rear direction to the ball launching device 540; The ball removal member 143 is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-to-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the front cover 141, and has a partition 143a that separates the entrance 141a and the ball removal port 141b on the rear side of the front cover 141; a ball feeding member 144 is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the up-down direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and sends the game balls B on the partition 143a of the ball removal member 143 one by one to the ball supply port 142a of the rear cover 142; and a ball feeding solenoid 145 that rotates the ball feeding member 144.

As shown in the figure, when viewed from the front, this ball feeding unit 140 has the ball feeding member 144 located to the right of the entrance 141a, the ball removal member 143 located to the left of the ball feeding member 144, and the ball feeding solenoid 145 located to the right of the ball feeding member 144.

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 has an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with the center of rotation of the ball removal member 143 to the left of the ball removal opening 141b when viewed from the front, and the operating rod 143c of the ball removal member 143, described below, extends forward from this slit 141c. The upper side of the front cover 141 also extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and is formed so that when the door frame 3 is assembled, it closes from the rear the rear-open portions of the ball feeding guide path 241b and ball removal guide path 241c on the upstream end of the rear of the rear base 241 of the upper tray ball removal unit 240.

The ball removal member 143 comprises a partition section 143a that is located below the entrance 141a and acts as a partition between the entrance 141a and the ball removal opening 141b, with the upper surface decreasing in size toward the ball feeding member 144; a pivoting rod section 143b that extends downward from the end of the partition section 143a opposite the ball feeding member 144 and bends in a V-shape from approximately the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball removal opening 141b, with the lower end supported for rotation around an axis extending in the front-to-back direction; a rod-shaped operating rod 143c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the rotating rod section 143b; and a weight section 143d that protrudes below the operating rod 143c from the side of the rotating rod section 143b on the side opposite the partition section 143a. The operating rod 143c of the ball removal member 143 is formed to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see Figure 37(a)). The operating rod 143c abuts against the upper end (top surface) of the operating transmission part 242b of the upper tray ball removal slider 242, which moves downward when the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the tray unit 200 is pressed through the ball feed opening 101e of the door frame base 101.

The ball feeding member 144 includes a fan-shaped blocking portion 144a in a plan view, centered on the rotation axis and extending vertically toward the entrance 141a and the partition portion 143a of the ball extracting member 143; a ball holding portion 144b recessed in an arc from the rear end of the blocking portion 144a toward the rotation axis; and a rod-shaped shaft portion 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are adjacently formed within an angular range of approximately 180° centered on the rotation axis. Furthermore, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 is sized to hold one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotation axis when the shaft portion 144c, which is positioned eccentrically from the rotation axis, is moved left and right by the drive of the ball feeding solenoid 145.

This ball feeding member 144 is designed to rotate between a supply position in which the blocking portion 144a faces toward the partition portion 143a and the ball holding portion 144b faces in a direction communicating with the ball supply port 142a, and a holding position in which the ball holding portion 144b faces toward the partition portion 143a. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held in the ball holding portion 144b is supplied to the ball launching device 540 from the ball supply port 142a, and the game ball B that has entered the partition portion 143a from the entrance 141a is prevented from moving toward the ball holding portion 144b (ball supply port 142a) by the blocking portion 144a, and remains on the partition portion 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the shaft portion 144c side closes the ball supply port 142a, so that only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a is held within the ball holding portion 144b.

The ball feeding unit 140 also includes a ball feeding operating rod 146 whose tip swings up and down when driven (energized) by the ball feeding solenoid 145, and a ball feeding crank 147 which rotates around an axis extending in the front-to-back direction due to the movement of the tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 swinging up and down, and which also rotates the ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the up and down direction.

The ball feed operating rod 146 is equipped with an iron plate 146a below the ball feed solenoid 145. The ball feed operating rod 146 extends left and right, and its end opposite the ball feed crank 147 (the right end) is attached to the front cover 141 and rear cover 142 so that it can rotate around an axis extending forward and backward. When the ball feed solenoid 145 is driven, the generated magnetic force pulls the iron plate 146a toward the ball feed solenoid 145 (upward), causing the ball feed operating rod 146 to rotate around the right end so that the left end closest to the ball feed crank 147 moves upward. When the ball feed solenoid 145 is then deactivated, the magnetic force disappears, causing the weight of the iron plate 146a to rotate around the right end so that the left end closest to the ball feed crank 147 moves downward, returning the rod to its original position. As a result, the ball feeding operating rod 146's left end (tip) closest to the ball feeding crank 147 swings up and down due to the ball feeding solenoid 145.

The ball feeding crank 147 comprises an engagement portion 147a extending in the left-right direction and capable of engaging with the tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146, which moves up and down; a shaft portion 147b located on the opposite side of the engagement portion 147a from the side that engages with the ball feeding operating rod 146 and rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-to-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142; and a transmission portion 147c extending upward from the shaft portion 147b and engaging with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see Figure 38 (b)) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric to the rotation center of the ball feeding member 144.

This ball feeding unit 140 can rotate the ball feeding crank 147 around an axis extending forward and backward via the ball feeding operating rod 146 by moving the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operating rod 146 upward through the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145.

When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normally), the ball feeding unit 140 is in a state where the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and its tip is positioned downward, and in this state the ball feeding member 144 is positioned in the feeding position. Furthermore, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operating rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and its tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position. In other words, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is deactivated (OFF state), the game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launcher 540. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 in this ball feed unit 140 is controlled in synchronization with the drive control of the launch solenoid 542 by the launch control unit 633b (see Figure 169) of the payout control board 633.

The ball feeding unit 140 is also rotatably supported by the ball removal member 143 or the weight portion 143d, which applies a moment that rotates it counterclockwise when viewed from the front. However, the rotation of the ball removal member 143 is restricted when the operating rod 143c protruding forward of the ball removal member 143 abuts against the upper end of the operating transmission portion 242b of the upper tray ball removal slider 242, which operates when the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the tray unit 200 is pressed. Therefore, under normal conditions, the partition portion 143a of the ball removal member 143 is located between the entrance 141a and the ball removal opening 141b, separating them, and game balls B cannot enter the ball removal opening 141b side.

When the player presses the upper tray ball removal button 222 on the tray unit 200 downward, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 slides downward together with the actuation transmission unit 242b, and as the actuation transmission unit 242b moves downward, the actuation rod 143c also moves downward relatively. When the actuation rod 143c moves downward together with the actuation transmission unit 242b, the ball removal member 143 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and the partition unit 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball removal opening 141b, releasing the partition. As a result, the game ball B that entered through the entrance 141a falls toward the ball removal opening 141b, is discharged from the ball removal opening 141b into the ball removal guide path 241c of the upper tray ball removal unit 240 in the tray unit 200, and can be discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 202 via the lower tray ball supply opening 211c.

The upper tray ball removal slider 242, which is formed with the actuation transmission part 242b that contacts the actuation rod 143c of the ball removal member 143, is biased upward by a spring. Therefore, even if a game ball B is supplied forcefully onto the partition part 143a, the impact can be absorbed by the spring via the actuation rod 143c, preventing damage to the ball removal member 143 and other components, and preventing the game ball B from bouncing off the partition part 143a.

The ball feeding unit 140 also has a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see Figure 38(b), etc.) recessed forward at the upper right when viewed from behind the ball supply port 142a in the rear cover 142, and an anti-tampering member 148 is attached to the mounting recess 142b. The anti-tampering member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed from a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

The anti-tamper element 148 has a rectangular shape extending left and right when viewed from the front. It comprises an upper piece 148a and a lower piece 148b that are separated vertically at approximately the center a predetermined distance to the left of the right edge, and inclined portions 148c that are C-chamfered at the tip ends (right ends when viewed from the front) of the opposing edges of the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b. The upper piece 148a of the anti-tamper element 148 is bent relative to the general surface of the anti-tamper element 148 so that its right end when viewed from the front protrudes rearward. The lower piece 148b extends flush with the general surface of the anti-tamper element 148. As a result, in a plan view, the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b form a V-shaped groove that widens toward the right.

When the anti-tampering member 148 is attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142, the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b is in communication with the inside of the ball supply port 142a.

This anti-fraud device 148 prevents fraudulent acts using illegal game balls B with strings attached by using the ball launcher 540 to launch an illegal game ball B from the upper tray into the game area 5a via the ball feeding unit 140, and then manipulate the string attached to the illegal game ball B to insert or remove it from the first starting hole 2002, etc. When such acts are committed, the momentum of the illegal game ball B launched (hit) by the ball launcher 540 causes the string attached to the illegal game ball B to be inserted between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b, and the string is then cut by the narrow V-shaped portion formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b, thereby preventing fraudulent acts using illegal game balls B with strings attached.

[3-1j. Foul Cover Unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 39 and 40. Figure 39(a) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and Figure 39(b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as seen from the rear. Figure 40 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the cover member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 on the right side as viewed from the rear. The foul cover unit 150 guides game balls B (foul balls) that are launched by the ball launcher 540 but do not reach the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower tray 202, and also guides game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202. As shown in the figure, the fall cover unit 150 comprises a shallow box-shaped unit body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and open at the front, and a flat lid member 152 attached to the front of the unit body 151.

The fall cover unit 150 has a through-ball passage 150a that penetrates from front to back at the upper left corner when viewed from the front and connects the lower normal dispensing passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main frame 4 with the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit 200, and a full ball receiving port 150b that opens toward the rear on the lower right side when viewed from the front of the through-ball passage 150a and can connect with the lower full dispensing passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main frame 4.

The foul cover unit 150 also has a foul ball receiving port 150c, which opens upward on the right side of the full ball receiving port 150b when viewed from the front, and receives game balls B (foul balls) that have been launched by the ball launcher 540 of the main frame 4 but have not reached the game area 5a; and a ball discharge port 150d, which opens forward near the lower right corner when viewed from the front, and discharges game balls B received in the full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c forward, and which communicates with the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the tray unit 200.

Furthermore, the foul cover unit 150 is provided with a storage passage 150e formed by the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 between the full ball receiving port 150b, the foul ball receiving port 150c, and the ball discharge port 150d, and which is large enough to store a predetermined amount of game balls B.

The through-ball passage 150a is formed across both the unit body 151 and the lid member 152. The full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c are formed in the unit body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by the unit body 151 and the lid member 152.

The fall cover unit 150 also includes a flat movable piece 153 that forms part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e and whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit body 151 and the cover member 152, a full tank detection sensor 154 that detects the rotation of the movable piece 153 away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 that biases the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

When the lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200 is filled with game balls B and game balls B are no longer released toward the lower tray 202 from the ball release port 150d, this foul cover unit 150 can store a certain number of game balls B in the storage passage 150e. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the weight of the game balls B causes the movable piece 153 to rotate so that the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155, and this rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. This allows it to be determined that the lower tray 202 is full of game balls B, so when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the lower tray 202 is full, the payout of any more game balls B is stopped and a notification of this fact is sent to the player, amusement hall staff, or the like, urging them to unclog the lower tray 202.

The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear of the unit body 151, below the through-ball passage 150a, and is equipped with a door opening/closing abutment 150f against which the operating protrusion 613a of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 of the lower full ball passage unit 610 in the dispensing unit 560 of the main body frame 4 (described later) can abut (see Figure 90). The door opening/closing abutment 150f is inclined so that it moves forward as its rear surface faces downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 abuts against this door opening/closing abutment 150f, the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 can be rotated to open the downstream ends (front openings) of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full dispensing passage 610b.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 29 and 30. The glass unit 160 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 101h from the rear and removably attached so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. When the door frame 3 is closed against the main frame 4, this glass unit 160 makes the playing area 5a of the playing board 5 attached to the main frame 4 visible from the player's side (front) and also closes off the front of the playing area 5a.

The glass unit 160 comprises a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner periphery of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 101h; two transparent glass plates 162 that enclose the interior of the glass frame 161 and have their outer peripheries attached to the glass frame 161; and a pair of glass unit mounting members 163 that are rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 and are used to mount the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101.

The glass frame 161 has a pair of mounting pieces 161a that extend outward in a flat plate shape from positions below the upper left and right corners when viewed from the front, and a band-like locking piece 161b that protrudes downward from the bottom end and extends along the bottom edge. The mounting pieces 161a of the glass frame 161 can abut against the protrusions 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 (see Figure 96). Two glass plates 162 are attached to the front and rear ends of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are spaced apart from each other so that a space is formed between them (see Figure 96).

The glass unit mounting member 163 has a disk-shaped base 163a that is rotatably attached around an axis extending forward and backward on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a rod-shaped protrusion 163b that protrudes from the base 163a in a direction perpendicular to the axis of rotation. The glass unit mounting member 163 is rotatably attached to the outside of each of the two upper corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first rotate the glass unit mounting member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 so that the protrusion 163b is positioned above the base 163a. Then, from the rear of the door frame base 101, insert the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcement frame 114 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and abut the front end of the glass frame 161 against the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. Then, rotate the glass unit mounting member 163 so that the protrusion 163b is positioned below the base 163a, and abut the protrusion 163b against the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. This attaches the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101.

To remove the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, follow the steps above in reverse. This makes the glass unit 160 detachable from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In addition, in the glass unit 160, when the protrusion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in a rotational position where it is positioned lower than the base 163a, the protrusion 163b restricts the rearward movement of the glass frame 161. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protrusion 163b will not rotate to a position where it is higher than the base 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 will not be released naturally, and the glass unit 160 will not naturally come off the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 for the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 29 and 30. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 includes a flat main body 171 having a predetermined outer periphery, a flat rear projection 172 that projects rearward along the outer periphery of the main body 171, and a pair of locking projections 173 that are spaced apart on the left and right, project forward beyond the main body 171, and are capable of being locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed so that its lower end protrudes downward below the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100. Furthermore, the upper end of the main body 171 is shaped to fit the lower edge of the playing area 5a on the playing board 5 when assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is shaped to fit a portion of the inner rail 1002, the out guide portion 1003, a portion of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005 of the component 1000 described below, and is formed so as not to protrude into the playing area 5a when assembled to the pachinko machine 1.

The rear protrusion 172 is formed around almost the entire outer periphery of the main body 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed by the main body 171 and the rear protrusion 172 into a shallow box shape that is open to the rear, giving it high strength and rigidity. The rear protrusion 172 also protrudes rearward from a portion of the rear surface of the main body 171 that is different from the outer periphery of the main body 171. This rear protrusion 172 that protrudes rearward from a portion of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed so as to align with a portion of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 when assembled into the pachinko machine 1.

When assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the rear protrusion 172 is not formed in the area of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002. As a result, game ball B (game ball B launched by the ball launcher 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear protrusion 172 of the security cover 170, and does not hinder the game ball B from being shot into the game area 5a.

The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). This allows the security cover 170 to be easily attached and detached to the door frame base unit 100.

When the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 abuts against the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the rear projection 172, excluding the portion that protrudes rearward from the bottom edge of the main body 171, is inserted into the security recess 1009 of the component 1000. Furthermore, the security cover 170 is in a state where the rear projection 172 that protrudes rearward from the bottom edge of the main body 171 protrudes rearward beyond the front surface of the component 1000 so as to contact the underside of the component 1000. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is bent in a complex manner by the rear projection 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Therefore, even if an attempt is made to insert an illegal tool such as piano wire into the game area 5a between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000 from below the front of the game board 5, the attempt will be blocked by the rear projection 172 and the security recess 1009, preventing the illegal tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit and handle cover unit]
The handle unit 180 and handle cover unit 290 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 41 to 47. Figure 41(a) is an enlarged front view showing the handle unit and handle cover unit portions in the door frame, and Figure 41(b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the handle unit and handle cover unit portions in the door frame. Figure 42 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit disassembled from the front, and Figure 43 is an exploded perspective view of the handle cover unit disassembled from the rear. Figure 44 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled from the front, and Figure 45 is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled from the rear. Figure 46 is a cross-sectional view taken along line E-I in Figure 41(a). Figure 47 is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-A in Figure 1. Note that Figure 46 shows a cross-sectional view of only the door frame 3, omitting the outer frame 2 and main frame 4.

The handle unit 180 of this embodiment is attached to the door frame base unit 100 and tray unit 200 together with the handle cover unit 290 that covers the outer periphery, and when operated by a player, it allows the game ball B in the upper tray 201 to be shot into the game area 5a of the game board 5.

First, we will explain the handle unit 180. The handle unit 180 comprises a handle base 181, the rear end of which is attached to the handle mounting surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via a handle cover base 291 of a handle cover unit 290 (described below); a handle 195 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181; multiple handle guides 196 attached to the rear side of the handle 195 and guided by the handle cover base 291 (described below); a disc-shaped cover base 183 attached to the handle base 181 so as to cover the center of the front end of the handle 195; a handle decoration board 184 attached to the front side of the cover base 183 and having multiple LEDs 184a mounted on its front surface; and a handle front lens 185 attached to the cover base 183 so as to cover the front side of the handle decoration board 184.

The handle unit 180 also includes an inner base 186 attached to the front of the handle base 181 behind the handle 195, a shaft member 187 having the handle 195 attached to its front end and rotatably attached by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181, and having a drive gear portion 187a on its outer periphery, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a handle rotation detection sensor 189 having a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188 and is sandwiched between the handle base 181 and the inner base 186.

Furthermore, the handle unit 180 is equipped with a handle return spring 190, one end of which is attached to the handle base 181 and the other end of which is attached to the handle 195, biasing the handle 195 to return it to its initial rotation position (the end of rotation in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front), and an auxiliary spring 191, one end of which is attached to the inner base 186 and the other end of which is attached to the transmission gear 188, biasing the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front via the transmission gear 188.

The handle unit 180 also includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, a single button 193 whose tip end protrudes outward from the left side of the outer periphery of the front end of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front and whose base end is rotatably attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 around an axis extending forward and backward, and a single button operation sensor 194 attached to the handle base 181 and detects when the single button 193 is pressed.

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 comprises a cylindrical base 181a extending longitudinally, a disk-shaped front end 181b protruding radially from the front end of the base 181a, and three grooves 181c recessed from the outer surface of the cylindrical base 181a, extending axially, and formed at uneven intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base 181a of the handle base 181 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the rear cylindrical portion 291c of the handle cover base 291 in the handle cover unit 290. The three grooves 181c are formed at positions corresponding to three ridges 291d of the handle cover base 291, which will be described later. Therefore, with the three grooves 181c aligned with the three protrusions 291d, the base 181a can be inserted into the rear cylindrical portion 291c of the handle cover base 291, and by inserting the protrusions 291d into the three grooves 181c, the handle base 181 cannot rotate relative to the handle cover base 291.

The handle 195 comprises a disk-shaped central hub portion 195a, multiple (here, three) spokes 195b extending radially outward at intervals circumferentially from the central hub portion 195a, an annular outer ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the multiple spokes 195b, two slits 195d extending in an arc around the rotation axis (shaft member 187) and penetrating the central hub portion 195a in the front-to-rear direction, and a locking protrusion 195e that protrudes rearward from a position inward of the slits 195d relative to the center of rotation and engages with the other end of the handle return spring 190. The outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a is approximately the same as the outer diameter of the general outer surface of the handle of a conventional pachinko machine.

When the handle 195 is free (not rotating), one spoke 195b extends horizontally to the left from the central hub 195a, and two spokes 195b extend clockwise and counterclockwise from the center at angles of 120 degrees each. The three spokes 195b extend to such a length that a gap is formed between the central hub 195a and the outer ring 195c so that a player's fingers can be inserted.

The outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is located coaxially with the center of the central hub portion 195a. The outer ring portion 195c is formed in a circular ring shape with a constant cross-sectional shape, with the U-shaped radius facing forward.

The handle 195 is formed to be translucent throughout, and is partially plated with an electrically continuous plating from the central hub portion 195a to the outer ring portion 195c. This allows the handle touch sensor 192 to detect touches to the handle 195 even when only the outer ring portion 195c is being touched. Therefore, the game ball B can be shot in by turning the outer ring portion 195c.

The handle guide 196 has a U-shaped guide portion 196a that opens toward the center of the handle 195, and a flat mounting stay 196b that extends toward the center from the front end of the guide portion 196a. The three handle guides 196 are attached with the mounting stay 196b attached to the rear side of the spoke portion 195b of the handle 195 so that the guide portion 196a is located behind the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195. The handle guide 196 is restricted from moving in the fore-and-aft direction by inserting a guide piece 291g of the handle cover base 291 (described below) into the guide portion 196a.

The cover base 183 is formed in a disk shape with a diameter smaller than the outer diameter of the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195, and is equipped with three mounting bosses 183a protruding rearward from its rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a penetrate slits 195d in the handle 195 from the front and are attached to the front surface of the handle base 181. Because the mounting bosses 183a of the cover base 183 penetrate the slits 195d in the handle 195, the mounting bosses 183a abut against the circumferential ends of the slits 195d, restricting the rotation angle of the handle 195. In this example, the handle 195 can be rotated within a range of approximately 120 degrees.

The handle decoration board 184 is equipped with a total of 10 LEDs 184a (full-color LEDs) mounted in triple concentric circles: one in the center, three at regular intervals around the middle, and six at regular intervals around the outer periphery. These LEDs 184a are divided into five groups: one in the center, three in the middle, two at the top left of the outer periphery, two at the top right, and two at the bottom of the outer periphery (see Figure 72). The handle decoration board 184 is equipped with a 24-bit LED driver 184b with a unique address for illuminating each LED 184a. This LED driver 184b can control up to 24 systems, and controls 15 systems in total, with three systems per group, so that the five groups of 10 LEDs 184a can each emit full-color light.

Although not shown, this handle decoration board 184 is connected to a wiring cable consisting of four wires: two power lines (one is a ground line) that supply power to drive the LEDs 184a and LED driver 184b; one control signal line that receives signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510; and one clock line that synchronizes the LED driver 184b with the peripheral control board 1510. When the LED driver 184b of this handle decoration board 184 receives a command addressed to that address from the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control board) via the control signal line, it can cause the 10 LEDs 184a, divided into five groups, to emit light in the appropriate color and intensity for each group in accordance with the command.

As such, because this handle decorative board 184 has an LED driver 184b, it is possible to individually (here, by group) control the illumination of a greater number of LEDs 184a than the number of wires that make up the connected wiring cable, thereby reducing the number of wires and simplifying the electrical wiring configuration.

The front surface of the handle front lens 185 bulges forward in a rounded shape and is translucent. Inside the handle front lens 185, a three-dimensional lens element made of transparent material is provided. This handle front lens 185 can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately illuminating the LED on the front surface of the handle decorative board 184.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 195 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes depending on the rotation angle of this detection shaft 189a. Therefore, when the handle 195 is rotated to change the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the driving force of the launch solenoid 542 in the ball launcher 540 (described below) changes depending on that internal resistance, allowing the game ball B to be shot into the game area 5a with a strength depending on the rotation angle of the handle 195.

The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180. When the player touches the handle 195, it detects the static electricity acting from the player and detects the player's contact with the handle 195. If the handle 195 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 detects the player's contact, the detection is accepted by the handle rotation detection sensor 189, and the drive of the launch solenoid 542 is controlled with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 195, allowing the game ball B to be shot into the ball.

Therefore, even if a player attempts to rotate the handle 195 in some way to launch game ball B into the game area 5a without touching it, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact, so the launch solenoid 542 is not activated and game ball B cannot be launched. This prevents players from rotating the handle 195 in ways other than those intended and reduces the burden on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

The single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the pressing of the single-shot button 193 by the player. When this single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 stops the operation of the firing solenoid 542. Therefore, if the player presses the single-shot button 193 while rotating the handle 195, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation of the handle 195. Furthermore, by releasing the pressing of the single-shot button 193, the game ball B can be again fired into the game area 5a with the same impact strength as before the single-shot button 193 was operated.

Next, the handle cover unit 290 will be described. The handle cover unit 290 comprises a handle cover base 291 that covers the outer periphery of the handle unit 180 behind the handle 195 and has its rear end attached to the handle mounting surface 101b of the door frame base 101; an inner 292 that covers the outer periphery of the handle cover base 291 and has its rear end attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200; a circular handle cover decorative board 293 that is provided in front of the inner 292 and has multiple LEDs 293a mounted on its front surface; a circular board cover 294 that covers the handle cover decorative board 293 from the front; and a handle cover 295 that covers the outer periphery of the inner 292 and has its rear end attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200.

The handle cover base 291 comprises a cylindrical front tube portion 291a extending forward and backward with an inner diameter approximately the same as the inner diameter of the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195; a middle wall portion 291b extending forward from the rear end of the front tube portion 291a so that its inner diameter decreases as it extends forward; a cylindrical rear tube portion 291c penetrating the middle wall portion 291b and extending forward and backward with an inner diameter that allows the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 to be inserted; and multiple (here, three) ridges 291d protruding inward from the inner periphery of the rear tube portion 291c and extending forward and backward, at positions corresponding circumferentially to the grooves 181c of the handle base 181.

The handle cover base 291 also includes a flange portion 291e extending outward from a portion rearward of the front end of the outer periphery of the front tube portion 291a, a cylindrical outer tube portion 291f protruding forward from the middle of the flange portion 291e to the same position as the front end of the front tube portion 291a, a guide piece 291g protruding outward from the front tube portion 291a between the front end of the front tube portion 291a and the flange portion 291e, and an opening 291h penetrating the lower part of the front tube portion 291a.

The middle wall portion 291b of the handle cover base 291 extends from the rear end of the front tubular portion 291a to near the center in the fore-and-aft direction, with a cross section bulging outward in an arc shape. The rear end of the rear tubular portion 291c is attached to the handle mounting surface 101b of the door frame base 101. This rear tubular portion 291c is formed to the same length as the base 181a of the handle base 181, and the base 181a of the handle base 181 is inserted into it. The three protrusions 291d correspond to the three grooves 181c of the handle base 181, and by inserting them into the grooves 181c, the handle base 181 cannot rotate relative to the flange portion 291e. The outer tubular portion 291f extends forward from a position outside the radial center of the flange portion 291e. This handle cover base 291 has multiple triangular ribs arranged circumferentially to connect the front surface of the flange portion 291e and the outer peripheral surface of the outer cylinder portion 291f.

The guide piece 291g protrudes from the outer periphery of the front tubular portion 291a from the center between the outer periphery of the front tubular portion 291a and the inner periphery of the outer tubular portion 291f to a position close to the front tubular portion 291a. The guide piece 291g extends circumferentially over a length ranging from approximately 110 degrees, and three guide pieces 291g are provided circumferentially, spaced 10 degrees apart. By inserting the rear end of the guide portion 196a of the handle guide 196 of the handle unit 180 between the guide pieces 291g and rearwardly beyond the guide piece 291g, and rotating the handle 195, the guide piece 291g is positioned within the U-shaped guide portion 196a, restricting the forward/rearward movement of the guide portion 196a (handle 195).

The opening 291h penetrates the front tubular portion 291a, with a length in the front-to-rear direction from the rear end of the front tubular portion 291a to near the flange portion 291e, and a circumferential range of approximately 90 degrees.

The inner 292 has an annular base 292a with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and an outer diameter larger than the flange portion 291e; legs 292b extending rearward from the outer periphery of the base 292a; and multiple (four in this case) notches 292c cut out from the rear end of the legs 292b to near the base 292a and spaced apart in the circumferential direction. The front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 is inserted into the base 292a from the front, and the base 292a is positioned rearward of the flange portion 291e. The legs 292b extend in a curved manner that bulges outward, and their rear ends are attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200. The notches 292c are provided at the top, bottom, left, and right ends of the legs 292b.

The handle cover decorative board 293 is annular in shape, with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the same outer diameter as the flange portion 291e. The handle cover decorative board 293 is equipped with 12 LEDs 293a and an LED driver 293b with a unique address for illuminating each LED 293a. The 12 LEDs 293a (full-color LEDs) are arranged in a row with intervals in the circumferential direction. These 12 LEDs 293a are divided into six groups: two at the bottom left, two on the left, two at the top left, two at the top right, two at the right, and two at the bottom right (see Figure 72). The LED driver 293b can control up to 24 systems, and controls six groups of 10 LEDs 293a, each with three systems for full-color illumination, for a total of 18 systems.

Although not shown, this handle cover decorative board 293 is connected to a wiring cable consisting of four wires: two power lines (one is a ground line) that supply power to drive the LEDs 293a and LED driver 293b; one control signal line that receives signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510; and one clock line that synchronizes the LED driver 293b with the peripheral control board 1510. When the LED driver 293b of this handle cover decorative board 293 receives a command addressed to that address from the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control board) via the control signal line, it can cause the 12 LEDs 293a, divided into six groups, to emit light in the appropriate color and intensity for each group in accordance with the command.

The board cover 294 has an annular front plate 294a with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and an outer diameter approximately the same as the outer diameter of the base portion 292a of the inner casing 292, and a cylindrical side plate 294b with the outer edge of the front plate 294a extending slightly rearward. The front plate 294a of this board cover 294 is located between the flange portion 291e of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover decorative board 293, and the side plate 294b extends to the base portion 292a of the inner casing 292.

The handle cover 295 has a front hole 295a at its front end with an inner diameter the same as the outer diameter of the outer cylindrical portion 291f of the handle cover base 291, and is formed in a cylindrical shape resembling a spindle truncated shape (snow igloo-shaped, bowl-shaped, etc.) that bulges out towards the rear, with multiple (four in this case) cutout openings 295b cut out from the rear end towards the front in the circumferential direction. The handle cover 295 is formed to cover the outer periphery of the inner casing 292, and the multiple cutout openings 295b are formed to coincide with the cutouts 292c. The rear end of the handle cover 295 is attached to the dish unit main body 252 of the dish unit 200 via the inner casing 292.

The handle cover 295 is two-color molded using synthetic resins with different colors and translucency (light transmittance). Specifically, the handle cover 295 is two-color molded using two types of resin: the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b. A portion of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface, forming the circular and radial patterns. In other words, the circular and radial patterns appearing on the surface of the handle cover 295 are the inner layer 3a, and the circular and radial patterns are connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see Figure 71(a)). When molding the handle cover 295, either the inner layer 3a or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

As shown in Figure 46 and other figures, when the handle unit 180 and handle cover unit 290 of this embodiment are assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the portion of the handle unit 180 rearward of the handle 195 is inserted inside the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291, with the handle 195 and handle front lens 185 positioned forward of the handle cover unit 290. The rear end of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101, sandwiching the portion that closes the rear end of the rear cylindrical portion 291c of the handle cover base 291 of the handle cover unit 290.

The handle 195 of this handle unit 180 has a central hub portion 195a rotatably supported by the handle base 181. The outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 is rotatably supported by the handle cover unit 290 via a handle guide 196 attached to the rear side. The rear end of the guide portion 196a of this handle guide 196 is inserted (engaged) between the front cylinder portion 291a and the outer cylinder portion 291f of the handle cover base 291, and between the flange portion 291e and the guide piece 291g, and is rotatably supported with movement in the fore-and-aft direction (axial direction) restricted.

The handle 195, and the handle cover base 291, inner 292, base cover 294, and handle cover 295 of the handle cover unit 290 are formed to be translucent. By illuminating the LED 293a on the handle cover decorative base 293, the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 can be illuminated and decorated, and the inside of the handle cover base 291 (front tubular portion 291a), the handle cover 295, etc. can also be illuminated and decorated.

The handle cover unit 290 has matching cutout openings 295b and cutouts 292c in the handle cover 295 and inner liner 292, so when viewed from the outside, it appears as if there are holes on both the left and right sides and the bottom that connect to the inside of the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291. This helps to ease the player's anxiety about sticking their hand (fingers) into the inside of the front tubular portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 through the gap between the central hub portion 195a and outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195.

The upper cutout opening 295b of the handle cover 295 (the upper cutout 292c of the inner cover 292) is closed by the right-side decorative unit 275 and the right-side door frame unit 430.

In the handle cover unit 290 of this embodiment, the interior of the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291, into which the rear of the handle unit 180 is inserted, is connected through the opening 291h to the lower notch 292c and notch opening 295b of the inner liner 292 and handle cover 295, respectively (see Figure 47). As a result, even if liquid such as a drink or game ball B enters the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 through the gap between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195, it can be discharged downward through the lower opening 291h, notch 292c, and notch opening 295b to the bottom of the handle cover unit 290.

In addition, if liquid or game balls B enter the cutout openings 295b on both the left and right sides of the handle cover 295, they can pass through the gap between the front tubular portion 291a and the leg portions 292b of the inner casing 292 and be discharged downward through the lower cutout opening 295b.

In addition, the opening 291h of the handle cover base 291, the notch 292c on the lower side of the inner 292, and the notch opening 295b on the lower side of the handle cover 295 are located on an extension of the inclination direction of the blade portion 46b of the grill member 46 in the lower outer frame assembly 40 of the outer frame 2, as shown in Figure 47. This allows the wind (wind pressure) emitted diagonally upward and forward from the grill member 46 via the blade portion 46b due to vibration of the main frame speaker 622 to enter the front tubular portion 291a through the opening 291h, the notch 292c, and the notch opening 295b. Therefore, when a player inserts their fingers inside the handle cover 295 (front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) and rotates the handle 195 (the device for striking the game ball B), the main frame speaker 622 vibrates and sends air into the front cylindrical portion 291a, surprising the player and providing an unprecedented performance.

Furthermore, the handle cover 295 has a cutout opening 295b, so when opening the door frame 3 or main frame 4, you can hook your finger into the cutout opening 295b on the right side and pull it, which can be used as a handle when opening the door frame 3, etc.

In addition, the handle 195 is plated all the way up to the outer ring portion 195c, so the handle touch sensor 192 can detect touches to the handle 195, and the game ball B can be hit even when only the outer ring portion 195c is touched.

Furthermore, because the handle cover 295 has a cutout opening 295b, the rotational position of the handle 195 can be easily fixed by gripping the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 and the cutout opening 295b with the fingers, allowing the game ball B to be continuously shot into the game area 5a with a constant force without having to keep twisting the hand. In this way, the handle 195 can be rotated in a variety of ways to shoot the game ball B, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that allows the player to select the shooting operation that is most suitable for them.

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via a handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291). The handle mounting surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end is located further back than the left end in a plan view, and faces outward (toward the open side). Therefore, the handle unit 180 attached via the handle cover base 291 is also inclined outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 relative to a line perpendicular to the front of the pachinko machine 1). This makes it easy for the player to grip the handle 195 of the handle unit 180, allowing for a comfortable rotation operation.

In this way, according to the handle unit 180 and handle cover unit 290 of this embodiment, a handle 195 having a disk-shaped central hub portion 195a, multiple spoke portions 195b protruding radially from the central hub portion 195a, and an annular outer ring portion 195c connecting the tips of the multiple spoke portions 195b is provided at the lower right corner of the door frame 3, which is arranged to be openable and closable around the left side as an axis and closes the playing area 5a of the playing board 5 so that it can be seen from the front, and a cylindrical handle cover unit 290 is provided extending rearward from the outer ring portion 195c. Because the handle cover unit 290 is provided, a handle 195 and handle cover unit 290 with a never-before-seen form can be seen in the area where a handle is usually provided on conventional pachinko machines, making a strong impact on the player and attracting the player's attention, as well as increasing the player's desire to play with the pachinko machine 1, making it easier for players wandering around the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed to select the pachinko machine 1 as the machine to play.

In addition, the player's fingers can be inserted into the handle cover unit 290 (front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the gap between the central hub portion 195a and the outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195. Therefore, when the player operates the handle 195 to shoot the game ball B into the play area 5a, if the player grasps the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195, the player's fingers become inserted into the handle cover unit 290. This gives the player a different feeling when operating the handle 195 than with the handles of conventional pachinko machines, and the new sensation of shooting the game ball B can be enjoyed by the player, preventing a decline in interest.

When the player operates the handle 195 and causes the main frame speaker 622 mounted on the speaker unit 620a in the base unit 620A of the main frame 4 to output a sound effect, the vibration of the main frame speaker 622 causes the air in the enclosure 624 formed by the speaker box 623 to vibrate, and the vibration of the air in the enclosure 624 is released forward as sound pressure (sound wind) through the internal space 40a of the curtain board of the outer frame lower assembly 40 in the outer frame 2, which is connected to the enclosure 624, and the port member 47. At this time, the multiple blade portions 46b of the grill member 46 provided at the front end of the port member 47 can guide the sound pressure (sound wind) from the main frame speaker 622 into the handle cover unit 290 (inside the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) through the cutout opening 295b of the handle cover 295 and the opening 291h of the handle cover base 291, and the sound pressure can stimulate the fingers of the player who is operating the handle 195 with their fingers inserted into the handle cover unit 290 through the gap between the central hub portion 195a and the outer ring portion 195c. Therefore, by supplying sound pressure from the port member 47 through the cutout opening 295b and the opening 291h to the player's fingers inserted into the handle cover unit 290 according to the game status within the game area 5a, it is possible to surprise the player, give them a sense of an upcoming opportunity, or change the amount of handle operation, thereby entertaining the player and preventing them from becoming bored and losing interest in the game.

In addition, sound pressure (sound wind) from the main frame speaker 622 can be supplied into the handle cover unit 290 (front cylindrical portion 291a of handle cover base 291) through the cutout opening 295b and opening 291h, making it possible to cool the inside of the handle cover unit 290 and creating a comfortable environment around the player's fingers as they operate the handle 195, thereby easing stress on the player and preventing a decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, as described above, when a player operates the handle 195 with their fingers inserted into the handle cover unit 290 through the gap between the central hub portion 195a and the outer ring portion 195c, the sound pressure (sound wind) emitted forward from the port member 47 provided on the lower outer frame assembly 40 of the outer frame 2, which is different from the door frame 3 on which the handle 195 and handle cover unit 290 are attached, is guided by the multiple blade portions 46b of the grill member 46 to stimulate the player's fingers. Therefore, compared to a case in which a vibration device is provided on the handle 195, there is no damage to the various sensors (handle rotation detection sensor 189, handle touch sensor 192, single button operation sensor 194, etc.) and bearing mechanism provided on the handle 195, making it possible to make the handle unit 180 less susceptible to damage, thereby preventing the player from feeling uncomfortable due to damage to the handle unit 180 and suppressing a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, because the handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a, spoke portions 195b, and outer peripheral ring portion 195c, the handle 195 has an appearance similar to that of a car steering wheel. Therefore, even though the handle 195 looks significantly different from the handles of conventional pachinko machines, players can intuitively recognize that operating the handle 195 is the same as with conventional pachinko machines. Therefore, even players who are seeing this pachinko machine 1 for the first time can operate the handle 195 of this pachinko machine 1 without any confusion, making it easier for players to choose this pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine to play without hesitation.

In addition, cutout opening 295b and opening 291h are provided on the downward-facing portion of the outer surface of the handle cover unit 290, where a player can insert their fingers between the central hub portion 195a and outer peripheral ring portion 195c of the handle 195.This means that when looking inside the handle cover unit 290 (the front cylindrical portion 291a of the handle cover base 291) from the front, the area below the handle cover unit 290 can be seen through opening 291h and the lower cutout opening 295b, giving the cylindrical handle cover unit 290 a sense of openness, reducing the player's anxiety about inserting their fingers into the handle cover unit 290 and allowing the player to operate the handle 195 without hesitation.

In addition, the handle cover unit 290 has through-hole cutout openings 295b and openings 291h in the downward-facing portions of its outer peripheral surface, and the port member 47 of the outer frame 2 (lower outer frame assembly 40) opens forward. This means that even if liquids such as drinks or game balls B enter the handle cover unit 290, they can be discharged downward through the lower cutout openings 295b and openings 291h, and liquids discharged downward through the cutout openings 295b and openings 291h are less likely to enter the port member 47.

Furthermore, the handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a, spoke portions 195b, and an outer peripheral ring portion 195c, and the handle cover 295 of the handle cover unit 290, which has the same diameter at the front end as the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, is provided with multiple cutout openings 295b.As a result, the central hub portion 195a can be used to grasp and operate the handle in the same way as the handle of a conventional pachinko machine, the spoke portions 195b can be used to operate the handle with just the fingers, the outer peripheral ring portion 195c can be used to operate the handle like a steering wheel of a car, the outer peripheral ring portion 195c can be used to grasp the handle by hooking the fingers between the outer peripheral ring portion 195c and the cutout openings 295b, or the outer peripheral ring portion 195c can be straddled to pinch the inside and outside of the handle cover unit 290 with the fingers, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 that allows for a variety of operations (handle operations) to shoot game balls B. Therefore, depending on the game situation and the player's condition, the player can shoot the game ball B into the game area 5a in a way that is easy for the player to operate, which prevents the player from getting bored and allows the player to enjoy the operation of shooting the game ball B, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, the operating position of the handle 195 can be fixed by hooking and gripping the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 and the notched opening 295b, or by straddling the outer ring portion 195c and pinching the inside and outside of the handle cover unit 290 with your fingers. Therefore, in addition to handle operations similar to those of conventional pachinko machines, handle operations that are not possible with conventional pachinko machines can also be performed, providing players with a variety of handle operations that make handle operation enjoyable and less likely to bore them.

In addition, because the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as the diameter of the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195, the handle cover unit 290 extends rearward from the outer ring portion 195c, giving the handle cover unit 290 the appearance of being integrated with the handle 195, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that looks good and is able to attract the attention of players.

In addition, because the diameter of the front end of the handle cover unit 290 is the same as the outer peripheral ring portion 195c, it is possible to prevent the vertical dimension of the handle cover unit 290 from becoming larger than necessary. This prevents the handle cover unit 290 from compressing the play area 5a (door window 101a) upward, preventing the play area 5a from becoming narrower. This allows the play area 5a to be relatively larger, and the large play area 5a makes the pachinko machine 1 stand out, resulting in a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that strongly attracts the attention of players.

Furthermore, by appropriately illuminating the LEDs 293a on the handle cover decorative board 293, the handle cover unit 290 (the interior of the front tube portion 291a of the handle cover base 291 and the handle cover 295) and the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 can be illuminated and decorated. Therefore, even when a player is operating the handle 195, the illuminated decoration of the handle cover 295 and outer ring portion 195c is not obstructed by the player's hand, making the handle cover 295 and outer ring portion 195c stand out, providing a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that is capable of strongly attracting the player's attention.

In addition, a handle 195 is provided in the lower right corner of the door frame 3, opposite the hinge side, and a cutout opening 295b is provided in the part of the outer surface of the handle cover 295 of the handle cover unit 290 facing right, so that the cutout opening 295b can be used as a handle when opening and closing the door frame 3. This eliminates the need to provide a handle that would unsightly the door frame 3, and improves the appearance of the door frame 3.

In addition, the handle cover unit 290 (handle cover base 291) supports the outer ring portion 195c (handle guide 196) of the handle 195 so that it can rotate circumferentially, and is equipped with flange portions 291e and guide pieces 291g that restrict movement in the front-to-rear direction. Even if the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195 is pulled forward, the guide pieces 291g and other components can restrict the forward movement of the outer ring portion 195c. This prevents deformation of the outer ring portion 195c or the spokes 195b connecting the outer ring portion 195c to the central hub portion 195a, preventing damage to the handle 195.

In addition, the handle touch sensor 192 detects that the player is touching the handle 195, and then accepts the operation of the handle 195 to shoot the game ball B. Therefore, the game ball B can be shot even if the handle 195 is operated while touching only the spoke portion 195b or the outer ring portion 195c. This allows the pachinko machine 1 to perform a variety of shooting operations (handle operations) as described above, and also prevents the game ball B from being shot when the player is not touching the handle 195, preventing the handle from being operated using tools and reducing the burden on the gaming hall.

[3-5. Overall configuration of the plate unit]
The tray unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 49. Figure 48 is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame, and Figure 49 is a perspective view of the tray unit from behind. The tray unit 200 is attached to a portion below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. The tray unit 200 comprises an upper tray 201 that stores game balls B to be shot into the game area 5a, and a lower tray 202 that is positioned below the upper tray 201 and can store game balls B supplied from the upper tray 201 and the foul cover unit 150.

The dish unit 200 comprises a dish base unit 210 having an upper dish 201 and attached to the front of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, a dish decoration unit 250 having a lower dish 202 attached to the front of the dish base unit 210, and a performance operation unit 300 attached to the front of the dish decoration unit 250 and dish base unit 210 and operable by the player.

The tray base unit 210 comprises a flat tray unit base 211 extending left and right, an upper tray main body 212 attached to the upper front of the tray unit base 211 and holding an upper tray 201, a mounting base (not shown) attached to the right of the upper tray main body 212 and protruding forward, a tray unit relay board (not shown) attached to the right of the mounting base, a ball lending operation unit 220 attached to the top surface of the mounting base, an upper tray pre-ball removal unit (not shown) attached below the mounting base, and an upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 attached to the rear of the upper tray pre-ball removal unit.

The dish decoration unit 250 comprises a lower dish main body 251 that is attached to the lower front of the dish unit base 211 and holds a lower dish 202; a dish unit main body 252 that is attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251; a lower dish ball removal unit 260 that is attached to the underside of the lower dish main body 251; and a left dish decoration unit 270 and a right dish decoration unit 275 that are attached to the upper front of the dish unit main body 252, spaced apart from each other on the left and right.

The performance operation unit 300 is equipped with a performance operation section 301 that can be operated by the player, which includes a touch operation section 302 that can be operated by the player through touch, and a press operation section 303 that can be operated by the player through pressure. The performance operation unit 300 is equipped with a performance operation section cover unit 310 with a spherical outer surface, an operation section base 315 that is housed within the performance operation section cover unit 310 and attached to the front of the plate decoration unit 250, a circular performance operation section outer peripheral decorative board 320 attached to the top surface of the operation section base 315, an outer peripheral board cover 325 that covers the top of the performance operation section outer peripheral decorative board 320, and an operation section relay board unit 330 attached to the rear of the operation section base 315.

The performance operation unit 300 also includes a performance operation unit unit 350 that can protrude upward from the performance operation unit cover unit 310 and is provided with the performance operation unit 301; a performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 that is attached to the operation unit base 315 and supports the performance operation unit unit 350 so that it can be raised and lowered; and a protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 that adjusts the upward protrusion force of the performance operation unit unit 350 caused by the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360.

The tray unit 200 bulges forward as a whole, with the performance operation unit 300 positioned in the center left-right so that the top surface of the performance operation unit 301 faces diagonally upward and forward. The upper tray 201 is positioned to the left of the performance operation unit 300 on the top surface, and the ball dispensing operation unit 220 is positioned to the right of the performance operation unit 300, while the lower tray 202 is positioned below the upper tray 201 and to the left of the performance operation unit 300.

[3-5a. Upper plate]
The upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 will be described in detail, primarily with reference to Figures 48 and 49. The upper tray 201 is formed by a tray unit base 211 and an upper tray body 212. The left side of the upper tray 201 bulges forward more than the center when viewed from the front, forming an upwardly open container shape. The upper tray 201 (upper tray body 212) bulges forward most from the left end to the right, approximately one-third of the width of the door frame 3. The front end of the upper tray 201 recedes backward from the most bulging portion toward the right when viewed from the front, and includes a guide passage 201a (see Figure 73) whose depth in the front-to-back direction is slightly greater than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The entire bottom surface of the upper tray 201, including the guide passage 201a, is inclined so that the right end is lower, and the right end of the guide passage 201a when viewed from the front is recessed below the ball dispensing operation unit 220.

When assembled into the tray unit 200, the upper tray 201 has a bottom surface that slopes downward from a position below the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 to a position slightly below the outer diameter of the game ball B relative to the upper end of the upper tray ball delivery port (not shown). This allows game balls B released forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a to be received and stored within the upper tray 201, and the received game balls B can be supplied from the right end of the guide passage portion 201a through the upper tray ball delivery port to the ball delivery unit 140 side.

In addition, the guide passage section 201a is equipped with a metal earthing fixture that is electrically grounded (earthed) in the pachinko machine 1, and when the game ball B comes into contact with (rolls around) this, the static electricity charged to the game ball B can be removed.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower tray 202 of the tray unit 200 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 50. Figure 50(a) is a horizontal cross-sectional view of the door frame at the lower tray ball supply port, showing the key parts, and Figure 50(b) is a cross-sectional view of a conventional door frame at the same location as Figure 50(a), showing the key parts. The lower tray 202 is located below the upper tray 201, to the left of the center of the tray unit 200 (door frame 3) in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front. The lower tray 202 is formed by a lower tray main body 251 and a tray unit base 211. The lower tray 202 is formed in the shape of a container capable of storing game balls B and has a lower tray ball removal hole 202a that penetrates the bottom wall vertically and allows game balls B to be removed. The lower tray ball removal hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is closed and closable by a lower tray ball removal cover 265 of the lower tray ball removal unit 260.

The lower tray 202 has a roughly rectangular shape extending left and right in plan view, with the front end on the left side protruding further forward than the right side from the center in the left-right direction. The lower tray 202 has a lower tray ball removal hole 202a that penetrates from top to bottom, located near the front end near the right end. The bottom surface of the lower tray 202 is inclined so that it slopes lower toward the lower tray ball removal hole 202a. When assembled into the tray unit 200, the lower tray ball removal hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is located below the performance operation unit 300, to the left of the front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c.

When the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is closed, the lower tray 202 can store game balls B released forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c, and by opening the lower tray ball removal hole 202a, the stored game balls B can be discharged below the tray unit 200 (e.g., to a cash box). Furthermore, when the lower tray ball removal hole 202a of the lower tray 202 is open, since the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is located in front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c, game balls B released forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be quickly discharged downward from the lower tray ball removal hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

In conventional pachinko machines, as shown in Figure 50 (b), a lower tray ball ejection hole 202b in the lower tray 202 is provided in front of the central axis of the lower tray ball supply port 211j of the tray unit base 211 in the tray base unit 210, which is connected to the ball ejection port 150d of the far cover unit 150. The lower tray ball supply port 211j is cylindrical and extends straight forward so that a game ball B released forward from the ball ejection port 150d will head straight toward the lower tray ball ejection hole 202b. This allows a game ball B released forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211j to be quickly ejected downward from the lower tray ball ejection hole 202b by moving the shortest distance.

However, if the lower tray ball supply port 211j is designed to guide game balls B straight toward the lower tray ball removal hole 202b, and the lower tray ball removal hole 202b is closed by the lower tray ball removal cover 265, there is a risk that game balls B will accumulate in the area to the right of the center of the lower tray 202, since the lower tray ball removal hole 202b and the lower tray ball supply port 211j are located near the right end of the lower tray 202. If game balls B concentrated in the right area of the lower tray 202 block the front of the lower tray ball supply port 211j, game balls B will no longer be released toward the lower tray 202 from the storage passage 150e of the fall cover unit 150, which may activate the full tank detection sensor 154 and determine that the lower tray 202 is full, even though there is still space in the left area of the lower tray 202.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 50(a), the left side wall of the lower tray ball supply port 211c is inclined so that it extends diagonally forward to the left. In more detail, the left side wall of the lower tray ball supply port 211c is inclined diagonally forward to the left at the location directly behind the lower tray ball removal hole 202a so that the distance between it and the front of the tray unit base 211 is long enough to allow at least one game ball B to circulate.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 50, the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is moved to the left of the central axis (line shown by the dashed dotted line) of the rear end of the lower tray ball supply port 211c (ball discharge port 150d).

As a result, by moving the lower tray ball removal hole 202a to the left, the lowest part of the lower tray 202 (the part of the lower tray ball removal hole 202a) moves to the left, thereby reducing the concentration and accumulation of game balls B on the right side of the lower tray 202 when the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is closed. Furthermore, even if multiple game balls B accumulate in the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball removal hole 202a and reach the rear end of the lower tray 202 (the front of the tray unit base 211), the left side wall of the lower tray ball supply port 211c extends diagonally, forming a gap between it and the rear end of the lower tray 202 through which game balls B can flow.As a result, game balls B released from the foul cover unit 150 (ball release port 150d) or the upper tray ball removal unit 240 (ball removal guide path 241c) toward the lower tray ball supply port 211c can be guided along the diagonally extending left side wall to the left side of the lower tray 202 and released, allowing game balls B to be neatly stored throughout the entire lower tray 202.

This prevents the full tank detection sensor 154 from activating and reporting a full tank even when there is sufficient space remaining in the lower tray 202 to store game balls B.

[3-5c. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 49. The dish base unit 210 comprises a flat dish unit base 211 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100 and extending to the left and right, an upper tray body 212 attached to the upper front of the dish unit base 211 and holding the upper tray 201, and a dish unit relay board 214 attached to the rear of the dish unit base 211 near the lower right corner.

The tray base unit 210 also includes a ball lending operation unit 220 attached to the upper front of the tray unit base 211, an upper tray pre-ball removal unit (not shown) attached to the front of the tray unit base 211 below the ball lending operation unit 220, and an upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 attached to the rear of the tray unit base 211 behind the upper tray pre-ball removal unit.

[3-5c-1. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 49. The dish unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and is formed in the shape of a flat plate (a shallow box shape with an open rear) extending left and right across the entire width of the door frame base 101.

The tray unit base 211 is equipped with an upper tray ball supply port 211a that penetrates from front to back near the upper left corner when viewed from the front and extends cylindrically to the rear; a speaker port 211b that penetrates from front to back below the upper tray ball supply port 211a and has punched metal attached to the front; a lower tray ball supply port 211c that penetrates from front to front at the lower part to the left of the center when viewed from the front and extends cylindrically to the rear; a notch 211d that is cut out in the right wall of the part that extends cylindrically to the rear of the lower tray ball supply port 211c to a size that allows game ball B to pass through; and an upper tray ball delivery port (not shown) that penetrates from front to front on the upper right side of the lower tray ball supply port 211c when viewed from the front and extends vertically, with its upper part located at the right end of the upper tray main body 212.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 has its front end opening into the rear wall of the upper tray 201, and its cylindrical rear end passes through the upper tray ball passage port 101g of the door frame base 101 from the front and connects to the front end of the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. This allows game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 to be supplied (paid out) into the upper tray 201 through the upper tray ball supply port 211a.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the lower tray ball supply port 211c has its front end opening into the rear wall of the lower tray 202, and its cylindrical rear end passes through the lower tray ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front and connects to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. This allows game balls B circulating through the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 to be supplied into the lower tray 202 through the lower tray ball supply port 211c. In addition, the downstream end of the ball removal guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper tray ball removal unit 240 is connected to the notch 211d formed in the cylindrically extending portion of the lower tray ball supply port 211c. As a result, by operating the upper tray ball removal button 222, the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 are discharged from the lower tray ball supply port 211c into the lower tray 202 via the upper tray ball supply port, the entrance 141a and ball removal port 141b of the ball supply unit 140, the ball supply guide path 241b and ball removal guide path 241c of the upper tray post-ball removal unit 240, and the cutout portion 211d.

When assembled to the tray base unit 210, the upper tray ball supply port is located in front of the ball receiving port (not shown) of the rear base 241 of the upper tray ball removal unit 240, and game balls B in the upper tray 201 are supplied from the ball receiving port of the upper tray ball removal unit 240 to the ball supply guide path 241b.

[3-5c-2. Upper tray body]
The upper tray body 212 of the tray base unit 210 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 49. The upper tray body 212 is attached to the front of the tray unit base 211 and cooperates with the tray unit base 211 to form the upper tray 201. The upper tray body 212 is formed in a container-like (dish-shaped) shape with an open top and rear. The upper tray body 212 extends left and right, with the left side bulging forward more than the center when viewed from the front. The front end of the upper tray body 212 recedes rearward from the most forward-bulging part toward the right when viewed from the front, and the depth in the front-to-back direction is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the upper tray body 212 is inclined so that the right end is lowest. The upper part of the upper tray body 212 near the right end is closed.

When the upper tray body 212 is assembled to the tray unit 200, the section that is closed at the top near the right end is attached so that it fits under the ball dispensing operation unit 220. Furthermore, the upper tray body 212 has a performance operation unit attachment portion 212a formed in the middle of the upper part in the left-right direction, and part of the performance operation unit 300 is attached to this performance operation unit attachment portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Dish unit relay board]
The dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 is intended to relay the connection between the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100 and the left dish decorative board 273, the right dish decorative board 278, and the operation unit relay board 332. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached near the lower right corner of the rear surface of the dish unit base 211. When attached to the dish unit base 211, the rear surface of this dish unit relay board 214 faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5c-4. Ball lending operation unit]
The ball dispensing operation unit 220 of the tray base unit 210 will be described mainly with reference to Figure 51. Figure 51 is an enlarged plan view showing the ball dispensing operation unit portion of the tray unit of the door frame. This ball dispensing operation unit 220 discharges game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202, dispenses a predetermined number of game balls B into the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 after inserting cash or a prepaid card into a ball dispensing machine (not shown) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, displays the remaining amount of cash or a prepaid card inserted into the ball dispensing machine, returns the cash or a prepaid card inserted into the ball dispensing machine minus the amount of dispensed game balls B, adjusts the volume, and adjusts the amount of light.

The ball lending operation unit 220 comprises a base 221 attached to the upper front of the tray unit base 211, an upper tray ball removal button 222 located near the left edge of the top surface of the base 221, a translucent, disc-shaped ball lending operation base 223 located to the right of the upper tray ball removal button 222 on the top surface of the base 221, a ball lending button 224 located on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, a return button 225 located on the front right side of the ball lending operation base 223, a ball lending display unit 226 located at the rear lower part of the ball lending operation base 223, a volume adjustment button 227 located in front of the ball lending button 224 on the outside of the base 221, and a light intensity adjustment button 228 located to the left of the volume adjustment button 227.

The upper tray ball removal button 222 protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from the top surface of the base 221, and can be moved downward by the player pressing it. The ball lending button 224 is circular and has the character "ball" (ball) printed on its top surface. The return button 225 is triangular. The ball lending display 226 is composed of three 7-segment LEDs and one bullet-shaped LED, and can be easily seen by the player through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 when illuminated.

By pressing the upper tray ball removal button 222, the ball lending operation unit 220 can eject game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 into the lower tray. Furthermore, by inserting cash or a prepaid card with remaining balance into the ball lending machine and then pressing the ball lending button 224, a predetermined number of game balls B will be supplied to the upper tray 201. By pressing the return button 225, the amount of game balls B loaned will be deducted from the cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine and returned. The ball lending display unit 226 displays the remaining balance of the cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine. Furthermore, the ball lending display unit 226 also displays an error code if the ball lending machine malfunctions.

The volume adjustment button 227 is used to adjust the volume of music, voice, sound effects, and other sound effects output from the top center speaker and top side speakers of the door frame 3 and the bass main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4. This volume adjustment button 227 is shaped like a gourd, with two circles combined. The volume adjustment button 227 has the letter "+" in the center of one (upper) circle and the letter "-" in the center of the other (lower) circle, and the area between the two circles has an image of sound coming from a speaker. The diameter of the circle on the "+" side of the volume adjustment button 227 is larger than the diameter of the circle on the "-" side. Pressing the "+" side of this volume adjustment button 227 increases the volume, and pressing the "-" side decreases the volume.

The light intensity adjustment button 228 is used to adjust the light intensity (brightness) of the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5. This light intensity adjustment button 228 is shaped like a gourd, with two circles combined. The light intensity adjustment button 228 has the letter "+" in the center of one (upper) circle and the letter "-" in the center of the other (lower) circle, and the area between the two circles has an image of a light bulb. The diameter of the circle on the "+" side of the light intensity adjustment button 228 is larger than the diameter of the circle on the "-" side. Pressing the "+" side of this light intensity adjustment button 228 makes it brighter, and pressing the "-" side makes it darker. Note that in addition to adjusting the brightness of the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, the brightness of the display screen of the performance display device 1600 may also be adjusted.

The volume adjustment button 227 and the light adjustment button 228 are different colors (for example, the volume adjustment button 227 is white and the light adjustment button 228 is black) to make it difficult for players to confuse them.

However, if the volume or light intensity is adjusted using the touch operation unit 302 or press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301, when a player-participation effect that requires operation of the effect operation unit 301 is not being executed, the player must operate the effect operation unit 301 appropriately to display a settings menu on the effect display device 1600 for adjusting the volume or light intensity, select the item to be adjusted, and then operate the touch operation unit 302 to change the volume or brightness of the light intensity, etc., which can be time-consuming. In contrast, according to this embodiment, the volume and light intensity can be adjusted directly by operating the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that simplifies the effort required to adjust the volume and light intensity and allows adjustments to be made in a short amount of time.

[3-5c-5. Upper tray ball removal unit]
The upper tray pre-ball removal unit and upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 in the tray base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figure 49. The upper tray post-ball removal unit 240 cooperates with the ball feeding unit 140 to eject the game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 to the lower tray 202 when the upper tray ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed.

The upper tray ball removal unit 240 comprises a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the tray unit base 211 so as to close the upper tray ball supply port from the rear, an upper tray ball removal slider 242 attached to the front surface of the rear base 241 so as to be able to slide up and down, a spring (not shown) that biases the upper tray ball removal slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241.

The rear base 241 is equipped with a ball receiving opening (not shown) that protrudes upward from the portion where the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached and opens toward the front, allowing game ball B to pass through; a ball feed guide path 241b that guides game ball B received in the ball receiving opening downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then rearward; and a ball removal guide path 241c that guides game ball B downward from a position lower than the ball feed guide path 241b on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then to the right when viewed from behind.

When assembled to the tray base unit 210, the ball receiving port is formed at the downstream end (right end when viewed from the front) of the guide passage section 201a of the upper tray 201, in a position that opens forward through the upper tray ball supply port of the tray unit base 211. When assembled to the door frame 3, the ball supply guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance 141a of the ball supply unit 140 is located at the rear of the lower part. This allows game balls B supplied to the upper tray 201 to pass through the ball receiving port and ball supply guide path 241b and enter the entrance 141a of the ball supply unit 140.

The portion of the ball removal guideway 241c extending to the left and right protrudes further to the right as viewed from the rear than the portion where the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is slidably mounted, is inclined so that the right end is lower as viewed from the rear, and opens to the right side as viewed from the rear. The rear side of the portion of the ball removal guideway 241c extending to the left and right is closed by a rear cover 244. When assembled to the door frame 3, the upper part of the portion extending vertically below the ball feeding guideway 241b is located in front of the ball removal opening 141b of the ball feeding unit 140, and the right end of the portion extending to the left and right as viewed from the rear is connected to the cutout 211d of the lower tray ball supply opening 211c in the tray unit base 211. As a result, the game ball B discharged from the ball ejection port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is released into the lower tray 202 from the lower tray ball supply port 211c via the ball ejection guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper tray ball removal slider 242 has a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is equipped with an actuation receiving part (not shown) that protrudes forward from the upper left corner, and an actuation transmitting part 242b that protrudes rearward from the rear surface behind the actuation receiving part. The actuation receiving part has a flat upper surface. The actuation transmitting part 242b is inclined so that its upper surface is positioned downward as it extends rearward, and its lower surface extends horizontally to connect with the rear end of the upper surface.

When the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the actuation receiving part protrudes forward through the tray unit base 211 from the rear, with the lower end of the upper tray ball removal button 222 abutting against the upper surface of the actuation receiving part. Furthermore, when the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the actuation transmission part 242b protrudes rearward from the rear base 241, with the actuation rod 143c of the ball removal member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 abutting against its upper surface.

The spring has its upper end attached to the rear base 241 and its lower end attached to the upper tray ball removal slider 242, urging the upper tray ball removal slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upper limit of its upward movement due to the spring's urging force, and can move downward by resisting the spring's urging force.

The upper tray ball removal unit 240 positions the upper tray ball removal slider 242 at its upper end of movement due to the spring force, and positions the upper tray ball removal button 222 at its upper end of movement via the actuation receiving part of the upper tray ball removal slider 242. Furthermore, because the spring force positions the upper tray ball removal slider 242 at its upper end of movement, the actuation rod 143c, which abuts the upper surface of the actuation transmission part 242b, is prevented from moving downward, and the partition part 143a of the ball removal member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball removal opening 141b, separating the two.

Therefore, when the upper tray ball removal button 222 is not pressed, the entrance 141a and the ball removal port 141b in the ball feeding unit 140 are partitioned, and the game ball B sent from the upper tray 201 to the ball receiving port can be sent from the entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144 to the ball supply port 142a and to the ball launching device 540 side.

On the other hand, when the upper tray ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the spring force, the upper tray ball removal slider 242 moves downward, allowing the operating rod 143c of the ball removal member 143, which abuts the upper surface of the operating transmission part 242b of the upper tray ball removal slider 242, to move downward.The load of the weight part 143d of the ball removal member 143 causes the ball removal member 143 to rotate, and the partition part 143a moves back from between the entrance 141a and the ball removal opening 141b.As a result, the game ball B that has entered the entrance 141a from the upper tray 201 through the ball receiving opening and ball feed guide path 241b is ejected forward from the ball removal opening 141b, which opens below the entrance 141a. The game ball B discharged forward from the ball discharge port 141b passes through the ball discharge guide path 241c and is guided through the cutout 211d into the lower tray ball supply port 211c, and is then released from the lower tray ball supply port 211c into the lower tray 202, resulting in the game ball B in the upper tray 201 being discharged into the lower tray 202.

When the downward pressure on the upper tray ball removal button 222 is released, the spring force causes the upper tray ball removal slider 242 to move upward, causing the upper tray ball removal button 222 to rise, and the ball removal member 143 rotates due to the operating rod 143c abutting the operating transmission part 242b, positioning the partition part 143a between the entrance 141a and the ball removal opening 141b, returning to its original state.

In this way, the upper tray ball removal unit 240 can feed the game ball B in the upper tray 201 to the ball launcher 540 via the ball feeding unit 140, or eject it to the lower tray 202.

[3-5d. Plate decoration unit]
The plate decoration unit 250 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 22 to 48. The plate decoration unit 250 has a lower plate 202 and is attached to the front of the plate base unit 210, with the performance operation unit 300 attached from the front in the center in the left-right direction. The plate decoration unit 250 decorates almost the entire plate unit 200.

The dish decoration unit 250 comprises a lower dish main body 251 attached to the lower front of the dish unit base 211 and working together with the dish unit base 211 to form the lower dish 202, a dish unit main body 252 attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251, a lower dish ball removal unit 260 attached to the underside of the lower dish main body 251, and a left dish decoration unit 270 and a right dish decoration unit 275 attached to the upper front of the dish unit main body 252, spaced apart from each other on the left and right.

[3-5d-1. Lower tray body]
The lower tray body 251 in the tray display unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 50. The lower tray body 251 cooperates with the tray unit base 211 of the tray base unit 210 to form the lower tray 202. The lower tray body 251 extends left and right and is formed in a container shape (dish-like) with open top and rear ends. This lower tray body 251 is attached to the lower front of the tray unit base 211, to the left of the center in the left-right direction, so that the open rear end is closed.

The lower tray body 251 has a generally rectangular shape extending left and right in plan view, with the front end on the left side protruding further forward than the right side from the center in the left-right direction. A lower tray ball removal hole 202a that penetrates vertically is formed near the front end of the right end of the lower tray body 251 in plan view. The bottom surface of the lower tray body 251 is inclined so that it slopes lower toward the lower tray ball removal hole 202a. The lower tray ball removal hole 202a is openably and closably closed by the lower tray ball removal cover 265 of the lower tray ball removal unit 260.

When the lower tray body 251 is assembled to the tray decoration unit 250, the outer periphery and part of the underside are covered by the tray unit body 252. Furthermore, when the lower tray body is assembled to the tray unit 200, the bottom surface is located lower than the lower tray ball supply port 211c of the tray unit base 211, and the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is located in front of the lower tray ball supply port 211c. This allows game balls B released forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c to be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The dish unit main body 252 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 48 and 49. The dish unit main body 252 is attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 in the dish base unit 210 and decorates the front of the dish unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 bulges out so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and bulges out so that the left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. In addition, the top surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear.

The dish unit main body 252 has upper side bulges 252a at the top that bulge forward from both the left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction and extend downward, spaced apart on the left and right, and a lower front decorative portion 252b at the bottom that bulges forward on the left side of the center in the left-right direction to cover the outer periphery of the lower dish main body 251.

The left and right upper side bulges 252a have a left dish decorative unit 270 and a right dish decorative unit 275 attached to their respective front surfaces.

The tray unit main body 252 has a lower tray opening 252d that penetrates from front to back between the upper side bulge 252a on the left side and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower tray opening 252d is large enough to allow a player's fingers to be inserted, and is formed so that it becomes wider from top to bottom as it extends to the left. The lower tray opening 252d is formed into a cylindrical shape that extends from front to back by the lower tray main body 251 and the underside of the upper side bulge 252a on the left side.

Furthermore, although not shown in the figure, the dish unit main body 252 is provided with a performance operation unit mounting portion formed between a pair of upper side bulges 252a in the center in the left-right direction, to which the performance operation unit 300 is attached. The performance operation unit mounting portion is formed with a width that is approximately 1/3 of the left-right width of the dish unit main body 252.

When assembled to the dish unit 200, the dish unit main body 252 is formed to completely cover the front of the dish base unit 210, with the speaker port 211b facing forward through the lower dish opening 252d.

[3-5d-3. Bottom tray ball removal unit]
The lower tray ball removal unit 260 in the tray decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 27 and 50. The lower tray ball removal unit 260 is attached to the underside of the lower tray body 251, and is used to store game balls B in the lower tray 202 or discharge game balls B from the lower tray 202 by opening and closing the lower tray ball removal hole 202a.

The lower tray ball removal unit 260 is equipped with a lower tray ball removal button 263 and a lower tray ball removal cover 265 that opens and closes the through hole by operating the lower tray ball removal button 263.

When the lower tray ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the tray decoration unit 250, the lower tray ball removal button 263 is aligned with the front surface of the lower front decorative part 252b of the tray unit main body 252, and the lower tray ball removal lid 265 closes the lower tray ball removal hole 202a. In this normal state, the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower tray ball removal lid 265, allowing game balls B to be stored in the lower tray 202.

In the normal state, when the lower tray ball removal button 263 is pressed backward, the lower tray ball removal cover 265 moves, opening the lower tray ball removal hole 202a, allowing the game ball B in the lower tray 202 to be ejected below the tray unit 200 through the lower tray ball removal hole 202a.

Furthermore, when the lower tray ball removal lid 265 is moved by pressing the lower tray ball removal button 263, the lower tray ball removal lid 265 remains in the moved position, the lower tray ball removal hole 202a is kept open, and the game balls B in the lower tray 202 can be continuously discharged downward.

To close the lower tray ball removal hole 202a from this state, press the lower tray ball removal button 263, which is set back from the front of the lower front decorative part 252b, backward and then release the pressure. The lower tray ball removal cover 265 will return to its normal position and the lower tray ball removal hole 202a will be closed. This allows game balls B to be stored in the lower tray 202.

[3-5d-4. Left and right decorative units]
The left dish decorative unit 270 and right dish decorative unit 275 of the dish decorative unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figure 48 etc. The left dish decorative unit 270 and right dish decorative unit 275 are attached to the upper front surface of the upper side bulge 252a of the dish unit main body 252. The left dish decorative unit 270 and right dish decorative unit 275 are located at the top of the dish unit 200 and decorate both the left and right sides of the performance operation unit 300.

The left-side decorative unit 270 comprises a semi-cylindrical left-side decorative body 271 that is translucent and extends left and right, a translucent left-side decorative lens 272 that passes through the left-side decorative body 271, and a left-side decorative substrate 273 that is located behind the left-side decorative lens 272 and has multiple LEDs mounted on its front surface.

The left decorative element 271 extends in a curved shape, moving forward and downward as it moves from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the top of the upper left side bulge 252a. The left decorative element 271 is formed as a semicircular arc that bulges forward, with the central axis extending diagonally upward and left at the left end and the central axis extending left and right at the right end, giving it the shape of a twisted semicylinder. The left decorative element 271 is milky white in color.

The left-hand decorative lens 272 extends longitudinally, coinciding with the front surface of the left-hand decorative body 271. The multiple LEDs mounted on the left-hand decorative board 273 are full-color LEDs, and when illuminated, can illuminate and decorate the left-hand decorative body 271.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the left end of the left decorative unit 270 is continuous with the bottom end of the left door frame unit 420. The left decorative unit 270 does not have ribs along the length of the left decorative body 271. Therefore, when the multiple LEDs on the left decorative board 273 are illuminated, the entire front of the left decorative body 271 can be illuminated and decorated in a generally uniform manner, giving the appearance of embedded fluorescent lights.

The right-hand dish decorative unit 275 comprises a translucent right-hand dish decorative body 276 that is semi-cylindrical and extends left and right, a translucent right-hand dish decorative lens 277 that passes through the right-hand dish decorative body 276, and a right-hand dish decorative substrate 278 that is provided behind the right-hand dish decorative lens 277 and has multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The right decorative element 276 extends in a curved shape, moving forward and downward as it moves from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the top of the upper right side bulge 252a. The right decorative element 276 is formed as a semicircular arc that bulges forward, with the central axis extending diagonally upward and to the right at the right end and the central axis extending left and right at the left end, giving it the shape of a twisted semicylinder. The right decorative element 276 is milky white in color.

The right-hand decorative lens 277 extends longitudinally, coinciding with the front surface of the right-hand decorative body 276. The multiple LEDs mounted on the right-hand decorative board 278 are full-color LEDs, and when illuminated, can illuminate and decorate the right-hand decorative body 276.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the right end of the dish right decorative unit 275 is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 430. Because the dish right decorative unit 275 does not have ribs along the length of the dish right decorative body 276, when the multiple LEDs on the dish right decorative board 278 are illuminated, the entire front of the dish right decorative body 276 can be illuminated and decorated in a generally uniform manner, giving the appearance of embedded fluorescent lights.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the left and right tray decorative units 270 and 275 protrude upward in part beyond the front end of the upper side bulge 252a of the tray unit main body 252 of the tray decorative unit 250, forming a step between them that makes the left and right tray decorative units 270 and 275 higher. This allows players to use the step between the left and right tray decorative units 270 and 275 and the upper side bulge 252a to hook their fingers, providing a fingerhold when leveling the game balls B in the upper tray 201 or operating the performance operation unit 301, described below. Furthermore, the step between the left and right tray decorative units 270 and 275 and the upper side bulge 252a prevents game balls B on the upper side bulge 252a from spilling forward.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of the production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the performance operation unit 300 in the tray unit 200 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 52 to 56. Figure 52(a) is a perspective view of the performance operation unit as seen from the front with the performance operation button facing upward, and (b) is a perspective view of the performance operation unit of (a) as seen from the back. Figure 53 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled into its main components as seen from above the front, and Figure 54 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled into its main components as seen from below the front. Figure 55(a) is a cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit when the performance operation unit is in the lowered position and the lifting spring retainer is at its uppermost position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit when the performance operation unit has moved from the position of (a) to the upper position. Figure 56 is a cross-sectional view of the performance operation unit when the performance operation unit is in the lowered position and the lifting spring retainer is at its lowermost position.

The performance operation unit 300 is located in the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction. It not only decorates the plate unit 200, but also allows players to operate it to participate in the performance when a player-participation performance is executed. The performance operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250.

The presentation operation unit 300 is equipped with a presentation operation section 301 that can be operated by the player. The presentation operation section 301 is composed of a touch operation section 302 that can be operated by the player through contact, and a pressure operation section 303 that can be operated by the player through pressure. The section 301 can accept player operations and move (vibrate) the presentation operation section 301, allowing the player to not only shoot the game ball B, but also to participate in the presentation during play. The presentation operation section 301 has the touch operation section 302 located above the pressure operation section 303. The presentation operation section 301 has the touch operation section 302 and pressure operation section 303 formed in a circular shape with a diameter that is approximately 5/8 the outer diameter of the presentation operation unit 300.

The performance operation unit 300 comprises a spherical performance operation cover unit 310 located on the front of the dish unit 200 in the center of the left-right direction; an operation unit base 315 to which the performance operation cover unit 310 is attached on the outside and which is attached to the front of the dish decoration unit 250; a performance operation outer peripheral decorative board 320 located on the top surface of the operation unit base 315 and equipped with multiple LEDs 320a for illuminating and decorating the upper part of the performance operation unit cover unit 310 (unit upper cover 312); an outer peripheral board cover 325 attached to the operation unit base 315 so as to cover the performance operation outer peripheral decorative board 320 from above; and an operation unit relay board unit 330 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 315.

The performance operation unit 300 also includes a performance operation unit 350 having a performance operation unit 301, a performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 that raises and lowers the performance operation unit 350, and a protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 that adjusts the protrusion force of the performance operation unit 350. The performance operation unit 350 is arranged so that it can be advanced and retreated upward from the top surface of the performance operation unit cover unit 310 by the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360.

[3-5e-1. Cover unit for performance operation]
The performance operation unit cover unit 310 of the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 53 to 56. The performance operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the performance operation unit attachment portion of the dish unit main body 252 of the dish decoration unit 250 via the operation unit base 315. The performance operation unit cover unit 310 decorates the outer periphery of the performance operation unit 300 (the periphery of the performance operation unit 350) at the center of the dish unit 200 in the left-right direction.

The performance operation unit cover unit 310 comprises a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 that is open upward and backward, and a circular unit upper cover 312 that is provided above the unit lower cover 311 and has an insertion opening 312a through which the performance operation unit 301 is inserted. The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape to cover the front and bottom of the operation unit base 315. The unit upper cover 312 is formed to be continuous with the outer surface of the unit lower cover 311. In other words, the outer surface of the performance operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in a roughly spherical shape. Incidentally, the performance operation unit cover unit 310 in this embodiment is spherical in shape with a diameter of 216 mm.

The performance control unit cover unit 310 is installed at an angle so that the axis of the annular unit upper cover 312 is positioned forward as it extends upward. In this embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of approximately 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) relative to the vertical.

When the performance operation unit cover unit 310 is assembled to the door frame 3, its front end becomes the front end of the door frame 3, and the distance from the front of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit lower cover 311 is approximately half the total width of the door frame base 101 in the left-right direction.

At least the upper cover 312 of the performance control unit cover unit 310 is translucent, and can be illuminated by the multiple LEDs on the performance control unit outer periphery decorative board 320 (described below).

When assembled to the tray unit 200, the front end of the performance operation unit cover unit 310 protrudes further forward than the upper tray 201 and lower tray 202. The performance operation unit cover unit 310 is also connected so that the left tray decorative body 271 and the right tray decorative body 276 extend outward from both the left and right sides of the unit lower cover 311. This makes the performance operation unit 300 stand out, and the integrated decoration gives it a nice appearance.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 315 of the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 53 to 56. The rear side of the operation unit base 315 is attached to the performance operation unit mounting portion 212a of the upper tray body 212 in the tray base unit 210. The front and bottom of the operation unit base 315 are covered by the unit lower cover 311, and the top is covered by the unit upper cover 312 and the performance operation unit 301. The operation unit base 315 is formed in the shape of a container with an open top.

The operation unit base 315 comprises a main body 315a, which is roughly a cubic box with an open top, and a flange 315b, which extends outward from the top end of the main body and has a circular outer periphery. The main body 315a houses the performance operation unit 350. The bottom wall of the main body 315a is also fitted with the lower ends of a pair of guide shafts 362 and a central shaft 366 of the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 in the performance operation unit 350, which will be described later. The main body 315a also rotatably supports the lower end of the adjustment screw 384 of the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 on the upper surface of the bottom wall. The board base 331 of the operation unit relay board unit 330 is attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the main body 315a.

The performance operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 is placed on the upper surface of the flange portion 315b. The annular outer peripheral board cover 325 is attached to the flange portion 315b so as to sandwich the performance operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320. The unit upper cover 312 is attached to the outer peripheral board cover 325.

When the operation unit base 315 is assembled to the performance operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 315b is positioned approximately flush with the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311.

[3-5e-3. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 330 of the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 53 to 56. The operation unit relay board unit 330 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 315. The operation unit relay board unit 330 includes a board base 331 attached to the rear surface of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315, an operation unit relay board 332 attached to the rear surface of the board base 331, and a board cover 333 attached to the board base 331 so as to cover the operation unit relay board 332 from behind.

The operation unit relay board 332 relays the connection between the performance operation unit outer decorative board 320 (front decorative board 321 and rear decorative board 322), button outer decorative board 355, vibration motor 356, contact detection sensor main body 358, button middle decorative board 364, operation button lifting drive motor 367, pressure detection sensor 373, lifting detection sensor 374, protrusion force detection sensor 375, and protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 and the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210.

[3-5e-4. Production operation unit]
The performance operation unit 350 in the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 53 to 56. The performance operation unit 350 is provided so as to face outward from the insertion opening 312a of the unit upper cover 312 in the performance operation unit cover unit 310, and can function as the touch operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303.

The performance operation unit 350 comprises a cylindrical button body 351 with a closed top end, a disk-shaped contact detector 352 attached to the top of the button body 351, a cylindrical button sleeve 353 inserted into the button body 351 from below, a disk-shaped button base 354 attached to the bottom of the button sleeve 353 and supported so that it can be raised and lowered by a performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360, and an annular outer button decorative board 355 positioned above the button base 354 and with multiple LEDs 355a mounted on its top surface.

The performance operation unit 350 also includes a vibration motor 356 located between the button body 351 and the button sleeve 353, a motor cover 357 that attaches the vibration motor 356 to the button sleeve 353, and a contact detection sensor body 358 that is connected to the contact detection body 352 and attached to the outer periphery of the button sleeve 353.

The button body 351 is entirely transparent. It has a disk-shaped upper surface 351a that curves upward to bulge, a cylindrical portion 351b that extends downward from the outer periphery of the upper surface 351a, and a locking portion 351c that protrudes downward from the lower end of the cylindrical portion 351b. The upper surface 351a is shaped to form part of a sphere with the same diameter as the spherical surface of the performance operation unit cover unit 310. This upper surface 351a is decorated with a circular ornament that is approximately half the outer diameter. The outer diameter (diameter) of the upper surface 351a (cylindrical portion 351b) is approximately 5/8 the diameter of the performance operation unit cover unit 310. The length (height) of the cylindrical portion 351b is approximately 5/8 the diameter of the upper surface 351a. Four locking portions 351c are provided at equal intervals around the circumference of the cylindrical portion 351b. The locking portions 351c are locked to the button base 354. In this embodiment, the button body 351 has a diameter of approximately 127 mm.

The contact detector 352 has a circular outer periphery and is formed in a dish-like shape with a certain width of inner bulge upward from the outer periphery. The contact detector 352 is located below the circular decoration on the top surface 351a of the button body 351, and bulges upward at an angle with a flat inner surface. This makes the contact detector 352 appear to be part of the decoration on the button body 351. The contact detector 352 has flat downward extension pieces 352a that extend downward from both the left and right ends of the outer periphery and the rear end. The contact detector 352 is attached to the underside of the top surface 351a of the button body 351. The contact detector 352 is made of punched metal. The multiple holes in the punched metal reduce the capacitance of the contact detector 352 relative to its overall area, preventing false detection. Additionally, because the contact detector 352 is made of perforated metal, light from the LED 364a on the button center decorative substrate 364 located below can be transmitted upward, allowing the center of the top surface 351a of the button body 351 to be illuminated and decorated in excellent condition.

The contact detector 352 is connected to the external electrode terminal of the connector in the contact detection sensor main body 358. This allows the contact detector 352 to function as a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance, and to detect contact or approach of a detection target (the player's hand) with the top or side surface of the button main body 351. In other words, the contact detector 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358 allow the button main body 351 to function as the contact operation unit 302.

The button sleeve 353 has a cylindrical sleeve body 353a that extends vertically, and an annular flange portion 353b that extends outward from the lower end of the sleeve body 353a. The button sleeve 353 is formed to be entirely transparent. The outer diameter of the sleeve body 353a is approximately 4/7 of the inner diameter of the button body 351, and its length is approximately the same as the length of the cylindrical portion 351b of the button body 351. The button sleeve 353 allows light from the multiple LEDs 355a on the button outer decorative substrate 355 to pass upward through the flange portion 353b.

The button base 354 is disk-shaped and has approximately the same diameter as the outer diameter of the button body 351. It is attached to the lower end of the button body 351 so as to close the open lower end of the button body 351. The button base 354 has a pair of guide holes 354a that penetrate vertically at positions symmetrical about the center, a central hole 354b that penetrates vertically at the center, and a pair of guide pins 354c that protrude from the inner surface of the central hole toward the center. The guide shafts 362 of the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 are slidably inserted into the pair of guide holes 354a. The central hole 354b has an inner diameter large enough to allow the lifting cam member 371 to pass through. The pair of guide pins 354c face each other on the same axis and are attached so that they can rotate around the axis.

The button base 354 extends downward and further has a flat detection piece 354d that is detected by the pressure detection sensor 373 of the effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360. The locking portion 351c of the button body 351 is locked to the outer peripheral surface of the button base 354. A pair of guide shafts 362 is inserted into a pair of guide holes 354a, thereby guiding the button base 354 so that it can be raised and lowered in the vertical direction. Furthermore, the button base 354 is moved in the vertical direction by the pair of guide pins 354c being guided by the cam portion 371a of the lifting cam member 371. The upper ends of a pair of lifting springs 365 of the effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360 abut against the underside of the button base 354, and the button base is biased upward by the pair of lifting springs 365.

The button exterior decorative substrate 355 has multiple LEDs 355a mounted on its top surface. The multiple LEDs 355a are arranged in a row on two concentric circles. More specifically, the multiple LEDs 355a are provided in a section slightly outside the sleeve body 353a of the button sleeve 353 and in a section near the center of the width of the flange portion 353b. By appropriately illuminating the LEDs 355a on the button exterior decorative substrate 355, the section on the top surface of the button body 351 outside the contact detector 352 and the side (circumferential surface) of the button body 351 can be illuminated and decorated.

The vibration motor 356 has an eccentric weight attached to its rotation shaft, and can generate vibrations by rotating the weight. The vibration motor 356 is positioned so that its rotation shaft extends in the left-right direction. In other words, the vibration motor 356 is positioned so that its rotation shaft extends in a direction perpendicular to the forward and backward movement direction of the performance operation unit 301. The vibration motor 356 is also located on a straight line that passes through a pair of guide shafts 362 that guide the performance operation unit 301 (performance operation unit 350) in the up-down direction. This allows vibrations from the vibration motor 356 to be efficiently transmitted to the performance operation unit 301. The impact of vibrations from the vibration motor 356 on the pair of guide holes 354a (pair of guide shafts 362) can also be reduced.

The contact detection sensor body 358 is a capacitance sensor. While not shown in detail, the contact detection sensor body 358 includes a sensor IC with a surge protection circuit, a transmitter circuit, a detection and smoothing circuit, and a comparison circuit, an output circuit, a constant-voltage circuit that supplies power to the sensor IC and output circuit, sensor electrodes, and a connector. The contact detection sensor body 358 can detect the capacitance of the internal sensor electrode. The connector of the contact detection sensor body 358 also includes an external electrode terminal connected to the sensor electrode, which is connected to the contact detection element 352. In other words, the contact detection sensor body 358 allows the contact detection element 352 to function as an external sensor electrode. The contact detection sensor body 358 detects capacitance with the sensor electrode and outputs an ON signal when the capacitance exceeds a predetermined capacitance set by an external resistor. In this embodiment, the contact detection sensor body 358 outputs an ON signal when the capacitance exceeds a predetermined capacitance, but it may also output multiple signals depending on the capacitance.

In this embodiment, the effect operation unit 350 is provided with a contact detector 352 on the underside of the upper surface 351a of the button body 351. The contact detector 352 functions as a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance using the contact detection sensor body 358. This allows the contact detector 352 to detect contact or approach of a detectable object (a player's hand) with the top surface of the button body 351. Furthermore, the contact detector 352 of the effect operation unit 350 has multiple downward extension pieces 352a that extend downward. This allows the effect operation unit 350 to detect contact or approach of a detectable object (a player's hand) with the side of the button body 351 when the effect operation unit 350 is protruding upward. Therefore, the effect operation unit 350, together with the contact detector 352 and the contact detection sensor body 358, allows the button body 351 to function as the contact operation unit 302.

This performance operation unit 350 is supported by the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 so that it can be raised and lowered in the vertical direction. When the performance operation unit 350 is moved to its lowest position (normal state), the upper surface 351a of the button body 351 is flush with the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312 of the performance operation unit cover unit 310, making the performance operation unit 300 appear as a single sphere. When the performance operation unit 350 is moved upward from its normal position by the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360, the upper surface 351a of the button body 351 protrudes above the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312, and can function as the pressing operation unit 303 by pressing downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365.

More specifically, when the performance operation unit 350 is in its lowest position (normal state), it will not move any further downwards even if pressed, and no pressing operation can be performed. In this normal state, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the pressure detection sensor 373 of the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360. When the performance operation unit 350 is moved higher than its normal position by the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 moves away from the pressure detection sensor 373 and becomes undetectable. When the top surface of the performance operation unit 350 is pressed downward and the performance operation unit 350 is lowered to the lower limit of movement against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the pressure detection sensor 373. This detects the pressing operation of the performance operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303).

In addition, the effect operation unit 350 has the button body 351 covering the top of the contact detection element 352, which is made of perforated metal. Therefore, when operating the contact operation element 302, the player comes into contact with the smooth, spherical top surface of the button body 351. Instead, the player does not directly touch the surface of the perforated metal, which has irregularities caused by the multiple holes, allowing the player to smoothly operate the contact operation element 302. Furthermore, because the contact detection element 352 is covered by the button body 351, it is possible to impart any desired tactile sensation to the contact operation element 302 by forming fine irregularities or multiple ridges on the surface (top) of the button body 351. This increases the design freedom for the contact operation element 302, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is even more enjoyable for players.

In the above, the button body 351 is transparent, but this is not limiting. The button body 351 may be opaque or translucent, so that the lower side is difficult to see through. This makes it difficult to see the contact detection body 352 made of punched metal through the button body 351, improving the appearance of the effect operation unit 350. Furthermore, if the button body 351 is opaque, it is desirable to make it translucent. This allows the button body 351 to be illuminated and decorated by light from the LED 355a on the outer button decorative board 355 and the LED 364a on the inner button decorative board 364 located below, and the player can be entertained by the illuminated effect of the button body 351.

[3-5e-5. Performance operation unit lifting mechanism]
The performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 in the performance operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 53 to 56. The performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 is attached to the operation unit base 315 and can raise and lower the performance operation unit 350. The performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 comprises a lifting mechanism base 361 having an approximately circular outer periphery and attached within the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 below the performance operation unit unit 350; a pair of cylindrical guide shafts 362 arranged symmetrically about the central axis of the lifting mechanism base 361, with their lower ends attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 and their upper ends extending upward through the operation unit base 315 and the button base 354; a disk-shaped upper base 363 connecting the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 and having an outer periphery smaller than the inner diameter of the button sleeve 353; and a button interior decorative board 364 attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363 and equipped with a plurality of LEDs 364a capable of emitting light upward.

The performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 also includes a pair of lifting springs 365, through which a pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted, and which urge the button base 354 upward, and a central shaft 366 that passes vertically through the center of the lifting mechanism base 361 and the button base 354, with its lower end attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a and its upper end attached to the upper base 363.

Furthermore, the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 comprises an operation button lifting drive motor 367 attached to the underside of the lifting mechanism base 361 so that its rotation shaft protrudes upward; a spur gear-shaped lifting drive gear 368 attached to the rotation shaft of the operation button lifting drive motor 367; a spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 meshing with the lifting drive gear 368 and rotatably attached to the upper side of the lifting mechanism base 361; and a lifting cam drive gear member 370 rotated by the driven gear 369 and rotatably attached with the central shaft 366 inserted therethrough.

The performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 also includes a lifting cam member 371, the lower end of which is connected to the lifting cam drive gear member 370 and to which the central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably attached, which lifts and lowers the button base 354 by rotating, and a disk-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the top of the lifting mechanism base 361 so as to cover the lifting drive gear 368, driven gear 369, and lifting cam drive gear member 370 from above.

The performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 also includes a pressure detection sensor 373 attached to the lifting mechanism base 361 that detects the pressing operation of the pressure operation unit 303, a lifting detection sensor 374 attached to the lifting mechanism base 361 that detects the lifting of the performance operation unit 350 by detecting the rotational position of the lifting cam drive gear member 370 (lifting cam member 371), and a protruding force detection sensor 375 attached to the lifting mechanism base 361 that detects the lifting force of the performance operation unit 350 by detecting the lifting of the lifting spring lower holding member 385 of the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380.

The lifting mechanism base 361 includes a disk-shaped base body 361a, multiple legs 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a, and a pair of through-holes 361c that penetrate the base body 361a and allow the lifting spring 365 to pass through together with a pair of guide shafts 362. The base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315. A driven gear 369, a lifting cam drive gear member 370, a gear cover 372, a pressure detection sensor 373, and an ejection force detection sensor 375 are attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a. Additionally, an operation button lifting drive motor 367, a lifting detection sensor 374, and an ejection force adjustment drive motor 381 are attached to the lower surface of the base body 361a. The lower ends of the legs 361b of the lifting mechanism base 361 are attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315. This forms a space in which the ejection force adjustment mechanism 380 is disposed between the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315 and the base main body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. A pair of through holes 361c are provided in the base main body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361, respectively, at positions half the diameter of the base main body 361a toward the front and rear from the center.

The pair of guide shafts 362 pass through a pair of through-holes 361c located at a distance half the diameter of the base body 361a from the center forward and backward in the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The central shaft 366 passes through the center of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The pair of guide shafts 362 and central shaft 366 have their respective lower ends attached to the bottom wall of the main body 315a of the operation unit base 315, and their respective upper ends attached to the upper base 363. The pair of guide shafts 362 and central shaft 366 are formed from metal rods.

The outer diameter of the upper base 363 is approximately half the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The upper base 363 has a lower protrusion that protrudes downward. By abutting the lower protrusion of the upper base 363 against the upper protrusion of the gear cover 372, a space capable of accommodating the lifting cam member 371 can be formed between the upper base 363 and the lifting mechanism base 361.

The button center decorative substrate 364 has multiple full-color LEDs 364a mounted on its top surface. By appropriately illuminating the multiple LEDs 364a, the button center decorative substrate 364 can illuminate and decorate the central portion of the top surface of the button body 351.

The pair of lifting springs 365 are coil springs, each having a guide shaft 362 inserted therethrough. The lower ends of the pair of lifting springs 365 abut against the lifting spring lower holding member 385 of the ejection force adjustment mechanism 380, and the upper ends abut against the button base 354.

The lifting cam drive gear member 370 comprises a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and is connected to the lower end of the lifting cam member 371, and a lifting detection piece 370c that protrudes downward from the gear portion 370a in a cylindrical shape, has two opposing notches cut out, and is detected by the lifting detection sensor 374. The lifting cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The lifting cam member 371 is cylindrical and rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 through its center. The lifting cam member 371 passes through the gear cover 372 and is located between the upper base 363 and the lifting mechanism base 361. The lifting cam member 371 has a pair of cam portions 371a that protrude outward and are spaced 180 degrees apart in the circumferential direction on the cylindrical outer surface. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pin 354c of the button base 354.

The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending perpendicular to the axis near its lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, a second cam 371d extending upward parallel to the axis from one end of the first cam 371b, and a third cam 371e extending spirally upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite the second cam 371d (see Figure 55, etc.). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and adjacent cam portions 371a are separated by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 354c of the button base 354.

The lifting cam member 371 also has a connected portion 371f at its lower end that connects to the connecting portion 370b of the lifting cam drive gear member 370.

The lifting/lowering cam member 371 is formed so that the second cam 371d of the cam portion 371a extends upward from the rear end of the first cam 371b when the lifting/lowering cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view. By rotating, the lifting/lowering cam member 371 can guide the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 with the cam portion 371a, thereby raising and lowering the button base 354 (performance operation unit 350), which is biased upward by the lifting spring 365.

The gear cover 372 has a through hole through which the lifting spring 365 and lifting cam member 371 can pass. The gear cover 372 also has an upper protrusion that protrudes upward at a location facing the lower protrusion of the upper base 363. By abutting the upper protrusion against the lower end of the lower protrusion of the upper base 363, the gear cover 372 can form a space between the upper base 363 and the lifting mechanism base 361 that can accommodate the lifting cam member 371.

The pressure detection sensor 373 detects the pressure operation of the performance operation unit 350 (pressure operation unit 303) by detecting the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 in the performance operation unit 350. When the performance operation unit 350 is moved to the lowest position (normal state), the pressure detection sensor 373 constantly detects the detection piece 354d of the button base 354. When the performance operation unit 350 is moved upward by the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 from the normal state, the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 moves away, and this pressure detection sensor 373 enters a non-detecting state. When the top surface of the performance operation unit 350 is pressed downward and the performance operation unit 350 is lowered to the lower limit of movement against the biasing force of the lift spring 365, the pressure detection sensor 373 detects the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 and can detect a pressure operation on the performance operation unit 350 (pressure operation unit 303).

The lifting/lowering detection sensor 374 detects the lifting/lowering detection piece 370c of the lifting/lowering cam drive gear member 370, thereby detecting the rotational position of the lifting/lowering cam member 371 via the connected portion 371f, which is connected to the connecting portion 370b of the lifting/lowering cam drive gear member 370.

The protrusion force detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385d of the lifting spring lower holding member 385 in the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380.

The performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 can support the performance operation unit unit 350 so that it can be raised and lowered via the button base 354 using a pair of guide shafts 362 aligned front to back, and can urge the performance operation unit unit 350 upward via the button base 354 using a pair of lifting springs 365. The performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 can also raise and lower the performance operation unit unit 350 (performance operation unit 301) relative to the performance operation unit cover unit 310 by rotating the lifting cam member 371 using the operation button lifting drive motor 367. The performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360 can also illuminate and decorate the central portion of the top surface of the button body 351 by appropriately illuminating multiple LEDs 364a mounted on the button inner decorative board 364.

In the normal state of the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is engaged with the engagement portion 371c provided on the lower end of the lifting cam member 371 (see Figure 55 (a)). In this normal state, the performance operation unit 350 is positioned at the downward end of its travel via the button base 354, and even if the performance operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) is pressed downward, the performance operation unit 350 will not move downward. Therefore, in the normal state, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected. Also, in the normal state, the surface (top surface) of the unit upper cover 312 of the performance operation unit cover unit 310 and the top surface of the button body 351 of the performance operation unit unit 350 are aligned, and the performance operation unit cover unit 310 and the button body 351 form a single sphere.

When the operation button lift drive motor 367 rotates the lift drive gear 368 counterclockwise in a plan view in the normal state (when the performance operation unit 350 is in the lowered position), the lift cam drive gear member 370 rotates counterclockwise in a plan view via the driven gear 369 that meshes with the lift drive gear 368, and the lift cam member 371 connected to the lift cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When this lift cam member 371 rotates counterclockwise, the cam portion 371a visible from the front in Figure 55(a) moves to the right, and the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 rolls from the locking portion 371c to the portion of the first cam 371b to the left of the locking portion 371c. At the same time, the button base 354 moves slightly downward via the guide pin 354c against the biasing force of the lift spring 365.

As the lifting cam member 371 rotates, the guide pin 354c, which rolls relatively leftward along the first cam 371b, moves from the left end of the first cam 371b toward the second cam 371d. Because the second cam 371d extends upward perpendicularly to the first cam 371b, the force of the lifting spring 365 causes the guide pin 354c to move upward along the second cam 371d, and the button base 354 rises together with the guide pin 354c, bringing the performance operation unit 350 into its raised position. In this state, the detection piece 354d moves away from the pressure detection sensor 373, so the pressure detection sensor 373 is in a non-detecting state.

The lifting spring lower holding member 385 of the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, which the lower end of the lifting spring 365 abuts, can be moved to various positions in the vertical direction by the protruding force adjustment drive motor 381, as will be described in detail below. The amount of compression of the lifting spring 365 can be changed depending on the vertical position of the lifting spring lower holding member 385, so the performance operation unit 350 can be protruded to the raised position with a protruding force that corresponds to the amount of compression of the lifting spring 365.

When the performance operation unit 350 is in the raised position, as shown in Figure 55 (b), the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. In this state, the operation of the operation button lifting drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

When the performance operation unit 350 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the button base 354 abuts against the lower surface of the upper base 363, restricting further upward movement of the button base 354. Furthermore, when the performance operation unit 350 is in the raised position, the entire performance operation unit 350 (performance operation unit 301) moves upward, and the upper surface 351a of the button main body 351 protrudes above the upper surface of the unit upper cover 312.

When the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) of the performance operation unit 350 is pressed downward with a force stronger than the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 in this raised position, the performance operation unit 350 moves downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, and the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372. When the button base 354 comes into contact with the gear cover 372, the button base 354 moves to the lowered position, and together with the button base 354, the performance operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) also moves to the lowered position.

In this way, when the button base 354 abuts against the gear cover 372, the detection piece 354d protruding downward from the button base 354 is detected by the pressure detection sensor 373, and pressure on the button body 351 (pressure operation unit 303) of the performance operation unit is detected.

To return the performance operation unit 350 (pressing operation unit 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the operation button lifting/lowering drive motor 367 rotates the lifting/lowering cam member 371 counterclockwise in plan view. In Figure 55(b), the third cam 371e, which abuts the upper left of the guide pin 354c of the button base 354, moves to the right (towards the guide pin 354c). As a result, the guide pin 354c is pressed downward by the third cam 371e, and the button base 354 moves downward via the guide pin 354c against the biasing force of the lifting/lowering spring 365.

When returning the performance operation unit 350 to the lowered position, the protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 of the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 moves the lifting spring lower holding member 385 downward, reducing the amount of compression of the lifting spring 365 (see Figure 56). This weakens the force of the lifting spring 365 that urges the performance operation unit 350 upward, and therefore weakens the force acting on the third cam 371e of the lifting cam member 371 via the guide pin 354c of the button base 354. This reduces the load on the operation button lifting drive motor 367 that rotates the lifting cam member 371, reducing damage (failure) of the operation button lifting drive motor 367. Furthermore, an inexpensive motor with low torque can be used as the operation button lifting drive motor 367.

When the guide pin 354c moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e toward the first cam 371b as the lifting cam member 371 rotates, the downward movement of the button base 354 stops and the guide pin 354c rolls along the first cam 371b. When the guide pin 354c subsequently reaches the locking portion 371c midway along the first cam 371b, the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 inserts the guide pin 354c into the upwardly recessed locking portion 371c, and the rotation of the lifting cam member 371 by the operation button lifting drive motor 367 is stopped, causing the performance operation unit 350 to return to its original lowered position.

In the above example, the operation button lifting/lowering drive motor 367 rotates the lifting cam member 371 counterclockwise in the performance operation unit lifting/lowering mechanism 360, moving the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 from the first cam 371b (locking portion 371c) to the second cam 371d and causing the button base 354 (button body 351) to immediately protrude from the lowered position to the raised position. However, in the normal state where the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is locked with the locking portion 371c of the lifting cam member 371 and the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) is moved to the lowered position, the operation button lifting/lowering drive motor 367 may also rotate the lifting cam member 371 clockwise in a plan view. Incidentally, in this embodiment, the lifting distance of the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) by the performance operation unit lifting/lowering mechanism 360 is approximately 40 mm.

When the lift-down cam member 371 is rotated clockwise under normal conditions, the guide pin 354c moves from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e, and the urging force of the lift-down spring 365 causes the guide pin 354c to move upward along the third cam 371e. Then, by stopping the rotation of the lift-down cam member 371 when the guide pin 354c is halfway along the third cam 371e, the upward protrusion of the button body 351 can be stopped at any position between the lowered and raised positions. Then, by protruding the button body 351 to a position above the lowered position, it becomes possible to press the button body 351 downward against the urging force of the lift-down spring 365, allowing the button body 351 to function as the pressing operation unit 303.

When the third cam 371e is used to protrude the button body 351 upward, it is desirable to move the lifting spring lower holding member 385 of the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 downward to weaken the biasing force of the lifting spring 365. This reduces the load on the rotation of the lifting cam member 371 (operation button lifting drive motor 367) and also makes the button body 351 feel lighter when pressed.

In this way, the amount of protrusion of the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) can be changed depending on the rotational position of the lifting cam member 371. Therefore, by varying the amount of protrusion of the button body 351 depending on the game status (for example, depending on the result of a special lottery drawn when game ball B is received in the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004), it is possible to suggest to the player the degree of expectation for the game.

In addition, at least one shallow recess in which the guide pin 354c can be engaged may be provided midway on the third cam 371e of the lifting cam member 371. This allows the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) to be stably protruded to a position with the same amount of protrusion, preventing variations in the amount of protrusion. Furthermore, if a recess is provided in at least one location midway on the third cam 371e, the guide pin 354c can be engaged in the recess, eliminating the need to keep the lifting cam member 371 stopped from rotating by the operation button lifting drive motor 367, and reducing the load on the operation button lifting drive motor 367.

[3-5e-6. Ejection force adjustment mechanism]
The protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 in the performance operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 53 to 56. The protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 can change the momentum (protruding force) with which the performance operation unit 350 (pressure operation unit 303) protrudes upward by changing the compression amount of the lifting spring 365 that urges the performance operation unit 350 upward. The protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 is provided between the bottom wall of the main body 315a in the operation unit base 315 and the base main body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361.

The ejection force adjustment mechanism 380 includes an ejection force adjustment drive motor 381 attached to the underside of the base body 361a of the elevator mechanism base 361; a spur gear-shaped pinion gear 382 attached to the rotation shaft of the ejection force adjustment drive motor 381; a transmission gear 383 meshed with the pinion gear 382 and rotatably attached to the underside of the base body 361a; an adjustment screw 384 having a spur gear-shaped gear portion 384a meshed with the transmission gear 383 and a screw portion 384b extending cylindrically downward from the gear portion 384a and having a spiral groove formed on its outer periphery, through which the central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably supported; and an elevator spring lower retaining member 385 meshed with the screw portion 384b of the adjustment screw 384, through which a pair of guide shafts 362 pass and against which the lower ends of a pair of elevator springs 365 abut.

The protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 is attached to the underside of the base body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361 so that a gap is formed between it and the underside of the base body 361a. The protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381 has a rotation shaft that protrudes into the gap between it and the base body 361a.

The adjustment screw 384 is formed with a length that extends from the bottom wall of the main body portion 315a of the operation unit base 315 to the base main body 361a of the lifting mechanism base 361. The screw portion 384b of the adjustment screw 384 is formed in a cylindrical shape with a larger diameter than the gear portion 384a.

The lifting spring lower holding member 385 has a main body portion 385a extending forward and backward, a screw hole 385b that penetrates vertically in the center of the main body portion 385a and screws into the screw portion 384b, downwardly recessed spring holding recesses 385c provided at both the front and rear ends of the main body portion 385a and capable of accommodating the lower end of the lifting spring 365, and a flat detection piece 385d extending upward from the front end of the main body portion 385a. The guide shafts 362 pass through the center of each of the pair of spring holding recesses 385c of the lifting spring lower holding member 385. The detection piece 385d is detected by the protrusion force detection sensor 375 of the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360.

When the pinion gear 382 is rotated by the ejection force adjustment drive motor 381, the ejection force adjustment mechanism 380 can rotate the adjustment screw 384 around the central shaft 366 via the transmission gear 383 and gear portion 384a. Then, by rotating the adjustment screw 384 using the ejection force adjustment drive motor 381, the ejection force adjustment mechanism 380 can move the lifting spring lower holding member 385 up and down via the threaded hole 385b that engages with the screw portion 384b.

When the lifting spring lower holding member 385 is moved upward, the lower end of the lifting spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c moves upward, increasing the amount of compression of the lifting spring 365. On the other hand, when the lifting spring lower holding member 385 is moved downward, the lower end of the lifting spring 365 held in the spring holding recess 385c moves downward, decreasing the amount of compression of the lifting spring 365 (see Figure 56). In other words, moving the lifting spring lower holding member 385 upward increases the force exerted by the lifting spring 365 on the performance operation unit 350, while moving the lifting spring lower holding member 385 downward decreases the force exerted by the lifting spring 365 on the performance operation unit 350. This allows the lifting force adjustment mechanism 380 to adjust the upward protruding force of the performance operation unit 350.

The detection piece 385d of the lifting spring lower holding member 385 is detected by the protruding force detection sensor 375 when the lifting spring lower holding member 385 is raised to its highest position. In other words, the detection piece 385d is detected by the protruding force detection sensor 375 when the lifting spring 365 is compressed to its greatest extent. As a result, if the protruding force detection sensor 375 detects the detection piece 385d while the lifting spring lower holding member 385 is being moved upward by the protruding force adjustment drive motor 381, the upward movement of the lifting spring lower holding member 385 by the protruding force adjustment drive motor 381 is stopped, thereby preventing further compression of the lifting spring 365 and damage to the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380.

Furthermore, as described above, the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 can appropriately adjust the protruding force of the effect operation unit 350. Therefore, when the effect operation unit 350 is in the lowered position, the contact detector 352 detects contact or proximity of a detectable object (e.g., a player's finger) with the button body 351, and the effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360 is used to protrude the effect operation unit 350 so that it abuts against the detectable object, the vertical position of the lifting spring lower retaining member 385 can be appropriately selected to vary the protruding force of the button body 351. This makes it possible to vary the strength of the force applied to the player's finger when the button body 351 protrudes upward. Therefore, when the button body 351 abuts strongly, the player can be made to believe that something good is about to happen, heightening the player's anticipation for the game. Therefore, the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 can indicate to the player the degree of expectation for the game by increasing or decreasing the protruding force of the button body 351 depending on the game status (for example, depending on the result of a special lottery drawn when game ball B is received in the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004).

One way to change the spring's biasing force is to twist the spring. However, to protrude the performance operation unit 350, a compressed spring (compression coil spring) must be used, and twisting the compression coil spring to change the biasing force would apply excessive stress to the compression coil spring, which could cause premature deterioration and damage to the internal structure. In contrast, the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 of this embodiment adjusts the protrusion force (biasing force) of the performance operation unit 350 by changing the amount of compression of the lifting spring 365 through vertical movement of the lifting spring lower holding member 385. This prevents excessive stress from being applied to the lifting spring 365, reduces premature deterioration of the lifting spring 365, and allows the performance operation unit 350 to protrude stably over the long term.

[3-5e-7. Action of the Production Operation Unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 57 and 58. Figure 57 is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship of the effect operation unit outer decorative board, the button outer decorative board, and the button inner decorative board in a plan view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. Figure 58(a) is a front view of the turntable unit shown in its normal state, and (b) is a front view of the turntable unit when the effect operation unit is in the raised position. The effect operation unit 300 is formed spherically as a whole and is equipped with an effect operation unit 301 on its top surface that can be operated by a player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a touch operation unit 302 that can be operated by contact or approach with the player's hand, etc., and a press operation unit 303 that can be pressed. The touch operation unit 302 is provided on the top of the press operation unit 303 (button body 351).

The effect operation unit 300 is assembled to the tray unit 200 with the protruding direction of the upwardly protruding pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit 350) tilted so that the top is positioned forward relative to the vertical direction. In other words, the center of the effect operation unit 301 is located forward of the apex of the spherical effect operation unit 300. This makes the effect operation unit 301 easier to see for players seated in front of the pachinko machine 1.

In the normal state of the performance operation unit 300, the pressing operation unit 303 (performance operation unit 350) is in the lowered position, and the curved upper surface of the button body 351 of the performance operation unit 350 is aligned with the spherical surface of the performance operation unit cover unit 310. Furthermore, in the normal state, pressing the pressing operation unit 303 downward does not cause the pressing operation unit 303 (performance operation unit 350) to move downward. Therefore, in the normal state, the performance operation unit 300 appears to the player as simply a spherical decorative object, making it difficult for the player to recognize that it can be operated.

As shown in Figure 57, the performance operation unit 300 has a performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320 arranged below the unit upper cover 312 that surrounds the outer periphery of the pressing operation unit 303 (performance operation unit 350). A circular button outer decorative board 355 is arranged inside the outer edge of the pressing operation unit 303, and a button inner decorative board 364 is arranged further inside that. The performance operation unit 300 is arranged with the button outer decorative board 355 and the performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320 arranged outward from the button inner decorative board 364 in that order. The LEDs 355a inside the button inner decorative board 364 and the button outer decorative board 355 are arranged below the contact detector 352, but because the contact detector 352 is made of punched metal and is therefore translucent, light from them can be easily transmitted upward (towards the player).

The performance operation unit 300 can illuminate and decorate the annular unit upper cover 312 using the LEDs 320a on the performance operation outer decorative board 320. Additionally, the LEDs 355a on the button outer decorative board 355 can illuminate and decorate the periphery and outer surface of the top surface of the button body 351. Furthermore, the LEDs 364a on the button inner decorative board 364 can illuminate and decorate the central portion of the top surface of the button body 351.

The multiple LEDs 320a on the effect operation unit outer decorative board 320, the multiple LEDs 355a on the button outer decorative board 355, and the multiple LEDs 364a on the button inner decorative board 364 are each arranged in a circular row, so by sequentially illuminating them in the circumferential direction, the player can see an illumination effect in which light rotates around the center of the pressing operation unit 303. Furthermore, because the multiple LEDs 320a, LEDs 355a, and LEDs 363a are arranged concentrically, the player can see an illumination effect in which light spreads from the center of the pressing operation unit 303 to the outside, or an illumination effect in which light converges from the outside to the center of the pressing operation unit 303.

In the normal state, as shown in Figure 58 (a), the presentation operation unit 300 is in a lowered position with the pressing operation unit 303 (presentation operation unit 350) in such a way that its upper surface is flush with the surface of the unit upper cover 312. In this state, the pressing operation unit 303 cannot be pressed. On the other hand, the touch operation unit 302 can be touched depending on the player participation presentation being executed.

In the normal state when the pressing operation unit 303 (effect operation unit 350) is not protruding, an effect (player participation effect) may be produced by, for example, displaying an effect image on the effect display device 1600 encouraging the player to touch the top surface of the effect operation unit 300, or outputting voice or sound effects. When the contact detector 352 detects contact with (or proximity to) the button body 351, the effect proceeds to the next stage. When contact is detected, the button body 351 may be illuminated by the LED 355a on the outer button decorative board 355 or the LED 364a on the inner button decorative board 364, thereby allowing the player to recognize that a touch operation has been accepted and providing a sense of operation of the touch operation unit 302. The color, brightness, and pattern of the light emitted by the button body 351 may be used to suggest to the player the degree of expectation for the game (for example, the occurrence of a favorable game state that gives the player an advantage, such as a "jackpot" game).

Alternatively, when the contact detector 352 detects contact with (or proximity to) the button body 351, the vibration motor 356 may be driven to vibrate the button body 351. This provides a sense of operation to the contact operation unit 302, making the player more aware that their contact operation has been accepted. At this time, the vibration motor 356 may impart strong vibrations, weak vibrations, or vibrations with a predetermined rhythm to indicate to the player how excited they are about the game.

In addition, in the normal presentation (player participation type presentation), a presentation image encouraging the player to touch the top surface of the presentation operation unit 300 is displayed on the presentation display device 1600, and voice, sound effects, etc. are output, and then when the contact detector 352 detects contact of the player (hand or fingers) with the top surface of the button body 351, the presentation operation unit lifting mechanism 360 causes the button body 351 (presentation operation unit 350) to protrude upward (pop up) due to the force of the lifting spring 365. More specifically, when the operation button lifting drive motor 367 rotates the lifting cam member 371 counterclockwise in a plan view under normal conditions, the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 disengages from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b), and the biasing force of the pair of lifting springs 365 causes the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351, pressing operation portion 303) together with the button base 354 to vigorously project upward into the raised position (see FIG. 55(b)). In this raised position, the top surface of the button body 351 is positioned significantly higher than the top surface of the unit upper cover 312, and the button body 351 projects upward. As the button body 351 projects upward as described above, fingers touching the button body 351 are pushed upward along with the button body 351, greatly surprising the player and strongly attracting their attention.

Then, the device transitions to an effect in which the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is pressed, allowing the player to enjoy pressing the pressing operation unit 303. More specifically, when the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is in the raised position and the button body 351 is pressed downward against the biasing force of the lifting spring 365, the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) moves downward, so that the top surface of the button body 351 is flush with the top surface of the unit upper cover 312, and the detection piece 354d of the button base 354 is detected by the pressure detection sensor 373. This detects the pressing of the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303), and the pressing operation is used as an opportunity to change the effect, allowing the player to enjoy a player-participation effect.

In addition, during the above-mentioned effects, the protruding force (momentum) of the button body 351 may be increased or decreased using the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380, so that the strength of the protruding force can suggest to the player the level of expectation for the game. Furthermore, when the button body 351 pops up or is pressed, the vibration motor 356 may vibrate the button body 351.

In an effect in which the effect operation unit 350 is protruded, the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) may be made to protrude upward when the contact detector 352 detects that the player's fingers or the like have approached within the movement range (protrusion range) of the upward-protruding button body 351. This causes the button body 351 to come into contact with the player's fingers or the like, causing an impact, which can surprise the player and strongly attract their attention. Even in this case, the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 can be used to increase or decrease the protrusion force with which the button body 351 protrudes, so that the strength of the protrusion force can indicate to the player how much anticipation there is for the game.

In addition, in an effect in which the effect operation unit 350 is protruded, the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) may be made to protrude upward when the contact detector 352 detects that the player's fingers, etc., have approached within a predetermined distance of the protruding button body 351, outside the protruding range of the upwardly protruding button body 351. This allows the wind pressure generated by the protruding button body 351 to hit the player's fingers, etc., surprising the player and strongly attracting their attention. Even in this case, the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 may be used to increase or decrease the force with which the button body 351 protrudes, so that the strength of the wind pressure hitting the player's fingers, etc., can suggest to the player how excited they are about the game.

Furthermore, as an effect of protruding the effect operation unit 350, the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) may be protruding upward regardless of the detection of the player's finger or the like by the contact detector 352. In this case, if the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 causes the button body 351 to protrude with a strong protruding force, the button body 351 will protrude forcefully, generating a sound (protruding sound), which can surprise the player. Also, if the protruding force adjustment mechanism 380 causes the button body 351 to protrude with a weak protruding force, the button body 351 will protrude quietly, making it difficult for the player to notice that the button body 351 has protruded, and the player can be surprised by the button body 351 protruding without them noticing.

As an effect after the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351) is protruded, the force of the lifting spring 365 may be weakened by the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, so that the button body 351 (pressing operation unit 303) is pressed in the same way as a regular press button. Alternatively, the force of the lifting spring 365 may be increased by the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, so that the effect is such that the player is forced to press the button body 351 with a strong force.

Furthermore, after the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351) is protruded, an effect may be executed in which the protruding button body 351 is contacted. In this case, since the contact detection body 352 has a downward extension piece 352a that extends downward, the side of the button body 351 may be contacted. In this case, it is also desirable to increase the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 using the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, which makes it difficult for the protruding button body 351 to move and makes it easier to contact the button body 351 (touch operation unit 302).

In the above example, the effect of protruding the effect operation unit 350 is achieved by rotating the lifting cam member 371 counterclockwise using the operation button lifting drive motor 367 in the effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360, thereby moving the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 from the first cam 371b (locking portion 371c) to the second cam 371d, causing the button base 354 (button body 351) to protrude from the lowered position to the raised position in one go, but this is not limited to this example.

For example, in the normal state where the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 is engaged with the engagement portion 371c of the lifting cam member 371 and the button body 351 (performance operation unit 350) is moved to the lowered position, the operation button lifting drive motor 367 can rotate the lifting cam member 371 clockwise in a plan view, moving the guide pin 354c from the first cam 371b to the third cam 371e, stopping the rotation of the lifting cam member 371 midway through the third cam 371e and stopping the button body 351 from protruding upward at a position between the lowered and raised positions. At this time, the lifting spring lower holding member 385 of the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 can be moved downward to weaken the biasing force of the lifting spring 365.

In this way, even when the third cam 371e of the lifting cam member 371 causes the button body 351 to protrude partway, the button body 351 can be pressed, and the button body 351 can function as the pressing operation unit 303, allowing the player to enjoy a player-participation presentation. In this case, the amount by which the button body 351 protrudes upward can be varied depending on the rotational position of the lifting cam member 371, so the degree of expectation for the game can be suggested depending on the amount by which the button body 351 protrudes, entertaining the player.

Furthermore, to produce an effect in which the protruding effect operation unit 350 (button body 351) is pressed, after the effect operation unit 350 is protruding, the lifting spring lower holding member 385 is moved downward to minimize the compression of the lifting spring 365. This results in the lifting spring 365 having its spring force at its weakest, allowing the effect operation unit 350 to be pressed with a light (weak) force, improving the operability of the pressing operation and making the pressing operation more enjoyable. Furthermore, to produce an effect in which the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351) is pressed, the lifting spring lower holding member 385 may be positioned appropriately in the vertical direction depending on the results of a special lottery, so that the force of the lifting spring 365 can be set to any strength between strongest and weakest. This allows the player to press the effect operation unit 350 firmly or lightly, which allows the player to enjoy different effects depending on the operating force of the effect operation unit 350, and also makes it possible to present a wider variety of effects, making it less likely that the player will get bored.

Furthermore, as an effect using the effect operation unit 300, multiple threshold levels may be set according to the capacitance of the contact detector 352 so that contact of the player's finger, etc. with the contact operation unit 302 (button body 351) can be detected at multiple contact stages (approach stages), and the effect may be changed according to each stage. In other words, by focusing on the fact that the capacitance of the contact detector 352 increases as the player's finger, etc. approaches the button body 351 (contact detector 352), multiple threshold levels may be set for the magnitude of that capacitance to enable multi-stage detection and use in the effect. Specifically, by dividing the stage into stages such as when the player's fingers are more than a predetermined distance away from the button body 351, when the player's fingers are within a predetermined distance from the button body 351 but are not in contact with the button body 351, and when the player's fingers are in contact with the button body 351, and changing the presentation according to each stage, it is possible to present a variety of presentations to the player with just one contact detection sensor body 358, making it less likely that the player will get bored and preventing a decline in interest.

In the above embodiment, the normal state of the performance operation unit 300 is shown as being in a state in which the performance operation unit 350 (button body 351) is in the lowered position and the lifting spring lower holding member 385 is moved upward, as shown in FIG. 55(a). However, this is not limited to this, and the performance operation unit 350 may be in the lowered position and the lifting spring lower holding member 385 may be moved downward, as shown in FIG. 56(a). As a result, in the normal state, the lifting spring 365 is not strongly compressed, and early deterioration (fatigue) of the lifting spring 365 can be suppressed. Furthermore, the biasing force of the strongly compressed lifting spring 365 can suppress early deterioration (fatigue) of the button base 354 and the lifting spring lower holding member 385.

In this way, the presentation operation unit 300 of this embodiment can be used for a variety of player-participation presentation patterns, allowing players to enjoy a wide variety of presentations, preventing players from becoming bored and reducing a decline in interest.

The performance operation unit 300 has a circular (two arcs joined together) performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320 mounted on top of the spherical performance operation unit cover unit 310, and a contact detection sensor main body 358 mounted on the performance operation unit unit 350, which rises and falls inside the performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320. A fixed-positioned button middle decorative board 364 is also mounted inside the button sleeve 353 of the performance operation unit 350. This contact detection sensor main body 358 is equipped with a sensor electrode for detecting capacitance. Therefore, when the performance operation unit 350 is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, the contact detection sensor main body 358 (sensor electrode) approaches the performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320 and the button middle decorative board 364. This proximity of the performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320 and the button middle decorative board 364 changes the capacitance of the sensor electrode, which could result in a false detection by the contact detection sensor main body 358.

Conductive shields (e.g., punched metal, metal plate, expanded metal, wire mesh, metal wire, metal foil, etc.) connected to ground (GND) may be provided between the performance operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, and between the button inner decorative board 364 and the contact detection sensor main body 358. As a result, even if the distance between the performance operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 and the button inner decorative board 364 changes when the performance operation unit unit 350 is moved up and down, the distance between the contact detection sensor main body 358 and the performance operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 or the button inner decorative board 364 does not change. The shields connected to ground (GND) between the contact detection sensor main body 358 and the performance operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 or the button inner decorative board 364 do not change, reducing the effect of changes in capacitance due to the proximity of the performance operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 or the button inner decorative board 364, and preventing false detection by the contact detection sensor main body 358.

[3-5f. Another embodiment of the tray unit]
Next, a different embodiment of the plate unit 200 will be described, mainly with reference to Figures 59 to 61. Figure 59 is a plan view of a performance operation unit showing an example in which multiple contact detectors are provided in the performance operation unit of the performance operation unit. Figure 60(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which multiple contact detectors are connected to a single contact detection sensor body, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a switching unit is provided between the contact detection sensor body and the multiple contact detectors in (a), and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the left plate decorative unit, right plate decorative unit, and performance operation unit of the plate unit can be moved forward and backward, and contact detectors are provided on the front and rear sides of the performance operation unit. Figure 61(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a decorative contact detector, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing another embodiment of the performance operation unit. Note that in Figures 59 to 61, components similar to those described above are designated by the same reference numerals.

In the embodiment shown in Figure 59, the contact detector 352 is divided into a left contact detector 390L and a right contact detector 390R on the underside of the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350, and a left contact detection sensor main body 391L and a right contact detection sensor main body 391R are connected to the left contact detector 390L and the right contact detector 390R, respectively. According to this embodiment, if a player moves a finger or the like from left to right on the top surface of the button body 351, when the player's finger or the like is positioned on the left side of the button body 351, the capacitance of the left contact detector 390L changes, causing the left contact detection sensor main body 391L to become detected, while the capacitance of the right contact detector 390R does not change, causing the right contact detection sensor main body 391R to remain undetected. When the player's finger or the like moves to the center of the button body 351, the capacitance of both the left contact detection body 390L and the right contact detection body 390R changes, causing both the left contact detection sensor body 391L and the right contact detection sensor body 391R to detect. Furthermore, when the player's finger or the like moves to the right side of the button body 351, the capacitance of the left contact detection body 390L returns to its original state, causing the left contact detection sensor body 391L to become non-detecting, while the capacitance of the right contact detection body 390R changes, causing the right contact detection sensor body 391R to remain detecting.

In this way, the movement of the player's fingers, etc. can be detected by the combination of detection/non-detection by the left contact detection element 390L and the right contact detection element 390R of the left contact detection sensor main body 391L and the right contact detection sensor main body 391R, and the pattern of these changes. This makes it possible to detect a wider variety of contact operations, presenting the player with a player-participation presentation that allows them to perform a wider variety of contact operations on the contact operation unit 302, and making the player-participation presentation of operating the contact operation unit 302 even more enjoyable. Furthermore, by adding more contact detection elements, even more complex movements can be detected.

The embodiment shown in Figure 60 (a) is an example in which multiple contact detection bodies 393 are connected to one contact detection sensor main body 392. According to this embodiment, with multiple contact detection bodies 393 provided at multiple different locations, one contact detection sensor main body 392 can detect contact with a human body or the like at any of the contact detection bodies 393.

For example, by distributing multiple contact detectors 393 on the inside (underside) of the button body 351, even if the player's fingers or the like come into contact with any part of the surface of the button body 351, the contact can be detected by any of the contact detectors 393, thereby improving the detection accuracy for contact with the contact operation unit 302.

In addition, multiple contact detectors 393 may be provided in areas of the pachinko machine 1 that should not be touched by players (for example, areas where a player may be injured, areas where a player may be inconvenienced by other players, areas where fraudulent activity may occur, etc.), and when any of the contact detectors 393 detects a human body or the like, a caution or warning may be issued.

The embodiment shown in Figure 60(b) is an example in which a switching unit 394 is provided between one contact detection sensor main body 392 and multiple contact detection bodies 393, connecting only one of the contact detection bodies 393 to the contact detection sensor main body 392. According to this embodiment, by switching the connection to one of the multiple contact detection bodies 352 using the switching unit 394, it is possible to detect contact by a human body or the like only at the desired location (contact detection body 352). Examples of switching units 394 include those that "switch using a switching circuit using a relay or transistor," "those that switch using other electronic circuits," and "those that switch in response to the movement of a movable member (for example, the movable left plate decorative unit 270, right plate decorative unit 275, and performance operation unit 300 as shown in Figure 60(c))."

For example, when a player participation type effect is executed in which multiple contact detectors 393 are dispersed in the effect operation unit 301 (touch operation unit 302) and the player touches the areas detected by each contact detector 393 in sequence, the contact detectors 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 can be switched in touch order by the switching unit 394, and the contact detector 393 can detect whether or not the player's fingers or the like have made contact. This makes it possible to present the player with a highly game-like player participation type effect using multiple contact detectors 393, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 60 (c), if the left dish decorative unit 270, right dish decorative unit 275, and performance operation unit 300 are able to move forward and backward, a first contact detection body 393a can be provided on the front side of the performance operation unit 300, and a second contact detection body 393b can be provided on the rear side of the left dish decorative unit 270, right dish decorative unit 275, and performance operation unit 300.When the performance operation unit 300, etc. is extended forward, the first contact detection body 393a can be connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 by the switching unit 394, and when the performance operation unit 300, etc. is retracted, the switching unit 394 can be switched to connect the second contact detection body 393b to the contact detection sensor main body 392.

As a result, when the presentation operation unit 300 etc. is protruded (moved) forward, the first contact detector 393a detects contact or approach by the player, and the forward movement of the presentation operation unit 300 etc. is stopped. This prevents the presentation operation unit 300 etc. from unnecessarily pressing on a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and avoids causing discomfort to the player.

On the other hand, when the presentation operation unit 300, etc., is extended forward, a gap may be formed behind the presentation operation unit 300, etc. If a player's fingers, etc., are inserted into this gap and the presentation operation unit 300, etc. is then retracted to its original position, there is a risk that the player's fingers, etc., may become trapped and be injured. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the presentation operation unit 300, etc., which has been moved forward, is moved backward, the switching unit 394 switches the second contact detection body 393b so that it is connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. Then, if the second contact detection body 393b detects the player's fingers, etc., the backward movement of the presentation operation unit 300, etc. is stopped, and a message is sent to the player instructing them to remove their fingers, etc. from the rear of the presentation operation unit 300, etc. Only when the second contact detection body 393b is not detecting the player's fingers, the presentation operation unit 300, etc. is moved backward to return to its initial state. This prevents players from being injured by gaps behind the performance operation unit 300, etc., and improves the safety of the pachinko machine 1.

In the embodiment shown in Figure 61(a), the contact detector 395 that detects contact with a player's finger or the like has a star-shaped outer shape, giving it decorativeness (design). The shape of the decorative contact detector 395 is not limited to a star, and may be a circle, a polygon, a geometric pattern, a shape imitating a specific character, a shape imitating a specific item, a shape imitating a specific logo, a picture frame, or the like. As a result, the contact detector 395 visible through the transparent button body 351 has decorativeness (design), and the contact detector 395 itself can improve the appearance of the button body 351 and, ultimately, the pachinko machine 1, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment shows the contact detector 352 formed from punched metal, this is not limited to this, and the contact detector may be formed from metal plate, expanded metal, wire mesh, metal wire, plating, metal vapor deposition, foil stamping, etc., and the same effects as those described above can be achieved. It is desirable to provide the contact detector on the back side of a transparent surface member so that it does not come into direct contact with the player's fingers, etc. This prevents wear on the contact detector and also makes the surface member smooth to the touch.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment shows an in-button decorative substrate 364 (LED 364a) provided below the contact detector 352, this is not limited to this. As shown in Figure 61 (b), a contact detector 397 may be provided below a transparent surface member 396, with a decorative body 398 provided below that. This allows the decorative body 398 to be seen through the surface member 396 and the contact detector 397, thereby enhancing the decorativeness of the performance operation unit on which the surface member 396 is provided and improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1.

In the embodiment of Figure 61 (b), the contact detector 397 is formed by metal vapor deposition, and under normal conditions, the metallic luster of the contact detector 397 makes the decorative element 398 located below it invisible. However, when contact with the surface member 396 is detected, the decorative element 398 is illuminated by an LED located below the contact detector 397, making it possible to make the decorative element 398 visible through the surface member 396 and the contact detector 397.

The contact detector 352 may also be formed so as to be unnoticeable to the player. Examples of unnoticeable contact detectors include those formed from a transparent material and those formed to appear integrated with the decoration of the surface of the button body, etc. This makes the contact detector 352 unnoticeable to the effect operation unit 301 on which the contact detector 352 is mounted, giving the player the illusion that it does not detect or operate contact with fingers, etc. For example, when a specified player-participation effect is executed and the player's finger, etc., touches or approaches the button body 351, the effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360 causes the button body 351 to protrude upward, allowing the player to become aware of the presence of the contact detector 352 (touch operation unit 302) for the first time, greatly surprising the player and entertaining them while preventing a decline in interest.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 420 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 62 to 65. Figure 62(a) is a front view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the rear. Figure 63 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the front, and Figure 64 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the rear. Figure 65 is a cross-sectional view taken along line U-U in Figure 62(a). The door frame left side unit 420 is attached to the front left part of the door frame base unit 100 above the tray unit 200 and decorates the left outer side of the play area 5a when viewed from the front.

The door frame left side unit 420 comprises a door frame left side base 421 attached to the left outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, a door frame left side upper decorative board 422 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame left side base 421 and equipped with a plurality of first LEDs 422a arranged vertically at regular intervals on the front surface, and a door frame left side upper decorative board 422 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame left side base 421 and equipped with a plurality of first LEDs 423a arranged vertically at regular intervals on the front surface. The door frame includes a lower left side decorative board 423 mounted on the left side of the door frame, an upper left side reflector 424 attached to the left side base 421 of the door frame so as to cover the front side of the upper left side decorative board 422, a lower left side reflector 425 attached to the left side base 421 of the door frame so as to cover the front side of the lower left side decorative board 423, and a left side decorative body 426 attached to the left side base 421 of the door frame so as to cover the front sides of the upper left side reflector 424 and lower left side reflector 425.

The door frame left side unit 420 also includes an upper left side light-guiding member 427 that guides light forward from the first LED 422a on the upper left side decorative board 422 of the door frame, a middle left side light-guiding member 428 that guides forward light from the first LED 423a above the vertical center on the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame, and a lower left side light-guiding member 429 that guides forward light from the first LED 423a below the vertical center on the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame.

The door frame left side base 421 is formed in a box shape that extends vertically and is open to the front. The door frame left side base 421 is two-color molded using synthetic resins with different colors and translucency (light transmittance). More specifically, like the handle cover 295 described above, the door frame left side base 421 is two-color molded using two types of resin, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b. A portion of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface, forming a circular or radial pattern. In other words, the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the door frame left side base 421 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see Figure 71 (a)). When molding the door frame left side base 421, either the inner layer 3a or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

The door frame upper left side decorative board 422 is formed in the shape of a strip that extends vertically. Multiple first LEDs 422a are mounted on the front surface of the door frame upper left side decorative board 422 at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and second LEDs 422b are mounted two by two, vertically aligned between the first LEDs 422a. The door frame upper left side decorative board 422 also has a 24-bit LED driver 422c with a unique address for illuminating the first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b.

This door frame upper left side decorative board 422 is equipped with a total of 12 full-color LEDs: four first LEDs 422a and eight second LEDs 422b. The first LEDs 422a, which have second LEDs 422b on both the top and bottom, are located in the center (the center between) of the second LEDs 422b. At least the second LEDs 422b are wide-angle, top-view LEDs capable of emitting light within a 130-degree angle around an optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in Figure 72, on the decorative board 422 on the upper left side of the door frame, the four first LEDs 422a are divided into two groups: the top two and the remaining two. The eight second LEDs 422b are divided into three groups: the top two, the third to fifth three from the top, and the sixth to eighth three from the top. The LED driver 422c can control up to 24 systems, and controls the two groups of four first LEDs 422a and the three groups of eight second LEDs 422b with three systems per group, for a total of 15 systems, so that they can each emit full color light.

Although not shown, this door frame upper left side decorative board 422 is connected to a wiring cable consisting of four wires: two power lines (one is a ground line) that supply power to drive the first LED 422a, second LED 422b, and LED driver 422c; one control signal line that receives signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510; and one clock line that synchronizes the LED driver 422c with the peripheral control board 1510. When the LED driver 422c on this door frame upper left side decorative board 422 receives a command addressed to that address via the control signal line from the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control board), it can, in accordance with the command, cause two sets of four first LEDs 422a and three sets of eight second LEDs 422b to emit light of the appropriate color and intensity for each set.

The door frame left-side lower decorative board 423 is shaped like a strip extending vertically, with an uneven right edge. Multiple first LEDs 423a are mounted on the front surface of the door frame left-side lower decorative board 423 at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and second LEDs 423b are mounted two by two, vertically aligned between the first LEDs 423a. The door frame left-side lower decorative board 423 also has a 24-bit LED driver 423c with a unique address for illuminating the first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b.

This door frame lower left side decorative board 423 is equipped with a total of 18 full-color LEDs: six first LEDs 423a and 12 second LEDs 423b. The first LEDs 423a, which have second LEDs 423b on both the top and bottom, are located in the center (the center between) of the second LEDs 423b. At least the second LEDs 423b are wide-angle, top-view LEDs capable of emitting light within a 130-degree angle around an optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in Figure 72, on the decorative board 423 on the lower left side of the door frame, the six first LEDs 423a are divided into three groups, with two LEDs in each group starting from the top. The 12 second LEDs 423b are divided into four groups: three from the top (1st to 3rd), three from the top (4th to 6th), three from the top (7th to 9th), and three from the top (10th to 12th). The LED driver 423c can control up to 24 systems, and controls the three groups of six first LEDs 423a and the four groups of 12 second LEDs 423b with three systems per group, for a total of 21 systems, so that they can each emit full color light.

Although not shown, this decorative board 423 on the lower left side of the door frame is connected to a wiring cable consisting of four wires: two power lines (one is a ground line) that supply power to drive the first LED 423a, second LED 423b, and LED driver 423c; one control signal line that receives signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510; and one clock line that synchronizes the LED driver 423c with the peripheral control board 1510. When the LED driver 423c on this decorative board 423 on the lower left side of the door frame receives a command addressed to that address via the control signal line from the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control board), it can, in accordance with the command, cause three sets of six first LEDs 423a and four sets of twelve second LEDs 423b to emit light of the appropriate color and intensity for each set.

The upper left side reflector 424 has a through-hole 424a that penetrates from front to back at a position corresponding to the second LED 422b mounted on the upper left side decorative board 422 of the door frame, and a cylindrical retaining tube 424b that extends from front to back at a position corresponding to the first LED 422a. The upper left side reflector 424 is formed so that the rear end around the through-hole 424a abuts against the front surface of the upper left side decorative board 422 of the door frame, and the area around the front side of the through-hole 424a is formed in a dish shape that widens forward. This allows the light from the second LED 422b to be diffused widely forward.

The retaining tube 424b of the upper left side reflector 424 holds the cylindrical light guide shaft 427a of the upper left side light guide member 427 (described later) in a straight position in the front-to-rear direction by inserting it into the retaining tube 424b. This retaining tube 424b is located in the center between the through-holes 424a. As a result, the light guide shaft 427a of the upper left side light guide member 427 protrudes forward through the retaining tube 424b. Light from the second LED 422b on the upper left side decorative board 422 of the door frame, which is exposed through the through-holes 424a on both the top and bottom, is irradiated with an equal amount of light from above and below the light guide shaft 427a, preventing the shadow of the light guide shaft 427a from being cast on the back side of the left side door frame decorative body 426.

In addition, the upper left side reflector 424 has a mounting hole in the center (on the center line) between the through holes 424a for mounting to the left door frame base 421. This prevents the shadow of the head of the screw inserted into the mounting hole from being cast on the back side of the left door frame decorative body 426.

The lower left side reflector 425 has a through-hole 425a that penetrates from front to back at a position corresponding to the second LED 423b mounted on the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame, and a cylindrical retaining tube 425b that extends from front to back at a position corresponding to the first LED 423a. The lower left side reflector 425 is formed so that the rear end around the through-hole 425a abuts against the front surface of the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame, and the area around the front side of the through-hole 425a is formed in a dish shape that widens forward. This allows the light from the second LED 423b to be diffused widely forward.

The retaining tube 425b of the lower left side reflector 425 receives the cylindrical light guide shaft 428a of the middle left side light guide member 428 and the cylindrical light guide shaft 429a of the lower left side light guide member 429 (described later), thereby holding the light guide shaft 428a and the light guide shaft 429a straight in the front-to-rear direction. This retaining tube 425b is located in the center between the through holes 425a. As a result, light from the second LED 423b on the door frame left side lower decorative board 423, which is visible through the through holes 425a on both the upper and lower sides of the light guide shaft 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428 and the light guide shaft 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429 that protrude forward through the retaining tube 425b, is irradiated with an equal amount of light from both the top and bottom onto the light guide shaft 428a and light guide shaft 429a, preventing the shadow of the light guide shaft 428a and light guide shaft 429a from being cast on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426.

In addition, the left side lower reflector 425 has a mounting hole in the center (on the center line) between the through holes 425a for mounting to the door frame left side base 421. This prevents the shadow of the head of the screw inserted into the mounting hole from being cast on the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426.

The door frame left side decorative body 426 is formed in a translucent milky white color. It is formed in the shape of a semicircular arc that bulges forward and extends vertically. This gives the door frame left side decorative body 426 a semi-tubular shape that opens to the rear. This door frame left side decorative body 426 has multiple openings 426a that penetrate from front to back at regular intervals in the vertical direction along the center of its width in the left-right direction. The multiple openings 426a are located in positions corresponding to the retaining tube 424b of the upper left side reflector 424 and the retaining tube 425b of the lower left side reflector 425. The respective tips of the light guide shaft 427a of the upper left side light guide member 427, the light guide shaft 428a of the middle left side light guide member 428, and the light guide shaft 429a of the lower left side light guide member 429 are inserted into these openings 426a from the rear. This door frame left side decorative body 426 is made of a synthetic resin with higher light transmittance than the door frame left side base 421. The door frame left side decorative body 426 also has a decorative portion 426b that is recessed in an arc shape to avoid the multiple openings 426a and extends along the center of the width in the left-right direction.

The upper left-side light-guiding member 427 is made of a transparent material and has four cylindrical light-guiding shafts 427a extending forward and backward, and a runner 427b connecting the lower ends of the four light-guiding shafts 427a. The four light-guiding shafts 427a are spaced apart vertically to correspond to the four retaining tubes 424b of the upper left-side reflector 424. Furthermore, the light-guiding shafts 427a extend forward and backward with a diameter roughly equal to the inner diameter of the retaining tubes 424b. Each light-guiding shaft 427a passes through the retaining tubes 424b of the upper left-side reflector 424 from the rear and is inserted into a corresponding opening 426a in the left-side door frame decorative body 426, with its tip surface flush with the surface of the left-side door frame decorative body 426. This left side upper light guiding member 427 uses the light guiding shaft 427a to guide light from the first LED 422a on the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 forward and radiate it outward from the tip, allowing the opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 to glow brightly.

The left-side central light-guiding member 428 is made of a transparent material and has three cylindrical light-guiding shafts 428a extending forward and backward, and a runner 428b connecting the lower ends of the three light-guiding shafts 428a. The three light-guiding shafts 428a are spaced apart vertically to correspond to the three upper retaining tubes 425b of the left-side lower reflector 425. Furthermore, the light-guiding shafts 428a extend forward and backward with a diameter roughly equal to the inner diameter of the retaining tubes 425b. Each light-guiding shaft 428a passes through the retaining tube 425b of the left-side lower reflector 425 from the rear and is inserted into a corresponding opening 426a in the left-side door frame decorative body 426, with its tip surface flush with the surface of the left-side door frame decorative body 426. This left side center light-guiding member 428 uses the light-guiding shaft 428a to guide light from the first LED 423a on the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 forward and radiate it outward from the tip, brightly illuminating the opening 426a in the door frame left side decorative body 426.

The lower left side light guide member 429 is made of a transparent material and has three cylindrical light guide shafts 429a extending forward and backward, and a runner 429b connecting the lower ends of the three light guide shafts 429a. The three light guide shafts 429a are spaced apart vertically to correspond to the three retaining tubes 425b below the lower left side reflector 425. Furthermore, the light guide shafts 429a extend forward and backward with a diameter approximately equal to the inner diameter of the retaining tubes 425b. Each light guide shaft 429a passes through the retaining tube 425b of the lower left side reflector 425 from the rear and is inserted into a corresponding opening 426a in the left side door frame decorative body 426, with its tip surface flush with the surface of the left side door frame decorative body 426. This left-side lower light-guiding member 429 uses the light-guiding shaft 429a to guide light from the first LED 423a on the door frame left-side lower decorative board 423 forward and radiate it outward from the tip, brightly illuminating the opening 426a in the door frame left-side decorative body 426.

In this embodiment, the color of the circular or radial patterned areas on the door frame left side base 421 is the same as the color of the circular or radial patterned areas on the handle cover 295, and the color of the areas outside the circular or radial patterned areas on the door frame left side base 421 is the same as the color of the areas outside the circular or radial patterned areas on the handle cover 295.

In this embodiment, the portion of the door frame left side unit 420 above the vertical center protrudes slightly forward more than the portion below, and the portion near the bottom edge is gently curved to the right. The upper end of this door frame left side unit 420 is located above the door window 101a and below the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, and the lower end is located below the door window 101a and above the speaker port 211b in the dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210. The upper portion of the door frame left side unit 420 is located on the left outer side of the door frame top unit 450. When assembled to the door frame 3, the door frame left side unit 420 decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, giving the appearance of an embedded cylindrical fluorescent lamp.

In the door frame left side unit 420 of this embodiment, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 are located at a position some distance behind the front of the door frame left side decorative body 426. This allows the light from the second LED 422b and second LED 423b mounted on them to be irradiated to the back side of the door frame left side decorative body 426 in a sufficiently spread state, allowing the door frame left side decorative body 426 to be uniformly illuminated and decorated.

In addition, light from the first LED 422a on the upper left-side decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a on the lower left-side decorative board 423, which are located away from the front surface of the left-side door frame decorative body 426 and are guided forward (light guided) by the light guide shaft 427a of the upper left-side light guide member 427, the light guide shaft 428a of the middle left-side light guide member 428, and the light guide shaft 429a of the lower left-side light guide member 429, causing the opening 426a of the left-side door frame decorative body 426 to emit light in a spot-like manner that is brighter than other areas.

In addition, the first LED 422a on the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame and the first LED 423a on the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, the light guide shaft portion 427a of the upper left side light guide member 427, the light guide shaft portion 428a of the middle left side light guide member 428 and the light guide shaft portion 429a of the lower left side light guide member 429 are arranged in the center between the two adjacent second LEDs 422b and second LEDs 423b. As a result, the light guide shaft 427a, light guide shaft 428a, and light guide shaft 429a are illuminated with an equal amount of light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b on both sides, so even if the shadows of the light guide shaft 427a, light guide shaft 428a, and light guide shaft 429a are cast from behind onto the door frame left side decorative body 426, these shadows are less visible, allowing the door frame left side decorative body 426 to be illuminated and decorated in an even, planar manner.

Furthermore, the door frame left side decorative body 426 has a decorative portion 426b that extends along the center of the width in the left-right direction so as to connect the multiple openings 426a. As a result, even if the shadows of the light guide shafts 427a, 428a, and 429a are projected onto the door frame left side decorative body 426 by the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b, the presence of the decorative portion 426b in the area where the shadows are projected makes the shadows of the light guide shafts 427a, 428a, and 429a less noticeable, improving the appearance of the illuminated decoration of the door frame left side decorative body 426.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
Next, the door frame right side unit 430 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 66 to 70. Figure 66(a) is a front view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame, (b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, (c) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit from the front, and (d) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit from the rear. Figure 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit from the front, and Figure 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit from the rear. Figure 69 is a cross-sectional view taken along line A-E in Figure 66(a). Figure 70 is a cross-sectional view taken along line O-O in Figure 66(a). The door frame right side unit 430 is attached to the right front part of the door frame base unit 100 above the tray unit 200, and decorates the outer right side of the play area 5a when viewed from the front.

The right-side door frame unit 430 comprises a right-side door frame base 431 attached to the right outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100; an upper right-side door frame decorative board 432 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the right-side door frame base 431 and equipped with a plurality of first LEDs 432a arranged vertically at regular intervals on the front surface; a lower right-side door frame decorative board 433 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the right-side door frame base 431 and equipped with a plurality of first LEDs 433a arranged vertically at regular intervals on the front surface; a right-side door frame reflector 434 attached to the right-side door frame base 431 so as to cover the front sides of the upper right-side door frame decorative board 432 and the lower right-side door frame decorative board 433; and a right-side door frame decorative body 435 attached to the right-side door frame base 431 so as to cover the front side of the right-side door frame reflector 434.

The door frame right side unit 430 also includes an upper right side light-guiding member 436 that guides light forward from the first LED 423a on the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame, and a lower right side light-guiding member 437 that guides light forward from the first LED 433a on the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame.

Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 430 includes a door frame right side left side decorative body 438 that is attached to cover the left side of the door frame right side base 431 and has multiple decorative holes 438a that penetrate from side to side in a predetermined shape; a right side left lens 439 that is provided between the right side left side decorative body 438 and the door frame right side base 431 and has a translucent decorative portion 439a that fits to close the decorative hole 438a in the right side left side decorative body 438; a right side right side decorative body 440 that is attached to cover the right side of the door frame right side base 431 and has multiple decorative holes 440a that penetrate from side to side in a predetermined shape; and a right side right lens 441 that is attached between the right side right side decorative body 440 and the door frame right side base 431 and has a translucent decorative portion 441a that fits to close the decorative hole 440a in the right side right side decorative body 440.

The door frame right side base 431 extends vertically with a roughly constant width on both sides. The rear end of the door frame right side base 431 extends vertically across its entire height, and the front end extends downwards in a roughly straight line from the top to near the center in the vertical direction, then curves rearward and extends diagonally backward, before curving vertically near the bottom and continuing vertically to the bottom.

The door frame right side base 431 has multiple reflector portions 431a recessed from the left and right side surfaces and extending forward to their front ends at a height where the decorative hole 438a on the left side decorative body 438 of the right side of the door frame and the decorative hole 440a on the right side decorative body 440 of the right side of the door frame (decorative portion 439a on the left lens 439 of the right side and decorative portion 441a on the right lens 441 of the right side) are located. The rear ends of these reflector portions 431a, which are inside the decorative portions 439a and 441a, are inclined toward the side surfaces, and the bottom surfaces are curved.

Furthermore, the door frame right side base 431 has reflector portions 431a that correspond to decorative holes 438a and 440a (decorative portion 439a on the right side left lens 439 and decorative portion 441a on the right side right lens 441) located rearward of the center in the fore-and-aft direction on the door frame right side left side decorative body 438 and door frame right side decorative body 440, respectively. The front portions, excluding the portions inside decorative portions 439a and 441a, penetrate in the left-right direction (they are recessed from the left and right side surfaces and connected to each other).

The reflector portions 431a of the door frame right side base 431 reflect light irradiated rearward from the third LED 432c on the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the third LED 433c on the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 (described below) in the left and right directions, causing the decorative portion 439a on the right side left lens 439 and the decorative portion 441a on the right side right lens 441 to illuminate and decorate (see Figure 70, etc.).

The door frame right-side upper decorative board 432 is formed in the shape of a strip that extends vertically. Multiple first LEDs 432a are mounted on the front surface of the door frame right-side upper decorative board 432 at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and second LEDs 432b are mounted two by two, vertically spaced between the first LEDs 432a. Additionally, multiple third LEDs 432c are mounted on the rear surface of the door frame right-side upper decorative board 432 at intervals in the vertical direction. Furthermore, the door frame right-side upper decorative board 432 is equipped with a 24-bit LED driver 432d with a unique address for illuminating the first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 432b, and third LEDs 432c.

This door frame upper right side decorative board 432 is equipped with a total of 16 full-color LEDs: four first LEDs 432a, eight second LEDs 432b, and four third LEDs 432c. The first LED 432a, which has second LEDs 432b on both the top and bottom, is located in the center (the center between) of the second LEDs 432b. At least the second LED 432b and third LED 432c are wide-angle, top-view LEDs capable of emitting light within a 130-degree angle around an optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in Figure 72, on the decorative board 432 on the upper right side of the door frame, the four first LEDs 432a are divided into two groups: the top two and the remaining two. The eight second LEDs 432b are divided into three groups: the top two, the third to fifth three from the top, and the sixth to eighth three from the top. The four third LEDs 432c are further divided into two groups: the top two and the remaining two.

This door frame upper right side decorative board 432 is divided into two sets of first LEDs 432a, three sets of second LEDs 432b, and two sets of third LEDs 432c, and each of the first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 432b, and third LEDs 432c is illuminated in full color, for a total of 21 systems, with three systems per set. In contrast, the LED driver 432d on the door frame upper right side decorative board 432 can control up to 24 systems, so in addition to the 21 systems mentioned above, it also controls three systems for the upper set of third LEDs 433c, which are divided into two sets on the door frame lower right side decorative board 433 (described below), for a total of 24 systems.

Although not shown, this upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame is connected to a wiring cable consisting of four electrical wires: two power lines (one is an earth wire) that supply power to drive the first LED 432a, second LED 432b, third LED 432c, the two third LEDs 433c on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, and the LED driver 432d; one control signal line for receiving signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510; and one clock line for synchronizing the LED driver 432d with the peripheral control board 1510. When the LED driver 432d on the upper right door frame decorative board 432 receives a command addressed to that address via a control signal line from the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control board), it can, in accordance with that command, cause the four first LEDs 432a divided into two sets, the eight second LEDs 432b divided into three sets, the four third LEDs 432c divided into two sets, and the two third LEDs 433c in the upper set of two sets on the lower right door frame decorative board 433 to emit light in the appropriate color and intensity for each set.

The door frame right-side lower decorative board 433 is formed in the shape of a strip that extends vertically. Multiple first LEDs 433a are mounted on the front surface of the door frame right-side lower decorative board 433 at regular intervals in the vertical direction, and second LEDs 433b are mounted two by two, vertically spaced between the first LEDs 433a. Additionally, multiple third LEDs 433c are mounted on the rear surface of the door frame right-side lower decorative board 433 at intervals in the vertical direction. Furthermore, the door frame right-side lower decorative board 433 is equipped with a 24-bit LED driver 433d with a unique address for illuminating the first LEDs 433a, second LED 433b, and third LED 433c.

This door frame lower right side decorative board 433 is equipped with a total of 22 full-color LEDs: six first LEDs 433a, 12 second LEDs 433b, and four third LEDs 433c. The first LEDs 433a, which have second LEDs 433b on both the top and bottom, are located in the center (the center between) of the second LEDs 433b. At least the second LEDs 433b and third LEDs 433c are wide-angle, top-view LEDs capable of emitting light within a 130-degree angle centered on an optical axis perpendicular to the front surface.

As shown in Figure 72, on the decorative board 433 on the lower right side of the door frame, the six first LEDs 433a are divided into three groups, with two LEDs in each group starting from the top. The 12 second LEDs 433b are divided into four groups: three LEDs from the top (1st to 3rd), three LEDs from the top (4th to 6th), three LEDs from the top (7th to 9th), and three LEDs from the top (10th to 12th). Furthermore, the four third LEDs 433c are divided into two groups: the top two and the remaining two.

This door frame right-side lower decorative board 433 is divided into three sets of first LEDs 433a, four sets of second LEDs 433b, and two sets of third LEDs 433c. Each first LED 433a, second LED 433b, and third LED 433c is illuminated in full color, for a total of 27 systems (three systems per set). However, the LED driver 433d of the door frame right-side lower decorative board 433 can only control a maximum of 24 systems. Therefore, the upper set of three systems of the third LEDs 433c, which are divided into two sets, is controlled by the LED driver 432d of the door frame right-side upper decorative board 432, and the remaining 24 systems (all of the front first LEDs 433a and second LEDs 433b and the lower two rear third LEDs 433c) are controlled by the LED driver 433d of the door frame right-side lower decorative board 433. This helps prevent an increase in the number of LED drivers.

Although not shown, this decorative board 433 on the lower right side of the door frame is connected to a wiring cable consisting of four wires: two power lines (one is a ground line) that supply power to drive the first LED 433a, second LED 433b, the two lower third LEDs 433c, and LED driver 433d; one control signal line that receives signals such as commands and addresses from the peripheral control board 1510; and one clock line that synchronizes the LED driver 433d with the peripheral control board 1510. When the LED driver 433d on this decorative board 433 on the lower right side of the door frame receives a command addressed to that address via the control signal line from the peripheral control board 1510 (performance control board), it can, in response to that command, illuminate the six first LEDs 433a divided into three groups, the twelve second LEDs 433b divided into four groups, and the two third LEDs 433c in the lower group of two groups with the appropriate color and intensity for each group.

The right side reflector 434 has a through-hole 434a that penetrates from front to back at a position corresponding to the second LED 432b on the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame and the second LED 433b on the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame, and also has a cylindrical retaining tube 434b that extends from front to back at a position corresponding to the first LED 432a and first LED 433a. The right side reflector 434 is formed so that the rear end around the through-hole 434a abuts against the front surface of the upper right side decorative board 432 and the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame, and the area around the front side of the through-hole 434a is formed in a dish shape that widens forward. This allows the light from the second LED 432b and the second LED 433b to be diffused widely forward.

The retaining tube 434b of the right side reflector 434 receives the cylindrical light guide shaft 436a of the upper right side light guide member 436 and the cylindrical light guide shaft 437a of the lower right side light guide member 437 (described later), thereby holding the light guide shaft 436a and the light guide shaft 437a straight in the front-to-rear direction. This retaining tube 434b is located in the center between the through holes 434a. As a result, light from the second LED 432b on the upper right door frame decorative board 432 and the second LED 433b on the lower right door frame decorative board 433, which are visible through the through holes 434a on both the top and bottom of the light guide shafts 436a and 437a that protrude forward through the retaining tube 434b, is irradiated onto the light guide shafts 436a and 437a with an equal amount of light from both the top and bottom, preventing the shadow of the light guide shafts 436a and 437a from being cast on the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435.

The right side reflector 434 also has a mounting hole in the center (on the center line) between the through holes 434a for mounting to the door frame right side base 431. This prevents the shadow of the head of the screw inserted into the mounting hole from being cast on the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435.

The door frame right-side decorative body 435 is formed in a translucent milky white color. It is formed in the shape of a semicircular arc that bulges forward and extends vertically. This gives the door frame right-side decorative body 435 a semi-tubular shape that opens rearward. The door frame right-side decorative body 435 has multiple openings 435a that penetrate the center of its width in the left-right direction at regular intervals. The multiple openings 435a are located in positions corresponding to the retaining tube 434b of the right-side reflector 434. The respective tips of the light-guiding shaft 436a of the upper right-side light-guiding member 436 and the light-guiding shaft 437a of the lower right-side light-guiding member 437 are inserted into these openings 435a from the rear. The door frame right-side decorative body 435 is formed from a synthetic resin with higher light transmittance than the door frame left-side decorative body 438 and the door frame right-side decorative body 440. The door frame right side decorative body 435 has the same light transmittance as the door frame left side decorative body 426. In addition, the door frame right side decorative body 435 further has a decorative portion 435b that is recessed in an arc shape to avoid the multiple openings 435a and extends along the center of the width in the left-right direction.

The upper right-side light-guiding member 436 is made of a transparent material and has four cylindrical light-guiding shafts 436a extending forward and backward, and a runner 436b connecting the lower ends of the four light-guiding shafts 436a. The four light-guiding shafts 436a are spaced apart vertically from the top of the right-side reflector 434, corresponding to the four retaining tubes 434b. Furthermore, the light-guiding shafts 436a extend forward and backward with a diameter roughly equal to the inner diameter of the retaining tubes 434b. Each light-guiding shaft 436a passes through the retaining tube 434b of the right-side reflector 434 from the rear and is inserted into a corresponding opening 435a in the right-side door frame decorative body 435, with its tip flush with the surface of the right-side door frame decorative body 435. This upper right side light-guiding member 436 uses the light-guiding shaft 436a to guide light from the first LED 432a on the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame forward and radiate it outward from the tip, brightly illuminating the opening 435a of the right side door frame decorative body 435.

The lower right-side light-guiding member 437 is made of a transparent material and has six cylindrical light-guiding shafts 437a extending forward and backward, and runners 437b connecting the lower ends of the six light-guiding shafts 437a. The six light-guiding shafts 437a are spaced apart vertically from the bottom of the right-side reflector 434, corresponding to the six retaining tubes 434b. Furthermore, the light-guiding shafts 437a extend forward and backward with a diameter roughly equal to the inner diameter of the retaining tubes 434b. Each light-guiding shaft 437a passes through the retaining tubes 434b of the right-side reflector 434 from the rear and is inserted into a corresponding opening 435a in the right-side door frame decorative body 435, with its tip flush with the surface of the right-side door frame decorative body 435. This right-side lower light-guiding member 437 uses the light-guiding shaft 437a to guide light from the first LED 433a on the door frame right-side lower decorative board 433 forward and radiate it outward from the tip, brightly illuminating the opening 435a in the door frame right-side decorative body 435.

The door frame right-side left-side decorative body 438 is formed as a plate extending vertically, with multiple decorative holes 438a penetrating left and right in a predetermined shape (radial pattern shape). The front end of the door frame right-side left-side decorative body 438 is formed in a shape that follows the rear end of the door frame right-side decorative body 435. The door frame right-side left-side decorative body 438 is molded in two colors using synthetic resins with different colors and translucency (light transmittance). More specifically, like the handle cover 295 and door frame left-side base 421 described above, the door frame right-side left-side decorative body 438 is molded in two colors using two types of resin, an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b, and a portion of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface, forming a circular or radial pattern. In other words, part of the circular and radial patterns appearing on the surface of the door frame right-side left-side decorative body 438 are the inner layer 3a, and the circular and radial patterns are connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see Figure 71 (a)). When molding the door frame right-side left-side decorative body 438, either the inner layer 3a or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

The right-side left lens 439 is formed in a flat plate shape that conforms to the inner (right) surface of the door frame's right-side left-side decorative body 438, and has a decorative portion 439a that protrudes to the left and fits into the decorative hole 438a of the door frame's right-side left-side decorative body 438 from the inside (right side). When fitted into the decorative hole 438a, the surface of the decorative portion 439a coincides with the outer (left) surface of the door frame's right-side left-side decorative body 438 (see Figure 70). This right-side left lens 439 is formed from a synthetic resin with higher light transmittance than the door frame's right-side left-side decorative body 438. The decorative portion 439a of this right-side left lens 439 is located to the left of the reflector portion 431a on the door frame's right-side base 431, and can be illuminated and decorated with light from the third LED 432c on the door frame's right-side upper decorative board 432 and the third LED 433c on the door frame's right-side lower decorative board 433.

The right-side left lens 439 is also formed in the same color as the inner layer 3a of the door frame right-side left-side decorative body 438. As a result, in the assembled state, the decorative portion 439a visible through the decorative hole 438a of the door frame right-side left-side decorative body 438 looks the same as the radial pattern molded in two colors on the door frame right-side left-side decorative body 438, making it difficult to distinguish from the decorative portion 439a illuminated by the third LED 432c and third LED 433c.

The right-side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame is formed as a plate that extends vertically and has multiple decorative holes 440a that run horizontally in a predetermined shape (radial pattern). The right-side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame also has a cylinder insertion opening 440b into which a cylindrical portion with a keyhole 132 at the front end of the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted. The right-side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame is formed to be approximately the same height as the door frame 3 in the vertical direction. The front end of the right-side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame, from its top end to the cylinder insertion opening 440b, is shaped to follow the rear end of the right-side decorative body 435 on the right side of the door frame.

The door frame right side decorative body 440 is molded in two colors using synthetic resins with different colors and translucency (light transmittance). More specifically, like the handle cover 295, door frame left side base 421, and door frame left side decorative body 438, the door frame right side decorative body 440 is molded in two colors using two types of resin: an inner layer 3a and an outer layer 3b. A portion of the inner layer 3a penetrates the outer layer 3b and appears on the outer surface, forming a circular or radial pattern. In other words, part of the circular or radial pattern appearing on the surface of the door frame right side decorative body 440 is the inner layer 3a, and the circular or radial pattern is connected on the back side of the outer layer 3b (see Figure 71(a)). When molding the door frame right side decorative body 440, either the inner layer 3a or the outer layer 3b may be injection molded first.

The right-side lens 441 is formed in a flat plate shape that conforms to the inner (right) surface above the cylinder insertion opening 440b of the right-side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame, and has a decorative portion 441a that protrudes to the right and fits into the decorative hole 440a of the right-side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame from the inside (left side). When fitted into the decorative hole 440a, the surface of the decorative portion 441a coincides with the outer (right) surface of the right-side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame (see Figure 70). This right-side lens 441 is formed from a synthetic resin with a higher light transmittance than the right-side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame. The decorative portion 441a of this right lens 441 on the right side is located to the right of the reflector portion 431a on the right side base 431 of the door frame, and can be illuminated and decorated with light from the third LED 432c on the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the third LED 433c on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame.

The right lens 441 on the right side is formed in the same color as the inner layer 3a of the decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame. As a result, in the assembled state, the decorative portion 441a visible through the decorative hole 440a on the decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame looks the same as the radial pattern molded in two colors on the decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame, making it difficult to distinguish from the decorative portion 441a illuminated by the third LED 432c and third LED 433c.

In this embodiment, the door frame right side unit 430 has the circular or radial patterned parts on the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame formed in the same color as the circular or radial patterned parts on the handle cover 295 and the left side base 421 of the door frame, and the parts outside the circular or radial patterned parts on the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame formed in the same color as the parts outside the circular or radial patterned parts on the handle cover 295 and the left side base 421 of the door frame.

In this embodiment, the portion of the door frame right side unit 430 above the vertical center protrudes further forward than the portion of the opposite door frame left side unit 420 at the same height. This door frame right side unit 430 is formed at approximately the same height as the door frame 3 from its top to bottom. The upper part of the door frame right side unit 430 is located on the outer right side of the door frame top unit 450.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the door frame right side unit 430 decorates the right outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the door frame right side decorative body 435 appears to have a cylindrical fluorescent lamp embedded in it.

The door frame right side unit 430 protrudes forward from the top to roughly half its height, forming a screen. This makes it difficult for players seated in front of the pachinko machine located adjacent to the right side of the island equipment in the gaming hall to see inside the door window 101a (playing area 5a). Therefore, because the door frame right side unit 430 is shaped like a screen, it can block the line of sight of nearby players, making it difficult for other players to see the entire playing area 5a. This reduces the feeling that other players are watching, allowing players to play without worrying about other players.

In the door frame right side unit 430 of this embodiment, the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 are located at a position some distance behind the front of the door frame right side decorative body 435. This allows the light from the second LEDs 432b and 433b mounted on them to be irradiated to the back side of the door frame right side decorative body 435 in a sufficiently spread state, allowing the door frame right side decorative body 435 to be uniformly illuminated and decorated.

In addition, the door frame right side unit 430 guides (guides) light forward from the first LED 432a on the upper right side decorative board 432 and the first LED 433a on the lower right side decorative board 433, which are located away from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative body 435, using the light guiding shaft 436a of the upper right side light guiding member 436 and the light guiding shaft 437a of the lower right side light guiding member 437, causing the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 to emit light in a spot-like manner that is brighter than other areas.

Furthermore, by illuminating the third LED 432c on the upper right-side decorative board 432 and the third LED 433c on the lower right-side decorative board 433, the door frame right-side unit 430 can illuminate the decorative portion 439a of the left right-side lens 439, which is fitted into the decorative hole 438a of the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame, and the decorative portion 441a of the right right-side lens 441, which is fitted into the decorative hole 440a of the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame, via the reflector portion 431a of the right-side door frame base 431. Furthermore, because portions of the left and right sides of the screen-shaped door frame right-side unit 430 (the areas of decorative portion 439a and decorative portion 441a) can be illuminated, the pachinko machine 1 can be made to stand out to other players, providing a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, according to the door frame right side unit 430 of this embodiment, the first LED 432a and second LED 432b on the front side of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the first LED 433a and second LED 433b on the front side of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 illuminate and decorate the front end side door frame right side decorative body 435, and the third LED 432c on the rear side of the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and the third LED 433c on the rear side of the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 illuminate and decorate the door frame right side left side decorative body 435 behind the door frame right side decorative body 435. 8 and the right-side door frame decorative element 440 on the right side are illuminated, and therefore the presence of the upper right-side door frame decorative board 432 and the lower right-side door frame decorative board 433 prevents light from the first LED 432a, the second LED 432b, the first LED 433a, and the second LED 433b from illuminating the rear left-side door frame decorative element 438 and the right-side door frame decorative element 440, causing them to be illuminated, or light from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c from illuminating the front right-side door frame decorative element 435, causing them to be illuminated. This allows the right-side door frame decorative element 435 and the rear left-side door frame decorative element 438 and the right-side door frame decorative element 440 to be illuminated completely independently, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can present players with more effective illumination effects.

In addition, the door frame right-side unit 430 has the first LED 432a on the door frame right-side upper decorative board 432 and the first LED 433a on the door frame right-side lower decorative board 433, and the light guide shaft 436a of the right-side upper light-guiding member 436 and the light guide shaft 437a of the right-side lower light-guiding member 437, located in the center between the two adjacent second LEDs 432b and 433b. This allows the light guide shaft 436a and light guide shaft 437a to be irradiated with an equal amount of light from the second LEDs 432b and 433b on both sides. Therefore, even if a shadow of the light guide shaft 436a and light guide shaft 437a is cast from behind onto the door frame right-side decorative body 435, the shadow is less visible, allowing the door frame right-side decorative body 435 to be illuminated in an even, planar manner.

Furthermore, the door frame right-side unit 430 is configured so that the door frame right-side decorative body 435 has a decorative portion 435b that extends along the center of the left-right width so as to connect the multiple openings 435a. As a result, even if the shadows of the light guide shafts 436a and 437a are projected onto the door frame right-side decorative body 435 by the light from the second LEDs 432b and 433b, the presence of the decorative portion 435b in the area where the shadows are projected makes the shadows of the light guide shafts 436a and 437a less noticeable, thereby improving the appearance of the illuminated decoration of the door frame right-side decorative body 435.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 29 and 30. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 so as to be sandwiched between the upper portions of the left and right side units 420, 430.

The door frame top unit 450 comprises a door frame top base 451 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, above the door window 101a; a top upper cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451 so as to cover both the left and right sides and the upper front surface of the door frame top base 451; a door frame top decorative body 453 attached to the front end of the top upper cover 452; and a door frame top bottom plate (not shown) connecting the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 to the lower end of the door frame top base 451.

The door frame top unit 450 also includes a door frame top central decorative board 455 that is attached to the center of the front of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and has multiple LEDs mounted on its front surface; a door frame top left decorative board 456 that is attached to the left of the door frame top central decorative board 455 on the front of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and has multiple LEDs mounted on its front surface; and a door frame top right decorative board 457 that is attached to the right of the door frame top central decorative board 455 on the front of the top upper cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453 and has multiple LEDs mounted on its front surface (see Figure 72).

The door frame top unit 450 also includes a pair of top center speakers (not shown) mounted on the front of the door frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers (not shown) mounted on the left and right outer sides of the pair of top center speakers, a top lower cover 465 attached to the underside of the door frame top decorative body 453 so as to cover the front of the top center speakers and top side speakers, a door frame top relay board (not shown) attached near the right end of the front of the door frame top base 451, and a door frame top plate 468 attached to the top upper cover 452 so as to cover the top of the door frame top base 451.

The door frame top base 451 extends left and right for a length approximately equal to the distance between the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430. The top upper cover 452 protrudes forward in a semicircular arc shape in a plan view, and has an opening 452a that is cut out significantly from the rear end toward the front. This opening 452a is closed by the door frame top plate 468.

The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a translucent milky white color. In a plan view, the door frame top decorative body 453 extends left and right in a semicircular arc shape along the front edge of the top upper cover 452. The front surface of the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semicircular arc shape so that the center in the vertical direction protrudes forward. As a result, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear.

The door frame top central decorative board 455 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. The door frame top central decorative board 455 has multiple full-color LEDs 455a mounted on the front surface. By appropriately illuminating the multiple LEDs 455a, this door frame top central decorative board 455 can illuminate and decorate the center of the door frame top decorative body 453.

The door frame top left decorative board 456 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. The door frame top left decorative board 456 has multiple full-color LEDs 456a mounted on the front surface. By appropriately illuminating the multiple LEDs 456a, this door frame top left decorative board 456 can illuminate and decorate the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453.

The door frame top right decorative board 457 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. The door frame top right decorative board 457 has multiple full-color LEDs 457a mounted on the front surface. By appropriately illuminating the multiple LEDs 457a, this door frame top right decorative board 457 can illuminate and decorate the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453.

A pair of top center speakers are located on the left and right, spaced apart. The pair of top center speakers are full-range speakers that output sounds such as voice and music over a wide frequency range. The pair of top side speakers are tweeters that output high-frequency sounds such as voice and music.

The top lower cover 465 is made of punched metal, a metal plate with numerous through-holes. Sound output from the top center speaker and top side speakers is emitted forward and downward through the top lower cover 465.

The door frame top relay board is used to relay the connections between the door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, door frame top right decorative board 457, top center speaker, and top side speaker and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top plate 468 closes the opening 452a of the top upper cover 452, and its front end is engaged with the top upper cover 452 while its rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100.

When assembled to the door frame 3, the door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The door frame top unit 450 is connected so that both the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 sink from the front to a position rearward of the inside of the upper part of the left door frame side decorative body 426 and the right door frame side decorative body 435. The door frame top unit 450 can also output sounds such as voice and music to the player using a pair of top center speakers and a pair of top side speakers.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
Next, the decoration (exterior) of the door frame 3 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 22 to 28 and Figure 71. Figure 71(a) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit, showing the two-color molded outer layer of the door frame in an opaque state, and Figure 71(b) is a right side view of the door frame right side unit in Figure 71(a), showing the outer layer in a transparent state while the inner layer remains the same. As shown in the figures, the door frame 3 has a generally rectangular door window 101a extending vertically in the center when viewed from the front, which is closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of a glass unit 160. The door frame 3 is surrounded on the entire periphery of the door window 101a by the left dish decorative body 271 and right dish decorative body 276 of the dish unit 200, the unit upper cover 312 and button body 351 of the performance operation unit 300, the left door frame side decorative body 426 of the left door frame unit 420, the right door frame side decorative body 435 of the right door frame unit 430, and the top door frame decorative body 453 of the top door frame unit 450.

The left dish decorative body 271, right dish decorative body 276, left door frame decorative body 426, right door frame decorative body 435, and top door frame decorative body 453 that surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a are formed in a semi-tubular shape, allowing players to see the entire periphery of the door window 101a as if it were surrounded by fluorescent lights.

In the door frame 3, behind or below the left dish decorative body 271, right dish decorative body 276, upper unit cover 312, left door frame decorative body 426, right door frame decorative body 435, and top door frame decorative body 453 that surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a, are the left dish decorative board 273, right dish decorative board 278, outer effect control unit decorative board 320, upper left door frame decorative board 422 and lower left door frame decorative board 423, upper right door frame decorative board 432 and lower right door frame decorative board 433, center top door frame decorative board 455, top left door frame decorative board 456, and top right door frame decorative board 457. By appropriately illuminating the LEDs on these decorative boards, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be illuminated, or the player can be shown an illuminated effect as light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

A spherical performance operation unit 300 with a diameter larger than the front-to-back distance of the upper tray 201 is attached to the left-to-right center of the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3. This increases the visual impact of the large spherical performance operation unit 300, as it is positioned in the center of the tray unit 200, and makes the performance operation section 301 (touch operation section 302 and pressing operation section 303) of the performance operation unit 300 stand out.

In addition, under normal conditions, the top surface of the button body 351 serving as the effect operation unit 301 is flush with the top surface of the unit upper cover 312, forming a single sphere. This makes it difficult for players to recognize that the effect operation unit 301 (button body 351) is operable, and the effect operation unit 300, which is a giant sphere, makes it possible for players to recognize at a glance that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines, strongly attracting the player's attention and increasing its appeal to players, making it easier for them to select this pachinko machine 1 as the machine to play.

In addition, in the spin unit 200, the center (centre) of the performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300 is positioned forward of the apex of the spherical performance operation unit 300, so that the top surface of the performance operation section 301 (touch operation section 302 and pressing operation section 303) faces towards the head (face) of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, for a player who recognizes that the giant sphere located in the center of the spin unit 200 is the performance operation section 301, the entirety of the performance operation section 301 can be easily seen, making the performance operation section 301 appear larger. Furthermore, this can make the player want to try operating the giant spherical effect operation unit 301, heightening their anticipation for the execution of a player-participation effect in which they operate the effect operation unit 301, and when a player-participation effect is executed, it can make the player actively operate the effect operation unit 301, allowing them to enjoy the player-participation effect by operating the effect operation unit 301 and preventing a decline in interest.

Next, as shown in Figures 2 to 5, the exterior of the door frame 3 in this embodiment has multiple circular and radial patterns on its outer surface. Figure 71 shows the door frame right side unit 430 as an example of part of the exterior of the door frame 3.

More specifically, the multiple circular and radial patterns on the exterior surface of the door frame 3 are formed by two-color molding using two types of synthetic resin with different colors and translucency (light transmittance). The patterned exterior portion of the door frame 3 is two-color molded using two types of resin, the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b, and the circular and radial patterns are formed by portions of the inner layer 3a penetrating the outer layer 3b and appearing on the outer surface.

For example, taking the door frame right side unit 430 as an example, as shown in Figure 71(a), if a honeycomb pattern is applied to the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b is made opaque, the honeycomb pattern of the inner layer 3a will be visible in the circular patterned areas, and the opaque outer layer 3b will be visible in areas other than the pattern, resulting in an exterior appearance that emphasizes the circular and radial patterns.

In contrast, as shown in Figure 71(b), if the outer layer 3b is made transparent, the honeycomb pattern on the inner layer 3a can be seen through the outer layer 3b, making the circular and radial patterns relatively difficult to see. In other words, the exterior has an appearance that emphasizes the honeycomb pattern on the inner layer 3a.

In Figure 71, the decorative element 441a fitted into the decorative hole 440a of the door frame right side right side decorative element 440, which is molded in two colors as part of the exterior, is part of the right lens 441 on the right side and is a separate component from the door frame right side right side decorative element 440. Therefore, even if the outer layer 3b is made transparent, the pattern of the decorative hole 440a (decorative element 441a) does not change.

As such, according to this embodiment, the main components that make up the exterior of the door frame 3 are formed using two-color molding. By appropriately selecting and combining the colors and light transmittance of the materials (synthetic resins) used for the inner layer 3a and outer layer 3b, the appearance can be significantly different even if the shape remains the same.

Therefore, for example, when making minor changes, the exterior of the pachinko machine 1 can be changed at no additional cost by making the outer layer 3b transparent so that the pattern on the inner layer 3a is visible.

Alternatively, by changing the color of the inner layer 3a and outer layer 3b for each production lot and shipping pachinko machines 1 from different lots to the same gaming hall and installing them in island equipment, it is possible to create a colorful look that will increase their appeal to players.

In the above embodiment, two-color molding is shown, but this is not limited to this, and multi-color molding such as three-color molding or four-color molding may also be used. Specifically, in the above embodiment, the exterior is formed by combining a two-color molded door frame right side decorative body 440 with a right side lens 441, but three-color molding may be used, in which the door frame right side decorative body 440 and the right side lens 441 are formed as a single unit.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment shows circular and radial patterns, this is not limited to these and patterns of various shapes may be formed.

In this way, with the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the decorative elements, such as the handle cover 295, door frame left side base 421, door frame right side left side decorative element 438, and door frame right side right side decorative element 440, which are located on the outside of the door window 101a through which the game area 5a of the door frame 3 faces forward, are molded in two colors (multi-color molding) using two synthetic resins with different light transmittances, and the polka dot decoration is applied using this two-color molding.As a result, the decorative elements are formed into the desired shape and the desired decoration is applied to them at the same time, eliminating the need to form the decorative elements into the desired shape and then apply the desired decoration by painting, etc., as is the case with decorative elements in conventional pachinko machines.This eliminates the effort required for decoration and reduces costs.

Furthermore, because the decoration of the decorative body is formed by two-color molding, the appearance (appearance) of the decorative body can be easily changed by changing the color of the synthetic resin used. Specifically, when forming a polka dot decoration using two-color molding, if the inner layer 3a constituting the inside of the polka dot circles and the outer layer 3b constituting the outside of the circles are formed using the same color but with different light transmittances, the polka dot circles will be difficult to see because the inner layer 3a and outer layer 3b are the same color, resulting in an appearance that appears as if the polka dots are not present. On the other hand, if the inner layer 3a constituting the inside of the polka dot circles is white and the outer layer 3b constituting the outside of the circles is pink, the polka dot circles will be clearly visible due to the difference in color between the inner layer 3a and outer layer 3b, resulting in an appearance of white polka dots on a pink background. In this way, by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin used when forming the decorative body, the appearance of the decorative body can be easily changed, thereby reducing the costs associated with changing the appearance.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, when forming the decorative body, the appearance of the decorative body can be easily changed by appropriately selecting the light transmittance (including color) of the synthetic resin used. Therefore, if the combination of synthetic resins used is changed for each production lot and different lots of this pachinko machine 1 are shipped to the same gaming hall and installed in a row in an island facility, the island facility can be made to have a colorful feel, which can make a strong impact on players wandering around the gaming hall and provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing and can attract players.

Furthermore, the area of the door frame 3 outside the door window 101a facing the play area 5a is provided with decorative elements such as a handle cover 295, a door frame left side base 421, a door frame right side left side decorative element 438, and a door frame right side right side decorative element 440, which are two-tone molded from multiple synthetic resins with different light transmittances, allowing the exterior of the door window 101a to be decorated with these decorative elements, improving its appearance.

In addition, the outer layer 3b of the two-color molded decorative body is made of a synthetic resin with lower light transmittance than the remaining inner layer 3a, making it difficult to see the inner layer 3a through the outer layer 3b. This makes the boundaries of the decoration (polka dot pattern) made up of the inner layer 3a relatively clear, allowing the decoration to be clearly seen.

Furthermore, by making the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b lower than that of the remaining inner layer 3a, it is possible to make it difficult to see the inner layer 3a through the outer layer 3b. Therefore, in the initial model, the outer layer 3b has a low light transmittance so that the inner layer 3a cannot be seen from the outside. When changing the model, a synthetic resin with a high light transmittance is used for the outer layer 3b, allowing the inner layer 3a to be seen through. This allows for a significant change in the way the decoration of the decorative body is viewed, and makes it easy to change the appearance (decoration) without changing the shape of the decorative body.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the outer layer 3b with low light transmittance makes it difficult to see the inner layer 3a, so a pattern (a pattern based on shape, or a pattern formed by painting, printing, or applying a sticker, etc.) can be applied to the surface of the inner layer 3a. In the initial model, the opaque outer layer 3b with low light transmittance prevents the pattern of the inner layer 3a from being visible through the outer layer 3b. When a model change is made, a transparent synthetic resin can be used for the outer layer 3b, allowing the pattern of the inner layer 3a to be visible through the outer layer 3b. This allows the appearance (decoration) of the decorative body to be significantly changed without changing the shape of the decorative body, thereby minimizing the increase in costs associated with model changes.

Furthermore, the left-side decorative element 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right-side decorative element 440 on the right side of the door frame are provided with a third LED 432c on the upper decorative substrate 432 on the right side of the door frame and a third LED 433c on the lower decorative substrate 433 on the right side of the door frame, which are capable of emitting light. The inner layer 3a is made of a synthetic resin with higher light transmittance than the other layers, so that the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c provided on the inside of the left-side decorative element 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right-side decorative element 440 on the right side of the door frame are illuminated. This allows the inner layer 3a (polka dot area) of the decorations formed on the surface of the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame to be brightly illuminated, and by illuminating the outside of the door window 101a overlooking the playing area 5a, it not only improves the appearance but also allows players to enjoy the illuminated decorations on the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame, preventing a decline in player interest.

Furthermore, depending on the light transmittance of the outer layer 3b, the light from the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c irradiated onto the outer layer 3b through the inner layer 3a can also be used to illuminate the outer layer 3b, making it possible to illuminate the entire left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 on the right side of the door frame, making the left side decorative body 438 on the right side of the door frame and the right side decorative body 440 look beautiful and creating a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the attention of players.

Furthermore, as described above, the decorations of the decorative elements, such as the door frame right-side left-side decorative element 438 and the door frame right-side right-side decorative element 440, are formed by two-color molding (multicolor molding) using multiple synthetic resins with different light transmittances. Therefore, depending on the number of layers up to the surface and the light transmittance of the synthetic resins used, the decorations visible when the LEDs (light-emitting means), such as the third LED 432c and the third LED 433c, are not illuminated can be made different from the decorations visible when the LEDs are illuminated. The change in decorations can strongly attract the player's attention. To explain in more detail, taking two-color molding as an example of multicolor molding, if a hole of a predetermined shape is formed in the inner layer 3a in a portion covered by the outer layer 3b, only the portion of the inner layer 3a exposed to the surface will be visible when the LEDs are not illuminated. On the other hand, when the LED is illuminated, the light from the LED is irradiated directly onto the outer layer 3b without passing through the inner layer 3a in the areas where holes are formed in the inner layer 3a, making the shape of the holes in the inner layer 3a visible on the surface of the outer layer 3b. This allows the exposed areas of the inner layer 3a and the holes to be seen, resulting in a different appearance of the decoration than when the LED is not illuminated. For example, if the inner layer 3a is yellow and the outer layer 3b is blue, illuminating the LED yellow will illuminate only the inner layer 3a in the surface decoration. On the other hand, illuminating the LED green (or white) will illuminate both the inner layer 3a and the outer layer 3b. Therefore, the illuminated areas of the decoration can be varied by changing the color of the light emitted by the LED, thereby changing the illuminated decoration. In this way, the illumination of the LED can be varied to attract and entertain players. Furthermore, by making the LEDs illuminate according to the game status, changes in the decoration of the decorative body can suggest to the player that an opportunity has arrived or that the player's hitting operation has changed (for example, "hit to the right"), making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of a variety of presentations.

Furthermore, the left door frame decorative body 426 and the right door frame decorative body 435, which are located on the left and right outer sides of the door window 101a (play area 5a), have different amounts of protrusion in the front-to-rear direction, which makes it possible to create different impressions (appearances) when viewed from the front left and the front right of the pachinko machine 1.As a result, even if a player wandering around the gaming hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed passes in front of the pachinko machine 1, when they approach the pachinko machine 1 from the opposite side, the machine will look different from when they last walked around, attracting the player's attention to the pachinko machine 1.This makes the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing, capable of luring players wandering around the gaming hall to choose which pachinko machine to play.

[3-10. LED placement and system on door frame]
Next, the arrangement and control system of each LED provided on the door frame 3 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 72 and 73. Figure 72 is a front view showing each decorative board of the door frame, and Figure 73 is a plan view showing the decorative board of the part of the door frame's performance operation unit. As shown in Figure 72, the door frame 3 has a handle 195 in the lower right corner when viewed from the front, which the player rotates to launch the game ball B into the play area 5a of the game board 5. This handle 195 has a central hub portion 195a, three spoke portions 195b extending outward from the central hub portion 195a, and an annular outer ring portion 195c connecting the tips of each spoke portion 195b, and has an appearance similar to that of an automobile steering wheel.

The front side of the central hub portion 195a of the handle 195 is covered by a handle front lens 185, and a handle decoration board 184 with multiple LEDs 184a mounted on its front surface is provided between the handle front lens 185 and the central hub portion 195a. Additionally, a handle cover decoration board 293 with multiple LEDs 293a mounted on its front surface is provided behind the outer ring portion 195c of the handle 195.

The handle decorative board 184 has a total of 10 LEDs 184a (full-color LEDs) mounted in triple concentric circles: one in the center, three in the middle spaced at regular intervals around the circumference, and six spaced at regular intervals around the outer periphery. These LEDs 184a are divided into five groups: the central one, the three in the middle connected by dashed lines in Figure 72, and two at the top left of the outer periphery, two at the top right, and two at the bottom of the outer periphery, all connected by dashed lines. These five groups of LEDs 184a are controlled by an LED driver 184b in 15 systems, allowing each group of LEDs 184a to emit full-color light as appropriate.

On the other hand, twelve LEDs 293a are arranged in a row at intervals in the circumferential direction on the handle cover decorative substrate 293. These twelve LEDs 293a are divided into six groups, as connected by dashed lines in Figure 72, with two LEDs from the center at the bottom left, two on the left, two at the top left, two at the top right, two at the right, and two at the bottom right. These six groups of LEDs 293a are controlled by an LED driver 293b in 18 systems, allowing each group of LEDs 293a to emit light in a full range of appropriate colors.

In this way, because the handle 195 is provided with the handle decoration board 184 and the handle cover decoration board 293, the player can see illumination effects such as light rotating around the handle 195, light concentrating toward the center of the handle 195, and light spreading out toward the outside of the handle 195. Furthermore, the LEDs 293a on the handle cover decoration board 293 can be used to illuminate and decorate the outside and inside of the handle cover 295.

As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a generally rectangular door window 101a extending vertically in the center when viewed from the front, which is closed by the transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160. The door frame 3 has the door window 101a completely surrounded by the left dish decorative body 271 and right dish decorative body 276 of the dish unit 200, the performance operation unit 300, the left door frame decorative body 426 of the left door frame unit 420, the right door frame decorative body 435 of the right door frame unit 430, and the top door frame decorative body 453 of the top door frame unit 450.

The left dish decorative body 271, right dish decorative body 276, left door frame decorative body 426, right door frame decorative body 435, and top door frame decorative body 453 that surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a are formed in a semi-tubular shape, allowing players to see a decoration that looks as if the door window 101a is surrounded almost entirely by fluorescent lights.

As shown in Figure 72, in this door frame 3, the following are arranged facing forward: a left-hand decorative board 273 behind the left-hand decorative body 271 that surrounds the outer periphery of the door window 101a; a right-hand decorative board 278 behind the right-hand decorative body 276; an upper left-hand decorative board 422 and a lower left-hand decorative board 423 behind the left-hand side decorative body 426; an upper right-hand decorative board 432 and a lower right-hand side decorative board 433 behind the right-hand side decorative body 435; and a central top-hand decorative board 455, a top-left decorative board 456, and a top-right decorative board 457 behind the top decorative body 453.

More specifically, the left-hand dish decorative board 273 is equipped with four LEDs 273a mounted on the front surface in a row running horizontally, and an LED driver (not shown) for illuminating the LEDs 273a and the LEDs 273a on the right-hand dish decorative board 278 (described below). These four LEDs 273a are divided into two sets of two on the left and two on the right, as connected by dashed lines in Figure 72. These two sets of LEDs 273a are controlled by an LED driver in six systems, and each set of LEDs 273a can emit light in a full range of colors as appropriate.

The right-hand plate decorative board 278 is equipped with four LEDs 278a mounted on the front surface in a row running left to right. These four LEDs 278a are divided into two sets of two on the left and two on the right, as connected by dashed lines in Figure 72. These two sets of LEDs 278a are controlled in six systems by the LED driver on the left-hand plate decorative board 273, and each set of LEDs 278a can emit light in a full range of appropriate colors.

The door frame upper left side decorative board 422 is equipped with four first LEDs 422a mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, eight second LEDs 422b mounted in pairs vertically between the first LEDs 422a, and an LED driver 422c for illuminating the 12 first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b. The first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b are mounted on the front surface. The four first LEDs 422a on the door frame upper left side decorative board 422 are divided into two sets of two: the top two and the remaining two, as connected by the two-dot chain line in Figure 72. The eight second LEDs 422b are also divided into three sets: the top two, the third through fifth LEDs from the top, and the sixth through eighth LEDs from the top, as connected by the dash-dot line in Figure 72. The four first LEDs 422a divided into two groups and the eight second LEDs 422b divided into three groups are controlled by an LED driver 422c in 15 systems, allowing each group of first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b to emit light in a full range of appropriate colors.

The decorative board 423 on the lower left side of the door frame is equipped with six first LEDs 423a mounted at regular intervals in the vertical direction, twelve second LEDs 423b mounted in pairs vertically between the first LEDs 423a, and an LED driver 423c for illuminating a total of 18 first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b. The first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b are mounted on the front surface. The six first LEDs 423a are divided into three groups, with two LEDs in each group starting from the top, as connected by the two-dot chain lines in Figure 72. The twelve second LEDs 423b are also divided into four groups, with three LEDs from the top (first to third), three LEDs from the top (fourth to sixth), three LEDs from the top (seventh to ninth), and three LEDs from the top (tenth to twelfth). The six first LEDs 423a divided into three groups and the twelve second LEDs 423b divided into four groups are controlled by an LED driver 423c in 21 systems, allowing each group of first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b to emit light in a full range of appropriate colors.

The door frame right-side upper decorative board 432 is equipped with four first LEDs 432a mounted on the front surface at regular intervals in the vertical direction, eight second LEDs 432b mounted on the front surface in pairs vertically spaced apart, and four third LEDs 432c mounted on the rear surface at intervals in the vertical direction. The door frame right-side upper decorative board 432 is also equipped with an LED driver 432d for illuminating a total of 16 first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 432b, and third LEDs 432c, as well as the two third LEDs 433c on the door frame right-side lower decorative board 433. The four first LEDs 432a are divided into two groups: the top two and the remaining two, as connected by the dashed double-dashed line in Figure 72. The eight second LEDs 432b are divided into three groups: the top two, the third through fifth, and the sixth through eighth, as connected by dashed lines in Figure 72. The four third LEDs 432c are divided into two groups: the top two and the remaining two, as connected by dashed lines in Figure 72. The two groups of first LEDs 432a, the three groups of second LEDs 432b, the two groups of third LEDs 432c, and the upper group of third LEDs 433c on the lower right door frame decorative board 433 are controlled by an LED driver 432d in 24 systems, allowing each group of first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 432b, third LEDs 432c, and third LEDs 433c to emit light in a full color as appropriate.

The door frame right lower decorative board 433 is equipped with six first LEDs 433a mounted on the front surface at regular intervals in the vertical direction, twelve second LEDs 433b mounted on the front surface in pairs vertically spaced apart between the first LEDs 433a, four third LEDs 433c mounted on the rear surface at intervals in the vertical direction, and an LED driver 433d for illuminating the first LEDs 433a, second LEDs 433b, and the two lower third LEDs 433c. The six first LEDs 433a are divided into three groups, with two LEDs in each group arranged in order from the top, as connected by dashed double-dashed lines in Figure 72. The 12 second LEDs 433b are divided into four groups of three from the top, as connected by dashed lines in FIG. 72: the first to third LEDs (three), the fourth to sixth LEDs (three), the seventh to ninth LEDs (three), and the tenth to twelfth LEDs (three). The four rear third LEDs 433c are divided into two groups, consisting of the top two and the remaining two, as connected by dashed lines in FIG. 72. The three groups of six first LEDs 433a, the four groups of 12 second LEDs 433b, and the lower group of two third LEDs 433c are controlled by an LED driver 433d in 24 systems, allowing each group of first LEDs 433a, second LEDs 433b, and third LEDs 433c to emit light in a full color as appropriate.

In this embodiment, the upper left-side decorative board 422 and lower left-side decorative board 423, which are provided on the left side of the door window 101a, and the upper right-side decorative board 432 and lower right-side decorative board 433, which are provided on the right side of the door window 101a, are formed in asymmetric shapes with the center of the door window 101a in the left-right direction as the boundary. Furthermore, the upper left-side decorative board 422 and lower left-side decorative board 423, and the upper right-side decorative board 432 and lower right-side decorative board 433 also have different shapes in the front-to-back direction.

The door frame left-side upper decorative board 422 and left-side lower decorative board 423, and the door frame right-side upper decorative board 432 and right-side lower decorative board 433, respectively, have the same number of first LEDs 422a, second LEDs 422b, first LEDs 423a, second LEDs 423b, and first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 432b, first LEDs 433a, second LEDs 433b mounted on their front surfaces, and their arrangement and systems (systems connected by dashed lines and dashed double-dot lines in Figure 72) are symmetrical. This makes it easy to create data for the LED lighting patterns used to create light-emitting effects.

The door frame top center decorative board 455 is equipped with six LEDs 455a mounted on the front surface at intervals in the left-right direction, and an LED driver (not shown) for illuminating the LEDs 455a, the LEDs 456a on the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the LEDs 457a on the door frame top right decorative board 457. The six LEDs 455a are divided into three groups of two from the left, as connected by dashed lines in Figure 72. The six LEDs 455a divided into three groups are controlled by the LED driver in nine systems, and each group of LEDs 455a can emit light in a full range of colors as appropriate.

The door frame top left decorative board 456 is equipped with four LEDs 456a mounted on the front, spaced apart in the left and right directions. The four LEDs 456a are divided into two sets of two on the left and two on the right, as connected by dashed lines in Figure 72. The four LEDs 456a divided into two sets are controlled in six systems by the LED driver on the door frame top center decorative board 455, allowing each set of LEDs 456a to emit light in a full range of appropriate colors.

The door frame top right decorative board 457 is equipped with four LEDs 457a mounted on the front, spaced apart in the left and right directions. The four LEDs 457a are divided into two sets of two on the left and two on the right, as connected by dashed lines in Figure 72. The four LEDs 457a divided into two sets are controlled in six systems by the LED driver on the door frame top center decorative board 455, and each set of LEDs 457a can emit light in a full range of appropriate colors.

According to the door frame 3 of this embodiment, light from the first LED 422a on the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, the first LED 423a on the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, the first LED 432a on the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, and the first LED 433a on the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame is guided by the light guiding shaft 427a of the upper left side light guiding member 427, the light guiding shaft 428a of the middle left side light guiding member 428, the light guiding shaft 429a of the lower left side light guiding member 429, the light guiding shaft 436a of the upper right side light guiding member 436, and the light guiding shaft 437a of the lower right side light guiding member 437 to the opening 426a in the left side decorative body 426 of the door frame and the opening 435a in the right side decorative body 435 of the door frame, and is irradiated outward (forward). This allows players to see bright, dot-like light-emitting effects on the front of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and door frame right side decorative body 435, and the bright, dot-like light-emitting effects, which have not been seen in previous pachinko machines, can take players by surprise.

In addition, in the door frame 3, the LED 273a on the left dish decorative board 273, the LED 278a on the right dish decorative board 278, the second LED 422b on the upper left side decorative board 422 of the door frame, the second LED 423b on the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame, the second LED 432b on the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame, the second LED 433b on the lower right side decorative board 433 of the door frame, the LED 455a on the top center decorative board 455 of the door frame, the LED 456a on the top left door frame decorative board 456, and the LED 457a on the top right door frame decorative board 457, which surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a, can be appropriately illuminated to illuminate the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a, or the player can be shown a lighting effect as light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

In other words, in the door frame 3, the LED system connected by the two-dot chain line in Figure 72 can produce a lighting effect in which spots are emitted on the front of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, and the LED system connected by the one-dot chain line in Figure 72 can produce a lighting effect in which the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 emit light in a planar manner (surface emission).

In addition, according to the door frame 3, the light from the first LED 422a, the first LED 423a, the first LED 432a, and the first LED 433a is guided by the light guide shaft 427a, the light guide shaft 428a, the light guide shaft 429a, the light guide shaft 436a, and the light guide shaft 437a to the front end inserted into the opening 426a of the left side door frame decorative body 426 and the opening 435a of the right side door frame decorative body 435, and is then irradiated forward from there.Therefore, compared to the general surfaces of the left side door frame decorative body 426 and the right side door frame decorative body 435, the areas of the opening 426a and the opening 435a can be illuminated with high brightness and spot light. In this case, because the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 are positioned outside the door window 101a overlooking the game area 5a, even if the opening 426a of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the opening 435a of the door frame right side decorative body 435 are illuminated with high brightness spot light, the glare does not make it difficult to see inside the game area 5a as seen through the door window 101a, and the game ball B, effect images, decorative bodies, etc. within the game area 5a can be clearly seen through the door window 101a.

Furthermore, according to the door frame 3, the left-side door frame decorative body 426 and the right-side door frame decorative body 435 protrude forward beyond the door window 101a (play area 5a), and the openings 426a and 435a that emit high-brightness spot light are located at the ridges that form the front ends of the forward-protruding left-side door frame decorative body 426 and right-side door frame decorative body 435 (on the vertical line connecting the front ends that protrude forward in an arc shape in a plan view). This prevents the spot light from being irradiated rearward (toward the door window 101a). Therefore, the spot light from the left-side door frame decorative body 426 and the right-side door frame decorative body 435 is reflected toward the player by the glass plate 162 provided in the door window 101a, preventing it from obscuring the view of the play area 5a behind the door window 101a, and the high-brightness spot light can attract the attention of other players to the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, according to the door frame 3, the spot-emitting portions are located on the left-side door frame decorative body 426 and the right-side door frame decorative body 435, which protrude forward outside the door window 101a of the door frame 3, so the spot-emitting portions are located approximately at the same position as the outer periphery of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, even if a player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the spot-emitting portions are located outside the player, so the player does not block the spot-emitting light. As a result, when the left-side door frame decorative body 426 and the right-side door frame decorative body 435 are illuminated, the high-brightness spot-emitting light is visible to other players who are not seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, making the presence of the pachinko machine 1 appealing to other players and attracting their attention. This also makes the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing, as it can attract players wandering around the gaming hall looking for a pachinko machine to play.

It is desirable that the surface LEDs (second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, second LED 433b) on both sides of the spot LEDs (first LED 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, first LED 433a) for spotlighting the front of the left door frame decorative body 426 and the right door frame decorative body 435 belong to the same family. This ensures that the surface LEDs on both sides of the light guide pin (light guide shaft 427a, light guide shaft 428a, light guide shaft 429a, light guide shaft 436a, light guide shaft 437a) that guides the light of the spot LEDs will be illuminated in the same manner, resulting in the same amount of light being emitted from both sides of the light guide pin at the same time, making the shadow of the light guide pin less visible on the left door frame decorative body 426 and the right door frame decorative body 435.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 73, the door frame 3 is provided below the touch operation section 302 of the performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300, and is equipped with a circular performance operation section outer periphery decorative board 320 with 31 LEDs 320a mounted on its top surface. This performance operation section outer periphery decorative board 320 is equipped with two LED drivers for illuminating the 31 LEDs 320a. The performance operation section outer periphery decorative board 320 is divided into two parts: a front decorative board 321 and a rear decorative board 322.

Eighteen of the 31 LEDs 320a are mounted on the front decorative board 321 of the performance operation unit outer decorative board 320. Of the 18 LEDs 320a on the front decorative board 321, six are spaced apart on a circumference close to the inner circumference, three are spaced apart on a circumference midway between the inner and outer circumferences, and the remaining nine are spaced apart on a circumference close to the outer circumference.

The remaining 13 LEDs 320a are mounted on the rear decorative board 322 of the performance operation unit outer decorative board 320. Of the 13 LEDs 320a on the rear decorative board 322, four are arranged in pairs spaced apart near both ends of the arc on a circumference close to the inner circumference, three are arranged in pairs spaced apart on a circumference midway between the inner and outer circumferences, and the remaining six are arranged in pairs spaced apart near both ends of the arc on a circumference close to the outer circumference.

The 18 LEDs 320a on the front decorative board 321 are divided into nine groups, as shown by the dashed lines in Figure 73: six LEDs on the inner circumference are divided into three groups of two each, three LEDs on the middle circumference are divided into three groups of one each, and nine LEDs on the outer circumference are divided into three groups of three each, for a total of nine groups. Also, the 18 LEDs 320a on the rear decorative board 322 are divided into seven groups, as shown by the dashed lines in Figure 73: four LEDs on the inner circumference are divided into two groups of two each near both ends, three LEDs on the middle circumference are divided into three groups of one each, and nine LEDs on the outer circumference are divided into two groups of three each near both ends. In other words, on the performance control unit outer peripheral decorative board 320, the 31 LEDs 320a are divided into 16 groups. These 16 sets of LEDs 320a are controlled by two LED drivers in 48 systems, allowing each set of LEDs 320a to emit light in a full range of appropriate colors.

This decorative board 320 around the outer periphery of the effect operation unit can appropriately illuminate 31 LEDs (48 systems) 320a, allowing players to see light-emitting effects such as rotating light in the effect operation unit 301, light-emitting effects where light is concentrated at the center, and light-emitting effects where light spreads outward.

Furthermore, according to the door frame 3, a door frame left side decorative body 426 of the door frame left side unit 420 and a door frame right side decorative body 435 of the door frame right side unit 430 are provided on the outside of one side and the other side of the door window 101a facing the game area 5a, extending up and down along the door window 101a so that the amount of protrusion in the front-to-back direction differs. Behind the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435, respectively, there is a door frame left side upper decorative board 422 on which a plurality of first LEDs 422a and second LEDs 422b are mounted, a door frame left side lower decorative board 423 on which a plurality of first LEDs 423a and second LEDs 423b are mounted, and The door frame right side upper decorative board 432 is provided with a plurality of first LEDs 432a and second LEDs 432b mounted thereon, and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 is provided with a plurality of first LEDs 433a and second LEDs 433b mounted thereon. The door frame left side upper decorative board 432 is provided with a plurality of first LEDs 432a and second LEDs 432b mounted thereon, and the door frame right side lower decorative board 433 is provided with a light guide shaft 427a of the left side upper light guide member 427, a light guide shaft 428a of the left side middle light guide member 428, a light guide shaft 429a of the left side lower light guide member 429, and a light guide shaft 429b of the right side upper light guide member 436, which guide the light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a, 432a, and 433a to the vicinity of the front surface of the door frame left side decorative body 426 and the door frame right side decorative body 435 and irradiate it forward. The light guide shaft portion 437a of the lower right-side light guide member 437 is provided, so that the first LED 422b, the second LED 423b, the second LED 432b, and the second LED 433b of the upper left-side door frame decorative board 422, the lower left-side door frame decorative board 423, the upper right-side door frame decorative board 432, and the lower right-side door frame decorative board 433 can be illuminated to illuminate the left-side door frame decorative body 426 and the right-side door frame decorative body 435 in a planar light-emitting decoration (surface emission). When first LED 432a, first LED 433a are illuminated, the light emitted forward is guided by columnar light guiding shaft 427a, light guiding shaft 428a, light guiding shaft 429a, light guiding shaft 436a, light guiding shaft 437a to the front of the left door frame decorative body 426 and right door frame decorative body 435, and then radiated forward from their front ends (front end surfaces), causing the areas on the left door frame decorative body 426 and right door frame decorative body 435 corresponding to the tips of light guiding shaft 427a, light guiding shaft 428a, light guiding shaft 429a, light guiding shaft 436a, light guiding shaft 437a to emit point-like illuminated decoration (spot illumination).

Therefore, by appropriately illuminating the first LED 422a and the second LED 422b, the first LED 423a and the second LED 423b, the first LED 432a and the second LED 432b, and the first LED 433a and the second LED 433b on the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame, the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame, the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame, and the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame, the left side decorative body 426 and the door frame, which are located outside the play area 5a (door window 101a), The entire right-side frame decorative body 435 can be decorated with a surface-like illuminating effect, or parts of the left-side door frame decorative body 426 and the right-side door frame decorative body 435 can be decorated with point-like illuminating effect, or the entire left-side door frame decorative body 426 and the right-side door frame decorative body 435 can be decorated with a surface-like illuminating effect while parts can be decorated with point-like illuminating effect, allowing players to see a variety of illuminating effects, preventing players from getting bored and keeping them entertained, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In this case, the system in which the multiple first LEDs 422a, second LEDs 422b, first LEDs 423a, and second LEDs 423b on the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 and door frame left side lower decorative board 423 are separated is symmetrical to the system in which the multiple first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 432b, first LEDs 433a, and second LEDs 433b on the door frame right side upper decorative board 432 and door frame right side lower decorative board 433 are separated, and in each system, the multiple first LEDs 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, first LED 433a and the multiple second LEDs 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, second LED 433b are separated from each other. Therefore, the first LEDs 422a, second LEDs 422b, first LED 423a, and second LED 423b on the door frame left side decorative body 426 side and the first LEDs 432a, second LEDs 422b, first LED 423a, and second LED 423b on the door frame right side decorative body 435 side are separated from each other. When creating data for the lighting patterns of ED 432a, second LED 432b, first LED 433a, and second LED 433b, for example, data for the left door frame decorative body 426 can be reused as data for the right door frame decorative body 435, or the data flow can be made similar for the left door frame decorative body 426 and the right door frame decorative body 435. This reduces the effort required to create lighting pattern data and makes it easier to create more complex lighting pattern data (with the same creation time), allowing players to see a variety of lighting patterns with a variety of lighting effects that have a high performance effect, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 that can demonstrate sufficient performance effects for the lighting effects on the left door frame decorative body 426 and right door frame decorative body 435 on both the left and right sides of the door window 101a.

In addition, since the two second LEDs 422b, 423b, 432b, and 433b, which are arranged between the first LED 422a, 423a, 432a, and 433a, are in the same system, the two second LEDs 422b, 423b, 432b, and 433b, which are arranged to sandwich the first LED 422a, 423a, 432a, and 433a (light guide axis portion 427a, light guide axis portion 428a, light guide axis portion 429a, light guide axis portion 436a, light guide axis portion 437a), are always lit at the same time. By irradiating light from both sides of light guide shaft portion 429a, light guide shaft portion 436a, and light guide shaft portion 437a, the shadows of light guide shaft portion 427a, light guide shaft portion 428a, light guide shaft portion 429a, light guide shaft portion 436a, and light guide shaft portion 437a cast by light from second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, and second LED 433b are canceled out and become thinner, making it difficult to see the shadows of light guide shaft portion 427a, light guide shaft portion 428a, light guide shaft portion 429a, light guide shaft portion 436a, and light guide shaft portion 437a projected onto left door frame decorative body 426 and right door frame decorative body 435, and allowing the left door frame decorative body 426 and right door frame decorative body 435 to be illuminated and decorated in an even, planar manner.

Furthermore, the left door frame decorative body 426 and the right door frame decorative body 435, which are illuminated in a planar manner using the second LED 422b, second LED 423b, second LED 432b, and second LED 433b, can illuminate the areas corresponding to the front ends of the light guide shafts 427a, 428a, 429a, 436a, and 437a in a point-like manner using the first LED 422a, first LED 423a, first LED 432a, and first LED 433a. This allows players to see illumination effects that have not been seen in previous pachinko machines, such as surface illumination with partial point illumination. This can strongly attract the player's attention with illumination effects that emit bright point-like illumination, and can startle players with illumination effects that emit sparkling point-like illumination, not available in previous pachinko machines, making the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to players.

Furthermore, the door frame upper left side decorative board 422 and door frame lower left side decorative board 423 on one side (left side) in the left-right direction, and the door frame upper right side decorative board 432 and door frame lower right side decorative board 433 on the other side (right side) are asymmetrical in shape relative to each other. This makes it possible to distinguish between the door frame upper left side decorative board 422, door frame lower left side decorative board 423, door frame upper right side decorative board 432, and door frame lower right side decorative board 433 at a glance. This prevents mistakes when assembling the pachinko machine 1, thereby improving assembly workability and suppressing increases in costs.

[3-11. Identification of decorative substrate]
Next, the identification of the various decorative boards on which LEDs are mounted in this pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail, using the door frame 3 as an example, mainly with reference to Figure 74 etc. Figure 74 is a rear view showing the decorative boards provided around the door window of the door frame. Here, the left dish decorative board 273, the right dish decorative board 278, the upper left door frame decorative board 422, the lower left door frame decorative board 423, the upper right door frame decorative board 432, the lower right door frame decorative board 433, the top center door frame decorative board 455, the top left door frame decorative board 456, and the top right door frame decorative board 457, which are provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3, will be described in detail as examples.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, a white board is used for the decorative board on which the LEDs are mounted, and the non-white LED drivers, connection connectors, etc. attached to the decorative board are attached to the rear side of the board. This allows the light from the LEDs mounted on the front side of the decorative board to be reflected forward, making the front decorations and other objects more brightly illuminated and decorative, while also making the decorative board less noticeable from the front (player's side).

The white decorative board may be coated with white solder resist (protective material), or the board material itself may be white.

Since pachinko machine 1 has many decorative boards, a different identification section 7 is provided on the rear surface of each decorative board to make it easy to identify each one (see Figure 74). This identification section 7 has a character identification section 7a with characters such as kanji, kana, alphabet, symbols, numbers, model numbers, etc., and a color identification section 7b with different colors (shown in Figure 74 with different shades of shading).

More specifically, the character identification section 7a has the characters "bottom left" on the left decorative board 273, "bottom right" on the right decorative board 278, "top left" on the upper left side decorative board 422 of the door frame, "bottom left" on the lower left side decorative board 423 of the door frame, "top right" on the upper right side decorative board 432 of the door frame, "bottom right" on the lower right side decorative board 433, "top center" on the top center decorative board 455 of the door frame, "top left" on the top left decorative board 456 of the door frame, and "top right" on the top right decorative board 457 of the door frame.

The color identification portion 7b is a different color for each decorative board and is applied across almost the entire front surface of the rear surface. In this embodiment, as shown in Figure 74, the color identification portion 7b is applied only partially, rather than across the entire rear surface, so as not to interfere with the soldering of LEDs and other components mounted on the decorative board.

The identification portion 7 is applied to the decorative substrate by printing (silk printing), attaching a sticker, applying paint, etc.

In the above, we have used the decorative board provided around the door window 101a in the door frame 3 as an example, but identification units 7 such as character identification units 7a and color identification units 7b may also be provided on various decorative boards provided on the handle unit 180, the performance operation unit 300, the game board 5, etc.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the identification unit 7 is shown to have both a character identification unit 7a and a color identification unit 7b, but this is not limited to this, and it may also be the character identification unit 7a only, or the color identification unit 7b only.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the decorative board on which the LEDs are mounted is provided with an identification section 7 (character identification section 7a and color identification section 7b), making it easy to distinguish between decorative boards of similar shapes, preventing the wrong decorative board from being installed during assembly work and improving assembly workability.

Furthermore, with the pachinko machine 1, the identification unit 7 is provided on the rear surface of the decorative board, allowing the front side of the decorative board to be as white as possible. This allows the light from the LEDs mounted on the front side of the decorative board to be reflected forward by the front surface of the decorative board, making the decorative objects in front more brightly illuminated and decorative, and also makes the decorative board less noticeable from the front (player's side), improving its appearance.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1, the color identification portion 7b serving as the identification portion 7 is applied over almost the entire decorative board, so it is possible to determine whether the decorative board is the desired one (desired color) just by looking at a portion of the decorative board. Therefore, even when multiple types of decorative boards are stacked on top of each other during assembly, the desired decorative board can be easily found as long as a portion of the decorative board is visible, simplifying the effort required for assembly.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1, the color of the color identification portion 7b is different for each decorative board. Therefore, when preparing the decorative boards required for one pachinko machine 1 during assembly, if there are decorative boards with the same color identification portion 7b, it is easy to recognize that duplicate decorative boards have been prepared. Alternatively, if there are not enough colors in the color identification portion 7b of the prepared decorative boards, it is easy to recognize that there are decorative boards that have not been prepared. Therefore, when preparing the decorative boards required for assembling the pachinko machine 1, it is easy to recognize whether excess decorative boards have been prepared or if the prepared decorative boards are insufficient. This allows for reliable preparation of only the necessary number of decorative boards, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that is easy to set up during assembly. Therefore, the assembly work of the pachinko machine 1 can be carried out smoothly, shortening the assembly time and suppressing increases in costs.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1, the rear surface of the decorative board is provided with a character identification section 7a as an identification section 7 to distinguish it from other boards. By reading the characters on the character identification section 7a, an operator can easily determine which part the decorative board belongs to, achieving the same effect as described above.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1, the front and back of each decorative board are white, and an identification part 7 is provided on the back. This makes the decorative board less noticeable from the front (player's side) even if the decorative body provided in front of the decorative board is highly transparent, improving the appearance of the decorative body. In addition, the white front of the decorative board allows the light from the LED to be reflected forward, allowing the decorative body to emit more bright light, and the highly effective light-emitting effect entertains the player and prevents a decline in interest.

Furthermore, with the pachinko machine 1, functional components such as LED drivers are mounted on the rear surface of the decorative substrate, making them invisible from the front (player side). This prevents the functional components from being visible through the decorative body, which would otherwise spoil the appearance, and improves the appearance of the decorative body (gaming machine). Furthermore, because the functional components are hidden by being mounted on the rear surface of the decorative substrate, there is no need to color the functional components white (or yellow) to make them less noticeable, and the functional components can be used as is, eliminating the need to color the functional components and reducing the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

[3-12. Action and effect of door frame]
According to this embodiment, the switching unit 394 is used to switch between a plurality of contact detection bodies 393 provided at different positions in the pachinko machine 1 so that the contact detection body 393 provided at the desired location where it is desired to detect the player's approach or contact is connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392. When a player approaches or contacts the contact detection body 393 at the desired location, the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 changes, and the change in capacitance can be detected by the contact detection sensor main body 392 connected to the contact detection body 393. As a result, the player's approach to or contact with the desired location can be detected, and predetermined control can be performed by control means such as the main control board 1310, peripheral control board 1510, peripheral control unit 1511, and performance display control unit 1512 in accordance with the detection by the contact detection sensor main body 392. On the other hand, when the contact detection element 393 at the desired location is connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 by the switching unit 394, the connection between the contact detection elements 393 at other locations and the contact detection sensor main body 392 is severed. Therefore, even if the capacitance of the contact detection elements 393 at other locations changes when a player approaches or touches the other locations, the change in capacitance of the contact detection element 393 is not detected because the connection of the contact detection element 393 has been severed by the switching unit 394, and only the capacitance of the contact detection element 393 at the desired location can be reliably detected, preventing erroneous detection.

In this way, the switching unit 394 appropriately selects and switches the contact detection element 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 for multiple contact detection elements 393 located in different positions. This makes it possible to detect the capacitance of multiple contact detection elements 393 with a single contact detection sensor main body 392. This reduces the number of channels required to detect the player's approach or contact in control means such as the main control board 1310, peripheral control board 1510, peripheral control unit 1511, and effect display control unit 1512, thereby increasing the number of channels available for effect presentation. Therefore, since more effect presentation means (e.g., movable decorative elements, luminous decorative elements, effect display devices, etc.) can be controlled by the control means, the increased number of effect presentation means allows for a wider variety of presentations to be presented to players, preventing players from becoming bored and providing sufficient enjoyment, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, contact detectors 393 can be provided in multiple locations on the pachinko machine 1 that should not be touched by the player, and the contact detectors 393 provided in the desired locations can be connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 by the switching unit 394 depending on the game status. This detects the player's approach to or contact with the desired location, and control means such as the main control board 1310, peripheral control board 1510, peripheral control unit 1511, and effect display control unit 1512 can then issue a specified warning or alarm. This allows a single contact detection sensor main body 392 to monitor a wide area of the pachinko machine 1, while relatively increasing the number of channels available for effects, achieving the same effects as those described above.

Furthermore, because the capacitance of multiple contact detectors 393 is detected by a single contact detection sensor main body 392, each contact detector 393 is located at a distance from the contact detection sensor main body 392. This means that the sensor main body, which contains electronic components such as the sensor IC and output circuit, can be located in a location that is difficult for players to see, improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 and increasing its appeal to players.

Furthermore, the contact detection sensor main body 392 is pre-equipped with connection terminals for electrically connecting multiple contact detection bodies 393. Therefore, simply by connecting the wiring from the contact detection body 393 to the connection terminals of the contact detection sensor main body 392, the capacitance of the contact detection body 393 can be detected by the contact detection sensor main body 392. This simplifies the assembly of the pachinko machine 1 and helps prevent increases in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, the contact detection sensor main body 392 is provided with a connection terminal in advance, and the contact detection sensor main body 392 and the contact detection body 393 can be connected simply by connecting the wiring from the contact detection body 393 to the connection terminal of the contact detection sensor main body 392.This reduces the number of parts compared to when a conductive member is brought into contact with the sensor electrode of the contact detection sensor main body 392 and connected to the contact detection body 393 via the conductive member, thereby reducing the cost of the pachinko machine 1 and eliminating the need to design the routing of the conductive member for connection to the contact detection body 393.This increases the degree of freedom in the placement of the contact detection body 393 and the contact detection sensor main body 392, making it easier to realize a pachinko machine 1 that achieves the above-mentioned effects.

In addition, a switching unit 394 is provided that switches the contact detectors 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392, and the switching unit 394 can be used to select the contact detector 393 to be detected.For example, when a player-participation effect is performed in which multiple contact detectors 393 are dispersed and the dispersed contact detectors 393 are touched in a predetermined order, the switching unit 394 switches the contact detectors 393 connected to the contact detection sensor main body 392 when the player touches them in order, making it possible to detect whether the player touched the contact detectors 393 in the correct order.This makes it possible to realize a highly game-like player-participation effect using a single contact detection sensor main body 392, and provides a pachinko machine 1 that is even more enjoyable for players.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 in the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, when a player's finger or the like approaches or comes into contact with the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350, which can be pressed by the player, the player approaches the contact detection body 352, which is made of a punched metal plate and whose player-side is covered by the button body 351, causing a change in the capacitance of the contact detection body 352. Because the capacitance of this contact detection body 352 is detected by the contact detection sensor body 358, it is possible to detect changes in the capacitance of the contact detection body 352, and therefore it is possible to detect the player's approach to or contact with the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) via the contact detection body 352.

In this way, when the contact detector 352 and contact detection sensor main body 358 detect the player's approach to or contact with the effect operation unit 350, a predetermined effect is output to the player through the contact detector 352 and button main body 351 by effect means such as the outer button decorative board 355, vibration motor 356, effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360, inner button decorative board 364, and protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, thereby entertaining the player and preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game. In this case, when the player approaches or contacts the effect operation unit 350, a predetermined effect is output, allowing the effect operation unit 350 to function as a non-contact operation unit or a contact operation unit using the contact detector 352 and contact detection sensor main body 358. Furthermore, because the effect operation unit 350, which functions as a non-contact operation unit and a contact operation unit, can be pressed by the player when it is extended, a variety of effect operations such as non-contact operation, contact operation, and press operation can be performed with the effect operation unit 350. This makes it easier to realize a pachinko machine 1 with an appearance that differs from conventional pachinko machines that have operation buttons that can only be pressed, and by differentiating it from other pachinko machines, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, a predetermined effect is output to the player in response to the detection of the capacitance of the contact detector 352 by the contact detection sensor main body 358. Because the capacitance varies depending on the distance between the contact detector 352 (button main body 351) and the player, multiple capacitance thresholds can be set and different effects can be output for each threshold. Therefore, the time (distance) from when the player approaches the button main body 351 (effect operation unit 350) to when they make contact can be detected in multiple stages, and by outputting effects according to each stage, a wider variety of effects can be presented to the player, preventing the player from becoming bored and reducing a decline in interest.

In addition, because the contact detection sensor main body 358, which detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352, is located away from the contact detection body 352, the contact detection sensor main body 358, which contains electronic components such as a sensor IC and output circuit, can be located in a part of the performance operation unit 350 that is difficult for players to see, improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 and increasing its appeal to players.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the operation unit can perform a variety of presentation operations such as non-contact operations, contact operations, and pressing operations. By implementing player-participation presentations that allow players to control the presentations, it is possible to enjoy a variety of presentation operations, making it less likely for players to become bored, and allowing players to enjoy player-participation presentations, which can prevent players from losing interest in the game.

Furthermore, the contact detection body 352, whose capacitance is detected by the contact detection sensor main body 358, is made of a perforated metal consisting of a metal plate with multiple holes formed therein. This reduces the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 when the player is not approaching or touching the button main body 351 due to the multiple holes, thereby preventing false detection by the contact detection sensor main body 358. Therefore, by appropriately selecting the number, size, and arrangement of the multiple holes, it is possible to increase the area of the contact detection body 352 while suppressing an increase in capacitance, thereby widening the range over which the contact detection body 352 detects the player's approach to or contact with the button main body 351 (effect operation unit 350). This allows the contact detector 352 to be made larger and the detection range to be wider. Therefore, if the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350) that the player can press is made larger and the contact detector 352 is made the same size as the upper surface 351a of the button body 351, as in the above embodiment, when the player is required to approach or contact the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351) to execute a player participation effect, the contact detector 352 covered by the button body 351 is as large as the upper surface 351a of the button body 351, so the movement distance required for the player's fingers to approach or contact the effect operation unit 350 is shorter, allowing the effect operation unit 350 to be operated quickly, making it less likely that the timing for operation will be missed in a player participation effect and ensuring that the player can participate in the player participation effect. This entertains the player and prevents a decline in interest.

In addition, because the contact detector 352 is made of perforated metal, the LEDs 364a on the decorative button board 364, which acts as a presentation device and is located on the opposite side of the contact detector 352 from the player side, can be output to the player through the multiple holes formed in the contact detector 352, ensuring that the player can enjoy the light-emitting effects and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351), which can be operated by pressing, is provided with a contact detector 352, which is made of punched metal, a metal plate with a certain degree of strength and rigidity, the effect operation unit 350 can be reinforced, making the effect operation unit 350 less likely to deform or break even if the player presses or hits the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351) hard when performing a pressing operation. Therefore, because the contact detector 352 makes the effect operation unit 350 less likely to be damaged, the player can press the effect operation unit 350 without any worries, making the player-participation type effect of operating the effect operation unit 350 more enjoyable and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, the contact detector 352 is made of punched metal, which allows the plate thickness of the contact detector 352 to be thinner than when the contact detector 352 is made of expanded metal processed from a metal plate of the same plate thickness. This makes it easier to secure space for the contact detector 352, facilitating the installation of the contact detector 352 and increasing design freedom, making it easier to design a pachinko machine 1 that is more appealing to players.

Furthermore, because the contact detector 352 is made of punched metal, it has a consistent plate thickness compared to expanded metal, making it easy to process the contact detector 352 into the desired three-dimensional shape by pressing. This makes it easier to create a shape that is optimal for detecting a player's approach to or contact with the button body 351 (effect operation unit 350), ensuring the above-mentioned effects are realized.

In addition, in the effect operation unit 350, the button body 351 covers the player side of the contact detector 352, which is made of punched metal with multiple holes formed in it. This prevents the player from directly touching the contact detector 352, which is made of punched metal with multiple holes formed in it. This prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable when touching the contact detector 352 with multiple holes formed in it, and also allows the button body 351 to be operated without any discomfort in player-participation effects that use the button body 351 as an operation unit, allowing the player to enjoy the effect and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, because the player side of the contact detector 352, which is made of perforated metal, is covered by the button body 351, the multiple holes formed in the contact detector 352 do not become contaminated with dust, food, drink, or other contaminants, making cleaning easier and reducing the burden on the gaming hall that installs the pachinko machine 1 as an easy-to-clean pachinko machine 1.

In addition, presentation means such as the outer button decorative board 355, vibration motor 356, presentation operation unit lifting mechanism 360, inner button decorative board 364, and protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 are provided on the opposite side of the contact detector 352 from the player side, allowing predetermined presentations to be output to the player through the contact detector 352 and button body 351. When the contact detection sensor body 358 detects the player's approach to or contact with the button body 351 (presentation operation unit 350), the predetermined presentation is output through the multiple holes formed in the contact detector 352 and the transparent button body 351, strongly attracting the player's attention to the presentation operation unit 350 and ensuring that the player enjoys the presentation output through (via) the presentation operation unit 350, preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, because the presentation means, such as the outer button decorative board 355, vibration motor 356, presentation operation unit lifting mechanism 360, inner button decorative board 364, and protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, are located on the side of the contact detector 352 opposite the player, the presentation means are covered by the contact detector 352, and the contact detector 352 (presentation operation unit 350) and presentation means can be compactly combined. This makes it easier to install the presentation operation unit 350 and presentation means, which have the above-mentioned effects, in the desired location on the pachinko machine 1, making it easier to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing and can be differentiated from other pachinko machines.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, when a player approaches or comes into contact with the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351), which is mounted on the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 and is movable up and down, the capacitance of the contact detector 352 of the effect operation unit 350 changes. Therefore, the contact detection sensor main body 358 can detect the capacitance of the contact detector 352, thereby detecting the player's approach to or contact with the effect operation unit 350. When the contact detection sensor main body 358 detects the player's approach to or contact with the effect operation unit 350, the force of the lifting spring 365 of the effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360 causes the effect operation unit 350 to protrude upward. Therefore, if the effect operation unit 350 protrudes when the player is not in contact with the effect operation unit 350, it will abut (collide) with the player. If the effect operation unit 350 protrudes when the player is in contact with the effect operation unit 350, it is possible to present the player with an effect created by a physical force pushing the player. This makes a strong impact on players with effects not seen in previous pachinko machines, strongly drawing the player's attention to the effect operation unit 350 and ensuring that the player notices that the effect operation unit 350 is protruding.

When protruding this effect operation unit 350, moving the lift spring lower holding member 385 of the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380 toward the upper end of the lift spring 365 (upward) increases the compression of the lift spring 365, thereby increasing the biasing force; moving it away from the upper end of the lift spring 365 (downward) decreases the compression of the lift spring 365, thereby decreasing the biasing force. By moving the lift spring lower holding member 385 to an appropriate position, the biasing force of the effect operation unit 350 by the lift spring 365 can be changed. In this way, because the effect operation unit 350 can be protruded with various protrusion forces, the variety of effects created by physical force can be increased, preventing players from getting bored, and allowing players to enjoy the effects created by the protrusion of the effect operation unit 350, preventing a decline in player interest in the game.

In addition, the thrust force of the effect operation unit 350 is changed depending on the game state. Therefore, when a player approaches or touches the effect operation unit 350 with their fingers, etc., and the effect operation unit 350 makes contact with the force, a strong impact is given to the player, making them feel strongly that something good is about to happen (for example, the occurrence of a favorable game state that gives the player an advantage), increasing anticipation for the game and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, because the effect operation unit 350 is a pressure operation unit 303 that can be pressed, when a player-participation effect is executed, the player can be made to press the effect operation unit 350, allowing the player to participate in the player-participation effect, and allowing the player to enjoy pressing the effect operation unit 350, thereby preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, because the effect operation unit 350 can be operated by pressing it, players who place their fingers or the like on the effect operation unit 350 (the top surface of the button body 351) can operate it at any time. When a player-participation effect is executed by pressing the effect operation unit 350, the effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360 causes the effect operation unit 350 to protrude, allowing the player to quickly recognize the start of the player-participation effect without having to be notified by effect images, sounds, etc., which increases the player's motivation to press the effect operation unit 350 and makes the player-participation effect even more enjoyable.

Furthermore, because the performance operation unit 350 is caused to protrude by the biasing force of the lifting spring 365 in the performance operation unit lifting mechanism 360, the performance operation unit 350 can be easily and forcefully protruded compared to when the performance operation unit 350 is protruded using a drive motor, making it easier to achieve the effects described above.

Furthermore, the contact detection sensor main body 358 detects the capacitance of the contact detection body 352, thereby detecting the player's approach to or contact with the effect operation unit 350. Because the capacitance of the contact detection body 352 varies depending on the distance between the effect operation unit 350 and the player, multiple capacitance thresholds can be set, making it possible to protrude the effect operation unit 350 with a different protrusion force for each threshold. Therefore, the contact detection sensor main body 358 can detect the distance from when the player's fingers, etc., approach the effect operation unit 350 to when it makes contact in multiple stages, and by protruding with a protrusion force appropriate for each stage, it is possible to present a wider variety of effects to the player, preventing the player from becoming bored and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, when the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 is caused to pop up by executing a player participation effect, and the effect operation unit 350, which is arranged so that the player can move forward and backward, approaches or comes into contact with the effect operation unit 350, causing a change in the capacitance of the contact detection element 352 located on the back side of the button main body 351 that the player touches on the effect operation unit 350. Meanwhile, the contact detection sensor main body 358, which is located away from the contact detection element 352 on the effect operation unit 350, detects the capacitance of the contact detection element 352 and can therefore capture the change in capacitance of the contact detection element 352 due to the player's approach or contact, thereby detecting the player's approach to or contact with the button main body 351 on the effect operation unit 350, and the contact detection sensor main body 358 can detect the player by capacitance. Then, when the contact detection sensor main body 358 detects a situation or the player moves the effect operation unit 350 forward or backward (presses it), a predetermined effect is executed by effect means such as the effect operation unit outer decorative board 320, the button outer decorative board 355, the effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360, the button inner decorative board 364, the protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, and the effect display device 1600. In other words, a predetermined effect is executed when the player moves the effect operation unit 350 forward or backward or approaches or touches the effect operation unit 350, so that the player can be entertained by this effect and prevent a decline in the player's interest in the game.

In this case, when the player approaches or touches the effect operation unit 350, an effect is executed, allowing the effect operation unit 350 (button body 351) to function as an effect operation unit (non-contact operation unit, contact operation unit). On the other hand, when the player moves the effect operation unit 350 forward or backward (presses), an effect is executed, allowing the effect operation unit 350 to function as an effect operation unit (press operation unit). As a result, players can perform a variety of effect operations, and by executing player-participation effects that allow players to operate the effects, they can enjoy a variety of effect operations, making it less likely that players will get bored, and allowing players to enjoy player-participation effects, which can prevent a decline in the player's interest in the game.

The player is detected by the capacitance of the contact detector 352, which is located near the part of the button body 351 on the effect operation unit 350 that the player touches (below the upper surface 351a). The capacitance of the contact detector 352 varies depending on the distance between the contact detector 352 (button body 351) and the player. Therefore, it is possible to set multiple capacitance thresholds for executing a specific effect, and to execute a different effect for each threshold. Therefore, it is possible to detect the time (distance) between the approach of the player's finger or other object to the effect operation unit 350 and contact, in multiple stages. By presenting effects according to each stage, a wider variety of effects can be presented to the player, preventing players from becoming bored and reducing a decline in interest.

In addition, a predetermined effect is executed when the contact detector 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358 detect the player, and this effect can impart a sense of control to the effect operations (non-contact operations, contact operations) using the contact detector 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, allowing the player to enjoy the effect operations even more.

Furthermore, the device is equipped with a presentation operation unit 350 that can be advanced and retreated (pressed) by the player, and a contact detector 352 and contact detection sensor main body 358 that can detect the player's approach or contact with the presentation operation unit 350. This allows the player to perform a variety of operations during player participation-type presentations, such as moving the presentation operation unit 350 forward and backward (pressing operations) or bringing their fingers or other objects close to or into contact with the presentation operation unit 350 (non-contact operations, contact operations). These various operations can increase the player's motivation to participate in player participation-type presentations, making it easier for them to participate in player participation-type presentations. Furthermore, when a player participates in a player participation-type presentation, the various operations using the presentation operation unit 350, contact detector 352, and contact detection sensor main body 358 can prevent the player from becoming bored and allow them to enjoy the player participation-type presentation, preventing a decline in the player's interest.

Furthermore, by engaging the guide pin 354c of the button base 354 of the effect operation unit 350 with the locking portion 371c of the lifting cam member 371 of the effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360, the effect operation unit 350 can be locked so that it cannot move forward or backward. Therefore, by keeping the effect operation unit 350 immovable by the guide pin 354c and the lifting cam member 371 until an effect is executed that moves the effect operation unit 350 forward or backward, it is possible to prevent the effect operation unit 350 from moving or shaking on its own. This makes it possible to avoid the effect operation unit 350 moving or shaking on its own, which could cause distrust or anxiety in the player, and makes the effect produced by the effect operation unit 350 more enjoyable.

Furthermore, in the performance operation unit 350, the contact detection sensor main body 358 is located away from the contact detection body 352. This allows the contact detection sensor main body 358, which contains electronic components such as a sensor IC and output circuit, to be located in a location that is difficult for players to see, improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, because the contact detector 352 for detecting capacitance and the contact detector sensor main body 358, which has a sensor IC and output circuit that detects the capacitance of the contact detector 352, are separate entities, the shape and material of the contact detector 352 can be selected as appropriate, regardless of the contact detector sensor main body 358. This allows the contact detector 352 to be made to optimally match the shape, form, and specifications of the button main body 351 of the performance operation unit 350, ensuring the realization of a pachinko machine 1 that provides the effects described above.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, when a player approaches or touches the button body 351 or surface member 396 covering the outer button decorative substrate 355, inner button decorative substrate 364, or decorative body 398 with their fingers, etc., the capacitance of the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 located between the button body 351 or surface member 396 and the outer button decorative substrate 355, inner button decorative substrate 364, or decorative body 398 changes, and in response to this change, a predetermined effect is executed in which light is irradiated towards the player by the outer button decorative substrate 355, inner button decorative substrate 364, or decorative body 398.Therefore, the light irradiated towards the player can strongly attract the player's attention to the outer button decorative substrate 355, inner button decorative substrate 364, or decorative body 398, and the executed effect can entertain the player. In this case, the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 located between the button body 351 or surface member 396 and the outer button decorative substrate 355 or inner button decorative substrate 364 or decorative body 398 is formed to fit the decorative portion located on the button body 351 or surface member 396, giving the player the illusion that the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 is part of the decorative portion, making it impossible for the player to recognize that the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 is intended to detect the player.

In this way, because the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 is not visible to the player, even if the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 blocks part of the outer button decorative board 355, inner button decorative board 364, or decorative body 398 (effect), the player will not be bothered by the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397. Furthermore, even if the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 is located in front of the outer button decorative board 355, inner button decorative board 364, or decorative body 398, the presence of the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 will not cause the player to feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the effect of the outer button decorative board 355, inner button decorative board 364, or decorative body 398 can be clearly seen by the player, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, by detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like to the button body 351 or surface member 396 using the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397, an effect is executed in which light is irradiated towards the player on the outer button decorative substrate 355, inner button decorative substrate 364 or decorative body 398, which are covered by the button body 351 or surface member 396. This allows the button body 351 or surface member 396 to function like an effect operation unit 301 (touch operation unit 302), and also gives the player the feeling of operating using light. Therefore, for example, when a player participation type effect is executed, the player's fingers or the like approach or contact the button body 351 or surface member 396, and when the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 detects the approach or contact of the fingers or the like, an effect is executed by the outer button decorative board 355, inner button decorative board 364 or decorative body 398, allowing the player to take part in the player participation type effect and enjoy it.

Furthermore, since the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 detects the player's approach to or contact with the button body 351 or surface member 396, it is possible to vary the presentation of the button outer decorative board 355, button inner decorative board 364 or decorative body 398 depending on the distance between the button body 351 or surface member 396 and the player's fingers, etc., so the presentation of the button outer decorative board 355, button inner decorative board 364 or decorative body 398 can be changed depending on the movement (position) of the player's fingers, etc., allowing the player to see a more diverse presentation, which makes it less likely that the player will tire of the game and prevents the player's interest from declining.

In addition, changes in the capacitance of the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 are detected, and when a player approaches or touches the button body 351 or surface member 396, the capacitance of the contact detector 352 or contact detector 397, which is located between the button body 351 or surface member 396 and the outer button decorative substrate 355, inner button decorative substrate 364, or decorative body 398, changes. This makes it easy to detect the approach or contact of the player's fingers, etc., with the button body 351 or surface member 396, thereby reliably realizing a pachinko machine 1 that provides the above-mentioned effects.

Furthermore, because contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 detects changes in capacitance, contact detector 352 or contact detector 397 can be made of a conductive material. For example, if contact detector 397 is made of a metal vapor-deposited film, the vapor-deposited film can be made thin to make it transparent, or thickened to give it a metallic luster, making it appear as if it were part of the decoration. Alternatively, if contact detector 352 and contact detector 395 are made of punched metal with a decorative outer shape such as a star or heart, contact detector 352 and contact detector 395 can be made to appear as if they were part of the decoration. As a result, contact detector 352, contact detector 395, and contact detector 397 can be made invisible to the player, ensuring the above-mentioned effects.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, in the effect operation unit 300 of the door frame 3, the capacitance changes when the player's fingers or the like approach or touch the transparent button body 351 covering the top side (surface side), and this change causes the contact detectors 395 etc. (including contact detector 352, left contact detector 390L, right contact detector 390R, contact detector 393, contact detector 397, etc.) to present a predetermined effect using effect presentation means such as the outer button decorative board 355, vibration motor 356, effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360, inner button decorative board 364, protrusion force adjustment mechanism 380, and effect display device 1600.Since these contact detectors 395 etc. are formed into a predetermined outer peripheral shape with a design feature, the pachinko machine 1 can be decorated with the contact detectors 395 themselves, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that looks good and is highly appealing to players. Furthermore, the surface side of the contact detector 395 etc. is covered with the transparent button body 351, and a predetermined effect is presented by the effect presenting means via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395 etc. in response to a change in the capacitance of the contact detector 395 etc. due to the approach of the player's finger or the like to the contact detector 395, so that a predetermined effect is presented in response to the approach or contact of the player's finger or the like to the button body 351, allowing the button body 351 to function as the effect operation unit 301. And, because the contact detector 395 etc. visible through the button body 351 have a design feature, the effect operation unit 301 appears to have a design feature, making a strong impact on players as a pachinko machine 1 equipped with an effect operation unit 301 not found in previous pachinko machines, and making it possible to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can be differentiated from other pachinko machines. Furthermore, as mentioned above, the design of the contact detector 395 etc. can make a strong impact on the player, thereby generating a strong interest in the contact detector 395 etc. (button body 351), heightening anticipation for operating the button body 351 (effect operation unit 301), and also making it fun to operate the button body 351 when a player-participation effect in which the player operates the button body 351 is executed, thereby preventing a decline in the player's interest.

In addition, the contact detector 395, which detects the approach or contact of a player's fingers or the like with the button body 351, is formed into an outer periphery with a design that makes it difficult for some players to notice, at first glance, the presence of the effect operation unit 301 (button body 351) that presents effects using the effect presentation means. Therefore, when a player-participation effect is executed by operating the effect operation unit 301, the player is prompted to approach or touch the button body 351, which makes it clear for the first time that the button body 351 is the effect operation unit 301 using the contact detector 395, etc., adding an element of surprise to the player and making the player-participation effect more enjoyable. Alternatively, when a player-participation effect is being executed by operating the effect operation unit 301, if the player approaches or touches the button body 351 with a finger or the like without realizing that it is the effect operation unit 301, the capacitance of the contact detector 395 or the like will change and an effect will be presented by the effect presentation means, surprising the player and entertaining the player with the presented effect, preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, because effects are presented by the effect presentation means in response to changes in the capacitance of the contact detector 395, etc., it is possible to easily detect the approach or contact of a player's fingers, etc. with the button body 351 covering the contact detector 395, etc., making it easier to realize a pachinko machine 1 that achieves the above-mentioned effects. Also, because effects are presented in response to changes in the capacitance of the contact detector 395, etc., it is possible to detect the time (distance) from when a player's fingers, etc. approach the button body 351 covering the contact detector 395, etc., to when they make contact in multiple stages. By presenting effects according to each stage, it is possible to present a wider variety of effects to the player, preventing the player from becoming bored and reducing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, because the outer periphery of the contact detector 395, etc. is formed into a predetermined shape, even if inorganic materials such as punched metal, expanded metal, or wire mesh are used as the conductive contact detector 395, etc., it is possible to impart design features to the contact detector 395, etc., preventing the contact detector 395, etc. from compromising the appearance and making the contact detector 395, etc. more noticeable, making it easier to realize a pachinko machine 1 that achieves the above-mentioned effects.

In addition, because the outer periphery of the contact detector 395 and other elements is formed into a predetermined shape, it is possible to create an aesthetically pleasing design without forming the contact detector 395 and other elements into a three-dimensional shape. Therefore, the contact detector 395 and other elements can be formed into a flat shape or a simple three-dimensional shape, reducing the cost of manufacturing the contact detector 395 and other elements.

Furthermore, because the surface side of the contact detector 395, etc. is covered with the transparent button body 351, dirt such as dust and food and drink does not adhere to the contact detector 395, etc., making cleaning easier. More specifically, because the contact detector 395, etc., is made of an uneven material such as punched metal, dirt such as dust and food and drink easily adheres to the unevenness, making cleaning of the dirt more difficult. However, because the surface side of the contact detector 395, etc. is covered with the button body 351, even if the contact detector 395, etc., is made of an uneven material such as punched metal, the button body 351 prevents dirt from adhering, making the machine easier to clean and reducing the burden on the gaming hall that installs the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the surface of the contact detector 395, etc. is covered with the transparent button body 351 to prevent the player from touching the contact detector 395, etc. Therefore, if the contact detector 395, etc., is made of a material with a high design quality, such as a metal vapor deposition film or foil stamping, it is possible to prevent premature wear due to contact by the player, thereby increasing the durability of the contact detector 395, etc.

Furthermore, the surface side of the contact detector 395, etc. is covered with the transparent button body 351. As described above, the transparent button body 351 prevents the player from directly touching the contact detector 395, etc., so it is possible to use contact detectors 395, etc. that are unpleasant to the touch or that may cause discomfort to the player. This increases the degree of freedom in the materials used for the contact detector 395, etc., and allows the contact detector 395, etc. to be formed from materials tailored to needs.

Furthermore, when the capacitance of the contact detector 395 etc. is changed by bringing the player's finger etc. close to or into contact with the button body 351 which covers the contact detector 395 etc., a predetermined effect is presented to the player via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395 etc. The effect presented via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395 etc. allows the player to intuitively recognize that the player has brought their finger etc. close to or into contact with the button body 351, allowing the player to enjoy the movement of their finger etc.

In addition, effects are presented to the player via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395, etc., and when the player's fingers, etc., approach or touch the button body 351, which covers the contact detector 395, etc., the effects presented to the player via the button body 351 and the contact detector 395, etc. are executed. This allows the button body 351 to function like a touch operation unit, and the presented effects can give the player a sense of operation, allowing the player to enjoy operations using the button body 351 (player-participation effects).

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, in order to operate the button body 351 of the effect operation unit 350, which is capable of multiple operations, the player approaches or touches the button body 351 with their fingers, etc., and when the contact detector 352 (contact detection sensor body 358) detects that the fingers, etc. have entered the detection area, various effects are executed, such as a light-emitting effect in which light is irradiated onto the player through the button body 351 by the multiple LEDs 355a on the outer button decorative board 355 and the multiple LEDs 364a on the inner button decorative board 364, a vibration motor 356 vibrating the player's fingers, etc. that are in contact through (via) the button body 351, and an effect in which the button body 351 is protruded upward by the effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360, thereby applying impact, upward pressure, wind pressure, etc. to the player through (via) the button body 351, allowing the button body 351 to function as the contact operation unit 302, providing entertainment to the player. At this time, effects such as light, vibration, impact, upward pressure, and wind pressure are imparted to the player through the button body 351, which can surprise and entertain the player and increase their enthusiasm for operating the button body 351. When the player's fingers or the like are in contact with the button body 351 and they move their fingers or the like appropriately to press the button body 351 downward, the button body 351 functions as the pressing operation unit 303. Therefore, the contact operation caused by the contact detector 352 detecting the approach or contact of the player's fingers or the like, and the pressing operation of the button body 351, can provide the player with a variety of exciting operations, preventing the player from becoming bored and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, the detection means for detecting the approach or contact of a player's fingers, etc., is composed of the contact detection element 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358, and the contact detection element 352 is located near the back surface of the top surface 351a of the button main body 351. Therefore, even if the contact detection sensor main body 358, which has a detection circuit, is located on the flange portion 353b of the button sleeve 353, away from the top surface 351a of the button main body 351, the contact detection element 352 can detect the approach or contact of a player's fingers, etc., with the top surface 351a of the button main body 351, achieving the same effects as those described above.

Furthermore, the detection means for detecting the approach or contact of a player's fingers or the like is composed of the contact detection body 352 and the contact detection sensor main body 358. Therefore, the contact detection sensor main body 358, which is equipped with a detection circuit, can be positioned on the flange portion 353b of the button sleeve 353, away from the top surface portion 351a (contact detection body 352) of the button main body 351. This allows the contact detection sensor main body 358 to be positioned in a less noticeable location, improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the back (bottom) of the button body 351 is provided with an outer button decorative board 355, an inner button decorative board 364, and an effect operation unit lifting mechanism 360, which make it easier for the player to experience effects such as light, vibration, impact, lifting, and wind pressure through the button body 351, achieving the same effects as those described above.

[4. Overall configuration of the main body frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 75 to 81. Figure 75 is a front view of the main body frame in the pachinko machine, and Figure 76 is a rear view of the main body frame in the pachinko machine. Figure 77 is a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the front right, Figure 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the front left, and Figure 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame as seen from the rear. Figure 80 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into its main components as seen from the front, and Figure 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into its main components as seen from the rear.

The main frame 4 holds the game board 5, which has a play area 5a where play is carried out by hitting game balls B, and is used to pay out game balls B to the player and eject used game balls B to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (towards the island equipment in the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is removably stored inside from the front. The main frame 4 is openably attached to a frame-shaped outer frame 2, which is attached to the island equipment in the game hall, at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front, and a door frame 3 is openably attached to close the open front side.

The main frame 4 comprises a frame-shaped main frame base unit 500 whose rear can be inserted into the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5; an upper main frame hinge member 510 attached to the upper left end of the main frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, which is rotatably attached to the upper outer frame hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and to which the upper door frame hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached; and a lower main frame hinge assembly 520 attached to the lower left end of the main frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, which is rotatably attached to the lower outer frame hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and to which the lower door frame hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached.

The main frame 4 also includes a main frame reinforcement frame 530 attached to the left side of the main frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front; a ball launcher 540 attached to the lower front side of the main frame base unit 500 for shooting game balls B into the game area 5a of the game board 5; an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached to the rear side of the main frame base unit 500 along the upper and left sides when viewed from the front; a payout unit 560 attached to the rear side of the payout base unit 550 for paying out game balls B to the player; a base unit 620 attached to the lower rear side of the main frame base unit 500; a back cover 640 attached to the rear side of the main frame base unit 500 in an openable and closable manner to cover the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main frame base 501; and a locking unit 650 attached to the right side of the main frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, for locking the outer frame 2 and main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and main frame 4.

The main frame base unit 500 includes a main frame base 501, which is formed into a vertically extending rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front, a connection cable guide member 502 that guides a connection cable 503 for connection to the door frame 3, and a game board locking member 505 that detachably holds the game board 5.

The dispensing base unit 550 comprises a dispensing base 551 attached to the rear of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500; a ball tank 552 attached to the dispensing base 551, shaped like a box extending left and right and open at the top; a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending leftward in the shape of a groove open at the top; a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553; a second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, spaced apart from the first rail cover 554 to the left when viewed from the front; a ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555; and a ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553.

The payout unit 560 comprises a ball guiding unit 570 that guides game balls B from the tank rail 553 downward in a serpentine manner, a payout device 580 that pays out game balls B guided by the ball guiding unit 570 one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides game balls B that have passed through the payout device 580 downward, and a lower full ball path unit 610 that guides game balls B that have passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 toward the door frame 3 or the board unit 620.

The board unit 620 comprises a speaker unit 620a attached to the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a dispensing control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 comprises a unit base 651 attached to the main frame base 501, multiple door frame hooks 652 that protrude forward from the unit base 651 and can engage with the door frame 3, multiple outer frame hooks 653 that protrude rearward from the unit base 651 and can engage with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the door frame hooks 652 or outer frame hooks 653 up and down, a lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hooks 652 downward and the outer frame hooks 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hooks 653 downward.

[4-1. Main frame base unit]
The main frame base unit 500 in the main frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 75 to 83. Figure 82(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front of the main frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front of the main frame when the door frame is opened relative to the main frame. Figure 83 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main frame when the door frame is opened or closed relative to the main frame. The main frame base unit 500 has its rear inserted into the outer frame 2 from the front, and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The main frame base unit 500 comprises a main frame base 501, which is formed into a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front; a connection cable guide member 502 attached to the lower left corner of the front of the main frame base 501 to guide the connection cable 503; and a game board locking member 505 rotatably attached to the lower front of the main frame base 501 around an axis extending forward and backward to detachably hold the game board 5.

The main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500 comprises a base body 501a which has a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front; a game board insertion opening 501b which penetrates the base body 501a from a position slightly below the top end to a height of approximately 3/4 of the total height and through which the game board 5 is inserted from the front; a game board placement section 501c which forms the lower edge of the game board insertion opening 501b and on which the game board 5 is placed; and a game board restriction section 501d which protrudes upward from the center of the game board placement section 501c in the left-right direction and restricts left-right and rearward movement of the bottom end of the game board 5.

The main frame base 501 also has a launcher mounting section 501e, which is recessed rearward on the lower right side of the game board mounting section 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a when viewed from the front, for mounting the ball launcher 540; a cylinder insertion port 501f, which penetrates from front to back on the right side of the launcher mounting section 501e when viewed from the front, and through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted; a circular speaker opening 501g, which penetrates from front to back on the lower left side of the game board mounting section 501c when viewed from the front, and which allows the main frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a in the board unit 620 to face forward; a cable mounting recess 501h, which is recessed rearward below the speaker opening 501g and extends left and right, and into which the connection cable guide member 502 is attached; and a cable insertion port 501i, which penetrates from front to back at the upper right end of the cable mounting recess 501h when viewed from the front.

Furthermore, the main body frame base 501 extends rearward in a plate-like shape from the right edge of the game board insertion slot 501b of the base main body 501a when viewed from the front. The locking unit 650 is attached to the right side, and the rear extension portion 501j has a rear end to which the rear cover 640 is rotatably attached. Also, an upper hinge mounting portion 501k and a lower hinge mounting portion 501l are formed near the upper and lower ends of the left end of the rear surface of the base main body 501a when viewed from the front, and are used to mount the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520.

The main frame base 501 is also equipped with a door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4, mounted on the front surface of the base body 501a below the cylinder insertion opening 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted. When the door frame 3 is opened (released) relative to the main frame 4, the door frame opening switch is released, allowing the opening of the door frame 3 to be detected. The detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633. The main frame base 501 is also equipped with a main frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, mounted on the rear surface of the base body 501a below the position where the door frame opening switch is mounted. When the main frame 4 is opened (released) relative to the outer frame 2, the main frame opening switch is released, allowing the opening of the main frame 4 to be detected. The detection signal from the main frame open switch is input to the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633.

A game board locking member 505 is rotatably attached to the main frame base 501 around an axis extending forward and backward, below the game board placement portion 501c on the front side and to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The game board locking member 505 restricts the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b, thereby allowing the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b to be attached and detached.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main frame base 501 extends laterally from the right end of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to a position below the portion where the game board locking member 505 is mounted, to the right of the speaker opening 501g. The cable mounting recess 501h is sized to accommodate the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end of the connection cable guide member 502 can be attached to it so that it can rotate around an axis extending vertically.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main frame base unit 500 comprises a flat guide body 502a extending laterally, a pair of band-like frame pieces 502b that protrude forward from the upper and lower sides of the guide body 502a and extend further to the right than the right end of the guide body 502a, a cylindrical mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and a plurality of through-holes 502d that penetrate the guide body 502a from front to back at both the upper and lower ends and are arranged in a row in the left-right direction.

The connection cable guide member 502 has a left-right length that is slightly shorter than the left-right length of the cable mounting recess 501h of the main frame base 501, and is sized to fit within the cable mounting recess 501h. The connection cable guide member 502 is attached so that its mounting shaft 502c can rotate around an axis extending vertically near the right end within the cable mounting recess 501h. This allows the connection cable guide member 502 to rotate (hinge rotate) so that the left end protrudes forward.

This connection cable guide member 502 is used to guide the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 consists of multiple wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the opposite end of which is connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3.

Next, we will explain the effect of the connection cable guide member 502. As shown in Figure 83, etc., the connection cable guide member 502 is attached to the main frame base 501 so that its end (right end) opposite the side (left side) where the door frame 3 is hingedly rotatably attached in the left-right direction is rotatable around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

The connection cable 503 connecting the interface board 635 of the main frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 is attached to the guide body 502a by fastening it together with the guide body 502a with a cable tie 504 inserted through a pair of through holes 502d formed on the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a that are in the same position left and right, with the side connected to the interface board 635 abutting the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from right to left of the guide body 502a.

When the door frame 3 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and closed relative to the main frame 4, the connection cable guide member 502 of the main frame 4 is located behind the main relay board 104 and the auxiliary relay board 105 of the door frame 3 (see Figure 83 (a)). In this state, the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, then bends back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and extends into the relay board cover 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is positioned to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

In this state, when the door frame 3 is hingedly rotated so as to open relative to the main frame 4, the left end of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3, causing the connection cable guide member 502 to rotate around the attachment shaft 502c at the right end. In this embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α/2 ≧ β (preferably α/3 ≧ β) (see Figure 83 (b)).

The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (when the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the door frame 3 is opened and the opening angle α increases, but once the opening angle α exceeds a certain value (for example, approximately 90 degrees), the increase stops. In this embodiment, the maximum opening angle β is set to less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward of the main frame base 501. The connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, preventing the connection cable 503 from dangling between the door frame 3 and the main frame 4.

When closing the open door frame 3, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively backward, causing the connection cable 503 to press the left end of the connection cable guide member 502 backward, causing the connection cable guide member 502 to rotate around the mounting axis 502c so that the left end moves backward. Because the connection cable guide member 502 opens at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not impede the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, allowing the door frame 3 to close smoothly. Furthermore, because the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 will not become pinched between the door frame 3 and the main frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed, preventing any malfunction of the connection cable 503.

In addition, when the door frame 3 is closed against the main frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded back 180 degrees, creating a crease in the folded portion of the connection cable 503. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the 180-degree folded portion of the connection cable 503 changes to open, the crease acts on the connection cable 503 to close it. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, the crease prevents the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction and also guides the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) in the closing direction, allowing the door frame 3 to close smoothly.

Furthermore, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is held by the cable holder 103a at a position closer to the central axis (axial core) of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a can pull the tip side of the connection cable guide member 502 toward the central axis (axial core) of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126.

In addition, in this embodiment, the angle between a tangent to a circle that passes through the center of rotation of the connection cable guide member 502, is centered on the central axis (axial core) of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126, and passes through a portion (pressing portion) of the speaker duct 103 that protrudes rearward on the central axis (axial core) side of the upper door frame hinge pin 122 and the lower door frame hinge pin 126 relative to the cable holder 103a, and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees or less. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts against the connection cable 503, thereby pressing the tip of the open connection cable guide member 502 in the closing direction via the connection cable 503. This allows the connection cable guide member 502 to close smoothly as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, ensuring reliable closure of the door frame 3. Furthermore, the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502, which rotates (opens and closes) as the door frame 3 opens and closes, can be set to 45 degrees or less, so when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502 can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, achieving the same effects as described above.

[4-2. Main body frame upper hinge member]
The main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 80 and 81. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k in the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and also rotatably attaches the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3.

The main frame upper hinge member 510 comprises an upper hinge body 511, which is a horizontally extending flat plate material with the rear portion bent downward in an L-shape, and a main frame upper hinge pin 512 that protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from the front end of the upper hinge body 511 and is journaled on the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The upper hinge body 511 has a door frame upper hinge hole 511a that penetrates vertically on the left side of the main frame upper hinge pin 512 in a front view at the horizontally extending portion and journals the door frame upper hinge assembly 120.

The upper hinge body 511 of the main frame upper hinge member 510 is bent downward and attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500 at its portion that extends vertically. The upper hinge body 511 of the main frame upper hinge member 510 is supported by its upper hinge pin 512, which is inserted into the bearing groove 51c of the upper hinge member 51 of the upper hinge assembly 50. The upper hinge pin 122 of the upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted from below into the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame of the upper hinge body 511.

This upper main frame hinge member 510 cooperates with the lower main frame hinge assembly 520 to attach the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2 in a hinged manner, and also to attach the door frame 3 to the main frame 4 in a hinged manner.

[4-3. Main body frame lower hinge assembly]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 80 and 81. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 501l in the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached to it.

The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 comprises a lower hinge first body 521, which is a horizontally extending, flat plate-like material with its rear portion bent upward into an L-shape, and a lower hinge second body 522, which is arranged above the lower hinge first body 521 and is a horizontally extending, flat plate-like material with its rear portion bent upward into an L-shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 has the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 arranged at a distance above the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first body 521, and the vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 abuts against the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the lower hinge first body 521.

The lower hinge first body 521 has a lower hinge hole 521a for the outer frame that penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion and into which the lower hinge pin 60c of the lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. The lower hinge hole 521a for the outer frame is formed coaxially with the upper hinge pin 512 of the upper hinge member 510 of the main frame.

The second lower hinge body 522 has a lower door frame hinge hole 522a that penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion and into which the lower door frame hinge pin 126 of the lower door frame hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above, and a restriction piece 522b that extends upward from a position rearward of the lower door frame hinge hole 522a on the left edge of the horizontally extending portion and restricts the rotation range of the door frame 3. The lower door frame hinge hole 522a is formed coaxially with the upper door frame hinge hole 511a in the upper hinge body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

The main frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500 at the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first body 521 and the lower hinge second body 522. The main frame lower hinge assembly 520 cooperates with the main frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that it can rotate about a hinge, and to attach the door frame 3 to the main frame 4 so that it can rotate about a hinge.

[4-4. Main body reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcement frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 80 and 81. The main body frame reinforcement frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcement frame 530 has a U-shaped cross section in plan view that is open on the right side, and extends vertically with a constant cross section. In this embodiment, the main body frame reinforcement frame 530 is formed from an extruded metal profile.

Two left position restriction members 531 are attached to the main frame reinforcement frame 530, spaced apart vertically, at the rear of the section extending rightward from the front end. These members restrict the forward and vertical movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b of the main frame base 501.

The main frame reinforcement frame 530 has a U-shaped front side that is open on the right side in plan view. It has a groove 530a that is open to the right and extends vertically. The rear left end of the left reinforcement frame 111 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 in the door frame 3 is inserted into this groove 530a when the door frame 3 is closed against the main frame 4. By inserting the left reinforcement frame 111 into the groove 530a, the gap between the main frame reinforcement frame 530 and the left reinforcement frame 111 becomes serpentine in plan view, preventing the insertion of illegal tools into the pachinko machine 1 from the left side. The main frame reinforcement frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500 and prevents the insertion of illegal tools into the main frame 4 (game board 5) from the left side through the gap between the outer frame 2 and main frame 4.

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figure 84 and other figures. Figure 84(a) is a perspective view of the ball launcher in the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launcher as seen from the rear. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the lower front of the main body frame base unit 500 and is used to shoot game balls B stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 in the door frame 3 into the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. The ball launcher 540 can shoot game balls B with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 in the lower right corner of the front of the door frame 3.

The ball launcher 540 comprises a flat launch base 541 attached to the launcher mounting portion 501e of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500; a launch solenoid 542 consisting of a rotary solenoid attached to the rear surface of the right part of the launch base 541 when viewed from the front, with the rotation axis passing through the launch base 541 and extending forward; a striking hammer 543 whose base end is attached to the rotation axis of the launch solenoid 542; and a launch rail 544 attached to the front of the launch base 541 so as to extend diagonally upward to the left from near the tip of the striking hammer 543, along which the game ball B can roll.

The ball launching device 540 is designed so that game ball B is supplied from the ball supply unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the right end of the upper surface of the launching rail 544. When the handle 195 is rotated while game ball B is supplied to the right end of the upper surface of the launching rail 544, the launch solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the angle of rotation, causing the striking hammer 543 to strike the game ball B. The game ball B struck by the striking hammer 543 then travels through the launching rail 544 and is guided to the outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002 of the game board 5, and is then struck into the play area 5a.

If the hit game ball B does not reach the play area 5a due to factors such as the impact strength of the game ball B, it will fall from between the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) into the foul ball receiving port 150c of the foul cover unit 150 below, pass through the foul cover unit 150, and be ejected into the lower tray 202.

[4-6. Dispense base unit]
The dispensing base unit 550 in the main frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figure 85 etc. Figure 85(a) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the main frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing base unit as seen from the rear. The dispensing base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and is attached to the rear side of the main frame base unit 500.

The dispensing base unit 550 is equipped with a dispensing base 551 attached to the rear side of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500. The dispensing base 551 comprises a top panel 551a extending left and right with a substantially constant width in the front-to-back direction, a left panel 551b extending downward from the left edge of the top panel 551a when viewed from the front with a length that is substantially the same width as the top panel, a right panel 551c extending downward from the right edge of the top panel 551a when viewed from the front with a short length that is substantially the same width as the top panel 551a, an upper back panel 551d extending downward from the rear edge of the top panel 551a to the same position as the bottom edge of the right panel 551c, and a left panel 551b extending downward from the right edge of the top panel 551a when viewed from the front with a short length that is substantially the same width as the top panel 551a. The dispensing base 551 comprises a left back panel 551e extending to the right from a position forward of the rear edge of 551b at a substantially constant width to the bottom, an inner panel 551f extending rearward from the right edge of the left back panel 551e to the same position as the rear edge of the left side panel 551b, a bottom panel 551g extending rightward from the front of the lower edge of the left side panel 551b to a position substantially coincident with the right edge of the left back panel 551e, and a connecting panel 551h connecting the right edge of the bottom panel 551g to the lower edge of the inner panel 551f. The dispensing base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed like a box that is open forward and inward of the L shape.

The payout base 551 has a top plate 551a that extends left and right with a length approximately equal to the left-right width of the game board insertion opening 501b of the main frame base 501, and a left plate 551b that extends up and down with a length approximately equal to the up-down height of the game board insertion opening 501b. The front ends of the top plate 551a, left plate 551b, and right plate 551c of the payout base 551 are attached to the rear side of the main frame base 501.

The dispensing base 551 also has a shallow recessed area that is open to the rear and extends vertically, defined by the left side plate 551b, the left back plate 551e, and the inner plate 551f, to which the dispensing unit 560 is attached. The dispensing base 551 also has a rear cover attachment portion 551i that protrudes to the right at the top of the right side of the inner plate 551f when viewed from the front, and to which the rear cover 640 is attached.

The dispensing base unit 550 comprises a ball tank 552, which is attached to the top surface of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551, is box-shaped and extends left and right, and is open at the top, and a tank rail 553, which is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 above the part of the dispensing base 551 that extends leftward and is groove-shaped and open at the top.

The dispensing base unit 550 also includes a first rail cover 554 attached midway in the left-right direction at the top end of the tank rail 553, a second rail cover 555 attached to the top end of the tank rail 553, spaced to the left of the first rail cover 554 when viewed from the front, and extending to the left end of the tank rail 553, a ball straightening member 556 attached to the top end of the tank rail 553 between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, and a ball stop member 557 attached to the bottom end of the tank rail 553 near the left end when viewed from the front.

The ball tank 552 is formed with a length in the left-right direction that is approximately half the left-right width of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551, and a length in the front-to-back direction that is shorter than the front-to-back depth of the top plate portion 551a. The ball tank 552 is attached to the top surface of the top plate portion 551a, at a position towards the right in the left-to-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end is lower. The left end of the ball tank 552 is connected to the tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the top surface of the top plate 551a of the payout base 551, near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. In a plan view, the tank rail 553 extends diagonally left and rearward from the right end, which is connected to the ball tank 552, so that its front-to-rear depth changes from several times the outer diameter of the game ball B to approximately one time, and then extends straight to the left, with its front-to-rear depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom of the tank rail 553 is sloped so that the left end is lower, and the left end of the bottom opens downward and is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The opening at the left end of the bottom of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper opening of the guide passage 570a in the ball guide unit 570 of the payout unit 560.

The upper end of the tank rail 553, which extends straight to the left, is inclined at a steeper angle to the horizontal than the bottom, so that the left end is lower at a height slightly greater than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left roughly coincides with the rear edge of the top plate 551a. A first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, a ball rectifying member 556, and a ball stopping member 557 are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 extending straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are intended to prevent the front-to-rear depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B inside the tank rail 553.

The ball straightening member 556 is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, so that its end on the first rail cover 554 side can rotate around an axis extending in the front-to-rear direction. The ball straightening member 556 is equipped with a straightening piece 556a that protrudes into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-to-right direction (see Figure 91). This straightening piece 556a slows the flow of game balls B on the upper tier of game balls B circulating in two tiers, and straightens them so that they flow in a single tier on the downstream side, preventing ball clogging even when the height inside the tank rail 553 is low.

The ball stopping member 557 is attached to the underside of the tank rail 553 near the left end when viewed from the front, so that it can slide left and right. By sliding it to the left, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed, preventing game balls B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the downstream payout unit.

The payout base unit 550 also includes an external terminal board 558 attached to the left of the ball tank 552 when viewed from the front, on the upper surface of the portion extending to the left and right of the payout base 551. The external terminal board 558 is used to make an electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island equipment of the gaming hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal board 558 includes an earth connection portion facing the game board insertion port 501b of the main frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 is connected to the earth connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of dispensing unit]
The overall configuration of the dispensing unit 560 in the main frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 86 and 87. Figure 86(a) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit in the main frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the dispensing unit as seen from the rear. Figure 87(a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit as seen from the front, with its main components disassembled, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit as seen from the rear, with its main components disassembled. The dispensing unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the left portion 551e of the back panel of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550.

The payout unit 560 comprises a ball guide unit 570 that guides game balls B from the tank rail 553 downward in a serpentine manner, a payout device 580 that is arranged below the ball guide unit 570 and pays out game balls B guided by the ball guide unit 570 one by one based on instructions from the payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides game balls B that have passed through the payout device 580 downward, and a lower full ball path unit 610 that guides game balls B that have passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 toward the door frame 3 or the board unit 620.

The ball guiding unit 570 supplies game balls B, aligned in a row by the tank rail 553, to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which game balls B supplied from the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a ball removal passage 580b that branches off from the payout passage 580a. Under normal conditions, game balls B are released from the payout passage 580a toward the upper full ball path unit 600 based on instructions from the payout control board 633, and are released from the ball removal passage 580b toward the upper full ball path unit 600 when the ball removal lever 593 is operated.

The upper full ball path unit 600 separates and guides downward game balls B released from the payout path 580a of the payout device 580 and game balls B released from the ball removal path 580b. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides game balls B released from the payout path 580a of the payout device 580 toward the door frame 3 via the upper full ball path unit 600, and guides game balls B released from the ball removal path 580b toward the base unit 620.

[4-7a. Ball Guidance Unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 86 and 87. The ball guiding unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the left part 551e of the back panel of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, and is for receiving the game ball B from the tank rail 553 and guiding the game ball B toward the payout device 580.

The ball guide unit 570 comprises a box-shaped guide unit base 571 that is open to the front and has a meandering guide passage 570a through which game balls B can flow, a flat guide passage front cover 572 that closes the front of the guide unit base 571, a movable piece member 573 that is movable by game balls B flowing through the guide passage 570a, and a ball out detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of game balls B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573 (see Figure 91).

The ball guide unit 570 has a guide unit base 571 and guide path front cover 572 that are shaped like a rectangle extending vertically when viewed from the front. The guide path 570a opens upward near the left edge of the top surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the top edge to near the center of the height of the guide unit base 571, then bends to the right and extends downward in a serpentine manner, repeatedly folding back across the width of the guide unit base 571, before opening downward near the left edge of the bottom surface of the guide unit base 571.

The guide passage 570a is formed so that its depth in the front, back, right, and left directions and its width in the left and right directions are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game balls B, allowing the game balls B to be guided in a single file.

A movable piece member 573 is attached near the top of the ball guide unit 570 so that it can move forward and backward into the guide passage 570a. More specifically, the upper part of the movable piece member 573 is attached to the outer right part of the guide passage 570a when viewed from the front so that it can rotate around an axis extending forward and backward, and is formed so that a portion of its lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a due to its own weight. When the game ball B abuts against the part of this movable piece member 573 that protrudes into the guide passage 570a, the protruding part is pushed by the game ball B and retracts from the guide passage 570a, so that it no longer protrudes.

The out-of-ball detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573 when part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, but detects the movable piece member 573 when part of the movable piece member 573 retracts from the guide passage 570a and does not protrude. Therefore, the out-of-ball detection sensor 574 is in a detecting state when a game ball B is present in the guide passage 570a, and is in a non-detecting state when a game ball B is not present in the guide passage 570a.

When the ball guide unit 570 is assembled to the main frame 4, the upstream end of the guide passage 570a is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guide passage 570a is connected to the upstream end of the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580. The ball guide unit 570 has a serpentine guide passage 570a that guides game balls B, so the guide passage 570a extends longer than the overall height of the ball guide unit 570, allowing many game balls B to be stored within the guide passage 570a. Furthermore, the ball guide unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of game balls B in the guide passage 570a using the ball out detection sensor 574, and can therefore detect the presence or absence of game balls B in the ball tank 552 via the guide passage 570a.

[4-7b. Dispensing device]
The dispensing device 580 in the dispensing unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 86 to 89. Figure 88 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit, cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the fore-and-aft direction. Figure 89(a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the fore-and-aft direction when the ball removal movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line A-A in (a). The dispensing device 580 is detachably attached from the rear to the underside of the ball guide unit 570 on the rear surface of the left part 551e of the back panel of the dispensing base 551 of the dispensing base unit 550.

The payout device 580 comprises a payout device main body 581, which is box-shaped and open to the rear, and has a payout passage 580a through which game balls B can flow and a ball removal passage 580b that branches off midway from the payout passage 580a; a flat payout device rear cover 582 that closes the payout device main body 581 from the rear; and a shallow, box-shaped payout device front cover 583 that is attached to the front of the payout device main body 581 and is open to the rear.

The dispensing device 580 also includes a dispensing motor 584 attached to the rear surface of the dispensing device main body 581, with its rotation shaft protruding between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583; a spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 attached to the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584; a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 meshing with the drive gear 585 and rotatably attached by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583; a spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587 meshing with the first transmission gear 586 and rotatably attached by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583; The device comprises a dispensing gear member 588 which has a spur gear-shaped dispensing gear 588a meshing with the transmission gear 587 and multiple detection pieces 588b extending outward from the dispensing gear 588a and is rotatably attached between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583, a dispensing blade 589 which rotates integrally with the dispensing gear member 588 between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear cover 582 and has multiple blade pieces 589a which protrude into the dispensing passage 580a, and a blade rotation detection sensor 590 which is attached to the rear side of the dispensing device main body 581 and detects the detection pieces 588b of the dispensing gear member 588.

Furthermore, the payout device 580 is equipped with a payout detection sensor 591 that detects game balls B and is attached by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, a ball removal movable piece 592 that is attached by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 at the point where it branches off from the payout passage 580a and can open and close the ball removal passage 580b, and a ball removal lever 593 that is attached by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 so that it can slide up and down and can be held in a position where the ball removal movable piece 592 closes the ball removal passage 580b.

The dispensing device 580 has a rectangular shape that extends vertically in a plan view. The width of the dispensing device 580 in the left-right direction is greater to the right when viewed from the front than the width of the ball guiding unit 570 in the left-right direction.

As shown in Figure 88, when viewed from behind, the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device 580 has an upstream end that opens upward at a position to the left of the center in the left-right direction, and a downstream end that opens downward at a position near the right edge in the left-right direction. The dispensing passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the top for about one-third of its total height, gradually moving leftward as it moves downward from the upstream end, then bending slightly diagonally downward to the right, before bending at about one-third of its width and extending approximately vertically downward toward the center (axis of rotation) of the dispensing blade 589. Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, it bends to the right when viewed from behind at a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, then extends downward in an arc concentric with the payout blade 589 so that a gap slightly larger than the game ball B is formed between it and the outer periphery of the payout blade 589, and then extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position to the right of the center of the payout blade 589 when viewed from behind.

A dispensing detection sensor 591 is located within the dispensing passage 580a, below the dispensing blade 589 and directly above the downstream end.

The ball removal passage 580b extends diagonally downward from the upstream end of the dispensing passage 580a, branches off at a point where it bends to the right, extends vertically along the left edge as viewed from the rear, and opens downward near the left end of the bottom as viewed from the rear.

The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582 face each other at the side where the ball removal movable piece 592 is attached at the point where the payout passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b branch off, protruding rearward and forward from each other to form a gap narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. They are each equipped with a main body guide wall 581a and a rear cover guide wall 582a that are formed to connect with the left side walls of the payout passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b in a rear view. The main body guide wall 581a and the rear cover guide wall 582a are formed to the left of the point where the payout passage 580a branches off from the ball removal passage 580b and extends to the right in a rear view at a height approximately one-third of the way up. The main body guide wall 581a and the rear cover guide wall 582a are curved diagonally upward and left in a rear view, and are formed to mainly constitute the side walls of the ball removal passage 580b. The ball removal movable piece 592 rotates between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a.

The dispensing motor 584 is attached to the right side of the dispensing passage 580a of the dispensing device main body 581 when viewed from behind, at the point where it extends diagonally downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, first transmission gear 586, second transmission gear 587, and dispensing gear member 588 are located in front of the dispensing device main body 581, and the front side is covered by the dispensing device front cover 583. The dispensing gear member 588 has three flat plate-shaped detection pieces 588b extending outward, spaced circumferentially at 120-degree intervals.

The payout blade 589 is positioned between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear cover 582. The payout blade 589 has three blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape, spaced circumferentially at 120-degree intervals. The blade pieces 589a extend from above within the payout passage 580a toward the rotation axis, and then extend to the right when viewed from behind, protruding into the payout passage 580a so that the distance between the blade piece 589a and the side wall of the payout passage is narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. Between the three blade pieces 589a, the payout blade 589 has a ball containing portion 589b recessed toward the center in the shape of an arc with a radius slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B. This ball containing portion 589b is designed to contain only one game ball B. As a result, the vane 589 can restrict the game ball B in the payout passage 580a from moving downstream of the payout vane 589 by using the vane piece 589a, and can also move the game ball B contained in the ball container 589b downstream by rotating clockwise when viewed from the rear.

The dispensing gear member 588 and dispensing blade 589 are attached to the dispensing device rear cover 582 and the dispensing device front cover 583 so that they can rotate together on the same axis. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is located to the left of the rotation axis of the dispensing gear member 588 when viewed from the rear. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 detects the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588, which rotates together with the dispensing blade 589, thereby detecting the rotation of the dispensing blade 589.

The upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592 is rotatably attached around an axis extending forward and backward at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a. The ball removal movable piece 592 is bent in an L-shape and is attached so that its recessed side faces into the dispensing passage 580a. The ball removal movable piece 592 is formed so that its depth in the forward and backward directions is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, and it can pass through the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a and protrude into or retract out of the ball removal passage 580b.

The ball removal lever 593 is attached to the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear cover 582 so that it can slide up and down near the top end of the ball removal movable piece 592, to the left when viewed from behind. A portion of the ball removal lever 593 protrudes rearward, penetrating the dispensing device rear cover 582, and can be slid by operating this protruding portion. When the ball removal lever 593 is positioned at its lower end, its lower portion can abut against the ball removal movable piece 592, restricting the ball removal movable piece 592 from rotating clockwise when viewed from behind, allowing the ball removal movable piece 592 to close the ball removal passage 580b. When the ball removal lever 593 is positioned at its upper end, the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated outward from the ball removal passage 580b, opening the ball removal passage 580b (see Figure 89).

When the ball removal lever 593 is raised and the ball removal movable piece 592 is made rotatable, the game balls B that had been strung together upstream of the ball removal movable piece 592 pass over the ball removal movable piece 592 and flow down toward the ball removal passage 580b. At this time, because the ball removal passage 580b extends in a straight line from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game balls B that have flowed down from upstream of the payout passage 580a flow straight down toward the ball removal passage 580b. Furthermore, because the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b is connected to the island equipment, there is nothing to restrict the flow of the game balls B, such as the payout vane 589, so the game balls B flow down faster than toward the payout passage 580a.

In this way, when the ball removal movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down the ball removal passage 580b at high speed, causing the game ball B to forcefully abut against the lower end of the ball removal movable piece 592 protruding into the ball removal passage 580b. However, since the ball removal movable piece 592 can move outside the inner surface of the ball removal passage 580b through the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear cover side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear cover 582, the force of this abutment causes the ball removal movable piece 592 to move outside the ball removal passage 580b. Therefore, the ball removal movable piece 592 will not be pinched between the wall surface of the ball removal passage 580b and the game ball B. This prevents the game ball B from acting with strong force on the ball removal movable piece 592, and suppresses a decrease in durability or damage to the ball removal movable piece 592 due to a collision with the game ball B.

As a result, the ball removal movable piece 592 is less likely to be damaged, allowing more game balls B to be discharged more quickly to the island equipment downstream of the ball removal passage 580b, thereby minimizing the increase in time required for replacement and maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 and reducing the burden on the gaming hall.

In addition, when the ball removal movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, it moves out of the ball removal passage 580b through the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, which is spaced closer than the game ball B. Therefore, when the game ball B comes into contact with the ball removal movable piece 592 protruding into the ball removal passage 580b and the ball removal movable piece 592 moves outward through the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, even if the game ball B moves between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a along with the ball removal movable piece 592, only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward by the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, which is spaced closer than the game ball B.

The game ball B is prevented from moving outward by the gap between the main body guide wall 581a and the rear cover guide wall 582a, causing the game ball B to separate from the ball removal movable piece 592. The subsequent movement of the ball removal movable piece 592 is due to inertial force, so no strong force acts on the ball removal movable piece 592, making it less likely to be damaged. Furthermore, the game ball B will not fly out of the ball removal passage 580b from between the main body guide wall 581a and the rear cover guide wall 582a, ensuring that the game ball B can flow reliably downstream of the ball removal passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 86 and 87. The upper full ball path unit 600 is attached from the rear to the underside of the payout device 580 at the lower rear surface of the left part 551e of the back plate of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550. The upper full ball path unit 600 is used to guide game balls B released downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full ball path unit 610. The upper full ball path unit 600 is formed in a rectangular shape that extends vertically when viewed from the front.

The upper full ball path unit 600 comprises a box-shaped upper full base 601 attached to the dispensing base 551 and open at the rear, a box-shaped upper full cover 602 attached to the rear of the upper full base 601 and open at the front, and a dispensing device pressing member 603 rotatably attached near the top end of the upper full cover 602 and capable of pressing the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full base 601 protrudes to the right from the right edge when viewed from the front, and comprises a rear cover mounting portion 601a for mounting the rear cover.

The upper full-ball path unit 600 also has an upper payout ball receiving passage 600a that opens upward near the left end of the top surface when viewed from the front and extends downward along the left edge from the bottom to a height of approximately 2/3 of the total height, an upper ball storage passage 600b that is connected to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a, extends to the right when viewed from the front to about 3/4 of the total width, and extends downward from the bottom to a height of approximately 1/6 of the total height, and an upper ball storage passage 600b that is connected to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and extends to the right when viewed from the front to about 3/4 of the total width, and extends downward from the bottom to a height of approximately 1/6 of the total height, and an upper ball storage passage 600b that is connected to the left side of the center of the left-right direction of the upper ball storage passage 600b when viewed from the front. It is equipped with an upper normal dispensing passage 600c that extends downward and opens downward at the underside, an upper full-tank dispensing passage 600d that is adjacent to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c and extends downward from the right side of the center of the upper ball storage passage 600b when viewed from the front and opens downward at the underside, and an upper ball removal passage 600e that opens upward near the right end of the upper surface when viewed from the front, extends downward approximately vertically, and then opens downward near the right end of the lower surface (see Figure 91).

On the underside of the upper full ball path unit 600, from the left side when viewed from the front, the upper normal payout path 600c, the upper full payout path 600d, and the upper ball removal path 600e are lined up in this order and open downward. When the upper full ball path unit 600 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving path 600a opens directly below the downstream end of the payout path 580a in the payout device 580, and the upstream end of the upper ball removal path 600e opens directly below the downstream end of the ball removal path 580b in the payout device 580. As a result, game balls B released (paid out) from the payout path 580a of the payout device 580 pass through the upper payout ball receiving path 600a and the upper ball storage path 600b, and are released downward from either the upper normal payout path 600c or the upper full payout path 600d. In addition, game balls B released downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 are released downward through the upper ball removal passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full ball path unit]
The lower full ball path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 86 and 87. The lower full ball path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, and is attached to the lower part of the upper full ball path unit 600. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides game balls B released downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 toward the door frame 3 or toward the base unit 620. The lower full ball path unit 610 extends in the front-to-rear direction so that the front end is lower, and the rear end extends upward.

The lower full ball path unit 610 is equipped with a lower full base 611 that has a lower normal dispensing path 610a, a lower full dispensing path 610b, and a lower ball removal path 610c, extends in the front-to-back direction, and is open upward; a lower full cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full base 611; a dispensing path opening/closing door 613 that is rotatably attached to the front end of the lower full base 611 around an axis extending front-to-back and that can open and close the downstream end openings of the lower normal dispensing path 610a and the lower full dispensing path 610b; and a closing spring 614 that biases the dispensing path opening/closing door 613 in the direction of closing the downstream end openings of the lower normal dispensing path 610a and the lower full dispensing path 610b.

The lower full ball path unit 610 has, on the upper surface of the portion extending upward at the rear end, the lower normal dispensing path 610a, the lower full dispensing path 610b, and the lower ball removal path 610c, lined up in order from left to right when viewed from the front, with their upstream ends opening upward. The lower normal dispensing path 610a and the lower full dispensing path 610b extend forward side by side and open forward at the front end of the lower full ball path unit 610. The lower full dispensing path 610b extends forward slightly lower than the lower normal dispensing path 610a. The lower ball removal path 610c extends forward along the right side of the lower full dispensing path 610b when viewed from the front, and opens to the right halfway in the fore-and-aft direction.

The dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is pivotally mounted between the front end openings of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full dispensing passage 610b. This dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is biased in a clockwise direction when viewed from the front by a closing spring 614, and in its normal state closes the front end openings (downstream end openings) of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full dispensing passage 610b. The dispensing passage opening/closing door 613 is equipped with an operating protrusion 613a that protrudes forward. When viewed from the front, the operating protrusion 613a is shaped like a short arc centered on the rotation center of the dispensing passage opening/closing door 613, and its front end surface is inclined so as to protrude forward as it approaches the counterclockwise end. This operating protrusion 613a is formed to abut against the door opening/closing abutment 150f of the door cover unit 150 on the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed against the main frame 4.

When the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the lower normal payout path 610a, lower full payout path 610b, and lower ball removal path 610c, which open upward at the upper rear end, are located directly below the downstream ends of the upper normal payout path 600c, upper full payout path 600d, and upper ball removal path 600e of the upper full ball path unit 600, respectively. As a result, game balls B released downward from the upper normal payout path 600c flow through the lower normal payout path 610a, game balls B released downward from the upper full payout path 600d flow through the lower full payout path 610b, and game balls B released downward from the upper ball removal path 600e flow through the lower ball removal path 610c.

When the lower full ball path unit 610 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b open immediately after the through ball passage 150a and full ball receiving port 150b of the fall cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. The downstream end of the lower ball removal passage 610c opens to face the ball removal guide section 627, which opens to the left in the base unit 620b of the board unit 620.

When the lower full ball path unit 610 is in its normal state (when the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main frame 4), the operating protrusion 613a of the dispensing path opening/closing door 613 abuts against the door opening/closing abutment 150f of the fall cover unit 150, causing it to rotate counterclockwise when viewed from the front against the biasing force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal dispensing path 610a and the lower full dispensing path 610b are open, and they are connected to the through ball path 150a and full ball receiving port 150b of the fall cover unit 150.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened relative to the main frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening/closing door 613 moves away from the door opening/closing abutment 150f of the fall cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening/closing door 613 rotates clockwise when viewed from the front due to the biasing force of the closing spring 614, closing the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b. In this state, game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b can no longer move forward from their respective front-end openings. As a result, even when the door frame 3 is opened relative to the main frame 4, game balls B will not spill out of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of gaming ball B in the payout unit]
Next, the flow of game balls B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figure 91. Figure 91 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the main frame. When assembled to the main frame 4, the payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551. In the normal state, the ball removal lever 593 of the payout device 580 is positioned at the lower end, closing the ball removal path 580b branching off from the payout path 580a at the branching point. In addition, in the lower full-ball path unit 610, the payout path opening/closing door 613 is in the open state.

A predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the ball tank 552, which is open upward, from the gaming hall island equipment in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, for example, based on the detection of a ball shortage by the ball exhaustion detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are aligned in a row by the tank rail 553 and sent through the guide passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580. When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game balls B cannot move (flow down) downstream of the payout blade 589, and multiple game balls B become trapped upstream of the payout blade 589.

Then, the game ball B in the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 presses against the movable piece member 573, causing the ball cut detection sensor 574 to detect the movable piece member 573. This indicates that the game ball B is stored at least in the passage between the movable piece member 573 and the dispensing blade 589.

In this state, when the payout motor 584 rotates the payout blade 589 in a clockwise direction when viewed from the rear, the game ball B stored in the ball storage section 589b moves in a clockwise direction when viewed from the rear and is released downstream of the payout blade 589 in the payout passage 580a. The game ball B released from the payout blade 589 (ball storage section 589b) is then detected by the payout detection sensor 591 and sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball passage unit 600.

Under normal conditions, game balls B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full ball path unit 600 flow through the upper ball storage passage 600b and down to the upper normal payout passage 600c located directly below the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a. Game balls B that flow down to the upper normal payout passage 600c then pass through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610 and the through ball passage 150a of the fall cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, before being released into the upper tray 201 from the upper tray ball supply port 211a of the tray unit base 211 in the tray unit 200.

When a large number of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the upper tray 201 becomes full of game balls B, it becomes impossible to release the game balls B forward from the upper tray ball supply port 211a, and the game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 become stuck in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full ball path unit 610.As more game balls B are paid out, they also become stuck in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full ball path unit 600, which is connected upstream to the lower normal payout passage 610a. When the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with game balls B and more game balls B are paid out, the game balls B begin to accumulate in the upper ball storage passage 600b, which is connected to the upper normal payout passage 600c on the upstream side, and begin to flow down the upper full payout passage 600d, which is adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

The game balls B that flow down the upper full payout passage 600d then pass through the lower full payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 and are received by the full ball receiving port 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3. The game balls B received in the full ball receiving port 150b are then released into the lower tray 202 through the storage passage 150e, ball discharge port 150d, and lower tray ball supply port 211c of the tray unit base 211. This means that if the upper tray 201 is full of game balls B and more game balls B are paid out, the game balls B can be automatically paid out to the lower tray 202.

When the lower tray 202 is full of game balls B and further game balls B cannot be released forward from the lower tray ball supply port 211c, if more game balls B are dispensed, the game balls B will become trapped and stored in the storage passage 150e of the far cover unit 150 upstream of the lower tray ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B have accumulated in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. This notifies the player by voice (e.g., "Please remove the balls!") that the upper tray 201 and lower tray 202 are full of game balls B, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 is no longer in detection mode.

When the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 need to be removed from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement, the ball removal lever 593 of the payout device 580 is slid upward from its lowest position to its highest position. The lower end of the ball removal movable piece 592 is then pushed by the game ball B, causing it to rotate clockwise when viewed from the rear, and the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body guide wall 581a and the rear cover guide wall 582a and is pushed out of the ball removal passage 580b. This allows the game ball B to enter the ball removal passage 580b, which branches off from the payout passage 580a, and the game balls B on the upstream side are released downward through the ball removal passage 580b.

At this time, the game ball B flowing down contacts the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a more strongly than it does the ball removal movable piece 592, making the ball removal movable piece 592 less likely to be damaged.

The game ball B released downward from the ball removal passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball removal passage 600e of the upper full ball path unit 600 and the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610, and is released from the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c to the ball removal guide section 627 of the base unit 620, and then passes through the discharged ball receiving section 628 and the ball discharge port 629 to be discharged to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (towards the island equipment of the gaming hall).

[4-8. Board unit]
The board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 92 to 96. Figure 92(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the rear. Figure 93 is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from below and behind. Figure 94 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit as seen from the front, with each main component disassembled, and Figure 95 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit as seen from the rear, with each main component disassembled. Figure 96 is an enlarged side cross-sectional view of the lower part of the pachinko machine, cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

The board unit 620 comprises a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500, below the game board mounting portion 501c; a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 so as to cover part of the speaker unit 620a from behind; a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b; a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c; and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to cover part of the payout control unit 620d from behind.

The speaker unit 620a comprises a speaker cover 621 attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500, below the game board mounting section 501c; a main frame speaker 622 attached to the rear surface of the speaker cover 621 near the left edge when viewed from the front, facing forward; and a container-shaped speaker box 623 attached to the rear of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main frame speaker 622, and open to the front.

The speaker cover 621 extends left and right and is equipped with a circular speaker mounting portion 621a that penetrates from front to back near the left edge when viewed from the front and is composed of multiple slits that extend up and down; a front space recess 621b that is recessed so that it bulges forward from the rear on the right side of the speaker mounting portion 621a when viewed from the front; and a connection portion 621c that protrudes downward from the underside of the front space recess 621b, extends left and right, and opens diagonally downward and rearward.

The main frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker mounting portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side, facing forward. The connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at a 45-degree angle so that its lower end coincides with the upper end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43 of the lower outer frame assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. The main frame speaker 622 is a cone-type speaker that mainly outputs low-frequency sounds.

The speaker box 623 is shaped like a container that is open to the front, with the part behind the main frame speaker 622 protruding rearward the most, and is formed so that the protrusion decreases in a stepped manner toward the right as viewed from the front. This ensures that there is sufficient space behind the speaker box 623 to the right of the center as viewed from the front, allowing the placement of the base unit 620b, power supply unit 620c, etc. The speaker box 623 is formed to cover (close) the entire rear surface except for the connection part 621c of the speaker cover 621.

The speaker unit 620a, together with the speaker cover 621 and speaker box 623, forms part of an enclosure 624 that contains the sound output rearward from the main frame speaker 622. This enclosure 624 has a front recessed space 621b formed in the speaker cover 621 that bulges forward to the right of the speaker mounting portion 621a when viewed from the front. Therefore, even though the speaker box 623 is formed in a stepped shape so that the amount of rearward protrusion decreases as it moves to the right, a sufficiently large space is secured to the right of the main frame speaker 622.

When the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, the connecting portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620a is connected to the connecting tube portion 43a with the sealing member 48 sandwiched therebetween, thereby connecting the space behind the main frame speaker 622 with the interior space 40a of the outer frame 2's curtain board. Therefore, a spacious enclosure 624 can be formed behind the main frame speaker 622 by the speaker cover 621, speaker box 623, front curtain board member 42, and rear curtain board member 43, allowing sound output rearward from the main frame speaker 622 to be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a in the front curtain board member 42.

In more detail, as described above, in speaker unit 620a, the space behind the main frame speaker 622 (part of the enclosure 624) extends to the right when viewed from the front with a relatively wide depth and is connected to the lower frame assembly 40 via the connection portion 621c and the connecting tube portion 43a. This means that sound output rearward from the main frame speaker 622 can be transmitted to the lower frame assembly 40 without attenuation, particularly in the low-frequency range. The transmitted low-frequency range can then be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42a in the front panel member 42.

In this case, the sound emitted forward from the opening 42a of the front panel member 42 is emitted in an inverted phase, so that it resonates to amplify the sound output from the front of the main frame speaker 622 and emitted from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200. This allows for the output of a loud sound with deep bass even though the diameter of the main frame speaker 622 is small.

In other words, in this embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, allowing the player to hear deep bass sounds. This allows the player to hear a rich bass sound from the sound output from the front of the main frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the platter unit 200, and the sound output from the rear of the main frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2.

The speaker unit 620a also has a through hole 621d formed in the speaker cover 621, penetrating in the front-to-rear direction at a position between the lower part of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the front recessed portion for space 621b, and a through tube 623a formed in the speaker box 623, which extends cylindrically and penetrates in the front-to-rear direction, communicating with the through hole 621d. When assembled into the speaker unit 620a, the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a communicate with each other, and the enclosure 624 is independent. The connection cable 503 is inserted through the through hole 621d and the through tube 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 comprises a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 so as to cover part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a rear base 626 attached to the rear side of the front base 625, with the power supply unit 620c attached to its rear surface.

The base unit 620b is formed by the front base 625 and rear base 626 working together, and is equipped with a ball removal guide section 627 that receives game balls B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 and guides them to the right when viewed from the front, a discharged ball receiving section 628 that opens upward to the right when viewed from the front, downstream of the ball removal guide section 627, and receives game balls B discharged downward from the game board 5, and a ball discharge outlet 629 that discharges game balls B downward after passing through the ball removal guide section 627 and the discharged ball receiving section 628.

The upstream end of the ball removal guide section 627 opens to the left at the top of the left side when viewed from the front, and the downstream end opens to the left end of the discharged ball receiving section 628. When assembled to the main body frame 4, the opening of the upstream end of the ball removal guide section 627 faces and coincides with the downstream end opening of the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610, and can receive game balls B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c and guide them to the discharged ball receiving section 628.

The ejected ball receiving section 628 is open upward and extends left and right. The bottom surface of the ejected ball receiving section 628 is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball removal guide section 627 at the left end when viewed from the front, and is sloped downward toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides game balls B removed from the ball tank 552 and game balls B ejected from the game board 5 to the right when viewed from the front using the ball guide section 627 and ejected ball receiver 628, before ejecting them downward from the ball ejection port 629, making it easier to secure a larger space to the left of the center when viewed from the front. This allows for a larger space in the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a, allowing players to hear a sound with richer bass than conventional pachinko machines.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b, and a power supply board cover 631 attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630.

The payout control unit 620d comprises a box-shaped payout control board box 632 that is detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 (see Figure 96) housed within the payout control board box 632. The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to payout commands from the main control board 1310 of the gaming board 5, such as pressing the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 of the tray unit 200, to pay out the specified number of game balls B to the player (upper tray 201 or lower tray 202). The payout control board box 632 is designed to leave traces of opening and closing. This makes it possible to detect any unauthorized modifications to the payout control board 633, thereby providing a greater deterrent to fraudulent activity.

The interface unit 620e comprises a board base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, an interface board 635 attached to the rear surface of the board base 634, and an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634 so as to cover the rear side of the interface board 635.

The board base 634 is attached to the rear surface of the speaker box 623 at the portion that protrudes furthest to the rear, behind the main frame speaker 622. One end (on the main frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503 is connected to the interface board 635. The interface board 635 is connected to the power supply board 630, payout control board 633, main control board 1310, peripheral control board 1510, etc., as well as to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right of the board base 634 (interface board 635) when viewed from the front, covering part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The rear cover 640 of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 75 to 81. The rear cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 that is inserted from the front into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 and attached. The right side of the rear cover 640 in a front view is rotatably attached around an axis that extends vertically to the rear end that extends vertically of the rear extension portion 501j of the main body frame base 501, and the left side is attached to the rear cover attachment portion 551i of the payout base 551 and the rear cover attachment portion 601a of the upper full ball path unit 600.

The rear cover 640 is formed in the shape of a flat plate that extends vertically and horizontally, with the right edge bent forward when viewed from the front. When assembled to the main body frame 4, the rear surface is positioned approximately flush with the rear surface of the upper back plate 551d of the payout base 551. The rear cover 640 has multiple slits 641 that penetrate from front to back and extend vertically. In this embodiment, the rear cover 640 is made of transparent synthetic resin, allowing the inside of the main body frame 4 to be seen from the rear of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figure 97. Figure 97(a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main frame as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as seen from the rear. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main frame base 501 of the main frame 4 and locks the main frame 4 and the door frame 3, and the main frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

The locking unit 650 comprises a unit base 651 that is attached to the right side of the rear extension 501j of the main frame base 501 and extends vertically; multiple door frame hooks 652 that protrude forward from the unit base 651 and can engage with the door frame 3; multiple outer frame hooks 653 that protrude rearward from the unit base 651 and can engage with the outer frame 2; and a transmission cylinder 654 that protrudes forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651 and moves the door frame hooks 652 or outer frame hooks 653 up and down depending on the direction of rotation.

The locking unit 650 also includes a lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hook 652 downward and the outer frame hook 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that protrudes forward from a position above the transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651 and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main frame 4, the multiple (three) door frame hooks 652, transmission cylinder 654, and outer frame unlocking lever 656 protrude forward from the front surface of the main frame base 501. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main frame base 501, and when the door frame 3 is closed against the main frame 4, its front end engages with the rotation transmission member 133 of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3, transmitting the rotation of the key inserted in the keyhole 132 and causing it to rotate.

The locking unit 650 has multiple (three) door frame hooks 652 that engage with the hook member 116 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and multiple (two) outer frame hooks 653 that engage with the upper hook member 24 and lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, inserting a key that corresponds to the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 and rotating it counterclockwise as viewed from the front causes the multiple door frame hooks 652 to move upward via the transfer cylinder 654, unlocking the door frame 3 from the main frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, the multiple outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transfer cylinder 654, unlocking the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2. With the door frame 3 open relative to the main frame 4, sliding the outer frame unlock lever 656 downward causes the multiple outer frame hooks 653 to move downward, unlocking the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2. In this way, the lock between the main frame 4 and door frame 3, or between the main frame 4 and outer frame 2, can be unlocked.

When locking the gap between the main frame 4 and the door frame 3, or between the main frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are tapered at their tips. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed against the main frame 4, or the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 move downward or upward to overcome the hook member 116, upper hook member 24, and lower hook member 25, and then enter a locked state due to the biasing force of the lock spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame]
Next, the detailed configuration of the upper part of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 98 to 105. Figure 98(a) is a plan view of the main body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line B-B in (a). Figure 99 is an enlarged view of the upper part of the main body frame in a perspective view from the rear. Figure 100(a) is a perspective view of the ball tank assembled with the tank rail, etc., as seen from the front and bottom, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) as seen from the front and bottom. Figure 101 is an exploded perspective view of Figure 100(a) as seen from the front. Figure 102 is an explanatory diagram showing the area through which game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame flow. Figure 103 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. Figure 104 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls into the bypass passage in the upper part of the main body frame. Figure 105 is an enlarged view of the tank rail area in a perspective view of the main body frame seen from the rear of the hinge side.

As described above, the main frame 4 comprises a frame-shaped main frame base 501 whose rear portion can be inserted into the outer frame 2 and which is detachably and hinge-rotatably attached to the outer frame 2 by the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main frame lower hinge assembly 520, and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5; an inverted L-shaped payout base 551 attached along the upper and left edges of the rear side of the main frame base 501 when viewed from the front; a box-shaped (container-shaped) ball tank 552 attached to the payout base 551, extending left and right, and open upward; and a groove-shaped tank 552 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552, extending leftward and open upward. It comprises a tank rail 553, a first rail cover 554 attached to part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, a second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 spaced to the left of the first rail cover 554 when viewed from the front, a ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, a ball stopping member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 behind the payout base 551 for paying out game balls B to the player.

The ball tank 552 has a rectangular shape extending in the left-right direction when viewed from above, a bottom wall 552a that slopes so that the left side is lower when viewed from the front, a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c that extend upward from the front and rear edges of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and a left wall 552d and a right wall 552e that extend upward from both the left and right edges of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed like a container with an open top. The ball tank 552 stores game balls B supplied from island facilities such as an amusement hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

The spherical tank 552 also has an overflow section 552f that is cut out from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining upper outer edge. This overflow section 552f is formed over approximately three-quarters of the left-right length of the front wall 552b, from the end of the left side wall 552d to the end on the opposite side (the right side wall 552e).

When viewed from the front, the right end (upstream side) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the interior of the ball tank 552, and the downstream side extends to one side (left) in the left-right direction, away from the ball tank 552. The tank rail 553 has a gutter-shaped main guide section 553a that extends from the upstream side to the downstream end at its bottom and is shaped so that only one game ball B can pass through in the width direction perpendicular to the flow direction of the game ball B. The main guide section 553a is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the left when viewed from the front. In plan view, the main guide section 553a extends parallel to an axis extending leftward from the right end to a position that is approximately 1/10 of the total length in the left-right direction, then extends diagonally from the right end to a position that is approximately 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction, moving rearward as it moves leftward, and then extends from there in a crank shape that extends parallel to the axis extending left-right to the left end. In the main guide section 553a of the tank rail 553, a section extending parallel to the axis extending laterally from the left end to the right extends to the top end with the same width, and the upper side is closed off by attaching a first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555, and a ball rectifying member 556 to the upper end of this section. Furthermore, in the section where the upper side is closed off, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the flow path through which game ball B flows decreases toward the downstream end (left end), and at the downstream end it is formed to a height (slightly higher than the outer diameter of game ball B) that allows the flow of only one game ball B.

The tank rail 553 extends from its upstream end above the main guide section 553a to a location where the upper side is closed. It bulges out wider than the width of the main guide section 553a so that multiple game balls B are lined up in a width direction perpendicular to the flow direction of the game balls B, and has a bulging section 553b that narrows in width from the upstream end toward the downstream side to match the width of the main guide section 553a. This bulging section 553b allows multiple game balls B, which are spread out in width on the upstream side, to be aligned in width so that the width is the width of a single game ball B as they move downstream. The bulging section 553b is also formed so that its width narrows from the upper end toward the lower main guide section 553a. As a result, the tank rail 553 can align multiple game balls B flowing through the bulging section 553b in a single line in the width direction as they move downstream and downward.

The bulge portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has a three-dimensionally curved shape with its center of curvature located on the inner side. Because the center of curvature of the bulge portion 553b is located higher than the main guide portion 553a, a slightly chamfered corner is formed at the boundary between the main guide portion 553a and the bulge portion 553b on the tank rail 553. Furthermore, the bulge portion 553b is curved with a greater curvature downstream than upstream. For this reason, when a game ball B flows through the three-dimensionally curved bulge portion 553b, the direction of the reaction force from the bulge portion 553b acting on it changes depending on the position of the bulge portion 553b it abuts, thereby suppressing ball jamming within the bulge portion 553b. In more detail, if bulge portion 553b were formed into a shape that extends uniformly, a reaction force would always act in a constant direction from the inner surface of bulge portion 553b on game balls B circulating within bulge portion 553b, making it difficult for the reaction force to disperse. As a result, game balls B inside are always pushed in a constant direction, making it difficult for the game balls B to escape and making ball jamming more likely to occur. In contrast, because bulge portion 553b has a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of bulge portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B. This distributes the pushing direction of multiple game balls B circulating inside, making it easier for the pushed game balls B to escape and making ball jamming less likely to occur.

The tank rail 553 is also made of a transparent material, allowing the interior to be viewed from the outside. This means that even if ball jamming occurs within the tank rail 553, the state of the game balls B within the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, allowing the location of the jammed balls to be quickly identified. This allows ball jamming within the tank rail 553 to be quickly resolved, minimizing interruptions to gameplay due to ball jamming and preventing a loss of interest in the game due to interruptions. Furthermore, because the tank rail 553 is transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main frame 4 can be viewed from behind through the tank rail 553. Therefore, if a malfunction occurs in the movable presentation unit of the game board 5, the status of the transmission mechanism, such as the drive motor, gears, and belts, can be confirmed while the game board 5 is still attached to the main frame 4, achieving the same effects as those described above.

The main frame 4 is provided in front of the ball tank 552, extending in the front-to-rear direction, and extending outward (to the left) from the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 on the same side as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-to-right direction (the left side when viewed from the front).It is equipped with an overflow surface portion 501m, whose rear end is at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and whose front end is higher in order to return game balls B that have overflowed forward from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, and a bypass passage 552g, which extends rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m to above the bulge portion 553b on the tank rail 553, whose upper side is open, and which is sloped so that its rear end is lower and also sloped so that the side facing away from the ball tank 552 (the left side) is lower in the left-to-right direction, and which guides some of the game balls B that have overflowed from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m.

The main body frame 4 also includes a discharge section 551j, which is located on either the left or right outer side of the bypass passage 552g, opposite the left wall 552d of the ball tank 552, and has a width greater than the outer diameter of the game ball B and a bottom surface lower than the open upper portion of the tank rail 553; an external terminal board 558, which is located on the opposite side of the bypass passage 552g across the discharge section 551j and lower than the overflow surface 501m, and has multiple wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring can be connected from the rear; and a terminal cover 551k which covers the upper sides of the multiple wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal board 558) and has an upper surface which extends horizontally at a position higher than the overflow surface 501m.

The overflow surface 501m is formed on the main frame base 501. The overflow surface 501m extends rearward in a flat plate shape from a position two to four times the outer diameter of the game ball B below the upper edge of the rear surface of the base main body 501a, which has a vertically extending rectangular shape when viewed from the front. The overflow surface 501m is formed with a left-right length that is approximately one-third of the left-right length of the main frame base 501, and its left end when viewed from the front is located to the right of one-third of the total left-right length from the left end of the main frame base 501. The overflow surface 501m is formed so that its height from the front end to the rear end is approximately one-half the outer diameter of the game ball B. When the main frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2, a gap approximately twice the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between this overflow surface 501m and the outer frame upper member 30.

The main frame base 501 is located on both the left and right sides of the overflow surface 501m and has flat left and right step portions 501n and 501o that extend approximately horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface 501m, and a plurality of ribs 501p that extend in the front-to-rear direction on both the left and right outer sides of the left and right step portions 501n and 501o, with their upper ends higher than those of the left and right step portions 501n and 501o, and are arranged in a row in the left-to-right direction at intervals narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The left step portion 501n is shorter in the left-to-right direction than its length in the front-to-rear direction. Furthermore, the left step portion 501n is inclined so that the rear right corner is slightly lower than the horizontal plane when viewed from the front. The right step portion 501o is longer in the left-to-right direction than its length in the front-to-rear direction. Additionally, the right step 501o is inclined so that the rear left corner is slightly lower than the horizontal plane when viewed from the front.

The multiple ribs 501p on the main frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2, the gap between the outer frame 2 and the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 is formed at a height narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

When the main frame base 501 is assembled to the main frame 4, in a front view, the right end of the overflow surface 501m is aligned left-right with the right end of the overflow section 552f of the spherical tank 552, the left end of the overflow surface 501m is aligned left-right with the left end of the bypass passage 552g, and the right end of the right step 501o is aligned left-right with the right side wall 552e of the spherical tank 552.

The bypass passage 552g is formed integrally with the spherical tank 552. Note that, below, the container-like area surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, front wall 552b, rear wall 552c, left side wall 552d, and right side wall 552e will be referred to simply as the spherical tank 552. The bypass passage 552g has a passage surface 552h that extends leftward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the spherical tank 552 in a flat plate-like shape. The passage surface 552h is sloped so that its front end is at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and its rear end is lower, and a weir portion that extends upward from the edge of the passage surface 552h opposite the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. The rear edge of the passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g extends rearward at its left end (toward the weir portion 552i) in a front view to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the spherical tank 552, and extends obliquely forward from the left end to the right end. Note that the passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g may be horizontal rather than inclined left and right.

When assembled to the main frame 4, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends along the front end of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends diagonally in the left-right direction, in a crank-like shape. In other words, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends diagonally in the left-right direction. As a result, the flow direction of the game ball B guided rearward by the bypass passage 552g changes from the diagonal rear end to a direction perpendicular to the diagonal rear end. The diagonally extending rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends approximately parallel to the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 (the flow direction of the game ball B within the tank rail 553). Therefore, the game ball B is released from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g in a direction approximately perpendicular to the flow direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, allowing the game ball B from the bypass passage 552g to be received by a wider portion of the tank rail 553. Furthermore, because game balls B are supplied from the bypass passage 552g into the tank rail 553 in a direction approximately perpendicular (perpendicular to) the direction in which the game balls B flow, it is less likely that game balls B from the bypass passage 552g will clog the tank rail 553.

The bypass passage 552g extends diagonally from left to right so that its rear end moves rearward as it approaches the downstream side of the tank rail 553. Therefore, when a game ball B is released from the bypass passage 552g toward the tank rail 553, the diagonally extending rear end allows the game ball B to be released toward the upstream side, where the tank rail 553 is wider, rather than the downstream side, where the tank rail 553 is narrower. By releasing the game ball B into the wider section, it is possible to prevent ball jamming within the tank rail 553.

In addition, the area on the tank rail 553 where the game balls B are guided by the bypass passage 552g corresponds to the rear of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the outside of the left part of the rear wall 552c when viewed from the front. Game balls B that pass under the guide surface 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) from inside the ball tank 552 flow through this area. For this reason, in the area behind the bypass passage 552g on the tank rail 553, the height of multiple game balls B stacked vertically does not exceed the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the height of the wall of the tank rail 553). Therefore, space (empty space) can be secured downstream of the ball tank 552 on the tank rail 553, that is, at the rear end of the bypass passage 552g, allowing game balls B to be stacked upward. As a result, game balls B guided rearward by the bypass passage 552g can be reliably received by the tank rail 553, and game balls B will not spill rearward from the tank rail 553.

The spherical tank 552 has a flat guide surface 552j that extends downward to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow section 552f on the left wall 552d within the area surrounded by the front wall 552b, rear wall 552c, and left side wall 552d. The guide surface 552j extends from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c in the front-to-rear direction. Additionally, the guide surface portion 552j is formed in such a way that, in a front view, its right edge extends diagonally rearward from a position approximately one-third of the total length of the front wall 552b from the left end of the front wall 552b, to a position approximately one-ninth of the total length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction, and to a position approximately one-half of the total length of the front wall 552b from the front wall 552b to the left side wall 552d, and then extends parallel to the left side wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c, and from there extends parallel to the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-to-rear direction from the left end of the rear wall 552c to a position approximately one-third of the total length of the rear wall 552c in the left-to-right direction.

In plan view, the spherical tank 552 has an opening 552k formed vertically in an area enclosed by the right edge of the guide surface portion 552j, which is shaped as described above, and a straight line connecting the end of the right edge on the front wall 552b side and the end on the rear wall 552c side. The spherical tank 552 also has flat flange portions 552l extending outward in the left-right and up-down directions on the same plane as the front wall 552b at the front end of the right wall 552e and at the front end of the weir portion 552i of the bypass passage 552g. The upper edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper edges of the two flange portions 552l are higher than the upper edges of the left wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (the upper surfaces of the left step 501n and right step 501o of the main frame base 501).

When the spherical tank 552 and tank rail 553 are assembled, the upstream end (right end in front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the spherical tank 552. Furthermore, the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553, which extends left and right in a crank-like shape in a plan view, and the portion to its left that extends straight left and right, are located rearward (protruding) from the spherical tank 552. The rear end edge of the left-hand bypass passage 552g of the left side wall 552d of the spherical tank 552 is located at the front end of the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553, which extends left and right in a crank-like shape.

The discharge section 551j is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. When assembled to the main body frame 4, the discharge section 551j extends rearward from the rear side of the flange section 552l on the left side of the spherical tank 552 (as viewed from the front) to the tank rail 553, so that it descends in a stepped manner rearward from a height lower than the bypass passage 552g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the spherical tank 552. Then, it extends leftward along the tank rail 553 to a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (a position near the center of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction), and then extends rearward.

The external terminal board 558 has multiple wire connection terminals 558a attached to its rear surface, lined up in the left-right direction. These wire connection terminals 558a are one-touch terminals whose gripping portion opens by operating a lever to grasp the tip of an electrical wire. When assembled to the main body frame 4, the external terminal board 558 is located in front of the area on the tank rail 553 where the upper side is closed by the first rail cover 554, second rail cover 555, and ball straightening member 556. A terminal cover 551k, which covers the upper side of the external terminal board 558 (multiple wire connection terminals 558a), is formed on the upper surface of the dispensing base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at approximately the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552.

Next, the effects of the upper part of the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 will be explained. First, as shown by the white arrows in Figure 102, the overflow surface 501m, left step 501n, right step 501o, and bypass passage 552g are inclined so that the rear ends of the overflow surface 501m and bypass passage 552g are lower, and the rear right corner of the left step 501n and the rear left corner of the right step 501o are respectively lower. Furthermore, the bottom wall 552a and tank rail 553 (main guide section 553a) of the ball tank 552 are inclined so that the left end is lower when viewed from the front. Furthermore, the guide surface 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end, opposite the bottom wall 552a, is lower.

As the amount of game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 increases due to supply from the island equipment, they first flow out over the overflow section 552f, which is the lowest part of the outer periphery's upper edge, and out the outside (front) of the ball tank 552. The game balls B that overflow from the ball tank 552 can escape into the overflow surface section 501m, and the game balls B that flow out from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface section 501m can be returned into the ball tank 552 due to the slope of the overflow surface section 501m (see Figure 103). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent any further increase in game balls B within the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress game balls B from pressing against each other strongly within the ball tank 552 (increase in ball pressure), and it is possible to prevent blockages (so-called ball jamming) caused by game balls B interlocking with each other within the ball tank 552.

In addition, since the bypass passage 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 104, game balls B that have overflowed from the ball tank 552 onto the overflow surface 501m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g. This prevents the game balls B accumulated on the overflow surface 501m from exerting a strong backward pressure on the game balls B in the ball tank 552, preventing the game balls B from clogging inside the ball tank 552. In addition, because the game balls B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g, game balls B that have overflowed from the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface 501m can be prevented from spilling outside (to the rear) of the main body frame 4. This prevents game balls B that have spilled outside the main body frame 4 from becoming trapped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, preventing the main body frame 4 from opening or closing.

Furthermore, some of the game balls B that overflow from the ball tank 552 onto the overflow surface 501m can be guided downstream of the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g, and the game balls B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a fixed position along the left side away from the ball tank 552.This means that the flow (pressure) of the game balls B sent to the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g can be directed downstream of the tank rail 553, preventing the game balls B from pressing against each other too strongly within the tank rail 553 and preventing the game balls B from clogging.

In addition, the height of the remaining upper edge of the outer periphery of the ball tank 552 other than the overflow section 552f is made higher than the overflow section 552f, so that the upper edge of the left side wall 552d on one side of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is higher than the overflow section 552f, i.e., the rear end of the overflow surface 501m. As a result, game balls B that overflow from the ball tank 552, overflow into the overflow surface 501m, and then flow from the overflow surface 501m to the bypass passage 552g are blocked by the left side wall 552d on one side of the ball tank 552, preventing them from returning from the bypass passage 552g to the ball tank 552 side. This prevents the game balls B on the bypass passage 552g side from pressing against the game balls B inside the ball tank 552 and causing clogging of the game balls B inside the ball tank 552.

Furthermore, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is higher than the rear end of the overflow surface 501m (the passage surface 552h along which the game balls B roll in the bypass passage 552g), preventing the game balls B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 into the bypass passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface 501m. This prevents the game balls B from flowing into the bypass passage 552g from the side (ball tank 552), allowing the flow of the game balls B in the bypass passage 552g to flow in a fixed direction from the overflow surface 501m at the front end toward the tank rail 553 at the rear end, thereby ensuring a fixed pressure on the game balls B guided from the bypass passage 552g to the tank rail 553. Therefore, the direction of pressure applied to the game balls B within the tank rail 553 is varied, preventing the game balls B from pushing against each other and becoming stuck, and preventing the game balls B from becoming jammed.

In addition, the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with a main guide section 553a that extends to the downstream end. When the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guide section 553a, they line up in a row in the left-right direction. This allows the game balls B in the tank rail 553 to be aligned, ensuring that the game balls B can be reliably guided to the downstream payout device 580. Furthermore, the open upper section of the tank rail 553 is provided with a wide bulge section 553b that can accommodate multiple game balls B. Therefore, game balls B released from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g can be reliably received, ensuring the above-mentioned effects.

Furthermore, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to the closed-top portion, and narrows in width from the upstream end toward the downstream side to match the width of the main guide portion 553a. This allows multiple game balls B to be aligned in a single line in the width direction as they move downstream within the bulging portion 553b. Furthermore, the closed-top portion of the tank rail 553 is configured so that the height of the flow path through which the game balls B flow decreases toward the downstream end. This allows multiple game balls B that are stacked in multiple layers in the height direction on the upstream side (toward the ball tank 552) to flow downstream through the closed-top portion of the tank rail 553, reducing the number of layers in the height direction and aligning them in a single line. Therefore, the tank rail 553 allows multiple game balls B to be guided downstream (toward the payout device 580) in a single line.

Furthermore, since it is equipped with an overflow surface portion 501m and a bypass passage 552g, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B therein, and since the tank rail 553 is equipped with a bulge portion 553b, the volume within the tank rail 553 can be increased, so that, together with the ball tank 552, a larger number of game balls B can be stored.

In addition, on the opposite side of the ball tank 552, with the bypass passage 552g and discharge section 551j in between, there is an external terminal board 558 equipped with multiple wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring is connected, and a terminal cover 551k covering the upper side of the multiple wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal board 558). Therefore, the wire connection terminals 558a and terminal cover 551k can be positioned farther away from the ball tank 552 to which game balls B are supplied from the island equipment. Therefore, even if the game balls B supplied from the island equipment bounce or are supplied with force at the ball tank 552 or overflow surface section 501m, they are less likely to reach (contact) the wire connection terminals 558a, etc., and problems such as short circuits or loose electrical wiring due to the game balls B contacting them will not occur.

In addition, by directing the multiple wire connection terminals 558a toward the rear and making the top surface of the terminal cover 551k higher than the overflow surface 501m, even if game balls B supplied from the island equipment to the ball tank 552 bounce off the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface 501m, they are less likely to land on the top surface of the terminal cover 551k. Even if game balls B land on the top surface of the terminal cover 551k, they are less likely to fall off the rear side, making it easier to avoid the occurrence of the above-mentioned problems.

Furthermore, game balls B returned from the overflow surface 501m to the guide surface 552j of the ball tank 552 are sent upstream of the ball tank 552 (to the right in Figure 103) due to the inclination of the guide surface 552j. This prevents the game balls B on the guide surface 552j from pressing downstream against the game balls B in the ball tank 552, preventing clogging of the game balls B within the ball tank 552.

In addition, even if game balls B supplied to the ball tank 552 from the island equipment bounce off the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface 501m and land on the left step 501n or right step 501o on both sides of the overflow surface 501m, as shown in Figure 103, the slope of these elements can guide the game balls B to the overflow surface 501m or the bypass passage 552g, preventing problems caused by game balls B spilling outside the main frame 4.

In addition, because the game balls B pass under the guide surface 552j when they flow from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553, the guide surface 552j can regulate the amount (height) of game balls B stacked on the upper side of the tank rail 553 so that it does not exceed the lower surface of the guide surface 552j. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface 552j) on the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, space (empty space) can be secured in which game balls B can be stacked on the upper side, and game balls B guided by the bypass passage 552g can be reliably received.

Furthermore, since the multiple electric wire connection terminals 558a and terminal cover 551k are positioned in front of the portion of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed, even if a game ball B falls rearward from the terminal cover 551k, the game ball B will not be received by the tank rail 553, preventing the game ball B from affecting the game ball B inside the tank rail 553 and causing malfunctions.

[4-12. Other embodiments of tank rails, etc.]
Next, another embodiment of the tank rail 553 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 106 to 110. Figure 106 is an enlarged perspective view of the tank rail portion of a pachinko machine equipped with a tank rail of another embodiment, viewed from the rear. Figure 107(a) is a plan view showing the tank rail of Figure 106 assembled with a ball tank, (b) is a perspective view of the tank rail of (a) viewed from the front, and (c) is a perspective view of the tank rail of (a) viewed from the rear. Figure 108(a) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail of Figure 107 viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the tank rail of Figure 107 viewed from the rear. Figure 109 is a cross-sectional view of the tank rail taken along the kercher line in Figure 107(a). Figure 110 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the tank rail of Figure 107 in cross section. In a tank rail 553A etc. of another embodiment different from the above, in addition to the tank rail 553A, a first rail cover 554A, a second rail cover 555A, and a ball straightening member 556A are different from the tank rail 553, first rail cover 554, second rail cover 555, and ball straightening member 556 of the above embodiment, and similar configurations will be described using the same symbols.

In this embodiment, the tank rail 553A rectifies the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 and delivers them to the ball guide unit 570 of the payout unit 560. This tank rail 553A extends to the left in the shape of a groove that is open upward. Attached to the tank rail 553A are a first rail cover 554A that closes the upper end, a second rail cover 555A that is located to the left of the first rail cover 554A when viewed from the front, and a ball rectifying member 556A that is located above the second rail cover 555A. Attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553A is a ball stopping member 557 that can prevent the flow of game balls B.

As shown in Figure 107(a) and other figures, the tank rail 553A has a serpentine portion 553c that snakes back and forth downstream of the bulge portion 553b. This serpentine portion 553c serves to reduce the circulation speed of the game balls B. The first rail cover 554A is attached upstream of the serpentine portion 553c (towards the ball tank 552).

The second rail cover 555A extends laterally from the first rail cover 554A to the downstream end (left end in front view) of the open upper end of the tank rail 553A, including the serpentine portion 553c. The second rail cover 555A has a plate-shaped cover portion 555a that closes the upper end of the tank rail 553A, a pair of protective walls 555b that extend upward from the front and rear ends of the cover portion 555a upstream of the center in the lateral direction, and an opening 555c that penetrates the cover portion 555a between the pair of protective walls 555b. At the location of the serpentine portion 553c of the tank rail 553A, the pair of protective walls 555b are formed in a serpentine shape that mimics the serpentine portion 553c. A flow straightening piece 556a of the spherical flow straightening member 556A (described later) is inserted into the opening 555c from above.

The ball straightening member 556A has an upstream end that extends forward and backward and is mounted rotatably around an axis. The ball straightening member 556A is located above the cover portion 555a of the second rail cover 555A, between a pair of protective walls 555b, and has a flat straightening piece 556a that penetrates the opening 555c of the second rail cover 555A and protrudes into the tank rail 553A. This ball straightening member 556A abuts from above against game balls B stacked in multiple layers within the tank rail 553A, breaking up the layers of game balls B and making it easier to align them in a single row. It also prevents the uppermost game ball B from moving downstream too quickly, preventing ball jamming on the downstream side of the tank rail 553A.

In the tank rail 553A and other components of this embodiment, when assembled, the ball rectifying member 556A is located between a pair of protective walls 555b on the second rail cover 555A and below the upper ends of the protective walls 555b. This prevents the electric wire (shown by a dashed line in FIG. 106 ) connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a of the external terminal board 558, which is located on the upper front side of the portion of the tank rail 553A where the ball rectifying member 556A is attached, from contacting the ball rectifying member 556A from above. However, if the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a contacts the ball rectifying member 556A from above, the weight of the electric wire may prevent the ball rectifying member 556A from rotating upward even when the game ball B abuts the rectifying piece 556a of the ball rectifying member 556A. This may prevent the ball rectifying member 556A from fully rectifying the game ball B. In contrast, in this embodiment, the pair of protective walls 555b of the second rail cover 555A prevent the electric wire connected to the electric wire connection terminal 558a from coming into contact with the ball rectifying member 556A. Therefore, when a game ball B comes into contact with the rectifying piece 556a of the ball rectifying member 556A, the ball rectifying member 556A can rotate upward, fully exerting its rectifying effect and preventing ball jamming or clogging within the tank rail 553A.

Furthermore, since the tank rail 553A is provided with a serpentine portion 553c, the serpentine portion 553c can suppress the flow speed of the game balls B. However, in the tank rail 553A, which narrows in height toward the downstream side, if the upper game balls B of the game balls B stacked in multiple layers move downstream first, ball jamming is likely to occur. In contrast, in this embodiment, as described above, the serpentine portion 553c can suppress the flow speed of the game balls B, preventing the upper game balls B from moving downstream first, thereby reducing the occurrence of ball jamming.

Furthermore, as described above, the protective wall 555b of the second rail cover 555A prevents the electric wires from coming into contact with the ball straightening member 556A, preventing ball clogging. This allows the tank rail 553A to be positioned near a terminal board (e.g., external terminal board 558) or control board to which many electric wires are connected, or a terminal board or control board to which many electric wires are connected to be positioned near the tank rail 553A, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 with a high degree of freedom in the placement of the tank rail 553A (ball tank 552), terminal board, etc.

[4-13. Another embodiment of the board unit]
Next, a board unit 620A of another embodiment (second embodiment) different from the above will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 111 to 116, etc. Figure 111(a) is a front view of the board unit of the other embodiment, (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) seen from the right front, and (c) is a perspective view of the board unit of (a) seen from the left front. Figure 112(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of Figure 111(a) seen from the upper right rear, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit of Figure 111(a) seen from the lower right rear. Figure 113 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of Figure 111(a) seen from the front, and Figure 114 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of Figure 111(a) seen from the rear. Fig. 115(a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line KII in Fig. 111(a), (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line KII in Fig. 111(a), and (c) is a cross-sectional view taken along line KII in Fig. 111(a). Fig. 116 is a bottom view showing the area behind the door frame in a pachinko machine equipped with the board unit of Fig. 111(a).

The board unit 620A of this embodiment replaces the board unit 620 described above and is attached to the lower rear surface of the main frame base unit 500. In the board unit 620A of this embodiment, the configuration of the base unit 660 is significantly different from the base unit 620b of the board unit 620 described above. Here, components similar to those of the board unit 620 described above are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions are omitted.

The board unit 620A comprises a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500, below the game board mounting portion 501c; a base unit 660 attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 so as to cover part of the speaker unit 620a from behind; a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 660; a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c; and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to cover part of the payout control unit 620d from behind.

The base unit 660 is comprised of a front base 661 attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 so as to cover part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, a rear base 662 attached to the rear side of the front base 661 and having the power supply unit 620c attached to its rear surface, and an out ball passage 663 provided between the front base 661 and the rear base 662, through which game balls B discharged downward from the game board 5 flow, and a detection unit 664 for detecting game balls B flowing through the out ball passage 663 one by one. an out sensor 664 that detects the presence of a ball; a ball removal guide section 627 that receives game balls B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 and guides them to the right when viewed from the front; a ball removal and discharge passage 665 that is located behind the out ball passage 663 in the rear base 662 and through which game balls B guided by the ball removal and discharge section 627 flow; and a passage wall member 666 that is attached to the rear base 662 so as to close the rear side of the ball removal and discharge passage 665.

The front base 661 is formed in a box shape that is long from side to side and open to the front. The rear base 662 has a flat partition wall portion 662a that extends left and right at a roughly constant height in the vertical direction. An out ball passage 663 and a ball removal guide portion 627 are formed in front of the partition wall portion 662a, and a ball removal discharge passage 665 is formed behind the partition wall portion 662a. The rear base 662 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear behind the partition wall portion 662a.

The base unit 660 has a front base 661, a rear base 662, and a passage wall member 666 formed from transparent materials. Therefore, the ball removal guide section 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball removal and discharge passage 665 are also formed transparent. Therefore, the inside of the ball removal guide section 627, the out ball passage 663, and the ball removal and discharge passage 665 can be clearly seen from the top and bottom of the base unit 660, making it easy to check for clogging balls, etc.

The out-ball passage 663 is formed in front of a flat partition wall portion 662a on the rear base 662, which extends left and right at a substantially constant height in the vertical direction, with the front end open, and the open front end is closed by the front base 661.

The out-ball passage 663 has a ball discharge receiving portion 663a that opens upward and extends left and right at approximately the center of the pachinko machine 1 in the left-right direction; an out-ball rectifying portion 663b that straightens the game balls B received in the ball discharge receiving portion 663a into a single line while causing them to snake widely left and right; a downward guide portion 663c that guides the game balls B straightened into a single line by the out-ball rectifying portion 663b downward; and an out-ball discharge port 663d that opens downward at the lower end of the downward guide portion 663c and discharges the game balls B downward from the underside of the base unit 660. The out-ball discharge port 663d of the out-ball passage 663 is located rearward of the outer frame 2 (see Figure 116).

The ball discharge receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663 is formed so that its depth in the front-to-rear direction is approximately 2.5 times the outer diameter of the game ball B. The ball discharge receiving portion 663a is inclined at a gentle angle so that the right end is lower.

The out ball rectification section 663b is inclined at a gentle angle from a position to the right of the right end of the ball discharge receiving section 663a toward the bottom of the ball discharge receiving section 663a, with the left end becoming lower. Furthermore, the front-to-back depth of the out ball rectification section 663b narrows as it moves downstream (to the left), with the depth near the downstream end below the ball discharge receiving section 663a being slightly larger than the diameter of game ball B. Furthermore, the height of the portion of the out ball rectification section 663b to the left of the right end of the ball discharge receiving section 663a decreases as it moves downstream (to the left), with the height near the downstream end being slightly larger than the diameter of game ball B. This allows game balls B to be aligned in a row in the out ball rectification section 663b.

The downward guide section 663c extends downward from the downstream end of the out-ball rectifying section 663b, which is below the ball discharge receiving section 663a. Midway up and down, it curves rearward in a small crank shape so that its front wall is flush with the rear wall (compartment wall). As a result, the downstream end of the downward guide section 663c (out-ball discharge port 663d) is located rearward of the front surface of the partition wall 662a of the rear base 662. An out-sensor 664 is located upstream of the cranked portion of the downward guide section 663c. The cranked portion of the downward guide section 663c is curved so that it does not have a horizontally extending portion. Therefore, even if a game ball B passes through the out-sensor 664 and hits the cranked portion, it will not bounce up toward the out-sensor 664 above. This prevents the out-sensor 664 from detecting a single game ball B twice.

Out sensor 664 uses a non-contact electromagnetic proximity switch that is highly durable and has a long lifespan, as game ball B passes through it frequently.

The ball removal guide section 627 is located to the left of the ball discharge receiving section 663a in the out ball passage 663. The upstream end of the ball removal guide section 627 opens to the left at the top of the left side when viewed from the front, and the downstream side bends rearward and extends to the rear side of the partition wall section 662a of the rear base 662, where it is connected to the upstream end of the ball removal and discharge passage 665 (see Figure 115(a), etc.).

The ball ejection/discharge passage 665 is formed on the rear side of the partition wall portion 662a of the rear base 662. The ball ejection/discharge passage 665 is formed in the rear base 662 in a state that is open to the rear, and its rear end is closed by a passage wall member 666. The rear end of this ball ejection/discharge passage 665 is located approximately one outer diameter of a game ball B forward of the rear end of the rear base 662. In other words, a gap of at least one game ball B is formed between the ball ejection/discharge passage 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662.

The ball removal and discharge passage 665 has its upstream end (left end) connected to the downstream end of the ball removal and discharge guide section 627, and is equipped with a horizontal guide section 665a that extends to the right of the ball discharge receiving section 663a at the same inclination as the ball discharge receiving section 663a of the out ball passage 663, a vertical guide section 665b that extends vertically downward from the downstream end (right end) of the horizontal guide section 665a to the underside of the rear base 662, and a ball removal and discharge outlet 665c that opens downward at the downstream end (lower end) of the vertical guide section 665b. The ball removal and discharge outlet 665c is located slightly rearward of the out ball discharge outlet 663d of the out ball passage 663 (see Figure 116).

The ball ejection/discharge passage 665 also has multiple protrusions 665d that protrude inward alternately at regular intervals in the vertical direction on the left and right inner walls of the vertical guide section 665b. The ball ejection/discharge passage 665 allows game balls B flowing through the vertical guide section 665b, which extends vertically downward, to alternately come into contact with the multiple protrusions 665d, causing the game balls B to flow downward in a zigzag pattern, suppressing an increase in their flow speed and suppressing the speed of the game balls B as they are discharged downward from the ball ejection/discharge opening 665c.

This ball removal and discharge passage 665 is a simple L-shaped passage consisting of a horizontal guide section 665a and a vertical guide section 665b, so when the ball removal lever 593 is operated to discharge the game balls B in the ball tank 552, many game balls B can be smoothly guided and discharged.

In this embodiment of the board unit 620A, a game ball B that is shot into the game area 5a and ejected from the game board 5 is received by the ball ejection receiving portion 663a of the out ball passage 663, detected by the out sensor 664, and ejected to the island equipment side of the game hall. Meanwhile, to eject (remove) a game ball B from the ball tank 552, etc., the ball ejection lever 593 of the payout device 580 is operated to eject the game ball B to the ball ejection passage 580b side, and the game ball B is then ejected to the island equipment side of the game hall through the ball ejection guide portion 627 and ball ejection ejection passage 665, which are separate and independent from the out ball passage 663. This allows only game balls B ejected from the game board 5 to be detected by the out sensor 664 provided in the out ball passage 663, so that only game balls B ejected from the game board 5 can be accurately counted. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 can calculate an accurate payout rate (ball output rate) for game balls B based on the number of game balls B (safe balls) counted by the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580 and the number of game balls B (out balls) counted by the out sensor 664.

The number of game balls B (number of out balls) counted by the out sensor 664 is the sum of the number of game balls B that were shot into the game area 5a and received by a prize opening such as the general prize opening 2001, the first start opening 2002, the gate 2003, the second start opening 2004, the big prize opening 2005, and the special prize opening 2006, and then discharged from the game board 5, and the number of game balls B that were shot into the game area 5a and then received by the out opening 1008 without being received by any prize opening, and then discharged from the game board 5. This is the number of game balls B shot into the game area 5a (number of fired balls).

Note that the payout rate (ball output rate) changes depending on the game status, so the payout rate within a specified period (for example, per unit time, per specified time, per day, etc.) is calculated as follows: "Number of payouts within specified period ÷ Number of balls out within specified period = Payout rate within specified period."

In addition, according to this embodiment, the base unit 620A of the main frame 4, to which the game board 5 is detachably attached, is provided with an out ball passage 663 through which game balls B ejected from the game board 5 flow, and the out sensor 664 detects game balls B flowing through the out ball passage 663.Since game balls B ejected from the game board 5 can be detected, there is no need to provide an out ball detection unit on the game board 5 to detect "out balls," simplifying the configuration of the game board 5 and reducing costs.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, a gap larger than the outer diameter of a game ball B is formed between the rear end of the ball ejection/discharge passage 665 and the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the rear base 662. This means that the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection/discharge passage 665 are located away from the power supply board 630 and payout control board 633, etc. This reduces the impact on the power supply board 630 and payout control board 633, etc., of electrical noise caused by static electricity and induced currents generated by the flow of many game balls B through the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection/discharge passage 665, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that is less likely to malfunction due to the flow of game balls B.

In addition, according to this embodiment, the out sensor 664 detects the game ball B, whose circulation speed has been suppressed by the out ball straightening section 663b of the out ball passage 663. This reduces the impact on the out sensor 664 caused by the circulation of the game ball B, thereby reducing the risk of the out sensor 664 being worn out and damaged early.

Furthermore, if the payout rate (ball payout rate) per specified time calculated from the number of safe balls per specified time and the number of out balls per specified time is displayed so that it can be seen by the player, players will want many game balls B paid out, so if the displayed payout rate is high, they will immediately recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is likely to pay out many game balls B, making it easier for them to select the pachinko machine 1 to play on. Furthermore, if the payout rate is displayed so that it can be seen by the player, if a player commits fraudulent acts that result in many game balls B being paid out, the displayed payout rate will be higher than usual, making it easier for other players and staff at the amusement hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed to notice the fraudulent acts, which will discourage players from committing fraudulent acts and result in the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts.

Furthermore, if the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls is displayed in a location that is not visible to the player, amusement hall staff can see it and detect fraudulent activity for the same reasons as above. Furthermore, when performing maintenance on the pachinko machine 1, if the displayed payout rate differs from the normal value, this may indicate a malfunction within the pachinko machine 1 (for example, with the obstructing nail N, main control board 1310, payout control board 633, relay board, connector, wiring cable, various sensors, etc.), which allows for early response to the malfunction and reduces the burden on the amusement hall.

Furthermore, because an out sensor 664 is provided in the out ball passage 663 through which game balls B ejected from the game board 5 flow, there is no need to provide a structure (e.g., an out ball detection unit) for detecting game balls B ejected onto the game board 5, which reduces the cost of the game board 5 and makes it possible to secure space on the game board 5 for the structure for detecting ejected game balls B. By providing a presentation device in the secured space, the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) can be made even more entertaining to players.

In addition, the ball ejection/discharge passage 665 has a vertical guide section 665b with multiple protrusions 665d protruding alternately, and as the game balls B flow through this vertical guide section 665b, the speed at which the game balls B flow can be reduced, preventing damage to the ball ejection/discharge passage 665 caused by the impact of the circulating game balls B, as well as damage to the island equipment in the amusement hall that receives the game balls B discharged from the ball ejection/discharge passage 665.

In addition, the out ball passage 663 is provided with a serpentine out ball straightening section 663b, and the ball removal and discharge passage 665 is provided with a vertical guide section 665b with multiple protrusions 665d protruding from it. These features enable the circulation speed of game balls B to be suppressed, thereby reducing the electrical noise emitted from game balls B circulating within the out ball passage 663 and the ball removal and discharge passage 665. This reduces the impact on nearby power supply board 630, payout control board 633, etc., and results in a pachinko machine 1 that is less likely to malfunction due to the circulation of game balls B.

In addition, because the out ball discharge port 663d and the ball ejection/discharge port 665c of the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection/discharge passage 665, respectively, are designed to open downward, game balls B are discharged downward from the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection/discharge passage 665, making it less likely that game balls B will collide with other pachinko machines or walls located behind the pachinko machine 1 in the island equipment, preventing damage to the other pachinko machines or walls. In addition, because game balls B are discharged downward from the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection/discharge passage 665, discharged game balls B are less likely to scatter, making it easier for the island equipment to collect game balls B discharged from the out ball passage 663 and the ball ejection/discharge passage 665.

Furthermore, a base unit 660 having a ball ejection passage 665 and an out ball passage 663 is provided below the portion of the main frame 4 where the game board 5 is attached. Therefore, game balls B that have been shot into the game area 5a on the game board 5 can be handed over to the out ball passage 663 of the base unit 660 simply by ejecting them downward. This allows for a simple (easy) configuration for ejecting game balls B from the game board 5, thereby reducing the cost of the game board 5.

In addition, by providing the ball ejection/discharge opening 665c of the ball ejection/discharge passage 665 and the out ball discharge opening 663d of the out ball passage 663 behind the outer frame 2, game balls B discharged from the ball ejection/discharge passage 665 or the out ball passage 663 can be prevented from colliding with the outer frame 2. This prevents game balls B flowing forcefully through the ball ejection/discharge passage 665 or the out ball passage 663 from colliding with the outer frame 2, which could result in damage to the outer frame 2, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is less likely to be damaged.

In addition, because the ball ejection/discharge opening 665c of the ball ejection/discharge passage 665 and the out ball discharge opening 663d of the out ball passage 663 are located behind the outer frame 2, there is no need to advance the part of the island equipment that collects game balls B (out receiving part, bucket, etc.) to a position that overlaps with the outer frame 2, reducing the effort required to install and move the pachinko machine 1.

[4-13a. Another embodiment of ball discharge in the base unit]
Next, another embodiment of ball discharge in the above-mentioned substrate unit 620A will be described in detail with reference to Figures 117 and 118. Figure 117 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a guide piece is provided at the out-ball discharge port of the out-ball passage. Figure 118(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the out sensor is detachable, and Figure 118(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the state in Figure 118(a) with the out sensor removed.

The embodiment shown in Figure 117 has a guide piece 667 that guides the game ball B rearward, located at the out ball discharge port 663d at the downstream end of the out ball passage 663 in the base unit 660. In more detail, in this embodiment, the out ball passage 663 has a junction 663e near the downstream end where it merges with the ball removal and discharge passage 665. The junction 663e opens downward, and its open end forms the out ball discharge port 663d (ball removal and discharge port 665c). The guide piece 667 protrudes rearward a short distance from the front wall of the out ball discharge port 663d.

According to the embodiment shown in Figure 117, when a game ball B is discharged downward from the out ball discharge port 663d, it comes into contact with the guide piece 667, causing the discharge direction of the game ball B to be directed diagonally downward and rearward. This makes it easier for the game ball B to be released toward the area for collecting the game ball B (out receiver, bucket, etc.) located behind the front of the island equipment (inside the island equipment) when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an amusement hall, allowing the game ball B to be reliably collected on the island equipment side.

In addition, according to the embodiment shown in FIG. 117, the guide piece 667 can direct the release direction of the game ball B diagonally downward and rearward, so even if the out-ball discharge port 663d of the out-ball passage 663 is located close to directly below the playing area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 (close to the front of the island equipment), the game ball B can be reliably received in a bucket or the like within the island equipment. Therefore, since the out-ball passage 663 (out-ball discharge port 663d) can be located as far forward as possible, the space behind the out-ball passage 663 on the main body frame 4 can be made larger. Therefore, the out-ball passage 663 is located farther away from the power supply board 630, payout control board 633, etc., which reduces the impact on the power supply board 630, payout control board 633, etc. of electrical noise caused by static electricity and induced currents generated by the flow of many game balls B through the out-ball passage 663, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that is less prone to malfunction due to the flow of game balls B.

Next, in the embodiment shown in Figure 118, the out sensor 664 is attachable and detachable from below at the out ball discharge port 663d in the out ball passage 663. This embodiment includes a sensor mounting recess 663f formed at the downstream end of the downward guide section 663c in the out ball passage 663, which is open downward and can accommodate the out sensor 664, and a sensor cover 668 which restricts downward movement of the out sensor 664 accommodated in the sensor mounting recess 663f.

The sensor mounting recess 663f is formed at the lower end of the downward guide section 663c, which is connected to the downstream end of the out-ball rectifying section 663b in the out-ball passage 663 of the base unit 660. In this embodiment, the base unit 660 is also made of a transparent material, so that the inside of the out-ball passage 663 can be seen from above and below the base unit 660.

The sensor cover 668 has a main body 668a that extends longer than the sensor mounting recess 663f and whose base end is rotatably attached to the base unit 660, a through-hole 668b that passes through the game ball B at a position that coincides with the detection hole of the out sensor 664 housed in the sensor mounting recess 663f in the main body 668a, and an elastically deformable locking claw 668c that is provided on the opposite side of the base end of the main body 668a.

The base end of this sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the outer side of the sensor mounting recess 663f on the base unit 660, opposite the outgoing ball rectification section 663b. The locking claw 668c of the sensor cover 668 is engaged with the locking section 663g located on the outer side of the outgoing ball rectification section 663b side of the sensor mounting recess 663f on the base unit 660.

The sensor cover 668 is rotated so that the locking claw 668c moves upward and engages with the locking portion 663g, closing the sensor cover 668 with the out sensor 664 housed within the sensor mounting recess 663f so that the detection hole of the out sensor 664 is aligned with the out ball passage 663. The main body 668a contacts the underside of the out sensor 664, restricting its downward movement and allowing the out sensor 664 to be attached to the base unit 660 (see Figure 118(a)). In this state, the through-hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 is aligned with the detection hole of the out sensor 664. After being detected by the out sensor 664, the game ball B that has flowed through the out ball passage 663 is discharged downward through the through-hole 668b. The through-hole 668b of the sensor cover 668 also serves as the out ball discharge port 663d of the out ball passage 663.

To replace (remove) the out sensor 664, the locking claw 668c of the sensor cover 668 is operated to elastically deform the locking claw 668c and release it from the locking portion 663g. Then, by rotating the sensor cover 668 around the base end of the main body 668a and opening it so that the locking claw 668c moves downward, the main body 668a of the sensor cover 668 moves away from the underside of the out sensor 664, allowing the out sensor 664 to be removed from the sensor mounting recess 663f (see Figure 118(b)).

As shown in Figure 118(b), in this embodiment, when the sensor cover 668 is rotated open, there is a certain amount of gap between the bottom end of the sensor cover 668 and the top end of the object at risk of contact, as indicated by the two-dot chain line (for example, the top surface of the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2, the top end of the connecting tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43, etc.), or between the sensor cover 668 and the bottom end of the main frame 4. As a result, even if the main frame 4 is opened or closed relative to the outer frame 2 while the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 will not come into contact with the object at risk of contact, preventing damage to the sensor cover 668.

In the embodiment shown in Figure 118, the out sensor 664 detects all game balls B that are shot into the game area 5a of the game board 5, so there is a risk that the out sensor 664 will wear out quickly and become damaged as a large number of game balls B are circulated. However, as described above, the out sensor 664 can be attached and detached from below by opening the sensor cover 668, making it easy to replace the out sensor 664.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, even if the main frame 4 is opened or closed relative to the outer frame 2 while the sensor cover 668 is open, the sensor cover 668 will not come into contact with objects that may come into contact with it, such as the outer frame 2, preventing damage to the sensor cover 668. Specifically, the sensor cover 668 supports the out sensor 664 from below. However, since many game balls B come into contact with the out sensor 664 from above, there is a risk that the vibrations caused by the contact of many game balls B may cause the locking claw portion 668c of the sensor cover 668 to come loose, causing the sensor cover 668 to open. If the sensor cover 668 opens during play and the out sensor 664 falls downward, the out sensor 664 will no longer detect the game ball B, even though the game ball B has been shot into the play area 5a. This will result in the main control board 1310 or the like reporting an abnormality. When this abnormality is reported, an amusement hall attendant will open the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 to check for the abnormality. However, because there is a gap between the bottom end of the open sensor cover 668 and objects that could come into contact with it, such as the outer frame 2, the main frame 4 can be opened without the sensor cover 668 coming into contact with those objects, preventing damage to the sensor cover 668.

Furthermore, according to the embodiment of Figure 118, the base end side of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660 at the outer portion of the sensor mounting recess 663f opposite the out ball straightening portion 663b, and since the base unit 660 is transparent, by opening the sensor cover 668 and removing the out sensor 664, the inside of the out ball passage 663 can be clearly seen from below. Therefore, when game ball B becomes stuck in the out ball passage 663, the inside of the out ball passage 663 can be seen from the outside, so the location where game ball B is stuck can be identified at a glance and the jammed game ball B can be quickly resolved.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the upper surface of the door frame top unit 450 of the door frame 3 is formed so as to be approximately flush with the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2. This means that the pachinko machine 1 can be turned upside down and stood upright, making it easy to replace the out sensor 664 by opening and closing the sensor cover 668, and to check the inside of the out ball passage 663 and the ball removal and discharge passage 665 from the bottom side through the transparent base unit 660.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, even if the out sensor 664 is damaged, it can be easily replaced, allowing play that was interrupted due to damage to the out sensor 664 to be resumed quickly, thereby easing the player's frustration due to the interruption of play and preventing a decline in interest, as well as preventing a decline in the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1, thereby reducing the burden on the gaming hall.

Furthermore, one end of the sensor cover 668 is rotatably attached to the base unit 660. Therefore, even if the sensor cover 668 is opened when replacing the out sensor 664, the sensor cover 668 remains suspended from the base unit 660 and will not fall off, preventing the sensor cover 668 from being lost.

Furthermore, the sensor cover 668, which holds the out sensor 664 from below, is rotatably attached around a longitudinal (horizontal) axis at an outer portion of the base unit 660 near the out ball passage 663 through which many game balls B pass. Therefore, the distribution of the downward force exerted on the sensor cover 668 via the out sensor 664 due to the flow of game balls B is greater on the side rotatably attached to the base unit 660 (one end) and relatively smaller on the side of the locking claw 668c that is locked to the locking portion 663g of the base unit 660 (the other end). Therefore, even if a downward force acts on the sensor cover 668 via the out sensor 664 as many game balls B pass through the out sensor 664, most of the force can be received by the rotatably attached one end, making it difficult for the locking claw 668c on the other end to be released, reducing the likelihood of the sensor cover 668 opening and the out sensor 664 falling off.

[4-14. Third embodiment of board unit]
Next, a third embodiment of the board unit 700, which differs from the above, will be described in detail with reference to Figures 119 to 128. Figure 119(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of the third embodiment, with the power supply unit, dispensing control unit, and interface unit omitted, as seen from the front right, and Figure 119(b) is a perspective view of the board unit of Figure 119 as seen from the front left. Figure 120(a) is a perspective view of the board unit of Figure 119 as seen from the rear right above, and Figure 120(b) is a perspective view of the board unit of Figure 119 as seen from the rear right below. Figure 121(a) is a plan view of the board unit of Figure 119, Figure 121(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line KO-KO in Figure 119(a), Figure 121(c) is a cross-sectional view taken along line SA-SA in Figure 119(a), and Figure 122 is a cross-sectional view taken along line SI-SH in Figure 121(a).

Figure 123 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of Figure 119 when disassembled and viewed from the front, and Figure 124 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit of Figure 119 when disassembled and viewed from the rear. Figure 125 (a) is an oblique view of the ball path member of the board unit of Figure 119 when viewed from the front, and (b) is an oblique view of the ball path member of the board unit of Figure 119 when viewed from the rear. Figure 126 is an explanatory diagram showing how ball jams are cleared in the board unit of Figure 119. Figure 127 is an explanatory diagram showing how linear illegal tools are prevented from entering the board unit of Figure 119. Figure 128 is an explanatory diagram showing how to remove debris from the board unit of Figure 119.

The board unit 700 of the third embodiment differs from the above-described board unit 620 and board unit 620A only in the configuration of the base unit 710, and is otherwise identical in configuration. Therefore, here, the same components as those of the above-described board unit 620 and board unit 620A are given the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions are omitted. Also, in Figures 119 to 128, the power supply unit 620c, dispensing control unit 620d, and interface unit 620e are not shown.

The board unit 700 of this embodiment replaces the board unit 620 or board unit 620A described above and is attached to the lower rear surface of the main frame base unit 500. The board unit 700 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500, below the game board mounting portion 501c; a base unit 710 attached to the rear surface of the main frame base 501 so as to cover a portion of the speaker unit 620a from behind; a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 710; a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c; and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to cover a portion of the payout control unit 620d from behind.

This base unit 700 is equipped with a first ball path 701 through which game balls B released downward from the game board 5 can pass, a second ball path 702 located behind the first ball path 701 and through which game balls b released downward from the game board 5 can pass, a first ball sensor 703 that detects game balls B passing through the first ball path 701, a second ball sensor 704 that detects game balls b passing through the second ball path 702, and a ball removal path 705 through which game balls B released from the lower ball removal path 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610 pass. The first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 each have an entrance that opens upward, and the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 detect game balls B one by one before discharging them downward.

In this embodiment, the game board 5 is configured so that game balls B received in the out port 1008, first sub-out port 2021, and second sub-out port 2022 circulate through the first ball path 701, and game balls B received in the general prize port 2001, first start port 2002, second start port 2004, large prize port 2005, and special prize port 2006 circulate through the second ball path 702. In other words, the game board 5 is configured so that out balls circulate through the first ball path 701 and safe balls circulate through the second ball path 702, and the first ball sensor 703 can count the number of all out balls, while the second ball sensor 704 can count the number of all safe balls. As a result, if fraudulent activity is committed against a prize slot (prize slot sensor) on the game board 5, such as the general prize slot 2001, first start slot 2002, second start slot 2004, large prize slot 2005, or special prize slot 2006, the number of safe balls on the game board 5 side will differ from the number of safe balls counted by the second ball sensor 704, making it possible to detect fraudulent activity against a prize slot.

In more detail, the base unit 710 of the board unit 700 comprises a front base 711 attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover part of the speaker box 623 from the rear; a rear base 712 attached to the rear side of the front base 711 and having a power supply unit 620c attached to its rear surface and a ball removal passage 705; a ball path member 713 provided between the front base 711 and the rear base 712 and having a first ball path 701 and a second ball path 702; a security cover 714 provided on the front base 711 and the rear base 712 in an openable and closable manner to eliminate clogging of game balls B in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 and to prevent the intrusion of illegal tools; a passage wall member 715 attached to the rear side of the rear base 712 and closing the rear end of the ball removal passage 705; and a frame relay board 716 attached to the rear side of the rear base 712. In the base unit 710, the front base 711, rear base 712, ball path member 713, and passage wall member 715 are made transparent.

The front base 711 is shaped like a long box that is open rearward and upward. The ball path member 713 is housed inside the front base 711 from the rear. The front wall of the front base 711 closes the front end of the first ball path 701 of the ball path member 713. The front base 711 has a ball receiving opening 711a that opens long in the left-right direction on the upper peripheral wall, and a release opening 711b that opens at a position to the right of the left-right center on the lower peripheral wall. When the ball path member 713 is housed inside the front base 711, the first ball path 701 and second ball path 702 of the ball path member 713 face upward from the ball receiving opening 711a. The front base 711 also supports a security cover 714 at the front end of the release opening 711b so that it can rotate around an axis extending left-right.

The rear base 712 is shaped like a long box that is open to the rear. The rear base 712 closes the rear end of the second ball path 702 of the ball path member 713 with its front wall. The rear base 712 has a ball removal path 705 that receives game balls B released from the lower ball removal path 610c of the lower full-ball path unit 610, guides them to the right when viewed from the front, and then guides them downward for discharge. The ball removal path 705 is located within the box-shaped rear base 712 and is entirely open to the rear. The rear end of the ball removal path 705 is closed by a path wall member 715. The portion of the ball removal path 705 of the rear base 712 located above the speaker box 623 (the portion on the left end when viewed from the front) is perforated in the front-to-rear direction, and is closed at the front end by the front base 711 and at the rear by the path wall member 715.

The rear base 712 also has a first discharge guide section 712a that receives a game ball B that has flowed through the first ball path 701 of the ball path member 713, guides it rearward, and then discharges it downward, and a second discharge guide section 712b that receives a game ball B that has flowed through the second ball path 702 of the ball path member 713, guides it rearward, and then discharges it downward. The inlet sides of the first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b protrude forward beyond the front wall of the rear base 712, with the inlet of the first discharge guide section 712a opening forward and the inlet of the second discharge guide section 712b opening upward. The outlets of the first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b are located at the same position in the front-to-back direction. The rear sides of the first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b are open rearward beyond the front wall, and the rear ends are closed by the passage wall member 715.

In the rear base 712, the outlets of the ball removal passage 705, first discharge guide section 712a, and second discharge guide section 712b are located to the left of the discharge opening 711b of the front base 711 when viewed from the front, and are arranged in order from left to right. Compared to the outlets of the first discharge guide section 712a and second discharge guide section 712b, the outlet of the ball removal passage 705 is wider forward at the front end and narrower rearward at the rear end (see Figure 120(b)). In other words, the outlet of the ball removal passage 705 is wider in the front-to-rear direction than the outlets of the first discharge guide section 712a and second discharge guide section 712b.

The ball path member 713 is inserted into the box-shaped front base 711 from the rear and accommodated therein. The ball path member 713 has a first ball path 701 and a second ball path 702. The ball path member 713 comprises a left wall portion 713a extending vertically downward from the upper end at the right end, an upper left shelf portion 713b sloping downward from the lower end of the left wall portion 713a toward the right, a stepped wall portion 713c extending vertically downward from the right end of the upper left shelf portion 713b, an upper right shelf portion 713d sloping downward from the lower end of the stepped wall portion 713c toward the right, a straightening wall portion 713e extending diagonally downward and left from the right end of the upper right shelf portion 713d, and a straightening wall portion 713e extending diagonally downward and left from the lower end of the straightening wall portion 713e. It has a lower shelf 713f that increases in height toward the right from a position spaced to the right of the upper right shelf 713d and extends further to the right than the upper right shelf 713d, a right wall 713g that extends vertically upward from the right end of the lower shelf 713f to approximately the same height as the upper end of the left wall 713a, an upper wall 713h that extends leftward from the upper end of the right wall 713g to the same position as the right end of the upper right shelf 713d, and a U-shaped groove wall 713i that is connected to the left end of the upper wall 713h and opens upward. The left end of groove wall 713i is located to the right of the center of the upper right shelf 713d in the left-right direction.

The ball path member 713 also has an upper lower wall portion 713j extending leftward from the lower end of the straightening wall portion 713e, a middle wall portion 713k extending vertically upward from the left end of the upper lower wall portion 713j to the underside of the upper left shelf portion 713b, a visor portion 713l extending leftward from the middle of the left side of the middle wall portion 713k, a hanging wall portion 713m extending vertically downward from near the left end of the lower shelf portion 713f, and a lower lower wall portion 713n extending leftward from the lower end of the hanging wall portion 713m parallel to the upper lower wall portion 713j. The portion of the lower lower wall portion 713n located below, between the lower end of the straightening wall portion 713e and the left end of the lower shelf portion 713f, is notched at the top and bottom to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through.

Furthermore, the ball path member 713 has multiple obstruction ribs 713o that extend downward from the underside of the upper left shelf portion 713b, lower shelf portion 713f, and upper wall portion 713h and are spaced apart in the left-right direction. The ball path member 713 also has a flat partition wall portion 713p that separates the space surrounded by the left wall portion 713a, upper left shelf portion 713b, step wall portion 713c, upper right shelf portion 713d, straightening wall portion 713e, lower shelf portion 713f, right wall portion 713g, groove wall portion 713i, upper lower wall portion 713j, middle wall portion 713k, hanging wall portion 713m, and lower lower wall portion 713n into front and rear portions.

Furthermore, the ball path member 713 has multiple notches 713q in the upper left shelf portion 713b, upper right shelf portion 713d, and lower shelf portion 713f, which are recessed from the front and rear ends of each toward the partition wall portion 713p. Each notch 713q is arranged so that when assembled to the board unit 700, a gap smaller in the front-to-rear direction than the radius of the game ball B is formed between the front base 711 and the rear base 712, and dirt and dust from within the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 can be discharged downward through this gap.

The ball path member 713 is located on the front surface of the partition wall portion 713p, between the flow straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, and has multiple guide ridges 713r extending to the left and right.

Furthermore, the ball path member 713 has a front sensor housing section 713s, which is surrounded by an upper lower wall section 713j, a hanging wall section 713m, and a lower lower wall section 713n, in front of the partition wall section 713p, and houses the first ball sensor 703; and a rear sensor housing section 713t, which is surrounded by an upper lower wall section 713j, a hanging wall section 713m, and a lower lower wall section 713n, in back of the partition wall section 713p, and houses the second ball sensor 704.

The first and second ball sensors 703 and 704 are housed in the front and rear sensor housing sections 713s and 713t, respectively, with their detection holes positioned below the area between the straightening wall section 713e and the lower shelf section 713f, i.e., with the detection holes facing right. Although not shown, the wiring cables extending from the first and second ball sensors 703 and 704 extend from the front and rear sensor housing sections 713s and 713t to the left of the middle wall section 713k.

The ball path member 713 is provided on the underside of the lower wall portion 713n in a position forward of the partition wall portion 713p and has a first ball guide portion 713u that protrudes downward and is open to the rear. When assembled to the base unit 700, the right half of the rear end of the first ball guide portion 713u is closed by the front face of the rear base 712, and the left half faces the entrance side of the first discharge guide portion 712a of the rear base 712. The first ball guide portion 713u can guide a game ball B that flows downward from between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f in front of the partition wall portion 713p to the right and then rearward, where it can be delivered to the first discharge guide portion 712a of the rear base 712.

On the other hand, behind the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713, below the portion of the lower wall portion 713n that opens downward (the portion of the detection hole of the second ball sensor 704 housed in the rear sensor housing portion 713t), there is an inlet that opens upward to the second discharge guide portion 712b of the rear base 712. This allows game balls B that flow downward from between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f behind the partition wall portion 713p to be handed over to the second discharge guide portion 712b of the rear base 712.

The right end of the upper left shelf 713b is located slightly to the right of the left end of the dissolving opening 711b in the front base 711. The right end of the upper right shelf 713d is located to the right of the right end of the dissolving opening 711b in the front base 711. The left end of the lower shelf 713f is located to the left of the left end of the dissolving opening 711b in the front base 711. Therefore, the area directly above the dissolving opening 711b in the front base 711 is covered by the flow-straightening wall 713e. The upper left shelf 713b, upper right shelf 713d, and lower shelf 713f are linearly inclined. On the other hand, the flow-straightening wall 713e is inclined in a curved manner, with its left end pointing vertically downward. The distance (height) between the flow-regulating wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f is sloped to narrow as it goes to the left, so that the left end is high enough for a single game ball B to pass through. This flow-regulating wall portion 713e and lower shelf portion 713f allows multiple game balls B to be regulated in a single line and guided downward.

As mentioned above, the vertical dimension between the flow straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f narrows toward the left (the downstream direction of the flow of game balls B). Depending on the volume of game balls B circulating, multiple game balls B may become caught between the flow straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, resulting in a ball jam (see Figure 126). Because the flow straightening wall portion 713e is located above the release opening 711b, if a ball jam occurs between the flow straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, the security cover 714 can be opened to open the release opening 711b. A rod-shaped tool can be inserted from below between the flow straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f through the release opening 711b and the notch 713q in the lower shelf portion 713f, and the tool can be used to poke the trapped game ball B and release the ball jam.

However, since the lower shelf portion 713f is provided with a notch 713q for clearing jammed balls and allowing dirt and dust to fall downward, there is a risk that a linear illegal tool such as a piano wire or catheter could be inserted from below through the notch 713q into the upper part of the lower shelf portion 713f (first ball path 701 or second ball path 702), and the tip of the illegal tool could then be extended upward from the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 or second ball path 702), thereby committing an illegal act on the game board 5 located above. The insertion of such illegal tools is not limited to the lower shelf portion 713f, and there is a similar risk in the upper left shelf portion 713b and upper right shelf portion 713d, which are also provided with the notch 713q.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the undersides of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h are provided with multiple flat, downward-extending blocking ribs 713o spaced apart in the left-right direction. Therefore, even if the tip of a linear illegal tool attempts to move along the undersides of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h, it abuts against the blocking ribs 713o, preventing the tip from moving and preventing further insertion of the illegal tool (see FIG. 127). This prevents the execution of illegal acts on the game board 5 through the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 and second ball path 702), reducing the burden on the amusement hall that installs this pachinko machine 1 and providing a pachinko machine 1 that is highly deterrent to illegal acts.

In addition, the areas to the right of the middle wall 713k on the upper right shelf 713d and upper left shelf 713b are closed off below and on both sides by the flow-regulating wall 713e, the upper lower wall 713j, and the middle wall 713k, which do not have the notch 713q. Therefore, unauthorized tools cannot be inserted from below through the notch 713q in the corresponding areas of the upper right shelf 713d and upper left shelf 713b, and unauthorized acts cannot be committed through the notch 713q in these areas.

As described above, the ball path member 713 has multiple notches 713q in the upper left shelf portion 713b, upper right shelf portion 713d, and lower shelf portion 713f, allowing debris and dust to be discharged downward through the notches 713q (see Figure 128). Debris and other debris discharged downward through the notches 713q located above the front sensor housing portion 713s and rear sensor housing portion 713t in the upper left shelf portion 713b is contained within the space surrounded by the straightening wall portion 713e, the upper lower wall portion 713j, and the middle wall portion 713k. This prevents debris and other debris from adhering to the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 housed in the front sensor housing portion 713s and rear sensor housing portion 713t.

In addition, a wiring cable is connected by a connector to the left end of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 housed in the front sensor housing section 713s and the rear sensor housing section 713t, and the wiring cable and connector protrude to the left from the front sensor housing section 713s and the rear sensor housing section 713t. In other words, the wiring cable and connector of the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 protrude to the left beyond the middle wall section 713k. In this middle wall portion 713k, a visor portion 713l extends to the left from above the front sensor housing portion 713s and the rear sensor housing portion 713t on the left side surface. Therefore, dirt and dust that falls downward through the cutout portion 713q formed in the upper left shelf portion 713b is guided to the left by the slope of the visor portion 713l, preventing it from falling onto the wiring cables and connectors of the first ball sensor 703 and second ball sensor 704, which protrude further to the left than the middle wall portion 713k, thereby avoiding problems caused by dirt, etc.

The base unit 710 forms a first ball path 701 by the left wall portion 713a, upper left shelf portion 713b, step wall portion 713c, upper right shelf portion 713d, straightening wall portion 713e, lower shelf portion 713f, right wall portion 713g, groove wall portion 713i, first ball guide portion 713u on the front side of the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713, and the first discharge guide portion 712a of the rear base 712. The base unit 710 also forms a second ball path 702 by the left wall portion 713a, upper left shelf portion 713b, step wall portion 713c, upper right shelf portion 713d, straightening wall portion 713e, lower shelf portion 713f, right wall portion 713g, groove wall portion 713i on the rear side of the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713, and the second discharge guide portion 712b of the rear base 712.

The security cover 714 is formed in a flat plate shape and is attached near the front end of the removal opening 711b of the front base 711, with its front end rotatable around a left-right axis. The security cover 714 also has an elastic locking portion 714a at its rear end that locks to the rear base 712. As shown in Figure 122, when the security cover 714 is in a horizontal position with the elastic locking portion 714a locked to the rear base 712, it closes the removal opening 711b. However, when the elastic locking portion 714a is released and the security cover 714 is rotated so that its rear end is positioned downward and it is in a vertical position, it opens the removal opening 711b. In other words, the security cover 714 can open and close the removal opening 711b.

When the security cover 714 is closed, it can close the clearance opening 711b in the front base 711, preventing a linear illegal tool from being inserted into the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 or second ball path 702) through the clearance opening 711b. Furthermore, when a ball jam occurs between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f of the ball path member 713, the security cover 714 can be opened to open the clearance opening 711b in the front base 711. Therefore, a rod-shaped tool can be inserted from below through the clearance opening 711b and the notch 713q in the lower shelf portion 713f between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f to clear the jammed game ball B. This ball jam clearing operation is performed with the main frame 4 open forward relative to the outer frame 2.

When the release opening 711b is open (vertical), the lower end (the end on the elastic locking portion 714a side) of this security cover 714 is located below the height (here, the height indicated by the dashed line in Figure 122) of the object at risk of contact (here, the connecting tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43 of the outer frame 2). Therefore, even if the main frame 4 is opened forward relative to the outer frame 2 to release game balls B stuck in the ball path member 713, and then an attempt is made to close the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 while the security cover 714 is still open, the open security cover 714 will come into contact with the object at risk of contact (the connecting tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43), preventing the main frame 4 from being closed. This prevents the security cover 714 from being left unclosed, ensuring that the security cover 714 is closed reliably and providing its security function.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the security cover 714 opens for some reason while the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2, opening the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 in that state will result in a hazardous object coming into contact with the open security cover 714 from the front. However, because the front end of the security cover 714 is attached so that it can rotate about a left-right axis, when a hazardous object comes into contact with it from the front, the security cover 714 rotates in the closing direction. This allows the main frame 4 to be opened without the security cover 714 getting caught on a hazardous object, preventing damage to the security cover 714 or the hazardous object.

In addition, in this embodiment, the security cover 714 is designed to remain closed because it is rare for game balls B to become stuck between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f. Therefore, the elastic locking portion 714a is designed to lock tightly to make it difficult to open.

The passage wall member 715 is attached to the rear side of the rear base 712 and closes the rear end of the ball removal passage 705, which is open to the rear. The passage wall member 715 also closes the rear-open portions of the rear base 712 at the outlet sides of the first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b, allowing game balls B that have circulated through the first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b to be discharged downward. Furthermore, the passage wall member 715 and the rear base 712 sandwich the frame relay board 716 and cover the rear side of the frame relay board 716.

The frame relay board 716 is sandwiched between the rear base 712 and the passage wall member 715. The frame relay board 716 relays the connections between the handle touch sensor 192, single button operation sensor 194, first ball sensor 703, and second ball sensor 704 of the door frame 3 and the main control board 1310.

As shown in FIG. 121(a), in the base unit 710 of this embodiment, the upper left shelf 713b and a portion of the upper right shelf 713d of the ball path member 713 face upward from the ball receiving opening 711a of the front base 711, and all game balls B released downward from the game board 5 can be received. Game balls B that fall onto the upper left shelf 713b or upper right shelf 713d through the ball receiving opening 711a roll to the right and flow down from the right end of the upper right shelf 713d onto the lower shelf 713f. Game balls B that flow down to the lower shelf 713f then roll leftward across the lower shelf 713f. At this time, if multiple game balls B are stacked vertically on the lower shelf 713f, they are broken up by the upper straightening wall 713e so that they form a single line as they move to the left.

After rolling leftward on the lower shelf 713f, the game ball B falls downward from the left end of the lower shelf 713f. If the game ball B is in front of the partition wall 713p, it is detected by the first ball sensor 703 housed in the front sensor housing 713s, passes through the first ball guide 713u, and is then discharged downward through the first discharge guide 712a of the rear base 712. On the other hand, if the game ball B is behind the partition wall 713p, it is detected by the second ball sensor 704 housed in the rear sensor housing 713t, and is then discharged downward through the second discharge guide 712b of the rear base 712.

In this way, in the base unit 710 of this embodiment, the game ball B flows through separate paths in front of and behind the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 and is discharged downward, with the portion in front of the partition wall portion 713p being the first ball path 701 and the portion behind the partition wall portion 713p being the second ball path 702. Therefore, a game ball B that falls from the game board 5 forward of the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 flows through the first ball path 701, is detected by the first ball sensor 703, and can be discharged downward. On the other hand, a game ball B that falls from the game board 5 behind the partition wall portion 713p of the ball path member 713 flows through the second ball path 702, is detected by the second ball sensor 704, and can be discharged downward.

In addition, the base unit 710 can discharge game balls B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full-tank ball path unit 610 to remove game balls B from the ball tank 552, etc., downward through the ball removal passage 705 of the rear base 712. Game balls B discharged downward from the first discharge guide section 712a (first ball path 701), second discharge guide section 712b (second ball path 702) of the base unit 710, and the ball removal passage 705 are delivered to a section on the island equipment side that collects game balls B (out receiving section, bucket, etc.).

In the base unit 710 of the board unit 700 of this embodiment, multiple notches 713q are provided in the upper left shelf portion 713b, the upper right shelf portion 713d, and the lower shelf portion 713f, allowing debris and dust to fall through the notches 713q and be removed from the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702. This prevents debris and the like from interfering with the flow of the game ball B and reduces the occurrence of ball jams, etc.

In addition, since the front base 711, rear base 712, ball path member 713, and passage wall member 715 are made transparent, by opening the door frame 3 forward relative to the main body frame 4 and removing the game board 5 from the main body frame 4, it is possible to easily check from above the base unit 710 (board unit 700) whether or not game ball B is stuck in the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 and second ball path 702). Furthermore, in the area of the ball path member 713 where the straightening wall portion 713e and lower shelf portion 713f align the game balls B in a row, a notch 713q is provided in the lower shelf portion 713f. Therefore, if balls become jammed between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f, by opening the main frame 4 forward relative to the outer frame 2 and opening the security cover 714, a rod-shaped tool can be inserted from below between the straightening wall portion 713e and the lower shelf portion 713f through the release opening 711b and the notch 713q, and the balls can be used to release the jam.

Furthermore, a downwardly open release port 711b is provided in the lower shelf portion 713f below the straightening wall portion 713e, and a security cover 714 is provided to close the release port 711b. As a result, ball jams can be cleared through the release port 711b as described above, and by keeping the release port 711b closed by the security cover 714 under normal conditions, it is possible to prevent linear illegal tools from being inserted into the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702 through the release port 711b, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against illegal activity.

In addition, the security cover 714, which opens and closes the release opening 711b, is opened and closed by rotating it around a left-right axis at the front end. Therefore, if an attempt is made to close the main frame 4 against the outer frame 2 while forgetting to close the security cover 714, the security cover 714 will come into contact with a hazardous object (the connecting tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43), making it impossible to close the main frame 4. This makes it clear that the security cover 714 has been left closed, allowing the security cover 714 to be closed reliably and providing its security function.

Furthermore, the undersides of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h are provided with multiple flat blocking ribs 713o that are spaced apart in the left-right direction and extend downward. Therefore, even if the tip of a linear illegal tool attempts to move along the undersides of the upper left shelf portion 713b, the lower shelf portion 713f, and the upper wall portion 713h, it will come into contact with the blocking rib 713o, preventing the tip from moving, thereby preventing further insertion of the illegal tool. This prevents the execution of illegal acts on the game board 5 through the ball path member 713 (first ball path 701 and second ball path 702), reducing the burden on the gaming hall that installs this pachinko machine 1 and providing a pachinko machine 1 that is highly deterrent to illegal acts.

Furthermore, as described above, the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 are configured to form a complex circulation path that meanders and cranks due to the first discharge guide section 712a and the second discharge guide section 712b of the rear base 712 and the ball path member 713. Therefore, even if a linear illegal tool is inserted from the exit side of the first discharge guide section 712a or the second discharge guide section 712b, the complex path can prevent the tool from entering the game board 5, thereby preventing the illegal tool from entering the game board 5 through the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702.

Furthermore, because the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 can detect (count) all game balls B released from the game board 5, there is no need to provide a structure for detecting game balls B discharged onto the game board 5 (for example, an out ball detection unit), which reduces the cost of the game board 5 and makes it possible to secure space on the game board 5 for the structure for detecting game balls B being discharged.By providing a presentation device in the secured space, the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) can be made even more entertaining to players.

In addition, because out balls circulate along the first ball path 701 and safe balls circulate along the second ball path 702, by comparing the number of safe balls counted on the game board 5 with the number of safe balls counted by the second ball sensor 704, it is possible to determine whether or not fraudulent activity is being committed on the game board 5, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 that has a strong deterrent effect against fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, if the payout rate (ball payout rate) per specified time calculated from the number of safe balls per specified time and the number of out balls per specified time is displayed so that it can be seen by the player, players will want many game balls B paid out, so if the displayed payout rate is high, they will immediately recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is likely to pay out many game balls B, making it easier for them to select the pachinko machine 1 to play on. Furthermore, if the payout rate is displayed so that it can be seen by the player, if a player commits fraudulent acts that result in many game balls B being paid out, the displayed payout rate will be higher than usual, making it easier for other players and staff at the amusement hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed to notice the fraudulent acts, which will discourage players from committing fraudulent acts and result in the pachinko machine 1 having a high deterrent effect against fraudulent acts.

Furthermore, if the payout rate calculated from the number of safe balls and the number of out balls is displayed in a location that is not visible to the player, amusement hall staff can see it and detect fraudulent activity for the same reasons as above. Furthermore, when performing maintenance on the pachinko machine 1, if the displayed payout rate differs from the normal value, this may indicate a malfunction within the pachinko machine 1 (for example, with the obstructing nail N, main control board 1310, payout control board 633, relay board, connector, wiring cable, various sensors, etc.), which allows for early response to the malfunction and reduces the burden on the amusement hall.

In addition, since the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 are separate from the ball removal passage 705 for discharging game balls B from the ball tank 552, the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 do not count removed game balls B. Therefore, the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 can accurately count only game balls B released from the game board 5.

In the above embodiment, out balls circulate along the first ball path 701 and safe balls circulate along the second ball path 702, but this is not limited to this. Safe balls may circulate along the first ball path 701 and out balls may circulate along the second ball path 702, or game ball B ejected from the game board 5 may circulate along either the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702, regardless of whether it is a safe ball or an out ball.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the release opening 711b is opened and closed by rotating the security cover 714, but this is not limited to this, and the release opening 711b may also be opened and closed by sliding it back and forth or left and right.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a single partition wall portion 713p is used to separate the game ball B released downward from the game board 5, allowing it to be discharged through one of two ball paths separated into the front and rear of the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702. However, this is not limited to this, and it is also possible to have three or more ball paths separated into the front and rear by multiple partition wall portions, and to discharge the game ball B released from the game board 5 downward through one of the ball paths.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 129 to 137. Figure 129 is a front view of the game board in a pachinko machine with the center gadgets and other features rendered opaque. Figure 130 is a perspective view of the game board in Figure 129 as seen from the front right, Figure 131 is a perspective view of the game board in Figure 129 as seen from the front left, and Figure 132 is a perspective view of the game board as seen from the rear. Figure 133 is a schematic explanatory diagram of the routing of wiring from the function display unit on the main control board. Figure 134 is a front view of the game board with the center gadgets and other features rendered transparent. Figure 135 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components as seen from the front, and Figure 136 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into its main components as seen from the rear. Figure 137 is a front view of the game board with the front unit cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to reveal the play area through which game balls circulate and the obstacle pins.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which a game ball B is inserted by the player operating the handle 195 of the handle unit 180. The game area 5a is equipped with a general prize opening 2001, a first start opening 2002, a gate 2003, a second start opening 2004, a large prize opening 2005, and a special prize opening 2006, which grant a player a predetermined benefit (e.g., the payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) when a game ball B is accepted or passes through the game area 5a. This game board 5 is designed for entertaining players to operate the handle 195 and circulate game balls B within the game area 5a so that the game balls B are accepted into or pass through the general prize opening 2001, first start opening 2002, gate 2003, second start opening 2004, large prize opening 2005, and special prize opening 2006 within the game area 5a.

The game board 5 comprises a front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the play area 5a and has a generally rectangular outline when viewed from the front; a plate-shaped game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and defines the rear end of the play area 5a; and a plurality of magnetic sensors 1050 that detect any illicit magnetic fields within the play area 5a. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see Figure 137, etc.) that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 that is within the play area 5a.

The game board 5 also includes a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear of the game panel 1100, and a main control unit 1300 attached to the rear of the board holder 1200 and having a main control board 1310 (see Figure 169, etc.) that controls the game content played by shooting game ball B into the game area 5a.

The gaming board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player; a peripheral control unit 1500 that is located behind the gaming panel 1100; an effect display device 1600 that is located in the center of the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front and is capable of displaying specified effect images; a panel relay board 1710 that is located behind the gaming panel 1100 and relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510; a front unit 2000 that is attached to the front of the gaming panel 1100; and a rear unit 3000 that is attached to the rear of the gaming panel 1100.

The performance display device 1600 is attached to the rear face of the rear unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear face of the performance display device 1600. A panel relay board 1710 is attached behind the performance display device 1600 on the rear face of the rear unit 3000. The panel relay board 1710 relays the connections between the main control board 1310 and the general prize opening sensor 3001, first start opening sensor 3002, second start opening sensor 2401, gate sensor 2801, large prize opening sensor 2402, special prize opening sensor 2601, V prize opening sensor 3003, losing opening sensor 3004, start opening solenoid 2412, attacca solenoid 2414, special prize opening solenoid 2612, V distribution solenoid 3007, magnetic sensor 1050, etc.

The front unit 2000 comprises a plurality of (three in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open to receive game balls B that have been shot into the game area 5a, a first starting opening 2002 that is always open to receive game balls B at a different position in the game area 5a from the plurality of general winning openings 2001, a gate 2003 that is always open to receive game balls B at a different position in the game area 5a, a second starting opening 2004 that can receive game balls B depending on the result of a regular lottery that is drawn when game balls B are received by gate 2003, and a gate 2004 that can receive game balls B at the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. a large prize opening 2005 that can accept game ball B depending on the result of a first or second special lottery drawn by accepting game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004; a special prize opening 2006 that can accept game ball B depending on the result of a first or second special lottery drawn by accepting game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004; a V prize opening 2007 and a losing opening 2008 that give the game ball B accepted into the special prize opening 2006 an opportunity to be accepted; and multiple magnetic sensors 1050 that detect magnetic fields acting fraudulently within the game area 5a.

The front unit 2000 also includes a start port unit 2100 which is attached directly above the bottom end of the play area 5a in the horizontal center of the play area 5a and has a first start port 2002; a side unit 2200 which is attached to the left of the start port unit 2100 as viewed from the front, along the inner rail 1002, and has three general winning ports 2001; an upper left side unit 2300 which is attached slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 as viewed from the front; a first attacker unit 2400 which is located to the right of the start port unit 2100 as viewed from the front, in the lower right corner of the play area 5a as viewed from the front, and has a second start port 2004, a large winning port 2005, and a first sub-out port 2021; and a frame-shaped center device 2500 which is located above the start port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200, and slightly above the center of the play area 5a as viewed from the front.

The front unit 2000 also includes a second attacca unit 2600, which is located above the first attacca unit 2400 to the right of the center reel 2500 and has a reel winning opening 2006; a side right middle unit 2700, which is located above the second attacca unit 2600 and has one general winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out opening 2022; and a gate member 2800, which is located above the side right middle unit 2700 and has a gate 2003.

The first attacker unit 2400 is equipped with a second start opening sensor 2401 that detects game ball B received in the second start opening 2004, and a large prize opening sensor 2402 that detects game ball B received in the large prize opening 2005. The second attacker unit 2600 is equipped with a special prize opening sensor 2601 that detects game ball B received in the special prize opening 2006. The gate member 2800 is equipped with a gate sensor 2801 that detects game ball B passing through the gate 2003.

The rear unit 3000 comprises a rear box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 on the gaming panel 1100, is box-shaped with an open front and has a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, and a locking mechanism (not shown) attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 for detachably attaching the performance display device 1600. The rear unit 3000 also has a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects game balls B received in the general winning opening 2001 provided in the front unit 2000, a first starting opening sensor 3002 that detects game balls B received in the first starting opening 2002, a V winning opening sensor 3003 that detects game balls B that are received in the special winning opening 2006 and then allocated to the V winning opening 2007, and a losing opening sensor 3004 that detects game balls B that are received in the special winning opening 2006 and then allocated to the losing opening 2008 (see Figure 145, etc.).

The rear unit 3000 also includes a V prize opening door 3006 that can move back and forth to open and close the V prize opening 2007, and a V distribution solenoid 3007 that moves the V prize opening door 3006 back and forth to distribute game balls B received in the special prize opening 2006 to either the V prize opening 2007 or the losing opening 2008.

Furthermore, the rear unit 3000 comprises a rear front performance unit 3100 located near the front end of the rear box 3010, a rear upper performance unit 3200 located at the top of the rear box 3010 behind the rear front performance unit 3100, and a rear lower performance unit 3300 located at the bottom of the rear box 3010 below the rear upper performance unit.

[5-1. Front components]
The front component 1000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 138 and 139. Figure 138(a) is a perspective view of the front component and game panel of the game board as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front component and game panel as seen from the back. Figure 139(a) is a front view showing an enlarged view of the upper right corner of the front component and game panel, (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the soot line in (a), and (c) is an exploded perspective view of (a) disassembled into its main components as seen from the front.

The front component 1000 is formed to be entirely transparent. The front component 1000 has an approximately square outer shape when viewed from the front, and an approximately circular inner shape that penetrates in the front-to-rear direction, with the inner periphery of the inner shape defining the outer periphery of the play area 5a. The front component 1000 is equipped with an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc from the lower end toward the left of the center in the left-to-right direction in a front view, passing the upper center in the left-to-right direction in a front view, in a clockwise circumferential direction, an inner rail 1002 that is positioned inside the front component 1000 approximately along the outer rail 1001, and extends in an arc from the lower center in the left-to-right direction in a front view to the upper left diagonal direction in a front view, and an out guide portion 1003 that is formed at the lowest position of the play area 5a on the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front, and is sloped downward toward the rear.

The component 1000 also includes a lower right rail 1004 that slopes linearly from the right end of the out guide section 1003 when viewed from the front to near the right edge of the component 1000, with the right end being slightly higher; a right rail 1005 that extends from the right end of the lower right rail 1004 along the right edge of the component 1000 to below the upper end of the outer rail 1001, with the upper part curved inward of the component 1000; and a collision stop section 1006 that connects the upper end of the right rail 1005 to the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and against which a game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact.

The component 1000 also includes a backflow prevention member 1007 that is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and can rotate only between a closed position in which it extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 to close the gap between it and the outer rail 1001, and an open position in which it rotates clockwise when viewed from the front to open the gap between it and the outer rail 1001, and is biased by a spring (not shown) to return to the closed position.

Furthermore, the front component 1000 is provided with an outlet 1008 that penetrates from front to back at the rear end of the out guide section 1003, located at the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front within the frame. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guide section 1003 passes through the outlet 1008 and is discharged to the rear of the front component 1000 (game panel 1100).

The component 1000 also has security recesses 1009 recessed rearward from the front end at the outside of the areas extending approximately perpendicularly from the lower ends of the outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002, the underside of the out guide section 1003 and lower right rail 1004, and the outside of the right rail 1005. When the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed against the main frame 4, the rear projection 172 of the security cover 170 on the door frame 3 is inserted into this security recess 1009. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is bent in a complex manner by the rear projection 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Therefore, even if an attempt is made to insert an illegal tool such as piano wire into the game area 5a between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000 from below the front of the game board 5, the attempt will be blocked by the rear projection 172 and the security recess 1009, preventing the illegal tool from entering the game area 5a.

The component 1000 also has a notch 1010 cut upward from the bottom end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1010 coincides with the notch 1122 of the gaming panel 1100, so that when the gaming board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and lower full payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 pass through the notch 1010 and the notch 1122 and face forward.

Furthermore, the component 1000 is provided with a function display unit mounting portion 1011 formed in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, to which the function display unit 1400 is attached, and a stamp attachment portion 1012 formed in the lower left corner.

In addition, the front component 1000 is almost entirely transparent, allowing the game panel 1100 located at the rear to be seen from the front.

As shown in FIG. 139, the component 1000 is recessed rearward from the front surface in a predetermined area along the right rail 1005 from the impact stopper 1006 in the upper right corner when viewed from the front, and is equipped with a spec sticker attachment section 1021 to which a spec sticker 1020 displaying the specifications of the pachinko machine 1 is attached. ...

The spec sticker attachment section 1021 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer shape of the spec sticker 1020, and is recessed rearward to a depth (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm) greater than the thickness of the spec sticker 1020 (see Figure 139 (b)). The spec sticker attachment section 1021 has a horizontally extending portion at the bottom end and a straight portion extending vertically upward from the right end of the horizontally extending portion, which are set as contact surfaces for attaching the spec sticker 1020.

The insertion pin 1022 extends rearward from the rear surface of the spec sticker attachment portion 1021 to the same position as the rear end of the front component 1000. The impact stop portion 1006 is positioned by inserting the insertion pin 1022.

The separation hole 1023 penetrates the component 1000 from the front to the rear. The separation hole 1023 is circular and extends front to back with a constant inner diameter. When assembled to the gaming board 5, the front side of this separation hole 1023 is closed by the spec sticker 1020 affixed to the spec sticker attachment portion 1021, and the rear side is closed by the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, forming a closed space within the separation hole 1023. As shown in the figure, the separation hole 1023 is located near the edge of the spec sticker attachment portion 1021 (spec sticker 1020).

In this embodiment, the separation hole 1023 has an inner diameter within the range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 1023 were any smaller, the diameter of the rod-shaped separation member (tool) inserted into the separation hole 1023 would be smaller, making it more likely to bend and potentially unable to sufficiently press against the spec seal 1020. On the other hand, if the separation hole 1023 were any larger, the spec seal 1020 would bend at the separation hole 1023, potentially deteriorating the appearance of the spec seal 1020.

With the preceding component 1000 of this embodiment, if the spec sticker 1020 cannot be properly attached to the spec sticker attachment portion 1021 during the manufacture of the pachinko machine 1, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole 1023 from the rear of the preceding component 1000 and the tip of the rod can be used to press the spec sticker 1020 from rear to front, causing the edge of the spec sticker 1020 to curl forward and be removed. The worker can then pull the curled portion to easily remove the spec sticker 1020 from the spec sticker attachment portion 1021, allowing the spec sticker 1020 to be reattached.

In addition, with the component 1000 and the gaming panel 1100 separated, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole 1023 from the rear of the component 1000 and the tip of the rod can be used to press the spec sticker 1020 from behind, making it easy to remove the spec sticker 1020 from the spec sticker attachment portion 1021, thereby facilitating the replacement of the spec sticker 1020 when changing models.

Furthermore, as described above, when the component 1000 and the gaming panel 1100 are separated, the specification sticker 1020 can be easily removed from the specification sticker attachment portion 1021 using the separation hole 1023, making it easier to separate the components of the pachinko machine 1 by material, and reducing the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, by attaching the spec sticker 1020 to the spec sticker attachment section 1021, the separation hole 1023 can be hidden from the front, which prevents the separation hole 1023 from spoiling the appearance and makes it difficult for players to notice the existence of the separation hole 1023, making it difficult for players to plot fraudulent acts using the separation hole 1023.

In addition, when assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the separation hole 1023 is closed from the rear by the game panel 1100 attached to the rear of the front component 1000 to which the specification sticker 1020 is affixed. As there is no hole that passes all the way to the rear as in conventional pachinko machines, it is possible to prevent linear illegal tools such as piano wire from being inserted into the game board 5 through the hole, thereby preventing illegal acts.

In addition, because the separation hole 1023 is closed from the rear by the gaming panel 1100, even if an illegal tool is inserted from the front through the specification seal 1020 and into the separation hole 1023, the gaming panel 1100 (panel board 1110) can prevent it from being inserted (entered) any further rearward. This prevents the illegal tool from entering the gaming board 5 from the front through the separation hole 1023, preventing illegal acts from being committed. In addition, because an illegal tool pierces the specification seal 1020 and leaves a mark on it, illegal acts can be discouraged, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against illegal acts.

In the above embodiment, the separation hole 1023 is provided in the spec sticker attachment section 1021, but this is not limited to this. The separation hole may also be provided in the area where a sticker is attached, such as the certificate stamp attachment section 1012.

[5-2. Game Panel]
The game panel 1100 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figure 138 etc. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, and a front unit 2000 and a rear unit 3000 are attached to it. The game panel 1100 comprises a flat panel board 1110 made of transparent synthetic resin and having an outer periphery slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 that holds the outer periphery of the panel board 1110, is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, and has the rear unit 3000 attached to its rear surface. A plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (see Figure 137 etc.).

The panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 is formed from a synthetic resin board such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic board such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel board 1110 is thinner than the panel holder, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) to be able to sufficiently hold the obstacle nails N planted on the front surface and the front unit 2000 attached. In this embodiment, the panel board 1110 is formed from a transparent synthetic resin board.

The panel board 1110 is located at the lowest position within the play area 5a, and is recessed upward from the bottom end at a position corresponding to the outlet 1008 of the front component 1000. The panel board 1110 also has multiple openings 1112 that penetrate from front to back and are used to attach the front unit 2000.

Although not shown, the panel plate 1110 is equipped with multiple positioning holes formed as round holes and short elongated holes that penetrate from front to back, and multiple engagement steps that are spaced apart in the left-right direction on the upper and lower edges and are formed with a thin plate thickness. The positioning holes are used to position the panel with the panel holder 1120 by inserting protruding pins (not shown) of the panel holder 1120. The engagement steps are used to engage with engagement claws (not shown) or engagement pieces (not shown) of the panel holder 1120, allowing the panel plate 1110 to be detachably attached to the panel holder 1120.

As shown in Figure 138, the panel board 1110 has a large opening 1112 for attaching the center gadget 2500, which is offset to the upper right of the center when viewed from the front. This gives the panel board 1110 a frame-like shape, and the width perpendicular to the direction in which the game balls B flow (the circumferential direction of the frame) when viewed from the front is wide enough to accommodate multiple game balls B on the left and below the center, and narrow enough to accommodate multiple game balls B on the upper side.

The panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100 has a roughly rectangular outer shape large enough to encompass the panel board 1110, and is thicker than the panel board 1110 (approximately 20 mm in this embodiment). The panel holder 1120 is made of transparent synthetic resin (e.g., thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding step (not shown) that is roughly the same size as the panel board 1110 and recessed from the front side to the rear side, and a through hole 1121 that penetrates the holding step in the front-to-rear direction and is roughly the same size as the gaming area 5a.

The panel holder 1120 also has a notch 1122 cut upward from the bottom end in the lower left corner when viewed from the front. This notch 1122 is formed to match the notch 1010 of the previous component 1000, so that when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and lower full payout passage 610b of the lower full ball path unit 610 pass through the notch 1010 and the notch to face forward.

Furthermore, the panel holder 1120 has an outlet recess 1123 that extends upward from the bottom end to a position corresponding to the outlet 1008 and is recessed from the rear surface toward the front. The upper part of the outlet recess 1123 is connected to the outlet 1008.

Although not shown, the panel holder 1120 also includes a plurality of protruding pins that protrude forward from the holding step and are inserted into a plurality of positioning holes in the panel plate 1110, three engagement claws that are positioned outside the holding step and elastically engage with engagement step sections on the upper and lower left sloping portions of the panel plate 1110, and a pair of engagement pieces that protrude upward from the lower outer side of the holding step and respectively engage with two engagement step sections on the lower edge of the panel plate 1110. The panel holder 1120 can be removably attached with the panel plate 1110 housed in the holding step by engaging the engagement step sections on the lower edge of the panel plate 1110 with the engagement pieces from an upper front diagonal, and then moving the upper part of the panel plate 1110 rearward to elastically engage the engagement step sections on the upper and lower left sloping portions with the engagement claws. At this time, the protruding pins of the panel holder 1120 are inserted into the positioning holes of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 is positioned at a predetermined position relative to the panel holder 1120.

This gaming panel 1100, along with the front component 1000 attached to the front, is formed transparently. This reduces the visibility of the boundaries of the gaming area 5a when assembled to the gaming board 5, giving the player a sense of openness, and while the actual size of the gaming area 5a remains unchanged, it makes the gaming area 5a appear larger (wider) to the player.

In addition, because the gaming panel 1100, along with the front component 1000, is transparent, light from the effect display device 1600, front unit 2000, rear unit 3000, etc. can be reflected or refracted forward (towards the player) to appear to be emitting light, further enhancing the overall decorativeness of the gaming board 5.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The board holder 1200 in the gaming board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 135 and 136. The board holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape that is open at the top and front, and the bottom surface is inclined so that it becomes lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The board holder 1200 has an ejection section 1201 that is cut out from the front end toward the rear in the center in the left-right direction of the bottom surface. When assembled to the gaming board 5, this board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear of the gaming panel 1100 from the bottom and rear, and a main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 is attached to the rear surface.

When the board holder 1200 is assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the discharge section 1201 is located directly above the discharged ball receiving section 628 of the base unit 620b in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. This allows it to receive all game balls B discharged to the rear of the game panel 1100 through the outlet 1008, as well as game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and rear unit 3000, and discharge them from the discharge section 1201 formed on the bottom surface to the discharged ball receiving section 628 below or the out ball passage 663 (see Figure 115). Game balls B discharged to the out ball passage 663 are detected (counted) one by one by the out sensor 664.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 135 and 136. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see Figure 169) that controls the game content and the payout of game balls B, a setting change board 1311 (see Figure 133) that can set game performance, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 and is attached to the board holder 1200.

The main control board box 1320 is composed of a cover and a base. The cover and base are made of polycarbonate resin and molded to be transparent. The internal space formed by the cover and base can accommodate the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311. Because the cover and base are molded from polycarbonate resin and are transparent, the condition of the front and back sides of the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 (whether or not unauthorized tampering has occurred or whether or not an unauthorized IC is installed) can be confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320. In addition, the main control board box 1320 is equipped with multiple sealing mechanisms corresponding to the cover and base, respectively. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism must be destroyed to open the main control board box 1320, leaving traces of the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by checking the traces of opening and closing, unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be detected, providing a strong deterrent against unauthorized acts on the main control board 1310.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635, peripheral control board 1510, and setting change board 1311. The main control board 1310 is also connected to the function display unit 1400, general prize opening sensor 3001, first start opening sensor 3002, gate sensor 2801, second start opening sensor 2401, large prize opening sensor 2402, special prize opening sensor 2601, V prize opening sensor 3003, loss opening sensor 3004, start opening solenoid 2412, attacca solenoid 2414, special prize opening solenoid 2612, V distribution solenoid 3007, magnetic sensor 1050, etc.

The setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 is equipped with a setting key switch 1311a that can change and confirm the setting values of the pachinko machine 1, a setting switch button 1311b that can select and switch setting values, and a setting change permission lamp 1311c that indicates when changing the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 is permitted. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connected (inter-board connection) to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 (the connectors SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 may also be electrically connected via a harness). This connector connection (inter-board connection) allows signals from the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switch button 1311b to be electrically connected to the main control board 1310. The vertical distance between the right and left sides of the setting change board 1311 is approximately the same as the vertical distance between the right and left sides of the main control board 1310, and its horizontal distance is shorter than the horizontal distance of the main control board 1310, and the center line passing through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the main control board 1310 coincides with the center line passing through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the setting change board 1311.

Connector SMCN of setting change board 1311 is located along the right edge of setting change board 1311, with the center of its vertical distance dimension on the center line, while connector MSCN of main control board 1310 is located along the left edge of main control board 1310, with the center of its vertical distance dimension on the center line. Located below the center line of setting change board 1311 is setting key switch 1311a, which has a setting key cylinder into which a setting key is inserted and rotated; located above the center line of setting change board 1311 is setting switch button 1311b, which has a pressable operation portion; and located on the center line of setting change board 1311 and to the upper left of setting key switch 1311a (below and left of setting switch button 1311b) is setting change permission lamp 1311c, which can emit light in a single color (e.g., red), located above the center line of setting change board 1311 and to the upper left of setting key switch 1311a (below and left of setting switch button 1311b). A setting display 1310g consisting of a single 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dot) is located above the center line of the main control board 1310 near the connector MSCN. A base monitor 1310h consisting of a row of six 7-segment LED displays with a decimal point (so-called dot) is located below the center line of the main control board 1310 from the center to the right edge. A RAM clear switch 1310f having a push-button is located near the center of the bottom edge of the main control board 1310. Note that the RAM clear switch 1310f is not limited to being installed on the main control board 1310, and may also be located on the dispensing control board 633 or the power supply board 630. In other words, the RAM clear switch 1310f may be located on any one of the main control board 1310, the dispensing control board 633, or the power supply board 630.

In this embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is in its OFF initial position when it is ready to insert a setting key into the socket formed in the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a (for example, a position where the length of the rectangular socket is aligned vertically). When the setting key cylinder is in its initial position, the setting key can be inserted into the socket and removed from the socket. Note that in this embodiment, the depth dimension of the setting key switch 1311a is designed to prevent the setting key from interfering with or being damaged by components of other pachinko machines (or components of the island equipment) installed back-to-back on the island equipment of the amusement hall, even if the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2 with the setting key still inserted in the socket.

The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to perform the first ON operation, turning the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON position, and this setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Furthermore, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation, turning the setting key switch 1311a to the determination key ON position, and this determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can also be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the enter key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. In this embodiment, the two completely different functions of the setting key ON function and the decision key ON function can be achieved by the setting key switch 1311a alone, depending on the direction in which the setting key cylinder is rotated, and the setting key ON operation and the decision key ON operation can be performed together using the setting key switch 1311a alone.

The front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the pressing operation portion of the setting switch button 1311b, and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f are exposed through openings formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320, respectively. However, to prevent wires or the like from entering through the "gaps" formed in the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the pressing operation portion of the setting switch button 1311b, and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f and their corresponding openings, wire intrusion prevention portions are molded into the cover body for each of these openings to prevent wires or the like from entering through the "gaps" formed in the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the pressing operation portion of the setting switch button 1311b, and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f and their corresponding openings, and thereby tampering with the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310. Although the setting display 1310g and the base monitor 1310h are housed in an internal space formed by the cover body and the base body and cannot be touched at all, because the cover body is molded transparent as described above, the setting values displayed by the setting display 1310g and the calculation results displayed by the base monitor 1310h can be seen through the cover body. Here, the setting display 1310g is capable of displaying the setting values of the pachinko machine 1, while the base monitor 1310h is capable of displaying the calculation results of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered (the number of prize balls to the number of balls entered), but it is also possible to provide only the base monitor 1310h and have it serve both the function of displaying the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 and the function of displaying the calculation results of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered. In such cases, the base monitor 1310h displays the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 when the setting values can be changed (change permitted state) or when a confirmation display for the setting values is being displayed (confirmation display state), but displays the calculated ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered when the change permitted state or confirmation display state is not in effect. This allows for a reduction in the number of parts and costs.

In order to prevent unauthorized tampering, the wiring pattern through which the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, the wiring pattern through which the decision key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, the wiring pattern through which the OFF signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and the wiring pattern through which the signal from the setting switch button 1311b is transmitted are routed so that they are not close to each other (are spaced apart from each other) on the setting change board 1311, and the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also spaced apart, so that on the main control board 1310 In addition, the wiring patterns through which various signals from the setting key switch 1311a are transmitted (i.e., the wiring pattern through which the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, the wiring pattern through which the decision key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and the wiring pattern through which the OFF signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted) and the wiring pattern through which signals from the setting switching button 1311b are transmitted are also formed so that they do not come close to each other (are spaced apart from each other), and the wiring patterns through which signals from the RAM clear switch 1310f are also formed so that they do not come close to each other (are spaced apart from each other).

A brief explanation of the setting key switch 1311a, setting switch button 1311b, and setting display 1310g will be provided below. First, a brief explanation of changing the setting value will be provided, followed by a brief explanation of displaying and confirming the current setting value. Note that the setting key is an important key that can be used to change the setting value as well as check the current setting value. Therefore, only a limited number of people, including the arcade manager, are permitted to possess it, and it is limited to two or three people.

When changing the setting value, the "predetermined setting value change permission condition" must be met: when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power outage, the main frame 4 must be open relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key must be inserted into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder must be rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, turning the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON position. In other words, the person actually changing the setting value must first ensure that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), then open the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a and rotate it 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, turning the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON position, and powering on the pachinko machine 1. The above-mentioned "predetermined setting value change permission condition" may further include an operation signal being input by operating the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f. In other words, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power outage, the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, a setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, turning the setting key switch 1311a into setting key ON mode, and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated. This "predetermined setting value change permission condition" may be met to allow a change to the setting value.

The person changing the setting value must first ensure that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), then open the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2, and then insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a and rotate the setting key cylinder clockwise 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation, turning the setting key switch 1311a to setting key ON. Next, the power switch 630a in Figure 7 is operated to turn on the power to the pachinko machine 1. This causes a setting key ON signal to be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a displays the current setting value stored in a specific area of its built-in RAM (the value set among setting values 1 to 6 at the time the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON for the first time) on the setting display 1310g, and switches the setting change permission lamp 1311c from off to on.

When a person changing the setting value presses the pressing operation portion of the setting switch button 1311b, a detection signal from the setting switch button 1311b on the setting change board 1311 is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a on the main control board 1310. Each time a person changing the setting value presses the pressing operation portion of the setting switch button 1311b, the main control MPU 1310a increases the current setting value by one based on the detection signal from the setting switch button 1311b on the setting change board 1311. When it reaches the maximum setting value of 6, it returns to the initial setting value of 1, increases the value by one again, and displays the setting value on the setting display 1310g. Alternatively, the setting value may be changed using the RAM clear switch 1310f without providing the setting change switch button 1311b. In this case, when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, a detection signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the main control MPU 1310a. Each time the person changing the setting value presses the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the main control MPU 1310a increases the current setting value by one based on the detection signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f. When the maximum setting value of 6 is reached, the setting value returns to the initial value of 1, and then increases by one again, and the setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g.

When a person changing a setting value decides on a setting value, they rotate the setting key cylinder 120 degrees counterclockwise (i.e., rotate the setting key switch 1311a 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON back to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF) to turn it OFF, and then rotate it another 60 degrees counterclockwise) to perform a second ON operation, turning the setting key switch 1311a to the enter key ON. This enter key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the changed and decided setting value in a specific area of the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a.

In addition, when the setting key cylinder is rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise (i.e., when the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), a confirmation key ON signal can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.In this case, after pressing the pressing operation section of the setting switch button 1311b to display the setting value on the setting display 1310g, the setting value can be confirmed and the setting key can be removed from the setting key cylinder simply by turning the setting key switch 1311a OFF, improving operability.

The person changing the setting value turns off the setting key switch 1311a by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the decision key was pressed back to its original position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a). This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. This causes the main control MPU 1310a to switch the setting display 1310g from displaying the setting value to not displaying it, and switch the setting change permission lamp 1311c from lit to extinguished. In other words, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise so that it returns from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the Enter key is pressed to its original position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). This fulfills the "predetermined setting value change termination condition" of turning the setting key switch 1311a OFF, thereby ending the period during which the setting value can be changed (the period during which the setting value can be changed).

The person changing the setting value removes the setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and closes the main frame 4 against the outer frame 2, completing the setting value change procedure.

To display the currently set values, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power outage, the main frame 4 must be open relative to the outer frame 2, a setting key must be inserted into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder must be rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON position, thereby fulfilling the "predetermined setting value display permission condition." In other words, the person actually displaying the currently set values must first confirm that the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (a state in which power has been restored after a power outage or momentary interruption), then open the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a, rotate it 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, and turn the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON position.

The person checking and displaying the currently set setting value must first confirm that the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (a state in which power has been restored after a power outage or momentary power outage), then release the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2. Next, they insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a and rotate it 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a setting key ON. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a displays the current setting value (the value set among setting values 1 to 6 at the time the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON) stored in a specific area of its built-in RAM on the setting display 1310g. At this time, the setting change permission lamp 1311c remains off, and even if a person who wants to confirm and display the currently set setting value presses the pressing operation section of the setting switch button 1311b, the setting value will not change at all in response to this pressing operation, and the content displayed on the setting display 1310g will not change either.

When the person checking and displaying the currently set values has finished checking the currently set values, they turn the setting key switch 1311a OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON back to its original position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1310a switches the setting display 1310g from a display state of the setting value to a non-display state. That is, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise so that the setting key switch 1311a is returned from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the Enter key was pressed to its original position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns OFF the setting key switch 1311a), thereby fulfilling the "predetermined setting value display termination condition" of turning OFF the setting key switch 1311a, thereby ending the period during which the setting value can be confirmed (the period during which the setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g).

The person who wishes to confirm and display the currently set value removes the setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and closes the main frame 4 against the outer frame 2, completing the process of confirming and displaying the currently set value.

As described above, the predetermined setting value change permission conditions require that, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power outage, the main frame 4 be opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key be inserted into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key cylinder be rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation to turn the setting key ON, and the pressing operation section of the RAM clear switch 1310f be operated to input an operation signal. Meanwhile, the predetermined setting value display permission conditions require, as described above, that, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power outage, the main frame 4 be opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key be inserted into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key cylinder be rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation to turn the setting key ON. In this way, the predetermined setting value change permission condition and the predetermined setting value display permission condition have a common requirement in that the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key ON. The setting value change permission conditions are that when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power outage, a setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key ON, and the pressing operation section of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated to input an operation signal. The setting value display permission conditions are that when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power outage, a setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key ON; and the main frame 4 being open relative to the outer frame 2 may not be included in the setting value change permission conditions and setting value display permission conditions.

To briefly explain the setting values, "setting values" can change the probability for determining whether or not a jackpot has been won by lottery, the probability for determining whether or not a small jackpot has been won by lottery, the probability for determining whether or not a jackpot has been won by lottery when transitioning from a special mode to a normal mode, the allocation rate to areas that are advantageous to the player, etc., and are preset probabilities (degrees of advantage) that are advantageous to the player (i.e., that increase the number of game balls B that the player can acquire). In this embodiment, setting values 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 are prepared in advance as setting values, and the probabilities (degrees of advantage) that are advantageous to the player are preset from setting value 1 to setting value 6. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with set values (for example, a jackpot determination table that specifies the ratio of jackpot determination values indicating a jackpot win, a jackpot pattern determination table that specifies the ratio of determination values for determining a jackpot pattern, a small win determination table that specifies the ratio of small win determination values indicating a small win, a small win pattern determination table that specifies the ratio of determination values for determining a small win pattern, a normal mode transition determination table that specifies the ratio of determination values for transitioning from a special mode to a normal mode, etc.), or selects various tables used in various allocation rates associated with set values (for example, an allocation table that specifies the allocation time, a block that manages the drive of an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid, etc.). In the various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with set values, various determination values are allocated at a predetermined ratio. The various tables used in the various lottery determinations are set so that at least some of the values differ from each other, and the various tables used in the various allocation rates are set so that at least some of the values differ from each other, or so that the values differ based on the relationship between a table corresponding to a block that manages the drive of one electric drive source and a table corresponding to a block that manages the drive of another electric drive source. Furthermore, while the above-mentioned setting values are six setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 6, the range may be smaller or larger. For example, there may be four setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 4, or eight setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 8.

In addition to displaying the setting values as described above, the setting display 1310g also checks the contents of its own built-in RAM when the main control MPU 1310a restores power to determine whether there is an abnormality. If it determines that there is an abnormality, and if the main control side power-off processing did not end normally when the power was cut off, it displays an error message indicating that there is an abnormality (or that the contents stored in its own built-in RAM are unreliable). In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error message.

Next, to briefly explain the base monitor 1310h, the base monitor 1310h counts the number of balls entered and the number of balls paid out (number of prize balls), which increase as the game progresses, and displays a base value (the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls entered). Of the game balls B released into the game area 5a, those recovered by the outlet 1008 are detected by the out sensor 664 (see Figure 169, etc.), and this detection signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the panel relay board 1710.

The main control MPU 1310a calculates the ratio of the number of payouts (the number of game balls B paid out (awarded) as prize balls when balls enter a prize hole) to the number of balls entered (the number of game balls B that enter a prize hole (winning hole, out hole) located in the game area 5a defined on the game board 5), and stores the calculation result as a base value in a specific area of the built-in RAM and displays it on the base monitor 1310h. The formula for calculating the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is "base value = (number of payouts ÷ number of balls entered) × 100." For example, if the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is too high, it is possible that only the balls are entering prize holes that are the target of prize balls being paid out when balls enter. By monitoring the information displayed on the base monitor 1310h, it is possible to determine whether balls are being entered into prize holes through fraudulent activity.

In this example, the number of game balls B entering the ball entry slots (prize entry slots, exit slots) (entry ball count) and the number of game balls B paid out as prize balls (payout count) are counted only in the low-probability non-time-saving mode among the multiple game modes, and are reflected in the display on the base monitor 1310h. Here, in the low-probability time-saving mode (time-saving mode) or the high-probability time-saving mode (probability variable mode), balls frequently enter the second start slot 2004, so the number of game balls B paid out as prize balls also increases, and the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entering tends to be high. In other words, whether the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entering increases depends on the period during which the low-probability time-saving mode (time-saving mode) or the high-probability time-saving mode (probability variable mode) is in effect. However, by excluding such periods, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entering can be kept within a certain range, provided there is no fraudulent activity.

In addition, the base monitor 1310h displays the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls that enter, but it may also be possible to display the number of game balls B that enter the ball entrance (winning entrance, out entrance) (number of balls that enter) and the number of game balls B that are paid out as prize balls (number of payouts).

Furthermore, for the base monitor 1310h, the main control MPU 1310a calculates the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls that enter, and stores the calculation result in a specific area of the built-in RAM and displays it on the base monitor 1310h. Furthermore, the information stored in the specific area of the RAM (the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls that enter) is not cleared even if the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated when the power is turned on. However, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls that enter is newly calculated each time the number of game balls B that enter the ball entrance (winning entrance, outgoing entrance) (number of balls that enter) reaches 60,000, and the calculation results of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls that enter that are outdated are saved as history up to a predetermined number of calculation results. In such specifications for the base monitor 1310h, for example, the display of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entering may be restricted from the time when the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entering is newly calculated until the number of game balls B entering the ball entrances (winning entrances, outgoing entrances) reaches at least 1,000. This is because, immediately after the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entering is newly calculated, a bias is likely to occur, such as a situation in which balls continue to enter winning entrances that are eligible for prize ball payouts, causing the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entering to be higher than the reference value, or a situation in which balls do not enter winning entrances that are eligible for prize ball payouts, causing the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entering to be lower than the reference value. For this reason, immediately after the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entering is newly calculated, the information obtained from the base monitor 1310h information command may be deemed unreliable, and the display of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entering may not be executed.

In addition, in this example, game balls B collected in the outlet 1008, first sub-outlet 2021, and second sub-outlet 2022 are detected (counted) by an out ball sensor provided on the main frame 4 side, and game balls B that enter winning ports such as the general winning port 2001, first starting port 2002, second starting port 2004, large winning port 2005, and special winning port 2006 are detected (counted) by a safe ball sensor provided on the main frame 4 side, but these sensors may also be provided on the game board 5 side. In addition, a passage may be formed so that game balls B collected at the outlet 1008, first sub-outlet 2021, and second sub-outlet 2022 meet with game balls B that have entered various winning ports, and a single sensor may be installed on the passage, and the number of game balls B (number of entering balls) that have entered the ball entry port (winning port, outlet) may be counted by detection by the single sensor.

In this example, the base monitor 1310h is located on the main control board 1310, but it may also be located on the payout control board 633. In such cases, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is calculated on the main control board 1310 side, and the calculation result is displayed on the base monitor 1310h via the payout control board 633. However, other methods may also be used. For example, commands related to the number of balls entered and the number of payouts may be sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 633 at a predetermined timing, and the payout control board 633 may calculate the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered and display the calculation result on the base monitor 1310h. In this way, by having the payout control board 633 handle part of the control related to the base monitor 1310h, the control burden on the main control board 1310 can be reduced. Note that in a managed gaming machine that does not pay out prize balls, the base monitor 1310h may be located on the board that manages the prize balls (the board corresponding to the payout control board 633).

In addition, in this example, the number of game balls B (number of game balls entering) that enter the ball entry port (winning port, out port) is calculated using an out ball sensor and a safe ball sensor, but the number of game balls B (number of game balls entering) that enter the ball entry port (winning port, out port) may also be calculated using a different configuration. For example, when calculating the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of game balls entering on the payout control board 633 side, the number of game balls fired into the game area 5a may be calculated, and this value (number of game balls fired into the game area 5a) may be substituted for the "number of game balls B (number of game balls entering) that enter the ball entry port (winning port, out port)." Note that the "number of game balls fired into the game area" here preferably excludes the number of balls treated as foul balls as described above. In this case, the calculation of the base value on the payout control board 633 side can be, for example, "base value = (number of payouts ÷ number of game balls fired into the game area) × 100)." In this way, by having the payout control board 633 side handle part of the control related to the base monitor 1310h, the control burden on the main control board 1310 side can be reduced.

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.However, the setting key switch 1311a may also be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON position. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a' can be turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON back to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and the setting key switch 1311a' can be turned ON as the determination key. This determination key ON signal can be input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 (this aspect of the setting key switch 1311a' is sometimes referred to as "variant example (1) of the determination key").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead, a decision key button with a press operation portion may be provided on the setting change board 1311. In this case, the pressing portion of the Enter key button is exposed through an opening formed in the cover of the main control board box 1320 that corresponds to the Enter key button, and a wire intrusion prevention portion is molded into the cover to prevent a wire or the like from entering through the gap formed between the pressing portion of the Enter key button and the corresponding opening and tampering with the setting change board 1311 and main control board 1310. When the pressing portion of the Enter key button is pressed, an operation signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Based on the detection signal from the Enter key button, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the Enter key is ON when the pressing portion of the Enter key button is pressed, and can determine that the Enter key is not ON when the pressing portion of the Enter key button is not pressed.

The position where the enter key button is placed on the setting change board 1311 may be near the setting key switch 1311a or near the setting switch button 1311b. To prevent confusion between the enter key button and the setting switch button 1311b, stickers with the names of each button printed on them are affixed to the cover of the main control board box 1320 at positions corresponding to the enter key button and the setting switch button 1311b (instead of stickers, the names of each button may be molded into the cover). In addition, to prevent confusion between the Enter key button and the setting switching button 1311b, a button with a cover covering the pressing operation portion of either the Enter key button or the setting switching button 1311b (the cover must be opened to press the pressing operation portion) may be used, the pressing operation portions may be different in color, the Enter key button and the setting switching button 1311b may have different outer shapes or different shapes of the pressing operation portion, or another type of switch not having a pressing operation portion may be used as the Enter key button. Examples of other types of switches not having a pressing operation portion as the Enter key button include various switches such as a toggle switch having a lever, a slide switch having a slide portion, a rotary switch having a rotation operation portion, a rocker switch, and a touch switch. Furthermore, when the setting change board 1311 is provided with a decision key button and a setting switch button 1311b, in order to prevent unauthorized modifications, the wiring pattern to the decision key button and the wiring pattern to the setting switch button 1311b are routed so that they are not close to each other (spaced apart) on the setting change board 1311, and the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also spaced apart, and on the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern through which the detection signal from the decision key button is transmitted and the wiring pattern through which the detection signal from the setting switch button 1311b is transmitted are also routed so that they are not close to each other (spaced apart). Furthermore, if a confirmation key button is provided on the setting change board 1311, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (this form of the confirmation key button (which may include the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "modified form of the confirmation key (2)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON state by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON. Then, by rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise, a second ON operation can be performed. This decision key ON signal is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 13 on the main control board 1310. 10a, but instead, a detection signal from a handle touch sensor 192 in the handle unit 180, which detects whether the palm or fingers are touching the handle 195, and a detection signal from a single button operation sensor 194, which detects whether the player wants to forcibly stop the shooting of the game ball B, may be branched in the payout control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633, and it may be determined whether the decision key is ON or not based on these detection signals. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a can determine, based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, that the decision key is ON when the palm or fingers are touching the handle 195, but can determine that the decision key is not ON when the palm or fingers are not touching the handle 195, and/or can determine, based on the detection signal from the single button operation sensor 194, that the decision key is ON when the shooting of game ball B is forcibly stopped, but can determine that the decision key is not ON when the shooting of game ball B is not forcibly stopped (the aspect of the handle touch sensor (which may include the aspect of the single button operation sensor) may be described as "variant example of the decision key (3)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.However, instead of this, a firing reference pulse from a firing timing control circuit provided in the firing control unit 633b of the dispensing control board 633 described below can be branched in the dispensing control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633, and the presence or absence of the decision key ON can be determined based on these firing reference pulses. The firing reference pulse is a reference pulse that allows 100 game balls B to be fired toward the game area 5a per minute, and is generated based on a clock signal from the oscillator circuit. In this case, when the firing reference pulse is input from the payout control board 633, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON, but when the firing reference pulse is not input, it can determine that the decision key is not ON (the form of the firing reference pulse is sometimes referred to as "variant example of the decision key (4)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned to the determination key ON state by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON. Then, by rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise, a second ON operation can be performed to turn the setting key switch 1311a to the determination key ON state. This determination key ON signal is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to However, if a distance measuring sensor capable of detecting the movements of a player seated opposite the pachinko machine 1 is provided on the game board 5 and a detection signal from this distance measuring sensor is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via a relay board, the detection signal from this distance measuring sensor may be branched at the relay board and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the relay board, and the presence or absence of the enter key ON may be determined based on this detection signal. The distance measuring sensor detects the movements of a player by transmitting light from a light emitting unit that passes through the transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 and reflects off the player's arm or hand within a predetermined distance, and this reflected light passes through the transparent glass plate 162 again and is received by the light receiving unit. In this case, when the main control MPU 1310a receives a detection signal from the distance sensor via the relay board, it determines whether or not there is movement based on this detection signal, and if it determines that there is movement, it can determine that the Enter key is ON, but if it determines that there is no movement, it can determine that the Enter key is not ON (this aspect of the distance sensor is sometimes referred to as "variant example of the Enter key (5)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the setting key ON state by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to perform the first ON operation, and this setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Furthermore, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the determination key ON state by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation. This determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Furthermore, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to return from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the key cylinder counterclockwise 60 degrees to turn it OFF, and also by rotating the setting key cylinder clockwise 60 degrees to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the Enter key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the setting key switch 1311a may be provided with a serial output circuit that can serially output information indicating the setting key ON, Enter key ON, and OFF to the outside as serial information. This improves security against signals from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a equipped with this serial output circuit was previously provided on the setting change board 1311, but instead it may be provided on the main control board 1310 or the dispensing control board 633. When the serial information serially output from this serial output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a can determine from the received serial information whether the setting key is ON, the enter key is ON, or the enter key is OFF (the setting key switch 1311a having a serial circuit is sometimes referred to as "Enter key variant (6)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the setting key ON state by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to perform the first ON operation, and this setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Furthermore, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the determination key ON state by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation, and this determination ... initial position, which is the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON, to its original position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder counterclockwise 60 degrees to turn it OFF, and the setting key cylinder can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the enter key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the setting key switch 1311a may be provided with a pulse output circuit that can output information indicating the setting key ON, enter key ON, and OFF as a pulse signal to the outside. This improves security against signals from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a equipped with this pulse output circuit was previously provided on the setting change board 1311, but it may instead be provided on the main control board 1310 or the dispensing control board 633. The pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit has a pulse width set to 1 ms if the information conveys setting key ON, 3 ms if the information conveys enter key ON, and 5 ms if the information conveys OFF. When the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a can determine from the input pulse signal whether the information conveys setting key ON, enter key ON, or OFF (the setting key switch 1311a having a pulse output circuit is sometimes referred to as "Enter key variation (7)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position to perform the first ON operation, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the setting key ON state. This setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Furthermore, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise from the initial position to perform the second ON operation, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the decision key ON state. A setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder counterclockwise by 60 degrees so as to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). The setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to return it from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the Enter key is turned ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), thereby turning OFF the setting key switch 1311a. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the voltage level of the setting key ON signal, the Enter key ON signal, The voltage levels of the ON signal and the OFF signal can be set at an intermediate potential (for example, a potential of 2V to 3V out of a range of 0V to 5V) between the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310. A comparator circuit can be provided on the main control board 1310, and the comparison results from the comparator circuit can be input to the main control MPU 1310a, allowing the main control MPU 1310a to determine the ON/OFF status of the setting key ON signal, the enter key ON signal, and the OFF signal. This improves security for signals from the setting key switch 1311a (a setting key switch using an intermediate potential is sometimes referred to as "Enter key variant (8)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead, a decision key button with a press operation portion may be provided on the dispensing control board 633. In this case, the pressing operation portion of the Enter key button is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the dispensing control board box 632 corresponding to the Enter key button, and a wire intrusion prevention portion is molded into the cover body for the opening to prevent a wire or the like from entering through the "gap" formed between the pressing operation portion of the Enter key button and the corresponding opening and tampering with the dispensing control board 633. When the pressing operation portion of the Enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input from the dispensing control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Based on the detection signal from the Enter key button, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the Enter key is ON when the pressing operation portion of the Enter key button is pressed, and can determine that the Enter key is not ON when the pressing operation portion of the Enter key button is not pressed.

The position where the Enter key button is located on the dispensing control board 633 may be near the error reset switch having a press operation unit, which will be described later. Stickers with the names of each button printed on them are affixed to the cover of the dispensing control board 633 at positions corresponding to the Enter key button and the error reset switch, respectively, to prevent confusion between the Enter key button and the error reset switch (instead of stickers, the names of each button may be molded into the cover). Also, to prevent confusion between the Enter key button and the error reset switch, a button with a cover that covers the press operation unit of either the Enter key button or the error reset switch (the cover must be opened to press the press operation unit) may be used, the press operation unit may be a different color, the Enter key button and the error reset switch may have different external shapes or press operation unit shapes, or another type of switch that does not have a press operation unit may be used as the Enter key button. Examples of other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation portion as the decision key button include various switches such as a toggle switch with a lever, a slide switch with a slide portion, a rotary switch with a rotation operation portion, a rocker switch, a touch switch, etc. In addition, when the decision key button and the error reset switch are provided on the dispensing control board 633, in order to prevent unauthorized tampering, the wiring patterns to the decision key button and the wiring patterns to the error reset switch are formed so that they are not close to each other (separated from each other) on the dispensing control board 633, and the connections to the connector terminals of the dispensing control board 633 (the connector terminals of the main control board 1310) are also formed so that they are not close to each other, and in the main control board 1310, the wiring patterns to which the detection signals from the decision key button are transmitted and the wiring patterns to which the detection signals from the error reset switch are transmitted are also formed so that they are not close to each other (separated from each other). Furthermore, if a confirmation key button is provided on the dispensing control board 633, the setting key switch 1311a may be replaced with a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (the form of the confirmation key button (which may include the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "variant form of the confirmation key (9)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.However, instead of this, a signal from an error release switch having a pressing operation unit on the dispensing control board 633 can be branched in the dispensing control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633, and the presence or absence of the decision key ON can be determined based on this signal. As described above, the error reset switch is used to reset the error displayed on the error LED indicator. After power is restored, if the pachinko machine 1 system has completed startup (the various control boards have completed their power-on processing and are performing interrupt processing) and the pachinko machine 1 is in an error-free state, the pressing operation portion of the error reset switch is not operated at all. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the Enter key is ON when the pressing operation portion of the error reset switch is operated based on a signal from the error reset switch, and can determine that the Enter key is not ON when the pressing operation portion of the error reset switch is not operated based on a signal from the error reset switch. This improves security regardless of whether the Enter key is ON (this version of the error reset switch is sometimes referred to as "variant example of the Enter key (10)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON state by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON. Then, by rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise, a second ON operation can be performed to set the setting key switch 1311a to the decision key ON state. This decision key ON signal is sent from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310. Alternatively, the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 may monitor the logic of a signal from an error release switch having a push operation unit on the payout control board 633 in the port input process of the payout control unit power-on process described below, create a command, and send the created command to the main control board 1310 in the command transmission process of the payout control unit power-on process described below, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, which receives this command, may determine whether the Enter key is ON. As described above, the error release switch is used to release an error displayed on the error LED indicator, and after power is restored, if the system of the pachinko machine 1 has completed startup (the power-on process of various control boards has been completed and interrupt processing is being performed) and no error has occurred in the state of the pachinko machine 1, the push operation unit of the error release switch does not need to be operated at all. Therefore, in the frame command reception process in the main control timer interrupt process described below, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the Enter key is ON when the dispensing control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit has been operated based on a signal from the error release switch and receives a command to that effect, while it can determine that the Enter key is not ON when the dispensing control MPU determines that the pressing operation unit has not been operated based on a signal from the error release switch and receives a command to that effect. This improves security regardless of whether the Enter key is ON (mode 2 of the error release switch is sometimes referred to as "variant example of the Enter key (11)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON, and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation. In the past, the signal was input from the constant change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead, a RAM clear switch 1310f can be provided on the dispensing control board 633, and the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f can be input to the dispensing control MPU of the dispensing control board 633, and also branched in the dispensing control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633, and the main control MPU 1310a can determine whether the decision key is ON or not based on the operation signal input. As will be described later, if the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated when power is restored (more precisely, if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f), or if a setting change is made that can change and determine the setting value (if the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change process described later), the main control MPU 1310a will always clear a specified area of the RAM built into it (the area of the entire RAM excluding a specific area). Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a specified area of its built-in RAM, so the RAM clear switch 1310f can be used as a confirmation key.The main control MPU 1310a can determine that the confirmation key is ON when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633, but can determine that the confirmation key is not ON when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633.This improves security regardless of whether the confirmation key is ON or not.

The pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the dispensing control board 633 is exposed through an opening formed in the cover body of the dispensing control board box 632 that corresponds to the RAM clear switch 1310f, and a wire intrusion prevention portion is molded into the cover body to prevent wires or other objects from entering through the "gap" formed between the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f and the corresponding opening to tamper with the dispensing control board 633.

The RAM clear switch 1310f may be located on the dispensing control board 633 near the error reset switch having a push-button operation unit, which will be described later. To prevent confusion between the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error reset switch, stickers with the names of each button printed on them are affixed to the cover of the dispensing control board 633 in positions corresponding to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error reset switch (the names of each button may be molded into the cover instead of stickers). To prevent confusion between the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error reset switch, a button with a cover covering the push-button operation unit of either the RAM clear switch 1310f or the error reset switch (the cover must be opened to operate the push-button operation unit) may be used, the push-button may have a different color, the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error reset switch may have different external shapes or push-button shapes, or another type of switch that does not have a push-button may be used as the RAM clear switch 1310f. Examples of other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation portion as the RAM clear switch 1310f include various switches such as a toggle switch with a lever, a slide switch with a sliding portion, a rotary switch with a rotating operation portion, a rocker switch, a touch switch, etc. In addition, when the RAM clear switch 1310f and the error reset switch are provided on the dispensing control board 633, in order to prevent unauthorized tampering, the wiring patterns to the RAM clear switch 1310f and the wiring patterns to the error reset switch are formed so that they are not close to each other (separated from each other) on the dispensing control board 633, and the connections to the connector terminals of the dispensing control board 633 (the connector terminals of the main control board 1310) are also formed so that they are not close to each other (separated from each other).In the main control board 1310, the wiring patterns through which the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is transmitted and the wiring patterns through which the detection signal from the error reset switch is transmitted are also formed so that they are not close to each other (separated from each other). Furthermore, if a RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the dispensing control board 633, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can only be rotated within a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (the form of the RAM clear switch (which may include the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "variant example of the determination key (12)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 1310f is provided on the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a to the decision key ON position. This decision key ON signal is sent from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 13 10 and input to the main control MPU 1310a, but instead, a RAM clear switch 1310f can be provided on the dispensing control board 633, and the dispensing control MPU of the dispensing control board 633 can monitor the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f in the port input processing of the dispensing control unit power-on processing described below, create a command, and send the created command to the main control board 1310 in the command sending processing of the dispensing control unit power-on processing described below, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 that receives this command can determine whether the decision key is ON or not. As will be described later, if the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated when power is restored (more precisely, if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f), or if a setting change is made that can change and determine the setting value (if the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change process described later), the main control MPU 1310a will always clear a specified area of the RAM built into it (the area of the entire RAM excluding a specific area). Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a will always clear a specified area of its built-in RAM, so the RAM clear switch 1310f can be used as a confirmation key, and in the frame command receiving process in the main control timer interrupt process described below, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the confirmation key is ON when the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f has been operated based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633 and receives a command to that effect, while it can determine that the confirmation key is not ON when the payout control MPU determines that the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f has not been operated based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633 and receives a command to that effect. This improves security regardless of whether the Enter key is turned on (RAM clear switch mode 2 (which may include the setting key switch 1311a' mode) may be referred to as "Determine key variation (13)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation.This decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, or dispensing detection sensor 591 is input to the dispensing control board 633. The signal is input to the MPU, and is branched in the dispensing control board 633 and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633, and the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether the decision key is ON or not based on these detection signals, or the dispensing control MPU of the dispensing control board 633 may monitor the logic of the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, or dispensing detection sensor 591 in the port input processing of the dispensing control unit power-on processing described below, create a command, and send the created command to the main control board 1310 in the command sending processing of the dispensing control unit power-on processing described below, and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receiving this command may determine whether the decision key is ON or not. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be replaced with a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (this aspect of the dispensing unit (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "variant example of the determination key (16)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.However, instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main frame open switch, and can determine that the decision key is not ON when the main frame 4 remains open relative to the outer frame 2. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (the form of the main body frame opening switch (which may include the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "modified example of the determination key (17)"). In this case, the person changing the setting value must close the main body frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 to turn on the determination key, and after turning on the determination key, must again open the main body frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, remove the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and again close the main body frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.However, instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the decision key is ON when the door frame 3 is opened relative to the main frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame open switch, and can determine that the decision key is not ON when the door frame 3 remains closed relative to the main frame 4. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be replaced with a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (the door frame opening switch configuration (which may include the setting key switch 1311a' configuration) may be referred to as "modified decision key (17)"). In this case, the person changing the setting value must open the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4 in order to turn ON the decision key, and after turning ON the decision key, must close the door frame 3 again relative to the main frame 4, remove the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and close the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 can be turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON back to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a to the determination key ON.This determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the setting key switch 1311a may also be provided on the main control board 1310 (this aspect of the setting key switch may be described as "variant example of the determination key (18)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 can be turned OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON back to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then by rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the determination key ON, and this determination key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, this setting key switch 1311a is provided on the main control board 1310, and can be turned OFF by rotating the setting key switch 1311a from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to the initial position. This OFF signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the Enter key is ON when the OFF signal is input, and can determine that the Enter key is not ON when the OFF signal is not input. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be changed to a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key switch 1311a ON (setting key switch aspect 2 (which may include the setting key switch 1311a' aspect) may be referred to as "Decision key variation (19)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but instead, a decision key button with a press operation portion may be provided on the main control board 1310. In this case, the pressing portion of the Enter key button is exposed through an opening formed in the cover of the main control board box 1320 that corresponds to the Enter key button, and a wire intrusion prevention portion is molded into the cover to prevent a wire or the like from entering through the gap formed between the pressing portion of the Enter key button and the corresponding opening and tampering with the main control board 1310. When the pressing portion of the Enter key button is pressed, this operation signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Based on the detection signal from the Enter key button, the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the Enter key is ON when the pressing portion of the Enter key button is pressed, and can determine that the Enter key is not ON when the pressing portion of the Enter key button is not pressed.

The Enter key button may be located on the main control board 1310 near the RAM clear switch 1310f. Stickers with the names of each button printed on them are affixed to the cover of the main control board box 1320 at positions corresponding to the Enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f to prevent confusion between the two. (Instead of stickers, the names of each button may be molded into the cover.) To prevent confusion between the Enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f, a button with a cover covering the pressing operation portion of either the Enter key button or the RAM clear switch 1310f may be used (the cover must be opened to press the pressing operation portion), the pressing operation portion may be a different color, the outer shape or the pressing operation portion may be different from the Enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f, or another type of switch that does not have a pressing operation portion may be used as the Enter key button. Examples of other types of switches that do not have a pressing operation portion as the enter key button include toggle switches with a lever, slide switches with a sliding portion, rotary switches with a rotating operation portion, rocker switches, touch switches, and other switches. Furthermore, when the enter key button and RAM clear switch 1310f are provided on the main control board 1310, the wiring patterns to the enter key button and the RAM clear switch 1310f are routed so that they do not come close to each other (are spaced apart) on the main control board 1310 to prevent unauthorized tampering. Furthermore, when the enter key button is provided on the main control board 1310, the setting key switch 1311a may be replaced by a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (the enter key button variation 2 (which may include the setting key switch 1311a' variation) is sometimes referred to as "the enter key variation (20)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.However, instead of this, the presence or absence of the decision key ON can be determined based on an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f to which the main control MPU 1310a is input. As will be described later, if the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated when power is restored (more precisely, if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f), or if a setting change is made that can change and determine the setting value (if the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change process described later), the main control MPU 1310a will always clear a specified area of the RAM built into it (the area of the entire RAM excluding a specific area). Therefore, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a always clears a predetermined area of its built-in RAM, so the RAM clear switch 1310f can be used as a determination key, and the main control MPU 1310a can determine that the determination key is ON when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f, but can determine that the determination key is not ON when the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed based on the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f provided on the payout control board 633. This makes it possible to improve security in relation to whether the determination key is ON or not. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be replaced with a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range extending from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (RAM clear switch mode 3 (which may include the setting key switch 1311a' mode) may be referred to as "Decision key variation (21)"). Note that the period during which the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed is limited to when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633, as described below. Therefore, if the RAM clear switch 1310f is configured to also function as an error reset switch, described below, then an error reset switch is not required on the payout control board 633.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns OFF the setting key switch 1311a) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned ON the setting key, and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a to the determination key ON position. This determination key ON signal is then transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main Alternatively, the main control MPU 1310a may receive detection signals from the gate sensor 2801 of the gate 2003, various sensors of the various winning openings (e.g., the second start opening sensor 2401, the large winning opening sensor 2402, the accessory winning opening sensor 2601, the general winning opening sensor 3001, and the first start opening sensor 3002), and the out sensor 664 of the main frame 4, and determine whether the Enter key is ON based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a ON (the aspects of the various sensors (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "various embodiments of the Enter key (22)"). In this case, the person changing the setting value must open the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4 and send a game ball B to the gate 2003, to the various winning holes, or to the outlet 1008 in order to turn on the decision key.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the determination key ON state by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON, and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation. This determination key ON signal is then sent to the setting change board 1311. Alternatively, if the main control MPU 1310a controls the operation of a movable body (gimmick) by controlling the drive of an electric drive source such as a stepping motor, a DC motor, or a solenoid, and determines the original position or operating position of the movable body (gimmick) based on a detection signal from an optical sensor (photo sensor, distance sensor, etc.), the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether the Enter key is ON based on the detection signal from the optical sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a ON (the aspect of the optical gamble sensor (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "variant example of the Enter key (23)"). In this case, the person changing the setting value must open the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4 to turn on the enter key, and move the movable object (gimmick) so that the optical sensor can detect the original position, operating position, etc. of the movable object (gimmick).

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, and this decision key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.However, instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a, which receives a detection signal from a magnetic sensor 1050 that detects illegal magnetism within the game area 5a, may determine whether the decision key is ON or not based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be replaced with a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (the magnetic sensor configuration (which may include the configuration of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "modified enter key (24)"). In this case, the person changing the setting value must bring a magnet closer from the front of the pachinko machine 1 toward the front of the game board 5 in order to turn ON the enter key.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON state by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to the original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation. This decision key ON signal is sent from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU of the main control board 1310. Alternatively, if a vibration sensor is provided on the game board 5 to detect fraudulent activity by shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1 to vibrate the pachinko machine 1 and change the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a defined on the game board 5, causing the ball to enter various winning holes or gates (gates) provided on the game board 5, the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not there is fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor, and may also determine whether or not the Enter key is ON based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (the aspect of the vibration sensor (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as a "variant example of the Enter key (25)"). In this case, the person changing the setting value must shake or hit the pachinko machine 1 to turn on the confirmation key.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns OFF the setting key switch 1311a) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned ON the setting key, and then by rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by the determination key, and this determination key ON signal is transmitted from the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1 However, instead of this, if a radio wave sensor that irradiates radio waves to the pachinko machine 1 to detect fraudulent behavior such as fraudulently acquiring game balls B by causing malfunctions of various sensors in various winning slots on the game board 5 or various sensors on the payout device 580 is provided on the game board 5 or the payout device 580, the main control MPU 1310a may determine whether or not fraudulent behavior has occurred based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor, and may also determine whether or not the Enter key has been turned on based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key switch 1311a is turned on (the form of the radio wave sensor (which may include the form of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as "variant embodiment of the Enter key (26)"). In this case, the person changing the setting value must irradiate the pachinko machine 1 with radio waves in order to turn on the confirm key.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be set to the decision key ON by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF) from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON, and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to perform a second ON operation. This decision key ON signal is then sent from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MP of the main control board 1310. Alternatively, a detection signal from a pressure detection sensor 373 that detects a pressure operation on the pressure operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 350 and a detection signal from a contact detection sensor main body 358 that detects contact with the touch operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 350 may be input to the peripheral control board 1510, branched at the peripheral control board 1510, and input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, with the main control MPU 1310a determining whether the Enter key is ON based on these detection signals. In this case, the setting key switch 1311a may be a setting key switch 1311a' that can be rotated only within a range from the initial position to the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a ON (this aspect of the performance operation button unit (which may include the aspect of the setting key switch 1311a') may be referred to as a "variant of the Enter key (27)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the main control board 1310 and setting change board 1311 were housed in the internal space of the main control board box 1320, which was composed of a cover body and a base body. However, the setting change board 1311 may be housed in a separate setting change board box and placed around or adjacent to the main control board box 1320. The main control board box 1320 has a cover body and a base body crimped together with a one-way screw or the like at the crimping portion. This crimping portion is a sealing mechanism, and multiple crimping portions are provided. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by crimping the cover body and base body with a one-way screw or the like at the crimping portion using one sealing mechanism. Next, to open the main control board box 1320, the sealing mechanism must be destroyed. In other words, the cover body cannot be removed from the base body unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed. This structure of the main control board box 1320 can also be applied to the structure of a setting change board box. In this case, the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the pressing operation portion of the enter key button are exposed through openings formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320, respectively. However, a wire intrusion prevention portion is molded into the cover body to prevent a wire or the like from entering through the "gaps" formed between the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the pressing operation portion of the enter key button and the corresponding openings to alter the setting change board 1311. Note that if the setting change board box is configured such that the cover can be opened or closed from the base body, unlike the structure of the main control board box 1320 described above, a setting change board cover opening/closing switch that can detect the opening of the cover may be provided on the base body. In this case, the detection signal from the setting change board cover opening/closing switch may be configured to be input directly to the main control board 1310, or may be input (indirectly) to the main control board 1310 via the setting change board 1311. The above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission conditions can include the case where the cover body is released from the base body based on a detection signal from the setting change board cover body opening/closing switch (the aspect of the setting change board box may be referred to as "variant embodiment of the enter key (28)").

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 are configured to be connected, and in order to prevent unauthorized modification, the wiring pattern through which the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, the wiring pattern through which the decision key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, the wiring pattern through which the setting key OFF signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, and the wiring pattern through which the signal from the setting switch button 1311b is transmitted are configured. The wiring for the setting change board 1311 and the setting change board 1311a is formed so that they are not close to each other (separated from each other), and the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also formed so as to be separated from each other. Also on the main control board 1310, a wiring pattern for transmitting various signals from the setting key switch 1311a (i.e., a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of the setting key ON of the setting key switch 1311a, a wiring pattern for transmitting a signal of the enter key of the setting key switch 1311a, The wiring pattern through which the ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted and the wiring pattern through which the OFF signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted and the wiring pattern through which the signal from the setting changeover button 1311b is transmitted are also formed so as not to be close to each other (separated from each other). However, for either the wiring pattern through which the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted and the wiring pattern through which the decision key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a is transmitted, The connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 may be connected to another connector provided on the main control board 1310 separately from the connector SMCN of the board 1311 (inter-board connection) via another connector provided on the setting change board 1311 separately, and this other connector provided on the setting change board 1311 may be electrically connected to another connector provided on the main control board 1310 via a harness (the manner in which the wiring pattern is routed may be described as "variant example of the enter key (29)").

In addition, any of the above-mentioned Confirm key variations (1) to (29) may be appropriately selected and combined to adopt the above-mentioned configuration (this selected combination of variations may be referred to as "Confirm key variation (30)").

The above-mentioned setting values can be used to change the probability for determining whether a jackpot or small jackpot has been achieved, the probability for determining whether a jackpot or small jackpot has been achieved, the probability for determining whether a jackpot or small jackpot has been achieved, the allocation rate to areas that are advantageous to the player, and other factors. The setting values can be preset to provide a probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player (i.e., to increase the number of game balls B that the player can acquire). In this embodiment, setting values 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 are provided as setting values, and the probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player is preset from setting value 1 to setting value 6. While the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has multiple setting values ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 6, other pachinko machines may have a single setting value that presets a probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player. That is, there are gaming specifications, such as the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in which the probability (degree of advantage) that will be advantageous to the player is preset as multiple set values, requiring setting changes, and gaming specifications in which the probability (degree of advantage) that will be advantageous to the player is preset as a single set value, requiring no setting changes at all. However, if the hardware configuration of the main control board 1310 is redesigned to suit such gaming specifications, while the hardware configuration of the setting change board 1311 is redesigned or not used, the main control board 1310 and setting change board 1311 will be dependent on the gaming specifications, resulting in main control boards 1310 and setting change boards 1311 with similar or different hardware configurations depending on the gaming specifications. Therefore, there is a need for a main control board 1310 and setting change board 1311 that can be used in common without being dependent on the gaming specifications, i.e., without requiring design changes to the hardware configuration.

For example, in game specifications where the probability (degree of advantage) that a player will have is preset to a single value and no setting changes are required, there is no need to use a setting value as the probability (degree of advantage) that a player will have an advantage, so this can be addressed by changing the software design to assign setting value 1, setting value 2, setting value 3, setting value 4, setting value 5, and setting value 6 as follows:

For example, the main control MPU 1310a can use these as setting values to set multiple actual machine confirmation operation patterns (allowing for variations in the way the pachinko machine 1 is started up after the RAM is cleared) after clearing a specified area of its own built-in RAM (the area of the entire RAM excluding specific areas). In this case, for the operation of the movable body (gimmick element) and the lighting of light-emitting elements such as lamps and LEDs that are the objects of control by the main control MPU 1310a, actual machine confirmation operation pattern 1 specifying "all operations (movement of movable body (gimmick element) and lighting of light-emitting elements)" is assigned as setting value 1, actual machine confirmation operation pattern 2 specifying "movement of movable body (gimmick element)" is assigned as setting value 2, actual machine confirmation operation pattern 3 specifying "light-on of light-emitting elements" is assigned as setting value 3, and actual machine confirmation operation pattern 4 specifying "detailed operation of movable body (gimmick element) (variable movement speed, movement over the entire operating area, movement with other structures and other movable elements)" is assigned as setting value 4. An actual machine confirmation operation pattern 4 is assigned which specifies "operations such as checking for interference with moving bodies (gimmicks), and the order of operation with other moving bodies (gimmicks)," an actual machine confirmation operation pattern 5 is assigned which specifies "lighting of light-emitting bodies per port (lighting of light-emitting bodies per predetermined output port unit of the main control MPU 1310a (i.e., per output port))" as setting value 5, and an actual machine confirmation operation pattern 6 is assigned which specifies "no operation" as setting value 6 (the manner of changing the setting of the actual machine confirmation operation after RAM clearing is sometimes referred to as "variant example (1) based on common hardware configuration"). Note that the main control MPU 1310a performs the actual machine confirmation operation after RAM clearing by repeatedly performing main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, to operate moving bodies (gimmicks) and light-emitting bodies such as lamps and LEDs. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives a setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, can operate the movable body (gimmick) and light the light emitter that are the object of control by the peripheral control board 1510 according to the setting value (actual machine confirmation operation pattern) included in the setting change command. Depending on the manner in which the actual machine confirmation operation is changed after this RAM clear, it is possible to provide a variety of methods for starting up the pachinko machine 1 after the RAM is cleared.

Also, for example, it can be used as a setting value that allows multiple settings for the time from when the symbol changes to when the demonstration (a demonstration effect performed while the player is waiting) begins. In this case, time setting pattern 1 specifying "10 seconds" is assigned as setting value 1, time setting pattern 2 specifying "15 seconds" is assigned as setting value 2, time setting pattern 3 specifying "20 seconds" is assigned as setting value 3, time setting pattern 4 specifying "25 seconds" is assigned as setting value 4, time setting pattern 5 specifying "30 seconds" is assigned as setting value 5, and time setting pattern 6 specifying "35 seconds" is assigned as setting value 6 (the manner in which the time from when the symbol changes to when the player is waiting is sometimes referred to as "variant example (2) based on the common hardware configuration"). The peripheral control board 1510, which receives a setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, can start the demonstration at a time (time setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. By changing the setting for the time between when the symbol changes and when the player waits, it is possible to vary the time between when the symbol changes and when the demonstration begins.

Also, for example, it can be used as a setting value that allows multiple settings to be made for the content of the demonstration (demo effect performed while waiting for the player) that is performed after the symbol changes have finished. In this case, demo effect setting pattern 1 specifying "comical effect" is assigned as setting value 1, demo effect setting pattern 2 specifying "comical effect, moving object (gimmick) movement effect" is assigned as setting value 2, demo effect setting pattern 3 specifying "serious effect" is assigned as setting value 4, demo effect setting pattern 4 specifying "serial effect, moving object (gimmick) movement effect" is assigned as setting value 5, demo effect setting pattern 5 specifying "period drama-style effect" is assigned as setting value 5, and demo effect setting pattern 6 specifying "period drama-style effect, moving object (gimmick)" is assigned as setting value 6 (the manner in which the content of the demo effect is changed is sometimes referred to as "variant example (3) based on the common hardware configuration"). The peripheral control board 1510, which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, can perform a demonstration using a demo effect (demo effect setting pattern) that corresponds to the setting value included in the setting change command. Depending on how the content of this demo effect is changed, it is possible to vary the content of the demo effect that is performed after the pattern change has finished.

Also, for example, the volume control switch on the peripheral control board 1510 can be used as a setting value to set multiple default volumes to be adjusted using the switch. Rotating the switch allows the volume to be increased or decreased from the default volume. In this case, volume setting pattern 1, which specifies "volume 1," is assigned as setting value 1; volume setting pattern 2, which specifies "volume 2," is assigned as setting value 2; volume setting pattern 3, which specifies "volume 3," is assigned as setting value 3; volume setting pattern 4, which specifies "volume 4," is assigned as setting value 4; volume setting pattern 5, which specifies "volume 5," is assigned as setting value 5; and volume setting pattern 6, which specifies "volume 6," is assigned as setting value 6 (this mode of changing the default volume may be referred to as "variant example (4) based on the common hardware configuration"). Note that the volume is set to increase from setting value 1 to setting value 6. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives a setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, sets the default volume to a volume (volume setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. Furthermore, the default volume of "Volume 1" assigned to setting value 1 may be muted when the volume adjustment switch is moved in the direction to decrease the volume (opposite the direction to increase the volume) and has been moved to the minimum volume end and adjusted to the minimum volume, or may be set to a volume that can be heard when standing in front of the pachinko machine. Furthermore, the default volume of "Volume 6" assigned to setting value 6 may be set to the maximum volume when the volume adjustment switch is moved in the direction to increase the volume (opposite the direction to decrease the volume) and has been moved to the maximum volume end and adjusted to the maximum volume, or may be set to a volume that is a predetermined percentage of the maximum volume (e.g., 85%). This manner of changing the default volume allows for variation in the default volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510.

It can also be used, for example, as a setting value that allows multiple settings to be made for the volume of error alert sounds for various malfunctions, goto, errors, and other error alerts. The various error alert sounds cannot be adjusted by operating the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 (i.e., they are not dependent on it), and while setting them to maximum volume makes it easier for game parlor staff and other attendants to notice pachinko machines that emit error alert sounds, they may be irritating to players playing other pachinko machines. Therefore, there is also a demand for something that allows the volume of the various error alert sounds to be adjusted. In this case, error alert volume setting pattern 1 specifying "error alert volume 1" is assigned as setting value 1, error alert volume setting pattern 2 specifying "error alert volume 2" is assigned as setting value 2, error alert volume setting pattern 3 specifying "error alert volume 3" is assigned as setting value 3, error alert volume setting pattern 4 specifying "volume 4" is assigned as setting value 4, error alert volume setting pattern 5 specifying "error alert volume 5" is assigned as setting value 5, and error alert volume setting pattern 6 specifying "error alert volume 6 (maximum volume)" is assigned as setting value 6 (the manner of changing the volume of the error alert sound may be described as "variant example (5) using a common hardware configuration"). The volume of the error alert sound is set to increase from setting value 1 (a volume that does not mute the sound and allows the error alert sound to be heard when standing in front of the pachinko machine that emits the error alert sound) to setting value 6 (maximum volume that allows the error alert sound to be fully heard even when several meters away from the pachinko machine that emits the error alert sound). The peripheral control board 1510, which receives a setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, controls the error alert sound to be emitted at a volume (error alert volume setting pattern) that corresponds to the setting value included in the setting change command. This change setting for the volume of the error alert sound allows for variation in the volume of the error alert sound when an error is announced.

It can also be used as a setting value to set multiple default brightnesses for light-emitting elements such as lamps and LEDs. The brightness of the light-emitting elements controlled by the main control MPU 1310a can be increased or decreased from the default brightness. In this case, default brightness setting pattern 1 specifying "Brightness 1" is assigned as setting value 1, default brightness setting pattern 2 specifying "Brightness 2" is assigned as setting value 2, default brightness setting pattern 3 specifying "Brightness 3" is assigned as setting value 3, default brightness setting pattern 4 specifying "Brightness 4" is assigned as setting value 4, default brightness setting pattern 5 specifying "Brightness 5" is assigned as setting value 5, and default brightness setting pattern 6 specifying "Brightness 6" is assigned as setting value 6 (this mode of changing the default brightness may be referred to as "variant example (6) based on the common hardware configuration"). The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light-emitting elements by repeatedly performing the main control timer interrupt process described below, thereby lighting, blinking, and controlling the gradation points of the light-emitting elements. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives a setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, can adjust the brightness of the light-emitting element that is the target of control by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the default brightness (default brightness setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command, and can turn the light-emitting element on, blink, or set a gradation point. Depending on how the content of this default brightness is changed, it is possible to provide variation in the default brightness of light-emitting elements such as lamps and LEDs.

Furthermore, for example, they can be used as setting values to set multiple brightness levels for light-emitting elements such as lamps and LEDs for error notifications of various malfunctions, glitches, and errors. For the lamps controlled by the main control MPU 1310a, Error Alert Brightness Setting Pattern 1, which specifies "Error Alert Brightness 1," is assigned as setting value 1; Error Alert Brightness Setting Pattern 2, which specifies "Error Alert Brightness 2," is assigned as setting value 2; Error Alert Brightness Setting Pattern 3, which specifies "Error Alert Brightness 3," is assigned as setting value 3; Error Alert Brightness Setting Pattern 4, which specifies "Error Alert Brightness 4," is assigned as setting value 4; Error Alert Brightness Setting Pattern 5, which specifies "Error Alert Brightness 5," is assigned as setting value 5; and Error Alert Brightness Setting Pattern 6, which specifies "Error Alert Brightness 6 (maximum brightness)," is assigned as setting value 6. (The manner in which the brightness levels of light-emitting elements for error notifications are changed is sometimes referred to as "variant example (7) based on the common hardware configuration.") The lamp brightness is set to increase from setting value 1 (a lamp brightness that does not go out but is low enough that an error alert can be recognized by standing in front of the pachinko machine) to setting value 6 (maximum brightness). The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light emitters for error alerts by repeatedly performing the main control timer interrupt process described below, thereby turning the light emitters on, blinking, or setting gradation points. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives a setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, can adjust the brightness of the light emitters controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the error alert brightness (error alert brightness setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command, thereby turning the light emitters on, blinking, or setting gradation points. Depending on the manner in which the brightness of the light emitters for error alerts is changed, it is possible to vary the brightness of light emitters such as lamps and LEDs for error alerts.

In addition, the various setting values assigned to the above-mentioned common hardware configuration variants (1) to (7) are displayed on the setting display 1310g when predetermined setting value display permission conditions are met in the setting value confirmation and display process performed by the main control MPU 1310a (described below). However, they may also be displayed on the setting display 1310g at all times from when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on until it is powered off (this mode of setting value display may be referred to as "common hardware configuration variant (8)").

Furthermore, any one of the above-mentioned variations (1) to (8) based on the common hardware configuration may be appropriately selected and adopted as the above-mentioned determination key variation (30).

Furthermore, the above-mentioned predetermined setting value change permission conditions required that when the pachinko machine 1 was powered on or when power was restored after a power outage, the main frame 4 be opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key be inserted into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder be rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key ON. When the pachinko machine 1 was powered on while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f, the main control MPU 1310a cleared all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for specific areas in the main control power-on processing described below, and then proceeded with the game by performing interrupt permission settings, etc. Furthermore, when the power is restored to the pachinko machine 1 and the above-mentioned predetermined condition for permitting a change in setting value is met, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in the main control side power-on process described below, clearing all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area, and then proceeds with the game by setting interrupt permission, etc. In other words, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f, if the above-mentioned predetermined condition for permitting a change in setting value is met when the power is restored to the pachinko machine 1, in either case the main control MPU 1310a clears all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area in the main control side power-on process described below, and then proceeds with the game by setting interrupt permission, etc. Therefore, the above-mentioned predetermined condition for allowing a change to a setting value may be that when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power outage, the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key ON, and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is also pressed (sometimes referred to as a "variant of the predetermined condition for allowing a change to a setting value").

In addition, the above-mentioned predetermined setting value display permission conditions required that when the pachinko machine 1 was powered on or when power was restored after a power outage, the main frame 4 was open relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key was inserted into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key cylinder was rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key ON, and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f was not operated. In addition, when a modified example of the predetermined setting value display permission condition is met and the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting value confirmation display processing, the interrupt permission setting has not yet been made, so the main control MPU 1310a does not perform the main control side timer interrupt processing, and does not read the detection signal from the main frame open switch for detecting the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a when the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns OFF the setting key switch 1311a) to perform the first ON operation, turning the setting key switch 1311a to setting key ON, and does not store these in the input information memory area of the main control built-in RAM as input information described later. Therefore, when a variation of the predetermined setting value display permission condition is met and the setting value confirmation display process is performed, the main control MPU 1310a reads a detection signal from the main frame open switch, which detects the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, and a setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a.

By adopting both the above-mentioned modified pre-determined setting value change permission conditions and the above-mentioned modified pre-determined setting value display permission conditions, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage, the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key ON. When the pressing operation unit is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process during the main control power-on process described below, clearing all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area, and then proceeds with the game by setting interrupt permission, etc. On the other hand, when the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch 1310f is not pressed, the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting value confirmation display process during the main control power-on process described below, and then proceeds with the game by setting interrupt permission, etc. By adopting this configuration, the main control MPU 1310a never performs the setting value confirmation display process once the game begins. In other words, when the main control MPU 1310a starts the game by setting interrupt permission, etc., it never displays the current setting value on the setting display 1310g. The main control MPU 1310a calculates the ratio of the number of payouts (the number of game balls B paid out (awarded) as prize balls upon balls entering a winning port) to the number of balls entered (the number of game balls B entered into the ball entry ports (winning ports, out ports) provided in the game area 5a partitioned on the game board 5) in the ball counting process of the main control side timer interrupt process described below, and stores the calculation result as a base value in a specific area of the built-in RAM and displays it on the base monitor 1310h. Therefore, the current setting value displayed by the setting display 1310g may be displayed on the above-mentioned base monitor 1310h (sometimes referred to as a "variant example of how to use the base monitor"). As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can use the base monitor 1310h to display the current setting values that have been set during the period from when power is restored until the game begins to progress by setting interrupt permission, etc., and once power is restored and the game begins to progress by setting interrupt permission, etc., it can display the calculated ratio of the number of payouts (the number of game balls B paid out (awarded) as prize balls due to balls entering the winning holes) to the number of balls entered (the number of game balls B that have entered the ball entry holes (winning holes, winning holes) in the game area 5a defined on the game board 5). This eliminates the need for a setting display 1310g, contributing to cost reduction.

In addition, any one of the above-mentioned variations of the predetermined setting value change permission conditions, the above-mentioned variations of the predetermined setting value display permission conditions, and the above-mentioned variations of the base monitor usage method may be appropriately selected and adopted as the above-mentioned variation of the enter key (30).

In addition, any one of the above-mentioned variations of the predetermined setting value change permission conditions, the above-mentioned variations of the predetermined setting value display permission conditions, and the above-mentioned variations of the base monitor usage method may be appropriately selected and adopted in variations (1) to (8) based on the above-mentioned common hardware configuration.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figure 129 etc. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. When assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the function display unit 1400 can be seen from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3. This function display unit 1400 uses multiple LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the game status (game situation), the results of the regular lottery, the results of the special lottery, etc.

The functional display unit 1400, although not shown in detail, is equipped with a status indicator consisting of three LEDs that displays the game status, a normal pattern indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the normal lottery result drawn when game ball B is received by gate 2003, and a normal hold indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of holds related to the reception of game ball B by gate 2003.

The function display unit 1400 also includes a first special pattern display consisting of eight LEDs that displays the result of a first special lottery drawn upon the acceptance of game ball B into the first starting port 2002, a first special reserve number display consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reserves related to the acceptance of game ball B into the first starting port 2002, a second special pattern display consisting of eight LEDs that displays the result of a second special lottery drawn upon the acceptance of game ball B into the second starting port 2004, and a second special reserve number display consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reserves related to the acceptance of game ball B into the second starting port 2004.

Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 is equipped with a round display consisting of five LEDs that displays the number of times (number of rounds) the opening and closing pattern of the large prize opening 2005 is repeated when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "win" or the like.

This functional display unit 1400 can display the number of reserved items, designs, etc. by turning on, off, blinking, etc. the LEDs provided as appropriate.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the gaming board 5 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 132 and 136. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600, which is attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see Figure 169) that controls the effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling light-emitting effects, sound effects, moving effects, etc., and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling effect images.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the performance operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the performance display device 1600, etc. (See Figure 169).

[5-7. Performance display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the gaming board 5 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 135 and 136. The effect display device 1600 is located in the center of the gaming area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 via the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface at approximately the center of the rear wall of the rear box 3010. When the gaming board 5 is assembled, the effect display device 1600 can be seen from the front (player's side) through the transparent gaming panel 1100 and the frame of the frame-shaped center device 2500.

The performance display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color LCD display device with a white LED backlight, and is installed in a portrait orientation. The performance display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display specified still images and videos.

The performance display device 1600 has one left fixed piece 1601 protruding leftward from the left side and two right fixed pieces 1602 protruding rightward from the right side. With the LCD screen facing forward, the performance display device 1600 is attached to the rear box 3010 by inserting the two right fixed pieces 1602 from diagonally behind the rear box 3010 into two fixing grooves 3010c opening into the right inner surface of the frame-shaped LCD mounting portion 3010b of the rear box 3010 (described below). The left fixed piece 1601 is then moved forward to insert the left fixed piece 1601 into the opening of the locking mechanism, which is then slid upward in rear view.

[5-8. Overall structure of the table unit]
The front unit 2000 of the gaming board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 140 and 144. Figure 140(a) is a perspective view of the front unit of the gaming board as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the front unit of the gaming board as seen from the back. Figure 144 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow path of the gaming balls on the right side of the front unit. Figure 145 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged view of the first attacker unit and the second attacker unit in Figure 144. The front unit 2000 is attached to the gaming panel 1100 from the front, with its front end protruding forward beyond the front surface of the gaming panel 1100 and its rear end partially protruding into the opening 1112 of the gaming panel 1100.

The front unit 2000 comprises a plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open and can accept game balls B that have been shot into the game area 5a; a first starting opening 2002 that is always open and can accept game balls B at a different position in the game area 5a from the plurality of general winning openings 2001; a gate 2003 that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of game ball B; a second starting opening 2004 that can accept game ball B depending on the result of a regular lottery that is drawn when game ball B passes through gate 2003; and a first starting opening 2004. a large prize opening 2005 that can receive game ball B depending on the result of a first or second special lottery drawn by receiving game ball B into first starting opening 2002 or second starting opening 2004; a bonus prize opening 2006 that is located in a different position from the large prize opening 2005 and can receive game ball B depending on the result of a first or second special lottery drawn by receiving game ball B into first starting opening 2002 or second starting opening 2004; and a V prize opening 2007 that gives the game ball B received into bonus prize opening 2006 an opportunity to be received.

Of the multiple (four in this example) general winning openings 2001, three are located to the left of the horizontal center at the bottom of the play area 5a, and the remaining one is located above the vertical center at the right of the play area 5a. The first starting opening 2002 is located directly above the lowest outlet opening 1008 in the horizontal center of the play area 5a. The gate 2003 is located approximately three-quarters of the way up from the bottom in the vertical direction near the right edge of the play area 5a when viewed from the front. The second starting opening 2004 is located in the lower right corner of the play area 5a, slightly higher than the leftmost general winning opening 2001. The large winning opening 2005 is located between the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004. The special winning opening 2006 is located above the second starting opening 2004 and directly below the general winning opening 2001 on the right side. The V winning slot 2007 is located at the rear of the gaming panel 1100, at a height between the special winning slot 2006 and the second starting slot 2004.

The first sub-outlet 2021 is located below the second starting port 2004, and the second sub-outlet 2022 is located to the right of the general winning port 2001 on the right side.

The front unit 2000 comprises a start port unit 2100 which is attached directly above the bottom end of the play area 5a in the horizontal center of the play area 5a and has a first start port 2002; a side unit 2200 which is located to the left of the start port unit 2100 as viewed from the front, along the inner rail 1002, and has three general winning ports 2001; an upper left side unit 2300 which is located slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 as viewed from the front; a first attacker unit 2400 which is located to the right of the start port unit 2100, which is in the lower right corner of the play area 5a as viewed from the front, as viewed from the front, and has a second start port 2004, a large winning port 2005, and a first sub-out port 2021; and a frame-shaped center device 2500 which is located above the start port unit 2100 and side unit 2200, and slightly above the center of the play area 5a as viewed from the front.

The front unit 2000 also includes a second attacca unit 2600, which is located above the first attacca unit 2400 to the right of the center reel 2500 and has a reel winning opening 2006; a side right middle unit 2700, which is located above the second attacca unit 2600 and has one general winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out opening 2022; and a gate member 2800, which is located above the side right middle unit 2700 and has a gate 2003.

[5-8a. Starting unit]
Next, the start opening unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to Figure 140 etc. The start opening unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is located in the gaming area 5a, near the lower end in the center in the left-right direction, directly above the outlet 1008, and is attached from the front to the gaming panel 1100. The start opening unit 2100 has a first start opening 2002 that is always open upward and wide enough to receive only one gaming ball B.

When the start opening unit 2100 is attached to the gaming panel 1100, the first start opening 2002 protrudes forward from the front of the gaming panel 1100, opens upward, and is located directly below the center of the center device 2500 in the left-right direction.

When attached to the gaming panel 1100, the starting port unit 2100 can guide the gaming ball B received in the first starting port 2002 to the rear of the gaming panel 1100 and deliver it to the second discharge passage 3182 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160 in the rear front performance unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000.

[5-8b. Side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to Figure 140 etc. The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting port unit 2100 within the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 has three general winning ports 2001 that are open so that they can always receive game balls B. The three general winning ports 2001 of the side unit 2200 are aligned in an arc along the inner rail 1002. The two general winning ports 2001 on the right side open upward, and the general winning port 2001 on the left side opens to the upper left.

When the side unit 2200 is assembled to the gaming board 5, the three general winning openings 2001 protrude forward beyond the front surface of the gaming panel 1100. This side unit 2200 can guide a gaming ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the gaming panel 1100 and deliver it to the first discharge passage 3181 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160 in the rear front performance unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000.

[5-8c. Upper left side unit]
Next, the upper left side unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to Figure 140 etc. The upper left side unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the gaming panel 1100 from the front, within the gaming area 5a, so as to contact the inner rail 1002 to the left of the side unit 2200. The upper left side unit 2300 has a shelf portion 2301 that is inclined so as to be lower to the right.

When the upper left side unit 2300 is assembled to the game board 5, the shelf portion 2301 protrudes forward beyond the front surface of the game panel 1100. The upper left side unit 2300 can use the shelf portion 2301 to guide the game ball B that has flowed down the left side of the center device 2500 to the right side, below the center device 2500.

[5-8d. First Attacker Unit]
Next, the first attacca unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to Figures 140 to 145. The first attacca unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is located in the gaming area 5a, to the right of the starting gate unit 2100 as viewed from the front, which is in the lower right corner as viewed from the front, and is attached from the front to the front of the gaming panel 1100. This first attacca unit 2400 has a gate 2003, a second starting gate 2004, and a big prize gate 2005 (see Figure 144, etc.).

When viewed from the front, the first attacker unit 2400 has the second starting opening 2004 located at the top and to the right of the center in the left-right direction, the large prize opening 2005 located to the left of the center in the left-right direction and lower than the second starting opening 2004, and the first sub-out opening 2021 located below the second starting opening 2004 and lower than the large prize opening 2005.

The first attacker unit 2400 also includes a second start opening sensor 2401 that detects game ball B received in the second start opening 2004, a special prize opening sensor 2402 that detects game ball B received in the special prize opening 2005, and a magnetic sensor 1050 that detects unauthorized magnetism (see Figure 169, etc.). Two special prize opening sensors 2402 are provided in parallel.

The first attacker unit 2400 is equipped with a second starting gate door 2411 capable of guiding game ball B to the second starting gate 2004, a starting gate solenoid 2412 that opens and closes the second starting gate door 2411 in accordance with the result of a regular lottery drawn when game ball B passes through gate 2003, a large prize gate door 2413 that can open and close the large prize gate 2005, and an attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes the large prize gate door 2413 in accordance with the result of a first special lottery or a second special lottery drawn when game ball B is received at first starting gate 2002 or second starting gate 2004.

As shown in FIG. 144, the first attacker unit 2400, when viewed from the front, consists of a first shelf 2421 extending from near the upper right corner to the left, and a second shelf 2422 extending from the left end of the first shelf 2421 to the left at a distance slightly longer than the diameter of the game ball B, and extending from a position lower than the left end of the first shelf 2421 to the left, but shorter than the first shelf 2421, forming a second starting hole 2004 between itself and the first shelf 2421. a third shelf 2423 extending leftward from the left end of the second shelf 2422, from a position lower than the diameter of game ball B, and shorter than the second shelf 2422; and a fourth shelf 2424 extending leftward from the left end of the third shelf 2423, at a distance four to six times the diameter of game ball B, from a position lower than the third shelf 2423, and lowering to the left, forming a large prize opening 2005 between itself and the third shelf 2423.

The right end of the first shelf 2421 is located to the left of the right edge of the first attacker unit 2400 by a distance slightly longer than the diameter of game ball B. The first shelf 2421, second shelf 2422, and third shelf 2423 are all inclined at the same angle, while the fourth shelf 2424 is inclined at a steeper angle than the first shelf 2421, etc.

The first attacker unit 2400 also includes a first standing wall portion 2425 extending vertically downward from the right end of the first shelf portion 2421, a second standing wall portion 2426 extending vertically downward from the left end of the first shelf portion 2421 to the same height as the lower end of the first standing wall portion 2425, and a third standing wall portion 2427 extending vertically downward from the right end of the second shelf portion 2422 to the same height as the lower end of the first standing wall portion 2425. 7, a fourth standing wall portion 2428 extending vertically downward from the right end of the third shelf portion 2423 to the bottom edge of the first attacker unit 2400, a fifth standing wall portion 2429 extending downward from the left end of the third shelf portion 2423, a sixth standing wall portion 2430 extending downward from the right end of the fourth shelf portion 2424, and a seventh standing wall portion 2431 extending downward from the left end of the fourth shelf portion 2424.

The fifth standing wall portion 2429 extends downward from the left end of the third shelf portion 2423 to a position lower than the fourth shelf portion 2424, then extends slightly longer than the diameter of game ball B so as to become lower to the left, and then extends further downward to the bottom edge of the first attacca unit 2400. The sixth standing wall portion 2430 extends downward from the right end of the fourth shelf portion 2424 to a position lower than the fourth shelf portion 2424, then extends slightly longer than the diameter of game ball B so as to become lower to the right, and then extends further downward to the bottom edge of the first attacca unit 2400. The left-right distance between the bottom of the fifth standing wall portion 2429 and the sixth standing wall portion 2430 is longer than twice the diameter of game ball B.

Furthermore, the first attacker unit 2400 has a first horizontal wall portion 2432 connecting the lower ends of the first vertical wall portion 2425, the second vertical wall portion 2426, and the third vertical wall portion 2427, and a second horizontal wall portion 2433 that slopes downward to the left from a position lower than the lower end of the first vertical wall portion 2425 on the right side of the first attacker unit 2400, leaving a gap between it and the first horizontal wall portion 2432 that allows the game ball B to pass through, and then slopes upward toward the middle of the fourth vertical wall portion 2428 on the left. The second horizontal wall portion 2433 is formed so that the portion of the first sub-outlet 2021 below the second starting port 2004 is its lowest.

The first attacker unit 2400 also has a third horizontal wall portion 2434 that extends from near the bottom of the fifth vertical wall portion 2429 and the sixth vertical wall portion 2430 in a direction toward each other, to near the center between the fifth vertical wall portion 2429 and the sixth vertical wall portion 2430, and a partition portion 2435 that connects the opposing ends of the two third horizontal wall portions 2434 and extends upward.

Furthermore, the first attacker unit 2400 has an upper shelf 2436 that extends in a stepped manner along its top edge, descending to the left, and is spaced apart between the second shelf 2422 and the third shelf 2423 to allow game balls B to flow through. The right end of the upper shelf 2436 is located directly above the left end of the first shelf 2421, and its left end is located slightly to the right of the right end of the fourth shelf 2424. The upper shelf 2436 is also inclined so that the area near its right end is lower to the right.

In addition, although detailed illustrations are omitted, the first attacker unit 2400 has a plurality of abutment parts that are triangular in plan view and protrude into the space between the upper shelf 2436 and the large prize opening 2005, where game balls B can flow to the left, so that they are staggered left and right from the front and rear walls that form the space. These abutment parts allow game balls B rolling on the large prize opening door 2413 to flow in a large zigzag pattern back and forth when the large prize opening 2005 is closed.

This second starting port door 2411 is designed to move forward and backward. When the starting port solenoid 2412 is not energized, the plunger of the starting port solenoid 2412 protrudes due to the spring force, causing the second starting port door 2411 to move forward and close the second starting port 2004. When the starting port solenoid 2412 is energized, the plunger of the starting port solenoid 2412 retracts against the spring force, causing the second starting port door 2411 to move backward and open the second starting port 2004.

When the starter solenoid 2412 is not energized, the plunger protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and when energized, the plunger retracts.

The large prize opening door 2413 is a long, flat plate that is designed to move back and forth. The large prize opening door 2413 can open and close the large prize opening 2005 by moving the plunger of the attacca solenoid 2414 back and forth. When the attacca solenoid 2414 is not energized, the plunger of the attacca solenoid 2414 protrudes due to the spring force, causing the large prize opening door 2413 to move forward and close the large prize opening 2005. When the attacca solenoid 2414 is energized, the plunger of the attacca solenoid 2414 retracts against the spring force, causing the large prize opening door 2413 to move backward and open the large prize opening 2005.

When the Attacka solenoid 2414 is not energized, the plunger protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and when energized, the plunger retracts.

In the normal state of the first attacca unit 2400, the start port solenoid 2412 and the attacca solenoid 2414 are both de-energized (OFF). In this normal state, the plunger of the start port solenoid 2412 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and the second start port door 2411 protrudes forward. In this state, the second start port door 2411 is located above the second start port 2004, preventing the second start port 2004 from receiving a game ball B. In other words, the second start port 2004 is closed by the second start port door 2411 (see Figures 144 and 145).

In addition, under normal conditions, the plunger of the attacca solenoid 2414 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and the large prize opening door 2413 also protrudes forward. In this state, the large prize opening door 2413 is located above the large prize opening 2005, making it impossible for the large prize opening 2005 to receive game ball B. In other words, the large prize opening 2005 is closed by the large prize opening door 2413 (see Figures 144 and 145).

In this normal state, when a game ball B flows down onto the first shelf 2421, the tilt of the first shelf 2421 causes the game ball B to roll to the left, rolling over the top surface of the second starting gate door 2411 and the second shelf 2422 before being released to the left from the left end of the second shelf 2422. The game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2422 will, depending on its momentum, fall onto the third shelf 2423 or the large prize gate door 2413, and roll to the left due to the tilt of these. Note that if a game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2422 hits the underside of the upper shelf 2436 and bounces off to the right, it may enter the gap between the second shelf 2422 and the third shelf 2423.

At this time, game ball B rolling on the large prize opening door 2413 that closes the large prize opening 2005 alternately abuts against multiple abutment sections provided in the space between the upper shelf 2436 and the large prize opening 2005, causing it to roll to the left in a zigzag pattern back and forth. After rolling to the left on the large prize opening door 2413, game ball B rolls over the fourth shelf 2424 and is then released from its left end out of the first attacker unit 2400.

In this first attacker unit 2400, when a game ball B flows down to the right of the first shelf portion 2421, it passes along the right side of the first upright wall portion 2425, falls near the right end of the second horizontal wall portion 2433, and rolls to the left due to the inclination of the second horizontal wall portion 2433, entering the first sub-outlet 2021. Furthermore, when a game ball B enters the gap between the second shelf portion 2422 and the third shelf portion 2423, it passes between the third upright wall portion 2427 and the fourth upright wall portion 2428, falls near the left end of the second horizontal wall portion 2433, and rolls to the right due to the inclination of the second horizontal wall portion 2433, entering the first sub-outlet 2021.

A game ball B that enters the first sub-outlet 2021 is passed to the fifth outlet passage 3185 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160 in the rear front performance unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000 without being returned to the game area 5a, and is then discharged from the fifth outlet passage 3185 onto the lower board holder 1200. This first attacca unit 2400 is configured so that both game balls B that have circulated along the right side of the first shelf 2421 and game balls B that have passed through the gap between the second shelf 2422 and the third shelf 2423 enter the first sub-outlet 2021, and essentially two first sub-outlets 2021 are provided.

In this normal state, when the start port solenoid 2412 is energized (ON) in accordance with the result of the normal lottery drawn when game ball B passes through gate 2003, the plunger retracts against the spring force, and the second start port door 2411 moves rearward. Then, as the second start port door 2411 moves rearward, the top of the second start port 2004 becomes open, allowing game ball B to be received into the second start port 2004. In other words, the second start port 2004 is in an open state.

When game ball B is received into second starting port 2004 while the second starting port 2004 is in the open state, it flows down between the second standing wall portion 2426 and the third standing wall portion 2427, is detected by the second starting port sensor 2401, and is then released rearward from the first attacca unit 2400. Game ball B received into second starting port 2004 and released rearward from the first attacca unit 2400 is passed to the third discharge passage 3183 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160 in the rear front performance unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000, and is discharged from the third discharge passage 3183 onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

On the other hand, under normal conditions, when the attacca solenoid 2414 is energized (ON) in accordance with the special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) determined by receiving a game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, the plunger retracts against the spring force, and the large prize opening door 2413 moves rearward. As the large prize opening door 2413 moves rearward, the large prize opening 2005 is opened upward, allowing the large prize opening 2005 to receive a game ball B. In other words, the large prize opening 2005 is in an open state.

When game ball B is received into the large prize opening 2005 while the large prize opening 2005 is open, it passes between the fifth vertical wall 2429 and the sixth vertical wall 2430, then passes between the fifth vertical wall 2429 and the partition 2435, or between the sixth vertical wall 2430 and the partition 2435, is detected by one of the two large prize opening sensors 2402, falls onto the third horizontal wall 2434, and is released rearward from the first attacca unit 2400. Game ball B received into the large prize opening 2005 and released rearward from the first attacca unit 2400 is handed over to the fourth discharge passage 3184 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160 in the rear front performance unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000, and is discharged from the fourth discharge passage 3184 onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

In this way, according to the first attacker unit 2400 of this embodiment, the game ball B received by the large prize opening 2005 is divided into two by the partition 2435, and each is detected by a different large prize opening sensor 2402 before being released to the rear. This prevents game balls B from becoming stuck between the large prize opening 2005 and the large prize opening sensor 2402, and allows a large number of game balls B to be received in a short period of time.

[5-8e. Center role]
Next, the center role 2500 of the front unit 2000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 140 and 141. Figure 141(a) is an exploded perspective view of the lower right guide passage of the center role, as seen from the front, and Figure 141(b) is a side cross-sectional view of the center role, cut left and right at the separation hole in the front member in front of the lower right guide passage, as seen from the right. The center role 2500 of the front unit 2000 is located within the game area 5a, above the starting hole unit 2100 and slightly above the center as viewed from the front, and is attached to the front of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. The center role 2500 is formed in a transparent frame shape, allowing the performance display device 1600 located behind the game panel 1100 and various performance units provided in the back unit 3000 to be seen from the front.

The frame-shaped center device 2500 has a portion that protrudes forward from the front of the game panel 1100 along its entire periphery, preventing game ball B shot into the game area 5a from entering the frame.

The center device 2500 has a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501 (also referred to as a center frame) extending in the front-to-rear direction, a flat flange portion 2502 protruding from the outer periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and abutting the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, and a flat support portion 2503 protruding from the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501. When assembled to the gaming board 5, the peripheral wall portion 2501 extends rearward to a position where its rear end coincides with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100. The peripheral wall portion 2501 is also formed in a shape that fits along the inner periphery of the opening 1112 in the panel plate 1110 through which the center device 2500 is inserted. When assembled to the gaming board 5, this peripheral wall portion 2501 can prevent game ball B from entering the frame from the outside of the center device 2500.

The thickness of the flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 is thinner than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1/4 to 1/5 the thickness of the panel plate 1110). The flange portion 2502 and the support portion 2503 protrude from the peripheral wall portion 2501 at the same position in the front-to-rear direction. Therefore, the distance from the rear surface of the support portion 2503 (flange portion 2502) to the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110.

Multiple support portions 2503 are provided on the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501. The support portions 2503 are provided in areas of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where the flange portion 2502 does not protrude, reinforcing the peripheral wall portion 2501. The edges of the support portions 2503 that protrude from the peripheral wall portion 2501 are formed in a shape that follows the front shape of the peripheral wall portion 2501 or in a straight line, preventing the support portions 2503 from standing out. The amount of protrusion of the support portions 2503 from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is within the range between the thickness of the support portions 2503 and the thickness of the panel board 1110 (1 mm to 10 mm), ensuring that the support portions 2503 are not noticeable to players while still providing a reinforcing effect.

The center device 2500 also has a transparent, flat closing plate 2505 that closes the rear end of the frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2501. This closing plate 2505 prevents the game ball B from passing through the frame of the center device 2500 and entering the rear (back unit 3000).

The center device 2500 includes a warp entrance 2511, located on the left side of the peripheral wall 2501 when viewed from the front, in front of the front of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), that allows game balls B within the game area 5a to enter; a warp exit 2512 that opens into the frame behind the front of the game panel 1100 and that allows game balls B that have entered the warp entrance 2511 to be released; a stage 2513 that can release game balls B released from the warp exit 2512 into the game area 5a after rolling them left and right; and a stage cover 2515 that covers the top of the stage 2513 (see Figure 138, etc.). The stage cover 2515 prevents game balls B from entering the frame of the center device 2500 from outside by bouncing game balls B that bounce off the stage 2513 back toward the stage 2513.

The stage 2513 of the center role device 2500 is curved with a recessed center in the left-right direction, and is formed in a wavy (W-shape) such that the position corresponding to directly above the first starting hole 2002 of the starting hole unit 2100, that is, the approximate center position in the left-right direction when the center role device 2500 is attached to the panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, is slightly higher than either side. This stage 2513 has a section (center release section 2513a) that is slightly higher than either side in the left-right center, and the lowest section on either side (side release section 2513b) that are inclined so that they become lower toward the front, and game balls B can be released into the gaming area 5a from these sections.

When the center device 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the elevated portion in the center of the stage 2513 in the left-right direction (central release section 2513a) is located directly above the first starting hole 2002 of the starting hole unit 2100. As a result, when game ball B is released from the central release section 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, there is an extremely high probability that it will be received by the first starting hole 2002.

The center device 2500 also has a guide passage group 2520 located in the upper right corner, which consists of two passages through which game ball B can pass. When this center device 2500 is assembled to the game board 5, the right end of the guide passage group 2520 (the end of the upper right corner of the center device 2500) roughly contacts the inner peripheral edge of the play area 5a (the right rail 1005 near the impact stop portion 1006 of the previous component 1000), and is formed so that game ball B hit to the upper right side of the center device 2500 will always pass through the guide passage group 2520.

The vertical length of the guide passage group 2520 is approximately 1/7 of the total height of the game area 5a. Each guide passage group 2520 is formed as a groove that opens to the front, allowing good visibility of the game balls B flowing through them from the front.

The guide passage group 2520 is located outside the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role-piece 2500, and is composed of a first guide passage 2521 that is spaced apart from the peripheral wall portion 2501, and a second guide passage 2522 that extends along the peripheral wall portion 2501 to the right of the first guide passage 2521. The entrances to the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are spaced apart on the left and right. The exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are adjacent on the left and right, and open diagonally downward and to the right, following the arc of the upper part of the right rail 1005.

The guide passage group 2520 is located above the gate 2003 when the center device 2500 is assembled to the game board 5. The right end of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 is located directly below the lower end of the impact stopper 1006 of the previous component 1000, and is configured so that most of the game balls B that come into contact with the impact stopper 1006 enter the first guide passage 2521.

The center device 2500 also has a lower right guide passage 2530 that protrudes to the right from the lower right corner of the peripheral wall 2501 and guides the game ball B from above to the right before releasing it downward. The lower right guide passage 2530 has an entrance that opens upward across the entire width of the front in the left-right direction, and an exit that opens diagonally downward to the left and has a width equivalent to one game ball B.

When assembled to the game board 5, the right end of this lower right guide passage 2530 is approximately in contact with the right rail 1005, and it is located between the first attacca unit 2400 and the second attacca unit 2600. Therefore, the second attacca unit 2600, the side right center unit 2700, and the gate member 2800 are positioned between the guide passage group 2520 and the lower right guide passage 2530.

To go into further detail about the center feature 2500, the center feature 2500 comprises a frame-shaped transparent center base plate 2540 having a peripheral wall portion 2501, a flange portion 2502, a support portion 2503, etc., a transparent, flat front member 2531 attached to the center base plate 2540 so as to close the front side of the lower right guide passage 2530, and a lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 affixed to the front surface of the front member 2531 and printed with a predetermined decoration (see Figure 141).

The center base plate 2540 has a guide passage flange portion 2540a, which forms part of the flange portion 2502 at the lower right corner when viewed from the front and extends flat to the right; a guide passage wall 2540b, which extends along the lower edge of the guide passage flange portion 2540a from a position on the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 2501 forward of the flange portion 2502 and is shorter than the guide passage flange portion 2540a so that the right end is lower; a flat standing wall portion 2540c, which extends vertically along the right edge near the right end of the guide passage flange portion 2540a and extends forward to the same position as the front of the guide passage wall 2540b; and a left guide portion 2540d, which is continuous with the lower edge of the standing wall portion 2540c, extends diagonally downward to the left, then extends diagonally downward to the right, and bends. A gap is formed between the guide passage wall 2540b and the standing wall portion 2540c, allowing one game ball B to pass through.

The center base plate 2540 can guide game ball B that has flowed down from above onto the guide passage wall 2540b to the right using the guide passage wall 2540b, then cause it to flow downward between the guide passage wall 2540b and the standing wall portion 2540c, and then release it diagonally downward and to the left using the left guide portion 2540d. The center base plate 2540 forms most of the lower-right guide passage 2530 with the guide passage flange portion 2540a, guide passage wall 2540b, standing wall portion 2540c, and left guide portion 2540d.

The front member 2531 extends left and right from the same position as the inner circumferential surface of the peripheral wall portion 2501 to the same position as the right edge of the guide passage flange portion 2540a, with its upper edge positioned higher than the upper edge of the guide passage flange portion 2540a and its lower edge positioned lower than the guide passage wall 2540b.

The front member 2531 has an attachment recess 2531a recessed rearward from the front surface to follow the outer periphery, a separation hole 2531b penetrating the attachment recess 2531a from front to rear at a location that coincides with the guide passage wall 2540b in a front view, and multiple mounting bosses 2531c that protrude rearward in a cylindrical shape from the rear surface for mounting to the center base plate 2540.

The attachment recess 2531a is recessed rearward to a depth (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm) greater than the thickness of the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 (see Figure 141 (b)). The left edge of the attachment recess 2531a and the area of the upper edge adjacent to the left edge are set as contact surfaces for attaching the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532.

The separation hole 2531b is a circular hole with a circular interior. When assembled into the center role piece 2500, the front side of this separation hole 2531b is closed by the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 affixed to the attachment recess 2531a, and the rear side is closed by the front surface of the guide passage wall 2540b of the center base plate 2540, creating a closed space inside the separation hole 2531b.

In this embodiment, the separation hole 2531b has an inner diameter within the range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 2531b were any smaller, the diameter of the rod-shaped separation member (tool) inserted into the separation hole 2531b would be smaller, making it more likely to bend and potentially unable to sufficiently press against the lower right guide path decorative seal 2532. If the separation hole 2531b were any larger, the lower right guide path decorative seal 2532 would bend at the separation hole 2531b, potentially compromising the appearance of the lower right guide path decorative seal 2532.

With the center feature 2500 of this embodiment, if the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 cannot be properly attached to the attachment recess 2531a of the front member 2531 during the manufacture of the pachinko machine 1, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole 2531b from the rear of the front member 2531 and the tip of the rod can be used to press the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 from rear to front, causing the edge of the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 to curl forward and be removed. The worker can then pull the curled portion to easily remove the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 from the attachment recess 2531a, allowing the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 to be reattached.

In addition, with the front member 2531 and center base plate 2540 separated, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole 2531b from the rear of the front member 2531 and the tip of the rod can be used to press the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 from behind, making it easy to remove the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 from the attachment recess 2531a, thereby facilitating the replacement of the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 when changing models.

Furthermore, as described above, when the front member 2531 and the center base plate 2540 are separated, the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 can be easily removed from the attachment recess 2531a using the separation hole 2531b, making it easier to separate the components of the pachinko machine 1 by material, and reducing the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, by attaching the lower right guide path decorative sticker 2532 to the attachment recess 2531a, the separation hole 2531b can be hidden from the front, which prevents the separation hole 2531b from spoiling the appearance and makes it difficult for players to notice the existence of the separation hole 2531b, making it difficult for players to plot fraudulent acts using the separation hole 2531b.

In addition, when assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the separation hole 2531b is closed from the rear by the guide passage wall 2540b of the center base plate 2540, which is attached to the rear of the front member 2531 to which the lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532 is affixed. As there is no hole that passes all the way to the rear, as in conventional pachinko machines, it is possible to prevent linear illegal tools such as piano wire from being inserted through the hole into the game board 5 or areas where game balls B are circulated, thereby preventing illegal acts.

In addition, because the guide passage wall 2540b of the center base plate 2540 closes the separation hole 2531b from the rear, even if an illegal tool is inserted from the front through the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 and into the separation hole 2531b, the guide passage wall 2540b prevents it from being inserted (entered) any further rearward. This prevents the illegal tool from entering the game board 5 or the area where game balls B circulate from the front through the separation hole 2531b, preventing illegal acts from being committed. Furthermore, because an illegal tool piercing the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532 leaves a mark on the lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532, it discourages illegal acts, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against illegal acts.

Furthermore, according to the center reel 2500 of this embodiment, a support portion 2503 is provided that protrudes inward from the peripheral wall portion 2501. Therefore, at the location where the support portion 2503 is provided, the peripheral wall portion 2501 becomes the outer edge of the center reel 2500. This allows the inside of the peripheral wall portion 2501 (within the frame of the center reel 2500) to be relatively wider, making it easier to see the performance image from the performance display device 1600 behind, the decorations of the back unit 3000, etc. through the frame of the center reel 2500.

In addition, support portions 2503 that protrude inward are provided in areas of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where flange portions 2502 are not provided, thereby reinforcing the strength of the peripheral wall portion 2501. This prevents the peripheral wall portion 2501 from deforming or being damaged even if game ball B hits the outside of the area of the peripheral wall portion 2501 where support portions 2503 are provided. Furthermore, because support portions 2503 can increase the strength of the center role piece 2500, the center role piece 2500 can be removed from the injection molding die without being deformed.

In addition, the transparent support portion 2503 protrudes slightly from the inner periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501 and is provided partially around the entire periphery of the peripheral wall portion 2501, thereby reducing the obstruction of visibility of the decorative elements of the rear unit 3000 provided at the rear, the performance images of the performance display device 1600, etc.

Furthermore, by providing the support portion 2503, there are areas where the flange portion 2502 protruding outward from the peripheral wall portion 2501 is not provided. Therefore, in areas of the gaming panel 1100 (panel board 1110) close to the support portion 2503, the obstacle nails N can be planted as close as possible to the peripheral wall portion 2501. This makes it possible to maximize the playing area within the playing area 5a using multiple obstacle nails N, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 that allows players to enjoy the original gameplay.

In addition, the peripheral wall portion 2501 has a shape similar to the inner peripheral shape of the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110, and the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 2501 is flush with the rear surface of the panel board 1110. Furthermore, the support portion 2503 is provided on approximately the same surface as the front surface of the panel board 1110. This makes the support portion 2503 less noticeable to the player, and also makes it appear as if the center gimmick 2500 is integrated with the panel board 1110.

Furthermore, because the support portion 2503 is provided on a portion of the entire circumference of the center reel 2500, the frame of the center reel 2500 can be made wider than if the support portion 2503 were provided around the entire circumference, making it easier to see the display screen of the performance display device 1600 located at the rear. In other words, if you want to make the non-circulating area (inside the frame) defined by the peripheral wall portion 2501 (center frame) of the center reel 2500 appear larger, the support portion 2503 can be provided on a portion of the entire circumference of the peripheral wall portion 2501. Alternatively, it is preferable that the support portion 2503 extend out to an extent that it does not overlap with the display screen of the performance display device 1600 located at the rear when viewed from the front.

In the above embodiment, one separation hole 2531b is provided in the front member 2531, but this is not limited to this. Multiple separation holes 2531b may be provided in a location that coincides with the guide passage wall 2540b when viewed from the front.

Alternatively, the separation hole 2531b may be provided in a location on the center base plate 2540 that is more inward (to the right in a front view) than the curved left guide portion 2540d. If the separation hole 2531b is provided in this location, the rear side of the separation hole 2531b is not directly blocked by the center base plate 2540. However, because the guide passage flange portion 2540a and the gaming panel 1100 are located behind the separation hole 2531b, the hole connected to the separation hole 2531b does not extend all the way to the rear of the gaming board 5, thereby achieving the same effect as described above. Furthermore, in this case, even if an illegal tool is inserted from the front through the lower-right guide passage decorative seal 2532 and into the separation hole 2531b, the left guide portion 2540d can prevent the tip of the illegal tool from entering an area where game balls B are circulating, such as the lower-right guide passage 2530. Furthermore, in this case, because the right side of the left guide section 2540d is open, by using a linear tool bent in a J shape, it is possible to insert the tool into the separation hole 2531b from the rear even when the front member 2531 is still assembled, and remove the lower right guide path decorative seal 2532.

[5-8f. Second Attacker Unit]
Next, the second attacca unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figures 140 to 145. The second attacca unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 is located to the right of the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role device 2500, between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the center of the game area 5a in the vertical direction, and is attached to the front of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. The second attacca unit 2600 has a role device winning opening 2006 that opens and closes toward the left.

The second attacca unit 2600 is equipped with a prize winning opening sensor 2601 that detects game ball B received in the prize winning opening 2006, and a magnetic sensor 1050 (see Figure 146) that detects unauthorized magnetism acting near the prize winning opening 2006. The second attacca unit 2600 also has a prize winning opening door 2611 for closing the prize winning opening 2006, a prize winning opening solenoid 2612 for moving the prize winning opening door 2611 to open and close the prize winning opening 2006, a transmission member (not shown) that transmits the forward and backward movement of the plunger of the prize winning opening solenoid 2612 to move the prize winning opening door 2611, and a guide passage 2613 that guides the game ball B received in the prize winning opening 2006 and releases it rearward.

The second attacca unit 2600 has a prize winning opening 2006 that opens to the left at a position to the right of the center in the left-right direction, and a prize winning opening door 2611 is provided to close the prize winning opening 2006 from the left.

The prize winning door 2611 is formed in a so-called wing shape, consisting of a semicircular lower edge that bulges downward, a right edge that contacts the right end of the lower edge and extends linearly upward, and an arc-shaped left edge that contacts the left side of the lower edge and bulges leftward from the top end of the right edge. The prize winning door 2611 has a cylindrical rotation shaft 2611a that extends in the front-to-rear direction with the center of the semicircular lower edge as its axis, and a link pin (not shown) that protrudes cylindrically rearward from a position away from the rotation shaft. The lower rotation shaft of the prize winning door 2611 is rotatably attached so that the upper end can move to the left.

The special prize opening solenoid 2612, not shown in detail, is attached with its plunger protruding downward. The transmission member (not shown) has a base attached to the tip of the plunger of the special prize opening solenoid 2612, and a slit that penetrates in the front-to-back direction and extends left-to-right, into which the link pin of the special prize opening door 2611 is slidably inserted, and is attached so as to be able to slide up and down.

When assembled to the gaming board 5, the second attacca unit 2600 is positioned so that its right edge is approximately in contact with the right rail 1005 of the previous component 1000, forming a space between the device winning opening 2006 and the right edge of the peripheral wall 2501 of the center device 2500 through which the gaming ball B can circulate. Furthermore, when assembled to the gaming board 5, the rear surface of the second attacca unit 2600, including the rear end of the guide passage 2613, protrudes further rearward than the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100.

In the normal state of this second attacca unit 2600, the prize winning port solenoid 2612 is de-energized (OFF), and the plunger protrudes downward due to its own weight and the weight of the transmission member. In this state, the prize winning port door 2611 is upright, and the prize winning port 2006 is closed by the prize winning port door 2611. In other words, in the normal state, game ball B cannot be received by the prize winning port 2006.

In this normal state, when the special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) is determined by receiving game ball B into first starting hole 2002 or second starting hole 2004, and the special prize opening solenoid 2612 is energized (ON), the transmission member moves upward together with the plunger, and the link pin of the special prize opening door 2611 inserted into the slit of the transmission member is pulled upward and slides within the slit, causing the special prize opening door 2611 to rotate counterclockwise around rotation axis 2611a.

As a result, the upper end of the device prize winning door 2611 moves to the left, opening the device prize winning door 2006 to the left, and the device prize winning door 2611 tilts so that the right end is lower. In other words, the device prize winning door 2006 is in an open state. In this state, when game ball B flowing down hits the device prize winning door 2611, it rolls to the right due to the tilt and is accepted by the device prize winning door 2006. After being detected by the device prize winning door sensor 2601, game ball B is guided by the guide passage 2613 and released to the rear. Game ball B released rearward from the guide path 2613 is handed over to the distribution path 3158 of the rear front right decorative unit 3140 in the rear front performance unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000, and is then distributed to either the V winning port 2007 or the losing port 2008, before being ejected onto the lower board holder 1200 via the rear front lower performance unit 3160.

[5-8g. Side right center unit]
Next, the side right center unit 2700 of the front unit 2000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 140 and 144. The side right center unit 2700 of the front unit 2000 is located directly above the second attacker unit 2600 within the gaming area 5a, and is attached to the front of the panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100. This side right center unit 2700 has one general winning opening 2001 and a second sub-out opening 2022.

The side right center unit 2700 has a general winning opening 2001 that is always open facing upward and has a width equivalent to one game ball B in the left-right direction, and a second sub-outlet 2022 that is always open facing upward and has a width equivalent to two game balls B in the left-right direction adjacent to the right of the general winning opening 2001.

The side right center unit 2700 also has a first guide passage 2701 that guides game balls B received in the general winning opening 2001 rearward, and a second guide passage 2702 that guides game balls B received in the second sub-outlet 2022 rearward. The first guide passage 2701 is formed in a crank shape, extending rearward from the general winning opening 2001, then bending to the right and then bending further rearward. The second guide passage 2702 extends from the second sub-outlet 2022 below the first guide passage 2701, then bending rearward. The exits of the first guide passage 2701 and the second guide passage 2702 are lined up one above the other.

When this side right center unit 2700 is assembled to the gaming board 5, the rear ends of the first guide passage 2701 and the second guide passage 2702 protrude further rearward than the rear surface of the panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100.

When assembled to the gaming board 5, the right-center side unit 2700 has its right end approximately in contact with the right rail 1005 of the previous component 1000, its bottom end approximately in contact with the top end of the second attacker unit 2600, and a space through which the gaming ball B can pass is formed between its left end and the right side of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role device 2500. In this right-center side unit 2700, the general winning opening 2001 opens upward slightly to the left of the role device winning opening 2006, and the second sub-out opening 2022 opens upward over almost the entire area between the general winning opening 2001 and the right rail 1005 (see Figure 144).

The side right center unit 2700 can guide a game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 via the first guide passage 2701, and then deliver it to the first back guide passage 3156 of the back front right decorative unit 3140 in the back front performance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 located at the rear. The game ball B delivered to the first back guide passage 3156 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001 and then ejected onto the board holder 1200 below through the back front lower performance unit 3160. In addition, the side right center unit 2700 can guide the game ball B received in the second sub-outlet 2022 rearward beyond the panel board 1110 via the second guide passage 2702, and then deliver it to the second rear guide passage 3157 of the rear front right decorative unit 3140 in the rear front performance unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000 located behind it. The game ball B delivered to the second rear guide passage 3157 passes through the rear front lower performance unit 3160 and is discharged onto the board holder 1200 below.

[5-8h. Gate member]
Next, the gate member 2800 in the front unit 2000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 142 and 143. Figure 142(a) is a perspective view of the gate member as seen from the front, (b) is an exploded perspective view of the gate member as seen from the front, and (c) is an exploded perspective view of the gate member as seen from the rear. Figure 143(a) is a front view of the gate member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line - in (a).

The gate member 2800 of the front unit 2000 is located within the gaming area 5a, between the guide passage group 2520 of the center device 2500 and the side right center unit 2700, and is attached to the front surface of the panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100. The gate member 2800 has a gate 2003 where the regular lottery result is drawn, and which opens and closes the second starting opening 2004 when gaming ball B passes through, and a gate sensor 2801 for detecting that gaming ball B has passed through the gate 2003. The detection hole in the gate sensor 2801 for detecting gaming ball B is designated as gate 2003.

The gate member 2800 has a guide piece 2802 that protrudes diagonally downward and left from near the right edge of its underside. The guide piece 2802 is intended to guide game ball B that has passed through gate 2003 downward and left. This guide piece 2802 is inclined so that, when assembled to the game board 5, its extension passes near the left edge of the general winning opening 2001 in the side right center unit 2700.

When assembled to the gaming board 5, the gate member 2800 is located approximately in the center between the right rail 1005 of the previous component 1000 and the right edge of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role device 2500, forming gaps on both the left and right sides through which the game ball B can pass. This gate member 2800 is located slightly to the left of directly below the first guide passage 2521 in the guide passage group 2520 of the center role device 2500, and is located to the right of directly above the general winning opening 2001 of the side right center unit 2700.

More specifically, the gate member 2800 comprises a gate body 2810 that is attached to the front of the gaming panel 1100 (panel board 1110) and holds a gate sensor 2801, and a gate seal 2811 that is attached to the front of the gate body 2810 and has a predetermined decoration printed on it. The gate body 2810 is formed to be transparent.

The gate body 2810 comprises a flat front plate 2810a that is long from side to side; a horizontally elongated, approximately rectangular attachment recess 2810b that is recessed rearward on the front surface of the front plate 2810a; an erroneous attachment prevention portion 2810c located in the upper left corner of the attachment recess 2810b; a separation hole 2810d that penetrates the front plate 2810a from front to rear near the right end of the attachment recess 2810b; a pair of arms 2810e that extend rearward from both left and right edges of the front plate 2810a; and flat flanges 2810f that extend outward in the left-right direction from the rear ends of the pair of arms 2810e and are connected to each other below the front plate 2810a.

The opposing surfaces of the pair of arm portions 2810e are spaced apart by a distance greater than the diameter of the detection hole of the gate sensor 2801. Furthermore, the flange portion 2810f is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 with its rear surface abutting against the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

The gate main body 2810 also has a storage groove 2810g recessed at a fixed height in the vertical direction on the rear surface of the front plate portion 2810a and on each of the opposing surfaces of the pair of arm portions 2810e for storing the gate sensor 2801, a rearward extension portion 2810h extending rearward from the rear end of the left arm portion 2810e to extend the arm portion 2810e and the storage groove 2810g, and a locking portion 2810i extending rearward from the rear end of the right arm portion 2810e beyond the rearward extension portion 2810h, with its rear end bent leftward, for locking the gate sensor 2801 stored in the storage groove 2810g.

Furthermore, the gate body 2810 has a protrusion 2810j that protrudes into the storage groove 2810g where the front plate 2810a and the left arm 2810e intersect. The protrusion 2810j is formed in a shape that corresponds to the notch 2801a of the gate sensor 2801. The gate body 2810 also has an induction piece 2802 that extends downward from the underside of the right arm 2810e.

The attachment recess 2810b of the gate body 2810 is recessed rearward to a depth (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm) greater than the thickness of the gate seal 2811 (see Figure 143 (b)). The mis-attachment prevention portion 2810c is formed with a C-chamfer that is larger than the chamfers at the other corners of the attachment recess 2810b. In this gate member 2800, the gate seal 2811 (attachment recess 2810b) is rectangular in shape, which is long from side to side, making it difficult to determine the upside-down orientation of the gate seal 2811, and there is a risk that the gate seal 2811 will be attached upside down. However, the mis-attachment prevention portion 2810c makes it possible to identify the attachment orientation of the gate seal 2811, allowing the gate seal 2811 to be attached in the correct orientation (the notch 2811a of the gate seal 2811 aligns with the mis-attachment prevention portion 2810c). Furthermore, if an attempt is made to attach the gate seal 2811 upside down to the attachment recess 2810b, the incorrect attachment prevention section 2810c will cause part of the gate seal 2811 to protrude from the attachment recess 2810b, alerting the worker that the gate seal 2811 has been attached incorrectly.

In this application recess 2810b, the left edge and the diagonal portion of the misapplication prevention portion 2810c are set as contact surfaces for applying the gate seal 2811. This ensures clearance for applying the gate seal 2811 not only in the up-down and left-right directions, but also in the vertical direction of the diagonally extending portion of the misapplication prevention portion 2810c. In other words, there are three effective clearance directions when applying the gate seal 2811: up-down, left-right, and diagonal, making application easier (see Figure 211(a)).

The separation hole 2810d is a rectangular hole that extends vertically. When assembled to the gate member 2800, the front side of this separation hole 2810d is closed by the gate seal 2811 affixed to the attachment recess 2810b, and the rear side is closed by the front surface of the gate sensor 2801 housed in the housing groove 2810g, creating a closed space inside the separation hole 2810d.

In this embodiment, the lengths of the long and short sides of the separation hole 2810d are within the range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 2810d were any smaller, the diameter of the rod-shaped separation member (tool) inserted into the separation hole 2810d would be smaller, making it more likely to bend and potentially unable to sufficiently press against the gate seal 2811. If the separation hole 2810d were any larger, bending would occur in the area of the separation hole 2531b in the gate seal 2811, potentially detracting from the appearance of the gate seal 2811.

The right-side inner circumferential surface of this separation hole 2810d is flush with the bottom surface (surface facing left) of the storage groove 2810g formed in the right-side arm portion 2810e. Furthermore, the vertical dimension of the locking portion 2810i is smaller than the vertical dimension of the separation hole 2810d, and the rear end (claw portion) of the locking portion 2810i protrudes slightly to the left compared to the horizontal dimension of the separation hole 2810d.

In addition to its function of allowing the gate seal 2811, which will be described later, to be removed, this separation hole 2810d can also function as an insertion hole through which a core is inserted to form the rear end of the lower locking portion 2810i when injection molding the gate body 2810, thereby facilitating the injection molding of the gate body 2810.

The gate seal 2811 is offset inward a certain distance from the outer shape of the attachment recess 2810b, and is slightly longer in the left-right direction. The upper left corner of the gate seal 2811 has a C-chamfered notch 2811a that corresponds to the mis-attachment prevention section 2810c, allowing the correct orientation (up and down in this case) for attachment to the attachment recess 2810b to be determined. The entire back surface of this gate seal 2811 is an adhesive surface with adhesive properties.

With the gate member 2800 of this embodiment, if the gate seal 2811 cannot be properly attached to the attachment recess 2810b of the gate main body 2810 during the manufacture of the pachinko machine 1, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole 2810d from the rear of the gate main body 2810 (front plate portion 2810a) and the tip of the rod can be used to press the gate seal 2811 from rear to front, causing the edge of the gate seal 2811 to curl forward and be removed. The worker can then pull the curled portion, easily removing the gate seal 2811 from the attachment recess 2810b and re-attaching the gate seal 2811.

In addition, with the gate body 2810 and gate sensor 2801 separated, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole 2810d from the rear of the gate body 2810 and the tip of the rod can be used to press the gate seal 2811 from behind, making it easy to remove the gate seal 2811 from the attachment recess 2810b, thereby facilitating the replacement of the gate seal 2811 when changing models.

Furthermore, as described above, when the gate body 2810 and gate sensor 2801 are separated, the gate seal 2811 can be easily removed from the attachment recess 2810b using the separation hole 2810d, making it easier to separate the components of the pachinko machine 1 by material, and reducing the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, by attaching the gate seal 2811 to the attachment recess 2810b, the separation hole 2810d can be hidden from the front, which prevents the separation hole 2810d from spoiling the appearance and makes it difficult for players to notice the existence of the separation hole 2810d, making it difficult for players to plot fraudulent acts using the separation hole 2810d.

In addition, when assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the separation hole 2810d is closed from the rear by the front surface of the gate sensor 2801, which is housed in the housing groove 2810g of the gate body 2810 to which the gate seal 2811 is affixed. As there is no hole that passes through to the rear as in conventional pachinko machines, it is possible to prevent linear illegal tools such as piano wire from being inserted through the hole into the game board 5 or the detection hole of the gate sensor 2801, thereby preventing illegal acts.

In addition, because the front surface of the gate sensor 2801 closes the separation hole 2810d from the rear, even if an illegal tool is inserted from the front through the gate seal 2811 and into the separation hole 2810d, the front surface of the gate sensor 2801 prevents it from being inserted (entered) any further rearward. This prevents the illegal tool from entering the game board 5 or the detection hole of the gate sensor 2801 from the front through the separation hole 2810d, preventing illegal acts from being committed. In addition, because illegal tools leave traces on the gate seal 2811 when they penetrate it, people will hesitate to commit illegal acts, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against illegal acts.

Furthermore, the attachment recess 2810b to which the gate seal 2811 is attached is provided with an incorrect attachment prevention section 2810c. This prevents the gate seal 2811 from being attached correctly if the gate seal 2811 is attached upside down. This not only alerts the worker that the gate seal 2811 has been attached incorrectly, but also allows the worker to attach the gate seal 2811 in the correct orientation, preventing the gate seal 2811 from being shipped with the seal attached upside down.

In addition, since the gate main body 2810 has a protrusion 2810j provided in the storage groove 2810g, if the gate sensor 2801 is inserted into the storage groove 2810g from the rear in an orientation where the protrusion 2810j and the notch 2801a of the gate sensor 2801 do not match, the front surface of the gate sensor 2801 will abut against the protrusion 2810j before abutting against the rear surface of the front plate portion 2810a, making it impossible to engage the locking portion 2810i with the rear surface of the gate sensor 2801. In other words, only when the gate sensor 2801 is inserted into the storage groove 2810g with the projection 2810j and the notch 2801a of the gate sensor 2801 aligned will the locking portion 2810i lock onto the rear end of the gate sensor 2801, holding the gate sensor 2801 in place. This prevents the gate sensor 2801 from being assembled in the wrong orientation, reducing the occurrence of problems with the gate sensor 2801.

Furthermore, by accommodating the gate sensor 2801 from the rear in the accommodation groove 2810g of the gate main body 2810 and engaging the locking portion 2810i with the gate sensor 2801, the accommodation groove 2810g, the locking portion 2810i, and the rear side of the attachment recess 2810b can restrict and position the gate sensor 2801 from moving up and down, left and right, and front and rear, facilitating assembly of the pachinko machine 1 (gate member 2800) and reducing the cost of the pachinko machine 1. In this case, because the separation hole 2810d is located in the front portion of the accommodation groove 2810g in the gate main body 2810, when the gate sensor 2801 is accommodated in the accommodation groove 2810g, the separation hole 2810d is closed from behind by the front end of the gate sensor 2801. Therefore, when assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the separation hole 2810d is closed from behind by the gate sensor 2801 attached to the rear of the gate main body 2810 to which the gate seal 2811 is attached (pasted), and because there is no hole that passes all the way to the rear as in conventional pachinko machines, it is possible to prevent linear illegal tools such as piano wire from being inserted into the pachinko machine 1 through the hole, thereby preventing illegal acts.

Furthermore, as described above, by engaging the gate sensor 2801 with the engaging portion 2810i of the gate main body 2810, movement in the forward and backward directions can be restricted. Therefore, even if the gate sensor 2801 is pressed backward by an illegal tool that has penetrated the gate seal 2811 and separation hole 2810d from the front, the backward movement of the gate sensor 2801 can be prevented by the engagement of the engaging portion 2810i. This maintains the closure of the separation hole 2810d from the rear by the gate sensor 2801, preventing illegal activity.

In addition, because the locking portion 2810i of the gate body 2810 protrudes within the front projection range of the separation hole 2810d, the separation hole 2810d can also be used as an insertion hole through which a core for forming the locking portion 2810i is inserted, allowing the gate body 2810 to be formed by injection molding.

From the above, we can understand the following technical concepts A to C.

[Technical philosophy A]
In gaming machines,
"A decorative body with a specified decoration,
a front member having a decorated portion to which the decorative body is attached from the front, and a separation hole that penetrates the decorated portion from front to back and allows the attached decorative body to be separated by pressing from the rear;
a passage member provided on the rear side of the front member so as to close the separation hole of the front member from the rear, the passage member having a passage portion through which the game medium can flow;
The front member is
The decorative portion extends rearward from the rear side of the decorative portion, is recessed from the rear end toward the front, and the separation hole is located on the front end side, and further has a storage portion that can store at least a portion of the passage member from the rear.

Here, the gate seal 2811 corresponds to the decorative body, the gate body 2810 corresponds to the front member, the attachment recess 2810b corresponds to the part to be decorated, the gate 2003 (detection hole of the gate sensor 2801) corresponds to the passage part, the gate sensor 2801 corresponds to the passage member, and the storage groove 2810g corresponds to the storage part.

As a result, the separation hole is located in the front part of the storage section in the front member, so when at least a portion of the passage member is stored in the storage section, the front end of the passage member can close the separation hole from behind, providing a gaming machine with the same functional effects as those described above.

Furthermore, because the front member has a storage section, by storing at least a portion of the passage member in the storage section from the rear, the storage section can restrict and position the passage member's movement in the up/down, left/right, and forward directions, making it easier to assemble the gaming machine and reducing the costs associated with the machine.

[Technical philosophy B]
In gaming machines,
"A decorative body with a specified decoration,
a front member having a decorated portion to which the decorative body is attached from the front, and a separation hole that penetrates the decorated portion from front to back and allows the attached decorative body to be separated by pressing from the rear;
a passage member provided on the rear side of the front member so as to close the separation hole of the front member from the rear, the passage member having a passage portion through which the game medium can flow;
The front member is
The present invention is characterized in that it further has a locking portion that protrudes rearward of the decorated portion within the front projection range of the separation hole and that is used to lock the passage member.

Here, the gate seal 2811 corresponds to the decorative body, the gate body 2810 corresponds to the front member, the attachment recess 2810b corresponds to the part to be decorated, the gate 2003 (detection hole of the gate sensor 2801) corresponds to the passage part, the gate sensor 2801 corresponds to the passage member, and the locking part 2810i corresponds to the locking part.

As a result, the locking portion that locks onto the passage member protrudes within the front projection range of the separation hole. When the passage member is locked onto the locking portion, the passage member is sandwiched between the rear side of the decorative covering portion and the locking portion so as to close the separation hole from behind. This allows the passage member to close the separation hole and also restricts movement of the passage member in the front-to-rear direction.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, by engaging the passage member with the locking portion, movement in the forward and backward directions can be restricted. Therefore, even if the passage member is pushed backward by an illegal tool that penetrates the ornament and separation hole from the front, the locking portion can prevent the passage member from moving backward, maintaining the passage member's closure of the separation hole from the rear, preventing illegal acts.

Furthermore, because the locking portion of the front member protrudes within the front projection range of the separation hole, the separation hole can also be used as an insertion hole through which a core for forming the locking portion is inserted, allowing the front member to be formed by injection molding.

[Technical philosophy C]
In gaming machines,
"A decorative body with a specified decoration,
a front member having a decorated portion recessed rearward relative to the front-to-rear depth of the decorative body and to which the decorative body is attached from the front, a separation hole penetrating the decorated portion from front to back and allowing the attached decorative body to be separated by pressing from the rear, a storage portion extending rearward from the rear side of the decorated portion and recessed from the rear end toward the front, with the separation hole located on the front end side; and a locking portion protruding rearward from the decorated portion within the front projection range of the separation hole.
The device is characterized by being equipped with a passage member that is at least partially accommodated in the accommodation portion from the rear so as to close the separation hole of the front member from the rear, and that is engaged with the engagement portion and has a passage portion through which the game medium can flow.

Here, the gate seal 2811 corresponds to the decorative body, the gate body 2810 corresponds to the front member, the attachment recess 2810b corresponds to the part to be decorated, the gate 2003 (detection hole of the gate sensor 2801) corresponds to the passage part, the gate sensor 2801 corresponds to the passage member, the storage groove 2810g corresponds to the storage part, and the locking part 2810i corresponds to the locking part.

As a result, a decorative body with a specified decoration is attached to the decorated portion, which forms the front surface of the front member located in front of the passage member having a passage section through which gaming media flows, and the decorative body decoration improves the appearance of the passage member. Furthermore, the decorated portion to which the decorative body is attached is recessed further rearward than the front-to-back depth of the decorative body. Therefore, when the decorative body is attached to the decorated portion, the surrounding portion of the front member around the decorated portion protrudes forward from the front surface of the decorative body. Therefore, the decorative body is highlighted by being framed by the forward-protruding portion of the front member, making it easier to achieve the decorative effect of the decorative body's decoration and improving the appearance of the gaming machine.

In addition, because the decorated portion to which the decorative body is attached is recessed toward the rear, the decorative body can be attached using the protruding periphery of the decorated portion on the front member as a guide, making it easier to attach the decorative body in the correct position, reducing the number of failed attachments of the decorative body and suppressing increases in the costs of the gaming machine.

In this gaming machine, the decorated portion of the front member is recessed toward the rear. Therefore, when the decorative body is attached to the decorated portion, the contact surface between the decorative body and the decorated portion is recessed. Therefore, even if you try to remove the decorative body attached to the decorated portion, it is difficult to hook the decorative body from the front, making removal time-consuming. In contrast, a separation hole is provided in the decorated portion. By inserting a rod-shaped member into the separation hole from the rear of the front member and pushing the decorative body forward, the attachment to the decorated portion can be easily released, and the decorative body can be easily removed from the decorated portion. Therefore, if the decorative body cannot be properly attached to the decorated portion of the front member during manufacturing, the attachment to the decorated portion can be easily released by inserting a rod-shaped member into the separation hole from the rear of the front member and using the tip of the rod to press the decorative body from behind. This allows the decorative body to be easily removed from the decorated portion and reattached. Furthermore, with the front member and the passage member separated, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole from the rear of the front member and the tip of the rod can be used to press the decorative body from behind, easily releasing it from the decorated part. This allows the decorative body to be easily removed from the decorated part, facilitating the replacement of the decorative body when changing models. Furthermore, as mentioned above, with the front member and the passage member separated, the decorative body can be easily removed from the decorated part using the separation hole, making it easier to separate the components of the gaming machine by material, reducing the cost of disposing of the gaming machine.

In addition, because a separation hole is provided in the decorated part, the separation hole can be made less visible or hidden from the front by attaching a decorative body to the decorated part, which prevents the separation hole from spoiling the appearance and makes it more difficult for players to notice the existence of the separation hole, making it more difficult for them to plot fraudulent acts through the separation hole.

By storing at least a portion of the passage member in the storage section of the front member from the rear and engaging the locking section with the passage member, the storage section, the locking section, and the rear side of the decorated section can restrict and position the passage member's movement in the up-down, left-right, and front-to-back directions, simplifying assembly of the gaming machine and reducing costs. In this case, because the separation hole is located in the front portion of the storage section in the front member, when at least a portion of the passage member is stored in the storage section, the front end of the passage member closes the separation hole from the rear. Therefore, when assembled into the gaming machine, the separation hole is closed from the rear by the passage member attached to the rear side of the front member to which the ornament is attached. Unlike conventional gaming machines, there is no hole that penetrates to the rear, which prevents linear cheating tools, such as piano wire, from being inserted into the gaming machine through the hole, thereby preventing cheating.

In addition, because the separation hole is closed from the rear by the passage member, even if an illegal tool is inserted through the decoration from the front and into the separation hole, the passage member prevents it from being inserted further rearward (entering). This prevents the illegal tool from entering the passage from the front through the separation hole, preventing illegal acts from being committed. In addition, because the illegal tool leaves a mark on the decoration when it penetrates the decoration, it discourages people from committing illegal acts, providing a gaming machine with a strong deterrent against illegal acts.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, by engaging the passage member with the locking portion, movement in the forward and backward directions can be restricted. Therefore, even if the passage member is pushed backward by an illegal tool that penetrates the ornament and separation hole from the front, the locking portion can prevent the passage member from moving backward, maintaining the passage member's closure of the separation hole from the rear, preventing illegal acts.

In addition, because the locking portion of the front member protrudes within the front projection range of the separation hole, the separation hole can also be used as an insertion hole through which a core for forming the locking portion is inserted, allowing the front member to be formed by injection molding.

[5-8i. Flow of game balls within the game area]
Next, the flow of the game ball B within the play area 5a will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 137, 144, and 145. When assembled on the play board 5, the center device 2500 is located approximately in the center of the play area 5a. Within the play area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on both the left and right outer sides and the lower part of the center device 2500. In addition, a windmill W that rotates when the game ball B comes into contact with it is located above the upper left side unit 2300 on the left side of the center device 2500.

The multiple obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the center device 2500 are adjusted so that game balls B driven into the left side of the center device 2500 will mainly enter the area to the right of the center of the windmill W, and are also adjusted so that they will enter the area to the left of the center of the windmill W with a lower probability. This means that by driving game balls B so that they flow down the left side of the center device 2500, there is a certain degree of probability that they will enter the warp entrance 2511 of the center device 2500.

The multiple obstacle nails N planted between the guide passage group 2520 of the center device 2500 and the gate member 2800 are adjusted so that a game ball B that has passed through the second guide passage 2522 on the left side of the guide passage group 2520 has a higher probability of passing through the gate 2003 than a game ball B that has passed through the first guide passage 2521 on the right side of the guide passage group 2520. Furthermore, the multiple obstacle nails N planted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800 are adjusted so that a game ball B will mainly pass through the left side of the gate member 2800 rather than the right side.

The multiple obstacle nails N planted between the gate member 2800 and the side right center unit 2700 are adjusted so that the game ball B flows mainly to the left of the side right center unit 2700.

In the play area 5a, a game ball B is guided by the outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002 and shot upward from the left side along the periphery of the play area 5a. When a game ball B is shot into the play area 5a so that it flows along the left side of the center device 2500, as shown in Figure 137, multiple obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the center device 2500 will guide the game ball B to enter either the warp entrance 2511 of the center device 2500 or a section to the right of the center of the windmill W, and with a lower probability of being guided to enter a section to the left of the center of the windmill W.

A game ball B guided to the left of the center of the windmill W is guided to the right by the shelf 2301 of the upper left side unit 2300 and flows down to the side unit 2200. It may then be accepted by one of the three general winning openings 2001 provided in the side unit 2200. A game ball B accepted by the general winning opening 2001 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, then handed over to the first discharge passage 3181 of the lower back front performance unit 3160 in the back front performance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, where it is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001 and discharged onto the board holder 1200. When a game ball B is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, a bonus of a predetermined number of game balls B is awarded. A game ball B guided to the left of the center of the windmill W is almost never accepted by the first starting opening 2002. Any game balls B that are not accepted by the general winning opening 2001 are discharged from the outlet 1008 outside the game area 5a.

A game ball B guided to the right of the center of the windmill W may be guided toward the center in the left-right direction (first starting hole 2002) by multiple obstacle nails N arranged diagonally along the bottom edge of the center device 2500, and may be accepted into the first starting hole 2002. Furthermore, a game ball B guided to the right of the center of the windmill W may flow down onto the side unit 2200 through the multiple obstacle nails N arranged diagonally, and may be accepted into the general winning hole 2001 of the side unit 2200.

Game ball B that enters (is accepted by) the warp entrance 2511 of the center device 2500 is supplied to the stage 2513 from the warp exit 2512. Game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls back and forth on the stage 2513 and is released forward from the center in the left-right direction. When game ball B is released into the game area 5a from the central release section 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, there is a high probability that it will be accepted by the first starting opening 2002, as the central release section 2513a is located directly above the first starting opening 2002. When game ball B is released from the side release sections 2513b on either side of the central release section 2513a, there is a certain probability that it will be accepted by the first starting opening 2002.

A game ball B received by the first starting port 2002 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, then handed over to the second discharge passage 3182 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160 in the rear front performance unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000, where it is detected by the first starting port sensor 3002 and discharged onto the board holder 1200. When a game ball B is detected by the first starting port sensor 3002, a first special lottery result is drawn and a bonus is awarded, such as the payout of a predetermined number of game balls B. Game balls B released from the stage 2513 and not received by the first starting port 2002 are discharged from the outlet 1008 outside the game area 5a.

In addition, game ball B that circulates to the left of the center device 2500 within the game area 5a has no chance of passing through gate 2003 or being accepted into the second starting gate 2004, the large prize gate 2005, or the device prize gate 2006.

In the game board 5 of this embodiment, the probability that a game ball B shot into the right side of the center device 2500 will be accepted into the second starting hole 2004 is higher than the probability that a game ball B shot into the left side of the center device 2500 will be accepted into the first starting hole 2002. This encourages the player to shoot game ball B into the left side of the center device 2500 ("hit to the left") when the large prize hole 2005 or the device prize hole 2006 is not open.

In the game board 5 of this embodiment, when game ball B is hit with enough force to penetrate above the portion of the upper edge of the peripheral wall portion 2501 of the center role device 2500 that slopes downward from near the center in the left-right direction to the right, game ball B flows through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520.

Specifically, when game ball B is hit with enough force to strike impact stop 1006 protruding inward from outer rail 1001, which forms part of the periphery of play area 5a (i.e., a right-handed hit), game ball B that strikes impact stop 1006 enters first guide passage 2521. Game ball B that enters first guide passage 2521 is released downward at a position slightly to the right of directly above gate 2003.

The game ball B released downward from the exit of the first guide passage 2521 is guided by multiple obstacle nails N planted between the guide passage group 2520 and the gate member 2800 to the left side of the gate member 2800, gate 2003, and the right side of the gate member 2800 in order of decreasing probability, and flows down toward the side right center unit 2700.

On the other hand, when game ball B is shot into the upper right side of center device 2500, enters the entrance to second guide passage 2522, and flows through second guide passage 2522, it is released downward from the left side of the exit of first guide passage 2521. Game ball B released downward from the exit of second guide passage 2522 is guided so that it has approximately the same probability of landing on gate 2003 and the left side of gate member 2800, and a lower probability of landing on the right side of gate member 2800, and flows down toward side right center unit 2700.

Game ball B that passes through the right side of the gate member 2800 is received by the second sub-outlet 2022. Game ball B received by the second sub-outlet 2022 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and handed over to the second back guide passage 3157 of the back front right decorative unit 3140 in the back front performance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and then discharged outside the game area 5a through the back front lower performance unit 3160. In addition, game ball B that passes through the gate 2003 is detected by the gate sensor 2801 and then released toward the side right center unit 2700. Detection of game ball B by this gate sensor 2801 results in a regular lottery result being drawn, which opens and closes the second start port 2004.

A game ball B that passes through the left side of the gate 2003 and gate member 2800 is likely to flow down the left side of the side-right center unit 2700 due to the multiple obstacle nails N planted between the gate member 2800 and the side-right center unit 2700. It is occasionally accepted by the general winning opening 2001 of the side-right center unit 2700, and rarely by the second sub-outlet 2022. A game ball B accepted by the general winning opening 2001 of the side-right center unit 2700 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, then handed over to the first back guide passage 3156 of the back-front right decorative unit 3140 in the back-front performance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. After being detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, it is ejected onto the board holder 1200 through the back-front lower performance unit 3160. At this time, a bonus of a predetermined number of game balls B is awarded.

The game ball B flowing down the left side of the side right center unit 2700 is guided by multiple obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the side right center unit 2700, and flows down to the left of the special prize winning opening 2006 in the second attacker unit 2600.

At this time, if game ball B is received by first start opening 2002 or second start opening 2004 and a "perfect prize" is drawn as the first or second special lottery result, the prize winning opening 2006 will open and close in a predetermined pattern, so that game ball B that has flowed down the left side of the side right center unit 2700 will be received by the prize winning opening 2006 with a high probability.

A game ball B received in the bonus prize opening 2006 is detected by the bonus prize opening sensor 2601 and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, outside the play area 5a, before being handed over to the distribution passage 3158 of the rear front right decorative unit 3140 in the rear front performance unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000. When the bonus prize opening sensor 2601 detects the game ball B, a bonus of a predetermined number of game balls B is awarded.

The game ball B delivered to the distribution passage 3158 is then distributed to either the V winning opening 2007 or the losing opening 2008 by the activation of the V distribution solenoid 3007. The game ball B distributed to the V winning opening 2007 is detected by the V winning opening sensor 3003 and discharged onto the board holder 1200. On the other hand, the game ball B distributed to the losing opening 2008 is not detected by the V winning opening sensor 3003, but is detected by the losing opening sensor 3004 and discharged onto the board holder 1200. When the game ball B is received by this V winning opening 2007, a special bonus is awarded in which the large winning opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern.

In addition, game ball B that is not accepted by the device winning opening 2006 and flows down to the left of the device winning opening 2006 enters the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center device 2500 and is released from the exit of the lower right guide passage 2530 toward the first attacker unit 2400.

Game ball B, released downward (diagonally downward left) from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center device 2500, flows down onto the first shelf 2421 of the first attacca unit 2400. Note that, because multiple obstacle nails N are planted between the lower right guide passage 2530 and the first attacca unit 2400, game ball B does not flow down from the lower right guide passage 2530 directly to the right of the first standing wall 2425 of the first attacca unit 2400.

A game ball B that flows down onto the first shelf 2421 of the first attacca unit 2400 rolls to the left due to its inclination, rolls over the top surface of the second starting gate door 2411 and the second shelf 2422, and is then released to the left from the left end of the second shelf 2422. Then, depending on its momentum, the game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2422 falls onto the third shelf 2423 or the large prize gate door 2413, rolls to the left due to their inclination, rolls from the large prize gate door 2413 onto the fourth shelf 2424, and is then released from the fourth shelf 2424 to the left, outside the first attacca unit 2400.

Depending on the momentum of the game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center device 2500, it may come into contact with multiple obstacle pins N and flow down to the upper shelf 2436 instead of the first shelf 2421. The game ball B that flows down to the upper shelf 2436 then rolls to the left due to its inclination and is released to the left from the left end of the upper shelf 2436, where it then comes into contact with an obstacle pin N planted on the left, changes direction downward, and flows down near the left end of the top surface of the large prize opening door 2413. It then rolls left across the large prize opening door 2413 and the fourth shelf 2424 and is released out of the first attacker unit 2400. Therefore, even if game ball B rolls on the upper shelf 2436, it may be accepted by the large prize opening 2005 depending on the timing when game ball B is released from the upper shelf 2436 and the timing when the large prize opening 2005 opens.

Furthermore, depending on the momentum of the game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center device 2500, it may bounce to the right by hitting the obstacle nail N or the right end of the upper shelf portion 2436, causing it to flow down onto the first shelf portion 2421, rolling to the right against the inclination of the first shelf portion 2421 and being released to the right (downward) from the right end of the first shelf portion 2421. The game ball B released to the right from the right end of the first shelf portion 2421 passes between the first vertical wall portion 2425 and the right rail 1005 of the previous component 1000, flows down near the right end of the second horizontal wall portion 2433, and rolls to the left due to the inclination of the second horizontal wall portion 2433 to be received by the first sub-outlet 2021. The game ball B received by the first sub-outlet 2021 is not returned to the game area 5a but is handed over to the fifth discharge passage 3185 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160 in the rear front performance unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000, and is discharged from the fifth discharge passage 3185 onto the substrate holder 1200 below.

When game ball B is released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center device 2500, if a "normal win" is drawn as the normal lottery result due to game ball B's passage through gate 2003, the second start gate door 2411 will move and the second start gate 2004 will open in a predetermined pattern, so game ball B rolling to the left on the first shelf section 2421 may be received by the second start gate 2004. When game ball B is received by the second start gate 2004, it will be detected by the second start gate sensor 2401 and then ejected onto the board holder 1200 outside the play area 5a. When game ball B is detected by the second start gate sensor 2401, a second special lottery result will be drawn and a bonus will be awarded, such as a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out.

Furthermore, when a game ball B is released to the left from the second shelf 2422, if the game ball B is received by the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 and a "jackpot" is drawn as the first or second special lottery result, the large prize opening door 2413 will move and the large prize opening 2005 will open and close in a predetermined pattern, so there is a high probability that the game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2422 will be received by the large prize opening 2005. The game ball B received by the large prize opening 2005 is detected by the large prize opening sensor 2402 and ejected onto the board holder 1200 outside the play area 5a. Detection of the game ball B by the large prize opening sensor 2402 grants a bonus in which a predetermined number of game balls B are paid out.

Depending on the momentum of the game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2422, it may come into contact with a step on the underside of the upper shelf 2436, flowing diagonally downward to the right and entering the gap between the second shelf 2422 and the third shelf 2423. A game ball B that enters the gap between the second shelf 2422 and the third shelf 2423 passes between the third upright wall 2427 and the fourth upright wall 2428, falls near the left end of the second horizontal wall 2433, and rolls to the right due to the inclination of the second horizontal wall 2433, before being received by the first sub-outlet 2021.

If game ball B released from the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center device 2500 toward the first attacker unit 2400 is not accepted by any of the second starting opening 2004, the large prize opening 2005, or the first sub-outlet 2021, it is ejected from the outlet 1008 at the bottom end of the game area 5a to the rear and below of the game panel 1100, outside the game area 5a.

For this reason, in order to open or close the large prize opening 2005 or the special prize opening 2006, it is necessary to receive a game ball B into the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 and draw a first or second special lottery result such as a "special prize win" or a "big win." While the first start opening 2002 is always open, the second start opening 2004 requires a game ball B to pass through the gate 2003 to draw (win) a "normal win" as a normal lottery result. Therefore, the opportunity for receiving a game ball B into the second start opening 2004 is lower than for the first start opening 2002.

Therefore, under normal conditions, the player can perform an operation to shoot game ball B so that game ball B flows down the left side of the center device 2500 so that game ball B can be received by the first starting opening 2002. This allows the player to enjoy the original gameplay of the pachinko machine 1 by seeing the movement of game ball B being guided by multiple obstacle pins N, and also heightens the player's anticipation for game ball B to be received by the first starting opening 2002.

When game ball B is received by first starting opening 2002 and a "hit with special feature" or "jackpot" is selected as the first special lottery result, large prize opening 2005 or special feature opening 2006 opens and closes. This allows the player to change the operation for hitting game ball B to a "right hit" so that game ball B can be received by large prize opening 2005 or special feature opening 2006, thereby increasing the expectation of game ball B being received by large prize opening 2005 or special feature opening 2006.

In this case, a guide passage group 2520 consisting of a first guide passage 2521 and a second guide passage 2522 is provided in the upper right corner of the center device 2500. Depending on the guide passage through which the game ball B is circulated, it can be made easier to pass through the gate 2003 or to be accepted by the second sub-outlet 2022. Therefore, the strength of the impact of the game ball B can be adjusted so that the game ball B flows through the desired guide passage, allowing the player to enjoy the operation of hitting the game ball B.

In addition, by performing a "right hit," game ball B may be passed through gate 2003, potentially opening second starting gate 2004 and drawing a "normal hit," and by receiving game ball B into the open second starting gate 2004, there is a possibility of drawing a "special hit" or "jackpot." This can heighten anticipation for the game and prevent a decline in interest.

[5-8j. Magnetic Sensor]
Next, the multiple magnetic sensors 1050 on the game board 5 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 146 to 148. Figure 146 is a front view of the game board showing the arrangement of the magnetic sensors. Figure 147(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the orientation of a magnetic sensor that can detect magnetic field lines from a magnet, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the orientation of a magnetic sensor that cannot detect magnetic field lines from a magnet, (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic perspective view of the detection range of the magnetic sensor, (d) is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between a magnetic sensor and a magnetic body that cannot detect magnetic field lines from a magnet, and (e) is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between a magnetic sensor and a magnetic body that can detect magnetic field lines from a magnet. Figure 148(a) is a perspective view showing the magnetic sensor held by a holding member, (b) is an exploded perspective view showing the holding member and the magnetic sensor separated, and (c) is an exploded view showing a cross-section of the holding member.

Multiple magnetic sensors 1050 are provided on the game board 5 and are intended to detect illicit magnetism (magnetic field lines) acting within the play area 5a. As shown in Figure 148 (c), the magnetic sensor 1050 comprises a sensor body 1051 for detecting magnetism, a white sensor board 1052 on which the sensor body 1051 is mounted, and a transparent sensor case 1053 that covers the sensor board 1052 and the sensor body 1051. Although not shown, in addition to the sensor body 1051, the sensor board 1052 also mounts ICs, transistors, resistors, diodes, connectors, etc.

The magnetic sensor 1050 is rectangular in plan view and is formed as a rectangular parallelepiped with a height shorter than the length of the short side of the rectangle, with one of the height sides chamfered. The internal sensor body 1051 and sensor board 1052 of this magnetic sensor 1050 can be seen from the outside through the transparent sensor case 1053.

The magnetic sensor 1050 can detect the passage of magnetic field lines parallel to the longest side of the rectangular parallelepiped. Therefore, when the orientation of the magnetic sensor 1050 and the positional relationship with the magnet 1055 are as shown in Figure 147(a), the magnetic field lines of the magnet 1055 pass in a direction parallel to the long side, and the magnetism (magnetic field lines) of the magnet 1055 can be detected.

On the other hand, when the orientation of the magnetic sensor 1050 and the positional relationship with the magnet 1055 are as shown in Figure 147 (b), the magnetic field lines of the magnet 1055 pass perpendicular to the long side (perpendicular to the surface of the rectangle formed by the long and short sides), and therefore the magnetism (magnetic field lines) of the magnet 1055 cannot be detected.

For this reason, the magnetic sensor 1050 has a magnetic detection area DA of the magnet 1055 on one side and the other side of the long side of the magnetic sensor 1050, as shown by the hatched area in Figure 147(c). In other words, the magnetic sensor 1050 has a gourd-shaped detection area DA formed by combining two spheres.

In the gaming board 5 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 146, multiple magnetic sensors 1050 are provided, each facing in an appropriate direction. Each magnetic sensor 1050 is positioned so that it can detect illegal magnetic fields acting near the general prize opening 2001, first start opening 2002, second start opening 2004, large prize opening 2005, special prize opening 2006, and warp entrance 2511 in the gaming area 5a. In other words, each magnetic sensor 1050 is positioned in an appropriate direction so that areas within the gaming area 5a where illegal activity using magnets is expected to occur are included in the detection area DA of the magnetic sensor 1050 (the area shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 146).

In addition, on the game board 5, each magnetic sensor 1050 is designed so that its detection area DA does not come into contact with the solenoids or drive motors, so that it does not detect magnetism (magnetic field lines) from the start port solenoid 2412, attacca solenoid 2414, bonus prize port solenoid 2612, V-distribution solenoid, and drive motor provided in the back unit 3000.

Next, as shown in Figure 147 (d), if a magnetic body 1056 is placed in parallel with a magnetic sensor 1050 that can detect magnetic field lines from a magnet 1055, the magnetic field lines will be attracted to the magnetic body 1056, reducing the number of magnetic field lines passing through the magnetic sensor 1050, and the magnetic sensor 1050 may no longer be able to detect the magnetic field lines (magnetism) from the magnet 1055.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 147 (e), if a magnetic body 1057 is placed in series with a magnetic sensor 1050 that can detect magnetic lines of force from a magnet 1055, the magnetic body 1057 will attract the magnetic lines of force, increasing the number of magnetic lines of force passing through the magnetic sensor 1050. This makes it possible to detect the magnetic field of a magnet 1055 that is far away or a magnet 1055 with weak magnetic force.

In conventional pachinko machines, magnetic sensors are attached to the game board using screws made of magnetic material. However, depending on the relative positions of the magnetic sensor and the screws, the magnetic field from the magnet used to commit fraud can be attracted to the highly permeable screws, reducing the number of magnetic field lines passing through the magnetic sensor, making it impossible to detect the approach of a magnet. In contrast, in this embodiment, the magnetic sensor 1050 is attached without using screws.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 148, the magnetic sensor 1050 is attached to the game board 5 via a holding member 1060 made of a non-magnetic material (here, synthetic resin). The holding member 1060 has a storage section 1061 that can store the magnetic sensor 1050 from one side, and an elastic claw 1062 that engages with the magnetic sensor 1050 stored in the storage section 1061. The holding member 1060 also has a protrusion 1063 that protrudes from the leg of the elastic claw 1062 into the storage section 1061. The holding member 1060 is made of transparent synthetic resin.

When the magnetic sensor 1050 is inserted into the storage section 1061 from the outside, the elastic claw 1062 of this holding member 1060 elastically deforms in a direction away from the storage section 1061, and when the magnetic sensor 1050 is stored in the storage section 1061, the elastic claw 1062 returns to its original position and engages with the magnetic sensor 1050. At this time, the protrusion 1063 on the leg of the elastic claw 1062 abuts against the magnetic sensor 1050, pressing the magnetic sensor 1050 against a portion of the inner surface of the storage section 1061 opposite the elastic claw 1062.

The engagement of this elastic claw 1062 prevents the magnetic sensor 1050 from moving in the direction of coming out of the housing portion 1061, preventing the magnetic sensor 1050 from falling out. Furthermore, the abutment of the protrusion 1063 presses the magnetic sensor 1050 into the housing portion 1061, preventing the magnetic sensor 1050 from rattling within the housing portion 1061.

In this way, because the holding member 1060 is made of a non-magnetic material, it is possible to prevent the holding member 1060 from attracting magnetic field lines from the magnet when the magnet is brought close to the play area 5a, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in the magnetic field lines passing through the magnetic sensor 1050. This makes it easier to detect magnetism acting on the play area 5a, allowing for early detection of fraudulent activity using magnets, and by reporting the detection of suspicious magnetic fields by the magnetic sensor 1050, it is possible to dissuade players from engaging in fraudulent activity, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent activity.

In addition, the retaining member 1060, made of a non-magnetic material, avoids the attraction of magnetic field lines from the magnet and prevents a decrease in the magnetic field lines passing through the magnetic sensor 1050. This makes it possible to effectively detect the magnetic field acting on the play area 5a with fewer magnetic sensors 1050 than in conventional pachinko machines, allowing for a smaller number of magnetic sensors 1050 than conventional pachinko machines, thereby suppressing increases in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, by elastically deforming the elastic claws 1062 of the holding member 1060, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be easily attached to and detached from the holding member 1060. This means that the magnetic sensor 1050 can be attached using the elastic claws 1062 without using metal screws made of magnetic material, as is the case with conventional pachinko machines. This also simplifies the assembly of the pachinko machine 1, thereby minimizing the increase in costs associated with the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, because the magnetic sensor 1050 is biased (pressed) toward the housing portion 1061 by the protrusion 1063 of the holding member 1060, the biasing force of the protrusion 1063 can be suppressed, which can reduce the likelihood of the connector connected to the magnetic sensor 1050 becoming detached or of poor contact occurring due to such vibration, ensuring reliable operation of the magnetic sensor 1050.

Furthermore, because the magnetic sensor 1050 is held by the holding member 1060 made of a non-magnetic material and attached to the game board 5, the portion of the holding member 1060 that is attached to the game board 5 can be located away from the magnetic sensor 1050 or outside the magnetic detection area DA in the play area 5a. This minimizes the influence of magnetic materials such as screws used to attach the holding member 1060 to the game board 5, allowing the magnetic sensor 1050 to reliably detect magnetic fields acting on the play area 5a, providing a pachinko machine 1 that is highly deterrent to fraudulent activities using magnets.

Furthermore, the magnetic sensor 1050 is held visibly by a transparent holding member 1060, and the sensor case 1053 of the magnetic sensor 1050 is transparent, so the sensor main body 1051 mounted on the sensor board 1052 can be seen by the player through the transparent sensor case 1053. In this case, because the surface of the sensor board 1052 on which the sensor main body 1051 is mounted is white, the sensor main body 1051, which is a different color (e.g., black), can be made to stand out. This makes it clear to the player that the magnetic sensor 1050 is genuine and not a dummy. The visibility of the magnetic sensor 1050 can discourage those who would otherwise commit fraud using magnets, and can increase the deterrent effect against fraudulent activities, thereby reducing the burden on the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Furthermore, in the magnetic sensor 1050, the surface of the sensor board 1052 on which the sensor main body 1051 is mounted is white, making the sensor board 1052 less noticeable and preventing it from being mistaken for a decorative board on which an LED is mounted. Therefore, even if the sensor board 1052 of the magnetic sensor 1050 is visible, it will not bother a typical player, and it is possible to avoid spoiling the appearance of the play area 5a.

Furthermore, because the sensor body 1051 of the magnetic sensor 1050 can be seen from the outside, it is possible to check from the outside whether the sensor body 1051 is damaged, which simplifies the maintenance work required for the pachinko machine 1 and reduces the burden on the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

[5-9. Overall configuration of the rear unit]
The overall configuration of the rear unit 3000 of the gaming board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to Figure 149 etc. Figure 149(a) is a perspective view of the rear unit of the gaming board as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the rear unit of the gaming board as seen from the back. The rear unit 3000 of the gaming board 5 is attached to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100, and the effect display device 1600 and drive board unit 1700 are attached to the rear side.

The rear unit 3000 comprises a rear box 3010, which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the gaming panel 1100 and is box-shaped with an open front and a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, and a locking mechanism (not shown) attached to the rear surface of the rear box 3010 for detachably attaching the effect display device 1600.

The rear unit 3000 also includes a rear front performance unit 3100 located near the front end of the rear box 3010, a rear upper performance unit 3200 located at the top of the rear box 3010 behind the rear front performance unit 3100, and a rear lower performance unit 3300 located at the bottom of the rear box 3010 below the rear upper performance unit.

The rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000 is box-shaped and open at the front, with a square opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall, a flat frame-like LCD mounting section 3010b that protrudes rearward at a distance from the periphery of the opening 3010a, two fixing grooves 3010c recessed from the inside of the frame toward the right on the right side of the LCD mounting section 3010b into which the right fixing piece 1602 of the performance display device 1600 is inserted, and a cutout 3010d cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the rear box 3010 near the vertical center of the left side of the LCD mounting section 3010b, into which a locking mechanism is attached.

The opening 3010a of the rear box 3010 is formed to be approximately the same size as the display screen of the performance display device 1600. The LCD mounting section 3010b is also formed to be large enough to fit the performance display device 1600 into the frame. A locking mechanism is attached to the rear box 3010, slidable up and down, to the left of the cutout section 3010d on the rear surface when viewed from behind.

The rear box 3010 also has a flat fixing piece 3010e extending outward from its front end. This fixing piece 3010e is attached to the gaming panel 1100 with its front surface abutting the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100. The rear box 3010 has bosses and mounting holes formed in appropriate positions for attaching the rear front performance unit 3100, etc.

The rear unit 3000 also has a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects game balls B received in the general winning opening 2001 provided in the front unit 2000, a first starting opening sensor 3002 that detects game balls B received in the first starting opening 2002, a V winning opening sensor 3003 that detects game balls B that are received in the special winning opening 2006 and then allocated to the V winning opening 2007, and a losing opening sensor 3004 that detects game balls B that are received in the special winning opening 2006 and then allocated to the losing opening 2008 (see Figure 169, etc.).

Furthermore, the back unit 3000 is equipped with a V entry door 3006 that can move back and forth to open and close the V entry port 2007, and a V distribution solenoid 3007 that moves the V entry door 3006 back and forth to distribute game balls B received in the special entry port 2006 to either the V entry port 2007 or the losing port 2008. The general entry port sensor 3001, first start port sensor 3002, V entry port sensor 3003, losing port sensor 3004, V entry port door 3006, and V distribution solenoid 3007 are provided in the back front performance unit 3100.

[5-9a. Backstage Production Unit]
Next, the rear front performance unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 150 to 160. Figure 150 is a front view of the rear front performance unit in the rear unit. Figure 151 (a) is a perspective view of the rear front performance unit in the rear unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the rear front performance unit in the rear unit seen from the back. Figure 152 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the rear front performance unit cut near the center in the vertical direction and seen from above, (b) is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the left portion in (a), and (c) is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the right portion in (a). Figure 153 is an exploded perspective view of the rear front left decorative unit of the rear front performance unit, seen from the front together with the light guide plate. Figure 154 is an exploded perspective view of the rear front left decorative unit, seen from the back, showing only the rear front left first decorative body, rear front left second decorative body, rear front left third decorative body, and rear front left decorative body base. Figure 155 (a) is a front view of the first decorative body on the front left shown in a transparent state, (b) is a front view of the second decorative body on the front left shown in a transparent state, (c) is a front view of the third decorative body on the front left shown in a transparent state, and (c) is a front view of the base of the front left decorative body shown in a transparent state.

Figure 156 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the light guide plate in the back front performance unit and the decorative substrate for illuminating and decorating the light guide plate and the back front left decorative unit from the front, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the light guide plate in the back front performance unit and the decorative substrate for illuminating and decorating the decorative body of the back front lower performance unit from the front. Figure 157 is a front view showing the back front left decorative unit in an illuminating state. Figure 158 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the state in which the first pattern on the light guide plate is illuminating, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the state in which the second pattern on the light guide plate is illuminating. Figure 159 is an explanatory diagram showing the illuminating configuration of the second pattern on the light guide plate. Figure 160 is a front view of the back front performance unit in a state in which the second pattern on the light guide plate is illuminating.

The rear front performance unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000 is attached to the front end of the rear box 3010. The rear front performance unit 3100 comprises a transparent, flat light guide plate 3110 located in the center when viewed from the front, a rear front left decorative unit 3120 located on the left end side of the light guide plate 3110, a rear front right decorative unit 3140 located on the right end side of the light guide plate 3110, a rear front lower performance unit 3160 located on the lower end side of the light guide plate 3110 and connecting the lower ends of the rear front left decorative unit 3120 and the rear front right decorative unit 3140, and an upper connecting base 3190 connecting the upper ends of the rear front left decorative unit 3120 and the rear front right decorative unit 3140.

The rear front right decorative unit 3140 is equipped with a general prize winning port sensor 3001 that detects a game ball B that has been accepted into the general prize winning port 2001 of the side right middle unit 2700, a V prize winning port sensor 3003 that detects a game ball B that has been accepted into the special prize winning port 2006 of the second attacca unit 2600 and then allocated to the V prize winning port 2007, and a loss port sensor 3004 that detects a game ball B that has been accepted into the special prize winning port 2006 of the second attacca unit 2600 and then allocated to the loss port 2008. The rear front right decorative unit 3140 also includes a V winning port door 3006 for allocating game balls B received in the special winning port 2006 of the second attacca unit 2600 to either the V winning port 2007 or the losing port 2008, and a V distribution solenoid 3007 for moving the V winning port door 3006 back and forth (opening and closing).

The rear front lower performance unit 3160 is equipped with a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects a game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200, and a first starting opening sensor 3002 that detects a game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100.

[5-9a-1. Light guide plate]
The light guide plate 3110 in the back front performance unit 3100 is equipped with a first pattern 3111 (see Figure 158(a)) that is illuminated by reflecting only light from the left and right toward the front, and a second pattern 3112 (see Figure 158(b)) that is illuminated by reflecting only light from a specific location below toward the front. In other words, the light guide plate 3110 can illuminate the first pattern 3111 when the multiple light guide plate LEDs 3128g of the back front left decorative substrate 3128 in the back front left decorative unit 3120 described below and the multiple light guide plate LEDs of the back front right first decorative substrate 3148, back front right second decorative substrate 3149, and back front right light guide plate decorative substrate 3150 in the back front right decorative unit 3140 are illuminated. In addition, when the multiple LEDs 3176 on the left decorative board 3174 below the light guide plate and the right decorative board 3175 below the light guide plate of the back front lower performance unit 3160 are illuminated, the second image 3112 can be displayed illuminated.

As shown, the first pattern 3111 of the light guide plate 3110 is composed of a stylized letter "A" in the center and outstretched "wing" patterns on both sides of it. As shown, this first pattern 3111 is configured so that the shade and brightness of the light-emitting display vary depending on the area of the pattern, enhancing the design and decorativeness of the pattern. More specifically, in Figure 158(a), the darkest shaded areas of the first pattern 3111 are composed of multiple points that emit light in the same color as the light from the LED, the lightest shaded areas are composed of multiple points that emit light by splitting the cocktail light from the LED, and the other shaded areas are composed of multiple lines that emit light in the same color as the light from the LED.

Here, cocktail light refers to light of a color that contains two or more of the three primary colors of light. For example, when cocktail light, i.e., yellow light made by mixing red and green light, is irradiated onto the spectral light-emitting unit, the yellow light components are split into red and green light, resulting in areas that appear red or green. Alternatively, when cocktail light, white light is irradiated onto the spectral light-emitting unit, the white light components are split into red, green, and blue light, resulting in areas that appear red, green, or blue, or light of an appropriate mixture of these colors, resulting in a sparkling rainbow of colors. Furthermore, when light of only one of the three primary colors is irradiated onto this spectral light-emitting unit, that light will emit light of that color because there are no components that are split into separate colors. As a result, the spectral light-emitting unit can emit light of a single color or a sparkling array of multiple colors depending on the color of light it irradiates, allowing for a more diverse range of lighting effects.

LEDs (such as LEDs 3128g for light guide plates) for illuminating and displaying the first pattern 3111 are mounted on the rear front left decorative substrate 3128 of the rear front left decorative unit 3120, and the rear front right first decorative substrate 3148, rear front right second decorative substrate 3149, and rear front right light guide plate decorative substrate 3150 of the rear front right decorative unit 3140.

The second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 is composed of multiple lines 3113 (straight lines) extending radially upward from multiple laterally spaced locations near the bottom edge. Each line 3113 of the second pattern 3112 is composed of multiple dots that emit light in the same color as the light from the LEDs 3176 on the left decorative substrate 3174 and right decorative substrate 3175 below the light guide plate, which will be described later. The multiple lines 3113 that make up the second pattern 3112 are formed to reflect only the light from their corresponding LEDs 3176 forward, and are each formed to be able to emit light independently.

The second pattern 3112 has multiple lines 3113 divided into five line groups 3114: from left to right, first line group 3114a, second line group 3114b, third line group 3114c, fourth line group 3114d, and fifth line group 3114e. Each line group 3114 is made up of five lines 3113: from left to right, first line 3113a, second line 3113b, third line 3113c, fourth line 3113d, and fifth line 3113e. The five lines 3113 in one line group 3114, first line 3113a to fifth line 3113e, have their bottom ends positioned in the same position and extend radially upward from the center of their bottom ends.

The illuminated display of this second image 3112 allows the player to see an illumination effect similar to that of a searchlight shining from below on a concert stage, making the gaming area 5a appear dazzling and entertaining the player, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

The LEDs 3176 for illuminating the second image 3112 are mounted on the left decorative board 3174 below the light guide plate and the right decorative board 3175 below the light guide plate of the lower front back performance unit 3160 in the back front performance unit 3100.

[5-9a-2. Back front left decorative unit]
The back-front left decorative unit 3120 in the back-front performance unit 3100 forms a predetermined logo in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) and has a long back-front left logo decorative part 3121 made up of multiple alphabetical characters, a back-front upper left logo decorative part 3122 located above the back-front left logo decorative part 3121 and featuring a stylized letter "A", and a back-front left sub-decorative part 3123 located to the left of the back-front left logo decorative part 3121.

The back front left decorative unit 3120 comprises a transparent back front left first decorative body 3124 which has a vertically elongated rectangular shape when viewed from the front, a transparent back front left second decorative body 3125 located behind the back front left first decorative body 3124, a transparent back front left third decorative body 3126 located behind the back front left second decorative body 3125, and a transparent back front left decorative body base 3127 located behind the back front left third decorative body 3126.

The back front left decorative unit 3120 also includes a back front left decorative substrate 3128 for illuminating and decorating the first pattern 3111 of the light guide plate 3110, the back front left logo decorative portion 3121, the back front upper left logo decorative portion 3122, and the back front left sub-decorative portion 3123, a back front upper left decorative substrate 3129 for illuminating and decorating the back front upper left logo decorative portion 3122, and a back front lower left decorative substrate 3130 for illuminating and decorating the back front left logo decorative portion 3121 and the back front left sub-decorative portion 3123.

Furthermore, the rear front left decorative unit 3120 is equipped with a rear front left reflector 3131 located on the right side of the rear front left decorative substrate 3128, a rear front upper left reflector 3132 located below the rear front upper left decorative substrate 3129, and a rear front lower left reflector 3133 located above the rear front lower left decorative substrate 3130.

The back front left decorative unit 3120 also includes a left diffusion lens 3134 located between the back front left third decorative body 3126 and the back front left decorative body base 3127.

The rear front left first decorative body 3124 is attached to the front of the rear front left decorative body base 3127 so as to sandwich the rear front left second decorative body 3125, the rear front left third decorative body 3126, the left diffusion lens 3134, and the left end of the light guide plate 3110. The rear front left first decorative body 3124 is formed in the shape of a transparent flat plate, elongated vertically. The rear front left first decorative body 3124 has a partition decorative portion 3124a at a location approximately 3/4 of the height from the bottom that extends left and right and penetrates front and back.

The rear front left first decorative body 3124 also has multiple through decorative portions 3124b that penetrate from front to back. The multiple through decorative portions 3124b are provided near the upper and lower ends, and near the upper right end of the dividing decorative portion 3124a. The through decorative portions 3124b are formed in a diamond shape, like a square with the four sides replaced by arcs bulging inward.

The back front left first decorative body 3124 also has a first front left logo decoration 3124c that is located below the dividing decoration 3124a on the front surface and forms part of the back front left logo decoration 3121, and a relief-shaped first back left logo decoration 3124d that is located in a position on the back surface corresponding to the first front left logo decoration 3124c. The right edge of the back front left first decorative body 3124 is formed in a shape that follows the logo character strings of the first front left logo decoration 3124c and the first back left logo decoration 3124d.

The back front left first decorative body 3124 also has a first upper left logo decorative portion 3124e, which is provided in relief above the dividing decorative portion 3124a on the back surface and forms part of the back front left upper left logo decorative portion 3122, and multiple first left sub-decorative portions 3124f, which are provided in relief to the left of the first back left logo decorative portion 3124d on the back surface and form part of the back front left sub-decorative portion 3123. The first upper left logo decorative portion 3124e forms the outermost part of the back front left upper left logo decorative portion 3122. The first left sub-decorative portion 3124f is formed in a row above and below, with a cloisonné pattern formed by overlapping quarters of the same sized circles and removing a portion of one circle, and a diamond pattern formed by removing the outer circle of the cloisonné pattern.

The rear front left first decorative body 3124 is shown as opaque in Figures 153 and 154, but is actually transparent, so that the first rear left logo decorative part 3124d, first upper left logo decorative part 3124e, and first left sub-decorative part 3124f, which are provided on the rear surface, can be seen from the front, as shown in Figure 155(a).

When assembled to the back-front-left decorative unit 3120, the back-front-left first decorative body 3124 is located in front of the back-front-left second decorative body 3125 and is attached at an angle so that the right side is positioned rearward relative to the left side (see Figure 152). Furthermore, when assembled, the back-front-left first decorative body 3124 is positioned so that its left side is in contact with the right side of the board holder 3125b of the back-front-left second decorative body 3125, with the first lower LED 3128a and first upper LED 3128b of the back-front-left decorative board 3128 located to the left of that. Furthermore, when assembled, the back-front-left first decorative body 3124 has the first LED of the back-front-left upper decorative board 3129 located above the top surface, and the first LED 3130a of the back-front-left lower decorative board 3130 located below the bottom surface.

When the first lower LED 3128a on the back front left decorative board 3128 and the first LED 3130a on the back front left lower decorative board 3130 of the back front left first decorative body 3124 are illuminated, the first front left logo decorative part 3124c, first back left logo decorative part 3124d, and first left sub-decorative part 3124f are illuminated by light entering the interior from a portion below the partition decorative part 3124a on the left side via the board holding part 3125b of the back front left second decorative body 3125, and light entering the interior from the underside. At this time, the inner surface of the partition decorative part 3124a and the inner surface of the through decorative part 3124b located near the bottom end are also illuminated.

In addition, when light entering the partition decorative portion 3124a from the first lower LED 3128a on the rear front left decorative substrate 3128 or the first LED 3130a on the rear front left lower decorative substrate 3130 reaches the lower inner circumferential surface, a portion of the light is reflected by the inner circumferential surface toward the lower interior of the partition decorative portion 3124a, while the remainder is emitted from the inner circumferential surface toward the inside of the hole in the partition decorative portion 3124a. When the light emitted toward the interior of the partition decorative portion 3124a reaches the inner circumferential surface on the opposite side, a portion of the light is reflected toward the interior of the partition decorative portion 3124a, while the remainder is incident from the inner circumferential surface toward the upper interior of the partition decorative portion 3124a. In this way, the light from the first lower LED 3128a on the back front left decorative board 3128 and the first LED 3130a on the back front left lower decorative board 3130 is greatly dimmed by passing through the dividing decorative part 3124a, so the light from the first lower LED 3128a on the back front left decorative board 3128 and the first LED 3130a on the back front left lower decorative board 3130 hardly causes the first upper left logo decorative part 3124e above the dividing decorative part 3124a to be illuminated (illuminated decoration), and only the first front left logo decorative part 3124c, first back left logo decorative part 3124d and first left sub-decorative part 3124f can be brightly illuminated.

In addition, when the first upper LED 3128b on the back front left decorative board 3128 and the first LED on the back front left upper decorative board 3129 of the back front left first decorative body 3124 are illuminated, the first upper left logo decorative part 3124e is illuminated and decorated by light that enters the interior from a portion above the partition decorative part 3124a on the left side via the board holding part 3125b of the back front left second decorative body 3125, and light that enters the interior from the top. At this time, the inner surface of the partition decorative part 3124a and the through decorative part located above the partition decorative part 3124a are also illuminated and decorated.

In addition, when light entering the interior of the partition decorative portion 3124a from the first upper LED 3128b on the rear front left decorative substrate 3128 or the first LED on the rear front left upper decorative substrate 3129 reaches the upper inner circumferential surface, a portion of the light that reaches the interior is reflected by the inner circumferential surface toward the upper interior of the partition decorative portion 3124a, while the remainder is emitted from the inner circumferential surface toward the inside of the hole in the partition decorative portion 3124a. When the light emitted toward the interior of the partition decorative portion 3124a reaches the inner circumferential surface on the opposite side, a portion of the light is reflected toward the interior of the partition decorative portion 3124a, while the remainder is incident from the inner circumferential surface toward the lower interior of the partition decorative portion 3124a. In this way, the light from the first upper LED 3128b on the back front left decorative board 3128 and the first LED on the back front upper left decorative board 3129 is greatly dimmed by passing through the dividing decorative part 3124a, so the light from the first upper LED 3128b on the back front left decorative board 3128 and the first LED on the back front upper left decorative board 3129 does not cause the first front left logo decorative part 3124c, first back left logo decorative part 3124d, or first left sub-decorative part 3124f below the dividing decorative part 3124a to emit almost no light (illumination decoration), and only the first upper left logo decorative part 3124e and the upper through decorative part 3124b can be brightly illuminated.

In this way, the rear front left first decorative body 3124 is configured so that the upper and lower sides can be illuminated (illuminated) independently, with the dividing decorative portion 3124a as the boundary.

The rear-front-left second decorative body 3125 is entirely transparent and has a flat decorative plate portion 3125a parallel to the rear-front-left first decorative body 3124, and a board holding portion 3125b provided on the periphery (left, top, and bottom edges) of the decorative plate portion 3125a excluding the right edge. The board holding portion 3125b extends outward beyond the decorative plate portion 3125a, protrudes forward, and is recessed forward from the rear side. The board holding portion 3125b cooperates with the board holding portion 3127b of the rear-front-left decorative body base 3127 to clamp and hold the rear-front-left decorative board 3128, the rear-front-left upper decorative board 3129, and the rear-front-left lower decorative board 3130. The front of the board holding portion 3125b of the rear front left second decorative body 3125 is parallel to the front of the gaming panel 1100, while the decorative plate portion 3125a is inclined so that the right side is positioned further back than the left side.

The rear front left second decorative body 3125 also has a partition decorative portion 3125c that extends left and right and penetrates front and back at a location approximately three-quarters of the height from the bottom of the decorative plate portion 3125a. This partition decorative portion 3125c is the same size and height as the partition decorative portion 3124a of the rear front left first decorative body 3124.

The back front left second decorative body 3125 also has a relief-shaped second back left logo decorative part 3125d that is located below the dividing decorative part 3125c on the rear surface and forms part of the back front left logo decorative part 3121. The right edge of the back front left second decorative body 3125 is formed in a shape that follows the logo text on the second back left logo decorative part 3125d.

The back front left second decorative body 3125 also has a second upper left logo decorative portion 3125e, which is provided in relief above the dividing decorative portion 3125c on the back surface and forms part of the back front left upper left logo decorative portion 3122, and multiple second left sub-decorative portions 3125f, which are provided in relief to the left of the second back left logo decorative portion 3125d on the back surface and form part of the back front left sub-decorative portion 3123. The second upper left logo decorative portion 3125e is formed to be slightly smaller in size than the first upper left logo decorative portion 3124e of the back front left first decorative body 3124. The second left sub-decorative portion 3125f is provided in a position corresponding to the first left sub-decorative portion 3124f and is formed to be similar in shape but slightly smaller.

The back front left second decorative body 3125 is shown as opaque in Figures 153 and 154, etc., but is actually transparent, so as shown in Figure 155(b), the second back left logo decorative part 3125d, second upper left logo decorative part 3125e, and second left sub-decorative part 3125f, which are provided on the back surface, can be seen from the front.

When the rear front left second decorative body 3125 is assembled to the rear front left decorative unit 3120, as shown in Figure 152, etc., the rear front left first decorative body 3124 is located in front of the decorative plate portion 3125a, and the rear front left third decorative body 3126 is located behind it. Furthermore, when the rear front left second decorative body 3125 is assembled, the front end sides of the rear front left decorative board 3128 and rear front left reflector 3131, the front end sides of the rear front left upper decorative board 3129 and rear front left upper reflector 3132, and the front end sides of the rear front left lower decorative board 3130 and rear front left lower reflector 3133 are inserted into the forward-recessed board holding portion 3125b. The second lower LED 3128c and second upper LED 3128d of the rear front left decorative board 3128 are located to the left of the left surface of the decorative plate portion 3125a, the second LED of the rear front upper left decorative board 3129 is located above the top surface, and the second LED 3130b of the rear front lower left decorative board 3130 is located below the bottom surface.

When the second lower LED 3128c on the back front left decorative board 3128 and the second LED 3130b on the back front left lower decorative board 3130 are illuminated, the second back left logo decorative part 3125d and the second left sub-decorative part 3125f are illuminated by light entering the interior from a portion below the dividing decorative part 3125c on the left surface of the decorative plate part 3125a, and light entering the interior from the underside of the decorative plate part 3125a. At this time, the inner surface of the dividing decorative part 3125c is also illuminated.

In addition, when light entering the partition decorative portion 3125c from the second lower LED 3128c on the rear front left decorative substrate 3128 or the second LED 3130b on the rear front left lower decorative substrate 3130 reaches the lower inner circumferential surface, a portion of the light is reflected by the inner circumferential surface toward the lower interior of the partition decorative portion 3125c, while the remainder is emitted from the inner circumferential surface toward the inside of the hole in the partition decorative portion 3125c. When the light emitted toward the interior of the partition decorative portion 3125c reaches the inner circumferential surface on the opposite side, a portion of the light is reflected toward the interior of the partition decorative portion 3125c, while the remainder is incident from the inner circumferential surface toward the upper interior of the partition decorative portion 3125c. In this way, the light from the second lower LED 3128c on the back front left decorative board 3128 and the second LED 3130b on the back front left lower decorative board 3130 is significantly dimmed by passing through the dividing decorative part 3125c, so the light from the second lower LED 3128c on the back front left decorative board 3128 and the second LED 3130b on the back front left lower decorative board 3130 hardly causes the second upper left logo decorative part 3125e above the dividing decorative part 3125c to be illuminated (illuminated decoration), and only the second back left logo decorative part 3125d and the second left sub-decorative part 3125f can be brightly illuminated.

In addition, when the second upper LED 3128d on the back front left decorative board 3128 and the second LED on the back front left upper decorative board 3129 of the back front left second decorative body 3125 are illuminated, the second upper left logo decorative part 3125e is illuminated and decorated by light entering the interior from a position above the dividing decorative part 3125c on the left surface of the decorative plate part 3125a, and light entering the interior from the top surface of the decorative plate part 3125a. At this time, the inner surface of the dividing decorative part 3125c is also illuminated and decorated.

In addition, when light entering the partition decorative portion 3125c from the second upper LED 3128d on the rear front left decorative substrate 3128 or the second LED on the rear front left upper decorative substrate 3129 reaches the upper inner circumferential surface, a portion of the light is reflected by the inner circumferential surface toward the upper interior side of the partition decorative portion 3125c, while the remainder is emitted from the inner circumferential surface toward the inside of the hole in the partition decorative portion 3125c. When the light emitted toward the interior of the partition decorative portion 3125c reaches the inner circumferential surface on the opposite side, a portion of the light is reflected toward the interior side of the partition decorative portion 3125c, while the remainder is incident from the inner circumferential surface toward the lower interior side of the partition decorative portion 3125c. In this way, the light from the second upper LED 3128d on the back front left decorative board 3128 and the second LED on the back front upper left decorative board 3129 is greatly dimmed by passing through the dividing decorative part 3125c, so the light from the second upper LED 3128d on the back front left decorative board 3128 and the second LED on the back front upper left decorative board 3129 does not cause the second back left logo decorative part 3125d and second left sub-decorative part 3125f below the dividing decorative part 3125c to emit almost no light (illuminating decoration), and only the second upper left logo decorative part 3125e can be brightly illuminated.

In this way, the back front left second decorative body 3125 is configured so that the upper and lower sides can be illuminated (illuminated) independently, with the dividing decorative portion 3125c as the boundary.

The rear front left third decorative body 3126 is entirely transparent and has a flat decorative plate portion 3126a parallel to the decorative plate portions 3125a of the rear front left first decorative body 3124 and the rear front left second decorative body 3125, and a flange portion 3126b extending rearward from the periphery (left side, top side, bottom side) of the decorative plate portion 3126a excluding the right side. The rear surface of the flange portion 3126b of the rear front left third decorative body 3126 is parallel to the front surface of the gaming panel 1100, while the decorative plate portion 3126a is inclined so that the right side is positioned further rearward than the left side.

The rear front left third decorative body 3126 also has a partition decorative portion 3126c that extends left and right and penetrates front and back at a location approximately 3/4 of the height from the bottom of the decorative plate portion 3126a. This partition decorative portion 3126c is the same size and height as the partition decorative portion 3124a of the rear front left first decorative body 3124.

The back front left third decorative body 3126 also has a relief-shaped third back left logo decorative part 3126d that is located below the dividing decorative part 3126c on the rear surface and forms part of the back front left logo decorative part 3121. The right side of the back front left third decorative body 3126 is formed in a shape that follows the logo text on the third back left logo decorative part 3126d.

The back front left third decorative body 3126 also has a third upper left logo decorative portion 3126e, which is provided in relief above the dividing decorative portion 3126c on the back surface and forms part of the back front left upper left logo decorative portion 3122, and multiple third left sub-decorative portions 3126f, which are provided in relief to the left of the third back left logo decorative portion 3126d on the back surface and form part of the back front left sub-decorative portion 3123. The third upper left logo decorative portion 3126e is formed to be slightly smaller in size than the second upper left logo decorative portion 3125e of the back front left second decorative body 3125. The third left sub-decorative portion 3126f is provided in a position corresponding to the first left sub-decorative portion 3124f, and is formed to be similar in shape and between the size of the first left sub-decorative portion 3124f and the second left sub-decorative portion 3125f.

The rear front left third decorative body 3126 is shown as opaque in Figures 153 and 154, but is actually transparent, so that the third rear left logo decorative part 3126d, the third upper left logo decorative part 3126e, and the third left sub-decorative part 3126f, which are located on the rear surface, can be seen from the front, as shown in Figure 155(c).

When the rear-front-left third decorative body 3126 is assembled to the rear-front-left decorative unit 3120, as shown in Figure 152, the decorative plate portion 3125a of the rear-front-left first decorative body 3124 and the rear-front-left second decorative body 3125 is located in front of the decorative plate portion 3126a, and the light guide plate 3110 and left diffusion lens 3134 are located behind it. Furthermore, when the rear-front-left third decorative body 3126 is assembled, the third lower LED 3128e and third upper LED 3128f of the rear-front-left decorative board 3128 are located to the left of the left surface of the decorative plate portion 3126a, the third LED of the rear-front-left upper decorative board 3129 is located above the top surface, and the third LED 3130c of the rear-front-left lower decorative board 3130 is located below the bottom surface.

When the third lower LED 3128e on the back front left decorative board 3128 and the third LED 3130c on the back front left lower decorative board 3130 are illuminated, the third back left logo decorative part 3126d and the third left sub-decorative part 3126f are illuminated by light entering the interior from a position below the dividing decorative part 3126c on the left surface of the decorative plate part 3126a, and light entering the interior from the underside of the decorative plate part 3126a. At this time, the inner surface of the dividing decorative part 3126c is also illuminated.

In addition, when light entering the partition decorative portion 3126c from the third lower LED 3128e on the rear front left decorative substrate 3128 or the third LED 3130c on the rear front left lower decorative substrate 3130 reaches the lower inner circumferential surface, a portion of the light is reflected by the inner circumferential surface toward the lower interior of the partition decorative portion 3126c, while the remainder is emitted from the inner circumferential surface toward the inside of the hole in the partition decorative portion 3126c. When the light emitted toward the interior of the partition decorative portion 3126c reaches the inner circumferential surface on the opposite side, a portion of the light is reflected toward the interior of the partition decorative portion 3126c, while the remainder is incident from the inner circumferential surface toward the upper interior of the partition decorative portion 3126c. In this way, the light from the third lower LED 3128e on the back front left decorative board 3128 and the third LED 3130c on the back front left lower decorative board 3130 is greatly dimmed by passing through the dividing decorative part 3126c, so the light from the third lower LED 3128e on the back front left decorative board 3128 and the third LED 3130c on the back front left lower decorative board 3130 hardly causes the third upper left logo decorative part 3126e above the dividing decorative part 3126c to be illuminated (illuminated decoration), and only the third back left logo decorative part 3126d and the third left sub-decorative part 3126f can be brightly illuminated.

In addition, when the third upper LED 3128f on the back front left decorative board 3128 and the third LED on the back front left upper decorative board 3129 of the back front left third decorative body 3126 are illuminated, the third upper left logo decorative part 3126e is illuminated and decorated by light entering the interior from a position above the dividing decorative part 3126c on the left surface of the decorative plate part 3126a, and light entering the interior from the top surface of the decorative plate part 3126a. At this time, the inner surface of the dividing decorative part 3126c is also illuminated and decorated.

In addition, when light entering the interior of the partition decorative part 3126c from the third upper LED 3128f on the rear front left decorative board 3128 or the third LED on the rear front left upper decorative board 3129 reaches the upper inner circumferential surface, a portion of the light is reflected by the inner circumferential surface toward the upper interior of the partition decorative part 3126c, while the remainder is emitted from the inner circumferential surface toward the inside of the hole in the partition decorative part 3126c. When the light emitted toward the interior of the partition decorative part 3126c reaches the inner circumferential surface on the opposite side, a portion of the light is reflected toward the interior of the partition decorative part 3126c, while the remainder is incident from the inner circumferential surface toward the lower interior of the partition decorative part 3126c. In this way, the light from the third upper LED 3128f on the back front left decorative board 3128 and the third LED on the back front upper left decorative board 3129 is greatly dimmed by passing through the dividing decorative part 3126c, so the light from the third upper LED 3128f on the back front left decorative board 3128 and the third LED on the back front upper left decorative board 3129 hardly causes the third back left logo decorative part 3126d and the third left sub-decorative part 3126f below the dividing decorative part 3126c to be illuminated (illuminated decoration), and only the third upper left logo decorative part 3126e can be brightly illuminated.

In this way, the rear front left third decorative body 3126 is configured so that the upper and lower sides can be illuminated (illuminated) independently, with the dividing decorative portion 3126c as the boundary.

The rear front left decorative base 3127 is entirely transparent and has a flat decorative plate portion 3127a and a board holding portion 3127b located around the periphery (left side, top side, bottom side) of the decorative plate portion 3127a, excluding the right side. The decorative plate portion 3127a is parallel to the front surface of the gaming panel 1100.

The board holding portion 3127b extends further outward than the decorative plate portion 3127a, and its rear surface is located rearward, recessed rearward from the front side. The board holding portion 3127b cooperates with the board holding portion 3125b of the back-front-left second decorative body 3125 to clamp and hold the back-front-left decorative board 3128, the back-front-left upper decorative board 3129, and the back-front-left lower decorative board 3130. The left end of the upper connecting base 3190 is attached to the upper portion of the board holding portion 3127b, and the left end of the upper end of the unit base 3178 of the back-front-lower performance unit 3160 is attached to the lower portion.

The back front left decorative body base 3127 also has three back front left band decorative parts 3127c that extend across the entire width at a constant vertical height near the vertical center of the rear surface of the decorative plate part 3127a and are spaced apart vertically, and a base upper left logo decorative part 3127d that is provided in relief near the top of the rear surface of the decorative plate part 3127a and forms part of the back front upper left logo decorative part 3122. The base upper left logo decorative part 3127d is formed to be slightly smaller than the third upper left logo decorative part 3126e of the back front left third decorative body 3126.

The back front left decorative body base 3127 is shown as opaque in Figures 153 and 154, but is actually transparent, so as shown in Figure 155(d), the back front left band decorative part 3127c and the upper left logo decorative part 3127d on the base can be seen from the front.

When the rear-front-left decorative body base 3127 is assembled to the rear-front-left decorative unit 3120, the light guide plate 3110 and left diffusion lens 3134 are located in front of the decorative plate portion 3127a, as shown in Figure 152, etc. Furthermore, when the rear-front-left decorative body base 3127 is assembled, the rear ends of the rear-front-left decorative board 3128 and rear-front-left reflector 3131, the rear ends of the rear-front-left upper decorative board 3129 and rear-front-left upper reflector 3132, and the rear ends of the rear-front-left lower decorative board 3130 and rear-front-left lower reflector 3133 are inserted into the rear-rear recessed board holder 3127b. The lower-base LED 3128h and upper-base LED 3128i of the rear-front-left decorative board 3128 are located to the left of the left surface of the decorative plate portion 3127a.

When the LED 3128h below the base of the back front left decorative board 3128 of the back front left decorative body base 3127 is illuminated, the back front left band decorative portion 3127c of the decorative plate portion 3127a can be illuminated and decorated. Each of the three back front left band decorative portions 3127c can be illuminated and decorated independently. In addition, when the LED 3128i above the base of the back front left decorative board 3128 of the back front left decorative body base 3127 is illuminated, the logo decorative portion 3127d at the top left of the base can be illuminated and decorated.

The rear-front-left decorative board 3128 is a long, flat plate with its plate surface facing left and right. The rear-front-left decorative board 3128 is positioned to the left of the decorative plate portion 3125a of the rear-front-left first decorative body 3124, the decorative plate portion 3126a of the rear-front-left second decorative body 3125, the decorative plate portion 3126a of the rear-front-left third decorative body 3126, and the decorative plate portion 3127a of the rear-front-left decorative body base 3127. The rear-front-left decorative board 3128, together with the rear-front-left reflector 3131, is sandwiched between the board holding portion 3125b of the rear-front-left second decorative body 3125 and the board holding portion 3127b of the rear-front-left decorative body base 3127.

The back front left decorative board 3128 is located to the left of the back front left first decorative body 3124 and has a plurality of first lower LEDs 3128a arranged below the dividing decorative portion 3124a, a plurality of first upper LEDs 3128b arranged to the left of the back front left first decorative body 3124 and above the dividing decorative portion 3124a, a plurality of second lower LEDs 3128c arranged to the left of the decorative plate portion 3125a of the back front left second decorative body 3125 and below the dividing decorative portion 3125c, and a back front left second decorative It is equipped with a plurality of second upper LEDs 3128d located to the left of the decorative plate portion 3125a of the body 3125 and arranged higher than the dividing decorative portion 3125c, a plurality of third lower LEDs 3128e located to the left of the decorative plate portion 3126a of the rear front left third decorative body 3126 and arranged lower than the dividing decorative portion 3126c, and a plurality of third upper LEDs 3128f located to the left of the decorative plate portion 3126a of the rear front left third decorative body 3126 and arranged higher than the dividing decorative portion 3126c.

The back-front left decorative substrate 3128 also includes multiple light guide plate LEDs 3128g located to the left of the left diffusion lens 3134 (light guide plate 3110), three below-base LEDs 3128h located to the left of the back-front left band decorative portion 3127c on the decorative plate portion 3127a of the back-front left decorative body base 3127, and multiple above-base LEDs 3128i located to the left of the base upper-left logo decorative portion 3127d on the decorative plate portion 3127a of the back-front left decorative body base 3127.

When the multiple first lower LEDs 3128a on the back front left decorative board 3128 are illuminated, the first front left logo decoration 3124c and the first back left logo decoration 3124d of the back front left first decorative body 3124 can be illuminated and decorated. When the multiple first upper LEDs 3128b on the back front left decorative board 3128 are illuminated, the first upper left logo decoration 3124e of the back front left first decorative body 3124 can be illuminated and decorated. When the multiple second lower LEDs 3128c on the back front left decorative board 3128 are illuminated, the second back left logo decoration 3125d of the back front left second decorative body 3125 can be illuminated and decorated. When the multiple second upper LEDs 3128d on the back front left decorative board 3128 are illuminated, the second upper left logo decoration 3125e of the back front left second decorative body 3125 can be illuminated and decorated.

In addition, when the multiple third lower LEDs 3128e on the back front left decorative board 3128 are illuminated, the third back left logo decorative portion 3126d and the like on the back front left third decorative body 3126 can be illuminated and decorated. When the multiple third upper LEDs 3128f on the back front left decorative board 3128 are illuminated, the third upper left logo decorative portion 3126e and the like on the back front left third decorative body 3126 can be illuminated and decorated.

When the multiple light guide plate LEDs 3128g on the back front left decorative substrate 3128 are illuminated, the first pattern 3111 on the light guide plate 3110 can be illuminated and displayed via the left diffusion lens 3134. When the multiple (three) base-under LEDs 3128h on the back front left decorative substrate 3128 are illuminated, the back front left band decorative portion 3127c on the back front left decorative body base 3127 can be illuminated and decorated. When the multiple base-over LEDs 3128i on the back front left decorative substrate 3128 are illuminated, the base upper left logo decorative portion 3127d on the back front left decorative body base 3127 can be illuminated and decorated.

The first lower LED 3128a, first upper LED 3128b, second lower LED 3128c, second upper LED 3128d, third lower LED 3128e, third upper LED 3128f, light guide plate LED 3128g, lower base LED 3128h, and upper base LED 3128i mounted on the right surface of the rear front left decorative board 3128 are full-color LEDs.

The back-front-left decorative board 3128 is coated on its surface with a white solder resist (protective material). This white solder resist makes the back-front-left decorative board 3128 less visible and reflects light from the mounted LEDs, allowing the first pattern 3111 of the light guide plate 3110, the back-front-left logo decorative portion 3121, the back-front-left upper logo decorative portion 3122, the back-front-left sub-decorative portion 3123, and other elements to be more brightly illuminated and decorated. Furthermore, the back-front-left decorative board 3128 is screen-printed with letters and symbols in a bright, saturated color (e.g., yellow) to avoid confusion with the mounted electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative boards. This makes the letters and symbols less noticeable. Furthermore, although not shown, the back-front-left decorative board 3128 is also equipped with connectors, resistors, LED drivers, and other components in addition to the LEDs.

The upper left back front decorative board 3129 is a flat plate that is long from side to side, with the board surface facing up and down. The upper left back front decorative board 3129 is positioned above the decorative plate portion 3125a of the first left back front decorative body 3124, the second left back front decorative body 3125, the decorative plate portion 3126a of the third left back front decorative body 3126, and the decorative plate portion 3127a of the left back front decorative body base 3127. The upper left back front decorative board 3129, together with the upper left back front reflector 3132, is sandwiched between the board holding portion 3125b of the second left back front decorative body 3125 and the board holding portion 3127b of the left back front decorative body base 3127.

The upper left back front decorative board 3129, although not shown, is equipped with a plurality of first LEDs arranged above the first left back front decorative body 3124, a plurality of second LEDs arranged above the decorative plate portion 3125a of the second left back front decorative body 3125, and a plurality of third LEDs arranged above the decorative plate portion 3126a of the third left back front decorative body 3126.

When the multiple first LEDs on the back front upper left decorative board 3129 are illuminated, the first upper left logo decoration 3124e and other parts of the back front left first decorative body 3124 can be illuminated and decorated. When the multiple second LEDs on the back front upper left decorative board 3129 are illuminated, the second upper left logo decoration 3125e and other parts of the back front left second decorative body 3125 can be illuminated and decorated. When the multiple third LEDs on the back front upper left decorative board 3129 are illuminated, the third upper left logo decoration 3126e of the back front left third decorative body 3126 can be illuminated and decorated.

The multiple first, second, and third LEDs mounted on the underside of the upper left decorative board 3129 on the back front are full-color LEDs.

The upper-left back-front decorative board 3129 is coated on its surface with a white solder resist (protective material). This white solder resist makes the upper-left back-front decorative board 3129 less visible and also reflects light from the mounted LEDs, allowing the upper-left back-front logo decorative part 3122 and other parts to glow more brightly. Furthermore, the upper-left back-front decorative board 3129 has letters and symbols printed on it using ink in a bright, saturated color (e.g., yellow) to avoid confusion with the mounted electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative boards. This makes the letters and symbols less noticeable. Furthermore, although not shown, the upper-left back-front decorative board 3129 is also equipped with connectors, resistors, LED drivers, etc. in addition to the LEDs.

The rear-front-left lower decorative board 3130 is a flat board that is long from side to side, with the board surface facing up and down. The rear-front-left lower decorative board 3130 is positioned below the decorative board portion 3125a of the rear-front-left first decorative body 3124, the decorative board portion 3126a of the rear-front-left second decorative body 3125, the decorative board portion 3126a of the rear-front-left third decorative body 3126, and the decorative board portion 3127a of the rear-front-left decorative body base 3127. The rear-front-left lower decorative board 3130, together with the rear-front-left lower reflector 3133, is sandwiched between the board holding portion 3125b of the rear-front-left second decorative body 3125 and the board holding portion 3127b of the rear-front-left decorative body base 3127.

The rear front left lower decorative board 3130 is equipped with a plurality of first LEDs 3130a located below the rear front left first decorative body 3124, a plurality of second LEDs 3130b located below the decorative plate portion 3125a of the rear front left second decorative body 3125, and a plurality of third LEDs 3130c located below the decorative plate portion 3126a of the rear front left third decorative body 3126.

When the multiple first LEDs 3130a on the back front left lower decorative board 3130 are illuminated, the first front left logo decoration 3124c and the first back left logo decoration 3124d of the back front left first decorative body 3124 can be illuminated and decorated. When the multiple second LEDs 3130b on the back front left lower decorative board 3130 are illuminated, the second back left logo decoration 3125d of the back front left second decorative body 3125 can be illuminated and decorated. When the multiple third LEDs 3130c on the back front left lower decorative board 3130 are illuminated, the third back left logo decoration 3126d of the back front left third decorative body 3126 can be illuminated and decorated.

The first LED 3130a, second LED 3130b, and third LED 3130c mounted on the underside of the rear front lower left decorative board 3130 are full-color LEDs.

The back-front-left lower decorative board 3130 is coated on its surface with a white solder resist (protective material). This white solder resist makes the back-front-left lower decorative board 3130 less visible and also reflects light from the mounted LEDs, allowing the back-front-left logo decorative part 3121 and other parts to be more brightly illuminated. Furthermore, the back-front-left lower decorative board 3130 has letters and symbols printed on it using ink in a bright, saturated color (e.g., yellow) to avoid confusion with the mounted electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative boards. This makes the letters and symbols less noticeable. Furthermore, although not shown, the back-front-left lower decorative board 3130 is also equipped with connectors, resistors, LED drivers, etc. in addition to the LEDs.

The left diffusion lens 3134 is disposed between the light guide plate 3110 and the rear front left decorative substrate 3128 (rear front left reflector 3131), and is sandwiched between the rear front left third decorative body 3126 and the rear front left decorative body base 3127. The left diffusion lens 3134 diffuses light from the multiple light guide plate LEDs 3128g on the rear front left decorative substrate 3128 and irradiates it onto the left side of the light guide plate 3110.

As shown in FIG. 157, the back front left decorative unit 3120 is formed by overlapping the first front left logo decorative portion 3124c and first back left logo decorative portion 3124d of the back front left first decorative body 3124, the second back left logo decorative portion 3125d of the back front left second decorative body 3125, and the third back left logo decorative portion 3126d of the back front left third decorative body 3126, forming a single back front left logo decorative portion 3121. Because the first front left logo decorative portion 3124c and first back left logo decorative portion 3124d, the second back left logo decorative portion 3125d, and the third back left logo decorative portion 3126d are positioned at different positions in the front to back direction, when the player's eyes move, the degree of overlap changes, allowing the specified logo consisting of multiple letters to appear three-dimensional.

In addition, by appropriately illuminating the first lower LED 3128a, second lower LED 3128c, and third lower LED 3128e on the back front left decorative board 3128, and the first LED 3130a, second LED 3130b, and third LED 3130c on the back front left lower decorative board 3130, the back front left decorative unit 3120 can independently illuminate and decorate the first front left logo decoration 3124c, first back left logo decoration 3124d, second back left logo decoration 3125d, and third back left logo decoration 3126d, thereby allowing the back front left logo decoration 3121 to be illuminated and decorated in a variety of lighting modes.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 157, the back front left decorative unit 3120 forms a single back front left upper logo decoration 3122 by overlapping the first upper left logo decoration 3124e of the back front left first decorative body 3124, the second upper left logo decoration 3125e of the back front left second decorative body 3125, the third upper left logo decoration 3126e of the back front left third decorative body 3126, and the base upper left logo decoration 3127d of the back front left decorative body base 3127. Because the first upper left logo decoration 3124e, second upper left logo decoration 3125e, third upper left logo decoration 3126e, and base upper left logo decoration 3127d are positioned at different positions in the front to back direction, when the player's eyes move, the degree of overlap changes, making the logo with a stylized letter "A" appear three-dimensional.

Furthermore, even if the back front left decorative unit 3120 has a logo such as the first upper left logo decoration 3124e, second upper left logo decoration 3125e, third upper left logo decoration 3126e, and base upper left logo decoration 3127d, which are all in approximately the same position when viewed from the front, by sequentially lighting up and decorating the back front left first decoration 3124, back front left second decoration 3125, back front left third decoration 3126, and back front left decoration base 3127, it is possible to present a dynamic pseudo-animation to the player and strongly appeal to the player. This animation-like lighting effect can also be achieved by sequentially lighting up and decorating the first front left logo decoration 3124c, first back left logo decoration 3124d, second back left logo decoration 3125d, and third back left logo decoration 3126d.

In addition, the back front left decorative unit 3120 can illuminate the first upper LED 3128b, second upper LED 3128d, third upper LED 3128f, base upper LED 3128i on the back front left decorative board 3128, and the first LED, second LED, and third LED on the back front left decorative board 3129 as appropriate, thereby independently illuminating and decorating the first upper left logo decoration 3124e, second upper left logo decoration 3125e, third upper left logo decoration 3126e, and base upper left logo decoration 3127d, and can illuminate and decorate the back front upper left logo decoration 3122 in a variety of lighting modes.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 157, the back front left decorative unit 3120 forms a single back front left sub-decorative part 3123 by overlapping the first left sub-decorative part 3124f of the back front left first decorative body 3124, the second left sub-decorative part 3125f of the back front left second decorative body 3125, and the third left sub-decorative part 3126f of the back front left third decorative body 3126 front and back. Because the first left sub-decorative part 3124f, second left sub-decorative part 3125f, and third left sub-decorative part 3126f are positioned at different front and back positions, when the player's eyes move, the degree of overlap changes, making the back front left sub-decorative part 3123 appear three-dimensional.

In addition, the rear front left decorative unit 3120 can illuminate the first lower LED 3128a, second lower LED 3128c, and third lower LED 3128e on the rear front left decorative board 3128, and the first LED 3130a, second LED 3130b, and third LED 3130c on the rear front left lower decorative board 3130, appropriately, to illuminate the first left sub-decorative part 3124f, second left sub-decorative part 3125f, and third left sub-decorative part 3126f independently, thereby allowing the rear front left sub-decorative part 3123 to be illuminated and decorated in a variety of illumination modes.

Furthermore, the back front left decorative unit 3120 is equipped with a dividing decorative portion 3124a of the back front left first decorative body 3124, a dividing decorative portion 3125c of the back front left second decorative body 3125, and a dividing decorative portion 3126c of the back front left third decorative body 3126. Therefore, the dividing decorative portion 3124a, the dividing decorative portion 3125c, and the dividing decorative portion 3126c can clearly separate the luminous decorations on the lower side (back front left logo decoration portion 3121, back front left sub-decorative portion 3123) and the upper side (back front left upper logo decoration portion 3122), thereby further enhancing the decorative effect of the luminous decorations of the back front left logo decoration portion 3121 and back front left sub-decorative portion 3123 and the luminous decoration of the back front left upper logo decoration portion 3122. At this time, the dividing decorative parts 3124a, 3125c, and 3126c are also illuminated, improving the appearance of the dividing decorative parts 3124a, 3125c, and 3126c and allowing people to enjoy the illuminated decorations.

In addition, when the first lower LED 3128a of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the first LED 3130a of the back front left lower decorative board 3130 of the back front left decorative unit 3120 are illuminated, the through decorative part 3124b below the dividing decorative part 3124a of the back front left first decorative body 3124 can be illuminated and decorated. In addition, when the first upper LED 3128b of the back front left decorative board 3128 and the first LED of the back front left upper decorative board 3129 are illuminated, the through decorative part 3124b above the dividing decorative part 3124a of the back front left first decorative body 3124 can be illuminated and decorated. The illuminated decoration of these through decorative parts 3124b can also improve the appearance.

In addition, the rear front left decorative unit 3120 can illuminate the light guide plate LED 3128g on the rear front left decorative substrate 3128, thereby cooperating with the light guide plate LEDs on the rear front right first decorative substrate 3148, rear front right second decorative substrate 3149, and rear front right light guide plate decorative substrate 3150 in the rear front right decorative unit 3140 to illuminate and display the first pattern 3111 on the light guide plate 3110.

In this way, the back front left decorative unit 3120 improves the appearance of the gaming area 5a with transparent, three-dimensional decorations such as the back front left logo decoration 3121, the back front upper left logo decoration 3122, and the back front left sub-decorative part 3123, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, the back front left logo decoration 3121, back front upper left logo decoration 3122, and back front left sub-decorative part 3123 can be illuminated in a variety of lighting modes, making it possible to prevent players from getting bored with the diverse lighting effects and preventing a decline in player interest.

In the above, the dividing decorative portions 3124a, 3125c, and 3126c that block light from the LED are shown as penetrating from front to back, but this is not limited to this and they may also be groove-shaped or ridge-shaped. Furthermore, the rear front left second decorative body 3125 may be provided with a protrusion that is inserted into the penetrating decorative portion 3124b of the rear front left first decorative body 3124, so that the rear front left first decorative body 3124 can be positioned by inserting the protrusion. In other words, the penetrating decorative portion 3124b may be used as a positioning hole.

[5-9a-3. Back front right decorative unit]
The back front right decorative unit 3140 in the back front performance unit 3100 has a long back front right logo decorative part 3141 made up of multiple alphabetical characters that forms a predetermined logo in line with the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5), a back front right upper logo decorative part 3142 (see Figure 151 (b)) that is located above the back front right logo decorative part 3141 and is a stylized letter "A", and a back front right sub-decorative part (not shown) that is located near the back front right logo decorative part 3141.

The back front right decorative unit 3140 comprises a transparent back front right first decorative body 3144 that is elongated vertically when viewed from the front, a transparent back front right second decorative body 3145 located behind the back front right first decorative body 3144, a transparent back front right third decorative body 3146 located behind the back front right second decorative body 3145, and a transparent back front right decorative body base 3147 located behind the back front right third decorative body 3146 (see Figure 152).

The right end of the upper connecting base 3190 is attached to the top of the back-front right decorative body base 3147, and the right end of the upper end of the unit base 3178 of the back-front lower performance unit 3160 is attached to the bottom. The back-front right decorative body base 3147 also has three back-front right band decorative parts 3147a located near the center in the vertical direction, extending across its entire width at a constant vertical height, and spaced apart vertically (see Figure 151 (b)).

The back front right decorative unit 3140 also includes a back front right first decorative substrate 3148 and a back front right second decorative substrate 3149 for illuminating and decorating the first pattern 3111, back front right logo decorative portion 3141, back front upper right logo decorative portion 3142, and back front right sub decorative portion of the light guide plate 3110, a back front right light guide plate decorative substrate 3150 for illuminating and decorating the first pattern 3111 of the light guide plate 3110, a back front upper right decorative substrate 3151 for illuminating and decorating the back front upper right logo decorative portion 3142, and a back front right lower decorative substrate 3152 for illuminating and decorating the back front right logo decorative portion 3141 (see Figure 156).

The rear front right decorative unit 3140 also includes an upper right diffusion lens 3153 disposed between the light guide plate 3110 and the rear front right first decorative substrate 3148, a middle right diffusion lens 3154 disposed between the light guide plate 3110 and the rear front right second decorative substrate 3149, and a lower right diffusion lens 3155 disposed between the light guide plate 3110 and the rear front right light guide plate decorative substrate 3150 (see Figure 156). The upper right diffusion lens 3153, middle right diffusion lens 3154, and lower right diffusion lens 3155 are disposed between the rear front right third decorative body 3146 and the rear front right decorative body base 3147.

Furthermore, the rear front right decorative unit 3140 is equipped with a first rear guide passage 3156 that receives and guides downward a game ball B that is received by the general winning opening 2001 of the side right center unit 2700 and guided rearward by the first guide passage 2701, and a second rear guide passage 3157 that receives and guides downward a game ball B that is received by the second sub-outlet 2022 of the side right center unit 2700 and guided rearward by the second guide passage. A general winning opening sensor 3001 is provided within the first rear guide passage 3156. Game balls B guided to the first rear guide passage 3156 and the second rear guide passage 3157 are discharged to the lower board holder 1200 via the rear front lower performance unit 3160.

The rear front right decorative unit 3140 also includes a distribution passage through which game balls B that are received into the special device winning port 2006 of the second attacca unit 2600 and guided rearward by the guide passage 2613 circulate, and in which a V winning port 2007 and a losing port 2008 are provided, a V winning port door 3006 that moves back and forth within the distribution passage to distribute game balls B received into the special device winning port 2006 to either the V winning port 2007 or the losing port 2008, a V distribution solenoid 3007 that moves the V winning port door 3006 back and forth, a V winning port sensor 3003 that detects game balls B that have been distributed to the V winning port 2007, and a losing port sensor 3004 that detects game balls B that have been distributed to the losing port 2008. Game ball B detected by the V winning hole sensor 3003 or the losing hole sensor 3004 is discharged to the lower board holder 1200 via the back front lower performance unit 3160.

The configuration of the back front right logo decoration 3141, back front upper right logo decoration 3142, back front right sub-decorative part, etc. of the back front right decorative unit 3140 is the same as that of the back front left decorative unit 3120, and detailed description will be omitted.

In addition, the back front right first decorative body 3144, back front right second decorative body 3145, and back front right third decorative body 3146 of the back front right decorative unit 3140 have a dividing decorative portion 3144a that extends left and right and penetrates front and back between the back front right logo decorative portion 3141 and the back front right upper logo decorative portion 3142. This dividing decorative portion 3144a allows the back front right logo decorative portion 3141 and the back front right upper logo decorative portion 3142 to be illuminated and decorated independently.

Furthermore, the rear front right first decorative body 3144 has multiple through decorative portions 3144b that penetrate from front to back. These multiple through decorative portions 3144b can achieve the same effects as the through decorative portion 3124b of the rear front left first decorative body 3124.

In this way, the back front right decorative unit 3140, like the back front left decorative unit 3120, can improve the appearance of the gaming area 5a with transparent, three-dimensional decorations such as the back front right logo decoration 3141, the back front upper right logo decoration 3142, and the back front right sub-decorative part, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, the back front right logo decoration 3141, back front right logo decoration 3142, and back front right sub-decorative part can be illuminated in a variety of lighting modes, making it possible to prevent players from getting bored with the diverse lighting effects and preventing a decline in player interest.

In addition, by sequentially lighting up the back front right first decorative body 3144, back front right second decorative body 3145, back front right third decorative body 3146, and back front right decorative body base 3147 in the back front right logo decorative body 3141 and back front right upper logo decorative body 3142, which are located in approximately the same position when viewed from the front, a dynamic pseudo-animation can be shown to the player, making a strong appeal to the player.

[5-9a-4. Back front lower production unit]
The back-front-lower performance unit 3160 in the back-front performance unit 3100 comprises a disk-shaped back-front-lower middle decorative body 3161 with the word "SPIN" written at the top center in the left-right direction, a back-front-lower rotation drive motor (not shown) that rotates the back-front-lower middle decorative body 3161 around an axis in the front-to-back direction, and a back-front-lower lifting drive motor 3162 that raises and lowers the back-front-lower middle decorative body 3161. The back-front-lower middle decorative body 3161 is translucent.

The back-front-lower performance unit 3160 also comprises a disk-shaped back-front-lower left inner decorative body 3163 of the same size and located to the left of the back-front-lower middle decorative body 3161, a disk-shaped back-front-lower left outer decorative body 3164 of the same size and located to the left of the back-front-lower left inner decorative body 3163, a disk-shaped back-front-lower right inner decorative body 3165 of the same size and located to the right of the back-front-lower middle decorative body 3161, and a disk-shaped back-front-lower right outer decorative body 3166 of the same size and located to the right of the back-front-lower right inner decorative body 3165. The back-front-lower left inner decorative body 3163, the back-front-lower left outer decorative body 3164, the back-front-lower right inner decorative body 3165, and the back-front-lower right outer decorative body 3166 are translucent.

In addition, the back front lower performance unit 3160 is located to the left of the back front lower left outer decoration 3164 and is equipped with a back front lower logo decoration 3167 with the word "Queen" engraved on it. The back front lower logo decoration 3167 is translucent.

Furthermore, the back-front-lower performance unit 3160 includes a back-front-lower middle decorative substrate 3168 for illuminating the back-front-lower middle decorative body 3161, a back-front-lower left inner decorative substrate 3169 for illuminating the back-front-lower left inner decorative body 3163, a back-front-lower left outer decorative substrate 3170 for illuminating the back-front-lower left outer decorative body 3164, a back-front-lower right inner decorative substrate 3171 for illuminating the back-front-lower right inner decorative body 3165, a back-front-lower right outer decorative substrate 3172 for illuminating the back-front-lower right outer decorative body 3166, and a back-front-lower logo decorative substrate 3173 for illuminating the back-front-lower logo decorative body 3167 (see Figure 156 (b)).

These back front lower middle decorative board 3168, back front lower left inner decorative board 3169, back front lower left outer decorative board 3170, back front lower right inner decorative board 3171, back front lower right outer decorative board 3172, and back front lower logo decorative board 3173 are located behind the back front lower middle decorative body 3161, back front lower left inner decorative body 3163, back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, back front lower right outer decorative body 3166, and back front lower logo decorative body 3167.

In addition, the back front lower middle decorative board 3168, back front lower left inner decorative board 3169, back front lower left outer decorative board 3170, back front lower right inner decorative board 3171, back front lower right outer decorative board 3172, and back front lower logo decorative board 3173 have multiple full-color LEDs mounted on their front surfaces and are coated with white solder resist (protective material) on their surfaces. This white solder resist reflects light from the LEDs and the front, allowing the decorative elements located in front of each board to be brightly illuminated and decorated.

In addition, the back front lower middle decorative board 3168, back front lower left inner decorative board 3169, back front lower left outer decorative board 3170, back front lower right inner decorative board 3171, back front lower right outer decorative board 3172, and back front lower logo decorative board 3173 have letters and symbols screen printed using ink in a bright, saturated color (e.g., yellow) to avoid confusion with the mounted electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative boards. This makes the letters and symbols less noticeable through the decorative body installed in front, ensuring the decorative effect of the decorative body is fully realized.

The multiple LEDs mounted on the back front lower middle decorative board 3168 are top-view type LEDs. On the other hand, the multiple LEDs mounted on the back front lower left inner decorative board 3169, back front lower left outer decorative board 3170, back front lower right inner decorative board 3171, back front lower right outer decorative board 3172, and back front lower logo decorative board 3173 are side-view type LEDs.

In addition, these decorative boards have non-light-emitting components other than the LEDs (e.g., connectors, resistors, LED drivers, etc.) located on the rear (back) side so as not to interfere with the illuminated decoration.

The back front lower middle decorative body 3161, back front lower left inner decorative body 3163, back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, back front lower right outer decorative body 3166, and back front lower logo decorative body 3167 are positioned above the bottom end of the light guide plate 3110, as shown in Figure 156. This makes the bottom end of the light guide plate 3110 invisible to the player (front). Furthermore, the top ends of the back front lower middle decorative body 3161, back front lower left inner decorative body 3163, back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, and back front lower right outer decorative body 3166 are positioned below the bottom end of the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110, as shown in Figure 160, and are arranged left and right at intervals corresponding to the lines 3114 that make up the second pattern 3112.

In more detail, the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 corresponds to the third line group 3114c, the back front lower left inner decorative body 3163 corresponds to the second line group 3114b, the back front lower left outer decorative body 3164 corresponds to the first line group 3114a, the back front lower right inner decorative body 3165 corresponds to the fourth line group 3114d, and the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166 corresponds to the fifth line group 3114e. Therefore, when the back front lower middle decorative body 3161, back front lower left inner decorative body 3163, back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, and back front lower right outer decorative body 3166 are illuminated (either by illuminating only the upper end or by illuminating the entire body), the player is given the illusion that the line 3113 of the second pattern 3112 is illuminated by light from the back front lower middle decorative body 3161, back front lower left inner decorative body 3163, back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, and back front lower right outer decorative body 3166, and the player can be shown an illuminated effect that has not been seen in pachinko machines until now.

In addition, the back front lower performance unit 3160 is located behind the back front lower middle decorative board 3168, the back front lower left inner decorative board 3169, the back front lower left outer decorative board 3170, the back front lower right inner decorative board 3171, the back front lower right outer decorative board 3172, and the back front lower logo decorative board 3173, and is equipped with a light guide plate lower left decorative board 3174 and a light guide plate lower right decorative board 3175 for illuminating (illuminating decoration) the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 (see Figure 156 (a)).

The left decorative substrate 3174 below the light guide plate and the right decorative substrate 3175 below the light guide plate each have five LED groups 3177 consisting of five LEDs 3176. The five LEDs 3176 included in each LED group 3177 are arranged in the following order from right to left: first LED 3176a, second LED 3176b, third LED 3176c, fourth LED 3176d, and fifth LED 3176e. Furthermore, each LED group 3177 corresponds to each line group 3114 in the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110, and are arranged in the following order from left to right: first LED group 3177a, second LED group 3177b, third LED group 3177c, fourth LED group 3177d, and fifth LED group 3177e.

LEDs 3176 of the first LED group 3177a and the second LED group 3177b are mounted on the left decorative substrate 3174 below the light guide plate. LEDs 3176 of the third LED group 3177c, the fourth LED group 3177d, and the fifth LED group 3177e are mounted on the right decorative substrate 3175 below the light guide plate.

The multiple LEDs 3176 mounted on the left decorative board 3174 below the light guide plate and the right decorative board 3175 below the light guide plate are side-view full-color LEDs. The surfaces of the left decorative board 3174 below the light guide plate and the right decorative board 3175 below the light guide plate are coated with white solder resist (protective material), which makes the left decorative board 3174 below the light guide plate and the right decorative board 3175 below the light guide plate less noticeable from the front. In addition, letters and symbols to avoid confusion with the mounted electronic components such as the LEDs 3176 and other decorative boards are screen-printed on the left decorative board 3174 below the light guide plate and the right decorative board 3175 below the light guide plate using ink in a bright, saturated color (e.g., yellow). This makes the letters and symbols less noticeable through the decorative body installed in front, ensuring the decorative effect of the decorative body is fully realized.

When the first LED 3176a in each LED group 3177 on the left decorative substrate 3174 below the light guide plate and the right decorative substrate 3175 below the light guide plate is illuminated, the first line 3113a of the corresponding line group 3114 in the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 is illuminated (decorated). When the second LED 3176b is illuminated, the second line 3113b in the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 is illuminated (decorated). When the third LED 3176c is illuminated, the third line 3113c in the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 is illuminated (decorated). When the fourth LED 3176d is illuminated, the fourth line 3113d in the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110 is illuminated (decorated). Furthermore, when the fifth LED 3176e is illuminated, the fifth line 3113e in the second pattern 3112 on the light guide plate 3110 can be illuminated (illuminated decoration).

This allows each of the multiple lines 3113 that make up the second image 3112 on the light guide plate 3110 to be illuminated (illuminated decoration) independently, allowing players to see a variety of illuminated effects, while also preventing players from becoming bored and reducing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, the back front lower performance unit 3160 supports the back front lower middle decorative body 3161, the back front lower left inner decorative body 3163, the back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, the back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166, the back front lower logo decorative body 3167, the back front lower middle decorative board 3168, the back front lower left inner decorative board 3169, the back front lower left outer decorative board 3170, the back front lower right inner decorative board 3171, the back front lower right outer decorative board 3172, the back front lower logo decorative board 3173, the light guide plate lower left decorative board 3174, and the light guide plate lower right decorative board 3175, etc., and is equipped with a flat unit base 3178 that is long from side to side. The lower ends of the back front left decorative unit 3120 and the back front right decorative unit 3140 are attached near the left and right ends of the upper end of the unit base 3178.

The back front lower performance unit 3160 also has a first discharge passage 3181 that receives game balls B received in the three general winning ports 2001 of the side unit 2200 and discharges them to the lower board holder 1200, a second discharge passage 3182 that receives game balls B received in the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 and discharges them to the lower board holder 1200, and a It is equipped with a third discharge passage 3183 that receives game balls B and discharges them to the substrate holder 1200 below, a fourth discharge passage 3184 that receives game balls B received by the large prize opening 2005 of the first attacker unit 2400 and discharges them to the substrate holder 1200 below, and a fifth discharge passage 3185 that receives game balls B received by the first sub-out opening 2021 of the first attacker unit 2400 and discharges them to the substrate holder 1200 below.

The first discharge passage 3181 has three delivery ports corresponding to the three general winning ports 2001 of the side unit 2200, and three general winning port sensors 3001 corresponding to each delivery port. In addition, the second discharge passage 3182 has a first starting port sensor 3002.

This back-front-bottom performance unit 3160 decorates the lower part of the game area 5a with the back-front-bottom middle decorative body 3161, back-front-bottom left inner decorative body 3163, back-front-bottom left outer decorative body 3164, back-front-bottom right inner decorative body 3165, back-front-bottom right outer decorative body 3166, and back-front-bottom logo decorative body 3167, improving the appearance and entertaining players with the illuminated effects by making these decorative bodies illuminate. Furthermore, the back-front-bottom middle decorative body 3161 can be rotated by the back-front-bottom rotation drive motor and raised and lowered by the back-front-bottom lift drive motor 3162, entertaining players with the moving effects.

In addition, the back front lower performance unit 3160 can illuminate the second image 3112 on the light guide plate 3110 using multiple LEDs 3176 on the left decorative board 3174 below the light guide plate and the right decorative board 3175 below the light guide plate, allowing players to enjoy the illuminated performance of the second image 3112.

[5-9b. Backstage Upper Stage Unit]
Next, the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 will be explained mainly with reference to Figures 129 and 149. The rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 is attached to the upper rear of the rear front performance unit 3100 inside the rear box 3010. The upper rear performance unit 3200 comprises a movable upper rear decorative body 3210 that is rotatable around an axis extending left and right and that can be raised and lowered, a left rear side decorative body 3220 that has three left rear band decorative parts 3221 that extend in the front-to-back direction so as to be continuous with the three left rear front band decorative parts 3127c on the left rear front decorative body base 3127 of the left rear front decorative unit 3120, and a right rear side decorative body 3230 (see Figure 131) that has three right rear back band decorative parts 3231 that extend in the front-to-back direction so as to be continuous with the three right rear front band decorative parts 3147a on the right rear front decorative body base 3147 of the right rear front decorative unit 3140.

The upper rear movable decorative body 3210 has a first upper rear decorative part 3211 (see Figure 129, etc.) with five 7-segment display parts lined up on the left and right, and a second upper rear decorative part 3212 (see Figure 162) located on the back side of the first upper rear decorative part 3211 and with a row of specified characters (here, "JACKPOT").

The first upper rear decorative part 3211 of the upper rear movable decorative body 3210 has five 7-segment display sections that can each emit light independently, allowing a variety of letters, numbers, pictures, etc. to be displayed by combining the segments. This makes it possible to display the expected results of the first and second special lottery drawn upon receipt of game ball B into the first starting hole 2002 and second starting hole 2004, such as whether the results are a "jackpot." Furthermore, the second upper rear decorative part 3212 has each character that can emit light independently.

In its normal state, the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 is in a raised position with the rear upper first decorative part 3211 facing forward. Depending on the results of the first or second special lottery drawn when a game ball B is received at the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004, or depending on the reception (allocation) of a game ball B at the V winning opening 2007, this rear upper movable decorative body 3210 rotates 180 degrees around an axis extending left and right to face the rear upper second decorative part 3212 forward or move from the raised position to the lowered position (see Figures 161 and 162).

This rear upper movable decorative element 3210 can rotate and rise and fall, suggesting to the player that an opportunity is on the way, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

The three rear left decorative bands 3221 of the rear left side decorative body 3220 are arranged to extend rearward from the right ends of the three rear left decorative bands 3127c extending left and right from the rear left decorative body base 3127 of the rear left decorative unit 3120. Each rear left decorative band 3221 is capable of emitting light independently, and is also capable of emitting light that flows in the front-to-back direction.

The three rear right band decorative parts 3231 of the rear right side decorative body 3230 are arranged to extend rearward from the right ends of the three rear right band decorative parts 3147a that extend left and right on the rear right decorative body base 3147 of the rear front right decorative unit 3140. Each rear right band decorative part 3231 is capable of emitting light independently, and is capable of emitting light that flows in the front and rear directions.

[5-9c. Backstage Production Unit]
Next, the rear lower performance unit 3300 of the rear unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to Figure 135 etc. The rear lower performance unit 3300 of the rear unit 3000 is attached below the rear upper performance unit 3200 at the lower rear of the rear front performance unit 3100 within the rear box 3010.

The rear lower performance unit 3300 has a rear left movable decorative body 3301 and a rear right movable decorative body 3302, which are adjacent to each other on the left and right, and whose base ends are supported so that they can rotate around axes in the front-to-back direction and can be raised and lowered. The rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 are configured to rotate in opposite directions as the base ends are raised and lowered.

In their normal state, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 rotate at their respective tip ends in directions that move them away from each other, and they are hidden behind the rear front performance unit 3100, in a retracted position that is not visible from the front (player side) (see Figure 129, etc.).

The rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear-right movable decorative body 3302 rotate and rise so that their respective tips move upward around the base end, depending on the results of the first or second special lottery drawn when game ball B is received at the first starting port 2002 or second starting port 2004, until the right edge of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and the left edge of the rear-right movable decorative body 3302 come into contact with each other. As a result, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear-right movable decorative body 3302 come together to form a single large decorative body, and are positioned so that they can be seen from the front (see Figure 163).

As a result, a large decorative element with a stylized letter "A" appears in the center of the rear left movable decorative element 3301 and the rear right movable decorative element 3302, surprising the player and making them think that something good is about to happen, preventing a decline in interest. The rear left movable decorative element 3301 and the rear right movable decorative element 3302 have luminous decorative elements made from translucent resin, and a decorative board with multiple LEDs mounted on the back of the luminous decorative elements is provided. By lighting up the luminous decorative elements with multiple LEDs, the appearance is improved and players' attention is attracted.

As shown in Figure 167, when in the displayed position, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 are positioned so that they overlap behind the first pattern 3111 on the light guide plate 3110. This allows the large decorative body made up of the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 to be illuminated and decorated by the first pattern 3111, so that the player can see a rich decoration due to the three-dimensional decoration made up of the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 and the two-dimensional illuminated display made up of the first pattern 3111, which makes a strong impact on the player and strongly attracts the player's attention, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game.

[5-10. Effects on the game board]
Next, the main effects on the gaming board 5 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 161 to 168. Figure 161 is a front view of the gaming board showing the state in which the first rear-upper decorative part of the rear-upper movable decorative body in the rear-upper decorative unit of the rear unit has been moved to a lowered position while facing forward. Figure 162 is a front view of the gaming board showing the state in which the second rear-upper decorative part of the rear-upper decorative body in the rear-upper decorative unit of the rear unit has been moved to a lowered position while facing forward. Figure 163 is a front view of the gaming board showing the rear-left movable decorative body and the rear-right movable decorative body in the rear-lower decorative unit of the rear unit have been moved to their appearance positions. Figure 164 is a front view of the gaming board showing the rear-front-lower middle decorative body in the rear-front-lower decorative unit of the rear-front decorative unit of the rear unit while being raised.

Figure 165 is a front view of a gaming board showing the back-front-left logo decoration, back-front-upper-left logo decoration, back-front-left sub-decorative part, and back-front-left band decoration of the back-front-left decorative unit 3120 in the back-front performance unit of the back unit illuminated. Figure 166 is a front view of a gaming board showing the first pattern on the light guide plate in the back-front performance unit of the back unit illuminated. Figure 167 is a front view of a gaming board showing the first pattern on the light guide plate in the back-front performance unit of the back unit illuminated and the back-back-left movable decoration and back-back-right movable decoration in the back-back-lower performance unit moved to their appearance positions. Figure 168 is a front view of a gaming board showing the second pattern on the light guide plate in the back-front performance unit of the back unit illuminated.

In the gaming board 5 of this embodiment, the front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the gaming area 5a, the gaming panel 1100 that defines the rear end side of the gaming area 5a, the starting port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, the upper left side unit 2300, the first attacca unit 2400, the center role 2500, the second attacca unit 2600, the middle right side unit 2700, and the gate member 2800 are formed almost entirely transparent. Therefore, under normal conditions, as shown in FIG. 134, the back front performance unit of the back unit 3000 located behind the gaming panel 1100 can be seen through these components. The left-front decorative unit 3120, right-front decorative unit 3140 of the set 3100, the middle decorative body 3161, the inner decorative body 3163, the outer decorative body 3164, the inner decorative body 3165, the outer decorative body 3166, the logo decorative body 3167 of the back-upper performance unit 3200, the movable decorative body 3210, the left-back side decorative body 3220, and the right-back side decorative body 3230 can be clearly seen, and the performance image displayed on the performance display device 1600 can be clearly seen through the frame of the center role device 2500.

More specifically, the rear front left first decorative body 3124 of the rear front left decorative unit 3120 is located near the left edge of the center role device 2500, with approximately half of it located within the frame of the center role device 2500. Furthermore, the rear front right first decorative body 3144 of the rear front right decorative unit 3140 is located near the right edge of the center role device 2500, with a portion of it located within the frame of the center role device 2500. The rear front lower performance unit 3160 extends left and right below the play area 5a, and can be seen through the transparent game panel 1100 and center role device 2500, with a portion of it being clearly visible within the frame of the center role device 2500.

In addition, the back-front-lower middle decorative body 3161 of the back-front-lower performance unit 3160 is located above the first starting opening 2002 and behind the stage 2513 of the center role device 2500. The back-front-lower left inner decorative body 3163 and the back-front-lower left outer decorative body 3164 are located above the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 and near the bottom edge of the center role device 2500. The back-front-lower right inner decorative body 3165 and the back-front-lower right outer decorative body 3166 are located above the large winning opening 2005 of the first attacca unit 2400 and near the bottom edge of the center role device 2500. The tops of the back-front-lower middle decorative body 3161, the back-front-lower left inner decorative body 3163, the back-front-lower left outer decorative body 3164, the back-front-lower right inner decorative body 3165 and the back-front-lower right outer decorative body 3166 are located within the frame of the center role device 2500. The rear front lower logo decoration 3167 is located outside the center reel 2500 in the lower left corner of the gaming area 5a.

In addition, the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200 is positioned in a raised position, so it extends left and right above the gaming area 5a, and the upper part to the left of the center in the left-right direction can be seen through the transparent gaming panel 1100 and the center device 2500, and a portion can be seen well through the frame of the center device 2500. The rear upper movable decorative body 3210 has a rear upper first decorative part 3211, which has multiple seven-segment parts, facing forward.

The rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and rear-right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300 are in a retracted position behind the front-lower performance unit 3160 and cannot be seen from the front (player's side).

Depending on the results of the first and second special lottery drawn when game ball B is received in first and second starting holes 2002 and 2004, the back unit 3000's back front performance unit 3100, back upper performance unit 3200, and back lower performance unit 3300 perform predetermined moving and light-up effects.

Specifically, as a movable performance using the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000, for example, as shown in FIG. 161, the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 is moved from a raised position to a lowered position while the rear upper first decorative body 3211, which has five 7-segment parts, remains facing forward. As a result, most of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 is positioned within the frame of the center role device 2500, allowing the rear upper first decorative body 3211 to be clearly visible. At this time, the five 7-segment parts of the rear upper first decorative body 3211 are displayed in a variable manner, which strongly attracts the player's attention and makes the player feel anxious and excited depending on whether the desired numbers or patterns are displayed in the five 7-segment parts.

In addition, as an example of a presentation using the rear upper movable decorative body 3210, as described above, the rear upper first decorative part 3211 is moved to a lowered position while facing forward, and then, as shown in Figure 162, it is rotated 180 degrees around the left-right axis so that the rear upper second decorative part 3212, which has multiple character strings, faces forward. This causes the letters "JACKPOT" to face forward, making it clear to the player that they have won the jackpot, increasing their anticipation for a favorable gaming state (a "jackpot" gaming state) that gives them an advantage, and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as a performance using the rear upper movable decorative body 3210, for example, when rotating around a left-right axis, the part between the rear upper first decorative part 3211 and the rear upper second decorative part 3212 may be rotated forward and backward repeatedly, and either the rear upper first decorative part 3211 or the rear upper second decorative part 3212 may be stopped from rotating forward. This can keep players on the edge of their seats depending on whether the "JACKPOT" on the rear upper second decorative part 3212 faces forward, increasing the player's sense of anticipation and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, as a performance using the rear upper movable decorative body 3210, for example, it may be rotated 180 degrees around a left-right axis while remaining in the raised position, so that the rear upper second decorative part 3212 faces forward.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 163, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear lower decorative unit 3300 can be used to perform a performance in which, from a retracted position where their respective tips are positioned downward and away from each other, they are rotated in opposite directions around axes extending forward and backward so that their respective tips rise and touch each other at their respective base ends, and are raised and moved to an appearance position where they abut each other. As a result, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and rear right movable decorative body 3302 form a single large decorative body with a stylized letter "A" that appears in the center of the game area 5a in front of the display screen of the performance display device 1600, which can greatly surprise the player and strongly attract their attention, as well as make the player think that something good is about to happen, increasing their anticipation for the game and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as an effect using the back-front-bottom-middle decorative body 3161 in the back-front-bottom performance unit 3160 of the back-front performance unit 3100, for example, as shown in FIG. 164, it can be raised or rotated around a front-to-back axis. This causes the back-front-bottom-middle decorative body 3161 to rotate in the lower center of the game area 5a, making the player feel like something good is about to happen and heightening their anticipation for the game. Furthermore, because the back-front-bottom-middle decorative body 3161 is located directly above the first starting hole 2002 and behind the stage 2513, the rotation and raising and lowering of the back-front-bottom-middle decorative body 3161 can encourage the player to shoot the game ball B aimed at the first starting hole 2002, allowing the player to enjoy the original operation of shooting the game ball B of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, as an effect using the back front left decorative unit 3120 of the back front effect unit 3100, for example, as shown in FIG. 165, by appropriately illuminating the LEDs mounted on the back front left decorative board 3128, the back front upper left decorative board 3129, and the back front lower left decorative board 3130, it is possible to create an illumination effect that illuminates and decorates the back front left logo decoration 3121, the back front upper left logo decoration 3122, the back front left sub-decorative board 3123, the back front left band decoration 3127c, etc. For example, in the back front left logo decoration 3121, by illuminating and decorating the first front left logo decoration 3124c, the first back left logo decoration 3124d, the second back left logo decoration 3125d, and the third back left logo decoration 3126d in order, it is possible to create an illumination effect that resembles a neon sign flowing back and forth, which can entertain players.

Although not shown in the figures, the rear front right decorative unit 3140 can also produce lighting effects similar to those of the rear front left decorative unit 3120, providing entertainment for players.

Furthermore, as an example of an effect using the light guide plate 3110 of the rear front effect unit 3100, as shown in FIG. 166, the multiple light guide plate LEDs 3128g of the rear front left decorative board 3128 of the rear front left decorative unit 3120 and the multiple light guide plate LEDs of the rear front right first decorative board 3148, rear front right second decorative board 3149, and rear front right light guide plate decorative board 3150 of the rear front right decorative unit 3140 are illuminated to display the first pattern 3111 (illuminated decoration). As a result, a large first pattern 3111, a stylized letter "A," is illuminated and displayed in the center of the play area 5a in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, which can surprise the player and make them think that something good is about to happen, thereby preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, as an example of a performance using the light guide plate 3110, as shown in FIG. 167, the first image 3111 is illuminated and the rear left movable decorative element 3301 and rear right movable decorative element 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300 are moved from their retracted positions to their appearing positions. This causes the first image 3111 and the large decorative element consisting of the rear left movable decorative element 3301 and rear right movable decorative element 3302 to overlap front to back, making a strong impact on the player and entertaining them, while also making them believe that a favorable gaming state (for example, a "jackpot" game) that gives them an advantage may occur, heightening their sense of anticipation for the game.

In addition, as an example of a performance using the light guide plate 3110, as shown in FIG. 168, the multiple LEDs 3176 on the light guide plate lower left decorative board 3174 and light guide plate lower right decorative board 3175 of the back front lower performance unit 3160 are appropriately illuminated to illuminate the second pattern 3112 (illuminated decoration). As a result, multiple lines 3113 extending upward from the upper parts of the five decorative bodies in the back front lower performance unit 3160, namely the back front lower middle decorative body 3161, the back front lower left inner decorative body 3163, the back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, the back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, and the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166, are illuminated, allowing players to see an illuminated performance that is similar to a searchlight shining from below on a concert stage, entertaining players by making the gaming area 5a look dazzling.

In addition, as an example of a performance using the light guide plate 3110, as shown in Figure 168, while the second pattern 3112 is illuminated, the upper ends or the entire back front lower middle decorative body 3161, back front lower left inner decorative body 3163, back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, and back front lower right outer decorative body 3166 in the back front lower performance unit 3160 may be illuminated. Alternatively, the decorative body located below the illuminated group of lines 3114 in the second pattern 3112 may be illuminated. This gives the player the illusion that the lines 3113 making up the second pattern 3112 are illuminated by light from decorative elements such as the back front lower middle decorative element 3161, back front lower left inner decorative element 3163, back front lower left outer decorative element 3164, back front lower right inner decorative element 3165, and back front lower right outer decorative element 3166, providing players with the enjoyment of an unprecedented light-emitting effect.

Furthermore, although not shown in the figures, the second image 3112 on the light guide plate 3110 may be illuminated and the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 may be moved to a lowered position. This allows the player to see an illuminated effect as if the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 were being illuminated by a searchlight from below, making the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 look gorgeous and entertaining.

In addition, the game board 5 of this embodiment can appropriately combine the light-emitting effects and moving effects described above, and can also be combined with the effect images (display effects) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. As a result, by appropriately combining light-emitting effects, display effects, etc., a wide variety of effect patterns can be presented to the player, preventing the player from getting bored and allowing the player to be entertained by various effects, preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game.

6. Control Configuration
Next, the control configuration for various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 169 and other figures. FIG. 169 is a block diagram showing an outline of the control configuration of the pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main frame 4, with each board performing its own control. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during game play based on commands from the main control board 1310, and an effect display control unit 1512 that controls the display of effect images on the effect display device 1600 based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls the payout of game balls B, and a launch control unit 633b that controls the launch of game balls B by rotating the handle 195.

[6-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is not shown in detail, but is equipped with a main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor that has built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands and RAM for temporarily storing data, a main control I/O port as an input/output device (I/O device), a main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids, a RAM clear switch for completely erasing information stored in the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a, a setting display 1310g for displaying setting values and error indications, and a base monitor 1310h for displaying the calculated ratio of the number of balls entered (the number of game balls B that have entered the ball entry ports (winning port, out port) provided in the game area 5a defined on the game board 5) to the number of payouts (the number of game balls B that are paid out (awarded) as prize balls due to balls entering the winning port). In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU 1310a also has built-in functions such as a watchdog timer that monitors its operation (system) and a function to prevent fraud.

In addition to its built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"), the main control MPU 1310a also has built-in functions such as a watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT") that monitors its operation (system) and functions to prevent fraud.

The main control MPU 1310a also has built-in non-volatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM pre-stores a unique ID code (a code that exists only once in the world) assigned by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a to identify the individual unit. Once assigned, this ID code cannot be rewritten, even using an external device, because it is stored in non-volatile RAM. The main control MPU 1310a can retrieve and reference the ID code from the non-volatile RAM.

The main control MPU 1310a also incorporates a circuit that forcibly resets itself via hardware when it is affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as the "built-in reset circuit"). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of certain registers in the main control MPU 1310a, and if the register contents change to inconsistent values, it forcibly resets the main control MPU 1310a, indicating that it has been affected by electrical noise. This forced reset by the built-in reset circuit cannot be disabled by user program control. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, it is reset without executing the main control side power-off processing described below, and it will again execute the main control side power-on processing described below. In this case, because the main control side power-off processing is not executed, a checksum (sum value) error will inevitably occur in the main control built-in RAM, as described below, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM will be completely erased (cleared). Furthermore, even if the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by its built-in reset circuit, the built-in reset circuit of the main control MPU 1310a does not output a reset signal to the dispensing control board 633, so only the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) restarts, and the dispensing control board 633 remains activated.

The main control MPU 1310a also has a built-in hardware random number circuit (hereinafter referred to as the "main control built-in hardware random number circuit") that uses hardware to update special random numbers used to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot game state or a small jackpot game state, among various random numbers related to gameplay. This main control built-in hardware random number circuit generates random numbers within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of 0 as the minimum value and 65,535 as the maximum value is pre-set), and is configured so that the pre-set value is not fixed as the initial value (i.e., the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hardware random number circuit first sets a value within a predetermined numerical range as its initial value and rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range without overlapping, based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a (a clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately from the main control MPU 1310a). Once all values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, the main control built-in hardware random number circuit again extracts a value within the predetermined numerical range without overlapping, based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in hardware random number circuit repeatedly performs this rapid lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit at the time it obtains a value from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit as a special random number.

The main control input circuit does not have a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input to its various input terminals, which are detection signals from various sensors, and does not have a reset function. For this reason, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit that does not receive a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown). In other words, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit in which information based on detection signals from various sensors input to its various input terminals is not reset by a main control system reset, and various signals based on that information are output from its various output terminals.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 detects a game ball B received in the first start opening 2002, a second start opening sensor 2401 that detects a game ball B received in the second start opening 2004, a general prize opening sensor 3001 that detects a game ball B received in the general prize opening 2001, a gate sensor 2801 that detects a game ball B that has passed through the gate 2003, a large prize opening sensor 2402 that detects a game ball B received in the large prize opening 2005, and a special prize opening sensor 2402 that detects a game ball B received in the special prize opening 2006. Detection signals from the device winning slot sensor 2601 that detects a game ball B received in the V winning slot 2007, the V winning slot sensor 3003 that detects a game ball B received in the losing slot 2008, the out sensor 664 that detects a game ball B ejected from the game board 5, the magnetic sensor 1050 that detects illegal magnetism within the game area 5a, and the vibration sensor that detects vibrations acting on the game board 5 are input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

In addition, the detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a and setting switching button 1311b provided on the setting change board 1311 are input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

In addition, the detection signal from the door frame opening switch and the detection signal from the main frame opening switch are input to the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633 (i.e., directly, without passing through the dispensing control input circuit and dispensing control output circuit described below), and then input to the input terminals of the specified input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

The detection signals from the out sensor 664, first start opening sensor 3002, and second start opening sensor 2401 are input directly to the main control board 1310, without passing through other boards, and are then input to the input terminals of designated input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit. In contrast, the detection signals from the general prize opening sensor 3001, gate sensor 2801, special prize opening sensor 2402, bonus prize opening sensor 2601, V prize opening sensor 3003, losing opening sensor 3004, magnetic sensor 1050, and vibration sensor are input indirectly to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710, and are then input to the input terminals of designated input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a outputs control signals from the output terminal of its designated output port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, which indirectly outputs drive signals from the main control solenoid drive circuit to the start port solenoid 2412, attacca solenoid 2414, bonus prize port solenoid 2612, and V-distribution solenoid 3007 via the panel relay board 1710, and outputs drive signals from the output terminal of its designated output port to the status indicator, normal symbol indicator, normal hold indicator, first special symbol indicator, first special hold number indicator, second special symbol indicator, second special hold number indicator, and round indicator of the function display unit 1400 directly, without going through other boards. Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a also outputs drive signals from the output terminal of its designated output port to the setting change permission lamp 1311c on the setting change board 1311.

The main control MPU 1310a also outputs various information related to the game (game information) to the payout control board 633 by outputting it from the output terminal of its specified output port, outputs a signal (power outage clear signal) to the power outage monitoring circuit by outputting it from the output terminal of its specified output port, and outputs a launch permission signal that indicates permission to launch game ball B from the output terminal of its specified output port to the payout control board 633. The logic of this launch permission signal that indicates permission to launch is set to launch permission logic when launch is permitted, and set to launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) which is the inverse of the launch permission logic when launch is not permitted. The logic of the firing permission signal is configured by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that the initial value (default) is set to firing stop logic (firing non-permission logic) which is the inverse of the firing permission logic from the time the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (or restored) until the firing permission signal setting process in the main control timer interrupt process described below begins.

In this embodiment, the first start gate sensor 3002, second start gate sensor 2401, gate sensor 2801, large prize gate sensor 2402, special prize gate sensor 2601, V prize gate sensor 3003, loss gate sensor 3004, and out sensor 664 use non-contact electromagnetic proximity switches, while the general prize gate sensor 3001 uses a contact ON/OFF mechanical switch. This is because game ball B frequently enters or passes through first start gate 2002, second start gate 2004, and gate 2003, and therefore game ball B is frequently detected by first start gate sensor 3002, second start gate sensor 2401, and gate sensor 2801. For this reason, highly durable, long-life proximity switches are used for the first start gate sensor 3002, second start gate sensor 2401, and gate sensor 2801.

Furthermore, when a favorable game state (such as a "jackpot" game) occurs that is advantageous to the player, the large prize opening 2005 opens and game ball B frequently enters, so game ball B is also frequently detected by the large prize opening sensor 2402. For this reason, a highly durable, long-life proximity switch is used for the large prize opening sensor 2402. Furthermore, game ball B launched into the game area 5a is collected in large quantities by the outlet 1008 provided in the game area 5a, which is partitioned off on the game board 5, so game ball B is also frequently detected by the out sensor 664. For this reason, a highly durable, long-life proximity switch is also used for the out sensor 664. In contrast, the general prize opening 2001, where game ball B does not frequently enter, is not frequently detected by the general prize opening sensor 3001. For this reason, a mechanical switch, which has a shorter lifespan than a proximity switch, is used for the general prize opening sensor 3001. Furthermore, regardless of whether game balls B frequently enter the general winning slot 2001, a highly durable and long-life proximity switch may be used.

The main control MPU 1310a also transmits various information related to games (game information) and various commands related to payouts to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the status of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to the control of game presentations and various commands related to the status of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port. When the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands related to the status of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, it formats these commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511, as will be explained in detail later.

The main control board 1310 receives various voltages from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, which will be described in detail later. The power supply board 630, which supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310, is equipped with an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power source to supply power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined period of time even when the power is cut off. This capacitor allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various information in RAM during power-off processing, even when the power is cut off. This stored information is completely erased (cleared) from RAM when the RAM clear switch on the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of this RAM clear switch is also output to the dispensing control board 633.

The main control board 1310 is also equipped with a power outage monitoring circuit. This power outage monitoring circuit monitors drops in the various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and when these voltages fall below the power outage warning voltage, it outputs a power outage warning signal to warn of a power outage. This power outage warning signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control I/O port, and is also output to the dispensing control board 633, etc.

[6-2. Dispensing control board]
The payout control board 633, which controls the payout of game balls B, etc., has a mounting surface 633x on which various electronic components are mounted, and a solder surface 633y on which no electronic components are mounted (single-sided mounting), and the mounting surface 633x is equipped with a payout control unit 633a which performs various controls related to payout, a launch control unit 633b which controls launch using the launch solenoid 542 and also controls ball feed using the ball feed solenoid 145, an error LED indicator which displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch which has a push operation unit for releasing the error displayed on the error LED indicator, and a ball removal switch which, during maintenance, discharges game balls B in the ball tank 552, tank rail 553, ball guidance unit 570, and payout device 580 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (upper tray 201) and starts the ball removal operation. The dispensing control board 633 in this example is mounted with only lead-type (through-hole mounting type, insertion mounting type) electronic components that are soldered by inserting lead terminals into through-holes provided on the surface of the board, but it may be a mixed board on which both lead-type (through-hole mounting type, insertion mounting type) electronic components and surface-mount type electronic components (chip components, SMD (Surface Mount DevICe)) that have electrodes (connection terminals) soldered to pads provided on the surface of the board without using through-holes are mounted, or it may be a board on which only surface-mount type electronic components (chip components, SMD (Surface Mount DevICe)) are mounted.

[6-2a. Dispensing control unit]
The dispensing control unit 633a, which performs various controls related to dispensing on the dispensing control board 633, is not shown in detail, but is equipped with a dispensing control MPU, which is a microprocessor that has built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands and RAM for temporarily storing data, a dispensing control I/O port as an I/O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the dispensing control MPU is operating normally, a dispensing motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the dispensing motor 584 of the dispensing device 580, and a dispensing control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches related to dispensing are input. In addition to its built-in ROM and RAM, the dispensing control MPU also has built-in functions to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various game-related information (game information) and various payout-related commands from the main control board 1310 serially via the payout control I/O port, and also receives the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port.It also receives detection signals from the full tank detection sensor 154, and from the ball out detection sensor 574, payout detection sensor 591, and blade rotation detection sensor 590.

Detection signals from the ball out detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, the dispensing detection sensor 591 of the dispensing device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the dispensing control input circuit and input to the dispensing control MPU via the dispensing control I/O port.

In addition, detection signals from the door frame opening switch, which detects the opening of the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4, and the main frame opening switch, which detects the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, are input to the dispensing control input circuit and input to the dispensing control MPU via the dispensing control I/O port.

In addition, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the fall cover unit 150, the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the dispensing device 580, the detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591 of the dispensing device 580, the power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310, and the error release signal from the error release switch are input to a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU via the dispensing control input circuit.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal to drive the payout motor 584 via the payout control I/O to the payout motor 584, outputs a signal to display the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED indicator via the payout control I/O port to the error LED indicator, serially transmits commands indicating the status of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I/O port, and outputs the number of game balls B actually paid out to the external terminal board 558 via the payout control I/O port. This external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the gaming hall side. This hall computer monitors the player's play by keeping track of the number of game balls B paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and game information for the pachinko machine 1.

The error LED display (not shown) is a segment display that displays alphanumeric characters, figures, etc. to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1. The error LED display may display and notify the following: For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that it is "normal", when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that it is a "connection abnormality" (specifically, that an abnormality has occurred in the electrical connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633), when the number "1" is displayed, it indicates that it is a "ball out" (specifically, that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580 based on the detection signal from the ball out detection sensor 574), when the number "2" is displayed, it indicates that it is a "ball stuck" (specifically, that there is a game ball B stuck between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589 based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, making it difficult for the payout blade 589 to rotate), and when the number "3" is displayed, it indicates that there is a "counting switch error" (specifically, that there is a game ball B stuck between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589 based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590). When the number "5" is displayed, it indicates a "retry error" (specifically, that the number of retries for the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit); when the number "6" is displayed, it indicates a "full" state (specifically, that the tank is full with game balls B stored in the fault cover unit 150 based on a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154); when the number "7" is displayed, it indicates a "CR not connected" state (that an electrical connection has been cut somewhere between the payout control board 633 and the CR unit); and when the number "9" is displayed, it indicates a "stocking" state (specifically, that the number of game balls B that have not yet been paid out has reached a preset number).

The ball loan request signal for game balls B from the ball loan button 224 and the prepaid card return request signal from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of game balls B to be loaned in accordance with the ball loan request signal to the payout control board 633, and this signal is received by the payout control I/O port and input to the payout control MPU. The CR unit also updates the remaining balance on the inserted prepaid card according to the number of game balls B loaned, and outputs a signal displaying the remaining balance to the ball loan operation unit 220. This signal is input to and displayed on the ball loan display unit 226 of the ball loan operation unit 220.

[6-2b. Launch control section]
The launch control unit 633b controls launch by the launch solenoid 542 and ball delivery by the ball delivery solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b includes a launch control input circuit to which detection signals from various launch-related detection switches are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals, a launch timing control circuit that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching game balls B toward the play area 5a based on this clock signal, a launch solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 542 based on this launch reference pulse, and a ball delivery solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball delivery solenoid 145 based on the launch reference pulse. The launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 game balls B are launched toward the play area 5a per minute and outputs it to the launch solenoid drive circuit, and also generates a ball delivery reference pulse that is a predetermined number of times the launch reference pulse and outputs it to the ball delivery solenoid drive circuit.

With regard to the handle unit 180, the detection signals from the handle touch sensor 192, which detects whether the palm or fingers are touching the handle 195, and the single button operation sensor 194, which detects whether the player intends to forcibly stop the launch of game ball B, are input to the launch control input circuit and then to the launch timing control circuit. Furthermore, when the CR unit and CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, the detection signals are input to the launch control input circuit as a CR connection signal and then to the launch timing control circuit. A launch permission signal from the main control board 1310, which indicates permission to launch game ball B, is input to the launch control input circuit and then to the launch timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, which electrically adjusts the strength with which game ball B is launched toward the play area 5a depending on the rotation position of the handle 195, is input to the launch solenoid drive circuit.

The launch timing control circuit will not output a launch reference pulse to launch game ball B toward the play area 5a unless launch condition 1 is met, that is, the palm or fingers are touching the handle 195 based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192; launch condition 2 is met, that the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected based on the CR connection signal; and launch condition 3 is met, that the launch of game ball B is permitted based on a launch permission signal from the main control board 1310.As a result, for example, the launch solenoid drive circuit will not output a drive signal to the launch solenoid 542 and game ball B will not be able to be launched.

Based on a signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, this launch solenoid drive circuit outputs a drive current to the launch solenoid 542 when a launch reference pulse is input, to launch the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launch strength that corresponds to the rotational position of the handle 195. Meanwhile, when a ball delivery reference pulse is input, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 145, thereby receiving one game ball B stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 into the ball feed unit 140. When the input of the ball delivery reference pulse ends, the constant current output is stopped, thereby sending the received game ball B to the ball launcher 540. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is controlled to a constant value.

In this embodiment, the launch control unit 633b, which controls launch using the launch solenoid 542 and ball delivery using the ball delivery solenoid 145, is provided on the payout control board 633, but it may also be configured to be provided on the power supply board 630. In this case, the launch permission signal from the main control board 1310 may be configured to be input directly to the power supply board 630, or may be input to the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633, or may be input to the power supply board 630 via a relay board (not shown).

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 169, the peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls the performance based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a performance display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of the performance display device 1600 based on control data from this peripheral control unit 1511.

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1511 that controls the performance on the peripheral control board 1510 is not shown in detail, but is equipped with a peripheral control IC in which a CPU, RAM, and various I/O interfaces are integrated on a single semiconductor chip, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a sound source IC that produces high-quality sound, and a sound ROM that stores sound information such as music, voice, and sound effects referenced by this sound source IC.

The peripheral control IC has multiple parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. integrated on a single semiconductor chip. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC, based on these commands, sends game board side light emission data from the serial I/O port for the lamp drive board to each decorative board of the game board 5 to output lighting signals, flashing signals, or gradation lighting signals to the color LEDs, etc., provided on each decorative board of the game board 5, and sends game board side drive data from the serial I/O port for the game board decorative drive board to the drive motor or drive solenoid of the game board 5 to output drive signals to the drive motor that operates the various performance units provided on the game board 5. The serial I/O port for the frame decoration drive board transmits door-side drive light-emitting data to the door frame 3 side, which is composed of door-side drive data for outputting drive signals to the vibration motor 356, operation button lift drive motor 367, and protrusion force adjustment drive motor 381, etc., which are provided on the door frame 3, and door-side light-emitting data for outputting lighting signals, flashing signals, or gradation lighting signals to the color LEDs, etc., provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3. The serial I/O port for the display control unit transmits control data (display commands) indicating the screen to be displayed on the performance display device 1600 to the performance display control unit 1512, and also outputs control signals (sound commands) to the sound source IC for extracting sound information from the sound ROM.

Detection signals from the contact detection sensor main body 358, pressure detection sensor 373, lift detection sensor 374, and protrusion force detection sensor 375 of the performance operation unit 300 installed on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control IC.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC also receives a signal (operation signal) from the performance display control unit 1512 indicating that the performance display control unit 1512 is operating normally, and monitors the operation of the performance display control unit 1512 based on this operation signal.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on control data (sound commands) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and controls the playback of music, sound effects, and other sounds associated with various performances from the top center speaker, top side speakers, and main frame speaker 622 on the main frame 4, located on the door frame 3 and main frame 4, respectively. The volume can be adjusted by rotating a volume control switch that protrudes rearward from the peripheral control board box housing the peripheral control board 1510. In this embodiment, sound signals (e.g., 2-channel stereo signals, 4-channel stereo signals, 2.1-channel surround signals, or 4.1-channel surround signals) are sent as sound information to the top center speaker and top side speakers on the door frame 3 and the main frame speaker 622 for bass sounds on the main frame 4, thereby providing more realistic sound effects (sound performances) than ever before.

In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the peripheral control unit 1511 also has an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown), and the CPU of the peripheral control IC uses both the built-in WDT and the external WDT to diagnose whether its own system is running out of control.

Display commands output from the CPU of this peripheral control IC to the effect display control unit 1512 are sent via a serial input/output port, and in this embodiment, the bit rate (the amount of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is set to 19.2 kilobits per second (kbps). On the other hand, the initial data, door frame side light flashing commands, game board side light flashing commands, movable body drive commands, etc. output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the game board 5 are sent via multiple serial input/output ports different from the display commands, and in this embodiment, the bit rate is set to 250 kbps.

[6-3b. Performance display control section]
The performance display control unit 1512 controls the drawing of the performance display device 1600. Although not shown in detail, the performance display control unit 1512 includes a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, a VDP (short for Video Display Processor) that controls the display of the performance display device 1600, an image ROM that stores various data for the screen displayed on the performance display device 1600, and an image RAM to which the various data stored in this image ROM is transferred and copied.

This display control MPU has built-in parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc., and controls the VDP based on control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to control the drawing of the performance display device 1600. When the display control MPU is operating normally, it outputs an operation signal to the peripheral control unit 1511 to inform the same. The display control MPU also receives an execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of this execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

In addition to various programs for generating screens to be drawn on the performance display device 1600, the display control ROM also stores multiple items such as control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 and corresponding schedule data, as well as non-resident area transfer schedule data corresponding to that control data (display commands). The schedule data consists of screen data that defines the screen configuration arranged in chronological order, and defines the order in which screens are drawn on the performance display device 1600. The non-resident area transfer schedule data consists of non-resident area transfer data arranged in chronological order that defines the order in which various data stored in the image ROM is transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM. This non-resident area transfer data defines the order in which various data is transferred from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in advance, so that the screen data to be drawn on the performance display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data is drawn.

The display control MPU extracts from the display control ROM the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 and outputs it to the VDP, and then extracts from the display control ROM the screen data following the first screen data and outputs it to the VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in chronological order in the schedule data one by one from the display control ROM, starting with the first screen data, and outputs it to the VDP.

When the VDP receives screen data output from the display control MPU, it extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data, generates drawing data to be displayed on the performance display device 1600, and outputs this generated drawing data to the performance display device 1600. Furthermore, when the performance display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an execution signal to the display control MPU to inform this fact. The VDP uses a line buffer system. This "line buffer system" is a system in which one line's worth of drawing data for drawing the left and right directions of the performance display device 1600 is stored in a line buffer, and the one line's worth of drawing data stored in this line buffer is output to the performance display device 1600.

Image ROM stores a large amount of sprite data, resulting in a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites to be drawn on the performance display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM becomes significant and affects the speed at which data is drawn on the performance display device 1600. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM, which has a fast access speed, and the sprite data is then extracted from this image RAM. Note that sprite data is the original data, which is the data before the sprite is expanded into bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

To explain what a "sprite" is, a "sprite" is an image displayed as a unit on the performance display device 1600. For example, when displaying various people (characters) on the performance display device 1600, the data used to draw each person is called a "sprite." As a result, when displaying multiple people on the performance display device 1600, multiple sprites are used. In addition to people, the houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be treated as a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the performance display device 1600 after their placement on the screen and their hierarchical relationship when sprites overlap (hereinafter referred to as the "sprite overlapping order") are set.

A sprite is made up of multiple rectangular areas, each 64 pixels wide and 64 pixels long, glued together. The data used to draw these rectangular areas is called a "sprite character." Small sprites can be represented using a single sprite character, while relatively large sprites such as people can be represented using a total of six sprite characters, arranged, for example, 2 wide and 3 high. Even larger sprites, such as backgrounds, can be represented using even more sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be specified freely for each sprite.

The performance display device 1600 is driven by a main scan that sets the display state of each pixel sequentially from left to right when viewed from the front, and a sub-scan that repeats the main scan in a direction that intersects with the one direction. When one line of drawing data output from the performance display control unit 1512 is input to the performance display device 1600, it outputs the data to each of the pixels in one line sequentially from left to right when viewed from the front of the performance display device 1600 as a main scan. Once the output of one line is complete, the performance display device 1600 moves on to the line directly below as a sub-scan, and when the drawing data for the next line is input in the same way, it outputs the data to each of the pixels in one line sequentially from left to right when viewed from the front of the performance display device 1600 as a main scan based on the drawing data for the next line.

[7. Configuration of Peripheral Control Unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500 disposed on the rear side of the gaming panel 1100 provided on the gaming board 5 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 170 to 172. Figure 170 is an exploded front perspective view of the peripheral control unit, Figure 171 is an exploded rear perspective view of the peripheral control unit, and Figure 172 is a front view of the peripheral control unit. Here, the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described as the front side of the peripheral control unit 1500. Note that in Figure 171, terminals of various connectors are inserted from the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510, and the terminals of the various connectors protrude from the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510, but this has been omitted for clarity of the drawing.

170 and 171, the peripheral control unit 1500 comprises a cover body 1501 that is open at the rear and has a box shape that is longer left-to-right than up-to-down, a peripheral control board 1510 that can control the progress of presentations based on commands from the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game, a peripheral data ROM board 1520 that is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, a liquid crystal output board 1530 that is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and a base body 1502 that covers the opening of the cover body 1501. Within the internal space of the cover body 1501, various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached in predetermined positions, and the opening of the cover body 1501 is covered by the base body 1502, thereby forming a peripheral control board box 1505 (sealed board box) consisting of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502.

[7-1. Cover body]
The various boards mounted within the interior space of cover body 1501 include peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520 capable of storing various control information (peripheral data) controlled by peripheral control board 1510, and liquid crystal output board 1530 capable of outputting drawing data for drawing images on performance display device 1600. Peripheral control board 1510 has a horizontally long rectangular shape that occupies approximately two-thirds of the area of cover body 1501 when viewed from the back, and is located on the left side of cover body 1501. When viewed from the back of cover body 1501, peripheral data ROM board 1520 occupies the remaining approximately one-third of the area, with peripheral data ROM board 1520 having a square shape and located on the upper right side of cover body 1501, while liquid crystal output board 1530 having a square shape twice the size of peripheral data ROM board 1520 and located on the lower right side of cover body 1501.

The peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are electrically connected to each other by a board-to-board connector, which will be described later, and the peripheral control board 1510 and the LCD output board 1530 are electrically connected to each other by a board-to-board connector, which will be described later. As a result, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the ground (GND) line of the LCD output board 1530 are electrically connected to the same ground (GND). The ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the LCD output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4.

The cover body 1501 is made of conductive resin, which is polycarbonate containing carbon, and is molded in an opaque black color. When viewed from the front, it has a box-like shape with an opening, with cover side walls 1501b-1501e protruding rearward (toward the front of the pachinko machine 1) from the top, left, bottom, and right sides of the horizontally long, rectangular cover plate 1501a (plate thickness: 2 mm).

When viewed from the front, cover plate 1501a has a square fan mounting recess 1501aa for mounting an air-cooling fan FAN, which protrudes toward the opening of cover body 1501 at a position slightly above and to the right of the center, corresponding to the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on peripheral control board 1510 attached to the back side of cover plate 1501a. The bottom surface of fan mounting recess 1501aa has multiple arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa formed along multiple concentric circles centered at the center of the bottom surface in the vertical and horizontal directions. Additionally, at the four corners of the bottom surface of fan mounting recess 1501aa, at positions corresponding to through-holes th1 to th4 formed at the four corners of the square-shaped air-cooled fan FAN, cylindrical guide protrusions 1501aab1 to 1501aab4 are formed, each having a predetermined height (a distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension in the depth direction of air-cooled fan FAN) that protrude toward the opposite side from the opening of cover body 1501. Furthermore, by forming these as arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa, it is possible to prevent unauthorized removal of various electronic components mounted on peripheral control board 1510 from peripheral control board 1510.

In addition, a pair of diagonal mounting holes 1501aac1, aac2 are formed in the cover plate 1501a near the fan mounting recess 1501aa. When the air-cooled fan FAN is pressed into the fan mounting recess 1501aa to mount it, the front surface of the air-cooled fan FAN and the front surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. In this state, metal pan head screws (screws with a pan head and flat washer integrated into one unit) (not shown) are screwed into the pair of mounting holes 1501aac1, aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover plate 1501a. This causes the flat washer that forms the seat of the pan head screw to abut against the front of the air-cooled fan FAN and the front of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, preventing the air-cooled fan FAN from jumping out of the fan mounting recess 1501aa.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, a gap with a specified distance dimension (2.3 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the part number and model number are printed) and the rear surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa.

The cover plate 1501a is connected to the fan mounting recess 1501aa and has a wiring lead-out recess 1501ab that protrudes toward the opening of the cover body 1501 at a position higher than the bottom of the fan mounting recess 1501aa (a position that is shorter than the distance from the front of the cover plate 1501a to the bottom of the fan mounting recess 1501aa). When the air-cooled fan FAN is attached and fixed to the fan mounting recess 1501aa, multiple wires from the air-cooled fan FAN can be pulled out from the wiring lead-out recess 1501ab.

When viewed from the front, the cover plate 1501a is formed so that along its lower edge, a position corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 and volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, which is attached to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, is a single closed, approximately horizontally elongated rectangular area (more precisely, a convex area with the volume adjustment switch 1510d and connector CN1 at the top and connectors CN2 to CN7 at the bottom), and the connector recess 1501ac is formed at a position lower than the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa (a position having a longer distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front of the cover plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa), protruding toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. Connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and a volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 are formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac at positions corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. The bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac occupies mostly the area on the lower right side when viewing the cover plate 1501a from the front. Therefore, to prevent insufficient strength and warping of the cover body 1501 (cover plate 1501a) caused by the increased area of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, two elongated reinforcing ribs 1510aci1 and 1510aci2 are formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, protruding forward at a predetermined distance and spaced apart in a position that does not interfere with the connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the connectors CN1 to CN7 and volume adjustment switch 1510d on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 become exposed from the connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and volume adjustment hole 1501ac8, respectively, formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac.

When viewed from the front, the cover plate 1501a is formed so that the connector recess 1501ad is located lower than the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa (at a position having a longer distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa) along its lower edge at a position corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 attached to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and protrudes toward the opening side of the cover body 1501, and the bottom surfaces of the connector recess 1501ad and connector recess 1501ac are arranged on the same plane. Connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 are formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad at positions corresponding to connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530.

When the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 become exposed from the connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10, respectively, formed in the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad.

When viewed from the front, cover plate 1501a has a wiring outlet opening 1501ae formed along its left edge at a position corresponding to CN10 provided on surface (mounting surface) 1530x of liquid crystal output board 1530. A mounting recess 1501af, which communicates with this wiring outlet opening 1501ae and is used to attach wiring cover body 1503 having a horizontally elongated rectangular shape that can cover wiring outlet opening 1501ae, is formed at a position higher than the bottom surface of the above-mentioned fan mounting recess 1501aa (at a position having a distance shorter than the distance from the front surface of cover plate 1501a to the bottom surface of fan mounting recess 1501aa), and protrudes toward the opening of cover body 1501. The mounting recess 1501af is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 1503a formed in the wiring cover body 1503, with a cylindrical protrusion 1501afa having a predetermined height (a distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension in the depth direction of the wiring cover body 1503) that is inserted into the through hole 1503a and protruding toward the opposite side of the opening of the cover body 1501. Mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 are formed at positions corresponding to the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503, respectively.

When the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af, the front surface of the wiring cover body 1503 and the front surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are positioned on the same plane. In this state, metal pan head screws (not shown) can be inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwed into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2, respectively, from the front to the rear of the wiring cover body 1503, thereby fixing the wiring cover body 1503 to the mounting recess 1501af.

When the wiring cover body 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af, it closes the wiring pull-out opening 1501ae and functions as a protective cover to prevent contact with the flexible flat cable (FFC (short for Flexible Flat Cable. A flexible flat cable has multiple flat conductors arranged in parallel for transmitting drawing data to the performance display device 1600, and these multiple flat conductors are covered with an insulator)) connected to the connector CN10 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. The wiring cover body 1503 is made of conductive resin made of polycarbonate containing carbon, and is molded in an opaque black color.

When viewing cover body 1501 from the front, plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb are formed near the opening side of cover body 1501 on left cover side wall 1501c, with a specified central distance between them, and protrude outward. Also formed are hinge hook portion 1501cc located above guide portion 1501ca and protruding outward, and hinge hook portion 1501cd located below guide portion 1501cb and protruding outward. The rear surfaces of the left ends of guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb are chamfered. Meanwhile, L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda are formed on the front surfaces of the left ends of hinge hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd, protruding forward. Additionally, a cover-side seal portion 1501ea that protrudes outward is formed in the center of the cover body 1501 on the right cover side wall 1501e.

In order to position the peripheral control board 1510 closely to the left side of the back surface of the cover body 1501, the cover plate 1501a has four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 that protrude from the back surface of the cover plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 when viewed from the back surface. Around the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, circular soldering copper foils (so-called ``lands'') 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 are formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x side of the peripheral control board 1510, and circular soldering copper foils (so-called ``lands'') 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y side of the peripheral control board 1510, and wiring patterns are formed on the peripheral control board 1510 so that these lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are each electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510. Furthermore, these lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are each soldered so that the copper foil on their surfaces is not exposed.

When attaching the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1501 is faced toward the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a.Metal pan head screws (not shown) are then inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 and screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4, thereby fixing the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a. In this state, lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 abut against the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the cover plate 1501a, respectively, and lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 abut against the bearing surfaces of the metal pan head screws. Furthermore, the shafts (threaded portions) of the metal pan head screws are screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the cover plate 1501a.

As mentioned above, the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin made of polycarbonate containing carbon, so the cover body 1501 (cover plate 1501a) is electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the peripheral control board 1510 via metal pan head screws. This electrically connects the cover body 1501 to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and they share the same ground (GND). Therefore, by electrically connecting the cover body 1501 to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 via a metal pan head screw, the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected and share the same ground (GND).

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 are positioned inside the opening end faces of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 (in other words, so as not to protrude outside the opening end faces of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e).

In order to position the peripheral data ROM board 1520 on the upper right side of the back surface of the cover body 1501, when viewed from the back surface, the cover plate 1501a has a pair of mounting boss holes 1501ah1, 1501ah2 and a pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1, 1501ai2 formed diagonally at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. These protrude diagonally from the back surface of the cover plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. Around the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, circular soldering copper foils (so-called "lands") 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 are formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and circular soldering copper foils (so-called "lands") 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1520y side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and wiring patterns are formed on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 so that these lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4, 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are each electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. Furthermore, these lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are each soldered so that the copper foil on their surfaces is not exposed.

When attaching the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is faced toward the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. Metal pan head screws (not shown) are then inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, thereby fixing the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a. In this state, lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1520x of peripheral data ROM board 1520 abut against the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of mounting boss protrusions 1501i1 and 1501i2 and mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface of cover plate 1501a, respectively. Lands 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1520y of peripheral data ROM board 1520 also abut against the bearing surfaces of the metal pan head screws. Furthermore, the shafts (threaded portions) of the metal pan head screws are screwed into mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface of cover plate 1501a.

As mentioned above, cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin made of polycarbonate containing carbon, so cover body 1501 (cover plate 1501a) is electrically connected to lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4, 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 formed on peripheral data ROM board 1520 via metal pan head screws. This electrically connects cover body 1501 to the ground (GND) of peripheral data ROM board 1520. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and they share the same ground (GND). Therefore, by electrically connecting the cover body 1501 to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 via a metal pan head screw, the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected and share the same ground (GND).

When the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are positioned inside the opening edge of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 (i.e., so as not to protrude outside the opening edge of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and the back side (solder side) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the back side (solder side) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a are positioned on the same plane.

In order to position the liquid crystal output board 1530 on the lower right side of the back surface of the cover body 1501, the cover plate 1501a is formed with a pair of mounting boss holes 1501am1, 1501am2 and a pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501an1, 1501an2 that protrude diagonally from the back surface of the cover plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 when viewed from the back surface. Around the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, circular soldering copper foils (so-called "lands") 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 are formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and circular soldering copper foils (so-called "lands") 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1530y side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and wiring patterns are formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 so that these lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4, 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are each electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Furthermore, these lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 and 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are each soldered so that the copper foil on their surfaces is not exposed.

When attaching the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the surface (mounting surface) 1530 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is faced toward the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r2, 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1, 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1530r1, 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 and screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501am1, 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, thereby fixing the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a. In this state, lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 abut against the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of mounting boss protrusions 1501n1 and 1501n2 and mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface of the cover plate 1501a, respectively. Lands 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1530y of the liquid crystal output board 1530 also abut against the bearing surfaces of the metal pan head screws. Furthermore, the shafts (threaded portions) of the metal pan head screws are screwed into mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface of the cover plate 1501a.

As mentioned above, the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin made of polycarbonate containing carbon, so the cover body 1501 (cover plate 1501a) is electrically connected to the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4, 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 formed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 via metal pan head screws. This electrically connects the cover body 1501 to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and they share the same ground (GND). Therefore, by electrically connecting the cover body 1501 to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530 via a metal pan head screw, the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are electrically connected and share the same ground (GND).

When the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 are positioned inside the opening edge of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 (i.e., so as not to protrude outside the opening edge of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and the back side (solder side) 1530y of the liquid crystal output board 1530, the back side (solder side) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and the back side (solder side) 1520y of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a are all positioned on the same plane.

In this way, when various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and LCD output board 1530 are fixed in predetermined positions on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, a space having a predetermined height (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the surface of the various boards (the surface facing the back side of the cover plate 1501a) and the back side of the cover plate 1501a. In this state, a gap having the above-mentioned predetermined height (2.3 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the part number and model number are printed) and the rear surface of the fan mounting recess 1501aa.

The cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 has multiple circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the right, lower right, lower left, and left sides of the fan mounting recess 1501aa. When the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the fan mounting recess 1501aa rotate, this rotation forces air from the interior space of the cover body 1501 through the blades toward the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500. By drawing in air from outside the peripheral control unit 1500 through these ventilation holes 1501az, the interior space of the cover body 1501 (particularly the peripheral control IC 1510a) can be cooled. These ventilation holes 1501az have a diameter of 3 mm, are spaced at a pitch of 6.5 mm in the left-right direction, and are spaced at a pitch of 6.0 to 6.5 mm in the up-down direction.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, gaps are formed between the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 on the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501, as well as between the volume adjustment switch 1510d on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501. Furthermore, when the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, gaps are formed between the two connectors CN8 and CN9 on the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501. Therefore, when the blades of the cooling fan F attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be blown out toward the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blades, and air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the above-mentioned ventilation holes 1501az, and air is also taken in through the above-mentioned gaps (between the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the ventilation holes 1501 formed in the cover body 1501). The power is taken in through the gaps formed between the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 on the peripheral control board 1510, the gap formed between the volume adjustment switch 1510d on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 on the cover body 1501, and the gaps formed between the two connectors CN8 and CN9 on the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 on the cover body 1501.

The total area (addition of the areas of the multiple arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa formed on the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa) is smaller than the sum of the area of the multiple ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the area of the above-mentioned gaps (the gaps formed between the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501, the gaps formed between the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501, and the gaps formed between the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501). Therefore, when the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, this rotation causes the air in the internal space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled towards the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the blades. As a result, when air is taken in from outside the peripheral control unit 1500 through the multiple ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, the flow rate of the air flowing into each of the multiple ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 can be kept low.

When the blades of the air-cooled fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, this rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled towards the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the blades.This makes it possible to keep the flow rate of air flowing into each of the multiple ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 low when air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the multiple ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501.However, when the blades of the air-cooled fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, this rotation may also cause air to be drawn in through the blades and sent out towards the peripheral control IC 1510a. In other words, the main purpose of the cooling fan FAN may not be to exchange air within the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, but may be to simply cool the peripheral control IC 1510a.

[7-2. Base body]
The base body 1502 that closes the opening of the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin that is polycarbonate containing carbon, and is molded in an opaque black color, and when viewed from the front, it has a box shape with an opening, with base side walls 1502b to 1502e protruding forward (toward the back side of the pachinko machine 1) from the upper, left, lower, and right sides of a horizontally long rectangular base flat plate 1502a. The size of the opening formed by the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 is slightly larger than the size of the opening formed by the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. As a result, when the base body 1502 is placed over the cover body 1501 to close the opening of the cover body 1501 with the base body 1502, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 fit inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and are in inscribed (surface contact) with each other.

When viewed from the front, base plate 1502a has vertically elongated breakage prevention ribs 1502aa1-1502aa3 formed at predetermined intervals along the bottom edge at positions that do not interfere with connectors CN2-CN7 on surface (mounting surface) 1510x of peripheral control board 1510 (in other words, the terminals of connectors CN2-CN7 on surface (mounting surface) 1510x of peripheral control board 1510 are inserted from surface (mounting surface) 1510x of peripheral control board 1510x to back surface (solder surface) 1510y of peripheral control board 1510 and protrude from back surface (solder surface) 1510y of peripheral control board 1510), preventing the peripheral control board 1510 from warping due to the force applied when inserting connectors to connect wiring to connectors CN2-CN7, thereby breaking the electrical wiring patterns formed on the peripheral control board 1510.

When viewing the base body 1502 from the front, an outward-protruding engagement portion 1502ca is formed on the left-side base sidewall 1502c near the opening side of the base body 1502. This engagement portion 1502ca is formed with guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab at positions corresponding to the plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501, and hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad at positions corresponding to the hinge hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501. Hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad have U-shaped groove-shaped pocket portions 1502cae and 1502caf formed therein.

The plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca, 1501cb formed on the above-mentioned cover body 1501 are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa, 1502cab, and the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca, 1501cda of the hinge hook portions 1501cc, 1501cd formed on the above-mentioned cover body 1501 are inserted into the U-groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae, 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac, 1502cad. The L-shaped hook portions 1501cca, 1501cda of the hinge hook portions 1501cc, 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are then wrapped around the U-groove-shaped pocket portions 1502cae, 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac, 1502cad while they are in contact with them, so that the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca, 1501cda of the hinge hook portions 1501cc, 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 can be hooked and engaged with the U-groove-shaped pocket portions 1502cae, 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac, 1502cad.

In addition, a base-side seal portion 1502ea that protrudes outward is formed in the center of the right-side base side wall 1502e at a position corresponding to the cover-side seal portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501. Furthermore, through-holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 are formed on the upper and lower sides of the right-side base side wall 1502e, respectively, for attaching the peripheral control unit 1500 to the gaming panel 1100 provided on the gaming board 5.

[7-3. Various Connectors]
The surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the internal space of the cover body 1501 is provided with a peripheral control IC 1510a in which a CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA controller (Advanced Technology Attachment, hereinafter referred to as "SATA controller"), and various I/O interfaces are integrated on one semiconductor chip, a control ROM 1510b in which various programs for controlling the progress of game presentations and demonstrations (demonstration presentations performed while the player is waiting) and various schedule data (presentation data) for defining the progress of presentations are stored in advance, and an SDRAM (Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory) to which various control information (peripheral data) stored in a peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be transferred and stored. The device is equipped with an SDRAM 1510c consisting of SDRAM (SDRAM memory) 1510c1 and 1510c2, a slide-type volume adjustment switch 1510d for adjusting the volume, a backup power supply 1510e for supplying power to a real-time clock IC (not shown) even when the power is cut off, a power supply generating circuit (not shown) for generating various power supply voltages, and various connectors CN1 to CN7. The backup power supply 1510e is housed in a holder (not shown).

As described above, the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 integrates a CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA controller, and various I/O interfaces onto a single semiconductor chip, and combines the functions of the peripheral control unit 1511 (excluding the functions of various ROMs) and the performance display control unit 1512 (excluding the functions of various ROMs) described above.

The control ROM 1510b provided on the peripheral control board 1510 includes the functions of the peripheral control ROM of the peripheral control unit 1511 described above and the display control ROM functions of the performance display control unit 1512 described above, and has a storage capacity of 256 Mbits (or 128 Mbits). The SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 each have a storage capacity of 2 Gbits. The peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a storage capacity of 62 Gbits.

The various I/O interfaces of the peripheral control board 1510 include various serial I/O and various parallel I/O. Examples of various serial I/O include SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) communication, UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter) communication, and I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) communication.

In this embodiment, UART communication is used as the communication method for receiving commands from the main control board 1310 (communication takes place via connector CN5), and SPI communication or I2C communication is used as the communication method for transmitting control data to the various boards provided on the game board 5 side and the various boards provided on the door frame side (communication takes place via the corresponding connector from among connectors CN3, CN6, and CN7).

In this embodiment, SPI communication and I2C communication are used to send drive data to the drive control IC that drives the electrical drive sources (e.g., various motors and solenoids, communicating via connector CN6) on the game board 5 and the electrical drive sources (e.g., various motors and solenoids, communicating via connector CN3) on the door frame 3; send light emission data to the LED control IC for the multiple LEDs on the game board 5 (communicating via connector CN7) and the multiple LEDs on the door frame 3 (communicating via connector CN3); receive signals as detection data from the various sensors on the game board 5 (communicating via connector CN6) and the various sensors on the door frame 3 (communicating via connector CN3). Note that in this embodiment, the transfer speed for SPI communication is set to 250 kbps, and the transfer speed for I2C communication is set to 1 kbps.

The various parallel I/Os include GPIO (General Purpose Input/Output). In this embodiment, a signal from the air-cooled fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the gaming board 5, which conveys the rotational status of the fan, is input to the GPIO (via connector CN1). Signals from various sensors that check the operation and origin position of control objects (not shown) provided on the gaming board 5 are input to the GPIO (via connector CN6). Control signals for control objects (not shown) provided on the gaming board 5 are output from the GPIO (via connector CN6). A signal is output from the GPIO to LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 to indicate that the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

In this embodiment, for example, GPIO is assigned to connector CN1, SPI communication and I2C communication are assigned to connector CN3 (i.e., connector CN3 is assigned as a connector where SPI communication and I2C communication coexist), UART communication is assigned to connector CN5, SPI communication and GPIO are assigned to connector CN6 (i.e., connector CN6 is assigned as a connector where SPI communication and GPIO coexist), and SPI communication is assigned to connector CN7.

The SATA controller in peripheral control IC 1510a can establish SATA-compliant communications with peripheral data ROM 1520a on peripheral data ROM board 1520, achieving a high transfer speed of 2 Gbps (up to 3 Gbps). In response to instructions from the CPU in peripheral control IC 1510a, the SATA controller in peripheral control IC 1510a can quickly transfer various control information (peripheral data) from peripheral data ROM 1520a on peripheral data ROM board 1520 to RAM in peripheral control IC 1510a, or to SDRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2.

SDRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2 are DDR3 SDRAM (Double Data Rate 3 Synchronous Dynamic IC Random Access Memory) that can achieve high data communication speeds. Various control information (peripheral data) from peripheral data ROM 1520a on peripheral data ROM board 1520 is transferred to SDRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2 at high speed via the SATA controller of peripheral control IC 1510a.

The surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 further includes a special connector SCN1 for inter-board connection with the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a special connector SCN2 for inter-board connection with the liquid crystal output board 1530. The surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 includes a special connector SCN3 for inter-board connection with the peripheral control board 1510. The surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 includes a special connector SCN4 for inter-board connection with the peripheral control board 1510.

The peripheral control board 1510 outputs image drawing data to be drawn on a display device such as a performance display device from the special connector SCN2 in multiple video signal formats. These video signal formats include, for example, RGB, LVDS, MIPI (Mobile Industry Processor Interface), eDP (Embedded DisplayPort), and clockless formats. In this embodiment, four formats (four in total) are used: one RGB system, two LVDS systems (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and MIPI system. In addition, in this embodiment, one of the two LVDS systems (e.g., the first LVDS system) is used as the video signal format input to the performance display device 1600. It is also possible to use the eDP method instead of the MIPI method, and create a peripheral control board 1510 with one RGB system, two LVDS systems (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and one eDP system.

Furthermore, the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with LEDML1 near the control ROM 1510b, LEDML2 near the SDRAM 1510c, LEDML3 near the special connector SCN1, and LEDML4 near the special connector SCN2. The peripheral control board 1510 is supplied with various voltages (+24V, +12V, and +5V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 via interface 635. LEDML1 checks (monitors) the state when +5V is being supplied, and remains lit when +5V is being supplied. LEDML2 checks (monitors) the state when +12V is being supplied, and remains lit when +12V is being supplied. LEDML3 monitors the state in which +24V is being supplied, and remains lit while +24V is being supplied. LEDML4 monitors the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and remains lit while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

When various boards, such as the peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and LCD output board 1530, are attached and fixed in their predetermined positions on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, as described above, a space with a predetermined height (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the surface of the various boards (the surface facing the back side of the cover plate 1501a) and the back side of the cover plate 1501a. The space thus formed can be brightly illuminated by lighting the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510.

Special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, special connector SCN3 on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and special connector SCN4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the LCD output board 1530 are equipped with floating mechanisms, and are structurally completely different from connectors CN1 to CN7 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and connectors CN8 to CN10 on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the LCD output board 1530. These connectors CN1 to CN10 are each sockets, and the socket and plug are mated by inserting and pushing the corresponding connector plug vertically into the peripheral control board 1510 and LCD output board 1530. The sockets of connectors CN1 to CN10 are designed so that when mated, there is absolutely no vertical movement when viewing the peripheral control board 1510 and the LCD output board 1530 from the front.

The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are each plugs, and the special connector SCN3 on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the special connector SCN4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the LCD output board 1530 are each sockets.

The socket of special connector SCN3 on surface (mounting surface) 1520x of peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into and pushed into the plug of special connector SCN1 on surface (mounting surface) 1510x of peripheral control board 1510, thereby mating the socket and plug. The socket of special connector SCN3 on surface (mounting surface) 1520x of peripheral data ROM board 1520 is designed with a floating mechanism that, when mated, moves a predetermined distance in the forward and backward directions (from the rear to the front of pachinko machine 1) when viewed from the front of peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral control board 1510), absorbing any forward and backward errors that occur when the socket is pushed in. Furthermore, when the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is attached and fixed in a predetermined position on the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, a gap is formed between the front (top) surface of the socket of the special connector SCN3 and the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 so that the front (top) surface of the socket of the special connector SCN3 does not come into contact with the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, even if the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral control board 1510) moves to the maximum extent within the predetermined distance range described above when viewed from the front.

The socket of the special connector SCN4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN2 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, thereby mating the socket and plug. The socket of the special connector SCN4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is designed with a floating mechanism that, when mated, allows the socket to move a predetermined distance in the forward and backward directions (from the back to the front of the pachinko machine 1) when viewed from the front of the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control board 1510), thereby absorbing any forward and backward errors that occur when the socket is pushed in. Furthermore, when the liquid crystal output board 1530 is attached and fixed in a predetermined position on the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, a gap is formed between the front (top) surface of the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 so that the front (top) surface of the socket of the special connector SCN4 does not come into contact with the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, even if the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control board 1510) moves to the maximum extent within the predetermined distance range described above when viewed from the front.

Here, we briefly explain why the peripheral data ROM board 1520 uses the special connector SCN3 and the LCD output board 1530 uses the special connector SCN4. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is equipped with a peripheral data ROM 1520a (including the image ROM functions of the effect display control unit 1512 described above) that can store various control information (peripheral data) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. Examples of various control information (peripheral data) include image data such as background images, character images, and pattern images used to draw various effect images on the effect display device 1600; light emission data that specifies the light emission modes (on, gradation, flashing, off, etc.) of the various LEDs mounted in multiple locations on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and game board 5; sound data such as music, voice, warning sounds, and notification sounds; and drive data for driving and controlling the various movable effect elements provided on the door frame 3 and game board 5.

Peripheral data ROM 1520a is a NAND flash (non-volatile) memory that is cheaper and has a larger capacity than NOR flash (non-volatile) memory, and can write various data quickly. Peripheral data ROM 1520a has a low operating voltage, which reduces power consumption, and can achieve high transfer speeds through communications that comply with the SATA standard.

In this way, using NAND flash (non-volatile) memory as the peripheral data ROM 1520a reduces costs, contributes to reduced power consumption, and allows various stored data to be read at high transfer rates. However, while the peripheral data ROM 1520a reduces power consumption due to its low operating voltage, the low operating voltage also makes it susceptible to noise. Furthermore, the various data stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a must be accurately and reliably transmitted from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, in this embodiment, rather than electrically connecting the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness), the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected using an inter-board connector, thereby reducing the impact of noise entering the inter-board transmission path.

The procedure for installing various boards within the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later. The socket of the special connector SCN3 on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 must be inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN1 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, after which the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the LCD output board 1530 must be secured to the back side of the cover plate 1501a along with the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, by using the socket of the special connector SCN3 equipped with the floating mechanism described above, any forward/backward errors that occur when securing the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a along with the peripheral control board 1510 can be absorbed, preventing damage to the multiple connection terminals formed on the plug and socket and ensuring the reliable formation of a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520.

As mentioned above, the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, and therefore, although within the design dimensional distance tolerance, the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may warp after molding. Even in such cases, by using the socket of the special connector SCN3 equipped with the floating mechanism described above, the front-to-rear error that occurs when fixing the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the back side of the warped cover plate 1501a can be absorbed. This prevents damage to the multiple connection terminals formed on the plug and socket, and ensures the reliable formation of a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520.

The LCD output board 1530 is an important board that outputs the image drawing data transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 via connector CN10, thereby displaying images on the effect display device 1600 showing the progress of the game presentation (for example, an image informing the player that a jackpot game state that is more advantageous than the normal state will occur, an image informing the player that a jackpot game state will not occur, an image informing the player that a jackpot game state has not occurred but that the game is getting closer to a jackpot game state compared to the normal state, etc.) and demonstrations (demo presentations that are performed while the player is waiting). For this reason, the image drawing data for the image to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 from the peripheral control board 1510 must be transmitted accurately and reliably to the LCD output board 1530. Therefore, in this embodiment, instead of electrically connecting the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness), the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected using an inter-board connector, thereby reducing the effects of noise entering the inter-board transmission path.

The procedure for installing various boards within the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later. However, the socket of the special connector SCN4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 must be inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN2 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and then the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and liquid crystal output board 1530 must be fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, by using the socket of the special connector SCN4, which is equipped with the floating mechanism described above, any forward/backward error that occurs when the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510 can be absorbed, preventing damage to the multiple connection terminals formed on the plug and socket and ensuring the reliable formation of a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, because the cover body 1501 is made of a conductive resin made from polycarbonate containing carbon, the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may warp after molding, even if it is within the design dimensional distance tolerance. Even in such cases, by using the socket of the special connector SCN4 equipped with the floating mechanism described above, the front-to-rear error that occurs when fixing the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the warped cover plate 1501a can be absorbed. This prevents damage to the multiple connection terminals formed on the plug and socket, and ensures the reliable formation of a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530.

Furthermore, when the peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, as described above, the back side of the peripheral control board 1510, the back side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the back side of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged on the same plane. Therefore, compared to a three-dimensional arrangement in which the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged on the front side of the peripheral control board 1510, the distance dimension in the front-to-back direction (i.e., the depth direction) of the peripheral control unit 1500 can be made smaller. This can contribute to ensuring the distance dimension in the depth direction for placing, for example, a large movable effect unit (an electrical drive source and drive mechanism that can operate a movable effect body, and various sensors for detecting the origin position and operating position) on the game board 5.

[7-4. How to assemble the peripheral control unit]
Here, we will explain how to assemble the peripheral control unit 1500. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. Next, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510.

Next, in order to attach the peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are faced toward the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. As a result, through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged to correspond to mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are arranged to correspond to mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged to correspond to mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a.

Next, metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and screwed into mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, thereby securing the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a. Metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 and screwed into mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, thereby securing the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a.

Next, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are aligned with the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 and screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 to secure the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a. In this way, of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, LCD output board 1530, and peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 is secured last to the back side of the cover plate 1501a.

The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is restricted from moving up, down, left, and right by being inserted into mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is restricted from moving up, down, left, and right by being inserted into mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, whereas the peripheral control board 1510 does not have any mounting boss protrusions formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a to restrict movement in the up, down, left, and right directions. This is because fixing the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a restricts them in the up, down, left, and right directions, and dimensional errors caused by this restriction can be absorbed by the dimensional margins provided in the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and in the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a when the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a.

Next, with the peripheral data ROM board 1520, LCD output board 1530, and peripheral control board 1510 fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, the plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab formed on the engagement portion 1502ca of the base body 1502, and the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted into the U-groove-shaped pouch portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad formed on the engagement portion 1502ca of the base body 1502.

Next, with the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca, 1501cda of the hinge hook portions 1501cc, 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 abutting the U-groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae, 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac, 1502cad, the base body 1502 is wrapped around to cover the opening side of the cover body 1501, and with the base body 1502 placed over the cover body 1501, a metal one-way screw with a metal anchor rivet (not shown) inserted is inserted into the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and screwed into the base side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502. When the metal one-way screw is screwed in, the tip surface of the metal anchor rivet expands outward at the base-side seal portion 1502ea, sealing the cover-side seal portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and the base-side seal portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502.

In this sealed state, cover side walls 1501b-1501e of cover body 1501 fit inside base side walls 1502b-1502e of base body 1502 and are in inscribed contact (surface contact), and the front surfaces of disconnection prevention ribs 1502aa1-1502aa3 formed on base body 1502 abut against the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of peripheral control board 1510. As a result, because cover body 1501 and base body 1502 are made of conductive resin, such as polycarbonate containing carbon, as described above, cover body 1501 and base body 1502 are electrically conductive. To release this sealed state, cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on cover body 1501 must be destroyed with a tool. Therefore, by observing the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505, which is made up of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, thereby providing an increased deterrent against unauthorized acts on the peripheral control board box 1505.

Next, the air-cooled fan FAN is pressed into the fan mounting recess 1501aa formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and the multiple wires from the air-cooled fan FAN are pulled out through the wire pull-out recess 1501ab formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Metal washer-equipped pan head screws (screws with a pan head and flat washer integrated into one unit) (not shown) are then screwed into the mounting holes 1501aac1 and 1501aac2, respectively, from the front to the rear of the cover plate 1501a.

Next, a connector for connecting multiple wires (harnesses) to the performance display device 1600 is inserted and attached to connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 through the wiring pull-out opening 1501ae formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503, and then screwed into mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2, respectively, from the front to the rear of the wiring cover body 1503, thereby fixing the wiring cover body 1503 to the mounting recess 1501af. As a result, the multiple wires are covered by the wiring cover body 1503 and cannot be touched.

When attaching the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this manner to the gaming panel 1100 provided on the gaming board 5, when looking at the peripheral control unit 1500 from the front, the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the side of the engagement portion 1502ca formed on the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500) is inserted into a mounting groove (not shown) provided on the gaming panel 1100, and metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1502eb1, 1502eb2 formed on the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and screwed into mounting holes (not shown) provided on the gaming panel 1100 to secure the unit in place.

In the assembly method described above, the procedure for installing various boards within the internal space of the cover body 1501 involves, for example, first fixing the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the predetermined position described above on the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510 (the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is located on the upper right side of the cover body 1501 when viewed from the rear), and then fixing the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the predetermined position described above on the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510 (the liquid crystal output board 1530 is located on the lower right side of the cover body 1501 when viewed from the rear), The socket of the special connector SCN3 on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN1 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and the socket of the special connector SCN4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be inserted and pushed into the plug of the special connector SCN2 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, thereby fixing the peripheral control board 1510 in the above-mentioned predetermined position (the peripheral control board 1510 is positioned to the left of the cover body 1501 when viewed from the back). Even in these mounting procedures for various boards, by using the sockets of the special connectors SCN3 and SCN4, which are equipped with the floating mechanism described above, the forward/backward error that occurs when pushing in can be absorbed, preventing damage to the multiple connection terminals formed on the plug and socket. This makes it possible to reliably form transmission paths between the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510, as well as between the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510.

There are several types of game boards installed in pachinko machines, each with different game specifications. In this embodiment, the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 is configured to be divided into three parts so that various boards, such as the peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and liquid crystal output board 1530, can be attached separately. The peripheral control board 1510 is a board that can be used in common regardless of the game specifications of the game board installed in the pachinko machine, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is a board that is dependent on the game specifications of the game board as peripheral data corresponding to each game board's game specifications is stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is a board that is dependent on the type of video signal input to the effect display device 1600.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that is not dependent on the game specifications of the game board, nor on the type of video signal input to the effect display device 1600. Because it is a common board, it can be reused (reused). Furthermore, because the peripheral data ROM board 1520, which is equipped with a peripheral data ROM 1520a that stores peripheral data corresponding to each game board's game specifications, and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected by the above-mentioned inter-board connector, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be easily replaced to match the game board's game specifications.

As mentioned above, there are several types of video signal formats input to display devices such as performance display devices, including RGB, LVDS, MIPI, eDP, and clockless formats. The liquid crystal output board 1530 corresponding to these multiple formats and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected by the board-to-board connector described above. This means that the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be easily replaced to match the format of the video signal input to the performance display device 1600. In this embodiment, as mentioned above, one of the two LVDS systems (e.g., the first LVDS system) is used as the format of the video signal input to the performance display device 1600. Therefore, the liquid crystal output board 1530 that matches the format of the video signal input to the performance display device 1600 (LVDS system) is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 by the board-to-board connector described above.

In addition, in this embodiment, the cover body 1501, base body 1502, and wiring cover body 1503 are all made of conductive resin, such as polycarbonate containing carbon. When various boards, such as the peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and LCD output board 1530, are fixed to the back side of the cover body 1501 (cover plate 1501a) with metal pan-head screws, they are electrically connected to the grounds (GND) of these boards, forming a common ground (GND). This allows noise entering through the cover body 1501, base body 1502, and wiring cover body 1503 to flow to the board ground (the ground (GND) of each board), thereby eliminating the noise (hereinafter, this may be referred to as the "noise suppression effect of the conductive resin peripheral control board box 1505"). This eliminates the need to provide dedicated filters for eliminating such noise on each board, contributing to cost reductions for the various boards.

Here, we will explain the arrangement of the multiple circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. As mentioned above, these multiple circular ventilation holes 1501az can cool the interior space of the cover body 1501, and also have the function of checking for the presence or absence of tampering.

Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, as shown in FIG. 172, the multiple circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the right side of the fan mounting recess 1501aa are dispersedly positioned over an area larger than the shape of the control ROM 1510b so that the product number and model (or control number) printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the state of the IC pins of the control ROM 1510b can be visually confirmed, that is, so that the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pins can be confirmed from multiple angles. This makes it possible to check any modifications to the control ROM 1510b via the multiple circular ventilation holes 1501az. Additionally, LEDML1, located near control ROM 1510b, is designed to remain lit when +5V is being supplied from power supply board 630 of board unit 620 via interface board 635. Therefore, while it originally has the function of checking (monitoring) the status of +5V being supplied, it also functions as a spotlight that brightly illuminates control ROM 1510b, thereby contributing to improved visibility of the surface of control ROM 1510b and the status of the IC pins.

In addition, the multiple circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520) so that the connection status of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be confirmed, and are furthermore dispersedly arranged so that the product number and model (or control number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the status of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a can be visually confirmed, that is, so that the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a and the status of the IC pins can be roughly confirmed from multiple angles. This makes it possible to confirm the modification of the inter-board connectors by the special connector SCN1 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 through the multiple circular ventilation holes 1501az. Furthermore, the LEDML3 located near the special connector SCN1 remains lit when +24V is being supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 via the interface board 635. Therefore, although it originally has the function of checking (monitoring) the state in which +24V is being supplied, it also functions as a spotlight, illuminating the inter-board connector formed by the special connector SCN1 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, thereby contributing to improving the visibility of the inter-board connector formed by the special connector SCN1 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 on the surface (mounting surface) 1520x of the peripheral data ROM board 1520.

Furthermore, the multiple circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the lower left side of the fan mounting recess 1501aa are each dispersed and arranged to occupy an area larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530) so that the connection status of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be confirmed. This makes it possible to confirm, via the multiple circular ventilation holes 1501az, any alteration of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530. In addition, the LEDML4 located near the special connector SCN2 remains lit while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating. Therefore, although it originally has the function of checking (monitoring) the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a, it also functions as a spotlight that brightly illuminates the inter-board connector formed by the special connector SCN2 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530, thereby contributing to improving the visibility of the inter-board connector formed by the special connector SCN2 on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the surface (mounting surface) 1530x of the liquid crystal output board 1530.

Furthermore, the multiple circular ventilation holes 1501az formed on the lower right side of the fan mounting recess 1501aa are dispersedly positioned to occupy an area larger than the shape of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 so that the product number and model number printed on the surface of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 can be visually confirmed, as can the state of the IC pins of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, i.e., so that the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and the state of the IC pins can be confirmed from multiple angles. This makes it possible to check any modifications to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 through the multiple circular ventilation holes 1501az. Furthermore, LEDML2, which is placed near SDRAM 1510c, which is made up of SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, is designed to remain lit when +12V is being supplied from power supply board 630 of board unit 620 via interface board 635. Therefore, while it originally has the function of checking (monitoring) the state in which +12V is being supplied, it also functions as a spotlight that brightly illuminates SDRAM 1510c, thereby contributing to improved visibility of the surface of SDRAM 1510c (i.e., SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2) and the state of the IC pins.

In addition, the product number of the peripheral control IC 1510a mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed from the gaps between the multiple blades that make up the air-cooling fan FAN (specifically, the gaps between the blades when an inspector rotates the air-cooling fan FAN). This makes it possible to check, via the multiple circular ventilation holes 1501az, whether or not a counterfeit board has been placed around the peripheral control IC 1510a.

In this embodiment, LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are surface-mounted, have a wide angle of approximately 120 degrees, and are weakly directional, making them suitable for use as lighting. When various boards, such as the peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and LCD output board 1530, are attached and fixed in their predetermined positions on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, as described above, a space having a predetermined height (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed between the surfaces of the various boards (the surfaces facing the back side of the cover plate 1501a) and the back side of the cover plate 1501a. By lighting LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, which is also suitable for use as lighting, the space thus formed can be brightly illuminated.

In addition, in the area on the back surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 facing the light-emitting surfaces of LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and its surroundings, reflective portions (not shown) are formed that reflect the light emitted by LEDML1 to LEDML4 and direct it back toward the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. These reflective portions (not shown) may be made of bright colored paint such as white, or may be made of glossy colored paint, or may have a glossy metal sheet attached.

Furthermore, near the gaming board 5, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are located above the gaming board 5, and a payout unit 560 is located to the side of the gaming board 5. As a result, gaming balls rub against each other along the ball path formed by these components, becoming charged and electrostatically discharged, becoming a noise source. Therefore, the area near the gaming board 5 where the ball path is formed is an environment susceptible to noise due to electrostatic discharge from the gaming balls. Furthermore, because the pachinko machine 1 is installed back-to-back with the island equipment in the gaming hall, other pachinko machines may act as noise sources and cause noise effects. Thus, the area around the gaming board 5 is in an environment extremely susceptible to noise effects. Therefore, in this embodiment, the cover body 1501, base body 1502, and wiring cover body 1503 are made of a conductive resin made of polycarbonate containing carbon, as described above, and are electrically connected to the same ground (GND) as the peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and LCD output board 1530. This allows noise that enters through the cover body 1501 and base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear of the gaming panel 1100 of the gaming board 5 to flow to the board grounds (grounds (GND) of various boards) of the peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and LCD output board 1530, etc., thereby eliminating the noise.

[7-5. Control ROM Implementation]
Here, a method for mounting the control ROM 1510b on the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. 173 to 176. FIG. 173 is a perspective view (a) of a ROM socket having a conversion board, and a top view (b) of a control ROM having a leadless package attached to the ROM socket. FIG. 174 is a view taken along the arrow P in FIG. 173(a). FIG. 175 is a cross-sectional view of the through-holes formed in the peripheral control board and the through-holes formed in the conversion board, showing an overview of the positional relationship between the through-holes formed in the peripheral control board and the through-holes formed in the conversion board. FIG. 176 is a perspective view (a) of a control ROM and ROM socket having a leadless package mounted on a conversion board, and a top view (b) of a control ROM having a leadless package attached to the ROM socket.

First, as shown in Figures 173 to 176, a plurality of rectangular pads 1510v are formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the control ROM 1510b is arranged, and are aligned in two rows spaced a predetermined distance apart. Specifically, the pads 1510v are arranged at positions corresponding to a plurality of lead terminals that protrude outward from both longitudinal sides of a lead-type ROM socket to which the control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package (SSOP (Shrink Small Outline Package), hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "lead-type package") is attached and detached. The lead terminals of the lead-type ROM socket are soldered to pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, thereby fixing the lead-type ROM socket to the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. The pads 1510v are located near the peripheral control IC 1510a described above.

On the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the control ROM 1510b, which is a surface-mounted electronic component, there is a surface-side notation portion silk-screened in white paint that stands out against the green on a solid green resist, indicating the attributes of the surface-side electronic component, such as the component number of the surface-side electronic component and an area indicating the position where the surface-side electronic component will be placed (which may also include the shape, size, mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the surface-side electronic component). (For example, in Figure 173(b), the component number 1510v1 of the control ROM 1510b, the position where the control ROM 1510b will be placed (inner area indicated by symbols indicating the four corners (L-shaped symbols)) 1510v2, and the mounting orientation of the control ROM 1510b (mounting direction, symbol indicating the placement position of the first terminal (triangle symbol (△))) 1510v3).

In addition, on the back surface 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 (the surface on which the control ROM 1510b is not mounted, and hence may be referred to as the "non-mounted surface"), in addition to the back surface mounted electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and various ICs, a back surface notation section indicating the attributes of the back surface mounted electronic components, such as the component number of the back surface mounted electronic component and an area indicating the position where the back surface mounted electronic component is to be placed (which may also include the shape, size, mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the back surface mounted electronic component, and model of the back surface mounted electronic component) is silk-screened in white paint, which stands out easily against the green, on a solid green resist.

In this embodiment, the control ROM 1510b, which has a lead-type package, has a memory capacity of 256 Mbits and has 35 lead terminals protruding outward from each of its longitudinal sides (70 lead terminals in total on both sides).

Control ROM 1510b has a lead-type package, but in the event of a supply shortage or discontinuation, it will need to be substituted with one having a different package. However, if the package is changed, in a leadless (so-called LGA (Land Grid Array)) package (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "leadless package"), the lead terminals do not protrude from the side of the leadless package, but the connection terminals are located on the bottom of the leadless package. This means that the shape and arrangement of pad 1510v and the routing of the wiring pattern to pad 1510v must be modified. Therefore, due to the package change, the peripheral control board 1510 must be manufactured even if there are no electrical problems with other circuits.

The pads 1510v are formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 so that they are positioned corresponding to the multiple lead terminals that protrude outward from both longitudinal sides of the lead-type ROM socket to which the control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package is attached and detached. By changing the object soldered to these pads 1510v, a system is adopted that can accommodate package changes. In other words, even if the package of the control ROM 1510b is changed, there is no need to modify the shape and arrangement of the pads 1510v on the peripheral control board 1510 or the routing of the wiring pattern to the pads 1510v (the shape and arrangement of the pads 1510v and the routing of the wiring to the pads 1510v remain the same), allowing for common use. The pads 1510v are aligned in two rows, 35 per row, spaced a predetermined distance apart, on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510.

As mentioned above, the lead-type packaged control ROM 1510b has a total of 70 lead terminals, whereas the leadless packaged control ROM 1510b has a reduced number of connection terminals, with 56 (although the number of connection terminals may be less than 56) located on the bottom surface of the leadless package. This is because there are fewer power supply terminals to which an external control power supply is electrically connected, ground terminals electrically connected to ground (circuit ground) (GND), and NC terminals that are unconnected (non-connected).

When the package of the control ROM 1510b is changed from a leaded package to a leadless package, as shown in Figure 173(a), this can be accommodated by using a ROM socket 1510s that can attach and detach the control ROM 1510b having a leadless package, and a conversion board 1510t that changes the number of terminals. The ROM socket 1510s allows the control ROM 1510b having a leadless package to be attached and detached using a special tool, and is mainly composed of a mounting portion 1510sa, a pair of rotating holding pieces 1510sb, 1510sb, and multiple lead terminals 1510sc. The mounting portion 1510sa is where the control ROM 1510b having a leadless package is placed, and the pair of rotating holding pieces 1510sb, 1510sb are in an open state when the control ROM 1510b having a leadless package is placed on the mounting portion 1510sa, but when the control ROM 1510b having a leadless package is placed and held on the mounting portion 1510sa, they rotate and hold the control ROM 1510b having a leadless package in a closed state, with a force acting on the top surface of the control ROM 1510b having a leadless package toward the bottom surface.

When the pair of rotary holder pieces 1510sb, 1510sb are closed, a force acting on the top surface of the control ROM 1510b with a leadless package toward the bottom surface is maintained, maintaining an electrical connection between the 56 connection terminals on the bottom surface of the control ROM 1510b with a leadless package placed on the mounting portion 1510sa and one end of each of the corresponding lead terminals 1510sc (56 terminals).

The 56 lead terminals 1510sc are soldered and fixed to pads 1510ta (56 pieces) on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t, which is formed to correspond to these lead terminals 1510sc.

The shape of the pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t is the same as the shape of the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 (e.g., a rectangular shape measuring 2.5 mm x 0.5 mm), and the size is the same, and the distance between the pads (so-called pitch) is also the same (e.g., 0.8 mm). The distance between two rows of pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t is smaller than the distance between two rows of pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510.

The conversion board 1510t has a rectangular plate-like outer shape that is larger than the outer shape of the IC package and is roughly the same as the outer shape of the lead-type ROM socket into which the control ROM 1510b, which has a lead-type package, is attached and detached.

The conversion board 1510t is thinner (0.8 mm or 1.0 mm) than the peripheral control board 1510 (1.6 mm), and a green resist layer is formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x and back surface (solder surface, non-mounting surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510, where the pads 1510ta, wiring patterns, and lands are formed. A green resist layer is formed by applying a green resist liquid to the layer (copper plane) on which the pads 1510ta, wiring patterns, and lands are formed. The conversion board 1510t has multiple through holes (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "through holes") with lands that electrically connect to the wiring patterns formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx and back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty. The inner walls of the through holes are copper-plated to provide conductivity. The through holes, excluding the end face through holes 1510tb described below, are filled with insulating resin, and one end and the other end of the insulating resin that seals the through holes are processed so that they are flush with the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty, respectively. Together with the lands, one end and the other end of the insulating resin that seals the through holes are completely covered with a green coating (referred to as "resin filling").

As shown in FIG. 174, semicircular end face through holes 1510tb are formed on both longitudinal sides of the conversion board 1510t at positions corresponding to multiple lead terminals protruding outward from both longitudinal sides of the lead-type ROM socket to which the control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package is attached and detached. The inner walls 1510tba of the end face through holes 1510tb are copper-plated to make them conductive. The end face through holes 1510tb are formed in a circular shape during manufacturing, and then shaped into a semicircular shape by router processing. Lands are formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx and back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the end face through holes 1510tb, respectively, on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx and back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t.

The end face through holes 1510tb formed on both longitudinal sides of the conversion board 1510t are positioned in the same positions as the lead terminals of the control ROM 1510b, which has a lead-type package, and are the same distance (e.g., 0.8 mm) as the distance between the pads 1510v (so-called pitch) formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510.

As mentioned above, the difference between the control ROM 1510b with a lead-type package and the control ROM 1510b with a leadless package is the number of power supply terminals to which an external control power supply is electrically connected, ground terminals to which ground (circuit ground) (GND) is electrically connected, and NC terminals that are unconnected (non-connected). For this reason, the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx and back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t have wiring patterns routed so that the connection terminals of the control ROM 1510b with a leadless package are electrically connected to the end surface through holes 1510tb in a manner that matches the number of power supply terminals, ground terminals, and NC terminals and matches the arrangement of the lead terminals of the control ROM 1510b with a lead-type package.

Returning to Figure 173, the positional relationship between the 56 pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t and the 70 end face through holes 1510tb formed on both longitudinal side surfaces of the conversion board 1510t is such that, as shown in Figure 173(b), the point (center) where a line connecting the centers of the top and bottom sides of the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t intersects with a line connecting the centers of the left and right sides of the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t coincides (or almost coincides with) with the point (center) where a line connecting the centers of the top and bottom sides of the ROM socket 1510s intersects with a line connecting the centers of the left and right sides of the surface 1510t. This allows the pads 1510ta and the end face through holes 1510tb to be spaced apart by a predetermined distance zd as a clearance to prevent electrical contact.

A total of 70 end face through holes 1510tb are formed on both longitudinal sides of the conversion board 1510t. The inner walls 1510tba of the end face through holes 1510tb are soldered to the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, thereby fixing the back face (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t in surface contact with the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 (i.e., the conversion board 1510t is surface-mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, with no gaps).

The exposed copper surfaces on the front (mounting surface) 1510tx and back (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t have solder applied (coated with solder) using a solder releaser, and are treated to protect the exposed copper surfaces and improve wettability during mounting. The solder releaser for the conversion board 1510t may be a water-soluble flux.

When the inner wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t is soldered to the pad 1510v formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, the land of the end face through hole 1510tb comes into surface contact with the pad 1510v formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, thereby establishing electrical conductivity. This is because the surfaces of the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 have been treated with a solder lifter and have solder already applied thereto (coated with solder), and the lands of the end face through holes 1510tb formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t have also been treated with a solder lifter and have solder already applied thereto (coated with solder).Therefore, when the inner wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb is soldered to the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, the lands of the end face through holes 1510tb formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t are in surface contact with the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. The solder releaser for the peripheral control board 1510 may be water-soluble flux.

For the end face through holes 1510tb, lands are formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t, respectively, but lands may not be formed. In this case, it is preferable that the pads 1510ta formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the end face through holes 1510tb and the end face through holes 1510tb formed on both sides of the end face through holes 1510tb be spaced apart by a predetermined distance zd (e.g., 0.5 mm or more) to prevent electrical contact. In this case, lower pads that are electrically connected to the lower ends of the end face through holes 1510tb may also be formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t. The shape of these lower pads is smaller (e.g., a rectangular shape of 1.5 mm to 1.6 mm x 0.5 mm to 0.55 mm) than the shape (e.g., a rectangular shape of 2.5 mm x 0.5 mm) of pads 1510v formed on surface (mounting surface) 1510x of peripheral control board 1510, and the distance between the pads (so-called pitch) is the same (e.g., 0.8 mm) as pads 1510v formed on surface (mounting surface) 1510x of peripheral control board 1510. As described above, solder has been placed on these lower pads (coated with solder) using a solder releaser, and treatment has been performed to protect the surface of the exposed copper portion and improve wettability during mounting. Even with this configuration, the lower pad electrically connected to the lower end side of the end face through hole 1510tb formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t comes into surface contact with the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, thereby achieving electrical conductivity, when the inner wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb is soldered to the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. Furthermore, by configuring it in this manner, when the inner wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the lower pad formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t are soldered to the pad 1510v formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, the peel strength of the pad 1510v against peeling from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510 can be further increased.

On the surface (mounting surface) 1510t of the conversion board 1510t, in addition to the ROM socket 1510s, which is a surface-mounted electronic component, there are surface-side notations indicating the attributes of the surface-side electronic component, such as the component number of the surface-side electronic component and an area indicating the position where the surface-side electronic component will be placed (which may also include the shape, size, mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the surface-side electronic component, and model number of the surface-side electronic component). These notations are silk-screened in white paint that stands out against the green color on a solid green resist (for example, the component number 1510s1 of the ROM socket 1510s, the position where the ROM socket 1510s will be placed (inner area indicated by symbols indicating the four corners (L-shaped symbols)) 1510s2, and the mounting orientation of the ROM socket 1510s (mounting direction, symbol indicating the placement position of the first terminal (triangle symbol (△)))) 1510s3).

Note that while there are a total of 56 pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t, there are a total of 70 pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, which is a larger number than the pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t. Furthermore, as mentioned above, the shape of the pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t is the same as the shape of the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and they are also the same size. Furthermore, the contact area (bonding area) between the lead terminals 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s and the pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t is, when compared with the contact area (bonding area) between the inner walls 1510tba of the end face through holes 1510tb formed on both side surfaces of the conversion board 1510t and the lands (or the above-mentioned lower pads instead of the lands) formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. , the bonding strength between the inner walls 1510tba of the end face through holes 1510tb formed on both side surfaces of the conversion board 1510t and the lands (or the lower pads described above instead of the lands) formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is higher than the bonding strength between the lead terminals 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s and the pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t.

For this reason, when the lead terminal 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s is soldered to the pad 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t, the peel strength at which the pad 1510ta peels off from the base material of the conversion board 1510t is smaller than the peel strength at which the pad 1510v peels off from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510 when the inner wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the land formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t are soldered to the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510.

In other words, when an external force is applied to the ROM socket 1510s, the peel strength at which the pad 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t peels off from the base material of the conversion board 1510t is smaller than the peel strength at which the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 peels off from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the pad 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t soldered to the lead terminal 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s Because the pads 1510ta can be peeled off from the base material of the conversion board 1510t, the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 soldered to the lands formed on the inner wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t can be prevented from peeling off from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510, thereby preventing damage to the peripheral control board 1510.

On the other hand, when force is applied to the lead terminal 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s in the peeling direction, the soldered portion between the lead terminal 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s and the pad 1510ta formed on the conversion board 1510t is easily deformed because it is a thin metal wire, which increases the load on each lead terminal 1510sc and applies a force that peels off the pad 1510ta formed on the conversion board 1510t and the wiring pattern formed on the conversion board 1510t. As a result, the soldered portion on the ROM socket 1510s side, which has thin metal wires, is likely to experience pattern peeling, but the soldered portion on the peripheral control board 1510 side (the soldered portion between the inner wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the land (or the lower pad mentioned above instead of the land) formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t and the pad 1510v formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510) is likely to experience low pattern peeling.

In this way, by adopting a new configuration in which the ROM socket 1510s is not mounted directly on the peripheral control board 1510 but is instead mounted on the conversion board 1510t, damage to the peripheral control board 1510 caused by external forces applied to the ROM socket 1510s can be reduced. Therefore, a new configuration is provided for the method of mounting the control ROM 1510b, an electronic component, on the peripheral control board 1510, making it more convenient.

Furthermore, as described above, the surface (mounting surface) 1510x and back surface (solder surface, non-mounting surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 and the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx and back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t are both coated with a green resist layer, giving them a unified color. In this way, by making the resist of the peripheral control board 1510 and the conversion board 1510t the same color (green), the presence of the conversion board 1510t can be made less obvious to the peripheral control board 1510, making it less likely that they will be perceived as a target of fraud.

In addition, on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, the mounting orientation of the control ROM 1510b (symbol (triangle symbol (△)) indicating the mounting orientation and the position of the first terminal) 1510v3 is silk-screened on a solid green resist using white paint that stands out against the green of the resist. As a result, if the resists of the peripheral control board 1510 and the conversion board 1510t are the same color (green), it is difficult to determine the orientation of the conversion board 1510t during installation. Therefore, by marking the location of pin 1 (position of the first terminal) in white resist, which is easily recognizable against the green resist, the orientation of the conversion board 1510t can be made easier to determine. In other words, the peripheral control board 1510 has a 1-pin location (location of the first terminal) and the conversion board 1510t also has a 1-pin location (location of the first terminal), so even if the resists of the peripheral control board 1510 and the conversion board 1510t are the same color (green), the orientation of the conversion board 1510t can be easily identified.

In addition, the through-holes of the conversion board 1510t, excluding the end face through-hole 1510tb, are filled with insulating resin, and one end and the other end of the insulating resin sealing the through-holes are processed so that they are flush with the front (mounting surface) 1510tx and back (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t, respectively. Together with the through-hole lands, one end and the other end of the insulating resin sealing the through-holes are completely covered with a green coating (resin-filled). This eliminates the exposed metal portions of the through-holes, preventing contact with, for example, the exposed metal portions of through-holes formed on the peripheral control board 1510, thereby preventing electrical problems.

This will be briefly explained with reference to Figure 175. For example, as shown in Figure 175, the through holes formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and the through holes formed in the conversion board 1510t may or may not happen to overlap. If they do happen to overlap, the through holes formed in the peripheral control board 1510 and the through holes formed in the conversion board 1510t will be electrically connected, resulting in conduction; to prevent this, the holes in the through holes formed in the conversion board 1510t are filled with the resin described above.

Furthermore, for example, if a board on which ROM socket 1510s is mounted is provided with a connector for connecting to peripheral control board 1510, and electrical connection is made through connection with the connector on the peripheral control board 1510, the mounted control ROM would be close to the cover plate 1501a (board case) of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control board box 1505, increasing the influence of external noise. In contrast, the conversion board 1510t of this embodiment is connected by the above-mentioned soldering with the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t in surface contact. Therefore, the mounted control ROM 1510b can be located away from the cover plate 1501a (board case) of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control board box 1505, making it less susceptible to external noise.

Furthermore, the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 are 70 in number to correspond to the lead terminals of the control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package, whereas the control ROM 1510b having a leadless package has 56 connection terminals on the bottom surface of the leadless package (the number of connection terminals may be less than 56). As a result, some of the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 have an excessive number of NC terminals that are pre-assigned to the lead terminals of the control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package, resulting in an excessive number of unconnected (non-connected) terminals. The presence of these excess pads 1510v has the effect of reinforcing the soldering portion on the peripheral control board 1510 (the soldering portion between the land formed on the inner wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t and the pad 1510v formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510), and contributes to the strength of the joint surface of the soldering portion on the peripheral control board 1510. In other words, the number of NC terminals has been increased to strengthen the joint surface of the soldered portion on the peripheral control board 1510 side (the soldered portion between the land formed on the inner wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t and the pad 1510v formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510).

In addition, the inner walls 1510tba of the end face through holes 1510tb formed on both side surfaces of the conversion board 1510t are connected by lands (or the above-mentioned lower pads instead of lands) (copper foil) formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t, thereby increasing the bonding strength compared to soldering using a simple pad. The soldering portion on the conversion board 1510t side (the soldering portion between the lead terminal 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s and the pad 1510ta formed on the conversion board 1510t) is a pad only on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t, and the soldering portion on the peripheral control board 1510 side (the inner wall 1510tba of the end surface through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the lands formed on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t) (or the above-mentioned lower pad instead of the land) The soldered portions between the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the pads 1510v formed on the inner wall 1510tba of the end face through holes 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t are connected by lands (or the above-mentioned lower pads instead of lands) (copper foil) formed on the inner wall 1510tba of the end face through holes 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t, so the soldered portions on the peripheral control board 1510 side can be configured to have stronger bonding strength than the soldered portions on the conversion board 1510t side.

Furthermore, the shape of the pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t is the same as the shape of the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 (e.g., a rectangular shape of 2.5 mm x 0.5 mm), and the sizes are the same. The distance between the pads (so-called pitch) is also the same (e.g., 0.8 mm). The distance between two rows of pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t is smaller than the distance between two rows of pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and is longer than the distance between the pads (pitch). The end face through holes 1510tb formed on both side surfaces of the conversion board 1510t are the same (e.g., 0.8 mm) as the distance (so-called pitch) between the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. The distance dimension of the end face through holes 1510tb formed on both side surfaces of the conversion board 1510t (i.e., the distance dimension between both side surfaces of the conversion board 1510t) is larger than the inner distance dimension between the two rows of pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, but smaller than the outer distance dimension between the two rows of pads 1510v, and further is longer than the distance dimension between the two rows of pads 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t. This increases the pitch of the joints between the lands (or the lower pads described above instead of the lands) formed on the inner walls 1510tba of the end face through holes 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t, and the pads 1510v formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, thereby improving the anti-warping effect of the peripheral control board 1510. Furthermore, one way to further improve the anti-warping effect of the peripheral control board 1510 is to increase the thickness of the conversion board 1510t, for example.

In addition, the soldering portion on the conversion board 1510t side (the soldering portion between the lead terminal 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s and the pad 1510ta formed on the conversion board 1510t) and the soldering portion on the peripheral control board 1510 side (the soldering portion between the land (or the above-mentioned lower pad instead of the land) formed on the inner wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t and the pad 1510v formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510) are configured so that they can be surface-mounted with the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t and the back surface 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 in surface contact, as described above. This allows the conversion board 1510t and peripheral control board 1510 to be electrically connected without any gaps, allowing for a greater distance to be maintained between them and the cover plate 1501a (board case) of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control board box 1505, making it a connection method that is resistant to noise.

In addition, the lands (or the lower pads described above instead of the lands) formed on the inner wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and on the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t are soldered to the pads 1510v formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, thereby providing an electrical connection via this solder. This allows the conversion board 1510t and the peripheral control board 1510 to be electrically connected without any gaps, and allows the distance between them to be increased to the cover plate 1501a (board case) of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control board box 1505, resulting in a connection method that is resistant to noise.

In addition, the through-holes of the conversion board 1510t, except for the end face through-hole 1510tb, are filled with insulating resin, and one end and the other end of the insulating resin sealing the through-holes are processed so that they are flush with the front (mounting surface) 1510tx and back (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t, respectively. Together with the through-hole lands, one end and the other end of the insulating resin sealing the through-holes are completely covered (resin-filled) with a green coating, allowing the back (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t and the back surface 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 to be surface-mounted in face-to-face contact, thereby preventing short circuits between the conversion board 1510t and the peripheral control board 1510, which are connected without any gaps.

In addition, although the control ROM 1510b is attached to and detached from the ROM socket 1510s, there is a risk that human hands may accidentally damage the control ROM 1510b or the wiring pattern during this process. For this reason, if the ROM socket 1510s is mounted on the conversion board 1510t and the control ROM 1510b or the wiring pattern formed on the conversion board 1510t is damaged, the conversion board 1510t can be removed from the peripheral control board 1510 and replaced with a new one, allowing the peripheral control board 1510 to be used as is (the same one).

Furthermore, only the ROM socket 1510s is mounted on the conversion board 1510t. This means that if the ROM socket 1510s or the conversion board 1510t is damaged and needs to be replaced, only the smallest units, the ROM socket 1510s and the conversion board 1510t, are required.

Furthermore, the pads 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, which are soldered to the lands (or the lower pads described above instead of the lands) formed on the inner walls 1510tba of the end-face through-holes 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t, are located near the peripheral control IC 1510a described above. The peripheral control IC 1510a is an IC with a large package and is a surface-mount type electronic component. Such surface-mount type electronic components are particularly vulnerable to board flexing (the connection terminals and lead terminals of the electronic component may peel off from the surface of the board). Therefore, by mounting the conversion board 1510t near the peripheral control IC 1510a, the peripheral control board 1510 can be reinforced against flexing.

In addition, even if there is a need to change from a control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package to a control ROM 1510b having a leadless package, this can be accommodated by mounting a conversion board 1510t having a ROM socket 1510s to which the control ROM 1510b having a leadless package can be attached on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510.Therefore, even if the package of the control ROM 1510b is changed, there is no need to modify the shape and arrangement of the pads 1510v on the peripheral control board 1510 or the routing of the wiring pattern to the pads 1510v (the shape and arrangement of the pads 1510v and the routing of the wiring to the pads 1510v will be the same), and the two can be used in common.

Furthermore, when the control ROM 1510b is removed from the ROM socket 1510s using a special tool during sampling inspection (sample) to check for defects in the manufacturing process when the peripheral control board 1510 is reused, even if the control ROM 1510b gets caught in the ROM socket 1510s and an external force is applied to the ROM socket 1510s, the peel strength at which the pad 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t peels off from the base material of the conversion board 1510t is as low as the peel strength at which the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 peels off from the base material of the conversion board 1510t, as described above. Because the peel strength is smaller than that of the control board 1510, the pad 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t soldered to the lead terminal 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s will peel off from the base material of the conversion board 1510t, preventing the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 soldered to the inner wall 1510tba of the end face through hole 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t from peeling off from the base material of the peripheral control board 1510, thereby preventing damage to the peripheral control board 1510. This means that the conversion board 1510t on which the damaged ROM socket 1510s is mounted can be removed from the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and a conversion board 1510t on which a new ROM socket 1510s is mounted can be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, allowing the peripheral control board 1510 itself to be used without having to be replaced with a new peripheral control board 1510.

In addition, because the conversion board 1510t is surface-mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and is fixed in place without any gaps, it is difficult to improperly place electronic components in the gap between the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty of the conversion board 1510t and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510.

Furthermore, when changing from a control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package to a control ROM 1510b having a leadless package, as described above, it is necessary to use a conversion board 1510t. However, as described above, the thickness of the conversion board 1510t is thinner (0.8 mm or 1.0 mm) than the thickness of the peripheral control board 1510 (1.6 mm). Therefore, when the peripheral control board 1510 is housed and sealed in the peripheral control board box 1505 (sealing board box), the specified height distance dimension from the top surface of the control ROM 1510b mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control board box 1505 is at most about the thickness of the conversion board 1510t, and high noise resistance can be maintained against noise entering through the cover body 1501.

Furthermore, as described above, when the peripheral control board 1510 is reused, the control ROM 1510b is removed from the ROM socket 1510s using a special tool when performing sampling inspections (samples) to check for defects during the manufacturing process. In other words, when the peripheral control board 1510 is reused, the conversion board 1510t on which the control ROM 1510b is mounted is removed from the ROM socket 1510s using a special tool when performing sampling inspections (samples) to check for defects during the manufacturing process. When changing from a control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package to a control ROM 1510b having a leadless package, as described above, it is necessary to use a conversion board 1510t. However, because the lead terminals do not protrude outward from the conversion board 1510t, even if a person using a special tool to remove the conversion board 1510t on which the control ROM 1510b is mounted from the ROM socket 1510s accidentally drops the conversion board 1510t on which the control ROM 1510b is mounted, the lead terminals will not bend as with the control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package, and the conversion board 1510t will not become unusable.

Furthermore, as described above, semicircular end face through holes 1510tb are formed on both longitudinal side surfaces of the conversion board 1510t, and the diameter of the end face through holes 1510tb is formed so that it is approximately the same as the width (0.5 mm) of the shape (e.g., a rectangular shape of 2.5 mm x 0.5 mm) of the pad 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t. Alternatively, the diameter of the end face through holes 1510tb may be larger (e.g., 0.6 mm to 0.7 mm) than the width (0.5 mm) of the shape (e.g., a rectangular shape of 2.5 mm x 0.5 mm) of the pad 1510ta formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t. In this case, the end face through holes 1510tb have an arc shape that is shorter than a semicircle.

In addition, pad 1510v is formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 so as to be positioned at positions corresponding to multiple lead terminals that protrude outward from both longitudinal sides of a lead-type ROM socket to which a control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package is attached and detached.A mechanism is adopted in which package changes can be accommodated by changing the object soldered to this pad 1510v, but other mechanisms may also be adopted. For example, as shown in FIG. 176(a), lead terminals 1510sc (70 in total) of a lead-type ROM socket 1510s' to which a control ROM 1510b having a lead-type package is attached and detached are soldered to pads 1510v (i.e., the conventional ROM socket 1510s' is reused as is), and a conversion board 1510t' to which a control ROM 1510b having a leadless package is soldered is placed on the mounting portion 1510sa' of the ROM socket 1510s', and the pair of rotating holding pieces 1510sb', 1510sb' is closed. Note that the mounting portion 1510sa', the pair of rotary holding pieces 1510sb', 1510sb', and the multiple lead terminals 1510sc' have the same functions as the mounting portion 1510sa, the pair of rotary holding pieces 1510sb, 1510sb, and the multiple lead terminals 1510sc of the ROM socket 1510s shown in Figure 173 (a), so their description will be omitted here.

In addition, a green resist layer is formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx' and back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty' of the conversion board 1510t' by applying a green resist liquid to the layer (copper plane) on which the pads, wiring pattern, and lands to which the control ROM 1510b having a leadless package is soldered, forming a green coating. The conversion board 1510t' is formed with multiple through holes (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "through holes") having lands that electrically connect to the wiring patterns formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx and back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty, and the inner walls of the through holes are copper-plated to make them conductive. The through-holes are filled with insulating resin, and one end and the other end of the insulating resin that seals the through-holes are processed so that they are flush with the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx' and the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty', respectively. Together with the lands, one end and the other end of the insulating resin that seals the through-holes are completely covered with a green coating (resin-filled).

In addition, downward protrusions are formed on both longitudinal ends of the back surface (non-mounting surface) 1510ty' of the conversion board 1510t', and pads are formed on these protrusions. These pads are arranged in positions corresponding to the lead terminals 1510sc' of the ROM socket 1510s', with a total of 70 pads formed, 35 on one end and 35 on the other end.

When the conversion board 1510t', to which the control ROM 1510b having a leadless package is soldered, is placed on the mounting portion 1510sa' of the ROM socket 1510s' and the pair of rotational holding pieces 1510sb', 1510sb' is closed, as shown in Figure 176 (b), the surface (mounting surface) 1510tx' of the conversion board 1510t' is positioned so that the point (center) where a line connecting the centers of the top and bottom sides of the conversion board 1510t' intersects with a line connecting the centers of the left and right sides of the conversion board 1510t' coincides (or may almost coincide) with the point (center) where a line connecting the centers of the top and bottom sides of the conversion board 1510t' intersects with a line connecting the centers of the left and right sides of the conversion board 1510s.

When changing from a control ROM 1510b with a leaded package to a control ROM 1510b with a leadless package, it is necessary to modify the board management number of the peripheral control board 1510. Here, modifying the board management number of the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly explained with reference to Figure 177. Figures 177(a) to (c) are schematic diagrams showing the board management number of the peripheral control board. Note that if the components mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 are changed, it will be necessary to modify the board management number of the peripheral control board 1510.

As shown in FIG. 177(a), a foil cutout area KBRGN (i.e., an area formed by cutting out the copper foil from the copper foil surface on which the wiring pattern is formed, excluding the terminals and wiring patterns) is formed in a predetermined position on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, one of the four corners of the peripheral control board 1510). Within this foil cutout area KBRGN, foil cutout letters KBNUM are formed left-justified in the wiring pattern, with the common part of the control number ("XYZA" in the figure) used as the board control number. The foil cutout area KBRGN and foil cutout letters KBNUM are each covered with a green resist liquid that is applied solid to the surface (mounting surface) 1510 of the peripheral control board 1510.

When changing from a control ROM 1510b with a leaded package to a control ROM 1510b with a leadless package, for example, as shown in FIG. 177(b), a laser marker is used to print the symbol HKBNUM (the letter A in the figure) following the foil-punched letters KBNUM arranged left-justified within the foil-punched area KBRGN (the symbol is dug to a predetermined depth from the surface along the symbol HKBNUM). Each time a conversion board 1510t is replaced (including repaired), the laser marker can be used to print the symbol HKBNUM following the foil-punched letters KBNUM, creating a board control number ("XYZAA" in the figure). The board control number can also be changed by erasing part of the foil-punched letters with a laser marker, or by both erasing part of the foil-punched letters and adding letters.

Furthermore, for example, as shown in Figure 177 (c), the common part of the management number ("XYZ-" in the figure) is used as the board management number to form the foil cut letters KBNUM in the wiring pattern, and foil cut areas RGN1, RGN2, and RGN3 are formed in a nearby area separate from the foil cut area KBRGN (directly below the foil cut area KBRGN in the figure), and foil cut letters are formed in the wiring pattern as symbols (the letters A, B, and C in the figure) within the foil cut areas RGN1, RGN2, and RGN3, and the foil cut area KBRGN and areas RGN1, RGN2, and RGN3 are each covered with a green resist liquid that is applied solid to the surface (mounting surface) 1510 of the peripheral control board 1510. Perforated holes have been drilled by a router around the periphery of regions RGN1, RGN2, and RGN3, allowing regions RGN1, RGN2, and RGN3 to be removed from peripheral control board 1510. When regions RGN1, RGN2, and RGN3 are not removed from peripheral control board 1510, the board management number of peripheral control board 1510 is "XYZA-ABC." When changing from control ROM 1510b with a leaded package to control ROM 1510b with a leadless package, the board management number can be determined by removing one, two, or all of regions RGN1, RGN2, and RGN3 from peripheral control board 1510.

The peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a power supply circuit (not shown) that generates various power supply voltages. This power supply circuit is a rectangular board on which various electronic components are mounted, and the back side of this board is directly soldered in surface contact with the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. The surface (mounting surface) of this board is covered by a metal cover that is crimped to clamp the edge of the board. Once mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, the power supply circuit board is not a removable electronic component, and if the power supply circuit is damaged, the power supply circuit board is not replaced and a new board is not soldered directly in surface contact with the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, but rather the peripheral control board 1510 itself is replaced.

Gaming machines equipped with a performance control board on which electronic components such as ROM are mounted have been known for some time (for example, JP 2017-217381 A (paragraph [0061], Figure 5)). However, there is room for improvement in the method for mounting electronic components on the control board in conventional gaming machines.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment described above is equipped with the peripheral control unit 1500 of FIG. 170, which is an effect control means responsible for controlling effects related to the game. The peripheral control unit 1500 is equipped with the peripheral control board 1510 of FIG. 173, which is a control board; the ROM socket 1510s of FIG. 173, which is a ROM socket into which the control ROM 1510b of FIG. 173, which is a ROM storing effect data, is attached; and the conversion board 1510t of FIG. 173, which is a specific board on which the ROM socket 1510s is mounted. The front surface (mounting surface) 1510x, which is the surface portion of the peripheral control board 1510, is formed with a position 1510v2 for placing the control ROM 1510b of FIG. 173, which is a specific board mounting area on which the conversion board 1510t is mounted so as to overlap. Only the ROM socket 1510s is soldered and mounted on the conversion board 1510t.

In this way, by adopting a new configuration in which the ROM socket 1510s is not mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 but is mounted on the conversion board 1510t, damage to the peripheral control board 1510 caused by external forces applied to the ROM socket 1510s can be reduced. Therefore, a new configuration is provided for the method of mounting the control ROM 1510b, an electronic component, on the peripheral control board 1510, making it more convenient.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment described above, it is equipped with the peripheral control unit 1500 of Figure 170, which is an effect control means that controls the effects related to the game. The peripheral control unit 1500 is equipped with the peripheral control board 1510 of Figure 173, which is a control board; the ROM socket 1510s of Figure 173, which is a ROM socket into which the control ROM 1510b of Figure 173, which is a ROM that stores effect data, is attached; and the conversion board 1510t of Figure 173, which is a specific board on which the ROM socket 1510s is mounted. The surface (mounting surface) 1510x, which is the surface portion of the peripheral control board 1510, is formed with a position 1510v2 for placing the control ROM 1510b of Figure 173, which is a specific board mounting area on which the conversion board 1510t is mounted so as to overlap. The conversion board 1510t has pads 1510ta formed on a surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t shown in FIG. 173, which is a first board surface portion that can be soldered, and inner walls 1510tba of side through holes 1510tb formed on both side surfaces of the conversion board 1510t shown in FIG. 173, which is a second board surface portion. The ROM socket 1510s and the conversion board 1510t have lead terminals 1510sc that are lead terminal portions of the ROM socket 1510t and inner walls 1510tba of the first through holes 1510tb of the conversion board 1510t. The pad 1510ta, which is the surface portion of the peripheral control board 1510, is connected by soldering (electrically connected by soldering), and the pad 1510v formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 in FIG. 173, which is the surface portion of the peripheral control board 1510, is connected by soldering to the inner wall 1510tba of the side through hole 1510tb, which is the second surface portion of the conversion board 1510t (electrically connected by soldering).

In this way, by adopting a new configuration in which the ROM socket 1510s is not mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 but is mounted on the conversion board 1510t, damage to the peripheral control board 1510 caused by external forces applied to the ROM socket 1510s can be reduced. Therefore, a new configuration is provided for the method of mounting the control ROM 1510b, an electronic component, on the peripheral control board 1510, making it more convenient.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment described above, it is equipped with a peripheral control unit 1500 (Fig. 170) which is an effect control means for controlling effects related to the game. The peripheral control unit 1500 is equipped with a peripheral control board 1510 (Fig. 173) which is a control board, a ROM socket 1510s (Fig. 173) which is a ROM socket into which a control ROM 1510b (Fig. 173) which is a ROM storing effect data is attached, and a conversion board 1510t (Fig. 173) which is a specific board on which the ROM socket 1510s is mounted. The conversion board 1510t is provided with pads 1510ta formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510tx of the conversion board 1510t in FIG. 174, which serve as first terminals for electrically connecting the ROM socket 1510s to the mounting surface on which the ROM socket 1510s is mounted, and inner walls 1510tba of side through holes 1510tb formed on both sides of the conversion board 1510t, which serve as second terminals for electrically connecting the peripheral control board 1510 to the back surface of the mounting surface on which the ROM socket 1510s is mounted. The first and second terminals are of different configurations, and the second terminals are electrically connected via solder to the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x, which is the plate surface of the peripheral control board 1510.

In this way, by adopting a new configuration in which the ROM socket 1510s is not mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 but is mounted on the conversion board 1510t, damage to the peripheral control board 1510 caused by external forces applied to the ROM socket 1510s can be reduced. Therefore, a new configuration is provided for the method of mounting the control ROM 1510b, an electronic component, on the peripheral control board 1510, making it more convenient.

8. Power Supply System
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to Fig. 178. Fig. 178 is a block diagram showing the power supply system of a pachinko gaming machine. First, the power supply board will be described, followed by the backup power supply and the power supplied to each control board, etc. Note that the board grounds (GND) of the various boards and the board grounds (GND) of the various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630 and are the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power supply board]
The power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c attached to the board unit 620 shown in Figures 94 and 95 is electrically connected to a power cord, and the plug of this power cord is inserted into a power outlet in the island equipment of the amusement hall. The island equipment of an amusement hall typically employs a system in which AC power (24V AC) is supplied to each group of, for example, four pachinko machines 1 via one transformer. For example, in the island equipment of an amusement hall where 20 pachinko machines 1 are installed in a row, the four pachinko machines 1 are managed as five groups, and one transformer is provided for each group (a total of five transformers) to supply AC power (24V AC). Therefore, a transformer with a maximum allowable capacity of 1000VA is provided.

When the power switch 630a is turned ON, AC power (24V AC) supplied from the island equipment of the amusement hall is supplied to the power supply board 630, allowing the pachinko machine 1 to be powered on. When the power switch 630a is turned OFF, AC power (24V AC) supplied from the island equipment of the amusement hall is no longer supplied to the power supply board 630, allowing the pachinko machine 1 to be powered off. The power switch 630a is normally kept in the ON position, and when an amusement hall staff member or other attendant opens the amusement hall, they turn ON (turn on) the breakers installed in the amusement hall, thereby simultaneously powering on the multiple pachinko machines 1 installed in the island equipment of the amusement hall. Then, after the amusement hall staff member or other attendant closes the amusement hall, they turn OFF (turn off) the breakers installed in the amusement hall, thereby simultaneously powering off the multiple pachinko machines 1 installed in the island equipment of the amusement hall. For this reason, examples of cases in which the power may be turned on or off individually for pachinko machines 1 among multiple pachinko machines 1 arranged in a row on an island facility in an amusement hall include when an amusement hall staff member or other attendant turns the power switch 630a OFF when performing maintenance and turns the power switch 630a ON again when the maintenance is complete, or when an amusement hall staff member or other attendant turns the power switch 630a OFF to resolve a pachinko machine 1 that has developed some kind of problem and turns the power switch 630a ON again once the problem has been resolved.

As shown in Figure 178, in addition to the power switch 630a, the power supply board 630 is equipped with fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, a noise suppression circuit 630b, a rectifier circuit 630c, a power supply breakdown circuit 630g, a power factor correction circuit 630d, a smoothing circuit 630e, a power supply creation circuit 630f, and a backup power supply circuit 630h. Regardless of whether the power switch 630a is turned on or off, the AC power (24V AC (hereinafter referred to as "AC24V")) supplied from the island equipment of the amusement hall is supplied to the interface board 635 via the power supply board 630, and from this interface board 635 to the ball dispensing machine (e.g., CR unit) installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1.

When power switch 630a is turned ON, 24V AC supplied from the game hall's island equipment is supplied to noise suppression circuit 630b via fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 and power switch 630a, where noise is removed. The noise-removed 24V AC is then supplied to rectifier circuit 630c, where it is rectified (converted from AC to DC (AC-DC conversion)) to produce DC power. This rectified DC power is then supplied to power factor correction circuit 630d via power supply breakdown circuit 630g, where power factor correction circuit 630d creates DC +35V (hereinafter referred to as "+35V") with a corrected power factor. This created +35V is then supplied to smoothing circuit 630e, where the +35V ripple is removed and smoothed. This smoothed +35V is supplied to the power supply circuit 630f.

When the voltage supplied to the power supply disruption circuit 630g exceeds a predetermined voltage, it passes a large current exceeding the allowable current limit (each with a predetermined cut-off current) through fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, causing them to blow and electrically cut off the 24V AC supplied from the island equipment in the amusement hall. When a large current (abnormal current) exceeding the allowable current limit (cut-off current) flows through fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, the element portions of fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 blow, cutting off the 24V AC supplied to subsequent equipment via fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2.

The power supply generating circuit 630f, which receives the smoothed +35V, includes a +5V power supply generating circuit 630fa, a +12V power supply generating circuit 630fb, and a +24V power supply generating circuit 630fc. The +5V power supply generating circuit 630fa generates DC +5V (hereinafter referred to as "+5V") from the +35V supplied by the smoothing circuit 630e. The +12V power supply generating circuit 630fb generates DC +12V (hereinafter referred to as "+12V") from the +35V supplied by the smoothing circuit 630e. The +24V power supply generating circuit 630fc generates DC +24V (hereinafter referred to as "+24V") from the +35V supplied by the smoothing circuit 630e. +5V, +12V, and +24V are supplied to the dispensing control board 633 and the interface board 635, respectively. The power supply line (power supply system) created by the power supply board 630 to which +5V is applied and supplied is the +5V power supply line, the power supply line (power supply system) created by the power supply board 630 to which +12V is applied and supplied is the +12V power supply line, and the power supply line (power supply system) created by the power supply board 630 to which +24V is applied and supplied is the +24V power supply line.

[8-2. Backup power supply]
The backup power supply circuit 630h includes capacitors BC0 and BC1. Capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to the RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") built into the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and capacitor BC1 supplies backup power to the RAM (hereinafter referred to as "dispense control built-in RAM") built into the dispensing control MPU 633aa of the dispensing control unit 633a on the dispensing control board 633.

The +5V generated by the +5V power supply generating circuit 630fa of the power supply generating circuit 630f is supplied to the dispensing control board 633. The +5V supplied to the dispensing control board 633 becomes the +5V power supply line on the dispensing control board 633 via the dispensing control filter circuit 633h, is applied to the power terminal of the dispensing control MPU 633aa, and is also applied to the power terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM via diode PD0. The +12V generated by the +12V power supply generating circuit 630fb of the power supply generating circuit 630f is supplied to the +5V generating circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633. This +5V generating circuit 1310g generates +5V from the +12V from the dispensing control board 633 as a local power supply that serves as the control power supply for the main control MPU 1310a. The +5V generated by the +5V generating circuit 1310g (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "main control board generated +5V") becomes the main control board generated +5V power line on the main control board 1310 via the main control filter circuit 1310h, and is supplied to the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and also to the power terminal of the main control built-in RAM via diode MD0. Note that the +5V generated by the +5V power supply generating circuit 630fa of the power supply generating circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 and the +5V generated by the +5V generating circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310 (main control board generated +5V) are not electrically connected and are independent of each other.

The negative terminal of capacitor BC1 on power supply board 630 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of power supply board 630, while the positive terminal of capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM on dispensing control board 633 and to the cathode terminal of diode PD0 on dispensing control board 633. In other words, the +5V generated by the +5V power supply generating circuit 630fa of the power supply generating circuit 630f on power supply board 630 flows as a current toward the power terminal of the dispensing control MPU 633aa, and also flows in the forward direction via diode PD0 toward the power terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM and the positive terminal of capacitor BC1.

In this way, capacitor BC1 is electrically connected so that the +5V generated by the +5V power supply circuit 630fa of the power supply circuit 630f in the power supply board 630 is supplied to the dispensing control board 633, and then returned from the dispensing control board 633 to the power supply board 630, allowing it to be charged. As a result, when the +5V generated by the +5V power supply circuit 630fa of the power supply circuit 630f is no longer supplied to the dispensing control board 633, the charge stored in capacitor BC1 is supplied to the dispensing control board 633 as dispensing VBB. Therefore, although current is prevented from flowing to the power terminal of the dispensing control MPU 633aa by diode PD0, preventing the dispensing control MPU 633aa from operating, dispensing VBB is supplied to the power terminal of the dispensing control built-in RAM, thereby maintaining the contents stored in the dispensing control built-in RAM.

The negative terminal of capacitor BC0 on the power supply board 630 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630, while the positive terminal of capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM on the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633, and is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of diode MD0 on the main control board 1310. In other words, the +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g (+5V generated on the main control board side) flows as a current toward the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and also flows in the forward direction via diode MD0 toward the power terminal of the main control built-in RAM and the positive terminal of capacitor BC0.

In this way, capacitor BC0 can be charged by receiving +5V generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g (+5V generated on the main control board side) via an electrical connection method in which the +5V generated by the main control board side is supplied to the main control board 1310, and then from the dispensing control board 633 to the power supply board 630. As a result, if the +12V generated by the +12V power supply generating circuit 630fb of the power supply generating circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 is no longer supplied to the +5V generating circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633 and the +5V generating circuit 1310g is no longer able to generate +5V (+5V generated by the main control board), the charge stored in capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633 as the main VBB. Therefore, since the diode MD0 prevents current from flowing to the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the main VBB is supplied to the power terminal of the main control internal RAM, thereby maintaining the contents of the main control internal RAM.

[8-3. Power supply to each control board, etc.]
Next, we will provide an overview of the power supply supplied to each control board, etc., and then explain the power supply supplied mainly to the dispensing control board and the power supply supplied to the main control board.

The three types of power supplies, +5V, +12V, and +24V, created respectively by the +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa, +12V power supply creation circuit 630fb, and +24V power supply creation circuit 630fc of the power supply creation circuit 630f on the power supply board 630, are supplied to the dispensing control board 633 as shown in FIG. 178, and of these three types of power supplies, two types of power supplies, +12V and +24V, are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the dispensing control board 633. In addition, the three types of power supplies, +5V, +12V, and +24V, generated respectively by the +5V power supply generating circuit 630fa, +12V power supply generating circuit 630fb, and +24V power supply generating circuit 630fc of the power supply generating circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 are supplied to the interface board 635, and via this interface board 635, are supplied to the peripheral control board 1510, door frame main relay board 104, door frame clothing relay board 105, etc.

In addition, the three types of power supplies, +5V, +12V, and +24V, supplied to the interface board 635, door frame main relay board 104, door frame clothing relay board 105, etc., may be provided with +5V fuses (not shown), +12V fuses (not shown), and +24V fuses (not shown) on the interface board 635, door frame main relay board 104, door frame clothing relay board 105, etc., respectively, which can be blown by an overcurrent flowing through each of these power supply lines.

In particular, as described below, the +12V power line and +24V power line are monitored for a drop in potential by the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e on the main control board 1310. When the potential of the +12V power line or the potential of the +12V power line drops and a power outage warning signal is output to the main control MPU 1310a on the main control board 1310 or the payout control MPU 633aa on the payout control board 633, the main control MPU 1310a performs the main control side power outage processing in the main control side power on processing described below to stop the progress of the game, and the payout control MPU 633aa performs the payout control unit power outage processing in the payout control unit power on processing described below to stop the progress of the payout (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls).

Therefore, if a +12V fuse (not shown) and a +24V fuse (not shown) are provided on the interface board 635, door frame main relay board 104, door frame clothing relay board 105, etc., respectively, when the main control board 1310 and dispensing control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, if an electrical problem occurs for some reason in the +12V power line or +24V power line of the interface board 635, door frame main relay board 104, door frame clothing relay board 105, etc., causing a leakage current or a short circuit in the interface board 635, door frame main relay board 104, door frame clothing relay board 105, etc., and causing an overcurrent to flow in the interface board 635, door frame main relay board 104, door frame clothing relay board 105, etc., the +12V fuse and +24V fuse provided on the interface board 635, door frame main relay board 104, door frame clothing relay board 105, etc. will blow. This suppresses a drop in the potential of the +12V power line and the +24V power line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and prevents the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 from outputting a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control MPU 633aa. This allows the main control MPU 1310a to continue playing without performing the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing described below, and the payout control MPU 633aa to continue paying out game balls (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power off processing in the payout control unit power on processing described below.

The three types of power supplies supplied to the peripheral control board 1510, +5V, +12V, and +24V, are supplied to subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510 via +5V fuses, +12V fuses, and +24V fuses (not shown), respectively.

The +5V fuse (not shown) has a preset capacity that takes into account the current used by the peripheral control board 1510 itself and the current used by subsequent boards via the peripheral control board 1510 in the +5V power line of the peripheral control board 1510, and is capable of passing current up to the +5V power line peripheral control board allowable current limit (shutoff current). If an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the +5V power line peripheral control board allowable current limit flows, the +5V fuse element (not shown) will blow, cutting off the +5V power line to subsequent boards supplied via the +5V fuse (not shown).

The +12V fuse (not shown) has a preset capacity that takes into account the current used by the peripheral control board 1510 itself in the +12V power line of the peripheral control board 1510, the current used by subsequent boards such as the various decorative boards for the game board 5 via the peripheral control board 1510, and the current used by subsequent devices via the peripheral control board 1510, and is capable of passing current up to the +12V power line peripheral control board allowable current limit (shutoff current). If an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the +12V power line peripheral control board allowable current limit flows, the +12V fuse element (not shown) will melt and shut off the +12V power line to the subsequent line supplied via the +12V fuse (not shown).

The capacity of the +24V fuse (not shown) is preset to take into account the current used by subsequent boards via the peripheral control board 1510 on the +24V power line of the peripheral control board 1510, and is capable of passing current up to the +24V power line peripheral control board allowable current limit (shutoff current). Note that if the peripheral control board 1510 uses +24V to provide a +24V driver circuit for an electrical drive source (e.g., a drive solenoid), the capacity of the +24V fuse (not shown) is preset to take into account the current used by the peripheral control board 1510 itself on the +24V power line and the current used by subsequent boards via the peripheral control board 1510. If an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the +24V power line peripheral control board allowable current limit flows, the element of the +24V fuse (not shown) will blow, cutting off the +24V power line to subsequent boards supplied via the +24V fuse (not shown).

The +5V fuse, +12V fuse, and +24V fuse (not shown) are the source fuses that supply the +5V, +12V, and +24V power lines from the peripheral control board 1510 to subsequent boards. Because they may generate a large current and generate heat, they are preferably placed away from the electronic components (e.g., microprocessor, VDP, etc.) of the peripheral control unit 1511 and the performance display control unit 1512 to prevent malfunctions caused by thermal shutdown built into the IC due to the heat generated. They are preferably placed near the connectors that supply +5V, +12V, and +24V from the interface board 635 (particularly near the connectors of the terminals to which the power lines that supply +5V, +12V, and +24V from the interface board 635 are connected).

The peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with a control power supply generation circuit (not shown) that generates DC 3.3V (hereinafter referred to as "+3.3V") as a local power supply that serves as the control power supply for the peripheral control unit 1511 and the performance display control unit 1512 from the +12V supplied via a +12V fuse (not shown). The +3.3V generated by the control power supply generation circuit (not shown) is supplied to the electronic components of the peripheral control unit 1511 and the performance display control unit 1512 via a control power supply fuse (not shown). The +3.3V generated by the control power supply generation circuit (not shown) becomes the +3.3V power supply line on the peripheral control board 1510 via a control power supply fuse (not shown). Even if an abnormal current flows through the control power supply creation circuit (not shown) and blows the +5V power line (supplied via a +5V fuse (not shown) and/or the +24V power line (supplied via a +24V fuse (not shown)), excluding the +12V power line supplied via a +12V fuse (not shown), the control power supply creation circuit (not shown) can create a local power supply of +3.3V from the +12V from the +12V power line to serve as the control power for peripheral control unit 1511 and performance display control unit 1512. Therefore, peripheral control unit 1511 and performance display control unit 1512 will not stop but will continue to operate, and although it will be difficult to drive the +24V electrical drive source (drive solenoid) if the +24V fuse (not shown) is blown, the performance can continue to proceed.

In addition to +3.3V, the control power supply generation circuit (not shown) may generate multiple control power supplies (e.g., DC 1.5V (hereinafter referred to as "+1.5V"), DC 1.25V (hereinafter referred to as "+1.25V"), etc.) corresponding to each device, such as the control ROM, of the peripheral control board 1510 as local power supplies. In this case, control power supply fuses (not shown) are provided corresponding to each of the multiple control power supplies (e.g., a +3.3V fuse for +3.3V, a +1.5V fuse for +1.5V, and a +1.5V fuse for +1.25V, with the +3.3V power line via the +3.3V fuse, the +1.5V power line via the +1.5V fuse, and the +1.25V power line via the +1.25V fuse).

The control power supply fuse (not shown) has a preset capacity that takes into account the current used by the peripheral control board 1510 itself and the current used by subsequent boards via the peripheral control board 1510 on the +3.3V power line, and is capable of passing current up to the maximum allowable current (shutoff current) for the +3.3V power line peripheral control board. If an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the maximum allowable current for the +3.3V power line peripheral control board flows, the element of the control power supply fuse (not shown) will melt and cut off the +3.3V power line to subsequent boards that is supplied via the control power supply fuse (not shown). In addition, when control power supply fuses (not shown) are provided corresponding to multiple control power supplies (for example, a +3.3V fuse for +3.3V, a +1.5V fuse for +1.5V, and a +1.25V fuse for +1.25V), the capacity is preset taking into account the current used by peripheral control board 1510 itself and the current used by subsequent boards via peripheral control board 1510, allowing current to flow up to the maximum allowable current (shutoff current) for the power lines of each of the multiple control power supplies. If an overcurrent (abnormal current) exceeding the maximum allowable current for each of the multiple control power supplies flows, the element portion of the control power supply fuse (not shown) provided corresponding to each of the multiple control power supplies will blow, shutting off the power line of the subsequent control power supplied via the blown control power supply fuse (not shown).

The control power supply fuse (not shown) is the main fuse for the +3.3V power line that serves as the control power supply for the peripheral control unit 1511, the performance display control unit 1512, etc., and as it flows with a large current and may generate heat, it is preferable to place it away from certain electronic components to prevent this heat from causing a malfunction due to thermal shutdown built into certain electronic components in the peripheral control unit 1511 or the performance display control unit 1512, and it is preferable to place it near the control power supply creation circuit (especially near the terminal that creates +3.3V and supplies it as the +3.3 power line).

In this embodiment, the +5V fuse, +12V fuse, +24V fuse, and control power supply fuse (not shown) on the peripheral control board 1510 are surface-mounted (so-called SMD) chip fuses that melt when a current exceeds a predetermined allowable current limit (each with a predetermined cut-off current). Unlike resettable fuses, once they melt, they are electronic components that cannot supply power to subsequent devices, even if the current drops.

In addition, instead of SMD-type chip fuses, lead-type (insertion mounting type (through-hole mounting type)) fuses may be used for the +5V fuse, +12V fuse, +24V fuse, and control power supply fuse (not shown) on the peripheral control board 1510. Furthermore, resettable fuses such as SMD-type or lead-type thermistors may be used for the +5V fuse, +12V fuse, +24V fuse, and control power supply fuse (not shown) on the peripheral control board 1510. In this way, when resettable fuses are used, if a current exceeding a predetermined allowable current limit flows, the power line cannot be supplied to subsequent circuits, but once the current drops, the power line can be supplied to subsequent circuits again.

Of the three power supplies, +5V, +12V, and +24V, supplied to subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510, +5V is supplied to an input buffer circuit, etc., not shown, via a +5V fuse, not shown; +24V is supplied to a +24V driver circuit, not shown, that drives and controls the +24V electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5, via a +24V fuse, not shown; and +12V is supplied to a +12V driver circuit, not shown, that drives and controls the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5, via a +12V fuse, not shown, and is also supplied to each of the multiple decorative boards provided on the game board 5 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "each decorative board of the game board 5").

The +5V fuse (not shown) has a preset capacity that takes into account the current used by the subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510 in the +5V power line, and is capable of passing current up to the upper limit of the allowable current (shutoff current) for the subsequent board on the +5V power line. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current for the subsequent board on the +5V power line flows, the element of the +5V fuse (not shown) melts, cutting off the +5V power line to the subsequent board that is supplied via the +5V fuse (not shown).

The capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown) is preset based on the current used by the peripheral control board 1510's subsequent boards (excluding the decorative boards on the game board 5) and the current used by each decorative board on the game board 5 in the +12V power line of the subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510, and is capable of passing current up to the allowable current limit (shutoff current) of the subsequent board on the +12V power line. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the allowable current limit of the +12V power line of the subsequent board flows, the element of the +12V fuse (not shown) melts, cutting off the +12V power line to the subsequent boards supplied via the +12V fuse (not shown).

The +24V fuse (not shown) has a preset capacity that takes into account the current used by the subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510 in the +24V power line, and is capable of passing current up to the upper limit of the allowable current (shutoff current) for the subsequent board on the +24V power line. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current for the subsequent board on the +24V power line flows through the +24V fuse (not shown), the element of the +24V fuse (not shown) melts, cutting off the +24V power line to the subsequent board that is supplied via the +24V fuse (not shown).

The +5V fuse, +12V fuse, and +24V fuse (not shown) are fuses that supply the +5V, +12V, and +24V power lines, and although they pass a smaller current than the original +5V, +12V, and +24V fuses on the peripheral control board 1510, they may generate a larger current and generate heat. Therefore, to prevent a malfunction due to shutdown caused by the thermal shutdown function built into the +12V driver circuit (not shown) due to the heat generated, it is preferable to place them away from electronic components such as the +12V driver circuit (not shown), and it is preferable to place them near the connectors that supply +5V, +12V, and +24V from the peripheral control board 1510 (particularly near the connectors of the terminals to which the power lines that supply +5V, +12V, and +24V from the peripheral control board 1510 are connected).

The input buffer circuit (not shown) receives a control signal (which may be a serial signal or a parallel signal) transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510, removes noise from the received control signal, and outputs the signal to a +24V driver circuit (not shown) and a +12V driver circuit (not shown). Specifically, the input buffer circuit (not shown) is configured as a circuit in which one end of a resistor to which +5V supplied via a +5V fuse (not shown) is applied and one end of a resistor grounded to ground (GND) are electrically connected to multiple wiring (harnesses) electrically connecting the peripheral control board 1510 and the boards subsequent to the peripheral control board 1510. By removing noise that has entered the multiple wiring (harnesses), noise resistance can be improved.

The +24V driver circuit (not shown) is primarily composed of a driver IC that drives the +24V electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5, and a fuse (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "the fuse provided in the +24V driver circuit (not shown)") that cuts off overcurrent to this driver IC. The +24V supplied via the +24V fuse (not shown) is then supplied to the driver IC via the fuse.

The fuse provided in the +24V driver circuit (not shown) has a preset capacity that takes into account the current used by the +24V electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 and the +24V driver circuit (not shown) on the +24V power line of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, and is capable of passing current up to the maximum allowable current limit (shut-off current) of the drive solenoid on the game board side. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the maximum allowable current limit of the drive solenoid on the game board side flows, the element of the fuse provided in the +24V driver circuit (not shown) melts, cutting off the +24V power line to the subsequent line supplied via the fuse provided in the +24V driver circuit (not shown).

The +12V driver circuit (not shown) is primarily composed of a driver IC that drives the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5, and a fuse that cuts off overcurrent to this driver IC (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "the fuse provided in the +12V driver circuit (not shown)"). The +12V supplied via the +12V fuse (not shown) is then supplied to the driver IC via the fuse.

The fuse provided in the +12V driver circuit (not shown) has a preset capacity that takes into account the current used by the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 and the +12V driver circuit (not shown) on the +12V power line of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, and is capable of passing current up to the upper limit of the allowable current (shut-off current) of the drive motor on the game board side. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current of the drive motor on the game board side flows, the element of the fuse provided in the +12V driver circuit (not shown) melts, cutting off the +12V power line to the subsequent line supplied via the fuse provided in the +12V driver circuit (not shown).

In this embodiment, the +5V fuse, +12V fuse, +24V fuse, fuses provided in the +24V driver circuit, and fuses provided in the +12V driver circuit (not shown) on the subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510 are surface-mounted (SMD-type) chip fuses that melt when a current exceeds a predetermined allowable current limit (each with a predetermined cut-off current). Unlike resettable fuses, once melted, these electronic components are unable to supply power to subsequent boards, even if the current drops. Note that the +5V fuse, +12V fuse, +24V fuse, fuses provided in the +24V driver circuit, and fuses provided in the +12V driver circuit (not shown) on the subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510 may be lead-type fuses (also known as dip fuses) instead of SMD-type chip fuses. Additionally, resettable fuses such as SMD or lead type thermistors may be used for the +5V fuse, +12V fuse, +24V fuse, fuses provided in the +24V driver circuit, and fuses provided in the +12V driver circuit of the subsequent boards (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. In this way, when resettable fuses are used, if a current exceeding a predetermined allowable current limit flows, power cannot be supplied to the subsequent boards, but once the current drops, power can be supplied to the subsequent boards again.

The +12V supplied to each decorative board on the gaming board 5 is supplied via a +12V fuse (not shown) to an LED constant current drive circuit that controls the various light emission modes, such as turning on, off, blinking, and gradation lighting, of multiple LEDs, such as full-color LEDs and monochrome LEDs (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "various LEDs of the gaming board 5"). The LED constant current drive circuit is primarily composed of a sink-type constant current drive circuit that can pass a constant current to the various LEDs of the gaming board 5, and a maximum current setting circuit that can set the maximum current to be passed through the various LEDs of the gaming board 5. If the LED constant current drive circuit does not have an input buffer circuit, an input buffer circuit may be provided before the LED constant current drive circuit.

The +12V fuse (not shown) has a preset capacity that takes into account the current used by each decorative board on the game board 5 in the +12V power line, and is capable of passing current up to the maximum allowable current (shut-off current) for the decorative board on the game board. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the maximum allowable current for the decorative board on the game board flows through the +12V fuse (not shown), the element of the +12V fuse (not shown) melts, cutting off the subsequent +12V power line supplied via the +12V fuse (not shown).

The +12V fuse (not shown) is a fuse that supplies the +12V power line, and although it passes a smaller current than the original +12V fuse on the peripheral control board 1510, it does pass a larger current and may generate heat. Therefore, to prevent this heat from damaging the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board, it is preferable to place it away from the various LEDs and LED constant current drive circuit, and it is preferable to place it near the connector that supplies +12V (especially near the connector for the terminal to which the power line that supplies +12V is connected).

In this embodiment, the +12V fuse (not shown) on each decorative board of the gaming board 5 is a surface-mounted (SMD-type) chip fuse that melts when a current exceeds a predetermined allowable current limit (each with a predetermined cutoff current). Unlike resettable fuses, once melted, it is an electronic component that cannot supply power to subsequent devices even if the current drops. Note that the +12V fuse (not shown) on each decorative board of the gaming board 5 may be a lead-type fuse instead of an SMD-type chip fuse. Furthermore, a resettable fuse such as an SMD-type or lead-type thermistor may be used as the +12V fuse (not shown) on each decorative board of the gaming board 5. In this way, when a resettable fuse is used, power cannot be supplied to subsequent devices when a current exceeding the predetermined allowable current limit flows, but power can be supplied to subsequent devices again when the current drops.

The three types of power supplies supplied to the door frame relay board 105, +5V, +12V, and +24V, are supplied to the door frame drive board (not shown) provided on the door frame 3 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "each drive board of the door frame 3") and the multiple decorative boards (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "each decorative board of the door frame 3") provided on the door frame 3, each of which requires its own power supply. A fuse (not shown) corresponding to the power supply is provided on each board.

Each drive board of the door frame 3 is equipped with fuses (not shown) corresponding to the power supply (e.g., +5V fuse, +24V fuse, +12V fuse), as well as fuses (e.g., fuses in the +24V driver circuit that drives and controls the +24V electrical drive source (e.g., drive solenoid) and fuses in the +12V driver circuit that drives and controls the +12V electrical drive source (e.g., drive motor). The fuses (not shown) corresponding to the power supply have a preset capacity that takes into account the current used by each drive board of the door frame 3 in the power supply and corresponding power line of each drive board of the door frame 3, and can pass current up to the maximum allowable current limit of each power line drive board on the door frame side (e.g., maximum allowable current limit (breaking current) of the +5V power line drive board on the door frame side, maximum allowable current limit (breaking current) of the +24V power line drive board on the door frame side, maximum allowable current limit (breaking current) of the +12V power line drive board on the door frame side). When an overcurrent (abnormal current) flows that exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current of each power line driver board on the door frame side (for example, the upper limit of the allowable current of the +5V power line driver board on the door frame side, the upper limit of the allowable current of the +24V power line driver board on the door frame side, and the upper limit of the allowable current of the +12V power line driver board on the door frame side), the element of the fuse (not shown) corresponding to the power supply melts down, cutting off the power line to the subsequent power supply supplied via the fuse (not shown) corresponding to the blown power supply.

The fuses in the +24V driver circuit have a preset capacity that takes into account the current used by the +24V electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the door frame 3 and the +24V driver circuit in the +24V power line of each drive board in the door frame 3, and are capable of passing current up to the door frame drive solenoid's allowable current limit (shutoff current). When an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the door frame drive solenoid's allowable current limit flows, the fuse element in the +24V driver circuit melts, cutting off the subsequent +24V power line supplied via the fuse in the +24V driver circuit. The fuses in the +12V driver circuit have a preset capacity that takes into account the current used by the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the door frame 3 and the +12V driver circuit in the +12V power line of each drive board of the door frame 3, and can pass current up to the door frame drive motor's allowable current limit (shutoff current). When an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the door frame drive motor's allowable current limit flows, the fuse element in the +12V driver circuit blows, cutting off the +12V power line to the subsequent line supplied via the fuse in the +12V driver circuit.

The fuses (not shown) of each decorative board on the door frame 3 have a preset capacity that takes into account the current used by each decorative board on the +12V power line of the door frame 3, and can pass current up to the maximum allowable current limit (shut-off current) of the decorative board on the door frame side. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the maximum allowable current limit of the decorative board on the door frame side flows through the fuses (not shown) of each decorative board on the door frame 3, the element of the fuse (not shown) of each decorative board on the door frame 3 melts, cutting off the +12V power line to the subsequent line that is supplied via the fuses (not shown) of each decorative board on the door frame 3.

For example, if one, multiple, or all of the drive boards in the door frame 3 require +12V, the power is supplied via a +12V fuse (not shown) to a +12V driver circuit (not shown) that controls the drive of the drive motor, which serves as the electrical drive source for the door frame 3. The +12V driver circuit is primarily composed of a driver IC (not shown) that drives the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the door frame 3, and a fuse (not shown) that cuts off overcurrent to this driver IC. The +12V supplied via the +12V fuse is then supplied to the driver IC via the fuse. The capacity of the +12V driver circuit fuse is preset to take into account the current used by the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) and +12V driver circuit of the door frame 3 on the +12V power line of the drive board, and is capable of passing current up to the upper limit of the allowable current (cut-off current) of the door frame drive motor. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current for the door frame drive motor flows, the element of the fuse in the +12V driver circuit melts, cutting off the +12V power line to the subsequent lines that is supplied via the fuse in the +12V driver circuit.

Of the drive boards of the door frame 3, the drive board on which the +12V driver circuit is provided (implemented or mounted) is provided with a +5V fuse (not shown) and an input buffer circuit (not shown). A control signal (which may be a serial signal or a parallel signal) transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 is input, noise is removed from the input control signal, and the signal is output to the +12V driver circuit. Specifically, the input buffer circuit is configured as a circuit that electrically connects one end of a resistor to which +5V supplied via the +5V fuse is applied and one end of a resistor grounded to ground (GND) to multiple wiring (harnesses) electrically connecting the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 and the drive board of the door frame 3. This improves noise resistance by removing noise that has entered the multiple wiring (harnesses). The same effect (i.e., improved noise immunity) can be achieved by supplying +12V via a +12V fuse instead of the +5V supplied to this resistor.

Furthermore, for example, if one, multiple, or all of the drive boards in the door frame 3 require +24V, the power is supplied via a +24V fuse (not shown) to a +24V driver circuit (not shown) that controls the operation of the electrical drive source (e.g., drive solenoid) provided in the door frame 3. The +24V driver circuit is primarily composed of a driver IC (not shown) that drives the +24V electrical drive source (drive solenoid, drive motor) of the door frame 3, and a fuse (not shown) that cuts off overcurrent to the driver IC. The +24V supplied via the +24V fuse is then supplied to the driver IC via the fuse. The capacity of the +24V driver circuit fuse is preset to take into account the current used by the +24V electrical drive source (drive solenoid, drive motor) of the door frame 3 and the +24V driver circuit in the drive board's +24V power line, and is capable of passing current up to the upper limit of the allowable current (cut-off current) of the door frame drive solenoid. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current for the door frame drive solenoid flows, the element of the fuse in the +24V driver circuit melts, cutting off the +24V power line to the subsequent components that is supplied via the fuse in the +24V driver circuit.

Of the drive boards of the door frame 3, those on which a +24V driver circuit is provided (implemented or mounted) are provided with a +5V fuse (not shown) and an input buffer circuit (not shown). A control signal (which may be a serial signal or a parallel signal) transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 is input, noise is removed from the input control signal, and the signal is output to the +24V driver circuit. Specifically, the input buffer circuit is configured as a circuit that electrically connects one end of a resistor to which +5V supplied via the +5V fuse is applied and one end of a resistor grounded to ground (GND) to multiple wiring (harnesses) electrically connecting the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 and each drive board of the door frame 3. This improves noise resistance by removing noise that has entered the multiple wiring (harnesses). Instead of the +5V supplied to this resistor, +24V supplied via a +24V fuse, or if +12V is also being supplied, +12V supplied via a +12V fuse can also be used to achieve the same effect (i.e., improved noise resistance).

Furthermore, for example, if one, multiple, or all of the decorative boards on the door frame 3 require +12V, the power is supplied via a +12V fuse (not shown) to an LED constant current drive circuit that controls the various light emission modes (on, off, blinking, gradation lighting, etc.) of multiple LEDs, such as full-color LEDs and monochrome LEDs (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "various LEDs, etc. on the door frame 3") on the door frame 3. The LED constant current drive circuit is primarily composed of a sink-type constant current drive circuit that can supply a constant current to the various LEDs, etc. on the door frame 3, and a maximum current setting circuit that can set the maximum current to be supplied to the various LEDs, etc. on the door frame 3. The +12V fuse (not shown) has a preset capacity that takes into account the current used by each decorative board on the door frame 3 in the +12V power line of the decorative board, and is capable of passing current up to the maximum allowable current limit (break-off current) of the decorative board on the door frame side. When an overcurrent (abnormal current) that exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current for the door frame side decorative board flows, the element of the +12V fuse (not shown) melts and cuts off the +12V power line to the subsequent line supplied via the +12V fuse (not shown).

In addition, if one of the decorative boards in the door frame 3 is not equipped with an LED constant current drive circuit and the light emission of the multiple LEDs mounted on that decorative board itself is controlled by an LED constant current drive circuit provided on another decorative board in the door frame 3, a +12V fuse (not shown) may or may not be provided on the decorative board. Also, if the LED constant current drive circuit does not have an input buffer circuit provided (mounted or installed) on the drive board of the door frame 3, an input buffer circuit may be provided in front of the LED constant current drive circuit.

In this embodiment, the above-mentioned fuses provided on the door frame 3 side are surface-mounted (so-called SMD-type) chip fuses that melt when a current exceeding a predetermined allowable current limit (each with a predetermined cut-off current) flows. Unlike resettable fuses, once they melt, they are electronic components that cannot supply power to subsequent devices even if the current drops. Note that lead-type fuses may be used instead of SMD-type chip fuses as the above-mentioned fuses provided on the door frame 3 side. Furthermore, resettable fuses such as SMD-type or lead-type thermistors may also be used as the above-mentioned fuses provided on the door frame 3 side. In this way, when resettable fuses are used, power cannot be supplied to subsequent devices when a current exceeding the predetermined allowable current limit flows, but power can be supplied to subsequent devices again when the current drops.

[8-3-1. Voltage supplied to the dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 178, the dispensing control board 633 includes a dispensing control MPU 633aa and a dispensing control filter circuit 633h. This dispensing control filter circuit 633h receives +5V from the power supply board 630 and filters out noise from this +5V. This +5V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 630 via diode PD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the dispensing control MPU 633aa and dispensing control input circuit 633ab of the dispensing control unit 633a. The +12V from the power supply board 630 is supplied to, for example, the dispensing control input circuit 633ab of the dispensing control unit 633a, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 558z of the external terminal board 558 via the dispensing control board 633. The external communication circuit 558z of this external terminal board 558 is a circuit that outputs signals conveying the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1 to a hall computer installed in the gaming hall. The hall computer monitors the player's play by understanding the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1 from the signals output from the external communication circuit 558z. Note that +24 from the power supply board 630 is not used in the payout control board 633 at all, but is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633.

[8-3-2. Voltage supplied to the main control board]
As shown in Fig. 178, the main control board 1310 includes, in addition to the main control MPU 1310a, etc., a +5V generating circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power outage monitoring circuit 1310e, etc. The +5V generating circuit 1310g receives +12V from the power supply board 630 via the dispensing control board 633, and generates +5V from this +12V, which is the control power supply for the main control MPU 1310a. In this embodiment, the circuit is configured so that the +5V generated by the +5V power supply generating circuit 630fa of the power supply generating circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 and the +5V generated on the main control board side by the +5V generating circuit 1310g on the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected. Therefore, the +5V generated by the +5V power supply generating circuit 630fa of the power supply generating circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 are not electrically connected to various electronic components on the main control board 1310, and the +5V generated on the main control board side by the +5V generating circuit 1310g on the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected to various electronic components on other boards, etc. other than the main control board 1310.

The main control filter circuit 1310h is supplied with +5V (+5V generated on the main control board) generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g, and removes noise from this +5V. This +5V is supplied to capacitor BC0 on the power supply board 630 via diode MD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the main control MPU 1310a and main control input circuit 1310b. +12V from the dispensing control board 633 is supplied to, for example, the main control input circuit 1310b, and +24V from the dispensing control board 633 is supplied to, for example, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d.

The power outage monitoring circuit 1310e receives +12V and +24V from the power supply board 630 via the dispensing control board 633, and monitors these +12V and +24V for signs of a power outage or momentary interruption. When the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e detects signs of a power outage or momentary interruption of +12V and +24V, it outputs a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a as a power outage warning. The power outage warning signal is input to the dispensing control MPU 633aa via the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control input circuit 633ab of the dispensing control board 633. The power outage warning signal is also input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310.

In this embodiment, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the voltages applied to the two power lines, the +12V power line and the +24V power line, respectively, thereby enabling more accurate detection of signs of a power outage or momentary power interruption, compared to monitoring the voltage applied to either the +12V power line or the +24V power line.

As described above, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, of the three types of power supplies, +5V, +12V, and +24V, generated by the +5V power supply generating circuit 630fa, +12V power supply generating circuit 630fb, and +24V power supply generating circuit 630fc of the power supply generating circuit 630f on the power supply board 630, the two types of power supplies, +12V and +24V, are supplied to various boards, such as the payout control board 633, main control board 1310, peripheral control board 1510, and boards subsequent to the peripheral control board 1510. In other words, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the +12V power supply has the same potential on various boards, and the +24V power supply has the same potential on various boards. Furthermore, the +5V generated by the +5V power supply generating circuit 630fa of the power supply generating circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 and the +5V generated by the +5V generating circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected, but are at the same potential.

Furthermore, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment, as described above, except for the payout control board 633 and the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided (mounted, equipped) with a +12V fuse (not shown) and a +24V fuse (not shown), and the boards subsequent to the peripheral control board 1510 are provided (mounted, equipped) with a +12V fuse (not shown) and a +24V fuse (not shown).

Furthermore, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment, as described above, the +12V power supply and the +24V power supply are both monitored by the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e on the main control board 1310.

In other words, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment, the +12V power supply monitored by the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, the +12V fuse (not shown) provided (implemented, mounted) on the peripheral control board 1510, and the +12V fuse (not shown) provided (implemented, mounted) on the board subsequent to the peripheral control board 1510 are all at the same potential; and the +24V power supply monitored by the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, the +24V fuse (not shown) provided (implemented, mounted) on the peripheral control board 1510, and the +24V fuse (not shown) provided (implemented, mounted) on the board subsequent to the peripheral control board 1510 are all at the same potential.

In addition, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment, if one, multiple, or all of the drive boards of the door frame 3 require +12V, as described above, it is supplied to a +12V driver circuit (not shown) that controls the drive of the drive motor, which is the electrical drive source provided in the door frame 3, via a +12V fuse (not shown), and if one, multiple, or all of the drive boards of the door frame 3 require +24V, it is supplied to a +24V driver circuit (not shown) that controls the drive of the electrical drive source (e.g., drive solenoid, drive motor) provided in the door frame 3, via a +24V fuse (not shown), as described above. In this case, in the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment, +12V is a power supply monitored by the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 of the game board 5, a +12V fuse (not shown) provided (mounted, installed) on the peripheral control board 1510 of the game board 5, a +12V fuse (not shown) provided (mounted, installed) on the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 of the game board 5, and a +12V fuse (not shown) provided (mounted, installed) on the drive board of the door frame 3. are at the same potential, and the +24V power supply monitored by the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 of the gaming panel 5, the +24V fuse (not shown) provided (implemented, mounted) on the peripheral control board 1510 of the gaming panel 5, the +24V fuse (not shown) provided (implemented, mounted) on a subsequent board to the peripheral control board 1510 of the gaming panel 5, and the +24V fuse (not shown) provided (implemented, mounted) on the drive board of the door frame 3 are all at the same potential.

[9. Main control board circuit, dispensing control board circuit]
Next, the circuits of the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633 will be briefly described with reference to Figures 179 to 182. Figure 179 is a schematic circuit diagram showing the circuit of the main control board, Figure 180 is a circuit diagram showing the main control input circuit with error detection function, Figure 181 is a circuit diagram showing the power outage monitoring circuit, and Figure 182 is a schematic circuit diagram showing the circuit of the dispensing control board. First, the circuit of the main control board 1310 will be described, and then the circuit of the dispensing control board 633 will be described. Here, we will explain an example in which the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the setting change board 1311 described above is mounted on the main control board 1310, and only the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320. In addition, we will also explain the wiring to the power supply and input signal boards in the circuits of various boards as appropriate.

[9-1. Main control board circuit]
Of the power supplies for the circuits of the main control board 1310, the control power supply for the main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor, is supplied with +12V from the +12V power supply generating circuit 630fb of the power supply generating circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 via the delivery control board 633, and +5V is generated from this supplied +12V in a +5V generating circuit 1310g as a local power supply that serves as the control power supply for the main control board 1310. This local power supply +5V has the same potential as the +5V generated by the +5V power supply generating circuit 630fa of the power supply generating circuit 630f on the power supply board 630.

As shown in Figure 179, the +5V local power supply that serves as the control power supply for the main control board 1310 in the +5V generation circuit 1310g is first input to the main control filter circuit 1310h. This main control filter circuit 1310h is primarily composed of the main control three-terminal filter MIC0. This main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit that is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. The +5V from the +5V generation circuit 1310g is applied to terminal 1 of the main control three-terminal filter MIC0, its terminal 2 is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), and +5V with noise components removed is output from terminal 3. The +5V applied to terminal 1 is electrically connected to one end of capacitor MC0, the other end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), thereby first removing ripple (AC components superimposed on the voltage) and smoothing the voltage.

The +5V output from terminal 3 is electrically connected to the other end of capacitor MC1 and electrolytic capacitor MC2 (capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment), which are electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), thereby further removing ripple and smoothing the voltage. This smoothed +5V is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal for the main control MPU 1310a. Note that if a momentary power outage occurs and the power from the gaming hall is cut off, the charge stored in electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal for the main control MPU 1310a, for a period of approximately 7 milliseconds (ms) after the momentary power outage.

The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to one end of capacitor MC3, the other end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), and is also electrically connected to the anode terminal of diode MD0. The +5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed and ripple is further removed by capacitor MC3. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground).

The VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal for the main control internal RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of diode MD0. The VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal for the main control internal RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, is also electrically connected to one end of capacitor MC4, the other end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), and is also electrically connected via resistor MR0 to the positive terminal of capacitor BC0 of the backup power supply circuit 630h on the power supply board 630. As a result, the main VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h on the power supply board 630 is supplied via resistor MR0 to the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal for the main control internal RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, while diode MD0 prevents the main VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h on the power supply board 630 from being supplied via resistor MR0 to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal for the main control MPU 1310a.

Of the input signals to the circuit of the main control board 1310, for example, the main RWM signal from the RWM switch 633d (which may also be the RAM clear switch 1310f) provided on the payout control board 633, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2401, and the detection signal from the setting key switch 13100a are input to the main control input circuit 1310b without an error detection function and the main control input circuit 1310b2 with an error detection function.

Specifically, for example, the main RWM signal from the RWM switch 633d provided on the dispensing control board 633 is input to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b (hereinafter simply referred to as "main control input circuit 1310b") without an error detection function, and the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b and the logic inversion circuit 1310iv. In contrast, detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the gate sensor 2801, the first starting opening sensor 3002, the second starting opening sensor 2401, etc. are input to input terminals PA1 to PA4 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b2 with error detection function.

The power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e is input to input terminal PB0 of input port PB of main control MPU 1310a via main control input circuit 1310b, and is output to the payout control board 633, performance display device 1600, etc. via main control output circuit 1310c. Input ports PA and PB are composed of 8 bits. In addition, detection signals from other sensors are input to specified input terminals of input ports PA and PB via main control input circuit 1310b or main control input circuit with error detection function 1310b2, and input terminals that become unused terminals are electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground) as a unused terminal treatment.

The main control MPU 1310a outputs various signals from the output terminal of its specified output port via the main control output circuit 1310c. For example, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a power outage clear signal from the output terminal of its specified output port via the main control output circuit 1310c to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e, and outputs a drive signal via the main control output circuit 1310c to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d.

Detection signals from other sensors may be input to specific input terminals of port PC in addition to port PB via the main control input circuit 1310b, and unused input terminals in port PC are electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground) as an unused terminal treatment. Port PC, like input ports PA and PB, is configured with 8 bits.

[9-1-1. Main control input circuit]
Next, the main control input circuit 1310b will be described. Since the main control input circuit 1310b is the same circuit, here we will describe the main control input circuit 1310b to which the main RWM signal from the RWM switch 633d provided on the dispensing control board 633 is input, and the main control input circuit 1310b to which the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input.

[9-1-1a. Main RWM signal from RWM switch]
The main control input circuit 1310b, to which the main RWM signal is input from the RWM switch 633d provided on the dispensing control board 633, is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR2, which is electrically connected to the +12V power line (the other end of the resistor MR2 is electrically connected to the power line (i.e., the +12V power line) created and supplied by the +12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the power supply creation circuit 630f, as shown in FIG. 179, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of a transistor MTR0 via a resistor MR3. In addition to the resistor MR3, the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor MR4, which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310. The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR5, one end of which is electrically connected to a +5V power supply line created on the main control board (a +5V power supply line created by a +5V power supply circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, which is different from the power supply line (i.e., the +5V power supply line) created and supplied by a +5V power supply circuit 630fa of the power supply circuit 630f), and the other end of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to an input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The main RWM signal from the RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633 is input as an RWM signal to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

In addition, the other end of resistor MR2 may be electrically connected to one end of a capacitor electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, in order to adjust the waveform to match that of the main RWM signal from the RWM switch 633d provided on the dispensing control board 633.

Furthermore, if the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to an internal pull-up resistor electrically connected inside the main control MPU 1310a by a +5V power line created on the main control board (a +5V power line created by the +5V power generation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, which is different from the power line created and supplied by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f (i.e., the +5V power line)), the collector terminal of transistor MTR0 may be electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a without mounting resistor MR5 on the main control board 1310.

[9-1-1b. Detection signal from setting key switch]
The setting key switch 1311a has a COM1 terminal, a COM2 terminal, a terminal A, and a terminal B, with the B terminal electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310 and the COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, and A terminal electrically connected together. When the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the COM1 terminal, the COM2 terminal, and the A terminal are electrically connected in the internal circuit, and the internal circuits between the COM1 terminal, the COM2 terminal, and the A terminal are electrically connected, whereas when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, the COM1 terminal, the COM2 terminal, and the B terminal are electrically connected in the internal circuit, and the internal circuits between the COM1 terminal, the COM2 terminal, and the B terminal are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the main control board 1310 (board ground).

When the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a electrically connects the COM1 and COM2 terminals to the A terminal in the internal circuit, whereas when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, the COM1 and COM2 terminals electrically connect to the B terminal in the internal circuit and are electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310.

As shown in FIG. 179, the main control input circuit 1310b, to which the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR10, which is electrically connected to the +5V power line created on the main control board (this is a +5V power line created by the +5V power generation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, and is different from the power line (i.e., the +5V power line) created and supplied by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f). It is also electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC10, which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of a transistor MTR10 via a resistor MR11. In addition to the resistor MR11, the base terminal of transistor MTR10 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor MR12, which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310. The emitter terminal of transistor MTR10 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310. The collector terminal of transistor MTR10 is electrically connected to one end of resistor MR13, which is electrically connected to the other end of a +5V power line created on the main control board (a +5V power line created by a +5V power generation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, and is different from the power line created and supplied by a +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f (i.e., the +5V power line)), and is also electrically connected to input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via a logic inversion circuit 1310iv.

Logic inversion circuit 1310iv inverts the logic of the detection signal from setting key switch 1311a input via main control input circuit 1310b. Logic inversion circuit 1310iv is composed of resistors MR14, MR15, and MR16, and transistor MTR11. The collector terminal of transistor MTR10, which constitutes main control input circuit 1310b, is electrically connected to one end of resistor MR13, which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line created on the main control board (a +5V power supply line created by +5V creation circuit 1310g provided on main control board 1310, which is different from the power supply line created and supplied by +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of power supply creation circuit 630f (i.e., the +5V power supply line)), and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor MTR11 via resistor MR14. The base terminal of transistor MTR11 is electrically connected to resistor MR14 and to the other end of resistor MR15, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310. The emitter terminal of transistor MTR11 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310. The collector terminal of transistor MTR11 is electrically connected to the other end of resistor MR16, one end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line created on the main control board (a +5V power supply line created by a +5V creation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, which is different from the power supply line created and supplied by a +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f (i.e., the +5V power supply line)), and is also electrically connected to input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input as a setting key signal to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b and the logic inversion circuit 1310iv.

In addition, if the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to an internal pull-up resistor electrically connected inside the main control MPU 1310a by a +5V power supply line created on the main control board side (a +5V power supply line created by the +5V power supply circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, which is different from the power supply line (i.e., the +5V power supply line) created and supplied by the +5V power supply generation circuit 630fa of the power supply generation circuit 630f), the collector terminal of transistor MTR11 may be electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a without implementing resistor MR16 on the main control board 1310. Furthermore, even if the input terminals PA1-PA4, PA6-PA7 of the input port PA (input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) and PA5 (setting key signal input terminal)) are electrically connected to an internal pull-up resistor electrically connected to the +5V power line created by the main control board (a +5V power line created by the +5V power generation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, which is different from the power line created and supplied by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f (i.e., the +5V power line)), the collector terminal of the transistor may be electrically connected to the input terminals PA1-PA4, PA6-PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a without being electrically connected to the other end of the resistor electrically connected to the +5V power line created by the main control board, i.e., without mounting this resistor on the main control board 1310.

When the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the COM1 and COM2 terminals are electrically connected to the A terminal in the internal circuit, so the voltage of the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is pulled up to +5V on the main control board side by resistor MR10 in the main control input circuit 1310b, causing the logic to become HI, turning ON transistor MTR10 in the main control input circuit 1310b. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR10 is pulled down toward the ground (GND) (board ground) side of the main control board 1310, turning off transistor MTR11 of logic inverter circuit 1310iv, and the voltage at the collector terminal of this transistor MTR11 is pulled up to the +5V side of the main control board by resistor MR16 of logic inverter circuit 1310iv, causing the setting key signal, whose logic has become HI, to be input to input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of input port PA of main control MPU 1310a. In other words, when setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the logic of the setting key signal becomes HI (logic indicating a setting disabled state) and is input to input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of input port PA of main control MPU 1310a.

In contrast, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, the COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal and B terminal are electrically connected in the internal circuit and electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, so the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a has a logic LOW and transistor MTR10 of the main control input circuit 1310b turns OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR10 is pulled up to +5V on the main control board by resistor MR13 of main control input circuit 1310b, turning on transistor MTR11 of logic inversion circuit 1310iv. The voltage at the collector terminal of transistor MTR11 is pulled down to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, and the setting key signal, whose logic is now LOW, is input to input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. In other words, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, the logic of the setting key signal becomes LOW (logic that indicates a setting enabled state) and is input to input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a.

When the push operation part of the RWM switch 633d provided on the dispensing control board 633 is not operated, the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is not electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the dispensing control board 633, as described below. Therefore, the resistor PR50 of the dispensing control input circuit 633ab provided on the dispensing control board 633, described below, pulls it up to the power supply (+5V) created and supplied by the +5V power supply creation circuit 630fa of the power supply creation circuit 630f, turning on the transistor PTR60 of the dispensing control output circuit 633ac provided on the dispensing control board 633, described below. The voltage of the collector terminal of this transistor PTR60 is pulled down to the ground (GND) (board ground) side of the dispensing control board 633, causing the logic of the main RWM signal from the RWM switch 633d to become LOW and be input to the main control board 1310. When the main RWM signal from the RWM switch 633d with a logic LOW is input to the main control input circuit 1310b, transistor MTR0 of the main control input circuit 1310b turns OFF, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR0 is pulled up to +5V on the main control board by resistor MR5 of the main control input circuit 1310b, causing the RWM signal with a logic HI to be input to input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. In other words, when the pressing operation unit of the RWM switch 633d provided on the dispensing control board 633 is not operated, the logic of the RWM signal becomes HI (logic indicating a non-pressing operation state) and is input to input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a.

In contrast, when the pressing operation part of the RWM switch 633d provided on the dispensing control board 633 is operated, the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the dispensing control board 633 as described below, so that the transistor PTR60 of the dispensing control output circuit 633ac provided on the dispensing control board 633 is turned OFF, and the voltage of the collector terminal of this transistor PTR60 is pulled up to the +5V side on the main control board side by the resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b provided on the main control board 1310, and the logic of the main RWM signal from the RWM switch 633d becomes HI. As a result, transistor MTR0 of main control input circuit 1310b turns ON, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, and the RWM signal, whose logic is now LOW, is input to input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of input port PA of main control MPU 1310a. In other words, when the pressing operation portion of RWM switch 633d provided on dispensing control board 633 is operated, the logic of the RWM signal becomes LOW (logic that conveys the pressing operation status) and is input to input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of input port PA of main control MPU 1310a.

In this way, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, the logic of the setting key signal indicating this is set to HI by the logic inversion circuit 1310iv, and when the pressing operation portion of the RWM switch 633d is operated, the logic of the RAW signal indicating this is set to HI. Also, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, the logic of the setting key signal indicating this is set to LOW by the logic inversion circuit 1310iv, and when the pressing operation portion of the RWM switch 633d is not operated, the logic of the RAW signal indicating this is set to LOW. In other words, the logic that indicates that the setting key switch 1311a has been turned ON and the logic that indicates that the pressing operation section of the RWM switch 633d has been operated are the same logic (HI), and the logic that indicates that the setting key switch 1311a has been turned OFF (not turned ON) and the logic that indicates that the pressing operation section of the RWM switch 633d has not been operated are the same logic (LOW).

[9-1-2. Main control input circuit with error detection function]
Next, the main control input circuit with error detection function 1310b2 will be described. Since the main control input circuit with error detection function 1310b2 is the same circuit, here, the main control input circuit with error detection function 1310b to which the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 is input will be described.

The main control input circuit 1310b2 with error detection function, which receives the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, is primarily composed of a processing circuit 1310b2a, as shown in Figure 180. The processing circuit 1310b2a receives the +5V power line (a +5V power line created by the +5V generation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, which is different from the power line (i.e., the +5V power line) created and supplied by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f) generated by the main control board via the VCC terminal and supplies it to various internal circuits as an internal power source, and the grounds (GND) of the various internal circuits are electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310 via the GND terminal.

The processing circuit 1310b2a also includes a power supply terminal circuit that monitors the power supply of the +12V power line (the power line generated and supplied by the +12V power supply generating circuit 630fb of the power supply generating circuit 630f (i.e., the +12V power line)) supplied via the VS terminal; a wire break monitoring circuit that monitors for wire breaks based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 input via the input terminal; a short circuit monitoring circuit that monitors for short circuits based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 input via the input terminal; a comparison circuit that compares the presence or absence of a game ball passing through with a predetermined threshold based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 input via the input terminal; an abnormality processing circuit that determines the presence or absence of an abnormality based on the monitoring results from each monitoring circuit, such as the power supply monitoring circuit, wire break monitoring circuit, and short circuit monitoring circuit, and performs processing when an abnormality occurs; an error output circuit that reports the occurrence of an abnormality based on the inspection results from each monitoring circuit; and an output circuit that outputs the comparison result from the comparison circuit.

When the abnormality processing circuit determines that an abnormality has occurred based on the monitoring results from each monitoring circuit (when an error is detected), it sets and controls the logic for outputting this information (that an abnormality has occurred) from the error output circuit to the outside via the ER terminal, and also sets and controls the logic for outputting the comparison results from the comparison circuit to the outside via the output terminal.

The VS terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a is electrically connected to the +12V power line (the power line generated and supplied by the +12V power generation circuit 630fb of the power generation circuit 630f (i.e., the +12V power line)), as well as to one end of a resistor MR50 and to the other end of a capacitor MC50, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310.

The input terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a is electrically connected to the other end of resistor MR50, in addition to being electrically connected to the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801. In order to adjust the waveform of the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, the input terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a may also be electrically connected to one end of a capacitor whose other end is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310.

The VCC terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor MC51, the other end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310.

The output terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR51, which is electrically connected at the other end to the +5V power line created on the main control board (this is a +5V power line created by the +5V power generation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, and is different from the power line (i.e., the +5V power line) created and supplied by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f), and is also electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 is input as a gate signal to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b2a with error detection function.

The ER terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR52, which is electrically connected at the other end to the +5V power line created on the main control board (a +5V power line created by the +5V power generation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, which is different from the power line created and supplied by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f (i.e., the +5V power line)), and is also electrically connected to the input terminal PB7 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a. The ER terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a is also electrically connected to the ER terminals of other main control input circuits 1310b2 with error detection functions. In other words, the signals from the ER terminals of multiple main control input circuits 1310b2 with error detection functions are OR-connected. The signal from the ER terminal of the main control input circuit with error detection function 1310b2 is input as a sensor error signal to the input terminal PB7 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a.

Here, we will explain the state of the input terminal of processing circuit 1310b2a when the abnormality processing circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a determines that an abnormality has occurred (when an error is detected) based on the monitoring results from each monitoring circuit, such as the power supply monitoring circuit, open circuit monitoring circuit, and short circuit monitoring circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a. When the abnormality processing circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a determines that an abnormality has occurred (when an error is detected) based on the monitoring results from the power supply monitoring circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a, the logic of the input terminal of processing circuit 1310b2a is undefined, indicating a power supply abnormality. When the abnormality processing circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a determines that an abnormality has occurred (when an error is detected) based on the monitoring results from the open circuit monitoring circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a, the logic of the input terminal of processing circuit 1310b2a is HI, indicating a open circuit. When the abnormality processing circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a determines that an abnormality has occurred based on the monitoring results from the short circuit monitoring circuit of the processing circuit 1310b2a (when an error is detected), the logic of the input terminal of the processing circuit 1310b2a becomes LOW, indicating that a short circuit has occurred.

In addition, in the abnormality processing circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a, we will explain the state of the output terminal and ER terminal of processing circuit 1310b2a when it is determined that an abnormality has occurred (when an error is detected) based on the monitoring results from each monitoring circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a, such as the power supply monitoring circuit, open circuit monitoring circuit, and short circuit monitoring circuit. When the abnormality processing circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a determines that an abnormality has occurred based on the monitoring results from the power supply monitoring circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a (when an error is detected), it sets and controls the output circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a so that the logic of the output terminal of processing circuit 1310b2a is LOW in order to stop the comparison result by the comparison circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a from being output from the output circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a, and also sets and controls the error output circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a so that the logic of the ER terminal of processing circuit 1310b2a is HI to notify that an abnormality has occurred.

When the abnormality processing circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a determines that an abnormality has occurred based on the monitoring results from the disconnection monitoring circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a (when an error is detected), the abnormality processing circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a sets and controls the output circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a so that the logic of the output terminal of processing circuit 1310b2a is LOW in order to stop the comparison result by the comparison circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a from being output from the output circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a, and also sets and controls the error output circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a so that the logic of the ER terminal of processing circuit 1310b2a is HIGH in order to notify that an abnormality has occurred.

When the abnormality processing circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a determines that an abnormality has occurred based on the monitoring results from the short-circuit monitoring circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a (when an error is detected), the abnormality processing circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a sets and controls the output circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a so that the logic of the output terminal of processing circuit 1310b2a is LOW in order to stop the comparison result by the comparison circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a being output from the output circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a, and also sets and controls the error output circuit of processing circuit 1310b2a so that the logic of the ER terminal of processing circuit 1310b2a is HIGH in order to notify that an abnormality has occurred.

[9-1-3. Power outage monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 178, the main control board 1310 is supplied with two types of voltage via the output control board 633: +12V from the +12V power supply generating circuit 630fb of the power supply generating circuit 630f in the power supply board 630, and +24V from the +24V power supply generating circuit 630fc of the power supply generating circuit 630f in the power supply board 630, and +12V and +24V are input to the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e.

The power outage monitoring circuit 1310e monitors for signs of a power outage or momentary power outage of +12V and +24V, and when it detects signs of a power outage or momentary power outage, it outputs a power outage warning signal as a power outage warning to the main control MPU 1310a, the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633, the peripheral control board 1510, the performance display device 1600, etc. When a power outage warning signal is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e, for example, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing described below, stopping the progress of the game, the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control board 633 performs payout control unit power off processing in the payout control unit power on processing described below, stopping the progress of the payout (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls), the peripheral control board 1510 performs backup processing of the performance information, and the performance display device 1600 turns off an inverter (not shown) that creates a power source for the backlight to cut power consumption and stop the progress of the performance so that the main control side power off processing by the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control unit power off processing by the payout control 633aa can be completed reliably.

Here, we will first explain the configuration of the power outage monitoring circuit, then explain the monitoring of +24V power outages or momentary power outages, the monitoring of +12V power outages or momentary power outages, and the output of the power outage warning signal.

[9-1-3a. Configuration of power outage monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 181, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e is mainly composed of a shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open-collector output type comparator MIC21, a D-type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

The REF terminal, which is the reference voltage input terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, and the K terminal, which is the cathode terminal, are electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR20, which is electrically connected to the +5V power line created on the main control board (this is a +5V power line created by the +5V power generation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, and is different from the power line created and supplied by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power supply generation circuit 630f (i.e., the +5V power line)). The other end of this resistor is connected to apply +5V to the main control board, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (set to 2.495V in this embodiment) that serves as the comparison reference voltage for the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to one end of a capacitor MC20, the other end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground). The reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is smoothed by the capacitor MC20, removing ripple (AC components superimposed on the voltage). The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground).

The comparator MIC21 has two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used to compare the monitored voltage V1 (hereinafter referred to as "+24V monitored voltage V1") of the +24V power line (the power line (i.e., the +24V power line) generated and supplied by the +24V power supply generation circuit 630fc of the power supply generation circuit 630f) with the reference voltage Vref, and the other (MIC21B) is used to compare the monitored voltage V1 of the +12V power line ( It is used to compare the monitored voltage V2 (hereinafter referred to as "+12V monitored voltage V2") of the power line (i.e., the +12V power line) generated and supplied by the +12V power generating circuit 630fb of the power generating circuit 630f with the reference voltage Vref. A +24V monitored voltage V1 is applied to terminal 3, which is the positive terminal of the MIC 21A, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to terminal 2, which is the negative terminal of the MIC 21A. A +12V monitoring voltage V2 is applied to terminal 5, the positive terminal of MIC21B, and a reference voltage Vref is applied to terminal 6, the negative terminal of MIC21B. The comparison results are input to D-type flip-flop MIC22. MIC22 has two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in this embodiment. The Vcc terminal, which serves as the power supply terminal of comparator MIC21, is electrically connected to one end of capacitor MC21, the other end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground). The +5V generated by the main control board and applied to the Vcc terminal, which serves as the power supply terminal of comparator MIC21, is smoothed and ripple-free by capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal, which serves as the ground terminal of comparator MIC21, is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground).

[9-1-3b. Monitoring of +24V power outages or momentary power outages]
As described above, the monitoring of a +24V power outage or momentary power outage is performed by the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 comparing the +24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 181, the terminal 3, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 to which the +24V monitoring voltage V1 is applied, is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR21 electrically connected to the +24V power line (the power line (i.e., the +24V power line) generated and supplied by the +24V power supply generating circuit 630fc of the power supply generating circuit 630f), the other end of a resistor MR22 electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), and a capacitor MC23 electrically connected to the other ends of the resistors MR21 and MR22 and to ground (GND) (board ground). The terminals are electrically connected. The +24V monitoring voltage V1 applied to terminal 3, which is the positive terminal of MIC21A of comparator MIC21, is divided by the resistance ratio of resistors MR21 and MR22, and ripples are removed and smoothed by capacitor MC23. The values of resistors MR21 and MR22 are set so that, in the event of a power outage or momentary interruption, the +24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes equal to the reference voltage Vref when the voltage starts to drop from +24V to a preset power outage detection voltage V1pf (set to 21.40V in this embodiment).

Terminal 1, the output terminal of comparator MIC21A, is an open collector output, with one end electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor MR23, which is electrically connected to the +5V power line on the main control board, and one end electrically connected to the other end of capacitor MC24, which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), and is electrically connected to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22. Capacitor MC24 acts as a low-pass filter.

When the +24V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V1pf, the +24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes greater than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to terminal 1, the output terminal of MIC21A of comparator MIC21, is pulled up to +5V on the main control board by pull-up resistor MR23, and the signal with a logic HI is input to terminal PR, the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the +24V voltage is lower than the power outage detection voltage V1pf, the +24V monitoring voltage V1 becomes lower than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to terminal 1, which is the output terminal of MIC21A of comparator MIC21, is pulled down to ground (GND) (board ground), and a signal with a logic LOW is input to terminal PR, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-1-3c. Monitoring of +12V power outage or momentary power outage]
As described above, the monitoring of a +12V power outage or momentary power outage is performed by the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 comparing the +12V monitoring voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 181, the 5th terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 to which the +12V monitoring voltage V2 is applied, is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR24 electrically connected to the +12V power line (the power line (i.e., the +12V power line) generated and supplied by the +12V power supply generating circuit 630fb of the power supply generating circuit 630f), the other end of a resistor MR25 electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), and the other end of a capacitor MC25 electrically connected to the other ends of the resistors MR24 and MR25 and to ground (GND) (board ground). The terminals are electrically connected. The +12V monitoring voltage V2 applied to terminal 5, which is the positive terminal of MIC21B of comparator MIC21, is divided by the resistance ratio of resistors MR24 and MR25, and ripples are removed and smoothed by capacitor MC25. The values of resistors MR24 and MR25 are set so that, in the event of a power outage or momentary interruption, the +12V monitoring voltage V2 becomes equal to the reference voltage Vref when the voltage begins to drop from +12V to a preset power outage detection voltage V2pf (set to 10.47V in this embodiment).

Terminal 7, the output terminal of MIC21B of comparator MIC21, is an open collector output and is electrically connected to terminal 1, the output terminal of MIC21A mentioned above. As a result, one end is electrically connected to the other end of pull-up resistor MR23, which is electrically connected to the +5V power line on the main control board, and one end is electrically connected to the other end of capacitor MC24, which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), and is electrically connected to terminal PR, the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22. As mentioned above, capacitor MC24 acts as a low-pass filter.

When the +12V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V2pf, the +12V monitoring voltage V2 becomes greater than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to terminal 7, the output terminal of MIC21B of comparator MIC21, is pulled up to +5V on the main control board by pull-up resistor MR23, and the signal with a logic HI is input to terminal PR, the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

On the other hand, when the +12V voltage is lower than the power outage detection voltage V2pf, the +12V monitoring voltage V2 becomes lower than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to terminal 7, which is the output terminal of MIC21B of comparator MIC21, is pulled down to ground (GND) (board ground), and the signal with a logic LOW is input to terminal PR, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-1-3d. Power outage warning signal output]
D-type flip-flop MIC22 memorizes the value (logic) of the signal input to its D-input terminal 1D in response to a change in the edge of the clock signal input to its clock input terminal 1CK, and outputs this memorized value (logic) from its output terminal 1Q, as well as outputting the inverse of the memorized value (logic) from its output terminal, negative logic 1Q. When a logic LOW signal is input to its clear terminal CLR, D-type flip-flop MIC22 releases the latched state and outputs a signal obtained by inverting the logic of the signal input to its preset terminal PR from its output terminal 1Q (at this time, a signal obtained by inverting the logic of the signal output from 1Q, i.e., a signal with the same logic as the signal input to the preset terminal PR, is output from the negative logic 1Q). On the other hand, when a logic HI is input to its clear terminal CLR, D-type flip-flop MIC22 sets the latched state. Furthermore, when a signal with a logic HI is input to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal, to set the latch state, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 maintains a state in which it outputs a signal with a logic HI from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, when a signal with a logic LOW is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal (at this time, it maintains a state in which it outputs a signal with the logic of the signal output from 1Q, which is the inverted signal, from the negative logic 1Q terminal).

In this embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22's D input terminal, terminal 1D, and clock input terminal, terminal 1CK, are electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground). Therefore, the circuit is configured so that, even if there is no change in the edge of the clock signal input to terminal 1CK, the clock input terminal, the value (logic) of the signal input to terminal 1D, the D input terminal, is not stored and output from terminal 1Q, the output terminal. As described above, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives, at its preset terminal PR, a signal from terminal 1, the output terminal of MIC21A of comparator MIC21, which monitors for power outages or momentary interruptions of +24V, and a signal from terminal 7, the output terminal of MIC21B of comparator MIC21, which monitors for power outages or momentary interruptions of +12V, and outputs a signal from terminal 1Q, the output terminal, based on these signals. The power supply terminal Vcc terminal is electrically connected to one end of capacitor MC22, the other end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground). The +5V generated by the main control board and applied to the Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, has ripples removed and smoothed by capacitor MC22. The ground terminal GND terminal is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), and the negative logic 1Q terminal, which inverts the logic of the output terminal 1Q, is not electrically connected to the outside.

In this embodiment, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 receives a power outage clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a via the main control output circuit 1310c at its clear terminal, CLR. This power outage clear signal is output during the main control side power-on process performed by the main control MPU 1310a (described below) and is stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed. Because the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the power outage clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal via the main control output circuit 1310c with its logic set to LOW. When a power outage clear signal is input to the CLR terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 releases its latched state. At this time, the logic input to the preset terminal, PR, is inverted and output from the output terminal, 1Q.

On the other hand, when the output of the power outage clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, the logic becomes HIGH via the main control output circuit 1310c and is input to the CLR terminal. When the power outage clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is set to a latched state, and the logic becomes LOW at the PR terminal, latching the input state.

The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is input to the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a as a power outage warning signal. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 1310c, and the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is output from the main control output circuit 1310c to the dispensing control board 633 as a dispensing power outage warning signal and to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal.

The main control input circuit 1310b electrically connects the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the input terminal of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a. As shown in FIG. 181, the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR26, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line on the main control board, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of a transistor MTR20 via a resistor MR27. The base terminal of transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to resistor MR27 and also to the other end of a resistor MR28, the other end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground). The emitter terminal of transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), and the collector terminal of transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to one end of resistor MR29, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line on the main control board, and is also electrically connected to input terminal PB0 of input port PB of main control MPU 1310a.

In addition, if the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to an internal pull-up resistor inside the main control MPU 1310a via a +5V power line created on the main control board (a +5V power line created by the +5V power generation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, which is different from the power line created and supplied by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f (i.e., the +5V power line)), the collector terminal of transistor MTR20 may be electrically connected to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a without mounting resistor MR29 on the main control board 1310.

Furthermore, even if the other input terminals PB1 to PB7 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a are electrically connected to an internal pull-up resistor electrically connected to a +5V power line created on the main control board (a +5V power line created by the +5V power generation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, which is different from the power line created and supplied by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f (i.e., the +5V power line)) inside the main control MPU 1310a, the collector terminal of the transistor may be electrically connected to the input terminals PB1 to PB7 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a without being electrically connected to the other end of the resistor whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power line created on the main control board, i.e., without mounting this resistor on the main control board 1310.

Furthermore, in addition to the input ports PA and PB of the main control MPU 1310a, if the input terminals PC0 to PC7 of the input port PC of the main control MPU 1310a are electrically connected to an internal pull-up resistor electrically connected within the main control MPU 1310a to a +5V power line created on the main control board (a +5V power line created by the +5V power generation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, which is different from the power line created and supplied by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f (i.e., the +5V power line)), the collector terminal of the transistor may be electrically connected to the input terminals PC0 to PC7 of the input port PC of the main control MPU 1310a without being electrically connected to the other end of the resistor whose one end is electrically connected to the +5V power line created on the main control board, i.e., without mounting this resistor on the main control board 1310.

The circuit consisting of resistors MR27 and MR28 and transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR20 is pulled down to ground (GND) (board ground), turning transistor MTR20 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR20 is pulled up to +5V on the main control board, turning transistor MTR20 ON and the switch circuit ON.

When both the +24V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V1pf and the +12V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V2pf are met, a logic HI signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of transistor MTR20, turning transistor MTR20 OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the +5V side on the main control board by resistor MR29, and a logic HI power outage warning signal is input to the input terminal of input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a.

On the other hand, when either the +24V voltage is less than the power outage detection voltage V1pf or the +12V voltage is less than the power outage detection voltage V2pf is met, a logic LOW signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic HI and is input to the base terminal of transistor MTR20, turning transistor MTR20 ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR20 is pulled down to ground (GND) (board ground), and a logic LOW power outage warning signal is input to the input terminal of input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a.

Furthermore, the main control output circuit 1310c, which outputs the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the dispensing control board 633 as a dispensing power outage warning signal, is configured as an open-collector output type as shown in Figure 181, and terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 via resistor MR30. The base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is electrically connected to resistor MR30 and also to the other end of resistor MR31, one end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground). The emitter terminal of the front-stage transistor MTR21 is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), and the collector terminal of the front-stage transistor MTR21 is electrically connected to one end of a resistor MR32, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power line on the main control board, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22 via a resistor MR33. The base terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the resistor MR33 and the other end of a resistor MR34, one end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground). The emitter terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), and the collector terminal of the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor MC26, one end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), and is also electrically connected to the dispensing control board 633 via wiring (harness). Furthermore, when the collector terminal of the subsequent transistor MTR22 is electrically connected to the dispensing control board 633 via wiring (harness), it is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the +12V power line (the power line (i.e., the +12V power line) created and supplied by the +12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the power supply creation circuit 630f) in the dispensing control input circuit 633ab of the dispensing control unit 633a on the dispensing control board 633, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal of a specified input port of the dispensing control MPU 633aa.

The circuit consisting of resistors MR30 and MR31 and the front-stage transistor MTR21 is the front-stage switch circuit, and the circuit consisting of resistors MR33 and MR34 and the rear-stage transistor MTR22 is the rear-stage switch circuit, which is turned ON/OFF by the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is pulled down to ground (GND) (substrate ground), turning transistor MTR21 OFF and the preceding switch circuit OFF. The voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR22 in the following stage, which is the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage, is pulled up to +5V on the main control board side by resistor MR32, turning transistor MTR22 ON and the following switch circuit ON. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR21 is pulled up to +5V on the main control board, turning transistor MTR21 ON and the preceding switch circuit ON. The voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR22 in the following stage, which is the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage, is pulled down to ground (GND) (board ground), turning transistor MTR22 in the following stage OFF and the following switch circuit OFF as well.

When both the +24V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V1pf and the +12V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V2pf are met, a logic HI signal is input to the PR terminal, the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The signal output from the 1Q terminal, the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21, turning the preceding transistor MTR21 OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is pulled up to +5V on the main control board by resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the following transistor MTR22, turning the following transistor MTR22 ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the downstream transistor MTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) (board ground) side on the dispensing control board 633 via the wiring (harness), and a dispensing power outage warning signal with a logic LOW is input to the dispensing control board 633.

On the other hand, when either the +24V voltage is less than the power outage detection voltage V1pf or the +12V voltage is less than the power outage detection voltage V2pf is met, a logic LOW signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22. The signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic HI and is input to the base terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21, turning the preceding transistor MTR21 ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the preceding transistor MTR21 is pulled down to ground (GND) (substrate ground) and applied to the base terminal of the following transistor MTR22, turning the following transistor MTR22 OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the downstream transistor MTR22 is pulled up to +12V by a pull-up resistor in the dispensing control input circuit 633ab of the dispensing control unit 633a on the dispensing control board 633 via wiring (harness), and a dispensing power outage warning signal with a logic HI is input to the dispensing control board 633.

Furthermore, the main control output circuit 1310c, which outputs a signal from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal, is configured as an open-collector output type as shown in FIG. 181. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above and is electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor MTR23 via resistor MR35. The base terminal of transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to resistor MR35 and also to the other end of resistor MR36, one end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground). The emitter terminal of transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), and the collector terminal of transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness), it is electrically connected to one end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to a +12V power line (a power line (i.e., a +12V power line) created and supplied by the +12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the power supply creation circuit 630f) in a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) on the peripheral control board 1510, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the peripheral control unit 1511.

The circuit consisting of resistors MR35 and MR36 and transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit that is turned ON/OFF by the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22.

When the logic of the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR23 is pulled down to ground (GND) (board ground), turning transistor MTR23 OFF and the switch circuit OFF. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from terminal 1Q, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of transistor MTR23 is pulled up to +5V on the main control board, turning transistor MTR23 ON and the switch circuit ON.

When both the condition that the +24V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the +12V voltage is greater than the power outage detection voltage V2pf are met, a signal with a logic HI is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22. The signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, has a logic LOW and is input to the base terminal of transistor MTR23, turning transistor MTR23 OFF. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR23 is pulled up to +12V by a pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of peripheral control unit 4150 on peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness), and a peripheral power outage warning signal with a logic HI is input to peripheral control board 1510.

On the other hand, when either the +24V voltage is less than the power outage detection voltage V1pf or the +12V voltage is less than the power outage detection voltage V2pf is met, a logic LOW signal is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22. The signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of D-type flip-flop MIC22, becomes logic HI and is input to the base terminal of transistor MTR23, turning transistor MTR23 ON. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of transistor MTR23 is pulled down to ground (GND) (board ground) on the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), and a logic LOW peripheral power outage warning signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510.

In this way, the main control input circuit 1310b, which transmits the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the main control MPU 1310a as a power outage warning signal, and the main control output circuit 1310c, which outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power outage warning signal, each have one transistor, and the power outage warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the peripheral power outage warning signal input to the peripheral control board 1510 While the logic of these signals is the same, the main control output circuit 1310c, which outputs the signal from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, to the dispensing control board 633 as a dispensing power outage warning signal, has two transistors, one in the front stage and one in the rear stage, and the logic of the dispensing power outage warning signal is the inverse of the logic of the power outage warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the logic of the peripheral power outage warning signal input to the peripheral control board 1510, and is different from the logic of the power outage warning signal and the logic of the peripheral power outage warning signal.

In addition, the collector terminal of transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to one end of resistor MR29, the other end of which is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line on the main control board side, and is also electrically connected to the input terminal of input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a, while the collector terminal of transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage of the main control output circuit 1310c is electrically connected via wiring (harness) to the other end of a pull-up resistor, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, in the dispensing control input circuit 633ab of the dispensing control unit 633a on the dispensing control board 633, and the collector terminal of transistor MTR23 of the main control output circuit 1310c is electrically connected via wiring (harness) to a pull-up resistor, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power supply line, in the dispensing control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 4150 on the peripheral control board 1510. This is because, between the terminals between the collector terminal of transistor MTR20 of main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal of input port PB of main control MPU 1310a, transistor MTR20 of main control input circuit 1310b and main control MPU 1310a are implemented on the main control board 1310, and therefore power outage warning is given by the logic (ON/OFF signal) of the power outage warning signal using +5V created on the main control board side, which is the control power source of the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, between the boards of the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633, and between the boards of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, power outage warning is given by the logic (ON/OFF signal) of the power outage warning signal using +12V, which is a DC power source higher than +5V, for example, which is the control power source of the main control MPU 1310a, dispensing control MPU 633aa, and peripheral control unit 1511, in order to suppress the effects of noise that enters the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards.

In this way, the power line (i.e., the +12V power line) created and supplied by the +12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the power supply creation circuit 630f in the power supply board 630 is supplied to the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, as described above, as well as the payout control input circuit 633ab of the payout control board 633, the control power supply creation circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510, the +12V driver circuit (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board, the LED constant current drive circuit of each decorative board of the game board 5, the LCD panel power supply creation circuit (not shown) of the performance display device 1600, the LCD panel, backlight, and drive circuit (not shown) of the performance display device 1600, etc. In other words, the +12V power line is supplied to the main control board 1310, as well as the payout control board 633, peripheral control board 1510, subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board of the game board 5, and performance display device 1600, etc. Therefore, even if the main control board 1310 and payout control board 633 that make up the main board are operating normally, for example, an electrical problem due to some reason in the control power supply creation circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 may cause an overcurrent to flow to the control power supply creation circuit (not shown), which may lower the potential of the +12V power line, or an electrical problem due to some reason in the liquid crystal panel power supply creation circuit (not shown) of the performance display device 1600, or the liquid crystal panel, backlight, or drive circuit (not shown) of the performance display device 1600 may cause a power failure of the liquid crystal panel power supply creation circuit (not shown) of the performance display device 1600, An overcurrent may flow to any of the liquid crystal panel, backlight, drive circuit, etc. (not shown), causing the potential of the +12V power line to drop; when the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 is being driven by a +12V driver circuit (not shown) on a subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 (or when the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 is waiting to be driven), an overload or electrical problem for some reason may cause an overcurrent to flow to the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 or the +12V driver circuit (not shown), causing the potential of the +12V power line to drop; or an electrical problem for some reason may cause an overcurrent to flow to the LED constant current drive circuit of the decorative board of the game board 5, causing the potential of the +12V power line to drop. Furthermore, if a leakage current or short circuit occurs due to some kind of electrical problem in the wiring patterns formed on boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the boards subsequent to the peripheral control board 1510, the performance display device 1600, and the decorative boards of the gaming board 5, or in the wiring (harnesses) electrically connecting the boards, the potential of the +12V power line will drop due to overcurrent. In this case, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 outputs a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a, and the main control MPU 1310a will perform the main control side power outage processing in the main control side power on processing described below, and stop the game from progressing.

In addition, the power line (i.e., the +24V power line) created and supplied by the +24V power supply creation circuit 630fc of the power supply creation circuit 630f is supplied, as described above, to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d of the main control board 1310, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, as well as to the dispensing control board 633 (the main control board 1310 is supplied with a +12V power line via the dispensing control board 633), the peripheral control board 1510, and the +24V driver circuit (not shown) on the board subsequent to the peripheral control board 1510. In other words, the +24V power line is supplied not only to the main control board 1310, but also to the payout control board 633, peripheral control board 1510, and subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510, etc., so even if the main control board 1310 and payout control board 633 that make up the main board are operating normally, when the +24V system electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 is being driven by the +24V system driver circuit (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 (or when the +24V system electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 is waiting to be driven), an overload or electrical problem for some reason may cause an overcurrent to flow to the +24V system electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 or the +24V system driver circuit (not shown), causing the potential of the +24V power line to drop. Additionally, if a leakage current or short circuit occurs due to some kind of electrical problem in the wiring patterns formed on the peripheral control board 1510 that supplies the +24V power line, or on boards subsequent to the peripheral control board 1510, or in the wiring (harness) electrically connecting the boards, the potential of the +24V power line will also drop. In this case, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 outputs a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a, which then performs the main control side power outage processing in the main control side power on processing described below, and stops the game from proceeding.

[9-1-4. Overcurrent protection for +12V power line and +24V power line]
[9-1-4a. Overcurrent protection for +12V power line]
Therefore, in this embodiment, as an overcurrent protection for the +12V power line, a +12V fuse (not shown) that can pass current up to the upper limit of the allowable current for the +12V power line peripheral control board is provided in the +12V power line as an overcurrent countermeasure, a +12V fuse (not shown) that can pass current up to the upper limit of the allowable current for the +12V power line peripheral control board is provided in the performance display device 1600 as the main fuse for the performance display device 1600, a +12V fuse (not shown) that can pass current up to the upper limit of the allowable current for the branch first system that branches off from the +12V fuse (not shown) into two systems is provided in the performance display device 1600, and a +12V fuse (not shown) that can pass current up to the upper limit of the allowable current for the branch first system is provided in the performance display device 1600 as the fuse for the branch second system that branches off from the +12V fuse (not shown) into two systems A +12V fuse (not shown) is provided that can pass current up to the upper limit of the allowable current for the +12V power line effect drive board, and a +12V fuse (not shown) is provided on a subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, which can pass current up to the upper limit of the allowable current for the game board side drive motor, and a +12V fuse (not shown) is provided on a subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, which can pass current up to the upper limit of the allowable current for the game board side decorative board, for each decorative board of the game board 5 on which an LED constant current drive circuit is implemented (note that a +12V fuse (not shown) that can pass current up to the upper limit of the allowable current for the game board side decorative board may also be provided for all decorative boards of the game board 5 that are supplied with a +12V power line, regardless of whether or not an LED constant current drive circuit is present). The +12V supplied via a +12V fuse (not shown) as the fuse of the first branch system creates a liquid crystal panel power supply in a liquid crystal panel power supply creation circuit (not shown), and this liquid crystal panel power supply is supplied to the liquid crystal panel, backlight, and drive circuit (not shown) of the performance display device 1600.Therefore, the liquid crystal panel, backlight, and drive circuit (not shown) of the performance display device 1600 are supplied with the liquid crystal panel power supply created from the +12V supplied via a +12V fuse (not shown) as the fuse of the first branch system, and +12V supplied via a +12V fuse (not shown) as the fuse of the second branch system.

In this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and dispensing control board 633 that make up the main board are operating normally, if an electrical problem occurs for some reason in the control power supply generation circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 in the +12V power supply line of the peripheral control board 1510, causing an overcurrent that exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current on the +12V power supply line of the peripheral control board to flow to the control power supply generation circuit (not shown), the +12V fuse (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 will blow. In this way, a +12V fuse (not shown) is provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and the +12V fuse (not shown) is blown in the event of an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the peripheral control board's allowable current for the +12V power line. This prevents a drop in the potential of the +12V power line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and prevents the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 from outputting a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 633aa. This allows the main control MPU 1310a to continue playing without performing the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing described below, and the payout control MPU 633aa to continue paying out game balls (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power off processing in the payout control unit power on processing described below.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and dispensing control board 633 that constitute the main board are operating normally, if an electrical problem occurs for some reason in the LCD panel power supply circuit (not shown) of the performance display device 1600 in the +12V power line of the performance display device 1600, causing an overcurrent that exceeds the allowable current limit of the first branch system to flow to the LCD panel power supply circuit (not shown), the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the fuse of the first branch system of the performance display device 1600, will blow. Furthermore, in this embodiment, if an electrical problem occurs for some reason in the liquid crystal panel, backlight, or drive circuit (not shown) of the performance display device 1600, causing an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the first branch system to flow to the liquid crystal panel power supply creation circuit (not shown) that creates the liquid crystal panel power supply from +12V supplied via the +12V fuse (not shown) as the fuse of the second branch system, the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the fuse of the first branch system of the performance display device 1600, will blow.Furthermore, if an electrical problem occurs for some reason in the liquid crystal panel, backlight, or drive circuit (not shown) of the performance display device 1600, causing an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current of the second branch system to flow to any of the liquid crystal panel, backlight, drive circuit, etc. (not shown) of the performance display device 1600, the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the fuse of the second branch system of the performance display device 1600, will blow. Also, in this embodiment, the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the master fuse of performance display device 1600, has a capacity that is greater than the capacity of either the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the fuse of branch 1 system, or the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the fuse of branch 2 system, and is pre-selected to be smaller than the combined capacity of both. Therefore, even if an overcurrent flows in the +12V power line and blows either the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the fuse of branch 1 system, or the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the fuse of branch 2 system, if an overcurrent still flows in the system of the blown fuse and exceeds the master allowable current upper limit, the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the master fuse, may blow. Furthermore, if the capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the main fuse of the performance display device 1600, is the same as the sum of the capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the fuse of the first branch system, and the capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the fuse of the second branch system, then the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the main fuse, may blow if an overcurrent flows in the +12V power line and blows either the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the fuse of the first branch system, or the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the fuse of the second branch system, and if an overcurrent continues to flow in the system of the blown fuse and exceeds the main allowable current upper limit, the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the main fuse, will blow; or if an overcurrent flows in the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the fuse of the first branch system, or the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the fuse of the second branch system, and blows both fuses, the +12V fuse (not shown), which is the main fuse. In this way, the performance display device 1600 is provided with a +12V fuse (not shown) which is the main fuse of the performance display device 1600, a +12V fuse (not shown) which is the fuse of the first branch system, and a +12V fuse (not shown) which is the fuse of the second branch system, and an overcurrent causes the main fuse (not shown) which is the +12V fuse (not shown) which is the fuse of the first branch system, and the +12V fuse (not shown) which is the fuse of the second branch system to blow out. This suppresses a drop in the potential of the +12V power line, preventing the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 from outputting a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a or payout control MPU 633aa, allowing the main control MPU 1310a to continue playing without performing the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing described below, and the payout control MPU 633aa to continue paying out game balls (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power off processing in the payout control unit power on processing described below.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and payout control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, and the +12V system electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 is being driven by the +12V system driver circuit (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board on the +12V power line of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board (or when the +12V system electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 is waiting to be driven), if an overload or electrical trouble occurs for some reason and an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current for the drive motor on the game board side flows to the +12V system electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 or the +12V system driver circuit (not shown), the fuse provided in the +12V system driver circuit (not shown) will blow. The +12V supplied via a +12V fuse (not shown) on the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to the +12V driver circuit (not shown) as well as to each decorative board on the game board 5. Therefore, the capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown) is selected in advance based on the maximum allowable current for the game board drive motor of the +12V driver circuit (not shown) and the maximum allowable current for each decorative board on the game board 5.

The +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the gaming board 5 requires a considerable amount of current to operate, so of the effects produced by the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the gaming board 5 and the light-emitting effects of the various LEDs on each decorative board of the gaming board 5, the light-emitting effects of the various LEDs on each decorative board of the gaming board 5 are given priority over and continue to be given priority over the effects produced by the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the gaming board 5. For this reason, the capacities of the +12V fuses (not shown) of each decorative board of the gaming board 5 and the fuses (not shown) of the +12V driver circuits of the subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510 are pre-selected so that the fuses in the +12V driver circuits (not shown) of the subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510 blow before the +12V fuses (not shown) of each decorative board of the gaming board 5 blow. The capacities of the +12V fuses (not shown) of the subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510 are also pre-set so that the illumination effects of the various LEDs on each decorative board of the gaming board 5 can be given priority over effects produced by the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the gaming board 5.

In cases where the lighting effects of the various LEDs on each decorative board of the gaming board 5 are given priority over the effects of the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the gaming board 5, for example, the capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown) on the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 is greater than the capacity selected for each decorative board of the gaming board 5 to use up to the maximum allowable current limit of the decorative board on the gaming board side, and is smaller than the sum of this selected capacity and the capacity of the fuse provided in the +12V driver circuit (not shown). If selected in advance, the +12V fuse (not shown) may blow if, when each decorative board on the game board 5 is using up to the maximum allowable current limit for the game board decorative board, an overcurrent exceeding the maximum allowable current limit for the game board drive motor flows to the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 or the +12V driver circuit (not shown), causing the fuse in the +12V driver circuit (not shown) to blow, and if an overcurrent still flows and exceeds the maximum allowable current limit for the +12V power line performance drive board, the fuse may blow. Also, for example, if the capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 is pre-selected to be equal to the capacity selected for each decorative board of the game board 5 to use up to the game board decorative board's allowable current limit plus the capacity of the fuse provided in the +12V driver circuit (not shown), the +12V fuse (not shown) may blow if an overcurrent exceeding the game board drive motor's allowable current limit flows to the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 or the +12V driver circuit (not shown) when each decorative board of the game board 5 is using up to its allowable current limit for the game board decorative board, even if the fuse provided in the +12V driver circuit (not shown) blows. If an overcurrent continues to flow and exceeds the +12V power line effect drive board's allowable current limit, the +12V fuse may blow.

In addition, when the effects produced by the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the gaming board 5 and the various LED light-emitting effects produced by each decorative board of the gaming board 5 are prioritized over the effects produced by the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the gaming board 5, and vice versa, when the effects produced by the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the gaming board 5 are prioritized over the light-emitting effects produced by each LED of each decorative board of the gaming board 5, the fuse provided in the +12V driver circuit (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 will blow. The capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown) of each decorative board of the gaming board 5 and the capacity of the fuse provided in the +12V driver circuit (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 are selected in advance so that the +12V fuse (not shown) of each decorative board of the gaming board 5 blows first, and the capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 is set in advance so that the effects produced by the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the gaming board 5 can be given priority over the light-emitting effects of the various LEDs produced by each decorative board of the gaming board 5.

Furthermore, if an overload or electrical trouble occurs for some reason on the 12V power line of the board subsequent to the peripheral control board 1510, causing an overcurrent to flow through the 12V power line of the board subsequent to the peripheral control board 1510 and stopping both the effects produced by the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the gaming board 5 and the various LED light-up effects produced by each decorative board on the gaming board 5, the capacity of the +12V fuse (not shown) of the board subsequent to the peripheral control board 1510 will be pre-set to be equal to or less than the smaller of the fuse capacity of the fuse provided in the +12V driver circuit (not shown) of the board subsequent to the peripheral control board 1510 and the +12V fuse (not shown) of each decorative board on the gaming board 5.

In this way, by providing a +12V fuse (not shown) on the board subsequent to the peripheral control board 1510 and a fuse in the +12V driver circuit (not shown), an overcurrent will cause the +12V fuse (not shown) and the fuse in the +12V driver circuit (not shown) to blow. This prevents a drop in the potential of the +12V power line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and prevents the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 from outputting a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 633aa. This allows the main control MPU 1310a to continue playing without performing the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing described below, and the payout control MPU 633aa to continue paying out game balls (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power off processing in the payout control unit power on processing described below.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and payout control board 633 that constitute the main board are operating normally, if an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current for the decorative board on the gaming board side flows through the +12V power line of each decorative board on the gaming board 5 due to the +12V fuse (not shown) of the decorative board on which the LED constant current drive circuit is implemented, the +12V fuse (not shown) of the decorative board on the gaming board 5 will blow. In addition, if a +12V fuse (not shown) is provided that can pass current up to the maximum allowable current limit for the decorative board on the game board side to all decorative boards on the game board 5 that are supplied with a +12V power line regardless of whether an LED constant current drive circuit is present or not, if an overcurrent that exceeds the maximum allowable current limit for the decorative board on the game board side flows through each LED on the game board 5 or all decorative boards on the game board 5, the +12V fuse (not shown) for all decorative boards on the game board 5 will melt. In this way, a +12V fuse (not shown) is provided on the decorative board on which the LED constant current drive circuit is mounted among the decorative boards of the game board 5, and the +12V fuse (not shown) is blown by an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current on the decorative board on the game board side (note that, regardless of whether or not there is an LED constant current drive circuit, if a +12V fuse (not shown) that can pass current up to the upper limit of the allowable current on the decorative board on the game board side is provided on all decorative boards of the game board 5 to which a +12V power line is supplied, the +12V fuse (not shown) is provided on all decorative boards of the game board 5, and the +12V fuse (not shown) is blown by an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current on the decorative board on the game board side This prevents a drop in the potential of the +12V power line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 does not output a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a or payout control MPU 633aa.The main control MPU 1310a can continue playing without performing the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing described below, and the payout control MPU 633aa can continue paying out game balls (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power off processing in the payout control unit power on processing described below.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and payout control board 633 that make up the main board are operating normally, if an electrical problem occurs for some reason in the +12V power lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510, the performance display device 1600, the decorative boards of the gaming board 5, etc., causing a leakage current or a short circuit, and causing an overcurrent to flow in the peripheral control board 1510, the subsequent boards of the peripheral control board 1510, the performance display device 1600, the decorative boards of the gaming board 5, etc., the + Since the 12V fuses are designed to blow, a drop in the potential of the +12V power line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is suppressed, and the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 does not output a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 633aa.As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can continue playing the game without performing the main control side power-off processing in the main control side power-on processing described below, and the payout control MPU 633aa can continue the payout process (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power-off processing in the payout control unit power-on processing described below. Furthermore, if an electrical problem occurs for some reason in a board subsequent to the peripheral control board 1510, causing a leakage current or a short circuit, an overcurrent will flow in the board subsequent to the peripheral control board 1510, and an overcurrent will also flow in the peripheral control board 1510, which is the upper board of the board subsequent to the peripheral control board 1510, causing the +12V fuse (not shown) provided on the peripheral control board 1510 to blow.

In this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and dispensing control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, if an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current for the door frame drive motor flows to the +12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the door frame 3 or the +12V driver circuit of the door frame 3 due to an overload or electrical problem for some reason in the +12V power line of each drive board of the door frame 3 while the +12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the door frame 3 is being driven by the +12V driver circuit of each drive board of the door frame 3 (or while the +12V electric drive source (drive motor) of the door frame 3 is waiting to be driven), the fuse provided in the +12V driver circuit will blow. The capacity of the +12V fuse of each drive board of the door frame 3 is selected in advance based on the upper limit of the allowable current for the door frame drive motor of the +12V driver circuit of each drive board of the door frame 3. The +12V fuses on each drive board of the door frame 3 are designed to blow if an overcurrent that exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current for the door frame side drive motor flows to the +12V system electric drive source (drive motor) or +12V system driver circuit of each drive board of the door frame 3, causing the fuse in the +12V system driver circuit to blow, but if an overcurrent continues to flow and exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current for the door frame side +12V power supply line drive board, the fuse will blow. In this way, a +12V fuse is provided on each drive board of the door frame 3, and a fuse is provided in the +12V driver circuit so that the +12V fuse and the fuse in the +12V driver circuit will blow in the event of an overcurrent. This prevents a drop in the potential of the +12V power line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and prevents the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 from outputting a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 633aa. This allows the main control MPU 1310a to continue playing without performing the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing described below, and the payout control MPU 633aa to continue paying out game balls (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power off processing in the payout control unit power on processing described below.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and dispensing control board 633 that constitute the main board are operating normally, if an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current for the decorative board on the door frame 3 flows through the +12V power line of each decorative board on the door frame 3 due to the +12V fuse of the decorative board on the door frame 3 that is equipped with an LED constant current drive circuit, the +12V fuse of the decorative board on the door frame 3 will blow. Note that if +12V fuses that can pass current up to the upper limit of the allowable current for the decorative board on the door frame 3 are provided for all decorative boards on the door frame 3 that are supplied with a +12V power line, regardless of whether an LED constant current drive circuit is installed, the +12V fuses of all decorative boards on the door frame 3 will blow if an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current for the decorative board on the door frame 3 flows through the LEDs on the door frame 3 or all decorative boards on the door frame 3. In this way, a +12V fuse is provided on the decorative board on the door frame 3 that has an LED constant current drive circuit mounted thereon, and the +12V fuse is blown by an overcurrent that exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current for the decorative board on the door frame side (note that, regardless of whether an LED constant current drive circuit is present or not, if a +12V fuse that can pass current up to the upper limit of the allowable current for the decorative board on the game board side is provided for all decorative boards on the door frame 3 that are supplied with a +12V power line, the +12V fuse is provided on all decorative boards on the door frame 3, and the +12V fuse is blown by an overcurrent that exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current for the decorative board on the door frame side. ), a drop in the potential of the +12V power line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is suppressed, and the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 does not output a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a or payout control MPU 633aa. This means that the main control MPU 1310a can continue playing without performing the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing described below, and the payout control MPU 633aa can continue paying out game balls (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power off processing in the payout control unit power on processing described below.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and dispensing control board 633 that make up the main board are operating normally, if an electrical problem occurs for some reason in the +12V power lines of each drive board of the door frame 3, each decorative board of the door frame 3, etc., causing a leakage current or a short circuit in each drive board of the door frame 3, each decorative board of the door frame 3, etc., and an overcurrent flows in each drive board of the door frame 3, each decorative board of the door frame 3, etc., the +12V fuse provided on each board will blow, thereby causing the main control board 1310, dispensing control board 6 By suppressing a drop in the potential of the +12V power line supplied to MPU 633aa, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 does not output a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a or payout control MPU 633aa, and the main control MPU 1310a can continue playing without performing the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing described below, and the payout control MPU 633aa can continue paying out game balls (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power off processing in the payout control unit power on processing described below.

[9-1-4b. Overcurrent protection for +24V power line]
In addition, in this embodiment, as an overcurrent protection for the +24V power line, as an overcurrent countermeasure, a +24V fuse (not shown) is provided in the peripheral control board 1510, which is capable of passing current up to the maximum allowable current limit for the +24V power line peripheral control board, a +12V fuse (not shown) is provided in the performance display device 1600 as the master fuse for the performance display device 1600, which is capable of passing current up to the maximum allowable current limit for the master fuse, a +24V fuse (not shown) is provided in the succeeding board of the peripheral control board 1510, which is capable of passing current up to the maximum allowable current limit for the +24V power line performance drive board, and a fuse is provided in the +24V driver circuit (not shown) in the succeeding board of the peripheral control board 1510, which is capable of passing current up to the maximum allowable current limit for the game board side drive solenoid.

In this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and dispensing control board 633 that make up the main board are operating normally, if an electrical problem occurs for some reason in the peripheral control board 1510 itself and/or any subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510, causing an overcurrent that exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current in the +24V power line of the peripheral control board to flow in the +12V power line of the peripheral control board 1510, the +24V fuse (not shown) in the peripheral control board 1510 will blow. In this way, a +24V fuse (not shown) is provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and the +24V fuse (not shown) is blown in the event of an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the peripheral control board's allowable current for the +24V power line. This prevents a drop in the potential of the +24V power line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and prevents the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 from outputting a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 633aa. This allows the main control MPU 1310a to continue playing without performing the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing described below, and the payout control MPU 633aa to continue paying out game balls (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power off processing in the payout control unit power on processing described below.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and payout control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, and the +24V system electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 is being driven by the +24V system driver circuit (not shown) of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 on the +24V power line of the subsequent board of the peripheral control board 1510 (or when the +24V system electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 is waiting to be driven), if an overload or electrical trouble occurs for some reason and an overcurrent exceeding the upper limit of the allowable current for the drive solenoid on the game board side flows to the +24V system electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the game board 5 or the +24V system driver circuit (not shown), the fuse provided in the +24V system driver circuit (not shown) will blow. The +24V fuse (not shown) is designed to blow if an overcurrent continues to flow and exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current of the +24V power line production drive board, even if the fuse provided in the +24V driver circuit (not shown) blows. In this way, by providing a +24V fuse (not shown) on the board subsequent to the peripheral control board 1510 and providing a fuse in the +24V driver circuit (not shown), the +24V fuse (not shown) and the fuse in the +24V driver circuit (not shown) are blown in the event of an overcurrent. This prevents a drop in the potential of the +24V power line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and prevents the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 from outputting a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 633aa. This allows the main control MPU 1310a to continue playing without performing the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing described below, and the payout control MPU 633aa to continue paying out game balls (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power off processing in the payout control unit power on processing described below.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and dispensing control board 633 that make up the main board are operating normally, if an electrical problem occurs for some reason in the +24V power line of the peripheral control board 1510, the boards subsequent to the peripheral control board 1510, etc., causing a leakage current or a short circuit, and an overcurrent flows in the peripheral control board 1510, the boards subsequent to the peripheral control board 1510, etc., the +24V fuse (not shown) provided on each board will blow, thereby blowing the power to the main control board. By suppressing a drop in the potential of the +24V power line supplied to the board 1310 and payout control board 633, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 does not output a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a or payout control MPU 633aa, allowing the main control MPU 1310a to continue playing without performing the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing described below, and the payout control MPU 633aa to continue paying out game balls (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power off processing in the payout control unit power on processing described below.

In this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and dispensing control board 633 constituting the main board are operating normally, and the +24V electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the door frame 3 is being driven by the +24V driver circuit of each drive board of the door frame 3 (or while the +24V electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the door frame 3 is waiting to be driven), if an overload or electrical problem occurs for some reason, causing an overcurrent exceeding the allowable current limit for the door frame side drive solenoid to flow to the +24V electrical drive source (drive solenoid) of the door frame 3 or the +24V driver circuit, the fuse provided in the +24V driver circuit will blow. The capacity of the +24V fuse of each drive board of the door frame 3 is pre-selected based on the allowable current limit for the door frame side drive solenoid of the +24V driver circuit of each drive board of the door frame 3. The +24V fuses on each drive board of the door frame 3 are designed to blow if an overcurrent that exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current for the door frame side drive solenoid flows to the +24V system electric drive source (drive solenoid) or +24V system driver circuit of each drive board of the door frame 3, causing the fuses in the +24V system driver circuit to blow, but if an overcurrent continues to flow and exceeds the upper limit of the allowable current for the door frame side +24V power supply line drive board, the fuses in the +24V system driver circuit will blow. In this way, a +24V fuse is provided on each drive board of the door frame 3, and a fuse is provided in the +24V driver circuit so that the +24V fuse and the fuse in the +24V driver circuit will blow in the event of an overcurrent. This prevents a drop in the potential of the +24V power line supplied to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and prevents the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 from outputting a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a or the payout control MPU 633aa. This allows the main control MPU 1310a to continue playing without performing the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing described below, and the payout control MPU 633aa to continue paying out game balls (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power off processing in the payout control unit power on processing described below.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and dispensing control board 633 that make up the main board are operating normally, if an electrical problem occurs for some reason in the +24V power lines of each drive board, etc. of the door frame 3, causing a leakage current or a short circuit, and an overcurrent flows in each drive board, etc. of the door frame 3, the +24V fuses provided on each board will blow, thereby blowing out the +24V power lines supplied to the main control board 1310 and dispensing control board 633. By suppressing the drop in the input potential, the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 does not output a power outage warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a or payout control MPU 633aa, allowing the main control MPU 1310a to continue playing without performing the main control side power off processing in the main control side power on processing described below, and the payout control MPU 633aa to continue paying out (the operation of paying out game balls as prize balls) without performing the payout control unit power off processing in the payout control unit power on processing described below.

[9-2. Circuit of the dispensing control board]
Of the power supplies in the circuits of the dispensing control board 633, the control power supply for the microprocessor, the dispensing control MPU 633aa, is supplied with +5V from the +5V power supply generation circuit 630fa of the power supply generation circuit 630f of the power supply board 630, and the backup power supply supplied to the dispensing control built-in RAM of the dispensing control MPU 633aa is supplied as dispensing VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630.

As shown in Figure 182, the +5V from the +5V power supply generating circuit 630fa of the power supply generating circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 is first input to the payout control filter circuit 633h. This payout control filter circuit 633h is primarily composed of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. This payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit that is magnetically shielded with ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. The +5V from the +5V power supply generating circuit 630fa of the power supply generating circuit 630f on the power supply board 630 is applied to terminal 1 of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0, its terminal 2 is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), and +5V with noise components removed is output from terminal 3. The +5V applied to terminal 1 is electrically connected to one end of capacitor PC0, the other end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), thereby first removing ripple (AC components superimposed on the voltage) and smoothing the voltage.

The +5V output from terminal 3 is electrically connected to the other end of capacitor PC1 and electrolytic capacitor PC2 (capacitance: 180 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment), which are electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), thereby further removing ripple and smoothing the voltage. This smoothed +5V is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa. In addition, if a momentary power outage occurs and the power from the gaming hall is cut off, the charge stored in electrolytic capacitor PC2 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa, for a period of approximately 7 milliseconds (ms) after the momentary power outage. Furthermore, because the power consumption of the main control MPU 1310a provided on the main control board 1310 is greater than the power consumption of the payout control MPU 633aa provided on the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633, the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control board 1310 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF)) is selected to be greater than the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor PC2 of the payout control board 633 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 180 microfarads (μF)). As a result, in the event of a momentary power outage and power cutoff from the gaming hall, the charges stored in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control board 1310 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 of the payout control board 633 are applied as +5V to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, respectively, for a period of approximately 7 milliseconds (ms) after the momentary power outage.

The VDD terminal of the dispensing control MPU 633aa is electrically connected to one end of capacitor PC3, the other end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), and is also electrically connected to the anode terminal of diode PD0. The +5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed and ripples are further removed by capacitor PC3. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the dispensing control MPU 633aa, is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground).

The VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal for the dispensing control built-in RAM of the dispensing control MPU 633aa, is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of diode PD0. The VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal for the dispensing control built-in RAM of the dispensing control MPU 633aa, is electrically connected to one end of capacitor PC4, the other end of which is electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground), and is also electrically connected to the positive terminal of capacitor BC1 of the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 via resistor PR0. As a result, while the VBB terminal, which is the power supply terminal for the dispensing control built-in RAM of the dispensing control MPU 633aa, is supplied with VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 via resistor PR0, diode PD0 prevents VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 from being supplied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal for the dispensing control MPU 633aa, via resistor PR0.

Among the input signals to the circuit of the dispensing control board 633, for example, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the detection signal from the bulb out detection sensor 574, the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591, and the signal from the RWM switch 633d provided on the dispensing control board 633 are each input to the dispensing control input circuit 633ab.

The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the detection signal from the bulb out detection sensor 574, the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591, and the signal from the RWM switch 633d are each input via the dispensing control input circuit 633ab to input terminals PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) to PA4 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 633aa. This input port PA is composed of 8 bits.

The power outage warning signal, which is a power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, is input to input terminal PB0 of input port PB of the dispensing control MPU 633aa via the dispensing control input circuit 633ab. Input ports PA and PB are composed of 8 bits. In addition, detection signals from other sensors are input to specified input terminals of input ports PA and PB via the dispensing control input circuit 633ab, and input terminals that become unused terminals are electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground) as an unused terminal processing.

[9-2-1. Payout control input circuit]
Next, the dispensing control input circuit 633ab will be described. Since the dispensing control input circuit 633ab is the same circuit, here, the dispensing control input circuit 633ab to which a signal from the RWM switch 633d provided on the dispensing control board 633 is input, and the dispensing control input circuit 633ab to which a dispensing power outage warning signal, which is a power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, is input will be described.

First, the RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633 functions as a RAM clear switch (RAM clear button) that can clear (erase) various information (game information) stored (memorized) in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa on the payout control board 633 and the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a on the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on; it also functions as a setting switch button that can select and switch setting values for a predetermined period of time after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on; and it also functions as an error reset button that can reset an error that is notified after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

[9-2-1a. Signal from RWM switch]
The RWM switch 633d provided on the dispensing control board 633 has terminals 1 to 4, with terminals 1 and 2 electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the dispensing control board 633, and terminals 3 and 4 electrically connected. When the pressing operation part of the RWM switch 633d is not pressed, terminals 1 and 2 and terminals 3 and 4 are not electrically connected in the internal circuit, whereas when the pressing operation part of the RWM switch 633d is pressed, terminals 1 and 2 and terminals 3 and 4 are electrically connected in the internal circuit, and the internal circuits of terminals 1 and 2 and terminals 3 and 4 are conductive and electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the dispensing control board 633.

When the pressing operation part of the RWM switch 633d is not pressed, the signal from the RWM switch 633d does not electrically connect terminals 1 and 2 to terminals 3 and 4 in the internal circuit, whereas when the pressing operation part of the RWM switch 633d is pressed, the internal circuit between terminals 1 and 2 and terminals 3 and 4 is conductive and electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the dispensing control board 633.

As shown in FIG. 182, the dispensing control input circuit 633ab, which receives a signal from the RWM switch 633d, is electrically connected to one end of a resistor PR50, which is electrically connected to the power line (i.e., the +5V power line) generated and supplied by the +5V power supply generating circuit 630fa of the power supply generating circuit 630f, and to the other end of a capacitor PC50, which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the dispensing control board 633, and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of a transistor PTR50 via a resistor PR51. The base terminal of transistor PTR50 is electrically connected to the resistor PR51 and to the other end of a resistor PR52, which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the dispensing control board 633. The emitter terminal of transistor PTR50 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the dispensing control board 633. The collector terminal of transistor PTR50 is electrically connected to one end of resistor PR53, the other end of which is electrically connected to a power line (i.e., the +5V power line) created and supplied by the +5V power supply circuit 630fa of the power supply circuit 630f, and is also electrically connected to input terminal PA4 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 633aa. A signal from the RWM switch 633d provided on the dispensing control board 633 is input as RWM signal 2 to input terminal PA4 of the input port PA of the dispensing control MPU 633aa via the dispensing control input circuit 633ab.

The other end of resistor PR50 and the other end of capacitor PC50 are electrically connected to one end of resistor PR51 (opposite the other end of resistor PR51 electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR50) and are also electrically connected to the payout control output circuit 633ac. The payout control output circuit 633ac is composed of resistors PR60, PR61, and transistor PTR60. The other end of resistor PR50 and the other end of capacitor PC50 are electrically connected to one end of resistor PR51 (opposite the other end of resistor PR51 electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR50) and are also electrically connected to the base terminal of transistor PTR60 via resistor PR60. The base terminal of transistor PTR60 is electrically connected to resistor PR60 and the other end of resistor PR61, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the payout control board 633. The emitter terminal of transistor PTR60 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the dispensing control board 633. The collector terminal of transistor PTR60 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness) and is electrically connected to the main control input circuit 1310b shown in FIG. 179 (one end of resistor MR2 is electrically connected to the +12V power line (the other end of resistor MR2 is electrically connected to the power line (i.e., the +12V power line) created and supplied by the +12V power supply creation circuit 630fb of the power supply creation circuit 630f). The signal output from the collector terminal of transistor PTR60 in the dispensing control output circuit 633ac of the dispensing control board 633 is input to the main control board 1310 via wiring (harness) as a main RWM signal.

[9-2-1b. Power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit]
The dispensing control input circuit 633ab, to which a dispensing power failure warning signal, which is a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, is input, as shown in FIG. 182, is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR40, one end of which is electrically connected to the +12V power line (the power line (i.e., the +12V power line) created and supplied by the +12V power supply creating circuit 630fb of the power supply creating circuit 630f), and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 via a resistor PR41. In addition to the resistor PR41, the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of a resistor PR42, one end of which is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the dispensing control board 633. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the dispensing control board 633. The terminal is electrically connected to one end of a resistor PR43 electrically connected to the power line (i.e., the +5V power line) generated and supplied by the +5V power generation circuit 630fa of the power generation circuit 630f, and to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the dispensing control MPU 633aa. The dispensing power failure warning signal, which is a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310, is input to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the dispensing control MPU 633aa via the dispensing control input circuit 633ab as power failure warning signal 2. The other end of the resistor PR40 may be electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310 in order to adjust the waveform of the dispensing power failure warning signal, which is a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310.

[10. Main control board box]
Next, the main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game will be described with reference to Fig. 183. Here, an example will be described in which the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the setting change board 1311 described above is mounted on the main control board 1310, and only the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320. Fig. 183 (a) is a perspective view of the main control board box showing the state before the main control board is attached to the cover body and the base body is slid to cover the opening side of the cover body, and (b) is a perspective view of the main control board box with the cover body and base body sealed by a sealing mechanism.

In pachinko machine 1, main control board 1310 is an important board that controls the progress of the game. For this reason, it is necessary to protect main control board 1310 from those who may tamper with it in order to obtain illegal game balls. Therefore, main control board 1310 is housed in main control board box 1320, which is composed of transparent cover body 1301 and transparent base body 1302, and cover body 1301 and base body 1302 are crimped together with crimping section 1303, which serves as a sealing mechanism, for example, a one-way screw.

This crimping portion 1303 is a sealing mechanism, and multiple crimping portions are provided. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by crimping the cover body 1301 and base body 1302 using one sealing mechanism with a one-way screw or the like on the crimping portion 1303. Next, in order to open the main control board box 1320, the sealing mechanism must be destroyed. In other words, the cover body 1301 cannot be removed from the base body 1302 unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed.

As described above, the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are made of polycarbonate resin and are molded transparent. The internal space formed by the cover body 1301 and the base body can accommodate the main control board 1310. Because the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are molded transparently from polycarbonate resin, the condition of the mounting surface (front surface) and solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310 (whether or not tampering has occurred or whether or not a tampered IC is installed) can be confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320. Furthermore, the main control board box 1320 is equipped with multiple sealing mechanisms corresponding to the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302, respectively. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism must be destroyed to open the main control board box 1320, leaving traces of the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by checking the traces of opening and closing, unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be detected, providing a strong deterrent against unauthorized acts on the main control board 1310.

To briefly explain how to assemble the main control board box 1320, as shown in Figure 183(a), the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board 1310 is placed facing (facing) the bottom surface of the cover body 1301, with the various connectors MCN1 to MCN8 and portions of the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board 1310 exposed from the corresponding openings formed in the cover body 1301. Next, the main control board 1310 can be fixed in the interior space of the cover body 1301 by inserting fixing screws from the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board into the through holes formed in the four corners of the main control board 1310 and screwing them into the mounting boss holes formed in the four inner corners of the cover body 1301. Next, the base body 1302 is positioned in a predetermined position so as to substantially block the opening of the cover body 1301. The base body 1302 is then slid (movement distance sd) along the longitudinal direction of the cover body 1301 in a specific direction (the direction of the arrow in the figure) until the outer peripheral surface of the base body 1302 fits within the inner peripheral surface of the cover body 1301, completely blocking the opening of the cover body 1301 and accommodating the main control board 1310 in the space formed by the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302. Next, the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are fastened together using a one-way screw or the like at the crimping portion 1303, thereby fixing the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 together and sealing the main control board box 1320 (i.e., the main control board box 1320 can be closed).

The inner wall of the cover body 1301 is formed with a plurality of cover body side ribs 1301rb spaced a predetermined distance apart. These ribs can come into contact with the outer periphery of the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board 1310 when the main control board 1310 is attached to the bottom surface of the cover body 1301. The base body 1302 is also formed with a plurality of base body side ribs 1302rb spaced a predetermined distance apart. These ribs can come into contact with the outer periphery of the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310. When the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320, the main control board 1310 is positioned (sandwiched) in the gap (space) formed by the plurality of cover body side ribs 1301rb formed on the cover body 1301 and the plurality of base body side ribs 1302rb formed on the base body 1302.

The base body 1302 also has a protrusion 1302p formed thereon that can come into contact with the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board 1310. When a setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1311a, the force of the insertion causes the main control board 1310 to bend and warp. By coming into contact with the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310, this prevents the main control board 1310 from bending and warping any further, thereby preventing breaks in the wiring pattern formed on the main control board 1310 and peeling of the solder.

[11. Setting key switch]
Next, the setting key switch 1311a will be described with reference to Fig. 184. Fig. 184(a) is a perspective view of the setting key switch as seen from the diagonal front right, Fig. 184(b) is a perspective view of the setting key switch as seen from the diagonal front left, and Fig. 184(c) is a top view of the setting key switch. Here, an example will be described in which the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the setting change board 1311 described above is mounted on the main control board 1310.

The setting key switch 1311a comes in two types: one in which a resin setting key cylinder is housed inside a resin outer tube, into which a setting key is inserted and turned (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "resin type setting key switch 1311a"), and one in which a metal setting key cylinder is housed inside a metal cylindrical outer tube, into which a setting key is inserted and turned (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a "metal type setting key switch 1311a"). The resin type setting key switch 1311a and the metal type setting key switch 1311a have the same structure, but are made of some different materials.

[11-1. Resin type setting key switch]
As shown in Figures 184(a) and (b), the resin type setting key switch 1311a is composed of a cylindrical outer tube 1311aa made of non-conductive resin, a setting key cylinder 1311ab made of non-conductive resin into which a setting key is inserted and turned, a rectangular parallelepiped base body 1311ac made of non-conductive resin that is connected to the outer tube 1311aa and in which a circuit is formed that turns a contact point on or off by turning the setting key cylinder 1311ab, and a metal frame plate 1311ad that has a hole penetrating the outer tube 1311aa at a position corresponding to the outer tube 1311aa, is bent so as to cover the surface and side of the base body 1311ac, and has a pair of protruding pieces 1311ada, 1311ada formed on both side surfaces (front and rear surfaces in the figure) that protrude rearward from the base body 1311ac.

The front surface of the outer cylinder 1311aa is arranged substantially flush with the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab. A socket 1311aba for inserting a metal setting key is provided on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab. As shown in Figure 184(c), when the rotation position of the setting key cylinder 1311ab is in the insertion/removal reference position 1311aaa formed on the outer cylinder 1311aa (i.e., when the setting key is ready to be inserted into the socket 1311aba formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a (i.e., when the length of the rectangular socket 1311aba is aligned vertically)), the metal setting key can be inserted into and removed from the socket 1311aba. The base body 1311ac has two brass lead terminals formed on both sides (the right and left sides in the figure) at a predetermined distance from the side surfaces rotated 90 degrees from a pair of protruding pieces 1311ada, 1311ada formed on the frame plate 1311ad.

In the figure, the COM1 terminal, which is the upper lead terminal on the left side, and the COM2 terminal, which is the lower lead terminal on the left side, are common terminals, and either one or both terminals can be used. When the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated to the insertion/removal reference position 1311aaa formed on the outer cylinder 1311aa, the A terminal, which is the upper lead terminal on the right side, and the B terminal, which is the lower lead terminal on the right side, are electrically connected to the COM1 and COM2 terminals and the A terminal for conduction by a circuit formed on the base body 1311ac, and the COM1 and COM2 terminals and the B terminal for electrical disconnection (thereby, the setting key of the setting key switch 1311a (An ON signal is transmitted from the setting key switch 1311a.) Meanwhile, when the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated 60 degrees from the insertion/removal reference position 1311aaa formed on the outer cylinder 1311aa, the circuit formed on the base body 1311ac electrically disconnects the COM1 and COM2 terminals from the A terminal, and electrically connects the COM1 and COM2 terminals to the B terminal, establishing conduction (thereby transmitting an ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a). Note that the distance between the COM1 and COM2 terminals is the same as the distance between the A and B terminals.

A pair of protruding pieces 1311ada, 1311ada extending from the metal frame plate 1311ad to the rear of the base body 1311ac are soldered to the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310, thereby securing the setting key switch 1311a to the main control board 1310. The A terminal, B terminal, COM1 terminal, and COM2 terminal of the base body 1311ac are soldered to the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310. A cylindrical protrusion (not shown) is formed on the back surface of the base body 1311ac to specify the orientation of the setting key switch 1311a so that when the setting key switch 1311a is mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board 1310, the insertion/removal reference position 1311aaa faces upward as shown in the figure. This cylindrical protrusion prevents the setting key switch 1311a from being soldered upside down (by mistake) when a worker at the manufacturer mounts the setting key switch 1311a on the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board 1310.

When a metal setting key is inserted into the socket 1311aba formed on the front of the setting key cylinder 1311ab, even if electromagnetic noise enters through this metal setting key, as described above, the resin-type setting key switch 1311a has an outer cylinder 1311aa, setting key cylinder 1311ab, and base body 1311ac molded from non-conductive resin, so there is no effect on the A terminal, B terminal, COM1 terminal, and COM2 terminal.

[11-2. Metal type setting key switch]
Next, the metal-type setting key switch 1311a has the same configuration as the resin-type setting key switch 1311a described above, with the exception that the metal-type setting key switch 1311a is made of different materials, including a cylindrical metal outer tube 1311aa and a metal setting key cylinder 1311ab into which a setting key is inserted and rotated. The outer tube 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab are molded from metal, and the outer tube 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab are electrically connected. The outer tube 1311aa is connected to a non-conductive resin base body 1311ac, and a metal frame plate 1311ad has holes penetrating the outer tube 1311aa at positions corresponding to the outer tube 1311aa, covering the surface and sides of the base body 1311ac. In other words, when a metal setting key is inserted into the socket 1311aba formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab, if electromagnetic noise enters through this metal setting key, there is a risk that the electromagnetic noise will enter the metal frame plate 1311ad, since, as described above, the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab are electrically connected.

[11-3. Relationship between the setting key switch and the cover of the main control board box]
Here, the relationship between the setting key switch 1311a and the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 will be described with reference to Fig. 185. Fig. 185 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the setting key switch and the cover body of the main control board box.

As mentioned above, the front of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a has an insertion port 1311aba for inserting a metal setting key. When the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320, the front surface of the setting key switch 1311a (i.e., the front surface of the outer tube 1311aa and the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab) is exposed from the cover body 1301 of the main control board box, so that, as shown in FIG. 185, the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 is formed with a tubular rib portion 1301za (the thickness of the tubular rib portion 1301za is the same as the thickness of the cover body 1301) having a predetermined distance dimension toward the main control board 1310 along the inner circumference of a through hole 1301z having a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the setting key cylinder 1311ab (for example, a diameter 2 mm larger than the outer diameter of the setting key cylinder 1311ab) at a position corresponding to the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a. The inner periphery of the through hole 1301z and the inner periphery of the tubular rib portion 1301za are connected to form the same inner circumferential surface without any steps. This means that the front surface of the setting key switch 1311a (i.e., the front surface of the outer cylinder 1311aa and the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab) and the surface (front surface) of the main control board box cover body 1301 are arranged on the same plane (flush).

Because through-hole 1301z is also the area where the fingers or fists of someone accessing setting key switch 1311a come into contact, rib portion 1301za is designed to increase the strength of the area around through-hole 1301z. This prevents a person from pushing around the area of through-hole 1301z with force, bending the area around through-hole 1301z and widening the gap between through-hole 1301z and setting key cylinder 1311ab, or damaging the area around through-hole 1301z and increasing the outer diameter of through-hole 1301z, widening the gap between through-hole 1301z and setting key cylinder 1311ab. Therefore, even if a person attempting to illegally access setting key switch 1311a intentionally pushes their finger or fist around through-hole 1301z, this helps prevent the insertion of a thin, unauthorized tool such as a wire into the gap between through-hole 1301z and setting key cylinder 1311ab.

The diameter of the through-hole 1301z is designed to fit within the rectangular surface shape of the rectangular base body 1311ac of the setting key switch 1311a. The end of the rib portion 1301za is separated from the surface of the metal frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a by a distance d1 (approximately 2 mm in this embodiment), preventing direct contact with the metal frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a by anyone accessing the setting key switch 1311a.

As a result, even if a thin, tamper-evident tool such as a wire is inserted into the "gap" (in this embodiment, the diameter of the through-hole 1301z is 2 mm larger than the outer diameter of the setting key cylinder 1311ab, resulting in a 1 mm gap) between the through-hole 1301z and rib portion 1310za of the cover body 1301 and the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, the diameter of the through-hole 1301z is formed to fit within the rectangular surface shape of the base body 1311ac, which has a rectangular parallelepiped shape, of the setting key switch 1311a. Therefore, the tip of the thin, tamper-evident tool will hit the surface of the base body 1311ac and bend, preventing it from penetrating toward the main control board 1310. In other words, tampering with the main control board 1310 can be prevented.

In addition, as mentioned above, in the resin type setting key switch 1311a, the outer tube 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab are each molded from non-conductive resin, so even if a person with static electricity approaches or touches the front of the setting key switch 1311a (i.e., the front of the outer tube 1311aa and the front of the setting key cylinder 1311ab), electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge can be prevented from entering the main control board 1310 via the setting key switch 1311a. Furthermore, the end of the rib portion 1301za formed along the outer periphery of the through hole 1301z in the non-conductive resin cover body 1301 is separated from the surface of the metal frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a by a distance d1 (approximately 2 mm in this embodiment). Therefore, even if a person carrying static electricity approaches or touches the through hole 1301z or its surrounding area in the non-conductive resin cover body 1301, electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge is unlikely to penetrate the metal frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a via the through hole 1301z and rib portion 1301za, and therefore can be prevented from penetrating into the main control board 1310 via the setting key switch 1311a.

In the metal-type setting key switch 1311a, as described above, the outer tube 1311aa and setting key cylinder 1311ab are molded from metal, and the outer tube 1311aa and setting key cylinder 1311ab are electrically connected. The outer tube 1311aa is connected to a non-conductive resin base body 1311ac, but the metal frame plate 1311ad has holes that pass through the outer tube 1311aa at positions corresponding to the outer tube 1311aa and covers the surface and sides of the base body 1311ac. In other words, if a person with static electricity approaches or touches the through-hole 1301z or its surrounding area in the non-conductive resin cover body 1301, electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge may enter the metal frame plate 1311ad because the outer cylinder 1311aa and the setting key cylinder 1311ab are electrically connected. Therefore, if a person with static electricity approaches or touches the through-hole 1301z or its surrounding area in the non-conductive resin cover body 1301, electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge may enter the metal frame plate 1311ad and then enter the main control board 1310 via the setting key switch 1311a.

In addition, since the front surface of the setting key switch 1311a (i.e., the front surface of the outer tube 1311aa and the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab) and the surface (front surface) of the cover body 1301 of the main control board box are arranged on the same plane (flush), when a worker attaches the game board 5 to the main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 installed in the island equipment of an amusement hall, the worker first temporarily places the game board 5 on the front surface or around it. Therefore, if the worker accidentally hits this temporarily placed game board 5 with his/her leg during work and causes it to fall over, the setting key switch 1311a can be prevented from colliding with the floor and being damaged. Furthermore, because the front surface of the setting key switch 1311a (i.e., the front surface of the outer cylinder 1311aa and the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab) and the surface (front surface) of the cover body 1301 of the main control board box are arranged on the same plane (flush), even when removing the game board 5 from the main frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1, the removed game board 5 is temporarily placed in front of or around the pachinko machine 1, so if the worker accidentally hits the temporarily placed game board 5 with their leg during the work and causes it to fall over, it is possible to prevent the setting key switch 1311a from colliding with the floor and being damaged.

In addition, since the front surface of the setting key switch 1311a (i.e., the front surface of the outer cylinder 1311aa and the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab) and the surface (front surface) of the cover body 1301 of the main control board box are arranged on the same plane (flush), a protective cover (made of polycarbonate resin and molded transparent) may be provided on the cover body 1301 to protect the front surface of the setting key switch 1311a (i.e., the front surface of the outer cylinder 1311aa and the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab).

[11-4. Relationship between the setting key switch and the base body of the main control board box]
The relationship between the setting key switch 1311a and the base body 1302 of the main control board box 1320 will now be described with reference to Figures 185 to 187. Figure 186 (a) is a diagram showing the mounting surface (front side) of the main control board on which the setting key switch is mounted, (b) is a diagram (part 1) showing the mounting surface (front side) of the main control board on which the setting key switch is mounted and the corresponding soldering surface (back side) of the main control board, and (c) is a diagram (part 2) showing the mounting surface (front side) of the main control board on which the setting key switch is mounted and the corresponding soldering surface (back side) of the main control board. Figure 187 is a continuation of Figure 186, and is (part 3) (d) a diagram showing the mounting surface (front side) of the main control board on which the setting key switch is mounted and the corresponding soldering surface (back side) of the main control board, and (part 4) (e) is a diagram showing the mounting surface (front side) of the main control board on which the setting key switch is mounted and the corresponding soldering surface (back side) of the main control board.

When the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320, as described above, the main control board 1310 is positioned (sandwiched) in the gap (space) formed by the cover body side ribs 1301rb formed in multiple positions on the cover body 1301 and the base body side ribs 1302rb formed in multiple positions on the base body 1302. Furthermore, as described above, the base body 1302 is formed with a protrusion 1302p that can come into contact with the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board 1310. When a metal setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab, if the force of the insertion causes the main control board 1310 to bend and warp, the protrusion 1302p comes into contact with the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310, preventing the main control board 1310 from bending and warping any further, and preventing breaks in the wiring pattern formed on the main control board 1310 and peeling of the solder.

When the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 and no metal setting key is inserted into the socket 1311aba formed on the front of the setting key cylinder 1311ab (or when the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn it on, and then the hand is released from the setting key to release the pressure from the setting key), as shown in FIG. 185, the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310 and the front surface of the protrusion 1302p are separated by a clearance distance d2 (approximately 1 mm in this embodiment), and when the setting key cylinder 1311ab is not pressed, there is no contact between the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310 and the front surface of the protrusion 1302p.

The protrusion 1302p is either cylindrical or has a constant width along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302 (in this embodiment, the constant width is the same as the outer diameter of the cylindrical protrusion 1302p). Here, we will first explain how to route the wiring pattern to the setting key switch 1311a, and then explain the cylindrical protrusion 1302p and the protrusion 1302p with a constant width along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302.

[11-4-1. Wiring to the setting key switch 1311a]
186(a), the setting key switch 1311a is mounted on a mounting surface (surface) 1310x near the bottom edge of the main control board 1310 so that the side of a rectangular parallelepiped base body 1311ac of the setting key switch 1311a (the side opposite to the side below the insertion/removal reference position 1311aaa formed on the outer cylinder 1311aa) is parallel to the bottom edge of the main control board 1310. In other words, the setting key switch 1311a is mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x so that the insertion/removal reference position 1311aaa formed on the outer cylinder 1311aa faces the top edge of the main control board 1310.

Specifically, long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 (hereinafter simply referred to as "long through holes SLH1 and SLH2") are formed in the vertical direction of the main control board 1310. These long through holes have a pair of opposing lands that are elongated along the left-right direction (longitudinal direction) of the main control board 1310, through which a pair of protrusions 1311ada and 1311ada formed on the metal frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a can be inserted. Furthermore, two lead terminals, A terminal and B terminal, formed on the right side of the base body 1311ac of the setting key switch 1311a can be inserted. Through holes SLTH1, SLTH2 (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "through holes SLTH1, SLTH2") have a pair of lands through which the COM1 terminal and COM2 terminal, two lead terminals formed on the left side of the base body 1311ac of the setting key switch 1311a, can be inserted, and through holes SLTH3, SLTH4 (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "through holes SLTH3, SLTH4") have a pair of lands through which the COM1 terminal and COM2 terminal, two lead terminals formed on the left side of the base body 1311ac of the setting key switch 1311a, can be inserted. These are each formed on the main control board 1310 at a 90-degree rotation angle with the pair of opposing long through holes SLH1, SLH2.

In addition, a through hole SSTD, which can be used to insert a cylindrical protrusion (not shown) that specifies the orientation of the setting key switch 1311a and is provided on the back side of the base body 1311ac of the setting key switch 1311a, is formed on the left-right center line of the setting key switch 1311a when the setting key switch 1311a is mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, within the area surrounded by through holes SLTH1, SLTH2, SLTH3, SLTH4 and long through holes SLH1, SLH2.

As shown in Figure 186(b), for example, on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, a vertical straight wiring pattern SPTN1 is formed by running in a straight line along the vertical direction of the main control board 1310. The vertical straight wiring pattern SPTN1 electrically connects the through hole SLTH4, through which the COM2 terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered, to the through hole SLTH3, through which the COM1 terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered. In other words, because the vertical straight wiring pattern SPTN1 is run in a straight line from through hole SLTH4 to through hole SLTH4, its length is the minimum length.

In addition, on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, a horizontal straight wiring pattern SPTN2 is formed in a straight line along the left-right direction (longitudinal direction) of the main control board. The horizontal straight wiring pattern SPTN2 electrically connects the through hole SLTH3, through which the COM1 terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered, to the through hole SLTH1, through which the A terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered. In other words, the horizontal straight wiring pattern SPTN2 is routed in a straight line from the through hole SLTH3 to the through hole SLTH1, parallel to the bottom edge of the main control board 1310, and therefore its length is the minimum length.

In addition, on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, a through-hole SLTH1 through which the A terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered is formed, and a bent wiring pattern SPTN3 is formed by being bent in multiple directions up, down, left, and right on the main control board 1310. The bent wiring pattern SPTN3 electrically connects the main control input circuit 1310b shown in FIG. 179 (one end of the resistor MR10 electrically connected to the +5V power line on the main control board, or the other end of the capacitor MC10 electrically connected to ground (GND) (board ground)).

Furthermore, the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 does not have any wiring patterns electrically connected to the through hole SLTH2 through which the B terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered, and is electrically connected to the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

The various wiring patterns that form the setting signal transmission path extending from the through-hole SLTH1, through which the A terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered, to the specified input terminal of the main control MPU 1310a (input terminal PA5 of input port PA), are formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. In other words, the setting signal transmission path does not include through-holes that electrically connect the various wiring patterns on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y, so that even if the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is visible, it is not possible to know how the wiring patterns electrically connected to the various terminals of the setting key switch 1311a are routed.

Furthermore, as described above, the main control board 1310 is attached to the bottom surface of the cover body 1301 and fixed in the interior space of the cover body 1301. The base body 1302 is positioned in a predetermined position so as to substantially block the opening side of the cover body 1301, and the base body 1302 is slid in a specific direction along the longitudinal direction of the cover body 1301 (movement distance dimension sd) to completely block the opening side of the cover body 1301. Therefore, when the base body 1302 slides in a specific direction along the longitudinal direction of the cover body 1301, the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 also slides in the specific direction together with the base body 1302. During this sliding movement, the front surface of the protrusion 1302p may come into contact with and rub against the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, potentially damaging the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. Therefore, various wiring patterns are arranged so that they are not routed in or around the area where the protrusion 1302p slides. In other words, the various wiring patterns are routed so that the protrusion 1302p does not cross over the various wiring patterns when it slides. This prevents the various wiring patterns from being damaged by the sliding protrusion 1302p when assembling the main control board box 1320.

On the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the copper foil has been removed around the through-hole SLTH4 into which the COM2 terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered, the through-hole SLTH3 into which the COM1 terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered, and the through-hole SLTH1 into which the A terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered. The copper foil has also been removed around the various wiring patterns that form the setting signal transmission paths (e.g., the vertical straight wiring pattern SPTN1, the horizontal straight wiring pattern SPTN2, the curved wiring pattern SPTN3, etc.), and the copper foil has been removed around the through-hole SSTD into which a cylindrical protrusion (not shown) that specifies the orientation of the setting key switch 1311a can be inserted.

In contrast, the copper foil is removed from the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 approximately around the long through holes SLH1 and SLH2, and thermal lands having thermal patterns (patterns having a cross shape (which may have a portion missing) or an x shape (which may have a portion missing)) that electrically and physically connect the solid pattern (also called solid ground) and the land are formed in the areas provided at both ends of the longitudinal direction of each long hole. The thermal lands electrically connect the long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 to the solid ground (board ground) on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the solid ground (board ground) on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. Additionally, the copper foil surrounding the through-hole SLTH2, into which the B terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered, is removed from the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the soldering surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, and a thermal land is formed. The thermal land electrically connects the through-hole SLTH2 to the solid ground (board ground) on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solid ground (board ground) on the soldering surface (back surface) 1310y.

As shown in Figures 186(a) and 186(b), the entire mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and soldering surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are provided with various through holes (for example, through holes into which lead terminals of electronic components are inserted and soldered to the soldering surface (back surface) 1310y, through holes that electrically connect the wiring patterns of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the soldering surface (back surface) 1310y, and through holes that connect the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the solid ground (GND) of the soldering surface (back surface) 1310y). Except for certain through-holes (for example, through-holes electrically connecting the wiring patterns of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y) among the through-holes electrically connecting the wiring patterns of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y (board ground), and those for fixing electronic components), a thin copper layer (copper plane) on which various wiring patterns and various through-holes are formed is coated with an insulating resist liquid of a predetermined color (green in this embodiment) to form a mounting surface-side insulating coating 1310xr and a solder surface-side insulating coating 1310yr. Furthermore, on the mounting surface-side insulating coating 1310xr, an area SSLKSW1 indicating the position where the setting key switch 1311a will be placed is printed as a silk screen print with a solid line using insulating paint of a color (white in this embodiment) different from the predetermined color of the resist liquid. Instead of green, the color of the resist liquid may be red, yellow, orange, blue, white, or black, and the color of the silk-screen paint may be any of green, red, yellow, orange, blue, white, or black, as long as it is different from the color of the resist liquid.

The size of area SSLKSW1 is larger than the outline of the setting key switch 1311a, and when the setting key switch 1311a is placed and mounted in area SSLKSW1 (soldered on the solder surface (backside) 1310y of the main control board 1310), the lines of area SSLKSW1 (solid lines in a square) are positioned outside the outline of the setting key switch 1311a. In other words, even when the setting key switch 1311a is mounted, the lines of area SSLKSW1 (solid lines in a square) do not overlap with the lines of area SSLKSW1.

[11-4-2. Cylindrical protrusion]
If the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 has a cylindrical shape, the front surface of the protrusion 1302p will be circular. As described above, the distance between the COM1 terminal and the COM2 terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is the same as the distance between the A terminal and the B terminal of the setting key switch 1311a. The outer diameter of the cylindrical protrusion 1302p is smaller than half the distance between the A and B terminals of the setting key switch 1311a, and even if the front surface of the sliding protrusion 1302p comes into contact (abuts) with the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 during the work of assembling the main control board box 1320, the front surface of the sliding protrusion 1302p will not come into contact with the land of the through hole SLTH1 through which the A terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered, or the land of the through hole SLTH2 through which the B terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered.

When a metal setting key is inserted into the socket 1311aba formed on the front of the setting key cylinder 1311ab, the force of the insertion causes the main control board 1310 to bend and deflect, resulting in the front of the circular protrusion 1302p coming into contact with the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. When the front surface of the circular protrusion 1302p comes into contact with the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the solder surface side insulating coating 1310yr, which is formed by applying an insulating resist liquid of a specific color (green in this embodiment) on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, is rubbed by the front surface of the protrusion 1302p, scraping off the solder surface side insulating coating 1310yr and potentially damaging the solid ground (board ground) on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

Therefore, as shown in Figure 186(b), a circular foil cutout area SINSy where the copper foil has been removed is formed in and around the area of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 where the front surface of the protrusion 1302p abuts. This prevents damage to the solid ground (board ground) on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 by the protrusion 1302p, even if the solder surface insulating coating 1310yr is scraped off by the protrusion 1302p. The circular foil cutout area SINSy where the copper foil has been removed makes safe and effective use of the limited board area.

When assembling the main control board box 1320, as described above, it is necessary to slide the base body 1302 in a specific direction (movement distance sd) along the longitudinal direction of the cover body 1301. At this time, the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 also slides in the specific direction (movement distance sd) together with the base body 1302.

Therefore, as shown in Figure 186(c), a foil cutout area SINSy having an elongated hole-like shape where the copper foil has been cut out may be formed in and around the area where the protrusion 1302p slides. This prevents damage to the solid ground (board ground) on the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310 by the protrusion 1302p as it slides (movement distance dimension sd) during assembly of the main control board box 1320. The foil cutout area SINSy having an elongated hole-like shape where the copper foil has been cut out safely and effectively utilizes the limited board area.

[11-4-3. Protrusions having a constant width along the longitudinal direction of the base body]
When the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 has a constant width along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302 (in this embodiment, the constant width is the same as the outer diameter of the cylindrical protrusion 1302p), the front surface of the protrusion 1302p is a long rectangle along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302. Note that both ends of the front surface of the protrusion 1302p, which has a long rectangular shape along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302, are rounded to give it a circular shape. As described above, the distance between the COM1 and COM2 terminals of the setting key switch 1311a and the distance between the A and B terminals of the setting key switch 1311a are the same. The outer diameter of the cylindrical protrusion 1302p is smaller than half the distance between the A and B terminals of the setting key switch 1311a, and even if the front surface of the sliding protrusion 1302p comes into contact (abuts) with the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 during the work of assembling the main control board box 1320, the front surface of the sliding protrusion 1302p will not come into contact with the land of the through hole SLTH1 through which the A terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered, or the land of the through hole SLTH2 through which the B terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted and soldered.

When a metal setting key is inserted into the socket 1311aba formed on the front of the setting key cylinder 1311ab, the force of the insertion causes the main control board 1310 to bend and deflect, resulting in the front of the protrusion 1302p, which has a long rectangular shape along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302, coming into contact with the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. When the front surface of the protrusion 1302p, which has a long rectangular shape along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302, comes into contact with the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the solder surface side insulating coating 1310yr, which is formed by applying an insulating resist liquid of a specific color (green in this embodiment) on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, is rubbed by the front surface of the protrusion 1302p, scraping off the solder surface side insulating coating 1310yr and potentially damaging the solid ground (board ground) on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

Therefore, as shown in Figure 187(d), in and around the area of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 where the front surface of the protrusion 1302p abuts, a foil cutout area SINSy is formed, which has been cut out of the copper foil and is a long rectangle that runs along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302. Both ends of the foil cutout area SINSy are rounded and have a circular shape. This prevents damage to the solid ground (board ground) on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 by the protrusion 1302p, even if the solder surface insulating coating 1310yr is scraped off by the protrusion 1302p. The foil cutout area SINSy, which has been cut out of the copper foil and is a long rectangle that runs along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302, safely and effectively utilizes the limited board area.

When assembling the main control board box 1320, as described above, it is necessary to slide the base body 1302 in a specific direction along the longitudinal direction of the cover body 1301. At this time, the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 also slides in the specific direction together with the base body 1302.

Therefore, as shown in Figure 187(e), a foil cutout area SINSy having an elongated hole-like shape where the copper foil has been cut out may be formed in and around the area where the protrusion 1302p slides. This prevents damage to the solid ground (board ground) on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 by the protrusion 1302p as it slides (movement distance dimension sd) during assembly of the main control board box 1320. The foil cutout area SINSy having an elongated hole-like shape where the copper foil has been cut out safely and effectively utilizes the limited board area.

[11-5. Notification of the location of the RWM switch used to change settings]
The main control board 1310 on which the setting key switch 1311a is mounted is housed in a main control board box 1320, and this main control board box 1320 is attached to the rear side of the board holder 1200 of the game board 5. In contrast, the payout control board 633 on which the RWM switch 633d (which may also be the RAM clear switch 1310f) is mounted is housed in a payout control board box 632, and this payout control board box 632 is attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 of the board unit 620 of the main frame 4. In this way, by arranging the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d on separate boards and by arranging the boards to be attached to different targets, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d can be spaced apart. If the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d are arranged together on a single board, unauthorized tampering would only require one board, which is undesirable from a security standpoint. Therefore, in this embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d are placed on separate boards, and a configuration is adopted in which the boards are attached to different objects, thereby improving the security of the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d.

The main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) controls game preparation and game play (game control follows game preparation control). Game preparation control consists of a first process (determination of step S14 and processing of step S16A in the main control side power-on processing described below) that enables setting values to be changed based on a signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board 1310. Following this first process, a second process (determination of step S216 and processing of step S218 in the setting change processing described below) that selects and switches setting values based on a signal from the RWM switch 633d on the payout control board 633 (which functions as a setting switch button for selecting and switching setting values). Following game preparation control, game control consists of main control side main processing in the main control side power-on processing described below and main control side timer interrupt processing described below.

While this improves security, by placing the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d on separate boards and adopting a configuration in which the boards are attached to different objects, the setting key switch 1311a is housed in the main control board box 1320, so there is no need to specifically communicate where the setting key switch 1311a is located. However, it may be difficult for the amusement hall manager, amusement hall staff, or other staff to know where the RWM switch 633d, which also functions as a setting change button, is located, as they may be unfamiliar with this.

In this embodiment, therefore, the main control board box 1320 is provided with location information indicating the location of the RWM switch 633d. Specifically, a sticker (not shown) indicating the location of the RWM switch 633d is affixed to the cover 1301 of the main control board box 1320. This sticker is a transparent rectangular sheet, and for example, the following text is printed on this rectangular sheet in translucent red letters (height: 7 mm): "The RWM switch (setting change button) is located on the payout control board." This allows the location of the RWM switch 633d (setting change button) to be communicated to the amusement hall manager, amusement hall staff, or other staff member. Therefore, the amusement hall manager, amusement hall staff, or other staff member can easily find the RWM switch 633d when operating it, thereby avoiding dizziness. Therefore, the location of the RWM switch 633d can be easily determined.

Note that this sticker, even when affixed to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320, does not impede the visibility of the main control board 1310. Also, instead of letters printed on the rectangular sheet of this sticker, symbols such as arrows may be used.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker was affixed to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 as location information that can convey the location of the RWM switch 633d. However, instead of this, when molding the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320, concave or convex letters may also be molded in (in other words, the cover body 1301 and the letters may be molded as a single unit). Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM switch 633d can be easily determined.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker was affixed to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 as location information that could communicate the location of the RWM switch 633d. However, instead of this, the letters (height: 7 mm) "The RWM switch (setting change button) is located on the dispensing control board" could be silk-screened in white on the mounting surface (surface) of the main control board 1310, or the letters (height: 7 mm) "RWM switch (setting change button)" could be silk-screened in white on the mounting surface (surface) of the dispensing control board 633. The silk-screen printing may be the same color or different colors. Furthermore, instead of silk-screened letters, a symbol such as an arrow could be used. This configuration also makes it easy to determine the location of the RWM switch 633d.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker was affixed to the cover 1301 of the main control board box 1320 as location information that could communicate the location of the RWM switch 633d. However, instead of this, the lettering could be masked on the mounting surface (surface) of the main control board 1310 and cut-out letters (height: 7 mm) reading "The RWM switch (setting change button) is located on the dispensing control board" could be formed using resist, or the lettering could be masked on the mounting surface (surface) of the dispensing control board 633 and cut-out letters (height: 7 mm) reading "RWM switch (setting change button)" could be formed using resist. The resist colors may be the same, but different colors are preferable to distinguish the boards. Furthermore, instead of cut-out letters, a cut-out symbol such as an arrow could be used. This configuration also makes it easy to determine the location of the RWM switch 633d.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker was affixed to the cover 1301 of the main control board box 1320 as location information that can convey the location of the RWM switch 633d. However, instead of this, a similar sticker (this sticker is a transparent rectangular sheet on which, for example, the words "The RWM switch (setting change button) is located on the dispensing control board" are printed in red translucent letters (height: 7 mm)) can be affixed to the mounting surface (surface) of the main control board 1310, or a transparent rectangular sheet with the words "RWM switch (setting change button)" in red translucent letters (height: 7 mm) can be affixed to the mounting surface (surface) of the dispensing control board 633. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM switch 633d can be easily determined.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker was affixed to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 as location information that could convey the location of the RWM switch 633d, but instead, an announcement may be made from various speakers to inform people of where the RWM switch 633d is located, or an announcement image may be displayed on the effect display device 1600. Specifically, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, an attendant such as the amusement hall manager or an amusement hall staff member operates the effect operation section 301 of the effect operation unit 300 to display various setting screens on the effect display device 1600 and select an item regarding the location of the RWM switch 633d (setting switch button). As a result, an audio announcement is played from various speakers to inform users of the location of the RWM switch 633d, saying, "The RWM switch is located on the payout control board. The RWM switch also serves as a setting change button," and an image announcement (which may be a photograph) indicating the location of the RWM switch 633d is displayed on the effect display device 1600. After determining the location of the RWM switch 633d from this audio and image announcement, the amusement hall manager, amusement hall staff member, or other attendant can shut off the power to the pachinko machine 1 and smoothly change the setting value. This configuration also makes it easy to find the location of the RWM switch 633d.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker was affixed to the cover 1301 of the main control board box 1320 as location information that could communicate the location of the RWM switch 633d. However, instead, when changing the setting value, an announcement may be played from various speakers to inform the user of the location of the RWM switch 633d, which also functions as a setting change button. Specifically, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process that can change or determine the setting value, a predetermined command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 controls the device to repeatedly announce from various speakers where the RWM switch 633d is located, such as, "The RWM switch is on the payout control board. The RWM switch also functions as a setting change button. Please operate the RWM switch to change the setting value." When the main control MPU 1310a completes the setting change process, it sends a specified command to the peripheral control board 1510, which causes the peripheral control board 1510 to stop the audio announcement and proceed with various processes (such as proceeding with a performance or a performance showing a customer waiting state (demo performance)) based on the received specified command. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM switch 633d can be easily determined. Following this audio announcement, an audio announcement may be played from the various speakers to explain how to operate the setting keys after the setting value has been determined. Additionally, while the audio announcement is being played, an image saying "Setting in progress" may be displayed on the performance display device 1600.

In the above-described embodiment, a sticker was attached to the cover 1301 of the main control board box 1320 as location information indicating the location of the RWM switch 633d. In addition, when changing the setting value, an audio announcement may be played from various speakers to indicate the location of the RWM switch 633d, which also functions as a setting change button. Specifically, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process to change the setting value, a predetermined command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 then controls the device to repeatedly play an audio announcement from various speakers to indicate the location of the RWM switch 633d: "The RWM switch is located on the payout control board. The RWM switch also functions as a setting change button. Please operate the RWM switch to change the setting value." This eliminates the need to search for the sticker attached to the cover 1301 of the main control board box 1320. Although such audio announcements are repeatedly played from the various speakers, in case the content of the announcement is missed, the location of the RWM switch 633d can be determined by visually checking the sticker attached to the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 before the next audio announcement begins. In addition to the audio announcement saying, "The RWM switch is located on the dispensing control board. The RWM switch also serves as a setting change button. Please operate the RWM switch to change the setting value," the audio announcement may also include information indicating the location of the sticker indicating the location of the RWM switch. When the RWM switch is operated, the main control MPU 1310a sends a predetermined command to the peripheral control board 1510, which causes the peripheral control board 1510 to stop the audio announcement. Even if the person changing the setting values becomes accustomed to changing the setting values and finds the sound annoying, they can quickly stop the audio announcement by operating the RWM switch immediately after starting the work. Furthermore, even if the work needs to be performed after the amusement hall has opened for business, operating the RWM switch immediately after starting the work can quickly stop the audio announcement so as not to inconvenience players. Following this audio announcement, an audio announcement explaining how to operate the setting keys after the setting values have been determined may be played from the various speakers. While the audio announcement is being played, an image that reads "Setting in Progress" may also be displayed on the performance display device 1600.

[11-6. Procedures for changing setting values and procedures for confirming and displaying setting values]
Next, we will briefly explain the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board 1310, the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the payout control board 633, and the base monitor 1310h mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board 1310, which also functions as a setting display. Here, we will first briefly explain how to change the setting value, and then how to display and confirm the current setting value. Note that the setting key is an important key that can be used to change the setting value as well as check the current setting value, so only a limited number of people, including the arcade manager, are permitted to possess it, and it is limited to two to three people.

When changing the setting value, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power outage, the main frame 4 must be opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key must be inserted into the socket 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the main control board 1310, the setting key cylinder 1311ab must be rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn it ON, turning the setting key switch 1311a to setting key ON, and the pressing operation portion of the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (surface) of the payout control board 633 must be operated, thereby meeting the ``predetermined setting value change permission conditions.'' In other words, the person actually changing the setting value must first make sure that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), then open the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2, and then insert a metal setting key into the socket 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a and turn it on by rotating it 60 degrees clockwise to turn the setting key switch 1311a on, and then operate the power switch 630a while operating the pressing section of the RWM switch 633d to turn on the power to the pachinko machine 1.

The person changing the setting value must first ensure that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), then open the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2, and then insert a metal setting key into the socket 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and turn the setting key cylinder clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it on, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to setting key ON. Next, while operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM switch 633d, the power switch 630a is operated to turn on the power to the pachinko machine 1. This inputs a setting key ON signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a displays the current setting value (the value set among setting values 1 to 6 at the time the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON) stored in a specific area of its built-in RAM on the base monitor 1310h, which also functions as a setting display.

As described above, the base monitor 1310h is configured with a row of six 7-segment LED displays with decimal points (so-called dots) and can display numerical values of up to six digits. When the base monitor 1310h functions as a setting display, the setting value may be displayed on the rightmost 7-segment LED display of the six 7-segment LED displays (i.e., the single digit that displays the ones digit of the six digits) (in this case, the dot may be lit or extinguished. If the dot also functions as a setting change permission lamp, it may be lit when a setting change is being made and extinguished when the setting change is complete). Or, the setting value may be displayed on one, multiple, or all of the six 7-segment LED displays (in this case, the dot may be lit or extinguished. If the dot also functions as a setting change permission lamp, it may be lit when a setting change is being made and extinguished when the setting change is complete).

When a person changing the setting value presses the pressing operation portion of the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the dispensing control board 633, a detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is input from the dispensing control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Each time a person changing the setting value presses the pressing operation portion of the RWM switch 633d, the main control MPU 1310a increases the current setting value by one based on the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d. When it reaches the maximum setting value of 6, it returns to the initial setting value of 1, and then increases by one again, displaying the setting value on the base monitor 1310h, which also functions as a setting display.

When changing a setting value, the person who decides on the setting value turns off the setting key switch 1311a by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON back to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). This setting key OFF signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the setting value determined by the setting change in a specific area of the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a, switches the setting value on the base monitor 1310h, which also functions as a setting display device, from a state in which it is displayed to a state in which it is not displayed, and then, either after or immediately thereafter (after the display of the setting value is hidden, a display other than the setting value or the calculation result (for example, a "-" may be displayed before the calculation result is displayed on the base monitor 1310h, and then the calculation result may be displayed on the base monitor 1310h)), controls the display from a specific area of the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a of the calculation result of the ratio of the number of balls entered (the number of game balls B that entered the ball entry ports (winning port, out port) provided in the game area 5a defined on the game board 5) to the number of balls paid out (the number of game balls B paid out (awarded) as prize balls due to balls entering the winning port). In other words, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise so that it returns from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder where the Enter key is pressed to its original position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). This fulfills the "predetermined setting value change termination condition" of turning the setting key switch 1311a OFF, thereby ending the period during which the setting value can be changed (the period during which the setting value can be changed).

The person changing the setting value removes the metal setting key from the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the main frame 4 against the outer frame 2, and completes the setting value change procedure.

To display and confirm the currently set setting value, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power outage, the main frame 4 must be opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key must be inserted into the socket 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key cylinder 1311ab must be rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn it ON, turning the setting key switch 1311a to setting key ON, and the pressing operation part of the RWM switch 633d must not be operated, thereby meeting the ``predetermined setting value display permission conditions.'' In other words, a person who actually checks and displays the currently set setting value must first make sure that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), then open the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2, and then insert a metal setting key into the socket 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a and turn it on by rotating it 60 degrees clockwise to turn the setting key switch 1311a on, and then operate the power switch 630a to turn on the power to the pachinko machine 1 without operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM switch 633d.

A person checking and displaying the currently set setting values first checks that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), then opens the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2, and then inserts a metal setting key into the socket 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a and turns the setting key cylinder ON by rotating it 60 degrees clockwise. Next, without operating the pressing portion of the RWM switch 633d, the power switch 630a is operated to turn on the power to the pachinko machine 1. This inputs a setting key ON signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a displays the current setting value (the value set among setting values 1 to 6 at the time the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON) stored in a specific area of its built-in RAM on the base monitor 1310h, which also functions as a setting display. At this time, even if a person wishing to check and display the currently set setting value presses the pressing operation section of the RWM switch 633d, the setting value will not change at all in response to this pressing operation, and the content displayed on the setting display 1310g will not change either.

As mentioned above, the base monitor 1310h is composed of a row of six 7-segment LED displays with decimal points (so-called dots), and is capable of displaying numbers up to six digits. When the base monitor 1310h functions as a setting display, the setting value may be displayed on the rightmost 7-segment LED display of the six 7-segment LED displays arranged in a row (i.e., the single digit that displays the ones digit of the six digits) (in this case, the dot may be lit or extinguished. If the dot also functions as a setting change permission lamp, it may be lit when the currently set setting value is being confirmed and extinguished when confirmation of the currently set setting value is complete).), or the setting value may be displayed on one, multiple, or all of the six 7-segment LED displays arranged in a row (in this case, the dot may be lit or extinguished. If the dot also functions as a setting change permission lamp, it may be lit when the currently set setting value is being confirmed and extinguished when confirmation of the currently set setting value is complete).

When the person checking and displaying the currently set setting values has finished checking the currently set setting values, they turn the setting key switch 1311a OFF by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON back to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). This setting key OFF signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a switches the base monitor 1310h, which also functions as a setting display, from a state in which the setting value is displayed to a state in which it is not displayed, and then, or immediately thereafter, controls the display from a specific area of RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a of the calculated ratio of the number of payouts (the number of game balls B paid out (awarded) as prize balls due to balls entering the winning holes) to the number of balls entered (the number of game balls B entered into the winning holes (winning holes, winning holes) provided in the game area 5a defined on the game board 5).

The person who wishes to check and display the currently set value removes the metal setting key from the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the main frame 4 against the outer frame 2, and completes the process of checking and displaying the currently set value.

As mentioned above, the predetermined conditions for allowing changes to the setting values are that when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage, the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key cylinder 1311ab is turned ON by rotating it 60 degrees clockwise, and the pressing operation portion of the RWM switch 633d is operated. In contrast, the predetermined conditions for allowing the display of setting values are, as described above, that when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage, the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the socket 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to turn it ON, thereby turning the setting key ON, and the pressing operation part of the RWM switch 633d is not operated. Thus, the predetermined setting value change permission condition and the predetermined setting value display permission condition share a common requirement in that, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power outage, the main body frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port 1311aba of the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder 1311ab is turned ON by rotating it 60 degrees clockwise. However, they differ in that the predetermined setting value change permission condition requires that "the pressing operation portion of the RWM switch 633d is operated when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power outage," while the predetermined setting value display permission condition requires that "the pressing operation portion of the RWM switch 633d is not operated when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power outage."

[12. Wiring pattern of setting key switch and RWM switch on main control board]
Next, the wiring pattern for transmitting a detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the wiring pattern for transmitting a detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the dispensing control board 633 will be described with reference to Figures 188 and 189. Figure 188 is a schematic diagram illustrating the layout of various electronic components mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board, and Figure 189 is a schematic diagram of the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board illustrating the various wiring patterns to the main control MPU of the main control board. Here, an example will be described in which the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the setting change board 1311 described above is mounted on the main control board 1310, and only the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320.

Mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 are DIP-type electronic components such as connectors MCN1 to MCN8, crystal oscillators, and various ICs, as well as lead-type electronic components (lead components, insert-mounted electronic components, DIP components) such as setting key switches 1311a, resistors, resistor arrays, diodes, capacitors, electrolytic capacitors, and transistors. The lead terminals of the DIP-type electronic components are inserted into through-holes formed in the main control board 1310 from the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 toward the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, and are soldered and fixed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. Each lead terminal of a lead-type electronic component (lead component, insert-mount electronic component, dip component) is inserted into a through-hole formed in the main control board 1310 from the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 toward the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, and is soldered and fixed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

Various detection signals from various sensors input to the main control board 1310 are either input to the main control input circuit 1310b2 with error detection via connectors MCN1 to MCN5, or to the main control input circuit 1310b without error detection. Connectors MCN1 to MCN5 are arranged in order near the top edge of the main control board 1310, from the center of the top edge to the left edge, with connector MCN5 being arranged near the top edge of the main control board 1310, near the left edge.

Various detection signals input via connectors MCN1 to MCN3 are input to the main control input circuit 1310b2 with error detection function, and various detection signals input via connector MCN5 are either input to the main control input circuit 1310b2 with error detection function or to the main control input circuit 1310b (the circuit composed of resistors and transistors described above) without error detection function. Connector MCN4 is used to output commands to the peripheral control board 1510.

Mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 are a plurality (two in this embodiment) of DIP-type ICs that integrate multiple main control input circuits 1310b2 with error detection (eight main control input circuits 1310b2 with error detection functions). It is also possible to mount multiple individual main control input circuits 1310b2 with error detection on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, rather than as an IC.

Connectors MCN6 to MCN8 are located near the bottom edge of the main control board 1310, arranged in the following order from the left edge toward the center of the bottom edge: connector MCN6, connector MCN7, setting key switch 1311a, and connector MCN8. Connector MCN8 is located near the bottom edge of the main control board 1310, closer to the left side than the center of the bottom edge. Connector MCN6 outputs a signal to drive the electrical drive source (solenoid) provided on the gaming board 5. Connector MCN7 inputs and outputs signals related to the exchange of commands with the payout control board 633, and inputs a detection signal (main RWM signal) from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the payout control board 633 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633"). Connector MCN8 is used to exchange various signals when performing inspection and verification.

The main control MPU 1310a is positioned above the center line connecting the centers of the left and right sides of the main control board 1310 and toward the right of the center of the main control board 1310, parallel to the bottom (top) side of the main control board 1310 (i.e., along the length of the main control board 1310). The IC package of this main control MPU 1310a is a ZIP (Zigzag In-line Package), and the lead terminals protruding vertically from the bottom surface of the main control MPU 1310a are bent alternately to form two rows along the length of the bottom surface of the main control MPU 1310a. For convenience of explanation, the two rows of lead terminals will be referred to as the upper row and the lower row.

Above the setting key switch 1311a, which is located near the bottom edge of the main control board 1310, are multiple lead-type resistors, diodes, capacitors, etc., and above these are two lead-type resistor arrays arranged in a row, one on each side, parallel to the bottom edge of the main control board 1310. Above this left-side lead-type resistor array (i.e., away from the main control MPU 1310a), are resistors MR2 and MR5, which constitute the main control input circuit 1310b to which the detection signal (main RWM signal) from the RWM switch 633d on the dispensing control board 633 is input via connector MCN7. Below this left-side lead-type resistor array (i.e., using the left-side lead-type resistor array as a boundary (protective wall)), are resistors MR3 and MR4 and transistor MTR0, which constitute the main control input circuit 1310b to which the detection signal (main RWM signal) from the RWM switch 633d on the dispensing control board 633 is input via connector MCN7.

In other words, the main control input circuit 1310b, to which the detection signal (main RWM signal) from the RWM switch 633d on the dispensing control board 633 is input via connector MCN7, is configured with the left-side lead-type resistor assembly as its boundary (protective wall). Resistors MR3 and MR4 and transistor MTR0 that make up the main control input circuit 1310b are located below the left-side lead-type resistor assembly, and resistors MR2 and MR5 that make up the main control input circuit 1310b are located above the left-side lead-type resistor assembly. This serves as a protective wall, preventing tampering with resistors MR2 and MR5 located above the left-side lead-type resistor assembly, thereby contributing to improved security. Furthermore, because transistor MTR0 has resistors MR3 and MR4 built in as bias resistors, this also prevents tampering with resistors MR3 and MR4, contributing to improved security.

Above the connector MCN8, located to the right of the setting key switch 1311a, which is located near the bottom edge of the main control board 1310, are resistors MR10-MR13, capacitor MC10, and transistor MTR10, which make up the main control input circuit 1310b, which receives the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a. Transistor MTR10 has resistors MR11 and MR12 built in as bias resistors. This prevents tampering with resistors MR11 and MR12, contributing to improved security.

To the right of the main control input circuit 1310b, which receives the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a, are resistors MR14-MR16 and transistor MTR11 that make up the logic inversion circuit 1310iv, which inverts the logic of the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a received via the main control input circuit 1310b. Transistor MTR11 incorporates resistors MR14 and MR15 as bias resistors. This prevents unauthorized tampering with resistors MR14 and MR15, contributing to improved security.

When the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320, as described above, the connectors MCN1 to MCCN5, which are arranged in a row near the top edge of the main control board 1310 and parallel to the top edge, the connectors MCN6 to MC8, which are arranged in a row near the bottom edge of the main control board 1310 and parallel to the bottom edge, and the setting key switch 1311a, are partially exposed from the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320. This makes it possible to insert an unauthorized tool (e.g., a thin wire) through the gap formed by the cover body 1301, the connectors MCN1 to MCN8, and the setting key switch 1311a, and to misconfigure the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. Even if an attempt is made to tamper with the system, electronic components such as electrolytic capacitors, resistors, diodes, capacitors, resistor arrays, various ICs, and transistors are located around connectors MCN1 to MCN8 and setting key switch 13111a, and electronic components such as resistors, diodes, capacitors, a crystal oscillator (located near the bottom of main control MPU 1310a), resistor arrays, and various ICs are located around main control MPU 1310a. These electronic components act as obstacles or protective walls, requiring an unauthorized tool (such as a thin wire) to bend multiple times, making it practically impossible for the unauthorized tool (such as a thin wire) to reach main control MPU 1310a.

The main control board 1310 has multiple through holes formed therein, through which the lead terminals of the ZIP-type main control MPU 1310a are inserted. The lead terminals of the main control MPU 1310a are inserted into these through holes from the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 toward the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, and are then soldered and fixed to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

As shown in Figure 189, on the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the lead terminals of the main control MPU 1310a that are electrically connected to the ground (GND) (board ground) are electrically connected to the solid ground (GND) (board ground) on the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310. Also, on the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, a +5V power supply wiring pattern is formed that is electrically connected to the +5V power supply line created on the main control board (the +5V power supply line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310) and the main VBB power supply line supplied from capacitor BC0 of the backup power supply circuit 630h on the power supply board 630, among the lead terminals of the main control MPU 1310a. Additionally, the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is formed with an output signal wiring pattern that outputs various signals from the lead terminals of the main control MPU 1310a, and an input signal wiring pattern that inputs various signals to the lead terminals.

The input signal wiring pattern includes an RWM signal wiring pattern (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "various wiring patterns") that forms an RWM signal transmission path extending from connector MCN7, to which a detection signal (main RWM signal) from the RWM switch 633d provided on the dispensing control board 633 is input, to input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of input port PA of main control MPU 1310a, and a wiring pattern from terminal A of setting key switch 1311a to input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of input port PA of main control MPU 1310a. This includes a setting key signal wiring pattern (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "various wiring patterns") that forms a setting signal transmission path extending from the 1Q terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 (MIC22A) that constitutes the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a, and a power outage warning signal wiring pattern (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "various wiring patterns") that forms a power outage warning signal transmission path extending from the 1Q terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 (MIC22A) that constitutes the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a.

On the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, foil-punched areas are formed where the copper foil is punched out around the through-holes through which the lead terminals of the ZIP-type main control MPU 1310a are inserted, excluding those electrically connected to the solid ground (GND) (board ground), around the +5V power supply wiring pattern, around the signal output wiring pattern, around the input signal wiring pattern, and around specific through-holes (for example, through-holes electrically connecting the output signal wiring patterns on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y).

Apart from the areas on the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310 where various wiring patterns are formed, various through-holes are formed, and foil cutouts are formed, the remaining areas are formed as a solid ground (GND) (board ground) on the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, and an insulating resist liquid of a specific color (green in this embodiment) is applied to cover the base material and thin copper layer (copper plane, copper foil surface) of the main control board 1310, forming a solder side insulating coating film 1310yr over the entire area of the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

In addition, on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the copper foil is cut out around the through-holes through which the lead terminals of the ZIP-type main control MPU 1310a are inserted, excluding those electrically connected to the solid ground (GND) (board ground), around the +5V power supply wiring pattern, around the output signal wiring pattern, and around specific through-holes (for example, through-holes electrically connecting the output signal wiring pattern between the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y). Although cut-out areas are formed, no foil cut-out areas are formed between the lead terminals arranged in the upper row and the lead terminals arranged in the lower row of the ZIP type main control MPU 1310a along the longitudinal direction of the ZIP type main control MPU 1310a (along the left-right direction of the main control board 1310, along the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310, and along the top edge of the main control board 1310 (parallel to the bottom edge or the center line connecting the center of the left edge and the center of the right edge of the main control board 1310), and a solid ground (GND) (board ground) is formed.

Apart from the area on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 where the output signal wiring pattern is formed, the area where various through holes are formed, and the area where foil cutouts are formed, the remaining areas are formed as a solid ground (GND) (board ground) on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and an insulating resist liquid of a predetermined color (green in this embodiment) is applied to cover the base material and thin copper layer (copper plane, copper foil surface) of the main control board 1310, forming a mounting surface-side insulating coating film 1310xr over the entire area of the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310.

In addition, the copper foil layer (copper plane, copper foil surface) on the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310 may have a small copper foil area surrounded by the various wiring patterns and the numerous lead terminals of the main control MPU 1310a due to the various wiring patterns routed to the lead terminals of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, in order to stabilize the ground in the small copper foil area, a solid ground through hole is formed that electrically connects the solid ground (GND) (board ground) on the mounting side (front side) 1310x of the main control board 1310 to the solid ground (GND) (board ground) on the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

The land size of the solid ground through hole comes in a variety of sizes, including those that are the same size as the land size of the wiring pattern through hole that electrically connects the wiring pattern between the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, those that are the same size as the land size of the lead terminal through hole through which the lead terminal of the electronic component is inserted and soldered to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y, those that are larger than the land size of the wiring pattern through hole but smaller than the land size of the lead terminal through hole, and those that are larger than the land size of the lead terminal through hole, and multiple solid ground through holes are scattered across almost the entire surface of the main control board 1310. This stabilizes the solid ground (GND) (board ground) on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solid ground (GND) (board ground) on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 to be the same ground (GND) (board ground).

Furthermore, the main control board 1310 does not have any wiring pattern through holes formed therein for electrically connecting the wiring patterns on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 for the wiring patterns through which various signals are input, whereas for the wiring patterns through which various signals are output, multiple wiring pattern through holes may be formed therein for electrically connecting the wiring patterns on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 to prevent interference between the wiring patterns when routing the wiring patterns.

It is preferable that the main control board 1310 does not have any wiring pattern through holes formed therein that electrically connect the wiring patterns on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 for the wiring patterns through which various signals are input. However, in order to avoid interference with other wiring patterns due to the routing of the wiring patterns, it is sometimes necessary to form wiring pattern through holes that electrically connect the wiring patterns on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 for the wiring patterns through which various signals are input.

However, if the wiring pattern through-holes (hereinafter referred to as "input signal wiring pattern through-holes") formed for the wiring patterns through which various signals are input are tampered with, for example, by electrically switching them to solid ground (GND) (board ground) or the +5V power line created on the main control board, there is a risk that a cheater could obtain illegal game balls, as the main control MPU 1310a is an important electronic component that controls the progress of the game.

Therefore, it is necessary to take security measures for the through holes used for input signal wiring patterns.

[12-1. Security measures for through holes for input signal wiring patterns]
A configuration in which an insulating film is applied to the lands of the through-holes for the input signal wiring pattern as a security measure for the through-holes for the input signal wiring pattern (hereinafter, "configurations in which an insulating film is applied to the lands of the through-holes for the input signal wiring pattern according to the first to fourth embodiments") will be described with reference to Figures 190 to 193. Figure 190 is a schematic diagram (a) illustrating a configuration in which an insulating film is applied to the lands of the through-holes for the input signal wiring pattern according to the first embodiment formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, a schematic diagram (b) of a cross section taken along line X-X in (a), and a schematic diagram (c) of a modified example of (b). Figure 191 is a schematic diagram (a) illustrating a configuration in which an insulating film is applied to the lands of the through-holes for the input signal wiring pattern according to the second embodiment formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, a schematic diagram (b) of a cross section taken along line X-X in (a), and a schematic diagram (c) of a modified example of (b). Fig. 192 is a schematic diagram (a) illustrating a configuration in which an insulating film is applied to the lands of the through-holes for the input signal wiring pattern according to the third embodiment formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, a schematic diagram (b) of a cross section taken along line X-X in (a), and a schematic diagram (c) of a modified example of (b), and Fig. 193 is a schematic diagram (a) illustrating a configuration in which an insulating film is applied to the lands of the through-holes for the input signal wiring pattern according to the fourth embodiment formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, a schematic diagram (b) of a cross section taken along line X-X in (a), and a schematic diagram (c) of a modified example of (b). Note that in Figs. 190 to 193, parts that perform the same function are denoted by the same reference numerals.

The various through holes are copper-plated on the inner walls of the holes, making them conductive. In addition to through holes, the main control board 1310 also has non-through holes. Non-through holes differ significantly from through holes that have copper-plated inner walls and lands on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 in that they do not have copper plating on the inner walls of the holes and do not have lands on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. Non-through holes are formed to attach the board to components or to secure electronic components (such as connectors with wiring that are subject to external force) to the board. Note that the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the lands of through holes can be used for through holes used to mount electronic components (i.e., to insert the lead terminals of electronic components). Furthermore, the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the land of a through hole may be applied to the land of a wiring pattern through hole (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as an "output signal wiring pattern through hole") formed for a wiring pattern from which various signals are output. Furthermore, the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the land of a through hole for a solid ground that electrically connects the solid ground (GND) (board ground) on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solid ground (GND) (board ground) on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 may be applied to the land of a solid ground through hole.

[12-1-1. Configuration for covering lands of through holes for input signal wiring patterns with insulating coating according to the first embodiment]
190(a) and 190(b), in the configuration in which the lands of the through-holes for the input signal wiring pattern are covered with an insulating coating, a thin through-hole is formed in the thickness direction of the base material K1310o of the main control board 1310 (the direction perpendicular to the front surface (perpendicular to the back surface) of the base material K1310o of the main control board 1310), and the copper foil is removed from the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the copper foil surface of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 to form a mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 and a solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1, each having an outer diameter KTHD1, and a mounting surface (front surface) side wiring pattern SPTN and a solder surface (back surface) side wiring pattern are formed. The through-hole KTH1 is formed by applying a conductive plating process to the entire inner surface of the through-hole. The outer diameter of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the outer diameter of the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are the same size, which is outer diameter KTHD1.

The mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to one end of the mounting surface (surface) side wiring pattern SPTN formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and the other end of the mounting surface (surface) side wiring pattern SPTN is electrically connected to another mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 or a land (pad) to which a specific terminal of an electronic component is soldered.

The solder surface (back surface) land KRDy1 formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to one end of the solder surface (back surface) wiring pattern formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, and the other end of the solder surface (back surface) wiring pattern is electrically connected to the solder surface (back surface) land KRDy1 formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 or a land (pad) to which a specific terminal of an electronic component is soldered.

The mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solder surface (back) side land KRDy1 formed on the solder surface (back) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are electrically connected via the through hole KTH1, and the mounting surface (front) side wiring pattern SPTN formed on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solder surface (back) side wiring pattern formed on the solder surface (back) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are electrically connected via the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the through hole KTH1, and the solder surface (back) side land KRDy1 formed on the solder surface (back) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

A green resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating to the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, forming a mounting surface side insulating coating 1310xr. However, in the area of the mounting surface side insulating coating 1310xr corresponding to the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1, a mounting surface (surface) side resist opening KBxra is formed, having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1.

In addition, a green resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating to the copper foil surface of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 to form a solder surface side insulating coating 1310yr, but in the area of the solder surface side insulating coating 1310yr corresponding to the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1, a solder surface (back surface) side resist opening KByra is formed having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1.

The opening diameter KBxrD1 of the resist opening KBxra on the mounting surface (front side) and the opening diameter KByrD1 of the resist opening KByra on the solder surface (back side) are the same size.

The main control board 1310 is actually manufactured by arranging multiple boards from a single, fixed-length copper-clad laminate (substrate), which is then finally cut out. This single, fixed-length copper-clad laminate (substrate) is fixed to the manufacturing equipment and goes through a painting process, a drying process, a hole-punching process, and other processes before each board is finally cut out.

In this way, on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, a mounting surface (surface) resist opening KBxra having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface (surface) land KRDx1 is formed in the region of the mounting surface (surface) insulating coating 1310xr corresponding to the mounting surface (surface) land KRDx1. Therefore, the outer periphery of the mounting surface (surface) land KRDx1 is covered with green resist as an insulating coating from the outer periphery of the outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface (surface) land KRDx1 toward the center of the mounting surface (surface) land KRDx1. This allows the entire outer periphery of the mounting surface (surface) land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 to be covered with green resist as an insulating coating, thereby minimizing the area of the mounting surface (surface) land KRDx1 where the copper foil is exposed. This makes it difficult to tamper with the input signal wiring pattern through-holes, for example by electrically switching them to a solid ground (GND) (board ground) or the +5V power line on the main control board, and provides security measures for the input signal wiring pattern through-holes. This therefore contributes to improving the security of the input signal wiring pattern through-holes.

In addition, because the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 and the solder surface (back) side land KRDy1 both have exposed copper foil, electrical testing of the main control board 1310 (checking operation and abnormal potential) can be performed by contacting the tip of a contact probe with the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 from the mounting surface (front) side of the main control board 1310, or by contacting the tip of a contact probe with the solder surface (back) side land KRDy1 from the solder surface (back) side of the main control board 1310. In other words, the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 and the solder surface (back) side land KRDy1 can be used as check terminals when performing electrical testing of the main control board 1310. The contact probe may be a dedicated probe or a test lead used to check continuity with a so-called "tester."

In the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the land of the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern according to the first embodiment, on the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, in the area of the solder side insulating coating 1310yr corresponding to the solder side (back side) land KRDy1, a solder side (back side) resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder side (back side) land KRDy1 is formed, so that the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder side (back side) land KRDy1 is The outer periphery of the solder side (rear) side land KRDy1 toward the center of the solder side (rear) side land KRDy1 is covered with a green resist as an insulating coating, but as shown in Figure 190 (c), in the area of the solder side insulating coating 1310yr corresponding to the solder side (rear) side land KRDy1, a solder side (rear) side resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD2 (> opening diameter KByrD1) larger than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder side (rear) side land KRDy1 may be formed. This is because, in the pachinko machine 1, the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 and is arranged on the back side of the game board 5, and therefore, if tampering is performed on the main control board 1310 in this state, only the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 can be visually observed. Furthermore, when an operator inspecting the main control board 1310 determines which of the multiple various through holes formed on the main control board 1310 is a through hole for an input signal wiring pattern, comparing the size of the land on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x with the land on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y can help determine whether or not the through hole is for an input signal wiring pattern.

[12-1-2. Configuration for covering lands of through holes for input signal wiring patterns with insulating coating according to the second embodiment]
191(a) and 191(b), in the configuration in which the lands of the through-holes for the input signal wiring pattern according to the second embodiment are covered with an insulating coating, a thin through-hole is formed in the thickness direction of the base material K1310o of the main control board 1310 (the direction perpendicular to the front surface (perpendicular to the back surface) of the base material K1310o of the main control board 1310), and the copper foil is removed from the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the copper foil surface of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 to form a mounting surface (front surface) land KRDx1 and a solder surface (back surface) land KRDy1, each having an outer diameter KTHD1, and a mounting surface (front surface) wiring pattern SPTN and a solder surface (back surface) wiring pattern are formed. The entire inner surface of the through-hole is plated with a conductive material to form the through-hole KTH1. The outer diameter of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the outer diameter of the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are the same size, which is outer diameter KTHD1, and is the same size as the outer diameter of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 and the outer diameter of the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 in the configuration in which an insulating coating is covered on the land of the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern in the first embodiment described above.

The mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to one end of the mounting surface (surface) side wiring pattern SPTN formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and the other end of the mounting surface (surface) side wiring pattern SPTN is electrically connected to another mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 or a land (pad) to which a specific terminal of an electronic component is soldered.

The solder surface (back surface) land KRDy1 formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to one end of the solder surface (back surface) wiring pattern formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, and the other end of the solder surface (back surface) wiring pattern is electrically connected to the solder surface (back surface) land KRDy1 formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 or a land (pad) to which a specific terminal of an electronic component is soldered.

A green resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating to the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 to form a mounting surface side insulating coating 1310xr, but in the area of the mounting surface side insulating coating 1310xr corresponding to the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1, a mounting surface (surface) side resist opening KBxra is formed, which has an opening diameter KBxrD1 that is smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1, is even smaller than the outer diameter KByrD1 in the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the land of the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern in the first embodiment described above, and is larger than the inner diameter of the hole of the through hole KTH1. The inner diameter of this opening diameter KBxrD2 takes into account the resist liquid intrusion prevention area that extends concentrically outward from the inner periphery of through hole KTH1 on the mounting surface (front surface) side, and is sized to be a resist liquid intrusion prevention distance dimension (a distance of at least 0.5 mm is required to prevent green resist liquid from infiltrating through hole KTH1 of main control board 1310; in the configuration in which the lands of the input signal wiring pattern through holes in the second embodiment are covered with an insulating film) from the inner periphery of through hole KTH1 on the mounting surface (front surface). Therefore, the inner diameter of opening diameter KBxrD2 is the inner diameter of through hole KTH1 plus twice the resist liquid intrusion prevention distance dimension (0.5 mm), and is 1.0 mm larger than the inner diameter of through hole KTH1.

In contrast, a green resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating to the copper foil surface of the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, forming a solder side insulating coating 1310yr. However, in the area of the solder side insulating coating 1310yr corresponding to the solder side (back side) land KRDy1, a solder side (back side) resist opening KByra is formed, having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder side (back side) land KRDy1. The outer diameter of opening diameter KByrD1 is the same as the outer diameter of opening diameter KByrD1 in the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the land of the input signal wiring pattern through hole in the first embodiment described above.

The main control board 1310 is actually manufactured by arranging multiple boards from a single, fixed-length copper-clad laminate (substrate), which is then finally cut out. This single, fixed-length copper-clad laminate (substrate) is fixed to the manufacturing equipment and goes through a painting process, a drying process, a hole-punching process, and other processes before each board is finally cut out.

In this way, on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the area of the mounting surface side insulating coating 1310xr corresponding to the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 is provided with a mounting surface (front surface) side insulating coating having an opening diameter KBxrD1 that is smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1, and is even smaller than the outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 in the configuration in which the land of the input signal wiring pattern through hole in the first embodiment is covered with an insulating coating, and is larger than the inner diameter of the through hole KTH1. Because the surface (surface) side resist opening KBxra is formed, the outer periphery of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1, except for the resist liquid intrusion prevention region of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 (i.e., the region extending from the outer periphery of the outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 toward the center of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 to a position separated by the resist liquid intrusion prevention distance dimension (0.5 mm)), is covered with green resist as an insulating coating. This allows the green resist to be covered as an insulating coating from almost the inside to the entire outer periphery of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 (i.e., the entire area of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 excluding the resist liquid intrusion prevention area). Therefore, the area where the copper foil is exposed becomes the resist liquid intrusion prevention area, and the area of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 where the copper foil is exposed can be made extremely small compared to the configuration in which the lands of the input signal wiring pattern through-holes in the first embodiment are covered with an insulating coating. This makes it difficult to tamper with the input signal wiring pattern through-holes by, for example, electrically switching them to a solid ground (GND) (board ground) or a +5V power line created on the main control board, thereby providing security measures for the input signal wiring pattern through-holes. This contributes to improving security for through-holes for input signal wiring patterns.

In addition, because a resist liquid intrusion prevention area is provided for the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310, when green resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating to the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, even if the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is fixed to the manufacturing equipment so that it faces vertically upward (because the main control board 1310 is actually manufactured by arranging multiple boards from a single sheet of standard-length copper-clad laminate (substrate) and ultimately cutting them out, the front surface of the single sheet of standard-length copper-clad laminate (substrate) faces vertically upward), the green resist liquid will infiltrate the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 and dry without blocking the hole.

In addition, because the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 and the solder surface (back) side land KRDy1 both have exposed copper foil, electrical testing of the main control board 1310 (checking operation and abnormal potential) can be performed by contacting the tip of a contact probe with the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 from the mounting surface (front) side of the main control board 1310, or by contacting the tip of a contact probe with the solder surface (back) side land KRDy1 from the solder surface (back) side of the main control board 1310. In other words, the mounting surface (front) side land KRDx1 and the solder surface (back) side land KRDy1 can be used as check terminals when performing electrical testing of the main control board 1310. The contact probe may be a dedicated probe or a test lead used to check continuity with a so-called "tester."

In the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the land of the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern according to the second embodiment, on the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, in the area of the solder side insulating coating 1310yr corresponding to the solder side (back side) land KRDy1, a solder side (back side) resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder side (back side) land KRDy1 is formed, so that the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder side (back side) land KRDy1 is The outer periphery of the solder side (rear) side land KRDy1 toward the center of the solder side (rear) side land KRDy1 is covered with a green resist as an insulating coating, but as shown in Figure 191 (c), a solder side (rear) side resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD2 (> opening diameter KByrD1) larger than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder side (rear) side land KRDy1 may be formed in the area of the solder side insulating coating 1310yr corresponding to the solder side (rear) side land KRDy1. This is because, in the pachinko machine 1, the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 and is arranged on the back side of the game board 5, and therefore, if tampering is performed on the main control board 1310 in this state, only the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 can be visually observed. Furthermore, when an operator inspecting the main control board 1310 determines which of the multiple various through holes formed on the main control board 1310 is a through hole for an input signal wiring pattern, comparing the size of the land on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x with the land on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y can help determine whether or not the through hole is for an input signal wiring pattern.

[12-1-3. Configuration in which an insulating film is covered on the land of the through-hole for the input signal wiring pattern according to the third embodiment]
192(a) and 192(b), in a configuration in which the lands of the through-holes for the input signal wiring pattern according to the third embodiment are covered with an insulating coating, a thin through-hole is formed in the thickness direction of the base material K1310o of the main control board 1310 (the direction perpendicular to the front surface (perpendicular to the back surface) of the base material K1310o of the main control board 1310), and the copper foil is removed from the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the copper foil surface of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 to form a mounting surface (front surface) land KRDx1 and a solder surface (back surface) land KRDy1, each having an outer diameter KTHD1, and a mounting surface (front surface) wiring pattern SPTN and a solder surface (back surface) wiring pattern. The through-hole KTH1 is formed by subjecting the entire inner surface of the through-hole to conductive plating. The outer diameter of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the outer diameter of the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are the same size, which is outer diameter KTHD1, and is the same size as the outer diameter of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 and the outer diameter of the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 in the configuration in which an insulating coating is covered on the land of the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern in the first embodiment described above.

The mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to one end of the mounting surface (surface) side wiring pattern SPTN formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and the other end of the mounting surface (surface) side wiring pattern SPTN is electrically connected to another mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 or a land (pad) to which a specific terminal of an electronic component is soldered.

A green resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating to the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, forming a mounting surface side insulating coating 1310xr. Therefore, the area of the mounting surface side insulating coating 1310xr corresponding to the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1 is also coated with green resist liquid as an insulating coating to form the mounting surface side insulating coating 1310xr.

The main control board 1310 is actually manufactured by arranging multiple boards from a single sheet of fixed-length copper-clad laminate (base material) and finally cutting it out. The single sheet of fixed-length copper-clad laminate (base material) is fixed to the manufacturing equipment and goes through a painting process, a drying process, a hole-punching process, and other processes before each board is finally cut out. For this reason, when green resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating to the copper foil surface of mounting surface (surface) 1310x of main control board 1310, main control board 1310 is fixed to the manufacturing equipment so that mounting surface (surface) 1310x faces vertically upward (because main control board 1310 is actually manufactured by arranging multiple boards from a single sheet of fixed-length copper-clad laminate (substrate) and ultimately cutting them out, the front surface of the single fixed-length copper-clad laminate (substrate) faces vertically upward), and the green resist liquid seeps into through hole KTH1 of main control board 1310 from the inner periphery on the mounting surface (surface) side and blocks this hole. The green resist liquid that has seeped into through hole KTH1 of main control board 1310 dries in a recessed state from the inner periphery on the mounting surface (surface) side of through hole KTH1 toward the center of the hole due to its own weight.

In contrast, a green resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating to the copper foil surface of the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, forming a solder side insulating coating 1310yr. However, in the area of the solder side insulating coating 1310yr corresponding to the solder side (back side) land KRDy1, a solder side (back side) resist opening KByra is formed, having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder side (back side) land KRDy1. The outer diameter of opening diameter KByrD1 is the same as the outer diameter of opening diameter KByrD1 in the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the land of the input signal wiring pattern through hole in the first embodiment described above.

In this way, on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the area of the mounting surface insulating coating 1310xr corresponding to the mounting surface (surface) land KRDx1 is also covered with green resist as an insulating coating, and green resist liquid has seeped into the mounting surface (surface) side of the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 from the mounting surface (surface) side inner edge, sealing the hole. This allows the entire mounting surface (surface) land KRDx1 and the hole of the through hole KTH1 on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 to be covered with green resist as an insulating coating. This prevents the copper foil from being exposed on the mounting surface (surface) land KRDx1, and prevents the conductive plating applied to the entire inner surface of the through hole KTH1 from being exposed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. Additionally, the through-hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 can be blocked. This makes it difficult to tamper with the input signal wiring pattern through-hole by, for example, electrically switching it to a solid ground (GND) (board ground) or a +5V power line on the main control board, providing security measures for the input signal wiring pattern through-hole. This therefore contributes to improving the security of the input signal wiring pattern through-hole.

In addition, green resist liquid has seeped into the inner periphery of the mounting surface (front surface) side of through hole KTH1 of main control board 1310, sealing the hole, but the solder surface (back surface) side of through hole KTH1 of main control board 1310 is open. In other words, the mounting surface (front surface) side of through hole KTH1 of main control board 1310 is sealed with green resist liquid, while the solder surface (back surface) side is open. This is because if green resist liquid seeps into through hole KTH1 of main control board 1310 from the inner periphery on the mounting surface (front surface) side, and air remains inside through hole KTH1 of main control board 1310 while the solder surface (back surface) of through hole KTH1 of main control board 1310 is blocked, there is a risk that liquid such as resist remover will remain inside through hole KTH1. This liquid may corrode the conductive plating inside through hole KTH1, causing poor contact, or the liquid inside through hole KTH1 may instantaneously vaporize and expand (a so-called "vapor explosion") during a soldering process (such as reflow) where heat is applied, damaging the conductive plating inside through hole KTH1 and causing an electrical disconnection of through hole KTH1.

In addition, although the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 and through hole KTH1 holes exist, their presence can be concealed by the green resist, which makes the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 less noticeable against the solid green resist applied to the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and also makes the through hole KTH1 less noticeable. This makes it difficult for a tampering actor attempting to electrically switch the input signal wiring pattern through holes with, for example, a solid ground (GND) (board ground) or a +5V power line created on the main control board side, to find the input signal wiring pattern through holes (mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 and through hole KTH1 holes).

In addition, because the copper foil on both the solder side (back side) land KRDy1 and the solder side (back side) land KRDy1 is exposed, electrical testing of the main control board 1310 (checking operation and checking for abnormal potential) can be performed by bringing the tip of a contact probe into contact with the solder side (back side) land KRDy1 from the solder side (back side) of the main control board 1310. In other words, when performing electrical testing of the main control board 1310, the solder side (back side) land KRDy1 can be used as a check terminal. The contact probe may be a dedicated probe, or it may be a test lead used to check continuity with a so-called "tester."

In the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the land of the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern according to the third embodiment, on the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, in the area of the solder side insulating coating 1310yr corresponding to the solder side (back side) land KRDy1, a solder side (back side) resist opening KByra is formed having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder side (back side) land KRDy1, thereby The outer periphery of the solder side (rear) side land KRDy1 toward the center of the solder side (rear) side land KRDy1 is covered with a green resist as an insulating coating, but as shown in Figure 192 (c), a solder side (rear) side resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD2 (> opening diameter KByrD1) larger than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the solder side (rear) side land KRDy1 may be formed in the area of the solder side insulating coating 1310yr corresponding to the solder side (rear) side land KRDy1. This is because, in the pachinko machine 1, the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 and is arranged on the back side of the game board 5, and therefore, if tampering is performed on the main control board 1310 in this state, only the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 can be visually observed. Furthermore, when an operator inspecting the main control board 1310 determines which of the multiple various through holes formed on the main control board 1310 is a through hole for an input signal wiring pattern, comparing the size of the land on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x with the land on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y can help determine whether or not the through hole is for an input signal wiring pattern.

[12-1-4. Configuration in which an insulating film is covered on the land of the through-hole for the input signal wiring pattern according to the fourth embodiment]
193(a) and 193(b), in the configuration in which the lands of the through-holes for the input signal wiring pattern according to the fourth embodiment are covered with an insulating coating, a thin through-hole is formed in the thickness direction of the base material K1310o of the main control board 1310 (the direction perpendicular to the front surface (perpendicular to the back surface) of the base material K1310o of the main control board 1310), and the copper foil is removed from the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the copper foil surface of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 to form a mounting surface (front surface) land KRDx1 and a solder surface (back surface) land KRDy1, each having an outer diameter KTHD1, and a mounting surface (front surface) wiring pattern SPTN and a solder surface (back surface) wiring pattern. The through-hole KTH1 is formed by plating the entire inner surface of the through-hole with electrical conductivity. The outer diameter of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the outer diameter of the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are the same size, which is outer diameter KTHD1, and is the same size as the outer diameter of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 and the outer diameter of the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 in the configuration in which an insulating coating is covered on the land of the through hole for the input signal wiring pattern in the first embodiment described above.

The mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to one end of the mounting surface (surface) side wiring pattern SPTN formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and the other end of the mounting surface (surface) side wiring pattern SPTN is electrically connected to another mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 or a land (pad) to which a specific terminal of an electronic component is soldered.

A green resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating to the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, forming a mounting surface side insulating coating 1310xr. However, in the area of the mounting surface side insulating coating 1310xr corresponding to the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1, a mounting surface (front surface) side resist opening KBxra is formed, having an opening diameter KBxrD1 that is smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface (front surface) side land KRDx1. The outer diameter of opening diameter KBxrD1 is the same as the outer diameter of opening diameter KBxrD1 in the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the land of the input signal wiring pattern through hole according to the first embodiment described above.

In contrast, a green resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating to the copper foil surface of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, forming the solder surface side insulating coating 1310yr, and therefore the area of the solder surface side insulating coating 1310yr corresponding to the solder surface (back surface) side land KRDy1 is also coated with green resist liquid as an insulating coating to form the solder surface side insulating coating 1310yr.

The main control board 1310 is actually manufactured by arranging multiple boards from a single sheet of fixed-length copper-clad laminate (base material) and finally cutting it out. The single sheet of fixed-length copper-clad laminate (base material) is fixed to the manufacturing equipment and goes through a painting process, a drying process, a hole-punching process, and other processes before each board is finally cut out. For this reason, when green resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating to the copper foil surface of solder side (back side) 1310y of main control board 1310, main control board 1310 is fixed to the manufacturing equipment so that solder side (back side) 1310y faces vertically upward (because main control board 1310 is actually manufactured by arranging multiple boards from a single, standard-length copper-clad laminate (substrate) and ultimately cutting them out, the rear surface of the single, standard-length copper-clad laminate (substrate) faces vertically upward), and the green resist liquid seeps into through hole KTH1 in main control board 1310 from the inner periphery on the solder side (back side) and blocks the hole. The green resist liquid that has seeped into through hole KTH1 in main control board 1310 dries in a recessed state from the inner periphery on the solder side (back side) of through hole KTH1 toward the center of the hole due to its own weight.

In this way, on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, in the area of the mounting surface side insulating coating 1310xr corresponding to the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1, a mounting surface (surface) side resist opening KBxra is formed having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1, so that the outer peripheral portion of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 is covered with green resist as an insulating coating from the outer periphery of the outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 toward the center of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1. Furthermore, on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the area of the solder surface-side insulating coating 1310yr that corresponds to the solder surface (back surface)-side land KRDy1 is also covered with a green resist as an insulating coating, and green resist liquid has entered from the inner peripheral edge of the solder surface (back surface) side of the through hole KTH1 in the main control board 1310, blocking this hole. This allows the entire outer periphery of the mounting surface (front surface)-side land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 to be covered with green resist as an insulating coating, thereby minimizing the area of the mounting surface (front surface)-side land KRDx1 where the copper foil is exposed and blocking the hole of the through hole KTH1 in the main control board 1310. This makes it difficult to tamper with the input signal wiring pattern through-holes, for example by electrically switching them to a solid ground (GND) (board ground) or the +5V power line on the main control board, and provides security measures for the input signal wiring pattern through-holes. This therefore contributes to improving the security of the input signal wiring pattern through-holes.

Furthermore, since the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 has exposed copper foil, it is possible to perform an electrical test (check for operation or abnormal potential) of the main control board 1310 by contacting the tip of a contact probe with the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 from the mounting surface (surface) side of the main control board 1310. In other words, when performing an electrical test of the main control board 1310, the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 can be used as a check terminal. The contact probe may be a dedicated probe, or it may be a test lead used to check continuity with a so-called "tester."

In addition, green resist liquid has seeped into the inner periphery of the solder side (back side) of through hole KTH1 in main control board 1310, sealing the hole, but the mounting side (front side) of through hole KTH1 in main control board 1310 is open. In other words, the solder side (back side) of through hole KTH1 in main control board 1310 is sealed with green resist liquid, while the mounting side (front side) is open. This is because if green resist liquid seeps into the inner periphery of the solder surface (back surface) of through hole KTH1 in main control board 1310 and air remains inside through hole KTH1 of main control board 1310, blocking the mounting surface (front surface) of through hole KTH1 of main control board 1310, there is a risk that liquid such as resist remover will remain inside through hole KTH1. This liquid may corrode the conductive plating inside through hole KTH1, causing poor contact, or the liquid inside through hole KTH1 may instantaneously vaporize and expand (a so-called "vapor explosion") during a soldering process (such as reflow) where heat is applied, damaging the conductive plating inside through hole KTH1 and causing an electrical disconnection of through hole KTH1.

In addition, although the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 and the through hole KTH1 hole exist, the presence of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 can be hidden by the green resist on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and the presence of the through hole KTH1 hole can be hidden by the green resist on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310.Therefore, the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 can be made less noticeable against the solid white resist applied to the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and the through hole KTH1 hole can be made less noticeable. This makes it difficult for a tamperer attempting to electrically switch the input signal wiring pattern through-holes with, for example, a solid ground (GND) (board ground) or a +5V power line created on the main control board to find the input signal wiring pattern through-holes (the holes for the land KRDx1 and through-hole KTH1 on the mounting surface (front) side).

In the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the lands of the through holes for the input signal wiring pattern according to the fourth embodiment, on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, in the region of the mounting surface side insulating coating 1310xr corresponding to the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1, a mounting surface (surface) side resist opening KBxra is formed having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1. In the past, the outer periphery of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 toward the center was covered with white resist as an insulating coating, but as shown in FIG. 193(b), in the region of the mounting surface (surface) side insulating coating 1310xr corresponding to the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1, a mounting surface (surface) side resist opening KBxra may be formed having an opening diameter KBxrD2 that is smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1, is even smaller than the outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1, and is larger than the inner diameter of the through hole KTH1. The inner diameter of this opening diameter KBxrD2 takes into account the resist liquid intrusion prevention area that extends concentrically outward from the inner periphery of through hole KTH1 on the mounting surface (front surface) side, and is sized to be a resist liquid intrusion prevention distance dimension (a distance of at least 0.5 mm is required to prevent white resist liquid from infiltrating through hole KTH1 of main control board 1310; in the configuration in which the lands of the input signal wiring pattern through holes in the fourth embodiment are covered with an insulating film) from the inner periphery of through hole KTH1 on the mounting surface (front surface). Therefore, the inner diameter of opening diameter KBxrD2 is the inner diameter of through hole KTH1 plus twice the resist liquid intrusion prevention distance dimension (0.5 mm), and is 1.0 mm larger than the inner diameter of through hole KTH1.

This allows the green resist to be covered as an insulating coating from almost the inside to the entire outer periphery of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 (that is, the entire area of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 excluding the resist liquid intrusion prevention area).As a result, the area where the copper foil is exposed becomes the resist liquid intrusion prevention area, and the area of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 where the copper foil is exposed can be kept extremely small.

In addition, because a resist liquid intrusion prevention area is provided for the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310, when green resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating to the copper foil surface of the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, even if the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is fixed to the manufacturing equipment so that it faces vertically upward (because the main control board 1310 is actually manufactured by arranging multiple boards from a single sheet of standard-length copper-clad laminate (substrate) and ultimately cutting them out, the front surface of the single sheet of standard-length copper-clad laminate (substrate) faces vertically upward), the green resist liquid will infiltrate the through hole KTH1 of the main control board 1310 and dry without blocking the hole.

In addition, a green resist is applied as an insulating coating from almost the inside to the entire outer periphery of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 (i.e., the entire area of the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 excluding the resist liquid intrusion prevention area). This reduces the area where the exposed copper foil is located by forming a resist liquid intrusion prevention area. However, electrical testing of the main control board 1310 (checking operation and checking for abnormal potential) can be performed by contacting the tip of a contact probe with the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 from the mounting surface (surface) side of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the mounting surface (surface) side land KRDx1 can be used as a check terminal when conducting electrical testing of the main control board 1310. The contact probe may be a dedicated probe or a test lead used to check continuity with a so-called "tester."

[12-2. Wiring pattern to input terminal]

The detection signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e on the main control board 1310 is input as a power outage warning signal to input terminal PB0 of input port PB, which is the third lead terminal from the left in the figure among the lead terminals arranged in the upper row of the main control MPU 1310a, via various wiring patterns (power outage warning signal wiring pattern) that transmit this detection signal. The detection signal (main RWM signal) from the RWM switch 633d on the dispensing control board 633 is input as an RWM signal to input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of input port PA, which is the eighth lead terminal from the left in the figure among the lead terminals arranged in the lower row of the main control MPU 1310a, via various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring pattern) that transmit this detection signal. The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 is input to input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA, which is located 20th from the left in the figure (13th from the right in the figure) among the lead terminals arranged in the lower row of the main control MPU 1310a, via various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring pattern) that transmit this detection signal.

The various wiring patterns (power outage warning signal wiring pattern) that transmit detection signals from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e on the main control board 1310, the various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring pattern) that transmit detection signals (main RWM signals) from the RWM switch 633d on the dispensing control board 633, and the various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring pattern) that transmit detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 are arranged close to each other and routed on the solder surface (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310 so that they do not run parallel to each other (do not run side by side).

In addition, the various wiring patterns (power outage warning signal wiring pattern) that transmit detection signals from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e provided on the main control board 1310, the various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring pattern) that transmit detection signals (main RWM signals) from the RWM switch 633d provided on the dispensing control board 633, and the various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring pattern) that transmit detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 are routed only to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, without using through holes that electrically connect the wiring patterns on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y.

In this way, various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring patterns) that transmit detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a, which can change the setting probability of awarding a player a benefit, are formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, making it difficult to see how the various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring patterns) are routed when viewed from the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, which contributes to making it more difficult to tamper with the various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring patterns). This therefore contributes to improved security. Furthermore, by forming various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring patterns) that transmit detection signals (main RWM signals) from the RWM switch 633d provided on the dispensing control board 633 used for changing settings on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, it is possible to make it difficult to see how the various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring patterns) are routed when viewed from the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, which can contribute to making it difficult to tamper with the various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring patterns). Therefore, it can contribute to improving security. Furthermore, by forming the various wiring patterns (power outage warning signal wiring patterns) that transmit detection signals from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e provided on the main control board 1310 on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, it is difficult to see how the various wiring patterns (power outage warning signal wiring patterns) are routed when viewed from the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, which contributes to making it more difficult to tamper with the various wiring patterns (power outage warning signal wiring patterns). This therefore contributes to improved security.

As mentioned above, when changing the setting value, it is necessary to operate the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d. The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d are important signals that allow the setting to be changed to the probability of generating a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and it is necessary to make it difficult for the hall staff in the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed to fraudulently change the setting to an unintended probability.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring pattern) that transmit detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a, which allows the probability of awarding a benefit to the player to be changed, and the various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring pattern) that transmit detection signals from the RWM switch 633d, are routed on the solder surface (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310 so that they are not placed close to each other and do not run parallel to each other (do not run side by side). This allows the various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring patterns) that transmit detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a and the various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring patterns) that transmit detection signals from the RWM switch 633d to be separated from each other and input to specified input terminals (PA5 (setting key signal input terminal), PA0 (RWM signal input terminal)) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, making it difficult to simultaneously tamper with the various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring patterns) that transmit detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a and the various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring patterns) that transmit detection signals from the RWM switch 633d. This therefore contributes to improved security when changing settings.

The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input as a setting key signal to a predetermined input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring patterns), and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is input as an RWM signal to a predetermined input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring patterns). Input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA is located eighth from the left in the figure among the lead terminals arranged in the lower row of the main control MPU 1310a, while input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA is located twentieth from the left in the figure (thirteenth from the right in the figure) among the lead terminals arranged in the lower row of the main control MPU 1310a. In this way, the predetermined input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a to which the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input as a setting key signal and the predetermined input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a to which the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is input as an RWM signal are not arranged adjacent to each other. Other lead terminals (specifically, the 9th to 19th lead terminals from the left in the figure among the lead terminals arranged in the lower row of the main control MPU 1310a, a total of 11 lead terminals arranged in the lower row) are arranged between a specified input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of input port PA of 1310a and a specified input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of input port PA of main control MPU 1310a, to which the detection signal from RWM switch 633d is input as an RWM signal.

As described above, on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, foil-punched areas are formed in which the copper foil is punched out around the through-holes through which the lead terminals of the ZIP-type main control MPU 1310a are inserted, excluding those electrically connected to the solid ground (GND) (board ground), around the +5V power supply wiring pattern, around the signal output wiring pattern, around the input signal wiring pattern, and around specific through-holes (for example, through-holes electrically connecting the output signal wiring patterns on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y). Furthermore, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, as described above, the logic of the setting key signal becomes LOW (logic indicating a setting enabled state) and is input to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the pressing operation portion of the RWM switch 633d provided on the dispensing control board 633 is operated, as described above, the logic of the RWM signal becomes LOW (logic indicating a pressing operation state) and is input to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. This makes it more difficult to tamper with the electrical connection between the input terminals PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) and ground (GND) (board ground) by removing foil from the periphery of the input terminals PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and PA0 (RWM signal input terminal), thereby contributing to improved security.

In addition to the terminals between the setting key signal input terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, which is electrically connected to various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring patterns) that transmit detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and the RWM signal input terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, which is electrically connected to various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring patterns) that transmit detection signals from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the dispensing control board 633, The peripheral terminals (other adjacent terminals) of the setting key signal input terminal and the peripheral terminals (adjacent terminals) of the RWM signal input terminal may be electrically connected to wiring patterns that input other signals or wiring patterns that output other signals so that the logic of the RWM signal that indicates that the pressing operation portion of RWM switch 633d is not being operated is HI (logic that indicates a no-press operation state), and the logic of the setting key signal that indicates that setting key switch 1311a is being turned OFF is HI (logic that indicates a setting disabled state). This makes it more difficult to tamper with the RWM signal input terminal and setting key signal input terminal, contributing to improved security.

In addition, the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input as a setting key signal to a predetermined input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring patterns), and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is input as an RWM signal to a predetermined input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring patterns).As a result, the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d were input to the lead terminals arranged in the lower row of the main control MPU 1310a, but for example, the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a may be input from the lead terminals arranged in the lower row of the main control MPU 1310a to the lead terminals arranged in the upper row. When the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input as a setting key signal to a specific input terminal PB7 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring pattern), the input terminal PB7 of the input port PB is located as the 22nd from the left in the figure (11th from the right in the figure) of the lead terminals arranged in the upper row of the main control MPU 1310a. In this way, the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input from the lead terminals arranged in the lower row of the main control MPU 1310a to the lead terminals arranged in the upper row, and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is input to the lead terminals arranged in the lower row of the main control MPU 1310a. This configuration in which two detection signals are input to the lead terminals in the upper and lower rows can contribute to improving the security of setting changes.

The logic states of input ports PA and PB of the main control MPU 1310a are treated as memory information in an address space using the memory-mapped I/O method. For example, for input port PA, the main control MPU 1310a can simultaneously obtain the logic state of each input terminal at the same address. Similarly, for input port PB, the main control MPU 1310a can simultaneously obtain the logic state of each input terminal at the same address (a different address from that of input port PA). The input ports PA and PB of the main control MPU 1310a are 8-bit input ports, and each of the input terminals PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) to PA7 and PB0 to PB7 of input ports PA and PB is pre-assigned to one of the 0th through 7th bits.

[Summary A]
A1. As described above, the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input to input terminal PA5 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, but the wiring patterns electrically connecting the lead terminals (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal) of the setting key switch 1311a, the lead terminals of the electronic components (resistors MR10 to MR13, capacitor MC10, transistor MTR10) that make up the main control input circuit 1310b, and the lead terminal (input terminal PA5 of the input port PA) of the main control MPU 1310a are all formed on solder surface (back surface) 1310y, which is the surface opposite to mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310.

A2. In the signal transmission path between the lead terminals (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal) of the setting key switch 1311a and the lead terminal (input terminal PA5 of input port PA) of the main control MPU 1310a, the wiring pattern is routed to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. Therefore, as described above, there are no through holes formed in the main control board 1310 for electrically connecting the wiring patterns between the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

A3. In the signal transmission path between the lead terminals (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal) of the setting key switch 1311a and the lead terminal (input terminal PA5 of input port PA) of the main control MPU 1310a, it is difficult to route the wiring pattern only on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, and it is necessary to also use the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. In this case, when forming through holes to electrically connect the wiring patterns between the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the outer periphery of the through-hole land or the entire surface is covered with a green resist insulating coating on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and/or the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, as shown in Figures 190 to 193.

A4. As described above, the main control board 1310 is housed and sealed in a main control board box 1320 that is composed of a cover body 1301 and a base body 1302 and can be opened and closed by sliding longitudinally. The main control board box 1320 is attached to the back side of the cover body 1301 so that the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 faces the inside of the cover body 1301. In this state, when the base body 1302 is moved longitudinally to align it with a predetermined position on the cover body 1301, the outer peripheral surface of the base body 1302 fits within the inner peripheral surface of the cover body 1301, and the main control board 1310 is housed within the space formed by the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302. Thereafter, the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are fixed together by screwing in a one-way screw or the like in the crimped portion 1303, which serves as a sealing portion, and the main control board box is sealed.

A5. As described above, the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is rotated by inserting the setting key into the socket 1311aba formed on the front of the setting key cylinder 1311ab. If the setting key switch 1311a is pressed when the setting key is inserted into the socket 1311aba of the setting key switch 1311a, causing the main control board 1310 to bend and warp, there is a risk of the wiring pattern formed on the main control board 1310 being broken. Therefore, to prevent the main control board 1310 from bending, a protrusion 1302p (shown in Figure 185) is formed on the base body 1302 in an area on the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310 that corresponds to the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310.

When the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 and the setting key switch 1311a is not pressed (when a setting key is inserted into the socket 1311aba of the setting key switch 1311a and rotated to release the pressure from the setting key, or when no setting key is inserted into the socket 1311aba of the setting key switch 1311a), as described above, a distance dimension d2 (e.g., approximately 1 mm) is provided as a predetermined clearance between the front surface of the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. When the setting key switch 1311a is pressed, the front surface of the protrusion 1302p abuts against the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, preventing the main control board 1310 from bending.

A6. As described above, a distance dimension d2 (e.g., approximately 1 mm) is provided as a predetermined clearance between the front surface of the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. When the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 and the setting key switch 1311a is not pressed (when a setting key is inserted into the socket 1311aba of the setting key switch 1311a and rotated to release the pressure from the setting key, or when the setting key is not inserted into the socket 1311aba of the setting key switch 1311a in the first place), the front surface of the protrusion 1302p and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 do not come into contact. Furthermore, when the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are slid together when assembling the main control board box 1320, or when the main control board box is released from its sealed state and the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are slid together when removing the main control board 1310, the front surface of the protrusion 1302p abuts against the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, preventing damage to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

The front surface of the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 may come into contact with the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. Therefore, as shown in Figure 186(b), the copper foil portion (copper foil layer, copper plane) is removed from the area of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 where the front surface of the protrusion 1302p may come into contact, and the area corresponding to the surrounding area. The entire area from which the copper foil portion (copper foil layer, copper plane) has been removed is covered with a green resist insulating coating. Even if the green resist insulating coating formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is rubbed off by the front surface of the protrusion 1302p due to repeated pressing of the setting key switch 1311a, the front surface of the protrusion 1302p will not come into contact with the copper foil portion (copper foil layer, copper plane). This prevents the front surface of the protrusion 1302p from coming into contact with the wiring pattern or the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, preventing the wiring pattern from being damaged or broken by the front surface of the protrusion 1302p and preventing damage to the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310.

A7. As described above, the main control board 1310 is housed and sealed in a main control board box 1320 that is composed of a cover body 1301 and a base body 1302 and can be opened and closed by sliding longitudinally. The main control board box 1320 is attached to the back side of the cover body 1301 so that the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 faces the inside of the cover body 1301. In this state, when the base body 1302 is moved longitudinally to align with a predetermined position on the cover body 1301, the outer peripheral surface of the base body 1302 fits within the inner peripheral surface of the cover body 1301, and the main control board 1310 is housed within the space formed by the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302. When the base body 1302 is moved longitudinally to align with a predetermined position on the cover body 1301, the front surface of the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 also moves longitudinally. The solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, which corresponds to the area where the front surface of the protrusion 1302p moves, is formed so that no wiring pattern is routed around it. This is because, although a distance dimension d2 (e.g., approximately 1 mm) is provided as a predetermined clearance between the front surface of the protrusion 1302p and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, when the base body 1302 is moved longitudinally to align with the predetermined position of the cover body 1301, the front surface of the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 may rub against the green resist insulating coating formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board, and it is therefore necessary to prevent damage or breakage of the wiring pattern.

In addition, the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the area where the front surface of the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 moves may not have a solid ground (GND) (board ground) formed in addition to the wiring pattern. This is because, although a distance dimension d2 (e.g., approximately 1 mm) is provided as a predetermined clearance between the front surface of the protrusion 1302p and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, when the base body 1302 is moved longitudinally to align with the predetermined position of the cover body 1301, the front surface of the protrusion 1302p may rub against the green resist insulating coating formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, and therefore it is necessary to prevent damage to the solid ground (GND) (board ground).

A8. The protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 has a cylindrical shape. This allows the area in which the front surface of the protrusion 1302p moves to be the area in which the front surface (circular shape) of the cylinder that is the protrusion 1302p moves. Therefore, as the protrusion 1302p slides parallel to the bottom edge of the main control board 1310 (along the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310), the left-right distance dimension becomes the length of sliding movement of the protrusion 1302p, and the up-down distance dimension becomes the diameter of the cylinder, thereby making it possible to reduce the area in which the front surface of the protrusion 1302p moves. This contributes to increasing the degree of freedom in routing the wiring pattern when routing the wiring pattern to avoid the area in which the front surface of the protrusion 1302p moves.

Furthermore, as the protrusion 1302p slides parallel to the bottom edge of the main control board 1310 (along the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310), the vertical distance dimension in the area where the front surface of the protrusion 1302p moves becomes the diameter of a cylinder and is constant.As a result, when the base body 1302 is moved longitudinally to match the predetermined position of the cover body 1301, interference between the side surface of the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 and the lead terminals of the electronic components soldered to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 (the lead terminals (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal) of the setting key switch 1311a) can be prevented (suppressed).

A9. The protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 may be formed in a shape having a constant width along the longitudinal direction of the base body 1302 (a shape having a constant width dimension equal to the outer diameter of the cylindrical protrusion 1302p). In this way, the area in which the front surface of the protrusion 1302p moves is such that the horizontal distance dimension becomes the length of sliding movement of the protrusion 1302p as the protrusion 1302p slides parallel to the bottom edge of the main control board 1310 (along the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310), and the vertical distance dimension becomes the constant width of the protrusion 1302p. As a result, when the wiring pattern is routed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 near the position corresponding to the area where the protrusion 1302p moves, the wiring pattern can be routed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 along the longitudinal shape of the protrusion 1302p, thereby achieving a parallel positional relationship between the wiring pattern and the longitudinal shape of the protrusion 1302p, thereby preventing the front surface of the protrusion 1302p from rubbing against the green resist insulating coating formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 and damaging or disconnecting the wiring pattern.

Furthermore, by allowing the protrusion 1302p to slide parallel to the bottom edge of the main control board 1310 (along the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310), the vertical distance dimension in the area where the front surface of the protrusion 1302p moves becomes constant and becomes the fixed width of the protrusion 1302p. Therefore, when the base body 1302 is moved longitudinally to match the predetermined position of the cover body 1301, interference between the side surface of the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 and the lead terminals of the electronic components soldered to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 (the lead terminals (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal) of the setting key switch 1311a) can be prevented (suppressed).

A10. The protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 is not formed with a long shape extending perpendicular to the longitudinal direction. If the protrusion 1302p were formed with a long shape extending perpendicular to the longitudinal direction, when the base body 1302 was moved longitudinally to align it with the predetermined position of the cover body 1301, the side of the protrusion 1302p would interfere with the lead terminals (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal) of the electronic components soldered to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. For this reason, the protrusion 1302p is not formed with a long shape extending perpendicular to the longitudinal direction. In this way, when the base body 1302 is moved longitudinally to align it with the predetermined position of the cover body 1301, interference between the side surface of the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 and the lead terminals of the electronic components soldered to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 (the lead terminals (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal) of the setting key switch 1311a) can be prevented (suppressed).

A11. As shown in Figure 184, the setting key switch 1311a is composed of a setting key cylinder 1311ab into which the setting key is inserted and rotated; a rectangular base body 1311ac that is connected to the outer cylinder 1311aa and forms a circuit that turns the contacts ON or OFF when the setting key cylinder 1311ab is rotated; and a frame plate 1311ad that has a hole penetrating the outer cylinder 1311aa at a position corresponding to the outer cylinder 1311aa, is bent to cover the front and side surfaces of the base body 1311ac, and has a pair of protruding pieces 1311ada, 1311ada formed on both sides that protrude rearward from the base body 1311ac. The setting key cylinder 1311ab is molded from non-conductive resin, and the frame plate 1311ad is molded from conductive metal. The setting key cylinder 1311ab and frame plate 1311ad are not electrically connected or conductive, and are electrically insulated.

A12. The lead terminals (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal) of the setting key switch 1311a are inserted into through holes from the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and soldered to protrude from the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, and are electrically connected by the internal circuit of the setting key switch 1311a to the wiring pattern that forms the signal transmission path to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. A pair of protrusions 1311ada, 1311ada is formed on the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a. As shown in FIG. 186, the pair of protrusions 1311ada, 1311ada are inserted into long through holes SLH1, SLH2 from the mounting surface (front surface) 1310 of the main control board 1310 and soldered to protrude from the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, thereby electrically connecting to the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310 and electrically connecting the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a and the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310.

The pair of protruding pieces 1311ada, 1311ada of the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a are inserted into the long through holes SLH1, SLH2 from the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and are soldered so as to protrude from the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, but are not electrically connected to the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, and the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a may be in an electrically floating state.

A13. The locking unit 650, which locks the outer frame 2 and main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and main frame 4, is made of conductive metal. Unlike the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, the locking unit 650 is earthed to the game hall's island equipment via an earth wire (not shown).

A14. The worker operating the setting key switch 1311a must first release the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2, and must insert a key (this key is a conductive metal key; hereinafter, this may be referred to as a "metal key") into the keyhole 132 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body 131 of the locking unit 650 and turn it. Even if the worker is electrically charged, by inserting the metal key into the keyhole 132 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body 131 of the locking unit 650, the electrically charged potential from the worker can be dissipated by being grounded to the locking unit 650 and then to the island equipment of the amusement hall via an earth wire (not shown), thereby eliminating the electrically charged potential from the worker.

Even if an operator inserts a setting key into the socket 1311aba of the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, any potential charge on the operator has already been grounded to the island equipment of the amusement hall and removed, preventing damage to the setting key switch 1311a due to electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge of the operator's potential. Even if an operator inserts the setting key into the socket 1311aba of the setting key switch 1311a while still charged, the setting key cylinder 1311ab and frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a are electrically insulated as described above, so the potential charge on the operator will not penetrate through the setting key cylinder 1311ab to the conductive metal frame plate 1311ad connected to the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, preventing damage to the main control board 1310. (Naturally, the signal terminals (COM1 terminal, COM2 terminal, A terminal, B terminal) that are the lead terminals of the setting key switch 1311a are insulated from the frame plate 1311ad and the setting key cylinder 1311ab.)

Furthermore, the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a is electrically connected to the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, so the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a will not remain charged.

In addition, if the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a is not connected to the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, together with the frame plate 1311ad, will not be electrically connected to the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310. Even if a charged operator inserts the setting key into the socket 1311aba formed on the front of the setting key cylinder 1311ab, the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a is not electrically connected (insulated) from either the frame plate 1311ad or the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, so the operator's charged potential does not infiltrate the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310 via the setting key cylinder 1311ab of the setting key switch 1311a, preventing damage to the main control board 1310. However, because the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a is not electrically connected to the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310, if the setting key switch 1311a becomes charged, it will not be able to discharge.

The long through holes SLH1' and SLH2' to which the pair of protruding pieces 1311ada and 1311ada of the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a are soldered are not electrically connected to the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310 and are in an electrically floating state. The through hole SLTH4 through which the COM2 terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted, the through hole SLTH3 through which the COM1 terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted, and the through hole SLTH1 through which the A terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted are electrically connected to the wiring patterns SPTN1 and SPTN2, the through hole SLTH1 is further electrically connected to the wiring pattern SPTN3, and the through hole SLTH2 through which the B terminal of the setting key switch 1311a is inserted is electrically connected to the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310.

As such, since the wiring patterns SPTN1 to SPTN3 and through holes SLTH1 to SLTH4 are present around the long through holes SLH1' and SLH2', a solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310 is formed between the long through holes SLH1' and SLH2' and the wiring patterns SPTN1 to SPTN3, and a solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310 is formed between the long through holes SLH1' and SLH2' and the through holes SLTH1 to SLTH4. By forming a land (land), if the frame plate 1311ad of the setting key switch 1311a is not electrically connected to the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310 and the setting key switch 1311a becomes charged, and discharge is no longer possible, the long through holes SLH1', SLH2' and the wiring patterns SPTN1 to SPTN3 must not be adjacent to each other without the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310 in between, to avoid any impact. Also, it is necessary to ensure that the long through holes SLH1', SLH2' and the through holes SLTH1 to SLTH4 are not adjacent to each other without the solid ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310 in between.

[Summary B]
B1. The setting key signal wiring pattern that transmits a detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, and the RWM signal wiring pattern that transmits a detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the dispensing control board 633 is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA, which is another lead terminal different from the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a.

The logical states of input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of input port PA of main control MPU 1310a and input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of input port PA of main control MPU 1310a are treated as memory information in an address space using the memory-mapped I/O method, allowing the main control MPU 1310a to simultaneously acquire them at the same address. In other words, as described above, input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of input port PA of main control MPU 1310a and input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of input port PA of main control MPU 1310a are each pre-assigned to one of bits 0 through 7 for a given port having 8 bits.

As mentioned above, the IC package of the main control MPU 1310a is a ZIP (Zigzag In-line Package) in which the lead terminals protruding vertically from the bottom surface of the main control MPU 1310a are arranged in two rows along the longitudinal direction by alternately bending them. Input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of input port PA and input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of input port PA are not arranged adjacent to each other in one of the two rows.

For example, if input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of input port PA are arranged in one of the two columns, other lead terminals are arranged between input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of input port PA and input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of input port PA so that input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of input port PA and input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of input port PA are not arranged next to each other.

B2. The setting key signal wiring pattern that transmits the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, and the RWM signal wiring pattern that transmits the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the dispensing control board 633 is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA, which is a lead terminal different from the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Due to the electrical connection, input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of input port PA are arranged in one of the two rows, but the setting key signal wiring pattern that transmits detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the RWM signal wiring pattern that transmits detection signals from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the dispensing control board 633 may also be electrically connected so that they are arranged in separate rows of the two rows.

B3. The setting key signal wiring pattern that transmits the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, and the RWM signal wiring pattern that transmits the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the dispensing control board 633 is another lead terminal that is different from the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, and is connected to the input terminal While the setting key signal input terminal 1311a is electrically connected to the setting key signal wiring pattern that transmits a detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and the RWM signal input terminal 633d is electrically connected to the RWM signal wiring pattern that transmits a detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the dispensing control board 633, the logic states of these terminals may be acquired at different addresses. In other words, the setting key signal input terminal and the RWM signal input terminal may be assigned in advance so that they can be acquired separately from different input ports. If input terminals (lead terminals) are grouped together for each input port of the main control MPU 1310a, the setting key signal input terminal and the RWM signal input terminal can be separated from each other by using different addresses.

B4. The logical state of the operation signal, which is a detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and transmitted via the setting key signal wiring pattern electrically connected to input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, has two states: a logic (HI) that indicates a setting disabled state and a logic (LOW) that indicates a setting enabled state. The logic (HI) that indicates a setting disabled state pulls up the voltage of the setting key signal wiring pattern electrically connected to input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) toward the +5V power line created by the +5V generation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, while the logic (LOW) that indicates a setting enabled state pulls down the voltage of the setting key signal wiring pattern electrically connected to input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) toward the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310.

The circuit is therefore configured so that input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and other adjacent input terminals (or other input terminals in the vicinity of input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal)) are electrically connected to the +5V power line created by the +5V generation circuit 1310g on the main control board 1310. As a result, even if unauthorized tampering were to occur, such as shorting out input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and other adjacent input terminals, the voltage of the setting key signal wiring pattern electrically connected to input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) would be pulled up toward the +5V power line created by the +5V generation circuit 1310g on the main control board 1310. This would result in the logical state of the operation signal, which is a detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a transmitted via the setting key signal wiring pattern electrically connected to input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal), becoming logic HI, indicating a setting disabled state, and preventing setting changes.

The logic state of the operation signal, which is a detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the dispensing control board 633 and transmitted via the RWM signal wiring pattern electrically connected to input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, is either a logic (HI) indicating a non-operated state or a logic (LOW) indicating a pressed state. The logic (HI) indicating a non-operated state raises the voltage of the RWM signal wiring pattern electrically connected to input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) toward the +5V power line created by the +5V generation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, while the logic (LOW) indicating a pressed state lowers the voltage of the RWM signal wiring pattern electrically connected to input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) toward the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310.

Therefore, like input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal), input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) is also configured so that other input terminals adjacent to input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) (or other input terminals in the vicinity of input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal)) are electrically connected to the +5V power supply line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310. As a result, even if unauthorized modification is made to short-circuit another input terminal adjacent to input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal), the voltage of the RWM signal wiring pattern electrically connected to input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) is pulled up to the +5V power line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, and the logical state of the operation signal, which is a detection signal from the RWM switch 633d transmitted via the RWM signal wiring pattern electrically connected to input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal), will ultimately become a logic (HI) that indicates a no-press operation state, making it impossible to change the settings.

In addition to the terminals between the setting key signal input terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, which is electrically connected to various wiring patterns (setting key signal wiring patterns) that transmit detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and the RWM signal input terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, which is electrically connected to various wiring patterns (RWM signal wiring patterns) that transmit detection signals from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the dispensing control board 633, The peripheral terminals (other adjacent terminals) of the setting key signal input terminal and the peripheral terminals (adjacent terminals) of the RWM signal input terminal may be electrically connected to wiring patterns that input other signals or wiring patterns that output other signals so that the logic of the RWM signal that indicates that the pressing operation portion of RWM switch 633d is not being operated is HI (logic that indicates a no-press operation state), and the logic of the setting key signal that indicates that setting key switch 1311a is being turned OFF is HI (logic that indicates a setting disabled state). This makes it more difficult to tamper with the RWM signal input terminal and setting key signal input terminal, contributing to improved security.

B5. When the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, as described above, the logic of the setting key signal becomes LOW (logic that indicates a setting enabled state) and is input to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, no ground (GND) (board ground) is formed around the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and around the setting key signal wiring pattern that is electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal), and these are foil-punched areas to prevent the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and the setting key signal wiring pattern from being improperly short-circuited to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310. In other words, no ground (GND) (board ground) is formed (arranged) around input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) or around the setting key signal wiring pattern electrically connected to input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal), where the logic of the setting key signal that sets the setting key switch 1311a to the ON state is LOW (logic that conveys a setting enabled state). This prevents the voltage applied to input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) and the setting key signal wiring pattern from being improperly pulled down to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310.

Furthermore, as described above, when the pressing operation part of the RWM switch 633d provided on the dispensing control board 633 is operated, the logic of the RWM signal becomes LOW (logic that conveys the pressing operation status) and is input to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a.Therefore, no ground (GND) (board ground) is formed around the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) and around the RWM signal wiring pattern electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal), and these are foil-punched areas to prevent the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) and the RWM signal wiring pattern from being improperly short-circuited to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310. In other words, no ground (GND) (board ground) is formed (arranged) around input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) or around the RWM signal wiring pattern electrically connected to input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal), where the logic of the RWM signal that sets the pressing operation part of RWM switch 633d in an operated state is LOW (logic that conveys the pressing operation state). This prevents the voltage applied to input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) and the RWM signal wiring pattern from being improperly pulled down to the ground (GND) (board ground) of the main control board 1310.

B6. The logical state of the operation signal, which is a detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and transmitted via the setting key signal wiring pattern electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, is a logic (HI) that indicates a setting disabled state and a logic (LOW) that indicates a setting enabled state. Also, the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the dispensing control board 633 and transmitted via the RWM signal wiring pattern electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, The logical state of a certain operation signal is a logic (HI) that conveys a non-pressed state and a logic (LOW) that conveys a pressed state, and the logic (HI) that conveys a non-setting state and the logic (HI) that conveys a non-pressed state are the same logic (HI), and the logic (LOW) that conveys a settable state and the logic (LOW) that conveys a pressed state are the same logic (LOW).However, instead of this, the logical states of the logic that conveys a non-setting state and the logic that conveys a pressed state may be the same logic (HI or LOW), and the logical states of the logic that conveys a settable state and the logic that conveys a non-pressed state may be the same logic (LOW or HI). Compared to using the same logic for communicating the settable state and the logic for communicating the pressed state, using the same logic for communicating the settable state and the logic for communicating the pressed state makes it difficult for someone attempting to tamper with input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal), setting key signal wiring pattern, input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal), and RWM signal wiring pattern to understand the logic of this combination, which ultimately results in one being short-circuited to ground (GND) (board ground) and the other to the power supply, which is time-consuming and requires effort. It also makes it more difficult to tamper with the RWM signal input terminal, setting key signal wiring pattern, setting key signal input terminal, and RWM signal wiring pattern, contributing to improved security.

Furthermore, when the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320, as described above, the main control board 1310 is placed (sandwiched) in the gap (space) formed by the cover body side ribs 1301rb formed in multiple positions on the cover body 1301 and the base body side ribs 1302rb formed in multiple positions on the base body 1302. Furthermore, as described above, the base body 1302 is formed with a protrusion 1302p that can come into contact with the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the main control board 1310. When a metal setting key is inserted into a socket 1311aba formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder 1311ab, and the main control board 1310 is bent and warped by the force of the insertion, the protrusion 1302p comes into contact with the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310, thereby preventing the main control board 1310 from further bending and warping, and preventing breakage of the wiring pattern formed on the main control board 1310 and peeling of the solder. In the region of the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 that comes into contact with the front surface of the protrusion 1302p formed on the base body 1302 and its periphery, a foil punched area SINSy having a circular shape where the copper foil has been punched out is formed, as shown in FIG. 186(b). This prevents damage to the solid ground (board ground) on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 by the protrusion 1302p, even if the solder surface insulating coating 1310yr is scraped off by the protrusion 1302p. The circular foil cutout area SINSy where the copper foil has been cut out safely and effectively utilizes the limited board area.

B7. By mounting the setting key switch 1311a on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and mounting the RWM switch 633d on the mounting surface (front surface) of the payout control board 633, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d are mounted on separate control boards. This means that the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 provided on the gaming board 5 and the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the payout control board 633 provided on the main frame 4 are positioned apart, and any attempt to commit fraud would require tampering with both the setting key switch 1311a side and the RWM switch 633d side, which is an extremely time-consuming process. This discourages fraudsters who see the arrangement of the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM switch 633d from attempting to tamper, making fraud more difficult.

When actually changing the settings, it is necessary to operate the setting key switch 1311a, then operate the RWM switch 633d while operating the power switch 630a to power on the pachinko machine 1. The power switch 630a is mounted on the power supply board 630 of the power supply unit 620c, which is attached to the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Therefore, the setting key switch 1311a, RWM switch 633d, and power switch 630a required to change the settings are each mounted on separate boards.

B8. The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the dispensing control board 633 were input to designated input terminals (PA5, PA0) of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b (an input circuit mainly composed of resistors and transistors, with a common circuit configuration) without an error detection function mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, as shown in Figure 179. However, they may also be input to the designated input terminals (PA5, PA0) of the main control MPU 1310a via dedicated ICs equipped with input circuits (i.e., the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a via a dedicated IC for setting key input, and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d via a dedicated IC for RWM input). This makes it difficult to tamper with the logic state of the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d, thereby contributing to improved fraud prevention measures.

Furthermore, the main control input circuit 1310b without error detection function mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is an input circuit mainly composed of resistors and transistors, and since it has a common circuit configuration, it may be configured as a DIP-type transistor array in which the transistors of multiple main control input circuits 1310b are combined into a single IC.

B9. The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the dispensing control board 633 were input to designated input terminals (PA5, PA0) of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b (an input circuit mainly composed of resistors and transistors, with a common circuit configuration) without an error detection function mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, as shown in Figure 179. However, they may also be input to the designated input terminals (PA5, PA0) of the main control MPU 1310a via dedicated ICs each equipped with an input circuit (i.e., the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a via a dedicated IC for setting key input, and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d via a dedicated IC for RWM input). In this case, the resistors and transistors that make up the main control input circuit 1310b, which does not have an error detection function, are placed between the separate dedicated ICs. This makes it difficult to distinguish which circuit is transmitting the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a and which is transmitting the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d, contributing to improved fraud prevention measures.

B10. The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the dispensing control board 633 are input to specified input terminals (PA5, PA0) of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b without error detection function, as shown in FIG. 179. When using a DIP-type transistor array in which the transistors of multiple main control input circuits 1310b are combined into a single IC, the input terminal of the DIP-type transistor array to which the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input and the input terminal of the DIP-type transistor array to which the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is input should not be arranged next to each other, or the wiring pattern should be arranged so that the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input to one of the multiple input terminals protruding from one side of the DIP-type transistor array, and the wiring pattern should be arranged so that the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d is input to one of the multiple input terminals protruding from the other side. This can contribute to improved fraud prevention measures.

B11. As shown in FIG. 179, the voltages of the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the dispensing control board 633 are pulled up to the power line side by resistors MR16 and MR5. These resistors MR16 and MR5 are pull-up resistors MR16 and MR5, and are located away from the setting key switch 1311a. Specifically, resistor MR16, which constitutes the logic inversion circuit 1310iv, has one end electrically connected to the +5V power line created by the +5V creation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, and the other end electrically connected to the input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, and is located to the right of the connector MCN8, which is located to the right of the setting key switch 1311a. Resistor MR2, which constitutes main control input circuit 1310b without error detection function, has one end electrically connected to the +5V power line created by +5V creation circuit 1310g provided on main control board 1310, and the other end electrically connected to input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of input port PA of main control MPU 1310a, and is located above the lead-type resistor array located above setting key switch 1311a. Since RWM switch 633d is mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of dispensing control board 633, resistors MR16 and MR5 are located away from RWM switch 633d. If resistors MR16 and MR5 are tampered with, there is a risk that the logical state of the operation signal, which is the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and the logical state of the operation signal, which is the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d, may be manipulated. Therefore, by separating resistors MR16 and MR5 from the setting key switch 1311a (RWM switch 633d), the resistors MR16 and MR5 can be blended in with other electronic components mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, making it possible to conceal the presence of important resistors MR16 and MR5.

Furthermore, by separating resistors MR16 and MR5 from the setting key switch 1311a (RWM switch 633d), even if unauthorized access is attempted by inserting a thin, tamper-evident tool such as a wire through a gap between the setting key switch 1311a and the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320, it becomes more difficult to tamper with resistors MR16 and MR5, thereby contributing to improved security.

B12. Resistor MR16, which constitutes the logic inversion circuit 1310iv, has one end electrically connected to the +5V power line created by the +5V generation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, and the other end electrically connected to input terminal PA5 (setting key signal input terminal) of input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. It is located to the right of connector MCN8, which is located to the right of the setting key switch 1311a. Resistor MR2, which constitutes the main control input circuit 1310b without error detection function, has one end electrically connected to the +5V power line created by the +5V generation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board 1310, and the other end electrically connected to input terminal PA0 (RWM signal input terminal) of input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. It is located above the lead-type resistor array located above the setting key switch 1311a. In this way, resistors MR16 and MR5 are located at a distance from each other. This makes resistors MR16 and MR5 blend in with other electronic components mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, making it difficult to notice that they are important electronic components related to the logical state of the operation signal, which is the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and the logical state of the operation signal, which is the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d.

Furthermore, by separating resistors MR16 and MR5 from each other, it becomes more difficult to tamper with resistors MR16 and MR5 simultaneously, which contributes to improved security.

B13. Between the main control input circuit 1310b without error detection function, which receives detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the payout control board 633, and the main control MPU 1310a, other circuits such as various DIP-type ICs, lead-type resistors, lead-type diodes, lead-type capacitors, lead-type electrolytic capacitors, and DIP-type crystal oscillators are arranged as shown in Figure 187. In this way, even if an attempt is made to insert a long, thin illegal tool such as a wire into the main control board box 1320 and short-circuit the lead terminals of the main control MPU 1310a, the other circuits can prevent the illegal tool from being inserted, and can induce a short circuit to other circuits, preventing the operation of the main control board 1310 and making it impossible to play. Furthermore, even if the main control input circuit 1310b without an error detection function, which receives detection signals from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front) of the payout control board 633, is replaced with a dedicated IC equipped with an input circuit, another circuit is interposed between the dedicated IC and the main control input circuit. Even with this configuration, even if an attempt is made to insert a long, thin illegal tool such as a wire into the main control board box 1320 and short-circuit the lead terminals of the main control MPU 1310a, the other circuit can prevent the illegal tool from being inserted, and the short-circuit to the other circuit can be induced, preventing the operation of the main control board 1310 and making it impossible to play.

B14. The detection signal from the RWM switch 633d mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) of the payout control board 633 may be configured to be transmitted by coupling the game board drawer connector and the main frame drawer connector. In this case, the wiring pattern that transmits the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d from the board on which the game board drawer connector is mounted is formed on the surface opposite to where the game board drawer connector is mounted (or is covered by the drawer connector even if it is formed on the mounting surface on which the game board drawer connector is mounted), making it difficult to see. At the same time, the wiring pattern that transmits the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d from the board on which the main frame drawer connector is mounted is formed on the surface opposite to where the main frame drawer connector is mounted (or is covered by the drawer connector even if it is formed on the mounting surface on which the main frame drawer connector is mounted), making it difficult to see.

Now, let's explain the drawer connector. The drawer connector is a connector that automatically electrically connects the main frame 4 and game board 5 simply by attaching the game board 5 to the main frame 4. A game board side drawer connector (convex type) is provided on the game board side relay board located in a predetermined position on the rear surface of the game board 5, and a main frame side drawer connector (concave type) is provided on the main frame side relay board located in a predetermined position on the front surface of the main frame 4.

When the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 is guided into the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) of the main frame 4, electrically connecting the terminals of the game board side drawer connector (concave type) of the game board 5 to the terminals of the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) of the main frame 4.

For example, the main frame-side drawer connector (recessed type) of the main frame 4 is made of a non-conductive resin and has a box-shaped main body that is long in the left-right direction and has a rectangular opening on the front side. A plate-shaped base that is long in the left-right direction is integrally formed on the rear side of the box-shaped main body, giving it an overall T-shaped configuration.

Around the opening of the box-shaped main body, inclined portions are formed extending from the front of the opening toward the bottom of the box-shaped main body for a predetermined distance to guide the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 toward the bottom of the box-shaped main body. Grooves are formed on the central portion (one location) and on the left and right portions (one location on the left and one location on the right) of the inside top surface of the opening of the box-shaped main body, extending from near the front of the opening to the bottom of the box-shaped main body. These grooves prevent the game board drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 from being inserted upside down in an orientation different from the correct orientation into the main frame drawer connector (concave type), and prevent left-right misalignment between the game board drawer connector (convex type) and the main frame drawer connector (concave type) when the game board drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 is inserted into the main frame drawer connector (concave type) in the correct orientation, thereby improving the fit between the game board drawer connector (convex type) and the main frame drawer connector (concave type).

On the bottom surface of the box-shaped main body, pin-type terminals (six pin-type terminals in one row) are arranged in two rows in the left-right direction, perpendicular to the bottom surface, and penetrate the box-shaped main body and base body.

Mounting through-holes are formed on the left and right sides of the base body. When mounting a main frame side drawer connector (recessed type) to the main frame side relay board, rivets are first inserted into the mounting through-holes from the front of the main frame side drawer connector (recessed type), and the ends are crimped and plastically deformed on the back surface (solder side) of the main frame side relay board. This secures the main frame side drawer connector (recessed type) to the main frame side relay board.

In addition, a cylindrical protrusion is formed on the back surface of the base body to ensure that the main frame side drawer connector (recessed type) is installed in the correct orientation when it is mounted on the main frame side relay board.

In addition to the main frame side drawer connector (concave type), the main frame side relay board is also equipped with a small DIP (Dual Inline Package) type connector that electrically connects to the main frame side drawer connector (concave type), and is electrically connected to the payout control board 633 via wiring (harness). When the gaming board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the gaming board side drawer connector (convex type) of the gaming board 5 is guided into the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) of the main frame 4, and the terminals of the gaming board side drawer connector (concave type) are electrically connected to the terminals of the main frame side drawer connector (concave type). This forms a control signal line that transmits various control signals between the main control board 1310 provided on the gaming board 5 and the payout control board 633 provided on the main frame 4 via the small DIP type connector and wiring (harness).

The main frame-side drawer connector (concave type) electrically connects the main control board 1310 provided on the gaming board 5 to the payout control board 633 provided on the main frame 4, and also electrically connects to various power supply lines (including ground (GND)) that supply various power sources from the power supply board 630 to various boards provided on the gaming board 5. In addition to the main frame-side drawer connector (concave type), another main frame-side drawer connector (concave type) is provided on another main frame-side relay board separate from the main frame-side relay board. In addition to the other main frame-side drawer connector (concave type), this other main frame-side relay board is equipped with a small DIP (Dual Inline Package) type connector that is electrically connected to the other main frame-side drawer connector (concave type), and is electrically connected to the various decorative boards and sensors provided on the door frame 3 via wiring (harness). When the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, another game board drawer connector (convex type) other than the game board drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 that is electrically connected to the main frame drawer connector (concave type) is guided to the other main frame drawer connector (concave type) of the main frame 4, and each terminal of the other game board drawer connector (convex type) is electrically connected to each terminal of the other main frame drawer connector (concave type), thereby forming a control signal line that transmits various control signals and detection signals from the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 and the various decorative boards, various sensors, various speakers, etc. provided on the door frame 3 via a small DIP type connector and wiring (harness). The structure of the other main frame side drawer connector (concave type) is the same as the main frame side drawer connector (concave type), and the method of fixing the other main frame side drawer connector (concave type) to the other main frame side relay board is the same as the method of fixing the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) to the main frame side relay board (fixing method using rivets).

In addition, the method of fixing the game board 5's game board side drawer connector (convex type) guided by the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) of the main frame 4 to the game board side relay board, and the method of fixing another game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by another main frame side drawer connector (concave type) of the main frame 4 to another game board side relay board (this other game board side relay board is different from the game board side relay board on which the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 guided by the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) of the main frame 4 is mounted) are the same as the method of fixing the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) to the main frame side relay board (a fixing method using rivets).

Rivets are used to secure the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) to the main frame side relay board. Although the drawer connector allows for automatic electrical connection between the main frame 4 and the game board 5 simply by attaching the game board 5 to the main frame 4, when attaching the game board 5 to the main frame 4, a large force may be applied from the game board side drawer connector (convex type) of the game board 5 to the box-shaped body of the main frame side drawer connector (concave type). This large force prevents the pin-type terminals of the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) from peeling off from the soldered surface on the back surface (solder surface) of the main frame side relay board. However, when using bolts and nuts to secure the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) to the main frame side relay board or the game board side drawer connector (convex type) to the game board side relay board, there is a drawback in that the nuts may loosen when the game board 5 is attached to or removed from the main frame 4.

In this embodiment, pin-type terminals are used for the main frame-side drawer connector (concave type). However, using a bellows type terminal and contacts presents the following problem. For example, if the terminals of the game board 5's game board-side drawer connector (convex type) are terminals and the terminals of the main frame-side drawer connector (concave type) of the main frame 4 are contacts, and the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4 while the power is on, the contacts between the terminals and the contacts (specifically, the contacts for the various power supply lines through which a large current (inrush current) flows) will weld. If an attempt is made to forcibly insert the game board 5 into the main frame 4 in this welded state, the contacts of the main frame-side drawer connector (concave type) will bend and break, or the contacts will peel off and break when the game board 5 is removed from the main frame 4, rendering the main frame-side drawer connector (concave type) unusable.

Furthermore, if the terminal and contact become welded together, the connector may be damaged, causing various control boards to malfunction or damaging the electronic components mounted on the various control boards, which necessitates the installation of a dedicated circuit to prevent welding.

In this embodiment, by using pin-type terminals for the main frame side drawer connector (concave type), the above-mentioned problems do not occur at all. In other words, even if an operator accidentally attaches the game board 5 to the main frame 4 while the power is on to the pachinko machine 1, the terminals of the game board side drawer connector (convex type) on the game board 5 will not weld to the terminals of the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) on the main frame 4, and there is no need to provide a dedicated circuit to prevent welding.

B15. The detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 may be a pulse signal or a serial signal (command transmission) instead of an ON or OFF signal.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment described above is equipped with the game board 5 of Figure 11, which defines the game area 5a into which the launched game balls flow, and is equipped with the main control board 1310 of Figure 188, which has a mounting surface (front surface) 1310x through which the lead terminals of electronic components are inserted and onto which the electronic components are mounted, and a soldering surface (back surface) 1310y to which the lead terminals of the electronic components inserted therethrough are soldered.

The mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is equipped with a ZIP-type main control MPU 1310a (Fig. 188) as a game control microprocessor that controls the progress of the game, and is also equipped with a setting key switch 1311a (Fig. 188) as an operating unit, which is an electronic component that can change the setting of the probability of awarding a benefit to a player electrically connected to the main control MPU 1310a.

The lead terminals of the main control MPU 1310a and the setting key switch 1311a are soldered to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. The wiring pattern electrically connecting the lead terminals of the main control MPU 1310a and the setting key switch 1311a is formed only on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

In this way, the wiring pattern that transmits the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a, which is an operating unit that can change the setting of the probability of awarding a benefit to a player, is formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, making it difficult to see how the wiring pattern is routed when viewed from the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, which contributes to making the wiring pattern more difficult to tamper with. This therefore contributes to improved security.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment described above is equipped with the game board 5 of FIG. 11, which defines a game area 5a into which fired game balls flow, and is equipped with a setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 of FIG. 188 as a first operation unit that can change the setting of the probability of awarding a profit to the player, a main control built-in RAM of the ZIP-type main control MPU 1310a of FIG. 188 as a memory unit that can store and retain game information, the main control board 1310 of FIG. 188 as a control board on which the ZIP-type main control MPU 1310a of FIG. 188 is mounted as a game control microprocessor that controls the progress of the game, and an RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board of FIG. 182 as a second operation unit that can clear (erase) the game information stored (retained) in the main control built-in RAM.

The main control MPU 1310a can change the setting of the probability of awarding a profit to a player based on the operation signal, which is the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and the operation signal, which is the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d.

The setting key signal wiring pattern serves as the first transmission path through which the operation signal, which is the detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a, is input to the main control MPU 1310a, and the RWM signal wiring pattern serves as the second transmission path through which the operation signal, which is the detection signal from the RWM switch 633d, is input to the main control MPU 1310a. These wiring patterns are formed on the main control board 1310 so that they do not run parallel to each other.

In this way, the setting key signal wiring pattern, which is the first transmission path through which an operation signal, which is a detection signal from the setting key switch 1311a, which is the first operation unit that can change the setting probability of awarding a player, is input to the main control MPU 1310a, and the RWM signal wiring pattern, which is the second transmission path through which an operation signal, which is a detection signal from the RWM switch 633d, which is the second operation unit that can clear (erase) game information stored in the main control built-in RAM provided in the main control MPU 1310a, is input to the main control MPU 1310a, are formed on the main control board 1310 so that they do not run parallel to each other. This allows the setting key signal wiring pattern, which is the first transmission path, and the RWM signal wiring pattern, which is the second transmission path, to be input to the main control MPU 1310a at a distance from each other, making it difficult to simultaneously tamper with the setting key signal wiring pattern, which is the first transmission path, and the RWM signal wiring pattern, which is the second transmission path. This therefore contributes to improved security.

[13. Game Contents]
The game content of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 137, 144, and 145. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, a player rotates the handle 195 of the handle unit 180 located in the lower right corner of the front of the door frame 3, causing a game ball B stored in the upper tray 201 of the tray unit 200 to pass between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 and be shot into the upper part of the play area 5a, thereby starting a game with the game ball B. The game ball B shot into the upper part of the play area 5a flows down either the left or right side of the center device 2500 depending on the force of the shot. The force of the shot of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 195. The more the handle is rotated clockwise, the stronger the shot. A maximum of 100 game balls B can be shot continuously per minute, that is, at 0.6-second intervals.

In addition, within the game area 5a, multiple obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions on the front of the game panel 1100. When the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nails N, the speed at which the game ball B flows down is suppressed and various movements are imparted to the game ball B, allowing players to enjoy watching its movements. In addition to the obstacle nails N, within the game area 5a, a windmill W that rotates when the game ball B comes into contact with it is located above the upper left side unit 2300 and to the left of the center device 2500.

When game ball B is shot into the top of center device 2500 and enters the left side of the highest part of the outer periphery of center device 2500 when viewed from the front, it will come into contact with multiple obstacle nails N and flow down the area to the left of center device 2500. Then, when game ball B flowing down the area to the left of center device 2500 enters warp entrance 2511 opening in peripheral wall portion 2501 of center device 2500, it is supplied to stage 2513 from warp exit 2512.

The game ball B supplied to the stage 2513 rolls back and forth on the stage 2513 and is released forward from the center in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is released into the game area 5a from the central release section 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, there is a high probability that it will be received by the first starting opening 2002, since the central release section 2513a is located directly above the first starting opening 2002. When a game ball B is received in this first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and the main control board 1310 draws a special lottery result (first special lottery result) that will result in a favorable game state advantageous to the player (for example, a "big hit," "medium hit," "small hit," "special feature hit," "probability variable (probability change) hit," or "time shortened (time shortened) hit").

Game ball B released into the play area 5a from the stage 2513 of the center device 2500 may be received by the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100.

If a game ball B that flows down to the left side of the center device 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2511, it may be pushed toward the center in the left-right direction by the shelf 2301 of the upper left side unit 2300 or the obstacle nails N, and may be accepted into the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 or the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100. When a game ball B is accepted into the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (e.g., 10) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633.

On the other hand, if game ball B is hit into the top of center device 2500 within game area 5a and enters to the right of the highest part of peripheral wall 2501 of center device 2500, it will pass through either first guide passage 2521 or second guide passage 2522 of guide passage group 2520 of center device 2500, be released above gate 2003, come into contact with multiple obstacle nails N planted between guide passage group 2520 and gate 2003, and then pass through gate 2003 with a certain probability.

The guide passage group 2520 of the center device 2500 is composed of a first guide passage 2521, the entrance of which opens near the impact stop 1006, and a second guide passage 2522, the entrance of which opens at a distance to the left of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521. As a result, if game ball B is hit with enough force to hit the impact stop 1006 (i.e., a right hit), it will enter the first guide passage 2521, and if game ball B is hit with enough force not to hit the impact stop 1006 (slightly weaker than a right hit), it will most likely enter the second guide passage 2522. In other words, game ball B hit into the upper right side of the center device 2500 will flow through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522, depending on the strength of the hit.

In this embodiment, the game ball B is configured to have a higher probability of passing through gate 2003 if it is routed through second guide passage 2522 than first guide passage 2521. Also, the game ball B is configured to have a higher probability of passing through gate 2003 and the left side of gate 2003 if it is routed through second guide passage 2522 than first guide passage 2521.

When game ball B passes through this gate 2003 and is detected by gate sensor 2801, a regular lottery is conducted on main control board 1310, and if the result of the regular lottery is a "regular win," the closed second starting port 2004 in the first attacker unit 2400 opens for a predetermined time (e.g., 0.3 to 10 seconds), allowing game ball B to be received into second starting port 2004.

In this embodiment, in the normal lottery, which is conducted when game ball B passes through gate 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery until the normal lottery result is indicated (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as the normal variation time). This indication of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the gaming board 5. The second starting gate 2004 opens after the normal variation time has elapsed.

If game ball B passes through gate 2003 between the time game ball B passes through gate 2003 and the time the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot begin, so the start of the suggestion of the normal lottery result is postponed until the previous suggestion of the normal lottery result has finished. Also, the number of reserved normal lottery results is limited to four, and any more than that are discarded rather than reserved, even if game ball B passes through gate 2003. This prevents the burden on the gaming hall from increasing due to the accumulation of reserved results.

Gambling ball B that passes through gate 2003 and the left side of gate 2003 is likely to flow down the left side of the side right center unit 2700 due to the multiple obstacle nails N planted between gate 2003 and the side right center unit 2700, and is occasionally accepted into the general winning opening 2001 of the side right center unit 2700, and rarely accepted into the second sub-outlet 2022. When gaming ball B is accepted into the general winning opening 2001 of the side right center unit 2700, a predetermined number of gaming balls B are paid out, just as with the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. On the other hand, when gaming ball B is accepted into the second sub-outlet 2022, it is expelled from the gaming area 5a without having the opportunity to be accepted into the special winning opening 2006, the second starting opening 2004, or the large winning opening 2005.

Furthermore, game ball B that passes through the right side of gate 2003 is received by the second sub-outlet 2022 of the side right center unit 2700, and is discharged outside the game area 5a without having the opportunity to be received by the general winning port 2001, special winning port 2006, second starting port 2004, or large winning port 2005 of the side right center unit 2700.

In this way, when game ball B is received by the second sub-outlet 2022 downstream of the guide passage group 2520, the game ball B is ejected outside the game area 5a, encouraging the player to perform a shooting operation that will prevent game ball B from being received by the second sub-outlet 2022. In this embodiment, in the guide passage group 2520 of the center device 2500, the second guide passage 2522 has a lower probability of receiving game ball B than the first guide passage 2521, encouraging the player to shoot game ball B aimed at the second guide passage 2522. In other words, rather than a "right hit" in which game ball B hits the impact stop 1006, a shooting operation that requires delicate adjustments to the rotation of the handle 182 can be encouraged, allowing the player to enjoy the original gameplay of the pachinko machine 1, which is primarily focused on the shooting operation of game ball B.

The game ball B that passes to the left of the side right center unit 2700 is guided by multiple obstacle nails N planted on the left side of the side right center unit 2700, passes to the left of the role winning opening 2006 in the second attacker unit 2600, and is then released toward the first attacker unit 2400 via the lower right guide passage 2530 of the center role 2500.

At this time, if game ball B is received by first start opening 2002 or second start opening 2004 and a "perfect prize" is drawn as the first or second special lottery result, game ball B that flows down the left side of side right center unit 2700 is likely to be received by game ball winning opening 2006, as game ball winning opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern. When game ball B is received by game ball winning opening 2006 while it is open, a predetermined number (e.g., 10 or 13) of game balls B are paid out from payout device 580 to upper tray 201 by main control board 1310 and payout control board 633.

Game ball B received by special prize opening 2006 and detected by special prize opening sensor 2601 flows through distribution passage 3158 and is distributed to either V prize opening 2007 or losing opening 2008 by V prize opening door 3006, which moves back and forth. When game ball B is distributed to V prize opening 2007, large prize opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined opening and closing pattern, creating an advantageous game state for the player. On the other hand, when game ball B is distributed to losing opening 2008, an advantageous game state for the player does not occur.

Game ball B, which passes to the left of the special prize opening 2006 and is released toward the first attacker unit 2400, rolls to the left over the first shelf 2421, the second starting opening door 2411, and the second shelf 2422, before being released to the left, and then rolls to the left over the third shelf 2423, the large prize opening door 2413, and the fourth shelf 2424, before being released into the game area 5a.

When game ball B is rolling on second starting gate door 2411, if the normal lottery result drawn when game ball B passes through gate 2003 is a "normal win" and second starting gate door 2411 is retracted, game ball B is accepted into second starting gate 2004. When game ball B is accepted into second starting gate 2004, a predetermined number (e.g., four) of game balls B are paid out from payout device 580 to upper tray 201 via main control board 1310 and payout control board 633, and main control board 1310 draws a special lottery result (first special lottery result) that will result in a favorable game state for the player (e.g., a "jackpot," "medium win," "small win," "special feature win," "probability-varying (probability change) win," or "time-shortening (time-shortening) win").

Furthermore, when game ball B is rolling on the large prize opening door 2413, if the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by the acceptance of game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 is a special lottery result that generates a favorable game state (e.g., a "jackpot"), after the special variable time has elapsed, the large prize opening 2005 will be able to accept game ball B in a predetermined opening and closing pattern. When game ball B is accepted into the large prize opening 2005 while it is in the open state, a predetermined number (e.g., 10 or 13) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper tray 201 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Therefore, when the large prize opening 2005 is able to receive game ball B, by receiving game ball B into the large prize opening 2005, many game balls B can be paid out, providing enjoyment to the player.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when a game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the main control board 1310 draws a special lottery result that will generate a favorable game state (e.g., "big hit," "medium hit," "small hit," "gift hit," "probability variable (probability change) hit," "time shortened (time shortened) hit") that is advantageous to the player. The drawn special lottery result is then displayed for a predetermined time (e.g., 0 The player is prompted for a time period ranging from 1 to 360 seconds (also referred to as the special variable time). The special lottery results that are drawn when game ball B is received by first starting port 2002 and second starting port 2004 include "miss," "small hit," "2R jackpot," "5R jackpot," "15R jackpot," "probability change (changed probability) hit," "time-saving (time-saving) hit," "probability change time-saving hit," "probability change no time-saving hit," "second jackpot," etc.

If the result of the special lottery is a "hit," the special prize opening 2006 repeats an opening/closing pattern multiple times (e.g., twice) in which it opens to a state where it can receive game ball B for a predetermined short time (e.g., between 0.2 and 0.6 seconds) and then closes. On the other hand, if the result of the special lottery is a "jackpot," after the special prize opening 2005 opens to a state where it can receive game ball B, and either a predetermined time (e.g., approximately 30 seconds) has elapsed, or a predetermined number of game balls B (e.g., 10) have been received by the special prize opening 2005, the opening/closing pattern in which it closes to a state where it cannot receive game ball B (one opening/closing pattern is referred to as one round) is repeated a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, a "2R jackpot" will repeat 2 rounds, a "5R jackpot" will repeat 5 rounds, and a "15R jackpot" will repeat 15 rounds, creating an advantageous gaming state for the player.

In addition, after the jackpot game ends, there are "hits" that change the probability of a special lottery result such as a "jackpot" being drawn ("probable hit"), or that change the display time of the effect image suggesting the special lottery result ("time-saving hit").

If the special lottery result (for example, the second special lottery result) is a "second jackpot," the big prize slot 2005 becomes capable of receiving game ball B in a predetermined pattern, and then an ST (special time) is generated as a favorable gaming state. This ST maintains the probability change or time-saving state for a predetermined number of fluctuations.

In this embodiment, if a game ball B is received into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 between the start of the special lottery due to the reception of a game ball B into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and the time when the special lottery result is indicated, the indication of the special lottery result cannot begin. Therefore, the start of the indication of the special lottery result is suspended until the indication of the previously drawn special lottery result is completed. The number of reserved special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. For any number more than this, the special lottery result is not reserved but discarded even if a game ball B is received into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. This prevents the burden on the amusement hall from increasing due to the accumulation of reserved results.

The special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the performance display device 1600. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the special lottery result. The function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result by repeatedly turning on and off multiple LEDs and flashing them for a predetermined period of time, after which the combination of lit LEDs suggests the special lottery result.

Meanwhile, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and suggests the special lottery result as an effect image. The effect image suggesting the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 displays three picture rows consisting of multiple pictures lined up horizontally, and changes each picture row, sequentially stopping and displaying the changing picture rows. The three stopped and displayed picture rows are displayed so that the pictures in the three stopped and displayed picture rows form a combination that corresponds to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than a "lose," after the three picture rows have stopped and each picture has been stopped and displayed, a confirmation image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an advantageous game state (for example, a "small win" game, a "big win" game, etc.) corresponding to the special lottery result is generated.

The time for which the special lottery result is indicated on the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variation time)) is different from the time for which the special lottery result is indicated on the performance display device 1600 (the time from when the pattern row changes until the final image is displayed), with the time for which it is indicated on the function display unit 1400 being set to be longer.

In addition to displaying effect images suggesting the results of the special lottery using the effect display device 1600, the peripheral control board 1510 can also perform player participation effects in which the touch operation unit 302 and press operation unit 303 of the effect operation section 301 in the effect operation unit 300 on the door frame 3 are operated according to the results of the special lottery. In player participation effects, the press operation unit 303 can be raised and made more prominent by the operation button lift drive motor 367, allowing the player to enjoy the player participation effects by operating the effect operation section 301.

In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 can appropriately use the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3, the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5, the performance display device 1600, and the rear front performance unit 3100, rear upper performance unit 3200, and rear lower performance unit 3300 of the rear unit 3000 to produce light-emitting effects, display effects, etc., allowing players to be entertained by various effects and preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in a player-participation presentation in which the player operates the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303, if the player makes a mistake or fails to perform the operation that they should perform, the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player so that they can perform the correct operation.

[Improvement of reflectivity by applying an insulating coating to the lands of each decorative substrate provided on the game board]
Next, the configuration of covering the lands of the through holes formed on each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 with an insulating film will be described with reference to Figures 194 to 197. Figure 194 is a schematic diagram (a) illustrating the configuration of covering the lands of the through holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 according to the first embodiment with an insulating film, a schematic diagram (b) of a cross section along line X-X in (a), and a schematic diagram (c) of a modified example of (b), and Figure 195 is a schematic diagram (a) illustrating the configuration of covering the lands of the through holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 according to the second embodiment with an insulating film, a schematic diagram (b) of a cross section along line X-X in (a), and a schematic diagram (c) of a modified example of (b), 196 is a schematic diagram (a) illustrating the configuration of covering the through-hole lands formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 according to the third embodiment with an insulating coating, (b) is a schematic diagram of a cross section of line X-X in (a), and (c) is a schematic diagram of a modified version of (b), and Figure 197 is a schematic diagram (a) illustrating the configuration of covering the through-hole lands formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 according to the fourth embodiment with an insulating coating, (b) is a schematic diagram of a cross section of line X-X in (a), and (c) is a schematic diagram of a modified version of (b). Also, in Figures 194 to 197, components that perform the same function are denoted by the same symbols, and each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 is represented as a decorative substrate KB. In the following, a decorative board provided on the game board 5 will be shown as decorative board KB, but as long as the decorative board has LEDs mounted on it, it is not limited to being provided on the game board 5, and a similar configuration to decorative board KB can be applied to a board provided on the door frame 3 (the decorative board provided on the game board 5 or the decorative board provided on the door frame 3 may have a decorative board with a different configuration from decorative board KB).

As described above, through holes are copper-plated on the inner walls of the through-holes, making them conductive. There are through-holes for mounting electronic components and through-holes for not mounting electronic components. The insulating coating covering the through-hole lands formed on the front (front mounting surface) of each decorative board 5 included in the first through fourth embodiments is used for through-holes for not mounting electronic components. Each decorative board KB included in the gaming board 5 has non-through-holes in addition to through-holes. Non-through-holes differ significantly from through-holes that have copper-plated inner walls and lands on the front (front mounting surface) and rear (rear mounting surface) of the decorative board KB in that they do not have copper-plated inner walls and lands on the front (front mounting surface) and rear (rear mounting surface) of the decorative board KB. Non-through-holes are formed to attach the board to a component or to secure electronic components that are subject to external force (such as connectors for connecting and disconnecting wiring) to the board. It should be noted that the configuration in which an insulating film is applied to the through-hole lands formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 may be used for through-holes used to mount electronic components.

Here, we will first briefly explain each decorative board provided on the gaming board 5, then explain the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the through-hole lands formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the gaming board 5 according to the first to fourth embodiments, and then explain the connectors mounted on the rear surface (rear mounting surface) of the decorative board.

In addition, the configuration of covering the through-hole lands formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the gaming board 5 in the first to fourth embodiments with an insulating coating is applied to decorative boards provided on the gaming board 5 that do not have a heat source such as an LED driver IC (constant current drive circuit) mounted thereon, but is not applied to decorative boards that do have a heat source such as an LED driver IC (constant current drive circuit) mounted thereon. Furthermore, the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the lands of the through holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 according to the first to fourth embodiments does not apply to the main control board 1310 on which heat sources such as the drive solenoid drive IC described below that drives drive solenoids such as the starting solenoid 2412, attacca solenoid 2414, bonus prize solenoid 2612, and V-distribution solenoid 3007, which are electrical drive sources, is mounted; it does not apply to the payout control board 633 on which heat sources such as the payout motor drive IC that drives the payout motor 584 described below, which is an electrical drive source, is mounted; and it does not apply to the peripheral control board 1510 on which heat sources such as the peripheral control IC 1510a (see Figures 170 and 171) that is air-cooled by the air-cooling fan FAN (see Figures 170 and 171), which is described below, is mounted.

For each of the boards on which these heat sources are mounted (i.e., the decorative board provided on the gaming board, main control board 1310, payout control board 633, peripheral control board 1510), the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the through-hole lands formed on the wiring pattern electrically connected to the pad portions to which the terminals of each IC (i.e., LED driver IC (constant current drive circuit), drive solenoid drive IC, payout motor drive IC) are soldered, and the through-hole lands formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the gaming board 5 of the first to fourth embodiments, is not applied. However, the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the through-hole lands formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the gaming board 5 of the first or second embodiment may be applied to the pad portions to which the terminals of each IC (i.e., LED driver IC (constant current drive circuit), drive solenoid drive IC, payout motor drive IC) are soldered.

Furthermore, the configuration of covering with an insulating film the lands of the through holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the gaming boards of the first to fourth embodiments does not apply to the power supply board 630 described below on which heat dissipation fins are mounted. Of the decorative boards provided on the gaming board 5, the decorative board may be configured to have heat dissipation fins mounted; in this case, the configuration of covering with an insulating film the lands of the through holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the gaming boards of the first to fourth embodiments does not apply to decorative boards on which heat dissipation fins are mounted, but does apply to decorative boards on which heat dissipation fins are not mounted. Additionally, heat dissipation fins may be mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 or the liquid crystal output board 1530 (see Figures 170 and 171). In this case, the configuration in which an insulating film is applied to the lands of the through holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 according to the first to fourth embodiments is not applied to the peripheral control board 1510 or liquid crystal output board 1530 on which heat dissipation fins are mounted.

Furthermore, as will be described later, amplifier boards, which have circuits that amplify various sounds, consume a lot of power and generate heat, so they are housed in a metal board box consisting of a metal cover and a metal base, or are attached to a metal partial case. For this reason, the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the lands of the through holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 of the first to fourth embodiments is not applied to amplifier boards.

[Each decorative board provided on the game board]
The decorative boards provided on the game board 5 (in this example, a back-front upper left decorative board 3129 for illuminating and decorating the back-front upper left logo decoration 3122, a back-front left decorative board 3128 for illuminating and decorating the back-front left logo decoration 3121, the back-front upper left logo decoration 3122, and the back-front left sub-decorative board 3123, a back-front lower logo decoration board 3173 for illuminating and decorating the back-front lower logo decoration 3167, a back-front lower middle decorative board 3168 for illuminating and decorating the back-front lower middle decoration 3161, a back-front lower left inner decorative board 3169 for illuminating and decorating the back-front lower left inner decoration 3163, and a back-front lower left outer decorative board 3170 for illuminating and decorating the back-front lower left outer decoration 3164, The front (front lower right) inner decorative substrate 3171 for illuminating and decorating the back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, the back front lower right outer decorative substrate 3172 for illuminating and decorating the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166, the back front lower right decorative substrate 3152 for illuminating and decorating the back front right logo decoration part 3141, and the back front upper right decorative substrate 3151 for illuminating and decorating the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142, etc., are coated with a white resist layer made of a white insulating film (insulating coating, hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist") formed by applying a white resist liquid as an insulating coating over almost the entire surface. In addition, on the front (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5, a solid white resist is silk-screened with yellow paint to indicate the attributes of the electronic components (such as the part number of the full-color LED, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is to be placed, and other electronic component attributes (which may also include the shape, size, mounting orientation (direction), and model of the electronic component), which allow identification of multiple LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors), etc. The attributes of the electronic components are indicated by solid lines, dashed lines, and, in the case of models, letters, etc. In addition, on the decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and door frame 3, an insulating coating (resist) is also formed on the parts where the electronic components are mounted (the parts of the surface (front mounting surface, back mounting surface) of the decorative board that are covered by the electronic components). For example, in a decorative substrate on which a white resist layer (white insulating coating) is formed on the front mounting surface on which the LEDs are mounted, a white resist layer (white insulating coating) is also formed on the surface portion on which the LEDs are mounted (the portion of the surface covered by the LEDs), and in a decorative substrate on which a black or green resist layer (black or green insulating coating) is formed on the front mounting surface on which the LEDs are mounted, a black or green resist layer (black or green insulating coating) is also formed on the surface portion on which the LEDs are mounted (the portion of the surface covered by the LEDs). In this way, in decorative substrates where a white resist layer (white insulating coating) is formed on the front mounting surface where the LEDs are mounted, the reflection efficiency of the part closest to the LED can be increased by forming a white resist layer (white insulating coating) also on the part below the LED that is covered by the LED and not exposed, and in decorative substrates where a black or green resist layer (black or green insulating coating) is formed on the front mounting surface where the LEDs are mounted, the reflection efficiency of the part closest to the LED can be reduced and light interference can be suppressed by forming a black or green resist layer (black or green insulating coating) also on the part below the LED that is covered by the LED and not exposed.

The white color of resist liquid varies, and can be light or dark, or it can be bright or dark. Furthermore, ink companies that supply resist liquid also have a range of white colors (for example, yellow that leans toward the lighter side, or yellow that leans toward the darker side), so even if you specify a white color as resist liquid for the same board manufacturing company or multiple board companies, the white color will not be exactly the same (it is difficult to achieve an exactly the same white color), and there will be a range of white colors.

Here, we will explain why we used white as the color of the resist liquid and yellow as the silk-screen paint. First, reflectance increases as the color approaches white, and decreases as the color approaches black. The reflectance of yellow is very close to the reflectance of white compared to the reflectance of red, and the reflectance of red is very far from the reflectance of white compared to the reflectance of yellow. Although the reflectance of yellow is lower than the reflectance of white of a white insulating film, it still has a high reflectance. Therefore, when combining white and red, the red stands out when the background is white, and when the notation is red, the red notation stands out against the white resist. However, when combining white and yellow (the configuration of this embodiment), the yellow does not stand out when the background is white, and when the notation is yellow, the yellow notation is not easily noticeable against the white resist.

When a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves their head (face), their line of sight changes depending on the direction of their head (face). Even if the player is able to see the front (front mounting surface) of each decorative board on the gaming board 5, the full-color LED part number, the area indicating the position of the full-color LED, and other electronic component attributes are silk-screened in yellow paint on the solid white resist applied to the front (front mounting surface) of each decorative board on the gaming board 5. This makes the yellow notation less noticeable against the white resist, preventing the player from seeing the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs and the area indicating the position of the full-color LEDs, which have nothing to do with the game.

In addition, notations indicating the attributes of electronic components, such as the part number of the full-color LED and the area indicating the location of the full-color LED, which allow identification of multiple LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors), may be silk-screened on the front (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the gaming board 5 using a light color other than yellow (particularly a light color such as yellow-green or light blue). In this case, notations indicating the attributes of electronic components, such as the part number of the full-color LED and the area indicating the location of the full-color LED, are silk-screened with a light color paint on a solid white resist applied to the front (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the gaming board 5. Therefore, the light-colored notations are less noticeable against the white resist, preventing players from seeing the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs and the area indicating the location of the full-color LED, which have nothing to do with the game to the player. Furthermore, using a light color that has a higher reflectivity, though inferior to yellow, prevents a decrease in the reflective efficiency of the front (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the gaming board 5.

In addition, while the indicia indicating the attributes of electronic components, such as the part number of the full-color LEDs and the area indicating the location of the full-color LEDs, which enable identification of multiple LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors), were previously silk-screened with yellow paint on the front (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the gaming board 5, they may instead be silk-screened with yellow paint on the rear (rear mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the gaming board 5, or may be silk-screened with paint of a color different from yellow (for example, a dull color such as black, or a color such as blue, green, or red). In this case, nothing will be silk-screened on the front (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the gaming board 5, and only the rear (rear mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the gaming board 5 will be silk-screened. In this way, the white resist applied to the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board on the game board 5 contributes to increasing the reflectivity of the light emitted by the multiple LEDs toward the front (i.e., the front side of the pachinko machine 1). It also prevents players from seeing the part numbers and attributes of electronic components that have absolutely no relation to the game.

In addition, the notation indicating the attributes of the electronic components, such as the part number of the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is to be placed, which makes it possible to identify multiple LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors), was previously silk-screened with yellow paint on the front (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the gaming board 5.However, instead of this, the part number of the full-color LED can be formed as foil-punched characters (i.e., punched characters formed by creating characters with a copper foil wiring pattern on the copper foil surface where the wiring pattern is formed and punching out the copper foil around them), and the attributes of the full-color LED can be formed as foil-punched areas excluding each terminal (not shown) and each wiring pattern (i.e., areas formed by punching out the copper foil on the copper foil surface where the wiring pattern is formed, excluding each terminal and wiring pattern), and the foil-punched areas and the foil-punched characters can each be covered with a white resist that is applied solid to the front (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the gaming board 5. Specifically, for example, a foil-punched area indicating the location of the full-color LEDs is formed on the front (front mounting surface) of each decorative board included in the gaming board 5, and part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs are formed as cut-out characters near the foil-punched area on the front (front mounting surface) of each decorative board included in the gaming board 5. The foil-punched area and the cut-out characters are covered with a solid white resist applied to the front (front mounting surface) of each decorative board included in the gaming board 5. The wiring pattern forming the cut-out characters is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic components. In this way, the solid white resist applied to the front (front mounting surface) of each decorative board included in the gaming board 5 contributes to increasing the reflectivity of the light emitted by the multiple LEDs toward the front (i.e., the front side of the pachinko machine 1). Furthermore, this prevents players from visually recognizing the part numbers and attributes of electronic components that have nothing to do with the game.

In addition, the indicia indicating the attributes of the electronic components, such as the part number of the full-color LED and the area indicating the location of the full-color LED, which enable identification of multiple LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors), were previously silk-screened with yellow paint on the front (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the gaming board 5. However, instead, the part number of the full-color LED may be formed as white-resist cutout letters using two coats of white resist, and the attributes of the full-color LED may be formed as white-resist cutout areas using two coats of white resist. Specifically, for example, the front (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the gaming board 5 is almost entirely covered with white resist as the first of two coats of white resist (i.e., white resist liquid is applied to the front (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the gaming board 5 as the first of two coats of white resist). The front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the gaming board 5 is then entirely covered with white resist, with the second coat of white resist masking areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs will be placed (including areas (cutouts) indicating the placement of predetermined pin numbers) as white resist cut-out areas, and part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs being masked as white resist cut-out letters near these white resist cut-out areas. As a result, although two layers of white resist are formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the gaming board 5, the entire surface is covered with the first layer of white resist, and the entire surface is covered except for the masked areas by the second layer of white resist, so that the masked areas are recessed, and the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs will be placed are formed as white resist cut-out areas, and the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LEDs are formed as white resist cut-out letters. Since the transmittance of the first layer of white resist and the transmittance of the second layer of white resist are the same, there is a difference in shade between the first layer of white resist and the second layer of white resist, and when the base (copper foil surface (copper foil portion) and the area excluding the copper foil surface (copper foil portion), the same applies below) of the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 is viewed through the second layer of white resist, the second layer of white resist appears dark in the area where the second layer of white resist and the first layer of white resist overlap, whereas in the area where the second layer of white resist and the first layer of white resist do not overlap due to being masked, the first layer of white resist is not covered by the second layer of white resist and is exposed, causing the first layer of white resist to appear light. In other words, when looking at the base of the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the gaming board 5 through the second layer of white resist, it is possible to identify the white resist-free areas and white resist-free characters in the first layer of white resist. In this way, the solid white resist applied to the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the gaming board 5 contributes to increasing the reflectivity of the light emitted by the multiple LEDs toward the front (i.e., the front side of the pachinko machine 1). It also prevents players from seeing the part numbers and attributes of electronic components that have nothing to do with the game.

In addition, while the part numbers of the full-color LEDs (full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors) and the indicia indicating the attributes of the electronic components, such as the areas indicating the positions of the full-color LEDs, which allow identification of the electronic components, were previously silk-screened with yellow paint on the front (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the gaming board 5, it is possible to have no silk-screened areas on the front (front mounting surface) or rear (rear mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the gaming board 5. In this way, the solid white resist applied to the front (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the gaming board 5 can contribute to increasing the reflectivity of the light emitted by the multiple LEDs toward the front (i.e., the front side of the pachinko machine 1). Furthermore, it is possible to completely prevent players from seeing the part numbers and attributes of electronic components, which have nothing to do with the game. Furthermore, by eliminating the silk-screen printing process, the cost of silk-screen printing plates and the number of board manufacturing processes can be reduced, thereby lowering board manufacturing costs.

Multiple LEDs are mounted on the front surface (front mounting surface) of the decorative board KB, and the rear surface (back mounting surface) of the decorative board KB may be mounted with one or more electronic components, such as connectors for connecting electrical wiring to the decorative board KB, resistors, capacitors, and circuits for controlling the light emission of the multiple LEDs (e.g., constant current drive circuits). The LEDs are electronic components whose packages are white or near-white (e.g., ivory, beige, or cream). The connectors are electronic components whose housings are white or near-white (e.g., ivory, beige, or cream). The constant current drive circuits are electronic components that are surface-mounted (SMD) LED driver ICs housed in IC packages that may be black as integrated circuits. The resistors are surface-mounted (SMD) electronic components that are black, blue, or white. The capacitors are surface-mounted (SMD) electronic components that are black, brown, gray, or white. On the rear surface (back mounting surface) of the decorative board KB, part numbers and areas indicating the attributes of electronic components (such as connectors, resistors, capacitors, and circuits that control the emission of multiple LEDs) that allow identification of the electronic components may be silk-screened using yellow paint on a solid white resist, or may be silk-screened using paint of a color other than yellow (e.g., a dull color such as black, or a color such as blue, green, or red). The color of the LED package is not limited to white or a color close to white (e.g., ivory, beige, or cream), and may be yellow, light blue, yellow-green, or other colors that have slightly lower reflective efficiency than white. This also minimizes the reduction in reflective efficiency on the front surface (front mounting surface) of the decorative board KB due to the LED package.

By placing surface-mount type (SMD type) resistors only on the rear surface (rear mounting surface) of the decorative board KB, where no LEDs are mounted, and not on the front surface (front mounting surface) of the decorative board KB, where multiple LEDs are mounted, the area of the solid white resist applied to the front surface (front mounting surface) of the decorative board KB can be increased. This is because surface-mount type (SMD type) resistors generally have a black top surface (sometimes called a protective film, etc.) except for the terminal area. If a resistor with a black top surface is placed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of the decorative board KB, the reflectivity will be different from that of the white resist, and the presence of dark black within the light white resist will reduce the reflectivity of the solid white resist applied to the front surface (front mounting surface) of the decorative board KB, compromising the uniformity of the reflectivity. Furthermore, resistors with a black (dark) top surface are a noticeable color (easily visible) when combined with the white (light) resist, which can reduce the visual effect if players see the unnecessary black. Furthermore, the resistance value may be marked on the top surface (protective film) of a surface-mounted (SMD) resistor, and when the top surface (protective film) is black, the numbers or symbols indicating the resistance value are often white. However, because the area of the underlying black is overwhelmingly larger than the numbers or symbols indicating the resistance value, the top surface (protective film) is perceived as black even when the resistance value is marked. Furthermore, resistors may also be placed on the front (front mounting surface) of the decorative board KB, where multiple LEDs are mounted, depending on the mounting density, heat dissipation measures, and placement of the decorative board KB.

By placing surface-mount type (SMD type) capacitors (ceramic capacitors) only on the rear (back mounting surface) of the decorative board KB, where no LEDs are mounted, and not on the front (front mounting surface) of the decorative board KB, where multiple LEDs are mounted, the area of the solid white resist applied to the front (front mounting surface) of the decorative board KB can be increased. This is because surface-mount type (SMD type) capacitors (ceramic capacitors) generally have a brown top surface (as they are often manufactured using the green sheet method and are composed of a ceramic dielectric), except for the terminal area. When a capacitor (ceramic capacitor) with a brown top surface is placed on the front (front mounting surface) of the decorative board KB, its reflectivity differs from that of the white resist. The presence of a dark brown color within the light white resist reduces the reflectivity of the solid white resist applied to the front (front mounting surface) of the decorative board KB, resulting in a loss of reflectivity uniformity. Furthermore, when a capacitor (ceramic capacitor) with a brown (dark) top surface is combined with a white (light) resist, Because it is a conspicuous color (easily visible), there is a risk that the unnecessary brown color will be seen by the player, reducing the presentation effect. Furthermore, depending on the mounting density of the decorative board KB, heat dissipation measures, and the placement position of the decorative board KB, a capacitor (ceramic capacitor) may also be placed on the front (front mounting surface) of the decorative board KB where multiple LEDs are mounted.

When mounting a connector on the front surface (front mounting surface) of the decorative board KB, it is desirable to use a connector with a white housing that is the same color as the solid white resist applied to the front surface (front mounting surface) of the decorative board KB. When mounting a connector on the rear surface (rear mounting surface) of the decorative board KB, it is acceptable to use colors such as white, black, or blue, except in special cases.

In the above example, only electronic components (which may have a white exterior if the majority of the components are a color other than white, and do not include printing of the model number, etc.) are placed on the rear surface (rear mounting surface) of the decorative board KB. However, electronic components (which may have a white exterior if the majority of the components are a color other than white, and may have a dark exterior if the majority of the components are white, or may be light-colored (especially pale colors such as yellow, light blue, or yellow-green)) with white exteriors may also be placed on the rear surface (rear mounting surface) of the decorative board KB. In this case, the electronic components with white exteriors may be placed so as to cover the through-holes on the rear surface (rear mounting surface) of the decorative board KB (they may be placed in the area where the through-holes are formed) so that the white exteriors (e.g., white connector housings or bosses) of the electronic components placed on the rear surface (rear mounting surface) of the decorative board KB can be seen from the front surface (front mounting surface) of the decorative board KB through the through-holes. On the other hand, electronic components with dark exteriors such as black (those with mostly dark exteriors may have some light exteriors) may be arranged so as not to block the through-holes (they may be arranged in areas where no through-holes are formed). This configuration allows the through-holes on the rear surface (rear mounting surface) of the decorative board KB to be blocked by electronic components with white exteriors, while electronic components with dark exteriors such as black are arranged so as not to block the through-holes. Therefore, when viewed from the front (front mounting surface) of the decorative board KB, the interiors of the through-holes can be the same color as the white resist solidly applied to the front (front mounting surface) of the decorative board KB. This allows for uniform reflection efficiency on the front (front mounting surface) of the decorative board KB and prevents a decrease in reflection efficiency on the front (front mounting surface) of the decorative board KB due to electronic components with dark exteriors. Furthermore, while an electronic component with a white exterior is exemplified as an electronic component for blocking the through-holes on the rear surface (rear mounting surface) of the decorative board KB, the through-holes on the rear surface (rear mounting surface) of the decorative board KB may also be blocked by an electronic component with a light-colored exterior (white, a color close to white (e.g., ivory, beige, cream), or a light color (yellow, light blue, yellow-green, etc.)) (as long as the majority of the electronic component is light-colored, it may also have a dark exterior in some areas). In this case, when viewed from the front surface (front mounting surface) of the decorative board KB, the interior of the through-hole can be a light color with a reflection efficiency similar to that of the solid white resist applied to the front surface (front mounting surface) of the decorative board KB, thereby achieving uniform reflection efficiency on the front surface (front mounting surface) of the decorative board KB and preventing a decrease in reflection efficiency on the front surface (front mounting surface) of the decorative board KB due to electronic components with dark exteriors. Furthermore, it is not necessary to block all of the through-holes formed in the decorative board KB with electronic components having a white exterior (blocking portion from the rear surface (rear mounting surface) of the decorative board KB or the front surface (front mounting surface) of the decorative board KB). Some of the through-holes formed in the decorative board KB may not be blocked with electronic components, or some of the through-holes may be blocked with electronic components having an exterior color other than white. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the reflection efficiency on the front surface (front mounting surface) of the decorative board KB by blocking them with electronic components having an exterior color of a light color (yellow, light blue, yellow-green, etc.) that has a reflection efficiency similar to white.

Furthermore, when yellow is used as the silkscreen paint, the yellow printed by the silkscreen may be a light yellow, a dark yellow, or even orange due to variations in the printing machine. Furthermore, ink companies that supply silkscreen paint also have a range of yellow colors (yellows that lean toward the lighter side, yellows that lean toward the darker side). Therefore, even if the same or multiple PCB manufacturers specify a specific yellow color as the silkscreen paint, the resulting yellow will not be exactly the same (it is difficult to achieve the same yellow color), and there will be a range of yellow colors. For this reason, even if the inscription is silkscreen printed with yellow paint, but the inscription is also silkscreen printed with a paint that includes other colors close to the brightness of white (e.g., light green, light blue, etc.), like the yellow paint described above, the resulting color will not be exactly the same brightness of white (it is difficult to achieve the same brightness of white), and there will be a range of colors close to the brightness of white. Even if a color other than yellow is used as the inscription paint, there will be a range of colors, like the yellow paint described above.

The LEDs are full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors, but they may also be single-color LEDs such as white, red, green, yellow, orange, blue, or green, or they may be surface-mounted top-view LEDs or surface-mounted side-view LEDs. In addition to using surface-mounted LEDs, bullet-type LEDs may also be used.

In addition, while a connector for connecting electrical wiring to the decorative board KB was mounted on the rear surface (rear mounting surface) of the decorative board KB, if the connector housing is an electronic component that is white or near-white (e.g., ivory, beige, cream), it may be mounted on the front surface (front mounting surface) of the decorative board KB. This is because by mounting a white connector (or a connector near-white) that has a color similar to the white insulating film, which is the insulating coating formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of the decorative board KB, it is possible to suppress the reduction in reflection efficiency on the front surface (front mounting surface) of the decorative board KB caused by this connector. In addition, not only electronic components with white or near-white connector housings (e.g., ivory, beige, cream), but also electronic components with light connector housings (e.g., yellow, light blue, yellow-green, etc.) that slightly reduce reflective efficiency compared to white, rather than dark connector housings (e.g., black, green, blue, purple, etc.) that significantly reduce reflective efficiency, may be mounted on the front (front mounting surface) of the decorative board KB. Even in this case, the reduction in reflective efficiency on the front (front mounting surface) of the decorative board KB due to the connector can be suppressed. Furthermore, not only connectors, but also electronic components with light-colored housings (e.g., white, near-white (e.g., ivory, beige, cream), or light-colored (e.g., yellow, light blue, yellow-green, etc.)) (e.g., light-colored housings that may partially darken reflective efficiency as long as the electronic components are mostly light-colored) may be mounted on the front (front mounting surface) of the decorative board KB. Even in this case, the reduction in reflective efficiency on the front (front mounting surface) of the decorative board KB due to the electronic components can be suppressed. In this way, only LEDs with light-colored packages may be mounted on the front surface (front mounting surface) of the decorative board KB, or electronic components with light-colored exteriors may be mounted separately from the LEDs with light-colored packages. In this case, too, it is possible to prevent a decrease in reflection efficiency on the front surface (front mounting surface) of the decorative board KB.

In addition, a board ground (also called a solid ground or board GND) is formed beneath the white insulating coating formed on the front surface (front mounting surface, LED mounting surface) and the rear surface (rear mounting surface, non-LED mounting surface) of the decorative board KB. Specifically, the board ground is formed in part (may be less than half) or all (may be more than half or substantially all) of the areas on the front surface (front mounting surface, LED mounting surface) and the rear surface (rear mounting surface, non-LED mounting surface) of the decorative board KB, excluding the areas where the wiring pattern is formed, the areas where the foil-punched characters are formed (e.g., the areas where the board control number is formed), and the areas where the check terminals (test points) are formed, and substantially all areas except the check terminals are covered with the white insulating coating. As a result, the board ground prevents light emitted from the LEDs mounted on the front surface (front mounting surface, LED mounting surface) of the decorative board KB from transmitting to the rear surface (rear mounting surface, non-LED mounting surface) of the decorative board KB, improving the reflectivity on the front surface (front mounting surface, LED mounting surface) of the decorative board KB and achieving efficient illuminated decoration with reduced loss of light intensity.

While the above example shows a board ground formed on both the front surface (front mounting surface, LED mounting surface) and the rear surface (rear mounting surface, non-LED mounting surface) of the decorative board KB, the above-mentioned effects can be achieved by forming a board ground (also called a solid ground or board GND) on at least one of the front surface (front mounting surface, LED mounting surface) or rear surface (rear mounting surface, non-LED mounting surface) of the decorative board KB. Furthermore, check terminals (test points) that cannot be covered with an insulating coating may be formed only on the rear surface (rear mounting surface, non-LED mounting surface) of the decorative board KB, rather than on the front surface (front mounting surface, LED mounting surface). This increases the proportion of the area of the front surface (front mounting surface, LED mounting surface) of the decorative board KB that is covered with a white insulating coating, thereby achieving a more uniform reflectivity on the front surface (front mounting surface, LED mounting surface) of the decorative board KB.

[Configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the lands of the through holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 according to the first embodiment]
In the first embodiment, the game board 5 includes a configuration in which an insulating film is applied to the through-hole lands formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board. As shown in Figures 194(a) and 194(b), a thin through-hole is formed in the thickness direction of the base material KBo of the decorative board KB (the direction perpendicular to the surface (back surface) of the base material KBo of the decorative board KB). The copper foil is removed from the copper foil surface of the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB and the copper foil surface of the rear surface (back mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB to form a front surface (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 and a rear surface (back mounting surface) land KRDy1, each having an outer diameter KTHD1. The front surface (front mounting surface) wiring pattern and the rear surface (back mounting surface) wiring pattern are also formed. The through-hole KTH1 is formed by plating the entire inner surface of the through-hole with electrical conductivity. The outer diameter of the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB and the outer diameter of the rear (back mounting surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear (back mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB are the same size, outer diameter KTHD1.

The front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 formed on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB is electrically connected to one end of the front (front mounting surface) wiring pattern formed on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, and the other end of the front (front mounting surface) wiring pattern is electrically connected to a pad to which a specific terminal of one full-color LED or multiple full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light is soldered.

In addition, the front (front mounting surface) side wiring patterns formed on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, which are electrically connected to the front (front mounting surface) side lands KRDx1 formed on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, include a first front (front mounting surface) side wiring pattern and a second front (front mounting surface) side wiring pattern. In this case, one end of the first front (front mounting surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, and one end of the second front (front mounting surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, resulting in two front (front mounting surface) side wiring patterns (i.e., the first front (front mounting surface) side wiring pattern and the second front (front mounting surface) side wiring pattern) extending from the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1. In addition, the rear surface (rear mounting surface) side wiring patterns formed on the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, which are electrically connected to the rear surface (rear mounting surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, include a first rear surface (rear mounting surface) side wiring pattern and a second rear surface (rear mounting surface) side wiring pattern. In this case, one end of the first rear surface (rear mounting surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the rear surface (rear mounting surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, and one end of the second rear surface (rear mounting surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the rear surface (rear mounting surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, with two rear surface (rear mounting surface) side wiring patterns (i.e., the first rear surface (rear mounting surface) side wiring pattern and the second rear surface (rear mounting surface) side wiring pattern) extending from the rear surface (rear mounting surface) side land KRDy1.

The rear surface (rear mounting surface) land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB is electrically connected to one end of the rear surface (rear mounting surface) wiring pattern formed on the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, and the other end of the rear surface (rear mounting surface) wiring pattern is electrically connected to any of the following pads: a pad to which a specific terminal of an IC that controls the light emission of a full-color LED is soldered, a pad to which a specific terminal of a resistor is soldered, a pad to which a specific terminal of a connector is soldered, etc.

The front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 formed on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB and the rear (rear mounting surface) land KRDy1 formed on the rear (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB are electrically connected via the through hole KTH1. The front (front mounting surface) wiring pattern formed on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB and the rear (rear mounting surface) wiring pattern formed on the rear (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB are electrically connected via the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 formed on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, the through hole KTH1, and the rear (rear mounting surface) land KRDy1 formed on the rear (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB.

A white resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating to the copper foil surface of the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, forming a front (front mounting surface) side resist layer KBxr.However, in the area of the front (front mounting surface) side resist layer KBxr corresponding to the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1, a front (front mounting surface) side resist opening KBxra is formed having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1. Additionally, a white resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating to the copper foil surface of the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, forming a rear surface (rear mounting surface) resist layer KByr. In the area of the rear surface (rear mounting surface) resist layer KByr corresponding to the rear surface (rear mounting surface) land KRDy1, a rear surface (rear mounting surface) resist opening KByra is formed, having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the rear surface (rear mounting surface) land KRDy1.

The opening diameter KBxrD1 of the resist opening KBxra on the front (front mounting surface) side and the opening diameter KByrD1 of the resist opening KByra on the rear (rear mounting surface) side are the same size. The board ground (GND) (i.e., solid ground) formed on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB and the board ground (GND) (i.e., solid ground) formed on the rear (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB are electrically connected by through-holes (not shown) and form the same ground (GND).

The decorative board KB is actually manufactured by arranging multiple boards from a single sheet of fixed-length copper-clad laminate (base material) and finally cutting it out. The single sheet of fixed-length copper-clad laminate (base material) is fixed to the manufacturing equipment and goes through a process of painting, drying, drilling holes, and other processes before each board is finally cut out.

In this way, on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, in the area of the front (front mounting surface) side resist layer KBxr corresponding to the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1, a front (front mounting surface) side resist opening KBxra is formed having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1, so that the outer peripheral portion of the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1 is covered with white resist as an insulating coating from the outer periphery of the outer diameter KTHD1 of the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1 toward the center of the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1. This allows the entire outer periphery of the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1 on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB to be covered with white resist as an insulating coating, thereby reducing the area of the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1 where the copper foil is exposed. Furthermore, by covering the outer periphery of the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 with white resist as an insulating coating from the outer periphery of the outer diameter KTHD1 of the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 toward the center of the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1, the proportion of the area of the rear (rear mounting surface) land KRDy1 covered with white resist (insulating coating) can be increased compared to when the inner periphery of the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 is covered with white resist (insulating coating) from the center of the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 toward the outer periphery of the outer diameter KTHD1, thereby achieving uniformity on the rear (rear mounting surface) of the decorative board KB.

In addition, because the copper foil on both the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 and the rear (rear mounting surface) land KRDy1 is exposed, electrical testing (checking for operation or abnormal potential) of the decorative board KB can be performed by contacting the tip of a contact probe with the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 from the front (front mounting surface) of the decorative board KB, or by contacting the tip of a contact probe with the rear (rear mounting surface) land KRDy1 from the rear (rear mounting surface) of the decorative board KB. In other words, the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 and the rear (rear mounting surface) land KRDy1 can be used as check terminals when performing electrical testing of the decorative board KB. The contact probe can be a dedicated probe or a test lead used to check continuity with a tester.

In addition, since the tip of the contact probe can be brought into contact with the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 from the front (front mounting surface) side of the decorative board KB, for example, even when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an amusement hall, the front (front mounting surface) of the decorative board KB faces forward of the pachinko machine 1, so if the tip of the contact probe can be brought into contact with the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 from the front (front mounting surface) side of the decorative board KB, it is possible to perform an electrical test (check for operation and abnormal potential) on the decorative board KB as a defect inspection for the decorative board KB without having to remove the decorative board KB.

However, if the multiple LEDs mounted on the decorative board KB are of a type with a small illumination angle (narrow illumination angle type), they may appear as a point light source and be perceived by the player as a collection of point light sources, which may cause discomfort. For this reason, the multiple LEDs mounted on the decorative board KB are of a type with a large illumination angle (wide illumination angle type) so that they are not perceived by the player as a point light source.

However, as the illumination angle of the LED increases (the illumination angle of the LED becomes wider), the range illuminated by the LED becomes wider, and more of the light emitted from the light-emitting surface of the LED is reflected off multiple other components and returned to the decorative board KB. Therefore, if the light that returns to the decorative board KB can be reflected so that it is emitted forward of the decorative board KB, then in addition to the light-emitting surface of the LED, the front surface (front mounting surface) of the decorative board KB on which multiple LEDs are mounted can be used as a reflective surface, and the light emitted from the light-emitting surface of the LED can be used efficiently for lighting effects.

As described above, the decorative board KB has through holes KTH1 that electrically connect the front (front mounting surface) wiring pattern formed on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB with the rear (rear mounting surface) wiring pattern formed on the rear (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, and front (front mounting surface) lands KRDx1 are formed on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB. As described above, a solid white resist is formed as an insulating coating on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, and front (front mounting surface) lands KRDx1 are formed thereon. Because the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 has exposed copper foil, the reflectance of the white resist (white insulating film) applied as an insulating coating differs from the reflectance of the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1, making it difficult to achieve a uniform reflectance from the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB on which multiple LEDs are mounted.

Therefore, in the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the lands of the through holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 in the first embodiment, the entire outer periphery of the front surface (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1 on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB is covered with a white resist as an insulating coating. This reduces the area of the front surface (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1 where the copper foil is exposed, contributing to making the reflectance of the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB on which multiple LEDs are mounted uniform.

In addition, by covering the entire outer periphery of the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB with a white resist as an insulating coating, the proportion of exposed copper foil on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB that is visible to players can be reduced. Therefore, by making the reflectivity of the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB uniform (even), the copper foil portion becomes less noticeable, contributing to improving the luminous effect of the decorative board KB.

A translucent inner lens KA is disposed on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative substrate KB. This inner lens KA has lens cuts on the front or back surface (formed into a polyhedron or an uneven shape (including those with multiple fine unevenness)) that enable it to refract light in a diffuse manner and distort objects viewed through the inner lens KA, making them unclear. An example of an inner lens is shown in Figure 262. Figure 262(A) is a front view of the inner lens KA, Figure 262(B) is a front oblique view of the inner lens KA, and Figure 262(C) is a rear oblique view of the inner lens KA. As shown in Figures 262(A) to (C), the inner lens KA has multiple fine lenses (or prisms) formed on its surface, allowing it to widely diffuse light from the decorative substrate KB. In this way, by covering almost the entire front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB (at least the area where the LEDs are mounted) with the inner lens KA, it is possible to make it difficult for players to notice the presence of the front surface (front mounting surface) side lands KRDx1 and through holes KTH1 on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB.

The inner lens KA can achieve the above-mentioned effects as long as it has lens cuts such as fine lenses (or prisms) on at least one of the front and back sides. Furthermore, the inner lens KA needs to cover at least the area of the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB where the front surface (front mounting surface) lands KRDx1 and through holes KTH1 are formed, and the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB may have an area that is not covered by the inner lens KA. Furthermore, by adopting a configuration in which an insulating film is applied to the lands of the through-holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board included in the gaming board 5 of the first embodiment, it is possible to make the presence of the front surface (front mounting surface) side lands KRDx1 and through-holes KTH1 on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB less noticeable to players. Furthermore, by adopting a configuration in which the inner lens KA covers almost the entire front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB (at least the area where the LEDs are mounted), it is possible to make the presence of the front surface (front mounting surface) side lands KRDx1 and through-holes KTH1 on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB even less noticeable to players. Furthermore, if there are differences in the reflection efficiency due to the thickness or color shade of the white resist applied as a solid insulating film to the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, the inner lens KA can suppress these differences, enhancing the presentation effect.

In addition, when the inner lens KA is placed on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, it may be placed so that the boundary between the faces of the polyhedron formed on the surface or the boundary between the concave and convex portions overlaps with one or both of the through hole KTH1 and part of the notation (which may be only the part number, or only the area indicating the placement position) (on a straight line perpendicular to the LED mounting surface).In this case, the boundary between the faces of the inner lens KA, which has particularly large distortion, can make the through hole KTH1 and the notation unclear, making their presence difficult for players to notice. In addition, the inner lens KA covering the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB may be constructed by stacking multiple lenses with different degrees of lens cut (polyhedrons or lenses with different numbers of concaves and convexes, surface sizes, etc.) (for example, a double structure), which not only makes it possible to make the refraction of light more irregular, but also makes it possible to distort and blur objects viewed through the inner lens KA more strongly, making it difficult for players to notice the presence of the front surface (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1 and through hole KTH1 holes on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB. Alternatively, the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB may be covered with a decorative lens without a lens cut, and an inner lens KA with a lens cut may be placed between this decorative lens and the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KG (inside the decorative lens), so that this inner lens KA covers part or all of the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB; alternatively, the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB may be covered with an inner lens KA with a lens cut, and an decorative lens without a lens cut may be placed between this inner lens KA and the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KG (inside the decorative lens), so that this decorative lens covers part or all of the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB.

In addition, decorative lenses that have not been subjected to lens cuts may be formed to be opaque (including translucent) and translucent, and by placing them on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB together with an inner lens KA that has been subjected to lens cuts, the opaque decorative lens makes it difficult for players to notice the presence of the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1 and through hole KTH1 on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, while still allowing for uniform illumination decoration using the LEDs mounted on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB. Furthermore, instead of placing a lens-cut inner lens KA on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, only a decorative lens that is opaque (including translucent) and translucent and has no lens cuts can be placed on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB. In this case, too, the opaque decorative lens makes it difficult for players to notice the presence of the front surface (front mounting surface) side lands KRDx1 and through holes KTH1 on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, while still allowing for illuminated decoration using LEDs mounted on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB.

In addition, since the liquid crystal display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided on the gaming board 5 is the object of greatest visual recognition by the player, the decorative substrates around the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display screen), the decorative substrates arranged to cover the upper side of the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display screen), and the decorative substrates arranged so that they can be moved to a position that covers the upper side of the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display screen) are configured so that an insulating coating is applied to the lands of the through holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the gaming board 5 in the first embodiment, and by minimizing the areas of the through hole lands that are not covered by the insulating coating, this has the effect of making the reflectivity of the front surface (front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate on which multiple LEDs are mounted uniform (even), making the copper foil areas less noticeable, and making the presence of the through hole holes less obvious to players. Also, in other locations, for example, when the decorative substrate is placed in a place where it can be seen by a player through an inner lens KA that has been lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron or uneven shape) to allow for diffuse refraction of light, by covering the lands of the through holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the game board 5 of the first embodiment with an insulating coating, it has the effect of making the reflectivity of the front surface (front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate on which multiple LEDs are mounted uniform (even), making the copper foil portion less noticeable, and making the presence of the through holes less noticeable to players. Furthermore, the decorative boards on the game board 5 are positioned closer to the effect display device 1600 than the decorative boards on the door frame 3, and therefore the configuration in which an insulating film is applied to the through-hole lands formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board on the game board 5 in the first embodiment has the effect of making the reflectivity of the front surface (front mounting surface) of the decorative board on which multiple LEDs are mounted uniform, making the copper foil portions less noticeable, and making the presence of the through-holes less noticeable to players.

In addition, in the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the lands of the through holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 according to the first embodiment, on the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, a rear surface (rear mounting surface) resist opening KByra is formed in the area of the rear surface (rear mounting surface) resist layer KByr corresponding to the rear surface (rear mounting surface) land KRDy1, with an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the rear surface (rear mounting surface) land KRDy1. 1 toward the center of the rear (rear mounting surface) side land KRDy1, the outer periphery of the rear (rear mounting surface) side land KRDy1 is covered with a white resist as an insulating coating, but as shown in FIG. 194( c), in the region of the rear (rear mounting surface) side resist layer KByr corresponding to the rear (rear mounting surface) side land KRDy1, a rear (rear mounting surface) side resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD2 (>opening diameter KByrD1) larger than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the rear (rear mounting surface) side land KRDy1 may be formed. This is because not a single LED is mounted on the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, and the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB cannot be used as a reflective surface to reflect the light emitted by the multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB. Therefore, there is absolutely no need to contribute to making the reflectance of the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB uniform (even) as described above, and the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB cannot efficiently use the light emitted from the light-emitting surfaces of the LEDs for lighting effects.

In addition, in the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the lands of the through holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 in the first embodiment, a white resist layer is formed on almost the entire front surface (front mounting surface) KBx and rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB using a white insulating film formed by applying a white resist liquid as an insulating coating, and the configuration is such that the reflectivity on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB is made uniform even with markings indicating the attributes of electronic components such as the part number of the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is to be placed (for example, by forming the markings in a light color such as yellow on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, or by forming the markings with foil-punched letters, or by forming the markings with paint of a predetermined color on the rear surface (rear mounting surface) of the decorative board KB). In addition, in the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the lands of the through holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 of the first embodiment, in addition to contributing to suppressing the decrease in reflectivity by covering the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1 on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB with a white insulating film, the effect of suppressing the decrease in reflectivity is further enhanced by adopting a configuration in which the above-mentioned notation portion aims to uniform the reflectivity on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB. Furthermore, a configuration that uses markings to equalize the reflectivity of the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB can also make the markings themselves difficult to see, making it difficult for players to see markings that indicate the attributes of electronic components, such as the full-color LED part number and the area indicating the position of the full-color LED, which are unrelated to the game.In addition, by using a configuration in which the lands of the through-holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the gaming board 5 of the first embodiment are covered with an insulating film, the through-holes can also be made difficult to see, further preventing a decrease in interest in the game due to the visibility of information unrelated to the game or through-holes.

As a security measure, the pin 1 mark may be displayed by leaving a foil mark, etc., without displaying the attributes of the electronic component, such as the full-color LED part number or the area indicating the position of the full-color LED. In this case, in addition to these configurations, an insulating coating may be applied to the lands of the through-holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the gaming board 5 of the first embodiment described above. This can further enhance the effect of suppressing a decrease in reflectivity, and increase the effect of preventing information unrelated to the game (pin 1 mark) or through-holes from being visible, which could reduce interest in the game.

In the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the lands of the through holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 in the first embodiment, a white resist layer is formed on almost the entire front surface (front mounting surface) KBx and rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB using a white insulating film formed by applying a white resist liquid as an insulating coating.However, on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB on which multiple LEDs are mounted, a white resist layer is formed on almost the entire front surface using a white insulating film formed by applying a white resist liquid as an insulating coating, while on the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB on which no LEDs are mounted, a resist layer of another color (for example, green, black, yellow, red, blue, etc.) different from white may be formed on almost the entire rear surface using a other color insulating film formed by applying a resist liquid of another color different from white as an insulating coating. This is because not a single LED is mounted on the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, and the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB cannot be used as a reflective surface to reflect the light emitted by the multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB. Therefore, there is absolutely no need to contribute to making the reflectance of the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB uniform (even) as described above, and the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB cannot efficiently use the light emitted from the light-emitting surfaces of the LEDs for lighting effects.

In addition, in the configuration in which an insulating film is applied to the through-hole lands formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board included in the game board 5 of the first embodiment, a white resist layer is formed on almost the entire front surface (front mounting surface) KBx and rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB using a white insulating film formed by applying a white resist liquid as an insulating coating. However, a white silkscreen layer may be formed on almost the entire front surface (front mounting surface) KBx or rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB using a white insulating film formed by silkscreen printing with white paint. In this case, a notation indicating the component number and attributes of the electronic component, which allows identification of the electronic component, is silkscreen printed with yellow paint on the white silkscreen layer formed on one or both surfaces. In addition to yellow, the notation may also be silkscreen printed with paint having a color similar to the brightness of white, such as a pastel color (e.g., light green or light blue). When forming the white silkscreen layer described above on one or both surfaces, a resist layer may be formed to cover the substrate KBo or the copper foil surface (the copper foil surface excluding designated areas in addition to the pads to which electronic components are soldered), or no resist layer may be formed. If a resist layer is formed, the white silkscreen layer will be formed from a white insulating film formed by silkscreen printing with white paint as an insulating coating covering the resist layer. The resist layer may be a white resist liquid, or a resist liquid of a color other than white (green, black, yellow, red, blue, etc.).

In addition, the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the through-hole lands formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the gaming board 5 of the first embodiment can be applied to the through-hole lands of the functional display substrate 1400c in the functional display unit 1400 of the gaming board 5. As described above, a black resist layer is formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) 1400cx and rear surface (rear mounting surface) 1400cy of the functional display substrate 1400c using a black insulating film formed by applying a black resist liquid. As described above, using black resist liquid prevents reflection of light emitted by the multiple LEDs 1400ca mounted on the front surface (front mounting surface) 1400cx of the functional display substrate 1400c, thereby helping to prevent the light from mixing with light emitted by LEDs 1400ca arranged nearby. Therefore, by covering the entire outer periphery of the front (front mounting surface) side lands on the front (front mounting surface) 1400cx of the functional display substrate 1400c with black resist as an insulating coating, the area of the front (front mounting surface) side lands where the copper foil is exposed is kept small, reducing the reflectivity and contributing to making the reflectivity of the front (front mounting surface) 1400cx of the functional display substrate 1400c on which multiple LEDs 1400ca are mounted uniform.

As mentioned above, the through holes are electrically conductive, with copper plating applied to the inner walls of the holes. There are through holes for mounting electronic components and through holes for not mounting electronic components. For both types of through hole lands, an insulating coating was applied to the lands of the through holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board included in the gaming board 5 of the first embodiment. However, for through holes for not mounting electronic components, those located directly below where electronic components are mounted do not need to have an insulating coating applied to the lands of the through holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board included in the gaming board 5 of the first embodiment. In other words, for through holes for not mounting electronic components, the entire copper foil on the lands of through holes located directly below where electronic components are mounted may be left exposed. In this case, the copper foil is entirely exposed on the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, and the rear (rear mounting surface) land KRDy1 on the rear (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB. Because the electronic components are arranged to cover the entire through-hole lands, which are entirely exposed, there is no need to make the copper foil less noticeable, and there is no need to make the presence of the through-hole holes difficult for players to notice. In addition, the presence of the through-hole lands and the presence of the through-hole holes can be visually confirmed from the side where the electronic components are not mounted during an electrical inspection of the decorative board KB, and the tip of a contact probe can be brought into contact with the through-hole lands to perform an electrical inspection of the decorative board KB (to check for operation and abnormal potentials).

[Configuration of Covering Land of Through-Hole with Insulating Coating According to Second Embodiment]
In the second embodiment, as shown in Figures 195(a) and 195(b), a thin through hole is formed in the thickness direction of the base material KBo of the decorative board KB (the direction perpendicular to the surface (perpendicular to the back surface) of the base material KBo of the decorative board KB), and the copper foil is removed from the copper foil surface of the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB and the copper foil surface of the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB to form a front surface (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 and a rear surface (rear mounting surface) land KRDy1, each having an outer diameter KTHD1, and a front surface (front mounting surface) wiring pattern and a rear surface (rear mounting surface) wiring pattern are formed. The through hole is then plated to have conductivity, forming the through hole KTH1. The outer diameter of the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 formed on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB and the outer diameter of the rear (back mounting surface) land KRDy1 formed on the rear (back mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB are the same size, and are the same size as the outer diameter of the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 and the outer diameter of the rear (back mounting surface) land KRDy1 in the configuration in which an insulating coating is covered on the land of the through hole in the first embodiment described above.

The front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 formed on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB is electrically connected to one end of the front (front mounting surface) wiring pattern formed on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, and the other end of the front (front mounting surface) wiring pattern is electrically connected to a pad to which a specific terminal of one full-color LED or multiple full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light is soldered.

The rear surface (rear mounting surface) land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB is electrically connected to one end of the rear surface (rear mounting surface) wiring pattern formed on the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, and the other end of the rear surface (rear mounting surface) wiring pattern is electrically connected to any of the following pads: a pad to which a specific terminal of an IC that controls the light emission of a full-color LED is soldered, a pad to which a specific terminal of a resistor is soldered, a pad to which a specific terminal of a connector is soldered, etc.

In addition, the front (front mounting surface) side wiring patterns formed on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, which are electrically connected to the front (front mounting surface) side lands KRDx1 formed on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, include a first front (front mounting surface) side wiring pattern and a second front (front mounting surface) side wiring pattern. In this case, one end of the first front (front mounting surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, and one end of the second front (front mounting surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, resulting in two front (front mounting surface) side wiring patterns (i.e., the first front (front mounting surface) side wiring pattern and the second front (front mounting surface) side wiring pattern) extending from the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1. In addition, the rear surface (rear mounting surface) side wiring patterns formed on the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, which are electrically connected to the rear surface (rear mounting surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, include a first rear surface (rear mounting surface) side wiring pattern and a second rear surface (rear mounting surface) side wiring pattern. In this case, one end of the first rear surface (rear mounting surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the rear surface (rear mounting surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, and one end of the second rear surface (rear mounting surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the rear surface (rear mounting surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, with two rear surface (rear mounting surface) side wiring patterns (i.e., the first rear surface (rear mounting surface) side wiring pattern and the second rear surface (rear mounting surface) side wiring pattern) extending from the rear surface (rear mounting surface) side land KRDy1.

The front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 formed on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB and the rear (rear mounting surface) land KRDy1 formed on the rear (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB are electrically connected via the through hole KTH1. The front (front mounting surface) wiring pattern formed on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB and the rear (rear mounting surface) wiring pattern formed on the rear (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB are electrically connected via the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 formed on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, the through hole KTH1, and the rear (rear mounting surface) land KRDy1 formed on the rear (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB.

A white resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating to the copper foil surface of the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, forming a front (front mounting surface) side resist layer KBxr. However, in the area of the front (front mounting surface) side resist layer KBxr corresponding to the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1, a front (front mounting surface) side resist opening KBxra is formed, which has an opening diameter KBxrD1 that is smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1, is even smaller than the outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 in the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the land of the through hole in the first embodiment described above, and is larger than the inner diameter of the hole of the through hole KTH1. The inner diameter of this opening diameter KBxrD2 takes into account the resist liquid intrusion prevention area that extends concentrically outward from the inner periphery of the through hole KTH1 on the front (front mounting surface) side, and is sized to be the resist liquid intrusion prevention distance dimension (a distance of at least 0.5 mm is required to prevent white resist liquid from infiltrating the through hole KTH1 hole in the decorative board KB; in the configuration in which the through hole land is covered with an insulating film in the second embodiment, 0.5 mm is used) from the inner periphery of the through hole KTH1 on the front (front mounting surface) side. Therefore, the inner diameter of opening diameter KBxrD2 is the inner diameter of through hole KTH1 plus twice the resist liquid intrusion prevention distance dimension (0.5 mm), and is 1.0 mm larger than the inner diameter of through hole KTH1.

In contrast, a white resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating to the copper foil surface of the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, forming a rear surface (rear mounting surface) resist layer KByr. However, in the area of the rear surface (rear mounting surface) resist layer KByr corresponding to the rear surface (rear mounting surface) land KRDy1, a rear surface (rear mounting surface) resist opening KByra is formed, having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the rear surface (rear mounting surface) land KRDy1. The outer diameter of opening diameter KByrD1 is the same size as the outer diameter of opening diameter KByrD1 in the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the through-hole land in the first embodiment described above.

The board ground (GND) (i.e., solid ground) formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB and the board ground (GND) (i.e., solid ground) formed on the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB are electrically connected by through holes (not shown) to form the same ground (GND).

The decorative board KB is actually manufactured by arranging multiple boards from a single sheet of fixed-length copper-clad laminate (base material) and finally cutting it out. The single sheet of fixed-length copper-clad laminate (base material) is fixed to the manufacturing equipment and goes through a process of painting, drying, drilling holes, and other processes before finally cutting out each board.

In this way, on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, the area of the front surface (front mounting surface) resist layer KBxr corresponding to the front surface (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 has a front surface (front mounting surface) opening diameter KBxrD1 that is smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the front surface (front mounting surface) land KRDx1, and is even smaller than the outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1 in the configuration in which the land of the through hole in the first embodiment is covered with an insulating coating, and is larger than the inner diameter of the hole of the through hole KTH1. Because the resist opening KBxra is formed, the outer periphery of the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1, except for the resist liquid intrusion prevention region of the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1 (i.e., the region extending from the outer periphery of the outer diameter KTHD1 of the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1 toward the center of the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1, to a position separated by the resist liquid intrusion prevention distance dimension (0.5 mm)), is covered with white resist as an insulating coating. This allows a white resist to be covered as an insulating coating from almost the inside to the entire outer periphery of the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1 on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB (that is, the area of the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1 on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB excluding the area where resist liquid intrusion is prevented).Since the area where the copper foil is exposed becomes the area where resist liquid intrusion is prevented, the area of the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1 where the copper foil is exposed can be kept extremely small compared to the configuration in which an insulating coating is covered over the land of a through hole in the first embodiment. Furthermore, by covering the outer periphery of the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 with white resist as an insulating coating from the outer periphery of the outer diameter KTHD1 of the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 toward the center of the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1, the proportion of the area of the rear (rear mounting surface) land KRDy1 covered with white resist (insulating coating) can be increased compared to when the inner periphery of the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 is covered with white resist (insulating coating) from the center of the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 toward the outer periphery of the outer diameter KTHD1, thereby achieving uniformity on the rear (rear mounting surface) of the decorative board KB.

In addition, because a resist liquid intrusion prevention area is provided for the through hole KTH1 of the decorative board KB, when white resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating to the copper foil surface of the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, even if the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB is fixed in the manufacturing equipment so that it faces vertically upward (because the decorative board KB is actually manufactured by arranging and ultimately cutting multiple boards from a single sheet of fixed-length copper-clad laminate (base material), the front surface of the single sheet of fixed-length copper-clad laminate (base material) faces vertically upward), the white resist liquid will infiltrate the through hole KTH1 of the decorative board KB and dry without blocking the hole.

In addition, because the copper foil on both the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 and the rear (rear mounting surface) land KRDy1 is exposed, electrical testing (checking for operation or abnormal potential) of the decorative board KB can be performed by contacting the tip of a contact probe with the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 from the front (front mounting surface) of the decorative board KB, or by contacting the tip of a contact probe with the rear (rear mounting surface) land KRDy1 from the rear (rear mounting surface) of the decorative board KB. In other words, the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 and the rear (rear mounting surface) land KRDy1 can be used as check terminals when performing electrical testing of the decorative board KB. The contact probe can be a dedicated probe or a test lead used to check continuity with a tester.

In addition, since the tip of the contact probe can be brought into contact with the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 from the front (front mounting surface) side of the decorative board KB, for example, even when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an amusement hall, the front (front mounting surface) of the decorative board KB faces forward of the pachinko machine 1, so if the tip of the contact probe can be brought into contact with the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 from the front (front mounting surface) side of the decorative board KB, it is possible to perform an electrical test (check for operation and abnormal potential) on the decorative board KB as a defect inspection for the decorative board KB without having to remove the decorative board KB.

However, if the multiple LEDs mounted on the decorative board KB are of a type with a small illumination angle (narrow illumination angle type), they may appear as a point light source and be perceived by the player as a collection of point light sources, which may cause discomfort. For this reason, the multiple LEDs mounted on the decorative board KB are of a type with a large illumination angle (wide illumination angle type) so that they are not perceived by the player as a point light source.

However, as the illumination angle of the LED increases (the illumination angle of the LED becomes wider), the range illuminated by the LED becomes wider, and more of the light emitted from the light-emitting surface of the LED is reflected off multiple other components and returned to the decorative board KB. Therefore, if the light that returns to the decorative board KB can be reflected so that it is emitted forward of the decorative board KB, then in addition to the light-emitting surface of the LED, the front surface (front mounting surface) of the decorative board KB on which multiple LEDs are mounted can be used as a reflective surface, and the light emitted from the light-emitting surface of the LED can be used efficiently for lighting effects.

As described above, the decorative board KB has through holes KTH1 that electrically connect the front (front mounting surface) wiring pattern formed on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB with the rear (rear mounting surface) wiring pattern formed on the rear (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, and front (front mounting surface) lands KRDx1 are formed on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB. As described above, a solid white resist is formed as an insulating coating on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, and front (front mounting surface) lands KRDx1 are formed thereon. Because the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 has exposed copper foil, the reflectance of the white resist (white insulating film) applied as an insulating coating differs from the reflectance of the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1, making it difficult to achieve a uniform reflectance from the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB on which multiple LEDs are mounted.

Therefore, in the configuration in which an insulating film is applied to the lands of the through holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 of the second embodiment, a white resist can be applied as an insulating film from almost the inside to the entire outer periphery of the front surface (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1 on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB (i.e., the area of the front surface (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1 on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB excluding the area where the resist liquid is prevented from entering), so the copper foil is prevented from peeling off. Because the exposed portions act as areas that prevent the intrusion of resist liquid, the area of the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 where the copper foil is exposed is kept extremely small compared to the configuration in which the through-hole lands in the first embodiment are covered with an insulating film, which contributes more to making the reflectance of the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB on which multiple LEDs are mounted uniform than the configuration in which the through-hole lands in the first embodiment are covered with an insulating film.

In addition, by covering the entire outer periphery of the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB with a white resist as an insulating coating (i.e., the entire area of the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB excluding the area where the resist liquid is prevented from entering), the proportion of exposed copper foil on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB that is visible to players can be reduced. Therefore, by making the reflectivity of the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB uniform (even), the copper foil portions are made less noticeable, which contributes to improving the luminous effect of the decorative board KB.

A translucent inner lens KA is also placed on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB. This inner lens KA is lens-cut (shaped into a polyhedron) to enable it to refract light in a diffuse manner and to distort objects viewed through the inner lens KA. In this way, by covering almost the entire front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB (at least the area where the LEDs are mounted) with the inner lens KA, the front surface (front mounting surface) side lands KRDx1 and through holes KTH1 on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB become unclear, making their presence less noticeable to players. Furthermore, by adopting a configuration in which an insulating film is applied to the lands of the through-holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board included in the gaming board 5 of the second embodiment, it is possible to make it difficult for players to notice the front surface (front mounting surface) side lands KRDx1 and through-holes KTH1 on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB. Furthermore, by adopting a configuration in which the inner lens KA covers almost the entire front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB (at least the area where the LEDs are mounted), it is possible to make it even more difficult for players to notice the front surface (front mounting surface) side lands KRDx1 and through-holes KTH1 on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB. Furthermore, if there are differences in reflection efficiency due to the thickness or color shade of the white resist applied as a solid insulating film to the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, the inner lens KA can suppress these differences, enhancing the presentation effect.

In addition, when the inner lens KA is placed on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, it may be placed so that the boundary between the faces of the polyhedron formed on the surface or the boundary between the concave and convex portions overlaps with one or both of the through hole KTH1 and part of the notation (which may be only the part number, or only the area indicating the placement position) (on a straight line perpendicular to the LED mounting surface).In this case, the boundary between the faces of the inner lens KA, which has particularly large distortion, can make the through hole KTH1 and the notation unclear, making their presence difficult for players to notice. Furthermore, the inner lens KA covering the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB may be constructed by stacking multiple lenses with different degrees of lens cut (polyhedrons or lenses with different numbers of irregularities and surface sizes, etc.) (for example, a double structure), which not only makes it possible to make the refraction of light more irregular, but also makes it possible to more strongly distort and blur objects viewed through the inner lens KA, making it difficult for players to notice the presence of the front surface (front mounting surface) side lands KRDx1 and through holes KTH1 on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB.

In addition, since the liquid crystal display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided on the gaming board 5 is the object of greatest visual recognition by the player, the decorative substrates around the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display screen), the decorative substrates arranged to cover the upper side of the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display screen), and the decorative substrates arranged to be movable to a position to cover the upper side of the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display screen) are configured so that an insulating coating is applied to the lands of the through holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the gaming board 5 in the second embodiment.Compared to the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the lands of the through holes in the first embodiment, by minimizing the areas of the through hole lands that are not covered by the insulating coating, this has the effect of making the reflectivity of the front surface (front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate on which multiple LEDs are mounted uniform (even), making the copper foil areas less noticeable, and making the presence of the through hole holes less obvious to players. Furthermore, even in other locations, such as when the decorative substrate is placed in a place where it can be seen by a player through an inner lens KA that has been lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron or uneven shape) to allow for diffuse refraction of light, the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the lands of the through holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the gaming board 5 of the second embodiment, compared to the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the lands of the through holes of the first embodiment, has the effect of making the reflectivity of the front surface (front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate on which multiple LEDs are mounted uniform (even), the effect of making the copper foil portions less noticeable, and the effect of making the presence of the through holes less noticeable to players. Furthermore, the decorative boards on the game board 5 are positioned closer to the effect display device 1600 than the decorative boards on the door frame 3, and therefore the configuration in which an insulating film is applied to the through-hole lands formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board on the game board 5 in the second embodiment has the effect of making the reflectivity of the front surface (front mounting surface) of the decorative board on which multiple LEDs are mounted uniform, making the copper foil portions less noticeable, and making the presence of the through-holes less noticeable to players.

In addition, in the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the lands of the through holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 according to the second embodiment, on the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, a rear surface (rear mounting surface) resist opening KByra is formed in the area of the rear surface (rear mounting surface) resist layer KByr corresponding to the rear surface (rear mounting surface) land KRDy1, with an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the rear surface (rear mounting surface) land KRDy1. In the past, the outer periphery of the rear surface (rear mounting surface)-side land KRDy1 was covered with a white resist as an insulating coating from the outer periphery of the rear surface (rear mounting surface)-side land KRDy1 toward the center of the rear surface (rear mounting surface)-side land KRDy1, but as shown in FIG. 195( c), in the region of the rear surface (rear mounting surface)-side resist layer KByr corresponding to the rear surface (rear mounting surface)-side land KRDy1, a rear surface (rear mounting surface)-side resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD2 (>opening diameter KByrD1) larger than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the rear surface (rear mounting surface)-side land KRDy1 may be formed. This is because not a single LED is mounted on the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, and the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB cannot be used as a reflective surface to reflect the light emitted by the multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB. Therefore, there is absolutely no need to contribute to making the reflectance of the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB uniform (even) as described above, and the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB cannot efficiently use the light emitted from the light-emitting surfaces of the LEDs for lighting effects.

In addition, in the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the lands of the through holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 of the second embodiment, a white resist layer is formed on almost the entire front surface (front mounting surface) KBx and rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB using a white insulating film formed by applying a white resist liquid as an insulating coating, and the configuration is such that the reflectivity on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB is made uniform even with markings indicating the attributes of electronic components such as the part number of the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is to be placed (for example, by forming the markings in a light color such as yellow on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, or by forming the markings with foil-punched letters, or by forming the markings with paint of a predetermined color on the rear surface (rear mounting surface) of the decorative board KB). In addition, in the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the lands of the through holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 of the second embodiment, in addition to contributing to suppressing the decrease in reflectivity by covering the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1 on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB with a white insulating film, the effect of suppressing the decrease in reflectivity is further enhanced by adopting a configuration in which the reflectivity on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB is made uniform by the above-mentioned notation portion. Furthermore, a configuration that uses markings to equalize the reflectivity of the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB can also make the markings themselves difficult to see, making it difficult for players to see markings that indicate the attributes of electronic components, such as the full-color LED part number and the area indicating the position of the full-color LED, which are unrelated to the game.In addition, by using a configuration in which the lands of the through-holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the gaming board 5 of the second embodiment are covered with an insulating film, the through-holes can also be made difficult to see, further preventing a decrease in interest in the game due to the visibility of information unrelated to the game or through-holes.

As a security measure, the pin 1 mark may be displayed by leaving a foil mark, etc., without displaying the attributes of the electronic component, such as the full-color LED part number or the area indicating the position of the full-color LED. In this case, in addition to these configurations, an insulating coating may be applied to the lands of the through-holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the gaming board 5 of the second embodiment, thereby further enhancing the effect of suppressing a decrease in reflectivity and increasing the effect of preventing information unrelated to the game (pin 1 mark) or through-holes from being visible, thereby reducing interest in the game.

In addition, in the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the lands of the through holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 of the second embodiment, a white resist layer is formed on almost the entire front surface (front mounting surface) KBx and rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB using a white insulating film formed by applying a white resist liquid as an insulating coating.However, on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB on which multiple LEDs are mounted, a white resist layer is formed on almost the entire front surface using a white insulating film formed by applying a white resist liquid as an insulating coating, while on the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB on which no LEDs are mounted, a resist layer of another color (for example, green, black, yellow, red, blue, etc.) different from white may be formed on almost the entire rear surface using a other color insulating film formed by applying a resist liquid of another color different from white as an insulating coating. This is because not a single LED is mounted on the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, and the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB cannot be used as a reflective surface to reflect the light emitted by the multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB. Therefore, there is absolutely no need to contribute to making the reflectance of the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB uniform (even) as described above, and the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB cannot efficiently use the light emitted from the light-emitting surfaces of the LEDs for lighting effects.

In addition, in the configuration in which an insulating film is applied to the through-hole lands formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board included in the game board 5 of the second embodiment, a white resist layer is formed on almost the entire front surface (front mounting surface) KBx and rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB using a white insulating film formed by applying a white resist liquid as an insulating coating. However, a white silkscreen layer may be formed on almost the entire front surface (front mounting surface) KBx or rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB using a white insulating film formed by silkscreen printing with white paint. In this case, a notation indicating the component number and attributes of the electronic component, which allows identification of the electronic component, is silkscreen printed with yellow paint on the white silkscreen layer formed on one or both surfaces. In addition to yellow, the notation may also be silkscreen printed with paint having a color similar to the brightness of white, such as a pastel color (e.g., light green or light blue). When forming the white silkscreen layer described above on one or both surfaces, a resist layer may be formed to cover the substrate KBo or the copper foil surface (the copper foil surface excluding designated areas in addition to the pads to which electronic components are soldered), or no resist layer may be formed. If a resist layer is formed, the white silkscreen layer will be formed from a white insulating film formed by silkscreen printing with white paint as an insulating coating covering the resist layer. The resist layer may be a white resist liquid, or a resist liquid of a color other than white (green, black, yellow, red, blue, etc.).

In addition, the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the through-hole lands formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the gaming board 5 of the second embodiment can be applied to the through-hole lands of the functional display substrate 1400c in the functional display unit 1400 of the gaming board 5. As described above, a black resist layer is formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) 1400cx and rear surface (rear mounting surface) 1400cy of the functional display substrate 1400c using a black insulating film formed by applying a black resist liquid. As described above, using black resist liquid prevents reflection of light emitted by the multiple LEDs 1400ca mounted on the front surface (front mounting surface) 1400cx of the functional display substrate 1400c, thereby helping to prevent mixing with light emitted by LEDs 1400ca arranged nearby. Therefore, the black resist can be applied as an insulating film from the inside to the entire outer periphery of the front surface (front mounting surface) lands on the front surface (front mounting surface) 1400cx of the functional display substrate 1400c (that is, the area of the front surface (front mounting surface) lands on the front surface (front mounting surface) 1400cx of the functional display substrate 1400c excluding the resist liquid intrusion prevention area). Therefore, the area where the copper foil is exposed becomes the resist liquid intrusion prevention area, and the front surface where the copper foil is exposed can be covered with the black resist as an insulating film. Compared to the functional display substrate 1400c according to the first embodiment, which employs a configuration in which an insulating film is applied to the through-hole lands, the area of the face (front mounting surface) side lands is kept extremely small, reducing reflectivity and contributing more to making the reflectivity of the front surface (front mounting surface) 1400cx of the functional display substrate 1400c on which multiple LEDs 1400ca are mounted uniform (even) compared to the functional display substrate 1400c according to the first embodiment, which employs a configuration in which an insulating film is applied to the through-hole lands.

As mentioned above, the through holes are electrically conductive, with copper plating applied to the inner walls of the holes. There are through holes for mounting electronic components and through holes for not mounting electronic components. For both types of through hole lands, an insulating coating was applied to the lands of the through holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board included in the gaming board 5 of the second embodiment. However, for through holes for not mounting electronic components, those located directly below where electronic components are mounted do not need to have an insulating coating applied to the lands of the through holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board included in the gaming board 5 of the second embodiment. In other words, for through holes for not mounting electronic components, the entire copper foil on the lands of through holes located directly below where electronic components are mounted may be left exposed. In this case, the copper foil is entirely exposed on the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, and the rear (rear mounting surface) land KRDy1 on the rear (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB. Because the electronic components are arranged to cover the entire through-hole lands, which are entirely exposed, there is no need to make the copper foil less noticeable, and there is no need to make the presence of the through-hole holes difficult for players to notice. In addition, the presence of the through-hole lands and the presence of the through-hole holes can be visually confirmed from the side where the electronic components are not mounted during an electrical inspection of the decorative board KB, and the tip of a contact probe can be brought into contact with the through-hole lands to perform an electrical inspection of the decorative board KB (to check for operation and abnormal potentials).

[Configuration of Covering Land of Through-Hole with Insulating Coating According to Third Embodiment]
In the third embodiment, as shown in Figures 196(a) and 196(b), a thin through hole is formed in the thickness direction of the base material KBo of the decorative board KB (the direction perpendicular to the surface (perpendicular to the back surface) of the base material KBo of the decorative board KB), and the copper foil is removed from the copper foil surface of the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB and the copper foil surface of the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB to form a front surface (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 and a rear surface (rear mounting surface) land KRDy1, each having an outer diameter KTHD1, and a front surface (front mounting surface) wiring pattern and a rear surface (rear mounting surface) wiring pattern are formed. The through hole is then plated to have conductivity, forming the through hole KTH1. The outer diameter of the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 formed on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB and the outer diameter of the rear (back mounting surface) land KRDy1 formed on the rear (back mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB are the same size, and are the same size as the outer diameter of the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 and the outer diameter of the rear (back mounting surface) land KRDy1 in the configuration in which an insulating coating is covered on the land of the through hole in the first embodiment described above.

The front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 formed on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB is electrically connected to one end of the front (front mounting surface) wiring pattern formed on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, and the other end of the front (front mounting surface) wiring pattern is electrically connected to a pad to which a specific terminal of one full-color LED or multiple full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light is soldered.

In addition, the front (front mounting surface) side wiring patterns formed on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, which are electrically connected to the front (front mounting surface) side lands KRDx1 formed on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, include a first front (front mounting surface) side wiring pattern and a second front (front mounting surface) side wiring pattern. In this case, one end of the first front (front mounting surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, and one end of the second front (front mounting surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, resulting in two front (front mounting surface) side wiring patterns (i.e., the first front (front mounting surface) side wiring pattern and the second front (front mounting surface) side wiring pattern) extending from the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1. In addition, the rear surface (rear mounting surface) side wiring patterns formed on the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, which are electrically connected to the rear surface (rear mounting surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, include a first rear surface (rear mounting surface) side wiring pattern and a second rear surface (rear mounting surface) side wiring pattern. In this case, one end of the first rear surface (rear mounting surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the rear surface (rear mounting surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, and one end of the second rear surface (rear mounting surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the rear surface (rear mounting surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, with two rear surface (rear mounting surface) side wiring patterns (i.e., the first rear surface (rear mounting surface) side wiring pattern and the second rear surface (rear mounting surface) side wiring pattern) extending from the rear surface (rear mounting surface) side land KRDy1.

The rear surface (rear mounting surface) land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB is electrically connected to one end of the rear surface (rear mounting surface) wiring pattern formed on the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, and the other end of the rear surface (rear mounting surface) wiring pattern is electrically connected to any of the following pads: a pad to which a specific terminal of an IC that controls the light emission of a full-color LED is soldered, a pad to which a specific terminal of a resistor is soldered, a pad to which a specific terminal of a connector is soldered, etc.

The front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 formed on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB and the rear (rear mounting surface) land KRDy1 formed on the rear (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB are electrically connected via the through hole KTH1. The front (front mounting surface) wiring pattern formed on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB and the rear (rear mounting surface) wiring pattern formed on the rear (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB are electrically connected via the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 formed on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, the through hole KTH1, and the rear (rear mounting surface) land KRDy1 formed on the rear (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB.

A white resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating to the copper foil surface of the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, forming a front (front mounting surface) side resist layer KBxr. Therefore, the area of the front (front mounting surface) side resist layer KBxr corresponding to the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1 is also coated with white resist liquid as an insulating coating to form the front (front mounting surface) side resist layer KBxr.

The decorative board KB is actually manufactured by arranging multiple boards from a single sheet of copper-clad laminate (base material) and ultimately cutting them out. This single sheet of copper-clad laminate (base material) is fixed to manufacturing equipment and goes through processes such as painting, drying, drilling holes, and other processes before each board is finally cut out. Therefore, when a white resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating to the copper foil surface of the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, the front surface (mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB is fixed to the manufacturing equipment so that it faces vertically upward (because the decorative board KB is actually manufactured by arranging multiple boards from a single sheet of copper-clad laminate (base material) and ultimately cutting them out, the front surface of the single sheet of copper-clad laminate (base material) faces vertically upward). This allows the white resist liquid to seep into the inner periphery of the front surface (mounting surface) of the through hole KTH1 in the decorative board KB, sealing the hole. The white resist liquid that has entered the through hole KTH1 of the decorative board KB will dry due to its own weight, sinking from the inner edge of the front (front mounting surface) side of the through hole KTH1 toward the center of the hole.

In contrast, a white resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating to the copper foil surface of the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, forming a rear surface (rear mounting surface) resist layer KByr. However, in the area of the rear surface (rear mounting surface) resist layer KByr corresponding to the rear surface (rear mounting surface) land KRDy1, a rear surface (rear mounting surface) resist opening KByra is formed, having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the rear surface (rear mounting surface) land KRDy1. The outer diameter of opening diameter KByrD1 is the same size as the outer diameter of opening diameter KByrD1 in the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the through-hole land in the first embodiment described above.

The board ground (GND) (i.e., solid ground) formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB and the board ground (GND) (i.e., solid ground) formed on the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB are electrically connected by through holes (not shown) to form the same ground (GND).

In this way, on the front (mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, the area of the front (mounting surface) resist layer KBxr corresponding to the front (mounting surface) land KRDx1 is covered with white resist as an insulating coating, and white resist liquid penetrates into the inner periphery of the front (mounting surface) side of the through hole KTH1 in the decorative board KB, sealing the hole. This allows the entire front (mounting surface) land KRDx1 and the through hole KTH1 on the front (mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB to be covered with white resist as an insulating coating, preventing the copper foil from being exposed on the front (mounting surface) land KNDx1 and preventing the conductive plating applied to the entire inner periphery of the through hole KTH1 from being exposed on the front (mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB. Additionally, because the through hole KTH1 in the decorative board KB is blocked, light from behind the decorative board KB is prevented from passing through the through hole KTH1 toward the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB.

However, if the multiple LEDs mounted on the decorative board KB are of a type with a small illumination angle (narrow illumination angle type), they may appear as a point light source and be perceived by the player as a collection of point light sources, which may cause discomfort. For this reason, the multiple LEDs mounted on the decorative board KB are of a type with a large illumination angle (wide illumination angle type) so that they are not perceived by the player as a point light source.

However, as the illumination angle of the LED increases (the illumination angle of the LED becomes wider), the range illuminated by the LED becomes wider, and more of the light emitted from the light-emitting surface of the LED is reflected off multiple other components and returned to the decorative board KB. Therefore, if the light that returns to the decorative board KB can be reflected so that it is emitted forward of the decorative board KB, then in addition to the light-emitting surface of the LED, the front surface (front mounting surface) of the decorative board KB on which multiple LEDs are mounted can be used as a reflective surface, and the light emitted from the light-emitting surface of the LED can be used efficiently for lighting effects.

As described above, the decorative board KB has through holes KTH1 that electrically connect the front (front mounting surface) wiring pattern formed on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB with the rear (rear mounting surface) wiring pattern formed on the rear (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, and front (front mounting surface) lands KRDx1 are formed on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB. As described above, a solid white resist is formed as an insulating coating on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, and front (front mounting surface) lands KRDx1 are formed thereon. Because the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 has exposed copper foil, the reflectance of the white resist (white insulating film) applied as an insulating coating differs from the reflectance of the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1, making it difficult to achieve a uniform reflectance from the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB on which multiple LEDs are mounted.

Furthermore, if the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1 and through hole KTH1 holes formed on the front (front mounting surface) of the decorative board KB are visible to the player, the presence of the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1 and through hole KTH1 holes may be an eyesore to the player.

Therefore, in the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the lands of the through holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 of the third embodiment, the area of the front surface (front mounting surface) resist layer KBxr on the front surface (front mounting surface) of the decorative board KBx corresponding to the front surface (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 is also covered with white resist as an insulating coating, and white resist liquid penetrates from the inner periphery of the front surface (front mounting surface) side of the through hole KTH1 of the decorative board KB, sealing this hole, which contributes to making the reflectance of the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB on which multiple LEDs are mounted uniform.

In addition, on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, the area of the front (front mounting surface) resist layer KBxr corresponding to the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 is also covered with a white resist as an insulating coating, and white resist liquid seeps into the inner edge of the front (front mounting surface) side of the through hole KTH1 of the decorative board KB, sealing this hole. This reduces the amount of exposed copper foil on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB that is visible to players (at least, because the copper foil on the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 is not exposed at all), and by making the reflectivity of the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB uniform (even), the copper foil portions are less noticeable, contributing to improving the luminous effect of the decorative board KB.

A translucent inner lens KA is also placed on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB. This inner lens KA is lens-cut (by being formed into a polyhedron or an uneven shape (including one with multiple fine unevenness)) to allow for diffuse refraction of light and to distort and blur objects viewed through the inner lens KA. In this way, by covering almost the entire front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB (at least the area where the LEDs are mounted) with the inner lens KA, it is possible to make it difficult for players to notice the presence of the front surface (front mounting surface) side lands KRDx1 and through holes KTH1 on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB. Furthermore, by adopting a configuration in which an insulating film is applied to the lands of the through-holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board included in the gaming board 5 of the third embodiment, it is possible to make it difficult for players to notice the front surface (front mounting surface) lands KRDx1 and through-holes KTH1 on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB. Furthermore, by adopting a configuration in which the inner lens KA covers almost the entire front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB (at least the area where the LEDs are mounted), it is possible to make it even more difficult for players to notice the front surface (front mounting surface) lands KRDx1 and through-holes KTH1 on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB. Furthermore, if there are differences in reflection efficiency due to the thickness or color shade of the white resist applied as a solid insulating film to the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, the inner lens KA can suppress these differences, enhancing the presentation effect.

In addition, when the inner lens KA is placed on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, it may be placed so that the boundary between the faces of the polyhedron formed on the surface or the boundary between the concave and convex portions overlaps with one or both of the through hole KTH1 and part of the notation (which may be only the part number, or only the area indicating the placement position) (on a straight line perpendicular to the LED mounting surface).In this case, the boundary between the faces of the inner lens KA, which has particularly large distortion, can make the through hole KTH1 and the notation unclear, making their presence difficult for players to notice. Furthermore, the inner lens KA covering the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB may be constructed by stacking multiple lenses with different degrees of lens cut (polyhedrons or lenses with different numbers of irregularities and surface sizes, etc.) (for example, a double structure), which not only makes it possible to make the refraction of light more irregular, but also makes it possible to more strongly distort and blur objects viewed through the inner lens KA, making it difficult for players to notice the presence of the front surface (front mounting surface) side lands KRDx1 and through holes KTH1 on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB.

In addition, white resist liquid has seeped in from the inner periphery of the front (front mounting surface) side of through hole KTH1 in decorative board KB, sealing the hole, but the rear (rear mounting surface) side of through hole KTH1 in decorative board KB is open. In other words, the front (front mounting surface) side of through hole KTH1 in decorative board KB is sealed with white resist liquid, while the rear (rear mounting surface) side is open. This is because if white resist liquid seeps into the inner periphery of the front (front mounting surface) side of through hole KTH1 in the decorative board KB and air remains inside the hole, blocking the rear (rear mounting surface) side of through hole KTH1 in the decorative board KB, there is a risk that liquid such as resist remover will remain inside through hole KTH1. This liquid may corrode the conductive plating inside through hole KTH1, causing poor contact, or during a soldering process (such as reflow) where heat is applied, the liquid inside through hole KTH1 may instantaneously vaporize and expand (a so-called "vapor explosion"), damaging the conductive plating inside through hole KTH1 and causing an electrical disconnection of through hole KTH1.

In addition, although the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1 and through hole KTH1 holes are present, their presence can be hidden by the white resist, which makes the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1 less noticeable against the solid white resist applied to the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, and also makes the through hole KTH1 holes less noticeable. This prevents the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1 and through hole KTH1 holes from being an eyesore to players. It also prevents the presentation effect from being reduced by players being able to see the patterns or designs of the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1 and through hole KTH1 holes.

In addition, since the decorative boards provided on the game board 5 may be arranged in a front-to-back direction, even if multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface (front mounting surface) of another decorative board KB arranged behind one decorative board KB emit light, the light cannot pass through the through hole KTH1 of the one decorative board KB because the hole in the through hole KTH1 is blocked with white resist.This prevents the color of light emitted by the multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface (front mounting surface) of the other decorative board KB from mixing with the color of light emitted by the multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface (front mounting surface) of the one decorative board KB, as the light emitted by the multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface (front mounting surface) of the other decorative board KB passes through the through hole KTH1 of the one decorative board KB. In addition, when no other decorative board KB is placed behind one decorative board KB, if the through-hole KTH1 of the one decorative board KB is not blocked with white resist, the through-hole KTH1 will look like a black dot, and the color of light emitted by the multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface (front mounting surface) of the one decorative board KB will be mixed with the black dot caused by the through-hole KTH1 of the one decorative board KB, i.e., black. When this is done, the area corresponding to the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 is also covered with white resist as an insulating coating, so the through hole KTH1 blends in with the white resist that is applied solidly to the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, preventing the through hole KTH1 formed on the front (front mounting surface) of one decorative board KB from mixing with the color of the light emitted by the multiple LEDs mounted on the front (front mounting surface) of one decorative board KB.

In addition, since the liquid crystal display screen of the performance display device 1600 provided on the gaming board 5 is the object of greatest visual recognition by the player, the decorative boards around the performance display device 1600 (liquid crystal display screen), the decorative boards arranged to cover the top of the performance display device 1600 (liquid crystal display screen), and the decorative boards arranged to be movable to a position to cover the top of the performance display device 1600 (liquid crystal display screen) are configured to cover the lands of the through holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the gaming board 5 in the third embodiment with an insulating coating.This eliminates any areas on the front surface (front mounting surface) of the decorative board where the insulating coating does not cover the lands of the through holes, and by blocking the holes on the front surface (front mounting surface) of the decorative board, it has the effect of making the reflectivity of the front surface (front mounting surface) of the decorative board on which multiple LEDs are mounted uniform (even), making the copper foil areas less noticeable, and making the presence of the through holes less obvious to players. Also, in other locations, for example, when the decorative board is placed in a place where the player can see it through an inner lens KA that has been lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron or uneven shape) to refract light in a diffuse manner, there are effects such as making the reflectivity of the front surface (front mounting surface) of the decorative board on which multiple LEDs are mounted uniform (even), making the copper foil portion less noticeable, and making the presence of the through-hole less obvious to the player. Furthermore, the decorative boards on the game board 5 are positioned closer to the effect display device 1600 than the decorative boards on the door frame 3. Therefore, in the configuration in which the through-hole lands formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board on the game board 5 in the third embodiment are covered with an insulating film, it can be said that this has the effect of making the reflectivity of the front surface (front mounting surface) of the decorative board on which multiple LEDs are mounted uniform, making the copper foil portions less noticeable, and making the presence of the through-holes less noticeable to players.

In addition, in the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the lands of the through holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 according to the third embodiment, on the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, a rear surface (rear mounting surface) resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the rear surface (rear mounting surface) land KRDy1 is formed in the area of the rear surface (rear mounting surface) resist layer KByr corresponding to the rear surface (rear mounting surface) land KRDy1, thereby In the past, the outer periphery of the rear surface (rear mounting surface)-side land KRDy1 was covered with a white resist as an insulating coating from the outer periphery of the rear surface (rear mounting surface)-side land KRDy1 toward the center of the rear surface (rear mounting surface)-side land KRDy1, but as shown in FIG. 196( c), in the region of the rear surface (rear mounting surface)-side resist layer KByr corresponding to the rear surface (rear mounting surface)-side land KRDy1, a rear surface (rear mounting surface)-side resist opening KByra having an opening diameter KByrD2 (>opening diameter KByrD1) larger than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the rear surface (rear mounting surface)-side land KRDy1 may be formed. This is because not a single LED is mounted on the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, and the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB cannot be used as a reflective surface to reflect the light emitted by the multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB. Therefore, there is absolutely no need to contribute to making the reflectance of the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB uniform (even) as described above, and the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB cannot efficiently use the light emitted from the light-emitting surfaces of the LEDs for lighting effects.

In addition, in the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the lands of the through holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 of the third embodiment, a white resist layer is formed on almost the entire front surface (front mounting surface) KBx and rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB using a white insulating film formed by applying a white resist liquid as an insulating coating, and the configuration is such that the reflectivity on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB is made uniform even with markings indicating the attributes of electronic components such as the part number of the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is to be placed (for example, by forming the markings in a light color such as yellow on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, or by forming the markings with foil-punched letters, or by forming the markings with paint of a predetermined color on the rear surface (rear mounting surface) of the decorative board KB). In addition, in the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the lands of the through holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 of the third embodiment, in addition to contributing to suppressing the decrease in reflectivity by covering the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1 on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB with a white insulating film, the effect of suppressing the decrease in reflectivity is further enhanced by adopting a configuration in which the above-mentioned notation portion aims to uniform the reflectivity on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB. Furthermore, a configuration that uses markings to equalize the reflectivity of the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB can make the markings themselves difficult to see, making it difficult for players to see markings that indicate the attributes of electronic components, such as the part number of a full-color LED or the area indicating the position of the full-color LED, which are unrelated to the game.In addition, by using a configuration in which the lands of the through-holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the gaming board 5 of the third embodiment are covered with an insulating film, the through-holes can also be made difficult to see, further preventing a decrease in interest in the game due to the visibility of information unrelated to the game or through-holes.

As a security measure, the pin 1 mark may be displayed by leaving a foil mark, without displaying the parts indicating the attributes of the electronic components, such as the part number of the full-color LED or the area indicating the position of the full-color LED. In this case, in addition to these configurations, an insulating coating may be applied to the lands of the through-holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the gaming board 5 of the third embodiment, thereby further enhancing the effect of suppressing a decrease in reflectivity and increasing the effect of preventing information unrelated to the game (pin 1 mark) or through-holes from being visible, thereby reducing interest in the game.

In addition, in the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the lands of the through holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 of the third embodiment, a white resist layer is formed on almost the entire front surface (front mounting surface) KBx and rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB using a white insulating film formed by applying a white resist liquid as an insulating coating.However, on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB on which multiple LEDs are mounted, a white resist layer is formed on almost the entire front surface using a white insulating film formed by applying a white resist liquid as an insulating coating, while on the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB on which no LEDs are mounted, a resist layer of another color (for example, green, black, yellow, red, blue, etc.) different from white may be formed on almost the entire rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB on which no LEDs are mounted, using a resist layer of another color (for example, green, black, yellow, red, blue, etc.) formed by applying a resist liquid of another color different from white as an insulating coating. This is because not a single LED is mounted on the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, and the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB cannot be used as a reflective surface to reflect the light emitted by the multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB. Therefore, there is absolutely no need to contribute to making the reflectance of the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB uniform (even) as described above, and the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB cannot efficiently use the light emitted from the light-emitting surfaces of the LEDs for lighting effects.

In addition, in the configuration in which an insulating film is applied to the through-hole lands formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board included in the game board 5 of the third embodiment, a white resist layer is formed on almost the entire front surface (front mounting surface) KBx and rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB using a white insulating film formed by applying a white resist liquid as an insulating coating. However, a white silkscreen layer may be formed on almost the entire front surface (front mounting surface) KBx or rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB using a white insulating film formed by silkscreen printing with white paint. In this case, a notation indicating the component number and attributes of the electronic component, which allows identification of the electronic component, is silkscreen printed with yellow paint on the white silkscreen layer formed on one or both surfaces. In addition to yellow, the notation may also be silkscreen printed with paint having a color similar to the brightness of white, such as a pastel color (e.g., light green or light blue). When forming the white silkscreen layer described above on one or both surfaces, a resist layer may be formed to cover the substrate KBo or the copper foil surface (the copper foil surface excluding designated areas in addition to the pads to which electronic components are soldered), or no resist layer may be formed. If a resist layer is formed, the white silkscreen layer will be formed from a white insulating film formed by silkscreen printing with white paint as an insulating coating covering the resist layer. The resist layer may be a white resist liquid, or a resist liquid of a color other than white (green, black, yellow, red, blue, etc.).

In addition, the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the through-hole lands formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the gaming board 5 of the third embodiment can be applied to the through-hole lands of the functional display substrate 1400c in the functional display unit 1400 of the gaming board 5. As described above, a black resist layer is formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) 1400cx and rear surface (rear mounting surface) 1400cy of the functional display substrate 1400c using a black insulating film formed by applying a black resist liquid. As described above, using black resist liquid prevents reflection of light emitted by the multiple LEDs 1400ca mounted on the front surface (front mounting surface) 1400cx of the functional display substrate 1400c, thereby helping to prevent the light from mixing with light emitted by LEDs 1400ca arranged nearby. For this reason, on the front surface (front mounting surface) 1400cx of the functional display substrate 1400c, the areas of the front surface (front mounting surface) resist layer that correspond to the front surface (front mounting surface) lands are also covered with black resist as an insulating coating, and black resist liquid has seeped in from the inner periphery of the front surface (front mounting surface) of the through hole 1400cc of the functional display substrate 1400c, sealing this hole. This reduces reflectivity and contributes to making the reflectivity of the front surface (front mounting surface) 1400cx of the functional display substrate 1400c, on which multiple LEDs 1400ca are mounted, uniform.

As mentioned above, the through holes are electrically conductive, with copper plating applied to the inner walls of the holes. There are through holes for mounting electronic components and through holes for not mounting electronic components. For both types of through hole lands, an insulating coating was applied to the lands of the through holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board included in the gaming board 5 of the third embodiment. However, for through holes for not mounting electronic components, those located directly below where electronic components are mounted do not need to have an insulating coating applied to the lands of the through holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board included in the gaming board 5 of the third embodiment. In other words, for through holes for not mounting electronic components, the entire copper foil on the lands of through holes located directly below where electronic components are mounted may be left exposed. In this case, the copper foil is entirely exposed on the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, and the rear (rear mounting surface) land KRDy1 on the rear (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB. Because the electronic components are arranged to cover the entire through-hole lands, which are entirely exposed, there is no need to make the copper foil less noticeable, and there is no need to make the presence of the through-hole holes difficult for players to notice. In addition, the presence of the through-hole lands and the presence of the through-hole holes can be visually confirmed from the side where the electronic components are not mounted during an electrical inspection of the decorative board KB, and the tip of a contact probe can be brought into contact with the through-hole lands to perform an electrical inspection of the decorative board KB (to check for operation and abnormal potentials).

[Configuration in which an insulating film is covered on a land of a through hole according to the fourth embodiment]
In the fourth embodiment, as shown in Figures 197(a) and 197(b), a thin through hole is formed in the thickness direction of the base material KBo of the decorative board KB (the direction perpendicular to the surface (back surface) of the base material KBo of the decorative board KB), and the copper foil is removed from the copper foil surface of the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB and the copper foil surface of the rear surface (back mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB to form a front surface (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 and a rear surface (back mounting surface) land KRDy1, each having an outer diameter KTHD1, and a front surface (front mounting surface) wiring pattern and a rear surface (back mounting surface) wiring pattern are formed. The through hole is then plated to have electrical conductivity, forming the through hole KTH1. The outer diameter of the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 formed on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB and the outer diameter of the rear (back mounting surface) land KRDy1 formed on the rear (back mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB are the same size, and are the same size as the outer diameter of the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 and the outer diameter of the rear (back mounting surface) land KRDy1 in the configuration in which an insulating coating is covered on the land of the through hole in the first embodiment described above.

The front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 formed on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB is electrically connected to one end of the front (front mounting surface) wiring pattern formed on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, and the other end of the front (front mounting surface) wiring pattern is electrically connected to a pad to which a specific terminal of one full-color LED or multiple full-color LEDs capable of emitting multicolor light is soldered.

In addition, the front (front mounting surface) side wiring patterns formed on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, which are electrically connected to the front (front mounting surface) side lands KRDx1 formed on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, include a first front (front mounting surface) side wiring pattern and a second front (front mounting surface) side wiring pattern. In this case, one end of the first front (front mounting surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, and one end of the second front (front mounting surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1 formed on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, resulting in two front (front mounting surface) side wiring patterns (i.e., the first front (front mounting surface) side wiring pattern and the second front (front mounting surface) side wiring pattern) extending from the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1. In addition, the rear surface (rear mounting surface) side wiring patterns formed on the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, which are electrically connected to the rear surface (rear mounting surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, include a first rear surface (rear mounting surface) side wiring pattern and a second rear surface (rear mounting surface) side wiring pattern. In this case, one end of the first rear surface (rear mounting surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the rear surface (rear mounting surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, and one end of the second rear surface (rear mounting surface) side wiring pattern is electrically connected to the rear surface (rear mounting surface) side land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, with two rear surface (rear mounting surface) side wiring patterns (i.e., the first rear surface (rear mounting surface) side wiring pattern and the second rear surface (rear mounting surface) side wiring pattern) extending from the rear surface (rear mounting surface) side land KRDy1.

The rear surface (rear mounting surface) land KRDy1 formed on the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB is electrically connected to one end of the rear surface (rear mounting surface) wiring pattern formed on the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, and the other end of the rear surface (rear mounting surface) wiring pattern is electrically connected to any of the following pads: a pad to which a specific terminal of an IC that controls the light emission of a full-color LED is soldered, a pad to which a specific terminal of a resistor is soldered, a pad to which a specific terminal of a connector is soldered, etc.

The front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 formed on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB and the rear (rear mounting surface) land KRDy1 formed on the rear (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB are electrically connected via the through hole KTH1. The front (front mounting surface) wiring pattern formed on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB and the rear (rear mounting surface) wiring pattern formed on the rear (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB are electrically connected via the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 formed on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, the through hole KTH1, and the rear (rear mounting surface) land KRDy1 formed on the rear (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB.

A white resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating to the copper foil surface of the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, forming a front (front mounting surface) resist layer KBxr. In the area of the front (front mounting surface) resist layer KBxr corresponding to the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1, a front (front mounting surface) resist opening KBxra is formed. The opening diameter KBxrD1 is smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1. The outer diameter of the opening diameter KBxrD1 is the same as the outer diameter of the opening diameter KBxrD1 in the configuration in which the insulating coating is applied to the through-hole land in the first embodiment described above.

In contrast, a white resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating to the copper foil surface of the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, forming a rear surface (rear mounting surface) side resist layer KByr. Therefore, the area of the rear surface (rear mounting surface) side resist layer KByr corresponding to the rear surface (rear mounting surface) side land KRDy1 is also coated with white resist liquid as an insulating coating to form the rear surface (rear mounting surface) side resist layer KByr.

The decorative board KB is actually manufactured by arranging multiple boards from a single sheet of copper-clad laminate (base material) and ultimately cutting them out. This single sheet of copper-clad laminate (base material) is fixed to a manufacturing device and goes through processes such as painting, drying, drilling holes, and other processes before finally cutting out each board. Therefore, when a white resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating to the copper foil surface of the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB is fixed to the manufacturing device so that it faces vertically upward (since the decorative board KB is actually manufactured by arranging multiple boards from a single sheet of copper-clad laminate (base material) and ultimately cutting them out, the white resist liquid seeps into the inner periphery of the rear surface (rear mounting surface) of the through hole KTH1 in the decorative board KB, sealing the hole. The white resist liquid that has entered the through hole KTH1 of the decorative board KB will dry due to its own weight, sinking from the inner edge of the rear surface (back mounting surface) of the through hole KTH1 toward the center of the hole.

The board ground (GND) (i.e., solid ground) formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB and the board ground (GND) (i.e., solid ground) formed on the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB are electrically connected by through holes (not shown) to form the same ground (GND).

In this way, on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, in the area of the front (front mounting surface) side resist layer KBxr corresponding to the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1, a front (front mounting surface) side resist opening KBxra is formed having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1, so that the outer peripheral portion of the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1 is covered with white resist as an insulating coating from the outer periphery of the outer diameter KTHD1 of the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1 toward the center of the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1. Furthermore, on the rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, the area of the rear surface (rear mounting surface) resist layer KByr corresponding to the rear surface (rear mounting surface) land KRDy1 is also covered with a white resist as an insulating coating, and white resist liquid penetrates from the rear surface (rear mounting surface) inner periphery of the through hole KTH1 of the decorative board KB, blocking this hole. This allows the entire outer periphery of the front surface (rear mounting surface) land KRDx1 on the front surface (rear mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB to be covered with white resist as an insulating coating, thereby minimizing the area of the front surface (rear mounting surface) land KRDx1 where the copper foil is exposed and preventing light from behind the decorative board KB from passing through the through hole KTH1 toward the front surface (rear mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB. Furthermore, by covering the outer periphery of the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 with white resist as an insulating coating from the outer periphery of the outer diameter KTHD1 of the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 toward the center of the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1, the proportion of the area of the rear (rear mounting surface) land KRDy1 covered with white resist (insulating coating) can be increased compared to when the inner periphery of the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 is covered with white resist (insulating coating) from the center of the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 toward the outer periphery of the outer diameter KTHD1, thereby achieving uniformity on the rear (rear mounting surface) of the decorative board KB.

In addition, because the copper foil on both the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 and the rear (rear mounting surface) land KRDy1 is exposed, electrical testing (checking for operation or abnormal potential) of the decorative board KB can be performed by contacting the tip of a contact probe with the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 from the front (front mounting surface) of the decorative board KB, or by contacting the tip of a contact probe with the rear (rear mounting surface) land KRDy1 from the rear (rear mounting surface) of the decorative board KB. In other words, the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 and the rear (rear mounting surface) land KRDy1 can be used as check terminals when performing electrical testing of the decorative board KB. The contact probe can be a dedicated probe or a test lead used to check continuity with a tester.

In addition, since the tip of the contact probe can be brought into contact with the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 from the front (front mounting surface) side of the decorative board KB, for example, even when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an amusement hall, the front (front mounting surface) of the decorative board KB faces forward of the pachinko machine 1, so if the tip of the contact probe can be brought into contact with the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 from the front (front mounting surface) side of the decorative board KB, it is possible to perform an electrical test (check for operation and abnormal potential) on the decorative board KB as a defect inspection for the decorative board KB without having to remove the decorative board KB.

However, if the multiple LEDs mounted on the decorative board KB are of a type with a small illumination angle (narrow illumination angle type), they may appear as a point light source and be perceived by the player as a collection of point light sources, which may cause discomfort. For this reason, the multiple LEDs mounted on the decorative board KB are of a type with a large illumination angle (wide illumination angle type) so that they are not perceived by the player as a point light source.

However, as the illumination angle of the LED increases (the illumination angle of the LED becomes wider), the range illuminated by the LED becomes wider, and more of the light emitted from the light-emitting surface of the LED is reflected off multiple other components and returned to the decorative board KB. Therefore, if the light that returns to the decorative board KB can be reflected so that it is emitted forward of the decorative board KB, then in addition to the light-emitting surface of the LED, the front surface (front mounting surface) of the decorative board KB on which multiple LEDs are mounted can be used as a reflective surface, and the light emitted from the light-emitting surface of the LED can be used efficiently for lighting effects.

As described above, the decorative board KB has through holes KTH1 that electrically connect the front (front mounting surface) wiring pattern formed on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB with the rear (rear mounting surface) wiring pattern formed on the rear (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, and front (front mounting surface) lands KRDx1 are formed on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB. As described above, a solid white resist is formed as an insulating coating on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, and front (front mounting surface) lands KRDx1 are formed thereon. Because the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 has exposed copper foil, the reflectance of the white resist (white insulating film) applied as an insulating coating differs from the reflectance of the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1, making it difficult to achieve a uniform reflectance from the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB on which multiple LEDs are mounted.

Furthermore, if the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1 and through hole KTH1 holes formed on the front (front mounting surface) of the decorative board KB are visible to the player, the presence of the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1 and through hole KTH1 holes may be an eyesore to the player.

Therefore, in the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the lands of the through holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the gaming board 5 in the fourth embodiment, the entire outer periphery of the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1 on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB is covered with white resist as an insulating coating, and white resist liquid penetrates from the inner peripheral edge of the rear surface (rear mounting surface) side of the through hole KTH1 of the decorative board KB, sealing this hole, which contributes to making the reflectance of the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB on which multiple LEDs are mounted uniform.

In addition, the entire outer periphery of the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB is covered with white resist as an insulating coating, and white resist liquid seeps in from the inner edge of the rear (rear mounting surface) side of the through hole KTH1 of the decorative board KB, sealing this hole. This reduces the proportion of exposed copper foil on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB that is visible to players, and by making the reflectivity of the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB uniform (even), the copper foil portions are made less noticeable, contributing to improving the luminous effect of the decorative board KB.

A translucent inner lens KA is also placed on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB. This inner lens KA is lens-cut (by being formed into a polyhedron or an uneven shape (including one with multiple fine unevenness)) to allow for diffuse refraction of light and to distort and blur objects viewed through the inner lens KA. In this way, by covering almost the entire front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB (at least the area where the LEDs are mounted) with the inner lens KA, it is possible to make it difficult for players to notice the presence of the front surface (front mounting surface) side lands KRDx1 and through holes KTH1 on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB. Furthermore, by adopting a configuration in which an insulating film is applied to the lands of the through-holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board included in the gaming board 5 of the fourth embodiment, it is possible to make it difficult for players to notice the front surface (front mounting surface) lands KRDx1 and through-holes KTH1 on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB. Furthermore, by adopting a configuration in which the inner lens KA covers almost the entire front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB (at least the area where the LEDs are mounted), it is possible to make it even more difficult for players to notice the front surface (front mounting surface) lands KRDx1 and through-holes KTH1 on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB. Furthermore, if there are differences in reflection efficiency due to the thickness or color shade of the white resist applied as a solid insulating film to the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, the inner lens KA can suppress these differences, enhancing the presentation effect.

In addition, when the inner lens KA is placed on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, it may be placed so that the boundary between the faces of the polyhedron formed on the surface or the boundary between the concave and convex portions overlaps with one or both of the through hole KTH1 and part of the notation (which may be only the part number, or only the area indicating the placement position) (on a straight line perpendicular to the LED mounting surface).In this case, the boundary between the faces of the inner lens KA, which has particularly large distortion, can make the through hole KTH1 and the notation unclear, making their presence difficult for players to notice. Furthermore, the inner lens KA covering the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB may be constructed by stacking multiple lenses with different degrees of lens cut (polyhedrons or lenses with different numbers of irregularities and surface sizes, etc.) (for example, a double structure), which not only makes it possible to make the refraction of light more irregular, but also makes it possible to more strongly distort and blur objects viewed through the inner lens KA, making it difficult for players to notice the presence of the front surface (front mounting surface) side lands KRDx1 and through holes KTH1 on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB.

In addition, white resist liquid has seeped into the inner periphery of the rear surface (rear mounting surface) of through hole KTH1 in decorative board KB, sealing the hole, but the front surface (front mounting surface) of through hole KTH1 in decorative board KB remains open. In other words, the rear surface (rear mounting surface) of through hole KTH1 in decorative board KB is sealed with white resist liquid, while the front surface (front mounting surface) is open. This is because if white resist liquid seeps into the inner periphery of the rear (back mounting surface) side of through hole KTH1 in decorative board KB and air remains inside the hole, blocking the front (front mounting surface) side of through hole KTH1 in decorative board KB, there is a risk that liquid such as resist remover will remain inside through hole KTH1. This liquid may corrode the conductive plating inside through hole KTH1, causing poor contact, or during a soldering process (such as reflow) where heat is applied, the liquid inside through hole KTH1 may momentarily vaporize and expand (a so-called "vapor explosion"), damaging the conductive plating inside through hole KTH1 and causing an electrical disconnection of through hole KTH1.

In addition, although the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1 and through hole KTH1 holes exist, the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1 can be hidden by the white resist on the front (front mounting surface) of the decorative board KB, and the through hole KTH1 hole can be hidden by the white resist on the rear (rear mounting surface) of the decorative board KB. This makes the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1 less noticeable against the solid white resist applied to the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, and also makes the through hole KTH1 hole less noticeable. This prevents the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1 and through hole KTH1 holes from being an eyesore to players. It also prevents the presentation effect from being reduced by players being able to see the patterns or designs of the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1 and through hole KTH1 holes.

In addition, since the decorative boards provided on the game board 5 may be arranged in a front-to-back direction, even if multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface (front mounting surface) of another decorative board KB arranged behind one decorative board KB emit light, the light cannot pass through the through hole KTH1 of the one decorative board KB because the hole in the through hole KTH1 is blocked with white resist.This prevents the color of light emitted by the multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface (front mounting surface) of the other decorative board KB from mixing with the color of light emitted by the multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface (front mounting surface) of the one decorative board KB, as the light emitted by the multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface (front mounting surface) of the other decorative board KB passes through the through hole KTH1 of the one decorative board KB. In addition, when another decorative board KB is not placed behind one decorative board KB, if the through-hole KTH1 of one decorative board KB is not blocked with white resist, the through-hole KTH1 looks like a black dot, and therefore the color of light emitted by the multiple LEDs mounted on the front surface (front mounting surface) of one decorative board KB is mixed with the black dot caused by the through-hole KTH1 of one decorative board KB, i.e., black. However, if the through-hole KTH1 of one decorative board KB is blocked with white resist, the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB will not be visible. Since the entire outer periphery of land KRDx1 is covered with white resist as an insulating coating, the white resist that blocks the through hole KTH1 is closely positioned to the white resist that covers the entire outer periphery of land KRDx1 on the front (front mounting surface). This allows the through hole KTH1 to blend in with the white resist that is applied solidly to the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, preventing the through hole KTH1 formed on the front (front mounting surface) of one decorative board KB from mixing with the color of the light emitted by the multiple LEDs mounted on the front (front mounting surface) of one decorative board KB.

In addition, since the liquid crystal display screen of the effect display device 1600 provided on the gaming board 5 is the object of greatest visual recognition by the player, the decorative boards around the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display screen), the decorative boards arranged to cover the upper side of the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display screen), and the decorative boards arranged to be movable to a position to cover the upper side of the effect display device 1600 (liquid crystal display screen) are configured to cover the lands of the through holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the gaming board 5 in the fourth embodiment with an insulating coating, minimizing the areas of the through hole lands that are not covered by the insulating coating, and by blocking the through hole holes on the rear surface (rear mounting surface) of the decorative board, this has the effect of making the reflectivity of the front surface (front mounting surface) of the decorative board on which multiple LEDs are mounted uniform (even), making the copper foil areas less noticeable, and making the presence of the through hole holes less obvious to players. Also, in other locations, for example, when the decorative board is placed in a place where the player can see it through an inner lens KA that has been lens-cut (formed into a polyhedron or uneven shape) to refract light in a diffuse manner, there are effects such as making the reflectivity of the front surface (front mounting surface) of the decorative board on which multiple LEDs are mounted uniform (even), making the copper foil portion less noticeable, and making the presence of the through-hole less obvious to the player. Furthermore, the decorative boards on the game board 5 are positioned closer to the effect display device 1600 than the decorative boards on the door frame 3, and therefore the configuration in which an insulating film is applied to the through-hole lands formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board on the game board 5 in accordance with the fourth embodiment has the effect of making the reflectivity of the front surface (front mounting surface) of the decorative board on which multiple LEDs are mounted uniform, making the copper foil portions less noticeable, and making the presence of the through-holes less noticeable to players.

In addition, in the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the lands of the through holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 according to the fourth embodiment, in the area of the front surface (front mounting surface) resist layer KBxr on the front surface (front mounting surface) of the decorative board KBx corresponding to the front surface (front mounting surface) land KRDx1, a front surface (front mounting surface) resist opening KBxra is formed having an opening diameter KBxrD1 smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the front surface (front mounting surface) land KRDx1. The outer periphery of the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1 toward the center of KRDx1 is covered with white resist as an insulating coating, but as shown in FIG. 197(b), in the region of the front (front mounting surface) side resist layer KBxr corresponding to the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1, a front (front mounting surface) side resist opening KBxra may be formed having an opening diameter KBxrD2 that is smaller than the outer diameter KTHD1 of the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1, is even smaller than the outer diameter of the opening diameter KByrD1, and is larger than the inner diameter of the through hole KTH1. The inner diameter of this opening diameter KBxrD2 takes into account the resist liquid intrusion prevention area that extends concentrically outward from the inner periphery of the through hole KTH1 on the front (front mounting surface) side, and is sized to be the resist liquid intrusion prevention distance dimension (a distance of at least 0.5 mm is required to prevent white resist liquid from infiltrating the through hole KTH1 hole in the decorative board KB; in the configuration in which the through hole land is covered with an insulating film in the fourth embodiment, 0.5 mm is used) from the inner periphery of the through hole KTH1 on the front (front mounting surface) side. Therefore, the inner diameter of opening diameter KBxrD2 is the inner diameter of through hole KTH1 plus twice the resist liquid intrusion prevention distance dimension (0.5 mm), and is 1.0 mm larger than the inner diameter of through hole KTH1.

This allows the white resist to be covered as an insulating coating from almost the inside to the entire outer periphery of the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB (i.e., the entire area of the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB excluding the resist liquid intrusion prevention area).As a result, the area where the copper foil is exposed becomes the resist liquid intrusion prevention area, and the area of the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 where the copper foil is exposed can be kept extremely small.

In addition, because a resist liquid intrusion prevention area is provided for the through hole KTH1 of the decorative board KB, when white resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating to the copper foil surface of the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, even if the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB is fixed in the manufacturing equipment so that it faces vertically upward (because the decorative board KB is actually manufactured by arranging and ultimately cutting multiple boards from a single sheet of fixed-length copper-clad laminate (base material), the front surface of the single sheet of fixed-length copper-clad laminate (base material) faces vertically upward), the white resist liquid will infiltrate the through hole KTH1 of the decorative board KB and dry without blocking the hole.

In addition, a white resist is applied as an insulating coating from almost the inside to the entire outer periphery of the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB (i.e., the area of the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB excluding the area where the resist liquid is prevented from entering), and the exposed copper foil area is reduced by becoming the area where the resist liquid is prevented from entering. However, the tip of the contact probe can be brought into contact with the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 from the front (front mounting surface) side of the decorative board KB to perform an electrical test of the decorative board KB (to check operation or abnormal potential). Since this allows electrical testing of the decorative board KB, the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1 can be used as a check terminal when conducting an electrical test on the decorative board KB. For example, even when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an amusement hall, the front (front mounting surface) of the decorative board KB faces forward of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, if the tip of a contact probe can be brought into contact with the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1 from the front (front mounting surface) side of the decorative board KB, electrical testing of the decorative board KB (checking operation and abnormal potential) can be performed to test for defects in the decorative board KB without having to remove the decorative board KB. The contact probe may be a dedicated probe or a test lead used to check continuity with a so-called "tester."

In addition, in the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the lands of the through holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 of the fourth embodiment, a white resist layer is formed on almost the entire front surface (front mounting surface) KBx and rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB using a white insulating film formed by applying a white resist liquid as an insulating coating, and the configuration is such that the reflectivity on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB is made uniform even with markings indicating the attributes of electronic components such as the part number of the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is to be placed (for example, by forming the markings in a light color such as yellow on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, or by forming the markings with foil-punched letters, or by forming the markings with paint of a predetermined color on the rear surface (rear mounting surface) of the decorative board KB). In addition, in the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the lands of the through holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 of the fourth embodiment, in addition to contributing to suppressing the decrease in reflectivity by covering the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1 on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB with a white insulating film, the effect of suppressing the decrease in reflectivity is further enhanced by adopting a configuration in which the above-mentioned notation portion aims to uniform the reflectivity on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB. Furthermore, a configuration that uses markings to equalize the reflectivity of the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB can make the markings themselves difficult to see, making it difficult for players to see markings that indicate the attributes of electronic components, such as the part number of a full-color LED or the area indicating the position of the full-color LED, which are unrelated to the game.In addition, by using a configuration in which the lands of the through-holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the gaming board 5 of the fourth embodiment are covered with an insulating film, the through-holes can also be made difficult to see, further preventing a decrease in interest in the game due to the visibility of information unrelated to the game or through-holes.

As a security measure, the pin 1 mark may be displayed by leaving a foil mark, without displaying the parts indicating the attributes of the electronic components, such as the part number of the full-color LED or the area indicating the position of the full-color LED. In this case, in addition to these configurations, an insulating coating may be applied to the lands of the through-holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the gaming board 5 of the fourth embodiment, thereby further enhancing the effect of suppressing a decrease in reflectivity and increasing the effect of preventing information unrelated to the game (pin 1 mark) or through-holes from being visible, thereby reducing interest in the game.

In addition, in the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the lands of the through holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5 of the fourth embodiment, a white resist layer is formed on almost the entire front surface (front mounting surface) KBx and rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB using a white insulating film formed by applying a white resist liquid as an insulating coating, but the color of the resist covering the entire outer periphery of the land of the decorative board KB and the color of the resist sealing the hole of the through hole KTH1 of the decorative board KB may be different colors. For example, a white resist liquid is applied as an insulating coating to almost the entire front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, forming a white resist layer from a white insulating film, so that the entire outer periphery of the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 on the front surface (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB is covered with a white resist as an insulating coating, while a black resist layer is applied as an insulating coating to almost the entire back surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB, forming a black insulating film, so that the through hole KTH1 of the decorative board KB is blocked with black resist.

In addition, in the configuration in which an insulating film is applied to the through-hole lands formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board included in the game board 5 of the fourth embodiment, a white resist layer is formed on almost the entire front surface (front mounting surface) KBx and rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB using a white insulating film formed by applying a white resist liquid as an insulating coating. However, a white silkscreen layer may be formed on almost the entire front surface (front mounting surface) KBx or rear surface (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB using a white insulating film formed by silkscreen printing with white paint. In this case, a notation indicating the component number and attributes of the electronic component, which allows identification of the electronic component, is silkscreen printed with yellow paint on the white silkscreen layer formed on one or both surfaces. In addition to yellow, the notation may also be silkscreen printed with paint having a color similar to the brightness of white, such as a pastel color (e.g., light green or light blue). When forming the white silkscreen layer described above on one or both surfaces, a resist layer may be formed to cover the substrate KBo or the copper foil surface (the copper foil surface excluding designated areas in addition to the pads to which electronic components are soldered), or no resist layer may be formed. If a resist layer is formed, the white silkscreen layer will be formed from a white insulating film formed by silkscreen printing with white paint as an insulating coating covering the resist layer. The resist layer may be a white resist liquid, or a resist liquid of a color other than white (green, black, yellow, red, blue, etc.).

In addition, the configuration in which an insulating coating is applied to the through-hole lands formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative substrate provided on the gaming board 5 of the fourth embodiment can be applied to the through-hole lands of the functional display substrate 1400c in the functional display unit 1400 of the gaming board 5. As described above, a black resist layer is formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) 1400cx and rear surface (rear mounting surface) 1400cy of the functional display substrate 1400c using a black insulating film formed by applying a black resist liquid. As described above, using black resist liquid prevents reflection of light emitted by the multiple LEDs 1400ca mounted on the front surface (front mounting surface) 1400cx of the functional display substrate 1400c, thereby helping to prevent the light from mixing with light emitted by LEDs 1400ca arranged nearby. As a result, the entire outer periphery of the front (front mounting surface) side lands on the front (front mounting surface) 1400cx of the functional display substrate 1400c is covered with black resist as an insulating coating, and black resist liquid seeps into the inner periphery of the rear (rear mounting surface) side of the through-hole 1400cc of the functional display substrate 1400c, sealing this hole. This reduces reflectivity and contributes to making the reflectivity of the front (front mounting surface) 1400cx of the functional display substrate 1400c on which multiple LEDs 1400ca are mounted uniform.

As mentioned above, the through holes are electrically conductive, with copper plating applied to the inner walls of the holes. There are through holes for mounting electronic components and through holes for not mounting electronic components. For both types of through hole lands, an insulating coating was applied to the lands of the through holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board included in the gaming board 5 of the fourth embodiment. However, for through holes for not mounting electronic components, those located directly below where electronic components are mounted do not need to have an insulating coating applied to the lands of the through holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board included in the gaming board 5 of the fourth embodiment. In other words, for through holes for not mounting electronic components, the entire copper foil on the lands of through holes located directly below where electronic components are mounted may be left exposed. In this case, the copper foil is entirely exposed on the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 on the front (front mounting surface) KBx of the decorative board KB, and the rear (rear mounting surface) land KRDy1 on the rear (rear mounting surface) KBy of the decorative board KB. Because the electronic components are arranged to cover the entire through-hole lands, which are entirely exposed, there is no need to make the copper foil less noticeable, and there is no need to make the presence of the through-hole holes difficult for players to notice. In addition, the presence of the through-hole lands and the presence of the through-hole holes can be visually confirmed from the side where the electronic components are not mounted during an electrical inspection of the decorative board KB, and the tip of a contact probe can be brought into contact with the through-hole lands to perform an electrical inspection of the decorative board KB (to check for operation and abnormal potentials).

[14. Second embodiment of the game board]
Next, the game board 5A of the second embodiment in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 198 to 200. Figure 198(a) is a front view showing an enlarged portion of the game board of the first embodiment, and (b) is a front view showing an enlarged portion of the game board of the second embodiment at the same location as (a). Figure 199(a) is a front view showing an enlarged portion of the game board of the second embodiment, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the state in which the back-front left decorative unit of the back-front performance unit in (a) is illuminated. Figure 200 is an explanatory diagram showing the panel board of the game panel in Figure 199(a) illuminated.

The gaming board 5A of the second embodiment has the same configuration as the gaming board 5 of the first embodiment, except that the component 1000A and the panel board 1110A of the gaming panel 1100 are made of a translucent, milky white synthetic resin, and detailed descriptions of the parts with the same configuration will be omitted.

In the first embodiment of the gaming board 5, the front component 1000 and gaming panel 1100 (panel plate 1110 and panel holder 1120) are formed from transparent synthetic resin, so that the rear unit 3000 located behind the front component 1000 and gaming panel 1100 can be seen from the front (player side), as shown in Figure 198(a).

In contrast, in the gaming board 5A of this embodiment, the front component 1000A and panel plate 1110A are formed from a milky white synthetic resin, and therefore, as shown in Figure 198(b), the front component 1000 and the rear unit 3000 provided behind the gaming panel 1100, except for the inside of the opening 1112 in the panel plate 1110A, cannot be seen from the front (player's side).

The front component 1000A and panel plate 1110A are formed from a translucent, milky white, opaque synthetic resin. The panel plate 1110A may be machined from a milky white synthetic resin plate, or it may be injection molded from a milky white synthetic resin.

In the gaming board 5A of this embodiment, the panel plates 1110A, etc. of the gaming panel 1100 are milky white, so part of the rear unit 3000 located at the rear (the part outside the opening 1112 when viewed from the front) can be made invisible through the panel plates 1110A, etc. This panel plate 1110A, etc. is translucent, so when decorative elements, etc. located at the rear are illuminated, light from the decorative elements at the rear passes through the panel plate 1110A, allowing the player to see the illuminated decoration of the decorative elements.

In more detail, as shown in Figure 199(a), in the back front left decorative unit 3120 of the back front performance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, which is provided behind the panel board 1110A, etc., the back front upper left logo decoration 3122 and back front left sub-decorative part 3123, etc., which are located outside the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110A, are not visible from the front when viewed from the front. When the back front left logo decoration 3121, back front upper left logo decoration 3122, and back front left sub-decorative part 3123, etc., which are provided behind, are illuminated, light passes through the translucent panel board 1110A, as shown in Figure 199(b), making the illuminated back front upper left logo decoration 3122, back front left sub-decorative part 3123, etc., visible.

The panel boards 1110A and the like are milky white, allowing the luminous colors of the illuminated decorations, such as the logo decoration 3122 at the top left of the back front and the sub-decorative part 3123 at the left of the back front, to be transmitted in their original colors, allowing players to see a colorful illumination effect.

The translucent, opaque material for panel board 1110A should preferably have a light transmittance of 2% to 80% and a haze value of 80% to 100%. If the transmittance is lower than this, it will be difficult to create a luminous decoration with sufficient brightness, and if the transmittance is higher than this, it will be difficult to obtain an opaque material. Also, if the haze value is lower than this, the shape and decoration of components located behind it will be easy to see, which may prevent the desired effect from being concealed.

In addition, panel board 1110A etc. is milky white (Munsell value (10YR 9.2/0.5)), but there are also other colors such as "White Munsell value (N 9.5)", "Cherry Blossom Munsell value (2.5Y 9.2/0.5)", "Purple Blossom Munsell value (10Y 9/1)", "Natural color Munsell value (10YR 9/1)", "Lead white Munsell value (N 9)", "Oyster white Munsell value (5GY 8.5/0.3)", "Grayish white Munsell value (10YR 9/0.5)", "Indigo blue Munsell value (9.7BG 8.2/1.3)", "Purple color Munsell value (2B 8.5/2)", "Ivory color Munsell value (2.5Y 8.5/1.5)", "Cream yellow Munsell value (5Y 8.5/3.5)", and "Cherry blossom color" It may also be a whitish color such as Munsell value (10RP 9/2.5).

However, since the panel board 1110A and the like are made translucent and milky white, if a colored decorative body such as black, red, or blue is placed behind the panel board 1110A, depending on the color of the decorative body, it may be visible through the panel board 1110A even when the decorative body is not illuminated. Furthermore, if the decorative body can be seen through the panel board 1110A, the player may become aware of the presence of the decorative body behind the panel board 1110A, which may reduce the impact (surprise) on the player when the decorative body is illuminated, and the desired presentation effect may not be achieved.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the rear front left first decorative body 3124, rear front left second decorative body 3125, rear front left third decorative body 3126, and rear front left decorative body base 3127, which constitute the rear front left upper logo decorative body 3122 and rear front left sub-decorative body 3123 of the rear front left decorative unit 3120 provided behind the panel board 1110A, are formed from colorless and transparent materials, so the rear front left upper logo decorative body 3122, rear front left sub-decorative body 3123, etc. cannot be seen through the translucent, milky white panel board 1110A. Therefore, when the rear front left upper logo decorative body 3122, rear front left sub-decorative body 3123, etc. are not illuminated, they are invisible to the player, making it difficult for the player to notice their presence. Furthermore, when the logo decoration 3122 at the top left of the back front and the sub-decorative part 3123 at the back front are illuminated, they can be seen through the translucent milky white panel 1110A, surprising players and allowing them to enjoy the illuminated effect. In addition, the light from the illuminated decorations can be seen through the panel 1110A, making the playing area 5a look bright and beautiful, strongly attracting the player's attention.

The gaming board 5A of this embodiment also includes a panel decoration substrate 1130 mounted on the outside of a translucent, milky-white panel board 1110A. The panel decoration substrate 1130 has multiple LEDs 1130a mounted thereon that emit light onto the outer periphery of the panel board 1110A. The multiple LEDs 1130a are full-color LEDs. When the multiple LEDs 1130a on the panel decoration substrate 1130 are illuminated, the panel board 1110A can be illuminated and decorated, as shown by the shaded area in Figure 200. This causes the gaming panel 1100 (panel board 1110A) in front of which the gaming ball B circulates to become self-illuminating, thereby brightening the gaming area 5a, making the gaming ball B circulating within the gaming area 5a easier to see, and improving the appearance of the gaming area 5a, thereby strongly attracting the player's attention.

Furthermore, because the game panel 1100 is self-illuminating, the game ball B circulating within the game area 5a appears as a silhouette, making it easier to see the game ball B and making it easier to make subtle adjustments to the launch strength. Furthermore, by providing panel decorative substrates 1130 on both the left and right sides of the panel board 1110A, the player can intuitively understand when being advised to "hit right" or "hit left." Specifically, by illuminating the LEDs 1130a of either the left or right panel decorative substrate 1130 depending on the game situation, and decorating the left or right side of the panel board 1110A with illumination, the player can intuitively understand that they are being advised to "hit left" or "hit right." This allows the player to enjoy the operation of shooting the game ball B, and also entertains the player with a new type of lighting effect not seen in previous pachinko machines.

More specifically, in conventional pachinko machines, when the game board uses opaque plywood as the game panel, the game area is decorated by attaching a decorative film with a predetermined design or the like to the front of the plywood. However, when plywood is used for the game panel, the decorative film decoration does not stand out from other game machines, making it difficult to increase appeal to players. On the other hand, when the panel board 1110 in front of which the game ball B flows is made transparent, as in the game board 5 of the first embodiment, the decoration of the rear unit 3000 located behind and the effect images on the effect display device 1600 are easily visible, resulting in a pachinko machine 1 with a sense of openness. However, the game ball B flowing in front of the transparent panel board 1110 appears to be floating in the air, which may make it difficult for some players to understand the movement of the game ball B.

In contrast, the game board 5A of this embodiment uses multiple LEDs 1130a on the panel decoration substrate 1130 to illuminate and decorate the translucent panel board 1110A. By appropriately combining the light-emitting colors and patterns of the LEDs 1130a, the decoration of the panel board 1110A can be varied in a variety of ways. This allows players to see a self-illuminating game board 5A, something not available in previous pachinko machines, and strongly attracts the player's attention, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players. Furthermore, because the panel board 1110A is self-illuminating due to the multiple LEDs 1130a on the panel decoration substrate 1130, the game ball B circulating in front of the panel board 1110A can be made more visible, allowing players to enjoy the movement of the game ball B and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition to the effects described above, the gaming board 5A of this embodiment uses a milky white synthetic resin for the panel board 1110A, etc., and since it is possible to use a lower grade resin than transparent resin, the cost of the panel board 1110A can be reduced compared to when transparent resin is used.

In the above embodiment, the panel decorative substrate 1130 is provided on the outside periphery of the panel board 1110A, but this is not limited to this, and the panel decorative substrate 1130 may be provided behind the panel board 1110A. This can achieve the same effects as above. Furthermore, compared to when the panel board is transparent, the point-like light from the LEDs 1130a and the like provided at the rear can be diffused by the opalescent panel board 1110A, allowing the panel board 1110A to be softly illuminated and decorated, reducing glare and creating a gaming board 5A that is gentle on the eyes.

In addition, in the gaming board 5A of this embodiment, although not shown, a decorative film (also called a cell) with a predetermined pattern may be attached to the front of the panel board 1110A. This reduces wear on the panel board 1110A due to the circulation of gaming balls B, and improves the appearance by preventing the appearance of the gaming area 5a from deteriorating when the decorative body behind it is not illuminated by the cell pattern. Furthermore, light from an LED located behind the panel board 1110A can illuminate the cell pattern along with the panel board 1110A, making the decoration of the panel board 1110A look even more beautiful.

Furthermore, as described above, if cells are provided on the front surface of panel board 1110A, the pattern on the cells can be used as an outline to highlight the LED illumination decoration (electric decoration) provided on the rear of panel board 1110A, further enhancing the decorative effect of the illumination decoration.

Furthermore, cells may be provided on the rear surface of panel board 1110A. In this way, light from LEDs or the like provided behind panel board 1110A (cells) will cast shadows of the cells (or the images on the cells) on panel board 1110A, allowing the decoration of panel board 1110A to change with the light emitted by the LEDs, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest. The shadows cast on panel board 1110A may be words such as "hit right," "hit left," or "chance," which can entertain the player by suggesting changes in the game situation.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a decorative body (rear front left decorative unit 3120) with a fixed position is provided behind the milky white panel board 1110A, but this is not limited to this. A movable decorative body may also be provided behind the panel board 1110A that can move between a retracted position behind the panel board 1110A in a front view and an emerging position inside the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110A.

Furthermore, while the above embodiment shows panels such as panel 1110A that are entirely milky white, including the interior, this is not limiting and they may be partially milky white, or may be transparent inside with at least one surface milky white. Specific examples include panel panels molded in two colors from a transparent resin and a milky white resin, panel panels made by bonding a transparent resin plate and a milky white resin plate together, panel panels with a milky white film (cell) attached to at least one surface of a transparent resin plate, panel panels with a transparent resin plate whose rear surface has been subjected to shrinkage processing using ultraviolet-curable ink, and panel panels with a transparent resin plate whose rear surface has been sandblasted.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the panel boards 1110A and the like are shown as milky white, but this is not limited to this and the panel boards may be any suitable color, such as red, blue, yellow, etc.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the front component 1000A is shown as being translucent and milky white, but this is not limited to this. The front component 1000 may be transparent like the game board 5 of the first embodiment, or may be a front component of a different color than the panel board 1110A.

[15. Third embodiment of the game board]
Next, a gaming board 5B of a third embodiment in a pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Fig. 201. Fig. 201 is an exploded perspective view of the panel board and cells of the gaming board of the third embodiment, as seen from the front. The gaming board 5B of the third embodiment has the same configuration as the gaming board 5 of the first embodiment, except that cells 1140 are provided behind the panel board 1110, and detailed descriptions of the same components will be omitted.

In the second embodiment, the gaming board 5B has a film-like cell 1140 with a predetermined pattern detachably attached to the rear side of the panel plate 1110 of the transparent gaming panel 1100. The cell 1140 is a synthetic resin film with a thickness of 0.2 mm to 0.4 mm, and the predetermined pattern is printed on it. Examples of materials for the cell 1140 include polyethylene terephthalate resin, polycarbonate resin, ABS resin, AES resin, PMMA (polymethyl methacrylate) resin, polypropylene resin, polyethylene resin, polystyrene resin, high-impact polystyrene resin, and polyvinyl chloride.

This cell 1140 is formed to a size that covers only a portion of the entire surface of the panel plate 1110 (in this case, the area extending from the left side of the center reel 2500 to the bottom). Furthermore, although not shown in the figure, the cell 1140 is attached to the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 using screws with a predetermined amount of play. This simplifies the effort required to attach the cell 1140 compared to attaching it to the entire surface of the panel plate 1110, and also reduces the amount of cell 1140 used, thereby preventing increases in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, because the cells 1140 are provided as part of the panel board 1110, a greater number of cells 1140 can be extracted from the resin sheet compared to conventional cells that are attached to the panel board, thereby reducing the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, because the cells 1140 are attached to the panel board 1110 with some play, even if the cells 1140 expand and contract due to changes in temperature, humidity, etc., the play can absorb the difference in expansion and contraction between the cells 1140 and the panel board 1110. This prevents the cells 1140 from wrinkling or cracking even if the cells 1140 shrink relative to the panel board 1110, and allows the decorative effect of the patterns on the cells 1140 to be maintained.

Furthermore, because the cells 1140 are attached to the panel board 1110 with screws, the cells 1140 can be easily attached and detached from the panel board 1110. Therefore, by replacing the cells 1140 with cells with different designs, it is possible to easily accommodate changes in the specifications, model, or design of the pachinko machine 1, thereby suppressing increases in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 and, by replacing the cells 1140 with designs that have a more decorative effect, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, because the cells 1140 are located behind the transparent panel board 1110, the distance from the player to the cells 1140 is greater than if they were located in front of the panel board 1110, reducing the sense of oppression felt by the player.

It is also desirable to make the cells 1140 translucent, so that light from the LEDs located behind the panel board 1110 (cells 1140) can illuminate the images on the cells 1140, improving the appearance of the game area 5a. The illuminated decoration of the cells 1140 can also strongly attract the attention of players, increasing the appeal of the pachinko machine 1.

In the above embodiment, the cell 1140 is attached to the panel plate 1110 using screws, but this is not limited to this. For example, the cell 1140 may be attached by sandwiching it between the panel plate 1110 and the panel holder 1120.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the opening 1112 in which the center feature 2500 of the panel board 1110 is provided is shown to be positioned to the right and to the right (eccentric to the right), but this is not limited to this and it may be positioned to the top (eccentric to the top) or to the left (eccentric to the left).The same effect as above can be achieved by providing the cell 1140 behind the part of the opening 1112 that becomes wider due to being offset (eccentric).

Furthermore, the opening 1112 in which the center device 2500 is provided may be offset from the center or outer edge of the gaming panel 1100 (panel board 1110), or may be offset from the center or outer edge of the gaming area 5a. Therefore, for example, if the centers of the panel board 1110 and the gaming area 5a do not coincide with each other, the center of the opening 1112 that is offset from the center of the panel board 1110 may coincide with the center of the gaming area 5a, or the center of the opening 1112 that is offset from the center of the gaming area 5a may coincide with the center of the panel board 1110.

16. Another embodiment of the function display unit
Next, another embodiment of the function display unit 1400 provided on the gaming board 5 or the like will be described in detail, mainly with reference to Figures 202 to 207. Figure 202(a) is a front view of the function display unit of the second embodiment, (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line So-So in Figure 202(a), (c) is a perspective view of the function display unit of (a) viewed from the front, and (d) is a perspective view of the function display unit of (a) viewed from the rear. Figure 203 is an exploded perspective view of the function display unit of Figure 202 viewed from the front, and Figure 204 is an exploded perspective view of the function display unit of Figure 202 viewed from the rear. Figure 205 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the relationship between the function display unit of Figure 202 and the player. Figure 206 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the relationship between the function display unit of the third embodiment and the player. Figure 207 is a cross-sectional view of the function display unit of the fourth embodiment.

The function display unit 1400A of the second embodiment, like the function display unit 1400 of the first embodiment described above, displays a variable display by flashing multiple LEDs 1401 based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and then turns each LED on or off to form a predetermined combination, thereby displaying the game status (game situation), regular lottery results, special lottery results (first special lottery result, second special lottery result), the number of reserved regular lottery results, the number of reserved special lottery results, the number of rounds in the event of a "jackpot", etc.

In more detail, in the game board 5 of the first embodiment, for example, when a game ball B is received in the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004, the main control board 1310 internally processes a special lottery result. The main control board 1310 then sends a control signal to the function display unit 1400 to display the special lottery result, and the function display unit 1400 displays the special lottery result using the corresponding LED 1401.

In addition, the control signal for the special lottery result drawn on the main control board 1310 is also sent to the peripheral control board 1510, which then displays a specified effect image on the effect display device 1600 as an effect suggesting the special lottery result. The effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 is designed to entertain the player, so although the special lottery result drawn on the main control board 1310 can be roughly recognized, the details are difficult to discern. On the other hand, the function display unit 1400 accurately displays the special lottery result drawn, but because this is displayed by illuminating multiple small LEDs 1401, it is difficult to understand what is displayed at a glance.

It is therefore conceivable that by photographing the function display unit 1400 with a digital camera or a camera attached to a mobile phone, the lighting state of the LEDs on the function display unit 1400 can be analyzed, allowing users to quickly find out what is displayed on the function display unit 1400.

However, if the result of the special lottery drawn can be easily determined by the illumination of the LED on the functional display unit 1400, and the special lottery result displayed on the functional display unit 1400 is a "lose," even if an effect image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600, knowing the result will prevent the player from enjoying the effect of the effect image, and they may wish the effect image to end quickly, which may irritate some players and reduce their interest in the game.

In contrast, the functional display unit 1400A of the second embodiment allows the player to clearly see the illumination status of the multiple LEDs 1401, but when photographed with a digital camera or the like, the illumination status of the multiple LEDs 1401 becomes unclear, making it impossible to determine the displayed content.

Specifically, the functional display unit 1400A comprises a functional display board 1402 having multiple LEDs 1401 mounted on its front surface, a rear reflector 1403 provided in front of the functional display board 1402 and transmitting light from the LEDs 1401 independently forward, a light-transmitting sheet 1404 provided in front of the rear reflector 1403 and having light-transmitting properties, and a front reflector 1405 provided in front of the light-transmitting sheet 1404 and emitting light from the LEDs 1401 that has passed through the rear reflector 1403 in different directions.

As shown in Figure 203, multiple LEDs 1401 are randomly mounted on the functional display board 1402. The rear reflector 1403 has multiple through-holes 1403a that correspond to each LED 1401 on the functional display board 1402. The multiple through-holes 1403a are arranged perpendicular to the front mounting surface of the functional display board 1402 (see Figure 202(b) etc.).

The front reflector 1405 has multiple display holes 1405a that penetrate in the front-to-rear direction and correspond to the through holes 1403a of the rear reflector 1403. The rear ends of the multiple display holes 1405a are located immediately before the corresponding through holes 1403a of the rear reflector 1403, and the leading ends are located at varying distances from a line perpendicular to the front mounting surface of the functional display substrate 1402 that passes through the center of the rear end. In other words, the axial directions of the multiple display holes 1405a are oriented in different directions relative to the line perpendicular to the front mounting surface of the functional display substrate 1402.

The front reflector 1405 also has a dividing recess 1405b that is recessed from the front to the rear to connect the multiple display holes 1405a. The dividing recess 1405b divides the multiple display holes 1405a into two: display holes 1405a (LEDs 1401) related to the first special lottery result, and display holes 1405a (LEDs 1401) related to the second special lottery result.

As shown in Figure 205, when viewed by a player seated 50 to 70 cm away from the functional display unit 1400A at the front of this pachinko machine 1, the multiple display holes 1405a on the front of the reflector 1405 are oriented in three directions: one that can be seen only by the left eye, one that can be seen only by the right eye, and one that can be seen by both the left and right eyes. In other words, the multiple display holes 1405a are divided into three groups: one for the left eye, one for the right eye, and one for both eyes.

With the function display unit 1400A of this embodiment, the player can see the light from all of the LEDs 1401 by looking with both eyes, so when special lottery results, etc. are displayed, the light emission status of the multiple LEDs 1401 can be clearly seen, and the function can be performed in a manner comparable to that of the function display unit 1400 of the first embodiment.

Furthermore, with the functional display unit 1400A of this embodiment, when photographing with a digital camera or the like, since the digital camera or the like is monocular, only one light for the left eye and one for both eyes, or one light for the right eye and one for both eyes, is photographed, making it difficult to photograph the light emission status (light emission state) of all LEDs 1401. In other words, when photographing with a digital camera or the like, the light emission status of the multiple LEDs 1401 can become unclear, making it difficult to distinguish the display content on the functional display unit 1400A. Therefore, based on the photograph taken, the display content on the functional display unit 1400A becomes clear, and the result of the special lottery drawn can be seen as a "miss," a simple "jackpot," a "probable hit," a "time-saving hit," a "second jackpot (ST hit)," etc. This prevents the player from not being able to enjoy the effects suggesting the special lottery result or from not being able to enjoy an advantageous game state that is currently occurring (for example, a "jackpot" game), thereby keeping the player entertained and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to the function display unit 1400A of this embodiment, the orientation of the display hole 1405a on the front of the reflector 1405 is changed, and the display content is designed to be clearly visible according to the position of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the display content of the function display unit 1400A can be seen unclearly from behind the seated player. This makes it difficult for other players to grasp the game situation, reducing the chances of other players peering at the player, allowing the player to enjoy the game without worrying about other players.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the display content is designed to be clearly visible to the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, making it more difficult to photograph the display content on the functional display unit 1400A using a digital camera or the like from a position behind the player, thereby ensuring the above-mentioned effects.

Furthermore, in the functional display unit 1400A, the display holes 1405a on the front of the reflector 1405 are oriented not only left and right but also up and down, so that the display content can be seen clearly when viewed from the eye level of a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. This means that when attempting to take a photograph with a digital camera or the like, it is necessary to adjust the height as well, making it more difficult to photograph the display content on the functional display unit 1400A.

In addition, the display holes 1405a in front of the reflector 1405 are oriented differently for the left eye, right eye, etc., which prevents the horizontal distance between the multiple LEDs 1401 on the functional display board 1402 from becoming too large, thereby reducing the horizontal width of the functional display unit 1400A.

In the above embodiment, the multiple display holes 1405a in front of the reflector 1405 are oriented in different directions to be used for the left eye, right eye, etc. However, this is not limited to this, and a functional display unit 1400B with the configuration shown in Figure 206 may also be used.

The functional display unit 1400B comprises a functional display board 1411 having mounted on its front surface multiple left-right LEDs 1411a and multiple right-left LEDs 1411b spaced a predetermined distance apart (the distance between the player's left and right pupils); a rear reflector 1412 provided in front of the functional display board 1411 and transmitting light from the left-right LEDs 1411a and right-left LEDs 1411b forward independently; a translucent sheet 1413 provided in front of the rear reflector 1412; and a front reflector 1414 provided in front of the translucent sheet 1413 and transmitting light from the left-right LEDs 1411a and right-left LEDs 1411b forward after passing through the rear reflector 1412.

The left LED 1411a and right LED 1411b on the functional display board 1411 are spaced 40 mm to 80 mm apart in the left-right direction. The rear reflector 1412 has multiple through-holes 1412a that correspond to the left LED 1411a and right LED 1411b on the functional display board 1411. The multiple through-holes 1412a are arranged perpendicular to the front surface of the functional display board 1411. The front reflector 1414 has multiple display holes 1414a that correspond to the multiple through-holes 1412a on the rear reflector 1412. The multiple display holes 1414a are arranged perpendicular to the front surface of the functional display board 1411.

This functional display unit 1400B is configured so that, when viewed by a player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, the light from the left LED 1411a is visible only to the left eye, and the light from the right LED 1411b is visible only to the right eye. Therefore, when the player looks with both eyes, the light from both the left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b is visible, so the function can be performed in a manner comparable to that of the functional display unit 1400 of the first embodiment.

Furthermore, with the function display unit 1400B, the left LED 1411a and the right LED 1411b are separated in the left-right direction, so that only one of them can be photographed with a monocular digital camera or the like, achieving the same effects as the function display unit 1400A of the second embodiment.

Furthermore, according to the functional display unit 1400B, the multiple display holes 1414a on the front of the reflector 1414 are oriented perpendicular to the front surface of the functional display board 1411, so the display content cannot be clearly seen from any position other than the front of the functional display unit 1400B, making it difficult to photograph the display content using a digital camera, etc.

Furthermore, with the functional display unit 1400B, the multiple display holes 1414a on the front reflector 1414 are oriented perpendicular to the front surface of the functional display substrate 1411, and all face the same direction, making it possible to easily mold the front reflector 1414 and suppressing increases in costs associated with the pachinko machine 1.

In the above embodiment, functional display units 1400A and 1400B are shown with configurations that are difficult to capture with a monocular digital camera, etc., but this is not limited to this, and functional display unit 1400C with a configuration such as that shown in Figure 207 may also be used.

This functional display unit 1400C emits invisible light (infrared, ultraviolet, etc.) that can be captured by digital cameras, etc., making the displayed content difficult to discern. Specifically, it comprises a functional display board 1421 with multiple LEDs 1421a mounted on its front surface, a rear reflector 1422 provided in front of the functional display board 1421, a flat light guide plate 1423 provided in front of the rear reflector 1422, an auxiliary board 1424 mounted with invisible light LEDs 1424a that emit invisible light onto the side of the light guide plate 1423, and a front reflector 1425 provided in front of the light guide plate 1423.

The rear reflector 1422 has multiple through-holes 1422a that correspond to the multiple LEDs 1421a on the functional display substrate 1421. When light from the invisible light LEDs 1424a on the auxiliary substrate 1424 enters the light guide plate 1423 from the side, at least the area of the display holes 1425a on the front reflector 1425 emits light.

The invisible light LED 1424a on the auxiliary board 1424 emits either infrared or ultraviolet invisible light. When the multiple LEDs 1421a are displaying special lottery results, etc., the invisible light LED 1424a emits light, radiating invisible light from the light guide plate 1423. The front reflector 1425 has multiple display holes 1425a that correspond to the through holes 1422a in the rear reflector 1422. The multiple through holes 1422a in the rear reflector 1422 and the multiple display holes 1425a in the front reflector 1425 are arranged perpendicular to the front surface of the functional display board 1421.

With this functional display unit 1400C, even if the light guide plate 1423 emits invisible light due to the invisible light LED 1424a, the player cannot see this invisible light. Therefore, the light from the LED 1421a located at the rear can be seen through the light guide plate 1423, allowing the display content to be viewed in good condition.

On the other hand, if this functional display unit 1400C is photographed with a digital camera or other device capable of capturing invisible light, all of the display holes 1425a will appear to be emitting light due to the light guide plate emitting invisible light, making the displayed content unclear and achieving the same effect as above.

In the above embodiment, a reflector back 1403 (reflector back 1412) and a light-transmitting sheet 1404 (light-transmitting sheet 1413) are provided, but this is not limited to this. A reflector front 1405 (reflector front 1414) may also be provided directly on the front surface of the functional display substrate 1402 (functional display substrate 1411).

In addition, configurations that make it difficult to photograph the display contents on the functional display unit with a digital camera or the like may include, for example, distributing LEDs over a wider area than the shooting range of a digital camera or the like, flashing LEDs at a speed that makes them appear to be lit to the player but appear to be off when photographed with a digital camera or the like, or using multiple dummy LEDs that are unrelated to the display and appear to be off to the player but appear to be lit or off when photographed with a digital camera or the like, or placing high-brightness LEDs near the functional display unit may cause halation when photographed with a digital camera or the like, preventing the display contents from being captured.

[17. Second embodiment of mounting of magnetic sensor]
Next, a second embodiment of the attachment of the magnetic sensor 1050, which differs from the above-described game board 5 and the like, will be described in detail mainly with reference to Fig. 208. Fig. 208(a) is a cross-sectional view showing the second embodiment of the attachment of the magnetic sensor, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the attachment of the magnetic sensor in (a) in a perspective view, (c) is an exploded perspective view showing the attachment of the magnetic sensor in (b), and (d) is an exploded perspective view of the attachment of the magnetic sensor shown with a holding member different from that in (c).

The second embodiment of the magnetic sensor 1050 mounting method includes a holding member 1071 that is mounted at a predetermined position on the game board 5 and has a pair of locking portions 1071a formed from through-holes, and a holding container 1072 that has elastic claws 1072a that lock into the locking portions 1071a of the holding member 1071 and houses the magnetic sensor 1050. The holding member 1071 is made of synthetic resin. The holding container 1072 is made of transparent synthetic resin, allowing the magnetic sensor 1050 to be seen from the outside. The holding member 1071 and holding container 1072 are also made of non-magnetic materials.

The holding container 1072 also has a hole on the surface opposite the elastic claw 1072a. Through this hole in the holding container 1072, the electrical wires from the magnetic sensor 1050 housed inside the holding container 1072 can be pulled out to the outside.

The holding member 1071 and holding container 1072 are made of non-magnetic material, which prevents the holding member 1071 and other components from attracting magnetic field lines from the magnet when the magnet is brought close to the play area 5a, preventing a decrease in the magnetic field lines passing through the magnetic sensor 1050. This makes it easier to detect magnetism acting on the play area 5a, enabling early detection of fraudulent activity using magnets, and dissuading players from engaging in fraudulent activity by reporting suspicious magnetic activity detected by the magnetic sensor 1050, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 with a strong deterrent against fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, by elastically deforming the elastic claws 1072a of the holding container 1072, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be easily attached to and detached from the holding member 1071. This means that the magnetic sensor 1050 can be attached using the elastic claws 1072a of the holding container 1072, without the need for metal screws made of magnetic material as in conventional pachinko machines. This also simplifies the assembly of the pachinko machine 1, thereby minimizing the cost increase associated with the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the magnetic sensor 1050 is attached by providing a locking portion 1071a that penetrates the holding member 1071 and locking the elastic claw 1072a of the holding container 1072 into the locking portion 1071a. This simplifies the configuration of the holding member 1071 on which the magnetic sensor 1050 is attached, thereby reducing the cost of the holding member 1071.

Furthermore, because the elastic claws 1072a of the holding container 1072 are engaged with the locking portions 1071a of the holding member 1071, as shown in FIG. 208(d), multiple sets of locking portions 1071a can be provided on the holding member 1071 in advance, and the elastic claws 1072a can be engaged with any of the locking portions 1071a, thereby allowing the magnetic sensor 1050 to be attached at any desired position. Alternatively, another locking portion 1071a may be provided on the holding member 1071 at a position different from the locking portion 1071a to which the elastic claws 1072a are engaged. This allows the position of the magnetic sensor 1050 to be changed or additional magnetic sensors 1050 to be added without replacing the holding member 1071 with a new one, reducing costs and increasing the versatility of the holding member 1071.

In addition, the magnetic sensor 1050 is housed in the holding container 1072 and is engaged with the engaging portion 1071a of the holding member 1071 by the elastic claw 1072a, which makes it easier to standardize the mounting structure of the magnetic sensor 1050 and reduces the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, by providing the holding member 1071 with multiple locking portions 1071a in advance and locking the elastic claws 1072a of the holding container 1072 containing the magnetic sensor 1050 to the locking portions 1071a at appropriate positions, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be installed in any position or its position can be easily changed. Therefore, since the position of the magnetic sensor 1050 can be easily changed or additional sensors can be installed, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can easily accommodate design changes and model changes while suppressing increases in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, a biasing portion such as a protrusion that presses against the housed magnetic sensor 1050 may be provided inside the holding container 1072. This can suppress small vibrations of the magnetic sensor 1050, reducing the likelihood of the connector connected to the magnetic sensor 1050 coming loose or causing poor contact due to such vibrations, ensuring reliable operation of the magnetic sensor 1050.

In the above embodiment, a through hole was shown as the locking portion 1071a of the holding member 1071, but this is not limited to this and any shape that can lock the elastic claw 1072a may be used, such as a groove or slit.

In addition, in the above embodiment, the holding container 1072 is shown as one that houses the magnetic sensor 1050 vertically, but this is not limited to this, and the holding container may also house the magnetic sensor 1050 horizontally.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the magnetic sensor 1050 is housed in a holding container 1072 having elastic claws 1072a and attached to the holding member 1071, but this is not limited to this. Elastic claws may also be formed on the sensor case 1053 of the magnetic sensor 1050 and engaged with the engaging portion 1071a of the holding member 1071.

Furthermore, while the above describes the installation of magnetic sensor 1050, this installation structure may also be used to install a vibration sensor. Specifically, the vibration sensor may be housed in a holding container with elastic claws, and the elastic claws may be engaged with engagement portions of the holding member to install the vibration sensor. Vibration sensors are not affected by surrounding magnetic materials, but using an installation structure similar to this magnetic sensor 1050 is effective for changing or moving the installation location and reducing installation costs.

[18. Another embodiment related to attachment of decorative body such as sticker]
Next, another embodiment relating to the attachment of a decorative body such as a sticker, which differs from the above embodiment, will be described in detail with reference to Figures 209 to 212. In this section, the component on which a predetermined decoration is applied will be referred to as the decorative body, the component to which the decorative body is attached on one side will be referred to as the first component, and the component to which the decorative body is attached on the other side of the first component will be referred to as the second component. Note that the decorative body, first component, and second component may be arranged front to back, top to bottom, or left to right.

Figure 209(a) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of an example in which the separation hole in the first member for removing the decorative body also serves as a positioning hole for the second member, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of an example in which a closed space is formed by the second member behind the separation hole in the first member for removing the decorative body, (c) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of (b) in which decorative bodies of different thicknesses are attached, and (d) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross-section of an example in which the separation hole in the first member for removing the decorative body also serves as an attachment hole for the decorative body. Figure 210(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the first member from the front with a decorative body attached, (b) is a cross-section of (a), and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing the first member from the front with a decorative body different from (a) attached.

Figure 211(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a horizontally elongated rectangular decorative body and the first member, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a circular decorative body and the first member, (c) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a symmetrically arranged decorative body and the first member, and (d) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a symmetrically arranged decorative body and the first member with a different shape from (c). Figure 212(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a decorative body and a movable first member from the front, (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line TA-TA in (a), (c) is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between the decorative body and the first member in (a) and (c), (d) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a decorative body and a movable first member with a different shape from (a) from the front, and (e) is a cross-sectional view taken along line CH-CH in (d).

First, the embodiment shown in Figure 209(a) comprises a decorative body 1801 made of a sheet-like sticker on which predetermined decorations, characters, etc. are printed, a first member 1821 to which the decorative body 1801 is attached on one side, and a second member 1841 attached to the other side of the first member 1821.

The first member 1821 comprises a flat plate portion 1821a, an attachment recess 1821b recessed into one side of the plate portion 1821a to which the decorative body 1801 is attached, a boss portion 1821c protruding from the other side of the plate portion 1821a opposite the attachment recess 1821b, a separation hole 1821d penetrating the boss portion 1821c and the plate portion 1821a, and a rib 1821e protruding from the other side of the plate portion 1821a to the same position as the tip of the boss portion 1821c. The attachment recess 1821b is recessed deeper than the thickness of the decorative body 1801.

The second member 1841 has a base portion 1841a on one surface of which the boss portion 1821c and the tips of the rib 1821e of the first member 1821 abut, and a positioning protrusion 1841b that protrudes from one surface of the base portion 1841a and is inserted into the separation hole 1821d of the first member 1821. The first member 1821 and the second member 1841 are positioned relative to each other by inserting the positioning protrusion 1841b of the second member 1841 into the separation hole 1821d of the first member 1821.

When assembled, the separation hole 1821d of the first member 1821 is closed on one side by the decorative body 1801 affixed to the mounting recess 1821b, and on the other side by the positioning protrusion 1841b of the second member 1841, creating a closed space inside. The separation hole 1821d is located near the edge of the mounting recess 1821b that is hidden by the decorative body 1801. This separation hole 1821d also serves as a positioning hole for positioning the first member 1821 to the second member 1841.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, if the decorative body 1801 cannot be properly attached to the mounting recess 1821b of the first member 1821 during the manufacture of the pachinko machine 1, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole 1821d from the other side of the first member 1821 and the tip of the rod can be used to press the decorative body 1801 from the other side to one side, causing the edge of the decorative body 1801 to curl up to one side and be removed. The worker can then pull the curled-up portion to easily remove the decorative body 1801 from the mounting recess 1821b, allowing the decorative body 1801 to be reattached.

Furthermore, with the first member 1821 and the second member 1841 separated, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole 1821d from the other side of the first member 1821 and the tip of the rod can be used to press the decorative body 1801 from the other side, making it easy to remove the decorative body 1801 from the mounting recess 1821b, thereby facilitating the replacement of the decorative body 1801 when changing models.

Furthermore, as described above, when the first member 1821 and the second member 1841 are separated, the decorative body 1801 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1821b using the separation hole 1821d, making it easier to separate the components of the pachinko machine 1 by material, and reducing the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, by attaching the decorative body 1801 to the mounting recess 1821b, the separation hole 1821d can be hidden from one side, which prevents the separation hole 1821d from spoiling the appearance and makes it difficult for players to notice the existence of the separation hole 1821d, making it difficult for players to plot fraudulent acts using the separation hole 1821d.

Furthermore, when assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the separation hole 1821d is closed from the other side by the positioning protrusion 1841b of the second member 1841, which is inserted into the separation hole 1821d of the first member 1821 to which the decorative body 1801 is affixed. As a result, there is no hole that runs through the entire machine as in conventional pachinko machines. This makes it possible to prevent linear illegal tools such as piano wire from being inserted into the game board 5 through the hole from the other side of the second member 1841, thereby preventing illegal acts.

In addition, because the positioning protrusion 1841b of the second member 1841 closes the separation hole 1821d from the other side, even if an illegal tool is inserted from one side through the ornament 1801 and into the separation hole 1821d, the positioning protrusion 1841b of the second member 1841 prevents further insertion (penetration) to the other side. This prevents the illegal tool from entering the game board 5 from one side through the separation hole 1821d, preventing illegal acts from being committed. In addition, because the illegal tool pierces the ornament 1801 and leaves a mark on it, illegal acts can be discouraged, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against illegal acts.

In this embodiment, for example, the first member 1821 may be the front component 1000 or the front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, upper left side unit 2300, first attacca unit 2400, center role 2500, second attacca unit 2600, middle right side unit 2700, gate member 2800, etc.), and the second member 1841 may be the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110, panel holder 1120).

Examples of decorative body 1801 include PET seals, Flex Metal Seals (product name), Metaltic Seals (product name), potting seals, aluminum seals, etc.

Next, the embodiment shown in Figure 209(b) comprises a decorative body 1801 made of a sheet-like sticker on which predetermined decorations, characters, etc. are printed, a first member 1822 to which the decorative body 1801 is attached on one side, and a second member 1842 attached to the other side of the first member 1822. The second member 1842 is attached to the first member 1822 by a structure not shown.

The first member 1822 comprises a flat plate portion 1822a, an attachment recess 1822b recessed from one side of the flat plate portion 1822a to which the decorative body 1801 is attached, a separation hole 1822c penetrating the flat plate portion 1822a at the attachment recess 1822b, and multiple ribs 1822d protruding from the other side of the flat plate portion 1822a. The attachment recess 1821b is recessed deeper than the thickness of the decorative body 1801. Although detailed illustrations are omitted, at least some of the multiple ribs 1822d are arranged to surround the separation hole 1822c.

When assembled, the separation hole 1822c of the first member 1822 is closed on one side by the decorative body 1801 attached to the mounting recess 1822b, and on the other side is open to a space surrounded and closed by multiple ribs 1822d and one surface of the second member 1842, resulting in an entirely closed space. The separation hole 1822c is located near the edge of the mounting recess 1822b that is hidden by the decorative body 1801.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, if the decorative body 1801 cannot be properly attached to the mounting recess 1822b of the first member 1822 during the manufacture of the pachinko machine 1, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole 1822c from the other side of the first member 1822 and the tip of the rod can be used to press the decorative body 1801 from the other side to one side, causing the edge of the decorative body 1801 to curl up to one side and be removed. The worker can then pull the curled-up portion to easily remove the decorative body 1801 from the mounting recess 1822b, allowing the decorative body 1801 to be reattached.

Furthermore, with the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 separated, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole 1822c from the other side of the first member 1822 and the tip of the rod can be used to press the decorative body 1801 from the other side, making it easy to remove the decorative body 1801 from the mounting recess 1822b, thereby facilitating the replacement of the decorative body 1801 when changing models.

Furthermore, as described above, when the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 are separated, the decorative body 1801 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1822b using the separation hole 1822c, making it easier to separate the components of the pachinko machine 1 by material, and reducing the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, by attaching the decorative body 1801 to the mounting recess 1822b, the separation hole 1822c can be hidden from one side, which prevents the separation hole 1822c from spoiling the appearance and makes it difficult for players to notice the existence of the separation hole 1822c, making it difficult for players to plot fraudulent acts using the separation hole 1822c.

Furthermore, when assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the separation hole 1822c is closed from the other side by the second member 1842 attached to the other side of the first member 1822 to which the decorative body 1801 is affixed, and as there is no hole that runs through the entire machine as in conventional pachinko machines, it is possible to prevent linear illegal tools such as piano wire from being inserted into the game board 5 through the hole from the other side of the second member 1842, thereby preventing illegal acts.

Furthermore, because the second member 1842 closes the separation hole 1822c from the other side, even if an illegal tool is inserted from one side through the ornamental body 1801 and into the separation hole 1822c, the second member 1842 can prevent it from being inserted (entered) further to the other side. This prevents the illegal tool from entering the game board 5 from one side through the separation hole 1822c, preventing illegal acts from being committed. In addition, because the illegal tool pierces the ornamental body 1801 and leaves a mark on it, illegal acts can be discouraged, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against illegal acts.

In this embodiment, for example, the first member 1822 may be the previous component 1000 or the front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, upper left side unit 2300, first attacca unit 2400, center role 2500, second attacca unit 2600, middle right side unit 2700, gate member 2800, etc.), and the second member 1842 may be the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110, panel holder 1120).

Examples of decorative body 1801 include PET seals, Flex Metal Seals (product name), Metaltic Seals (product name), potting seals, aluminum seals, etc.

Next, the embodiment shown in Figure 209(c) comprises a decorative body 1802 made of a sticker with a predetermined decoration and a certain thickness (e.g., 0.4 mm to 5 mm), a first member 1822 to one side of which the decorative body 1802 is attached, and a second member 1842 attached to the other side of the first member 1822. The second member 1842 is attached to the first member 1822 by a structure not shown.

The first member 1822 comprises a flat plate portion 1822a, an attachment recess 1822b recessed from one side of the plate portion 1822a to which the decorative body 1802 is attached, a separation hole 1822c penetrating the plate portion 1822a at the attachment recess 1822b, and multiple ribs 1822d protruding from the other side of the plate portion 1822a. The attachment recess 1821b is recessed shallower than the thickness of the decorative body 1802. Although detailed illustrations are omitted, at least some of the multiple ribs 1822d are arranged to surround the separation hole 1822c.

When assembled, the separation hole 1822c of the first member 1822 is closed on one side by the decorative body 1802 attached to the mounting recess 1822b, and on the other side is open to a space surrounded and closed by multiple ribs 1822d and one surface of the second member 1842, resulting in an entirely closed space. The separation hole 1822c is located near the edge of the mounting recess 1822b that is hidden by the decorative body 1802.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, if the decorative body 1802 cannot be properly attached to the mounting recess 1822b of the first member 1822 during the manufacture of the pachinko machine 1, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole 1822c from the other side of the first member 1822 and the tip of the rod can be used to press the decorative body 1802 from the other side to one side, causing the edge of the decorative body 1802 to curl up to one side and be removed. The worker can then pull the curled-up portion, easily removing the decorative body 1802 from the mounting recess 1822b and re-attaching the decorative body 1802.

Furthermore, with the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 separated, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole 1822c from the other side of the first member 1822 and the tip of the rod can be used to press the decorative body 1802 from the other side, thereby easily removing the decorative body 1802 from the mounting recess 1822b, thereby facilitating the replacement of the decorative body 1802 when changing models.

Furthermore, as described above, when the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 are separated, the decorative body 1802 can be easily removed from the mounting recess 1822b using the separation hole 1822c, making it easier to separate the components of the pachinko machine 1 by material, and reducing the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, by attaching the decorative body 1802 to the mounting recess 1822b, the separation hole 1822c can be hidden from one side, which prevents the separation hole 1822c from spoiling the appearance and makes it difficult for players to notice the existence of the separation hole 1822c, making it difficult for players to plot fraudulent acts using the separation hole 1822c.

In addition, when assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the separation hole 1822c is closed from the other side by the second member 1842 attached to the other side of the first member 1822 to which the decorative body 1802 is affixed, and as there is no hole that runs through the entire machine as in conventional pachinko machines, it is possible to prevent linear illegal tools such as piano wire from being inserted into the game board 5 through the hole from the other side of the second member 1842, thereby preventing illegal acts.

Furthermore, because the second member 1842 closes the separation hole 1822c from the other side, even if an illegal tool is inserted from one side through the decorative body 1802 and into the separation hole 1822c, the second member 1842 prevents it from being inserted (entered) further to the other side. This prevents the illegal tool from entering the game board 5 from one side through the separation hole 1822c, preventing illegal acts from being committed. In addition, because the illegal tool pierces the decorative body 1802 and leaves a mark on it, it discourages people from committing illegal acts, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against illegal acts.

In this embodiment, for example, the first member 1822 may be the previous component 1000 or the front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, upper left side unit 2300, first attacca unit 2400, center role 2500, second attacca unit 2600, middle right side unit 2700, gate member 2800, etc.), and the second member 1842 may be the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110, panel holder 1120). Alternatively, the first member 1822 may be a decorative holding member, and the second member 1842 may be a base member or decorative substrate, etc.

Examples of decorative body 1802 include PET seals, Flex Metal Seals (product name), Metatic Seals (product name), potting seals, and aluminum seals. Examples of decorative body 1802 include those formed by injection molding, vacuum molding, compressed air molding, high-frequency molding, etc.

Next, the embodiment shown in Figure 209(d) comprises a decorative body 1803 that is thick (e.g., 2 mm to 20 mm) and rigid and has a predetermined decoration, a first member 1822 to which the decorative body 1803 is attached on one side, and a second member 1842 that is attached to the other side of the first member 1822.

The decorative body 1803 has an attachment dowel 1803a protruding to the other side. The decorative body 1803 can be attached to the first member 1822 by press-fitting this attachment dowel 1803a into the separation hole 1822c of the first member 1822, which will be described later.

The first member 1822 comprises a flat plate portion 1822a, an attachment recess 1822b recessed from one side of the plate portion 1822a against which the decorative body 1803 abuts, a separation hole 1822c that penetrates the plate portion 1822a at the attachment recess 1822b and into which the attachment dowel 1803a is press-fitted, and multiple ribs 1822d protruding from the other side of the plate portion 1822a. The attachment recess 1821b is recessed shallower than the thickness of the decorative body 1803. Although detailed illustrations are omitted, at least some of the multiple ribs 1822d are arranged to surround the separation hole 1822c.

When assembled, the separation hole 1822c of the first member 1822 is closed on one side by the mounting dowel 1803a protruding from the decorative body 1803, and on the other side is open to a space surrounded and closed by multiple ribs 1822d and one surface of the second member 1842, resulting in an entirely closed space. The separation hole 1822c is located near the edge of the mounting recess 1822b that is hidden by the decorative body 1803.

According to the configuration of this embodiment, if the decorative body 1803 cannot be properly attached to the mounting recess 1822b of the first member 1822 during the manufacture of the pachinko machine 1, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole 1822c from the other side of the first member 1822, and the tip of the rod can be used to press the mounting dowel 1803a of the decorative body 1803 from the other side to one side, thereby separating the other side surface of the decorative body 1803 from the surface of the mounting recess 1822b, allowing the decorative body 1803 to be easily removed from the first member 1822 and reattached.

Furthermore, with the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 separated, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole 1822c from the other side of the first member 1822 and the tip of the rod can be used to press the mounting dowel 1803a of the decorative body 1803 from the other side, making it easy to remove the decorative body 1803 from the first member 1822, thereby facilitating the replacement of the decorative body 1803 when changing models.

Furthermore, as described above, when the first member 1822 and the second member 1842 are separated, the decorative body 1803 can be easily removed from the first member 1822 using the separation hole 1822c, making it easier to separate the components of the pachinko machine 1 by material, and reducing the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, by pressing the mounting dowel 1803a into the separation hole 1822c and attaching the decorative body 1803 to the first member 1822, the separation hole 1822c can be hidden from one side, which prevents the separation hole 1822c from spoiling the appearance and makes it difficult for players to notice the existence of the separation hole 1822c, making it difficult for players to plot fraudulent acts using the separation hole 1822c.

In addition, when assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the separation hole 1822c is closed from the other side by the second member 1842 attached to the other side of the first member 1822, and as there is no hole that runs through the entire machine as in conventional pachinko machines, it is possible to prevent linear illegal tools such as piano wire from being inserted into the game board 5 through the hole from the other side of the second member 1842, thereby preventing illegal acts.

Furthermore, because the mounting dowel 1803a is press-fit into the separation hole 1822c from one side and the decorative body 1803 is rigid, even if an attempt is made to insert an illegal tool through the decorative body 1803 from one side and into the separation hole 1822c, the rigidity of the decorative body 1803 and the mounting dowel 1803a can prevent the tool from penetrating. Even if the decorative body 1803 is penetrated from one side and inserted into the separation hole 1822c, the second member 1842 can prevent further insertion (penetration) to the other side, preventing the illegal tool from penetrating the game board 5 from one side through the separation hole 1822c and preventing illegal acts. Furthermore, because the illegal tool penetrates the decorative body 1803 and leaves a mark on the decorative body 1803, it discourages people from committing illegal acts, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against illegal acts.

In this embodiment, for example, the first member 1822 may be the previous component 1000 or the front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, upper left side unit 2300, first attacca unit 2400, center role 2500, second attacca unit 2600, middle right side unit 2700, gate member 2800, etc.), and the second member 1842 may be the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110, panel holder 1120). Alternatively, the first member 1822 may be a decorative holding member, and the second member 1842 may be a base member or decorative substrate, etc.

The decorative body 1803 may be formed by injection molding and have a relief-like decoration. The mounting dowel 1803a of the decorative body 1803 may be molded integrally with the decorative body 1803, may be insert-molded, or may be assembled separately.

Next, the embodiment shown in Figures 210(a) and (b) comprises a decorative body 1804 made of a sheet-like sticker on which predetermined decorations, characters, etc. are printed, and a first member 1823 to one side of which the decorative body 1804 is attached. Note that the configuration on the other side of the first member 1823 (including the second member) may have any of the configurations described above.

The decorative body 1804 is a sticker with a predetermined pattern, text, etc. printed on its surface, and is translucent. This decorative body 1804 has an approximately square outer shape, with chamfered portions 1804a of a predetermined radius at three corners. Because the overall shape of this decorative body 1804 makes it difficult to determine its orientation, the shape of one corner is made different from the shape of the remaining corners, making it possible to determine its orientation. Note that while the chamfered portions 1804a shown here are R-chamfered, they may also be C-chamfered.

In addition, decorative body 1804 has an adhesive surface 1804b (the area shown shaded in Figure 210(a)) on the back surface that is provided along the outer periphery with a roughly constant width (within the range of 3mm to 6mm). The width of adhesive surface 1804b is set appropriately depending on the size of decorative body 1804. Limiting adhesive surface 1804b to the outer periphery in this way is often used, especially with transparent stickers (decorative body 1804), when you want to show off LEDs or other decorative elements or designs behind them.

The first member 1823 has a flat plate portion 1823a, an attachment recess 1823b recessed from one side of the flat plate portion 1823a to a size slightly larger than the decorative body 1804 and deeper (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm) than the thickness of the decorative body 1804, to which the decorative body 1804 is attached, and a separation hole 1823c that penetrates the flat plate portion 1823a at the location of the attachment recess 1823b. This first member 1823 is formed to be transparent.

The separation hole 1823c is located close to the corner of the mounting recess 1823b and in a position where it will not be covered by the adhesive surface 1804b when the decorative body 1804 is attached (a position inside the adhesive surface 1804b). This prevents the adhesive surface 1804b from coming into contact with the separation hole 1823c, thereby preventing a decrease in the adhesive strength of the decorative body 1804.

This separation hole 1823c is a circular hole. In this embodiment, the separation hole 1823c has an inner diameter within the range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 1823c were any smaller, the diameter of the rod-shaped separation member (tool) inserted into the separation hole 1823c would be smaller, making it more likely to bend and potentially unable to sufficiently press against the decorative body 1804. If the separation hole 1823c were any larger, bending would occur in the area of the separation hole 1823c in the decorative body 1804, potentially detracting from the appearance of the decorative body 1804.

The first member 1823 is also provided with chamfered portions 1823d formed at three corners of the mounting recess 1823b, which have a larger radius than the chamfered portion 1804a of the decorative body 1804. The remaining corner serves as an anti-misapplication portion 1823e. This gives the mounting recess 1823b a shape similar to that of the decorative body 1804. The two edges that make up the corner of the mounting recess 1823b where the chamfered portion 1823d is not provided are set as contact surfaces that serve as references for attaching the decorative body 1804. This ensures clearance in at least two directions for attaching the decorative body 1804, making the attachment process easier.

The first member 1823 also has an identification portion 1823f in the mounting recess 1823b that indicates the location of the contact surface. The identification portion 1823f is recessed below the surface of the mounting recess 1823b. By looking at this identification portion 1823f, the worker can immediately recognize the position of the contact surface for attaching the decorative body 1804, preventing mistakes in the position of the contact surface and making the attachment work easier.

In addition, it is desirable that the distance from the outer edge of the flat portion 1823a to the outer edge of the mounting recess 1823b of the first member 1823 be 0.5 mm or more. If the distance is smaller than this, the outer portion of the mounting recess 1823b will be more likely to chip when the game ball B collides with another member.

When attaching decorative body 1804 to mounting recess 1823b, first, the corner of decorative body 1804 that does not have chamfered portion 1804a is brought into contact with the contact surface (misapplication prevention portion 1823e) of mounting recess 1823b indicated by identification portion 1823f, and then the adhesive surface 1804b is gradually brought into contact with the surface of mounting recess 1823b from that point to attach it. Furthermore, when attempting to bring the corner of decorative body 1804 that has chamfered portion 1804a into contact with the contact surface (misapplication prevention portion 1823e), the shape of misapplication prevention portion 1823e is different from that of chamfered portion 1804a, making it clear that decorative body 1804 has been attached in the wrong direction, allowing decorative body 1804 to be attached in the correct direction.

With the configuration of this embodiment, by passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole 1823c from the other side of the first member 1823 and using the tip of the rod to press the decorative body 1804 from the other side to one side, the decorative body 1804 can be removed by being rolled up near its edge to one side. The worker can then pull on the rolled-up portion to easily remove the decorative body 1804 from the mounting recess 1823b (first member 1823), achieving the same effects as the other configurations described above.

In addition, the separation hole 1823c of the first member 1823 is located so that it does not come into contact with the adhesive surface 1804b when the decorative body 1804 is attached to the mounting recess 1823b. This prevents the adhesive surface 1804b from coming into contact with the separation hole 1823c, thereby preventing a decrease in the adhesive strength of the decorative body 1804 and making it more difficult for the decorative body 1804 to come off.

Furthermore, the mounting recess 1823b of the first member 1823 to which the decorative body 1804 is attached is provided with an anti-misapplication feature 1823e. Therefore, if an attempt is made to attach the decorative body 1804 in an orientation other than the correct orientation, the different shape of the chamfered portion 1804a of the decorative body 1804 and the anti-misapplication feature 1823e will alert the user to the incorrect orientation of the decorative body 1804. This allows the decorative body 1804 to be attached to the first member 1823 in the correct orientation and prevents the decorative body 1804 from being shipped with the attachment in the wrong orientation.

In addition, the mounting recess 1823b of the first member 1823 is provided with an identification portion 1823f that indicates the contact surface, allowing the worker to immediately recognize the position of the contact surface that serves as the reference for attaching the decorative body 1804, preventing mistakes in the contact surface position and making the attachment work easier.

In this embodiment, for example, the first member 1823 may be the front component 1000 or the front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, upper left side unit 2300, first attacca unit 2400, center role piece 2500, second attacca unit 2600, middle right side unit 2700, gate member 2800, etc.), or it may be a member (decorative holding member) provided on the front unit 2000 or back unit 3000.

Examples of decorative body 1804 include PET seals, Flex Metal Seals (product name), Metaltic Seals (product name), potting seals, aluminum seals, etc.

Next, the embodiment of Figure 210(c) is the same as the embodiment of Figures 210(a) and (b), except that the adhesive surface 1804b of the decorative body 1804 is provided not only along the outer periphery but also on one diagonal line. The rest of the configuration is the same as the embodiment of Figures 210(a) and (b), and a description thereof will be omitted.

In addition to achieving the same effects as above, this embodiment also provides diagonal adhesive surfaces 1804b on the back surface of the decorative body 1804, thereby increasing the adhesive strength and making the decorative body 1804 less likely to come off. Furthermore, even if the decorative body 1804 shrinks at a different rate than the first member 1823 due to environmental changes such as temperature and humidity, the central portion is adhered by the diagonal adhesive surfaces 1804b, preventing the decorative body 1804 from swelling or rippling, and preventing the decorative body 1804 from looking unattractive.

Furthermore, because adhesive surface 1804b is provided on a diagonal line, the adhesive surface can be reduced compared to when adhesive surfaces are provided on the entire surface of decorative body 1804, thereby reducing the costs associated with the pachinko machine 1. Furthermore, because the adhesive strength of decorative body 1804 is lower compared to when adhesive surfaces are provided on the entire surface, it is possible to easily remove decorative body 1804 using separation hole 1823c.

Next, the embodiment shown in Figure 211(a) comprises a horizontally elongated rectangular decorative body 1805 (shaded area) made of a sheet-like sticker on which predetermined decorations, characters, etc. are printed, and a first member 1824 to one side of which decorative body 1805 is affixed. Note that the configuration on the other side of first member 1824 (including the second member) may comprise any of the configurations described above. Also, in this embodiment, the separation hole and identification portion indicating the contact surface in first member 1824 have been omitted.

The decorative body 1805 is a sticker with a predetermined pattern, text, etc. printed on its surface. This decorative body 1805 has a horizontally elongated rectangular shape, with one corner (the lower left corner in the figure) having a C-chamfered chamfered portion 1805a cut out at an angle. Because the shape of this decorative body 1805 makes it difficult to determine the up-down orientation, the shape of one corner is made different from the shape of the remaining corners, making it possible to determine the orientation. The adhesive surface of the decorative body 1805 may be provided at a fixed width along the outer periphery, as in Figure 210(a), or it may be provided over the entire surface.

The first member 1824 has a flat plate portion 1824a and an attachment recess 1824b that is recessed from one side of the flat plate portion 1824a, is slightly larger than the decorative body 1805, and is deeper than the thickness of the decorative body 1805 (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm), to which the decorative body 1805 can be attached.

The first member 1824 also has a C-chamfered misapplication prevention portion 1824c that protrudes into the mounting recess 1824b at one corner (the lower left corner in the figure). This gives the mounting recess 1824b a shape similar to that of the decorative body 1805. In this first member 1824, the diagonally extending edge of the misapplication prevention portion 1824c and the short side portion connected to the misapplication prevention portion 1824c are set as contact surfaces that serve as references for attaching the decorative body 1805. This ensures clearance for attaching the decorative body 1805 in three directions: the short side direction of the mounting recess 1824b, the long side direction, and the direction perpendicular to the diagonal side of the misapplication prevention portion 1824c, making the attachment process easier.

In addition, it is desirable that the distance from the outer periphery of the flat portion 1824a to the mounting recess 1824b of the first member 1824 be 1 mm or more. If the distance is smaller than this, the portion outside the mounting recess 1824b will be more likely to chip when the game ball B collides with another member.

When attaching decorative body 1805 to mounting recess 1824b, first bring the oblique side of chamfered portion 1805a of decorative body 1805 and the short side connected to chamfered portion 1805a into contact with the contact surface of mounting recess 1824b (the oblique side of misapplication prevention portion 1824c and the short side connected to misapplication prevention portion 1824c), and then gradually bring the adhesive surface on the back side from this point into contact with the surface of mounting recess 1824b to attach it.

When attempting to abut a corner of decorative body 1805 where chamfered portion 1805a is not provided against the contact surface (misapplication prevention portion 1824c), the shape of misapplication prevention portion 1824c is different from that of chamfered portion 1805a, making it possible to make the worker aware that decorative body 1805 has been applied in the wrong direction, and allowing the worker to apply decorative body 1805 in the correct direction. Furthermore, if decorative body 1805 is applied in the wrong direction to mounting recess 1824b, the right-angled corner of decorative body 1805 will protrude from mounting recess 1824b at the area of misapplication prevention portion 1824c, making it possible to make the worker aware that decorative body 1805 has been applied incorrectly.

In this embodiment, the mounting recess 1824b of the first member 1824 to which the decorative body 1805 is attached is provided with an anti-misapplication feature 1824c. Therefore, if an attempt is made to attach the decorative body 1805 in an orientation other than the correct orientation, the shape of the corner of the decorative body 1805 where the chamfered portion 1805a is not provided is different from the shape of the anti-misapplication feature 1824c, making it possible to make the decorative body 1805 be attached to the first member 1824 in the correct orientation and preventing the decorative body 1805 from being shipped with the attachment in the incorrect orientation.

In this embodiment, for example, the first member 1824 may be the front component 1000 or the front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, upper left side unit 2300, first attacca unit 2400, center role piece 2500, second attacca unit 2600, middle right side unit 2700, gate member 2800, etc.), or it may be a member (decorative holding member) provided on the front unit 2000 or back unit 3000.

Examples of decorative body 1805 include PET seals, Flex Metal Seals (product name), Metaltic Seals (product name), potting seals, aluminum seals, etc.

Next, the embodiment shown in Figure 211 (b) comprises a circular decorative body 1806 (shaded area) made of a sheet-like sticker with a predetermined decoration, text, etc. printed on it, and a first member 1825 to one side of which the decorative body 1806 is attached. Note that the configuration on the other side of the first member 1825 (including the second member) may comprise any of the configurations described above. Also, in this embodiment, the separation hole and identification portion indicating the contact surface in the first member 1825 are omitted.

Decorative body 1806 is a sticker with a predetermined pattern, text, etc. printed on its surface. This decorative body 1806 has a circular outer shape and has a notch 1806a cut out in an arc from the outside (bottom in the figure). Because decorative body 1806 has a shape that makes it difficult to determine its orientation, the notch 1806a makes it possible to determine its orientation. The adhesive surface of decorative body 1806 may be provided at a fixed width along the outer periphery, as in Figure 210(a), or it may be provided over the entire surface.

The first member 1825 has a flat plate portion 1825a and an attachment recess 1825b that is recessed from one side of the flat plate portion 1825a, is slightly larger than the decorative body 1806, and is deeper than the thickness of the decorative body 1806 (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm), to which the decorative body 1806 can be attached.

The first member 1825 also has an arc-shaped anti-application portion 1825c that protrudes from the periphery of the mounting recess 1825b (the lower end of the periphery in the figure) with a radius that matches the notch 1806a of the decorative body 1806. This gives the mounting recess 1825b a shape similar to that of the decorative body 1806. In this first member 1825, the arc-shaped edge of the anti-application portion 1825c is set as the contact surface that serves as the reference for attaching the decorative body 1806. This ensures that there is clearance in at least two directions for attaching the decorative body 1806: along the arc of the anti-application portion 1825c and away from the anti-application portion 1825c (up and down in the figure), making the attachment process easier.

In addition, it is desirable that the distance from the outer periphery of the flat portion 1825a to the mounting recess 1825b of the first member 1825 be 1 mm or more. If the distance is smaller than this, the portion outside the mounting recess 1825b will be more likely to chip when the game ball B collides with another member.

When attaching the decorative body 1806 to the mounting recess 1825b, first abut the notch 1806a of the decorative body 1806 against the contact surface of the mounting recess 1825b (misapplication prevention portion 1825c), and then gradually bring the adhesive surface on the back side from that point into contact with the surface of the mounting recess 1825b to attach it.

If decorative body 1806 is attached by placing it against a peripheral surface other than the contact surface (misapplication prevention portion 1825c) of mounting recess 1825b, decorative body 1806 will protrude from mounting recess 1825b at the area of misapplication prevention portion 1825c, making it possible to alert the worker that decorative body 1806 has been attached incorrectly.

In this embodiment, the mounting recess 1825b of the first member 1825 to which the decorative body 1806 is attached is provided with an incorrect attachment prevention section 1825c. Therefore, if an attempt is made to attach the decorative body 1806 in an orientation other than the correct orientation, the decorative body 1806 will protrude from the area of the incorrect attachment prevention section 1825c, making it possible to notice that the decorative body 1806 is in the wrong orientation. This allows the decorative body 1806 to be attached to the first member 1825 in the correct orientation, and also prevents the decorative body 1806 from being shipped with the wrong orientation attached.

In this embodiment, for example, the first member 1825 may be the front component 1000 or the front unit 2000 (starting port unit 2100, side unit 2200, upper left side unit 2300, first attacca unit 2400, center role piece 2500, second attacca unit 2600, middle right side unit 2700, gate member 2800, etc.), or it may be a member (decorative holding member) provided on the front unit 2000 or back unit 3000.

Examples of decorative body 1806 include PET seals, Flex Metal Seals (product name), Metaltic Seals (product name), potting seals, aluminum seals, etc.

Next, the embodiment shown in Figures 211(c) and (d) comprises a pair of decorative body (left) 1807L and decorative body (right) 1807R (shaded areas) arranged symmetrically and made of sheet-like stickers with predetermined decorations, letters, etc. printed on them, and a pair of first members (left) 1826L and first members (right) 1826R to one side of which the decorative body (left) 1807L and decorative body (right) 1807R are attached. Note that the configuration of the other side of the decorative body (left) 1807L and decorative body (right) 1807R (including the second member) may have any of the configurations described above. Also, in this embodiment, the identification parts indicating the separation holes and contact surfaces in the decorative body (left) 1807L and decorative body (right) 1807R have been omitted.

The left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R are stickers with a predetermined pattern, text, etc. printed on their surfaces. The left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R are bilaterally symmetrical to each other. The left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R are formed in a roughly semicircular shape that is long in the vertical direction, with the edges that are close to each other extending linearly up and down, and the upper and lower ends of these edges connected by arc-shaped edges that bulge out in the directions that move away from each other.

The left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R in Figure 211(c) have different radii of the R-chamfers at both longitudinal ends, i.e., the upper and lower ends of the semicircular shapes. On the other hand, the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R in Figure 211(d) have R-chamfers at the upper end (one longitudinal end) of the semicircular shape and a linear notch at the lower end (the other longitudinal end). Both the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R have shapes that make it difficult to distinguish between left-handed and right-handed use when turned upside down, so by making the shapes of the upper and lower ends different, it is possible to identify whether they are for left-handed or right-handed use.

The adhesive surface of the left decorative element 1807L and the right decorative element 1807R may be provided at a fixed width along the outer edge, as in Figure 210(a), or may be provided over the entire surface.

The left first member 1826L and the right first member 1826R are formed symmetrically to each other. The left first member 1826L and the right first member 1826R have a flat plate portion 1826a, an attachment recess 1826b that is recessed from one side of the flat plate portion 1826a and is slightly larger than the decorative body 1806 and deeper (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm) than the thickness of the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R, to which the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R are attached, and an incorrect attachment prevention portion 1826c at the bottom end of the attachment recess 1826b.

The misapplication prevention portion 1826c of the left first member 1826L and the right first member 1826R in Figure 211(c) is formed as a rounded chamfer with a radius larger than the radius of the rounded chamfer at the bottom end of the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R. On the other hand, the misapplication prevention portion 1826c of the left first member 1826L and the right first member 1826R in Figure 211(d) is formed as a horizontally extending linear notch. In both the left first member 1826L and the right first member 1826R mounting recess 1826b, the edge of the misapplication prevention portion 1826c is set as a contact surface that serves as a reference for attaching the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R.

As a result, in the embodiment of Figure 211(c), at least two clearance directions are ensured for attaching the left decorative element 1807L and the right decorative element 1807R: the arc direction in which the element rolls along the arc of the misapplication prevention part 1826c, and the direction away from the misapplication prevention part 1826c (up and down in the figure). On the other hand, in the embodiment of Figure 211(d), at least two clearance directions are ensured for attaching the left decorative element 1807L and the right decorative element 1807R: the direction along the straight line of the misapplication prevention part 1826c (left and right in the figure) and the direction away from the misapplication prevention part 1826c (up and down in the figure). In this way, in both embodiments, at least two clearance directions are ensured, making the attachment process easier.

In addition, it is desirable that the distance from the outer periphery of the flat portion 1826a to the mounting recess 1826b on the left first member 1826L and the right first member 1826R be 1 mm or more. If the distance is smaller than this, the outer portion of the mounting recess 1826b will be more likely to chip when the game ball B collides with another member.

When attaching the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R to the corresponding mounting recesses 1826b of the left first member 1826L and the right first member 1826R, the end of the longitudinal direction of the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R with the larger radius of the R chamfer or the linearly notched end facing downward, and abutting it against the contact surface of the corresponding mounting recess 1826b (the edge of the misapplication prevention portion 1826c), and then gradually bring the adhesive surface on the back side from that point into contact with the surface of the mounting recess 1826b to attach it.

Furthermore, if you try to reverse the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R upside down and then paste them with the left and right sides reversed, the shape of the contact surface (misapplication prevention part 1826c) will be different from the shape of the lower end, making it possible to realize that the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R have been pasted in the wrong direction, and allowing you to paste the left decorative body 1807L and the right decorative body 1807R in the correct direction.

In this embodiment, the mounting recesses 1826b of the left first member 1826L and the right first member 1826R to which the left decorative element 1807L and the right decorative element 1807R are attached are each provided with an incorrect attachment prevention feature 1826c. Therefore, if an attempt is made to attach the left decorative element 1807L and the right decorative element 1807R in an orientation other than the correct orientation, the difference between the shape of the longitudinal ends of the left decorative element 1807L and the right decorative element 1807R and the shape of the incorrect attachment prevention feature 1826c makes it possible to detect the incorrect orientation of the left decorative element 1807L and the right decorative element 1807R. This allows the left decorative element 1807L and the right decorative element 1807R to be attached to the left first member 1826L and the right first member 1826R in the correct orientation, and prevents the left decorative element 1807L and the right decorative element 1807R from being shipped with the decorative element 1807L and the right decorative element 1807R attached in the incorrect orientation.

In this embodiment, for example, the first left member 1826L and the first right member 1826R may be members (decorative holding members) provided on the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000.

Examples of decorative body left 1807L and decorative body right 1807R include PET seals, Flex Metal Seals (product name), Metatic Seals (product name), potting seals, aluminum seals, etc.

Next, the embodiment shown in Figures 212(a) to (c) comprises a decorative body 1808 made of a sheet-like sticker on which a predetermined pattern, text, etc. is printed, and a movable first member 1827 to one side of which the decorative body 1808 is attached. Note that the configuration on the other side of the first member 1827 (including the second member) may comprise any of the configurations described above. Also, in this embodiment, the identification portion indicating the contact surface of the first member 1827 has been omitted.

Decorative body 1808 is a sticker with a predetermined pattern, text, etc. printed on its surface. This decorative body 1808 has a horizontally long rectangular shape, with the two upper corners rounded and the two lower corners chamfered. The difference in the chamfered shape between the upper and lower sides makes it possible to identify the orientation of decorative body 1808. The adhesive surface of decorative body 1808 may be provided at a fixed width along the outer periphery, as in Figure 210(a), or it may be provided over the entire surface.

The first member 1827 comprises a horizontally elongated, rectangular, flat plate portion 1827a, an attachment recess 1827b recessed from one side of the flat plate portion 1827a to a size slightly larger than the decorative body 1808 and deeper (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm) than the thickness of the decorative body 1808, to which the decorative body 1808 is attached, a separation hole 1827c penetrating the flat plate portion 1827a at the location of the attachment recess 1827b, and mis-attachment prevention portions 1827d provided at the two lower corners of the attachment recess 1827b.

The first member 1827 also has a pair of shafts 1827e that protrude cylindrically in the left-right direction from near the lower ends of both left and right side surfaces of the flat plate portion 1827a. As shown in FIG. 212(b), the shafts 1827e are located on the other side of the surface of the mounting recess 1827b. The pair of shafts 1827e of the first member 1827 are rotatably supported by a member (not shown). In other words, the first member 1827 is movable and can rotate (pivot) around the central axis of the pair of shafts 1827e. The shafts 1827e of the first member 1827 may be integrally molded with the flat plate portion 1827a, etc., or may be insert-molded, or may be assembled separately.

The separation holes 1827c are round holes located near the upper corners of the mounting recess 1827b. By locating the two separation holes 1827c far from the axis of the shaft 1827e, the weight of the first member 1827 at the position far from the axis of the shaft 1827e can be reduced. This reduces the rotational moment acting when the first member 1827 is rotated (pivoted), reducing the load on the rotational drive of the first member 1827 and allowing the first member 1827 to move smoothly. Furthermore, by locating the two separation holes 1827c near the upper left and right corners, the force applied to the left and right shafts 1827e can be equalized. By balancing the first member 1827, uneven wear can be reduced.

In this embodiment, the separation hole 1827c has an inner diameter within the range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 1827c were any smaller, the diameter of the rod-shaped separation member (tool) inserted into the separation hole 1827c would be smaller, making it more likely to bend and potentially unable to sufficiently press against the decorative body 1808. If the separation hole 1827c were any larger, the decorative body 1808 would bend at the location of the separation hole 1827c, potentially compromising the appearance of the decorative body 1808.

The misapplication prevention portion 1827d protrudes into the mounting recess 1827b in a shape that corresponds to the C-chamfered corner of the lower corner of the decorative body 1808. In this embodiment, the slanted edge of the misapplication prevention portion 1827d and the lower edge of the mounting recess 1827b are set as contact surfaces that serve as reference points for attaching the decorative body 1808.

Since misapplication prevention portion 1827d protrudes into mounting recess 1827b, the weight of first member 1827 increases. However, because misapplication prevention portion 1827d is located close to the axis of shaft portion 1827e, the effect of the increased rotational moment caused by misapplication prevention portion 1827d can be reduced as much as possible, and the increase in load on rotational drive of first member 1827 can be suppressed. Furthermore, because misapplication prevention portion 1827d is located at each of the two lower corners of mounting recess 1827b, first member 1827 can be balanced, uneven wear of shaft portion 1827e can be reduced, and first member 1827 can be rotated (pivoted) in a stable manner.

In addition, it is desirable that the distance from the outer periphery of the flat portion 1827a to the mounting recess 1827b of the first member 1827 be 1 mm or more. If the distance is smaller than this, the portion outside the mounting recess 1827b will be more likely to chip when the game ball B collides with another member.

When attaching decorative body 1808 to mounting recess 1827b of first member 1827, first, the C-chamfered corner of decorative body 1808 is brought into contact with the abutting surface of mounting recess 1827b (misapplication prevention portion 1827d), and then the adhesive surface is gradually brought into contact with the surface of mounting recess 1827b from that point to attach it. Furthermore, if an attempt is made to attach decorative body 1808 upside down, the shape of misapplication prevention portion 1827d differs from the shape of the R-chamfered corner of decorative body 1808, making it clear that decorative body 1808 has been attached in the wrong direction, allowing decorative body 1808 to be attached in the correct orientation. Furthermore, if decorative body 1808 is attached to mounting recess 1827b in the wrong orientation, the corner of decorative body 1808 will protrude from mounting recess 1827b at the location of incorrect attachment prevention section 1827d, making the worker aware that decorative body 1808 has been attached incorrectly.

The first member 1827 is recessed near the edge of the mounting recess 1827b and has a separation groove 1827f extending in the left-right direction (see Figure 212 (b)). When the decorative body 1808 is attached to the mounting recess 1827b, the decorative body 1808 straddles this separation groove 1827f, forming a space between the decorative body 1808 and the separation groove 1827f. When the decorative body 1808 is attached to the mounting recess 1827b and the separation groove 1827f is pressed from the outside, a portion of the decorative body 1808 sinks into the separation groove 1827f and the edge side of the decorative body 1808 is raised from the mounting recess 1827b. The raised portion can be pulled to remove the decorative body 1808 from the mounting recess 1827b.

With the configuration of this embodiment, by passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole 1827c from the other side of the first member 1827 and using the tip of the rod to press the decorative body 1808 from the other side to one side, the decorative body 1808 can be removed by being rolled up near its edge to one side. The worker can then pull on the rolled-up portion to easily remove the decorative body 1808 from the mounting recess 1827b (first member 1827), achieving the same effects as the other configurations described above.

In addition, the mounting recess 1827b of the first member 1827 to which the decorative body 1808 is attached is provided with an anti-misapplication feature 1827d. Therefore, if an attempt is made to attach the decorative body 1808 in an orientation other than the correct orientation, the different shapes of the corners of the decorative body 1808 and the anti-misapplication feature 1827d will alert the user to the incorrect orientation of the decorative body 1808. This allows the decorative body 1808 to be attached to the first member 1827 in the correct orientation and prevents the decorative body 1808 from being shipped with the attachment in the wrong orientation.

Furthermore, by providing the separation hole 1827c at a position far from the axis of rotation and the misapplication prevention portion 1827d at a position close to the axis of rotation, the rotational moment acting when the first member 1827 is rotated can be reduced, thereby reducing the load on the rotational drive of the first member 1827 and allowing the first member 1827 to move (rotate) more easily.

In addition, the first member 1827 has two separation holes 1827c and two misapplication prevention sections 1827d, which balances the forces acting on the left and right shaft sections 1827e, reducing uneven wear on the shaft sections 1827e and allowing the first member 1827 to rotate (pivot) in a stable manner.

In this embodiment, for example, the first member 1827 may be a door member for a variable winning opening such as a large winning opening or a special winning opening, or may be a movable member for effects provided on the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000.

Furthermore, examples of decorative body 1808 include PET seals, Flex Metal Seals (product name), Metaltic Seals (product name), potting seals, aluminum seals, etc.

However, if the first member 1827 is used as a door member for opening and closing the large prize opening 2005 or the special prize opening 2006, etc., the game ball B will come into contact with the decorative body 1808, so it is desirable that the decorative body 1808 and the first member 1827 have the following relationship.

More specifically, as shown in Figure 212 (c), if the distance from the front surface of the flat portion 1827a of the first member 1827 to the front surface of the decorative body 1808 is d, the distance from the upper edge of the mounting recess 1827b of the first member 1827 to the upper edge of the decorative body 1808 is c, and the radius of the game ball B is r, then it is desirable that the distance d be within the range of [0 < d < r], and the distance c be within the range of [0 < c < (2rd^2 - d^2)^0.5]. Note that the above brackets indicate formulas.

This prevents the game ball B from coming into contact with the upper edge of the decorative body 1808, preventing the decorative body 1808 from coming off due to the game ball B coming into contact with it, thereby reducing the occurrence of malfunctions.

It is desirable that distance d be within the range of 0.1 mm to 1 mm. If distance d is any smaller, depending on the tolerance of decorative body 1808, decorative body 1808 may protrude forward beyond flat plate portion 1827a, potentially allowing game ball B to come into contact with the upper edge. If distance d is any larger, the shadow cast by the upper edge of mounting recess 1827b may easily fall on decorative body 1808, potentially reducing the decorative effect of decorative body 1808.

The contact surface of the mounting recess 1827b may also be set to the upper edge. This causes the upper edge of the decorative body 1808 to contact the upper edge of the mounting recess 1827b, preventing the game ball B from contacting the upper edge of the decorative body 1808, achieving the same effect as above.

Next, the embodiment shown in Figures 212 (d) and (e) comprises a decorative body 1809 made of a sheet-like sticker on which a predetermined pattern, text, etc. is printed, and a movable first member 1828 to one side of which the decorative body 1809 is attached. Note that the configuration on the other side of the first member 1828 (including the second member) may have any of the configurations described above. Also, in this embodiment, the identification portion indicating the contact surface of the first member 1828 has been omitted.

The decorative body 1809 is a sticker with a predetermined pattern, text, etc. printed on its surface. This decorative body 1809 has a horizontally long rectangular outer shape, with the two upper corners rounded and the two lower corners provided with rectangular cutouts 1809a. These cutouts 1809a are formed in a shape that corresponds to the misapplication prevention section 1828d of the first member 1828, which will be described later. The difference in shape between the upper and lower corners makes it possible to identify the orientation of the decorative body 1809. The adhesive surface of the decorative body 1809 may be provided at a fixed width along the outer periphery, as in Figure 210(a), or it may be provided over the entire surface.

The first member 1828 comprises a horizontally elongated, rectangular, flat plate portion 1828a, an attachment recess 1828b recessed from one side of the flat plate portion 1828a to a size slightly larger than the decorative body 1809 and deeper (0.4 mm to 1.0 mm) than the thickness of the decorative body 1809, to which the decorative body 1809 is attached, a separation hole 1828c penetrating the flat plate portion 1828a at the attachment recess 1828b, and mis-attachment prevention portions 1828d provided at the two lower corners of the attachment recess 1828b.

The first member 1828 also includes semi-cylindrical shaft support portions 1828e that bulge outward in the left-right direction from the axis at the left and right corners of the lower side of the flat plate portion 1827a, shaft holes 1828f provided on each of the outer left-right end faces of the shaft support portions 1828e, and cylindrical shaft portions 1828g inserted into the shaft holes 1828f. The pair of shaft portions 1828g of the first member 1828 are rotatably supported by a member (not shown). In other words, the first member 1828 is movable and can rotate (pivot) around the axis of the pair of shaft portions 1828g. The shaft portions 1828g of the first member 1828 may be inserted during molding of the flat plate portion 1827a, etc., or may be assembled separately.

The shaft support portion 1828e extends up to the mounting recess 1828b, and a portion of the shaft support portion 1828e forms the misapplication prevention portion 1828d. This shaft support portion 1828e (misapplication prevention portion 1828d) forms the left and right corners of the lower side of the mounting recess 1828b into a rectangular cut-out shape.

The separation holes 1828c are round holes located near the upper corners of the mounting recess 1828b. By locating the two separation holes 1828c far from the axis of the shaft 1828g, the weight of the first member 1828 at the position far from the axis of the shaft 1828g can be reduced. This reduces the rotational moment acting when the first member 1828 is rotated (pivoted), reducing the load on the rotational drive of the first member 1828 and allowing the first member 1828 to move smoothly. Furthermore, by locating the two separation holes 1828c near the upper left and right corners, the force applied to the left and right shafts 1828g can be equalized. By balancing the first member 1828, uneven wear can be reduced.

In this embodiment, the separation hole 1828c has an inner diameter within the range of 2 mm to 6 mm. If the separation hole 1828c were any smaller, the diameter of the rod-shaped separation member (tool) inserted into the separation hole 1828c would be smaller, making it more likely to bend and potentially unable to sufficiently press against the decorative body 1809. If the separation hole 1828c were any larger, the decorative body 1809 would bend at the location of the separation hole 1828c, potentially compromising the appearance of the decorative body 1809.

The misapplication prevention portion 1828d protrudes in a square shape from the lower corner of the mounting recess 1828b by the shaft support portion 1828e, and has a shape that corresponds to the notch 1809a in the lower corner of the decorative body 1809. In this embodiment, the upper edge of the misapplication prevention portion 1828d is set as the contact surface that serves as a reference for attaching the decorative body 1809.

Since misapplication prevention portion 1828d protrudes into mounting recess 1828b, the weight of first member 1828 increases. However, because misapplication prevention portion 1828d is located close to the axis of shaft portion 1828g, the effect of the increased rotational moment caused by misapplication prevention portion 1828d can be reduced as much as possible, and the increase in load on rotational drive of first member 1828 can be suppressed. Furthermore, because misapplication prevention portion 1828d is located at each of the two lower corners of mounting recess 1828b, first member 1828 can be balanced, uneven wear of shaft portion 1828g can be reduced, and first member 1828 can be rotated (pivoted) in a stable manner.

In addition, it is desirable that the distance from the outer periphery of the flat portion 1828a to the mounting recess 1828b of the first member 1828 be 1 mm or more. If the distance is smaller than this, the portion outside the mounting recess 1828b will be more likely to chip when the game ball B collides with another member.

When attaching decorative body 1809 to mounting recess 1828b of first member 1828, first, notch 1809a of decorative body 1809 is brought into contact with the abutting surface of mounting recess 1828b (misapplication prevention portion 1828d), and then the adhesive surface is gradually brought into contact with the surface of mounting recess 1828b from that point to attach it. Note that if an attempt is made to attach decorative body 1809 upside down, the shape of misapplication prevention portion 1828d differs from the shape of the rounded chamfers at the corners of decorative body 1809, making it clear that decorative body 1809 has been attached in the wrong direction, allowing decorative body 1809 to be attached in the correct orientation. Furthermore, if decorative body 1809 is attached to mounting recess 1828b in the wrong orientation, the corner of decorative body 1809 will protrude from mounting recess 1828b at the location of incorrect attachment prevention section 1828d, making the worker aware that decorative body 1809 has been attached incorrectly.

With the configuration of this embodiment, by passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole 1828c from the other side of the first member 1828 and using the tip of the rod to press the decorative body 1809 from the other side to one side, the decorative body 1809 can be removed by being rolled up near its edge to one side. The worker can then pull on the rolled-up portion to easily remove the decorative body 1809 from the mounting recess 1828b (first member 1828), achieving the same effects as the other configurations described above.

In addition, the mounting recess 1828b of the first member 1828 to which the decorative body 1809 is attached is provided with an anti-misapplication feature 1828d. Therefore, if an attempt is made to attach the decorative body 1809 in an orientation other than the correct orientation, the different shapes of the corners of the decorative body 1809 and the anti-misapplication feature 1828d will alert the user to the incorrect orientation of the decorative body 1809. This allows the decorative body 1809 to be attached to the first member 1828 in the correct orientation and prevents the decorative body 1809 from being shipped with the attachment in the wrong orientation.

Furthermore, by providing separation hole 1828c at a position far from the axis of rotation and misapplication prevention portion 1828d at a position close to the axis of rotation, the rotational moment acting when first member 1828 is rotated can be reduced, thereby reducing the load on the rotational drive of first member 1828 and allowing first member 1828 to move (rotate) more easily.

In addition, because the first member 1828 has two separation holes 1828c and two misapplication prevention portions 1828d, the forces acting on the left and right shaft portions 1828g can be balanced, reducing uneven wear on the shaft portions 1828g and allowing the first member 1828 to rotate (pivot) in a stable manner.

In this embodiment, for example, the first member 1828 may be a door member for a variable winning opening such as a large winning opening or a special winning opening, or may be a movable member for effects provided on the front unit 2000 or the back unit 3000.

Examples of decorative body 1809 include PET seals, Flex Metal Seals (product name), Metaltic Seals (product name), potting seals, aluminum seals, etc.

[19. Relationship between the present invention and embodiments]
In this embodiment, decorative body 1804, decorative body 1805, decorative body 1806, decorative body 1807L and decorative body 1807R, decorative body 1808, decorative body 1809, and gate seal 2811 correspond to decorative bodies of the present invention, adhesive surface 1804b in this embodiment corresponds to the adhesive surface of the present invention, first member 1823, first member 1824, first member 1825, left first member 1826L and right first member 1826R, first member 1827, first member 1828, and gate body 2810 in this embodiment correspond to base members of the present invention, and flat plate portion 1823a, flat plate portion 1824a, flat plate portion 1825a, flat plate portion 1826a, flat plate portion 1827a, flat plate portion 1828a, and front plate portion 2810a in this embodiment correspond to flat plate portions of the present invention, respectively.

In addition, mounting recess 1823b, mounting recess 1824b, mounting recess 1825b, mounting recess 1826b, mounting recess 1827b, mounting recess 1828b, and attachment recess 2810b in this embodiment correspond to the mounting recesses of the present invention, separation holes 1823c, separation holes 1827c, separation holes 1828c, and separation holes 2810d in this embodiment correspond to the separation holes of the present invention, and misapplication prevention portion 1823e, misapplication prevention portion 1824c, misapplication prevention portion 1825c, misapplication prevention portion 1826c, misapplication prevention portion 1827d, misapplication prevention portion 1828d, and misapplication prevention portion 2810c in this embodiment correspond to the misapplication prevention portion of the present invention.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the contact surface of first member 1823, the contact surface of first member 1824, the contact surface of first member 1825, the contact surfaces of left decorative body 1807L and right decorative body 1807R, the contact surface of first member 1827, the contact surface of first member 1828, and the contact surface of gate body 2810 correspond to the positioning portion of the present invention.

[20. Characteristic Effects of the Present Embodiment]
Next, the characteristic effects of this embodiment will be explained. Note that from here to paragraph [1835], the decorative body will be described as decorative body 1804, the base member as first member 1823, the flat plate portion as flat plate portion 1823a, the mounting recess as mounting recess 1823b, the separation hole as separation hole 1823c, the misapplication prevention portion as misapplication prevention portion 1823e, and the positioning portion as the contact surface of first member 1823 (misapplication prevention portion 1823e), and other components (members) corresponding to the present invention will not be explained here because they have similar effects.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, a portion of the peripheral wall of the mounting recess 1823b on which the decorative body 1804 is attached serves as the contact surface (mis-attachment prevention portion 1823e) of the first member 1823. Therefore, when attaching the decorative body 1804 to the mounting recess 1823b of the flat portion 1823a of the first member 1823, the decorative body 1804 can be positioned relative to the first member 1823 by abutting two adjacent sides of the decorative body 1804 against the portion of the peripheral wall of the mounting recess 1823b that serves as the contact surface (mis-attachment prevention portion 1823e) of the first member 1823, thereby aligning the position and attaching the decorative body 1804. This facilitates the positioning of the decorative body 1804 and enables the decorative body 1804 to be attached accurately in the correct position. Therefore, the contact surface of the first member 1823 (misapplication prevention portion 1823e) reduces the chance of the decorative body 1804 being applied tilted or misaligned relative to the first member 1823, which prevents the decorative body 1804 and first member 1823 from looking unattractive. This ensures that the decorative effect of the decorative body 1804 is fully realized, improves the appearance of the pachinko machine 1, and prevents a decline in player interest.

In addition, the contact surface of the first member 1823 (misapplication prevention portion 1823e) allows the decorative body 1804 to be accurately affixed in the correct position, making it easier to affix the decorative body 1804 in the correct position, reducing the number of failures in affixing the decorative body 1804 and preventing increases in the costs of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, because the decorative body 1804 has an asymmetrical shape, it is difficult to get the orientation of the decorative body 1804 wrong, and the decorative body 1804 can be attached in the correct orientation to the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823, ensuring that the decorative effect of the decorative body 1804 is fully realized.

In addition, the first member 1823 has an anti-misapplication section 1823e that protrudes from the peripheral wall of the mounting recess 1823b. If the decorative body 1804 is applied in the incorrect orientation, the decorative body 1804 will be rolled up at the area of the anti-misapplication section 1823e. This makes it clear that the decorative body 1804 has been applied in the wrong orientation, and the decorative body 1804 can be reapplied in the correct orientation, ensuring that the decorative effect of the decorative body 1804 is fully realized.

In addition, the attachment recess 1823b of the first member 1823, to which the decorative body 1804 is attached, has a separation hole 1823c that penetrates the flat portion 1823a. Therefore, when a rod-shaped member is inserted into the separation hole 1823c from the back side of the first member 1823 and the tip of the rod presses against the back surface of the decorative body 1804, a portion of the decorative body 1804 will lift from the flat portion 1823a of the first member 1823 toward the front side against the adhesive force of the adhesive surface 1804b. By pulling on this portion of the decorative body 1804, it can be removed from the flat portion 1823a, and the decorative body 1804 can be easily peeled off.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the decorative body 1804, which is decorated with a predetermined pattern, is affixed to the mounting recess 1823b of the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823. This allows the decorative body 1804 to improve the appearance of the first member 1823 and also allows the first member 1823 to support the decorative body 1804. Furthermore, since the mounting recess 1823b to which the decorative body 1804 is affixed is recessed from the surface of the flat plate portion 1823a, when the decorative body 1804 is affixed to the mounting recess 1823b, the area surrounding the mounting recess 1823b on the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823 surrounds the decorative body 1804. This edging makes the decorative body 1804 stand out, making it easier to achieve the decorative effect of the decorative body 1804 and improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, the adhesive surface 1804b of the decorative body 1804, which is attached to the mounting recess 1823b of the flat plate portion 1823a, is provided only in specific areas consisting of a band-shaped portion around the periphery of the decorative body 1804 and a band-shaped portion diagonally crossing the band-shaped portion, and is not provided on the entire back surface, resulting in a weaker attachment strength than conventional decorative body 1804. Therefore, by inserting a rod-shaped member into the separation hole 1823c from the back side of the first member 1823 and pressing the back surface of the decorative body 1804 with its tip, the decorative body 1804 can be removed from the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823 with a relatively small force, despite the adhesive strength of the adhesive surface 1804b. Furthermore, even if the decorative body 1804 itself is weak, the decorative body 1804 can be removed without breaking, improving the ease of removal of the decorative body 1804.

Furthermore, for the reasons described above, if the decorative body 1804 cannot be properly attached to the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823 during the manufacture of the pachinko machine 1, the decorative body 1804 can be easily removed from the flat plate portion 1823a by passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole 1823c from the back side of the first member 1823 and pressing the decorative body 1804 from the back side with the tip of the rod-shaped member, thereby making it easy to re-attach the decorative body 1804. Furthermore, with the first member 1823 removed from the pachinko machine 1, the decorative body 1804 can be easily removed from the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823 by passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole 1823c from the back side of the first member 1823 and pressing the decorative body 1804 from the back side with the tip of the rod-shaped member, thereby making it easy to replace the decorative body 1804 when changing models. Furthermore, as described above, the decorative body 1804 can be easily removed from the flat plate portion 1823a using the separation hole 1823c, making it easier to separate the components of the pachinko machine 1 by material, and reducing the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, because the separation hole 1823c of the first member 1823 is located in a position that does not contact the adhesive surface 1804b of the decorative body 1804, the entire adhesive surface 1804b can be attached to the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823. Therefore, while providing the adhesive surface 1804b only on a portion (specific area) of the decorative body 1804 would result in a lower adhesive strength than before, because the entire adhesive surface 1804b is attached to the flat plate portion 1823a, it is possible to avoid an unnecessary decrease in adhesive strength due to the separation hole 1823c overlapping the adhesive surface 1804b, and the decorative body 1804 can be attached to the flat plate portion 1823a in good condition while maintaining sufficient adhesive strength.

Furthermore, adhesive surface 1804b of decorative body 1804 is provided in a band-shaped portion on the periphery and in a diagonally crossing band-shaped portion (diagonal portion). This allows the band-shaped portion of adhesive surface 1804b to adhere the periphery of decorative body 1804 to flat portion 1823a, preventing the periphery of decorative body 1804 from lifting off flat portion 1823a and making decorative body 1804 less likely to peel from the periphery. Furthermore, the diagonally crossing band-shaped portion of adhesive surface 1804b allows a portion near the center of decorative body 1804 to be adhered to flat portion 1823a. Therefore, even if the difference in shrinkage between first member 1823 and decorative body 1804 increases due to environmental changes such as temperature and humidity, swelling and wrinkling of decorative body 1804 can be reduced, preventing deterioration in the appearance of decorative body 1804. Therefore, the decorative effect of the decoration 1804 can be reliably achieved, and larger decorations 1804 can be attached to the flat plate portion 1823a in good condition, providing a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can strongly attract the attention of players.

Furthermore, because adhesive surface 1804b is provided on the periphery of decorative body 1804, decorative body 1804 and first member 1823 are made translucent. Furthermore, if a light source such as an LED that irradiates light toward decorative body 1804 is provided on the back side of first member 1823, band-shaped adhesive surface 1804b will be located in a position that does not obstruct the light from the light source. This reduces the deterioration of the appearance of the luminous decoration of decorative body 1804 due to light diffusion and attenuation by adhesive surface 1804b. Therefore, decorative body 1804 can be illuminated in good condition, and the light source can be clearly seen through decorative body 1804 and first member 1823, providing a pachinko machine 1 with excellent presentation and display effects.

In addition, because a separation hole 1823c is provided in the mounting recess 1823b of the flat plate portion 1823a of the first member 1823, the separation hole 1823c can be made less visible or hidden from the front by attaching the decorative body 1804 to the mounting recess 1823b. This prevents the separation hole 1823c from spoiling the appearance and makes it more difficult for players to notice the existence of the separation hole 1823c, making it more difficult for players to plot fraudulent acts using the separation hole 1823c.

Furthermore, because the separation hole 1823c is located in a position close to the periphery of the decorative body 1804, when a rod-shaped member is inserted into the separation hole 1823c from the back side of the first member 1823 and the back surface of the decorative body 1804 is pressed, the portion of the decorative body 1804 pressed by the rod-shaped member is close to the periphery of the decorative body 1804, so the edge side tends to lift away from the portion where the rod-shaped member is in contact, making it easier to remove the attached decorative body 1804.

Furthermore, because the separation hole 1823c is located in a portion close to the periphery of the decorative body 1804, when a rod-shaped member is pressed against the decorative body 1804 from the back side of the first member 1823 through the separation hole 1823c, as described above, the edge side of the decorative body 1804 from the portion where the rod-shaped member is in contact will lift up from the flat plate portion 1823a. Therefore, by grasping and pulling the lifted portion of the decorative body 1804, the decorative body 1804 can be easily removed by rolling it up from the flat plate portion 1823a.

Furthermore, the separation holes 1823c are sized to allow a circle with a diameter of 2 mm to 6 mm to contact them. This provides the same effects as above, and in addition, by setting an upper limit on the size of the separation holes 1823c, it is possible to prevent the adhesive surface of the decorative body 1804 from becoming smaller than necessary due to the presence of the separation holes 1823c, thereby maintaining the desired adhesion strength to the flat plate portion 1823a.

Furthermore, as described above, the mounting recess 1823b to which the decorative body 1804 is attached is recessed from the flat plate portion 1823a. Therefore, by using the boundary between the flat plate portion 1823a and the mounting recess 1823b as a guide when attaching the decorative body 1804, it is easier to attach the decorative body 1804 in the correct position, reducing the chance of failure in attaching the decorative body 1804 and preventing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, because the decorative body 1804 is attached to the mounting recess 1823b recessed from the flat plate portion, even if an attempt is made to insert a tool such as a flathead screwdriver between the decorative body 1804 and the bottom surface of the mounting recess 1823b to remove the decorative body 1804 from the front side, the insertion of the tool will be blocked by the wall around the recessed mounting recess 1823b. However, because the separation hole 1823c of the first member 1823 is located in the area covered by the decorative body 1804, the separation hole 1823c is provided in the mounting recess 1823b to which the decorative body 1804 is attached. Therefore, as described above, by inserting a rod-shaped member into the separation hole 1823c from the back side and pressing the decorative body 1804 toward the front side, the decorative body 1804 can be easily removed from the recessed mounting recess 1823b, achieving the same effect as described above.

Furthermore, in conventional technology (pachinko machines), the hole for removing the sticker penetrates all the way to the back of the pachinko machine (game board), making it possible for linear tools such as piano wire to reach the passage for game ball B or signal lines through the hole, posing a problem of making cheating easier. Therefore, it is desirable to provide a second member (see second member 1841, second member 1842, etc. in Figure 209) on the back side of first member 1823 that can close separation hole 1823c. As a result, when assembled into pachinko machine 1, the back side of separation hole 1823c is closed from the outside by the second member, so a hole that penetrates all the way to the other side of the game board, as in conventional pachinko machines, is not penetrated. This prevents linear cheating tools such as piano wire from being inserted into game board 5 through the hole, thereby preventing cheating.

Furthermore, when a second member (see second member 1841, second member 1842, etc. in Figure 209) that closes separation hole 1823c is provided on the back side of first member 1823 as described above, even if an illegal tool is inserted through decoration 1804 from the front side and into separation hole 1823c, the tip of the illegal tool will abut against the second member, blocking its insertion (intrusion) into the outside of the second member (into the gaming board 5). This prevents the illegal tool from entering the gaming board 5 from the front side through separation hole 1823c and prevents illegal acts from being committed. In addition, because the illegal tool penetrates decoration 1804 and leaves a mark on decoration 1804, it discourages people from committing illegal acts, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against illegal acts.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, if a game ball B released from the game board 5 becomes jammed in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 of the base unit 710 provided in the base unit 700 below the game board 5 in the main frame 4, the security cover 714 closing the release port 711b of the front base 711 can be opened, and a rod-shaped tool such as a flathead screwdriver can be inserted through the upper notch 713q of the release port 711b among the multiple cutouts 713q to poke the jammed game ball B, breaking up the game ball B and easily clearing the jam. Then, by closing the release port 711b with the security cover 714, the security cover 714 can prevent linear illegal tools such as piano wire from being inserted into the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702 through the release port 711b and the cutout 713q. If a fraudulent tool is inserted into the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702 through the cutout 713q or the exit of the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702, even if the tip of the fraudulent tool is moved while contacting the inner surface of the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702 in order to extend from the entrance of the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702 (the ball receiving opening 711a of the front base 711) to the game board 5, if the tip of the fraudulent tool comes into contact with one of the multiple blocking ribs 713o extending downward from the ceiling of the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702, the blocking rib 713o will block the movement of the fraudulent tool. In this way, the security cover 714 and the multiple blocking ribs 713o can prevent fraudulent acts on the game board 5 via the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 that is highly deterrent to fraudulent acts.

Furthermore, because the base unit 710 is made transparent, when a game ball B becomes clogged in the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702, the location of the clog can be easily identified simply by looking from the outside, making it easier to resolve the clog and reducing the maintenance burden on the game hall.

In addition, since the base unit 710 has an ejection passage for ejecting game balls B that is composed of independent first ball paths 701 and second ball paths 702, when many game balls B are released from the game board 5 in a short period of time, these game balls B can be distributed and ejected to each of the first ball paths 701 and second ball paths 702. This reduces the concentration of many game balls B in one first ball path 701 or second ball path 702, preventing ball jams that can occur due to the concentration of game balls B, and allows many game balls B released from the game board 5 to be quickly ejected to the island equipment side of the game hall (out receiving section, bucket, etc.).

In addition, since the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704 can detect game balls B circulating on the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, the number of game balls B discharged from the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 can be counted.By comparing this with the number of game balls B counted on the upstream game board 5, it is possible to determine whether or not there has been any fraudulent activity on the game board 5 or the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, and a pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrent effect against fraudulent activity can be provided.

In addition, since the discharge passage is formed by the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 which are independent in the front-to-back direction, on the game board 5, the game ball B (safe ball) that is accepted into the winning port that awards a bonus and the game ball B (out ball) that is not accepted into the winning port are released to positions that are different in the front-to-back direction, so that the game ball B that is accepted into the winning port and the game ball B that is not accepted into the winning port can be discharged by circulating through the different first ball path 701 and second ball path 702. Furthermore, since the first ball sensor 703 and second ball sensor 704 are provided, which can detect each game ball B circulating on the first ball path 701 and second ball path 702, respectively, it is possible to count, outside the game board 5, the number of game balls B (safe balls) that have been received by the winning openings and the number of game balls B (out balls) that have not been received by the winning openings. By comparing this with the number of game balls B (safe balls) counted on the game board 5, it is possible to determine whether or not there has been any fraudulent activity against the winning openings on the game board 5, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against fraudulent activity and can reduce the burden on the gaming hall.

Furthermore, the first ball sensor 703 and second ball sensor 704 provided on the base unit 710 (ball path member 713) can count the number of game balls B released from the game board 5, eliminating the need to provide sensors or electronic circuits on the game board 5 to count the number of game balls B released (discharged) to the outside, thereby reducing the cost of the game board 5.

In addition, the security cover 714, which opens and closes the release port 711b, is attached to the front base 711 so that it can rotate on a hinge. Therefore, even when the security cover 714 opens the release port 711b, the security cover 714 remains attached to the front base 711 via the hinge axis of the hinge rotation. Therefore, even when the security cover 714 is opened to release game balls B jammed in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, the security cover 714 remains attached to the front base 711, making it less likely to be lost.

In addition, the security cover 714 is attached to the underside of the base unit 710, and the security cover 714 is attached to the front base 711 so that it can rotate on a hinge.The hinge axis of the security cover 714 is arranged to extend to the left and right (horizontally) at the front end of the security cover 714.Therefore, when clearing a jam of game balls B in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, the main frame 4 is opened forward relative to the outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall, and then the security cover 714 is opened and a specified tool is inserted into the clearance opening 711b to clear the jammed balls. After that, the security cover 714 is closed and the main frame 4 is closed against the outer frame 2. If the security cover 714 is open at this time, the tip of the security cover 714 will come into contact with the outer frame 2 (a potential contact hazard) and the main frame 4 will not be able to be closed. This alerts the user that the security cover 714 has been left closed, and the security cover 714 can be closed to ensure the release opening 711b is closed. Furthermore, even if the security cover 714 is left open for some reason while the main frame 4 is being closed against the outer frame 2, when the main frame 4 is opened, the security cover 714 will come into contact with the outer frame 2, causing the security cover 714 to rotate in the closing direction. This prevents the main frame 4 from becoming stuck, allowing the main frame 4 to be opened smoothly and preventing damage to the security cover 714 and other components.

Furthermore, since the ball path member 713 forming the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702 has multiple notches 713q, debris that has entered the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702, or debris attached to the game ball B, can be discharged downward through the notches 713q to the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702. By reducing the amount of debris in the first ball path 701 and the second ball path 702, the occurrence of game ball B clogging due to debris can be reduced, and the maintenance burden on the amusement hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be reduced.

In addition, some of the multiple cutouts 713q also serve as tool insertion ports for inserting a tool to unclog balls, eliminating the need for a separate tool insertion port. This simplifies the configuration of the pachinko machine 1, suppresses cost increases, and provides the same operational effects as those described above.

In addition, the base unit 710 is designed to prevent debris that falls through the cutout 713q from hitting the first ball sensor 703 or the second ball sensor 704, thereby preventing malfunctions in the first ball sensor 703 or the second ball sensor 704 due to debris adhering thereto, and enabling reliable detection of the game ball B circulating along the first ball path 701 or the second ball path 702.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the flat plate portion of the first member (front surface of the front component 1000, flat plate portion 1821, front component 2531, gate body 2810, first component 1821, first component 1822, etc.) and the second member (game panel 1100, center base plate 2540, gate sensor 2801, second component 1841, second component 1842, etc.) that forms the passage portion (game area 5a, lower right guide passage 2530, gate 2003, etc.) through which the game ball B flows on the game board 5 are formed. Decorative bodies (spec sticker 1020, lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532, gate sticker 2811, decorative body 1801, decorative body 1802, decorative body 1803, etc.) with predetermined decorations are attached to the attachment portions (spec sticker attachment portion 1021, attachment recess 2531a, attachment recess 2810b, mounting recess 1821b, mounting recess 1822b, etc.) of the first member 2531, flat plate portion 1822a, the front surface of the front member 2531, front plate portion 2810a, etc., so that the decoration of the decorative bodies can improve the appearance of the first member. Furthermore, because the attachment portion where the decorative body is attached is recessed from one side of the flat plate portion, when the decorative body is attached to the attachment portion, the area around the attachment portion on the flat plate portion of the first member surrounds the decorative body, framing it and making the decorative body stand out, making it easier to achieve the decorative effect of the decorative body and improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the attachment portions (spec sticker attachment portion 1021, attachment recess 2531a, attachment recess 2810b, mounting recess 1821b, mounting recess 1822b, etc.) where the decorative bodies (spec sticker 1020, lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532, gate sticker 2811, decorative body 1801, decorative body 1802, decorative body 1803, etc.) are attached are recessed from the flat plate portion (front surface of front component 1000, flat plate portion 1821a, flat plate portion 1822a, front surface of front member 2531, front plate portion 2810a, etc.). Therefore, by using the boundary between the flat plate portion and the attachment portion as a guide to attach the decorative bodies, it is easier to attach the decorative bodies in the correct position, reducing the number of decorative body attachment failures and suppressing increases in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

In this pachinko machine 1, the flat plate portion (front surface of the front component 1000, flat plate portion 1821a, flat plate portion 1822a, front surface of the front component 2531, front plate portion 2810a, etc.) of the first component (front component 1000, front component 2531, gate main body 2810, first component 1821, first component 1822, etc.) has a recessed attachment portion (spec sticker attachment portion 1021, attachment recess 2531a, attachment recess 2810b, mounting recess 1821b, mounting recess 2810b, etc.). Since decorative objects (spec seal 1020, lower right guide passage decorative seal 2532, gate seal 2811, decorative object 1801, decorative object 1802, decorative object 1803, etc.) are attached to recess 1822b, etc., even if an attempt is made to insert a tool such as a flathead screwdriver between the decorative object and the attachment portion to remove the decorative object from one side, the insertion of the tool is prevented by the wall portion around the recessed attachment portion. In contrast, the separation holes (separation holes 1023, 1821d, 1822c, 2531b, 2810d, etc.) in the first member are located in areas that are closed on one side by the decorative object, and therefore separation holes are provided in the attachment portion where the decorative object is attached. Therefore, by inserting a rod-shaped member into the separation hole from the other side and pressing the decorative object toward one side, the attachment of the decorative object to the attachment portion can be easily released, and the decorative object can be easily removed from the recessed attachment portion. Therefore, if the ornament fails to be properly attached to the flat portion of the first member during the manufacture of the pachinko machine 1, the ornament can be easily released from the flat portion by passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole from the other side of the first member and pressing the ornament from the other side with its tip. This allows the ornament to be easily removed from the flat portion of the first member and reattached. Furthermore, with the first and second members separated, passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole from the other side of the first member and pressing the ornament from the other side with its tip allows the ornament to be easily released from the flat portion of the first member. This allows the ornament to be easily removed from the flat portion, facilitating the replacement of the ornament when upgrading models. Furthermore, as described above, with the first and second members separated, the ornament can be easily removed from the flat portion using the separation hole. This facilitates the separation of the components of the pachinko machine 1 by material, thereby reducing the cost of disposing of pachinko machines 1.

In addition, separation holes (separation holes 1023, 1821d, 1822c, 2531b, 2810d, etc.) are provided in the flat plate portions (front surface of front component 1000, flat plate portion 1821a, flat plate portion 1822a, front surface of front component 2531, front plate portion 2810a, etc.) of the first component (front component 1000, front component 2531, gate body 2810, first component 1821, first component 1822, etc.), so that decorative bodies (spacing By attaching decorative stickers (such as door sticker 1020, lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532, gate sticker 2811, decorative body 1801, decorative body 1802, decorative body 1803, etc.), the separation holes can be made less visible or hidden from one side, preventing them from spoiling the appearance and making it more difficult for players to notice the presence of the separation holes, making it more difficult for them to plot fraudulent acts through the separation holes.

When assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the extension portion (insertion pin 1022, boss portion 1821c, rib 1822d, etc.) is attached to the second member (gaming panel 1100, second member 184) from the other side of the flat portion (front surface of previous component 1000, flat portion 1821a, flat portion 1822a, etc.) of the first member (previous component 1000, first member 1821, first member 1822, etc.) to which the decorative body (spec sticker 1020, decorative body 1801, decorative body 1802, decorative body 1803, etc.) is attached, surrounding the separation hole (separation hole 1023, separation hole 1821d, separation hole 1822c, etc.). 1, second member 1842, etc.), and the second member is attached to the other side of the first member, and the other side of the separation hole is closed off from the outside by the extension and one surface of the second member, which prevents illegal tools from being inserted into the separation hole from outside the extension or the other side of the second member, and since there is no hole that passes through to the other side like in conventional pachinko machines, it is possible to prevent linear illegal tools such as piano wire from being inserted into the pachinko machine 1 through this hole, and fraudulent acts can be prevented.

In addition, since the second member (game panel 1100, second member 1841, second member 1842, etc.) makes the other side of the separation hole (separation hole 1023, separation hole 1821d, separation hole 1822c, etc.) a closed space, even if an illegal tool is inserted from one side through the decorative body (spec seal 1020, decorative body 1801, decorative body 1802, decorative body 1803, etc.) and into the separation hole, the tip of the illegal tool will be inserted into a closed space that is isolated from the outside, and the extension (insertion) of the first member (previous component member 1000, first member 1821, first member 1822, etc.) The through pin 1022, boss portion 1821c, rib 1822d, etc.) and second member can block insertion (intrusion) into the passageway (play area 5a, etc.) or into the pachinko machine 1, preventing the intrusion of illegal tools into the pachinko machine 1 from one side through the separation hole and preventing illegal acts from being committed via the separation hole or passageway, and because illegal tools pierce the decorative body and leave traces on the decorative body, this discourages people from committing illegal acts, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that has a high deterrent effect against illegal acts.

Furthermore, by inserting the positioning protrusion 1841b of the second member 1841 into the separation hole 1821d from the other side of the first member 1821, the first member 1821 and the second member 1841 can be positioned relative to each other, thereby simplifying the assembly process and suppressing increases in the costs of the pachinko machine 1. Furthermore, by inserting the positioning protrusion 1841b into the separation hole 1821d to position the first member 1821 and the second member 1841 relative to each other, the other side of the separation hole 1821d can be closed by the positioning protrusion 1841b, so the separation hole 1821d itself can be made into the closed space described above, making it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that achieves the same effects as those described above.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, decorative bodies (spec sticker 1020, lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532, gate sticker 2811, etc.) with predetermined decorations are attached to the decorated parts (spec sticker attachment part 1021, attachment recess 2531a, attachment recess 2810b, etc.) that form the front surface of the front members (front component member 1000, front member 2531 of center gimmick 2500, gate body 2810 of gate member 2800, etc.) that are provided in front of the passage members (game panel 1100, center base plate 2540, gate sensor 2801, etc.) that have passage sections through which game balls B flow (game area 5a, lower right guide passage 2530, and detection hole of gate sensor 2801, etc.), and therefore the appearance of the passage members can be improved by the decoration of the decorative bodies. Furthermore, because the part to be decorated to which the decorative body is attached is recessed further back than the front-to-back depth of the decorative body, when the decorative body is attached to the part to be decorated, the part of the front member surrounding the part to be decorated protrudes forward beyond the front surface of the decorative body, and the decorative body is highlighted by being framed by the forward-protruding part of the front member, making it easier to achieve the decorative effect of the decorative body and improving the appearance of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the decorated parts (spec sticker attachment part 1021, attachment recess 2531a, attachment recess 2810b, etc.) to which the decorative bodies (spec sticker 1020, lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532, gate sticker 2811, etc.) are attached are recessed rearward. Therefore, by using the protruding periphery of the decorated part on the front member (front component member 1000, front member 2531 of center role device 2500, gate body 2810 of gate member 2800, etc.) as a guide to attach the decorative bodies, it is easier to attach the decorative bodies in the correct position, reducing the number of failures in attaching the decorative bodies and suppressing increases in the costs of the pachinko machine 1.

In this pachinko machine 1, the decorated parts (spec sticker attachment part 1021, attachment recess 2531a, attachment recess 2810b, etc.) of the front parts (front component part 1000, front part 2531 of center role 2500, gate body 2810 of gate part 2800, etc.) are recessed rearward. Therefore, when a decorative body (spec sticker 1020, lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532, gate sticker 2811, etc.) is attached to the decorated part, the contact surface between the decorative body and the decorated part is in a recessed position, so even if you try to remove the decorative body attached to the decorated part, it is difficult to hook the decorative body from the front, and removal is time-consuming. In contrast, because separation holes (separation holes 1023, 2531b, 2810d, etc.) are provided in the decorated portion, the decorative body can be easily released from the decorated portion by passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole from the rear of the front member and pressing the decorative body forward, making it easy to remove the decorative body from the decorated portion. Therefore, if the decorative body cannot be properly attached to the decorated portion of the front member during manufacturing, the decorative body can be easily released from the decorated portion by passing a rod-shaped member through the separation hole from the rear of the front member and pressing the decorative body from behind with the tip of the rod-shaped member, making it easy to remove the decorative body from the decorated portion and reattach it.

In addition, with the front member (front component member 1000, front member 2531 of center gimmick 2500, gate body 2810 of gate member 2800, etc.) and the passage member (game panel 1100, center base plate 2540, gate sensor 2801, etc.) separated, a rod-shaped member can be passed through the separation hole (separation hole 1023, separation hole 2531b, separation hole 2810d, etc.) from the rear of the front member, and the tip of the rod can be used to press the decorative body (spec sticker 1020, lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532, gate seal 2811, etc.) from behind, thereby easily releasing the attachment to the decorated part (spec sticker attachment part 1021, attachment recess 2531a, attachment recess 2810b, etc.), allowing the decorative body to be easily removed from the decorated part, facilitating the work of replacing the decorative body when changing models. Furthermore, as mentioned above, when the front member and the passage member are separated, the decoration can be easily removed from the decorated part using the separation hole, making it easier to separate the components of the pachinko machine 1 by material, and reducing the cost of disposing of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, because separation holes (separation holes 1023, 2531b, 2810d, etc.) are provided in the decorated parts (spec sticker attachment part 1021, attachment recess 2531a, attachment recess 2810b, etc.), the separation holes can be made less visible or hidden from the front by attaching decorative objects (spec sticker 1020, lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532, gate sticker 2811, etc.) to the decorated parts. This prevents the separation holes from spoiling the appearance and makes it more difficult for players to notice the presence of the separation holes, making it more difficult for them to plot fraudulent acts through the separation holes.

When assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the separation holes (separation holes 1023, 2531b, 2810d, etc.) are closed from the rear by the passage members (game panel 1100, center base plate 2540, gate sensor 2801, etc.) attached to the rear of the front members (front component member 1000, front member 2531 of center role device 2500, gate body 2810 of gate member 2800, etc.) to which the decorative elements (spec sticker 1020, lower right guide passage decorative sticker 2532, gate seal 2811, etc.) are attached. Since there are no holes that extend all the way to the rear as in conventional pachinko machines, it is possible to prevent linear illegal tools such as piano wire from being inserted into the pachinko machine 1 through these holes, thereby preventing illegal acts.

In addition, because the separation holes (separation holes 1023, 2531b, 2810d, etc.) are closed from the rear by the passage members (gaming panel 1100, center base plate 2540, gate sensor 2801, etc.), even if an illegal tool is inserted from the front through the decoration (spec seal 1020, lower right guide passage decoration seal 2532, gate seal 2811, etc.) and into the separation hole, the passage members prevent it from being inserted further rearward (intrusion). This prevents the illegal tool from entering the passage from the front through the separation hole into the passage section (gaming area 5a, lower right guide passage 2530, and detection hole (gate 2003) of gate sensor 2801, etc.), preventing illegal acts. Furthermore, because the illegal tool pierces the decoration and leaves a mark on it, players hesitate to commit illegal acts, providing a pachinko machine 1 with a high deterrent against illegal acts.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in the back unit 3000 on the game board 5, the back front performance unit 3100 is provided with the light guide plate 3110 and the light guide plate lower left decorative board 3174 and the light guide plate lower right decorative board 3175, which are mounted with LEDs 3176 for illuminating and displaying the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110, and the back front lower middle decorative board 3168, back front lower left inner decorative board 3169, back front lower left outer decorative board 3170, back front lower right inner decorative board 3171, back front lower right outer decorative board 3172, etc., mounted in the back front lower performance unit 3160. The back front lower middle decorative body 3161, back front lower left inner decorative body 3163, back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, back front lower right outer decorative body 3166, etc. are provided, which can be illuminated and decorated with LEDs, and by providing LEDs 3176 (light guide plate lower left decorative board 3174 and light guide plate lower right decorative board 3175) behind the back front lower middle decorative body 3161, etc., the LEDs 3176 can be made invisible (hidden) from the player by the back front lower middle decorative body 3161, etc., making it difficult for players to notice the presence of the LEDs 3176, i.e., the light guide plate 3110. In this state, when the second pattern 3112 on the light guide plate 3110 is illuminated by the LED 3176 and the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 etc. is illuminated and decorated by the light emitted by the LED mounted on the back front lower middle decorative board 3168 etc., the light from the LED 3176 is reflected forward by the light guide plate 3110, while the light from the LED on the back front lower middle decorative board 3168 etc. is light that is irradiated directly forward, the illuminated back front lower middle decorative body 3161 etc. can be made to shine brighter than the second pattern 3112 on the light guide plate 3110, and the player's attention can be strongly drawn to the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 etc. Furthermore, because the illuminated second pattern 3112 on the light guide plate 3110 extends upward from a predetermined position (slightly above) close to the illuminated decorative back, front, lower, and middle ornaments 3161, etc., the player is strongly misled into thinking that the second pattern 3112 on the light guide plate 3110 is illuminated using the light from the illuminated decorative back, front, lower, and middle ornaments 3161, etc. as a light source. This allows the player to see an illuminated effect using the light guide plate 3110 that has never been seen in pachinko machines before, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, by providing the left decorative board 3174 and right decorative board 3175 below the light guide plate, as well as the back front lower middle decorative body 3161, etc., in front of the light guide plate 3110, light from the LEDs mounted on the left decorative board 3174 and right decorative board 3175 below the light guide plate illuminates the light guide plate 3110, preventing the transparent light guide plate 3110 from being seen by the player. This allows the dramatic effect of the luminous display of the second pattern 3112, etc. on the light guide plate 3110 to be fully realized, and makes it possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can reliably achieve the above-mentioned effects.

In addition, since translucent back-front-lower-middle decorative bodies 3161 and the like are provided in front of the light guide plate lower-left decorative board 3174 and the light guide plate lower-right decorative board 3175, when the LEDs mounted on the light guide plate lower-left decorative board 3174 and the light guide plate lower-right decorative board 3175 are illuminated, the back-front-lower-middle decorative bodies 3161 and the like can be illuminated and decorated.As a result, in addition to the effects produced by the illuminated display of the second pattern 3112 and the like on the light guide plate 3110, players can also see effects produced by the illuminated decoration of the back-front-lower-middle decorative bodies 3161 and the like.This diverse presentation makes it less likely for players to become bored and helps prevent a decline in interest.

Furthermore, when the second pattern 3112 on the light guide plate 3110 is illuminated and the LEDs mounted on the left decorative board 3174 and the right decorative board 3175 below the light guide plate are illuminated, as described above, the LEDs mounted on the left decorative board 3174 and the right decorative board 3175 below the light guide plate will cause the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 etc. to shine brightly, thereby attracting the player's attention to the illuminated back front lower middle decorative body 3161 etc., and the second pattern 3112 on the light guide plate 3110 extending upward from a predetermined position above close to the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 will direct the player's attention from the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 etc. via the second pattern 3112 on the light guide plate 3110 to the upward end to which the second pattern 3112 extends. Therefore, at the upper end of the extension of the second pattern 3112, there is provided a part of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, and the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 that rises and falls on the rear upper effect unit 3200, etc., so it is possible to create excitement and thrills depending on whether or not further effects (effects using effect images, movable effects, etc.) will be executed at the end of the extension of the second pattern 3112 of the light guide plate 3110, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, the second pattern 3112 on the light guide plate 3110 is composed of multiple line groups 3114, each consisting of five lines 3113 extending upward from a predetermined position, and each line 3113 can be illuminated independently. LEDs 3176 (first LED 3176a to fifth LED 3176e) are provided to correspond to each line 3113. Therefore, by illuminating the first LED 3176a to fifth LED 3176e of the LED group 3177 in sequence, the illuminated lines 3113 change, creating a pseudo-animation effect. Furthermore, because the back, front, lower, and middle decorative elements 3161 and the like are located below and close to the bottom ends (predetermined positions) of the multiple lines 3113, the second pattern 3112 on the light guide plate 3110 can be made to appear to move using the light from the illuminated back, front, lower, and middle decorative elements 3161 and the like as a light source, making a strong impact on the player and making them think that something good is about to happen, increasing anticipation for the game and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the result of the special lottery (special lottery result) is drawn by the establishment of the start conditions by receiving a game ball B into the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the special pattern is displayed in a variable manner in the function display unit 1400A or the function display unit 1400B by lighting up or flashing the multiple LEDs 1401 on the function display board 1402 and the left LED 1411a and right LED 1411b on the function display board 1411, and then a special pattern suggesting the special lottery result is displayed by a combination of lighting up and extinguishing the multiple LEDs 1401, left LED 1411a and right LED 1411b. At this time, the light from the plurality of LEDs 1401, left LED 1411a and right LED 1411b is radiated forward independently from the plurality of display holes 1405a in front of the reflector 1405 and the plurality of display holes 1414a in front of the reflector 1414 so that a portion of the light is radiated only to one eye of the player, and at least a portion of the remaining light is radiated only to the other eye of the player. Because the light from the LED 1411a and right LED 1411b can be seen, it is possible to clearly see whether the multiple LEDs 1401, left LED 1411a, and right LED 1411b are on or off, and the special patterns displayed by the multiple LEDs 1401, left LED 1411a, and right LED 1411b can be clearly seen, allowing the display function of the multiple LEDs 1401, left LED 1411a, and right LED 1411b to be performed without any impairment.

When the multiple LEDs 1401, left LED 1411a, and right LED 1411b (functional display unit 1400A and functional display unit 1400B) are photographed with a digital camera or cell phone camera, as described above, the light from all of the LEDs 1401, left LED 1411a, and right LED 1411b is visible when viewed with both eyes of the player. Therefore, a monocular camera can only photograph one of the eyes, making it difficult to accurately photograph the light-emitting status of all of the LEDs 1401, left LED 1411a, and right LED 1411b. Therefore, because it is not possible to accurately photograph the light-emitting status of the multiple LEDs 1401, left LED 1411a, and right LED 1411b, it becomes difficult to easily determine whether a special symbol that will create an advantageous game state (e.g., a "jackpot" game) is being displayed, allowing the player to enjoy the presentation suggesting the result of the special lottery until the end, preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, in the functional display unit 1400A, some of the multiple display holes 1405a on the front of the reflector 1405 are tilted in the front-to-back direction toward the position of one of the player's eyes, while the remaining holes are tilted in the front-to-back direction toward the position of the player's other eye and are oriented straight in the front-to-back direction. This provides the same effect as above, and in addition, the tilt of the display holes 1405a makes it difficult for players other than those seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to clearly see the light from all of the LEDs 1401. This makes it difficult for other players to grasp the game situation, reduces the chance of other players peeking in, and allows players to enjoy the game without worrying about other players.

Furthermore, in the functional display unit 1400B, the multiple left-hand LEDs 1411a and multiple right-hand LEDs 1411b mounted on the functional display board 1411 are spaced a predetermined distance (40 mm to 80 mm) left and right, and a front reflector 1414 with multiple display holes 1414a is provided in front of them. This not only achieves the same effects as above, but also makes it easier to remove the multiple display holes 1414a when molding them, as each display hole 1414a faces straight forward and backward, thereby minimizing the increase in costs associated with the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, in the functional display unit 1400C, the light from the multiple LEDs 1421a mounted on the functional display board 1421 is visible to the player through the transparent light guide plate 1423, allowing the player to clearly see the special symbols displayed by the multiple LEDs 1421a. When invisible light is emitted from the invisible light LED 1424a onto the side of the light guide plate 1423, the invisible light incident from the side is emitted from the light guide plate 1423 forward toward the player. However, since the player cannot see the invisible light emitted from the light guide plate 1423, the special symbols displayed by the multiple LEDs 1421a can be clearly seen through the light guide plate 1423, allowing the display function of the multiple LEDs 1421a to be fully demonstrated. Furthermore, when an image is taken from the front with a digital camera or the like while the invisible light LED 1424a is emitting light, depending on the model of the digital camera, the invisible light emitted forward from the light guide plate 1423 will be captured. This makes the light guide plate 1423 appear bright, making it difficult to capture the light from the multiple LEDs 1421a located at the rear, and making it difficult to determine the light emission status of the multiple LEDs 1421a, thereby reliably realizing a pachinko machine 1 that achieves the above-mentioned effects.

Furthermore, in the functional display unit 1400, the main control board 1310 may be configured to flash multiple LEDs at a speed that allows the player to recognize that a special symbol is lit. As a result, even if the main control board 1310 causes the multiple LEDs of the functional display unit 1400 to flash at a predetermined speed, they will appear to the player as lit, making the display of the special symbol by the multiple LEDs clearly visible and fully utilizing the display function of the multiple LEDs. Furthermore, when LEDs flashing at a predetermined speed by the main control board 1310 are photographed with a digital camera, depending on the shutter speed, the LEDs may appear to be off even though they are lit. Therefore, even when multiple LEDs that appear to be in the same state (condition) are photographed, the LEDs may appear lit or off depending on the timing of the shutter release, making it difficult to distinguish the illumination status of the multiple LEDs, thereby reliably realizing the pachinko machine 1 that achieves the above-mentioned effects. The predetermined blinking rate for the LEDs set by the main control board 1310 is preferably within the range of 30 Hz to 100 Hz. If the blinking rate is slower than this, the LEDs will not appear to be lit and will appear to be blinking as if the special pattern is fluctuating. If the blinking rate is faster than this, the LEDs will appear lit when photographed.

Also, a high-brightness LED that can project light forward with a higher brightness than the LED of the function display unit 1400, etc., may be provided near the function display unit 1400, etc. In this way, when the high-brightness LED provided near the function display unit 1400, etc. is illuminated, the high-brightness light from the LED may be perceived as dazzling. However, since the dynamic range of brightness perception for players (humans) is wide, the light from the LED of the function display unit 1400, etc. can still be seen despite the dazzling light, allowing the player to recognize the special symbols displayed on the function display unit 1400, etc., and allowing the display function of the function display unit 1400, etc. to be fully utilized. Furthermore, when the high-brightness LED is illuminated and the digital camera, etc., has a narrower dynamic range for brightness than humans, halation occurs due to the light from the high-brightness LED, causing the area around the LED to be blown out, thereby obscuring part of the function display unit 1400, etc. Therefore, the lighting status of multiple LEDs in the function display unit 1400, etc. can be made unclear, and a pachinko machine 1 with the same effects as those described above can be realized.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, on the game board 5A, the respective decorative parts (back front left logo decorative part 3121, back front left upper logo decorative part 3122, and back front left sub decorative part 3123) of the multiple decorative parts (back front left first decorative part 3124, back front left second decorative part 3125, back front left third decorative part 3126, and back front left decorative part base 3127) of the back front left decorative unit 3120 of the back front performance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 are illuminated by light-emitting means (LEDs mounted on the back front left decorative board 3128, etc.). In its normal, undecorated state, the translucent, opaque white panel 1110A located in front of the back front left decorative unit 3120 makes the back front left upper logo decoration 3122 and other parts of the back front left decorative unit 3120 invisible and difficult to recognize, making it difficult for players to notice the presence of the back front left upper logo decoration 3122 and other parts, and the white color makes the panel 1110A of the gaming panel 1100 appear bright, making the pachinko machine 1 stand out.

Then, as the game progresses, the multiple LEDs of the back front left decorative unit 3120 are used to appropriately illuminate each of the back front upper left logo decorations 3122, etc., and the light from the illuminated decorated back front upper left logo decorations 3122, etc. is irradiated forward through the translucent panel board 1110A, causing the illuminated decorations of the back front upper left logo decorations 3122, etc. to be reflected on the white panel board 1110A, allowing the player to see the illuminated decorations of the back front upper left logo decorations 3122, etc. through the panel board 1110A, allowing the player to enjoy the illuminated decorations of the back front upper left logo decorations 3122, etc., and preventing a decline in interest. Furthermore, by illuminating the logo decoration 3122 and other elements of the back front left decorative unit 3120, the player can be made aware of the presence of the logo decoration 3122 and other elements, the presence of which the player would not have been able to foresee, which can greatly surprise the player and make the player feel strongly that their chance has arrived. In addition, the player can be shown a highly effective illuminated effect, which can entertain the player and prevent a decline in interest.

In addition, since the translucent opaque panel board 1110A is white in color, the decorative parts (first front left logo decorative part 3124c, first back left logo decorative part 3124d, first upper left logo decorative part 3124e, first left sub-decorative part 3124f, second back left logo decorative part 3125d, second upper left logo decorative part 3125e, second upper left logo decorative part 3125f, second upper left logo decorative part 3125d, The luminous colors of the luminous decorations in the decorative portion 3125e, second left sub-decorative portion 3125f, third back left logo decorative portion 3126d, third upper left logo decorative portion 3126e, third left sub-decorative portion 3126f, and base upper left logo decorative portion 3127d can be shown to the player in their original colors through the panel board 1110A, allowing the player to see luminous effects in a variety of colors, and the diverse luminous effects make it less likely that the player will tire of them, preventing a decline in the player's interest.

In addition, multiple decorative bodies (back front left first decorative body 3124, back front left second decorative body 3124a, back front left second decorative body 3124b) are provided with decorative parts of mutually related shapes ("first front left logo decorative body 3124c, first back left logo decorative body 3124d, second back left logo decorative body 3125d, third back left logo decorative body 3126d", "first upper left logo decorative body 3124e, second upper left logo decorative body 3125e, third upper left logo decorative body 3126e, base upper left logo decorative body 3127d", "first left sub-decorative body 3124f, second left sub-decorative body 3125f, third left sub-decorative body 3126f"). The decorative parts (main body 3125, rear front left third decorative body 3126, and rear front left decorative body base 3127) are stacked in the front-to-back direction, and each decorative part can be illuminated independently using the light-emitting means (LEDs on the rear front left decorative board 3128, rear front left upper decorative board 3129, and rear front left lower decorative board 3130). As the positions of each decorative part in the front-to-back direction are different, when each decorative part is illuminated, the player can see a lighting effect with a sense of depth, which entertains the player and prevents a decline in interest.

In addition, each of the multiple decorative bodies (first back front left decorative body 3124, second back front left decorative body 3125, third back front left decorative body 3126, and back front left decorative body base 3127) has decorative parts associated with each other (first front left logo decorative body 3124c, first back left logo decorative body 3124d, second back left logo decorative body 3125d, third back left logo decorative body 3126d, first upper left logo decorative body 3124e, second upper left logo decorative body 3125e, third upper left logo decorative body 3126e, base upper left logo decorative body 3127d, first left sub-decorative body 3124f, Because the decorative parts are provided with a left sub-decorative part 3125f, a third left sub-decorative part 3126f), the decorative parts can be illuminated in an appropriate order using light-emitting means (LEDs on the back front left decorative board 3128, the back front upper left decorative board 3129, and the back front lower left decorative board 3130), allowing the player to see a dynamic light-emitting effect, which not only strongly attracts the player's attention but also makes the player think that something good is about to happen, increasing the player's anticipation for the game and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, the decorative parts ("first front left logo decorative part 3124c, first back left logo decorative part 3124d, second back left logo decorative part 3125d, third back left logo decorative part 3126d," "first upper left logo decorative part 3124e, second upper left logo decorative part 3125e, third upper left logo decorative part 3126e, base upper left logo decorative part 3127") provided on each of the multiple decorative parts (first back front left decorative part 3124, second back front left decorative part 3125, third back front left decorative part 3126, and back front left decorative part base 3127) d," "first left sub-decorative portion 3124f," "second left sub-decorative portion 3125f," and "third left sub-decorative portion 3126f" can each be illuminated independently using light-emitting means (LEDs on the back front left decorative board 3128, back front upper left decorative board 3129, and back front lower left decorative board 3130). By appropriately combining the illuminated decorative portions, players can be shown a variety of illuminated effects, preventing players from becoming bored and reducing their interest. Furthermore, because each decorative portion can be illuminated independently, the combination of illuminated decorative portions that illuminate as the game progresses can suggest to the player the likelihood of an advantageous gaming state (for example, a "jackpot" gaming state) that will give the player an advantage.

In addition, in each decorative body (back front left first decorative body 3124, back front left second decorative body 3125, back front left third decorative body 3126, and back front left decorative body base 3127) of the back front left decorative unit 3120, shading sections (dividing decorative section 3124a, dividing decorative section 3125c, dividing decorative section 3126c) are provided between the decorative sections (back front left logo decorative section 3121, back front left upper logo decorative section 3122, and back front left sub-decorative section 3123) that are arranged in different positions from each other.Therefore, the shading sections block the light that is used to illuminate one decorative section from being irradiated onto the other decorative section, thereby preventing the other decorative section from illuminating and decorating, and only one (desired) decorative section can be illuminated and decorated. Therefore, since multiple decorative elements on a single decorative body can be illuminated independently, appropriate decorative elements can be illuminated as the game progresses, allowing players to see a variety of lighting effects, preventing players from getting bored and losing interest.

Furthermore, in each of the decorative bodies (first back front left decorative body 3124, second back front left decorative body 3125, third back front left decorative body 3126, and back front left decorative body base 3127) of the back front left decorative unit 3120, multiple decorative parts (back front left logo decorative part 3121, upper back front left logo decorative part 3122, and sub back front left decorative part 3123) are arranged in different positions, and light-shielding parts (dividing decorative part 3124a, dividing decorative part 3125c, dividing decorative part 3126c) are provided between them, allowing each to be illuminated and decorated independently. Therefore, by making each decorative part of the decorative body decorated in a completely different style, players can see different types of illuminated decoration as the game progresses, which can strongly attract the player's attention and entertain the player with the illuminated effects, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, in each of the decorative bodies (first back-front-left decorative body 3124, second back-front-left decorative body 3125, third back-front-left decorative body 3126, and back-front-left decorative body base 3127) of the back-front-left decorative unit 3120, hole-shaped shading sections (dividing decorative section 3124a, dividing decorative section 3125c, dividing decorative section 3126c) are provided between multiple decorative sections (back-front-left logo decorative section 3121, upper back-front-left logo decorative section 3122, and back-front-left sub-decorative section 3123). Therefore, light used to illuminate one decorative section is emitted to the outside from part of the shading section, allowing part of the shading section to be illuminated. Therefore, by forming the shading section into a predetermined shape, players can see the luminous decoration of both the decorative section and the luminous decoration of the shading section, allowing for more diverse lighting effects to be produced.

In addition, the back front left first decorative body 3124 of the back front left decorative unit 3120 has a through decorative portion 3124b that penetrates from front to back in a predetermined shape. Therefore, when the decorative portions (first front left logo decorative portion 3124c, first back left logo decorative portion 3124d, first upper left logo decorative portion 3124e, first left sub-decorative portion 3124f) are illuminated as the game progresses, the peripheral surface of the through decorative portion 3124b becomes illuminated, allowing the player to see the illuminated decoration of the through decorative portion 3124b in addition to the illuminated decoration of the decorative portions, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, even if the cell 1140 provided behind the transparent panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 on the gaming board 5B expands or contracts more than the panel board 1110 due to environmental changes such as temperature and humidity, the cell 1140 is provided in a state in which it can expand or contract relative to the panel board 1110, so the cell 1140 can expand and contract freely, and wrinkles or cracks will not occur in the cell 1140 even if the environment such as temperature and humidity changes, and the decorative effect of the cell 1140 can be maintained. In this case, the cells 1140 are located behind the part of the panel 1110 opposite to the predetermined direction in which the opening 1112 to which the center gimmick 2500 is attached is biased, i.e., behind the wide part of the panel 1110. This makes it easier for players to see the designs on the cells 1140 that can be seen through the transparent panel 1110, allowing the decorative effect of the cells 1140 to be fully realized, and also improves the appearance of the play area 5a with the designs on the cells 1140 that can be seen through the transparent panel 1110, entertaining players and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, since the cells 1140 are provided in an expandable state on the panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 and are not attached to the gaming panel (panel board) as in conventional methods, the effort required for decorating the transparent panel board 1110 is simplified, and the increase in costs associated with the pachinko machine 1 is suppressed. Specifically, since the cells 1140 can be attached to the cutting-processed panel board 1110 after the cutting process, the cells 1140 are not scratched during the cutting process of the panel board 1110. Furthermore, the cutting surface is not roughened due to differences in the materials of the panel boards 1110 and 1140, and the finishing process after cutting can be omitted. On the other hand, since the cells 1140 are not attached to the gaming panel (panel board) formed by cutting or injection molding to have an opening, the effort required for attachment can be eliminated. Therefore, the cells 1140 can be attached behind the transparent panel board 1110 more easily than with conventional techniques, and the increase in costs associated with the pachinko machine 1 is suppressed.

Furthermore, since the cells 1140 are provided behind a portion of the panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, the amount of cells 1140 used can be reduced compared to when the cells 1140 are provided on the entire surface of the panel board 1110, thereby reducing the costs associated with the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, because the cells 1140 are detachable from the panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, cells 1140 with different designs can be attached or replaced on the panel board 1110, making it easy to accommodate changes in the specifications or model of the pachinko machine 1 (gaming board 5B), thereby minimizing increases in the costs associated with the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the cells 1140 can be illuminated and decorated by the illumination of various LEDs provided in the rear front performance unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000. This allows the images of the cells 1140 visible through the panel board 1110 of the transparent game panel 1100 to be illuminated and decorated, improving the appearance of the game area 5a and strongly attracting the player's attention to the game area 5a. This also brightens the game area 5a, making it easier to see the game balls B circulating within the game area 5a.

Furthermore, the various LEDs provided in the rear front performance unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000 can illuminate and decorate the cells 1140 provided behind the transparent panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100. The illuminated decoration of the cells 1140 can illuminate the game balls B circulating within the game area 5a from behind, making them appear as silhouettes. This makes the game balls B easier to see, allowing players to enjoy their movement and preventing a decline in interest. Furthermore, by making the game balls B circulating within the game area 5a appear as silhouettes, players can easily make subtle adjustments to the impact strength of the game balls B, allowing players to enjoy the original gameplay of the pachinko machine 1, which is to devise ways to impact the game balls B.

In addition, because the cell 1140 is located behind a portion of the transparent panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, when the player looks into the gaming area 5a, the image in the cell 1140 is more likely to come into focus. Therefore, simply by looking at the gaming panel 1100 (panel board 1110), the player's focus naturally comes to the gaming ball B circulating within the gaming area 5a, making it easier to see the gaming ball B circulating within the gaming area 5a, allowing the player to enjoy the movement of the gaming ball B and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, a cell 1140 decorated with a predetermined pattern is provided behind a portion of the transparent panel board 1110. This allows the pattern on the cell 1140 to hide the decorations of the rear front performance unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000 located behind it from the player. Therefore, when the decorations located behind the cell 1140 are not illuminated, the pattern on the cell 1140 can prevent the player from noticing the presence of the decorations. When the decorations are illuminated as the game progresses, the cell 1140 is illuminated by the light from the decorations, making it possible for the player to notice the presence of decorations whose presence would not have been foreseen, greatly surprising the player and making the player strongly believe that their chance has arrived. This also allows the player to see a more effective illumination effect, entertaining the player and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, as described above, the rear left movable decorative element 3301 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, which is a movable decorative element located at the rear, can be hidden from view by the player using the cell 1140. As the rear left movable decorative element 3301 moves from an invisible state due to the cell 1140 to a visible state through the opening 1112 that penetrates the front and rear of the panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 as the game progresses, a movable performance can be shown in which the rear left movable decorative element 3301 appears as the game progresses. Therefore, the appearance of the rear left movable decorative element 3301, etc., can suggest to the player that a chance is approaching, making the player strongly believe that a favorable gaming state (for example, a "jackpot" gaming state) that gives the player an advantage may occur, increasing anticipation for the game and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100, which has the game area 5a in front of the game board 5A where game balls B circulate, is made of a translucent, opaque milky white color, making the game area 5a appear bright and making the game balls B circulating within the game area 5a easier to see. Furthermore, when light from the LEDs and performance display devices 1600 provided on the pachinko machine 1, light from lighting in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, light from other pachinko machines, slot machines, and other game machines is irradiated onto the game panel 1100, the light is diffused by the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100, making the panel board 1110A appear to be dimly lit and self-illuminating. Furthermore, when the multiple LEDs 1130a of the panel decorative substrate 1130, which can irradiate light onto the periphery of the panel board 1110A, are illuminated, the light is diffused by the opaque, milky-white panel board 1110A, which has translucency, so that the panel board 1110A of the game panel 1100 can be softly and softly illuminated like fluorescent lamps, which are used for indirect lighting, thereby brightening the game area 5a and reducing the glare caused by the LEDs 1130a, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 that is gentle on the player's eyes. Therefore, compared to previous pachinko machines that use plywood or transparent plates as the game panel (panel board), players can see a pachinko machine 1 with a game area 5a that glows like a fluorescent light, something they have never seen before, which strongly attracts the player's attention to the game panel 1100 (game area 5a) and makes them feel like something good is about to happen, increasing their anticipation for the game. In addition, the light from the rear panel board 1110A makes game balls B circulating within the game area 5a look like silhouettes, making game balls B easier to see, allowing players to enjoy the movement of game balls B and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, by attaching a decorative sheet (decorative film) (not shown) to the front of the panel board 1110A of the gaming panel 1100, the milky-white panel board 1110A can enhance the color of the image on the decorative film, improving the appearance of the gaming area 5a through the decorative image. Furthermore, by illuminating the LEDs 1130a on the panel decorative board 1130, the image on the decorative film can be illuminated and decorated through the panel board 1110A of the gaming panel 1100, further improving the appearance of the gaming area 5a and providing a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, when a decorative film is provided on the front surface of the panel board 1110A of the gaming panel 1100, the translucent, opaque panel board 1110A can easily obscure the areas illuminated by LEDs 1130a, etc. However, by designing the pattern (or by designing the arrangement of LEDs 1130a, etc.) so that the areas where the illuminated decoration would be obscured are partially hidden by the decorative film pattern, the illuminated decoration can be made to look clearer, further enhancing the decorative effect.

Furthermore, when a decorative film is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110A of the gaming panel 1100, by using a material with excellent abrasion resistance for the decorative film, the front surface of the panel plate 1110A can be protected from the circulation of the gaming balls B by the decorative film. This means that there is no need to use a material with high abrasion resistance for the panel plate 1110A, and a lower-grade, cheaper material can be used, thereby reducing the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, if a decorative film is provided on the rear surface of the panel board 1110A of the gaming panel 1100, light irradiated from the rear to the front of the decorative film will cast a shadow of the image on the decorative film onto the panel board 1110A, allowing the player to see the image. The player can also see an illuminating effect in which the image or text on the light-scratch film is projected onto the panel board 1110A from behind, making the player feel as if something good is about to happen when the effect is executed, heightening the player's anticipation for the game and preventing a decline in interest. Alternatively, the illuminating effect could involve projecting images or text encouraging a "right hit" or operation of the effect operation unit 301 onto the panel board 1110A of the gaming panel 1100 from behind using the decorative film, allowing the player to enjoy the operation of hitting the game ball B, operating the effect operation unit 301 in a player-participation effect, and preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, if decorative film is provided on both the front and rear of the panel board 1110A of the gaming panel 1100, when light is shone onto the side of the panel board 1110A using LEDs 1130a or the like on the panel decorative substrate 1130, the panel board 1110A will self-illuminate, as described above, causing the decorative film on the front side to be illuminated and decorated, allowing players to enjoy the image on the decorative film on the front side. On the other hand, when light is shone from the rear of the gaming panel 1100 to the front using LEDs or the like, the shadow of the image on the decorative film on the rear side is projected onto the panel board 1110A, and this shadow overlaps with the image on the decorative film on the front side, causing the image on the decorative film on the front side to appear to change. This allows players to see a variety of lighting effects, preventing players from becoming bored and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, when the back front upper left logo decoration 3122 of the back front left decorative unit 3120 and the back front upper right logo decoration 3142 of the back front right decorative unit 3140, which are located behind the translucent, opaque, milky white panel board 1110A, are illuminated and decorated as the game progresses, the light passes to a certain extent forward (towards the player) through the panel board 1110A of the gaming panel 1100, allowing the panel board 1110A to be partially illuminated and decorated in the same manner as the back front upper left logo decoration 3122 and back front upper right logo decoration 3142 located behind, and also making the player aware of the presence of the back front upper left logo decoration 3122 and back front upper right logo decoration 3142 located behind. Therefore, the illuminated decorations of the logo decoration 3122 on the upper left back front and the logo decoration 3142 on the upper right back front are visible through the panel board 1110A of the gaming panel 1100, making the player feel as if something good is about to happen, increasing anticipation for the game and preventing a decline in interest.

In addition, the rear front upper left logo decoration 3122 and rear front upper right logo decoration 3142, which are located at the rear of the panel board 1110A of the gaming panel 1100, are formed from a colorless, transparent material.Since the panel board 1110A is a milky white color, the colors of the rear front upper left logo decoration 3122 and rear front upper right logo decoration 3142 blend in with the color of the panel board 1110A and are therefore invisible from the front, preventing players from noticing the presence of the rear front upper left logo decoration 3122 and rear front upper right logo decoration 3142. Furthermore, when the back front upper left logo decoration 3122 and back front upper right logo decoration 3142 are illuminated, the illuminated decorations of the back front upper left logo decoration 3122 and back front upper right logo decoration 3142 can be seen through the panel board 1110A as described above. Therefore, when the player notices the presence of the back front upper left logo decoration 3122 and back front upper right logo decoration 3142, whose presence he or she would not have foreseen, the player can be greatly surprised, giving the player a strong sense that their chance has arrived and allowing the player to see an illuminated effect with even greater dramatic effect, which can entertain the player and prevent a decline in interest.

In addition, under normal conditions, the rear left movable decorative element 3301 and the rear right movable decorative element 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300 are positioned behind the opaque, milky white panel board 1110A, making them invisible from the front. However, as the game progresses, they move to a position behind the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110A, making them visible through the opening 1112, allowing the player to see a movable performance in which the rear left movable decorative element 3301 and the rear right movable decorative element 3302 appear. Therefore, the appearance of the rear left movable decorative element 3301 and the rear right movable decorative element 3302 can suggest to the player that a chance is approaching, making the player strongly believe that a favorable gaming state (for example, a "jackpot" gaming state) in which the player has an advantage may occur, increasing anticipation for the game and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, by making the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 luminous, when the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 are not visible, the luminous decorations of the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 (or the rear front upper left logo decoration 3122 and the rear front upper right logo decoration 3142) can be turned on or flashed, making it possible to make the player aware of the presence of the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 through the translucent panel board 1110A, and keeping the player on the edge of their seats depending on whether the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 move to a state where they can be seen (whether the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 appear or not), making it possible to execute movable effects that can be more entertaining for the player.

In addition, the panel board 1110A of the gaming panel 1100, which has the gaming area 5a in front of it, is made opaque and translucent, so when a player looks inside the gaming area 5a, the front of the panel board 1110A tends to come into focus, and so simply by looking at the panel board 1110A, the player will naturally focus on the gaming ball B circulating within the gaming area 5a. At this time, as described above, the panel board 1110A appears to be self-illuminating due to light from the outside or light from the emitting LED 1130a, etc., and the game ball B circulating within the play area 5a is made to look like a silhouette by the light from the rear panel board 1110A, making the game ball B circulating within the play area 5a easier to see, allowing the player to enjoy the movement of the game ball B and preventing a decline in interest, and making it easier to make subtle adjustments to the impact strength of the game ball B, allowing the player to enjoy playing the pachinko machine 1 main body by devising ways to impact the game ball B.

Furthermore, because the panel board 1110A of the gaming panel 1100 is made of an opaque, milky white material (synthetic resin) that is translucent, it is possible to use a lower grade synthetic resin compared to when the panel board is made transparent, thereby reducing the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, because the panel board 1110A is an opaque milky white with translucency, the color of the decorative elements provided on this pachinko machine 1 stands out relatively, enhancing the decorative effect of the decorative elements. This makes it possible to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that is capable of strongly attracting the attention of players. Furthermore, when the LEDs 1130a on the panel decorative substrate 1130 or the decorative elements provided at the rear of the gaming panel 1100 are illuminated, the emitted color can be transmitted forward, allowing players to enjoy a colorful illumination effect.

Furthermore, because the panel board 1110A is opaque and milky white with translucency, decorative elements (e.g., the rear front left decorative unit 3120) located behind the gaming panel 1100 can be made invisible from the front (player's side). Furthermore, when the decorative elements located behind the gaming panel 1100 are illuminated, light from the decorative elements passes forward through the translucent gaming panel 1100 (panel board 1110A), allowing the gaming panel 1100 to be partially illuminated and alerting the player to the presence of the decorative elements located behind. Furthermore, when the decorative elements located behind the gaming panel 1100 are moved to a position behind the opening 1112 penetrating the panel board 1110A, the decorative elements can be made visible from the front through the opening 1112, allowing the player to see the decorative elements disappear and appear. In this way, a variety of lighting effects and moving effects can be presented to players, making it less likely for players to get bored and preventing a decline in interest.

Furthermore, the translucent, opaque, milky-white panel board 1110A diffuses light from the LEDs 1130a and other components of the panel decoration substrate 1130, allowing the gaming panel 1100 to be softly and luminously decorated, brightening the gaming area 5a like indirect lighting while also reducing the glare of the LEDs 1130a, providing a pachinko machine 1 that is gentle on the player's eyes.

In addition, the panel board 1110A of the gaming panel 1100 can be illuminated and decorated using the LEDs 1130a of the panel decorative substrate 1130. For example, LEDs 1130a can be provided on the left and right sides of the panel board 1110A, allowing each to illuminate independently. By illuminating the right side according to the game situation (progress), the right side of the gaming area 5a will be illuminated via the panel board 1110A, thereby drawing the player's attention to the right side of the gaming area 5a and encouraging them to shoot the gaming ball B into the right side of the gaming area 5a ("hit to the right"). On the other hand, by illuminating the left side, the left side of the gaming area 5a will be illuminated via the panel board 1110A, thereby drawing the player's attention to the left side of the gaming area 5a and encouraging them to shoot the gaming ball B into the left side of the gaming area 5a ("hit to the left"). In this way, by illuminating the LEDs 1130a in appropriate positions, the illuminated decoration on the gaming panel 1100 (panel board 1110A) can be intuitively understood as advising the player to "hit left" or "hit right," allowing the player to enjoy the operation of shooting the gaming ball B, and also entertaining the player with a new type of illuminated effect not found in previous pachinko machines 1.

In addition, the gaming panel 1100 is composed of a plate-shaped panel plate 1110A (panel plate 1110) and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 that is thicker than panel plate 1110A and holds the outer periphery of panel plate 1110A. Therefore, if the thickness of the panel holder 1120 is made the same as that of the gaming panel of a conventional pachinko machine, the thickness of panel plate 1110A (panel plate 1110), at the front of which the gaming area 5a is located, can be made thinner than that of a conventional gaming panel. This reduces the amount of material used in the gaming panel 1100 (panel plate 1110, panel plate 1110A), thereby reducing the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, because the gaming panel 1100 is composed of the panel plate 1110 or panel plate 1110A and the panel holder 1120, the panel plate 1110A and the panel holder 1120 can be detached, making it possible to use the panel holder 1120 as a common, general-purpose part. This allows for mass production of the panel holder 1120, thereby reducing the cost of the panel holder 1120, and by manufacturing panel plates 1110 or 1110A that correspond to each model, the costs associated with new models and model changes can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be accommodated on the game board 5 via the holding member 1060 by accommodating the magnetic sensor 1050 in the accommodating section 1061 having the elastic claw 1062 in the holding member 1060 and engaging the elastic claw 1062 with the magnetic sensor 1050. Also, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be accommodated on the game board 5 via the holding member 1071 and the holding container 1072 by accommodating the magnetic sensor 1050 in the holding container 1072 having the elastic claw 1072a and engaging the elastic claw 1072a with the engaging section 1071a of the holding member 1071. In this case, because the holding members 1060, 1071, and holding container 1072 are made of non-magnetic materials, when the magnet 1055 is brought close to the play area 5a, the holding members 1060 and the like are prevented from attracting the magnetic field lines from the magnet 1055, and a decrease in the magnetic field lines passing through the magnetic sensor 1050 can be prevented. This makes it easier to detect magnetism acting on the play area 5a, allowing for early detection of fraudulent activity using the magnet 1055, and dissuading players from engaging in fraudulent activity by reporting suspicious magnetic activity detected by the magnetic sensor 1050, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 that is highly effective in deterring fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, as described above, the holding member 1060, holding member 1071, and holding container 1072, which are made of a non-magnetic material, avoid attracting magnetic field lines from the magnet 1055 and prevent a decrease in the magnetic field lines passing through the magnetic sensor 1050. This makes it possible to effectively detect the magnetic field acting on the play area 5a with fewer magnetic sensors 1050 than in conventional pachinko machines, allowing for a smaller number of magnetic sensors 1050 than in conventional pachinko machines, thereby suppressing increases in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, by elastically deforming the elastic claws 1062 of the storage section 1061 and the elastic claws 1072a of the holding container 1072, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be easily attached to and detached from the locking sections 1071a of the holding members 1060 and 1071. This means that the magnetic sensor 1050 can be attached using the elastic claws 1062 and 1072a without using metal screws made of magnetic material, as in conventional pachinko machines. This also simplifies the assembly of the pachinko machine 1, thereby minimizing the cost increase associated with the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, by providing the holding member 1071 with multiple locking portions 1071a in advance and locking the elastic claws 1072a of the holding container 1072 containing the magnetic sensor 1050 to the locking portions 1071a at appropriate positions, the magnetic sensor 1050 can be installed in any position or its position can be easily changed. Therefore, since the position of the magnetic sensor 1050 can be easily changed or additional sensors can be installed, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can easily accommodate design changes and model changes while suppressing increases in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the magnetic sensor 1050 is biased into the housing 1061 by the protrusion 1063 on the holding member 1060, which can prevent the magnetic sensor 1050 from vibrating finely due to the biasing force of the protrusion 1063. This reduces the likelihood of the connector connected to the magnetic sensor 1050 becoming detached or of poor contact occurring due to such vibration, ensuring reliable operation of the magnetic sensor 1050.

Furthermore, the magnetic sensor 1050 is held visibly by the holding member 1060, the holding member 1071, and the holding container 1072. Furthermore, because the sensor case 1053 of the magnetic sensor 1050 is transparent, the sensor main body 1051 mounted on the sensor board 1052 can be seen by the player through the transparent sensor case 1053. In this case, because the surface of the sensor board 1052 on which the sensor main body 1051 is mounted is white, the sensor main body 1051, which is a different color (e.g., black), can be made to stand out. This makes it clear to the player that the magnetic sensor 1050 is genuine and not a dummy. The visibility of the magnetic sensor 1050 can discourage those who would otherwise commit fraud using the magnet 1055, and can increase the deterrent effect against fraud. This reduces the burden on the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Furthermore, even if the sensor body 1051 is visible through the transparent sensor case 1053, an average player will not pay much attention to the presence of the magnetic sensor 1050 and will not find it bothersome. In contrast, someone attempting to commit fraud will focus their attention on the playing area 5a, and the contrast between the white sensor board 1052 and the black sensor body 1051 will make the magnetic sensor 1050 highly visible. Therefore, noticing the presence of the magnetic sensor 1050 will discourage players from committing fraud using magnets, providing a pachinko machine 1 with a strong deterrent effect.

Furthermore, in the magnetic sensor 1050, the surface of the sensor board 1052 on which the sensor main body 1051 is mounted is white, making the sensor board 1052 less noticeable and preventing it from being mistaken for a decorative board on which an LED is mounted. Therefore, even if the sensor board 1052 of the magnetic sensor 1050 is visible, it will not bother a typical player, and the appearance of the play area 5a is not marred.

Furthermore, because the sensor body 1051 of the magnetic sensor 1050 can be seen from the outside, it is possible to check from the outside whether the sensor body 1051 is damaged, which simplifies the maintenance work required for the pachinko machine 1 and reduces the burden on the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Furthermore, because the magnetic sensor 1050 is attached to the gaming board 5 via the non-magnetic retaining member 1060, retaining member 1071, retaining container 1072, etc., if the retaining member 1060 or retaining member 1071 is attached to the gaming board 5 using a magnetic material such as a screw, the portion of the retaining member 1060 or retaining member 1071 that is attached to the gaming board 5 can be located away from the magnetic sensor 1050 or outside the magnetic detection range of the playing area 5a. This minimizes the influence of magnetic materials such as screws, allowing the magnetic sensor 1050 to reliably detect magnetic fields acting on the playing area 5a, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 that is highly deterrent to fraudulent activity using the magnet 1055.

21. Base Monitor Management
Next, modified examples of the base monitor 1310h will be described. In the above-described embodiment, an example was described in which the number of game balls B counted by the out ball counter when game balls discharged from the game board 5 and circulating along the first ball path 701 are detected by the first ball sensor 703 is displayed on the base monitor 1310h (four 7-segment LEDs). However, separately from or in addition to the above, the number of balls entered and the number of payouts (number of prize balls) that increase as the game progresses may be counted, and a base value (the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered) may be displayed on the base monitor 1310h. Note that the basic configuration of the base monitor 1310h, such as having four 7-segment LEDs, is the same as in the other embodiments.

The game area 5a, which is partitioned off on the game board 5, is provided with multiple ball entry ports through which game balls B can enter. Of the multiple ball entry ports, the prize entry ports from which prize balls are paid out (a prize ball number is awarded) upon entry include multiple (three in this case) general prize entry ports 2001 that are always open to receive game balls B shot into the game area 5a, a first start port 2002 that is provided at a predetermined position within the game area 5a and is always open to receive game balls B, and a regular symbol lottery port 2003 that is drawn when game balls B are received by gate 2003. The machine is equipped with a second start opening 2004 that can accept game ball B depending on the result of the lottery (regular lottery result), and a large prize opening 2005 and a special prize opening 2006 that can accept game ball B depending on the result of the lottery (first special lottery result) for a first special symbol drawn by receiving game ball B into first start opening 2002 or the result of the lottery (second special lottery result) for a second special symbol drawn by receiving game ball B into second start opening 2004. Game balls B that enter general prize opening 2001, first start opening 2002, second start opening 2004, large prize opening 2005, and special prize opening 2006 are detected by general prize opening sensor 3001, first start opening sensor 3002, second start opening sensor 2401, large prize opening sensor 2402, and special prize opening sensor 2601, respectively.

In addition, among the multiple ball inlets, outlets for collecting game balls B that did not enter the winning holes include outlet 1008, which is located at the most downstream position within the game area 5a and is always open to receive game balls B, and discharges received game balls B outside the game area 5a without returning them, and first sub-outlet 2021 and second sub-outlet 2022, which are located upstream of outlet 1008 within the game area 5a and are always open to receive game balls B, and discharge received game balls B outside the game area 5a without returning them.

Of the multiple ball entry ports, game balls B that are discharged to the rear of the game panel 1100 through the exit port 1008, first sub-exit port 2021, or second sub-exit port 2022 flow through the first ball path 701 and are detected (counted) one by one by the first ball sensor 703. On the other hand, game balls B that are received in prize entry ports such as the general prize entry port 2001, first start port 2002, second start port 2004, large prize entry port 2005, or special prize entry port 2006 and are discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and rear unit 3000 flow through the second ball path 702 and are detected (counted) one by one by the second ball sensor 704.

The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of game balls B (entry ball count) that have entered the entry ports (winning port, out port) provided in the game area 5a defined on the game board 5, i.e., the number of game balls B that are discharged from the game area 5a. Specifically, the number of game balls B that have entered the entry port, which is the target for paying out prize balls upon entry, detected by the second ball sensor 704, and the number of game balls B that have entered the out port, which collects game balls B that did not enter the winning port, detected by the first ball sensor 703, are counted as the total.

The main control MPU 1310a also counts the number of game balls B (hereinafter referred to as the payout number) that are paid out (awarded) as prize balls when a ball enters a prize slot. Specifically, it is predetermined that a predetermined number of game balls B (e.g., three balls for a ball entering the first start slot 2002 or the second start slot 2004) will be paid out corresponding to the prize slot from which prize balls are paid out when the ball enters the prize slot) is detected by a detection sensor corresponding to the prize slot from which prize balls are paid out when the ball enters the prize slot, and the number of that predetermined number of game balls B is counted as the payout number. For example, when a game ball B enters the general winning slot 2001, 10 game balls B are paid out, when a game ball B enters the first starting slot 2002 or the second starting slot 2004, 3 game balls B are paid out, and when a game ball B enters the large winning slot 2005 or the accessory winning slot 2006, 10 game balls B are paid out, and the number of game balls B paid out as prize balls is counted as the number of balls paid out. In a controlled gaming machine that does not pay out actual balls, the number of game balls B paid out (awarded) as prize balls can be added to the player's ball count.

The main control MPU 1310a then calculates the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls that enter the machine, stores the calculation result as a base value in a specific area of the built-in RAM, and displays it on the base monitor 1310h. The formula for calculating the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls that enter the machine is "base value = (number of payouts ÷ number of balls that enter the machine) × 100." For example, if the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls that enter the machine is too high, it is possible that the balls are only entering the winning slots that are the target of paying out prize balls when they enter the machine. By monitoring the information displayed on the base monitor 1310h, it is possible to determine whether or not balls are being entered into the winning slots through fraudulent activity.

In this example, the number of game balls B entering the ball entry slots (prize entry slots, exit slots) (entry ball count) and the number of game balls B paid out as prize balls (payout count) are counted only in the low-probability non-time-saving mode among the multiple game modes, and are reflected in the display on the base monitor 1310h. Here, in the low-probability time-saving mode (time-saving mode) or the high-probability time-saving mode (probability variable mode), balls frequently enter the second start slot 2004, so the number of game balls B paid out as prize balls also increases, and the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entering tends to be high. In other words, whether the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entering increases depends on the period during which the low-probability time-saving mode (time-saving mode) or the high-probability time-saving mode (probability variable mode) is in effect. However, by excluding such periods, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entering can be kept within a certain range, provided there is no fraudulent activity.

In addition, the base monitor 1310h displays the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls that enter, but it may also be possible to display the number of game balls B that enter the ball entrance (winning entrance, out entrance) (number of balls that enter) and the number of game balls B that are paid out as prize balls (number of payouts).

In addition, information stored in a specific area of RAM (the ratio of payouts to the number of balls entering) is not cleared even if the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated when the power is turned on. However, the ratio of payouts to the number of balls entering is calculated anew each time the number of game balls B entering the ball entrance (winning entrance, outgoing entrance) reaches 60,000, and the results of calculations of the ratio of payouts to the number of balls entering are saved as history up to a predetermined number of times. In this specification of the base monitor 1310h, for example, the display of the ratio of payouts to the number of balls entering may be restricted from the time a new ratio of payouts to the number of balls entering is calculated until the number of game balls B entering the ball entrance (winning entrance, outgoing entrance) reaches at least 1,000. This is because, immediately after a new calculation of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entering, there may be a situation where balls continue to enter the winning slots that are the target for paying out prize balls, causing the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entering to be higher than the reference value, or there may be a situation where balls do not enter the winning slots that are the target for paying out prize balls, causing the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entering to be lower than the reference value, and other biases are likely to occur. For this reason, immediately after a new calculation of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entering, it is sufficient to determine that the information obtained from the base monitor information command is unreliable and not display the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entering.

In addition, in this example, game balls B collected in the outlet 1008, first sub-outlet 2021, and second sub-outlet 2022 are detected (counted) by a first ball sensor 703 provided on the main frame 4 side, and game balls B that enter winning ports such as the general winning port 2001, first starting port 2002, second starting port 2004, large winning port 2005, and special winning port 2006 are detected (counted) by a second ball sensor 704 provided on the main frame 4 side, but these sensors may also be provided on the game board 5 side. In addition, a passage may be formed so that game balls B collected at the outlet 1008, first sub-outlet 2021, and second sub-outlet 2022 meet with game balls B that have entered various winning ports, and a single sensor may be installed on the passage, and the number of game balls B (number of entering balls) that have entered the ball entry port (winning port, outlet) may be counted by detection by the single sensor.

In addition, in this example, the base monitor 1310h is located on the main control board 1310, but it may also be located on the payout control board 633 (or the frame control board in a managed gaming machine). In such cases, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is calculated on the main control board 1310 side, and the calculation result is displayed on the base monitor 1310h via the payout control board 633, but other methods may also be used. For example, commands related to the number of balls entered and the number of payouts may be sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 633 at a predetermined timing, and the payout control board 633 may calculate the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered and display the calculation result on the base monitor 1310h. In this way, by having the payout control board 633 handle some of the base monitor-related control, the control burden on the main control board 1310 side can be reduced.

In addition, in this example, the number of game balls B (number of game balls entering) that entered the ball entrances (winning entrances, outgoing entrances) is calculated using the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704. However, the number of game balls B (number of game balls entering) that entered the ball entrances (winning entrances, outgoing entrances) may be calculated using a different configuration. For example, when calculating the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of game balls entering on the payout control board 633 side, the number of game balls launched into the game area 5a may be calculated based on the detection results of a launch sensor (not shown) that detects game balls launched in the ball launcher 540, and this value (number of game balls launched into the game area 5a) may be substituted for the "number of game balls B (number of game balls entering) that entered the ball entrances (winning entrances, outgoing entrances)." Note that the "number of game balls launched into the game area" here preferably excludes the number of balls treated as foul balls, as described above. In this case, the calculation of the base value on the payout control board 633 can be, for example, "base value = (number of payouts ÷ number of game balls fired into the game area) × 100)." In this way, by having the payout control board 633 handle some of the control related to the base monitor, the control burden on the main control board 1310 can be reduced.

[21-1. New form of game management]
In recent years, even when a large number of balls are awarded to a fraudster due to new fraudulent activities, it is difficult to distinguish between these cases and cases in which a large number of balls have been awarded to a player due to a bias in the probability of winning or losing. This makes it difficult for gaming parlors to urge fraudsters to stop playing, resulting in problems such as difficulty in managing gaming machines. Furthermore, there are also cases in which a large number of balls are awarded to legitimate players due to a bias in the probability of winning or losing, which causes problems such as so-called "addiction." Therefore, as one embodiment for solving these problems, a new gaming control will be described below that aims to optimize the management of gaming machines that have awarded a large number of balls, and that newly extracts the "amount of balls awarded in a specified period" and reflects it in the progress of the game, separate from the control that calculates and displays the base value described above.

(Extraction of ball volume for a specified period)
In this example, the pachinko machine 1 is capable of calculating and deriving the following two types of ball output amount A and ball output amount B as the ball output amount (difference in ball amount) for a specified period by the main control board 1310.

First, the main control MPU 1310a counts the number of game balls B (number of shots) that are shot into the game area 5a by operating the handle 160. Specifically, when the handle 160 is operated to shoot game ball B into the game area 5a, the launch sensor detects that game ball B has been shot from 7, and the number of game balls B (excluding the number of balls processed as foul balls) is counted as the "number of shots" used to calculate the amounts of balls A and B to be dispensed. Note that the number of shots can also be counted using other methods; for example, a sensor separate from the launch sensor can be installed to detect and count game balls that enter the game area 5a.

The main control MPU 1310a also counts the number of game balls B (number of payouts) that are paid out (awarded) as prize balls when a ball enters a prize slot. Specifically, it is predetermined that a predetermined number of game balls B (e.g., three balls for a ball entering the first start slot 2002 or the second start slot 2004) will be paid out (awarded) corresponding to the prize slot that will pay out (award) prize balls when the ball enters the prize slot, and when detected by a detection sensor corresponding to the prize slot that will pay out prize balls when the ball enters the prize slot, the number of the predetermined number of game balls B is counted as the "number of payouts (number of awards)" for calculating the ball output amounts A and B. For example, when game ball B enters general prize opening 2001, 15 game balls B are paid out; when game ball B enters first start opening 2002 or second start opening 2004, 3 game balls B are paid out; and when game ball B enters large prize opening 2005 or accessory prize opening 2006, 15 game balls B are paid out, and the number of game balls B paid out as prize balls is counted as the number of payouts used to calculate payout amounts A and B. Note that in this example, the pachinko machine 1 does not pay out actual balls, so the number of game balls B awarded as prize balls is counted as the number of payouts used to calculate payout amounts A and B.

The main control MPU 1310a then calculates the difference between the number of shots and the number of payouts within the period until a predetermined clear condition, described below, is met, and is capable of storing and retaining this calculation result in a "stop counter" as a value for calculating the amounts of balls A and B paid out. The value of the stop counter is stored in a specific area of RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a. One example of a formula for calculating the difference between the number of shots and the number of payouts is "stop counter value = number of payouts - number of shots." For example, if the value of the stop counter becomes too high, it can be determined that a large number of balls has been dispensed from the pachinko machine 1, regardless of whether or not the player has changed. Furthermore, in this example of pachinko machine 1, the increase or decrease in player A's normal number of balls (the number of balls displayed on the ball count display unit that displays the player's ball count) is managed by deducting player A's normal number of balls when game ball B is fired and adding to player A's normal number of balls when prize balls are paid out. However, as described above, the value of the limit counter is stored (memorized) separately from the normal number of balls and managed by the main control MPU 1310a. This limit counter value is also deducted when game ball B is fired and added when prize balls are paid out, which is similar to the process for managing the increase or decrease in the normal number of balls. However, the limit counter value is not something that the player can settle, which is a major difference from the normal number of balls. Below, we will explain the ball amounts A and B calculated using the limit counter value.

The amount of balls dispensed A is the difference between the value at which the limiting counter reaches its highest value within the period until the specified clear condition described below is met, and the value at which the limiting counter reaches its lowest value within the period until the specified clear condition described below is met. In other words, the main control MPU 1310a stores the progress of this limiting counter, calculates the difference between the maximum and minimum values of the limiting counter, updates this calculation result as the amount of balls dispensed A as needed, and stores it in a specific area of the built-in RAM. The amount of balls dispensed A is then cleared when the specified clear condition described below is met, and is returned to its initial value of 0. Furthermore, if the type of gaming machine is the aforementioned so-called sealed gaming machine or managed gaming machine, the clearing conditions described below may not include "settlement of balls held (for example, operation of the counting button switch)." In this case, even if player B starts playing after player A's settlement, the amount of balls dispensed A during the game progress of both player A and player B will be stored (maintained) in an accumulated form, as long as the clearing conditions are not met. This makes it possible to know not only when a single gaming machine awards an unexpectedly large number of balls to a single player, but also when a single gaming machine awards an unexpectedly large number of balls to multiple players.

The amount of balls dispensed B is the difference between the predetermined initial value of 0 and the value at the point when the stop counter reaches its highest value within the period until the specified clear condition described below is met. In other words, the main control MPU 1310a stores the progress of this stop counter, and calculates the difference (i.e., a difference greater than 0) between the initial value of 0 and the value at the point when the stop counter reaches its highest value, updates this calculation result as the amount of balls dispensed B as needed, and stores it in a specific area of the built-in RAM. The amount of balls dispensed B is then cleared and returned to its initial value of 0 when the specified clear condition described below is met. Furthermore, if the type of gaming machine is the aforementioned so-called sealed gaming machine or managed gaming machine, the clearing conditions described below may not include "settlement of owned balls (operation of the counting button switch)." In this case, even if player B starts playing after player A's settlement, the amount of balls B dispensed during the game progress of both player A and player B will be stored (maintained) in an accumulated form as long as the clearing conditions are not met. This makes it possible to know not only when a single gaming machine dispenses an unexpectedly large number of balls to a single player, but also when a single gaming machine dispenses an unexpectedly large number of balls to multiple players.

Figure 214 is a time chart showing an example of the amount of balls dispensed calculated in relation to the progression of the limit counter. Here, we will explain a specific example where the limit counter starts from its initial value of 0 and repeatedly increases and decreases as the game is played.

As shown in Figure 214, the cap counter starts from its initial value of 0, then decreases to -2000, increases to 3000, decreases to -4000, increases to 2000, decreases to -500, increases to 4000, and decreases to 2500. In this case, the amount of balls dispensed A is calculated and stored as 8000, which is the difference between 4000 when the cap counter was at its highest and -4000 when the cap counter was at its lowest. On the other hand, the amount of balls dispensed B is calculated and stored as 4000, which is the value of the cap counter at its highest, starting from 0, which is the initial value of the cap counter. The maximum difference between the amounts of balls dispensed A and B is stored, and the stored amounts of balls dispensed A and B are updated by calculating a new maximum difference.

In this example, the main control board 1310 calculates two types of ball output amounts: output amount A and output amount B. The hall can freely select which one to use to suit its management style. Specifically, an operation switch A that can be operated by the hall manager is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, on the main control board 1310), and by operating this operation switch A, either output amount A or output amount B can be selected. On the other hand, taking into account the control load on the main control board 1310, only one of output amount A or output amount B may be used and installed. Furthermore, the operation of operation switch A to select either output amount A or output amount B may be determined only when the power is turned on to reflect which one is selected, or it may be determined at any time after the power is turned on to reflect which one is selected at any time (in real time).

Furthermore, while the calculation of the base value mentioned above calculates the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls inserted, the calculation of the amount of balls dispensed calculates the difference between the number of shots and the number of payouts. These calculation programs are executed by separate programs in the main control MPU 1310a. This means that even if the calculation of the base value is not performed correctly, it will not affect the calculation of the amount of balls dispensed, and it is easy to separately control processes related to the initialization of the base value and amount of balls dispensed, including the specified clear conditions described below. Furthermore, it is easy to rewrite the calculation program for the amount of balls dispensed for each model, making it possible, for example, to easily change which of ball amount A and ball amount B is used for each model.

In addition, while the base value mentioned above is displayed on the base monitor 1310h, it is desirable that the amount of balls dispensed, unlike the base value, not be displayed at all times in order to prevent fraud. However, when the hall manager performs a specified operation (for example, when a dedicated switch is operated to turn on the power), the amount of balls dispensed may be displayed on a specified display device (for example, the performance display device 1600, a dedicated display device provided on the back of the gaming machine, the base monitor 1310h, or the setting display device 1310g).

In addition, in this example, the amount of balls dispensed is calculated on the main control board 1310 side, but other methods may be used. For example, a limit counter may be provided on the payout control board 633 side, and commands related to the number of shots and the number of payouts may be sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 633 at a predetermined timing. The payout control board 633 may manage the limit counter and calculate the amount of balls dispensed from the increase or decrease in the limit counter. Alternatively, a limit counter may be provided on the main control board 1310 side, and commands related to the limit counter may be sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 633 at a predetermined timing. The payout control board 633 may calculate the amount of balls dispensed from the increase or decrease in the received limit counter. Furthermore, from the perspective of reducing the control burden, the amount of balls dispensed may be calculated on the main control board 1310 side, while the above-mentioned base value may be calculated on the payout control board 633 side. Additionally, from the perspective of reducing the control burden, the normal number of balls held and the management of the limit counter may be calculated separately on the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633.

Furthermore, the calculation of the amount of balls dispensed is performed using a limit counter, which is the difference between the number of balls fired and the number of balls paid out. However, the amount of balls dispensed may be calculated by storing and holding the "difference between the number of balls fired and the number of balls paid out" in the limit counter using the number of balls fired used in the base value described above. In other words, the "number of balls fired" used to calculate the amount of balls dispensed A and B may be replaced with the "number of game balls B that entered the ball entrance (winning entrance, out entrance) (number of balls fired)." In this case, the value of the limit counter can be, for example, "value of limit counter = number of balls paid out - number of balls fired." In this way, by using the number of balls fired used in the base value described above as the value stored and held in the limit counter and sharing it with some of the base monitor-related control on the main control board 1310 side, the control burden on the main control board 1310 can be reduced. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, game balls shot into the game area 5a by operating the handle 160 enter the ball entrance (winning entrance, out entrance) and are then discharged to the outside; the number of shots and the number of balls that enter should show approximately the same value, and as a result, whether the number of shots or the number of balls that enter is used, the amount of balls dispensed will show approximately the same value.

(Game Restrictions)
In this example, when the amount of balls dispensed (amounts A and B) reaches a specific value, the pachinko machine 1 executes one of the following three restriction patterns, and the main control board 1310 puts the machine into a stop state, making it possible to restrict play. When the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, restrictions are imposed on subsequent play, but information related to the game, such as the game state (high probability state, time-saving state, information on the number of reserved balls stored, and information on the currently changing symbols), is retained without being cleared. As will be described in more detail later, the machine is configured so that it can choose whether to maintain or clear the information related to the game when the power is turned back on after being shut off.

First, the specific value is configured to allow selection of one of the predetermined values: 50,000, 80,000, or 100,000 balls. Specifically, an operation switch B operable by the hall manager is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (e.g., the main control board 1310), and operation of this operation switch B allows selection of one of 50,000, 80,000, or 100,000 balls. Here, the lower the specific value selected, the greater the likelihood of game restrictions being implemented, while the higher the specific value selected, the less likely game restrictions will be implemented. Note that, from the perspective of reducing the capacity of the ROM that stores various processing programs, only one of the specific values may be used. Furthermore, the selected specific value may be a common value used for ball payout amounts A and B, or may be selectable separately for ball payout amounts A and B. Furthermore, when operating switch B to select one of several specific values, it may be determined only when the power is turned on and the selected value is reflected, or it may be determined at any time after the power is turned on and the selected value is reflected at any time (in real time).

Furthermore, the restriction pattern is configured so that one of restriction patterns 1 to 3, which have different game restrictions, can be selected. Specifically, an operation switch C that can be operated by the hall manager is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the main control board 1310), and one of restriction patterns 1 to 3 is selected by operating this operation switch C. Note that, from the perspective of reducing the capacity of the ROM that stores various processing programs, only one of restriction patterns 1 to 3 may be adopted. Furthermore, when selecting one of multiple restriction patterns, the operation of the operation switch C may be determined only when the power is turned on to reflect which one is selected, or it may be determined at any time after the power is turned on to reflect which one is selected at any time (in real time).

Restriction pattern 1 is a pattern in which a game halt occurs when the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, resulting in a "game halt." When a "game halt" occurs, game balls can be fired into the game area 5a when the player operates the handle 160, but even if a starting win occurs, no game balls are paid out, the variable display of special symbols cannot begin, and normal game play cannot be played. In other words, although the firing of game balls is permitted, the game (main game) currently being played on the main control board 1310 is forcibly stopped, and the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 cannot proceed.

Restriction pattern 2 is a pattern in which a "launch halt" occurs when the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value. In the "launch halt" state, game balls cannot be launched into the game area 5a when the player operates the handle 160. However, if a starting win occurs, game balls are paid out, the display of special symbols can begin, and normal game play can be played. In other words, since the launch of game balls is not permitted, a starting win does not occur in the first place, and while the game (main game) currently being played on the main control board 1310 is allowed to proceed, the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 cannot proceed thereafter. A specific example of a "launch halt" situation is a state in which the payout control board 633 cannot circulate game balls; for example, a state in which game ball B cannot be launched from the ball launcher 540 even when the handle 160 is operated.

Restriction pattern 3 is a pattern in which a play-stop state is entered that involves both "game stop" and "launch stop" when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value. When "game stop" and "launch stop" occur, not only are game balls unable to be launched into the game area 5a when the player operates the handle 160, but even if a starting win occurs, no game balls are paid out, the variable display of special symbols cannot begin, and normal play cannot be played. In other words, the launch of game balls is not permitted, and the game (main game) currently being played on the main control board 1310 is forcibly stopped, meaning that the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 cannot proceed.

Furthermore, in gaming machines that circulate gaming balls without paying out actual prize balls outside the machine (so-called sealed gaming machines, managed gaming machines), the settlement process by operating the counting button switch, which allows a player to settle their balls by pressing it while they have them, may be enabled (permitted) rather than disabled, in any of restriction patterns 1-3. This allows the player to operate the counting button switch to settle their balls even if they are unable to continue playing due to any of restriction patterns 1-3, thereby preventing player confusion. However, to guard against fraudulent activity, such as awarding large amounts of winning balls to fraudulent players, the settlement process by operating the counting button switch may also be disabled in any of restriction patterns 1-3. In such cases, it is possible to enable the operation of the counting button switch (making the settlement process possible) by a predetermined operation by the hall manager (for example, operating a spare counting button switch on the payout control board 633) after it has been confirmed that fraud is not occurring.

Furthermore, while any of the above-mentioned restriction patterns 1 to 3 is applied, the "stopped state" is forcibly continued until the clear condition described below is met. The clear condition described below does not include any clear condition that is met by any operation on the player's side, and cannot be canceled by the player. Note that in gaming machines that circulate gaming balls without dispensing actual prize balls outside the gaming machine (so-called sealed gaming machines, managed gaming machines), even if the player is allowed to operate the counting button switch to execute the settlement process in the stopped state, the stopped state may continue even after the counting button switch is operated and the settlement process is executed. Furthermore, if the stopped state continues after the settlement process is executed, it is preferable to disable the addition of the normal number of balls held by a new player and the reception of data transfer from the gaming ball lending device 8 so that a new player cannot start playing. Furthermore, in such cases, it is conceivable to control the display mode of the ball count display to a mode that does not accept requests, such as "EEEE," corresponding to a state where play has stopped, to notify new players that they cannot start playing.

In this example, when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, a stoppage state is triggered in which game play is restricted based on one of restriction patterns 1 to 3. This prevents fraudulent activity by preventing large amounts of balls from being awarded to fraudulent players. It also prevents problems such as "addiction" by preventing large amounts of balls from being awarded to legitimate players due to biases in the probability of winning or losing. This allows for the proper management of gaming machines that dispense large amounts of balls.

In addition, in this example, the game restrictions imposed in the game-stop state include "game stop," "launch stop," and "both game stop and launch stop." However, these methods are not limited to these, as long as the restrictions make it difficult to increase the number of balls dispensed after a specific value is reached. For example, as another restriction, the time required for the variable display of all special symbols that begins after the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value (variation time) may be lengthened, so that even if a starting winning occurs, it takes time for the results of the variable display of the special symbols to be displayed, thereby restricting game progress. Furthermore, in a gaming machine that controls the game state to either a low-probability state or a high-probability state with a higher probability of winning than the low-probability state, the game may be forcibly controlled to the low-probability state after the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, regardless of whether a winning event that would require a high-probability state has occurred, thereby restricting game progress. In these cases, since it takes longer to win compared to before the game restriction, the number of balls dispensed becomes less likely to increase, thereby reducing the desire to continue playing. Furthermore, after the amount of dispensed balls reaches a specific value, "play stops" or "firing stops" is not performed, but a special notification corresponding to the amount of dispensed balls reaching a specific value may be issued using the effect display device 1600 or another effect device. In such cases, the progress of the effect is hindered by the special notification, which can reduce the desire to continue playing. Furthermore, when issuing a special notification, it is preferable to display a special image on the entire screen of the effect display device 1600 so that the conventional effect display cannot be seen at all. In such cases, the progress of the effect is significantly hindered, which can more effectively reduce the desire to continue playing.

In addition, in this example, even if the amount of balls dispensed reaches the specific value, the information on the amount of balls dispensed is not erased but is stored and maintained until the clear condition described below is met. After the amount of balls dispensed reaches the specific value, the update of the amounts of balls dispensed A and B (updating the limit counter) may be forcibly stopped, or calculations may continue without stopping. Furthermore, for example, if the update of the amounts of balls dispensed A and B (updating the limit counter) continues without stopping, it is possible that a malfunction or fraudulent act caused game balls to be dispensed when the above-mentioned "discharge stop" was not performed, causing the limit counter to decrease. In such a case, the limit counter may fall below the specific value. Taking this into consideration, it is preferable to continue the limit state without terminating it once the amount of balls dispensed reaches the specific value, even if the limit counter subsequently decreases.

(Clearing restrictions on ball output and play)
The pachinko machine 1 in this example is designed to trigger a stop state when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, but the gaming hall can choose whether to maintain or clear the "amount of balls dispensed calculated before the stop state was initiated" and the "restrictions on play during the stop state" when the power is turned back on after being shut off.

First, there are five power-on patterns available for operation when the power is turned on. Power-on pattern 1 occurs when the RAM clear switch 1310f and setting key switch are not turned on when the power is turned on (when the power switch 751 is operated). No setting changes or confirmation displays are made to the setting values, and the game status (game information) at the time of power shutdown is maintained without being initialized.

Power-on pattern 2 occurs when the RAM clear switch 1310f is turned ON but the setting key switch is not turned ON when the power is turned on. No changes are made to the setting values or confirmation displays are made, but a RAM clear is executed to initialize the RAM built into the main control board 1310, initializing the game state at the time of power cut. However, information related to the setting values is not initialized by the RAM clear.

Power-on pattern 3 occurs when the RAM clear switch 1310f is turned ON and the setting key switch is turned ON when the power is turned on. After changing the setting values, a RAM clear is executed to initialize the RAM built into the main control board 1310, initializing the game state at the time of power cut. However, information related to the setting values is not initialized by the RAM clear.

Power-on pattern 4 occurs when the setting key switch is turned ON without turning ON the RAM clear switch 1310f. After a confirmation display of the setting values is displayed, the game state at the time of power-off is maintained without being initialized.

Power-on pattern 5 is the same as power-on pattern 1 in that the RAM clear switch 1310f and setting key switch are not turned ON when the power is turned on. However, in cases where the gaming machine type is the aforementioned so-called sealed-in gaming machine or managed gaming machine, the ball removal switch, which is provided on the payout control board 633 and used to remove the gaming balls B enclosed in the pachinko machine 1, is turned ON. The gaming state (game information) at the time of power-off is maintained without changing the setting value or displaying a confirmation message. When the ball removal switch is turned ON, the ball removal process described above is executed, allowing the enclosed gaming balls B to be removed to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (ball receiving tray 720). Note that if the RAM clear switch 1310f and setting key switch are both turned ON when the power is turned on, and the ball removal switch is also turned ON, the ball removal process described above is executed first, without changing the setting value, displaying a confirmation message, or clearing the RAM.

As such, of power-on patterns 1 to 5, for power-on patterns 2 and 3, the RAM clear switch 1310f is turned ON when the power is turned on, thereby initializing the game state at the time of power-off, whereas for power-on patterns 1, 4, and 5, the RAM clear switch 1310f is not turned ON when the power is turned on, thereby maintaining the game state at the time of power-off. Note that the game state at the time of power-off includes game states such as high probability state, time-saving state, and winning game state, as well as whether or not a variable display of a currently active special symbol is being displayed, whether or not a hold is being held, etc. Furthermore, when the power is turned on using power-on patterns 2 and 3, the game state at the time of power-off will not be restored, but when the power is turned on using power-on patterns 1, 4, and 5, the game state at the time of power-off will be restored.

Figure 215 is a table showing the clearing conditions for the "amount of balls calculated before the stop state begins" and the "game limits during the stop state." In this example, the system is configured so that one of limited clear pattern tables 1-3, which have different clearing conditions, can be selected. Specifically, a limited clear pattern selection switch operable by the hall manager is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (e.g., the main control board 1310), and one of limited clear pattern tables 1-3 is selected by operating this limited clear pattern selection switch. Note that, in order to reduce the ROM capacity required to store various processing programs, only one of limited clear pattern tables 1-3 may be used. Furthermore, the operation of the limited clear pattern selection switch when selecting limited clear pattern tables 1-3 may be determined only when the power is turned on to reflect which one is selected, or may be determined at any time after the power is turned on to reflect which one is selected at any time (in real time). Additionally, the "amount of balls dispensed" in Figure 215 also includes the "value of the counter for limiting the number of balls dispensed." In this example, if the amount of balls dispensed is maintained, the value of the counter for limiting the number of balls dispensed is also maintained, and if the amount of balls dispensed is cleared, the value of the counter for limiting the number of balls dispensed is also cleared.

Figure 215 (A) shows the limited clear pattern table 1 selected when the limited clear pattern selection switch is set to "1." When power is turned on, power-on pattern 1 maintains the game state at the time of power-off, but also maintains the "amount of balls dispensed before and after the stop state was initiated" and the "game limits during the stop state." When this stop state is maintained, a state in which the game (main game) cannot proceed on the main control board 1310 side remains. Furthermore, as a notification method for the outside world, from the time the power is turned on until a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board 5 and door frame 3 emit blue light, a sound is output from the speaker stating "The amount of balls dispensed and the stop state are being maintained," and an image message stating "The amount of balls dispensed and the stop state are being maintained" is also displayed on the performance display device 1600.

When power is turned on, power-on pattern 2 clears (initializes) the game state at the time of power-off, but also clears (initializes) the "amount of balls dispensed before and after the stop state was initiated" and the "game restrictions during the stop state." Specifically, when game play is restricted by restriction pattern 1 described above, "game is stopped," but the "game stop" is lifted when the stop state is cleared. When game play is restricted by restriction pattern 2, "fire is stopped," but the "fire stop" is lifted when the stop state is cleared. When game play is restricted by restriction pattern 3, "game is stopped" and "fire is stopped," but the "game stop" and "fire stop" are lifted when the stop state is cleared. In either case, game play (main game) can be resumed on the main control board 1310 side. Additionally, as a notification method for the outside world, from the time the power is turned on until a predetermined period of time has passed, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board 5 and door frame 3 are made to emit red light, a sound saying "The ball output limit has been cleared" is output from the speaker, and an image message saying "The ball output limit has been cleared" is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

When power is turned on, power-on pattern 3 clears (initializes) the game state at the time of power-off, but also clears (initializes) the "amount of balls dispensed before and after the stop state was initiated" and the "game limits during the stop state." Furthermore, as a notification method for external notification, from the time the power is turned on until a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board 5 and door frame 3 emit red light, a sound is output from the speaker stating "The amount of balls dispensed and the stop state have been cleared," and an image message stating "The amount of balls dispensed and the stop state have been cleared" is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

Power-on pattern 4 maintains the game state that was in place when the power was turned off when the power was turned on, but also maintains the "amount of balls dispensed before and after the stop state was initiated" and the "game limits during the stop state." Furthermore, as a notification method for external notification, from the time the power is turned on until a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board 5 and door frame 3 emit blue light, a sound is output from the speaker stating "The amount of balls dispensed and the stop state have been cleared," and an image message stating "The amount of balls dispensed and the stop state have been cleared" is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

When power is turned on, power-on pattern 5 maintains the game state that existed when power was turned off, but also maintains the "amount of balls dispensed before and after the stop state was initiated" and the "game limits during the stop state." Furthermore, as a notification method for the outside world, from the time the power is turned on until a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board 5 and door frame 3 emit blue light, a sound is output from the speaker stating "The amount of balls dispensed and the stop state are being maintained," and an image message stating "The amount of balls dispensed and the stop state are being maintained" is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In this way, in limit clear pattern table 1, when the power is turned on, the "amount of balls dispensed before or after the stopped state began" and the "game limits during the stopped state" are cleared (initialized) only if the game state at the time of power interruption is cleared (initialized) as in power-on patterns 2 and 3. On the other hand, when the game state at the time of power interruption is maintained as in power-on patterns 1, 4, and 5, the "amount of balls dispensed before or after the stopped state began" and the "game limits during the stopped state" are maintained. This clears not only the game state at the time of power interruption, but also the amount of balls dispensed and the stopped state all at once, making it less likely that the hall manager will make an operational error when deciding whether to clear the amount of balls dispensed and the stopped state.

Figure 215 (B) shows the restriction clear pattern table 2 that is selected when the restriction clear pattern selection switch is set to "2." Of power-on patterns 1 to 5, power-on patterns 2 to 5 are the same as those in restriction clear pattern table 1, so their explanation will be omitted.

When power is turned on, power-on pattern 1 maintains the game state that existed when power was turned off, but the "amount of balls dispensed before and after the stop state was initiated" and "game limits during the stop state" are cleared (initialized). Furthermore, as a notification method for external notification, from the time the power is turned on until a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board 5 and door frame 3 emit yellow light, a sound is output from the speaker stating "The amount of balls dispensed and the stop state have been cleared," and an image message stating "The amount of balls dispensed and the stop state have been cleared" is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

As such, Power-On Pattern 1 is the same as Power-On Pattern 4 in that it maintains the game state at the time of power-off when the power is turned on, but differs from Power-On Pattern 4 in that it clears (initializes) the "amount of balls dispensed before the stop state began or after the stop state began" and the "game limits during the stop state." In other words, with Limit Clear Pattern Table 2, if the game state at the time of power-off is maintained when the power is turned on, the hall manager can choose whether to clear (initialize) the "amount of balls dispensed before the stop state began or after the stop state began" and the "game limits during the stop state" as in Power-On Pattern 1, or to maintain the "amount of balls dispensed before the stop state began or after the stop state began" and the "game limits during the stop state" as in Power-On Pattern 4. Furthermore, since power-on pattern 1 does not require the RAM clear switch 1310f or setting key switch to be turned on when the power is turned on, the hall manager can easily clear (initialize) the "amount of balls dispensed before and after the stop state begins" and "play restrictions during the stop state."

Figure 215 (C) shows restriction clear pattern table 3, which is selected when the restriction clear pattern selection switch is set to "3." Of power-on patterns 1 to 5, power-on patterns 1, 3 to 5 are the same as those in restriction clear pattern table 1, so their explanation will be omitted.

When power is turned on, power-on pattern 2 clears (initializes) the game state at the time of power-off, but maintains the "amount of balls dispensed before and after the stop state was initiated" and the "game limits during the stop state." Furthermore, as a notification method for the outside world, from the time the power is turned on until a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board 5 and door frame 3 emit blue light, a sound is output from the speaker stating "The amount of balls dispensed and the stop state are being maintained," and an image message stating "The amount of balls dispensed and the stop state are being maintained" is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

As such, Power-On Pattern 2 is the same as Power-On Pattern 3 in that it clears (initializes) the game state at the time of power-off when the power is turned on, but differs from Power-On Pattern 3 in that it maintains the "amount of balls dispensed before and after the stop state began" and the "game limits during the stop state." In other words, with Limit Clear Pattern Table 3, when the game state at the time of power-off is cleared (initialized) when the power is turned on, the hall manager can choose whether to maintain the "amount of balls dispensed before and after the stop state began" and the "game limits during the stop state" as in Power-On Pattern 2, or to clear (initialize) the "amount of balls dispensed before and after the stop state began" and the "game limits during the stop state" as in Power-On Pattern 3. Furthermore, only when the power is turned on using power-on pattern 3 can the "amount of balls dispensed before the stop state began and after the stop state began" and "game limits during the stop state" be cleared (initialized); for power-on pattern 3, since both the RAM clear switch 1310f and the setting key switch must be turned ON when the power is turned on, clearing (initializing) the "amount of balls dispensed before the stop state began and after the stop state began" and "game limits during the stop state" can only be done under strict supervision by the hall manager.

In this example, the amount of balls dispensed can be cleared (initialized) by turning the power on in a specified power-on pattern, but as another example, it may be possible to clear (initialize) it every unit of time (for example, three hours). In this way, if the amount of balls dispensed were not cleared (initialized) every unit of time (for example, three hours), the amount of balls dispensed by the previous player's play would affect the next player in terms of whether the amount of balls dispensed reached a specific value. However, by clearing (initializing) the amount of balls dispensed every unit of time (for example, three hours), it is possible to make it less likely that the amount of balls dispensed by the previous player's play will affect the next player.

(Details of gaming restrictions)
In this example, when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, the main control board 1310 enters a stop state in which play is restricted, and details of this will be explained below.

Figure 216 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value and play is restricted. Here, we explain the case where, at timing t1, it is determined that the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value due to the payout of prize balls based on balls entering the winning slot, the stop-play flag is determined to be ON, and the machine transitions to a stop-play state. Furthermore, when the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, restriction pattern 3, which performs both "play stop" and "firing stop," is selected as the restriction on play in the stop-play state. Furthermore, after transitioning to the stop-play state, when the power is turned back on after being shut off, a power-on pattern is selected that maintains the play state at the time of power-off, as well as the number of balls dispensed and the stop-play state.

As shown in Figure 216, prior to timing t1, the game state on the main control board 1310 side is controlled to the normal state (a state where the game is not at a stop), and this is a period during which the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can proceed. In other words, in the normal state where the game is not at a stop, the variable display of special symbols can begin when a starting win occurs, and when the variable display of special symbols stops and displays as a winning symbol, the jackpot game can begin, allowing normal gameplay to be played.

Furthermore, the effect display device 1600, Lamp A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration members), Lamp B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), Lamp C (LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the function display unit 1400), speaker, and movable body are configured to perform their normal operations before timing t1. Note that Lamp C is controlled by the main control board 1310, while the other components are controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. Here, for Lamp C, multiple LEDs on the function display unit 1400 light up or flash as the game progresses. On the other hand, for the components instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510, when the special symbol variable display is not being executed, they are configured to perform an operation corresponding to a standby effect (e.g., a demo effect) while waiting for the special symbol variable display to begin. When the special symbol variable display is being executed, they are configured to perform an operation corresponding to a variable effect (an effect based on a variable pattern) based on the variable pattern command received by the peripheral control board 1510. For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variation pattern command, the performance display device 1600 executes a performance display (for example, a reach performance) that includes a variation display of the decorative pattern, the LEDs of lamps A and B light up or blink in conjunction with the performance display executed by the performance display device 1600, the speaker outputs sound in conjunction with the performance display executed by the performance display device 1600, and the movable body performs a predetermined operation in conjunction with the performance display executed by the performance display device 1600.

The external terminal board can also output predetermined signals to the hall computer, and by receiving these signals, the hall computer can understand the behavior of the pachinko machine 1. For example, it outputs corresponding signals when a starting win occurs, when the special symbol variable display stops at a winning symbol and a jackpot game is being played, or when an abnormality is detected.

In addition, before timing t1, when the player operates the handle 160, it is possible to launch a game ball into the game area 5a.

In addition, the base monitor 1310h counts the number of game balls B that enter the ball entrance (winning entrance, outgoing entrance) (number of entering balls) and the number of game balls B that are paid out as prize balls (number of paid out), calculates the ratio of the number of paid out balls to the number of entering balls, and displays the calculation result as a base value, but it is possible to perform such calculations before timing t1.

In addition, before timing t1, when a ball is detected entering the prize slot, a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out as prize balls, and the number of game balls the player has is increased by the number of game balls paid out as prize balls, and the limit counter is also updated.

Next, when the main control board 1310 detects a ball entering the winning slot at time tx, which is before time t1, the peripheral control board 1510 uses some components such as the performance display device 1600 to perform the pre-announcement operation. Here, the ball entering the winning slot at time tx is the ball that entered the winning slot one slot before the ball entering the winning slot at time t1, and even if prize balls are paid out (a number of prize balls is awarded) based on the ball entering the winning slot at time tx, the amount of balls paid out will not reach the specific value. However, when prize balls are paid out (a number of prize balls is awarded) based on the ball entering the winning slot at time t1, the amount of balls paid out will reach the specific value.

The operation during advance notification is performed using the effect display device 1600 and lamp B. Specifically, the effect display device 1600 displays the message "+XX shots remaining until play limit" as an advance notification display, and lamp B flashes an LED as an advance notification light. This allows the player to know that play will soon be restricted. Furthermore, because the operation during advance notification uses only some components such as the effect display device 1600, variable effects based on the winning combination can be executed, and the player's interest in the variable effects will not be lost.

In this example, the pre-notification action is executed when the ball lands one ball before the ball lands in the winning slot at timing t1, but the pre-notification action can be executed at any timing before the specific value is reached, such as from an earlier ball (for example, five balls before that). Also, before the ball lands in the winning slot at timing t1, the pre-notification action may be executed each time a predetermined number of balls are lands or a special pattern is displayed. Another example of the pre-notification action is to display "+xx balls remaining until play limit" based on the number of balls dispensed at that time for a certain period of time after power-on, or at all times after power-on, to let the player know the approximate time until play is limited.

Next, at timing t1, it is determined that the number of balls dispensed will reach a specific value due to the payout of prize balls based on the ball entering the winning slot. When the main control board 1310 detects a ball entering the winning slot, it turns on the stop flag and transitions to a "stop state" in which restriction pattern 3, which both "stops gameplay" and "stops launching," is applied. In the stop state, game balls cannot be launched, and the main control board 1310 is in a stop state in which it is not possible to progress the game (main game). In other words, in the stop state, the special symbol variable display and jackpot game are not executed, and even if a starting win occurs, the special symbol variable display will not be newly initiated.

Furthermore, the effect display device 1600, lamps A-C, speaker, and movable body perform their actions when progress is not possible after a predetermined time has elapsed from timing t1. Specifically, the effect display device 1600 displays the message "Play is restricted" as a progress-not possible indication, lamps A and B light up or blink in a single color as a progress-not possible LED, and the speaker outputs a sound indicating progress is not possible saying, "Play is restricted as the daily ball payout limit has been reached."

In addition, Lamp C is equipped with a functional display unit 1400 including a status indicator, normal symbol indicator, normal hold indicator, first special symbol indicator, first special hold number indicator, second special symbol indicator, second special hold number indicator, and round indicator, and all of these LEDs are lit. However, as another example, the functional display unit 1400 may be equipped with an LED dedicated to end-of-play notification, and in the end-of-play state, the dedicated LED for end-of-play notification may be lit and the other LEDs may be turned off.

Moving bodies are also put into an inoperable state where they will not operate after a predetermined time has elapsed since timing t1. For example, if a moving body is in operation before the predetermined time has elapsed since timing t1, the moving body is forcibly stopped mid-operation once the predetermined time has elapsed since timing t1. However, as another example, a moving body that is not in its initial position may be returned to its initial position after the predetermined time has elapsed since timing t1, and then stopped. In this way, even if the moving body is located in front of the display area of the performance display device 1600 once the predetermined time has elapsed since timing t1, the moving body will return to its initial position after the predetermined time has elapsed since timing t1, making it difficult to miss the progress-impossible display being displayed on the performance display device 1600.

In this example, the game transitions to a stop state at time t1, but the effect display device 1600, lamps A to C, speaker, and movable body perform their actions when progress is impossible after a predetermined time has passed since time t1. This means that if a ball enters a prize slot at time t1, a prize ball based on the ball entering the prize slot will be paid out afterwards. However, by performing the action when progress is impossible after a predetermined time has passed since time t1, it is possible to wait for the prize ball based on the ball entering the prize slot to be paid out before performing the action when progress is impossible, preventing any sense of incongruity. However, the effect display device 1600, lamps A to C, speaker, and movable body may also be configured to perform their action when progress is impossible from time t1.

In addition, at timing t1, the external terminal board transitions to a stopped state and outputs a security signal. This security signal is output when an abnormality is detected, a setting value is changed, or a setting value confirmation display is in progress, and the same security signal is output even when the system transitions to a stopped state. In other words, in the stopped state, a forced output state is entered in which a security signal is forcibly output, even when an abnormality is not detected, a setting value is not changed, or a setting value confirmation display is not in progress. As a result, in the stopped state, a security signal is output to the hall computer, allowing the hall to know that the system has transitioned to a stopped state.

In addition, in this example, at time t1, the system transitions to a halted state and outputs a security signal. However, if a security signal based on the detection of an abnormality is being output at time t1, the system will terminate the security signal being output and not output a new security signal, but will continue to output the security signal being output. This will prevent the hall from mistakenly believing that the detection of an abnormality has ended.

In addition, in this example, in addition to the security signal, the external terminal board outputs various signals to the hall computer to inform it of the game status, balls entering the winning slot, and the payout of prize balls. If any of these signals are being output at timing t1, the signals being output are terminated before the security signal is output. This allows the hall to reliably understand that the game has entered a stop state.

Furthermore, after the transition to the no-play state at timing t1, it is not possible for game balls to be fired into the play area 5a when the player operates the handle 160. However, in this example, if restriction pattern 3, which performs both "play stop" and "fire stop" when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, is selected, and restriction pattern 1, which only performs "play stop" but does not perform "fire stop" when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, is selected, game balls will be able to be fired into the play area 5a when the player operates the handle 160 after the transition to the no-play state.

Furthermore, at timing t1, after the transition to the no-play state, the number of game balls B that enter the ball entrance (winning entrance, outgoing entrance) (number of entering balls) and the number of game balls B that are paid out as prize balls (number of paid out) are not counted. In other words, it is not possible to perform calculations regarding the ratio of the number of paid out balls to the number of entering balls, and this is not reflected in the base value displayed on the base monitor 1310h. However, the number of game balls B that enter the ball entrance (winning entrance, outgoing entrance) (number of entering balls) may be counted, and a calculation may be performed regarding the ratio of the number of paid out balls to the number of entering balls, which may be reflected in the base value displayed on the base monitor 1310h.

Furthermore, after transitioning to the no-play state at timing t1, for balls detected entering a prize slot before timing t1, a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out as prize balls, and the number of game balls paid out as prize balls can be added to the player's ball count. This allows the player to obtain prize balls up to the number of game balls until the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value. On the other hand, for balls detected entering a prize slot after transitioning to the no-play state at timing t1, the predetermined number of game balls will not be paid out as prize balls, and will not be added to the player's ball count. However, it is also possible to configure the system not to detect balls entering a prize slot after transitioning to the no-play state at timing t1. Similarly, even if a ball enters a prize slot, the predetermined number of game balls will not be paid out as prize balls, and will not be added to the player's ball count.

In this example, when a ball is detected entering a prize slot at timing t1, even though no prize balls have been paid out based on the ball entering that prize slot, it is determined that the number of balls paid out will reach a specific value due to the payout of prize balls based on the ball entering the prize slot, and the machine transitions to a stopped state. However, a different method may be adopted. For example, instead of transitioning to a stopped state when a ball is detected entering a prize slot at timing t1, the machine may transition to a stopped state when the payout of prize balls based on the ball entering that prize slot is completed and the number of balls paid out reaches a specific value. This makes it possible to transition to a stopped state only after the payout of prize balls based on the ball entering the prize slot is completed and the number of balls paid out reaches a specific value, preventing any sense of incongruity.

In addition, in this example, after transitioning to the play-stop state at timing t1, no abnormality determination is made to determine whether or not an abnormality such as magnetism or vibration has been detected. In other words, even if an abnormality is detected after transitioning to the play-stop state, no abnormality determination is made, and therefore no abnormality notification is issued to notify the outside world that an abnormality has occurred. In this way, after transitioning to the play-stop state, by executing an action corresponding to the play-stop state when progress is impossible, taking priority over an abnormality notification, it is possible to ensure that players and hall managers are aware that a play-stop state has been entered. However, after transitioning to the play-stop state at timing t1, it is also possible to configure the system not to detect abnormalities such as magnetism or vibration. Similarly, even if no abnormality is detected, no abnormality notification to notify the outside world that an abnormality has occurred will be issued, even if an abnormality has occurred.

Next, after transitioning to the stopped state, the power is shut off at timing t2, and then turned back on at timing t3. In this example, after transitioning to the stopped state, when the power is turned back on after being shut off, a power-on pattern is selected that maintains the game state at the time of power-off, as well as the amount of balls dispensed and the stopped state. Therefore, after the power is turned back on at timing t3, the normal state (a state where the stopped state is not reached) is not restored, and the stopped state is maintained, just as from timing t1 to t2.

The stopped state remains the same as it was between t1 and t2. In other words, since the stopped state is maintained after the power is turned back on at time t3, for example, a period during which the game (main game) cannot proceed on the main control board 1310 side is assumed, and the display device 1600, lamps A-C, speaker, and movable body perform the operations required for a game that cannot proceed. This allows players and hall managers to recognize that the stopped state has been restored when the power is turned back on after being shut off. In this example, although not shown, before performing the operations required for a game that cannot proceed, the speaker outputs a sound stating, "The ball volume and stopped state are maintained," and the display device 1600 temporarily displays a message stating, "The ball volume and stopped state are maintained." Furthermore, the LEDs of lamps A-C are set to emit light in a color corresponding to the power-on pattern selected when the power is turned back on. It is also possible to omit the period during which the speaker outputs the voice "The ball output amount and capped state are being maintained" and the effect display device 1600 displays the message image "The ball output amount and capped state are being maintained."

Furthermore, after the power is turned back on at timing t3, the effect display device 1600 displays the message "Play is restricted" to indicate that progress is not possible, but the message content may be changed from the state in which play was restricted between timings t1 and t2. Also, at the same time as or prior to the display of "Play is restricted," a message is displayed stating "Ball volume and play is restricted, but not limited" so that when the power is turned back on the next business day, the hall manager will be aware that the situation has continued from the previous day, and this prevents the hall manager from becoming confused when play is suddenly restricted.

Furthermore, when the power is turned on normally, rather than when the power is turned back on after being shut off in a stopped state, the normal power-on sound is output from the speaker. However, in this example, after the power is turned back on at timing t3, the speaker outputs the sound "The ball output amount and stopped state are maintained," but the normal power-on sound is not output. In this way, when the stopped state is restored when the power is turned back on, the sound "The ball output amount and stopped state are maintained" is output from the speaker in priority over the normal power-on sound, ensuring that players and hall managers are aware that the stopped state has been restored.

Furthermore, when power is turned on normally, rather than when power is turned on again after being shut off in a stalled state, the movable body performs an initial operation to check whether the movable body is operating normally and to align it with its initial position. However, in this example, at timing t3, after power is turned on again, the movable body has stopped operating and does not perform the initial operation. In this way, if the stopped state is restored when power is turned on again, the movable body does not perform the initial operation, which makes it clear that it has not been returned to the normal state (a state that is not in a stalled state). However, at timing t3, after power is turned on again, the movable body may perform the initial operation.

Figure 217 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when game play restrictions are lifted when the power is turned back on after a power outage. In the above explanation, after the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value and transitions to a capped state, the game state at the time of power outage is maintained, and the amount of balls dispensed and the capped state are maintained when the power is turned back on after a power outage. However, in this example, when the power is turned back on after a power outage, the game state at the time of power outage is cleared (initialized), and the amount of balls dispensed and the capped state are cleared (initialized). Specifically, after transitioning to a capped state, a power-on pattern is selected that clears (initializes) the game state at the time of power outage and clears (initializes) the amount of balls dispensed and the capped state when the power is turned back on after a power outage. Here, the explanation is the same as above up until the power is turned off at timing t2, so the explanation is for the period from when the power is turned back on at timing t3 onwards.

As shown in FIG. 217, after the power is shut off in the stopped state, the power is turned back on at timing t3. When the power is turned back on after the shutoff, the selected power-on pattern is to clear (initialize) the game state at the time of the power shutoff, as well as clear (initialize) the ball payout amount and the stopped state. Therefore, after the power is turned back on at timing t3, the stopped state flag is turned OFF, and the stopped state is not maintained. However, before returning to the normal state (a state where the game is not stopped), the system is controlled to a recovery waiting state in which it waits for a return to the normal state (a state where the game is not stopped). The recovery waiting state is a period during which it is impossible to progress the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side. In other words, in the stopped state, the special symbol variable display and jackpot game are not executed, and even if a start win occurs, the special symbol variable display is not newly started.

Furthermore, the performance display device 1600, lamps A to C, speaker, and movable body perform their recovery operations at timing t3. Specifically, the performance display device 1600 displays the message "The ball output and ball stop states have been cleared" as a recovery display, lamps A to C emit LEDs in the color corresponding to the power-on pattern selected when the power is turned back on as a recovery light, and the speaker outputs the recovery sound "The ball output and ball stop states have been cleared."

Furthermore, at time t3, the movable body is placed in an inoperable state where it cannot move.

In addition, the external terminal board outputs a security signal at timing t3, just as it would if the system had transitioned to a stopped state. In other words, in the recovery waiting state, a forced output state is set in which a security signal is forcibly output, even though no abnormalities have been detected, no setting values have been changed, or no setting values are being displayed for confirmation. As a result, in the recovery waiting state, a security signal is output to the hall computer, allowing the hall to know that the stopped state may be lifted.

Furthermore, at timing t3, after the transition to the return waiting state, it is disabled for game balls to be fired into the play area 5a when the player operates the handle 160. As described above in detail, if restriction pattern 1 is selected, which only performs "play stop" but does not perform "fire stop" when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, it is possible for game balls to be fired into the play area 5a when the player operates the handle 160 after the transition to the shot limit state. However, even in such a case, after the transition to the return waiting state at timing t3, it is disabled for game balls to be fired into the play area 5a when the player operates the handle 160.

Furthermore, at timing t3, after the transition to the recovery waiting state, the number of game balls B that enter the ball entrance (winning entrance, outgoing entrance) (number of entering balls) and the number of game balls B that are paid out as prize balls (number of paid out) are not counted. In other words, it is not possible to perform calculations regarding the ratio of the number of paid out balls to the number of entering balls, and this is not reflected in the base value displayed on the base monitor 1310h.

Furthermore, after transitioning to the return waiting state at timing t3, even if a ball is detected entering the winning slot, the specified number of game balls will not be paid out as prize balls, and they will not be added to the number of balls the player has. However, after transitioning to the return waiting state at timing t3, the system may be configured not to detect balls entering the winning slot, and similarly, even if a ball entering the winning slot is not detected in the first place, even if a ball enters the winning slot, the specified number of game balls will not be paid out as prize balls, and they will not be added to the number of balls the player has.

Next, at time t4, a predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) after time t3, the wait-for-return state ends, and the game state on the main control board 1310 transitions to the normal state (a state where play is not stopped). Here, the normal state (a state where play is not stopped) is the same as the normal state (a state where play is not stopped) before time t1, and the restrictions on play during the stopped state are lifted. Note that the timing for ending the wait-for-return state does not have to be the predetermined time (e.g., 5 seconds) after time t3, but may also be triggered by the hall manager performing a predetermined restart operation. For example, if the power-on operation at time t3 is power-on pattern 3, an example of a restart operation would be to turn off the setting key switch by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise to return it to its initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch OFF).

At timing t4, after returning to the normal state (not the stopped state), lamps A to C perform the initial light emission when powered on. Lamps A to C also perform the initial light emission when powered on normally, not just when power is turned on again after being shut off in the stopped state.

Furthermore, at timing t4, after returning to the normal state (a state that is not in a stopped state), the speaker outputs the normal power-on sound. Note that the speaker also outputs the normal power-on sound when the power is turned on normally, not when the power is turned on again after being shut off in a stopped state.

Furthermore, after returning to the normal state (non-stop state) at timing t4, the movable body undergoes initial operation to check whether the movable body operates normally and to align it with its initial position. Note that the initial operation of the movable body is also performed when the power is turned on normally, not just when the power is turned on again after being shut off in the stop state. However, the initial operation of the movable body may be performed at timing t3, before returning to the normal state (non-stop state). This allows the initial operation of the movable body to be completed before returning to the normal state (non-stop state), and allows operation corresponding to the variation effect (effect based on the variation pattern) to be performed immediately after the return.

In addition, the external terminal board outputs a security signal at time t3 during the recovery wait state, but by the time a predetermined amount of time has passed since time t4, the system has returned to normal (a state where the game is not stopped), but the security signal continues to be output. As a result, even if the recovery wait state ends in a short time, the security signal continues to be output to the hall computer, allowing the hall to know that the game may be released from the stopped state.

In this example, after the power is shut off in a stopped state, the power is turned back on at timing t3. When the power is turned back on after being shut off, it is controlled to a recovery waiting state and then returns to the normal state (a state where the game is not stopped). However, as an alternative example, when the power is turned back on after being shut off, it may return to the normal state (a state where the game is not stopped) without being controlled to a recovery waiting state. This allows gameplay to begin immediately after the power is turned back on after being shut off.

(Example of a presentation when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during a jackpot or while a special symbol is being displayed)
In this example, when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, a game restriction is implemented. Of the balls dispensed, ball amount A is the difference between the value at the time the limit counter reached its highest and the value at the time the limit counter reached its lowest. Ball amount B is the difference between the value at the time the limit counter reached its highest and the predetermined initial value of 0. Both involve the value at the time the number of balls held is at its highest. When a game ball enters the large prize slot 2005 during a jackpot game, or when a game ball enters a prize slot other than the large prize slot 2005 (the general prize slot 2001, the first start slot 2002, or the second start slot 2004) during a variable or non-variable display of special symbols, the payout number increases and the limit counter increases due to the payout of prize balls. Therefore, when the balls enter, it is determined that the amount of balls dispensed has reached a specific value, and game restriction is implemented. Here, we will first explain a specific example of the presentation when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value at the moment a game ball enters the large prize opening 2005 during a jackpot game, and then we will explain a specific example of the presentation when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value at the moment a game ball enters the general prize opening 2001 during the changing display of special patterns.

Figure 218 shows a specific example of a presentation in which the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value when a game ball enters the large prize opening during jackpot play. In this example, 80,000 is set as the "specific value" described above, and either restriction pattern 1 or restriction pattern 3 is selected as the "restriction pattern" described above. That is, if restriction pattern 1 is set, a game-stop state is triggered when the amount of balls dispensed reaches the specific value (80,000 balls), accompanied by a "game stop." If restriction pattern 3 is set, a game-stop state is triggered when the amount of balls dispensed reaches the specific value (80,000 balls), accompanied by a "game stop" and a "fire stop." In addition, in this example, if the result of the special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, a 10-round jackpot game is awarded in which the large prize opening 2005 and the bonus prize opening 2006 are opened and closed, and a high probability state is awarded after the jackpot play ends.

As shown in Figure 218 (A), the effect display device 1600 executes a variable effect (an effect based on a variable pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, and displays the variable decorative symbol in the central area of the effect display device 1600. Here, depending on the result of the lottery for the special symbol, or during the "consecutive win mode" in which a high probability state continues due to the receipt of game ball B into the V winning slot 2007, if the lottery result for the special symbol is a winning one, "777" is displayed as the stopping symbol for the decorative symbol in the central area of the effect display device 1600. In addition, in the upper right area of the effect display device 1600, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed, and if the lottery result for the special symbol is a winning one, "○" is displayed as the stopping symbol for the second decorative symbol. Additionally, the lower left area of the effect display device 1600 displays a pending display for the amount of time that the game ball has entered the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004, but the variable display of the special symbol is on hold. Additionally, the lower right area of the effect display device 1600 displays a "consecutive win mode" message indicating that the game is in "consecutive win mode," and also displays a "hit right" arrow instructing the player to aim for the game ball to enter the large prize opening 2005 located in the game area 5a to the right of the effect display device 1600 during jackpot play.

As shown in Figure 218 (B), at the start of a jackpot game, the message "Special Bonus! Aim for V!" is displayed in the central area of the effect display device 1600, and the large prize entry port 2005 and special prize entry port 2006 begin to open and close during the jackpot game, and the player is advised to aim for the game ball to enter the V prize entry port 2007 during the jackpot game.

As shown in Figure 218 (C), during a jackpot game, the current number of rounds is displayed in the upper left area of the effect display device 1600, and the total number of prize balls paid out as game balls enter the jackpot slot 2005 during "consecutive win mode" is displayed in the center area of the effect display device 1600. Here, "3R" is displayed as the current number of rounds, and "18,000 GET" is displayed as the total number of prize balls.

In this example, before the main control board 1310 reaches a specific value and restricts play, it monitors the number of balls remaining until the specific value is reached. When a game ball enters the large prize slot 2005, which brings the remaining number of balls to "+1500," the advance flag is turned ON, and the advance flag ON information is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 then receives the advance flag ON information and continues to execute the advance notification operation until the specific value is reached (until the remaining number of balls reaches 0). The amount of balls dispensed is calculated on the main control board 1310 based on a counter for limiting the number of balls fired, which is the difference between the number of balls fired and the number of balls paid out. In other words, the number of balls remaining until the specific value is reached increases as the number of balls fired increases, and decreases as the number of balls paid out increases. Furthermore, the operation during advance notification continues once the number of balls dispensed reaches a predetermined value (in this example, when the number of balls remaining until the number of balls dispensed reaches the specific value is 1,500, i.e., when the number of balls dispensed reaches 78,500), until the number of balls dispensed reaches the specific value, so that the player does not miss information regarding game restrictions.

In addition, in this example, once a pre-announcement has been made, even if the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value subsequently exceeds a predetermined value (1,500 remaining), the pre-announcement is not terminated and continues until the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value. Specifically, even if the number of balls shot increases after the pre-announcement flag ON information is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 and the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls dispensed exceeds the predetermined value (1,500 remaining), the main control board 1310 keeps the pre-announcement flag ON without turning it OFF. As a result, even if the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value of 1,500, then exceeds 1,500, and then reaches 1,500 again, the main control board 1310 does not switch the pre-announcement flag frequently, preventing the pre-announcement flag ON information from being sent multiple times to the peripheral control board 1510, thereby avoiding control burdens and complexity.

As shown in Figure 218 (D), when a game ball enters the large prize opening 2005 during a jackpot game, and the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value becomes "+1500 balls," an advance notice display "+1500 balls remaining until the game limit" is displayed in the upper area of the effect display device 1600 as an advance notice operation, indicating the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value. Here, the final "10R" is displayed as the current number of rounds, and "18,800 balls GET" is displayed as the total number of prize balls. The effect display device 1600 continuously displays the current round number in the upper left area, the total number of prize balls paid out as a result of game balls entering the jackpot slot 2005 during the "consecutive win mode" in the upper area, the stop symbol for the second decorative symbol in the upper right area, and a "hit right" arrow in the lower right area, even before the advance notice display is displayed. The advance notice display indicating "+1500 balls remaining until the game limit" is displayed so as to overlap the background image, but is not overlapped with important information displays related to the ongoing jackpot game. Specifically, in this example, the "current round number," "total number of prize balls," and "'hit right' arrow" are important information displays that should be recognized by the player, so the advance notice display is displayed in a position that does not overlap these information displays. Note that the advance notice display may overlap at least a portion of the information displays, as long as the content of the information displays can be recognized without being completely obscured by the player. This allows players to play smoothly during a jackpot game without missing the information displayed about the jackpot game in progress. The movable body can be moved toward the front of the display device 1600 during a jackpot game, but it can also be moved toward the front while the advance notice display, "+1500 shots remaining until play limit," is displayed. This prevents a decline in interest in the game during a jackpot game.

As shown in Figure 218 (E), at the end of a jackpot game, the message "Continuous win mode continues! (10th time)" is displayed in the central area of the effect display device 1600, informing the player that the high probability state will continue again after the jackpot game ends (that "Continuous win mode" will continue). Here, at the end of a jackpot game, just as during a jackpot game, a pre-notification display stating "+1500 shots remaining until play limit" is displayed. Note that because the message "Continuous win mode continues! (10th time)" is also an important information display that the player must be aware of, the pre-notification display is displayed in a position that does not overlap with this information display. Note that the pre-notification display may overlap at least a portion of the information display, as long as the content of the information display can be recognized and not so much that it becomes invisible to the player.

As shown in Figure 218 (F), during "consecutive wins mode," when a variation effect (a performance based on a variation pattern) corresponding to the variation display of a special symbol is executed again, a variation display of a decorative symbol is displayed in the central area of the effect display device 1600. Furthermore, a variation display of a second decorative symbol is displayed in the upper right area of the effect display device 1600. Furthermore, four pending displays are displayed in the lower left area of the effect display device 1600, and it is possible to change the appearance of pending displays with a high probability of winning. Furthermore, while the variation display of decorative symbols is in progress, the volume and light intensity can be adjusted by operating the setting adjustment button 204. While the volume or light intensity is being adjusted, an image corresponding to the volume or light intensity being adjusted is displayed in the left area of the effect display device 1600. The image corresponding to the volume or light intensity being adjusted begins displaying when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, and disappears after a certain amount of time has passed since the start of display.

Furthermore, while the decorative symbol changes during "consecutive win mode," a pre-notification display stating "+1500 shots remaining until play limit" is displayed, just as during jackpot play. The effect display device 1600 displays the decorative symbol change display in the central area, the second decorative symbol change display in the upper right area, the "consecutive win mode" message and a "hit right" arrow in the lower right area, a hold display in the lower left area, and images corresponding to volume and light intensity in the left area. While the pre-notification display stating "+1500 shots remaining until play limit" is displayed so as to overlap the background image, it is not displayed so as to overlap important information displays related to the variable play currently being performed. Specifically, in this example, the "decorative symbol change display," "second decorative symbol change display," "'consecutive win mode' message," "'hit right' arrow," "hold display," and "images corresponding to volume and light intensity" are important information displays that should be recognized by the player, and therefore the pre-notification display is displayed in a position that does not overlap these information displays. Note that the advance notice display may overlap at least a portion of these information displays, as long as the information displays are not completely overlapped and the player can still see the contents of the information displays. This allows players to play smoothly during variable play without missing the information displays related to the variable play currently in progress. Note that the movable body can be moved toward the front of the effect display device 1600 during variable play, but when the advance notice display saying "+1500 shots remaining until play limit" is displayed, the movable body may be moved toward the front. This prevents a decrease in interest in the game during variable play.

As shown in Figure 218 (G), when the special symbol lottery results in a winning combination again during the "consecutive wins mode," "777" is displayed as the decorative symbol stopping symbol in the central area of the effect display device 1600. Here too, the advance notice display of "+1500 shots remaining until play limit" is displayed so as to overlap the background image, but is displayed so as not to overlap the decorative symbol stopping symbol "777" (a type of important information display), allowing the player to see the decorative symbol stopping symbol "777."

As shown in FIG. 218 (H), when a jackpot game is started again, the message "Special Bonus! Aim for V!" is displayed in the central area of the effect display device 1600, and the opening and closing of the large prize entry port 2005 and the accessory prize entry port 2006 begins during the jackpot game, and the player is informed that they should aim for the game ball to enter the V prize entry port 2007 during the jackpot game. At this point, just like during the previous jackpot game, the advance notice display "+1500 shots remaining until play limit" is displayed. Here again, the advance notice display "+1500 shots remaining until play limit" is displayed so as to overlap with the background image, but not so as to overlap with the message "Special Bonus! Aim for V!" (a type of important information display), allowing the player to see the message "Special Bonus! Aim for V!".

As shown in Figure 218 (I), during a jackpot game, the current round number is displayed in the upper left area of the effect display device 1600, and the total number of prize balls paid out as game balls enter the large prize slot 2005 during "consecutive win mode" is displayed in the center area of the effect display device 1600. Here, "10R" is displayed as the current round number, and "19,900 balls GET" is displayed as the total number of prize balls. At this point, the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls paid out reaches a specific value has decreased due to the payout of prize balls during the jackpot game, and a pre-notification display is displayed stating "+10 balls remaining until the game limit is reached."

In this example, before the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value and game play is restricted, the number of balls remaining until the number of balls dispensed reaches that specific value is monitored. However, if the number of remaining balls becomes "+0" due to the payout of prize balls based on game balls entering the large prize opening 2005 during jackpot play, the game stop flag is turned ON as the number of balls dispensed reaches the specific value, and the game transitions to a game stop state until a specified clear condition is met, while performing an operation when progress is impossible. Then, at the point where the game transitions to the game stop state, the jackpot play in progress is stopped (interrupted), thereby forcibly closing the large prize opening 2005. No more game balls will enter the large prize opening 2005, and game play restrictions will begin.

As shown in Figure 218 (J), when the number of balls remaining until the number of balls released reaches a specific value due to the payout of prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the large prize slot 2005 during jackpot play reaches "+0 balls" (when the game transitions to a dead-end state), the upper area of the effect display device 1600 displays a pre-announcement message for a predetermined period of time (5 seconds in this example) indicating the number of balls remaining until the number of balls released reaches a specific value. Here, "10R" is displayed as the current number of rounds, and "19,915 balls GET" is displayed as the total number of prize balls. Then, when a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example) has passed since the pre-announcement message "+0 balls remaining until the game limit" was displayed, an image corresponding to the dead-end state shown in Figure 218 (K) is displayed.

In this example, the total number of prize balls and the content of the advance notice displayed on the effect display device 1600 are reflected in the amount of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the large prize opening 2005. However, the total number of prize balls and the content of the advance notice display are not displayed at the time when a game ball enters the large prize opening 2005, which will cause the amount of balls paid out to reach a specific value, but are displayed continuously until a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example) has passed since the amount of prize balls is reflected in the total number of prize balls and the content of the advance notice display. This prevents players from missing information regarding whether the amount of balls paid out has reached a specific value, and ensures that the player is aware of the reason why the game will subsequently enter a limit state. Also, just before the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value becomes "+0 balls," a pre-notification display stating "+10 balls remaining until play limit" is displayed. However, with regard to the prize balls (15 in this example) that are dispensed when a game ball enters the large prize opening 2005, even if the number of prize balls exceeds the number of balls remaining until the specific value is reached, the excess prize balls (5 in this example) are dispensed. This prevents a situation where prize balls are not dispensed for the number of prize balls that exceeds the specific value even though a game ball has entered the large prize opening 2005, making it less likely that players will become dissatisfied. However, if monitoring the amount of balls dispensed is important from the perspective of preventing fraud, the excess prize balls may not be dispensed for the number of prize balls that exceeds the specific value.

In the above, the total number of prize balls and the contents of the advance notice display are not displayed until the amount of prize balls dispensed reaches a specific value, but are displayed continuously until the amount of prize balls is reflected in the total number of prize balls and the contents of the advance notice display. However, it is also possible to end the display when the amount of dispensed balls reaches a specific value and display an image corresponding to the stop state. In other words, instead of displaying the image shown in Figure 218 (J), it is also possible to proceed to the image shown in Figure 218 (K), which will be described later. In this way, the game will transition to the stop state when the amount of dispensed balls reaches a specific value, but at the same time, by displaying an image corresponding to the stop state, the player can immediately understand that the game has transitioned to the stop state.

In addition, once the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, the game transitions to a stop state and game restrictions are implemented. Therefore, to prevent players from accidentally firing game balls, it is preferable to make the "hit right" arrow that encourages the game ball to be released invisible to the player after the image corresponding to the stop state is displayed, and in this example it is erased. In addition, even in other situations, if the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value while a display encouraging the game ball to be released (for example, a hit right display, a hit left display, a "Aim for V!" display, etc.) is being displayed, the display encouraging the game ball to be released is made invisible to the player (it is erased) at that point.

As shown in Figure 218 (K), when the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value and game play is restricted, the display device 1600 displays an image corresponding to the game play limit. The image corresponding to the game play limit displays the message "Game Play Limit," along with messages such as "The daily ball play limit of 80,000 balls has been reached, so game play is restricted," "Please call an attendant," and "The Settlement Button is Enabled." The settlement button here refers to the counting button switch used to execute the settlement process. Furthermore, before the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, the display device 1600 displays the current round number, the stopped symbol of the second decorative symbol, the total number of winning balls, and advance notices. However, such game information is hidden (made invisible) when the message "Game Play Limit" is displayed after the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, and instead displays the message on a darkened screen. This allows the player to understand that the number of balls dispensed has reached a specific value and game play has been restricted, and that the game play restriction can only be lifted by the hall manager's action. Players can also see that they can adjust the number of balls they have by operating the counting button switch.

In the above example, before the amount of dispensed balls reaches a specific value, the effect display device 1600 displays the current number of rounds, the stopped symbols of the second decorative symbols, the total number of prize balls, and the advance notice display. However, all such information regarding the game becomes unrecognizable once the amount of dispensed balls reaches a specific value. However, when the amount of dispensed balls reaches a specific value, some of the information regarding the game may become unrecognizable, while other information may remain recognizable. For example, the total number of prize balls and the advance notice display may become unrecognizable, as they are information regarding whether or not to implement game restrictions, while the current number of rounds and the stopped symbols of the second decorative symbols may remain recognizable. This makes it possible to understand under what circumstances the amount of dispensed balls reached a specific value even after the amount of dispensed balls has reached the specific value.

In this example, in order for the specified clear condition to end the stalled state to be met, the machine must be re-powered using a specified power-on pattern after being shut off. This section explains the following cases: A power-on pattern that maintains the game state at the time of power-off and maintains the ball output amount and stalled state (in this example, power-on patterns 1, 4, and 5 in Restricted Clear Pattern Table 1, power-on patterns 4 and 5 in Restricted Clear Pattern Table 2, and power-on patterns 1, 4, and 5 in Restricted Clear Pattern Table 3) is selected; a power-on pattern that clears (initializes) the game state at the time of power-off and clears (initializes) the ball output amount and stalled state (in this example, power-on patterns 2 and 3 in Restricted Clear Pattern Table 1, power-on patterns 2 and 3 in Restricted Clear Pattern Table 2, and power-on pattern 3 in Restricted Clear Pattern Table 3) is selected; or a power-on pattern that maintains the game state at the time of power-off and clears (initializes) the ball output amount and stalled state (in this example, power-on pattern 1 in Restricted Clear Pattern Table 2 and power-on pattern 2 in Restricted Clear Pattern Table 3) is selected.

First, after the game has entered a capped state, if a power-on pattern is selected that maintains the game state at the time of power-off and maintains the ball dispense amount and capped state when the power is turned back on after being shut off, the game restrictions associated with the capped state are not lifted, and the effect display device 1600 again displays the image shown in FIG. 218(K). Although not shown in the figure in this example, before the image shown in FIG. 218(K) is displayed, a sound saying "The ball dispense amount and capped state are being maintained" is output from the speaker, and a message image saying "The ball dispense amount and capped state are being maintained" is temporarily displayed on the effect display device 1600. The dedicated period for displaying the message image "The ball dispense amount and capped state are being maintained" on the effect display device 1600 may be omitted. However, in order to emphasize that the hall manager is aware of the maintenance of the ball dispense amount and capped state, the dedicated period may be omitted, and the message image saying "The ball dispense amount and capped state are being maintained" may also be displayed on the effect display device 1600 along with the image shown in FIG. 218(K).

Furthermore, after the game has transitioned to the stopped state, if a power-on pattern is selected that clears (initializes) the game state at the time of power interruption and also clears (initializes) the ball payout amount and the stopped state, the game restrictions in the stopped state are lifted by clearing (initializing) the ball payout amount and the stopped state. When the ball payout amount and the stopped state are cleared (initialized), all information involved in calculating the ball payout amount, such as the stop counter, payout number, and shot number, is cleared (initialized). Furthermore, information regarding the remaining jackpot gameplay when interrupted at the time of transition to the stopped state and information regarding the "consecutive jackpot mode" (high probability state) after the jackpot game is retained after the game transitioned to the stopped state and at the time of power interruption. However, when the power is reconnected after a power interruption, information regarding the remaining jackpot gameplay when interrupted and information regarding the "consecutive jackpot mode" (high probability state) after the jackpot game is lost, and the game starts in the low probability state. For this reason, as shown in Figure 218 (L), the effect display device 1600 displays an initial image in which the decorative pattern is stopped at the initial pattern.

On the other hand, if a power-on pattern is selected that maintains the game state at the time of power-off while clearing (initializing) the ball payout amount and the game-stop state when the power is turned back on after a power-off after a power-off, the ball payout amount and the game-stop state are cleared (initialized), thereby lifting the game restrictions imposed by the game-stop state. Furthermore, information regarding the remaining jackpot gameplay when the game was interrupted and information regarding the "game-stop mode" (high-probability state) after the jackpot game are retained after the game-stop state and when the power is turned back on after a power-off. However, by retaining information regarding the remaining jackpot gameplay when the game was interrupted and information regarding the "game-stop mode" (high-probability state) after the jackpot game, gameplay can be resumed in the state it was in when it was interrupted. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 218 (L'), the effect display device 1600 returns to and displays an image related to the "game-stop mode" (high-probability state), which is the ending period when the final round of the jackpot game has ended. Furthermore, if a power-on pattern that clears (initializes) the payout amount and the limit state is selected, before resuming play after power is turned off and then turned back on, a special return notification (image and sound indicating that play will return to the state before the limit was reached) may be made to indicate that play will return to the previous gameplay. This special return notification corresponds to the return display, return light, and return sound in the return waiting state from timing t3 to timing t4 in FIG. 215 described above, and as described above, examples include outputting a sound from the speaker saying "The payout amount and limit state have been cleared," or displaying a message image on the effect display device 1600 saying "The payout amount and limit state have been cleared."

Figure 219 is a specific example of a presentation where the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value when a game ball enters the general winning slot while the special symbol is being displayed. In this example, 80,000 is set as the "specific value" described above, and either restriction pattern 1 or restriction pattern 3 is selected as the "restriction pattern" described above. In other words, if restriction pattern 1 is set, a stopping state will occur with "play stopping" when the amount of balls dispensed reaches the specific value (80,000 balls), and if restriction pattern 3 is set, a stopping state will occur with "play stopping" and "firing stopping" when the amount of balls dispensed reaches the specific value (80,000 balls).

As shown in Figure 219 (A), the effect display device 1600 executes a variable effect (an effect based on a variable pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, and displays the variable decorative symbol in the central area of the effect display device 1600. Here, depending on the result of the lottery for the special symbol, or during the "consecutive win mode" in which a high probability state continues due to the receipt of game ball B into the V winning slot 2007, if the lottery result for the special symbol is a winning one, "777" is displayed as the stopping symbol for the decorative symbol in the central area of the effect display device 1600. In addition, in the upper right area of the effect display device 1600, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed, and if the lottery result for the special symbol is a winning one, "○" is displayed as the stopping symbol for the second decorative symbol. Additionally, the lower left area of the effect display device 1600 displays a pending display for the amount of time that the game ball has entered the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004, but the variable display of the special symbol is on hold. Additionally, the lower right area of the effect display device 1600 displays a "consecutive win mode" message indicating that the game is in "consecutive win mode," and also displays a "hit right" arrow instructing the player to aim for the game ball to enter the large prize opening 2005 located in the game area 5a to the right of the effect display device 1600 during jackpot play.

As shown in Figure 219 (B), at the start of a jackpot game, the message "Special Bonus! Aim for V!" is displayed in the central area of the effect display device 1600, and the large prize entry port 2005 and special prize entry port 2006 begin to open and close during the jackpot game, and the player is advised to aim for the game ball to enter the V prize entry port 2007 during the jackpot game.

As shown in Figure 219 (C), during a jackpot game, the current number of rounds is displayed in the upper left area of the effect display device 1600, and the total number of prize balls paid out as game balls enter the jackpot slot 2005 during "consecutive win mode" is displayed in the center area of the effect display device 1600. Here, "3R" is displayed as the current number of rounds, and "17,500 GET" is displayed as the total number of prize balls.

In this example, before the main control board 1310 reaches a specific value and restricts play, it monitors the number of balls remaining until the specific value is reached. When a game ball enters the large prize slot 2005, which brings the remaining number of balls to "+1500 balls," the advance flag is turned ON, and the advance flag ON information is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 then receives the advance flag ON information and continues to execute the advance notification operation until the specific value is reached. The amount of balls dispensed is calculated on the main control board 1310 based on a counter for limiting the number of balls fired, which is the difference between the number of balls fired and the number of balls paid out. In other words, the number of balls remaining until the specific value is reached increases as the number of balls fired increases, and decreases as the number of balls paid out increases. Furthermore, the operation during advance notification continues once the number of balls dispensed reaches a predetermined value (in this example, when the number of balls remaining until the number of balls dispensed reaches the specific value is 1,500, i.e., when the number of balls dispensed reaches 78,500), until the number of balls dispensed reaches the specific value, so that the player does not miss information regarding game restrictions.

In addition, in this example, once a pre-announcement has been made, even if the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value subsequently falls below a predetermined value (1,500 remaining), the pre-announcement is not terminated and continues until the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value. Specifically, even if the number of balls shot increases after the pre-announcement flag ON information is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 and the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls dispensed falls below the predetermined value (1,500 remaining), the main control board 1310 keeps the pre-announcement flag ON without turning it OFF. As a result, even if the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value of 1,500, then falls below 1,500, and then reaches 1,500 again, the pre-announcement will not be switched frequently on the main control board 1310 side, preventing the pre-announcement flag ON information from being sent multiple times to the peripheral control board 1510, thereby avoiding control burdens and complexity.

As shown in Figure 219 (D), when a game ball enters the large prize opening 2005 during a jackpot game, and the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value becomes "+1500 balls," an advance notice display "+1500 balls remaining until the game limit" is displayed in the upper area of the effect display device 1600 as an advance notice operation, indicating the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value. Here, the final "10R" is displayed as the current number of rounds, and "18,800 balls GET" is displayed as the total number of prize balls. The effect display device 1600 continuously displays the current round number in the upper left area, the total number of prize balls paid out as a result of game balls entering the jackpot slot 2005 during the "consecutive win mode" in the upper area, the stop symbol for the second decorative symbol in the upper right area, and a "hit right" arrow in the lower right area, even before the advance notice display is displayed. The advance notice display indicating "+1500 balls remaining until the game limit" is displayed so as to overlap the background image, but is not overlapped with important information displays related to the ongoing jackpot game. Specifically, in this example, the "current round number," "total number of prize balls," and "'hit right' arrow" are important information displays that should be recognized by the player, so the advance notice display is displayed in a position that does not overlap these information displays. Note that the advance notice display may overlap at least a portion of the information displays, as long as the content of the information displays can be recognized without being completely obscured by the player. This allows players to play smoothly during a jackpot game without missing the information displayed about the jackpot game in progress. The movable body can be moved toward the front of the display device 1600 during a jackpot game, but it can also be moved toward the front while the advance notice display, "+1500 shots remaining until play limit," is displayed. This prevents a decline in interest in the game during a jackpot game.

As shown in Figure 219 (E), at the end of a jackpot game, the message "Continuous win mode continues! (10th time)" is displayed in the central area of the effect display device 1600, informing the player that the high probability state will continue again after the jackpot game ends (that "Continuous win mode" will continue). Here, at the end of a jackpot game, just as during the jackpot game, a pre-notification display stating "+1500 shots remaining until play limit" is displayed. Note that because the message "Continuous win mode continues! (10th time)" is an important information display that the player must be aware of, the pre-notification display is displayed in a position that does not overlap with this information display. Note that the pre-notification display may overlap at least a portion of the information display, as long as the content of the information display can be recognized and not so much that it becomes invisible to the player.

As shown in Figure 219 (F), during "consecutive wins mode," when a change effect (a change effect based on a change pattern) corresponding to the change display of a special symbol is executed again, a change display of a decorative symbol is displayed in the central area of the effect display device 1600. Furthermore, a change display of a second decorative symbol is displayed in the upper right area of the effect display device 1600. Furthermore, four pending displays are displayed in the lower left area of the effect display device 1600, and it is possible to change the appearance of pending displays with a high probability of winning. Furthermore, while the change display of decorative symbols is in progress, the volume and light intensity can be adjusted by operating the setting adjustment button 204. While the volume or light intensity is being adjusted, an image corresponding to the volume or light intensity being adjusted is displayed in the left area of the effect display device 1600. The image corresponding to the volume or light intensity being adjusted begins displaying when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, and disappears after a certain amount of time has passed since the start of display.

Furthermore, while the decorative symbol changes during "Consecutive Winning Mode," a pre-notification display stating "+10 shots remaining until play limit" is displayed, just as during jackpot play. The effect display device 1600 displays the decorative symbol change display in the central area, the second decorative symbol change display in the upper right area, the "Consecutive Winning Mode" message and a "Hit Right" arrow in the lower right area, a hold display in the lower left area, and images corresponding to volume and light intensity in the left area. While the pre-notification display stating "+10 shots remaining until play limit" is displayed overlapping the background image, it is displayed so as not to overlap important information displays related to the variable play currently being performed. Specifically, in this example, the "decorative symbol change display," "second decorative symbol change display," "'Consecutive Winning Mode' message," "'Hit Right' arrow," "hold display," and "images corresponding to volume and light intensity" are important information displays that should be recognized by the player, and therefore the pre-notification display is displayed in a position that does not overlap these information displays. Note that the advance notice display may overlap at least a portion of these information displays, as long as the information displays are not completely overlapped and the player can still see the contents of the information displays. This prevents the player from missing the information displays related to the variable play currently in progress, allowing for smooth play during variable play. Note that the movable body can be moved toward the front of the effect display device 1600 during variable play, but when the advance notice display saying "+10 shots remaining until play limit" is displayed, the movable body may be moved toward the front. This prevents a decrease in interest in the game during variable play.

In this example, the number of balls remaining until the specified value is reached is monitored before the specified value is reached and game play is restricted. However, if the remaining number of balls becomes "+0" due to the payout of prize balls based on game balls entering the general winning slot 2001 while the special symbol is being displayed, the specified value is reached and the game is stopped, and the game is stopped until a specified clear condition is met. At the point when the game is stopped, the timing of the change time is stopped (interrupted) to prevent the display of the currently active special symbol from progressing, forcibly stopping gameplay and initiating game restriction. Here, we will explain the function display unit 1400 when the timing of the change time is stopped (interrupted) to prevent the display of the currently active special symbol from progressing. The function display unit 1400 continues to flash the LED on the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display (control mode during the change display) (since the change time is not being measured, it continues to flash until the clear condition is met). However, the function display unit 1400 may have the LEDs on the first special symbol display or second special symbol display all lit or all extinguished rather than flashing. In this case, not only the LEDs on the first special symbol display or second special symbol display, but also other LEDs on the function display unit 1400 (such as LEDs on the status indicator, normal symbol display, normal hold indicator, first special hold number indicator, second special hold number indicator, and round indicator) are all lit or all extinguished. Also, if the function display unit 1400 is provided with an LED dedicated to end-of-game notification, that LED may be lit and the other LEDs may be extinguished. Note that when timing of the variable time is stopped (interrupted), the remaining variable time is stored in RAM built into the main control board 1310.

As shown in Figure 219 (G), when the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value becomes "+0" due to the payout of prize balls based on game balls entering the general winning slot 2001 while the special pattern is being displayed, a pre-notification display "+0 balls remaining until game limit" is displayed in the upper area of the effect display device 1600 for a predetermined period of time (5 seconds in this example) as a pre-notification operation, indicating the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value. Here, just before the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value becomes "+0," the decorative pattern and second decorative pattern are displayed. However, when the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value becomes "+0," the decorative pattern display is forcibly stopped at a predetermined stopping pattern (in this example, "767"), and the second decorative pattern display is forcibly stopped at a predetermined stopping pattern (in this example, "X"). Then, after a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example) has passed since the advance notice display "0 shots remaining until play limit" was displayed, an image corresponding to the play limit state shown in Figure 219 (H) will be displayed.

In this example, the amount of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the general winning slot 2001 is reflected in the content of the advance notice displayed on the performance display device 1600. However, the content of the advance notice display is not displayed at the time when a game ball enters the general winning slot 2001, which will cause the amount of balls to reach a specific value, but is displayed continuously until a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example) has passed since the amount of prize balls is reflected in the content of the advance notice display. This prevents the player from missing information regarding whether the amount of balls to be paid out has reached a specific value, and ensures that the player is aware of the reason why the game will subsequently enter a limit state. Also, just before the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value becomes "+0 balls," a pre-notification display stating "+10 balls remaining until the game limit" is displayed. However, for the prize balls (15 in this example) that are dispensed when a game ball enters general prize opening 2001, even if the number of prize balls exceeds the number of balls remaining until the specific value is reached, the excess prize balls (5 in this example) are dispensed. This prevents a situation where prize balls are not dispensed for the number of prize balls that exceeds the specific value even though a game ball enters general prize opening 2001, making it less likely that players will become dissatisfied. However, if monitoring the amount of balls dispensed is important from the perspective of preventing fraud, the excess prize balls may not be dispensed for the number of prize balls that exceeds the specific value.

In the above, the content of the advance notice display is not displayed until the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, but continues to be displayed until the amount of prize balls is reflected in the content of the advance notice display. However, it may be configured to end when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, and an image corresponding to the stop state be displayed. In other words, instead of displaying the image shown in Figure 219 (G), it may proceed to the image shown in Figure 219 (H), which will be described later. In this way, the game will transition to the stop state when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, but at the same time, by displaying an image corresponding to the stop state, the player can immediately understand that the game has transitioned to the stop state.

In addition, once the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, the game transitions to a stop state and game restrictions are implemented. Therefore, to prevent players from accidentally firing game balls, it is preferable to make the "hit right" arrow that encourages the game ball to be released invisible to the player after the image corresponding to the stop state is displayed, and in this example it is erased. In addition, even in other situations, if the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value while a display encouraging the game ball to be released (for example, a hit right display, a hit left display, a "Aim for V!" display, etc.) is being displayed, the display encouraging the game ball to be released is made invisible to the player (it is erased) at that point.

As shown in Figure 219 (H), when the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value and game play is restricted, the display device 1600 displays an image corresponding to the game play limit. The image corresponding to the game play limit displays the message "Game Play Limit," along with messages such as "The daily ball play limit of 80,000 balls has been reached, so game play is restricted," "Please call an attendant," and "The Settlement Button is Enabled." The settlement button here refers to the counting button switch used to execute the settlement process. Furthermore, when the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, the display device 1600 displays the decorative symbols, the secondary decorative symbols, the hold indicator, and the advance notice. However, such game-related information is hidden (made invisible) when the message "Game Play Limit" is displayed after the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, and instead displays the message on a darkened screen. This allows the user to understand that the number of balls dispensed has reached a specific value and game play has been restricted, and that the game play restriction can only be lifted by the hall manager's action. Players can also see that they can adjust the number of balls they have by operating the counting button switch.

In the above example, the effect display device 1600 displays the decorative symbol stopping symbol, the second decorative symbol stopping symbol, the hold display, and the advance notice display before the amount of dispensed balls reaches a specific value, but all such game-related information becomes unrecognizable when the amount of dispensed balls reaches a specific value. However, when the amount of dispensed balls reaches a specific value, some of the game-related information may become unrecognizable, while other information may remain recognizable. For example, the advance notice display may become unrecognizable because it contains information about whether or not to implement a game restriction, while the decorative symbol stopping symbol, the second decorative symbol stopping symbol, and the hold display may remain recognizable. This makes it possible to understand under what circumstances the amount of dispensed balls reached a specific value even after the amount of dispensed balls has reached the specific value.

Here, if the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value due to a game ball entering the general winning slot 2001 while the special symbol is being displayed, the same action as when the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value due to a game ball entering the large winning slot 2005 during a jackpot game is executed, and an image corresponding to the game's halt state is displayed, etc. In this way, when the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value and game play is restricted, regardless of the trigger, a common notification is issued, allowing the player to reliably understand that the game has entered a halt state.

In this example, in order for the specified clear condition to end the stalled state to be met, the machine must be re-powered using a specified power-on pattern after being shut off. This section explains the following cases: A power-on pattern that maintains the game state at the time of power-off and maintains the ball output amount and stalled state (in this example, power-on patterns 1, 4, and 5 in Restricted Clear Pattern Table 1, power-on patterns 4 and 5 in Restricted Clear Pattern Table 2, and power-on patterns 1, 4, and 5 in Restricted Clear Pattern Table 3) is selected; a power-on pattern that clears (initializes) the game state at the time of power-off and clears (initializes) the ball output amount and stalled state (in this example, power-on patterns 2 and 3 in Restricted Clear Pattern Table 1, power-on patterns 2 and 3 in Restricted Clear Pattern Table 2, and power-on pattern 3 in Restricted Clear Pattern Table 3) is selected; or a power-on pattern that maintains the game state at the time of power-off and clears (initializes) the ball output amount and stalled state (in this example, power-on pattern 1 in Restricted Clear Pattern Table 2 and power-on pattern 2 in Restricted Clear Pattern Table 3) is selected.

First, after the game has entered a stopped state, if the game state at the time of power cut is maintained when the power is turned back on after being shut off and a power-on pattern is selected that maintains the amount of balls dispensed and the stopped state, the game restrictions imposed by the stopped state are not lifted, and the effect display device 1600 will again display the image shown in Figure 219 (H).

Furthermore, after the game has transitioned to the stopped state, if a power-on pattern is selected that clears (initializes) the game state at the time of power-off and also clears (initializes) the amount of balls dispensed and the stopped state, the game restrictions imposed by the stopped state are lifted by clearing (initializing) the amount of balls dispensed and the stopped state. When the amount of balls dispensed and the stopped state are cleared (initialized), all information involved in calculating the amount of balls dispensed, such as the stop counter, payout count, and number of shots, is cleared (initialized). Furthermore, information regarding the remaining time of the game when it was interrupted at the time of the transition to the stopped state, information regarding the "consecutive win mode" (high probability state), and information regarding reserved balls, is retained after the game transitioned to the stopped state and at the time of the power-off. However, when the power is re-connected after a power-off, information regarding the remaining time of the game when it was interrupted, information regarding the "consecutive win mode" (high probability state), and information regarding reserved balls is lost, so the game starts in a low probability state with no reserved balls. For this reason, as shown in Figure 219 (I), the effect display device 1600 displays an initial image in which there is no hold display and the decorative pattern is stopped at the initial pattern.

On the other hand, if a power-on pattern is selected that maintains the game state at the time of power-off while clearing (initializing) the ball payout amount and the stoppage state when the power is turned back on after a power-off after a power-off after a power-off, the ball payout amount and the stoppage state are cleared (initialized), thereby lifting the game restrictions imposed by the stoppage state. Furthermore, information regarding the remaining fluctuation time when the game was interrupted at the time of the transition to the stoppage state, information regarding the "consecutive wins mode" (high probability state), and information regarding the reserved balls are retained after the transition to the stoppage state and at the time of the power-off. Even when the power is turned back on after a power-off, information regarding the remaining fluctuation time when the game was interrupted, information regarding the "consecutive wins mode" (high probability state), and information regarding the reserved balls are retained, allowing the game to resume in a high probability state with reserved balls and in the middle of the previous fluctuation. In other words, if the timing of the fluctuation time was stopped (interrupted) at the time of the transition to the stoppage state, the remaining fluctuation time is stored in the RAM built into the main control board 1310. After the power is turned back on, the decorative pattern fluctuation display and the second decorative pattern fluctuation display are executed for the remaining fluctuation time. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 219 (I'), the effect display device 1600 returns to displaying an image related to the "consecutive wins mode" (high probability state), and resumes displaying the changing decorative symbols and the changing second decorative symbols based on the information related to the hold. Furthermore, if a power-on pattern that clears (initializes) the payout amount and the limit state is selected, a special return notification (image and sound indicating that the state will be restored to before the game limit was reached) indicating that the game will return to the state it was in before the game limit was reached may be displayed before the various effect displays are restored after the power is turned back on after being turned off.

In addition, in the above description, if the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during a jackpot game, a stop state is immediately triggered. However, as another example, if the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during a jackpot game, the timing of the start of the stop state may be delayed until the end of that jackpot game. In other words, if the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during multiple rounds of a jackpot game, the jackpot game may continue until the final round ends. In such cases, the number of balls dispensed increases due to the payout of prize balls even after the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, but this increase in the number of balls dispensed is tolerated. Alternatively, the stop state, which involves a "game stop" or "fire stop," may be triggered after the jackpot game has ended. This prevents gameplay from being restricted during a jackpot game and prevents disadvantages in winning prize balls, making it less likely for players to become dissatisfied.

In addition, in the above-mentioned fourth embodiment, a gaming machine of the type that circulates gaming balls without paying out actual prize balls outside the gaming machine (so-called sealed gaming machine, managed gaming machine) was described. However, the above-mentioned "technology for generating a stop state based on the amount of balls paid out (amount of balls paid out A, B)" is not limited to this type of gaming machine, and may also be applied to conventional gaming machines (gaming machines that pay out actual prize balls outside the gaming machine). Furthermore, when applied to conventional gaming machines, it is preferable to set the timing for generating the stop state and game control during the stop state as follows.

In other words, in conventional gaming machines that use real balls for payouts, the payout control board 633 can control a payout device that pays out prize balls stored in a ball tank on the back of the machine. The prize balls paid out to the ball tray on the front of the machine are then awarded to the player as real balls. However, with this configuration, there is a longer time lag between the time a ball enters the various prize slots and the time the prize ball is paid out than with gaming machines that circulate game balls. In particular, it is conceivable that multiple game balls may enter the big prize slot 2005 during a jackpot game, leaving many prize balls stored as unpaid. In such cases, there is a possibility that many prize balls may remain stored as unpaid even after the aforementioned stop-play state begins. In such a case, as in the fourth embodiment described above, if the payout process on the payout control board is stopped at the same time that the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 is stopped when the max-out state begins, there is a risk that the player will not be able to obtain the profit that he or she should have (prize balls that are stored as unpaid). Therefore, when applying "technology that triggers a max-out state based on the amount of payout balls (amount of payout balls A and B)" to conventional gaming machines, the following two control methods are possible.

First, in the first pattern, the "payout number" that is the subject of calculation for the limit counter is the actual number of balls paid out. Specifically, a ball sensor is installed to detect the number of game balls sent by the payout device toward the ball tray, and the detection result of this ball sensor is reflected in the "payout number." This makes it possible to reduce the number of unpaid prize balls compared to calculating the limit counter based on prize ball information on the main control board 1310.

In addition, the second pattern is that even if play is stopped when the machine reaches its limit, the "payout of unpaid prize balls" will continue. Then, once all unpaid prize balls have been used, play will stop completely. Note that the second pattern can be used in conjunction with the first pattern.

(Addition of Restriction Clear Pattern Table 4)
In the above description, limited clear pattern tables 1 to 3 are provided as limited clear pattern tables with different clear conditions for "the amount of balls dispensed calculated before the start of the stop state" and "the limit on play during the stop state," but a separate limited clear pattern table 4 may also be provided. In such a case, too, one of limited clear pattern tables 1 to 4 is selected by operating a limited clear pattern selection switch that can be operated by the hall manager. However, with regard to the limited clear pattern table, only limited clear pattern table 4 may be used from the viewpoint of reducing the capacity of the ROM that stores various processing programs.

Figure 220 shows the limited clear pattern table 4 that is selected when the limited clear pattern selection switch is set to "4." When this limited clear pattern table 4 is selected, the arcade can choose whether to maintain or clear the "game restrictions during a stalled state" when the power is turned back on after a power outage, but the "amount of balls calculated before the stalled state began" is always cleared when the power is turned back on after a power outage.

Power-on pattern 1 maintains the game state at the time of power-off when the power is turned on, but clears (initializes) the "amount of balls dispensed before and after the stop state was initiated," while maintaining the "game limits during the stop state." Furthermore, as a notification method for external notification, from the time the power is turned on until a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board 5 and door frame 3 emit green light, a sound is output from the speaker saying "The amount of balls dispensed has been cleared. The stop state is maintained," and the effect display device 1600 displays an image message saying "The amount of balls dispensed has been cleared. The stop state is maintained" (equivalent to clear notification 1 and progress impossible notification, described below). In addition to these notifications, a clear method notification may be added to show the hall manager how to clear the stop state.

When power is turned on, power-on pattern 2 clears (initializes) the game state at the time of power-off, but also clears (initializes) the "amount of balls dispensed before and after the stop state was initiated" and the "game restrictions during the stop state." Specifically, when game play is restricted by restriction pattern 1 described above, "game is stopped," but the "game stop" is lifted when the stop state is cleared. When game play is restricted by restriction pattern 2, "fire is stopped," but the "fire stop" is lifted when the stop state is cleared. When game play is restricted by restriction pattern 3, "game is stopped" and "fire is stopped," but the "game stop" and "fire stop" are lifted when the stop state is cleared. In either case, game play (main game) can be resumed on the main control board 1310 side. Additionally, as a notification method for the outside world, from the time the power is turned on until a predetermined period of time has passed, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board 5 and door frame 3 are made to emit red light, a sound is output from the speaker saying "The ball output limit has been cleared," and an image message saying "The ball output limit has been cleared" is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (equivalent to clear notification 2 described below).

When power is turned on, power-on pattern 3 clears (initializes) the game state at the time of power-off, but also clears (initializes) the "amount of balls dispensed before and after the stop state began" and the "game limits during the stop state." Furthermore, as a notification method for external notification, from the time the power is turned on until a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board 5 and door frame 3 emit red light, a sound is output from the speaker stating "The amount of balls dispensed and the stop state have been cleared," and an image message stating "The amount of balls dispensed and the stop state have been cleared" is displayed on the effect display device 1600. (This corresponds to clear notification 2, described below.)

Power-on pattern 4 maintains the game state at the time of power-off when the power is turned on, but clears (initializes) the "amount of balls dispensed before and after the stop state was initiated," while maintaining the "restrictions on play during the stop state." Furthermore, as a notification method for external notification, from the time the power is turned on until a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board 5 and door frame 3 emit blue light, a sound is output from the speaker stating "The amount of balls dispensed has been cleared. The stop state is maintained," and the effect display device 1600 displays an image message stating "The amount of balls dispensed has been cleared. The stop state is maintained." (This corresponds to clear notification 1 and the play disabled notification, described below.) In addition to these notifications, a clear method notification may be added to show the hall manager how to clear the stop state.

When power is turned on, power-on pattern 5 maintains the game state that was in place when power was turned off, but also maintains the "amount of balls dispensed before and after the stop state was initiated" and the "game limits during the stop state." Furthermore, as a notification method for external notification, from the time the power is turned on until a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board 5 and door frame 3 emit blue light, a sound is output from the speaker stating "The amount of balls dispensed and the stop state are being maintained," and an image message stating "The amount of balls dispensed and the stop state are being maintained" is displayed on the performance display device 1600.

In this way, when the power is turned on, the limit clear pattern table 4 clears (initializes) the "amount of balls dispensed before or after the limit state began" regardless of whether the selected mode is to maintain the game state at the time of power-on, as in power-on patterns 1 and 4, or to clear (initialize) the game state at the time of power-on, as in power-on patterns 2 and 3. This ensures that the hall manager will not forget to clear the amount of balls dispensed when the power is turned on, such as when opening the store, and prevents the amount of balls dispensed from reaching a specific value and entering a limit state immediately after opening. Note that when power-on pattern 5 is selected, the ball removal process described above is simply executed and game play does not begin, so the "amount of balls dispensed before or after the limit state began" is maintained without being cleared (initialized).

In addition, in the restriction clearing pattern table 4, the "restrictions on play during the stopped game state" are cleared (initialized) only when the game state at the time of power-on is cleared (initialized), as in power-on patterns 2 and 3. On the other hand, when the game state at the time of power-on is maintained, as in power-on patterns 1 and 4, the "restrictions on play during the stopped game state" are maintained. In other words, the amusement hall can choose whether to maintain or clear the "restrictions on play during the stopped game state" when power is turned back on after a power-on interruption. For example, if a game has already been stopped and you want to release the game restrictions, you can perform the power-on operation to clear the "restrictions on play during the stopped game state" after a power-on interruption. If you want to maintain the game restrictions, you can perform the power-on operation to maintain the "restrictions on play during the stopped game state" after a power-on interruption. Note that if power-on pattern 5 is selected when power is turned on, the ball removal process described above is simply executed, and game play does not begin. Therefore, the "restrictions on play during the stopped game state" are maintained without being cleared (initialized).

(Notification regarding the amount of balls dispensed when an abnormality is detected)
In this example, abnormalities such as magnetism and vibration can be detected while the machine is powered on, and a determination is made as to whether an abnormality has been detected. Depending on the type of abnormality, gameplay may be stopped upon detection, and gameplay may not resume until the power is turned back on. However, as is evident from, for example, Limit Clear Pattern Table 4, turning the power back on may result in clearing (initializing) the "amount of balls dispensed before or after the initiation of the limit state" and the "game limit during the limit state" depending on the manner of operation performed upon powering on. Therefore, there is a possibility of a new fraudulent activity in which an intentional abnormality is caused just before the initiation of the limit state due to the amount of balls dispensed approaching a specific value, or during the limit state, to force the hall manager to turn the power back on and clear (initialize) the "amount of balls dispensed before or after the limit state" and the "game limit during the limit state." In this example, in order to prevent such new fraud, the following describes a case in which, when an abnormality is detected, an announcement is made regarding "the amount of balls dispensed before or after the stop state is initiated" and "restrictions on play during the stop state."

In this example, while the power is on, an abnormality determination is made to determine whether an abnormality has been detected. The type of abnormality is determined to be either a minor or a major abnormality. Examples of minor abnormalities include the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, the opening of the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4, and the removal of a frame decoration. When a minor abnormality is detected, game progress is not halted. When a minor abnormality is detected, an abnormality alert is issued to notify the outside world that a minor abnormality has occurred. The abnormality alert is terminated when an error termination condition is met, such as the passage of a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds). In other words, when a minor abnormality is detected, although there is a possibility that the main frame 4 has been opened relative to the outer frame 2 through fraudulent activity, the abnormality alert is terminated at a predetermined timing because it is easy to confirm whether the main frame 4 has been opened relative to the outer frame 2.

On the other hand, detection of serious abnormalities includes detecting magnetism, vibrations, and radio waves in the pachinko machine 1. In this example, the pachinko machine 1 is equipped with a magnetic sensor for detecting magnetism, a vibration sensor for detecting vibrations, and a radio wave sensor for detecting unauthorized radio waves, each capable of detecting magnetism, vibration, and radio waves. If a serious abnormality is detected, game play is halted because it is highly likely that the magnetism, vibration, or radio waves were caused by unauthorized activity rather than the work of the hall manager. Furthermore, if a serious abnormality is detected, an abnormality alert is issued to notify the outside world that a serious abnormality has occurred, but the abnormality alert does not end even after a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed. Therefore, if a serious abnormality occurs, the hall manager must shut off the power to end the abnormality alert, and then turn the power back on to resume game play.

In addition, abnormality notifications are not only sent using components on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, such as the performance display device 1600, but also using components on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, such as the back side of the main frame 4 and the back side of the game board 5. This allows the hall manager to know that an abnormality has occurred, even if he or she is working on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, for example.

Figures 221 to 223 are time charts showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when a minor or major abnormality occurs. In this example, we will explain, in order, the behavior of a pachinko machine when a minor abnormality occurs during a normal state or a stop state, the behavior of a pachinko machine when a major abnormality occurs during a normal state, and the behavior of a pachinko machine when a major abnormality occurs during a stop state. Note that a normal state is a state that is not a stop state before the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, and may be when special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, when a jackpot game is being played, or when the machine is in a standby state where special symbols are not being displayed in a variable manner or a jackpot game is not being played.

Furthermore, the case where, at timing t1, it is determined that the payout amount reaches a specific value due to the payout of prize balls based on balls entering the winning slot, the stop flag is determined to be ON, and the machine transitions to the stop state has already been explained using Figure 216. In other words, the behavior of the pachinko machine in a state (normal state) that is not in the stop state before the payout amount reaches a specific value, and in a stop state when no minor or serious abnormality has occurred, has already been explained, so an explanation will be omitted here. However, in Figure 216, after the transition to the stop state at timing t1, no abnormality determination is made to determine whether an abnormality such as magnetism or vibration has been detected. However, in this example, an abnormality determination is made even during the stop state, and an abnormality alert is issued to notify the outside that an abnormality has occurred.

In addition, in this example, when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, restriction pattern 3 is selected, which both "stops play" and "stops firing" as restrictions on play in the stopped state. Furthermore, when the power is turned back on after being shut off, restriction clear pattern table 4 is used as the restriction clear pattern table, and the following power-on patterns are explained: when power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected, which clear the amount of balls dispensed but maintain the stopped state, and when power-on patterns 2 and 3 are selected, which clear the amount of balls dispensed and the stopped state.

Figure 221 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when a minor abnormality occurs during normal operation or during a stoppage state.

First, before timing t1 when the system transitions to the stop state, it is controlled to the normal state (a state where the system is not in a stop state). The behavior of the normal state (a state where the system is not in a stop state) is as described above.

Here, we will explain what happens when a minor abnormality is detected at timing tx during a normal state (a state where the game is not at a dead end). When a minor abnormality is detected, an abnormality alert is issued to notify the outside world that the abnormality has occurred, and the effect display device 1600, lamp A (LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5), speaker, and external terminal board execute their error-prone operations as an abnormality alert. Meanwhile, in all other respects, such as the progress of the game, other than the execution of the abnormality alert, no change occurs from the state before timing tx when no minor abnormality was detected, and normal state (a state where the game is not at a dead end) behavior is maintained.

Specifically, the performance display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration members), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speaker perform the operation they would perform when an error occurs at timing tx. For example, if the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 is detected as a minor abnormality, the performance display device 1600 displays the message "Door open error" as error display A, and also displays the message "+xx balls remaining until game limit" as current status display A to indicate the number of balls remaining until game play is limited (the number of balls remaining until the number of balls reaches a specific value). Specifically, the advance notice display is executed after the number of balls remaining to be dispensed reaches a specific value of 5,000, but even when the advance notice display is not being executed, for example, if a minor abnormality is detected when the number of balls remaining to be dispensed to reach the specific value is 50,000, the effect display device 1600 will display a message as current status display A stating "+50,000 balls remaining until game limit." Note that while current status display A shows the number of balls remaining to be dispensed until the number of balls reaches the specific value, it may also show the amount of balls dispensed at that time.

As described above, if a minor abnormality is detected during normal operation (when play is not at a limit), the effect display device 1600 will display not only error display A but also current status display A, showing the remaining number of balls to be dispensed before play is restricted (the number of balls remaining until the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value). If the power is turned off at this time, the minor abnormality detection will be resolved, but the number of balls dispensed will be cleared when the power is turned back on using power-on patterns 1 to 4 in the limit clear pattern table 4. In this regard, in this example, the hall manager can determine the number of balls remaining to be dispensed before play is restricted and then decide whether or not to turn the power back on.

Before the timing t1 of the transition to the stop state, the peripheral control board 1510 uses some components, such as the effect display device 1600, to perform pre-notification operations to notify the player that the number of balls dispensed is approaching a specific value. Specifically, the effect display device 1600 displays the message "+XX balls remaining until play limit" in a specific display area as a pre-notification display. This specific display area is set as part of the display area of the effect display device 1600 and is used to display when the number of balls dispensed is approaching a specific value. To prevent the hall manager from overlooking this, it is a fixed area that remains unchanged regardless of the game status. Furthermore, if a minor abnormality is detected while such a pre-notification display is being executed, the effect display device 1600 may display the same data as the pre-notification display as current status display A. Additionally, when the advance notice display is used to display current status display A, it is configured to be displayed on a layer higher (closer to the front) than the layers displaying other effect images; in this example, current status display A is displayed on the top layer, and the display is controlled to ensure that it can continue to be recognized while the abnormality notification is being executed. This prevents current status display A from becoming unrecognizable.

In addition, in this example, for the start operation of the advance notice (operation when the advance notice starts), in addition to the advance notice display using the effect display device 1600, Lamp B (an LED mounted on various decorative boards on the gaming board 5) flashes for a predetermined period (e.g., 2 seconds) as an advance notice light. This makes it easier to recognize that the amount of balls dispensed is approaching a specific value.

In addition, in this example, the advance notice display is executed after the number of balls remaining to be dispensed reaches a specific value, reaching 5,000. This advance notice display, which will be described in more detail below, ends when the number of remaining balls exceeds 5,000. The advance notice display cannot be cleared after a predetermined time has passed or by administrator action. On the other hand, if a minor abnormality occurs or a serious abnormality, as described below, occurs, current status display A is executed, but current status display A will not end even if the number of remaining balls to be dispensed changes. Current status display A can be cleared, for example, after a predetermined time has passed until error display A ends, or by administrator action to resolve the abnormality. This ensures that it is never impossible to distinguish between the advance notice display and current status display A.

In addition, in this example, current status display A is executed by the effect display device 1600, but it is also possible to display the remaining number of balls until the number of balls released reaches a specific value using a display component on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, such as the back side of the main frame 4 or the back side of the game board 5, rather than on a display component on the front side of the pachinko machine 1. Also, even when current status display A is executed by the effect display device 1600, current status display A may be the remaining number of balls until the number of balls released reaches a specific value, or an encrypted version depending on the number of balls released (for example, A is displayed when the remaining number of balls released is between 0 and 5000). This allows only the hall manager to view current status display A, preventing fraudulent attempts to learn the number of balls released by deliberately causing an abnormality.

In addition, in this example, if a minor abnormality occurs or if a serious abnormality, as described below, occurs, the effect display device 1600 executes current status display A. However, if a frequently occurring operational abnormality (error) occurs, such as the upper tray becoming full on a conventional gaming machine (a gaming machine that pays out actual prize balls to the outside of the gaming machine), the effect display device 1600 is configured not to execute current status display A. This makes it possible to prevent current status display A from being displayed too frequently.

In addition, in this example, if a minor abnormality occurs or if a severe abnormality, as described below, occurs, the performance display device 1600 executes current status display A. However, if a RAM error occurs, for example, it is assumed that a severe abnormality has occurred, and the performance display device 1600 executes current status display A. However, if a RAM error occurs, there is a possibility that the memory relating to the amount of balls dispensed itself is abnormal, so the performance display device 1600 may not execute current status display A.

In addition, at timing tx, lamps A and B emit an error light by lighting or flashing a single color LED, and the speaker outputs an error sound saying "Door open error."

In addition, a security signal is output from the external terminal board at timing tx. As a result, if a minor abnormality is detected, a security signal is output to the hall computer, allowing the hall to know that a minor abnormality has occurred.

In addition, in this example, an abnormality alert is initiated at timing tx, but is terminated after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) has passed. In other words, the performance display device 1600, lamp A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), speaker, and external terminal board are returned to normal operation. However, if it is detected that a minor abnormality, such as the main frame 4 closing against the outer frame 2, has been resolved before the predetermined period has passed, the abnormality alert is terminated at that point.

Next, at timing t1, it is determined that the number of balls dispensed will reach a specific value due to the payout of prize balls based on the balls entering the winning slot. When the main control board 1310 detects a ball entering the winning slot, it turns on the stop flag and transitions to a "stop state" in which restriction pattern 3 is applied, which performs both "game stop" and "firing stop." The behavior of the stop state is as described above.

Here, we will explain what happens when a minor abnormality is detected at timing ty during the game-stop state. When a minor abnormality is detected, an abnormality notification is issued to notify the outside world that the abnormality has occurred, and the effect display device 1600 executes the operation it would perform when an error occurs as an abnormality notification. Meanwhile, in all other respects, such as disabling game progress, nothing has changed from the situation before timing ty when no minor abnormality was detected, and the game-stop state behavior is maintained.

Specifically, the effect display device 1600 executes the operation to be performed when an error occurs at timing tx. For example, if the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 is detected as a minor abnormality, the effect display device 1600 displays the message "Door open error" as error display A, and also displays the message "Play limit reached" as current status display B to indicate that the machine has already entered a play limit state and play is restricted (after the amount of balls dispensed has reached a specific value).

As described above, if a minor abnormality is detected during a game-stopping state, the effect display device 1600 will display not only error display A but also current status display B, indicating that the game has already transitioned to a game-stopping state and that play is restricted (after the number of balls dispensed has reached a specific value). When the power is turned back on in this case, the minor abnormality detection is resolved, but while turning the power back on using power-on patterns 1 and 4 in the restriction clear pattern table 4 will maintain the restrictions on play during the game-stopping state, turning the power back on using power-on patterns 2 and 3 will clear the restrictions on play during the game-stopping state. In this regard, in this example, the hall manager can determine which power-on pattern to use to turn the power back on after understanding that the game has already transitioned to a game-stopping state and that play is restricted.

In this example, only the effect display device 1600 is used to issue an abnormality alert, and components other than the effect display device 1600 are prioritized for operation when progress is impossible. This makes it easy to understand that even if a minor abnormality is detected during a play-stop state, the game has already transitioned to a play-stop state and play is restricted.

In addition, in this example, if a minor abnormality occurs during a stalled state, or if a serious abnormality, as described below, occurs, current status display B is executed, but current status display B will not end even if the amount of balls dispensed changes thereafter. Current status display B can also be erased, for example, when a predetermined time has passed until error display A ends, or by administrator operation to resolve the abnormality. This makes it possible to prevent current status display B from being displayed more than necessary.

In addition, in this example, if a minor abnormality occurs during a stalled state, or if a serious abnormality, as described below, occurs, the effect display device 1600 executes current status display B. However, if a frequently occurring operational abnormality (error) occurs, such as the upper tray becoming full on a conventional gaming machine (a gaming machine that pays out actual prize balls to the outside of the gaming machine), the effect display device 1600 is configured not to execute current status display B. This makes it possible to prevent current status display B from being displayed too frequently.

In addition, in this example, if a minor abnormality occurs during the stalled state, or if a serious abnormality, as described below, occurs, the performance display device 1600 executes current status display B. However, if a RAM error occurs, for example, it is assumed that a serious abnormality has occurred, and the performance display device 1600 executes current status display B. However, if a RAM error occurs, there is a possibility that the memory relating to the stalled state itself is abnormal, so the performance display device 1600 may not execute current status display B.

Furthermore, after a predetermined time has elapsed from timing t1, the speaker performs the operation required when progress is impossible, outputting a sound indicating that progress is impossible, saying, "The daily ball payout limit has been reached, so play is being restricted." However, this sound indicating progress is impossible may be set to end a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) after it began to be output. This prevents the sound indicating progress is impossible from continuing to be output after the machine has transitioned to a play limit state, preventing it from interfering with players playing on other pachinko machines 1.

In addition, from the external terminal board, a forced output state is set in which a security signal is forcibly output from the time t1 when the system transitions to a stopped state. However, if a minor abnormality is detected at time tx, the security signal being output is terminated and no new security signal is output, but the security signal being output continues to be output. This prevents the hall from mistakenly believing that the stopped state has ended.

In addition, in this example, an abnormality alert is initiated at timing ty, but is terminated after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) has passed. In other words, the performance display device 1600 is set to return to operation as it would be if progress was impossible. However, if it is detected that a minor abnormality, such as the main frame 4 closing against the outer frame 2, has been resolved before the predetermined period has passed, the abnormality alert is terminated at that point.

Next, after transitioning to the stopped state, the power is turned off at timing t2, and then turned back on at timing t3. In this example, when the power is turned back on, limit clear pattern table 4 is used as the limit clear pattern table.

First, let's consider the case where the power is turned back on at timing t3, but power-on pattern 2 or 3 is selected, which clears the ball output amount and the stopped state. When power-on pattern 2 or 3 is selected, the game state at the time of power interruption is cleared (initialized), but the "ball output amount before and after the stopped state began" and "game limits during the stopped state" are also cleared (initialized). Therefore, whether power-on pattern 2 or 3 is selected, the "game limits during the stopped state" are cleared, thereby controlling the game to the normal state (a state where the game is not stopped). In other words, it is possible to resume gameplay (main gameplay) on the main control board 1310 side. The behavior in the normal state (a state where the game is not stopped) is as described above.

At timing t3, the effect display device 1600, Lamp A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), Lamp B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speaker execute Clear Notification 2. For example, the effect display device 1600 displays a predetermined combination of decorative patterns as the initial display, and also displays the message "Limits cleared" as Clear Notification 2 to indicate that the ball output amount and limit have been cleared. This allows the hall manager to confirm that the ball output amount and limit have been cleared when the power is turned back on. However, Clear Notification 2 does not necessarily notify that the limit has been cleared if the limit was not reached when the power was turned off, and it may instead notify that the ball output amount has been cleared or the amount of balls output at the time of clearing.

In addition, at timing t3, lamps A and B will light up or flash red as clear notification 2.

In addition, at timing t3, the speaker outputs a clear notification 2 saying "Limits cleared," indicating that the payout amount and limit have been cleared.

In this example, Clear Notification 2 is initiated at timing t3, but is terminated after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 10 seconds) has passed. In other words, the effect display device 1600, Lamp A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), Lamp B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the gaming board 5), and speaker are returned to normal operation. However, normal operation may be initiated before Clear Notification 2 is terminated. Clear Notification 2 displayed on the effect display device 1600 may continue to be displayed even after the predetermined period has passed. Such Clear Notification 2 may be made erasable by administrator operation. This means that Clear Notification 2 will remain displayed unless it is erased by administrator operation, making it more difficult to commit fraud.

Next, we will explain the case where the power is turned back on at timing t3', and power-on pattern 1 or 4 is selected, which clears the number of balls dispensed but maintains the stopped state. When power-on pattern 1 or 4 is selected, the game state at the time of power-off is maintained, but the "number of balls dispensed before and after the stopped state began" is cleared (initialized), while the "restrictions on play during the stopped state" are maintained. Therefore, whether power-on pattern 1 or 4 is selected, the behavior of the stopped state is maintained by maintaining the "restrictions on play during the stopped state." In other words, it is impossible to resume play (main game) on the main control board 1310 side. The behavior of the stopped state is as described above.

At timing t3', the effect display device 1600, Lamp A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration members), Lamp B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speaker execute Clear Notification 1. For example, the effect display device 1600 displays the message "Ball output has been cleared" as Clear Notification 1 to indicate that the ball output amount has been cleared. This allows the hall manager to confirm that the ball output amount has been cleared when the power is turned back on. However, Clear Notification 1 may also notify that the stop state has been maintained if the ball output amount was in a stop state when the power was cut off, or it may not only notify that the ball output amount has been cleared but also the amount of balls output at the time of clearing.

In addition, at timing t3', lamps A and B will light up or flash green as clear notification 1.

In addition, at timing t3', the speaker outputs a clear notification 1 saying "The amount of dispensed balls has been cleared" to indicate that the amount of dispensed balls has been cleared.

In addition, in this example, Clear Notification 1 is initiated at timing t3, but is terminated after a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has passed. In other words, the performance display device 1600, Lamp A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), Lamp B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speaker are set to return to operation when progress is impossible. However, operation when progress is impossible may be initiated before Clear Notification 1 is terminated.

Specifically, the effect display device 1600 displays the message "Play restricted" as a progress impossibility notification (progression impossibility display). In addition, the effect display device 1600 displays the message "Return to normal state by clearing the RAM" as a clearing method notification (clearing method display) to show the hall manager how to clear the stalled state. This allows the hall manager to understand that the stalled state cannot be cleared unless power-on pattern 2 or 3, which involves clearing the RAM, is selected when the power is turned back on.

Furthermore, when the speaker performs an action when progress is disabled, it outputs a sound that says, "Play is being restricted because the daily ball payout limit has been reached," as a progress disabled notification (progress disabled sound). However, as mentioned above, such progress disabled sound may end after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since its output began. However, even if the output of the progress disabled sound has ended during a play-disabled state, the progress disabled sound may be output again if the power is turned back on at timing t3'. In such a case, the output of the progress disabled sound will end once a predetermined time has elapsed since timing t3'. As a result, when the power is turned back on, the progress disabled sound is output again, making it easy to understand that the play-disabled state has not been cleared and play is being restricted.

In this example, if power-on pattern 1 or 4 is selected when the power is turned back on, the ball output is cleared but the capped state is maintained. Therefore, the unprogressable notification and clearing method notification are executed after clearing notification 1 is terminated, and clearing notification 1 is executed in priority over the unprogressable notification and clearing method notification. This allows the hall manager to confirm that the ball output has been cleared when the power is turned back on. As another example, the unprogressable notification and clearing method notification may be executed in parallel with clearing notification 1, or clearing notification 1 and the unprogressable notification and clearing method notification may be executed alternately. Furthermore, when an unprogressable notification and clearing method notification are executed in parallel with clearing notification 1, clearing notification 1 may be executed on some of the multiple components and the unprogressable notification and clearing method notification may be executed on the remaining components. Alternatively, clearing notification 1 may be executed on some areas of the same components and the unprogressable notification and clearing method notification may be executed on the remaining areas. Furthermore, even when an unprogressable notification and clearing method notification are executed in parallel with clearing notification 1, clearing notification 1 may be terminated after a predetermined period (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed. The clearing method notification may also end after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed.

Figure 222 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when a serious abnormality occurs during normal operation.

First, before the timing tx at which a severe abnormality is detected, control is performed to the normal state (a state that is not in a stalled state). The behavior of the normal state (a state that is not in a stalled state) is as described above.

Here, we will explain what happens when a severe abnormality is detected at timing tx during normal operation (when the game is not at a dead end). When a severe abnormality is detected, it becomes impossible to fire game balls, and it becomes impossible to proceed with the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side. In other words, when a severe abnormality occurs, the special symbol variable display and jackpot game will not be executed, and even if a start win occurs, the special symbol variable display will not be newly started.

In addition, if a serious abnormality is detected, an abnormality alert is issued to notify the outside world that the abnormality has occurred, and the performance display device 1600, lamps A-C, speaker, movable body, and external terminal board perform the operations required when an error occurs as an abnormality alert.

Specifically, the effect display device 1600, lamp A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration members), lamp B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speaker perform the operations they would perform when an error occurs at timing tx. For example, if magnetism is detected as a serious abnormality, the effect display device 1600 will display the message "Magnetic abnormality" as error display B, and will also display the message "+xx balls remaining until game limit" as current status display A to indicate the number of balls remaining until game play is limited (the number of balls remaining until the number of balls reaches a specific value).

As mentioned above, if a serious abnormality is detected during normal operation (when play is not at a limit), the effect display device 1600 will display not only error display B but also current status display A, indicating the number of balls remaining to be dispensed before play is restricted (the number of balls remaining to be dispensed until the number of balls reaches a specific value). If the power is turned off at this time, the detection of the serious abnormality will be resolved, but the number of balls dispensed will be cleared when the power is turned back on using power-on patterns 1 to 4 in the restriction clear pattern table 4. In this regard, in this example, the hall manager can determine the number of balls remaining to be dispensed before play is restricted and then decide whether or not to turn the power back on.

Before the game reaches its limit, the peripheral control board 1510 uses some components, such as the effect display device 1600, to perform pre-notification operations to notify the player that the number of balls dispensed is approaching a specific value. Specifically, the effect display device 1600 displays the message "+XX balls remaining until play limit" in a specific display area as a pre-notification display. This specific display area is set as part of the display area of the effect display device 1600 and is used to display when the number of balls dispensed is approaching a specific value. To prevent the hall manager from overlooking this, it is a fixed area that remains unchanged regardless of the game status. If a serious abnormality is detected while this pre-notification display is being executed, the effect display device 1600 may display the same data as the pre-notification display as current status display A. Additionally, when the advance notice display is used to display current status display A, it is configured to be displayed on a layer higher (closer to the front) than the layers displaying other effect images; in this example, current status display A is displayed on the top layer, and the display is controlled to ensure that it can continue to be recognized while the abnormality notification is being executed. This prevents current status display A from becoming unrecognizable.

In addition, at timing tx, lamps A and B emit an error light, with the LED lighting up or blinking in a single color.

In addition, Lamp C is equipped with a functional display unit 1400 including a status indicator, normal symbol indicator, normal hold indicator, first special symbol indicator, first special hold number indicator, second special symbol indicator, second special hold number indicator, and round indicator, and all of these LEDs are set to light up. However, as another example, the functional display unit 1400 may be provided with an LED dedicated to abnormality notification, and when a serious abnormality is detected, the LED dedicated to abnormality notification may be set to light up and the other LEDs may be set to off.

In addition, the speaker will output an error sound saying, "A magnetic abnormality has occurred."

In addition, the movable body is put into an inoperable state at time tx so that it will not operate. For example, if the movable body is in operation at time tx, the movable body is forcibly stopped mid-operation. However, as another example, a movable body that is not in its initial position may be returned to its initial position after time tx before the movable body is stopped. In this way, even if the movable body is located in front of the display area of the performance display device 1600 at time tx, the movable body will return to its initial position after time tx, making it less likely that the error display B or current status display A being executed by the performance display device 1600 will be overlooked.

In addition, a security signal is output from the external terminal board at timing tx. As a result, if a serious abnormality is detected, a security signal is output to the hall computer, allowing the hall to understand that a serious abnormality has occurred.

Furthermore, if a serious abnormality is detected at timing tx, it will be impossible for the game ball to be launched into the game area 5a when the player operates the handle 160.

Furthermore, if a severe abnormality is detected at timing tx, the number of game balls B that enter the ball entrance (winning entrance, outgoing entrance) (number of entering balls) and the number of game balls B that are paid out as prize balls (number of paid out) are not counted. In other words, it is not possible to perform calculations regarding the ratio of the number of paid out balls to the number of entering balls, and this is not reflected in the base value displayed on the base monitor 1310h. However, the number of game balls B that enter the ball entrance (winning entrance, outgoing entrance) (number of entering balls) may be counted, and a calculation may be performed regarding the ratio of the number of paid out balls to the number of entering balls, which may be reflected in the base value displayed on the base monitor 1310h.

Furthermore, if a severe abnormality is detected at time tx, a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out as prize balls for balls detected entering a prize slot before time tx, and the number of game balls paid out as prize balls can be added to the player's ball count. This allows the player to obtain prize balls up to the number of game balls until the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value. On the other hand, if a ball is detected entering a prize slot after a severe abnormality is detected at time tx, the predetermined number of game balls will not be paid out as prize balls, and will not be added to the player's ball count. However, if a severe abnormality is detected at time tx, the machine may be configured not to detect balls entering a prize slot. Similarly, even if a ball enters a prize slot, the predetermined number of game balls will not be paid out as prize balls, and will not be added to the player's ball count.

Furthermore, if a serious abnormality is detected at timing tx, the operation performed when an error occurs is executed as an abnormality notification, but if another serious abnormality is detected thereafter at timing ty, the operation performed when that error occurred is continued without change. However, it may also be configured so that after a serious abnormality is detected at timing tx, another serious abnormality is not detected.

In addition, in this example, an abnormality alert is initiated at timing tx, but the alert does not end even after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) has passed. For this reason, if a serious abnormality occurs, the hall manager must shut off the power to end the abnormality alert, and then turn the power back on so that game progress can resume.

Next, after a serious abnormality is detected during normal operation (not during a stalled state), the power is shut off at time t2 to terminate the abnormality notification, and then the power is turned back on at time t3. In this example, when the power is turned back on, limit clear pattern table 4 is used as the limit clear pattern table.

First, let us consider the case where the power is turned back on at time t3, and power-on pattern 2 or 3 is selected as the power-on pattern, which clears the ball output amount and the stopped state. When power-on pattern 2 or 3 is selected, the game state at the time of power-off is cleared (initialized), but the "ball output amount before and after the stopped state began" and "game restrictions during the stopped state" are also cleared (initialized). In this example, since the game was not in a stopped state when the power was turned off at time t2, when the power is turned back on at time t3, the game is controlled to the normal state (a state where the game is not stopped) regardless of whether power-on pattern 2 or 3 is selected. In other words, it is possible to resume gameplay (main gameplay) on the main control board 1310 side. The behavior of the normal state (a state where the game is not stopped) is as described above.

At timing t3, the effect display device 1600, Lamp A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), Lamp B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speaker execute Clear Notification 2. For example, the effect display device 1600 displays a predetermined combination of decorative patterns as the initial display, and also displays the message "Limits cleared" as Clear Notification 2 to indicate that the ball output amount and limit have been cleared. This allows the hall manager to confirm that the ball output amount and limit have been cleared when the power is turned back on. However, since the limit was not reached when the power was turned off, Clear Notification 2 does not necessarily have to notify that the limit has been cleared, and it may instead notify that the ball output amount has been cleared or the amount of balls output at the time of clearing.

In addition, at timing t3, lamps A and B will light up or flash red as clear notification 2.

In addition, at timing t3, the speaker outputs a clear notification 2 saying "Limits cleared," indicating that the payout amount and limit have been cleared.

In this example, Clear Notification 2 is initiated at timing t3, but is terminated after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 10 seconds) has passed. In other words, the effect display device 1600, Lamp A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), Lamp B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the gaming board 5), and speaker are returned to normal operation. However, normal operation may be initiated before Clear Notification 2 is terminated. Clear Notification 2 displayed on the effect display device 1600 may continue to be displayed even after the predetermined period has passed. Such Clear Notification 2 may also be made erasable by administrator operation. This means that Clear Notification 2 will remain displayed unless it is erased by administrator operation, making it more difficult to commit fraud.

Next, we will explain the case where the power is turned back on at timing t3', and power-on pattern 1 or 4 is selected, which clears the ball output amount but maintains the stopped state. When power-on pattern 1 or 4 is selected, the game state at the time of power-off is maintained, but the "ball output amount before and after the stopped state began" is cleared (initialized), while the "game limits during the stopped state" are maintained. In this example, since the game was not in a stopped state when the power was turned off at timing t2, when the power is turned back on at timing t3, it is controlled to the normal state (a state where the game is not in a stopped state) regardless of whether power-on pattern 1 or 4 is selected. In other words, it is possible to resume gameplay (main gameplay) on the main control board 1310 side. The behavior of the normal state (a state where the game is not in a stopped state) is as described above.

At timing t3', the effect display device 1600, Lamp A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration members), Lamp B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speaker execute Clear Notification 1. For example, the effect display device 1600 displays the message "Ball output has been cleared" as Clear Notification 1 to indicate that the ball output amount has been cleared. This allows the hall manager to confirm that the ball output amount has been cleared when the power is turned back on. However, Clear Notification 1 may also notify that the stop state has been maintained if the ball output amount was in a stop state when the power was cut off, or it may not only notify that the ball output amount has been cleared but also the amount of balls output at the time of clearing.

In addition, at timing t3', lamps A and B will light up or flash green as clear notification 1.

In addition, at timing t3', the speaker outputs a clear notification 1 saying "The amount of dispensed balls has been cleared" to indicate that the amount of dispensed balls has been cleared.

In addition, in this example, Clear Notification 1 is initiated at timing t3, but is terminated after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 10 seconds) has passed. In other words, the effect display device 1600, Lamp A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), Lamp B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speaker are returned to normal operation. However, normal operation may be initiated before Clear Notification 1 is terminated.

Figure 223 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when a serious abnormality occurs during a play stop state.

First, the system is controlled to a stalled state before the timing tx at which a severe abnormality is detected. The behavior of the stalled state is as described above.

Here, we will explain what happens when a serious abnormality is detected at timing tx during the game-stop state. When a serious abnormality is detected, an abnormality notification is issued to notify the outside world that the abnormality has occurred, and the effect display device 1600 executes the operation it would perform when an error occurs as an abnormality notification. Meanwhile, in all other respects, such as disabling game progress, nothing changes from the situation before timing tx when no serious abnormality was detected, and the game-stop state behavior is maintained.

Specifically, the effect display device 1600 performs the operation when an error occurs at timing tx. For example, if magnetism is detected as a serious abnormality, the effect display device 1600 displays the message "Magnetic abnormality" as error display B, and also displays the message "Play limit reached" as current status display B to indicate that the game has already entered a stop state and play is restricted (after the number of balls dispensed has reached a specific value).

As described above, if a serious abnormality is detected during a game-stopping state, the effect display device 1600 will display not only error display B but also current status display B, indicating that the game has already transitioned to a game-stopping state and play is restricted (after the number of balls dispensed has reached a specific value). When the power is turned back on in this case, the detection of the serious abnormality will be resolved, but while turning the power back on using power-on patterns 1 and 4 in the restriction clear pattern table 4 will maintain the restrictions on play during the game-stopping state, turning the power back on using power-on patterns 2 and 3 will clear the restrictions on play during the game-stopping state. In this regard, in this example, the hall manager can determine which power-on pattern to use after understanding that the game has already transitioned to a game-stopping state and play is restricted.

In addition, in this example, only the effect display device 1600 is used to issue an abnormality alert, and components other than the effect display device 1600 are prioritized to execute operations when progress is impossible. This makes it easy to understand that even if a serious abnormality is detected during a play-stop state, the game has already transitioned to a play-stop state and play is restricted.

In addition, from the external terminal board, a forced output state is set in which a security signal is forcibly output from the time t1 when the system transitions to a stopped state. However, if a serious abnormality is detected at time tx, the security signal being output is terminated and no new security signal is output, but the security signal being output continues to be output. This prevents the hall from mistakenly believing that the stopped state has ended.

In addition, in this example, an abnormality alert is initiated at timing tx, but the alert does not end even after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) has passed. For this reason, if a serious abnormality occurs, the hall manager must shut off the power to end the abnormality alert, and then turn the power back on so that game progress can resume.

Next, after a serious abnormality is detected during the stopped state, the power is shut off at timing t2 to terminate the abnormality notification, and then the power is turned back on at timing t3. In this example, when the power is turned back on, limit clear pattern table 4 is used as the limit clear pattern table.

First, let's consider the case where the power is turned back on at timing t3, but power-on pattern 2 or 3 is selected, which clears the ball output amount and the stopped state. When power-on pattern 2 or 3 is selected, the game state at the time of power interruption is cleared (initialized), but the "ball output amount before and after the stopped state began" and "game limits during the stopped state" are also cleared (initialized). Therefore, whether power-on pattern 2 or 3 is selected, the "game limits during the stopped state" are cleared, thereby controlling the game to the normal state (a state where the game is not stopped). In other words, it is possible to resume gameplay (main gameplay) on the main control board 1310 side. The behavior in the normal state (a state where the game is not stopped) is as described above.

At timing t3, the effect display device 1600, Lamp A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), Lamp B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speaker execute Clear Notification 2. For example, the effect display device 1600 displays a predetermined combination of decorative patterns as the initial display, and also displays the message "Limits cleared" as Clear Notification 2 to indicate that the ball output amount and limit have been cleared. This allows the hall manager to confirm that the ball output amount and limit have been cleared when the power is turned back on. However, Clear Notification 2 does not necessarily notify that the limit has been cleared if the limit was not reached when the power was turned off, and it may instead notify that the ball output amount has been cleared or the amount of balls output at the time of clearing.

In addition, at timing t3, lamps A and B will light up or flash red as clear notification 2.

In addition, at timing t3, the speaker outputs a clear notification 2 saying "Limits cleared," indicating that the payout amount and limit have been cleared.

In this example, Clear Notification 2 begins at timing t3, but ends after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 10 seconds) has passed. In other words, the effect display device 1600, Lamp A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), Lamp B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the gaming board 5), and speaker are returned to normal operation. However, Clear Notification 2 displayed on the effect display device 1600 may continue to be displayed even after the predetermined period has passed. Furthermore, such Clear Notification 2 may be made to be erasable by administrator operation. In this way, unless Clear Notification 2 is erased by administrator operation, Clear Notification 2 will remain displayed, making it more difficult to commit fraud.

Next, we will explain the case where the power is turned back on at timing t3', and power-on pattern 1 or 4 is selected, which clears the number of balls dispensed but maintains the stopped state. When power-on pattern 1 or 4 is selected, the game state at the time of power-off is maintained, but the "number of balls dispensed before and after the stopped state began" is cleared (initialized), while the "restrictions on play during the stopped state" are maintained. Therefore, whether power-on pattern 1 or 4 is selected, the behavior of the stopped state is maintained by maintaining the "restrictions on play during the stopped state." In other words, it is impossible to resume play (main game) on the main control board 1310 side. The behavior of the stopped state is as described above.

At timing t3', the effect display device 1600, Lamp A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration members), Lamp B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speaker execute Clear Notification 1. For example, the effect display device 1600 displays the message "Ball output has been cleared" as Clear Notification 1 to indicate that the ball output amount has been cleared. This allows the hall manager to confirm that the ball output amount has been cleared when the power is turned back on. However, Clear Notification 1 may also notify that the stop state has been maintained if the ball output amount was in a stop state when the power was cut off, or it may not only notify that the ball output amount has been cleared but also the amount of balls output at the time of clearing.

In addition, at timing t3', lamps A and B will light up or flash green as clear notification 1.

In addition, at timing t3', the speaker outputs a clear notification 1 saying "The amount of dispensed balls has been cleared" to indicate that the amount of dispensed balls has been cleared.

In addition, in this example, Clear Notification 1 is initiated at timing t3, but is terminated after a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has passed. In other words, the performance display device 1600, Lamp A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), Lamp B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speaker are set to return to operation when progress is impossible. However, operation when progress is impossible may be initiated before Clear Notification 1 is terminated.

Specifically, the effect display device 1600 displays the message "Play restricted" as a progress impossibility notification (progression impossibility display). In addition, the effect display device 1600 displays the message "Return to normal state by clearing the RAM" as a clearing method notification (clearing method display) to show the hall manager how to clear the stalled state. This allows the hall manager to understand that the stalled state cannot be cleared unless power-on pattern 2 or 3, which involves clearing the RAM, is selected when the power is turned back on.

Furthermore, when the speaker performs an action when progress is disabled, it outputs a sound that says, "Play is being restricted because the daily ball payout limit has been reached," as a progress disabled notification (progress disabled sound). However, as mentioned above, such progress disabled sound may end after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since its output began. However, even if the output of the progress disabled sound has ended during a play-disabled state, the progress disabled sound may be output again if the power is turned back on at timing t3'. In such a case, the output of the progress disabled sound will end once a predetermined time has elapsed since timing t3'. As a result, when the power is turned back on, the progress disabled sound is output again, making it easy to understand that the play-disabled state has not been cleared and play is being restricted.

In this example, if power-on pattern 1 or 4 is selected when the power is turned back on, the number of balls dispensed is cleared but the capped state is maintained. Therefore, the unable to progress notification and clearing method notification are executed after clear notification 1 is terminated, and clear notification 1 is executed in priority over the unable to progress notification and clearing method notification. This allows the hall manager to confirm that the number of balls dispensed has been cleared when the power is turned back on. As another example, the unable to progress notification and clearing method notification may be executed in parallel with clear notification 1, or clear notification 1 and the unable to progress notification and clearing method notification may be executed alternately. Furthermore, when the unable to progress notification and clearing method notification are executed in parallel with clear notification 1, clear notification 1 may be executed on some of the multiple components and the unable to progress notification and clearing method notification may be executed on the remaining components. Alternatively, clear notification 1 may be executed on some areas of the same components and the unable to progress notification and clearing method notification may be executed on the remaining areas. Furthermore, even when the unable to progress notification and clearing method notification are executed in parallel with clear notification 1, clear notification 1 may be terminated after a predetermined period (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed.

(When a stop preparation state is set: Notification of the amount of balls dispensed when an abnormality is detected during the stop preparation state)
In the above example, when the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, the main control board 1310 enters a stop state, restricting gameplay. However, when the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during a jackpot game (winning game), the game may be configured to transition to a stop state upon the end of the jackpot game, rather than remaining in the stop state until the jackpot game ends. For example, when the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during a jackpot game, the game does not immediately enter a stop state, but transitions to a stop state upon the end of the last round of the jackpot game. In other words, when the number of balls dispensed during a jackpot game reaches a specific value, it is possible to acquire balls that exceed the specific value. In this way, by not ending the jackpot game when the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during a jackpot game, player dissatisfaction can be alleviated.

In this example, when the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during jackpot play, the machine transitions to a stop preparation state, and although it is confirmed that the machine will transition to the stop state, the jackpot play continues. Furthermore, as with the stop state, the machine is configured so that when the power is turned back on after a power outage, it is possible to choose whether to maintain or clear the stop preparation state.

Specifically, in Limit Clear Pattern Table 4, when the power is turned on, the "restrictions on play during the stop state" are cleared (initialized) only if the game state at the time of power interruption is cleared (initialized), as in power-on patterns 2 and 3, but the stop preparation state is also cleared (initialized). On the other hand, when the game state at the time of power interruption is maintained, as in power-on patterns 1 and 4, the "restrictions on play during the stop state" are maintained, but the stop preparation state is also maintained. In other words, just like the stop state, it is possible to choose whether to maintain or clear the stop preparation state when power is turned on again after a power interruption. For example, if the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during jackpot play and a stop preparation state occurs, and you want to clear the stop preparation state, you can simply perform a power-on operation to clear the stop preparation state after the power is turned off. This power-on operation will clear the jackpot play that was in progress. On the other hand, if you want to maintain the ready-to-stop state, you can perform the power-on operation to maintain the ready-to-stop state after power is turned off. This will restart any jackpot play that was in progress. If power-on pattern 5 is selected when the power is turned on, the ball removal process described above is simply executed, and play does not begin, so the ready-to-stop state is maintained without being cleared (initialized).

Figure 224 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when a minor abnormality occurs during the stop preparation state.

First, at time t1 during jackpot play, it is determined that the number of balls dispensed will reach a specific value due to the payout of prize balls based on the ball entering the winning slot. When the main control board 1310 detects a ball entering the winning slot, it turns on the stop flag and transitions to a stop preparation state. Note that prior to time t1, when the transition to the stop preparation state occurs, the system is controlled to the normal state (a state that is not in a stop state) and jackpot play is being executed. The behavior in the normal state (a state that is not in a stop state) is as described above.

In addition, in the stop preparation state, the ongoing jackpot game continues. Also, in the stop preparation state, after a predetermined time has passed from timing t1, the effect display device 1600 is used to execute a standby notification to inform the outside that the number of balls dispensed has reached a specific value. For example, in addition to displaying a display (normal display) related to the ongoing jackpot game, the effect display device 1600 is configured to display a standby display saying "The jackpot has ended and today is over," indicating that the number of balls dispensed has already reached a specific value. In this way, in the stop preparation state, a warning is given that the game will transition to the stop state when the jackpot game ends.

On the other hand, in all respects other than the execution of the standby notification, such as the progress of the jackpot game, there is no change from the situation before timing t1, and normal behavior (a state in which the game is not stopped) is maintained.

In this example, only the effect display device 1600 is used to execute the standby notification, and components other than the effect display device 1600 are given priority for normal operation. This makes it easy to grasp information about the jackpot game currently being played when preparing to stop.

Next, we will explain what happens when a minor abnormality is detected at timing tx during the game-stop preparation state. When a minor abnormality is detected, an abnormality alert is issued to notify the outside world that the abnormality has occurred, and the effect display device 1600, lamp A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), speaker, and external terminal board execute the operations required when an error occurs as an abnormality alert. Meanwhile, with regard to aspects other than the execution of the abnormality alert, such as the progress of the jackpot game, no change occurs from the situation before timing tx when no minor abnormality was detected, and normal behavior (a state where game-stop state is not in effect) is maintained.

Specifically, the effect display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration members), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speaker perform the operations they would perform when an error occurs at timing tx. For example, if the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 is detected as a minor abnormality, the effect display device 1600 will display the message "Door open error" as error display A, and will also display the message "The jackpot has ended, so today is over" as current status display C, indicating that the number of balls dispensed has already reached a specific value.

As described above, if a minor abnormality is detected during the stop preparation state, the effect display device 1600 will display not only error display A but also current status display C, indicating that the amount of balls dispensed has already reached a specific value. If the power is turned off at this time, the minor abnormality detection will be resolved, but the stop preparation state will be maintained when the power is turned back on using power-on patterns 1 and 4 in the limit clear pattern table 4, while the stop preparation state will be cleared when the power is turned back on using power-on patterns 2 and 3. In this regard, in this example, the hall manager can determine whether the amount of balls dispensed has already reached a specific value and the machine has transitioned to the stop preparation state, and then determine which power-on pattern to use to turn the power back on.

Note that while in the end-of-play preparation state, the effect display device 1600 displays a standby display message saying "The jackpot is over, so today's game is over," indicating that the number of balls dispensed has already reached a specific value. However, if a minor abnormality is detected during this end-of-play preparation state, the effect display device 1600 may reuse the same data as the standby display to display current status display C. Furthermore, when the standby display is reused to display current status display C, current status display C is displayed as the top layer, and the display is controlled so that it can continue to be recognized while the abnormality notification is being executed. This prevents current status display C from becoming unrecognizable.

In addition, in this example, if a minor abnormality occurs during the preparation state for stopping the game, or if a serious abnormality described below occurs, current status display C is executed, but current status display C will not end even if the amount of balls dispensed changes thereafter. Furthermore, current status display C can be erased, for example, when a predetermined time has passed until error display A ends, or by administrator operation to resolve the abnormality. This makes it possible to prevent current status display C from being displayed more than necessary.

In addition, in this example, if a minor abnormality occurs during the preparation state for finishing the game, or if a serious abnormality, as described below, occurs, the effect display device 1600 executes current status display C. However, if a frequently occurring operational abnormality (error) occurs, such as the upper tray becoming full on a conventional gaming machine (a gaming machine that pays out actual prize balls to the outside of the gaming machine), the effect display device 1600 is configured not to execute current status display C. This makes it possible to prevent current status display C from being displayed too frequently.

In addition, in this example, if a minor abnormality occurs during the end-of-game preparation state, or if a serious abnormality, as described below, occurs, the performance display device 1600 executes current status display C. However, if a RAM error occurs, for example, it is assumed that a serious abnormality has occurred, and the performance display device 1600 executes current status display C. However, if a RAM error occurs, there is a possibility that the memory relating to the end-of-game preparation state itself is abnormal, so the performance display device 1600 may not execute current status display C.

In addition, at timing tx, lamps A and B emit an error light by lighting or flashing a single color LED, and the speaker outputs an error sound saying "Door open error."

In addition, a security signal is output from the external terminal board at timing tx. As a result, if a minor abnormality is detected, a security signal is output to the hall computer, allowing the hall to know that a minor abnormality has occurred.

In addition, in this example, an abnormality alert is initiated at timing tx, but is terminated after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) has passed. In other words, the performance display device 1600, lamp A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), speaker, and external terminal board are returned to normal operation. However, if it is detected that a minor abnormality, such as the main frame 4 closing against the outer frame 2, has been resolved before the predetermined period has passed, the abnormality alert is terminated at that point.

Next, at timing tz, it is determined that the jackpot game has ended, but after the jackpot game state ends, the system transitions to a "stop game state" in which restriction pattern 3, which performs both "game stop" and "firing stop," is applied. The behavior of the stop game state is as described above.

Furthermore, after the transition to the stopped state, the power is turned off at timing t2, and then turned back on at timing t3. In this example, when the power is turned back on, limit clear pattern table 4 is used as the limit clear pattern table. Here, the power is turned back on at timing t3, and power-on patterns 2 and 3, which clear the amount of balls dispensed and the stopped state, are selected as the power-on pattern, and the power is turned back on at timing t3', and power-on patterns 1 and 4, which clear the amount of balls dispensed but maintain the stopped state, are selected as the power-on pattern. The behavior of these cases is as explained in Figure 221.

Figure 225 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when a serious abnormality occurs during the stop preparation state.

First, before the timing tx at which a severe abnormality is detected, the machine is controlled to enter a stop-play preparation state, and the jackpot game is being played. The behavior of the stop-play preparation state is as described above.

Here, we will explain what happens when a serious abnormality is detected at timing tx during the stop preparation state. If a serious abnormality is detected, the launch of game balls is disabled, and the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side cannot proceed. In other words, if a serious abnormality occurs, the jackpot game currently being played is stopped.

In addition, if a serious abnormality is detected, an abnormality alert is issued to notify the outside world that the abnormality has occurred, and the performance display device 1600, lamps A-C, speaker, movable body, and external terminal board perform the operations required when an error occurs as an abnormality alert.

Specifically, the effect display device 1600, lamp A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration members), lamp B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the gaming board 5), and speaker perform the operations they would perform when an error occurs at timing tx. For example, if magnetism is detected as a serious abnormality, the effect display device 1600 will display the message "Magnetic abnormality" as error display B, and will also display the message "The jackpot has ended, so today is over" as current status display C, indicating that the number of balls dispensed has already reached a specific value.

As described above, if a serious abnormality is detected during the stop preparation state, the effect display device 1600 will display not only error display A but also current status display C, indicating that the amount of balls dispensed has already reached a specific value. If the power is turned off at this time, the serious abnormality detection will be resolved, but the stop preparation state will be maintained when the power is turned back on using power-on patterns 1 and 4 in the limit clear pattern table 4, while the stop preparation state will be cleared when the power is turned back on using power-on patterns 2 and 3. In this regard, in this example, the hall manager can determine whether the amount of balls dispensed has already reached a specific value and the machine has transitioned to the stop preparation state, and then determine which power-on pattern to use to turn the power back on.

Note that while in the stop preparation state, the effect display device 1600 displays a standby display message saying "The jackpot is over, so today's game is over" to indicate that the number of balls dispensed has already reached a specific value. However, if a serious abnormality is detected during this stop preparation state, the effect display device 1600 may reuse the same data as the standby display to display current status display C. Furthermore, when the standby display is reused to display current status display C, current status display C is displayed as the top layer, and the display is controlled so that it can continue to be recognized while the abnormality notification is being executed. This prevents current status display C from becoming unrecognizable.

In addition, at timing tx, lamps A and B emit an error light, with the LED lighting up or blinking in a single color.

In addition, Lamp C is equipped with a functional display unit 1400 including a status indicator, normal symbol indicator, normal hold indicator, first special symbol indicator, first special hold number indicator, second special symbol indicator, second special hold number indicator, and round indicator, and all of these LEDs are lit. However, as another example, the functional display unit 1400 may be provided with an LED dedicated to abnormality notification, and when a serious abnormality is detected, the LED dedicated to abnormality notification may be lit and the other LEDs may be turned off.

In addition, the speaker will output an error sound saying, "A magnetic abnormality has occurred."

In addition, the movable body is put into an inoperable state at time tx, preventing it from operating. For example, if the movable body is in operation at time tx, the movable body is forcibly stopped mid-operation. However, as another example, a movable body that is not in its initial position may be returned to its initial position after time tx before the movable body is stopped. In this way, even if the movable body is located in front of the display area of the performance display device 1600 at time tx, the movable body will return to its initial position after time tx, making it less likely that the error display B or current status display C being executed by the performance display device 1600 will be overlooked.

In addition, a security signal is output from the external terminal board at timing tx. As a result, if a serious abnormality is detected, a security signal is output to the hall computer, allowing the hall to understand that a serious abnormality has occurred.

Furthermore, if a serious abnormality is detected at timing tx, it will be impossible for the game ball to be launched into the game area 5a when the player operates the handle 160.

Furthermore, if a severe abnormality is detected at timing tx, the number of game balls B that enter the ball entrance (winning entrance, outgoing entrance) (number of entering balls) and the number of game balls B that are paid out as prize balls (number of paid out) are not counted. In other words, it is not possible to perform calculations regarding the ratio of the number of paid out balls to the number of entering balls, and this is not reflected in the base value displayed on the base monitor 1310h. However, the number of game balls B that enter the ball entrance (winning entrance, outgoing entrance) (number of entering balls) may be counted, and a calculation may be performed regarding the ratio of the number of paid out balls to the number of entering balls, which may be reflected in the base value displayed on the base monitor 1310h.

Furthermore, if a severe abnormality is detected at time tx, a predetermined number of game balls can be paid out as prize balls for balls detected entering a prize slot before time tx, and the number of game balls paid out as prize balls can be added to the player's ball count. This allows the player to obtain prize balls up to the number of game balls until the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value. On the other hand, if a ball is detected entering a prize slot after a severe abnormality is detected at time tx, the predetermined number of game balls will not be paid out as prize balls, and will not be added to the player's ball count. However, if a severe abnormality is detected at time tx, the system may be configured not to detect balls entering a prize slot. Similarly, even if a ball enters a prize slot, the predetermined number of game balls will not be paid out as prize balls, and will not be added to the player's ball count.

In addition, in this example, an abnormality alert is initiated at timing tx, but the alert does not end even after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) has passed. For this reason, if a serious abnormality occurs, the hall manager must shut off the power to end the abnormality alert, and then turn the power back on so that game progress can resume.

Next, after a serious abnormality is detected during the cutoff preparation state, the power is shut off at timing t2 to terminate the abnormality notification, and then the power is turned back on at timing t3. In this example, when the power is turned back on, limit clear pattern table 4 is used as the limit clear pattern table.

First, let's consider the case where power is turned back on at timing t3, but power-on pattern 2 or 3 is selected, which clears the payout amount and the stoppage state. When power-on pattern 2 or 3 is selected, the game state at the time of power interruption is cleared (initialized), clearing information about the jackpot game that was in progress. Furthermore, the "payout amount before and after the stoppage state was initiated" and "game limits during the stoppage state" are cleared (initialized), and the stoppage preparation state is also cleared (initialized). Therefore, whether power-on pattern 2 or 3 is selected, clearing the stoppage preparation state controls the game to the normal state (a state where the game is not in a stoppage state). In other words, it is possible to resume gameplay (main game) on the main control board 1310 side. However, the jackpot game that was in progress will not be resumed. The behavior in the normal state (a state where the game is not in a stoppage state) is as described above.

The effect display device 1600, Lamp A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), Lamp B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speaker execute Clear Notification 2 at timing t3. For example, the effect display device 1600 initially displays a predetermined combination of decorative symbols, and also displays the message "Limit Cleared" as Clear Notification 2 to indicate that the ball volume and limit preparation state have been cleared. This allows the hall manager to confirm that the ball volume and limit preparation state have been cleared when the power is turned back on. However, with regard to Clear Notification 2, it is not necessary to notify that the limit preparation state has been cleared if the limit preparation state was not in effect when the power was turned off, and it may instead notify that the ball volume has been cleared or the amount of balls dispensed at the time of clearing. Furthermore, although a common notification is executed for Clear Notification 2 when the limit state is cleared and when the limit preparation state is cleared, separate notifications may also be executed.

In addition, at timing t3, lamps A and B will light up or flash red as clear notification 2.

In addition, at timing t3, the speaker outputs a clear notification 2 saying "Limits cleared," indicating that the ball output amount and limit preparation state have been cleared.

In this example, Clear Notification 2 is initiated at timing t3, but is terminated after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 10 seconds) has passed. In other words, the effect display device 1600, Lamp A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), Lamp B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the gaming board 5), and speaker are returned to normal operation. However, normal operation may be initiated before Clear Notification 2 is terminated. Clear Notification 2 displayed on the effect display device 1600 may continue to be displayed even after the predetermined period has passed. Such Clear Notification 2 may also be made erasable by administrator operation. This means that Clear Notification 2 will remain displayed unless it is erased by administrator operation, making it more difficult to commit fraud.

Next, we will explain the case where the power is turned back on at timing t3', and power-on pattern 1 or 4 is selected, which clears the number of balls dispensed but maintains the stopped state. When power-on pattern 1 or 4 is selected, the game state at the time of power-off is maintained, so information about the jackpot game that was in progress is maintained. In addition, the "number of balls dispensed before and after the stopped state was initiated" is cleared (initialized), while the "game limits during the stopped state" are maintained, and the stop preparation state is also maintained. Therefore, whether power-on pattern 1 or 4 is selected, the stop preparation state is maintained. In other words, in the stop preparation state, the jackpot game that was in progress will resume. The behavior of the stop preparation state is as described above.

At timing t3', the effect display device 1600, Lamp A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration members), Lamp B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speaker execute Clear Notification 1. For example, the effect display device 1600 displays the message "Ball output has been cleared" as Clear Notification 1 to indicate that the ball output amount has been cleared. This allows the hall manager to confirm that the ball output amount has been cleared when the power is turned back on. However, Clear Notification 1 may also notify that the stop state has been maintained if the ball output amount was in a stop state when the power was cut off, or it may not only notify that the ball output amount has been cleared but also the amount of balls output at the time of clearing.

In addition, at timing t3', lamps A and B will light up or flash green as clear notification 1.

In addition, at timing t3', the speaker outputs a clear notification 1 saying "The amount of dispensed balls has been cleared" to indicate that the amount of dispensed balls has been cleared.

In addition, in this example, Clear Notification 1 is initiated at timing t3, but is terminated after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 10 seconds) has passed. In other words, the effect display device 1600, Lamp A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), Lamp B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speaker are returned to normal operation. However, normal operation may be initiated before Clear Notification 1 is terminated.

Specifically, the effect display device 1600 not only displays a display (normal display) regarding the resumed jackpot game, but also displays a standby message saying "The jackpot is over, so today's game is over" to indicate that the number of balls dispensed has already reached a specific value. Additionally, the effect display device 1600 displays a clearing method message saying "Clearing the RAM will return to normal mode" to show the hall manager how to clear the ready-to-stop mode. This allows the hall manager to understand that the ready-to-stop mode cannot be cleared unless power-on pattern 2 or 3, which involves clearing the RAM, is selected when the power is turned back on. However, the clearing method notification may be executed after the mode transitions from the ready-to-stop mode to the stopped mode.

In this example, if power-on pattern 1 or 4 is selected when the power is turned back on, after clear notification 1 ends, the effect display device 1600 displays the normal display (display related to the resumed jackpot game) and the standby display, but the normal display and standby display may also be executed in parallel with clear notification 1. This prevents the player from missing out on winning balls when jackpot game is resumed.

In this example, to clear the ball output amount while maintaining the ready state for the machine to stop playing, the wait display notification and clear method notification are executed after clear notification 1 ends, and clear notification 1 is executed in priority over the wait display notification and clear method notification. This allows the hall manager to confirm that the ball output amount has been cleared when the power is turned back on. As another example, the wait display notification and clear method notification may be executed in parallel with clear notification 1, or clear notification 1 and the wait display notification and clear method notification may be executed alternately. Furthermore, when executing the wait display notification and clear method notification in parallel with clear notification 1, clear notification 1 may be executed on some of the multiple components and the wait display notification and clear method notification on the remaining components, or clear notification 1 may be executed on some areas of the same components and the wait display notification and clear method notification on the remaining areas. Furthermore, even when the wait display notification and clear method notification are executed in parallel with clear notification 1, clear notification 1 may be terminated after a predetermined period (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed. The clearing method notification may also end after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed.

Figure 226 is a specific example of what happens when a minor abnormality occurs during normal operation or during a stoppage state. In this example, 100,000 is set as the "specific value" described above, and limit pattern 3 is selected as the "limit pattern" described above. In other words, if limit pattern 3 is set, when the amount of balls dispensed reaches the specific value (100,000 balls), the stoppage state will occur, accompanied by "play stop" and "firing stop."

As shown in Figure 226 (A), the effect display device 1600 executes a variable effect (an effect based on a variable pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, and displays the variable decorative symbol in the central area of the effect display device 1600. In addition, in the upper right area of the effect display device 1600, the variable second decorative symbol is displayed. In addition, in the lower left area of the effect display device 1600, a pending display is displayed for the amount of time that a gaming ball has entered the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004 but the variable special symbol display is pending.

As shown in FIG. 226(B), if the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 is detected as a minor abnormality during normal operation, the display of the varying decorative symbols continues, but in the central area of the effect display device 1600, an error display A is displayed, indicating that the main frame 4 is open, with the message "Door open error. Please call an attendant." Furthermore, in the upper area of the effect display device 1600, a current status display A is displayed, displaying the message "+42,000 balls remaining until game play is limited," indicating the remaining number of balls until game play is limited (the remaining number of balls until game play reaches a specific value). These error display A and current status display A are displayed in a higher layer than the display of information related to game play, such as decorative symbols. Furthermore, current status display A is displayed in a position where it does not overlap with the display of information related to game play or error display A. This allows the remaining number of balls until game play is limited to be accurately determined when a minor abnormality occurs.

As shown in Figure 226 (C), when a specified error termination condition is met, such as the main frame 4 closing against the outer frame 2, the performance display device 1600 erases the error display A and current status display A.

As shown in Figure 226 (D), when the amount of balls dispensed approaches a specific value, for example, when the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls dispensed reaches the specific value becomes "+500 balls," the upper area of the effect display device 1600 displays a pre-notification display indicating the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls dispensed reaches the specific value, stating "+500 balls remaining until game limit." Note that the pre-notification display is displayed in a position that does not overlap with the display of information related to the game, such as decorative patterns.

As shown in Figure 226 (E), when the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, the machine transitions to a stop state and game play is restricted. The display device 1600 displays an image corresponding to the stop state. The image corresponding to the stop state displays the message "Play Restriction," along with messages such as "Play has been restricted because the daily limit of 100,000 balls has been reached," "Please call an attendant," and "The Settlement Button is Enabled." The settlement button here refers to the counting button switch used to execute the settlement process. Furthermore, when the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, the display device 1600 displays the stopping symbols of the decorative symbols, the stopping symbols of the second decorative symbols, a hold indicator, and a pre-notification indicator. However, such game-related information is hidden (made invisible) when the message "Play Restriction" is displayed after the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, and the message is displayed on a darkened screen. This allows players to know that the number of balls dispensed has reached a certain value and that restrictions on play have been implemented, and that restrictions on play cannot be lifted without the hall manager's action. Players can also know that the number of balls a player has can be settled by operating the counting button switch.

In the above example, the effect display device 1600 displays the decorative symbol stopping symbol, the second decorative symbol stopping symbol, the hold display, and the advance notice display before the amount of dispensed balls reaches a specific value, but all such game-related information becomes unrecognizable when the amount of dispensed balls reaches a specific value. However, when the amount of dispensed balls reaches a specific value, some of the game-related information may become unrecognizable, while other information may remain recognizable. For example, the advance notice display may become unrecognizable because it contains information about whether or not to implement a game restriction, while the decorative symbol stopping symbol, the second decorative symbol stopping symbol, and the hold display may remain recognizable. This makes it possible to understand under what circumstances the amount of dispensed balls reached a specific value even after the amount of dispensed balls has reached the specific value.

As shown in Figure 226 (F), if a minor abnormality is detected during a stop-play state, such as the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, the central region of the effect display device 1600 displays the message "Door Open Error. Please Call an Attendant" as error display A, indicating that the main frame 4 is open. Also, in the upper region of the effect display device 1600, a specific display area displays the message "Play Limit Reached" as current status display B, indicating that the game has already entered a stop-play state and play is restricted (after the number of balls dispensed has reached a specific value). This specific display area is set as part of the display area of the effect display device 1600 and is also used for the advance notice display and current status display A described above. It is a fixed area that remains unchanged regardless of the game state so that the hall manager will not overlook it. Furthermore, these error display A and current status display B are configured to be displayed in a layer higher (closer to the front) than the layer displaying other effect images, such as the image display corresponding to the stop-play state. In this example, error display A and current status display B are displayed in the topmost layer. Additionally, current status display B is displayed in a position that does not overlap with the image display (message) corresponding to the stopped play state or error display A. This allows players to be sure that their play is restricted when a minor abnormality occurs.

As shown in Figure 226 (G), when a specified error termination condition is met, such as the main frame 4 closing against the outer frame 2, the performance display device 1600 erases error display A and current status display B.

In this example, in order for the specified clear conditions to end the stalled state to be met, the power must be turned back on in a specified power-on pattern after being shut off. Here, using the limit clear pattern table 4, we will explain the cases where power-on patterns 2 and 3 are selected as the power-on pattern when the power is turned on, which clear the game state at the time of power-off and clear the amount of balls dispensed and the stalled state, and where power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected, which maintain the game state at the time of power-off and clear the amount of balls dispensed but maintain the stalled state.

First, after the game has transitioned to a capped state, if power-on patterns 2 and 3 are selected when the power is turned back on after a power outage, the game state at the time of the power outage is cleared and the capped state is cleared, thereby lifting the game restrictions associated with the capped state. Furthermore, information regarding the remaining variable display and reserved balls when the game was interrupted at the time of the transition to the capped state is retained after the transition to the capped state and at the time of the power outage. However, when the power is turned back on after a power outage, information regarding the remaining variable display and reserved balls when the game was interrupted is cleared, allowing the game to start in a low-probability state with no reserved balls. For this reason, as shown in Figure 226 (H-1), the effect display device 1600 displays an initial image in which there are no reserved balls and the decorative pattern is frozen at the initial pattern. Furthermore, the upper area of the effect display device 1600 displays a clear notification 2, a message reading "Restrictions Cleared," indicating that the ball outage and capped state have been cleared. This clear notification 2 is displayed on a higher layer than the display of information about the game, such as decorative symbols, and is displayed in a position where it does not overlap with the display of information about the game. This allows you to reliably know that the number of balls dispensed and the limit on the number of balls have been cleared when the power is turned back on.

On the other hand, if power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected when the power is turned back on after a transition to a stopped state, maintaining the game state at the time of power-off and clearing the ball output amount but maintaining the stopped state, the game restrictions associated with the stopped state are not lifted. For this reason, the effect display device 1600 displays the message "Ball output amount cleared" as clear notification 1, indicating that the ball output amount has been cleared, and then displays the image shown in Figure 226 (H-2) again. Additionally, in the upper area of the effect display device 1600, a message "Clearing the RAM will return to normal state" is displayed as a clearing method display, indicating to the hall manager how to clear the stopped state. This clearing method display is displayed in a higher layer than the image display corresponding to the stopped state, and is displayed in a position that does not overlap with the image display (message) corresponding to the stopped state. This allows the player to clearly understand, when the power is turned back on, that a power-on restart accompanied by a RAM clear is required to lift the game restrictions.

Figure 227 is a specific example of what happens when a serious abnormality occurs during normal operation or during a stoppage state. In this example, 100,000 is set as the "specific value" described above, and limit pattern 3 is selected as the "limit pattern" described above. In other words, if limit pattern 3 is set, when the amount of balls dispensed reaches the specific value (100,000 balls), a stoppage state will occur, accompanied by "play stop" and "firing stop."

First, we will explain what happens when a serious abnormality occurs during normal operation. As shown in Figure 227 (A), the effect display device 1600 executes a variable effect (an effect based on a variable pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, and displays the variable decorative symbol in the central area of the effect display device 1600. In addition, in the upper right area of the effect display device 1600, the variable second decorative symbol is displayed. In addition, in the lower left area of the effect display device 1600, a pending display is displayed for the amount of time that a gaming ball has entered the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004, but the variable special symbol display is pending.

As shown in Figure 227 (B), if magnetism is detected as a severe abnormality during normal operation, an error state occurs in which the display of the varying decorative symbols is stopped and gameplay is disabled. However, the effect display device 1600 displays the message "Magnetic Abnormal" as error display B, indicating that magnetism has been detected, along with messages such as "Please call an attendant" and "Restarting the power will restore operation and initialize restrictions." Furthermore, when magnetism is detected, the effect display device 1600 displays the stopped decorative symbols, the stopped second decorative symbols, and the hold display. However, such game-related information is hidden (made invisible) when the message "Magnetic Abnormal" is displayed after magnetism is detected, and the message is displayed on a darkened screen. This allows the player to know that an error state has occurred when magnetism is detected. It also allows the player to know that the error state will not be resolved unless the power is turned back on, and that the game restrictions will be lifted when the power is turned back on.

In addition, in the upper area of the effect display device 1600, a current status display A is displayed, displaying the message "+42,000 balls remaining until play is restricted," indicating the remaining number of balls until play is restricted (the remaining number of balls until play reaches a specific value). The error display B and current status display A are displayed on a higher layer than the display of information about play, such as decorative patterns. Furthermore, the current status display A is displayed in a position where it does not overlap with the error display B (message). This makes it possible to reliably determine the remaining number of balls until play is restricted when a serious abnormality is detected.

In this example, in order for the specified clear conditions to be met to end the error state related to a severe abnormality to be met, the power must be turned back on after being shut off. Here, using the limit clear pattern table 4, we will explain the cases where power-on patterns 2 and 3 are selected as the power-on pattern when the power is turned on, which clear the game state at the time of power-off and clear the ball output amount and the limit state, and power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected, which maintain the game state at the time of power-off and clear the ball output amount but maintain the limit state.

First, after an error occurs, if power-on patterns 2 and 3 are selected when the power is turned back on after a power-off, the game status at the time of the power-off is cleared and the payout amount and limit state are cleared. The error state is cleared, allowing gameplay to resume. Furthermore, information regarding the remaining variable display and reserved information at the time of the interruption when the error occurred is retained after the error occurred or when the power was turned off. However, when the power is turned back on after a power-off, such information regarding the remaining variable display and reserved information at the time of the interruption is cleared, allowing gameplay to begin in a low-probability state with no reserved information. For this reason, as shown in Figure 227 (C-1), the effect display device 1600 displays an initial image in which there are no reserved display and the decorative pattern is frozen at the initial pattern. Furthermore, the upper area of the effect display device 1600 displays a clear notification 2, a message stating "Limits Cleared," indicating that the payout amount and limit state have been cleared. This clear notification 2 is displayed on a higher layer than the display of game-related information such as decorative patterns, and is displayed in a position that does not overlap with the display of game-related information. However, in this example, the game was not in a stalled state when the error state occurred, so Clear Notification 2 does not need to display that the stalled state has been cleared, and Clear Notification 2 may instead display that the amount of balls dispensed has been cleared or the amount of balls dispensed at the time of clearing.

Similarly, if power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected when the power is turned back on after an error occurs, maintaining the game state at the time of power-off and clearing the ball dispense amount but maintaining the stop state, the error state is cleared, allowing gameplay to resume. However, information regarding the remaining display changes and information regarding pending changes when the game was interrupted when the error state occurred is retained after the error state occurred and when the power was turned off. By maintaining information regarding the remaining display changes and information regarding pending changes when the game was interrupted, even when the power is turned back on after a power-off, gameplay resumes with pending changes and in the middle of the previous change. For this reason, as shown in Figure 227 (C-2), the effect display device 1600 resumes displaying the decorative pattern changes and the second decorative pattern changes. Additionally, the upper area of the effect display device 1600 displays a message "Ball dispense amount cleared" as clear notification 1, indicating that the ball dispense amount has been cleared. This clear notification 1 is displayed in a higher layer than the display of game-related information such as decorative patterns, and is displayed in a position that does not overlap with the display of game-related information. This allows the player to know with certainty that the number of balls dispensed has been cleared when the power is turned back on. In this example, the display of the decorative pattern changes and the second decorative pattern changes are resumed before the end of Clear Notification 1, but the display of the decorative pattern changes and the second decorative pattern changes may also be resumed after the end of Clear Notification 1.

Next, we will explain what happens when a serious abnormality occurs during a game-stop state. As shown in Figure 227 (A'), when the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, the game transitions to a game-stop state and game play is restricted. The display device 1600 displays an image corresponding to the game-stop state. The image corresponding to the game-stop state displays the message "Game Restriction," along with messages such as "The daily ball-dispensing limit of 100,000 balls has been reached, so game play is restricted," "Please call an attendant," and "The settlement button is active." The settlement button here refers to the counting button switch used to execute the settlement process. Furthermore, when the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, the display device 1600 displays the decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, a hold indicator, and a pre-notification indicator. However, such game-related information is hidden (made invisible) when the message "Game Restriction" is displayed after the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, and instead displays the message on a darkened screen.

As shown in Figure 227 (B'), if magnetism is detected as a serious abnormality during a game-stopped state, the effect display device 1600 displays the message "Magnetic Anomaly" as error display B, indicating that magnetism has been detected, along with messages such as "Please call an attendant" and "Restarting the power will restore the game and reset restrictions." Furthermore, when magnetism is detected, the effect display device 1600 displays an image corresponding to the game-stopped state; however, such an image is hidden (made invisible) at the point when the message "Magnetic Anomaly" is displayed after detecting magnetism, and the message is displayed on a darkened screen. This allows the player to know that an error state has occurred upon detection of magnetism. It also allows the player to know that the error state will not be resolved unless the power is turned back on, and that the game restrictions will be lifted once the power is turned back on.

In addition, in the upper area of the effect display device 1600, a message "Play Limit Reached" is displayed in a specific display area as current status display B, indicating that the game has already transitioned to a play limit state and play is being restricted (after the number of balls dispensed has reached a specific value). This specific display area is set as part of the display area of the effect display device 1600 and is also used for the advance notice display and current status display A described above. It is a fixed area that remains unchanged regardless of the play status so that it is not overlooked by the hall manager. Furthermore, these error display B and current status display B are configured to be displayed in a layer higher (toward the front) than the layer that displays other effect images, such as the image display corresponding to the play limit state. In this example, error display B and current status display B are displayed as the top layer. Furthermore, current status display B is displayed in a position that does not overlap with error display B (message). This allows the player to reliably understand that play is being restricted when a serious abnormality occurs.

In this example, in order for the specified clear conditions to be met to end the error state related to a severe abnormality to be met, the power must be turned back on after being shut off. Here, using the limit clear pattern table 4, we will explain the cases where power-on patterns 2 and 3 are selected as the power-on pattern when the power is turned on, which clear the game state at the time of power-off and clear the ball output amount and the limit state, and power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected, which maintain the game state at the time of power-off and clear the ball output amount but maintain the limit state.

First, if an error occurs during a game-stop state, and power-on patterns 2 and 3 are selected upon power-on after a power-off, the game state at the time of power-off is cleared and the ball payout amount and the game-stop state are cleared. This clears the error state and the game-stop state, lifting the game restrictions imposed by the game-stop state and allowing gameplay to resume. Furthermore, information regarding the remaining variable display and reserved balls when the game was interrupted upon transition to the game-stop state is retained after the game-stop state and at the time of power-off. However, upon power-on again after a power-off, such information regarding the remaining variable display and reserved balls when the game was interrupted is cleared, allowing gameplay to begin in a low-probability state with no reserved balls. For this reason, as shown in Figure 227 (C'-1), the effect display device 1600 displays an initial image in which there are no reserved balls and the decorative symbols are frozen at their initial patterns. Furthermore, the upper area of the effect display device 1600 displays a "Restrictions Cleared" message as a clear notification 2, indicating that the ball payout amount and the game-stop state have been cleared. This clear notification 2 is displayed on a higher layer than the display of information about the game, such as decorative symbols, and is displayed in a position where it does not overlap with the display of information about the game. This allows you to reliably know that the number of balls dispensed and the limit on the number of balls have been cleared when the power is turned back on.

On the other hand, if an error occurs during a stopped state and power is turned off and then back on, and power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected, which maintain the game state at the time of power-off, clear the ball output amount, but maintain the stopped state, the error state is cleared, but the game restrictions associated with the stopped state are not lifted. For this reason, the effect display device 1600 displays the message "Ball output amount cleared" as clear notification 1, indicating that the ball output amount has been cleared, and then displays the image shown in Figure 227 (C'-2) again. Additionally, in the upper area of the effect display device 1600, a message "Resetting the RAM will return to normal" is displayed as a clearing method display, indicating to the hall manager how to clear the stopped state. This clearing method display is displayed in a higher layer than the image display corresponding to the stopped state and in a position that does not overlap with the image display (message) corresponding to the stopped state. This allows the user to clearly understand, when the power is turned back on, that a power-on restart accompanied by RAM clearing is required to lift the game restrictions.

Figure 228 shows a specific example of a presentation that occurs when a minor or serious abnormality occurs during the jackpot preparation state. In this example, the system transitions to the jackpot preparation state when the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value at the time a game ball enters the large prize opening during jackpot play, and transitions to the jackpot state after the jackpot play ends. This example also shows a case where 100,000 is set as the "specific value" described above, and restriction pattern 3 is selected as the "restriction pattern" described above. In other words, if restriction pattern 3 is set, the system will enter a jackpot state accompanied by "game stop" and "fire stop" when the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value (100,000). In this example, if the special symbol lottery results in a jackpot, a 10-round jackpot game is awarded in which the large prize opening 2005 and the special feature opening 2006 are opened and closed.

As shown in Figure 228 (A), the effect display device 1600 executes a variable effect (an effect based on a variable pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, and displays the variable decorative symbol in the central area of the effect display device 1600. Here, depending on the result of the lottery for the special symbol, or during the "consecutive win mode" in which a high probability state continues due to the receipt of game ball B into the V winning slot 2007, etc., if the lottery result for the special symbol is a winning one, "777" is displayed as the stopping symbol for the decorative symbol in the central area of the effect display device 1600. Also, in the upper right area of the effect display device 1600, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed, and if the lottery result for the special symbol is a winning one, "○" is displayed as the stopping symbol for the second decorative symbol. Additionally, the lower left area of the effect display device 1600 displays a pending display for the amount of time that the game ball has entered the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004, but the variable display of the special symbol is on hold. Additionally, the lower right area of the effect display device 1600 displays a "consecutive win mode" message indicating that the game is in "consecutive win mode," and also displays a "hit right" arrow instructing the player to aim for the game ball to enter the large prize opening 2005 located in the game area 5a to the right of the effect display device 1600 during jackpot play.

In addition, when the amount of balls dispensed approaches a specific value, for example, when the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls dispensed reaches the specific value becomes "+1400 balls," the upper area of the effect display device 1600 displays a pre-notification display indicating the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls dispensed reaches the specific value, stating "+1400 balls remaining until game limit." Note that the pre-notification display is displayed in a position that does not overlap with the information display regarding the jackpot game currently being played.

As shown in Figure 228 (B), at the start of a jackpot game, the message "Special Bonus! Aim for V!" is displayed in the central area of the effect display device 1600, and the large prize entry port 2005 and special prize entry port 2006 begin to open and close during the jackpot game, and the player is advised to aim for the game ball to enter the V prize entry port 2007 during the jackpot game.

As shown in Figure 228 (C), when the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value due to the payout of prize balls based on the entry of a game ball into the large prize slot 2005 during jackpot play reaches "+0 balls" (when the game transitions to the stop-play preparation state), the upper area of the effect display device 1600 displays a pre-announcement message for a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example) indicating the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value. Here, "8R" is displayed as the current number of rounds, and "19,900 balls GET" is displayed as the total number of prize balls. Then, when a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example) has passed since the pre-announcement message "+0 balls remaining until the amount of balls dispensed reaches the game limit" was displayed, the standby message shown in Figure 228 (D) is displayed.

In this example, the number of prize balls paid out when a game ball enters the large prize opening 2005 is reflected in the total number of prize balls and the content of the advance notice displayed on the effect display device 1600. However, the total number of prize balls and the content of the advance notice display are not displayed at the time when a game ball enters the large prize opening 2005, which will cause the number of balls to reach a specific value, but are displayed continuously until a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example) has passed since the number of prize balls is reflected in the total number of prize balls and the content of the advance notice display. This prevents players from missing information regarding whether the number of balls paid out has reached a specific value, and ensures that the player is aware of the reason why the game will subsequently enter a limit state.

In the above, the total number of prize balls and the contents of the advance notice display are not displayed until the amount of prize balls dispensed reaches a specific value, but are displayed continuously until the amount of prize balls is reflected in the total number of prize balls and the contents of the advance notice display. However, it is also possible to have the display end when the amount of dispensed balls reaches a specific value and display a standby display. In this way, the machine will transition to a state where it is ready to stop dispense when the amount of dispensed balls reaches a specific value, but by displaying a standby display at the same time, it is possible to immediately know that it has transitioned to a state where it is ready to stop dispense.

In addition, once the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, the machine will transition to a state where it is ready to stop playing, but the jackpot game that is currently in progress will continue, so the "hit right" arrow that encourages players to continue firing game balls will continue to be displayed.

As shown in Figure 228 (D), after transitioning to the ready-to-play state, a standby display is displayed in the upper area of the effect display device 1600. Specifically, the standby display displays the message "The jackpot is over, so today's over," indicating that the number of balls dispensed has already reached a specific value. This allows the player in the ready-to-play state to understand that when the jackpot game ends, the game will transition to the ready-to-play state and play will be restricted. Note that the standby display is displayed in a position that does not overlap with the display of information about the jackpot game in progress. This allows the player to understand both that the game has transitioned to the ready-to-play state and information about the jackpot game in progress. Here, "9R" is displayed as the current number of rounds, and "19,915 balls GET" is displayed as the total number of prize balls.

As shown in FIG. 228(E), if a minor abnormality is detected during the stop-play preparation state, such as the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, the jackpot game continues, but in the central area of the effect display device 1600, error display A displays the message "Door open error. Please call an attendant," indicating that the main frame 4 is open. In addition, in the upper area of the effect display device 1600, current status display C continues the standby display content and displays the message "The jackpot has ended, so today is over," indicating that the number of balls dispensed has already reached a specific value. Error display A and current status display C are displayed in a higher layer than the information display regarding the jackpot game. Current status display C is also displayed in a position that does not overlap with the information display regarding the jackpot game or error display A (message). This allows the player to reliably understand that the number of balls dispensed has already reached a specific value and the game is ready to stop when a minor abnormality occurs.

As shown in Figure 228 (F), when a specified error termination condition is met, such as the main frame 4 closing against the outer frame 2, the effect display device 1600 erases the error display A, but continues to display the current status display C as a standby display. Here, "10R" is displayed as the current number of rounds, and "20,020 GET" is displayed as the total number of prize balls.

As shown in Figure 228 (G), at the end of a jackpot game, an ending display is executed to accompany the end of the jackpot game, and the message "Win! Good job! Download the special bonus!" is displayed in the central area of the effect display device 1600. In addition, a camera-readable code is displayed in the lower right area of the effect display area 1600, and by reading this code, a special bonus can be downloaded. This special bonus can only be obtained when the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during jackpot game, thereby reducing player frustration over the game being restricted by entering a deadlock state. Note that although a standby display is not displayed at the end of a jackpot game, it may be displayed.

As shown in Figure 228 (H), after the jackpot game ends, the game transitions to a game-stop state and game restrictions are imposed. The effect display device 1600 displays an image corresponding to the game-stop state. The image corresponding to the game-stop state displays the message "Game Limit" along with messages such as "The daily ball limit of 100,000 balls has been reached, so game play is being restricted," "Please call an attendant," and "The settlement button is active." Note that the settlement button here refers to the counting button switch used to execute the settlement process. Furthermore, when the effect display device 1600 displays the message "Game Limit," it does not display (makes invisible) the ending display accompanying the end of the jackpot game, and instead displays the message on a darkened screen. This allows the player to understand that the number of balls dispensed has reached a certain value and game restrictions are being imposed, and that the game restrictions cannot be lifted without the hall manager's operation. It also allows the player to understand that the player's ball count can be settled by operating the counting button switch.

However, the effect display device 1600 continues to display the code that was displayed during the ending display following the end of a jackpot game, even after the image corresponding to the end state is displayed. Furthermore, the code that was displayed during the ending display following the end of a jackpot game is displayed in a position that does not overlap with the image (message) corresponding to the end state. This allows the user to read the code without rushing, even after the state has transitioned to the end state, and ensures that they do not miss out on downloading the special bonus.

Next, we will explain what happens when a serious abnormality occurs during the game termination preparation state. As shown in Figure 228 (E'), if magnetism is detected as a serious abnormality during game termination preparation, an error state occurs in which the ongoing jackpot game is stopped and game progress is disabled. However, the effect display device 1600 displays the message "Magnetic Anomaly" as error display B, indicating that magnetism has been detected, along with messages such as "Please call an attendant" and "Recovery and restrictions will be initialized when the power is turned back on." Furthermore, when magnetism is detected, the effect display device 1600 displays information about the jackpot game. However, once the message "Magnetic Anomaly" is displayed after magnetism is detected, the information display about such jackpot gameplay is hidden (made invisible), and the message is displayed on a darkened screen. This allows the player to understand that an error state has occurred upon detection of magnetism. Furthermore, the player can understand that the error state will not be resolved unless the power is turned back on, and that the game restrictions will be lifted when the power is turned back on.

In addition, in the upper area of the effect display device 1600, the standby display content continues and a message is displayed as current status display C, saying "The jackpot has ended and it's over for today," indicating that the number of balls dispensed has already reached a specific value. The error display B and current status display C are displayed in a higher layer than the information display regarding the jackpot game. Furthermore, current status display C is displayed in a position that does not overlap with error display B (message). This makes it possible to reliably understand that the number of balls dispensed has already reached a specific value and that the machine is ready to stop playing when a serious abnormality occurs.

In this example, in order for the specified clear conditions to be met to end the error state related to a severe abnormality to be met, the power must be turned back on after being shut off. Here, using the limit clear pattern table 4, we will explain the cases where power-on patterns 2 and 3 are selected as the power-on pattern when the power is turned on, which clear the game state at the time of power-off and clear the ball output amount and the limit state, and power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected, which maintain the game state at the time of power-off and clear the ball output amount but maintain the limit state.

First, if an error occurs during the pre-stop state, and power is turned off and then turned back on, selecting power-on pattern 2 or 3, which clears the game state at the time of power-off and clears the payout amount and the pre-stop state, clears the error state, allowing gameplay to resume. However, the pre-stop state is also cleared, preventing the planned gameplay restrictions for the pre-stop state from being implemented after the pre-stop state ends. Furthermore, information regarding the remaining jackpot game and reserved balls when the game was interrupted when the error state occurred is retained after the error state occurred or when the power was turned off. However, when power is turned back on after the power was turned off, information regarding the remaining jackpot game and reserved balls when the game was interrupted is cleared, allowing the game to start in a low-probability state with no reserved balls. For this reason, as shown in Figure 228 (F'-1), the effect display device 1600 displays an initial image in which there is no reserved ball display and the decorative pattern is frozen at the initial pattern. Additionally, in the upper area of the effect display device 1600, a clear notification 2 is displayed, indicating that the amount of balls dispensed and the limit preparation state have been cleared, reading "Limits cleared." This clear notification 2 is displayed in a higher layer than the display of information related to the game, such as decorative patterns, and is displayed in a position that does not overlap with the display of information related to the game. This allows the player to know with certainty that the amount of balls dispensed and the limit preparation state have been cleared when the power is turned back on.

On the other hand, if an error occurs during the stop preparation state, and power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected when the power is turned back on after a power outage, maintaining the game state at the time of power outage and clearing the ball dispense amount but maintaining the stop state, the error state is cleared, allowing gameplay to resume, but the stop preparation state is not cleared. Furthermore, information regarding the remaining jackpot game and information regarding reserved balls when the game was interrupted when the error state occurred is retained after the error state occurred and when the power was turned back on after a power outage. However, by maintaining information regarding the remaining jackpot game and information regarding reserved balls when the game was interrupted, the interrupted jackpot game can be resumed. For this reason, the effect display device 1600 displays the message "Ball dispense amount cleared" as clear notification 1, indicating that the ball dispense amount has been cleared, and then redisplays the image shown in Figure 228 (F'-2). Additionally, the upper area of the effect display device 1600 not only displays the standby message "The jackpot is over, so today's over," indicating that the number of balls dispensed has already reached a specific value, but also displays a clearing method message for the hall manager saying "Clear the RAM and it will return to normal mode," indicating how to clear the ready-to-play state. This clearing method display is displayed on a higher layer than the information display regarding the jackpot game, and is displayed in a position that does not overlap with the information display regarding the jackpot game. This allows the user to know with certainty that when the power is turned back on, it is necessary to turn the power back on with a RAM clear in order to clear the ready-to-play state.

(Another example of a limit counter 1)
In the above example, the "limit counter" is configured to be set to an initial value of 0 when the "amount of balls dispensed before or after the limit state is initiated" is cleared (initialized) upon power-on, and is decremented by each launch of game ball B and incremented by each payout of prize balls. When the limit counter is set to 0 and only the number of shots increases, it counts downward from 0. In contrast, in Example 1, the "limit counter" is configured to be set to a non-zero predetermined value (e.g., 100,000) when the "amount of balls dispensed before or after the limit state is initiated" is cleared (initialized) upon power-on, and is configured to be decremented by each launch of game ball B and incremented by each payout of prize balls.

Specifically, the amount of balls dispensed A is calculated as the difference between the value at which the cap counter reaches its highest value within the period until the specified clear condition is met, starting from the initial value of 100,000, and the value at which the cap counter reaches its lowest value within the period until the specified clear condition is met.

Furthermore, the amount of balls dispensed B is calculated starting from the initial value of 100,000 of the limit counter, and is calculated as the difference between the initial value of 100,000 and the value at the point when the limit counter reaches its highest value within the period until the specified clear condition is met. Note that in Alternative Example 1, the maximum difference value is stored and held as the amounts of balls dispensed A and B, and the stored and held amounts of balls dispensed A and B are updated by newly calculating the maximum difference value, which is the same as when the initial value is 0.

In Alternative Example 1, when the number of balls dispensed (number of balls dispensed A, B) reaches a specific value, a stop is placed on the game and game play is restricted. For example, if 100,000 balls is selected as the specific value, the stop counter starts at the initial value of 100,000, and adds +100,000 for the specific value. When the stop counter reaches 200,000, it is determined that number of balls dispensed B has reached the specific value.

In addition, in Alternative Example 1, the "limit counter" is configured not only to start from an initial value of 100,000, but also to have 0 as its minimum value. In other words, even if the number of shots increases further after the limit counter reaches 0, it is not counted downward from 0, but is configured to maintain the 0 state. As a result, even if the number of shots increases after the limit counter reaches 0, the amount of balls dispensed B is determined to have reached a specific value when the limit counter reaches 200,000 from that point of 0, so the amount of balls dispensed B will reach the specific value sooner than if it were counted downward from 0. In other words, by making it possible to quickly trigger a limit state that restricts play, it is possible to prevent large amounts of balls from being awarded to fraudulent players due to fraudulent activity, or to prevent large amounts of balls from being awarded to legitimate players due to biased winning and losing probabilities.

(Another example of a limit counter 2)
In another example 2, the "limit counter" is configured to be set to 0 as the initial value and to have 0 as the minimum value when the "amount of balls dispensed before the limit state was initiated or after the limit state was initiated" is cleared (initialized) when the power is turned on. In such a case, the limit counter starts from 0, which is the initial value, when the power is turned on, and is subtracted when game ball B is fired and added when prize balls are paid out, but once the limit counter reaches 0, even if the number of shots alone increases, it is not counted in the negative direction from 0 and is configured to maintain the 0 state.

In addition, in Alternative Example 2, the amount of balls dispensed C is calculated from the limiting counter. The limiting counter starts from its initial value of 0, and the amount of balls dispensed C is calculated as the difference between the initial value of 0 and the value at which the limiting counter reaches its highest value within the period until the specified clear condition is met. In Alternative Example 2, the maximum difference is stored and held as the amount of balls dispensed C, and the stored and held amount of balls dispensed C is updated by calculating a new maximum difference, which is the same as when there is no minimum value = 0. Then, when the amount of balls dispensed C reaches a specific value, the game is limited by the limiting state.

In addition, in Alternative Example 2, when the amount of balls dispensed C reaches a specific value, a stop state is entered and game play is restricted. For example, if 100,000 balls is selected as the specific value, the stop counter starts from its initial value of 0, and adds +100,000 for the specific value, and when the stop counter reaches 100,000, it is determined that the amount of balls dispensed C has reached the specific value.

In addition, in Alternative Example 2, the "limit counter" is configured not only to start from its initial value of 0, but also to have 0 as its minimum value. However, even if the number of balls released increases after the limit counter reaches 0, the amount of balls released C is determined to have reached a specific value when the limit counter reaches 100,000 from that point. Therefore, the amount of balls released C will reach a specific value sooner than if it were counting in a negative direction from 0. In other words, by making it possible to quickly trigger a limit state that restricts play, it is possible to prevent large amounts of balls from being awarded to fraudulent players due to fraudulent activity, or to prevent large amounts of balls from being awarded to legitimate players due to biased winning and losing probabilities.

The "limit counter" is decremented by each launch of game ball B and incremented by each payout of prize balls. However, it may be configured so that its initial value is greater than the specific value that triggers the limit state and restricts play, and is incremented by each launch of game ball B and decremented by each payout of prize balls. In such a case, for example, if 100,000 balls is selected as the specific value, the limit counter starts at its initial value of 100,000 and subtracts +100,000 for the specific value. When the limit counter reaches 0, it is determined that the amount of balls dispensed has reached the specific value. Furthermore, when applied to Alternative Example 2, for example, the limit counter starts from its initial value of 100,000 when the power is turned on, and is incremented by each launch of game ball B and decremented by each payout of prize balls. However, even if the number of shots increases after the limit counter reaches 100,000, it does not count upward from 100,000, but remains at 100,000.

(Regarding the progress of advance notice displays)
In this example, when the "limit counter" is turned on, if the "amount of balls dispensed before and after the limit state is initiated" is cleared (initialized), it is set to 0 as its initial value, subtracted when game ball B is fired, and added when prize balls are paid out. Furthermore, 100,000 balls is selected as the specific value. When the limit counter reaches 100,000, it is determined that the amount of balls dispensed has reached the specific value, and the limit state is entered, limiting play. Furthermore, before the amount of balls dispensed reaches the specific value, after a predetermined value (in this example, the number of balls remaining until the limit state is reached is 5,000, i.e., the amount of balls dispensed reaches 95,000) is reached, a pre-notification display (in this example, "+XX balls remaining until the limit state is reached") is displayed on the display device 1600 as a pre-notification operation until the amount of balls dispensed reaches the specific value. Furthermore, when the pre-notification display is displayed, the LED of lamp B flashes for a predetermined period (e.g., 2 seconds) as a pre-notification light.

Specifically, before the main control board 1310 reaches a specific value and restricts play, it monitors the number of balls remaining until the specific value is reached. When a game ball enters a prize slot such as the large prize slot 2005, which causes the remaining number of balls to reach "+5000 balls," a pre-flag is set to ON, and the pre-flag ON information is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. Then, on the peripheral control board 1510 side, upon receiving the pre-flag ON information, the effect display device 1600 starts displaying a pre-announcement (in this example, "+XX balls remaining until play limit"), and continues to do so until the specific value is reached. The amount of balls dispensed is calculated on the main control board 1310 side based on a counter for limiting play, which is the difference between the number of balls fired and the number of balls paid out. In other words, the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value will decrease as the number of shots increases and the number of remaining balls increases, and vice versa.

When the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value reaches "+5000 balls," the effect display device 1600 begins displaying a pre-announcement. However, if the amount of balls dispensed subsequently decreases and the number of remaining balls increases, causing the remaining balls to exceed "+5000 balls" and the pre-announcement display to end, or if the amount of balls dispensed increases again and the number of remaining balls decreases, causing the remaining balls to reach "+5000 balls" and the pre-announcement display to begin, the pre-announcement flag will be frequently switched on the main control board 1310 side, and the pre-announcement flag ON information will be sent multiple times to the peripheral control board 1510 side. Furthermore, if the pre-announcement display is sometimes displayed and sometimes not, it will be difficult to understand the game status. In this regard, in this example, when the advance notice display is initiated on the effect display device 1600, even if the number of balls dispensed subsequently decreases and the number of remaining balls increases, the advance notice display will not end until the number of remaining balls reaches a predetermined value exceeding "+5000 balls" (in this example, the number of balls remaining until the number of dispensed balls reaches a specific value is 5100, i.e., the number of dispensed balls reaches 94900). This prevents the advance flag from being switched frequently on the main control board 1310 side, preventing advance flag ON information from being sent repeatedly to the peripheral control board 1510, and avoids control burden and complexity. Furthermore, by displaying the advance notice display as continuously as possible, it is possible to prevent difficulty in understanding the game status. In this example, the progression of the advance notice display after it has started is described below.

Figure 229 is a time chart showing the progression of the advance notice display after it has started. In this example, it explains the situation where the number of balls dispensed increases or decreases around 95,000 (5,000 remaining balls).

In (A), as the number of balls dispensed increases, when the number of balls dispensed reaches 95,000 (5,000 remaining), the main control board 1310 sends a pre-notification start command to the peripheral control board 1510, and the performance display device 1600 begins displaying "+5,000 balls remaining until play limit" as a pre-notification display. At this time, the LED of lamp B flashes for a predetermined period (e.g., 2 seconds) as a pre-notification light.

After the advance notice display begins, as the amount of balls dispensed increases, a advance notice update command is sent from main control board 1310 to peripheral control board 1510 each time the amount of balls dispensed increases by 100, and performance display device 1600 updates the display content of the advance notice display. For example, when the amount of balls dispensed increases by 100, performance display device 1600 updates the advance notice display to read "+4900 balls remaining until play limit," and when the amount of balls dispensed increases by another 100, performance display device 1600 updates the advance notice display to read "+4800 balls remaining until play limit." Here, the display content of the advance notice display is updated when the amount of balls dispensed increases by 100, but is not updated if the amount of balls dispensed increases by only 1 to 99. As a result, the content of the advance notice display is not updated in real time when the number of balls dispensed increases, and advance notice update commands are prevented from being sent multiple times to the peripheral control board 1510, avoiding control burden and complexity. Note that in Lamp B, the LED flashes for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) as an advance notice light only when there are 5,000 balls remaining until the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, in other words, when the number of balls dispensed reaches 95,000; when the number of balls dispensed increases by 100 and the content of the advance notice display is updated, Lamp B does not emit any light corresponding to the update.

In (B), after the advance notice display has started, if the number of balls dispensed decreases and falls below 95,000 (the number of remaining balls exceeds 5,000), the main control board 1310 does not send an advance notice end command to the peripheral control board 1510, and the performance display device 1600 continues to display the advance notice message "+5,000 balls remaining until play limit." Then, as the number of balls dispensed increases again, it exceeds 95,000 (5,000 balls remaining). Then, as the number of balls dispensed subsequently decreases, it falls below 95,000 (more than 5,000 balls remaining). However, at the point where the number of balls dispensed reaches 95,000 (5,000 balls remaining), the main control board 1310 does not send a pre-announcement start command or pre-announcement end command to the peripheral control board 1510, and the effect display device 1600 continues to display the pre-announcement message "+5,000 balls remaining until play limit." This prevents pre-announcement start and end commands from being repeatedly sent to the peripheral control board 1510 after the pre-announcement display has begun, thereby avoiding control burdens and complexity. Furthermore, while Lamp B emits light in response to the pre-announcement start command, it does not emit light in response to the pre-announcement end command, thereby preventing external parties from misunderstanding that something is wrong with the gaming machine.

In (C), after the advance notice display has begun, as the number of balls dispensed decreases, if the number of balls dispensed reaches 94,900 (5,100 remaining balls), a advance notice end command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, and the performance display device 1600 ends the advance notice display. Here, after the advance notice display has begun, the advance notice display ends when the number of balls dispensed decreases by 100, and the advance notice display does not end if the number of balls dispensed decreases by only 1 to 99. In other words, after the advance notice display has begun, there is a termination suppression period in which the advance notice display will not end even if the number of balls dispensed falls below 95,000, until the number of balls dispensed decreases by 99. This allows for a slight decrease in the number of balls dispensed after the advance notice display has begun, and continues to display the advance notice display as much as possible, preventing it from becoming difficult to understand the game status. In this example, the "end suppression period" during which the advance notice display is allowed to continue is set to "until the amount of balls dispensed decreases by 1 to 99 balls," but this is not limited to this, and the amount of ball dispensed reduction can be set appropriately depending on the performance of the gaming machine, such as "until the amount of balls dispensed decreases by 1 to 199 balls" or "until the amount of balls dispensed decreases by 1 to 49 balls."

In this example, when the advance notice starts, the effect display device 1600 displays an advance notice and lamp B emits an advance notice light. However, when the advance notice starts, the effect display device 1600 may be used to display an advance notice, without emitting an advance notice light. This prevents lamp B from emitting light multiple times, giving the outside world the wrong impression that something is wrong with the gaming machine when the advance notice start command is sent several times due to an increase or decrease in the amount of balls dispensed beyond the aforementioned termination inhibition period.

In (D), as the number of balls dispensed increases again, when the number of balls dispensed reaches 95,000 (5,000 remaining), the main control board 1310 sends a pre-notification start command to the peripheral control board 1510, and the performance display device 1600 begins to display the pre-notification message "+5,000 balls remaining until play limit."

In (E), after the advance notice display has begun, as the number of balls dispensed decreases, if the number of balls dispensed reaches 94,900 (5,100 remaining balls), a advance notice end command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. However, for some reason, such as a temporary power outage or a poor connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, an irregularity may occur in which the peripheral control board 1510 is unable to properly receive the advance notice end command (the peripheral control board 1510 fails to receive the advance notice end command). When such an irregularity occurs, it would normally be considered to resend the advance notice end command when the number of balls dispensed reaches 94,900 (5,100 remaining balls), but in this example, the effect display device 1600 deliberately does not resend the command at this opportunity and does not end the advance notice display. In other words, when such an irregularity occurs, even if the number of balls dispensed reaches 94,900 (5,100 remaining balls) and the time has come to end the advance notice display, the advance notice display will continue to display "+5,000 balls remaining until play limit." This prevents the advance notice end command from being resent at unexpected times during play (for example, when no game balls have been fired, or when no balls have landed in the outlet), which would cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

In (F), when the above-mentioned irregularity occurs and the advance notice display does not end, and the number of balls dispensed continues to decrease, if the number of balls dispensed reaches 94,800 (5,200 remaining balls), the main control board 1310 sends an advance notice end command to the peripheral control board 1510, and the performance display device 1600 ends the advance notice display. In this example, assuming that the advance notice display will not end when it should, the main control board 1310 sends a preliminary advance notice end command to the peripheral control board 1510 not only when the number of balls dispensed reaches 94,900 (5,100 remaining balls), but also when the number of balls dispensed reaches 94,800 (5,200 remaining balls) and 94,700 (5,300 remaining balls). This means that even if the peripheral control board 1510 temporarily fails to receive the advance notice end command and an irregular event occurs in which the advance notice display does not end, the advance notice display can be ended at a different time that does not cause discomfort, and it is possible to reliably prevent the advance notice display from continuing without ending.

In this example, the preliminary trigger for sending the advance notice end command is set to be between "the moment the number of balls dispensed reaches 94,900 (5,100 remaining balls) and the moment the number of balls dispensed reaches 94,500 (5,500 remaining balls)," in increments of 100 balls, but the advance notice display may also be terminated by other triggers. For example, the advance notice end command may be forcibly sent when the hall manager performs a termination operation (for example, operating the RAM clear switch 1310f or setting key switch while the power is on, or opening the main frame 4 or door frame 3), thereby forcibly terminating the advance notice display at the time it should have ended.

In addition, in this example, if an irregularity occurs in which the peripheral control board 1510 is unable to properly receive the advance notification end command (the advance notification end command is missed on the peripheral control board 1510 side) due to some reason such as a temporary power outage or poor connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, the process of preliminarily sending the advance notification end command is performed at another trigger as described above, but if an irregularity occurs in which the peripheral control board 1510 is unable to properly receive the advance notification update command (the advance notification update command is missed on the peripheral control board 1510 side), the process of preliminarily sending the advance notification update command is not performed at another trigger. For example, if the number of balls dispensed increases by 100 after the advance notice display begins, reaching 95,100 (4,900 balls remaining), a advance notice update command is sent from main control board 1310 to peripheral control board 1510. However, if an irregularity occurs in which peripheral control board 1510 is unable to receive this advance notice update command, performance display device 1600 continues to display "+5,000 balls remaining until play limit" as the advance notice display. If the number of balls dispensed then increases by another 100, reaching 95,200 (4,800 balls remaining), a advance notice update command corresponding to the number of balls dispensed reaching 95,200 (4,800 balls remaining) is sent to peripheral control board 1510, and the advance notice display is updated to "+4,800 balls remaining until play limit." This allows the player to feel as if the number of balls dispensed has increased all at once, and the irregularity can be used to increase interest in the game. Additionally, while Lamp B emits light in response to advance notification start commands, it does not emit light in response to advance notification update commands, preventing external parties from misunderstanding that something is wrong with the gaming machine.

However, since it is possible that the advance notice display update will not proceed on the peripheral control board 1510 side until the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value due to some kind of abnormality, in such cases, for example, an advance notice update command may be forcibly sent when an update operation is performed by the hall manager (for example, operating the RAM clear switch 1310f or setting key switch while the power is on, or opening the main frame 4 or door frame 3; preferably at a different trigger than the termination operation described above), thereby forcibly updating the advance notice display.

At (G), as the number of balls dispensed increases again, when the number of balls dispensed reaches 95,000 (5,000 remaining), the main control board 1310 sends a pre-notification start command to the peripheral control board 1510, and the performance display device 1600 begins to display the pre-notification message "+5,000 balls remaining until play limit."

In (H), after the advance notice display has begun, if the number of balls dispensed increases by 100 and reaches 95,100 (4,900 remaining balls), the main control board 1310 sends an advance notice update command to the peripheral control board 1510, and the effect display device 1600 updates the advance notice display to show "+4,900 balls remaining until play limit."

In (I), after the advance notice display is updated to "+4900 balls remaining until play limit," if the number of balls dispensed falls below 95,100 (the number of remaining balls exceeds 4,900 balls) as the number of balls dispensed decreases, the main control board 1310 does not send an advance notice downgrade command to the peripheral control board 1510, and the performance display device 1600 continues to display "+4900 balls remaining until play limit" as the advance notice display. This prevents advance notice update commands and advance notice downgrade commands from being sent multiple times to the peripheral control board 1510 after the advance notice display is updated to "+4900 balls remaining until play limit," thereby avoiding control burdens and complexity. In this example, the advance notice update command used when the number of balls dispensed increases (the number of remaining balls decreases) and the advance notice downgrade command used when the number of balls dispensed decreases (the number of remaining balls increases) are separate commands, but they may also be shared as a command that indicates the display content of the advance notice display.

In (J), after the advance notice display is updated to "+4900 balls remaining until play limit," if the number of balls dispensed falls below 95,000 (more than 5,000 balls remaining) as the number of balls dispensed decreases, a advance notice downgrade command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, and the effect display device 1600 updates the advance notice display to "+5,000 balls remaining until play limit." Here, when the number of balls dispensed reaches 95,100 (4,900 balls remaining), the advance notice display is updated to "+4900 balls remaining until play limit," and when the number of balls dispensed decreases by 100, the advance notice display is updated; if the number of balls dispensed decreases by only 1 to 99, the advance notice display is not updated. In other words, after the advance notice display is updated to "+4900 balls remaining until play limit is reached," there is a downgrade suppression period in which the advance notice display content is not updated until the number of balls dispensed decreases by 99. This prevents the advance notice display from becoming difficult to understand the game status by continuing to display this as much as possible after it has been updated to "+4900 balls remaining until play limit is reached."

In this example, as the number of balls dispensed increases from (G) to (H), the effect display device 1600 displays "+5000 balls remaining until play limit" as a pre-notification display during the period from when the number of balls dispensed increases from 95,000 (5,000 balls remaining) to 95,100 (4,900 balls remaining). However, as the number of balls dispensed decreases from (I) to (J), the effect display device 1600 displays "+4,900 balls remaining until play limit." In this way, even if the interval for the number of balls dispensed is the same, by changing the display content of the pre-notification display depending on whether the number of balls dispensed is increasing or decreasing, it is possible to continue displaying the display content of the pre-notification display once it has been displayed as long as possible.

In (K), after the advance notice display is updated to "+5000 balls remaining until play limit", if the number of balls dispensed decreases and reaches 94,900 (5,100 balls remaining), the main control board 1310 sends an advance notice end command to the peripheral control board 1510, and the effect display device 1600 ends the advance notice display.

In this example, as the number of balls dispensed increases from (G) to (H), the effect display device 1600 displays "+5000 balls remaining until play limit" as a pre-notification display during the period from when the number of balls dispensed increases from 95,000 (5,000 balls remaining) to 95,100 (4,900 balls remaining). However, as the number of balls dispensed decreases from (J) to (K), the effect display device 1600 displays "+5,000 balls remaining until play limit" as a pre-notification display during the period from when the number of balls dispensed decreases from 95,000 (5,000 balls remaining) to 94,900 (5,100 balls remaining). In this way, even if the intervals for the number of balls dispensed are different, by keeping the display content of the pre-notification display the same depending on whether the number of balls dispensed is increasing or decreasing, it is possible to continue displaying the display content of the pre-notification display once it has been displayed as long as possible.

In this example, as described above, if a serious abnormality is detected while the advance notice display is being executed, the effect display device 1600 displays the same data as the advance notice display as current status display A. However, if a serious abnormality is detected while the end of the advance notice display or demotion is being suppressed, it is desirable to control the display content of current status display A to display the exact amount of balls dispensed to the hall manager, while still using the same data as the advance notice display. In this way, even if an irregular situation occurs, the hall manager can recognize the exact amount of balls dispensed through current status display A.

Furthermore, in each of the above examples, the pre-announcement message is displayed in a specific display area on the top layer of the effect display device 1600 as the game progresses, and the visibility of the pre-announcement message is not obstructed by other effect images. However, if a predetermined area displaying an adjustment image (e.g., an image corresponding to volume or light intensity, or an image related to other adjustments) that reflects the player's adjustment operations on the effect surface is positioned so that it overlaps the specific display area in the front-to-back direction, there is a risk that the visibility of the adjustment image will be obstructed by the pre-announcement message at least while the pre-announcement message is displayed, thereby reducing interest in the game. To resolve this, for example, in each of the above examples, the predetermined area displaying the adjustment image can be positioned so that it does not overlap the specific display area in the front-to-back direction at all. This ensures the visibility of the adjustment image even while the pre-announcement message is displayed, and prevents a decrease in interest in the game. Additionally, if the predetermined area displaying the adjustment image is set up so that it partially overlaps with a specific display area in the front-to-back direction, the adjustment image can be displayed offset from the advance notice display to at least allow the player to confirm the results of the adjustment operation (for example, if the adjustment image is a level gauge type, it can be displayed so that it does not overlap to the extent that the change in the level gauge can be grasped, and if the adjustment image is a numerical type, it can be displayed so that it does not overlap to the extent that the number can be grasped), which also helps to avoid a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, in each of the above examples, the advance notice message is displayed in a specific display area on the top layer of the effect display device 1600 as the game progresses, and the visibility of the advance notice display is not obstructed by other effect images. However, it is desirable to continue displaying the advance notice display even after the game transitions to a standby state in which the game is not progressing. This prevents new players from starting play without being aware of information such as the amount of balls dispensed before starting the game. Furthermore, because the advance notice display is displayed on the top layer of the effect display device 1600, there is a concern that it may obstruct the visibility of demonstration images (e.g., effect explanations, promotional images, etc.) displayed in the standby state, and not satisfy the needs of players who want to see the demonstration images. To solve this problem, for example, in each of the above examples, the advance notice display in a specific display area can be hidden so that it cannot be seen during all or part of the period during which the demonstration image is displayed, and the advance notice display in the specific display area can be resumed when at least a new player performs a specified operation (for example, touching the handle 160 before operating it, performing an adjustment operation, or operating another button, etc.). This satisfies the needs of players who want to check the demonstration image, while preventing new players from starting play without being aware of information such as the number of balls dispensed before starting play.

(Modification of Restriction Clear Pattern Table 4)
As described above in detail, the limit clearing pattern table 4 clears (initializes) the "amount of balls dispensed before the stop state was initiated or after the stop state was initiated" regardless of which of power-on patterns 1 to 4 is selected when the power is turned on. Specifically, the limit clearing pattern table 4 clears (initializes) the "game limit during the stop state" only when the game state at the time of power-off is cleared (initialized) as in power-on patterns 2 and 3, but clearing the amount of balls dispensed also clears (initializes) the stop preparation state. On the other hand, when the game state at the time of power-off is maintained as in power-on patterns 1 and 4, the "game limit during the stop state" is maintained, but the stop preparation state is also maintained regardless of clearing the amount of balls dispensed. In other words, as with the stop state, it is possible to select whether to maintain or clear the stop preparation state when the power is turned on again after a power-off. For example, if the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during a jackpot game and a stop-preparation state occurs, and you want to clear that stop-preparation state, you can perform a power-on operation after the power is turned off to clear the amount of balls dispensed that meets the start conditions for the stop-preparation state, but in the limit clear pattern table 4, this power-on operation will clear the jackpot game that was in progress. On the other hand, if you want to maintain the stop-preparation state, you can perform a power-on operation after the power is turned off to maintain the amount of balls dispensed that meets the start conditions for the stop-preparation state, but this power-on operation will resume the jackpot game that was in progress.

As described above, with the above-mentioned limit clear pattern table 4, in order to resume a jackpot game that was in progress upon power-on operation, it was necessary to maintain the stop preparation state. While restarting a jackpot game that was in progress upon power-on operation allowed the jackpot game to resume, it was not possible to clear only the stop preparation state. With this configuration, for example, in a situation such as a test firing test during the development stage of a gaming machine, if the number of balls dispensed reached a specific value during jackpot gameplay and the stop preparation state occurred, even if it was desired to continue the test firing test without initiating the stop preparation state, it was not possible to clear only the stop preparation state, and there was a risk that the subsequent occurrence of the stop preparation state would prevent the continued execution of the test firing test. Furthermore, even if an attempt was made to clear the stop preparation state, the jackpot game would be cleared along with the stop preparation state, which again could prevent the continued execution of the test firing test. In light of these circumstances, in this example, a configuration is described below as a modified version of Limited Clear Pattern Table 4, in which the jackpot game that was running before the power was turned off is resumed when the power is turned on, but only the stop preparation state is cleared.

Figure 230 shows a modified example of the limited clear pattern table 4 when the power is turned on. In this example, limited clear pattern table 4(a) and limited clear pattern table 4(b) are provided as the limited clear pattern table 4 used when the limited clear pattern selection switch is set to "4." The system controls the use of either limited clear pattern table 4(a) or limited clear pattern table 4(b) depending on whether a special external signal is output during the stop preparation state. Only if a special external signal is output during the stop preparation state and this is determined to be the case when the power is turned on, the system clears only the stop preparation state while resuming the jackpot game that was running before the power was turned off. Here, the "special external signal" is output through a specific circuit implemented on the main control board 1310. It may be any signal that satisfies certain output requirements and is output from the main control board 1310 to an external device, such as an external test device. In this example, an empty test circuit is set as a specific circuit formed on the main control board 1310, and detecting that a test electronic component is mounted on that empty test circuit is considered to "satisfy specific output requirements." If a test electronic component is mounted on the empty test circuit, a special external signal is constantly output to an external test device. The special external signal may be output from the main control board 1310 to the outside via an external terminal board, or it may be output directly from the main control board 1310 to the outside without going through the external terminal board.

Figure 230(A) shows a modified version of the restricted clear pattern table 4, restricted clear pattern table 4(a), which is the table selected when the power is cut off while a special external signal is being output during the stop preparation state and then power is turned back on. In this example, a determination is made as to whether a special external signal has been output from the main control board 1310 prior to the various clear processes during the power-on process, and restricted clear pattern table 4(a) or restricted clear pattern table 4(b) is selected based on the result of this determination.

Power-on pattern 1 of limit clear pattern table 4(a) maintains the game state at the time of power-off when the power is turned on, but clears (initializes) the "amount of balls dispensed before and after the stop state was initiated." It also maintains the "game limits during the stop state," but clears (initializes) the stop preparation state. The notification method for the outside world is as follows: from the time the power is turned on until a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board 5 and door frame 3 emit green light (if the stop state is maintained; red if the stop preparation state is cleared), a sound is output from the speaker stating, "The amount of balls dispensed has been cleared. The stop state is maintained (the stop preparation state has been cleared)," and the effect display device 1600 displays an image message stating, "The amount of balls dispensed has been cleared. The stop state is maintained (the stop preparation state has been cleared)" (equivalent to clear notification 1, a progress impossibility notification). More specifically, if the power is cut off during a stop state, a notification that the stop state has been maintained is sent when the power is turned on; if the power is cut off during a stop preparation state, a notification that the stop preparation state has been cleared is sent when the power is turned on; and in all other cases, a notification is sent only that the amount of balls dispensed has been cleared. Furthermore, if the power is cut off during a stop state, in addition to these notifications, a clearing method notification indicating how to clear the stop state described above may be added.

Power-on pattern 2 of restriction clear pattern table 4(a) clears (initializes) the game state at the time of power-off when the power is turned on, but also clears (initializes) the "amount of balls dispensed before and after the stop state was initiated." It also clears (initializes) the "game restrictions during the stop state" and the stop preparation state. Specifically, when play is restricted by restriction pattern 1 described above, "play is stopped," but the "game stop" is canceled when the stop state is cleared. When play is restricted by restriction pattern 2, "fire is stopped," but the "fire stop" is canceled when the stop state is cleared. When play is restricted by restriction pattern 3, "play is stopped" and "fire is stopped," but the "play stop" and "fire stop" are canceled when the stop state is cleared. In either case, game (main game) can be resumed on the main control board 1310 side. Additionally, as a notification method for the outside world, from the time the power is turned on until a predetermined period of time has passed, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board 5 and door frame 3 are made to emit red light, a sound is output from the speaker stating "The ball output amount and limit state (limit preparation state) have been cleared," and the effect display device 1600 displays an image message stating "The ball output amount and limit state (limit preparation state) have been cleared" (equivalent to clear notification 2). More specifically, if the power is turned off during the limit state, a notification is made that the limit state has been cleared when the power is turned on; if the power is turned off during the limit preparation state, a notification is made that the limit preparation state has been cleared when the power is turned on; in all other cases, only a notification is made that the ball output amount has been cleared.

Power-on pattern 3 of limit clear pattern table 4(a) clears (initializes) the game state at the time of power-off when the power is turned on, but also clears (initializes) the "ball payout amount before and after the stop state was initiated." It also clears (initializes) the "game limits during the stop state" and the stop preparation state. Furthermore, as a notification method for external notification, from the time the power is turned on until a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board 5 and door frame 3 emit red light, a sound is output from the speaker stating "The ball payout amount and stop state (stop preparation state) have been cleared," and the effect display device 1600 displays a message image stating "The ball payout amount and stop state (stop preparation state) have been cleared." (Equivalent to clear notification 2). More specifically, if the power is cut off during a stop state, a notification will be sent when the power is turned on that the stop state has been cleared; if the power is cut off during a stop preparation state, a notification will be sent when the power is turned on that the stop preparation state has been cleared; in all other cases, a notification will only be sent that the number of balls dispensed has been cleared.

When power is turned on, power-on pattern 4 of limit clear pattern table 4(a) maintains the game state at the time of power-off, but clears (initializes) the "amount of balls dispensed before and after the stop state was initiated." It also maintains the "game limits during the stop state," but clears (initializes) the stop preparation state. The notification method for the outside world is as follows: from the time the power is turned on until a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board 5 and door frame 3 emit green light (if the stop state is maintained; red if the stop preparation state is cleared), a sound is output from the speaker stating, "The amount of balls dispensed has been cleared. The stop state is maintained (the stop preparation state has been cleared)," and the effect display device 1600 displays an image message stating, "The amount of balls dispensed has been cleared. The stop state is maintained (the stop preparation state has been cleared)" (equivalent to clear notification 1, game unplayable notification). More specifically, if the power is cut off during a stop state, a notification that the stop state has been maintained is sent when the power is turned on; if the power is cut off during a stop preparation state, a notification that the stop preparation state has been cleared is sent when the power is turned on; and in all other cases, a notification is sent only that the amount of balls dispensed has been cleared. Furthermore, if the power is cut off during a stop state, in addition to these notifications, a clearing method notification indicating how to clear the stop state described above may be added.

When the power-on pattern 5 of the limit clear pattern table 4(a) is turned on, it maintains the game state at the time of power-off, but also maintains the "amount of balls dispensed before and after the stop state was initiated." It also maintains the "game limits during the stop state" and the stop preparation state. Furthermore, as a notification method for the outside world, from the time the power is turned on until a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board 5 and door frame 3 emit blue light, a sound is output from the speaker stating, "The amount of balls dispensed and the stop state (stop preparation state) are maintained," and the performance display device 1600 displays an image message stating, "The amount of balls dispensed and the stop state (stop preparation state) are maintained." More specifically, if the power is cut off while the machine is in a stopped state, a notification will be sent when the power is turned on that the stopped state has been maintained; if the power is cut off while the machine is in a stop preparation state, a notification will be sent when the power is turned on that the stop preparation state has been cleared; and in all other cases, a notification will only be sent that the number of balls dispensed has been cleared.

In this way, the limit clear pattern table 4(a), which is used when a special external signal is output, clears (initializes) the "amount of balls dispensed before the limit state began and after the limit state began" regardless of whether the game state at the time of power-on is maintained as in power-on patterns 1 and 4, or the game state at the time of power-on is cleared (initialized) as in power-on patterns 2 and 3. This allows only the limit preparation state to be cleared when the power is turned on during a test firing test during the development stage of a gaming machine, preventing the subsequent occurrence of a limit state from interfering with the continuation of the test firing test. Note that if power-on pattern 5 is selected when the power is turned on, the ball removal process described above is simply executed, and game play does not begin, so the "amount of balls dispensed before the limit state began and after the limit state began" is maintained without being cleared (initialized).

Furthermore, in the restriction clear pattern table 4(a), which is used when a special external signal is output, the "restrictions on play during the paused state" are cleared (initialized) only when the play state at the time of power-off is cleared (initialized) as in power-on patterns 2 and 3. On the other hand, when the play state at the time of power-off is maintained as in power-on patterns 1 and 4, the "restrictions on play during the paused state" are maintained. In other words, developers can choose whether to maintain or clear the "restrictions on play during the paused state" when the power is turned back on after a power-off in situations such as test firing during the development stage of a gaming machine. For example, if a paused state has already occurred and you want to release the play restrictions, you can simply perform the power-on operation to clear the "restrictions on play during the paused state" after the power-off. If you want to maintain the play restrictions, you can simply perform the power-on operation to maintain the "restrictions on play during the paused state" after the power-off. Furthermore, if power-on pattern 5 is selected when the power is turned on, the ball removal process described above is simply executed, and game play does not begin, so the "game play limit during the game stop state" is maintained without being cleared (initialized).

Furthermore, in limit clear pattern table 4(a), which is used when a special external signal is output, when the game state at the time of power interruption is cleared (initialized) as in power-on patterns 2 and 3, not only are the "amount of balls dispensed before the limit state began and after the limit state began" cleared (initialized), but the limit preparation state is also cleared (initialized). On the other hand, when the game state at the time of power interruption is maintained as in power-on patterns 1 and 4, not only are the "amount of balls dispensed before the limit state began and after the limit state began" cleared (initialized), but the limit preparation state is also cleared (initialized). This makes it possible to select whether or not to clear the game state when clearing the limit preparation state in situations such as test firing during the development stage of a gaming machine, making it possible to configure the system to be suitable for normal operation (such as operation in an amusement hall) that is not a test firing.

Figure 230(B) shows a modified version of the limit clear pattern table 4, limit clear pattern table 4(b), which is the table selected when the power is cut off while no special external signal is being output during the limit preparation state and then power is turned back on. Note that power-on patterns 2, 3, and 5 here are the same as those in the limit clear pattern table 4(a) described above, so their explanation is omitted here.

Power-on pattern 1 of limit clear pattern table 4 (b) maintains the game state at the time of power-off when the power is turned on, but clears (initializes) the "amount of balls dispensed before and after the stop state was initiated." It also maintains the "game limits during the stop state" and the stop preparation state. The notification method for the outside world is as follows: from the time the power is turned on until a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board 5 and door frame 3 emit green light, the speaker outputs a sound saying "The amount of balls dispensed has been cleared. The stop state (stop preparation state) is maintained," and the performance display device 1600 displays a message image saying "The amount of balls dispensed has been cleared. The stop state (stop preparation state) is maintained" (equivalent to clear notification 1 and progress impossible notification). More specifically, if the power is cut off during a stopped state, a notification that the stopped state has been maintained is sent when the power is turned on; if the power is cut off during a stop preparation state, a notification that the stop preparation state has been maintained is sent when the power is turned on; and in all other cases, a notification is sent only that the amount of balls dispensed has been cleared. Furthermore, if the power is cut off during a stopped state, in addition to these notifications, a clearing method notification may be sent to the hall manager showing how to clear the stopped state.

Power-on pattern 4 of limit clear pattern table 4 (b) maintains the game state at the time of power-off when the power is turned on, but clears (initializes) the "amount of balls dispensed before and after the stop state was initiated." It also maintains the "game limits during the stop state" and the stop preparation state. The notification method for the outside world is as follows: from the time the power is turned on until a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board 5 and door frame 3 emit green light, the speaker outputs a sound saying "The amount of balls dispensed has been cleared. The stop state (stop preparation state) is maintained," and the performance display device 1600 displays a message image saying "The amount of balls dispensed has been cleared. The stop state (stop preparation state) is maintained" (equivalent to clear notification 1, game unplayable notification). More specifically, if the power is cut off during a stopped state, a notification that the stopped state has been maintained is sent when the power is turned on; if the power is cut off during a stop preparation state, a notification that the stop preparation state has been maintained is sent when the power is turned on; and in all other cases, a notification is sent only that the amount of balls dispensed has been cleared. Furthermore, if the power is cut off during a stopped state, in addition to these notifications, a clearing method notification may be sent to the hall manager showing how to clear the stopped state.

In this way, in limit clear pattern table 4(b), which is used when a special external signal is not being output, when the game state at the time of power cut is cleared (initialized) as in power-on patterns 2 and 3, not only is the "amount of balls dispensed before the limit state began and after the limit state began" cleared (initialized), but the limit preparation state is also cleared (initialized). On the other hand, when the game state at the time of power cut is maintained as in power-on patterns 1 and 4, the "amount of balls dispensed before the limit state began and after the limit state began" is cleared (initialized), but the limit preparation state is maintained regardless of the clearing of the amount of balls dispensed. For example, if the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during a jackpot game during normal operation (such as operation at an amusement hall) and the machine enters a ready-to-stop state, and a serious malfunction (such as detection of magnetism, vibration, or radio waves) occurs due to a player's fraudulent behavior, and the user wishes to resolve the malfunction, the machine can simply turn the power off and then perform a power-on operation to resolve the malfunction, but the ready-to-stop state will be maintained even if power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected as the power-on operation. In other words, if the jackpot game that was in progress is resumed but the ready-to-stop state is maintained, the machine will transition to the ready-to-stop state when the resumed jackpot game ends. In this way, a fraudster may intentionally cause a serious malfunction during the game's pre-play state, forcing the hall manager to turn the power back on and clear (initialize) the game's pre-play state, potentially resulting in new fraud. However, if the power-on contributes to resolving the serious malfunction, the fraudulent clearing of the game's pre-play state can be avoided, and game play can be ended once the resumed jackpot game has ended, thereby preventing such new fraud. In this way, limited clear pattern table 4(b), which is used when no special external signal is being output, can be configured to be suitable for normal operation (such as operation in an amusement hall) that is not a test firing, unlike limited clear pattern table 4(a).

In the above example, the special external signal is constantly output when test electronic components are installed in an empty test circuit. However, if the output time of the special external signal is longer than necessary, there is another problem in that the control load on the main control board 1310 increases. In light of this, instead of constantly outputting the special external signal when test electronic components are installed in an empty test circuit, it is also possible to configure the special external signal to be output only when necessary when a predetermined output start condition is met. This point will be explained below using Figures 230 (C) and (D).

Figure 231 is a time chart showing the start of outputting a special external signal before the start of the stop preparation state and the stop state. Of these, Figure 231(A) is a time chart when power is cut off before the start of the stop preparation state and the stop state, and power is turned on using power-on patterns 1 and 4 in the above-mentioned limit clear pattern table 4(a). Also, Figure 231(B) is a time chart when power is cut off after the start of the stop preparation state and power is turned on using power-on patterns 1 and 4 in the above-mentioned limit clear pattern table 4(a).

First, let us consider Figure 231(A). In Figure 231(A), even when test electronic components are installed in an empty test circuit, the special external signal is not output continuously. Rather, the output of the special external signal begins at a specific timing (t1) before the start of the pre-stop state and the stop state. In this example, the specific timing (t1) is set to coincide with the execution conditions for the advance notice display described above. That is, as described above, when the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls dispensed due to winning during gameplay reaches a specific value becomes "+1500 balls," the advance notice display "+1500 balls remaining until the game limit" is displayed in the upper area of the effect display device 1600 as an advance notice, indicating the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls dispensed reaches the specific value. The special external signal is output when the number of balls remaining until the specific value becomes "+1500 balls," which is the same timing as when this advance notice display is displayed. Here, it is conceivable that a specific external signal may be output via the external terminal board at the timing when the advance notice display is displayed. To avoid confusion between such a specific external signal and a special external signal, in this example, it is preferable to output the special external signal directly from the main control board 1310 to the outside without going through the external terminal board.

When the output of a special external signal begins at a specific timing (t1), in situations such as test firing tests during the development stage of a gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine that the game is approaching a ready-to-stop state or a stopped state due to the operation of test equipment that receives the special external signal. This makes it possible to avoid the game being ready to stop or a stopped state without clearing (initializing) the game state by shutting off the power (t2) when the output of the special external signal is determined and then turning the power on (t3) using power-on patterns 1 and 4 in the above-mentioned limit clear pattern table 4(a).

Furthermore, after power-on (t3) using power-on patterns 1 and 4 in the limited clear pattern table 4(a), the output of the special external signal is terminated after a predetermined time has elapsed. In this example, the main control board 1310 determines whether or not a special external signal is being output prior to various clearing processes during power-on processing. Therefore, the output of the special external signal can be terminated at any time after this determination is made. However, if the output of the special external signal continues for an unnecessarily long time after power-on (t3) using power-on patterns 1 and 4 in the limited clear pattern table 4(a), it may be possible to erroneously determine that a game is ready to stop or that a game has stopped. Therefore, it is desirable to terminate the output of the special external signal relatively early after power-on (e.g., within 5 seconds). Furthermore, if the power is shut off (t2) when the output of the special external signal is detected, but the power is turned on using an incorrect power-on pattern, resulting in the ball payout amount being maintained, it is preferable to continue outputting the special external signal. This means that a special external signal will be output for an extended period of time after the power is turned on incorrectly, making it possible to determine that the number of balls dispensed has not been cleared (initialized), and to guide the user to shut off the power again.

In this way, by configuring the device to output a special external signal at a specific timing (t1) before the start of the stop preparation state or the stop state, it is possible to avoid the constant output of the special external signal and reduce the control load on the main control board 1310. Furthermore, the approaching start of the stop preparation state or the stop state can be detected early from the outside through the special external signal along with the advance notice display, making it possible to ensure smooth operation of test firing tests and the like during the development stage of the gaming machine. Furthermore, because the main control board 1310 outputs a special external signal to the outside, even if the advance notice display is incomplete during the development stage of the gaming machine, the approaching start of the stop preparation state or the stop state can be detected early from the outside through the special external signal, as long as the specific timing is set. This also makes it possible to ensure smooth operation of test firing tests and the like during the development stage of the gaming machine.

Next, we will explain Figure 231(B). In Figure 231(B), when a test electronic component is installed in an empty test circuit, the output of a special external signal begins at a specific timing (t1) before the start of the stop preparation state, and the power is shut off after the stop preparation state begins.

Specifically, the special external signal is not output constantly even when test electronic components are installed in an empty test circuit. Rather, the output of the special external signal begins at a specific timing (t1) before the start of the stop preparation state. However, the output of the special external signal continues even after the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during jackpot play and the stop preparation state is triggered (t2). Here, since it is possible that a specific external signal is output via the external terminal board during the stop preparation state, to avoid confusion between such a specific external signal and the special external signal, in this example, it is preferable to output the special external signal directly from the main control board 1310 to the outside without going through the external terminal board. Furthermore, during the stop preparation state, as described above, the effect display device 1600 not only displays a display (normal display) related to the ongoing jackpot play, but also displays a standby display stating "The jackpot has ended and today is over" to indicate that the number of balls dispensed has already reached a specific value.

After the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during jackpot play and a stop-play preparation state occurs (t2), the machine transitions to the stop-play preparation state when the jackpot play ends. However, by continuing to output a special external signal during this stop-play preparation state, it becomes possible to detect the approaching stop-play state from the operation of test equipment that receives the special external signal, such as in situations such as test firing tests during the development stage of a gaming machine. As a result, by shutting off the power (t3) when the output of the special external signal is detected during the stop-play preparation state and then turning on the power (t4) using power-on patterns 1 and 4 in the above-mentioned limit clear pattern table 4(a), it becomes possible to clear the stop-play preparation state without clearing (initializing) the game state and avoid the occurrence of a stop-play state.

Then, when the output of a special external signal is detected during the ready-to-stop state, the power is shut off (t3), and when the power is turned on (t4) using power-on patterns 1 and 4 in the above-mentioned limit clear pattern table 4(a), the ready-to-stop state is cleared without clearing the jackpot game that was running before the power was shut off. Instead, after various clearing processes are performed during the power-on process, the jackpot game that was running before the power was shut off is resumed. This means that even if the amount of balls released reaches a specific value during jackpot play during a test firing test during the development stage of a gaming machine, and the ready-to-stop state is triggered, the continuous execution of the test firing test is not hindered by only clearing the ready-to-stop state.

Furthermore, after power-on (t4) using power-on patterns 1 and 4 in the restriction clear pattern table 4(a), the output of the special external signal is terminated after a predetermined time has elapsed, as described above. However, because a determination is made as to whether or not a special external signal is being output from the main control board 1310 prior to the various clear processes in the power-on process, the output of the special external signal can be terminated at any time after this determination is made.

In this way, by configuring the device to continue outputting a special external signal not only before the start of the stop-play preparation state, but also after the start of the stop-play preparation state, it is possible to know early from the outside that the start of the stop-play state is approaching through the standby display and the special external signal, making it possible to ensure smooth operation of test firing tests and the like during the development stage of the gaming machine.

Note that the specific timing (t1) does not have to be the same as the execution conditions for the advance notice display described above; it may be a timing before the execution conditions for the advance notice display, or a timing after the execution conditions for the advance notice display, as long as it is before the stop preparation state or stop state begins.

In addition, the present invention is not limited to the configurations shown in Figures 231(A) and (B) above. For example, regardless of whether test electronic components are installed in the available test circuits, the output/non-output of the special external signal may be switched in response to the ON/OFF operation of the output start switch installed on the main control board 1310. Specifically, when the output start switch is turned ON during the stop preparation state, specific output requirements are met and the special external signal is output. However, when the output start switch is turned ON while not in the stop preparation state, the specific output requirements are met and the special external signal is output after a specific timing (t1) before the start of the stop preparation state has arrived. In such cases, the constant output of the special external signal can be avoided, making it possible to reduce the control load on the main control board 1310.

(Regarding subtraction adjustment of ball output amount)
As described above in detail, when the amount of balls dispensed during a jackpot game (winning game) reaches a specific value, the machine transitions to a stop-ready state, and does not remain in the stop-ready state until the jackpot game ends, but transitions to the stop-ready state when the jackpot game ends. For example, when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during a jackpot game, the machine does not immediately transition to the stop-ready state, but transitions to the stop-ready state when the last round of the jackpot game ends. In other words, when the amount of balls dispensed during a jackpot game reaches a specific value, it is possible to acquire balls dispensed in excess of the specific value.

Incidentally, in situations such as "multiple holds that are determined to be jackpots are stored, and after the jackpot game associated with the consumption of earlier holds has ended, the execution of the jackpot game associated with the consumption of later holds has also been confirmed (the occurrence of multiple jackpots can be recognized by the player as multiple hold displays with high expectation display modes being displayed)," "the jackpot is a special jackpot, and it has been confirmed that a transition to a high probability state (such as consecutive win mode) will occur after the jackpot game has ended," or "a game ball has entered the V entry port 2007 during jackpot game, and it has been confirmed that a transition to a high probability state will occur after the jackpot game has ended," it is confirmed that the next jackpot can be won even while the jackpot game is being played. However, even if the next jackpot is confirmed during a jackpot game, if the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during the jackpot game and the machine transitions to a stop-play preparation state, the machine cannot transition to the stop-play state once the jackpot game ends, preventing players from earning the profits associated with the next jackpot, causing great dissatisfaction among players. In this example, when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during a jackpot game and the machine transitions to a stop-play preparation state, if the hall manager performs a specific operation, the amount of balls dispensed (the value of the stop-play counter) is adjusted downwards, returning the amount of balls dispensed to the state before the specific value was reached (normal state), thereby canceling the stop-play preparation state and allowing players to win the next jackpot after the jackpot game ends. This configuration is described below.

First, a ball output subtraction switch is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 for subtracting and adjusting the number of balls output (the value of the limit counter). This ball output subtraction switch is provided on the main control board 1310 as an operation unit (such as a button that can switch between ON and OFF states, or a key switch that can be used to switch between ON and OFF states by inserting a key) that cannot be touched by the player. When the ball output subtraction switch is operated (for example, by turning it ON for three seconds or more and then switching it to OFF), the operation signal is input to the main control board 1310, making it possible to subtract a predetermined number of balls output (for example, 1,500 balls) from the current number of balls output. In other words, it makes it possible to subtract a predetermined number of balls output (for example, 1,500 balls) from the value at the time the limit counter reached its highest value.

In this example, if the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during a jackpot game and the machine transitions to a stop-play preparation state, the operation of the ball dispense amount subtraction switch is enabled during the stop-play preparation state. When the hall manager operates the ball dispense amount subtraction switch, a specific number of balls (e.g., 1,500) is subtracted from the current number of balls dispensed, bringing the number of balls dispensed below the specific value. At this time, the stop-play flag that was on when the machine transitioned to the stop-play preparation state is turned off, canceling the stop-play preparation state and returning to the normal state. For example, if the "specific value" is set to 100,000, and the number of balls dispensed reaches the specific value (100,000) during a jackpot game, the machine transitions to the stop-play preparation state. However, when the hall manager operates the ball dispense amount subtraction switch, the specific number of balls dispensed is subtracted by 1,500, bringing the number of balls dispensed to 98,500, bringing the number of balls dispensed below the specific value (100,000). Here, when the amount of balls dispensed is reduced so that it falls below a specific value, the stop preparation state is canceled, but the information for the ongoing jackpot game or the next jackpot is not canceled. Also, after the amount of balls dispensed is reduced so that it falls below a specific value, counting of the amount of balls dispensed is resumed, starting from the subtracted amount of balls dispensed.

In this way, even if the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during a jackpot game and the machine transitions to a ready-to-stop state, the hall manager can cancel the ready-to-stop state by operating the ball dispense amount subtraction switch. As long as the number of balls dispensed does not reach the specific value again, gameplay can continue even after the jackpot game ends. This allows gameplay to continue after the jackpot game ends, even if the next jackpot is confirmed during the jackpot game described above, allowing the player to earn profits related to the next jackpot and alleviating player dissatisfaction. While gameplay continues after the jackpot game ends, if the number of balls dispensed again reaches a specific value during the next jackpot game, the machine transitions to a ready-to-stop state. Alternatively, if the number of balls dispensed again reaches a specific value when not in a jackpot game, the machine transitions to a ready-to-stop state.

On the other hand, when the machine is not in the stop-play preparation state, operation of the ball output subtraction switch is disabled, and even if the hall manager operates the ball output subtraction switch, the specified amount of balls output (e.g., 1,500 balls) will not be subtracted from the current amount of balls output. For this reason, even if the ball output subtraction switch is operated during a stop-play state, the specified amount of balls output (e.g., 1,500 balls) will not be subtracted from the current amount of balls output, and the amount of balls output will not fall below a specific value. In other words, the machine will not return to the normal state, but will maintain the stop-play state, making it impossible to resume play. In such cases, it is necessary to shut off the power during the stop-play state, and when the power is turned back on, the amount of balls output will be cleared and the stop-play state will also be cleared.

When the payout amount subtraction switch is operated during the stop-preparation state, a predetermined amount of payout balls (e.g., 1,500 balls) is subtracted from the current amount of payout balls. The amount of payout balls subtracted is equivalent to the amount of payout balls that can be won in one jackpot game. In this example, the amount of payout balls that can be won in one jackpot game is approximately 1,500 balls, and the amount of payout balls subtracted when the payout amount subtraction switch is operated is set to 1,500 balls. As a result, if the amount of payout balls reaches a specific value during a jackpot game and the game transitions to the stop-preparation state, operating the payout amount subtraction switch during the stop-preparation state will cancel the stop-preparation state. The amount of payout balls will not reach the specific value again during that jackpot game, and the game will not transition to the stop-preparation state. In other words, even if the next jackpot is confirmed during the jackpot game as described above, you can continue playing after the jackpot game ends and earn the profits related to the next jackpot. Furthermore, since the amount of balls subtracted when the ball output subtraction switch is operated is equivalent to the amount of balls that can be won in one jackpot game, there is a high possibility that the amount of balls output will reach a specific value again in the next jackpot game and the machine will transition to a stop-play preparation state; at the end of that next jackpot game, the machine will transition to a stop-play state and the game can be ended.

In addition, when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during jackpot play, the system transitions to a stop-play preparation state. However, after transitioning to the stop-play preparation state, the system is configured so that the amount of balls dispensed during jackpot play (the value of the stop-play counter) is not counted. In other words, the system is configured so that the amount of balls dispensed does not exceed the specific value. Therefore, when the ball dispense amount subtraction switch is operated during the stop-play preparation state, a specific amount of balls dispensed (e.g., 1,500 balls) is subtracted from the specific value, which is the current amount of balls dispensed, so that the amount of balls dispensed falls below the specific value. However, the amount of balls dispensed during jackpot play (the value of the stop-play counter) may also be counted even after transitioning to the stop-play preparation state. In other words, the amount of balls dispensed may be counted in excess of the specific value. In this configuration, when the ball dispense amount subtraction switch is operated during the stop-play preparation state, a specific amount of balls dispensed (e.g., 1,500 balls) is subtracted from the current amount of balls dispensed, which exceeds the specific value, so that the amount of balls dispensed falls below the specific value.

Furthermore, when the payout amount subtraction switch is operated during the pre-stop state, a predetermined amount of balls (e.g., 1,500 balls) is subtracted from the current amount of balls. Alternatively, as an alternative, when the power is turned off during the pre-stop state and the payout amount subtraction switch is operated when the power is turned back on, a predetermined amount of balls (e.g., 1,500 balls) is subtracted from the current amount of balls. In this configuration, even if the pre-stop state is maintained when the power is turned back on, operating the payout amount subtraction switch when the power is turned back on subtracts a predetermined amount of balls (e.g., 1,500 balls) from the current amount of balls, so that the amount of balls dispensed falls below a specific value. In other words, when the payout amount subtraction switch is operated when the power is turned back on, the pre-stop state is canceled, and the jackpot game that was in progress when the power was turned off can be resumed. In this way, by requiring the power to be turned on and off to enable the operation of the payout amount subtraction switch, the hall manager can strictly manage the cancellation of the pre-stop state.

Furthermore, if the payout amount subtraction switch is operated during the stop-play preparation state, making it possible to win the next jackpot, and when that next jackpot is played, it is possible that a similar game situation will occur again (a situation in which the payout amount reaches a specific value during the jackpot game, causing the machine to transition to the stop-play preparation state, even though the next jackpot has been confirmed). Taking such cases into consideration, it is preferable not to limit the number of times the payout amount subtraction switch can be operated (subtractions) during the stop-play preparation state, but to allow operations to be accepted for each stop-play preparation state. This allows the hall manager to manage the system appropriately, preventing player dissatisfaction even if a similar game situation occurs after operating the payout amount subtraction switch. However, to prevent the payout amount subtraction switch from being operated multiple times during one stop-play preparation state, resulting in more balls being subtracted than necessary, it is preferable to limit the number of times the payout amount subtraction switch can be operated (subtractions) to just one during one stop-play preparation state.

Furthermore, operating the payout amount subtraction switch during the pre-stop state requires the hall manager's intervention, which temporarily halts the player's play. However, since the jackpot game continues during this time, there is a risk that the player will not be able to acquire the payout balls during this time, resulting in damage to the player. To avoid this, for example, when the payout amount subtraction switch is operated during the pre-stop state, control may be exercised to halt the game, including the jackpot game. For example, if the payout amount subtraction switch is turned ON for three seconds or more and then turned OFF to subtract the payout amount, it is possible to halt the game, including the jackpot game, at least while the payout amount subtraction switch is turned ON. Furthermore, to ensure that the player is aware that the jackpot game has not been canceled, it is preferable to issue a unique notification corresponding to the temporary halt of the game, including the jackpot game, while the payout amount subtraction switch is turned ON, so that this information can be recognized externally.

The amount of balls that will be subtracted by operating the ball output subtraction switch during the stop preparation state is not limited to the "amount of balls that can be won in one jackpot game" described above, but may be set appropriately depending on the game specifications, etc. For example, in a game where four jackpot games are guaranteed after one jackpot game (e.g., 500 balls), a single operation of the ball output subtraction switch may subtract a value that exceeds the amount of balls that can be won in the next jackpot game (500 balls) (e.g., 2000 balls, which is equivalent to the amount of balls that can be won in four jackpot games). This can alleviate player frustration.

(Regarding transition to a cap-like state after clearing a cap-like state)
As described above in detail, the limit clearing pattern table 4 clears (initializes) the "amount of balls dispensed before or after the initiation of the stop state" regardless of which of power-on patterns 1 to 4 is selected when the power is turned on. Furthermore, the limit clearing pattern table 4 clears (initializes) the "game limit during the stop state" only when the game state at the time of power-off is cleared (initialized) as in power-on patterns 2 and 3. On the other hand, when the game state at the time of power-off is maintained as in power-on patterns 1 and 4, the "game limit during the stop state" is maintained. In other words, when the power is turned on again after a power-off, it is possible to select whether to maintain or clear the "game limit during the stop state." For example, if a stop state has already occurred and you want to release the game limit, you can perform a power-on operation to clear the "game limit during the stop state" after the power is turned off. If you want to maintain the game limit, you can perform a power-on operation to maintain the "game limit during the stop state" after the power is turned off.

However, if the hall manager mistakenly performs a power-on operation to clear the "play restrictions during a play restriction state" after a power-off, without realizing that a play restriction state has already occurred, the play restriction state may be cleared and play may resume, even though the hall manager wishes to continue the play restriction state. In this example, when a play restriction state has already occurred and the power-on operation is performed to clear the "play restrictions during a play restriction state," the play restriction state is cleared at that point, but the system does not immediately return to the normal state. Instead, the system transitions to a play restriction-like state in which play is restricted in the same way as a play restriction state. The play restriction-like state continues until the hall manager performs a specific operation. This configuration is described below.

First, a similar-to-limit state end switch for ending the similar-to-limit state is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. This similar-to-limit state end switch is provided on the main control board 1310 as a control unit (such as a button that can switch between ON and OFF states, or a key switch that can switch between ON and OFF states by inserting a key) that cannot be touched by the player. When the similar-to-limit state end switch is operated during the similar-to-limit state, the operation signal is input to the main control board 1310. Although play is restricted during the similar-to-limit state, the similar-to-limit state is terminated, returning to normal play and allowing play to resume. Note that while operation of the similar-to-limit state end switch is enabled during the similar-to-limit state, operation of the similar-to-limit state end switch is disabled during the similar-to-limit state, so that operation of the similar-to-limit state end switch during the similar-to-limit state does not terminate the similar-to-limit state. Furthermore, the similar-to-limit state end switch may also serve as the ball payout amount subtraction switch described above.

Figure 232 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when a stop-like state occurs after clearing the stop-state when the power is turned on.

First, at timing t1, it is determined that the number of balls dispensed will reach a specific value due to the payout of prize balls based on the balls entering the winning slot. When the main control board 1310 detects a ball entering the winning slot, the stop flag is turned ON, and the system transitions to a "stop state" in which restriction pattern 3 is applied, which performs both "game stop" and "firing stop." The behavior of the stop state is as described above.

Specifically, in the stopped state, game balls cannot be fired, and the game (main game) cannot proceed on the main control board 1310 side. In other words, in the stopped state, the special symbol variable display and jackpot game are not executed, and even if a starting win occurs, the special symbol variable display will not be newly started.

Next, after the game enters the stopped state, the power is shut off at time t2, and then turned back on at time t3. In this example, when the power is turned back on, limit clear pattern table 4 is used as the limit clear pattern table, and power-on patterns 2 and 3, which clear the amount of balls dispensed and the stopped state, are selected as the power-on patterns. Therefore, when the power is turned back on, the game state at the time of power-off is cleared (initialized), but the "amount of balls dispensed before and after the stopped state began" and the "game limits during the stopped state" are also cleared (initialized).

In this example, when the power is turned back on, the "restrictions on play during a stopped game state" are cleared (initialized), but the system does not immediately return to the normal state. Instead, it transitions to a stop-like state in which play is restricted in the same way as in a stopped game state. In this stop-like state, just like in a stopped game state, the launch of game balls is disabled, and game play (main game) cannot proceed on the main control board 1310 side. In other words, in a stop-like state, the display of special symbol variations and jackpot play are not executed, and even if a start win occurs, the display of special symbol variations is not newly initiated. In this way, even if the hall manager mistakenly performs a power-on operation to clear the "restrictions on play during a stopped game state" after a power outage without realizing that a stopped game state has already occurred, the system transitions to a stop-like state, and play is restricted in the same way as in a stopped game state until the hall manager operates the stop-like state end switch, allowing the hall manager to strictly control the resumption of play.

In a state similar to a stoppage, the notification is sent to the outside in a different manner than the stoppage state. Specifically, in a state similar to a stoppage, for example, the effect display device 1600, Lamp A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), Lamp B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speaker notify the player that play is temporarily restricted until the stoppage state end switch is operated. In this way, by notifying the player in a different manner than the stoppage state, the player can reliably determine whether the state is currently in a stoppage state or has been shut off during the stoppage state. Furthermore, when the power is turned back on, the "amount of balls dispensed before and after the stoppage state began" and "play restrictions during the stoppage state" are cleared (initialized), and therefore the player is notified that the amount of balls dispensed and the stoppage state have been cleared.

The behavior of the near-stop state is essentially the same as that of the near-stop state, except for the manner in which it is notified to the outside. Specifically, in the near-stop state, the moving parts are placed in an inoperable state where they cannot move. Also, in the near-stop state, the external terminal board is placed in a forced output state where a security signal is forcibly output, even when no abnormalities are detected, setting values are not changed, or setting values are not being displayed for confirmation. As a result, in the near-stop state, a security signal is output to the hall computer, allowing the hall to know that it has entered a near-stop state.

Furthermore, in a state similar to the limit, the number of game balls B that enter the ball entrance (winning entrance, outgoing entrance) (number of entering balls) and the number of game balls B that are paid out as prize balls (number of paid out) are not counted. In other words, it is not possible to perform calculations regarding the ratio of the number of paid out balls to the number of entering balls, and this is not reflected in the base value displayed on the base monitor 1310h.

In addition, in a state similar to the limit, even if a ball is detected entering a prize slot, the specified number of game balls will not be paid out as prize balls, and they will not be added to the player's ball count. However, in a state similar to the limit, the machine may be configured not to detect balls entering a prize slot, and similarly, even if a ball enters a prize slot, the specified number of game balls will not be paid out as prize balls, and they will not be added to the player's ball count. In addition, in a state similar to the limit, there is a period during which the player's ball count can be calculated by operating the counting button switch.

In addition, in a state similar to a limit, no abnormality determination is made to determine whether or not an abnormality such as magnetic or vibration has been detected. In other words, even if an abnormality is detected in a state similar to a limit, no abnormality determination is made, and therefore no abnormality notification is issued to notify the outside world that an abnormality has occurred. In this way, in a state similar to a limit, a notification regarding the state similar to a limit is issued in priority over an abnormality notification, thereby ensuring that players and hall managers are aware that a state similar to a limit has been entered. However, a state similar to a limit may be configured not to detect abnormalities such as magnetic or vibration, and similarly, even if no abnormality is detected in the first place, no abnormality notification to notify the outside world that an abnormality has occurred will be issued.

Next, after transitioning to a similar-to-limit state, the similar-to-limit state end switch is operated at timing t4. In this example, when the similar-to-limit state end switch is operated while in the similar-to-limit state, the similar-to-limit state is resolved, returning to the normal state and removing the restrictions on play in the similar-to-limit state. The behavior in the normal state is as described above.

Specifically, in the normal state, game balls can be fired and the game (main game) can proceed on the main control board 1310 side. In other words, unlike the end-of-game-like state and the end-of-game state, the normal state allows normal gameplay to be played, in which the variable display of special symbols can begin when a starting win occurs, and when the variable display of special symbols stops and displays a winning symbol, the jackpot game can begin.

When the power is turned back on, the "amount of balls dispensed before and after the stop state began" and "restrictions on play during the stop state" are cleared (initialized), and a notification is sent that the amount of balls dispensed and the stop state have been cleared. However, such a notification may be sent when the stop-like state end switch is operated during the stop-like state and the normal state is restored. This prevents the player from feeling uncomfortable when the power is turned back on, as the amount of balls dispensed and the stop state have been cleared, but the game has transitioned to a stop-like state and play is restricted in the same way as during the stop state.

(Regarding the visibility of advance notices and impossibility of proceeding displays)
In the above examples, the advance notice message is displayed in a specific display area on the top layer of the effect display device 1600 as the game progresses, and the visibility of the advance notice message is not obstructed by other effect images. However, if a predetermined area displaying an adjustment image (e.g., an image corresponding to volume or light intensity, or an image related to other adjustments) that reflects the player's adjustment operations on the effect surface is positioned so as to overlap the specific display area in the front-to-back direction, the advance notice message may obstruct the visibility of the adjustment image at least while the advance notice message is displayed, which may reduce interest in the game. In such a case, while the advance notice message in the specific display area is hidden so that it cannot be seen, the following example will describe a configuration in which game information such as the adjustment image is displayed outside the specific display area while the advance notice message is displayed in the specific display area.

Figure 233 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when a pre-notification display or a progress-impossible display is displayed during standby mode.

First, once the remaining number of balls to be dispensed reaches a specific value (for example, 5,000), a pre-warning display is displayed. This pre-warning display is displayed not only while the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, but also while the special symbol is in a standby state and not in a variable manner, until the number of balls to be dispensed reaches the specific value. Also, as described above in detail, the effect display device 1600 displays the message "+xx balls remaining until play limit" in a specific display area as a pre-warning display. This specific display area is set as part of the display area of the effect display device 1600 and is used to display when the number of balls to be dispensed approaches a specific value. It is a fixed area that remains unchanged regardless of the play status so that the hall manager will not overlook it.

In addition, advance notice displays and progress impossibility displays are displayed on the upper layer of the performance display device 1600. Here, the performance display device 1600 in this example is capable of displaying multiple layers, including at least an upper layer, a middle layer, and a lower layer, on top of each other, and in the relationship of "upper layer > middle layer > lower layer," the higher the layer display, the closer it is to the front, allowing it to be viewed with priority. This means that the visibility of advance notice displays and progress impossibility displays displayed on the upper layer is not obstructed by displays displayed on the middle and lower layers.

In addition, during the non-changing display of the special symbol, a stopped decorative symbol is displayed as standby display 1 (standby effect 1) from the time the special symbol is confirmed and stopped until a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed, with the stopped decorative symbol being displayed on a lower layer of effect display device 1600. The decorative symbol is displayed on a lower layer of effect display device 1600 regardless of whether the special symbol is being displayed in a changing state or in a non-changing state. Furthermore, the specified area of standby display 1 where the stopped decorative symbol is displayed is outside the specific display area where the advance notice display is displayed, and is positioned so that it does not overlap at all in the front-to-back direction with the specific display area. This ensures the visibility of the stopped decorative symbol even while the advance notice display is displayed, and makes it clear that the special symbol is being displayed in a non-changing state. Furthermore, the specified area of the standby display 1 where the decorative symbol is displayed may be positioned so that it partially overlaps with a specific display area in the front-to-back direction; for example, the decorative symbol may be displayed offset from the advance notice display to such an extent that the decorative symbol can be seen.

Furthermore, during the non-variable display of special symbols, the volume and light intensity can be adjusted by operating the setting adjustment button 204, just as during the variable display of special symbols. While the volume or light intensity is being adjusted, an adjustment image corresponding to the volume or light intensity being adjusted is displayed. The adjustment image begins displaying upon operation of the setting adjustment button 204 and is erased a certain period of time (e.g., three seconds) after the display begins. Here, if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated at timing t1 during the non-variable display of special symbols, an adjustment image is displayed. This adjustment image is displayed on the middle layer of the effect display device 1600. Furthermore, the specified area in which the adjustment image is displayed is located outside the specific display area in which the advance notice display is displayed, and is positioned so that it does not overlap with the specific display area in the front-to-back direction. This ensures visibility of the adjustment image even while the advance notice display is displayed, preventing a decrease in interest in the game. The specified area in which the adjustment image is displayed may be positioned so that it partially overlaps with a specific display area in the front-to-back direction. For example, if the adjustment image is a level gauge type, it may be displayed so that it does not overlap to the extent that the change in the level gauge can be grasped, or if the adjustment image is a numerical type, it may be displayed so that it does not overlap to the extent that the value can be grasped. In this way, the adjustment image may be displayed offset from the advance notice display to such an extent that at least the results of the adjustment operation by the player can be confirmed.

In addition, advance notice displays and progress impossibility displays are not subject to image conversion processing (mosaic processing, grayscale processing, enlargement/reduction processing, etc.) performed by the peripheral control board 1510. In other words, performance images other than advance notice displays and progress impossibility displays are subject to image conversion processing performed by the peripheral control board 1510, and the appearance of the performance images is allowed to change as the performance progresses, but advance notice displays and progress impossibility displays are not subject to image conversion processing performed by the peripheral control board 1510, and the appearance of the performance images is not allowed to change even if the performance progresses. As a result, the visibility of advance notice displays and progress impossibility displays does not change while they are displayed, making it possible to avoid overlooking information regarding the amount of balls dispensed, etc.

Next, at timing t3, after the variable display of the special symbol has finished, and a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the special symbol was fixed and stopped, a demonstration period begins in which demonstration images (e.g., images explaining the effects or promotional images) are displayed. This demonstration period ends when the variable display of the special symbol begins. Furthermore, even after the transition to the demonstration period has begun, the advance notice display continues to be displayed. This prevents new players from starting play without being aware of information such as the number of balls to be dispensed before starting play.

During the demonstration period, the following demonstration image is displayed as standby display 2 (standby effect 2). Specifically, first, the effect display device 1600 is used to explain the effects of pachinko machine 1 and display promotional images (movies), and at the end of this, the logo of the model title of pachinko machine 1 is displayed. Then, after the model title logo display has finished, the effect display device 1600 displays the logo of the manufacturer of pachinko machine 1, and then displays a warning message regarding "addiction prevention" to prevent players from becoming overly addicted to the game (for example, a text display saying "Pachinko should be enjoyed in moderation. Take care not to become addicted"). Displaying such a warning message can prevent players from becoming overly addicted to the game during subsequent games.

In this example, the above-mentioned standby display 2 is displayed on a lower layer of the effect display device 1600. For example, the designated area in which the warning message is displayed is positioned outside the designated display area in which the advance notice display is displayed, and does not overlap the designated display area in any forward or backward direction. This ensures the visibility of the warning message even while the advance notice display is displayed, reliably preventing players from becoming overly absorbed in the game. The designated area in which the warning message is displayed may be positioned so that a portion of the designated area overlaps the designated display area in the forward or backward direction. For example, even if the designated area overlaps the designated display area, the warning message may be displayed offset vertically or horizontally from the advance notice display to such an extent that the content of the warning message can be confirmed. Furthermore, for example, the designated area in which the warning message is displayed may be positioned outside the display area in which the adjustment image described below is displayed. This ensures that the warning message is visible even when the adjustment image is displayed, and reliably prevents players from becoming overly absorbed in the game.

As another example, the above-mentioned standby display 2 may be displayed on a higher layer of the effect display device 1600. In this case, the predetermined area in which the warning message is displayed and the specific display area in which the advance notice display is displayed will be displayed on the same layer, but it is desirable to offset the predetermined area and the specific display area vertically or horizontally so that they do not overlap at all. This ensures that the warning message is visible even while the advance notice display is displayed, and reliably prevents players from becoming overly absorbed in the game. Note that the predetermined area in which the warning message is displayed may be partially overlapped with the specific display area. For example, even if the predetermined area overlaps with the specific display area, the warning message may be displayed offset vertically or horizontally from the advance notice display to such an extent that the content of the warning message can be confirmed.

If the setting adjustment button 204 is operated at timing t4 during the demonstration period, an adjustment image is displayed, and as described above, this adjustment image is displayed on the middle layer of the effect display device 1600. Furthermore, the specified area in which the adjustment image is displayed is outside the specific display area in which the advance notice display is displayed, and is positioned so that it does not overlap at all in the front-to-back direction with the specific display area. This ensures that the adjustment image is visible even while the advance notice display is displayed, and prevents a decrease in interest in playing the game. If the setting adjustment button 204 is operated during the demonstration period, the demonstration period may end while the standby state continues, but the advance notice display will continue to be displayed even in the standby state after the demonstration period has ended.

In addition, during the demonstration period, the movable body provided on the game board 5 may be moved from its initial position to an appearance position and made to appear in front of the screen of the effect display device 1600. However, even if the movable body appears in front of the screen of the effect display device 1600, it is preferable that it is not positioned in front of the specific display area where the advance notice display is displayed. This ensures the visibility of the advance notice display even when the movable body is moving during the demonstration period.

Next, at timing t6, when the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value and game play is restricted, the standby state ends and the system transitions to a stop state in which game play is disabled. As described above, when the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value as calculated based on the winning balls that enter each winning slot, the system transitions to a stop state and game play is restricted. However, in this example, these game play restrictions are controlled not only during the variable display of special symbols or during a winning game, but also during the standby state. As a result, for example, if a game ball released in the standby state enters a general winning slot 2001, etc., and the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value as a result of this winning, game play restrictions are implemented even when game play is not progressing, and the system transitions directly from the standby state to the stop state, making it possible to prevent the game from being terminated during the variable display of special symbols or during a winning game.

When the game transitions directly from the standby state to the play-stop state, the effect display device 1600 displays an image corresponding to the play-stop state, indicating that progress is impossible. The impossibility of progress display displays the message "Play Restrictions," along with messages such as "Play has been restricted as the daily ball output limit of XXX balls has been reached," "Please call an attendant," and "The settlement button is enabled." Furthermore, as described above, the impossibility of progress display is displayed on a higher layer of the effect display device 1600. This allows the player to understand that the amount of balls output has reached a specific value and that play is being restricted.

In addition, in this example, the progress impossibility display is displayed on a screen consisting of an opaque blackout display (for example, a black background image) in an upper layer of the effect display device 1600. This blackout display is displayed across almost the entire surface of the effect display device 1600. As a result, screens displayed on layers lower than the upper layer are made invisible due to the blackout display in the upper layer. Specifically, even after the transition to the play-stop state at timing t6, the lower layer of the effect display device 1600 continues to display a demonstration image as standby display 2, but the upper layer of the effect display device 1600 displays a progress impossibility display using almost the entire surface of the effect display device 1600, making the demonstration image invisible. As a result, after the transition to the play-stop state, the player does not realize that the demonstration period is in progress while the progress impossibility display is being displayed, and can reliably understand that the number of balls dispensed has reached a specific value and game restrictions are being implemented. Furthermore, after transitioning to the stop state, regardless of whether a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed in a standby state in which no special symbols are displayed in a variable manner, the lower layer of the effect display device 1600 may be forced to terminate so that the demonstration image does not continue to be displayed.

Furthermore, if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated at timing t7 while the progress impossible display is being displayed, the operation of the setting adjustment button 204 itself can be accepted, and an adjustment image is displayed on the middle layer of the performance display device 1600. However, the progress impossible display is displayed on the upper layer of the performance display device 1600, using almost the entire surface of the performance display device 1600, making the adjustment image invisible. Note that while the progress impossible display is being displayed, the adjustment image is not displayed, but adjustments to the volume and light intensity can be internally accepted by operating the setting adjustment button 204. However, while the progress impossible display is being displayed, priority is given to control related to sound and light emission based on the stalled state, and adjustments to the volume and light intensity made in response to operation of the setting adjustment button 204 are not reflected. Note that, as another example, adjustments to the volume and light intensity made in response to operation of the setting adjustment button 204 may be reflected while the progress impossible display is being displayed; for example, adjustments to the volume and light intensity may be reflected except for those related to the notification mode described below.

In addition, in this example, even after the transition to the stopped state at timing t6, the demonstration image as standby display 2 continues to be displayed on the lower layer of the performance display device 1600. However, if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated while the progress impossible display is being displayed, the demonstration image being continued on the lower layer may be terminated. This reduces the control load on the peripheral control board 1510. Note that the condition for terminating the demonstration image being continued on the lower layer is not limited to operating the setting adjustment button 204, but may also be operating the first performance button 251 or the second performance button 252 or operating the handle 160. Furthermore, if the setting adjustment button 204, first performance button 251 or the second performance button 252, or the handle 160 is operated while the progress impossible display is being displayed (if a specified operation is performed that is a condition for terminating the demonstration image being continued on the lower layer), it is desirable not to issue any corresponding notification such as a dedicated sound, light emission, or display. In other words, if a dedicated sound, light, display, or other notification were to be made in response to each operation, there is a risk that the player might misunderstand that "I can play now," but by not making any dedicated sound, light, display, or other notification in response to each operation, this risk of misunderstanding can be prevented. Note that in the case of the so-called enclosed gaming machine or controlled gaming machine mentioned above, no dedicated sound, light, display, or other notification is made in response to the operation of the setting adjustment button 204, first effect button 251, second effect button 252, or handle 160, but in the case of the operation of the counting button switch only, a dedicated sound, light, display, or other notification in response to that operation may be made in order to clearly indicate that play has ended normally.

Next, the notification modes regarding light emission and sound during the execution of the play limit state will be explained using Figure 233. In this example, when the play limit state is entered, not only the effect display device 1600 but also notification elements other than the effect display device 1600 are used to notify the outside world in an emphatic manner that the play limit state has been entered, so as to actively notify the outside world. However, unless the play limit state is resolved, continuing to notify in this emphatic manner could interfere with the play of surrounding players. In order to alleviate this concern, the following describes a configuration for controlling the notification modes regarding light emission and sound during the play limit state so that they change in a unique manner.

First, at timing t6, when the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value and game play is restricted, the game transitions to a stopped state in which game progress is disabled, and the effect display device 1600 displays a progress disabled message on almost the entire surface of the effect display device 1600 as an image corresponding to the stopped state. At this time, as the actions taken when progress is disabled are performed by lamp A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the gaming board 5), and speaker, notification mode A is forcibly executed in an emphasized mode consisting of a predetermined specific light intensity (e.g., maximum light intensity) and a predetermined specific volume (e.g., maximum volume), regardless of the setting status set by operating the setting adjustment button 204. More specifically, Lamp A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration members) and Lamp B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5) emit a monochromatic white light, with the LEDs flashing or lighting up at a specific light intensity (for example, maximum light intensity), and the speaker outputs a voice message at a specific volume (for example, maximum volume) saying, "The daily ball payout limit has been reached, so play is being restricted." This allows the hall manager to be clearly informed that play has entered a stop state. Note that it is preferable that the highlighted notification related to the stop state be in a different mode from the notification mode used in the event of other errors such as abnormalities.

Then, at time t8, after a predetermined period (e.g., 15 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the highlighted notification as notification mode A, the effect display device 1600 maintains the progress-impossible display using substantially the entire surface of the effect display device 1600, but the lamps A (LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the gaming board 5), and speaker transition to a suppressed notification mode in which the light intensity and volume are reduced as notification mode B. Specifically, while the LEDs of lamps A (LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the frame decoration member) and lamp B (LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the gaming board 5) continue to emit monochromatic white light, they are no longer flashing or lit at a specific light intensity (e.g., maximum light intensity) (they are flashing or lit at an intensity less than the specific light intensity), and the speaker is no longer outputting the audio message "Play has been restricted because the daily ball payout limit has been reached," resulting in a silent (inaudible) state in which no sound can be heard. This allows the highlighted notification to end even during a game-stop state, preventing the game from interfering with surrounding players. It also prevents excessive power consumption by gaming machines that are no longer being played in a game-stop state.

The suppression mode may be one that reduces the light intensity and volume more than the highlight mode. For example, for Lamp A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member) and Lamp B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the gaming board 5), the highlight mode may involve changing the light color pattern so that the LEDs flash or light up in multiple colors, or outputting a voice message such as "Play has been restricted because the daily ball payout limit has been reached" or playing specified background music at a volume lower than a specific volume from the speaker. By doing this, the decorative effect can be maintained even on gaming machines that have reached a limit and are no longer being played, and the machine can play a role in livening up the entire gaming hall. Furthermore, decorative effects are unnecessary on gaming machines that have reached a dead-end state and are no longer being played, and if even greater energy savings are desired, the light intensity and volume of the suppression modes can be completely suppressed. For example, the performance display device 1600 can maintain the no-progress display using almost the entire surface of the performance display device 1600, but lamp A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member) and lamp B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the gaming board 5) can be turned off, and the speaker can be set to a silent state (inaudible state) where no sound can be heard. Furthermore, a specified suppression mode selection switch can be provided so that the administrator can change (select) the suppression mode setting by operating the suppression mode selection switch.

Furthermore, if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated at timing t9 after the start of the notification in the suppressed mode as notification mode B, the effect display device 1600 maintains the progress impossibility display, while the lamps A (LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the frame decoration members), lamp B (LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the gaming board 5), and speaker transition to again executing the notification in the emphasized mode, which emphasizes the light intensity and volume, as notification mode A. Similarly, if there is contact with the handle 160 and the handle touch sensor 162 detects the player's contact, the lamps A (LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the frame decoration members), lamp B (LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the gaming board 5), and speaker transition to again executing the notification in the emphasized mode, which emphasizes the light intensity and volume, as notification mode A. This allows the notification to transition to the emphasized mode, even if a new player tries to start playing without realizing that play has been stopped, making the player aware of the stoppage. Furthermore, even if you rotate the handle 160 while in contact with it, if play is restricted by the above-mentioned restriction pattern 3, the "play stopped" and "fire stopped" states will be set during the shot limit state, and game balls will not be fired toward the play area 5a.

Furthermore, after restarting the highlighted notification as notification mode A, at time t10, a predetermined period (e.g., 15 seconds) has elapsed. While the effect display device 1600 maintains the "progression is not possible" indication, the lamps A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the gaming board 5), and speaker transition to restarting the notification in a suppressed mode, reducing the light intensity and volume, as notification mode B. This terminates the highlighted notification even if the setting adjustment button 204 is accidentally operated or the handle 160 is accidentally touched, preventing it from interfering with the gameplay of surrounding players. Note that in this example, the time taken to transition from notification mode A (highlighted mode) to notification mode B (suppressed mode) is the same predetermined time (15 seconds) for both the time from t6 to t8 and the time from t9 to t10. However, the time from t6 to t8 and the time from t9 to t10 may be different. For example, the time from timing t6 to timing t8 is desirably set to a relatively long time (15 seconds) as the purpose is to inform those around, while the time from timing t9 to timing t10 can be set to a shorter time than timing t6 to timing t8 (for example, 5 seconds) as new players are in a dead-end state and the purpose is to extend the energy-saving period.

Furthermore, the predetermined condition for transitioning from notification mode A (highlighted mode) to notification mode B (suppressed mode) is not limited to the passage of the predetermined time described above, but may also be an operation by an administrator. For example, a predetermined suppression mode setting switch may be provided so that the administrator can forcibly change to notification mode B (suppressed mode) by operating the suppression mode setting switch while in notification mode A (highlighted mode).

As described above, when a predetermined condition, such as the passage of a predetermined period of time, is met while the stop state is in progress, the notification behavior of Lamp A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration members), Lamp B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speaker changes. In contrast, Lamp C is equipped with a status indicator, normal symbol indicator, normal hold indicator, first special symbol indicator, first special hold number indicator, second special symbol indicator, second special hold number indicator, and round indicator as part of the functional display unit 1400, and all of these LEDs are lit during the stop state, so the notification behavior does not change even if a predetermined condition is met. As a result, even if the notification behavior of a component changes, the notification using Lamp C allows the player to know that the stop state has not been resolved.

In addition, when notification mode A is executed at timing t6 immediately after transitioning to the stop state, and when notification mode A is executed at timing t10 due to operation of the setting adjustment button 204 or contact with the handle 160, a common notification is executed in an emphasized mode. This allows for the standardization of the control program.

As another example, if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated or the handle 160 is touched at timing t10, the notification from lamp A (an LED mounted on the various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (an LED mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speaker may transition to notification mode C, which is different from notification mode A and notification mode B. Even with this configuration, if a new player tries to start playing without realizing that play has been stopped, the notification mode will transition to a different mode from notification mode A and notification mode B, making the player aware that play has been stopped.

Next, using Figure 233, we will explain whether or not the handle contact effect can be executed while the special symbol is not being displayed (during standby mode). In this example, if there is new contact with the handle 160 while the special symbol is not being displayed, the handle contact effect can be executed, increasing the excitement of starting play.

First, during the non-variable display of the special symbol (standby state) when the game is not in the end state, a handle contact effect can be executed if the handle 160 is newly contacted, regardless of whether or not the demonstration period is in progress. For example, if the handle 160 is newly contacted at timing t1 while the advance notice display is being displayed, the handle contact effect is initiated and executed for a predetermined period (e.g., 5 seconds). In this handle contact effect, the effect display device 1600 is used to display a contact-specific image corresponding to contact with the handle 160 (e.g., a video display of a specific character to emphasize the start of play). However, Lamp A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), Lamp B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the gaming board 5), and speaker are also capable of executing specific effect processing corresponding to contact with the handle 160 (e.g., sound or light emission to emphasize the start of play). The contact-specific image corresponding to contact with the handle 160 is outside the specific display area where the advance notice display is displayed and is displayed on the lower layer described above.

On the other hand, while the progress-impossible display is being displayed in the play-stop state, the handle contact effect cannot be executed if there is new contact with the handle 160. In other words, even if there is new contact with the handle 160 while the progress-impossible display is being displayed, the effect display device 1600 does not display the dedicated image for contact with the handle 160, thereby restricting the execution of the handle contact effect. As a result, even if a new player attempts to start playing without recognizing that the play-stop state has been reached, the normal handle contact effect will not be executed. In other words, the absence of the normal handle contact effect can alert the player to the fact that the play-stop state has been reached. Note that, as mentioned above, the dedicated image for contact is displayed on a lower layer. Therefore, in order to avoid complicating control depending on whether or not the dedicated image for contact is displayed, the dedicated image for contact may be displayed on a lower layer if there is new contact with the handle 160 while the progress-impossible display is being displayed. Even if a contact-only image is displayed on a lower layer, if a progress-impossible display is displayed on a higher layer of the effect display device 1600 using almost the entire surface of the effect display device 1600, the player will not be able to see the contact-only image, and the normal handle contact effect will not be displayed, making the player aware that the game has reached a dead end. Furthermore, even if the player rotates the handle 160 while making contact, if play is restricted by the above-mentioned restriction pattern 3, the game ball will not be launched toward the game area 5a because "play stopped" and "launch stopped" are in the dead end state.

Furthermore, as explained in detail above, if there is new contact with the handle 160 while the progress-impossible display is being displayed, it is possible for lamp A (an LED mounted on the various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (an LED mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speaker to change from notification mode B to notification mode A (or, as another example, notification mode C), and transition to a notification in an emphasized mode. As a result, even if a new player tries to start playing without realizing that play has been stopped, the notification in an emphasized mode can be executed, making the player aware that play has been stopped.

Furthermore, if there is new contact with the handle 160 at timing t5 while the advance notice display is being displayed, the handle contact effect will begin. However, if the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value and the game transitions to a deadlock state at timing t6, before the end of the handle contact effect, the handle contact effect will end midway through its execution and will not be executed to the end. In other words, after the game transitions to a deadlock state, the contact-specific image corresponding to contact with the handle 160 is made difficult to see. This makes it possible to make the player aware that the game will transition to a deadlock state and that they will no longer be able to continue playing, even if they are paying attention to the handle contact effect.

In this example, while the game is in a stalled state, data transfer from the gaming machine to the gaming ball dispensing device 8 is acceptable, but adding to the normal number of balls a new player has or data transfer from the gaming ball dispensing device 8 to the gaming machine is not accepted, preventing the new player from starting play. If a new player attempts to add to the normal number of balls they have (a ball dispensing operation), a specified notification is issued. For example, just as if the handle 160 were to be newly touched while the progress-impossible display was being displayed, Lamp A (an LED mounted on the various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), Lamp B (an LED mounted on the various decorative boards of the gaming board 5), and speaker are changed from Notification Mode B to Notification Mode A (or, as another example, Notification Mode C), transitioning to a highlighted notification mode. As a result, even if a new player tries to start playing without realizing that the game is at a limit, the normal number of balls held will not be added when the ball is dispensed, preventing the player from starting the game. In addition, the highlighted notification alerts the player to the limit. Note that if the game is at a limit and it is not possible to add new players' normal number of balls or to receive data transfers from the game ball dispenser 8, it is preferable to control the display mode of the ball count display to a mode that indicates the limit, such as "EEEE," and notify the player of this in advance.

As another example, during a play-stop state, it may be possible to add a new player's normal ball count or to accept data transfer from the game ball lending device 8 to the gaming machine. Even in such cases, if a new player attempts to add to their normal ball count (a ball lending operation), a predetermined notification is issued. For example, just as in the case of new contact with the handle 160 while the progress-stopped message is being displayed, lamp A (an LED mounted on the various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (an LED mounted on the various decorative boards of the gaming board 5), and speaker change from notification mode B to notification mode A (or, as another example, notification mode C), and the notification is switched to an emphasized mode. As a result, if a new player attempts to start playing without realizing that play is stopped, the normal ball count will be added when the ball lending operation is executed, but the emphasized notification can alert the player to the fact that play is stopped.

As another example, during the non-variable display of the special symbol (during standby mode), a movable body on the gaming board 5 may be moved from its initial position to its appearance position at a predetermined time during the demonstration period and left waiting in front of the screen of the effect display device 1600 for a predetermined operation period (after the operation period has elapsed, the movable body is returned from its appearance position to its initial position), thereby performing a so-called "customer-attracting operation." However, such a customer-attracting operation may also be partially restricted, as with the handle contact effect described above. For example, if the operation (customer-attracting operation) of the movable body on the gaming board 5 is pre-set to be performed from its initial position to its appearance position at timing t5 during the display of the advance notice display, the customer-attracting operation is performed for a predetermined operation period from timing t5. However, if the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value at timing t6, before the operation period has elapsed and the game enters a stop state, the operation period is terminated midway, and the movable body is forcibly returned from its appearance position to its initial position, thereby shortening the customer-attracting operation. In other words, the customer-attracting operation is not performed after the game enters a stop state. This allows players to be made aware that even if they are performing a customer attraction operation, the game will be stopped and they will no longer be able to continue playing.

Next, using Figure 233, we will explain whether or not a presentation change operation can be accepted. In this example, if the setting adjustment button 204 is pressed and held during either the variable display of special symbols, the non-variable display of special symbols, or a winning game (jackpot game), a change to "auto button mode, which enables the auto button function that considers the first presentation button 251 or the second presentation button 252 to have been operated when operation is requested in subsequent presentations, even if the first presentation button 251 or the second presentation button 252 has not been operated" or "3D display mode, which enables 3D image display on the presentation display device 1600" is possible, providing a gaming environment that suits the player's needs. Note that if the setting adjustment button 204 is pressed and held again after a change to auto button mode or 3D display mode, the change is canceled and the mode is changed back to normal mode.

First, as an example, we will explain what happens when the setting adjustment button 204 is pressed and held while a special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner when the game is not at a full-play state. When a special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner when the game is not at a full-play state, acceptance of a long press of the setting adjustment button 204 is enabled regardless of whether or not a demonstration period is in progress, making it possible to change to auto button mode or 3D display mode. For example, if a long press of the setting adjustment button 204 is initiated at timing t1 while the advance notice display is being displayed, the effect display device 1600 executes an acceptance effect consisting of images and sounds corresponding to the acceptance of the long press (for example, a display or sound such as "If you continue to press for 5 seconds, the mode will change to auto button mode and 3D display mode"). Then, at timing t2, when the setting adjustment button 204 has been pressed and held for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds), the mode changes to auto button mode or 3D display mode, and the performance display device 1600 displays an accepted performance consisting of an image and sound corresponding to the acceptance of the long press (for example, a display or sound such as "Changed to auto button mode and 3D display mode"). Note that the image display of the currently accepted performance and the accepted performance is outside the specific display area where the advance notice display is displayed, and is displayed on a middle layer of the performance display device 1600.

In addition, although not shown, if the setting adjustment button 204 is pressed and held during the display of special symbols that are not in the end-of-play state or during a winning game (jackpot game), the acceptance of the long press of the setting adjustment button 204 is enabled in the same manner as when the special symbols are not being displayed and it is possible to change to auto button mode or 3D display mode, and the control is such that the currently-accepted and accepted effects are also executed. Furthermore, if the setting adjustment button 204 is pressed and held while the special symbols are being displayed and changing, the acceptance of the long press is continued not only during the display of the special symbols, but also after the display of the special symbols has ended and after the display of the next special symbols begins and the long press is not forcibly canceled midway when the display of the special symbols and changing are finished.

Furthermore, after changing to auto button mode or 3D display mode while the special symbol is changing, while the special symbol is not changing, or during a winning game (jackpot game), subsequent effects are changed to correspond to auto button mode or 3D display mode, and a setting effect (setting image) indicating that auto button mode or 3D display mode is set is executed. However, if the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value and the game transitions to a deadlock state in this state, the change to auto button mode or 3D display mode is forcibly canceled, and the execution of subsequent setting effect (setting image) is restricted. In other words, when the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value and the game transitions to a deadlock state, the set auto button mode or 3D display mode is forcibly canceled without any operation of the setting adjustment button 204, and the above-mentioned progress-impossible display, etc. is executed in a normal manner that does not correspond to either mode. Furthermore, the setting effect (setting image), like the images of the reception effect and reception completed effect, is outside the specific display area where the play impossible display is displayed, and is displayed on a middle layer of the effect display device 1600. This prevents the impossible-to-play display from being displayed in 3D display, etc., and also prevents the impossible-to-play display from being difficult to see in the setting effect (setting image), making it possible to properly notify the player that play has come to a halt without causing discomfort or disgust to the player.

Next, we will explain what happens when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value while the setting adjustment button 204 is being pressed and held to change to auto button mode or 3D display mode during a special symbol variable display, a special symbol non-variable display, or a winning game (jackpot game). Using Figure 233 as an example of a non-variable special symbol display when the game is not in a stopped state, if the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value and the game transitions to a stopped state at timing t6 (e.g., when the setting adjustment button 204 is pressed and held for three seconds) while the setting adjustment button 204 is being pressed and held to change to auto button mode or 3D display mode, the game will block continued acceptance of long presses of the setting adjustment button 204 at timing t6, forcibly disabling further operation acceptance. Furthermore, if the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value and the game transitions to a stopped state during the execution of a currently accepting effect or a currently accepted effect, the effect will be forcibly terminated at the point of transition to the stopped state. In other words, even if the setting adjustment button 204 is subsequently pressed and held for five seconds or more, restrictions are placed on preventing a change to auto button mode or 3D display mode. As a result, even if the setting adjustment button 204 is pressed and held before the game enters the stopped state, if the game enters the stopped state during that press and hold, none of the reception effect, reception completed effect, or setting effect will be executed after the game enters the stopped state, and the game can be properly notified of the stopped state without causing discomfort or disgust to the player.

On the other hand, while the progress impossible display is displayed in the play-stop state, acceptance of long presses of the setting adjustment button 204 is disabled, and restrictions are placed on preventing changes to auto button mode or 3D display mode. In other words, even if the setting adjustment button 204 is long pressed while the progress impossible display is displayed, the effect display device 1600 is restricted from executing the "Accepting" effect, "Accepted" effect, and "Setting" effect. As a result, even if a new player long presses the setting adjustment button 204 without recognizing that the play is stopped, no notification regarding a change to auto button mode or 3D display mode is issued, avoiding the misunderstanding that play is possible.

In addition, if the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value while the setting adjustment button 204 is being pressed and held to cancel the already-set auto button mode or 3D display mode during a variable special symbol display, a non-variable special symbol display, or a winning game (jackpot game), the following control is implemented. That is, if the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value and the game transitions to a stop state at timing t6 (e.g., when the setting adjustment button 204 is pressed and held for three seconds) while the setting adjustment button 204 is being pressed and held to cancel the auto button mode or 3D display mode, continued acceptance of the long press of the setting adjustment button 204 is blocked at timing t6, forcibly disabling further operation acceptance as described above. Furthermore, if the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value and the game transitions to a stop state during the execution of a currently-accepted or accepted effect, the effect is forcibly terminated as soon as the game transitions to a stop state as described above. However, if the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value while the setting adjustment button 204 is being pressed and held to cancel an already-set auto button mode or 3D display mode, even if continued acceptance of the long press of the setting adjustment button 204 is blocked, the auto button mode or 3D display mode is canceled based on the amount of balls dispensed reaching the specific value. In other words, if the setting adjustment button 204 is pressed and held (to cancel) before the game is stopped, the game will transition to the stopped state during that long press. After the game is stopped, none of the accepting effect, accepted effect, or setting effect will be executed, but the auto button mode or 3D display mode will be forcibly canceled. This prevents the game stop state notification from being distorted to reflect a special mode, and avoids causing discomfort or dislike to the player.

Furthermore, as explained in detail above, if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated (pressed and held) while the progress-impossible display is being displayed, it is possible for lamp A (LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), lamp B (LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5), and speaker to change from notification mode B to notification mode A (or, as another example, notification mode C), and the notification will transition to an emphasized mode. As a result, even if a new player presses and holds the setting adjustment button 204 without realizing that play has reached a limit, the notification will be executed in an emphasized mode, making the player aware that play has reached a limit.

Furthermore, if a long press of the setting adjustment button 204 is initiated at timing t5 while the advance notice display is in progress, the effect display device 1600 displays an image of the effect currently being accepted. However, if the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value at timing t6, before the long press of the setting adjustment button 204 reaches a predetermined period (e.g., 5 seconds), and the game transitions to a stop state, the display of the image of the effect currently being accepted is terminated midway, and the display of the image of the effect currently being accepted is not completed. In other words, after the game transitions to the stop state, the display of the image of the effect currently being accepted is not visible. Furthermore, since acceptance of the long press of the setting adjustment button 204 is disabled after the game transitions to the stop state, even if the long press has continued before the game transitions to the stop state, the mode will not change to auto button mode or 3D display mode at timing t7, when the long press period reaches the predetermined period (e.g., 5 seconds), and the effect display device 1600 will not display the image of the effect that has been accepted. This allows the player to be made aware that even if the setting adjustment button 204 is pressed and held down, the game will be stopped and the player will be unable to continue playing.

When the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during a jackpot game and the game transitions to the stop preparation state, unlike when the progress impossibility indicator is displayed in the stop state, acceptance of a long press of the setting adjustment button 204 is enabled, making it possible to change to auto button mode or 3D display mode. Therefore, if a long press of the setting adjustment button 204 is initiated while the advance notice indicator is displayed and the game transitions to the stop preparation state before the long press duration reaches a predetermined period (e.g., 5 seconds), the effect currently being accepted will not end midway. Instead, when the long press duration reaches the predetermined period (e.g., 5 seconds) after the game transitions to the stop preparation state, the effect will change to the auto button or 3D display, and the effect display device 1600 will display an image of the effect that has been accepted. As a result, when the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during a long press of the setting adjustment button 204, it is possible to know whether the game has transitioned to the stop state or the stop preparation state. After the game transitions to the stop preparation state, the corresponding effect will be executed, allowing the player to play according to their needs.

In the above, an example was given of changing to another mode such as auto button mode or 3D display mode by long pressing the setting adjustment button 204, but the other modes that can be changed to by long pressing the setting adjustment button 204 are not limited to these modes. For example, the other mode may be a change to "another presentation mode in which preview presentations and reach presentations are executed in different ways." Also, while an example was given of changing to another mode by long pressing the setting adjustment button 204, the player's operation that triggers the change to another mode is not limited to a long press of the setting adjustment button 204, but may also be a "short press of the setting adjustment button 204 or another button."

The timing for reflecting a change to another mode, such as auto button mode or 3D display mode, is not limited to the above example. For example, the change may be put on hold until the next time the special symbol starts changing, and the change to another mode may be reflected when the next special symbol starts changing. In such a case, if the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value and stops playing between the time the change to the other mode is put on hold and the time the next special symbol starts changing, the next special symbol change will not start, making it impossible to reflect the change to the other mode, and achieving the same effect as described above. In such a case, the control load on the peripheral control board 1510 can be reduced by erasing information about the change to another mode being put on hold when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value and stops playing.

(Operation of the moving body after transition to the deadlock state)
As described above in detail, when a game ball enters the general winning slot 2001 or the like while the special symbol is being displayed, if the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value due to the payout of prize balls, the game transitions to a stop state and game restrictions are imposed. When the game transitions to a stop state, the effect display device 1600 displays the message "Game Restriction" as an image corresponding to the stop state, thereby informing the player that the number of balls dispensed has reached a specific value and game restrictions are being imposed. However, during the special symbol display, as part of the variable effect, it is possible to move movable bodies such as the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 and the rear-rear lifting decorative body 3410 from their standby positions to a performance position located in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in a performance pattern determined at the start of the special symbol display. Therefore, if the display of the special symbols is stopped when the game transitions to a stop state during the display of the special symbols, but the movable body is operated in the presentation pattern determined at the start of the display of the special symbols after the transition to the stop state, the display content (the image corresponding to the stop state) displayed on the presentation display device 1600 will be hidden by the movable body and will be impossible to see, making it difficult to understand that a game restriction has been implemented. Furthermore, if the display of the special symbols is not only stopped but also the movable body is forcibly stopped when the game transitions to a stop state during the display of the special symbols, when the movable body stops in the presentation position, the display content (the image corresponding to the stop state) displayed on the presentation display device 1600 will be hidden by the movable body and will be impossible to see, making it difficult to understand that a game restriction has been implemented. Therefore, in this example, a configuration will be described below in which the movable body does not stop in the presentation position after the transition to the stop state and does not move to a new presentation position.

In this example, the game board 5 is provided with a rear-front lifting decoration unit 3310 and a rear-rear lifting decoration 3410 as movable bodies that can appear in front of the display screen of the performance display device 1600. Under normal conditions, the rear-front lifting decoration unit 3310 and the rear-rear lifting decoration 3410 wait in a standby position located at the top of the display screen of the performance display device 1600, but at a predetermined timing during the variable display of special patterns, each movable body can perform a performance operation between its standby position and a performance position located in front of the display screen of the performance display device 1600.

First, we will explain the operation of the movable body when the game does not transition to a stop state during the variable display of special symbols. Figure 234 is a time chart showing the operation of the movable body when the game does not transition to a stop state during the variable display of special symbols.

When the main control board 1310 detects balls entering various starting holes and starts the variable display of special symbols based on the balls entering the various starting holes, it determines one of several variation patterns based on the lottery results, and executes the variable display of special symbols based on that variation pattern on the first special symbol display device or the second special symbol display device in the function display unit 1400. Furthermore, when a variation pattern is determined, it is sent as a variation pattern command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 determines a presentation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern. The presentation pattern determines the content of the variable presentation to be executed during the variable display of special symbols, and the variable presentation may include the variable display of decorative symbols using the presentation display device 1600, presentations such as reach presentations, lighting using lamps, and audio output from speakers. In addition, the movement of movable bodies such as the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 and the rear-rear lifting decorative body 3410 can also be performed as a variable effect, and an operation schedule is instructed to be executed, which sets the operation timing and operation content of the movable bodies. Regarding this operation schedule, when the operation timing of the movable body arrives, the peripheral control board 1510 executes a movement process to operate the movable body, and initiates the specified operation content. The operation schedules include an operation schedule X, which sets the operation timing and operation content of the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X), and an operation schedule Y, which sets the operation timing and operation content of the rear-rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y). Furthermore, the change pattern, effect pattern, and operation schedule are determined when the special symbol change display begins, and after the special symbol change display begins, they are executed according to the change pattern, effect pattern, and operation schedule. In addition, the rear front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y) are operable when the variation pattern (presentation pattern) that is selected when the lottery result for the special symbol is a win and the variation pattern (presentation pattern) that is selected as part of the lottery result for the special symbol is a loss have been determined, and this operation can give the player a sense of anticipation about winning.

As shown in Figure 234, if variation pattern 1 is determined at the start of the display of the special symbol variations, the display of the special symbol variations is executed based on variation pattern 1. Furthermore, at the start of the display of the special symbol variations, the peripheral control board 1510 determines presentation pattern 1 corresponding to variation pattern 1, and executes the presentation of the variations based on presentation pattern 1 while the special symbol variations are being displayed. Furthermore, when presentation pattern 1 is determined, the rear-front lifting and descending decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) is instructed to execute operation schedule X1, and the rear-rear lifting and descending decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) is instructed to execute operation schedule Y1, but these operation schedules are not set to operate the rear-front lifting and descending decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) or the rear-rear lifting and descending decorative body 3410 (movable body Y), and while the special symbol variations are being displayed, the rear-front lifting and descending decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear-rear lifting and descending decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) are in standby for operation.

Then, at timing t1, the variable display of the special pattern ends, and if variable pattern 2 is determined at the start of the variable display of the next special pattern, the variable display of the special pattern is executed based on variable pattern 2. Also, at timing t1, the peripheral control board 1510 determines presentation pattern 2 corresponding to variable pattern 2, and executes the variable presentation based on presentation pattern 2 while the variable display of the special pattern is in progress. Also, if presentation pattern 2 is determined at timing t1, the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) is instructed to execute operation schedule X2, and the rear-rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) is instructed to execute operation schedule Y2. Of these operation schedules, operation schedule X2 is set so that the rear-front rising and falling decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) performs a performance action at timing tx, a predetermined period (e.g., 20 seconds) after the start of the variable display, while operation schedule Y2 is set so that the rear-rear rising and falling decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) performs a performance action at timing ty, a predetermined period (e.g., 25 seconds) after the start of the variable display. Note that timing ty is later than timing tx and occurs after the performance action of the rear-front rising and falling decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) is completed. Furthermore, if the game does not transition to a dead-end state during the variable display of the special pattern, the rear-front rising and falling decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) performs a performance action at timing tx, and the rear-rear rising and falling decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) performs a performance action at timing ty.

Next, we will explain the case where the game transitions to a stop state before the timing of the movable body's movement during the variable display of special symbols, and the movable body is not subsequently operated. Figure 235 is a time chart showing the case where the game transitions to a stop state before the timing of the movable body's movement during the variable display of special symbols, and the movable body is not subsequently operated.

As shown in Figure 235, if variation pattern 2 is determined at timing t1 when the variable display of the special symbol begins, the variable display of the special symbol is executed based on that variation pattern 2. Also, at timing t1, the peripheral control board 1510 determines presentation pattern 2 corresponding to variation pattern 2, and executes the variable display based on presentation pattern 2 while the variable display of the special symbol is in progress. Also, if presentation pattern 2 is determined at timing t1, it instructs the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) to execute operation schedule X2, and the rear-rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) to execute operation schedule Y2.

Then, at timing t2, before timing tx, if a game ball enters the general winning slot 2001 while the special symbol is being displayed, causing a transition to a stop state, the stop state flag is turned ON, and the display of the special symbol being displayed based on change pattern 2 is forcibly stopped. Also, at timing t2, the peripheral control board 1510 forcibly stops the variable effect being displayed based on effect pattern 2. At this time, the effect display device 1600 forcibly changes the image corresponding to the variable effect to an image corresponding to the stop state. Also, the operation schedule X2 being executed for the rear-front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) and the operation schedule Y2 being executed for the rear-rear lifting decoration unit 3410 (movable body Y) are forcibly stopped, and the rear-front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear-rear lifting decoration unit 3410 (movable body Y) are prohibited from operating. Therefore, after transitioning to a stop state at timing t2, even if timing tx arrives, the predetermined performance action will not be performed for the rear-front rising and falling decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X), and even if timing ty arrives, the predetermined performance action will not be performed for the rear-rear rising and falling decorative body 3410 (movable body Y).

In this way, at the start of the variable display of the special pattern, the timing tx for executing the performance operation of the rear-front rising and lowering decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the timing ty for executing the performance operation of the rear-rear rising and lowering decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) are determined, but if the game transitions to a stop state at timing t2 before timing tx arrives, the performance operation that was predetermined for the rear-front rising and lowering decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) will not be executed when timing tx arrives, and the performance operation that was predetermined for the rear-rear rising and lowering decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) will not be executed when timing ty arrives. As a result, when the game enters a limit state, the effect display device 1600 displays the message "Play Restrictions" as an image corresponding to the limit state, but the display content (image corresponding to the limit state) displayed on the effect display device 1600 is not obscured by the effect movement of the rear front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y), preventing the player from becoming unaware that a limit on play is being imposed.

In the above-described embodiment, at time t2 when the state transitions to the stopped state, the operation schedule X2 being executed for the rear-front ascent/descent decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the operation schedule Y2 being executed for the rear-rear ascent/descent decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) are forcibly stopped. However, as another example, the operation schedules themselves may be allowed to continue without being forcibly stopped, while the operation of movable bodies X and Y is stopped by control independent of the operation schedules. For example, at time t2 when the state transitions to the stopped state, in order to forcibly prohibit the rear-front ascent/descent decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear-rear ascent/descent decorative body 3410 (movable body Y), an operation prohibition flag may be turned on, and whether or not to operate movable bodies X and Y may be determined depending on the state of this operation prohibition flag. In such a case, even if timing tx arrives in the operation schedule that continues even after the transition to the dead-end state, the execution of a predetermined performance action for the rear-front rising and falling decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) can be prohibited based on the operation prohibition flag being on, and even if timing ty arrives, the execution of a predetermined performance action for the rear-rear rising and falling decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) can be prohibited based on the operation prohibition flag being on, eliminating the need to change the operation schedule when the transition to the dead-end state and making it possible to avoid complicating the game design.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the image corresponding to the variable effect is forcibly changed to the image corresponding to the stopped state at time t2 when the state transitions to the stopped state. However, it is also possible to continue the image corresponding to the variable effect without forcibly stopping it, and display the image corresponding to the stopped state on a higher layer in the effect display device 1600 (a layer higher than the layer displaying the image corresponding to the variable effect), so that only the image corresponding to the stopped state is visible on the effect display device 1600.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, due to concerns that the player may not be able to grasp that game restrictions are being implemented, all variable effects currently being executed based on effect pattern 2 are forcibly stopped at time t2 when the game enters the stopped state. However, as another example, it is possible to continue some of the variable effects currently being executed based on effect pattern 2 without forcibly stopping all of them. In other words, it is possible to execute normal control for only some of the effect elements that make up the variable effects, which are made up of "sound, light, image, movable body." For example, taking the example of a case where only "sound, light, image" of the "sound, light, image, movable body" effect elements that make up the variable effects are forcibly stopped, at time t2 when the game enters the stopped state, the effect using movable body X and Y in the variable effects based on the effect pattern is continued, but the image corresponding to that variable effect is forcibly changed to an image corresponding to the stopped state, so that only the image corresponding to the stopped state can be viewed on the effect display device 1600. In this case, as mentioned above, there is a possibility that the fact that a game restriction is being implemented may become unclear due to the effects of movable bodies X and Y. However, in this example, preliminary notification that a game restriction is being implemented is provided using effects such as "sound" or "light" that are not obstructed by the effects of movable bodies X and Y. Specifically, at time t2 when the game transitions to the stopped state, control may be changed to output a warning sound different from the sound corresponding to the variable effects, thereby providing a "sound" warning, or control may be changed to emit a warning light different from the light corresponding to the variable effects, thereby providing a "light" warning. This makes it possible to avoid losing track of the fact that a game restriction is being implemented, even if all variable effects currently being implemented are not forcibly stopped.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example, a case is explained in which the game transitions to a stop state before the timing of the operation of the movable body during the changing display of the special pattern, and the movable body does not operate thereafter.However, if an operable first performance button 251 is provided as a movable body separate from the back-front rising and falling decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the back-rear rising and falling decorative body 3410 (movable body Y), the following configuration may be adopted. That is, if a vibrator device (such as a vibration motor) provided inside or outside the first effect button 251 is used to enable vibration of the first effect button 251, the peripheral control board 1510, when determining the variation pattern (effect pattern) to be selected when the special symbol lottery result is a win and the variation pattern to be selected in some cases when the special symbol lottery result is a loss, executes an operation schedule corresponding to the first effect button 251 (movable body) according to the variation pattern set corresponding to the variation pattern, and vibrates the first effect button 251 (movable body) at a predetermined vibration timing during the variable display of the special symbol during a win and a part of a loss, giving the player a sense of anticipation of a win. With this configuration, if the game transitions to a stop state before the vibration timing of the first effect button 251 during the variable display of the special symbol, the first effect button 251 is not vibrated, regardless of whether the variation pattern or operation schedule continues to be executed thereafter. This prevents the vibrator device (vibration motor, etc.) from activating while an image corresponding to the end-of-game state is being displayed on the effect display device 1600 after the game has transitioned to the end-of-game state, which can cause discomfort to the player.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, a transition to the stop state occurs before the operation timing of the movable body during the variable display of the special symbol, and the movable body does not operate thereafter. However, even if a transition to the stop state occurs before the operation timing of the movable body during a jackpot game, etc., the movable body may not operate thereafter. Specifically, the operation schedule of the movable body is executed according to the presentation pattern during a jackpot game, and the movable body is operated at a predetermined operation timing during a jackpot game. With this configuration, if a transition to the stop state occurs before the operation timing of the movable body during a jackpot game, the movable body will not operate regardless of whether the presentation pattern or operation schedule is continued thereafter. This prevents the movable body from operating while an image corresponding to the stop state is displayed on the presentation display device 1600 after a transition to the stop state, giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Next, we will explain what happens when the power is turned off at timing t3 while the machine is in a stalled state, and then turned back on at timing t4. Here, we will explain the case where, when the power is turned back on after being shut off, limited clear pattern table 4 is used as the limited clear pattern table, and power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected as the power-on patterns, which clear the amount of balls dispensed but maintain the stalled state.

If power-on pattern 1 or 4 is selected when the power is turned back on at timing t4, the amount of balls dispensed is cleared but the stop state is maintained. Furthermore, while the stop state is maintained, the forced stop is maintained for the variable display of special symbols based on the variable pattern. Furthermore, while the stop state is maintained, the peripheral control board 1510 maintains the forced stop for variable presentations based on presentation patterns, and also maintains the forced stop for the operation schedules for the rear front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y). However, when the power is turned back on at timing t4, the rear front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) are instructed to execute operation schedule Z, which is not related to the variation of special symbols, so that these movable bodies perform their initial operations at least at timing t4 when the power is turned back on.

In addition, the initial operation of the back-front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) and the back-rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y) involves performing operations to determine whether each movable body moves normally from its standby position to its performance position and whether it returns normally to its standby position. Specifically, operation schedule Z is set so that the back-front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) performs its initial operation when a predetermined period (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed since the power was turned back on, while the back-rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y) is set to perform its initial operation when a predetermined period (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed since the power was turned back on. The initial operation of the back-rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y) is set to be performed after the initial operation of the back-front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) has been completed.

In this way, even if the game-stop state is maintained when the power is turned back on and the forced stop of the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear-rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) is maintained, the initial operation of these movable bodies is allowed to be performed. As a result, even if a malfunction occurs in which the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) or the rear-rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) are not in the standby position before or after the game-stop state before the power is turned back on, these movable bodies will return to their standby positions through their initial operation, preventing the display content (image corresponding to the game-stop state) displayed on the performance display device 1600 from remaining hidden due to a malfunction in which the movable bodies are not in the standby position, and preventing players from noticing that game restrictions are being implemented.

On the other hand, if power-on patterns 2 and 3 are selected when the power is turned back on at timing t4, the ball output amount and the stop state are cleared. Even in such a case, when the power is turned back on, the rear-front lifting and descending decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear-rear lifting and descending decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) are instructed to execute operation schedule Z, and these movable bodies perform their initial operations. Then, after the initial operations of the rear-front lifting and descending decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear-rear lifting and descending decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) are completed, the forced stop is released for the variable display of special patterns based on the variable pattern and they are put on standby for execution. Furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510 releases the forced stop for the variable performance based on the performance pattern and they are put on standby for execution, and the forced stop is released for the operation schedules for the rear-front lifting and descending decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear-rear lifting and descending decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) and they are put on standby for operation.

In the above-described embodiment, if the stopped state is maintained when the power is turned back on and the forced stop of the back-front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) and the back-rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y) is maintained, the initial operation of those movable bodies is executed. However, if the movable body is in the standby position, the initial operation of the movable body may be restricted from being executed in order to emphasize the control load. Also, even if the movable body is not in the standby position, the initial operation of the movable body may be restricted from being executed for the following reason. In other words, if the initial operation of the movable body is not executed even though the movable body is not in the standby position, if a malfunction occurs in which the back-front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) or the back-rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y) is not in the standby position before the power is turned back on, the movable body can be maintained in a state where it is not in the standby position after the power is turned back on, and the hall manager can be made aware that a malfunction has occurred with those movable bodies. However, in this case, there is a concern that the display content (image corresponding to the stalled state) displayed on the performance display device 1600 may remain hidden due to a malfunction in which the movable body is not in the standby position. Therefore, it is desirable to display the image corresponding to the stalled state in a display area of the performance display device 1600 that is not obstructed by the movable body, or to use a device other than the performance display device 1600 to issue a notification corresponding to the stalled state.

Next, we will explain the case where the moving body transitions to a stop state during its operation while the special symbol is being displayed in a changing state, and the moving body is not subsequently operated. Figure 236 is a time chart showing the case where the moving body transitions to a stop state during its operation while the special symbol is being displayed in a changing state, and the moving body is not subsequently operated.

As shown in Figure 236, if variation pattern 2 is determined at timing t1 when the variable display of the special symbol begins, the variable display of the special symbol is executed based on that variation pattern 2. Also, at timing t1, the peripheral control board 1510 determines presentation pattern 2 corresponding to variation pattern 2, and executes the variable display based on presentation pattern 2 while the variable display of the special symbol is in progress. Also, if presentation pattern 2 is determined at timing t1, it instructs the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) to execute operation schedule X2, and the rear-rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) to execute operation schedule Y2.

Furthermore, when timing tx arrives during the variable display of the special pattern, a predetermined performance operation is performed on the rear-front lifting decorative unit 3310 (movable body X) based on the operation schedule X2 currently being executed for the rear-front lifting decorative unit 3310 (movable body X). Then, during the execution of the performance operation for the rear-front lifting decorative unit 3310 (movable body X), if a game ball enters the general winning slot 2001 during the variable display of the special pattern at timing t2, causing a transition to a dead state, the dead state flag is turned ON, and the variable display of the special pattern being executed based on variable pattern 2 is forcibly stopped. Also, at timing t2, the peripheral control board 1510 forcibly stops the variable performance being executed based on variable pattern 2. At this time, the performance display device 1600 forcibly changes the image corresponding to the variable performance to an image corresponding to the dead state. In addition, the operation schedule X2 currently being executed for the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the operation schedule Y2 currently being executed for the rear-rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) are also forcibly stopped. However, the performance operation currently being executed for the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) does not end in the middle of the predetermined performance operation at timing t2, but continues to be executed until the predetermined performance operation is completed. Then, the operation is prohibited until the predetermined performance operation for the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) is completed and the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) is returned to the standby position.

On the other hand, at the time of timing t2 when the transition to the stop state occurs, the predetermined performance action for the rear-rear rising and falling decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) has not begun, and the rear-rear rising and falling decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) is in a state where operation is prohibited. Even if timing ty arrives thereafter, the predetermined performance action for the rear-rear rising and falling decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) will not be executed, as shown in Figure 235.

In this way, after starting a predetermined performance action for the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) at timing tx, if a transition to a play-stop state occurs at timing t2 while that performance action is in progress, the predetermined performance action does not end midway, but continues to run until the predetermined performance action is completed. As a result, when a transition to a play-stop state occurs, the performance display device 1600 displays the message "Play Restricted" as an image corresponding to the play-stop state, but the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) is not forcibly stopped at a position other than the standby position, and the display content (the image corresponding to the play-stop state) displayed on the performance display device 1600 is not continuously hidden, preventing the player from failing to understand that a play restriction is being implemented. Furthermore, when the variable display of the special symbol begins, the timing ty for executing the performance operation of the rear rear rising and falling decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) is determined, but if timing ty has not arrived at timing t2 when the game transitions to the dead-end state, the performance operation that was previously determined for the rear rear rising and falling decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) will not be executed when timing ty arrives. This prevents the display content (image corresponding to the dead-end state) displayed on the performance display device 1600 from being obscured by the performance operation of the rear rear rising and falling decorative body 3410 (movable body Y), preventing the player from failing to understand that a game restriction is being implemented.

The behavior when power is turned off at timing t3 and then turned back on at timing t4 while the power is in a stalled state is as described above.

In the above-described embodiment, at the time t2 when the state transitions to the stopped state, the performance operation currently being performed on the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) is not terminated midway, but continues until the predetermined performance operation is completed, thereby causing the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) to return to the standby position; however, the method of returning to the standby position is not limited to this. For example, as another example, at the time t2 when the state transitions to the stopped state, the performance operation currently being performed on the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) may be forcibly terminated midway through the operation in progress, rather than being continued until it is completed, and in a situation where the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) is not in the standby position after the forcible termination, a dedicated operation schedule for returning to the standby position may be separately executed, causing the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) to return to the standby position.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, at time t2 when the state transitions to the stopped state, the operation schedule X2 being executed for the rear-front ascent/descent decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the operation schedule Y2 being executed for the rear-rear ascent/descent decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) are forcibly stopped. However, as another example, these operation schedules themselves may be allowed to continue without being forcibly stopped, while the operation of movable bodies X and Y is stopped by control independent of the operation schedules. For example, at time t2 when the state transitions to the stopped state, in order to forcibly prohibit the rear-front ascent/descent decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear-rear ascent/descent decorative body 3410 (movable body Y), an operation prohibition flag may be turned on, and it may be determined whether or not to operate movable bodies X and Y, except for the performance operation being executed for movable body X, depending on the state of this operation prohibition flag. In such a case, even if timing ty arrives in the operation schedule that continues even after the transition to the dead-end state, the operation prohibition flag is on, so it is possible to prohibit the execution of a predetermined performance operation for the rear rising and falling decorative body 3410 (movable body Y), eliminating the need to change the operation schedule when the transition to the dead-end state and avoiding complicating the game design.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the image corresponding to the variable effect is forcibly changed to the image corresponding to the stopped state at time t2 when the state transitions to the stopped state. However, it is also possible to continue the image corresponding to the variable effect without forcibly stopping it, and display the image corresponding to the stopped state on a higher layer in the effect display device 1600 (a layer higher than the layer displaying the image corresponding to the variable effect), so that only the image corresponding to the stopped state is visible on the effect display device 1600.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, due to concerns that the player may not be able to grasp that a game restriction is being implemented, at time t2 when the game enters the stopped state, the variable effect being executed based on effect pattern 2 is forcibly stopped, except for the effect action being executed on movable body X. In other words, of the effect elements that make up the variable effect (sound, light, image, movable body), only the "sound, light, and image" elements are forcibly stopped. Therefore, at time t2 when the game enters the stopped state, the variable effect being executed on movable body X based on the effect pattern continues, but the image corresponding to that variable effect is forcibly changed to an image corresponding to the stopped state, so that only the image corresponding to the stopped state is visible on the effect display device 1600. In this case, as mentioned above, there is a possibility that the player may not be able to grasp that a game restriction is being implemented due to the effect action being executed on movable body X. However, in this example, a preliminary notification that a game restriction is being implemented is provided using effect elements such as "sound" or "light" that are not obstructed by the effect action being executed on movable body X. Specifically, at time t2 when the game transitions to the limit state, the control can be changed to output a warning sound different from the sound corresponding to the variable effect, thereby warning by sound, or the control can be changed to emit a warning light different from the light corresponding to the variable effect, thereby warning by light. This makes it possible to avoid the player not being able to grasp that a game restriction is being imposed, even if the performance action being performed on movable body X continues until completion.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example, a transition to a stop state occurs during the operation of a movable body during the variable display of a special pattern, and the movable body in operation continues to execute until the operation is completed, and the movable body is not operated thereafter.However, if an operable first performance button 251 is provided as a movable body separate from the back-front rising and falling decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the back-back rising and falling decorative body 3410 (movable body Y), the following configuration may be adopted. That is, if a vibrator device (such as a vibration motor) provided inside or outside the first effect button 251 is used to enable vibration of the first effect button 251, the peripheral control board 1510, when determining the variation pattern (effect pattern) selected when the special symbol lottery result is a win and the variation pattern selected in some cases when the special symbol lottery result is a loss, executes an operation schedule corresponding to the first effect button 251 (movable body) according to the variation pattern set corresponding to the variation pattern, and vibrates the first effect button 251 (movable body) at a predetermined vibration timing during the variable display of the special symbol during a win and a part of a loss, giving the player a sense of anticipation of a win. With this configuration, if the game transitions to a stop state while the first effect button 251 is vibrating during the variable display of the special symbol, the vibrating first effect button 251 continues to execute its operation until completion, regardless of whether the subsequent execution of the variation pattern or operation schedule is continued, and the first effect button 251 is not vibrated again. This prevents the vibrator device (vibration motor, etc.) from continuing to operate while an image corresponding to the stop state is displayed on the effect display device 1600 after the game has transitioned to the stop state, which can cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, a transition to the stop state occurs while a moving body is operating during the variable display of a special symbol, and the moving body continues to operate until the operation is completed, and the moving body is not operated thereafter. However, even when a transition to the stop state occurs while a moving body is operating during a jackpot game, etc., the moving body may continue to operate until the operation is completed, and the moving body may not operate thereafter. Specifically, the operation schedule of the moving body is executed according to the presentation pattern during the jackpot game, and the moving body is operated at a predetermined operation timing during the jackpot game. With this configuration, when a transition to the stop state occurs while a moving body is operating during a jackpot game, the moving body continues to operate until it continues, regardless of whether the presentation pattern or operation schedule is continued thereafter, and no new moving body is operated. This prevents the moving body from continuing to operate while an image corresponding to the stop state is displayed on the presentation display device 1600 after the transition to the stop state, giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Next, we will explain the case where the game stops before the timing of the moving body's movement during the variable display of special symbols, and the moving body is then operated. As described above, if the game stops before the timing of the moving body's movement during the variable display of special symbols, the variable performance based on the performance pattern is forcibly stopped, and even if the timing of the moving body's movement arrives, the predetermined performance action for the moving body is not executed. However, in such a case, the variable performance that is being executed ends midway, which has the disadvantage of greatly disappointing players who have been eagerly awaiting the performance action of the moving body. Figure 237 is a time chart showing the case where the game stops before the timing of the moving body's movement during the variable display of special symbols, and the moving body is then operated.

As shown in Figure 237, if variation pattern 2 is determined at timing t1 when the variable display of the special symbol begins, the variable display of the special symbol is executed based on that variation pattern 2. Also, at timing t1, the peripheral control board 1510 determines presentation pattern 2 corresponding to variation pattern 2, and executes the variable display based on presentation pattern 2 while the variable display of the special symbol is in progress. Also, if presentation pattern 2 is determined at timing t1, it instructs the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) to execute operation schedule X2, and the rear-rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) to execute operation schedule Y2.

Then, at time t2, before the arrival of time tx, if a game ball enters the general winning slot 2001 while the special symbol is being displayed, causing a transition to a stop state, the stop state flag is turned ON, and the display of the special symbol being displayed based on change pattern 2 is forcibly stopped. However, at time t2, the peripheral control board 1510 does not forcibly stop the variable effect being executed based on change pattern 2, but continues to execute it until the variable effect is completed. In other words, the effect display device 1600 does not change to an image corresponding to the stop state, but continues to display an image corresponding to the variable effect. Furthermore, the operation schedule X2 being executed for the rear-front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) and the operation schedule Y2 being executed for the rear-rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y) are not forcibly stopped, but continue to execute until these operation schedules are completed. Therefore, after transitioning to a stop state at timing t2, when timing tx arrives, a predetermined performance action is executed for the rear-front rising and falling decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X), and when timing ty arrives, a predetermined performance action is executed for the rear-rear rising and falling decorative body 3410 (movable body Y).

Then, at timing t2, after transitioning to the stalled state, when the variable performance currently being executed based on performance pattern 2 is completed, a forced stop is performed and no new variable performances are executed. At this time, the performance display device 1600 begins displaying an image corresponding to the stalled state. Also, when the operation schedule X2 currently being executed for the rear-front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) or the operation schedule Y2 currently being executed for the rear-rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y) is completed, a forced stop is performed and the movable bodies are placed in an operation-prohibited state so that they cannot operate.

In this way, if the timing tx for executing the performance action of the rear-front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) and the timing ty for executing the performance action of the rear-rear lifting decoration unit 3410 (movable body Y) are determined at the start of the variable display of the special pattern, even if the game transitions to a dead state at timing t2, which occurs before timing tx, the predetermined performance action is executed for the rear-front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) when timing tx arrives, and the predetermined performance action is executed for the rear-rear lifting decoration unit 3410 (movable body Y) when timing ty arrives. This means that for players who have been eagerly awaiting the performance action of the movable body after the start of the variable performance, even if the game transitions to a dead state during the execution of the variable performance, they can at least enjoy the performance action of the movable body to the end, preventing player disappointment.

The behavior when power is turned off at timing t3 and then turned back on at timing t4 while the power is in a stalled state is as described above.

In the above-described embodiment, after the transition to the stopped state at timing t2, when the operation schedule X2 currently being executed for the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) is completed, it is forcibly stopped and the movable body is placed in an operation-prohibited state so that it cannot operate.However, it is also possible to forcibly stop the operation schedule X2 and place the movable body in an operation-prohibited state so that it cannot operate when the execution of a predetermined performance operation for the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) is completed before the operation schedule X2 currently being executed for the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) is completed. Similarly, at timing t2, after transitioning to the stopped state, when the operation schedule Y2 currently being executed for the rear-rear rising and lowering decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) is completed, it is forcibly stopped and the movable body is placed in an operation-prohibited state so that it cannot operate. However, before the operation schedule Y2 currently being executed for the rear-rear rising and lowering decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) is completed, when the execution of a predetermined performance operation for the rear-rear rising and lowering decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) is completed, the operation schedule Y2 may be forcibly stopped and the movable body placed in an operation-prohibited state so that it cannot operate.

In addition, in the above-mentioned example, a transition to a stop state is made before the timing of the movable body's operation during the changing display of the special pattern, and the movable body is then operated. However, if an operable first performance button 251 is provided as a movable body separate from the back-front rising and falling decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the back-rear rising and falling decorative body 3410 (movable body Y), the following configuration may be adopted. That is, if a vibrator device (such as a vibration motor) provided inside or outside the first effect button 251 is enabled to vibrate the first effect button 251, the peripheral control board 1510, when determining the variation pattern (effect pattern) to be selected when the special symbol lottery result is a win and the variation pattern to be selected in some cases when the special symbol lottery result is a loss, executes an operation schedule corresponding to the first effect button 251 (movable body) according to the variation pattern set corresponding to the variation pattern, and vibrates the first effect button 251 (movable body) at a predetermined vibration timing during the variable display of the special symbol during a win and a part of a loss, giving the player a sense of anticipation of a win. With this configuration, if the game transitions to a stop state before the vibration timing of the first effect button 251 during the variable display of the special symbol, the effect pattern and operation schedule continue thereafter, and the first effect button 251 vibrates at a predetermined vibration timing. As a result, after the game has transitioned to the no-win state, an image corresponding to the no-win state is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the player can continue to enjoy the operation of the vibrator device (vibration motor, etc.) until the very end, preventing disappointment for the player.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, a transition to the stop state occurs before the operation timing of the movable body during the variable display of the special symbol, and the movable body is then operated. However, even if a transition to the stop state occurs before the operation timing of the movable body during a jackpot game, etc., the movable body may be operated thereafter. Specifically, the operation schedule of the movable body is executed according to the presentation pattern during a jackpot game, and the movable body is operated at a predetermined operation timing during the jackpot game. With this configuration, if a transition to the stop state occurs before the operation timing of the movable body during a jackpot game, the presentation pattern and operation schedule are continued thereafter, and the movable body is operated at a predetermined operation timing. As a result, after a transition to the stop state, while an image corresponding to the stop state is displayed on the presentation display device 1600, the player can enjoy the operation of the movable body to the end, reducing disappointment for the player.

Next, we have explained above the case where a moving body transitions to a stop state during its operation while a special symbol is being displayed in a changing state, and the moving body is not subsequently operated. Here, we will explain the relationship between the display screen of the effect display device 1600 and the operation of the moving body in such a case. Figure 238 is a specific example of an effect where a moving body transitions to a stop state during its operation while a special symbol is being displayed in a changing state, and the moving body is not subsequently operated.

As shown in Figure 238 (A), when a special symbol variable display is executed, a variable display is executed based on the display pattern, and a decorative symbol variable display is displayed in the central area of the display device 1600. Furthermore, a second decorative symbol variable display is displayed in the upper right area of the display device 1600. Furthermore, a hold display is displayed in the lower left area of the display device 1600 for the period when a game ball has entered the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004 but the special symbol variable display is on hold, but it is possible to change the appearance of hold displays that have a high probability of winning. In this case, the game is in a "consecutive win mode," in which a high probability state continues depending on the results of a special symbol lottery or the receipt of game ball B into V winning slot 2007. The lower right area of effect display device 1600 displays a "consecutive win mode" message indicating that the game is in "consecutive win mode." The display also displays a "right hit" arrow instructing the player to aim for the game ball to enter second starting slot 2004, located in game area 5a to the right of effect display device 1600, during "consecutive win mode." While the decorative symbol variations are being displayed, the volume and light intensity can be adjusted by operating setting adjustment button 204. While the volume and light intensity are being adjusted, an image corresponding to the volume or light intensity being adjusted can be displayed in the left area of effect display device 1600. The image corresponding to the volume or light intensity being adjusted is displayed by operating setting adjustment button 204 and disappears after a certain period of time has elapsed.

In addition, while the decorative symbol variation display is in "Continuous Play Mode," a pre-notification display stating "+10 shots remaining until play limit" is displayed. The effect display device 1600 displays the decorative symbol variation display in the central area, the second decorative symbol variation display in the upper right area, the "Continuous Play Mode" message and "Hit Right" arrow in the lower right area, and a hold display in the lower left area. While the pre-notification display "+10 shots remaining until play limit" is displayed so that it overlaps the background image, it is displayed so that it does not overlap important information displays related to the variable play currently being performed. Specifically, in this example, the "decorative symbol variation display," "second decorative symbol variation display," "'Continuous Play Mode' message," "'Hit Right' arrow," "Hold display," and "Images corresponding to volume and light intensity" are important information displays that should be recognized by the player, and therefore the pre-notification display is displayed in a position that does not overlap these information displays. Furthermore, as long as the information displays do not overlap completely and become invisible to the player, but are still recognizable, the advance notice display may overlap at least a portion of the information display. This allows players to play smoothly during variable play without missing the information display regarding the variable play currently in progress.

As shown in Figure 238 (B), when a predetermined performance action is performed on the rear-front rising and falling decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) while the special pattern is being displayed, the movable body moves from the standby position to the performance position and is positioned in front of the display screen of the performance display device 1600. Furthermore, the performance display device 1600 is configured to display effects in an area that does not overlap with the rear-front rising and falling decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X), effectively highlighting that the movable body is performing a performance action. Furthermore, advance notice displays such as "+10 balls remaining until play limit" and the display of the second decorative pattern change are displayed in an area that does not overlap with the rear-front rising and falling decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X), making it easy to see whether the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value and transitions to a limit state while the performance action is being performed on that movable body. Furthermore, the advance notice display may be overlapped by the rear-front rising decorative unit 3310 (movable body X) at least in part, as long as the contents of the advance notice display can be recognized and not so completely overlapped that it becomes invisible to the player.

As shown in Figure 238 (C), during the execution of the presentation operation for the rear-front lift-up decorative unit 3310 (movable body X), when the number of balls remaining to reach a specific value reaches "+0" due to the payout of prize balls based on game balls entering the general winning slot 2001, the game transitions to a stop state, and in the upper area of the presentation display device 1600, a pre-notification display "+0 balls remaining until game limit" is displayed for a predetermined period of time (5 seconds in this example) as a pre-notification operation, indicating the number of balls remaining to reach a specific value. Here, just before the number of balls remaining to reach a specific value reaches "+0," the decorative pattern change display and the second decorative pattern change display are displayed. However, when the number of balls remaining to reach a specific value reaches "+0," the decorative pattern change display is forcibly stopped at a predetermined stopping pattern (in this example, "767"), and the second decorative pattern change display is forcibly stopped at a predetermined stopping pattern (in this example, "X"). However, the display of the changing decorative patterns and the changing second decorative patterns may not be forcibly stopped.

After the game has entered the limit state, it is preferable to make the "hit right" arrow that encourages the player to fire the game ball invisible to the player, so that the player does not accidentally fire the game ball; in this example, it is erased. Then, once a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example) has passed since the advance notice display "0 shots remaining until game limit" was displayed, an image corresponding to the limit state shown in Figure 238 (D) is displayed.

As shown in Figure 238 (D), when the game enters the limit state, the performance action being executed on the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) does not end midway through the predetermined performance action, but continues to execute until the predetermined performance action is completed. However, when the game enters the limit state, the light emitters provided on the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) are controlled to end midway through the light emission corresponding to the variable performance and either turn off or emit light corresponding to the limit state. As a result, when the game enters the limit state, the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) is positioned in front of the display screen of the performance display device 1600, so only a portion of the image corresponding to the limit state can be seen, but the change in the light emission of the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) prevents the player from noticing that a game restriction is being implemented. In this example, when the game transitions to the dead-end state, the light emitters attached to the rear-front rising decorative unit 3310 (movable body X) stop emitting light corresponding to the variable effects midway through, but it is also possible to continue emitting light corresponding to the variable effects until the predetermined performance operation is completed. In such a case, it is not necessary to change the light emission pattern when the game transitions to the dead-end state, making it possible to avoid complicating the game design.

As shown in Figure 238 (E), when the predetermined performance operation is completed, the movable body returns to its standby position and is no longer positioned in front of the display screen of the performance display device 1600, allowing the entire image corresponding to the game-stop state to be viewed. Here, the image corresponding to the game-stop state displays the message "Play Restriction," along with messages such as "Play has been restricted due to the daily ball-dispensing limit of 80,000 balls being reached," "Please call an attendant," and "The Settlement Button is Valid." The settlement button here refers to the counting button switch used to execute the settlement process. Furthermore, when the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, the performance display device 1600 displays the stopping symbol of the decorative symbol, the stopping symbol of the second decorative symbol, a hold indicator, and a pre-notification indicator. However, such game-related information is hidden (made invisible) when the message "Play Restriction" is displayed after the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, and the message is displayed on a darkened screen. This allows players to know that the number of balls dispensed has reached a certain value and that restrictions on play have been implemented, and that restrictions on play cannot be lifted without the hall manager's action. Players can also know that the number of balls a player has can be settled by operating the counting button switch.

Furthermore, after the transition to the play limit state, while the performance operation is being performed on the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X), the message "Play Limit" is displayed in an area that does not overlap with the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X), so that the player can at least recognize that the play limit state has been reached while the performance operation is being performed on that movable body. Note that the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) may overlap at least a portion of the message "Play Limit", as long as the message is not completely overlapped and becomes invisible to the player, but is sufficient to allow the player to recognize that the play limit state has been reached.

In addition, in the above example, when a performance operation is being performed on the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) before the transition to the dead-end state, effects are displayed in the area of the performance display device 1600 that does not overlap with the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X). However, when a performance operation is being performed on the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) after the transition to the dead-end state, effects are not displayed in the area of the performance display device 1600 that does not overlap with the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X). As a result, even if the image corresponding to the dead-end state cannot be seen when a performance operation is being performed on the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X), it is possible to determine whether the performance operation is before the transition to the dead-end state or after the transition to the dead-end state by whether or not an effect is displayed.

In addition, as described above, while the decorative pattern is being displayed in a variable manner, the volume and light intensity can be adjusted by operating the setting adjustment button 204. However, even after the transition to a stop state during the display of a special pattern's variable manner, the volume and light intensity can be adjusted by operating the setting adjustment button 204, and while the volume and light intensity are being adjusted, the performance display device 1600 can display an image corresponding to the volume or light intensity being adjusted. However, after the transition to the stop state, while the volume and light intensity can be adjusted by operating the setting adjustment button 204, the image corresponding to the volume or light intensity being adjusted may not be displayed. This makes it possible to prevent the image corresponding to the stop state from becoming difficult to see after the transition to the stop state. Furthermore, after the transition to the stop state, the volume and light intensity may not be adjusted by operating the setting adjustment button 204, and the image corresponding to the volume and light intensity may not be displayed. This makes it possible to prevent the volume and light intensity from changing after the transition to the stop state, making it possible to prevent the image corresponding to the stop state from becoming difficult to see and the sound corresponding to the stop state from becoming difficult to recognize.

In addition, even if it has been decided to perform a performance action on the rear-rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y) before transitioning to the limit state, if the performance action has not been started on the rear-rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y) at the time of transition to the limit state, the performance action that has been predetermined for the rear-rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y) will not be performed after transitioning to the limit state. This prevents the display content (image corresponding to the limit state) displayed on the performance display device 1600 from being obscured by the performance action of the rear-rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y), preventing players from noticing that a game restriction has been implemented.

Next, we have explained above the case where a stop state is reached before the timing of the movable body's operation during the variable display of a special symbol, and the movable body is then operated. Here, we will explain the relationship between the display screen of the effect display device 1600 and the operation of the movable body in such a case. Figure 239 is a specific example of an effect where a stop state is reached before the timing of the movable body's operation during the variable display of a special symbol, and the movable body is then operated.

As shown in Figure 239 (A), when a special symbol variable display is executed, a variable display is executed based on the display pattern, and a decorative symbol variable display is displayed in the central area of the display device 1600. Furthermore, a second decorative symbol variable display is displayed in the upper right area of the display device 1600. Furthermore, a hold display is displayed in the lower left area of the display device 1600 for the period when a game ball has entered the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004 but the special symbol variable display is on hold, but it is possible to change the appearance of hold displays that have a high probability of winning. In this case, the game is in a "consecutive win mode," in which a high probability state continues depending on the results of a special symbol lottery or the receipt of game ball B into V winning slot 2007. The lower right area of effect display device 1600 displays a "consecutive win mode" message indicating that the game is in "consecutive win mode." The display also displays a "right hit" arrow instructing the player to aim for the game ball to enter second starting slot 2004, located in game area 5a to the right of effect display device 1600, during "consecutive win mode." While the decorative symbol variations are being displayed, the volume and light intensity can be adjusted by operating setting adjustment button 204. While the volume and light intensity are being adjusted, an image corresponding to the volume or light intensity being adjusted can be displayed in the left area of effect display device 1600. The image corresponding to the volume or light intensity being adjusted is displayed by operating setting adjustment button 204 and disappears after a certain period of time has elapsed.

In addition, while the decorative symbol variation display is in "Continuous Play Mode," a pre-notification display stating "+10 shots remaining until play limit" is displayed. The effect display device 1600 displays the decorative symbol variation display in the central area, the second decorative symbol variation display in the upper right area, the "Continuous Play Mode" message and "Hit Right" arrow in the lower right area, and a hold display in the lower left area. While the pre-notification display "+10 shots remaining until play limit" is displayed so that it overlaps the background image, it is displayed so that it does not overlap important information displays related to the variable play currently being performed. Specifically, in this example, the "decorative symbol variation display," "second decorative symbol variation display," "'Continuous Play Mode' message," "'Hit Right' arrow," "Hold display," and "Images corresponding to volume and light intensity" are important information displays that should be recognized by the player, and therefore the pre-notification display is displayed in a position that does not overlap these information displays. Furthermore, as long as the information displays do not overlap completely and become invisible to the player, but are still recognizable, the advance notice display may overlap at least a portion of the information display. This allows players to play smoothly during variable play without missing the information display regarding the variable play currently in progress.

As shown in Figure 239 (B), during the display of the special symbol variation, when the number of balls remaining to reach a specific value reaches "+0" due to the payout of prize balls based on game balls entering the general winning slot 2001, the game transitions to a stop state, and the upper area of the display device 1600 displays a pre-notification message saying "+0 balls remaining until game limit," indicating the number of balls remaining to reach a specific value. Here, just before the number of balls remaining to reach a specific value reaches "+0," the display of the decorative symbol variation and the display of the second decorative symbol variation are displayed. However, when the number of balls remaining to reach a specific value reaches "+0," the display of the second decorative symbol variation is forcibly stopped at a predetermined stopping symbol (in this example, "X"). Meanwhile, when the number of balls remaining to reach a specific value reaches "+0," the variation display based on the presentation pattern continues, and the display of the decorative symbol variation continues without being forcibly stopped. However, the variable display of the second decorative pattern may also continue without being forcibly stopped. In such cases, the variable display of the second decorative pattern will stop when the variable display of the decorative pattern stops.

In addition, after the game has transitioned to the shot stop state, it is preferable to make the "hit right" arrow, which encourages the player to shoot the game ball, invisible to the player, so that the player does not accidentally shoot the game ball; in this example, it is erased.

As shown in Figure 239 (C), after the game has entered the max-out state, when a predetermined performance action is performed on the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X), the movable body moves from the standby position to the performance position and is positioned in front of the display screen of the performance display device 1600. Furthermore, the performance display device 1600 is configured to display effects in an area that does not overlap with the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X), effectively highlighting that the movable body is performing a performance action. Furthermore, the advance notice display of "+0 shots remaining until play limit" and the display of the changing second decorative pattern are displayed in an area that does not overlap with the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X), allowing the player to know that the game has already entered the max-out state. Note that the advance notice display may be overlapped by the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) at least in part, as long as the content of the advance notice display can be recognized and not so completely overlapped that it becomes invisible to the player.

As shown in Figure 239 (D), when a predetermined performance action is performed on the rear-rear rising and lowering decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) following the rear-rear rising and lowering decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X), the movable body moves from the standby position to the performance position and is positioned in front of the display screen of the performance display device 1600. Furthermore, the performance display device 1600 is configured to display effects in an area that does not overlap with the rear-rear rising and lowering decorative body 3410 (movable body Y), effectively highlighting that the movable body is performing a performance action. Furthermore, advance notice displays such as "+0 shots remaining until play limit" and the display of the changing second decorative pattern are displayed in an area that does not overlap with the rear-rear rising and lowering decorative body 3410 (movable body Y), allowing the player to understand that the game has already reached the limit. Furthermore, the advance notice display may be overlapped by the rear rising and falling decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) at least in part, as long as the contents of the advance notice display can be recognized and not so completely overlapped that it becomes invisible to the player.

As shown in Figure 239 (E), when the execution of the variable effect based on the effect pattern is completed, the variable display of the decorative pattern stops at a predetermined stopping pattern (in this example, "767"). Then, when a predetermined time (in this example, 5 seconds) has passed since the variable display of the decorative pattern stopped, an image corresponding to the play-stop state shown in Figure 239 (F) is displayed. The image corresponding to the play-stop state is as described above. In this example, when the play-stop state is entered, the variable effect based on the effect pattern continues, and the image corresponding to the play-stop state is not immediately displayed. However, during this period, a prior notice display such as "0 shots remaining until play limit" and a variable display of the second decorative pattern that has been forcibly stopped are displayed, so it is possible to understand that the play-stop state has already been entered.

As described above, in this example, when the game enters the limit state, the variable effect based on the effect pattern continues, and the effect display device 1600 does not display an image corresponding to the limit state. Instead, it notifies the player that a game limit has been imposed by displaying a preliminary notice such as "0 shots remaining until game limit" or by displaying a variable second decorative symbol that has been forcibly stopped. In this case, since it is possible that the fact that a game limit has been imposed may be obscured by the effect action of movable bodies X and Y, it is also possible to provide a preliminary notification that a game limit has been imposed using effect elements such as "sound" or "light" that are not obstructed by the effect action of movable bodies X and Y. Specifically, when the game enters the limit state, the control may be changed to output a warning sound different from the sound corresponding to the variable effect, thereby providing a "sound" warning, or the control may be changed to emit a warning light different from the light corresponding to the variable effect, thereby providing a "light" warning. This prevents the player from noticing that a game limit has been imposed, even if a predetermined effect action is executed for movable bodies X and Y after the game enters the limit state.

Next, in the above, when the game transitions to the stop state, the variable presentation based on the presentation pattern continues, and when the execution of the variable presentation based on the presentation pattern is completed, an image corresponding to the stop state is displayed. However, as another example, when the game transitions to the stop state, the variable presentation based on the presentation pattern may continue, but an image corresponding to the stop state may be displayed in a higher layer than the image corresponding to the variable presentation. Figure 240 is another example of a specific presentation when the game transitions to the stop state before the timing of the movable body's movement during the variable display of the special pattern, and the movable body is then operated.

As shown in Figure 240 (A), when a variable display of a special symbol is executed, a variable display is executed based on the display pattern, and a variable display of a decorative symbol is displayed in the central area of the display device 1600. Furthermore, a variable display of a second decorative symbol is displayed in the upper right area of the display device 1600. Furthermore, in the lower left area of the display device 1600, a pending display is displayed for the period when a game ball has entered the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004 but the variable display of a special symbol is pending, but it is possible to change the appearance of a pending display that has a high probability of winning. In this case, the game is in a "consecutive win mode," in which a high probability state continues depending on the results of a special symbol lottery or the receipt of game ball B into V winning slot 2007. The lower right area of effect display device 1600 displays a "consecutive win mode" message indicating that the game is in "consecutive win mode." The display also displays a "right hit" arrow instructing the player to aim for the game ball to enter second starting slot 2004, located in game area 5a to the right of effect display device 1600, during "consecutive win mode." While the decorative symbol variations are being displayed, the volume and light intensity can be adjusted by operating setting adjustment button 204. While the volume and light intensity are being adjusted, an image corresponding to the volume or light intensity being adjusted can be displayed in the left area of effect display device 1600. The image corresponding to the volume or light intensity being adjusted is displayed by operating setting adjustment button 204 and disappears after a certain period of time has elapsed.

In addition, while the decorative symbol variation display is in "Continuous Play Mode," a pre-notification display stating "+10 shots remaining until play limit" is displayed. The effect display device 1600 displays the decorative symbol variation display in the central area, the second decorative symbol variation display in the upper right area, the "Continuous Play Mode" message and "Hit Right" arrow in the lower right area, and a hold display in the lower left area. While the pre-notification display "+10 shots remaining until play limit" is displayed so that it overlaps the background image, it is displayed so that it does not overlap important information displays related to the variable play currently being performed. Specifically, in this example, the "decorative symbol variation display," "second decorative symbol variation display," "'Continuous Play Mode' message," "'Hit Right' arrow," "Hold display," and "Images corresponding to volume and light intensity" are important information displays that should be recognized by the player, and therefore the pre-notification display is displayed in a position that does not overlap these information displays. Furthermore, as long as the information displays do not overlap completely and become invisible to the player, but are still recognizable, the advance notice display may overlap at least a portion of the information display. This allows players to play smoothly during variable play without missing the information display regarding the variable play currently in progress.

As shown in Figure 240 (B), during the display of the special symbol variation, when the number of balls remaining to reach a specific value reaches "+0" due to the payout of prize balls based on game balls entering the general winning slot 2001, the game transitions to a stop state, and the upper area of the display device 1600 displays a pre-notification message indicating the number of balls remaining until the game limit is reached, indicating the number of balls remaining until the game limit is reached. Here, just before the number of balls remaining until the game limit is reached reaches "+0," the display of the decorative symbol variation and the second decorative symbol variation are displayed. However, when the number of balls remaining until the game limit is reached reaches "+0," the display of the second decorative symbol variation is forcibly stopped at a predetermined stopping symbol (in this example, "X"). Meanwhile, when the number of balls remaining until the game limit is reached reaches "+0," the variation display based on the presentation pattern continues, and the display of the decorative symbol variation continues without being forcibly stopped. However, the variable display of the second decorative pattern may also continue without being forcibly stopped. In such cases, the variable display of the second decorative pattern will stop when the variable display of the decorative pattern stops.

Furthermore, after the transition to the dead state has occurred, it is preferable to make the "hit right" arrow that encourages the player to fire the game ball invisible to the player, so that the player does not accidentally fire the game ball; in this example, it is erased. Then, when a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example) has passed since the advance notice display "+0 shots remaining until game limit" was displayed, an image corresponding to the dead state shown in Figure 240 (C) is displayed in a layer above the image corresponding to the variable presentation. The image corresponding to the dead state is as described above.

As shown in Figure 240 (D), after the game has entered the limit state, when a predetermined performance action is performed on the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X), the movable body moves from the standby position to the performance position and is positioned in front of the display screen of the performance display device 1600. Furthermore, while the performance action is being performed on the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X), the message "Play Limit" is displayed in an area that does not overlap with the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X), so that the player can at least recognize that the game has entered the limit state while the performance action is being performed on that movable body. Note that the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) may overlap at least a portion of the message "Play Limit", as long as the message is not completely overlapped and becomes invisible to the player, but is sufficient to recognize that the game has entered the limit state.

As shown in Figure 240 (E), when a predetermined performance action is performed on the rear-rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y) following the rear-front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X), the movable body moves from the standby position to the performance position and is positioned in front of the display screen of the performance display device 1600. Furthermore, while the performance action is being performed on the rear-rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y), the message "Play Limit" is displayed in an area that does not overlap with the rear-rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y), so that the player can at least recognize that the game has reached a limit while the performance action is being performed on that movable body. Note that the rear-rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y) may overlap at least a portion of the message "Play Limit", as long as the message is not completely overlapped and becomes invisible to the player, but is sufficient to recognize that the game has reached a limit.

Furthermore, after the transition to the limit state, the light emitters provided on the rear front lift-up decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear rear lift-up decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) are controlled to either end the light emission corresponding to the variable performance midway and turn off, or to emit light corresponding to the limit state. As a result, after the transition to the limit state, when the rear front lift-up decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) or the rear rear lift-up decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) is positioned in front of the display screen of the performance display device 1600, only a portion of the image corresponding to the limit state can be seen, but the change in the light emission of the rear front lift-up decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear rear lift-up decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) prevents the player from failing to understand that a game restriction is being implemented. In this example, after the transition to the dead-end state, the light emitters provided on the rear-front rising/falling decorative unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear-back rising/falling decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) stop emitting light corresponding to the variable effects midway through, but it is also possible to continue emitting light corresponding to the variable effects until the predetermined performance operation is completed. In such a case, it is no longer necessary to change the light emission pattern when the transition to the dead-end state, making it possible to avoid complicating the game design.

In addition, in this example, when the game enters the limit state, the variable effect based on the effect pattern continues, but the effect display device 1600 displays an image corresponding to the limit state in a layer higher than the image corresponding to the variable effect, notifying the player that a game restriction has been imposed. In this case, since it may be possible to make it impossible to grasp that a game restriction has been imposed due to the effect action of movable bodies X and Y, it is also possible to provide a preliminary notification that a game restriction has been imposed using effect elements such as "sound" or "light" that are not obstructed by the effect action of movable bodies X and Y. Specifically, when the game enters the limit state, the control may be changed to output a warning sound different from the sound corresponding to the variable effect, thereby providing a "sound" warning, or the control may be changed to emit a warning light different from the light corresponding to the variable effect, thereby providing a "light" warning. This makes it possible to avoid the player being unable to grasp that a game restriction has been imposed, even if a predetermined effect action is executed for movable bodies X and Y after the game enters the limit state.

As shown in Figure 240 (F), when the execution of the variable effect based on the effect pattern is completed, the variable display of the decorative pattern stops at a specified stopping pattern (in this example, "767"). However, because an image corresponding to the stop state is displayed in a layer above the image corresponding to the variable effect, the player does not realize that the variable display of the decorative pattern has stopped.

In addition, when a performance operation is being performed on the back-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) or the back-rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) before transitioning to the dead-end state, effects are displayed in areas of the performance display device 1600 that do not overlap with the back-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) or the back-rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y).However, when a performance operation is being performed on the back-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) or the back-rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) after transitioning to the dead-end state, effects are not displayed in areas of the performance display device 1600 that do not overlap with the back-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) or the back-rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y). As a result, even if the image corresponding to the deadlock state cannot be seen when a performance action is being performed on the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) or the rear-back lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y), it is possible to determine whether the performance action is before the transition to the deadlock state or after the transition to the deadlock state by whether or not the effect is displayed.

(Celebration actions using a moving object after transitioning to the dead end state)
The above describes a configuration in which, at the time of transition to the stop state, the operation schedule X2 being executed for the rear-front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) and the operation schedule Y2 being executed for the rear-rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y) are forcibly stopped, and after transition to the stop state, the rear-front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear-rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y) do not perform their performance operations. In this configuration, the rear-front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear-rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y) do not perform their performance operations, making it easier to see the display content (image corresponding to the stop state) displayed on the performance display device 1600. However, even though the amount of balls dispensed has reached a specific value, no special performance operation is performed, which does not create any motivation to aim for the amount of balls dispensed to reach a specific value in future games. Therefore, in this example, after the transition to the dead-end state, a predetermined celebratory action is executed as a special notification to the player who has reached the dead-end state, and the back-front rising and falling decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the back-rear rising and falling decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) are configured to operate in a different presentation pattern than when the special pattern is being displayed in a variable manner, as described below.

In this example, immediately before the transition to the dead-end state, regardless of whether the back-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) or the back-rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) is performing a performance action, the performance action of the back-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) or the back-rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) is forcibly stopped at the time of transition to the dead-end state. Then, after the transition to the dead-end state, both the movable back-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the back-rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) are used to perform a celebratory action to celebrate the transition to the dead-end state. Note that the movable bodies used for the celebratory action may be some of the movable bodies (movable decorative bodies mainly used for decoration) provided on the game board 5, or all of the movable bodies (movable decorative bodies mainly used for decoration). If all movable bodies provided on the game board 5 were to be applied, even if the player was unable to recognize the operation mode of a movable body before the game reached its end state, it would be possible for the player to recognize that operation mode, preventing the game from reaching its end state with an unexperienced movable effect and preventing a decline in interest in the game.

First, we will explain the case where the moving body transitions to a stop state while it is not moving (located in its initial position) during the variable display of special symbols, and then executes a celebratory action for the moving body. Figure 241 is a time chart showing the case where the moving body transitions to a stop state while it is not moving during the variable display of special symbols, and then executes a celebratory action for the moving body. Note that in this example, we will explain the case where the moving body is not moving during the variable display of special symbols, but it is sufficient that the moving body is not moving at the time (immediately before) the transition to the stop state; even if the moving body is not moving during the non-variable display of special symbols, it will be controlled to exhibit the same behavior after transitioning to the stop state.

As shown in Figure 241, if variation pattern 2 is determined at timing t1 when the variable display of the special symbol begins, the variable display of the special symbol is executed based on that variation pattern 2. Also, at timing t1, the peripheral control board 1510 determines presentation pattern 2 corresponding to variation pattern 2, and executes the variable display based on presentation pattern 2 while the variable display of the special symbol is in progress. Also, if presentation pattern 2 is determined at timing t1, it instructs the back-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) to execute operation schedule X2, and the back-rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) to execute operation schedule Y2.

Then, at timing t2 when the rear front lift-up decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) or the rear rear lift-up decoration 3410 (movable body Y) is not operating, if a game ball enters the general winning slot 2001 during the variable display of a special symbol, a prize ball is awarded, and the game transitions to a dead state, the dead state flag is turned ON, and the variable display of the special symbol being executed based on variable pattern 2 is forcibly stopped. Also, at timing t2, in response to the dead state flag being turned ON, the peripheral control board 1510 turns ON a predetermined effect prohibition flag, and forcibly stops the variable effect being executed based on variable effect pattern 2. Specifically, when the effect prohibition flag is turned ON, the effect display device 1600 forcibly changes the image corresponding to the variable effect to an image corresponding to the dead state. In addition, when the performance prohibition flag is turned ON at timing t2, the operation schedule X2 currently being executed for the rear-front rising and falling decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the operation schedule Y2 currently being executed for the rear-rear rising and falling decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) are forcibly stopped, and after the state has been stopped, performance operations based on the operation schedule X2 and operation schedule Y2 are not executed.

Furthermore, at timing t2 when the game enters the limit state, the operation schedule X2 being executed for the rear-front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) and the operation schedule Y2 being executed for the rear-rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y) are forcibly stopped, and then both the rear-front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear-rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y) are used to begin executing a celebratory operation, which is a special notification to the player who has reached the limit state. In other words, when the game enters the limit state at timing t2 when the performance operation for the rear-front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear-rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y) is prohibited, a special operation schedule X3 is executed for the rear-front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X), and a special operation schedule Y3 is instructed to be executed for the rear-rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y). These special operation schedules X3 and Y3 are not set at the start of the variable display of special symbols before the transition to the stop state, and are not executed while the variable display of special symbols is in progress.

Specifically, when operation schedule X3 is executed for the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X), an initial position check is performed to check whether the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) is in the initial position (standby position), and if the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) is in the initial position, at timing tA, the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) executes the first celebration action (first half of the celebration action) between the initial position (standby position) and the performance position located in front of the display screen of the performance display device 1600. Similarly, when operation schedule Y3 is executed for the rear-rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y), an initial position check is performed to confirm whether the rear-rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y) is in the initial position (standby position), and if the rear-rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y) is in the initial position, at timing tB after the first celebration action for the front-rear lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) is completed, the rear-rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y) will perform a second celebration action (the second half of the celebration action) between the initial position (standby position) and the performance position located in front of the display screen of the performance display device 1600.

In this way, after the game has reached a limit, a celebratory action can be performed on the rear-front lift-up decorative unit 3310 (movable body X) or the rear-rear lift-up decorative unit 3410 (movable body Y), providing a sense of satisfaction for reaching a specific value for the number of balls dispensed, and encouraging players to aim for the number of balls dispensed to reach that value in future games. Furthermore, by continuously performing a second celebratory action on the rear-rear lift-up decorative unit 3410 (movable body Y) after completing a first celebratory action on the rear-front lift-up decorative unit 3310 (movable body X), the player can enjoy the action over a long period of time, and even if the player did not recognize the operation mode of a movable body before the game reached a limit, the player can recognize that operation mode. This prevents the game from reaching a limit with an unexperienced moving effect, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game. Furthermore, after transitioning to the play limit state, actions corresponding to the play limit state are executed, with the exception of celebratory actions for the back-front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) and the back-rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y). For example, the performance display device 1600 displays the message "Play limit" as an image corresponding to the play limit state, so even if a celebratory action is executed for the back-front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) and the back-rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y), it is possible to prevent the player from failing to understand that a play limit has been imposed.

In addition, in this example, the operation time of the first celebration action for the rear-front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) and the second celebration action time for the rear-rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y) are each set to 5 seconds (the shortest time excluding the time for initial position confirmation), ensuring a minimum of 10 seconds for the series of celebration actions by the rear-front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear-rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y). This ensures a predetermined period (10 seconds in this example) for the player to focus on the game board 5 after the transition to the no-play state, avoiding the player becoming bored during the settlement processing period associated with the settlement operation for the balls held immediately after the no-play state, and allowing the player to stay in the location in an optimal manner. In this example, we have described a gaming machine that circulates game balls without paying out actual prize balls (so-called sealed game machines, managed game machines). However, the above-mentioned "technology for generating a game limit state based on the payout amount (payout amount A, B)" is not limited to this type of gaming machine and may be applied to conventional gaming machines (game machines that pay out actual prize balls). That is, conventional gaming machines generally have a payout control board instead of the payout control board 633, and the payout control board is capable of controlling a payout device that pays out game balls stored in a ball tank on the back side of the machine as prize balls. The prize balls paid out to the ball tray on the front side of the machine are awarded to the player as actual balls. However, in this configuration, there is a longer time lag between the time when a game ball enters one of the various prize slots and the time when the prize ball is paid out than in a gaming machine that circulates game balls. In particular, it is conceivable that a situation may arise in which multiple game balls enter the large prize slot 2005 during a jackpot game, resulting in many prize balls being stored as unpaid. In such a case, there is a possibility that many prize balls will be unpaid at the start of the aforementioned dead-end state, and that many of the unpaid prize balls will be paid out after the dead-end state begins. In this regard, in this example, after the transition to the dead-end state, a predetermined period (10 seconds in this example) is ensured for the player to focus on the game board 5, preventing the player from becoming bored during the period when unpaid prize balls are paid out immediately after the dead-end state, and allowing the player to stay in the area in an optimal manner.

The initial position confirmation is performed before the first celebratory action for the back-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X), and the initial position confirmation for the back-rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) is performed after the initial position confirmation for the back-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) is completed. The initial position confirmation for the back-rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) may be performed a second time after the first celebratory action for the back-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) is completed, but before the second celebratory action for the back-rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y). The initial position confirmation for the back-rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) may not be performed before the first celebratory action for the back-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X), but may be performed only after the first celebratory action for the back-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) is completed.

In addition, the initial position confirmation checks whether each movable body is in its initial position (standby position). If the movable body is not in its initial position, a return process (multiple retry operations) is performed to return the movable body to its initial position. This return process (multiple retry operations) is performed multiple times until the movable body returns to its initial position, and once the movable body returns to its initial position, a celebratory action is then performed on the movable body. On the other hand, if the movable body does not return to its initial position despite performing the return process (multiple retry operations) multiple times, no subsequent celebratory action is performed on the movable body. Also, for example, if the back-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) does not return to its initial position, not only is the first celebratory action performed on the back-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) but the second celebratory action on the back-rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) is also not performed. This prevents the celebratory action from being performed incompletely after transitioning to the stop state.

Furthermore, after transitioning to the dead-end state, a celebratory action is performed on the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear-rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y), but the LEDs mounted on the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear-rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) perform an action corresponding to the dead-end state, rather than an action corresponding to the celebratory action. For example, the LEDs mounted on the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear-rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) may be made to light up in coordination with other LEDs provided on the game board 5, or may be made to turn off, as an action corresponding to the dead-end state. On the other hand, when the movable body is operating during the variable display of the special pattern, the LEDs mounted on the rear front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y) emit light in coordination with the performance operation of the rear front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y), thereby announcing to the outside that the performance operation of the movable body is in progress. In this way, after the game enters the dead-end state, a celebratory operation is performed on the rear front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y), but because the LEDs do not emit light in coordination with the celebratory operation of these movable bodies, it is difficult to tell from a distance that a celebratory operation is in progress, and only the player can enjoy the celebratory operation.

In addition, the LEDs mounted on the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear-rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) are configured to perform an operation corresponding to the game's stopped state (turning on or off in coordination with other LEDs mounted on the game board 5) even during the operation to confirm the initial position. Furthermore, if the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) or the rear-rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) does not return to its initial position, the first or second celebratory action is not performed as described above, but the LEDs mounted on the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear-rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) continue to perform an action corresponding to the game's stopped state. This makes it difficult to tell from the outside that the celebratory action has not been performed, avoiding any annoyance to the player, even if a malfunction prevents the celebratory action from being performed.

In addition, with regard to the LEDs mounted on the rear front lift-up decorative unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear rear lift-up decorative unit 3410 (movable body Y), when they are emitting light in coordination with the performance operation of the rear front lift-up decorative unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear rear lift-up decorative unit 3410 (movable body Y) during the variable display of special patterns, the light intensity of the LEDs can be changed by operating the setting adjustment button 204. However, once the game has entered a stop state, operation of the setting adjustment button 204 cannot be accepted, and the light intensity of the LEDs operating in the stop state cannot be changed. This makes it possible to prevent malicious acts such as hitting the pachinko machine 1 under the guise of operating the setting adjustment button 204 while the game is in a stop state.

As another example, if a special movable body (e.g., a movable body for one-shot notification that protrudes only during a winning variation) is provided in the door frame 3, which is an area outside the game board 5 (game area 5a), and that can operate while the special symbol is being displayed when the lottery result for the special symbol is a winning symbol, after the game enters a dead-end state, a celebratory action is not performed on the special movable body provided in the door frame 3 (the special movable body is excluded from the celebratory action). In other words, after the game enters a dead-end state, a celebratory action is performed on the back-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the back-rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y), but a celebratory action is not performed on the special movable body provided in the door frame 3. On the other hand, when the movable body is operating during the display of the special symbol, a performance action can be performed not only on the back-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the back-rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y), but also on the special movable body provided in the door frame 3. In this way, after the game has entered the no-win state, celebratory actions are performed on the movable objects on the game board 5, but by not performing celebratory actions on the special movable objects on the door frame 3, which is located in an area outside the game board 5 (play area 5a), it is difficult to tell from a distance that a celebratory action is in progress, allowing only the player to enjoy the celebratory action and preventing the special movable object that notifies the player of a win from operating, which could cause the player to feel distrustful. Furthermore, if the special movable object on the door frame 3 is installed in a manner that allows it to be contacted from the outside, excluding the special movable object from the scope of the celebratory action as described above can avoid the special movable object from operating even in the no-win state, and the risk of the player coming into contact with the special movable object.

Furthermore, if a first effect button 251 operable by a player is provided as a movable body on the door frame 3, separate from the above-mentioned special movable body, the following configuration may be adopted. That is, if vibration of the first effect button 251 is enabled by a vibrator device (vibration motor, etc.) provided inside or outside the first effect button 251, when the peripheral control board 1510 determines the variation pattern (effect pattern) to be selected when the special symbol lottery result is a win and the variation pattern to be selected in some cases when the special symbol lottery result is a loss, it executes an operation schedule corresponding to the first effect button 251 (movable body) in accordance with the variation pattern set corresponding to the variation pattern, and vibrates the first effect button 251 (movable body) at a predetermined vibration timing during the display of the varying special symbol when a win or a part of a loss occurs, giving the player a sense of anticipation of a win. With this configuration, if the game enters a stop state while the first effect button 251 is not in operation during the variable display of special symbols, the effect pattern and operation schedule are forcibly stopped, and the first effect button 251 will no longer vibrate. Also, if the game enters a stop state while the first effect button 251 is vibrating during the variable display of special symbols, the vibration operation that was in progress is forcibly stopped, and the first effect button 251 will no longer vibrate. In this way, after the game enters a stop state, the first effect button 251 (movable body) is not vibrated (oscillated) as a celebratory action, so that the player can focus only on the celebratory action of the movable body provided on the gaming board 5.

In addition, in this example, after transitioning to the stopped state, even after the currently running operation schedule X3 or operation schedule Y3 has ended and the celebratory operation has been completed for the back-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the back-rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y), the above-mentioned operation prohibition flag remains ON, and the back-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the back-rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) continue to be in an operation-prohibited state. This makes it possible to prevent, for example, in cases where the specifications are such that the rear-front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear-rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y) are to be operated in a demonstration mode as part of a demonstration effect during a standby state in the game progress that is not a stop state, from the peripheral control board 1510 mistakenly performing control during a standby state during a stop state, and causing the rear-front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear-rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y) to perform a demonstration mode.

Furthermore, similar to the initial position confirmation operation described above, if the rear-front rising and falling decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) or the rear-rear rising and falling decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) becomes displaced for some reason during the changing or non-changing display of the special pattern and does not return to its initial position, a return process (multiple retry operations) is performed to return the rear-front rising and falling decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) or the rear-rear rising and falling decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) to its initial position based on the satisfaction of normal return conditions (winning at the start hole, the passage of a predetermined time since the special pattern stopped changing, etc.), but in this example, the return process (multiple retry operations) is not performed during the stalled state. In other words, if for some reason the rear-front ascent/descent decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) or the rear-rear ascent/descent decoration 3410 (movable body Y) becomes displaced during the stall state after the normal completion of the celebration operation and does not return to its initial position, even if an event that satisfies the above-mentioned return condition occurs thereafter (such as a win at the starting gate or the passage of a predetermined time since the special pattern stopped fluctuating), the rear-front ascent/descent decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) or the rear-rear ascent/descent decoration 3410 (movable body Y) will not be returned to its initial position (multiple retry operations), and these movable bodies will remain in their original positions. This makes it possible to avoid a situation in which the movable bodies continue to operate (restore) during the stall state, causing players to hesitate to leave their seats. However, after the celebratory action of the movable body is completed, when a predetermined time (e.g., several minutes) has passed during the stalled state, an initial position check can be performed to check again whether the movable body is in its initial position (standby position). If the movable body has not returned to its initial position during the period other than immediately after the celebratory action, the above-mentioned return process (multiple retry actions) can be performed to return the movable body to its initial position at a time during the stalled state when it is believed that the player has already left their seat. This prevents the movable body from continuing to move (restore) during the stalled state, discouraging the player from leaving their seat, and allows for smooth control when gameplay resumes after the stalled state is resolved.

Next, we will explain what happens when the power is shut off at timing t3 while a stalled state is occurring, and then turned back on at timing t4. Here, we will explain the case where, when the power is turned back on after being shut off, limited clear pattern table 4 is used as the limited clear pattern table, and power-on patterns 1 and 4 are selected as the power-on patterns, which clear the amount of balls dispensed but maintain the stalled state.

If power-on pattern 1 or 4 is selected when the power is turned back on at timing t4, the amount of balls dispensed is cleared but the stop state is maintained. Furthermore, while the stop state is maintained, the forced stop is maintained for the variable display of special symbols based on the variable pattern. Furthermore, while the stop state is maintained, the peripheral control board 1510 maintains the forced stop for variable presentations based on presentation patterns, and also maintains the forced stop for the operation schedules for the rear front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y). However, when the power is turned back on at timing t4, the rear front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) are instructed to execute operation schedule Z, which is not related to the variation of special symbols, so that these movable bodies perform their initial operations at least at timing t4 when the power is turned back on.

Furthermore, before the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear-rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) perform their initial operations, the above-mentioned initial position confirmation is first performed to confirm whether the movable bodies are in their initial positions (standby positions). Then, if the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear-rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) are in their initial positions, the initial operations are performed to determine whether each movable body moves normally from its standby position to its performance position and whether it returns normally to its standby position. Specifically, operation schedule Z is set so that the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) performs its initial operation when a predetermined period (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed since the power was turned back on, while the rear-rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) is set so that it performs its initial operation when a predetermined period (e.g., 10 seconds) has elapsed since the power was turned back on. The initial operation of the rear-rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) is performed after the initial operation of the front-rear lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) is completed.

In this way, even if the game-stop state is maintained when the power is turned back on and the forced stop of the rear-front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear-rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y) is maintained, the initial position confirmation and initial operation of these movable bodies are allowed to be performed. As a result, even if a malfunction occurs in which the rear-front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) or the rear-rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y) are not in the standby position before or after the game-stop state before the power is turned back on, the movable bodies can be returned to their standby positions by initial position confirmation, and then their operation can be confirmed. This prevents the display content (image corresponding to the game-stop state) displayed on the performance display device 1600 from remaining hidden due to a malfunction in which the movable bodies are not in the standby position, preventing players from noticing that game restrictions are being implemented.

On the other hand, if power-on patterns 2 and 3 are selected when the power is turned back on at timing t4, the ball output amount and the stop state are cleared. Even in such a case, when the power is turned back on, the rear-front lifting and descending decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear-rear lifting and descending decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) are instructed to execute operation schedule Z, and these movable bodies perform their initial operations. Then, after the initial operations of the rear-front lifting and descending decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear-rear lifting and descending decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) are completed, the forced stop is released for the variable display of special patterns based on the variable pattern and they are put on standby for execution. Furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510 releases the forced stop for the variable performance based on the performance pattern and they are put on standby for execution, and the forced stop is released for the operation schedules for the rear-front lifting and descending decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear-rear lifting and descending decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) and they are put on standby for operation.

In the above-described embodiment, if the stopped state is maintained when the power is turned back on and the forced stop of the back-front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) and the back-rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y) is maintained, the initial operation of those movable bodies is executed. However, if the movable body is in the standby position, the initial operation of the movable body may be restricted from being executed in order to emphasize the control load. Also, even if the movable body is not in the standby position, the initial operation of the movable body may be restricted from being executed for the following reason. In other words, if the initial operation of the movable body is not executed even though the movable body is not in the standby position, if a malfunction occurs in which the back-front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) or the back-rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y) is not in the standby position before the power is turned back on, the movable body can be maintained in a state where it is not in the standby position after the power is turned back on, and the hall manager can be made aware that a malfunction has occurred with those movable bodies. However, in this case, there is a concern that the display content (image corresponding to the stalled state) displayed on the performance display device 1600 may remain hidden due to a malfunction in which the movable body is not in the standby position. Therefore, it is desirable to display the image corresponding to the stalled state in a display area of the performance display device 1600 that is not obstructed by the movable body, or to use a device other than the performance display device 1600 to issue a notification corresponding to the stalled state.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, after the transition to the play-stop state, a celebratory action is performed on the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear-rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y). However, for these celebratory actions, the same action process (action schedule) as the action process (action schedule) for the initial action of the movable body may be executed. In this way, by sharing the action process (action schedule) for the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear-rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y), it is possible to avoid an increase in the memory capacity required for the performance action of the movable body. However, for the LEDs mounted on the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear-rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y), during the celebratory action of the movable body after the transition to the play-stop state, an action corresponding to the play-stop state (lighting up or down in coordination with other LEDs provided on the game board 5) is executed, whereas during the initial action of the movable body when the power is turned back on, an action corresponding to the initial action (e.g., lighting up in coordination with the initial action) is executed. This prevents the front rear lifting decorative unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) from being unable to determine whether the movable body is performing a celebratory operation after transitioning to a stopped state, or whether the movable body is performing its initial operation when the power is turned back on.

Next, we will explain the case where a transition to a stop state occurs during the operation of a moving body while a special symbol is being displayed in a changing state, and a celebratory action is then performed by the moving body. Figure 242 is a time chart showing the case where a transition to a stop state occurs during the operation of a moving body while a special symbol is being displayed in a changing state, and a celebratory action is then performed by the moving body. Note that in this example, we will explain the case where a moving body is in operation during the changing display of a special symbol, but it is sufficient that the moving body is in operation at the time (immediately before) the transition to the stop state. Even if the moving body is in operation while a special symbol is not being displayed in a changing state, for example, if the moving body is performing a demonstration action while a demonstration performance is being executed, the moving body will be controlled to exhibit the same behavior after the transition to the stop state.

As shown in Figure 242, if variation pattern 2 is determined at timing t1 when the variable display of the special pattern begins, the variable display of the special pattern is executed based on variation pattern 2. Also, at timing t1, the peripheral control board 1510 determines presentation pattern 2 corresponding to variation pattern 2, and executes the variable presentation based on presentation pattern 2 during the variable display of the special pattern. Also, if presentation pattern 2 is determined at timing t1, operation schedule X2 is executed for the back-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X), and operation schedule Y2 is instructed for the back-rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y). Then, during the variable display of the special pattern, when timing tx arrives, a predetermined presentation operation is executed for the back-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) based on the operation schedule X2 being executed for the back-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X).

Then, at timing t2 when the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) is operating, if a prize ball is awarded, such as when a game ball enters the general winning slot 2001, during the variable display of the special symbol, and the game transitions to a dead state, the dead state flag is turned ON, and the variable display of the special symbol being executed based on variable pattern 2 is forcibly stopped. Also, at timing t2, in response to the dead state flag being turned ON, the peripheral control board 1510 turns ON the aforementioned effect prohibition flag, forcibly stopping the variable effect being executed based on variable effect pattern 2. Specifically, when the effect prohibition flag is turned ON, the effect display device 1600 forcibly changes the image corresponding to the variable effect to an image corresponding to the dead state. Furthermore, when the performance prohibition flag is turned ON at timing t2, the operation schedule X2 currently being executed for the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the operation schedule Y2 currently being executed for the rear-rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) are forcibly stopped, and after the state transitions to a halt, performance operations based on the operation schedule X2 and operation schedule Y2 are not executed. At this time, since the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) is forcibly stopped mid-operation, it stops operating at a position (performance position) that is not its initial position.

Then, at timing t2 when the state transitions to the stopped state, the operation schedule X2 being executed for the rear-front ascent/descent decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the operation schedule Y2 being executed for the rear-rear ascent/descent decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) are forcibly stopped, and then the execution of celebratory operations begins using both the rear-front ascent/descent decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear-rear ascent/descent decorative body 3410 (movable body Y). In other words, when the state transitions to the stopped state at timing t2 by prohibiting the performance operations for the rear-front ascent/descent decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear-rear ascent/descent decorative body 3410 (movable body Y), a special operation schedule X3 is executed for the rear-front ascent/descent decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X), and a special operation schedule Y3 is instructed to be executed for the rear-rear ascent/descent decorative body 3410 (movable body Y). These special operation schedules X3 and Y3 are not set at the start of the variable display of special symbols before the transition to the stop state, and are not executed while the variable display of special symbols is in progress.

Specifically, when operation schedule X3 is executed for the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X), an initial position check is first performed to check whether the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) is in its initial position (standby position) prior to the first celebration operation for the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X).However, if the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) is forcibly stopped during operation at timing t2 when it transitions to the stopped state, it is determined that the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) is in a position other than the initial position (performance position), and a return process (multiple retry operations) is performed to return the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) to its initial position. Then, when the back-front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) returns to its initial position, at timing tA, the back-front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) executes a first celebration action (the first half of the celebration action) between its initial position (standby position) and a performance position located in front of the display screen of the performance display device 1600. On the other hand, when operation schedule Y3 is executed for the back-rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y), an initial position check is performed to confirm whether the back-rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y) is in its initial position (standby position), and if the back-rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y) is in its initial position, at timing tB after the first celebration action for the back-front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) is completed, the back-rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y) executes a second celebration action (the second half of the celebration action) between its initial position (standby position) and a performance position located in front of the display screen of the performance display device 1600.

In the explanation of Figure 236, if the rear-front lifting decorative unit 3310 (movable body X) transitions to the stop state at timing t2 while in operation, the predetermined performance action is not terminated midway, but continues until the predetermined performance action is completed. When executing a celebratory action with this configuration, after the predetermined performance action for the rear-front lifting decorative unit 3310 (movable body X) is completed, a special operation schedule X3 is executed for the rear-front lifting decorative unit 3310 (movable body X), and the rear-front lifting decorative unit 3310 (movable body X) can perform a first celebratory action between its initial position (standby position) and a performance position located in front of the display screen of the performance display device 1600. However, with this configuration, the celebratory action after transitioning to the stop state is delayed until the predetermined performance action for the rear-front lifting decorative unit 3310 (movable body X) is completed, and the celebratory action cannot be enjoyed immediately after transitioning to the stop state. In this example, the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) is forced to stop mid-operation at time t2 when the state transitions to the halted state, so that the celebratory action can be enjoyed immediately after the transition to the halted state.

As in the other example above, if the door frame 3 is provided with the above-mentioned special movable body (for example, a movable body for one-shot notification that protrudes only during a winning fluctuation), a celebratory action is not performed on the special movable body provided on the door frame 3 after transitioning to the stop state (the special movable body is excluded from the celebratory action). However, even if the special movable body provided on the door frame 3 is in operation at the time of transition to the stop state, the special movable body provided on that door frame 3 is forcibly stopped. Note that if the special movable body provided on the door frame 3 is forcibly stopped while in operation, there is a risk that the player may come into contact with the special movable body if it remains in a position other than its initial position (performance position), so it is desirable to execute a return process to return the special movable body to its initial position after transitioning to the stop state.

Furthermore, if a first effect button 251 operable by a player is provided as a movable body on the door frame 3, separate from the above-mentioned special movable body, the following configuration may be adopted. That is, if vibration of the first effect button 251 is enabled by a vibrator device (vibration motor, etc.) provided inside or outside the first effect button 251, when the peripheral control board 1510 determines the variation pattern (effect pattern) to be selected when the special symbol lottery result is a win and the variation pattern to be selected in some cases when the special symbol lottery result is a loss, it executes an operation schedule corresponding to the first effect button 251 (movable body) in accordance with the variation pattern set corresponding to the variation pattern, and vibrates the first effect button 251 (movable body) at a predetermined vibration timing during the display of the varying special symbol when a win or a part of a loss occurs, giving the player a sense of anticipation of a win. With this configuration, if the game transitions to a stop state while the first effect button 251 is vibrating while the special symbol is being displayed, the ongoing vibration action is forcibly stopped, and the first effect button 251 will no longer vibrate. In this way, after the game transitions to a stop state, the first effect button 251 (movable body) is not vibrated (oscillated) as a celebratory action, so that the player can focus only on the celebratory action of the movable body provided on the gaming board 5.

Furthermore, after the transition to the stopped state, even after the currently running operation schedule X3 or operation schedule Y3 has ended and the celebratory operation has been completed for the rear-front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear-rear lifting decoration unit 3410 (movable body Y), the above-mentioned operation prohibition flag remains ON, and the rear-front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear-rear lifting decoration unit 3410 (movable body Y) continue to be in a state of operation prohibition. Furthermore, the behavior when the power is cut off at timing t3 while the stopped state is occurring and then turned back on at timing t4 is as described above.

Next, we will explain the case where the moving body abnormally stops at a position other than the initial position before transitioning to the stop state, transitions to the stop state while the moving body is abnormally stopped, and a celebratory action for the moving body is subsequently executed depending on whether the moving body returns to the initial position. Figure 243 is a time chart showing the case where the moving body transitions to the stop state while abnormally stopped and a celebratory action for the moving body is executed when the moving body returns to the initial position, and Figure 244 is a time chart showing the case where the moving body transitions to the stop state while abnormally stopped and does not return to the initial position. Note that in this example, we will explain the case where the moving body is abnormally stopped while a special pattern is being displayed in a variable state, but it is sufficient that the moving body is abnormally stopped at (just before) the time of transition to the stop state. Even if the moving body is abnormally stopped while a special pattern is not being displayed in a variable state, it will be controlled to exhibit the same behavior after transitioning to the stop state.

First, we will explain the basic operation of the rear-front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear-rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y) when the game is not at a dead end. The rear-front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear-rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y) operate between their initial position (standby position) and a performance position located in front of the display screen of the performance display device 1600 during the initial operation of the movable body or during the performance operation of the movable body. However, at the end of this operation, they may not return to their initial position and may abnormally stop at a position other than their initial position. Furthermore, during the variable display or non-variable display of special patterns, a positional shift may occur in the rear-front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) or the rear-rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y) for some reason, causing them to abnormally stop and not return to their initial position. In these cases, the aforementioned performance prohibition flag is set to ON and performance operation is prohibited, but based on the establishment of normal return conditions (winning at the starting gate, the passage of a predetermined time since the special pattern stopped changing, etc.), a return process (multiple retry operations) is performed to return the front rear lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear rear lifting decoration unit 3410 (movable body Y) to their initial positions, and the performance prohibition flag is set to OFF when it is detected that the front rear lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear rear lifting decoration unit 3410 (movable body Y) have returned to their initial positions. However, even after such a return process (multiple retry operations), there are cases where the rear-front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) or the rear-rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y) still does not return to its initial position; in such cases, the return process (multiple retry operations) is terminated and the state remains abnormally stopped (the performance prohibition flag is ON), and thereafter, even if the return conditions are met again, the return process (multiple retry operations) will not be performed again. Below, we will explain the case where one or both of the rear-front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear-rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y) have abnormally stopped at the time (just before) the transition to the stop state.

First, we will explain the case where only the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) has abnormally stopped at (just before) the transition to the dead-end state. As shown in Figure 243, if variation pattern 2 is determined at timing t1 when the variable display of the special symbol begins, the variable display of the special symbol is executed based on variation pattern 2. Also, at timing t1, the peripheral control board 1510 determines presentation pattern 2 corresponding to variation pattern 2, and executes variable presentation based on presentation pattern 2 during the variable display of the special symbol. Also, if presentation pattern 2 is determined at timing t1, operation schedule X2 is executed for the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X), and operation schedule Y2 is instructed for the rear-rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y). However, because the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) has abnormally stopped, the aforementioned performance prohibition flag is ON, preventing the performance based on operation schedule X2 or operation schedule Y2 from being executed.

Then, at timing t2 when the state transitions to the halted state, the operation schedule X2 being executed for the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the operation schedule Y2 being executed for the rear-rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) are forcibly stopped, and then a special operation schedule X3 is executed for the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and a special operation schedule Y3 is instructed to be executed for the rear-rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y). These special operation schedules X3 and Y3 are not set at the start of the special pattern before the state transitions to the halted state, and are not executed while the special pattern is being displayed in a variable manner.

Specifically, when operation schedule X3 is executed for the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X), an initial position check is first performed to check whether the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) is in its initial position (standby position) prior to the first celebration operation for the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X). However, if the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) abnormally stops at timing t2 when it transitions to the stopped state, it is determined that the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) is in a position other than the initial position (performance position), and a special trigger recovery process (multiple retry operations) is executed conditioned on timing t2 (the start of the stopped state) regardless of whether the normal recovery conditions are met. Then, when the back-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) returns to its initial position due to the recovery process (multiple retry operations) triggered by a special trigger, at timing tA, the back-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) executes the first celebration action (first half of the celebration action) between the initial position (standby position) and the performance position located in front of the display screen of the performance display device 1600. On the other hand, when operation schedule Y3 is executed for the rear-rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y), an initial position check is performed to check whether the rear-rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y) is in the initial position (standby position), and if the rear-rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y) is in the initial position, at timing tB after the first celebration action for the front-rear lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) is completed, the rear-rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y) will perform a second celebration action (the second half of the celebration action) between the initial position (standby position) and the performance position located in front of the display screen of the performance display device 1600.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 244, if the back-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) does not return to its initial position despite having executed a special trigger return process (multiple retry operations) for the back-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X), the back-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) is prevented from executing the first celebration action. Furthermore, if the back-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) does not return to its initial position, not only is the first celebration action for the back-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) prevented from being executed, but the second celebration action for the back-rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) is also prevented from being executed. In other words, if the back-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) does not return to its initial position, the second celebration action for the back-rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) is rendered impossible to execute, regardless of whether the back-rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) is normal or not. This prevents the celebration action from being performed incompletely after transitioning to the halted state.

Next, we will explain the case where only the rear-rear lifting decoration 3410 (movable body Y) abnormally stops at the time (immediately before) the transition to the stop state. Because it is similar to the embodiment using Figure 243, illustration is omitted. Specifically, when operation schedule Y3 is executed for the rear-front lifting decoration unit 3410 (movable body Y), an initial position check is first performed to confirm whether the rear-front lifting decoration unit 3410 (movable body Y) is in its initial position (standby position) prior to the first celebratory operation for the rear-front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X). However, if the rear-front lifting decoration unit 3410 (movable body Y) abnormally stops at the time the transition to the stop state is made, it is determined that the rear-front lifting decoration unit 3410 (movable body Y) is in a position other than its initial position (performance position), and a special trigger recovery process (multiple retry operations) is performed, conditioned on the start of the stop state, regardless of whether the normal recovery conditions are met. Then, when the back-front lifting decorative body unit 3410 (movable body Y) returns to its initial position due to the recovery process (multiple retry operations) triggered by a special trigger, the back-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X), which has been waiting in a normal state, performs a first celebration action (first half of the celebration action) between its initial position (standby position) and a performance position located in front of the display screen of the performance display device 1600, and at the timing after the first celebration action for the back-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) is completed, the back-rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) performs a second celebration action (second half of the celebration action) between its initial position (standby position) and a performance position located in front of the display screen of the performance display device 1600.

On the other hand, if the back-front lifting decorative body unit 3410 (movable body Y) does not return to its initial position despite having executed a special trigger return process (multiple retry operations) for the back-front lifting decorative body unit 3410 (movable body Y), not only will the second celebratory action for the back-front lifting decorative body unit 3410 (movable body Y) not be executed, but the preceding first celebratory action for the back-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) will also not be executed. In other words, if the back-front lifting decorative body unit 3410 (movable body Y) does not return to its initial position, even the first celebratory action for the back-rear lifting decorative body 3310 (movable body X) will not be executed, regardless of whether the back-rear lifting decorative body 3310 (movable body X) is normal or not. This makes it possible to prevent the celebratory action from being executed incompletely after transitioning to a stalled state.

Next, we will explain what happens when both the rear-rear lifting decorative body 3310 (movable body X) and the rear-rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) abnormally stop at the time (just before) they transition to the stop state. Although illustration is omitted as it is similar to the embodiment using Figure 243, specifically, when the operation schedule X3 for the back-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the operation schedule Y3 for the back-front lifting decorative body unit 3410 (movable body Y) are executed, prior to the first celebration operation for the back-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X), an initial position check is first performed to check whether the back-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and then the back-front lifting decorative body unit 3410 (movable body Y) are in their initial positions (standby positions).However, if both movable bodies have abnormally stopped at the time of transition to the stopped state, it is first determined that the back-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) is in a position other than the initial position (performance position), and regardless of whether the normal return conditions are met, a special trigger recovery process (multiple retry operations) conditioned on the start of the stopped state is executed for the back-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X). Then, when the back-front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X) returns to its initial position through the special trigger return process (multiple retry operations), it is determined that the back-front lifting decoration unit 3410 (movable body Y) is in a position other than the initial position (performance position), and the special trigger return process (multiple retry operations) is performed on the back-front lifting decoration unit 3410 (movable body Y). Then, when both movable bodies return to their initial positions, a first celebration operation is performed on the back-front lifting decoration unit 3310 (movable body X), and once this is completed, the back-rear lifting decoration unit 3410 (movable body Y) performs a second celebration operation between its initial position (standby position) and the performance position located in front of the display screen of the performance display device 1600.

On the other hand, if either of the movable bodies fails to return to their initial position despite the execution of a special trigger return process (multiple retry operations) for the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3410 (movable body Y), the series of celebratory actions will not be executed, including not only the celebratory actions for the movable body that failed to return, but also the celebratory actions for the movable body that did return. In other words, if either the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) or the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3410 (movable body Y) fails to return to their initial position, or if both the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3410 (movable body Y) fail to return to their initial positions, the series of celebratory actions will be rendered impossible to execute, regardless of whether some of the movable bodies are normal or not. This prevents the celebratory actions from being executed incompletely after transitioning to a stalled state.

Furthermore, after transitioning to the stopped state, regardless of whether the back-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) returns to its initial position due to the special trigger recovery process (multiple retry operations), the above-mentioned operation prohibition flag remains ON even when the currently running operation schedule X3 or operation schedule Y3 ends, and the back-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the back-rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) continue to be in a state of operation prohibition. Furthermore, the behavior when the power is cut off at timing t3 while the stopped state is occurring and then turned back on at timing t4 is as described above.

In addition, in this example, if the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) or the rear-rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) stops abnormally at the time (just before) the transition to the dead-end state, the LEDs mounted on the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) or the rear-rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) are enabled to emit normal light rather than abnormal light (light emission that coordinates with the performance operation for the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) or the rear-rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) while the special pattern is being displayed in a variable manner). Then, after the game transitions to the stop state in this state, the LEDs mounted on the rear front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) are able to perform an action corresponding to the stop state (lighting up or turning off in coordination with other LEDs provided on the game board 5) regardless of whether the rear front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) or the rear rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) has abnormally stopped. This makes it difficult to tell from the outside that the celebratory action has not been performed, avoiding causing disgust to the player, even if a malfunction prevents the celebratory action from being performed.

In addition, as mentioned above, with regard to the LEDs mounted on the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear-rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y), when they emit light in coordination with the performance operation of the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear-rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) during the changing display of special patterns, the light intensity of the LEDs can be changed by operating the setting adjustment button 204.However, even if the rear-front lifting decorative body unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear-rear lifting decorative body 3410 (movable body Y) have stopped abnormally, the light intensity of the LEDs can be changed by operating the setting adjustment button 204. Furthermore, after the game has entered the stop state, the LEDs mounted on the rear front lift-up decorative unit 3310 (movable body X) and the rear rear lift-up decorative unit 3410 (movable body Y) continue to perform the operation corresponding to the stop state (illuminating or extinguishing in coordination with other LEDs on the game board 5) regardless of whether the rear front lift-up decorative unit 3310 (movable body X) or the rear rear lift-up decorative unit 3410 (movable body Y) has abnormally stopped. However, as described above, after the game has entered the stop state, operation of the setting adjustment button 204 cannot be accepted, and the light intensity of the LEDs operating in the stop state cannot be changed. This makes it possible to prevent malicious acts such as hitting the pachinko machine 1 under the guise of operating the setting adjustment button 204 while the game is in the stop state.

(Regarding the attachment and detachment of the game board before and after the occurrence of a stoppage state)
Next, we will explain the case where game board A, which has not yet reached a limit, or game board B, which has reached a limit, is detached and replaced from the main frame 4. In the other embodiments described above, the amount of balls dispensed is explained as being calculated by the main control board 1310, but in this example, a limit counter is provided on the payout control board 633 side, and commands related to the number of shots and the number of payouts are sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 633 at a predetermined timing, and the payout control board 633 manages the limit counter and calculates the amount of balls dispensed from the increase or decrease in the limit counter.

In this example, the payout control board 633, rather than the main control board 1310, manages (calculates and stores) the amount of balls dispensed calculated from the limit counter. Specifically, the payout control board 633 calculates the difference between the number of balls fired and the number of balls paid out within the period until a specified clear condition is met, and can store and store this calculation result in the "limit counter" as a value for calculating the amount of balls dispensed (amount of balls A, B). The value of the limit counter is stored in a specific area of the built-in RAM. One formula for calculating the difference between the number of balls fired and the number of balls paid out is "value of limit counter = number of balls paid out - number of balls fired." For example, if the value of the limit counter becomes too high, it can be determined that a large number of balls has been dispensed from the pachinko machine 1, regardless of whether the player has changed.

In this example, the payout control board 633 manages (calculates and stores) the amount of balls dispensed calculated by the limit counter. At a predetermined timing, the payout control board 633 sends a command regarding the amount of balls dispensed to the main control board 1310. When the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, the main control board 1310 transitions to a limit state and restricts play. The main control board 1310 is also capable of storing and retaining the ON status of the limit state flag when a limit state occurs. The ON/OFF status of the limit state flag is stored in a specific area of the built-in RAM. Therefore, when the power is cut off, game board A, which has not yet entered a limit state, stores and retains the OFF status of the limit state flag. Even if game board A is removed from the main frame 4 and then attached to a different main frame 4, the game board will remain in a non-limit state (normal state) when the power is turned on without clearing (initializing) the "restrictions on play during the limit state." On the other hand, game board B, which has entered a stop state, stores and retains the stop state flag ON when the power is cut off, and even if game board B is removed from the main frame 4 and then attached to a different main frame 4, the stop state will be maintained when the power is turned on without clearing (initializing) the "play restrictions during a stop state."

However, when the amount of balls dispensed is managed by the payout control board 633, even if the game board 5 is replaced relative to the main frame 4, the payout control board 633 attached to the main frame 4 is not replaced. Therefore, even if the game board 5 is replaced, there is a possibility that information regarding the amount of balls dispensed from the previous game board 5 may be reflected in the replaced game board 5, resulting in a problem of reduced reliability and convenience when the game board 5 is replaced. For example, if the amount of balls dispensed from the previous game board 5 managed by the payout control board 633 is transmitted to the replaced game board 5, the reliability of the information regarding the amount of balls dispensed from the replaced game board 5 will be compromised. In this example, a method for avoiding a decrease in reliability and convenience when replacing the game board 5 when the amount of balls dispensed is managed by the payout control board 633 is described below.

Figure 245 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the game board 5 is replaced when the power is cut off. In this example, the specific value is set to 10,000, and when the number of balls dispensed reaches 10,000, the machine transitions to a stop-play state, restricting play. It is assumed that the game board 5 before and the game board 5 after replacement are the same game board 5 (game boards from the same series with the same specifications and the same effects).

In addition, this example describes the case where limit clear pattern table 4 is used as the limit clear pattern table when the power is turned back on after a power outage, and power on pattern 1 is selected as the power on pattern. As explained in detail above, with power on pattern 1, the game state at the time of power outage is maintained when the power is turned on, but the "amount of balls dispensed before the stop state began and after the stop state began" is cleared (initialized), while the "game limits during the stop state" are maintained. However, in any of power on patterns 1 to 4, the "amount of balls dispensed before the stop state began and after the stop state began" is always cleared when the power is turned back on after a power outage.

In this example, the main control board 1310 pre-stores a CPU number (unique information) unique to the CPU (main control MPU 1310a). This CPU number is assigned uniquely to each main control board 1310, even for the same game board 5, and cannot be rewritten even using an external device. The payout control board 633 receives the CPU number from the main control board 1310 and stores it in RAM built into the payout control board 633. The CPU number stored in the payout control board 633 is not cleared (initialized) and is retained even when the power is turned on/off or the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated when the power is turned on. If the payout control board 633 determines that the CPU number received from the main control board 1310 matches the CPU number stored in the payout control board 633, it determines that the game board 5 has not been replaced with respect to the main frame 4. On the other hand, if the payout control board 633 determines that the CPU number received from the main control board 1310 matches the CPU number stored in the payout control board 633, it determines that the game board 5 has not been replaced with respect to the main frame 4.

First, referring to Figure 245 (A), we will explain what happens when, when the power is cut off, the game board A1, which has not reached a stop state, is removed from the main frame 4 and replaced with the game board A2, which has not reached a stop state. First, between timing t1 and timing t2, when the power is cut off, the game board A1, which has not reached a stop state, is attached to the main frame 4, but because the power is on, both the game board A1 and the main frame 4 are in a powered state. Furthermore, the amount of balls paid out managed by the payout control board 633 is less than 100,000, and the main control board 1310 of the game board A1 has not reached a stop state, allowing the game to continue.

Then, at timing t2, the power is cut off, the game board A1, which has not yet reached a limit, is removed, and a separate game board A2, which has not yet reached a limit, is installed. However, by turning the power on at timing t3, power is applied to both the game board A2 and the main frame 4. If power-on pattern 1 is selected when the power is turned on at timing t3, the main control board 1310 maintains the game state before the game board A2 was replaced (before installation), in which no limit has occurred (normal state), allowing game play to continue. At timing t3, the amount of balls dispensed managed by the payout control board 633 is cleared (initialized), and the amount of balls dispensed for the replaced game board A2 starts at 0. In other words, when the power is turned on, the amount of balls dispensed managed by the payout control board 633 is cleared, and information regarding the amount of balls dispensed from the previous game board A1 is not carried over.

Next, referring to Figure 245 (B), we will explain what happens when game board A, which has not yet reached a stop state, is removed from the main frame 4 and replaced with game board B, which has, when the power is cut off. First, between timing t1 and timing t2, when the power is cut off, game board A, which has not yet reached a stop state, is attached to the main frame 4, but because the power is on, both game board A and the main frame 4 are in a powered state. Furthermore, the amount of balls paid out managed by the payout control board 633 is less than 100,000, and the main control board 1310 for game board A has not reached a stop state, allowing the game to continue.

Then, at timing t2, the power is cut off, game board A, which has not yet reached a limit, is removed, and game board B, which has reached a limit, is installed. However, by turning the power on at timing t3, power is applied to both game board B and the main frame 4. If power-on pattern 1 is selected when the power is turned on at timing t3, the main control board 1310 maintains the limit-state status as the game status before game board A2 was replaced (installed), and game progress is restricted. At timing t3, the payout amount managed by the payout control board 633 is cleared (initialized), and the payout amount for the replaced game board B is reset to 0. In other words, when the power is turned on, the payout amount managed by the payout control board 633 is cleared, but the information related to the limit-state managed by the main control board 1310 is not cleared, preventing the limit-state from being cleared when the game board is replaced.

Next, referring to Figure 245 (C), we will explain what happens when game board B, which has reached a stop state, is removed from the main frame 4 when the power is cut off and replaced with game board A, which has not reached a stop state. First, between timing t1 and timing t2 when the power is cut off, game board B, which has reached a stop state, is attached to the main frame 4, but because the power is on, both game board B and the main frame 4 are in a powered-on state. In addition, the amount of balls paid out managed by the payout control board 633 has reached 100,000, and a stop state has occurred on the main control board 1310 of game board B, restricting game progress.

Then, at timing t2, the power is cut off, game board B, which has reached a stoppage state, is removed, and a separate game board A, which has not reached a stoppage state, is installed. However, by turning the power on at timing t3, power is applied to both game board A and the main frame 4. If power-on pattern 1 is selected when the power is turned on at timing t3, the main control board 1310 maintains the game state before game board A2 is replaced (before installation), in which no stoppage state has occurred (normal state), allowing game play to continue. At timing t3, the payout amount managed by the payout control board 633 is cleared (initialized), and the payout amount for the replaced game board A is set to 0. In other words, when the power is turned on, the payout amount managed by the payout control board 633 is cleared, and information regarding the payout amount of game board B before replacement is not carried over, preventing a stoppage state from occurring when the game board is replaced.

Next, referring to Figure 245 (D), we will explain what happens when, when the power is cut off, the game board B1, which has reached a stop state, is removed from the main frame 4 and replaced with the game board B2, which has reached a stop state. First, between timing t1 and timing t2, when the power is cut off, the game board B1, which has reached a stop state, is attached to the main frame 4, but because the power is on, both the game board B1 and the main frame 4 are in a powered-on state. In addition, the amount of balls dispensed managed by the payout control board 633 has reached 100,000, and the main control board 1310 of the game board B1 has reached a stop state, restricting game progress.

Then, at timing t2, the power is cut off, game board B1, which has a stoppage state, is removed, and game board B2, which is separate from game board A and has a stoppage state, is installed. However, by turning the power on at timing t3, power is applied to both game board B2 and the main frame 4. If power-on pattern 1 is selected when the power is turned on at timing t3, the main control board 1310 maintains the stoppage state as the game state before game board A2 was replaced (installed), and game progress is restricted. At timing t3, the amount of balls dispensed managed by the payout control board 633 is cleared (initialized), and the amount of balls dispensed for the replaced game board B2 is reset to 0. In other words, when the power is turned on, the amount of balls dispensed managed by the payout control board 633 is cleared, but the information related to the stoppage state managed by the main control board 1310 is not cleared, preventing the stoppage state from being cleared when the game board is replaced.

Figure 246 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the game board 5 is replaced before the power is cut off. In this example, the specific value is set to 100,000, and when the number of balls dispensed reaches 100,000, the machine transitions to a stop state, restricting play.

First, referring to Figure 246 (A), we will explain what happens when, before the power is cut off, game board A1, which has not yet reached a stop state, is removed from the main frame 4 and replaced with game board A2, which has not yet reached a stop state. First, at timing t1, game board A1, which has not yet reached a stop state, is attached to the main frame 4, but because the power is on, both game board A1 and main frame 4 are in a powered state. Furthermore, the amount of balls dispensed managed by the payout control board 633 is less than 100,000, and the main control board 1310 of game board A1 has not yet reached a stop state, allowing the game to continue.

Then, prior to the timing t2 at which the power is shut off, the game board A1, which has not yet reached a limit, is removed from the main frame 4. However, because the power remains on, only the main frame 4 is energized, and information regarding the number of balls dispensed, managed by the payout control board 633, is maintained. Then, the game board A2, which has not yet reached a limit, is attached to the main frame 4. However, because the power remains on, both the game board A2 and the main frame 4 are energized. At this time, the game state before the replacement (attachment) of the game board A2 is a state in which no limit has occurred (normal state), but by attaching the game board A2 while the power remains on, the main control board 1310 generates a special limit, restricting game progress. The special limit is the same as the limit state in that game progress is restricted, but differs from the limit state in that the special limit is resolved by turning the power on and off (power-on pattern 1). In other words, when the game board A2 is replaced, the amount of balls dispensed managed by the payout control board 633 is not cleared, and the information regarding the amount of balls dispensed from the game board A1 before the replacement is carried over. However, by generating a special stop state, it is possible to prevent the game from continuing with this incorrect information.

Then, by turning off the power at timing t2 and turning on the power at timing t3 while leaving the game board A2, which has not yet reached a stop state, installed, both the game board A2 and the main frame 4 are energized. At this time, if the power is not turned on/off when replacing the game board A2, a special stop state occurs; however, if the power is turned on/off, a special stop state does not occur. Furthermore, if power-on pattern 1 is selected when the power is turned on at timing t3, the main control board 1310 maintains the game state before the game board A2 was replaced (installed), in a state where no stop state has occurred (normal state), allowing gameplay to continue. Furthermore, at timing t3, the payout amount managed by the payout control board 633 is cleared (initialized), and the payout amount for the replaced game board A2 starts at 0. In other words, when the power is turned on, the amount of balls dispensed managed by the payout control board 633 is cleared, and information regarding the amount of balls dispensed from the previous game board A1 is not carried over.

Next, referring to Figure 246 (B), we will explain what happens when, before the power is cut off, game board A, which has not yet reached a stop state, is removed from the main frame 4 and replaced with game board B, which has. First, at timing t1, game board A, which has not yet reached a stop state, is attached to the main frame 4, but because the power is on, both game board A and the main frame 4 are in a powered state. Furthermore, the amount of balls dispensed managed by the payout control board 633 is less than 100,000, and the main control board 1310 for game board A has not reached a stop state, allowing the game to continue.

Before the power is shut off at timing t2, game board A, which has not yet reached a limit, is removed from the main frame 4. However, because the power remains on, only the main frame 4 is energized, and information regarding the amount of balls dispensed, managed by the payout control board 633, is maintained. After that, game board B, which has reached a limit, is attached to the main frame 4. However, because the power remains on, both game board B and the main frame 4 are energized. At this time, the game state before game board B is replaced (attached) is one in which a limit has occurred. However, because game board B is attached while the power remains on, the main control board 1310 generates a special limit, restricting game progress. The special limit is the same as the limit in that game progress is restricted, but differs from the limit in that the special limit is resolved by turning the power on and off (power-on pattern 1). In other words, when game board B is replaced, the amount of balls dispensed managed by payout control board 633 is not cleared, and the information regarding the amount of balls dispensed from game board A before the replacement is inherited. However, by generating a special stop state, it is possible to prevent the game from continuing with this incorrect information.

Then, by turning off the power at timing t2 and leaving game board B, which has a stoppage state, installed, and turning the power on at timing t3, both game board B and the main frame 4 are energized. At this time, if the power is not turned on/off when replacing game board B, a special stoppage state occurs, but if the power is turned on/off, a special stoppage state does not occur. Furthermore, if power-on pattern 1 is selected when the power is turned on at timing t3, the main control board 1310 maintains the stoppage state as the game state before game board B was replaced (installed), and game progress is restricted. Furthermore, at timing t3, the payout amount managed by the payout control board 633 is cleared (initialized), and the payout amount for the replaced game board B starts at 0. In other words, when the power is turned on, the amount of balls managed by the payout control board 633 is cleared, but the information regarding the stoppage status managed by the main control board 1310 is not cleared, preventing the stoppage status from being cleared when replacing the machine.

Next, referring to Figure 246 (C), we will explain what happens when game board B, which has reached a stop state, is removed from the main frame 4 before the power is shut off and replaced with game board A, which has not reached a stop state. First, at timing t1, game board B, which has reached a stop state, is attached to the main frame 4, but because the power is on, power is still flowing to both game board B and the main frame 4. In addition, the amount of balls dispensed managed by the payout control board 633 has reached 100,000, and a stop state has occurred on the main control board 1310 of game board B, restricting game progress.

Before the power is shut off at timing t2, game board B, which has entered a stop state, is removed from the main frame 4. However, because the power remains on, only the main frame 4 is energized, and information regarding the amount of balls dispensed, managed by the payout control board 633, is maintained. After that, game board A, which has not entered a stop state, is attached to the main frame 4. However, because the power remains on, both game board B and the main frame 4 are energized. At this time, the game state before the replacement (installation) of game board A is a state in which a stop state has not occurred (normal state). However, by installing game board A while the power remains on, the main control board 1310 generates a special stop state, restricting game progress. The special stop state is the same as the stop state in that game progress is restricted, but differs from the stop state in that the special stop state is resolved by turning the power on and off (power-on pattern 1). In other words, when game board A is replaced, the amount of balls dispensed managed by payout control board 633 is not cleared, and the information regarding the amount of balls dispensed from game board B before the replacement is inherited. However, by generating a special stop state, it is possible to prevent the game from progressing due to the inheritance of this incorrect information.

Then, by turning off the power at timing t2 and leaving game board A, which has not yet reached a limit, installed, and turning the power on at timing t3, both game board A and the main frame 4 are energized. At this time, if the power is not turned on/off when replacing game board A, a special limit state occurs; however, if the power is turned on/off, a special limit state does not occur. Furthermore, if power-on pattern 1 is selected when the power is turned on at timing t3, the main control board 1310 maintains the game state before game board A was replaced (installed), in a state where no limit state has occurred (normal state), allowing game play to continue. Furthermore, at timing t3, the payout amount managed by the payout control board 633 is cleared (initialized), and the payout amount for the replaced game board A starts at 0. In other words, when the power is turned on, the amount of balls managed by the payout control board 633 is cleared, and the information regarding the amount of balls dispensed from the previous game board B is not carried over, preventing a stall from occurring when the machine is replaced.

Next, referring to Figure 246 (D), we will explain what happens when, before the power is cut off, game board B1, which has reached a stop state, is removed from the main frame 4 and replaced with game board B2, which has also reached a stop state. First, at timing t1, game board B1, which has reached a stop state, is attached to the main frame 4, but because the power is on, power is still flowing to both game board B1 and the main frame 4. In addition, the amount of balls dispensed managed by the payout control board 633 has reached 100,000, and a stop state has occurred on the main control board 1310 of game board B1, restricting game progress.

Then, prior to the timing t2 at which the power is shut off, game board B1, which has entered a stop state, is removed from the main frame 4, but because the power remains on, only the main frame 4 is energized, and information regarding the amount of balls dispensed managed by the payout control board 633 is maintained. Then, game board B2, which has entered a stop state, is attached to the main frame 4, but because the power remains on, both game board B2 and the main frame 4 are energized. At this time, the game state before game board B2 was replaced (before installation) was one in which a stop state had occurred, but because game board B2 was installed with the power still on, the main control board 1310 triggered a special stop state, restricting game progress. The special stop state is the same as the stop state in that game progress is restricted, various adjustments (such as volume and light adjustments) are disabled, and information is output to the hall computer via an external terminal board, but differs from the stop state in that the special stop state is canceled by turning the power on and off (power-on pattern 1). In other words, when game board B2 is replaced, the amount of balls dispensed managed by payout control board 633 is not cleared, and information regarding the amount of balls dispensed from game board B2 before replacement is inherited, but by triggering the special stop state, it is possible to prevent game progress due to the inheritance of this incorrect information.

Then, by turning off the power at timing t2 and leaving the game board B2, which has a stoppage state, installed, and turning the power on at timing t3, both the game board B2 and the main frame 4 are energized. At this time, if the power is not turned on/off when replacing the game board B2, a special stoppage state occurs, but if the power is turned on/off, a special stoppage state does not occur. Furthermore, if power-on pattern 1 is selected when the power is turned on at timing t3, the main control board 1310 maintains the game status before the game board B2 was replaced (installed), with a stoppage state occurring, and game progress is restricted. Furthermore, at timing t3, the payout amount managed by the payout control board 633 is cleared (initialized), and the payout amount for the replaced game board B2 starts at 0. In other words, when the power is turned on, the amount of balls managed by the payout control board 633 is cleared, but the information regarding the stoppage status managed by the main control board 1310 is not cleared, preventing the stoppage status from being cleared when replacing the machine.

As described above, in the above-described embodiment, when the amount of balls dispensed is managed by the payout control board 633, even if the game board 5 is replaced with respect to the main frame 4, information regarding the amount of balls dispensed on the game board 5 before replacement can be prevented from being reflected on the replaced game board 5, thereby avoiding a decrease in reliability and convenience when replacing the game board 5.

In addition, while the above describes the occurrence of a special stop state when various game boards are attached or detached to the main frame 4 before the power is cut off, control may be exercised during the special stop state using the operations exemplified below. For example, during the stop state that occurs when the number of balls dispensed reaches 100,000, as described above in FIG. 218 (K), the effect display device 1600 displays images corresponding to the stop state (messages such as "Play limit," "Play has been restricted as the daily limit of balls dispensed has been reached," "Please call an attendant," and "The settlement button is enabled"). However, since it is conceivable that the number of balls dispensed may not reach 100,000 during the special stop state, at least some of these displays may be suppressed in order to prevent misunderstanding. In particular, the aforementioned images "Play Limit" and "Play is being restricted as the daily ball output limit of XX balls has been reached" may not be displayed, and alternative messages such as "Temporary Play Limit" and "There is no ball output limit, but play is being restricted as a precaution" may be displayed instead. Also, since it is conceivable that a special limit may occur due to some factor while the player is playing even in a special limit state, messages such as "Please call an attendant" and "The settlement button is enabled" may be made executable in common with a limit state that occurs when the amount of balls output reaches 100,000.

Furthermore, while game progress is restricted during both the capped state caused by the number of balls reaching 10,000 and the special capped state, the restrictions may be as follows. Specifically, during both the capped state caused by the number of balls reaching 100,000 and the special capped state, even if a special symbol variable display is in progress at the start of the state, the timing of the variable display of the special symbol is stopped (interrupted) to prevent the variable display of the special symbol from progressing, forcibly halting gameplay, and restricting gameplay. Here, at least for the special capped state, various game information related to the variable display of the special symbol (such as the remaining variable time after the interruption) may be stored even after the restriction on gameplay has begun. If the variable display of the special symbol can be resumed when the special capped state is resolved by turning the power on and off (power-on pattern 1), a decrease in reliability and convenience when replacing the game board 5 can be more effectively avoided. Furthermore, the stoppage state and special stoppage state that occur when the amount of balls dispensed reaches 10,000 can occur not only while the special symbol variable display is in progress, but also while the normal symbol variable display and the jackpot game are in progress. In such cases, regardless of whether the stoppage state or the special stoppage state occurs, the timing of the normal symbol variable display and the progress of the jackpot game (the current number of rounds and the opening time of the special prize slot 2005) is stopped (interrupted), the game is forcibly stopped, and a game restriction is initiated. Regarding this, at least for the special stoppage state, various game information related to the normal symbol variable display (e.g., the remaining variable display time after the interruption) and various game information related to the jackpot game (e.g., the remaining opening time after the interruption) are stored even after the game restriction is initiated, and if the normal symbol variable display and the jackpot game can be resumed when the power is turned on/off (power-on pattern 1) to cancel the special stoppage state, a decrease in reliability and convenience when replacing the game board 5 can be more effectively avoided.

In addition, during the above-mentioned special stop state, it is preferable to limit game progress and also stop management of the number of balls dispensed by the payout control board 633. In other words, by preventing the number of balls dispensed from fluctuating during the special stop state, it is possible to avoid situations where the number of balls dispensed reaches 100,000 during the special stop state and another stop state occurs, or where the number of balls dispensed falls below 95,000 during the special stop state and advance warnings (such as advance notification displays) are canceled.

Furthermore, the display mode of the function display unit 1400 may be controlled differently from that during normal play during both the capped state caused by the amount of dispensed balls reaching 10,000 and the special capped state. Specifically, if all LEDs of the function display unit 1400, such as the first special symbol display, second special symbol display, status display, normal symbol display, normal hold display, first special hold number display, second special hold number display, and round display, are fully lit during the capped state caused by the amount of dispensed balls reaching 10,000, then during the special capped state, all LEDs of the function display unit 1400, such as the first special symbol display, second special symbol display, status display, normal symbol display, normal hold display, first special hold number display, second special hold number display, and round display, are fully turned off. Furthermore, if the functional display unit 1400 is provided with an LED dedicated to indicating a limit, then during a limit state that occurs when the number of balls dispensed reaches 10,000, the LED dedicated to indicating the limit will be turned on and all other LEDs will be turned off, but during a special limit state, all LEDs, including the LED dedicated to indicating the limit, will be turned off. This makes it possible to distinguish between a limit state that occurs when the number of balls dispensed reaches 10,000 or a special limit state by simply checking the functional display unit 1400, further avoiding a decrease in reliability and convenience when replacing the game board 5.

(Regarding energy saving mode after transition to the stop state)
In this example, if a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the special symbol was confirmed and stopped without the start of a new variable special symbol display, a predetermined demonstration effect (e.g., display of a demonstration explanation or promotional image) is initiated. However, after a certain amount of time has elapsed since the start of the demonstration effect (e.g., after the demonstration effect has been repeated twice), the machine can transition to an energy-saving mode to conserve standby power. In this energy-saving mode, not only is the demonstration effect not executed, but also audio output is stopped and some lamps are turned off, and the effect display device 1600 notifies the user that the energy-saving mode is in effect. However, if the energy-saving mode were to be executed in the same manner not only in the normal standby state (a standby state that is not in the play limit state) but also after the payout amount reaches a specific value and the machine transitions to the play limit state, it would be difficult to tell whether the state in the energy-saving mode is in the play limit state, making it difficult to understand that game play restrictions are being implemented. Therefore, in this example, a configuration will be described below that allows transition to energy saving mode during normal standby state and during stopped state, while also differing the behavior during energy saving mode depending on whether the state is normal standby state or stopped state.

First, let's discuss the energy-saving mode. In this example, whether or not to switch to energy-saving mode while special symbols are not being displayed (when no game is being played) can be set by the administrator at will, depending on the type of business the amusement hall operates. Specifically, when the energy-saving mode setting switch on the peripheral control board 1510 is turned ON, energy-saving mode can be initiated while special symbols are not being displayed, and when the energy-saving mode setting switch is turned OFF, energy-saving mode cannot be initiated while special symbols are not being displayed. Note that in this example, as will be described later, the energy-saving mode is switched to after a demonstration effect is executed with the energy-saving mode setting switch turned ON, but this is not limited to this. As another example, the energy-saving mode setting switch may not be provided and the energy-saving mode may always be switched to after a demonstration effect is executed.

Next, the relationship between the demonstration effect and the energy-saving mode in this example will be explained. In this example, when the energy-saving mode setting switch is turned ON and the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, the energy-saving mode is entered after passing through the normal standby state. Here, the "normal standby state" in this example is a standby state that is not in a dead-end state, and includes a period during which the display device 1600 displays a static decorative symbol, and a period during which the display device 1600 and other devices perform operations corresponding to a specified demonstration effect (for example, displaying or emitting light for explanations or promotional images). Details of the demonstration effect will be described later. In this example, when the energy-saving mode setting switch is turned ON, the system transitions to energy-saving mode upon the completion of a predetermined number of demonstration effects. Note that in energy-saving mode, the demonstration effect is not executed, and the display device 1600 and other devices are controlled by operations corresponding to the energy-saving mode.

Furthermore, as the game progresses, if the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, the device transitions to a stop state in which game progress is disabled. In this stop state, operations corresponding to the stop state are executed in preference to operations corresponding to the demonstration effects, ensuring that the device is notified that the stop state is in effect. Furthermore, when the energy-saving mode setting switch is turned ON, energy-saving mode can be initiated even during the stop state, but the energy-saving mode is initiated at a different time than when the energy-saving mode is initiated when the device is not in the stop state. In other words, when energy-saving mode is initiated during the stop state, the device transitions to energy-saving mode a predetermined time (e.g., five minutes) after the stop state notification mode, described below, transitions to notification mode B. Furthermore, when the device transitions to energy-saving mode during the stop state, the device executes operations corresponding to the energy-saving mode on the effect display device 1600 and other devices in a manner different from when the device transitions to energy-saving mode via a normal standby state.

Figure 247 is a table comparing the notification modes for light emission and sound in normal standby mode, energy saving mode, and stopped state. In this example, it is possible to switch to energy saving mode during stopped state, and before switching to energy saving mode, energy saving mode does not occur during stopped state, but after switching to energy saving mode, energy saving mode occurs during stopped state.

First, the normal standby state includes a state when the demonstration effect is not being executed (when standby effect 1 is being executed) and a state when the demonstration effect is being executed (when standby effect 2 is being executed). Specifically, in the normal standby state, standby effect 1 is executed, in which the stopped decorative symbols remain displayed without executing the demonstration effect, until a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the special symbol was confirmed and stopped. When the predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the special symbol was confirmed and stopped, the stopped decorative symbols are erased and the first demonstration effect (standby effect 2) is initiated. Then, after the first demonstration effect ends, standby effect 1 is executed, in which the stopped decorative symbols remain displayed without executing the demonstration effect, until a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed. When the predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed, the second demonstration effect (standby effect 2) is initiated. If the energy saving mode setting switch is turned ON, the device will switch to energy saving mode after the second demonstration performance has ended. If the energy saving mode setting switch is turned OFF, the device will go through standby performance 1 again after the second demonstration performance has ended, and then the third demonstration performance will be performed, with standby performance 1 and the demonstration performance being repeated thereafter.

As mentioned above, when the demonstration performance is not being performed, a stopped decorative pattern is displayed as standby display 1 (standby performance 1), and standby display 1 is displayed on a lower layer of the performance display device 1600. Here, the performance display device 1600 in this example is capable of displaying multiple layers, including at least an upper layer, a middle layer, and a lower layer, in an overlapping manner, with the display items on higher layers being displayed closer to the front in the relationship of "upper layer > middle layer > lower layer," allowing them to be viewed preferentially.

On the other hand, when a demonstration effect is being executed, the following demonstration image is displayed as standby display 2 (standby effect 2). Specifically, first, the effect display device 1600 is used to explain the effects of pachinko machine 1 and display promotional images (movies), and at the end of this, the logo of the model title of pachinko machine 1 is displayed. Then, after the model title logo display has finished, the effect display device 1600 displays the logo of the manufacturer of pachinko machine 1, and then displays a warning message regarding "preventing addiction" to prevent players from becoming overly addicted to the game (for example, a text display saying "Pachinko should be enjoyed in moderation. Be careful not to get addicted"). Displaying such a warning message can prevent players from becoming overly addicted to the game during subsequent games. Note that standby display 2 is displayed on a lower layer of the effect display device 1600.

In addition, during the normal standby state, when standby display 1 (standby effect 1) is being displayed, a specified sound is output from the speaker, but after standby display 1 (standby effect 1) ends, the sound is not output from the speaker and is muted. In other words, while standby display 1 (standby effect 1) is being displayed, sound such as background music corresponding to standby display 1 (standby effect 1) is being output, but when standby display 1 (standby effect 1) ends and standby display 2 (standby effect 2) is displayed, no sound is output.

In addition, in the normal standby state, the LEDs of Lamp A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration members) and Lamp B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5) are configured to light up or flash in a normal notification mode. Specifically, when a demonstration effect is not being executed, the LEDs flash or light up in a notification mode corresponding to standby effect 1 as the normal notification mode, whereas when a demonstration effect is being executed, the LEDs flash or light up in a notification mode corresponding to demonstration effect (standby effect 2) as the normal notification mode. Furthermore, Lamp C is configured to emit light in a reference brightness confirmation mode, which allows the reference brightness to be confirmed by emitting light at a predetermined specific brightness in comparison with the brightness of Lamps A and B. In other words, while the brightness of Lamps A and B changes depending on the setting status set by operating the setting adjustment button 204, the brightness of Lamp C does not change regardless of the setting status set by operating the setting adjustment button 204, making it easy to determine whether the brightness of Lamps A and B has changed. Furthermore, for Lamp C, the LED may be configured to emit light in the reference brightness confirmation mode even when a demonstration performance is not being performed. However, taking into consideration the load caused by constantly emitting light, it may be configured to start emitting light in the reference brightness confirmation mode when a specific light emission start operation is performed. For example, when a specific light emission start condition is met (for example, when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated or another operation is received), the light emission in the reference brightness confirmation mode may be started, and after a predetermined time has passed, the light emission in the reference brightness confirmation mode may be terminated and the lamp may be turned off. Furthermore, by providing multiple LEDs that make up Lamp C, even if one of the LEDs that make up Lamp C fails, the other LEDs that make up Lamp C may still be able to determine whether the brightness of Lamps A and B has changed.

Next, in energy saving mode, an energy saving display is displayed as an image corresponding to the energy saving mode, but the energy saving display is displayed on a higher layer of the performance display device 1600. At this time, sound is not output from the speaker and the sound is muted. Also, the LEDs for Lamp A (LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the frame decoration members) and Lamp B (LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5) are turned off. Note that the LED for Lamp C is enabled to emit light in a mode for confirming the reference brightness, the same as in the normal standby state.

Next, if the energy saving mode does not occur during the game-stop state, an image corresponding to the game-stop state, indicating that progress is impossible, is displayed on a higher layer of the performance display device 1600. Furthermore, upon transition to the game-stop state, Lamp A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), Lamp B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and the speaker issue an alert in an emphasized mode consisting of a predetermined specific light intensity (e.g., maximum light intensity) and a predetermined specific volume (e.g., maximum volume) as alert mode A, but after a predetermined period (e.g., 15 seconds) has elapsed, the alert transitions to an alert in a suppressed mode in which the light intensity and volume are suppressed as alert mode B. Specifically, after a predetermined period (e.g., 15 seconds) has elapsed, the speaker stops outputting sound and mutes the sound. As for lamp C, the LED may be set to emit light in a manner for confirming the reference brightness, as in the normal standby state; however, given the nature of the stop state, and the fact that the setting adjustment button 204 will not be operated, lamp C may be set to remain off regardless of whether specific emission start conditions are met.

Next, if the energy saving mode occurs during the game-stop state, in addition to the image corresponding to the game-stop state, which indicates that progress is impossible, an energy saving display is also displayed as an image corresponding to the energy saving mode. However, both the progress impossible display and the energy saving display are displayed on a higher layer of the effect display device 1600, and both displays are visible. At this time, sound is not output from the speaker and the sound is muted. Furthermore, the LEDs for Lamp A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration members) and Lamp B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5) are turned off. Note that, as with the normal standby state, the LED for Lamp C may be enabled to emit light in a manner for confirming the reference brightness. However, considering that the setting adjustment button 204 is not operated due to the nature of the game-stop state, Lamp C may remain off regardless of whether a specific light-emitting start condition is met.

Figure 248 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when it transitions to energy-saving mode during a play-stop state. The following explanation assumes that the energy-saving mode setting switch is turned ON.

First, once the remaining number of balls to be dispensed reaches a specific value (e.g., 5,000), a pre-warning display is displayed. This pre-warning display continues to be displayed not only while the special symbol is changing, but also while the special symbol is not changing, until the number of balls to be dispensed reaches the specific value. Furthermore, while the special symbol is not changing, the display continues to be displayed not only during the normal standby state, but also during energy-saving mode. Furthermore, as described above in detail, the effect display device 1600 displays the message "+xx balls remaining until play limit" in specific display area 1 as a pre-warning display. This specific display area 1 is set as part of the display area of the effect display device 1600 and is a display area used when the number of balls to be dispensed approaches a specific value. It is a fixed area that remains unchanged regardless of the play state so that the hall manager does not overlook it.

In addition, advance notice displays and progress impossibility displays are displayed on the upper layer of the performance display device 1600. Here, the performance display device 1600 in this example is capable of displaying multiple layers, including at least an upper layer, a middle layer, and a lower layer, on top of each other, and in the relationship of "upper layer > middle layer > lower layer," the higher the layer display, the closer it is to the front, allowing it to be viewed with priority. This means that the visibility of advance notice displays and progress impossibility displays displayed on the upper layer is not obstructed by displays displayed on the middle and lower layers.

In addition, advance notice displays and progress impossibility displays are not subject to image conversion processing (mosaic processing, grayscale processing, enlargement/reduction processing, etc.) performed by the peripheral control board 1510. In other words, performance images other than advance notice displays and progress impossibility displays are subject to image conversion processing performed by the peripheral control board 1510, and the appearance of the performance images is allowed to change as the performance progresses, but advance notice displays and progress impossibility displays are not subject to image conversion processing performed by the peripheral control board 1510, and the appearance of the performance images is not allowed to change even if the performance progresses. As a result, the visibility of advance notice displays and progress impossibility displays does not change while they are displayed, making it possible to avoid overlooking information regarding the amount of balls dispensed, etc.

Next, after the special symbol is confirmed and stopped, the machine enters a normal standby state. However, at timing t1, if a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds) has passed since the special symbol was confirmed and no new special symbol was displayed, a demonstration period (a period during which a demonstration effect is executed) is initiated, displaying a demonstration image (e.g., an effect explanation or promotional image) as standby display 2 (standby effect 2). During this demonstration period, when the display of the special symbol begins to change (when a win occurs in the first start slot 2002, second start slot 2004, or large prize slot 2005), the demonstration period ends and the change effect or winning effect begins. On the other hand, the player can also end the demonstration period and transition to standby display 1 (standby effect 1) by operating the operation unit (e.g., handle 160 or effect operation unit 250). The advance notice display continues to be displayed even after the transition to the demonstration period. This prevents new players from starting play without being aware of information about the number of balls dispensed, etc., before starting play.

In this example, the standby display 2 is displayed on a lower layer of the effect display device 1600. For example, the predetermined area in which the warning message is displayed is located outside the specific display area 1 in which the advance notice display is displayed, and is positioned so that it does not overlap with the specific display area 1 in the front-to-back direction. This ensures that the warning message is visible even while the advance notice display is displayed, and reliably prevents players from becoming overly absorbed in the game. The predetermined area in which the warning message is displayed may be positioned so that a portion of the predetermined area overlaps with the specific display area 1 in the front-to-back direction. For example, even if the predetermined area overlaps with the specific display area 1, the warning message may be displayed shifted vertically or horizontally from the advance notice display to such an extent that the content of the warning message can be confirmed.

During the demonstration period, no sound is output from the speaker and the display is silent. During the demonstration period, the LEDs of Lamp A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration members) and Lamp B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the gaming board 5) are set to light up or flash in a notification mode corresponding to standby display 2 (standby effect 2) as the normal notification mode. During the demonstration period, the LED of Lamp C is set to emit light at a specific brightness as a standard brightness confirmation mode, regardless of standby display 2 (standby effect 2).

Next, at timing t2, when the demonstration period (second demonstration effect) ends, the system switches to energy-saving mode, which strengthens power saving for audio and lamps. The effect display device 1600 displays an energy-saving display as an image corresponding to the energy-saving mode. The energy-saving display displays the message "Energy-saving mode in progress." In this energy-saving mode, the system terminates the energy-saving mode and starts the variable effect when the variable special symbol display begins. Alternatively, the system can also terminate the energy-saving mode and switch to a normal standby state by the player operating the control unit (e.g., handle 160 or effect operation unit 250). If a win occurs in a general winning slot 2001, which does not display variable special symbols, during energy-saving mode, prize balls are awarded, but the system does not switch to a normal standby state. Furthermore, even after switching to energy-saving mode, the advance notification display continues to be displayed. This prevents new players from starting play without being aware of information such as the number of balls dispensed.

In this example, the energy saving display is displayed on the upper layer of the performance display device 1600, just like the advance notice display. However, the specific area 2 in which the energy saving display is displayed is located outside the specific display area 1 in which the advance notice display is displayed, and in a different position from the specific display area 1. This ensures that the energy saving display is visible even while the advance notice display is displayed on the upper layer of the performance display device 1600, and ensures that the user is notified that energy saving mode is being executed.

In addition, in this example, standby display 2, which was running during the demonstration period, is terminated when the system transitions to energy saving mode. Because standby display 2 is displayed on a lower layer of the performance display device 1600, even if it continues to be displayed after the system transitions to energy saving mode, the energy saving display displayed on a higher layer will not become invisible. However, by terminating standby display 2 when the system transitions to energy saving mode, the control burden on the peripheral control board 1510 can be reduced.

In addition, during energy saving mode, the speaker is muted and no sound is output. In other words, the speaker is in a silent state (inaudible state) where no sound can be heard. Furthermore, the LEDs for Lamp A (LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the frame decoration members) and Lamp B (LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the gaming board 5) are turned off. This prevents excessive power consumption by gaming machines that have not been played for a specified period of time. Furthermore, the LED for Lamp C is enabled to emit light in a standard brightness confirmation mode, just like in the normal standby state. This allows you to know that the LED for Lamp C is not turned off like Lamps A and B, and that the gaming machine is operating normally.

In addition, in this example, if a player operates the operation unit (such as the handle 160 or the presentation operation unit 250) before the energy saving mode is initiated (the period from timing t1 to t2), it is possible to restrict the execution of the energy saving mode. Specifically, the conditions for starting the energy saving mode are met when the second demonstration ends, resulting in a transition to energy saving mode. However, if a player operates the operation unit during the demonstration period before the energy saving mode is initiated, the demonstration period is forcibly ended, preventing the conditions for starting the energy saving mode from being met and the game from transitioning to energy saving mode. As a result, if a player does not want to transition to energy saving mode during normal standby mode, they can simply operate the operation unit before the energy saving mode is initiated, preventing the energy saving mode from being unintentionally initiated.

Next, at timing t3 during the energy saving mode, if a win is made at the first start gate 2002 or the second start gate 2004 and the variable display of the special symbol begins, the energy saving mode ends and a variable display (a display based on a variable pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is executed. In this variable display, a variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed, but the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed on a lower layer of the display device 1600. In addition, even after the variable display begins, the advance notice display continues to be displayed. This allows the player to know that play will be restricted in the near future.

In addition, while the special symbols are being displayed, a sound corresponding to the changing effects is output from the speaker as specified background music. Also, while the special symbols are being displayed, the LEDs of Lamp A (LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the frame decoration member) and Lamp B (LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the gaming board 5) light up or blink in a normal notification mode corresponding to the changing effects. Also, while the special symbols are being displayed, the LED of Lamp C is able to emit light at a specific brightness as a mode for confirming the reference brightness, regardless of the changing effects.

Next, at timing t4 during the variable display of the special symbol, if the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value due to winning balls entering a winning slot such as the first starting slot 2002 or the second starting slot 2004, and game play is restricted, the variable display of the special symbol and the variable presentation are terminated, and the game enters a halt state in which game progress is disabled. As described above, when the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value calculated based on the winning balls obtained by winning balls entering each winning slot, the game enters a halt state and game play is restricted, but in this example, these game restrictions are controlled while the variable display of the special symbol is in progress.

Then, at timing t4, if the game transitions to a stopped state, the effect display device 1600 displays an image corresponding to the stopped state, indicating that progress is not possible. The message "Play Restrictions" is displayed as the stopped state, along with messages such as "Play has been restricted as the daily ball output limit of XXX balls has been reached," "Please call an attendant," and "The settlement button is enabled." Furthermore, as described above, the stopped progress indication is displayed on a higher layer of the effect display device 1600. This allows the player to understand that the amount of balls output has reached a specific value and that game restrictions are being implemented, without impeding the visibility of the stopped progress indication.

In addition, in this example, the progress impossibility display is displayed on a screen consisting of an opaque blackout display (for example, a black background image) in an upper layer of the effect display device 1600. This blackout display is displayed across almost the entire surface of the effect display device 1600. As a result, screens displayed on layers lower than the upper layer are made invisible due to the blackout display in the upper layer. Specifically, even after the transition to the play-stop state at timing t4, a demonstration image as standby display 2 can be displayed on the lower layer of the effect display device 1600, but the progress impossibility display is displayed on the upper layer of the effect display device 1600 using almost the entire surface of the effect display device 1600, making the demonstration image invisible. As a result, after the transition to the play-stop state, the player will not be aware that the demonstration period is in progress while the progress impossibility display is being displayed, and can reliably understand that the number of balls dispensed has reached a specific value and play restrictions are being implemented. Furthermore, after transitioning to the stop state, regardless of whether a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) of normal standby state in which no special symbols are displayed in a variable manner has elapsed, a restriction may be placed on the lower layer of the effect display device 1600 so that the demonstration image is not displayed at all.

Furthermore, after transitioning to the play-stop state, the effect display device 1600 displays an "unplayable" message on almost the entire surface of the effect display device 1600 as an image corresponding to the play-stop state. At this time, as Lamp A (LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the frame decoration members), Lamp B (LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5), and the speaker perform the action required for unplayable state, they forcibly issue a notification in an emphasized mode consisting of a predetermined specific light intensity (e.g., maximum light intensity) and a predetermined specific volume (e.g., maximum volume) as notification mode A, regardless of the setting status set by operating the setting adjustment button 204. Specifically, Lamp A (LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the frame decoration members) and Lamp B (LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5) emit a monochromatic white light, and the LEDs flash or light up at a specific light intensity (e.g., maximum light intensity), and the speaker outputs a voice message at a specific volume (e.g., maximum volume) stating, "Play is being restricted because the daily ball payout limit has been reached." This allows the hall manager to be clearly informed that a transition to a play-stop state has occurred. It is preferable that the highlighted notification related to the play-stop state be different from the notification used in the event of other errors, such as abnormalities.

Then, at time t5, after a predetermined period (e.g., 15 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the highlighted notification as notification mode A, the effect display device 1600 maintains the progress-impossible display using substantially the entire surface of the effect display device 1600, but the lamps A (LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the frame decoration members) and B (LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the gaming board 5) transition to a suppressed notification mode with reduced light output as notification mode B. Specifically, while the LEDs of lamps A (LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the frame decoration members) and B (LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the gaming board 5) continue to emit monochromatic white light, they are not flashed or lit at a specific light intensity (e.g., maximum light intensity) (they are flashed or lit at an intensity lower than the specific light intensity). Furthermore, the speaker does not output the audio message "Play is being restricted because the daily ball output limit has been reached," resulting in a silent (inaudible) state in which no sound can be heard. This allows the highlighted notification to end even during a stoppage, preventing the notification from interfering with the play of surrounding players.

The suppression mode in this example only needs to suppress the amount of light more than the highlight mode. For example, for Lamp A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration members) and Lamp B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the gaming board 5), the light color pattern may be changed from the highlight mode so that the LEDs flash or light up in multiple colors. This allows the decorative effect to be maintained even on gaming machines that have reached a dead end and are no longer being played, and can play a role in livening up the entire gaming hall.

Furthermore, after transitioning to the stop state, for lamp C, the LED can be made to emit light at a specific brightness as a reference brightness confirmation mode, regardless of whether lamps A and B are in the emphasis mode as notification mode A or the suppression mode as notification mode B. This makes it easier to determine whether lamps A and B are in the emphasis mode as notification mode A or the suppression mode as notification mode B, compared to lamp C, which has a specific brightness.

Next, at timing t6, when a predetermined time (e.g., 5 minutes) has elapsed since lamps A and B transitioned to the suppressed mode as notification mode B, an energy-saving mode that intensifies the power saving of the sound and lamps is activated during the game-stop state, and the effect display device 1600 displays an energy-saving display as an image corresponding to the energy-saving mode. The energy-saving display displays the message "Energy-saving mode in progress." After the energy-saving mode is activated during the game-stop state, the display of variable special symbols cannot begin due to the game-stop state, and the energy-saving mode cannot be terminated even if a starting win occurs. However, the energy-saving mode cannot be terminated by the player operating the operation unit (e.g., handle 160 or effect operation unit 250). However, by continuing to display the progress-impossible display even after the game has transitioned to energy-saving mode, it is possible to prevent new players from starting play without recognizing that the game has reached the end of the game, even if the energy-saving mode has been activated.

In this example, the energy saving display, like the progress impossibility display, is displayed on a higher layer of the performance display device 1600. However, the specific area 2 in which the energy saving display is displayed is located outside of the specific display area 1 in which the progress impossibility display is displayed, and is in a different position from the specific display area 1. This ensures that the energy saving display is visible even while the progress impossibility display is displayed on a higher layer of the performance display device 1600, and ensures that the user is aware that energy saving mode is being executed.

In this example, the energy saving display, like the progress impossibility display, is displayed on the upper layer of the performance display device 1600, but it may also be displayed on the middle layer in a relationship of "upper layer > middle layer > lower layer." In such a case, the progress impossibility display in this example is displayed as a message on a screen consisting of an opaque darkened display (for example, a black background image) on the upper layer of the performance display device 1600, so the energy saving display displayed on the middle layer cannot be seen due to the darkened display on the upper layer.

In addition, the energy-saving display in this example, like the progress-impossible display, is displayed on the upper layer of the effect display device 1600. However, while the energy-saving display is displayed on the upper layer of the effect display device 1600, the progress-impossible display may be displayed on the middle layer in a relationship of "upper layer > middle layer > lower layer." This ensures the visibility of the energy-saving display even while the progress-impossible display is displayed on the middle layer of the effect display device 1600, ensuring reliable notification that energy-saving mode is in effect. It is preferable that the specific display area 1 in which the progress-impossible display is displayed on the middle layer of the effect display device 1600 is located outside the specific display area 2 in which the energy-saving display is displayed on the upper layer of the effect display device 1600, and is positioned so that it does not overlap with the specific display area 2 in the front-to-back direction. This ensures the visibility of the progress-impossible display even while the energy-saving display is displayed on the upper layer of the effect display device 1600, ensuring reliable notification that gameplay is restricted. Furthermore, the specific display area 1 in which the progress impossibility display is displayed on the middle layer of the performance display device 1600 may be positioned so that a portion of that specific display area 1 overlaps with specific display area 2 in the front-to-back direction; for example, even if specific display area 1 and specific display area 2 overlap, the progress impossibility display may be displayed shifted vertically or horizontally from the energy-saving display to an extent that the content of the progress impossibility display can be confirmed.

In addition, in this example, standby display 2, which was running during the demonstration period, is terminated when the system transitions to energy saving mode. Because standby display 2 is displayed on a lower layer of the performance display device 1600, even if it continues to be displayed after the system transitions to energy saving mode, the energy saving display displayed on a higher layer will not become invisible. However, by terminating standby display 2 when the system transitions to energy saving mode, the control burden on the peripheral control board 1510 can be reduced.

In addition, in this example, the progress impossibility display is displayed on a screen consisting of an opaque blackout display (for example, a black background image) in an upper layer of the effect display device 1600. This blackout display is displayed across almost the entire surface of the effect display device 1600. As a result, screens displayed on layers lower than the upper layer are made invisible due to the blackout display in the upper layer. Specifically, even after the transition to the play-stop state at timing t4, the lower layer of the effect display device 1600 continues to display a demonstration image as standby display 2, but the upper layer of the effect display device 1600 displays a progress impossibility display using almost the entire surface of the effect display device 1600, making the demonstration image invisible. As a result, after the transition to the play-stop state, the player does not realize that the demonstration period is in progress while the progress impossibility display is being displayed, and can reliably understand that the number of balls dispensed has reached a specific value and game restrictions are being implemented. Furthermore, after transitioning to the stop state, regardless of whether a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed in the normal standby state in which the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner, the lower layer of the effect display device 1600 may be forced to terminate so that the demonstration image does not continue to be displayed.

In addition, during energy saving mode, the speaker is muted and no sound is output. In other words, the speaker is in a silent state (inaudible state) where no sound can be heard. Furthermore, the LEDs for Lamp A (LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the frame decoration members) and Lamp B (LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the gaming board 5) are turned off. This prevents excessive power consumption by gaming machines that are in a stalled state and unable to play. Furthermore, the LED for Lamp C is enabled to emit light in a standard brightness confirmation mode, just like in the normal standby state. This allows the user to know that the LED for Lamp C is not turned off like Lamps A and B, and that the gaming machine is operating normally.

In this way, when the game enters energy saving mode during a game-stopping state, just as when the game enters energy saving mode during normal standby mode, the speaker mutes audio output, and the LEDs A (LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the frame decoration members) and B (LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5) are turned off to conserve power. Meanwhile, when the game enters energy saving mode during normal standby mode, an energy saving display is displayed on the effect display device 1600. However, when the game enters energy saving mode during a game-stopping state, not only is the energy saving display displayed on the effect display device 1600, but a progress-impossible display is also displayed in an area (specific display area 1) separate from the energy saving display. This makes it possible to determine during energy saving mode whether gameplay can begin in normal standby mode or whether gameplay is restricted during a game-stopping state, preventing new players from starting gameplay without realizing that the game is stopped.

In addition, in this example, during the game-stop state, Lamp A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration members) and Lamp B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the gaming board 5) transition from notification mode A (emphasis mode) to notification mode B (suppression mode), and the LEDs are turned off after an energy-saving mode is activated during the game-stop state. Also, during the game-stop state, the speaker is muted from notification mode A (emphasis mode), and after an energy-saving mode is activated during the game-stop state, the muting continues. In this way, by gradually reducing the power consumption of various presentation components during the game-stop state, it is possible to prevent the misunderstanding that the game-stop state has ended when power saving is activated, while also avoiding excessive power consumption by gaming machines that are unable to play during the game-stop state.

In addition, in this example, once the energy saving mode is initiated during a play-stop state, the variable display of special symbols cannot begin due to the play-stop state, and the energy saving mode cannot be terminated even if a starting win occurs. The energy saving mode cannot be terminated by the player operating the control unit (handle 160, presentation operation unit 250, etc.). In other words, once the energy saving mode (power saving state) is initiated during a play-stop state and power is saved, it is not possible to return to the non-power saving state before the energy saving mode was initiated. This prevents the player from thinking that the play-stop state has ended by returning to a non-power saving state, and prevents the player from having difficulty understanding whether or not the play-stop state is in progress.

Furthermore, in this example, even if a player operates the control unit (e.g., handle 160, presentation operation unit 250, etc.) before the energy-saving mode is initiated during the game-stop state (between timings t4 and t6), the execution of the energy-saving mode cannot be restricted. Specifically, the conditions for starting the energy-saving mode are met during the game-stop state when a predetermined time (e.g., five minutes) has elapsed since lamps A and B transitioned to the suppression mode (notification mode B), and the game enters the energy-saving mode during the game-stop state. However, even if a player operates the control unit before the energy-saving mode is initiated during the game-stop state, this does not affect the establishment of the conditions for starting the energy-saving mode during the game-stop state, and the game enters the energy-saving mode during the game-stop state. As described in detail above, during the normal standby state, the execution of the energy-saving mode can be restricted if a player operates the control unit (e.g., handle 160, presentation operation unit 250, etc.) before the energy-saving mode is initiated (between timings t1 and t2). In this way, by always running the energy saving mode without restricting it during a game-stopping state, it is possible to prevent excessive power consumption by gaming machines that are in a game-stopping state and cannot be played.

In addition, in the above example, after the energy saving mode is initiated during a stalled state, the display of variable special symbols cannot be started due to the stalled state, and the energy saving mode cannot be terminated even if a starting win is won. The energy saving mode cannot be terminated even by the player operating the operation unit (e.g., handle 160 or presentation operation unit 250). In other words, after the energy saving mode (power-saving state) is initiated during a stalled state and power is saved, it is not possible to return to the non-power saving state before the energy saving mode was initiated. Alternatively, it is possible to prevent a return to the non-power saving state before the energy saving mode was initiated, as described below. In other words, after the energy saving mode is initiated during a stalled state, the display of variable special symbols cannot be started due to the stalled state, and the energy saving mode cannot be terminated even if a starting win is won. However, it is also possible to terminate only the energy saving mode in response to the player operating the operation unit (e.g., handle 160 or presentation operation unit 250). Here, if the energy-saving mode that was occurring during the play-stop state is ended in response to the player operating the operation unit (such as the handle 160 or the presentation operation unit 250), notification mode A for the play-stop state may be executed again, thereby ensuring that new players are aware that the play-stop state has been reached. Furthermore, because the progress-impossible display continues to be displayed even after the energy-saving mode that was occurring during the play-stop state has been ended, it is possible to prevent new players from starting play without being aware that the play-stop state has been reached, even after the energy-saving mode has ended.

In the example described above, when the energy saving mode setting switch is turned ON, the device switches to energy saving mode during the power limit state, thereby enhancing standby power savings. However, as another example, even when the energy saving mode setting switch is turned ON, the device may not switch to energy saving mode during the power limit state, and instead, a separate control may be used to enhance power savings for the sound and lamp, thereby achieving standby power savings. Such an example is described below.

Figure 249 is a table comparing the notification modes related to light emission and sound when transitioning to notification mode C during a stop state. In another example, the energy saving mode does not occur during a stop state, but the notification mode changes to a mode similar to the energy saving mode during a stop state. Note that the normal standby state and energy saving mode are the same as when transitioning to energy saving mode during a stop state, so explanations are omitted.

In another example of a stopped state, an image corresponding to the stopped state, indicating that progress is impossible, is displayed on a higher layer of the effect display device 1600. Furthermore, upon transition to the stopped state, Lamp A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member), Lamp B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), and the speaker issue an alert in an emphasized mode consisting of a predetermined specific light intensity (e.g., maximum light intensity) and a predetermined specific volume (e.g., maximum volume) as alert mode A, but once a predetermined period (e.g., 15 seconds) has elapsed, the alert transitions to an alert in a suppressed mode in which the light intensity and volume are suppressed as alert mode B. Specifically, once a predetermined period (e.g., 15 seconds) has elapsed, the speaker stops outputting sound and mutes the sound.

For Lamp A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration members) and Lamp B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), after a predetermined time (e.g., 5 minutes) has elapsed since switching to Notification Mode B, the system switches to Notification Mode C, which has even less light output than Notification Mode B, and the LEDs are turned off. At this time, no sound is output from the speaker, and the mute state continues. Note that, as in the normal standby state, Lamp C may be enabled to emit light in the reference brightness confirmation mode, but given the nature of the stop state, in which the setting adjustment button 204 is not operated, Lamp C may remain turned off regardless of whether a specific light emission start condition is met.

Figure 250 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when it transitions to notification mode C during a game-stop state. The following explanation assumes that the energy-saving mode setting switch has been turned ON. Note that the behavior until the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value at timing t4 and game play restrictions are implemented is the same as when transitioning to energy-saving mode during a game-stop state, so explanation is omitted here.

First, at timing t4, after the transition to the no-play state, regardless of whether a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the normal standby state in which no special symbols are displayed in a variable manner, a restriction is placed on the lower layer of the performance display device 1600 so that the demonstration image is not displayed in the first place. The demonstration image (standby display 1) is displayed on the lower layer of the performance display device 1600, so even if it is made displayable after the transition to the no-play state, for example, the no-progress display displayed on the upper layer will not become invisible. However, by placing a restriction at the time of transition to the no-play state, the control burden on the peripheral control board 1510 can be reduced.

Furthermore, after transitioning to the play-stop state, the effect display device 1600 displays an "unplayable" message on almost the entire surface of the effect display device 1600 as an image corresponding to the play-stop state. At this time, as Lamp A (LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the frame decoration members), Lamp B (LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5), and the speaker perform the action required for unplayable state, they forcibly issue a notification in an emphasized mode consisting of a predetermined specific light intensity (e.g., maximum light intensity) and a predetermined specific volume (e.g., maximum volume) as notification mode A, regardless of the setting status set by operating the setting adjustment button 204. Specifically, Lamp A (LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the frame decoration members) and Lamp B (LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5) emit a monochromatic white light, and the LEDs flash or light up at a specific light intensity (e.g., maximum light intensity), and the speaker outputs a voice message at a specific volume (e.g., maximum volume) stating, "Play is being restricted because the daily ball payout limit has been reached." This allows the hall manager to be clearly informed that a transition to a play-stop state has occurred. It is preferable that the highlighted notification related to the play-stop state be different from the notification used in the event of other errors, such as abnormalities.

Then, at time t5, after a predetermined period (e.g., 15 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the highlighted notification as notification mode A, the effect display device 1600 maintains the progress-impossible display using substantially the entire surface of the effect display device 1600, but the lamps A (LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the frame decoration members) and B (LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the gaming board 5) transition to a suppressed notification mode with reduced light output as notification mode B. Specifically, while the LEDs of lamps A (LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the frame decoration members) and B (LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the gaming board 5) continue to emit monochromatic white light, they are not flashed or lit at a specific light intensity (e.g., maximum light intensity) (they are flashed or lit at an intensity lower than the specific light intensity). Furthermore, the speaker does not output the audio message "Play is being restricted because the daily ball output limit has been reached," resulting in a silent (inaudible) state in which no sound can be heard. This allows the highlighted notification to end even during a stoppage, preventing the notification from interfering with the play of surrounding players.

The suppression mode in this example only needs to suppress the amount of light more than the highlight mode. For example, for Lamp A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration members) and Lamp B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the gaming board 5), the light color pattern may be changed from the highlight mode so that the LEDs flash or light up in multiple colors. This allows the decorative effect to be maintained even on gaming machines that have reached a dead state and are no longer being played, and can play a role in livening up the entire gaming hall.

Furthermore, after transitioning to the stop state, for lamp C, the LED can be made to emit light at a specific brightness as a reference brightness confirmation mode, regardless of whether lamps A and B are in the emphasis mode as notification mode A or the suppression mode as notification mode B. This makes it easier to determine whether lamps A and B are in the emphasis mode as notification mode A or the suppression mode as notification mode B, compared to lamp C, which has a specific brightness.

Next, at timing t6, when a predetermined time (e.g., 5 minutes) has elapsed since Lamps A and B transitioned to the suppressed mode as Notification Mode B, the effect display device 1600 maintains the progress-impossible display using almost the entire surface of the effect display device 1600. However, for Lamp A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member) and Lamp B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the game board 5), the light output is further suppressed than in Notification Mode B, as Notification Mode C, and the LEDs are turned off. This prevents excessive power consumption by gaming machines that are in a stalled state and cannot be played. Furthermore, the speaker does not output the audio message "Play has been restricted because the daily payout limit has been reached," maintaining a silent (inaudible) state in which no sound can be heard. Note that Lamp C, like in the normal standby state, is enabled to emit an LED at a specific brightness as a reference brightness confirmation mode. This allows the user to determine that the LED of Lamp C is not turned off like Lamps A and B, and that the gaming machine is operating normally.

In this way, when the game transitions to notification mode C during a game-stopped state, just as when the game transitions to energy-saving mode during normal standby mode, the speaker mutes audio output and lamps A (LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the frame decoration members) and B (LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the game board 5) are turned off, thereby saving power. On the other hand, when the game transitions to energy-saving mode during normal standby mode, an energy-saving display is displayed on the effect display device 1600, but when the game transitions to notification mode C during a game-stopped state, an indication that progress is not possible is displayed on the effect display device 1600. This makes it possible to determine whether game play can begin in normal standby mode or whether game play is restricted during a game-stopped state during periods when audio output is stopped or lamps are turned off, preventing new players from starting gameplay without realizing that the game is in a game-stopped state.

In addition, in this example, during the game-stop state, Lamp A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration members) and Lamp B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the gaming board 5) transition from notification mode A (highlighted mode) to notification mode B (suppressed mode), and then to notification mode C (off). Also, during the game-stop state, the speaker switches from notification mode A (highlighted mode) to muted mode. In this way, by gradually reducing the power consumption of various presentation components during the game-stop state, it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking power saving for the end of the game-stop state, while also avoiding excessive power consumption by gaming machines that are unable to play during the game-stop state.

Furthermore, in this example, after transitioning to notification mode C during a play-stop state, the display of special symbols cannot begin due to the play-stop state, and notification mode C cannot be ended even if a starting win occurs. Notification mode C cannot be ended by the player operating the operation unit (handle 160, presentation operation unit 250, etc.). In other words, after transitioning to notification mode C (power-saving state) during a play-stop state and saving power, it is not possible to return to the non-power-saving state (notification mode A or notification mode B) prior to transitioning to notification mode C. This prevents the player from thinking that the play-stop state has ended by returning to a non-power-saving state, and prevents the player from having difficulty understanding whether or not they are in a play-stop state.

Furthermore, in this example, even if the player operates the operation unit (such as the handle 160 or the presentation operation unit 250) before the transition to notification mode C during the game-stop state (the period between timings t4 and t6), it is not possible to restrict the transition to notification mode C. Specifically, the conditions for starting notification mode C during the game-stop state are met when a predetermined time (e.g., five minutes) has passed since lamps A and B transitioned to the suppression mode for notification mode B, and the game transitions to notification mode C during the game-stop state. However, even if the player operates the operation unit before the transition to notification mode C during the game-stop state, this has no bearing on the fulfillment of the conditions for starting notification mode C during the game-stop state, and the game transitions to notification mode C during the game-stop state. As described in detail above, in the normal standby state, it is possible to restrict the execution of the energy-saving mode if the player operates the operation unit (such as the handle 160 or the presentation operation unit 250) before the energy-saving mode is initiated (the period between timings t1 and t2). In this way, by always executing the transition to notification mode C without restricting it during a game-stopping state, it is possible to prevent excessive power consumption by gaming machines that are in a game-stopping state and cannot be played.

In addition, in the above example, after transitioning to notification mode C during a stop-play state, the display of special symbols cannot be initiated due to the stop-play state, and notification mode C cannot be terminated even if a starting win occurs. Notification mode C cannot be terminated even by the player operating the operation unit (such as the handle 160 or the presentation operation unit 250). In other words, after notification mode C (power-saving state) occurs during a stop-play state and power is saved, it is not possible to return to the non-power-saving state (such as notification mode A or notification mode B) prior to transitioning to notification mode C. However, instead, it is possible to prevent a return to the non-power-saving state prior to transitioning to notification mode C as described below. In other words, after transitioning to notification mode C during a stop-play state, the display of special symbols cannot be initiated due to the stop-play state, and notification mode C cannot be terminated even if a starting win occurs. However, it is also possible to terminate only notification mode C in response to the player operating the operation unit (such as the handle 160 or the presentation operation unit 250). Here, if the player ends notification mode C while in the stopped state in response to operation of the operation unit (handle 160, presentation operation unit 250, etc.), notification mode A for the stopped state may be executed again, thereby ensuring that new players are aware that the game has reached a stopped state. Furthermore, even after notification mode C ends while the game is in the stopped state, the progress impossibility display continues to be displayed, so that even if notification mode C ends, it is possible to prevent new players from starting play without recognizing that the game has reached a stopped state.

(Regarding the forced transition to a halted state)
As mentioned above, when the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value calculated based on the winning balls that enter each winning slot, the machine enters a stop state and play is restricted, but for gaming machines that are just about to reach a specific value (for example, when the number of balls remaining until the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value is less than the number of balls dispensed in one win game (1,500 balls, etc.)), there is a possibility that the machine will enter a stop state early when a new player begins playing. For this reason, it is conceivable that the administrator could intentionally enter a stop state for gaming machines that are just about to reach a specific value, in order to prevent new players from entering a stop state early in their play. However, for the administrator to intentionally transition to a dead-end state, it is necessary to allow a game ball to enter a winning slot and have the payout amount reach a specific value. However, if a winning ball enters each winning slot, causing a special symbol to change or a winning game to occur, various effects (such as a change effect or an effect associated with a winning game during a winning game) may be noticeable and may cause other players to feel suspicious. Furthermore, such work places a heavy burden on the administrator. Therefore, in this example, a configuration is described below that makes it possible to easily trigger a dead-end state when the payout amount is about to reach a specific value, in a manner that prevents other players from feeling suspicious and reduces the administrator's burden.

In this example, as described above, two types of administrator tasks are provided to easily trigger a dead-end state: a first administrator task of operating a prize ball addition switch provided on the gaming board 5, and a second administrator task of depositing game balls into a prize ball addition port provided on the gaming board 5. Both tasks can be performed at any time as long as the gaming machine is powered on. Each task is explained below.

First, we will explain the first administrator task. In this example, a depressible prize ball addition switch (not shown) is implemented on the main control board 1310 of the game board 5, and can be operated by opening the main body frame 4. When this prize ball addition switch is pressed and held for a predetermined period of time (3 seconds in this example) with the main body frame 4 open, a predetermined number of prize balls are forcibly awarded under control of the main control board 1310, without going through control on the payout control board 633 (or payout control board), and are reflected in the calculation of the ball payout amount. The number of prize balls is set to 100. In other words, when a game ball is received in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the number of prize balls is 1, and when a game ball is received in the large prize port 2005 during a winning game, the number of prize balls is 10 or 13, whereas when the prize ball addition switch is operated, the number of prize balls is 100, which is a larger number of prize balls than those set in the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, and the large prize port 2005. As a result, when the amount of balls dispensed is about to reach a specific value, the administrator can increase the amount of balls dispensed all at once by operating the prize ball addition switch once, and by operating the number of times required corresponding to the difference until the amount of balls dispensed reaches the specific value, the amount of balls dispensed can be quickly shifted to a stop state when the specific value is reached. The prize ball addition switch does not have to be mounted on the main control board 1310 of the game board 5, but may also be mounted on the payout control board 633 (or payout control board). In that case, operation information and information regarding the provision of a predetermined number of prize balls can be transmitted from the payout control board 633 (or payout control board) to the main control board 1310, and reflected in the calculation of the amount of balls dispensed.

Next, the second administrator's work will be explained. The gaming board 5 described above is equipped with various prize openings (such as the first start opening 2002, the second start opening 2004, and the large prize opening 2005) that can award prize balls when they receive a game ball shot into the gaming area 5a. However, in this example, a prize ball addition opening (not shown) is provided in addition to these prize openings to facilitate the occurrence of a stalled state. This prize ball addition opening, like the other prize openings, is located within the gaming area 5a and is always open, rather than being variable like the large prize opening 2005, and is configured to allow balls to enter from an upper entrance (a so-called pocket-type opening). However, the entrance to the prize ball addition opening is closed by a predetermined member (for example, a blocking nail or resin wall is placed to prevent ball entry). This makes it impossible or difficult for game balls shot into the gaming area 5a during normal play involving a player's firing operation to be accepted by the prize ball addition opening. In other words, the possibility of a ball entering the prize ball addition port is lower than that of other winning ports, and during normal play involving the player's firing operation, the likelihood of a game ball entering the prize ball addition port is extremely low, preventing game balls from entering the prize ball addition port during normal play. As mentioned above, while the entrance to the prize ball addition port is closed off by a specified component (such as a blocking nail or resin wall), this specified component is positioned above the entrance to the prize ball addition port, leaving a space large enough for 1.5 game balls to be positioned. This prevents game balls from entering in the downstream direction, but does not prevent balls from entering from the front of the prize ball addition port. This allows balls to be entered into the prize ball addition port by an administrator with the door frame 3 open.

As a second administrator task, when the administrator places one game ball into the prize ball addition port with door frame 3 open, a predetermined number (100) of prize balls are awarded, as with the first administrator task. When a ball is placed into the prize ball addition port, information regarding the awarding of a predetermined number of prize balls is transmitted from the payout control board 633 (or payout control board) to the main control board 1310, as with normal prize ball processing, and is reflected in the calculation of the amount of balls dispensed. Also, as with the first administrator's work described above, when a game ball is received into the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the number of prize balls is 1; when a game ball is received into the large prize port 2005 during a winning game, the number of prize balls is 10 or 13; whereas when a game ball is received into the prize ball addition port, the number of prize balls is 100, which is a larger number of prize balls than those set for the first start port 2002, the second start port 2004, and the large prize port 2005. As a result, when the amount of balls dispensed is about to reach a specific value, the administrator can increase the amount of balls dispensed all at once by inserting one game ball into the prize ball addition port; and by inserting the required number of balls corresponding to the difference until the amount of balls dispensed reaches the specific value, the amount of balls dispensed can be quickly shifted to a capped state once the specific value is reached.

In this example, the special prize balls awarded in response to the first administrator operation (operation of the prize ball addition switch) and the second administrator operation (entry of a ball into the prize ball addition port) are controlled as much as possible within the normal prize ball processing to avoid control complications such as program changes. In other words, in this example, because these special prize balls are controlled within the normal prize ball processing, they are also directly reflected in the calculation of the base value using the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 described above. Therefore, the number of special prize balls (predetermined number) awarded in response to the first administrator operation (operation of the prize ball addition switch) and the second administrator operation (entry of a ball into the prize ball addition port) is not limited to the aforementioned 100 balls, but can be 1,000 or 10,000 balls. However, considering the impact of awarding more prize balls than necessary to reach a specific payout value, which could cause the base value to become abnormal, the number "100" described above is used in this example, thereby minimizing the impact of the base value becoming abnormal as much as possible. Furthermore, if the effect of the base value becoming an abnormal value is to be suppressed, the number of special prize balls may be reduced to fewer than 100; however, taking into consideration the ease of operation (number of operations) when awarding special prize balls, it is preferable to set the number at least greater than the number of prize balls awarded when game balls are received in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004.

In addition, the transition to the stop state using the first administrator operation (operation of the prize ball addition switch) or the second administrator operation (entering a ball into the prize ball addition port) is controlled not only during the display of special symbols or during a winning game, but also during a game standby state (normal standby state or energy-saving mode) when the special symbol changing display is not being performed. This allows the administrator to operate the prize ball addition switch or enter a game ball into the prize ball addition port during normal standby state or energy-saving mode when the number of balls dispensed is about to reach a specific value, thereby increasing the number of balls dispensed by the special prize balls and reaching the specific value. In such cases, it becomes possible to transition directly from the normal standby state or energy-saving mode to the stop state and implement game restrictions without triggering the display of special symbols or a winning game. In this way, by performing a first administrator operation (operating the prize ball addition switch) or a second administrator operation (putting a ball into the prize ball addition port) during normal standby mode or energy-saving mode, it is possible to increase the number of balls dispensed with special prize balls and transition to a limit state. This eliminates the need to display special symbols or trigger winning games when transitioning to a limit state, thereby reducing the workload on the administrator. Furthermore, for gaming machines that are on the verge of reaching a specific number of balls dispensed, transitioning to a limit state through such administrator operation can prevent a situation in which a new player plays and the machine transitions to a limit state too early.

In addition, when a ball enters the prize ball additional port, the winning is not announced. For example, when a ball enters the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, or the large winning port 2005, a ball entry sound is output from the speaker to announce the winning, but when a ball enters the prize ball additional port, no ball entry sound is output from the speaker to announce the winning. In addition, when a ball enters the prize ball additional port, no effects are generated other than the awarding of prize balls. For example, when a ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, a variable effect related to the variable display of decorative patterns is generated using the effect display device 1600, lamps, speakers, etc., and when a ball enters the large winning port 2005, a winning effect is generated using the effect display device 1600, lamps, speakers, etc., but when a ball enters the prize ball additional port, no variable effect, winning effect, etc. is generated, and no effects are generated. This means that if the number of balls dispensed is about to reach a specific value, even if the administrator places a game ball into the prize ball addition port, the administrator can perform work related to the stoppage without attracting attention from those around them.

In addition, in this example, if a winning ball is entered into the first start slot 2002, second start slot 2004, or large winning slot 2005 while the aforementioned standby effect 2 (demonstration period) or energy saving mode is being executed, standby effect 2 or energy saving mode is terminated, and a variable effect or a winning effect, etc., is initiated. However, if a winning ball is entered into the prize ball addition slot while standby effect 2 (demonstration period) or energy saving mode is being executed, standby effect 2 or energy saving mode is not terminated, and each control continues without issuing the notification associated with a winning ball entered into the prize ball addition slot, as described above. As a result, even if the administrator enters a game ball into the prize ball addition slot while standby effect 2 or energy saving mode is being executed, if the number of balls dispensed does not reach a specific value, standby effect 2 or energy saving mode will continue to operate without terminating standby effect 2 or energy saving mode. This also allows the administrator to perform tasks related to the occurrence of a game stop state without attracting attention from those around them.

As mentioned above, both tasks can be performed at any time while the gaming machine is powered on. However, in anticipation of the possibility of unauthorized first or second administrator work, a predetermined state (work-disabled state) can be established in which both the first and second administrator work are disabled. The work-disabled state can be established when the power is turned on in a predetermined manner. In this example, a work-disabled switch that can be pressed separately from the prize ball addition switch is implemented on the main control board 1310 of the gaming board 5. The work-disabled state can be established by setting the power on in a predetermined manner, i.e., with the work-disabled switch pressed. After the work-disabled state is established, unless a predetermined release operation (in this example, pressing the work-disabled switch again) is performed while the power is on, or unless the power is turned on again, the first or second administrator work can be disabled without being enabled. By creating a work invalid state in this way, it is possible to prevent prize balls from being added even if the first or second administrator work action is performed fraudulently, and to curb fraudulent actions that fraudulently increase the number of prize balls.

Furthermore, if an illegal entry into the prize ball addition port is suspected, an error alert is issued. Specifically, in this example, no special effects are issued when a prize ball is entered into the prize ball addition port, as described above. However, if a large number of game balls (15 balls within one minute in this example) are detected to have entered the prize ball addition port in a short period of time under certain circumstances that clearly suggest illegal activity (e.g., when there are 1,500 or more balls remaining until the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value), the system considers the entry of additional prize balls equivalent to the amount of balls dispensed in a single winning game to be abnormal, and issues an error alert using the effect display device 1600, lamps, speakers, etc., to notify of the illegal addition of prize balls. As described above, the prize ball addition port is unable or difficult to accept game balls inserted into the play area 5a. Therefore, in normal play, a large number of game balls would not enter the prize ball addition port in a short period of time. In this regard, if the amount of balls dispensed is on the verge of reaching a specific value and the administrator simply places 5 to 10 game balls into the prize ball addition port, an error notification will not be issued to notify players of an illegal increase in prize balls. However, in normal play, if a large number of game balls are placed into the prize ball addition port in a short period of time, an error notification will be issued to notify players of an illegal increase in prize balls, preventing attempts to gain profits through illegal entry. Furthermore, if fraudulent operation of the prize ball addition switch is suspected, an error notification may be issued in the same manner as above to notify players of an illegal increase in prize balls.

In addition, in this example, the transition to the stop state is controlled not only when the main frame 4 or door frame 3 is closed, but also when the main frame 4 or door frame 3 is open. For example, in normal play, while the main frame 4 is closed, game balls can be placed in the first start opening 2002, the second start opening 2004, or the large prize opening 2005, and the amount of balls dispensed can reach a specific value through these winnings, whereas in the first administrator operation of this example, when the amount of balls dispensed is about to reach a specific value, the main frame 4 can be opened and the administrator can operate the prize ball addition switch, and the amount of balls dispensed can reach a specific value through the addition of prize balls related to this operation. Furthermore, during normal gameplay, while door frame 3 is closed, game balls can be placed into first start opening 2002, second start opening 2004, or large prize opening 2005, causing the number of balls dispensed to reach a specific value. However, in the second administrator's operation in this example, when the number of balls dispensed is about to reach a specific value, door frame 3 can be opened and the administrator can place game balls into the prize ball addition opening, causing the number of balls dispensed to reach a specific value through the addition of prize balls associated with the placement. In such cases, it is possible to transition to a stop state and implement game restrictions without closing main frame 4 or door frame 3. By transitioning to a stop state even while main frame 4 or door frame 3 is open in this way, it is possible to make the transition to a stop state easier for the administrator performing the first or second administrator operation to understand, thereby reducing the administrator's workload.

During normal gameplay, when the main frame 4 or door frame 3 is opened (a specific state), a notification (specific notification in the normal notification mode) regarding the opening of the main frame 4 or door frame 3 is issued using sound, light, and video, and communicated to the outside. However, as described above, considering that the administrator can perform tasks related to the occurrence of a game-ending state (first administrator task and second administrator task) without attracting attention, this example implements special processing to suppress notifications regarding the opening of the main frame 4 or door frame 3 compared to normal gameplay when the first administrator task or second administrator task is performed, at least while the aforementioned standby effect 2 (demonstration period) or energy-saving mode is being executed. Specifically, even if the main frame 4 or door frame 3 is opened during standby effect 2 (demonstration period) or energy-saving mode, standby effect 2 or energy-saving mode is not terminated, and all notifications (all using sound, light, and video; specific notifications in the normal notification mode) regarding the opening of the main frame 4 or door frame 3 that are issued during normal gameplay are not issued, and each control continues. As a result, even if the manager performs the first or second manager task while standby effect 2 or energy saving mode is running, if the amount of balls dispensed does not reach a specific value, standby effect 2 or energy saving mode will not end and will continue to operate, allowing the manager to perform tasks related to the occurrence of a limit state without attracting attention from those around them. Furthermore, even if the manager performs the first or second manager task while standby effect 2 or energy saving mode is running, no notification will be sent regarding the opening of main frame 4 or door frame 3, allowing the manager to perform tasks related to the occurrence of a limit state without attracting attention from those around them.

Furthermore, if a game enters a stop state during normal play, even if the main frame 4 or door frame 3 is in an open state (specific state) after the transition to the stop state, special processing is performed to suppress notifications regarding the opening of the main frame 4 or door frame 3 compared to normal play. Specifically, if the main frame 4 or door frame 3 is opened during normal play and the game enters a stop state, variable effects related to normal play end and a notification regarding the stop state is made, but after the transition to the stop state, no notifications (all using sound, light, and video; specific notifications in normal notification mode) regarding the opening of the main frame 4 or door frame 3 that are made during normal play are made. As a result, even if the main frame 4 or door frame 3 is opened during normal play and the administrator performs the first or second administrator task, no notifications regarding the opening of the main frame 4 or door frame 3 are made after the transition to the stop state, allowing the administrator to perform the tasks related to the occurrence of the stop state without attracting attention from others.

Similarly, when transitioning from Standby Effect 2 or Energy Saving Mode to a game-stopping state, even if the main frame 4 or door frame 3 is in an open state (specific state) after the transition to the game-stopping state, special processing is performed to suppress notifications regarding the opening of the main frame 4 or door frame 3 more than during normal play. Specifically, if the main frame 4 or door frame 3 is in an open state and the game-stopping state is transitioned to while Standby Effect 2 (demonstration period) or Energy Saving Mode is being executed, Standby Effect 2 or Energy Saving Mode will end and a notification regarding the game-stopping state will be issued, but during the period before and after the transition to the game-stopping state, no notifications (all using sound, light, or video; specific notifications in normal notification mode) regarding the opening of the main frame 4 or door frame 3 that are issued during normal play will be issued. As a result, even if the manager performs the first or second manager task during the transition from standby effect 2 or energy saving mode to the stop state, no notification will be sent regarding the opening of the main frame 4 or door frame 3, allowing the manager to perform tasks related to the occurrence of the stop state without drawing attention to those around them.

Furthermore, after the game enters a stop state while the main frame 4 or door frame 3 is closed, a notification (post-suppression notification) regarding the stop state is issued using sound, light, and video. However, if the game enters a stop state while the main frame 4 or door frame 3 is open, or if the closed main frame 4 or door frame 3 is opened during a stop state, no notification (all using sound, light, and video; specific notification in the normal notification mode) regarding the opening of the main frame 4 or door frame 3 that is issued during normal play is issued. However, a notification (post-suppression notification) regarding the stop state is issued, just as when the main frame 4 or door frame 3 is closed. In this way, if the main frame 4 or door frame 3 is open even during a stop state, only a notification regarding the stop state is issued. This makes it easier for the manager performing the first or second manager task while the main frame 4 or door frame 3 is open to understand the transition to a stop state, thereby reducing the manager's workload.

While the above example illustrates a system in which no notification regarding the opening of the main frame 4 or door frame 3 is given during standby effect 2 (demonstration period), energy saving mode, or the game-stopped state, notifications regarding the opening of the main frame 4 or door frame 3 may alternatively be given in a manner that is not conspicuous to those around. For example, in another example, when the manager performs the first or second manager task, operations related to the opening of the main frame 4 or door frame 3 (notification regarding the opening of the main frame 4 or door frame 3) may be executed even during operations related to standby effect 2 (demonstration period), energy saving mode, or the game-stopped state. Furthermore, during normal play, operations related to the game-stopped state are executed using sound, light, and video after the game-stopped state is entered. However, if the main frame 4 or door frame 3 is open during the game-stopped state, some of the above-mentioned elements may be used in parallel with the operations related to the opening of the main frame 4 or door frame 3. For example, if the main frame 4 or door frame 3 is open while the game is in a stalled state, the performance display device 1600 (image), which is one of the performance elements with the least visibility from the outside, may display an image corresponding to the stalled state (progression impossible display) while also displaying an image corresponding to the main frame 4 or door frame 3 being open (open notification display) in an area different from the area where the progress impossible display is displayed. Then, when the open main frame 4 or door frame 3 is closed, the open notification display on the performance display device 1600 may be terminated, and only the operation related to the stalled state (progression impossible display) may be performed. In such a case, the performance display device 1600 may be configured to execute image control corresponding to the main frame 4 or door frame 3 being open in parallel with the operation schedule related to the stalled state, and only the operation related to the stalled state will be performed once the door frame 3 is closed. In this way, even if a notification is issued regarding the opening of the main frame 4 or door frame 3, the manager may perform work related to the stalled state without attracting attention from those around them.

In addition, the above example shows a system in which no notification is given regarding the opening of the main frame 4 or door frame 3 during standby effect 2 (demonstration period), energy saving mode, or the game-stop state. However, from the perspective of preventing fraud, such as using magnets or applying vibrations to cause game balls to enter various winning slots, or preventing malfunctions such as hitting the gaming machine to cause impact and causing malfunctions in certain components, notifications regarding specific states in which fraudulent magnetism, vibration, etc. is detected are given in a conspicuous manner during standby effect 2 (demonstration period), energy saving mode, and the game-stop state, just as with normal play. In this example, the notification priority is "notification regarding the opening of the main frame 4 or door frame 3 > notification regarding a specific state." Therefore, if notification priority were to be followed, if a notification regarding the opening of the main frame 4 or door frame 3 were not made, the notification regarding the specific state would not be made either. However, during standby effect 2 (demonstration period), energy saving mode, or the game-stopping state, control is performed that does not follow notification priority, so that although a notification regarding the opening of the main frame 4 or door frame 3 is not made, the notification regarding the specific state is made as in normal gameplay. By doing this, even during standby effect 2 (demonstration period), energy saving mode, or the game-stopping state, fraud or malfunctions can be notified to the outside, thereby preventing behavior that could lead to fraud or malfunctions.

In addition, the above example shows a system in which no notifications regarding the opening of the main frame 4 or door frame 3 are issued during standby effect 2 (demonstration period), energy-saving mode, or the game-stopped state. However, notifications that may occur due to the first or second administrator's work, not just notifications regarding opening, may also be suppressed during standby effect 2 (demonstration period), energy-saving mode, or the game-stopped state, similar to notifications regarding opening, in order to avoid attracting attention from those around you. For example, in the case of a system in which error notifications related to the payout of game balls (such as a tray full error) are issued during normal play, error notifications related to the payout of game balls that occur due to the addition of prize balls by the first or second administrator's work (such as a tray full error) may be suppressed or suppressed during standby effect 2 (demonstration period), energy-saving mode, or the game-stopped state, similar to the notifications related to opening described above.

Figure 251 is a time chart showing the behavior of a pachinko machine when a first administrator operation or a second administrator operation is performed during energy-saving mode, causing the machine to transition to a stop-play state. The following explanation assumes that the energy-saving mode setting switch is turned ON. Note that, except for the fact that the stop-play state occurs at times t2 to t3 when the prize ball addition switch is operated or a prize ball is entered into the prize ball addition slot during energy-saving mode, the behavior is the same as when a prize is entered into each prize slot during the variable display of special symbols as shown in Figure 248, causing the machine to transition to a stop-play state, and therefore explanation is omitted here.

First, even if the prize ball addition switch is operated or a ball is placed in the prize ball addition port at timing t3 during energy saving mode, if the amount of balls dispensed does not reach a specific value, no special effects are produced and operation related to energy saving mode continues. In this way, by not producing any special effects other than the awarding of prize balls when the prize ball addition switch is operated or a ball is placed in the prize ball addition port, the amount of balls dispensed can be increased without attracting attention from those around.

Also, although not shown, the same applies if the energy saving mode has not been activated at time t3 and the machine is in normal standby mode. In other words, even if the prize ball addition switch is operated or a ball is placed in the prize ball addition port during normal standby mode, if the amount of balls dispensed does not reach a specific value, no special effects are produced and operation related to normal standby mode continues. In this way, by not producing any special effects other than the awarding of prize balls when the prize ball addition switch is operated or a ball is placed in the prize ball addition port, the amount of balls dispensed can be increased without attracting attention from those around.

As described above in detail, during energy-saving mode, the effect display device 1600 displays an energy-saving display in specific area 2 of the upper layer, and when the remaining number of balls until the specific value has been reached has reached a predetermined value (e.g., 5,000 balls), it displays a pre-notification display in specific area 1 of the upper layer. Also, during energy-saving mode, the speaker is muted and no sound is output. In other words, the speaker is in a silent state (inaudible state) where no sound can be heard. Furthermore, the LEDs of Lamp A (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the frame decoration member) and Lamp B (LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the gaming board 5) are turned off. As for Lamp C, the LED is enabled to emit light in a mode for confirming the reference brightness, as in the normal standby state. This allows the user to know that the LED of Lamp C is not turned off like Lamps A and B, and that the gaming machine is operating normally.

Next, at timing t4 during energy-saving mode, if the prize ball addition switch is operated or a prize ball is placed in the prize ball addition slot, and the payout amount reaches a specific value, game restrictions will be implemented. In this case, energy-saving mode operations are terminated, and the game transitions to a stop state, disabling gameplay. As described above, when the payout amount reaches a specific value calculated based on the prize balls placed in each slot, the game is stopped and gameplay is restricted. In this example, these game restrictions are controlled not only during the display of special symbols or during winning games, but also during energy-saving mode. As a result, for example, if the payout amount is about to reach a specific value, the prize ball addition switch, which is not a condition for terminating energy-saving mode, can be operated or a prize ball can be placed in the prize ball addition slot, causing the payout amount to reach a specific value. In such cases, game restrictions can be implemented directly from energy-saving mode without triggering the display of special symbols. By directly transitioning from energy saving mode to the stop mode in this way, it is possible to prevent situations in which a player plays a gaming machine that is on the verge of reaching a specific ball output value, causing the machine to transition to the stop mode too early.

Also, although not shown, the same applies if the energy saving mode has not been activated at time t4 and the machine is in normal standby mode. In other words, even if the prize ball addition switch is operated or a prize ball is placed in an additional prize ball slot during normal standby mode, if the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, game restrictions will be implemented. In this case, operations related to the normal standby mode are terminated, and the machine transitions to a stop state in which game progress is disabled. As mentioned above, when the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value as calculated based on the prize balls generated by the entry into each prize slot, the machine enters a stop state and game play is restricted. In this example, these game restrictions are controlled not only during the variable display of special symbols or during winning gameplay, but also during normal standby mode. This means that, for example, if the number of balls dispensed is about to reach a specific value, the prize ball addition switch can be operated or a prize ball can be placed in the prize ball addition port, which are not required to end the normal standby state, and the number of balls dispensed can be increased to the specific value. In such cases, it is possible to restrict play directly from the normal standby state without triggering various effects such as the display of changing special symbols. By transitioning directly from the normal standby state to the no-play state in this way, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a player plays a gaming machine that is about to reach a specific value in terms of the number of balls dispensed and the machine prematurely transitions to the no-play state.

Furthermore, the process after the game has reached the limit state is the same as when a ball is won at each winning slot during the variable display of special symbols as shown in Figure 248, and the game then reaches the limit state, so a description thereof will be omitted. Note that, after the game has reached the limit state, as in the case of a ball being won at each winning slot during the variable display of special symbols as shown in Figure 250, the game may not transition to energy-saving mode during the limit state, but may instead increase power saving for sounds and lamps through separate control. Furthermore, after the game has reached the limit state, no prize balls will be awarded even if the prize ball addition switch is operated or a prize is won at a prize ball addition slot.

Also, the door frame 3 may remain closed relative to the main frame 4, allowing the administrator to place game balls in the prize ball addition port. Specifically, the door frame 3 is provided with an opening that allows access to the prize ball addition port. Under normal circumstances, the opening is closed by a predetermined closing member (in this example, a transparent, flat plate member) in a state that is visible from the outside. During the second administrator's work, the closing member is opened to open the opening, allowing the administrator to place game balls in the prize ball addition port through the opening. Furthermore, when opening the closing member to open the opening, a key owned by the administrator is required. By inserting the key into the keyhole and rotating it, the closing member can be released from the opening portion. This eliminates the need to open the door frame 3 during the second administrator's work, allowing the administrator to perform their work without attracting attention from those around them.

In addition, given that the prize ball addition port is the target of administrator work, it is preferable to locate it in a location on the gaming board 5 that is visible from the outside, but from the perspective of fraud prevention, it is preferable to locate it in a location that is difficult to see from the outside. Therefore, for example, the location of the prize ball addition port should be integrated into the component where the other ball entry ports are located, and special notation such as a predetermined symbol or marking (for example, characters indicating that a ball can be entered, such as "IN") should be written only on the front side of the other ball entry ports, while no special notation should be written on the front side of the prize ball addition port. This makes it possible to locate the prize ball addition port in a location that is difficult to see from the outside, while still being visible from the outside, which is effective in terms of both administrator work and fraud prevention. Furthermore, when locating the prize ball addition port in a location that is difficult to see from the outside (especially by players), it is preferable to use a non-luminous decorative component that does not have an LED or other light-emitting element and is not subject to luminous decoration.

In addition, while the above example shows a configuration in which one prize ball addition port is provided on the gaming board 5, in consideration of making it faster (smoother) for the administrator to add game balls, the gaming board 5 may be configured to have multiple prize ball addition ports. Furthermore, when the gaming board 5 is configured to have multiple prize ball addition ports, the above-mentioned special notation need not be written on any of the multiple prize ball addition ports. Furthermore, when the gaming board 5 is configured to have multiple prize ball addition ports, the multiple prize ball addition ports can be united and placed together in a single component, and positioned relatively close to each other, for example by arranging them adjacent to each other, thereby further enhancing the convenience of the administrator's work.

[21-2. When the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during various winning games]
The above description states that when the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during a jackpot game, the machine may not immediately transition to a stop state, but may transition to a stop state after the jackpot game ends. In other words, if the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during multiple rounds of a jackpot game, the jackpot game can be continued until the final round ends, and the player can continue playing even after the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, thereby earning the prize balls awarded in that jackpot game. Meanwhile, pachinko machines 1 can be equipped with various types of winning games that award prize balls. Depending on the type of winning game, the timing of the stop state occurring when the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during that winning game can be varied. In this example, the timing of the stop state occurring when the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during various winning games will be described below.

In this example, the above-described gaming board 5 uses the following gaming specifications. First, when a gaming ball is received in the first starting opening 2002, a lottery for a first special symbol is executed. In the lottery for the first special symbol, the first special random number obtained when the ball enters the first starting opening 2002 matches a predetermined small hit determination value with a probability of 1/150. Provided that a predetermined win/loss determination process determines that the first special random number matches the predetermined small hit determination value, a "small hit" (equivalent to the above-described "perk hit") is won. Furthermore, in the lottery for the first special symbol, the first special random number obtained when the ball enters the first starting opening 2002 matches a predetermined big hit determination value with a probability of 1/300. Provided that a predetermined win/loss determination process determines that the first special random number matches the predetermined big hit determination value, a "Big Hit B" is won.

Specifically, when a "small win" is won, the device winning port 2006 is opened and closed in a predetermined small win opening and closing pattern (for example, an opening and closing pattern that repeats five times, with a 0.3 second opening and a 1 second closing), controlling the small win game so that the game ball can (easily) enter the device winning port 2006, and if the game ball that entered the device winning port 2006 enters the V winning port 2007, a "Big Win A" is subsequently awarded. On the other hand, in a small win game, if the game ball does not enter the V winning port 2007 and the above-mentioned small win opening and closing pattern ends, a "Big Win A" is not awarded and the big win game does not begin. When the ball enters the V winning port 2007 and a "jackpot A" is awarded, the jackpot opening and closing pattern of the large winning port 2005, which is opened continuously for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or closed when 10 game balls enter the large winning port 2005, is repeated 10 times to control the jackpot game to 10 rounds in which it is possible (easy) for the game ball to enter the large winning port 2005, and after the jackpot game ends, the game is controlled to a time-saving state (low-probability time-saving state) in which the execution period of the variable display of the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) is shortened more than usual until the variable display of the special patterns is executed 50 times. Furthermore, when one game ball enters the large prize opening 2005, 15 game balls are awarded (paid out), and in one jackpot game of "small prize" or "large prize A", approximately 1,500 game balls are expected to be awarded (paid out) by the balls entering the large prize opening 2005 and the other prize openings.

In addition, if "Jackpot B" is won, the game is controlled to a 20-round special jackpot game in which it is possible (easy) for a game ball to enter the large prize opening 2005 by repeating a jackpot opening and closing pattern 20 times, in which the large prize opening 2005 is kept open for a long period of time (e.g., 29 seconds) or is closed when 10 game balls enter the large prize opening 2005. After the special jackpot game state ends, the game is controlled to a time-saving state (low-probability time-saving state) in which the execution period of the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is shortened compared to normal until the variable display is executed 50 times. However, for the 20-round special jackpot game, after the first 10 rounds are executed, the second 10 rounds are executed after a predetermined break period has elapsed in which the large prize opening 2005 is kept closed for a longer period of time (10 seconds in this example) than between other rounds. Furthermore, when one game ball enters the large prize slot 2005, 15 game balls are awarded (paid out), and in the special jackpot game state of "Jackpot B," a total of approximately 3000 game balls are expected to be awarded (paid out), consisting of approximately 1500 balls in the first 10 rounds due to balls entering the large prize slot 2005 and other prize slots, and approximately 1500 balls in the last 10 rounds.

On the other hand, when a gaming ball is received in the second starting hole 2004, a lottery for a second special symbol is executed. In the lottery for the second special symbol, the second special random number obtained when the ball enters the second starting hole 2004 matches a predetermined jackpot determination value with a probability of 1/300, and if it is determined in a predetermined win/loss determination process that the second special random number matches the predetermined jackpot determination value, then "Jackpot C" is won.

Specifically, when a "Jackpot C" is won, the game is controlled to a 10-round jackpot game in which it is possible (easy) for a game ball to enter the large prize entry port 2005 by repeating an opening/closing pattern 10 times, after which the large prize entry port 2005 is kept open for a long period of time (e.g., 29 seconds) or closed when 10 game balls enter the large prize entry port 2005. After the jackpot game ends, the game is controlled to a time-saving state (low-probability time-saving state) in which the execution period of the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is shortened more than usual until the variable display is executed 100 times. Furthermore, when one game ball enters the large prize entry port 2005, 15 game balls are awarded (paid out). In the "Jackpot C" jackpot game state, 1,500 game balls are expected to be awarded due to balls entering the large prize entry port 2005 and balls entering the other prize entry ports.

(When the amount of balls released reaches a specific value during a small win game)
First, we will explain what happens when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during a small win game. Figure 252 is a time chart showing what happens when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during a small win game. In this example, when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value (100,000 in this example) during a small win game, regardless of when the specific value was reached during the small win game, the small win opening and closing pattern continues until the small win game is completed, and the game of whether or not the game ball that entered the special winning opening 2006 will enter the V winning opening 2007 continues. If the game ball that entered the special winning opening 2006 during the execution of the small win opening and closing pattern enters the V winning opening 2007, it is possible to continue the big win game.

Figure 252 (A) is a time chart showing a case where, after the amount of balls dispensed during a small win game reaches a specific value, the game ball that entered the special device winning slot 2006 enters the V winning slot 2007, controlling the game to a big win. As shown in Figure 252 (A), at timing t1, when the special symbol variable display begins, if it is determined that a "small win" has been won, the special symbol variable display is executed based on the variable pattern for a "small win." Furthermore, while the special symbol variable display is in progress, a variable effect is executed based on the effect pattern for a "small win," and the variable effect executes an effect indicating whether the lottery result will be a big win or a small win. Note that, while the special symbol variable display is in progress, the amount of balls dispensed is less than 100,000, and at this stage, the game limit flag is not ON in the main control board 1310, so the game limit state has not occurred and gameplay can proceed as usual.

After the display of the special symbol changes and a stop symbol indicating a "small win" is displayed, the game is controlled to a small win game in which the game ball can (easily) enter the special winning hole 2006, and if the game ball that entered the special winning hole 2006 enters the V winning hole 2007, a "big win A" is awarded. Furthermore, during the small win game, a small win effect different from that during normal play is executed, and in the small win effect, audio and visual instructions are given to aim for the ball to enter the special winning hole 2006, and if the game ball that entered the special winning hole 2006 enters the V winning hole 2007, an effect (audio and visual effect) is executed indicating that a "big win A" will be awarded. Furthermore, during a small win game, it is possible to increase the number of balls dispensed by a ball entering the special prize slot 2006 or another prize slot. When the number of balls dispensed reaches 100,000 after entering the special prize slot 2006 or another prize slot, the main control board 1310 controls the stop flag to be turned ON. However, in this example, even if the number of balls dispensed reaches 100,000 during a small win game and the stop flag is turned ON, the timing of the stop state is delayed so that the stop state does not immediately occur, allowing at least the small win game in progress to continue without being terminated midway. In this way, in this example, when the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during a small win game, the timing of the stop state is delayed to allow the small win game to continue. This prevents any disadvantages in winning prize balls, including the outcome of the small win game (whether or not a ball enters the V prize slot 2007 and a "Big Win A" is awarded), and reduces player frustration.

If, at timing tL1 during a small jackpot game, a game ball that has entered the special prize slot 2006 enters the V prize slot 2007, awarding a "jackpot A," the system controls the game so that 10 rounds of jackpot game continue, during which it is possible (easy) for the game ball to enter the large prize slot 2005. During a jackpot game, a jackpot effect different from the effects during normal play and the small jackpot effect is executed, and in the jackpot effect, audio and visual instructions are given to aim for the ball to enter the large prize slot 2005, and special effects (audio and visual effects) are executed, such as displaying special images that are only displayed during a jackpot game. Note that the number of balls dispensed reaches 100,000 during a small win game, and the main control board 1310 turns on the stop flag. However, in this example, if a game ball enters the V winning slot 2007 during a small win game, the stop state does not occur at the end of the small win game, and the timing of the stop state is further delayed so that the stop state does not occur during the subsequent big win game, allowing the big win game to continue from the small win game. In this way, when the number of balls dispensed reaches 100,000 during a small win game, if a game ball enters the V winning slot 2007 during that small win game, the stop state is further delayed so that the big win game can be played. This prevents any disadvantages in winning prize balls, including the results of the series of games from the small win game to the big win game, and makes it less likely for the player to be dissatisfied.

Then, at timing tN, after the jackpot game is completed, a predetermined ending period is generated and a jackpot ending presentation is executed. In the jackpot ending presentation, the end of the jackpot game is indicated, and a presentation display (image of the amount of balls dispensed in this jackpot game) showing the amount of balls dispensed during the jackpot game due to balls entering the grand prize port 2005, as well as a warning message (described below) are displayed on the presentation display device 1600. In this example, as described above, in the jackpot game of "Jackpot A," approximately 1,500 game balls can be dispensed, and if balls enter the grand prize port 2005 until the upper limit is reached during the jackpot game, an amount of approximately 1,500 balls will be displayed as the amount of balls dispensed during the jackpot game. Although the payout amount has already reached 100,000 during the small win game and the main control board 1310 has set the stop flag ON, as described above, the timing of the stop state occurrence is delayed so that the stop state does not occur at the end of the small win game or during the big win game. In this example, even when the timing tN arrives, when the big win presentation ends with the grand prize port 2005 opening in the final round (10th round) of the big win game, the stop state does not occur immediately. Instead, the stop state occurs at timing tL2 after the ending period has elapsed. In this way, by delaying the timing of the stop state occurrence until after the end of the ending period and controlling the big win ending presentation so that it can be executed before the stop state occurs, the player can remain in the location even after the grand prize port 2005 has opened, allowing the player to recognize the big win ending presentation.

During the jackpot ending presentation that takes place during the ending period, after the presentation display (ball amount image) showing the amount of balls dispensed in this winning game ends on the presentation display device 1600, an "addiction prevention display A" is displayed, which is a warning message regarding "addiction prevention" to prevent the player from becoming overly addicted to the game (for example, a text display saying "Pachinko should be enjoyed in moderation. Be careful not to get addicted"). In this example, in the jackpot play of "jackpot A," approximately 1,500 game balls are awarded, but the game transitions to a limit state after the jackpot play, which could lead the player to move on to another pachinko machine and become overly addicted to the game. However, by displaying "addiction prevention display A" before the transition to the limit state, a warning can be displayed to prevent the player from becoming overly addicted to playing another pachinko machine after the transition to the limit state. In this way, by controlling the jackpot ending presentation, including the execution period of the warning message, to be executed before the game reaches a dead end, an opportunity to check "Addiction Prevention Display A" can be ensured, which effectively prevents players from becoming overly addicted to the game.

Furthermore, after the transition to the play-stop state at timing tL2, the peripheral control board 1510 turns on a specified effect prohibition flag, forcibly stopping any effects currently being performed (such as the jackpot ending effect). For example, when the effect prohibition flag turns on, the effect display device 1600 forcibly changes from addiction prevention display A to one of various images corresponding to the play-stop state described above.

Figure 252 (B) is a time chart showing a case where, after the payout amount reaches a specific value during a small win game, regardless of whether the game ball enters the special device winning port 2006, the small win opening and closing pattern ends without the game ball entering the V winning port 2007, completing the small win game, and thereafter not controlling to a big win game. As shown in Figure 252 (B), at timing t1, when the special pattern variable display begins, if it is determined that a "small win" has been won, the special pattern variable display is executed based on the variable pattern for a "small win." Furthermore, while the special pattern variable display is being executed, a variable effect is executed based on the effect pattern for a "small win," and the variable effect executes an effect indicating whether the result of the lottery will be a big win or a small win. Furthermore, while the special symbol is being displayed, the number of balls dispensed is less than 100,000, and at this stage, the stop flag on the main control board 1310 is not ON, so a stop state has not occurred and gameplay can proceed as normal.

After the display of the special symbol changes and a stop symbol indicating a "small win" is displayed, the game is controlled to a small win game in which the game ball can (easily) enter the special winning hole 2006, and if the game ball that entered the special winning hole 2006 enters the V winning hole 2007, a "big win A" is awarded. Furthermore, during the small win game, a small win effect different from that during normal play is executed, and in the small win effect, audio and visual instructions are given to aim for the ball to enter the special winning hole 2006, and if the game ball that entered the special winning hole 2006 enters the V winning hole 2007, an effect (audio and visual effect) is executed indicating that a "big win A" will be awarded. Furthermore, during a small win game, it is possible to increase the number of balls dispensed by a ball entering the special prize slot 2006 or another prize slot. When the number of balls dispensed reaches 100,000 after entering the special prize slot 2006 or another prize slot, the main control board 1310 controls the stop flag to be turned ON. However, in this example, even if the number of balls dispensed reaches 100,000 during a small win game and the stop flag is turned ON, the timing of the stop state is delayed so that the stop state does not immediately occur, allowing at least the small win game in progress to continue without being terminated midway. In this way, in this example, when the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during a small win game, the timing of the stop state is delayed to allow the small win game to continue. This prevents any disadvantages to the acquisition of prize balls, including the outcome of the small win game (whether or not the ball enters the V prize slot 2007 and transitions to "Big Win A"), and is less likely to cause dissatisfaction to the player.

Then, at timing tN, if the small win opening and closing pattern ends without the game ball entering the V winning slot 2007, regardless of whether the ball enters the special winning slot 2006 before the small win game is completed, "Big Win A" is not awarded and the big win game does not begin. After the small win game is completed, a predetermined ending period is generated and a small win ending effect is executed. The small win ending effect indicates the end of the small win game and also indicates that the game ball did not enter the V winning slot 2007. During the small win game, the payout amount reaches 100,000 and the stop flag is turned ON on the main control board 1310. However, the stop state is not generated during the small win game, and the stop state is generated at timing tL3 after the ending period has elapsed. In this way, by delaying the timing of the end-of-game state until after the ending period has ended and controlling the small win ending presentation to be executed before the end-of-game state occurs, the player can remain in the location even after the opening of the bonus prize winning port 2006 has finished, allowing the player to recognize the small win ending presentation.

Furthermore, during the jackpot ending presentation, the presentation display device 1600 displays a presentation display (a ball output image) showing the amount of balls released in the current winning game and "Addiction Prevention Display A." However, in this example, during the small win ending presentation, the presentation display (a ball output image) showing the amount of balls released and the warning message regarding "Addiction Prevention" are not displayed, and instead an ending image (an image display of "Sorry...") indicating the end of the small win game is displayed. In this example, if a game ball enters the V winning slot 2007 during a small win game, a "jackpot A" jackpot game is executed and approximately 1,500 game balls can be awarded. However, if a game ball does not enter the V winning slot 2007 during a small win game, the "jackpot A" jackpot game is not executed and approximately 1,500 game balls are not awarded. In this way, if the game ball does not enter the V winning slot 2007 during a small win game, there are few prize balls, so the player will not continue playing on another pachinko machine after the game has stopped, and no warning is issued. Also, in this example, the execution time for the small win ending presentation (e.g., 5 seconds) is set shorter than the execution time for the big win ending presentation (e.g., 10 seconds), making it possible to transition to the stop state sooner after a small win game than after a big win game.

Furthermore, after the transition to the play-stop state at timing tL3, the peripheral control board 1510 turns on a specified effect prohibition flag, forcibly stopping any effects currently being performed (such as small win ending effects). For example, when the effect prohibition flag turns on, the effect display device 1600 forcibly changes from the ending image to one of various images corresponding to the play-stop state described above.

In addition, in this example, at timing tN, regardless of whether the game ball enters the special device entry port 2006 before the small win game is completed, if the game ball does not enter the V entry port 2007 and the small win opening and closing pattern ends and "Big Win A" is not awarded, a predetermined ending period is generated after the small win game is completed and the small win ending presentation is executed. However, as another example, control may be exercised so that the predetermined ending period does not occur after the small win game is completed, the small win ending presentation itself is not executed, and a stop state is immediately generated after the small win game ends. Even in such an embodiment, the same effect as described above can be achieved.

In addition, in this example, during the jackpot ending presentation after the jackpot game is completed, the presentation display device 1600 displays a warning message regarding "preventing addiction." However, the warning message displayed on the presentation display device 1600 is displayed in a position that does not overlap with related displays before the transition to the stop state. Specifically, before the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, a message such as "+XX balls remaining until play limit" is displayed, informing the player of the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value, as in the advance notice display described above. Furthermore, when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value but the ongoing small jackpot game or jackpot game continues, a message such as "The jackpot has ended and today is over" is displayed, indicating that the amount of balls dispensed has already reached a specific value, as in the standby notice in the stop preparation state described above. Furthermore, when the presentation display device 1600 displays a warning message regarding "preventing addiction," it is displayed in a position that does not overlap with the advance notice display displayed as a related display before the transition to the stop state or the standby notice in the stop preparation state. This ensures that players will not miss the related displays before the transition to a stop state when the warning message regarding "preventing addiction" is displayed, and allows players to be sure to recognize the advance notice displayed as a related display before the transition to a stop state, and the content of the standby notification when preparing to stop.

In this example, game play is restricted when the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value and the game transitions to a stop state. However, game play may also be restricted due to factors other than the stop state. For example, as described above, a factor other than the stop state is when the game board 5 is replaced while power is being applied to the main frame 5, which transitions to a special stop state and restricts game play. Furthermore, if game play is restricted during a small win game due to factors other than the stop state, the power must be turned on and off. However, turning the power on and off (power supply pattern 1) removes the game restriction and allows the ongoing small win game to resume. Furthermore, if the number of balls dispensed has already reached a specific value during a small win game and the stop flag is turned ON, and game play is then restricted due to factors other than the stop state, the stop flag remains ON even after the power is turned on and off (power supply pattern 1), allowing the ongoing small win game to resume. For this reason, it is possible to transition to a stop state after the restarted small win game has ended, or after the big win game that follows the small win game has ended if a ball enters V winning slot 2007 during the restarted small win game. This means that even if play is restricted during small win game due to factors other than the stop state, there is no disadvantage to winning prize balls after the power is turned on and off (power pattern 1), making it less likely that the player will be dissatisfied.

Similarly, as will be described in more detail below, for example, the payout control board 633 stops play if it detects a RAM error, such as an abnormal value in the RAM, or an error other than a RAM error, such as "out of balls fired," "out of balls at the lifting entrance," "lifting ball jamming error," "too few game balls," or "too many game balls." Of these, if the payout control board 633 detects an error other than a RAM error, such as "out of balls fired," "out of balls at the lifting entrance," "lifting ball jamming error," "too few game balls," or "too many game balls," during a small win game and restricts play due to a factor other than a stopped-play state, the power must be turned on and off after the cause of the error is resolved. However, if the power is turned on and off (power supply pattern 1) after the cause of the error is resolved, the game restriction is lifted and the small win game currently in progress can be resumed. Furthermore, if the payout amount has already reached a specific value during a small win game and the stop flag is set to ON, and the payout control board 633 detects an error other than a RAM error, such as "out of balls fired," "out of balls at the lift entrance," "lift ball jam error," "too few game balls," or "too many game balls," which is a factor other than the stop state and restricts play, the stop flag remains ON even after the cause of the error is resolved and the power is turned on and off (power supply pattern 1), and the small win game in progress is resumed. Therefore, it is possible to transition to the stop state after the restarted small win game ends, or, if a ball enters the V winning slot 2007 during the restarted small win game, after the big win game that follows the small win game ends. As a result, even if play is restricted during a small win game due to the detection of an error other than a RAM error on the payout control board 633, such as "out of balls fired," "out of balls at the lift entrance," "lift ball jam error," "too few game balls," or "too many game balls," which is a factor separate from the game's stalled state, after the cause of the error is resolved and the power is turned on and off (power supply pattern 1), there will be no disadvantage to winning prize balls, making it less likely that the player will be dissatisfied.

Furthermore, during the jackpot ending presentation after the completion of a jackpot game, the presentation display device 1600 displays a warning message regarding "addiction prevention." However, if another jackpot game occurs within a predetermined period after the completion of the jackpot game (for example, a consecutive jackpot game of 30 or less), during the jackpot ending presentation after the completion of the second jackpot game, the presentation display device 1600 displays a presentation display (a ball payout image) showing the number of balls paid out in the current jackpot game, but is restricted from displaying the warning message regarding "addiction prevention." For example, if the warning message regarding "addiction prevention" is repeated within a short period of time, such as the predetermined period after the completion of a jackpot game, players may become accustomed to the warning message, and the effect of preventing player addiction in future games may not be achieved. However, by not displaying the warning message regarding "addiction prevention" during a second jackpot game within the predetermined period after the completion of the previous jackpot game, such an effect can be maintained. Additionally, in this example, a predetermined ending period is initiated after the jackpot game is completed, and the jackpot ending presentation is executed. However, as another example, if another jackpot game occurs within a predetermined period after the jackpot game has ended (for example, a series of 30 or fewer wins), the predetermined ending period may be controlled not to occur after the jackpot game is completed, the jackpot ending presentation itself may not be executed, and the warning message regarding "addiction prevention" may not be displayed. Even in such an embodiment, the same effect as described above can be achieved.

(When the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during a special jackpot game)
Next, we will explain what happens when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during the special jackpot game of "Jackpot B." Figure 253 is a time chart showing when the amount of balls dispensed does not reach a specific value during the special jackpot game, and Figure 254 is a time chart showing when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during the special jackpot game. In this example, for a 20-round special jackpot game, the first 10 rounds are executed, followed by a predetermined break period (a period in which the large prize entry port 2005 is closed for a longer period (10 seconds in this example) than between other rounds) before the second 10 rounds are executed. If the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during the first 10 rounds of the 20-round special jackpot game, the game will transition to a stop state after the end of the first 10 rounds, and the second 10 rounds will not be executed. However, if the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during the second 10 rounds, the game can transition to a stop state after the end of the second 10 rounds.

Figure 253 is a time chart showing the case where the amount of balls dispensed does not reach a specific value during special jackpot play. As shown in Figure 253, at timing t1, when the variable display of the special symbols begins, if it is determined that "Jackpot B" has been won, the variable display of the special symbols is executed based on the variable pattern for "Jackpot B". In addition, while the variable display of the special symbols is in progress, a variable effect is executed based on the effect pattern for "Jackpot B", and the variable effect executes an effect indicating whether the result of the lottery will be a jackpot or a minor jackpot.

Then, after the display of the special symbol changes to display a stopped symbol indicating "Jackpot B," the game is controlled to a 20-round special jackpot game in which it is possible (easy) for the game ball to enter the large prize opening 2005. First, the first 10 rounds of the 20-round special jackpot game (first half special jackpot game) are executed, and during the first half special jackpot game, a special jackpot effect different from the effects during normal gameplay is executed, and during the special jackpot effect, audio and visual instructions are given to aim for the ball to enter the large prize opening 2005, and special effects (audio and visual effects) are executed, such as displaying special images on the effect display device 1600 that are only displayed in the first half of the special jackpot game.

Then, at timing tL1, after the first 10 rounds have ended and the first-half special jackpot game is completed, a predetermined break period is generated and a rest effect is executed. The rest effect indicates the end of the first-half special jackpot game and indicates that the game is in a waiting state until the second-half special jackpot game begins (for example, a message image "First half ended! Second half resumes in 10 seconds!" is displayed on the effect display device 1600). Note that in this example, a break period is generated between the first 10 rounds and the second 10 rounds. However, if 20 rounds are played consecutively, the player may become tired from continually trying to score a ball into the special prize slot 2005, so a break period is generated to prevent this. Furthermore, even if a break period occurs during a special jackpot game, the following configuration may be used to clarify that it is a single jackpot game. For example, special background music for the special jackpot effect can be output as the sound effect during the special jackpot effect, and this special background music can be output continuously throughout the first half of the special jackpot game, the break period, and the second half of the special jackpot game. This makes it possible to avoid reducing the impression that the game is a series of wins, even when a long-term special jackpot game is played with a break period in between.

After the specified break period has elapsed, the latter 10 rounds (second-half special jackpot play) of the 20 rounds of special jackpot play are executed. During the second-half special jackpot play, a special jackpot effect different from that during normal play is executed. In the special jackpot effect, audio and visual instructions are used to encourage the player to aim for the ball to land in the grand prize slot 2005, and special images (audio and visual effects) are executed, such as displaying special images on the effect display device 1600 that are only displayed in the second half of the special jackpot play. In this example, the images displayed in the first half of the special jackpot play and the images displayed in the second half of the special jackpot play are related to each other to clarify that this is a single jackpot play, and the images displayed in the second half of the special jackpot play are a continuation of the images displayed in the first half of the special jackpot play. Specifically, an introductory movie featuring the same character is displayed in the first and second halves of the special jackpot game, and an image of the amount of balls dispensed is continuously displayed in the first and second halves of the special jackpot game.

After the latter 10 rounds have ended and the latter special jackpot game is completed, a predetermined ending period is initiated and a special jackpot ending presentation is executed. The special jackpot ending presentation indicates the end of the special jackpot game, and displays an acquired ball display (an image of the amount of balls awarded in this winning game) showing the amount of balls awarded during the special jackpot game due to balls entering the grand prize port 2005, as well as a warning message, as described below, on the presentation display device 1600. In this example, as described above, in the special jackpot game of "Jackpot B," it is possible to award a total of approximately 3,000 game balls, consisting of approximately 1,500 balls in the first 10 rounds and approximately 1,500 balls in the latter 10 rounds. If balls enter the grand prize port 2005 until the upper limit is reached during the special jackpot game, the acquired ball display "3,000 GET!!" is executed on the presentation display device 1600.

In addition, after the display of the winning balls during the special jackpot ending performance has ended, the performance display device 1600 displays a warning message as "Addiction Prevention Display B," which includes the display of a warning message regarding "addictiveness prevention" to prevent players from becoming overly addicted to the game (for example, the text display "Pachinko should be enjoyed in moderation. Don't get addicted!"). In this example, in the special jackpot game of "jackpot B," approximately 3,000 game balls can be awarded, and if balls enter the grand prize port 2005 until the upper limit is reached during the special jackpot game, the player may become overly addicted to the game. However, by displaying "Addiction Prevention Display B" during the special jackpot ending performance, the player can be prevented from becoming overly addicted to the game. Furthermore, when controlled to a "jackpot A" jackpot game, "addiction prevention display A" is displayed during the jackpot ending presentation, but "addiction prevention display B" during the special jackpot ending presentation is executed in a manner different from "addiction prevention display A." In other words, when controlled to a "jackpot B" special jackpot game, the amount of balls dispensed is greater than when controlled to a "jackpot A" jackpot game, and there is a high possibility that the player is excessively addicted to the game. For this reason, it is preferable that "Addiction Prevention Display B" be a stronger warning than "Addiction Prevention Display A." In this example, the message display content is in a commanding tone different from "Addiction Prevention Display A," the message is displayed in a more prominent location (the center of the effect display device 1400) than the display location of "Addiction Prevention Display A" (for example, the bottom of the effect display device 1400), and the message display time is set longer than "Addiction Prevention Display A," thereby making it possible to preferably prevent players from becoming overly addicted to the game. Note that the manner in which "Addiction Prevention Display A" and "Addiction Prevention Display B" are different is not limited to the above, and it is also possible to differ only in some of the message display content, message display location, and message display time.

When the ending period elapses at timing tL2, the special jackpot ending effect ends, and the image corresponding to the time-saving state is displayed, making it possible to execute a variable display of the special symbol.

Figure 254 (A) is a time chart showing the case where the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during the first half of the special jackpot game. As shown in Figure 254 (A), at timing t1, when the special symbol variable display begins, if it is determined that "Jackpot B" has been won, the special symbol variable display is executed based on the variable pattern for "Jackpot B." Furthermore, while the special symbol variable display is in progress, a variable effect is executed based on the effect pattern for "Jackpot B," and the variable effect executes an effect indicating whether the lottery result will be a jackpot or a minor jackpot. Note that while the special symbol variable display is in progress, the amount of balls dispensed is less than 100,000, and at this stage, the game limit flag is not ON on the main control board 1310, so the game limit state has not occurred and gameplay can proceed as usual.

Then, after the display of the special symbol changes to display a stopped symbol indicating "Jackpot B," the game is controlled to a 20-round special jackpot game in which it is possible (easy) for the game ball to enter the large prize opening 2005. First, the first 10 rounds (first half special jackpot game) of the 20-round special jackpot game are executed, and in the special jackpot effect executed during the first half special jackpot game, audio and visual instructions are given to aim for the ball to enter the large prize opening 2005, and special effects (audio and visual effects) are executed, such as displaying special images on the effect display device 1600 that are only displayed in the first half of the special jackpot game. Furthermore, during the first half of the special jackpot game, it is possible to increase the number of balls dispensed by balls entering the large prize slot 2005 or another prize slot. When the number of balls dispensed reaches 100,000 after entering the large prize slot 2005 or another prize slot, the main control board 1310 controls the stop flag to be turned ON. However, in this example, even if the number of balls dispensed reaches 100,000 during the first half of the special jackpot game and the stop flag is turned ON, the timing of the stop state is delayed so that the stop state does not occur immediately, allowing the game to continue at least until the end of the first half of the special jackpot game. In this way, in this example, if the number of balls dispensed during the first half of the special jackpot game reaches a specific value, the timing of the stop state is delayed, allowing the first half of the special jackpot game to continue. This prevents disadvantages to winning prize balls and reduces player dissatisfaction.

If the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value at time t2 during the first half of the special jackpot game, the timing of the stop state is delayed until time tL1, the end of the first half of the special jackpot game. While gameplay can continue during this delay, no break period occurs thereafter, and the second half of the special jackpot game does not begin. Furthermore, even though the number of balls dispensed reaches 100,000 during the first half of the special jackpot game and the stop flag is turned ON on the main control board 1310, the stop state is triggered at time tL1, the end of the first half of the special jackpot game. This is a forced control that is not affected by the number of balls dispensed between time t2 and time tL1. In this way, if the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during the first half of the special jackpot game, the game will transition to a stop state at a predetermined timing regardless of the amount of balls dispensed thereafter, and the second half of the special jackpot game will not be executed, thereby preventing the amount of balls dispensed from deviating significantly from the specific value.

Furthermore, before the end of the first half of the special jackpot game, the effect display device 1600 is forced to display an "addiction prevention display A," a warning message regarding "addiction prevention" to prevent players from becoming overly addicted to the game (for example, a text display saying, "Pachinko should be enjoyed in moderation. Be careful not to get addicted.") to prevent players from becoming overly addicted to the game. As described above, if the number of balls dispensed during the first half of the special jackpot game does not reach a specific value, the second half of the special jackpot game begins after the end of the first half of the special jackpot game, with a break period in between. Therefore, the effect display device 1600 does not display "addiction prevention display A." However, if the number of balls dispensed during the first half of the special jackpot game reaches a specific value, the game transitions to a stop state without starting the second half of the special jackpot game after the end of the first half of the special jackpot game, without a break period in between. Therefore, the effect display device 1600 displays "addiction prevention display A" before the transition to the stop state. In this example, the special jackpot game in the first half of "Jackpot B" awards approximately 1,500 game balls, the same as the jackpot game in "Jackpot A." However, after the special jackpot game in the first half, a limit state is entered, which could lead to the player moving on to another pachinko machine and becoming overly addicted to the game. However, by displaying "Addiction Prevention Display A" before the limit state is entered, it is possible to warn the player not to become overly addicted to playing on another pachinko machine after the limit state is entered. In this way, by controlling the warning message to be executed before the limit state occurs, it is possible to ensure an opportunity to check "Addiction Prevention Display A," and it is possible to effectively prevent the player from becoming overly addicted to the game.

Furthermore, after the transition to the play-stop state at timing tL1, the peripheral control board 1510 turns on a specified effect prohibition flag, forcibly stopping and terminating any effects currently being executed (such as the special jackpot effect executed during the first half of the special jackpot game and "addiction prevention display A"). For example, when the effect prohibition flag turns on, the effect display device 1600 forcibly changes from addiction prevention display A to various images corresponding to the play-stop state described above.

Figure 254 (B) is a time chart showing the case where the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during the break period after the end of the first half of the special jackpot game. As shown in Figure 254 (B), if the amount of balls dispensed does not reach the specific value between the end of the first 10 rounds and the completion of the first half of the special jackpot game, the large prize opening 2005 is closed after the end of the first half of the special jackpot game, creating a break period in which no balls enter the large prize opening 2005. However, in this example, if the amount of balls dispensed during the break period is close to the specific value (for example, if it exceeds 99,900), there is a possibility that the amount of balls dispensed will reach the specific value as balls enter openings other than the large prize opening 2005 during the break period, increasing the amount of balls dispensed.

Then, if the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value at timing t2 during the break period after the end of the first half of the special jackpot game, a stop state is triggered at that point, and the second half of the special jackpot game will not begin. Specifically, during the break period, it is possible to increase the amount of balls dispensed by having balls enter a prize slot other than the large prize slot 2005. When a ball enters a prize slot other than the large prize slot 2005 and the amount of balls dispensed reaches 100,000, the stop flag is turned ON on the main control board 1310. In this case, the stop state is triggered when the amount of balls dispensed reaches 100,000, even if it is in the middle of the break period. In this way, if the amount of balls dispensed during the break period reaches a specific value, the stop state is triggered at that point, and the second half of the special jackpot game will not be executed, thereby preventing the amount of balls dispensed from deviating significantly from the specific value.

Also, as mentioned above, if the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during the first half of the special jackpot game, the display of "Addiction Prevention Display A" is forcibly inserted and executed on the performance display device 1600 before the game transitions to a stop state, but if the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during the break period after the end of the first half of the special jackpot game, the display of "Addiction Prevention Display A" is not executed on the performance display device 1600 before the game transitions to a stop state. In this example, the first half of the special jackpot game for "Jackpot B" awards approximately 1,500 game balls, the same amount as the "Jackpot A" jackpot game, but the second half of the special jackpot game is not executed and the game transitions to a dead-end state, which could lead the player to move on to another pachinko machine and become overly addicted to the game. However, after the first half of the special jackpot game ends, a break period is generated in which no balls enter the special prize slot 2005, making it possible to prevent the player from becoming overly addicted to playing another pachinko machine after the game transitions to a dead-end state. In this way, if the number of balls dispensed during the break period reaches a specific value, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming overly addicted to the game, even if the "Addiction Prevention Display A" is not displayed on the effect display device 1600 before the game transitions to a dead-end state.

In this example, if the amount of balls dispensed during the first half of the special jackpot game has not reached a specific value, the "Addiction Prevention Display A" is not displayed before the end of the first half of the special jackpot game. However, if the amount of balls dispensed is close to a specific value (e.g., exceeds 99,900) at the time of determining whether to display the "Addiction Prevention Display A," the "Addiction Prevention Display A" may be displayed before the end of the first half of the special jackpot game, even if the amount of balls dispensed has not reached the specific value. For example, if the amount of balls dispensed is close to a specific value (e.g., exceeds 99,900) at the time of determining whether to display the "Addiction Prevention Display A," there is a possibility that the amount of balls dispensed will reach a specific value during the period when the "Addiction Prevention Display A" is displayed before the end of the first half of the special jackpot game, resulting in a stalled game after the end of the first half of the special jackpot game. However, even in such cases, by displaying "Addiction Prevention Display A" before the end of the first half of the special jackpot game, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming overly addicted to the game.

Furthermore, in this example, if the number of balls dispensed during the break period is close to a specific value (e.g., if it exceeds 99,900), there is a possibility that the number of balls dispensed will reach the specific value if balls enter prize slots other than the large prize slot 2005 during the break period, increasing the number of balls dispensed. In such a case, the mode of the launch instruction may be changed to discourage the player from launching game balls so that balls do not enter prize slots other than the large prize slot 2005 during the break period (e.g., by not executing the video or audio of the launch instruction executed during the first half of the special jackpot game during the break period). In this way, even if the number of balls dispensed during the break period is close to a specific value (e.g., if it exceeds 99,900), the number of balls dispensed will not reach the specific value during that break period, and the second half of the special jackpot game will begin after the break period has passed, thereby preventing disadvantages in winning prize balls and making it less likely for the player to be dissatisfied. Furthermore, when the second half of the special jackpot game begins, it is preferable to change the mode of the launch instruction again (for example, to output again the video and audio of the launch instruction given during the first half of the special jackpot game) in order to encourage the player to launch the game ball.

In addition, although not shown in the figures, if the large prize opening 2005 is closed after the end of the first half of the special jackpot game, creating a break period in which no balls enter the large prize opening 2005, and the large prize opening 2005 is then fraudulently opened to allow game balls to enter the large prize opening 2005 during the break period, the following configuration may be adopted. For example, if a fraudulent game ball is detected entering the large prize opening 2005 during the break period, the ball may be deemed invalid and no prize balls may be awarded. In addition, a "break period error" may be generated to notify a special error and stop the game progress (progression of the break period), thereby preventing fraudulent balls from entering the large prize opening 2005 during the break period. In addition, by making it possible to resolve the "break period error" by turning the power on and off (power pattern 1), it is possible to avoid the amount of balls dispensed being cleared when the power is turned on and off.

Furthermore, after the transition to the play-stop state at timing t2, the peripheral control board 1510 turns on a specified effect prohibition flag, forcibly stopping the currently running effect (intermission effect) to end it. For example, when the effect prohibition flag is turned on, the effect display device 1600 forcibly changes from the intermission effect to various images corresponding to the play-stop state described above.

Figure 254(C) is a time chart showing the case where the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during the second half of the special jackpot game. As shown in Figure 254(C), if the amount of balls dispensed does not reach a specific value between the end of the first 10 rounds and the completion of the first half of the special jackpot game, or during the break period, the second 10 rounds (second half of the special jackpot game) will be played after the break period has elapsed. During the special jackpot game in the second half, audio and visual instructions are given to aim for the ball to land in the grand prize port 2005, and special effects (audio and visual effects) are executed, such as displaying special images on the effect display device 1600 that are only displayed in the second half of the special jackpot game. Furthermore, during the second half of the special jackpot game, it is possible to increase the number of balls dispensed by balls entering the large prize slot 2005 or another prize slot. When the number of balls dispensed reaches 100,000 after entering the large prize slot 2005 or another prize slot, the main control board 1310 controls the stop flag to turn ON. However, in this example, even if the number of balls dispensed reaches 100,000 during the second half of the special jackpot game and the stop flag is turned ON, the timing of the stop state is delayed so that the stop state does not occur immediately, allowing the game to continue at least until the end of the second half of the special jackpot game. In this way, if the number of balls dispensed during the second half of the special jackpot game reaches a specific value, the timing of the stop state is delayed to allow the second half of the special jackpot game to continue. This prevents disadvantages to winning prize balls and reduces player dissatisfaction.

Then, if the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value at timing t2 during the second-half special jackpot game, the timing of the stop state is delayed until timing tL2, the end of the second-half special jackpot game. While gameplay can continue during this delay, no ending period is triggered thereafter, and no special jackpot ending presentation is executed. Furthermore, even if the amount of balls dispensed reaches 100,000 during the second-half special jackpot game and the stop flag is turned ON on the main control board 1310, the stop state is triggered at timing tL2, the end of the second-half special jackpot game. This is controlled compulsorily, regardless of the amount of balls dispensed between timing t2 and timing tL1. In this way, if the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during the second-half special jackpot game, the game transitions to the stop state at the predetermined timing, regardless of the amount of balls dispensed thereafter, and no special jackpot ending presentation is executed.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, if the amount of balls dispensed during the second half of the special jackpot game does not reach a specific value, an ending period is initiated after the second half of the special jackpot game is completed, and the "Addiction Prevention Display B" is displayed after the special jackpot ending effect is executed within that ending period. However, if the amount of balls dispensed during the second half of the special jackpot game reaches a specific value, the ending period itself is not initiated after the second half of the special jackpot game is completed, and the special jackpot ending effect is not executed, so the "Addiction Prevention Display B" is not displayed on the effect display device 1600. In this example, it is possible to award approximately 1,500 game balls during the jackpot game of "Jackpot A," but compared to the amount of balls dispensed during the first and second half of the special jackpot game of "Jackpot B," the player does not feel as satisfied. Also, even if the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during the first half of the special jackpot game of "Jackpot B" and the second half of the special jackpot game is not executed, it is possible to dispense about 1,500 game balls in the first half of the special jackpot game, but compared to the amount of balls dispensed during the first and second half of the special jackpot game, the player will not be satisfied. In this way, when the machine transitions to a stop state after the end of the jackpot game of "Jackpot A" or when the machine transitions to a stop state after the end of the first half of the special jackpot game of "Jackpot B," the player may not be satisfied with the amount of balls dispensed during the jackpot game, and may move to another pachinko machine after the stop state and become excessively addicted to the game. Therefore, the "addiction prevention display A" is displayed on the effect display device 1600 before the transition to the stop state. On the other hand, if the amount of balls dispensed during the first half of the special jackpot game of "Jackpot B" does not reach the specific value, but does reach the specific value during the second half of the special jackpot game, it is possible to award approximately 3,000 game balls in both the first and second half of the special jackpot game, so the player can feel satisfied even if the game transitions to a dead state after the second half of the special jackpot game ends. In this way, when the game transitions to a dead state after the second half of the special jackpot game ends, even if the "Addiction Prevention Display B" is not displayed on the effect display device 1600 before the transition to the dead state, the player will not become overly addicted to the game and can accept the dead state with a sense of satisfaction.

Furthermore, after the transition to the stop state at timing tL2, the peripheral control board 1510 turns on a specified effect prohibition flag, forcibly stopping the effect currently being executed (the special jackpot effect executed during the second half of the special jackpot game). For example, when the effect prohibition flag turns on, the effect display device 1600 forcibly changes from the special jackpot effect executed during the second half of the special jackpot game to various images corresponding to the stop state described above.

As another example, if the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during the latter special jackpot game, the above-mentioned ending period may also be generated after the special jackpot game is completed. During the ending period when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during the latter special jackpot game, only the special jackpot ending presentation may be executed, and the execution period of "Addiction Prevention Display B" may be deleted so that "Addiction Prevention Display B" is not executed. This type of configuration can also achieve the same effect as described above.

In the above example, if the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value at timing t2 during the break period, a stop state is triggered when the number of balls dispensed reaches 100,000, even if the break period is in the middle of the break period. However, if the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value immediately after the break period begins (e.g., when the player is not aware that the break period has begun), a sudden transition to a stop state could lead the player to mistakenly believe that the stop state has occurred in the middle of the first half of the special jackpot game. In consideration of this phenomenon, as another example, if the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during the break period, a transition to a stop state may occur after a specified waiting time (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed, ensuring that the player is aware of the start of the break period (the end of the first half of the special jackpot game). Note that the specified waiting time is preferably shorter than the maximum time of the break period (10 seconds in the above example) to avoid the break period being unnecessarily prolonged.

In addition, while the above example shows an example in which the condition for ending the break period is the passage of a predetermined period (10 seconds), as an alternative, the player may be able to decide when the break period ends. For example, the break period may continue until a predetermined action for ending the break period is detected (such as the detection of the action of temporarily releasing the handle 160 used to launch the game ball during the break period and then touching the launch handle 160 again, or the action of shooting the game ball into a winning restart ball entry port provided separately from the grand prize port 2005), and the break period may end based on the detection of the predetermined action for ending the break period. In this case, a sufficient rest period tailored to each individual player can be ensured, making it possible to appropriately execute the long-term progress of the special jackpot game.

In the above example, during the break period, balls entering a prize slot other than the large prize slot 2005 can increase the amount of balls dispensed, potentially reaching a specific value. However, as another example, the game board 5 may be provided with a special prize slot other than the large prize slot 2005, which can award more prize balls when balls enter the special prize slot than the various starting prize slots, thereby allowing the amount of balls dispensed to reach a specific value without game progress during the break period. For example, unlike the various starting prize slots, the special prize slot does not display a variable special or normal symbol when a ball enters the special prize slot, and instead awards 100 game balls when the ball enters the special prize slot. This allows for balls to enter the special prize slot during the break period if the amount of balls dispensed during the break period is close to a specific value (e.g., if it exceeds 99,900), aiming to reach the specific value by having balls enter the special prize slot during the break period can be achieved. This can be tailored to the player's needs, such as when, for some reason, they want to transition to an early stop state and end the special jackpot game. It is preferable to configure the special winning opening with a special opening/closing member that can be opened and closed so that game balls that have flowed down the game board 5 can enter the opening only during the break period. However, considering that adding a special opening/closing member would complicate control, it is also possible to leave the special winning opening open at all times, even outside of the break period, without providing a special opening/closing member. In this case, it is preferable to configure the special winning opening so that the frequency of balls entering the special winning opening is lower than the frequency of balls entering the various starting openings. Furthermore, if there is a concern that game balls that have flowed down the game board 5 may enter the special winning opening even outside of the break period, it is possible to place multiple game pins or the like at the special winning opening's ball entrance to make it extremely difficult for game balls that have flowed down the game board 5 to enter the special winning opening, and to keep the special winning opening's ball entrance open at all times so that balls can be entered by the hall manager at the player's request.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned example, after each jackpot play ends, the game is controlled to enter a time-saving state for a predetermined number of times. It is generally known that a status notification effect (e.g., "GET XX times of time-saving!") is displayed during the jackpot play to notify the player of the status after the jackpot play ends. However, as mentioned above, if the number of balls dispensed during the jackpot play reaches a specific value, the game transitions to a stop state, and the game ends with that jackpot play. If the status notification effect is executed, the player may feel disappointed. Taking this into consideration, if the number of balls dispensed during the jackpot play reaches a specific value, the status notification effect is not recognized by the player during that jackpot play. Specifically, if the number of balls dispensed during the jackpot play reaches a specific value, the status notification effect itself is not executed during the jackpot play, and the effect is changed to one that does not notify the player of the status after the jackpot play ends. Furthermore, considering that this effect change can complicate control, as another example, a status notification effect may be executed during a jackpot game, but the effect display device 1600 may hide all or part of the display of the status notification effect with a specified display object, making it invisible or difficult for the player to see. As described above in detail, when the amount of balls dispensed reaches a specific value but the ongoing jackpot game continues (the stop-preparation state), a standby notification is executed to inform the outside that the amount of balls dispensed has already reached the specific value. For example, the effect display device 1600 may display a display (normal display) related to the ongoing jackpot game, as well as a standby display that reads "The jackpot has ended, and today is over" to indicate that the amount of balls dispensed has already reached the specific value. The display of the status notification effect may be hidden by such a standby display. Specifically, the standby display may be displayed on a layer higher than the display of the status notification effect, and the standby display may be displayed in a position overlapping the display of the status notification effect, thereby hiding the display of the status notification effect. In this way, if the number of balls dispensed reaches a specific value during a jackpot game, the execution of the status notification effect during the jackpot game is suppressed, and the player is not clearly informed of the status after the jackpot game ends, thereby preventing the player from feeling disappointed.

[22. Various control processes on the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 in accordance with the progress of play on the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to Figs. 255 to 260. Fig. 255 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side power-on process, Fig. 256 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on process of Fig. 255, Fig. 257 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side timer interrupt process, Fig. 258 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting change process, Fig. 259 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting value confirmation display process, and Fig. 260 is a flowchart showing an example of the error display process. First, various random numbers used in game control will be described, followed by the operation of the initial value update type counter, the main control side power-on process, the main control side timer interrupt process, the setting change process, the setting value confirmation display process, and the error display process.

[22-1. Various random numbers]
Various random numbers used for game control include special random numbers used to determine whether or not a jackpot game state or a small jackpot game state will occur, initial value determination random numbers for hit determination used to determine the initial value of these special random numbers, reach determination random numbers used to determine whether or not a reach (missed reach) will occur when a jackpot game state is not generated, variable display pattern random numbers used to determine the variable display pattern of the special patterns that are variably displayed on the first special pattern display device and second special pattern display device of the function display unit 1400, pattern random numbers used to determine the jackpot pattern or small jackpot pattern (determine the type of win) that is derived and displayed on the first special pattern display device and second special pattern display device of the function display unit 1400 when a jackpot game state is generated, and initial value determination random numbers for jackpot pattern used to determine the initial value of these pattern random numbers. In addition to these random numbers, there are also prepared random numbers for determining whether or not to open or close the second starting port door 2411, which can guide the game ball B to the second starting port 2004, random numbers for determining the initial value of the ...

Of the various random numbers used in this type of game control, special random numbers are updated by hardware, while other random numbers are updated by software.

[22-2. Operation of the initial value update type counter]
For example, the special random number is updated directly by hardware using a main control built-in hardware random number circuit built into the main control MPU 1310a. When the main control MPU 1310a is reset, this main control built-in hardware random number circuit first sets a value within a predetermined numerical range as its initial value and rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. After extracting all values within the predetermined numerical range, the main control built-in hardware random number circuit again extracts a value within the predetermined numerical range and rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in hardware random number circuit repeatedly performs such rapid lottery drawing, and the main control MPU 1310a sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hardware random number circuit at the time of obtaining a value from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit as the special random number.

In contrast, the counter that updates the random number for determining whether a normal symbol has won is updated within a predetermined fixed range of values from the minimum to the maximum, and counts up this range by adding one value each time the main control timer interrupt process described below is performed. This counter counts up from the initial value determination random number for determining whether a normal symbol has won toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the initial value determination random number for determining whether a normal symbol has won. Once the counter has finished counting up the range of the random number for determining whether a normal symbol has won, from the minimum to the maximum value, the initial value determination random number for determining whether a normal symbol has won is updated. This type of counter update method is called an "initial value update type counter." The initial value determination random number for determining whether a normal symbol has won can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process that draws a value from the fixed range of values of the counter that updates the random number for determining whether a normal symbol has won.

In this embodiment, when the RAM clear switch (RWM switch 633d) on the payout control board 633 is operated when the power is turned on, or when the checksum value (sum value) obtained by treating various information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a as numerical values and calculating their sum during the main control side power-on process (described below) does not match the checksum value (sum value) stored during the main control side power-off process (when power is turned off), and all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for specific areas, the main control MPU 1310a retrieves an ID code from its built-in non-volatile RAM and executes an initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the normal pattern win determination random number based on this retrieved ID code, and this derived fixed value is set. In other words, the normal pattern win determination random number is always overwritten and updated with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code when the initial value derivation process is executed. In this way, the value set in the initial value determination random number for determining normal symbol wins is derived using the ID code, and analysis is prevented by taking two security measures: a first security measure in which the ID code cannot be rewritten even using an external device when it is stored in non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer that produced the main control MPU 1310a; and a second security measure in which an initial value derivation process is executed when all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for a specific area are cleared, thereby deriving the same fixed value based on the ID code.

Here, we explain the advantages of extracting an ID code from the nonvolatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a and using it as the random number for determining the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol has been hit. For example, even if someone attempting to illegally acquire a prize ball were to somehow obtain and disassemble a gaming board 5, illegally obtain an ID code pre-stored in the nonvolatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a, and determine the timing at which the counter value updating the random number for determining whether a normal symbol has been hit matches the normal symbol hit determination value, this ID code would be uniquely coded for individual identification and would be completely different from the ID codes pre-stored in the nonvolatile RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a' of other gaming boards 5'. In other words, the timing at which the counter value updating the random number for determining whether a normal symbol has been hit matches the normal symbol hit determination value on the other gaming boards 5' would also be completely different from that on the obtained gaming board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the acquired game board 5 is completely useless on other game boards 5', i.e., other pachinko machines 1', and therefore even if momentary power outages are caused at the predetermined intervals obtained by disassembly and analysis, and game balls are allowed to pass through gate 2003 at those predetermined intervals, it is not possible to open and close second starting gate door 2411 and create a state in which game ball B can be guided to second starting gate 2004.

[22-3. Processing when power is turned on on the main control side]
First, the main control MPU 1310a is configured so that a stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default when power is applied to the pachinko machine 1. This stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stored in the stack to temporarily store the contents of a memory element (register) currently in use, or an address stored in the stack to temporarily store the return address of this routine when a subroutine is terminated and the routine is returned to, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is filled.

Under the control of the main control MPU 1310a, the main control side power-on processing is performed as shown in Figures 255 and 256. When this main control side power-on processing begins, the main control MPU 1310a sets RAM access permissions (step S10). This RAM access permission setting allows updates to be made to the main control's built-in RAM.

Following step S10, the main control MPU 1310a performs a power outage clearing process (step S12). This power outage clearing process involves a wait timer process to determine whether a power outage warning signal has been input from the power outage monitoring circuit. Between power-on and reaching a predetermined voltage, the voltage does not rise immediately. On the other hand, during a power outage or momentary power outage (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and if it falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit as a power outage warning. Similarly, between power-on and reaching a predetermined voltage, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit. Therefore, the wait timer process waits until the voltage exceeds the power outage warning voltage and stabilizes after power-on. In this embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is set to 200 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S12, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the RAM clear switch has been operated (step S14). The RAM clear switch has three functions (RAM clear switch, setting switch, and error reset switch). In this case, it functions as a RAM clear switch to completely erase information stored in a specified area of the main control's internal RAM. In this determination, if the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is HIGH, the main control MPU 1310a determines that RAM clearing should be performed and determines that the RAM clear switch has not been operated. However, if the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is LOW, the main control MPU 1310a determines that RAM clearing should be performed and determines that the RAM clear switch has been operated. Note that the period from the start of the main control power-on processing routine to the determination in step S14 is extremely short, so in reality, the person pressing the RAM clear switch's pressing operation portion will actually power on the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the RAM clear switch's pressing operation portion.

If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S14 that the RAM clear switch has been operated, it sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 1 (step S16A). On the other hand, if the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S14 that the RAM clear switch has not been operated, it sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 0 (step S16B). In other words, the main control MPU 1310a is in a state in which it can execute the RAM clear process (step S38), which initializes the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a (i.e., the main control built-in RAM), for a predetermined period of time after power is turned on. The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG described above is a flag indicating whether or not to erase various information stored in the main control MPU 1310a's built-in RAM, including game information related to gameplay such as probability fluctuations and unpaid prize balls, and other information (e.g., information indicating the value of a counter for determining the output of main prize ball count information). It is set to 1 when various information is to be erased, and to 0 when various information is not to be erased. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S16A and S16B is stored in a general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a. When the RAM clear process (step S38) is executed to initialize the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a (i.e., the main control built-in RAM), the RAM clear switch must be operated and the setting key switch 1311a must not be set to the setting key ON position when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power outage, which is a "predetermined initialization process execution condition."

Following step S16A or step S16B, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the main frame 4 has been opened and the setting key has been turned ON (step S18). This determination is based on the detection signal from the main frame opening switch 4b, which detects the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, and the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a, which occurs when a setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and the setting key cylinder is turned ON by rotating it 60 degrees clockwise from its initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). Note that the period from when the main control side power-on processing, which is this routine, begins until the judgment in step S18 is extremely short, so in reality, the person who turns on the setting key switch 1311a will turn on the power to the pachinko machine 1 after turning on the setting key switch 1311a.

In the judgment of step S18, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main frame open switch 4b and determines that the setting key switch 1311a has been turned on based on the setting key ON signal, it sets the setting key ON flag CS-FLG to a value of 1 (step S20A). On the other hand, in the judgment of step S18, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the main frame 4 is not open relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main frame open switch 4b and/or determines that the setting key switch 1311a has not been turned on based on the setting key ON signal, it sets the setting key ON flag CS-FLG to a value of 0 (step S20B). The setting key ON flag CS-FLG is a flag that indicates whether or not to permit changes to or confirmation displays of the current setting value (the value set among setting values 1 to 6 at the time the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON) stored in a specified area (a setting value-dedicated area in a specific area, described below) of the main control internal RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. It is set to 1 when setting value changes and confirmation displays are permitted, and to 0 when setting value changes and confirmation displays are not permitted. The value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG set in steps S20A and S20B is stored in a general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

Following step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU 1310a performs a wait time standby process (step S22). This wait time standby process waits until the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 starts up (boots). In this embodiment, the standby time until booting (boot timer) is set to 2.5 seconds (s). When the main control MPU 1310a completes the wait time standby process, the peripheral control board 1510 is ready to receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). Note that, when the main control MPU 1310a completes the wait time standby process, the dispensing control board 633 completes booting in a shorter time than the peripheral control board 1510, so the dispensing control board 633 is ready to receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a).

Following step S22, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off or a power outage or momentary power outage occurs, if the voltage drops below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit as a power outage warning. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power outage warning signal. If, in the determination in step S24, the main control MPU 1310a determines that a power outage warning signal has been input, it returns to the determination in step S24 and repeats the determination in step S24 as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input. Note that a detailed explanation of the fact that the determination in step S24 is made following the wait time standby process in step S22 will be provided later.

If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S24 that a power outage warning signal has not been input, it determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to value 1 (step S25). By determining that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to value 1, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is met.

If, in step S25, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not equal to 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is not equal to 1, it then determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is equal to 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is equal to 0 (step S26). Having determined that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is equal to 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is equal to 0, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not met, but that various information should be erased in the same way as if the predetermined setting value change permission condition were met.

If, in step S26, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not equal to 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is not equal to 0, it calculates a checksum (step S29). This checksum is calculated by treating the various information stored in the main control's built-in RAM as numerical values.

Following step S29, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the calculated checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (sum value) stored during the main control side power-off processing (when power is off) described below (step S30). In step S30, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that they match, it determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG is set to value 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG is a flag that indicates whether game backup information such as various information, the checksum value (sum value), and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG was stored and retained in the main control's built-in RAM during the main control side power-off processing described below, and is set to value 1 when the main control side power-off processing has been completed successfully, and to value 0 when the main control side power-off processing has not been completed successfully. A detailed explanation of the calculation of the checksum in step S29 and the determination in step S30 when the main control board 1310 is first powered on for inspection after production during the inspection process on the main control board 1310 production line will be provided later.

If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S30 that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or if the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S32 that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0), i.e., that the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally, it performs error display processing (step S33) and enters an infinite loop. This infinite loop causes the state in which the error display processing has been completed to remain unchanged, making it impossible to continue playing the game. Consequently, the pachinko machine 1 must be powered off and then powered on again. This error display processing, the details of which will be explained later, determines that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control's internal RAM, or that the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally at the time of power-off, and displays an error message to that effect, indicating that the contents stored in the main control's internal RAM are abnormal (or unreliable). In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error indication.

Furthermore, after the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from its initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF) to turn it ON, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned ON while operating the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch on the payout control board 633, and this routine, the main control side power-on processing, is started again. The main control MPU 1310a determines in the above-mentioned step S14 that the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch has been operated, and sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 1 in the above-mentioned step S16A. Also, in the above-mentioned step S18, it determines that the main frame 4 has been opened relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main frame opening switch 4b, and determines that the setting key switch 1311a has been set to setting key ON based on the setting key ON signal, and sets the setting key ON flag RCL-FLG to a value of 1 in the above-mentioned step S20A. To set CS-FLG to a value of 1, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to a value of 1 in the determination of step S25 described above. This determines that the predetermined setting value change permission conditions are met, and following the setting change process of step S37 described below, in the process of step S38 described below, all areas of the main control internal RAM are cleared except for specific areas, thereby canceling the RAM error and allowing gameplay to continue (hereinafter referred to as the "first RAM error cancellation method").

As an alternative to this first RAM error clearing method, power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and with the setting key cylinder in its initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a), power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch on the payout control board 633. This will restart the main control side power-on processing routine. In the judgment of step S14 described above, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch has been operated, and sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 1 in step S16A described above. However, in step S18 described above, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the main frame 4 has not been opened relative to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main frame open switch 4b, and/or determines that the setting key switch 1311a has not been set to the setting key ON position based on the setting key ON signal, then in step S20B described above, it sets the setting key ON flag CS-FLG to a value of 0. To set the value to 0, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to 0 in step S26 described above. This means that the predetermined conditions for allowing a change to the setting value are not met, but it is determined that various information should be erased in the same way as if the predetermined conditions for allowing a change to the setting value were met. In step S38, described below, all areas of the main control internal RAM are cleared except for specific areas, thereby canceling the RAM error and allowing gameplay to continue (hereinafter referred to as the "second RAM error cancellation method").

In this embodiment, if the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S30 that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or if the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S32 that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0), that is, that the main control side power-off processing has not been completed successfully, it displays an error message in step S33 to inform the user that there is an abnormality (or that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are unreliable). This can be done using two methods: the first RAM error reset method and the second RAM error reset method. As a result, if there is no need to change the setting values at all, the RAM error can be reset by using the second RAM error reset method using the RAM clear switch.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S32 that the backup flag BK-FLG is set to a value of 1, i.e., that the main control side power outage processing has been completed normally, it sets the working area of the main control's internal RAM as the time of power recovery (step S34). This setting is performed by reading power recovery information from the ROM (i.e., the main control's internal ROM) built into the main control MPU 1310a and setting this power recovery information in the working area of the main control's internal RAM. This allows various information to be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to this information to be stored in a specified memory area of the main control's internal RAM. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a will proceed with the game based on the setting values stored in a dedicated setting value area in a specific area of the main control's internal RAM. Note that "power restoration" refers not only to the state in which power is turned on after being cut off, but also to the state in which power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage, and the state in which high frequency waves from fraudulent means (for example, a high frequency output device hidden in the hem of an individual's arm) are irradiated onto the main control board 1310, causing the main control MPU 1310a to reset itself, and then recover.

Following step S34, the main control MPU 1310a sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 0 (step S36). This causes various information, checksum values (sum values), etc. to change as various processes are performed thereafter. Therefore, unless the main control power-off process described below is successfully completed and the backup flag BK-FLG is not set to a value of 1, all areas of the main control's internal RAM will be cleared except for specific areas, as described below.

Following the determination in step S36, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to 1 (step S27). By determining that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to 1, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the predetermined setting value display permission condition is met.

In step S27, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to 1, and that the predetermined setting value display permission conditions are met, it performs setting value confirmation display processing (step S28). This setting value confirmation display processing, the details of which will be described later, displays the setting values stored in a dedicated setting value area in a specific area of the main control internal RAM on the setting display 1310g.

On the other hand, if the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S25 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to a value of 1, i.e., that the predetermined setting value change permission conditions are met, it performs a setting change process (step S37). This setting change process, the details of which will be described later, is performed based on a signal from the RAM clear switch on the dispensing control board 633. As mentioned above, the RAM clear switch has three combined functions (RAM clear switch, setting switch button, and error reset switch), and here it functions as a setting switch button for selecting and switching setting values. Each time the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch is operated, a signal indicating this (setting value selection switching signal) is input, the setting value is changed and displayed on the setting display 1310g, and when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is changed from ON to OFF, the changed setting value is determined based on the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a and stored in a specified area of the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a.

In the processing of step S37 or the judgment of step S26, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to 0, i.e., the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not met but the main control MPU 1310a determines to erase various information as if the predetermined setting value change permission condition were met, it clears all areas of the main control internal RAM except for a specific area (step S38). Here, the main control MPU 1310a does this by writing a value of 0 to a specified area of the main control internal RAM (the entire area of the main control internal RAM excluding the specific area). In this embodiment, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not set to 0 (i.e., the main control MPU 1310a determines to erase various information), and also when the setting change processing is terminated, the main control MPU 1310a always clears all areas of the main control internal RAM except for the specific area (the specified area of the main control internal RAM (the entire area of the main control internal RAM excluding the specific area)). Here, the "specific area" is composed of a dedicated setting value area in which setting values are stored, and a dedicated out ball count area in which the counting results (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008, first sub-out port 2021, and second sub-out port 2022 provided in the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5 are stored. The dedicated setting value area stores setting values that are changed in the setting change process described below, and the dedicated out ball count area stores the counting results (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008, first sub-out port 2021, and second sub-out port 2022 that are counted in the ball counting process described below.

The main control MPU 1310a may read and set a predetermined value from the main control's built-in ROM as the initial value. Furthermore, when the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch on the payout control board 633 has been operated indicates that RAM should be cleared and various information should be erased, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally, the main control MPU 1310a retrieves a unique ID code pre-stored in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, and performs an initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for determining a normal symbol win based on this retrieved ID code, and sets this fixed value as the initial value determination random number for determining a normal symbol win, which is used to determine the initial value of the random number for determining a normal symbol win described above.

Following step S38, the main control MPU 1310a sets the working area of the main control's built-in RAM as the initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control's built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the working area of the main control's built-in RAM. This initializes the game backup information, and for example, the value of the counter used to determine the output of main prize ball count information is set to the initial value of 0. Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a will proceed with the game based on the setting values stored in the dedicated setting value area in a specific area of the main control's built-in RAM.

Following step S36, S28, or S40, the main control MPU 1310a performs initial setting and startup settings for the main control's built-in WDT (step S41). Here, to set an initial value for the main control's built-in WDT, which monitors whether the main control MPU 1310a's operation (system) is normal, a timer setting value is set in the watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as the "WDT control register") built into the main control MPU 1310a, and the main control's built-in WDT is started, starting the timer count until the main control MPU 1310a is reset. When the main control's built-in WDT is started, the main control's built-in WDT starts counting. If the timer clear setting value is not set in the watchdog timer clear register (hereinafter referred to as the "WDT clear register") built into the main control MPU 1310a before the counted time reaches the timer setting value, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control's built-in WDT. In contrast, when the main control built-in WDT is activated and begins timing, if the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register before the time reached by the timer setting value, the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT is cleared and timing begins again. In this way, by repeatedly clearing the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT before the time reached by the timer setting value and then starting timing again, it is possible to monitor whether the main control MPU 1310a (system) is operating normally.

Following step S41, the main control MPU 1310a performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting sets the interrupt period when the main control timer interrupt processing described below is performed. In this embodiment, this is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control MPU 1310a performs serial communication initialization (step S44). Here, the main control MPU 1310a sets the communication speed and whether or not parity is enabled in the transmit serial port prescaler corresponding to the various serial input/output ports built into the main control MPU 1310a (for example, the serial input/output ports (receive channels and transmit channels) for the dispensing control board 633 and the serial input/output ports (receive channels and transmit channels) for the peripheral control board 1510), and also sets the transmit circuit initialization and transmission permission in the transmit serial port control register.

Following step S44, the main control MPU 1310a initializes the test signal output port (step S46). Here, the gaming machine testing laboratory initializes the test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information when the power is turned on (setting it to OFF data output).

Following step S46, the main control MPU 1310a performs startup settings for the main control's built-in hardware random number circuit (step S48). Here, settings are made to latch and acquire special random numbers used to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot game state, among various random numbers related to the game, in the hard random number control register built into the main control MPU 1310a in order to update them by hardware, and startup settings for the main control's built-in hardware random number circuit are also configured in the hard random number setting register. When these settings are performed, the main control's built-in hardware random number circuit is started, and based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, it rapidly extracts other values within a predetermined numerical range without overlapping, one after another. Once all values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, it again extracts a value within the predetermined numerical range, and based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, it rapidly extracts other values within the predetermined numerical range without overlapping, one after another. When the main control MPU 1310a obtains a random number (random number value) from the main control's built-in hardware random number circuit, it outputs a latch signal to the main control's built-in hardware random number circuit, and obtains the random number (random number value) extracted by the main control's built-in hardware random number circuit when this latch signal is input from the hard random number latch register built into the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets this obtained random number value as a special random number.

Following step S48, the main control MPU 1310a reserves commands to be sent when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, based on the power recovery information set in the main control's internal RAM's work area in step S34, a power-on status command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball count information output determination counter notification command, all of which are classified as power-on, are created to notify the user that power has been turned on (restored). These commands are then stored in the main control's internal RAM's transmission information storage area as transmission information. In some cases, the main control's internal RAM's transmission information storage area may contain various commands corresponding to various information read from the game backup information during the main control's internal RAM's work area setting in step S34. In such cases, after the various commands corresponding to the game information are first transmitted, the power-on status command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball information output determination counter notification command are transmitted. These commands are sent during the main control timer interrupt process, which will be described later. The details of how the commands to be sent when the power is turned on are scheduled in step S50 will be explained later.

Following step S50, the main control MPU 1310a performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). This setting causes the main control side timer interrupt processing, described below, to be repeated at the interrupt period set in step S42, i.e., every 4 ms.

Following step S52, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S54). When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or a power outage or momentary power outage occurs, as described above, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit to the main control MPU 1310a as a power outage warning. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power outage warning signal.

If, in step S54, the main control MPU 1310a determines that no power outage warning signal has been input, it performs a non-win/lose random number update process (step S56). This non-win/lose random number update process updates the random numbers for reach determination, variable display pattern, initial value determination random numbers for jackpot symbols, and initial value determination random numbers for small win symbols, etc., as described above. In this way, the non-win/lose random number update process updates random numbers that are not related to win/lose determination (jackpot determination) by software. Note that the random numbers for normal symbol win determination, initial value determination random numbers for normal symbol win determination, and normal symbol variable display pattern random numbers, etc., as described above, are also updated by this non-win/lose random number update process.

Following step S56, the process returns to step S54, where the main control MPU 1310a determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input. If no power outage warning signal has been input, the process performs a non-win/lose random number update process in step S56, and repeats steps S54 to S56. The process of steps S54 to S56 is referred to as the "main process on the main control side."

On the other hand, if the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S54 that a power outage warning signal has been input, it sets the interrupt prohibition setting (step S58). This setting prevents the main control timer interrupt processing described below from being performed, prevents writing to the main control's built-in RAM, and protects the rewriting of various information, including the game information and other information mentioned above.

Following step S58, the main control MPU 1310a starts outputting a power outage clear signal (step S60). Here, the same processing is performed as when the power outage clear signal was started to be output in the power outage clear processing in step S12.

Following step S60, the main control MPU 1310a stops the drive signals being output to, for example, the various displays of the function display unit 1400, the start port solenoid 2412, the attacca solenoid 2414, the bonus prize port solenoid 2612, the V-distribution solenoid 3007, the special monitor, etc. (step S62).

Following step S62, the main control MPU 1310a calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by treating the game information in the working area of the main control's built-in RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and the backup flag BK-FLG value, as numerical values.

Following step S64, the main control MPU 1310a sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control MPU 1310a sets RAM access prohibition (step S68). This RAM access prohibition setting makes it impossible to access the main control's internal RAM, thereby preventing updates to the contents of the main control's internal RAM.

Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, a timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT that was started in step S41, clearing the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT and making it impossible to start timekeeping again, resulting in the main control MPU 1310a being forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. The main control MPU 1310a then performs this main control side power-on processing again. The processing from step S58 to step S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power-off processing."

As described above, when the main control MPU 1310a is affected by electrical noise, it is forcibly reset by its built-in reset circuit. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a is unable to make the judgment in step S54 and is unable to perform the main control side power-off processing. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by its built-in reset circuit, it is reset without performing the main control side power-off processing, and will once again perform the main control side power-on processing. In other words, because the main control side power-off processing is not executed, the checksum value (sum value) from the main control side power-off processing based on the time immediately before the built-in reset circuit was forcibly reset is not stored. Therefore, the checksum value (sum value) stored when the main control side power-off processing was executed the previous time power was cut off and the checksum value (sum value) calculated in step S29 when the built-in reset circuit is forcibly reset and restarted will not match, resulting in a checksum (sum value) error in the main control's built-in RAM, and in the processing of step S38, all areas of the main control's built-in RAM will be completely erased (cleared) except for specific areas.

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset in the event of a power outage or momentary power outage, and then performs the main control side power-on processing when power is restored.

In step S30, the game backup information stored in the main control's built-in RAM is checked to see if it is correct, and then in step S32, it is checked to see if the main control's power-off processing was completed normally. In this way, by double-checking the game backup information stored in the main control's built-in RAM, it is checked to see if the game backup information was stored as a result of fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, if the determination in step S25 is that the setting change permission flag CS-FLG is not 0 (is 1), i.e., if a setting change of the setting value is permitted, the setting change process is performed in step S37, and in step S38, all areas of the main control internal RAM are completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area. If the determination in step S26 is that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1), i.e., if it is determined that various information should be erased, all areas of the main control internal RAM are completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area. In this way, if the pressing operation unit is operated when power is restored (more precisely, if the pachinko machine 1 is powered on while pressing the pressing operation unit of the RAM clear switch), and if a setting change that can change the setting value is performed (if the main control MPU 1310a performs the setting change process), the main control MPU 1310a always clears the specified area of the main control internal RAM. This is because when the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch is pressed, for example, when the gaming hall closes its business and the pachinko machine 1 is in a state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a state in which it has won with a variable probability (probability change)), the above-mentioned gaming backup information needs to be erased (cleared) before the next business day begins, so a staff member or other attendant at the gaming hall needs to turn on the power to the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch. Furthermore, when a setting value is changed, once the setting change process is performed (even if the current setting value is ultimately maintained), it is necessary to erase (clear) the game backup information, including various information such as game information obtained using the setting value before the setting change process, from the main control's built-in RAM. As mentioned above, the setting key is an important key that can be used to change the setting value as well as check the current setting value. Therefore, only a limited number of people, including the amusement hall manager, are permitted to possess it, and it is limited to two or three people. In this embodiment, even if the setting value is not changed, that is, even if there is no setting key that is possessed only by a limited number of specific people, a staff member such as an amusement hall employee can erase (clear) the game backup information from the main control's built-in RAM by turning on the power to the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch when it is necessary to erase (clear) the game backup information.

Here, we will explain the fact that the determination of the presence or absence of a power outage warning signal in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, we will explain the problem that occurs when the presence or absence of a power outage warning signal is not determined in step S24, that is, when the value of the RAM clear flag is determined in step S26 after the wait time standby process in step S22 and subsequent processing is carried out.

As mentioned above, when a power outage or momentary power interruption occurs and power is cut off from the island equipment in the amusement hall, the charge stored in electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, for a period of approximately 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power outage or momentary power interruption. In other words, even if power from the island equipment in the amusement hall is cut off due to a momentary or power outage, the charge stored in the hardware electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V, allowing the main control side power-off processing to be completed within approximately 7 ms after power from the island equipment in the amusement hall is cut off. This ensures that the main control side power-off processing can be completed reliably even if a power outage or momentary power interruption occurs and power from the island equipment in the amusement hall is cut off while a player is playing, that is, while the main control side main processing or the main control side timer interrupt processing described below is being performed.

However, in extremely rare cases, when power is restored, the wait time standby process in step S22 begins timing the wait time (boot timer: set to 2.5 seconds in this embodiment) until the system that controls the drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 starts (boots). If a momentary or power outage occurs just before this wait time is reached, the charge stored in the hardware electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. However, within a period of approximately 7 ms, the interrupt initialization is performed in step S42, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52. This causes the main control timer interrupt process described below to be performed, and even if the contents of the main control's internal RAM are updated, the main control's power-on process during power-off may not be able to be completed. As a result, the checksum calculated based on the contents of the main control's internal RAM is not stored, and the main control's power-on process will begin again when power is restored.

As a result, when power is restored, the main control side power-on processing begins and the wait time standby processing in step S22 is completed without any momentary or power outage. Then, in step S30, a checksum calculated based on the contents of the main control's built-in RAM in step S29 is compared with the value stored in the main control's built-in RAM immediately before the momentary or power outage occurred. The checksum values will not match, and in step S38, all areas of the main control's built-in RAM will be cleared except for specific areas. In other words, when power is restored, the RAM clear switch is operated by an amusement hall staff member or other attendant, and the above-mentioned gaming backup information stored in the main control's built-in RAM will be forcibly erased (cleared) even if the amusement hall staff member or other attendant does not express an intention to clear the RAM.

In this embodiment, therefore, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process is provided in step S24 to determine whether a power outage warning signal has been input. If a power outage warning signal has been input, the process returns to the determination of step S24, and the determination of step S24 is repeated as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input. This prevents game progress. Although a value is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A or step S16B before the wait time standby process of step S22 is performed, as described above, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is stored in the general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, even if RAM access permission is set in step S10, the contents of the main control internal RAM (game information) are not changed at all.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process is provided in step S24 to determine whether a power outage warning signal has been input. If a power outage warning signal has been input (i.e., if it is determined in step S24 that power to the pachinko machine 1 has been cut off after the wait time standby process of step S22), the process returns to the determination of step S24. As long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input, the determination of step S24 is repeated, preventing game play from progressing. This prevents various information, including game information and other information (e.g., information indicating the value of the counter used to determine the output of main prize ball information), from being updated, and prevents fluctuations in the checksum calculation results. As a result, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is restarted, it determines that the checksum calculation result of step S29 matches the checksum value calculated and stored in step S64, and therefore does not initialize the game information stored in the main control's internal RAM immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage. This prevents game information from being initialized immediately before a momentary or power outage occurs when power is restored.

In addition, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process is provided as step S24 to determine whether a power outage warning signal has been input. When a power outage warning signal has not been input (i.e., when it is determined by the judgment of step S24 that power to the pachinko machine 1 has not been cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of step S22), even if power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is progressing a game, power is supplied to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, by electrolytic capacitor MC2, so that game information and other information (for example, main prize ball number information output judgment) relating to the progress of the game can be output. Because the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is able to complete the main control side power outage processing, which consists of steps S58 to S68, a backup process for storing various information including information indicating the value of a power counter (e.g., information indicating the value of a power counter), and an infinite loop, when restarted, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum calculation result of step S29 matches the checksum calculation result of the backup process (i.e., the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64). This means that the game information stored in the main control's internal RAM immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage occurs is not initialized. In other words, the main control board 1310 can be started up with the game information restored to the state immediately before the momentary power outage or power outage occurred.

Furthermore, if it is determined in step S24 that a power outage warning signal has been input immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control's built-in WDT, thereby allowing the main control side power outage processing to be started again without any updating of the contents of the main control's built-in RAM.On the other hand, if it is determined in step S24 that a power outage warning signal has not been input immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, the main control side power outage processing can be reliably completed within the ``power supply assurance period during momentary power outage or power outage'' of approximately 7 ms, as before, determined by hardware. In other words, in this embodiment, if a momentary or power outage occurs while the main control side is performing power-on processing upon power restoration and the power from the island equipment in the gaming hall is cut off, and the charge stored in electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, for a period of approximately 7 milliseconds (ms) after the power outage or momentary power outage. Therefore, if the main control side power-off processing cannot be completed within the "momentary or power supply assurance period" of approximately 7 ms set by the hardware electrolytic capacitor MC2, then immediately after the wait time standby processing of step S22, step S24 determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input. If a power outage warning signal has been input, the process returns to the determination of step S24, and as long as the power outage warning signal continues to be input, the determination of step S24 is repeated, preventing game play from continuing.

This software prevents the game from progressing, preventing progression to steps after step S24 (specifically, the control flow in which interrupt initial settings are made in step S42, and then interrupt permission is set in step S52 to start the main control timer interrupt processing described below), thereby preventing the contents of the main control's built-in RAM (game information and various information including other information (for example, information indicating the value of the counter for determining the main prize ball number information output) from being updated). In this way, when a power outage or momentary power outage occurs and the power is cut off from the island equipment in the gaming hall, the system is divided into two parts: one part is handled by software to prevent any changes to the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and various information including other information (for example, information indicating the value of the counter used to determine the output of main prize ball information)) and the other part is handled by hardware to ensure that the main control side power outage processing is completed and any changes to the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and various information including other information (for example, information indicating the value of the counter used to determine the output of main prize ball information)) are prevented reliably.

Next, we will explain how the reservation setting for the command to be sent when power is turned on is performed in step S50. As described above, in step S50, based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, a power-on status command classified as power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball count information output determination counter notification command are created to notify that power has been turned on (restored), and these are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. This power-on main control return destination command is mainly composed of information indicating the drive state of the start port solenoid 2412 and information indicating the drive state of the attacca solenoid 2414. Here, we will first explain the problem that occurs when the power-on main control return destination command does not include information indicating the drive state of the start port solenoid 2412 and information indicating the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2414; in other words, the problem that occurs when the power-on main control return destination command in step S50 does not schedule the command to be sent when power is turned on.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of a jackpot game status screen (e.g., a jackpot game performance screen) on the display area of the performance display device 1600, and the main control board 1310 is driving the attacca solenoid 2414 and the large prize opening 2005 is open by the opening/closing member, if a momentary or power outage occurs and power is subsequently restored, the main control board 1310 will be restored to the game status immediately before the momentary or power outage occurred based on the power recovery information set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the working area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, and will begin driving the attacca solenoid 2414, causing the large prize opening 2005 to transition from a state in which it is closed by the opening/closing member to a state in which it is open.

However, when a momentary or power outage occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. Therefore, when a momentary or power outage occurs and power is subsequently restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can recover based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 when power is restored. However, when a momentary or power outage occurs and power is subsequently restored while the main control board 1310 is generating a jackpot gaming state as the gaming state, the peripheral control board 1510 can recover by displaying a screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600 according to the probability and time-saving state based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 when power is restored, but it cannot at all indicate which round in the jackpot gaming state it is. In other words, even if, for example, a gaming ball enters the large prize opening 2005 and is detected by the large prize opening sensor 2402, and the main control board 1310 sends a large prize opening 1 count display command to the peripheral control board 1510 indicating the number of gaming balls that have entered the large prize opening 2005, and the peripheral control board 1510 receives it, the peripheral control board 1510 can display the number of gaming balls that have entered the large prize opening 2005 on the screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600 according to the probability and time-saving status, but it cannot at all display which round in the jackpot gaming state (i.e. which round) it is.

In such a situation, for example, when the fourth round (fourth round) of the jackpot game state ends, the main control board 1310 stops driving the attacca solenoid 2414 and sends a large prize opening 1 closed display command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, instructing the large prize opening 2005 to transition from an open state to a closed state by the opening/closing member (i.e., the start of closing the large prize opening 2005 of the first attacca unit 2400 between rounds), and when the main control board 1310 starts the fifth round (fifth round) of the jackpot game state, it starts driving the attacca solenoid 2414 and sends a large prize opening 5th open display command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, instructing the large prize opening 2005 to transition from an open state to an open state by the opening/closing member (i.e., the start of opening the large prize opening 2005 for the fifth round). As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches from the screen corresponding to the probability and time-saving status described above to a screen indicating the start of five rounds of the jackpot game state, and displays it in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of a screen on the display area of the effect display device 1600 that informs the player that the game state has become favorable to the player, allowing game balls to be received into the second starting port 2004 (for example, a screen informing the player that the second starting port door 2411 is open), and the main control board 1310 drives the starting port solenoid 2412 to open the second starting port door 2411, allowing game ball B to be guided to the second starting port 2004, if a momentary power outage or power failure occurs and power is then restored, the main control board 1310 will be restored to the game state it was in immediately before the momentary power outage or power failure based on the power recovery information set in the working area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the working area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, and will begin driving the starting port solenoid 2412 to close the second starting port door 2411 and transition to a state in which the second starting port 2004 is closed.

However, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 is designed to receive various commands from the main control board 1310 and recover when power is restored.Therefore, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs and power is then restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can recover based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 when power is restored. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state where a gaming ball can be received at the second starting port 2004, creating a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, if a momentary power outage or power outage occurs and then power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 will be able to return to normal by displaying a screen in the display area of the performance display device 1600 according to the probability and time-saving state based on the probability and time-saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 when power is restored, but the peripheral control board 1510 will not be able to display at all in the display area of the performance display device 1600 a screen informing the player that the gaming state has become such that a gaming ball can be received at the second starting port 2004, creating a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. For this reason, a player seated in front of the pachinko machine may be surprised by the occurrence of a momentary or power outage and forget that when power is restored, the game state immediately before the momentary or power outage occurred was one in which game balls could be received into second starting port 2004. In such cases, even though the game state at the time of power restoration is restored to one in which game balls can be received into second starting port 2004, the screen instructing the game (i.e., the screen instructing the game to insert a game ball into second starting port 2004) is not displayed in the display area of effect display device 1600 when power is restored, which causes the player to become confused about what game to play.

As such, in the two examples mentioned above, there was a problem in that the gaming state immediately before the momentary or blackout could not be quickly restored after power was restored. In other words, when a momentary or blackout occurs and power is subsequently restored, a player seated in front of the pachinko machine may mistakenly believe that the pachinko machine's system has frozen, or in other words, that it has malfunctioned.

In this embodiment, in order for the main control board 1310 to transmit a power-on status command and a power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510 when the power is turned on (including not only when the power is turned on, but also when a power outage or momentary power outage occurs and power is restored), in step S50, the power-on status command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command, which are classified as power-on, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. These commands are then transmitted during the main control's timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

As a result, based on the power-on state command and power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, for example, in the example described above, if a momentary or power outage occurs during the fourth round of the jackpot game state and power is then restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can communicate to the peripheral control board 1510 that the main control board 1310 will return to its original state by starting to drive the attacca solenoid 2414 and transitioning the jackpot opening 2005 from a closed state to an open state by the opening/closing member. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510 cannot display a screen specifying that it is the fourth round of the jackpot game state (i.e., a screen indicating which round it is), in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but it can display a screen informing that it is a jackpot game state, that the attacca solenoid 2414 has started to be driven, and that the large prize opening 2005 has been opened by the opening/closing member (for example, a screen saying "It's a jackpot. The large prize opening is open. Please play so that the game ball enters the large prize opening."). A message (a screen for conveying a message to the player) can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 to instruct the player seated in front of the pachinko machine to play a game in which a game ball is to be placed in the big winning port 2005 after power is restored. Also, for example, in the above example, in a state where a game ball can be received in the second starting port 2004 and the game is in an advantageous state for the player, if an instantaneous power outage or a blackout occurs and then power is restored, the main control board 1310 starts driving the starting port solenoid 2412 as the return destination. The peripheral control board 1510 then displays a screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600 informing the player that the second starting gate door 2411 has been opened and that it is now possible to guide game ball B into the second starting gate 2004 (for example, a screen that tells the player the message "The second starting gate door 2411 is open. Please play so that the game ball enters the second starting gate."), and can instruct the player seated in front of the pachinko machine to play a game in which the game ball will enter the second starting gate 2004 after power is restored.

This allows the main control board 1310 to give detailed instructions on where the peripheral control board 1510 should return to when power is restored after a momentary or power outage. Therefore, once power is restored, the game can be quickly restored to the state it was in immediately before the momentary or power outage. In other words, when a momentary or power outage occurs and power is restored, a player seated in front of the pachinko machine will see that the pachinko machine's system has frozen, preventing them from mistaking it for a malfunction.

Next, we will explain the calculation of the checksum in step S29 and the judgment in step S30 when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time since being manufactured for inspection during the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process on the main control board 1310 manufacturing line. When the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time since being manufactured for inspection during the main control board inspection process, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the backup processing of steps S58 to S68 and the main control side power-off processing consisting of an infinite loop. Therefore, even if a checksum is calculated based on the contents of the main control internal RAM in step S29, the checksum values will never match when compared in step S30, and all areas of the main control internal RAM except for a specific area will necessarily be cleared in step S38.

As a result, when the reservation setting for the commands to be sent when the power is turned on is made in step S50, the power-on status command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball count information output determination counter notification command, which are classified as power-on, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. This results in only three commands being stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM: the power-on status command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball count information output determination counter notification command. These commands are then transmitted first in the main control timer interrupt processing described below: the power-on status command, followed by the power-on main control return destination command, followed by the power-on main prize ball count information output determination counter notification command. Using this, during the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time since being manufactured for inspection, the power-on status command is transmitted as the first command from the main control board 1310 to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

The power-on state command consists of information instructing the player to clear the RAM when the RAM clear switch is operated upon power-on (including not only power-on but also power restoration after a power outage or momentary power interruption), information instructing which state (probability and time-saving state) to return to upon power-on (including not only power-on but also power restoration after a power outage or momentary power interruption), among the above-mentioned low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability non-time-saving state, and high-probability non-time-saving state, and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, we will explain the problems that arise when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

The model code of a pachinko machine can be used to identify which copyright of a work it refers to and what game specifications it has when creating the so-called max type, mid type, or sweet type of pachinko machine 1 (or more accurately, the main control board 1310) (for example, a game specification in which when a probability change occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs, or a game specification in which the number of times the special pattern changes is limited (for example, 30 or 70 times) and a probability change occurs (a so-called ST machine)).

On the production line of a manufacturer that produces pachinko machines 1, when main control boards 1310 are manufactured, there are cases where main control boards 1310 for multiple copyrights are mixed together. As a result, workers on the production line may not know which of the multiple copyrights (for example, the copyrights for Movie A, Movie B, Drama C, Movie D, Manga E, and Manga F) the main control board 1310 is being sent down the production line to manufacture for which of the multiple copyrights. Or, even if the main control board 1310 is being sent down the production line to manufacture a main control board 1310 for one of the multiple copyrights (for example, the copyright for Movie D), they may mistakenly believe that the main control board 1310 is being sent down the production line to manufacture a main control board 1310 for another copyright (for example, the copyright for Manga F).

For this reason, when main control boards 1310 for multiple different work copyrights are manufactured on the production line of a manufacturer that produces pachinko machines 1, if main control boards 1310 for multiple work copyrights are mixed together, workers on the production line will not be able to confirm which work copyright the main control board 1310 manufactured on the production line belongs to, and even for the same work copyright, they will not be able to confirm which model type (max type, mid type, sweet type) or what game specifications it has (a game specification in which when a probability fluctuation occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs, or an ST machine).

As a result, if main control boards 1310 for multiple different work copyrights are mixed when manufacturing main control boards 1310 on the production line of a manufacturer that produces pachinko machines 1, the main control boards 1310 for multiple different work copyrights will be sent to the game board assembly line where the main control boards 1310 are attached to the game board 5. As a result, workers on the game board assembly line may attach a main control board 1310 to the game board 5 that does not correspond to the game board 5 for the work copyright. This results in a problem of reduced production efficiency of the game board 5.

In this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is powered on (this includes not only power-on but also power recovery after a power outage or momentary power outage), it sends a power-on status command containing information indicating the pachinko machine model code to the peripheral control board 1510. In order to do this, in step S50, a power-on status command classified as power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball count information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. These commands are then sent during the main control's timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

As a result, during the main control board inspection process, which is an inspection process on the production line, a worker on the production line of the manufacturer that produces pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310, and based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine contained in the power-on status command received by the inspection device from the main control board 1310, the inspection device verifies the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, including the series code that identifies the model type (max type, middle type, or sweet type) mentioned above, the copyright code that identifies the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, when a probability fluctuation occurs, that state will continue until the next jackpot game state occurs). By visually inspecting the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on a game specification code that identifies the game specification whereby a probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of special symbol changes (such as an ST machine), in addition to the game specification whereby a probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of special symbol changes, it is possible to determine which copyright of the work the main control board 1310 corresponds to, and even for the same copyright of the work, it is possible to determine which model type (max type, mid type, or sweet type) and what game specification (a game specification where when a probability fluctuation occurs, that state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs, or an ST machine).

As a result, even if main control boards 1310 for multiple different game copyrights are mixed together when manufacturing main control boards 1310 on the production line of a manufacturer that produces pachinko machines 1, workers in the main control board inspection process on the production line can visually check the inspection monitor to accurately determine the model type, game copyright, and game specifications of the main control board 1310, allowing them to be separated into game copyright-specific main control boards 1310 and sent to the subsequent game board assembly line. Workers on the game board assembly line can then reliably attach main control boards 1310 that correspond to game boards 5 for the game copyrights to the game boards 5, preventing a decline in game board 5 production efficiency caused by attaching main control boards 1310 that do not correspond to game boards 5 for the game copyrights to game boards 5. This can therefore contribute to improving game board 5 production efficiency.

[22-4. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control side timer interrupt process will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at the interrupt period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in Figures 255 and 256.

When the main control side timer interrupt processing starts, the main control MPU 1310a switches the register bank as shown in FIG. 257 (step S100). The general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks: a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing described above, while the second register bank is used in this routine, the main control side timer interrupt processing. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in this routine, the main control side timer interrupt processing, the register bank is switched from the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing to the second register bank. Note that in this embodiment, when this routine, the main control side timer interrupt processing, starts, there is no need to save each register to the stack.

Following step S100, the main control MPU 1310a performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). This timer subtraction processing, for example, manages the time for which the first special symbol display device and second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 are lit according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric device control processing described below, the time for which the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is lit according to the normal symbol variable display pattern determined by the normal symbol and normal electric device control processing described below, as well as the ACK signal input determination time, which is set as a determination condition when determining whether a payer ACK signal has been input, which indicates that the payout control board 633 has successfully received various commands sent by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). Specifically, when the change time of the variable display pattern or normal symbol change display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt period is set to 4 ms, so each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the change time is subtracted by 4 ms, and when the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, the change time of the variable display pattern or normal symbol change display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured when the subtraction result becomes 0. These various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM.

Following step S102, the main control MPU 1310a performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input processing, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control MPU 1310a reads, for example, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, the detection signal from the general prize opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first start opening sensor 3002, the detection signal from the second start opening sensor 2401, the detection signal from the large prize opening sensor 2402, the detection signal from the out sensor 664, the detection signal from the first ball sensor 703 and the second ball sensor 704, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050, the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch, the detection signal from the door frame opening switch, the detection signal from the main frame opening switch 4b, the signal from the setting key switch 1311a, the signal from the setting switch button, and the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 which indicates that the payout control board 633 has successfully received the prize ball command sent in the prize ball control process described below, and stores this as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Additionally, when the detection signal from the first start gate sensor 3002 and the detection signal from the second start gate sensor 2401 are read, the corresponding start gate winning command classified as "other" is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. In other words, when a detection signal is received from the first start gate sensor 3002, the corresponding start gate winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM, and when a detection signal is received from the second start gate sensor 2401, the corresponding start gate winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM.

In this embodiment, when the switch input process begins, the input states of all input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a (including those for which vacant terminal processing has been performed) are first read a first time, and then, after a predetermined time (e.g., 10 μs) has elapsed, they are read again a second time. The result of this second read is then compared with the result of the first read. A determination is made as to whether any of these comparison results are the same. If the results are not the same, then the result is read a third time, and the result of this third read is compared with the result of the second read. A determination is again made as to whether any of these comparison results are the same. If the results are not the same, then the result is read a fourth time, and the result of this fourth read is compared with the result of the third read. A determination is again made as to whether any of these comparison results are the same. If the results are not the same, then it is treated as if no game ball has entered the game, or the input is ignored.

In this way, in the switch input processing, the input status of all input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a (including those that have been subjected to vacant terminal processing) is compared twice in two steps: the first to third double reading and the second to fourth double reading. This makes it possible to avoid false detections due to the influence of chattering, noise, etc. Therefore, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2801, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2403, etc. This can improve the reliability of the detection signal from 01, the detection signal from the large prize opening sensor 2402, the detection signal from the out sensor 664, the first ball sensor 703, and the second ball sensor 704, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050, the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch, the detection signal from the door frame open switch, the detection signal from the main frame open switch 4b, the signal from the setting key switch 1311a, the signal from the setting switch button, and the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 which indicates that the payout control board 633 has successfully received the prize ball command sent in the prize ball control process described below.

Following step S104, the main control MPU 1310a performs input terminal malfunction monitoring processing (step S105). This input terminal malfunction monitoring processing checks the status of the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a that have been treated as vacant terminals based on the information acquired in the switch input processing of step S104. Specifically, for example, input terminal PA7 of input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a is grounded to ground (GND) as a vacant terminal, so its logic state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal malfunction monitoring processing, it checks whether the logic state of the input terminals of the various input ports that have been treated as vacant terminals is LOW based on the information acquired in the switch input processing of step S104. When the main control MPU 1310a determines that the logical state of the input terminal that has been subjected to the vacant terminal processing is not LOW, it stores a malfunction command classified as a notification display, which notifies the user that a malfunction has occurred in the peripheral circuitry of the main control MPU 1310a, as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM.

Following step S105, the main control MPU 1310a performs a win/loss random number update process (step S106). This win/loss random number update process updates the pattern random numbers described above. In addition to these random numbers, the random numbers for determining the initial values for the jackpot pattern and the random numbers for determining the initial values for the small win pattern, which are updated in the non-win/loss random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 256, are also updated. These random numbers for determining the initial values for the jackpot pattern and the small win pattern are updated in the main control side main process and this main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, thereby further increasing randomness. In contrast, since the pattern random numbers are random numbers related to win/loss determination (win determination), the respective counters count up only each time this win/loss random number update process is performed. In addition, the random numbers used to determine whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol and the random numbers used to determine the initial value for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol, as described above, are also updated by this winning/losing random number update process.

For example, as described above, the counter that updates the random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol is an initial value update type counter that is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range ranging from a minimum value to a maximum value, and counts up this range by adding one value each time the main control side timer interrupt process is performed. It counts up from the initial value determination random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the initial value determination random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol. Once the counter has finished counting up the range of the random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol from its minimum value to its maximum value, the initial value determination random number for determining whether a win is a winning symbol is updated by this win/loss random number update process. The initial value determination random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process that draws a value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for determining whether a normal symbol is a winning symbol.

In this embodiment, the random numbers used to determine the initial values for the jackpot symbol and the random numbers used to determine the initial values for the small win symbol are updated by the non-win/lose random number update process in step S56 of the main control side power-on processing (main control side main processing) shown in Figure 256, and the win/lose random number update process in step S106 of the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine. However, if the processing time for this routine fluctuates each time the interrupt timer is generated and the main control side main processing is repeatedly executed within the time remaining until the next interrupt timer is generated, causing the number of times the non-win/lose random number update process in step S56 is executed to become random, the random numbers used to determine the initial values for the jackpot symbol and the random numbers used to determine the initial values for the small win symbol can be updated only in the non-win/lose random number update process in step S56.

Following step S106, the main control MPU 1310a performs a ball counting process (step S107). In this ball counting process, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, the game balls that are discharged from the game board 5 in response to a detection signal from the out sensor 664 and flow through the out ball passage 663 (game balls that are shot into the game area 5a and accepted by a prize opening such as the general prize opening 2001, the first start opening 2002, the second start opening 2004, the big prize opening 2005, the special prize opening 2006, etc. and discharged from the game board 5, and game balls that are shot into the game area 5a and When the out sensor 664 detects a game ball that has been received into the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021, or the second sub-out port 2022 and discharged from the game board 5 without being received into any winning port after being received into the winning port, a calculation is performed to add (increment) the value of the total recovered ball counter by 1, and a detection signal is input from the first ball sensor 703 to detect the game ball that has been received into the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021, or the second sub-out port 2022. When the first ball sensor 703 detects a game ball that has been collected and is flowing through the first ball path 701, a calculation is performed to add (increment) a value of 1 to the value of the out ball counter, which counts the number of game balls that have been collected by the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021, and the second sub-out port 2022, that is, the so-called out balls. A detection signal is input from the second ball sensor 704, and the game ball is shot into the game area 5a and is sent to the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, When the second ball sensor 704 detects a game ball that has been accepted into a prize opening such as the second starting opening 2004, the large prize opening 2005, or the special prize opening 2006 and is circulating through the second ball path 702, an operation is performed to add (increment) the value of a safe ball counter, which counts the number of game balls, so-called safe balls, that have been accepted into prize openings such as the general prize opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the large prize opening 2005, or the special prize opening 2006. In other words, in the ball counting process, the out sensor 664 detects both game balls received in the winning ports such as the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the big winning port 2005, and the special winning port 2006, as well as game balls received in the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021, and the second sub-out port 2022; the first ball sensor 703 detects game balls collected by the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021, and the second sub-out port 2022; and the second ball sensor 704 detects game balls received in the winning ports such as the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the big winning port 2005, and the special winning port 2006.

Then, the main control MPU 1310a stores the value of the total recovered ball counter, which is the calculation result, as the total number of game balls received in the winning ports such as the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the large winning port 2005, the special winning port 2006, etc., and the game balls received in the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021, and the second sub-out port 2022 in a dedicated area for counting total recovered balls in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM, and stores the value of the out ball counter in an out The total number of out balls collected by the main prize opening 1008, first sub-out opening 2021, and second sub-out opening 2022 is stored in an area dedicated to counting out balls in a specific area of the main control's built-in RAM, and the value of the safe ball counter is stored in an area dedicated to counting safe balls in a specific area of the main control's built-in RAM as the total number of safe balls accepted by prize openings such as the general prize opening 2001, first start opening 2002, second start opening 2004, large prize opening 2005, and special prize opening 2006. The ratio of the number of payouts (total number of prize balls paid out) to the value of the total collected ball counter, i.e., the ratio of the number of payouts (total number of prize balls paid out) to the total number of game balls inserted, is calculated, and the calculation result is stored in a base calculation area in a specific area of the main control's built-in RAM. The output of a lighting signal to be displayed on the special monitor is also set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

Furthermore, when the value of the total recovered ball counter is divisible by the value 10, that is, whenever the total number of game balls recovered at the winning ports such as the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the large winning port 2005, and the special winning port 2006, as well as the out port 1008, the first sub-out port 2021, and the second sub-out port 2022, reaches 10 balls, the main control MPU 1310a creates a ball recovery command to notify this fact and stores it in the output information storage area as transmission information. Note that when the calculation results, that is, the recovered ball counter value, the out ball counter value, and the safe ball counter value, each reach their maximum value (65,535 in this embodiment) and the main control MPU 1310a further adds (increments) the recovered ball counter value, the out ball counter value, and the safe ball counter value by 1, the recovered ball counter value, the out ball counter value, and the safe ball counter value overflow to 0, and the calculation is performed to add from this value 0.

Following step S107, the main control MPU 1310a performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control processing, input information is read from the input information storage area described above and a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created based on this input information, and a self-check command is created to check the connection status between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. The created prize ball command and self-check command are then sent to the payout control board 633 as main payout serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the large prize opening 2005, a prize ball command is created to pay out 15 prize balls; and since the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls has reached 10, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to notify this, stored as output information in the output information storage area, and the prize ball command is sent to the payout control board 633. If a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has successfully received this prize ball command is not input within a specified time, a self-check command is created to check the connection status between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and sent to the payout control board 633.

In addition, in the prize ball control process of step S108, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, if the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10, a main prize ball number information output command classified as "other" is created to communicate this fact, and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. The main prize ball number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter. The value of this counter for determining the output of main prize ball number information is calculated by reading input information from the input information storage area described above, and counting the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls based on this input information, that is, based on the game balls that have entered the various prize openings (hereinafter referred to as "various prize openings provided on the game board 5") such as the general prize opening 2001, the first start opening 2002, the second start opening 2004, the large prize opening 2005, and the special prize opening 2006 provided on the game board 5, and is stored and updated in the prize ball planned information storage area of the main control built-in RAM during the prize ball control process in step S108. In the prize ball control process of step S108, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM is read, and input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and added to this read value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter by the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls based on this input information. If the value indicating this added number of balls exceeds 10 (in other words, if the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10), a main prize ball number information output command is created to notify this fact and stored in the output information storage area as transmission information. The value indicating the exceeded number of balls is then stored and updated as the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM.

Following step S108, the main control MPU 1310a performs a slot command reception process (step S110). The dispensing control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands classified as status indications (e.g., slot status 1 command, error clearance navigation command, and slot status 2 command). During the slot command reception process, when various commands are successfully received as payer serial data, information informing the payer control board 633 of this fact is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. The main control MPU 1310a also formats the commands successfully received as payer serial data into 2-byte (16-bit) commands (various commands classified as status indications (slot status 1 command, error clearance navigation command, and slot status 2 command)) and stores them as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S110, the main control MPU 1310a performs a fraud detection process (step S112). During this fraud detection process, it checks for any abnormalities related to the winning balls. If it determines that fraud involving radio wave irradiation (hereinafter referred to as "radio wave irradiation cheating") is occurring, it increments the value of the radio wave irradiation cheating counter by one. The value of this radio wave cheating counter is incremented each time the fraud detection process determines that a radio wave irradiation cheating has occurred. When the RAM is cleared, the initial value is set to 0 (zero). When the value of the radio wave irradiation cheating counter reaches its upper limit (in this embodiment, the upper limit is set to 250 based on the 4 ms interrupt period during which the fraud detection process performs the main control timer interrupt process), it creates a radio wave irradiation cheating notification command classified as a notification display indicating that a radio wave irradiation cheating has occurred, and stores this command as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

In addition, in the fraud detection process of step S112, input information is read from the input information storage area described above. When a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, it is determined that fraud using a magnet (hereinafter referred to as "magnet goto") is occurring, and the value of the magnet goto counter is incremented by one. This magnet goto counter value is incremented each time a radio wave irradiation goto is determined to have occurred in the fraud detection process. It is included in the game backup information, and when the RAM is cleared, it is set to a value of 0 (zero) as its initial value. When the magnet goto counter value reaches its upper limit (in this embodiment, the upper limit is set to 250 based on the 4 ms interrupt period during which the fraud detection process performs the main control timer interrupt process), a magnet goto notification command is created that is classified as a notification display indicating that a radio wave irradiation goto is occurring, and this command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. In this embodiment, this mechanism reliably detects and notifies the user of magnet gouges, helping game parlor staff and other attendants to discover magnet gouges at an early stage.

In addition, in the fraud detection process of step S112, for example, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and when an abnormal entry into the large prize entry port occurs, such as when a detection signal is input from the large prize entry port sensor 2402 when the game is not in a jackpot game state (when a game ball enters the large prize entry port 2005), an abnormal entry display command is created that is classified as an alert display as an abnormal condition, and stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information, or the value of the safe ball counter stored in the safe ball counting dedicated area is counted as a general entry. If the total number of game balls detected by the opening sensor 3001, first start opening sensor 3002, second start opening sensor 2401, large prize opening sensor 2402, and special prize opening sensor 2601 differs from the total number of game balls actually received in the winning openings such as the general prize opening 2001, first start opening 2002, second start opening 2004, large prize opening 2005, and special prize opening 2006, an abnormal winning display command classified as an alarm display is created as an abnormal condition, and is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

In the fraud detection process of step S112, if radio wave irradiation and/or magnet strikes are detected, the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is set to a value of 1 to indicate that fraud has been detected. However, if radio wave irradiation and magnet strikes are not detected, the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is set to a value of 0 to indicate that no fraud has been detected. This fraud detection flag FD-FLG is included in the game backup information, and when RAM is cleared, the initial value is set to 0 (zero). Furthermore, if an abnormal win at the large prize slot is detected, the fraud detection flag FD-FLG may also be set to a value of 1 to indicate that fraud has been detected.

Following step S112, the main control MPU 1310a performs a launch permission signal setting process (step S113). In this launch permission signal setting process, the logic of the launch permission signal is set to inform the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that the launch of game ball B is permitted. Specifically, based on the value of the aforementioned fraudulent activity detection flag FD-FLG, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the fraudulent activity detection flag FD-FLG is set to a value of 0, i.e., that no fraudulent activity has been detected, the main control MPU 1310a sets the logic of the launch permission signal to a launch permission logic and stores this as output information in the aforementioned output information storage area. On the other hand, when the fraudulent activity detection flag FD-FLG is not set to a value of 0 (i.e., a value of 1), i.e., that fraudulent activity has been detected, the main control MPU 1310a sets the logic of the launch permission signal to a launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) that is the inverse of the launch permission logic, and stores this as output information in the aforementioned output information storage area. The main control MPU 1310a reads input information from the input information storage area and, based on this input information, if a detection signal is input from the door frame opening switch and the door frame opening switch detects that the door frame 3 is open relative to the main frame 4, or if a detection signal is input from the main frame opening switch 4b and the main frame opening switch 4b detects that the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, sets the logic of the fire permission signal to a fire stop logic (fire non-permission logic) that is the inverse of the fire permission logic, and stores this as output information in the output information storage area. The logic of the fire permission signal is configured by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that it is set to the fire stop logic (fire non-permission logic) that is the inverse of the fire permission logic as the initial value (default) from the time the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (or restored) until the fire permission signal setting process of step S113 in the main control timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is started.

Following step S113, the main control MPU 1310a performs special symbol and special electric feature control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric feature control processing, a latch signal is output to the main control's built-in hardware random number circuit, and the random number (random number value) extracted by the main control's built-in hardware random number circuit when the latch signal is input is obtained from the built-in hardware random number latch register in the main control MPU 1310a, and this obtained random number value is set as the special random number. It then determines whether the special random number (i.e., the random number value obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control MPU 1310a) matches the jackpot determination value pre-stored in the main control's built-in ROM (determines whether a jackpot gaming state will occur (called a "special lottery")), or it retrieves the value of the counter that updates the pattern random number and determines whether it matches one of the win type determination values pre-stored in the main control's built-in ROM according to the jackpot type or small win type (determines the win type).

If these judgment results (lottery results) are determined by the first start opening sensor 3002, various commands related to the special symbol 1 synchronization effect are created, while if the judgment result (lottery results) are determined by the second start opening sensor 2401, various commands related to the special symbol 2 synchronization effect are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information memory area. In addition, the special symbol variable display pattern is determined based on the random number for the variable display pattern described above, and the output of a lighting signal to the first special symbol display device or the second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is set to light up the first special symbol display device or the second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 in accordance with the determined special symbol variable display pattern, and this is stored as output information in the output information memory area described above. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when a jackpot game state is reached, various commands classified as jackpot-related (jackpot opening command, command to display Nth time that large prize entrance 1 is opened, command to display closure of large prize entrance 1, command to display count of large prize entrance 1, jackpot ending command, and jackpot pattern display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or, for example, the output of a drive signal to the attacca solenoid 2414 to open and close the opening and closing member is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information, or, when the number of times (rounds) that the large prize entrance 2005 changes from a closed state to an open state is two, At one time, the function display unit 1400 sets the output of a lighting signal to the 2-round indicator lamp to light up the 2-round indicator lamp, and stores this as output information in the output information storage area; when there are 15 rounds, the function display unit 1400 sets the output of a lighting signal to the 15-round indicator lamp to light up the 15-round indicator lamp, and stores this as output information in the output information storage area; or the function display unit 1400 sets the output of a lighting signal to the status indicator to light up a specified color to indicate whether or not a time reduction has occurred, and stores this as output information in the output information storage area.

Following step S114, the main control MPU 1310a performs normal symbol and normal electric device control processing (step S116). In this normal symbol and normal electric device control processing, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and normal prize slot winning processing is performed based on this input information. In this normal prize slot winning processing, it is determined from the input information whether a detection signal from the gate sensor 2801 has been input to the input terminal of the input port. Based on the result of this determination, if a detection signal has been input to the input terminal of the input port, the value of the counter that updates the random number used to determine whether the normal symbol has been won described above is extracted and stored as normal prize slot winning information in the normal prize slot winning information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM.

This regular prize slot winning information storage area has four sections, Sections 0 through 3, with regular prize slot winning information stored in Section 0, Section 1, Section 2, and Section 3 in that order. For example, if regular prize slot winning information is stored in Sections 0 through 2 of the regular prize slot winning information storage area, when a detection signal from gate sensor 2801 is input to the input terminal of the input port, the regular prize slot winning information is stored in Section 3 of the regular prize slot winning information storage area.

Regular prize slot winning information stored in Section 0 of the regular prize slot winning information memory is set in the working area of the main control's built-in RAM. When this regular prize slot winning information is set, the regular prize slot winning information in Section 1 of the regular prize slot winning information memory is shifted to Section 0 of the regular prize slot winning information memory, the regular prize slot winning information in Section 2 of the regular prize slot winning information memory is shifted to Section 1 of the regular prize slot winning information memory, and the regular prize slot winning information in Section 3 of the regular prize slot winning information memory is shifted to Section 2 of the regular prize slot winning information memory, and Section 3 of the regular prize slot winning information memory becomes empty. For example, if regular prize winning information is stored in the first and second sections of the regular prize winning information storage, the regular prize winning information in the first section of the regular prize winning information storage is shifted to the zeroth section of the regular prize winning information storage, and the regular prize winning information in the second section of the regular prize winning information storage is shifted to the first section of the regular prize winning information storage, leaving the second section of the regular prize winning information storage and the third section of the regular prize winning information storage empty. If regular prize winning information is stored in the first, second, and third sections of the regular prize winning information storage, the output of the lighting signal for the regular reserve indicator of the functional display unit 1400 is set based on the regular prize winning information described above, so that the total number of stored regular prize winning information is treated as reserved balls and the regular reserve indicator of the functional display unit 1400 is illuminated, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above.

Following the normal prize slot winning process, the normal prize slot winning information set in the working area of the main control's built-in RAM is read, and the value of the random number for determining whether a normal symbol has been won is extracted from this read normal prize slot winning information and a determination is made as to whether it matches the normal symbol winning determination value pre-stored in the main control's built-in ROM (referred to as the "normal lottery"). The result of this determination (the result of the normal lottery) determines whether or not to open or close the second starting gate door 2411. If this decision is made to open or close the second starting gate door 2411, the second starting gate door 2411 will be opened, creating a game state in which game balls can be received into the second starting gate 2004, providing an advantageous game state for the player. The normal symbol variable display pattern corresponding to this determination is determined based on the normal symbol variable display pattern random number described above, and various commands related to normal symbol synchronization performance are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. In addition, a lighting signal is output to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 so that the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 lights up according to the determined normal symbol variable display pattern, and this is stored as output information in the output information storage area described above.

Furthermore, for example, when the value of the extracted random number for determining whether a normal symbol has been hit matches the normal symbol hit determination value pre-stored in the ROM built into the main control, various commands related to the normal electric role presentation are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information memory area, and a drive signal is set to be output to the start port solenoid 2412 to open and close the second start port door 2411, and this is stored as output information in the output information memory area mentioned above. On the other hand, when the value of the extracted random number for determining whether a normal symbol has been hit does not match the normal symbol hit determination value pre-stored in the ROM built into the main control, a normal symbol change display pattern is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol change display pattern mentioned above, and various commands classified as related to the normal symbol synchronization presentation are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information memory area mentioned above. In addition, a lighting signal is set to be output to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 so as to light up the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 in accordance with the determined normal symbol change display pattern, and this is stored as output information in the output information memory area mentioned above. In this example, the probability of winning the regular lottery (the probability of winning normally) is 1 in 50.

Following step S116, the main control MPU 1310a performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output processing, output information is read from the output information storage area described above and output various signals based on this output information from the output terminals of the various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a. For example, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a main payout ACK signal to the payout control board 633 from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information when various commands from the payout control board 633 have been successfully received; when a jackpot game is in progress, it outputs a drive signal to the attacca solenoid 2414 which opens and closes the opening and closing member of the large prize opening 2005; and when a jackpot game is in progress, it outputs a drive signal to the start opening solenoid 2412 which opens and closes the second start opening door 2411 to open and close the second start opening 2004. In addition, it also outputs a 15-round jackpot information output signal, a 2-round jackpot information output signal, a small jackpot information output signal, ...2-round jackpot information output signal, a 15-round jack It outputs various game-related information (game information) signals to the payout control board 633, such as a winning information output signal, a special symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a time-saving information output signal, and a starting hole winning information output signal, and outputs a launch permission signal set to launch permission logic or launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) to the payout control board 633, outputs a display signal to a special monitor that displays the ratio of the number of payouts (total number of prize balls paid out) to the total number of game balls inserted, and outputs a lighting signal to display the setting value stored in a dedicated setting value area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM on the setting display 1310g.

Following step S118, the main control MPU 1310a performs a peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. This transmission information includes various commands classified as related to special prize 1 synchronization effects, various commands classified as related to special prize 2 synchronization effects, various commands classified as related to big wins (for example, a large prize entrance 1 count display command equivalent to a large prize entrance count command based on a detection signal from the large prize entrance sensor 2402 when a game ball entering the large prize entrance 2005 is detected), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to normal prize synchronization effects, various commands classified as related to normal electric role effects, various commands classified as notification displays, various commands classified as status displays, various commands classified as test-related, and various other commands (for example, a message indicating that the main control board 1310 will pay out as prize balls based on the game balls that have entered the various prize entrances provided on the game board 5 every time the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10, The main control serial data includes a main prize ball number output command that instructs the hall computer to transmit a main prize ball number information output signal to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558 as main prize ball number information, and various commands classified as specific histories (for example, a ball collection command that notifies the user whenever the number of game balls collected at the winning ports such as the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the large winning port 2005, and the special winning port 2006, the outlet port 1008, the first sub-outlet 2021, and the second sub-outlet 2022 reaches 10 balls, a setting change command that notifies the user that a setting value has been changed, an error display command that notifies the user that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or unreliable), and a setting key ON operation command that notifies the user to check the setting value stored in a setting value-dedicated area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM, which will be described later). Each packet of main serial data consists of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main serial data consists of a status indicating the type of command with a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating the variation of the effect with a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a sum value calculated by treating the status and mode as numerical values; this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission process, various commands are transmitted as main serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 in the following order: status, mode, and sum value. As mentioned above, in the event of a power outage or momentary power outage, the charge stored in electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as +5V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main serial transmission port built into the main control MPU 1310a is capable of at least transferring the command set in its transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register via the serial management unit and completing transmission from the transmission shift register as main serial data. When power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, or when power is restored after a power outage or momentary interruption occurs after power is turned on, in the reservation setting of the command to be sent when power is turned on in step S50 of the main control side power-on processing shown in Figure 256, in order to inform that power has been restored, a power-on status command classified as power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information memory area of the main control built-in RAM, and as main serial data, the power-on status command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which then constitute the power-on main control return destination command, which then constitute the power-on main prize ball number information output determination command, which then constitute the status, mode, and sum value, which then constitute the power-on counter notification command, which then constitute the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command, which then constitute the power-on main control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. In addition, when setting the working area of the main control's built-in RAM in step S34 of the main control's power-on processing, various information may be read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to this information may be stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. In such cases, after various commands corresponding to the game information among the various information have been sent, a power-on status command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball count information output determination counter notification command are sent.

When the number of game balls collected at the general winning opening 2001, first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004, large winning opening 2005, special winning opening 2006, etc., or at the out opening 1008, first sub-out opening 2021, and second sub-out opening 2022 reaches 10 balls, a ball collection command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 to notify the fact. The CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 then sends a ball collection command to the general winning opening 2001, first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004, large winning opening 2005, special winning opening 2006, etc., for each ball collection command received. The number of game balls collected at the winning openings such as general winning opening 2001, first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004, large winning opening 2005, special winning opening 2006, etc., and at the outlet 1008, first sub-outlet 2021 and second sub-outlet 2022 is counted, and the ball collection information (information correlating the counted value (i.e., the total number of game balls collected at the winning openings such as general winning opening 2001, first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004, large winning opening 2005, special winning opening 2006, etc., and at the outlet 1008, first sub-outlet 2021 and second sub-outlet 2022) with the date and time of the update) stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) is updated. If the pachinko machine 1 is powered off when the business hours of the game hall are closed without receiving the ball collection command, the ball collection information, which associates the last counted value (i.e., the total number of game balls collected at the winning ports such as the general winning port 2001, the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the large winning port 2005, the special winning port 2006, the outlet port 1008, the first sub-outlet port 2021, and the second sub-outlet port 2022) with the updated date and time, is stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on when the game hall opens for business, the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 creates ball collection information again from the day the business started, using the ball collection information stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the ball collection information is stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) as ball collection history information. The counted value stored and held as ball recovery information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) may be the value counted from 0 (zero) on that day, or it may be both the value counted from 0 (zero) on that day and the sum of the values counted up to that point.

Following step S120, the main control MPU 1310a clears the main control's built-in WDT (step S122) and ends this routine. The main control's built-in WDT in step S122 is cleared by setting a timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a. This clears the timekeeping by the main control's built-in WDT. Then, by restarting the timekeeping by the main control's built-in WDT, the main control MPU 1310a is not forcibly reset by the main control's built-in WDT.

As described above, the main control board 1310 can execute and complete the above-mentioned backup process for storing game information as the game progresses while the game is in progress, before power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and when power is restored, based on the game information for which the backup process was executed, the main control board 1310 can output a power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, which instructs the drive state of the starting port solenoid 2412 and the attacca solenoid 2414, which are the electrical drive sources, via the port output process of step S118 in this routine when power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, as the destination to which the game progress will be returned by the main control board 1310. In other words, in the reservation setting of the command to be sent when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 256, the main control board 1310 creates a power-on status command classified as power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command based on the power-on information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the same processing shown in FIG. 255, and stores these as transmission information in the main control built-in RAM. This is stored in the transmission information storage area, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, the main serial data is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on status command, followed by the status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on main control return destination command, which are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in that order, and then the status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command, are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in that order.

For this reason, based on the main control return destination command from the main control board 1310 at power-on, the peripheral control board 1510 can display in the display area of the effect display device 1600 the destination to which the main control board 1310 will return game progress when power is restored. As a result, when a momentary or power outage occurs while a player is playing and power is subsequently restored, the game can be quickly restored to the game state immediately before the momentary or power outage, and the destination to which the main control board 1310 will return game progress can be notified by displaying in the display area of the effect display device 1600, thereby preventing the pachinko machine 1 system from appearing frozen to the player and being mistaken for a malfunction. Therefore, by quickly restoring the game to the game state immediately before the momentary or power outage after power is restored, it is possible to prevent the player from being mistaken for a malfunction.

Furthermore, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process on the manufacturing line for the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after production for inspection, as described above, step S38 in the main control side power-on processing shown in Fig. 255 always clears all areas of the main control's built-in RAM except for specific areas. As a result, when the reservation setting for commands to be sent at power-on is made in step S50 of the same processing shown in Fig. 256, a power-on status command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command, which are classified as power-on, are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. By doing so, only the power-on status command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are cleared as transmission information in the main control's built-in RAM. The data is stored in the transmission information memory area of M, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, the main serial data is transmitted to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on status command, followed by the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on main control return destination command, followed by the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command. The inspection device in the main control board inspection process is configured to display detailed model information on the inspection monitor in the main control board inspection process based on the information indicating the pachinko machine's model code contained in the power-on status command received from the main control board 1310. This information includes the series code that identifies the model type (max type, mid type, or sweet type) described above, the copyright code that identifies the copyright of the work, and the game specification code that identifies the game specifications (for example, a game specification in which, when a probability fluctuation occurs, the state continues until the next jackpot game state occurs, and in which the probability fluctuation occurs with a limited number of times for special symbols to fluctuate (ST machine)).

[22-5. Setting change processing]
Next, the setting change process will be described. This setting change process is performed in step S37 of the main control side power-on process shown in FIG.

When the setting change process begins, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the current setting values, as shown in FIG. 258 (step S200). Here, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the setting values stored in a dedicated area for setting values in a specific area of the main control internal RAM. When acquiring these setting values, they may be read or extracted; however, when extracting the setting values, the extracted setting values are set in a specified area.

Following step S200, the main control MPU 1310a calculates a checksum (step S202). This checksum is calculated by treating the various information stored in the main control's built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating their sum. This is the same process as the checksum calculation performed in step S29 of the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 255.

Following step S202, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the calculated checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (sum value) stored during the main control side power-off processing (when power is off) in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 256 (step S204). If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S204 that they match, it determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S206). The determinations in steps S204 and S206 are the same as the determinations in steps S30 and S32, respectively, in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 255. As mentioned above, the backup flag BK-FLG is a flag that indicates whether game backup information such as various information, checksum values (sum values), and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG has been stored in the main control's built-in RAM during the main control's power-off processing described below. It is set to a value of 1 when the main control's power-off processing has been completed successfully, and to a value of 0 when the main control's power-off processing has not been completed successfully.

If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S204 that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or if the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S206 that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0), i.e., that the main control side power-off processing has not completed normally, it determines whether the setting value acquired in step S200 is within the normal range (step S208). Here, the "normal range" refers to the value to which the setting value can be changed, and in this embodiment, it is preset to values 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6. If the flowchart proceeds to the determination in step S208, it means that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control's internal RAM, or that the main control side power-off processing has not completed normally at the time of power interruption. Therefore, the contents stored in the main control's internal RAM are abnormal (or unreliable). Therefore, in the determination of step S208, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM acquired in step S200 is within the normal range of setting values 1 to 6, and if it determines that it is within the normal range, it uses that setting value as is.

On the other hand, if the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S208 that the set value is not within the normal range, it sets the set value acquired in step S200 to the default set value of 1 (step S210). Note that in step S208, it determines whether the set value acquired in step S200 and stored in the set value-dedicated area in a specific area of the main control internal RAM is within the normal range of set values 1 to 6. However, if the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S204 that the checksum values do not match, or if the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S206 that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0), i.e., that the main control side power-off processing has not ended normally, it may proceed to step S210 and set the set value acquired in step S200 to the default set value of 1.

In step S206, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is equal to 1, i.e., that the main control side power-off processing has been completed normally, or in step S208, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the value is within the normal range, or following step S210, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z to light up the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S212).

Following step S212, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the setting value on the setting display 1310g, thereby displaying the setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S214).

Following step S214, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the setting switching button has been operated (step S216). This determination is made by reading the detection signal from the setting switching button and determining whether a detection signal has been input from the setting switching button. The main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switching button has been operated when a detection signal has been input from the setting switching button, and determines that the setting switching button has not been operated when a detection signal has not been input from the setting switching button.

If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S216 that the setting switch button has been operated, it performs a calculation to add (increment) the setting value by 1, updating it (step S218). At this time, if the setting value stored in a dedicated area for setting values in a specific area of the main control internal RAM was retrieved and set in a predetermined area when the setting value was obtained in step S200, the setting value set in this predetermined area will be added (incremented) by 1.

Following step S218, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the setting value updated in step S216 on the setting display 1310g, thereby displaying the updated setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S220).

Following step S220, or in the determination of step S216, if the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting switch button has not been operated, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the enter key has been operated (step S222). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the setting key has been inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder has been rotated 120 degrees counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key switch 1311a ON (i.e., the setting key switch 1311a has been rotated counterclockwise from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turned the setting key ON to its original initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF)). By rotating the key 60 degrees clockwise to turn it off, and then rotating it another 60 degrees counterclockwise to turn it on a second time, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on as the enter key, and this is done based on the enter key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a; when the enter key ON signal is input from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the enter key has been operated, but when the enter key ON signal is not input from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the enter key has not been operated.

If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S222 that the Enter key has not been operated, it returns to the determination in step S216 and determines whether the setting switch button has been operated. If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S216 that the setting switch button has been operated, it performs the processing of steps S218 and S220 again and makes the determination in step S222. If it determines that the Enter key has not been operated, it returns to the determination in step S216. Each time the setting switch button is operated until the Enter key is operated, the setting value is incremented by one and updated, and displayed on the setting display 1310g. If the setting switch button is not operated, the setting value updated when the setting switch button was operated immediately before is displayed on the setting display 1310g. Furthermore, even if a power outage or momentary power outage occurs and is then restored before step S222 determines that the Enter key has been operated, the setting value updated immediately before the power outage or momentary power outage is not stored in the dedicated setting value area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM, and is therefore discarded, and the setting value stored in the dedicated setting value area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM remains unchanged.

On the other hand, if the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S222 that the Enter key has been operated, it stores the updated setting value in a dedicated setting value area in a specific area of the main control internal RAM (step S224). At this time, if the setting value stored in the dedicated setting value area in a specific area of the main control internal RAM was retrieved and set in a specified area when the setting value was acquired in step S200, the setting value set in this specified area will be updated, and this updated setting value will be returned to the dedicated setting value area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM. Even if a power outage or momentary interruption occurs and power is restored after the processing of step S224 is completed, the updated setting value when the Enter key was operated before the power outage or momentary interruption occurred will be stored in the dedicated setting value area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM.

Following step S224, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the setting key has been turned OFF (step S226). In this determination, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting key has been turned OFF when the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the enter key ON to its initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF). This OFF operation turns OFF the setting key switch 1311a. The main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting key has been turned OFF when an OFF signal is received from the setting key switch 1311a, but determines that the setting key has not been turned OFF when an OFF signal is not received from the setting key switch 1311a.

If, in the judgment of step S226, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the setting key has not been turned OFF, it returns to the judgment of step S226 and repeats the judgment of step S226 until the setting key is turned OFF.

On the other hand, if the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S226 that the setting key has been turned OFF, it stops outputting the lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the updated setting value on the setting display 1310g, thereby preventing the updated setting value from being displayed on the setting display 1310g (step S228).

Following step S228, the main control MPU 1310a stops the lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z and turns off the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S230).

Following step S230, the main control MPU 1310a sets the setting change permission flag CS-FLG to 0 (step S232). As described above, this setting change permission flag CS-FLG is a flag that indicates whether or not to permit changes to the current setting value (the value among setting values 1 to 6 set at the time the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is first turned ON) stored in the setting value dedicated area in a specific area of the main control internal RAM. It is set to 1 when permitting changes to the setting value, and to 0 when not permitting changes to the setting value. In step S232, setting the setting change permission flag CS-FLG to 0 prohibits future changes to the setting value.

Following step S232, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the setting value stored in step S224 is within the normal range (step S233). The "normal range" is the same as that determined in step S208, and as described above, in this embodiment, it is pre-set to values 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6. In the determination of step S233, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the setting value stored in the setting value-dedicated area in a specific area of the main control internal RAM in step S224 is within the normal range of setting values 1 to 6, in order to reconfirm whether the setting value is an abnormal value. If it is determined to be within the normal range, the setting value is used as is.

If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S233 that the value is within the normal range, it performs serial communication initialization (step S234), then creates a setting change command and sets the transmission information (step S236), and then performs peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in which the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data (step S238), thereby terminating this routine. The serial communication initialization in step S234 is the same processing as the serial communication initialization in step S44 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 256, and the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S238 is the same processing as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 257. Here, the serial communication initialization in step S234 precedes the serial communication initialization in step S44. In the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S238, the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 is transmitted as main serial data to the peripheral control board 1510. This is because the setting change command notifies the peripheral control board 1510 that the setting value has been changed, taking priority over the reservation of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 of the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 256. The setting change command is a command that notifies the peripheral control board 1510 of the changed setting value and completion of setting value storage. When the setting change command is received, the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 updates the setting value history information (information associating setting values with date and time) stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown).

On the other hand, if the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S233 that the value is outside the normal range, it performs error display processing (step S240) and enters an infinite loop. This infinite loop causes the state after the error display processing has ended to be maintained, making it impossible to continue playing the game, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 must be turned off and then on again. This error display processing, which will be explained in detail later, determines that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control's internal RAM, or that the main control's power-off processing did not end normally when the power was turned off, and displays an error message to that effect, stating that there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the main control's internal RAM (or that the contents are unreliable). In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error message.

In the example above, the setting change process was shown to set one of multiple setting values, setting value 1 to setting value 6, but it is not limited to setting one of multiple setting values. It is also possible to have only one setting value and execute the process to set this one setting value during the setting change process, or to have multiple setting values but execute the process to set only one predetermined setting value during the setting change process (it is possible to set only to one predetermined setting value and not to set to any other setting value). In this case, the setting value is not changed during the setting change process, and is set to the same setting value before and after the setting change process.

[22-6. Setting value confirmation display process]
Next, the setting value confirmation display process will be described. This setting value confirmation display process is performed in step S28 of the main control side power-on process shown in Figs. 255 and 256.

When the setting value confirmation display process is initiated, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is set to a value of 0, as shown in FIG. 259 (step S350). This confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is a flag for confirming the setting value stored in a dedicated setting value area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM, and is set to a value of 1 when the setting value is being displayed for confirmation, and to a value of 0 when the setting value is not being displayed for confirmation. Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 displays, for example, "Power being restored" on a black background on the performance display device 1600 as the startup mode. When the setting value confirmation display process of step S37 in the main control side power-on process is started, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sends a setting value confirmation display start command to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data, informing the peripheral control board 1510 that the setting value confirmation display will begin.When the setting value confirmation display process is ended, a setting value confirmation display end command is sent as main serial data to the peripheral control board 1510.This allows "Power being restored" to be displayed followed by "Checking settings," or "Checking settings" to be displayed instead of "Power being restored."

In the judgment of step S350, when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is set to a value of 0, i.e., when the setting value is not being displayed for confirmation, the main control MPU 1310a judges whether the main frame 4 has been opened and the setting key has been turned ON (step S352). In this judgment, the main control MPU 1310a reads input information from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, it checks whether the main frame 4 has been opened and the setting key has been turned ON by detecting a detection signal from the main frame opening switch 4b for detecting the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, and whether the setting key has been inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder has been rotated 60 degrees clockwise from its initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns OFF the setting key switch 1311a) to perform the first ON operation, turning the setting key switch 1311a ON, and the setting key switch 1311a ON. Based on the setting key ON signal from switch 11a, it is determined that the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, and based on the setting key ON signal, it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a has been turned ON, thereby determining that the predetermined setting value display permission conditions are met. However, based on the detection signal from main frame open switch 4b, it is determined that the main frame 4 is not open relative to the outer frame 2, and/or based on the setting key ON signal, it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a has not been turned ON, thereby determining that the predetermined setting value display permission conditions are not met.

If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S352 that the predetermined conditions for permitting display of setting values are not met, it simply terminates this routine. However, if it determines that the predetermined conditions for permitting display of setting values are met, it sets the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG to a value of 1 to display the setting values for confirmation (step S354), and then acquires the current setting values (step S356). Here, the main control MPU 1310a acquires the setting values stored in a dedicated area for setting values in a specific area of the main control internal RAM.

Following step S356, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the setting value acquired in step S356 is within the normal range (step S357). The "normal range" is the same as the determination in step S208 and step S233 in the setting change processing of FIG. 258, and as described above, in this embodiment, it is pre-set to values 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6. In the determination in step S357, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the setting value acquired in step S356 (i.e., the setting value stored in the setting value-dedicated area in a specific area of the main control internal RAM) is within the normal range of values 1 to 6, in order to reconfirm whether the setting value is an abnormal value. If it is determined to be within the normal range, that setting value is used as is.

If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S357 that the setting value acquired in step S356 is within the normal range, it outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S358).

Following step S360, the main control MPU 1310a creates a setting key ON operation command and stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM, sets the setting key ON operation command (step S360), and terminates this routine. This setting key ON operation command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 257. The setting key ON operation command is a command that indicates that this routine, the setting value confirmation display process, has begun (i.e., that the setting values stored in the setting value-dedicated area in a specific area of the main control's built-in RAM should be confirmed).

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 receives a setting key ON operation command, it updates the setting key ON operation history information (information associating the fact that the setting value was confirmed with the date and time) stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown).

Furthermore, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 receives a setting key ON operation command, a predetermined specific history information display permission condition is met, which allows the display of specific history information such as the ball collection history information, setting value history information, error display history information, and setting key ON operation history information, as described above. When this predetermined specific history information display permission condition is met, the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display area of the performance display device 1600 to switch from the image that was previously displayed to a specific history information display image that selectively displays the specific history information, by rotating the touch operation unit 302 and pressing the pressing operation unit 303 by the person checking the specific history information.

On the other hand, in the judgment of step S350, when the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG is not set to value 0 (is set to value 1), that is, when the setting value is being displayed for confirmation, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the setting key has been turned OFF (step S362). To make this determination, the main control MPU 1310a reads input information from the input information storage area described above and, based on this input information, determines whether the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the enter key ON to its initial position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF), thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a OFF. This is done based on an OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and if an OFF signal is input from the setting key switch 1311a, it determines that the setting key has been turned OFF, but if an OFF signal is not input from the setting key switch 1311a, it determines that the setting key has not been turned OFF.

If the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S362 that the setting key has not been pressed OFF, it terminates the routine. However, if it determines that the setting key has been pressed OFF, it sets the confirmation display flag DCS-FLG to 0 (step S364), indicating that the setting value will not be displayed for confirmation (step S366). It then stops outputting the illumination signal to the setting display 1310g to display the setting value acquired in step S356 on the setting display 1310g, thereby hiding the acquired setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S366). It then creates a setting key OFF command, stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control's internal RAM, sets the setting key OFF command (step S368), and terminates the routine. This setting key OFF command is transmitted during the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 of the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 257. The setting key OFF command is a command that indicates that this routine, the setting value confirmation and display process, has ended (i.e., that the setting values stored in the dedicated setting value area in a specific area of the main control internal RAM have been confirmed).

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting key OFF operation command, the aforementioned predetermined specific history information display permission condition is no longer met. At this time, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 was controlling the display of the aforementioned specific history information display image in the display area of the performance display device 1600, it will control the display to switch back to the image that was displayed in the display area of the performance display device 1600 immediately before switching to the specific history information display image, thereby returning to the original image.

On the other hand, if the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S357 that the value is not within the normal range, it disables the interrupt (step S370). This setting stops the main control timer interrupt process shown in Figure 257, which is repeated every 4 ms.

Following step S370, the main control MPU 1310a performs error display processing (step S372) and then enters an infinite loop in which it continues clearing the main control's built-in WDT (step S374). This infinite loop causes the main control's built-in WDT to be continuously cleared. Because the main control's built-in WDT cannot be stopped once activated, continuing to clear the main control's built-in WDT clears the timer count by setting a timer clear setting value in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU 1310a, and restarts the timer count by the main control's built-in WDT. This prevents the main control MPU 1310a from being forcibly reset by the main control's built-in WDT. Furthermore, this infinite loop maintains the state in which the error display processing has ended, making it impossible to play the game. Consequently, the power to the pachinko machine 1 must be shut off and then turned back on. This error display process, which will be explained in detail later, determines that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or that the main control power-off processing did not end normally when the power was shut off, and displays an error message indicating that there is an abnormality (or that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are unreliable). In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error message.

In addition, as described above, if the device is configured to have only one setting value and to execute the setting change process to set this one setting value, or if the device has multiple setting values but executes the setting change process to set only one predetermined setting value (it is possible to set only to one predetermined setting value and not to set to other setting values), then only the one setting value that has been set may be displayed when the setting value confirmation display process is executed.

[22-7. Error display processing]
Next, the error display process will be described. This error display process is performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on process shown in Fig. 255, in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in Fig. 255 (in step S240 in the setting change process shown in Fig. 258), and in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in Fig. 259.

When the error display process is initiated, the main control MPU 1310a stops the launch permission signal (step S400), as shown in FIG. 260. As described above, the launch permission signal conveys permission to launch game ball B to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633. When this logic is set to launch permission logic, it can convey that launch is permitted, while when this logic is set to launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic), which is the inverse of the launch permission logic, it can convey that launch is stopped (not permitted).

When this error display processing routine is initiated as one of the processes performed in step S33 of the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 255 or step S37 of the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 255 (specifically, step S240 of the setting change processing shown in FIG. 258), the main control MPU 1310a is unable to perform the interrupt permission setting in step S52 of the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 256, and therefore is unable to perform the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 257, and is unable to perform the launch permission signal setting processing in step S113 of the same processing. The launch permission signal is output from the output terminal of a specified output port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control output circuit with reset function to the launch control unit 633b of the dispensing control board 633. Therefore, when power is restored, the main control output circuit with reset function is reset, and its logic becomes launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic), which is the inverse of the launch permission logic.

Therefore, when this routine, the error display processing, is started as one of the processes performed in step S33 of the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 255 or as one of the processes performed in step S37 of the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 255 (specifically, the process performed in step S240 of the setting change processing shown in FIG. 258), the main control MPU 1310a sets the logic of the launch permission signal to launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) in step S400 to reliably prevent game ball B from being launched even after power is restored and this routine, the error display processing, is started, and outputs it from the output terminal of its specified output port to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with reset function.

When this error display processing routine is started as the processing performed in step S372 of the setting value confirmation display processing shown in FIG. 259, the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S357 of the setting value confirmation display processing shown in FIG. 259 that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control internal RAM. Although the main control MPU 1310a has already performed the interrupt permission setting in step S52 of the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 256, the interrupt non-permission setting was already performed in step S370 of the setting value confirmation display processing shown in FIG. 259 before this error display processing routine was started. Therefore, when this error display processing routine is terminated, as described above, an infinite loop occurs, and the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 257 cannot be performed, and the launch permission signal setting processing in step S113 of the same processing cannot be performed.

Therefore, when this routine, the error display processing, is started as processing performed in step S372 of the setting value confirmation display processing shown in FIG. 259, the main control MPU 1310a, in step S400, sets the logic of the launch permission signal to launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic) to reliably prevent game ball B from being launched when there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, and outputs it from the output terminal of its specified output port to the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with reset function.

Following step S400, a lighting signal is output to the setting display 1310g to display the letter E as an error message on the setting display 1310g, thereby displaying an error message on the setting display 1310g (step S402).

Following step S402, the main control MPU 1310a displays an error on the function display unit 1400 (step S404). In step S404, a lighting signal is output to the function display unit 1400 to light up all of the various indicators on the function display unit 1400, and an error is displayed on the function display unit 1400.

Following step S404, the main control MPU 1310a performs serial communication initial settings (step S406), then creates an error display command and sets the transmission information (step S408), and then performs peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing to transmit the transmission information (error display command) set in step S406 to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data (step S410), and then ends this routine.

The serial communication initial setting in step S406 is the same process as the serial communication initial setting in step S234 in the setting change processing shown in Figure 258 and the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on processing shown in Figure 256, and the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S410 is the same process as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S238 in the setting change processing shown in Figure 258 and the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 257. This routine, the error display processing, starts and ends as the processing performed in step S33 in the main control power-on processing shown in FIG. 255, the processing performed in step S37 in the main control power-on processing shown in FIG. 255 (the processing performed in step S240 in the setting change processing shown in FIG. 258), and the processing performed in step S372 in the setting value confirmation display processing shown in FIG. 259, and as described above, it enters an infinite loop, and this infinite loop causes the state after the error display processing has ended to be maintained, making it impossible to progress in the game.

Therefore, in this embodiment, serial communication initialization is performed in step S406, and the transmission information (error display command) set in step S408 is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S410.

The error display command is a command that notifies the user that there is an abnormality (or that the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are unreliable). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, it updates the error display history information (information that associates the error display command with the date and time it was received) stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown).

Furthermore, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 receives an error display command, it controls the display of a message image in white text on a blue background in the display area of the performance display device 1600, reading "A RAM error has occurred. Please call an attendant.", and controls the announcement "A RAM error has occurred. Please call an attendant" to be forcibly set to maximum volume and played from various speakers (top center speaker, top side speakers, main frame speaker of main frame 4, etc.) regardless of the volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch on the peripheral control board 1510. The process of issuing a RAM error notification via an error display command has the highest priority, and if the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510 receives an error display command after receiving a command to notify of another error, it will issue a RAM error notification as the highest priority.

[23. Various control processes of the dispensing control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the dispensing control board 633 will be described with reference to Figs. 261 to 264. Fig. 261 is a flowchart showing an example of the dispensing control unit power-on process, Fig. 262 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the dispensing control unit power-on process in Fig. 261, Fig. 263 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the dispensing control unit power-on process following Fig. 262, and Fig. 264 is a flowchart showing an example of the dispensing control unit timer interrupt process. First, the dispensing control unit power-on process will be described, followed by the dispensing control unit timer interrupt process.

[23-1. Processing when power is turned on for the dispensing control unit]
First, when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the payout control unit power-on processing is performed under the control of the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a on the payout control board 633, as shown in Figures 261 to 263. When this payout control unit power-on processing starts, the payout control MPU sets the interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode sets the priority of the payout control MPU's interrupts. In this embodiment, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is set to the highest priority, and when an interrupt of this payout control unit timer interrupt processing occurs, it is processed with priority.

Following step S500, the dispensing control MPU performs input/output settings (I/O input/output settings) (step S502). This I/O input/output setting involves setting various input ports and output ports of the dispensing control MPU.

Following step S502, the dispensing control MPU performs wait timer process 1 (step S506) and determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately between power-on and reaching the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, during a power outage or momentary power outage (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops. If the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power outage warning. Similarly, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage between power-on and reaching the predetermined voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. Therefore, wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process that waits until the voltage exceeds the power outage warning voltage and stabilizes after power-on. In this embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is set to 200 milliseconds (ms). The determination in step S508 is based on the power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310.

Following step S508, the dispensing control MPU determines whether the RAM clear switch on the dispensing control board 633 has been operated (step S512). This determination is based on the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch. If the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is HI, it is determined that this does not instruct RAM clearing, and the RAM clear switch is not operated. However, if the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch is LOW, it is determined that this instructs RAM clearing, and the RAM clear switch is operated.

If the dispensing control MPU determines in step S512 that the RAM clear switch has been operated, it sets the dispensing RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to a value of 1 (step S514). In other words, the dispensing control MPU is in a state where it can execute the RAM clear process (step S38), which initializes the RAM built into the dispensing control MPU (i.e., the dispensing control built-in RAM), for a predetermined period of time after power is turned on.

On the other hand, if the payout control MPU determines in step S512 that the RAM clear switch has not been operated, it sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to a value of 0 (step S516). This payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is a flag that indicates whether or not to erase payout information related to payouts stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU, such as various flags and various information stored in various information storage areas (for example, the prize ball stock count PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command count DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the PRDY signal output setting information, which sets the logic state of the PRDY signal, stored in the CR communication information storage area). It is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased, and to a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in the payout control MPU's general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register).

Following step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU performs a setting to allow access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). This setting allows access to the payout control built-in RAM, allowing, for example, writing (storing) or reading payout information.

Following step S518, the payout control MPU sets the stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer, for example, indicates the address pushed onto the stack to temporarily store the contents of a memory element (register) currently in use, or the address pushed onto the stack to temporarily store the return address of this routine when terminating a subroutine and returning to this routine. The stack pointer advances each time a stack is pushed onto the stack. In step S520, the stack pointer is set to the initial address, and the register contents, return address, etc. are pushed onto the stack from this initial address. The stack pointer then returns to the initial address by reading the stack items in order from the last to the first pushed.

Following step S520, the payout control MPU determines whether the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value of 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is to be erased, and to a value of 0 when the payout information is not to be erased.

In step S522, if the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to 0, meaning that the payout information is not to be erased, the payout control MPU calculates a checksum (step S524). This checksum calculates the sum of the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, treating it as a numerical value.

Following step S524, the payout control MPU determines whether the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored during the payout control unit power-off processing (when power is turned off), described below (step S526). In step S526, if the payout control MPU determines that the values match, it determines whether the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is set to 1 (step S528). This payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether payout backup information such as payout information and checksum values was stored and retained in the payout control internal RAM during the payout control unit power-off processing, described below, and is set to 1 when the payout control unit power-off processing has been completed successfully, and to 0 when the payout control unit power-off processing has not been completed successfully.

In the judgment of step S528, when the dispensing backup flag HBK-FLG is set to a value of 1, i.e., when the dispensing control unit power outage processing is determined to have been completed normally, the dispensing control MPU sets the working area of the dispensing control built-in RAM as the time of power recovery (step S530). In this setting, in addition to setting the dispensing backup flag HBK-FLG to a value of 0, power recovery information is read from the ROM built into the dispensing control MPU (i.e., the dispensing control built-in ROM), and this power recovery information is set in the working area of the dispensing control built-in RAM. This sets information to be used for various processes based on payout information related to payouts, such as the above-mentioned payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various flags, and various information stored in the various information storage areas (for example, the prize ball stock count PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command count DRV, and mismatch counter INCC stored in the prize ball information storage area, the PRDY signal output setting information that sets the logic state of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area, and the mismatch counter reset determination time stored in the time management information storage area). Note that "power restoration" includes not only the state when power is turned on after being cut off, but also the state when power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage.

On the other hand, if the dispensing control MPU determines in step S522 that the dispensing RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1), i.e., that the dispensing information should be erased, or if the dispensing control MPU determines in step S526 that the checksum values do not match, or if the dispensing control MPU determines in step S528 that the dispensing backup flag HBK-FLG is not 1 (is 0), i.e., that the dispensing control unit power-off processing has not been completed successfully, it clears the entire area of the dispensing control internal RAM (step S532). This clears the dispensing backup information stored in the dispensing control internal RAM.

Following step S532, the payout control MPU sets the working area of the payout control built-in RAM as the initial setting (step S534). This setting is done by reading initial information from the payout control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the working area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S530 or step S534, the dispensing control MPU performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting sets the interrupt period when the dispensing control unit timer interrupt process described below is performed. In this embodiment, this is set to 2 ms.

Following step S536, the dispensing control MPU performs interrupt permission setting (step S538). This setting causes the dispensing control unit timer interrupt process to be repeated at the interrupt period set in step S536, i.e., every 2 ms.

Following step S538, the dispensing control MPU sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is cleared by sequentially setting values A, B, and C in this watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

Following step S539, the payout control MPU determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S540). When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or there is a power outage or momentary power outage, as described above, if the voltage falls below the power outage warning voltage, a power outage warning signal is input from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power outage warning. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power outage warning signal.

In step S540, if the dispensing control MPU determines that no power outage warning signal has been input, it determines whether the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is set to a value of 1 (step S542). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms in the dispensing control unit timer interrupt process, which is processed every 2 ms, as described below, and is set to a value of 1 when 2 ms have elapsed and a value of 0 when 2 ms have not yet elapsed.

In step S542, if the dispensing control MPU determines that the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is equal to 0, i.e., that 2 ms have not elapsed, it returns to step S540, where the dispensing control MPU determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input.

On the other hand, if the dispensing control MPU determines in step S542 that the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is equal to 1, i.e., that 2 ms have elapsed, it sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to 0 (step S544).

Following step S544, the dispensing control MPU sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

Following step S546, the dispensing control MPU performs port output processing (step S548). In this port output processing, various information is read from the output information storage area of the dispensing control built-in RAM, and various signals based on this information are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the dispensing control MPU. The output information storage area stores various information such as payout master ACK information indicating that various payout-related commands (prize ball commands and self-check commands) from the main control board 1310 have been successfully received, drive information for controlling the drive of the payout motor 584, prize ball number information indicating the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, and LED display information to be displayed on the error LED indicator. Based on this output information, when various payout-related commands from the main control board 1310 have been successfully received, the payout control MPU outputs a payout master ACK signal to the main control board 1310 from the output terminal of a specified output port, outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 584, or outputs the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 to the external terminal board 558 as a prize ball number information output signal (in this embodiment, the payout motor 584 outputs a prize ball number information output signal to the external terminal board 558 every time it actually pays out 10 game balls).

Specifically, a prize ball number information output determination counter is provided to determine whether or not to output prize ball number information. This prize ball number information output determination counter counts the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 based on a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input processing of step S550, which will be described later. This number is then stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM by a process (program) not shown in the figures for monitoring the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584.

In a process (program) not shown for monitoring the number of game balls actually paid out by this payout motor 584, the value of the counter for determining the output of prize ball number information stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM is updated by adding the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described below.

In the port output process of step S548, the value of the counter for determining the output of prize ball number information is read from this prize ball information storage area, and if the value of this read counter for determining the output of prize ball number information exceeds 10 (in other words, when the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 reaches 10), a prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558 (at this time, the value indicating the exceeded number of balls is stored and updated as the value of the counter for determining the output of prize ball number information in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM mentioned above), and an indication signal is output to the error LED indicator.

Following step S548, the dispensing control MPU performs port input processing (step S550). In this port input processing, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the dispensing control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the dispensing control's built-in RAM. For example, the operation signal of the RAM clear switch (RAM clear signal), the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal from the CR unit, and the main dispensing ACK signal from the main control board 1310 indicating that the main control board 1310 has successfully received the various commands sent in the command sending processing described below are each read and stored as input information in the input information storage area.

Following step S550, the payout control MPU performs a timer update process (step S552). In this timer update process, the following conditions are set: ball jamming determination time, which is set as a determination condition when determining whether a ball jam state has occurred by the payout blades 589 to which the rotation of the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted; skip determination time, which is set when the fixed position determination of the payout blades 589 is not performed; full determination time, which is set as a determination condition when determining whether the lower tray 202 is full of stored game balls; and ball jamming time, which is set as a determination condition when determining whether the game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 by the detection signal from the ball out detection sensor 574. In addition to managing time such as the ball run-out determination time, which is set as a determination condition when determining whether the number of game balls received and dispensed in the ball container 589b of the dispenser blade 589 exceeds a predetermined number, the inconsistency counter reset determination time, which is set as a determination condition when determining whether to reset the inconsistency counter INCC, which monitors whether inconsistent balls are being repeatedly dispensed due to a discrepancy between the number of game balls received and dispensed in the ball container 589b of the dispenser blade 589 and the number of balls actually detected by the dispenser detection sensor 591, is also managed. For example, when the ball jamming determination time is set to 5005 ms and the timer interrupt period is set to 2 ms, the ball jamming determination time is subtracted by 2 ms each time the timer is updated. The ball jamming determination time is accurately measured when the subtraction result becomes 0. These various determination times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S552, the payout control MPU performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication processing, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, it determines whether various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal) have been input from the CR unit. Based on the various signals from the CR unit, the payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit. In the process of setting the working area of the payout control internal RAM in step S530, as described above, information used for various processing is set based on payout information related to payout, such as various flags, which are payout backup information stored in the payout control internal RAM, and various information stored in the various information storage area (e.g., the prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the PRDY signal output setting information, which sets the logic state of the PRDY signal, etc. stored in the CR communication information storage area).

With this processing, even if there is a momentary or power outage, for example, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power restoration can be restored to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored as payout backup information immediately before the momentary or power outage. As a result, even if there is a momentary or power outage while the payout device 580 is performing a payout operation of game balls and the payout operation cannot be continued, the payout operation can be continued when power is restored, so that game balls can be paid out to the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 without any surplus or shortage. In other words, during the CR communication process, while the payout control MPU is exchanging various signals with the CR unit and paying out game balls to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202, if there is an instantaneous or power outage that interrupts the exchange of various signals with the CR unit and makes it impossible to continue paying out game balls, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power restoration are restored to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored as payout backup information immediately before the instantaneous or power outage, so that the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit immediately before the instantaneous or power outage can be continued after power is restored, and payout of game balls can continue.

In this way, even if the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit is interrupted or stopped, when power is restored it is restored to the state it was in immediately before the interruption or stoppage, and the effects of the interruption or stoppage do not affect the various signals exchanged between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit. This increases the reliability of the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit.

In addition, the various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information. In the CR communication processing, when power is restored, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which was set in the process of setting the working area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, and if this read PRDY signal output setting information is set to the logic state of a PRDY signal that indicates, for example, that a payout operation to pay out loaned balls is impossible, the PRDY signal is output to the CR unit from the output terminal of a specified output port of the payout control MPU. Then, for example, in the retry operation monitoring process, which is performed as part of the main operation setting process, a determination is made as to whether the value of the inconsistency counter INCC in the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is included in the payout backup information, is less than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH. If the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is not less than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH, it is determined that the retry operation is operating abnormally, that is, that the payout operation of the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, and the retry error flag RTERR-FLG is set to a value of 1. In the payout ball operation determination setting process, the error status output to the CR unit is set, for example, by setting the logic state (LOW) of the PRDY signal, which indicates that the payout operation to pay out loaned balls is impossible when there is no communication with the CR unit, as PRDY signal output setting information and storing this in the CR communication information storage area.

As a result, in the CR communication process, at the next timer interrupt after power is restored, the logic state of this PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area and the PRDY signal is output to the CR unit from the output terminal of a specified output port of the payout control MPU. In this way, for example, if the payout operation of the payout device 580 to dispense game balls was in an abnormal state immediately before a momentary power outage, that state is restored when power is restored, so that a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation to dispense loan balls is impossible can be output to the CR unit from the output terminal of a specified output port of the payout control MPU very quickly after power is restored, and the CR unit can be informed that the payout operation of the payout device 580 to dispense game balls is in an abnormal state. This makes it possible to prevent the CR unit from outputting an unnecessary loan ball request signal, BRDY, very quickly after power is restored.

In addition, in the CR communication processing, in the port input processing of step S550, the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and based on this CR connection signal, when its logic is HI, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected, the logic state of the PRDY signal is output as HI from the output terminal of a specified output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit to indicate that the payout operation to pay out loaned balls is possible, while when its logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, the logic state of the PRDY signal is output as LOW from the output terminal of a specified output port of the payout control MPU to the CR unit to indicate that the payout operation to pay out loaned balls is not possible. The logic state of the EXS signal, which indicates that a single dispensing operation has started or ended, is stored in the CR communication information storage area of the dispensing control built-in RAM as EXS signal output setting information, and the CR connection signal, which indicates whether the dispensing control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected, is stored in the status information storage area as CR connection information.

Following step S554, the payout control MPU performs a full tank and ball exhaustion check process (step S556). In this full tank and ball exhaustion check process, input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and based on this input information, it determines whether the lower tray 202 described above is full of stored game balls based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, and determines whether the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 described above is equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on the detection signal from the ball exhaustion detection sensor 574. For example, to determine whether the lower tray 202 is full of stored game balls, a timer interrupt period of 2 ms is used. When the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON in the current full tank/out-of-ball check process and the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF in the previous full tank/out-of-ball check process (2 ms ago), that is, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 transitions from OFF to ON, the timer update process of step S552 starts timing the above-mentioned full tank determination time. Then, when the full tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time has arrived, it is determined whether the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON in this full tank/out-of-ball check process. In this determination, if the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON, it is determined that the lower tray 202 is full of stored game balls, and full tank information indicating this is stored in the above-mentioned status information storage area. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, it is determined that the lower tray 202 is not full of stored game balls, and full tank information indicating this is stored in the status information storage area.

The 2 ms timer interrupt period is also used to determine whether the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is equal to or greater than the predetermined number. When the detection signal from the bulb out switch is ON during the current full tank and bulb out check process and the detection signal from the bulb out switch is OFF during the previous full tank and bulb out check process (2 ms ago), that is, when the detection signal from the bulb out detection sensor 574 transitions from OFF to ON, the timer update process in step S552 begins timing the above-mentioned bulb out determination time. Then, when the bulb out determination time becomes 0 during the timer update process, that is, when the bulb out determination time has arrived, the full tank and bulb out check process determines whether the detection signal from the bulb out detection sensor 574 is ON. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball out detection sensor 574 is ON, the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, and ball out information indicating this is stored in the status information storage area. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the ball out detection sensor 574 is OFF, the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is less than the predetermined number, and ball out information indicating this is stored in the status information storage area.

Following step S556, the payout control MPU performs a command reception process (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands related to payouts (prize ball commands and self-check commands) are received from the main control board 1310. When these various commands are received successfully, payer ACK information informing this fact is stored in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when the various commands are not received successfully, connection abnormality information informing that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 (an abnormality has occurred in the various command signals) is stored in the status information storage area described above.

Following step S558, the dispensing control MPU performs command analysis processing (step S560). In this command analysis processing, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the dispensing control's built-in RAM.

Following step S560, the payout control MPU performs a main operation setting process (step S562). This main operation setting process sets up operations such as prize balls, loan balls, ball removal, and ball jamming, determines whether to perform a retry, and monitors the number of unpaid balls (number of prize balls in stock).

Following step S562, the payout control MPU performs an LED display data creation process (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read from the status information storage area described above, and display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator of the payout control board 633 is created and stored in the output information storage area described above as LED display information. For example, the above-mentioned out-of-ball information is read from the status information storage area, and based on this out-of-ball information, when the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is less than a predetermined number, corresponding display data (in this embodiment, display value 1 (the number "1")) is created and the LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S564, the payout control MPU performs a command transmission process (step S566). In this command transmission process, various information is read from the status information storage area described above, and based on this information, various commands classified as status displays (frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame status 2 command) are created and sent to the main control board 1310. For example, when out-of-ball information is read from the status information storage area, if the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is less than a predetermined number, a frame status 1 command is created and sent to the main control board 1310 based on this out-of-ball information.

Following step S566, the dispensing control MPU sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the watchdog timer clear register HWCL is set with the values A, B, and C in that order, clearing the watchdog timer.

Following step S568, the process returns to step S539, where the dispensing control MPU sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and determines in step S540 whether a power outage warning signal has been input. If this power outage warning signal has not been input, it determines in step S542 whether the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1. If the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, if 2 ms have elapsed, it sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to a value of 0 in step S544, sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S546, and then returns to step S548. Port output processing is performed in step S550, port input processing is performed in step S552, timer update processing is performed in step S554, CR communication processing is performed in step S556, full tank and bulb out check processing is performed in step S558, command reception processing is performed in step S560, command analysis processing is performed in step S562, main operation setting processing is performed in step S564, LED display data creation processing is performed in step S566, command transmission processing is performed in step S568, value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. The processing of steps S539 to S568 is referred to as the "dispensing control unit main processing."

The processing content of the payout control unit main processing changes depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. As a result, the time required for processing by the payout control MPU will vary. Therefore, in the port output processing of step S548, the payout control MPU prioritizes outputting a payout master ACK signal to the main control board 1310, indicating that various payout-related commands from the main control board 1310 have been successfully received. This ensures that the payout control MPU has enough processing time to perform other processing that may vary.

On the other hand, if the dispensing control MPU determines in step S540 that a power outage warning signal has been input, it sets the interrupt prohibition setting (step S570). This setting prevents the dispensing control unit timer interrupt processing described below from being performed, prevents writing to the dispensing control internal RAM, and protects the dispensing information described above from being overwritten.

Following step S570, the payout control MPU stops outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). This stops the payout of game balls.

Following step S574, the dispensing control MPU clears the watchdog timer (step S576). As described above, this clearing is performed by sequentially setting values A, B, and C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

Following step S576, the payout control MPU calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). This checksum is calculated by treating the payout information in the working area of the payout control internal RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area for the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, and calculating its sum.

Following step S578, the dispensing control MPU sets the dispensing backup flag HBK-FLG to a value of 1 (step S580). This completes the storage of dispensing backup information.

Following step S580, the payout control MPU prohibits access to the payout control internal RAM (step S582). This prohibits access to the payout control internal RAM, making writing and reading impossible, and protecting the payout backup information stored in the payout control internal RAM.

Following step S582, the dispensing control MPU enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the watchdog timer is not cleared because the watchdog timer clear register HWCL is not sequentially set to values A, B, and C. This resets the dispensing control MPU, and then the dispensing control unit power-on processing is performed again. The processing from step S570 to step S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as the "dispensing control unit power-off processing."

The pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) is reset in the event of a power outage or momentary power outage, and when power is subsequently restored, the payout control unit performs power-on processing.

In step S526, it is checked whether the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is correct, and then in step S528 it is checked whether the payout control unit power-off processing has been completed normally. In this way, by double-checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is checked whether the payout backup information has been stored due to fraudulent activity.

[23-2. Dispense control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the dispensing control unit timer interrupt process will be described. This dispensing control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed at the interrupt period (2 ms in this embodiment) set in the dispensing control unit power-on process shown in Figures 261 to 263.

When the payout control unit timer interrupt processing begins, the payout control MPU disables timer interrupts and switches (saves) the register (step S590), as shown in Figure 264. Here, the general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) used in the payout control unit main processing described above is switched to an auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, the values in the general-purpose register are no longer overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the payout control unit main processing from being destroyed.

Following step S590, the dispensing control MPU sets the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to a value of 1 (step S592). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms each time the dispensing control unit timer interrupt process is performed, i.e., every 2 ms. It is set to a value of 1 when 2 ms have elapsed and to a value of 0 when 2 ms have not yet elapsed.

Following step S592, the payout control MPU switches (restores) the register (step S594). This restoration switches from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing to a general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main processing, the values in the auxiliary register are no longer overwritten. This prevents the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing from being destroyed.

Following step S594, the dispensing control MPU sets interrupt permission (step S596) and terminates this routine.

[24. Various control processes of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 that receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) will be described with reference to FIGS. 265 to 269. FIG. 265 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control board power-on processing, FIG. 266 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control board V blank interrupt processing, FIG. 267 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control board 1 ms timer interrupt processing, FIG. 268 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control board command reception interrupt processing, and FIG. 269 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control board power failure warning signal interrupt processing. First, the peripheral control board power-on processing will be described, followed by the peripheral control board V blank interrupt processing, peripheral control board 1 ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control board command reception interrupt processing, and peripheral control board power failure warning signal interrupt processing. Note that in this embodiment, the priority of interrupt processing is set highest for the peripheral control board power failure warning signal interrupt processing, followed by the peripheral control board 1 ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control board command reception interrupt processing, and peripheral control board V blank interrupt processing.

As described above, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510") integrates a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, and various I/O interfaces onto a single semiconductor chip.

[24-1. Processing when peripheral control unit is powered on]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. 265. When power is applied to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control unit power-on process is performed under the control of the CPU of the peripheral control IC on the peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. 265. When this peripheral control unit power-on process begins, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs an initialization process (step S1000). This initialization process includes initializing the peripheral control IC itself, determining whether it is a hot start or a cold start, setting a wait timer after reset, and transferring various control information (peripheral data). The CPU of the peripheral control IC first initializes the peripheral control IC itself, but the time required for this process is on the order of microseconds (μs), making it possible to initialize the peripheral control IC in an extremely short time. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC is enabled for interrupts, and is thus able to receive various commands, such as commands related to game presentation control and commands related to the status of the pachinko machine 1, output from the main control board 1310 during the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described below.

Following step S1000, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information specifying the year, month, and day and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the current calendar information and current time information are set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

In this embodiment, the CPU of the peripheral control IC acquires calendar information and time information from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC only once, when the power is turned on. After performing this current time information acquisition process, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT (not shown) to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

Following step S1002, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0 (step S1004). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag used to determine whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit routine processing described below. It is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit routine processing is executed and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit routine processing is not executed. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 during the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described below, which is executed when a V blank signal is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC, indicating that the peripheral control IC's CPU is ready to accept screen data (information defining the screen configuration). In step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting it to a value of 0. In addition, after the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 0, it outputs a clear signal to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

Following step S1004, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is equal to 1 (step S1006). If the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not equal to 1 (it is equal to 0), it returns to step S1006 and repeatedly determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is equal to 1. By repeating this determination, the CPU enters a standby state until the peripheral control unit's regular processing is executed. After determining whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is equal to 1, the CPU of the peripheral control IC outputs a clear signal to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

In step S1006, if the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1, i.e., if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that peripheral control unit steady-state processing is to be executed, it first sets the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG to 1 (step S1008). This steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is set to 1 when peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, and to 0 when peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed.

Following step S1008, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs 1 ms interrupt timer start processing (step S1010). This 1 ms interrupt timer start processing starts the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing described below, and also initializes the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN by setting the value 1 to count the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer has started and executed the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs performance operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this presentation operation unit monitoring process, in the presentation operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, various information (for example, rotation (direction of rotation) history information of the contact operation unit 302 and operation history information of the press operation unit 303 created based on detection signals from various detection sensors such as the first rotation detection sensor 347, second rotation detection sensor 348, press detection sensor 381, and lift detection sensor 382 provided in the presentation operation unit 300 (hereinafter referred to as "various sensors provided in the presentation operation unit 300")) is set, and the rotation direction of the contact operation unit 302 and whether or not the press operation unit 303 has been operated are monitored based on the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and it is appropriately determined whether or not the rotation direction of the contact operation unit 302 and the operation state of the press operation unit 303 should be reflected in the game presentation. Specifically, if the volume is adjusted in the performance operation unit information acquisition process, the sound generation schedule data is rewritten according to the adjusted volume, and if the brightness is adjusted, the light emission mode generation schedule data is rewritten according to the adjusted brightness. This allows volume and brightness adjustments to be reflected in real time, and the performance will proceed with the adjusted volume and brightness.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs lamp palette setting processing as part of the performance operation unit monitoring processing. In the lamp palette setting processing, the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light and the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light are set based on a lamp palette setting table consisting of brightness specification values, normal palette values, and special palette values. During the performance, when the lamp palette setting processing is executed and a player (or an attendant such as a game hall staff member) operates the performance operation unit 301 (touch operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to set a brightness specification value ranging from the first brightness specification value to the 31st brightness specification value, which is the maximum brightness, the above-mentioned gradation information set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC can be updated to match the set brightness specification value.

Here, we will briefly explain the brightness designation values, normal palette values, and special palette values that make up the lamp palette setting table. The brightness designation value is a value that can be set to one of 32 levels ranging from the 0th (zero) brightness designation value, which is the minimum brightness (off), to the 31st brightness designation value, which is the maximum brightness. The normal palette values and special palette values, described below, are pre-set corresponding to the 0th (zero) brightness designation value through the 31st brightness designation value. A player (or an attendant such as a game hall staff member) can operate the operable effect operation unit 301 (touch operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to set one of the brightness designation values ranging from the 1st brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value, which is the maximum brightness.

For example, when a player (or an attendant such as a game parlor staff member) rotates the touch operation unit 302 clockwise and the current brightness is set to the first brightness designated value, which is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness designated value, which is the minimum brightness (off), the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light and the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light will increase in accordance with a predetermined mathematical formula (e.g., a linear tone curve or a spline-like tone curve) from the first brightness designated value to the 31st brightness designated value, which is the maximum brightness. On the other hand, when the player rotates the touch operation unit 302 counterclockwise and the current brightness is set to the maximum brightness, the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light and the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light will decrease in accordance with a predetermined mathematical formula (e.g., a linear tone curve or a spline-like tone curve) from the 31st brightness designated value, which is the maximum brightness, to the first brightness designated value. When a player (or a game hall staff member, etc.) rotates the touch operation unit 302 to select the desired brightness and then presses the pressing operation unit 303, the selected desired brightness is confirmed. In this embodiment, a case is provided in which the player (or a game hall staff member, etc.) can set the brightness while a performance is in progress. In this case, the player (or a game hall staff member, etc.) can set the desired brightness by operating the touch operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. When a player (or a game hall staff member, etc.) operates the touch operation unit 302 while a performance is in progress, a bar-shaped indicator indicating the positions of the first brightness designation value through the thirty-first brightness designation value is displayed at a predetermined position in the display area of the performance display device 1600, thereby visually indicating the player's (or a game hall staff member, etc.) desired brightness level. In this embodiment, the fourteenth brightness designation value is set as the initial (default) value.

Normal palette values are set as the above-mentioned gradation information, representing the brightness of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side and the various decorative boards on the door frame side that are illuminated as direct light. Normal palette values are selected from 17 levels in 5% increments from the minimum palette value (20%), which is the smallest value, to the maximum palette value (100%), which is the largest value. Within the 32-level range of brightness designations from the 0th (zero) brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value, which are the brightness designations mentioned above, the palette value corresponding to each brightness designation is set according to a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline-like tone curve).

The minimum palette value (20%) is 20% of the maximum palette value (100%) corresponding to one brightness specification within the 32-step range of brightness specification values from 0 (zero) to 31 (the above-mentioned brightness specification values). Similarly, for other palette values, the values (%) written in parentheses are the values relative to the maximum palette value (100%) corresponding to one brightness specification within the 32-step range of brightness specification values from 0 (zero) to 31 (the above-mentioned brightness specification values).

In this embodiment, the normal palette value is the maximum palette value (100%), which is pre-selected and set as the above-mentioned gradation information for the various decorative boards provided on the gaming board side and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side that are illuminated as direct light, and the palette value (50%) is pre-selected and set as the above-mentioned gradation information for a specific decorative board (not shown) (LEDs that are dazzling to players) among the various decorative boards provided on the gaming board side that are illuminated as direct light.

Special palette values are used to set the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates used in light guide plates that emit indirect light as the gradation information described above. Unlike normal palette values, special palette values have only one level, and within the 32-level range of brightness designation values, from the 0th (zero) brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value described above, the palette value corresponding to one brightness designation is set as the gradation information described above according to a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline-like tone curve).

As mentioned above, if the brightness of the LEDs used for indirect light were the same as the brightness of the LEDs used for direct light, the indirect light from the light guide plate would be dimmer than the direct light. Therefore, in this embodiment, the brightness of the LEDs used for indirect light is set using special palette values rather than the normal palette values set for the brightness of the LEDs used for direct light. The first brightness designation value, which is the next highest level of brightness after the 0th (zero) brightness designation value, which represents the minimum brightness (off), is set as the lowest brightness at which the light guide plate can be visually recognized as emitting light from indirect light, and is set to a value approximately equal to the 18th brightness designation value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%). Within the range from the first brightness designation value to the 31st brightness designation value, the palette value corresponding to each designated brightness value is set according to a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline-like tone curve).

In this way, in the lamp palette setting process, when setting the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light and the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light based on a lamp palette setting table consisting of a brightness specification value, a normal palette value, and a special palette value, the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light is set by the player (or an attendant such as a game hall clerk) according to the normal palette value corresponding to the brightness specification value operated by the touch operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, while the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light is set by the player (or an attendant such as a game hall clerk) according to the special palette value corresponding to the brightness specification value operated by the touch operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. As a result, if the player finds the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light too dazzling and operates the touch operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 to reduce the brightness, even if the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light is set to the lowest brightness (i.e., the first brightness specified value, which is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness specified value, which is the minimum brightness (off)), and the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light is also set to the lowest brightness (i.e., the first brightness specified value, which is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness specified value, which is the minimum brightness (off)), the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light is set to a value approximately equal to the 18th brightness specified value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%), so the lowest brightness at which the light guide plate can be seen emitting indirect light is set.

In addition, programmers who design the light-emitting patterns do not have to individually set the brightness of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards mounted on the game board and the door frame for the LEDs used as direct light.They can simply set the light-emitting patterns in accordance with the flow of the presentation, watch the flow of the presentation based on the light-emitting patterns of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards mounted on the game board and the door frame, and then set the normal palette value to a small palette value (for example, 50%) for specific decorative boards that are too dazzling (or that a slightly darker brightness would produce a better presentation effect), and set the normal palette value to the maximum palette value (100%) for other decorative boards, thereby extremely easily changing the balance of the overall light-emitting patterns. In other words, even if a player (or an attendant such as a game hall staff member) operates the operable effect operation unit 301 (touch operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to set a single brightness specification value ranging from the first brightness specification value to the 31st brightness specification value, which is the maximum brightness, a small palette value (for example, 50%) corresponding to the single brightness specification value will be set for a specific decorative board, while the maximum palette value (100%) corresponding to the single brightness specification value will be set for other decorative boards, making it possible to adjust brightness extremely easily without disrupting the relationship between the set light emission modes (bright or dark).

Furthermore, although it is more difficult to adjust the brightness of indirect light from a light guide plate than direct light, it is possible to set the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light using special palette values that are different from the normal palette values (i.e., independent of the normal palette values). As a result, the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light is managed by the special palette values, while the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light is managed by the normal palette values, making it easy to adjust the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light and the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light.

Following step S1014, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output processing, in the display data creation processing described below, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads image data from the SDRAM based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and outputs one screen's worth (one frame's worth) of drawing data generated on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC to the liquid crystal output board 1530. This allows various screens (images) to be drawn (displayed) on the performance display device 1600. Note that in the display data output processing, if drawing is performed that exceeds the drawing capacity of the VDP of the peripheral control IC, the output of the generated one screen's worth (one frame's worth) of drawing data is canceled. This prevents delays in processing time, but may result in dropped frames. However, it is a system that allows for priority to be given to performances using music, sound effects, and other sound effects that are tailored to various performances, output from various speakers (hereinafter referred to as "various speakers") such as the top center speaker, top side speakers, and main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4, via the sound data output process described below.

Following step S1016, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output processing, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads sound data from the SDRAM based on instructions from the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the sound data creation processing described below, and outputs the data to various speakers from the set output channels. As a result, music, sound effects, and other sounds that match various performances are played from the various speakers.

Following step S1018, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a scheduler update process (step S1020). This scheduler update process updates various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. For example, the scheduler update process updates a pointer to indicate which screen data, from the first screen data, among the screen data arranged in chronological order that make up the schedule data for screen generation, is to be output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC.

In addition, the scheduler update process updates a pointer to indicate which light emission data, from the first light emission data, is to be output among the light emission data arranged in chronological order that make up the schedule data for generating light emission modes.

In addition, the scheduler update process updates a pointer to indicate which sound command data, starting from the first sound command data, should be output to the sound source of the peripheral control IC among the sound command data that indicates sound data for musical effects, sound effects, and other dramatic sounds, as well as sound data for alarms and announcements, arranged in chronological order to make up the sound generation schedule data.

The scheduler update process also updates a pointer to indicate which drive data, starting from the first drive data, of the drive data for electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order that constitute the electric drive source schedule data is to be output. The drive data for electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order that constitute the electric drive source schedule data is updated by the motor and solenoid drive process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is executed repeatedly every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, as described below. This motor and solenoid drive process, which is executed repeatedly every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, drives the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, updates the pointer to the next drive data specified in chronological order, and updates the pointer each time its own process is executed. In other words, the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process. Therefore, even if for some reason the pointer in the motor and solenoid drive process changes from the drive data it was originally supposed to point to to other drive data, the scheduler update process will forcibly update it to point to the drive data it was originally supposed to point to.

Following step S1020, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis processing, various commands sent from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described below, and the received commands are analyzed, while also updating random numbers used for various performance settings (for example, random numbers used for performances related to hold pre-reading). Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In this received command analysis processing, the CPU of the peripheral control IC reads (extracts) the screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electrical drive source schedule data from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed commands and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC also performs lamp palette setting processing as part of the received command analysis processing. In the lamp palette setting processing, the brightness of the LEDs used as direct light and the brightness of the LEDs used as indirect light are set based on a lamp palette setting table consisting of the above-mentioned brightness specification values, normal palette values, and special palette values. The peripheral control IC analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, and based on the analyzed commands, reads (extracts) schedule data for generating light emission modes from the peripheral control ROM and executes the lamp palette setting processing. When a player (or an attendant such as a game hall staff member) operates the effect operation unit 301 (touch operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to set a brightness specification value ranging from the first brightness specification value to the thirty-first brightness specification value, which is the maximum brightness, the above-mentioned gradation information can be updated to match the set brightness specification value and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC also analyzes whether the command received from the main control board 1310 during this peripheral control unit command interrupt process is, for example, a start port winning command to instruct the start of a start port winning effect, a normal pattern memory command to identify the number of reserved normal patterns (0 to 4), a variable pattern command to instruct the start of a variable effect such as the variable display of decorative patterns on the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the variable display of special patterns, a pattern memory command output when the start port pending number changes, or a large prize port 1 count display command output each time a game ball is received by the large prize port 2005, and recognizes the current game state.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The received command analysis process analyzes the various commands stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. These commands include commands related to special 1 synchronization effects, special 2 synchronization effects, jackpot-related commands, power-on commands, regular synchronization effects, regular electric effects, notification displays, status displays, test-related commands, and other commands. Based on the received commands, the peripheral control board 1510 executes lottery processing related to announcements, etc., and, based on the results of the lottery, reads (extracts) screen generation schedule data, light-emitting mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electrical drive source schedule data from the peripheral control ROM and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. This will allow the peripheral control board 1510 to execute a performance based on the lottery results.

The peripheral control ROM pre-stores the peripheral control unit 1511, various control programs for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, etc., various data, various control data, and various schedule data. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be drawn on the performance display device 1600, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating the light emission modes of various LEDs, sound generation schedule data for generating performance sounds such as music and sound effects, and electrical drive source schedule data for generating the drive modes of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is composed of screen data that specifies the configuration of the screen, arranged in chronological order, and specifies the order in which the screens are drawn on the performance display device 1600. The light emission mode generation schedule data is composed of light emission mode data that specifies the light emission modes of various LEDs, arranged in chronological order. The sound generation schedule data is composed of sound command data that is arranged in chronological order, and specifies the order in which the music and sound effects are played. This sound command data specifies an output channel number that indicates which of the multiple output channels in the peripheral control IC's built-in sound source to use, and a track number that indicates which of the multiple tracks in the peripheral control IC's built-in sound source to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects into.The electric drive source schedule data is composed of drive data for electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order, and specifies the operation of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Following step S1022, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs warning processing (step S1024). During this warning processing, if the commands analyzed in the received command analysis processing of step S1022 include various commands classified as notification displays, the screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, and electrical drive source schedule data, which are set as abnormality display modes for executing various abnormality notifications, are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Note that during the warning processing, if multiple abnormalities occur simultaneously, abnormality notifications are first issued in order of highest pre-registered priority, and once that abnormality is resolved, the system automatically transitions to the remaining abnormality notifications. This allows multiple abnormalities to be monitored simultaneously without losing information that another abnormality occurred after one abnormality occurred but before the first abnormality was resolved.

Following step S1024, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs an RTC acquisition information update process (step S1026). This RTC acquisition information update process updates the calendar information and time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. This RTC acquisition information update process updates the hour, minute, and second information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and updates the year, month, and date calendar information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC based on this updated time information.

Following step S1026, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a display data creation process (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer from the chronologically arranged screen data that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation is read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC.

When screen data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the VDP of the peripheral control IC reads image data from the SDRAM based on this input screen data and generates one screen's worth (one frame's worth) of drawing data in the built-in VRAM to be drawn (displayed) on the performance display device 1600.

Following step S1030, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation processing, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update processing of step S1020, and the sound command data indicated by the pointer, among the sound command data arranged in chronological order that constitutes the sound generation schedule data, is read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. When sound command data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, the sound source of the peripheral control IC reads the sound data from the SDRAM and incorporates sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and sets the output channel to be used according to the output channel number.

Note that during the sound data creation process, the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch is identified based on the volume adjustment operation signal from the volume adjustment switch each time this sound data creation process is performed (i.e., each time the peripheral control unit performs steady-state processing). The CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the sound source of the peripheral control IC to achieve a volume that corresponds to the rotation position of the volume adjustment switch, and during the sound data output process of step S1018, the sound data is output to the various speakers from the output channel set during this sound data creation process. This allows sounds such as music and sound effects that match the various performances to be played from the various speakers.

Specifically, the resistance value varies when the volume adjustment switch is rotated, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch is converted from an analog value to a digital value, which is then converted into 1024 levels ranging from 0 to 1023. In this embodiment, the 1024 levels are divided into seven levels and managed as board volumes 0 to 6. Board volume 0 is set to mute, and board volume 6 is set to maximum volume, with the volume increasing from board volume 0 to board volume 6. The sound source of the peripheral control IC is controlled to achieve the volume set for board volumes 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from the top center speaker and top side speakers on the door frame 3 and the bass main frame speaker on the main frame 4. In this way, volume adjustment based on the rotation of the volume adjustment switch allows music and sound effects to be played from the top center speaker and top side speakers on the door frame 3 and the bass main frame speaker on the main frame 4.

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track that incorporates the sound data. In addition to sound data for music, sound effects, and other sound effects and sub-volume values for adjusting their volume, the multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC also incorporate sound data for alarm sounds that alert parlor staff and others of malfunctions in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1 and sub-volume values for adjusting their volume.

Specifically, for the sound effects, the board volume adjusted by rotating the volume control switch as described above is set as the sub-volume value, while for the notification sounds, the maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value, completely independent of volume adjustment based on the volume control switch. The sub-volume value for the sound effects can be adjusted by operating the touch operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 of the sound effects operation unit 300, except for a predetermined period after power-on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and a certain period when the special symbol display (first special symbol display unit, second special symbol display unit) starts or stops displaying the changing special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) (in this example, from the time the peripheral control unit receives the changing pattern command until 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the changing decorative symbol display, and from the time the peripheral control unit receives the stop display command until 0.5 seconds have elapsed since the final display of the decorative symbol).

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, except for a predetermined period after power is turned on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)), and a certain period when the special symbol display (first special symbol display unit, second special symbol display unit) starts or stops the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) (in this example, from the time the peripheral control unit receives the variable pattern command until 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, or from the time the peripheral control unit receives the stop display command until 0.5 seconds have passed since the final display of the decorative symbol), By operating the touch operation unit 302 or pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300, the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch during the sound data creation process is converted into one of seven board volume values, 0 to 6.Furthermore, by adding or subtracting a predetermined value to the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch depending on the operation of the touch operation unit 302 or pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300, the board volume value can be increased or decreased to set the board volume, thereby adjusting the sub-volume value of the performance sound.

The sound specification data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and the multiple output channels in the peripheral control IC's built-in sound source combine the sound data of the effect sound incorporated into the track to be used out of the multiple tracks in the peripheral control IC's built-in sound source with a sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the effect sound incorporated into the track to be used.The volume of this combined effect sound is amplified to the master volume value, which is the volume that actually flows from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main frame speaker for low frequencies on the main frame 4, and this amplified effect sound is serialized and output as audio data.

In this embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized sound effect is at its maximum, it is amplified up to the master volume value so that the volume coming from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the bass main frame speaker on the main frame 4 is the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the sound effect, the sound data for the sound effect incorporated into the track being used out of multiple tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control IC is synthesized with the board volume adjusted by rotating a volume adjustment switch set as a sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the sound effect incorporated into the track being used, and the volume of this synthesized sound effect is amplified up to the master volume value that actually becomes the volume coming from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the bass main frame speaker on the main frame 4, and this amplified sound effect is serialized and played. For the alarm sound, the sound data for the alarm sound incorporated into the track being used is combined with the maximum volume that is not dependent on volume adjustment based on the rotation of the volume adjustment switch, which is set as a sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the alarm sound incorporated into the track being used, and the volume of this combined alarm sound is amplified to the master volume value that actually becomes the volume played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the main frame speaker for low frequencies on the main frame 4, and this amplified alarm sound is serialized and output as audio data.

Here, briefly explaining the control of playing an alarm sound to alert parlor staff and others of a malfunction in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1 when the sound effect is being played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the bass main frame speaker on the main frame 4, first, the sub-volume value of the track into which the sound effect is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, and then the sound data of the track into which this sound effect is incorporated, the sub-volume value set to mute, the sound data of the track into which the alarm sound is incorporated, and the sub-volume value for which the volume of the alarm sound is set to maximum volume are combined, and the volume of this combined sound effect and alarm sound are amplified to the master volume value that will actually be the volume played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the bass main frame speaker on the main frame 4, and these amplified sound effect and alarm sounds are serialized and output as audio data. In other words, the only sound that actually comes from the top center speaker and top side speakers on the door frame 3 and the low-pitched main frame speaker on the main frame 4 is the notification sound at maximum volume. At this time, the special sound is muted, so although it does not come from the top center speaker and top side speakers on the door frame 3 and the low-pitched main frame speaker on the main frame 4, the special sound is still proceeding according to the sound generation schedule data described above.

In this embodiment, the alarm sound is played for a predetermined period (e.g., 90 seconds) from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 and the bass main frame speaker on the main frame 4. After this predetermined period has elapsed, the volume of the sound effect, which has been progressing according to the sound generation schedule data that was previously forcibly muted, is reset to the board volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch as a sub-volume value (if the volume of the sound effect has been adjusted by operating the touch operation unit 302 or pressing operation unit 303 of the sound effect operation unit 300, the volume is set to the adjusted sub-volume value), and the sound is played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 and the bass main frame speaker on the main frame 4.

In this way, when sound effects are being played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the bass main frame speaker on the main frame 4, and an alarm sound is played to alert parlor staff or others to a malfunction in the pachinko machine 1 or fraudulent activity against the pachinko machine 1, the volume of the sound effects is muted and the alarm sound is played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the bass main frame speaker on the main frame 4.However, since this muted sound effects progress according to the sound generation schedule data, when the alarm sound stops being played from the top center speaker and top side speaker on the door frame 3 side and the bass main frame speaker on the main frame 4 after a predetermined period of time has passed, the sound effects will not resume from the point where the alarm sound started, but will resume from the point where it progressed according to the sound generation schedule data up until the point where the predetermined period of time had passed since the alarm sound started.

Alert sounds and notification sounds are played completely independently of volume adjustments based on the rotation of the volume adjustment switch. The CPU of the peripheral control IC controls the sound source of the peripheral control IC through a program to adjust the volume from mute to maximum volume. The volume adjusted by this program is designed to smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. For example, even if an amusement hall staff member or other attendant turns the volume adjustment switch to set the volume low, the music, sound effects, and other sound effects played from the various speakers will be reduced in volume. However, if a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or a player is engaging in fraudulent activity, the alert sounds set to a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the sound effects is reduced, it is possible to prevent the alert sounds from making it difficult for the amusement hall staff member or other attendant to notice a malfunction or a player's fraudulent activity.

Following step S1032, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup processing, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied to a backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC for backup, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are copied to a backup area for regular processing provided in the SDRAM for backup.

Following step S1034, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a WDT clear process (step S1036). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

Following step S1036, the CPU of the peripheral control IC sets the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG to 0 (step S1038), indicating that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed. Then, the CPU returns to step S1004, initializes the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG by setting it to 0, and repeats the determination of step S1006 until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described below. In other words, step S1006 waits until the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1. If step S1006 determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, steps S1008 to S1038 are performed, and the process returns to step S1004. In this way, if step S1006 determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, steps S1008 to S1038 are performed. The processing of steps S1008 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady-state processing."

This peripheral control unit routine processing begins in step S1008 by setting the routine processing in progress flag SP-FLG to 1, indicating that the peripheral control unit routine processing is currently being executed. Then, in step S1010, a 1 ms interrupt timer is started. Then, in step S1014, ..., step S1036 are executed, and finally, in step S1038, the routine is completed by setting the routine processing in progress flag SP-FLG to 0, indicating that the peripheral control unit routine processing has been completed. The peripheral control unit routine processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 in step S1006. As mentioned above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 during the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described below, which is executed when a V blank signal, indicating that the peripheral control IC's CPU is ready to accept screen data, is input from the peripheral control IC's VDP to the peripheral control IC's CPU. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the performance display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps, as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). In other words, the peripheral control unit's regular processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[24-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, we will explain the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which is executed when a V blank signal, indicating that the peripheral control IC's CPU is ready to accept screen data, is input from the peripheral control IC's VDP. When this peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to 0 (step S1045), as shown in FIG. 266. As described above, this steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 265 is being executed, and to 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been executed.

In step S1045, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (is 1), i.e., that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, it simply ends this routine. On the other hand, in step S1045, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0, i.e., that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been executed, it sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to 1 (step S1050) and ends this routine. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag used to determine whether or not to execute peripheral control unit steady-state processing, and is set to 1 when peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed and to 0 when peripheral control unit steady-state processing is not being executed.

In this embodiment, step S1045 determines whether the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 0, i.e., whether the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed. When the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed, step S1050 sets the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to a value of 1. This is because, when a V blank signal is input and the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1 while the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 265 determines that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing will be executed, and the currently executing peripheral control unit steady-state processing will be forcibly canceled midway and the peripheral control unit steady-state processing will be started from the beginning. In order to prevent this, the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 265 is set to a value of 1. In step S1008 of the power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady-state processing), the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is set to 1, thereby informing this routine, the peripheral control unit V blanking signal interrupt processing, that peripheral control unit steady-state processing is currently being executed. In addition, in step S1038 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady-state processing) in FIG. 265, the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is set to 0, thereby informing this routine, the peripheral control unit V blanking signal interrupt processing, that peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed. Step S1045 of this routine, the peripheral control unit V blanking signal interrupt processing, determines whether the steady-state processing in progress flag SP-FLG is 0, i.e., whether peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed. In other words, this is the procedure to be taken when peripheral control unit steady-state processing cannot be completed between the input of a V blanking signal and the input of the next V blanking signal, resulting in a so-called processing stall.

As a result, if the current peripheral control unit steady-state processing fails to complete within approximately 33.3 ms and stalls, step S1006 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Figure 265 will determine that the processing will wait until the next V blank signal is input. In other words, the time required to execute the current peripheral control unit steady-state processing that stalled will be approximately 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing described below, which is executed repeatedly each time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady-state processing) in Figure 265, is executed 32 times for each peripheral control unit steady-state processing. However, if the current peripheral control unit steady-state processing stalled as described above exists, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times, not 64 times. In other words, even if the peripheral control unit steady-state processing stalls, consistency between the performance progress achieved by the peripheral control unit steady-state processing and the performance progress achieved by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, is maintained. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit's steady-state processing slows down, the progress of the presentation can be reliably maintained.

[24-3. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing will be described, which is repeatedly executed each time a 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Fig. 265. When this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is less than 33, as shown in Fig. 267 (step S1100). As described above, this 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is a counter that counts the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in the 1 ms interrupt timer start processing in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Fig. 265 and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine. In this embodiment, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the performance display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps as described above, so the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). In other words, since the peripheral control unit regular processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit regular processing, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed 32 times before the next peripheral control unit regular processing is executed. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit regular processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, followed by the second, ..., and 32nd 1 ms timer interrupts.

In step S1100, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33, i.e., that the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt has occurred and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing has begun, it simply terminates this routine. In this embodiment, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs before the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, even though the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing has a higher interrupt processing priority than the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. In other words, in this embodiment, because the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs before the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the V blank signal is generated, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit regular processing, and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started again when a new 1 ms timer interrupt occurs.

On the other hand, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1100 that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is less than 33, it adds 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increments it, step S1102). By adding 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in the 1 ms interrupt timer start processing in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 265, and the number of times this routine, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, has been executed increases by 1.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the motors, solenoids, and other electric drive sources are driven in accordance with the drive data indicated by the pointer among the drive data for the motors, solenoids, and other electric drive sources arranged in chronological order that constitute the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The pointer is also updated to the next drive data specified in chronological order, and the pointer is updated each time this motor and solenoid drive processing is executed. As a result, electric drive sources such as motors, solenoids, and other electric drive sources managed by the CPU of the peripheral control IC (for example, electric drive sources provided in the door frame 3 and electric drive sources provided in various performance units provided on the game board 5) are driven in accordance with the electric drive source schedule data.

Following step S1104, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs movable body information acquisition processing (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition processing, history information of the detection signals from the various sensors (e.g., original position history information, movable position history information, etc.) is created by determining whether detection signals have been input from the various sensors provided in the various presentation units provided on the gaming board 5, and this information is set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. Based on the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines the movable positions by setting the original positions (standby positions) of the various movable bodies provided in the various presentation units provided on the gaming board 5 and acquiring their movable positions.

Following step S1106, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a performance operation unit information acquisition process (step S1108). This performance operation unit information acquisition process determines whether detection signals have been input from the various sensors provided in the performance operation unit 300, and creates history information of the detection signals from the various sensors (e.g., rotation (direction) history information of the touch operation unit 302 and operation history information of the press operation unit 303, etc.) and sets this information in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. The operation or non-operation of the touch operation unit 302 and the press operation unit 303 can be obtained from the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, by operating the performance operation unit 301, it is possible to adjust the volume of the performance sounds output from the top center speaker, top side speakers, and main frame speaker of the main frame 4, and to adjust the brightness of the various LEDs mounted in multiple numbers on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and game board 5.

Following step S1108, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs backup processing (step S1110) and terminates this routine. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are copied and backed up to a backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are copied and backed up to a backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the SDRAM. Note that in this embodiment, the backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC and the backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC are set to different areas, and the backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the SDRAM and the backup area for regular processing provided in the SDRAM are set to different areas.

In this way, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, various processes related to the performance in steps S1104 to S1108 are executed within a period of 1 ms to progress the performance. In contrast, in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Figure 265, various processes related to the performance in steps S1014 to S1032 are executed within a period of approximately 33.3 ms to progress the performance. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, if the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33 in step S1100, i.e., if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is initiated, the routine is terminated. Therefore, even if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs by chance before the next V blank signal, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled, and the 1 ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit regular processing due to the V blank signal, and then the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is initiated due to the first new 1 ms timer interrupt. In other words, consistency is maintained between the performance progress due to the peripheral control unit regular processing and the performance progress due to the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control. This ensures reliable consistency of performance progress.

As mentioned above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the LCD size of the performance display device 1600, and the interval at which the V blank signal is output may also vary slightly depending on the production lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control IC is mounted. In this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the occurrence of the next V blank signal, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. In other words, in this embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly, the time lag caused by the slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output can be absorbed by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt.

[24-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, we will explain the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process that receives various commands from the main control board 1310. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC starts transmitting various commands as serial data from the main control board 1310, it uses this as a trigger to import one byte (8 bits) of main serial data into a receive buffer at the serial I/O port of the peripheral control IC, and when this import is complete, an interrupt occurs and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is performed. One packet of main serial data is composed of three bytes, with the first byte assigned to the status, the second byte assigned to the mode, and the third byte assigned to a sum value calculated by treating the status and mode as numerical values.

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process begins, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out (step S1200), as shown in FIG. 268. This 1-byte reception period timer sets the period during which 1 byte (8 bits) of information can be received from the main serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

In step S1200, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, that is, that it is within the period in which it can receive 1 byte (8 bits) of main serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310, it retrieves the received 1 byte of information from the receive buffer of the serial I/O port of the peripheral control IC (step S1202) and increments the receive counter SRXC by 1 (step S1204). This receive counter SRXC indicates the number of times data has been retrieved from the receive buffer. The value is 1 when the status, the first byte of the main serial data, is retrieved from the receive buffer; 2 when the mode, the second byte of the main serial data, is retrieved from the receive buffer; and 3 when the sum, the third byte of the main serial data, is retrieved from the receive buffer. The receive counter SRXC is initially set to 0 when the power is turned on, etc.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether the receive counter SRXC is at a value of 3, i.e., whether the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, has been retrieved from the receive buffer (step S1206). This determines whether the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, have been retrieved from the receive buffer in that order.

If, in step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the receive counter SRXC is not equal to 3, that is, that the status (the first byte of the main serial data), the mode (the second byte of the main serial data), and the sum value (the third byte of the main serial data) have not yet been retrieved from the receive buffer in that order, it sets a 1-byte receive period timer (step S1208) and ends this routine. Setting the 1-byte receive period timer in step S1208 sets the period during which the mode (the second byte of the main serial data) or the sum value (the third byte of the main serial data) can be received.

On the other hand, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1206 that the receive counter SRXC is equal to 3, that is, that it has retrieved from the receive buffer the status (the first byte of the main serial data), the mode (the second byte of the main serial data), and the sum value (the third byte of the main serial data) in that order, it sets the receive counter SRXC to an initial value of 0 (step S1210) and calculates the sum value (step S1212). This calculation regards the status (the first byte of the main serial data) and the mode (the second byte of the main serial data) already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 as numerical values, and calculates their sum (sum value).

Following step S1212, it is determined whether the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1214). The sum value of the third byte of the main serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main serial data from the main control board 1310, and therefore should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, pachinko machine 1 receives game balls from the island equipment in the gaming hall, and when the game balls rub against each other and become charged, electrostatic discharge occurs, generating noise, so pachinko machine 1 is in an environment where it is subject to noise.

In this embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 treats the status assigned as the first byte of the received main serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main serial data as numerical values, calculates their sum (sum value), and determines whether this calculated sum value matches the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main serial data from the main control board 1310. This allows the CPU of the peripheral control IC to determine whether the main serial data between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 has been affected by noise and changed to incorrect main serial data.

If, in step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212, it stores the status assigned to the first byte of the received main serial data and the mode assigned to the second byte of the main serial data in the RAM of the peripheral control IC (step S1216), and terminates this routine.

On the other hand, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1200 that the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, that is, that the period in which 1 byte (8 bits) of main serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received has been exceeded, or if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1214 that the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data already retrieved from the receive buffer in step S1202 does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, it immediately terminates this routine.

[24-5. Peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, we will explain the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process that is executed when a power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310. When this peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC first starts a 2 microsecond timer (step S1300), as shown in Figure 269, and determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S1302). In the determination of step S1302, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that a power outage warning signal has not been input, it simply ends this routine.

On the other hand, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1302 that a power outage warning signal has been input, it determines whether 2 microseconds have passed (step S1304). In this determination, the timer started in step S1300 determines whether 2 microseconds have passed. In step S1304, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that 2 microseconds have not passed, it returns to step S1302 and determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input. If it determines that a power outage warning signal has not been input, it simply ends this routine. However, if it determines that a power outage warning signal has been input, it again determines in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have passed. In other words, in step S1304, it determines whether a power outage warning signal has been continuously input for 2 microseconds since the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, was started.

In step S1304, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines that the power outage warning signal has been input continuously for 2 microseconds since the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, began, it performs power-saving processing (step S1306). This power-saving processing reduces power consumption throughout the pachinko machine 1 system by sequentially turning off the backlight of the effect display device 1600, turning off excitation to the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5, and turning off various LEDs, thereby ensuring stable operation for the 20 millisecond period during which the CPU of the peripheral control IC can operate even if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs a command reception standby process (step S1308). This command reception standby process assumes that the main control board 1310 is currently sending various commands, and waits for at least 17 milliseconds so that the peripheral control IC can receive the command being sent. When a command is received, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described above is initiated, and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Following step S1308, the CPU of the peripheral control IC performs command backup processing (step S1310). In this command backup processing, the command stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC is copied and backed up to a backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC.

Following step S1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input (step S1312). If the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that a power outage warning signal has been input, it performs a WDT clear process (step S1314). In this WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the external WDT to prevent the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset.

On the other hand, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that a power outage warning signal has not been input, or following step S1314, it returns to step S1312 and determines whether a power outage warning signal has been input. In other words, it continues to determine indefinitely whether a power outage warning signal has been input. By continuing to determine indefinitely in this way, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that a power outage warning signal has not been input, it is no longer able to output a clear signal to the external WDT, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset. However, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC determines in step S1312 that a power outage warning signal has been input, it performs WDT clear processing in step S1314, and the CPU of the peripheral control IC is not reset. Note that when the CPU of the peripheral control IC is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 265 is restarted.

In this way, if step S1312 determines that the power outage warning signal continues to be input in the infinite loop, step S1314 executes the WDT clear process, preventing the CPU of the peripheral control IC from being reset immediately before a power outage occurs. In contrast, if step S1312 determines that the power outage warning signal is not continuing to be input in the infinite loop but is released, the WDT clear process is not executed, and the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, is erroneously initiated due to noise or other reasons, and the noise occurs for more than 2 microseconds, causing the determination in step S1302 to be passed, if step S1312 determines that the power outage warning signal is not continuing to be input in the infinite loop but is released, the WDT clear process in step S1314 is not executed, causing the CPU of the peripheral control IC to be reset. Therefore, such noise can be dealt with by automatically returning to reset.

[Control processing on the main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU 1310a) will be described. Fig. 270 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric gimmick control processing (step S114).

Now, assuming that the random numbers used in the various lottery processes have been updated (step S106), as shown in FIG. 270, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first executes a first start gate passing process (step S232), such as obtaining a first special random number for the first special symbol from the random number counter and storing it in a first special symbol reserve memory area of RAM, on the condition that the detection signal from the first start gate sensor 3002 is on (a ball has entered the first start gate 2002) (step S231). Also, on the condition that the detection signal from the second start gate sensor 2401 is on (a ball has entered the second start gate 2004) (step S233), the main control MPU 1310a executes a second start gate passing process (step S234), such as obtaining a second special random number for the second special symbol from the random number counter and storing it in a second special symbol reserve memory area of RAM.

Next, it is determined whether a jackpot in progress flag, indicating that control is being exercised in the jackpot gaming state, is set (step S235). If the jackpot in progress flag is set, a jackpot control process (step S235A) is executed to control the jackpot gaming state. In the jackpot control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) stops indicates a mode suggesting a "15R jackpot," a process is executed to control the opening and closing of the jackpot opening 2005 in accordance with the 15R jackpot gaming state. Furthermore, when the mode indicates a "5R jackpot," a process is executed to control the opening and closing of the jackpot opening 2005 in accordance with the 5R jackpot gaming state, and when the mode indicates a "2R jackpot," a process is executed to control the opening and closing of the jackpot opening 2005 in accordance with the 2R jackpot gaming state.

In addition, during the jackpot control process (step S235A), after controlling the opening of the large prize slot 2005, the time-saving flag and the time-saving count counter are set. The time-saving flag indicates the time-saving state, and is set when the 2R jackpot gaming state ends because the result of the lottery process when the first special symbol stops varying during the time-saving state indicates a "2R jackpot," when the 5R jackpot gaming state ends because the result indicates a "5R jackpot," or when the 15R jackpot gaming state ends during the time-saving state or non-time-saving state. The time-saving flag is then reset when the next jackpot occurs or when the counter value of the time-saving count counter reaches "0" by the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 281 (described below) or the second special symbol stop process (not shown).

The time-saving counter indicates the remaining number of times the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) will continue in the time-saving state. If the time-saving state is entered after the end of a jackpot gaming state, the number of times the time-saving state will continue is set when the jackpot gaming state ends. The time-saving counter counts down each time the variable display of the special symbols is executed until the counter value reaches "0." However, if the next jackpot occurs before the counter value reaches "0," it is reset (the counter value is returned to "0") by the first special symbol stop process shown in Figure 281 (described below) or the second special symbol stop process (not shown).

Furthermore, if the jackpot execution flag is not set, then, on condition that the value of the second special reserve number counter, which indicates the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special pattern reserve memory area, is "0" (step S237), a first special pattern process is executed (step S238), including a lottery process for determining the display mode when the variable display of the first special pattern stops, and, on condition that the value of the second special reserve number counter, which indicates the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special pattern reserve memory area, is not "0" (step S237), a second special pattern process is executed (step S239), including a lottery process for determining the display mode when the variable display of the second special pattern stops. In this way, in this example, the system is configured so that when the value of the second special reserve number counter is not "0", the variable display of the second special pattern is executed with priority.

Figure 271 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first starting port passage process (step S232).

Now, assuming that in the processing of step S231, the first start hole sensor 3002 is in the ON state and it is determined that a gaming ball has entered the first start hole 2002, as shown in FIG. 271, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the first special random number, the reach random number, the first pattern random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as processing of step S241.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 then obtains from the main control's built-in RAM the counter value of the first special reserved number counter, which indicates the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reserved memory area, and determines whether the first reserved memory number is its maximum value (upper limit value) of "4" based on this counter value (step S242). If it is determined in step S242 that the first reserved memory number is not its maximum value, the following steps S243 to S245 are performed to newly place the variable display control of the first special symbol in a reserved state. That is, first, in step S243, the first special reserved number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, in step S244, each random number obtained in step S241 is stored in the first special symbol reserved memory area of the main control's built-in RAM that corresponds to the counter value of the first special reserved number counter.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs a performance pre-determination process to determine, based on the first special random number, reach random number, first pattern random number, and variable random number obtained in step S241, whether the display result of the first special pattern variable display will be a jackpot, and if it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot, and if it is not a jackpot, whether to execute a reach effect as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, and the type of mode (type of variable pattern) of the game effect to be executed, before starting the variable display corresponding to the start winning (step S245), and then terminates processing.

However, if it is determined in step S242 that the first reserved memory count is at its maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. In other words, by ending the process without executing steps S243 to S245, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly reserved.

In addition, when the first reserved memory number changes based on a game ball entering the first starting hole 2002, the lighting status of the two LEDs of the first special reserved memory number display in the function display unit 1400 is updated to correspond to the first reserved memory number, and a command indicating the first reserved memory number (first reserved number designation command 0-4 (special symbol 1 storage command 0-4)) is set and sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). Furthermore, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved memory number on the performance display device 1600 based on receiving the first reserved number designation command 0-4 (special symbol 1 storage command 0-4).

Figure 272 is a flowchart showing the steps for the above-mentioned effect pre-determination process (step S245). When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the effect pre-determination process, it compares the random numbers obtained in step S241 above, specifically the first special random number, first pattern random number, reach random number, and variable random number, with a pre-determination table (not shown) to determine whether a jackpot will occur, and if so, the type of jackpot. If not, it determines whether a reach effect will be executed as a game effect to be executed by the effect display device 1600, and the type of game effect to be executed (step S261).

A pre-determination command is then set according to the identified pre-determination information (whether a jackpot will occur, the type of jackpot if a jackpot will occur, whether a reach effect will be executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600 if a jackpot will not occur, the type of game effect to be executed, etc.), the type of special random number obtained (first special random number), and the number of reserved memories stored corresponding to the obtained special random number (value of the reserved number counter). For example, in the effect pre-determination process for the first special pattern executed in step S245 of the first start port passing process, a first special pattern pre-determination command is set according to the identified pre-determination information, the fact that the first special random number has been obtained, and the first reserved memory number (value of the first special reserved number counter) (step S262).

Then, in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120), a pre-determination command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, allowing the peripheral control IC mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 to grasp pre-determination information such as the number of reserved memories stored corresponding to the first start slot 2002 where the start winning occurred, as well as whether the display result of the special pattern variable display based on the start winning that occurred will be a jackpot, the type of jackpot if it is a jackpot, whether a reach effect will be executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600 if it is not a jackpot, and the type of game effect to be executed, before the variable display corresponding to the start winning begins.

When the peripheral control IC mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives a pre-determination command from the main control board 1310, it stores the pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control IC is provided with a first reserved memory area that stores pre-determination information regarding the variable display of the first special pattern.

The first reserved memory area has memory areas 1 to 4, corresponding to the number of reserved memories, and the peripheral control IC stores the preliminary judgment information indicated by the received preliminary judgment command in order, starting with the first (earliest) memory area. Then, when a preliminary judgment command is received while preliminary judgment information is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) memory area, the notified preliminary judgment information is stored in the n+1th (n = 1 to 3) memory area. When a first variation pattern command notifying the start of the first special symbol variable display is received, the preliminary judgment information stored in the first memory area of the first reserved memory area is discarded in accordance with the received first variation pattern command, and the preliminary judgment information stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) memory area is moved to the N-1th (N = 2 to 4) memory area (shifting the preliminary judgment information stored in the reserved memory areas). This allows the preliminary judgment information for the first special symbol to be stored in a manner that allows the order in which the variable display start suspension occurred to be identified, and the preliminary judgment information is discarded in order, starting with the earliest one.

In this way, when variable display control is placed on hold, even though the variable display control remains in an unexecuted state (on hold), the expected jackpot probability (pseudo-winning probability) of that variable display control can be notified in advance at a predetermined timing, such as when the reserved display is newly output or when the reserved display is shifted in response to the consumption of the reserved display.

Figure 273 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the second starting port passage process (step S234).

Now, assuming that the second start hole sensor 2401 is in the ON state and it is determined that a gaming ball has entered the second start hole 2004 in the processing of step S233, as shown in FIG. 273, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the second special random number, the reach random number, the second pattern random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as processing of step S251.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 then obtains the counter value of the second special reserved number counter from the main control's built-in RAM and, based on this counter value, determines whether the second reserved memory number is its maximum value (upper limit value), "1" (step S252). If it is determined in step S252 that the second reserved memory number is not its maximum value, the following steps S253 to S254 are performed to set the variable display control of the second special symbol to a new reserved state. That is, first, in step S253, the second special reserved number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, in step S254, the random numbers obtained in step S251 are stored in the second special symbol reserved memory area of the main control's built-in RAM that corresponds to the counter value of the second special reserved number counter.

However, if it is determined in step S252 that the second reserved memory count is at its maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly reserved. In other words, by ending the process without executing steps S253 to S254, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly reserved.

In addition, when the second reserved memory number changes based on a game ball entering the second starting hole 2004, the lighting status of the two LEDs of the second special reserved memory number display in the function display unit 1400 is updated to correspond to the second reserved memory number, and a command indicating the second reserved memory number (second reserved number designation command 0-1 (special symbol 2 storage command 0-1)) is set and sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command sending process (step S120). Furthermore, the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on receiving the second reserved number designation command 0-1 (special symbol 2 storage command 0-1).

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the upper limit of the first reserved memory number based on game balls entering the first start port 2002 is set to "4," while the upper limit of the second reserved memory number based on game balls entering the second start port 2004 is set to "1." Furthermore, since the second start port 2004 is capable of accepting a large number of game balls during the time-saving mode and the time it takes for the second special symbol to change is shorter than in the normal mode, even if the upper limit of the second reserved memory number is set to "1," it is possible to prevent a long period of time in which the second special symbol change display is not performed, or a long period of time in which the second reserved memory number is at its upper limit, resulting in a player not getting a chance to win a jackpot even if a game ball enters the second start port 2004, which would be disadvantageous to the player.

Figure 274 is a flowchart showing the steps for the first special symbol process (step S238). Note that the first special symbol process executed in step S238 of the special symbol process and the second special symbol process executed in step S239 of the special symbol process are similar program modules, and only differ in the random numbers and tables used for judgment. Therefore, only the first special symbol process executed in step S238 of the special symbol process will be described here. In the first special symbol process, one of the following five processes will be selectively executed depending on the first special symbol process flag described above.

1. First special symbol normal processing (step S280) in which the first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read, and a lottery process for determining the display mode when the variable control of the first special symbol is stopped is performed based on the read first special random number.
2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281) in which a process for determining the display mode when the first special symbol variable control is stopped is performed based on the result of a lottery process regarding the display mode when the first special symbol variable control is stopped.
3. A first variation pattern setting process (step S282) in which a lottery process is performed on the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 based on the variation random number, and the variation mode of the effect display executed in response to the special symbol on the effect display device 1600.
4. First special symbol variation process (step S283) in which the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 waits until the variation display of the first special symbol is stopped.
5. A first special symbol stop process (step S284) for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol so that the display mode at the time of stopping the variable control of the first special symbol, determined based on the result of the lottery process for stopping the variable control of the first special symbol, is displayed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400.

The first special symbol process flag is set to indicate that the first special symbol normal processing (step S280) should be performed during the main control side power-on processing (see FIG. 255).

Figure 275 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal processing (step S280).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that normal processing of the first special symbol should be performed, as shown in FIG. 275, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first determines, in step S301, based on the counter value of the first special reserved number counter, whether there is variable display control of the reserved first special symbol. If it is determined that there is variable display control of the reserved first special symbol, then, in step S302, the random number stored in the earliest memory area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (e.g., first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) stored in the first special symbol reserved memory area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read from the RAM. Next, in steps S303 and S304, the first special reserved number counter is counted down, and the random numbers (first special random number, first pattern random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special pattern stops, which are stored in each memory area of the first special pattern reserved memory area in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, are shifted in a first-in, first-out manner.

Specifically, the first special symbol reserve memory area has four memory areas, 1 through 4, and stores random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of a starting winning combination in order, starting with the first (earliest) area. When a starting winning combination occurs while a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 through 3) memory area, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1th (n = 1 through 3) memory area. When the conditions for starting a variable display based on the random number stored in the first memory area are met, the various random numbers stored in the first memory area are read out, and the various random numbers stored in the Nth (N = 2 through 4) memory area are moved to the N-1th (N = 2 through 4) memory area. This allows the order in which the reserves for the variable display control of the first special symbol occurred to be stored in a specific order, and the reserves for the variable display control are released in order, starting with the earliest reserve (the reserve that occurred earliest).

Then, in step S305, a win determination process is performed, which is a lottery process for determining whether or not the jackpot will be won, based on the first special random number of the first special symbol that was read out. This process then ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated (step S306) to transition to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281).

Figure 276 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the hit determination process (step S305).

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the winning determination table shown in Figure 277 (A) with the special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 if the first special symbol normal processing is being performed, or the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal processing if the second special symbol normal processing is being performed) (step S311).

The hit determination table shown in Figure 277 (A) includes, for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number), a low-probability jackpot determination table to be used when the game state is low probability (normal state (low-probability non-time-saving state) and time-saving state (low-probability time-saving state)), and a high-probability jackpot determination table to be used when the game state is high probability (high-probability time-saving state). In the low probability hit determination table that is referenced for comparison with the first special random number, the first special random numbers are associated with each other so that they match the hit determination value indicating that the first special random number has won a big hit with a hit probability of 1/319 when the setting value is 1, 1/309 when the setting value is 2, 1/299 when the setting value is 3, 1/289 when the setting value is 4, 1/279 when the setting value is 5, and 1/269 when the setting value is 6, they match the hit determination value indicating that the first special random number has won a small hit with a small hit probability of 3/319, and other first special random numbers match the miss determination value indicating that the first special random number is a miss. In addition, in this example, within the second special pattern process processing, the low probability hit determination table that is referenced for comparison with the second special random number is associated with the second special random number so that it matches the big hit determination value indicating that the second special random number has won a big hit with a hit probability of 1/319 when the setting value is 1, 1/309 when the setting value is 2, 1/299 when the setting value is 3, 1/289 when the setting value is 4, 1/279 when the setting value is 5, and 1/269 when the setting value is 6, matches the small hit determination value indicating that the second special random number has won a small hit with a small hit probability of 144/319, and matches the miss determination value indicating that any other second special random number is a miss. In other words, the hit determination table referenced for comparison with the second special random number is configured to have a higher probability of determining a small hit than the hit determination table referenced for comparison with the first special random number, so that the player is placed in a more advantageous position when the variable display of the second special pattern is executed based on a start winning entry into the second start opening 2004 than when the variable display of the first special pattern is executed based on a start winning entry into the first start opening 2002. Furthermore, the hit determination table for high probability is configured to increase the probability of a big hit for each setting value by 10 times compared to the hit determination table for low probability.

If the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that a jackpot has occurred as a result of comparing the hit determination table with the special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing, or the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal processing) (step S312), it sets a jackpot flag indicating that the variation has resulted in a jackpot (step S313) and ends the hit determination process.

Furthermore, if the result of comparing the selected win determination table with the special random number (the first special random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing, or the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal processing) is that a small win has occurred (step S314), a small win flag is set indicating that the variation has resulted in a small win (step S315), and the win determination process is terminated.

On the other hand, if neither a big win nor a small win has been won, i.e., if it is determined to be a miss, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read in step S302 (step S316).

The reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM and includes a time-saving reach determination table for use when the game state is in a time-saving state, and a non-time-saving reach determination table for use when the game state is not in a time-saving state. In the time-saving reach determination table, the reach random numbers are associated with one type of reach random number so that it matches a reach determination value indicating a reach has occurred, and 71 types of reach random numbers so that it matches a reach determination value indicating a non-reach has occurred.

Furthermore, in the reach determination table for the non-time-shortened state, five types of reach random numbers, including the same reach random numbers as those set in the reach determination table for the time-shortened state, are associated with the reach determination values indicating a reach will occur, and 67 types of reach random numbers are associated with reach determination values indicating a non-reach will occur. Thus, in this embodiment, the reach determination values indicating a reach will occur are higher in the non-time-shortened state than in the time-shortened state.

If the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read in step S302 (step S316) and determines that the reach has been missed (step S317), it sets a reach flag indicating that the change is a reach and terminates processing (step S318).

Figure 278 is a flowchart showing the steps for the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S281).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 278, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first determines the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol stops, i.e., the result of the win determination process (step S305). The result of the lottery process is determined by determining whether the big win flag is set (step S321) or whether the small win flag is set (step S324).

If the jackpot flag is set in step S321, the main control MPU 1310a determines the type of jackpot by comparing the first pattern random number read in step S302 of the normal processing of the first special pattern with the jackpot pattern determination table shown in Figure 277 (B), and determines the mode of the first special pattern when the variable control of the first special pattern stops (the stopping pattern of the first special pattern) corresponding to the determined type of jackpot (step S322).

in particular,
1. A 15R guaranteed jackpot in which the opening and closing pattern, which closes the large prize opening 2005 after it has been open for a long period of time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the large prize opening sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have entered the large prize opening 2005, is repeated 15 times (15 rounds), thereby controlling the state to a 15R jackpot gaming state in which it is possible (easy) for game balls to enter the large prize opening 2005, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, the execution period of the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is shortened from the normal state until the variable display of the special symbols has been executed 77 times, and the state is controlled to a high probability time-shortened state in which the special lottery result is drawn with a higher probability than normal. 2. a 5R time-saving jackpot in which the period during which the game balls can (easily) enter the large prize opening 2005 is shortened from the normal period after the large prize opening 2005 has been opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the large prize opening sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have entered the large prize opening 2005, by repeating an opening/closing pattern five times (five rounds); and
3. A 2R jackpot in which the opening and closing pattern is repeated twice (two rounds) to close the large prize opening 2005 after the large prize opening 2005 has been left open for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the large prize opening sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have entered the large prize opening 2005, and the game state is controlled to a 2R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easy) for a game ball to enter the large prize opening 2005; if the game state is controlled to a time-shortening state before the start of the 2R jackpot game state, the game state is controlled to a time-shortening state which is ended if a jackpot does not occur within 77 executions of the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) after the jackpot game state ends; and if the game state is controlled to a non-time-shortening state before the start of the 2R jackpot game state, the game state is controlled to a normal state after the jackpot game state ends.
The jackpot will be determined from one of the three types of jackpots.

In addition, if the jackpot flag is set in the second special pattern stopping pattern setting process, the type of jackpot is determined by comparing the second pattern random number read in the second special pattern normal processing with the jackpot pattern determination table shown in Figure 277 (B), and the mode of the second special pattern when the variable control stops (stopping pattern of the second special pattern) corresponding to the determined type of jackpot is determined.
in particular,
1. A 15R guaranteed jackpot in which the opening and closing pattern, which closes the large prize opening 2005 after it has been open for a long period of time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the large prize opening sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have entered the large prize opening 2005, is repeated 15 times (15 rounds), thereby controlling the state to a 15R jackpot gaming state in which it is possible (easy) for game balls to enter the large prize opening 2005, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, the execution period of the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is shortened from the normal state until the variable display of the special symbols has been executed 77 times, and the state is controlled to a high probability time-shortened state in which the special lottery result is drawn with a higher probability than normal. 2. a 5R time-saving jackpot in which the period during which the game balls can (easily) enter the large prize opening 2005 is shortened from the normal period after the large prize opening 2005 has been opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the large prize opening sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have entered the large prize opening 2005, by repeating an opening/closing pattern five times (five rounds); and
3. A 2R jackpot in which the opening and closing pattern is repeated twice (two rounds) to close the large prize opening 2005 after the large prize opening 2005 has been left open for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the large prize opening sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have entered the large prize opening 2005, and the game state is controlled to a 2R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easy) for a game ball to enter the large prize opening 2005; if the game state is controlled to a time-shortening state before the start of the 2R jackpot game state, the game state is controlled to a time-shortening state which is ended if a jackpot does not occur within 77 executions of the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) after the jackpot game state ends; and if the game state is controlled to a non-time-shortening state before the start of the 2R jackpot game state, the game state is controlled to a normal state after the jackpot game state ends.
The jackpot will be determined from one of the three types of jackpots.

The jackpot symbol determination table compared with the first symbol random number allocates 8 judgment values for a 15R probability jackpot, 100 judgment values for a 5R time-limited jackpot, and 92 judgment values for a 2R jackpot. In other words, if a jackpot result is obtained by a lottery based on the first special random number, there is a 4% chance of a 15R jackpot, a 50% chance of a 5R jackpot, and a 46% chance of a 2R jackpot. Similarly, the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number allocates 92 judgment values for a 15R probability jackpot, a 100 judgment value for a 5R time-limited jackpot, and 8 judgment values for a 2R jackpot. In other words, if a lottery result based on the second special random number indicates a jackpot, there is a 46% chance of a 15R jackpot, a 50% chance of a 5R jackpot, and a 4% chance of a 2R jackpot. In this way, the pachinko machine 1 of this example is configured so that the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number has a higher probability of determining a 15R jackpot than the jackpot symbol determination table compared with the first symbol random number, and the player is more favored when the variable display of the second special symbol based on a start winning entry into the second start opening 2004 is executed than when the variable display of the first special symbol based on a start winning entry into the first start opening 2002 is executed.

In addition, once the type of jackpot is determined, the stopping pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot is determined as the manner in which the first special pattern will stop. Specifically, if a 2R jackpot is determined, the 2R jackpot pattern is determined as the jackpot pattern; if a 5R jackpot is determined, the 5R jackpot pattern is determined as the jackpot pattern; and if a 15R jackpot is determined, the 15R jackpot pattern is determined as the jackpot pattern.

In addition, if the big win flag is not set in step S131 but the small win flag is set (step S324), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the type of small win by comparing the first pattern random number read in step S302 of the normal processing of the first special pattern with the small win pattern determination table shown in Figure 277 (C), and determines the mode at the time of stopping the variable control of the first special pattern corresponding to the determined type of big win (the stopping pattern of the first special pattern) (step S325).

in particular,
1. An opening and closing pattern in which the device winning opening 200 is opened for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closed is executed twice to control the state to a small win game in which a game ball can (easily) enter the device winning opening 200, and when a game ball received in the device winning opening 2006 is sorted to the V winning opening 2007 and detected by the V winning opening sensor 3003, the large winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or after the game ball has entered the large winning opening 2005. When the large prize opening sensor 2402 detects that 10 balls have entered the large prize opening, the opening and closing pattern is repeated 14 times to control the state to a 15R large prize game state in which it is possible (easy) for the game ball to enter the large prize opening 2005, and after the large prize game state ends, the execution period of the variable display of the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) is shortened more than usual until the variable display of the special patterns is executed 77 times, and the state is controlled to a high probability time-shortened state in which the special lottery result is drawn with a higher probability than usual. An opening and closing pattern is executed twice to open the device winning opening 200 for a short time (e.g., 80 ms) and then close it, thereby controlling the game to a small win game state in which the game ball can (easily) enter the device winning opening 200, and when the game ball received in the device winning opening 2006 is distributed to the V winning opening 2007 and detected by the V winning opening sensor 3003, the large winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (e.g., 29 seconds) or after the game ball has entered the large winning opening 2005. When the large prize opening sensor 2402 detects that 10 balls have won, an opening and closing pattern is repeated 14 times to control the state to a 15R jackpot game state in which it is possible (easy) for the game ball to enter the large prize opening 2005, and if the state was controlled to a time-shortening state before the start of the 15R jackpot game state, the state is controlled to a time-shortening state which is ended if a jackpot is not achieved within 77 times of the variable display of the special patterns (first special pattern, second special pattern) being executed, after the jackpot game state ends, and if the state was controlled to a non-time-shortening state before the start of the 15R jackpot game state, the state is controlled to a normal state after the jackpot game state ends, and one of two types of small wins is determined to be a second small win.

The small win symbol determination table, which is compared with the first symbol random number, allocates 200 judgment values in the event of a first small win. In other words, if a lottery result based on the first special random number indicates a small win, there is a 100% chance of a first small win, and no second small win. On the other hand, the small win symbol determination table, which is compared with the second symbol random number, allocates 20 judgment values in the event of a first small win, and 180 judgment values in the event of a second small win. In other words, if a lottery result based on the second special random number indicates a small win, there is a 10% chance of a first small win, and a 90% chance of a second small win.

In addition, once the type of small win is determined, the stopping pattern corresponding to the type of small win is determined as the pattern when the first special pattern stops. Specifically, if the first small win is determined, the first small win pattern is determined as the small win pattern, and if the second small win is determined, the second small win pattern is determined as the small win pattern.

If neither the big win flag nor the small win flag is set, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the symbol to be a lose symbol (step S327). After this determination process for the stopped symbol has been completed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result so that the lottery result (indicating the type of big win, small win, reach miss, or miss (which may also indicate the type of stopped symbol of the first special symbol)) is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S328). Then, in step S329, the first special symbol process flag is updated to transition to the first variation pattern setting process (step S282), at which point this process ends.

The peripheral control unit 1511 controls the display of the performance display device 1600 based on the received judgment result notification command and variation pattern command (variably displaying the left, center, and right decorative patterns and displaying them in a static manner in the order of left decorative pattern → right decorative pattern → center decorative pattern (note that the left, center, and right decorative patterns may also be displayed in a synchronized dynamic manner as the same pattern and displayed in a static manner at the same time)). Specifically, the peripheral control unit 1511 determines the mode (stop pattern) of the decorative pattern displayed on the performance display device 1600 when it stops changing to be a small win pattern ("final battle") if it identifies a small win or a 2R jackpot from the received judgment result notification command, a 5R time-limited jackpot pattern (a combination in which the left, center, and right decorative patterns are the same even number pattern from "0" to "9") if it identifies a 5R time-limited jackpot, and a 15R time-limited jackpot pattern (a combination in which the left, center, and right decorative patterns are the same odd number pattern from "0" to "9") if it identifies a 15R special jackpot. Furthermore, if a reach miss is identified, a miss pattern accompanied by a reach (a combination of the same left and right decorative patterns between "0" and "9" but with a different center decorative pattern; a reach miss pattern) is determined, and if a miss is identified, a miss pattern not accompanied by a reach (a combination of the left, center, and right decorative patterns in which at least the left and right decorative patterns are different) is determined, and when the fluctuation time specified from the fluctuation pattern command has elapsed (when the game presentation ends), the determined stopped pattern is controlled and displayed on the presentation display device 1600.

In this example, the pachinko machine 1 can be controlled to the time-shortened state after a jackpot gaming state until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed a maximum of 77 times, but the time-shortened state may also be terminated based on the occurrence of a predetermined number of jackpots after being controlled to transition to the time-shortened state. Specifically, if the time-shortened state is controlled after a jackpot gaming state and a predetermined number of jackpots (for example, two) occur thereafter, the machine may be controlled to the normal state without being controlled to the time-shortened state after the end of the predetermined number of jackpot gaming states. Furthermore, even if the number of jackpots that occur is less than the predetermined number, the machine may be controlled to the non-time-shortened state during the jackpot gaming state, and then controlled to the time-shortened state again after the jackpot gaming state.

Figure 279 is a flowchart showing the steps for the first variation pattern setting process (step S282).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 279, if the jackpot flag is set (step S341), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 selects a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of a jackpot corresponding to the type of jackpot determined in step S323 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S342); if the small jackpot flag is set (step S343), it selects a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of a small jackpot corresponding to the type of small jackpot determined in step S325 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S344); if the reach flag is set (step S345), it selects a variation pattern table at the time of reach (not shown) (step S346); and if neither the jackpot flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, if it is a normal miss (a miss where the reach performance is not executed), it selects a variation pattern table at the time of a miss (not shown) (step S347).

Then, the selected variation pattern table is compared with the variation random number read in step S302 of the first special symbol normal processing to determine the variation pattern to be executed (step S348), and a variation pattern command is set to notify the peripheral control board 1510 that the determined variation pattern will be started, thereby starting the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 (step S349). Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a sets the variation time set corresponding to the determined variation pattern in the variation timer (step S350). As a result, performance control is performed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 and the performance display device 1600 for the variation time determined in this manner.

In this example, multiple types of variation pattern tables are provided for each determination result based on the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) and the pattern random number (first pattern random number, second pattern random number). Furthermore, the variation patterns set in each variation pattern table are stored in a manner associated with each of the variation random numbers, with multiple pieces of variation time information indicating the predetermined time (variation time) required to control the variable display of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern). The main control MPU 1310a compares the selected variation pattern table from multiple types of variation pattern tables corresponding to the determination results based on the special random number and the pattern random number with the variation random number read in step S302 of the first special pattern normal processing, and obtains the variation time information associated with the read variation random number from this table to determine the variation pattern of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern). This allows a lottery process to be performed for the variation pattern of the special pattern (first special pattern, second special pattern). The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a.

In addition, the variable pattern table for reach in this example is set up to determine the type of reach effect to be executed by comparing a judgment value indicating which reach effect to execute with a variable random number. For example, among reach effects, the super reach effect has a higher chance of winning a jackpot than the normal reach effect, and when a super reach effect is executed, the player's chances of winning a jackpot game state increase.

Furthermore, once control of the variable display of the first special symbol has begun, the next step in step S351 is to determine whether the counter value of the time-saving count counter, which sets the number of times the time-saving state continues, is "0." If this counter value is not "0," the time-saving count counter is counted down (step S352), and then it is further determined whether the counter value of the simultaneous time-saving count counter is "0" (step S353). If the counter value is "0," a time-saving end flag is set (step S354), indicating that control of the time-saving state (time-saving control) is to end.

If the processing in step S351 determines that the counter value of the time-saving count counter is "0," or if the processing in step S353 determines that the time-saving count counter is not "0," the processing proceeds to step S355. Then, this processing ends when the first special pattern process flag is updated so that the process proceeds to the first special pattern change processing (step S283).

In this example, in the fluctuation pattern table for when a loss occurs, the fluctuation time information for the special symbols, which is set to about 1 second when in the time-saving state, is associated with the special symbol random numbers (first special symbol, second special symbol), while the fluctuation time information for the special symbols, which is set to about 12 seconds when in the non-time-saving state, is associated with the special symbol random numbers (first special symbol, second special symbol). In other words, the fluctuation time information for the special symbols is set so that the time required to control the fluctuation display of the special symbols is extremely short for the fluctuation pattern selected for when a loss occurs when the time-saving state is selected, compared to the fluctuation pattern selected for when a loss occurs when the time-saving state is not selected.

Figure 280 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol change process (step S283).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol fluctuation processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 280, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first, in step S371, subtracts 1 from the fluctuation timer, which is set with the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery processing for the fluctuation pattern (step S282). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation time timer is 0, i.e., the lottery-determined fluctuation time has elapsed (step S372), the process proceeds to step S373. That is, in step S373, the process ends when the first special symbol process flag is updated to transition to the first special symbol stop processing (step S284).

Figure 281 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop processing (step S284).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 281, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs display control in step S381 to display the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting processing on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400, and sets a stop display command to the peripheral control board 1510 instructing the performance display device 1600 to display the derived display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the first special symbol (step S382).

Next, if the time-saving end flag is set (step S383), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 resets the time-saving end flag (step S384) and also resets the time-saving flag (step S385). As a result, when the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) have been displayed in varying states a predetermined number of times (77 times in this example), the time-saving control (control in the time-saving state) is terminated and non-time-saving control (control in the normal state) is initiated.

Furthermore, when the jackpot flag is set (step S386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating the start of jackpot play (step S387) and sets the waiting time until the start of jackpot play (the time during which a message indicating the start of jackpot play is displayed, etc.) in the interval timer (step S388). Although not shown, step S388 also executes a process to set the number of rounds corresponding to the type of jackpot in a jackpot counter, which indicates the remaining number of rounds. The jackpot counter is decremented by one each time a round is played in the jackpot control process described below. When the jackpot counter reaches "0," the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the specified number of rounds has been played and controls the jackpot play to end. Specifically, in the jackpot control process described below, the pre-opening process for the large prize opening (step S401) and the process during the opening of the large prize opening (step S402) are repeatedly executed until the jackpot counter reaches "0", and when the round ends in the process during the opening of the large prize opening (step S402), the jackpot counter is decremented by 1 and, based on the fact that it reaches "0", the process proceeds to the post-opening process for the large prize opening (step S403) and the jackpot game is ended.

Then, a jackpot execution flag is set to indicate that a jackpot game is in progress (step S389). The jackpot start command is a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually for each type of jackpot. In step S387, a jackpot start command (15R certain jackpot start command, 5R time-limited jackpot start command, 2R jackpot start command) corresponding to the type of jackpot (15R certain jackpot, 5R time-limited jackpot, 2R jackpot) is set. As a result, the jackpot game effects corresponding to the type of jackpot indicated by the jackpot start command are executed by the effect display device 1600, lamps/LEDs, speaker, etc. Similarly, the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process processing also sets a jackpot start command (15R special jackpot start command, 5R time-limited jackpot start command, 2R jackpot start command) according to the type of jackpot (15R special jackpot, 5R time-limited jackpot, 2R jackpot).

In addition, the jackpot in progress flag, which indicates that a jackpot game is in progress, is reset when the jackpot game ends, specifically when the post-opening large prize opening process (step S403) of the jackpot control process (step S235A) has completed the opening and closing control of the large prize opening 2005 according to the type of jackpot (for example, opening and closing control that repeats an opening and closing pattern two, five, or fifteen times to close the large prize opening 2005 after it has been opened for a long period of time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the large prize opening sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have entered the large prize opening 2005) according to the type of jackpot (all rounds that can be executed in the jackpot game). By resetting the jackpot execution flag, the jackpot control process (step S235A) is not executed in step S235 of the special pattern and special electric device control process (step S114), but the function display unit 1400 is able to display the first special pattern change on the first special pattern display and the second special pattern change on the second special pattern display of the function display unit 1400.

Also, if the big win flag is not set (step S386), but the small win flag is set (step S390), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a small win start command indicating the start of small win gameplay (step S391) and sets the interval timer for the waiting time until the start of small win gameplay (the time during which a message indicating the start of small win gameplay is displayed, etc.) (step S392). Then, a small win execution flag indicating that small win gameplay is in progress is set (step S393). The small win start command is a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510 and is prepared individually for each type of small win. In step S391, a small win start command (first small win start command, second small win start command) corresponding to the type of small win (first small win, second small win) is set. As a result, the small win game presentation corresponding to the type of small win indicated by the small win start command is executed by the presentation display device 1600, lamps, LEDs, speakers, etc. Similarly, the second special symbol stop processing of the second special symbol process processing also sets a small win start command (first small win start command, second small win start command) corresponding to the type of small win (first small win, second small win).

The small win in progress flag, which indicates that a small win game is in progress, is reset when the small win game ends, specifically when the opening and closing control of the bonus prize opening 200 according to the type of small win (for example, opening the bonus prize opening 200 for a short time (for example, 80 ms) and then closing it twice) is completed during the small win in progress process (step S411) of the small win control process (step S236A) described below. Resetting the small win in progress flag prevents the small win control process (step S236A) from being executed in step S236 of the special symbol and special electric bonus device control process (step S114), while enabling the display of a changing first special symbol on the first special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 and the display of a changing second special symbol on the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400.

Also, if the small win flag is not set, i.e., if a miss occurs, the interval timer is set to the waiting time until the next variable display of the special symbol begins (the time during which the static special symbol is displayed) (step S394), and the process proceeds to step S395.

After executing the processing of steps S386 to S394, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 updates the first special symbol process flag so that the process transitions to the initial value of first special symbol normal processing (step S395), and then terminates this processing.

Figure 282 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot control process (step S235A). During the jackpot control process, one of the following three processes is selectively executed depending on the jackpot process flag.

1. A pre-opening process for a big prize opening (step S401) in which the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the game will transition to the big prize game state based on the fact that the state of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) when the variable display stops becomes a big prize symbol, or the next round starts.
2. A process during which the large prize opening 2005 is controlled to an open state based on the fact that the mode of the special symbol when the variable display stops becomes a large winning symbol, or the large prize opening 2005 is controlled to an open state based on the fact that the next round is about to start, and the large prize opening 2005 is closed after being opened for a long time (for example, 29 seconds) or when the large prize opening sensor 2402 detects that 10 game balls have entered the large prize opening 2005 (step S402).
3. A post-opening process of the big win port (step S403) that waits until the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the big win game state has ended when all rounds have ended.

The jackpot process flag is set in step S42 to indicate that the pre-opening process for the large prize opening (step S401) should be performed. Furthermore, in the open-opening process for the large prize opening (step S402), a jackpot round start command corresponding to the number of rounds is set at the start of a round in which the large prize opening 2005 is controlled to be open, and a jackpot round end command corresponding to the number of rounds is set at the end of a round in which the large prize opening 2005 is controlled to be closed. The jackpot round start command and jackpot round end command are sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and the jackpot game effects corresponding to the number of rounds specified by the jackpot round start command and jackpot round end command are executed by the effect display device 1600, lamps, LEDs, speaker, etc.

[Rainbow-colored effect]
Next, we will explain the rainbow effect that is executed when there is a high probability of a jackpot (for example, when a jackpot is confirmed (jackpot confirmation effect) or when the decorative pattern is in a reach (reach notice)). In this example, the rainbow effect is a process in which a predetermined form (pattern, character, letter, etc.) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 using a plurality of colors, and then the display color in any display area of the effect display device 1600 is changed in a short time, and in conjunction with the change in the display color on the effect display device 1600, various decorative boards (for example, specific decorative boards (door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, door frame top right decorative board of the door frame top unit 450) described later) provided on the door frame 3 and game board 5 are changed. 457, upper left side decorative board 422 of the left side door frame unit 420, lower left side decorative board 423 of the left side door frame unit 420, left decorative board 273 provided behind the left decorative lens 272, lower right side decorative board 433 of the right side door frame unit 430, right decorative board 278 provided behind the right decorative lens 277, upper right side decorative board 432 of the right side door frame unit 430, upper left front decorative board for illuminating and decorating the upper left logo decorative part 3122 of the front back 3129, a back front left decorative board 3128 for illuminating and decorating the back front left logo decoration part 3121, the back front upper left logo decoration part 3122, and the back front left sub-decorative part 3123, a back front lower logo decoration board 3173 for illuminating and decorating the back front lower logo decoration body 3167, a back front lower middle decorative board 3168 for illuminating and decorating the back front lower middle decoration body 3161, a back front lower left inner decorative board 3169 for illuminating and decorating the back front lower left inner decoration body 3163, and a back front lower left outer decoration board 3164 for illuminating and decorating the back front lower left outer decoration body The LEDs on the substrate 3170, the back front lower right inner decorative substrate 3171 for illuminating and decorating the back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, the back front lower right outer decorative substrate 3172 for illuminating and decorating the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166, the back front lower right decorative substrate 3152 for illuminating and decorating the back front right logo decoration 3141, the back front upper right decorative substrate 3151 for illuminating and decorating the back front upper right logo decoration 3142, etc.) emit light in multiple light colors (at least two or more light colors), and the light colors transition in a short period of time. In the following, a rainbow effect is performed by linking the effect display device 1600 with all of the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the gaming board 5, and the display color of a predetermined form displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the luminous color of the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the gaming board 5 are shown to change in a short period of time, but the display color or luminous color may also change in a short period of time using any one or any combination of the effect display device 1600, the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3, and the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the gaming board 5. Note that for some or all of the various decorative boards on which LEDs are mounted that are provided on the door frame 3 and the gaming board 5 and whose light emission is controlled in the rainbow effect, an insulating coating may be applied to the lands of the through holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the gaming board 5, thereby improving the reflectivity due to the insulating coating.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 283 (A), in this example, when a rainbow effect is executed, the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into five areas, first display area a to fifth display area e, and a rainbow effect display mode is displayed in which each area has a different color. Then, as the variation time passes, the display colors of first display area a to fifth display area e of the effect display device 1600, as well as the size and shape of first display area a to fifth display area e of the effect display device 1600, are changed in a short period of time.

In addition, the form of the rainbow effect displayed on the effect display device 1600 may be a form in which the entire area of the effect display device 1600 does not have information such as characters or letters, for example, as shown in Figure 283 (A), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into multiple areas by multiple striped lines (in the example shown in Figure 283 (A), five display areas from the first display area a to the fifth display area e), or as shown in Figure 283 (B), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into multiple areas by multiple radial lines (in the example shown in Figure 283 (B), five display areas from the first display area a to the sixth display area f), and the first display area a to the fifth display area are colored in different colors for each area, and the colors of some or all of these multiple areas can be changed in a short period of time. Alternatively, a plurality of characters (people, plants, animals, objects, landscapes, etc.) or letters may be colored in different colors for each character and/or each letter (each block (component) having a meaning, such as a character, letter, or word) (for example, the letters "CHANCE" may be displayed with the first "C" in "white," the "H" in "yellow," the "A" in "green," the "N" in "blue," the second "C" in purple, and the "E" in red), or a single character or letter may be divided into a plurality of regions and colored in different colors for each region (for example, each petal may be displayed in a different color, or the skin of a person may be displayed in a striped pattern of multiple colors, or the letters "CHANCE" may be displayed in a first region using seven imaginary lines, lines 1 to 7, as shown in FIG. 283(C)). The word "CHANCE" is divided into six regions, region a (the region surrounded by lines 1 and 2 in the word "CHANCE") to sixth region f (the region surrounded by lines 6 and 7 in the word "CHANCE"), and each region is displayed in a different color, thereby displaying each word "CHANCE" in a striped pattern using multiple colors (for example, first region a (the region surrounded by lines 1 and 2 in the word "CHANCE") in "white," second region b (the region surrounded by lines 2 and 3 in the word "CHANCE") in "yellow," third region c (the region surrounded by lines 3 and 4 in the word "CHANCE") in "green," and fourth region d (the region surrounded by lines 4 and 5 in the word "CHANCE") in "blue"). , fifth area e (the area of the letters "CHANCE" surrounded by lines 5 and 6) is displayed in purple, sixth area f (the area of the letters "CHANCE" surrounded by lines 6 and 7) is displayed in red), etc.), the color or shape of these shapes, or both the color and shape of the shapes, may be changed in a short period of time, or the size or shape of each of multiple areas displayed in a specific color may be changed, or the display position may be changed (moved) to change the display color in any display area of the performance display device 1600 (areas where the background other than the letters "CHANCE" is displayed may not be displayed in the same way as the letters "CHANCE" (such as by changing the display in a short period of time)).

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 284 and 285, the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and game board 5 are divided into multiple groups, and the light emission can be controlled for each group. When the rainbow effect is executed, the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and game board 5 are made to emit light in a predetermined light color for each group. The light emission color of each group is then changed in a short period of time as the variable time passes.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 284, the multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 include the multiple LEDs mounted on the upper front left decorative board 3129 for illuminating and decorating the upper front left logo decoration 3122, which constitute the first board illumination group; the multiple LEDs mounted on the upper front left decorative board 3128 for illuminating and decorating the upper front left logo decoration 3121, the upper front left logo decoration 3122, and the lower front left sub-decorative part 3123, which constitute the second board illumination group; the multiple LEDs mounted on the lower front logo decoration board 3173 for illuminating and decorating the lower front logo decoration 3167, which constitute the third board illumination group; the lower front middle decorative board 3168 for illuminating and decorating the lower front middle decoration 3161; the lower front left inner decorative board 3169 for illuminating and decorating the lower front left inner decoration 3163; and the lower front left outer decoration 3164. the back front lower left outer decorative board 3170 for illuminating and decorating the back front lower right inner decorative board 3171 for illuminating and decorating the back front lower right inner decorative body 3165; and the back front lower right outer decorative board 3172 for illuminating and decorating the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166 are divided into a fourth board illumination group, the multiple LEDs mounted on the back front lower right decorative board 3152 for illuminating and decorating the back front right logo decoration 3141 are divided into a fifth board illumination group, and the multiple LEDs mounted on the back front upper right decorative board 3151 for illuminating and decorating the back front upper right logo decoration 3142 are divided into a sixth board illumination group, and when the rainbow effect is executed, the LEDs are controlled to emit light for each group, with the LEDs in the same group emitting the same color and the LEDs in different groups emitting different colors.

In addition, among the various decorative boards provided on the gaming board 5 for creating rainbow-colored effects, it is not limited to dividing multiple LEDs mounted on the same board into the same group and controlling the light emission for each group, but LEDs mounted on the same board can also be divided into different groups and the light emission can be controlled for each group. For example, the multiple LEDs mounted on the back-front-lower logo decoration board 3173 for lighting up and decorating the back-front-lower logo decoration 3167 bearing the letter "Queen" may be divided into different groups for each letter and the lighting may be controlled for each group, or each letter may be divided into multiple regions by predetermined virtual lines and grouped together and the lighting may be controlled for each group (for example, the letter "Queen" may be divided into three regions, top, middle, and bottom, and the LEDs in the top region of the multiple LEDs mounted on the back-front-lower logo decoration board 3173 may be collectively controlled to light up as the top group, the LEDs in the middle region of the multiple LEDs mounted on the back-front-lower logo decoration board 3173 may be collectively controlled to light up as the middle group, and the LEDs in the bottom region of the multiple LEDs mounted on the back-front-lower logo decoration board 3173 may be collectively controlled to light up as the bottom group, thereby controlling the lighting of the letters "Queen" in a striped pattern).

In this example, as shown in FIG. 285, the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 are: a plurality of LEDs mounted on the door frame top central decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 of the door frame top unit 450 constitute frame lighting group A; a plurality of LEDs mounted on the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 of the door frame left side unit 420 constitute frame lighting group B; a plurality of LEDs mounted on the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 of the door frame left side unit 420 and the dish left decorative board 273 provided behind the dish left decorative lens 272 constitute frame lighting group C; a plurality of LEDs mounted on the performance operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320 of the performance operation unit 300 constitute frame lighting group D; 20a, the multiple LEDs 355a mounted on the circular outer button decorative board 355 and the LEDs 364a on the inner button decorative board 364 are divided into frame lighting group D, the multiple LEDs mounted on the lower right door frame decorative board 433 of the right door frame unit 430 and the right dish decorative board 278 located behind the right dish decorative lens 277 are divided into frame lighting group E, and the multiple LEDs mounted on the upper right door frame decorative board 432 of the right door frame unit 430 are divided into frame lighting group F. When the rainbow effect is performed, the LEDs are controlled to emit light for each group, with the LEDs in the same group emitting the same light color and the LEDs in different groups emitting different light colors.

Figure 286 is a timing diagram showing an example of a rainbow effect. As described above, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variation pattern command from the main control board 1310, it starts a variation effect, such as a variation display of decorative patterns, on the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the variation display of the special pattern, and controls the illumination of the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and game board 5 in conjunction with the display on the effect display device 1600 (timing t0).

When the variation pattern command received from the main control board 1310 is a variation pattern that executes a rainbow effect, when the elapsed time from the start of the display of the decorative pattern variation reaches a predetermined timing t1, among the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, at least the multiple LEDs 320a mounted on the outer decorative board 320 of the performance operation unit 300, the multiple LEDs 355a mounted on the circular outer button decorative board 355, the LED 364a on the inner button decorative board 364, and the rear upper movable decorative board All lights are turned off except for the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the first decorative section 3211 on the upper rear of the body 3210, where five 7-segment display sections are lined up on the left and right, and the performance display device 1600 executes a button operation promotion performance in which a display (for example, "Press the button!") is displayed to prompt the pressing operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300, and the illumination of multiple LEDs 320a mounted on the performance operation section outer decorative board 320 of the performance operation unit 300, multiple LEDs 355a mounted on the annular outer button decorative board 355, and LED 364a on the inner button decorative board 364 is controlled.

Then, at timing t2, the player presses the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, or when the button valid period (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed without the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 being pressed (timing t2), the display area of the effect display device 1600 is divided into first display area a to fifth display area e, and a rainbow effect display mode is displayed in which first display area a to fifth display area e are each displayed in a different display color. The LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 are divided into the above-mentioned frame lighting group A to frame lighting group F, and the LEDs included in each group of frame lighting group A to frame lighting group F are made to emit light in a different light color for each group. The LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 are divided into the above-mentioned first board lighting group to sixth board lighting group, and the LEDs included in each group are made to emit light in a different light color for each group.

In addition, as the variable time elapses, the display colors of the first display area a to the fifth display area e of the performance display device 1600, the light emission colors of each of the frame light emission groups A to F, and the light emission colors of each of the first board light emission group to the sixth board light emission group are changed every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds) (timing t2 to t100).

In this example, when the player presses the pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300 at timing t2, the button operation prompt effect being executed by the effect display device 1600 (in this example, the effect displaying "Press the button!") is terminated, the varying decorative pattern is reduced in size and displayed in the upper right corner of the effect display device 1600, and "white" is displayed in the first display area a of the effect display device 1600, "yellow" in the second display area b, "green" in the third display area c, "blue" in the fourth display area d, and "purple" in the fifth display area e. Every predetermined period (e.g., 0.1 seconds), the display area displaying "white" is changed to "yellow," the display area displaying "yellow" is changed to "green," the display area displaying "green" is changed to "blue," the display area displaying "blue" is changed to "purple," the display area displaying "purple" is changed to "red," and the display area displaying "red" is changed to "white."

In addition, when the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed by the player, the first board lighting group provided on the game board 5 is illuminated in "white," the second board lighting group in "yellow," the third board lighting group in "green," the fourth board lighting group in "blue," the fifth board lighting group in "purple," and the sixth board lighting group in "red," and every predetermined period (e.g., 0.1 seconds), the light color of the LEDs belonging to the group illuminating in "white" is changed to "yellow," the light color of the LEDs belonging to the group illuminating in "yellow" is changed to "green," the light color of the LEDs belonging to the group illuminating in "green" is changed to "blue," the light color of the LEDs belonging to the group illuminating in "blue" is changed to "purple," the light color of the LEDs belonging to the group illuminating in "purple" is changed to "red," and the light color of the LEDs belonging to the group illuminating in "red" is changed to "white."

Similarly, when the player presses the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, frame lighting group A on the door frame 3 is illuminated in "white," frame lighting group B in "yellow," frame lighting group C in "green," frame lighting group D in "blue," frame lighting group E in "purple," and frame lighting group F in "red." Every predetermined period (e.g., 0.1 seconds), the light color of the LEDs belonging to the group emitting "white" light is changed to "yellow," the light color of the LEDs belonging to the group emitting "yellow" light is changed to "green," the light color of the LEDs belonging to the group emitting "green" light is changed to "blue," the light color of the LEDs belonging to the group emitting "blue" light is changed to "purple," the light color of the LEDs belonging to the group emitting "purple" light is changed to "red," and the light color of the LEDs belonging to the group emitting "red" light is changed to "white."

In this way, by controlling the light emission colors of the LEDs on the various decorative boards on the door frame 3 and game board 5 to switch between multiple light emission colors in a short unit of light emission time, it becomes possible to visually perceive the colors of the rainbow as being emitted, and to create an impactful light emission effect. Furthermore, by controlling the display of the effect display device 1600, the LEDs on the various decorative boards on the game board 5, and the LEDs on the various decorative boards on the door frame 3 in conjunction with each other, it is possible to display multiple colors on the effect display device 1600, or to make the LEDs on the various decorative boards on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 emit multiple colors, and by switching the display and light emission colors in an even shorter time, it is possible to create an effect with more impact than usual.

In this example, the display colors of the first display area a to the fifth display area e of the effect display device 1600, the light emission colors of the LEDs belonging to frame light emission groups A to F provided on the door frame 3, and the light emission colors of the LEDs belonging to the first board light emission groups to the sixth board light emission groups provided on the game board 5 are changed regularly in a predetermined order for each display area or group. However, the display colors and light emission colors may be changed irregularly for any combination of one or more (or all) of the display colors of the first display area a to the fifth display area e of the effect display device 1600, the light emission colors of the LEDs belonging to frame light emission groups A to F provided on the door frame 3, and the light emission colors of the LEDs belonging to the first board light emission groups to the sixth board light emission groups provided on the game board 5, and the remaining colors may be changed regularly.

Furthermore, the display colors of the first display area a to the fifth display area e of the performance display device 1600, the light-emitting colors of the LEDs belonging to frame lighting groups A to F, and the light-emitting colors of the LEDs belonging to the first board lighting group to the sixth board lighting group are not limited to being changed in the same order. Any combination of one or more (or all) of the display colors of the first display area a to the fifth display area e of the performance display device 1600, the light-emitting colors of the LEDs belonging to frame lighting groups A to F, and the light-emitting colors of the LEDs belonging to the first board lighting group to the sixth board lighting group may be changed in a different order (for example, the light-emitting colors of the LEDs belonging to frame lighting groups A to F may be changed in the order of "white → yellow → green → blue → purple → red → white → yellow → ...", and the light-emitting colors of the LEDs belonging to the first board lighting group to the sixth board lighting group may be changed in the order of "red → purple → blue → green → yellow → white → red → purple → ...").

Furthermore, any combination of one or more (or all) of the display colors of the first display area a to fifth display area e of the performance display device 1600, the light emission colors of the LEDs belonging to frame light emission groups A to F, and the light emission colors of the LEDs belonging to the first board light emission group to the sixth board light emission group may be a combination of multiple colors in which at least some of the colors are different (for example, the LEDs belonging to frame light emission groups A to F may be controlled to emit light in one of the light emission colors "white," "yellow," "green," "blue," "purple," or "red," and the LEDs belonging to the first board light emission group to the sixth board light emission group may be controlled to emit light in one of the light emission colors "white," "orange," "yellow-green," "blue," "pink," or "red").

Furthermore, the display colors of the first display area a to the fifth display area e of the effect display device 1600, the light emission colors of the LEDs belonging to frame light emission groups A to F provided on the door frame 3, and the light emission colors of the LEDs belonging to the first board light emission groups to the sixth board light emission groups provided on the game board 5 are not limited to being changed at the same time (the timing of changing the colors is synchronized). Instead, any combination of one or more of the following (or all of them) may be changed at the same time (for example, after 1 second), with the remaining changes being made at different times (for example, every 1.5 seconds).

Furthermore, the period (predetermined period) until the display color of the first display area a to fifth display area e of the effect display device 1600, the light emission color of the LEDs belonging to frame light emission groups A to F provided on the door frame 3, and the light emission color of the LEDs belonging to the first board light emission group to the sixth board light emission group provided on the game board 5 is changed does not have to be constant at all times, and some or all of the period may be made different. For example, the display color and light emission color may be changed every second at odd timings (t1, t3, t5, t7, t9, t11, t99) among timings t2 to t100, and every two seconds at even timings (t2, t4, t6, t8, t10, t98, t100).

In this example, prior to the rainbow effect, the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the first upper back decorative part 3211, where the five 7-segment display parts of the upper back decorative body 3210 are lined up on the left and right, are controlled to illuminate. Specifically, as shown in Figure 286, the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variation pattern command from the main control board 1310 and controls the first upper back decorative part 3211, where the five 7-segment display parts of the upper back decorative body 3210 are lined up on the left and right, to an off state during the period from timing t0 to timing t1, when the variation effect, such as the display of varying decorative patterns, is started on the effect display device 1600, until the button promotion effect is executed; and when the button promotion effect is executed at timing t1, the LEDs that illuminate the first upper back decorative part 3211, where the five 7-segment display parts of the upper back decorative body 3210 are lined up on the left and right, are controlled to illuminate in a light emission pattern corresponding to the rainbow effect. In this example, when the button operation prompt performance begins (timing t1 to timing t2), the five 7-segment display units on the rear upper first decorative unit 3211 are controlled to emit red light, and the word "Hot!" is repeatedly displayed from right to left on the five 7-segment display units on the rear upper first decorative unit 3211.

Furthermore, when the button operation prompt effect is being executed and the player presses the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, or the button valid period (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed without the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 being pressed, the button operation prompt effect ends, and then the rainbow effect begins (timing t2), the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 maintain their red luminous color without changing their luminous color, and the words "Rainbow Chance!" are repeatedly displayed from right to left on the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 until the rainbow effect ends (timing t2 to timing t100). As described above, in this example, the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 are controlled to emit red light. Furthermore, in the rainbow effect, the LEDs belonging to frame lighting groups A to F and the LEDs belonging to board lighting groups 1 to 6 are controlled to emit the same red light as the five 7-segment display units on the rear upper first decorative portion 3211. Therefore, although the light color of the five 7-segment display units on the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 is not changed, the player can recognize that light emission control related to the rainbow effect is being performed.

In addition, LEDs (decorative boards on which LEDs are mounted) belonging to frame lighting groups A to F, which are provided on the door frame 3, and LEDs (decorative boards on which LEDs are mounted) belonging to board lighting groups 1 to 6, which are provided on the game board 5, are provided around the rear upper first decorative part 3211, where the five 7-segment display parts of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are lined up on the left and right. When the button operation promotion effect ends, it gives the impression that the luminous decoration is spreading around the five 7-segment display parts of the rear upper first decorative part 3211, which are lit up in red, thereby enhancing the effect and increasing interest in the game.

In this example, even after the rainbow effect ends (timing t100 to timing t101), the light emission control of the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper first decorative unit 3211 continues without changing the light emission color. Specifically, after the rainbow effect ends (timing t100), for example, the light emission control is performed so that the word "Reach!" repeatedly flows from right to left on the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper first decorative unit 3211 in response to the occurrence of a reach decorative pattern. Alternatively, the light emission control is performed so that the word "Super Hot!" repeatedly flows from right to left on the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper first decorative unit 3211 during the reach decorative pattern reach effect. Furthermore, in this example, the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper first decorative unit 3211 are controlled to an off state upon the cessation of the variable display of the decorative pattern. This allows the player to recognize that the variable display has ended. Furthermore, after the varying display of the decorative patterns has stopped, the five 7-segment display units of the back-upper first decorative unit 3211 may be controlled to an off state when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, in which case the moving display of letters on the five 7-segment display units of the back-upper first decorative unit 3211 may be stopped when the varying display of the decorative patterns has stopped. In this case too, the player can recognize that the varying performance has ended when the moving display of letters on the five 7-segment display units of the back-upper first decorative unit 3211 has stopped.

In this way, the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper first decorative unit 3211 are controlled to illuminate prior to the rainbow effect, and the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper first decorative unit 3211 continue to be controlled to illuminate even after the rainbow effect has ended. Therefore, the control of illumination of the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper first decorative unit 3211 that is executed in advance can increase anticipation for the start of the rainbow effect, and the control of illumination of the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper first decorative unit 3211 can increase anticipation for a jackpot even after the rainbow effect has ended.

In addition, the light emission control of the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper first decorative unit 3211 must be started at least prior to the rainbow effect and continue to be executed even after the rainbow effect has ended, and may be started at any time between timing t0 when the changing display of the decorative pattern begins and timing t2 when the rainbow effect begins (including when light emission control is started at timing t0), or may be ended at any time between timing t100 when the rainbow effect ends and timing t101 when the changing display of the decorative pattern stops (including when light emission control is stopped at timing t101). Furthermore, even if the display of the decorative patterns has stopped, if the display of the decorative patterns starts again before the specified period has elapsed, the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper first decorative unit 3211 may not be controlled to an off state. In this case, when the display of the decorative patterns has stopped, the moving display of characters on the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper first decorative unit 3211 may be stopped (timing t101), and when the display of the decorative patterns starts, the characters displayed on the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper first decorative unit 3211 may be updated and the moving display of the characters may be resumed from right to left on the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper first decorative unit 3211 (timing t0). Even in this case, the presence or absence of the moving display of the decorative patterns can be determined by the presence or absence of the moving display of characters on the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper first decorative unit 3211.

In addition, the display modes on the first upper rear decorative section 3211 during the execution of the rainbow effect are not limited to those described above. For example, the display mode of the changing pattern may be displayed as a supplement to the decorative pattern changing effect being executed on the effect display device 1600, which becomes difficult to see due to the execution of the rainbow effect, or multiple LEDs may be controlled to flash in a predetermined lighting pattern to derive a mode corresponding to the special lottery result after the execution of the rainbow effect (for example, when the decorative pattern is displayed stationary). Alternatively, the number of lit LEDs may be changed when a predetermined increase or decrease condition is met, such as when the player operates the pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300 during the execution of the changing effect. This makes it possible to avoid anxiety that the changing decorative pattern display is not being executed due to the execution of the rainbow effect, or that the special lottery result will not be derived. Furthermore, the display of the decorative pattern on the effect display device 1600 may be hidden during the execution of the rainbow effect, which also helps to avoid the above-mentioned anxiety.

In addition, in the above example, the rainbow effect is initiated when the button operation prompt effect ends (when the player presses the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 while the button operation prompt effect is being executed, or when the button valid period (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed without the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 being pressed), but the rainbow effect may also be initiated when a specified execution condition is met, without the execution of the button operation prompt effect. For example, the rainbow effect may be initiated when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, or when a non-variable effect period in which no variable effect is executed after the variable effect has ended has reached a predetermined period of time.

In addition, in this example, when the rainbow effect ends, decorative symbols are displayed in a reach state with a high probability (including symbols that do not result in a reach state (so-called false symbols)) (timing t100). Then, when the rainbow effect ends, the rainbow effect display mode of the effect display device 1600 is turned off to execute the reach effect, and light emission control of the rainbow effect of the LEDs belonging to the 1st board light-emitting group through the 6th board light-emitting group provided on the game board 5 and the LEDs belonging to the frame light-emitting groups A through F provided on the door frame 3 is terminated, and light emission control is performed in a light-emitting mode corresponding to the reach effect displayed on the effect display device 1600.

In this example, a rainbow effect is displayed as a reach preview during the period from when the decorative symbol changes until the reach state is displayed. It should be noted that the rainbow effect may be displayed at a predetermined rate even when the decorative symbol does not reach (this may be a case where the decorative symbol does not reach and results in a jackpot, or a case where the decorative symbol does not reach and results in a miss), or when the decorative symbol reaches and does not result in a jackpot, or it may be displayed only when a jackpot is guaranteed (as a jackpot confirmation effect). The timing of the rainbow effect is also not limited to reach previews; it may be displayed as a reach preview during the period from when the decorative symbol reaches and until the decorative symbol is displayed stationary, or it may be displayed as a pre-read preview or other effect before the decorative symbol starts to change, or it may be displayed regardless of the decorative symbol change (for example, as a customer waiting demo effect when the decorative symbol change display does not start for a predetermined period of time).

As mentioned above, the rainbow effect is executed when there is a high probability of a jackpot, and is an important effect that increases the player's expectations. Therefore, in this example, the LED mounting surface of the decorative board on which the LEDs are mounted is designed to have features that make the color of the LEDs, which are controlled to emit light during the rainbow effect, more vivid. Specifically, the game board 5 is provided with a plurality of decorative boards each mounting LEDs that are controlled to emit light in a rainbow effect, namely, a back-front upper left decorative board 3129 for illuminating and decorating the back-front upper left logo decoration 3122, a back-front left decorative board 3128 for illuminating and decorating the back-front left logo decoration 3121, the back-front upper left logo decoration 3122, and the back-front left sub-decorative board 3123, a back-front lower logo decoration board 3173 for illuminating and decorating the back-front lower logo decoration 3167, a back-front lower middle decorative board 3168 for illuminating and decorating the back-front lower middle decoration 3161, a back-front lower left inner decorative board 3169 for illuminating and decorating the back-front lower left inner decoration 3163, and a back-front lower left outer decoration board 3164 for illuminating and decorating the back-front lower left outer decoration 3165. The back front lower left outer decorative substrate 3170, the back front lower right inner decorative substrate 3171 for illuminating and decorating the back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, the back front lower right outer decorative substrate 3172 for illuminating and decorating the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166, the back front lower right decorative substrate 3152 for illuminating and decorating the back front right logo decoration part 3141, and the back front upper right decorative substrate 3151 for illuminating and decorating the back front upper right logo decoration part 3142 have their surfaces coated with a white solder resist (protective material), and letters and symbols to avoid confusion with the mounted electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative substrates are screen printed using ink of a bright and saturated color (e.g., yellow). In other words, the surfaces of the multiple decorative boards mounted on the game board 5 and carrying LEDs that are controlled to emit light in a rainbow effect are coated with a white solder resist (protective material), which is the color with the highest reflective efficiency, and letters and symbols to prevent confusion between the mounted LEDs and other electronic components and other decorative boards are screen-printed using ink in a bright, saturated color (for example, yellow).

In addition, the door frame 3 is provided with multiple decorative boards that implement LEDs that are controlled to emit light in a rainbow color effect, namely, the door frame top central decorative board 455 of the door frame top unit 450, the door frame top left decorative board 456, the door frame top right decorative board 457, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 of the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame left side lower decorative board 423 of the door frame left side unit 420, the dish left decorative board 273 provided behind the dish left decorative lens 272, and the door frame right side unit The surfaces of the lower right door frame decorative board 433 of the unit 430, the right dish decorative board 278 provided behind the right dish decorative lens 277, and the upper right door frame decorative board 432 of the right door frame unit 430 are coated with white solder resist (protective material), and letters and symbols to avoid confusion with the mounted electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative boards are screen-printed using ink of a high brightness and saturation (e.g., yellow). In other words, the surfaces of the multiple decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and mounting LEDs controlled to emit rainbow-colored light are coated with white solder resist (protective material), which is the color with the highest reflective efficiency, and letters and symbols to avoid confusion with the mounted electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative boards are screen-printed using ink of a high brightness and saturation (e.g., yellow).

The upper rear first decorative board (not shown), which is equipped with LEDs to illuminate and decorate the upper rear first decorative part 3211, where the five 7-segment display units of the upper rear movable decorative body 3210 are arranged side by side, is also coated with a white solder resist (protective material) on its surface, and letters and symbols to avoid confusion with the mounted electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative boards are screen-printed using ink of a high brightness and saturation (e.g., yellow). However, while full-color LEDs are mounted on the multiple decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and door frame 3 and which are equipped with LEDs that are controlled to emit light in a rainbow effect, the upper rear first decorative board is equipped with LEDs that emit a single color (red in this example). Therefore, even when a rainbow effect is executed by lighting up the LEDs mounted on the circuit boards on the game board 5 or door frame 3, the five 7-segment display units on the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 do not change the luminous color, and only execute an effect in which letters, numbers, pictures, etc. are displayed on the five 7-segment display units in the same luminous color (red in this example). In other words, even when a rainbow effect is executed on the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 that display letters, numbers, pictures, etc., by not changing the luminous color, the displayed letters, numbers, pictures, etc. are displayed in a manner that is easy for players to see, thereby preventing incorrect information from being conveyed to players.

In this way, in this example, the LED mounting surface of the decorative board on which the LEDs are mounted is coated with a white solder resist (protective material) to increase reflection efficiency, so even when multiple full-color LEDs are used to emit a wide variety of colors, all light can be reflected uniformly to produce vivid colors.The back front upper left logo decoration 3122, back front left logo decoration 3121, back front upper left logo decoration 3122, back front left sub-decoration 3123, back front lower logo decoration 3167, back front lower middle decoration 3161, and back front lower left inner decoration 3163 provided on the game board 5 are The rear front lower left outer decorative element 3164, the rear front lower right inner decorative element 3165, the rear front lower right outer decorative element 3166, the rear front right logo decorative element 3141, and the rear front upper right logo decorative element 3142 can each be made to glow more brightly, and the door frame top unit 450, door frame left side unit 420, door frame left side unit 420, dish left decorative lens 272, door frame right side unit 430, dish right decorative lens 277, and door frame right side unit 430, which are installed on the door frame 3, can each be made to glow more brightly and vividly (clearly), enhancing the presentation effect. Furthermore, the five 7-segment display elements of the rear upper first decorative element 3211, which only glows in a single color (red in this example), can also be made to glow more brightly and vividly, enhancing the presentation effect.

In addition, by screen-printing letters and symbols to avoid confusion with mounted electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative boards using inks of high brightness and saturation (e.g., yellow), it is possible to approximate the reflection efficiency of the white solder resist (protective material) and the screen-printed letters and symbols, thereby achieving a nearly uniform reflection efficiency on the board surface. This allows all light to be reflected uniformly, even when multiple full-color LEDs are used to emit a wide variety of colors, reducing uneven illumination in the illuminated decoration and enhancing the presentation effect. Furthermore, by reducing the contrast between the white solder resist (protective material) and the screen-printed letters and symbols, the screen-printed letters and symbols on the surface of the decorative board are less noticeable when viewed through the lens covering the decorative board, regardless of whether the LEDs are emitting light. This prevents players from viewing information unrelated to the game and losing interest in the game when they are forced to look directly at the LED-mounted surface of these decorative boards. Furthermore, with conventional decorative substrates where letters and symbols are applied by screen printing using inks of low brightness and saturation (dark colors), such as black, even if the letters and symbols are not clearly visible when viewed through the lens covering the decorative substrate, the lens itself may appear dark, which can result in a poor appearance. However, by screen printing letters and symbols using inks of high brightness and saturation, the lens appears brighter, and the appearance is not impaired. It is desirable to use yellow, which has the closest reflection efficiency to white, as a color with high brightness and saturation, but any color other than low brightness and saturation colors (dark colors such as black and brown), such as yellow-green or light blue, can also achieve the above-mentioned effects.

In the above example, all of the multiple decorative boards mounted with LEDs whose light emission is controlled to produce a rainbow effect are coated on their surfaces with a white solder resist (protective material), but this is not limited to this. Some of the multiple decorative boards mounted with LEDs whose light emission is controlled to produce a rainbow effect may be coated on their surfaces with a solder resist (protective material) other than white (for example, green or black), or some or all of the multiple decorative boards mounted with LEDs whose light emission is controlled to produce a rainbow effect may be coated with a white solder resist (protective material) only on the surfaces where the LEDs are mounted, and the back surfaces where the LEDs are not mounted may be coated with a solder resist (protective material) other than white (for example, green or black).

In addition, letters and symbols to avoid confusion with the mounted LEDs and other electronic components and other decorative boards are not limited to being applied by screen printing to the LED mounting surface using ink of a high brightness and saturation color (e.g., yellow). For some of the multiple decorative boards that mount LEDs whose light emission is controlled in a rainbow effect, they may be applied by screen printing to the LED mounting surface using ink of a low brightness and saturation color (e.g., black). For all or some of the multiple decorative boards that mount LEDs whose light emission is controlled in a rainbow effect, letters and symbols to avoid confusion with the mounted LEDs and other electronic components and other decorative boards may be formed as foil-cut letters (i.e., cut-out letters formed by creating letters with a copper foil wiring pattern on the layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed and then cutting out the copper foil around them), and the surface of these foil-cut letters may be coated with white solder resist (protective material) that is applied to the LED mounting surface. For some of the multiple decorative boards that mount LEDs whose light emission is controlled in a rainbow effect, they may be coated with two coats of white solder resist. The letters may be formed as white resist cut-out letters using solder resist (after coating the entire LED mounting surface with white solder resist (first layer), the letters and symbols to avoid confusion with the mounted electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative boards, and then the entire area excluding these is coated again with white solder resist (second layer), so that the masked area, i.e., the letters and symbols, are formed as white resist cut-out letters), or for all or some of the multiple decorative boards mounting LEDs that are controlled to emit light in a rainbow effect, the letters and symbols may be formed by means other than screen printing using ink of a high brightness and saturation color (e.g., yellow) on the surface on which the LEDs are mounted, for example, by screen printing using ink of a predetermined color (not only high brightness and saturation colors but also colors with low brightness and saturation) on the back side on which the LEDs are not mounted, or by forming them as foil cut-out letters, or by forming them as white resist cut-out letters using two coats of white resist, etc., in order to avoid confusion with the mounted electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative boards. Even in these cases, it is possible to prevent a decrease in reflection efficiency on the surface on which the LEDs are mounted, and by making the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface approximately uniform, it is possible to achieve uniform light emission, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

The LEDs mounted on the decorative board are electronic components whose packaging is white or close to white (e.g., ivory, beige, cream), and only packaged LEDs are mounted on the LED mounting surface of these decorative boards; no other electronic components are mounted. In this way, the pachinko machine 1 in this example is able to prevent a decrease in reflection efficiency due to the LED packaging, thereby achieving uniform light emission on the LED mounting surface. Furthermore, in addition to connectors for connecting electrical wiring to the decorative board, one or more electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and circuits for controlling the light emission of multiple LEDs (e.g., constant current drive circuits) may be mounted on the non-LED mounting surface. The connector is an electronic component whose housing is white or a color close to white (e.g., ivory, beige, or cream), the constant current drive circuit is an electronic component that is a surface-mounted (SMD) LED driver IC housed in an IC package that may be black as an integrated circuit, the resistor is a surface-mounted (SMD) electronic component (chip component, SMD (Surface Mount Device)) that is black, blue, or white, etc., and the capacitor is a surface-mounted (SMD) electronic component that is black, brown, gray, or white, etc. Note that in the decorative board described above, electronic components with low brightness or saturation, such as black, brown, or gray, are only required to be mounted on the non-LED mounting surface without being mounted on the LED mounting surface, while electronic components with high brightness or saturation, such as white or a color close to white (e.g., ivory, beige, or cream), may be mounted on the LED mounting surface. This makes the electronic components mounted on the surface of the decorative board less noticeable when viewed through the lens covering the board, and it also prevents a decrease in the reflection efficiency of the LED mounting surface, making the reflection efficiency approximately uniform, thereby achieving highly efficient, uniform light emission and enhancing the presentation effect.

In this example, the light intensity adjustment button 228 is also operated when a rainbow effect is executed as a variable effect, and the light intensity of the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and game board 5 can be changed (adjusted) at the timing when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated. Specifically, when one of the two light intensity adjustment buttons 228 with the "+" symbol is pressed, the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and game board 5 immediately become brighter (increase in light intensity), and when the button with the "-" symbol is pressed, the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and game board 5 immediately become dimmer (decrease in light intensity).

As shown in Figure 286, when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated while a variable effect that produces a rainbow effect is being performed, the light intensity of the LEDs that produce the rainbow effect lighting decoration (also called rainbow light emission) of the multiple LEDs in the 1st board lighting group to the 6th board lighting group and the multiple LEDs in frame lighting group A to frame lighting group F is immediately changed regardless of whether the LEDs are in an off state or not, and the light emission of the multiple LEDs in the 1st board lighting group to the 6th board lighting group and the multiple LEDs in frame lighting group A to frame lighting group F is controlled with the changed light intensity. In this example, while the button operation promotion effect is being executed, the multiple LEDs of the first board light-emitting group to the sixth board light-emitting group, the multiple LEDs of the frame light-emitting groups A to C, and the multiple LEDs of the frame light-emitting groups E to F are controlled to be in an off state, but the multiple LEDs of the frame light-emitting group D (the multiple LEDs 320a mounted on the outer peripheral decorative board 320 of the effect operation unit 300, the multiple LEDs 355a mounted on the annular outer button decorative board 355, and the LED 364a of the middle button decorative board 364) are kept in an on state, and when the player operates the light intensity adjustment button 228, the multiple LEDs of the outer peripheral decorative board 320 of the effect operation unit 300 are kept in an on state. The multiple LEDs 320a mounted on 320, the multiple LEDs 355a mounted on the annular outer button decorative board 355, and the LEDs 364a on the inner button decorative board 364 are immediately controlled to emit light at the changed light intensity, so it is possible to adjust the light intensity of all the LEDs in the first board lighting group to the sixth board lighting group and the multiple LEDs in the frame lighting group A to frame lighting group F while observing changes in the light intensity of the multiple LEDs 320a mounted on the outer button decorative board 320 of the performance operation unit 300, the multiple LEDs 355a mounted on the annular outer button decorative board 355, and the LEDs 364a on the inner button decorative board 364.

On the other hand, for the LEDs mounted on the rear upper first decorative board provided on the game board 5, which is provided on the rear upper first decorative part 3211 where the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are lined up on the left and right, and which do not provide rainbow color effect illumination decoration, the light intensity will not be changed (adjusted) even if the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated during the execution of the variable effect that produces the rainbow color effect (the light intensity is fixed). In this way, during the execution of the variable effect that executes the rainbow effect, the light intensity (brightness) of the LEDs mounted on the rear upper first decorative board provided on the rear upper first decorative part 3211 where the five 7-segment display parts of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are lined up on the left and right cannot be changed (adjusted), and the light intensity (brightness) remains constant regardless of whether the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated or not.Therefore, it can be used as a standard when changing the light intensity of the multiple LEDs in the 1st board lighting group to the 6th board lighting group and the multiple LEDs in the frame lighting group A to frame lighting group F, and the difference between the brightness of these LEDs and the brightness of the LEDs mounted on the rear upper first decorative board provided on the rear upper first decorative part 3211 becomes clear, making it easy to adjust the brightness to the player's preference. Furthermore, the LEDs mounted on the rear upper first decorative board provided on the rear upper first decorative part 3211 where the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are lined up on the left and right may be made so that the light intensity cannot be changed (adjusted) at any time, even when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated, regardless of whether or not a variable effect that produces a rainbow effect is being performed.

In addition, in this example, the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 is provided with a rear upper first decorative board on which LEDs whose light intensity (brightness) cannot be adjusted and which do not produce rainbow-colored illumination are mounted. Around the rear upper first decorative board 3211 on which five 7-segment displays are lined up on the left and right, LEDs (decorative boards on which LEDs are mounted) belonging to frame lighting groups A to F mounted on the door frame 3 and LEDs (decorative boards on which LEDs are mounted) belonging to board lighting groups 1 to 6 mounted on the game board 5 are provided, with adjustable light intensity (brightness). In this way, the LEDs that serve as the basis for adjusting the light intensity (brightness) and the LEDs that change the light intensity (brightness) are positioned close to each other, making it easy to compare the light intensity (brightness) and adjust the light intensity (brightness) to the player's preference.

As mentioned above, the pachinko machine 1 in this example executes the rainbow effect when there is a high probability of a jackpot, but there are situations in which the rainbow effect cannot be executed properly depending on the state of the gaming machine. In such cases, not only is it impossible to expect the excitement-boosting effect of the rainbow effect to be lost, but it may actually decrease interest in the game.

For example, if an abnormality occurs that makes it difficult for the effect display device 1600 to display the rainbow effect display mode (such as an abnormality where the LEDs (which may be some or all) of the backlight of the effect display device 1600 do not emit light, or an abnormality where the display is disrupted due to noise, etc.), or if an abnormality occurs that makes it difficult to control the light emission of the rainbow effect from the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 or game board 5 (such as an abnormality where the LEDs (which may be some or all) of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 or game board 5 do not emit light, or an abnormality where the light emission mode is disrupted due to noise, etc.), the rainbow effect cannot be achieved in the complete form as designed using the display by the effect display device 1600 and the light emission by the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 or game board 5, and an incomplete rainbow effect will be executed, with some of the display by the effect display device 1600 and the light emission by the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 or game board 5 missing.

When this kind of incomplete rainbow effect is executed, not only is it impossible to hope for the exciting effect that the original rainbow effect would have, but it could also lead to the player perceiving that an effect other than the rainbow effect is being executed, which could lead to misunderstanding. In this example, we have done everything possible to prevent such misunderstandings from occurring to the player. This will be explained with reference to Figure 287.

In this example, in the pachinko machine 1, if an abnormal state occurs at timing t6 while a rainbow effect is being executed, in which one of the following occurs: an abnormality that makes it difficult to display the rainbow effect display mode on the effect display device 1600; an abnormality that makes it difficult to control the rainbow effect light emission of the LEDs on the various decorative boards mounted on the door frame 3; or an abnormality that makes it difficult to control the rainbow effect light emission of the LEDs on the various decorative boards mounted on the game board 5, the rainbow effect light emission decoration using the multiple LEDs in the 1st board light-emitting group through the 6th board light-emitting group mounted on the game board 5 and the multiple LEDs in frame light-emitting groups A through F mounted on the door frame 3 is terminated, the multiple LEDs in the 1st board light-emitting group through the 6th board light-emitting group are controlled to an off state, and the multiple LEDs in frame light-emitting groups A through F are controlled to an abnormality alert light-emitting mode (in this example, a mode in which they flash red at maximum brightness (light amount)) to alert the occurrence of an abnormality.

As shown in FIG. 287, in the event of an abnormal state in which any of the following occurs at any time between timing t0 and timing t2 before the start of the rainbow effect in the variable effect that executes the rainbow effect: an abnormality that makes it difficult to display the rainbow effect display mode on the effect display device 1600; an abnormality that makes it difficult to control the rainbow effect light emission of the LEDs on the various decorative boards attached to the door frame 3; or an abnormality that makes it difficult to control the rainbow effect light emission of the LEDs on the various decorative boards attached to the game board 5, even at timing t2 when the rainbow effect would normally start, the rainbow effect light emission decoration using the multiple LEDs in the first board light emission group through the sixth board light emission group attached to the game board 5 and the multiple LEDs in frame light emission group A through frame light emission group F attached to the door frame 3 will not begin, and the multiple LEDs in the first board light emission group through the sixth board light emission group will be controlled to an off state, and the multiple LEDs in frame light emission group A through frame light emission group F will be controlled to emit an abnormality alert light emission mode (in this example, a mode in which they flash red at maximum brightness (light amount)) to alert the occurrence of an abnormality.

Furthermore, if the above-mentioned abnormality occurs at timing t6 during the execution of a variable performance that executes a rainbow-colored effect, the display of the rainbow-colored effect display mode on the performance display device 1600 will disappear, and a display will be displayed to notify the user that the abnormality has occurred. Similarly, if the above-mentioned abnormality occurs at any timing between timing t0 and timing t2 before the start of the rainbow-colored effect in the variable performance that executes a rainbow-colored effect, a display will be displayed to notify the user that the abnormality has occurred without starting to display the rainbow-colored effect display mode on the performance display device 1600. Note that it is also possible to not execute some of the rainbow-colored effect display modes, and even in this case, the display notifying the user that an abnormality has occurred will allow the user to recognize that an abnormality has occurred.

In this way, in this example, the pachinko machine 1 is controlled to stop or not start the rainbow effect if it cannot be achieved in the complete form as designed using the display by the effect display device 1600 and the illumination by the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and game board 5. This makes it possible to prevent the rainbow effect from being executed in an incomplete form, thereby preventing players from being misled.

In addition, even if an abnormal condition occurs during the execution of a variable effect that produces a rainbow effect, the LEDs mounted on the rear upper first decorative board provided on the rear upper first decorative part 3211, where the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are lined up left and right, may continue to be controlled to emit light corresponding to the variable effect that produces the rainbow effect, without being controlled to an off state or an abnormality notification light mode. In this case, even if the occurrence of an abnormal condition prevents the rainbow effect light-emitting decoration produced by the multiple LEDs of the 1st board light-emitting group to the 6th board light-emitting group provided on the game board 5 and the multiple LEDs of the frame light-emitting group A to the frame light-emitting group F provided on the door frame 3 from ending or starting, or even if the multiple LEDs of the frame light-emitting group A to the frame light-emitting group F are controlled to emit light in an abnormality notification light mode, the player can be made to recognize that the variable effect is continuing, and the player will not mistakenly believe that the variable effect has ended.

In addition, the first decorative part 3211 on the rear upper back may be turned off or not depending on the type of abnormal condition (degree of urgency). For example, an error that has little impact on the game or the execution of the rainbow effect (a minor error: when the opening of the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4 is detected (when the opening of the door frame 3 makes it difficult to see the light emitted by the LEDs on the various decorative boards attached to the door frame 3)), or when a vibration sensor (not shown) detects vibration of the game board 5 for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) (when an action such as hitting the pachinko machine 1 is performed) may be turned off. When it is detected that the pachinko machine 1 is full of game balls, when it is detected that the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 and the display of the performance display device 1600 are blurred and difficult to see due to the vibration of the pachinko machine 1, when a detection signal is input from the full-tank detection sensor 154 (when it is detected that the lower tray 202 is full of game balls), when a detection signal is input from the ball-out detection sensor 574 (when it is detected that there are no game balls in the guide passage 570a), etc., it is possible that cheating is occurring. For errors with a low probability of occurring, the LEDs mounted on the upper back first decorative board provided on the upper back first decorative part 3211 are controlled to light up without being turned off. On the other hand, for errors with a serious impact on the game or the execution of the rainbow effect (serious errors: errors that are likely to indicate cheating, such as when radio wave interference is detected (when electromagnetic waves or the like cause noise in the illumination of the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 or game board 5, or when noise is present in the display on the effect display device 1600), when magnetic interference is detected, when a detection signal is input from the second start hole sensor 2401 when the second start hole 2004 is not open, or when a detection signal is input from the large prize hole sensor 2402 when the game is not in a jackpot or small prize game state), the upper back first decorative part 3211 is controlled to light off, thereby suspending or ending the variable effect even while it is being executed. This allows the control state of the upper back first decorative part 3211 to be changed depending on the severity of the error, making it possible to determine whether an abnormality has occurred.

In addition, whether or not the rainbow effect display mode on the effect display device 1600 is erased may be varied depending on the type of abnormal condition (degree of urgency). For example, for errors that have a small impact on the execution of the above-mentioned games or rainbow effects, the rainbow effect display mode on the effect display device 1600 may not be erased, and a warning display (e.g., "Door Open") may be displayed that partially overlaps the rainbow effect display mode. On the other hand, for errors that have a significant impact on the execution of the above-mentioned games or rainbow effects, the rainbow effect display mode on the effect display device 1600 may be erased, and only a warning display (e.g., "Illegal Winning Occurred!") may be displayed, thereby suspending or terminating the display of the rainbow effect (rainbow effect display mode) even while the rainbow effect is being executed. This allows the display mode of the effect display device 1600 to be varied depending on the severity of the error, making it possible to determine whether an abnormality has occurred. Furthermore, when an error that has a significant impact on the execution of the above-mentioned game or rainbow effects is controlled to turn off the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 and to erase the display of the rainbow effect display mode on the effect display device 1600, the effect display of the rainbow effect display mode, etc. on the effect display device 1600 may be terminated a predetermined period later than the timing of turning off the rear upper first decorative portion 3211. In this case, sudden changes in the display content on the effect display device 1600 can be prevented, and the display content can be changed while the impression of the rainbow effect display mode, etc., remains.

Furthermore, when an abnormal state occurs, depending on the type of abnormal state (degree of urgency), any one or any combination of two or more (including all) of the following may be executed: a display on the effect display device 1600 notifying that an abnormal state has occurred; a notification by controlling the LED on the door frame 3 to emit light in an error mode; and a notification by audio output that an abnormal state has occurred. For example, when a minor error that has little impact on gameplay occurs, any one or any combination of two of the following may be executed: a display on the effect display device 1600 notifying that an abnormal state has occurred; a notification by controlling the LED on the door frame 3 to emit light in an error mode; and a notification by audio output that an abnormal state has occurred. Furthermore, when a serious error that has a serious impact on gameplay occurs, all of the following may be executed: a display on the effect display device 1600 notifying that an abnormal state has occurred; a notification by controlling the LED on the door frame 3 to emit light in an error mode; and a notification by audio output that an abnormal state has occurred.

In addition, in this example, if an abnormality occurs during the execution of the rainbow effect (timing t6) or before the start of the rainbow effect (any timing between timing t0 and timing t2) in a variable effect that executes a rainbow effect, and the abnormality is resolved during the execution of the rainbow effect (before the rainbow effect ends) and the state returns to normal from the abnormal state, the abnormality notification light-up mode by the multiple LEDs in frame light-up groups A to F will end, but the rainbow effect illumination decorations by the multiple LEDs in the 1st board light-up group to the 6th board light-up group provided on the game board 5 and the multiple LEDs in frame light-up groups A to F provided on the door frame 3 will not be executed (the rainbow effect illumination decorations will not resume (will not return to the rainbow effect illumination decorations)).

In other words, if the rainbow effect illumination decoration is terminated or not started due to an abnormality such as noise that disrupts the light emission behavior of the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 or game board 5, it is possible that noise will occur again even if it is determined that the abnormality has been resolved. In such a case, if the rainbow effect illumination decoration is controlled to resume upon resolution of the abnormality, there is a risk that the rainbow effect illumination decoration will be repeatedly executed and terminated, which could confuse the player. For this reason, in this example, if the rainbow effect illumination decoration is terminated or not started due to the occurrence of an abnormality, the rainbow effect illumination decoration will not be executed or resumed even if the abnormality is resolved during the rainbow effect execution period.

For example, as shown in FIG. 287, if an abnormality occurs at timing t6 during the execution of a variable rainbow effect in which noise or the like makes it difficult to control the illumination of the rainbow effect by any of the LEDs in the first board illumination group through the sixth board illumination group provided on the gaming board 5, the illumination decoration of the rainbow effect provided by the LEDs in the first board illumination group through the sixth board illumination group provided on the gaming board 5 and the LEDs in frame illumination groups A through F provided on the door frame 3 will be terminated, the illumination of the LEDs in the first board illumination group through the sixth board illumination group will be controlled to an off state, and the illumination of the LEDs in frame illumination groups A through F will be controlled in an abnormality alert illumination mode in which they flash red at maximum brightness (light output).

At this time, the effect display device 1600 will erase the rainbow effect display mode and display a warning (such as "An abnormality has occurred"), but the control data for this rainbow effect display mode is updated according to the scheduler. In addition, the LEDs mounted on the rear upper first decorative board provided on the rear upper first decorative part 3211, where the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are lined up horizontally, do not perform the rainbow effect light-emitting decoration, but continue to control the light emission corresponding to the variable effect that executes the rainbow effect, so that the player can be made aware that the variable effect is continuing even if the rainbow effect display mode display on the effect display device 1600 disappears. In addition, in the abnormal state described above, a warning sound is output, allowing players and game store staff to recognize that an abnormal state has occurred by listening to the warning sound.

Furthermore, at time t10 after the abnormal state has occurred, when the noise or other issues are resolved and the game board 5 is returned to a state where it is possible to control the light emission of the rainbow effect of the multiple LEDs in the first board light-emitting group through the sixth board light-emitting group (time t10), the effect display device 1600 ends the warning display and resumes displaying the rainbow effect display mode. As described above, even during an abnormal state, the control data for the rainbow effect display mode is updated according to the scheduler, and the rainbow effect display mode on the effect display device 1600 is displayed in a mode corresponding to the elapsed time since the start of the variable effect. This means that the rainbow effect display mode corresponding to time t10, when the noise or other issues are resolved and the game board 5 is restored from the abnormal state, is displayed, rather than the rainbow effect display mode that was displayed at time t6 when an abnormality occurred that made it difficult to control the light emission of the rainbow effect by any of the multiple LEDs in the first board light-emitting group through the sixth board light-emitting group on the game board 5.

In addition, in this example, even if the abnormality is resolved at timing t10, the abnormality alert light-emitting mode, in which the multiple LEDs in frame light-emitting group A to frame light-emitting group F flash red at maximum brightness (light output), continues for a certain period (e.g., 30 seconds) (timing t10 to timing t11). In other words, if an abnormality occurs again before the certain period has passed after the abnormality is resolved (timing t10), the abnormality alert light-emitting mode will not be terminated at the timing when the certain period has passed, but will continue even after the certain period has passed. As a result, if abnormalities frequently occur and are resolved, the abnormality alert light-emitting mode can be continuously activated without repeatedly terminating and resuming the light-emitting control in the abnormality alert light-emitting mode each time, making it easier for game store staff and others to notice.

Furthermore, if an abnormality occurs at timing t6, the multiple LEDs in the first board lighting group through the sixth board lighting group provided on the gaming board 5 are turned off (timing t6), and even after the abnormality is resolved at timing t10, the multiple LEDs in the first board lighting group through the sixth board lighting group provided on the gaming board 5 will remain turned off and will not return to the rainbow-colored lighting decoration (timing t10 to timing t100).

Similarly, if an abnormality occurs at timing t6, the LEDs in frame lighting groups A to F on the door frame 3 are controlled to emit light in an abnormality notification light mode (timing t6), and then if the abnormality is resolved at timing t10 and a certain period of time passes without another abnormality occurring, the LEDs in frame lighting groups A to F on the door frame 3 are controlled to an off state and do not return to the rainbow-colored lighting decoration (timing t10 to timing t100).

Then, at timing t100, when the rainbow effect ends and the reach effect begins, light emission control is executed for the multiple LEDs in the 1st board light-emitting group through the 6th board light-emitting group provided on the game board 5 and the multiple LEDs in the frame light-emitting groups A through F provided on the door frame 3, causing them to emit light in a manner appropriate to the reach effect. In this way, the pachinko machine 1 of this example does not return to the rainbow effect light-emitting decoration even if an abnormality is resolved during the execution of the rainbow effect, so it is possible to determine whether an abnormality has occurred during the execution of the rainbow effect. Note that if an abnormality occurs before the start of the rainbow effect and the abnormality is resolved before the start of the rainbow effect, the rainbow effect light-emitting decoration may be started at timing t2, when the rainbow effect is to begin.

Furthermore, it is not limited to starting light emission control of the multiple LEDs in the 1st board light-emitting group to the 6th board light-emitting group provided on the game board 5 and the multiple LEDs in the frame light-emitting group A to the frame light-emitting group F provided on the door frame 3 at time t100 when the rainbow effect ends (the time when the effect executed next after the rainbow effect (in this example, the reach effect) starts), rather than at time t10 when the abnormality is resolved (not limited to starting light emission control at time t100), but may also be when a variable effect executing a rainbow effect ends, when a variable effect executing a rainbow effect ends and the next variable effect starts, when a demo effect starts after a variable effect executing a rainbow effect ends without the next variable effect starting, etc. Even in this case, it is possible to determine that an abnormality occurred during the execution of the rainbow effect or the execution of the variable effect in question.

In addition, if the abnormality is resolved after the variable effect that executes the rainbow effect has ended, light emission control may be initiated for at least the multiple LEDs in the first board lighting group through the sixth board lighting group that are provided on the game board 5, out of the multiple LEDs in the first board lighting group through the sixth board lighting group that are provided on the game board 5 and the multiple LEDs in the frame lighting groups A through F that are provided on the door frame 3, at the time the abnormality is resolved.In this case, if the abnormality is resolved during the execution of a variable effect that is different from the variable effect that caused the abnormality, and if a rainbow effect is being executed at the time the abnormality is resolved, control may be made to the light emission mode of the rainbow effect at that time.

Furthermore, when the abnormality is resolved, some of the LEDs may be returned to rainbow-colored illumination. For example, when the abnormality is resolved, among the LEDs in the first to sixth board illumination groups provided on the game board 5, the LEDs in the fourth board illumination group may be returned to rainbow-colored illumination, and after a certain period of time has passed since the abnormality was resolved, among the LEDs in the frame illumination groups A to F provided on the door frame 3, frame illumination group A may be returned to rainbow-colored illumination. In this case, the schedule data for the illumination control pattern for items that were not subject to illumination control during the abnormal state is advanced, and illumination is resumed from the illumination mode at the time the abnormality was resolved, rather than the illumination mode at the time the abnormality occurred. In this way, when the abnormality is resolved, some of the LEDs are returned to rainbow-colored illumination and other LEDs are turned off, making it possible to determine that an abnormality occurred during the execution of the rainbow-colored illumination, since only some of the LEDs are illuminated with rainbow-colored illumination.

In addition, in this example, even during an abnormal state, the light intensity adjustment button 228 can be operated to change the light intensity (brightness) settings for the multiple LEDs in the first board lighting group through the sixth board lighting group and the multiple LEDs in the frame lighting group A through frame lighting group F.

However, in a normal state where no abnormality has occurred, the light intensity (brightness) of the multiple LEDs in the 1st board lighting group to the 6th board lighting group and the multiple LEDs in the frame lighting group A to the frame lighting group F is immediately changed when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated, and the light emission of the multiple LEDs in the 1st board lighting group to the 6th board lighting group and the multiple LEDs in the frame lighting group A to the frame lighting group F is controlled with the changed light intensity (brightness). In contrast, in a state where an abnormality has occurred, the light intensity (brightness) setting of the multiple LEDs in the 1st board lighting group to the 6th board lighting group and the multiple LEDs in the frame lighting group A to the frame lighting group F is immediately changed when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated. Although the set value is changed, the multiple LEDs in the 1st board lighting group to the 6th board lighting group and the multiple LEDs in frame lighting group A to frame lighting group F do not emit light at the changed light intensity (brightness) at the time the operation is accepted. Instead, after the abnormality is resolved, specifically, the multiple LEDs in the 1st board lighting group to the 6th board lighting group are controlled to emit light at the changed light intensity (brightness) from time t10 when the door frame 3 is closed and the abnormality is resolved, and the multiple LEDs in frame lighting group A to frame lighting group F are controlled to emit light at the changed light intensity (brightness) from time t11 when the door frame 3 is closed and the abnormality is resolved and a certain period of time has passed.

In this way, even if the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated when an abnormality occurs, the light intensity (brightness) of the multiple LEDs in the 1st board lighting group through the 6th board lighting group and the multiple LEDs in the frame lighting group A through frame lighting group F will not change, preventing the abnormality notification light-emitting mode from becoming difficult to notice. Furthermore, even when an abnormality occurs, the light intensity (brightness) setting is changed by accepting operation of the light intensity adjustment button 228, and this is reflected in the actual LED light-emitting state after the abnormality is resolved, so the player's opportunity to adjust the light intensity (brightness) is not taken away even when an abnormality occurs.

In this example, a first decorative board on the rear upper back is provided on which multiple LEDs that cannot be adjusted in light intensity (hereinafter referred to as a non-dimming LED group) that illuminate and decorate the above-mentioned 7-segment display are mounted, separate from multiple decorative boards on which multiple LEDs that can be adjusted in light intensity (hereinafter referred to as a dimming LED group) belonging to the first board lighting group through the sixth board lighting group are mounted on the game board 5. However, this is not limited to this, and LEDs that illuminate and decorate the 7-segment display may be mounted on part of any of the multiple decorative boards on which multiple LEDs belonging to the first board lighting group through the sixth board lighting group are mounted. In other words, multiple LEDs that can be adjusted in light intensity (dimming LED group) and multiple LEDs that cannot be adjusted in light intensity (non-dimming LED group) may be mounted on a single decorative board.

For example, a dimmable LED group consisting of multiple LEDs with adjustable light intensity and a non-dimmable LED group consisting of multiple LEDs with non-adjustable light intensity may be arranged at a predetermined interval. In this case, the distance between adjacent LEDs in the dimmable LED group and the distance between adjacent LEDs in the non-dimmable LED group may be arranged closer than the distance between the dimmable LED group and the non-dimmable LED group. This configuration makes it easier to distinguish between the dimmable LED group and the non-dimmable LED group, and to compare the brightness of the LEDs with adjustable light intensity and the LEDs with non-adjustable light intensity.

In addition, LEDs with adjustable light intensity (hereinafter referred to as dimmable LEDs) and LEDs without adjustable light intensity (hereinafter referred to as non-dimmable LEDs) can be packaged in plastic of the same or a similar color (white in this example), or the same type of packaging can be used.This allows the dimmable LEDs and non-dimmable LEDs to emit light under similar conditions, so by comparing the brightness of the dimmable LEDs with that of the non-dimmable LEDs, the difference between the brightness of the dimmable LEDs after brightness adjustment and the brightness of the non-dimmable LEDs becomes clear, making it easier for players to adjust the brightness to their liking.

In addition, multiple through holes may be formed between the dimmable LED group and the non-dimmable LED group. In the area of the decorative board surface where the through holes are formed, the light emitted from the LEDs is not reflected and leaks to the back side of the decorative board (the surface where the LEDs are not mounted). Therefore, by forming through holes between the dimmable LED group and the non-dimmable LED group, interference between the light from the dimmable LEDs and the light from the non-dimmable LEDs is suppressed, making it possible to visually recognize the light from each LED individually. This allows brightness to be adjusted based on the light from the dimmable LED group alone, and it also makes it possible to use the light from the non-dimmable LED group alone as an indicator for brightness adjustment, improving the accuracy of the comparison and making it easier to adjust the brightness to the player's preference. Furthermore, by forming through holes with a smaller outer diameter than the outer diameters of the dimmable and non-dimmable LEDs (the proportion (area) of one through hole on the LED mounting surface (front surface) of the decorative board is less than the proportion (area) of one dimmable LED or one non-dimmable LED), it is possible to prevent unnecessary leakage of light from the dimmable and non-dimmable LEDs from the through holes to the back surface (non-LED mounting surface) of the decorative board. In this case, by making the number of through holes formed between the dimmable and non-dimmable LEDs greater than the number of dimmable LEDs or non-dimmable LEDs mounted to the side of the through holes, it is possible to suppress reflection and interference of light emitted from the dimmable and non-dimmable LEDs while preventing unnecessary reduction in the brightness of the dimmable and non-dimmable LEDs.

Furthermore, by providing a three-dimensional object (such as an electronic component or structure having a predetermined thickness) on the LED mounting surface (front surface) of the decorative board that separates part or all of the dimmable LED group from the non-dimmable LED group, reflection and interference of light emitted from the dimmable LEDs and non-dimmable LEDs may be suppressed. For example, electronic components mounted on circuit boards such as resistors, capacitors, diodes, ICs, and LED drivers may be mounted between the dimmable LEDs and non-dimmable LEDs on the LED mounting surface (front surface) of the decorative board. In this way, by providing electronic components with a predetermined thickness that protrude from the LED mounting surface (front surface) of the decorative board between the dimmable LEDs and non-dimmable LEDs, part or all of the dimmable LEDs and non-dimmable LEDs may be separated, thereby suppressing reflection and interference of light emitted from the dimmable LEDs and non-dimmable LEDs.

In addition, the electronic components placed between the dimmable LED and the non-dimmable LED may have a dark appearance (black, gray, green, blue, brown, etc.) with low reflectivity (they may also have some parts that are not dark (for example, metallic parts such as silver, or transparent parts)). This can further enhance the effect of suppressing reflection and interference of light emitted from the dimmable LED and the non-dimmable LED.

In addition, in the above example, the upper rear first decorative part 3211, in which five 7-segment display parts are arranged side by side on the upper rear first decorative board on which non-dimmable LEDs are mounted, is formed to a size that extends to the left and right ends of the performance display device 1600, making it easy for players to notice the letters, numbers, pictures, etc. displayed by the 7-segment display part of the upper rear first decorative part 3211. However, it is also possible to execute a performance that is less noticeable to players by, for example, forming the upper rear first decorative part 3211 with a single 7-segment display part, or by providing a decorative board that is smaller than the other decorative boards on which LEDs are mounted. In this case, players who notice the presence of the 7-segment display part can be given further enjoyment by the performance executed by the 7-segment display part in addition to the performance by the performance display device 1600, etc. Furthermore, if the surface of a single decorative substrate on which multiple LEDs are mounted is configured to be divided into an area where multiple LEDs that illuminate and decorate the decorative body covering the decorative substrate are mounted, and an area where multiple LEDs that illuminate and decorate a 7-segment display unit provided on part of the decorative body are mounted, the area where multiple LEDs that illuminate and decorate the 7-segment display unit provided on part of the decorative body are mounted can be narrower than the area where multiple LEDs that illuminate and decorate the decorative body covering the decorative substrate are mounted.

In this way, the non-dimmable LEDs that serve as the basis for brightness adjustment and the dimmable LEDs that change brightness are mounted close together on a single decorative board, making it possible to place the dimmable LEDs and non-dimmable LEDs closer together than if they were mounted on different boards, making it easier to compare the brightness of the dimmable LEDs and non-dimmable LEDs.

In addition, in the above example, the brightness of the LEDs that provide the rainbow effect illumination, specifically the LEDs included in the first board illumination group through the sixth board illumination group and the LEDs included in frame illumination groups A through F, is adjustable, while the brightness of the LEDs that do not provide the rainbow effect illumination, specifically the LEDs that illuminate the upper back rear first decorative section 3211 where the five 7-segment display sections of the upper back rear decorative body 3210 are lined up left and right, is not adjustable. However, in addition to the LEDs that illuminate the upper back rear first decorative section 3211, one or more non-rainbow LEDs that do not provide the rainbow effect illumination may also be provided on the door frame 3 or game board 5. These non-rainbow LEDs are controlled to be turned off when the rainbow effect is executed, or controlled to provide illumination different from the rainbow effect illumination. Although they do not provide the rainbow effect illumination, their brightness is adjustable, unlike the LEDs that illuminate the upper back rear first decorative section 3211. In this way, the results of brightness adjustments made during the execution of the rainbow effect can be reflected even in non-rainbow LEDs that do not perform rainbow effect lighting decorations, so these non-rainbow LEDs can also be made to emit light at the player's preferred brightness (light intensity) in the lighting decorations that are performed after the rainbow effect.

Furthermore, when the above-mentioned dimmable LEDs are performing rainbow-colored illumination, the emitted color changes (flickers) in a short period of time, making it difficult to accurately determine the light intensity (brightness) based on the light from these dimmable LEDs. Therefore, even if the player thinks they have adjusted the light intensity (brightness) to their liking, the problem is that the light intensity (brightness) may actually be set to a different level than the player's preferred level. As mentioned above, if non-rainbow-colored LEDs that do not perform rainbow-colored illumination even during rainbow-colored illumination are provided to perform illumination decorations different from rainbow-colored illumination, the light intensity (brightness) of the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and game board 5 can be accurately determined based on the light from the non-rainbow-colored LEDs, making it easy to adjust the light intensity (brightness) to the player's preferred level.

In addition, the lighting decoration used when the non-rainbow-colored LEDs are performing the rainbow effect can be anything that switches lighting color at a longer unit lighting time than at least the LEDs that perform the rainbow effect lighting decoration, specifically the LEDs included in the first board lighting group through the sixth board lighting group and the LEDs included in frame lighting group A through frame lighting group F, or anything that performs lighting decoration with the same lighting color without switching lighting color.

In addition, the light emission of non-rainbow color LEDs (which may be full-color LEDs controlled to emit a different light color from the five 7-segment display units of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210, or monochromatic LEDs that emit a different light color from the five 7-segment display units of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210) can be controlled with a different light color from the five 7-segment display units of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210, on which the rear-upper first decorative board is mounted and on which non-dimmable LEDs that do not produce rainbow color illumination and whose light intensity (brightness) cannot be adjusted as described above are mounted. In this case, it is easy to distinguish between non-rainbow color LEDs and non-dimmable LEDs, and it is easy to compare the light intensity (brightness) when adjusting the light intensity (brightness), allowing the light intensity (brightness) to be easily adjusted to the player's preference.

In the above example, the surface of the upper back first decorative board on which the monochromatic LEDs (non-dimmable LEDs) that illuminate and decorate the upper back first decorative part 3211, which has five 7-segment display units lined up horizontally on the upper back movable decorative body 3210, which does not perform rainbow-color illumination, i.e., illumination that changes color in a short period of time, are mounted, is also coated with a white solder resist (protective material) with the highest reflective efficiency, and letters and symbols to prevent confusion with the mounted electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative boards are screen-printed using ink of a high brightness and saturation (for example, a color with a reflective efficiency similar to white, such as yellow), thereby increasing the reflective efficiency of the surface on which the LEDs of the upper back first decorative board are mounted. However, in addition to or instead of this, it is also possible to suppress light interference on the surface of the upper back first decorative board on which the LEDs are mounted, thereby clarifying the light emitted by each LED and making it possible to more clearly display the letters, numbers, patterns, etc. displayed on the segment display units.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 288 (A), the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 contains a rear upper first decorative board on which LEDs are mounted to illuminate and decorate the rear upper first decorative part 3211, on which the five 7-segment display parts of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are lined up on the left and right, and a rear upper second decorative board on which LEDs are mounted to illuminate and decorate the rear upper second decorative part 3212, which is provided on the back side of the rear upper first decorative part 3211 and on which predetermined characters (here, "JACKPOT") are lined up.The rear upper movable decorative body 3210 is formed to a predetermined thickness (approximately 10 mm in this example) from an opaque (white in this example) resin or the like that does not have translucency, except for the five 7-segment display parts of the rear upper first decorative part 3211 and the predetermined characters of the rear upper second decorative part 3212.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 288 (B), the 7-segment display section of the upper rear first decorative part 3211 has cylindrical through-holes corresponding to each segment, and the surface on which the multiple LEDs of the upper rear first decorative board are mounted is partitioned so that one or more LEDs are arranged within these through-holes. Furthermore, the upper rear second decorative part 3212 has cylindrical through-holes corresponding to each of the specified characters (here, "JACKPOT"), and the surface on which the multiple LEDs of the upper rear second decorative board are mounted is partitioned so that one or more LEDs are arranged within these through-holes.

In addition, the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 is formed so that it can be divided into two decorative bodies, a front and a back, and the inside of one decorative body is in close contact with the surface of the rear-upper first decorative board on which multiple LEDs are mounted, and the inside of the other decorative body is in close contact with the surface of the rear-upper second decorative board on which multiple LEDs are mounted, and the two divided decorative bodies are assembled (fixed) to form the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210.

This prevents light emitted from the LEDs located within the through-holes corresponding to each segment of the seven-segment display unit of the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 from leaking into the through-holes corresponding to other segments, thereby suppressing interference between light emitted from each of the multiple segments of the seven-segment display unit, making it easier to individually identify the information (letters, numbers, designs, etc.) displayed by each of the multiple segments of the seven-segment display unit of the rear upper first decorative portion 3211. Furthermore, because light from the LEDs located within the through-holes can be emitted from each segment of the seven-segment display unit of the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 without leaking outside the through-hole, a decrease in the amount of light (brightness) within the through-hole can be suppressed.

Similarly, light emitted from the LEDs located within the through-holes corresponding to each predetermined character (here, "JACKPOT") on the upper rear second decorative portion 3212 is prevented from leaking into the through-holes corresponding to other characters, thereby suppressing interference between the light emitted from each predetermined character, making it easier to individually identify each predetermined character on the upper rear second decorative portion 3212. Furthermore, light from the LEDs located within the through-holes can be emitted from each predetermined character (here, "JACKPOT") on the upper rear second decorative portion 3212 without leaking outside the through-hole, thereby suppressing a decrease in the amount of light (brightness) within the through-hole.

In addition to the structure of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 described above, or separately from the structure of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 described above (without adopting the structure of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210), the surfaces on which the multiple LEDs are mounted on the rear-upper first decorative board on which LEDs are mounted that illuminate and decorate the rear-upper first decorative part 3211 on which the five 7-segment display parts of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 are arranged left and right, and the rear-upper second decorative board on which LEDs are mounted that illuminate and decorate the rear-upper second decorative part 3212 on which a predetermined character (here, "JACKPOT") is arranged in a row, may be coated with a dark-colored solder resist (protective material) with low reflective efficiency (black, purple, navy blue, dark green, etc.) instead of a white solder resist (protective material). In this case, although the reflection efficiency is reduced on the LED mounting surface of the rear upper first decorative board on which the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the rear upper first decorative part 3211 are mounted, and on the LED mounting surface of the rear upper second decorative board on which the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the rear upper second decorative part 3212 are mounted, the light from each through-hole can be emitted independently without interference, so letters, numbers, patterns, etc. displayed on the five 7-segment display parts of the rear upper first decorative part 3211, as well as specified letters on the rear upper second decorative part 3212, can be clearly displayed, and this information can be accurately conveyed to the player.

In addition, even if the LED mounting surface of the rear upper first decorative board on which the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the rear upper first decorative part 3211 are mounted and the LED mounting surface of the rear upper second decorative board on which the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the rear upper second decorative part 3212 are mounted are coated with a dark colored solder resist (protective material), the LED non-mounting surface of the rear upper first decorative board on which the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the rear upper first decorative part 3211 are not mounted and the LED non-mounting surface of the rear upper second decorative board on which the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the rear upper second decorative part 3212 are mounted may be coated with a solder resist (protective material) of a color other than dark (for example, white or green). Furthermore, it is also possible to coat only the inner regions of the through-holes on the LED mounting surface of the upper back first decorative board on which the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the upper back first decorative part 3211 are mounted, and on the LED mounting surface of the upper back second decorative board on which the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the upper back second decorative part 3212 are mounted, with a white solder resist (protective material), or to form a white coating by silk printing or the like, and coat the outer regions of the through-holes with a dark solder resist (protective material), or to form a dark coating by silk printing or the like. In this case, the reflection efficiency of the board surface is reduced to suppress light interference from each through-hole, while reflecting a high proportion of the light emitted from the LEDs located within the through-holes, allowing each segment of the five 7-segment display parts of the upper back movable decorative body 3210 and the specified characters (here, "JACKPOT") on the upper back second decorative part 3212 to be brightly illuminated and decorated.

In addition, the surface of the upper rear rear movable decorative body 3210 (the portion where the perforations are formed) corresponding to each of the five segments of the seven-segment display section of the upper rear rear movable decorative body 3210 and the predetermined characters (here, "JACKPOT") on the upper rear rear second decorative part 3212 may be provided with a cover formed of a translucent film (in this example, a cloudy frosted glass-like film) or a translucent resin (in this example, red, etc.). This prevents direct viewing of the light from the LEDs that illuminate the upper rear rear first decorative part 3211 and the LEDs that illuminate the upper rear rear second decorative part 3212, preventing players from feeling dazzled. Furthermore, by making the above-mentioned film or cover surface-emitting, the light source of the LEDs that illuminate the upper rear rear first decorative part 3211 and the LEDs that illuminate the upper rear rear second decorative part 3212 can be made less noticeable when they emit light.

In addition, the LED mounting surface of the first decorative board on the upper rear back, on which the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the first decorative part 3211 are mounted, and the LED mounting surface of the second decorative board on which the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the second decorative part 3212 are mounted, are screen-printed with letters and symbols in a bright, saturated color (e.g., yellow) to avoid confusion with electronic components such as LEDs mounted on other decorative boards. In addition, for one or both of the LED mounting surface of the first upper back decorative board on which the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the first upper back decorative part 3211 are mounted, and the LED mounting surface of the second upper back decorative board on which the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the second upper back decorative part 3212 are mounted, ink of a low brightness and saturation color (e.g., green, etc.) may be applied by screen printing to the LED mounting surface, or letters and symbols to avoid confusion with the mounted electronic components such as LEDs and other decorative boards may be formed as foil-cut letters (i.e., cut-out letters formed by creating letters with a wiring pattern that is copper foil on the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed and cutting out the copper foil around it), and the surface of these foil-cut letters may be coated with a dark-colored solder resist (protective material) that is coated on the LED mounting surface, or they may be applied by screen printing to the non-LED mounting surface (rear surface) using ink of a predetermined color (not only colors with high brightness and saturation but also colors with low brightness and saturation). In this case, too, it is possible to suppress optical interference between the LED mounting surface of the first upper rear decorative board on which the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the first upper rear decorative part 3211 are mounted, and the LED mounting surface of the second upper rear decorative board on which the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the second upper rear decorative part 3212 are mounted.

In addition, the rear-upper first decorative board on which LEDs that illuminate and decorate the rear-upper first decorative part 3211 are mounted, and the rear-upper second decorative board on which LEDs that illuminate and decorate the rear-upper second decorative part 3212 are mounted, may be firmly attached to the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 (such as in an irreversible attachment state that makes removal difficult, such as by destroying at least a portion of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210, the rear-upper first decorative board, or the rear-upper second decorative board by welding, etc.). This allows the LED mounting surfaces of the rear-upper first decorative board and the rear-upper second decorative board to be protected by the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210, thereby preventing malfunctions of the LEDs mounted on the rear-upper first decorative board or the rear-upper second decorative board due to tampering, etc.

In addition, when mounting LEDs for illuminating and decorating a 7-segment display on part of one of multiple decorative boards on which multiple LEDs belonging to the first through sixth board illumination groups are mounted, i.e., when mounting multiple LEDs with adjustable light output (dimmable LED group) and multiple LEDs without adjustable light output (non-dimmable LED group) on a single decorative board, a decorative body with the above-mentioned through-hole formed on the LED mounting surface of the non-dimmable LED group can be provided. In this case, the effect of suppressing reflection and interference of light emitted from the dimmable LEDs and non-dimmable LEDs can be further improved.

As described above, the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 and the rear upper second decorative portion 3212 display information such as letters, numbers, and pictures, and can play an important role in game presentations, such as displaying important information. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 may directly control the rear upper first decorative board on which LEDs for illuminating and decorating the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 are mounted, or the rear upper second decorative board on which LEDs for illuminating and decorating the rear upper second decorative portion 3212 are mounted (either one may be sufficient). In this case, the occurrence of malfunctions (such as content different from the intended content being displayed) can be reduced compared to when the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 and the rear upper second decorative portion 3212 based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and player-related disadvantages can be prevented.

In addition, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 performs peripheral control unit routine processing approximately every 33.3 ms, while the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 performs main control side timer interrupt processing every 4 ms.Therefore, the display content of the back rear upper first decorative unit 3211 and the back rear upper second decorative unit 3212 can be updated at a shorter interval than when the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the back rear upper first decorative unit 3211 and the back rear upper second decorative unit 3212 based on control signals from the main control board 1310.Even if a malfunction occurs and content different from the content originally displayed on the back rear upper first decorative unit 3211 or the back rear upper second decorative unit 3212 is displayed, the display content can be updated immediately (after 4 ms) and changed to the original display content, so that players, etc. are not disadvantaged. In other words, for the rear upper first decorative part 3211 and the rear upper second decorative part 3212, which display important information (high importance), control signals are output at a shorter cycle to update the light-emitting mode of the light-emitting means (LED) than for the luminous decorative parts that do not display important information (low importance).Therefore, even if a problem occurs with the display content of the rear upper first decorative part 3211 or the rear upper second decorative part 3212, which display important information, the display content can be immediately changed to normal, thereby preventing content different from what was intended from being displayed and causing inconvenience to the player. Furthermore, if the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to control the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 and the rear upper second decorative portion 3212 based on control signals from the main control board 1310, there is a risk of a communication error occurring between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, resulting in a malfunction in the information displayed by the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 and the rear upper second decorative portion 3212. However, in this example, the main control board 1310 directly controls the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 and the rear upper second decorative portion 3212, making it less likely that a malfunction will occur in the information displayed by the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 and the rear upper second decorative portion 3212 compared to when the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 and the rear upper second decorative portion 3212, thereby preventing any disadvantage to the player.

[Rainbow effect variation 1]
Next, a modified example of the rainbow effect will be described. In this example, the player can determine the probability of winning by pressing the pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300 while the rainbow effect is being executed. Note that in Modification 1, only the differences from the above embodiment will be described, and redundant explanations will not be provided.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 289, when a rainbow effect is being executed, if a variable display with a high probability of a jackpot is being executed, such as when the decorative pattern becomes a reach after the rainbow effect, even if the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed at timing t6 during the execution of the rainbow effect, the rainbow effect will continue to be executed until timing t100 without terminating the rainbow effect.

On the other hand, when a rainbow effect is being executed as shown in Figure 290, unless a variable display with a high probability of a jackpot is being executed, such as when the decorative symbols do not reach a reach after the rainbow effect, if the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed at timing t6 while the rainbow effect is being executed, the rainbow effect being executed will end at timing t6 when the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed, and a predetermined effect mode (such as a variable display of decorative symbols) will be displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 will be controlled to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode (which may include turning off some or all of them).

This makes it possible to determine the possibility of a jackpot when the rainbow effect is being executed, and encourages the player to actively press the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 during the period from timing t2 to timing t100 when the rainbow effect is being executed. Furthermore, if the player presses the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 during the period from timing t2 to timing t100 when the rainbow effect is being executed and determines that there is a high likelihood of a jackpot, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, after the rainbow effect being executed ends based on pressing the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 while the rainbow effect is being executed, the effect display device 1600 may be configured to execute an effect display unrelated to the rainbow effect. This allows the player to be aware that the rainbow effect has ended and to recognize that the likelihood of a jackpot is low. Furthermore, when an effect display unrelated to the rainbow effect is executed by the effect display device 1600, the effect display unrelated to the rainbow effect may also be terminated in response to operation of the effect operation unit 300, or the effect display unrelated to the rainbow effect may be terminated if the effect operation unit 300 is not operated for a predetermined period while the effect display unrelated to the rainbow effect is being executed. Furthermore, after the effect display unrelated to the rainbow effect being executed by the effect display device 1600 ends, the rainbow effect may be restarted if a predetermined start condition is met (for example, if the effect operation unit 300 is not operated for a predetermined period, or if a non-variable effect period during which no variable effect is being executed has reached a predetermined period). This imprints the light emission and display modes of the rainbow effect in the player's mind, and allows the player to operate the effect operation unit 300 with the expectation that when a rainbow effect is executed in a subsequent variable effect, a variable effect with a high probability of winning is being executed.

In addition, in Figure 290, if the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed while a rainbow effect is being performed, the rainbow effect illumination decoration on the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 ends, and then the effect display, such as the rainbow effect display mode, on the effect display device 1600 ends at a timing that is delayed by a predetermined period from the timing at which the rainbow effect illumination decoration ends. This prevents the display content on the effect display device 1600 from being suddenly switched, and makes it possible to switch the display content while leaving behind the lingering impression of the rainbow effect display mode or other effect display.

Furthermore, a predetermined sound may be output when the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed while the rainbow performance is being performed. In this case, after outputting the predetermined sound based on the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 being pressed, the performance display, such as the rainbow performance display mode, on the performance display device 1600 may be terminated a predetermined period of time (the same period as the predetermined period from the end of the rainbow performance if the predetermined sound is output at the same time as the end of the rainbow performance illumination, or a different period from the predetermined period from the end of the rainbow performance illumination if the predetermined sound is output at a different time from the end of the rainbow performance illumination). In this case, too, the display content on the performance display device 1600 is prevented from being suddenly switched, and the display content can be switched while the impact of the rainbow performance display mode or other performance display remains.

Furthermore, when the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed while a rainbow effect is being performed, the rainbow effect illumination decoration of the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the gaming board 5 and the door frame 3 may be terminated, and then the rainbow effect illumination decoration of the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the gaming board 5 and the door frame 3 may be restarted. In this case, after the rainbow effect illumination decoration of the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the gaming board 5 and the door frame 3 is terminated, the rainbow effect illumination decoration of the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the gaming board 5 and the door frame 3 may be restarted (while the rainbow effect display mode, etc. on the effect display device 1600 is continuing) before the rainbow effect display mode, etc. on the effect display device 1600 is terminated. This can increase the interest of a player who has become disappointed because they believe that the likelihood of winning a jackpot is low due to the end of the rainbow effect illumination decoration, and can bring their attention back to the rainbow effect.

In addition to the above examples, the likelihood of a jackpot may be determined by varying the sound output mode during the execution of the rainbow effect. For example, if the above-mentioned rainbow effect is being executed and a variable display with a high likelihood of a jackpot is being executed, such as when the decorative symbols become ready after the rainbow effect, sound output may be executed in a mode corresponding to the rainbow effect. On the other hand, if the variable display with a high likelihood of a jackpot is not being executed, such as when the decorative symbols do not become ready after the rainbow effect, sound output may not be executed in a mode corresponding to the rainbow effect, and a different sound output mode may be executed, or no sound output may be executed at all. In this case, the likelihood of a jackpot can be determined based on the execution of the rainbow effect and the sound output mode, and if it is determined that the likelihood of a jackpot is high, interest in the game can be increased.

[Rainbow effect variation 2]
Although the rainbow effect described above does not involve the movement of the movable body, the movable body that is illuminated and decorated in the rainbow effect described above may always or at a predetermined rate perform an operation linked to the rainbow effect in addition to the illumination decoration in the rainbow effect. This is shown below as Variation 2. Note that in Variation 2, only the parts that differ from the above embodiment will be explained, and a duplicate explanation will not be provided.

As shown in FIG. 291, when the rainbow effect is initiated at timing t2, either by the player pressing the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, or the button valid period (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed without the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 being pressed (timing t2), multiple LEDs mounted on the back, front, lower, and center decorative board 3168 belonging to the fourth board illumination group are made to emit a predetermined emission color (blue in this example), and then controlled to change the emission color every predetermined period (e.g., 0.1 seconds) (in this example, "blue" → "purple" → "red" → "white" → "yellow" → "green" → "blue" → "purple" → ...).

Furthermore, at timing t2, when the player presses the pressing operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300, or the button valid period (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed without the pressing operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 being pressed, the rainbow performance begins, and the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 of the back front lower performance unit 3160, on which the back front lower middle decorative board 3168 is mounted, rises from its normal standby position as shown in FIG. 164, stops at an elevated position in front of the performance display device 1600 (in this example, the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 rises so that part of it overlaps the front of the performance display device 1600. Note that it may also be configured to rise so that the entire back front lower middle decorative body 3161 overlaps the front of the performance display device 1600, for example by rising to near the center of the performance display device 1600), and rotates around a longitudinal axis.

As a result, when the rainbow effect is being performed, LED illumination and movement by the movable body (back front lower middle decorative board 3168) are performed in front of the effect display device 1600, and the multiple LEDs mounted on the back front lower middle decorative board 3168 that illuminates and decorates the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 change their light color every predetermined period (for example, 0.1 seconds), allowing for the execution of a highly eye-catching effect. In addition, the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 appears in front of the effect display device 1600 and rotates with a portion of it overlapping with the effect display device 1600, making the player think that something good is about to happen and increasing their anticipation for the game.

Furthermore, when the rainbow effect ends (timing t99), the rear front lower middle decorative element 3161 stops rotating around its longitudinal axis and descends from the front of the effect display device 1600, stopping at the normal standby position. In this example, a decorative pattern reach occurs on the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the movement of the rear front lower middle decorative element 3161 to its normal standby position. In this way, by rotating the rear front lower middle decorative element 3161 that appears in front of the effect display device 1600 while illuminating it, part of the effect display device 1600 is obscured and attention is drawn to the rear front lower middle decorative element 3161. This surprises the player when a decorative pattern reach occurs on the effect display device 1600 in synchronization with the movement of the rear front lower middle decorative element 3161 to its normal standby position, increasing the player's anticipation of a jackpot.

As mentioned above, if an abnormal condition occurs during the execution of the variable effect that executes the rainbow effect, the rainbow effect illumination decoration using the multiple LEDs mounted on the back front lower middle decorative board 3168 that illuminates and decorates the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 will be terminated. This prevents the rainbow effect from being performed in an incomplete manner.

On the other hand, even if an abnormal condition occurs during the execution of the rainbow effect, the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 will not stop operating, but will continue to operate as if no abnormal condition had occurred. Furthermore, even if an abnormal condition occurs before the start of a variable effect that executes a rainbow effect, the rainbow effect will continue to operate at the timing of the original start of the rainbow effect, as if no abnormal condition had occurred. In other words, if the light-emitting control of the rainbow effect cannot be fully realized as designed, the light-emitting decoration using the multiple LEDs mounted on the rear front lower middle decorative board 3168 will be stopped or not executed, but operations that do not affect the light-emitting decoration of the rainbow effect will be executed as scheduled (as designed) without being stopped. This allows the player to recognize that the variable effect is continuing, and prevents the player from mistaking the cancellation of the rainbow effect for the end of the variable effect.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 292, if an abnormality occurs at timing t6 while the rainbow effect is being executed, the rainbow effect illumination decorations of the multiple LEDs in the first board illumination group to the sixth board illumination group provided on the game board 5, including the multiple LEDs mounted on the back front lower middle decorative board 3168 that illuminates and decorates the back front lower middle decorative body 3161, are terminated and controlled to an off state. Furthermore, even if the door frame 3 is closed during execution of the rainbow effect and the abnormality is resolved, the rainbow effect illumination decorations will not return (the rainbow effect illumination decorations will not resume).

On the other hand, even if an abnormality occurs at timing t6 when the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 is operating in conjunction with the rainbow effect (timing t6), the operation of the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 linked to the rainbow effect is not stopped, and the predetermined operation linked to the rainbow effect continues (timing t6 to timing t100). In this way, if an abnormality occurs during the execution of the rainbow effect, the luminous decoration of the rainbow effect is terminated while the operation of the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 continues. Therefore, the continued operation of the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 allows the player to recognize that the variable effect is continuing, and does not cause anxiety.

In addition, even if an abnormality occurs in the variable performance that executes the rainbow effect, and the abnormality is resolved before the end of the rainbow effect and the state returns from the abnormal state to normal, the rainbow effect illumination decoration using the multiple LEDs mounted on the back front lower middle decorative board 3168 that illuminates and decorates the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 will not resume. In other words, if an abnormality occurs during the execution of the rainbow effect in a variable performance that executes the rainbow effect, and the abnormality is resolved before the end of the rainbow effect and the state returns from the abnormal state to normal, the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 will operate in an unlit state, not illuminated, in conjunction with the rainbow effect. As a result, when the rainbow effect display mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600, it is possible to determine that an abnormal state has occurred in the variable performance that executes the rainbow effect, depending on whether or not the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 is illuminated, and the occurrence of fraudulent behavior, etc. can be prevented.

In addition, whether or not to continue or start the operation linked to the rainbow-colored effect of the rear front, lower, and middle decorative body 3161 may be varied depending on the type of abnormal condition (degree of urgency). For example, for errors that have a small impact on gameplay as described above, the operation linked to the rainbow-colored effect of the rear front, lower, and middle decorative body 3161 may be continued or the operation linked to the rainbow-colored effect may be executed as scheduled (operating at the timing set in the scheduler). For errors that have a significant impact on gameplay, the operation linked to the rainbow-colored effect of the rear front, lower, and middle decorative body 3161 may be stopped (after stopping the operation linked to the rainbow-colored effect, it may be returned to its normal standby position and stopped), or the operation linked to the rainbow-colored effect that has been scheduled in advance (set in the scheduler) may be controlled not to be executed, thereby interrupting or ending the variable effect even while it is being executed. This allows the operating state of the rear front, lower, and middle decorative body 3161 to be varied depending on the severity of the error, making it possible to determine whether an abnormality has occurred.

In addition, whether or not the rainbow effect display mode on the effect display device 1600 is erased may be varied depending on the type of abnormal condition (degree of urgency). For example, for errors that have a small impact on gameplay as described above, the rainbow effect display mode on the effect display device 1600 is not erased, and a warning display (e.g., "Door open") is displayed so that it partially overlaps the rainbow effect display mode. On the other hand, for errors that have a significant impact on gameplay, the rainbow effect display mode on the effect display device 1600 is erased and only a warning display (e.g., "Illegal win occurred!") is displayed, thereby suspending or terminating the display of the rainbow effect (rainbow effect display mode) even while the rainbow effect is being executed. This allows the display mode on the effect display device 1600 to differ depending on the severity of the error, making it possible to determine whether an abnormality has occurred.

Furthermore, as shown in Variation 1 of the rainbow effect above, when a variable display with a high probability of a jackpot is being executed, such as when the decorative pattern becomes a reach after the rainbow effect, the rear front, lower, and middle decorative body 3161 is made to operate in conjunction with the rainbow effect, either always or at a predetermined rate; and when a variable display with a high probability of a jackpot is not being executed, such as when the decorative pattern does not become a reach after the rainbow effect, the rear front, lower, and middle decorative body 3161 may not operate in conjunction with the rainbow effect. This makes it possible to increase expectations for a jackpot if the rear front, lower, and middle decorative body 3161 operates in conjunction with the rainbow effect, and even when the rear front, lower, and middle decorative body 3161 does not operate in conjunction with the rainbow effect, there is a possibility that a variable display with a high probability of a jackpot is being executed, so expectations for a jackpot will not be lost.

Furthermore, while the above embodiments (all embodiments including variants 1 and 2) are related to rainbow effects, this technical concept can also be applied to effects other than rainbow effects. For example, in variant 2, the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 is not limited to operating in conjunction with the rainbow effect, but can also be applied to operating in conjunction with other effects.

The present invention has been described above using preferred embodiments, but the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements and design modifications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention, as described below.

For example, in the above embodiment, the separation holes (separation holes 1023, 1822c, 2531b, 2810d, 1823c, 1827c, 1828c, etc.) that allow decorative objects such as stickers to be separated are shown as penetrating holes, but this is not limited to this and slit-shaped or notched holes are also acceptable.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, a pachinko machine was used as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to other gaming machines such as mahjong machines and arrange ball machines, and can also be applied to slot machines that use gaming medals to spin multiple drums (cylinders or reels). Here, a slot machine will be described with reference to Figure 213. Figure 213 is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine.

As shown in Figure 213, the slot machine 6000 is composed of a front door (front frame) 6002 and a main body (box) 6004. The front door (front frame) 6002 and the main body (box) 6004 are interconnected via a hinge (not shown). The front door (front frame) 6002 can be opened from the main body (box) 6004 by inserting a key into the keyhole 6005 of a metal locking device located on the right end of the front door (front frame) 6002 and turning it clockwise, using this hinge as the center of rotation.

The metal locking device is attached to the cylinder mounting frame of a metal door frame reinforcement unit (not shown) of the front door (front frame) 6002 and cooperates with a locking unit (not shown) to lock and open the main body (box) 6004 and the front door (front frame) 6002. The metal locking device includes a cylindrical metal cylinder body (not shown) extending forward and backward, a metal keyhole 6005 formed in the front end face of the cylinder body, and a metal rotation transmission member (not shown) attached to the rear side of the cylinder body. The metal locking device's cylinder body penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame of the door frame reinforcement unit from the rear, with its rear end attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member is cylindrical (more specifically, conical, with a diameter increasing toward the rear) with an open rear end and has a pair of notches cut forward from the rear end at opposite positions across the central axis. The rotation transmission member is configured so that when the front door (front frame) 6002 is closed relative to the main body (box) 6004, a metal transmission cylinder of a metal locking unit (not shown) can be inserted from the rear, and when a pair of protrusions on the transmission cylinder are inserted into a pair of cutouts, the rotation of the rotation transmission member (key inserted in the keyhole 6005) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder, causing it to rotate. When the rotation transmission member of the metal locking device and the transmission cylinder of the locking unit are in contact with each other while the front door (front frame) 6002 is closed relative to the main body (box) 6004, the metal locking device and the locking unit are electrically connected.

In addition to reinforcing the front door (front frame) 6002 and adding rigidity, the door frame reinforcement unit also functions as a door frame metal earth, electrically connected to an earth board installed inside the main body (box) 6004 via a door frame metal earth wire (not shown). In other words, the metal door frame reinforcement unit serves as the frame ground on the door frame side. This earth board (not shown) is capable of temporarily collecting electromagnetic noise generated in various locations and grounding (earthing) the island equipment of the amusement hall, and is electrically connected to the earth of the island equipment of the amusement hall via an island equipment earth wire (not shown).

An opening switch (not shown) capable of detecting the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 relative to the main body (box) 6004 is located on the main body (box) 6004 or the front door (front frame) 6002. This opening switch does not detect the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 relative to the main body (box) 6004 due to the input of an electrical signal resulting from the opening or closing operation of the metal locking device, but rather detects the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 relative to the main body (box) 6004 independently of the opening or closing operation of the metal locking device. Furthermore, the opening switch is not located near the metal locking device, but is located below the metal locking device on the main body (box) 6004 or the front door (front frame) 6002 to avoid being affected by electromagnetic noise that may have entered the metal locking device. In this way, even if electromagnetic noise enters a metal locking device, the signal transmission line from the opening switch is not affected by this electromagnetic noise.

The front door (front frame) 6002 decorates the entire front of the slot machine 6000 and includes various decorative elements. Some decorative elements are completely unplated, while others are plated on the entire front and back surfaces. This decorative plating is made of precious metals such as chrome or hard gold, and is conductive, which may allow electromagnetic noise to penetrate. Those decorative elements plated on the entire front and back surfaces are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit in the door frame base unit that constitutes the front door 6002 via wiring (not shown). (Some decorative elements are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown), while others are electrically connected by electrically conductive members attached directly to the metal door frame reinforcement unit.) This allows electromagnetic noise that penetrates the decorative elements to be transmitted to the metal door frame reinforcement unit, preventing it from penetrating the board ground of the decorative boards provided on the decorative elements. Furthermore, electromagnetic noise that penetrates into the various decorative parts that have decorative plating on the entire front and back surfaces is transmitted to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown), then via the door frame metal ground wire to the earth board installed inside the main body (box) 6004, and then from the earth board via the island equipment ground wire to the ground of the island equipment in the gaming hall, and is removed from the slot machine 6000. In other words, as described above, the metal door frame reinforcement unit serves as the frame ground on the door frame side.

An anti-static pad may be provided as an anti-static section at a predetermined location on the front of the front door (front frame) 6002, or it may be provided as an anti-static section on the open side opposite the side where the hinges are located (closed side) when the front door (front frame) 6002 is opened from the main body (box) 6004. The anti-static pad can remove noise (electromagnetic noise) generated by electrostatic discharge.

Furthermore, the front door (front frame) 6002 decorates the entire front of the slot machine 6000 and includes various decorative elements. Some of these decorative elements have no decorative plating at all, while others have decorative plating covering the entire front and back surfaces. Those decorative elements with decorative plating covering the entire front and back surfaces are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown). While the earth board provided inside the main body (box) 6004 was previously electrically connected to the ground of the island equipment in the amusement hall via the island equipment earth wire, the door frame metal earth wire may not be electrically connected to the earth board, but may be electrically connected to a terminal on the power board of a power supply unit (not shown) provided inside the main body (box) 6004, thereby electrically connecting the metal door frame reinforcement unit to the power board. The power board receives 24V AC from the island equipment in the amusement hall. This 24V AC has L (live) and N (neutral). The L terminal of the power supply board, to which L (live) is input, is connected to the ungrounded side, while the N terminal of the power supply board, to which N (neutral) is input, is connected to the grounded side. Therefore, a surge protection element (surge absorber) is installed on the power supply board to protect against transient excessive voltage. This surge protection element (surge absorber) normally has high resistance and conducts almost no current. However, when excessive voltage (abnormal voltage) enters, its resistance instantly decreases, allowing current to flow. Once the excessive voltage disappears, it returns to its original normal resistance (high resistance). As a result, electromagnetic noise transmitted from the metal door frame reinforcement unit is transmitted from the terminal of the power supply board by the surge protection element (surge absorber) to the N terminal of the power supply board and the ground side (earth), thereby removing it from the slot machine 6000.

A game panel 6006 is provided on the upper half of the front door (front frame) 6002, and a protrusion that protrudes forward from the game panel 6006 is formed on the lower half of the front door (front frame) 6002. A medal insertion slot 6008, bet buttons 6010, 6012, start lever 6014, left stop button 6016, center stop button 6018, right stop button 6020, etc. are arranged on this protrusion along the lower edge of the game panel 6006. In addition, a savings settlement button 6022 and a decorative panel 6024 are arranged on the lower half of the front door (front frame) 6002, and a tray 6026 is provided below the decorative panel 6024. These bet buttons 6010, 6012, start lever 6014, left stop button 6016, center stop button 6018, right stop button 6020, and accumulated settlement button 6022 are electrically connected to a main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game. The main control board 1310 is housed in a main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300, and is attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body (box) 6004.

This main control board box 1320 houses not only the main control board 1310 but also a setting change board 1311 equipped with a setting key switch 1311a that allows setting values to be changed. In other words, the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and is attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body part (box) 6004, so that the setting key switch 1311a is located inside the main body part (box) 6004. The setting change board 1311 may be housed in a board box separate from the main control board box 1320 and attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body part (box) 6004, or it may be attached and fixed to the housing of a power supply unit (not shown) provided inside the main body part (box) 6004. In addition to the setting key switch 1311a, the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311 may also be equipped with a setting switch button for selecting and switching setting values, a setting display 1310g consisting of a single 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dot), and the setting change permission lamp 1310z described above.

A rectangular display window (not shown) is formed in approximately the center of the gaming panel 6006, and through this display window it is possible to see three variable rotors (not shown) and a performance device (not shown) installed inside the slot machine 6000. The three variable rotors (not shown) are attached and fixed to a main body-side mounting member (not shown) located inside the main body portion (box) 6004. In contrast, the performance device (not shown) is attached and fixed to a door-side mounting member (not shown) located on the back side of the front door (front frame) 6002.

These variable rotors have translucent pattern bands affixed to their cylindrical frames, on which multiple types of symbols (e.g., bell, watermelon, cherry, 7, V, etc.) are printed as symbol information. These cylindrical variable rotors are called reels or drums in gaming machines such as slot machines, and each variable rotor is connected to the output shaft of a stepping motor (not shown). These stepping motors are driven and controlled by the main control board 1310, and as the output shaft of the stepping motor rotates, multiple types of symbols appear to change continuously from top to bottom through the display window mentioned above.

The performance device comprises multiple movable performance bodies (not shown), the performance display device 1600 described above, various decorative boards (not shown) on which multiple LEDs are mounted, and the peripheral control unit 1500 described above. Based on various commands from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1500 controls the progress of the performance by performing various controls such as operating the multiple movable performance bodies, drawing control of the performance display device 1600, and lighting control of the multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards. The peripheral control unit 1500 comprises the peripheral control board 1510 described above.

When a predetermined number of medals are inserted as gaming media into the medal slot 6008, the main control board 1310 begins the display of varying symbol information based on the operation of the start lever 6014, and stops the display of varying symbol information based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, center stop button 6018, or right stop button 6020, or the passage of a predetermined amount of time. Then, when the symbol information assumes a predetermined specific display mode, the main control board 1310 generates a profit-awarding state (jackpot gaming state) and pays out a large amount of medals as gaming media into the tray 6026.

In the hybrid gaming machine, the medal slot 6008 becomes the ball slot 6008', and the main control board 1310 starts the display of varying symbol information based on the operation of the start lever 6014 after a predetermined number of game balls are inserted into the ball slot 6008' as game media, and stops the display of varying symbol information based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, center stop button 6018, or right stop button 6020 or the passage of a predetermined amount of time. Then, when the symbol information reaches a predetermined specific display mode, the main control board 1310 generates a profit-awarding state (jackpot game state) and pays out a large amount of game balls as game media into the tray 6026.

(Solution 1)
The gaming machine has a game board with a game area where game balls can flow down, conducts a lottery based on the establishment of a start condition, and awards a profit based on the result of the lottery. It includes a specific mounting area where multiple light-emitting elements are mounted and a white coating is applied to the mounting surface, a display means for displaying images, and a control means for controlling the effects. The display means controls the display means to display specific effect images and can perform multi-color light emission control, which causes the multiple light-emitting elements mounted in the specific mounting area to simultaneously emit light in different colors. When a predetermined adjustment means is operated during light emission under multi-color light emission control, the brightness of the multiple light-emitting elements mounted in the specific mounting area can be changed while the light emission under multi-color light emission control continues. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 1, the white coating is applied to the mounting surface where the multiple light-emitting elements are mounted, thereby improving the reflection efficiency of the light from the light-emitting elements on the mounting surface and suppressing uneven illumination. This avoids a reduction in the effect of the multiple light-emitting elements mounted in the specific mounting area simultaneously emitting light in different colors. Furthermore, since the player can change the brightness of the light emitted during the multi-color light emission control, which is executed with the white coating film improving the reflection efficiency, the player can execute the multi-color light emission control at the brightness of their choice, which reduces the annoyance and difficulty of viewing the light emitted during the multi-color light emission control. This eliminates factors that reduce interest in the light emitted during the multi-color light emission control, and prevents a decrease in interest in the game.

(Solution 2)
In the gaming machine described in Solution 1, a special mounting area is provided, separate from the specific mounting area, with a white coating formed on the mounting surface on which multiple light-emitting bodies are mounted, and the performance control means controls the performance display means to display a specific performance image, and when performing multi-color light emission control to cause multiple light-emitting bodies mounted in the specific mounting area to simultaneously emit light in different light colors, it is possible to perform control separate from the multi-color light emission control on the multiple light-emitting bodies mounted in the special mounting area, and when a specified adjustment means is operated during light emission by multi-color light emission control, it is possible to change the brightness of the multiple light-emitting bodies mounted in the specific mounting area while continuing to emit light by the multi-color light emission control, and further, while the brightness of the multiple light-emitting bodies mounted in the specific mounting area is adjusted in response to operation of the adjustment unit, the multiple light-emitting bodies mounted in the special mounting area are not subject to brightness adjustment, and control separate from the multi-color light emission control continues at a predetermined constant brightness. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 2, it is possible to use the light emitted by the multiple light-emitting elements mounted in the special mounting area as an indicator for adjusting brightness, thereby increasing the accuracy of the comparison between the light emitted by the multiple light-emitting elements mounted in the specific mounting area and the light emitted by the multiple light-emitting elements mounted in the special mounting area, making it easier to adjust the brightness to the player's preference.

(Solution 3)
The gaming machine described in Solution 1 has a plurality of special mounting areas in which control separate from the multi-color light emission control is performed, and in a first special mounting area among the plurality of special mounting areas, while the brightness of the plurality of light-emitting elements emitting light under the multi-color light emission control is adjusted in response to an operation on the adjustment unit, the plurality of light-emitting elements mounted in the first special mounting area are not subject to brightness adjustment, and a first control separate from the multi-color light emission control is continued at a predetermined constant brightness, and in a second special mounting area among the plurality of special light-emitting area sections, while the brightness of the plurality of light-emitting elements emitting light under the multi-color light emission control is adjusted in response to an operation on the adjustment unit, the brightness of the plurality of light-emitting elements mounted in the second special mounting area is also adjusted in synchronization, and a second control separate from the multi-color light emission control is continued. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 3, it is possible to use the light emitted by the multiple light-emitting elements mounted in the special mounting area as an indicator for adjusting brightness, thereby increasing the accuracy of the comparison between the light emitted by the multiple light-emitting elements mounted in the specific mounting area and the light emitted by the multiple light-emitting elements mounted in the special mounting area, making it easier to adjust the brightness to the player's preference.

(Solution 4)
A gaming machine has a game board with a game area where game balls can flow down, conducts a lottery based on the establishment of a start condition, and awards a profit based on the result of the lottery. The gaming machine includes a specific mounting area where multiple light-emitting elements are mounted and a white coating is applied to the mounting surface, a display means for displaying images, a control means for controlling the effects, and a state detection means for detecting the state of the gaming machine. The display means controls the display means to display a specific effect image and can perform multi-color light emission control, which causes the multiple light-emitting elements mounted in the specific mounting area to simultaneously emit light in different colors. If the state detection means detects a specific state during light emission under multi-color light emission control, some or all of the multiple light-emitting elements emitting light under multi-color light emission control are turned off. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 4, the white coating is applied to the mounting surface where the multiple light-emitting elements are mounted, thereby improving the reflection efficiency of the light from the light-emitting elements on the mounting surface and suppressing uneven illumination. This avoids a reduction in the effect of the multiple light-emitting elements mounted in the specific mounting area simultaneously emitting light in different colors. Furthermore, if the state detection means detects a specific state during light emission under multi-color light emission control, some or all of the light emitters emitting light under multi-color light emission control are turned off, so that, for example, if the state of the gaming machine is such that light emission effects under multi-color light emission control cannot be properly performed, an incomplete light emission effect can be executed, preventing a decrease in interest in the game (see, for example, paragraphs 2869 to 2891, Figures 283 to 287, etc.).

(Solution 5)
In the gaming machine described in Solution 4, a special light-emitting area section is provided as the light-emitting area section, separate from the specific light-emitting area section, and the special light-emitting area section has a mounting surface on which the light-emitting body is mounted and is coated with a white coating; the effect control means controls the light-emitting body mounted in the specific light-emitting area section to emit light in a predetermined rainbow mode in relation to the specific effect image displayed on the effect display device, while being able to control the light-emitting body mounted in the special light-emitting area section to emit light in a mode other than the rainbow mode; and further, when the state detection means detects a specific state within a specific light-emitting period during which the light-emitting body mounted in the specific light-emitting area section emits light in the rainbow mode, the state detection means controls the light-emitting body mounted in the special light-emitting area section to end the light emission in the rainbow mode regardless of whether the specific light-emitting period remains, while the light-emitting body mounted in the special light-emitting area section continues to emit light in the other mode until the specific light-emitting period has elapsed, without ending the light emission in the other mode, even if the state detection means detects a specific state within the specific light-emitting period. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 5, even if the state of the gaming machine has entered a specific state and some or all of the multiple light-emitting elements are turned off, it is possible to determine that the specific light-emitting period remains by the fact that the light-emitting elements mounted in the special light-emitting area continue to emit light, and the player is not given the mistaken impression that the specific light-emitting period has ended.

(Solution 6)
The gaming machine according to Solution 4 or Solution 5 is characterized in that it has a plurality of special light-emitting area sections in which light-emitting bodies emit light in a manner different from the rainbow manner as the special light-emitting area sections, and a first special light-emitting area section among the plurality of special light-emitting area sections is capable of emitting light in the special manner within a specific light-emitting period, and even if the state detection means detects that a specific state is present within the specific light-emitting period, the light-emitting body is controlled to continue emitting light in the special manner until the specific light-emitting period has elapsed without terminating the light-emitting in the special manner, and a second special light-emitting area section among the plurality of special light-emitting area sections is capable of emitting light in a special manner different from the special manner within the specific light-emitting period, and if the state detection means detects that a specific state is present within the specific light-emitting period, the light-emitting body mounted in the second special light-emitting area is controlled to terminate the light-emitting in the special manner as well as terminating the light-emitting in the rainbow manner. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 6, even if the state of the gaming machine has changed to a specific state and some or all of the multiple light-emitting elements are turned off, it is possible to determine that the specific light-emitting period remains by the fact that the light-emitting elements mounted in the special light-emitting area continue to emit light, and the player is not given the mistaken impression that the specific light-emitting period has ended.

(Solution 7)
A gaming machine having a gaming board with a gaming area where gaming balls can flow down, which draws a lottery when a starting condition is met and awards a profit based on the result of the lottery, includes a specific mounting area where multiple light emitters are mounted and a white coating is formed on the mounting surface, a display means for displaying images, a control means for controlling the effects, and a state detection means for detecting the state of the gaming machine, wherein the display means controls the display means to display a specific effect image and is capable of generating a specific period in which multiple light emitters mounted in the specific mounting area simultaneously emit light in different colors, and when the state detection means detects a specific state during the specific period, the multicolor light emission control is terminated regardless of whether the specific period remains, and the multicolor light emission control is not resumed even if the specific state returns to normal within the specific period. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 7, the white coating is formed on the mounting surface where the multiple light emitters are mounted, thereby improving the reflection efficiency of the light from the light emitters on the mounting surface and suppressing uneven illumination, etc. This prevents the effects of simultaneously illuminating multiple light-emitting elements mounted in a specific mounting area with different colors from being diminished. Furthermore, if the state detection means detects a specific state during multicolor light emission control, the multicolor light emission control is terminated, and light emission by the multicolor light emission control is not resumed even if the specific state returns to normal within the specific period. This prevents a loss of interest in the game due to an incomplete light emission effect being executed when, for example, the gaming machine's state is such that the light emission effect by the multicolor light emission control cannot be properly implemented. Furthermore, even if the normal state is restored, it is possible to determine that a specific state occurred within the specific period until the specific period has elapsed (see, for example, paragraphs 2869 to 2891, Figures 283 to 287, etc.).

(Solution 8)
In the gaming machine described in Solution 7, a special light-emitting area section is provided as the light-emitting area section, separate from the specific light-emitting area section, and the special light-emitting area section has a mounting surface on which the light-emitting body is mounted and is coated with a white film; the effect control means controls the light-emitting body mounted in the specific light-emitting area section to emit light in a predetermined rainbow mode in relation to the specific effect image displayed on the effect display device, while being able to control the light-emitting body mounted in the special light-emitting area section to emit light in a mode other than the rainbow mode; and further, when the state detection means detects a specific state within the specific period during which the light-emitting body mounted in the specific light-emitting area section emits light in the rainbow mode, the state control means controls to terminate the light emission in the rainbow mode regardless of whether the specific period remains, and controls to prevent the light emission from returning to the rainbow mode even if the state changes from the specific state to a normal state within the specific period; on the other hand, the light-emitting body mounted in the special light-emitting area section continues to emit light in a different mode without terminating it even if the state detection means detects a specific state within the specific period, and controls to continue emitting light in a different mode even after the state changes from the specific state to the normal state within the specific period. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 8, even if the state of the gaming machine has entered a specific state and some or all of the multiple light-emitting elements are turned off, it is possible to determine that the specific period remains because the light-emitting elements implemented in the special light-emitting area continue to emit light in a manner other than the rainbow-colored manner, and the player is not given the mistaken impression that the specific period has ended.

(Solution 9)
In the gaming machine described in Solution 8, the effect control means is characterized in that it can control the light emitters mounted in the specific light-emitting area to emit light in a predetermined rainbow pattern in association with a specific effect image that is displayed on the effect display device when the state changes from a specific state to a normal state after a specific period of time has passed. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 9, it is possible to control the light emitters to emit light in a predetermined rainbow pattern in association with a specific effect image that is displayed on the effect display device when the state changes from a specific state to a normal state after a specific period of time has passed, and therefore it is possible to suppress a decline in interest in the game by controlling the light emission in a rainbow pattern.

(Solution 10)
This gaming machine has a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed through which gaming balls can flow down, conducts a lottery based on the establishment of a starting condition, and executes a winning game based on the result of the lottery, and is equipped with a specific mounting area in which a plurality of light-emitting bodies are mounted and a white coating is formed on the mounting surface, and a performance control means for controlling the performance, and the performance control means is capable of performing first light-emitting control, which causes the plurality of light-emitting bodies mounted in the specific mounting area to simultaneously emit light of the same color, and second light-emitting control, which causes the plurality of light-emitting bodies mounted in the specific mounting area to simultaneously emit light of different colors, as controls to notify the player of the possibility of executing a winning game, and the second light-emitting control notifies the player that the possibility of executing a winning game is higher than that of the first light-emitting control, and further, separately from the second light-emitting control, it is capable of performing third light-emitting control, which causes the plurality of light-emitting bodies mounted in the specific mounting area to simultaneously emit light of different light colors, and the third light-emitting control is a control that is performed when there is no possibility of executing a winning game. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 10, a white coating is applied to the mounting surface on which the multiple light emitters are mounted, improving the reflectivity of the light from the light emitters on the mounting surface and reducing uneven illumination. This avoids the reduction in the visual effect of simultaneously emitting different colors of light from the multiple light emitters mounted in a specific mounting area. Furthermore, while a second light-emitting control, which simultaneously emits different colors from the multiple light emitters mounted in the specific mounting area, indicates a higher probability of a winning game than a first light-emitting control, which simultaneously emits the same color, a third light-emitting control, which simultaneously emits different colors from the multiple light emitters mounted in the specific mounting area, similar to the second light-emitting control, indicates a lower probability of a winning game. Therefore, while the second light-emitting control can heighten expectations for a winning game, it can also create anxiety about the possibility of the third light-emitting control being executed, drawing attention and enhancing the player's interest in the game. (See, e.g., paragraphs 2921-2929, Figures 289-290, etc.)

(Solution 11)
In the gaming machine described in Solution 10, when the light-emitting body implemented in the specific light-emitting area emits light in a predetermined rainbow pattern by the third control, the light emission in the rainbow pattern can be terminated in response to the player's operation of a predetermined effect operation unit, but when the light-emitting body implemented in the specific light-emitting area emits light in a predetermined rainbow pattern by the second control, the light emission in the rainbow pattern cannot be terminated even if the player operates the predetermined effect operation unit. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 11, when the light-emitting body implemented in the specific light-emitting area emits light in a predetermined rainbow pattern, the player can be induced to operate the effect operation unit, thereby increasing the gaming enjoyment when operating the effect operation unit.

(Solution 12)
The gaming machine described in Solution 11 is characterized in that, after the light emission in the rainbow mode is ended in response to operation of a predetermined effect operation unit by the player during execution of the third control, light emission in the rainbow mode is disabled until a specific period of time has elapsed, and light emission in the rainbow mode is enabled after the specific period of time has elapsed. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 11, if the light emission in the rainbow mode is ended in response to operation of a predetermined effect operation unit by the player during execution of the third control, light emission in the rainbow mode is disabled until the specific period of time has elapsed, so it is possible to prevent the player from missing the end of the light emission in the rainbow mode.

(Solution 13)
A gaming machine having a gaming board with a gaming area formed thereon through which gaming balls can flow, which draws a lottery when a starting condition is met, and awards a profit based on the result of the lottery, the gaming machine comprising: a first specific mounting area in which a plurality of light-emitting elements are mounted and a white coating is formed on the mounting surface thereof; a second specific mounting area in which a plurality of light-emitting elements are mounted and a dark coating is formed on the mounting surface thereof; and a display means for displaying an image, wherein when a specific effect image is displayed on the display means, the light-emitting elements mounted in the first specific mounting area are capable of multicolor emission, causing the light-emitting elements to simultaneously emit light in different colors, and the light-emitting elements mounted in the second specific mounting area are capable of emitting a monochromatic light different from the multicolor emission, even when the light-emitting elements mounted in the first specific mounting area are performing multicolor emission. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 13, the white coating is formed on the mounting surface on which the light-emitting elements are mounted, thereby improving the reflection efficiency of the light from the light-emitting elements on the mounting surface and suppressing uneven illumination, etc. This prevents the visual effect of simultaneously emitting light of different colors from the multiple light emitters mounted in the first specific mounting area, which has a white coating formed on its mounting surface. Furthermore, even if the multiple light emitters mounted in the first specific mounting area emit multiple colors, a dark coating is formed on the mounting surface of the second specific mounting area, which allows for monochromatic light emission, unlike the multicolored light. This reduces interference between the light emitted by the multiple light emitters mounted on the mounting surface of the second specific mounting area, allowing for clearer light emission from each of the multiple light emitters. (See, for example, paragraphs 2913 to 2916, Figure 288, etc.)

(Solution 14)
A gaming machine having a gaming board with a gaming area formed into which gaming balls can flow, which draws a lottery based on the establishment of a starting condition, and awards profits based on the results of the lottery, and which is equipped with a performance control means for controlling the performance, a movable body that can operate in a predetermined operating mode, a plurality of specific decorative boards on which a plurality of light-emitting elements are mounted and on whose mounting surfaces a white coating is formed, and a state detection means for detecting the state of the gaming machine, wherein the specific decorative boards are also provided on the movable body, and the performance control means operates the movable body in a predetermined operating mode and is capable of performing multi-color light emission control that causes the multiple light-emitting elements mounted on the multiple specific decorative boards to simultaneously emit light in different colors, and when the state detection means detects a specific state while the multi-color light emission control is being executed, it turns off some or all of the multiple light-emitting elements mounted on the multiple specific decorative boards, while allowing the movable body to continue operating in the predetermined operating mode. According to the gaming machine described in Solution 14, a white coating is formed on the mounting surfaces of multiple specific decorative boards on which multiple light emitters are mounted, improving the light reflection efficiency of the light emitters on the mounting surfaces of the specific decorative boards and reducing uneven illumination. This avoids the reduction in the visual effect of simultaneously emitting different colors of light from multiple light emitters mounted on specific mounting boards with white coatings on their mounting surfaces. Furthermore, when the state detection means detects a specific state during multi-color light emission control, some or all of the light emitters mounted on the multiple specific decorative boards are turned off while the movable body continues to operate in a predetermined operating mode. Therefore, even if some or all of the light emitters are turned off due to the gaming machine entering a specific state, the continued operation of the movable body in a predetermined operating mode indicates that the multi-color light emission control is still in operation, preventing player confusion or anxiety. (See, for example, paragraphs 2930-2942, Figures 291-292, etc.)

[Golden effect]
Next, the gold effect will be explained. In this example, the gold effect is a gold display in which some or all of the characters, letters, patterns, etc. displayed on the effect display device 1600 are displayed in gold or a color similar to gold (a color similar to gold (yellow in this example)), and in conjunction with the gold display on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of specific decorative boards (for example, the door frame top central decorative board 455 of the door frame top unit 450, the door frame top left decorative board 456, the door frame top right decorative board 457, the door frame left side upper decorative board 422 of the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame left side decorative board 423 of the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame left side decorative board 424 of the door frame left side unit 420) are displayed in gold or a color similar to gold (a color similar to gold (yellow in this example)). The lower decorative substrate 423, the left decorative substrate 273 provided behind the left decorative lens 272, the lower right side decorative substrate 433 of the right side unit 430, the right decorative substrate 278 provided behind the right decorative lens 277, the upper right side decorative substrate 432 of the right side unit 430, the upper front left decorative substrate 3129 for illuminating and decorating the upper front left logo decorative portion 3122, the upper front left decorative substrate 3128 for illuminating and decorating the lower front logo decorative body 3167, the upper front left decorative substrate 3129 for illuminating and decorating the upper front left logo decorative portion 3121, the upper front left logo decorative portion 3122, and the lower front left sub-decorative portion 3123, the lower front left decorative substrate 3128 for illuminating and decorating the lower front logo decorative body 3167, a back-front-lower logo decorative board 3173 for illuminating the back-front-lower middle decorative body 3161; a back-front-lower left inner decorative board 3169 for illuminating the back-front-lower left inner decorative body 3163; a back-front-lower left outer decorative board 3170 for illuminating the back-front-lower left outer decorative body 3164; a back-front-lower right inner decorative board 3171 for illuminating the back-front-lower right inner decorative body 3165; a back-front-lower right outer decorative board 3172 for illuminating the back-front-lower right outer decorative body 3166; a back-front-lower right decorative board 3152 for illuminating the back-front-right logo decorative part 3141; The gold illumination is achieved by causing some or all of the LEDs mounted on each of the decorative boards (such as the back front upper right decorative board 3151 for illuminating and decorating the upper logo decoration 3142) to emit light in gold or a color similar to gold (a color similar to gold (yellow in this example)), and when the gold illumination effect is executed, it indicates a high probability of a jackpot (for example, when a jackpot is confirmed (jackpot confirmation effect), when the probability of a jackpot is high (jackpot notice), when the decorative pattern is in a reach (reach notice), or when it is executed as a reach effect after a reach has occurred to indicate a high probability of a jackpot). Note that for some or all of the various decorative boards mounted with LEDs on the door frame 3 or game board 5 that are light-emitting controlled in the gold illumination effect, an insulating coating may be applied to the lands of the through holes formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of each decorative board provided on the game board 5, thereby improving the reflectivity of the insulating coating.

Note that the execution of a gold effect may always result in a jackpot (with a jackpot expectation rate of 100%), or it may be an effect that is executed in both jackpot and miss situations but has the second-highest jackpot expectation rate (for example, a rainbow effect or an effect that displays backgrounds and characters in unusual patterns such as a giraffe, zebra, or ladybug, which has a higher jackpot expectation rate than the gold effect (for example, a jackpot expectation rate of 80-100%) (the jackpot expectation rate for the gold effect may be, for example, 60%)). In other words, the multiple effects corresponding to the jackpot expectation rate may include an effect with a lower jackpot expectation rate than the gold effect, but may include an effect with a higher jackpot expectation rate than the gold effect, or may not include an effect with a higher jackpot expectation rate than the gold effect. In this way, the gold effect is an effect that corresponds to a high jackpot expectation rate, and can make the player expect a jackpot when the gold effect is executed.

In the following, the gold effect will be shown as a combination of the gold display on the effect display device 1600, the gold light emitted by the LEDs mounted on each of the multiple specific decorative boards on the door frame 3, and the gold light emitted by the LEDs mounted on each of the multiple specific decorative boards on the game board 5. However, it may also be a combination of the gold display on the effect display device 1600, the gold light emitted by the LEDs mounted on each of the multiple specific decorative boards on the door frame 3, and the gold light emitted by the LEDs mounted on each of the multiple specific decorative boards on the game board 5.

For example, as shown in Figure 293, when a change pattern command is received from the main control board 1310 to instruct the start of a change effect such as the changing display of decorative patterns (in this example, a change effect that executes a gold effect) (Figure 293 (A)), the change display of the decorative patterns on the left, center, and right begins, the decorative patterns are displayed semi-transparently, and at a predetermined preview timing, a treasure chest is displayed as a character on the effect display device 1600, along with text (in this example, "Treasure chest found!") (Figure 293 (B)). At this time, the decorative patterns are displayed on top of these characters and text (upper layer), but while the characters and text are displayed opaque, the decorative patterns are displayed semi-transparently and change rapidly so as not to interfere with the visibility of the characters and text.

Then, based on the elapse of a predetermined period of time since the treasure chest was displayed on the performance display device 1600, a display is displayed showing the treasure chest being opened (Figure 293 (C)). At this time, the performance display device 1600 displays a display in which a golden light (light of a color similar to gold) is emitted from the treasure chest (gold display), and the LEDs mounted on each of the multiple specific decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, which are located in areas corresponding to the light emitted from the treasure chest displayed on the performance display device 1600, are made to emit a color similar to gold (gold emission). In this example, the top lid of the treasure chest displayed on the performance display device 1600 is gradually rotated, displaying a display in which the amount of light leaking from the treasure chest changes depending on the degree to which the treasure chest is open, and the LEDs mounted on each of the multiple specific decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, which are located in areas corresponding to the light leaking from the treasure chest, are made to emit a color similar to gold (gold emission). In Figure 293 (C), in synchronization with the rotation of the top lid of the treasure chest, the LEDs arranged above the top tray 201 (not all LEDs arranged above the top tray 201, but some of the multiple LEDs arranged above the top tray 201 (for example, the LEDs (LEDs mounted on the top back first decorative board) for decorating the top back first decorative part 3211 where the five 7-segment display parts of the top back movable decorative body 3210 are lined up left and right) may not emit gold light), the door frame left side unit 420 and the door frame right side unit 430 are gradually made to emit a color similar to gold from the bottom, and then, depending on the degree of rotation of the top lid of the treasure chest, the back front left decorative unit 3120 and the back front right decorative unit 3140, the back front upper right logo decorative part 3142, and the door frame top unit 450 are made to emit a color similar to gold in that order.

In Figure 293 (C), the gold display and gold light emission are executed in conjunction with the action of opening the treasure chest, giving the impression that the light leaking (emitted) from the treasure chest displayed on the performance display device 1600 is gradually spreading outside the performance display device 1600. This makes it easy to recognize the relationship between the gold display on the performance display device 1600 and the gold light emission from the LEDs mounted on each of the multiple specific decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and game board 5, and even when the color displayed on the performance display device 1600 by the gold display and the color of the LED emitted by the gold light emission are similar but not the same color, it can be recognized that the gold display and the gold light emission represent the same color.

Next, as shown in Figure 293 (D), a gold nugget is removed from the treasure chest displayed on the performance display device 1600, and a display is displayed in which light is reflected on the surface of the gold nugget and a golden light (light of a color similar to gold) is emitted from the gold nugget (gold display). Furthermore, in response to the golden light emitted from the gold nugget displayed on the performance display device 1600, the LEDs mounted on the door frames 3 arranged around the performance display device 1600 and on the multiple specific decorative boards provided on the game board 5 are made to emit a color similar to gold (gold emission). In Figure 293 (D), in addition to the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, rear front left decorative unit 3120, rear front right decorative unit 3140, rear front upper right logo decorative part 3142, and door frame top unit 450, the LEDs provided near the periphery and outer surface of the top surface of the button body 351 located below the upper tray 201, the unit upper cover 312, tray left decorative body 271, tray right decorative body 276, and the handle front lens 185 (not limited to all LEDs located below the upper tray 201, but some of the multiple LEDs located below the upper tray 201 (for example, multiple LEDs mounted on the handle decorative board 184 for illuminating the handle front lens 185) may not emit gold light) are illuminated in a color similar to gold.

In addition, the light guide plate 3110 may be made to emit gold light in addition to the above-mentioned golden light emission. For example, in Figure 293 (C), a gold display and golden light emission are executed in conjunction with the action of opening a treasure chest, and when an image of a gold nugget being removed from the treasure chest is displayed in Figure 293 (D), for example, multiple light guide plate LEDs 3128g on the rear front left decorative substrate 3128 in the rear front left decorative unit 3120 and multiple light guide plate LEDs on the rear front right first decorative substrate 3148, rear front right second decorative substrate 3149, and rear front right light guide plate decorative substrate 3150 in the rear front right decorative unit 3140 may be illuminated to cause the first pattern 3111 to be illuminated in gold or a color close to gold (a color similar to gold (yellow in this example)). This allows for a horizontal spread of the gold display on the performance display device 1600 and the gold light emitted by the LEDs mounted on each of the multiple specific decorative boards on the door frame 3 and game board 5, as well as a front-to-back spread displayed by the light guide plate 3110 positioned in front of the performance display device 1600, thereby improving the performance effect of the gold display.

When the gold effect is executed in this manner, the gold display on the effect display device 1600 and the golden light emitted by the LEDs mounted on each of the multiple specific decorative boards on the door frame 3 and the LEDs mounted on each of the multiple specific decorative boards on the gaming board 5 are executed in conjunction with each other (it is also possible for only one of the LEDs mounted on each of the multiple specific decorative boards on the door frame 3 and the LEDs mounted on each of the multiple specific decorative boards on the gaming board 5 to emit golden light), allowing the player to immediately recognize the relationship between the gold display on the effect display device 1600 and the golden light emitted by the LEDs, and a unified effect can be executed throughout the pachinko machine 1. Furthermore, as mentioned above, the gold effect indicates a high probability of a jackpot, so by executing the gold effect throughout the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for a jackpot and prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, after the treasure chest is displayed in Figure 293 (B), the appearance of the treasure chest being opened may be displayed based on the player's operation (such as when the touch operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 301 is touched or the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed).In this case, if the player does not operate, the appearance of the treasure chest being opened may not be displayed, or even if the player does not operate, the appearance of the treasure chest being opened may be displayed when the valid operation period has elapsed.In other words, after the treasure chest is displayed, a gold effect may be started in response to the player's operation, or the gold effect may not be executed unless the player operates, or even if the player does not operate, the gold effect may be started when the valid operation period has elapsed.

In addition, in this example, the player can determine whether or not there is a possibility of a jackpot by operating an operation unit such as the press operation unit 303 of the operation unit 300 while the gold effect is being executed. Specifically, when a gold effect is being executed as a variable effect in a variable display with a high probability of a jackpot, such as when a decorative pattern reaches a reach state as shown in FIG. 294(A), even if the press operation unit 303 of the operation unit 300 is pressed at timing t3 while the gold effect is being executed, the gold effect will continue to be executed until timing t4 without terminating.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 294 (B), if a gold effect is not being executed as a variable display with a high probability of a jackpot, such as when the decorative pattern reaches a reach, and the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed at timing t3 while the gold effect is being executed, the gold effect will end at timing t3 when the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed, and a predetermined effect mode (such as a variable display of decorative patterns) will be displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the LEDs mounted on each of the multiple specific decorative boards on the game board 5 and the LEDs mounted on each of the multiple specific decorative boards on the door frame 3 will be controlled to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode (in this example, they emit white light, but some or all of them may be turned off).

This allows the possibility of a jackpot to be determined by operating the presentation operation unit 300 when the gold effect is being displayed, and encourages the player to actively press an operation unit, such as the press operation unit 303, on the presentation operation unit 300 during the period from timing t2 to timing t4 when the gold effect is being displayed. Furthermore, if the player operates an operation unit, such as the press operation unit 303, during the period from timing t2 to timing t4 when the gold effect is being displayed and determines that the likelihood of a jackpot is high, the player's interest in the game can be increased. Note that the system is not limited to being able to determine the possibility of a jackpot based on whether the gold effect ends or continues when an operation unit, such as the press operation unit 303, is operated. It may also be possible to determine the possibility of a jackpot based on whether the gold effect ends or continues when a specific operation unit (e.g., the touch operation unit 302, the volume adjustment button 227, the light intensity adjustment button 228, the handle 195, etc.) among the multiple operation units provided on the pachinko machine 1 is operated. For example, it may be possible to determine whether or not there is a possibility of a jackpot depending on whether the gold effect ends or continues when the touch operation unit 302 is touched, or to determine whether or not there is a possibility of a jackpot depending on whether the gold effect ends or continues when the volume adjustment button 227 is pressed, or to determine whether or not there is a possibility of a jackpot depending on whether the gold effect ends or continues when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is pressed, or to determine whether or not there is a possibility of a jackpot depending on whether the gold effect ends or continues when the handle 195 is rotated and a game ball is hit, etc.

Furthermore, the device is not limited to being able to determine the possibility of a jackpot based on whether the gold effect ends or continues when the specific operation unit described above is operated. It may also be able to determine the possibility of a jackpot based on whether the gold effect ends or continues when a specific detection means (e.g., first start hole sensor 3002, second start hole sensor 2401, handle touch sensor 192, etc.) among the multiple detection means provided in pachinko machine 1 detects a ball that has entered the start hole (first start hole 2002 and second start hole 2004) and detects it with the start hole sensor (first start hole sensor 3002 and second start hole sensor 2401), or it may be able to determine the possibility of a jackpot based on whether the gold effect ends or continues when the handle touch sensor 192 detects contact with a palm, finger, etc. In this case, too, the player can be encouraged to play by having the specific detection means perform detection during the period from timing t2 to timing t4 when the gold effect is being performed. Furthermore, if the specific detection means performs detection during the period from timing t2 to timing t4 when the gold effect is being performed and determines that there is a high likelihood of a jackpot, interest in the game can be increased.

Furthermore, after the gold effect is ended based on the operation of an operation unit such as the press operation unit 303 while the gold effect is being executed, the effect display device 1600 may be configured to display effect information unrelated to the gold effect. This allows the player to recognize that the gold effect has ended and understand that the likelihood of a jackpot is low or that there is no possibility of a jackpot. Furthermore, if the effect display device 1600 displays effect information unrelated to the gold effect after the gold effect is ended based on the operation of an operation unit such as the press operation unit 303, the display of the effect information unrelated to the gold effect may also be terminated in response to the operation of an operation unit such as the press operation unit 303. Alternatively, the display of the effect information unrelated to the gold effect may be terminated if an operation unit such as the press operation unit 303 is not operated for a predetermined period of time while the display of the effect information unrelated to the gold effect is being executed. Furthermore, after the display of effect information unrelated to the gold effect being executed by the effect display device 1600 has ended, if a predetermined start condition is met (e.g., if an operation unit such as the press operation unit 303 has not been operated for a predetermined period of time, or if a non-variable effect period in which no variable effect is being executed has reached a predetermined period of time), the gold effect may be restarted. This imprints the light-emitting and display modes of the gold effect in the player's mind, and makes the player expect that a variable effect with a high probability of winning will be executed when the gold effect is executed in a variable effect executed thereafter, and causes the player to operate an operation unit such as the press operation unit 303. Furthermore, if the display of effect information unrelated to the gold effect being executed by the effect display device 1600 is ended on the condition that an operation unit such as the press operation unit 303 has not been operated for a predetermined period of time while the display of the effect information unrelated to the gold effect is being executed, the predetermined period may be reset (the predetermined period is reset and counted again from 0) based on the operation of an operation unit such as the press operation unit 303 before the predetermined period has elapsed. In this case, by repeatedly resetting the specified period during which effect information unrelated to the gold effect can be displayed and operating an operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 within that specified period, it is possible to delay the resumption of the gold effect or prevent the gold effect from being executed. This prevents the gold effect from being executed for players who do not want the gold effect to be executed, and prevents a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, in Figure 294 (B), if the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed while a gold effect is being executed, the light-emitting decoration of the gold effect on the LEDs mounted on each of the multiple specific decorative boards on the game board 5 and the LEDs mounted on each of the multiple specific decorative boards on the door frame 3 ends, and then the effect display, such as the gold effect display mode, on the effect display device 1600 ends at a timing that is delayed by a predetermined period from the timing at which the light-emitting decoration of the gold effect ends. This prevents the display content on the effect display device 1600 from being suddenly switched, and makes it possible to switch the display content while leaving behind the impression of the effect display, such as the gold effect display mode.

Furthermore, a predetermined sound may be output when the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed while a gold effect is being performed. In this case, after outputting the predetermined sound based on the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 being pressed, the performance display, such as the gold effect display mode, on the performance display device 1600 may be terminated a predetermined period of time (the same period as the predetermined period from the end of the gold effect if the predetermined sound is output at the same time as the end of the gold effect illumination decoration, or a different period from the predetermined period from the end of the gold effect illumination decoration if the predetermined sound is output at a different time from the end of the gold effect illumination decoration) from the timing at which the predetermined sound was output (which may be the same period as the predetermined period from the end of the gold effect illumination decoration). In this case, too, the display content of the performance display device 1600 is prevented from being suddenly switched when the predetermined sound is output, and the display content can be switched while the lingering impression of the performance display, such as the gold effect display mode, remains.

Furthermore, when the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed while a gold effect is being executed, the gold effect illumination decoration of the LEDs mounted on each of the multiple specific decorative boards on the gaming board 5 and the multiple specific decorative boards on the door frame 3 may be terminated, and then the gold effect illumination decoration of the LEDs mounted on each of the multiple specific decorative boards on the gaming board 5 and the multiple specific decorative boards on the door frame 3 may be restarted. In this case, after the gold effect illumination decoration of the LEDs mounted on each of the multiple specific decorative boards on the gaming board 5 and the multiple specific decorative boards on the door frame 3 is terminated, the gold effect illumination decoration of the LEDs mounted on each of the multiple specific decorative boards on the gaming board 5 and the multiple specific decorative boards on the door frame 3 may be restarted (while the gold effect display mode, etc. on the effect display device 1600 is continuing) before the gold effect display mode, etc. on the effect display device 1600 is terminated. This will increase the interest of players who may be disappointed because they have realized that the end of the golden light-up effect means that their chances of winning a jackpot are low or that there is no chance of winning a jackpot, and will get them to focus on the golden effect again.

Furthermore, if the light guide plate 3110 is configured to emit gold light as described above, or if the light guide plate 3110 is configured to emit light as a rainbow-colored light effect, it becomes possible to determine the possibility of a jackpot depending on whether the light-emitting decoration of the light guide plate 3110 ends or continues when the specific operation unit (press operation unit 303) is operated. In addition, when the light guide plate 3110 is decorated with light to produce a gold effect or a rainbow effect, the possibility of a jackpot can be determined by operating the specific operation unit. In cases where the light guide plate 3110 is decorated with light to produce a gold effect or a rainbow effect, and the display is changing and there is a high expectation of a jackpot, such as when the decorative pattern is in a reach state, the light guide plate 3110 continues to light up even when the specific operation unit is operated (by pressing the pressing operation unit 303). On the other hand, when the light guide plate 3110 is not decorated with light to produce a changing display and there is a high expectation of a jackpot, such as when the decorative pattern is in a reach state, the light guide plate 3110 may end to light up when the specific operation unit is operated (by pressing the pressing operation unit 303). That is, not only for the gold effect or the rainbow effect, but also for the specific operation unit (press operation unit 303) to be operated, the likelihood of a jackpot can be determined depending on whether the luminous decoration by the light guide plate 3110 ends or continues, and in this case, a configuration similar to the configuration that enables the likelihood of a jackpot to be determined when the specific operation unit (press operation unit 303) is operated during the gold effect or the rainbow effect as described above (for example, a configuration that ends the effect display of the effect display device 1600 at a timing that is delayed by a predetermined period from the timing when the luminous decoration by the light guide plate 3110 ends, or a configuration that displays effect information unrelated to the effect that was being executed) may be employed. This makes it possible to determine the likelihood of a jackpot based on the luminous decoration of the light guide plate 3110 that is provided so as to overlap with the display area of the effect display device 1600 that the player is focusing on, thereby enabling the player to easily determine the likelihood of a jackpot. Furthermore, as described above, the same configuration as the decorative substrate KB is applied to the rear front left decorative substrate 3128, rear front right first decorative substrate 3148, rear front right second decorative substrate 3149, and rear front right light guide plate decorative substrate 3150, light guide plate lower left decorative substrate 3174, and light guide plate lower right decorative substrate 3175, which are used to illuminate and decorate the light guide plate 3110. As a result, the reduction in reflectivity on the LED mounting surface of each substrate is suppressed, increasing the brightness of the light guide plate 3110, allowing the player to clearly see the illuminated decorative aspects of the light guide plate 3110.

In addition, when the light guide plate 3110 is not made to emit gold light during a gold effect, or when the light guide plate 3110 is not made to emit light as a light emission mode for a rainbow effect, it may be possible to determine the possibility of a jackpot depending on whether or not the light guide plate 3110 is decorated with light emission based on the operation of a specific operation unit (press operation unit 303). For example, when a gold effect or a rainbow effect is being executed as a variable effect in a variable display with a high expectation of a jackpot, such as when a decorative pattern reaches a reach, the light guide plate 3110 will not be illuminated and decorated even if the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed while the gold effect or rainbow effect is being executed. On the other hand, when a gold effect is not being executed as a variable display with a high expectation of a jackpot, such as when a decorative pattern reaches a reach, if the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed while the gold effect or rainbow effect is being executed, the light guide plate 3110 located in front of the effect display device 1600 may be illuminated and decorated in a manner different from the illumination manner of the gold effect or rainbow effect at the time the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed, thereby interfering with the display of the effect display device 1600 (making it more difficult to see than when the light guide plate 3110 is not illuminated and decorated). This allows the player to determine the possibility of a jackpot by operating the presentation operation unit 300 when a gold or rainbow effect is being executed, and encourages the player to actively press an operation unit such as the press operation unit 303 of the presentation operation unit 300 when a gold or rainbow effect is being executed. Furthermore, when a gold or rainbow effect is being executed, if the player operates an operation unit such as the press operation unit 303 and determines that the likelihood of a jackpot is high, the player's interest in the game can be increased. Furthermore, when a gold effect is not being executed as a variable display with a high likelihood of a jackpot, such as when a decorative symbol becomes a reach, the gold or rainbow effect may be terminated when the player operates an operation unit such as the press operation unit 303 of the presentation operation unit 300, or the gold or rainbow effect may be continued without being terminated when the operation unit such as the press operation unit 303 of the presentation operation unit 300 is operated. When a gold effect is not being executed as a variable display with a high probability of a jackpot, such as when a decorative pattern reaches a reach, and the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed while the gold effect or rainbow effect is being executed, not only does the light guide plate 3110 located in front of the effect display device 1600 illuminate and decorate at the timing when the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed, thereby interfering with the display on the effect display device 1600, but also the gold effect or rainbow effect ends at the timing when an operation unit such as the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated, thereby ensuring that the player is aware of it.

In addition, it may be possible to determine the possibility of a jackpot depending on whether or not the back, front, lower, and middle decorative body 3161 operates based on the operation of a specific operation unit (press operation unit 303). For example, when a gold effect or a rainbow effect is being executed as a variable effect in a variable display with a high expectation of a jackpot, such as when a decorative pattern reaches a reach, the back-front-lower-middle decorative body 3161 will not be operated even if the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed while the gold effect or rainbow effect is being executed. On the other hand, when a gold effect is not being executed as a variable display with a high expectation of a jackpot, such as when a decorative pattern reaches a reach, if the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed while the gold effect or rainbow effect is being executed, the back-front-lower-middle decorative body 3161 may be made to appear in front of the effect display device 1600 at the time the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed, thereby obstructing the display (which may be part or all) of the effect display device 1600 (making it more difficult to see than when the back-front-lower-middle decorative body 3161 is not operating). This allows the player to determine the possibility of a jackpot by operating the presentation operation unit 300 when a gold or rainbow effect is being executed, and encourages the player to actively press an operation unit such as the press operation unit 303 of the presentation operation unit 300 when a gold or rainbow effect is being executed. Furthermore, when a gold or rainbow effect is being executed, if the player operates an operation unit such as the press operation unit 303 and determines that the likelihood of a jackpot is high, the player's interest in the game can be increased. If a player operates an operation unit such as the press operation unit 303 of the presentation operation unit 300 when a gold effect is not being executed as a variable display with a high likelihood of a jackpot, such as when a decorative symbol becomes a reach, the gold or rainbow effect may be terminated when the operation unit such as the press operation unit 303 of the presentation operation unit 300 is operated, or the gold or rainbow effect may be allowed to continue without terminating when the operation unit such as the press operation unit 303 of the presentation operation unit 300 is operated. When a gold effect is not being executed as a variable display with a high expectation of a jackpot, such as when a decorative pattern reaches a reach, if the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed while the gold effect or rainbow effect is being executed, not only will the back, front, lower, and middle decorative body 3161 be revealed in front of the effect display device 1600 at the timing when the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed, thereby obstructing the display of the effect display device 1600, but also the gold effect or rainbow effect will end at the timing when an operation unit such as the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated, thereby ensuring that the player notices it. Furthermore, when a gold effect is not being executed as a variable display with a high probability of a jackpot, such as when the decorative pattern reaches a reach, the LEDs mounted on the back front lower middle decorative board 3168 mounted on the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 may be illuminated based on the player operating an operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300. In this case, the illumination may be set in a manner different from the illumination of the gold effect or rainbow effect. This not only makes the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 appear in front of the effect display device 1600, but also illuminates the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 in a manner different from the illumination of the gold effect or rainbow effect, ensuring that the player notices it.

In addition to the above examples, the sound output mode during the execution of a gold effect may be varied to determine whether or not a jackpot is likely to occur. For example, if a gold effect is being executed as a variable display with a high probability of a jackpot, such as when a decorative symbol reaches a reach, sound output in a mode corresponding to that gold effect may be executed. On the other hand, if a gold effect is not being executed as a variable display with a high probability of a jackpot, such as when a decorative symbol reaches a reach, sound output in a mode corresponding to that gold effect may not be executed, and sound output in a different mode, or no sound output may be executed at all. In this case, too, the execution of the gold effect and the sound output mode may determine whether or not a jackpot is likely to occur, and if it is determined that a jackpot is likely to occur, interest in the game may be increased.

In this example, prior to the golden effect, the LEDs that illuminate the first decorative part 3211 on the rear upper movable decorative body 3210, where the five 7-segment display units are lined up on the left and right, are controlled to illuminate. Specifically, as shown in Figures 294 (A) and (B), the CPU of the peripheral control IC in the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variable pattern command from the main control board 1310 at timing t0, and controls the first decorative part 3211 on the rear upper movable decorative body 3210, where the five 7-segment display units are lined up on the left and right, to an off state for the period from timing t1 onwards, when timing t1 arrives, before the golden effect starts, to the first decorative part 3211 on the rear upper movable decorative body 3210, where the five 7-segment display units are lined up on the left and right, is controlled to illuminate in red prior to the golden effect, and when timing t2 arrives the golden effect begins. The illumination control of the five 7-segment display units of the upper rear decorative element 3210, which precedes the golden effect, may, for example, count down the start timing of the golden effect, or flash and stop at a predetermined illumination pattern (such as a number indicating the probability of a jackpot). A dot matrix display unit may also be provided as the first upper rear decorative element 3211, in which case predetermined characters (such as HOT!) may be displayed as a display preceding the golden effect, or predetermined characters may be displayed so that they repeatedly flow from right to left on the dot matrix display unit.

In addition, the red illumination control of the rear upper first decorative part 3211 of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 continues even after the end of the gold effect. This makes it possible to increase the likelihood of a jackpot in the reach effect and other events that are executed after the end of the gold effect. In this way, the illumination control of the rear upper first decorative part 3211 is performed prior to the gold effect, and the illumination control of the rear upper first decorative part 3211 continues even after the end of the gold effect. Therefore, the illumination control of the rear upper first decorative part 3211 that is performed in advance can increase expectations for the start of the gold effect, and the illumination control of the rear upper first decorative part 3211 can increase expectations for a jackpot even after the end of the gold effect.

The illumination control of the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 must be initiated at least prior to the gold effect and continue even after the gold effect ends. It may be initiated at any timing between timing t0, when the display of the decorative pattern begins, and timing t2, when the gold effect begins (including when illumination control is initiated at timing t0), or it may be terminated at any timing between timing t4, when the gold effect ends, and timing t5, when the display of the decorative pattern ends (including when illumination control is terminated at timing t5). This allows the illumination state of the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 to determine whether or not the display of the decorative pattern is being changed. Furthermore, even if the display of the decorative pattern changes (timing t5) stops, if the display of the decorative pattern changes again before the specified period has elapsed, the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 may be controlled to continue illuminating without being turned off. In this case, the illumination state of the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 can be used to determine whether the display of the decorative pattern is being changed continuously. Additionally, when the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 is flashing or moving, the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 may be flashing at timing t1 preceding the gold effect, or after the moving display, the flashing or moving display may be stopped at any time between timing t2 after the start of the gold effect and timing t5 (including timing t5) when the changing display of the decorative pattern is stopped, and when the changing display of the decorative pattern is started again, the display content of the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 may be updated and the flashing or moving display may be resumed (timing t0). Even in this case, the presence or absence of a changing display of the decorative pattern can be determined by the presence or absence of a flashing or moving display in the rear upper first decorative portion 3211.

In this way, in this example, a high-expectation gold effect is executed, which indicates a high probability of a jackpot or has the potential to result in a jackpot, and a low-expectation gold effect which indicates a low probability of a jackpot or has no possibility of resulting in a jackpot. Note that, as described above, the gold effect is not limited to executing both gold display and gold light emission in conjunction with each other as a jackpot; it may also be executed by executing only one of gold display and gold light emission. In this case, if one of gold display and gold light emission is executed as a high-expectation gold effect, the high-expectation gold effect will continue to be executed even if a player operates the controls during the execution of the high-expectation gold effect (the gold display and gold light emission that were executing before the player operated the controls will continue after the operation). On the other hand, if a low-expectation gold effect is executed, the low-expectation gold effect will end if a player operates the controls during the execution of the low-expectation gold effect (the gold display and gold light emission that were executing before the player operated the controls will end). This configuration encourages players to operate the controls and actively participate in the game, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, while the high-expectation gold effect and low-expectation gold effect are being executed, a sound effect corresponding to the gold effect is output. If an operation unit or the like is operated while the low-expectation gold effect is being executed, the low-expectation gold effect will end and the output of the sound effect will also end. On the other hand, while the high-expectation gold effect is being executed, the high-expectation gold effect will not end even if an operation unit or the like is operated, and the sound effect will continue to be output until the high-expectation gold effect ends. It is also possible to make at least some of the sound effects output during the execution of a high-expectation gold effect different from the sound effects output during the execution of a low-expectation gold effect (for example, a specific gold sound effect may be output during a high-expectation gold effect, and a non-specific gold sound effect different from the specific gold sound effect may be output during a low-expectation gold effect (which may be similar overall with only some differences from the specific gold sound effect, or may be completely different from the specific gold sound effect), or sound effects may be output during a high-expectation gold effect, and no sound effects may be output during a low-expectation gold effect. In this case, although it may be possible to determine whether a high-expectation gold effect or a low-expectation gold effect is being executed based on the sound effect effect, it becomes possible to reliably determine whether a high-expectation gold effect or a low-expectation gold effect is being executed depending on whether the gold effect ends or continues when an operation unit or the like is operated.

It may also be possible to determine whether a high-expectation gold effect or a low-expectation gold effect is being executed based on whether specific image information is displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the detection of a player's operation. For example, as shown in FIG. 295, if an operation unit such as the press operation unit 303 is operated while the low-expectation gold effect is being executed (FIG. 295(B)), specific image information 1600a may be displayed for a certain period of time (e.g., 5 seconds) (FIG. 295(D)), while if an operation unit such as the press operation unit 303 is operated while the high-expectation gold effect is being executed, specific image information 1600a may not be displayed. This configuration makes it possible to determine whether a low-expectation gold effect or a high-expectation gold effect is being executed based on whether specific image information 1600a is displayed, thereby encouraging the player to operate the device and actively participate in the game, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, if an operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 is operated again while the specific image information 1600a is being displayed, the fixed period during which the specific image information 1600a can be displayed may be reset (the display period of the specific image information 1600a may be reset and measured again from 0). For example, if the specific image information 1600a is displayed for five seconds based on the operation of an operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303, if an operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 is operated again during the display period of the specific image information 1600a (within five seconds after the specific image information 1600a is displayed), the display period of the specific image information 1600a may be extended by displaying the specific image information 1600a for five seconds from the time the operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 is operated again. This prevents the player from missing the specific image information 1600a displayed on the effect display device 1600. Furthermore, even if the display period of the specific image information 1600a has not reached the above-mentioned fixed period (for example, 5 seconds), the display of the specific image information 1600a may be terminated if a specified condition is met (for example, if a game ball enters the start port (either the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004) or if an abnormal condition as described above occurs), and in this case, it will be possible to know that the specified condition has been met because the display of the specific image information 1600a has ended before the above-mentioned fixed period has been reached.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 295 (D), the specific image information 1600a can be displayed even after the end of the low-expectation gold effect until the aforementioned certain period of time (e.g., 5 seconds) has elapsed. This makes it possible to display the specific image information 1600a even if an operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 is operated just before the end of the low-expectation gold effect, thereby ensuring that the player is aware that the specific image information 1600a is being displayed, or in other words, that the low-expectation gold effect has been executed.

In addition, while the above example shows that specific image information 1600a is displayed when an operation unit such as press operation unit 303 is operated during the execution of a low-expectation gold effect, specific image information 1600a may be changed based on further operation of an operation unit such as press operation unit 303 after the specific image information 1600a is displayed. For example, a character may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 as specific image information 1600a based on operation of an operation unit such as press operation unit 303 during the execution of a low-expectation gold effect (Fig. 295(B)). Further operation of an operation unit such as press operation unit 303 thereafter may cause the character as specific image information 1600a to swell (get fatter) (Fig. 295(C)), and the body shape of the character as specific image information 1600a may be gradually changed in stages (for example, six stages with body shape 1 being the smallest and body shape 6 being the largest) in accordance with the operation of an operation unit such as press operation unit 303 (Figs. 295(B) to 295(D)). In this way, not only can the operation of an operation unit such as pressing operation unit 303 determine whether or not specific image information 1600a is displayed, but specific image information 1600a can also be changed in stages in response to the operation of an operation unit such as pressing operation unit 303. This not only ensures that the player is aware that specific image information 1600a is being displayed on the effect display device 1600 while a low-expectation gold effect is being executed, but also makes it possible to alleviate disappointment due to the change in the character that represents specific image information 1600a, even when the player realizes that a low-expectation gold effect is being executed.

Furthermore, a character as specific image information 1600a may be displayed when any one of the multiple operation units is operated. In this case, the character as specific image information 1600a may change to an expanding (getting fatter) state based on the operation of a first operation unit of the multiple operation units (Fig. 295(C)), and the character as specific image information 1600a may change to a shrinking (getting thinner) state based on the operation of a second operation unit of the multiple operation units (Fig. 295(C)). This not only ensures that the specific image information 1600a is being displayed on the effect display device 1600 while the low-expectation gold effect is being executed, but also makes it possible to alleviate disappointment due to the change in the character as specific image information 1600a even when the player recognizes that the low-expectation gold effect is being executed. Furthermore, even if the body type of the character representing specific image information 1600a changes to the maximum value (body type 6) or minimum value (body type 1) by operating one of the first and second operation units, the body type of the character representing specific image information 1600a can be further changed from the maximum value (body type 6) towards the minimum value (body type 1) or from the minimum value (body type 1) towards the maximum value (body type 6) by operating the other of the first and second operation units.

Furthermore, when the effect display device 1600 starts a variable display that executes a high-expectation gold effect, it is possible to prevent the display of specific image information 1600a based on operation of an operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303, even before the high-expectation gold effect is executed. This increases the player's anticipation of a jackpot even before the high-expectation gold effect is executed, drawing attention to the high-expectation gold effect and increasing interest in the game.

In addition, when a low-expectation gold effect is being executed, a specific sound may be output in response to operation of an operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 (for example, an electronic sound such as a "beep" output when an operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 is operated, or a sound corresponding to the behavior of the specific image information 1600a (for example, a sound such as a "beep" in response to changes in the specific image information 1600a becoming fatter or thinner in Figures 295(B) to 295(D))). This allows a specific sound to be output in connection with the display of the specific image information 1600a when a low-expectation gold effect is being executed, thereby making the player aware of the change in the display of the specific image information 1600a, thereby mitigating disappointment for the player. Furthermore, even when a high-expectation gold effect is being executed, the above-mentioned specific sound may be output in response to operation of an operation unit such as the press operation unit 303. In this case, even when an operation unit such as the press operation unit 303 is operated, the specific image information 1600a is not displayed on the effect display device 1600. However, by outputting the specific sound in response to operation of an operation unit such as the press operation unit 303, it becomes possible to recognize that operation of an operation unit such as the press operation unit 303 has been reliably accepted, and it is possible to increase the player's interest in the game when they recognize that a high-expectation gold effect is being executed.

In addition, when a specific sound is output in response to operation of an operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 (for example, an electronic sound such as a "beep" output when an operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 is operated, or a sound corresponding to the movement of the specific image information 1600a (for example, a sound such as a "beep" output in response to the specific image information 1600a becoming fatter or fatter in Figures 295(B) to 295(D))), the specific sound may be output before the display of the specific image information 1600a changes, and the display of the specific image information 1600a displayed on the effect display device 1600 is then changed. By configuring in this way, the specific sound notifies the player that the display of the specific image information 1600a will change, allowing the player to be aware of the change in the display of the specific image information 1600a in advance before the display of the specific image information 1600a is changed, making it possible to prevent the player from missing the change in the display of the specific image information 1600a.

In addition, when a low-expectation gold effect is being executed, the light-emitting mode of the LEDs mounted on a specific decorative board capable of producing the above-mentioned gold light emission, among the multiple decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 or game board 5, may be changed in response to the operation of an operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 (for example, changing the light-emitting color, changing the light-emitting pattern (such as the blinking interval), changing the brightness, etc.). In this case, too, when a low-expectation gold effect is being executed, the light-emitting mode of the LEDs mounted on the specific decorative board is changed in conjunction with the display of the specific image information 1600a, making it possible to make the player aware of the change in the display of the specific image information 1600a and alleviating disappointment for the player. In this case, too, the light-emitting mode of the LEDs mounted on the specific decorative board may be changed (for example, changing the light-emitting color, changing the light-emitting pattern (such as the blinking interval), changing the brightness, etc.) prior to the change in the display of the specific image information 1600a. By configuring it in this way, changes to the display of the specific image information 1600a are notified by changing the light emission mode of the LEDs mounted on the specific decorative board, allowing the player to be aware of the changes in the display of the specific image information 1600a in advance, making it possible to ensure that changes in the display of the specific image information 1600a are not overlooked.

Furthermore, when specific image information 1600a is displayed based on operation of an operation unit such as pressing operation unit 303 while a low-expectation gold effect is being executed, specific image information 1600a may be displayed after the low-expectation gold effect being executed based on operation of an operation unit such as pressing operation unit 303 has ended. By configuring it in this way, not only can the display of specific image information 1600a be displayed, but the end of the low-expectation gold effect can also be used to make it clear that a low-expectation gold effect was being executed, and it is possible to prevent a low-expectation gold effect with low expectations of a jackpot from being executed endlessly, thereby reducing interest in the game.

In addition, in the above example, the specific image information 1600a is not displayed when an operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 is operated while the high-expectation gold effect is being performed. However, even when the variable display for the high-expectation gold effect is being performed, if an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1 (when the opening of the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4 is detected (when the opening of the door frame 3 makes it difficult to see the light emitted by the LEDs mounted on each of the multiple specific decorative boards provided on the door frame 3), when a vibration sensor (not shown) detects vibration of the game board 5 for a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) (when it detects that an action such as hitting the pachinko machine 1 is being performed, when the vibration of the pachinko machine 1 causes the light emitted by the LEDs mounted on each of the multiple specific decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and game board 5 and the display of the effect display device 1600 to become blurred and difficult to see), when a detection signal is input from the full-tank detection sensor 154 (when it is detected that the lower tray 202 is full of game balls), or when a detection signal is input from the ball-out detection sensor 574, When a specific condition is met, such as when a minor error occurs (an error unlikely to indicate cheating, such as when it is detected that there are no game balls in the guide passage 570a), when a radio wave goof is detected (when electromagnetic waves or the like cause noise in the light emitted by the LEDs mounted on each of the multiple specific decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 or the game board 5, or when noise is caused in the display of the performance display device 1600), when a magnetic goof is detected, when a detection signal is input from the second start port sensor 2401 when the second start port 2004 is not open, or when a detection signal is input from the large prize port sensor 2402 when the game is not in a big win game state or a small win game state), the specific image information 1600a may be displayed, or after the specific image information 1600a is displayed, the display mode of the specific image information 1600a may be changed based on whether an operation unit, such as the pressing operation unit 303, is further operated. By configuring it in this way, even in situations where the specific sound is difficult to hear, the display of the specific image information 1600a or changes in the display mode of the specific image information 1600a make it possible to recognize that operation of an operation unit such as the press operation unit 303 has been reliably accepted, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game when they recognize that a high-expectation golden effect is being executed.

Metallic luster such as gold cannot be displayed using a single display element (single display element) on a display device such as the performance display device 1600. For this reason, in this example, gold is expressed by displaying an image on the performance display device 1600 that has been effect-processed with yellow, a color close to gold. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 296(A), in this example, when the performance display device 1600 uses graphic processing to display gold to represent metallic luster such as gold, the performance display device 1600 displays yellow characters, letters, patterns, etc. with gradations of light and dark, displays star-shaped, diamond-shaped, radial, etc. irradiance (areas that represent luster and are lighter in color than their surroundings (whitish areas)), displays shadows (dark shadows), etc., thereby expressing the metallic luster and allowing the user to recognize that gold is being displayed just by the gold display on the performance display device 1600.

Similarly, since light-emitting devices such as lamps and LEDs cannot reproduce the color gold using a single light-emitting element (only one light-emitting element), gold is expressed by applying effects to a yellow color that is close to gold. For example, as shown in FIG. 296(B), multiple LEDs can be made to emit a common yellow color, but a predetermined number of LEDs can be made to emit yellows of gradually varying brightness (gradation), or instead of all multiple LEDs emitting the same color (yellow), some LEDs can be made to emit white to express a radiance, or LEDs positioned along the extension of the radial radiance displayed on the performance display device 1600 can be made to emit a color close to gold, such as yellow, while the others are turned off, or LEDs positioned along the extension of the radial radiance displayed on the performance display device 1600 can be made to emit a brighter color (a light yellow, such as a pale yellow) while LEDs not positioned along the extension of the radial radiance can be made to emit a darker color (a blackish yellow, such as a dark yellow), thereby expressing a metallic luster, and allowing the user to recognize that gold light is being emitted in conjunction with the gold display displayed on the performance display device 1600. In addition to or instead of these, the front mounting surface of the substrate on which the LED is mounted may be covered with a lens-cut (polyhedral) member (such as a lens member, or a double lens member consisting of two members, an outer member and an inner member, in which case the degree of lens cutting (number of faces, size, etc.) of the outer member and the inner member may be made different. By using a double lens member or a double lens with different degrees of lens cutting, the refraction of light becomes irregular, improving the sparkle effect), and by making the refractive index of light different, the light from the LED can be refracted. It is also possible to diffuse light or to create areas where light is concentrated and high brightness and areas where light is avoided and low brightness, creating a sparkling effect and expressing the luster of gold or metal. The placement of such lens-cut members can also make it appear as if gold light is being emitted, and the lens-cut members can reduce the visibility behind the members, making it difficult to see the front mounting surface of the board, the electronic components mounted on the front mounting surface, the front-side indicia, etc., thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game due to the visibility of such information unrelated to the game. Furthermore, a multifaceted lens-cut member may be placed so that the boundary between one surface and the other surface overlaps the front-side indicia, which distorts the image seen through the lens-cut member and makes it difficult to see the front-side indicia. Furthermore, in this example, by linking the gold display on the performance display device 1600 with the LEDs mounted on each of the multiple specific decorative boards on the door frame 3 and game board 5 emitting gold light, a synergistic effect is created between the gold display and gold light emission, allowing players to perceive a high percentage of the time that gold display and light emission is occurring.

Furthermore, as described above, in this example, among the multiple decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and equipped with multiple LEDs, specific decorative boards capable of emitting gold light are selected, namely, the upper front left decorative board 3129 for illuminating and decorating the upper front left logo decoration 3122, the left front decorative board 3128 for illuminating and decorating the upper front left logo decoration 3121, the upper front left logo decoration 3122, and the left front sub-decorative board 3123, the lower front logo decoration board 3173 for illuminating and decorating the lower front logo decoration 3167, the lower front middle decorative board 3168 for illuminating and decorating the lower front middle decoration 3161, the lower front left inner decorative board 3169 for illuminating and decorating the lower front left inner decoration 3163, and the lower front left outer decorative board 3164 for illuminating and decorating the lower front logo decoration 3165. The back front lower left outer decorative board 3170, the back front lower right inner decorative board 3171 for illuminating the back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, the back front lower right outer decorative board 3172 for illuminating the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166, the back front lower right decorative board 3152 for illuminating the back front right logo decorative part 3141, the back front upper right decorative board 3151 for illuminating the back front upper right logo decorative part 3142, and the back rear upper first decorative board (not shown) on which LEDs are mounted to illuminate the back rear upper first decorative part 3211, on which the five 7-segment display units of the back rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are arranged left and right, are coated with a white solder resist (protective material) on the surface on which the multiple LEDs are mounted (LED mounting surface).

Furthermore, among the multiple decorative boards mounted on the door frame 3 and equipped with multiple LEDs, certain decorative boards capable of emitting the above-mentioned golden light, namely, the door frame top central decorative board 455 of the door frame top unit 450, the door frame top left decorative board 456, the door frame top right decorative board 457, the door frame left upper decorative board 422 of the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame left lower decorative board 423 of the door frame left side unit 420, the dished left decorative board 273 provided behind the dished left decorative lens 272, the door frame right lower decorative board 433 of the door frame right side unit 430, the dished right decorative board 278 provided behind the dished right decorative lens 277, and the door frame right upper decorative board 432 of the door frame right side unit 430, have a white solder resist (protective material) coated on the surface on which the multiple LEDs are mounted (LED mounting surface).

On certain decorative boards provided on the game board 5 or door frame 3, the white solder resist (protective material) coated on the surface (LED mounting surface) on which multiple LEDs are mounted is screen-printed with ink of high brightness and saturation (for example, bright colors such as yellow or yellow-green) to indicate the attributes of the surface-side electronic components, such as letters and symbols (part numbers of electronic components) to avoid confusion with the mounted LEDs and other decorative boards, and areas indicating the position where the electronic components are to be placed (which may also include the shape of the surface-side electronic components, the size of the surface-side electronic components, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the surface-side electronic components, and the model of the surface-side electronic components). In other words, of the multiple decorative boards mounted on the game board 5 or door frame 3 and each mounting multiple LEDs, the LED mounting surface of a specific decorative board is coated with a white solder resist (protective material), which has the highest reflectivity, and is screen-printed with ink of high brightness and saturation (for example, bright colors such as yellow or yellow-green) using letters and symbols (electronic component numbers) to avoid confusion between the mounted LEDs and other electronic components and other decorative boards, as well as surface-side notations indicating the attributes of the surface-side electronic components, such as areas indicating the location of the electronic components (which may also include the shape, size, mounting orientation, and model of the surface-side electronic component).

As described above, the gold effect involves causing the LEDs mounted on these specific decorative boards to emit the same yellow light as the front-side display area. Coating the surface of the specific decorative board with a white solder resist (protective material) and causing the multiple LEDs mounted on this specific decorative board to emit the same color as the front-side display area formed on the LED mounting surface not only increases the reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface, but also prevents the light emitted from these multiple LEDs from being attenuated by the front-side display area, resulting in clear, high-brightness gold illumination. Furthermore, by forming the front-side display area using yellow, which has a reflectivity similar to white, the reflectivity on the LED mounting surface can be made nearly uniform. This allows the light emitted from the LEDs to be reflected uniformly on the LED mounting surface of the specific decorative board, preventing uneven illumination and enhancing the gold effect, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, among the specific decorative boards provided on the gaming board 5 and door frame 3, all other decorative boards, except for the first rear-upper decorative board on which the five 7-segment display units of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 are aligned horizontally, are equipped with full-color LEDs, which emit a golden light when the above-mentioned gold effect is executed. On the other hand, the first rear-upper decorative board (not shown) among the specific decorative boards is equipped with only monochromatic LEDs (red in this example). Even when a gold effect is executed, the five 7-segment display units of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 do not emit a golden light, and simply display letters, numbers, pictures, etc. in the same luminous color (red in this example) as when a gold effect is not executed, resulting in an effect different from the gold effect. In other words, the five 7-segment display units of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210, which display letters, numbers, pictures, etc., do not change their luminous color even when a gold effect is executed, thereby displaying the displayed letters, numbers, pictures, etc. in a manner that is easy for players to see, thereby preventing players from receiving incorrect information. Furthermore, while the gold effect is being performed, it is also possible to not control the light emission of the monochromatic LEDs mounted on the first decorative board on the rear upper back of the specific decorative boards. In this case, the light emission of the full-color LEDs mounted on the decorative boards other than the first decorative board on the rear upper back of the specific decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and door frame 3 can be controlled, and the entire pachinko machine 1 can be illuminated in a unified light color (golden light emission), enhancing the effect of the effect.

In addition, both monochromatic LEDs and full-color LEDs may be mounted on the first decorative board at the rear top. In this case, the monochromatic LEDs among the multiple LEDs mounted on the first decorative board at the rear top may emit light in the same color as when the gold effect is not being performed, without emitting gold light, even when the gold effect is being performed, or may be turned off while the gold effect is being performed, while the full-color LEDs among the multiple LEDs mounted on the first decorative board at the rear top may emit gold light.

In this example, the front mounting surface (LED mounting surface) on which the LEDs of the specific decorative board provided on the game board 5 or door frame 3 are mounted is coated with a white solder resist (protective material), and the front mounting surface (LED mounting surface) on which the LEDs of the specific decorative board are mounted is screen-printed using ink of a high brightness and saturation color (for example, a bright color such as yellow or yellow-green) with letters and symbols (electronic component part numbers) to avoid confusion with the electronic components to be mounted and other decorative boards, and front-side notation indicating the attributes of the front-side electronic components such as areas indicating the position where the electronic components are to be placed (which may also include the shape of the front-side electronic component, the size of the front-side electronic component, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic component, and the model of the front-side electronic component). In this example, the back mounting surface (non-LED mounting surface) of the specific decorative board provided on the game board 5 or door frame 3, on which LEDs are not mounted, is also coated with a white solder resist (protective material), and the above-mentioned back side markings are also applied by screen printing to the back mounting surface (non-LED mounting surface) of the specific decorative board on which LEDs are not mounted using ink of high brightness and saturation (for example, a bright color such as yellow or yellow-green). Therefore, when light is irradiated onto the non-LED mounting surface of the specific decorative board from multiple LEDs mounted on other decorative boards (which may be decorative boards other than the specific decorative board, or may be other specific decorative boards among the multiple specific decorative boards), the irradiated light can be reflected with high efficiency and used efficiently, thereby suppressing a decrease in the amount of light. Additionally, the back mounting surface (non-LED mounting surface) of a specific decorative board on which LEDs are not mounted may be coated with a solder resist (protective material) of a different color (e.g., a dark color such as green or black) from the front mounting surface (LED mounting surface) on which LEDs are mounted, or the indicia on the back side may be screen-printed using ink of a color with low brightness and saturation (e.g., black or green).

As described above, the gaming panel 1100 of the gaming board 5 comprises a transparent, flat panel plate 1110 whose outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 that holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110, is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, and has a rear surface to which the back unit 3000 is attached. As described above, the front component 1000 is formed to be transparent, along with the gaming panel 1100. This makes it possible to visually confirm the presence of various components arranged behind the gaming panel 1100 through the gaming panel 1100 from the front of the front component 1000 (i.e., the front of the gaming board 5) (hereinafter, this may be referred to as the "transparent gaming panel 1100").

In addition, as described above, the front unit 2000 attached to the front of the game panel 1100 is made almost entirely transparent, including the front component 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a, the game panel 1100 that defines the rear end of the game area 5a, the starting port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, the upper left side unit 2300, the first attacca unit 2400, the center gimmick 2500, the second attacca unit 2600, the middle right side unit 2700, and the gate member 2800. For this reason, for example, as shown in FIG. 134, under normal conditions, the left-front decorative unit 3120, the right-front decorative unit 3140, the middle decorative body 3161, the lower-front inner decorative body 3163, the lower-front left outer decorative body 3164, the lower-front right inner decorative body 3165, the lower-front right outer decorative body 3166, the lower-front logo decorative body 3167, the upper-back movable decorative body 3210, the left-back side decorative body 3220, and the right-back side decorative body 3230 of the upper-back performance unit 3200 in the rear unit 3000 located behind the gaming panel 1100 can be clearly seen through them, and the performance image displayed on the performance display device 1600 can also be clearly seen through the frame of the center role device 2500.

For example, in the back-front-left decorative unit 3120, transparent decorative bodies, including the back-front-lower middle decorative body 3161, the back-front-lower-left inner decorative body 3163, the back-front-lower-left outer decorative body 3164, the back-front-lower-right inner decorative body 3165, and the back-front-lower-right outer decorative body 3166, are arranged behind the transparent gaming panel 1100, and the back-front-left decorative board 3128 is arranged behind these transparent decorative bodies. Multiple full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors are mounted on the front (front mounting surface) of the back-front-left decorative board 3128. Thus, behind the transparent gaming panel 1100, the transparent decorative bodies, including the back-front-lower middle decorative body 3161, the back-front-lower-left inner decorative body 3163, the back-front-lower-left outer decorative body 3164, the back-front-lower-right inner decorative body 3165, and the back-front-lower-right outer decorative body 3166, and the back-front-left decorative board 3128, are arranged in this order. A white resist layer is formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of the back-front-left decorative board 3128 using a white insulating film (hereinafter simply referred to as "solid white resist") formed by applying a white resist liquid. On the solid white resist applied to the front surface (front mounting surface) of the back-front-left decorative board 3128, a yellow (similar to the gold of the multiple obstacle nails N (made of brass in this embodiment)) front-side notation indicating the part numbers of the multiple full-color LEDs and other front-side electronic components, attributes of the front-side electronic components such as areas indicating the positions where the front-side electronic components are to be placed, and other information indicating the shape, size, mounting orientation, and model of the front-side electronic components, is silk-screen printed on the white resist.

In addition, as shown in Figure 137, within the game area 5a of the game board 5, multiple gold-colored obstacle nails N (in this embodiment, brass is used) that come into contact with the game ball and are arranged in a predetermined gauge array are planted on the transparent game panel 1100, so that the eye-catching properties of the multiple gold-colored obstacle nails N can be utilized. In other words, because multiple gold-colored obstacle nails N are embedded in the front of the transparent gaming panel 1100, the eye-catching nature of the multiple gold-colored obstacle nails N contributes to making it difficult to notice the presence of the front-side indicia in yellow (a color similar to the gold of the multiple obstacle nails N) that is silk-screened on the white resist applied solidly to the back-front-left decorative board 3128, even when the front (front mounting surface) of the back-front-left decorative board 3128 can be seen through the transparent decorative bodies, namely the back-front-lower middle decorative body 3161, the back-front-lower-left inner decorative body 3163, the back-front-lower-left outer decorative body 3164, the back-front-lower-right inner decorative body 3165, and the back-front-lower-right outer decorative body 3166, which are arranged behind the transparent gaming panel 1100.

Like the back-front-left decorative unit 3120, the back-front-right decorative unit 3140 also contributes to making the presence of the obscuring markings on the front surface difficult to notice. In other words, because multiple gold-colored obstacle nails N are embedded in the front surface of the transparent gaming panel 1100, the eye-catching nature of the multiple gold-colored obstacle nails N contributes to making the presence of the yellow (similar to the gold of the multiple obstacle nails N) obscuring markings on the front surface difficult to notice, even when the front surface (front mounting surface) of the back-front-right decorative board 3151 and back-front-lower-right decorative board 3152 of the back-front-right decorative unit 3140 can be seen through the transparent decorative elements of the back-front-right logo decorative part 3141 and back-front-right logo decorative part 3142 of the back-front-right decorative unit 3140, which are located behind the transparent gaming panel 1100.

Furthermore, for example, when the multiple full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors mounted on the front surface (front mounting surface) of the back-front-left decorative substrate 3128 of the back-front-left decorative unit 3120 are turned off, the front side marking portion formed in yellow similar to gold on the white insulating film formed on the surface of the back-front-left decorative substrate 3128 is displayed on the back-front-lower middle decorative body 3161, back-front-lower-left inner decorative body 3163, back-front-lower-left outer decorative body 3164, back-front-lower-right inner decorative body 3165, and back-front Although it is visible through the transparent decorative body, the lower right outer decorative body 3166, and the transparent gaming panel 1100, the white insulating film formed on the surface of the rear front left decorative board 3128 provides a white background, and the line of sight is naturally guided from the surface of the rear front left decorative board 3128 to the gold-colored obstacle nails N planted on the surface of the transparent gaming panel 1100, which is positioned in front of the surface of the rear front left decorative board 3128. As a result, even when the rear front left decorative board 3128 is used as a type of decoration visible to the player, the eye is drawn to the gold-colored obstacle nails N, making the white insulating film formed on the surface of the rear front left decorative board 3128 less visible, thereby less disrupting the gaming machine's unique aesthetic. This prevents a decrease in decorativeness.

Furthermore, as with the back-front-left decorative unit 3120, the back-front-right decorative unit 3140 can also be prevented from losing its decorativeness. In other words, when the multiple full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors mounted on the front surface (front mounting surface) of the back-front-right decorative board 3151 and the back-front-right-lower decorative board 3152 of the back-front-right decorative unit 3140 are turned off, the front-side indicia formed in a yellow color similar to gold on the white insulating film formed on the surface of the back-front-right-upper decorative board 3151 and the back-front-right-lower decorative board 3152 are transparently displayed on the back-front-right decorative unit 3140's transparent decorative bodies, the back-front-right logo decorative part 3141 and the back-front-right-upper logo decorative part 3142, and the transparent play Although visible through the trick panel 1100, the white insulating film formed on the surface of the back-front upper right decorative board 3151 and the back-front lower right decorative board 3152 creates a white background, and the eye is naturally drawn from the surface of the back-front upper right decorative board 3151 or the back-front lower right decorative board 3152 to the gold-colored obstacle nail N due to the eye-catching nature of the gold-colored obstacle nail N embedded in the surface of the transparent gaming panel 1100, which is positioned in front of the surface of the back-front upper right decorative board 3151 or the back-front lower right decorative board 3152. As a result, even if the back-front upper right decorative board 3151 or the back-front lower right decorative board 3152 is used as a type of decoration visible to the player, the eye is drawn to the gold-colored obstacle nail N, making the white insulating film formed on the surface of the back-front upper right decorative board 3151 or the back-front lower right decorative board 3152 less visible, thereby less disrupting the gaming machine's unique aesthetic. This prevents a decrease in decorativeness.

In this example, multiple gold-colored obstacle nails N are planted on the front of the transparent gaming panel 1100. Alternatively, a transparent cell sheet of a predetermined shape can be attached to the front of the gaming panel 1100, and a gold design (the same color as the gold of the multiple obstacle nails N, or a color similar to this gold) can be applied to part of this cell sheet. This allows the eye-catching portion of the gold-colored design to be seen through the transparent decorative bodies, for example, the back-front-lower middle decorative body 3161, the back-front-lower-left inner decorative body 3163, the back-front-lower-left outer decorative body 3164, the back-front-lower-right inner decorative body 3165, and the back-front-lower-right outer decorative body 3166 of the back-front-left decorative unit 3120, which are arranged behind the portion of the gold-colored design. Even if the front surface (front mounting surface) can be seen from the outside, or even if the front surface (front mounting surface) of the back front upper right decorative board 3151 and back front lower right decorative board 3152 of the back front right decorative unit 3140 can be seen through the transparent decorative bodies of the back front right logo decorative part 3141 and back front upper right logo decorative part 3142 of the back front right decorative unit 3140, which are located behind the part with the gold design, the presence of the yellow (similar color to the gold of the designed part on the cell sheet) front side markings silk-screened on the solid white resist applied to the back front left decorative board 3128 of the back front left decorative unit 3120 and the back front upper right decorative board 3151 and back front lower right decorative board 3152 of the back front right decorative unit 3140 can be made difficult to see.

Even when configured in this manner, when the multiple full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors mounted on the front surface (front mounting surface) of the back-front-left decorative board 3128 of the back-front-left decorative unit 3120 and on the back-front-right upper right decorative board 3151 and back-front-right lower right decorative board 3152 of the back-front-right decorative unit 3140 are turned off, the front side markings formed in a yellow color similar to gold on the white insulating film formed on the surface of the back-front-left decorative board 3128, back-front-right upper right decorative board 3151, and back-front-right lower right decorative board 3152 are displayed on the transparent decorative bodies of the back-front-left decorative unit 3120, namely the back-front-lower middle decorative body 3161, back-front-lower-left inner decorative body 3163, back-front-lower-left outer decorative body 3164, back-front-lower-right inner decorative body 3165, and back-front-lower-right outer decorative body 3166, and the back-front-right logo decorative body 3141 and Although the gold design can be seen through the transparent decorative bodies, the rear front left decorative board 3128, the rear front right upper logo decorative board 3142, and the transparent gaming panel 1100, the white insulating film formed on the surface of the rear front left decorative board 3128, the rear front right upper decorative board 3151, and the rear front right lower decorative board 3152 creates a white background, and the eye can be naturally guided from the surface of the rear front left decorative board 3128, the rear front right upper decorative board 3151, and the rear front right lower decorative board 3152 to the gold designed parts of the cell sheet due to the eye-catching nature of the gold designed parts of the cell sheet attached to the surface of the transparent gaming panel 1100 positioned in front of the surface of the rear front left decorative board 3128, the rear front right upper decorative board 3151, and the rear front right lower decorative board 3152. As a result, even if the back front left decorative board 3128, back front upper right decorative board 3151, and back front lower right decorative board 3152 are used as a type of decoration visible to the player, the gold design on the cell sheet is drawn to the player's attention, making it difficult to see the white insulating film formed on the surface of the back front left decorative board 3128, back front upper right decorative board 3151, and back front lower right decorative board 3152, and therefore the gaming machine's worldview is less likely to be disrupted. This prevents a decrease in decorativeness.

In addition, it is possible to avoid implanting obstacle nails on the gaming panel 1100 in front of the surface of at least one of the seven-segment display units (or the entire surface of the rear upper first decorative unit 3211) of the rear upper first decorative unit 3211, where the five seven-segment display units of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are arranged side by side. This configuration prevents the obstacle nails N from obstructing visibility of the seven-segment display units of the rear upper first decorative unit 3211, making it easier for players to see information such as letters, numbers, and pictures displayed on the seven-segment display units of the rear upper first decorative unit 3211, and therefore ensuring that the information displayed on the seven-segment display units is conveyed to the player reliably. In addition, for the rear upper first decorative board on which LEDs are mounted to illuminate and decorate the rear upper first decorative part 3211, on which the five 7-segment display parts of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are lined up on the left and right, at least the surface on which the multiple LEDs are mounted (LED mounting surface) may be coated with a dark colored (black, green, purple, etc.) solder resist (protective agent) (a similar solder resist may also be coated on the back surface on which no LEDs are mounted (non-LED mounting surface)).This suppresses light interference on the surface on which the multiple LEDs of the rear upper first decorative board are mounted (LED mounting surface) and makes it possible to individually identify the light emitted from each of the multiple LEDs, so that information such as letters, numbers, and pictures can be clearly displayed on the 7-segment display part. In addition, the surface (LED mounting surface) of the first decorative substrate on which the multiple LEDs are mounted may be provided with an opaque partition section (which may be formed integrally with the first decorative section 3211 or formed separately from the first decorative section 3211) that partitions each of the multiple LEDs and suppresses light interference.In this case, the light emitted from each of the multiple LEDs can be more clearly identified, allowing information such as letters, numbers, and pictures to be clearly displayed on the 7-segment display section. In this case, only electronic components other than LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface may be mounted with dark-colored (black, green, purple, etc.) exteriors (cases, packages, housings, etc.) (e.g., connectors with green housings, etc.), or all of the predetermined number of electronic components, including the LED element packages, may be mounted with dark-colored (black, green, purple, etc.) exteriors (cases, packages, housings, etc.) (e.g., one or more (any combination) of LED elements with black packages or connectors with green housings, etc.), with electronic components with white or light-colored exteriors being mounted on the non-LED mounting surface. In this case, the reflectivity of the LED mounting surface can be prevented from increasing due to electronic components mounted on the LED mounting surface, and light interference on the LED mounting surface can be suppressed, allowing information such as letters and numbers displayed on the 7-segment display to be clearly displayed, ensuring that this information is conveyed to the player reliably.

In addition, the rear upper first decorative part 3211 of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 has a metallic decorative part 3211a (shaded area in Figure 297) with a gold metallic luster formed around the 7-segment display unit. The gold metallic luster of this metallic decorative part 3211a not only gives it a luxurious feel, but also reflects light emitted from lamps and LEDs installed around the rear upper first decorative part 3211, thereby increasing brightness.

Furthermore, even when the gold effect is executed as described above, the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper first decorative part 3211 of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 do not emit gold light but instead execute an effect different from the gold effect (displaying letters, numbers, pictures, etc. in the same luminous color (red in this example) as when the gold effect is not executed). In this way, the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper first decorative unit 3211 of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 do not emit gold light even when a gold effect is executed, but the metallic decorative unit 3211a, which is formed to surround the periphery of the 7-segment display units and has a golden metallic luster, is configured to reflect light of a color similar to gold (yellow in this example) emitted from the lamps and LEDs provided around the rear upper first decorative unit 3211, and by reflecting the light of a color similar to gold (yellow in this example) emitted from the lamps and LEDs provided around this rear upper first decorative unit 3211 off the metallic decorative unit 3211a with a golden metallic luster, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that gold light is being emitted.

This metal decorative portion 3211a is formed by hot stamping metal foil of a predetermined color (gold in this embodiment). Specifically, first, an intermediate product of the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 is formed by injection molding synthetic resin. The formed intermediate product of the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 is then mounted in a predetermined position in a hot stamping device. At this time, a transfer sheet bearing the desired metal foil and a flat hot plate with an elastic underside heated to a predetermined temperature are placed above the intermediate product of the rear upper first decorative portion 3211. The hot plate is then lowered a predetermined distance below the top edge of the intermediate product of the rear upper first decorative portion 3211, and the heat of the hot plate transfers (foil stamps) the metal foil from the transfer sheet. This results in the metal decorative portion 3211a being formed on the rear upper first decorative portion 3211.

The hot plate of the hot stamping device used to form the metal decorative portion 3211a in this embodiment has an elastic portion that abuts the rear upper first decorative portion 3211, to which the metal foil of the transfer sheet is to be transferred. Therefore, even if the transfer destination (the front surface of the rear upper first decorative portion 3211) is not flat but curved, it can elastically deform along that surface, allowing the metal foil to be transferred (foil stamped) in good condition even to portions with three-dimensional shapes such as curved surfaces. This allows the metal decorative portion 3211a to be easily formed without the need for large-scale equipment, compared to forming it by plating or vapor deposition, thereby suppressing cost increases. It is also possible to form a metal film by plating or vapor deposition on the surface of an intermediate product before the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 is completed.

In addition, in this example, a metallic decorative part (metallic decorative part 3211a) with a golden metallic luster was formed on a decorative body (first decorative part 3211 on the rear upper back) equipped with a monochromatic LED that does not perform a gold effect during execution of a gold effect. However, metallic decorative parts with a golden metallic luster may be formed on decorative bodies equipped with full-color LEDs, not just monochromatic LEDs, or on some of the decorative bodies equipped with full-color LEDs that perform a gold effect during execution of a gold effect. By forming metallic decorative parts with a golden metallic luster on decorative bodies equipped with full-color LEDs, even if they do not emit gold light during a gold effect, when a full-color LED attached to a decorative body on which a metallic decorative part with a golden metallic luster is formed emits light during execution of other effects, the light is reflected by the metallic decorative part formed around the LED, making it appear as a golden light. Therefore, for players who recognize that a gold effect is being performed, this increases their expectations for a jackpot and enhances their interest in the game. Furthermore, if metallic decorative parts with a golden metallic luster are formed on some of the multiple decorative parts equipped with full-color LEDs that produce golden effects, not only will light of a color similar to gold (yellow in this example) emitted from lamps or LEDs located around the decorative part on which the metallic decorative parts with a golden metallic luster are formed be reflected by the metallic decorative parts with a golden metallic luster, making it easier for players to recognize that golden light is being emitted, but also light of a color similar to gold (yellow in this example) emitted from the full-color LEDs located on the decorative part on which the metallic decorative parts with a golden metallic luster are formed be reflected by the metallic decorative parts formed around these LEDs, making it easier for players to recognize that golden light is being emitted.

In addition, in the above example, a light-emitting effect of a color similar to gold (yellow in this example) is executed during the execution of a gold effect, and a metallic decorative part with a gold metallic luster, which is a color corresponding to this light-emitting color, is formed on the decorative body. However, in a gaming machine capable of executing specific effects that control light emission with a specific light-emitting color, a decorative part with a luster of a color that corresponds to the specific light-emitting color (colors that can be recognized as the same, or similar colors (e.g., gray and silver)) may be formed on the decorative body. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to execute an effect with special value that matches a specific light-emitting color with a specific glossy color formed on the decorative part of the decorative body, among the multiple types of effects executed on the gaming machine, and when a specific effect that controls light emission with a specific light-emitting color is executed, players can infer that there is a high chance of a jackpot, thereby increasing their interest in the game. Furthermore, when a specific effect is executed as described above, not only are the light emission of multiple light-emitting means (lamps, LEDs, etc.) controlled to a specific light color, but some or all of the characters, letters, patterns, etc. displayed on the effect display device 1600 are displayed in the specific color, so that the characters, letters, patterns, etc. displayed in the specific color on the effect display device 1600 are linked to the multiple light-emitting means (lamps, LEDs, etc.) that emit light in the specific light color, thereby executing an effect that displays the specific color on the entire pachinko machine 1 (even if some of the colors are different); even if the specific color displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the specific color displayed by the light-emitting means are not the same, the relationship can be easily recognized, and the player can be made to recognize that there is a high possibility of winning, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, the rear upper first decorative part 3211 of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 has a metallic decorative part 3211a (shaded area in Figure 297) with a gold metallic luster that surrounds the periphery of the 7-segment display unit. Therefore, even if the front surface (front mounting surface) of the rear upper first decorative board can be seen through the rear upper first decorative part 3211 due to the eye-catching gold metallic decorative part 3211a, this contributes to making it difficult to notice the presence of the front side notation part in yellow (a color similar to the gold of the multiple obstacle nails N) that is silk-screened on the white resist that is applied solidly to the rear upper first decorative board.

In addition, through-holes, lands, etc. are formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of the rear-upper first decorative substrate. Because the copper foil is exposed, the through-holes, lands, etc. stand out against the white insulating film. However, the eye is naturally drawn from the front surface (front mounting surface) of the rear-upper first decorative substrate to the metal decorative portion 3211a provided (formed) on the rear-upper first decorative substrate due to the eye-catching color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3211a. This draws the eye to the metal decorative portion 3211a provided (formed) on the rear-upper first decorative substrate, making the presence of the through-holes, lands, etc. less noticeable. Therefore, when performing artwork work to route the wiring pattern on the rear-upper first decorative substrate, there is no need to be restricted by the position, size, or number of the through-holes and lands. This allows for greater freedom in routing the wiring pattern on the rear-upper first decorative substrate and also contributes to reducing the time required for artwork work.

In addition, the front surface (front mounting surface) of the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 provided in the back front lower performance unit 3160 is formed with a metallic decorative portion 3161a with a metallic luster, as shown in Figure 297, and the entire surface except for the metallic decorative portion 3161a is transparent. The metallic decorative portion 3161a has a predetermined color (gold in this embodiment), and the front side marking portion that identifies the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors and that is silk-screened on a solid white resist applied to the front surface (front mounting surface) of the back front lower middle decorative board 3168 is yellow, so the color of the front side marking portion (yellow) is similar to the color of the metallic decorative portion 3161a (gold).

In addition, while a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is not mounted on the front surface (front mounting surface) of the back front lower middle decorative board 3168 corresponding to the metal decorative portion 3161a of the back front lower middle decorative body 3161, a full-color LED capable of emitting multicolor light is mounted on the front surface (front mounting surface) of the back front lower middle decorative board 3168 corresponding to the transparent area of the back front lower middle decorative body 3161 excluding the metal decorative portion 3161a.

When the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned off, the white insulating film formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of the back-front-lower-middle decorative substrate 3168 can be seen through the transparent area of the back-front-lower-middle decorative body 3161, excluding the metallic decorative portion 3161a with a metallic luster. However, because the white insulating film formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of the back-front-lower-middle decorative substrate 3168 forms a white background, the eye is naturally guided from the front surface (front mounting surface) of the back-front-lower-middle decorative substrate 3168 to the metallic decorative portion 3161a provided (formed) on the back-front-lower-middle decorative body 3161 due to the eye-catching color (gold) of the metallic decorative portion 3161a. As a result, the eye is drawn to the metallic decorative portion 3161a provided (formed) on the back-front-lower-middle decorative body 3161, making it difficult to see the white insulating film and surface-side indicia formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of the back-front-lower-middle decorative substrate 3168. This makes it difficult for the concept of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) (i.e., the worldview of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5)) to be disrupted. This prevents a decline in interest in playing the game.

In addition, through-holes, lands, etc. are formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of the back-front-lower-middle decorative substrate 3168. Because the copper foil is exposed, the through-holes, lands, etc. stand out against the white insulating film. However, the eye is naturally drawn from the front surface (front mounting surface) of the back-front-lower-middle decorative substrate 3168 to the metal decorative portion 3161a provided (formed) on the back-front-lower-middle decorative body 3161 due to the eye-catching color (gold) of the metal decorative portion 3161a. This makes it difficult to notice the presence of the through-holes, lands, etc. formed on the front surface of the back-front-lower-middle decorative substrate 3168. This means that when performing artwork work to route the wiring pattern on the back-front-lower-middle decorative substrate 3168, there is no need to be restricted by the position, size, or number of the through-holes and lands. This allows for greater freedom in routing the wiring pattern on the back-front-lower-middle decorative substrate 3168 and also contributes to reducing the time required for artwork work.

In addition, if an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1 while the gold effect is being performed (if the opening of the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4 is detected (if the opening of the door frame 3 makes it difficult to see the light emitted by the LEDs mounted on each of the multiple specific decorative boards attached to the door frame 3), if a vibration sensor (not shown) detects vibration of the game board 5 for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) (if it detects that an action such as hitting the pachinko machine 1 is being performed, or if the vibration of the pachinko machine 1 causes the light emitted by the LEDs mounted on each of the multiple specific decorative boards attached to the door frame 3 and game board 5 and the display of the effect display device 1600 to become blurred and difficult to see), if a detection signal is input from the full tank detection sensor 154 (if it detects that the lower tray 202 is full of game balls), or if a detection signal is input from the ball out detection sensor 574 (if an induction When a minor error occurs, such as when it is detected that there is no game ball in the conductive path 570a, which is an error that is unlikely to indicate cheating, when radio wave gouge is detected (when electromagnetic waves or the like cause noise in the light emitted by the LEDs mounted on each of the multiple specific decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 or the game board 5, or when noise is caused in the display of the effect display device 1600), when a magnet gouge is detected, when a detection signal is input from the second start hole sensor 2401 when the second start hole 2004 is not open, when a detection signal is input from the large prize hole sensor 2402 when the game is not in a big win game state or a small win game state, which is an error that is likely to indicate cheating, etc.), a specific decorative board provided on the game board 5 among the specific decorative boards that implement LEDs that emit gold light when a gold effect is executed (A back front upper left decorative board 3129 for illuminating and decorating the back front upper left logo decoration 3122, a back front left decorative board 3128 for illuminating and decorating the back front left logo decoration 3121, the back front upper left logo decoration 3122, and the back front left sub-decorative board 3123, a back front lower logo decoration board 3173 for illuminating and decorating the back front lower logo decoration 3167, a back front lower middle decorative board 3168 for illuminating and decorating the back front lower middle decoration 3161, and a back front lower left interior A back front lower left inner decorative substrate 3169 for illuminating and decorating the decorative body 3163, a back front lower left outer decorative substrate 3170 for illuminating and decorating the back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, a back front lower right inner decorative substrate 3171 for illuminating and decorating the back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, a back front lower right outer decorative substrate 3172 for illuminating and decorating the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166, a back front lower right decorative substrate 3152 for illuminating and decorating the back front right logo decorative part 3141, and a back The LEDs mounted on the rear front upper right decorative board 3151 for illuminating the front upper right logo decoration 3142 are turned off, and the LEDs mounted on specific decorative boards installed in the door frame 3 (such as the central top decorative board 455 of the top unit 450, the top left decorative board 456, the top right decorative board 457, the upper left decorative board 422 of the left side unit 420, the lower left decorative board 423 of the left side unit 420, the left decorative board 273 installed behind the left decorative lens 272, the lower right decorative board 433 of the right side unit 430, the right decorative board 278 installed behind the right decorative lens 277, and the upper right decorative board 432 of the right side unit 430) are controlled to emit light in an abnormality alert mode (flashing red light at maximum brightness (light intensity)).

On the other hand, the multiple LEDs mounted on the rear upper first decorative board (not shown) provided on the rear upper first decorative part 3211, among the specific decorative boards provided on the gaming board 5, where the five 7-segment display parts of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are lined up on the left and right, are designed to continue displaying (which may be a predetermined lighting pattern that continues, or a lighting pattern that changes based on the occurrence of an abnormality (for example, a display indicating the type of abnormality)) without being turned off even if an abnormality occurs during the execution of the golden effect. In this way, the decorative boards are provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 and coated with a white solder resist (protective material), and the front mounting surface (LED mounting surface) on which the LEDs of the specific decorative board are mounted has letters and symbols (component numbers of electronic components) to avoid confusion with the mounted electronic components and other decorative boards, and front-side notations indicating the attributes of the front-side electronic components such as areas indicating the position of the electronic components (which may also include the shape of the front-side electronic components, the size of the front-side electronic components, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic components, and the model of the front-side electronic components), screen-printed using ink of high brightness and saturation (for example, bright colors such as yellow and yellow-green).Of the specific decorative boards, those that are provided on the back-upper first decorative part 3211 on which the five 7-segment display parts of the back-upper movable decorative body 3210 are lined up on the left and right continue to display (continues to display the predetermined lighting pattern until the variable time has elapsed). This allows information related to the game to be displayed and made known even when an abnormality occurs. Furthermore, if an extremely serious error occurs that makes it difficult to continue playing, such as an abnormality in the main control board 1310, among the serious errors mentioned above, the lighting pattern of the multiple LEDs mounted on the rear upper first decorative board provided on the rear upper first decorative part 3211 where the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are lined up left and right, can be changed to display an indication according to the type of abnormality, or the multiple LEDs mounted on the rear upper first decorative board provided on the rear upper first decorative part 3211 where the five 7-segment display units of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are lined up left and right, can be turned off, in which case the severity of the abnormality can be immediately determined.

In addition, in this example, the light intensity adjustment button 228 can be operated even while the above-mentioned gold effect is being performed, and the light intensity of the LEDs mounted on a specific decorative board among the multiple decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 or gaming board 5 can be changed (adjusted) at the timing when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated. Specifically, pressing the button marked with the letter "+" of the two light intensity adjustment buttons 228 immediately brightens (increases light intensity) the LEDs of a specific decorative board among the multiple decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 or gaming board 5, and pressing the button marked with the letter "-" immediately dimmers (decreases light intensity) the LEDs of a specific decorative board among the multiple decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 or gaming board 5.

In addition, when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated under certain conditions, the result of the light intensity adjustment may be reflected at a timing delayed from the timing at which the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated. For example, as shown in FIG. 298(A), when a gold effect is being executed as a variable effect in a variable display with a high expectation of a jackpot, such as when a decorative pattern reaches a reach state (when a high expectation gold effect is being executed), if the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated to change the brightness from 3 to 4 at timing t'3 during the execution of the gold effect, the brightness may be changed to 4 at timing t'4 when the gold effect ends, without changing (adjusting) the light intensity of the LEDs mounted on a specific decorative board out of the multiple decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 or game board 5 at timing t'3 when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 298 (B), when a gold effect is not being executed as a variable effect in a variable display with a high expectation of a jackpot, such as when a decorative pattern reaches a reach (when a low expectation gold effect is being executed), if the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated to change the brightness from 3 to 4 at timing t'3 during the execution of the gold effect, the light intensity of the LEDs mounted on a specific decorative board out of the multiple decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 or game board 5 may be changed to brightness 4 at timing t'3 when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated.

In this way, when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated under specific conditions, the results of the light intensity adjustment are reflected at a timing delayed from when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated. This makes it possible to determine the state of the gaming machine and the possibility of a jackpot, thereby preventing a decline in interest in gaming.

In addition, in Figure 298 (B), if the light intensity of the LEDs mounted on a specific decorative board among the multiple decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 or gaming board 5 is changed at time t'3 when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated, the low-expectation gold effect may be ended at time t'3 when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated, and the light emission mode of the LEDs mounted on any of the multiple decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 or gaming board 5 (which may be all of the multiple decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 or gaming board 5, or a predetermined number of the multiple decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 or gaming board 5) may be changed (for example, by lighting them up in white at a constant brightness, emitting light in a different light emission mode from gold light, or changing (lengthening) the blinking interval, etc.). This makes it easy to adjust the light intensity. That is, when the LEDs mounted on a specific decorative board among the multiple decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 or the gaming board 5 are emitting gold light, the light intensity of the LEDs mounted on the specific decorative board changes over time, making it difficult to grasp the current light intensity, and therefore it cannot be said to be a state suitable for adjusting the light intensity. By ending the low-expectation gold effect at timing t'3 when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated and causing the LEDs mounted on one of the multiple decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 or the gaming board 5 to emit white light at a constant brightness, for example, it becomes easier to grasp the current light intensity and to adjust the light intensity to the player's preference. Furthermore, when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated at timing t'3, the low-expectation gold effect ends and the light emission mode of the LEDs mounted on any of the multiple decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 or the gaming board 5 (which may be all of the multiple decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 or the gaming board 5, or a predetermined number of the multiple decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 or the gaming board 5) is changed, the LEDs mounted on any of the multiple decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 or the gaming board 5 (which may be all of the multiple decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 or the gaming board 5, or a predetermined number of the multiple decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 or the gaming board 5) may be made to emit light at the adjusted brightness in response to the operation of the light intensity adjustment button 228. In this case, the adjusted brightness can be confirmed by the emission of the LEDs mounted on any of the multiple decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 or the gaming board 5, making it easier for the player to adjust the brightness to their liking.

Furthermore, specific conditions under which the result of the light intensity adjustment is reflected at a timing delayed from the timing at which the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated as described above may include: when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated during the execution of a high expectation gold effect or when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated during the execution of a low expectation effect, the result of the light intensity adjustment is reflected after the end of the high expectation gold effect or the low expectation gold effect; when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated during the execution of a specific reach effect, the result of the light intensity adjustment is reflected after the end of the specific reach effect; when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated during the occurrence of an abnormal condition as described above (not limited to all abnormal conditions, but may be only a specific abnormal condition (for example, when the door frame 3 is detected to be open relative to the main frame 4)), the result of the light intensity adjustment is reflected after the end of the abnormal condition; and when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated during the execution of a setting change process, the result of the light intensity adjustment is reflected after the end of the setting change process. In this case, too, the timing at which the results of the light intensity adjustment are reflected makes it possible to determine the state of the gaming machine and the possibility of a jackpot, thereby preventing a decline in interest in gaming.

In addition, in this example, the volume adjustment button 227 can be operated even while the above-mentioned gold effect is being performed, and when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated, the volume of the music, voice, sound effects, and other sound effects output from the top center speaker and top side speakers of the door frame 3 and the bass main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4 can be changed (adjusted). Specifically, pressing the button marked with the letter "+" among the two volume adjustment buttons 227 instantly increases the volume of the music, voice, sound effects, and other sound effects output from the top center speaker and top side speakers of the door frame 3 and the bass main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4, and pressing the button marked with the letter "-" instantly decreases the volume of the music, voice, sound effects, and other sound effects output from the top center speaker and top side speakers of the door frame 3 and the bass main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4.

In addition, when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated under certain conditions, the result of the volume adjustment may be reflected at a timing delayed from the timing at which the volume adjustment button 227 is operated. For example, as shown in FIG. 299(A), when a gold effect is being executed as a variable effect in a variable display with a high expectation of a jackpot, such as when a decorative pattern reaches a reach (when a high expectation gold effect is being executed), if the volume adjustment button 227 is operated to change the volume from 3 to 4 at timing t"3 during the execution of the gold effect, the volume of the sound for the effects, such as music, voice, and sound effects output from the top center speaker and top side speakers of the door frame 3 and the low-frequency main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4, may not be changed (adjusted) at timing t"3 when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated, but may be changed to 4 at timing t"4 when the gold effect ends, or may be changed to 4 at timing t"5 when the variable effect ends.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 299 (B), when a gold effect is not being executed as a variable effect in a variable display with a high expectation of a jackpot, such as when a decorative pattern reaches a reach (when a low expectation gold effect is being executed), if the volume adjustment button 227 is operated to change from volume 3 to volume 4 at timing t"3 during the execution of the gold effect, the volume of the sound for effects such as music, voice, sound effects, etc. output from the top center speaker and top side speakers of the door frame 3 and the low-frequency main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4 may be changed to volume 4 at timing t"3 when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated.

In this way, when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated under certain conditions, the result of the volume adjustment is reflected at a time delayed from when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated. This makes it possible to determine the state of the gaming machine and the possibility of a jackpot, thereby preventing a decline in interest in gaming.

In addition, when changing the volume of the sound for effects such as music, voice, and sound effects output from the top center speaker and top side speakers of the door frame 3 and the low-frequency main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4 at timing t"3 when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated in Figure 299 (B), the low-expectation gold effect may be ended at timing t"3 when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated. This makes it easier to adjust the volume. In other words, when the LED mounted on a specific decorative board out of the multiple decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 or the game board 5 is emitting gold light, the player is unable to concentrate on adjusting the volume and it is difficult to adjust the volume to the player's liking, and the sound for effects changes over time, making it difficult to grasp the current volume, so it is not a suitable state for adjusting the volume. At time t"3 when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated, the low-expectation gold effect is ended, and an LED mounted on one of the multiple decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 or game board 5 is made to emit white light at a constant brightness, for example, or no sound for the effect is output, making it easier for the player to concentrate on adjusting the volume and adjust the volume to their liking. Furthermore, when the low-expectation gold effect is ended at time t"3 when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated and no sound for the effect is output, a confirmation sound may be output at the adjusted volume in response to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227. In this case, the confirmation sound makes it easier for the player to confirm the adjusted volume and adjust the volume to their liking.

Furthermore, specific conditions under which the result of the volume adjustment is reflected at a timing delayed from the timing at which the volume adjustment button 227 is operated as described above may include: when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated during the execution of a high expectation gold effect or when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated during the execution of a low expectation effect, the result of the volume adjustment is reflected after the end of the high expectation gold effect or the low expectation gold effect; when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated during the execution of a specific reach effect, the result of the volume adjustment is reflected after the end of the specific reach effect; when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated during the occurrence of an abnormal condition as described above (not limited to all abnormal conditions, but may be only a specific abnormal condition (for example, when the door frame 3 is detected to be open relative to the main body frame 4)), the result of the volume adjustment is reflected after the end of the abnormal condition; when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated during the execution of a setting change process, the result of the volume adjustment is reflected after the end of the setting change process; etc. In this case, too, the timing at which the volume adjustment results are reflected makes it possible to determine the state of the gaming machine and the possibility of a jackpot, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, in the above example, when a specific operation unit (e.g., pressing operation unit 303, touch operation unit 302, volume control button 227, light intensity control button 228, handle 195, etc.) among the multiple operation units provided on pachinko machine 1 is operated, or when a specific detection means (e.g., first start opening sensor 3002, second start opening sensor 2401, handle touch sensor 192, etc.) among the multiple detection means provided on pachinko machine 1 is detected, the possibility of a jackpot can be determined depending on whether the above gold effect ends or continues. However, the decorations executed by the effect display device 1600 In a variable effect such as a variable display of a symbol, a display (operation prompting display, for example, "Press the button!") prompting the operation of the effect operation unit 350 is made, and when the effect operation unit 350 is operated within a predetermined effective period after the display is made, during a period in which a button effect that changes the display content (display mode (appearance of a character, change of background color, change of display color, etc.)) of the effect display device 1600 is not being executed, if a first specific operation unit (for example, pressing operation unit 303, contact operation unit 302, etc.) of a plurality of operation units provided in the pachinko machine 1 is operated, or if a plurality of detection means provided in the pachinko machine 1 is operated, When a first specific detection means (for example, the first starting hole sensor 3002, the second starting hole sensor 2401, the handle touch sensor 192, etc.) detects a change in the light emission mode (one or more of the light emission color, brightness, light emission pattern, blinking interval, switching between the on state and the off state, etc.) of the first specific light emitting means (for example, the LED 364a of the decorative substrate 364 in the button) provided in the pachinko machine 1, or when a second specific operation unit (for example, the volume adjustment button 227, the light amount adjustment button 228, the handle 195, etc.) of the multiple operation units provided in the pachinko machine 1 is operated, In this case, when detection is made by a second specific detection means (for example, the general winning slot sensor 3001, the gate sensor 2801, etc.) among the multiple detection means provided in the pachinko machine 1, it may be possible to determine whether or not there is a possibility of a jackpot based on whether or not the light emission mode (one or more of the light emission color, brightness, light emission pattern, blinking interval, switching between on and off states, etc.) of the first specific light-emitting means provided in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the LED on the upper left front decorative board 3129 provided on the game board 5, or the LED on the door frame top center decorative board 455 provided on the door frame 3, etc.) changes.

For example, if an operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed during the execution of the high-expectation gold effect described above, the light emission mode of the LED 364a on the decorative substrate 364 inside the button will not change (no change in the light emission mode will be allowed), whereas if an operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed a predetermined number of times (which may be once or multiple times) during the execution of the low-expectation gold effect, the LED 364a on the decorative substrate 364 inside the button will change from a lit state to an unlit state or from an unlit state to a lit state (allowing a change in the light emission mode), and the central portion of the top surface 351a of the button body 351, i.e., the pressing operation unit 303, will change from a lit state to an unlit state or from an unlit state to a lit state (the light emission color, brightness, light emission pattern, flashing interval, and light emission mode may be changed). When the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated during the execution of the high expectation gold effect, the light emission mode of the LEDs that are mounted on a specific decorative board among the multiple decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 or the game board 5 and emit gold light will not be changed (no change in the light emission mode will be allowed), whereas when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated during the execution of the low expectation gold effect, the brightness of the LEDs that are mounted on a specific decorative board among the multiple decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 or the game board 5 and emit gold light will be changed (change in the light emission mode will be allowed) compared to before the operation (this may be one or more of the light emission color, brightness, light emission pattern, flashing interval, switching between a lit state and an off state, etc.). In this case, the pressing operation unit 303 may be pressed a predetermined number of times (may be once or multiple times) during the execution of the low expectation gold effect to change the LED 364a of the button interior decorative substrate 364 from a lit state to an unlit state, and then when the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed again a predetermined number of times (may be once or multiple times), the LED 364a of the button interior decorative substrate 364 may be changed from an unlit state to a lit state, or the pressing operation unit 303 may be pressed a predetermined number of times (may be once or multiple times) to change the LED 364a of the button interior decorative substrate 364 from an unlit state to a lit state. The LED 364a of the button inner decorative substrate 364 may be configured to alternate between a lit state and an unlit state, or the LED 364a of the button inner decorative substrate 364 may be configured to return to a lit state if the pressing operation unit 303 is not pressed for a predetermined period after the LED 364a of the button inner decorative substrate 364 has been changed from a lit state to an unlit state, or the brightness may be changed in stages in response to the operation of the light intensity adjustment button 228 (pressing the "+" side changes the brightness towards 6, and pressing the "-" side changes the brightness towards 1).

Furthermore, the operation of an operation unit such as the pressing operation unit 303 is not limited to changing the light emission mode of an LED or other light-emitting element provided on the pressing operation unit 303, but may also change the light emission mode of an LED or other light-emitting element arranged around the pressing operation unit 303. When configured to change the light emission mode of an light-emitting element arranged around the operation unit in this way, the change in the light emission mode of the light-emitting element can be seen even if the operation unit is covered by the hand. Furthermore, the operation unit is not limited to being operated by pressing or rotating, as long as it can be operated by the player; for example, it may be a lever-shaped operation unit, a trigger-shaped operation unit, a touch panel, or the like, which is operated by touching it.

It is sufficient that the light-emitting effects such as the high-expectation gold effect and the low-expectation gold effect are executed at the timing when an operation unit such as the press operation unit 303 is pressed. When an operation unit such as the press operation unit 303 is pressed, the brightness of the gold-emitting LEDs mounted on a specific decorative board among the multiple decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 or the gaming board 5 may be changed after the low-expectation gold effect ends. In other words, in the low-expectation gold effect, while a change in the light-emitting mode of the LEDs mounted on a specific decorative board among the multiple decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 or the gaming board 5 is permitted when an operation unit such as the press operation unit 303 is operated, the change in the light-emitting mode of the LEDs mounted on a specific decorative board among the multiple decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 or the gaming board 5 is not limited to being executed during the low-expectation gold effect, and may also be executed after the low-expectation gold effect ends.

The front mounting surfaces (surfaces where multiple LEDs are mounted, LED mounting surfaces) of the performance operation unit outer decorative board 320, the annular button outer decorative board 355, and the button inner decorative board 364 provided on the performance operation unit 350 are coated with white solder resist (protective material), and on the white solder resist coated on the front mounting surfaces, letters and symbols (electronic component part numbers) to avoid confusion with the mounted LEDs and other electronic components and other decorative boards, as well as front-side notations indicating attributes of the front-side electronic components such as areas indicating the position where the electronic components are to be placed (which may also include the shape, size, mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic components, and model number of the front-side electronic components), are applied by screen printing using ink of a high brightness and saturation color (for example, yellow, yellow-green, etc.).

On the other hand, the board on which the volume control button 227 and the light control button 228 are provided has a coating of dark (green, black, etc.) solder resist (protective material) on the front mounting surface (the surface on which the volume control button 227 and the light control button 228 are provided), and on the dark solder resist coated on the front mounting surface, there is screen-printed using white ink a surface-side notation portion indicating the attributes of the surface-side electronic components, such as letters and symbols (electronic component part numbers) to avoid confusion with the electronic components to be mounted and other decorative boards, and areas indicating the position where the electronic components are to be placed (which may also include the shape of the surface-side electronic component, the size of the surface-side electronic component, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the surface-side electronic component, and the model of the surface-side electronic component). In this way, in this example, the colors of the solder resist and the front-side markings are different between the board on which the first specific light-emitting means, which is provided in the first specific operation unit and changes its light-emitting mode when the first specific operation unit is operated, and the board on which the second specific operation unit is provided. This makes it easy to distinguish whether the board is equipped with the first specific light-emitting means, whose light-emitting mode changes when operated, or the board on which the second specific operation unit is provided, which changes the light-emitting mode of an LED mounted on a specific board that does not have a second specific operation unit when operated. Note that multiple LEDs may be mounted on the front mounting surface of the board on which the volume adjustment button 227 and the light intensity adjustment button 228 are provided. In this case, the brightness of the multiple LEDs mounted on the front mounting surface of the board on which the volume adjustment button 227 and the light intensity adjustment button 228 are provided may not change, and they may always emit light at a constant brightness, even when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated.

In addition, a white insulating film with the highest reflectivity may be formed over almost the entire front surface (front mounting surface) where the LEDs are mounted on the performance operation unit outer decorative board 320, the annular button outer decorative board 355, and the button inner decorative board 364 provided on the performance operation unit 350, including part of the through-holes. Specifically, the outer periphery of the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1 from the periphery of the outer diameter KTHD1 of the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1 toward the center of the front (front mounting surface) side land KRDx1 may be covered with a white resist as an insulating coating. In this case, the area of the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 where the copper foil is exposed on the front (front mounting surface) where the LEDs of the performance operation unit outer decorative board 320, the annular button outer decorative board 355, and the button middle decorative board 364 provided in the performance operation unit 350 are mounted can be reduced, and the reflectance of the front (front mounting surface) KBx where the LEDs of the performance operation unit outer decorative board 320, the annular button outer decorative board 355, and the button middle decorative board 364 are mounted can be made uniform, thereby suppressing the occurrence of uneven light emission, and In addition to being able to efficiently illuminate the LEDs on the effect operation unit outer decorative board 320, the annular button outer decorative board 355, and the button inner decorative board 364 provided on the 50, and to create a golden effect, the white insulating film formed on the front (front mounting surface) on which the LEDs of the effect operation unit outer decorative board 320, the annular button outer decorative board 355, and the button inner decorative board 364 are mounted allows them to emit color as designed, making it possible to reliably determine whether the golden effect has ended based on the operation of the effect operation unit 300 while the golden effect is being executed. In other words, it becomes possible to reliably determine whether the light-emitting effect has switched (ended or started) or whether the light-emitting effect is continuing. This makes it possible to reliably determine whether an effect with a high probability of winning is being executed. Furthermore, by covering the outer periphery of the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 with a white resist as an insulating coating from the outer periphery of the outer diameter KTHD1 of the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 toward its center, the proportion of the rear (rear mounting surface) land KRDy1 covered with the white resist (insulating coating) can be increased compared to covering the inner periphery of the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 with a white resist (insulating coating) from the center of the front (front mounting surface) land KRDx1 toward the outer periphery of the outer diameter KTHD1, thereby achieving uniformity on the rear (rear mounting surface) of the first decorative board. Note that while this example illustrates a configuration in which the through-hole lands of the first embodiment are covered with an insulating coating, the above-described functions and effects can be achieved by using any of the configurations in which the through-hole lands of the first to fourth embodiments are covered with an insulating coating.

In addition, when a specific operation unit (e.g., pressing operation unit 303, touch operation unit 302, volume adjustment button 227, light intensity adjustment button 228, handle 195, etc.) among the multiple operation units provided on pachinko machine 1 is operated during the execution of a moving effect that operates the movable decorative body, or when detection is made by a specific detection means (e.g., first start opening sensor 3002, second start opening sensor 2401, handle touch sensor 192, etc.) among the multiple detection means provided on pachinko machine 1, it may be possible to determine whether or not there is a possibility of a jackpot depending on whether the moving effect ends or continues. For example, when a specific operation unit (e.g., the pressing operation unit 303, the touch operation unit 302, the volume control button 227, the light intensity control button 228, the handle 195, etc.) among the multiple operation units provided in the pachinko machine 1 is operated during the execution of a high probability of a jackpot or a high expectation movable effect that has the potential to result in a jackpot (e.g., when the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 has moved from a raised position to a lowered position that covers part of the front of the effect display device 1600), or when a detection is made by a specific detection means (e.g., the first start opening sensor 3002, the second start opening sensor 2401, the handle touch sensor 192, etc.) among the multiple detection means provided in the pachinko machine 1, the high expectation movable effect will not be terminated, During the execution of a low-expectation moving effect where there is a low probability of a jackpot or no possibility of a jackpot (for example, when the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 has moved from a raised position to a lowered position covering a portion of the front of the effect display device 1600), if a specific operation unit (e.g., the push operation unit 303, the touch operation unit 302, the volume adjustment button 227, the light intensity adjustment button 228, the handle 195, etc.) of the multiple operation units provided on the pachinko machine 1 is operated, or if detection is made by a specific detection means (e.g., the first start opening sensor 3002, the second start opening sensor 2401, the handle touch sensor 192, etc.) of the multiple detection means provided on the pachinko machine 1, the low-expectation moving effect may be terminated. In this case, if a low-expectation moving effect is being executed, if a specific operation unit is operated while covering a portion of the front of the effect display device 1600 or if detection is made by a specific detection means, the state will change to one where the front of the effect display device 1600 is open, allowing the player to reliably recognize that a low-expectation moving effect is being executed.

In addition, in the above example, a specific operation unit (e.g., pressing operation unit 303, touch operation unit 302, volume adjustment button 227, light intensity adjustment button 228, handle 195, etc.) among the multiple operation units provided on pachinko machine 1 is shown to change the light emission mode of LED 364a on button interior decorative substrate 364 provided inside pressing operation unit 303 when pressing operation unit 303. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any operation unit (e.g., pressing operation unit 303, touch operation unit 302, volume adjustment button 227, light intensity adjustment button 228, handle 195, etc.) equipped with a specific operation unit (e.g., pressing operation unit 303, It may also be a device that changes the light emission state (which may be one or more of the light color, brightness, light emission pattern, blinking interval, switching between on and off state, etc.) of an illuminant (for example, an LED mounted on any of the performance operation unit outer decorative board 320, the button outer decorative board 355, the button middle decorative board 364, etc.) provided in the performance operation unit 300, or an illuminant (LED mounted on any of the dish left decorative board 273, dish right decorative board 278, handle decorative board 184, back front lower middle decorative board 3168, etc.) provided in the performance operation unit 300, which is equipped with the above-mentioned. Specifically, when the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed during the execution of a high-expectation gold effect, the light-emitting modes of the LEDs mounted on the effect operation unit outer decorative board 320, the button outer decorative board 355, and the button inner decorative board 364 provided on the effect operation unit 300 including the pressing operation unit 303 are not changed, whereas when the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed a predetermined number of times (which may be once or multiple times) during the execution of a low-expectation gold effect, the light-emitting modes (which may be one or more of the light-emitting color, brightness, light-emitting pattern, blinking interval, switching between the light-emitting state and the unlit state, etc.) of the LEDs mounted on the effect operation unit outer decorative board 320, the button outer decorative board 355, and the button inner decorative board 364 provided on the effect operation unit 300 including the pressing operation unit 303 are changed from a lit state to an unlit state. In other words, when a specific operation unit is operated, the light-emitting mode of the LED located near the specific operation unit may be changed to determine whether or not there is a possibility of a jackpot.

Furthermore, although the above example has been described with respect to a gold effect, the present technical idea is not limited to this, and includes a concept that enables the possibility of a jackpot to be determined by whether or not the light emission state of the light-emitting body changes when a specific operation unit (e.g., the pressing operation unit 303, the touch operation unit 302, the volume adjustment button 227, the light intensity adjustment button 228, the handle 195, etc.) among the multiple operation units provided in the pachinko machine 1 is operated during an effect in which a light-emitting body mounted on the front mounting surface is coated with a white solder resist (protective material), a light-colored (yellow, yellow-green, light blue, etc.) front-side marking portion is formed on the white solder resist, and the light-emitting body mounted on the front mounting surface emits light in an emission color that is the same as or similar to the color of the front-side marking portion (e.g., yellow emission color for a yellow front-side marking portion, gold emission color for a yellow front-side marking portion, yellow-green emission color for a yellow-green front-side marking portion, yellow emission color for a yellow-green front-side marking portion, gold emission color for a yellow-green front-side marking portion). In other words, by coating the front mounting surface on which the light emitter is mounted with a white solder resist, not only can the reflective efficiency of the front mounting surface be maintained at a high level, but by forming the front-side markings with ink of the same or similar color as the light emitted by the light emitter, the reflectivity of the front-side markings themselves can be increased, preventing a decrease in reflective efficiency on the front mounting surface. When the light emitter emits light, the front-side markings blend in with the luminous color and become less noticeable, making the front-side markings less visible to players. This increases the reflective efficiency of the front mounting surface and allows players to determine whether or not there is a possibility of a jackpot without having to see unnecessary information.

In addition, while high expectation gold effects and low expectation gold effects have been exemplified as gold effects, the gold display (high expectation gold display) displayed on the effect display device 1600 when a high expectation gold effect is executed and the gold light emission (high expectation gold light emission) that illuminates an LED mounted on a specific decorative board among the multiple decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 or the game board 5, and the gold display (low expectation gold display) displayed on the effect display device 1600 when a low expectation gold effect is executed and the gold light emission (low expectation gold light emission) that illuminates an LED mounted on a specific decorative board among the multiple decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 or the game board 5, are not limited to those in which one or both of the display mode and the light emission mode are the same, but may also be those in which one or both of the display mode and the light emission mode have parts that are the same (common), or the colors (display color, light emission color) of one or both of the display mode and the light emission mode may be the same or similar (common). For example, the display content may be different between the high expectation gold display and the low expectation gold display, but at least part of the display content may display a gold color that is common to both the high expectation gold display and the low expectation gold display; or the light emission pattern may be different between the high expectation gold light emission and the low expectation gold light emission, but at least part of the light emission may include a yellow light emission that is common to both the high expectation gold light emission and the low expectation gold light emission. In other words, the present technical concept is applicable as long as the high expectation gold effect and the low expectation gold effect have at least a partial common aspect.

Furthermore, the multiple specific decorative boards on which multiple LEDs that emit gold light when the above-mentioned gold effect is executed and the multiple specific decorative boards on which multiple LEDs that emit light in a predetermined light color when the above-mentioned rainbow effect is executed can be configured as the same decorative board (multiple specific decorative boards on which multiple LEDs that emit gold light when the gold effect is executed emit light in a predetermined light color when the rainbow effect is executed), or they can be configured as multiple decorative boards, some or all of which are different. If the specific decorative boards include a decorative board that executes both gold and rainbow effects, the light-emitting effects executed by the LEDs implemented on this decorative board will be more diverse, which can increase the enjoyment of the game.

[Information display]
Next, we will explain a modified example that uses an information display. In recent years, the number of players has been declining significantly, and there is an urgent need to attract new players. However, the game itself has become more complicated than before, and there is a risk that new players will be put off from playing. Below, we will explain a modified example that uses an information display that displays information about the game.

In this example, by operating an operating unit such as the performance operating unit 301, an information display using a dot matrix display unit is provided in place of the five 7-segment display units of the above-mentioned rear-upper movable decorative body 3210. The display content of the information display of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 can be switched between a state in which information about the game is displayed (game information display mode) and a state in which game performance is executed (game performance mode). In addition, in this example, the display content of the information display of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 can be switched by operating the operating means during a specific period. For example, when an operation unit such as the operation unit 301 is operated during the execution of the customer waiting demo performance, the display contents are switched, and when an operation means that can only be operated by the game store staff is operated (for example, when the RAM clear switch provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is pressed, or when the setting key switch 1311a is operated (for example, when the setting key cylinder is turned ON to rotate from the initial position, or when the setting key cylinder is turned OFF to rotate counterclockwise so as to return from the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that has been turned ON to the initial position), the display of the information display of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 is switched to display (start) information about the game, and the performance. It is possible to perform one or any combination of the following: when an operation unit such as the operation unit 301 is operated while a variable performance is being performed on the display device 1600, the display of the information display on the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 is hidden and the display content is switched after the variable performance for which the operation unit 301 is operated is completed; or when an operation unit such as the operation unit 301 is operated while a variable performance is being performed on the display device 1600, the display content is not switched during the variable performance, the currently running mode (game information display mode, game performance mode) continues and a display according to each mode is displayed, and the display content is switched after the variable performance for which the operation unit 301 is operated is completed.

In addition, as shown in Figures 300(A) to (C), in the state where information about the game is displayed (game information display mode), the information display on the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 displays information about the game, such as "jackpot," "left hit ←," and "right hit →." As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, during time-saving mode (low-probability time-saving mode (also called time-saving mode) or high-probability time-saving mode (also called probability variable mode)), a game (so-called "right hit") is played with the aim of getting the game ball to enter the second start port 2004. Furthermore, during time-saving mode, the second start port 2004 is frequently opened, making it easier to get a start win (a game ball entering the first start port 2002 or a game ball entering the second start port 2004) than during normal mode (low-probability non-time-saving mode (also called normal mode) or high-probability non-time-saving mode), creating an advantageous state for the player. However, if the player does not play with the aim of getting the game ball into the second starting hole 2004 (so-called "right hit") during the time-saving period, they will not be able to enjoy this advantageous state. For this reason, in this example of the pachinko machine 1, as shown in Figure 300 (C), during the time-saving period, the information display on the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 displays "Right Hit →" to instruct the player to play with the aim of getting the game ball into the second starting hole 2004 (so-called "right hit"). This prevents the player from being unable to enjoy the advantageous state even during the time-saving period, and prevents the player from being disadvantaged.

On the other hand, during normal play (low-probability non-time-saving state (also called normal state) and high-probability non-time-saving state), a game (so-called "left-hand hit") is played with the aim of getting the game ball into the first starting hole 2001. Furthermore, during normal play, the second starting hole 2004 is rarely opened, and the period during which it is open is extremely short compared to during time-saving play. Therefore, during normal play, a player may be disadvantaged if they play with the aim of getting the game ball into the second starting hole 2004. For this reason, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in FIG. 300(B), during normal play, the information display on the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 displays "left-hand hit ←" to instruct the player to play with the aim of getting the game ball into the first starting hole 2001. This prevents players from being disadvantaged during normal play.

In this way, in this modified pachinko machine 1, the information displayed in the dot matrix of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 instructs left-handed players to hit (shooting the game ball into the left side of the center device 2500) or right-handed players (shooting with enough force to hit the impact stop 1006 that protrudes inward from the outer rail 1001 that forms part of the periphery of the play area 5a), and in the event of a jackpot, notifies the player of this and instructs them to play with the aim of getting the ball into the big prize opening 2005, thereby preventing disadvantages for both experienced and inexperienced players.

The information display may be a dedicated display for displaying information about the game, and in this case, the information displayed may be switched when the operating means is operated within a specific period. The information about the game may include information for guiding the game (hit right, hit left, etc.) as shown in Figures 300(B) and (C) above, information about the lottery results (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) of the variable effects as shown in Figure 300(A) (jackpot, miss, guaranteed jackpot, time-limited jackpot, etc.), setting information related to the lottery probability of winning or losing (setting values of the pachinko machine 1 set in the setting change process, the probability of a jackpot occurring for the number of variable effects actually executed, etc.), and the number of game balls collected by the outlet 1008 ( It may also be any combination of the number of game balls that have won a specific prize-winning device (the number of game balls that have won a specific prize-winning device out of the game balls that have been shot into the game area 5a and collected by the outlet 1008) and the number of game balls that have won a specific prize-winning device (one or any combination of the first start port 2002, second start port 2004, large prize port 2005, general prize port 2001, etc. (it may be all of them), for example, the number of game balls that have won the first start port 2002 and second start port 2004).

In this example, the information display is configured to be installed inside the outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002, but it may also be installed outside the outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002. This increases the degree of freedom in designing the area inside the outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002, and allows for the installation of structures or movable objects to enhance decorativeness and presentation effects. Furthermore, while the above-mentioned modified example describes an example in which a dot matrix display unit is used, it is also possible to display information about the game using a 7-segment display unit rather than a dot matrix display unit. Furthermore, in addition to an information display aimed at new players, an information display aimed at gaming parlor staff may also be installed, in which case the information display may be placed on the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, a monochromatic LED may be mounted on the first decorative board on the upper rear back of the information display, so that even when the above-mentioned gold or rainbow effects are being executed, the information display on the upper rear back movable decorative body 3210 does not use the gold or rainbow effect light-emitting decoration (gold light-emitting) but instead emits a color different from the gold or rainbow effect light-emitting decoration (gold light-emitting) (in this example, red. Note that even when the gold or rainbow effect light-emitting decoration (gold light-emitting) is being executed, the information display may emit a different color (such as blue) as long as it is distinguishable from the gold or rainbow effect light-emitting decoration and allows the display content of the information display to be identified). This allows the information displayed on the information display to be reliably conveyed to the player even when the gold or rainbow effect is being executed.

Furthermore, since the information display in this example displays important game-related information as described above, a dark-colored (e.g., green, black, purple, navy blue, etc.) insulating film is formed (resist-treated) on the surface of the first decorative substrate on the rear upper back of the information display in order to make the displayed content clear (an insulating film of the same color may be formed on the rear mounting surface where the LEDs are not mounted, or an insulating film of a different color from the front surface may be formed on the rear surface). This suppresses light interference on the front mounting surface on which the LEDs of the first decorative substrate on the rear upper back are mounted, making it possible to view the light from each of the multiple LEDs independently, allowing various information to be clearly displayed on the information display. Furthermore, when gold or rainbow effects are being performed, a light-colored (white in this example) insulating film is formed on the surface of the substrate on which the LEDs that perform the gold or rainbow effect illumination decorations (golden illumination) are mounted, whereas a dark-colored (e.g., green, black, purple, navy blue, etc.) insulating film is formed on the surface of the first upper-rear-back decorative substrate mounted on the information display of the upper-rear-back movable decorative body 3210, which displays important information for players and gaming store staff (the same insulating film may be formed on the rear mounting surface where the LEDs are not mounted, or an insulating film of a different color than the front surface may be formed on the back surface). Therefore, if there is a problem with the LED's light emission, it is easy to determine whether the LED plays an important role by the color of the insulating film formed on the surface of the substrate.

In addition, on the front surface (front mounting surface) of the rear upper first decorative board where the LEDs are mounted, a front-side marking section is silk-screened in white (not limited to white, but can also be yellow or black, etc.) paint, indicating the part number corresponding to each LED and the attributes of the electronic component, such as the area indicating the position where the LED is to be placed (which may also include the shape of the electronic component, the size of the electronic component, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the electronic component, and the model of the electronic component).Of the area on the front surface (front mounting surface) of the rear upper first decorative board where the LEDs are mounted, the area occupied by the front-side marking section (the area silk-screened in white (not limited to white, but can also be yellow or black, etc.) paint) is smaller than the area occupied by the resist (a dark-colored (e.g. green, black, purple, navy blue, etc.) insulating film). As a result, the reflection efficiency on the front surface (front mounting surface) of the rear-upper first decorative substrate where the LEDs are mounted can be made approximately uniform, similar to when only resist is formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of the rear-upper first decorative substrate where the LEDs are mounted, which prevents uneven light emission and reduces the reduction in the effect of suppressing interference between the light emitted from each of the multiple mounted LEDs.

The surface-side markings silk-screened on the front surface (front mounting surface) of the first upper back decorative board where the LEDs are mounted may be configured to display electronic components of the same type grouped together. For example, one surface-side marking such as "LEDs 1-5" may be provided for five LEDs mounted on the front surface (front mounting surface) of the first upper back decorative board. In this case, it is possible to reduce the proportion of the surface-side markings on the front surface (front mounting surface) of the first upper back decorative board where the LEDs are mounted compared to when a surface-side marking is provided for each electronic component, thereby making it possible to achieve more uniform reflection efficiency on the front surface (front mounting surface) of the first upper back decorative board where the LEDs are mounted. Additionally, the front side markings may not be silk-screened on the front surface (front mounting surface) of the rear upper first decorative board where the LEDs are mounted. In this case, the back side markings may be formed by silk-screen printing, foil cut-out letters, resist cut-out letters, etc. on the rear mounting surface where the LEDs are not mounted, or the front side markings may be formed by foil cut-out letters, resist cut-out letters, etc. on the front surface (front mounting surface) of the rear upper first decorative board where the LEDs are mounted.

In addition, only electronic components (e.g., connectors with green housings) with dark-colored (black, green, purple, etc.) exteriors (cases, packages, housings, etc.) may be mounted on the LED mounting surface of the first upper-rear decorative board other than LEDs. Alternatively, only electronic components (e.g., one or more (any combination) of LED elements with black packages or connectors with green housings) with dark-colored (black, green, purple, etc.) exteriors (cases, packages, housings, etc.) may be mounted for a predetermined number of electronic components, including LED element packages, with electronic components with white or light-colored exteriors mounted on the non-LED mounting surface. This prevents the reflectivity of the LED mounting surface from increasing due to electronic components mounted on the LED mounting surface of the first upper-rear decorative board, and suppresses light interference on the LED mounting surface. This allows information such as letters and numbers to be displayed clearly on the five 7-segment display sections of the upper-rear decorative body 3210, ensuring that this information is conveyed to players reliably.

Furthermore, as described above, if an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1 while the gold or rainbow effect is being performed (when the opening of the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4 is detected (when the opening of the door frame 3 makes it difficult to see the light emitted by the LEDs mounted on each of the multiple specific decorative boards attached to the door frame 3), when a vibration sensor (not shown) detects vibration of the game board 5 for a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) (when it detects that an action such as hitting the pachinko machine 1 is being performed, or when the vibration of the pachinko machine 1 causes the light emitted by the LEDs mounted on each of the multiple specific decorative boards attached to the door frame 3 and game board 5 and the display of the effect display device 1600 to become blurred and difficult to see), when a detection signal is input from the full tank detection sensor 154 (when it detects that the lower tray 202 is full of game balls), when a detection signal is input from the ball out detection sensor 574 (when it detects that there are no game balls in the guide passage 570a), or when cheating is being performed. When a minor error such as a radio wave goof is detected (when electromagnetic waves or the like cause noise in the light emitted by the LEDs mounted on each of the multiple specific decorative boards on the door frame 3 or game board 5, or noise in the display on the effect display device 1600), a magnetic goof is detected, a detection signal is input from the second start gate sensor 2401 when the second start gate 2004 is not open, or a detection signal is input from the large prize gate sensor 2402 when the game is not in a jackpot or small jackpot state, occurs, the multiple LEDs on the game board 5 that provide the gold or rainbow effect illumination (gold illumination) are turned off, and the LEDs on the door frame 3 are controlled to emit an abnormality alert illumination mode (flashing red at maximum brightness (light intensity)).

On the other hand, the display of the information display on the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 will continue without being turned off even if an abnormality occurs during the execution of the gold or rainbow effect. In this way, the specific decorative board (coated with a white solder resist (protective material), and the front mounting surface (LED mounting surface) on which the LEDs of the specific decorative board are mounted) that is provided on the game board 5 or door frame 3 and that performs the luminous decoration of the gold effect (golden light emission) or the rainbow effect during the execution of the gold or rainbow effect, is marked with letters and symbols (part numbers of electronic components) to avoid confusion with the mounted electronic components and other decorative boards, attributes of the surface-side electronic components such as areas indicating the position where the electronic components are to be placed (furthermore, the shape of the surface-side electronic components, the size of the surface-side electronic components, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the surface-side electronic components, the type of the surface-side electronic components, etc.) The LEDs mounted on the rear upper first decorative substrate (on which a dark insulating film (e.g., green, black, purple, navy blue, etc.) is formed) on the front side indicating the number of times the game is played are screen-printed using ink of a high brightness and saturation (e.g., a bright color such as yellow or yellow-green) and will stop the gold light-emitting decoration (gold light emission) or rainbow light-emitting decoration if an abnormality occurs, but the information display of the rear upper first decorative substrate (LEDs mounted on which a dark insulating film (e.g., green, black, purple, navy blue, etc.) is formed) on the rear upper first decorative substrate (on which a dark insulating film (e.g., green, black, purple, navy blue, etc.) is formed) will continue to display even if an abnormality occurs (it will continue the predetermined lighting pattern until the fluctuation time has elapsed). This makes it possible to display information about the game and know this information even when an abnormality occurs. Furthermore, if an extremely serious error occurs that makes it difficult to continue playing, such as an abnormality in the main control board 1310, among the serious errors mentioned above, the lighting pattern of the multiple LEDs mounted on the first upper rear decorative board attached to the information display of the upper rear decorative body 3210 can be changed to display an indication according to the type of abnormality, or the multiple LEDs mounted on the first upper rear decorative board attached to the information display of the upper rear decorative body 3210 can be turned off, in which case the severity of the abnormality can be immediately determined.

In addition, depending on the type of abnormality, it is possible to change whether the information display on the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 continues to display or to turn off the information display and hide it. For example, if a minor error such as the one described above occurs, the information display on the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 may continue to display, and if a serious error such as the one described above occurs, the information display may be turned off and hide it. This makes it possible to determine the severity of the abnormality.

In addition, as mentioned above, when a gold or rainbow effect is being performed, the LEDs that provide the gold effect illumination decoration (golden illumination) or the rainbow effect illumination decoration are controlled by the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 through peripheral control unit steady-state processing performed approximately every 33.3 ms, whereas the LEDs on the rear upper first decorative board provided on the information display of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 are controlled by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 through main control side timer interrupt processing performed approximately every 4 ms. In this way, the display content of the information display of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 can be updated at a shorter interval than when the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the LED that emits gold light based on a control signal from the main control board 1310. Even if a malfunction occurs and content different from the content that should be displayed on the information display of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 is displayed, the display content can be updated immediately (after 4 ms) to change to the original display content, thereby preventing any disadvantage to the player, etc. In other words, the information display of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210, which displays important (highly important) information related to the game, outputs a control signal at a shorter interval than the LED that emits light in accordance with variable effects such as gold effects and rainbow effects, and performs gold effect light-emitting decoration (gold light emission) or rainbow effect light-emitting decoration, so even if a malfunction occurs in the display content of the information display of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210, the display content can be immediately changed to the normal display content, preventing any disadvantage to the player caused by content different from the original display. Furthermore, if the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to control the information display of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, there is a risk of a communication error occurring between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, causing a malfunction in the information displayed by the information display of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210. However, in this example, the main control board 1310 directly controls the information display of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210, making it less likely that a malfunction will occur in the information displayed by the information display of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 compared to when the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the information display of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210, thereby preventing any disadvantage to the player.

Furthermore, various decorative substrates that are provided on the door frame 3 or game board 5 and that provide luminous decoration for gold effects (golden light emission) or rainbow effects when gold or rainbow effects are performed are provided on decorative bodies (which may be cases, covers, etc.) made of a translucent material, while the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 (which may be a case, cover, etc.) on which the rear upper first decorative substrate provided on an information display that does not provide luminous decoration for gold effects (golden light emission) or rainbow effects when gold or rainbow effects are performed can be provided can be formed of a non-translucent material. In this case, it is possible to determine whether or not an LED that plays a key role is implemented depending on whether or not the decorative body (which may be a case, cover, etc.) on which the substrate is provided is translucent.

Also, as shown in Figure 301, the rear-upper first decorative substrate may be firmly housed in a rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 (which may be a case, cover, etc.) that is provided with a rear-upper first decorative substrate that is provided on an information display that does not emit gold light when gold light is being emitted. For example, the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210a that covers the surface (LED mounting surface) of the rear-upper first decorative substrate of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 (which may be a case, cover, etc.) and the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210b that covers the back surface (LED non-mounting surface) of the rear-upper first decorative substrate may be firmly bonded by welding or the like, so that the rear-upper first decorative substrate cannot be removed without destroying part of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210. On the other hand, decorative bodies (which may be cases, covers, etc.) that are provided on the door frame 3 or game board 5 and that have various decorative substrates that illuminate gold effects (golden illumination) or rainbow effects when gold or rainbow effects are activated may be designed to allow the decorative substrates to be removed without destroying any part of the decorative body. In this way, in information displays that display important information, the first decorative substrate on the rear upper rear side cannot be removed without destroying a part of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 (which may be a case, cover, etc.), thereby preventing physical destruction of LEDs or other light-emitting devices that play an important role. On the other hand, LEDs or other light-emitting devices (which are less important than information displays) that are provided on the door frame 3 or game board 5 and that do not display important information but that illuminate gold effects (golden illumination) or rainbow effects when gold or rainbow effects are activated can be replaced without destroying the decorative body (which may be a case, cover, etc.), making maintenance easier.

In addition, in this example, the surface (LED mounting surface) of the first decorative substrate is covered only by the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210a, and the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210a covering the surface (LED mounting surface) of the rear-upper decorative substrate and the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210b covering the back surface (non-LED mounting surface) of the rear-upper decorative substrate abut on the back surface side of the rear-upper decorative substrate. In other words, the joint between the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210a and the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210b is configured to be on the back surface side of the rear-upper decorative substrate. Therefore, even if light enters through the joint between the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210a and the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210b, the light is prevented from entering the surface of the rear-upper decorative substrate. Furthermore, it is sufficient that the joint between the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210a and the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210b is not on the front side of the rear-upper first decorative substrate; the above-mentioned effects can also be achieved if the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210a and the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210b abut between the front and back surfaces of the rear-upper first decorative substrate (the joint between the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210a and the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210b is located on the side of the rear-upper first decorative substrate).

In addition, interference suppression means may be formed inside the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 (which may be a case, cover, etc.) on which the rear-upper first decorative substrate provided on the information display is mounted to suppress interference between the light emitted by each of the multiple LEDs mounted on the rear-upper first decorative substrate. For example, as shown in Figure 301 (B), multiple through-holes may be formed inside the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210a that abuts the surface (LED mounting surface) of the rear-upper first decorative substrate, and the surface (LED mounting surface) of the rear-upper first decorative substrate may be partitioned so that one LED is located inside each of these multiple through-holes. This restricts the direction of travel of the light emitted from each of the multiple LEDs mounted on the rear-upper first decorative substrate, suppressing interference with the light emitted from LEDs mounted adjacent to the surface (LED mounting surface) of the rear-upper first decorative substrate, making it easier to individually distinguish the light colors of the multiple light-emitting devices. Furthermore, since it is possible to clearly distinguish between lit and unlit LEDs on the information display, information can be displayed clearly on the information display.

In addition, the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210b, which covers the back surface (non-LED mounted surface) of the rear-upper first decorative substrate of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210, may be formed to have only a minimal opening. For example, as shown in Figure 301 (B), the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210b covering the back surface (non-LED mounted surface) of the rear-upper first decorative substrate may be formed with only an opening for a connector to connect electrical wiring to the rear-upper first decorative substrate. This prevents light from entering the through-hole formed in the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210a from the back side of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210, preventing incorrect information from being displayed on the information display, thereby improving the reliability of the information displayed on the information display.

In addition, as described above, if an abnormality occurs, multiple LEDs mounted on a specific decorative board and provided on the game board 5 that provide light-emitting decoration for gold effects (golden light emission) or rainbow effects when gold or rainbow effects are executed will be turned off, while the information display will be illuminated while maintaining its normal brightness.Therefore, in the event of an abnormality, the brightness within the game window will be reduced to highlight the light emitted by the information display, making it easier to see the information displayed on the information display. Furthermore, if an abnormality occurs, the LEDs mounted on the door frame 3 that are mounted on a specific decorative board and that provide illumination for gold or rainbow effects (golden light) when gold or rainbow effects are being performed are controlled to emit light in an abnormality alert light mode (flashing red light at maximum brightness (light output)). However, because the interior of the upper rear rear movable decorative body 3210 (which may also be a case or cover) has an interference suppression means that suppresses interference between the light emitted by each of the multiple LEDs mounted on the upper rear rear first decorative board, even when the LEDs mounted on the door frame 3 are controlled to emit light in an abnormality alert light mode (flashing red light at maximum brightness (light output)), it is easy to determine the light emission state of each of the multiple LEDs mounted on the upper rear rear first decorative board.

In addition, in this example, the front mounting surface of the rear upper first decorative board on which the LEDs are mounted is coated with a dark-colored solder resist (a dark-colored insulating coating is formed), so even if light emitted from the LEDs installed inside the through-hole leaks outside the through-hole, diffusion of the light can be suppressed.

In the above-described embodiment (and all embodiments, including variations), a white solder resist (protective material) is coated on the surface of the specific decorative board on which the LEDs are mounted (the LED mounting surface). Then, a surface-side marking is screen-printed on the white solder resist (protective material) using yellow ink to indicate the attributes of the surface-side electronic components, such as the LEDs and other electronic components to be mounted and their part numbers (to avoid confusion with other decorative boards), as well as the area indicating the location of the electronic components (which may also include the shape, size, mounting orientation, and model of the surface-side electronic components). This creates a golden effect (golden illumination) by making the LEDs mounted on the specific decorative board glow in a color similar to the yellow of the surface-side marking. However, this technical concept can also be applied to other effects. For example, the surface-side marking may be screen-printed using yellow-green ink, causing the LEDs mounted on the specific decorative board to glow in a color similar to the yellow-green of the surface-side marking. In other words, this technical concept can be applied to any effect where the light emitted by the multiple LEDs mounted on a specific decorative board is a color similar to the color of the indicia on the front side.

In addition, it is possible to not provide a front-side marking section for electronic components other than LEDs mounted on a specific decorative board, or to provide a back-side marking section on the back mounting surface where LEDs are not mounted. In addition, the front mounting surface of a specific decorative board on which multiple LEDs are mounted may be mounted with only electronic components (for example, one or more (any combination) of LED elements with white packages or connectors with white housings) that have a white or light-colored exterior (including colors that are recognized as white, such as beige, ivory, cream, natural, off-white, etc.) while the back mounting surface on which multiple LEDs are not mounted may be mounted with at least electronic components that do not have a white or light-colored exterior (for example, a resistor with a black exterior, a circuit that controls the light emission of multiple LEDs (for example, a constant current drive circuit), a capacitor with a brown exterior, a connector with a housing in a color different from white (such as light blue or yellow)) (this is not limited to cases where only electronic components that do not have a white or light-colored exterior are arranged on the back, but may also be configured with one or both electronic components that do not have a white or light-colored exterior and electronic components that have a white or light-colored exterior). This reduces the decrease in reflective efficiency on the front mounting surface where the LEDs are mounted, and increases the light output of the specific decorative board, allowing the gold and rainbow color effects (golden light emission) to be produced without unevenness in the light emission and to produce an impactful effect, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The color of the packages of the multiple LEDs mounted on the specific decorative board may also be white (including colors that are recognized as (similar to) white, such as beige, ivory, cream, natural, and off-white). In this case, the reduction in reflection efficiency due to the exterior color of the LEDs themselves mounted on the specific decorative board can be suppressed, thereby increasing the light output of the specific decorative board. The specific decorative board may also include a first specific decorative board that mounts both multiple LEDs with white packages and a connector with a white housing on one surface, and a second specific decorative board that mounts multiple LEDs with white packages on one surface and a connector with a housing in a color different from white (e.g., light blue or yellow) on the other surface. In this case, connectors with white housings that are highly effective in suppressing reflectivity reduction (high reflectivity) are mounted on the same surface as the front mounting surface on which the LEDs are mounted (the LED mounting surface (also referred to as the front mounting surface)), while connectors with non-white housings that are less effective in suppressing reflectivity reduction (low reflectivity that may reduce reflectivity) (connectors with housings other than white and light colors with high reflectivity (close to white) may also be mounted on a surface different from the front mounting surface on which the LEDs are mounted (the non-LED mounting surface (also referred to as the back mounting surface)), thereby maintaining high reflection efficiency on the front mounting surface on which the LEDs are mounted. Note that this technical concept does not exclude mounting electronic components with white exteriors, such as connectors with white housings, on the non-LED mounting surface; mounting electronic components with white exteriors on the non-LED mounting surface also prevents the reflection efficiency of the LED mounting surface from being reduced by electronic components other than the LED. This maintains high reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface, allowing the LED light to be used efficiently and reducing a reduction in light intensity.

In addition, in the above example, the surfaces of all specific decorative boards that are mounted with LEDs that provide luminous decorations for gold effects (golden light emission) or rainbow effects when gold or rainbow effects are being performed are coated with white solder resist (protective material), but this is not limited to this. Some of the specific decorative boards that are mounted with LEDs that provide luminous decorations for gold effects (golden light emission) or rainbow effects when gold or rainbow effects are being performed may be coated with solder resist (protective material) in a color other than white (for example, green or black) on the surface, or all or some of the specific decorative boards that are mounted with LEDs that provide luminous decorations for gold effects (golden light emission) or rainbow effects when gold or rainbow effects are being performed may be coated with white solder resist (protective material) only on the surface where the LEDs are mounted (forming a white insulating coating), and the back surface where the LEDs are not mounted may be coated with solder resist (protective material) in a color other than white (for example, a dark color such as green or black) (forming an insulating coating other than white). In addition, if the substrates connected to the specific decorative board by a harness (other substrates such as relay substrates, driver substrates, decorative substrates on which LEDs are mounted, etc.) have the same configuration as the specific decorative board to which they are connected, i.e., the surface of the specific decorative board is coated with a white solder resist (protective material), and the surface-side notation indicating the attributes of the surface-side electronic components such as letters and symbols (part numbers of electronic components) to avoid confusion with the mounted electronic components and other decorative boards, and the area indicating the position where the electronic components are to be placed (which may also include the shape of the surface-side electronic components, the size of the surface-side electronic components, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the surface-side electronic components, and the model of the surface-side electronic components) is screen-printed using ink of high brightness and saturation (for example, bright colors such as yellow and yellow-green), then the surface of the substrates connected to the specific decorative board by a harness (other substrates such as relay substrates, driver substrates, decorative substrates on which LEDs are mounted, etc.) may also be coated with a white solder resist (protective material), and the surface-side notation indicating the attributes of the surface-side electronic components such as letters and symbols (part numbers of electronic components) to avoid confusion with the mounted electronic components and other decorative boards, and the area indicating the position where the electronic components are to be placed (which may also include the shape of the surface-side electronic components, the size of the surface-side electronic components, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the surface-side electronic components, and the model of the surface-side electronic components) may also be screen-printed using ink of high brightness and saturation (for example, bright colors such as yellow and yellow-green). That is, the game board 5 contains a mixture of boards coated with white solder resist (protective material) and boards coated with green solder resist (protective material). Therefore, if a malfunction occurs with a specific decorative board and the harness or connection of the specific decorative board needs to be checked, the board connected to the specific decorative board will be coated with the same color solder resist (protective material) as the specific decorative board, and the surface markings will be screen-printed using ink of the same color, making it possible to quickly find the board connected to the specific decorative board and to identify it without confusing it with other boards (boards coated with green solder resist (protective material)).

In addition, connectors with the same color exterior may be used for each of the boards connected to the specific decorative board by a harness. In this case, the board connected to the specific decorative board can be identified by the connector's exterior color, allowing the board to be quickly found. Furthermore, connectors mounted on the front mounting surface (the surface facing the front of the gaming machine) of boards connected to the specific decorative board by a harness (other boards such as relay boards, driver boards, and decorative boards with LEDs mounted on them) may also have a white exterior, while connectors with an exterior color different from white may be mounted on the back mounting surface (the surface facing the rear of the gaming machine) of boards connected to the specific decorative board by a harness (this does not exclude boards that have a white exterior connector mounted on a surface where LEDs are not mounted). This allows the boards connected to the specific decorative board to be found more accurately and quickly, and also reduces the reduction in reflective efficiency on the front mounting surface of boards connected to the specific decorative board by a harness. This allows the efficient use of light emitted by light-emitting elements such as LEDs installed on the gaming machine, reducing the reduction in light intensity.

In the above example, an information display visible from the front of the pachinko machine 1 was shown, but this is not limiting; an information display visible only from the rear of the pachinko machine 1 may also be placed on the rear of the pachinko machine 1. In this case, the information display may display information about the gaming machine for gaming parlor staff, etc. (such as the number of jackpots, error occurrences, number of prize balls paid out, number of shots, number of balls entered into a specified winning slot (which may display the number of balls entered into all winning slots together, or may display the number of balls entered into multiple winning slots separately, or may display the number of balls entered into a specified number (including one) together)). Furthermore, even when an information display is placed on the rear of the pachinko machine 1, it may be controlled in the same way as the information display visible from the front of the pachinko machine 1 described above (for example, by continuing to emit light even when an abnormality occurs).

In addition, there are no light emitters that perform light effects on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, or there are fewer light emitters that perform light effects on the rear side compared to the front side of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, when an information display is placed on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, the visibility of the information display is less likely to be obstructed by other light emitters, and because the island equipment is dark, the contents displayed on the information display are easier to see than when the information display is placed on the front side of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, when an information display is placed on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, this information display does not produce any light-emitting effects and only displays information to gaming facility staff and others separate from players. Therefore, the color of the light emitted is not particularly important, and the light intensity does not need to be very high to allow gaming facility staff and others to recognize the information. Therefore, a white insulating coating is formed on the LED mounting surfaces of multiple specific decorative boards that produce the rainbow and gold effects described above, and some or all of the land KRDx1 on the front (front mounting surface) side of the LED mounting surface is covered with a white insulating coating. However, a dark insulating coating such as green or black may be formed on the LED mounting surface of the first decorative board on the rear rear of the information display placed on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, or in addition to or separately from this, all of the land KRDx1 on the front (front mounting surface) side of the LED mounting surface may not be covered with an insulating coating. This allows the LEDs mounted on the rear upper first decorative substrate, which has a dark insulating coating, to stand out when illuminated in a dark island, and because the reflectivity is not too high, it does not feel dazzling, ensuring that the information displayed on the information display can be conveyed reliably. Furthermore, by forming a dark insulating coating on the rear upper first decorative substrate, it becomes difficult to distinguish the wiring pattern formed on the rear upper first decorative substrate when placed in a dark island, improving security.

In addition, while the above example shows a dark-colored (e.g., green, black, purple, navy blue, etc.) insulating film formed on the surface of the rear upper first decorative substrate provided on the information display, a light-colored (e.g., white, yellow, etc.) insulating film may also be formed on part of the surface of the rear upper first decorative substrate (this may be either the LED mounting surface or the rear mounting surface where LEDs are not mounted, or part of the LED mounting surface or part of the rear mounting surface) or all of the surface (both the LED mounting surface and the rear mounting surface).

In addition, multiple information displays may be provided. In this case, the configuration of each of the rear-upper first decorative substrates provided on the information displays may all be the same, or the configuration of the rear-upper first decorative substrate provided on some of the information displays may be different. For example, a dark-colored (e.g., green, black, purple, navy blue, etc.) insulating film may be formed on part or all of the surface of the first rear-upper first decorative substrate provided on the first information display, and a light-colored (e.g., white, yellow, etc.) insulating film may be formed on part or all of the surface of the second rear-upper first decorative substrate provided on the second information display, thereby differentiating the configuration of the rear-upper first decorative substrate provided on the information displays. In this case, the configuration of the rear-upper first decorative substrate provided on the information displays can be varied depending on the application and function of the information display, allowing for effective illumination according to the application and function.

Furthermore, when multiple information displays are provided, the configuration of the notation indicating the attributes of the front-side electronic components, such as letters and symbols (electronic component part numbers) to avoid confusion between the mounted electronic components and other decorative boards, and the area indicating the location of the electronic components (which may also include the shape, size, mounting orientation, and model of the front-side electronic components), may all be the same, or the configuration of the notation may be different for some information displays. For example, multiple information displays may be provided, including an information display having a rear-upper first decorative board that is not formed on either the LED mounting surface or the rear mounting surface, and an information display having a rear-upper first decorative board that has notation formed on at least one of the LED mounting surface or the rear mounting surface. In this case, too, the configuration of the rear-upper first decorative board provided can be varied depending on the use and function of the information display, thereby achieving effective illumination according to the use and function.

In addition, a board control number may be formed on either the LED mounting surface or the back mounting surface of the rear-upper first decorative board provided on the information display, or the board control number may not be formed on either the LED mounting surface or the back mounting surface of the rear-upper first decorative board. If a board control number is formed, it will be possible to identify the rear-upper first decorative board provided on the information display during manufacturing, etc., thereby reducing errors during component installation, and if a board control number is not formed, it will be more difficult to identify the rear-upper first decorative board. Furthermore, if no substrate control number is formed, a product control number may be engraved on either or both the inside and outside of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210, which serves as a case for housing the rear-upper first decorative substrate. In this case, even if the substrate surface of the rear-upper first decorative substrate is visually inspected, it will be difficult to identify the function of the substrate. However, by engraving the product control number on the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 that houses the rear-upper first decorative substrate, it will be possible to check the engraving during the manufacturing process, for example, to determine that the rear-upper first decorative substrate is being housed, preventing errors during installation.

Furthermore, when multiple information displays are provided, the configurations related to the board management number (such as the configuration related to the rear-upper first decorative board and the configuration related to the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210) may all be the same, or the configurations related to the board management number may be different for some information displays. For example, a first information display may be provided that includes a first rear-upper first decorative board on which the board management number is formed on either or both of the LED mounting surface and rear mounting surface of the rear-upper first decorative board, and a second information display may be provided that includes a second rear-upper first decorative board on which the board management number is formed on neither the LED mounting surface nor the rear mounting surface of the rear-upper first decorative board.

In addition, in the above-mentioned stalled state, all LEDs mounted on the rear upper first decorative substrate of the information display may be controlled to an off state, or some or all LEDs may be lit (some may be lit and the rest may blink, some may blink and the rest may be turned off, or some may be lit and the rest may be turned off). Furthermore, if multiple information displays are provided, the control state of all information displays may be the same in the stalled state, or some information displays may be controlled to different states. For example, a first information display may be provided that includes a first rear upper first decorative substrate on which all mounted LEDs are controlled to an off state in the stalled state, and a second information display may be provided that includes a second rear upper first decorative substrate on which some or all mounted LEDs are controlled to an on state in the stalled state.

[Split game board]
The pachinko machine 1 is a frame body consisting of a door frame 3 and a main body frame 4, and can be changed to a pachinko machine 1 with different specifications by removing the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 and attaching a new game board 5 to the main body frame 4. As described above, the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 includes a plate-shaped game panel 1100 that defines the rear end of the play area 5a, and various units and components are attached to the front and rear of this plate-shaped game panel 1100. By dividing the plate-shaped game panel 1100 and attaching various units and components to each, it is possible to easily consider design combinations and appearances during the development stage and to accommodate changes in the number and arrangement of various winning slots provided on the game board 5, the shape of the decorative components, the shape of the play area 5a, etc.

A completely new gaming board 5A (hereinafter, sometimes referred to simply as "split gaming board 5A." The "A" stands for A specification) is described with reference to Figures 302 to 304. Figure 302 is a schematic front view of the split gaming board (a), and a schematic rear view of the split gaming board (b). Figure 303 is a rear perspective view of the split gaming board (a), seen from the lower left rear, of the split gaming board before the right and left gaming boards that make up the split gaming board are combined, and a rear perspective view of the split gaming board (b), seen from the lower left rear. Figure 304 is a schematic front view of the split gaming board in Figure 302(a) after the split gaming board has been redecorated. Note that Figures 302 to 304 omit the various units and components that correspond to the various units and components that are attached to the gaming board 5 already described in Figure 129, etc.

The split gaming board 5A is composed of the aforementioned front component 1000, which defines the outer periphery of the playing area 5a and has a generally rectangular exterior when viewed from the front, and the aforementioned plate-like gaming panel 1100, which is attached to the rear of the front component 1000 and defines the rear end of the playing area 5a. The split gaming board 5A is divided into two halves, a left gaming board 5AL and a right gaming board 5AR. The left gaming board 5AL is approximately three-quarters the length of the split gaming board 5A in the left-right direction, while the right gaming board 5AR is approximately one-quarter the length of the split gaming board in the left-right direction. Where the left gaming board 5AL and right gaming board 5AR join, the right side of the left gaming board 5AL and the left side of the right gaming board 5AR have a spigot-jointed structure, with the right side of the left gaming board 5AL being convex and the right gaming board 5AR being concave. After the left and right game boards 5AL and 5AR are joined together, unillustrated bolts are passed through and tightened from one side of the connecting members (not shown) provided on the left and right game boards 5AL and 5AR to the other. This automatically makes the surface of the game area 5a where the game balls roll, which is the connecting part between the left and right game boards 5AL and 5AR, flush (i.e., no steps are created), and the left and right game boards 5AL and 5AR are fixed together.

The split game board 5A is formed by combining the left and right game boards 5AL and 5AR and then fastening bolts (not shown) from one side to the other of connecting members (not shown) provided on the left and right game boards 5AL and 5AR to secure the left and right game boards 5AL and 5AR, and attaching the split game board 5A to the main frame 4. However, the left and right game boards 5AL and 5AR may also be configured to be individually secured to the main frame 4. Even in this case, the surface of the play area 5a where the game balls roll, which is the connecting portion between the left and right game boards 5AL and 5AR, automatically becomes flush (i.e., no steps are created) when the left and right game boards 5AL and 5AR are secured to the main frame 4.

The left-side gaming board 5AL has a function display unit 1400, which can display the game status using LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310, located on the front (surface) of the upper left region of the previous component 1000. In contrast, the left-side gaming board 5AL has a sub-function display unit 2250 (the "sub-function display unit" will be referred to as the "fourth symbol"), which can display the game status using LEDs based on control signals from the peripheral control board 1510, located on the lower left side of the inner rail 1002 of the previous component 1000, protruding toward the game area 5a. Note that while the sub-function display unit 2250 was located on the lower left side of the inner rail 1002 of the previous component 1000, protruding toward the game area 5a, it may instead be located on any of the units or components that make up the front unit 2000 described above. Furthermore, the game status displayed on the sub-function display unit 2250 includes at least the first special symbol display and/or the second special symbol display displayed on the function display unit 1400, and the game information displayed on the function display unit 1400 may be displayed in a predetermined lighting pattern, or may be displayed in the same lighting pattern as the game information displayed on the function display unit 1400.

The left-side gaming board 5AL has a plate-shaped front component 1000 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "left-side front component 1000L") and a plate-shaped gaming panel 1100 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "left-side gaming panel 1100L") arranged on the back side of the left-side front component 1000L. The right-side gaming board 5AR has a plate-shaped front component 1000 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "left-side front component 1000R") and a plate-shaped gaming panel 1100 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "right-side gaming panel 1100R") arranged on the back side of the right-side front component 1000R. The above-mentioned back unit 3000 is arranged on the back side of the divided gaming board 5A, that is, on the back sides of the left-side gaming panel 1100L and the right-side gaming panel 1100R. When the divided gaming board 5A is viewed from the front, the right side (the side facing the right gaming panel 1100R) of the rear box 3010 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "left rear box 3010L") of the rear unit 3000 located behind the left gaming panel 1100L on the left gaming board 5AL is open (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "right-side opening of the left rear box 3010L"), and the left side (the side facing the left gaming panel 1100L) of the rear box 3010 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "right-side rear box 3010R") of the rear unit 3000 located behind the right gaming panel 1100R on the right gaming board 5AR is open (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "left-side opening of the right rear box 3010R").

Behind the left rear box 3010L are located the detachably attached performance display device 1600 described above, the peripheral control unit 1500 housing the peripheral control board 1510 described above, the main control unit 1300 housing the main control board 1310 described above, and the left drive board unit 1700L (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "left drive board unit 1700L") housing various other boards (e.g., various relay boards, decorative boards with various LEDs mounted on them that are attached to the various performance units housed in the left rear box 3010L, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.). The main control board 1310 is also equipped with the setting key switch 1311a described above, which allows the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 to be changed and confirmed.

Behind the right rear box 3010R is located the right drive board unit 1700R (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "right drive board unit 1700R"), which houses various boards (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted that are attached to the various performance units housed in the right rear box 3010R, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.).

In this way, the split gaming board 5A has the main control board 1310 and peripheral control board 1510, boards on which microprocessors are mounted, located behind the left gaming board 5AL, while the decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted, and drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc., for the various presentation units housed in the right rear box 3010R are located behind the right gaming board 5AR. In other words, the split gaming board 5A is composed of the left gaming board 5AL, which is a board on which a microprocessor is mounted, and the right gaming board 5AR, which is a board on which a microprocessor is not mounted. Furthermore, while only the control objects of the peripheral control board 1510 (e.g., movable bodies on the game board, etc.) are provided in front of the right-side game board 5AR to execute game effects, the front of the left-side game board 5AL is provided with not only the control objects of the peripheral control board 1510 (sub-function display unit 2250, etc.) but also the control objects of the main control board 1310 (function display unit 1400) to display information directly related to the progress of the game (information regarding wins and losses, information regarding the type of jackpot, etc.). In this way, the right-side game board 5AR is configured so that only boards without microprocessors are provided in the rear, and only the control objects of the peripheral control board 1510 are provided in the front, making it easy to modify the right-side game board 5AR in response to changes in design, specifications, etc.

In addition to the main control board 1310 and peripheral control board 1510 described above, the left-side gaming board 5AL is also provided with a panel relay board 1710, a general winning slot sensor 3001, a first start slot sensor 3002, a second start slot sensor 2401, a gate sensor 2801, a large winning slot sensor 2402, a special winning slot sensor 2601, a V winning slot sensor 3003, a losing slot sensor 3004, a start slot solenoid 2412, an attacca solenoid 2414, a special winning slot solenoid 2612, a V distribution solenoid 3007, a magnetic sensor 1050, a base monitor 1310h, and the like. In other words, in this example, even if the right-side gaming board 5AR is not connected to the left-side gaming board 5AL or if the combination of the left-side gaming board 5AL and the right-side gaming board 5AR is incompatible, it is possible to play using the left-side gaming board 5AL alone.

[Drawer connector]
As described above, the left drive board unit 1700L, located behind the left rear box 3010L, houses various relay boards. Among these relay boards, the left game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW, which mounts two left game board drawer connectors LDRW vertically, is located at the upper rear of the left rear box 3010L near the right opening of the left rear box 3010L. The two left game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW are convex. The left game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 either directly or via various relay boards. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 is further electrically connected to various relay boards, and is electrically connected via various relay boards or directly to decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc., which are attached to various performance units in the left-side drive board unit 1700L, and is also electrically connected to the sub-function display unit 2250.

Furthermore, as described above, the right-side drive board unit 1700R, located behind the right-side rear box 3010R, houses various relay boards. Of these various relay boards, the right-side game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW, on which the right-side game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW are mounted, is located at the upper rear of the right-side rear box 3010R, near the left-side opening of the right-side rear box 3010R, in positions corresponding to the two left-side game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW located on the left-side game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW. The two right-side game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW are recessed. The decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted, drive motors, drive solenoids, and other drive boards attached to the various performance units in the right-side drive board unit 1700R, are electrically connected to the right-side game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW either directly or via the various relay boards.

Below the left rear box 3010L of the left gaming board 5AL, in the center of the bottom edge of the divided gaming board 5A, which combines the left gaming board 5AL and the right gaming board 5AR, is a lower gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW, on which two lower gaming board drawer connectors UDRW are mounted in the left-right direction. The two lower gaming board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW are convex. The lower gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 directly or via various relay boards. Two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) are provided on a main frame side relay board (not shown) on the front of the main frame 4 at positions corresponding to the two lower gaming board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW provided on the left rear box 3010L of the left gaming board 5AL. The two main frame drawer connectors are recessed. The various boards provided in the door frame 3 (decorative boards and various relay boards provided in the tray unit 200, left side unit 420, right side unit 430, and top unit 450. These relay boards include those that relay detection signals from various sensors in the performance operation unit 300 of the tray unit 200) are electrically connected to the main frame drawer connectors.

Here, we will explain drawer connectors such as the left-side game board drawer connector LDRW (convex type), the right-side game board drawer connector RDRW (concave type), the lower game board drawer connector UDRW (concave type), and the main frame side drawer connector (concave type). The left-side game board drawer connector LDRW (convex type) and the right-side game board drawer connector RDRW (concave type) are connectors that can automatically establish an electrical connection between the left-side game board 5AL and the right-side game board 5AR simply by combining the two. The lower game board drawer connector UDRW (convex type) and the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) are connectors that can automatically establish an electrical connection between the main frame 4 and the divided game board 5A simply by attaching the divided game board 5A to the main frame 4.

[Drawer connector for left-side game board, drawer connector for right-side game board]
When the left-side gaming board 5AL and the right-side gaming board 5AR are combined, the drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW for the left-side gaming board mounted on the convex type drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW for the left-side gaming board of the left-side gaming board 5AL are guided and fitted into the drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW for the right-side gaming board mounted on the concave type drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW for the right-side gaming board of the right-side gaming board 5AR, and each terminal of the drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW for the left-side gaming board mounted on the drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW for the left-side gaming board of the left-side gaming board 5AL is electrically connected to each terminal of the drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW for the right-side gaming board mounted on the drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW for the right-side gaming board of the right-side gaming board 5AR.

When the left-side gaming board 5AL and the right-side gaming board 5AR are combined, the terminals of the left-side gaming board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW mounted on the left-side gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left-side gaming board 5AL are electrically connected to the terminals of the right-side gaming board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW mounted on the right-side gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right-side gaming board 5AR, forming a control signal line that transmits various control signals between the peripheral control board 1510 located behind the left-side rear box 3010L on the left-side gaming board 5AL and the various boards located behind the right-side rear box 3010R on the right-side gaming board 5AR. A ground (GND) line is formed that electrically connects the grounds (GND, circuit ground) of the various control boards and other boards located behind the left rear box 3010L on the left gaming board 5AL to the grounds (GND, circuit ground) of the various boards located behind the right rear box 3010R on the right gaming board 5AR. In addition, various power supply lines are formed that supply various power sources (DC power sources such as +5V, +12V, +24V) to the various boards located behind the right rear box 3010R on the right gaming board 5AR via the various control boards and/or other boards located behind the left rear box 3010L on the left gaming board 5AL.

Mounting through-holes are formed in the insulating exterior of the left-side game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW and the insulating exterior of the right-side game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW. The left-side game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left-side game board 5AL, on which the left-side game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW are mounted, has a through-hole in a position corresponding to the insulating mounting through-hole of the left-side game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW. Furthermore, the right-side game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right-side game board 5AR, on which the right-side game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW are mounted, has a through-hole in a position corresponding to the insulating mounting through-hole of the right-side game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW.

When mounting the drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW for the left-side gaming board on the drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW for the left-side gaming board 5AL, first insert each terminal of the drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW for the left-side gaming board 5AL into the terminal through-holes formed in the drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW for the left-side gaming board 5AL from the mounting surface of the drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW for the left-side gaming board 5AL towards the soldering surface of the drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW, and solder each terminal of the drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW for the left-side gaming board protruding from the soldering surface to the land portion of the terminal through-hole. Rivets are then inserted into mounting through-holes formed in the insulating exterior of the left-side game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW, and the ends of the rivets are crimped, causing the rivets to plastically deform. As a result, the left-side game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW are fixed to the land portions of the terminal through-holes by soldering each terminal of the left-side game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW, and the insulating exterior of the left-side game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW is fixed to the left-side game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left-side game board 5AL by rivet crimping.

By fixing them in this way, when the left-side game board 5AL and the right-side game board 5AR are combined, the load generated when the left-side game board drawer connector LDRW (convex type) is guided into and mated with the right-side game board drawer connector RDRW (concave type) prevents the land portions of the terminal through holes to which the terminals of the left-side game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW are soldered from peeling off from the base material of the left-side game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left-side game board 5AL.

When mounting the drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW for the right-side gaming board on the drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW for the right-side gaming board on the right-side gaming board 5AR, first connect the terminals of the drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW for the right-side gaming board on the right-side gaming board 5AR to the drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW for the left-side gaming board on the left-side gaming board 5AL. The right-side game board 5AR is inserted from the mounting surface of the right-side game board 5AR's drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW toward the soldering surface of the right-side game board 5ARDRW into the terminal through-holes formed in the drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW, and each terminal of the right-side game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW protruding from the soldering surface is soldered to the land portion of the terminal through-hole. Then, rivets are inserted into mounting through-holes formed in the insulating exterior parts of the right-side game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW, and the ends of the rivets are crimped to plastically deform the rivets. As a result, the drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW for the right-side game board are fixed to the land portions of the terminal through holes by soldering the terminals of the drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW for the right-side game board, and further, the insulating exterior portion of the drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW for the right-side game board is fixed to the drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW for the right-side game board 5AR with rivets.

By fixing them in this way, when the left-side game board 5AL and the right-side game board 5AR are combined, the load generated when the left-side game board drawer connector LDRW (convex type) is guided into and mated with the right-side game board drawer connector RDRW (concave type) prevents the land portions of the terminal through holes to which the terminals of the right-side game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW are soldered from peeling off from the base material of the right-side game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right-side game board 5AR.

[Drawer connector for lower game board, drawer connector for main frame]
When the divided gaming board 5A is attached to the main frame 4, the drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW for the lower gaming board mounted on the convex type drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW for the lower gaming board of the left gaming board 5AL are guided and fitted into two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4, which is a concave type, so that the terminals of the drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW for the lower gaming board mounted on the drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW for the left gaming board 5AL are electrically connected to the terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4.

When the split gaming board 5A is attached to the main frame 4, the terminals of the lower gaming board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the left gaming board 5AL are electrically connected to the terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4. This allows the peripheral control board 1510 located behind the left rear box 3010L of the left gaming board 5AL and the various boards provided on the door frame 3 (decorative boards and various relay boards provided on the tray unit 200, door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, and door frame top unit 450). The various relay boards receive signals from various sensors of the performance operation unit 300 of the tray unit 200. These include relays for transmitting detection signals and control signals that transmit various information. A control signal line is formed to transmit various control signals between the left gaming board 5AL and the power supply board 630. A ground (GND) line is also formed to electrically connect the grounds (GND, circuit ground) of the various control boards and other boards located behind the left rear box 3010L of the left gaming board 5AL to the ground (GND, circuit ground) of the power supply board 630 located on the main frame 4. Various power supply lines are also formed to supply various power sources (DC power sources such as +5V, +12V, and +24V) created by the power supply board 630 located on the main frame 4 to the various control boards and other boards located behind the left rear box 3010L of the left gaming board 5AL.

In addition, when the split gaming board 5A is attached to the main frame 4, the terminals of the lower gaming board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the left gaming board 5AL are electrically connected to the terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4, thereby forming a control signal line that transmits various control signals between the main control board 1310 located behind the left rear box 3010L on the left gaming board 5AL and the payout control board 633 provided on the main frame 4.

Mounting through holes are formed in the insulating exterior parts of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW and the main frame side drawer connector. The lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the left game board 5AL, on which the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW are mounted, has through holes in positions corresponding to the insulating mounting through holes of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW. Furthermore, the main frame side relay board (not shown), on which the main frame side drawer connector is mounted, has through holes in positions corresponding to the insulating mounting through holes of the main frame side drawer connector.

Here, for example, when mounting the drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW for the lower game board on the drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW for the lower game board of the left-side game board 5AL, first, each terminal of the drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW for the lower game board is inserted into the terminal through-hole formed in the drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW for the lower game board of the left-side game board 5AL from the mounting surface of the drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW for the lower game board of the left-side game board 5AL towards the soldering surface of the drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW for the lower game board of the left-side game board, and each terminal of the drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW for the lower game board protruding from the soldering surface is soldered to the land portion of the terminal through-hole. Rivets are then inserted into mounting through-holes formed in the insulating exterior of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW, and the ends of the rivets are crimped, causing the rivets to plastically deform. As a result, the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW are fixed to the land portions of the terminal through-holes by soldering each terminal of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW, and the insulating exterior of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW is fixed to the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the left game board 5AL by rivet crimping.

By fixing them in this way, when the split gaming board 5A is attached to the main frame 4, the load generated when the lower gaming board drawer connector UDRW (convex type) is guided into and mated with the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) prevents the land portions of the terminal through holes to which the terminals of the lower gaming board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW are soldered from peeling off from the base material of the lower gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the left gaming board 5AL.

In this embodiment, the main control board 1310, which is equipped with the main control MPU 1310a, a microprocessor, transmits various commands to the control board equipped with the microprocessor, including a self-identification code (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ID") that can identify itself. In other words, the various commands from the main control board 1310 are configured to include an ID. In other words, in this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands that include an ID to the control board equipped with the microprocessor, allowing the microprocessor of the receiving control board to determine the compatibility (integrity) of the combination of the main control board 1310 and the receiving control board.

The main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected via electrical wiring (harness) with connectors on both ends, and various commands are sent in one direction from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 extracts the ID from the various received commands and determines whether the combination of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is compatible (matched). This determination is made in the received command analysis process of step S1022 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 265.

If the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the received command analysis process of step S1022 that the combination of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is incompatible (mismatched), it passes the received command as a command classified as a notification display to the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 265. In the warning process of step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads (extracts) schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, and electrical drive source schedule data from the peripheral control ROM and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC as modes indicating incompatibility (mismatch), thereby setting a process to stop the progression of the performance.

As mentioned above, the main control board 1310 can only transmit in one direction from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, so the peripheral control board 1510 cannot obtain a determination result regarding the compatibility (integrity) of the combination of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, and the game will continue.

In contrast, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 are electrically connected between the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the left game board 5AL when the divided game board 5A is attached to the main frame 4, and the terminals of the two main frame drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame relay boards (not shown) of the main frame 4. This allows various commands to be sent in both directions between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 via these drawer connectors. The payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 extracts IDs from the received commands and determines whether the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is compatible (matched). This determination is made in the command analysis process of step S560 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 263.

When the dispensing control MPU of the dispensing control board 633 determines in the command analysis process of step S560 that the combination of the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633 is incompatible (inconsistent), it sets information indicating that the combination of the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633 is incompatible (inconsistent) in the status information storage area of the dispensing control built-in RAM, and sets information to stop the dispensing operation in the output information storage area of the dispensing control built-in RAM, and passes this to the LED display data creation process of step S564 in the dispensing control unit main processing of the dispensing control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 263, and the command sending process of step S566 in the dispensing control unit main processing of the dispensing control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 263. In the LED display data creation process of step S564, the dispensing control MPU of the dispensing control board 633 creates display data (e.g., display data displaying the letter "H") to be displayed on the error LED indicator of the dispensing control board 633 as a form of incompatibility (inconsistency) and sets this as LED display information in the output information storage area of the dispensing control built-in RAM. In the command transmission process of step S566, it creates an incompatibility command (inconsistency command) notifying of the incompatibility (inconsistency) and sends it to the main control board 1310. In addition, in the port output process of step S548 in the dispensing control board main process of the dispensing control board power-on process shown in FIG. 263, the dispensing control MPU of the dispensing control board 633 stops the dispensing operation of the dispensing motor 584 and outputs display data (e.g., the letter "H") to be displayed on the error LED indicator.

As described above, the main control board 1310 transmits various commands in both directions between the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633. Therefore, the dispensing control board 633 can determine the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633, and transmits this determination result as a command to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 performs the determination of the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633 in the received command analysis process of step S1022 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 265. If the determination result is incompatibility (inconsistency), the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 265 is set to notify this fact. At this time, the performance may continue to progress, or the performance may be stopped.

The main control board 1310 also receives the judgment result from the payout control board 633 regarding the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and if the received judgment result is incompatibility (inconsistency), the game may continue to progress as is or may be stopped.

The gaming board 5A shown in Figures 302 and 303 is composed of a left-side gaming board 5AL and a right-side gaming board 5AR, which constitute an A specification. Here, when changing the A specification of the split gaming board 5A to an A2 specification (here, although the shape of the decorative members on the right-side gaming board and the shape of the playing area 5a differ from those of the A specification, the various data and programs required for the main control board 1310 and peripheral control board 1510 are the same as the contents of the various ROMs, and the right-side gaming board is simply redecorated), as shown in Figure 304, the gaming board 5A2 is composed of a left-side gaming board 5AL and a right-side gaming board 5A2R. The A2 specification is a redecoration of the right-side gaming board in the A specification, and the left-side gaming board 5AL in the A specification can be used in common. Simply replacing the A specification right-side gaming board 5AR with the A2 specification right-side gaming board 5A2R (i.e., replacing only the right-side gaming board) is sufficient.

In addition, various components that can be used in common across various specifications, such as the main control board 1310, peripheral control board 1510, and various other boards (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted that are attached to various performance units housed in the left rear box 3010L, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.), may be placed on the left-side gaming board 5AL. Specifically, the various data and programs required for the main control board 1310 and peripheral control board 1510 can be placed on the left-side gaming board 5AL by simply changing the contents of the various ROMs. Furthermore, of the various winning holes, those whose placement and number are fixed regardless of the specifications are placed on the left-side gaming board 5AL. Furthermore, the shapes of the decorative components and the shape of the playing area 5a that can be used in common across various specifications are placed on the left-side gaming board 5AL. Additionally, various other boards that can be used in common regardless of specifications (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted that are attached to the various performance units housed in the left rear box 3010L, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.) are placed on the left game board 5AL.

In contrast, parts that depend on the specifications may be placed on the right-hand gaming board 5AR. Specifically, of the various winning openings, winning openings that depend on the specifications are placed on the right-hand gaming board 5AR. Furthermore, the shape of the decorative members and the shape of the gaming area 5a that depend on the specifications are placed on the right-hand gaming board 5AR.

[Self-identification code of the right-side gaming board in a divided gaming board]
As described above, the split game board employs a configuration in which the left game board and the right game board are combined, and a microprocessor is mounted on the left game board, while no microprocessor is mounted on the right game board.

However, while such split gaming boards allow the left and right gaming boards to be simply combined, there is also the possibility of human error, such as the worker assembling the split gaming board accidentally assembling an incorrect combination of the left and right gaming boards (an incompatible (mismatched) combination). If such an incompatible (mismatched) split gaming board is attached to the main frame 4 of a pachinko machine 1 in an island facility in an amusement hall and a player plays on it, for example, it could result in a loss of uniformity in the design of the entire pachinko machine, reducing the player's interest in the game. It is also undesirable because it could result in a pachinko machine that differs from the one whose specifications were submitted to the application authority and approved being installed in the amusement hall. Furthermore, if, due to human error, the decorative elements corresponding to the old gaming board remain instead of being replaced with those corresponding to the new gaming board, the uniformity of the entire gaming machine could be lost, reducing the player's interest in the game.

[ID output circuit]
Therefore, in this embodiment, the right-side gaming board 5AR (right-side gaming board 5A2R) is provided with an ID output circuit that can output a self-identification code (ID) that can identify itself to the left-side gaming board 5AL. Here, the ID output circuit will be described with reference to Fig. 305. Fig. 305 is a circuit diagram showing an example of an ID output circuit.

The right-side gaming board 5AR is equipped with an ID output circuit IDC that can identify itself. This ID output circuit IDC may be mounted on a dedicated board located at the rear of the right-side gaming board 5AR, or it may be mounted on one of the various relay boards, or it may be mounted together with LEDs mounted on a decorative board, or it may be mounted together with electronic components mounted on another board.

The ID output circuit IDC is primarily composed of a parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa. The parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa is an electronic component that is primarily composed of multiple flip-flop circuits (8 flip-flop circuits), is assembled into a chip, and can be connected in a daisy chain. It has eight ID setting terminals, A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and H, that can set the ID (i.e., there are eight parallel input terminals that can set the ID in 8-bit width), a CK terminal to which an ID acquisition clock signal is input, a non-inverting QH terminal that takes in the information set in the eight ID setting terminals A to H and outputs it as serial data without inverting it, an inverting QH terminal (shown in the diagram with a solid line above the letter "Q") that takes in the information set in the eight ID setting terminals A to H and inverts it and outputs it as serial data, and a CK terminal that prohibits the input of a clock signal. It mainly consists of an INH terminal, an S/inverted L terminal (shown in the diagram as a solid line above the letter "L") that switches between shift operation based on the ID acquisition clock signal input to the CK terminal and parallel operation in which each flip-flop circuit takes in information set in the eight ID setting terminals A to H, an SI terminal to which serial data is input, a power supply terminal Vcc to which control power is supplied, and a GND terminal that is electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground).

The parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa has a power supply terminal Vcc electrically connected to +5V, and a GND terminal, CK INT terminal, and SI terminal electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground). The non-inverting QH terminal is left unconnected, and the inverting QH terminal outputs serial data converted from the ID, which is parallel data set in the eight ID setting terminals, as an ID code signal.

The S/inverted L terminal receives an SH/LD switching signal from outside the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa. When the logic of the SH/LD switching signal is parallel operation logic (logic LOW, electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground)), each flip-flop circuit of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa captures and stores (holds) the information currently set in the eight ID setting terminals (A terminal to H terminal). On the other hand, when the logic of the SH/LD switching signal is shift operation logic (logic HI, electrically connected to +5V), which is the inverse of the parallel operation logic, and the CK INT terminal is electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground), the captured information is shifted sequentially at the rising edge of the ID acquisition clock signal input to the CK terminal.

The SH/LD switching signal input to the S/inverted L terminal may be output from the peripheral control board 1510, or it may be output from a delay circuit provided together with the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa. This delay circuit is implemented on the board together with the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa as a circuit that constitutes the ID output circuit IDC, and is a circuit that sets the logic of the SH/LD switching signal to parallel operation logic for a predetermined time after the pachinko machine is turned on, and can switch from parallel operation logic to shift operation logic once this predetermined time has elapsed.

In this embodiment, the "predetermined time" is set to, for example, 30 milliseconds. When the pachinko machine is powered on and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 starts the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 265, the initial setting processing of step S1000 and then the current time information acquisition processing of step S1002 are completed within this predetermined time. This is because the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 needs to acquire an ID code signal by outputting an ID acquisition clock signal in the ID determination processing described below, and determine the compatibility (integrity) of the left-side game board 5AL and the right-side game board 5AR.

When the SH/LD switching signal input to the S/inverted L terminal is configured to be output from the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 can adjust the timing at which it starts to retrieve the information set in the eight ID setting terminals, A terminal to H terminal, making it possible to check the parallel operation of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa (fault inspection). However, it is necessary to provide a path for transmitting the SH/LD switching signal from the peripheral control board 1510 to the S/inverted L terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa.

In contrast, if the SH/LD switching signal input to the S/inverted L terminal is configured to be output from a delay circuit, the period during which each flip-flop circuit of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa begins to retrieve the information set in the eight ID setting terminals A through H is limited to a predetermined time (e.g., 30 milliseconds) from when the pachinko machine is powered on. While the peripheral control board 1510 cannot check the parallel operation of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa (test for defects), there is no need to provide a path for transmitting the SH/LD switching signal from the peripheral control board 1510 to the S/inverted L terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa. When transmitting various control signals via a drawer connector, the number of terminals on the drawer connector is limited, so the number of control signals must be reduced as much as possible. When the SH/LD switching signal input to the S/inverted L terminal is configured to be output from the delay circuit, there is no need to provide a path for transmitting the SH/LD switching signal from the peripheral control board 1510 to the S/inverted L terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa, which helps reduce the number of control signals transmitted via the drawer connector.

In this embodiment, the eight ID setting terminals on the right-side gaming board 5AR have terminals A, B, C, and D electrically connected to +5V, and terminals E, F, G, and H electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground). In other words, the ID of the right-side gaming board 5AR, expressed as an 8-bit width with terminal A as the most significant bit and terminal H as the least significant bit, is 11110000B (the letter "B" represents a binary number), and expressed in hexadecimal as F0H (the letter "H" represents a hexadecimal number). In contrast, the eight ID setting terminals on the right-side gaming board 5A2R shown in Figure 304 have terminals A, B, C, D, and H electrically connected to +5V, and terminals E, F, and G electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground). In other words, the ID of the right-side game board 5A2R, when expressed in 8 bits with the A terminal as the most significant bit and the H terminal as the least significant bit, becomes 11110001B (the letter "B" represents a binary number), and when expressed in hexadecimal, becomes F1H (the letter "H" represents a hexadecimal number). In this way, the ID of the right-side game board 5AR and the ID of the right-side game board 5A2R are preset to be different. In this embodiment, as described above, the A specification and A2 specification split gaming boards 5A differ in the shape of the decorative members on the right-side gaming board and the shape of the gaming area 5a. However, the various data and programs required for the main control board 1310 and peripheral control board 1510 are the same as the contents of the various ROMs, and the right-side gaming board can be redecorated. Therefore, the combination of the left-side gaming board 5AL and the right-side gaming board 5AR is compatible (matched), and the combination of the left-side gaming board 5AL and the right-side gaming board 5A2R is also compatible (matched).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the S/inverted L terminal is electrically connected to +5V, the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa has each flip-flop circuit shifting sequentially at the rising edge of the ID acquisition clock signal input to the CK terminal (that is, information input to the A terminal → information input to the B terminal → information input to the C terminal → information input to the D terminal → information input to the E terminal → information input to the F terminal → information input to the G terminal → information input to the H terminal → shifting one bit at a time from the non-inverted QH terminal and inverted QH terminal to output the ID code signal as serial data), so the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa operates as an 8-bit shift register.

By combining the left-side gaming board 5AL and the right-side gaming board 5AR, as described above, the terminals of the left-side gaming board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW mounted on the left-side gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left-side gaming board 5AL are electrically connected to the terminals of the right-side gaming board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW mounted on the right-side gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right-side gaming board 5AR, thereby forming a control signal line that transmits various control signals between the peripheral control board 1510 located behind the left-side rear box 3010L on the left-side gaming board 5AL and the various boards located behind the right-side rear box 3010R on the right-side gaming board 5AR. As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and an ID acquisition clock signal is input from the peripheral control board 1510 of the left-side game board 5AL via the terminals of the right-side game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW mounted on the right-side game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right-side game board 5AR and the terminals of the left-side game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW mounted on the left-side game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left-side game board 5AL, the ID output circuit IDC provided on the right-side game board 5AR can transmit an ID code signal that can identify itself based on this input ID acquisition clock signal to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left-side game board 5AL. The peripheral control board 1510 of the left-side game board 5AL can acquire the ID code signal by outputting the ID acquisition clock signal at a predetermined timing and determine the compatibility (matching) of the left-side game board 5AL and the right-side game board 5AR. This prevents the overall design of the pachinko machine from losing its sense of unity, and prevents players from losing interest in the game. This determination will be explained later.

The ID output circuit IDC provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR is capable of transmitting an ID code signal to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left-side gaming board 5AL via a drawer connector consisting of the terminals of the right-side gaming board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW mounted on the right-side gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right-side gaming board 5AR, and the terminals of the left-side gaming board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW mounted on the left-side gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left-side gaming board 5AL. However, instead of this, The right-side gaming board 5AR and the connector relay board 5ALDRW may be electrically connected via electrical wiring (harness) with connectors on both ends, so that the ID code signal from the ID output circuit IDC provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR can be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left-side gaming board 5AL. Alternatively, the board on which the ID output circuit IDC is mounted and the peripheral control board 1510 of the left-side gaming board 5AL may be directly electrically connected via electrical wiring (harness) with connectors on both ends, so that the ID code signal from the ID output circuit IDC provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR can be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left-side gaming board 5AL.

The ID acquisition clock signal and SH/LD switching signal to the ID output circuit IDC provided on the right-side gaming panel 5AR, and the ID code signal from the ID output circuit IDC provided on the right-side gaming panel 5AR may be transmitted via one of the two drawer connectors, or may be transmitted separately to both drawer connectors.

[Detection signals from photosensors that detect the positions of various movable bodies provided on the right-side gaming board]
Next, the detection signals from the photosensors that detect the positions (home position and operating position) of various movable bodies when they are provided on the right-side game board 5AR will be described with reference to Fig. 306. Fig. 306 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a photosensor information serial output circuit.

As shown in Figure 306, detection signals from photosensors that detect the positions (home position and operating position) of the various movable bodies provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR are collected in the photosensor information serial output circuit PSO. The photosensor information serial output circuit PSO is primarily composed of a parallel-serial conversion circuit PSOa. The parallel-serial conversion circuit PSOa in this photosensor information serial output circuit PSO is the same circuit as the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC described above, and therefore explanations of each terminal, parts with identical circuit configurations, and operation will be omitted here.

The detection signals from the photosensors that detect the positions (home positions and operating positions) of the various movable bodies provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR are input as signals corresponding to eight input terminals: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and H (i.e., there are eight parallel input terminals that can set an ID with an 8-bit width). If the number of photosensors that detect the positions (home positions and operating positions) of the various movable bodies provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR is less than eight, the input terminals corresponding to the remaining number are electrically connected to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground).

The inverted QH terminal (shown by a solid line above the letter "Q" in the diagram) takes in the information set at the eight input terminals A through H, inverts it, and outputs it serially as serial data. It is electrically connected to the SI terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC described above. In other words, the parallel-serial conversion circuit PSOa and the serial-parallel conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC are daisy-chain connected.

The S/inverted L terminal (shown in the diagram with a solid line above the letter "L") switches between shift operation based on the ID acquisition clock signal input to the CK terminal and parallel operation in which each flip-flop circuit takes in information set in the eight input terminals A to H, and receives the SH/LD switching signal from the peripheral control board 1510. The SH/LD switching signal is input to the S/inverted L terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit PSOa of the photosensor information serial output circuit PSO, as well as the S/inverted L terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC.

When the S/inverted L terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit PSOa of the photosensor information serial output circuit PSO on the right-side gaming panel 5AR and the S/inverted L terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC are electrically connected to +5V, the serial-parallel conversion circuit PSOa of the photosensor information serial output circuit PSO and the serial-parallel conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC shift sequentially at the rising edge of the ID acquisition clock signal input to the CK terminal of each flip-flop circuit in the serial-parallel conversion circuit PSOa of the photosensor information serial output circuit PSO and the serial-parallel conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC. (That is, information input to terminal A → information input to terminal B → information input to terminal C → information input to terminal D → information input to terminal E → information input to terminal F → information input to terminal G → information input to terminal H → the ID code signal is output as serial data by shifting one bit at a time from the non-inverted QH terminal and inverted QH terminal), so it operates as a 16-bit shift register made up of an 8-bit shift register made up of the serial-parallel conversion circuit PSOa of the photosensor information serial output circuit PSO and an 8-bit shift register made up of the serial-parallel conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC.

By combining the left-side gaming board 5AL and the right-side gaming board 5AR, as described above, the terminals of the left-side gaming board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW mounted on the left-side gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left-side gaming board 5AL are electrically connected to the terminals of the right-side gaming board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW mounted on the right-side gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right-side gaming board 5AR, thereby forming a control signal line that transmits various control signals between the peripheral control board 1510 located behind the left-side rear box 3010L on the left-side gaming board 5AL and various boards on the right-side gaming board 5AR. As a result, when viewed from the peripheral control board 1510 located behind the left rear box 3010L on the left gaming board 5AL, the serial-parallel conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC on the right gaming board 5AR becomes the front-stage 8-bit shift register, and the serial-parallel conversion circuit PSOa of the photosensor information serial output circuit PSO on the right gaming board 5AR becomes the back-stage 8-bit shift register. In other words, the contents held by each flip-flop of the serial-parallel conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC on the right gaming board 5AR, which becomes the front-stage 8-bit shift register, are input to the peripheral control board 1510, followed by the contents held by each flip-flop of the serial-parallel conversion circuit PSOa of the photosensor information serial output circuit PSO on the right gaming board 5AR, which becomes the back-stage 8-bit shift register, one bit at a time, as serial data.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and an ID acquisition clock signal is input from the peripheral control board 1510 of the left gaming board 5AL via the drawer connectors formed by the terminals of the right gaming board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW mounted on the right gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right gaming board 5AR and the terminals of the left gaming board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW mounted on the left gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left gaming board 5AL, the ID output circuit IDC provided on the right gaming board 5AR and the photosensor information serial output circuit PSO provided on the right gaming board 5AR can transmit an ID code signal that can identify itself based on this input ID acquisition clock signal and a detection signal that detects the positions of various movable bodies provided on the right gaming board 5AR as a single serial signal, a photo and ID code signal, to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left gaming board 5AL. The peripheral control board 1510 of the left gaming board 5AL acquires photo and ID code signals by outputting an ID acquisition clock signal at a predetermined timing, thereby determining the compatibility (matching) between the left gaming board 5AL and the right gaming board 5AR and grasping the positions of various movable bodies. For example, in the movable body information acquisition process of step S1106 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 267, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 sets and outputs the logic of the SH/LD switch signal to switch to parallel operation and then serial operation, and then outputs an ID acquisition clock signal, thereby acquiring photo and ID code signals, determining the compatibility (matching) between the left gaming board 5AL and the right gaming board 5AR and grasping the positions of various movable bodies.

The ID output circuit IDC provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR is capable of transmitting photo and ID code signals to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left-side gaming board 5AL via a drawer connector consisting of the terminals of the right-side gaming board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW mounted on the right-side gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right-side gaming board 5AR, and the terminals of the left-side gaming board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW mounted on the left-side gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left-side gaming board 5AL. However, instead of this, The left-side game board 5AL's drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW may be electrically connected via electrical wiring (harness) with connectors on both ends, allowing the photo and ID code signals to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left-side game board 5AL, or the board mounting the ID output circuit IDC provided on the right-side game board 5AR may be directly electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left-side game board 5AL via electrical wiring (harness) with connectors on both ends, allowing the photo and ID code signals to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left-side game board 5AL.

In addition, by electrically connecting the inverted QH terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit PSOa of the photosensor information serial output circuit PSO in the right-side gaming board 5AR and the SI terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC, as described above, it operates as a 16-bit shift register, and the photo and ID code signal is configured as a serial signal containing information on the detection signal from the photosensor that detects the positions (original position and operating position) of the various movable bodies provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR and information on the ID of the right-side gaming board 5AR. Previously, signals were transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left-side gaming board 5AL via a drawer connector formed by the terminals of the LDRW, LDRW terminals. However, instead, the inverted QH terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit PSOa of the photosensor information serial output circuit PSO on the right-side gaming board 5AR and the SI terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC may be treated as separate serial systems, and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left-side gaming board 5AL via a drawer connector formed by the terminals of the right-side gaming board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW mounted on the right-side gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right-side gaming board 5AR, and the terminals of the left-side gaming board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW mounted on the left-side gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left-side gaming board 5AL.

[Self-identification code when the right-side game board is further divided]
Here, the ID output circuit when the right-side gaming board 5AR is further divided into an upper and a lower part, that is, an upper right gaming board 5ART and a lower right gaming board 5ARU, will be described with reference to Fig. 307. Fig. 307 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a plurality of ID output circuits.

The right-side gaming board 5AR can be assembled by combining the upper right gaming board 5ART and the lower right gaming board 5ARU. After combining the upper right gaming board 5ART and the lower right gaming board 5ARU, the right-side gaming board 5AR is assembled by passing a bolt (not shown) through one end of the connecting member (not shown) provided on the upper right gaming board 5ART and the lower right gaming board 5ARU and tightening it from the other end. This automatically makes the surface of the playing area 5a where the game balls roll, which is the connecting portion between the upper right gaming board 5ART and the lower right gaming board 5ARU, flush (i.e., prevents any steps from occurring), and secures the upper right gaming board 5ART and the lower right gaming board 5ARU in place.

The right-side game board 5AR is fixed by fastening the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU together after combining them, and then fastening bolts (not shown) from one side to the other of the connecting members (not shown) provided on the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU. Furthermore, after combining the left-side game board 5AL and the right-side game board 5AR, The left-hand gaming board 5AL and the right-hand gaming board 5AR are secured together and the split gaming board 5A is attached to the main frame 4 by passing bolts (not shown) through connecting members (not shown) provided on the gaming board 5AL and the right-hand gaming board 5AR from one side to the other and tightening them. However, the left-hand gaming board 5AL, the upper-right gaming board 5ART, and the lower-right gaming board 5ARU may each be secured individually to the main frame 4. Even in this case, the surfaces of the game areas 5a where the game balls roll, which are the connecting portions between the left-hand gaming board 5AL, the upper-right gaming board 5ART, and the lower-right gaming board 5ARU, automatically become flush (i.e., no steps are created) and the left-hand gaming board 5AL, the upper-right gaming board 5ART, and the lower-right gaming board 5ARU are secured to the main frame 4.

The upper right gaming board 5ART is provided with a right side gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW on which the above-mentioned right side gaming board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW are mounted. The two right side gaming board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW are of the concave type. The upper right gaming board 5ART is also provided with a right side gaming board drawer connector relay board on which two upper right side gaming board drawer connectors (not shown) are mounted. The two upper right side gaming board drawer connectors are of the convex type. The decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted, and the drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc., which are attached to the various performance units on the upper right gaming board 5ART, are electrically connected to the right side gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW either directly or via various relay boards.

The lower right gaming board 5ARU is equipped with a drawer connector relay board for the lower right gaming board, on which two drawer connectors for the lower right gaming board (not shown) are mounted in positions corresponding to the two drawer connectors for the upper right gaming board located on the drawer connector relay board for the upper right gaming board (not shown). The two drawer connectors for the lower right gaming board are of the concave type. The decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted, and the drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc., which are attached to the various performance units on the lower right gaming board 5ARU, are electrically connected to the drawer connector relay board for the lower right gaming board (not shown) either directly or via various relay boards.

The two drawer connectors (convex type) for the upper right gaming board (not shown) and the two drawer connectors (concave type) for the lower right gaming board (not shown) are connectors that automatically electrically connect the upper right gaming board 5ART and the lower right gaming board 5ARU simply by combining the upper right gaming board 5ART and the lower right gaming board 5ARU.

When the upper right gaming board 5ART and the lower right gaming board 5ARU are combined, the two upper right gaming board drawer connectors mounted on the upper right gaming board drawer connector relay board of the upper right gaming board 5ART, which is a convex type, are guided and fitted into the two lower right gaming board drawer connectors mounted on the lower right gaming board drawer connector relay board of the lower right gaming board 5ARU, which is a concave type, so that the terminals of the two upper right gaming board drawer connectors mounted on the upper right gaming board drawer connector relay board of the upper right gaming board 5ART are electrically connected to the terminals of the two lower right gaming board drawer connectors mounted on the lower right gaming board drawer connector relay board of the lower right gaming board 5ARU. This electrical connection forms control signal lines that transmit various control signals between the various boards on the upper right gaming board 5ART and the various boards on the lower right gaming board 5ARU, forms ground (GND) lines that electrically connect the grounds (GND, circuit ground) of the various boards on the upper right gaming board 5ART with the grounds (GND, circuit ground) of the various boards on the lower right gaming board 5ARU, and forms various power supply lines that supply various power sources (DC power sources such as +5V, +12V, +24V) to the various boards on the lower right gaming board 5ARU via the various boards on the upper right gaming board 5ART.

The insulating exterior parts of the two drawer connectors for the upper right game board and the insulating exterior parts of the two drawer connectors for the lower right game board are each formed with a mounting through-hole, similar to the drawer connectors for the right game board RDRW, RDRW described above. By inserting rivets into the mounting through-holes and crimping the ends of the rivets, the two drawer connectors for the upper right game board are fixed to the upper right game board drawer connector relay board of the upper right game board 5ART, and the two drawer connectors for the lower right game board are fixed to the lower right game board drawer connector relay board of the lower right game board 5ARU.

By fixing them in this manner, when the upper right gaming board 5ART and the lower right gaming board 5ARU are combined, the load generated when the upper right gaming board drawer connector (convex type) is guided into and mated with the lower right gaming board drawer connector (concave type) prevents the land portions of the terminal through holes to which the terminals of the upper right gaming board drawer connector are soldered from peeling off from the base material of the upper right gaming board drawer connector relay board on the upper right gaming board 5ART, and also prevents the land portions of the terminal through holes to which the terminals of the lower right gaming board drawer connector are soldered from peeling off from the base material of the lower right gaming board drawer connector relay board on the lower right gaming board 5ARU.

The upper right gaming board 5ART is provided with an ID output circuit IDCT that can identify itself, and the lower right gaming board 5ARU is provided with an ID output circuit IDCU that can identify itself. The ID output circuit IDCT of the upper right gaming board 5ART may be mounted on a dedicated board located behind the upper right gaming board 5ART, or it may be mounted on one of the various relay boards of the upper right gaming board 5ART, or it may be mounted together with LEDs mounted on a decorative board of the upper right gaming board 5ART, or it may be mounted together with electronic components mounted on other boards of the upper right gaming board 5ART. The ID output circuit IDCU of the lower right gaming board 5ARU may be mounted on a dedicated board located behind the lower right gaming board 5ARU, or may be mounted on one of the various relay boards of the lower right gaming board 5ARU, or may be mounted together with LEDs mounted on a decorative board of the lower right gaming board 5ARU, or may be mounted together with electronic components mounted on other boards of the lower right gaming board 5ARU.

The ID output circuits IDCT and IDCU have the same circuit configuration as the ID output circuit IDC described above, and although detailed explanation will be omitted, they are primarily composed of parallel-serial conversion circuits IDCTa and IDCUa, respectively. The ID output circuit IDCT of the upper right gaming board 5ART is the ID output circuit IDC described above, and the ID of the upper right gaming board 5ART, expressed as an 8-bit width with the A terminal as the most significant bit and the H terminal as the least significant bit, is 11110000B (the letter "B" represents a binary number), and expressed in hexadecimal as F0H (the letter "H" represents a hexadecimal number). In contrast, the ID of the lower right gaming board 5ARU, when expressed as an 8-bit width with the A terminal as the most significant bit and the H terminal as the least significant bit, is 11111000B (the letter "B" represents a binary number), and when expressed in hexadecimal, it is F8H (the letter "H" represents a hexadecimal number).

The parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right gaming board 5ART is identical to the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC described above, except that the SI terminal is not electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground), and detailed explanation will be omitted. When the upper right gaming board 5ART and the lower right gaming board 5ARU are combined, as described above, the CK terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right gaming board 5ARU is automatically electrically connected by the drawer connectors, consisting of the two upper right gaming board drawer connectors (convex type) (not shown) on the upper right gaming board 5ART and the two lower right gaming board drawer connectors (concave type) (not shown) on the lower right gaming board 5ARU. Therefore, via these drawer connectors, it is electrically connected to the CK terminal and S/inverted L terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right gaming board 5ART, and an ID acquisition clock signal from the peripheral control board 1510 is input.

The S/inverted L terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right gaming board 5ARU receives an SH/LD switching signal from the delay circuit in the lower right gaming board 5ARU. In other words, the S/inverted L terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right gaming board 5ART receives an SH/LD switching signal from the delay circuit in the upper right gaming board 5ART, while the S/inverted L terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right gaming board 5ARU receives an SH/LD switching signal from the delay circuit in the lower right gaming board 5ARU, and the S/inverted L terminals of the parallel-serial conversion circuits IDCTa and IDCUa each receive an SH/LD switching signal from a different delay circuit. As mentioned above, the delay circuit on the upper right gaming panel 5ART and the delay circuit on the lower right gaming panel 5ARU are circuits that set the logic of the SH/LD switching signal to parallel operation logic for a predetermined time after the pachinko machine is powered on, and can switch from parallel operation logic to shift operation logic once this predetermined time has elapsed.

In addition, instead of this, the SH/LD switching signal from the delay circuit in the upper right game board 5ART may be input to the S/inverted L terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU via a drawer connector consisting of two drawer connectors (convex type) for the upper right game board (not shown) in the upper right game board 5ART and two drawer connectors (concave type) for the lower right game board (not shown) in the lower right game board 5ARU. In addition, the SH/LD switching signal from the peripheral control board 1510 of the left game board 5AL is transmitted to the upper right game board 5ART via a drawer circuit consisting of the terminals of the left game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW mounted on the left game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left game board 5AL and the terminals of the right game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW mounted on the right game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right game board 5AR. The signal is input to the S/inverted L terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART, and may further be input to the S/inverted L terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU via drawer connectors consisting of two drawer connectors (convex type) for the upper right game board (not shown) in the upper right game board 5ART and two drawer connectors (concave type) for the lower right game board (not shown) in the lower right game board 5ARU.

The parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU has its SI terminal electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground), and its inverted QH terminal electrically connected to the SI terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART via drawer connectors consisting of two drawer connectors (convex type) for the upper right game board (not shown) in the upper right game board 5ART and two drawer connectors (concave type) for the lower right game board (not shown) in the lower right game board 5ARU. In other words, the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU and the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART are daisy-chain connected.

When the S/inverted L terminal is electrically connected to +5V, the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART and the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU shift sequentially at the rising edge of the ID acquisition clock signal input to the CK terminal (i.e., information input to the A terminal → information input to the B terminal → information input to the C terminal). (Information input to the D terminal → information input to the E terminal → information input to the F terminal → information input to the G terminal → information input to the H terminal → an ID code signal is output as serial data by shifting one bit at a time from the non-inverted QH terminal and inverted QH terminal), so it operates as a 16-bit shift register consisting of an 8-bit shift register made up of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART and an 8-bit shift register made up of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU.

By combining the left-side gaming board 5AL and the right-side gaming board 5AR (i.e., combining the left-side gaming board 5AL, the upper right gaming board 5ART, and the lower right gaming board 5ARU), as described above, the terminals of the left-side gaming board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW mounted on the left-side gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left-side gaming board 5AL are electrically connected to the terminals of the right-side gaming board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW mounted on the right-side gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the upper right gaming board 5ART, thereby forming control signal lines that transmit various control signals between the peripheral control board 1510 located behind the left-side rear box 3010L on the left-side gaming board 5AL and the various boards on the upper right gaming board 5ART and the various boards on the lower right gaming board 5ARU. As a result, when viewed from the peripheral control board 1510 located behind the left rear box 3010L on the left gaming board 5AL, the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa on the upper right gaming board 5ART becomes the front-stage 8-bit shift register, and the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa on the lower right gaming board 5ARU becomes the back-stage 8-bit shift register. In other words, the contents held by each flip-flop of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa on the upper right gaming board 5ART, which becomes the front-stage 8-bit shift register, are input to the peripheral control board 1510, followed by the contents held by each flip-flop of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa on the lower right gaming board 5ARU, which becomes the back-stage 8-bit shift register, one bit at a time, as serial data.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and an ID acquisition clock signal is input from the peripheral control board 1510 of the left gaming board 5AL via the terminals of the right gaming board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW mounted on the right gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right gaming board on the right gaming board 5ART, and the terminals of the left gaming board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW mounted on the left gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left gaming board 5AL, the ID output circuit IDCT provided on the upper right gaming board 5ART and the ID output circuit IDCU provided on the lower right gaming board 5ARU can transmit an ID code signal that can identify itself based on this input ID acquisition clock signal to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left gaming board 5AL. The peripheral control board 1510 of the left gaming board 5AL acquires an ID code signal by outputting an ID acquisition clock signal at a predetermined timing, and can determine the compatibility (matching) between the left gaming board 5AL and the right gaming board 5AR.

The ID output circuit IDCT provided on the upper right gaming board 5ART is capable of transmitting an ID code signal to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left gaming board 5AL via a drawer connector consisting of the terminals of the right gaming board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW mounted on the right gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right gaming board 5AR, and the terminals of the left gaming board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW mounted on the left gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left gaming board 5AL. However, instead of this, the ID code signal can be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left gaming board 5AL via a drawer connector consisting of the terminals of the right gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW and the left gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left gaming board 5AL. The ID output circuit IDCT on the upper right gaming board 5ART may be electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left gaming board 5AL via electrical wiring (harness) with connectors on both ends, so that an ID code signal can be transmitted from the ID output circuit IDCT on the upper right gaming board 5ART to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left gaming board 5AL. Alternatively, the board on which the ID output circuit IDCT on the upper right gaming board 5ART is mounted may be directly electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left gaming board 5AL via electrical wiring (harness) with connectors on both ends, so that an ID code signal can be transmitted from the ID output circuit IDCT on the upper right gaming board 5ART to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left gaming board 5AL.

The ID output circuit IDCU provided on the lower right gaming board 5ARU transmits an ID code signal to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left gaming board 5AL via a first drawer connector consisting of the terminals of the two lower right gaming board drawer connectors mounted on the lower right gaming board drawer connector relay board of the lower right gaming board 5ARU and the terminals of the two upper right gaming board drawer connectors mounted on the upper right gaming board drawer connector relay board of the upper right gaming board 5ART, and via a second drawer connector consisting of the terminals of the right side gaming board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW mounted on the right side gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right side gaming board 5AR and the terminals of the left side gaming board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW mounted on the left side gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left side gaming board 5AL. Alternatively, the ID code signal can be transmitted from the ID output circuit IDCU provided on the lower right gaming board 5ARU to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left gaming board 5AL via electrical wiring (harness) with connectors on both ends between the drawer connector relay board for the lower right gaming board and the left gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left gaming board 5AL, or the board mounting the ID output circuit IDCU provided on the lower right gaming board 5ARU and the peripheral control board 1510 of the left gaming board 5AL can be directly electrically connected via electrical wiring (harness) with connectors on both ends, allowing the ID code signal to be transmitted from the ID output circuit IDCU provided on the lower right gaming board 5ARU to the peripheral control board 1510 of the left gaming board 5AL.

The first drawer connector and the second drawer connector each consist of two drawer connectors, but the ID acquisition clock signal and SH/LD switching signal sent to the ID output circuit IDCT provided on the upper right game board 5ART and the ID output circuit IDCU provided on the lower right game board 5ARU, and the ID code signal from the ID output circuit IDCT provided on the upper right game board 5ART and the ID output circuit IDCU provided on the lower right game board 5ARU, may be transmitted via one of the two drawer connectors in the first drawer connector, or may be distributed and transmitted to both drawer connectors, or may be transmitted via one of the two drawer connectors in the second drawer connector, or may be distributed and transmitted to both drawer connectors.

When combining the upper right gaming board with the lower right gaming board, the upper right gaming board 5ART is supposed to be combined with the lower right gaming board 5ARU, but when it is combined with another lower right gaming board that is not compatible (matched) with the upper right gaming board 5ART, since the left gaming board 5AL and the upper right gaming board 5ART are compatible (matched), the various LEDs on the upper right gaming board 5ART will change their light emission pattern as the performance progresses, but the various LEDs on the other lower right gaming board that is not compatible (matched) with the upper right gaming board 5ART will be turned off (all turned off). Alternatively, when the upper right gaming board and the lower right gaming board are combined, and the upper right gaming board 5ART and the lower right gaming board 5ARU are to be combined, but instead another lower right gaming board that is not compatible (matched) with the upper right gaming board 5ART is combined, even if the left side gaming board 5AL and the upper right gaming board 5ART are compatible (matched), the various LEDs provided on the upper right gaming board 5ART and the various LEDs provided on the other lower right gaming board that is not compatible (matched) with the upper right gaming board 5ART may be turned off (all off).

[ID Determination Process]
In this embodiment, the presentation operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 may be replaceable to match the specifications of the divided game board. In this case, the presentation operation unit 300 may be treated as a component of the game board 5. In other words, the game frame component, which is made up of the outer frame 2, door frame 3, and main frame 4, is provided with a game board component, which is made up of the game board 5 equipped with a microprocessor and the presentation operation unit 300 not equipped with a microprocessor, in an easily detachable state (for example, a state in which it can be attached and detached without using a tool such as a screwdriver). The game board 5 and presentation operation unit 300 are provided with various LEDs, which are driven by various LED drivers.

In contrast, the door frame units (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame units") such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3 are provided in a state that makes them difficult to attach and detach (for example, fastened with screws or the like, making them difficult to attach and detach without a tool such as a screwdriver) and are not replaced (or may be made non-replaceable) to suit the specifications of the split game board. They are used in common with any split game board specifications, regardless of the split game board specifications. The split game board and door frame units are provided with various LEDs and are driven by various LED drivers. Here, we will explain, with reference to Figures 308 and 309, the combinations of the performance operation unit provided on the door frame 3 and the split game board that are compatible (matched) as pachinko machine A and the combinations that are compatible (matched) as pachinko machine B. Fig. 308 is a list showing a table of compatibility (matching)/incompatibility (mismatching) of combinations, and Fig. 309 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit power-on processing capable of ID determination. The peripheral control unit power-on processing in Fig. 309 performs almost the same processing as the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Fig. 265, and in Fig. 309, steps performing the same processing are indicated by the same names and step numbers. Note that detailed explanations of the same names and step numbers will be omitted. Additionally, in the following description, door frame units such as the left-side unit 420, right-side unit 430, tray unit 200, and top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3 are shown as not being replaceable (or may be non-replaceable) to match the specifications of the divided game board. However, instead of or in addition to the presentation operation unit 300, specific door frame units (one or more of the door frame units) from among the left-side unit 420, right-side unit 430, tray unit 200, and top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3 may be treated as components of the game board 5. In other words, the game board side components may be composed of the game board 5 equipped with a microprocessor and the presentation operation unit 300 and/or specific door frame units that do not equipped with a microprocessor.

Here, the above-mentioned ID output circuit is provided, which can identify itself as a presentation operation unit 300 that can be replaced to suit the specifications of the divided game board. The ID used for pachinko machine A is set to 00110000B in binary (the letter "B" represents a binary number) and 30H in hexadecimal (the letter "H" represents a hexadecimal number) (hereinafter, the presentation operation unit used for pachinko machine A will be referred to as "presentation operation unit 300A"). The ID used for pachinko machine B is set to 00110001B in binary (the letter "B" represents a binary number) and 31H in hexadecimal (the letter "H" represents a hexadecimal number) (hereinafter, the presentation operation unit used for pachinko machine B will be referred to as "presentation operation unit 300B").

The combination of split game boards in pachinko machine A is set to specification A (for example, a type with a setting key or a type that is not a so-called "Ama-degi" type), and the left-side game board 5AL and the right-side game board 5AR described above are compatible (matched); the combination of split game boards in pachinko machine B is set to specification B, which is different from specification A (for example, a type that does not have a setting key or a so-called "Ama-degi" type), and the new left-side game board 5BL and the right-side game board 5AR described above are compatible (matched).

In this case, as a combination of the presentation operation unit and divided game board provided on the door frame 3 in pachinko machine A, the left-side game board 5AL is compatible (matched) with the right-side game board 5AR and presentation operation unit 300A, as shown in Figure 308(a). Also, as a combination of the presentation operation unit and divided game board provided on the door frame 3 in pachinko machine B, the left-side game board 5BL is compatible (matched) with the right-side game board 5AR and presentation operation unit 300B, as shown in Figure 308(b). As mentioned above, the door frame units such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3 are not intended to be replaced to suit the specifications of the split game board, but are used in common with all split game board specifications, regardless of the split game board specifications. Therefore, as shown in Figures 308(a) and (b), in specification A, they are not subject to compatibility (matching) when combined with the left side game board 5AL and door frame unit, and in specification B, they are not subject to compatibility (matching) when combined with the left side game board 5BL and door frame unit.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the left-side gaming board 5AL acquires an ID from the ID code signals transmitted from each ID output circuit at a predetermined timing after power-on, and determines whether the combination of the effect operation unit and the divided gaming board provided on the door frame 3 is compatible (matched). Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the peripheral control unit power-on processing begins, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs an initial setup process in step S1000, followed by a current time information acquisition process in step S1002, as shown in FIG. 309. Next, the peripheral control IC 1510a performs an ID determination process in step S1003. In this ID determination process, to acquire the ID of the right-side gaming board and the ID of the effect operation unit, an ID acquisition clock signal (an ID acquisition clock signal dedicated to the right-side gaming board) is output to the right-side gaming board, and an ID acquisition clock signal (an ID acquisition clock signal dedicated to the effect operation unit) is output to the effect operation unit. The peripheral control IC 1510a acquires the ID code signal from the right-hand gaming board (ID code signal dedicated to the right-hand gaming board) and the ID code signal from the presentation operation unit (ID code signal dedicated to the presentation operation unit) via separate serial systems, and determines (compares) the combination of the split gaming boards (that is, the combination of the right-hand gaming board (a board not equipped with a microprocessor) and the left-hand gaming board (a peripheral control board 1510 or main control board 1310 equipped with a microprocessor)) by referring to a combination table (Fig. 308) pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM, and determines (compares) the combination of the presentation operation unit and the split gaming board by referring to a combination table (Fig. 308) pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM.

In addition, this ID determination process may perform the determination (comparison) of the above-mentioned combination of divided game boards (i.e., the combination of the right-side game board (a board not equipped with a microprocessor) and the left-side game board (a peripheral control board 1510 or main control board 1310 equipped with a microprocessor)) and the determination (comparison) of the combination of the performance operation unit and the divided game board multiple times (for example, five times). In this case, if a match (integrity) is obtained as the determination result three times in a row, the process will proceed to the next step as a match (integrity), whereas if a match (integrity) is not obtained three times in a row as a determination result, the process will proceed to the next step as an incompatibility (inconsistency).

When the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 that the combination of divided game boards is incompatible (mismatched), that is, when the determination result of the combination of the right game board (a board not equipped with a microprocessor) and the left game board (peripheral control board 1510 or main control board 1310 equipped with a microprocessor) is incompatible (mismatched), it passes a command classified as a notification display to the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit's regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing. In the warning process of step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads (extracts) schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, and electrical drive source schedule data from the peripheral control ROM and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC as modes indicating incompatibility (mismatch), thereby setting various processing related to the presentation.

Furthermore, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 that the combination of the effect operation unit and the divided game board is incompatible (inconsistent), it passes a command classified as a notification display to the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit's regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing. In the warning process of step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads (extracts) schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, and electrical drive source schedule data from the peripheral control ROM and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC as modes indicating incompatibility (inconsistency), thereby setting various processes related to the effect.

Because the peripheral control board 1510 needs to receive various commands from the main control board 1310, when the pachinko machine is powered on, its system is designed to complete startup before the main control board 1310 system starts up. Therefore, if the combination of the presentation operation unit and the divided game board is incompatible (inconsistent), the mode in which the combination of the presentation operation unit and the divided game board is incompatible (inconsistent) will take precedence until a command is received informing the user that the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is incompatible (inconsistent). If the peripheral control board 1510 subsequently receives a command indicating that the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is incompatible (inconsistent), the mode in which the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is incompatible (inconsistent) will take precedence over the mode in which the combination of the presentation operation unit and the divided game board is incompatible (inconsistent). The combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is such that the main control board 1310 is placed on the divided game board, while the payout control board 633 is placed on the main frame 4, and the divided game board is attached to the main frame 4; in other words, it is a combination of a divided game board and a main frame.

In the past, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performed the ID determination process only once when the power was turned on (including when power was restored after a power outage or when power was restored after a momentary power outage (instantaneous blackout)) before the peripheral control unit normal processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing began. However, to enable the ID determination process to be performed at any time, it may be configured to be performed as part of the peripheral control unit normal processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing (for example, following the 1 ms interrupt timer start processing of step S1010, the ID determination process is performed as the processing of step S1012, followed by the presentation operation unit monitoring processing of step S1014). This allows the peripheral control IC 1510a to check the combination of the presentation operation unit and the divided game board multiple times at any time.

Furthermore, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 outputs an SH/LD switching signal to the right-side game board and the presentation operation unit (this may be configured as an SH/LD switching signal dedicated to the right-side game board and an SH/LD switching signal dedicated to the presentation operation unit, or one SH/LD switching signal may be branched into two signals and input to the right-side game board and the presentation operation unit, respectively). In this case, in the ID determination process, the logic of the SH/LD switching signal is first set to parallel operation logic for a predetermined time (a time sufficient for the parallel-serial conversion circuit of the ID output circuit on the right-side game board and the parallel-serial conversion circuit of the ID output circuit on the presentation operation unit to take in and store (hold) the information set to the eight ID setting terminals through parallel operation, for example, 2 milliseconds), and then, during this predetermined time, After this time has elapsed, it switches from parallel operation logic to shift operation logic, and then outputs an ID acquisition clock signal to the right-hand game board (ID acquisition clock signal dedicated to the right-hand game board) and an ID acquisition clock signal to the performance operation unit (ID acquisition clock signal dedicated to the performance operation unit). It then acquires the ID code signal from the right-hand game board (ID code signal dedicated to the right-hand game board) and the ID code signal from the performance operation unit (ID code signal dedicated to the performance operation unit) via separate serial systems, and determines the combination of the split game boards (that is, the combination of the right-hand game board (a board without a microprocessor) and the left-hand game board (peripheral control board 1510 or main control board 1310 equipped with a microprocessor)), as well as the combination of the performance operation unit and the split game board.

Next, returning to Figure 308, we will explain the state, behavior, and countermeasures of the pachinko machine depending on the compatibility (matching)/incompatibility (mismatch) of the combination of the presentation operation unit and the divided game board, and the combination of the divided game board and the main frame. As mentioned above, the door frame units such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3 are not replaced to suit the specifications of the divided game board, and are used in common with all divided game board specifications regardless of the specifications of the divided game board. Therefore, they have no effect on the compatibility (matching)/incompatibility (mismatch) of the combination of the presentation operation unit and the divided game board, and the combination of the divided game board and the main frame.

Here, we will explain the details of Pachinko Machine A, and as the details of Pachinko Machine B are the same as those of Pachinko Machine A, we will omit them with some exceptions (Figure 308 (c) also shows the code for Pachinko Machine A followed by the code for Pachinko Machine B in parentheses).

The combination of the split game boards in pachinko machine A and the combination of the split game boards and the presentation operation unit in pachinko machine A are determined in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 309, while the combination of the split game board 5A and the main frame is determined in the command analysis process of step S560 in the payout control unit main processing of the payout control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 263. In other words, the combination of the split game boards in pachinko machine A and the combination of the split game boards and the presentation operation unit in pachinko machine A are determined by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 placed on the split game board, while the combination of the split game board 5A and the main frame is determined by the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 provided on the main frame 4 to which the split game board is attached. The determination result made by the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 is transmitted as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. For this reason, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 holds information on the combination of divided game boards in pachinko machine A, information on whether the combination of divided game boards and performance operation units in pachinko machine A is compatible (matched), and information on whether the combination of divided game board 5A and the main body frame is compatible (matched).

The combination of the split game board and presentation operation unit in pachinko machine A is set as specification A (for example, a type with a setting key or one that is not the so-called sweet type), and the split game board combination that is compatible (matched) is a split game board 5A consisting of a left game board 5AL and a right game board 5AR, and the combination of the split game board and presentation operation unit in pachinko machine A that is compatible (matched) is one consisting of a split game board 5A and a presentation operation unit 300A. Furthermore, the combination of split game boards in pachinko machine B, and the combination of split game boards and presentation operation units in pachinko machine B, are set to B specifications (for example, those without setting keys or so-called mild types), and the split game board combination that is compatible (matches) is split game board 5B consisting of left game board 5BL and right game board 5AR, and the combination of split game boards and presentation operation units in pachinko machine B that is compatible (matches) is one consisting of split game board 5B and presentation operation unit 300B.

As shown in Figure 308(c), there are 10 possible states of the pachinko machine, from state 1 to state 10, depending on whether the combination of the performance operation unit 300A and the divided game board 5A, and the combination of the divided game board 5A and the main frame, are compatible (matched) or incompatible (mismatched).

State 1: Normal Combination of divided game boards: Composed of a left game board 5AL and a right game board 5AR, and in a compatible (matched) state.
Combination of split game board and presentation operation unit: A state in which the split game board 5A and the presentation operation unit 300A are configured and matched (aligned).
Combination of split game board and main frame: A state in which the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is compatible (aligned).
Behavior of the pachinko machine during an error: Normal operation (no error response).
Solution: None as it is working normally.

Status 2: ID error 1 (mismatch of right game board)
Combination of split game boards: A state in which the game board is not composed of a left game board 5AL and a right game board 5AR and is incompatible (mismatched).
Combination of split game board and presentation operation unit: A state in which the split game board 5A and the presentation operation unit 300A are configured and matched (aligned).
Combination of split game board and main frame: A state in which the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is compatible (aligned).
Behavior of pachinko machine during an error: Error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Solution: After powering off, replace with a compatible ID product (matched ID product).

Status 3: ID error 2 (incompatibility (mismatch) of the production operation unit)
Combination of split game boards: A state in which the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are configured and matched (aligned).
Combination of a divided game board and a presentation operation unit: A state in which the divided game board 5A and the presentation operation unit 300A are not configured and are incompatible (mismatched).
Combination of split game board and main frame: A state in which the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is compatible (aligned).
Behavior of pachinko machines during errors: Error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Solution: Replace with a compatible ID part (matched ID part) (replacement is possible even with the power on).

Status 4: ID error 3 (mismatch between main control board and dispensing control board)
Combination of split game boards: A state in which the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are configured and matched (aligned).
Combination of split game board and presentation operation unit: A state in which the split game board 5A and the presentation operation unit 300A are configured and matched (aligned).
Combination of split game board and main frame: A state in which the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is incompatible (mismatched).
Behavior of pachinko machine during error: Error response 3 (ID error 3 response).
Solution: After powering off, replace with a compatible ID product (matched ID product).

Status 5: ID error 4 (mismatch (mismatch) of the right game board + mismatch (mismatch) of the performance operation unit)
Combination of split game boards: A state in which the game board is not composed of a left game board 5AL and a right game board 5AR and is incompatible (mismatched).
Combination of a divided game board and a presentation operation unit: A state in which the divided game board 5A and the presentation operation unit 300A are not configured and are incompatible (mismatched).
Combination of split game board and main frame: A state in which the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is compatible (aligned).
Behavior of pachinko machines during errors: Error handling 4.
Solution: After powering off, replace with a compatible ID product (matched ID product).

Status 6: ID error 1, 3 (mismatch (mismatch) of the right game board + mismatch (mismatch) between the main control board and the payout control board)
Combination of split game boards: A state in which the game board is not composed of a left game board 5AL and a right game board 5AR and is incompatible (mismatched).
Combination of split game board and presentation operation unit: A state in which the split game board 5A and the presentation operation unit 300A are configured and matched (aligned).
Combination of split game board and main frame: A state in which the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is incompatible (mismatched).
Behavior of pachinko machines during errors: Error handling 5.
Solution: After powering off, replace with a compatible ID product (matched ID product).

Status 7: ID error 2, 3 (mismatch (mismatch) between the performance operation unit + mismatch (mismatch) between the main control board and the payout control board)
Combination of split game boards: A state in which the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are configured and matched (aligned).
Combination of a divided game board and a presentation operation unit: A state in which the divided game board 5A and the presentation operation unit 300A are not configured and are incompatible (mismatched).
Combination of split game board and main frame: A state in which the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is incompatible (mismatched).
Behavior of pachinko machines during errors: Error handling 6.
Solution: After powering off, replace with a compatible ID product (matched ID product).

Status 8: Unconnected error 1 (connection to the right game board cannot be confirmed)
Combination of split game boards: There is no input of an ID code signal from the right game board 5AR (the input of an ID code signal from the right game board 5AR cannot be confirmed), and a malfunction such as a short circuit or broken wire has occurred in the transmission path that transmits various signals, making it impossible to confirm the connection.
Combination of split game board and presentation operation unit: A state in which the split game board 5A and the presentation operation unit 300A are configured and matched (aligned).
Combination of split game board and main frame: A state in which the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is compatible (aligned).
Behavior of pachinko machines during errors: Error handling 7.
Solution: Check the connection after powering off.

Status 9: Unconnected error 2 (Cannot confirm connection with the production operation unit)
Combination of split game boards: A state in which the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR are configured and matched (aligned).
Combination of a split game board and a presentation operation unit: A state in which there is no input of an ID code signal from the presentation operation unit 300A (the input of an ID code signal from the presentation operation unit 300A cannot be confirmed), and a malfunction such as a short circuit or break has occurred in the transmission path that transmits various signals, making it impossible to confirm the connection.
Combination of split game board and main frame: A state in which the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is compatible (aligned).
Behavior of pachinko machines during errors: Error handling 8.
Solution: Check the connection after powering off.

Status 10: Unconnected error 3 (Cannot confirm connection with the right game board + Cannot confirm connection with the performance operation unit)
Combination of split game boards: There is no input of an ID code signal from the right game board 5AR (the input of an ID code signal from the right game board 5AR cannot be confirmed), and a malfunction such as a short circuit or broken wire has occurred in the transmission path that transmits various signals, making it impossible to confirm the connection.
Combination of a split game board and a presentation operation unit: A state in which there is no input of an ID code signal from the presentation operation unit 300A (the input of an ID code signal from the presentation operation unit 300A cannot be confirmed), and a malfunction such as a short circuit or break has occurred in the transmission path that transmits various signals, making it impossible to confirm the connection.
Combination of split game board and main frame: A state in which the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is compatible (aligned).
Behavior of pachinko machines during errors: Error handling 9.
Solution: Check the connection after powering off.

Next, Error Response 1 to Error Response 9, which are the behavior of the pachinko machine during the error shown in Figure 308 (c), will be explained with reference to Figures 310 to 312 as Specific Example 1, and with reference to Figures 313 to 315 as Specific Example 2, for cases where there is no magnetic detection (so-called magnetic goto) when the power is turned on (including recovery from a power outage and recovery from a momentary power outage; the same applies below), when the presentation is progressing after the power is turned on (for example, when the presentation is progressing based on the game ball entering one of the various winning slots) or when waiting for customers (for example, when a demonstration is being held or a still image is displayed), and cases where there is magnetic detection (magnetic goto) when the presentation is progressing after the power is turned on (for example, when the presentation is progressing based on the game ball entering one of the various winning slots) or when waiting for customers (for example, when a demonstration is being held or a still image is displayed). Fig. 310 is a table showing various error responses when the power is turned on (specific example 1), Fig. 311 is a table showing various error responses (specific example 1) that do not involve magnetic detection while the performance is progressing after the power is turned on or while waiting for customers, Fig. 312 is a table showing various error responses (specific example 1) that involve magnetic detection while the performance is progressing after the power is turned on or while waiting for customers. Also, Fig. 313 is a table showing various error responses (specific example 2) when the power is turned on, Fig. 314 is a table showing various error responses (specific example 2) that do not involve magnetic detection while the performance is progressing after the power is turned on or while waiting for customers, and Fig. 315 is a table showing various error responses (specific example 2) that involve magnetic detection while the performance is progressing after the power is turned on or while waiting for customers. Various ID errors (including individual ID errors such as ID error 1, ID error 2, and ID error 3 shown in Figure 308(c), as well as combinations of these ID errors) hinder gameplay to a greater extent than various unconnection errors (unconnection error 1, unconnection error 2, and unconnection error 3 shown in Figure 308(c)). Furthermore, while magnetic detection is resolved after a certain amount of time has passed, ID errors and unconnection errors are not resolved even after a certain amount of time has passed.

In addition, among the items listed in the upper rows of the tables in Figures 310 to 315, "Error response number" corresponds to Error Response 1 to Error Response 9, which are the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error as shown in Figure 308 (c); "Audio" indicates the type of audio played from the various speakers provided in the pachinko machine; "Various LEDs on the door frame unit (various LEDs related to performance (various decorative LEDs))" indicates the light emission mode of the various LEDs (various LEDs related to performance (various decorative LEDs)) provided on the door frame units such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3; and "Various LEDs on the game board (various LEDs related to performance (various decorative LEDs))" indicates the various LEDs (various LEDs related to performance (various decorative LEDs)) provided on the game board (divided game board). indicates the light emission mode of the "performance display device", "performance display device" indicates the display mode of the performance display device 1600 provided on the game board (split game board), "sub-performance display device" is provided on the game board (split game board) or door frame unit separately from the performance display device 1600 provided on the game board (split game board), and indicates the display mode of the sub-performance display device, "function display unit" indicates the display mode of the function display unit 1400 provided on the game board (split game board), "sub-function display unit" indicates the display mode of the sub-function display unit 2250 provided on the game board (split game board), "game board side movable body (movable body related to performance)" indicates the operation of various movable bodies (movable body related to performance) provided on the game board (split game board), and "door frame side" indicates the operation of various movable bodies provided on the door frame unit.

Of the above items, "audio," "various LEDs on the door frame unit (various LEDs related to effects (various decorative LEDs))," "various LEDs on the game board (various LEDs related to effects (various decorative LEDs))," "effect display device," "sub-effect display device," "sub-function display unit," "game board side movable body (movable body related to effects)," and "game frame side movable body" are controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board (split game board), while the "function display unit" is controlled by the main control board 1310 provided on the game board (split game board). Note that if a sub-effect display device is not provided in a pachinko machine, the content displayed on the sub-effect display device is displayed on the effect display device 1600 provided on the game board (split game board).

Furthermore, as described above, the door frame unit is equipped with a presentation operation unit 300 in the tray unit 200. Some presentation operation units 300 do not have the ID output circuit described above; in other words, some presentation operation units 300 are not equipped with any ID for self-identification and are used commonly by all presentation operation units 300 specifications. In such cases, when the presentation operation unit 300 is equipped with a movable body such as the presentation operation section 301, the movable body equipped in the presentation operation unit 300 is treated as included in the "game frame side movable body," and the various LEDs (e.g., multiple LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) mounted on the various decorative boards (e.g., presentation operation section outer peripheral decorative board 320, button outer decorative board 355, button inner decorative board 364, etc.) equipped in the presentation operation unit 300 are treated as included in the "various LEDs of the door frame unit."

"Gaming board side movable body" refers to the various movable bodies provided on the left gaming board in Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 compatible) and Error Response 7, and to the various movable bodies provided on the left gaming board and/or the various movable bodies provided on the right gaming board in Error Response 2 (ID Error 2 compatible) and Error Response 8.

When Error Response 1 to Error Response 9 occurs, which is the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error as shown in Figure 308 (c), in order to deal with these various errors, it is necessary to release the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2 and release the door frame 3 from the main body frame 4. At this time, although the pachinko machine 1 is in a state where the door is open, it does not notify the user that the door is open in order to prioritize the notification of Error Response 1 to Error Response 9.

Furthermore, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the checksum values in step S30 of the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 255 do not match after power is applied to the pachinko machine 1, it determines that there is a RAM error in the main control's built-in RAM and displays an error in step S33 of the same processing, and then restarts the machine. Even after restarting, the contents of the main control's built-in RAM are not updated at all, and the machine again proceeds to the error display processing in step S33 based on the determination in step S30, and the restart is repeated, resulting in a state where play is stopped.

When such a RAM error occurs, even if error response 1 to error response 9 occurs, which is the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error as shown in Figure 308(c), only a notification (error display) is made to inform the user that a RAM error has occurred, whereas the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error as shown in Figure 308(c) is such that no notification is made to inform the user that error response 1 to error response 9 has occurred.

In order to prevent repeated restarts, it is necessary to insert the setting key into the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 and turn it ON, then operate the power switch 630a on the power supply board 630 while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RWM switch 633d on the payout control board 633 to power on the pachinko machine 1. This operation causes the main control MPU 1310a on the main control board 1310 to perform the setting change process in step S37 of the main control side power-on process, clear the entire RAM area in step S38, and then proceed with the game using the main control side timer interrupt process shown in Figure 257. Because the setting key is an important key, only a limited number of people, including the arcade manager, are permitted to possess it, and it is limited to two to three people.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 displays, for example, "Power being restored" against a black background on the performance display device 1600 as a startup mode. At this time, "Power being restored" may be followed by "Setting up", or "Setting up" may be displayed instead of "Power being restored". In this case, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the setting change process of step S37 in the main control side power-on processing, it must send a setting change start command to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data, indicating that the setting change is about to begin.

After the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has completed the setting change process of step S37 in the main control side power-on processing, that is, when it receives a setting change command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 will use this as an opportunity to issue a notification to inform the user that error response 1 to error response 9 has occurred as the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error as shown in Figure 308 (c). In other words, even if Error Response 1 to Error Response 9 occurs as part of the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error as shown in Figure 308 (c), if the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 and turned ON, causing the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to perform the setting change process of step S37 in the main control side power-on process (until the specified period until this setting change process is completed has elapsed, in other words, until the setting change command from the main control board 1310 is received (analyzed)), the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 can change the error notification start time by operating the setting key held by a limited number of people in the amusement hall, even if an ID error or unconnection error in Error Response 1 to Error Response 9 has occurred.

[Specific example 1: When power is turned on]
First, referring to Figure 310, we will explain error responses 1 to 9, which are the behavior of the pachinko machine during the error shown in Figure 308(c) when the power is turned on.
[Error handling 1 (ID error 1 handling)]
Audio: After the start-up music ends, an announcement saying "Please call an attendant" is played, followed by a predetermined error notification sound seven times. This audio pattern is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Turn off (all lights off).
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all lights off).
Performance display device: Displays notification text such as "Power being restored" and "Please wait" on a black background, and when the startup music ends, displays the performance image.
Sub-performance display device: At the same time as the start-up music starts, a notification message saying "Game board ID error" is displayed on a specified background image.
Function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: Turn off (all lights off).
Movable body on the game board: No operation such as returning to original position (not in operation).
Movable body on game frame side: No operation such as returning to original position (not operating).

[Error handling 2 (ID error 2 handling)]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Performance display device: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-performance display device: At the same time as the start-up music starts, a notification message saying "Performance operation button ID error" is displayed on a specified background image.
Function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on the game board side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 3 (ID error 3 handling)]
Audio: After the start-up music ends, an announcement saying "Please call an attendant" is played, followed by a predetermined error notification sound twice. This audio pattern is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Performance display device: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-performance display device: At the same time as the start-up music starts, a specified background image is displayed with the warning message "Main Payout ID Error" indicating that there is an inconsistency in the combination of the main control board provided on the game board (split game board) and the payout control board provided on the main frame 4 to which the game board (split game board) is attached.
Function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Movable body on the game board: Has operations such as returning to the original position (operation).
Movable body on the game frame: Has operations such as returning to the original position (operation).

[Error handling 4]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Performance display device: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-performance display device: At the same time as the start-up music starts, the notification text "Game board ID error" and "Performance operation button ID error" are displayed on a specified background image (this is a combination of the contents of Error Response 1 (ID error 1 compatible) and Error Response 2 (ID error 2 compatible) (Error Response 1 (ID error 1 compatible) + Error Response 2 (ID error 2 compatible))).
Function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on the game board side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 5]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Performance display device: Same as error handling 3 (ID error 3 handling).
Sub-performance display device: At the same time as the startup music starts, the notification text "Main payout ID error" and "Game board ID error" are displayed on a specified background image (this is a combination of the contents of error response 3 (ID error 3 response) and error response 1 (ID error 1 response) (error response 3 (ID error 3 response) + error response 1 (ID error 1 response))).
Function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on the game board side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 6]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Performance display device: Same as error handling 3 (ID error 3 handling).
Sub-performance display device: At the same time as the startup music starts, the notification text "Main payment ID error" and "Performance operation button ID error" are displayed on a specified background image (this is a combination of the contents of error response 3 (ID error 3 response) and error response 2 (ID error 2 response) (error response 3 (ID error 3 response) + error response 2 (ID error 2 response))).
Function display unit: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Movable body on the game board: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).

[Error handling 7]
Sound: After the start-up music ends, an announcement saying "Game board not connected" is played, followed by a predetermined error notification sound four times. This sound pattern is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flashing red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Flashes red.
Performance display device: Displays the notification text "Power is being restored" and "Please wait a moment" on a black background, and also displays notification text "The game board cable has been detected as not being inserted" and "Please turn off the power before inserting the cable", and when the startup music ends, displays the image from the performance.
Sub-performance display device: At the same time as the start-up music starts, a notification message saying "Game board not connected" is displayed on a specified background image.
Function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: Turn off (all lights off).
Movable body on the game board: No operation such as returning to original position (not in operation).
Movable body on game frame side: No operation such as returning to original position (not operating).

[Error handling 8]
Audio: After the start-up music ends, an announcement will be made saying "The production operation unit is not connected" and a predetermined error notification sound will be played four times. This audio pattern will be played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flashing red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Flashes red.
Performance display device: Displays the notification text "Power restoration in progress" and "Please wait a moment" on a black background, and also displays notification text "The performance operation unit cable has been detected as not being inserted" and "Please turn off the power before inserting the cable", and when the startup music ends, displays the image from the performance.
Sub-performance display device: At the same time as the start-up music starts, a notification message saying "Performance operation unit not connected" is displayed on a specified background image.
Function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Movable body on the game board: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).

[Error handling 9]
Audio: After the start-up music ends, the first announcement sound "The game board is not connected" is played, followed by a predetermined error notification sound four times, followed by a second announcement sound "The performance operation unit is not connected" and then a predetermined error notification sound four times. These audio modes are played repeatedly (combining the contents of Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flash red (same as error response 7 and error response 8 (error response 7 + error response 8)).
Various LEDs on the game board: Flash red (same as error response 7 and error response 8 (error response 7 + error response 8)).
Performance display device: Displays the notification text "Power being restored" and "Please wait a moment" on a black background, and also displays the notification text "It has been detected that the game board cable is not inserted", "It has been detected that the performance operation unit cable is not inserted", and "Please turn off the power before inserting the cable", and when the startup music ends, displays the image from the performance (combining the contents of error response 7 and error response 8 (error response 7 + error response 8)).
Sub-performance display device: At the same time as the start-up music starts, a specified background image is displayed with the notification text "Game board not connected" and "Performance operation unit not connected" (this is a combination of the contents of error response 7 and error response 8 (error response 7 + error response 8)).
Function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Movable body on the game board: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).

[Example 1: When magnetic detection (so-called magnet goto) is not performed during the performance after power-on or while waiting for customers]
Next, referring to Figure 311, we will explain error responses 1 to 9 as the behavior of a pachinko machine during an error shown in Figure 308(c) when there is no magnetic detection (so-called magnetic goto) while the performance is progressing after the power is turned on (for example, when the performance is progressing based on the game ball entering various winning slots) or while waiting for customers (for example, when a demonstration is being performed or a still image is displayed).

[Error handling 1 (ID error 1 handling)]
Voice: An announcement saying "Please call an attendant" is played, followed by a predetermined error notification sound seven times. This type of voice is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Turn off (all lights off).
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all lights off).
Performance display device: Displays the message "Please wait a moment" on the image during the performance (such as an image displayed as the performance progresses, the same applies below) or on the image while customers are waiting (such as an image displayed as the demonstration progresses, the same applies below).
Sub-performance display device: Displays the message "Game board ID error" on the image during the performance or on the image while waiting for customers.
Function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: Turn off (all lights off).
Movable body on the game board: No operation such as returning to the original position (not operating). Note that if the movable body is operating in accordance with the progress of the performance and the progress of the demonstration while waiting for customers, it may stop at the time this error occurs or may return to the original position.
Movable body on the game frame: No operation such as returning to the original position (not operating). Note that if the movable body is operating in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while waiting for customers in addition to the progress of the performance, it may stop at the time this error occurs or may return to the original position.

[Error handling 2 (ID error 2 handling)]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Performance display device: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-performance display device: Displays the warning text "Performance operation button ID error" on the image during performance or on the image while waiting for customers.
Function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on the game board side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 3 (ID error 3 handling)]
Audio: An announcement saying "Please call an attendant" is played, followed by a predetermined error notification sound twice. This audio pattern is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Performance display device: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-performance display device: In the image during performance or the image while waiting for customers, a warning message "Main payout ID error" is displayed, indicating that there is an inconsistency in the combination of the main control board provided on the game board (split game board) and the payout control board provided on the main frame 4 to which the game board (split game board) is attached.
Function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: A specified LED lights up (when waiting for customers: off (all lights off)).
Movable body on the game board: In addition to progressing the performance, it also moves in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while customers are waiting, and moves to return to its original position (operation).
Movable body on the game frame: In addition to progressing the performance, it also operates in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while customers are waiting, and operates to return to its original position (operation).

[Error handling 4]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Performance display device: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-performance display device: Displays the warning text "Game board ID error" and "Performance operation button ID error" on the image during performance or the image while waiting for customers (combining the contents of Error Response 1 (ID error 1 compatible) and Error Response 2 (ID error 2 compatible) (Error Response 1 (ID error 1 compatible) + Error Response 2 (ID error 2 compatible))).
Function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on the game board side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 5]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Performance display device: Same as error handling 3 (ID error 3 handling).
Sub-performance display device: Displays the warning text "Main payout ID error" and "Game board ID error" on the image during the performance or the image while waiting for customers (combining the contents of error response 3 (ID error 3 response) and error response 1 (ID error 1 response) (error response 3 (ID error 3 response) + error response 1 (ID error 1 response))).
Function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on the game board side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 6]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Performance display device: Same as error handling 3 (ID error 3 handling).
Sub-performance display device: Displays the warning text "Main payment ID error" and "Performance operation button ID error" on the image during the performance or the image while customers are waiting (this is a combination of the contents of error response 3 (ID error 3 response) and error response 2 (ID error 2 response) (error response 3 (ID error 3 response) + error response 2 (ID error 2 response))).
Function display unit: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Movable body on the game board: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).

[Error handling 7]
Sound: An announcement saying "Game board not connected" is played, followed by a predetermined error notification sound four times. This sound pattern is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flashing red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Flashes red.
Performance display device: Displays notification text such as "The game board cable has been detected as not being inserted" and "Please turn off the power before inserting the cable" on the image during the performance or the image while waiting for customers.
Sub-performance display device: Displays the notification text "Game board not connected" on the image during the performance or the image while waiting for customers.
Function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Movable body on the game board: No operation such as returning to the original position (not operating). Note that if the movable body is operating in accordance with the progress of the performance and the progress of the demonstration while waiting for customers, it may stop at the time this error occurs or may return to the original position.
Movable body on the game frame: No operation such as returning to the original position (not operating). Note that if the movable body is operating in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while waiting for customers in addition to the progress of the performance, it may stop at the time this error occurs or may return to the original position.

[Error handling 8]
Audio: An announcement sound saying "The performance operation unit is not connected" is played, followed by a predetermined error notification sound four times. This type of audio is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flashing red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Flashes red.
Performance display device: Displays warning messages such as "The performance operation unit cable has been detected as not being inserted" and "Please turn off the power before inserting the cable" on the image during the performance or the image while waiting for customers.
Sub-performance display device: Displays the notification text "Performance operation unit not connected" on the image during performance or on the image while waiting for customers.
Function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Movable body on the game board: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).

[Error handling 9]
Audio: The first announcement sound "The game board is not connected" is played, followed by a predetermined error notification sound four times, followed by a second announcement sound "The performance operation unit is not connected" and then a predetermined error notification sound four times. This audio pattern is repeatedly played (combining the contents of Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: (same as Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Various LEDs on the game board: (same as Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Performance display device: Displays warning messages such as "The game board cable has been detected as not being inserted,""The performance operation unit cable has been detected as not being inserted," and "Please turn off the power before inserting the cable" on the image during the performance or the image while waiting for customers (combining the contents of error response 7 and error response 8 (error response 7 + error response 8)).
Sub-performance display device: Displays the notification text "Game board not connected" or "Performance operation unit not connected" on the image during performance or the image while waiting for customers (combining the contents of error response 7 and error response 8 (error response 7 + error response 8)).
Function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Movable body on the game board: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).

[Example 1: When magnetic detection (magnetic goto) occurs during a performance or while waiting for customers after powering on]

Next, Error Responses 1 to 9 will be described with reference to Figure 312 as the behavior of a pachinko machine during an error shown in Figure 308(c) when magnetic detection (magnetic gobbling) is involved during the progression of a presentation after power-on (for example, when a presentation is progressing based on a game ball entering one of the various winning slots) or while waiting for customers (for example, when a demonstration is being held or a still image is displayed). Note that when magnetic detection (magnetic gobbling) ceases, the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error (Error Responses 1 to 9) will be as shown in Figure 311 when magnetic detection (magnetic gobbling) is not involved during the progression of a presentation after power-on (for example, when a presentation is progressing based on a game ball entering one of the various winning slots) or while waiting for customers (for example, when a demonstration is being held or a still image is displayed).

[Error handling 1 (ID error 1 handling)]
Voice: An announcement saying "Please call an attendant" is played, followed by a predetermined error notification sound three times. This type of voice is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Turn off (all lights off).
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all lights off).
Performance display device: Displays images during the performance (images displayed as the performance progresses, etc., the same applies below) or images while customers are waiting (images displayed as the demonstration progresses, etc., the same applies below).
Sub-performance display device: Displays notification text such as "Magnet detected" and "Game board ID error" on the image during the performance or the image while waiting for customers.
Function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: Turn off (all lights off).
Movable body on the game board: No operation such as returning to the original position (not operating). Note that if the movable body is operating in accordance with the progress of the performance and the progress of the demonstration while waiting for customers, it may stop at the time this error occurs or may return to the original position.
Movable body on the game frame: No operation such as returning to the original position (not operating). Note that if the movable body is operating in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while waiting for customers in addition to the progress of the performance, it may stop at the time this error occurs or may return to the original position.

[Error handling 2 (ID error 2 handling)]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Performance display device: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-performance display device: Displays the warning text "Magnet detected" or "Performance operation button ID error" on the image during the performance or the image while waiting for customers.
Function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on the game board side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 3 (ID error 3 handling)]
Audio: An announcement saying "Please call an attendant" is played, followed by a predetermined error notification sound twice. This audio pattern is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Performance display device: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-performance display device: In the image during the performance or the image while waiting for customers, the device displays the warning text "Main payout ID error" and "Magnet detected" to indicate that there is an inconsistency in the combination of the main control board provided on the game board (split game board) and the payout control board provided on the main frame 4 to which the game board (split game board) is attached.
Function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: A specified LED lights up (when waiting for customers: off (all lights off)).
Movable body on the game board: In addition to progressing the performance, it also moves in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while customers are waiting, and moves to return to its original position (operation).
Movable body on the game frame: In addition to progressing the performance, it also operates in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while customers are waiting, and operates to return to its original position (operation).

[Error handling 4]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Performance display device: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-performance display device: Displays the warning text "Magnet detected,""Game board ID error," and "Performance operation button ID error" on the image during the performance or the image while waiting for customers (combining the contents of Error Response 1 (ID error 1 compatible) and Error Response 2 (ID error 2 compatible) (Error Response 1 (ID error 1 compatible) + Error Response 2 (ID error 2 compatible))).
Function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on the game board side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 5]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Performance display device: Same as error handling 3 (ID error 3 handling).
Sub-performance display device: Displays the warning text "Main payout ID error,""Game board ID error," and "Magnet detected" on the image during the performance or the image while waiting for customers (combining the contents of Error Response 3 (ID error 3 response) and Error Response 1 (ID error 1 response) (Error Response 3 (ID error 3 response) + Error Response 1 (ID error 1 response))).
Function display unit: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on the game board side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 6]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Performance display device: Same as error handling 3 (ID error 3 handling).
Sub-performance display device: Displays the warning text "Main pay ID error,""Performance operation button ID error," and "Magnet detected" on the image during the performance or the image while customers are waiting (combining the contents of Error Response 3 (ID error 3 compatible) and Error Response 2 (ID error 2 compatible) (Error Response 3 (ID error 3 compatible) + Error Response 2 (ID error 2 compatible))).
Function display unit: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Movable body on the game board: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).

[Error handling 7]
Sound: An announcement saying "Game board not connected" is played, followed by a predetermined error notification sound four times. This sound pattern is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flashing red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Flashes red.
Performance display device: Displays notification text such as "The game board cable has been detected as not being inserted" and "Please turn off the power before inserting the cable" on the image during the performance or the image while waiting for customers.
Sub-performance display device: Displays notification text such as "Magnet detected" and "Game board not connected" on the image during the performance or the image while waiting for customers.
Function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Movable body on the game board: No operation such as returning to the original position (not operating). Note that if the movable body is operating in accordance with the progress of the performance and the progress of the demonstration while waiting for customers, it may stop at the time this error occurs or may return to the original position.
Movable body on the game frame: No operation such as returning to the original position (not operating). Note that if the movable body is operating in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while waiting for customers in addition to the progress of the performance, it may stop at the time this error occurs or may return to the original position.

[Error handling 8]
Audio: An announcement sound saying "The performance operation unit is not connected" is played, followed by a predetermined error notification sound four times. This audio pattern is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flashing red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Flashes red.
Performance display device: Displays warning messages such as "The performance operation unit cable has been detected as not being inserted" and "Please turn off the power before inserting the cable" on the image during the performance or the image while waiting for customers.
Sub-performance display device: Displays warning text such as "Magnet detected" and "Performance operation unit not connected" on the image during performance or the image while waiting for customers.
Function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Movable body on the game board: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).

[Error handling 9]
Audio: An announcement saying "The game board is not connected" is played, followed by a predetermined error notification sound four times, followed by an announcement saying "The performance operation unit is not connected" and a predetermined error notification sound four times. This audio pattern is repeatedly played (combining the contents of Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: (same as Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Various LEDs on the game board: (same as Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Performance display device: Displays warning messages such as "The game board cable has been detected as not being inserted,""The performance operation unit cable has been detected as not being inserted," and "Please turn off the power before inserting the cable" on the image during the performance or the image while waiting for customers (combining the contents of error response 7 and error response 8 (error response 7 + error response 8)).
Sub-performance display device: Displays warning text such as "Magnet detected,""Game board not connected," and "Performance operation unit not connected" on the image during performance or the image while waiting for customers (combining the contents of error response 7 and error response 8 (error response 7 + error response 8)).
Function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Movable body on the game board: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).

[Specific example 2: When power is turned on]
Next, with reference to Figure 313, we will explain error responses 1 to 9, which are the behavior of a pachinko machine in the event of an error as shown in Figure 308 (c) when the power is turned on.
[Error handling 1 (ID error 1 handling)]
Audio: When the power is turned on, there is no start-up music and the sound is muted, then a predetermined error notification sound is played once, followed by an announcement saying "A connection error has occurred on the game board. Please turn off the power and check the game board." This type of audio is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flashing red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all lights off).
Performance display device: After displaying "Power being restored" on a black background, it displays the following notification text: "Game board error occurred,""Errornumber:,""Game board connection error," and "Please turn off the power and check the game board," and also displays an image in which the game board connection error part of the pachinko machine is lit up.
Sub-performance display device: Displays a black background.
Function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: Turn off (all lights off).
Movable body on the game board: Has actions such as returning to the original position and progressing the performance (actions).
Movable body on game frame side: No operation such as returning to original position (not operating).

[Error handling 2 (ID error 2 handling)]
Audio: When the power is turned on, there is no start-up music and the sound is muted, then a predetermined error notification sound is played once, followed by an announcement saying "A connection error has occurred in the production operation unit. Please turn off the power and check the production operation unit." This type of audio is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flashing red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all lights off).
Performance display device: After displaying "Power being restored" on a black background, it displays the following notification text: "Performance operation unit error occurred,""Errornumber:,""Performance operation unit connection error," and "Please turn off the power and then check the performance operation unit," and displays an image in which the performance operation unit connection error part of the pachinko machine is lit up.
Sub-performance display device: At the same time as the start-up music starts, a notification message saying "Performance operation button ID error" is displayed on a specified background image.
Function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on the game board side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 3 (ID error 3 handling)]
Audio: When the power is turned on, there is no start-up music and the sound is muted. After that, a predetermined error notification sound is played once, followed by an announcement saying "Please call an attendant." This audio pattern is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flashing red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all lights off).
Performance display device: After displaying "Power being restored" on a black background, it indicates that there is an inconsistency in the combination of the main control board on the game board (split game board) and the payout control board on the main frame 4 to which the game board (split game board) is attached, and displays warning messages such as "Main payout error occurred,""Errornumber:,""Main payout connection error," and "Please turn off the power and then check the main control and payout control," and displays an image indicating that the game board and frame cannot be combined.
Sub-performance display device: Displays a black background.
Function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Movable body on the game board: Has operations such as returning to the original position (operation).
Movable body on the game frame: Has operations such as returning to the original position (operation).

[Error handling 4]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Performance display device: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-performance display device: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on the game board side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 5]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Performance display device: Same as error handling 3 (ID error 3 handling).
Sub-performance display device: Same as error response 3 (ID error 3 response).
Function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on the game board side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 6]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Performance display device: Same as error handling 3 (ID error 3 handling).
Sub-performance display device: Same as error response 3 (ID error 3 response).
Function display unit: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Movable body on the game board: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).

[Error handling 7]
Sound: When the power is turned on, there is no start-up music and the sound is muted. After that, a predetermined error notification sound is played once, followed by an announcement sound saying "The game board is not connected." This sound pattern is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: flash white.
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all lights off).
Performance display device: After displaying "Power being restored" on a black background, the display switches to the image during the performance (such as the image displayed as the performance progresses, same below), and displays the notification text "Error number:" and "Game board unconnected error."
Sub-performance display device: Displays images during performance.
Function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: Turn off (all lights off).
Movable body on the game board: Has operations such as returning to the original position (operation).
Movable body on game frame side: No operation such as returning to original position (not operating).

[Error handling 8]
Audio: When the power is turned on, there is no start-up music and the sound is muted. After that, a predetermined error notification sound is played once, followed by an announcement sound saying "The performance operation unit is not connected." This audio pattern is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: flash white.
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all lights off).
Performance display device: After displaying "Power restoration in progress" on a black background, the display switches to the image of the performance and displays the warning text "Error number:" and "Performance operation unit not connected error."
Sub-performance display device: Displays images during performance.
Function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Movable body on the game board: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).

[Error handling 9]
Sound: When the power is turned on, there is no start-up music and the sound is muted, then a specified error alert sound is played once, followed by an announcement sound saying "The game board is not connected," followed by a specified error alert sound once, followed by an announcement sound saying "The presentation operation unit is not connected" (this combines the contents of error response 7 and error response 8 (error response 7 + error response 8)).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: flash white (same as error response 7 and error response 8 (error response 7 + error response 8)).
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all off) (same as error response 7 and error response 8 (error response 7 + error response 8)).
Performance display device: After displaying "Power being restored" on a black background, it switches to the image during the performance, displays the notification text "Error number:" and "Game board unconnected error", and displays the notification text "Error number:" and "Performance operation unit unconnected error" (combining the contents of Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Sub-performance display device: Displays images during performance (combining the contents of error response 7 and error response 8 (error response 7 + error response 8)).
Function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Movable body on the game board: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).

In addition, if the performance operation unit 300 is not provided with any ID for identifying itself and can be used in common with any specifications, in Specific Example 2: Error Responses 1 to 6 when power is turned on, the various LEDs on the door frame unit flash red, and therefore the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit also flash red, but only some of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit (the various LEDs mounted on one of the various decorative boards, or specific LEDs among the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards) may be turned off (all turned off), or all of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit may be turned off (all turned off). Also, in Example 2: Error Responses 7 to 9 when power is turned on, the various LEDs on the door frame unit flash white, and therefore the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit also flash white. However, only some of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit (the various LEDs mounted on one of the various decorative boards, or specific LEDs among the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards) may be turned off (all off), or all of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit may be turned off (all off). In other words, when only some of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit (the various LEDs mounted on one of the various decorative boards, or specific LEDs among the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards) are turned off (all off), there is no restriction to turning off (all off) the various LEDs other than some of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit (the various LEDs mounted on one of the various decorative boards, or specific LEDs among the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards).

[Example 2: When magnetic detection (so-called magnet goto) is not performed during the performance after power-on or while waiting for customers]
Next, referring to Figure 314, we will explain error responses 1 to 9 as the behavior of a pachinko machine during an error shown in Figure 308(c) when there is no magnetic detection (so-called magnetic goto) while the performance is progressing after the power is turned on (for example, when the performance progresses based on the game ball entering various winning slots) or while waiting for customers (for example, when a demonstration is being performed or a still image is displayed).

[Error handling 1 (ID error 1 handling)]
Audio: A predetermined error notification sound is played once, followed by an announcement saying, "A connection error has occurred on the game board. Please turn off the power and check the game board." This type of audio is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flashing red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all lights off).
Performance display device: Displays the following notification text on a black background: "Game board error occurred,""Errornumber:,""Game board connection error," and "Please turn off the power and check the game board," and also displays an image in which the game board connection error part of the pachinko machine is lit up.
Sub-performance display device: Displays a black background.
Function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: A specified LED lights up (when waiting for customers: off (all lights off)).
Movable body on the game board: In addition to progressing the performance, it also moves in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while customers are waiting, and moves to return to its original position (operation).
Movable body on the game frame: No operation such as returning to the original position (not operating). Note that if the movable body is operating in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while waiting for customers in addition to the progress of the performance, it may stop at the time this error occurs or may return to the original position.

[Error handling 2 (ID error 2 handling)]
Audio: A predetermined error notification sound is played once, followed by an announcement saying, "A connection error has occurred in the production operation unit. Please turn off the power and then check the production operation unit." This type of audio is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flashing red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all lights off).
Performance display device: Displays the following warning text on a black background: "Performance operation unit error occurred,""Errornumber:,""Performance operation unit connection error," and "Please turn off the power and then check the performance operation unit," and also displays an image in which the performance operation unit connection error part of the pachinko machine is lit up.
Sub-performance display device: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Function display unit: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on the game board side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 3 (ID error 3 handling)]
Audio: A predetermined error notification sound is played once, followed by an announcement saying "Please call an attendant." This audio pattern is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flashing red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all lights off).
Performance display device: On a black background, it displays warning messages such as "Main payout error occurred,""Errornumber:,""Main payout connection error," and "Please turn off the power and then check the main control and payout control" to indicate that there is an inconsistency in the combination of the main control board on the game board (split game board) and the payout control board on the main frame 4 to which the game board (split game board) is attached, and also displays an image indicating that the game board and frame cannot be combined.
Sub-performance display device: Displays a black background.
Function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: A specified LED lights up (when waiting for customers: off (all lights off)).
Movable body on the game board: In addition to progressing the performance, it also moves in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while customers are waiting, and moves to return to its original position (operation).
Movable body on the game frame: In addition to progressing the performance, it also operates in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while customers are waiting, and operates to return to its original position (operation).

[Error handling 4]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Performance display device: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-performance display device: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Function display unit: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on the game board side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 5]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Performance display device: Same as error handling 3 (ID error 3 handling).
Sub-performance display device: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on the game board side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 6]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Performance display device: Same as error handling 3 (ID error 3 handling).
Sub-performance display device: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Function display unit: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Movable body on the game board: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).

[Error handling 7]
Audio: Along with the sound effects, a predetermined error notification sound is played once, followed by an announcement sound saying "The game board is not connected." These audio patterns are repeatedly played along with the sound effects.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: flash white.
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all lights off).
Performance display device: Displays images during the performance (images displayed as the performance progresses, etc., the same applies below) or images while customers are waiting (images displayed as the demonstration progresses, etc., the same applies below).
Sub-performance display device: Displays images during performances or images while customers are waiting.
Function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: A specified LED lights up (when waiting for customers: off (all lights off)).
Movable body on the game board: In addition to progressing the performance, it also moves in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while customers are waiting, and moves to return to its original position (operation).
Movable body on the game frame: In addition to progressing the performance, it also operates in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while customers are waiting, and operates to return to its original position (operation).

[Error handling 8]
Audio: Along with the sound effect, a predetermined error notification sound is played once, followed by an announcement sound saying "The sound effect operation unit is not connected." This type of audio is played repeatedly along with the sound effect.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: flash white.
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all lights off).
Performance display device: Displays images during performances or images while customers are waiting.
Sub-performance display device: Displays images during performances or images while customers are waiting.
Function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Movable body on the game board: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).

[Error handling 9]
Audio: Along with the sound effect, a predetermined error notification sound is played once, followed by an announcement sound saying "The game board is not connected," followed by a predetermined error notification sound once, followed by an announcement sound saying "The operation unit is not connected." This audio pattern is repeatedly played along with the sound effect (combining the contents of Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: (same as Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Various LEDs on the game board: (same as Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Performance display device: (same as Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Sub-performance display device: (same as Error Response 7 and Error Response 8 (Error Response 7 + Error Response 8)).
Function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Movable body on the game board: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).

In addition, if the performance operation unit 300 is not provided with any ID for identifying itself and can be used in common with any specifications, in Specific Example 2: Error Responses 1 to 6 when there is no power-on (magnetic gouge), the various LEDs on the door frame unit flash red, and therefore the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit also flash red, but only some of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit (the various LEDs mounted on one of the various decorative boards, or specific LEDs among the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards) may be turned off (all turned off), or all of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit may be turned off (all turned off). Also, in specific example 2: Error response 7 to error response 9 when there is no power-on (magnetic goto), the various LEDs of the door frame unit flash white, so the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit also flash white, but only a portion of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit (various LEDs mounted on one of the various decorative boards, or specific LEDs among the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards) may be turned off (all off), or all of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit may be turned off (all off). In other words, when only a portion of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit (various LEDs mounted on one of the various decorative boards, or specific LEDs among the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards) are turned off (all off), there is no restriction that the other various LEDs be turned off (all off) except for a portion of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit (various LEDs mounted on one of the various decorative boards, or specific LEDs among the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards).

[Example 2: When magnetic detection (magnetic goto) occurs during a performance or while waiting for customers after powering on]

Next, Error Responses 1 to 9 will be described with reference to Figure 315 as the behavior of a pachinko machine during an error shown in Figure 308(c) when magnetic detection (magnetic gobbling) is involved during the progression of a presentation after power-on (for example, when a presentation is progressing based on a game ball entering one of the various winning slots) or while waiting for customers (for example, when a demonstration is being held or a still image is displayed). Note that when magnetic detection (magnetic gobbling) ceases, the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error (Error Responses 1 to 9) will be as shown in Figure 314 when magnetic detection (magnetic gobbling) is not involved during the progression of a presentation after power-on (for example, when a presentation is progressing based on a game ball entering one of the various winning slots) or while waiting for customers (for example, when a demonstration is being held or a still image is displayed).

[Error handling 1 (ID error 1 handling)]
Audio: A predetermined error notification sound is played once, followed by an announcement saying, "A connection error has occurred on the game board. Please turn off the power and check the game board." This type of audio is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flashing red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all lights off).
Performance display device: Displays the following notification text on a black background: "Game board error occurred,""Errornumber:,""Game board connection error," and "Please turn off the power and check the game board," and also displays an image in which the game board connection error part of the pachinko machine is lit up.
Sub-performance display device: Displays a black background.
Function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: A specified LED lights up (when waiting for customers: off (all lights off)).
Movable body on the game board: In addition to progressing the performance, it also moves in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while customers are waiting, and moves to return to its original position (operation).
Movable body on the game frame: No operation such as returning to the original position (not operating). Note that if the movable body is operating in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while waiting for customers in addition to the progress of the performance, it may stop at the time this error occurs or may return to the original position.

[Error handling 2 (ID error 2 handling)]
Audio: A predetermined error notification sound is played once, followed by an announcement saying, "A connection error has occurred in the production operation unit. Please turn off the power and then check the production operation unit." This type of audio is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flashing red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all lights off).
Performance display device: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-performance display device: Displays the following warning text on a black background: "Performance operation unit error occurred,""Errornumber:,""Performance operation unit connection error," and "Please turn off the power and then check the performance operation unit," and also displays an image in which the performance operation unit connection error part of the pachinko machine is lit up.
Function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on the game board side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 3 (ID error 3 handling)]
Audio: A predetermined error notification sound is played once, followed by an announcement saying "Please call an attendant." This audio pattern is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flashing red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all lights off).
Performance display device: On a black background, it displays warning messages such as "Main payout error occurred,""Errornumber:,""Main payout connection error," and "Please turn off the power and then check the main control and payout control" to indicate that there is an inconsistency in the combination of the main control board on the game board (split game board) and the payout control board on the main frame 4 to which the game board (split game board) is attached, and also displays an image indicating that the game board and frame cannot be combined.
Sub-performance display device: Displays a black background.
Function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: A specified LED lights up (when waiting for customers: off (all lights off)).
Movable body on the game board: In addition to progressing the performance, it also moves in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while customers are waiting, and moves to return to its original position (operation).
Movable body on the game frame: In addition to progressing the performance, it also operates in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while customers are waiting, and operates to return to its original position (operation).

[Error handling 4]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 1 (ID Error 1 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response).
Performance display device: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-performance display device: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on the game board side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 5]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Performance display device: Same as error handling 3 (ID error 3 handling).
Sub-performance display device: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on the game board side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 1 (ID error 1 response).

[Error handling 6]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 3 (ID Error 3 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as Error Response 3 (ID Error 3 Response).
Performance display device: Same as error handling 3 (ID error 3 handling).
Sub-performance display device: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Function display unit: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Movable body on the game board: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 2 (ID error 2 response).

[Error handling 7]
Audio: A predetermined error notification sound is played once, followed by an announcement saying "Magnetic sensor error." This audio pattern is played repeatedly.
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Flashing red.
Various LEDs on the game board: Turn off (all lights off).
Performance display device: Displays an image during the performance (such as an image displayed as the performance progresses, the same applies below) or an image while waiting for customers (such as an image displayed as the demonstration progresses, the same applies below), and displays the warning text "Error number:" and "Magnetic sensor error."
Sub-performance display device: Displays images during performances or images while customers are waiting.
Function display unit: A specified LED lights up.
Sub-function display unit: A specified LED lights up (when waiting for customers: off (all lights off)).
Movable body on the game board: In addition to progressing the performance, it also moves in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while customers are waiting, and moves to return to its original position (operation).
Movable body on the game frame: In addition to progressing the performance, it also operates in accordance with the progress of the demonstration while customers are waiting, and operates to return to its original position (operation).

[Error handling 8]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 7 (ID Error 7 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 7 (ID Error 7 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Performance display device: Same as error handling 7 (ID error 7 handling).
Sub-performance display device: Same as error handling 7 (ID error 7 handling).
Function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Movable body on the game board: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).

[Error handling 9]
Audio: Same as Error Handling 7 (ID Error 7 Handling).
Various LEDs on the door frame unit: Same as Error Response 7 (ID Error 7 Response).
Various LEDs on the game board: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Performance display device: Same as error handling 7 (ID error 7 handling).
Sub-performance display device: Same as error handling 7 (ID error 7 handling).
Function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Sub-function display unit: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Movable body on the game board: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).
Movable body on game frame side: Same as error response 7 (ID error 7 response).

In addition, if the performance operation unit 300 is not provided with any ID for identifying itself and can be used in common with any specifications, in Specific Example 2: Error Responses 1 to 9 when there is no power-on (magnetic gouge), the various LEDs on the door frame unit flash red, and therefore the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit also flash red, but only some of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit (the various LEDs mounted on one of the various decorative boards, or specific LEDs among the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards) may be turned off (all turned off), or all of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit may be turned off (all turned off). In other words, when only some of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit (various LEDs mounted on one of the various decorative boards, or specific LEDs from among the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards) are turned off (all turned off), there is no restriction to turning off (all turned off) the other various LEDs excluding some of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit (various LEDs mounted on one of the various decorative boards, or specific LEDs from among the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards).

Furthermore, in error responses 7, 8, and 9 in Figures 310 to 315, which correspond respectively to state 8: unconnected error 1, state 9: unconnected error 2, and state 10: unconnected error 3 in Figure 308(c), the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, as another example, each time performs the following check on the various LED drivers that drive the various LEDs and the various electrical drive source drivers (e.g., solenoid drive circuits, motor drive circuits, etc.) that drive the various electrical drive sources that are provided on the right-side game board 5AR and the performance operation unit 300A (300B) where the connection cannot be confirmed: No-operation data (data to turn off various LEDs and data to stop the electrical drive source) may be sent, or no-operation data (data to turn off various LEDs and data to stop the electrical drive source) may be sent only once when a no-connection error occurs, or reset data (data to reset various LED drivers and various electrical drive source drivers (for example, solenoid drive circuits, motor drive circuits, etc.)) may be included in the transmitted data to reset the various LED drivers and various electrical drive source drivers.

[Combination of game board and door frame]
As described above, door frame units (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as "door frame units") such as the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, the tray unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450 are attached to the door frame 3. The door frame units are designed based on a unified concept. The relationship between the game board 5 and the door frame 3 must be submitted to and approved by the application authority. However, when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, human error may result in the relationship (combination) between the game board 5 and the door frame 3 differing from that submitted and approved by the application authority. This would undesirably result in a pachinko machine being installed in the gaming hall that differs from the specifications submitted and approved by the application authority.

In this embodiment, one of the decorative boards provided on the door frame unit (hereinafter referred to as the "frame-side decorative board") is given a self-identification code (ID) that allows it to identify itself, and an ID comparison circuit is provided that can determine the compatibility (matching) of the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit and output the determination result. Here, the ID comparison circuit will be explained with reference to Figure 316. Figure 316 is a circuit diagram showing an example of an ID comparison circuit. Note that since combinations of the game board 5 and door frame units can be compatible (matched) or incompatible (mismatched), there are cases in which a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) is treated as a component of the game board 5. In other words, the game board component provided on the main frame 4 is composed of a game board 5 equipped with a microprocessor and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) among the door frame units not equipped with a microprocessor. The game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, and the specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) among the door frame units is attached to a door frame 3 that is supported on the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed. In other words, the game frame component, which is composed of the outer frame 2, door frame 3, and main frame 4, is provided with a game board 5 equipped with a microprocessor and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) among the door frame units not equipped with a microprocessor. Various LEDs are provided on the game board 5 and the specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) among the door frame units, and are driven by various LED drivers.

[Various lines formed between the game board and the door frame]
First, to briefly explain the various lines formed between the gaming board 5 and the door frame 3, a lower gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW (not shown) is located in the lower center of the rear box 3010 of the gaming board 5 shown in FIG. 132, etc., on which two lower gaming board drawer connectors UDRW are mounted in the left-right direction. The two lower gaming board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW are of the convex type. The lower gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 directly or via various relay boards. Two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) are provided on a main frame side relay board (not shown) on the front of the main frame 4 at positions corresponding to the two lower gaming board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW provided on the rear box 3010 of the gaming board 5. The two main frame side drawer connectors are of the concave type. The various boards provided in the door frame 3 (decorative boards and various relay boards provided in the dish unit 200, door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, and door frame top unit 450. The various relay boards include those that relay detection signals from various sensors in the performance operation unit 300 of the dish unit 200) are electrically connected to the drawer connector on the main frame side.

When the gaming board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the lower gaming board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the convex type lower gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the gaming board 5 are guided and fitted into two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the concave type main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4, electrically connecting the terminals of the lower gaming board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the gaming board 5 to the terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4.

When the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 are electrically connected to the terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4. This allows the peripheral control board 1510 located behind the rear box 3010 of the game board 5 and various boards provided on the door frame 3 (decorative boards and various relay boards provided on the tray unit 200, door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, and door frame top unit 450). The various relay boards include the tray unit 200's performance operation unit 300. These include those that relay detection signals from various sensors and control signals that transmit various information.), and a ground (GND) line is formed that electrically connects the ground (GND, circuit ground) of the various control boards and other boards arranged behind the back box 3010 of the gaming board 5 to the ground (GND, circuit ground) of the power supply board 630 provided on the main frame 4, and various power supply lines are formed that supply various power sources (DC power sources of +5V, +12V, +24V, etc.) created by the power supply board 630 provided on the main frame 4 to the various control boards and other boards arranged behind the back box 3010 of the gaming board 5. In addition, various power supply lines (DC power supplies such as +5V, +12V, and +24V) generated by the power supply board 630 provided in the main frame 4, and a ground (GND) line electrically connecting to the ground (GND, circuit ground) of the power supply board 630, are provided via electrical wiring to the various boards provided in the door frame 3 (decorative boards and various relay boards provided in the dish unit 200, door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, and door frame top unit 450. The various relay boards include those that relay detection signals from the various sensors in the performance operation unit 300 of the dish unit 200 and control signals that transmit various information).

In addition, when the gaming board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the terminals of the lower gaming board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the gaming board 5 are electrically connected to the terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4. This forms a control signal line via the drawer connectors that transmits various control signals between the main control board 1310 located behind the rear box 3010 of the gaming board 5 and the payout control board 633 provided on the main frame 4.

Mounting through holes are formed in the insulating exterior portions of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW and the main frame side drawer connector. The lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 on which the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW are mounted has through holes in positions corresponding to the insulating mounting through holes of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW. Furthermore, the main frame side relay board (not shown) on which the main frame side drawer connector is mounted has through holes in positions corresponding to the insulating mounting through holes of the main frame side drawer connector.

[ID comparison circuit]
The ID comparison circuit WIDC provided on the frame side decorative board WKB as one of the decorative boards provided in a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) among the door frame units is mainly composed of an LED driver WIDCa and an 8-bit digital comparator circuit WIDCb (hereinafter referred to as the ``comparator circuit WIDCb''), as shown in Figure 316.

The LED driver WIDCa has 24 output channels electrically connected to LED elements, and is a sink-type constant current drive circuit capable of supplying a constant current to each channel. The maximum output current is set by an output current setting circuit WIDCc provided external to the LED driver WIDCa. The LED driver WIDCa is assigned a self-identification code (ID) that allows it to identify itself, and the ID is set to one of the values between 1 and 64 by an address setting circuit WIDCd provided external to the LED driver WIDCa.

The output current setting circuit WIDCc is electrically connected to the maximum output current setting terminals Rx1, Rx2, and Rx3 of the LED driver WIDCa, and by electrically connecting a specified resistor to each, it is possible to set the maximum output current for each output channel. In other words, in this embodiment, the maximum output current is set by a hardware configuration, and cannot be changed by software (program).

The address setting circuit WIDCd is electrically connected to the ID setting terminals ID1, ID2, and ID3 of the LED driver WIDCa, and the voltage applied to each terminal sets one of the setting values from setting value 1 to setting value 64. In other words, in this embodiment, the ID of the LED driver WIDCa is set by a hardware configuration, and the ID of the LED driver WIDCa cannot be changed by software (program).

In this embodiment, the ID of the LED driver WIDCa is set to a set value of 64. This is because LED drivers are mounted not only on the door frame unit but also on various decorative boards and boards provided on the game board 5, and the number of LED drivers varies depending on the model. Therefore, when developing a program, it is necessary to prevent confusion between the LED driver WIDCa of the ID comparison circuit WIDC and other LED drivers. Therefore, for the frame-side decorative board WKB on which the ID comparison circuit WIDC is installed, the ID of the LED driver WIDCa is always fixed to a set value of 64.

The LED driver WIDCa's reset terminal RST and ground terminal GND are electrically connected to the ground (GND, circuit ground) of the frame-side decorative board WKB, and its power supply terminal Vcc is electrically connected to +5V. Of the LED driver WIDCa's 24 output terminals, OUT0 to OUT23, eight output terminals, OUT0 to OUT7, output to the comparator circuit WIDCb, while the remaining 16 output terminals, OUT8 to OUT23, are either unconnected or electrically connected to LED elements. For single-color LEDs, one LED element is packaged and its cathode terminal is electrically connected to one output terminal. For full-color LEDs, three LED elements (red, green, and blue) are packaged and their cathode terminals are electrically connected to the corresponding three output terminals. The anode terminals of the LED elements are electrically connected to +12V. Heat generation by the LED element may be suppressed by inserting a resistor between the cathode terminal of the LED element and the output terminal of the LED driver WIDCa (i.e., by electrically connecting the cathode terminal of the LED element to one end of the resistor, and electrically connecting the other end of this resistor to the output terminal of the LED driver WIDCa).

The SDA terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the LED driver WIDCa, receives a light emission information signal, which is serial data from the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the gaming board 5. This signal is input via the drawer connectors, which are electrically connected to the terminals of the lower gaming board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the gaming board 5 when the gaming board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, and to the terminals of two main frame drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4. There are multiple serial communication lines electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510. In other words, the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to multiple serial communication lines for sending and receiving various serial data to and from the various boards and door units within the gaming board 5.

The SCLK terminal, which is the clock signal input terminal of the LED driver WIDCa, receives the light emission information clock signal, which is the clock signal used to transmit the light emission information signal from the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the gaming board 5. When the gaming board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the terminals of the lower gaming board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the gaming board 5 are electrically connected to the terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4, and are input via these drawer connectors.

The light-emission information signal input to the SDA terminal of the LED driver WIDCa based on the light-emission information clock signal input to the SCLK terminal of the LED driver WIDCa is composed of an ID code that indicates which LED driver the light-emission information signal is for, and light-emission data that indicates the LED light-emission mode. When the ID code included in the light-emission information signal matches the ID set by the address setting circuit WIDCd, the LED driver imports the light-emission data included in the light-emission information signal and controls the light-emission modes of the various LEDs electrically connected to the 24 output terminals OUT0 to OUT23 based on this imported light-emission data. On the other hand, when the ID code included in the light-emission information signal does not match the ID set by the address setting circuit WIDCd, the LED driver does not import but discards the light-emission data included in the light-emission information signal, and maintains the light-emission modes of the various LEDs electrically connected to the 24 output terminals OUT0 to OUT23 based on the previously imported light-emission data.

As mentioned above, the light emission information signal sent to the LED driver WIDCa consists of an ID code and light emission data, with the light emission data including the ID of the frame-side decorative board WKB. In other words, the light emission data consists of information compared by the comparator circuit WIDCb using signals output from the eight output terminals OUT0 to OUT7, and information output from the 16 output terminals OUT8 to OUT23.

The signals output from the eight output terminals OUT0 to OUT7 of the LED driver WIDCa are input to the eight input terminals P0 to P7 of the comparator circuit WIDCb. The eight setting terminals Q0 to Q7 of the comparator circuit WIDCb correspond one-to-one with the eight input terminals P0 to P7 of the comparator circuit WIDCb, and are the original sources referenced.

In this embodiment, the eight reference source setting terminals, Q0 to Q7, are expressed as 8 bits with Q0 as the most significant bit and Q7 as the least significant bit, resulting in 11110000B (the letter "B" represents a binary number), which is expressed in hexadecimal as F0H (the letter "H" represents a hexadecimal number).

The inverted G terminal, which is the enable terminal of the comparator circuit WIDCb (shown in the diagram as a solid line above the letter "G"), and the GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the comparator circuit WIDCb, are electrically connected to the ground (GND, circuit ground) of the frame-side decorative board WKB. The Vcc terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the comparator circuit WIDCb, is electrically connected to +5V.

When the logic of the signals input to the eight input terminals P0 to P7 (the terminals to be compared) match the logic set to the eight reference setting terminals Q0 to Q7, comparator circuit WIDCb sets the logic of the ID valid signal from the output terminal inverted P=Q terminal (shown in the diagram with a solid line above the English symbol "P=Q") to valid logic (logic LOW) and outputs it. On the other hand, when the logic of the signals input to the eight input terminals P0 to P7 (the terminals to be compared) do not match the logic set to the eight reference setting terminals Q0 to Q7, comparator circuit WIDCb sets the logic of the ID valid signal from the output terminal inverted P=Q terminal to invalid logic (logic HI), which is the inverse of the valid logic (logic LOW), and outputs it.

In this way, when the logic of the ID valid signal is set to valid logic, it is possible to convey a determination result that the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) is compatible (matched), whereas when the logic of the ID valid signal is set to invalid logic, it is possible to convey a determination result that the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) is not compatible (matched).

The ID valid signal output from the inverted P=Q terminal of the comparator circuit WIDCb is transmitted from the frame side decorative board WKB via electrical wiring (harness) to the relay board TKB provided on the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3. In addition, the light emission information signal and light emission information clock signal from the peripheral control board 1510 input to the frame side decorative board WKB are transmitted to other frame side decorative boards via electrical wiring (harness).

[Relay board provided in the dish unit]
Next, we will explain the relay board TKB provided in the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, to which the ID valid signal output from the inverted P=Q terminal of the comparator circuit WIDCb in the frame side decorative board WKB is input via electrical wiring (harness), with reference to Figure 317. Figure 317 is a circuit diagram showing an example of the circuit of the relay board provided in the tray unit.

The relay board TKB provided in the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 is equipped with a door frame side information output circuit TOC which receives detection signals from various sensors provided in the performance operation unit 300 attached to the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, as well as detection signals from various sensors provided in other units of the door frame 3 (for example, if a movable body is provided in the door frame 3, detection signals from a photosensor which detects the original position or moved position of the movable body, and detection signals from a distance measuring sensor which detects the player's actions at the door frame 3 (holding up their hand, waving their hand, etc.)).

The door frame side information output circuit TOC is mainly composed of two parallel-serial conversion circuits TOCa and TOCb. The parallel-serial conversion circuits IDCa and TOCb are electronic components made into chips mainly consisting of multiple flip-flop circuits (8 flip-flop circuits), and are the same electronic component as the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa of the ID output circuit IDC shown in Figure 305, etc.

The door frame side information output circuits TOCa and TOCb have eight input terminals, A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and H (i.e., eight 8-bit parallel input terminals), a CK terminal to which an information acquisition clock signal is input, a non-inverting QH terminal that takes in the information input to the eight input terminals A to H and outputs it as serial data without inverting it, an inverting QH terminal (shown in the diagram with a solid line above the letter "Q") that takes in the information set in the eight input terminals A to H and outputs it as serial data after inverting it, and a CK terminal that prohibits the input of a clock signal. It mainly consists of an INH terminal, an S/inverted L terminal (shown in the diagram as a solid line above the letter "L") that switches between shift operation based on the information acquisition clock signal input to the CK terminal and parallel operation in which each flip-flop circuit takes in information set in the eight input terminals A to H, an SI terminal to which serial data is input, a power supply terminal Vcc to which control power is supplied, and a GND terminal that is electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground).

The parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa's eight input terminals, A through H, and the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCb's eight input terminals, A through D, receive detection signals from various sensors installed in the performance operation unit 300 attached to the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, as well as detection signals from various sensors installed in other units of the door frame 3. Of the eight input terminals of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCb, three, E through G, are leftover terminals and are electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground). (Of the eight input terminals of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCb, three, E through G, may also be electrically connected to +5V.) The remaining input terminal, H, of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCb's eight input terminals, receives an ID enable signal from the frame-side decorative board WKB.

The power supply terminal Vcc of the parallel-serial conversion circuits IDCa and IDCb is electrically connected to +5V, the GND terminal and CK INT terminal are electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground), and the non-inverting QH terminal is unconnected.

The parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa has its SI terminal electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground), and outputs serial data converted from parallel data input to its eight input terminals from its inverted QH terminal.

The parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCb has its SI terminal electrically connected to the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa, and outputs serial data converted from the parallel data input to its eight input terminals from the inverted QH terminal.

An information acquisition switch signal is input to the S/inverted L terminal from outside the parallel-serial conversion circuits IDCa and IDCb. When the logic of the information acquisition switch signal is parallel operation logic (logic LOW, electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground)), each flip-flop circuit of the parallel-serial conversion circuits IDCa and IDCb acquires and stores (holds) the information currently input to the eight input terminals, A terminal to H terminal. On the other hand, when the logic of the information acquisition switch signal is shift operation logic (logic HI, electrically connected to +5V), which is the inverse of the parallel operation logic, and the CK INT terminal is electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground), the acquired information is shifted sequentially at the rising edge of the information acquisition clock signal input to the CK terminal.

The two parallel-serial conversion circuits TOCa and TOCb have an inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit TOCa electrically connected to the SI terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit TOCb, and therefore each flip-flop circuit of the two parallel-serial conversion circuits IDCa and IDCb shifts sequentially at the rising edge of the information acquisition clock signal input to the CK terminal (that is, information input to the A terminal → information input to the B terminal → information input to the C terminal → information input to the D terminal → information input to the E terminal → information input to the F terminal → information input to the G terminal → information input to the H terminal → shifts one bit at a time from the non-inverted QH terminal and the inverted QH terminal to output serial data). Therefore, the parallel-serial conversion circuits TOCa and TOCb operate as a 16-bit shift register consisting of an 8-bit shift register formed by the parallel-serial conversion circuit TOCa and an 8-bit shift register formed by the parallel-serial conversion circuit TOCb, and the door frame side information signal is output as serial data from the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit TOCb to the peripheral control board 1510.

The information acquisition clock signal and information acquisition switching signal from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the gaming board 5 are transmitted to the relay board TKB provided on the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 via this drawer connector by electrically connecting the terminals of the lower gaming board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the gaming board 5 when the gaming board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, and the terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4. In addition, the door frame side information signal from the door frame side information output circuit TOC of the relay board TKB provided on the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 is transmitted to the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 via this drawer connector, by electrically connecting the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, and the terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4.

In the performance operation unit information acquisition process of step S1108 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 267, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 sets and outputs the logic of the information acquisition switch signal input to the S/inverted L terminal to operate in parallel and then serial mode, and then outputs an information acquisition clock signal to acquire the door frame side information signal, and can grasp the player's operations and the operation of the movable body (performance body) on the performance operation unit 300 attached to the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, grasp the movable body (performance body) and player operations on other units of the door frame 3, and obtain a judgment result regarding the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units).

The timing for obtaining the judgment result regarding the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) among the door frame units may be performed only the first time after power is turned on, during the performance operation unit information acquisition process described above, or it may be performed constantly or intermittently during the performance operation unit information acquisition process described above after power is turned on. By constantly or intermittently obtaining the judgment result regarding the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) among the door frame units during the performance operation unit information acquisition process described above after power is turned on, it is possible to check whether the transmission path from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame side decorative board WKB is affected by noise, depending on the judgment results.

In addition, the timing for obtaining a determination result regarding the compatibility (integrity) of the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) among the door frame units may be the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 309, performed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 only the first time after power is turned on.

In addition, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines based on the results of its determination of the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) among the door frame units that the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) is not compatible (consistent), it will take error response 1 (ID error 1 response) shown in Figures 310 to 312 or Figures 313 to 315.

In this way, the ID of the frame-side decorative board WKB is included in the light-emitting data that indicates the LED light-emitting mode for compatibility (matching) of the combination of the gaming board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units). This eliminates the need to provide dedicated terminals for transmitting the ID of the frame-side decorative board WKB to each terminal of the lower gaming board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the gaming board 5, and each terminal of the two main frame-side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame-side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4.

In addition, each terminal of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5, and each terminal of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4, are provided with extra unused terminals to accommodate the specifications of the game board 5. However, even if a terminal is unused in one specification of the game board 5, all terminals may be used in another specification of the game board 5. In such a case, if the number of terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 is increased, it would also be necessary to increase the number of terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4. This would require the main frame 4 (actually, the outer frame 2, door frame 3, and the entire main frame 4) to be replaced, which would increase costs and would eliminate the convenience of electrically connecting the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 to the terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4 by attaching the game board 5 to the main frame 4 regardless of the game board 5's specifications.

In this embodiment, the ID of the frame-side decorative board WKB is included in the light-emitting data that indicates the LED light-emitting mode for compatibility (matching) of the combination of the gaming board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units). This eliminates the need to increase the number of terminals for the lower gaming board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the gaming board 5, and the number of terminals for the two main frame-side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame-side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4.

The information acquisition clock signal and the light emission information clock signal may be transmitted using a common transmission line (door frame side clock signal transmission line) among the transmission lines electrically connecting the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 and the terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4. In this case, the peripheral control IC 1510a outputs a control signal to a hardware clock signal switching circuit on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW or the peripheral control board 1510, and transmits either the information acquisition clock signal or the light emission information clock signal to the common transmission line (door frame side clock signal transmission line). This helps to prevent an increase in the number of terminals for the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5, and the terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4.

As shown in Figure 308, the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of split game boards and the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of split game boards and effect operation buttons is determined by a microprocessor called the peripheral control IC 1510a based on an 8-bit ID sent to the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510. As shown in Figure 316, the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) among the door frame units is determined by a circuit on the frame side decorative board WKB that does not have a microprocessor called the ID comparison circuit WIDC, which is composed of an LED driver WIDCa and a comparator circuit WIDCb.

[Configuration that does not communicate the compatibility (integrity) of the combination of the game board and the door frame unit to the peripheral control board]
As described above, the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the game board 5 with a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) among the door frame units is determined by a circuit that does not have a microprocessor, called the ID comparison circuit WIDC, which is composed of an LED driver WIDCa and a comparator circuit WIDCb on the frame side decorative board WKB, and the determination result is output as an ID valid signal to the relay board TKB provided on the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3, where it is serialized together with other information as a door frame side information signal. This door frame side information signal is transmitted to the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 via the drawer connectors electrically connected between the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4 and the terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4. However, instead of this, the ID valid signal may be output to another frame side decorative board rather than to the relay board TKB provided on the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3. In other words, the compatibility (integrity) of the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) may be configured not to be communicated to the peripheral control board 1510. Figure 318 shows an example of a modified circuit of Figure 316. The circuit in Fig. 318 is basically the same as that in Fig. 316, but differs in that it has multiple LED drivers with external address setting circuits and output current setting circuits, and that the output destination of the ID valid signal is different. Here, the differences will be explained. Note that the same reference numerals are used in Fig. 318 for the same parts as in Fig. 316.

In addition to the LED driver WIDCa, the frame-side decorative board WKB also has LED drivers WIDCaa to WIDCan (multiple LED drivers). As described above, the light-emitting information signal and light-emitting information clock signal from the peripheral control board 1510 are input to the frame-side decorative board WKB via the drawer connectors (UDRW, UDRW) mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4. This is electrically connected to the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors (UDRW, UDRW) mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5, and to the terminals of the two main frame-side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame-side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4. The light emission information signal and light emission information clock signal from the peripheral control board 1510 input to the frame side decorative board WKB are input to the SDA terminal and SCLK terminal of each LED driver, LED driver WIDCaa, and LED drivers WIDCaaa to WIDCan (multiple LED drivers), and then transmitted to other subsequent frame side decorative boards. Each LED driver WIDCaa, and LED drivers WIDCaaa to WIDCan (multiple LED drivers) is assigned a unique self-identification code (ID) that is unique and cannot be duplicated.

As described above, the RST terminal of LED driver WIDCa is electrically connected to the ground (GND, circuit ground) of the frame-side decorative board WKB. In contrast, the RST terminals of LED drivers WIDCaa to WIDCan (multiple LED drivers) receive an ID valid signal from the inverted P=Q terminal of comparator circuit WIDCb, which is then transmitted to other subsequent frame-side decorative boards. When the logic of the ID valid signal is set to valid logic (logic LOW), as described above, it conveys a determination result that the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) is compatible (matched). On the other hand, when the logic of the ID valid signal is set to invalid logic (logic HI), it conveys a determination result that the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) is not compatible (matched).

In other words, if the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) is not compatible (matched) and the logic of the ID valid signal is set to invalid logic (logic HI), the voltage applied to the RST terminals of LED driver WIDCaa to LED driver WIDCan (multiple LED drivers) is raised to the logic HI side, resetting LED driver WIDCaa to LED driver WIDCan (multiple LED drivers), and also resetting the LED drivers provided on the subsequent frame side decorative board. On the other hand, when the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) is compatible (matched) and the logic of the ID valid signal is set to valid logic (logic LOW), the voltage applied to the RST terminals of LED drivers WIDCaa to WIDCan (multiple LED drivers) is pulled down to the logic LOW side, releasing the reset state of LED drivers WIDCaa to WIDCan (multiple LED drivers), and also releasing the reset state of the LED drivers provided on the subsequent frame-side decorative board.

As a result, if the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) is not compatible (matched), LED driver WIDCaaa to LED driver WIDCan (multiple LED drivers) are reset, and the LED drivers provided on the subsequent frame-side decorative board are also reset, causing the LED elements controlled by each LED driver to be turned off. Although the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 cannot obtain a determination result regarding the compatibility (matching) of the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units), it is able to prevent the door frame unit from continuing the illumination effect even if the effect is progressing. Furthermore, if the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) is not compatible (aligned), the door frame unit will turn off, thereby notifying game hall staff and other attendants, as well as the worker installing the game board 5 in the main frame 4, whether the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit (one or more of the door frame units) is compatible (aligned).

[Replacement of LED driver with serial-parallel conversion circuit]
Next, referring to Fig. 319, we will explain the case where the LED driver WIDCa constituting the ID comparison circuit WIDC provided in the frame-side decorative board WKB shown in Fig. 316 is replaced with a serial-parallel conversion circuit. Fig. 319 is a circuit diagram showing an example where the LED driver constituting the ID comparison circuit provided in the frame-side decorative board shown in Fig. 316 is replaced with a serial-parallel conversion circuit. In Fig. 319, the various terminals of the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa' that have the same functions as the LED driver WIDCa in Fig. 316 are indicated by the same reference numerals. Here, we will mainly explain the serial-parallel conversion circuit, and will omit some explanations of parts that have the same reference numerals as the LED driver WIDCaa. In FIG. 316, the 24 output terminals OUT0 to OUT23 of the LED driver WIDCa are constant current outputs whose maximum current is set by the output current setting circuit WIDCc, whereas the 8 output terminals OUT0 to OUT7 of the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa′ are not constant current outputs whose maximum current is set by the output current setting circuit WIDCc, but are determined by the absolute maximum rated output current of the logic IC.

The serial-to-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa' is an electronic component that is primarily composed of multiple flip-flop circuits (8 flip-flop circuits) on a chip that can be daisy-chained. It is a circuit that can convert (restore) externally input serial data to parallel data and output it from eight output terminals, OU0 terminal to OUT7 terminal.

The SDA terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa', receives a light-emitting information signal, which is serial data from the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the gaming board 5. When the gaming board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the terminals of the lower gaming board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the gaming board 5 are electrically connected to the terminals of the two main frame drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4, and are input via these drawer connectors.

The SCLK terminal, which is the clock signal input terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa', receives the light emitting information clock signal, which is the clock signal for transmitting the light emitting information signal from the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the gaming board 5. When the gaming board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the terminals of the lower gaming board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the gaming board 5 are electrically connected to the terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4, and are input via these drawer connectors.

The latch signal from the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the gaming board 5 is input to the LAT terminal, which is the latch signal input terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa', via this drawer connector, by electrically connecting the terminals of the lower gaming board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the gaming board 5 when the gaming board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, and the terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4. When the latch signal logic of each flip-flop circuit in the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa' is parallel operation logic (logic LOW, electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground)), it sequentially shifts the information (serial data) taken in from the SDA terminal at the rising edge of the light-emitting information clock signal input to the SCLK terminal, and outputs the serial data from the SO terminal, which is the serial data output terminal, to multiple subsequent serial-parallel conversion circuits daisy-chained with this serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa' (for example, other serial-parallel conversion circuits provided in the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa' or multiple subsequent serial-parallel conversion circuits daisy-chained with other frame-side decorative boards). On the other hand, when the latch signal logic is shift operation logic that is the inverse of the parallel operation logic (logic HIGH, electrically connected to +5V), it converts the information taken in at this time (information compared by the comparator circuit WIDCb) into parallel data and outputs it from each of the eight output terminals, OUT0 to OUT7.

The inverted G terminal (shown in the diagram as a solid line above the letter "G"), which is the enable terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa', is electrically connected to the ground (GND, circuit ground) of the frame-side decorative board WKB. The inverted CLR terminal (shown in the diagram as a solid line above the letter "CLR"), which is the reset terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa', is electrically connected to +5V.

The light emission information signal input to the SDA terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa' based on the light emission information clock signal input to the SCLK terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa' is composed of light emission data. Regarding the light emission data for the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa', information compared by the comparator circuit WIDCb is output as light emission data from the peripheral control board 1510. The light emission data for the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa' is output from the peripheral control board 1510 following the light emission data for multiple subsequent serial-parallel conversion circuits daisy-chained with the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa'. Note that if the subsequent multiple serial-parallel conversion circuits daisy-chained with the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa' drive electrical drive sources (solenoids, stepping motors) in addition to illuminating various LEDs, the drive data for the electrical drive sources is output as light emission data from the peripheral control board 1510. In other words, the light emission information signal output from the peripheral control board 1510 includes not only light emission data for the various LEDs, but also information compared by the comparator circuit WIDCb, and may also include drive data for the electrical drive source.

The latch signal, light emission information clock signal, and light emission information signal from the SO terminal, which is the daisy chain connection terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa', are transmitted from this frame-side decorative board WKB to other frame-side decorative boards. If this frame-side decorative board WKB has a subsequent serial-parallel conversion circuit daisy chain connected to the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa', the latch signal and light emission information clock signal are input along with the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa', and the light emission information signal from the SO terminal, which is the daisy chain connection terminal of the serial-parallel conversion circuit WIDCa', is input to the SDA terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the subsequent serial-parallel conversion circuit. The light emission information signal from the SO terminal of this subsequent serial-parallel conversion circuit is output to the other frame-side decorative board.

In this way, by replacing the LED driver WIDCa that makes up the ID comparison circuit WIDC on the frame-side decorative board WKB with a serial-parallel conversion circuit, it becomes necessary to include an ID code in the light-emitting information signal that indicates which LED driver it corresponds to.

[Configuration in which each door frame unit has a self-identification code]
316 and 317, as described above, the door frame 3 is equipped with door frame units (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame units") such as the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, the tray unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450, and one of the decorative boards (hereinafter referred to as the "frame side decorative board") provided on a specific one of the door frame units (one or more of the door frame units) has a self-identification code (ID) that can identify itself, and is equipped with an ID comparison circuit WIDC that can determine the compatibility (matching) of the combination of the game board 5 and a specific one of the door frame units (one or more of the door frame units) and output the determination result. In other words, one ID comparison circuit WIDC is provided for a specific one of the door frame units (one or more of the door frame units). Here, a configuration in which each door frame unit that is the subject of judgment as to compatibility (matching) with the game board 5 has a self-identification code (ID) will be described with reference to Figures 320 and 321. Figure 320 is a schematic diagram showing an outline of the allocation of each unit, and Figure 321 is a circuit diagram showing an example of an ID output circuit in each unit. In the following, we will explain how all door frame units (in this example, all of the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450) are used to determine whether they are compatible (matched) with the game board 5, and how each is given a self-identification code (ID). However, some door frame units (for example, the door frame left side unit 420 and tray unit 200) may not be used to determine whether they are compatible with the game board 5. In this case, some of the door frame units (for example, the door frame left side unit 420 and tray unit 200) that are not used to determine whether they are compatible with the game board 5 may not be given self-identification codes (IDs), and only the door frame units (for example, the door frame right side unit 430 and door frame top unit 450) that are used to determine whether they are compatible with the game board 5 may be given self-identification codes (IDs).

The door frame unit is composed of a door frame left side unit 420, a door frame right side unit 430, a tray unit 200, and a door frame top unit 450. Each unit can be attached and detached from the door frame 3, allowing for changes to the design or gaming specifications to be installed. As mentioned above, the relationship between the game board 5 and the door frame 3 must be submitted to and approved by the application agency. However, human error when replacing the door frame unit may result in the relationship (combination) between the game board 5 and the door frame 3 differing from that submitted and approved by the application agency, which would undesirably result in a pachinko machine being installed in the gaming hall that differs from the specifications submitted and approved by the application agency.

Therefore, it is possible to consider a configuration in which one of the decorative boards provided in each unit of the door frame unit has a self-identification code (ID) that allows it to identify itself, and an ID comparison circuit is provided that can determine the compatibility (matching) of the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit and output the determination result.

Here, as shown in Figure 320, the door frame units are assigned as four units, Unit A to Unit D, with the tray unit 200 as Unit A, the door frame right side unit 430 as Unit B, the door frame top unit 450 as Unit C, and the door frame left side unit 420 as Unit D.

One of the decorative boards provided in Unit A (hereinafter referred to as "frame-side decorative board A") is equipped with a parallel-serial conversion circuit UAa of an ID output circuit that can identify itself.

One of the decorative boards provided in Unit B (hereinafter referred to as "frame-side decorative board B") is equipped with a parallel-serial conversion circuit UBa of an ID output circuit that can identify itself.

One of the decorative boards provided in Unit C (hereinafter referred to as "frame-side decorative board C") is equipped with a parallel-serial conversion circuit UCa of an ID output circuit that can identify itself.

One of the decorative boards provided in Unit D (hereinafter referred to as the "frame-side decorative board D") is equipped with a parallel-serial conversion circuit UDa of an ID output circuit that can identify itself.

The parallel-serial conversion circuits UAa to UDa of the ID output circuit provided on frame-side decorative boards A to D, respectively, are the same circuit as the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC shown in Figure 305, and explanations of each terminal, parts with identical circuit configurations, and operations will be omitted here.

The ID setting terminals of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAa of the ID output circuit provided on frame-side decorative board A are electrically connected to +5V at the A, B, C, D, E, F, and G terminals, and to ground (GND, circuit ground) at the H terminal. In other words, the ID of frame-side decorative board A (i.e., the ID of Unit A, which is the dish unit 200) is expressed as 8 bits wide, with the A terminal as the most significant bit and the H terminal as the least significant bit, as 11111110B (the letter "B" represents binary), and expressed in hexadecimal as FEH (the letter "H" represents hexadecimal).

The ID setting terminals of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UBa of the ID output circuit provided on frame-side decorative board B are electrically connected to +5V at the A, B, C, D, E, and F terminals, and to ground (GND, circuit ground) at the G and H terminals. In other words, the ID of frame-side decorative board B (i.e., the ID of Unit B, the door frame right-side unit 430), expressed as an 8-bit width with the A terminal as the most significant bit and the H terminal as the least significant bit, is 11111100B (the letter "B" represents a binary number), and expressed in hexadecimal as FCH (the letter "H" represents a hexadecimal number).

The ID setting terminals of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UCa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative board C are electrically connected to +5V at the A, B, C, D, and E terminals, and to ground (GND, circuit ground) at the F, G, and H terminals. In other words, the ID of the frame-side decorative board C (i.e., the ID of Unit C, the door frame top unit 450), expressed as an 8-bit width with the A terminal as the most significant bit and the H terminal as the least significant bit, is 11111000B (the letter "B" represents a binary number), and expressed in hexadecimal as F8H (the letter "H" represents a hexadecimal number).

The ID setting terminals of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UDa of the ID output circuit provided on frame-side decorative board D are electrically connected to +5V at terminals A, B, C, and D, and to ground (GND, circuit ground) at terminals E, F, G, and H. In other words, the ID of frame-side decorative board D (i.e., the ID of Unit D, the door frame left-side unit 420), expressed as an 8-bit width with terminal A as the most significant bit and terminal H as the least significant bit, is 11110000B (the letter "B" represents a binary number), and expressed in hexadecimal as F0H (the letter "H" represents a hexadecimal number).

The S/inverted L terminals (shown by a solid line above the letter "L" in the diagram) of the parallel-serial conversion circuits UAa to UDa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative boards A to D are shifted based on the compatibility determination clock signal input to the CK terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuits UAa to UDa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative boards A to D, and each flip-flop circuit of the parallel-serial conversion circuits UAa to UDa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative boards A to D is set to the eight input terminals A to H. When the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 are electrically connected to the terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4, and the compatibility determination switch signal from the peripheral control board 1510 is input via this drawer connector.

The SI terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UDa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative board D of Unit D, the door frame left-side unit 420, is electrically connected to the ground (GND, circuit ground) of the frame-side decorative board D, and the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UDa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative board D of Unit D, the door frame left-side unit 420, is electrically connected to the SI terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UCa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative board C of Unit C, the door frame top unit 450 (this may be electrically connected via electrical wiring (harness) or via the drawer connector). This daisy-chain connects the parallel-serial conversion circuit UDa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative board D of Unit D, the door frame left-side unit 420, and the parallel-serial conversion circuit UCa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative board C of Unit C, the door frame top unit 450.

The inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UCa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative board C of Unit C, the door frame top unit 450, is electrically connected to the SI terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UBa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative board B of Unit B, the door frame right-side unit 430 (this may be electrically connected via electrical wiring (harness) or via a drawer connector). This results in a daisy-chain connection between the parallel-serial conversion circuit UCa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative board C of Unit C, the door frame top unit 450, and the parallel-serial conversion circuit UBa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative board B of Unit B, the door frame right-side unit 430.

The inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UBa of the ID output circuit provided on frame-side decorative board B in Unit B, the door frame right-side unit 430, is electrically connected to the SI terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAa of the ID output circuit provided on frame-side decorative board A in Unit A, the dish unit 200 (this may be electrically connected via electrical wiring (harness) or via the drawer connector). As a result, the parallel-serial conversion circuit UBa of the ID output circuit provided on frame-side decorative board B in Unit B, the door frame right-side unit 430, and the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAa of the ID output circuit provided on frame-side decorative board A in Unit A, the dish unit 200, are daisy-chain connected.

In this way, the parallel-serial conversion circuit UDa of the ID output circuit provided on frame-side decorative board D of Unit D, the left door frame unit 420, to the parallel-serial conversion circuit UCa of the ID output circuit provided on frame-side decorative board C of Unit C, the top door frame unit 450, to the parallel-serial conversion circuit UBa of the ID output circuit provided on frame-side decorative board B of Unit B, the right frame unit 430, and finally to the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAa of the ID output circuit provided on frame-side decorative board A of Unit A, the dish unit 200, are daisy-chain connected.

Since each flip-flop circuit of the four parallel-serial conversion circuits UAa to UDa shifts sequentially at the rising edge of the compatibility determination clock signal input to the CK terminal (i.e., information input to the A terminal → information input to the B terminal → information input to the C terminal → information input to the D terminal → information input to the E terminal → information input to the F terminal → information input to the G terminal → information input to the H terminal → serial data is output by shifting one bit at a time from the non-inverted QH terminal and inverted QH terminal), the 8-bit shift register of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAa, the 8-bit shift register of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UBa, and the parallel The parallel-serial conversion circuit UCa operates as an 8-bit shift register, and the parallel-serial conversion circuit UDa operates as an 8-bit shift register, and the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAa outputs an ID code signal as serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 via the drawer connectors, which are electrically connected to the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, and to the terminals of the two main frame drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4.

As described above, the tray unit 200 is equipped with the presentation operation unit 300. Therefore, during the presentation operation unit information acquisition process of step S1108 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 267, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 sets and outputs the logic of the compatibility determination switching signal input to the S/inverted L terminal to operate in parallel, then serial, and then outputs a compatibility determination clock signal to acquire an ID code signal and obtain a determination result regarding the compatibility (integrity) of the combination of the game board 5 and door frame unit.

The timing for obtaining the judgment results regarding the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the gaming board 5 and the door frame unit may be performed only the first time after power is turned on, using the performance operation unit information acquisition process described above, or it may be performed constantly or intermittently using the performance operation unit information acquisition process described above after power is turned on. By constantly or intermittently obtaining the judgment results regarding the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the gaming board 5 and the door frame unit using the performance operation unit information acquisition process described above after power is turned on, it is possible to check whether the transmission path from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame side decorative board WKB is affected by noise, depending on the judgment results.

In addition, the timing for obtaining a judgment result regarding the compatibility (matching) of the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit may be the ID judgment process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 309, performed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 only the first time after power is turned on.

In addition, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the gaming board 5 and the door frame unit is not compatible (matched) based on the results of its determination of the compatibility (matching) of the combination of the gaming board 5 and the door frame unit, it may take error response 1 (ID error 1 response) shown in Figures 310 to 312 or Figures 313 to 315 on the entire door frame unit, or it may take error response 1 (ID error 1 response) shown in Figures 310 to 312 or Figures 313 to 315 on units of the door frame unit that are not compatible (matched) (for example, Unit A to Unit D, and then Unit C (door frame top unit 450)).

[Configuration in which each door frame unit has a manufacturer identification code along with a self-identification code]
The door frame 3 can be configured to be compatible with multiple manufacturers. In this case, if the self-identification codes (IDs) assigned to each unit of the door frame unit by one manufacturer happen to match the self-identification codes (IDs) assigned to each unit of the door frame unit by another manufacturer, when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, the control board may determine that the relationship (combination) between the game board 5 and the door frame 3 is the same as that submitted to the application organization and approved, even though it is different from that which was submitted to the application organization and approved. This is undesirable, as it would result in a pachinko machine being installed in the game hall that differs from the specifications submitted to the application organization and approved.

As such, it is possible to consider a configuration in which each door frame unit has a manufacturer identification code (manufacturer identification value) in addition to a self-identification code (ID), and an ID comparison circuit is provided that can determine the compatibility (matching) of the combination of the game board 5 and the door frame unit and output the determination result. Here, a configuration in which each door frame unit has a manufacturer identification code (manufacturer identification value) and a self-identification code (ID) will be described with reference to Figure 322. Figure 322 is a circuit diagram showing an example of a circuit in which the ID output circuit in each unit of Figure 321 further includes a manufacturer identification code (manufacturer identification value). Figure 322 is basically the same circuit as the parallel-serial conversion circuits UAa to UDa of the ID output circuit provided on frame-side decorative boards A to D in Figure 321, and therefore, explanations of each terminal, parts with identical circuit configurations, and operation will be omitted here.

Parallel-serial conversion circuits UAap-UDap are provided downstream of the parallel-serial conversion circuits UAa-UDa of the ID output circuits provided on frame-side decorative boards A-D, respectively. A manufacturer's identification code (manufacturer's identification value) is set in the parallel-serial conversion circuits UAap-UDap.

Specifically, the ID setting terminals of the parallel-serial conversion circuits UAap-UDap, which are located downstream of the parallel-serial conversion circuits UAa-UDa of the ID output circuits provided on frame-side decorative boards A-D, respectively, are electrically connected to the A, B, C, and E terminals (+5V), while the D, F, G, and H terminals are electrically connected to ground (GND, circuit ground). In other words, the manufacturer identification codes of frame-side decorative boards A-D (i.e., the manufacturer identification codes (manufacturer identification values) of Units A-D) are expressed as 8-bit widths with the A terminal as the most significant bit and the H terminal as the least significant bit, resulting in 11101000B (the letter "B" represents binary), and in hexadecimal notation, E8H (the letter "H" represents hexadecimal).

The S/inverted L terminals (shown by a solid line above the letter "L" in the diagram) of the parallel-serial conversion circuits UAa to UDa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative boards A to D and the subsequent parallel-serial conversion circuits UAap to UDap are shifted based on the compatibility determination clock signal input to the CK terminals of the parallel-serial conversion circuits UAa to UDa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative boards A to D and the subsequent parallel-serial conversion circuits UAap to UDap. Each flip-flop circuit Aap to UDap switches between parallel operation, which takes in information set in the eight input terminals A to H, and the compatibility determination switch signal from the peripheral control board 1510 is input via this drawer connector by electrically connecting the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, and the terminals of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4.

The SI terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UDap subsequent to the ID output circuit provided on frame-side decorative board D in Unit D, the door frame left-side unit 420, is electrically connected to the ground (GND, circuit ground) of frame-side decorative board D, and the inverted QH terminal of this subsequent parallel-serial conversion circuit UDap is electrically connected to the SI terminal of the preceding parallel-serial conversion circuit UDa. The inverted QH terminal of this preceding parallel-serial conversion circuit UDa is electrically connected to the SI terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UCap subsequent to the parallel-serial conversion circuit UCa of the ID output circuit provided on frame-side decorative board C in Unit C, the door frame top unit 450 (this may be electrically connected via electrical wiring (harness) or via a drawer connector). This results in a daisy chain connection from the parallel-serial conversion circuit UDap at the rear of the ID output circuit provided on the frame side decorative board D provided on Unit D, the door frame left side unit 420, to the parallel-serial conversion circuit UDa at the front of the ID output circuit provided on the frame side decorative board D provided on Unit D, the door frame left side unit 420, and finally to the parallel-serial conversion circuit UCap at the rear of the ID output circuit provided on the frame side decorative board C provided on Unit C, the door frame top unit 450.

The inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UCap, which is the downstream side of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative board C provided on Unit C, the door frame top unit 450, is electrically connected to the SI terminal of the upstream parallel-serial conversion circuit UCa. The inverted QH terminal of this upstream parallel-serial conversion circuit UCa is electrically connected to the SI terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UBap, which is the downstream side of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UBa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative board B provided on Unit B, the door frame right-side unit 430 (this may be electrically connected via electrical wiring (harness) or via a drawer connector). This results in a daisy chain connection from the parallel-serial conversion circuit UCap at the rear of the ID output circuit provided on the frame side decorative board C provided on Unit C, the door frame top unit 450, to the parallel-serial conversion circuit UCa at the front of the ID output circuit provided on the frame side decorative board C provided on Unit C, the door frame top unit 450, and to the parallel-serial conversion circuit UBap at the rear of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UBa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame side decorative board B provided on Unit B, the door frame right side unit 430.

The inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UBap subsequent to the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative board B of Unit B, the door frame right-side unit 430, is electrically connected to the SI terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UBa preceding it. The inverted QH terminal of this parallel-serial conversion circuit UBa preceding it is electrically connected to the SI terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAap subsequent to the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative board A of Unit A, the dish unit 200 (this may be electrically connected via electrical wiring (harness) or via a drawer connector). This results in a daisy chain connection from the parallel-serial conversion circuit UBap at the rear of the ID output circuit provided on the frame side decorative board B of Unit B, the door frame right side unit 430, to the parallel-serial conversion circuit UBa at the front of the ID output circuit provided on the frame side decorative board B of Unit B, the door frame right side unit 430, and finally to the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAap at the rear of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame side decorative board A of Unit A, the dish unit 200.

The inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAap, which is the subsequent stage of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative board A provided on Unit A, which is the dish unit 200, is electrically connected to the SI terminal of the preceding parallel-serial conversion circuit UAa. As a result, the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAap, which is the subsequent stage of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative board A provided on Unit A, which is the dish unit 200, and the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAa, which is the preceding stage of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAa of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative board A provided on Unit A, which is the dish unit 200, are daisy-chain connected.

In this way, from the parallel-serial conversion circuit UDap at the rear of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative board D provided on Unit D, which is the door frame left-side unit 420, to the parallel-serial conversion circuit UDa at the front of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative board D provided on Unit D, which is the door frame left-side unit 420, the parallel-serial conversion circuit UCap at the rear of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative board C provided on Unit C, which is the door frame top unit 450, the parallel-serial conversion circuit UCa at the front of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative board C provided on Unit C, which is the door frame top unit 450, and the parallel-serial conversion circuit UCa at the front of the ID output circuit provided on the frame-side decorative board C provided on Unit C, which is the door frame right-side unit 430. The parallel-serial conversion circuit UBap is connected in the subsequent stage of the ID output circuit provided in the frame-side decorative board B provided in Unit B, which is the door frame right-side unit 430; the parallel-serial conversion circuit UBa is connected in the previous stage of the ID output circuit provided in the frame-side decorative board B provided in Unit B, which is the door frame right-side unit 430; the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAap is connected in the subsequent stage of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAa of the ID output circuit provided in the frame-side decorative board A provided in Unit A, which is the dish unit 200; and the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAa is connected in the previous stage of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAa of the ID output circuit provided in the frame-side decorative board A provided in Unit A, which is the dish unit 200, all connected in a daisy chain.

The flip-flop circuits of the eight parallel-serial conversion circuits UAap, UAa, UBap, UBa, UCap, UCa, UDap, and UDa shift sequentially at the rising edge of the compatibility determination clock signal input to the CK terminal (that is, information input to the A terminal → information input to the B terminal → information input to the C terminal → information input to the D terminal → information input to the E terminal → information input to the F terminal → information input to the G terminal → information input to the H terminal → shift one bit at a time from the non-inverted QH terminal and inverted QH terminal to output serial data), so the 8-bit shift register of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAap, the 8-bit shift register of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAa, the 8-bit shift register of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UBap, and the 8-bit shift register of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UBa The circuit operates as a 64-bit shift register consisting of an 8-bit shift register using the parallel-serial conversion circuit UCap, an 8-bit shift register using the parallel-serial conversion circuit UCa, an 8-bit shift register using the parallel-serial conversion circuit UDap, and an 8-bit shift register using the parallel-serial conversion circuit UDa. An ID code signal is output as serial data from the inverting QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit UAa to the peripheral control board 1510 via the drawer connectors, which are electrically connected to the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW and UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, and to the terminals of the two main frame drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4.

[ID error determination switch]
Of the left-side gaming board 5AL and the right-side gaming board 5AR that make up the split gaming board 5A shown in Figure 302, the peripheral control board 1510 of the left-side gaming board 5AL acquires an ID from the ID code signal transmitted from each ID output circuit at a predetermined timing after power-on and determines whether the combination of the presentation operation unit provided in the door frame 3 and the split gaming board is compatible (matched). This determination result can be triggered by pressing the pressing operation portion of the ID error determination switch. Figure 323 is a schematic front view (a) of a split gaming board provided with an ID error determination switch, and a schematic rear view (b) of the split gaming board provided with an ID error determination switch. Note that in Figures 323(a) and (b), components similar to those in Figures 302(a) and (b) are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions are omitted.

Furthermore, the main control board 1310 in Figure 302(b) is provided with a setting switch 1311a, whereas the main control board 1310 in Figure 323(b) is not provided with a setting switch; and the main control board 1310 in Figure 302(b) is not provided with an ID error determination switch, whereas the main control board 1310 in Figure 323(b) is provided with an ID error determination switch 1310v.

The ID error determination switch 1310v provided on the main control board 1310 has its pressing operation part exposed (not shown) from the cover of the main control board box 1320 described above. When an attendant such as a game hall staff member presses the pressing operation part of the ID error determination switch 1310v, a detection signal from the ID error determination switch 1310v is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the system of the main control board 1310 and repeatedly performs the main control side main processing in the main control side power-on processing shown in Figure 256 and the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 257.

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the pressing operation section of the ID error determination switch 1310v has been pressed based on the detection signal from the ID error determination switch 1310v during the switch input processing of step S104 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 257 (specifically, the logic of the detection signal from the ID error determination switch 1310v includes operation logic and non-operation logic, and the main control MPU 1310a determines that the pressing operation section of the ID error determination switch 1310v has been pressed when operation logic is input, and determines that the pressing operation section of the ID error determination switch 1310v has not been pressed when non-operation logic, which is the inverted operation logic, is input), the main control MPU 1310a sends an ID error determination result notification start command to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command sending processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 257.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 starts up the system of the peripheral control board 1510 and repeatedly performs the peripheral control unit regular processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 309, the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing shown in Figure 266, and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 267 (if there is a command from the main control board 1310, it also performs the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing shown in Figure 268).

The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 309. In this ID determination process, in order to obtain the ID of the right-side game board and the ID of the presentation operation unit, an ID acquisition clock signal (an ID acquisition clock signal dedicated to the right-side game board) is output to the right-side game board, and an ID acquisition clock signal (an ID acquisition clock signal dedicated to the presentation operation unit) is output to the presentation operation unit. The peripheral control IC 1510a acquires the ID code signal from the right-hand gaming board (ID code signal dedicated to the right-hand gaming board) and the ID code signal from the presentation operation unit (ID code signal dedicated to the presentation operation unit) via separate serial systems, and determines (compares) the combination of the split gaming boards (that is, the combination of the right-hand gaming board (a board not equipped with a microprocessor) and the left-hand gaming board (a peripheral control board 1510 or main control board 1310 equipped with a microprocessor)) by referring to a combination table (Fig. 308) pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM, and determines (compares) the combination of the presentation operation unit and the split gaming board by referring to a combination table (Fig. 308) pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM.

The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives the ID error determination result notification start command from the main control board 1310 in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing shown in Figure 268, and analyzes it in the received command analysis processing of step S1022 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 309.This triggers the peripheral control IC 1510a to start notifying the ID error determination result.When the determination result made on the combination of divided game boards in the ID determination processing of step S1003 is incompatible (inconsistent), that is, when the determination result made on the combination of the right game board (a board not equipped with a microprocessor) and the left game board (a peripheral control board 1510 or main control board 1310 equipped with a microprocessor) is incompatible (inconsistent), the peripheral control IC 1510a passes a command classified as a notification display to the warning processing of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing. As a result, in the warning process of step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads (extracts) from the peripheral control ROM the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, and the electrical drive source schedule data, etc., as a mode indicating incompatibility (mismatch), and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, thereby setting various processes related to the presentation, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 notifies that a corresponding error has occurred among Error Responses 1 to 9 as the behavior of the pachinko machine during the error shown in Figure 308(c). Note that when the determination result made on the combination of divided game boards is compatible (matched), the behavior of the pachinko machine during the error shown in Figure 308(c) is normal operation (no error response), and since the countermeasure is "none," there is no special notification mode for normal operation (no error response). In other words, if the device is operating normally (no error handling is performed), no notification will be given and the dedicated notification sound will not be played from the speaker.

In this way, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 makes the judgment result regarding the combination of divided game boards in the ID judgment processing of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 309, unless it receives the ID error judgment result notification start command from the main control board 1310 in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing shown in Figure 268 and analyzes it in the received command analysis processing of step S1022 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 309, it will not be able to pass the command classified as notification display to the warning processing of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing, and will not be able to start notifying the ID error judgment result. In other words, even if error response 1 through error response 9 has occurred, the error notification start time for notifying the user of this can be changed by an attendant, such as a game hall staff member, pressing the pressing operation portion of the ID error determination switch 1310v until the ID error determination result notification start command is received (analyzed) from the main control board 1310.

In addition, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives the ID error determination result notification start command from the main control board 1310 in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing shown in Figure 268, and analyzes it in the received command analysis processing of step S1022 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 309.This triggers the peripheral control IC 1510a to start notifying the ID error determination result.If the determination result made in the ID determination processing of step S1003 regarding the combination of the presentation operation unit and the divided game board is incompatible (inconsistent), the peripheral control IC 1510a passes the command classified as a notification display to the warning processing of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing. As a result, in the warning process of step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads (extracts) from the peripheral control ROM the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, and the electrical drive source schedule data, etc., as a mode indicating incompatibility (mismatch), and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, thereby setting various processes related to the effects, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 notifies that a corresponding error has occurred among error responses 1 to 9 as the behavior of the pachinko machine during the error shown in Figure 308 (c). Note that when the determination result made on the combination of the effect operation unit and the divided game board is compatible (matched), the behavior of the pachinko machine during the error shown in Figure 308 (c) is normal operation (no error response), and since the countermeasure is "none," there is no special notification mode for normal operation (no error response). In other words, if the device is operating normally (no error handling is performed), no notification will be given and the dedicated notification sound will not be played from the speaker.

In this way, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs the determination result on the combination of the presentation operation unit and the divided game board in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 309, unless it receives the ID error determination result notification start command from the main control board 1310 in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing shown in FIG. 268 and analyzes it in the received command analysis processing of step S1022 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 309, it cannot use this as an opportunity to pass the command classified as notification display to the warning processing of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit normal processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing, and it cannot start notifying the ID error determination result.

In addition, the main control board 1310 is provided with an ID error judgment switch 1310v, but the ID error judgment switch 1310v can be replaced with a setting key switch 1311a, which can switch the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 and check the setting values. In this case, a setting key switch 1311a as shown in Figure 302 (b) is provided, and the ID error determination result notification start command from the main control board 1310 is not sent to the peripheral control board 1510, but after inserting the setting key into the setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 and turning it ON, the power switch 630a provided on the power supply board 630 is operated to turn on the power to the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation part of the RWM switch 633d provided on the payout control board 633, thereby starting the setting change process of step S37 in the main control side power-on processing, and based on the setting key inserted into the setting key switch 1311a being turned OFF, the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process of step S238 in the setting change processing is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main circumferential serial data. When the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives a setting change command from the main control board 1310, it uses this as an opportunity to issue a notification if error response 1 to error response 9 occurs, which is the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error as shown in Figure 308 (c). Because the setting key is an important key, only a limited number of people, including the arcade manager, are permitted to possess it, and it is limited to two or three people.

Specifically, after inserting the setting key into the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 in Figure 302 (b) and turning it ON, the power switch 630a on the power supply board 630 is operated to power on the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RWM switch 633d on the payout control board 633. The main control MPU 1310a on the main control board 1310 then transmits the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 of the peripheral control board transmission command transmission process in step S238 of the setting change process shown in Figure 258 to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data. This setting change command is a command that conveys the changed setting value and that the setting value has been stored. When the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting change command, it regards this as the receipt of an ID error determination result notification start command, and uses this as an opportunity to proceed with the process of starting notification of the ID error determination result.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs the setting change process in step S37 during the main control side power-on process, then clears the entire RAM area in step S38, and then performs the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process shown in Figure 257.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 displays, for example, "Power being restored" against a black background on the performance display device 1600 as a startup mode. At this time, "Power being restored" may be followed by "Setting up", or "Setting up" may be displayed instead of "Power being restored". In this case, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the setting change process of step S37 in the main control side power-on processing, it must send a setting change start command to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data, indicating that the setting change is about to begin.

After the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has completed the setting change process of step S37 in the main control side power-on processing, that is, when it receives a setting change command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 recognizes that it has received an ID error determination result notification start command, and using this as an opportunity, if error response 1 to error response 9 has occurred as the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error as shown in Figure 308 (c), it will issue a notification to that effect. In other words, even if Error Response 1 through Error Response 9 occur as a result of the pachinko machine's behavior during an error shown in FIG. 308(c), if the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 and turned ON, causing the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to perform the setting change process of step S37 in the main control side power-on process (until the predetermined period of time until this setting change process is completed has elapsed; in other words, until a setting change command is received (analyzed) from the main control board 1310), the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 will not be able to notify the user that Error Response 1 through Error Response 9 have occurred. In other words, until a setting change command is received (analyzed) from the main control board 1310, the start time of the error notification that notifies the user that Error Response 1 through Error Response 9 have occurred can be changed by operating the setting key held by a limited number of people at the amusement hall.

In contrast, if the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 and turned ON, and then the power switch 630a on the power supply board 630 is operated without pressing the push button on the RWM switch 633d on the payout control board 633, the pachinko machine 1 will be powered on without performing the setting change processing of step S37 in the main control side power-on processing, and without clearing the entire RAM area of step S38, and will then perform the main control side main processing and the main control side timer interrupt processing of Fig. 257. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 will, as a startup mode, display "Power being restored" on the performance display device 1600 against a black background, for example, and will issue a notification to that effect if Error Response 1 to Error Response 9 occurs, which is the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error as shown in Fig. 308(c). In other words, even if the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 and turned ON, if the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 does not perform the setting change process of step S37 in the main control side power-on process, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is able to notify the user that error response 1 to error response 9 has occurred, as shown in Figure 308 (c) as the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error.

In other words, even if the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 and turned ON, if the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 does not perform the setting change process of step S37 in the main control side power-on processing, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 will not be able to notify the user of error response 1 to error response 9 until a predetermined period has elapsed (until a setting change command is received (analyzed) from the main control board 1310), or it will be able to notify the user of this regardless of the predetermined period.

In this way, when the setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310, which serves as the operating unit, is operated, a notification can be issued based on the results of the determination of whether the left gaming board 5AL and the right gaming board 5AR are aligned. This makes it possible to immediately determine if the left gaming board 5AL and the right gaming board 5AR are misaligned, preventing incomplete effects from being executed when the left gaming board 5AL and the right gaming board 5AR are misaligned. This therefore prevents a decline in interest in the game.

[Summary A]
A0:
A gaming machine includes a gaming frame-side component having an outer frame, a main frame attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame attached to the main frame so as to be openable and closable, and a gaming board-side component detachably attached to the gaming frame-side component, wherein the gaming board-side component is composed of a first gaming board-side component and a second gaming board-side component. The first gaming board-side component is composed of multiple boards, including a presentation control board equipped with a microprocessor that executes game presentations. The second gaming board-side component has a specific board that does not have a microprocessor. The specific board has an eigenvalue that can identify it as the second gaming board-side component, and an eigenvalue transmission means that transmits the eigenvalue to the presentation control board. The presentation control board is capable of comparing the eigenvalue transmitted from the eigenvalue transmission means with its own eigenvalue. The first gaming board-side component and the second gaming board-side component are each individually fixed to the gaming frame-side component.

Specifically, for example, pachinko machine 1 comprises an outer frame 2, which is a gaming frame-side component, a door frame 3 that opens and closes the front of the outer frame 2, a main frame 4 that supports the door frame 3 in an openable and closable manner and is attached to the outer frame 2 in an openable and closable manner, and a divided gaming board 5A (Fig. 302), which is a gaming board-side component. The divided gaming board 5A is made up of a left-side gaming board 5AL, which is a first gaming board-side component, and a right-side gaming board 5AR, which is a second gaming board-side component. The left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, is composed of multiple boards including a peripheral control board 1510, which is a presentation control board equipped with a peripheral control IC 1510a, which is a microprocessor that can execute game presentations (a main control unit 1300 that houses the main control board 1310, and a left side drive board unit 1700L (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "left side drive board unit 1700L") that houses various other boards (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted that are attached to various presentation units housed in the left side rear box 3010L, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.). The right-side game board 5AR, which is a component on the second game board side, is equipped with a specific board that does not have a microprocessor (one of the right-side drive board unit 1700R (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "right-side drive board unit 1700R") that houses various boards (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted that are attached to the various performance units housed in the right-side rear box 3010R, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.)). One of the various specific boards is equipped with a self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value that can identify it as the right-side game board 5AR, which is a component on the second game board side, and an ID output circuit IDC (see FIG. 305), which is a unique value transmission means that transmits the unique self-identification code (ID) to the peripheral control board 1510, which is the performance control board.

The peripheral control board 1510, which is the performance control board, is capable of comparing the self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value transmitted from the ID output circuit IDC, which is a unique value transmission means, with its own unique value (combination table (Fig. 308) pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM) in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of Fig. 309.

The left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, are each individually and detachably attached to the main frame 4, which is the gaming frame component.

In this way, the ID output circuit IDC, which is a unique value transmission means provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board side component, transmits a signal of a self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value that can identify the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board side component, to the peripheral control board 1510, which is a presentation control board provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board side component.Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510, which is a presentation control board, can determine the compatibility (matching) of the combination of the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board side component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board side component. This makes it possible to immediately determine when the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, become misaligned, preventing incomplete effects from being executed when the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, are misaligned. This prevents a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

A1:
The game machine includes a game frame-side component having an outer frame, a main frame attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame attached to the main frame so as to be openable and closable, and a game board-side component detachably attached to the game frame-side component. The game board-side component is composed of a first game board-side component and a second game board-side component. The first game board-side component includes a plurality of boards, including a sub-control board equipped with a microprocessor capable of executing game effects. The second game board-side component includes a board not equipped with a microprocessor, a unique value identifying the second game board-side component, and unique value transmission means for transmitting the unique value. Furthermore, the first game board-side component and the second game board-side component are electrically connected and fixed to the game frame-side component. The unique value transmission means is capable of transmitting to the sub-control board using serial communication. The unique value transmission means is electrically connected to the sub-control board of the first game board-side component. The sub-control board can compare the unique value from the unique value transmission means with the unique value it holds.

Specifically, for example, it comprises a main frame 4, which is the gaming frame-side component, and a split gaming board 5A (see Figure 302), which is the gaming board-side component. The split gaming board 5A is composed of a left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board-side component, and a right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board-side component. The left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board-side component, comprises multiple boards (main control unit 1300, which houses the main control board 1310, and left-side drive board unit 1700L (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "left-side drive board unit 1700L"), which houses various other boards (e.g., various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted that are attached to various performance units housed in the left rear box 3010L, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.)) including a peripheral control board 1510, which is a sub-control board equipped with a peripheral control IC 1510a, which is a microprocessor capable of executing game effects. The right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, is equipped with a board that does not have a microprocessor (a right-side drive board unit 1700R (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "right-side drive board unit 1700R") that houses various boards (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted that are attached to the various performance units housed in the right-side rear box 3010R, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.), a self-identification code (ID) which is a unique value that identifies the right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, and an ID output circuit IDC (Fig. 305) which is a unique value transmission means that transmits the unique value self-identification code (ID).

Furthermore, the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, are electrically connected and fixed to the main frame 4, which is the gaming frame component.

The ID output circuit IDC, which is a unique value transmission means, is capable of transmitting to the peripheral control board 1510, which is a sub-control board, using serial communication. The ID output circuit IDC, which is a unique value transmission means, is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, which is a sub-control board of the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board side component. The peripheral control board 1510, which is a sub-control board, is able to compare the self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value from the ID output circuit IDC, which is a unique value transmission means, with its own unique value (combination table (Figure 308) stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM), in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of Figure 309.

In this way, the ID output circuit IDC, which is a unique value transmitting means provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board side component, transmits a unique value, i.e., a self-identification code (ID), which is an unique value that identifies the gaming board as the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board side component, to the peripheral control board 1510, which is a sub-control board provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board side component, using serial communication, so that the peripheral control board 1510, which is a sub-control board, can determine the compatibility (matching) of the combination of the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board side component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board side component. This makes it possible to immediately determine when the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, become misaligned, preventing incomplete effects from being executed when the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, are misaligned. This prevents a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

A2:
Furthermore, the serial communication signal includes a unique value and a signal related to the game presentation generated in the second game board side component, and further comprises a first serial communication means for transmitting and receiving signals between the main control board and the payout control board, and a second serial communication means for transmitting and receiving signals between the first game board side component and the second game board side component, and if the comparison judgment in the first serial communication means is false, balls will not be paid out, and if the comparison judgment in the second serial communication means is false, the decorative presentation of the second game board side component will not be performed.

Specifically, for example, the photo and ID code signal in Figure 306, which is a serial communication signal, includes a self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value, and a signal related to the game presentation generated on the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board side component (a detection signal from a photosensor that detects the positions of various movable bodies and is input to the photosensor information serial output circuit PSO in Figure 306), and further includes a first serial communication means for transmitting and receiving signals between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and a second serial communication means for transmitting and receiving signals between the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board side component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board side component.

If the comparison result in the first serial communication means is false, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 includes a self-identification code (ID) that identifies itself when sending various commands to the control board equipped with a microprocessor. Therefore, when the payout control MPU of the payout control board 633 determines that the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is incompatible (inconsistent) during the command analysis process of step S560 in the payout control main process of the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 263, it sets information indicating that the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is incompatible (inconsistent) in the status information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and sets information to stop the payout operation in the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. This prevents the payout of game balls. In other words, if the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 becomes incompatible (mismatched) due to an operator error, even if the player is able to play and progress in the game, the payout operation will be stopped and no game balls will be paid out to the player. This will allow the player to be notified that some kind of malfunction has occurred with the pachinko machine, and the player can inform an attendant such as a game hall staff member that the pachinko machine is in a state where game balls are not being paid out. This can contribute to the early detection of a mismatch (mismatch) between the combination of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633.

If the comparison judgment by the second serial communication means is false, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 acquires the ID code signal (ID code signal exclusive to the right-side game board) from the right-side game board in the ID judgment processing of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of Figure 309, and judges (compares) the combination of the divided game boards (i.e., the combination of the right-side game board (board not equipped with a microprocessor) and the left-side game board (peripheral control board 1510 or main control board 1310 equipped with a microprocessor)) by referring to the combination table (Figure 308) pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM, and if it judges that there is an incompatibility (mismatch), it passes a command classified as an alert display to the warning processing of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing, as error response 1 (ID error 1 response) of Figures 310 to 315, which becomes State 2: ID error 1 of Figure 308 (c). In the warning process of step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads (extracts) from the peripheral control ROM the schedule data for generating the screen, the schedule data for generating the light emission mode, the schedule data for generating the sound, and the schedule data for the electrical drive source as incompatible (mismatched) data and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, thereby setting various processes related to the presentation. As a result, the various LEDs of the divided game board 5A (various LEDs of the game board) are turned off, and the decorative presentation of the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, is not performed. In other words, if the combination of the left and right game boards that make up the divided game board 5A becomes incompatible (mismatched) due to an operator error, when the pachinko machine is turned on, the various LEDs on the divided game board 5A (various game board LEDs) will turn off and the decorative effects on the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, will no longer be displayed, which can contribute to early detection of an incompatible (mismatched) combination of the left and right game boards.

A3:
Furthermore, if a RAM error and an ID error occur simultaneously, only the RAM error is reported, and no ID error is reported. Also, no LED error is reported in the decorative unit. Specifically, if a RAM error in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and State 2: ID error 1 in Figure 308(c) (Error Response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figures 310 to 315) occur simultaneously, only a report is made to inform the user that a RAM error has occurred, but no report is made to inform the user that State 2: ID error 1 in Figure 308(c) (Error Response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figures 310 to 315) has occurred. This is because if a RAM error occurs in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the progress of the game by the main control MPU 1310a will be forcibly stopped, so in order to notify this, even if state 2: ID error 1 in Figure 308 (c) (error response 1 (corresponding to ID error 1) in Figures 310 to 315) occurs, the RAM error in the main control built-in RAM, which is the most important error, is notified as the highest priority regardless of the occurrence of other errors.

If the ID is determined to be normal within a specified period of time after power-on, no notification is issued. However, if the ID is determined to be abnormal within a specified period of time after power-on, the notification mode may change if the state changes. In the case of an abnormality, the notification mode changes when the state returns to normal. Specifically, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 309, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 does not issue a notification (target method in the same figure: none) if it determines that the ID is normal, i.e., State 1 in FIG. 308(c): ID error 1 (error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in FIGS. 310 to 315), i.e., an abnormal ID, but maintains the notification of this error response 1 (ID error 1 response). If the ID is determined to be normal, i.e., a normal ID, after the countermeasure in FIG. 308(c): replacement with a compatible ID after power-off, the notification is no longer issued. In other words, if the combination of the left and right gaming boards is determined to be normal and a normal ID within a specified period of time after power-on, the state of the combination of the left and right gaming boards will not be determined at all thereafter, and even if the combination of the left and right gaming boards becomes incompatible (inconsistent), no notification will be issued to convey that the ID is abnormal due to the incompatibility (inconsistency). In this way, by limiting the determination of the combination of the left and right gaming boards to within a specified period of time after power-on, this can contribute to reducing the processing load on the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 for the progression of the presentation.

All but a few notifications are terminated. Specifically, for example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of Figure 309 that the ID is State 2: ID error 1 (Error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figures 310 to 315), in other words, an abnormal ID, it saves this as history information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) implemented on the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, it is saved linked to the date and time. Then, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and the correct combination of left and right game boards is attached to the main frame 3, and the pachinko machine 1 is powered on again, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 309 that the ID is State 1: Normal (FIG. 308(c)), i.e., a normal ID, it may display a history of "ID abnormality" on the performance display device or sub-performance display device, and this history may be displayed for a predetermined period of time or until the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. The performance will proceed while the history is displayed.

Once the system has returned to normal, the notification mode will not change even if the system becomes abnormal again. Specifically, for example, to return from an abnormal state to a normal state, the game board must be removed and corrected, at which point the power to the pachinko machine must be shut off (turned off), cutting off the power supply to the peripheral control board, and the game board must be reattached and the pachinko machine must be powered on again. When the pachinko machine is powered on and power is supplied to the peripheral control board, the ID of the performance operation unit can be confirmed (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ID confirmation") by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 309. Therefore, when the pachinko machine is powered on, if the ID is confirmed by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 309 and notification processing is performed, which continues until the pachinko machine is powered off, then there is no need to control the ID confirmation or notification processing thereafter.

In other words, at any timing while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (when the pachinko machine 1 system has completed startup and is ready to proceed with game play and presentation), the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of Figure 309 is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 267, and when the presentation operation unit is attached or detached to or from the tray unit 200 of the door frame 4, if a presentation operation unit that has been determined to have a normal ID even once in the ID determination process that is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is replaced with another presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID (or if a presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID is replaced with a presentation operation unit with a normal ID, and then once determined to have a normal ID in the ID determination process that is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is returned to a presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID), as a result, even if the combination of the presentation operation unit and the divided game board is actually incompatible (inconsistent), the presentation will continue to proceed and no notification will be made that the presentation operation unit has an abnormal ID. Therefore, once the system has returned to normal, the notification mode will not change even if the system becomes abnormal again.

A4:
The first game board side component and the second game board side component are electrically connected by connecting connectors to each other. Specifically, the left game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, and the right game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, are electrically connected to each other via drawer connectors, which are connectors, that is, terminals of the right game board drawer connectors RDRW, RDRW mounted on the right game board drawer connector relay board 5ARDRW of the right game board 5AR, and terminals of the left game board drawer connectors LDRW, LDRW mounted on the left game board drawer connector relay board 5ALDRW of the left game board 5AL. This drawer connector allows automatic electrical connection between the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, and the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, simply by combining them.

[Summary B]
B0:
A gaming machine comprising a game frame-side component having an outer frame, a main frame attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame attached to the main frame so as to be openable and closable, and a game board-side component detachably attached to the game frame-side component, wherein the game board-side component is made up of a first game board-side component and a second game board-side component and is fixed to the game frame-side component. The first game board-side component is made up of multiple boards including a presentation control board equipped with a microprocessor that executes game presentations. The second game board-side component is equipped with a specific board not equipped with a microprocessor. The specific board has a unique value that can identify it as the second game board-side component and a unique value transmission means for signal-transmitting the unique value to the presentation control board. The presentation control board is capable of reporting a first error that occurs when a unique value cannot be received from the second game board side component within a predetermined time, and a second error that occurs when the unique value transmitted from the second game board side component is not a predetermined value.

Specifically, for example, a pachinko machine 1 comprises a main frame 4, which is a gaming frame-side component, and a divided gaming board 5A, shown in Figure 302, which is a gaming board-side component. The divided gaming board 5A is made up of a left-side gaming board 5AL, which is a first gaming board-side component, and a right-side gaming board 5AR, which is a second gaming board-side component, and is fixed to the main frame 4, which is a gaming frame-side component. The left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, is composed of multiple boards including a peripheral control board 1510, which is a presentation control board equipped with a peripheral control IC 1510a, which is a microprocessor that can execute game presentations (a main control unit 1300 that houses the main control board 1310, and a left side drive board unit 1700L (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "left side drive board unit 1700L") that houses various other boards (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted that are attached to various presentation units housed in the left side rear box 3010L, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.). The right-side gaming board 5AR, which is a component on the second gaming board side, is equipped with a specific board that does not have a microprocessor (one of the right-side drive board unit 1700R (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "right-side drive board unit 1700R") that houses various boards (e.g., various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted that are attached to various performance units housed in the right-side rear box 3010R, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.)). One of the various specific boards is equipped with a self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value that can identify it as the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is a component on the second gaming board side, and an ID output circuit IDC (see FIG. 305), which is a unique value transmission means that transmits the unique self-identification code (ID) to the peripheral control board 1510, which is the performance control board.

The peripheral control board 1510, which is the performance control board, is configured to notify the following: the first error, State 8 in Figure 308(c): Error Response 7 in Figures 310 to 315, which occurs when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 does not receive the unique ID code (ID) from the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, within a predetermined time (the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on process in Figure 309), which results in unconnected error 1; and the second error, State 2 in Figure 308(c): Error Response 1 in Figures 310 to 315 (ID error 1 response), which occurs when the unique ID code (ID) is received from the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, and is not a predetermined value.

In other words, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 passes a command classified as a notification display to the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing, as error response 7 in Figures 310 to 315, which corresponds to the first error, State 8 in Figure 308(c): Unconnected Error 1. In the warning process of step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads (extracts) schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, and electrical drive source schedule data from the peripheral control ROM and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC as a mode indicating unconnection, thereby setting various processing related to the presentation.

The command classified as a notification display for Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 response) in Figures 310 to 315, which is State 2: ID Error 1 in Figure 308 (c), which is the second error, is passed to the warning process in step S1024 of the peripheral control unit's regular processing during peripheral control unit power-on processing. In the warning process in step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads (extracts) schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, and electrical drive source schedule data from the peripheral control ROM and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC as incompatible (mismatched) conditions, thereby setting various processing related to the presentation.

In this way, the ID output circuit IDC, which is a unique value transmission means provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board side component, transmits a signal of the self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value that can identify the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board side component, to the peripheral control board 1510, which is the performance control board provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board side component. Therefore, the peripheral control board 1510, which is the performance control board, transmits a signal of the ID output circuit IDC, which is a unique value transmission means provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board side component, to the peripheral control board 1510, which is the performance control board, within a predetermined time (the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is the peripheral control unit If the unique ID code (ID) is not received during the ID determination process in step S1003 of the power-on process, a first error, State 8 in FIG. 308(c): Unconnected Error 1, error response 7 in FIGS. 310-315, can be generated. If the unique ID code (ID) is not received within a predetermined time but is not the predetermined value, a second error, State 2 in FIG. 308(c): ID Error 1, error response 1 in FIGS. 310-315 (ID Error 1 response), can be generated. This makes it possible to immediately determine if the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, are inconsistent, preventing incomplete effects from being executed when the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, are inconsistent. This prevents a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

B1:
The game machine includes a game frame-side component and a game board-side component. The game board-side component is composed of a first game board-side component and a second game board-side component. The first game board-side component includes multiple boards, including a sub-control board equipped with a microprocessor capable of executing game effects. The second game board-side component includes a board not equipped with a microprocessor, a unique value identifying the second game board-side component, and unique value transmitting means for transmitting the unique value. Furthermore, the first game board-side component and the second game board-side component are electrically connected and fixed to the game frame-side component. The first game board-side component includes a first error that occurs when the unique value from the second game board-side component is not received within a predetermined time, and a second error that occurs when the unique value received from the second game board-side component is not the predetermined value.

Specifically, for example, it comprises a main frame 4, which is the gaming frame-side component, and a split gaming board 5A (see Figure 302), which is the gaming board-side component. The split gaming board 5A is composed of a left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board-side component, and a right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board-side component. The left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board-side component, comprises multiple boards (main control unit 1300, which houses the main control board 1310, and left-side drive board unit 1700L (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "left-side drive board unit 1700L"), which houses various other boards (e.g., various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted that are attached to various performance units housed in the left rear box 3010L, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.)) including a peripheral control board 1510, which is a sub-control board equipped with a peripheral control IC 1510a, which is a microprocessor capable of executing game effects. The right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, is equipped with a board that does not have a microprocessor (a right-side drive board unit 1700R (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "right-side drive board unit 1700R") that houses various boards (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted that are attached to the various performance units housed in the right-side rear box 3010R, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.), a self-identification code (ID) which is a unique value that identifies the right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, and an ID output circuit IDC (Fig. 305) which is a unique value transmission means that transmits the unique value self-identification code (ID).

Furthermore, the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, are electrically connected and fixed to the main frame 4, which is the gaming frame component. The work of attaching the gaming board 5 to the main frame 4 and the work of attaching the door frame unit to the door frame 3, which is supported on the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed, are separate tasks. For this reason, when attaching the gaming board 5 to the main frame 4, it is possible that the relationship (combination) between the gaming board 5 and the door frame unit may not be compatible (aligned) due to human error.

The left-hand gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, is equipped with error response 7 in FIGS. 310 to 315, which results in state 8 in FIG. 308(c): unconnected error 1, a first error that occurs when the left-hand gaming board 5AL does not receive a unique ID code (ID) from the right-hand gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, within a predetermined time (the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 309), and error response 1 in FIGS. 310 to 315, which results in state 2 in FIG. 308(c): ID error 1, a second error that occurs when the right-hand gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, receives an ID code (ID), which is a unique value, and it is not a predetermined value.

The left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, i.e., the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, passes a command classified as a notification display to the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing, as error response 7 in Figures 310 to 315, which is the first error, State 8 in Figure 308(c): Unconnected Error 1. In the warning process of step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads (extracts) schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, and electrical drive source schedule data from the peripheral control ROM and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC as modes indicating unconnection, thereby setting various processing related to the effects.

The command classified as a notification display for Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 response) in Figures 310 to 315, which is State 2: ID Error 1 in Figure 308 (c), which is the second error, is passed to the warning process in step S1024 of the peripheral control unit's regular processing during peripheral control unit power-on processing. In the warning process in step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads (extracts) schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, and electrical drive source schedule data from the peripheral control ROM and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC as incompatible (mismatched) conditions, thereby setting various processing related to the presentation.

In this way, the ID output circuit IDC, which is a unique value transmission means provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board side component, transmits a self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value that identifies it as the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board side component, to the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board side component. Therefore, the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board side component, will notify the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board side component, within a predetermined time (the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is the step in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Figure 309). If the unique ID code (ID) is not received during the ID determination process (step S1003), a first error, State 8 in FIG. 308(c): Unconnected Error 1, error response 7 in FIGS. 310-315, can occur. If the unique ID code (ID) received within a predetermined time is not the predetermined value, a second error, State 2 in FIG. 308(c): ID Error 1, can occur. This allows for immediate determination of a mismatch between the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, and prevents incomplete effects from being executed when the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, are mismatched. This prevents a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

B2:
Furthermore, the various ID errors that are second errors (ID errors) (including not only the individual ID errors ID error 1, ID error 2, and ID error 3 shown in Figure 308(c) but also ID errors that are combinations of these) hinder gameplay to a greater extent than the various unconnection errors that are first errors (unconnection errors) (unconnection error 1, unconnection error 2, and unconnection error 3 shown in Figure 308(c)).

Furthermore, the third error (magnetic detection) is resolved after a certain period of time, but the first error (disconnection error) and the second error (ID error) are not resolved even after a certain period of time has passed. Among these various error notifications, the third error (magnetic detection) detects and reports the so-called magnetic interference behavior, and therefore is resolved after a certain period of time has passed. In contrast, the first error (disconnection error) and the second error (ID error) are caused by operator errors. For the first error (disconnection error), the fit of structural components and the connection of the drawer connector must be carefully checked after a power outage, and the second error (ID error) must be replaced with a compatible ID product after a power outage, so they are not resolved even after a certain period of time has passed.

Furthermore, when a second error (ID error) occurs, the decorative effect on the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, is not performed. This is because the second error (ID error) is a work error made by an operator, resulting in an incompatibility (mismatch) between the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component. If the decorative effect on the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, were performed in this state, there is a risk of electrical failure of the right-side gaming board 5AR.

Furthermore, even if a third error (magnetic detection) occurs when a second error (ID error) occurs, the second error (ID error) warning sound remains. In other words, even if a third error (magnetic detection) occurs when a second error (ID error) occurs, as shown in Figures 312 and 315, the audio for Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 response) repeatedly plays the error notification sound and announcement sound. This is because the third error (magnetic detection) detects and notifies the user of the so-called magnetic interference behavior, and is resolved after a certain period of time has passed since the behavior was detected. However, the second error (ID error) is an operator error, and since the second error (ID error) requires replacement with a compatible ID product after the power is cut off, the second error (ID error) warning sound remains even after a certain period of time has passed.

B3:
Furthermore, if a RAM error and an ID error occur simultaneously, only the RAM error is reported, and no ID error is reported. Also, no LED error is reported in the decorative unit. Specifically, if a RAM error in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and State 2: ID error 1 in Figure 308(c) (Error Response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figures 310 to 315) occur simultaneously, only a report is made to inform the user that a RAM error has occurred, but no report is made to inform the user that State 2: ID error 1 in Figure 308(c) (Error Response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figures 310 to 315) has occurred. This is because if a RAM error occurs in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the progress of the game by the main control MPU 1310a will be forcibly stopped, so in order to notify this, even if state 2: ID error 1 in Figure 308 (c) (error response 1 (corresponding to ID error 1) in Figures 310 to 315) occurs, the RAM error in the main control built-in RAM, which is the most important error, is notified as the highest priority regardless of the occurrence of other errors.

If the ID is determined to be normal within a specified period of time after power-on, no notification is issued. However, if the ID is determined to be abnormal within a specified period of time after power-on, the notification mode may change if the state changes. In the case of an abnormality, the notification mode changes when the state returns to normal. Specifically, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 309, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 does not issue a notification (target method in the same figure: none) if it determines that the ID is normal, i.e., State 1 in FIG. 308(c): ID error 1 (error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in FIGS. 310 to 315), i.e., an abnormal ID, but maintains the notification of this error response 1 (ID error 1 response). If the ID is determined to be normal, i.e., a normal ID, after the countermeasure in FIG. 308(c): replacement with a compatible ID after power-off, the notification is no longer issued. In other words, if the combination of the left and right gaming boards is determined to be normal and a normal ID within a specified period of time after power-on, the state of the combination of the left and right gaming boards will not be determined at all thereafter, and even if the combination of the left and right gaming boards becomes incompatible (inconsistent), no notification will be issued to convey that the ID is abnormal due to the incompatibility (inconsistency). In this way, by limiting the determination of the combination of the left and right gaming boards to within a specified period of time after power-on, this can contribute to reducing the processing load on the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 for the progression of the presentation.

All but a few notifications are terminated. Specifically, for example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of Figure 309 that the ID is State 2: ID error 1 (Error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figures 310 to 315), in other words, an abnormal ID, it saves this as history information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) implemented on the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, it is saved linked to the date and time. Then, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and the correct combination of left and right game boards is attached to the main frame 3, and the pachinko machine 1 is powered on again, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 309 that the ID is State 1: Normal (FIG. 308(c)), i.e., a normal ID, it may display a history of "ID abnormality" on the performance display device or sub-performance display device, and this history may be displayed for a predetermined period of time or until the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. The performance will proceed while the history is displayed.

Once the system has returned to normal, the notification mode will not change even if the system becomes abnormal again. Specifically, for example, to return from an abnormal state to a normal state, the game board must be removed and corrected, at which point the power to the pachinko machine must be shut off (turned off), cutting off the power supply to the peripheral control board, and the game board must be reattached and the pachinko machine must be powered on again. When the pachinko machine is powered on and power is supplied to the peripheral control board, the ID of the performance operation unit can be confirmed (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ID confirmation") by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 309. Therefore, when the pachinko machine is powered on, if the ID is confirmed by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 309 and notification processing is performed, which continues until the pachinko machine is powered off, then there is no need to control the ID confirmation or notification processing thereafter.

In other words, at any timing while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (when the pachinko machine 1 system has completed startup and is ready to proceed with game play and presentation), the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of Figure 309 is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 267, and when the presentation operation unit is attached or detached to or from the tray unit 200 of the door frame 4, if a presentation operation unit that has been determined to have a normal ID even once in the ID determination process that is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is replaced with another presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID (or if a presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID is replaced with a presentation operation unit with a normal ID, and then once determined to have a normal ID in the ID determination process that is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is returned to a presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID), as a result, even if the combination of the presentation operation unit and the divided game board is actually incompatible (inconsistent), the presentation will continue to proceed and no notification will be made that the presentation operation unit has an abnormal ID. Therefore, once the system has returned to normal, the notification mode will not change even if the system becomes abnormal again.

B4:
When the third error (magnetic detection) occurs, the sub-function display unit 2250, which is the fourth symbol, lights up and changes, a predetermined LED. Specifically, when the third error (magnetic detection) occurs, and various ID errors (including individual ID errors such as ID error 1, ID error 2, and ID error 3 shown in FIG. 308(c) as well as combinations of these ID errors) occur, as shown in FIGS. 312 and 315, the sub-function display unit 2250, which is the fourth symbol, lights up and changes, a predetermined LED. In other words, when the third error (magnetic detection) occurs, and various ID errors (including individual ID errors such as ID error 1, ID error 2, and ID error 3 shown in FIG. 308(c) as well as combinations of these ID errors) occur, the predetermined LED of the sub-function display unit 2250 lights up and changes, so that the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 continues to perform the effects.

In the event of a second error (ID error), the decorative sound will not be played even if the pattern is changed. Specifically, when various ID errors that are second errors (ID errors) occur (including not only the individual ID errors ID error 1, ID error 2, and ID error 3 shown in Figure 308 (c) but also combinations of these ID errors), as shown in Figures 311 and 314, even if the game progresses and the patterns on the function display unit 1400 change, error notification sounds and announcement sounds will be played repeatedly, and the decorative sound for the effect will not be played. This is because the second error (ID error) is a work error made by an operator, and since a second error (ID error) requires that the ID be replaced with a compatible product after the power is cut off, the decorative sound will not be played and the warning sound for the second error (ID error) will remain.

The third error (magnetic detection), which is a magnetic sensor error, is resolved after a certain period of time has passed, but the error of the right-side gaming board 5AR not being installed as a decorative unit (i.e., a non-connection error) and the ID error of the right-side gaming board 5AR as a decorative unit are not resolved even after a certain period of time has passed. These error notifications are based on the fact that the magnetic sensor error detects and notifies the user of the so-called magnetic cheating behavior, and so is resolved after a certain period of time has passed after the behavior is detected. In contrast, the non-connection error and ID error are caused by operator error. For the non-connection error, the fit of structural components and the connection of the drawer connector must be carefully checked after a power outage, and the ID error must be replaced with a compatible ID product after a power outage, so they are not resolved even after a certain period of time has passed.

[Summary C]
C0:
A gaming machine includes a game frame-side component having an outer frame, a main frame attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame attached to the main frame so as to be openable and closable, and a game board-side component detachably attached to the game frame-side component. The game board-side component is composed of a first game board-side component and multiple second game board-side components and is fixed to the game frame-side component. The first game board-side component is composed of multiple boards including a presentation control board equipped with a microprocessor that executes game presentations. The second game board-side component includes a specific board not equipped with a microprocessor. The specific board has an inherent value that can identify it as the second game board-side component and inherent value transmission means for signal-transmitting the inherent value to the presentation control board. The multiple second game board-side components each have a different inherent value, and if it is determined that the inherent value of at least one second game board-side component is not a predetermined value, the power-on operation of the multiple second game board-side components will be different from normal operation.

Specifically, for example, a pachinko machine 1 comprises a main frame 4, which is a gaming frame-side component, and a divided gaming board 5A, shown in Figure 302, which is a gaming board-side component. The divided gaming board 5A is made up of a left-side gaming board 5AL, which is a first gaming board-side component, and a plurality of right-side gaming boards 5AR, which are second gaming board-side components (upper right gaming board 5ART in Figure 307 and lower right gaming board 5ARU in Figure 307), and is fixed to the main frame 4, which is a gaming frame-side component. The left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, is composed of multiple boards including a peripheral control board 1510, which is a presentation control board equipped with a peripheral control IC 1510a, which is a microprocessor that can execute game presentations (a main control unit 1300 that houses the main control board 1310, and a left side drive board unit 1700L (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "left side drive board unit 1700L") that houses various other boards (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted that are attached to various presentation units housed in the left side rear box 3010L, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.). The right-side gaming board 5AR, which is a component of the second gaming board, includes a specific board that does not have a microprocessor (a specific board among the right-side drive board unit 1700R (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "right-side drive board unit 1700R") that houses various boards (e.g., various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted that are attached to various performance units housed in the right-side rear box 3010R, and drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.)). This specific board among the various specific boards includes a self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value that can identify it as the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is a component of the second gaming board, and an ID output circuit IDCT of the upper right gaming board 5ART that constitutes the right-side gaming board 5AR and an ID output circuit IDCU of the lower right gaming board 5ARU that constitutes the right-side gaming board 5AR, which are unique value transmission means that transmit the unique self-identification code (ID) to the peripheral control board 1510, which is the performance control board, as shown in FIG. 307.

The door frame 3, which is supported by the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed, is fitted with door frame units (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame units") such as the left side unit 420, the right side unit 430, the tray unit 200, and the top unit 450.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 307, the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is a component of the second gaming board, is composed of a top right gaming board 5ART and a bottom right gaming board 5ARU, and there are multiple right-side gaming boards 5AR, each of which has a different unique value. The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of Figure 309 that the self-identification code, which is the unique value of at least one of the top right gaming board 5ART and the bottom right gaming board 5ARU (ID of the top right gaming board 5ART: 11110000B, ID of the bottom right gaming board 5ARU: 11111000B), is not a predetermined value. If the power is cut off, the state will become State 2: ID error 1 in Figure 308(c) and Error Response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figure 310 or Figure 313 will occur, and the power-on operation of the right-side game board 5AR, which is one of the multiple second game board components, will be different from normal operation (illumination, flashing, gradation lighting, etc.), and the various LEDs on the divided game board 5AR (various game board LEDs) will turn off, so the right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, will turn off.

In this way, the ID output circuit IDCT and ID output circuit IDCU, which are unique value transmission means provided on the upper right gaming board 5ART and the lower right gaming board 5ARU that constitute the right gaming board 5AR, which are multiple second gaming board side components, respectively, transmit a signal of a self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value that can identify the right gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board side component, to the peripheral control board 1510, which is a performance control board provided on the left gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board side component. If it is determined that the self-identification code (ID of the upper right game board 5ART: 11110000B, ID of the lower right game board 5ARU: 11111000B), which is a unique value of at least one of the multiple second game board side components, is not a predetermined value, the state will become state 2: ID error 1 in Figure 308 (c), which is error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figure 310 or Figure 313, and the power-on operation of the right game board 5AR, which is one of the multiple second game board side components, will be in a mode (off) different from normal operation (on, flashing, gradational lighting, etc.). This makes it possible to immediately determine when the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which are multiple second gaming board components, become inconsistent (including when the combination of the upper right gaming board 5ART and the lower right gaming board 5ARU becomes inconsistent), and prevents incomplete effects from being executed when the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which are multiple second gaming board components, become inconsistent (including when the combination of the upper right gaming board 5ART and the lower right gaming board 5ARU become inconsistent).This therefore prevents a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

C1:
The game machine includes a game frame-side component having an outer frame, a main frame attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame attached to the main frame so as to be openable and closable, and a game board-side component detachably attached to the game frame-side component. The game board-side component is composed of a first game board-side component and a second game board-side component. The first game board-side component has a plurality of boards including a sub-control board equipped with a microprocessor capable of executing game effects. The second game board-side component has a board not equipped with a microprocessor, a unique value identifying the second game board-side component, and unique value transmitting means for transmitting the unique value. Furthermore, the first game board-side component and the second game board-side component are electrically connected and fixed to the game frame. There are multiple second game board side components, each with a different inherent value, and if it is determined that the inherent value of at least one second game board side component is not a predetermined value, the power-on operation of the second game board side component will be different from normal operation.

Specifically, for example, it comprises a main frame 4, which is the gaming frame-side component, and a split gaming board 5A (see Figure 302), which is the gaming board-side component. The split gaming board 5A is composed of a left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board-side component, and a right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board-side component. The left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board-side component, comprises multiple boards (main control unit 1300, which houses the main control board 1310, and left-side drive board unit 1700L (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "left-side drive board unit 1700L"), which houses various other boards (e.g., various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted that are attached to various performance units housed in the left rear box 3010L, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.)) including a peripheral control board 1510, which is a sub-control board equipped with a peripheral control IC 1510a, which is a microprocessor capable of executing game effects. The right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, is equipped with a board that does not have a microprocessor (a right-side drive board unit 1700R (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the "right-side drive board unit 1700R") that houses various boards (for example, various relay boards, decorative boards on which various LEDs are mounted that are attached to various performance units housed in the right-side rear box 3010R, drive boards that drive drive motors and drive solenoids, etc.), a self-identification code (ID) that is a unique value that identifies the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, and unique value transmission means that transmits the unique value self-identification code (ID), the ID output circuit IDCT of the upper right gaming board 5ART that constitutes the right-side gaming board 5AR in Figure 307, and the ID output circuit IDCU of the lower right gaming board 5ARU that constitutes the right-side gaming board 5AR.

Furthermore, the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, are electrically connected and fixed to the main frame 4, which is the gaming frame. Door frame units such as the left-side door frame unit 420, the right-side door frame unit 430, the tray unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame units") are attached to the door frame 3, which is supported on the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed. The work of attaching the gaming board 5 to the main frame 4 and the work of attaching the door frame units to the door frame 3, which is supported on the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed, are separate tasks. For this reason, when attaching the gaming board 5 to the main frame 4, it is possible that the relationship (combination) between the gaming board 5 and the door frame units may not be compatible (aligned) due to human error.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 307, the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board side component, is made up of multiple upper right gaming boards 5ART and lower right gaming boards 5ARU, each of which has a different unique value. The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of Figure 309 that the self-identification code, which is the unique value of at least one of the upper right gaming board 5ART and the lower right gaming board 5ARU (ID of the upper right gaming board 5ART: 11110000B, ID of the lower right gaming board 5ARU: 11111000B), is not a predetermined value. If this is determined to be the case, the state will become State 2: ID error 1 in Figure 308(c) and Error Response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figure 310 or Figure 313 will occur, and the power-on operation of the right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, will be different from normal operation (illumination, flashing, gradation lighting, etc.), and the various LEDs on the split game board 5AR (various game board LEDs) will turn off, so the right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, will turn off.

In this way, the ID output circuit IDCT and ID output circuit IDCU, which are unique value transmission means provided on the upper right gaming board 5ART and the lower right gaming board 5ARU that constitute the right gaming board 5AR, which are multiple second gaming board side components, respectively, transmit a self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value that identifies it as the right gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board side component, to the left gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board side component. If it is determined that the self-identification code (ID of the upper right game board 5ART: 11110000B, ID of the lower right game board 5ARU: 11111000B), which is a unique value of at least one of the multiple second game board side components, is not a predetermined value, the state will become state 2: ID error 1 in Figure 308 (c), which is error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figure 310 or Figure 313, and the power-on operation of the right game board 5AR, which is one of the multiple second game board side components, will be in a mode (off) different from normal operation (on, flashing, gradational lighting, etc.). This makes it possible to immediately determine when the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which are multiple second gaming board components, become inconsistent (including when the combination of the upper right gaming board 5ART and the lower right gaming board 5ARU becomes inconsistent), and prevents incomplete effects from being executed when the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which are multiple second gaming board components, become inconsistent (including when the combination of the upper right gaming board 5ART and the lower right gaming board 5ARU become inconsistent).This therefore prevents a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

C2:
Furthermore, if it is determined that the characteristic value of at least one second game board side component is not a predetermined one (predetermined value), the power-on operation of other second game board side components whose characteristic values are determined to be normal will also be different from normal operation. Specifically, for example, if the self-identification code (ID) of the upper right game board 5ART and the lower right game board 5ARU does not match the value for the upper right game board 5ART (judgment value for the upper right game board), even if the self-identification code (ID) of the lower right game board 5ARU matches the value for the lower right game board 5ARU (judgment value for the lower right game board), the various LEDs of the upper right game board 5ART that differ from normal operation (lit, flashing, gradation lighting, etc.) are turned off when the upper right game board 5ART is powered on, and the various LEDs of the lower right game board 5ARU that differ from normal operation (lit, flashing, gradation lighting, etc.) are turned off when the lower right game board 5ARU is powered on. Also, for example, if the self-identification code (ID) of the lower right game board 5ARU does not match the value for the lower right game board 5ARU (judgment value for the lower right game board), even if the self-identification code (ID) of the upper right game board 5ART matches the value for the upper right game board 5ART (judgment value for the upper right game board), the various LEDs of the lower right game board 5ARU that differ from normal operation (lit, flashing, gradation lighting, etc.) are turned off when the lower right game board 5ARU is powered on, and the various LEDs of the upper right game board 5ART that differ from normal operation (lit, flashing, gradation lighting, etc.) are turned off when the upper right game board 5ART is powered on.

In other words, if the self-identification code (ID) of one of the upper right gaming board 5ART and the lower right gaming board 5ARU does not match the predetermined value (predetermined value: upper right gaming board determination or lower right gaming board determination), this is an operator error that results in an incompatible (mismatched) combination with the left gaming board 5AL, and since it must be replaced with a compatible ID product after the power is cut off, this is a different mode from normal operation.

In addition, if it is determined that the self-identification code, which is a unique value of at least one of the upper right gaming board 5ART and the lower right gaming board 5ARU (ID: 11110000B of the upper right gaming board 5ART, ID: 11111000B of the lower right gaming board 5ARU), is not a predetermined value, the state will become State 2: ID error 1 of Figure 308 (c), and error response 1 (ID error 1 response) of Figure 310 or Figure 313 will occur, and the power-on operation of the right gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, will be in a mode different from normal operation (lighting, flashing, gradation lighting, etc.), and the various LEDs of the divided gaming board 5AR (various LEDs of the gaming board) will be turned off. However, if the self-identification code (ID) of the upper right gaming board 5ART is different from the right If the value for the upper game board 5ART (judgment value for the upper right game board) does not match, the power-on operation of the upper right game board 5ART may be to turn off various LEDs on the upper right game board 5ART that are different from their normal operation (lit, flashing, gradation lighting, etc.), while the power-on operation of the lower right game board 5ART may be to set them to their normal operation (lit, flashing, gradation lighting, etc.), and if the self-identification code (ID) of the lower right game board 5ARU does not match the value for the lower right game board 5ARU (judgment value for the lower right game board), the power-on operation of the lower right game board 5ARU may be to turn off various LEDs on the lower right game board 5ARU that are different from their normal operation (lit, flashing, gradation lighting, etc.), while the power-on operation of the upper right game board 5ARU may be to set them to their normal operation (lit, flashing, gradation lighting, etc.). This way, you can communicate which parts are incompatible (inconsistent) and which parts are compatible (consistent).

The left-hand gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, is equipped with error response 7 in FIGS. 310 to 315, which results in state 8 in FIG. 308(c): unconnected error 1, a first error that occurs when the left-hand gaming board 5AL does not receive a unique ID code (ID) from the right-hand gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, within a predetermined time (the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 309), and error response 1 in FIGS. 310 to 315, which results in state 2 in FIG. 308(c): ID error 1, a second error that occurs when the right-hand gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, receives an ID code (ID), which is a unique ID value, and it is not a predetermined value.

The left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, i.e., the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, passes a command classified as a notification display to the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing, as error response 7 in Figures 310 to 315, which is the first error, State 8 in Figure 308(c): Unconnected Error 1. In the warning process of step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads (extracts) schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, and electrical drive source schedule data from the peripheral control ROM and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC as modes indicating unconnection, thereby setting various processing related to the effects.

The command classified as a notification display for Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 response) in Figures 310 to 315, which is State 2: ID Error 1 in Figure 308 (c), which is the second error, is passed to the warning process in step S1024 of the peripheral control unit's regular processing during peripheral control unit power-on processing. In the warning process in step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads (extracts) schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, and electrical drive source schedule data from the peripheral control ROM and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC as incompatible (mismatched) conditions, thereby setting various processing related to the presentation.

In this way, the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, can generate a first error, error response 7 in Figures 310 to 315, which results in state 8 in Figure 308(c): unconnected error 1, if it does not receive the unique identification code (ID) within a predetermined time (the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on process in Figure 309), or it can generate a second error, error response 1 in Figures 310 to 315 (ID error 1 response), which results in state 2 in Figure 308(c): ID error 1, if the unique identification code (ID) received within the predetermined time is not a predetermined value.

Furthermore, the various ID errors that are second-type errors (ID errors) (including individual ID errors such as ID Error 1, ID Error 2, and ID Error 3 shown in Figure 308(c) as well as combinations of these ID errors) hinder gameplay to a greater extent than the various unconnection errors that are first-type errors (unconnection error 1, unconnection error 2, and unconnection error 3 shown in Figure 308(c)).

Furthermore, the third error (magnetic detection) is resolved after a certain period of time, but the first error (disconnection error) and the second error (ID error) are not resolved even after a certain period of time has passed. Among these various error notifications, the third error (magnetic detection) detects and reports the so-called magnetic interference behavior, and therefore is resolved after a certain period of time has passed. In contrast, the first error (disconnection error) and the second error (ID error) are caused by operator errors. For the first error (disconnection error), the fit of structural components and the connection of the drawer connector must be carefully checked after a power outage, and the second error (ID error) must be replaced with a compatible ID product after a power outage, so they are not resolved even after a certain period of time has passed.

Furthermore, when a second error (ID error) occurs, the decorative effect on the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, is not performed. This is because the second error (ID error) is a work error made by an operator, resulting in an incompatibility (mismatch) between the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component. If the decorative effect on the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, were performed in this state, there is a risk of electrical failure of the right-side gaming board 5AR.

Furthermore, even if a third error (magnetic detection) occurs when a second error (ID error) occurs, the second error (ID error) warning sound remains. In other words, even if a third error (magnetic detection) occurs when a second error (ID error) occurs, as shown in Figures 312 and 315, the audio for Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 response) repeatedly plays the error notification sound and announcement sound. This is because the third error (magnetic detection) detects and notifies the user of the so-called magnetic interference and is resolved after a certain period of time has passed since the detection of the error, whereas the second error (ID error) is an operator error and requires replacement with a compatible ID product after a power outage, so the second error (ID error) warning sound remains even after a certain period of time has passed.

C3:
Furthermore, if a RAM error and an ID error occur simultaneously, only the RAM error is reported, and no ID error is reported. Also, no LED error is reported in the decorative unit. Specifically, if a RAM error in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and State 2: ID error 1 in Figure 308(c) (Error Response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figures 310 to 315) occur simultaneously, only a report is made to inform the user that a RAM error has occurred, but no report is made to inform the user that State 2: ID error 1 in Figure 308(c) (Error Response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figures 310 to 315) has occurred. This is because if a RAM error occurs in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the progress of the game by the main control MPU 1310a will be forcibly stopped, so in order to notify this, even if state 2: ID error 1 in Figure 308 (c) (error response 1 (corresponding to ID error 1) in Figures 310 to 315) occurs, the RAM error in the main control built-in RAM, which is the most important error, is notified as the highest priority regardless of the occurrence of other errors.

If the ID is determined to be normal within a specified period of time after power-on, no notification is issued. However, if the ID is determined to be abnormal within a specified period of time after power-on, the notification mode may change if the state changes. In the case of an abnormality, the notification mode changes when the state returns to normal. Specifically, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 309, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 does not issue a notification (target method in the same figure: none) if it determines that the ID is normal, i.e., State 1 in FIG. 308(c): ID error 1 (error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in FIGS. 310 to 315), i.e., an abnormal ID, but maintains the notification of this error response 1 (ID error 1 response). If the ID is determined to be normal, i.e., a normal ID, after the countermeasure in FIG. 308(c): replacement with a compatible ID after power-off, the notification is no longer issued. In other words, if the combination of the left and right gaming boards is determined to be normal and a normal ID within a specified period of time after power-on, the state of the combination of the left and right gaming boards will not be determined at all thereafter, and even if the combination of the left and right gaming boards becomes incompatible (inconsistent), no notification will be issued to convey that the ID is abnormal due to the incompatibility (inconsistency). In this way, by limiting the determination of the combination of the left and right gaming boards to within a specified period of time after power-on, this can contribute to reducing the processing load on the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 for the progression of the presentation.

All but a few notifications are terminated. Specifically, for example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of Figure 309 that the ID is State 2: ID error 1 (Error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figures 310 to 315), in other words, an abnormal ID, it saves this as history information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) implemented on the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, it is saved linked to the date and time. Then, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and the correct combination of left and right game boards is attached to the main frame 3, and the pachinko machine 1 is powered on again, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 309 that the ID is State 1: Normal (FIG. 308(c)), i.e., a normal ID, it may display a history of "ID abnormality" on the performance display device or sub-performance display device, and this history may be displayed for a predetermined period of time or until the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. The performance will proceed while the history is displayed.

Once the system has returned to normal, the notification mode will not change even if the system becomes abnormal again. Specifically, for example, to return from an abnormal state to a normal state, the game board must be removed and corrected, at which point the power to the pachinko machine must be shut off (turned off), cutting off the power supply to the peripheral control board, and the game board must be reattached and the pachinko machine must be powered on again. When the pachinko machine is powered on and power is supplied to the peripheral control board, the ID of the performance operation unit can be confirmed (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ID confirmation") by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 309. Therefore, when the pachinko machine is powered on, if the ID is confirmed by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 309 and notification processing is performed, which continues until the pachinko machine is powered off, then there is no need to control the ID confirmation or notification processing thereafter.

In other words, at any timing while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (when the pachinko machine 1 system has completed startup and is ready to proceed with game play and presentation), the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of Figure 309 is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 267, and when the presentation operation unit is attached or detached to or from the tray unit 200 of the door frame 4, if a presentation operation unit that has been determined to have a normal ID even once in the ID determination process that is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is replaced with another presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID (or if a presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID is replaced with a presentation operation unit with a normal ID, and then once determined to have a normal ID in the ID determination process that is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is returned to a presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID), as a result, even if the combination of the presentation operation unit and the divided game board is actually incompatible (inconsistent), the presentation will continue to proceed and no notification will be made that the presentation operation unit has an abnormal ID. Therefore, once the system has returned to normal, the notification mode will not change even if the system becomes abnormal again.

[Summary D]
D0:
The gaming machine includes a game frame-side component having an outer frame, a main frame mounted on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame mounted on the main frame so as to be openable and closable, and a game board-side component detachably mounted on the game frame-side component, wherein the game board-side component is composed of a first game board-side component and a second game board-side component. The first game board-side component is equipped with a presentation control board capable of executing serial communication for executing game presentations and transmitting and receiving signals with the outside. The second game board-side component has light emitters, decoration drive means capable of driving the light emitters and receiving decoration data via serial communication, a second ID code uniquely assigned to the decoration drive means, and a first ID code uniquely assigned to the decoration drive means. At least one of the serial communication lines connected to the presentation control board is configured so that the first ID code and the second ID code are included in the serial communication data.

Specifically, for example, the device comprises a main frame 4 as a gaming frame-side component and a gaming board 5 as a gaming board-side component. Door frame units (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame units") such as a left-side door frame unit 420, a right-side door frame unit 430, a tray unit 200, and a door frame top unit 450 are attached to a door frame 3 supported by the main frame 4 so as to be able to open and close. Because the combination of the gaming board 5 and the door frame units can be compatible (matched) or incompatible (mismatched), the door frame units may be treated as components of the gaming board 5. In other words, the gaming board-side components provided on the main frame 4 are composed of the gaming board 5, which is a first gaming board-side component equipped with a microprocessor, and specific door frame units (a combination of one or more (or all) of the door frame units) which are second gaming board-side components not equipped with a microprocessor. The gaming board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, and the door frame units are attached to the door frame 3 supported by the main frame 4 so as to be able to open and close. In this case, assuming that the door frame unit is treated as a component of the gaming board 5, the gaming board 5 is composed of the gaming board 5, which is the first gaming board component, and a specific door unit, which is the second gaming board component. The gaming board 5, which is the first gaming board component, is equipped with a peripheral control board 1510, which is a performance control board that executes game performances and is capable of serial communication for sending and receiving signals with the outside. The specific door unit, which is the second gaming board component, has various LEDs that are light emitters, an LED driver WIDCa mounted on the frame-side decorative board WKB of Figure 316, which is a decoration drive means that drives the various LEDs that are light emitters and can receive decoration data via serial communication, a uniquely assigned first ID code, and a uniquely assigned second ID code for the LED driver WIDCa mounted on the frame-side decorative board WKB of Figure 316, which is a decoration drive means.

The LED driver WIDCa mounted on the frame-side decorative board WKB, which serves as the decorative drive means, has a setting value of 64 set by the address setting circuit WIDCd mounted on the frame-side decorative board WKB (Fig. 316), which is a uniquely assigned first ID code. A specific door unit, which is a second game board component, has 8-bit information: 11110000B, with the eight setting terminals Q0 to Q7 of the comparator circuit WIDCb mounted on the frame-side decorative board WKB (Fig. 316), which is a uniquely assigned second ID code, electrically connected to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground). There are multiple serial communication lines connected to the peripheral control board 1510, which is the performance control board (for example, between the peripheral control board 1510 and various boards within the game board 5, or between the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame unit, etc.). At least one of the serial communication lines connected to the peripheral control board 1510, which is the performance control board, contains in its serial communication data a setting value 64 (an ID code indicating the LED driver WIDCa contained in the light emission information signal for the LED driver WIDCa) set by the address setting circuit WIDCd implemented on the frame side decorative board WKB, which is the first ID code, and 8-bit information (information compared in the comparator circuit WIDCb with signals output from the OUT0 terminal to OUT7 terminal, which are the eight output terminals of the LED driver WIDCa contained in the light emission information signal for the LED driver WIDCa), which is the second ID code, that is, 8-bit information indicating that the Q0 terminal to Q7 terminal of the comparator circuit WIDCb implemented on the frame side decorative board WKB are each electrically connected to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground). In other words, the serial communication line (i.e., the serial communication data) that transmits the illumination data that indicates the LED illumination mode, which is decorative data for a specific door frame unit that is the second game board component, contains the ID of the LED driver WIDCa as the first ID code (ID code that indicates the LED driver WIDCa: set value 64), and the ID of the frame side decorative board WKB as the second ID code (8-bit information: 11110000B indicating that the eight setting terminals Q0 to Q7 of the comparator circuit WIDCb are each electrically connected to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground)).

In this way, the serial communication data in at least one of the serial communication lines connected to the peripheral control board 1510, which is the performance control board, contains the setting value 64, which is the first ID code uniquely assigned to the LED driver WIDCa, and the second ID code 11110000B, which is uniquely assigned to the door unit, which is the second game board component. Therefore, in addition to the serial communication line that transmits the light emission data that instructs the light emission modes of various LEDs, which is decorative data, the LED driver WIDCa This eliminates the need to provide separate serial communication lines connecting the peripheral control board 1510, which is the effect control board, for transmitting the setting value 64, which is the first ID code uniquely assigned to the first game board component, and the second ID code 11110000B, which is the second ID code uniquely assigned to the specific door frame unit, which is the second game board component. This allows the compatibility (matching) of the combination of the game board 5, which is the first game board component, and the specific door frame unit, which is the second game board component, to be determined by the specific door frame unit, which is the second game board component. This makes it possible to immediately determine if the game board 5, which is the first game board component, and the specific door frame unit, which is the second game board component, are incompatible, preventing incomplete effects from being executed when the game board 5, which is the first game board component, and the specific door frame unit, which is the second game board component, are incompatible. This prevents a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

D1:
The game machine comprises a game frame-side component having an outer frame, a main frame attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame attached to the main frame so as to be openable and closable, and a game board-side component detachably attached to the game frame-side component. The game board-side component comprises a light emitter and a decoration driver that drives the light emitter. The game board-side component is composed of a first game board-side component and a second game board-side component. The first game board-side component comprises a sub-control board capable of executing serial communication for executing game presentations and sending and receiving signals with the outside. The second game board-side component comprises a decoration driver that receives decoration data via serial communication. The decoration driver has a uniquely assigned first ID code. The second game board-side component has a uniquely assigned second ID code. There are multiple serial communication lines connected to the sub-control board. The serial communication line that transmits the decoration data to the second game board side component contains the first ID code and the second ID code.

Specifically, for example, the device comprises a main frame 4, which is a component on the game frame side, and a game board 5, which is a component on the game board side. Door frame units (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame units") such as a left-side door frame unit 420, a right-side door frame unit 430, a tray unit 200, and a top door frame unit 450 are attached to a door frame 3 supported on the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed. Since combinations of the game board 5 with specific door frame units (combinations of one or more (or all) of the door frame units) are compatible (matched)/incompatible (mismatched), specific door frame units may be treated as components of the game board 5. In other words, the game board components provided on the main frame 4 are comprised of a game board 5, which is a first game board component equipped with a microprocessor, and a specific door frame unit, which is a second game board component not equipped with a microprocessor. The game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, and the specific door frame unit is attached to a door frame 3 that is supported on the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed. In this case, assuming that the specific door frame unit is treated as a component of the game board 5, the game board 5 is comprised of the game board 5, which is a first game board component, and a door unit, which is a second game board component. The game board 5 and the specific door frame unit are equipped with various LEDs that are light-emitting elements and an LED driver, which is a decorative driver that drives the various LEDs that are light-emitting elements. The game board 5, which is the first game board component, is equipped with a peripheral control board 1510, which is a sub-control board that executes game effects and is capable of serial communication for sending and receiving signals to and from the outside. The door unit, which is a component of the second game board, is equipped with an LED driver WIDCa mounted on the frame-side decorative board WKB (Fig. 316), which is a decorative driver that receives decorative data (light emission data indicating the LED's light emission mode) via serial communication. The LED driver WIDCa mounted on the frame-side decorative board WKB (Fig. 316) has a setting value of 64 set by an address setting circuit WIDCd mounted on the frame-side decorative board WKB (Fig. 316), which is a uniquely assigned first ID code. The door unit, which is a component of the second game board, has eight setting terminals, Q0 to Q7, of a comparator circuit WIDCb mounted on the frame-side decorative board WKB (Fig. 316), which is a uniquely assigned second ID code, each electrically connected to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground), and contains 8-bit information: 11110000B. There are multiple serial communication lines connected to the peripheral control board 1510, which is a sub-control board (for example, between the peripheral control board 1510 and various boards within the game board 5, or between the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame unit, etc.). The serial communication line that transmits the light emission data that indicates the LED light emission mode, which is decorative data for a specific door frame unit that is the second game board side component, contains a setting value 64 (an ID code that indicates the LED driver WIDCa included in the light emission information signal for the LED driver WIDCa) that is set by the address setting circuit WIDCd implemented on the frame side decorative board WKB, which is the first ID code, and 8-bit information in which the eight setting terminals Q0 terminal to Q7 terminal of the comparator circuit WIDCb implemented on the frame side decorative board WKB are each electrically connected to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground) (information that is compared in the comparator circuit WIDCb with signals output from the eight output terminals OUT0 terminal to OUT7 terminal of the LED driver WIDCa included in the light emission information signal for the LED driver WIDCa). In other words, the serial communication line that transmits the illumination data that indicates the LED illumination mode, which is decorative data for a specific door frame unit that is the second game board component, contains the ID of the LED driver WIDCa as the first ID code (ID code that indicates the LED driver WIDCa: set value 64), and the ID of the frame side decorative board WKB as the second ID code (8-bit information: 11110000B indicating that the eight setting terminals Q0 to Q7 of the comparator circuit WIDCb are each electrically connected to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground)).

In this way, for the LED driver WIDCa, which is a decorative driver that drives the various LEDs that are light emitters in the door unit, which is the second game board component, the setting value 64, which is the first ID code uniquely assigned to the LED driver WIDCa, which is a decorative driver, and the second ID code 11110000B, which is the second ID code uniquely assigned to the door unit, which is the second game board component, are included in the serial communication line that transmits the light emission data that instructs the light emission modes of the various LEDs, which is the decorative data for the door unit, which is the second game board component. In addition to the serial communication line for transmitting the setting value 64, which is the first ID code uniquely assigned to the LED driver WIDCa, which is the decorative driver, and the second ID code 11110000B, which is the second ID code uniquely assigned to the specific door frame unit, which is the second game board component, there is no need to provide a serial communication line connected to the peripheral control board 1510, which is the sub-control board, and the compatibility (integrity) of the combination of the game board 5, which is the first game board component, and the specific door frame unit, which is the second game board component, can be determined in the specific door frame unit, which is the second game board component. This makes it possible to immediately determine if the game board 5, which is the first game board component, and the specific door frame unit, which is the second game board component, have become incompatible, preventing incomplete effects from being executed when the game board 5, which is the first game board component, and the specific door frame unit, which is the second game board component, are incompatible. This helps prevent players from losing interest in the game.

D2:
Furthermore, in the serial communication between the first game board side component and the second game board side component, a second ID code is provided (included) in the data area that decorates the light-emitting body, and a decoration driver is used as a second ID code expansion means that expands (restores) the second ID code from the serial signal into a parallel signal. Specifically, in serial communication between the game board 5, which is the first game board side component, and a specific door frame unit, which is the second game board side component, the light emission data, which is a data area that decorates various LEDs, which are light emitters, and which indicates the light emission mode of the LEDs, contains (includes) the ID of the frame side decorative board WKB as a second ID code (8-bit information: 11110000B, with the eight setting terminals Q0 to Q7 of the comparator circuit WIDCb electrically connected to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground) respectively), and an LED driver WIDCa implemented on the frame side decorative board WKB, which is a decorative driver, is used as second ID code expansion means for expanding (restoring) the second ID code 11110000B from the serial signal to a parallel signal. This means that there is no need to provide a dedicated second ID code expansion means on the frame side decorative board WKB to expand (restore) the second ID code 11110000B into a parallel signal, and the LED driver WIDCa that drives various LEDs can be used directly as the second ID code expansion means and output to the comparator circuit WIDCb.

Furthermore, although the first game board component and the second game board component are electrically connected, they are each independently fixed to the game frame component. Specifically, although the game board 5, which is the first game board component, and the specific door frame unit, which is the second game board component, are electrically connected, they are each independently fixed to the main frame 4, which is the game frame component. In other words, the task of attaching the game board 5 to the main frame 4 and the task of attaching the specific door frame unit to the door frame 3, which is supported on the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed, are separate tasks. For this reason, when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4, it is possible that the relationship (combination) between the game board 5 and the specific door frame unit will not match (align) due to human error.

D3:
Furthermore, the serial signals from the sub-control board and the serial signals to the sub-control board are communicated using the same area as various data related to game presentation. Specifically, the light-emitting information signal, which is a serial signal from the peripheral control board 1510, which is the sub-control board, to the frame-side decorative board WKB in the specific door frame unit of Fig. 316, and the door-frame side information signal, which is a serial signal from the relay board TKB provided in the tray unit 200 in the specific door frame unit of Fig. 317, to the peripheral control board 1510, which is the sub-control board, are communicated using the same area as various data related to game presentation, and the terminals of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4 are electrically connected to the terminals of the two main frame-side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame-side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4, so that they are exchanged (communicated) via this drawer connector. This allows the existing serial line to be used as is for the drawer connector, so that an ID for determining whether the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit is authentic can be sent from the peripheral control board 1510, which is a sub-control board, without increasing the number of drawer connectors, and the determination result for the specific door frame unit can be received.

In a system capable of determining the compatibility (matching) of the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit shown in Figures 316 and 317, if the ID is determined to be normal within a specified period of time after power is turned on, no notification is made, but if the ID is determined to be abnormal within a specified period of time after power is turned on, the notification mode can be changed if the status changes. In the case of an abnormality, the notification mode will be changed when the status returns to normal. Specifically, in the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, in the performance operation unit information acquisition process (only the first time after power-on) of step S1108 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 267, or the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of Figure 309, if it determines that the ID is normal, i.e., state 1 of Figure 308(c): normal, no alert is issued (target method in the same Figure: none), whereas if it determines that the ID is abnormal, i.e., state 2 of Figure 308(c): ID error 1 (error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figures 310 to 315), the alert for this error response 1 (ID error 1 response) is maintained, and if it determines that the ID is normal, i.e., normal, after the replacement with a compatible ID product after power-off, as in the countermeasure in the same Figure (c), no alert is issued. In other words, if the combination of the gaming board 5 and a specific door frame unit is determined to be normal and a normal ID is given within a specified period after power-on, the state of the combination of the gaming board 5 and the specific door frame unit will not be determined at all thereafter, and even if the combination of the gaming board 5 and the specific door frame unit becomes incompatible (inconsistent), no notification will be issued to convey that the combination is incompatible (inconsistent) and an abnormal ID. In this way, by limiting the determination of the combination of the gaming board 5 and a specific door frame unit to within a specified period after power-on, this can contribute to reducing the processing load on the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 for the progression of the presentation.

All but a few notifications are terminated. Specifically, for example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of Figure 309 that the ID is State 2: ID error 1 (Error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figures 310 to 315), in other words, an abnormal ID, it saves this as history information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) implemented on the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, it is saved linked to the date and time. Then, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and the correct combination of left and right game boards is attached to the main frame 3, and the pachinko machine 1 is powered on again, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 309 that the ID is State 1: Normal (FIG. 308(c)), i.e., a normal ID, it may display a history of "ID abnormality" on the performance display device or sub-performance display device, and this history may be displayed for a predetermined period of time or until the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. The performance will proceed while the history is displayed.

Once the system has returned to normal, the notification mode will not change even if the system becomes abnormal again. Specifically, for example, to return from an abnormal state to a normal state, the game board must be removed and corrected, at which point the power to the pachinko machine must be shut off (turned off), cutting off the power supply to the peripheral control board, and the game board must be reattached and the pachinko machine must be powered on again. When the pachinko machine is powered on and power is supplied to the peripheral control board, the ID of the performance operation unit can be confirmed (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ID confirmation") by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 309. Therefore, when the pachinko machine is powered on, if the ID is confirmed by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 309 and notification processing is performed, which continues until the pachinko machine is powered off, then there is no need to control the ID confirmation or notification processing thereafter.

In other words, at any timing while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (when the pachinko machine 1 system has completed startup and is ready to proceed with game play and presentation), the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of Figure 309 is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 267, and when the presentation operation unit is attached or detached to or from the tray unit 200 of the door frame 4, if a presentation operation unit that has been determined to have a normal ID even once in the ID determination process that is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is replaced with another presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID (or if a presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID is replaced with a presentation operation unit with a normal ID, and then once determined to have a normal ID in the ID determination process that is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is returned to a presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID), as a result, even if the combination of the presentation operation unit and the divided game board is actually incompatible (inconsistent), the presentation will continue to proceed and no notification will be made that the presentation operation unit has an abnormal ID. Therefore, once the system has returned to normal, the notification mode will not change even if the system becomes abnormal again.

D4:
The result of the true/false determination is transmitted by another serial communication means. Specifically, the LED driver WIDCa of the frame-side decorative board WKB in the door unit transmits light emission data instructing the light emission mode of the LED as a light emission information signal through a serial communication line (light emission information signal serial communication line) output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame-side decorative board WKB, while the ID valid signal from the comparator circuit WIDCb of the frame-side decorative board WKB is input to the door frame side information output circuit TOC of the relay board TKB provided in the tray unit 200 of the door frame 4, and is output from the door frame side information output circuit TOC to the peripheral control board 1510 through a serial communication line (a door frame side information signal serial communication line that is a different system from the light emission information signal serial communication line)) that transmits the serialized door frame side information signal together with detection signals from various sensors such as the performance operation unit 300. In other words, the ID valid signal from the comparator circuit WIDCb of the frame side decorative board WKB, which is the result of the authenticity determination, is transmitted via the serial communication line for the door frame side information signal, which is a separate serial communication means different from the serial communication line for the light emission information signal.

The first ID code uses the last number that can be set. Specifically, a set value of 64 is set as the ID of the LED driver WIDCa of the frame-side decorative board WKB in the door unit. This is because LED drivers are mounted not only on specific door frame units but also on various decorative boards and boards provided on the game board 5, and the number of LED drivers changes depending on the model. Therefore, when developing a program, it is necessary to prevent confusion between the LED driver WIDCa of the ID comparison circuit WIDC and other LED drivers. Therefore, for frame-side decorative boards WKBs on which the ID comparison circuit WIDC is installed, the ID of the LED driver WIDCa is always fixed to a set value of 64.

The LED is driven by a decorative driver used for the second ID code expansion means. Specifically, in serial communication between the game board 5, which is the first game board component, and a specific door frame unit, which is the second game board component, the light emission data, which is the data area that decorates the various LEDs that are light emitters and indicates the light emission mode of the LEDs, contains (contains) the ID of the frame side decorative board WKB as the second ID code (8-bit information: 11110000B, indicating that the eight setting terminals Q0 to Q7 of the comparator circuit WIDCb are each electrically connected to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground)), and an LED driver WIDCa implemented on the frame side decorative board WKB, which is the decorative driver, is used as the second ID code expansion means that expands (restores) the second ID code 11110000B from the serial signal to a parallel signal. This eliminates the need to provide the frame-side decorative board WKB with a dedicated second ID code expansion means for expanding (restoring) the second ID code 11110000B into a parallel signal; the LED driver WIDCa that drives the various LEDs can be used directly as the second ID code expansion means and output to the comparator circuit WIDCb. Furthermore, the LED driver WIDCa can control the emission of various LEDs electrically connected to the other output terminals (16 output terminals) that are not electrically connected to the eight input terminals of the comparator circuit WIDCb based on the emission data.

The drawer connector is divided into a main connector and a sub-connector. Specifically, the information acquisition clock signal and information acquisition switch signal from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the gaming board 5 are transmitted via this drawer connector to the relay board TKB provided on the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 by electrically connecting the terminals (main connectors or sub-connectors) of the lower gaming board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower gaming board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the gaming board 5 when the gaming board 5 is attached to the main frame 4 with the terminals (sub-connectors or main connectors) of the two main frame drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4. In addition, the door frame side information signal from the door frame side information output circuit TOC of the relay board TKB provided on the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 is transmitted to the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the game board 5 via this drawer connector, by electrically connecting the terminals (main side connectors or sub-side connectors) of the lower game board drawer connectors UDRW, UDRW mounted on the lower game board drawer connector relay board 5ALUDRW of the game board 5 when the game board 5 is attached to the main frame 4 and the terminals (sub-side connectors or main side connectors) of the two main frame side drawer connectors (not shown) mounted on the main frame side relay board (not shown) of the main frame 4.

When the false (incompatible) state changes to true (compatible), the game becomes playable (noise prevention). Specifically, for example, in the performance operation unit information acquisition process of step S1108 in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 267, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 sets and outputs the logic of the information acquisition switch signal input to the S/inverted L terminal to operate in parallel and then serial mode, and then outputs an information acquisition clock signal to acquire the door frame side information signal, and can grasp the player's operations on the performance operation unit 300 attached to the tray unit 200 of the door frame 3 and the operation of the movable body (performance body), grasp the movement of the movable body (performance body) and the player's actions on other units of the door frame 3, and obtain a judgment result regarding the compatibility (integrity) of the combination of the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit. In this way, if the judgment result regarding the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the gaming board 5 and a specific door frame unit changes from false (incompatible) to true (compatible), that is, if the result of the change is reversed, it is assumed that although the combination of the gaming board 5 and the specific door frame unit is compatible (compatible), part of the door frame side information signal (the part indicating the compatibility (consistency) of the combination of the gaming board 5 and the specific door frame unit) has been corrupted due to the influence of noise, and the performance proceeds as if the combination of the gaming board 5 and the specific door frame unit is compatible (consistent).

While the false mismatch (inconsistency) is present, data to turn off the LEDs is sent to the decorative unit. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 sends light emission data to the various LED drivers to turn off (all off) the various LEDs (various LEDs related to the effects (various decorative LEDs)) on the game board (divided game board) and/or the various LEDs (various LEDs related to the effects (various decorative LEDs)) on a specific door frame unit.

If the false incompatibility (mismatch) is resolved, data for lighting the LEDs is sent to the decorative unit. Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 sends light emission data to the various LED drivers so that the various LEDs (various LEDs related to the performance (various decorative LEDs)) on the game board (divided game board) and/or the various LEDs (various LEDs related to the performance (various decorative LEDs)) on a specific door frame unit will emit light in accordance with the progress of the performance.

[Summary E]
E1:
The game device comprises a game frame side component having an outer frame, a main frame attached to the outer frame so as to be able to open and close, and a door frame attached to the main frame so as to be able to open and close, and a game board side component attached to the game frame side component, wherein the game board side component is made up of a first game board side component and a second game board side component, and further comprises an alignment determination means for determining alignment between the first game board side component and the second game board side component, and an operation unit attached to the first game board side component, and when the operation unit is operated, an alert can be issued according to the determination result of the alignment determination means.

Specifically, for example, it comprises a main frame 4, which is a gaming frame-side component, and a divided gaming board 5A (Fig. 302), which is a gaming board-side component provided on the main frame 4, which is a gaming frame-side component. The divided gaming board 5A, which is a gaming board-side component, is composed of a left-side gaming board 5AL (Fig. 302), which is a first gaming board-side component, and a right-side gaming board 5AR (Fig. 302), which is a second gaming board-side component. It also comprises an ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing (Fig. 309), which is a consistency determination means for determining consistency between the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board-side component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board-side component, and an ID error determination switch 1310v on the main control board 1310, which is an operation unit provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board-side component (Fig. 323). When the ID error determination switch 1310v on the main control board 1310, which is the operation unit, is operated, a notification can be issued according to the determination result of the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Figure 309, which is the consistency determination means.

After the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, when a staff member such as a game parlor attendant presses the pressing operation part of the ID error judgment switch 1310v provided on the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 detects a detection signal from the ID error judgment switch 1310v in the switch input process of step S104 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 257 (specifically, the logic of the detection signal from the ID error judgment switch 1310v has an operation logic and a non-operation logic, and when the operation logic is input, the main control MPU 1310a detects an ID error). When it is determined that the pressing operation portion of the ID error determination switch 1310v has been pressed based on this, and when non-operation logic with the operation logic inverted is input, it is determined that the pressing operation portion of the ID error determination switch 1310v has not been pressed. Based on this, when it is determined that the pressing operation portion of the ID error determination switch 1310v has been pressed, an ID error determination result notification start command that starts notification of the ID error determination result is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command sending process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 257.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 309. In this ID determination process, in order to obtain the ID of the right-side game board and the ID of the presentation operation unit, an ID acquisition clock signal (an ID acquisition clock signal dedicated to the right-side game board) is output to the right-side game board, and an ID acquisition clock signal (an ID acquisition clock signal dedicated to the presentation operation unit) is output to the presentation operation unit. The peripheral control IC 1510a acquires the ID code signal from the right-hand gaming board (ID code signal dedicated to the right-hand gaming board) and the ID code signal from the presentation operation unit (ID code signal dedicated to the presentation operation unit) via separate serial systems, and determines (compares) the combination of the split gaming boards (that is, the combination of the right-hand gaming board (a board not equipped with a microprocessor) and the left-hand gaming board (a peripheral control board 1510 or main control board 1310 equipped with a microprocessor)) by referring to a combination table (Fig. 308) pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM, and determines (compares) the combination of the presentation operation unit and the split gaming board by referring to a combination table (Fig. 308) pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM.

The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives the ID error determination result notification start command from the main control board 1310 in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing shown in Figure 268, and analyzes it in the received command analysis processing of step S1022 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in Figure 309.This triggers the start of notification of the ID error determination result, and when the determination result determined in the ID determination processing of step S1003 is incompatible (inconsistent), the command classified as notification display is passed to the warning processing of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing. As a result, in the warning process of step S1024, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads (extracts) from the peripheral control ROM the schedule data for generating the screen, the schedule data for generating the light emission mode, the schedule data for generating the sound, and the electrical drive source schedule data, etc., as indications of incompatibility (mismatch) and sets them in the RAM of the peripheral control IC, thereby setting various processes related to the presentation, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 will notify that a corresponding error has occurred, from Error Response 1 to Error Response 9, as the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error as shown in Figure 308 (c).

In this way, when the push operation portion of the ID error determination switch 1310v provided on the main control board 1310, which is the operation portion, is pressed, a notification can be issued in response to the determination result of the alignment between the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component. This makes it possible to immediately determine if the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, are misaligned, preventing incomplete effects from being executed when the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, are misaligned. This can therefore prevent a decline in interest in the game.

E2:
In the case of an ID error or a non-connection error, the error notification start time can be changed by pressing the pressing operation portion of the ID error determination switch 1310v. Specifically, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs the determination result made on the combination of divided game boards in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in Fig. 309, unless it receives the ID error determination result notification start command from the main control board 1310 in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process shown in Fig. 268 and analyzes it in the received command analysis process of step S1022 in the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in Fig. 309, it cannot use this as an opportunity to pass the command classified as notification display to the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit normal process of the peripheral control unit power-on process, and cannot start notifying the ID error determination result. In other words, even if error response 1 to error response 9 occurs, the time when the error notification start time for notifying the user of the occurrence of the error can be changed by a staff member such as an amusement hall employee pressing the pressing operation part of the ID error determination switch 1310v until the ID error determination result notification start command is received (analyzed) from the main control board 1310.

ID errors and unconnected errors can be detected at any time after power-on. Specifically, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs the determination result on the combination of divided game boards, etc., in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 309, if an attendant such as a game clerk presses the pressing operation portion of the ID error determination switch 1310v, the ID error determination result notification start command from the main control board 1310 is received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process shown in FIG. 268 and analyzed in the received command analysis process of step S1022 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 309, the command classified as a notification display cannot be passed on to the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit normal processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing, and notification of the ID error determination result cannot be initiated. In other words, a staff member or other attendant at the gaming hall can be notified of an ID error or unconnected error at any time after the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (any time after the pachinko machine 1 system has finished starting up).

When Error Response 1 to Error Response 9 do not occur as part of the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error shown in Figure 308(c), that is, when the behavior of the pachinko machine during an error shown in Figure 308(c) is normal operation (no error response), the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 sets the response method to "none," so there is no special notification mode for normal operation (no error response). In other words, when the pachinko machine is operating normally (no error response), no notification is given and no special notification sound is played from the speaker.

When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the pressing operation portion of the ID error determination switch 1310v on the main control board 1310 is pressed, this may trigger an alarm sound (e.g., a beep) to be emitted from the speaker under control of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and a setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 and turned ON, this may trigger an alert sound (e.g., a "beep") to be played from the speaker under control of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510. Note that if settings are changed by pressing the pressing operation portion of the RWM switch 633d on the payout control board 633, an alert sound (e.g., a "beep") may be played from the speaker under control of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 each time the pressing operation portion of the RWM switch 633d is pressed.

E3:
A predetermined self-identification code (ID) is assigned to the right-side game board 5AR by hardware (a hardware circuit). Specifically, the eight ID setting terminals of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC of Fig. 305 provided on the right-side game board 5AR are electrically connected to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground) to assign an ID setting value (11110000B).

The ID assigned to the right-side gaming board 5AR by hardware (using a hardware circuit) is compared with the determination ID code, and if they are identical, a valid signal is output. Specifically, the ID code signal output from the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC (Fig. 305) provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR is input to the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL (Fig. 303). The peripheral control board 1510 obtains the ID of the right-side gaming board 5AR from this input ID code signal and determines (compares) it by referring to the combination table (Fig. 308) pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM, which is the determination ID code. The combination of the split gaming boards is performed in the ID determination process of step S1003 during the peripheral control unit power-on processing (Fig. 309). If the combination of the split game boards is compatible (aligned), providing that the other IDs shown in Figure 308 (c) are compatible, the state will change to State 1: Normal, and the effects will proceed using the door frame units (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame units") such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3, and the split game board 5A. The peripheral control board 1510 outputs, for example, a control signal that lights up a specific LED in the sub-function display unit 2250 of the split game board 5A as an enable signal to proceed with the effects.

The ID assigned to the right-side gaming board 5AR by hardware (using a hardware circuit) is compared with the determination ID code, and if they are not the same, a valid signal is not output. Specifically, the ID code signal output from the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC (Fig. 305) provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR is input to the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL (Fig. 303). The peripheral control board 1510 obtains the ID of the right-side gaming board 5AR from this input ID code signal and determines (compares) it by referring to the combination table (Fig. 308) pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM, which is the determination ID code. The combination of the split gaming boards is performed in the ID determination process of step S1003 during the peripheral control unit power-on processing (Fig. 309). If the combination of divided game boards is not compatible (matched), for example, when the peripheral control board 1510 reaches State 2: ID error 1 shown in Figure 308 (c), in Error Response 1 after power-on (ID error 1 response) in Figure 311, it does not output a control signal to turn on a specific LED in the sub-function display unit 2250 of the divided game board 5A as an enable signal to proceed with the presentation, and turns off the sub-function display unit 2250 (all lights off).

In some cases, no notification will be issued even if the control unit is operated at any time after power-on (if the ID is valid). Specifically, if Error Responses 1 through 9 are not occurring as shown in Figure 308(c) when the pachinko machine is operating normally (no error response) during an error, as shown in Figure 308(c), or if the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is performing the setting change process of step S37 in the main control side power-on process due to the setting key being inserted into the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 and turned ON (until the specified period of time until this setting change process is completed) the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is unable to notify the user of normal operation (no error response). Furthermore, if the pachinko machine is operating normally (no error response) during an error as shown in Figure 308(c), the countermeasure is "none," so there is no special notification mode for normal operation (no error response). In other words, if the operation is normal (no error handling occurs), no notification will be given.

Note that, if the valid ID, ID error, or unconnection error is to be detected at any time after power-on, that is, if the pachinko machine's behavior during an error shown in FIG. 308(c) is normal operation (no error response), and ID errors and unconnection errors such as Error Responses 1 to 9 are determined during a predetermined period after power-on, as determined by the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 309, the errors may be detected at any time after power-on. Specifically, the valid ID, ID error, or unconnection error may be determined by performing the ID determination process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 267. The valid ID, ID error, or unconnection error related to the presentation operation unit may be determined in step S presentation operation unit information acquisition processing in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 267. In either case, if the pachinko machine's behavior during an error shown in FIG. 308(c) is normal operation (no error response), the corrective action is "none," so there is no special notification mode for normal operation (no error response). In other words, if the device is operating normally (no error handling is performed), no notification will be given.

If the ID is determined to be genuine, no notification will be issued even if the operating unit is operated thereafter. Specifically, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of Figure 309 that the ID is in State 1: Normal in Figure 308(c), i.e., a genuine ID, no notification will be issued (target method in the same figure: None). In other words, if the combination of the left and right game boards is determined to be normal and a normal ID within a specified period of time after power-on, the state of the combination of the left and right game boards will not be determined at all thereafter. Even if the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 at this time and turned on, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is performing the main control side main processing in the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 256 and the main control side timer interrupt processing of FIG. 257, and is therefore unable to perform the setting change processing of step S37 in the main control side power-on processing, so the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 will not be able to report that it is operating normally (no error handling).

If it is determined that the ID is not normal (abnormal ID), the notification will continue at least until it becomes normal. Specifically, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 309 that the ID is State 2: ID error 1 of FIG. 308(c) (Error Response 1 (ID error 1 response) of FIG. 310 to FIG. 315) is not normal (abnormal ID), the notification of Error Response 1 (ID error 1 response) will be maintained until the ID is replaced with a compatible ID after the remedy of FIG. 308(c): power is turned off. This notification makes it difficult to play while the left-side gaming board and right-side gaming board are incompatible (inconsistent) in combination.

If the ID is determined to be normal within a specified period of time after power-on, no notification is issued. However, if the ID is determined to be abnormal within a specified period of time after power-on, the notification mode may change if the state changes. In the case of an abnormality, the notification mode changes when the state returns to normal. Specifically, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 309, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 does not issue a notification (target method in the same figure: none) if it determines that the ID is normal, i.e., State 1 in FIG. 308(c): ID error 1 (error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in FIGS. 310 to 315), i.e., an abnormal ID, but maintains the notification of this error response 1 (ID error 1 response). If the ID is determined to be normal, i.e., a normal ID, after the countermeasure in FIG. 308(c): replacement with a compatible ID after power-off, the notification is no longer issued. In other words, if the combination of the left and right gaming boards is determined to be normal and a normal ID within a specified period of time after power-on, the state of the combination of the left and right gaming boards will not be determined at all thereafter, and even if the combination of the left and right gaming boards becomes incompatible (inconsistent), no notification will be issued to convey that the ID is abnormal due to the incompatibility (inconsistency). In this way, by limiting the determination of the combination of the left and right gaming boards to within a specified period of time after power-on, this can contribute to reducing the processing load on the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 for the progression of the presentation.

All but a few notifications are terminated. Specifically, for example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of Figure 309 that the ID is State 2: ID error 1 (Error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figures 310 to 315), in other words, an abnormal ID, it saves this as history information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) implemented on the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, it is saved linked to the date and time. Then, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and the correct combination of left and right game boards is attached to the main frame 3, and the pachinko machine 1 is powered on again, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 309 that the ID is State 1: Normal (FIG. 308(c)), i.e., a normal ID, it may display a history of "ID abnormality" on the performance display device or sub-performance display device, and this history may be displayed for a predetermined period of time or until the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. The performance will proceed while the history is displayed.

Once the system has returned to normal, the notification mode will not change even if the system becomes abnormal again. Specifically, for example, to return from an abnormal state to a normal state, the game board must be removed and corrected, at which point the power to the pachinko machine must be shut off (turned off), cutting off the power supply to the peripheral control board, and the game board must be reattached and the pachinko machine must be powered on again. When the pachinko machine is powered on and power is supplied to the peripheral control board, the ID of the performance operation unit can be confirmed (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ID confirmation") by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 309. Therefore, when the pachinko machine is powered on, if the ID is confirmed by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 309 and notification processing is performed, which continues until the pachinko machine is powered off, then there is no need to control the ID confirmation or notification processing thereafter.

In other words, at any timing while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (when the pachinko machine 1 system has completed startup and is ready to proceed with game play and presentation), the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of Figure 309 is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 267, and when the presentation operation unit is attached or detached to or from the tray unit 200 of the door frame 4, if a presentation operation unit that has been determined to have a normal ID even once in the ID determination process that is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is replaced with another presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID (or if a presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID is replaced with a presentation operation unit with a normal ID, and then once determined to have a normal ID in the ID determination process that is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is returned to a presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID), as a result, even if the combination of the presentation operation unit and the divided game board is actually incompatible (inconsistent), the presentation will continue to proceed and no notification will be made that the presentation operation unit has an abnormal ID. Therefore, once the system has returned to normal, the notification mode will not change even if the system becomes abnormal again.

E4:
In the event of a mismatch, an abnormality is displayed on the LCD. Specifically, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the left-side game board and the right-side game board is incompatible (mismatched) during the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 309, for example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) at power-on in FIG. 310, the performance display device 1600 displays notification text such as "Power is being restored" and "Please wait a moment" on a black background, and when the startup music ends, an image during the performance (for example, when a performance progresses based on game balls entering various winning slots) is displayed. Then, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power-on in FIG. 311, the performance display device 1600 displays notification text such as "Please wait a moment" on an image during the performance (for example, when a performance progresses based on game balls entering various winning slots) or an image while waiting for customers (for example, when a demonstration is being performed or when a still image is displayed).

In the event of a mismatch, no control is performed by the presentation control means. Specifically, for example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, which is the presentation control means, determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 309 that the combination of the left-side game board and the right-side game board is incompatible (mismatched), then, for example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power-on in FIG. 311, the various LEDs of the specific door frame unit controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 and the various LEDs of the game board are turned off (all turned off), and the game board-side movable body and game frame-side movable body controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are not returned to their original positions or otherwise operated (are not operated).

In the event of a mismatch, an audio error is issued. Specifically, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the left-side gaming board and the right-side gaming board is incompatible (mismatched) during the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on process in Figure 309, for example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) at power-on in Figure 310, after the start-up music has finished, an announcement sound saying "Please call an attendant" is played and a specified error notification sound is played seven times. This type of audio is played repeatedly. Then, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power-on in Figure 311, an announcement sound saying "Please call an attendant" is played and a specified error notification sound is played seven times. This type of audio is played repeatedly.

In the event of a mismatch, the door frame lamp (which may be a lamp attached to a removable decorative member or a lamp attached to a non-removable decorative member) is illuminated in an abnormal state. Specifically, first, the door frame 3, which is supported on the main frame 4 so as to be able to open and close, is equipped with door frame units (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame units") such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450. If the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of Figure 309 that the combination of the left-side game board and the right-side game board is incompatible (mismatched), for example, in error response 1 after power-on (ID error 1 response) of Figure 313, the various LEDs of the door frame unit flash red in an abnormal state. The various LEDs in the door frame unit may be provided on various units (various decorative members) that are detachable from the door frame 3, or on various decorative members that are attached and fixed to the door frame 3.

If there are multiple second game board side components, all of the multiple second game board side components will not be driven unless even one has a valid ID. Specifically, if the right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, is further divided into an upper and lower part, as shown in Figure 307, and is composed of an upper right game board 5ART and a lower right game board 5ARU, the upper right game board 5ART is provided with an ID output circuit IDCT that can identify itself, and the lower right game board 5ARU is provided with an ID output circuit IDCU that can identify itself. The parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART and the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU are daisy-chain connected, and operate as a 16-bit shift register consisting of the 8-bit shift register by the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART and the 8-bit shift register by the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU. The contents held by each flip-flop of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART, which serves as the preceding 8-bit shift register, are input to the peripheral control board 1510, followed by the contents held by each flip-flop of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU, which serves as the following 8-bit shift register, one bit at a time, as serial data. The peripheral control board 1510 can acquire the ID code signal and determine the compatibility (matching) of the left-side gaming board 5AL and the right-side gaming board 5AR. When combining the upper right gaming board with the lower right gaming board, if the upper right gaming board 5ART and the lower right gaming board 5ARU are supposed to be combined, but another lower right gaming board that is incompatible (matched) with the upper right gaming board 5ART is combined, even if the left side gaming board 5AL and the upper right gaming board 5ART are compatible (matched), the various LEDs provided on the upper right gaming board 5ART and the various LEDs provided on the other lower right gaming board that is incompatible (matched) with the upper right gaming board 5ART will be turned off (all lights off).

[Summary F]
F1:
The game machine is provided with a game frame side component having an outer frame, a main frame attached to the outer frame so as to be able to open and close, and a door frame attached to the main frame so as to be able to open and close, a game board side component attached to the game frame side component and having a first game board side component and a second game board side component, a matching determination means for determining matching between the first game board side component and the second game board side component, a lottery means for executing a lottery process based on the establishment of a lottery condition, and a plurality of display units for displaying the lottery results of the lottery means. When the matching determination means determines that there is a mismatch, the display of the lottery results on some of the plurality of display units is restricted.

Specifically, for example, the main frame 4, which is a gaming frame side component, the divided gaming board 5A of FIG. 302, which is a gaming board side component provided on the main frame 4, which is a gaming frame side component, and which has the left gaming board 5AL of FIG. 302, which is a first gaming board side component, and the right gaming board 5AR of FIG. 302, which is a second gaming board side component, and step S1 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 309, which is an alignment determination means for determining alignment between the left gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board side component, and the right gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board side component. 257 which is a lottery means that executes lottery processing based on the establishment of lottery conditions, and a function display unit 1400 of FIG. 302 controlled by the main control board 1310 and a sub-function display unit 2250 of FIG. 302 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 which are multiple display units that display the lottery results of the special symbol and special electric feature control processing which is the lottery means. When an inconsistency is determined by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 309 which is a consistency determination means, the display of the lottery results on the sub-function display unit 2250 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 which is a part of the multiple display units, the function display unit 1400 controlled by the main control board 1310 and the sub-function display unit 2250 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, is restricted. For example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power-on in FIG. 311 , the function display unit 1400 controlled by the main control board 1310 lights up a predetermined LED, while the sub-function display unit 2250 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 turns off (all lights off). If it is determined that the left-side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, are inconsistent, the display of the lottery result on one or both of the sub-function display unit 2250 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display device 1600 may be restricted. In this case, the display of the lottery result may be restricted by turning off the sub-function display unit 2250, stopping the flashing light emission and emitting light in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, all lights on), turning off the effect display device 1600, or displaying notification text or the like (such as "Please call an attendant") on the effect display device 1600 to obscure the display of the changing decorative patterns.

In this way, if there is a mismatch between the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, the display of the lottery results on the sub-function display unit 2250 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, which is one of the multiple display units that display the lottery results of the special pattern and special electric device control processing of step S114 in the main control side timer interrupt processing of Figure 257, which is the lottery means, is restricted. This makes it possible to immediately determine when the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, become misaligned, preventing incomplete effects from being executed when the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, are misaligned. This therefore prevents a decline in interest in the game.

F2:
The device further includes a connection determination means for determining the connection state of the second game board side component, and does not restrict the display of lottery results on the multiple display units even when the connection determination means determines that the second game board side component is in an unconnected state.

Specifically, it further includes an ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of Figure 309, which is a connection determination means for determining the connection status of the right-side game board 5AR, which is a component of the second game board side (in other words, the ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of Figure 309 functions as a consistency determination means for determining the consistency between the left-side game board 5AL, which is a component of the first game board side, and the right-side game board 5AR, which is a component of the second game board side, and It also functions as a connection determination means for determining the connection status with the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is a component of the second gaming board. Even if the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing, which serves as the connection determination means, determines that the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is a component of the second gaming board, is in an unconnected state, the display of the lottery results on the multiple display units, the function display unit 1400 controlled by the main control board 1310 and the sub-function display unit 2250 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, is not restricted. For example, in error response 7 after power-on in Figure 311 (state 8 in Figure 308(c): unconnection error, connection with the right-side gaming board 5AR cannot be confirmed), a specified LED is lit on the function display unit 1400 controlled by the main control board 1310, and a specified LED is lit on the sub-function display unit 2250 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510.

The first game board side component comprises a game control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means for controlling presentations based on signals from the game control means. The game control means controls a first display unit among the multiple display units to display the lottery results, and the presentation control means controls a second display unit among the multiple display units to display the lottery results. If the consistency determination means determines that there is an inconsistency, the display of the lottery results on the second display unit controlled by the presentation control means is restricted, but the display of the lottery results on the first display unit controlled by the game control means is not restricted.

Specifically, the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, is equipped with a main control board 1310, which is a gaming control means that controls the progress of the game, and a peripheral control board 1510, which is a presentation control means that controls presentations based on signals (various commands) from the main control board 1310, which is a gaming control means. The main control board 1310, which is a gaming control means, has multiple display units, including a functional display unit 1400 controlled by the main control board 1310 and a sub-functional display unit 2 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. 250, the peripheral control board 1510 is a part of the display unit 250, and controls the function display unit 1400, which is the first display unit of the sub-function display unit 2250 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, to display the special symbol and the lottery result of the special electric role control process of step S114 in the main control side timer interrupt process of FIG. 257, and the peripheral control board 1510 is a performance control means, and controls the function display unit 1400, which is the first display unit of the sub-function display unit 2250 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, which is the first display unit of the sub-function display unit 2250, controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, to display the special symbol and the lottery result of the special electric role control process of step S114 in the main control side timer interrupt process of FIG. The sub-function display unit 2250, which is the second display unit among the sub-function display units 2250 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, which is a display unit among the main control board 1310 and the main control board 1310, receives the command sent in the peripheral control board command sending process in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process of Figure 257 to receive the lottery results for the special pattern and special electric role control process in step S114 in the main control side timer interrupt process of Figure 257, and displays the lottery results based on this received command.If an inconsistency is determined by the ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of Figure 309, which is the consistency determination means, the display of the lottery results on the sub-function display unit 2250, which is the second display unit controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, which is the performance control means, is restricted, but the display of the lottery results on the function display unit 1400, which is the first display unit controlled by the main control board 1310, which is the game control means, is not restricted. For example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power-on in Figure 311, the sub-function display unit 2250 controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 turns off (all lights off), while the function display unit 1400 controlled by the main control board 1310 turns on a specified LED.

F3:
A predetermined self-identification code (ID) is assigned to the right-side game board 5AR by hardware (a hardware circuit). Specifically, the eight ID setting terminals of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC of Fig. 305 provided on the right-side game board 5AR are electrically connected to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground) to assign an ID setting value (11110000B).

The ID assigned to the right-side gaming board 5AR by hardware (using a hardware circuit) is compared with the determination ID code, and if they are identical, a valid signal is output. Specifically, the ID code signal output from the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC (Fig. 305) provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR is input to the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL (Fig. 303). The peripheral control board 1510 obtains the ID of the right-side gaming board 5AR from this input ID code signal and determines (compares) it by referring to the combination table (Fig. 308) pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM, which is the determination ID code. The combination of the split gaming boards is performed in the ID determination process of step S1003 during the peripheral control unit power-on processing (Fig. 309). If the combination of the split game boards is compatible (aligned), providing that the other IDs shown in Figure 308 (c) are compatible, the state will change to State 1: Normal, and the effects will proceed using the door frame units (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame units") such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3, and the split game board 5A. The peripheral control board 1510 outputs, for example, a control signal that lights up a specific LED in the sub-function display unit 2250 of the split game board 5A as an enable signal to proceed with the effects.

The ID assigned to the right-side gaming board 5AR by hardware (using a hardware circuit) is compared with the determination ID code, and if they are not the same, a valid signal is not output. Specifically, the ID code signal output from the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC (Fig. 305) provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR is input to the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL (Fig. 303). The peripheral control board 1510 obtains the ID of the right-side gaming board 5AR from this input ID code signal and determines (compares) it by referring to the combination table (Fig. 308) pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM, which is the determination ID code. The combination of the split gaming boards is performed in the ID determination process of step S1003 during the peripheral control unit power-on processing (Fig. 309). If the combination of divided game boards is not compatible (matched), for example, when the peripheral control board 1510 reaches State 2: ID error 1 shown in Figure 308 (c), in Error Response 1 after power-on (ID error 1 response) in Figure 311, it does not output a control signal to turn on a specific LED in the sub-function display unit 2250 of the divided game board 5A as an enable signal to proceed with the presentation, and turns off the sub-function display unit 2250 (all lights off).

In some cases, no notification will be issued even if the control unit is operated at any time after power-on (if the ID is valid). Specifically, if Error Responses 1 through 9 are not occurring as shown in Figure 308(c) when the pachinko machine is operating normally (no error response) during an error, as shown in Figure 308(c), or if the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is performing the setting change process of step S37 in the main control side power-on process due to the setting key being inserted into the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 and turned ON (until the specified period of time until this setting change process is completed) the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is unable to notify the user of normal operation (no error response). Furthermore, if the pachinko machine is operating normally (no error response) during an error as shown in Figure 308(c), the countermeasure is "none," so there is no special notification mode for normal operation (no error response). In other words, if the operation is normal (no error handling occurs), no notification will be given.

Note that, if the valid ID, ID error, or unconnection error is to be detected at any time after power-on, that is, if the pachinko machine's behavior during an error shown in FIG. 308(c) is normal operation (no error response), and ID errors and unconnection errors such as Error Responses 1 to 9 are determined during a predetermined period after power-on, as determined by the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 309, the errors may be detected at any time after power-on. Specifically, the valid ID, ID error, or unconnection error may be determined by performing the ID determination process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 267. The valid ID, ID error, or unconnection error related to the presentation operation unit may be determined in step S presentation operation unit information acquisition processing in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 267. In either case, if the pachinko machine's behavior during an error shown in FIG. 308(c) is normal operation (no error response), the corrective action is "none," so there is no special notification mode for normal operation (no error response). In other words, if the device is operating normally (no error handling is performed), no notification will be given.

If the ID is determined to be genuine, no notification will be issued even if the operating unit is operated thereafter. Specifically, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of Figure 309 that the ID is in State 1: Normal in Figure 308(c), i.e., a genuine ID, no notification will be issued (target method in the same figure: None). In other words, if the combination of the left and right game boards is determined to be normal and a normal ID within a specified period of time after power-on, the state of the combination of the left and right game boards will not be determined at all thereafter. Even if the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 at this time and turned on, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is performing the main control side main processing in the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 256 and the main control side timer interrupt processing of FIG. 257, and is therefore unable to perform the setting change processing of step S37 in the main control side power-on processing, so the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 will not be able to report that it is operating normally (no error handling).

If it is determined that the ID is not normal (abnormal ID), the notification will continue at least until it becomes normal. Specifically, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 309 that the ID is State 2: ID error 1 of FIG. 308(c) (Error Response 1 (ID error 1 response) of FIG. 310 to FIG. 315) is not normal (abnormal ID), the notification of Error Response 1 (ID error 1 response) will be maintained until the ID is replaced with a compatible ID after the remedy of FIG. 308(c): power is turned off. This notification makes it difficult to play while the left-side gaming board and right-side gaming board are incompatible (inconsistent) in combination.

If the ID is determined to be normal within a specified period of time after power-on, no notification is issued. However, if the ID is determined to be abnormal within a specified period of time after power-on, the notification mode may change if the state changes. In the case of an abnormality, the notification mode changes when the state returns to normal. Specifically, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 309, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 does not issue a notification (target method in the same figure: none) if it determines that the ID is normal, i.e., State 1 in FIG. 308(c): ID error 1 (error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in FIGS. 310 to 315), i.e., an abnormal ID, but maintains the notification of this error response 1 (ID error 1 response). If the ID is determined to be normal, i.e., a normal ID, after the countermeasure in FIG. 308(c): replacement with a compatible ID after power-off, the notification is no longer issued. In other words, if the combination of the left and right gaming boards is determined to be normal and a normal ID within a specified period of time after power-on, the state of the combination of the left and right gaming boards will not be determined at all thereafter, and even if the combination of the left and right gaming boards becomes incompatible (inconsistent), no notification will be issued to convey that the ID is abnormal due to the incompatibility (inconsistency). In this way, by limiting the determination of the combination of the left and right gaming boards to within a specified period of time after power-on, this can contribute to reducing the processing load on the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 for the progression of the presentation.

All but a few notifications are terminated. Specifically, for example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of Figure 309 that the ID is State 2: ID error 1 (Error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figures 310 to 315), in other words, an abnormal ID, it saves this as history information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) implemented on the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, it is saved linked to the date and time. Then, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and the correct combination of left and right game boards is attached to the main frame 3, and the pachinko machine 1 is powered on again, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 309 that the ID is State 1: Normal (FIG. 308(c)), i.e., a normal ID, it may display a history of "ID abnormality" on the performance display device or sub-performance display device, and this history may be displayed for a predetermined period of time or until the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. The performance will proceed while the history is displayed.

Once the system has returned to normal, the notification mode will not change even if the system becomes abnormal again. Specifically, for example, to return from an abnormal state to a normal state, the game board must be removed and corrected, at which point the power to the pachinko machine must be shut off (turned off), cutting off the power supply to the peripheral control board, and the game board must be reattached and the pachinko machine must be powered on again. When the pachinko machine is powered on and power is supplied to the peripheral control board, the ID of the performance operation unit can be confirmed (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ID confirmation") by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 309. Therefore, when the pachinko machine is powered on, if the ID is confirmed by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 309 and notification processing is performed, which continues until the pachinko machine is powered off, then there is no need to control the ID confirmation or notification processing thereafter.

In other words, at any timing while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (when the pachinko machine 1 system has completed startup and is ready to proceed with game play and presentation), the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of Figure 309 is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 267, and when the presentation operation unit is attached or detached to or from the tray unit 200 of the door frame 4, if a presentation operation unit that has been determined to have a normal ID even once in the ID determination process that is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is replaced with another presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID (or if a presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID is replaced with a presentation operation unit with a normal ID, and then once determined to have a normal ID in the ID determination process that is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is returned to a presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID), as a result, even if the combination of the presentation operation unit and the divided game board is actually incompatible (inconsistent), the presentation will continue to proceed and no notification will be made that the presentation operation unit has an abnormal ID. Therefore, once the system has returned to normal, the notification mode will not change even if the system becomes abnormal again.

F4:
In the event of a mismatch, an abnormality is displayed on the LCD. Specifically, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the left-side game board and the right-side game board is incompatible (mismatched) during the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 309, for example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) at power-on in FIG. 310, the performance display device 1600 displays notification text such as "Power is being restored" and "Please wait a moment" on a black background, and when the startup music ends, an image during the performance (for example, when a performance progresses based on game balls entering various winning slots) is displayed. Then, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power-on in FIG. 311, the performance display device 1600 displays notification text such as "Please wait a moment" on an image during the performance (for example, when a performance progresses based on game balls entering various winning slots) or an image while waiting for customers (for example, when a demonstration is being performed or when a still image is displayed).

In the event of a mismatch, no control is performed by the presentation control means. Specifically, for example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, which is the presentation control means, determines that the combination of the left-side game board and the right-side game board is incompatible (mismatched) during the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Figure 309, then, for example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power-on in Figure 311, the various LEDs of the door frame unit and the various LEDs of the game board that are controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are turned off (all turned off), and the game board-side movable body and game frame-side movable body that are controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are not operated (are not operated) to return to their original positions or the like.

In the event of a mismatch, an audio error is issued. Specifically, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the left-side gaming board and the right-side gaming board is incompatible (mismatched) during the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on process in Figure 309, for example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) at power-on in Figure 310, after the start-up music has finished, an announcement sound saying "Please call an attendant" is played and a specified error notification sound is played seven times. This type of audio is played repeatedly. Then, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power-on in Figure 311, an announcement sound saying "Please call an attendant" is played and a specified error notification sound is played seven times. This type of audio is played repeatedly.

In the event of a mismatch, the door frame lamp (which may be a lamp attached to a removable decorative member or a lamp attached to a non-removable decorative member) is illuminated in an abnormal state. Specifically, first, the door frame 3, which is supported on the main frame 4 so as to be able to open and close, is equipped with door frame units (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame units") such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450. If the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of Figure 309 that the combination of the left-side game board and the right-side game board is incompatible (mismatched), for example, in error response 1 after power-on (ID error 1 response) of Figure 313, the various LEDs of the door frame unit flash red in an abnormal state. The various LEDs in the door frame unit may be provided on various units (various decorative members) that are detachable from the door frame 3, or on various decorative members that are attached and fixed to the door frame 3.

If there are multiple second game board side components, all of the multiple second game board side components will not be driven unless even one has a valid ID. Specifically, if the right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, is further divided into an upper and lower part, as shown in Figure 307, and is composed of an upper right game board 5ART and a lower right game board 5ARU, the upper right game board 5ART is provided with an ID output circuit IDCT that can identify itself, and the lower right game board 5ARU is provided with an ID output circuit IDCU that can identify itself. The parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART and the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU are daisy-chain connected, and operate as a 16-bit shift register consisting of the 8-bit shift register by the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART and the 8-bit shift register by the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU. The contents held by each flip-flop of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART, which serves as the preceding 8-bit shift register, are input to the peripheral control board 1510, followed by the contents held by each flip-flop of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU, which serves as the following 8-bit shift register, one bit at a time, as serial data. The peripheral control board 1510 can acquire the ID code signal and determine the compatibility (matching) of the left-side gaming board 5AL and the right-side gaming board 5AR. When combining the upper right gaming board with the lower right gaming board, if the upper right gaming board 5ART and the lower right gaming board 5ARU are supposed to be combined, but another lower right gaming board that is incompatible (matched) with the upper right gaming board 5ART is combined, even if the left side gaming board 5AL and the upper right gaming board 5ART are compatible (matched), the various LEDs provided on the upper right gaming board 5ART and the various LEDs provided on the other lower right gaming board that is incompatible (matched) with the upper right gaming board 5ART will be turned off (all lights off).

[Summary G]
G1:
The device comprises a game frame side component having a movable decorative body that operates in a predetermined operating mode, a game board side component provided on the game frame side component and having a first game board side component and a second game board side component, an alignment determination means for determining alignment between the first game board side component and the second game board side component, and a plurality of light-emitting elements provided on the second game board side component, and if the alignment determination means determines that there is an inconsistency, the light emission of the plurality of light-emitting elements provided on the second game board side component is restricted, and although the movable decorative body provided on the game frame side component is not subject to determination by the alignment determination means, its operation is restricted if it is determined that there is an inconsistency between the first game board side component and the second game board side component.

Specifically, for example, a game board is attached to the main frame 4, and door frame units such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame units") are attached to the door frame 3, which is supported on the main frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed. The tray unit 200 is equipped with a performance operation unit 300. The performance operation unit 300 is equipped with the performance operation unit 301 shown in Figure 52 and is a movable decorative element that operates in a predetermined operating mode. The game frame side component, which is made up of the door frame 3 and main frame 4, is equipped with the game board side component, and the performance operation unit 300 equipped with the performance operation unit 301, which is a movable decorative element that operates in a predetermined operating mode.

It also includes a divided gaming board 5A (Fig. 302) which is a gaming board side component provided on the main frame 4, which is a gaming frame side component, and which has a left-side gaming board 5AL (Fig. 302) which is a first gaming board side component, and a right-side gaming board 5AR (Fig. 302) which is a second gaming board side component; an ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (Fig. 309) which is a matching determination means for determining matching between the left-side gaming board 5AL which is the first gaming board side component and the right-side gaming board 5AR which is the second gaming board side component; and various LEDs which are multiple light-emitting elements provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR which is the second gaming board side component.

This presentation operation unit 300 does not have any ID for self-identification and can be used in common with any specifications. It is provided with a movable body such as the presentation operation section 301 shown in Figure 52. Movable bodies such as the presentation operation section 301 provided in the presentation operation unit 300 are treated as being included in the "game frame side movable body" shown in Figures 310 to 315.

When a mismatch is determined by the ID determination process of step S1003 during the peripheral control unit power-on processing, which serves as a consistency determination means, the illumination of the various LEDs, which are multiple light-emitting elements provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, is restricted. Although the presentation operation unit 300, which is a movable decorative element provided on the door frame 3, which is the gaming frame component, is not subject to determination by the ID determination process of step S1003 during the peripheral control unit power-on processing, which serves as a consistency determination means, its operation is restricted when a mismatch is determined between the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component. For example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) when power is turned on in Figure 310, the movable body on the gaming frame does not perform any operation such as returning to its original position (is not operated). Furthermore, when it is determined that the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, are mismatched, the mode of restricting the drive of the movable decorative elements (in this example, the performance operation unit 300) provided on the door frame 3, which is the gaming frame component, may be controlled in a different manner than when it is determined that the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, are matched. For example, some or all of the movable decorative elements provided on the door frame 3, which is the gaming frame component, may be driven in a specific drive mode (such as rotating at a constant speed), or some or all of the movable decorative elements provided on the door frame 3, which is the gaming frame component, may be controlled so as not to be driven.

In this way, if the left-hand gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-hand gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, are mismatched, the operation of the effect operation unit 300, which is a movable decorative element attached to the door frame 3, which is a gaming frame component that is not subject to the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing, which is the mismatch determination means, is restricted. This makes it possible to immediately determine that the left-hand gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-hand gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, are mismatched, preventing incomplete effects from being executed when the left-hand gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-hand gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, are mismatched. This therefore prevents a decline in interest in the game.

G2:
If the matching determination means determines a match within a predetermined period after power-on, the operation of the movable decorative element will not be restricted even if a mismatch subsequently occurs. Specifically, in the ID determination process of step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 309, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines the matching between the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component. If it determines that the combination of the left-side gaming board and the right-side gaming board is matched (matched), it will not subsequently determine the compatibility (matching) between the left-side gaming board and the right-side gaming board. Even if the combination of the left-side gaming board and the right-side gaming board becomes incompatible (mismatched), the operation of the movable decorative element, the performance operation unit 300, will operate without being restricted. In other words, the performance operation unit 301 will be driven and operated in a predetermined operating mode (in line with the progress of the performance).

If the consistency determination means determines that there is a mismatch within a specified period of time after power-on, the restrictions on the movable decorative object are lifted based on the fact that there is a match. Specifically, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of Figure 309, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines the consistency of State 2: ID Error 1 in Figure 308 (c) (Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Response) in Figures 310 to 315), that is, the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, and determines that the combination of the left-side gaming board and the right-side gaming board is incorrect. If it is determined that they are compatible (mismatched), the notification of Error Response 1 (ID Error 1) will be maintained, and the solution in Figure 308 (c): After the power is turned off and the ID is replaced with a compatible product, the status in Figure 308 (c): Normal is displayed, meaning the consistency between the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, is determined, and if it is determined that the combination of the left-side gaming board and the right-side gaming board is compatible (matched), the notification will be canceled.

G3:
A predetermined self-identification code (ID) is assigned to the right-side game board 5AR by hardware (a hardware circuit). Specifically, the eight ID setting terminals of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC of Fig. 305 provided on the right-side game board 5AR are electrically connected to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground) to assign an ID setting value (11110000B).

The ID assigned to the right-side gaming board 5AR by hardware (using a hardware circuit) is compared with the determination ID code, and if they are identical, a valid signal is output. Specifically, the ID code signal output from the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC (Fig. 305) provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR is input to the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL (Fig. 303). The peripheral control board 1510 obtains the ID of the right-side gaming board 5AR from this input ID code signal and determines (compares) it by referring to the combination table (Fig. 308) pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM, which is the determination ID code. The combination of the split gaming boards is performed in the ID determination process of step S1003 during the peripheral control unit power-on processing (Fig. 309). If the combination of the divided game boards is compatible (aligned), providing that the other IDs shown in Figure 308 (c) are compatible, the state will change to State 1: Normal, and the performance will proceed using the door frame units (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame units") such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3, and the divided game board 5A. The peripheral control board 1510 outputs a control signal to the performance operation unit 300, for example, to drive and operate the performance operation section 301 in a predetermined operating mode, as an enable signal to proceed with the performance.

The ID assigned to the right-side gaming board 5AR by hardware (using a hardware circuit) is compared with the determination ID code, and if they are not the same, a valid signal is not output. Specifically, the ID code signal output from the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC (Fig. 305) provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR is input to the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL (Fig. 303). The peripheral control board 1510 obtains the ID of the right-side gaming board 5AR from this input ID code signal and determines (compares) it by referring to the combination table (Fig. 308) pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM, which is the determination ID code. The combination of the split gaming boards is performed in the ID determination process of step S1003 during the peripheral control unit power-on processing (Fig. 309). If the combination of divided game boards is not compatible (matched), for example, when the peripheral control board 1510 reaches State 2: ID error 1 shown in Figure 308(c), in Error Response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power is turned on in Figure 310, the control signal that drives and operates the movable body on the game frame in a specified operating mode is not output as an effective signal to progress the performance, and the movable body on the game frame does not perform any operation such as returning to its original position (is not operating).

In some cases, no notification will be issued even if the control unit is operated at any time after power-on (if the ID is valid). Specifically, if Error Responses 1 through 9 are not occurring as shown in Figure 308(c) when the pachinko machine is operating normally (no error response) during an error, as shown in Figure 308(c), and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is performing the setting change process of step S37 in the main control power-on process due to the setting key being inserted into the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 and turned ON (until the specified period of time until this setting change process is completed) the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is unable to notify the user of normal operation (no error response). Furthermore, if the pachinko machine is operating normally (no error response) during an error as shown in Figure 308(c), the countermeasure is "none," so there is no special notification mode for normal operation (no error response). In other words, if the operation is normal (no error handling occurs), no notification will be given.

Note that, if the valid ID, ID error, or unconnection error is to be detected at any time after power-on, that is, if the pachinko machine's behavior during an error shown in FIG. 308(c) is normal operation (no error response), and ID errors and unconnection errors such as Error Responses 1 to 9 are determined during a predetermined period after power-on, as determined by the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 309, the errors may be detected at any time after power-on. Specifically, the valid ID, ID error, or unconnection error may be determined by performing the ID determination process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 267. The valid ID, ID error, or unconnection error related to the presentation operation unit may be determined in step S presentation operation unit information acquisition processing in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 267. In either case, if the pachinko machine's behavior during an error shown in FIG. 308(c) is normal operation (no error response), the corrective action is "none," so there is no special notification mode for normal operation (no error response). In other words, if the device is operating normally (no error handling is performed), no notification will be given.

If the ID is determined to be genuine, no notification will be issued even if the operating unit is operated thereafter. Specifically, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of Figure 309 that the ID is in State 1: Normal in Figure 308(c), i.e., a genuine ID, no notification will be issued (target method in the same figure: None). In other words, if the combination of the left and right game boards is determined to be normal and a normal ID within a specified period of time after power-on, the state of the combination of the left and right game boards will not be determined at all thereafter. Even if the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 at this time and turned on, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is performing the main control side main processing in the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 256 and the main control side timer interrupt processing of FIG. 257, and is therefore unable to perform the setting change processing of step S37 in the main control side power-on processing, so the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 will not be able to report that it is operating normally (no error handling).

If it is determined that the ID is not normal (abnormal ID), the notification will continue at least until it becomes normal. Specifically, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 309 that the ID is State 2: ID error 1 of FIG. 308(c) (Error Response 1 (ID error 1 response) of FIG. 310 to FIG. 315) is not normal (abnormal ID), the notification of Error Response 1 (ID error 1 response) will be maintained until the ID is replaced with a compatible ID after the remedy of FIG. 308(c): power is turned off. This notification makes it difficult to play while the left-side gaming board and right-side gaming board are incompatible (inconsistent) in combination.

If the ID is determined to be normal within a specified period of time after power-on, no notification is issued. However, if the ID is determined to be abnormal within a specified period of time after power-on, the notification mode may change if the state changes. In the case of an abnormality, the notification mode changes when the state returns to normal. Specifically, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 309, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 does not issue a notification (target method in the same figure: none) if it determines that the ID is normal, i.e., State 1 in FIG. 308(c): ID error 1 (error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in FIGS. 310 to 315), i.e., an abnormal ID, but maintains the notification of this error response 1 (ID error 1 response). If the ID is determined to be normal, i.e., a normal ID, after the countermeasure in FIG. 308(c): replacement with a compatible ID after power-off, the notification is no longer issued. In other words, if the combination of the left and right gaming boards is determined to be normal and a normal ID within a specified period of time after power-on, the state of the combination of the left and right gaming boards will not be determined at all thereafter, and even if the combination of the left and right gaming boards becomes incompatible (inconsistent), no notification will be issued to convey that the ID is abnormal due to the incompatibility (inconsistency). In this way, by limiting the determination of the combination of the left and right gaming boards to within a specified period of time after power-on, this can contribute to reducing the processing load on the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 for the progression of the presentation.

All but a few notifications are terminated. Specifically, for example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of Figure 309 that the ID is State 2: ID error 1 (Error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figures 310 to 315), in other words, an abnormal ID, it saves this as history information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) implemented on the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, it is saved linked to the date and time. Then, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned off and the correct combination of left and right game boards is attached to the main frame 3, and the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on again, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 309 that the ID is State 1: Normal (FIG. 308(c)), i.e., a normal ID, it may display a history of "ID abnormality" on the performance display device or sub-performance display device, and this history may be displayed for a predetermined period of time or until the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned off. The performance will proceed while the history is displayed.

Once the system has returned to normal, the notification mode will not change even if the system becomes abnormal again. Specifically, for example, to return from an abnormal state to a normal state, the game board must be removed and corrected, at which point the power to the pachinko machine must be shut off (turned off), cutting off the power supply to the peripheral control board, and the game board must be reattached and the pachinko machine must be powered on again. When the pachinko machine is powered on and power is supplied to the peripheral control board, the ID of the performance operation unit can be confirmed (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ID confirmation") by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 309. Therefore, when the pachinko machine is powered on, if the ID is confirmed by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 309 and notification processing is performed, which continues until the pachinko machine is powered off, then there is no need to control the ID confirmation or notification processing thereafter.

In other words, at any timing while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (when the pachinko machine 1 system has completed startup and is ready to proceed with game play and presentation), the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of Figure 309 is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 267, and when the presentation operation unit is attached or detached to or from the tray unit 200 of the door frame 4, if a presentation operation unit that has been determined to have a normal ID even once in the ID determination process that is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is replaced with another presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID (or if a presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID is replaced with a presentation operation unit with a normal ID, and then once determined to have a normal ID in the ID determination process that is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is returned to a presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID), as a result, even if the combination of the presentation operation unit and the divided game board is actually incompatible (inconsistent), the presentation will continue to proceed and no notification will be made that the presentation operation unit has an abnormal ID. Therefore, once the system has returned to normal, the notification mode will not change even if the system becomes abnormal again.

G4:
In the event of a mismatch, an abnormality is displayed on the LCD. Specifically, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the left-side game board and the right-side game board is incompatible (mismatched) during the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on process in FIG. 309, for example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) at power-on in FIG. 310, the performance display device 1600 displays notification text such as "Power is being restored" and "Please wait a moment" on a black background, and when the startup music ends, an image during the performance (for example, when a performance progresses based on game balls entering various winning slots) is displayed. Then, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power-on in FIG. 311, the performance display device 1600 displays notification text such as "Please wait a moment" on an image during the performance (for example, when a performance progresses based on game balls entering various winning slots) or an image while waiting for customers (for example, when a demonstration is being performed or when a still image is displayed).

In the event of a mismatch, no control is performed by the presentation control means. Specifically, for example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, which is the presentation control means, determines that the combination of the left-side game board and the right-side game board is incompatible (mismatched) during the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Figure 309, then, for example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power-on in Figure 311, the various LEDs of the door frame unit and the various LEDs of the game board that are controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are turned off (all turned off), and the game board-side movable body and game frame-side movable body that are controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are not operated (are not operated) to return to their original positions or the like.

In the event of a mismatch, an audio error is issued. Specifically, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the left-side gaming board and the right-side gaming board is incompatible (mismatched) during the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on process in Figure 309, for example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) at power-on in Figure 310, after the start-up music has finished, an announcement sound saying "Please call an attendant" is played and a specified error notification sound is played seven times. This type of audio is played repeatedly. Then, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power-on in Figure 311, an announcement sound saying "Please call an attendant" is played and a specified error notification sound is played seven times. This type of audio is played repeatedly.

In the event of a mismatch, the door frame lamp (which may be a lamp attached to a removable decorative member or a lamp attached to a non-removable decorative member) is illuminated in an abnormal state. Specifically, first, the door frame 3, which is supported on the main frame 4 so as to be able to open and close, is equipped with door frame units (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame units") such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450. If the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of Figure 309 that the combination of the left-side game board and the right-side game board is incompatible (mismatched), for example, in error response 1 after power-on (ID error 1 response) of Figure 313, the various LEDs of the door frame unit flash red in an abnormal state. The various LEDs in the door frame unit may be provided on various units (various decorative members) that are detachable from the door frame 3, or on various decorative members that are attached and fixed to the door frame 3.

If there are multiple second game board side components, all of the multiple second game board side components will not be driven unless even one has a valid ID. Specifically, if the right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, is further divided into an upper and lower part, as shown in Figure 307, and is composed of an upper right game board 5ART and a lower right game board 5ARU, the upper right game board 5ART is provided with an ID output circuit IDCT that can identify itself, and the lower right game board 5ARU is provided with an ID output circuit IDCU that can identify itself. The parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART and the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU are daisy-chain connected, and operate as a 16-bit shift register consisting of the 8-bit shift register by the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART and the 8-bit shift register by the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU. The contents held by each flip-flop of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART, which serves as the preceding 8-bit shift register, are input to the peripheral control board 1510, followed by the contents held by each flip-flop of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU, which serves as the following 8-bit shift register, one bit at a time, as serial data. The peripheral control board 1510 can acquire the ID code signal and determine the compatibility (matching) of the left-side gaming board 5AL and the right-side gaming board 5AR. When combining the upper right gaming board with the lower right gaming board, if the upper right gaming board 5ART and the lower right gaming board 5ARU are supposed to be combined, but another lower right gaming board that is incompatible (matched) with the upper right gaming board 5ART is combined, even if the left side gaming board 5AL and the upper right gaming board 5ART are compatible (matched), the various LEDs provided on the upper right gaming board 5ART and the various LEDs provided on the other lower right gaming board that is incompatible (matched) with the upper right gaming board 5ART will be turned off (all lights off).

[Summary H]
H1:
The game board comprises a game board side component having a plurality of frame light-emitting means, a game board side component provided on the game board side component and having a first game board side component and a second game board side component, an alignment determination means for determining alignment between the first game board side component and the second game board side component, and a plurality of board light-emitting means provided on the second game board side component, and if the alignment determination means determines that there is a misalignment, the light emission of the plurality of board light-emitting means provided on the second game board side component is restricted, and although the plurality of frame light-emitting means provided on the game board side component are not subject to determination by the alignment determination means, at least some of the light emission is restricted if it is determined that there is a misalignment between the first game board side component and the second game board side component.

Specifically, for example, a game board is attached to the main frame 4, and the door frame 3, which is supported on the main frame 4 so as to be able to open and close, is fitted with door frame units (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame units") such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450. The tray unit 200 is equipped with a performance operation unit 300. The performance operation unit 300 is provided with various decorative boards (e.g., performance operation unit outer peripheral decorative board 320, button outer decorative board 355, button middle decorative board 364, etc.) on which the various LEDs shown in Figure 53 (e.g., multiple LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) are mounted. The game frame side component, which is made up of the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, is provided with a game board side component, which includes a game board and a performance operation unit 300 having various LEDs (e.g., multiple LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) that serve as multiple frame light-emitting means.

It also includes a divided gaming board 5A (Fig. 302) which is a gaming board side component provided on the main frame 4, which is a gaming frame side component, and which has a left-side gaming board 5AL (Fig. 302) which is a first gaming board side component, and a right-side gaming board 5AR (Fig. 302) which is a second gaming board side component; an ID determination process in step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (Fig. 309) which is a matching determination means for determining matching between the left-side gaming board 5AL which is the first gaming board side component and the right-side gaming board 5AR which is the second gaming board side component; and various LEDs which are multiple board light-emitting means provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR which is the second gaming board side component (for example, various LEDs mounted on decorative boards in various presentation units housed in the right rear box 3010R located behind the right-side gaming board 5AR).

This performance operation unit 300 is not provided with any ID for self-identification and can be used in common with any specifications. It is provided with various decorative boards (e.g., performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320, button outer decorative board 355, button inner decorative board 364, etc.) on which the various LEDs (e.g., multiple LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) shown in Figure 53 are mounted. The various LEDs (e.g., multiple LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) mounted on the various decorative boards (e.g., performance operation unit outer periphery decorative board 320, button outer decorative board 355, button inner decorative board 364, etc.) provided on the performance operation unit 300 are treated as being included in the "various LEDs of the door frame unit" shown in Figures 310 to 315.

When an inconsistency is determined by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing, which is the consistency determination means, the light emission of the various LEDs mounted on the decorative boards in the various presentation units housed in the right rear box 3010R located behind the right side game board 5AR, which are multiple board light-emitting means provided on the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, is restricted.Although the various LEDs (e.g., multiple LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) mounted on the various decorative boards in the presentation operation unit 300, which are multiple frame light-emitting means provided on the door frame 3, which is the game frame side component, are not subject to determination by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing, which is the consistency determination means, when an inconsistency is determined between the left side game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, and the right side game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, the light emission of at least some of them (e.g., LED 364a) is restricted. For example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) when power is turned on in Figure 313, the various LEDs of the door frame unit flash red, but only some of the LEDs (e.g., LED 364a) among the various LEDs (e.g., multiple LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit 300 are turned off (all turned off). In addition, when it is determined that the left-side game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, and the right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, are inconsistent, the manner in which the light emission of the various LEDs (e.g., multiple LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit 300, which is multiple frame light-emitting means provided in the door frame 3, which is the game frame side component, is regulated may be controlled in a manner different from that when it is determined that the left-side game board 5AL, which is the first game board side component, and the right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, are consistent. For example, some or all of the various LEDs (e.g., multiple LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) mounted on various decorative boards in the performance operation unit 300, which is multiple frame light-emitting means provided on the door frame 3, which is a component of the gaming frame, may be turned off, or some or all of the various LEDs (e.g., multiple LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) mounted on various decorative boards in the performance operation unit 300, which is multiple frame light-emitting means provided on the door frame 3, which is a component of the gaming frame, may be made to emit light in a specific light-emitting mode (such as flashing red).

In this way, if the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, are mismatched, the emission of some (e.g., LED 364a) of the various LEDs (e.g., multiple LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) mounted on the various decorative boards in the effect operation unit 300, which is the frame light-emitting means and is not subject to ID determination processing in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing, which is the mismatch determination means, is restricted. This makes it possible to immediately determine that the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, are mismatched, preventing incomplete effects from being executed when the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, are mismatched. This therefore prevents a decline in interest in the game.

H2:
If the matching determination means determines that the left gaming board 5AL is a first gaming board component and the right gaming board 5AR is a second gaming board component in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 309, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines the matching between the left gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, and if it determines that the combination of the left gaming board and the right gaming board is matching (matching), it does not subsequently determine the matching (matching) between the left gaming board and the right gaming board at all. Even if the combination of the left gaming board and the right gaming board becomes incompatible (mismatched), the light emission of the various LEDs (e.g., multiple LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit 300, which is the frame light emitting means, is not restricted. In other words, the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit 300, which is the frame light-emitting means, will emit light in a predetermined light-emitting manner (in line with the progress of the performance).

If the consistency determination means determines that there is a mismatch within a predetermined period of time after power-on, the restrictions on the board light-emitting means and frame light-emitting means are lifted based on the fact that there is a match. Specifically, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of Fig. 309, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines the consistency of State 2: ID Error 1 in Fig. 308(c) (Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Correspondence) in Figs. 313 to 315) between the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, and determines that the combination of the left-side gaming board and the right-side gaming board is incompatible (mismatched), and issues a notification of this Error Response 1 (ID Error 1 Correspondence) (mounted on a decorative board in the various presentation units housed in the right-side rear box 3010R located behind the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the board light-emitting means). The various LEDs on the game board are turned off (all turned off), and only some of the LEDs (for example, LED 364a) mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit 300, which serves as the frame light-emitting means (for example, multiple LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) are turned off (all turned off). The solution in Figure 308(c) is maintained: After the power is turned off and the product is replaced with a compatible ID product, State 1 in Figure 308(c): Normal is achieved. In other words, the consistency between the left-side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, is determined, and the combination of the left-side game board and the right-side game board is determined to be compatible (matched), and the alarm is canceled.

Once a matching state has been reached, the illumination of the board light-emitting means and frame light-emitting means will not be restricted even if a mismatch state occurs again before the power is cut off. Specifically, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Figure 309, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines the matching between the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, and if it determines that the combination of the left-side gaming board and the right-side gaming board is compatible (matched), it will not thereafter determine the compatibility (matching) of the left-side gaming board and the right-side gaming board at all. Even if the combination with the right gaming board becomes incompatible (mismatched), the various LEDs mounted on the decorative boards in the various presentation units housed in the right rear box 3010R located behind the right gaming board 5AR, which serves as the board light-emitting means, will not be restricted from emitting light as the various LEDs of the gaming board, and the light emission of the various LEDs (e.g., multiple LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) mounted on the various decorative boards in the presentation operation unit 300, which serves as the frame light-emitting means, will not be restricted. In other words, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative boards in the various presentation units housed in the right rear box 3010R located behind the right gaming board 5AR, which serves as the board light-emitting means, will emit light in a predetermined light-emitting pattern (as the presentation progresses) as the various LEDs of the gaming board, and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards in the presentation operation unit 300, which serves as the frame light-emitting means, will emit light in a predetermined light-emitting pattern (as the presentation progresses).

H3:
A predetermined self-identification code (ID) is assigned to the right-side game board 5AR by hardware (a hardware circuit). Specifically, the eight ID setting terminals of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC of Fig. 305 provided on the right-side game board 5AR are electrically connected to +5V or ground (GND, circuit ground) to assign an ID setting value (11110000B).

The ID assigned to the right-side gaming board 5AR by hardware (using a hardware circuit) is compared with the determination ID code, and if they are identical, a valid signal is output. Specifically, the ID code signal output from the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC (Fig. 305) provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR is input to the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL (Fig. 303). The peripheral control board 1510 obtains the ID of the right-side gaming board 5AR from this input ID code signal and determines (compares) it by referring to the combination table (Fig. 308) pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM, which is the determination ID code. The combination of the split gaming boards is performed in the ID determination process of step S1003 during the peripheral control unit power-on processing (Fig. 309). If the combination of split game boards is compatible (aligned), providing that the other IDs shown in Figure 308 (c) are compatible, the state will change to State 1: Normal, and the effects will proceed using the door frame units (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame units") such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3, and the split game board 5A. The peripheral control board 1510 outputs, for example, a control signal to the effect operation unit 300 to cause the various LEDs (e.g., multiple LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) mounted on the various decorative boards in the effect operation unit 300 to emit light in a predetermined light-emitting pattern, as an enable signal to proceed with the effects.

The ID assigned to the right-side gaming board 5AR by hardware (using a hardware circuit) is compared with the determination ID code, and if they are not the same, a valid signal is not output. Specifically, the ID code signal output from the inverted QH terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa in the ID output circuit IDC (Fig. 305) provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR is input to the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL (Fig. 303). The peripheral control board 1510 obtains the ID of the right-side gaming board 5AR from this input ID code signal and determines (compares) it by referring to the combination table (Fig. 308) pre-stored in the peripheral control ROM, which is the determination ID code. The combination of the split gaming boards is performed in the ID determination process of step S1003 during the peripheral control unit power-on processing (Fig. 309). If the combination of divided game boards is not compatible (matched), for example, when the peripheral control board 1510 reaches State 2: ID error 1 shown in Figure 313 (c), in Error Response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power is turned on in Figure 313, control signals for the illumination of some of the various LEDs (for example, multiple LEDs 320a, LED 355a, LED 364a, etc.) mounted on the various decorative boards in the performance operation unit 300 are not output to the performance operation unit 300 as valid signals for progressing the performance, and the illumination of some of these LEDs (for example, LED 364a) is turned off (all lights off).

In some cases, no notification will be issued even if the control unit is operated at any time after power-on (if the ID is valid). Specifically, if Error Responses 1 through 9 are not occurring as shown in Figure 308(c) when the pachinko machine is operating normally (no error response) during an error, as shown in Figure 308(c), or if the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is performing the setting change process of step S37 in the main control side power-on process due to the setting key being inserted into the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 and turned ON (until the specified period of time until this setting change process is completed) the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is unable to notify the user of normal operation (no error response). Furthermore, if the pachinko machine is operating normally (no error response) during an error as shown in Figure 308(c), the countermeasure is "none," so there is no special notification mode for normal operation (no error response). In other words, if the operation is normal (no error handling occurs), no notification will be given.

Note that, if the valid ID, ID error, or unconnection error is to be detected at any time after power-on, that is, if the pachinko machine's behavior during an error shown in FIG. 308(c) is normal operation (no error response), and ID errors and unconnection errors such as Error Responses 1 to 9 are determined during a predetermined period after power-on, as determined by the ID determination process in step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 309, the errors may be detected at any time after power-on. Specifically, the valid ID, ID error, or unconnection error may be determined by performing the ID determination process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 267. The valid ID, ID error, or unconnection error related to the presentation operation unit may be determined in step S presentation operation unit information acquisition processing in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 267. In either case, if the pachinko machine's behavior during an error shown in FIG. 308(c) is normal operation (no error response), the corrective action is "none," so there is no special notification mode for normal operation (no error response). In other words, if the device is operating normally (no error handling is performed), no notification will be given.

If the ID is determined to be genuine, no notification will be issued even if the operating unit is operated thereafter. Specifically, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of Figure 309 that the ID is in State 1: Normal in Figure 308(c), i.e., a genuine ID, no notification will be issued (target method in the same figure: None). In other words, if the combination of the left and right game boards is determined to be normal and a normal ID within a specified period of time after power-on, the state of the combination of the left and right game boards will not be determined at all thereafter. Even if the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 at this time and turned on, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is performing the main control side main processing in the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 256 and the main control side timer interrupt processing of FIG. 257, and is therefore unable to perform the setting change processing of step S37 in the main control side power-on processing, so the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 will not be able to report that it is operating normally (no error handling).

If it is determined that the ID is not normal (abnormal ID), the notification will continue at least until it becomes normal. Specifically, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 309 that the ID is State 2: ID error 1 of FIG. 308(c) (Error Response 1 (ID error 1 response) of FIG. 310 to FIG. 315) is not normal (abnormal ID), the notification of Error Response 1 (ID error 1 response) will be maintained until the ID is replaced with a compatible ID after the remedy of FIG. 308(c): power is turned off. This notification makes it difficult to play while the left-side gaming board and right-side gaming board are incompatible (inconsistent) in combination.

If the ID is determined to be normal within a specified period of time after power-on, no notification is issued. However, if the ID is determined to be abnormal within a specified period of time after power-on, the notification mode may change if the state changes. In the case of an abnormality, the notification mode changes when the state returns to normal. Specifically, in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 309, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 does not issue a notification (target method in the same figure: none) if it determines that the ID is normal, i.e., State 1 in FIG. 308(c): ID error 1 (error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in FIGS. 313 to 315), i.e., an abnormal ID, but maintains the notification of this error response 1 (ID error 1 response). If the ID is determined to be normal, i.e., a normal ID, after the countermeasure in FIG. 308(c): replacement with a compatible ID after power-off, the notification is no longer issued. In other words, if the combination of the left and right gaming boards is determined to be normal and a normal ID within a specified period of time after power-on, the state of the combination of the left and right gaming boards will not be determined at all thereafter, and even if the combination of the left and right gaming boards becomes incompatible (inconsistent), no notification will be issued to convey that the ID is abnormal due to the incompatibility (inconsistency). In this way, by limiting the determination of the combination of the left and right gaming boards to within a specified period of time after power-on, this can contribute to reducing the processing load on the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 for the progression of the presentation.

All but a few notifications are terminated. Specifically, for example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of Figure 309 that the ID is State 2: ID error 1 (Error response 1 (ID error 1 response) in Figures 310 to 315), in other words, an abnormal ID, it saves this as history information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) implemented on the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, it is saved linked to the date and time. Then, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and the correct combination of left and right game boards is attached to the main frame 3, and the pachinko machine 1 is powered on again, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 309 that the ID is State 1: Normal (FIG. 308(c)), i.e., a normal ID, it may display a history of "ID abnormality" on the performance display device or sub-performance display device, and this history may be displayed for a predetermined period of time or until the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. The performance will proceed while the history is displayed.

Once the system has returned to normal, the notification mode will not change even if the system becomes abnormal again. Specifically, for example, to return from an abnormal state to a normal state, the game board must be removed and corrected, at which point the power to the pachinko machine must be shut off (turned off), cutting off the power supply to the peripheral control board, and the game board must be reattached and the pachinko machine must be powered on again. When the pachinko machine is powered on and power is supplied to the peripheral control board, the ID of the performance operation unit can be confirmed (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ID confirmation") by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 309. Therefore, when the pachinko machine is powered on, if the ID is confirmed by the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 309 and notification processing is performed, which continues until the pachinko machine is powered off, then there is no need to control the ID confirmation or notification processing thereafter.

In other words, at any timing while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (when the pachinko machine 1 system has completed startup and is ready to proceed with game play and presentation), the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of Figure 309 is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 267, and when the presentation operation unit is attached or detached to or from the tray unit 200 of the door frame 4, if a presentation operation unit that has been determined to have a normal ID even once in the ID determination process that is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is replaced with another presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID (or if a presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID is replaced with a presentation operation unit with a normal ID, and then once determined to have a normal ID in the ID determination process that is repeated as part of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is returned to a presentation operation unit with an abnormal ID), as a result, even if the combination of the presentation operation unit and the divided game board is actually incompatible (inconsistent), the presentation will continue to proceed and no notification will be made that the presentation operation unit has an abnormal ID. Therefore, once the system has returned to normal, the notification mode will not change even if the system becomes abnormal again.

H4:
In the event of a mismatch, an abnormality is reported on the LCD. Specifically, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the left and right game boards is incompatible (mismatched) in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 309, for example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) at power-on in FIG. 313, the effect display device 1600 displays "Power Restoring" on a black background, followed by notification text such as "Game Board Error Occurred,""ErrorNumber:,""Game Board Connection Error," and "Please Turn Off the Power and Check the Game Board," and displays an image in which the game board connection error portion of the pachinko machine is lit. Then, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power-on in FIG. 314, the effect display device 1600 displays notification text such as "Game Board Error Occurred,""ErrorNumber:,""Game Board Connection Error," and "Please Turn Off the Power and Check the Game Board," on a black background, and displays an image in which the game board connection error portion of the pachinko machine is lit.

In the event of a mismatch, no control is performed by the presentation control means. Specifically, for example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, which is the presentation control means, determines that the combination of the left-side game board and the right-side game board is incompatible (mismatched) during the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in Figure 309, then, for example, in error response 1 (ID error 1 response) after power-on in Figure 314, the various LEDs of the door frame unit controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 will flash red, the various LEDs on the game board will be turned off (all off), and the movable body on the game frame side controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 will not perform any operation such as returning to its original position (will remain unoperated).

In the event of a mismatch, an audio error is issued. Specifically, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 309 that the combination of the left and right game boards is incompatible (mismatched), for example, in error response 1 at power-on (ID error 1 response) of FIG. 313, the startup music at power-on is muted and a specified error notification sound is then played once, followed by an announcement sound saying, "A game board connection error has occurred. Please turn off the power and check the game board." This type of audio is played repeatedly. Then, in error response 1 after power-on (ID error 1 response) of FIG. 314, the specified error notification sound is played once, followed by an announcement sound saying, "A game board connection error has occurred. Please turn off the power and check the game board." This type of audio is played repeatedly.

In the event of a mismatch, the door frame lamp (which may be a lamp attached to a removable decorative member or a lamp attached to a non-removable decorative member) is illuminated in an abnormal state. Specifically, first, the door frame 3, which is supported on the main frame 4 so as to be able to open and close, is equipped with door frame units (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "door frame units") such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450. If the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process of step S1003 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of Figure 309 that the combination of the left-side game board and the right-side game board is incompatible (mismatched), for example, in error response 1 after power-on (ID error 1 response) of Figure 313, the various LEDs of the door frame unit flash red in an abnormal state. The various LEDs in the door frame unit may be provided on various units (various decorative members) that are detachable from the door frame 3, or on various decorative members that are attached and fixed to the door frame 3.

If there are multiple second game board side components, all of the multiple second game board side components will not be driven unless even one has a valid ID. Specifically, if the right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board side component, is further divided into an upper and lower part, as shown in Figure 307, and is composed of an upper right game board 5ART and a lower right game board 5ARU, the upper right game board 5ART is provided with an ID output circuit IDCT that can identify itself, and the lower right game board 5ARU is provided with an ID output circuit IDCU that can identify itself. The parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART and the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU are daisy-chain connected, and operate as a 16-bit shift register consisting of the 8-bit shift register by the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART and the 8-bit shift register by the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU. The contents held by each flip-flop of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCTa in the upper right game board 5ART, which serves as the preceding 8-bit shift register, are input to the peripheral control board 1510, followed by the contents held by each flip-flop of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCUa in the lower right game board 5ARU, which serves as the following 8-bit shift register, one bit at a time, as serial data. The peripheral control board 1510 can acquire the ID code signal and determine the compatibility (matching) of the left-side gaming board 5AL and the right-side gaming board 5AR. When combining the upper right gaming board with the lower right gaming board, if the upper right gaming board 5ART and the lower right gaming board 5ARU are supposed to be combined, but another lower right gaming board that is incompatible (matched) with the upper right gaming board 5ART is combined, even if the left side gaming board 5AL and the upper right gaming board 5ART are compatible (matched), the various LEDs provided on the upper right gaming board 5ART and the various LEDs provided on the other lower right gaming board that is incompatible (matched) with the upper right gaming board 5ART will be turned off (all lights off).

[Layout of the board on which the ID output circuit IDC is mounted]
In the above embodiment, the ID output circuit IDC, which mainly comprises a parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa having eight flip-flop circuits that generate a self-identification code (ID), may be mounted on a dedicated board behind the right-side gaming panel 5AR, or may be mounted on one of various relay boards, or may be mounted together with LEDs mounted on a decorative board, or may be mounted together with electronic components mounted on other boards. However, the ID output circuit IDC may also be mounted on a decorative board housed in the right-side rear box 3010R of the rear unit 3000, or on a decorative board provided in the door frame unit. Below, an embodiment will be described in which the ID output circuit IDC is mounted on a decorative board on which various LEDs and the like are mounted, the decorative board is housed in the right-side rear box 3010R of the rear unit 3000, and the ID output circuit IDC is located behind the right-side gaming panel 1100R. In addition, when the ID output circuit IDC is implemented on a decorative board provided in a door frame unit, it may be implemented on any of the multiple decorative boards mentioned above (the upper decorative board 422 on the left side of the door frame and the lower decorative board 423 on the left side of the door frame of the left side unit 420, and the upper decorative board 432 on the right side of the door frame and the lower decorative board 433 on the right side of the door frame of the right side unit 430).

Figure 324 is a schematic exploded oblique view of the right-side gaming board 5AR disassembled into the right-side gaming panel 1100R and the right-side rear box 3010R of the rear unit 3000, viewed from the front (the front side of the pachinko machine 1 with the right-side gaming board 5AR fixed to the main body frame 4). As shown in Figure 324, in an embodiment in which a decorative substrate 4100 on which an ID output circuit IDC is mounted is housed in the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000 and the ID output circuit IDC is attached to the rear of the right-side gaming panel 1100R, the decorative substrate 4100 is attached to the right-side rear box 3010R so that the ID output circuit IDC including a parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa that generates a self-identification code (ID) mounted on its surface (front surface, front mounting surface) and various LEDs 4120 face forward of the pachinko machine 1. The decorative board 4100 may be attached to the rear of the right-side gaming panel 1100R inside the right-side rear box 3010R, for example, via fixing members such as screws or pins, or may be attached to the rear of the right-side gaming panel 1100R inside the right-side rear box 3010R via an engagement portion formed on the decorative board 4100 and the right-side rear box 3010R.

As described above, the right-side gaming panel 1100R and right-side front component 1000R of the right-side gaming board 5AR are transparent, allowing the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative board 4100 to be viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 when the right-side gaming board 5AR is fixed to the main frame. A cover, at least a portion of which is opaque or translucent (such as a cover made opaque or translucent by applying a sticker, a cover made opaque or translucent using a resin material such as an opaque or translucent resin, or a cover made opaque or translucent by coloring, painting, printing, etc.) may be provided between the right-side gaming panel 1100R and the decorative board 4100. In this case, electronic components such as the ID output circuit IDC and LEDs mounted on the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative board 4100 can be prevented from being seen by the player, thereby preventing the worldview of the pachinko machine 1 from being disrupted and reducing interest in the game. Furthermore, when the ID output circuit IDC is mounted on a decorative board provided in a door frame unit, a cover may be provided in front of the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative board 4100, at least a portion of which is opaque or translucent (it may be made opaque or translucent by adhering a sticker, by using an opaque or translucent resin material, or by coloring, painting, printing, etc.). In this case, too, it is possible to prevent players from seeing the ID output circuit IDC, LEDs, and other electronic components mounted on the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative board 4100, preventing the worldview of the pachinko machine 1 from being disrupted and reducing interest in playing the game.

A light-colored resist is formed on at least the front surface (front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 (or on both the front surface (front mounting surface) and the back surface (rear surface) of the decorative substrate 4100) using a light-colored coating film over the entire area, excluding the pads, through-holes, lands, etc. to which electronic components such as the ID output circuit IDC, each LED 4120, and connectors are soldered. In this embodiment, the light-colored resist is a white resist, and is formed using a white coating film (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist") formed by applying a white resist liquid. The light-colored resist may also be a yellow or pink resist. A light-colored resist may also be formed on at least a portion of the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 where copper foil such as lands is exposed. In this case, the copper foil such as lands becomes less noticeable, preventing the worldview of the pachinko machine 1 from being disrupted and reducing interest in the game due to the copper foil such as lands being visible. The reflectance on the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 can be made uniform, preventing uneven light emission and improving the presentation effect. A light-colored resist may also be formed on a portion of the back surface (rear surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 where copper foil such as lands is exposed. In this case, the reflectance on the back surface (rear surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 can be made uniform, achieving uniform reflection when the decorative substrate 4100 functions as a reflector for other decorative substrates on which LEDs are mounted.

Furthermore, on the surface (front, surface mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100, near the mounted surface-side electronic components such as the ID output circuit IDC and various LEDs 4120, a surface-side indicia indicating the attributes of the surface-side electronic components, such as the component number of the surface-side electronic component and an area indicating the position where the surface-side electronic component is to be placed (which may also include the shape, size, mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the surface-side electronic component, and model number of the surface-side electronic component), is silk-screened on a solid white resist using a light yellow paint that is not easily noticeable against white. Note that if the light-colored resist is yellow or pink, the surface-side indicia may be silk-screened using a white, yellow, or pink paint that is a different color from the resist.

Here, we will explain why we used white for the resist liquid and yellow for the silk printing paint. First, the reflectance of a color increases as it approaches white and decreases as it approaches black. For example, the reflectance of yellow is very close to the reflectance of white compared to the reflectance of red, and the reflectance of red is very far from the reflectance of white compared to the reflectance of yellow. Yellow's reflectance is low compared to the reflectance of white, but it still has a high reflectance. Therefore, when combining white and red, the red stands out against a white background, and when the front-side marking (rear-side marking) is red, the red front-side marking (red rear-side marking against white resist) stands out against the white resist. However, when combining white and yellow (the configuration of this embodiment), the yellow does not stand out against a white background, and when the front-side marking (rear-side marking) is yellow, the yellow front-side marking (yellow rear-side marking against white resist) is less noticeable.

In addition, the pachinko machine 1 creates a dazzling lighting effect through illumination by multiple light-emitting elements such as LEDs mounted on each decorative board. Therefore, the multiple LEDs 4120 mounted on the front (surface) of the decorative board 4100 are, for example, full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors, and their light emission patterns change in various ways depending on whether they are turned on (light-emitting) or off. For this reason, as described above, the entire front (surface) of the decorative board 4100, excluding the pads, through-holes, lands, etc. to which the multiple LEDs are soldered, is coated with a white resist liquid to form a white coating (hereinafter, sometimes simply referred to as "solid white resist"). Furthermore, a surface-side indicia that identifies the multicolor-emitting full-color LEDs is printed on this solid white resist by silkscreen printing with yellow paint. This makes it possible to make the yellow surface-side indicia less noticeable against the white resist when the multicolor-emitting full-color LEDs are turned off, and prevents players from seeing information unrelated to the game. In addition to preventing the worldview of the pachinko machine 1 from being disrupted and interest in playing from decreasing due to the light being visible, when the full-color LED capable of emitting multiple colors is turned on (emitting light), the combination of a highly reflective solid white resist and a surface-side marking portion silk-screened with yellow paint that is very close to the reflectance of white makes it possible to maintain a high reflectance on the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100, and by combining the resist and surface-side marking portion with similar reflectances, it is possible to uniform the reflectance on the front (surface) of the decorative substrate 4100, thereby suppressing uneven light emission and improving the presentation effect.

On the back (rear) surface of the decorative substrate 4100, although not shown, near the connectors and other back-side electronic components, there is a back-side marking indicating the attributes of the back-side electronic components, such as the component number of the back-side electronic component and an area indicating the position where the back-side electronic component will be placed (which may also include the shape, size, mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the back-side electronic component, and model number of the back-side electronic component). This is silk-screened in yellow paint, a light color that is not easily noticeable against white, onto a solid white resist. Note that if the light-colored resist is yellow or pink, the back-side marking may be printed in white, yellow, or pink paint, a different color from the resist.

The front-side indicia formed on the front (surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 is not limited to those applied to the LED mounting surface by screen printing using ink of a color with high brightness and saturation (e.g., yellow), but may also be formed as foil-punched characters (i.e., punched characters formed by creating characters using a copper foil wiring pattern on the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed and punching out the copper foil around them), and the surface of these foil-punched characters is then coated with white solder resist (protective material) to be applied to the LED mounting surface to form the indicia. Alternatively, the indicia may be formed as white resist-punched characters using a double coat of white resist (after coating the entire LED mounting surface with white solder resist (first layer), masking out characters and symbols to avoid confusion with the mounted LEDs and other electronic components and other decorative substrates, and then coating the entire area excluding these with white solder resist again (second layer), thereby forming the masked areas, i.e., the characters and symbols, as white resist-punched characters). The indicia may also be formed by A marking indicating the part numbers of electronic parts such as LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the attributes of electronic parts such as areas indicating the positions where these electronic parts are to be arranged (which may further include the shape, size, mounting direction (mounting direction) of the electronic parts, and model of the electronic parts) may be formed on the back surface on which no LEDs are mounted by screen printing using ink of a predetermined color (not only colors with high brightness and saturation but also colors with low brightness and saturation), foil cut-out characters, white resist cut-out characters using two coats of white resist, etc. In these cases, In this case, the front-side markings become less noticeable and cannot be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 1, which prevents the player from seeing information unrelated to the game, disrupting the worldview of the pachinko machine 1 and reducing interest in the game. This also prevents a decrease in reflectivity on the front surface (surface) of the decorative board 4100 on which the LEDs are mounted, and makes it possible to uniform the reflectivity on the front surface (surface) of the decorative board 4100 on which the LEDs are mounted, thereby preventing uneven light emission and improving the presentation effect.

A partition cover 4130 is attached to the surface (front, surface mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100. The partition cover 4130 divides the surface (front, surface mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 into multiple areas, and has multiple openings formed therein to separate the ID output circuit IDC from electronic components such as various LEDs 4120, as shown in Figure 324. In other words, only the ID output circuit IDC is mounted in the specific area of the decorative substrate 4100 divided by the partition cover 4130, and other electronic components are mounted in areas of the decorative substrate 4100 other than the specific area divided by the partition cover 4130. In the example shown in Figure 324, the surface (front surface, surface mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 is divided into three areas by the partition cover 4130, and the ID output circuit IDC is mounted in a specific area of these three areas (the central area in Figure 324), and multiple LEDs 4120 are mounted in each of the other two areas; however, the number of divided areas is not limited to that described above, as long as the partition cover 4130 divides at least the surface (front surface, surface mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 into an area where only the ID output circuit IDC is mounted, and an area where other electronic components are mounted.

Here, if there is unauthorized access to the decorative board 4100 that implements the ID output circuit IDC, there is a risk that the effects produced by the decorative board 4100 will not be executed properly, and this inability to execute the effects produced by the decorative board 4100 properly may reduce interest in playing the game. The partition cover 4130 of this embodiment covers the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 and separates the ID output circuit IDC, which includes a parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa that generates a self-identification code (ID), from other electronic components (such as various LEDs 4120).This makes it easier to find the electronic component to be checked (in this case, the ID output circuit ICD) when unauthorized access is made to the decorative substrate 4100 while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, preventing the decorative substrate 4100 from performing normal presentations, or when investigating whether or not fraud has occurred while the pachinko machine 1 is powered off.This makes it possible to immediately identify the ID output circuit IDC mounted on the decorative substrate 4100 and return the self-identification code (ID) generated by the ID output circuit IDC to a normal state, allowing the decorative substrate 4100 to perform normal presentations, or to determine whether or not fraud has occurred in the ID output circuit IDC, thereby contributing to improved security. In this way, it is possible to easily find the electronic component (in this case, the ID output circuit ICD) that should be checked when investigating whether or not there has been any fraud, so that it is possible to determine whether or not fraudulent access has been made to the decorative board 4100 before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, which could prevent the decorative board 4100 from performing its effects properly, and return the self-identification code (ID) generated by the ID output circuit IDC to a normal state, or to immediately return the self-identification code (ID) generated by the ID output circuit IDC to a normal state if fraudulent access has been made to the decorative board 4100 while the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, preventing the decorative board 4100 from performing its effects properly. Furthermore, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to constantly determine whether the self-identification code (ID) generated by the ID output circuit IDC is normal (for example, by executing an ID determination process each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed), when the decorative board 4100 is accessed illegally while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and normal performance cannot be performed by the decorative board 4100, the self-identification code (ID) generated by the ID output circuit IDC can be returned to a normal state, immediately restoring the decorative board 4100 to a state where performance can be performed normally, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in playing due to the decorative board 4100 not being able to perform performance normally.

In addition, the compartment cover 4130 in this example has an opening that exposes the ID output circuit IDC mounted on the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative board 4100. Therefore, when the right-side gaming panel 1100R, right-side front component 1000R, and right-side rear box 3010R, which are provided in front of the decorative board 4100, are released from their attached state, the ID output circuit IDC can be operated to set a self-identification code (ID) without removing the compartment cover 4130 from the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative board 4100. Furthermore, because the ID output circuit IDC is positioned on the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative board 4100 so as to be separated from other electronic components (such as various LEDs 4120), the ID output circuit IDC can be easily identified when visually viewing the decorative board 4100 from the surface (front, front mounting surface) side. It is sufficient that the compartment cover 4130 has an opening that exposes at least a portion of the ID output circuit IDC (such as a switch that sets the self-identification code (ID)) mounted on the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100; other electronic components (such as the LED 4120 in this example) may be covered by the compartment cover 4130, or an opening that exposes at least a portion of the other electronic component (such as the LED 4120 in this example) (for example, the light-emitting element of the LED 4120) may be formed in the compartment cover 4130. Furthermore, if an LED 4120 is disposed as the other electronic component, by forming an opening in the compartment cover 4130 that exposes a portion of the LED 4120 (for example, the light-emitting element of the LED 4120), the light emitted from the LED 4120 can be irradiated forward of the pachinko machine 1 without being reduced by the compartment cover 4130, making it possible to produce effects with increased light intensity.

In addition, the compartment cover 4130 in this example is formed from an opaque material (e.g., opaque or translucent PP, etc.), and although the surface (front surface, surface mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 cannot be seen through the compartment cover 4130, electronic components such as the ID output circuit IDC and various LEDs 4120 can be seen through openings formed in the compartment cover.

The compartment cover 4130 may be formed from a transparent material (e.g., a colorless transparent or colored transparent material such as PS or PET) so that the surface (front surface, surface mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 can be seen through the compartment cover 4130. Even in this case, an opening may be formed in the compartment cover 4130 that exposes at least a portion of the ID output circuit IDC (e.g., a switch that sets the self-identification code (ID)) mounted on the surface (front surface, surface mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 and covers everything else. Other electronic components (e.g., the LED 4120 in this example) may be covered by the compartment cover 4130, or an opening may be formed in the compartment cover 4130 that exposes at least a portion of the other electronic component (e.g., the LED 4120's light-emitting element) (e.g., the LED 4120). As a result, the compartment cover 4130 protects electronic components such as the ID output circuit IDC and various LEDs 4120, preventing unauthorized access and enhancing security, and since the compartment cover 4130 is made of a transparent material, the light emitted from the LEDs 4120 can be directed forward of the pachinko machine 1 without being reduced as much as possible by the compartment cover 4130, making it possible to perform effects with increased light intensity. Furthermore, when the compartment cover 4130 is made of a transparent material, a partition wall extending from the back surface of the compartment cover 4130 toward the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 may be formed around all or part of the ID output circuit IDC to separate the area on the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 where the ID output circuit IDC is mounted from other areas, or printing or attaching a sticker or the like may be performed on the surface of the compartment cover 4130 to surround all or part of the area where the ID output circuit IDC is mounted. Furthermore, while the above effects can be achieved even when the compartment cover 4130 is formed as a colored transparent material, forming it as a colorless transparent material improves the translucency of the light emitted by the various LEDs 4120 and the visibility of the ID output circuit IDC compared to forming it as a colored transparent material, and prevents the compartment cover 4130 from emphasizing light of a specific color (the same color as the compartment cover 4130), allowing all emitted colors to be emitted under the same conditions, achieving uniform light emission without unevenness.

In addition, the decorative board 4100, on whose surface (front, front mounting surface) the various LEDs 4120 are mounted, is positioned so that its surface (front, front mounting surface) faces the front of the pachinko machine 1 (the front side of the pachinko machine 1) (so that its surface (front, front mounting surface) faces the player) when the right-side game board 5AR is fixed to the main body frame 4, and the ID output circuit IDC and various LEDs 4120 mounted on the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative board 4100 are also positioned so that they face the front of the pachinko machine 1 (the direction facing the player).

As described above, if there is unauthorized access to the decorative board 4100 corresponding to the new right-side gaming board 5AR, the effects of the decorative board 4100 may not be executed properly, which may reduce interest in the game. In this embodiment, the decorative board 4100 is positioned so that its surface (front, front mounting surface) faces the front of the pachinko machine 1 (facing the player), and the ID output circuit IDC and various LEDs 4120 mounted on the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative board 4100 are also positioned so that they face the front of the pachinko machine 1 (facing the player). Therefore, anyone attempting unauthorized access to the decorative board 4100 (ID output circuit IDC, various LEDs, etc.) will be accessing it from the front of the pachinko machine 1, making them more visible to the gaming hall's island equipment and gaming hall employees during unauthorized access, making it easier to detect unauthorized access. This makes it possible to prevent unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC from the outside, preventing unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC from the outside from causing the decorative board 4100 to be unable to properly execute its effects, and preventing a decrease in interest in the game due to the decorative board 4100 being unable to properly execute its effects.

In this example, the pachinko machine 1 is configured to make it difficult to access the decorative substrate 4100 from the back side. Specifically, a plate-shaped member is disposed behind the decorative substrate 4100 on the right-side gaming board 5AR on which the decorative substrate 4100 is mounted. The plate-shaped member of the right-side gaming board 5AR is attached along part or all of the outer surface of the back member (back surface member) of the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000 in which the decorative substrate 4100 is housed. The plate-shaped member of the right-side gaming board 5AR increases the strength of the rear box 3010 against external impacts and reduces the workability of the rear box 3010, such as by forming an opening in the back member (back surface member) of the rear box 3010. For example, an opening can be formed in the back member (back surface member) of the rear box 3010, preventing unauthorized access to the decorative substrate 4100 housed within the rear box 3010 through the opening. This prevents unauthorized external access to the ID output circuit IDC from causing the decorative board 4100 to be unable to properly execute its effects, and prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to the decorative board 4100 not being able to properly execute its effects. Furthermore, the plate-like member of the right-side gaming board 5AR is preferably made of metal, for example, an alloy such as aluminum or iron, in order to increase the strength of the back box 3010 against external impacts and to reduce the workability of the back box 3010, such as when forming openings in the back member of the back box 3010.

Furthermore, the metal plate-like member of the right-side gaming board 5AR need only be positioned behind the decorative board 4100 so as to overlap at least a portion of the decorative board 4100. It may be attached along part or all of the inner surface of the back member (back surface member) of the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000 in which the decorative board 4100 is housed, or part or all of the back member (back surface member) of the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000 may be made of metal. Similar to a member attached along part or all of the outer surface of the back member (back surface member) of the rear box 3010 of the rear unit 3000, this increases the strength of the rear box 3010 against external impacts and reduces the workability of the rear box 3010, such as by forming an opening in the back member (back surface member) of the rear box 3010. This prevents unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC from the outside, preventing the decorative board 4100 from being unable to properly execute effects, and prevents a decrease in game enjoyment due to the decorative board 4100 not being able to properly execute effects.

As described above, a white resist is formed on the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100. The LEDs 4120 mounted on the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 have white packages (not limited to white, but including colors similar to white, such as off-white and beige). Furthermore, on the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100, near the mounted ID output circuit IDC and various LEDs 4120, a surface-side notation indicating the attributes of the surface-side electronic components, such as the component number of the surface-side electronic components and an area indicating the position where the surface-side electronic components are to be placed (which may also include the shape, size, mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the surface-side electronic components, and model number of the surface-side electronic components), is silk-screened on a solid white resist using yellow paint, a light color that is not easily noticeable against white. In contrast, the ID output circuit IDC has a dark-colored exterior (black in this embodiment, but not limited to black, and can be a color that contrasts well with white, such as navy blue or purple) (it is sufficient if most of it is dark, or it can have a light-colored exterior in part, or light-colored letters (such as a model number) written on part of the exterior). Furthermore, of the multiple electronic components mounted on the decorative board 4100, electronic components with dark-colored exteriors, excluding the ID output circuit IDC, such as resistors and capacitors, are mounted on the back mounting surface of the decorative board 4100.

Therefore, on the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 on which a white resist is formed, the ID output circuit IDC, which has a dark exterior with high contrast (light and dark), can be easily identified, for example, by visual inspection. In other words, the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative board 4100 is configured to have a low contrast combination except for the ID output circuit IDC, so the ID output circuit IDC stands out when the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative board 4100 is viewed visually, drawing attention to the ID output circuit IDC when the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative board 4100 is viewed visually. This makes it easy to identify the ID output circuit IDC, so if there is unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC from outside and the decorative board 4100 is unable to properly perform its effects due to this unauthorized access, an amusement hall employee can easily visually identify the dark ID output circuit IDC from the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative board 4100 and immediately determine whether or not there has been unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC. This means that if there is unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC, the ID output circuit IDC can be corrected, preventing a decrease in interest in the game due to the decorative board 4100 being unable to properly perform its effects.

Of the multiple electronic components mounted on the decorative board 4100, electronic components (e.g., resistors, capacitors, etc.) with dark exteriors, excluding the ID output circuit IDC, are configured to be mounted on the back surface (rear surface, back mounting surface) of the decorative board 4100. However, it is sufficient that the configuration is such that electronic components with dark exteriors different from the ID output circuit IDC are not placed in the area where the ID output circuit IDC is placed among the areas on the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative board 4100 partitioned by the partition cover 4130, and electronic components with dark exteriors different from the ID output circuit IDC may be placed in the area where the ID output circuit IDC is not placed. In addition, the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100, partitioned by the partition cover 4130, is shown to be divided into an area where only the ID output circuit IDC is arranged and an area where the ID output circuit IDC is not arranged. However, the area of the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100, partitioned by the partition cover 4130 where the ID output circuit IDC is mounted, may also be used to arrange an electronic component, separate from the ID output circuit IDC, whose exterior color contrasts poorly with the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100. In this case, the ID output circuit IDC can still be made to stand out. Furthermore, the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100, partitioned by the partition cover 4130, may also be divided into an area where only the ID output circuit IDC is arranged and an area where multiple types of electronic components other than the ID output circuit IDC are arranged. In this case, too, the arrangement of only the ID output circuit IDC allows differentiation from other areas, making it easier to identify the area where the ID output circuit IDC is arranged.

In addition, in this embodiment, the compartment cover 4130 is formed in the same white color as the resist formed on the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100. Therefore, in addition to the resist formed on the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100, the surface-side markings, and the LEDs 4120 mounted on the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100, the compartment cover 4130 also has a low contrast with the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100, and only the ID output circuit IDC has a high contrast with the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100. As a result, when the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 is visually inspected, the ID output circuit IDC stands out, making it easier to identify the ID output circuit IDC. The entire compartment cover 4130 is not limited to being a color (white, yellow, off-white, beige, etc.) that contrasts poorly with the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100; as long as the surface of the decorative substrate 4100 (the surface facing the front of the pachinko machine 1) is a color that contrasts poorly with the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100, the surface of the compartment cover 4130 may be colored, painted, printed, etc. in a color that contrasts poorly with white (white, yellow, off-white, beige, etc.), or may have a sticker attached thereto in a color that contrasts poorly with white (white, yellow, off-white, beige, etc.). Furthermore, even when the compartment cover 4130 is formed colorless and transparent, the color of the surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100, including the compartment cover 4130, can be a low-contrast combination in the area excluding the ID output circuit IDC.

Here, on the surface (front, mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100, where the area other than the ID output circuit IDC is a combination of light colors with low contrast, the ID output circuit IDC, which has a black exterior and high contrast on the surface (front, mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100, is visible to the player, disrupting the worldview of the pachinko machine 1 and reducing interest in the game. In this embodiment, the ID output circuit IDC is mounted on the same surface as the various LEDs 4120 on the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100. This makes it difficult to look directly at the surface (front, front mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 due to the light emitted by the various LEDs 4120, making the ID output circuit IDC less noticeable. This prevents the player from seeing information unrelated to the game, disrupting the worldview of the pachinko machine 1 and reducing interest in the game.

[Another aspect of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa that generates a self-identification code (ID)]
In the above embodiment, a parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa is used as an example of a unique value generating unit that generates a unique value that can identify the right-side gaming board 5AR, and it has been explained that a self-identification code (ID) that is preset in the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa is transmitted as a signal from the ID output circuit IDC to the peripheral control board 1510. However, the unique value generating unit of the present invention is not limited to the form of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa, and may be, for example, a form that is composed of a switch mechanism using at least one dip switch mounted on the decorative board 4100 attached to the right-side gaming board 5AR, or a form that is composed of a photosensor mechanism in which the self-identification code (ID) is mechanically set when the right-side gaming board 5AR is assembled.

Figure 325 is a schematic oblique view of a portion of the right rear box 3010R of the rear unit 3000 of the right gaming board 5AR, viewed from the front. As shown in Figure 325, the switch mechanism has at least one dip switch mounted on the decorative board 4100 of the right gaming board 5AR. In this embodiment, the switch mechanism has two dip switches 4110A, 4110B. The dip switch 4110A is a rotary switch that can set a binary value by rotating the operating part, and in this embodiment, the dip switch 4110A can be set to a value from 0 to 15. In addition, the dip switch 4110B is an on/off switch that can be switched on/off by operating the operating part. The switch mechanism of this embodiment has a dip switch 4110A that can be set to a value between 0 and 15, and a dip switch 4110B that can be turned on and off. By operating the operation parts of each dip switch 4110A, 4110B, 32 different self-identification codes (IDs) can be generated. The self-identification codes (IDs) are preset by operating the operation parts of each dip switch 4110A, 4110B.

The self-identification code (ID) generated by the switch mechanism is transmitted as a signal to the peripheral control board 1510 via the ID output circuit IDC. Therefore, in the configuration using the switch mechanism, similar to the configuration in which a preset self-identification code (ID) is transmitted to the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa of the present embodiment, human error, such as leaving the right-side gaming board corresponding to the old left-side gaming board 5AL instead of replacing it with the right-side gaming board 5AR corresponding to the new left-side gaming board 5AL, is prevented. This prevents the loss of consistency throughout the gaming machine when a human error occurs, and reduces a decline in gaming interest. Furthermore, in the configuration using the switch mechanism, the self-identification code (ID) can be easily set by operating the operating parts of each DIP switch 4110A, 4110B.

Figure 326 is a schematic exploded oblique view of a portion of the right-side gaming board 5AR disassembled into the right-side gaming panel 1100R and the right-side rear box 3010R, viewed from the front. As shown in Figure 326, the photosensor mechanism has at least one photosensor 4110C mounted on the decorative substrate 4100 of the right-side gaming board 5AR, and a shielding portion 4110C4 attached to the right-side gaming panel 1100R of the right-side gaming board 5AR and capable of shielding the light guided by the photosensor 4110C. The photosensor mechanism of this embodiment has three photosensors 4110C and two shielding portions 4110C4. The photosensor 4110C, for example, has a light-emitting unit 4110C2 that emits light and a light-receiving unit 4110C3 that receives light emitted from the light-emitting unit 4110C2, and is switched on and off depending on whether the light-receiving unit 4110C3 receives light emitted from the light-emitting unit 4110C2. In the photosensor mechanism of this embodiment, three photosensors 4110C are mounted side by side on the surface (front surface, upper mounting surface) of the decorative substrate 4100 of the right-side gaming board 5AR, and each photosensor 4110C is on when its light-receiving unit 4110C3 receives light. In the photosensor mechanism of this embodiment, eight different self-identification codes (IDs) can be generated by switching the three photosensors 4110C on and off.

The shielding portion 4110C4 can be attached to the back surface of the right-side gaming panel 1100R in a position facing each photosensor 4110C, and has a shielding member that extends from the back surface of the right-side gaming panel 1100R between the light-emitting portion 4110C2 and the light-receiving portion 4110C3 of the opposing photosensor 4110C, blocking the light-receiving portion 4110C3 from receiving light emitted from the light-emitting portion 4110C2. In this embodiment, the shielding portion 4110C4 is attached to a position facing the photosensors 4110C on both sides, excluding the center, of the three photosensors 4110C mounted side by side on the decorative board 4100 of the right-side gaming board 5AR. If the shielding portion 4110C4 is not provided, a self-identification code (ID) will be generated in which all three photosensors 4110C are turned on. However, since all three photosensors 4110C will also be turned on when the right-side gaming panel 1100R is not attached to the right-side gaming board 5AR, it is preferable not to use a self-identification code (ID) in which all three photosensors 4110C are turned on.

The self-identification code (ID) generated by the photosensor mechanism is transmitted as a signal to the peripheral control board 1510 via the ID output circuit IDC. Therefore, in the configuration using the photosensor mechanism, similar to the configuration in which a preset self-identification code (ID) is transmitted to the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa of the present embodiment, human error, such as leaving the right-side gaming board corresponding to the old left-side gaming board 5AL instead of replacing it with the right-side gaming board 5AR corresponding to the new left-side gaming board 5AL, can be prevented. This prevents the loss of consistency across the entire gaming machine when a human error occurs, and reduces a decline in gaming interest. Furthermore, in the configuration using the photosensor mechanism, it is difficult to change the mounting position of the shielding portion 4110C4 attached to the right-side gaming panel 1100R, making it difficult to easily change the self-identification code (ID) setting, thereby preventing unauthorized changes to the self-identification code (ID).

[Summary A1]
A gaming machine includes a game frame-side component having an outer frame, a main frame attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a game board-side component attached to the game frame-side component and having a first game board-side component and a second game board-side component, the game board-side component being attached to the game frame-side component and having a first game board-side component and a second game board-side component. The first game board-side component is equipped with a presentation control board equipped with a microprocessor that executes game presentations. The second game board-side component is equipped with an eigenvalue generating means capable of generating an eigenvalue that can identify the second game board-side component, an eigenvalue transmitting unit that transmits the eigenvalue generated by the eigenvalue generating means to the presentation control board, and a specific board on which multiple electronic components are mounted. The eigenvalue generating means is provided on the first board surface side of the specific board, and the presentation control board is capable of executing an unconnected notification process that notifies of an unconnected state when an eigenvalue is not input from the eigenvalue transmitting unit. The second game board side component has a partition section that partitions the first board surface of the specific board into a specific area including an area where the eigenvalue generating means is provided and a non-specific area that does not include an area where the eigenvalue generating means is provided.

Specifically, for example, pachinko machine 1 comprises a main frame 4, which is the gaming frame component, and a divided gaming board 5A fixed to main frame 4 (Fig. 302), which is the gaming board component. Divided gaming board 5A is composed of a left gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and a right gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component. Left gaming board 5AL is composed of multiple boards (e.g., main control board 1310 housed in main control unit 1300), including a peripheral control board 1510, which is a performance control board that executes game performances and is equipped with a peripheral control IC 1510a, a microprocessor that integrates a CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA controller, and various I/O interfaces on a single semiconductor chip. The right-side gaming board 5AR is equipped with a parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa, which is a unique value generating means that generates a self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value that can identify it as the right-side gaming board 5AR; an ID output circuit IDC, which is a unique value transmitting unit that transmits the self-identification code (ID) generated by the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa, to the peripheral control board 1510; and a specific board (decorative board 4100 on which electronic components such as various LEDs 4120 are mounted) on the first board surface of which are mounted multiple electronic components (such as various LEDs 4120) including an IDC output circuit IDC that primarily consists of the parallel-serial conversion circuit IDCa.

The peripheral control board 1510 is capable of executing an unconnected notification process (for example, the power-on error response 7 described above) that notifies of an unconnected state (for example, the power-on state 8 described above) when there is no self-identification code (ID) input from the ID output circuit IDC (for example, the power-on unconnected error 1 described above). The right-side game board 5AR has a partition cover 4130, which is a partition that separates the ID output circuit IDC from other electronic components (such as the various LEDs 4120) among the multiple electronic components mounted on the first board surface of the decorative board 4100.

In this way, when there is no self-identification code (ID) input from the ID output circuit IDC (e.g., in the case of the above-mentioned power-on unconnection error 1), it is possible to execute a disconnection notification process (e.g., the above-mentioned power-on error response 7) that notifies of an unconnected state (e.g., the above-mentioned power-on state 8). This prevents incomplete effects from being executed when the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, are not connected, thereby preventing a decrease in the player's interest in the game. The partition cover 4130 covers the first board surface of the decorative board 4100 and separates the ID output circuit IDC, which generates the self-identification code (ID), from other electronic components (such as the various LEDs 4120). This prevents unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC from the outside, preventing unauthorized effects from being executed, and preventing a decrease in the player's interest in the game. Furthermore, because an opening is formed in the compartment cover 4130, when the right-side gaming panel 1100R and right-side front component 1000R are disassembled from the right-side rear box 3010R, electronic components such as the ID output circuit IDC and various LEDs 4120 can be seen through the opening, even when the compartment cover 4130 is attached to the front of the right-side gaming panel 1100R. In addition, because the ID output circuit IDC is separated from other electronic components (such as the various LEDs 4120), the ID output circuit IDC can be easily identified.

[Summary A2]
A gaming machine includes a gaming frame-side component having an outer frame, a main frame attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a gaming board-side component attached to the gaming frame-side component and having a first gaming board-side component and a second gaming board-side component, the gaming board-side component being attached to the gaming frame-side component and including the first gaming board-side component and the second gaming board-side component. The first gaming board-side component includes a presentation control board equipped with a microprocessor that executes game presentations. The second gaming board-side component includes an eigenvalue generating means capable of generating an eigenvalue that can identify the second gaming board-side component, an eigenvalue transmitting unit that transmits the eigenvalue generated by the eigenvalue generating means to the presentation control board, and a specific board on which multiple electronic components are mounted. The eigenvalue generating means is provided on the first board surface side of the specific board, and the presentation control board is capable of executing an unconnected notification process that notifies of an unconnected state when an eigenvalue is not input from the eigenvalue transmitting unit. The specific board is arranged so that the first board surface faces the front of the gaming machine.

Specifically, for example, pachinko machine 1 comprises a main frame 4, which is the gaming frame component, and a divided gaming board 5A, which is the gaming board component, fixed to main frame 4 (Fig. 302). Divided gaming board 5A is composed of a left gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and a right gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component. Left gaming board 5AL is composed of multiple boards (e.g., main control board 1310 housed in main control unit 1300), including a peripheral control board 1510, which is a performance control board that executes game performances and is equipped with a peripheral control IC 1510a, a microprocessor that integrates a CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA controller, and various I/O interfaces on a single semiconductor chip. The right-side gaming board 5AR is equipped with a parallel-serial circuit IDCa, which is a unique value generating means that generates a self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value that can identify it as the right-side gaming board 5AR; an ID output circuit IDC (see Figure 305), which is a unique value transmitting unit that transmits the self-identification code (ID) generated by the parallel-serial circuit IDCa to the peripheral control board 1510; and a specific board (decorative board 4100 on which various LEDs 4120 are mounted) on the first board surface of which multiple electronic components (such as various LEDs 4120) including the ID output circuit IDC are mounted.

The peripheral control board 1510 is capable of executing an unconnected notification process (for example, the power-on error response 7 described above) that notifies of an unconnected state (for example, the power-on state 8 described above) when no self-identification code (ID) is input from the ID output circuit IDC (for example, the power-on unconnected error 1 described above). The decorative board 4100, on which the various LEDs 4120 are mounted, is positioned so that its first board surface faces the front of the pachinko machine 1.

In this way, when there is no input of the self-identification code (ID) from the ID output circuit IDC (for example, in the case of the unconnected error 1 at power-on described above), it is possible to execute an unconnected notification process (for example, the error response 7 at power-on described above) that notifies of an unconnected state (for example, the state 8 at power-on described above).This prevents incomplete presentations from being executed when the left-side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, are unconnected, thereby preventing a decrease in the player's interest in the game. Furthermore, the decorative board 4100 on which the various LEDs 4120 are mounted is positioned so that its first board surface faces the front of the pachinko machine 1. This makes it easier for the island equipment in the amusement hall and employees to visually detect any unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC from outside, suppressing unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC from outside and preventing unauthorized effects from being executed through unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC from outside, thereby preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game.

[Summary A3]
A gaming machine includes a gaming frame-side component having an outer frame, a main frame attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a gaming board-side component attached to the gaming frame-side component and having a first gaming board-side component and a second gaming board-side component, the gaming board-side component being attached to the gaming frame-side component and including the first gaming board-side component and the second gaming board-side component. The first gaming board-side component includes a presentation control board equipped with a microprocessor that executes game presentations. The second gaming board-side component includes an eigenvalue generating means capable of generating an eigenvalue that can identify the second gaming board-side component, an eigenvalue transmitting unit that transmits the eigenvalue generated by the eigenvalue generating means to the presentation control board, and a specific board on which multiple electronic components are mounted. The eigenvalue generating means is provided on the first board surface side of the specific board, and the presentation control board is capable of executing an unconnected notification process that notifies of an unconnected state when an eigenvalue is not input from the eigenvalue transmitting unit. A light-colored white resist is formed on the first substrate surface of the specific substrate, and the eigenvalue generating means provided on the first substrate surface side on which the white resist is formed has a dark exterior.

Specifically, for example, pachinko machine 1 comprises a main frame 4, which is the gaming frame component, and a divided gaming board 5A, which is the gaming board component, fixed to main frame 4 (Fig. 302). Divided gaming board 5A is composed of a left gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and a right gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component. Left gaming board 5AL is composed of multiple boards (e.g., main control board 1310 housed in main control unit 1300), including a peripheral control board 1510, which is a performance control board that executes game performances and is equipped with a peripheral control IC 1510a, a microprocessor that integrates a CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA controller, and various I/O interfaces on a single semiconductor chip. The right-side gaming board 5AR is equipped with a parallel-serial circuit IDCa, which is a unique value generating means that generates a self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value that can identify it as the right-side gaming board 5AR; an ID output circuit IDC (see Figure 305), which is a unique value transmitting unit that transmits the self-identification code (ID) generated by the parallel-serial circuit IDCa to the peripheral control board 1510; and a specific board (decorative board 4100 on which various LEDs 4120 are mounted) on the first board surface of which multiple electronic components (such as various LEDs 4120) including the ID output circuit IDC are mounted.

The peripheral control board 1510 is capable of executing an unconnected notification process (for example, the power-on error response 7 described above) that notifies of an unconnected state (for example, the power-on state 8 described above) when no self-identification code (ID) is input from the ID output circuit IDC (for example, the power-on unconnected error 1 described above). A white resist is formed as a light color on the first board surface of the decorative board 4100 on which the various LEDs 4210 are mounted, and the ID output circuit IDC has a dark black exterior.

In this way, when there is no self-identification code (ID) input from the ID output circuit IDC (for example, in the case of the power-on unconnection error 1 described above), it is possible to execute an unconnection notification process (for example, the power-on error response 7 described above) that notifies of an unconnected state (for example, the power-on state 8 described above). This prevents an incomplete effect from being executed when the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right-side gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, are unconnected, thereby preventing a decrease in the player's interest in the game. Furthermore, because a white resist is formed on the first board surface of the decorative board 4100 and the exterior of the ID output circuit IDC is black, even if there is unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC from outside and an unauthorized effect is executed as a result of this unauthorized access, the black ID output circuit IDC against the white decorative board 4100 can be easily identified visually, for example, by an amusement hall employee. This prevents the execution of unauthorized effects by modifying the ID output circuit IDC, thereby preventing a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[Summary B1]
A gaming machine comprising: a gaming frame-side component having an outer frame, a main frame attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a gaming board-side component attached to the gaming frame-side component and having a first gaming board-side component and a second gaming board-side component, the gaming board-side component being attached to the gaming frame-side component and having a first gaming board-side component and a second gaming board-side component, the first gaming board-side component comprising a presentation control board equipped with a microprocessor that executes game presentations, the second gaming board-side component comprising: eigenvalue generating means capable of generating a eigenvalue that can be identified as the second gaming board-side component; an eigenvalue transmitting unit that transmits the eigenvalue generated by the eigenvalue generating means to the presentation control board; and a specific board on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted. The unique value generating means is provided on the first board surface side of the specific board, and the performance control board is capable of executing an abnormal connection notification process that notifies of an abnormal connection state when the unique value input from the unique value transmission unit is not a preset value. The second game board side component has a partition unit that partitions the first board surface of the specific board into a specific area including an area where the unique value generating means is provided and a non-specific area that does not include the area where the unique value generating means is provided.

Specifically, for example, pachinko machine 1 comprises a main frame 4, which is the gaming frame component, and a divided gaming board 5A, which is the gaming board component, fixed to main frame 4 (Fig. 302). Divided gaming board 5A is composed of a left gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and a right gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component. Left gaming board 5AL is composed of multiple boards (e.g., main control board 1310 housed in main control unit 1300), including a peripheral control board 1510, which is a performance control board that executes game performances and is equipped with a peripheral control IC 1510a, a microprocessor that integrates a CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA controller, and various I/O interfaces on a single semiconductor chip. The right-side gaming board 5AR is equipped with a parallel-serial circuit IDCa, which is a unique value generating means that generates a self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value that can identify it as the right-side gaming board 5AR; an ID output circuit IDC (see Figure 305), which is a unique value transmitting unit that transmits the self-identification code (ID) generated by the parallel-serial circuit IDCa to the peripheral control board 1510; and a specific board (decorative board 4100 on which various LEDs 4120 are mounted) on the first board surface of which multiple electronic components (such as various LEDs 4120) including the ID output circuit IDC are mounted.

The peripheral control board 1510 is capable of executing an abnormal connection notification process (for example, the above-mentioned power-on error response 1) that notifies of an abnormal connection state (for example, the above-mentioned power-on state 2) when the self-identification code (ID) input from the ID output circuit IDC is not a preset value (for example, the above-mentioned power-on ID error 1). The right-side game board 5AR has a partition cover 4130, which is a partition that separates the ID output circuit IDC from other electronic components (such as the various LEDs 4120) among the multiple electronic components mounted on the first board surface of the decorative board 4100.

In this way, if the self-identification code (ID) input from the ID output circuit IDC is not a preset value (e.g., in the case of the above-mentioned ID error 1 upon power-on), an abnormal connection notification process (e.g., the above-mentioned power-on error response 1) can be executed to notify of an abnormal connection state (e.g., the above-mentioned power-on state 2). This prevents incomplete effects from being executed due to an abnormal connection state between the left gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and the right gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component, and reduces a decrease in the player's interest in the game. The partition cover 4130 covers the first board surface of the decorative board 4100 and separates the ID output circuit IDC, including the parallel-serial circuit IDCa that generates the self-identification code (ID), from other electronic components (such as the various LEDs 4120). This prevents unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC from outside, preventing the execution of unauthorized effects and reducing a decrease in the player's interest in the game. Furthermore, because an opening is formed in the compartment cover 4130, when the right-side gaming panel 1100R and right-side front component 1000R are disassembled from the right-side rear box 3010R, electronic components such as the ID output circuit IDC and various LEDs 4120 can be seen through the opening, even when the compartment cover 4130 is attached to the front of the right-side gaming panel 1100R. In addition, because the ID output circuit IDC is separated from other electronic components (such as the various LEDs 4120), the ID output circuit IDC can be easily identified.

[Summary B2]
A gaming machine comprising: a gaming frame-side component having an outer frame, a main frame attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a gaming board-side component attached to the gaming frame-side component and having a first gaming board-side component and a second gaming board-side component, the gaming board-side component being attached to the gaming frame-side component and having a first gaming board-side component and a second gaming board-side component, the first gaming board-side component comprising a presentation control board equipped with a microprocessor that executes game presentations, the second gaming board-side component comprising: eigenvalue generating means capable of generating a eigenvalue that can be identified as the second gaming board-side component; an eigenvalue transmitting unit that transmits the eigenvalue generated by the eigenvalue generating means to the presentation control board; and a specific board on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted. The specific board is arranged so that the first board surface faces the front of the gaming machine, and the performance control board is capable of executing an abnormal connection notification process that notifies the player that an abnormal connection state exists when the specific value input from the specific value transmission unit is not a preset value.

Specifically, for example, pachinko machine 1 comprises a main frame 4, which is the gaming frame component, and a divided gaming board 5A, which is the gaming board component, fixed to main frame 4 (Fig. 302). Divided gaming board 5A is composed of a left gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and a right gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component. Left gaming board 5AL is composed of multiple boards (e.g., main control board 1310 housed in main control unit 1300), including a peripheral control board 1510, which is a performance control board that executes game performances and is equipped with a peripheral control IC 1510a, a microprocessor that integrates a CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA controller, and various I/O interfaces on a single semiconductor chip. The right-side gaming board 5AR is equipped with a parallel-serial circuit IDCa, which is a unique value generating means that generates a self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value that can identify it as the right-side gaming board 5AR; an ID output circuit IDC (see Figure 305), which is a unique value transmitting unit that transmits the self-identification code (ID) generated by the parallel-serial circuit IDCa to the peripheral control board 1510; and a specific board (decorative board 4100 on which various LEDs 4120 are mounted) on the first board surface of which multiple electronic components (such as various LEDs 4120) including the ID output circuit IDC are mounted.

The peripheral control board 1510 is capable of executing an abnormal connection notification process (for example, the above-mentioned power-on error response 1) that notifies of an abnormal connection state (for example, the above-mentioned power-on state 2) when the self-identification code (ID) input from the ID output circuit IDC is not a preset value (for example, the above-mentioned power-on ID error 1). The decorative board 4100, on which the various LEDs 4120 are mounted, is positioned so that the first board surface faces the front of the pachinko machine 1.

In this way, if the self-identification code (ID) input from the ID output circuit IDC is not a preset value (for example, in the case of ID error 1 at power-on described above), it is possible to execute an abnormal connection notification process (for example, error response 1 at power-on described above) that notifies of an abnormal connection state (for example, state 2 at power-on described above).This prevents incomplete presentations from being executed when the left-side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, are in an abnormal connection state, and prevents a decrease in the player's interest in the game. Furthermore, the decorative board 4100 on which the various LEDs 4120 are mounted is positioned so that its first board surface faces the front of the pachinko machine 1. This makes it easier for the island equipment in the amusement hall and employees to visually detect any unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC from outside, suppressing unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC from outside and preventing unauthorized effects from being executed through unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC from outside, thereby preventing a decline in the player's interest in the game.

[Summary B3]
A gaming machine comprising: a gaming frame-side component having an outer frame, a main frame attached to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a gaming board-side component attached to the gaming frame-side component and having a first gaming board-side component and a second gaming board-side component, the gaming board-side component being attached to the gaming frame-side component and having a first gaming board-side component and a second gaming board-side component, the first gaming board-side component comprising a presentation control board equipped with a microprocessor that executes game presentations, the second gaming board-side component comprising: eigenvalue generating means capable of generating a eigenvalue that can be identified as the second gaming board-side component; an eigenvalue transmitting unit that transmits the eigenvalue generated by the eigenvalue generating means to the presentation control board; and a specific board on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted. The unique value generating means is provided on the first board surface side of the specific board, and the performance control board is capable of executing an abnormal connection notification process that notifies of an abnormal connection state when the unique value input from the unique value transmission unit is not a preset value. A light-colored white resist is formed on the first board surface of the specific board, and the unique value generating means provided on the first board surface side on which the white resist is formed has a dark-colored exterior.

Specifically, for example, pachinko machine 1 comprises a main frame 4, which is the gaming frame component, and a divided gaming board 5A, which is the gaming board component, fixed to main frame 4 (Fig. 302). Divided gaming board 5A is composed of a left gaming board 5AL, which is the first gaming board component, and a right gaming board 5AR, which is the second gaming board component. Left gaming board 5AL is composed of multiple boards (e.g., main control board 1310 housed in main control unit 1300), including a peripheral control board 1510, which is a performance control board that executes game performances and is equipped with a peripheral control IC 1510a, a microprocessor that integrates a CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, serial ATA controller, and various I/O interfaces on a single semiconductor chip. The right-side gaming board 5AR is equipped with a parallel-serial circuit IDCa, which is a unique value generating means that generates a self-identification code (ID), which is a unique value that can identify it as the right-side gaming board 5AR; an ID output circuit IDC (see Figure 305), which is a unique value transmitting unit that transmits the self-identification code (ID) generated by the parallel-serial circuit IDCa to the peripheral control board 1510; and a specific board (decorative board 4100 on which various LEDs 4120 are mounted) on the first board surface of which multiple electronic components (such as various LEDs 4120) including the ID output circuit IDC are mounted.

The peripheral control board 1510 is capable of executing an abnormal connection notification process (for example, the above-mentioned power-on error response 1) that notifies of an abnormal connection state (for example, the above-mentioned power-on state 2) when the self-identification code (ID) input from the ID output circuit IDC is not a preset value (for example, the above-mentioned case of ID error 1 at power-on). A white resist is formed as a light color on the first board surface of the decorative board 4100 on which the various LEDs 4120 are mounted, and the ID output circuit IDC has a black exterior as a dark color.

In this way, if the self-identification code (ID) input from the ID output circuit IDC is not a preset value (for example, in the case of ID error 1 at power-on described above), it is possible to execute an abnormal connection notification process (for example, error response 1 at power-on described above) that notifies of an abnormal connection state (for example, state 2 at power-on described above).This prevents incomplete presentations from being executed when the left-side game board 5AL, which is the first game board component, and the right-side game board 5AR, which is the second game board component, are in an abnormal connection state, and prevents a decrease in the player's interest in the game. Furthermore, because a white resist is formed on the first substrate surface of the decorative substrate 4100 and the exterior of the ID output circuit IDC is black, even if there is unauthorized access to the ID output circuit IDC from outside and unauthorized performances are executed as a result of the unauthorized access, the black ID output circuit IDC can be easily identified visually from the white decorative substrate 4100, for example, by an amusement hall employee, and modification of the ID output circuit IDC can be prevented to execute unauthorized performances, preventing a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[Setting change and split game board ID error]
Next, the combination of the divided game board 5A (that is, the combination of the right game board 5AR (having only a board on which a microprocessor is not mounted) and the left game board 5AL (having a peripheral control board 1510 or a main control board 1310 on which a microprocessor is mounted, and a board on which a microprocessor is not mounted)) is in an incompatible (mismatched) state (incompatible state or mismatched state. In this example, the right game board 5AR having an ID different from the regular ID and the left game board 5AL having the regular ID are connected.) or the right game board 5AR An example of behavior will be described below when changing the setting value in a disconnected state (disconnected state; in this example, a state in which the right-side gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected to the left-side gaming board 5AL, regardless of whether the right-side gaming board 5AR has a valid ID), where there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side gaming board 5AL (the input of an ID code signal from the right-side gaming board 5AR cannot be confirmed), causing a malfunction such as a short circuit or disconnection in the transmission path for transmitting various signals. For comparison, an example of behavior will also be described below when changing the setting value in a compatible (matched) state (matched state) state for the combination of the split gaming board 5A (i.e., a combination of the right-side gaming board 5AR (a board not equipped with a microprocessor) and the left-side gaming board 5AL (a peripheral control board 1510 or main control board 1310 equipped with a microprocessor)). Figure 327 is an example of behavior when the setting value is changed when the split gaming board 5A, which is composed of a left gaming board 5AL and a right gaming board 5AR, is compatible (matched) as a combination of split gaming boards 5A; Figure 328 is an example of behavior when the setting value is changed when the combination of split gaming boards 5A is incompatible (mismatched); and Figure 331 is an example of behavior when the setting value is changed when the right gaming board 5AR is not connected.

[Change of setting value when compatible]
327, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 displays "power on" on the effect display device 1600 for a predetermined period of time to notify that power has been applied to the pachinko machine 1. Meanwhile, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right game board 5AR, and the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 provided on the left game board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 are turned off. Furthermore, as described above, if the predetermined setting value change permission conditions are met when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 starts (in this example, after inserting the setting key into the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 and turning it ON, the power switch 630a on the power supply board 630 is operated while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f to turn on the power to the pachinko machine 1), then after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes a setting change process (step S37), making it possible to select and determine the setting value. In addition, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right game board 5AR, and some or all of the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 provided on the left game board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 may also be made to light up in a predetermined manner, making it easier to determine that power supply to the pachinko machine 1 has started.

In addition, when the setting change process is initiated, a setting change start command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510, informing the user that a setting change of the setting value has begun. When the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting change start command, it causes the performance display device 1600 to display a setting change notification (in this example, "Setting change in progress") (this may be displayed until the setting change process is completed, or may be displayed for a certain period of time and then terminated), and it also causes the various speakers to repeatedly output a setting change notification sound (an announcement saying "Setting change in progress" and a warning sound such as a "ding dong") at a predetermined volume (this may be the maximum volume that can be set, or a default volume adjusted using a volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510). (This may be output repeatedly until the setting change process is completed, or may be output repeatedly a certain number of times (e.g., five times) or for a certain period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) and then stop output.)

In addition, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 lights up the various LEDs (some or all) of the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) and the various LEDs (some or all) mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR in a setting change notification light-emitting mode (in this example, the various LEDs of the door frame unit and the right-side gaming board 5AR are lit in the same color and the light color is switched in a short period of time) according to the setting change (they may be lit in the setting change notification light-emitting mode until the setting change process is completed, or they may be lit in the setting change notification light-emitting mode for a certain period of time and then the setting change notification light-emitting mode is terminated and the lights are turned off or lit in a different light-emitting mode). This notifies the user that a setting value change process is being performed, allowing any unauthorized changes to the setting value to be immediately discovered.

It should be noted that the volume of the setting change notification sounds output from the various speakers while the setting change process is being executed cannot be adjusted using the volume adjustment button 227. As mentioned above, the player can adjust the volume of the sounds output from the various speakers by operating the volume adjustment button 227, but the volume of the setting change notification sounds output while the setting change process is being executed cannot be adjusted by the player operating the volume adjustment button 227. As a result, the setting change notification sounds can be output at a predetermined volume while the setting change process is being executed, and the sounds output from the various speakers can reliably notify the player that a setting change is being made. This makes it possible to immediately detect any fraudulent setting changes and prevents fraudulent changes to setting values.

The light intensity of the setting change notification light-emitting mode that is performed during the setting change process cannot be adjusted using the light intensity adjustment button 228. As described above, the player can adjust the light intensity (brightness) of some of the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame 3 and the divided game board 5A by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228. However, the setting change notification light-emitting mode that is performed during the setting change process cannot be adjusted by the player operating the light intensity adjustment button 228. Therefore, during the setting change process, the LEDs on the various decorative boards on the door frame 3 and the divided game board 5A are controlled to emit a predetermined light intensity (brightness), enabling the setting change notification light-emitting mode. This setting change notification light-emitting mode reliably notifies the player that a setting change is being made, allowing fraudulent setting changes to be immediately detected and preventing fraudulent changes to setting values.

The LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the divided gaming board 5A are divided into LEDs (dimmable LEDs) whose light intensity is adjusted when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated during normal times (game mode), and LEDs (non-dimmable LEDs) whose light intensity is not adjusted at all times, even when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated, regardless of whether it is during normal times (game mode). For example, LEDs that display information about winning or losing, such as the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display unit 2250 provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL, are non-dimmable LEDs, and most of the various LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, except for the LED of the sub-function display unit 2250, are dimmable LEDs. Furthermore, some of the various LEDs provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may be non-dimmable LEDs. In this case, brightness can be adjusted based on the non-dimmable LEDs, making it easier to adjust to the desired brightness.

In addition, in this example of the pachinko machine 1, when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated during normal play (play mode), a scale corresponding to the current volume is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and a confirmation sound corresponding to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 (for example, "The volume has been changed") is output from the various speakers at the volume set in response to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227. In addition, when the light intensity adjustment button 222 is operated during normal play (play mode), a scale corresponding to the current light intensity (brightness) is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and a confirmation sound corresponding to the operation of the light intensity adjustment button 222 (for example, "The brightness has been changed") is output from the various speakers at the volume set in response to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227. In addition, the scales displayed on the effect display device 1600 are provided corresponding to each of the volume adjustment button 227 and the light intensity adjustment button 222, and the scales corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness) can be changed by operating the volume adjustment button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 222 while the scales corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness) are displayed.

On the other hand, while the setting change process is being performed, operating the volume adjustment button 227 or light adjustment button 228 does not display a scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness) on the performance display device 1600, nor does it output a confirmation sound in response to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228. Because the performance display device 1600 does not display a scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness), the scale does not change even if the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated multiple times. This prevents the scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness) from interfering with the visibility of the display of the setting change notification mode on the performance display device 1600, and prevents the confirmation sound in response to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 from making the setting change notification sound difficult to hear, making it possible to immediately detect any unauthorized setting changes.

In the above description, the performance display device 1600 displays a scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness) (the volume or light intensity adjusted based on the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 222) in response to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 222. However, the scale is not limited to the above, as long as it indicates the degree (level) of the volume or light intensity adjusted in response to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 222. For example, the degree (level) of the volume or light intensity adjusted in response to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 222 may be indicated by a change in color or a change in the character (strengthened equipment, change in height, change in body shape, etc.).

Furthermore, during the setting change process, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left gaming board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250, and the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 provided on the left gaming board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 are turned off. In other words, although the pachinko machine 1 of this example comprises a split gaming board 5A made up of the left gaming board 5AL and the right gaming board 5AR, during the setting change, all of the various LEDs provided on the left gaming board 5AL are turned off regardless of whether they are controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, and only the various LEDs provided on the right gaming board 5AR and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are turned on. In this way, while the setting change process is being executed, the light emission patterns of the various LEDs provided on the divided game board 5A are made different between the various LEDs provided on the left game board 5AL and the various LEDs provided on the right game board 5AR, which gives a sense of discomfort to anyone viewing the pachinko machine 1 and makes them immediately aware that the setting change process is being executed. Furthermore, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board mounted on the left-hand gaming board 5AL, and the various LEDs mounted on the functional display unit 1400 and sub-functional display unit 2250 may be configured to light up in a different notification light mode (for example, red flashing) when the setting is changed than the various LEDs on the door frame unit and the right-hand gaming board 5AR. Alternatively, one or both of the LEDs on the functional display unit 1400 and the sub-functional display unit 2250 that display information about winning or losing may be configured to light up in a notification light mode when the setting is changed. In this case, the light emission mode of the LEDs on the right-hand gaming board 5AR can be made different from the light emission mode of the LEDs on the left-hand gaming board 5AL, making it possible to immediately notice that the setting change process is being carried out.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 stores the determined setting value in a specific area of RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a based on the setting value determination operation (in this example, an OFF operation that returns the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 to its initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a)), and sends a setting change command to the peripheral control board 1510 notifying that the setting change process has been terminated.

In addition, when the setting value is confirmed, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs a power-on operation check for a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds). Specifically, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the LEDs (such as the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board on the left gaming board 5AL and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board on the right gaming board 5AR, and the various LEDs on the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 mounted on the door frame 3)) to light up in a predetermined light-emitting mode (light-emitting mode during power-on operation check). The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 also controls the drive motors and drive solenoids controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 to operate the movable body in a predetermined operating mode (operating mode during power-on operation check), and performs a power-on operation check to confirm whether the LEDs can be turned on normally and whether the drive motors and drive solenoids can be driven to operate the movable body normally.

In this example, movable bodies that operate by driving drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. using the peripheral control IC 1510a of the performance control board 1510 include, for example, the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the divided game board 5A, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear-right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, the rear-lower middle decorative body 3161 of the front-lower performance unit 3160, and the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3. In the above-mentioned power-on operation check, the peripheral control IC 1510a drives the drive motor, drive solenoid, etc., to move the upper rear movable decorative body 3210 from the raised position to the lowered position while the upper rear first decorative part 3211 is facing forward, and then rotate it around the left-right axis, and then move the upper rear movable decorative body 3210 from the lowered position to the raised position while the upper rear first decorative part 3211 is facing forward, and a confirmation operation is performed in which the left rear movable decorative body 3301 and the right rear movable decorative body 3302 of the lower rear performance unit 3300 are moved from a retracted position that does not cover the front of the performance display device 1600 to the performance display device. The following confirmation operations are performed: the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160 is moved from the normal standby position to an elevated position in front of the performance display device 1600, then moved to a retracted position; the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear front lower performance unit 3160 is moved from the normal standby position to an elevated position in front of the performance display device 1600, then rotated around the longitudinal axis and then moved to the standby position; the vibration motor 356 is driven to vibrate the performance operation unit 301 and then stopped; and the operation button lifting drive motor 367 is driven to lift and lower the performance operation unit 301 relative to the performance operation unit cover unit 310. At this time, the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the upper rear movable decorative body 3210 of the upper rear performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000, the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the left rear movable decorative body 3301 of the lower rear performance unit 3300 (LEDs 3311a to 3314a mounted on the front mounting surface of the left rear movable decorative boards 3311 to 3314) and the right rear movable decorative body 3302 (LEDs 3321a to 3324a mounted on the front mounting surface of the right rear movable decorative boards 3321 to 3324), the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the middle rear front lower decorative body 3161 of the lower front performance unit 3160, and the multiple LEDs 320a that illuminate and decorate the upper part (unit upper cover 312) of the performance operation unit cover unit 310 of the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 installed in the door frame 3 are each controlled to emit light in a predetermined manner.

Furthermore, in this example, during the power-on operation check, all of the various LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are lit in a predetermined lighting mode (light-emitting mode during power-on operation check), except for the LED of the sub-function display unit 2250 that displays information regarding whether the result was a success or failure. Note that during the power-on operation check, the LED of the sub-function display unit 2250 may also be lit to check for any abnormalities. Of the various LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, all LEDs excluding the LED of the sub-function display unit 2250 may not be lit, and some may not be lit. Furthermore, the drive motors and drive solenoids controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may not be driven, and some may not be driven. In addition, when executing the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), some or all of the LEDs (such as the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left-side game board 5AL, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR, and the various LEDs of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) except for the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 that display information regarding winning or losing, which are controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, may not be lit in a predetermined light-emitting mode (light-emitting mode when operation is confirmed when the power is turned on), but may be lit in a light-emitting mode (for example, a RAM clear notification light-emitting mode) that notifies that all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area will be cleared. Furthermore, in this example, when powering on and checking operation, all of the drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are configured to be driven, but some of the drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may not be driven.

When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 completes the setting change process, it sends a setting change command to the peripheral control board 1510 and initiates a process (step S38) to clear all areas of the main control internal RAM except for specific areas. Furthermore, when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives a setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, that is, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 changes the LEDs (various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left game board 5AL, various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right game board 5AR, various LEDs of the door frame units (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, door frame top unit 450, etc. provided on the door frame 3) etc.) except for the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 that displays information about winning or losing, to a predetermined light-emitting mode (light-emitting mode when power is turned on to check operation, in this example, whitish purple). The peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 lights up the main control internal RAM (illuminated), and drives drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 to perform a power-on operation check in which the movable body operates in a predetermined operating mode (operating mode during power-on operation check), and repeatedly outputs a RAM clear notification sound (an announcement voice saying "Memory has been cleared" and a warning sound such as "ding dong") from various speakers at a predetermined volume (which may be the maximum volume that can be set, or may be a default volume adjusted by a volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510) (the sound may be repeatedly output until the process of clearing all areas of the main control internal RAM except for a specific area and the power-on operation check are completed, or the sound may be repeatedly output a certain number of times (e.g., five times) or for a certain period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) and then the output may stop). Meanwhile, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the effect mode on the effect display device 1600, i.e., decorative patterns and background images during normal times (game mode), and does not notify that all areas of the main control built-in RAM will be cleared except for a specific area. Furthermore, if the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, the message "Door open" may be displayed as a door open abnormality notification display mode to notify this until the main frame 4 is closed. The door open abnormality notification display mode may be any mode that corresponds to the error content, and may be one or any combination of letters, numbers (e.g., error codes), marks, etc.

The effect display device 1600 may also be configured to notify that all areas of the main control's built-in RAM will be cleared except for a specific area. In this case, it may be possible to only display a notification that all areas of the main control's built-in RAM will be cleared except for a specific area, without displaying decorative patterns or background images for normal play (when playable), or to display both the appearance during effect (decorative patterns, background images for normal play (when playable), etc.) and a notification that all areas of the main control's built-in RAM will be cleared except for a specific area. If both the appearance during effect (decorative patterns, background images for normal play (when playable), etc.) and a notification that all areas of the main control's built-in RAM will be cleared except for a specific area are displayed, a notification that all areas of the main control's built-in RAM will be cleared except for a specific area may be displayed in an upper layer that overlaps the display of the appearance during effect (decorative patterns, background images for normal play (when playable), etc.). Furthermore, one or both of the LEDs on the sub-function display unit 2250, which displays information about whether the result was received or not, and the LEDs on the function display unit 1400, which are controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, which are among the various LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, may be made to emit light in a manner that indicates that all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area will be cleared, or in a manner that indicates operation confirmation when the power is turned on.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when a power-on operation check is performed after the setting change process is completed, that is, when a power-on operation check is performed that involves a process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), the LEDs (excluding the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 that display information about winning or losing among the various LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 (various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left game board 5AL and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right game board 5AR, the door frame unit (door frame 3 The volume of the sound output from the speakers cannot be adjusted by operating the volume adjustment button 227. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the volume of the sound output from the speakers can be adjusted by operating the volume adjustment button 227. However, the volume of the RAM clear notification sound output during the process of clearing all areas of the main control internal RAM except for a specific area, which is executed after the setting change process is completed, cannot be adjusted by operating the volume adjustment button 227. Therefore, when the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area begins, a RAM clear alert sound can be output at a predetermined volume, and the sound output from various speakers can reliably notify the user that the main control built-in RAM has been cleared, making it possible to immediately detect any unauthorized clearing of the main control built-in RAM. Furthermore, even if the user does not notice that the setting value has been changed unauthorizedly, the subsequent process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area can make the user aware that the main control built-in RAM has been cleared unauthorizedly, and therefore that there is a possibility that the setting has been changed unauthorizedly, thereby preventing unauthorized changes to the setting value.

Similarly, if a power-on operation check is performed after the setting change process is completed, that is, if a power-on operation check is performed that involves a process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), then after the setting change process is completed, the LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, excluding the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 that display information about winning or losing (various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left gaming board 5AL and the decorative board provided on the right gaming board 5AR, and the door frame unit (various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the door frame 3), will remain in the ON/OFF state until the power-on operation check is completed. The power-on operation check is executed by lighting the various LEDs, etc., of the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., in a predetermined light-emitting mode (light-emitting mode during power-on operation check, in this example, whitish-purple), and driving the drive motors and drive solenoids, etc., controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, to operate the movable body in a predetermined operating mode (operating mode during power-on operation check), and the light intensity (brightness) cannot be adjusted by the light intensity adjustment button 228 until the lighting in the predetermined light-emitting mode and operation in the predetermined mode are completed. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the light intensity (brightness) of the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the divided game board 5A can be adjusted by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228, but the light intensity (brightness) controlled during the power-on operation check, which is executed after the setting change process is completed, cannot be adjusted by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228. Therefore, when the power-on operation check begins, the LEDs on the various decorative boards attached to the door frame 3 and divided game board 5A can be controlled to emit light at a predetermined light intensity (brightness), reliably signaling that power supply to the pachinko machine 1 has begun. This makes it possible to immediately detect any fraudulent attempts, such as restarting power supply to the pachinko machine 1 after it has been cut off to change a setting value. Furthermore, even if the fraudulent change to the setting value is not noticed, the subsequent power-on operation can make the user aware that power supply to the pachinko machine 1 has been fraudulently started, and thus that a setting change may have been made to the energization, thereby preventing fraudulent changes to the setting value.

Furthermore, if a power-on operation check is performed after the setting change process is completed, that is, if a power-on operation check is performed that involves a process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), then until the power-on operation check is completed after the setting change process is completed, the performance display device 1600 will not display a scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness) even if the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated. Also, because the performance display device 1600 does not display a scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness), the scale will not change even if the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated multiple times. Furthermore, even if a power-on operation check is performed after the setting change process is completed, after the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38) is completed and the interrupt permission setting is performed (step S52), it becomes possible for the ball launcher 540 to launch game balls, and detection of game balls at various receiving ports (first starting port 2002, first starting port 2002, large prize port 2005, general prize port 2001, gate 2003) is enabled, making it possible to play the game. In this example, the performance display device 1600 does not display scales corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness) until the operation check at power-on is completed, and the scales do not change even if the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated multiple times.This prevents the scales corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness) from interfering with the visibility of part or all of the display of the performance state (decorative patterns, background images during normal play (when playable state), etc.) on the performance display device 1600, making it easier to determine whether the performance display device 1600 is normal when checking its operation at power-on. That is, when the volume adjustment button 227 or the light adjustment button 228 is operated during normal play (playable state), the effect display device 1600 displays a scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness) superimposed on top of the display of the effect mode (decorative patterns, background images in normal play (playable state), etc.), and the scale can be changed by operating the volume adjustment button 227 or the light adjustment button 228 multiple times. However, during the power-on operation check to confirm whether the display of the effect display device 1600 is normal, the effect display device 1600 does not display a scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness), so as not to interfere with checking whether the effect mode (decorative patterns, background images in normal play (playable state), etc.) is being displayed normally.

On the other hand, if a power-on operation check is performed after the setting change process is completed, that is, if a power-on operation check is performed that involves a process of clearing all areas of the main control internal RAM except for a specific area (step S38), a special confirmation sound (e.g., a beep) different from normal confirmation sounds is output at a predetermined volume (different from the volume set in response to operation of the volume control button 227) as a confirmation sound in response to operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 228 after the setting change process is completed and until the power-on operation check is completed. However, while the confirmation sound in normal operation is output at a volume changed by the volume adjustment button 227 (the volume of the confirmation sound changes when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated), the special confirmation sound output during the power-on operation check is output at a predetermined volume (the volume does not change when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated). This makes it easy to determine whether the volume adjustment button 227 and light adjustment button 228 are operating normally when the power is turned on, and the output of a special confirmation sound makes it easy to understand that the process of clearing all areas of the main control internal RAM except for a specific area (step S38) is being carried out.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 completes the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas (step S38), and the interrupt permission setting (step S52) is performed, allowing the ball launcher 540 to launch game balls, and control of the illumination of the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display unit 2250, which display information about winning or losing, is initiated. In this way, the pachinko machine 1 of this example is designed so that game balls are not launched by the ball launcher 540 while the setting value change process (step S37) is being executed. It should be noted that any device may be used to control the illumination of the LED of the function display unit 1400 and the LED of the sub-function display unit 2250, and is not limited to devices that immediately light up one or both of the LED of the function display unit 1400 and the LED of the sub-function display unit 2250 in a predetermined manner when the ball launcher 540 becomes capable of launching a gaming ball. The device may also light up one or both of the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display unit 2250 in an illumination mode for displaying special symbol variations or in an illumination mode for a variation presentation when the conditions for starting the variation presentation are met (a gaming ball entering the start port 2002 or one of the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004), or may light up in an illumination mode for displaying special symbol variations or in an illumination mode for a variation presentation after the illumination mode that notifies of an abnormal state or the like has ended, or may be set to an illumination controllable state for displaying special symbol variations or in an illumination mode for a variation presentation.

In addition, when the main body frame 4 is closed after the setting change process is completed and the main body frame 4 remains closed, the various LEDs of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3), the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR, and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left-side game board 5AL undergo a process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 (step S38), and when the power-on operation check is completed, the light emission mode at the time of power-on operation check and the operating mode at the time of power-on operation check are checked. Based on the completion of the operation (which may be based on the completion of the light-emitting mode during power-on operation check if the operation mode during power-on operation check is configured to end earlier than the light-emitting mode during power-on operation check, or based on the completion of the operation mode during power-on operation check if the operation mode during power-on operation check is configured to end later than the light-emitting mode during power-on operation check), the various LEDs of the door frame unit and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR are controlled to emit light in a serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode, while the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left-side game board 5AL are controlled to be turned off. Then, when a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds, in this example, which is longer than the period from when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 starts checking the operation at power-on until it finishes checking the operation at power-on) has elapsed after the main frame 4 is closed, the light emission control of the serious abnormality warning light emission modes of the various LEDs of the door frame unit and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR and the light-off control of the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left-side game board 5AL are terminated, and the light emission can be controlled in a light emission mode corresponding to the game status (light emission mode during presentation), just as during game mode. It is sufficient that the various LEDs of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, dish unit 200 and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3), the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR, and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL are brought into a state in which they can be controlled to emit light when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the main frame 4 is closed, and the various LEDs of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, dish unit 200 and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3), the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR, and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL are immediately turned on based on the elapse of a predetermined period of time since the main frame 4 is closed. The lighting is not limited to lighting some or all of the various LEDs mounted on the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 mounted on the door frame 3), the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR, and some or all of the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left-side game board 5AL, but may be lit in a lighting mode for a variable presentation when the start condition for the variable display is met (a game ball entering the start port (first start port 2002 or one of the first start port 2002 and second start port 2004)), or may be lit in a lighting mode for a variable presentation after the lighting mode that notifies of an abnormal state or the like has ended, or may be set to a state in which the lighting can be controlled to the lighting mode for the presentation.

As described above, in this example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a and the first ON operation is performed, and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, the predetermined setting value change permission condition is met. In other words, the setting change process is executed with the main frame 4 open relative to the outer frame 2, and when the setting change process is completed, the main frame 4, which was opened relative to the outer frame 2, is closed.

In addition, in this example, when the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2 during normal play (in game mode), a door-opening notification sound (an announcement voice saying "The door is open" and a warning sound such as "ding dong") is repeatedly output from various speakers at a predetermined volume (which may be the maximum volume that can be set, or a default volume adjusted using a volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510) for a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds; in this example, this is shorter than the time required to check operation when the power is turned on), or the output is stopped when the main frame 4 that was opened relative to the outer frame 2 is closed (note that if the main frame 4 is continuously opened relative to the outer frame 2, the output may be stopped after repeated output a certain number of times (e.g., 5 times), or the output may be stopped when the main frame 4 that was opened relative to the outer frame 2 is closed, or the outer frame The output may be stopped when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds, which may be shorter than the period from the start of the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38) and the power-on operation check by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 until both the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38) and the power-on operation check are completed) has elapsed after the main frame 4, which was open to the frame 2, has been closed. In addition, various LEDs of the door frame units (the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3, etc.) and various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR are switched to a serious abnormality warning light emitting mode (in this example, a red light of maximum brightness is lit and turned off in a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) The serious abnormality alert light emitting mode is ended when a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds, which in this example is longer than the period from the start of the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38) and the power-on operation check by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 until both the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38) and the power-on operation check) has elapsed after the main frame 4, which has been open to the outer frame 2, is closed (the serious abnormality alert light emitting mode may be ended when the main frame 4, which has been open to the outer frame 2, is closed, or may be ended when the serious abnormality alert light emitting mode is repeatedly executed a certain number of times (for example, 5 times) or for a certain period of time (for example, 30 seconds) after the main frame 4, which has been open to the outer frame 2, is closed, or When the main frame 4, which was open relative to the outer frame 2, is closed, the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode is terminated and the light is repeatedly controlled to a quasi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode (a mode in which the light is switched between maximum brightness red on and off over a long period of time (e.g., 2 seconds) (slow flashing mode)), and the quasi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode is terminated when a predetermined period of time (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the quasi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode or when the quasi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode has been repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 10 times). Furthermore, when the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left gaming board 5AL are controlled to an extinguished state and the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode (the quasi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode if the light is controlled to the quasi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode after the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode) is terminated (when the main frame 4, which was open relative to the outer frame 2, is closed), the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left gaming board 5AL are controlled to emit light in a light-emitting mode appropriate to the game situation.

On the other hand, while the setting change process is being executed with the main frame 4 open relative to the outer frame 2, the output of door open alert sounds from the various speakers and the control of the serious abnormality alert light emission mode, which are caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2, are not executed. In other words, if the predetermined setting value change permission conditions are met when power is first supplied to the pachinko machine 1, the output of door open alert sounds from the various speakers and the control of the serious abnormality alert light emission mode, which are caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2, are not executed, and the output of setting change alert sounds from the various speakers and the control of the setting change alert light emission mode are not executed. Furthermore, in this example, even during the process (step S38) of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 after the setting change process is completed, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performing the power-on operation check, the output of door open alarm sounds from various speakers caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 and the light emission control of the serious abnormality alarm light emission mode (including the semi-serious abnormality alarm light emission mode when the light emission is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality alarm light emission mode after the serious abnormality alarm light emission mode) are prevented. Therefore, when the setting change process is executed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), and after the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 has finished checking the operation at power-on, it becomes possible to output a door open alert sound from various speakers caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2, and to control the light emission of a serious abnormality alert light (including a semi-serious abnormality alert light when the light emission is controlled to a semi-serious abnormality alert light after the serious abnormality alert light).

In addition, if the setting change process is terminated after the main frame 4, which was open relative to the outer frame 2, is closed, that is, if the main frame 4 is closed while the setting change process is being executed and the main frame 4 remains closed thereafter, even after the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has completed the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas (step S38) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 has completed the power-on operation check, the output of door open alert sounds from various speakers and the serious abnormality alert light emission mode (including the semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode when the light emission is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode after the serious abnormality alert light emission mode) caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 will not be executed. However, when changing the setting value, the manager of the gaming parlor or other person in charge normally performs the operation to change the setting value from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 with the main frame 4 open relative to the outer frame 2, and after the setting change process is completed, the main frame 4, which was open relative to the outer frame 2, is closed.

In addition, when the time that has elapsed since the main frame 4 was opened relative to the outer frame 2 reaches a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds; in this example, this is shorter than the time required to check operation when the power is turned on), or when the main frame 4 that has been opened relative to the outer frame 2 is closed, the output of the door opening notification sound from the various speakers stops, and the device is placed in a state where sound output during the performance (the output of a performance sound that is performed when the start condition for the variable display is met (the game ball enters the start port (first start port 2002 or one of the first start port 2002 and second start port 2004)) can be executed).For this reason, normally, when the setting change process is executed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area when the power is turned on. After the operation check is complete, if the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 and the elapsed time since the main frame 4 was opened relative to the outer frame 2 has not yet reached a predetermined period, both the output of a door open alert sound from the various speakers caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 and the light emission control of the serious abnormality alert light mode (including the semi-serious abnormality alert light mode when the light emission control is changed to the semi-serious abnormality alert light mode after the serious abnormality alert light mode) are executed; if the main frame 4 that was open relative to the outer frame 2 is closed or if the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 and the elapsed time since the main frame 4 was opened relative to the outer frame 2 has not yet reached a predetermined period, only the light emission control of the serious abnormality alert light mode caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 is executed.

In addition, in this example, when the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR of the divided gaming board 5A are illuminated in a serious abnormality alert illumination mode (including a semi-serious abnormality alert illumination mode when the illumination is controlled to a semi-serious abnormality alert illumination mode after the serious abnormality alert illumination mode), the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL are turned off. This makes it easy for anyone who sees them to notice that an abnormality has occurred (in this case, that the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2). In addition, the serious abnormality alert light emitting mode of the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR (when the light emission is controlled to the quasi-serious abnormality alert light emitting mode after the serious abnormality alert light emitting mode, the quasi-serious abnormality alert light emitting mode may be included, or the quasi-serious abnormality alert light emitting mode may not be included. In other words, when the light emission is controlled to the serious abnormality alert light emitting mode, the LEDs of the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left-side game board 5AL whose light emission is controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may also be made to emit light in a predetermined light emitting mode, and even when the light emission is controlled in the quasi-serious abnormality alert light emitting mode, the light emission in the predetermined light emitting mode may be continued, or when the light emission is controlled in the quasi-serious abnormality alert light emitting mode, the LEDs of the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left-side game board 5AL whose light emission is controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 The LEDs may be configured to stop emitting light in a predetermined light-emitting mode and be controlled to emit light in a light-emitting mode (light-emitting mode during presentation) that corresponds to the game status, as in normal play (when play is possible). In synchronization with this light emission, the LEDs mounted on the decorative board on the left gaming board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may also be configured to emit light in a predetermined light-emitting mode. In this case, the LEDs may be configured to emit light in a different light-emitting mode (for example, a red light (not flashing) at a predetermined brightness (which may be maximum brightness, a brightness lower than maximum brightness, or a brightness in which the light intensity cannot be adjusted using the light intensity adjustment button 228)) than the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode (including the semi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode when the light intensity is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode after the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode). This also makes it easy for viewers to notice that an abnormality has occurred.

The volume of the door-opening notification sounds output from the various speakers due to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 cannot be adjusted using the volume adjustment button 227. As mentioned above, the player can adjust the volume output from the various speakers by operating the volume adjustment button 227, but the volume of the door-opening notification sounds output from the various speakers due to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 cannot be adjusted by the player operating the volume adjustment button 227. As a result, a door open notification sound can be output at a predetermined volume when the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, and even if the pachinko machine 1 is not visible, the sound output from the various speakers can alert the user that the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2. This makes it possible to immediately alert the user when the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, and to prevent fraudulent acts such as illegally inserting game balls into the ball entry ports (starting ports (first starting port 2002, second starting port 2004), large prize entry port 2005, general prize entry port 2001, etc.) or replacing the board with an illegal one.

In addition, the light intensity of the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode (including the quasi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode when the light is controlled to the quasi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode after the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode) that is controlled to emit light when the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2 cannot be adjusted using the light intensity adjustment button 228. As described above, the player can adjust the light intensity (brightness) of the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the divided game board 5A by operating the volume adjustment button, but the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode (including the quasi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode when the light is controlled to the quasi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode after the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode) that is controlled to emit light when the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2 cannot be adjusted by the player operating the light intensity adjustment button 228. Therefore, when the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the divided game board 5A are controlled to emit light at a predetermined light amount (brightness), making it possible to perform a serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode, and even when the main frame 4 that was open relative to the outer frame 2 is closed, the LEDs of the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the divided game board 5A are controlled to emit light at a predetermined light amount (brightness) until a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, making it possible to perform a serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode (a quasi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode when light emission is controlled to a quasi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode after the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode), and the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode (a quasi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode after the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode) is activated. This can reliably notify that an abnormality has occurred in the outer frame 2 (in this case, that the main frame 4 is open, or that the main frame 4 was open), so that if the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, the player is immediately made aware of the situation and can prevent fraudulent acts such as illegally inserting game balls into ball entry ports (starting ports (first starting port 2002, second starting port 2004), large prize entry port 2005, general prize entry port 2001, etc.) or replacing the board with an illegal one, and even if the player does not realize that the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, the player is made aware that the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, and can recognize the possibility that fraudulent acts have occurred.

Furthermore, when the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, the performance display device 1600 displays scales corresponding to the current volume and light intensity (brightness) based on the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228, but no confirmation sound is output in response to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228. Therefore, if the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated when the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, the light emission is controlled at a light intensity (brightness) corresponding to the operation of the light intensity adjustment button 228 after the serious abnormality alert light emission mode (or the semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode, if the light emission mode is changed to the semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode after the serious abnormality alert light emission mode) that is executed due to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 has ended, and the door opening alert sound that is executed due to the main frame 4 being opened has stopped being output at a volume corresponding to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227. This allows the volume and light intensity (brightness) of the variable performance to be adjusted in advance without taking away the opportunity to adjust the volume and light intensity (brightness) even when the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, and also prevents the door opening notification sound from becoming difficult to hear due to the confirmation sound made in response to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 228, so that when the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, it is immediately noticed and it is possible to prevent the player from illegally entering the ball entry ports ((starting ports (first starting port 2002, second starting port 2004), large prize entry port 2005, general prize entry port This can prevent fraudulent acts such as sending game balls into the slots (e.g., slots 2001) or replacing them with fraudulent boards. Furthermore, when the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, the scales corresponding to the current volume and light intensity (brightness) may not be displayed on the performance display device 1600 based on the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228. In this case, it is possible to prevent the scales corresponding to the current volume and light intensity (brightness) from obscuring the display on the performance display device 1600 and obstructing visibility.

On the other hand, during the period when a setting change process is being executed, when the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas is being executed, or when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is executing a power-on operation check, the door open alarm sound caused by the main frame 4 being opened and the light emission control in the serious abnormality alarm light mode (including the semi-serious abnormality alarm light mode when the light emission control is changed to the semi-serious abnormality alarm light mode after the serious abnormality alarm light mode) are not executed. This makes it possible to immediately notice if a setting change process is being executed improperly, or if a setting value is improperly changed and the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas is executed, thereby improving security.

In addition, in this example, the light emission control for the serious abnormality alert light emission mode is started based on the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, and the period from closing the main frame 4, which was open relative to the outer frame 2, to ending the serious abnormality alert light emission mode (or the semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode if the light emission control is changed to the semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode after the serious abnormality alert light emission mode) is longer than the period during which the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 perform a power-on operation check. Therefore, when the setting change process is completed, the main frame 4 that was open to the outer frame 2 is closed, and then the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area and the period during which the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs the power-on operation check are completed. When this period ends, the various LEDs of the door frame units (the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, the plate unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3) and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right game board 5AR are cleared. The ED is controlled to emit light by switching from the RAM clear notification mode to the serious abnormality notification light mode (semi-serious abnormality notification light mode if the light is controlled to emit light to the semi-serious abnormality notification light mode after the serious abnormality notification light mode), and then, when the period since the main body frame 4, which was open to the outer frame 2, is closed reaches a predetermined period, the serious abnormality notification light mode (semi-serious abnormality notification light mode if the light is controlled to emit light to the semi-serious abnormality notification light mode after the serious abnormality notification light mode) is ended and light emission control in the game mode (light mode during presentation) is started. In this way, by continuing the light emission control in the serious abnormality alert light mode (semi-serious abnormality alert light mode if the light emission is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality alert light mode after the serious abnormality alert light mode) even after the game mode is entered when the setting change process is executed, it becomes possible to prevent the serious abnormality alert light mode (semi-serious abnormality alert light mode if the light emission is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality alert light mode after the serious abnormality alert light mode) from being overlooked if the main frame 4 is illegally opened relative to the outer frame 2, thereby improving security. In this case, the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display unit 2250, which are not subject to light emission control in the serious abnormality alert light mode (or the semi-serious abnormality alert light mode if light emission control is performed to the semi-serious abnormality alert light mode after the serious abnormality alert light mode) even when the game mode is entered, are placed in a state in which light emission can be controlled. However, this is not limited to lighting up one or both, or some or all, of the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display unit 2250 when the game mode is entered, and they may remain off or in a predetermined lighting mode until the start condition for the variable display is met (a game ball enters the start port (first start port 2002 or one of the first start port 2002 and second start port 2004)), and when the start condition for the variable display is met, the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 are controlled to light up in a predetermined lighting mode.

[Changing the setting value when it is incompatible]
Next, an example of behavior when changing the setting value when the combination of the split gaming board 5A (i.e., the combination of the right gaming board 5AR (a board not equipped with a microprocessor) and the left gaming board 5AL (a peripheral control board 1510 equipped with a microprocessor or a main control board 1310)) is in an incompatible (mismatched) state (mismatched state) will be described with reference to FIG. 328. Note that below, only the parts that differ from when it is compatible will be described, and redundant explanations will not be given.

As shown in FIG. 328, if the ID determination process (step S1003) executed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 does not output control signals to the various LEDs and other electronic components mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR, and the electronic components mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR are set to a non-driven state (for example, the various LEDs are turned off) regardless of whether a setting change is being performed or not.

Furthermore, in this example, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible during the ID determination process (step S1003), the fact that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible will not be reported until the setting change process is completed (until the setting change command is received from the main control MPU 1310a). In other words, while the setting change process is being executed, the effect display device 1600, various speakers, and various LEDs (which may be only some or all) of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) are controlled in the same manner as when the setting change process was executed when compatible (they may be completely identical, or almost all may be the same with only some differences).

When the setting change process is completed, the main control MPU 1310a sends a setting change command to the peripheral control board 1510 and starts a process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38). When the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting change command, that is, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts a process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), it controls the various speakers and various LEDs (some or all) of the door frame units (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, door frame top unit 450, etc. provided on the door frame 3) to the main control when appropriate. The display device 1600 is controlled in the same manner as when the process to clear the internal RAM (step S38) was executed (this may be completely the same, or almost entirely the same with only some differences), while the display device 1600 does not display decorative patterns or the background image used in normal times (when play is possible), but instead displays an abnormal background image (for example, black) on the entire screen and the display device 1600 displays "Right side game board incompatible error occurred" as an incompatible error notification display mode, to notify the user that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible.

The incompatibility error notification display mode in the performance display device 1600 is a still image that does not change over time, and continues until the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. Even if the condition for starting the variable display is met (a game ball entering the start port (first start port 2002 or one of the first start port 2002 and second start port 2004)) and the function display unit 1400 starts displaying a variable special pattern, or the sub-function display unit 2250 starts displaying a variable fourth pattern, the performance display device 1600 continues to display the incompatibility error notification display mode and does not perform any variable display such as a variable decorative pattern display. Also, the performance display device 1600 The display format for the incompatible error notification may be any format appropriate to the error content, and may be one or a combination of letters, numbers (e.g., error codes), marks, etc. In this way, during the power-on operation check, which involves clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas after the setting change process (step S38), the display on the effect display device 1600 notifies the user that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible in a static format that does not change over time. This makes it possible to notify the user that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible without interfering with the confirmation process during the power-on operation check.

In addition, in the power-on operation check that is performed in parallel with the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas (step S38), not only is the power-on operation check not performed on the drive motors and drive solenoids, etc., that are provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR that has been determined to be non-compliant and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, but also on the movable body that performs the power-on operation check (the rear upper rear of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the divided gaming board 5A). Operation checks are also not performed when power is turned on for the drive motors and drive solenoids that drive the performance operation units 301 that are provided on the door frame units (such as the movable decorative body 3210, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, the rear lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear lower performance unit 3160, and the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3) and are not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003).

Specifically, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, even if the power-on operation check is started, the LEDs on the right-side game board 5AR determined to be incompatible will not be controlled to light up in the light-emitting mode used in the power-on operation check, or the movable body will not be controlled to operate in the mode used in the power-on operation check (a control signal will not be output to the right-side game board 5AR), or will not be able to be controlled (a control signal will be output but not input to the right-side game board 5AR). In addition, the drive motors and drive solenoids on the turntable unit 200 (in this example, the performance operation unit 300) that is provided on the door frame 3 and not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003) will not be driven to operate the performance operation unit 301 on the performance operation unit 300.

In other words, if the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an incompatible state, there is a risk that some or all of the movable bodies provided on the door frame unit that is not the subject of ID determination will also be deemed incompatible, and when a control signal is input from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, there is a risk that the movable bodies will operate in a manner different from their intended operation.Therefore, some or all of the movable bodies provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR that has been determined to be incompatible or on the door frame unit that is not the subject of ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003) and that are operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 will not be driven, thereby preventing the movable bodies from operating in a manner different from their intended operation, which could result in damage to the movable bodies or door frame unit, or failure of the drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. that operate the movable bodies. However, even in this case, LEDs provided on the door frame unit that are not subject to ID determination (for example, multiple LEDs 320a for illuminating and decorating the upper part (unit upper cover 312) of the performance operation unit cover unit 310 of the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3) are controlled to emit light in a predetermined manner, just as when compatible. This makes it possible to determine that the operation check is being carried out correctly when the power is turned on.

As described above, the game board side components may be configured to include the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit from among the door frame units. In this case, the specific door frame unit is subject to ID determination, and if it is determined to be incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), some or all of the movable bodies operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. provided in door frame units that are not subject to ID determination (non-specific door frame units) and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may also be prevented from being driven. In addition to this, or separately from this, if there are multiple specific door frame units (for example, the right door frame If a part of the door frame (for example, one of the door frame right side unit 430 and the door frame top unit 450) is determined to be incompatible, all of the movable bodies operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. provided in the specific door frame unit and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may be prevented from being driven, or all of the movable bodies operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. provided in all door frame units, including the specific door frame unit, and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may be prevented from being driven.

On the other hand, the movable bodies (such as the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear-right movable decorative body 3302, and the rear-front-lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear-front-lower performance unit 3160, etc.) provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is equipped with a peripheral control board 1510 on which a peripheral control IC 1510a that executes the ID determination process (step S1003) is implemented, operate in the same manner as normal (when the combination of the divided gaming board 5A is determined to be compatible) when operation confirmation begins upon power-on. In addition, the LEDs mounted on the boards provided on the movable bodies provided on the left side game board 5AL (such as the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left side game board 5AL of the divided game board 5A, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, and the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 of the front lower performance unit 3160) are controlled to emit light in the light emission mode when operation is confirmed when the power is turned on. That is, if the right-side game board 5AR is determined to be incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), as in normal cases (when the combination of the divided game board 5A is determined to be compatible), the movable bodies provided on the left-side game board 5AL (such as the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left-side game board 5AL of the divided game board 5A, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear-right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, and the rear-front-lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear-front-lower performance unit 3160) are operated in the operating mode when power is turned on, and the LEDs provided on the movable bodies provided on the left-side game board 5AL are controlled to emit light in the lighting mode when power is turned on. This makes it easy to identify the game board (in this case, the left-side game board 5AL) on which the peripheral control board 1510 of the divided game board 5A is provided. In addition, if the right-side game board 5AR is determined to be in an incompatible state in the ID determination process (step S1003), the LEDs mounted on the boards of the movable bodies (such as the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 of the left-side game board 5AL of the divided game board 5A, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear-right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, and the rear-front-lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear-front-lower performance unit 3160) mounted on the boards of the movable bodies are not controlled to emit light in the light emission mode when the power is turned on and the operation is confirmed, and the right-side game board 5AR is determined to be in an incompatible state in the ID determination process (step S1003). If it is determined that the skill board 5AR is in an unconnected state, the LEDs mounted on the circuit boards of the movable bodies provided on the left gaming board 5AL (such as the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left gaming board 5AL of the divided gaming board 5A, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and rear-right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, and the rear-front-lower middle decorative body 3161 of the front-lower performance unit 3160) may be controlled to emit light in the light emission mode when power is turned on to check operation, making it possible to determine whether the right gaming board 5AR is in an incompatible state or is unconnected.

In addition, in this example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible, no control is performed to operate the performance operation unit 301 by driving the drive motor or drive solenoid mounted on the board provided in the performance operation unit 300 of the door frame unit (in this example, the tray unit 200) that is not the subject of ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003), but the various LEDs mounted on the board provided in the performance operation unit 300 are controlled in the same manner as normal (when the combination of the divided game board 5A is determined to be compatible) during the power-on operation check. That is, when a power-on operation check is performed after the setting change process, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, the various LEDs mounted on the boards provided in the presentation operation unit 300 are controlled to emit light in the same light-emitting mode as when the combination of the divided game boards 5A is determined to be compatible. Note that the presentation operation unit 300 may be the specific door frame unit that is the subject of ID determination. Even in this case, if the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that a specific door frame unit other than the presentation operation unit 300 or the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, the drive motors and drive solenoids mounted on the boards provided in the presentation operation unit 300 are not driven to operate the presentation operation unit 301, while the various LEDs mounted on the boards provided in the presentation operation unit 300 may be controlled to emit light in the light-emitting mode when the power is turned on.

In addition, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, the LEDs mounted on some of the multiple LEDs mounted on multiple boards provided on the door frame unit that are not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003), or some of the multiple LEDs mounted on one board, may not be controlled to emit light in the light emission mode at the time of power-on operation check, and some movable bodies may not operate in the operating mode at the time of power-on operation check (for example, power-on operation check may not be performed on some or all of the LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the door frame unit and the drive motors, drive solenoids, LEDs, etc. provided on the movable bodies provided on the door frame unit).

In addition, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is determined to be incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), the right-side game board 5AR determined to be incompatible and some or all of the movable bodies operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. provided in door frame units not subject to ID determination and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may not be driven until the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, not just during the power-on operation check, or until the combination of the divided game boards 5A is determined to be compatible. In this case, it is possible to prevent the movable bodies from operating in a manner different from their intended operation, which could result in damage to the movable bodies or door frame unit, or failure of the drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. that operate the movable bodies.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 completes the power-on operation check (the LED's light-emitting mode during power-on operation check ends and is turned off or lit in a specified light-emitting mode, and the movable body's operating mode during power-on operation check ends and it enters a standby state (a state in which it is stopped (housed) in a predetermined standby position)), thereby completing the power-on operation check. If the power-on operation check operation mode is configured to end earlier than the light-emitting mode during the power-on operation check, the power-on operation check will end when the light-emitting mode during the power-on operation check ends; if the power-on operation check operation mode is configured to end later than the light-emitting mode during the power-on operation check, the power-on operation check will end when the power-on operation check operation mode ends (the movable body operates in the power-on operation check operation mode and then stops (retracts) in the standby position).

Then, when the power-on operation check, which involves a process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas (step S38), is completed and the game mode is entered, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the incompatibility error notification display mode on the performance display device 1600, repeatedly outputs a game board incompatibility notification sound (an announcement voice saying "An incompatibility error has occurred on the right-side game board. Please turn off the power and check." and a warning sound such as a "ding dong" sound) at a predetermined volume (which may be the maximum volume that can be set, or a default volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510) from various speakers until the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (the output may be stopped after being output repeatedly a certain number of times (e.g., 5 times) or for a certain period of time (e.g., 30 seconds)), and also The various LEDs (some or all) of the frame units (such as the left side unit 420, right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and top unit 450 of the door frame 3) are repeatedly controlled to emit light in a serious abnormality warning mode (in this example, they alternate between turning on and off in maximum brightness red in a short period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) (high-speed flashing mode)), and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board on the left gaming board 5AL are controlled to an off state, while the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 on the left gaming board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 on the left gaming board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are set to a state in which they can be controlled to emit light in the same way as when they are matched (they may be lit in a specified mode).

The game board incompatibility alert sound is not a single alert sound (such as a "beep") that is output intermittently, but is made up of multiple sounds with different tones, and is further controlled to alternate between a mute state and an on state. Furthermore, the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode is not fixed to a lit state, but is controlled to alternate between a lit state and an off state to change the light intensity. In other words, the various speakers and LEDs dynamically alert the player that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, with the tone, volume, light intensity, etc. changing over time. This makes it easier to notice that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible once the power-on operation check, which involves clearing all areas of the main control internal RAM except for specific areas (step S38), is completed and a game mode that does not require confirmation is initiated.

In this example, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (mismatched) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible during the ID determination process (step S1003), when changing the setting values, the power-on operation check, which involves clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas after the setting change process is completed (step S38), immediately notifies the player that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, without notifying the player of an abnormality in response to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2. In other words, when the setting change process is completed and the game mode is entered, the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, and a game board incompatible alert sound is output without outputting a door open alert sound, regardless of whether the predetermined period has elapsed since the main frame 4 was opened relative to the outer frame 2. Furthermore, when the setting change process is completed and the game mode is entered, the light is controlled to emit a serious abnormality notification light, but this is not due to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2, but rather due to an incompatible combination of the divided game boards 5A. Therefore, when the setting change process is completed and the game mode is entered, the light is always controlled to emit a serious abnormality notification light, regardless of whether a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed since the main frame 4 was closed.

In addition, when the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible (mismatched), even if the start condition for the variable display is met (when a game ball enters the start hole (first start hole 2002 or one of the first start hole 2002 and second start hole 2004)), the effect display device 1600, various speakers, various LEDs on the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3), and the decorative board provided on the left game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, The LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display unit 2250 are configured to notify the user of an abnormality without performing the variable effects of the various LEDs mounted on the unit. On the other hand, when the interrupt permission setting (step S52) is made after the setting change process (step S37) is completed, the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 are controlled to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode based on the establishment of the variable display start condition (a game ball entering the start port (first start port 2002 or either the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004)), and are able to display information regarding the result.

In addition, the volume of the game board incompatibility notification sounds output from the various speakers cannot be adjusted using the volume adjustment button 227. As described above, the player can adjust the volume output from the various speakers by operating the volume adjustment button 227, but the volume of the game board incompatibility notification sound output when the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible (inconsistent) cannot be adjusted by the player operating the volume adjustment button 227. As a result, when the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible (inconsistent), the game board incompatibility notification sound can be output at a predetermined volume, and the sounds output from the various speakers can reliably convey that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible (inconsistent), preventing the player from being disadvantaged or the game from progressing in a manner unintended by the designer.

In addition, when the game board incompatibility alarm sound is being output, it is also not possible to adjust the light intensity (brightness) using the light intensity adjustment button 228. As described above, the player can adjust the light intensity of the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the divided game board 5A by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228. However, the light intensity (brightness) of the serious abnormality alarm light-emitting mode, which is controlled when the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible (mismatched), cannot be adjusted by the player operating the light intensity adjustment button 228. Therefore, when the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible (mismatched), the light intensity can be controlled to the serious abnormality alarm light-emitting mode at a predetermined light intensity (brightness). The serious abnormality alarm light-emitting mode reliably notifies the player that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible (mismatched), preventing the player from being disadvantaged or the game from progressing in a manner not intended by the designer.

In addition, when the game board incompatibility notification sound is being output, operating the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 will not display a scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness) on the effect display device 1600. Also, because the effect display device 1600 does not display a scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness), the scale will not change even if the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated multiple times. This prevents the scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness) from interfering with the visibility of some or all of the incompatibility error notification display mode displayed on the effect display device 1600, and makes it possible to reliably communicate that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible (inconsistent).

In addition, when the game board incompatibility notification sound is being output, the confirmation sound corresponding to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 is also not output. This prevents the game board incompatibility notification sound from being difficult to hear due to the confirmation sound corresponding to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228, and ensures that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible (inconsistent).

Furthermore, even if the combination of the divided game board 5A is determined to be incompatible (mismatched) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 provided on the left game board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 provided on the left game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 that display information regarding whether the game has been won or lost are not turned off, but are controlled to emit light in the same way as under normal circumstances (when playable). In other words, by notifying the player that game play cannot begin if the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible (mismatched), it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged or the game from proceeding in a manner not intended by the designer, while if game play begins when the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible (mismatched), the light emission of the LEDs that display information about winning or losing is controlled to allow the game to proceed and prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

In addition, if the combination of the divided game board 5A is determined to be incompatible (mismatched) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), the LED of the function display unit 1400 provided on the left game board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and the LED of the sub-function display unit 2250 provided on the left game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 will be displayed. It is sufficient that at least one of the LEDs displaying the information be controlled to emit light in the same way as in normal times (when play is possible); for example, the LED of the sub-function display unit 2250 provided on the left gaming board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may be turned off or lit in an emission mode unrelated to the satisfaction of the start condition without being controlled to emit light, even when the start condition is met (a gaming ball enters the start port (first start port 2002 or one of the first start port 2002 and second start port 2004)).

In addition, in this example, even if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is in an incompatible (mismatched) state when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), the timing of the light emission control in the serious abnormality alert light emission mode corresponding to the incompatible (mismatched) state of the combination of the divided game boards 5A and the timing of the output of the game board incompatible alert sound will differ depending on whether or not the setting values are changed and whether or not a specific area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared (a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM excluding a specific area)).

Specifically, if neither the setting change nor the process of clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM excluding a specific area (a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM excluding a specific area)) is performed, and the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible (inconsistent), the effect display device 1600 will display "power on" for a predetermined period of time upon the start of power supply to the pachinko machine 1, and then, when power-on operation check begins, the various LEDs (some or all) of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) will be controlled to emit a serious abnormality alert light in a lighting mode, and the various speakers will start to output a game board incompatibility alert sound.

On the other hand, when either changing the setting value or clearing a process to clear a specific area from the entire area of the main control built-in RAM (a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area from the entire area of the main control built-in RAM excluding a specific area)) is performed, if the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible (inconsistent), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 clears the entire area of the main control built-in RAM excluding a specific area (step S38) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 performs a power-on operation check, during which the door frame unit (the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 210 provided on the door frame 3) Instead of starting the light emission control in a serious abnormality alert mode by the various LEDs (which may be some or all) of the door frame unit 450, etc., or the output of the game board incompatibility alert sounds from the various speakers, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), and after the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 has finished checking the operation at power-on, the light emission control in a serious abnormality alert mode by the various LEDs (which may be some or all) of the door frame unit and the output of the game board incompatibility alert sounds from the various speakers are started in response to the fact that the right-side game board 5AR is in a non-compliant state.

In this way, even if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed to be incompatible (mismatched) when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), the timing of the light emission control in the serious abnormality alert light emission mode corresponding to the incompatible state of the right-side game board 5AR and the timing of the output of the game board incompatible alert sound can be varied depending on whether or not the setting values are changed or whether or not a specific area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared (a specified area of the main control built-in RAM (an area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM excluding a specific area)), thereby prioritizing the notification of more important information and preventing malfunctions and fraudulent behavior from occurring. In other words, since there is a risk of damage to the gaming facility if the setting values are changed fraudulently or the main control's built-in RAM is cleared, the damage can be prevented from spreading by notifying that the setting values have been changed fraudulently or that the main control's built-in RAM has been cleared, taking priority over notifying that the combination of the divided gaming board 5A is in an incompatible (mismatched) state.

In addition, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started and the combination of the divided game board 5A is determined to be incompatible (inconsistent) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), the timing of displaying the abnormal background image (e.g., black) on the performance display device 1600 and the incompatibility error notification display mode on the performance display device 1600 is the same regardless of whether or not the setting value is changed and whether or not a specific area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared (a specified area of the main control built-in RAM (an area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM excluding a specific area)). That is, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38) or when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 starts checking the operation at power-on, the performance display device 1600 displays a background image (e.g., black) in the event of an abnormality and a mismatch error notification display mode. This allows for priority execution of notifications of high importance, while also allowing the performance display device 1600 to notify and address other notifications. Furthermore, the timing of displaying the background image (e.g., black) in the event of an abnormality on the performance display device 1600 and the mismatch error notification display mode on the performance display device 1600 may vary depending on whether or not the setting value is changed, or whether or not to clear all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area of the main control built-in RAM excluding the specific area)). In this case, information of increasing importance can be notified in order and addressed sequentially, ensuring that each piece of information is conveyed and addressed reliably.

In addition, in this example, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the combination of the divided game board 5A is set to a compatible (matched) state, and after the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is compatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 does not execute the ID determination process (step S1003).Therefore, even if the combination of the divided game board 5AR becomes incompatible (mismatched) after execution of the ID determination process (step S1003), no notification (game board incompatible notification sound, incompatible error notification display mode, serious abnormality notification light emission mode, etc.) corresponding to the fact that the right-side game board 5AR is in a mismatched state is not executed. Therefore, LEDs (such as various LEDs of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3), various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left side game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, and the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250) provided in at least the areas excluding the right game board 5AR and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, drive motors and drive solenoids controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a, performance display device 1600, various speakers, etc. are controlled in the same manner as when the right game board 5AR is fitted. In addition, a control signal is output from the peripheral control board 1510 assuming that a right game board 5AR having a regular ID is provided, and the LEDs, drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. provided on the divided game board 5AR are driven based on this control signal. However, if the layout configuration of the incompatible divided game board 5AR and the compatible right-side game board 5AR differs, the LEDs, drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. provided on the incompatible divided game board 5AR may operate in a manner different from their design (a manner different from the drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. provided on the right-side game board 5AR with a legitimate ID, decorative board, decorative body, etc. and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510).

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (inconsistent) when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), even if an abnormality is detected by an abnormality detection means (for example, a sensor or switch such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, or door frame open switch, which inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) during the setting change process, the detection is invalid (it may be that the process to check whether or not there is a detection is not executed, or it may be that the process to check whether or not there is a detection is executed but the process (such as an alert) based on the detection is not executed).

Specifically, as shown in Figure 329, even if an illegal magnetic field is generated during the setting change process and a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the detection signal is discarded without issuing an abnormality alert based on the detection of the illegal magnetic field. In other words, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (mismatched) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, and if a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during execution of the setting change process, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is ignored (the input of the detection signal may not be confirmed, or even if the input of the detection signal is confirmed, processing based on that input may not be executed), and after the setting change process is completed, control is executed as if a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 had not been input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

Furthermore, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (inconsistent) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), and if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (e.g., sensors or switches that input a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, door frame open switch, etc.) during the power-on operation check that is executed after the setting change process is completed, that is, if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means during the power-on operation check that involves the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), the detection by the abnormality detection means is also disabled (it may be that the process of checking whether or not there is a detection is not executed, or it may be that the process of checking whether or not there is a detection is executed but no process (such as an alert) based on the detection is executed).

Specifically, as shown in Figure 330, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the combination of the divided game board 5A is deemed to be incompatible (mismatched), and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), and when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the power-on operation check that is executed after the setting change process is completed, the detection signal is discarded without issuing an abnormality alert based on the detection of an illegal magnetism. In other words, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (mismatched) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), and if a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the power-on operation check that is executed after the setting change process is completed, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is ignored, and control continues as if a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 had not been input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

In addition, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed to be incompatible (mismatched) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), and if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, a sensor or switch such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, door frame open switch, etc., which inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) during the game mode after the power-on operation check is completed, the detection by the abnormality detection means is disabled (it may not execute a process to check whether or not there is a detection, or it may execute a process to check whether or not there is a detection but not execute a process (such as an alert) based on the detection).

Specifically, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the combination of the divided game board 5A is deemed to be incompatible (mismatched), and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), and if a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the game mode after the power-on operation check is completed, the detection signal is discarded without issuing an abnormality alert based on the detection of an illegal magnetism. In other words, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed to be incompatible (mismatched) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), and if a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during game mode after the power-on operation check is completed, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is ignored, and control continues as if a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 had not been input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

In this way, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is in an incompatible (mismatched) state when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), no abnormality alert will be issued even if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, sensors or switches such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, ball out detection sensor 574, door frame open switch, etc., which input a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310).

In other words, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible, gameplay may proceed in a manner not intended by the designer, potentially causing harm to the gaming establishment and players, and may even result in a deviation from the original specifications, potentially causing a loss of trust among players, so it is necessary to ensure that play is stopped. Therefore, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible, an alert is issued in priority over alerts resulting from abnormality detection by the abnormality detection means (e.g., sensors and switches such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, ball out detection sensor 574, and door frame open switch, which input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310), thereby preventing play and minimizing harm to the gaming establishment and players.

In addition, some LEDs may be controlled to emit different light depending on the type of abnormality detection means. For example, when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, one or both of the LEDs on the function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display unit 2250 may be turned off (putting them in a state where light emission control is not possible).

Furthermore, rather than being limited to determining whether the combination of the divided game boards 5A is compatible only when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may be configured to periodically (for example, constantly determine each time the peripheral control unit's regular processing is executed) determine whether the combination of the divided game boards 5A is compatible after power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started. In this case, it will be possible to notify the user that the combination of the divided game boards 5A has become incompatible after power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, thereby preventing the occurrence of disadvantages.

In addition, even if an ID determination process is periodically executed to determine whether the combination of the divided game board 5A is compatible, the ID determination process may not be executed while the setting change process is being executed.Also, even if the ID determination process is executed while the setting change process is being executed and it is determined that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible, no notification may be issued indicating that the right-side game board 5AR is in an incompatible state while the setting change process is being executed.

Furthermore, when an ID determination process is periodically executed to determine whether the combination of the split game board 5A is compatible, a notification (game board incompatible notification sound, incompatible error notification display mode, serious abnormality notification light emission mode, etc.) indicating that the right-side game board 5AR is in an incompatible state may be initiated based on the determination that the combination of the split game board 5A is incompatible, and then the notification indicating that the right-side game board 5AR is in an incompatible state may be terminated based on the determination that the combination of the split game board 5A is compatible, or a notification indicating that the right-side game board 5AR is in an incompatible state may be initiated based on the determination that the combination of the split game board 5A is incompatible after the ID determination process determines that the combination of the split game board 5A is compatible.

In addition, if the system is configured to periodically determine whether the combination of the split game board 5A is compatible, when the ID determination process is performed during the power-on operation check after the setting change process or before the setting change process is started and it is determined that the combination of the split game board 5A is incompatible, the display device 1600 will display a message indicating that the combination of the split game board 5A is incompatible during the power-on operation check, just as when the compatibility of the combination of the split game board 5A is determined only when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, while various The speakers and the various LEDs of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) may not emit a game board incompatibility alarm sound or light up a serious abnormality alarm light to notify that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, but may instead emit a game board incompatibility alarm sound and light up a serious abnormality alarm light to notify that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible when the power-on operation check is completed and the game mode is entered.

Furthermore, even if the system is configured to periodically determine whether the combination of the divided game board 5A is compatible, even if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, a sensor or switch such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, or door frame open switch, which inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) during the setting change process, the detection is invalid (the system may not execute a process to check whether a detection has occurred, or it may execute a process to check whether a detection has occurred but not execute a process (such as an alert) based on the detection). Therefore, even after the setting change process, an abnormality alert based on detection during the setting change process by the abnormality detection means may not be executed.

In addition, when the system is configured to periodically determine whether the combination of the divided game boards 5A is compatible, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is determined to be incompatible during the power-on operation check after the setting change process and an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, a sensor or switch such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, ball out detection sensor 574, or door frame open switch, which inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310), the performance display device 1600, various speakers, and various LEDs on the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) may issue a notification that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, taking priority over an alarm that the abnormality detection means has detected the combination. If the combination of the divided game boards 5A is determined to be compatible, an alarm that the abnormality detection means has detected the combination may be issued.

[Changing settings when not connected]
Next, an example of behavior when changing the setting value in a disconnected state (disconnected state) in which the right-side gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected to the left-side gaming board 5AL, such as when there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side gaming board 5AR (the input of an ID code signal from the right-side gaming board 5AR cannot be confirmed) and a malfunction such as a short circuit or disconnection occurs in the transmission path for transmitting various signals, will be described with reference to Fig. 331. Note that, below, only the parts that differ from when there is a match or when there is a mismatch will be described, and redundant explanations will not be given.

As shown in FIG. 331, if there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side gaming board 5AR during the ID determination process (step S1003) executed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, i.e., if the right-side gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected, a control signal from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is not input to the various LEDs and other electronic components mounted on the decorative board of the right-side gaming board 5AR, and therefore the electronic components mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR are in a non-driven state (for example, the various LEDs are turned off) regardless of whether a setting change is being performed. Note that if it is determined during the ID determination process (step S1003) that there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side gaming board 5AR, it is also possible not to output a control signal from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 to the various LEDs and other electronic components mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR.

Furthermore, in this example, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that no ID code signal has been input from the right-side gaming board 5AR, it will not notify that the right-side gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected until the setting change process is completed. In other words, while the setting change process is being executed, the performance display device 1600, various speakers, and various LEDs (some or all) of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) are controlled in the same manner as when the setting change process was executed at the time of adaptation (they may be completely identical, or almost all may be the same with only some differences).

Then, when the setting change process is completed and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts a process (step S38) of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the various speakers and various LEDs (which may be only some or all) of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) in the same manner as when the process (step S38) of clearing the main control built-in RAM was executed upon adaptation (which may be completely identical, or almost entirely identical with only some differences). Furthermore, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 not only displays the display mode (normal mode) (decorative patterns, background images during normal mode (when playable), etc.) on the display device 1600 in the same manner as when matched, but also displays "Right side game board unconnection error occurred" as an unconnection error notification display mode on the display device 1600 to notify that the right side game board 5AR is not electrically connected to the left side game board 5AL.

In this way, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected, when a power-on operation check is performed after the setting change process (step S37) is completed, the top center speaker, top side speakers, various LEDs such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3, and the main frame speaker 622 provided on the main frame 4 are controlled in the same manner (which may be completely the same, or almost entirely the same with only some differences) as when the process (step S38) to clear the main control built-in RAM is performed upon matching, so that the fact that the right-side gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected is not notified.

On the other hand, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected, when the power-on operation check is performed after the setting change process (step S37) is completed, the effect display device 1600 provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL will display "Right-side gaming board unconnected error occurred" as an unconnected error notification display mode, thereby notifying the user that the right-side gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected.

In other words, during the power-on operation check, which involves the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executing a process (step S38) to clear all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, the various speakers and LEDs serving as frame-side presentation means provided on the door frame 3 and main frame 4 do not indicate that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected, while the presentation display device 1600 serving as game board-side presentation means provided on the left-side game board 5AL indicates that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected. At this time, the various speakers and LEDs provided on the door frame 3 and main frame 4 indicate that the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is executing a process (step S38) to clear all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area. Note that while only the presentation display device 1600 is shown as the game board-side presentation means, the game board-side presentation means also includes the various LEDs provided on the left-side game board 5AL. Furthermore, while the various LEDs provided on the left gaming board 5AL do not indicate that the right gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected during the power-on operation check, which involves the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executing a process (step S38) that clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, the effect display device 1600 is configured to indicate that the right gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected, and the entire left gaming board 5AL including the effect display device 1600 (gaming board side effect means) is configured to indicate that the right gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected. In other words, a portion of the gaming board side effect means is configured to indicate that the right gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected.

If the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs a process (step S38) to clear all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, there is a risk that a setting change process (step S37) may be performed fraudulently or the game status before power was restored may be fraudulently reset, causing disadvantages to players and gaming parlors. Furthermore, because the door frame 3 and main body frame 4 are positioned around the divided game board 5A, they can be easily seen even from a distance from the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, regardless of whether the setting change process (step S38) has been executed or not, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has executed the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas (step S38), various speakers and various LEDs provided on the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 will notify the game store staff that the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has executed the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas (step S38), informing the game store staff that the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has executed the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas (step S38), in other words, that an illegal setting change process (step S37) has been performed or the game status before power was restored has been reset, thereby preventing the occurrence of fraudulent behavior. Note that the board-side presentation means may be provided with presentation means other than the various speakers and various LEDs described above. For example, the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 may be configured to have display devices. In this case, during the power-on operation check, which involves the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executing the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), the display devices on the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 may also be configured to notify that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected, but to notify that the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is executing the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38). Alternatively, the display devices may not notify either that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected or that the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is executing the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38).

On the other hand, the left-side game board 5AL is equipped with game board-side presentation means such as the presentation display device 1600, various movable bodies, and various LEDs that attract the player's attention during play. When the power is turned on, the operation check is performed to confirm whether the game board-side presentation means can be operated normally. In other words, when the operation of the game board-side presentation means is being checked from a position close to the pachinko machine 1, even if only the presentation display device 1600 notifies the operator that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected, the operator can easily notice that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected. Furthermore, for game board-side presentation means other than the presentation display device 1600, the system controls them in the same manner (which may be completely identical, or may be almost entirely identical with only some differences) as when the process of clearing the main control built-in RAM upon compatibility (step S38) is executed, without notifying the operator that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected, thereby confirming whether they can be operated normally, and ensuring that presentations are executed without any problems when a game is played.

The unconnection error notification display mode in the performance display device 1600 is a still image that does not change over time, and continues until the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. However, when the conditions for starting the variable display are met (a game ball entering the start port (first start port 2002 or one of the first start port 2002 and second start port 2004)) and the variable display of a special pattern is started in the function display unit 1400, or the variable display of a fourth pattern is started in the sub-function display unit 2250, a variable display such as a variable display of a decorative pattern is performed with the unconnection error notification display mode displayed on the performance display device 1600. The notification display mode may be any mode appropriate to the error content, and may be a combination of letters and numbers (for example, an error code), a mark, or the like. In this way, during the power-on operation check, which involves clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas after the setting change process (step S38), the display on the effect display device 1600 notifies the user that the right-side gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected to the left-side gaming board 5AL in a static mode that does not change regardless of the passage of time. This makes it possible to notify the user that the right-side gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected to the left-side gaming board 5AL without interfering with the confirmation process during the power-on operation check.

In addition, in the power-on operation check that is performed in parallel with the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas (step S38), not only is the power-on operation check not performed for the drive motors and drive solenoids, etc., that are provided on the right gaming board 5AR and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, which are determined to be in an unconnected state, but also for the movable body that performs the power-on operation check (the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the divided gaming board 5A). When power is turned on, no operation checks are performed on the drive motors and drive solenoids that drive the performance operation unit 301 that is provided on the door frame units (such as the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, the rear lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear lower front performance unit 3160, and the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3) and is not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003).

As described above, the game board side components may be configured to include the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit from among the door frame units. In this case, the specific door frame unit is the subject of ID determination, and if it is determined to be in an unconnected state in the ID determination process (step S1003), some or all of the movable bodies operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. provided in door frame units that are not the subject of ID determination (non-specific door frame units) and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may also be prevented from being driven. In addition to this, or separately from this, if there are multiple specific door frame units (for example, the right door frame If it is determined that some (for example, one of the door frame right side unit 430 and the door frame top unit 450) are disconnected, all of the movable bodies operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. provided in the specific door frame unit and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may be prevented from being driven, or all of the movable bodies operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. provided in all door frame units, including the specific door frame unit, and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may be prevented from being driven.

Specifically, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming panel 5AR is not electrically connected, even when the power-on operation check is started, the LEDs provided on the right-side gaming panel 5AR that were determined to be not connected will not be controlled to light up in the light-emitting mode during the power-on operation check, or the movable body will not be controlled to operate in the mode during the power-on operation check (a control signal is not output to the right-side gaming panel 5AR), or this control will not be possible (a control signal is output but not input to the right-side gaming panel 5AR). In addition, the drive motor or drive solenoid provided on the tray unit 200 (in this example, the performance operation unit 300) that is provided on the door frame 3 and not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003) will not be driven to operate the performance operation unit 301 provided on the performance operation unit 300.

In other words, when the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, there is a risk that some or all of the movable bodies provided on the door frame unit that is not subject to ID determination will also have poor connections, and the control signal output from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may be changed to a different signal than intended due to noise, etc., and input, causing the movable bodies to operate in an abnormal manner.Therefore, some or all of the movable bodies that are provided on the door frame unit and operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 that are not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003) are not driven, thereby preventing the movable bodies from operating in a different operating manner than intended, which could result in damage to the movable bodies or door frame unit, or failure of the drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. that operate the movable bodies. However, even in this case, LEDs provided on the door frame unit that are not subject to ID determination (for example, multiple LEDs 320a for illuminating and decorating the upper part (unit upper cover 312) of the performance operation unit cover unit 310 of the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3) are controlled to emit light in a predetermined manner, just as when compatible. This makes it possible to determine that the operation check is being carried out correctly when the power is turned on.

On the other hand, the movable bodies (such as the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear-right movable decorative body 3302, and the rear-front-lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear-front-lower performance unit 3160, etc.) provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is equipped with a peripheral control board 1510 on which a peripheral control IC 1510a that executes the ID determination process (step S1003) is implemented, operate in the same manner as normal (when the combination of the divided gaming board 5A is determined to be compatible) when operation confirmation begins upon power-on. In addition, the LEDs mounted on the boards provided on the movable bodies provided on the left side game board 5AL (such as the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left side game board 5AL of the divided game board 5A, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, and the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 of the front lower performance unit 3160) are controlled to emit light in the light emission mode when operation is confirmed when the power is turned on. In other words, if the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state, as in the normal case (when the combination of the divided gaming board 5A is determined to be compatible), the movable elements on the left-side gaming board 5AL (such as the rear-upper movable decorative element 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 on the left-side gaming board 5AL of the divided gaming board 5A, the rear-left movable decorative element 3301 and the rear-right movable decorative element 3302 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, and the rear-front-lower middle decorative element 3161 of the front-lower performance unit 3160) are operated in the operating mode during power-on operation check, and the LEDs on the movable elements on the left-side gaming board 5AL are controlled to emit light in the lighting mode during power-on operation check. This makes it easy to identify the gaming board on which the peripheral control board 1510 of the divided gaming board 5A is installed (in this case, the left-side gaming board 5AL).

In addition, in this example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected, no control is performed to drive the drive motor or drive solenoid mounted on the board provided in the performance operation unit 300 of the door frame unit (in this example, the tray unit 200) that is not the subject of ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003) to operate the performance operation unit 301, but the various LEDs mounted on the board provided in the performance operation unit 300 are controlled in the same manner as normal (when the combination of the divided game board 5A is determined to be compatible) during the power-on operation check. In other words, when a power-on operation check is performed after the setting change process, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected, the various LEDs mounted on the board provided in the performance operation unit 300 are controlled to emit light in the same light emission mode as when the combination of the divided game board 5A is determined to be compatible.

In addition, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected, the LEDs mounted on some of the multiple LEDs mounted on multiple boards provided on the door frame unit that are not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003), or some of the multiple LEDs mounted on one board, may not be controlled to emit light in the light emission mode at the time of power-on operation check, and some movable bodies may not operate in the operating mode at the time of power-on operation check (for example, power-on operation check may not be performed on some or all of the LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the door frame unit and the drive motors, drive solenoids, LEDs, etc. provided on the movable bodies provided on the door frame unit).

In addition, if it is determined in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the divided game board 5A is not connected, the right-side game board 5AR determined to be not connected and some or all of the movable bodies operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. provided in door frame units not subject to ID determination and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may not be driven until the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, not just during the power-on operation check, or until the combination of the divided game boards 5A is determined to be compatible. In this case, it is possible to prevent the movable bodies from operating in a manner different from their intended operation, which could result in damage to the movable bodies or door frame unit, or failure of the drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. that operate the movable bodies.

In addition, if the main body frame 4 is closed after the setting change process is completed and the main body frame 4 remains closed thereafter, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), and when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 completes the power-on operation check (the LED's light-emitting mode during power-on operation check ends and is turned off or turned on in a predetermined light-emitting mode), the movable body's operation mode during power-on operation check ends and it enters a standby state (stopped at a predetermined standby position (housed) The power-on operation check ends when the movable body is placed in the power-on operation check (state where the movable body is in the power-on operation check). Note that if the power-on operation check is configured to end earlier in the operation mode than the light-emitting mode, the power-on operation check ends when the light-emitting mode ends; if the power-on operation check is configured to end later in the operation mode than the light-emitting mode, the power-on operation check ends when the power-on operation check ends (the movable body operates in the power-on operation check operation mode and then stops (retracts) in the standby position).

Then, when the power-on operation check, which involves a process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas (step S38), is completed and the game mode is entered, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the unconnected error notification display mode on the performance display device 1600, repeatedly outputs a game board unconnected notification sound (an announcement voice saying "The right-side game board is not connected" and a warning sound such as "ding dong") from various speakers at a volume adjusted by the volume adjustment button 227 until the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (the output may be stopped after being output repeatedly a certain number of times (e.g., 5 times) or for a certain period of time (e.g., 30 seconds)), and also outputs the sound from the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430 provided in door frame 3) The various LEDs (some or all of them) of the door unit 430, tray unit 200, door frame top unit 450, etc.) are repeatedly controlled to emit light in a serious abnormality alert light mode (or in a semi-serious abnormality alert light mode if the light is controlled to emit light in a semi-serious abnormality alert light mode after the serious abnormality alert light mode), and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL are controlled to an off state, while the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are made to emit light in a controllable state similar to when adapted (they may be lit in a specified mode).

The game board unconnection alert sound is not a single alert sound (such as a "beep") that is output intermittently, but is composed of multiple sounds with different tones, and is further controlled to alternate between a mute state and an on state. Furthermore, the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode is not fixed to a lit state, but is controlled to alternate between a lit state and an off state to change the light intensity. In other words, the various speakers and LEDs dynamically alert the player that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected to the left-side game board 5AL, with the tone, volume, light intensity, etc. changing over time. This makes it easier to notice that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected to the left-side game board 5AL when the power-on operation check, which involves clearing all areas of the main control internal RAM except for specific areas (step S38), is completed and a game mode that does not require any checking is initiated.

In addition, the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode (or the semi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode if the light-emitting mode is controlled to a semi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode after the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode) of the various LEDs (which may be some or all) of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) whose light-emitting mode is controlled due to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 continues until a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the main frame 4, which was open relative to the outer frame 2, was closed. In addition, in this example, the period from when the main frame 4, which was open relative to the outer frame 2, is closed to when the light emission control of the serious abnormality alert light emission mode is terminated is set to be longer than the period required to perform the power-on operation check.Therefore, if the main frame 4 is closed after the setting change process is completed, regardless of whether the main frame 4 continues to be closed thereafter, when the power-on operation check, which involves a process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas (step S38), is completed and the game mode is started, the light emission will be controlled to the serious abnormality alert light emission mode caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2, without being controlled to the minor abnormality alert light emission mode caused by the right-side game board 5AR not being electrically connected (a mode in which the light switches between maximum brightness white lighting and extinguishing in a short period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) (rapid flashing mode)). Furthermore, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed since the main frame 4, which was open relative to the outer frame 2, was closed, the light emission control changes to a minor abnormality notification light emission mode caused by the right-side game board 5AR not being electrically connected, and the light emission control continues in the minor abnormality notification light emission mode until the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

In addition, the period from closing the main frame 4, which was open relative to the outer frame 2, to ending the light emission control of the serious abnormality notification light mode may be set to a period shorter than the period required to perform the power-on operation check.In this case, if the main frame 4 is closed after the setting change process is completed and the main frame 4 remains closed thereafter, when the power-on operation check, which involves a process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas (step S38), is completed and the game mode is started, the light emission will not be controlled to the serious abnormality notification light mode caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2, but will be controlled to the minor abnormality notification light mode caused by the right-side game board 5AR not being electrically connected. Even in this case, after the setting change process is completed, the main frame 4 is closed and then opened again, and the power-on operation check, which involves clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), is completed and the game mode is started. If the elapsed time since the main frame 4 was opened from the outer frame 2 does not reach a predetermined period, the light emission will be controlled to a minor abnormality notification light emission mode caused by the right-side game board 5AR not being electrically connected, but a serious abnormality notification light emission mode caused by the main frame 4 being opened from the outer frame 2. When a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the main frame 4, which was open from the outer frame 2, was closed, the light emission will be changed to a minor abnormality notification light emission mode caused by the right-side game board 5AR not being electrically connected, and the light emission will be controlled.

In addition, in this example, even if the light emission control of the minor abnormality alert light-emitting mode and the output of the game board unconnected alert sound are being executed due to the right-side game board 5AR not being electrically connected, when the main frame 4, which was closed against the outer frame 2, is opened, the alert due to the right-side game board 5AR not being electrically connected (light emission control of the minor abnormality alert light-emitting mode and output of the game board unconnected alert sound) is terminated and an alert due to the main frame 4 being opened against the outer frame 2 (light emission control of the major abnormality alert light-emitting mode and output of the door open alert sound) is executed, and when a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the main frame 4 was opened against the outer frame 2, the output of the door open alert sound is stopped and the output of the game board unconnected alert sound is started again, and when a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the main frame 4, which was open against the outer frame 2, was closed, the light emission control of the major abnormality alert light-emitting mode is terminated and the light emission control of the minor abnormality alert light-emitting mode is started again. In this way, notification that the main frame 4 is open takes priority over notification that the right-side gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected, thereby preventing fraudulent activity.

In addition, in this example, the output period of the door-opening alarm is shorter than the period required for power-on operation confirmation. Therefore, if the main frame 4 is opened at the start of the setting change process and closed at the end of the setting change process, and the main frame 4 remains closed thereafter, the door-opening alarm will not be output, and a game board unconnection alarm will be output. Note that the output period of the door-opening alarm may be longer than the time required for power-on operation confirmation. For example, if the main frame 4 is closed after the setting change process is completed and remains closed thereafter, or if the main frame 4 is closed after the setting change process is completed and then opened again, even if the output period of the door-opening alarm is shorter than the time required for power-on operation confirmation, the elapsed time since the main frame 4 was opened from the outer frame 2 will be a predetermined value when the power-on operation confirmation, which involves a process of clearing all areas of the main control internal RAM except for a specific area (step S38), is completed and the game mode is started. If the period has not been reached, a door open alarm sound may be output, and a game board unconnected alarm sound may be output based on the fact that the elapsed time since the main frame 4 was opened relative to the outer frame 2 has reached a predetermined period. Alternatively, if the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 when the power-on operation check, which involves a process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), is completed and the game mode is started, a door open alarm sound may be output, and a game board unconnected alarm sound may be output regardless of whether the elapsed time since the main frame 4 was opened relative to the outer frame 2 has reached a predetermined period. Furthermore, if the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 when the power-on operation check, which involves clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), is completed and the game mode is started, or if the elapsed time since the main frame 4, which was open relative to the outer frame 2, was closed has not yet reached a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds), even if the elapsed time since the main frame 4 was opened relative to the outer frame 2 has reached a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds), the game board unconnected alert sound may not be output until the main frame 4 is closed or until the light emission control of the serious abnormality alert light emission mode caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 is completed.

In this way, in this example, the setting value is changed in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR, and if the main frame 4 is closed after the setting change process is completed and the main frame 4 remains closed thereafter, the various speakers will issue an abnormality alert in response to the right-side game board 5AR being in an unconnected state, while the various LEDs (which may be only some or all) of the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) will issue an abnormality alert in response to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2. In other words, although abnormality alerts are issued for the various speakers, the various LEDs on the door frame unit, and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-hand gaming board 5AR, the causes of the abnormalities are different (for the various speakers, an abnormality alert is issued due to a disconnection, and for the various LEDs on the door frame unit and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-hand gaming board 5AR, an abnormality alert is issued due to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2).

Note that the volume of the game board unconnection alert sound output from the various speakers when the right-side game board 5AR is not connected can be adjusted using the volume adjustment button 227, unlike the setting change alert sound, RAM clear alert sound, door open alert sound, and game board incompatibility alert sound. In other words, because there is little risk of causing harm to the player or the gaming facility when the right-side game board 5AR is not connected and it is not an emergency, the volume can be adjusted using the volume adjustment button 227. Note that the game board unconnection alert sound output from the various speakers when the right-side game board 5AR is not connected may also not be adjustable using the volume adjustment button 227. In this case, the game board unconnection alert sound can be output at a predetermined volume, which reliably notifies the player that the right-side game board 5AR is not connected, thereby preventing any harm to the player.

In addition, during the period when the light emission is controlled to the minor abnormality notification light emission mode due to the right-side gaming board 5AR being in a disconnected state, it is not possible to adjust the light intensity (brightness) using the light intensity adjustment button 228. As described above, by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228, the player can adjust the light intensity (brightness) of some of the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the divided gaming board 5A. However, the minor abnormality notification light emission mode that is activated due to the right-side gaming board 5AR being in a disconnected state cannot be adjusted by the player operating the light intensity adjustment button 228. Therefore, when the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state, the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the divided gaming board 5A are controlled to emit a predetermined amount of light (brightness), enabling a minor abnormality notification light-up mode. The minor abnormality notification light-up mode can notify that some kind of abnormality has occurred, allowing the player to visually check the divided gaming board 5A and making them aware that the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state, preventing any disadvantage to the player.

In addition, when the game board unconnected alert sound is being output, scales corresponding to the current volume and light intensity (brightness) are displayed on the effect display device 1600 in response to operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228. This makes it possible to recognize that operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 is valid, and the displayed scales allow the player to know the level of volume and light intensity (brightness). Furthermore, as described above, the light intensity (brightness) cannot be adjusted using the light intensity adjustment button 228 in the minor abnormality alert light-emitting mode, but even when the light emission is controlled to the alert light-emitting mode for security purposes, it is possible to prevent the opportunity to adjust the light intensity (brightness) from being taken away. Note that when the game board unconnected alert sound is being output, the effect display device 1600 may not display scales corresponding to the current volume and light intensity (brightness) even if the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated.

In addition, when the game board unconnection notification sound is output, a confirmation sound is also output in response to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 228. Therefore, the confirmation sound in response to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 228 makes it possible to recognize that the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 228 is valid, and the volume of the confirmation sound makes it possible to understand the volume after operating the volume adjustment button 227. Note that it is also possible not to output the confirmation sound in response to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 228 even if the volume adjustment button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated when the game board unconnection notification sound is output.

As described above, the light intensity of the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode (including the semi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode when the light emission is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode after the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode) that is controlled due to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 cannot be adjusted using the light intensity adjustment button 228. Furthermore, in this example, during the period from when the main frame 4, which was open relative to the outer frame 2, is closed to when the light emission control of the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode (including the semi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode when the light emission is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode after the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode) is terminated, the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 start to check the power-on operation, followed by the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38) and the process of checking the power-on operation, Since this is longer than the period until both of these are completed, when the setting change process is executed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), and after the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 has finished checking the operation at power-on, light emission control is executed to change the serious abnormality alert light mode caused by the main frame 4 being released from the outer frame 2 (if light emission control is changed to the semi-serious abnormality alert light mode after the serious abnormality alert light mode, the semi-serious abnormality alert light mode).

In other words, when the right-side game board 5AR is not connected and the setting change process is executed, after the main frame 4 that was open to the outer frame 2 is closed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), and when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 completes the power-on operation check, the various speakers output a game board unconnection alert sound, and a serious abnormality alert light-emitting pattern (serious abnormality alert) is displayed due to the main frame 4 being opened to the outer frame 2. When the light emission mode is changed to the semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode after the serious abnormality alert light emission mode, the light emission control for the semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode is executed, and the volume of the game board unconnection alert sound output from the various speakers can be adjusted using the volume adjustment button 227, but for the serious abnormality alert light emission mode (including the semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode when the light emission mode is changed to the semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode after the serious abnormality alert light emission mode), which is controlled to emit light due to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2, it is not possible to adjust the light intensity using the light intensity adjustment button 228.

Therefore, when the right-side game board 5AR is not connected and the setting change process is being executed, after the main frame 4, which was open to the outer frame 2, is closed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 checks the operation at power-on. When this is completed, the light can be controlled to emit a serious abnormality alert light at a predetermined brightness (or a semi-serious abnormality alert light if the light is controlled to emit a semi-serious abnormality alert light after the serious abnormality alert light), and if the setting change alert light is overlooked during the execution of the setting change process, or if a specific area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared, the light can be controlled to emit a serious abnormality alert light at a predetermined brightness (or a semi-serious abnormality alert light if the light is controlled to emit a semi-serious abnormality alert light after the serious abnormality alert light). Even if the RAM clear notification is overlooked during the process of clearing all but a specific area of the main control built-in RAM (step S38) and the power-on operation check, the serious abnormality notification light emission mode (or the semi-serious abnormality notification light emission mode if the light emission is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality notification light emission mode after the serious abnormality notification light emission mode) can be seen afterwards, making it possible to be aware that a setting change process or a process of clearing all but a specific area of the main control built-in RAM (step S38) may have been performed. At the same time, the volume can be adjusted using the volume adjustment button 227 to prevent the player from being annoyed by the fact that the right-side gaming panel 5AR is not connected, which is unlikely to cause any disadvantage to the player or the gaming facility.

In addition, when the light emission is controlled to the serious abnormality alert light emission mode due to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 (including the semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode when the light emission is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode after the serious abnormality alert light emission mode), a scale corresponding to the volume or light intensity (brightness) is displayed on the performance display device 1600 based on the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228, and the scale may be changed by operating the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 222 while the scale is displayed. Alternatively, when the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2 and the light emission is controlled to the serious abnormality alert light emission mode, the volume adjustment button Even when the section button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated, the performance display device 1600 does not display a scale corresponding to the volume or light intensity (brightness). Instead, when the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2 and the light emission is controlled to the serious abnormality alert light emission mode (or the semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode when the light emission is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode after the serious abnormality alert light emission mode), the performance display device 1600 may display a scale corresponding to the volume or light intensity (brightness) based on the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 228, and the scale may be changed by operating the volume adjustment button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 222 while the scale is displayed. In this case, after the light emission control for the serious abnormality alert light emission mode or the output of the door open alert sound has ended, the performance sound may be output or the light emission performance may be executed at a volume or light intensity (brightness) corresponding to the scale changed based on the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 222.

In addition, when the light emission is controlled to the serious abnormality alert light mode (including the quasi-serious abnormality alert light mode when the light emission is controlled to the quasi-serious abnormality alert light mode after the serious abnormality alert light mode) due to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2, a confirmation sound based on the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 may be output at a volume set in accordance with the operation of the volume adjustment button 227.Alternatively, when the light emission is controlled to the serious abnormality alert light mode when the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, no confirmation sound may be output even if the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated.However, when the light emission is controlled to the serious abnormality alert light mode (including the quasi-serious abnormality alert light mode when the light emission is controlled to the quasi-serious abnormality alert light mode after the serious abnormality alert light mode) when the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2, a confirmation sound may be output based on the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228. Furthermore, when the light emission is controlled to a serious abnormality alert light mode (including a semi-serious abnormality alert light mode when the light emission is controlled to a semi-serious abnormality alert light mode after the serious abnormality alert light mode) due to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2, the performance display device 1600 may display a scale according to the volume or light intensity (brightness) and output a confirmation sound, or may only do one of these, based on the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 being operated.

In this case, a scale corresponding to the light intensity (brightness) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the operation of the light intensity adjustment button 228, and even if the scale is changed by further operating the light intensity adjustment button 228, the light intensity (brightness) of the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode (including the quasi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode when the light is controlled to the quasi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode after the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode) does not change. On the other hand, the minor abnormality light-emitting mode, which is executed after the light-emitting control of the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode (including the quasi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode when the light is controlled to the quasi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode after the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode) has ended, in response to the right-side game board 5AR being in an unconnected state, is controlled to emit light at the light intensity (brightness) changed in response to the operation of the light intensity adjustment button 228. In this example, when the setting change process is executed while the right-side game board 5AR is not connected, if the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2 and the light emission is controlled to the serious abnormality alert light emission mode (semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode if the light emission is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode after the serious abnormality alert light emission mode) when the power-on operation check, which involves the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), is completed and the game mode is started, the light intensity (brightness) of the light emission mode that is controlled to emit light after the end of the serious abnormality alert light emission mode (semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode if the light emission is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode after the serious abnormality alert light emission mode) can be adjusted during the light emission control of the serious abnormality alert light emission mode (semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode if the light emission is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode after the serious abnormality alert light emission mode). This prevents players from being deprived of an opportunity to adjust the light intensity (brightness) in situations where they can start playing, even if the light is controlled to the serious abnormality alert light mode (if the light is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality alert light mode after the serious abnormality alert light mode), and prevents a decline in interest in playing.

In addition, when there is no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming board 5AR and the condition for starting the variable display is met (a gaming ball enters the start port (first start port 2002 or one of the first start port 2002 and second start port 2004)), the occurrence of an abnormality is not reported without performing the variable display effects using the various speakers, the various LEDs on the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3), and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition, if the period from closing the main frame 4 that was open relative to the outer frame 2 to ending the serious abnormality alert light emission mode (or the semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode if the light emission is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode after the serious abnormality alert light emission mode) is shorter than the period from starting the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38) and the power-on operation check by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 to ending both the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38) and the power-on operation check, if the main frame 4 is closed after the setting change process is completed and the main frame 4 remains closed thereafter, the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 420, door ... right side unit 420, door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 420, door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit The various LEDs (which may be some or all) of the right-side game board 5AR (such as the main unit 430, the tray unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450) are not controlled to emit light in a serious abnormality notification light mode caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2, but are controlled to emit light in a minor abnormality notification light mode corresponding to the fact that the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state as soon as the power-on operation check, which involves the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas (step S38), is completed and the game mode is started, so that the LED light emission mode can immediately notify the fact that the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state as soon as the power-on operation check, which involves the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas (step S38), is completed and the game mode is started.

In addition, even when the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input, after the power-on operation check is performed, the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, which display information regarding whether the game is a win or a loss, are not turned off, but are controlled to emit light in the same way as under normal circumstances (when play is possible). In other words, when there is no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming board 5AR and the game is not connected, the system notifies the player that the right-side gaming board 5AR is not connected, preventing the game from proceeding in a manner not intended by the designer. However, even if the game starts in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming board 5AR, the LEDs that display information about winning or losing are controlled to light up, allowing the game to proceed as normal, preventing the player from being disadvantaged.

In addition, in this example, the right-side gaming board 5AR is not provided with ball entry ports (starting ports (first starting port 2002, second starting port 2004), big prize port 2005, general prize port 2001, etc.) or gates 2003, and these are provided only on the left-side gaming board 5AL, so there is little risk of the player being disadvantaged even if the game is played in an unconnected state where there is no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming board 5AR.In other words, if the divided gaming board 5A does not have a right-side gaming board 5AR and only has a left-side gaming board 5AL, nothing is provided in the area corresponding to the right-side gaming board 5AR, so although there is a risk of the player being disadvantaged by playing the game, it is easy to recognize visually that an abnormality has occurred. Therefore, a player who senses an abnormality will likely avoid playing. On the other hand, if the divided gaming board 5A has both a right gaming board 5AR and a left gaming board 5AL but the right gaming board 5AR is disconnected due to a connection failure or other reason, it is difficult to visually recognize that an abnormality has occurred, so the player will continue to play, but since the right gaming board 5AR does not have an entrance or gate that would affect the player's advantage, there is little risk of the player being disadvantaged. In this way, a state in which the right gaming board 5AR is disconnected is less likely to cause a disadvantage to the player than a state in which it is deemed incompatible, so although a notification of the disconnection is displayed, the player can continue playing as if it were compatible.

In addition, the right-side gaming board 5AR is not equipped with any detection means, such as an entrance or gate 2003, or a magnetic sensor 1050 for detecting fraudulent activity; all of these are provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL. In other words, electronic components related to the profits of players and gaming parlors (general prize opening sensor 3001, first start opening sensor 3002, second start opening sensor 2401, gate sensor 2801, large prize opening sensor 2402, special prize opening sensor 2601, V prize opening sensor 3003, losing opening sensor 3004, magnetic sensor 1050, start opening solenoid 2412, attacca solenoid 2414, special prize opening solenoid 2612, V distribution solenoid 3007, etc.), ball entrances (general prize opening 2001, first start opening 2002, gate 2003, second start opening 2004, large prize opening 2005, etc.), gate 2003, etc. are all provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL. Therefore, even if fraudulent activity occurs in an unconnected state where no ID code signal is input from the right-side gaming board 5AR, the detection means provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL can detect the fraudulent activity, and the gaming establishment will not suffer any disadvantage.

In addition, in an unconnected state where there is no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming board 5AR, it is sufficient that at least one of the LEDs displaying information regarding wins or losses on the LED of the function display unit 1400 provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and the LED of the sub-function display unit 2250 provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is controlled to emit light in the same manner as normal (when play is possible).For example, even when the start condition is met (a game ball enters the start hole (first start hole 2002 or one of the first start hole 2002 and second start hole 2004)), the LED of the sub-function display unit 2250 provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may be turned off or lit in an emission mode unrelated to the satisfaction of the start condition without being controlled to emit light.

In addition, in this example, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR, and the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, the timing of the light emission control in the minor abnormality alert light emission mode corresponding to the right-side game board 5AR being in an unconnected state and the timing of the output of the game board unconnected alert sound differ depending on whether or not the setting values are changed and whether or not a specific area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared (a specified area of the main control built-in RAM (an area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM excluding the specific area)).

Specifically, when the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input, and neither a change to the setting value nor a process to clear a specific area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM (a specific area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM excluding the specific area) is performed, the effect display device 1600 will display "power on" for a specified period of time based on the start of power supply to the pachinko machine 1, and then a power-on operation check will be initiated, and while this power-on operation check is being performed, light emission control will be initiated in a minor abnormality alert light emission mode using various LEDs (which may be only some or all) of the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3), and the output of a game board unconnected alert sound will be initiated from various speakers. In other words, when the power-on operation check begins, if there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR and it is in an unconnected state, light emission control will be initiated in a minor abnormality notification light mode, and the output of a game board unconnected notification sound will be initiated from various speakers.

On the other hand, when the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no input of an ID code signal, and either a change in the setting value or a process to clear all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area)) is performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs a process to clear all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for the specific area (step S38), and while the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is performing a power-on operation check, light emission control is performed in a minor abnormality notification light emission mode due to the unconnected state with no input of an ID code signal from the right-side gaming board 5AR, and a game board unconnected notification sound is output by various speakers. Without starting the power supply, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 clears all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38), and at the timing after the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 has finished checking the operation at power-on (in this example, at the timing when the game mode is started, a game board unconnected alert sound is output due to the fact that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR and the game is in an unconnected state, and light emission control for the minor abnormality alert light emission mode is started after the game mode is started), light emission control in the minor abnormality alert light emission mode due to the fact that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR and the game board unconnected alert sound is output from various speakers.

In this way, by varying the timing of the light emission control in the minor abnormality alert light emission mode and the timing of the output of the game board unconnection alert sound depending on whether or not to change the setting values even when there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, and whether or not to clear a specific area from the entire area of the main control built-in RAM (a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area from the entire area of the main control built-in RAM excluding a specific area)), it is possible to prioritize the notification of information of high importance and prevent malfunctions and fraudulent activity. In other words, since there is a risk of damage to the gaming parlor if the setting values are changed fraudulently or the main control built-in RAM is cleared, the damage can be prevented from spreading by prioritizing the notification of an illegal change in the setting values or the clearing of the main control built-in RAM over the notification of an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR.

When power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started and the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input, the timing at which the display device 1600 displays "Right-side gaming board unconnected error" as an unconnection error notification display mode is the same regardless of whether the setting value is changed or whether the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared except for a specific area (a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM excluding a specific area)). In other words, the display device 1600 displays "Right-side gaming board unconnected error" as an unconnection error notification display mode when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the process of clearing the entire area of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38) or the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 starts checking operation at power-on. This allows for priority execution of high-importance notifications, while the display device 1600 can also notify and handle other notifications. Furthermore, the timing of the display of "Right side game board unconnection error occurred" as an unconnection error notification display mode on the effect display device 1600 can be varied depending on whether or not the setting value is changed, or whether or not a specific area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared (a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM excluding a specific area)). In this case, information of increasing importance can be notified in order and dealt with in sequence, ensuring that each piece of information is conveyed and dealt with reliably.

As described above, in this example, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the combination of the divided game board 5A is set to a compatible (matched) state, and after the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is compatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 does not execute the ID determination process (step S1003).Therefore, even if the divided game board 5AR enters an unconnected state with no ID code signal input after the ID determination process (step S1003) is executed, the above-mentioned alerts (game board unconnected alert sound, unconnected error alert display mode, minor abnormality alert light emission mode, etc.) are not executed. Therefore, at least the LEDs (such as the various LEDs of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3), the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left side game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, and the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250) provided in areas other than the right game board 5AR are controlled in the same manner as when the right game board 5AR is fitted.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 begins, the machine is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal being input from the right-side gaming panel 5AR, and if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state, even if an abnormality is detected by an abnormality detection means (for example, a sensor or switch such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, or door frame open switch, which inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) during the setting change process, the detection is invalid (it may be that no process is executed to check whether or not there is a detection, or it may be that a process is executed to check whether or not there is a detection but no process (such as an alert) based on the detection is executed).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 332, even if an illicit magnetic field is generated during the setting change process and a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the detection signal is discarded without issuing an abnormality alert based on the detection of the illicit magnetic field. In other words, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming board 5AR and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state, and if a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the setting change process, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is ignored, and after the setting change process is completed, control is executed as if no detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 was input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

In this way, in this example, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal being input, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, if an abnormality is detected by an abnormality detection means (for example, a sensor or switch such as a magnetic sensor 1050, a vibration sensor, a full tank detection sensor 154, a ball out detection sensor 574, a door frame opening switch, etc., which inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) during execution of the setting change process, then after the setting change process is completed, a notification due to the unconnected state with no ID code signal being input from the right-side game board 5AR is given priority over an abnormality notification due to detection by the abnormality detection means. In other words, even if fraudulent behavior is committed in a non-playable state before play can begin, such as during the execution of a setting change process, there is little risk of a disadvantage occurring when the game mode is switched to. However, if there is an unconnected state where no ID code signal is being input from the right-side game board 5AR, there is a risk of a disadvantage occurring when play is started when the game mode is switched to. Therefore, if both a detection by the abnormality detection means and an unconnected state where no ID code signal is being input from the right-side game board 5AR occur during the execution of a setting change process, a notification due to the unconnected state where no ID code signal is being input from the right-side game board 5AR is given priority after the setting change process is completed, thereby preventing the occurrence of a disadvantage.

On the other hand, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, there is no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming panel 5AR, indicating an unconnected state, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state. If an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (e.g., a sensor or switch that inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, or door frame open switch) during the power-on operation check, which is executed after the setting change process is completed, that is, when an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means during the power-on operation check, which involves the process of clearing all areas of the main control internal RAM except for specific areas (step S38), the detection by the abnormality detection means is valid, but some abnormality alerts are not issued during the power-on operation check, and are issued after the power-on operation check is completed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 333, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, there is no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming panel 5AR, indicating an unconnected state, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state. If a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the power-on operation check that is executed after the setting change process is completed, the various LEDs of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) will not be controlled to emit light in a serious abnormality alert light emission mode due to the detection of an illegal magnetism, and magnetic detection alert sounds (e.g., "Magnetic detection error occurred.") will not be repeatedly output from the various speakers during the power-on operation check.

When the power-on operation check is complete, the various LEDs on the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) are controlled to emit light in a major abnormality alert light mode due to the detection of unauthorized magnetism, and a magnetic detection alert sound is output from the various speakers. The abnormality alert due to the detection of unauthorized magnetism is configured to end when a predetermined period of time has passed since the detection of the unauthorized magnetism. When the abnormality alert due to the detection of unauthorized magnetism ends, if no other abnormalities have been detected, the various LEDs on the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) are controlled to emit light in a minor abnormality alert light mode due to the right-side game board 5AR being unconnected, and a game board unconnection alert sound is repeatedly output from the various speakers.

In this way, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state, and if a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the power-on operation check that is executed after the setting change process is completed, control continues as if no detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 has been input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310a of the main control board 1310 for the various LEDs and speakers of the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3), and an abnormality alert is issued due to the detection of an unauthorized magnetism based on the completion of the power-on operation check.

In other words, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal being input and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state, and if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (e.g., a sensor or switch that inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, door frame open switch, etc.) during the power-on operation check that is executed after the setting change process is completed, then an abnormality alert resulting from detection by the abnormality detection means will be given priority over an alert resulting from the unconnected state with no ID code signal being input from the right-side gaming panel 5AR after the power-on operation check is completed.

In other words, since game mode begins immediately after the power-on operation check is completed, there is the possibility of similar fraudulent behavior in game mode. On the other hand, if there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game panel 5AR and the game is in an unconnected state, there is less likelihood of disadvantages occurring compared to fraudulent behavior. Therefore, if both a detection by the abnormality detection means and an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side game panel 5AR occur during the execution of the power-on operation check, the occurrence of disadvantages is suppressed by prioritizing the execution of a notification due to the detection by the abnormality detection means after the power-on operation check is completed (or, in some cases, while the power-on operation check is being executed).

In addition, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, and if a detection signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 of the abnormality detection means (e.g., magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, door frame open switch, etc.) during the execution of the power-on operation check, When an abnormality is detected by the sensors and switches (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3), an abnormality alert is issued to the various LEDs and speakers of the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) when the operation check at power-on is completed, but an abnormality alert is issued to the performance display device 1600 (for example, "magnetic error occurred" is displayed as a magnetic detection error alert mode) when an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means. That is, when a detection signal from the abnormality detection means is input to the main control board 1310 (or when the value of the magnet goto counter reaches its upper limit), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sends a command to the peripheral control board 1510 to start an abnormality notification (for example, a magnet goto notification command classified as a notification display indicating that radio wave irradiation goto is occurring), and when the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 receives the command to start the abnormality notification (magnet goto notification command), it starts control related to the abnormality notification. Furthermore, even when an abnormality notification due to detection by the abnormality detection means is displayed on the performance display device 1600, an abnormality notification due to the right-side game board 5AR being in an unconnected state (unconnection error notification display mode) is displayed on the performance display device 1600. That is, when both detection by the abnormality detection means and the right-side game board 5AR being in an unconnected state occur simultaneously, an abnormality notification is displayed on the performance display device 1600 to notify the respective abnormalities.

Note that, as abnormality detection means, sensors and switches such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, and door frame open switch that input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 have been shown. However, for some sensors and switches, even if a detection signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during a power-on operation check or after the setting change process has ended (including during power-on operation check and game mode), no abnormality alert may be sent to the performance display device 1600. Alternatively, for all sensors and switches, even if a detection signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during a power-on operation check or after the setting change process has ended (including during power-on operation check and game mode), no abnormality alert may be sent to the performance display device 1600.

Furthermore, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state, and if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (e.g., sensors or switches that input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, door frame open switch, etc.) during play mode after the power-on operation check is completed, that is, when an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means during play mode, the detection by the abnormality detection means is still valid, but unlike when an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means during the power-on operation check, an abnormality alert is issued at the time the abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means.

Specifically, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, there is no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming panel 5AR, and the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state, and when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during game mode after the power-on operation check is completed, an abnormality alert due to detection by the abnormality detection means is issued by the effect display device 1600 and the various LEDs and speakers of the door frame units (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, door frame top unit 450, etc. provided on the door frame 3).

In other words, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal being input and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state, and if a detection signal is input from an abnormality detection means (e.g., a sensor or switch that inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, ball out detection sensor 574, door frame open switch, etc.) to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during game mode after the power-on operation check is completed, then an abnormality alert resulting from detection by the abnormality detection means will be given priority over an alert resulting from the unconnected state with no ID code signal being input from the right-side gaming board 5AR.

Therefore, during a gaming mode where there is a high risk of disadvantages occurring if fraudulent activity is committed, if both a detection by the abnormality detection means and an unconnected state where no ID code signal is input from the right-side gaming panel 5AR occur, the occurrence of disadvantages can be prevented by giving priority to the notification resulting from the detection by the abnormality detection means.

Furthermore, rather than determining whether the combination of the divided game boards 5A is compatible only when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may periodically (for example, each time the peripheral control unit's regular processing is executed) execute an ID determination process to determine whether the combination of the divided game boards 5A is compatible after power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started. In this case, it will be possible to notify the user of the disconnected state in which no ID code signal is input from the right-side game board 5AR after power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, thereby preventing the occurrence of any disadvantages.

In addition, even if an ID determination process is periodically executed to determine whether the combination of the split gaming boards 5A is compatible, the ID determination process may not be executed while the setting change process is being executed.Also, even if the ID determination process is executed while the setting change process is being executed and it is determined that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming board 5AR and that the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state, no notification may be issued indicating that the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state while the setting change process is being executed.

Furthermore, when an ID determination process is periodically executed to determine whether the combination of the split game boards 5A is compatible, a notification (game board unconnected notification sound, unconnection error notification display mode, minor abnormality notification light emission mode, etc.) corresponding to the right-side game board 5AR being in an unconnected state may be initiated based on a determination that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR and then the notification corresponding to the right-side game board 5AR being in an unconnected state may be terminated based on a determination that the combination of the split game boards 5A is compatible, or a notification corresponding to the right-side game board 5AR being in an unconnected state may be initiated based on a determination that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR after the ID determination process determines that the combination of the split game boards 5A is compatible.

In addition, if the system is configured to periodically determine whether the combination of the split game boards 5A is compatible, when the ID determination process is performed during the power-on operation check after the setting change process or before the setting change process is started and it is determined that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR and that the game is in an unconnected state, the display device 1600 will display a message indicating that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR and that the game is in an unconnected state, just as when the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started and it is determined whether the combination of the split game boards 5A is compatible or not, while various screens are displayed. The various LEDs on the speaker and door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) may not emit a game board unconnection alert sound or light up in a minor abnormality alert light mode to alert that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR and that there is an unconnected state, but may instead emit a game board unconnection alert sound and light up in a minor abnormality alert light mode to alert that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR when the power-on operation check is completed and the playable state is initiated.

Furthermore, even if the system is configured to periodically determine whether the combination of the divided game board 5A is compatible, even if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, a sensor or switch such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, or door frame open switch, which inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) during the setting change process, the detection is invalid (the system may not execute a process to check whether there is a detection, or it may execute a process to check whether there is a detection but not execute a process (such as an alert) based on the detection). Therefore, even after the setting change process, an abnormality alert based on detection during the setting change process by the abnormality detection means may not be executed.

In addition, if the system is configured to periodically determine whether the combination of the split game boards 5A is compatible, if the right game board 5AR is disconnected during the power-on operation check after the setting change process and an abnormality is detected by an abnormality detection means (for example, a sensor or switch such as a magnetic sensor 1050, a vibration sensor, a full tank detection sensor 154, a bulb out detection sensor 574, or a door frame opening switch, which inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310), the performance display device 1600 will report both the disconnected state with no input of an ID code signal from the right game board 5AR during the power-on operation check and the fact that the abnormality was detected by the abnormality detection means. While a display indicating this is displayed, the various speakers and the various LEDs on the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) may not notify that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming panel 5AR and that there has been detection by the abnormality detection means, and instead, when the power-on operation check is completed and the game mode is started, notifications of detection by the abnormality detection means in the various speakers and door frame units may be given priority over notifications of there being no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming panel 5AR and that there is no connection.

In this example, when the setting change process is executed, after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the machine is controlled to one of three game states: a first game state during which the setting change process is being executed, a second game state during which the power-on operation check is being executed, and a third game state as the game mode after the power-on operation check is completed. Furthermore, even if the right-side game board 5AR is disconnected or the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible in the first game state, the machine is not notified of the disconnection state in which there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR or the incompatible combination of the divided game board 5A. In other words, during the first game state, the effect display device 1600, various speakers, and various LEDs (some or all of them) of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) are not controlled in a manner that notifies that there is no ID code signal input from the right game board 5AR and that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible.

In addition, during the second game state after the first game state, the various speakers and the various LEDs (which may be only some or all) of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) are not controlled in a manner that notifies that they are in an unconnected state where there is no input of an ID code signal from the right game board 5AR or that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible, while the performance display device 1600 is controlled in a manner that notifies that they are in an unconnected state where there is no input of an ID code signal from the right game board 5AR or that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible. In addition, if during the second game state there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR, and the game is in an unconnected state, the fact that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR is indicated only by displaying text information on the display device 1600. If the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, the fact that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible is indicated by displaying text information and image information on the display device 1600. In this way, in the second game state, the fact that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR and the fact that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible are indicated only by the display on the display device 1600, but the intensity of the indication varies depending on the degree of disadvantage. This makes it easier to notice an incompatible combination of the divided game boards 5A, which has a higher degree of disadvantage compared to an unconnected state where there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR.

Furthermore, during the third game state following the end of the first and second game states, in addition to the effect display device 1600, various speakers and various LEDs (some or all) of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) are controlled in a manner that notifies the player that there is no ID code signal input from the right game board 5AR and that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible.

In other words, the first gaming state is a period during which work is done to change the setting values, and since the gaming performance (ease of winning, etc.) is determined, the worker needs to concentrate and work carefully. Therefore, even if the right-side gaming board 5AR is not connected or the combination of the divided gaming board 5A is incompatible, the system does not notify the user that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming board 5AR and that the combination of the divided gaming board 5A is incompatible, so as not to interfere with the work to change the setting values. In the first game state, not only is there no notification of an unconnected state where there is no ID code signal input from the right game board 5AR, or of an incompatible combination of the divided game board 5A, but there is also no notification of other abnormalities (for example, detection by sensors or switches that input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, or door frame open switch, or situations where an abnormality is not actually detected but could be detected (for example, when vibration is occurring but the vibration sensor is disabled and no vibration is detected)).

Furthermore, the second game state after the first game state is a period to check whether it is possible to light up the LEDs normally and whether it is possible to drive the drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. to operate the movable bodies normally. Although the checking work requires concentration, it does not determine game performance, so only notifications that do not interfere with the checking work (such as notifications on the performance display device 1600 in this example) are made, and attention-grabbing notifications such as flashing LEDs or outputting notification sounds from various speakers are not made. Furthermore, in the second game state, it is possible to check whether the various LEDs can emit light normally by repeatedly controlling the illumination of the various LEDs mounted in multiple numbers on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and divided game board 5A to a special illumination mode that is executed only in the second game state. In addition, in the second game state, only the performance display device 1600 notifies that there is no input of an ID code signal from the right game board 5AR and that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, and not only does not notify the various speakers and the various LEDs (which may be only some or all) of the door frame units (the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, the tray unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3), but also notifies the other abnormalities (for example, the main ones such as the magnetic sensor 1050, the vibration sensor, the full tank detection sensor 154, the bulb out detection sensor 574, the door frame open switch, etc.). Even when there is detection by a sensor or switch that inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310, or when there is a situation where there is no actual detection but it could be detected (for example, when vibration is occurring but the vibration sensor is disabled and no vibration is detected), an alert is issued only by the performance display device 1600, and no alert is issued by the various speakers or the various LEDs (some or all) of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3).

Furthermore, since the third game state following the end of the first and second game states does not involve any confirmation work or work to determine game performance, the operator is alerted using the performance display device 1600, various speakers, and various LEDs (some or all) of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) to ensure that they do not miss the fact that the right game board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input, or that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible.

In other words, in this example pachinko machine 1, when the game state changes from the first game state to the second game state and then to the third game state, the level of notification that there is no ID code signal input from the right game board 5AR and that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible changes; in the first game state, no notification is made, a weak notification is made in the second game state, and a strong notification is made in the third game state. This makes it possible to issue appropriate notifications according to the game state and work situation.

In addition, in the second gaming state, as described above, the operation of the effect operation unit 301, volume adjustment switch, light intensity adjustment switch, etc. of the effect operation unit 300, which serves as the operating means located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, outputs special modes that are not executed in the first gaming state and the third gaming state. Specifically, special sounds are output from various speakers based on the operation of the volume adjustment switch or light intensity adjustment switch, the color of the light emitted by various LEDs is changed based on the operation of the effect operation unit 301, volume adjustment switch, or light intensity adjustment switch of the effect operation unit 300, and specific displays are displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on specific operations (e.g., pressing the volume adjustment switch and light intensity adjustment switch simultaneously for a predetermined period of time) performed on the effect operation unit 301, volume adjustment switch, or light intensity adjustment switch of the effect operation unit 300. This makes it possible to confirm whether the effect operation unit 301, volume adjustment switch, light intensity adjustment switch, etc. of the effect operation unit 300, which serves as the operating means located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, are able to normally accept operations.

[Setting value confirmation display and split game board ID error]
Next, we will explain an example of behavior when the setting value confirmation display is performed in a state where the combination of the split game board 5A (i.e., the combination of the right game board 5AR (a board not equipped with a microprocessor) and the left game board 5AL (a peripheral control board 1510 or main control board 1310 equipped with a microprocessor)) is in an incompatible (mismatched) state (mismatched state, mismatched state) or where the right game board 5AR is not electrically connected to the left game board 5AL (unconnected state), such as when no ID code signal is input from the right game board 5AR (the input of the ID code signal from the right game board 5AR cannot be confirmed) and a malfunction such as a short circuit or break occurs in the transmission path for transmitting various signals. For comparison, we will also explain an example of behavior when the combination of the split game board 5A (i.e., the combination of the right game board 5AR (a board not equipped with a microprocessor) and the left game board 5AL (a peripheral control board 1510 or main control board 1310 equipped with a microprocessor)) is in a compatible (matched) state (matched state). Fig. 334 is an example of behavior when a setting value confirmation display is performed when the split gaming board 5A, which is composed of a left gaming board 5AL and a right gaming board 5AR, is compatible (matched) as a combination of the split gaming board 5A, Fig. 335 is an example of behavior when a setting value confirmation display is performed when the combination of the split gaming board 5A is incompatible (mismatched), and Fig. 338 is an example of behavior when a setting value confirmation display is performed when the right gaming board 5AR is not connected. Below, only the parts that differ from when the setting change process is executed will be explained, and duplicate explanations will not be given.

[Display of setting value confirmation when compatible]
334, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 displays "power on" on the effect display device 1600 for a predetermined period of time to notify that power has been applied to the pachinko machine 1. Meanwhile, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right game board 5AR, and the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 provided on the left game board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 are turned off. Furthermore, as described above, when the predetermined setting value display permission conditions are met when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 starts (in this example, after inserting the setting key into the setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 and turning it on, the power switch 630a provided on the power supply board 630 is operated to turn on the power to the pachinko machine 1 without pressing the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f), after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes a setting value confirmation display process (step S28), and the current setting value stored in a specific area of the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a (the value set among setting values 1 to 6 at the time the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on for the first time) can be displayed on the setting display 1310g (or the base monitor 1310h which also functions as a setting display).

In addition, when the setting value confirmation display process is initiated, a setting value confirmation display start command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510, informing the peripheral control IC 1510 that the setting value confirmation display will begin. Upon receiving the setting value confirmation display start command, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 causes the performance display device 1600 to display a setting confirmation notification (in this example, "Setting confirmation in progress") (this may be displayed until the setting value confirmation display process is terminated, or may be displayed for a certain period of time and then terminated), and causes the various speakers to repeatedly output a setting value confirmation display notification sound (an announcement voice saying "Setting confirmation in progress" and a warning sound such as a "ding dong") at a predetermined volume (this may be the maximum volume that can be set, or a default volume adjusted using a volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510). (This may be output repeatedly until the setting value confirmation display process is terminated, or may be output repeatedly a certain number of times (e.g., five times) or for a certain period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) and then stop output.)

In addition, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the illumination of the various LEDs (some or all) of the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) and the various LEDs (some or all) mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR) to a setting confirmation notification illumination mode (in this example, the various LEDs of the door frame unit and the right-side game board 5AR switch between blue and white illumination colors in a short period of time) when the setting value confirmation display is being displayed (they may be lit in the setting confirmation notification illumination mode until the setting value confirmation display process is completed, or they may be lit in the setting confirmation notification illumination mode for a certain period of time and then the setting confirmation notification illumination mode is terminated and the lights are turned off or lit in a different illumination mode). This notifies the user that the setting value confirmation display is being performed, allowing for immediate detection of any improper setting value confirmation.

As described above, in this example, the predetermined setting value display permission condition is met when the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 1311a on the main control board 1310 and turned ON, and then the power switch 630a on the power supply board 630 is operated to turn on the power to the pachinko machine 1 without pressing the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 1310f. In other words, the setting value confirmation display process is executed with the main body frame 4 open relative to the outer frame 2, and when the setting value confirmation display process is completed, the main body frame 4, which was open relative to the outer frame 2, is closed.

However, in this example, the pachinko machine 1 is configured so that, while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed, the output of door-opening alarm sounds from the various speakers caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 and the light emission control of the serious abnormality alarm light-emitting mode are not executed. In other words, if the predetermined setting value display permission conditions are met when power is first supplied to the pachinko machine 1, the output of door-opening alarm sounds from the various speakers caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 and the light emission control of the serious abnormality alarm light-emitting mode are not executed, and the setting value confirmation display alarm sounds are output from the various speakers and the light emission control of the setting confirmation alarm light-emitting mode is executed. Therefore, when the setting value confirmation display process is executed, after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, the output of door-opening alarm sounds from the various speakers caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 and the light emission control of the serious abnormality alarm light-emitting mode (including the quasi-serious abnormality alarm light-emitting mode if the light emission control is to be changed to the quasi-serious abnormality alarm light-emitting mode after the serious abnormality alarm light-emitting mode) can be executed.

Note that if the setting value confirmation display process is terminated after the main frame 4, which was open relative to the outer frame 2, is closed, i.e., if the main frame 4 is closed while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed and the main frame 4 remains closed thereafter, the door open alarm sounds caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 will not be output from the various speakers and the serious abnormality alarm light emission mode (including the semi-serious abnormality alarm light emission mode if the light emission mode is changed to the semi-serious abnormality alarm light emission mode after the serious abnormality alarm light emission mode) will not be executed even after the setting value confirmation display process is terminated. However, when checking and displaying the setting value, the amusement hall manager or other person in charge will normally open the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 from the front of the pachinko machine 1 and perform an operation to check and display the setting value, so the main frame 4, which was open relative to the outer frame 2, will be closed after the setting value confirmation display process is terminated. Furthermore, as described above, when the main frame 4, which is open relative to the outer frame 2, is closed or when the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 and a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the main frame 4 was opened relative to the outer frame 2 (e.g., 30 seconds, which is shorter than the time required for power-on operation confirmation in this example), the door open alarm sound is stopped and muted. Therefore, normally, when the setting value confirmation display process is executed and the setting value confirmation display process is completed, if the predetermined period of time has not elapsed since the main frame 4 was opened relative to the outer frame 2, both the door open alarm sound output from the various speakers due to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 and the light emission control of the serious abnormality alarm light mode (including the semi-serious abnormality alarm light mode if the light emission control is switched to the semi-serious abnormality alarm light mode after the serious abnormality alarm light mode) are executed; however, if the predetermined period of time has elapsed since the main frame 4 was opened relative to the outer frame 2, only the light emission control of the serious abnormality alarm light mode due to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 is executed.

In addition, the volume of the setting value confirmation display notification sound output from the various speakers while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed cannot be adjusted using the volume adjustment button 227. As described above, the player can adjust the volume output from the various speakers by operating the volume adjustment button 227, but the volume of the setting value confirmation display notification sound output while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed cannot be adjusted by the player operating the volume adjustment button 227. As a result, the setting value confirmation display notification sound can be output at a predetermined volume while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed, and the sound output from the various speakers can reliably inform the player that a setting value confirmation display is being executed. This makes it possible to immediately detect when a setting value confirmation display is being executed, and prevents fraudulent confirmation of setting values.

The light intensity of the setting confirmation notification light-emitting mode performed during the setting value confirmation display process cannot be adjusted using the light intensity adjustment button 228. As described above, the player can adjust the light intensity (brightness) of some of the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame 3 and the divided game board 5A by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228. However, the setting confirmation notification light-emitting mode performed during the setting value confirmation display process cannot be adjusted by the player operating the light intensity adjustment button 228. Therefore, during the setting value confirmation display process, the LEDs on the various decorative boards on the door frame 3 and the divided game board 5A are controlled to emit a predetermined light intensity (brightness), allowing the setting confirmation notification light-emitting mode to be performed. This setting confirmation notification light-emitting mode reliably notifies the user that a setting value confirmation display is being performed, allowing for immediate detection of any fraudulent setting value confirmation displays and preventing fraudulent setting value confirmation.

Furthermore, while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed, operating the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 does not display a scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness) on the performance display device 1600, nor does it output a confirmation sound corresponding to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228. Because the performance display device 1600 does not display a scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness), the scale does not change even if the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated multiple times. This prevents the scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness) from interfering with the visibility of the setting confirmation notification mode on the performance display device 1600, and prevents the confirmation sound corresponding to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 from making the setting value confirmation display notification sound difficult to hear, making it possible to immediately detect any unauthorized setting value confirmation display.

In addition, while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250, and the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 are turned off. In other words, in this example of the pachinko machine 1, although the split gaming board 5A is made up of the left gaming board 5AL and the right gaming board 5AR, during setting confirmation all of the various LEDs provided on the left gaming board 5AL are turned off regardless of whether they are controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, and only the various LEDs provided on the right gaming board 5AR and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are turned on.

In this way, while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed, the light emission patterns of the various LEDs provided on the divided gaming board 5A are made different between the various LEDs provided on the left gaming board 5AL and the various LEDs provided on the right gaming board 5AR, which gives a sense of discomfort to anyone viewing the pachinko machine 1 and makes them immediately aware that the setting value confirmation display process is being executed. Furthermore, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board mounted on the left gaming board 5AL, the function display unit 1400, and the sub-function display unit 2250 may be illuminated in a different light-emitting mode from the various LEDs on the door frame unit and the right gaming board 5AR (for example, illuminated red (not flashing) at a predetermined brightness (which may be maximum brightness, a brightness lower than maximum brightness, or a brightness such that the light intensity cannot be adjusted using the light intensity adjustment button 228)). Alternatively, one or both of the LEDs on the function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display unit 2250 that display information regarding winning or losing may be illuminated in a setting confirmation notification light-emitting mode. In this case, the light-emitting mode of the LEDs on the right gaming board 5AR and the left gaming board 5AL can be made different, making it possible to immediately notice that the setting value confirmation display process is being executed.

In addition, when an operation to end the setting value confirmation display (in this example, an OFF operation to return the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 to its initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns the setting key switch 1311a OFF)) is performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 hides the setting values stored in a dedicated setting value area in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM that is being displayed on the setting display 1310g (or the base monitor 1310h that also functions as a setting display), and sends a setting value confirmation display end command to the peripheral control board 1510 to notify that the setting value confirmation display process has ended.

In addition, when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives a setting value confirmation display end command from the main control MPU 1310a, it performs a power-on operation check to confirm whether the drive motors and drive solenoids controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are driven in a predetermined manner and can be turned on and operate normally. During the power-on operation check, the various LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, except for the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 that display information regarding whether the game is won or lost (such as the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left gaming board 5AL and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right gaming board 5AR, and the various LEDs of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 mounted on the door frame 3)), are illuminated in a predetermined illumination mode (illumination mode during power-on operation check). However, when the setting value confirmation display process is executed, the various LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, except for the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 that display information regarding whether the game is won or lost, are illuminated in a predetermined illumination mode (illumination mode during power-on operation check) only if the illumination control for the serious abnormality notification illumination mode caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 is not performed.

As described above, the light emission control of the serious abnormality notification light emission mode caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 is not executed even after the completion of the setting value confirmation display process if the main frame 4 is closed while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed and the main frame 4 remains closed thereafter. In other words, if the main frame 4 is closed while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed and the main frame 4 remains closed thereafter, the various LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, except for the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 that display information about whether a win or loss occurred (the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left gaming board 5AL and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right gaming board 5AR), are lit in a predetermined light emission mode (light emission mode during power-on operation confirmation) as a power-on operation confirmation. On the other hand, If the main frame 4 is closed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, the light emission is controlled to a serious abnormality notification light mode caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2, and when a predetermined period of time (for example, 60 seconds, in this example, longer than the period from when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 starts checking power-on operation to when the power-on operation check is completed) has elapsed since the main frame 4 was closed, the light emission control for the serious abnormality notification light mode is terminated, and light emission control begins in a light emission mode corresponding to the game status (light emission mode during presentation), as in normal times (when playable).

Furthermore, after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, the mode of the performance (decorative patterns, background images during normal times (when playable), etc.) is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and when the power-on operation confirmation is completed, the LED of the function display unit 1400 and the LED of the sub-function display unit 2250 that display information regarding winning or losing are lit in a predetermined light-emitting mode, and based on the start condition of the variable display being met (a game ball entering the start port (first start port 2002 or one of the first start port 2002 and second start port 2004)), the light emission is controlled in a predetermined light-emitting mode (light-emitting mode during variable performance (lights up in a predetermined light-emitting mode after flashing for a predetermined period)). Also, as mentioned above, in this example, the output period of the door opening notification sound is determined based on the power-on operation confirmation. Since this is shorter than the period required for confirmation, if the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2 when the setting value confirmation display process is started and the main frame 4 is still open relative to the outer frame 2 when the setting value confirmation display process is completed, the elapsed time since the main frame 4 was opened will have already reached a predetermined time (e.g., 30 seconds). Therefore, even if the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 when the setting value confirmation display process is completed, the door open notification sound will not be output from the various speakers, and the sound output during the effect (the output of the effect sound that is performed when the start condition for the variable display is met (the game ball enters the start port (first start port 2002 or one of the first start port 2002 and second start port 2004))) can be executed.

Furthermore, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 ends the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) and performs an interrupt permission setting (step S52), enabling the ball launcher 540 to launch game balls, and starts controlling the illumination of the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display unit 2250, which display information about winning or losing. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, game balls are not launched by the ball launcher 540 while the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is being executed. It should be noted that any device may be used to control the illumination of the LED of the function display unit 1400 and the LED of the sub-function display unit 2250, and is not limited to devices that immediately light up one or both of the LED of the function display unit 1400 and the LED of the sub-function display unit 2250 in a predetermined manner when the ball launcher 540 becomes capable of launching a gaming ball. The device may also light up one or both of the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display unit 2250 in an illumination mode for displaying special symbol variations or in an illumination mode for a variation presentation when the conditions for starting the variation presentation are met (a gaming ball entering the start port 2002 or one of the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004), or may light up in an illumination mode for displaying special symbol variations or in an illumination mode for a variation presentation after the illumination mode that notifies of an abnormal state or the like has ended, or may be set to an illumination controllable state for displaying special symbol variations or in an illumination mode for a variation presentation.

[Display of setting value confirmation in case of non-compliance]
Next, an example of behavior when a setting value confirmation display is performed when the combination of the divided gaming board 5A (i.e., the combination of the right gaming board 5AR (a board not equipped with a microprocessor) and the left gaming board 5AL (a peripheral control board 1510 or main control board 1310 equipped with a microprocessor)) is in an incompatible (mismatched) state (mismatched state) will be described with reference to FIG. 335. Note that the following only explains the parts that are different from when the setting change process is executed or when the setting value confirmation display process is executed when compatible, and does not provide a duplicated explanation.

As shown in FIG. 335, if the ID determination process (step S1003) executed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 does not output control signals to the various LEDs and other electronic components mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR, and the electronic components mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR are set to a non-driven state (e.g., the various LEDs are turned off) regardless of whether the setting value confirmation display is being performed. Also, in this example, if the ID determination process (step S1003) executed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left-side game board 5AL are also turned off regardless of whether the setting value confirmation display is being performed.

In addition, in this example, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), the system does not notify the user that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible until the setting value confirmation display process is completed (until the setting value confirmation display end command is received from the main control MPU 1310a), but instead notifies the user that the setting value confirmation display process is being executed. In other words, while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed, the performance display device 1600 displays a setting confirmation notification mode (in this example, "setting confirmation in progress") (this may be displayed until the setting value confirmation display process is completed, or may be displayed for a certain period of time and then terminated), and the setting value confirmation display notification sound (an announcement voice saying "setting confirmation in progress" and a warning sound such as a "ding dong") is output at a predetermined volume (which may be the maximum volume that can be set, or may be a default volume adjusted using a volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510). The various LEDs on the door frame unit are controlled to emit light in a setting confirmation notification light-emitting mode when displaying the setting value confirmation, while the various LEDs mounted on the decorative boards on the right game board 5AR and left game board 5AL, the LEDs on the function display unit 1400, and the LEDs on the sub-function display unit 2250 are turned off.

Then, when the setting value confirmation display process is completed, the main control MPU 1310a sends a setting value confirmation display end command to the peripheral control board 1510. When the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting value confirmation display end command, it repeatedly outputs a game board incompatibility notification sound (an announcement voice saying "A right-side game board incompatibility error has occurred. Please turn off the power and check." and a warning sound such as a "ding dong" sound) at a predetermined volume (which may be the maximum volume that can be set, or a default volume adjusted by a volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510) from various speakers until the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. and controls the various LEDs (which may be some or all) of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) to repeatedly emit light in a serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode (in this example, a mode in which the light is switched between being lit in red at maximum brightness and being turned off in a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) (high-speed blinking mode)). Also, the performance display device 1600 does not display decorative patterns or background images used in normal times (when playable), but instead displays a background image (for example, black) in an abnormal state and "Right side game board incompatible error occurred" as an incompatible error notification display mode on the performance display device 1600 to notify that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible. Meanwhile, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative boards on the right-side game board 5AR and left-side game board 5AL, the LEDs on the function display unit 1400, and the LEDs on the sub-function display unit 2250 are controlled to remain off.

The game board incompatibility alert sound is not a single alert sound (such as a "beep") that is output intermittently, but is made up of multiple sounds with different tones, and is further controlled to alternate between a mute state and an on state. Furthermore, the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode is not fixed to a lit state, but is controlled to alternate between a lit state and an off state to change the light intensity. In other words, the various speakers and LEDs dynamically alert the player that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, with the tone, volume, light intensity, etc. changing over time. This makes it easier to notice that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible when the power-on operation check, which involves clearing all areas of the main control internal RAM except for specific areas (step S38), is completed and a game mode that does not require confirmation is initiated.

In addition, when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 has completed its power-on operation check and the game mode has begun, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 continues to output the game board incompatibility alarm sound, control the light emission of the serious abnormality alarm light emission mode of the door frame unit, and display the incompatibility error alarm display mode of the performance display device 1600, while also causing the LED of the function display unit 1400 provided on the left game board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the LED of the sub-function display unit 2250 provided on the left game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 to be able to control the light emission in the same way as when they are compatible (they may also be lit in a predetermined manner). In other words, when the conditions for starting the variable display are met (a game ball enters the start port (first start port 2002 or either first start port 2002 or second start port 2004)), the LED of the function display unit 1400 and the LED of the sub-function display unit 2250 flash in a predetermined manner, and then light up in a predetermined light-emitting manner, making it possible to display information about whether the game has been won or lost.

The incompatibility error notification display mode in the effect display device 1600 is a still image that does not change over time and continues until the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. Even if the condition for starting the variable display is met (a game ball entering the start port (first start port 2002 or one of the first start port 2002 and second start port 2004)), and the variable display of a special symbol is started in the function display unit 1400, or the variable display of a fourth symbol is started in the sub-function display unit 2250, the effect display device 1600 continues to display the incompatibility error notification display mode and does not perform any variable effects such as the variable display of decorative symbols. In addition, the effect display device 16 The display format for the incompatible error notification in 00 may be any format appropriate to the error content, such as a combination of letters and numbers (for example, an error code) or a mark. In this way, during the power-on operation check that does not involve the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas (step S38) after the setting value confirmation display process, the display device 1600 notifies the user that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible in a static format that does not change over time. This makes it possible to notify the user that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible without interfering with the confirmation process during the power-on operation check.

In this way, in this example, if the combination of the divided game board 5A is determined to be incompatible (mismatched) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), the system immediately notifies the user that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible without issuing an abnormality notification in response to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 after the setting value confirmation display process is completed. In other words, after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, a game board incompatible notification sound is output without issuing a door open notification sound, regardless of whether the predetermined period has elapsed since the main frame 4 was opened relative to the outer frame 2. Furthermore, although the light emission is controlled to a serious abnormality notification light mode after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, this is executed due to the combination of the divided game board 5A being incompatible, not due to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2. Therefore, after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, the light emission is always controlled to the serious abnormality notification light emission mode regardless of whether a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed since the main body frame 4 was closed.

In addition, when the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible (mismatched), even if the start condition for the variable display is met (when a game ball enters the start hole (first start hole 2002 or one of the first start hole 2002 and second start hole 2004)), the effect display device 1600, various speakers, various LEDs on the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3), and the decorative board provided on the left game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, The LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display unit 2250 are configured to notify the user of an abnormality without performing the variable effects of the various LEDs mounted on the unit. On the other hand, when the interrupt permission setting (step S52) is made after the setting change process (step S37) is completed, the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 are controlled to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode based on the establishment of the variable display start condition (a game ball entering the start port (first start port 2002 or either the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004)), and are able to display information regarding the result.

Furthermore, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is determined to be incompatible (mismatched) when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), the fact that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible (mismatched) is notified at the same time, regardless of whether a setting value confirmation display is performed. Specifically, regardless of whether a setting value confirmation display is performed, when the power-on operation check is performed, the various LEDs (some or all) of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) are illuminated in a serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode, and various speakers are output to output a game board incompatible notification sound, and the performance display device 1600 is timed to display a background image (e.g., black) and an incompatible error notification display mode in the event of an abnormality. This allows information of higher importance (in this case, an announcement that the setting value confirmation display is being executed) to be reported in sequence so that it can be dealt with, ensuring that each piece of information is reliably communicated and dealt with. The timing of the start of some or all of the following may be varied depending on whether the setting value confirmation display is executed: the control of the light emission in the serious abnormality notification light emission mode by the various LEDs (some or all may be used) of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3), the output of the game board incompatibility notification sound by the various speakers, and the timing of the display of the background image (e.g., black) and incompatibility error notification display mode in the event of an abnormality on the performance display device 1600.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, if the ID determination process (step S1003) executed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible, when the power-on operation check is being performed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, that is, when only the power-on operation check is being performed without the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas (step S38), the volume cannot be adjusted using the volume adjustment button 227. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, it is possible to adjust the volume output from the various speakers by operating the volume adjustment button 227, but the volume of the game board incompatibility notification sound output after the setting change process is completed cannot be adjusted by operating the volume adjustment button 227. Therefore, when the setting value confirmation display process is completed, a game board incompatibility notification sound can be output at a predetermined volume, and the sound output from the various speakers can reliably communicate that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible, preventing any disadvantage to the player or the gaming facility.

Similarly, if the ID determination process (step S1003) executed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible, when the power-on operation check is being performed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, i.e., when only the power-on operation check is being performed without the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas (step S38), the light intensity (brightness) cannot be adjusted using the light intensity adjustment button 228. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the light intensity (brightness) of the LEDs on the door frame 3 and various decorative boards provided on the divided game board 5A can be adjusted by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228, but the serious abnormality warning light emission mode, which is controlled after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, cannot be adjusted by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228. Therefore, when the setting value confirmation display process is completed, the LEDs on the various decorative boards attached to the door frame 3 and the divided game board 5A can be controlled to emit light at a predetermined light intensity (brightness), and the light emission pattern can reliably convey that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible, preventing any disadvantage to the player or the game parlor.

Furthermore, if the ID determination process (step S1003) executed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible, when the power-on operation check is being performed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, that is, when only the power-on operation check is being performed without the process of clearing all but a specific area of the main control built-in RAM (step S38), the scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness) is not displayed on the effect display device 1600 even if the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated. Furthermore, because the scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness) is not displayed on the effect display device 1600, the scale does not change even if the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated multiple times. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness) from interfering with the visibility of some or all of the incompatibility error notification display mode on the effect display device 1600, and it is possible to reliably communicate that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible.

Furthermore, if the ID determination process (step S1003) executed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible, when the power-on operation check is being performed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, that is, when only the power-on operation check is being performed without the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas (step S38), the confirmation sound corresponding to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 is not output. This prevents the confirmation sound corresponding to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 from making the game board incompatible notification sound difficult to hear, and ensures that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (inconsistent) when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), even if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, a sensor or switch such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, or door frame open switch, which inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) during execution of the setting value confirmation display process, the detection is invalidated (it may be that the process to check whether or not there is a detection is not executed, or it may be that the process to check whether or not there is a detection is executed but the process (such as an alert) based on the detection is not executed).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 336, even if an illegal magnetic field is generated during the setting value confirmation display process and a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the detection signal is discarded without issuing an abnormality alert based on the detection of the illegal magnetic field. In other words, if the combination of the divided game board 5A is in an incompatible (mismatched) state when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), and a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the setting value confirmation display process, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is ignored, and control is executed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed as if a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 had not been input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

Furthermore, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (mismatched), and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), and if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (e.g., a sensor or switch that inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, or door frame open switch) during the power-on operation check that is executed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, that is, if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means during the power-on operation check that does not involve the process of clearing all areas of the main control internal RAM except for a specific area (step S38), the detection by the abnormality detection means is also disabled (it may be that the process of checking whether or not there is a detection is not executed, or it may be that the process of checking whether or not there is a detection is executed but no process (such as an alert) based on the detection is executed).

Specifically, as shown in Figure 337, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the combination of the divided game board 5A is deemed to be incompatible (mismatched), and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), and when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the execution of the power-on operation check that is executed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, the detection signal is discarded without issuing an abnormality alert based on the detection of an illegal magnetism. In other words, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed to be incompatible (mismatched) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), and if a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the power-on operation check that is executed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is ignored, and control continues as if a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 had not been input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

In addition, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed to be incompatible (mismatched) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), and if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, a sensor or switch such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, door frame open switch, etc., which inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) during the game mode after the power-on operation check is completed, the detection by the abnormality detection means is disabled (it may not execute a process to check whether or not there is a detection, or it may execute a process to check whether or not there is a detection but not execute a process (such as an alert) based on the detection).

Specifically, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the combination of the divided game board 5A is deemed to be incompatible (mismatched), and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), and if a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the game mode after the power-on operation check is completed, the detection signal is discarded without issuing an abnormality alert based on the detection of an illegal magnetism. In other words, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed to be incompatible (mismatched) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), and if a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during game mode after the power-on operation check is completed, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is ignored, and control continues as if a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 had not been input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

In this way, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is in an incompatible (mismatched) state when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), no abnormality alert will be issued even if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, sensors or switches such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, ball out detection sensor 574, door frame open switch, etc., which input a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310).

In other words, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible, gameplay may proceed in a manner not intended by the designer, potentially causing harm to the gaming establishment and players, and may even result in a deviation from the original specifications, potentially causing a loss of trust among players, so it is necessary to ensure that play is stopped. Therefore, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible, an alert is issued in priority over alerts resulting from abnormality detection by the abnormality detection means (e.g., sensors and switches such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, ball out detection sensor 574, and door frame open switch, which input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310), thereby preventing play and minimizing harm to the gaming establishment and players.

In addition, some LEDs may be controlled to emit different light depending on the type of abnormality detection means. For example, when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, one or both of the LEDs on the function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display unit 2250 may be turned off (putting them in a state where light emission control is not possible).

Furthermore, as described above, in this example, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is set to a compatible (matched) state when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is compatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), then even if the combination of the divided game boards 5AR subsequently becomes incompatible (mismatched), no notification (game board incompatible notification sound, incompatible error notification display mode, serious abnormality notification light emission mode, etc.) will be issued in response to the right-side game board 5AR being in a non-compatible state. However, this is not limited to determining whether the combination of the divided game boards 5A is compatible only when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may periodically (for example, constantly determine each time the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed) execute an ID determination process to determine whether the combination of the divided game boards 5A is compatible after power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started. In this case, after power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, it will be possible to notify the player that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, thereby preventing the occurrence of disadvantages.

In addition, even if an ID determination process is periodically executed to determine whether the combination of the divided game board 5A is compatible, the ID determination process may not be executed while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed.Also, even if the ID determination process is executed while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed and it is determined that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible, no notification may be issued indicating that the right-side game board 5AR is in an incompatible state while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed.

In addition, if the system is configured to periodically determine whether the combination of the split game boards 5A is compatible, when the ID determination process is executed during the power-on operation check after the setting value confirmation display process or before the setting value confirmation display process is started and it is determined that the combination of the split game boards 5A is incompatible, the display device 1600, various speakers, and various LEDs on the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) may be configured to notify the user that the combination of the split game boards 5A is incompatible during the power-on operation check, just as when the compatibility of the combination of the split game boards 5A is determined only when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started.

Furthermore, even if the system is configured to periodically determine whether the combination of the divided game board 5A is compatible, even if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, a sensor or switch such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, or door frame open switch, which inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) during execution of the setting value confirmation display process, the detection is invalid (the system may not execute a process to check whether there is a detection, or it may execute a process to check whether there is a detection but not execute a process (such as an alert) based on the detection). Therefore, even after the setting value confirmation display process, an abnormality alert based on detection during the setting value confirmation display process by the abnormality detection means may not be executed.

In addition, when the system is configured to periodically determine whether the combination of the divided game boards 5A is compatible, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is determined to be incompatible during the power-on operation check after the setting value confirmation display process and an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, a sensor or switch such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, or door frame open switch, which inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310), the performance display device 1600, various speakers, and various LEDs on the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) may issue a notification that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, taking priority over a notification of detection by the abnormality detection means, and if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is determined to be compatible, a notification of detection by the abnormality detection means may be issued.

In addition, in the power-on operation check that is performed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed (after receiving the setting value confirmation display end command from the main control MPU 1310a), not only is the power-on operation check not performed for the drive motors and drive solenoids, etc., that are provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR that has been determined to be non-compliant and that are controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, but also for the movable body that performs the power-on operation check (the back of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 provided on the divided gaming board 5A). Operation checks are also not performed when power is turned on for the drive motors and drive solenoids that drive the performance operation units 301 that are provided on the door frame units (such as the rear upper movable decorative body 3210, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, the rear lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear lower front performance unit 3160, and the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3) and are not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003).

Specifically, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, even if the power-on operation check is started, the LEDs on the right-side game board 5AR determined to be incompatible will not be controlled to light up in the light-emitting mode used in the power-on operation check, or the movable body will not be controlled to operate in the mode used in the power-on operation check (a control signal will not be output to the right-side game board 5AR), or will not be able to be controlled (a control signal will be output but not input to the right-side game board 5AR). In addition, the drive motors and drive solenoids on the turntable unit 200 (in this example, the performance operation unit 300) that is provided on the door frame 3 and not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003) will not be driven to operate the performance operation unit 301 on the performance operation unit 300.

In other words, if the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an incompatible state, there is a risk that some or all of the movable bodies provided on door frame units that are not subject to ID determination will also be deemed incompatible, and if a control signal is input from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, there is a risk that the movable bodies will operate in a manner different from their intended operation. Therefore, some or all of the movable bodies provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR that has been determined to be incompatible or on door frame units that are not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003) and that are operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 will not be driven, thereby preventing the movable bodies from operating in a manner different from their intended operation, which could result in damage to the movable bodies or door frame unit, or failure of the drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. that operate the movable bodies.

As described above, the game board side components may be configured to include the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit from among the door frame units. In this case, the specific door frame unit is subject to ID determination, and if it is determined to be incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), some or all of the movable bodies operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. provided in door frame units that are not subject to ID determination (non-specific door frame units) and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may also be prevented from being driven. In addition to this, or separately from this, if there are multiple specific door frame units (for example, the right door frame If a part of the door frame (for example, one of the door frame right side unit 430 and the door frame top unit 450) is determined to be incompatible, all of the movable bodies operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. provided in the specific door frame unit and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may be prevented from being driven, or all of the movable bodies operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. provided in all door frame units, including the specific door frame unit, and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may be prevented from being driven.

On the other hand, the movable bodies (such as the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear-right movable decorative body 3302, and the rear-front-lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear-front-lower performance unit 3160, etc.) provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is equipped with a peripheral control board 1510 on which a peripheral control IC 1510a that executes the ID determination process (step S1003) is implemented, operate in the same manner as normal (when the combination of the divided gaming board 5A is determined to be compatible) when operation confirmation begins upon power-on. In addition, the LEDs mounted on the boards of the movable bodies provided on the left side game board 5AL (such as the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left side game board 5AL of the divided game board 5A, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, and the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 of the front lower performance unit 3160) are not controlled to emit light in the light emission mode when the power is turned on to check operation. In other words, if the right-side gaming board 5AR is determined to be in an incompatible state in the ID determination process (step S1003), the movable elements on the left-side gaming board 5AL (such as the rear-upper movable decorative element 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 on the left-side gaming board 5AL of the split gaming board 5A, the rear-left movable decorative element 3301 and rear-right movable decorative element 3302 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, and the rear-front-lower middle decorative element 3161 of the front-lower performance unit 3160) are operated in the operating mode during power-on operation check, but the LEDs on the movable elements on the left-side gaming board 5AL are not controlled to emit light in the operating mode during power-on operation check, but are turned off and operated in the operating mode during power-on operation check. This makes it easy to identify the gaming board on which the peripheral control board 1510 of the split gaming board 5A is installed (in this case, the left-side gaming board 5AL).

In addition, in this example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible, not only is control not performed to drive the drive motor or drive solenoid mounted on the board provided in the performance operation unit 300 of the door frame unit (in this example, the tray unit 200) that is not the subject of ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003) to operate the performance operation unit 301, but the various LEDs mounted on the board provided in the performance operation unit 300 are also not controlled to emit light in the light emission mode when operation is confirmed when the power is turned on. That is, when the power-on operation check is performed after the setting confirmation display process is completed, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, the various LEDs mounted on the boards provided in the presentation operation unit 300 are controlled to emit light in a serious abnormality alert mode due to the incompatible combination of the divided game boards 5A. The presentation operation unit 300 may be the specific door frame unit subject to ID determination. Even in this case, if the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that a specific door frame unit other than the presentation operation unit 300 or the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, the drive motors and drive solenoids mounted on the boards provided in the presentation operation unit 300 are not driven to operate the presentation operation unit 301, and the various LEDs mounted on the boards provided in the presentation operation unit 300 may be controlled to emit light in a serious abnormality alert mode rather than in the light emission mode used for the power-on operation check.

In addition, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is determined to be incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), the right-side game board 5AR determined to be incompatible and some or all of the movable bodies operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. provided in door frame units not subject to ID determination and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may not be driven until the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, not just during the power-on operation check, or until the combination of the divided game boards 5A is determined to be compatible. In this case, it is possible to prevent the movable bodies from operating in a manner different from their intended operation, which could result in damage to the movable bodies or door frame unit, or failure of the drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. that operate the movable bodies.

[Setting value confirmation display when not connected]
Next, an example of behavior when a setting value confirmation display is performed in an unconnected state (disconnected state) in which the right-side gaming panel 5AR is not electrically connected to the left-side gaming panel 5AL, such as when there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side gaming panel 5AR (the input of an ID code signal from the right-side gaming panel 5AR cannot be confirmed) and a malfunction such as a short circuit or disconnection occurs in the transmission path for transmitting various signals, will be described with reference to Fig. 338. Note that the following only describes the parts that are different from when a setting change process is performed or when a setting value confirmation display process is performed when the setting is compatible or incompatible, and redundant explanations will not be provided.

As shown in FIG. 338, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side gaming board 5AR during the ID determination process (step S1003) executed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, i.e., if the right-side gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected, a control signal from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is not input to the various LEDs and other electronic components mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR, and therefore the electronic components mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR are in a non-driven state (e.g., the various LEDs are turned off) regardless of whether or not the setting value confirmation display is being performed. Note that if it is determined during the ID determination process (step S1003) that there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side gaming board 5AR, it is also possible not to output a control signal from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 to the various LEDs and other electronic components mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR. Furthermore, in this example, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the ID determination process (step S1003) executed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that no ID code signal has been input from the right-side gaming board 5AR, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL are also turned off regardless of whether or not the setting value is being displayed for confirmation.

In addition, in this example, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side gaming board 5AR, it does not notify that the right-side gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected until the setting value confirmation display process is completed (until it receives a setting value confirmation display end command from the main control MPU 1310a), but instead notifies that the setting value confirmation display process is being executed. In other words, while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed, the effect display device 1600 displays a setting confirmation notification mode (in this example, "setting confirmation in progress") (this may be displayed until the setting value confirmation display process is completed, or may be displayed for a certain period of time and then terminated), and the setting value confirmation display notification sound (an announcement voice saying "setting confirmation in progress" and a warning sound such as a "ding dong") is played at a predetermined volume (which may be the maximum volume that can be set, or may be a default volume adjusted using a volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510). The various LEDs on the door frame unit are controlled to emit light in a setting confirmation notification light-emitting mode when displaying the setting value confirmation, while the various LEDs mounted on the decorative boards on the right game board 5AR and left game board 5AL, the LEDs on the function display unit 1400, and the LEDs on the sub-function display unit 2250 are turned off.

Then, when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives a setting value confirmation display end command from the main control MPU 1310a indicating that the setting value confirmation display process has ended, it repeatedly outputs a game board unconnection notification sound (an announcement voice saying "The right-side game board is not connected" and a warning sound such as "ding dong") caused by the right-side game board 5AR not being electrically connected from various speakers at a volume adjusted by the volume adjustment button 227 until the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (the output may be stopped after being output repeatedly a certain number of times (e.g., 5 times) or for a certain period of time (e.g., 30 seconds)). Meanwhile, the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 42 provided on the door frame 3) 0, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc.) are repeatedly controlled to emit light in a serious abnormality alert light mode (a semi-serious abnormality alert light mode when the light emission is controlled to a semi-serious abnormality alert light mode after the serious abnormality alert light mode) caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2, and when a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the main frame 4, which had been open relative to the outer frame 2, was closed, the light emission is controlled to a minor abnormality alert light mode (a mode in which the light is switched between maximum brightness white light and off in a short period (e.g., 0.5 seconds) (high-speed flashing mode)) caused by the right-side game board 5AR not being electrically connected. Furthermore, the effect display device 1600 displays the effect (normal) mode (decorative symbols, background images for normal times (when play is possible), etc.) as in the case of compatibility, and also displays "Right-side game board unconnection error occurred" as an unconnection error notification display mode on the effect display device 1600 to notify that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected to the left-side game board 5AL. The various LEDs mounted on the decorative boards provided on the right-side game board 5AR and left game board 5AL, the LEDs of the function display unit 1400, and the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 are controlled to remain off.

The game board disconnection alert sound is not a single alert sound (such as a "beep") that is output intermittently, but is composed of multiple sounds with different tones, and is further controlled to alternate between a mute state and an on state. Furthermore, the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode is not fixed to a lit state, but is controlled to alternate between a lit state and an off state to change the light intensity. In other words, the various speakers and LEDs dynamically alert the player that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected to the left-side game board 5AL, with the tone, volume, light intensity, etc. changing over time. This makes it easier to notice that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected to the left-side game board 5AL when the power-on operation check, which involves clearing all areas of the main control internal RAM except for specific areas (step S38), is completed and a game mode that does not require any checking is initiated.

In addition, the unconnected error notification display mode in the performance display device 1600 is a still image that does not change over time and continues until the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. However, when the start condition for the variable display is met (a game ball enters the start port (first start port 2002 or one of the first start port 2002 and second start port 2004)) and the variable display of a special symbol is started in the function display unit 1400, or the variable display of a fourth symbol is started in the sub-function display unit 2250, a variable display such as a variable display of a decorative symbol is performed with the unconnected error notification display mode displayed on the performance display device 1600. The display format may be any format appropriate to the error content, such as a combination of letters and numbers (for example, an error code) or a mark. In this way, during the power-on operation check that does not involve the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area (step S38) after the setting value check display process, the display on the effect display device 1600 notifies the user that the right-side gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected to the left-side gaming board 5AL in a static format that does not change over time. This makes it possible to notify the user that the right-side gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected to the left-side gaming board 5AL without interfering with the confirmation process during the power-on operation check.

Furthermore, as described above, the period from when the main frame 4, which was open relative to the outer frame 2, is closed to when the light emission control for the serious abnormality notification light mode is terminated is longer than the period required to perform the power-on operation check. Therefore, if the main frame 4 is closed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, the light emission control for the serious abnormality notification light mode will continue even after the game mode is started, regardless of whether the main frame 4 remains closed thereafter. When a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the main frame 4, which was open relative to the outer frame 2, was closed, the light emission control for the serious abnormality notification light mode will be terminated and the light emission control for the minor abnormality notification light mode will be switched to.

As described above, the light intensity cannot be adjusted using the light intensity adjustment button 228 for both the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode, which is controlled to emit light when the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2 (including the semi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode when the light is controlled to emit light in the semi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode after the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode), and the minor abnormality alert light-emitting mode, which is caused by the right-side gaming board 5AR not being electrically connected. Therefore, even when the setting value confirmation display process is completed and the gaming mode is started, the light intensity cannot be adjusted using the light intensity adjustment button 228.

In other words, when the setting value confirmation display process is executed while the right-side game board 5AR is not connected, after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, a game board unconnected notification sound is output from the various speakers, and light emission control is executed for the serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode (if the light emission control is changed to the semi-serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode after the serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode, the semi-serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode) caused by the main body frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2, and the volume of the game board unconnected notification sound output from the various speakers can be adjusted using the volume adjustment button 227. However, it is not possible to adjust the light intensity using the light intensity adjustment button 228 for the serious abnormality alert light emission mode, which is controlled to emit light due to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 (including the semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode when the light emission is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode after the serious abnormality alert light emission mode), or the minor abnormality alert light emission mode, which is controlled to emit light due to the right-side game board 5AR not being electrically connected after the end of the serious abnormality alert light emission mode, which is caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2.

For this reason, when the right-side gaming panel 5AR is not connected and the setting value confirmation display process is executed, the light can be controlled to emit a serious abnormality alert light at a predetermined brightness after the setting value confirmation display process is completed (or a semi-serious abnormality alert light if the light is controlled to emit a semi-serious abnormality alert light after the serious abnormality alert light). Even if the setting confirmation display process is overlooked during execution of the setting value confirmation display process, the serious abnormality alert light can be seen after the setting value confirmation display process is completed (or a semi-serious abnormality alert light if the light is controlled to emit a semi-serious abnormality alert light after the serious abnormality alert light). This makes it possible to be aware that the setting value confirmation display process may have been executed. Meanwhile, when the right-side gaming panel 5AR is not connected, which is unlikely to cause any harm to the player or the gaming facility, the volume can be adjusted using the volume adjustment button 227 to prevent discomfort to the player.

In addition, based on the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 228 during light emission control of the minor abnormality notification light emission mode, the performance display device 1600 may be configured to display a scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness), or to output a confirmation sound based on the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or the light intensity adjustment button 228, or both.

In the example shown in Figure 338, the output period for the door open alert sound (30 seconds in this example) elapses before the setting value confirmation display process is terminated. However, if the setting value confirmation display process is terminated before the output period for the door open alert sound elapses, the door open alert sound is output after the setting value confirmation display process is terminated until the output period for the door open alert sound is reached. Then, once the output period for the door open alert sound has elapsed, the game board unconnected alert sound is output. Furthermore, if the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 after the setting value confirmation display process is terminated, or if the elapsed time since the main frame 4 that was open relative to the outer frame 2 was closed has not yet reached a predetermined time period (e.g., 60 seconds), the game board unconnected alert sound may not be output until the main frame 4 is closed or until the light emission control of the serious abnormality alert light emission mode caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 is terminated, even if the elapsed time since the main frame 4 was opened relative to the outer frame 2 has reached a predetermined time period (e.g., 30 seconds).

In this way, in this example, when the setting value confirmation display is performed in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming board 5AR, if the main frame 4 is closed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed and the main frame 4 remains closed thereafter, different alarm sounds are output from the various speakers depending on the time elapsed since the main frame 4 was opened relative to the outer frame 2, while the various LEDs (some or all) of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) are configured to issue an abnormality alarm in response to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2, taking priority over an abnormality alarm in response to the right-side gaming board 5AR being in an unconnected state.

In other words, although abnormality alerts are provided for the various speakers, the various LEDs on the door frame unit, and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-hand gaming board 5AR, there are cases where a common abnormality (an abnormality caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2) is alerted depending on the elapsed time since the main frame 4 was opened relative to the outer frame 2, and cases where different abnormalities (an abnormality caused by a disconnection for the various speakers, and an abnormality caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 for the various LEDs on the door frame unit and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-hand gaming board 5AR) are alerted. Therefore, if the setting value confirmation process is completed relatively quickly after the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, for example, when a setting value confirmation display is made in a short time due to fraudulent activity, the various LEDs on the door frame unit are controlled to emit light in a serious abnormality notification light mode, and door open notification sounds are output from the various speakers, thereby reliably communicating that the main frame 4 has been opened relative to the outer frame 2 and that a setting value may have been confirmed fraudulently. On the other hand, if the setting value is confirmed legitimately by a game hall manager or the like, it is possible to notify that the main frame 4 has been opened relative to the outer frame 2 simply by controlling the various LEDs on the door frame unit to emit light in a serious abnormality notification light mode.

In addition, even when the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input, after the power-on operation check is performed, the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, which display information regarding whether the game is a win or a loss, are not turned off, but are controlled to emit light in the same way as under normal circumstances (when play is possible). In other words, when there is no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming board 5AR and the game is not connected, the system notifies the player that the right-side gaming board 5AR is not connected, preventing the game from proceeding in a manner not intended by the designer. However, even if the game starts in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming board 5AR, the LEDs that display information about winning or losing are controlled to light up, allowing the game to proceed as normal, preventing the player from being disadvantaged.

In addition, in this example, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR, and the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, the timing of the light emission control in the minor abnormality notification light emission mode corresponding to the right-side game board 5AR being in an unconnected state and the timing of the output of the game board unconnected notification sound differ depending on whether or not a setting value confirmation display is performed.

Specifically, when there is no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming panel 5AR and the system is in an unconnected state and the setting value confirmation display is not executed, "power on" is displayed on the effect display device 1600 for a predetermined period of time based on the start of power supply to the pachinko machine 1, and then a power-on operation check is initiated. During the power-on operation check, light emission control in a minor abnormality alert light emission mode and the output of a game board unconnected alert sound from the various speakers are initiated, which are caused by the system being in an unconnected state and no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming panel 5AR. In other words, at the timing when the power-on operation check is initiated, light emission control in a minor abnormality alert light emission mode and the output of a game board unconnected alert sound from the various speakers are initiated, which are caused by the system being in an unconnected state and no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming panel 5AR.

On the other hand, when the setting value confirmation display is executed in an unconnected state with no ID code signal being input from the right-side gaming board 5AR, the light emission control in the minor abnormality alert light emission mode and the output of the game board unconnected alert sound from the various speakers, which are caused by the unconnected state with no ID code signal being input from the right-side gaming board 5AR, are not initiated at the timing when the power-on operation check begins.Instead, the light emission control in the minor abnormality alert light emission mode and the output of the game board unconnected alert sound from the various speakers, which are caused by the unconnected state with no ID code signal being input from the right-side gaming board 5AR, are initiated after the power-on operation check begins (in this example, the game board unconnected alert sound is output after the power-on operation check begins but before the game mode starts, and the light emission control in the minor abnormality alert light emission mode is initiated when the power-on operation check ends and the game mode starts).

In this way, the timing of the light emission control in the minor abnormality notification light emission mode and the timing of the output of the game board unconnected notification sound differ depending on whether or not a setting value confirmation display is performed even when there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR and the machine is in an unconnected state when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started. This allows for priority notification of information of greater importance, thereby preventing malfunctions and fraudulent activity. In other words, since an unauthorized setting value confirmation display could cause damage to the gaming parlor, this setting value confirmation display is given priority over a notification of an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR, preventing the spread of damage caused by an unauthorized setting value confirmation display.

When power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started and there is no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming panel 5AR, indicating an unconnected state, the timing at which the display device 1600 displays "Right-side gaming panel unconnected error" as an unconnection error notification is the same regardless of whether a setting value confirmation display is performed. That is, the display device 1600 displays "Right-side gaming panel unconnected error" as an unconnection error notification display mode at the timing when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 begins checking the power-on operation. This allows notifications of higher importance to be executed with priority, while the display device 1600 can also notify and address other notifications. The timing at which the display device 1600 displays "Right-side gaming panel unconnected error" as an unconnection error notification display mode may also differ depending on whether a setting value confirmation display is performed. In this case, information of higher importance can be notified in order and addressed in sequence, ensuring that each piece of information is conveyed and addressed reliably.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, if the ID determination process (step S1003) executed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR and that the machine is in an unconnected state, the volume can be adjusted using the volume adjustment button 227 after the setting value confirmation display process is completed. However, if a door open alert sound is output after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, the volume can be adjusted using the volume adjustment button 227 after the output of the door open alert sound has stopped. In other words, if a door open alert sound is output after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, the volume cannot be adjusted using the volume adjustment button 227 while the door open alert sound is being output, but the volume can be adjusted using the volume adjustment button 227 during the period when the game board unconnection alert sound is being output after the output of the door open alert sound has stopped. This makes it possible to adjust the volume of the effect sounds output during variable effects in advance.

Furthermore, if the ID determination process (step S1003) executed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming board 5AR and that the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state, the light intensity (brightness) cannot be adjusted using the light intensity adjustment button 228 when the power-on operation check is being performed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, i.e., when only the power-on operation check is being performed without the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas (step S38). As described above, in this example of pachinko machine 1, the light intensity (brightness) of the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the divided gaming board 5A can be adjusted by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228. However, the serious abnormality alarm light emission mode, which is controlled by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, cannot be adjusted by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228. Therefore, when the setting value confirmation display process is completed, the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the divided gaming board 5A can be controlled to emit a predetermined light intensity (brightness). This light emission mode reliably communicates that there is no ID code signal input from the right gaming board 5AR and that the game is in an unconnected state, thereby preventing any disadvantage to the player or the gaming parlor. Furthermore, if the light emission mode is not controlled to the serious abnormality notification light emission mode caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, or if the light emission mode control for the serious abnormality notification light emission mode caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 is completed during the power-on operation check, the light intensity (brightness) can be adjusted using the light intensity adjustment button 228 even during the power-on operation check. In other words, if the light emission mode is controlled to the minor abnormality notification light emission mode after the light emission mode control for the serious abnormality notification light emission mode caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 is completed, the light intensity (brightness) for the minor abnormality notification light emission mode can be adjusted using the light intensity adjustment button 228.

Furthermore, if the ID determination process (step S1003) executed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming board 5AR and that the state is unconnected, when the power-on operation check is being performed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, i.e., when only the power-on operation check is being performed without the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas (step S38), operating the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 will display a scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness) on the performance display device 1600, and will output a confirmation sound corresponding to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228. Therefore, the display of the scale and the output of a confirmation sound corresponding to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 will allow the user to recognize that the volume or light intensity (brightness) has been changed. Furthermore, after one or both of the light emission control of the serious abnormality alert light mode caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 and the output of the door open alert sound have been completed, it may be possible to display a scale according to the current volume and light intensity (brightness) and/or output a confirmation sound according to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 begins, the machine is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal being input from the right-side gaming panel 5AR, and if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state, even if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, a sensor or switch such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, or door frame open switch, which inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) during execution of the setting value confirmation display process, the detection is invalid (it is possible that the process of checking whether or not there is a detection is not executed, or it is possible that the process of checking whether or not there is a detection is executed but the process (such as an alert) based on the detection is not executed).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 339, even if an illicit magnetic field is generated during the setting value confirmation display process and a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the detection signal is discarded without issuing an abnormality alert based on the detection of the illicit magnetic field. In other words, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming board 5AR and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state, and if a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the setting value confirmation display process, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is ignored, and control is executed as if a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 was not input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 after the setting value confirmation display process is completed.

In this way, in this example, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal being input, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, if an abnormality is detected by an abnormality detection means (for example, a sensor or switch that inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, such as a magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, door frame opening switch, etc.) during execution of the setting value confirmation display process, after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, a notification due to the unconnected state with no ID code signal being input from the right-side game board 5AR is given priority over an abnormality notification due to detection by the abnormality detection means. In other words, even if fraudulent activity is committed in a state where play is not possible before play can begin, such as during the execution of the setting value confirmation display process, there is a low likelihood of a disadvantage occurring after the game mode has started. However, if there is an unconnected state where no ID code signal is being input from the right-side game board 5AR, there is a high likelihood of a disadvantage occurring when play is started after the game mode has started. Therefore, if both detection by the abnormality detection means and an unconnected state where no ID code signal is being input from the right-side game board 5AR occur during execution of the setting value confirmation display process, a notification due to the unconnected state where no ID code signal is being input from the right-side game board 5AR is given priority after the setting value confirmation display process has ended, thereby preventing the occurrence of a disadvantage.

On the other hand, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state, and if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (e.g., sensors or switches that input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, door frame open switch, etc.) during the power-on operation check that is executed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, that is, if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means during the power-on operation check that does not involve the process of clearing all areas of the main control internal RAM except for specific areas (step S38), the detection by the abnormality detection means is validated and an abnormality alert is issued when the abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 340, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, there is no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming panel 5AR, indicating an unconnected state, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state. If a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the power-on operation check that is executed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, an abnormality alert due to detection by the abnormality detection means will be issued by the various LEDs and speakers of the performance display device 1600 and the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3).

When the abnormality alert caused by the input of a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 ends, if no other abnormalities are detected, the various LEDs on the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) will be controlled to emit light in a minor abnormality alert light mode caused by the right-side game board 5AR being in an unconnected state, and the game board unconnected alert sound will be repeatedly output from the various speakers.

In this way, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, there is no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming panel 5AR, and the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state, and when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the power-on operation check that is executed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, at the time the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input, an abnormality alert caused by the input of the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is issued by the various LEDs, speakers, and effect display device 1600 of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3).

In other words, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal being input and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state, and if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (e.g., a sensor or switch that inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, door frame open switch, etc.) during the power-on operation check that is executed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed, then an abnormality alert resulting from detection by the abnormality detection means will be given priority over an alert resulting from the unconnected state with no ID code signal being input from the right-side gaming panel 5AR.

In other words, while the likelihood of incurring a disadvantage if fraudulent behavior occurs during the power-on operation check is low, because game mode begins immediately after the power-on operation check is completed, there is a high likelihood of similar fraudulent behavior occurring in game mode as well. On the other hand, if there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game panel 5AR, resulting in an unconnected state, the likelihood of incurring a disadvantage is lower than if fraudulent behavior were to occur. Therefore, if both a detection by the abnormality detection means and an unconnected state, resulting in no ID code signal input from the right-side game panel 5AR, occur during the execution of the power-on operation check, the occurrence of a disadvantage is suppressed by immediately issuing a notification due to the detection by the abnormality detection means.

Note that sensors and switches such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, and door frame open switch that input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 are shown as abnormality detection means. However, for some sensors and switches, even if a detection signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during power-on operation check or after the setting value check display process has ended (including during power-on operation check and game mode), no abnormality alert may be sent to the performance display device 1600. Alternatively, for all sensors and switches, even if a detection signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during power-on operation check or after the setting value check display process has ended (including during power-on operation check and game mode), no abnormality alert may be sent to the performance display device 1600.

In addition, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal being input and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state, and if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (e.g., sensors or switches that input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, door frame open switch, etc.) during the game mode after the power-on operation check is completed, that is, when an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means during the game mode, the detection by the abnormality detection means is also valid, and an abnormality alert is issued at the time the abnormality is detected, just as when an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means during the power-on operation check.

Specifically, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, there is no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming panel 5AR, and the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state, and when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during game mode after the power-on operation check is completed, an abnormality alert due to detection by the abnormality detection means is issued by the effect display device 1600 and the various LEDs and speakers of the door frame units (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, door frame top unit 450, etc. provided on the door frame 3).

In other words, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal being input and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state, and if a detection signal is input from an abnormality detection means (e.g., a sensor or switch that inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, ball out detection sensor 574, door frame open switch, etc.) to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during game mode after the power-on operation check is completed, then an abnormality alert resulting from detection by the abnormality detection means will be given priority over an alert resulting from the unconnected state with no ID code signal being input from the right-side gaming board 5AR.

Therefore, during a game mode in which there is a high probability that a disadvantage will occur if fraudulent activity is committed, if both a detection by the abnormality detection means and an unconnected state in which no ID code signal is input from the right-side gaming panel 5AR occur, the occurrence of a disadvantage can be reduced by prioritizing the issuance of a notification due to detection by the abnormality detection means.

As described above, in this example, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the combination of the divided game boards 5A is set to a compatible (matched) state, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is compatible in the ID determination process (step S1003).After that, even if the divided game boards 5AR subsequently enter an unconnected state in which no ID code signal is input from them, no notification (game board unconnected notification sound, unconnected error notification display mode, minor abnormality notification light emission mode, etc.) is executed in response to the unconnected state in which no ID code signal is input from them.However, this is not limited to determining whether the combination of the divided game boards 5A is compatible only when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may periodically (for example, each time the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed) execute an ID determination process to determine whether the combination of the divided game boards 5A is compatible after power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started. In this case, after power supply to the pachinko machine 1 has started, it will be possible to notify the user of the disconnected state where no ID code signal is input from the right-side gaming panel 5AR, thereby preventing any disadvantages from occurring.

In addition, even if an ID determination process is periodically executed to determine whether the combination of the split gaming board 5A is compatible, the ID determination process may not be executed while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed.Also, even if the ID determination process is executed while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed and it is determined that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming board 5AR and that the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state, no notification may be issued indicating that the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed.

In addition, if the system is configured to periodically determine whether the combination of the split game boards 5A is compatible, when the ID determination process is performed during power-on operation check after the setting value confirmation display process or before the setting value confirmation display process is started and it is determined that there is no ID code signal input from the right game board 5AR and that the game board is in an unconnected state, a notification of detection by the abnormality detection means using the performance display device 1600, various speakers, and various LEDs on the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) may be given priority over a notification that the combination of the split game boards 5A is incompatible, just as when the system is configured to determine whether the combination of the split game boards 5A is compatible only when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started.

Furthermore, even if the system is configured to periodically determine whether the combination of the divided game board 5A is compatible, even if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, a sensor or switch such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, or door frame open switch, which inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) during execution of the setting value confirmation display process, the detection is invalid (the system may not execute a process to check whether there is a detection, or it may execute a process to check whether there is a detection but not execute a process (such as an alert) based on the detection). Therefore, even after the setting value confirmation display process, an abnormality alert based on detection during the setting value confirmation display process by the abnormality detection means may not be executed.

In addition, when the system is configured to periodically determine whether the combination of the split game boards 5A is compatible, if the right game board 5AR is not electrically connected during the power-on operation check after the setting value confirmation display process, and an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, a sensor or switch such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, or door frame open switch, which inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310), the notification of the detection by the abnormality detection means using the performance display device 1600, various speakers, and various LEDs on the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) may be given priority over the notification that the right game board 5AR is not electrically connected, and once the notification of the detection by the abnormality detection means has ended, a notification that the combination of the split game boards 5A is incompatible may be issued.

In addition, the power-on operation check that is performed after the setting value confirmation display process is completed (after receiving the setting value confirmation display end command from the main control MPU 1310a) does not only not check the power-on operation of the drive motors and drive solenoids, etc., that are provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, which are determined to be in an unconnected state, but also does not check the power-on operation of the movable body that performs the power-on operation check (the rear upper performance unit 320 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the divided gaming board 5A). When power is turned on, no operation check is performed on the drive motors and drive solenoids that drive the performance operation unit 301 that is provided on the door frame units (such as the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of rear lower performance unit 3300, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and rear right movable decorative body 3302 of rear lower performance unit 3300, the rear lower middle decorative body 3161 of rear lower front performance unit 3160, and the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 provided on door frame 3) and is not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003).

Specifically, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state, even when the power-on operation check is initiated, the LEDs provided on the right-side gaming panel 5AR determined to be in an unconnected state will not be controlled to light up in the light-emitting mode used in the power-on operation check, or the movable body will not be controlled to operate in the mode used in the power-on operation check (a control signal is not output to the right-side gaming panel 5AR), or this control will not be possible (a control signal is output but not input to the right-side gaming panel 5AR). In addition, the drive motor or drive solenoid provided on the turntable unit 200 (in this example, the performance operation unit 300) provided on the door frame 3 and not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003) will not be driven to operate the performance operation unit 301 provided on the performance operation unit 300.

In other words, when the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state, there is a risk that some or all of the movable bodies provided on the door frame unit that is not the subject of ID determination will also be poorly connected, and the control signal output from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may be changed to a different signal due to noise or the like and input, causing the movable bodies to operate in an abnormal manner. Therefore, some or all of the movable bodies provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR that is determined to be in an unconnected state or on the door frame unit that is not the subject of ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003) and operated by the drive motor or drive solenoid controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are not driven, thereby preventing the movable bodies from operating in a different manner than they should, which could result in damage to the movable bodies or door frame unit, or failure of the drive motor or drive solenoid that operates the movable bodies.

As described above, the game board side components may be configured to include the game board 5 and a specific door frame unit from among the door frame units. In this case, the specific door frame unit is the subject of ID determination, and if it is determined to be in an unconnected state in the ID determination process (step S1003), some or all of the movable bodies operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. provided in door frame units that are not the subject of ID determination (non-specific door frame units) and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may also be prevented from being driven. In addition to this, or separately from this, if there are multiple specific door frame units (for example, the right door frame If it is determined that some (for example, one of the door frame right side unit 430 and the door frame top unit 450) are disconnected, all of the movable bodies operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. provided in the specific door frame unit and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may be prevented from being driven, or all of the movable bodies operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. provided in all door frame units, including the specific door frame unit, and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may be prevented from being driven.

On the other hand, the movable bodies (such as the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear-right movable decorative body 3302, and the rear-front-lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear-front-lower performance unit 3160, etc.) provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL, which is equipped with a peripheral control board 1510 on which a peripheral control IC 1510a that executes the ID determination process (step S1003) is implemented, operate in the same manner as normal (when the combination of the divided gaming board 5A is determined to be compatible) when operation confirmation begins upon power-on. In addition, the LEDs mounted on the boards of the movable bodies provided on the left side game board 5AL (such as the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left side game board 5AL of the divided game board 5A, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, and the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 of the front lower performance unit 3160) are not controlled to emit light in the light emission mode when the power is turned on to check operation. In other words, if the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the right-side gaming board 5AR is disconnected, the movable elements on the left-side gaming board 5AL (such as the rear-upper movable decorative element 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 on the left-side gaming board 5AL of the split gaming board 5A, the rear-left movable decorative element 3301 and rear-right movable decorative element 3302 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, and the rear-front-lower middle decorative element 3161 of the front-lower performance unit 3160) are operated in the operating mode during power-on operation check, but the LEDs on the movable elements on the left-side gaming board 5AL are not controlled to emit light in the operating mode during power-on operation check, but are turned off and operated in the operating mode during power-on operation check. This makes it easy to identify the gaming board on which the peripheral control board 1510 of the split gaming board 5A is installed (in this case, the left-side gaming board 5AL).

In addition, in this example, when the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is not connected, not only is control not performed to drive the drive motor and drive solenoid mounted on the board provided in the performance operation unit 300 of the door frame unit (in this example, the tray unit 200) that is not the subject of ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003) to operate the performance operation unit 301, but the various LEDs mounted on the board provided in the performance operation unit 300 are also not controlled to emit light in the light emission mode when operation is confirmed when the power is turned on. In other words, when a power-on operation check is performed after the setting confirmation display process is completed, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is not connected, the various LEDs mounted on the board provided in the performance operation unit 300 are controlled to emit light in a serious abnormality notification light mode caused by the main body frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2, or in a minor abnormality notification light mode caused by the right-side game board 5AR not being connected. The presentation operation unit 300 may be the specific door frame unit that is the subject of ID determination. Even in this case, if the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that a specific door frame unit other than the presentation operation unit 300 or the right-side game board 5AR is not connected, the drive motor or drive solenoid mounted on the circuit board provided in the presentation operation unit 300 will not be driven to operate the presentation operation unit 301, and the various LEDs mounted on the circuit board provided in the presentation operation unit 300 may not be controlled to emit light in the light emission mode used to check operation when the power is turned on, but may be controlled to emit light in the light emission mode indicating a serious abnormality caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2, or in the light emission mode indicating a minor abnormality caused by the right-side game board 5AR not being connected.

In addition, if the right-side gaming board 5AR is determined to be in an unconnected state in the ID determination process (step S1003), the right-side gaming board 5AR determined to be in an unconnected state and some or all of the movable bodies operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. provided in door frame units not subject to ID determination and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may not be driven until the power is turned off, not just during the power-on operation check, or until the combination of the divided gaming boards 5A is determined to be compatible. In this case, it is possible to prevent the movable bodies from operating in a manner different from their intended operation, which could result in damage to the movable bodies or door frame unit, or failure of the drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. that operate the movable bodies.

In the example of the setting change and split game board ID error described above, a setting change process is performed to clear all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area; in other words, a process is performed to clear all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area after the setting change process if the setting value change permission condition is met when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. However, this is not limited to this. A process to clear all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area that is performed when the setting value change permission condition is not met when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, in other words, a process to clear all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area that is performed when the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder socket of the setting key switch 1311a when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the first ON operation is not performed, but only the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 1310f is pressed, may also be controlled to a state similar to the example described above.

[Summary A]
a game frame side component having an outer frame, a main frame provided on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame provided on the main frame so as to be openable and closable; a game board side component detachably provided on the game frame side component; lottery means for conducting a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions; setting determination possible state control means for controlling setting information related to the lottery of the lottery means to a setting determination possible state in which it is possible to determine setting information; a presentation control board for controlling the presentation of games; and a magnetic detection sensor capable of detecting magnetism, wherein the game board side component is composed of a first game board side component and a second game board side component; The presentation control board has a non-connection notification means capable of issuing a notification when the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected, and a magnetic detection abnormality notification means capable of issuing a notification when the magnetic detection sensor detects magnetism, and even if the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected within a predetermined period after power supply to the gaming machine starts and the magnetic detection sensor detects magnetism, no notification is issued by the non-connection notification means and the magnetic detection abnormality notification means during the setting determination possible state.

Specifically, for example, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of an amusement hall, a door frame 3 that opens and closes the front of the outer frame 2, and a main frame 4 that supports the door frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed and is attached to the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed. A split game board 5A consisting of a left game board 5AL and a right game board 5AR is detachably provided as a game board component on the game frame side component.

The left-side gaming board 5AL is also equipped with multiple magnetic sensors 1050 that detect illicit magnetic fields within the gaming area 5a. It is also equipped with a lottery means that executes a win determination process (step S305) based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004, and a main control MPU 1310a on the main control board 1310 as setting determination state control means that executes a setting change process to set the setting value related to the lottery to a setting determination state (a state from when the setting value change permission condition is met to when the setting value change termination condition is met).

In addition, the device has a function to control the effect display device 1600, various speakers (top center speaker, top side speaker, main frame speaker of the main frame 4, etc.), various LEDs of the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3), various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left gaming board 5AL, and various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right gaming board 5AR to perform game effects, and as an unconnection notification means, when the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the right gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state, the device displays an unconnection error notification display mode on the effect display device 1600, outputs a game board unconnection notification sound from the various speakers, and outputs an unconnection notification sound from the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3). The peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 has the following functions: control the illumination of various LEDs in the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, dish unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, provided on the door frame 3) to a minor abnormality alert illumination mode; and, as a magnetic detection abnormality alert means, display a magnetic detection error alert mode on the performance display device 1600 and output magnetic detection alert sounds from various speakers based on receiving a magnet goto alert command classified as an alert display that indicates that radio wave irradiation goto is occurring from the main control MPU 1310a on the main control board 1310.

Furthermore, even if the left-side gaming board 5AL and the right-side gaming board 5AR are not connected and the magnetic sensor 1050 detects magnetism during a predetermined period after the start of power supply to the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the period from when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started until the setting change process is started, the period from when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started until the setting change process is ended, or the period from when the setting change process is started until the setting change process is ended), no notification will be issued by the disconnection notification means and magnetic detection abnormality notification means of the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 while the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is performing the setting change process.

In other words, even if the magnetic sensor 1050 detects magnetism before the setting change process is started or while the setting value change process is being executed, or if the left gaming board 5AL and the right gaming board 5AR are not electrically connected, it is not possible to start playing, so there is little risk of any disadvantage to the gaming parlor. Furthermore, the setting change process is performed based on the operation of the gaming parlor staff, and if an alarm is issued by the unconnected notification means or magnetic detection abnormality notification means when the setting change process is started and an operation to determine the setting value is being performed, there is a risk that the staff member will be distracted by the alarm and make an error in determining the setting value. If an unintended setting value is selected by mistake, this could cause disadvantage to the gaming parlor or player. According to the above invention, when the setting value change process is being executed, staff can focus on determining the setting value, preventing the unintended setting value from being selected by mistake, and no disadvantage to the gaming parlor or player will be caused.

In addition, even if the magnetic sensor 1050 detects magnetism before the setting value change process is started or while the setting value change process is being executed, if the magnetism is no longer detected before the setting value change process is terminated, this means that the magnetism was detected only when it was not possible to start playing, and there is little risk of causing harm to the gaming establishment.However, if the left-side gaming board 5AL and the right-side gaming board 5AR are not electrically connected before the setting value change process is started or while the setting value change process is being executed, there is a high possibility that this disconnection will continue even after the setting value change process is executed, and if play is started in such a state, the game will proceed in a manner not intended by the designer, which may cause harm to the gaming establishment and players. Therefore, if the left-side game board 5AL and the right-side game board 5AR are not connected within a predetermined period after the start of power supply to the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the period from when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started until the setting change process is started, the period from when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started until the setting change process is finished, or the period from when the setting change process is started until the setting change process is finished), then after the setting change process is finished, only a notification by the unconnection notification means may be issued, or the notification by the unconnection notification means may be given priority over a notification by the magnetic detection abnormality notification means.

[Summary B]
a game frame side component having an outer frame, a main frame provided on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame provided on the main frame so as to be openable and closable; a game board side component detachably provided on the game frame side component; lottery means for conducting a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions; setting determination possible state control means for controlling setting information relating to the lottery of the lottery means to a setting determination possible state in which setting information can be determined; a presentation control board for controlling the presentation of games; and a magnetic detection sensor capable of detecting magnetism, wherein the game board side component is composed of a first game board side component and a second game board side component, and the presentation control board is composed of the first game board side component and the second game board side component. The game device has a connection determination means for determining whether or not they are connected, a non-connection notification means capable of issuing a notification when the connection determination means determines that the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected, and a magnetic detection abnormality notification means capable of issuing a notification when the magnetic detection sensor detects magnetism, and if the connection determination means determines that the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected and the magnetic detection sensor detects magnetism within a specific period after the setting determination possible state has ended, both the non-connection notification means and the magnetic detection abnormality notification means have their functions restricted to issue a notification.

Specifically, for example, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of an amusement hall, a door frame 3 that opens and closes the front of the outer frame 2, and a main frame 4 that supports the door frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed and is attached to the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed. A split game board 5A consisting of a left game board 5AL and a right game board 5AR is detachably provided as a game board component on the game frame side component.

The left-side gaming board 5AL is also equipped with multiple magnetic sensors 1050 that detect illicit magnetic fields within the gaming area 5a. It is also equipped with a lottery means that executes a win determination process (step S305) based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004, and a main control MPU 1310a on the main control board 1310 as setting determination state control means that executes a setting change process to set the setting value related to the lottery to a setting determination state (a state from when the setting value change permission condition is met to when the setting value change termination condition is met).

In addition, the device has a function to control the performance display device 1600, various speakers (top center speaker, top side speaker, main frame speaker of the main frame 4, etc.), various LEDs of the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3), various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left gaming board 5AL, and various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right gaming board 5AR to perform game performances; a function to execute an ID determination process (step S1003) as a connection determination means; and a function to display an unconnection error notification display mode on the performance display device 1600, output a game board unconnection notification sound from the various speakers, and output an unconnection error notification sound from the door frame unit 5AR as an unconnection notification means when the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the right gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state. The peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 has the following functions: control the illumination of various LEDs in the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, dish unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) to a minor abnormality alert illumination mode; and, as magnetic detection abnormality alert means, display a magnetic detection error alert mode on the performance display device 1600 and output magnetic detection alert sounds from various speakers based on receiving a magnet goto alert command classified as an alert display that indicates that radio wave irradiation goto is occurring from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

If the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the right-side game board 5AR is in an electrically disconnected state, and if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives a magnetic goto alarm command classified as an alarm display indicating that a radio wave irradiation goto is being performed from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 based on the input of a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 within a specific period after the setting change process (for example, within the period during which the power-on operation check is performed), the performance display device 1600 will display an unconnected error alarm display mode and a magnetic detection error alarm mode, but will not output an unconnected game board alarm sound or a magnetic detection alarm sound from the various speakers, and will not control the various LEDs of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) to emit light in a minor abnormality alarm light-emitting mode or a major abnormality alarm light-emitting mode. In other words, the functions of the disconnection notification means and magnetic detection abnormality notification means are partially restricted when issuing a notification.

In other words, if the magnetic sensor 1050 detects magnetism within a specific period after the setting change process is completed (for example, within the period during which the power-on operation check is performed), or if the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the left gaming board 5AL and the right gaming board 5AR are not electrically connected, the situation is not one in which play can begin and there is little risk of any disadvantage to the gaming establishment. However, since there is only a short period of time left until play can begin, a warning is issued only on the performance display device 1600, and no warning is issued from the various speakers and various LEDs on the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3). Furthermore, the power-on operation check is important for confirming whether the pachinko machine 1 operates as intended by the designer, and if an alarm is issued by the unconnected alarm means or magnetic detection abnormality alarm means while this power-on operation check is being performed, there is a risk that the player's attention will be drawn to the alarm and that abnormal behavior will be overlooked if it deviates from normal. If abnormal behavior is overlooked, there is a risk that it will cause disadvantages to the gaming parlor and players. The above invention allows players to focus on the power-on operation check, preventing abnormal behavior from being overlooked and preventing disadvantages to the gaming parlor and players.

In addition, if the magnetic detection abnormality notification means' notification period remains after a specific period (e.g., the period during which the power-on operation check is performed) has elapsed following the completion of the setting change process, the restricted function may be released and a notification may be issued. Furthermore, if the magnetic sensor 1050 detects magnetism, there is a possibility that fraudulent activity directly related to prize balls is occurring. However, if the left gaming board 5AL and the right gaming board 5AR are not electrically connected, there is a low possibility that fraudulent activity directly related to prize balls is occurring. Therefore, in this case, the restricted function of the magnetic detection abnormality notification means may be released and a notification may be issued, while the unconnection notification means may continue to have its function restricted. After the notification period of the magnetic detection abnormality notification means has elapsed, the restricted function of the unconnection notification means may be released and a notification may be issued. In other words, notifications by the magnetic detection abnormality notification means may be given priority over notifications by the unconnection notification means.

[Summary C]
A gaming machine comprising: a game frame side component having an outer frame, a main frame provided on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame provided on the main frame so as to be openable and closable; a game board side component detachably provided on the game frame side component; lottery means for conducting a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions; setting confirmation state control means for controlling the lottery means to a setting confirmation state in which setting information related to the lottery can be confirmed; a presentation control board for controlling the presentation of games; and a magnetic detection sensor capable of detecting magnetism, wherein the game board side component is composed of a first game board side component and a second game board side component. The presentation control board has a non-connection notification means capable of issuing a notification when the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected, and a magnetic detection abnormality notification means capable of issuing a notification when the magnetic detection sensor detects magnetism, and even if the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected within a predetermined period after the start of power supply and the magnetic sensor detects magnetism, no notification is issued by the non-connection notification means and the magnetic detection abnormality notification means during the setting confirmation state.

Specifically, for example, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of an amusement hall, a door frame 3 that opens and closes the front of the outer frame 2, and a main frame 4 that supports the door frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed and is attached to the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed. A split game board 5A consisting of a left game board 5AL and a right game board 5AR is detachably provided as a game board component on the game frame side component.

The left-side gaming board 5AL is also equipped with multiple magnetic sensors 1050 that detect any illicit magnetic fields acting within the gaming area 5a. It is also equipped with a lottery means that executes a win determination process (step S305) based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004, and a main control MPU 1310a on the main control board 1310 as setting confirmation state control means that executes a setting value confirmation display process to control the setting value related to the lottery to a setting confirmation state (a state from when the setting value display permission condition is met to when the setting value display termination condition is met) in which the setting value related to the lottery can be confirmed.

In addition, the device has a function to control the effect display device 1600, various speakers (top center speaker, top side speaker, main frame speaker of the main frame 4, etc.), various LEDs of the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3), various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left gaming board 5AL, and various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right gaming board 5AR to perform game effects, and as an unconnection notification means, when the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the right gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state, the device displays an unconnection error notification display mode on the effect display device 1600, outputs a game board unconnection notification sound from the various speakers, and outputs an unconnection notification sound from the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3). The peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 has the following functions: control the illumination of various LEDs in the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, dish unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, provided on the door frame 3) to a minor abnormality alert illumination mode; and, as a magnetic detection abnormality alert means, display a magnetic detection error alert mode on the performance display device 1600 and output magnetic detection alert sounds from various speakers based on receiving a magnet goto alert command classified as an alert display that indicates that radio wave irradiation goto is occurring from the main control MPU 1310a on the main control board 1310.

Furthermore, even if the left-side gaming board 5AL and the right-side gaming board 5AR are not connected and the magnetic sensor 1050 detects magnetism during a predetermined period after the start of power supply to the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the period from when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started until the setting value confirmation display process is started, the period from when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started until the setting value confirmation display process is ended, or the period from when the setting value confirmation display process is started until the setting value confirmation display process is ended), no notification will be issued by the disconnection notification means and magnetic detection abnormality notification means of the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 while the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is performing the setting value confirmation display process.

In other words, even if the magnetic sensor 1050 detects magnetism or the left gaming board 5AL and the right gaming board 5AR are not electrically connected before the setting value confirmation display process is started or while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed, it is not possible to start playing, so there is little risk of any disadvantage to the gaming parlor. Furthermore, the setting value confirmation display process is performed based on the operation of the gaming parlor staff. When the setting value confirmation display process is started and the operation to determine the setting value is being performed, an alert from the unconnected alert means or the magnetic detection abnormality alert means may draw the staff's attention to the alert and cause them to mistakenly check the setting value. If the staff mistakenly recognizes a setting value that is different from the actual setting, this could cause disadvantage to the gaming parlor or player. According to the above invention, when the setting value confirmation display process is being executed, staff can focus on checking the setting value, preventing the staff from mistakenly recognizing a setting value that is different from the actual setting, and no disadvantage to the gaming parlor or player occurs.

In addition, even if the magnetic sensor 1050 detects magnetism before the setting value confirmation display process is started or while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed, if the magnetism is no longer detected before the setting value confirmation display process is terminated, this means that magnetism was detected only when it was not possible to start playing, and there is little risk of causing harm to the gaming establishment.However, if the left-side gaming board 5AL and the right-side gaming board 5AR are not electrically connected before the setting value confirmation display process is started or while the setting value confirmation display process is being executed, there is a high possibility that this disconnection will continue even after the setting value confirmation display process is executed, and if play is started in such a state, the game will proceed in a manner not intended by the designer, which may cause harm to the gaming establishment and players. Therefore, if the left-side gaming board 5AL and the right-side gaming board 5AR are not connected and the magnetic sensor 1050 detects magnetism within a predetermined period after the start of power supply to the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the period from when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started until the setting value confirmation display process is started, the period from when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started until the setting value confirmation display process is ended, or the period from when the setting value confirmation display process is started until the setting value confirmation display process is ended), then only a notification by the unconnection notification means may be issued after the setting value confirmation display process is ended, or the notification by the unconnection notification means may be given priority over a notification by the magnetic detection abnormality notification means.

[Summary D]
a game frame side component having an outer frame, a main frame provided on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame provided on the main frame so as to be openable and closable; a game board side component detachably provided on the game frame side component; lottery means for conducting a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions; setting confirmation state control means for controlling the lottery means to a setting confirmation state in which setting information related to the lottery can be confirmed; a presentation control board for controlling the presentation of games; and a magnetic detection sensor capable of detecting magnetism, wherein the game board side component is made up of a first game board side component and a second game board side component, and the presentation control board is connected to the first game board side component and the second game board side component. the first game board side component and the second game board side component are electrically connected, a non-connection notification means capable of issuing a notification when the connection determination means determines that the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected, and a magnetic detection abnormality notification means capable of issuing a notification when the magnetic detection sensor detects magnetism; and if the connection determination means determines that the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected and the magnetic detection sensor detects magnetism within a specific period after the setting confirmation state has ended, the non-connection notification means limits its function to issue a notification, while the magnetic abnormality notification means issues a notification without limiting its function.

Specifically, for example, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of an amusement hall, a door frame 3 that opens and closes the front of the outer frame 2, and a main frame 4 that supports the door frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed and is attached to the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed. A split game board 5A consisting of a left game board 5AL and a right game board 5AR is detachably provided as a game board component on the game frame side component.

The left-side gaming board 5AL is also equipped with multiple magnetic sensors 1050 that detect any illicit magnetic fields acting within the gaming area 5a. It is also equipped with a lottery means that executes a win determination process (step S305) based on the entry of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004, and a main control MPU 1310a on the main control board 1310 as setting confirmation state control means that executes a setting value confirmation display process to control the setting value related to the lottery to a setting confirmation state (a state from when the setting value display permission condition is met to when the setting value display termination condition is met) in which the setting value related to the lottery can be confirmed.

In addition, the device has a function to control the performance display device 1600, various speakers (top center speaker, top side speaker, main frame speaker of the main frame 4, etc.), various LEDs of the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3), various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left gaming board 5AL, and various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right gaming board 5AR to perform game performances; a function to execute an ID determination process (step S1003) as a connection determination means; and a function to display an unconnection error notification display mode on the performance display device 1600, output a game board unconnection notification sound from the various speakers, and output an unconnection error notification sound from the door frame unit 5AR as an unconnection notification means when the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the right gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state. The peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 has the following functions: control the illumination of various LEDs in the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, dish unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) to a minor abnormality alert illumination mode; and, as magnetic detection abnormality alert means, display a magnetic detection error alert mode on the performance display device 1600 and output magnetic detection alert sounds from various speakers based on receiving a magnet goto alert command classified as an alert display that indicates that radio wave irradiation goto is occurring from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

If the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the right-side game board 5AR is in an electrically disconnected state, and a detection signal is input from the magnetic sensor 1050 within a specific period after the setting value confirmation display process (for example, within the execution period of the power-on operation check), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sends a magnet goto notification command classified as a notification display that radio wave irradiation goto is being performed to the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510. When this signal is received, the performance display device 1600 displays the unconnected error notification display mode and the magnetic detection error notification mode, but the various speakers output only the magnetic detection notification sound without outputting the game board unconnected notification sound, and the various LEDs of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) are controlled to emit only the serious abnormality notification light mode without controlling the light emission in the minor abnormality notification light mode. In other words, the unconnected notification means issues a notification with some of its functions restricted, while the magnetic detection abnormality notification means issues a notification without restricting its functions.

In other words, if the magnetic sensor 1050 detects magnetism within a specific period after the completion of the setting value confirmation display process (for example, within the period during which the power-on operation check is performed), or if the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the left gaming board 5AL and the right gaming board 5AR are not electrically connected, it is not possible to start playing, and so there is little risk of a disadvantage to the gaming parlor. However, if the remaining time until the situation becomes such that play can begin is short, and if the magnetic sensor 1050 further detects magnetism, it is possible that there has been fraudulent activity directly related to the prize balls. While there is a possibility that fraudulent activity is taking place when the left gaming board 5AL and the right gaming board 5AR are not electrically connected, there is a low possibility that fraudulent activity directly related to prize balls is taking place. Therefore, while both the unconnected notification means and the magnetic detection abnormality notification means issue warnings, the magnetic detection abnormality notification means, which notifies of the possibility of fraudulent activity directly related to prize balls, does not restrict its function; in other words, notifications by the magnetic detection abnormality notification means are given priority over notifications by the unconnected notification means.

Note that, because the power-on operation check is important for confirming whether the pachinko machine 1 is operating as intended by the designer, the power-on operation check may be performed with some functions restricted even when an alarm is being issued by the magnetic detection abnormality alarm means. For example, the LED may be controlled to emit light in the light-emitting mode for the power-on operation check, while the movable body may not operate in the light-emitting mode for the power-on operation check; alternatively, the movable body may be operated in the light-emitting mode for the power-on operation check, while the LED may not be controlled to emit light in the light-emitting mode for the power-on operation check. This makes it possible to perform the power-on operation check and check behavior, even though some functions are restricted, thereby preventing abnormal behavior from being overlooked and preventing disadvantages to gaming parlors and players.

[Summary E]
A gaming machine comprising: a game frame side component having an outer frame, a main body frame provided on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame provided on the main body frame so as to be openable and closable; a game board side component provided detachably on the game frame side component; a light emitting unit capable of emitting light in a predetermined light emitting manner; a sound output unit capable of outputting a predetermined sound; and a performance control board for controlling the performance of a game, wherein the game board side component is composed of a first game board side component and a second game board side component, and the performance control board is configured to cause a specific light emitting unit of the light emitting units to indicate an unconnected state when the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected. The device is equipped with an unconnected notification means capable of emitting light in a certain mode and outputting an unconnected notification sound from the sound output unit, a volume change means capable of changing the volume of the sound output unit in response to a first operation, and a brightness change means capable of changing the brightness of the specific light-emitting unit in response to a second operation, and when the unconnected notification sound is being output from the unconnected notification means, the volume of the unconnected notification sound can be changed in response to the first operation, while when the specific light-emitting unit is emitting light in the unconnected notification mode, the brightness of the unconnected notification mode will not be changed and the light will be emitted at a constant brightness even if the second operation is performed.

Specifically, for example, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of an amusement hall, a door frame 3 that opens and closes the front of the outer frame 2, and a main frame 4 that supports the door frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed and is attached to the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed. A split game board 5A consisting of a left game board 5AL and a right game board 5AR is detachably provided as a game board component on the game frame side component.

The left gaming board 5AL is also equipped with multiple magnetic sensors 1050 that detect illicit magnetic fields within the gaming area 5a. It also has various LEDs on the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) as light-emitting units, various LEDs mounted on a decorative board provided on the left gaming board 5AL, and various LEDs mounted on a decorative board provided on the right gaming board 5AR, and various speakers (such as a top center speaker, top side speakers, and a main frame speaker on the main frame 4) as sound output units.

In addition, the device has a function to control the effect display device 1600, various speakers (top center speaker, top side speaker, main frame speaker of the main frame 4, etc.), various LEDs of the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3), various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left gaming board 5AL, and various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right gaming board 5AR to execute game effects, and as an unconnection notification means, when the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the right gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state, the device displays an unconnection error notification display mode on the effect display device 1600, outputs a game board unconnection notification sound from the various speakers, and controls the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3) as a specific light-emitting unit. The peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 has the following functions: a function to control the illumination of the various LEDs of the door frame units (such as the top center speaker, top side speaker, and main frame speaker of the main frame 4) in response to operation of the volume adjustment button 227; and a function to adjust the brightness of the various LEDs of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, dish unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3), the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left gaming board 5AL, and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right gaming board 5AR in response to operation of the light adjustment button 228.

When the game board unconnected alert sound is being output from the various speakers, the volume of the game board unconnected alert sound can be changed by operating the volume adjustment button 227. When the various LEDs of the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, dish unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) serving as specific light-emitting elements are controlled to emit light in a minor abnormality alert mode, the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, dish unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) will emit light at a predetermined constant brightness without changing its brightness, even if the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated.

In other words, even when the left-side gaming board 5AL and the right-side gaming board 5AR are not electrically connected, the volume of the gaming board unconnection alert sound output from the various speakers can be changed, while the brightness of the minor abnormality alert light-emitting modes of the various LEDs in the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, platter unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) acting as specific light-emitting units cannot be changed. This prevents excessive discomfort to the player, while still making the player aware that the left-side gaming board 5AL and the right-side gaming board 5AR are not electrically connected through light-emitting control of the minor abnormality alert light-emitting modes of the various LEDs in the door frame units acting as specific light-emitting units.

[Summary F]
A gaming machine comprising: a game frame side component having an outer frame, a main frame provided on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame provided on the main frame so as to be openable and closable; a game board side component provided detachably on the game frame side component; lottery means for conducting a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions; setting determination possible state control means for controlling setting information relating to the lottery of the lottery means to a setting determination possible state in which setting information can be determined; and a presentation control board for controlling the presentation of a game, wherein the game board side component is composed of a first game board side component and a second game board side component, and the presentation control board is composed of the first game board side component. and the second game board side component, and a non-connection notification means capable of issuing a notification when the connection determination means determines that the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected, and when the connection determination means determines that the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected, the non-connection notification means can issue a first notification at a first timing after the end of the setting determination possible state, and can issue a second notification that is stronger than the first notification at a second timing that is later than the first timing.

Specifically, for example, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of an amusement hall, a door frame 3 that opens and closes the front of the outer frame 2, and a main frame 4 that supports the door frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed and is attached to the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed. A split game board 5A consisting of a left game board 5AL and a right game board 5AR is detachably provided as a game board component on the game frame side component.

The main control board 1310 also includes a lottery means for executing a winning determination process (step S305) based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004, and a main control MPU 1310a on the main control board 1310 as a setting determination state control means for executing a setting change process to control the setting related to the lottery to a setting determination state (a state from when the setting value change permission condition is met to when the setting value change termination condition is met).

In addition, the device has a function to control the performance display device 1600, various speakers (top center speaker, top side speaker, main frame speaker of the main frame 4, etc.), various LEDs of the door frame units (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3), various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left gaming board 5AL, and various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right gaming board 5AR to perform game performance, and a function to perform ID determination processing (step S1003) as a connection determination means. The peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with a peripheral control IC 1510a having the following functions: as an unconnection notification means, when the right-side game board 5AR is determined to be in an unconnected state in the ID determination process (step S1003), the effect display device 1600 displays an unconnection error notification display mode, various speakers output an unconnection game board notification sound, and various LEDs on the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) are controlled to emit light in a minor abnormality notification light emission mode.

If the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the right-side game board 5AR is electrically disconnected, at the first timing after the setting change process (for example, when the power-on operation check begins), the effect display device 1600 displays a disconnection error notification display mode, while not outputting a game board disconnection notification sound from the various speakers and not outputting the sound from the door frame unit (the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 430 provided in the door frame 3). At a second timing after the setting change process (for example, when the power-on operation check is completed), the effect display device 1600 displays the unconnected error notification display mode, the various speakers output the game board unconnected notification sound, and the various LEDs of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) are controlled to emit light in the minor abnormality notification light mode.

In other words, if it is determined that the left gaming panel 5AL and the right gaming panel 5AR are not electrically connected after the setting change process is completed, the situation is not one in which game play can begin and there is little risk of a disadvantage to the gaming parlor. However, because there is only a short time left until game play can begin, a first alert is issued at the first timing only on the performance display device 1600 to call attention, and no alerts are issued from the various speakers and LEDs on the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3). Furthermore, the power-on operation check is important for confirming whether the pachinko machine 1 operates as intended by the designer. If an alert is issued by the unconnected alert means while this power-on operation check is being performed, players may be drawn to the alert and miss any abnormal behavior that deviates from normal. If unusual behavior is overlooked, it could cause harm to the gaming establishment or the player. The above invention allows staff to focus on checking operation when the power is turned on, preventing abnormal behavior from being overlooked and preventing harm to the gaming establishment or the player.

Furthermore, if the connection status does not improve after issuing a warning using the display on the effect display device 1600 at the first timing, a second warning is issued at the second timing by outputting various speakers and illuminating various LEDs on the door frame unit in addition to the display on the effect display device 1600. This allows the warning to be strengthened in stages according to the degree of risk of harm, thereby preventing the occurrence of harm. In other words, if it is not possible to start play, such as while the power-on operation check is being performed, the risk of harm to the gaming establishment is low, so the first warning is issued by issuing a warning using only the effect display device 1600. However, if play can be started after the power-on operation check is completed, the risk of harm to the gaming establishment is high, so the second warning is issued by issuing a warning using multiple warning means (performance means), such as outputting various speakers and illuminating various LEDs on the door frame unit in addition to the display on the effect display device 1600. This allows the warning to be strengthened in stages, thereby preventing the occurrence of harm.

[Summary G]
a game frame side component having an outer frame, a main frame provided on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame provided on the main frame so as to be openable and closable; a game board side component detachably provided on the game frame side component; lottery means for conducting a lottery based on the establishment of lottery conditions; setting determination possible state control means for controlling the lottery means to a setting determination possible state in which setting information related to the lottery can be determined; a light emitting unit capable of emitting light in a predetermined light emitting manner; a display unit capable of displaying an image; a movable unit operated in a predetermined manner; and an effect control board for controlling the light emitting unit, the display unit, and the movable unit, wherein the game board side component is composed of a first game board side component and a second game board side component, and the effect control board is composed of the first game board side component and the second game board side component. the display unit includes a connection determination means for determining whether the first game board side component and the second game board side component are connected; a non-connection notification means for displaying a notification display mode on the display unit when the connection determination means determines that the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected, and for causing a specific light-emitting unit among the light-emitting units to emit light in a notification light-emitting mode; and a drive control means for operating the movable unit in a specific mode after the setting determination state has ended, wherein when the connection determination means determines that the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected, the notification display mode is displayed while the movable unit is operating in the specific mode, but the notification light-emitting mode is not emitted while the movable unit is operating in the specific mode.

Specifically, for example, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of an amusement hall, a door frame 3 that opens and closes the front of the outer frame 2, and a main frame 4 that supports the door frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed and is attached to the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed. A split game board 5A consisting of a left game board 5AL and a right game board 5AR is detachably provided as a game board component on the game frame side component.

It also includes a lottery means for executing a winning determination process (step S305) based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, and a main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 as a setting determination state control means for executing a setting change process to control the setting value related to the lottery to a setting determination state (a state from when the setting value change permission condition is met to when the setting value change termination condition is met). In addition, the light-emitting section includes various LEDs on the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3), various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left gaming board 5AL, and various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right gaming board 5AR. The display section includes a performance display device, and the movable section includes movable bodies provided on the left gaming board 5AL (such as the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left gaming board 5AL of the divided gaming board 5A, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and rear-right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, and the rear-front-lower middle decorative body 3161 of the front-lower performance unit 3160).

In addition, the performance display device 1600, various speakers (top center speaker, top side speaker, main frame speaker of the main frame 4, etc.), various LEDs on the door frame units (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3), various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left gaming board 5AL, and various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right gaming board 5AR, a function of controlling the movable bodies (such as the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left side game board 5AL of the divided game board 5A, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear-right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, and the rear-front-lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear-front-lower performance unit 3160) to perform game performances; a function of executing an ID determination process (step S1003) as a connection determination means; and a function of notifying the user of an unconnected state by executing the ID determination process (step S1004). In step S1003, when it is determined that the right side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, the display device 1600 displays an unconnected error notification display mode, various speakers are output to sound an unconnected game board notification, and various LEDs of the door frame unit (the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, the tray unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450, etc., provided in the door frame 3) are controlled to emit light in a minor abnormality notification light emission mode. The peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with a peripheral control IC 1510a that has the function of operating movable bodies provided on the left gaming board 5AL in the operating mode when the power is turned on and operation is confirmed (such as the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left gaming board 5AL of the divided gaming board 5A, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, and the rear front lower middle decorative body 3161 of the front lower performance unit 3160).

If the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an electrically disconnected state, the display device 1600 will display an unconnected error notification display mode while the movable bodies on the left-side gaming board 5AL (such as the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 of the left-side gaming board 5AL of the divided gaming board 5A, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and rear-right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, and the rear-front-lower middle decorative body 3161 of the front-lower performance unit 3160) are operating in the operating mode at the time of power-on operation check, while the various LEDs on the door frame unit are not controlled to emit light in the minor abnormality notification light emission mode during that period.

In other words, the power-on operation check is important for confirming whether the pachinko machine 1 operates as intended by the designer. If an alarm is issued by the unconnected alarm means while this power-on operation check is being performed, there is a risk that the player's attention will be drawn to the alarm and that abnormal behavior that deviates from normal will be overlooked. If abnormal behavior is overlooked, there is a risk that it will cause harm to the gaming parlor and players. The above invention allows players to focus on the power-on operation check, preventing abnormal behavior from being overlooked and preventing harm to the gaming parlor and players.

In addition, as an operating mode when checking operation upon power-on, some or all of the movable bodies provided on the left gaming board 5AL (such as the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left gaming board 5AL of the divided gaming board 5A, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and rear-right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, and the rear-front-lower middle decorative body 3161 of the front-lower performance unit 3160, etc.) may be made to appear in front of the performance display device 1600, which makes it easier to notice the unconnected error notification display mode displayed on the performance display device 1600.

[Summary H]
a game frame side component having an outer frame (e.g., outer frame 2), a main body frame (e.g., main body frame 4) provided on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame (e.g., door frame 3) provided on the main body frame so as to be openable and closable;
A game board side component (for example, a divided game board 5A) that is detachably provided on the game frame side component;
a special state generating means (a part of the main control MPU 1310a that executes the RAM clearing process (step S38)) that can generate a special state (a state in which the RAM clearing process (step S38) and the power-on operation check are executed) based on a predetermined special operation (an operation that satisfies the initialization process execution condition); and
A gaming machine comprising:
The game board side component has a first game board side component (e.g., a left game board 5AL) and a second game board side component (e.g., a right game board 5AR) that are individually fixed to the game frame side component,
A notification means (for example, a combination of any one or more (may be all) of various speakers, a performance display device 1600, various LEDs, etc.) capable of notifying when the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected is provided,
The notification means is
Static notifications whose notification mode does not change over time (for example, output sounds from various speakers with constant pitch and volume, fixed notification displays on the performance display device 1600, light emitted from various LEDs with constant light intensity and color, etc.)
Dynamic notifications in which the notification mode changes over time (for example, output sounds from various speakers whose scale and volume change, notification displays whose display content changes on the performance display device 1600, and light emitted from various LEDs whose light intensity and color change, etc.) can be implemented.
When the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected, the static notification can be performed during the special state, and the static notification and dynamic notification can be performed after the special state.
It is characterized by:
By configuring it in this manner, a static notification is issued during the special state to prevent it from interfering with work, etc., during the special state, and a dynamic notification is issued after the special state has ended to make it easy to notice that the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected.

In addition, the device further includes a display means (for example, a performance display device 1600) and a sound output means (for example, various speakers) or a light emitting means (for example, various LEDs),
The notification means may perform the static notification by displaying still image information on the display means, and may perform the dynamic notification by outputting a notification sound with at least a change in volume from the sound output means or by causing the light-emitting means to emit a notification light with at least a change in light intensity.
By configuring it in this manner, still image information is displayed so as not to interfere with work etc. in the special state, and after the special state has been reached, the alarm sound output from the sound output means and the light emitted by the light emitting means make it easy to notice that the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected.

The special state may also be configured to end automatically (without any special operation) after a certain period of time has elapsed. This configuration eliminates the need for unnecessary operations such as ending the special state, reducing the amount of work required during special states in gaming parlors where multiple pachinko machines 1 are installed, and shortening the time required for operations during special states.

The pachinko machine 1 may also have an operation unit (operation confirmation switch 1310j) located on the rear side of the machine that can accept specified operations, and the special state may be triggered in response to an operation on the operation unit. By configuring the machine in this way, a special state can be triggered when an operation unit located on the rear side of the machine 1 that is difficult for a player to operate is operated, thereby preventing unnecessary special states from being triggered.

[Summary I]
a game frame side component having an outer frame (e.g., outer frame 2), a main body frame (e.g., main body frame 4) provided on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame (e.g., door frame 3) provided on the main body frame so as to be openable and closable;
A game board side component (for example, a divided game board 5A) that is detachably provided on the game frame side component;
A game frame side performance means provided in the game frame side component (for example, various speakers (top center speaker, top side speaker, main frame speaker of the main frame 4, etc.), various LEDs of the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, dish unit 200, door frame top unit 450, etc. provided in the door frame 3), etc.)
A game board side performance means (for example, a performance display device 1600, various LEDs mounted on a decorative board provided on the left game board 5AL, etc.) provided in the game board side component;
A performance control means (for example, a peripheral control IC 1510a) for controlling the game frame side performance means and the game board side performance means;
A special state generating means (a part of the main control MPU 1310a that executes the RAM clearing process (step S38)) that can generate a special state (a state in which the RAM clearing process (step S38) and the power-on operation check are executed) based on a predetermined special operation;
A gaming machine comprising:
The game board side component has a first game board side component (e.g., a left game board 5AL) and a second game board side component (e.g., a right game board 5AR) that are individually fixed to the game frame side component,
The performance control means
When the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected, the game frame side performance means outputs a game frame side notification mode (for example, a minor abnormality notification light emitting mode), and the game board side performance means outputs a game board side notification mode (for example, a non-connection error notification display mode in the performance display device 1600),
When the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected during the special state, the game board side performance means is caused to output a game board side notification mode, but the game frame side performance means is not caused to output a game frame side notification mode.
It is characterized by:
By configuring it in this manner, the game board side presentation means outputs the game board side notification mode during a special state, but the game frame side presentation means does not output the game frame side notification mode, thereby preventing interference with work, etc. during the special state.

The presentation control means is characterized in that it can cause the game slot side presentation means to output a game slot side notification mode after the special state.
By configuring it in this manner, after a special state has occurred, the game frame side presentation means can output a game frame side notification mode, making it easy to notice that the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected.

In addition, the game board side performance means has a display means (for example, a performance display device 1600),
The game frame side performance means has a sound output means (for example, various speakers) or a light emitting means (for example, various LEDs),
The presentation control means may be configured to cause the display means to display the game board side notification mode when the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected during the special state, but not cause the sound output means and the light emitting means to output the game frame side notification mode.
By configuring in this manner, the game board side notification mode is displayed on the display means so as not to interfere with work etc. in the special state, and after the special state has been reached, the game frame side notification mode is output from the sound output means or light emitting means, making it easy to notice that the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected.

The special state may also be configured to end automatically (without any special operation) after a certain period of time has elapsed. This configuration eliminates the need for unnecessary operations such as ending the special state, reducing the amount of work required during special states in gaming parlors where multiple pachinko machines 1 are installed, and shortening the time required for operations during special states.

The pachinko machine 1 may also have an operation unit (operation confirmation switch 1310j) located on the rear side of the machine that can accept specified operations, and the special state may be triggered in response to an operation on the operation unit. By configuring the machine in this way, a special state can be triggered when an operation unit located on the rear side of the machine 1 that is difficult for a player to operate is operated, thereby preventing unnecessary special states from being triggered.

[Summary J]
A gaming machine having a gaming frame (for example, a main frame 4) and a gaming board (for example, a divided gaming board 5A),
The gaming machine has a first gaming machine state (for example, a state in which a setting change process (step S37) is executed) in which the gaming performance of the gaming machine can be determined;
A second gaming machine state (for example, a state in which RAM clear processing (step S38) and power-on operation confirmation are performed) in which a game can be played and a specific sound (for example, a RAM clear notification sound) can be output by a sound notification means (for example, various speakers (top center speaker, top side speaker, main body frame speaker of the main body frame 4, etc.));
A third gaming machine state in which a game can be played (for example, a state in which a gaming mode is executed after the RAM clear process (step S38) and the power-on operation check are completed),
The game board has a first game board side component (e.g., a left game board 5AL) and a second game board side component (e.g., a right game board 5AR),
A transition can be made from the first gaming machine state to the second gaming machine state, and further from the second gaming machine state to the third gaming machine state, and each gaming machine state does not reverse;
The first game board side component and the second game board side component are individually fixed to the game frame,
The first game board side component is composed of a plurality of boards including a performance control board (e.g., performance control board 1510) equipped with a microprocessor (e.g., peripheral control IC 1510a) that executes the performance of the game,
The second game board side component includes a specific board (for example, a board on which an ID output circuit IDC is mounted) that does not have a microprocessor mounted thereon,
The specific board has a unique value that can be identified as the second game board side component (for example, a unique value that can be identified as the right game board 5AR),
When an eigenvalue error state occurs when the first game board side component cannot receive the eigenvalue transmitted from the second game board side component,
In the first gaming machine state, no error notification corresponding to the eigenvalue error state is made,
In the second gaming machine state, an error notification corresponding to the eigenvalue error state is made, but the error notification by the sound notification means is not made;
In the third gaming machine state, an error notification corresponding to the eigenvalue error state is performed, including an error notification by the sound notification means.
It is characterized by:
By configuring in this manner, during the first gaming machine state in which the gaming performance of the gaming machine can be determined, no error notification corresponding to the eigenvalue error state is made, thereby preventing the determination work from being hindered; during the second gaming state in which the sound notification means outputs a specific sound, no error notification is made by the sound notification means, thereby preventing the work of checking whether the sound notification means is normal; and during the third gaming state in which the work of determining the gaming machine's gaming performance or the work of checking the sound notification means is not involved, an error notification corresponding to the eigenvalue error state, including an error notification by the sound notification means, is made, thereby preventing the eigenvalue error state from being overlooked.

Furthermore, the performance control board may be equipped with an eigenvalue transmission means for transmitting the eigenvalue as a signal from the specific board, and may be capable of comparing the eigenvalue transmitted from the eigenvalue transmission means with the eigenvalue that it possesses.
By configuring it in this manner, the performance control board can determine whether or not there is an inherent value error state and notify the error.

[Pachinko machine confirmation mode]
Next, a modified example will be described in which a transition control is performed to a confirmation mode for checking whether various functions and operations of the pachinko machine 1 are normal or possible. Fig. 341 is a schematic diagram of the main control board 1310 in the modified example, and Fig. 342 shows an example of behavior when a transition control is performed to the confirmation mode in a state in which the divided game board 5A, which is composed of a left game board 5AL and a right game board 5AR, is compatible (matched) as a combination of the divided game board 5A. Note that, below, only the parts that differ from the above embodiment will be described, and a duplicated description will not be provided.

In this example, the pachinko machine 1 has an operation confirmation switch 1310j with a push operation unit located near the center of the lower edge of the main control board 1310 on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIG. 341. Only arcade staff and other personnel can operate the switch. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power outage, if the "confirmation mode transition condition" is met, the machine is controlled to transition to confirmation mode. The "confirmation mode transition condition" may be that the push operation unit of the operation confirmation switch 1310j is operated; that the push operation unit of the operation confirmation switch 1310j is operated and the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2; or that the push operation unit of the operation confirmation switch 1310j is operated and the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, and that the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 and the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON position. In other words, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power outage, transition to confirmation mode may be controlled if the "confirmation mode transition condition" is met that the pressing operation portion of the operation confirmation switch 1310j is operated; alternatively, transition to confirmation mode may be controlled if the "confirmation mode transition condition" is met that the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2 and the pressing operation portion of the operation confirmation switch 1310j is operated; or transition to confirmation mode may be controlled if the "confirmation mode transition condition" is met that the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2, a setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise to perform the first ON operation, thereby turning the setting key switch 1311a to setting key ON, and the pressing operation portion of the operation confirmation switch 1310j is operated.

In addition, in this example, the confirmation mode includes an external terminal board output confirmation mode for checking whether the output to the external terminal board 558 is normal, and various operation units provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 (operation units such as the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300, volume adjustment button 227, light intensity adjustment button 228, etc.), various LEDs provided on the left game board 5AL and right game board 5AR, door frame units (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3, etc.) It is possible to control the transition to an operation check mode to check whether some or all of the various LEDs, speakers, and movable bodies provided on the left-side game board 5AL (back-upper movable decorative body 3210 of the back-upper performance unit 3200 of the back unit 3000, back-left movable decorative body 3301 and back-right movable decorative body 3302 of the back-lower performance unit 3300, and back-lower middle decorative body 3161 of the back-front lower performance unit 3160) and various movable bodies provided on the door frame 3 (performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300) are operating normally.

In this example, the transition conditions for the external terminal board output confirmation mode and the operation confirmation mode are different. Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power outage, the transition to the external terminal board output confirmation mode is controlled if the "first confirmation mode transition condition" is met, that is, the main body frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key switch 1311a is set to the ON position, and the pressing operation portion of the operation confirmation switch 1310j is operated. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power outage, the transition to the operation confirmation mode is controlled if the "second confirmation mode transition condition" is met, that is, the main body frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, and the pressing operation portion of the operation confirmation switch 1310j is operated. Furthermore, in this example, the transition to the operation confirmation mode is always controlled after the transition to the external terminal board output confirmation mode. In other words, if the "first check mode transition condition" is met, the system sequentially transitions to external terminal board output check mode and operation check mode, and if the "second check mode transition condition" is met, the system transitions only to operation check mode. This eliminates the need to cut off power to the pachinko machine 1 after the external terminal board output check mode and then restore power when the "second check mode transition condition" is met, preventing a deterioration in operability. Furthermore, because operation check mode automatically ends after a certain period of time, there is no need to perform unnecessary operations such as ending operation check mode even if there is no need to transition to operation check mode.

In addition, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage, the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on, and the pressing operation part of the operation confirmation switch 1310j is operated, and the above-mentioned "first confirmation mode transition condition" is met, thereby controlling the transition to the external terminal board output confirmation mode.Then, the "external terminal board output confirmation mode termination condition" is met, whereby the setting key switch 1311a is turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise so as to return it from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turned the decision key on to its original position (i.e., the rotational position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a), thereby turning off the setting key switch 1311a. In other words, the system controls the transition to external terminal board output confirmation mode in response to an operation by an administrator such as the amusement hall manager, and ends the external terminal board output confirmation mode and starts the operation confirmation mode in response to an operation by an administrator such as the amusement hall manager while in external terminal board output confirmation mode.

The locations of the pachinko machines 1 and the hall computers vary from one amusement hall to another. The pachinko machines 1 and the hall computers may be installed far apart, or the journey from the pachinko machine 1 location to the hall computer location may require passing through a narrow passageway. Furthermore, when checking whether the output to the external terminal board 558 is normal on multiple pachinko machines 1, the time required from first satisfying the first confirmation mode transition condition to arriving at the hall computer's location is long. Therefore, if the external terminal board output confirmation mode were configured to end after a fixed period, there is a risk that the external terminal board output confirmation mode would end before the hall computer could confirm whether the output to the external terminal board 558 is normal. Furthermore, extending the period of the external terminal board output confirmation mode would result in a longer operation time. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 in this example is configured to end the external terminal board output confirmation mode in response to an operation by an administrator, such as the amusement hall manager. This ensures that the hall computer can reliably check the output to the external terminal board 558 and prevents delays in the administrator's work.

As shown in Figure 342, in the external terminal board output confirmation mode, an output confirmation signal is output from the external terminal board 558 to the hall computer installed in the amusement hall. Then, by confirming that the output confirmation signal has been input in the hall computer installed in the amusement hall, it is possible to confirm that the signal output from the external terminal board 558 to the hall computer installed in the amusement hall is normal. Note that the output confirmation signal is only output during the external terminal board output confirmation mode. Therefore, it is possible to confirm that the output confirmation signal has been output without confusing it with other signals output from the external terminal board 558.

In addition, the output confirmation signal output from the external terminal board 558 to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall is turned on (output state) when controlling the transition to the external terminal board output confirmation mode, and is turned off (output stopped state) when a certain period of time has passed after the external terminal board output confirmation mode has ended. In other words, not only is the output confirmation signal turned on (output state) during control of the external terminal board output confirmation mode, but the output confirmation signal is also turned on (output state) for a certain period of time after the external terminal board output confirmation mode has ended.

As described above, the external terminal board output confirmation mode is terminated in response to an operation by an administrator, such as the manager of the amusement hall. Therefore, if the administrator mistakenly terminates the external terminal board output confirmation mode too quickly, the output period of the output confirmation signal will be shortened, and the hall computer installed in the amusement hall may not be able to confirm that the output confirmation signal was input. In such a case, it will be necessary to turn off the power to the pachinko machine 1 and then restore it to meet the "first confirmation mode transition condition," which will increase the workload. In this example, the output confirmation signal continues to be output for a certain period of time after the external terminal board output confirmation mode is terminated. Therefore, even if the administrator mistakenly terminates the external terminal board output confirmation mode too quickly, the hall computer installed in the amusement hall can reliably confirm that the output confirmation signal was input.

In addition, during the external terminal board output confirmation mode, the launch permission signal that informs the payout control board 633 that it is permitted to launch game ball B is set to launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic), prohibiting the ball launcher 540 from launching game balls. After the external terminal board output confirmation mode ends, the launch permission signal that informs the payout control board 633 that it is permitted to launch game ball B is set to launch permission logic, permitting the ball launcher 540 to launch game balls. Note that if the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas (step S38) is executed after the external terminal board output confirmation mode ends, the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for specific areas (step S38) by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 ends, and when the interrupt permission setting (step S52) is performed, the launch permission signal that informs the payout control board 633 that it is permitted to launch game ball B is set to launch permission logic, permitting the ball launcher 540 to launch game balls.

In this way, during the external terminal board output confirmation mode, the ball launcher 540 is prohibited from firing game balls, halting the progress of the game. This prevents a signal different from the output confirmation signal (a command indicating the status of the pachinko machine 1) from being sent from the external terminal board 558 to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall, which would interfere with the confirmation work of the signal confirmation output.

In addition, the system is not limited to halting game progress by prohibiting the ball launcher 540 from launching game balls during the external terminal board output confirmation mode. It is also possible to disable detection by the first start gate sensor 3002 and the second start gate sensor 2401 (by either prohibiting detection by the first start gate sensor 3002 and the second start gate sensor 2401 or by disabling detection by the first start gate sensor 3002 and the second start gate sensor 2401 without prohibiting the ball launcher 540 from launching game balls during the external terminal board output confirmation mode, or by prohibiting detection by the ball launcher 540 during the external terminal board output confirmation mode without executing processing in response to the detection). In this case, the display of the special symbol variations can be prevented from starting, thereby halting game progress and preventing a signal different from the output confirmation signal (a command indicating the status of the pachinko machine 1) from being sent from the external terminal board 558 to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall, which would interfere with the confirmation of the signal confirmation output.

In addition, when the external terminal board output confirmation mode is initiated, an external terminal board output confirmation mode start command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510, informing the peripheral control board that the external terminal board output confirmation mode has begun. When the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives the output confirmation mode start command, it causes the performance display device 1600 to display an output confirmation mode notification mode (in this example, "Output confirmation in progress") (this may be displayed until the output confirmation mode is terminated, or may be displayed for a certain period of time and then terminated), and it also causes the various speakers to repeatedly output an output confirmation mode notification sound (an announcement voice saying "Output confirmation in progress" and a warning sound such as a "ding dong") at a predetermined volume (this may be the maximum volume that can be set, or may be a default volume adjusted using a volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510) (this may be output repeatedly until the output confirmation mode is terminated, or may be output repeatedly a certain number of times (e.g., five times) or for a certain period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) and then stop the output).

In addition, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 lights up the various LEDs (which may be some or all) of the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) and the various LEDs (which may be some or all) mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR in an output confirmation mode notification light-emitting mode corresponding to the output confirmation mode (in this example, the various LEDs of the door frame unit and the right-side game board 5AR are lit in the same color and the light color is switched in a short period of time) (they may be lit in the output confirmation mode notification light-emitting mode until the output confirmation mode is ended, or they may be lit in the output confirmation mode notification light-emitting mode for a certain period of time and then the output confirmation mode notification light-emitting mode is ended and the lights are turned off or lit in a different light-emitting mode). This notifies you that an output check of the external terminal board 558 is being performed, making it possible to check whether the output signal from the external terminal board 558 to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall is normal.

The volume of the output check mode notification sound output from the various speakers during the external terminal board output check mode cannot be adjusted using the volume adjustment button 227. As mentioned above, the player can adjust the volume output from the various speakers by operating the volume adjustment button 227, but the volume of the output check mode notification sound output during the external terminal board output check mode cannot be adjusted by the player operating the volume adjustment button 227. Therefore, during the external terminal board output check mode, the output check mode notification sound can be output at a predetermined volume, and the sound output from the various speakers can reliably convey that an output check signal is being output from the external terminal board 558, making it possible to check whether the output signal is normal.

In addition, the light intensity of the output confirmation mode notification light-emitting mode performed during the external terminal board output confirmation mode cannot be adjusted using the light intensity adjustment button 228. As described above, the player can adjust the light intensity (brightness) of some of the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and divided game board 5A by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228. However, the output confirmation mode notification light-emitting mode performed during the external terminal board output confirmation mode cannot be adjusted by the player operating the light intensity adjustment button 228. Therefore, during the external terminal board output confirmation mode, the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and divided game board 5A are controlled to emit a predetermined light intensity (brightness), enabling the output confirmation mode notification light-emitting mode to be performed. This output confirmation mode notification light-emitting mode reliably communicates that an output confirmation signal is being output from the external terminal board 558, allowing the player to check whether the output signal is normal.

Furthermore, when in external terminal board output confirmation mode, operating the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 does not display a scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness) on the performance display device 1600, nor does it output a confirmation sound corresponding to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228. Furthermore, because the performance display device 1600 does not display a scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness), the scale does not change even if the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated multiple times. This prevents the scale corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness) from interfering with the visibility of the display of the output confirmation mode notification state on the performance display device 1600, and prevents the confirmation sound corresponding to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 from making the output confirmation mode notification sound difficult to hear, ensuring that the output confirmation signal is being output from the external terminal board 558.

In addition, during the external terminal board output confirmation mode, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left-side game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250, and the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 provided on the left-side game board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 are turned off. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, although the divided game board 5A is composed of the left game board 5AL and the right game board 5AR, during output confirmation, all of the various LEDs provided on the left game board 5AL are turned off regardless of whether they are controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, and only the various LEDs provided on the right game board 5AR and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are turned on. In this way, during the external terminal board output confirmation mode, of the various LEDs provided on the divided game board 5A, the various LEDs provided on the left game board 5AL and the various LEDs provided on the right game board 5AR have different light-emitting modes, so that a person viewing the pachinko machine 1 feels strange and can immediately notice that the external terminal board output confirmation mode is being executed. Furthermore, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board mounted on the left-hand gaming board 5AL, and the various LEDs mounted on the functional display unit 1400 and sub-functional display unit 2250 may be configured to light up in a different notification light mode (for example, red flashing) when the setting is changed than the various LEDs on the door frame unit and the right-hand gaming board 5AR, or one or both of the LEDs on the functional display unit 1400 and the sub-functional display unit 2250 that display information about winning or losing may be configured to light up in a notification light mode when the setting is changed. In this case, too, the light emission mode of the LEDs on the right-hand gaming board 5AR and the light emission mode of the LEDs on the left-hand gaming board 5AL can be made different, so it is possible to reliably communicate that an output confirmation signal is being output from the external terminal board 558.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sends an output confirmation mode end command to the peripheral control board 1510 notifying it of the end of the external terminal board output confirmation mode based on the operation to end the external terminal board output confirmation mode (in this example, an OFF operation to return the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the main control board 1310 to its initial position (i.e., the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a)).

In addition, in this example, when the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2 during normal play (playable state), a door-opening notification sound (an announcement voice saying "The door is open" and a warning sound such as "ding dong") is repeatedly output from various speakers at a predetermined volume (which may be the maximum volume that can be set, or a default volume adjusted using the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510) for a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds; in this example, this is shorter than the time required for operation check mode), or the output is stopped when the main frame 4 that was opened relative to the outer frame 2 is closed (note that if the main frame 4 is continuously opened relative to the outer frame 2, the output is stopped after being output repeatedly a certain number of times (e.g., five times)). Alternatively, the output may be stopped when the main frame 4 that was open to the outer frame 2 is closed, or the output may be stopped when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds; it may be shorter than the period from when the operation check mode is started to when the operation check mode is ended) has elapsed since the main frame 4 that was open to the outer frame 2 was closed.) In addition, various LEDs of the door frame units (the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3, etc.) and various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR are switched to a serious abnormality alert light emitting mode (in this example, a red light of maximum brightness is lit and turned off in a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds) The serious abnormality alert light emitting mode is ended when a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds, which in this example is longer than the period from when the operation check mode is started to when the operation check mode is ended) has elapsed since the main body frame 4 that was open to the outer frame 2 is closed (the serious abnormality alert light emitting mode may be ended when the main body frame 4 that was open to the outer frame 2 is closed, or the serious abnormality alert light emitting mode may be ended when the serious abnormality alert light emitting mode is repeatedly executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) or for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) since the main body frame 4 that was open to the outer frame 2 is closed, or the serious abnormality alert light emitting mode is ended when the main body frame 4 that was open to the outer frame 2 is closed, and the serious abnormality alert light emitting mode is changed to a semi-serious abnormality alert light emitting mode (red light of maximum brightness) The light emission control may be repeated in a mode in which the light is switched on and off over a long period of time (e.g., 2 seconds) (slow flashing mode), and the semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode may be terminated when a predetermined period of time (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the light emission control in the semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode, or when the control has been repeated a predetermined number of times (e.g., 10 times). The various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left gaming board 5AL are controlled to an off state, and when the serious abnormality alert light emission mode (the semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode if the light emission control is changed to the semi-serious abnormality alert light emission mode after the serious abnormality alert light emission mode) is terminated (when the main frame 4, which was open relative to the outer frame 2, is closed), the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left gaming board 5AL are controlled to emit light in a mode appropriate to the game situation.

On the other hand, during the external terminal board output confirmation mode, even if the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2, the output of door-opening alarm sounds from the various speakers and the control of the serious abnormality alarm light-emitting mode, which are caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2, are not executed. In other words, if the predetermined "first confirmation mode transition condition" is met when power is first supplied to the pachinko machine 1, the output of output confirmation mode alarm sounds from the various speakers and the control of the output confirmation mode alarm light-emitting mode are not executed, without the output of door-opening alarm sounds from the various speakers and the control of the serious abnormality alarm light-emitting mode, which are caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2. Furthermore, in this example, even during the operation confirmation mode executed after the external terminal board output confirmation mode, the output of door-opening alarm sounds from the various speakers and the control of the serious abnormality alarm light-emitting mode (including the semi-serious abnormality alarm light-emitting mode when the serious abnormality alarm light-emitting mode is followed by the semi-serious abnormality alarm light-emitting mode) caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 are not executed. Therefore, when the external terminal board output confirmation mode is executed, after the operation confirmation mode, it is possible to output a door open alert sound from various speakers caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2, and to control the lighting of a serious abnormality alert (including the semi-serious abnormality alert lighting mode when lighting is controlled to a semi-serious abnormality alert lighting mode after the serious abnormality alert lighting mode). This makes it less likely that an abnormality will be overlooked due to a lack of attention when checking the output signal from the external terminal board 558 in the external terminal board output confirmation mode or when checking operation in the operation confirmation mode.

In addition, if the external terminal board output check mode is ended or the external terminal board output check mode is not executed, and the "second check mode transition condition" is met when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power outage, and the main body frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 and the pressing operation portion of the operation check switch 1310j is operated, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 will enter the operation check mode for a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds).

Specifically, among the various LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, the LEDs excluding the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 that display information about winning or losing (such as the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left gaming board 5AL, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right gaming board 5AR, and the various LEDs of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 mounted on the door frame 3)) are controlled in a predetermined light-emitting mode (in this example, an operation confirmation light-emitting mode that is only performed in operation confirmation mode and is not performed in game presentation), and the peripheral control board 1510 The peripheral control IC 1510a drives drive motors and drive solenoids controlled by the IC to control movable bodies (such as the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left-side game board 5AL, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and rear-right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, the rear-lower middle decorative body 3161 of the front-lower performance unit 3160, and the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3) in a predetermined operating mode (operation mode during operation confirmation), and outputs operation confirmation alarm sounds from various speakers (in this example, alarm sounds that are only output in operation confirmation mode and are not output during game performance).

In operation confirmation mode, by executing control to light up the LEDs (such as the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left gaming board 5AL and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right gaming board 5AR, and the various LEDs on the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450 mounted on the door frame 3)) controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 in a predetermined light-emitting mode (operation confirmation light-emitting mode), it is possible to check whether the various LEDs on the left gaming board 5AL, right gaming board 5AR and door frame units are able to emit light normally.If an abnormality (not emitting light normally) is discovered, repairs can be made to return them to a normal state, allowing the light-emitting effects of the various LEDs to be performed as designed, thereby preventing a decrease in the presentation effect. In addition, in the operation check mode, the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 may also be turned on to check for abnormalities, and all of the various LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, excluding the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250, may not be turned on, and some of the LEDs may not be turned on.

In addition, in the operation confirmation mode, drive motors and drive solenoids controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are driven to execute control to operate the movable bodies (such as the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left-side game board 5AL, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and rear-right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, the rear-lower middle decorative body 3161 of the front-lower performance unit 3160, and the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3) in a predetermined operating mode (operation mode during operation confirmation), thereby making it possible to check whether the movable bodies provided on the left-side game board 5AL and the door frame 3 are capable of operating normally, and if an abnormality (not operating normally) is discovered, repairs can be made to restore the normal state, thereby enabling the movable bodies to perform the movable performance as designed, thereby preventing a decline in the performance effect. In operation check mode, it is sufficient that at least a portion of the movable body on the left gaming panel 5AL and the movable body on the door frame 3 is operated in a predetermined operation mode (operation check operation mode). Furthermore, the operation check operation mode may be executable only during operation check mode. In this case, when the operation check operation mode is executed, it can be found without being confused with the operation mode executed in the variable presentation executed in connection with the variable display of the special pattern, making it easy to determine whether the movable part is operable normally.

In addition, when the movable body is operated in the operation confirmation mode, the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the upper rear movable decorative body 3210 of the upper rear performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000, the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the left rear movable decorative body 3301 of the lower rear performance unit 3300 (LEDs 3311a to 3314a mounted on the front mounting surface of the left rear movable decorative boards 3311 to 3314), and the right rear movable decorative body 3302 (LEDs 3321a to 3324a mounted on the front mounting surface of the right rear movable decorative boards 3321 to 3324) the LEDs that illuminate and decorate the upper part (unit upper cover 312) of the performance operation unit cover unit 310 of the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3, and are controlled to emit light in an operation confirmation light-emitting mode, making it possible to check not only the operation of the movable body but also whether the LEDs mounted on the movable body are able to emit light normally.

In addition, in operation confirmation mode, by executing control to output operation confirmation notification sounds from the various speakers at a predetermined volume (which may be the maximum volume that can be set or the default volume adjusted using the volume adjustment switch on the peripheral control board 1510), it is possible to confirm whether the various speakers are capable of outputting sound normally. If an abnormality (sound is not being output normally) is discovered, repairs can be performed to restore the normal state, thereby enabling sound to be output from the various speakers as designed, thereby preventing a decrease in the presentation effect. In this example, by sequentially executing the following controls, the abnormal speaker can be immediately identified: a control to output "This is the top center speaker" from the pair of top center speakers located on the front of the door frame top base 451, a control to output "This is the top left speaker" from the left top side speaker located on the outer left of the top center speaker, a control to output "This is the top right speaker" from the right top side speaker located on the outer right of the top center speaker, and a control to output "This is the bottom speaker" from the main frame speaker 622.

Furthermore, when the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated during operation check mode, a special sound (such as a "beep") is output at a predetermined volume in response to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 (this volume is different from the volume set in response to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227, and the volume does not change even when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated). This makes it possible to check whether the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 is able to accept operation normally, and if an abnormality is discovered (the special sound is not being output), repairs can be made to return the device to a normal state, allowing sounds to be output from the various speakers at the player's preferred volume, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game due to sounds being output from the various speakers at a volume that the player finds unpleasant.

In this example, the volume cannot be adjusted using the volume adjustment button 227 until the operation check mode has ended. As described above, in this example of pachinko machine 1, it is possible to adjust the volume output from the various speakers by operating the volume adjustment button 227, but the volume of the operation check notification sound output during operation check mode cannot be adjusted by operating the volume adjustment button 227. Therefore, when operation check mode has started, the operation check notification sound can be output at a predetermined volume, and the operation check notification sound output from the various speakers can be used to check whether the various speakers are able to output sound normally, making it possible to immediately discover any abnormalities (sound not being output normally).

In addition, the light intensity (brightness) cannot be adjusted using the light intensity adjustment button 228 until the operation check mode has ended. As described above, in this example of pachinko machine 1, the light intensity (brightness) of the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and divided game board 5A can be adjusted by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228, but the light emission pattern controlled in operation check mode cannot be adjusted even by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228. Therefore, when operation check mode is started, the LEDs on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and divided game board 5A can be controlled to emit light at a predetermined light intensity (brightness), and it can be confirmed whether the various LEDs are able to emit light normally, making it possible to immediately discover abnormalities (not emitting light normally).

In addition, when the operation check mode is initiated, the effect display device 1600 displays the appearance of the effect, i.e., decorative patterns and background images during normal times (when play is possible), etc. This makes it possible to check whether the effect display device 1600 is capable of displaying images normally, and if an abnormality (images are not displayed normally) is discovered, repairs can be made to return the effect display device 1600 to a normal state, allowing images to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 as designed, thereby preventing a decrease in the effect of the effect.

In addition, the performance display device 1600 is configured so that scales corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness) will not be displayed even if the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated until the operation check mode is terminated. Also, because the performance display device 1600 does not display scales corresponding to the current volume or light intensity (brightness), the scales will not change even if the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated multiple times. Furthermore, if the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated during operation check mode, the performance display device 1600 may be configured to execute a special display that is only displayed during operation check mode. For example, if the volume adjustment button 227 or the light adjustment button 228 is operated during operation check mode, a special display may be displayed to indicate that the volume adjustment button 227 or the light adjustment button 228 is being operated normally. This makes it possible to check whether the volume adjustment button 227 or the light adjustment button 228 is able to accept operation normally. If an abnormality is discovered (the special display is not displayed), repairs can be made to return the device to a normal state, allowing sounds to be output from the various speakers at a volume preferred by the player and various LEDs to be illuminated at a light intensity preferred by the player. This prevents a decrease in interest in the game caused by sounds being output from the various speakers at a volume that the player finds uncomfortable or various LEDs to be illuminated at a light intensity that the player finds uncomfortable.

In addition, when an operating unit such as the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is operated during operation confirmation mode, the light emission color of the various LEDs (such as the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left gaming board 5AL, the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right gaming board 5AR, and the various LEDs of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) excluding the LED of the sub-function display unit 2250 that displays information regarding winning or losing, which are controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 and are controlled to emit light in an operation confirmation light emission mode) may be changed. For example, when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated with the button marked with the letter "+", various LEDs that are controlled to emit light in an operation confirmation light-emitting mode may be changed to "red", when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated with the button marked with the letter "-", various LEDs that are controlled to emit light in an operation confirmation light-emitting mode may be changed to "green", when the light intensity adjustment button 228 with the letter "+" is operated, various LEDs that are controlled to emit light in an operation confirmation light-emitting mode may be changed to "blue", and when the light intensity adjustment button 228 with the letter "-" is operated, various LEDs that are controlled to emit light in an operation confirmation light-emitting mode may be changed to "white". This makes it possible to check whether the volume adjustment button 227 and light intensity adjustment button 228 are able to accept operation normally, and if an abnormality is discovered (a special mode is not displayed), repairs can be made to return them to normal, allowing sound to be output from the various speakers at a volume preferred by the player and various LEDs to emit light at an intensity preferred by the player. This prevents a decrease in interest in the game due to sound being output from the various speakers at an uncomfortable volume or various LEDs emitting light at an intensity that the player finds uncomfortable, and also makes it possible to check whether the lighting state of the emitted color in response to operation of the volume adjustment button 227 and light intensity adjustment button 228 is normal.

In addition, if the performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated during operation check mode, the performance operation section unit 350 may be vibrated or moved upward from its normal position. In this case, it is possible to confirm that the operation of the performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300 is being accepted normally, thereby preventing a reduction in the performance effect due to the operation of the performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300 not being accepted and the performance corresponding to the operation of the performance operation section 301 of the performance operation unit 300 not being executed.

The operation check mode is transition-controlled in response to an administrator's operation, and unlike the external terminal board output check mode, it checks whether some or all of the devices installed in the pachinko machine 1 are operating normally near the pachinko machine 1, making it less likely that the administrator will miss the operation of the devices installed in the pachinko machine 1. Furthermore, if the operation check mode were configured to end in response to an administrator's operation, operation would be required after the operation check, which would take time to complete. For this reason, the pachinko machine 1 in this example is configured to automatically end the operation check mode after a certain period of time has passed, so as not to delay the administrator's work.

[Pachinko machine confirmation mode when incompatible]
Next, an example of behavior when the combination of the divided game board 5A (that is, the combination of the right game board 5AR (a board not equipped with a microprocessor) and the left game board 5AL (a peripheral control board 1510 equipped with a microprocessor or a main control board 1310)) is in an incompatible (mismatched) state (mismatched state) and the pachinko machine 1 is controlled to transition to the confirmation mode (external terminal board output confirmation mode, operation confirmation mode) will be described with reference to FIG. 343. Note that the following will only describe the compatible state and the parts that differ from the above-mentioned embodiment, and will not provide a duplicated explanation.

As shown in FIG. 343, if the ID determination process (step S1003) executed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 does not output control signals to the various LEDs and other electronic components mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR, and the electronic components mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side game board 5AR are set to a non-driven state (for example, the various LEDs are turned off) regardless of whether the external terminal board output confirmation mode is in effect or not.

In addition, in this example, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided gaming boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), the external terminal board 558 outputs an output confirmation signal to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall during execution of the external terminal board output confirmation mode or for a certain period of time after the external terminal board output confirmation mode has been entered, without outputting an incompatibility error signal indicating that the combination of the divided gaming boards 5A is incompatible. In other words, during execution of the external terminal board output confirmation mode or for a certain period of time after the external terminal board output confirmation mode, the external terminal board 558 outputs an output confirmation signal, just as when it is compatible. This prevents an incompatibility error signal from being sent from the external terminal board 558 to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall during the external terminal board output confirmation mode, which would interfere with the output confirmation signal confirmation process.

In addition, in this example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided gaming board 5A is incompatible during the ID determination process (step S1003), the external terminal board 558 is not configured to output an incompatibility error signal indicating that the combination of the divided gaming board 5A is incompatible to the hall computer installed in the amusement hall, even during the operation check mode. In other words, the output check signal output from the external terminal board 558 to the hall computer installed in the amusement hall in response to the start of the external terminal board output check mode is also output for a certain period after the external terminal board output check mode, i.e., for a certain period during the operation check mode. Therefore, if an incompatibility error signal is output during the operation check mode, the incompatibility error signal and the output check signal will overlap and be output from the external terminal board 558 to the hall computer installed in the amusement hall. In this case, it becomes difficult to determine whether the signal input to the hall computer is an incompatibility error signal or an output check signal, which may make it difficult to determine whether the output to the external terminal board 558 is normal. For this reason, in this example, even during operation check mode, an incompatibility error signal is not output from the external terminal board 558 to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall, and an incompatibility error signal can be output after the operation check mode is complete. Note that if the combination of divided gaming boards 5A is incompatible, the incompatibility error signal may not be output from the external terminal board 558 to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall, regardless of whether operation check mode is in progress, and in this case, a notification issued by the pachinko machine 1 may let the player know that the combination of divided gaming boards 5A is incompatible.

Furthermore, in this example, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), the fact that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible will not be reported until the external terminal board output confirmation mode is ended (until the output confirmation mode end command is received from the main control MPU 1310a). In other words, while the external terminal board output confirmation mode is being executed, the various LEDs (some or all) of the performance display device 1600, various speakers, and door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) are controlled in the same manner as when the external terminal board output confirmation mode is executed when compatible (these may be completely identical, or almost all may be the same with only some differences).

When the external terminal board output confirmation mode ends, the main control MPU 1310a sends an output confirmation mode end command to the peripheral control board 1510 and starts the operation confirmation mode. When the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 receives the output confirmation mode end command, it controls the various speakers and the various LEDs (which may be some or all) of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) in the same manner as when the operation confirmation mode was executed during compatibility (they may be completely identical, or almost all may be the same with only some differences), while the effect display device 1600 displays an abnormal background image (e.g., black) on the entire screen without displaying decorative patterns or the background image used during normal play (when playable), and displays "Right side game board incompatible error" on the effect display device 1600 as an incompatible error notification display mode, thereby notifying the user that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible.

In other words, when the operation check mode is started, the LEDs (various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left gaming board 5AL, various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right gaming board 5AR, various LEDs of the door frame units (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450, etc. mounted on the door frame 3) are illuminated in a predetermined light-emitting pattern (in this example, this is only performed in the operation check mode and is not performed in the game presentation), except for the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 that displays information about winning or losing, which are controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 (this may be completely the same, or almost all may be the same with only some differences). It controls the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 to light up the LEDs in a predetermined operation mode (operation confirmation light emission mode that is not output during operation confirmation), drives drive motors and drive solenoids controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 to operate movable bodies (such as the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left-side game board 5AL, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and rear-right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, the rear-lower middle decorative body 3161 of the front-lower performance unit 3160, and the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3) in a predetermined operation mode (operation confirmation operation mode), and outputs operation confirmation alarm sounds from various speakers (in this example, alarm sounds that are output only in operation confirmation mode and are not output during game performance).

In addition, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), if the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated during operation check mode, a special sound (such as a "beep") will be output at a predetermined volume in response to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 (this volume is different from the volume set in response to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227, and the volume does not change even when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated).

On the other hand, among the various LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, the LEDs excluding the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 that display information regarding winning or losing (various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left gaming board 5AL, various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right gaming board 5AR, various LEDs of the door frame units (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3, etc.)), and the drive motors and drive solenoids controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 The performance display device 1600, which drives the movable elements (such as the rear-upper movable decorative element 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 on the left-side game board 5AL, the rear-left movable decorative element 3301 and rear-right movable decorative element 3302 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, and the rear-front-lower middle decorative element 3161 of the rear-front-lower performance unit 3160) and various speakers, volume control button 227, and light intensity control button 228, is configured to notify users that the combination of the split game board 5A is incompatible by displaying "Right-side game board incompatible error" as an incompatible error notification display mode. This makes it possible to notify users that the combination of the split game board 5A is incompatible without interfering with the confirmation work in operation confirmation mode.

In this way, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), during operation confirmation mode, only a part of the performance display device 1600 displays "Right side game board incompatible error" as an incompatible error notification display mode, and the LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, except for the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 that display information about winning or losing (various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left side game board 5AL and the decorative board provided on the right side game board 5AR, the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420 mounted on the door frame 3), , door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450, etc.), various movable bodies provided on the left gaming board 5AL (back-upper movable decorative body 3210 of the back-upper performance unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 provided on the left gaming board 5AL, back-left movable decorative body 3301 and back-right movable decorative body 3302 of the back-lower performance unit 3300, back-front-lower middle decorative body 3161 of the back-front-lower performance unit 3160, etc.), and various speakers are not controlled in a manner that notifies that the combination of the divided gaming board 5A is incompatible, but are controlled in the same manner as when the operation check mode is executed when it is compatible (this may be completely identical, or almost entirely the same with only some differences).

For this reason, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided gaming board 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), it is possible to check whether the movable body on the left gaming board 5AL is capable of operating normally, and if an abnormality (not operating normally) is discovered, repairs can be made to return the movable body to a normal state, thereby enabling the movable body to perform the moving effect as designed, thereby preventing a decrease in the presentation effect. The LEDs mounted on the movable body are also controlled to emit light in an operation confirmation light-emitting mode without being controlled to an off state, preventing a situation where it becomes impossible to check whether the LEDs mounted on the movable body are capable of emitting light normally. If an abnormality (not emitting light normally) is found during the check, repairs can be made to return the movable body to a normal state, allowing the movable body to emit light as designed, thereby preventing a decrease in the presentation effect.

In addition, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), the LEDs of the various LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, except for the LED of the sub-function display unit 2250 that displays information regarding winning or losing, are not controlled to emit light in a serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode that notifies that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible, but are controlled to emit light in an operation confirmation light-emitting mode. This prevents the inability to check whether LEDs, excluding the LED of the sub-function display unit 2250 that displays information about winning or losing, are able to emit light normally, and if an abnormality (not emitting light normally) is found when checking whether LEDs are able to emit light normally, repairs can be made to return them to a normal state so that they can emit light as designed, thereby preventing a decrease in the presentation effect and preventing the serious abnormality notification light-up mode, which lights up at high brightness, from making it difficult to see the operation of the movable body on the left-hand gaming board 5AL or the light emitted by the LED mounted on the movable body, which can hinder checking operations.

Furthermore, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), an operation confirmation alarm sound is output without outputting an incompatible game board alarm sound, thereby preventing the inability to confirm whether the various speakers are able to output sound normally.If an abnormality (sound is not being output normally) is found after checking whether sound can be output normally, repairs can be made to return the speakers to a normal state, allowing sound to be output from the various speakers as designed, thereby preventing a decrease in the presentation effect. Furthermore, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), a special sound is output when the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated, preventing the player from being unable to confirm whether the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 can normally accept operation. If an abnormality (special sound is not output) is found after checking whether operation can be normally accepted, repairs can be made to return the device to a normal state, allowing sound to be output from the various speakers at the player's preferred volume, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game due to sound being output from the various speakers at a volume that the player finds unpleasant.

In addition, in the operation check mode, not only are the drive motors and drive solenoids, etc., provided on the right-side game board 5AR that has been determined to be incompatible and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, not operated in a predetermined operating mode (operation mode during operation check), but also the movable bodies (the rear-upper rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the split game board 5A) that operate in a predetermined operating mode (operation mode during operation check) in the operation check mode, which is performed when the combination of the split game board 5A is compatible, The drive motors and drive solenoids that drive the performance operation units 301 that are provided on the door frame units (such as the moving decorative body 3210, the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and rear right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, the rear lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear lower front performance unit 3160, and the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3) and are not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003) are also prevented from operating in a predetermined operating mode (operating mode during operation confirmation).

Specifically, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), even if the operation check mode is started, the LED provided on the right-side game board 5AR determined to be incompatible will not be controlled to light up in the operation check light-emitting mode or the movable body will not be controlled to operate in the operation check mode (a control signal will not be output to the right-side game board 5AR), or this control will not be possible (a control signal will be output but not input to the right-side game board 5AR).In addition, no control will be performed to drive the drive motor or drive solenoid provided on the tray unit 200 (in this example, the performance operation unit 300) provided on the door frame 3 and not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003), thereby operating the performance operation unit 301 provided on the performance operation unit 300. This prevents the movable body from operating in a manner different from its intended operation, which could result in damage to the movable body or door frame unit, or failure of the drive motor or drive solenoid that operates the movable body. However, even in this case, LEDs provided on the door frame unit that are not subject to ID determination (for example, multiple LEDs 320a that illuminate and decorate the upper part (unit upper cover 312) of the performance operation unit cover unit 310 of the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3) are controlled to emit light in the same predetermined manner as when compatible. This makes it possible to determine that the operation check mode is being executed normally.

On the other hand, when the operation confirmation mode is initiated, the movable bodies (such as the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 of the left side of the divided game board 5AL, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear-right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, the rear-front-lower middle decorative body 3161 of the front-lower performance unit 3160, etc.) provided on the left side of the game board 5AL, which is placed on the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control IC 1510a that executes the ID determination process (step S1003) is implemented, operate in the same manner as normal (when the combination of the divided game board 5A is determined to be compatible) when the operation confirmation mode is initiated. In addition, the LEDs mounted on the boards provided on the movable bodies provided on the left side game board 5AL (such as the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left side game board 5AL of the divided game board 5A, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear-right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, and the rear-front-lower middle decorative body 3161 of the front-lower performance unit 3160) are controlled to emit light in an operation confirmation light-emitting mode. That is, if the right-side game board 5AR is determined to be in an incompatible state in the ID determination process (step S1003), as in normal cases (when the combination of the divided game board 5A is determined to be compatible), the movable bodies provided on the left-side game board 5AL (such as the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left-side game board 5AL of the divided game board 5A, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear-right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, and the rear-front-lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear-front-lower performance unit 3160) are operated in an operation confirmation operation mode, and the LEDs provided on the movable bodies provided on the left-side game board 5AL are controlled to emit light in an operation confirmation light emission mode. This makes it easy to identify the game board (in this case, the left-side game board 5AL) on which the peripheral control board 1510 of the divided game board 5A is provided. In addition, when the right-side game board 5AR is determined to be in an incompatible state in the ID determination process (step S1003), the LEDs mounted on the boards of the movable bodies (such as the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 of the left-side game board 5AL of the divided game board 5A, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear-right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, and the rear-front-lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear-front-lower performance unit 3160) mounted on the boards of the movable bodies mounted on the left-side game board 5AL are not controlled to emit light in the operation confirmation light emitting mode, and the ID determination process (step S1003) is performed. ) and it is determined that the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state, the LEDs mounted on the circuit boards of the movable bodies provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL (such as the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL of the divided gaming board 5A, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear-right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, and the rear-front-lower middle decorative body 3161 of the front-lower performance unit 3160) may be controlled to emit light in an operation confirmation light-emitting mode, so that it is possible to determine whether the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state or not.

In addition, in this example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible, when the operation check mode is initiated, no control is performed to operate the performance operation unit 301 by driving the drive motor or drive solenoid mounted on the board provided on the performance operation unit 300 of the door frame unit (in this example, the tray unit 200) that is not the subject of ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003), but the various LEDs mounted on the board provided on the performance operation unit 300 are controlled in the same manner as normal (when the combination of the divided game board 5A is determined to be compatible) during the operation check mode. In other words, when the operation check mode is executed, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, the various LEDs mounted on the boards provided in the presentation operation unit 300 are controlled to emit light in the operation check light-emitting mode, just as if the combination of the divided game boards 5A was determined to be compatible. Note that the presentation operation unit 300 may be the specific door frame unit that is the subject of ID determination. Even in this case, if the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the combination of a specific door frame unit other than the presentation operation unit 300 or the divided game board 5A is incompatible, the drive motor or drive solenoid mounted on the board provided in the presentation operation unit 300 is not driven to operate the presentation operation unit 301, while the various LEDs mounted on the board provided in the presentation operation unit 300 may be controlled to emit light in the operation check light-emitting mode.

In addition, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, the LEDs mounted on some of the multiple LEDs mounted on multiple boards provided on the door frame unit that are not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003), or some of the multiple LEDs mounted on one board, may not be controlled to emit light in the operation confirmation light-emitting mode, and some movable bodies may not be operated in the operation confirmation operating mode (for example, some or all of the LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the door frame unit and the drive motors, drive solenoids, LEDs, etc. provided on the movable bodies provided on the door frame unit may not operate or be driven in the operation confirmation mode).

In addition, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is determined to be incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), the right-side game board 5AR determined to be incompatible and some or all of the movable bodies operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. provided in door frame units not subject to ID determination and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may not be driven until the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, regardless of whether it is in operation check mode, or until the combination of the divided game boards 5A is determined to be compatible. In this case, it is possible to prevent the movable bodies from operating in a manner different from their intended operation, which could result in damage to the movable bodies or door frame unit, or failure of the drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. that operate the movable bodies.

In addition, when the operation check mode ends (the LED's operation check light-emitting mode ends and the light is turned off or turned on in a predetermined light-emitting mode, and the movable body's operation check mode ends and the movable body enters a standby state (stopped (stored) in a predetermined standby position)), and the game mode begins, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the incompatibility error notification display mode on the performance display device 1600, repeatedly outputs a game board incompatibility notification sound (an announcement voice saying "An incompatibility error has occurred on the right-side game board. Please turn off the power and check." and a warning sound such as a "ding dong" sound) at a predetermined volume (which may be the maximum volume that can be set, or a default volume adjusted by the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510) from various speakers (repeated for a certain number of times (e.g., 5 times) or for a certain period (e.g., 30 seconds)) until the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. (It may be one that repeatedly outputs and then stops the output), and the various LEDs (which may be some or all) of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) are repeatedly controlled to emit light in a serious abnormality warning light mode (in this example, a mode in which the lights are switched between maximum brightness red on and off in a short period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) (high-speed flashing mode)), and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left gaming board 5AL are controlled to an off state, while the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 provided on the left gaming board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 provided on the left gaming board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are brought into a state in which they can be controlled to emit light in the same way as when they were matched (they may be lit in a predetermined mode).

The game board incompatibility notification sound is not the same notification sound (such as a "beep") that is output intermittently, but is made up of multiple sounds with different tones, and is further controlled to alternate between a mute state and an on state. Furthermore, the serious abnormality notification light-emitting mode is not fixed to a lit state, but is controlled to alternate between a lit state and an off state to change the amount of light. In other words, the various speakers and LEDs dynamically change the tone, volume, light intensity, etc. over time to notify that the combination of divided game boards 5A is incompatible. This makes it easier to notice that the combination of divided game boards 5A is incompatible when the operation check mode ends and a game mode that does not require confirmation is initiated.

In this example, if the combination of the divided game board 5A is determined to be incompatible (mismatched) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), when controlling the transition to operation check mode, the system immediately notifies the user that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible, without issuing an abnormality alert in response to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 after the operation check mode. In other words, when the operation check mode ends and the game mode begins, the system outputs a game board incompatible combination alert sound without outputting a door open alert sound, regardless of whether the main frame 4 is open relative to the outer frame 2 and whether the predetermined period has elapsed since the main frame 4 was opened relative to the outer frame 2. Furthermore, when the operation check mode ends and the game mode begins, the system controls the illumination to a serious abnormality alert illumination mode, but this is not due to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2, but is due to the combination of the divided game board 5A being incompatible. Therefore, when the operation check mode ends and the game mode begins, the light emission is always controlled to the serious abnormality notification light emission mode regardless of whether a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds) has passed since the main body frame 4 was closed.

In addition, when the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible (mismatched), even if the start condition for the variable display is met (when the game ball enters the start hole (first start hole 2002 or either the first start hole 2002 or the second start hole 2004)), the effect display device 1600, various speakers, various LEDs on the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, dish unit 200, and door frame top unit 450, etc., provided on the door frame 3), and decorations provided on the left game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, The system is designed to notify users that an abnormality has occurred without performing any variable effects using the various LEDs mounted on the board. On the other hand, when the interrupt permission setting (step S52) is made after the external terminal board output confirmation mode ends, the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 are controlled to emit light in a predetermined light-emitting mode based on the fulfillment of the variable display start condition (a game ball entering the start port (first start port 2002 or either the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004)), making it possible to display information regarding the result.

In addition, in this example, even if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is in an incompatible (mismatched) state when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), the timing of light emission control in the serious abnormality alert light emission mode corresponding to the incompatible (mismatched) combination of the divided game boards 5A and the timing of the output of the game board incompatible alert sound will differ depending on whether or not control is exercised to transition to the external terminal board output confirmation mode or whether or not control is exercised to transition to the operation confirmation mode.

Specifically, if the transition control to either the external terminal board output check mode or the operation check mode is not performed and the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible (mismatched), the effect display device 1600 will display "power on" for a predetermined period of time based on the start of power supply to the pachinko machine 1, and then the various LEDs (some or all of which may be) of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) will start to emit light in a serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode, and the various speakers will start to output game board incompatible alert sounds.

On the other hand, when executing either the external terminal board output check mode or the operation check mode, if the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible (mismatched), the various LEDs (which may be some or all) of the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) will not be controlled to emit light in a serious abnormality alert light mode or the game board incompatibility alert sound will be output from the various speakers during the external terminal board output check mode or operation check mode, but after the operation check mode, the various LEDs (which may be some or all) of the door frame unit will be controlled to emit light in a serious abnormality alert light mode in response to the right-side game board 5AR being in a mismatched state, and the game board incompatibility alert sound will be output from the various speakers.

In this way, even if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is in an incompatible (mismatched) state when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), the timing of the light emission control in the serious abnormality notification light emission mode corresponding to the incompatible state of the right-side game board 5AR and the timing of the output of the game board incompatible notification sound can be varied depending on whether or not to control the transition to the external terminal board output confirmation mode or whether or not to control the transition to the operation confirmation mode, thereby prioritizing the notification of more important information and preventing malfunctions and fraudulent behavior from occurring. In other words, if the output to the external terminal board 558 is not normal, the hall computer may not be able to detect fraudulent activity even if it is taking place, which could result in damage to the gaming parlor, and if there is an abnormality in the devices installed in the pachinko machine 1, there is a risk that the pachinko machine 1 may be damaged. Therefore, by giving priority to reporting this rather than a mismatch (inconsistency) in the combination of the divided game board 5A, it is possible to prevent the damage from spreading and damage to the pachinko machine 1 from occurring.

When power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (mismatched), and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), the timing at which the background image (e.g., black) for an abnormality and the incompatibility error notification display mode on the performance display device 1600 are displayed is the same regardless of whether or not control is exercised to transition to the external terminal board output confirmation mode, or whether or not control is exercised to transition to the operation confirmation mode. In other words, the background image (e.g., black) for an abnormality and the incompatibility error notification display mode on the performance display device 1600 are displayed at the timing at which the operation confirmation mode is started. This allows for priority execution of notifications of high importance, while also allowing the performance display device 1600 to notify and handle other notifications. Furthermore, the timing of the background image (e.g., black) displayed when an abnormality occurs on the performance display device 1600 and the display mode of the incompatibility error notification on the performance display device 1600 may differ depending on whether or not control is exercised to transition to external terminal board output confirmation mode, or whether or not control is exercised to transition to operation confirmation mode. In this case, information of increasing importance can be notified in order and dealt with in sequence, ensuring that each piece of information is conveyed reliably and dealt with.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed to be incompatible (inconsistent) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), even if there is a detection by an abnormality detection means (for example, a sensor or switch such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, or door frame open switch, which inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) while the external terminal board output confirmation mode is being executed, the detection is invalidated (it may be that no process is executed to check whether or not there is a detection, or it may be that a process is executed to check whether or not there is a detection but no process (such as an alert) based on the detection is executed).

Specifically, even if an abnormal magnetic field is generated while the external terminal board output confirmation mode is being executed and a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the detection signal is discarded without issuing an abnormality alert based on the detection of the abnormal magnetic field. In other words, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (mismatched), and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), and if a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 while the external terminal board output confirmation mode is being executed, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is ignored (the input of the detection signal may not be confirmed, or even if the input of the detection signal is confirmed, processing based on the input may not be executed), and after the external terminal board output confirmation mode ends, control of the operation confirmation mode is executed as if a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 had not been input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

In addition, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (mismatched) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), and if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, a sensor or switch that inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, ball out detection sensor 574, or door frame open switch) during operation check mode, that is, when an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means during operation check mode, the detection by the abnormality detection means is also disabled (it may not execute a process to check whether or not there is a detection, or it may execute a process to check whether or not there is a detection but not execute a process (such as an alert) based on the detection).

Specifically, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the combination of the divided game board 5A is deemed to be incompatible (mismatched), and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), and when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during operation confirmation mode, the detection signal is discarded without issuing an abnormality alert based on the detection of an illegal magnetism. In other words, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (mismatched) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, and if a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during operation check mode, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is ignored, and control in the operation check mode continues as if a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 had not been input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

In addition, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (mismatched) when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), and an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, a sensor or switch such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, or door frame open switch, which inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) during the game mode after the operation check mode has ended, the detection by the abnormality detection means will be disabled (it may not execute a process to check whether or not there is a detection, or it may execute a process to check whether or not there is a detection but not execute a process (such as an alert) based on the detection).

Specifically, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the combination of the divided game board 5A is deemed incompatible (mismatched) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game board 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the game mode after the operation check mode has ended, the detection signal is discarded without issuing an abnormality alert based on the detection of an illegal magnetism. In other words, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (mismatched) and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), and if a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the game mode after the operation check mode has ended, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is ignored, and control continues as if a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 had not been input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310.

In this way, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible (mismatched) when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible in the ID determination process (step S1003), no abnormality alert will be issued even if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, sensors or switches such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, door frame open switch, etc., which input a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310), regardless of whether the control is in the external terminal board output confirmation mode or the operation confirmation mode.

In other words, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible, gameplay may proceed in a manner not intended by the designer, potentially causing harm to the gaming establishment and players, and may even result in a loss of player trust due to deviations from the original specifications. Therefore, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is deemed incompatible, regardless of whether the game is controlled in the external terminal board output confirmation mode or the operation confirmation mode, a warning is issued in priority over a warning resulting from detection of an abnormality by the abnormality detection means (e.g., sensors and switches such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, and door frame open switch, which input a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310), thereby preventing gameplay and preventing harm to the gaming establishment and players.

In addition, some LEDs may be controlled to emit different light depending on the type of abnormality detection means, regardless of whether they are controlled to external terminal board output confirmation mode or operation confirmation mode. For example, when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, one or both of the LEDs on the function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display unit 2250 may be turned off (putting them in a state where light emission control is not possible).

Furthermore, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to periodically (for example, constantly determine each time the peripheral control unit normal processing is executed) determine whether the combination of the divided game boards 5A is compatible after power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the ID determination process may not be executed while the external terminal board output confirmation mode is being executed, and even if the ID determination process is executed while the external terminal board output confirmation mode is being executed and it is determined that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, no notification may be issued indicating that the right-side game board 5AR is in an incompatible state while the external terminal board output confirmation mode is being executed.

In addition, when the system is configured to periodically determine whether the combination of the split game boards 5A is compatible, if the ID determination process is performed before starting the external terminal board output confirmation mode or during the operation confirmation mode and it is determined that the combination of the split game boards 5A is incompatible, just as when it is determined whether the combination of the split game boards 5A is compatible only when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, during the operation confirmation mode, the performance display device 1600 will display a message indicating that the combination of the split game boards 5A is incompatible, while the various speakers and various LEDs of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) will not output a game board incompatible alarm sound or light up a serious abnormality alarm light-emitting mode to indicate that the combination of the split game boards 5A is incompatible, and when the operation confirmation mode ends and the game mode is entered, they may output a game board incompatible alarm sound and light up a serious abnormality alarm light-emitting mode to indicate that the combination of the split game boards 5A is incompatible.

Furthermore, even if the system is configured to periodically determine whether the combination of the divided game boards 5A is compatible, even if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, a sensor or switch such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, or door frame open switch, which inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) while the external terminal board output confirmation mode is being executed, the detection is invalid (it may not execute a process to check whether there is a detection, or it may execute a process to check whether there is a detection but not execute a process (such as an alert) based on the detection). Therefore, even after the external terminal board output confirmation mode is entered, an abnormality alert based on detection by the abnormality detection means during the external terminal board output confirmation mode may not be executed.

Furthermore, when the system is configured to periodically determine whether the combination of the divided game boards 5A is compatible, if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is determined to be incompatible during operation check mode and an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, a sensor or switch such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, ball out detection sensor 574, or door frame open switch, which inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310), the performance display device 1600, various speakers, and various LEDs on the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) may issue a notification that the combination of the divided game boards 5A is incompatible, taking priority over an alert that the abnormality detection means has detected the combination; and if the combination of the divided game boards 5A is determined to be compatible, an alert that the abnormality detection means has detected the combination may be issued.

[Pachinko machine confirmation mode when not connected]
Next, an example of behavior when controlling transition to the confirmation mode (external terminal board output confirmation mode, operation confirmation mode) of the pachinko machine 1 in an unconnected state (unconnected state) in which the right-side gaming panel 5AR is not electrically connected to the left-side gaming panel 5AL, such as when there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side gaming panel 5AR (the input of an ID code signal from the right-side gaming panel 5AR cannot be confirmed) and a malfunction such as a short circuit or disconnection occurs in the transmission path for transmitting various signals, will be described with reference to Fig. 344. Note that the following will only describe the cases of compatibility and incompatibility and the parts that differ from the above-mentioned embodiment, and will not provide redundant explanations.

As shown in FIG. 344, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side gaming board 5AR during the ID determination process (step S1003) executed by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, i.e., if the right-side gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected, a control signal from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is not input to the various LEDs and other electronic components mounted on the decorative board of the right-side gaming board 5AR, and therefore the electronic components mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR are in a non-driven state (for example, the various LEDs are turned off) regardless of whether the external terminal board output confirmation mode is in effect. Note that if it is determined during the ID determination process (step S1003) that there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side gaming board 5AR, it is also possible not to output a control signal from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 to the various LEDs and other electronic components mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR.

In addition, in this example, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the right-side gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected in the ID determination process (step S1003), the external terminal board 558 outputs an output confirmation signal to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall during execution of the external terminal board output confirmation mode or for a certain period of time after the external terminal board output confirmation mode has been activated, without outputting a non-connection error signal indicating that the right-side gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected. In other words, during the external terminal board output confirmation mode or for a certain period of time after the external terminal board output confirmation mode, the external terminal board 558 outputs an output confirmation signal, just as when compatible. This prevents a non-connection error signal from being sent from the external terminal board 558 to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall during the external terminal board output confirmation mode, which would interfere with the output confirmation signal confirmation process.

Furthermore, in this example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected, the external terminal board 558 does not output a non-connection error signal indicating that the right-side gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected to the hall computer installed in the amusement hall, even during the operation check mode. In other words, the output check signal output from the external terminal board 558 to the hall computer installed in the amusement hall in response to the start of the external terminal board output check mode is also output for a certain period after the external terminal board output check mode, i.e., for a certain period during the operation check mode. Therefore, if a non-connection error signal is output during the operation check mode, the non-connection error signal and the output check signal will overlap and be output from the external terminal board 558 to the hall computer installed in the amusement hall. In this case, it becomes difficult to determine whether the signal input to the hall computer is a non-connection error signal or an output check signal, which may make it difficult to determine whether the output to the external terminal board 558 is normal. For this reason, in this example, even during operation check mode, the external terminal board 558 is not outputting a non-connection error signal to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall, and it is possible to output a non-connection error signal after the operation check mode has finished. Note that if the right-side gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected, the external terminal board 558 may not output a non-connection error signal to the hall computer installed in the gaming hall, regardless of whether the operation check mode is in progress, and in this case, the pachinko machine 1 may notify the user that the right-side gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected.

In addition, in this example, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming panel 5AR, it is not notified that the right-side gaming panel 5AR is not electrically connected until the external terminal board output confirmation mode is terminated. In other words, while the external terminal board output confirmation mode is being executed, the performance display device 1600, various speakers, and various LEDs (some or all) of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) are controlled in the same manner as when the external terminal board output confirmation mode was executed at the time of adaptation (these may be completely identical, or almost all may be the same with only some differences).

When the external terminal board output confirmation mode ends, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the various speakers and the various LEDs (which may be some or all) of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) in the same manner as when the operation confirmation mode was executed during compatibility (they may be completely identical, or almost entirely identical with only some differences). Furthermore, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 not only displays the performance (normal) mode (decorative patterns, normal (playable) background image, etc.) on the performance display device 1600 as during compatibility, but also displays "Right side game board unconnected error" as an unconnection error notification display mode on the performance display device 1600 to notify the user that the right side game board 5AR is not electrically connected to the left side game board 5AL.

In other words, when the operation check mode is started, the LEDs (various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left gaming board 5AL, various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right gaming board 5AR, various LEDs of the door frame units (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450, etc. mounted on the door frame 3) are illuminated in a predetermined light-emitting pattern (in this example, this is only performed in the operation check mode and is not performed in the game presentation), except for the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 that displays information about winning or losing, which are controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 (this may be completely the same, or almost all may be the same with only some differences). It controls the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 to light up the LEDs in a predetermined operation mode (operation confirmation light emission mode that is not output during operation confirmation), drives drive motors and drive solenoids controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a on the peripheral control board 1510 to operate movable bodies (such as the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left-side game board 5AL, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and rear-right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, the rear-lower middle decorative body 3161 of the front-lower performance unit 3160, and the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3) in a predetermined operation mode (operation confirmation operation mode), and outputs operation confirmation alarm sounds from various speakers (in this example, alarm sounds that are output only in operation confirmation mode and are not output during game performance).

In addition, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected, if the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated during operation check mode, a special sound (such as a "beep") will be output at a predetermined volume in response to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 (this volume is different from the volume set in response to the operation of the volume adjustment button 227, and the volume does not change even when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated).

On the other hand, among the various LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, the LEDs excluding the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 that display information regarding winning or losing (various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left gaming board 5AL, various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right gaming board 5AR, various LEDs of the door frame units (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450, etc. mounted on the door frame 3), and drive motors and drive solenoids controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 The display device 1600, which drives the display device 1600 to check the operation of the movable bodies (such as the rear-upper movable decorative element 3210 of the rear-upper decorative element 3200 of the rear unit 3000 on the left-side gaming board 5AL, the rear-left movable decorative element 3301 and rear-right movable decorative element 3302 of the rear-lower decorative element 3300, and the rear-front-lower middle decorative element 3161 of the rear-front-lower decorative element 3160), various speakers, volume control button 227, and light intensity control button 228, displays the message "Right side gaming board unconnected error occurred" as an unconnected error notification display mode, thereby notifying the user that the right side gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected. This allows the user to be notified that the right side gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected without interfering with the confirmation process in operation check mode.

In this way, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected, during the operation confirmation mode, only a part of the performance display device 1600 displays "Right-side gaming board unconnected error occurred" as an unconnected error notification display mode, and the LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, except for the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 that display information regarding winning or losing (various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left-side gaming board 5AL, various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR, and the door frame unit (door frame left side unit 420 mounted on the door frame 3), are not displayed. , door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450, etc.), various movable bodies provided on the left gaming board 5AL (back-upper movable decorative body 3210 of the back-upper performance unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 provided on the left gaming board 5AL, back-left movable decorative body 3301 and back-right movable decorative body 3302 of the back-lower performance unit 3300, back-front lower middle decorative body 3161 of the back-front lower performance unit 3160, etc.), and various speakers are not controlled in a manner that notifies that the right gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected, but are controlled in the same manner as when the operation check mode is executed upon compatibility (which may be completely identical, or may be almost entirely identical with only some differences).

For this reason, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected, it is possible to check whether the movable body on the left-side gaming board 5AL is operating normally, and if an abnormality (not operating normally) is discovered, repairs can be made to return the movable body to its normal state, thereby enabling the movable body to perform the moving effect as designed, thereby preventing a decrease in the presentation effect. The LED mounted on the movable body is also controlled to emit light in an operation confirmation light-emitting mode without being controlled to an off state, preventing a situation where it becomes impossible to check whether the LED mounted on the movable body is capable of emitting light normally. If an abnormality (not emitting light normally) is found when checking whether the LED is capable of emitting light normally, repairs can be made to return the LED to its normal state, thereby enabling the LED to emit light as designed, thereby preventing a decrease in the presentation effect.

Furthermore, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected, the various LEDs controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, except for the LED of the sub-function display unit 2250 that displays information regarding winning or losing, are not controlled to emit light in a minor abnormality notification light-emitting mode that notifies that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected, but are controlled to emit light in an operation confirmation light-emitting mode. This prevents the inability to check whether the LEDs, excluding the LED of the sub-function display unit 2250 that displays information about the winnings and losses, are able to emit light normally, and if an abnormality (not emitting light normally) is found when checking whether the LEDs are able to emit light normally, repairs can be made to return them to a normal state so that they can emit light as designed, thereby preventing a decrease in the presentation effect and preventing the minor abnormality notification light-up mode, which lights up at high brightness, from making it difficult to see the operation of the movable body on the left-hand gaming board 5AL or the light emitted by the LED mounted on the movable body, which can hinder checking operations.

Furthermore, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected in the ID determination process (step S1003), an operation confirmation notification sound is output without outputting a game board unconnection notification sound, thereby preventing the inability to confirm whether the various speakers are able to output sound normally.If an abnormality (sound is not being output normally) is found after checking whether sound is able to be output normally, repairs can be made to return the speakers to a normal state, allowing sound to be output from the various speakers as designed, thereby preventing a reduction in the presentation effect. Furthermore, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected, a special sound is output when the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated, preventing a situation where it is not possible to confirm whether the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 is able to accept operation normally. If an abnormality (special sound is not being output) is discovered after checking whether operation is being accepted normally, repairs can be made to return the device to a normal state, allowing sounds to be output from the various speakers at the player's preferred volume, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game due to sounds being output from the various speakers at a volume that the player finds unpleasant.

In addition, in the operation check mode, not only is the operation check mode not performed for the drive motors and drive solenoids, etc., that are provided on the right-side gaming board 5AR and are determined to be in an unconnected state and are controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, but the operation check mode is also not performed for the drive motors and drive solenoids that operate the performance operation unit 301 that is provided on the door frame unit among the movable bodies that execute the operation check mode (such as the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the divided gaming board 5A, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear-right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, the rear-lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear-front-lower performance unit 3160, and the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3) and that are not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003).

Specifically, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming panel 5AR is not electrically connected, even if the operation check mode is started, the LED on the right-side gaming panel 5AR will not be controlled to light up in the operation check light-emitting mode or the movable body will not be controlled to operate in the operation check mode (a control signal will not be output to the right-side gaming panel 5AR), or this control will not be possible (a control signal will be output but not input to the right-side gaming panel 5AR). In addition, the drive motor or drive solenoid on the tray unit 200 (in this example, the performance operation unit 300) that is provided on the door frame 3 and is not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003) will not be driven to operate the performance operation unit 301 on the performance operation unit 300.

In other words, when the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, there is a risk that some or all of the movable bodies provided on the door frame unit that is not subject to ID determination will also have poor connections, and the control signal output from the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may be changed to a different signal from the original due to noise, etc., and input, causing the movable bodies to operate in an abnormal manner. Therefore, some or all of the movable bodies operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. provided on the door frame unit and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 that are not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003) are not driven, thereby preventing the movable bodies from operating in an operating mode different from the original, which could result in damage to the movable bodies or door frame unit, or failure of the drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. that operate the movable bodies. However, even in this case, LEDs provided on the door frame unit that are not subject to ID determination (for example, multiple LEDs 320a used to illuminate and decorate the upper part (unit upper cover 312) of the performance operation unit cover unit 310 of the performance operation unit 301 of the performance operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3) are controlled to emit light in a specified manner, just as when compatible. This makes it possible to determine that the operation check mode is being executed normally.

On the other hand, when the operation confirmation mode is initiated, the movable bodies (such as the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 of the left side of the divided game board 5AL, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear-right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, the rear-front-lower middle decorative body 3161 of the front-lower performance unit 3160, etc.) provided on the left side of the game board 5AL, which is placed on the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control IC 1510a that executes the ID determination process (step S1003) is implemented, operate in the same manner as normal (when the combination of the divided game board 5A is determined to be compatible) when the operation confirmation mode is initiated. In addition, the LEDs mounted on the boards provided on the movable bodies provided on the left side game board 5AL (such as the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left side game board 5AL of the divided game board 5A, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear-right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, and the rear-front-lower middle decorative body 3161 of the front-lower performance unit 3160) are controlled to emit light in an operation confirmation light-emitting mode. In other words, if the ID determination process (step S1003) determines that the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state, as in the normal case (when the combination of the divided gaming board 5A is determined to be compatible), the movable elements on the left-side gaming board 5AL (such as the rear-upper movable decorative element 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 on the left-side gaming board 5AL of the divided gaming board 5A, the rear-left movable decorative element 3301 and the rear-right movable decorative element 3302 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, and the rear-front-lower middle decorative element 3161 of the rear-front-lower performance unit 3160) are operated in an operation confirmation operating mode, and the LEDs on the movable elements on the left-side gaming board 5AL are controlled to emit light in an operation confirmation light-emitting mode. This makes it easy to identify the gaming board on which the peripheral control board 1510 of the divided gaming board 5A is installed (in this case, the left-side gaming board 5AL).

In addition, in this example, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected, no control is performed to drive the drive motor or drive solenoid mounted on the board provided in the performance operation unit 300 of the door frame unit (in this example, the tray unit 200) that is not the subject of ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003) to operate the performance operation unit 301, but the various LEDs mounted on the board provided in the performance operation unit 300 are controlled in the same manner as normal (when the combination of the divided game board 5A is determined to be compatible) during the operation confirmation mode. In other words, when the operation check mode is executed, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected, the various LEDs mounted on the board provided in the performance operation unit 300 are controlled to emit light in the operation check light-emitting mode, just as if the combination of the divided game board 5A was determined to be compatible.

In addition, if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected, the LEDs mounted on some of the multiple LEDs mounted on multiple boards provided on the door frame unit that are not subject to ID determination in the ID determination process (step S1003), or some of the multiple LEDs mounted on one board, may not be controlled to emit light in the operation confirmation light-emitting mode, and some movable bodies may not be operated in the operation confirmation operating mode (for example, some or all of the LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the door frame unit and the drive motors, drive solenoids, LEDs, etc. provided on the movable bodies provided on the door frame unit may not operate or be driven in the operation confirmation mode).

In addition, if it is determined in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the divided game board 5A is not connected, the right-side game board 5AR determined to be not connected and some or all of the movable bodies operated by drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. provided in door frame units not subject to ID determination and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 may not be driven until the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, regardless of whether it is in operation check mode, or until the combination of divided game boards 5A is determined to be compatible. In this case, it is possible to prevent the movable bodies from operating in a manner different from their intended operation, which could result in damage to the movable bodies or door frame unit, or failure of the drive motors, drive solenoids, etc. that operate the movable bodies.

In addition, when the external terminal board output confirmation mode ends (the LED's operation confirmation light-emitting mode ends and the light is turned off or turned on in a predetermined light-emitting mode, and the movable body's operation confirmation operation mode ends and the movable body enters a standby state (stopped (stored) in a predetermined standby position)), and the game mode begins, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the unconnection error notification display mode on the performance display device 1600, repeatedly outputs a game board unconnection notification sound (an announcement voice saying "The right-side game board is not connected" and a warning sound such as "ding dong") from various speakers at a volume adjusted by the volume adjustment button 227 until the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (the output may be stopped after being output repeatedly a certain number of times (e.g., 5 times) or for a certain period of time (e.g., 30 seconds)), and The various LEDs (some or all) of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) are repeatedly controlled to emit light in a serious abnormality alert mode (or in a semi-serious abnormality alert mode if the light is controlled to emit light in a semi-serious abnormality alert mode after the serious abnormality alert mode), and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the left-side game board 5AL are controlled to an off state, while the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 provided on the left-side game board 5AL and controlled by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and the LEDs of the sub-function display unit 2250 provided on the left-side game board 5AL and controlled by the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 are set to a state in which they can be controlled to emit light in the same way as when they were matched (they may be lit in a specified mode).

The game board unconnection alert sound is not a single alert sound (such as a "beep") that is output intermittently, but is made up of multiple sounds with different tones, and is further controlled to alternate between a mute state and an on state. Furthermore, the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode is not fixed to a lit state, but is controlled to alternate between a lit state and an off state to change the light intensity. In other words, the various speakers and LEDs dynamically change the tone, volume, light intensity, etc. over time to alert the player that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected to the left-side game board 5AL. This makes it easier to notice that the right-side game board 5AR is not electrically connected to the left-side game board 5AL when the operation check mode ends and a game mode that does not require confirmation is initiated.

In this way, in this example, when the system is controlled to transition to operation check mode in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming panel 5AR, the various speakers issue an abnormality alert in response to the right-side gaming panel 5AR being in a disconnected state, while the various LEDs (some or all) of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) issue an abnormality alert in response to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2. In other words, although abnormality alerts are issued for the various speakers, the various LEDs of the door frame units, and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side gaming panel 5AR, the underlying abnormalities are different (the various speakers issue an abnormality alert due to a disconnection, while the various LEDs of the door frame units and the various LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided on the right-side gaming panel 5AR issue an abnormality alert due to the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2).

In other words, if the right-side game board 5AR is not connected and the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2 during operation check mode, a game board unconnection alert sound is output from the various speakers, and light emission control is executed for the serious abnormality alert light mode caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2 (semi-serious abnormality alert light mode if the light emission control is switched to the semi-serious abnormality alert light mode after the serious abnormality alert light mode). While the volume of the game board unconnection alert sound output from the various speakers can be adjusted using the volume adjustment button 227, the light intensity cannot be adjusted using the light intensity adjustment button 228 for the serious abnormality alert light mode (including the semi-serious abnormality alert light mode if the light emission control is switched to the semi-serious abnormality alert light mode after the serious abnormality alert light mode) that is controlled by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2.

In this case, a scale corresponding to the light intensity (brightness) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the operation of the light intensity adjustment button 228, and even if the scale is changed by further operating the light intensity adjustment button 228, the light intensity (brightness) of the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode (including the quasi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode when the light is controlled to the quasi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode after the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode) does not change. On the other hand, the minor abnormality light-emitting mode, which is executed after the light-emitting control of the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode (including the quasi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode when the light is controlled to the quasi-serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode after the serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode) has ended, in response to the right-side game board 5AR being in an unconnected state, is controlled to emit light at the light intensity (brightness) changed in response to the operation of the light intensity adjustment button 228. In this example, when the operation check mode is executed with the right-side game board 5AR not connected, if the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2 when the operation check mode ends and the game mode starts and the light emission is controlled to the serious abnormality alert light mode (semi-serious abnormality alert light mode if the light emission is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality alert light mode after the serious abnormality alert light mode), then during the light emission control of the serious abnormality alert light mode (semi-serious abnormality alert light mode if the light emission is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality alert light mode after the serious abnormality alert light mode), the light intensity (brightness) of the light emission mode that is controlled to emit light after the end of the serious abnormality alert light mode (semi-serious abnormality alert light mode if the light emission is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality alert light mode after the serious abnormality alert light mode) can be adjusted. This prevents players from being deprived of an opportunity to adjust the light intensity (brightness) in situations where they can start playing, even if the light is controlled to the serious abnormality alert light mode (if the light is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality alert light mode after the serious abnormality alert light mode), and prevents a decline in interest in playing.

In addition, if the period from closing the main frame 4, which was open relative to the outer frame 2, to ending the serious abnormality alert light mode (or the semi-serious abnormality alert light mode if the light is controlled to the semi-serious abnormality alert light mode after the serious abnormality alert light mode) is set shorter than the period from starting the operation check mode to ending the operation check mode, if the main frame 4 is closed after the external terminal board output check mode has ended and the main frame 4 remains closed thereafter, the door frame unit (the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, and dish unit 440 provided on the door frame 3) will not be affected by the light. The various LEDs (some or all of which may be used) of the right-side game board 5AR (such as the main frame 200 and door frame top unit 450) are not controlled to emit light in a manner that indicates a serious abnormality caused by the main frame 4 being opened relative to the outer frame 2, but are controlled to emit light in a manner that indicates a minor abnormality in response to the fact that the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state immediately when the operation check mode ends and the game mode begins, so that the LED light emission can immediately notify the user that the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state when the operation check mode ends and the game mode begins.

In addition, in this example, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR, and the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, the timing of light emission control in the minor abnormality alert light emission mode corresponding to the right-side game board 5AR being in an unconnected state and the timing of output of the game board unconnected alert sound differ depending on whether or not control is made to transition to external terminal board output confirmation mode or whether or not control is made to transition to operation confirmation mode.

Specifically, when transition control is not performed to either the external terminal board output check mode or the operation check mode, if there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR and the game board is in an unconnected state, the effect display device 1600 will display "power on" for a predetermined period of time based on the start of power supply to the pachinko machine 1, and then the various LEDs (some or all of which may be LEDs) of the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) will start to emit light in a minor abnormality alert light-emitting mode, and the various speakers will start to output a game board unconnected alert sound.

On the other hand, when executing either the external terminal board output check mode or the operation check mode, if there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR and the game board is in an unconnected state, the light emission control in the minor abnormality notification light emission mode and the output of the game board unconnected alert sound from the various speakers due to the fact that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR will not be initiated during the external terminal board output check mode or operation check mode, but after the operation check mode, the light emission control in the minor abnormality notification light emission mode and the output of the game board unconnected alert sound from the various speakers due to the fact that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR and the game board is in an unconnected state will be initiated.

In this way, even if the pachinko machine 1 is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal being input from the right-side game board 5AR when power supply to the machine is started and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal being input, by varying the timing of the light emission control in the minor abnormality notification light emission mode and the timing of the output of the game board unconnected notification sound depending on whether or not to control the transition to the external terminal board output confirmation mode or whether or not to control the transition to the operation confirmation mode, it is possible to prioritize the notification of information of higher importance and prevent malfunctions and fraudulent behavior from occurring. In other words, if the output to the external terminal board 558 is not normal, the hall computer may not be able to detect fraudulent activity even if it is taking place, which could result in damage to the gaming parlor, and if there is an abnormality in the devices installed in the pachinko machine 1, there is a risk that the pachinko machine 1 may be damaged. Therefore, by giving priority to reporting this rather than a mismatch (inconsistency) in the combination of the divided game board 5A, it is possible to prevent the damage from spreading and damage to the pachinko machine 1 from occurring.

When power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal being input, and if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal being input, the timing at which the effect display device 1600 displays "Right-side gaming panel unconnected error" as an unconnection error notification display mode is the same regardless of whether or not control is exercised to transition to the external terminal board output confirmation mode, or whether or not control is exercised to transition to the operation confirmation mode. In other words, the effect display device 1600 displays "Right-side gaming panel unconnected error" as an unconnection error notification display mode when the operation confirmation mode is started. This allows priority to be given to notifications of higher importance, while the effect display device 1600 can also notify and handle other notifications. Furthermore, the timing of the display of "Right side game board unconnection error occurred" as an unconnection error notification display mode on the effect display device 1600 may differ depending on whether or not control is exercised to transition to external terminal board output check mode, or whether or not control is exercised to transition to operation check mode. In this case, information of increasing importance can be notified in order and dealt with in sequence, ensuring that each piece of information is reliably conveyed and dealt with.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 begins, the machine is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal being input from the right-side gaming panel 5AR, and if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state, even if there is a detection by an abnormality detection means (for example, a sensor or switch such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, or door frame open switch, which inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) while the external terminal board output confirmation mode is being executed, the detection is invalid (it may be that no process is executed to check whether or not there is a detection, or it may be that a process is executed to check whether or not there is a detection but no process (such as an alert) based on the detection is executed).

Specifically, even if an illicit magnetic field is generated during execution of the external terminal board output confirmation mode and a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the detection signal is discarded without issuing an abnormality alert based on the detection of the illicit magnetic field. In other words, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming board 5AR and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state, and if a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during execution of the external terminal board output confirmation mode, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is ignored, and control is executed as if no detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 was input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 after the external terminal board output confirmation mode ends.

In addition, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, there is no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming panel 5AR, indicating an unconnected state, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state, and an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, sensors or switches that input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, door frame open switch, etc.) during operation check mode, that is, when an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means during operation check mode, the detection by the abnormality detection means is valid, but some abnormality alerts are not issued while the power-on operation check is being executed, and are issued after the operation check mode ends.

Specifically, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state, and a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during operation check mode, the various LEDs of the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) are not controlled to emit light in a serious abnormality alert light mode due to the detection of an illegal magnetism, and magnetic detection alert sounds (e.g., "Magnetic detection error occurred.") are not repeatedly output from the various speakers.

When the operation check mode ends, the various LEDs on the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, dish unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) are controlled to emit light in a major abnormality alert light mode due to the detection of unauthorized magnetism, and a magnetic detection alert sound is output from the various speakers. The abnormality alert due to the detection of unauthorized magnetism is configured to end when a predetermined period of time has passed since the detection of the unauthorized magnetism. When the abnormality alert due to the detection of unauthorized magnetism ends, if no other abnormalities have been detected, the various LEDs on the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, dish unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) are controlled to emit light in a minor abnormality alert light mode due to the right-side game board 5AR being unconnected, and a game board unconnection alert sound is repeatedly output from the various speakers.

In this way, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state, and when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during operation check mode, the various LEDs and speakers of the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) continue to be controlled as if no detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 has been input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and an abnormality alert is issued due to the detection of an unauthorized magnetism based on the end of the operation check mode.

In other words, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 begins, if the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal being input and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state, and if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (e.g., a sensor or switch that inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, ball out detection sensor 574, door frame open switch, etc.) during the operation check mode, an abnormality notification resulting from detection by the abnormality detection means will be given priority over an alarm resulting from the right-side gaming board 5AR being in an unconnected state with no ID code signal being input after the operation check mode ends.

In other words, while there is little risk of incurring a disadvantage even if fraudulent behavior is committed in operation check mode, because game mode begins immediately after operation check mode ends, there is a possibility of similar fraudulent behavior being committed in game mode. On the other hand, if there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR and the game is in an unconnected state, there is less likelihood of incurring a disadvantage than if the game was fraudulent. Therefore, if both detection by the abnormality detection means and an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR occur during operation check mode, the occurrence of a disadvantage is suppressed by prioritizing the issuance of a notification due to detection by the abnormality detection means after operation check mode ends (or, in some cases, during operation check mode).

In addition, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, and a detection signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 of the abnormality detection means (e.g., magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, ball out detection sensor 574, door frame open switch, etc.) during the operation confirmation mode, When an error is detected by the sensors and switches (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3), an error is reported from the various LEDs and speakers on the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) when the operation check mode ends, but the performance display device 1600 is configured to report an error (for example, display "magnetic error occurred" as a magnetic detection error reporting mode) when an error is detected by the error detection means.

In other words, when a detection signal from the abnormality detection means is input to the main control board 1310 (or when the value of the magnet goto counter reaches its upper limit), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sends a command to the peripheral control board 1510 to start an abnormality alert (for example, a magnet goto alert command classified as an alert display indicating that radio wave irradiation goto is occurring), and when the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 receives the command to start the abnormality alert (magnet goto alert command), it starts control related to the abnormality alert. In addition, even if an abnormality alert due to detection by the abnormality detection means is displayed on the performance display device 1600, an abnormality alert due to the right-side game board 5AR being in an unconnected state (unconnected error alert display mode) is displayed on the performance display device 1600. In other words, when both detection by the abnormality detection means and the right-side game board 5AR being in an unconnected state occur simultaneously, an abnormality alert reporting the respective abnormalities is displayed on the performance display device 1600.

Note that, as abnormality detection means, sensors and switches that input detection signals to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, and door frame open switch, have been shown. However, for some sensors and switches, even if a detection signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during operation check mode or after the external terminal board output check mode has ended (including during operation check mode and game mode), no abnormality notification may be sent to the performance display device 1600. Alternatively, for all sensors and switches, even if a detection signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during operation check mode or after the external terminal board output check mode has ended (including during operation check mode and game mode), no abnormality notification may be sent to the performance display device 1600.

Furthermore, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, there is no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming panel 5AR, indicating an unconnected state, and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state. If an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (e.g., magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, door frame open switch, or other sensor or switch that inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) during the game mode after the operation check mode has ended, i.e., when an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means during the game mode, the detection by the abnormality detection means is still valid. However, unlike when an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means during the operation check mode, an abnormality alert is issued at the time the abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means.

Specifically, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, there is no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming panel 5AR, and the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming panel 5AR is in an unconnected state, and when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 1050 is input to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during game mode after the operation check mode has ended, an abnormality alert due to detection by the abnormality detection means is issued by the effect display device 1600 and the various LEDs and speakers of the door frame units (door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, door frame top unit 450, etc. provided on the door frame 3).

In other words, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, if the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal being input and the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 determines in the ID determination process (step S1003) that the right-side gaming board 5AR is in an unconnected state, and if a detection signal is input from an abnormality detection means (e.g., a sensor or switch that inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, ball out detection sensor 574, door frame open switch, etc.) to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 during the game mode after the operation check mode has ended, then an abnormality alert resulting from detection by the abnormality detection means will be given priority over an alert resulting from the right-side gaming board 5AR being in an unconnected state with no ID code signal being input.

Therefore, in a game mode where there is a high probability of disadvantages occurring if fraudulent activity is committed, if both a detection by the abnormality detection means and an unconnected state where no ID code signal is input from the right-side gaming panel 5AR occur, the occurrence of disadvantages can be prevented by giving priority to the notification resulting from the detection by the abnormality detection means.

Furthermore, even if the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 is configured to periodically (for example, each time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed) execute an ID determination process to determine whether the combination of the divided game boards 5A is compatible after power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the ID determination process may not be executed while the external terminal board output confirmation mode is being executed, and even if the ID determination process is executed while the external terminal board output confirmation mode is being executed and it is determined that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR and that the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state, no notification may be issued indicating that the right-side game board 5AR is in an unconnected state while the external terminal board output confirmation mode is being executed.

In addition, when periodically executing an ID determination process to determine whether the combination of the split game board 5A is compatible, a notification (game board unconnected notification sound, unconnection error notification display mode, minor abnormality notification light emission mode, etc.) may be initiated based on a determination that the right game board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right game board 5AR, and then the notification may be terminated based on a determination that the combination of the split game board 5A is compatible, or a notification may be initiated based on a determination that the right game board 5AR is in an unconnected state with no ID code signal input from the right game board 5AR after the ID determination process determines that the combination of the split game board 5A is compatible.

In addition, if the system is configured to periodically determine whether the combination of the split game board 5A is compatible, when the ID determination process is performed before starting the external terminal board output confirmation mode or during the operation confirmation mode and it is determined that there is no ID code signal input from the right game board 5AR and that the game is in an unconnected state, the performance display device 1600 will display a message indicating that there is no ID code signal input from the right game board 5AR and that the game is in an unconnected state, just as when it is determined whether the combination of the split game board 5A is compatible only when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, while various spin The various LEDs on the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) may not emit a game board unconnection alert sound or light up in a minor abnormality alert light mode to alert that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR and that there is an unconnected state, but may instead emit a game board unconnection alert sound and light up in a minor abnormality alert light mode to alert that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side game board 5AR and that there is an unconnected state when the operation check mode ends and the game mode is entered.

Furthermore, even if the system is configured to periodically determine whether the combination of the divided game boards 5A is compatible, even if an abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means (for example, a sensor or switch such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, or door frame open switch, which inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) while the external terminal board output confirmation mode is being executed, the detection is invalid (it may not execute a process to check whether there is a detection, or it may execute a process to check whether there is a detection but not execute a process (such as an alert) based on the detection). Therefore, even after the external terminal board output confirmation mode is entered, an abnormality alert based on detection by the abnormality detection means during the external terminal board output confirmation mode may not be executed.

In addition, when the system is configured to periodically determine whether the combination of the split game boards 5A is compatible, if the right game board 5AR is disconnected during operation check mode and an abnormality is detected by an abnormality detection means (e.g., a sensor or switch such as a magnetic sensor 1050, a vibration sensor, a full tank detection sensor 154, a ball out detection sensor 574, or a door frame opening switch, which inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310), the display device 1600 will notify both the unconnected state with no input of an ID code signal from the right game board 5AR and the fact that an abnormality has been detected by the abnormality detection means during operation check mode. On the other hand, the various speakers and the various LEDs on the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) may not notify that there is no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming board 5AR and that there has been detection by the abnormality detection means, and when the operation check mode ends and the game mode is entered, notifications of detection by the abnormality detection means in the various speakers and door frame units may be given priority over notifications of there being no ID code signal input from the right-side gaming board 5AR and that there is no connection.

In the above example, if the "first confirmation mode transition condition" is met within a predetermined period of time after power supply to the pachinko machine 1 starts, the mode is controlled to transition to the external terminal board output confirmation mode, and if the "second confirmation mode transition condition" is met within a predetermined period of time after power supply to the pachinko machine 1 starts, the mode is controlled to transition to the operation confirmation mode. However, for example, it is also possible to control the mode to transition to the external terminal board output confirmation mode if the "first confirmation mode transition condition" is met within a predetermined period of time after power supply to the pachinko machine 1 starts, such as during standby (demo) when the function display unit 1400 has not displayed the changing special symbols for a predetermined period of time, and to control the mode to transition to the operation confirmation mode if the "second confirmation mode transition condition" is met within a predetermined period of time after power supply to the pachinko machine 1 starts.

In addition, in the above example, a new operation confirmation switch 1310j was provided, and the "first confirmation mode transition condition" and "second confirmation mode transition condition" required the operation of the operation confirmation switch 1310j. However, the operation confirmation switch 1310j may not be provided, and the RAM clear switch 1310f may be used instead. In this case, the RAM clear switch 1310f may be placed on the main control board 1310, or on the dispensing control board 633 or power supply board 630. Furthermore, if the operation confirmation switch 1310j is not provided and is configured to be replaced by the RAM clear switch 1310f, the ``condition for allowing setting value change'' and the ``condition for transitioning to the first confirmation mode'' are the same condition, and the ``condition for executing the process (step S38) of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area'' and the ``condition for transitioning to the second confirmation mode'' are the same condition.In this case, when the setting change process is executed, the external terminal board output confirmation mode may also be executed, and when the process (step S38) of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area is executed, the operation confirmation mode may also be executed. Furthermore, in this case, the same control as the example of behavior when changing the setting value in a state where the right-side gaming board 5AR is not electrically connected to the left-side gaming board 5AL, such as when the combination of the divided gaming boards 5A is incompatible or when there is no input of an ID code signal from the right-side gaming board 5AR and a malfunction such as a short circuit or break in the transmission path for transmitting various signals, may be executed in the external terminal board output confirmation mode, and the process of clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area after the setting change process (step S38) and the same control as the example of behavior when checking operation at power-on may be executed in the operation confirmation mode.

Furthermore, the output signals, light emission modes, display modes, sound output modes, etc. shown in the above-described multiple embodiments are merely examples, and the output signals, light emission modes, display modes, sound output modes, etc. are not limited to those described above as long as they do not deviate from the technical concept of the present invention (for example, the output period, output timing, etc. are similar). For example, while the above-described example shows an output confirmation signal being output when the external terminal board output confirmation mode is initiated, other signals may also be output. For example, if the external terminal board output confirmation mode is also executed when a setting change process is executed, a signal indicating that the setting change process has been executed may be output.

[Summary 1]
a game frame side component having an outer frame (e.g., outer frame 2), a main body frame (e.g., main body frame 4) provided on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame (e.g., door frame 3) provided on the main body frame so as to be openable and closable;
A game board side component (for example, a divided game board 5A) that is detachably provided on the game frame side component;
A mode output means capable of outputting a predetermined mode (for example, a combination of any one or more (may be all) of various speakers, performance display devices 1600, various LEDs, etc.);
A mode control means (e.g., a peripheral control IC 1510a) for controlling the mode output means;
a first operating means (for example, an operation confirmation switch 1310j) provided on the rear side of the gaming machine and inoperable by a player;
A second operating means (for example, a performance operating section 301 of the performance operating unit 300, a volume control switch, a light intensity control switch, etc.) that is provided on the front side of the gaming machine and can be operated by a player;
A gaming machine comprising:
The device further includes a special state generating means (a portion that executes control of the operation check mode by the peripheral control IC 1510a) capable of generating a predetermined special state in response to a special operation on the first operating means,
The game board side component has a first game board side component (e.g., a left game board 5AL) and a second game board side component (e.g., a right game board 5AR) that are individually fixed to the game frame side component,
The mode control means
When the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected, the mode output means can output a notification mode,
outputting a special mode in response to the second operating means being operated during the special state;
When the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected during the special state, the mode output means suppresses and outputs the notification mode.
It is characterized by:
By configuring in this manner, it is possible to check whether or not the operation of the second operating means is valid during a special state, and it is possible to determine that the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected without interfering with the work of checking whether or not the operation of the second operating means is valid, so that the game can be played without any problems, preventing a decline in interest in the game and preventing any disadvantage to the player or the game parlor.

The mode control means may also be capable of outputting the special mode (such as a special sound from various speakers, a special mode of the performance display device 1600, or changing the light color of various LEDs) only during the special state. By configuring it in this way, it becomes easy to determine that the operation of the second operating means is valid when a special mode is output during a special state. In other words, since the special mode can be found without being confused with other modes executed during variable performances, etc., it becomes easy to determine that the operation of the second operating means is valid.

The mode output means may also include a display means (e.g., the effect display device 1600) and a sound output means (e.g., various speakers) or a light-emitting means (e.g., various LEDs), and when the first game board component and the second game board component are not electrically connected during the special state, the display means may display a notification mode, while the sound output means and light-emitting means may output a special mode without outputting a notification mode. This configuration allows the various sound output means and light-emitting means that would interfere with the confirmation work in a special state to output a special mode without outputting a notification mode, and only the display means that does not interfere with the confirmation work in a special state to display a notification mode, thereby reducing errors in the confirmation work.

The special state may also be configured to end automatically (without any special operation) after a certain period of time has elapsed. This configuration eliminates the need for unnecessary operations such as ending the special state, reducing the effort required for confirmation work in gaming centers with multiple gaming machines and shortening the time required for confirmation work.

[Summary 2]
a game frame side component having an outer frame (e.g., outer frame 2), a main body frame (e.g., main body frame 4) provided on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame (e.g., door frame 3) provided on the main body frame so as to be openable and closable;
A game board side component (for example, a divided game board 5A) that is detachably provided on the game frame side component;
a light-emitting unit (e.g., various LEDs) capable of emitting light in a predetermined light-emitting mode;
a light emission control means (e.g., a peripheral control IC 1510a) for controlling the light emission of the light emitting unit;
A special light-emitting state generating means (for example, a part that controls the operation check mode using the peripheral control IC 1510a) that can generate a special light-emitting state based on a predetermined special operation;
A gaming machine comprising:
The game board side component has a first game board side component (e.g., a left game board 5AL) and a second game board side component (e.g., a right game board 5AR) that are individually fixed to the game frame side component,
The light emission control means
When the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected, the light emitting unit can be made to emit light in an alert light emitting mode (for example, a minor abnormality alert light emitting mode),
During the special light-emitting state, the light-emitting unit emits light in a special mode (for example, an operation confirmation light-emitting mode),
During the special light-emitting state, even if the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected, the light-emitting unit can be made to emit light in the special mode without being made to emit light in the notification light-emitting mode.
It is characterized by:
By configuring it in this way, it is possible to check whether the light emitting section can light up normally during the special light emitting state, so that the game can be played without any problems and a decline in interest in the game can be prevented.

The light emission control means may also be capable of emitting light in the special mode only during the special light emission state. By configuring it in this way, it becomes easy to determine that the light emission unit can light up normally when it emits light in the special mode during the special light emission state. In other words, since the special mode can be found without being confused with other light emission modes executed during variable effects, etc., it becomes easy to determine that the light emission unit can light up normally.

The device may also include a display means (e.g., effect display device 1600), and if the first game board component and the second game board component are not electrically connected during the special light-emitting state, the display means may display a notification mode, and the light-emitting unit may emit light in the notification light-emitting mode after the special light-emitting state is entered. This configuration allows the light-emitting unit that would interfere with the confirmation process during the special light-emitting state to emit light in a special mode without emitting light in the notification light-emitting mode, and only displays the notification mode on the display means that does not interfere with the confirmation process during the special light-emitting state, thereby reducing errors in the confirmation process. Furthermore, after the special light-emitting state, in addition to displaying the notification mode on the display means, the light-emitting unit may emit light in the notification light-emitting mode, making it easy to recognize that the first game board component and the second game board component are not electrically connected.

The special light-emitting state may also be configured to end automatically (without any special operation) after a certain period of time has elapsed. This configuration eliminates the need for unnecessary operations such as ending the special light-emitting state, reducing the effort required for confirmation work in gaming parlors where multiple pachinko machines 1 are installed and shortening the time required for confirmation work.

The pachinko machine 1 may also have an operation unit (operation confirmation switch 1310j) located on the rear side of the machine that can accept specified operations, and the special light-emitting state may be triggered in response to an operation on the operation unit. By configuring the machine in this way, the special light-emitting state can be triggered when an operation unit located on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 that is difficult for a player to operate is operated, thereby preventing the special light-emitting state from being triggered unnecessarily.

[Summary 3]
a game frame side component having an outer frame (e.g., outer frame 2), a main body frame (e.g., main body frame 4) provided on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame (e.g., door frame 3) provided on the main body frame so as to be openable and closable;
A game board side component (for example, a divided game board 5A) that is detachably provided on the game frame side component;
a sound output unit (for example, various speakers) capable of outputting a predetermined sound format;
a sound output control means (e.g., a peripheral control IC 1510a) for controlling the sound output of the sound output unit;
A special sound output state generating means (for example, a part that executes control of the operation check mode by the peripheral control IC 1510a) that can generate a special sound output state based on a predetermined special operation;
A gaming machine comprising:
The game board side component has a first game board side component (e.g., a left game board 5AL) and a second game board side component (e.g., a right game board 5AR) that are individually fixed to the game frame side component,
The sound output control means
When the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected, the sound output unit can output a notification sound output mode (for example, a game board unconnection notification sound),
outputting a special sound (e.g., a special sound) from the sound output unit during the special sound output state;
During the special sound output state, even if the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected, the special sound can be output without outputting the notification sound output mode from the sound output unit.
Features By configuring it in this way, it is possible to check whether the sound output unit is able to output sound normally during the special sound output state, so that the game can be played without any problems and a decline in interest in the game can be prevented.

The sound output control means may also be capable of outputting the special sound only during the special sound output state. This configuration makes it easy to determine that the sound output unit is capable of normal sound output when a special sound is output during the special sound output state. In other words, the special sound can be distinguished without being confused with other sound output modes executed during variable effects, etc., making it easy to determine that the sound output unit is capable of normal sound output.

The device may also be provided with a display means (e.g., effect display device 1600), and if the first game board component and the second game board component are not electrically connected during the special sound output state, the display means may display an alert mode, and the sound output unit may output an alert sound output mode after the special sound output state is entered. This configuration allows the sound output unit's output, which would interfere with the confirmation process during the special sound output state, to be output as a special sound without being output in the alert sound output mode, and only the alert mode is displayed on the display means that does not interfere with the confirmation process during the special sound output state, thereby reducing errors in the confirmation process. Furthermore, after the special sound output state is entered, the display means not only displays the alert mode, but also causes the sound output unit to output in the alert sound output mode, making it easy to recognize that the first game board component and the second game board component are not electrically connected.

The special sound output state may also be configured to end automatically (without any special operation) after a certain period of time has elapsed. This configuration eliminates the need for unnecessary operations such as ending the special sound output state, reducing the effort required for confirmation work in gaming parlors where multiple pachinko machines 1 are installed and shortening the time required for confirmation work.

The pachinko machine 1 may also have an operation unit (operation confirmation switch 1310j) located on the rear side of the machine that can accept specified operations, and the special sound output state may be triggered in response to an operation on the operation unit. By configuring the machine in this way, the special sound output state can be triggered when an operation unit located on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 that is difficult for a player to operate is operated, thereby preventing the special sound output state from being triggered unnecessarily.

[Summary 4]
a game frame side component having an outer frame (e.g., outer frame 2), a main body frame (e.g., main body frame 4) provided on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame (e.g., door frame 3) provided on the main body frame so as to be openable and closable;
A game board side component (for example, a divided game board 5A) that is detachably provided on the game frame side component;
A movable part that can operate in a predetermined operating mode (for example, a movable body provided on the left gaming board 5AL (such as the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 of the rear-upper performance unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 provided on the left gaming board 5AL of the divided gaming board 5A, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear-right movable decorative body 3302 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300, the rear-front-lower middle decorative body 3161 of the rear-front-lower performance unit 3160, etc.)),
A movable control means for controlling the movable part (for example, a part for controlling the movable body provided on the left game board 5AL of the peripheral control IC 1510a),
a light-emitting unit (e.g., various LEDs) capable of emitting light in a predetermined light-emitting mode;
A light emission control means for controlling the light emission of the light emitting unit (for example, a part for controlling the light emission of various LEDs of the peripheral control IC 1510a),
A special operating state generating means (for example, a part that controls the operation check mode using the peripheral control IC 1510a) that can generate a special operating state based on a predetermined special operation;
A gaming machine comprising:
The game board side component has a first game board side component (e.g., a left game board 5AL) and a second game board side component (e.g., a right game board 5AR) that are individually fixed to the game frame side component,
The light emission control means
When the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected, the light emitting unit can be made to emit light in an alert light emitting mode (for example, a minor abnormality alert light emitting mode),
The movable control means is
During the special movable state, the movable unit is operated in a special movable mode (for example, an operation confirmation operation mode),
During the special movable state, even if the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected, the light emitting unit is not caused to emit light in the notification light emitting mode.
It is characterized by:
By configuring it in this way, it is possible to check whether the movable part is able to move normally during the special movable state, so that the game can be played without any problems and a decline in interest in the game can be prevented.

Furthermore, the movement control means may be capable of causing the moving part to operate in a special moving mode only during the special moving state. By configuring it in this way, it becomes easy to determine that the moving part is able to move normally when it operates in a special moving mode during the special moving state. In other words, since the special moving mode can be found without being confused with other moving modes executed during a variation performance, etc., it becomes easy to determine that the moving part is able to move normally.

The device may also be provided with a display means (e.g., performance display device 1600), and if the first game board component and the second game board component are not electrically connected during the special movement state, the display means may display a notification mode, and the light-emitting unit may emit light in the notification light-emitting mode after the special movement state is entered. This configuration prevents the light-emitting unit from emitting light in the notification light-emitting mode that would interfere with the confirmation process during the special movement state. Instead, the display means only displays the notification mode in a way that does not interfere with the confirmation process during the special movement state, and the light-emitting unit emits light in the notification light-emitting mode after the special movement state is entered. This reduces mistakes in the confirmation process, and after the special movement state, in addition to displaying the notification mode on the display means, the light-emitting unit emits light in the notification light-emitting mode, making it easy to recognize that the first game board component and the second game board component are not electrically connected.

The special operating state may also be configured to end automatically (without any special operation) after a certain period of time has elapsed. This configuration eliminates the need for unnecessary operations such as terminating the special operating state, reducing the effort required for confirmation work in gaming parlors where multiple pachinko machines 1 are installed and shortening the time required for confirmation work.

The pachinko machine 1 may also have an operation unit (operation confirmation switch 1310j) located on the rear side of the machine that can accept specified operations, and the special movable state may be triggered in response to an operation on the operation unit. By configuring the machine in this way, the special movable state can be triggered when an operation unit located on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 that is difficult for a player to operate is operated, thereby preventing the special movable state from being triggered unnecessarily.

[Summary 5]
a game frame side component having an outer frame (e.g., outer frame 2), a main body frame (e.g., main body frame 4) provided on the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame (e.g., door frame 3) provided on the main body frame so as to be openable and closable;
A game board side component (for example, a divided game board 5A) that is detachably provided on the game frame side component;
An information output means capable of outputting information about the gaming machine to the outside of the gaming machine (for example, a part that outputs information about the gaming machine, such as the number of gaming balls B actually paid out by the payout control MPU, from an external terminal board 558 to a hall computer installed on the gaming hall side);
A special state generating means (for example, a part that executes control of the external terminal board output confirmation mode of the dispensing control MPU) that can generate a special state based on a predetermined special operation;
A gaming machine comprising:
The game board side component has a first game board side component (e.g., a left game board 5AL) and a second game board side component (e.g., a right game board 5AR) that are individually fixed to the game frame side component,
The information output means
It is possible to output special information (e.g., an output confirmation signal) during the special state;
At least during the special state, even if the first game board side component and the second game board side component are not electrically connected, the special information is output without outputting information indicating the non-connection to the outside of the gaming machine.
It is characterized by:
By configuring it in this manner, it is possible to confirm whether information about the gaming machine can be output normally from the information output means during a special state, and information about the gaming machine, such as fraudulent activities, can be collected by the hall computer, etc., thereby improving the security of the pachinko machine 1 and increasing the deterrent effect against fraudulent activities.

The information output means may be capable of outputting the special information only during the special state.
By configuring in this way, when special information is output during a special state, it becomes easy to determine whether the information output means is able to normally output information about the gaming machine. In other words, since the special information can be confirmed without being confused with other information executed during variable presentations, etc., it becomes easy to determine whether the information output means is able to normally output information about the gaming machine.

Furthermore, the information output means may be configured to continue outputting the special information for a predetermined period of time even after the special state has ended, without outputting the information indicating the disconnection to an external device. This configuration makes it possible to check the special information even if the special state has ended in a short period of time.

a launching means (e.g., a ball launching device 540) capable of launching game balls based on a predetermined operation;
Further provided is a firing control means (for example, a firing control unit 633b of the dispensing control board 633) for controlling the firing means,
The launch control means does not launch game balls even if the operation is performed during the special state.
It is characterized by:
By configuring in this manner, it is possible to prevent information about the gaming machine caused by the launch of a gaming ball during a special state from being output from the information output means, making it difficult to determine whether or not special information is being output.

An entrance (e.g., a first starting entrance 2002, a second starting entrance 2004, etc.) capable of receiving game balls;
A lottery means (a part that executes the winning determination process (step S305) of the main control MPU 1310a) that performs a lottery based on the reception of a game ball into the ball entrance;
and a game control means (a part that executes special symbol process processing of the main control MPU 1310a) that controls the progress of the game based on the lottery result of the lottery means.
The game control means stops the progress of the game during the special state regardless of whether a game ball is received in the ball entrance.
It is characterized by:
By configuring in this manner, the game does not proceed even if a game ball enters the ball entrance during a special state, so it is possible to prevent information different from special information from being output during a special state, and when special information is output, it becomes easy to determine that the information output means can normally output information about the game machine.

The pachinko machine 1 may also have an operation unit (operation confirmation switch 1310j) located on the rear side of the machine that can accept specified operations, and the special state may be triggered in response to an operation on the operation unit. By configuring the machine in this way, a special state can be triggered when an operation unit located on the rear side of the machine 1 that is difficult for a player to operate is operated, thereby preventing unnecessary special states from being triggered.

[Delay in the start of specific effects]
Next, a modified example will be described in which the start timing of a specific effect performed by the effect display device 1600 or the like can be delayed by a player's operation. Figure 345 is a time chart showing the start timing of a specific effect. Note that only the differences from the above embodiment will be explained below, and redundant explanations will not be provided.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 345(A), the pachinko machine 1 establishes the conditions for starting a special effect when a preset period T1 has elapsed after the start of the variable symbol display, and the special effect begins based on the establishment of these conditions. In other words, when a variable symbol pattern command instructing the start of variable symbol display is received, a timer is started to measure the period from the reception of the variable symbol pattern command. When this measured period reaches the preset period T1, it is determined that the conditions for starting the special effect have been established, and the special effect begins. For example, as shown in FIG. 345(A), after the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variable symbol pattern command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to instruct the start of a variable symbol display, the effect display device 1600 begins a variable symbol display, such as the variable decorative symbol display (t1), and when the preset period T1 has elapsed (t2), the timer begins measuring and the special effect is executed for a set period T2.

The special effect ends after a set period of time T2 (t3). Alternatively, a timer can be started after the special effect is executed, and the special effect can be restarted when the measured period reaches a preset period of time T1. The timer is reset when the period of time T is reached, and restarts counting from its initial value (e.g., "0") after the special effect ends. If the timer can measure the period from when counting begins until it is interrupted individually, the timer value can be added cumulatively without being reset each time it reaches the period of time T. The start condition for the special effect may be a single period of time T1 (where the period until the special effect begins is always constant (e.g., the special effect always begins after 10 seconds have elapsed)), or multiple periods of time (where the period until the special effect begins varies (e.g., a period of 5, 10, or 15 seconds can be selected and the special effect can begin after this determined period has elapsed, or multiple periods can be switched in a predetermined order so that the period until the special effect begins is not always constant)).

In addition, it is not limited to determining whether the conditions for starting a specific effect have been met based on the period of time that has elapsed since the variable pattern command was received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, i.e., determining whether the conditions for starting a specific effect have been met by measuring the period of time that has elapsed since the variable pattern command was received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 using a timer, but also includes the period from receiving the variable pattern command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 until the start winning command is received (the timer value is reset based on the reception of the start winning command), the period until the handle touch sensor 192 detects contact by the player (the timer value is reset based on the detection of contact by the player by the handle touch sensor 192), The system may also be configured to determine whether or not the conditions for starting a specific performance are met based on any one or a combination of the following: the period until rotation is detected by the handle rotation detection sensor 189 (which resets the timer value based on the detection of rotation by the handle rotation detection sensor 189), the period until a contact operation of the contact operation section 302 of the performance operation unit 300 is detected (which resets the timer value based on the detection of a contact operation of the contact operation section 302 of the performance operation unit 300), the period until operation of the volume adjustment button 227 is detected (which resets the timer value based on the detection of operation of the volume adjustment button 227), the period until operation of the light intensity adjustment button 228 is detected (which resets the timer value based on the detection of operation of the light intensity adjustment button 228), etc. In other words, whether the conditions for starting a specific effect have been met may be determined based on whether the elapsed time since receiving the variation pattern command reaches T1, or/and whether the start gate entry command is received before the elapsed time reaches T1, whether the handle touch sensor 192 detects contact by the player, whether the handle rotation detection sensor 189 detects rotation, whether the touch operation of the touch operation section 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is detected, whether the operation of the volume adjustment button 227 is detected, whether the operation of the light intensity adjustment button 228 is detected, etc.

If the system is configured to determine whether the conditions for starting a specific effect have been met based on any one or a combination of the following: the period from when the variation pattern command is received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 until the start gate winning command is received, the period until the handle touch sensor 192 detects contact by the player, and the period until the handle rotation detection sensor 189 detects rotation, it is possible to prevent so-called stop shots, which stop the release of game balls, and improve the operating rate of the gaming machine.

In this example, the determination of whether the conditions for starting a specific effect have been met is triggered by receiving a variation pattern command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, this is not limiting; the determination of whether the conditions for starting a specific effect have been met may also be triggered by receiving a specific control command sent from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. For example, the determination of whether the conditions for starting a specific effect have been met may be based on the elapsed time since the start hole winning command was received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 (the elapsed time since the start hole winning command was received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is measured by a timer), or the elapsed time since the stop display command was received (the elapsed time since the stop display command was received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is measured by a timer). In this case, the start timing of the specific effect can be changed, preventing players from getting bored.

In this example, a dynamic effect is displayed in which a character or the like appears as a special effect, performing a predetermined action, and changing the character's appearance over time. For example, a special effect is performed in which a character or the like appears according to the likelihood of a jackpot, and the character that appears indicates the likelihood of a jackpot. However, because the special effect is performed relatively early after the start of the variable effect, if a player realizes early after the start of the variable effect that a jackpot will not occur or that the likelihood of a jackpot is low, they may lose interest in the variable effect currently in progress. Therefore, the pachinko machine in this example allows the player to delay the start of the special effect through player operation, making it difficult for the player to determine the likelihood of a jackpot early after the start of the variable effect, preventing them from losing interest in the variable effect at an early stage.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 345 (B), before the preset period T1 has elapsed since the start of the display of the changing patterns, that is, based on the reception of a changing pattern command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the timer starts measuring, and if the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 performs a specific operation (for example, an operation to start a special period during which the start timing of the specific performance can be delayed (a pressing operation in this example)) before the period T1 has elapsed during which the conditions for starting a specific performance have been met (t2'), a special period during which the start timing of the specific performance can be delayed is started in accordance with the operation of the performance operation unit 300 (performance operation unit 301 (touch operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303)), and the specific performance will not start even after the preset period T1 has elapsed since the start of the display of the changing patterns (t2). Furthermore, when a specific operation is performed on the pressing operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300, the performance display device 1600 displays static text information (such as "Specific performance delayed") that is different from abnormality information (text information indicating the nature of the abnormality (such as "Door open error")). This makes it easy to recognize that the start timing of the specific performance is being delayed.

The special period ends (t2") in response to a special operation of the presentation operation unit 300 (for example, an operation to end the special period (end operation)), and when a preset period T1 has elapsed since the special period ended in response to the special operation of the presentation operation unit 300, the conditions for starting the specific presentation are met and the specific presentation begins (t3'). In other words, by starting the special period through player operation and ending the special period through the player's own operation, the start timing of the specific presentation can be delayed throughout the special period. The timer value is reset when the special period begins, and timer measurement is suspended during the special period, with measurement restarting from the initial value (for example, "0") after the special period ends. In this way, not only are specific presentations not executed during the special period, but whether or not the conditions for starting the specific presentation are met is also determined based on the period calculated from the end of the special period. In other words, the timer value is reset when the special period begins, and the timer does not start measurement until the special period ends, but instead restarts measurement from the initial value upon the end of the special period. This allows the start timing of a special effect to be delayed for a period of time determined by the player, allowing the special effect to begin at a time determined by the player himself, preventing the special effect from being executed at a time unintended by the player and reducing the player's interest in the game. Furthermore, if a special operation is performed on the effect operation unit 300 during the special period, that is, when the special period ends, the display of the above-mentioned text information (for example, "Special effect delayed") will cease. This makes it easy to recognize that the special period has ended.

During the special period, the special period will not end even if an operation means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the presentation operation unit 300 (for example, the touch operation unit 302, volume adjustment button 227, or light intensity adjustment button 228 of the presentation operation unit 300) is operated until the pressing operation unit 303 of the presentation operation unit 300 is specially operated. This prevents the special period from ending at a time unintended by the player. This prevents the special period from ending at a time unintended by the player. Furthermore, during the special period, a predetermined display other than the variable effect may be executed. This allows players to easily recognize that the special period has begun, or in other words, that the start timing of a specific effect has been delayed. Furthermore, when a predetermined display is executed during the special period, the predetermined display may be changed by operating the presentation operation unit 300 while the predetermined display is being executed. For example, a character or the like may be displayed during the special period, and part of the character or the like may change depending on the operation of the presentation operation unit 300 or the like. This prevents players from becoming bored during the special period, when the start timing is extended.

In this example, the special period does not begin even if the touch operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated after the variable pattern command is received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 (starting the variable display of the pattern) and before the start conditions for the specific performance are met. However, when the touch operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated, the system determines whether the start conditions for the specific performance are met based on the period calculated from the end of operation of the touch operation unit 302, rather than the period calculated from the start of the variable display of the pattern (receiving the specific control command (in this example, the variable pattern command) from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310). In other words, if the touch operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated after the variable pattern command is received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 (starting the variable display of the pattern) and before the start conditions for the specific performance are met, the timer value is reset, but measurement by the timer is restarted from the initial value without being interrupted.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 345 (C), if the touch operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated (t2') before the period T1 has elapsed since the specific control command (in this example, a variation pattern command) was received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, that is, before the period T1 has elapsed in which the conditions for starting the specific performance are met, then the specific performance is not executed even though the preset period T1 has elapsed since the specific control command (in this example, a variation pattern command) was received, and the specific performance is started (t3') based on the preset period T1 having elapsed since the operation of the touch operation unit 302 was stopped.

In this case, it becomes possible to delay the start timing of the specific effect within the preset period T1. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game by delaying the start timing of the specific effect even in cases where a player who is attempting to delay the start timing of the specific effect by performing a specific operation (in this example, a press operation) on the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 accidentally operates the touch operation unit 302, or in cases where it is desired to delay the start timing of the specific effect for only a short period within the period T.

In addition to, or separate from, the touch operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300, it is also possible to determine whether the conditions for starting a specific effect have been met based on the period starting from when the handle touch sensor 192 no longer detects the player's touch, rather than the period starting from when the variable display of symbols begins when the handle touch sensor 192 detects the player's touch. In other words, the timer value may be reset based on the detection of the player's touch by the handle touch sensor 192, and measurement by the timer may be suspended while the handle touch sensor 192 detects the player's touch, and measurement may be restarted from the initial value when the handle touch sensor 192 no longer detects the player's touch. In this case, it is possible to prevent the so-called stop shot, which stops the release of game balls, and improve the operating rate of the gaming machine.

In addition, while the above example shows the special period being terminated by player operation, the special period may also be terminated if the presentation operation unit 300 is not operated for a certain period of time. In other words, in addition to the player operation described above as a condition for terminating the special period, a timer may be started from its initial value when the special period begins or when operation of the presentation operation unit 300 ends, whichever occurs later, and the establishment of the special period termination condition may be determined based on the period measured by the timer. In this case, the period for determining that the special period termination condition is met may be set to a period longer than the period T1 for determining that the specific presentation start condition is met. This makes it possible to delay the start timing of the specific presentation for a period longer than the period corresponding to the operation of an operation means other than the pressing operation unit 303 (e.g., the touch operation unit 302, the steering wheel touch sensor 192, etc.). As mentioned above, in this example, the conditions for starting the special effect are met and the special effect begins when a preset period T1 has elapsed since the end of the special period. Therefore, even if the special period ends because an end condition other than that imposed by the player's operation is met, such as the period calculated from the later of when the special period started or when the operation of the effect operation unit 300 ended reaching a preset period, the special effect will not begin immediately. Therefore, although the start timing of the special effect can be roughly determined, it is difficult to pinpoint the exact timing, which can increase interest in the execution of the special effect.

In addition to the player operations described above as conditions for ending the special period, the special period may be ended when the handle touch sensor 192 detects contact or when a ball is detected entering one of the ball entry ports (for example, all or specific ball entry ports (for example, first start port 2002 and second start port 2004) among the general entry port 2001, first start port 2002, gate 2003, second start port 2004, and large entry port 2005)), thereby satisfying the conditions for ending the special period and restarting the timer from the initial value. In this case, no operation is required to end the special period, which can be done to avoid inconvenience to players and encourage participation in games, thereby preventing a decline in the utilization rate of gaming machines.

Furthermore, if a specific operation is performed on the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 while a specific effect is being executed, the currently executing specific effect may be terminated. In this case, a special period may be started after the specific effect has ended (the timer value may be reset based on the specific operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and measurement by the timer may be suspended until the special period has ended), or the special period may not be executed after the specific effect has ended.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 346 (A), when a preset period T1 has elapsed since the start of the variable display of the symbols, a special effect begins (t2). Then, if a special operation is performed on the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 while the special effect is being executed (t3'), the special effect being executed may be terminated even if it is in the middle of being executed. In other words, if a special operation is performed on the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 before all of the effects preset as special effects have been executed, the special effect being executed may be terminated midway.

In this case, if a special effect starts without the player having performed a specific operation (a press in this example) on the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, the player can end the special effect simply by performing a specific operation (a press in this example) on the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300. Furthermore, if the special period ends because an end condition other than a player operation is met, such as the period calculated from the start of the special period or the end of the operation of the effect operation unit 300, whichever is later, reaching a predetermined period, even if the special effect starts at a timing not intended by the player, the player can end the special effect simply by performing a specific operation (a press in this example) on the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, eliminating any inconvenience to the player.

In addition to the above, a specific effect may also be terminated when one or any combination of the following is detected: when contact by the player is detected by the handle touch sensor 192; when rotation is detected by the handle rotation detection sensor 189; when a contact operation is detected on the contact operation section 302 of the effect operation unit 300; when operation of the volume adjustment button 227 is detected; when operation of the light intensity adjustment button 228 is detected; when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated to change the volume; when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated to change the light intensity (brightness). If the specific effect is configured to end when the handle touch sensor 192 detects contact by the player or when the handle rotation detection sensor 189 detects rotation, the specific effect can be ended simply by touching or rotating the handle 195 to play the game without any special operation, thereby preventing inconvenience to the player. If the specific effect is configured to end when a contact operation of the contact operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is detected, or when operation of the volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228 is detected, the specific effect can be ended with the simple operation of operating the contact operation unit 302, volume adjustment button 227 or light intensity adjustment button 228, which will encourage players to play and prevent a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, if a special effect is to be started after the special period ends when the conditions for starting the special effect are met, it may be possible to start from the first effect of the special effect, rather than from the effect where the special effect was interrupted. In other words, when the conditions for starting a special effect are met, the special effect may always be executed from the beginning. In this case, the entire content of the special effect will be executed regardless of when the special effect was interrupted, making it possible to indicate the likelihood of a jackpot.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 346 (B), when a preset period T1 has elapsed since the start of the variable display of the patterns, a special effect begins (t2). Then, if a specific operation is performed on the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 while the special effect is being executed (t3'), the special effect being executed may be terminated and a special period may be started even if the special effect is in the middle of being executed. In other words, if a specific operation is performed on the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 before all of the effects preset as special effects have been executed, the special effect being executed may be terminated midway and the special period may be started.

In this case, if a specific effect starts without the player performing a specific operation (a press operation in this example) on the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, the player can end the specific effect and start the special period simply by performing a specific operation (a press operation in this example) on the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, allowing the special period to be executed without causing inconvenience to the player. The start timing of the specific effect can be delayed for a period determined by the player, allowing the specific effect to start at a timing determined by the player. Furthermore, if the special period ends based on the establishment of an end condition different from player operation, such as the period calculated from the start of the special period or the end of operation of the effect operation unit 300, whichever is later, reaching a predetermined period, even if the specific effect starts at a timing not intended by the player, the player can end the specific effect and start the special period simply by performing a specific operation (a press operation in this example) on the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, allowing the special period to be executed and the start timing of the specific effect to be delayed without causing inconvenience to the player.

In addition, if the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is subjected to a specific operation (pressing operation in this example) intermittently, the specific performance may not be started, or even if the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is subjected to a specific operation (pressing operation in this example) intermittently, the special period may be started at the timing when the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is subjected to a specific operation (pressing operation in this example), and the special period may be ended when a certain period has elapsed since the start of the special period (when a certain period has elapsed since the pressing operation unit 303 was subjected to a specific operation (pressing operation in this example)), allowing the specific performance to be started. In other words, when the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is intermittently operated in a specific manner (pressing in this example), the timer value may be reset and timer measurement may be suspended until the specific operation (pressing in this example) is completed. Alternatively, when the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is intermittently operated in a specific manner (pressing in this example), the timer value may be reset, but timer measurement may be resumed from the initial value without being suspended. In a configuration in which a specific performance is not started when the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is intermittently operated in a specific manner (pressing in this example), the special period may be started when the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated in a specific manner (pressing in this example), the special period may be ended by performing a special operation after the specific operation (pressing in this example) of the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is completed, and the start conditions for the specific performance may be determined based on the period calculated from the end of the special period.

Furthermore, in addition to or separately from the above, a specific performance may not be started when a special operation means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated intermittently, or a specific performance may be started when a certain period of time has passed since the operation of the special operation means began, even when a special operation means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated intermittently. In other words, the timer value may be reset when a special operation means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated, and if the operation is performed intermittently, the timer value may be reset when a special operation means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated, but even if the operation is performed intermittently, the timer may measure the elapsed period from when the operation was first performed without resetting the timer value or interrupting the timer measurement.

If the system is configured so that a specific performance will not start when a special operating means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated intermittently, it may be determined whether or not the conditions for starting the specific performance are met based on the period of time calculated from when the operation of the special operating means is stopped. Alternatively, if the system is configured so that a specific performance will start even when a special operating means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated intermittently, it may be determined whether or not the conditions for starting the specific performance are met based on the period of time calculated from when operation of the special operating means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is started. In other words, when a special operation means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated, the timer value may be reset, and timer measurement may be suspended for the period during which the operation continues, with the timer measuring the period that has elapsed since the operation ended to determine whether or not the conditions for starting a specific performance have been met; alternatively, when a special operation means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated, the timer value may be reset, but even if the operation continues, the timer value may not be reset or measurement may not be suspended, and the timer may measure the period that has elapsed since the operation was first performed to determine whether or not the conditions for starting a specific performance have been met.

In addition, the special operation means may be provided with multiple special operation means, for example, a configuration may be provided with a first special operation means and a second special operation means, and the specific effect may not be started when the first special operation means is operated intermittently, while the specific effect may be started even when the second special operation means is operated intermittently, or the specific effect may not be started when either the first special operation means or the second special operation means is operated intermittently, or the specific effect may be started even when either the first special operation means or the second special operation means is operated intermittently. In other words, when the first special operation means is operated, the timer value may be reset, and timer measurement may be suspended for the period during which the operation is continuing, and the timer may measure the period of time that has passed since the operation was completed, to determine whether or not the conditions for starting a specific effect have been met; on the other hand, when the second special operation means is operated, the timer value may be reset, but even if the operation is continuing, the timer may not reset the timer value or suspend measurement, and the timer may measure the period of time that has passed since the operation was first performed, to determine whether or not the conditions for starting a specific effect have been met; when either the first special operation means or the second special operation means is operated, the timer value may be reset, and timer measurement may be suspended for the period during which the operation is continuing, and the timer may measure the period of time that has passed since the operation was completed, to determine whether or not the conditions for starting a specific effect have been met; or when either the first special operation means or the second special operation means is operated, the timer value may be reset, but even if the operation is continuing, the timer may not reset the timer value or suspend measurement, and the timer may measure the period of time that has passed since the operation was first performed, to determine whether or not the conditions for starting a specific effect have been met.

Furthermore, in addition to or separately from the above, when a non-special operation means different from the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 and the special operation means described above is operated, the start timing of the specific performance may be started even before a preset period T has elapsed since the non-special operation means was operated, without delaying the start timing of the specific performance, regardless of whether the operation is intermittent or not. In other words, even if a non-special operation means is operated, the timer may continue measuring without resetting the value. In this way, the device may be equipped with one or any combination (or all) of a specific operation means (in this example, the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300) that can delay the start timing of at least the specific performance for a first period, a special operation means that can delay the start timing of the specific performance for a second period shorter than the first period, and a non-special operation means that cannot delay the start timing of the specific performance.

The special operation means may be any one or any combination of the handle 195 (handle touch sensor 192, handle rotation detection sensor 189), the touch operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300, the volume adjustment button 227, the light intensity adjustment button 228, etc. Furthermore, if the system is configured to not start a specific effect when the handle 195 is touched and the handle touch sensor 192 intermittently detects the player's contact, or when the handle 195 is rotated and the handle rotation detection sensor 189 intermittently detects the rotation, then the specific effect can be prevented from starting simply by touching or rotating the handle 195 to play, without any special operation, which is not bothersome to the player. Furthermore, if the system is configured to not start a specific effect when the touch operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is intermittently touched, the volume adjustment button 227 is intermittently operated, or the light intensity adjustment button 228 is intermittently operated, then the specific effect can be prevented from starting with just a simple operation.

In addition, the possibility of delaying the start timing of a specific effect may be varied depending on whether or not there is a possibility of a jackpot. For example, in a non-win effect execution state where there is absolutely no possibility of a jackpot, it may be possible to delay the start timing of a specific effect by, for example, pressing the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, as described above. However, in a win effect execution state where there is a higher possibility of a jackpot (higher expectation of a jackpot) than in a non-win effect execution state, it may be impossible to delay the start timing of a specific effect by, for example, pressing the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to prevent unnecessary effects (specific effects) that are unpleasant to the player from being executed immediately when there is absolutely no possibility of a jackpot, while it is possible to achieve the gameplay intended by the designer when there is a possibility of a jackpot.

In addition, when a special effect is being executed, whether or not the special effect being executed is terminated may be determined depending on whether or not there is a possibility of a jackpot. For example, in a non-winning effect execution state where there is absolutely no possibility of a jackpot, it may be possible to terminate the special effect mid-execution by performing a specific operation (in this example, a press operation) on the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 while the special effect is being executed, as described above. However, in a winning effect execution state where there is a higher possibility of a jackpot (higher expectation of a jackpot) than in a non-winning effect execution state, it may be impossible to terminate the special effect mid-execution by performing a specific operation (in this example, a press operation) on the press operation unit 300.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 346(C), when the variable symbol display begins in the win-possible effect execution state, which has a higher probability of a jackpot (higher jackpot expectation) than the non-win-possible effect execution state, a specific effect begins (t2) after a preset period T1 has elapsed (after a variable pattern command is received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310). Furthermore, if a specific operation is performed on the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 after the specific effect execution period T2 has elapsed (before the specific effect ends) after the specific effect has started in the win-possible effect execution state (t3'), the currently running specific effect will continue without being terminated, unlike the non-win-possible effect execution state. In other words, in the win-possible effect execution state, which has a higher probability of a jackpot (higher jackpot expectation) than the non-win-possible effect execution state, the currently running specific effect will not be terminated until all of the effects preset as specific effects have been executed, even if the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated. By configuring it in this way, if there is absolutely no chance of a jackpot, unpleasant and unnecessary effects (specific effects) are immediately ended to prevent a decline in the player's interest in the game, while if there is a chance of a jackpot, the game can be played as intended by the designer.

The examples of special effects and special periods (display of text information) described above are merely examples, and the specific effects and special periods are not limited to those described above. For example, the specific effects may be effects that are unrelated to the likelihood of a jackpot, such as introducing gaming machines or characters, or the special period may not be limited to displaying text information (such as "Special effect delayed") notifying that the start timing of the specific period has been delayed, but may also be controlled during the period for selecting a game mode or determining game-related settings.

Furthermore, the specific effects performed in the non-winning effect execution state and the specific effects performed in the winning effect execution state described above do not have to be identical, and some of the display, sound, light emission, etc. may be the same or similar, or the specific effects performed in the non-winning effect execution state may be different from the specific effects performed in the winning effect execution state. Furthermore, the specific effects do not have to be performed during periods when variable effects are being performed, but may be performed during periods when variable effects are not being performed. In this case, the establishment of the start conditions for the specific effect may be determined based on any one or combination of the following: the period from when a stop display command is received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to when a variable pattern command is received, the period from when a start winning command is received, the period from when a player's contact is detected by the handle touch sensor 192, the period from when rotation is detected by the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the period from when operation of the volume adjustment button 227 is detected, the period from when operation of the light intensity adjustment button 228 is detected, etc. In other words, regardless of whether a variable effect is being performed or not, any implementation is acceptable as long as it allows for delaying the start timing of a special effect, or allows for a special effect currently being performed to be terminated midway. Furthermore, the mode of the special effect performed when an abnormal state is occurring may be different from the mode of the special effect performed when an abnormal state is not occurring.

Furthermore, the special period that takes place in the non-winning effect execution state and the special period that takes place in the winning effect execution state do not have to be the same; some of the displays, sounds, lighting, etc. may be the same or similar, and the mode of the special period that takes place in the non-winning effect execution state may be different from the mode of the special period that takes place in the winning effect execution state. Furthermore, the special period does not have to take place during a period in which a variable effect is being performed, but may take place during a period in which a variable effect is not being performed. In other words, the implementation form is not important as long as it makes it possible to delay the start timing of the special period, regardless of whether a variable effect is being performed or not. Furthermore, the mode of the special period that takes place in the non-winning effect execution state may be different from the mode of the special period that takes place in the winning effect execution state.

In addition, the above examples show devices that delay the start timing of a specific effect or terminate a specific effect that is currently being executed, but when controlling the effect display device 1600, multiple LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the gaming board 5, and multiple LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the door frame in a specific effect mode as a specific effect, it is also possible to delay the start timing of a specific effect or terminate (interrupt) part of a specific effect that is currently being executed for some of the effect display device 1600, multiple LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the gaming board 5, and multiple LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the door frame.

Furthermore, in a gaming machine that has an auxiliary display device different from the effect display device 1600 in addition to the effect display device 1600, if the machine is configured to control the auxiliary display device in a specific effect mode in addition to the effect display device 1600 as a specific effect, the start timing of the specific effect may be delayed only for the auxiliary display device, or only the specific effect being executed on the auxiliary display device may be terminated.

In addition, if the performance display device 1600, the auxiliary display device, and some of the multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and the multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame are configured to delay the start timing of a specific performance or to terminate (interrupt) part of a specific performance, when the specific performance for this part is started or resumed, it will be controlled by a specific performance mode that is synchronized with the specific performance mode being executed in the electronic components (the performance display device 1600, the auxiliary display device, and some of the multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and the multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame) whose start timing has not been delayed or whose currently executing specific performance has not been terminated (interrupted). As a result, even if the start timing of a specific effect is delayed for some of the LEDs mounted on the effect display device 1600, the auxiliary display device, the various decorative boards on the game board 5, and the various decorative boards on the door frame, or if a specific effect that is currently being executed is only partially terminated (interrupted), it is possible to execute a unified specific effect across the effect display device 1600, the auxiliary display device, the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board 5, and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame.

[Specific effects when an abnormality occurs]
Next, a modified example will be described in which the start timing of the above-mentioned specific effects can be delayed by a predetermined operation when an abnormal state occurs. Figure 347 is a time chart showing an example of an abnormal state when the magnetic sensor 1050 detects magnetism. Note that only the differences from the above embodiment will be described below, and redundant explanations will not be provided.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 in this example detects abnormal states (a door open abnormal state in which the door frame open switch or main frame open switch detects that the door frame 3 has been opened relative to the main frame 4 or that the main frame 4 has been opened relative to the outer frame 2; a vibration detection abnormal state in which the vibration sensor detects vibration of the game board 5 for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds); a lower tray full abnormal state in which a detection signal is input from the full tank detection sensor 154; a ball out abnormal state in which a detection signal is input from the ball out detection sensor 574; a radio wave detection abnormal state in which the radio wave sensor detects unauthorized radio waves; a magnetic detection abnormal state in which the magnetic sensor 1050 detects magnetic fields acting illegally within the game area 5a; a detection signal is input from the second start port sensor 2401 when the second start port 2004 is not open, or a game is not in a big hit game state or a small hit game state. When an abnormal state (such as an illegal winning detection state in which a detection signal is input from the large winning slot sensor 2402) occurs, an abnormality is alerted by the performance display device 1600, various speakers, and various LEDs on the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) (for example, abnormality information (text information indicating the nature of the abnormality (for example, "door open error")) is displayed in a static state in a part of the performance display device 1600, alert sounds are output from the various speakers, and the various LEDs on the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) are controlled to emit abnormality alert light in an abnormality alert light mode (minor abnormality alert light mode, serious abnormality alert light mode), etc.).

The specific effect can also be executed when a specific abnormal condition among the multiple abnormal conditions mentioned above (for example, a door open abnormal condition or a magnetic detection abnormal condition, and may be all of the multiple abnormal conditions mentioned above, or one of the multiple abnormal conditions, or any combination of multiple abnormal conditions mentioned above) occurs.

In addition, the area of the effect display device 1600 where characters, etc. are displayed when a specific effect is executed and the area where abnormality information is displayed when an abnormal condition occurs overlap, and the abnormality information is displayed on a higher layer than the characters, etc. displayed in the specific effect (the abnormality information is displayed superimposed on the characters, etc. displayed in the specific effect). In other words, if an abnormal condition occurs while the above-mentioned specific effect is being executed on the effect display device 1600, the characters, etc. in the specific effect will be displayed as the background image for the abnormality information (such as an image displayed in the background of the pattern).

As mentioned above, the specific effects of this example display dynamic behaviors, such as displaying a character or the like on the effect display device 1600 and performing a predetermined action, changing the behavior of the character or the like over time. Therefore, if an abnormal condition occurs while the specific effect is being performed on the effect display device 1600 and abnormal information is displayed in a partial area of the effect display device 1600, the abnormal information may be difficult to see because the character or the like is displayed as a background image for the abnormal information, making it difficult to understand the content of the abnormal information displayed on the effect display device 1600. In this case, even if fraudulent activity is being committed, it may be difficult to identify the content of the fraudulent activity from the abnormal information displayed on the effect display device 1600, or the player may not realize that a malfunction has occurred in the progress of the game, causing a disadvantage to the player. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, if abnormal information is displayed in a partial area of the effect display device 1600 while a specific effect is being performed, the specific effect can be terminated so that the abnormal information is easily visible, or the start timing of the specific effect can be delayed so that the abnormal information is not difficult to see when it is being displayed.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 347(A), before the preset period T1 has elapsed since the start of the display of the changing patterns (since the change pattern command has been received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310), that is, before the time period T1 has elapsed in which the conditions for starting a specific effect are met, measurement by the timer is started based on the reception of the change pattern command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and if an abnormal state occurs (t1') before the period T1 has elapsed in which the conditions for starting a specific effect are met, abnormal information is displayed on the effect display device 1600. The example shown in Figure 347(A) shows an example in which the magnetic sensor 1050 has detected an abnormal magnetic detection state in which an illegal magnetic field has been detected within the play area 5a.

In addition, if the timer starts measuring the time T1 (before the specific effect starts) after the start of the changing display of the patterns (after the change pattern command is received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) and before the time T1 has elapsed (before the specific effect starts), that is, after the change pattern command is received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is specifically operated (t2') before the time T1 has elapsed, during which the conditions for starting the specific effect are met, a special period is started that allows the start timing of the specific effect to be delayed, and the specific effect will not start even if the preset time T1 has elapsed since the start of the changing display of the patterns (t2).

Furthermore, if the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated in a specific manner (for example, an operation (press operation) to start a special period that can delay the start timing of a specific performance) and then the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated in a special manner (for example, an operation to end a special period (end operation)) (t2"), the special period ends and the specific performance begins when a preset period T1 has elapsed since the special operation (t3'). Note that when the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated in a specific manner, that is, when a special period begins, text information different from the abnormality information (for example, "Specific performance delayed") is displayed in a static state on the performance display device 1600, and when the performance operation unit 300 is operated in a special manner during the special period, that is, when the special period ends, the display of the above-mentioned text information ceases. This makes it easy to recognize that the start timing of a specific performance has been delayed or that the special period has ended.

Note that although the background image displayed on the effect display device 1600 during normal times (when no specific effect or reach effect is being executed, and when waiting for fluctuations to begin) does change in some areas, the changes are smaller than the display mode of specific effects. Also, of the background image displayed on the effect display device 1600 during normal times, the area around (contacting parts, boundary areas) the abnormal information displayed on the effect display device 1600 is in a static mode with no change in appearance (or with an extremely small change in appearance). Therefore, when the background image for normal times is displayed, it is easier to visually recognize the abnormal information displayed on the effect display device 1600 than when a specific effect is being executed as the background image.

In this way, the pachinko machine 1 of this example can delay the start timing of a special effect if an abnormal condition occurs, and the delay period can be appropriately set by the player or gaming facility staff depending on the timing of the special operation (end operation). In other words, even if an abnormal condition occurs, the timer value is reset when a special period begins, and timer measurement is suspended during the special period, and measurement resumes from the initial value (e.g., "0") after the special period ends. Not only are special effects not executed during the special period, but the fulfillment of the conditions for starting a special effect is also determined based on the period calculated from the end of the special period. In other words, even if an abnormal condition occurs, the timer value is reset when a special period begins, and timer measurement does not begin until the special period ends. Upon the end of the special period, timer measurement resumes from the initial value. This makes it possible to delay specific effects for a period of time determined by the player or gaming facility staff, and by displaying the normal background image as the background image for the abnormality information displayed on the effect display device 1600 when an abnormality occurs, the abnormality information is easier to see than when a special period is in progress, and the abnormality information displayed on the effect display device 1600 makes it easier to recognize the details of the abnormality. This makes it easy to recognize the occurrence of fraudulent activity, and makes it easy to recognize that an abnormality that is detrimental to the player has occurred, preventing the player from being disadvantaged.

Furthermore, during the special period, the special period will not end even if an operation means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the presentation operation unit 300 (for example, the touch operation unit 302, volume adjustment button 227, light intensity adjustment button 228, etc. of the presentation operation unit 300) is operated until the pressing operation unit 303 of the presentation operation unit 300 is specially operated. This prevents the special period from ending at a time unintended by the player or gaming facility staff in an abnormal state, ensuring that abnormal information is recognized reliably. Furthermore, during the special period, a predetermined display other than the variable effect may be displayed. This makes it easy to recognize that the special period has begun, or in other words, that the start timing of a specific effect has been delayed. Furthermore, when a predetermined display is to be displayed during the special period, the predetermined display may be changed by operating the presentation operation unit 300, etc. while the predetermined display is being displayed. For example, a character, etc. may be displayed during the special period, and part of the character, etc. may change depending on the operation of the presentation operation unit 300, etc.

Even in an abnormal state, if the touch operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated after the variable pattern command is received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 (starting the variable display of the pattern) and before the start conditions for the specific performance are met, the special period will not start. However, when the touch operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated, the system determines whether the start conditions for the specific performance are met based on the period calculated from the end of operation of the touch operation unit 302, rather than the period calculated from the start of the variable display of the pattern (receiving the specific control command (in this example, the variable pattern command) from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310). In other words, even in an abnormal state, if the touch operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated after the variable pattern command is received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 (starting the variable display of the pattern) and before the start conditions for the specific performance are met, the timer value is reset, but measurement by the timer is restarted from the initial value without being interrupted.

Specifically, in an abnormal state, the timer starts measuring before the period T1 has elapsed since a specific control command (in this example, a fluctuation pattern command) was received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, i.e., based on the reception of a specific control command (in this example, a fluctuation pattern command) from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310; if the touch operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated before the period T1 has elapsed, at which point the conditions for starting a specific performance are met, the specific performance will not be executed even if the preset period T1 has elapsed since the specific control command (in this example, a fluctuation pattern command) was received; instead, the specific performance will start based on the preset period T1 having elapsed since the operation of the touch operation unit 302 ended.

In this case, it becomes possible to delay the start timing of the specific effect within the preset period T1. This makes it possible to delay the start timing of the specific effect even in cases where a player or gaming facility staff member is attempting to delay the start timing of the specific effect by performing a specific operation (in this example, a press operation) on the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 in an abnormal state but accidentally operates the touch operation unit 302, or in cases where it is desired to delay the start timing of the specific effect for only a short period within the period T. This makes it easy to see the abnormal information displayed on the effect display device 1600 in the event of an abnormal state, and the abnormal information displayed on the effect display device 1600 makes it easy to recognize the nature of the abnormal state.

In addition to, or separate from, the touch operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300, when the handle touch sensor 192 detects player contact in an abnormal state, it may be possible to determine whether the conditions for starting a specific effect have been met based on the period starting from when the handle touch sensor 192 no longer detects player contact, rather than the period starting from when the variable symbol display begins. In other words, the timer value may be reset based on the detection of player contact by the handle touch sensor 192 in an abnormal state, and measurement by the timer may be suspended during the period when the handle touch sensor 192 detects player contact, and measurement may be restarted from the initial value when the handle touch sensor 192 no longer detects player contact. In this case, even if an abnormal state occurs, simply playing normally by touching the handle touch sensor 192 can delay the start of the specific effect, making the abnormal information displayed on the effect display device 1600 easier to see, and the abnormal information displayed on the effect display device 1600 can easily identify the nature of the abnormal state.

In addition, while the above example shows a special period initiated under an abnormal condition being terminated by player operation, the special period may also be terminated if the effect operation unit 300 is not operated for a certain period of time. In other words, in addition to the above-mentioned player operation as a condition for terminating the special period, a timer may be started from an initial value when the special period is initiated or when operation of the effect operation unit 300 is terminated, whichever occurs later, and the establishment of the special period termination condition may be determined based on the period measured by the timer. In this case, the period for determining that the special period termination condition is met may be set to a period longer than the period T1 for determining that the start condition of a specific effect is met. This delays the start timing of the specific effect for a period longer than the period corresponding to the operation of an operation unit other than the pressing operation unit 303 (e.g., the touch operation unit 302 or the steering wheel touch sensor 192, etc.), making it easier to visually recognize the abnormal information displayed on the effect display device 1600. The abnormal information displayed on the effect display device 1600 allows the user to easily recognize the nature of the abnormal condition. Even in an abnormal state, if a preset period T1 has elapsed since the end of the special period, the conditions for starting the specific effect are met and the specific effect will begin. Therefore, even if the special period ends because an end condition other than a special operation (end operation) by the player or gaming facility staff is met, such as the period calculated from the later of starting the special period in an abnormal state or ending operation of the effect operation unit 300 reaching a preset period, it is possible to prevent the specific effect from starting immediately. In the event of an abnormal state, the abnormal information displayed on the effect display device 1600 until the specific effect begins is easily visible, and the abnormal information displayed on the effect display device 1600 allows the content of the abnormal state to be easily recognized.

In addition to the player operations described above as conditions for ending the special period, the special period may be ended when the handle touch sensor 192 detects contact or when a ball is detected entering one of the ball entry ports (for example, all or specific ball entry ports (for example, first starting port 2002 and second starting port 2004) among the general entry port 2001, first starting port 2002, gate 2003, second starting port 2004, and large entry port 2005)), thereby satisfying the conditions for ending the special period and restarting the timer from the initial value. In this case, no special operation is required to end a special period that was started in an abnormal state, and it becomes possible to resume play without causing inconvenience to the player after recognizing the nature of the abnormal state from the abnormal information displayed on the effect display device 1600.

Also, even in an abnormal state, if a specific operation is performed on the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 while a specific effect is being executed, the currently executing specific effect may be terminated. In this case, the special period may be started after the specific effect has ended (the timer value may be reset based on the specific operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and measurement by the timer may be suspended until the special period has ended), or the special period may not be started after the specific effect has ended.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 347 (B), once a preset period T1 has elapsed since the start of the display of the changing symbols (since the change pattern command is received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310), the special effect begins (t2). If an abnormal condition occurs during the execution of the special effect (t1'), abnormal information is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

Furthermore, even in an abnormal state, if a specific operation is performed on the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 before the execution period T2 of the specific effect has elapsed (before the specific effect has ended) (t3'), the specific effect currently being executed may be terminated even if it is in the middle of being executed. In other words, if a specific operation is performed on the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 in an abnormal state before all of the effects previously set as specific effects have been executed, the specific effect currently being executed may be terminated midway.

In this case, if an abnormal condition occurs, the player or gaming store employee can terminate the specific effect and change the background image of the abnormal information from the dynamic appearance of the characters in the specific effect to the normal static appearance simply by operating the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300. This makes it easy to see the abnormal information displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the abnormal information displayed on the effect display device 1600 allows the player to easily recognize the details of the abnormal condition. Furthermore, if the special period ends unintended by the player or gaming store employee due to the establishment of an end condition different from the player's or gaming store employee's end operation, such as the period calculated from the later of when the special period began or when the operation of the effect operation unit 300 was terminated reaching a predetermined period, even if the specific effect begins after the end of the special period, the player or gaming store employee can terminate the specific effect and change the background image of the abnormal information from the dynamic appearance of the characters in the specific effect to the normal static appearance. This makes it easy to see the abnormal information displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the abnormal information displayed on the effect display device 1600 allows the player to easily recognize the details of the abnormal condition.

In addition to the above, a specific effect may also be terminated when one or any combination of the following is detected: when contact by the player is detected by the handle touch sensor 192; when rotation is detected by the handle rotation detection sensor 189; when a contact operation is detected on the contact operation section 302 of the effect operation unit 300; when operation of the volume adjustment button 227 is detected; when operation of the light intensity adjustment button 228 is detected; when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated to change the volume; when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated to change the light intensity (brightness). When the specific effect is configured to end when the handle touch sensor 192 detects contact by the player or when the handle rotation detection sensor 189 detects rotation, the specific effect can be ended by simply touching the handle 195 to play or by rotating the handle 195 without any special operation, and even when an abnormal condition occurs, the specific effect can be ended by playing the game, and the background image of the abnormal information can be changed from the dynamic state of the characters in the specific effect to the normal static state, making it easy to see the abnormal information displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the content of the abnormal condition can be easily recognized from the abnormal information displayed on the effect display device 1600. Furthermore, if the configuration is such that a specific performance is terminated when a touch operation of the touch operation section 302 of the performance operation unit 300 is detected, when operation of the volume adjustment button 227 is detected, or when operation of the light intensity adjustment button 228 is detected, then when an abnormal condition occurs, the specific performance can be terminated with a simple operation of operating the touch operation section 302, the volume adjustment button 227, or the light intensity adjustment button 228, and the background image of the abnormality information can be changed from the dynamic state of characters in the specific performance to the normal static state, making it easier to see the abnormal information displayed on the performance display device 1600, and the content of the abnormal condition can be easily recognized from the abnormality information displayed on the performance display device 1600.

Furthermore, if a special effect is to be started after the special period has ended based on the fulfillment of the conditions for starting the special effect, it may be possible to start from the first effect of the special effect rather than from the effect where the special effect was interrupted. In other words, if the conditions for starting a special effect are fulfilled, the special effect may always be executed from the beginning. In this case, the contents of the special effect can be executed in their entirety regardless of when the special effect was interrupted, so the contents of the special effect (in this example, an indication of the likelihood of a jackpot) can be reliably recognized, and it is easier to obtain cooperation in ending the special effect when an abnormal state occurs, so that players who are focusing on the contents of the special effect can easily see the abnormal information.

In addition, even if a specific effect is terminated during execution of a specific effect due to a specific operation being performed on the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 in an abnormal state, a special period may be initiated, and the start timing of the specific effect may be delayed for a period determined arbitrarily by the player or gaming store staff. In this case, even if a specific effect is terminated midway due to an abnormal state, the start timing of the specific effect may be delayed for a period determined arbitrarily by the player or gaming store staff, making the abnormality information displayed on the effect display device 1600 easier to see, and the abnormality information displayed on the effect display device 1600 allows the content of the abnormal state to be easily recognized.

In addition, in an abnormal state, if a specific operation (pressing operation in this example) is performed intermittently on the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300, the specific performance may not be started, or even if a specific operation (pressing operation in this example) is performed intermittently on the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300, the special period may be started at the timing when the specific operation (pressing operation in this example) is performed on the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300, and the special period may be ended when a certain period has elapsed since the start of the special period (when a certain period has elapsed since the specific operation (pressing operation in this example) of the pressing operation unit 303 is performed), allowing the specific performance to be started. In other words, when the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is intermittently operated in a specific manner (a pressing operation in this example), the timer value may be reset and timer measurement may be suspended until the specific operation (a pressing operation in this example) is completed. Alternatively, when the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is intermittently operated in a specific manner (a pressing operation in this example), the timer value may be reset, but measurement may be resumed from the initial value without being suspended. In a configuration in which a specific performance is not started when the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is intermittently operated in a specific manner (a pressing operation in this example), a special period may be started when the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated in a specific manner (a pressing operation in this example), the special period may be ended by operating the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 in a special manner after the specific operation (a pressing operation in this example) is completed, and the start conditions for the specific performance may be determined based on the period calculated from the end of the special period.

Furthermore, in addition to or separately from the above, a specific performance may not be started if a special operating means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated intermittently in an abnormal state, or a specific performance may be started when a certain period of time has passed since the operation of the special operating means began, even if a special operating means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated intermittently in an abnormal state. In other words, the timer value may be reset when a special operating means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated, and if the operation is performed intermittently, the timer value may be reset when a special operating means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated, but even if the operation is performed intermittently, the timer may measure the elapsed period from when the operation was first performed without resetting the timer value or interrupting the timer measurement.

If the system is configured so that a specific performance will not start when a special operating means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is being operated intermittently in an abnormal state, it may be determined whether or not the conditions for starting the specific performance are met based on the period calculated from when the operation of the special operating means is stopped. Alternatively, if the system is configured so that a specific performance will start even when a special operating means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is being operated intermittently in an abnormal state, it may be determined whether or not the conditions for starting the specific performance are met based on the period calculated from when operation of the special operating means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is started. In other words, when a special operation means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated, the timer value may be reset, and timer measurement may be suspended for the period during which the operation continues, with the timer measuring the period that has elapsed since the operation ended to determine whether or not the conditions for starting a specific performance have been met; alternatively, when a special operation means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated, the timer value may be reset, but even if the operation continues, the timer value may not be reset or measurement may not be suspended, and the timer may measure the period that has elapsed since the operation was first performed to determine whether or not the conditions for starting a specific performance have been met.

In addition, the special operation means may be provided with multiple special operation means, for example, a configuration may be provided with a first special operation means and a second special operation means, and a specific effect may not be started if the first special operation means is operated intermittently in an abnormal state, while a specific effect may be started even if the second special operation means is operated intermittently in an abnormal state, or a configuration may be provided in which a specific effect is not started if either the first special operation means or the second special operation means is operated intermittently in an abnormal state, or a specific effect may be started even if either the first special operation means or the second special operation means is operated intermittently in an abnormal state. That is, when the first special operating means is operated in an abnormal state, the value of the timer is reset, and the timer measurement is suspended for the period during which the operation continues, and the timer measures the period that has elapsed since the operation ended, and it is determined whether or not the conditions for starting a specific effect have been met; on the other hand, when the second special operating means is operated in an abnormal state, the value of the timer is reset, but even if the operation continues, the timer value is not reset or the timer measurement is not suspended, and the timer measures the period that has elapsed since the operation was first performed, and it is determined whether or not the conditions for starting a specific effect have been met; The timer value may be reset when either the first or second special operating means is operated, and timer measurement may be suspended for the duration of the operation, with the timer measuring the period elapsed since the operation ended to determine whether the conditions for starting a specific effect have been met. Alternatively, the timer value may be reset when either the first or second special operating means is operated in an abnormal state, but even if the operation continues, the timer value may not be reset or measurement may not be suspended, and the timer may measure the period elapsed since the operation was first performed to determine whether the conditions for starting a specific effect have been met.

Furthermore, in addition to or separately from the above, when a non-special operation means different from the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 and the special operation means described above is operated, the start timing of the specific performance may be started even before a preset period T has elapsed since the non-special operation means was operated, without delaying the start timing of the specific performance, regardless of whether the operation is intermittent or not. In other words, even if a non-special operation means is operated, the timer may continue measuring without resetting the value. In this way, the device may be equipped with one or any combination (or all) of a specific operation means (in this example, the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300) that can delay the start timing of at least the specific performance for a first period, a special operation means that can delay the start timing of the specific performance for a second period shorter than the first period, and a non-special operation means that cannot delay the start timing of the specific performance.

The special operating means may be any one or any combination of the handle 195 (handle touch sensor 192, handle rotation detection sensor 189), the touch operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300, the volume adjustment button 227, the light intensity adjustment button 228, etc. Furthermore, if a specific effect is configured to not start when the handle 195 is touched in an abnormal state and the handle touch sensor 192 intermittently detects the player's contact, or when the handle 195 is rotated in an abnormal state and the handle rotation detection sensor 189 intermittently detects the rotation, the specific effect can be prevented from starting simply by touching or rotating the handle 195 to play the game, without any special operation. A static background image is maintained to make the abnormal information displayed on the effect display device 1600 easily visible, and the abnormal information displayed on the effect display device 1600 allows the user to easily recognize the nature of the abnormal state. Furthermore, if the configuration is such that a specific performance is not started when the touch operation section 302 of the performance operation unit 300 is being touched intermittently, when the volume adjustment button 227 is being operated intermittently, or when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is being operated intermittently, then a simple operation can be used to prevent the specific performance from starting, and the static background image can be maintained to make the abnormal information displayed on the performance display device 1600 easier to see, and the abnormal information displayed on the performance display device 1600 can be easily seen, allowing the content of the abnormal condition to be easily recognized from the abnormal information displayed on the performance display device 1600.

Furthermore, even in an abnormal state, the possibility of delaying the start timing of a specific effect may be varied depending on whether or not there is a possibility of a jackpot. For example, if an abnormal state occurs in a non-winning effect execution state where there is absolutely no possibility of a jackpot, the start timing of the specific effect may be delayed by performing a specific operation (in this example, a press operation) on the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, as described above. On the other hand, if an abnormal state occurs in a winning effect execution state where there is a higher possibility of a jackpot (higher expectation of a jackpot) than in a non-winning effect execution state, it may be impossible to delay the start timing of the specific effect by performing a specific operation (in this example, a press operation) on the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300. This configuration prevents unnecessary effects (specific effects) that are unpleasant to the player from being immediately executed if an abnormal state occurs when there is absolutely no possibility of a jackpot, making it easier to visually recognize higher-priority abnormal information. On the other hand, if there is a possibility of a jackpot, the game can be played as intended by the designer, preventing any disadvantage to the player.

Furthermore, when a specific effect is being executed in an abnormal state, whether or not the specific effect being executed is terminated may be determined depending on whether or not there is a possibility of a jackpot. For example, if an abnormal state occurs in a non-winning effect execution state where there is absolutely no possibility of a jackpot, the specific effect can be terminated midway through execution by performing a specific operation (in this example, a press operation) on the press operation unit 300 while the specific effect is being executed, as described above. On the other hand, if an abnormal condition occurs in a winning effect execution state where there is a higher possibility of a jackpot (higher expectation of a jackpot) than in a non-winning effect execution state, it may be impossible to terminate the specific effect midway through execution by performing a specific operation (in this example, a press operation) on the press operation unit 300. With this configuration, if an abnormal state occurs in a non-winning effect execution state where there is absolutely no possibility of a jackpot, the unpleasant and unnecessary effect (specific effect) can be immediately terminated and higher-priority abnormal information can be notified to the player. On the other hand, if there is a possibility of a jackpot, the game can be played as intended by the designer.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 347 (C), once a preset period T1 has elapsed since the variable symbol display began in the winning effect execution state (since the variable pattern command was received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310), that is, since the variable pattern command was received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, measurement by the timer begins, and once the period T1 during which the start condition for the specific effect is met has elapsed, the specific effect will begin (t2). If an abnormal state occurs during the execution of the specific effect (t1'), abnormal information will be displayed on the effect display device 1600.

Furthermore, if the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated to perform a specific operation (t3') before the execution period T2 of the specific effect has elapsed (before the specific effect has ended) in the win-possible effect execution state in an abnormal state, the specific effect being executed will continue without being terminated, unlike in the non-win-possible effect execution state. In other words, in the win-possible effect execution state, which has a higher possibility of a jackpot (higher expectation of a jackpot) than the non-win-possible effect execution state, the specific effect being executed will continue and the background image of the abnormality information will not change from a dynamic to a static state until all of the effects previously set as specific effects have been executed, even if the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated to perform a specific operation.

The examples of special effects and special periods (display of text information) described above are merely examples, and the specific effects and special periods are not limited to those described above. For example, the specific effects may be effects that are unrelated to the likelihood of a jackpot, such as introducing gaming machines or characters, or the special period may not be limited to displaying text information (such as "Special effect delayed") notifying that the start timing of the specific period has been delayed, but may also be controlled during the period for selecting a game mode or determining game-related settings.

Furthermore, the specific effects performed in the non-winning effect execution state and the specific effects performed in the winning effect execution state described above do not have to be identical, and some of the display, sound, light emission, etc. may be the same or similar, or the specific effects performed in the non-winning effect execution state may be different from the specific effects performed in the winning effect execution state. Furthermore, the specific effects do not have to be performed during periods when variable effects are being performed, but may be performed during periods when variable effects are not being performed. In this case, the establishment of the start conditions for the specific effect may be determined based on any one or any combination of the following: the period from when a stop display command is received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to when a variable pattern command is received, the period until a start winning command is received, the period until a player's contact is detected by the handle touch sensor 192, the period until rotation is detected by the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the period until operation of the volume adjustment button 227 is detected, the period until operation of the light intensity adjustment button 228 is detected, etc. In other words, regardless of whether a variable effect is being performed or not, any implementation is acceptable as long as it makes it possible to delay the start timing of a specific effect during an abnormal state, or to end a specific effect that is being performed midway if it is being performed during an abnormal state. Furthermore, the mode of the special period performed in the non-winning effect execution state may be made different from the mode of the special period performed in the winning effect execution state. Furthermore, the mode of the specific effect performed during an abnormal state may be made different from the mode of the specific effect performed when no abnormal state is occurring.

Furthermore, the special period performed in the non-winning effect execution state and the special period performed in the winning effect execution state do not have to be the same; some of the displays, sounds, lighting, etc. may be the same or similar, and the mode of the special period performed in the non-winning effect execution state may be different from the mode of the special period performed in the winning effect execution state. Furthermore, the special period does not have to be performed during a period in which a variable effect is being performed, but may be performed during a period in which a variable effect is not being performed. In other words, any implementation is acceptable as long as it makes it possible to delay the start timing of the special period during an abnormal state, regardless of whether a variable effect is being performed or not. Furthermore, the mode of the special period performed in the non-winning effect execution state may be different from the mode of the special period performed in the winning effect execution state. Furthermore, the mode of the special period performed during an abnormal state may be different from the mode of the special period performed when an abnormal state is occurring.

In addition, the above examples show delays in the start timing of a specific effect during an abnormal state and termination of a specific effect that is currently being executed during an abnormal state. However, when the effect display device 1600, multiple LEDs mounted on various decorative boards on the gaming board 5, and multiple LEDs mounted on various decorative boards on the door frame are controlled in a specific effect mode as a specific effect, the start timing of a specific effect may be delayed during an abnormal state for some of the effect display device 1600, multiple LEDs mounted on various decorative boards on the gaming board 5, and multiple LEDs mounted on various decorative boards on the door frame, or a specific effect currently being executed may be terminated (interrupted) during an abnormal state. In addition, in a gaming machine that includes an auxiliary display device different from the effect display device 1600 in addition to the effect display device 1600, if the auxiliary display device is configured to be controlled in a specific effect mode in addition to the effect display device 1600 as a specific effect, the start timing of a specific effect only for the auxiliary display device may be delayed during an abnormal state, or only a specific effect currently being executed on the auxiliary display device may be terminated during an abnormal state.

In addition, as described above, during an abnormal state, an abnormality alert is provided by the performance display device 1600, various speakers, and various LEDs on the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) (for example, abnormality information (text information indicating the nature of the abnormality (for example, "door open error")) is displayed in a static state in a certain area of the performance display device 1600, alert sounds are output from the various speakers, and the various LEDs on the door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) are controlled to emit abnormality alert light in an abnormality alert light-emitting mode (minor abnormality alert light-emitting mode, serious abnormality alert light-emitting mode), etc.). Furthermore, even if the start timing of a specific effect is delayed or a specific effect is terminated (interrupted) for some of the effect display device 1600, the auxiliary display device, the multiple LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board 5, and the multiple LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the door frame, priority is given to abnormality notification. In other words, when the multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the gaming board 5 and the multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame are illuminated in the abnormality alert light-emitting mode, if the start timing of a specific effect is delayed, the multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the gaming board 5 and the multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame will continue to emit the abnormality alert light-emitting mode for at least a predetermined period without executing the light-emitting mode of the specific effect at the time the specific effect is started, or when the multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the gaming board 5 and the multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame are illuminated in the abnormality alert light-emitting mode, and when the specific effect is ended (interrupted), the multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the gaming board 5 and the multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame will continue to emit the abnormality alert light-emitting mode for at least a predetermined period. However, if it is possible to delay or terminate (interrupt) a specific effect for electronic components that do not issue abnormality alerts or that only partially issue abnormality alerts among the effect display device 1600, the auxiliary display device, and the multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5, and the multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame, when starting or resuming a specific effect, the specific effect may be controlled in the same manner as when the specific effect is not delayed or terminated (interrupted) (for example, a specific effect mode that is synchronized with the specific effect mode being executed by electronic components (the effect display device 1600, the auxiliary display device, and the multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and the multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame) that have not delayed or terminated (interrupted) the specific effect in progress), or if there are no electronic components continuing the specific effect, the specific effect may be started from the beginning.

[Delay of specific effects to make text information easier to see]
Next, a modified example will be described in which the start timing of a specific effect that displays a substantially single color in the display area of the effect display device 1600 can be delayed. Figure 348 is a time chart showing an example of when a preview display is executed. Note that only the parts that differ from the above embodiment will be described below, and redundant explanations will not be provided.

In this example, specific effects are displayed in a whiteout mode, in which almost the entire display area of the effect display device 1600 is turned white, and in a blackout mode, in which almost the entire display area of the effect display device 1600 is turned black.

In addition, the pachinko machine 1 of this example is capable of displaying text information such as numerical values and character dialogue in a portion of the display area of the effect display device 1600 to display a preview indicating the likelihood of a jackpot. Furthermore, the background image of the preview display may be displayed in a whiteout mode, in which substantially the entire display area of the effect display device 1600 is white, or in a blackout mode, in which the display area is black, in certain effects. By making the background image of the preview display substantially a single color in the whiteout or blackout mode, the text information in the preview display is easier to see.

However, because the preview display is displayed relatively early after the start of the variable effect, if the player realizes that a jackpot will not occur or that the jackpot expectation is low early after the start of the variable effect based on the jackpot expectation suggested by the preview display, there is a risk that the player will lose interest in the variable effect currently being performed. Therefore, in this example pachinko machine, the player can delay the start of the specific effect through operation, and by using a normal background image instead of a specific effect as the background image for the preview display, it becomes more difficult to see the text information in the preview display compared to when a specific effect is being performed as the background image for the preview display. This makes it difficult to understand the jackpot expectation early after the start of the variable effect, preventing the player from losing interest in the variable effect at an early stage.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 348(A), before the preset period T1 has elapsed since the start of the display of the changing patterns (since the change pattern command has been received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310), i.e., based on the reception of the change pattern command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the timer begins measuring; and if the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated in a specific manner (e.g., an operation to start a special period during which the start timing of the special performance can be delayed (a pressing operation in this example)) before the period T1 has elapsed during which the start timing of the special performance is met (t1'), a special period during which the start timing of the special performance can be delayed is started in accordance with the operation of the performance operation unit 300 (performance operation unit 301 (touch operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303)). Note that when the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated in a specific manner, text information different from the preview display (e.g., "Special performance delayed") is displayed in a static state on the performance display device 1600. This makes it easy to recognize when the start timing of a specific effect is delayed.

In addition, if a specific operation is performed on the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 (t2') before the predetermined period T1 has elapsed (before the specific effect starts) after the display of the changing patterns has begun (after the change pattern command has been received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310), that is, before the period T1 has elapsed, during which the conditions for starting the specific effect are met, a special period is initiated that allows the start timing of the specific effect to be delayed, and the specific effect will not start even if the predetermined period T1 has elapsed since the display of the changing patterns began.

Specifically, in this example, as shown in Figure 348 (A), after the display of the changing patterns begins (after the change pattern command is received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310), that is, after the timer starts measuring based on the reception of the change pattern command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, a pre-set period T1 has elapsed, and a warning display is displayed on the performance display device 1610, and text information indicating the likelihood of a jackpot (for example, "30%, "0%, "50%, etc., or "Super Hot!", "Win Confirmed!", "Lose Confirmed...", etc.) is displayed in a static state (t2').

In addition, if the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated in a specific manner (t1') before the preset period T1 has elapsed since the start of the display of the changing patterns (after receiving a changing pattern command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310), i.e., before the start of a specific effect, a special period is initiated that allows the start timing of the specific effect to be delayed, and the specific effect will not start even if the preset period T1 has elapsed since the start of the display of the changing patterns.

Furthermore, as described above, when the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is specifically operated, that is, when the special period begins, text information different from the preview display (for example, "Specific performance delayed") is displayed in a static state in a portion of the display area of the performance display device 1600 (this may be different from the area where the text information as the preview display is displayed, or some of the areas may overlap), and if the performance operation unit 300 is specifically operated during the special period, that is, when the special period ends, the display of the above-mentioned text information ceases. This makes it easy to recognize that the start timing of the specific performance has been delayed or that the special period has ended.

Furthermore, if the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated in a specific manner (for example, an operation (pressing operation) to start a special period that can delay the start timing of a specific performance) and then the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated in a special manner (for example, an operation (ending operation) to end the special period) (t2"), the special period ends, and the specific performance begins when a preset period T1 has elapsed since the special operation (t3').

As described above, during special effects, a whiteout or blackout effect is displayed, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed in a generally uniform, single-color mode in which characters, scenery, etc. are not displayed. (If a reserved number is displayed on the effect display device 1600, this reserved number may be displayed during special effects, or if a corresponding decorative pattern smaller than the decorative pattern displayed in the center of the effect display device 1600 is displayed on the periphery of the effect display device 1600, this corresponding decorative pattern may be displayed during special effects. In other words, it is sufficient that the area overlapping with the text information or the specified range including the text information is displayed in a generally uniform, single-color mode in which characters, scenery, etc. are not displayed.) Therefore, when used as a background image for text information displayed in a portion of the display area of the effect display device 1600 as a preview, only this text information is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a different color, making the text information easily visible. On the other hand, during normal times (when no special effects or reach effects are being executed, and when waiting for the start of a fluctuation), the background image displayed on the effect display device 1600 displays characters, scenery, etc. in various colors (multi-color mode). Additionally, the appearance of the text information displayed as a preview does not change between when a specific effect is being performed and during the special period. In other words, the image displayed in the background of the text information has a significant impact on the visibility of the text information. Therefore, by changing the background image of the text information between a state in which a substantially uniform single color is displayed and a state in which characters, scenery, etc. are displayed in various colors (multi-colored state) when a specific effect is being performed and when the special period begins after the specific effect has ended, the text information becomes more difficult to see during the special period than when a specific effect is displayed as the background image of the text information displayed in the preview during the specific effect.

In other words, for players who want to see the text information displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a preview indicating the likelihood of a jackpot, the text information can be easily recognized by executing a specific effect as a background image for the text information displayed on a portion of the display area of the effect display device 1600 as a preview without specifically operating the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300. On the other hand, for players who do not want to see the text information displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a preview indicating the likelihood of a jackpot, the start timing of the specific effect can be delayed by specifically operating the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 before the start of the specific effect, preventing the specific effect from being executed as a background image for the text information displayed on a portion of the display area of the effect display device 1600 as a preview. Furthermore, the text information can be made more difficult to see than when a specific effect is being executed by displaying a normal background image as a background image for the text information displayed on a portion of the display area of the effect display device 1600 as a preview. This allows for games that suit the player's preferences and prevents a decline in interest in the game.

In this example, a whiteout or blackout mode is displayed across the entire display area of the performance display device 1600 as a specific effect, but it is sufficient that a substantially uniform single color is displayed around (contacting parts, boundaries) the text information displayed in at least a portion of the display area of the performance display device 1600, with no characters, scenery, or other features displayed; it is also possible for characters, scenery, or other features to be displayed in a color different from the whiteout or blackout mode in a portion of the performance display device 1600. Furthermore, the specific effect is not limited to only executing a whiteout or blackout mode, and as long as there is a period in which a whiteout or blackout mode is displayed as part of the specific effect, there may also be a period in which a mode other than the whiteout or blackout mode is displayed.

Furthermore, even during the special period in this example, the special period will not end if an operation means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the presentation operation unit 300 (for example, the touch operation unit 302, volume adjustment button 227, light intensity adjustment button 228, etc. of the presentation operation unit 300) is operated until the pressing operation unit 303 of the presentation operation unit 300 is specially operated. This prevents the special period from ending at a time unintended by the player or gaming facility staff while the preview display is being executed, and ensures that the text information displayed as a preview display is difficult to see.

Furthermore, even during the special period in this example, if the touch operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated after the display of changing patterns has begun but before the conditions for starting the specific effect are met, it will be difficult to delay the specific effect for a period arbitrarily determined by the player, etc. However, whether or not the conditions for starting the specific effect have been met will be determined based on the period calculated from the end of operation of the touch operation unit 302, rather than the period calculated from the start of the display of changing patterns.

Specifically, if the touch operation unit 302 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated before the period T1 has elapsed since the variable pattern command was received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, that is, before the conditions for starting a specific effect are met after the variable display of the symbols has begun, the specific effect will not be executed even if the preset period T1 has elapsed since the variable display of the symbols began, but will start based on the fact that the preset period T1 has elapsed since the operation of the touch operation unit 302 ended.

In this case, it becomes possible to delay the start timing of the specific effect within the preset period T1. This makes it possible to delay the start timing of the specific effect even in cases where a player, etc. who is attempting to delay the start timing of the specific effect by performing a specific operation (in this example, a press operation) on the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, accidentally operates the touch operation unit 302, or in cases where it is desired to delay the start timing of the specific effect for only a short period within the period T, and when the preview display is executed, the normal background image is displayed, making the text information used as the preview display more difficult to see than when the specific effect is being executed.

In addition to, or separate from, the touch operation section 302 of the effect operation unit 300, it is also possible to determine whether the conditions for starting a specific effect have been met based on the period calculated from when the handle touch sensor 192 no longer detects the player's touch, rather than the period calculated from when the variable display of symbols begins when the handle touch sensor 192 detects the player's touch. In this case, simply performing normal play by touching the handle touch sensor 192 can delay the start timing of the specific effect, and when a preview display is executed, the normal background image can be displayed, making it difficult to see the text information used as a preview display.

In addition, while the above example shows the special period being terminated by a player operation, the special period may also be terminated if the presentation operation unit 300 is not operated for a certain period of time. In other words, in addition to the above-mentioned player operation as the condition for terminating the special period, the fulfillment of the special period termination condition may be determined based on the period calculated from the later of when the special period started or when operation of the presentation operation unit 300 ended. In this case, the period for determining that the special period termination condition is fulfilled may be set to a period longer than the period T1 for determining that the start condition of the specific presentation is fulfilled. This makes it possible to ensure that the specific presentation is not displayed as a background image when a preview display is executed by delaying the start timing of the specific presentation for a period longer than the period corresponding to the operation of an operation unit other than the pressing operation unit 303 (e.g., the touch operation unit 302 or the steering wheel touch sensor 192, etc.), thereby making it difficult to see the text information used as a preview display. Furthermore, when a preset period T1 has elapsed since the end of the special period, the conditions for starting the special effect are met and the special effect begins. Therefore, even if the special period ends because an end condition other than the player's special operation (end operation) is met, such as the period calculated from the later of starting the special period or ending operation of the effect operation unit 300 reaching a preset period, it is possible to prevent the special effect from starting immediately, and to reliably prevent the special effect from being displayed as a background image, making it difficult to see the text information used as a preview display.

In addition to the player's operation described above as a condition for ending the special period, the special period may be ended when the handle touch sensor 192 detects contact or when a ball enters one of the ball entry ports (for example, all or specific ball entry ports (for example, first start port 2002 and second start port 2004) among the general entry port 2001, first start port 2002, gate 2003, second start port 2004, and large entry port 2005)), thereby satisfying the condition for ending the special period and restarting the timer from the initial value. In this case, no special operation is required to end the special period, and the special period can be ended without causing any inconvenience to the player after the preview display has ended.

Furthermore, if a specific operation is performed on the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 while a specific effect is being executed, the currently executing specific effect may be terminated. In this case, a special period may be started after the specific effect has ended (the timer value may be reset based on the specific operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and measurement by the timer may be suspended until the special period has ended), or the special period may not be started after the specific effect has ended.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 348 (B), when a preset period T1 has elapsed since the start of the symbol variation display (since the variation pattern command has been received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310), the special effect begins (t2). In this example, a preview display also begins when the special effect begins, and text information suggesting the likelihood of a jackpot is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

If the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated in a specific manner (t3') before the execution period T2 of this specific effect has elapsed (before the specific effect has ended), the specific effect currently being executed may be terminated even if it is in the middle of being executed. In other words, if the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated in a specific manner before all of the effects previously set as specific effects have been executed, the specific effect currently being executed may be terminated in the middle, and the background image of the preview display may be changed from the specific effect to the normal background image.

In this case, when the preview display and the specific effect are being executed simultaneously, the player can terminate the specific effect by simply performing a specific operation on the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, changing the background image of the preview display from a state in which a substantially uniform, single color is displayed, with no display of the characters, scenery, etc. in the specific effect, to a state in which the normal character, etc., is displayed in various colors. This makes it difficult to see the text information displayed as the preview display on the effect display device 1600 compared to when the specific effect is being executed. Furthermore, if the special period ends at a time unintended by the player, such as when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the later of the start of the special period or the end of the operation of the effect operation unit 300, the specific effect can be terminated by a specific operation by the player, even if the specific effect begins after the end of the special period, and the background image of the preview display can be changed from a state in which a substantially uniform, single color is displayed, with no display of the characters, scenery, etc. in the specific effect, to a state in which the normal character, etc., is displayed in various colors. This makes it difficult to see the text information displayed as the preview display on the effect display device 1600 compared to when the specific effect is being executed.

In addition to the above, a specific effect may also be terminated when one or any combination of the following is detected: when contact by the player is detected by the handle touch sensor 192; when rotation is detected by the handle rotation detection sensor 189; when a contact operation is detected on the contact operation section 302 of the effect operation unit 300; when operation of the volume adjustment button 227 is detected; when operation of the light intensity adjustment button 228 is detected; when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated to change the volume; when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated to change the light intensity (brightness). When the specific effect is configured to end when the handle touch sensor 192 detects contact by the player or when the handle rotation detection sensor 189 detects rotation, the specific effect can be ended by simply touching the handle 195 to play the game or by rotating the handle 195 without any special operation, and the background image of the preview display can be changed from a state in which a substantially uniform single color is displayed in which the aspects of characters, scenery, etc. in the specific effect are not displayed, to a state in which the aspects of characters, etc. in normal times are displayed in various colors. Therefore, it is possible to make the text information displayed as the preview display on the effect display device 1600 more difficult to see than when the specific effect is being executed, and the touch operation unit 30 of the effect operation unit 300 If the specific effect is configured to end when touch operation 2 is detected, when operation of volume adjustment button 227 is detected, or when operation of light intensity adjustment button 228 is detected, then if the preview display and the specific effect are being executed simultaneously, the specific effect can be ended with a simple operation of operating touch operation unit 302, volume adjustment button 227, or light intensity adjustment button 228, and the background image of the preview display can be changed from a state in which a substantially uniform single color is displayed that does not display the aspects of characters, scenery, etc. in the specific effect, to a state in which the aspects of characters, etc. in normal times are displayed in various colors, making it possible to make the text information displayed as a preview display on effect display device 1600 more difficult to see than when the specific effect is being executed.

Furthermore, if a special effect is to be started after the special period has ended based on the fulfillment of the conditions for starting the special effect, it may be possible to start from the first special effect, rather than from the effect where the special effect was interrupted. In other words, if the conditions for starting a special effect are met, the special effect may always be executed from the beginning. In this case, the contents of the special effect can be executed in their entirety regardless of when the special effect was interrupted, making it possible to achieve the effects of the special effect (such as attracting attention) as designed.

In addition, even if a specific effect is terminated based on a specific operation performed on the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 while the specific effect is being executed, a special period may be initiated, and the start timing of the specific effect may be delayed for a period determined arbitrarily by the player, etc. In this case, even if the specific effect is terminated midway, the start timing of the specific effect may be delayed for a period determined arbitrarily by the player, etc., making it more difficult to see the text information displayed as a preview on the effect display device 1600 compared to when the specific effect is being executed, thereby ensuring that a game that suits the player's preferences can be played.

In addition, if the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is subjected to a specific operation (pressing operation in this example) intermittently, the specific performance may not be started, or even if the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is subjected to a specific operation (pressing operation in this example) intermittently, the special period may be started at the timing when the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is subjected to a specific operation (pressing operation in this example), and the special period may be ended when a certain period has elapsed since the start of the special period (when a certain period has elapsed since the pressing operation unit 303 was subjected to a specific operation (pressing operation in this example)), allowing the specific performance to be started. In other words, when the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is intermittently operated in a specific manner (a pressing operation in this example), the timer value may be reset and timer measurement may be suspended until the specific operation (a pressing operation in this example) is completed. Alternatively, when the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is intermittently operated in a specific manner (a pressing operation in this example), the timer value may be reset, but measurement may be resumed from the initial value without being suspended. In a configuration in which a specific performance is not started when the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is intermittently operated in a specific manner (a pressing operation in this example), a special period may be started when the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated in a specific manner (a pressing operation in this example), the special period may be ended by operating the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 in a special manner after the specific operation (a pressing operation in this example) is completed, and the start conditions for the specific performance may be determined based on the period calculated from the end of the special period.

Furthermore, in addition to or separately from the above, when text information is displayed as a preview display, a specific performance may not be started when a special operation means other than the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is intermittently operated. Alternatively, when text information is displayed as a preview display and a special operation means other than the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is intermittently operated, a specific performance may be started when a certain period of time has passed since the operation of the special operation means began. In other words, when a special operation means other than the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated, the timer value may be reset, and if the operation is performed intermittently, the timer may not start measuring. Alternatively, when a special operation means other than the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated, the timer value may be reset, but even if the operation is performed intermittently, the timer may measure the elapsed period from when the operation was first performed without resetting the timer value or interrupting the timer measurement.

If the system is configured so that a specific performance will not start if a special operating means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated intermittently when text information is displayed as a preview display, it may be determined whether or not the conditions for starting the specific performance are met based on the period of time calculated from when operation of the special operating means is stopped.Alternatively, if the system is configured so that a specific performance will start even if a special operating means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated intermittently when text information is displayed as a preview display, it may be determined whether or not the conditions for starting the specific performance are met based on the period of time calculated from when operation of the special operating means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is started. In other words, when a special operation means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated, the timer value may be reset, and timer measurement may be suspended for the period during which the operation continues, with the timer measuring the period that has elapsed since the operation ended to determine whether or not the conditions for starting a specific performance have been met; alternatively, when a special operation means other than the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is operated, the timer value may be reset, but even if the operation continues, the timer value may not be reset or measurement may not be suspended, and the timer may measure the period that has elapsed since the operation was first performed to determine whether or not the conditions for starting a specific performance have been met.

The special operation means may also be provided with multiple special operation means. For example, a configuration may be provided with a first special operation means and a second special operation means, and a specific effect may not be started if the first special operation means is operated intermittently when text information is displayed as a preview display, while a specific effect may be started even if the second special operation means is operated intermittently when text information is displayed as a preview display. Alternatively, a specific effect may not be started if either the first special operation means or the second special operation means is operated intermittently when text information is displayed as a preview display. Alternatively, a specific effect may be started even if either the first special operation means or the second special operation means is operated intermittently when text information is displayed as a preview display. In other words, when the first special operation means is operated, the timer value may be reset, and timer measurement may be suspended for the period during which the operation is continuing, and the timer may measure the period of time that has passed since the operation was completed, to determine whether or not the conditions for starting a specific effect have been met; on the other hand, when the second special operation means is operated, the timer value may be reset, but even if the operation is continuing, the timer may not reset the timer value or suspend measurement, and the timer may measure the period of time that has passed since the operation was first performed, to determine whether or not the conditions for starting a specific effect have been met; when either the first special operation means or the second special operation means is operated, the timer value may be reset, and timer measurement may be suspended for the period during which the operation is continuing, and the timer may measure the period of time that has passed since the operation was completed, to determine whether or not the conditions for starting a specific effect have been met; or when either the first special operation means or the second special operation means is operated, the timer value may be reset, but even if the operation is continuing, the timer may not reset the timer value or suspend measurement, and the timer may measure the period of time that has passed since the operation was first performed, to determine whether or not the conditions for starting a specific effect have been met.

Furthermore, in addition to or separately from the above, when a non-special operation means different from the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 and the special operation means described above is operated, the start timing of the specific performance may be started even before a preset period T has elapsed since the non-special operation means was operated, without delaying the start timing of the specific performance, regardless of whether the operation is intermittent or not. In other words, even if a non-special operation means is operated, the timer may continue measuring without resetting the value. In this way, the device may be equipped with one or any combination (or all) of a specific operation means (in this example, the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300) that can delay the start timing of at least the specific performance for a first period, a special operation means that can delay the start timing of the specific performance for a second period shorter than the first period, and a non-special operation means that cannot delay the start timing of the specific performance.

The special operation means may be any one or any combination of the handle 195 (handle touch sensor 192, handle rotation detection sensor 189), the touch operation section 302 of the effect operation unit 300, the volume adjustment button 227, the light intensity adjustment button 228, etc. Furthermore, if the system is configured to prevent a specific effect from starting when text information is displayed as a preview and the player touches the handle 195 and the handle touch sensor 192 intermittently detects the player's contact, or when text information is displayed as a preview and the handle 195 is rotated and the handle rotation detection sensor 189 intermittently detects the rotation, then the specific effect can be prevented from starting simply by touching or rotating the handle 195 to play the game, without any special operation, and the text information as a preview can be made more difficult to see than when the specific effect is being executed. Furthermore, if a specific performance is configured not to start when the touch operation unit 302 of the performance operation unit 300 is touched intermittently while text information is displayed as a preview, when the volume adjustment button 227 is operated intermittently while text information is displayed as a preview, or when the light intensity adjustment button 228 is operated intermittently while text information is displayed as a preview, then a simple operation can be used to prevent the specific performance from starting, making the text information displayed as a preview more difficult to see than when the specific performance is being executed.

In addition, the possibility of delaying the start timing of a specific effect may be varied depending on whether or not there is a possibility of a jackpot. For example, when text information is displayed as a preview in a non-win effect execution state where there is absolutely no possibility of a jackpot, the start timing of the specific effect can be delayed by performing a specific operation (in this example, a press operation) on the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, as described above. On the other hand, when text information is displayed as a preview in a win effect execution state where there is a higher possibility of a jackpot (higher jackpot expectation) than in a non-win effect execution state, it may be impossible to delay the start timing of the specific effect by performing a specific operation (in this example, a press operation) on the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300. By configuring it in this way, displaying text information as a preview when there is absolutely no possibility of a jackpot is an unpleasant and unnecessary effect for the player. Therefore, by delaying the start timing of the specific effect, the text information as a preview is more difficult to see than when a specific effect is being executed. On the other hand, when text information is displayed as a preview when there is a possibility of a jackpot, the gameplay intended by the designer can be realized and the player's attention can be drawn to the effect being executed.

Furthermore, whether or not a specific effect currently being executed is terminated may be varied depending on whether or not there is a possibility of a jackpot. For example, when text information is displayed as a preview during a non-win performance execution state where there is absolutely no possibility of a jackpot, it is possible to terminate the specific effect midway through its execution by performing a specific operation (in this example, a press operation) on the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300, as described above. On the other hand, when text information is displayed as a preview during a win performance execution state where there is a higher possibility of a jackpot (higher jackpot expectation) than during a non-win performance execution state, it is possible to prevent the specific effect from being terminated midway through its execution by performing a specific operation (in this example, a press operation) on the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300. By configuring it in this way, displaying text information as a preview when there is absolutely no possibility of a jackpot is an unpleasant and unnecessary effect for the player. Therefore, by pausing the specific effect, the text information as a preview is made more difficult to see than when the specific effect is being executed. On the other hand, when text information is displayed as a preview during a possible jackpot, the game can be played as intended by the designer, and the player's attention can be drawn to the effect being executed.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 348 (C), once a preset period T1 has elapsed since the variable symbol display began in the win possibility effect execution state (since the variable pattern command was received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310), that is, since the variable pattern command was received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, measurement by the timer begins, and once the period T1 during which the start condition for the specific effect is met has elapsed, the specific effect will begin (t2). In addition, when the specific effect begins, a preview display also begins, and text information suggesting the likelihood of a jackpot is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

Furthermore, if the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated (t3') before the execution period T2 of the specific effect in this win-possible effect execution state has elapsed (before the specific effect has ended), the specific effect currently being executed will continue without being terminated, unlike in the non-win-possible effect execution state. In other words, in the win-possible effect execution state, which has a higher possibility of a jackpot (higher expectation of a jackpot) than the non-win-possible effect execution state, the specific effect currently being executed will continue and the specific effect will be displayed as the background image for the preview effect until all of the effects previously set as specific effects have been executed, even if the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is operated (t3'), and the background image will not change to the normal background image.

The examples of effects (display of text information) during the specific effects and special periods described above are merely examples, and the specific effects and special periods are not limited to those described above. For example, if a specific effect has a period in which a whiteout or blackout mode is displayed as part of the effect, it may be an effect that introduces a gaming machine or character, or it may not be limited to a special period that displays text information (such as "Specific effect delayed") notifying that the start timing of the specific period has been delayed, but may also be a period for selecting a game mode or a period for determining game-related settings.

Furthermore, the specific effects performed in the non-winning effect execution state and the specific effects performed in the winning effect execution state described above do not have to be identical, and some of the display, sound, light emission, etc. may be the same or similar, or the specific effects performed in the non-winning effect execution state may be different from the specific effects performed in the winning effect execution state. Furthermore, the specific effects do not have to be performed during periods when variable effects are being performed, but may be performed during periods when variable effects are not being performed. In this case, the establishment of the start conditions for the specific effect may be determined based on any one or any combination of the following: the period from when a stop display command is received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 to when a variable pattern command is received, the period until a start winning command is received, the period until a player's contact is detected by the handle touch sensor 192, the period until rotation is detected by the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the period until operation of the volume adjustment button 227 is detected, the period until operation of the light intensity adjustment button 228 is detected, etc. In other words, regardless of whether a variable effect is being performed or not, any implementation is possible as long as it makes it possible to delay the start timing of a specific effect when a preview display begins, or to end a specific effect that is currently being performed when a specific effect and a preview display are being performed simultaneously. Additionally, the mode of the special period performed in the non-winning effect execution state may be different from the mode of the special period performed in the winning effect execution state.

Furthermore, the special period performed in the non-winning effect execution state and the special period performed in the winning effect execution state do not have to be the same; some of the displays, sounds, lighting, etc. may be the same or similar, and the mode of the special period performed in the non-winning effect execution state may be different from the mode of the special period performed in the winning effect execution state. Furthermore, the special period does not have to be performed during a period in which a variable effect is being performed, but may be performed during a period in which a variable effect is not being performed. In other words, regardless of whether a variable effect is being performed or not, any implementation form is acceptable as long as it makes it possible to delay the start timing of the special period when the preview display begins. Furthermore, the mode of the special period performed in the non-winning effect execution state may be different from the mode of the special period performed in the winning effect execution state.

In addition, the above examples show devices that delay the start timing of a specific effect when a preview display is initiated, and devices that end a specific effect that is currently being executed when a specific effect and a preview display are being executed simultaneously, but when controlling the effect display device 1600, multiple LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the gaming board 5, and multiple LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the door frame in a specific effect mode as a specific effect, devices may also be used that delay the start timing of a specific effect when a preview display is initiated for some of the effect display device 1600, multiple LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the gaming board 5, and multiple LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the door frame, or that end (interrupt) part of a specific effect when a specific effect and a preview display are being executed simultaneously. Furthermore, in gaming machines that are equipped with an auxiliary display device different from the effect display device 1600 in addition to the effect display device 1600, if the machine is configured to control the auxiliary display device in a specific effect mode in addition to the effect display device 1600 as a specific effect, it is possible to delay the start timing of the specific effect only on the auxiliary display device when a preview display starts, or to end only the specific effect being executed on the auxiliary display device when the specific effect and the preview display are being executed simultaneously.

In addition, if the configuration is such that when a preview display is initiated, the start timing of a specific effect is delayed for some of the effect display device 1600, the auxiliary display device, and the multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5, and the multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame, or if a specific effect and a preview display are being executed simultaneously and a specific effect is terminated (interrupted) for part of the specific effect, when the specific effect for this part is started or resumed, the start timing of the specific effect is delayed or the specific effect being executed is controlled in a specific effect mode that is synchronized with the specific effect mode being executed in the electronic components (the effect display device 1600, the auxiliary display device, and the multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5, and the multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame) for which the specific effect being executed has not been terminated (interrupted) midway. As a result, when a preview display is initiated, the start timing of a specific effect can be delayed for some of the LEDs mounted on the effect display device 1600, the auxiliary display device, the various decorative boards on the game board 5, and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame, or even if a specific effect currently being executed is only partially terminated (interrupted) when a specific effect and a preview display are being executed simultaneously, a unified specific effect can be executed across the effect display device 1600, the auxiliary display device, the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board 5, and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame.

In addition, when a specific operation is performed on the pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300 while a specific effect is being executed, at least the mode (whiteout mode, blackout mode) displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a specific effect may be terminated, and the multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and the multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame may be configured to continue the light-emitting mode being executed during the specific effect (which may be a light-emitting mode that is executed as a specific effect for at least a certain period of time after the mode displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a specific effect has ended, or a light-emitting mode that continues an abnormality notification light-emitting mode for at least a certain period of time after the mode displayed on the effect display device 1600 as a specific effect has ended when an abnormal condition has occurred).

In addition, in the above example, when text information as a preview display and a specific effect are displayed simultaneously on the effect display device 1600, the start timing of the specific effect is delayed or the specific effect is ended. However, the text information displayed on the effect display device 1600 is not limited to that corresponding to the preview display, as long as it is more difficult to see when a normal background image when no effect is being executed is displayed than when a specific effect is being displayed as the background image. For example, when abnormality information (text information indicating the nature of the abnormality (for example, "door open error")) is displayed in a static state as text information on the effect display device 1600 when an abnormal condition occurs, this abnormality information may be more difficult to see when a normal background image is being displayed than when a specific effect is being executed.

[Button operation and display modes]
Next, a modified example will be described in which the display mode of the effect display device 1600 is changed depending on the operation mode of the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300. FIG. 349 is a timing chart showing an example of the display mode of the effect display device 1600, and FIG. 350 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the display mode of the effect display device 1600. Note that only the differences from the above embodiment will be explained below, and redundant explanations will not be provided. Furthermore, the following modified example may be implemented in combination with the above-mentioned example; for example, a specific effect that has the possibility of a jackpot in the above example may be implemented as the first specific effect below, and a specific effect that does not have the possibility of a jackpot in the above example may be implemented as the second specific effect below, or may be implemented as a different effect from the specific effect in the above example.

The pachinko machine 1 in this example is capable of executing a first specific presentation that has the potential for a jackpot and a second specific presentation that does not have the potential for a jackpot. It is possible to distinguish between the first specific presentation that has the potential for a jackpot and the second specific presentation that does not have the potential for a jackpot by pressing the press operation unit 303 of the presentation operation unit 300. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 349 (A), if the press operation unit 303 of the presentation operation unit 300 is pressed during the period from the start of the second specific presentation that does not have the potential for a jackpot (ts) to the end of the second specific presentation (te) (t1), the non-win mode is displayed on the presentation display device 1600 until the period T1 has elapsed since the press operation unit 303 was pressed (t2). In this way, in this example, the non-win mode is displayed when the press operation unit 303 is pressed, allowing the player to recognize that the second specific presentation that does not have the potential for a jackpot is being executed.

In addition, in this example, the non-winning mode is displayed on the performance display device 1600 based on the pressing of the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 during the second specific performance which does not have the possibility of a jackpot (t1), and if the press operation unit 303 is subsequently continuously pressed for a certain period of time (for example, a period longer than period T1) without being released, the non-winning mode displayed on the performance display device 1600 is hidden (the display of the non-winning mode disappears) based on the fact that the preset period T1 has elapsed since the press operation of the press operation unit 303 began, even while the press operation of the press operation unit 303 is still in progress (t2). In other words, the non-winning mode displayed on the performance display device 1600 is hidden at a timing (t2) prior to the timing (t3) when the press operation of the press operation unit 303 is released.

In this example, as shown in Figures 350 (A) to (D), after the second specific effect has started (A), if the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed (B), a crying character and the words "Sorry! You've Lost" are displayed on the effect display device 1600 as the non-winning mode 1600a. Furthermore, if the pressing operation unit 303 remains pressed for a preset period T1, the non-winning mode 1600a displayed on the effect display device 1600 is hidden (C), and the second specific effect ends (D). In this way, if the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed during the second specific effect, the non-winning mode 1600a is displayed, making it easy for the player to recognize that there is no possibility of a jackpot. Furthermore, when the press operation unit 303 is pressed and a preset period T1 has elapsed, the display of the non-winning mode 1600a disappears from the effect display device 1600. This allows for an effect that takes into consideration players who become disappointed when the non-winning mode 1600a is displayed based on their press of the press operation unit 303 and are unable to release the press operation of the press operation unit 303, and does not excessively reduce their interest in the game. Furthermore, if the press operation unit 303 is pressed again during the execution of the second specific effect after the display of the non-winning mode 1600a from the effect display device 1600 has disappeared, the non-winning mode 1600a may be displayed again on the effect display device 1600, allowing the player to visually confirm that there is no possibility of a jackpot by seeing the non-winning mode 1600a that is displayed again.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 349 (B), when the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed during a second specific performance in which there is no possibility of a jackpot, the non-winning state is displayed on the performance display device 1600 (t1), and if the press operation of the press operation unit 303 subsequently repeatedly changes between a released state and a pressed state in a short period of time (at least a period shorter than T1) (t1 to t3'), the non-winning state displayed on the performance display device 1600 continues to be displayed without being hidden (t2) even if the press operation of the press operation unit 303 is released when the predetermined period T1 has elapsed since the start of the press operation of the press operation unit 303. In other words, after the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 begins (t1), the non-winning mode displayed on the performance display device 1600 continues to be displayed without being hidden even after the period T1 has elapsed (t2), and after the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed (t3'), the non-winning mode displayed on the performance display device 1600 is hidden (the display of the non-winning mode disappears) based on the elapse of the preset period T1 (t4).

In other words, in Figure 350 (B), the non-winning state 1600a is displayed on the performance display device 1600 based on the pressing of the press operation unit 303, and if the pressing of the press operation unit 303 subsequently changes repeatedly between a released state and a pressed state in a short period of time (at least a period shorter than T1), such as when the press operation unit 303 is pressed repeatedly, the non-winning state 1600a displayed on the performance display device 1600 continues to be displayed without being hidden even if the pressing operation of the press operation unit 303 is released in Figure 350 (C), and if the press operation unit 303 is not pressed again before the predetermined period T1 has elapsed since the pressing of the press operation unit 303 was pressed, the non-winning state 1600a displayed on the performance display device 1600 is hidden (the display of the non-winning state is erased). In this way, when the press operation unit 303 is pressed during the second specific effect, the non-winning mode 1600a is displayed, and if the press operation unit 303 is subsequently pressed repeatedly, the non-winning mode 1600a displayed on the effect display device 1600 continues to be displayed without being hidden, even if the period during which the press operation unit 303 is repeatedly pressed is longer than the preset period T1. This makes it possible to warn a player who is angry at the display of the non-winning mode 1600a and is hitting the press operation unit 303, and it is possible to protect the press operation unit 300 and prevent it from malfunctioning or being destroyed.

In addition, based on the pressing operation unit 303 being pressed during the second specific performance, the non-winning state 1600a is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and if the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 repeatedly changes between a released state and a pressed state in a short period of time (at least a period shorter than T1), such as when the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed repeatedly, the non-winning state 1600a displayed on the performance display device 1600 is changed. For example, each time the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed a predetermined number of times (which may be once or twice or more), the face of the character displayed as the non-winning state 1600a may be changed (for example, gradually changing from a crying face to an angry face), the text displayed as the non-winning state 1600a may be changed (for example, changing from "Sorry! You lost" to "You lost," "It won't change even if you hit it," etc.), and each time the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed a predetermined number of times (which may be once or multiple times), the non-winning state 1600a may be switched between a state in which it is displayed on the performance display device 1600 and a state in which it is hidden from the performance display device 1600 (the number of operations A of the pressing operation unit 303 when switching from a state in which the non-winning state 1600a is displayed on the performance display device 1600 to a state in which it is hidden, and the number of times when the non-winning state 1600a is displayed on the performance display device 1600 to a state in which it is hidden, etc., may be changed). The number of times A' of operating the pressing operation unit 303 when switching between the non-winning state and the special non-winning state (for example, a character or the like) may be different from the number of times B of operating the pressing operation unit 303 when switching between the non-winning state and the special non-winning state (for example, a character or the like) may be different from the number of times A' of operating the pressing operation unit 303 when switching between the non-winning state and the special non-winning state (for example, a character or the like) each time the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed a predetermined number of times (which may be once or multiple times). This allows the player to be warned by varying the level of the warning depending on the number of times the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed repeatedly, or by highlighting the non-winning mode 1600a by displaying or disappearing the non-winning mode 1600, thereby protecting the pressing operation unit 303 and preventing it from malfunctioning or being destroyed. Furthermore, if the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed again during the execution of the second specific effect after the display of the non-winning mode 1600a has disappeared from the effect display device 1600, the non-winning mode 1600a may be displayed again on the effect display device 1600, thereby providing reassurance that there is no possibility of a jackpot, and allowing a warning to be issued to a player who repeatedly presses the pressing operation unit 303 again after the display of the non-winning mode 1600a has disappeared, thereby protecting the pressing operation unit 303 and preventing it from malfunctioning or being destroyed.

On the other hand, if the non-winning state is displayed on the performance display device 1600 based on the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 being pressed during the second specific performance (t1), and the pressing operation on the press operation unit 303 is then continued for a certain period of time (for example, a period longer than period T1) without being released, the non-winning state 1600a displayed on the performance display device 1600 is not changed, and the non-winning state displayed on the performance display device 1600 is hidden (the display of the non-winning state is erased) based on the elapse of the preset period T1 from the start of the pressing operation on the press operation unit 303. In this way, if there is no risk of malfunction or destruction of the press operation unit 303, no warning is given to the player, thereby preventing discomfort to the player and further damage to an already disappointed player.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 349 (C), when the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed (t1) during the first specific effect which has the potential for a jackpot, the non-winning mode is not displayed on the effect display device 1600 regardless of the timing of the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303. Therefore, by not displaying the non-winning mode, the player can recognize that the first specific effect which has the potential for a jackpot is being executed, making the player hope for a jackpot and drawing attention to the first specific effect, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In other words, as shown in Figure 350 (A') to (D'), during the first specific presentation that has the potential for a jackpot (A'), the presentation display device 1600 does not display the non-winning mode (B') to (D') even if the pressing operation unit 303 of the presentation operation unit 300 is pressed. Furthermore, because the non-winning mode is not displayed on the presentation display device 1600 regardless of the timing of the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, the player can be sure that the first specific presentation that has the potential for a jackpot is being executed, and can attract attention to the first specific presentation displayed on the presentation display device 1600, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game. Furthermore, if the pressing operation unit 303 of the presentation operation unit 300 is pressed during a preset period while the first specific presentation is being executed, a winning indication mode (a mode suggesting a win or the possibility of a win) different from the non-winning mode may be displayed. This allows the player to visually see the winning indication and recognize that the first specific effect, which has the potential to result in a jackpot, is being executed, making the player look forward to a jackpot and drawing their attention to the first specific effect displayed on the effect display device 1600, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, while Figures 350 (A') to (D') show examples in which the first specific effect is executed and results in a jackpot, the first specific effect will also be executed in the event of a loss. In other words, when the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed, the non-win mode is not displayed on the effect display device 1600, so even if a first specific effect that has the potential to result in a jackpot is executed, it is not possible to determine whether it will result in a jackpot or a loss. This prevents players who recognize that the first specific effect is being executed from losing interest in the first specific effect that is currently being executed, and prevents a decline in interest in the game by having them focus on the first specific effect displayed on the effect display device 1600 until the result (the jackpot symbol or the loss symbol) is determined.

In addition, in this example, the first or second specific effect is executed in response to the receipt of a variation pattern command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, this is not limiting, and the first or second specific effect (or just one of them) may be executed in response to the receipt of a specific control command transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. For example, the determination of whether to execute the first or second specific effect (or just one of them) may be made based on the elapsed time since the start hole winning command was received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 (the elapsed time since the start hole winning command was received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is measured by a timer), the elapsed time since the stop display command was received (the elapsed time since the stop display command was received from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is measured by a timer), etc. In this case, the start timing of the first specific effect or the second specific effect (or just one of them) can be changed, preventing players from getting bored.

Furthermore, when a non-winning mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the non-winning mode displayed on the effect display device 1600 may be hidden (the display of the non-winning mode may be erased) by performing an operation other than the above-described pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303. That is, the non-winning mode may be displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on a first operation (in this example, a pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303) being performed on the effect display device 300 during the second specific effect, and the non-winning mode displayed on the effect display device 1600 may be hidden (the display of the non-winning mode may be erased) based on a second operation (e.g., a predetermined operation on the touch operation unit 302, or a first ending operation on the touch operation unit 302 and a second ending operation on the pressing operation unit 303) being performed on the effect display device 1600 while the non-winning mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600. This makes it possible to implement effects that take into consideration players who feel uncomfortable when the non-winning mode is displayed, without excessively reducing their interest in the game.

In addition, when a predetermined operation unit other than the effect operation unit 300 (for example, any one or a combination of any two or more (or all) of the handle 195, volume adjustment button 227, light intensity adjustment button 228, etc.) is operated, the effect display device 1600 may be configured to display a special mode that is different from the non-winning mode not only during the second specific effect but also during the first specific effect, making it difficult to determine whether or not a jackpot is possible. In this case, the player may be disappointed when the special mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600 even though the first specific effect is being executed, but if the player realizes that this is not the non-winning mode, their expectations for a jackpot can be immediately raised, and if a jackpot occurs without the player realizing that it is not the non-winning mode, the player's interest in the game can be enhanced by the sudden occurrence of something unexpected. In this case, the special mode may be changed in response to the operation of the predetermined operation unit, and the change in the special mode may suggest that it is different from the non-winning mode.

Furthermore, because the second specific effect described above does not have the potential to result in a jackpot, its execution could discourage the player and reduce their interest in the game. For this reason, in this example, the second specific effect is executed only when certain conditions are met, preventing an excessive decrease in interest in the game. Specifically, the second specific effect can be executed when a jackpot has not been achieved and a certain period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the handle touch sensor 192 stopped detecting the player's contact. This prevents the so-called "stop shot," which stops the release of game balls, and improves the operating rate of the gaming machine. Alternatively, or in addition to the above conditions, the second special effect may be executed when a predetermined period of time has passed since the handle rotation detection sensor 189 stopped detecting rotation even if a jackpot has not been achieved, when a predetermined period of time has passed since the stop display command was received even if a jackpot has not been achieved, or when the reserved numbers of first special symbols and second special symbols (first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number) are 0. This also prevents stop shots and improves the operating rate of the gaming machine.

The second specific effect and non-winning mode described above are merely examples and are not limited to those described above. For example, the second specific effect may display a mode unrelated to the changing display of the symbols, such as an introduction to a gaming machine or character, and the non-winning mode may not be limited to a notification that a jackpot will not be won, but may also display a mode unrelated to the changing display of the symbols (such as a setting display) on the effect display device 1600.

Furthermore, the first specific effect that has the potential for a jackpot and the second specific effect that does not have the potential for a jackpot may be the same or similar in some or all aspects (e.g., rainbow light emission, rainbow effect display, etc.) of the display mode of the effect display device 1600, the sound output mode of the speaker 122, and the light emission modes of the multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and door frame 3, or the first specific effect and the second specific effect may be different aspects. Furthermore, one or both of the first specific effect and the second specific effect do not have to be performed during periods when variable effects are being performed, but may also be performed during periods when variable effects are not being performed, and may be executed as effects such as the above-mentioned pre-reading notices, for example. This increases the variety of effects and can increase the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, in gaming machines equipped with an auxiliary display device capable of displaying images separate from the effect display device 1600, the non-winning state may be displayed on the auxiliary display device based on the pressing operation unit 303 being pressed during the second specific effect, or a special state may be displayed on the auxiliary display device based on the operation of a specified operation unit different from the effect operation unit 300. In this case, it becomes possible to display the non-winning state or special state without interfering with the visibility of the second specific effect executed by the effect display device 1600.

In addition, if the non-winning state is displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the pressing operation unit 303 being pressed during the second specific effect, the second specific effect may be interrupted (ended midway through execution). In this case, the non-winning state can be displayed in place of the second specific effect displayed on the effect display device 1600, making it easier to see the non-winning state displayed on the effect display device 1600 and allowing immediate notice when the non-winning state is displayed. In addition, after the specific effect is interrupted when the non-winning mode is displayed (t1), the second specific effect may be started based on the disappearance of the display of the non-winning mode (t2 in Figure 349(A) and t4 in Figure 349(B)), or after the specific effect is interrupted when the non-winning mode is displayed (t1) and the display of the non-winning mode is disappeared, an effect different from the second specific effect (which may not be a special effect, as with the display waiting for the start of variation) may be performed, and the second specific effect may be started when a predetermined period has elapsed since the display of the non-winning mode disappeared or since the pressing operation unit 303 was last operated (for example, t2 + n seconds (for example, n = 30) in Figure 349(A) or t1 + T1 + n seconds (for example, T1 + n = 30) in Figure 349(A), t4 + n seconds (for example, n = 30) in Figure 349(B) or t3' + T1 + n seconds (for example, n = 30) in Figure 349(B)). Furthermore, if a special mode is displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the operation of a specific operation unit other than the effect operation unit 300 during the second specific effect, the second specific effect may be continued without interruption. This makes it possible to make the player aware that a special mode has been displayed, i.e., that it is not a non-winning mode.

In addition, the first and second specific effects displayed on the effect display device 1600 involve the display of varying patterns, and the display mode changes over time. On the other hand, the non-winning mode displayed on the effect display device 1600 does not change its display mode over time, but rather changes its display mode in response to the operation of the effect operation unit 300. In other words, videos are displayed as the first and second specific effects, and a still image is displayed as the non-winning mode. Therefore, when the non-winning mode is displayed instead of the second specific effect displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the pressing operation unit 303 being pressed during the second specific effect, the effect display device 1600 changes from a state in which a video is displayed to a state in which a still image is displayed. In this way, by significantly changing the display mode on the effect display device 1600 from a state in which a video is displayed to a state in which a still image is displayed, it becomes easier to notice that the winning mode has been displayed. Furthermore, when the non-winning mode is ended and the non-winning mode is displayed on the performance display device 1600, it is sufficient that at least the non-winning mode is displayed as a still image, and the display mode of some of the background display, etc. displayed in a layer below the non-winning mode may change over time.

In addition, in the above example, if the pressing operation unit 300 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed during the second specific performance, the non-winning state 1600a is displayed on the performance display device 1600, and if the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed continuously for a certain period of time, the non-winning state is hidden based on the fact that a predetermined period T1 has passed since the pressing operation unit 303 was operated, even while the pressing operation unit 303 is being operated, and if the pressing operation unit 303 repeatedly changes between a pressed state and a released state, the non-winning state is hidden unless the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed again before the predetermined period T1 has passed since the pressing operation unit 303 was pressed (based on the fact that a predetermined period T1 has passed since the pressing operation unit 303 was last operated). In the above example, the non-winning mode is not displayed, but if the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is continuously pressed for a certain period of time after the non-winning mode 1600a is displayed on the performance display device 1600, the non-winning mode 1600a will continue to be displayed, but a predetermined display or a predetermined performance will be executed based on the elapse of a preset period T1 since the press operation unit 303 was operated, and if the press operation unit 303 repeatedly changes between a pressed state and a released state after the non-winning mode 1600a is displayed on the performance display device 1600, the predetermined display or a predetermined performance will be executed unless the press operation unit 303 is pressed again before the preset period T1 has elapsed since the press operation unit 303 was pressed.

For example, similar to the delay in the start of the specific performance described above, if the press operation unit 300 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed during a specific display performance, the specific display performance will continue and the start of the second specific performance will be delayed; however, if the press operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is continuously pressed for a certain period of time, the specific display performance will be terminated and the specific performance will be started based on the fact that a preset period T1 has passed since the press operation unit 303 was operated, even if the press operation unit 303 is still being pressed; and if the press operation unit 303 repeatedly changes between a pressed state and a released state, the specific display performance will be terminated and the specific performance will be started if the press operation unit 303 is not pressed again before the preset period T1 has passed since the press operation unit 303 was pressed. In this case, when the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed, the non-winning state 1600a may be displayed on the performance display device 1600. In addition, as described above in [Button operation mode and display mode], the timing at which the display of the non-winning state 1600a ends may be varied depending on whether the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed continuously for a certain period of time or whether it is changed between a pressed state and a non-pressed state in a short period of time, or control related to this control (for example, control to change the state of the non-winning state 1600a by operating the pressing operation unit 303, etc.) may be executed. Furthermore, the specified display mode is not limited to a changing pattern mode, and may also be a standby display waiting for the changing display to begin, etc.

In addition, in the above example, the end and start times of a predetermined display (e.g., non-winning state 1600a) and a predetermined presentation (e.g., second specific presentation) are shown to differ depending on whether the pressing operation unit 303 of the presentation operation unit 300 is pressed continuously for a certain period of time or whether it is changed between a pressed state and a non-pressed state in a short period of time. However, this is not limited to when the pressing operation unit 303 of the presentation operation unit 300 is pressed, but can also be achieved when the touch operation unit 302 of the presentation operation unit 300 is continuously touched for a certain period of time or The start and end times of a predetermined display (for example, non-winning mode 1600a) or a predetermined effect (for example, second specific effect) may be different when there is a change between a contact operated state and a non-contact operated state in a short period of time, or the start and end times of a predetermined display (for example, non-winning mode 1600a) or a predetermined effect (for example, second specific effect) may be different when there is continuous contact with the handle touch sensor 192 for a certain period of time and when there is a change between a contact state and a non-contact state in a short period of time.

[Specific abnormal conditions]
Next, we will explain modified examples in the event that a specific abnormal condition occurs during the execution of a first specific effect that has the potential for a jackpot or a second specific effect that does not have the potential for a jackpot. Figure 351 (A) is a timing chart showing an example of the effect mode during the second specific effect, Figure 351 (B) is a timing chart showing an example of the effect mode during the first specific effect, and Figure 352 (C) is a timing chart showing an example of a modified effect mode during the second specific effect. Note that only differences from the above embodiment will be described below, and redundant explanations will not be provided. Furthermore, the following modified examples may be implemented in combination with the above-described example. For example, the specific effect in the above example that has the potential for a jackpot may be implemented as the first specific effect below, and the specific effect in the above example that does not have the potential for a jackpot may be implemented as the second specific effect below, or they may be implemented as effects separate from the specific effects of the above example.

As described above, the pachinko machine 1 of this example detects abnormal states (door open abnormal state in which the door frame open switch detects that the door frame 3 has been opened relative to the main frame 4 or that the main frame open switch has detected that the main frame 4 has been opened relative to the outer frame 2; vibration detection abnormal state in which the vibration sensor detects vibration of the game board 5 for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds); lower tray full abnormal state in which a detection signal is input from the full tank detection sensor 154; ball out abnormal state in which a detection signal is input from the ball out detection sensor 574; radio wave detection abnormal state in which the radio wave sensor detects unauthorized radio waves; When an abnormal magnetic detection state occurs in which a magnetic field acting illegally is detected within the door frame 5a, when a detection signal is input from the second start opening sensor 2401 when the second start opening 2004 is not open, or when a detection signal is input from the large winning opening sensor 2402 when the game is not in a big winning game state or a small winning game state, an abnormality notification display mode (text information showing the content of the abnormality (for example, "door open"), etc.) is displayed on the performance display device 1600, an alarm sound is output from various speakers 622, or various decorative boards (in this example, the door frame unit) provided on the door frame side are turned on. The various LEDs mounted on the unit (including the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3, and in the case of the divided game board 5A, various decorative boards provided on the right game board 5AR) are illuminated in an abnormality notification illumination mode, and the various decorative boards provided on the game board side (in this example, the rear upper decorative board 1402 on the rear upper side on which LEDs for illuminating and decorating the rear upper first decorative part 3211 of the decorative boards (the functional display board 1402 is not included in the decorative boards because it does not perform decoration) provided on the game board 5 are mounted) are illuminated in an abnormality notification illumination mode. An abnormal condition is alerted by turning off various LEDs mounted on decorative boards other than the first decorative board and the rear upper second decorative board (only one of which may be installed) on which LEDs for illuminating and decorating the rear upper second decorative portion 3212 are mounted, or in the case of a divided gaming board 5A, on the decorative boards on the left gaming board 5AL other than the rear upper first decorative board on which LEDs for illuminating and decorating the rear upper first decorative portion 3211 are mounted and the rear upper second decorative board (only one of which may be installed) on which LEDs for illuminating and decorating the rear upper second decorative portion 3212 are mounted. Note that the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the gaming board side may also be illuminated in an abnormality alert illumination mode. In other words, when an abnormal condition occurs, it is sufficient that the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the various decorative boards on the gaming board side are controlled to a preset illumination mode, including extinguishing, as an abnormality illumination mode (abnormality alert illumination mode).

In addition, the second specific effect can be executed with some functions restricted if a specific abnormal condition from among the abnormal conditions described above occurs (in this example, a door open abnormal condition is shown, but it could also be all of the multiple abnormal conditions mentioned above, or one or any combination of the multiple abnormal conditions mentioned above). For example, if a specific abnormal condition occurs while the second specific effect is being executed in the effect display device 1600, an abnormality alert display mode is displayed on the highest layer (top layer) of the effect display device 1600, but the second specific effect continues to be displayed on a layer below the abnormality alert display mode on the effect display device 1600. In other words, the area on the effect display device 1600 that displays the second specific effect and the area that displays the abnormality alert display mode based on the occurrence of a specific abnormal condition overlap, and by displaying the abnormality alert display mode on the highest layer and the second specific effect on a layer below the abnormality alert display mode, the second specific effect and the abnormality alert display mode are displayed simultaneously.

In this example, if the above-mentioned specific abnormal condition occurs while the first or second specific effect is being executed, the various LEDs (which may be all or some) mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side and the various decorative boards provided on the game board side are interrupted from their light-emitting mode corresponding to the first specific effect (first specific light-emitting mode) or their light-emitting mode corresponding to the second specific effect (second specific light-emitting mode), the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side are made to emit light in an abnormality alert light-emitting mode, and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side are turned off. Then, when the abnormal condition is resolved (in this example, the door frame opening switch detects that the door frame 3 is closed relative to the main frame 4, or the main frame opening switch detects that the main frame 4 is closed relative to the outer frame 2), the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side cease to emit light in the abnormality notification light mode, the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side cease to light up, and if a first specific effect is being played, they resume emitting light in the light mode corresponding to the first specific effect (first specific light mode), or if a second specific effect is being played, they resume emitting light in the light mode corresponding to the second specific effect (second specific light mode).

When the light emission mode corresponding to the first specific effect (first specific light emission mode) or the light emission mode corresponding to the second specific effect (second specific light emission mode) is resumed based on the elimination of the abnormal condition, the light emission mode corresponding to the time elapsed since the start of the first specific effect or the second specific effect is not resumed from the light emission mode at the time of interruption, but is instead set to the light emission mode corresponding to the time elapsed since the start of the first specific effect or the second specific effect. In other words, when the light emission mode corresponding to the first specific effect (first specific light emission mode) or the light emission mode corresponding to the second specific effect (second specific light emission mode) is started, a timer is started to measure light emission in the light emission mode corresponding to the timer, and the timer continues to measure light emission without interruption between the interruption and resumption of the light emission in the light emission mode corresponding to the first specific effect (first specific light emission mode) or the light emission mode corresponding to the second specific effect (second specific light emission mode), and the light emission is resumed in the light emission mode corresponding to the timer when the light emission mode corresponding to the first specific effect (first specific light emission mode) or the light emission mode corresponding to the second specific effect (second specific light emission mode) is started.

In addition, in this example, even after the specific abnormal condition is resolved, for a certain period of time (e.g., 30 seconds), the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side are illuminated in an abnormality alert light-emitting mode, and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side are extinguished. In other words, after a certain period of time has passed since the specific abnormal condition is resolved, if a first specific effect is being executed, illumination is resumed in the light-emitting mode corresponding to the first specific effect (first specific light-emitting mode), and if a second specific effect is being executed, illumination is resumed in the light-emitting mode corresponding to the second specific effect (second specific light-emitting mode). Meanwhile, the abnormality alert display mode displayed on the effect display device 1600 is hidden when the specific abnormal condition is resolved. As a result, not only can the occurrence of a specific abnormal condition be grasped in real time through the abnormality notification display mode displayed on the performance display device 1600, but even after the specific abnormal condition has been resolved, it can be grasped that the specific abnormal condition has been occurring for a certain period of time through the abnormality notification light emission mode of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards installed on the door frame side, making it easier to detect when fraudulent activity is occurring or has occurred, and to deter the occurrence of fraudulent activity.

In addition, in this example, when the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed during the second specific effect, which does not have the possibility of a jackpot, the light emission mode of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side, which emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the second specific effect (second specific light emission mode), is changed. Specifically, when the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed during the second specific effect, the light emission mode corresponding to the second specific effect (second specific light emission mode) by the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side is terminated, and the various LEDs are caused to emit light in a special light emission mode different from the light emission mode corresponding to the second specific effect (second specific light emission mode). In this example, the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side are made to emit white light as the special light emission mode.

The light emitted by the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side is easily visible to players and is noticeable over a wide area of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, if the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side are emitting light in a light-emitting mode (second specific light-emitting mode) corresponding to a second specific presentation that does not have the possibility of a jackpot, the light may be visible to players and cause discomfort. Therefore, in this example, the pachinko machine 1 allows players to terminate the light-emitting mode (second specific light-emitting mode) corresponding to the second specific presentation when the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side are emitting light in accordance with the second specific presentation, thereby preventing the unpleasant light from continuing and reducing a decline in interest in the game.

The special light-emitting mode is not limited to the above, as long as it is a light-emitting mode that is different from the second specific light-emitting mode. Furthermore, the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side may emit different light colors, or one of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side may emit light in a specified color while the other is turned off.

In addition, in this example, even if the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed during a door opening abnormal state, which is a specific abnormal state that occurs during the second specific performance that does not have the possibility of a jackpot, it is possible to change the light emission mode of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 351 (A), if a door open abnormality occurs at a predetermined timing (t1) between the start of the second specific effect (which does not have the possibility of a jackpot) (ts) and the end of the second specific effect (te), where the door frame opening switch detects that the door frame 3 has been opened relative to the main frame 4 or that the main frame opening switch has opened the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, the second specific effect displayed on the effect display device 1600 will continue, and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the various decorative boards on the game board will cease to emit light in the light emission mode corresponding to the second specific effect (second specific light emission mode) (t1), the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side will emit light in the abnormality notification light emission mode, and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side will be turned off.

In addition, although not shown, in an abnormal door open state, a door open notification sound (an announcement voice saying "The door is open" and a warning sound such as a "ding dong") is repeatedly output from various speakers at a predetermined volume (which may be the maximum volume that can be set, or a default volume adjusted using a volume adjustment switch on the peripheral control board 1510) for a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds), or the output stops when the main frame 4 that was open relative to the outer frame 2 is closed. (Note that the output may stop after a certain number of repeated outputs (e.g., five times) even if the main frame 4 continues to be open relative to the outer frame 2 or the door frame 3 continues to be open relative to the main frame 4, or the output may continue until the main frame 4 that is open relative to the outer frame 2 or the door frame 3 that is open relative to the main frame 4 is closed, or the output may continue until a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the main frame 4 that is open relative to the outer frame 2 or the door frame 3 that is open relative to the main frame 4 is closed.)

When the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed during the abnormal door opening state (t2), the light emission modes of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side do not change. However, after the abnormal door opening state is resolved and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side have ceased to emit light in the abnormality notification light emission mode and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board have ceased to emit light (t4), the LEDs are changed to a special light emission mode different from the light emission mode corresponding to the second specific effect (second specific light emission mode).

In this example, if a door open abnormal condition occurs as a specific abnormal condition during the second specific performance which does not have the possibility of a jackpot, causing the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards mounted on the door frame side to light up in an abnormality notification light-emitting mode and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards mounted on the game board side to turn off, by pressing the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300, the door open abnormal condition will be resolved, causing the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards mounted on the door frame side to stop lighting up in the abnormality notification light-emitting mode and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards mounted on the game board side to stop lighting up in the abnormality notification light-emitting mode, and then causing the various LEDs to light up in a special light-emitting mode rather than in the light-emitting mode corresponding to the second specific performance (second specific light-emitting mode). Therefore, for players who do not want the light to continue in the light emission mode corresponding to the second specific effect (second specific light emission mode), which does not have the possibility of a jackpot, it is possible to change the light emission mode by pressing the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, even during the door open abnormal state, which is a specific abnormal state, and since there is no limit to the period during which the light emission in the light emission mode corresponding to the second specific effect (second specific light emission mode) can be ended, it is possible to prevent players from feeling anxious or uncomfortable.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 352 (C), if the pressing operation section 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed during the above-mentioned specific abnormal state that occurs during the second specific performance (t2), the display of the second specific performance being executed by the performance display device 1600 may be terminated and the display of the special performance may be started. In this case, if a special effect is being displayed when the abnormal door opening state is resolved and the illumination of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side in the abnormality alert illumination mode and the extinguishing of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side are terminated, the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side are made to illuminate in the special illumination mode; if a second specific effect is being displayed, the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side are made to illuminate in an illumination mode corresponding to the second specific effect (second specific illumination mode); if a first specific effect is being displayed, the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side are made to illuminate in an illumination mode corresponding to the first specific effect (first specific illumination mode); and if another display such as standby is being displayed, the various LEDs are made to illuminate in an illumination mode corresponding to another state (which may be extinguished).

The special effect may be set to end when a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 was pressed. In this case, the second specific effect may be executed again after the special effect has ended, or another effect (which may not execute a special effect, as with the variation start waiting display) may be executed after the special effect has ended, and then the second specific effect may be executed again if predetermined effect conditions are met. In other words, the second specific effect may not be executed while the special effect is being executed, but the second specific effect may be executed after the special effect has ended, or the second specific effect may be executed again if predetermined effect conditions are met after the special effect has ended. Furthermore, if the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed again while the second specific effect is being executed, a special effect may be executed again, causing the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side to emit light in a special light-emitting mode. This provides an opportunity for players who do not wish the second specific effect to continue or who do not wish the light to continue in the light-emitting mode corresponding to the second specific effect (second specific light-emitting mode) to change the effect or the light-emitting mode, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game. Furthermore, when the door opening abnormal state is resolved and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side are turned off in the abnormality notification light emitting mode and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side are turned off, the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side are turned on in the special light emitting mode based on the fact that the special effect display is being performed. Alternatively, when the door opening abnormality is resolved and the illumination of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side in the abnormality alert illumination mode and the extinguishing of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side are terminated, the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side may be caused to illuminate in an illumination mode corresponding to the second specific illumination (second specific illumination mode) according to the second specific illumination. In this case, pressing the pressing operation unit 303 again may end the second specific illumination and enable the special illumination, and the illumination mode corresponding to the second specific illumination (second specific illumination mode) of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side may be terminated and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side may be caused to illuminate in the special illumination mode. Furthermore, if the performance operation unit 300 is operated to end during a special performance, it is possible to end the special performance, and if the performance operation unit 300 is operated in a manner different from the end operation, the period until the special performance ends can be extended; in other words, the time when the second specific performance starts can be delayed. In this case, by operating the performance operation unit 300 in a manner different from the end operation during a special performance, it becomes possible to delay the time when light emission in the light emission mode corresponding to the second specific performance (second specific light emission mode) starts.

In addition, when the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed during the second specific effect, text information such as letters and symbols may be displayed on the effect display device 1600. For example, the effect display device 1600 may display the non-winning state in which there is no possibility of a jackpot, or the fact that the second specific effect is continuing as a special display state, or, when the second specific effect is ended based on the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, that the second specific effect has ended, or that a special effect is being executed in place of the second specific effect. This makes it easy for the player to recognize that the second specific effect is being executed, that there is no possibility of a jackpot, that the second specific effect has ended, etc. In addition, some of the text information displayed on the effect display device 1600 may be changed depending on the operation of the effect operation unit 300. This allows players to kill time until the second specific effect ends, and if the period until the special effect ends is extended based on operating the effect operation unit 300 in a manner different from the end operation, the player will be able to recognize that the period until the special effect ends has been extended, in other words, that the start of the second specific effect has been reliably delayed, giving the player a sense of security and preventing a decline in interest in the game.

Furthermore, a special effect that is beneficial to the player may be executed. That is, since the second specific effect does not offer the possibility of a jackpot and is therefore useless to the player, and only serves to discourage and annoy the player, it may be possible to terminate the second specific effect when the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed. On the other hand, the special effect that is executed in place of the second specific effect when the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed may be one that is beneficial to the player, allowing the player to customize the game to their liking or enjoy the game. For example, the special effect may introduce a character, introduce a reach effect, notify the player of the probability of winning, set the volume, set the light intensity, select the effect mode, or the like. This reduces the player's annoyance when the second specific effect, which does not offer the possibility of a jackpot, is terminated and a special effect is initiated, preventing an excessive decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, in this example, when the pressing operation unit 303 of the presentation operation unit 300 is pressed during the first specific presentation which has the possibility of a jackpot, the light emission modes of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side, which emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the first specific presentation (first specific light emission mode), are not changed; and even when the pressing operation unit 303 of the presentation operation unit 300 is pressed during a door open abnormal state, which is a specific abnormal state that occurs during the first specific presentation which has the possibility of a jackpot, the light emission modes of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side are not changed. Furthermore, if the pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed during a preset period while the first specific effect is being executed, the first specific effect may be continued without executing the special effect, but the display mode of the effect display device 1600 may be changed (for example, a winning suggestion mode may be displayed that suggests that a win has occurred or that there is a possibility of a win), or the light emission data may be changed by updating a pointer indicating the light emission data arranged in time series that constitutes the schedule data for generating a light emission mode that indicates the light emission mode (first specific light emission mode) corresponding to the first specific effect by the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side (the first specific light emission mode is continued, but the light emission data is changed to other light emission data from the schedule data for generating a light emission mode as the first specific light emission mode), or the effect display device 1600 may be configured to display a winning suggestion mode (a mode that suggests that a win has occurred or that there is a possibility of a win) that is different from the display of the special effect. This allows the player to visually confirm the winning indication and recognize that the first specific effect, which has the potential for a jackpot, is being executed, thereby creating anticipation for a jackpot and drawing attention to the first specific effect displayed on effect display device 1600, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game. Even if the second specific effect is terminated and a special effect is executed when press operation unit 303 of effect operation unit 300 is pressed during the second specific effect, the first specific effect may not be terminated and the special effect may not be initiated if press operation unit 303 of effect operation unit 300 is pressed during the first specific effect, which has the potential for a jackpot. Furthermore, the first specific effect may not be terminated and the special effect may not be initiated even if press operation unit 303 of effect operation unit 300 is pressed during a door-open abnormal state, which is a specific abnormal state that occurs during the first specific effect, which has the potential for a jackpot.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 351 (B), if a door open abnormality occurs at a predetermined timing (t1) between the start of a first specific effect with the possibility of a jackpot (ts) and the end of the first specific effect (te), where the door frame opening switch detects that the door frame 3 has been opened relative to the main frame 4, or that the main frame opening switch has opened the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, the effect display device 1600 continues to display the first specific effect while displaying "Door Open" as a door open abnormality notification display mode, and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the various decorative boards on the game board side cease to emit light in the light emission mode corresponding to the first specific effect (first specific light emission mode) (t1), the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side emit light in the abnormality notification light emission mode, and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side are turned off.

If the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed during the door opening abnormal state (t2), the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board continue to emit light in the abnormality alert light mode without changing the light emission mode of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the game board side, and the first specific effect displayed on the effect display device 1600 continues without terminating. If the first specific effect is still being executed (t4) after the light emission in the abnormality alert light mode of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the extinguishing of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board have terminated based on the resolution of the door opening abnormal state, the light emission mode corresponding to the first specific effect (first specific light emission mode) is again activated.

In this example, if a door-open abnormality occurs as a specific abnormal condition during the first specific presentation, which has the potential for a jackpot, causing the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame to illuminate in an abnormality alert light-emitting mode and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board to be extinguished, even if the pressing operation unit 303 of the presentation operation unit 300 is pressed, the door-open abnormality condition is resolved, and after the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame have ceased to illuminate in an abnormality alert light-emitting mode and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board have ceased to be extinguished, they are again caused to illuminate in an illumination mode corresponding to the first specific presentation (first specific illumination mode). Furthermore, even if the pressing operation unit 303 of the presentation operation unit 300 is pressed during the door-open abnormality, which is a specific abnormal condition that occurs during the first specific presentation, which has the potential for a jackpot, the first specific presentation displayed on the presentation display device 1600 continues without terminating. Therefore, after the emission in the abnormality notification emission mode has ended, the emission in the emission mode corresponding to the first specific effect (first specific emission mode) continues, giving the player a sense of security that the first specific effect is being executed, and drawing attention to the display of the first specific effect executed by the effect display device 1600, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, if the first specific effect is not being executed when the door opening abnormality state is resolved and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side are turned off and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side are turned off, the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side may be made to emit light in an emission mode different from that of the first specific effect (which may be an emission mode (including off) that is executed when no special effect is being executed, as with the variation start waiting display). In other words, if the first specific effect has already ended, the special lottery result is displayed and the display of the varying symbols has ended, so unnecessary emission in an emission mode corresponding to the first specific effect (first specific emission mode) can be suppressed, and the various LEDs may be made to emit light in an emission mode that corresponds to the state of play when the door opening abnormality state is resolved and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side are turned off and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side are turned off and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side are turned off.

In addition, in this example, even if a specific abnormal condition, such as a door-open abnormality, occurs during a first specific performance that has the potential for a jackpot or a second specific performance that does not, the various decorative boards provided on the gaming board, including the first upper rear decorative board on which LEDs are mounted to illuminate the first upper rear decorative portion 3211 and the second upper rear decorative board on which LEDs are mounted to illuminate the second upper rear decorative portion 3212 (only one of these is acceptable), will continue to emit light during the first or second specific performance until the first or second specific performance ends. This allows the player to recognize that the first or second specific performance is continuing, preventing the player from feeling anxious or distrustful.

Furthermore, even if the effect display device 1600 is configured to display text information such as letters and symbols when the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed during the second specific effect, it is possible to prevent text information such as letters and symbols from being displayed on the effect display device 1600 based on the fact that the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed during the first specific effect. This allows the player to recognize that the second specific effect is being performed and, therefore, that there is no possibility of a jackpot by visually recognizing the text information such as letters and symbols displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed. Furthermore, if the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed but no text information such as letters and symbols is displayed on the effect display device 1600, expectations for a jackpot can be increased, and this can draw attention to the first specific effect being executed by the effect display device 1600 and prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, when a predetermined operation unit other than the effect operation unit 300 (for example, any one or a combination of multiple (including all) of the handle 195, volume control button 227, light intensity control button 228, etc.) is operated, special character information such as characters or symbols different from the character information such as characters or symbols displayed on the effect display device 1600 may be displayed regardless of whether the second or first specific effect is in progress. In this case, although there is a risk that the display of special character information on the effect display device 1600 during the first specific effect may lead to the mistaken belief that the second specific effect is being executed, if a player who mistakenly believes the second specific effect is being executed realizes (after the end of the specific abnormal condition) that the first specific effect is being executed, this can immediately increase their expectations for a jackpot. Furthermore, if the result of the special jackpot lottery is displayed when the first specific effect ends without the player realizing that the first specific effect is being executed, the player's interest in the game can be enhanced by the sudden occurrence of an unexpected jackpot. In this case, the display mode of the special character information displayed on the effect display device 1600 may be changed in response to operation of a specified operation unit, and a player who notices that the first specific effect is being executed may be able to enjoy the changes in the special character information by operating a specified operation unit in the hope of hitting a jackpot. Alternatively, the display mode of the special character information may be changed in a manner different from the character information such as letters and symbols that is displayed based on pressing the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 during the second specific effect, making it easier to visually distinguish the special character information from the character information such as letters and symbols that is displayed based on pressing the press operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 during the second specific effect.

Furthermore, because the second specific effect described above does not have the potential to result in a jackpot, its execution could discourage the player and reduce their interest in the game. For this reason, in this example, the second specific effect is executed only when certain conditions are met, preventing an excessive decrease in interest in the game. Specifically, the second specific effect can be executed when a jackpot has not been achieved and a certain period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the handle touch sensor 192 stopped detecting the player's contact. This prevents the so-called "stop shot," which stops the release of game balls, and improves the operating rate of the gaming machine. Alternatively, or in addition to the above conditions, the second special effect may be executed when a predetermined period of time has passed since the handle rotation detection sensor 189 stopped detecting rotation even if a jackpot has not been achieved, when a predetermined period of time has passed since the stop display command was received even if a jackpot has not been achieved, or when the reserved numbers of first special symbols and second special symbols (first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number) are 0. This also prevents stop shots and improves the operating rate of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, the first specific effect that has the potential for a jackpot and the second specific effect that does not have the potential for a jackpot may be the same or similar in some or all aspects (e.g., rainbow light emission, rainbow effect display, etc.) of the display mode of the effect display device 1600, the sound output mode of the speaker 122, and the light emission modes of the multiple LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 and door frame 3, or the first specific effect and the second specific effect may be different aspects. Furthermore, one or both of the first specific effect and the second specific effect do not have to be performed during periods when variable effects are being performed, but may also be performed during periods when variable effects are not being performed, and may be executed as effects such as the above-mentioned pre-reading notices, for example. This increases the variety of effects and can increase the enjoyment of the game.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the light-emitting data groups that specify the light-emitting modes of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side are serially output as serial data from the serial communication line from the peripheral control board 1510. Furthermore, among the light-emitting data groups arranged in chronological order that make up the schedule data for generating light-emitting modes, the light-emitting data groups indicated by the pointer that indicates which light-emitting data group from the first light-emitting data group updated in the scheduler update process is to be output are serially output to the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side each time the peripheral control unit executes its regular processing (approximately every 33.3 ms in this example). In this way, because the light-emitting data groups are output at regular intervals, normal light emission can be quickly restored even in the event of abnormal light emission due to noise, etc., thereby improving the reliability of the pachinko machine 1. Note that this is output not only when the light emission data group pointed to by the pointer after the pointer update differs from the light emission data group pointed to by the pointer before the pointer update, but also when they are identical. Therefore, if the pointer points to a light emission data group that indicates light emission in a predetermined light emission mode for a certain period of time, even if light emission is caused to change due to noise or the like, the light emission mode can be quickly restored to the predetermined light emission mode, improving the reliability of the pachinko machine 1. Incidentally, serial data is transmitted one bit at a time at regular intervals synchronized with the clock input to the SCLK terminal of the LED driver.

[Alternative performance]
Next, we will explain a modified example in which, for the first specific effect that has the possibility of a jackpot and the second specific effect that does not have the possibility of a jackpot, a sound effect corresponding to the first specific effect is output from the speaker (speaker 622) provided in the pachinko machine 1 during the first specific effect, and a sound effect corresponding to the second specific effect is not output from the speaker (speaker 622) provided in the pachinko machine 1 during the second specific effect. Figure 353(A) is a timing chart showing an example of the effect mode during the second specific effect, Figure 353(B) is a timing chart showing an example of the effect mode during the first specific effect, Figures 354(A) to (D) are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the effect display device 1600 during the second specific effect, and Figures 354(A') to (D') are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the effect display device 1600 during the first specific effect. Note that, below, only the differences from the above embodiment will be explained, and redundant explanations will not be provided. Furthermore, the following modified examples may be implemented in combination with the above-described embodiments; for example, a specific effect that has the potential for a jackpot in the above-described embodiments may be implemented as the first specific effect below, and a specific effect that does not have the potential for a jackpot in the above-described embodiments may be implemented as the second specific effect below, or they may be implemented as effects separate from the specific effects in the above-described embodiments.

As described above, during the first specific effect, which has the potential for a jackpot, the pachinko machine 1 controls the LEDs mounted on the decorative boards on the door frame side and the game board side to emit light in a light-emitting mode (first specific light-emitting mode) corresponding to the first specific effect, and outputs sound effects corresponding to the first specific effect from the speaker (speaker 622) provided on the pachinko machine 1. Meanwhile, during the second specific effect, which does not have the potential for a jackpot, the LEDs mounted on the decorative boards on the door frame side and the game board side to emit light in a light-emitting mode (second specific light-emitting mode) corresponding to the second specific effect, and does not output sound effects corresponding to the second specific effect from the speaker (speaker 622) provided on the pachinko machine 1. Furthermore, if the pressing operation unit 300 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed during the execution of the second specific effect, which does not have the potential for a jackpot, the second specific effect is terminated. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 353 (A), a second specific effect that does not have the possibility of a jackpot is started, and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side are controlled to emit light in a light emission mode (second specific light emission mode) corresponding to the second specific effect, and the speaker (speaker 622) provided in the pachinko machine 1 is controlled to not output sound effects (ts), and if the pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed during the period (te) until the second specific effect is ended (t1), the second specific effect that does not involve output of sound effects from the speaker (speaker 622) provided in the pachinko machine 1 is ended, and the light emission mode (second specific light emission mode) corresponding to the second specific effect by the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side is ended. This not only makes it possible to end the second special effect, which lacks excitement because no sound effect is output from the speaker (speaker 622) installed in the pachinko machine 1, but also makes it possible to end the second special effect, which is useless to the player as it does not have the potential to result in a jackpot, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game due to the execution of the second special effect.

In addition, in this example, after the second specific effect is terminated based on the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, an effect similar to the special effect described above is executed, and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side are controlled to emit light in an illumination mode (special illumination mode) corresponding to the special effect, and the second specific effect is not executed while the special effect is being executed (t1). As described above, the special effect may also be executed to be beneficial to the player. In this case, the special effect is executed in place of the second specific effect, which is not beneficial to the player because it does not output any effect sound from the speaker (speaker 622) installed in the pachinko machine 1, thereby not only lacking excitement but also having no possibility of a jackpot. This prevents the second specific effect, which is beneficial to the player, from being executed for a long period of time, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game. Furthermore, the player's discomfort caused by the execution of the second specific effect is reduced, preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this example, when the special effect is executed after the second specific effect has ended, a sound effect corresponding to the special effect is output from the speaker (speaker 622) provided in the pachinko machine 1. Specifically, when the second specific effect ends and the special effect begins at timing t1 in Figure 353 (A), a special effect is executed that involves the output of a sound effect from the speaker (speaker 622) provided in the pachinko machine 1. This makes it possible to execute an exciting effect by outputting a sound effect from the speaker (speaker 622) provided in the pachinko machine 1 in addition to the display of the special effect executed by the effect display device 1600, and to prevent a decline in interest in playing the game.

In this example, as shown in Figures 354(A)-(D), after the second specific effect has started (A), when the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed (B), the effect display device 1600 displays a crying-face character and the text "Sorry! Lose!" as the non-winning mode 1600a, and displays a stopped decorative symbol, ending the second specific effect and terminating the light-emitting mode (second specific light-emitting mode) corresponding to the second specific effect, which is achieved by the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side. Thereafter, a special effect is executed in place of the second specific effect, and a sound corresponding to the special effect is output from the speaker (speaker 622) mounted on the pachinko machine 1, and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards on the game board side are controlled to emit light in the light-emitting mode (special light-emitting mode) corresponding to the special effect ((C), (D)). In this way, if the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed during the second specific effect, the non-winning mode 1600a is displayed to notify the player that there is no possibility of a jackpot, and then the second specific effect is ended and a special effect is executed in place of the second specific effect. This reduces the player's discomfort caused by the execution of a useless specific effect and prevents a decrease in interest in the game. Furthermore, because the non-winning mode 1600a displayed on the effect display device 1600 disappears after a specified period of time, an effect that is considerate of the player can be executed and does not excessively decrease interest in the game.

Furthermore, when the special effects described above are implemented to customize the game to the player's liking or to provide a beneficial effect for the player to enjoy the game, the special effects can be further enhanced by the output of sound effects from the speaker (speaker 622) provided in the pachinko machine 1. This reduces the player's discomfort at the execution of a useless second specific effect that not only does not involve the output of sound effects but also has no possibility of resulting in a jackpot, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In the above example, a special effect is executed that involves the output of sound effects from the speaker (speaker 622) provided in the pachinko machine 1 when the second specific effect is terminated based on the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 being pressed during the second specific effect that does not involve the output of sound effects. However, the present technical concept is not limited to the above, as long as the second specific effect is terminated based on the establishment of a predetermined condition during the second specific effect that does not involve the output of sound effects from the speaker (speaker 622) provided in the pachinko machine 1. For example, when the second specific effect is terminated based on the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 being pressed during the second specific effect that does not involve the output of sound effects from the speaker (speaker 622) provided in the pachinko machine 1, a special effect is executed in place of the second specific effect, but sound effects corresponding to the special effect may not be output from the speaker (speaker 622) provided in the pachinko machine 1 during the special effect. In addition, when the handle touch sensor 192 detects a touch by the player during the second specific performance that does not involve the output of a performance sound from the speaker (speaker 622) provided in the pachinko machine 1, a special performance may be executed instead of the second specific performance (the second specific performance is ended), and a performance sound corresponding to the special performance may be output from the speaker (speaker 622) provided in the pachinko machine 1, or the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 may be output during the second specific performance that does not involve the output of a performance sound from the speaker (speaker 622) provided in the pachinko machine 1. When a gaming ball enters the slot (when a start winning occurs), a special effect may be executed instead of the second specific effect (the second specific effect may be ended), and a sound effect corresponding to the special effect may be output from the speaker (speaker 622) provided in the pachinko machine 1. Alternatively, a first specific effect which has the possibility of a jackpot based on the results of a special lottery drawn when a gaming ball is received in the first starting slot 2002 or the second starting slot 2004 may be executed, and a sound effect corresponding to the first specific effect may be output from the speaker (speaker 622) provided in the pachinko machine 1. This prevents players from stopping their shots and improves the operating rate of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, as described above, the special effect may be executed for a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds), or the second specific effect may be executed again after the special effect has ended, or another effect (which may not execute a special effect, as with the fluctuation start waiting display) may be executed after the special effect has ended, and then the second specific effect may be executed again if predetermined effect conditions are met. In other words, the second specific effect may not be executed while the special effect is being executed, and the second specific effect may be executed after the special effect has ended, or the second specific effect may be executed again if predetermined effect conditions are met after the special effect has ended. Furthermore, if the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed again during the execution of the second specific effect, the special effect may be executed again, thereby reducing the player's discomfort caused by the execution of a special effect that is not beneficial to the player and preventing a decline in interest in the game. Furthermore, if the performance operation unit 300 is operated to end the special performance during the special performance, the special performance can be ended, and if the performance operation unit 300 is operated in a manner different from the end operation, the period until the special performance ends can be extended; in other words, the time when the second specific performance starts can be delayed. In this case, by operating the performance operation unit 300 in a manner different from the end operation during the special performance, it becomes possible to delay the time when light emission in the light emission mode corresponding to the second specific performance (second specific light emission mode) starts.

In addition, in a special effect that is executed based on pressing the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 during the second specific effect, text information such as letters and symbols may be displayed on the effect display device 1600. For example, the above-mentioned non-winning state in which there is no possibility of a jackpot, or the effect display device 1600 may display a special display state indicating that the second specific effect has ended, or that a special effect is being executed in place of the second specific effect, etc. This makes it easy for the player to recognize that there is no possibility of a jackpot, that the second specific effect has ended, etc. Furthermore, part of the text information displayed on the effect display device 1600 may be changed in response to operation of the effect operation unit 300 (e.g., a touch operation of the touch operation unit 302), or the text information may be switched between being displayed and not displayed on the effect display device 1600 in response to operation of the effect operation unit 300 (e.g., a press operation of the pressing operation unit 303). This makes it possible to kill time during the special effect, and if the period until the special effect ends is extended based on operating the effect operation unit 300 in a manner different from the end operation, the player will be able to recognize that the period until the special effect ends has been extended, in other words, that the start of the second specific effect has been reliably delayed, giving the player a sense of security and preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, in this example, during the first specific performance which has the potential for a jackpot, the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side are controlled to emit light in a light emission mode (first specific light emission mode) corresponding to the first specific performance, and a performance sound corresponding to the first specific performance is output from the speaker (speaker 622) provided in the pachinko machine 1.If the pressing operation unit 303 of the performance operation unit 300 is pressed during this first specific performance, the first specific performance is continued without being terminated, and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side are controlled to emit light in a light emission mode (first specific light emission mode) corresponding to the first specific performance, and the performance sound corresponding to the first specific performance is continued to be output from the speaker (speaker 622) provided in the pachinko machine 1. Similarly, even if the handle touch sensor 192 detects contact by the player during a first specific effect in which a sound corresponding to the first specific effect is output from the speaker (speaker 622) provided in the pachinko machine 1, the first specific effect continues without ending, and further, even if a game ball enters the first start hole 2002 or the second start hole 2004 (in the case of a start winning) during a first specific effect in which a sound corresponding to the first specific effect is output from the speaker (speaker 622) provided in the pachinko machine 1, the first specific effect continues without ending.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 353 (B), the speaker (speaker 622) outputs a sound corresponding to the first specific effect, and the first specific effect, which has the possibility of a jackpot, is initiated, and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side are controlled to emit light in a light-emitting mode (first specific light-emitting mode) corresponding to the first specific effect, and the speaker (speaker 622) provided on the pachinko machine 1 is controlled to output a sound corresponding to the first specific effect (ts), and this continues for a predetermined time until the first specific effect ends (te). Even if the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed at timing (t1), the first specific effect continues, accompanied by the output of effect sounds corresponding to the first specific effect from the speaker (speaker 622) provided in the pachinko machine 1, light emission control of the light emission mode (first specific light emission mode) corresponding to the first specific effect by the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side continues, and the output of effect sounds corresponding to the first specific effect from the speaker (speaker 622) provided in the pachinko machine 1 continues.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 354 (A') to (D'), after the first specific effect has started (A'), if the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 is pressed (B'), the decorative patterns displayed on the effect display device 1600 continue to change without stopping ((B') to (C')), and the decorative patterns are displayed in a stopped state based on the reception of a stop display command from the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 (D'). In this way, even if the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed during the first specific effect, the display of the changing decorative patterns continues, so that players who recognize the possibility of a jackpot can increase their expectations for a jackpot and focus their attention on the first specific effect.

In addition, the first specific performance may have a period during which no sound effect is output, or the second specific performance may have a period during which sound effect is output, or the second specific performance may not output sound effect from the speaker (speaker 622) throughout the entire period, while the first specific performance may output sound effect from the speaker (speaker 622) for at least a portion of the period. In other words, the present technical concept is applicable to any device that, while a first specific effect is being played, if the press operation unit 303 is pressed while a sound effect corresponding to the first specific effect is being output, or if the handle touch sensor 192 detects player contact, or if the game ball enters the first start hole 2002 or the second start hole 2004 (a start winning event occurs), the first specific effect will continue without ending; and if the press operation unit 303 is pressed while a sound effect is not being output during the second specific effect, or if the handle touch sensor 192 detects player contact, or if the game ball enters the first start hole 2002 or the second start hole 2004 (a start winning event occurs), the second specific effect will end (but is not limited to these).

Furthermore, even if the press operation unit 303 of the presentation operation unit 300 is pressed during the first specific presentation, the non-winning mode 1600a is not displayed. Therefore, even if there is a period during the first specific presentation when the presentation sound is not output, by pressing the press operation unit 303 of the presentation operation unit 300 during that period, it becomes possible to determine whether the first specific presentation or the second specific presentation is being performed. If it is determined that the first specific presentation is being performed, expectations for a jackpot increase, and it becomes possible to draw attention to the first specific presentation being performed by the presentation display device 1600 and prevent a decline in interest in the game. If the press operation unit 303 of the presentation operation unit 300 is pressed during a predetermined period during the performance of the first specific presentation, a winning indication mode (a mode suggesting that a win has occurred or that there is a possibility of a win) different from the non-winning mode 1600a may be displayed. This allows the player to visually see the winning indication and recognize that the first specific effect, which has the potential to result in a jackpot, is being executed, making the player look forward to a jackpot and drawing their attention to the first specific effect displayed on the effect display device 1600, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, when a predetermined operation unit other than the effect operation unit 300 (for example, any one or a combination of any two or more (or all) of the handle 195, volume adjustment button 227, light intensity adjustment button 228, etc.) is operated, it may be possible to display special character information such as characters or symbols that are different from the character information such as characters or symbols displayed on the effect display device 1600, regardless of whether the first specific effect, the second specific effect, or the special effect is in progress. In this case, too, the display of special character information on the effect display device 1600 may lead to the mistaken belief that the second specific effect is being executed, but when the special jackpot lottery result is displayed, the player's interest in the game can be increased by the sudden occurrence of a jackpot that the player did not expect. The display mode of the special character information displayed on the effect display device 1600 may be changed in response to operation of a predetermined operation unit. A player who notices that the first specific effect is being executed can enjoy the change in the special character information by operating the predetermined operation unit in anticipation of a jackpot. Alternatively, the display mode of the special character information may be changed in a different manner from the character information, such as letters and symbols, displayed in response to operation of the press operation unit during the second specific effect, thereby making it easier to visually distinguish the special character information from the character information, such as letters and symbols, displayed in response to operation of the press operation unit during the second specific effect. Furthermore, the special character information need not always be displayed when the predetermined operation unit is operated. It may also be displayed when the predetermined operation unit is operated during any period during the execution of any one or any combination of the first specific effect, the second specific effect, and the special effect (or all of them). In other words, there may be a period during which the special character information is not displayed, even if the predetermined operation unit is operated during the execution of the first specific effect, the second specific effect, and the special effect.

Furthermore, because the second specific effect described above does not have the potential to result in a jackpot, its execution could discourage the player and reduce their interest in the game. For this reason, in this example, the second specific effect is executed only when certain conditions are met, preventing an excessive decrease in interest in the game. Specifically, the second specific effect can be executed when a jackpot has not been achieved and a certain period of time (e.g., 30 seconds) has elapsed since the handle touch sensor 192 stopped detecting the player's contact. This prevents the so-called "stop shot," which stops the release of game balls, and improves the operating rate of the gaming machine. Alternatively, or in addition to the above conditions, the second special effect may be executed when a predetermined period of time has passed since the handle rotation detection sensor 189 stopped detecting rotation even if a jackpot has not been achieved, when a predetermined period of time has passed since the stop display command was received even if a jackpot has not been achieved, or when the reserved numbers of first special symbols and second special symbols (first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number) are 0. This also prevents stop shots and improves the operating rate of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, the first specific effect, which has the possibility of a jackpot and is accompanied by the output of sound effects, and the second specific effect, which does not have the possibility of a jackpot and is not accompanied by the output of sound effects, may be the same or similar in some or all of the display modes of the effect display device 1600 (for example, a rainbow effect display mode (see Figure 283) in which three or more of the display areas of the effect display device 1600 in the above-mentioned embodiment are each displayed in different colors to achieve a display of three or more colors, and the display colors of the multiple areas are switched sequentially), or the light emission modes of the multiple LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 or door frame 3 (for example, rainbow light emission (see Figure 286) in which multiple LED groups are made to emit light in different light colors to achieve light emission of three or more colors by the multiple LED groups, and multi-color light emission control is performed to switch the light colors of the multiple LED groups sequentially), or the first specific effect and the second specific effect may be different modes (for example, rainbow light emission and rainbow light emission are different modes, or rainbow effect display mode and rainbow effect display mode are different display modes). Furthermore, one or both of the first and second specific effects do not have to be performed during periods when variable effects are being performed, but may be performed during periods when variable effects are not being performed, and may be performed as effects such as the above-mentioned pre-reading notices, for example. This increases the variety of effects and can increase interest in the game.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 1 described above may be configured to transition to a game restriction state in which some or all of the game is restricted when the number of balls (also known as the difference between the number of balls dispensed) between a specified value (plus or minus zero, a lower limit for the number of payouts minus the number of shots (number of outs), etc.) and the upper limit for the number of payouts minus the number of shots (number of outs) reaches a preset upper limit. For example, in the game restriction state, one or any combination of the following may be performed: prohibiting the ball launcher 540 from firing game balls; disabling detection by the first start sensor 3002 and the second start sensor 2401; preventing the start of processing related to the variable display of special symbols (in this example, special symbol process processing, etc.); turning off LEDs related to lottery processing, such as the special symbol display devices (first special symbol display device, second special symbol display device) of the function display unit 1400, or illuminating them in a manner corresponding to the game restriction state; or hiding decorative symbols on the performance display device 1600 and displaying them in a manner corresponding to the game restriction state. Additionally, the game restriction state may be released by a specific operation (turning the power OFF and then ON + clearing the RAM, turning the power OFF and then ON, etc.).

In addition, the controls in the above-described embodiments, such as controls relating to specific effects, first specific effects, second specific effects, and special effects, may be executable even in a game restriction state. That is, control relating to a modified example in which the start timing of a specific effect is delayed by player operation in a game restriction state, control relating to a modified example in which the start timing of a specific effect is delayed by a predetermined operation when an abnormal condition occurs in a game restriction state, control relating to a modified example in which the start timing of a specific effect that displays a substantially single color in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in a game restriction state is delayed, control relating to a modified example in which the display mode of the effect display device 1600 is changed depending on the operation mode of the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 in a game restriction state, control relating to a modified example in which a third effect that has the possibility of a jackpot in a game restriction state is delayed The controls in the above-described embodiments may also be executable in the game restricted state, such as control regarding a modified example when a specific abnormal condition occurs during the execution of the first specific effect or the second specific effect that has no possibility of a jackpot, control regarding a modified example in which a special effect is executed instead of the second specific effect in the game restricted state, and control regarding a modified example in which a sound corresponding to the first specific effect is not output from the speaker (speaker 622) provided in the pachinko machine 1 during the first specific effect in the game restricted state and a sound corresponding to the second specific effect is not output from the speaker (speaker 622) provided in the pachinko machine 1 during the second specific effect in the game restricted state. Also, in the game restricted state, the specific effect and the first specific effect that have the possibility of a jackpot may be disabled, while the specific effect, the second specific effect, and the special effect that do not have the possibility of a jackpot may be enabled. Alternatively, in the game restricted state, the specific effect and the second specific effect that do not have the possibility of a jackpot may also be disabled, just like the specific effect and the first specific effect that have the possibility of a jackpot, and only the special effect may be enabled.

In addition, if a game play restriction state occurs while the above-mentioned specific effect, first specific effect, second specific effect, or special effect is being executed, the effect display device 1600 may display a special display corresponding to the game play restriction state (a display notifying that a game play restriction state has occurred, "Game play restriction state in progress"), or the speaker (speaker 622) may output a special notification sound corresponding to the game play restriction state (a sound notifying that a game play restriction state has occurred, "Game play restriction state has occurred"), or the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side may be made to emit light in a special light-emitting pattern corresponding to the game play restriction state (for example, the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side may flash red, and the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side may be turned off). In addition, if a game restriction state occurs during the execution of a specific effect or a first specific effect that has the possibility of a jackpot, the specific effect or the first specific effect that has the possibility of a jackpot may be interrupted, or if a game restriction state occurs during the execution of a specific effect or a second specific effect or a special effect that does not have the possibility of a jackpot, the specific effect or the second specific effect or the special effect that does not have the possibility of a jackpot may be interrupted, or if a game restriction state occurs during the execution of a specific effect or a first specific effect that has the possibility of a jackpot, the specific effect or the first specific effect that has the possibility of a jackpot may be interrupted, while the possibility of a jackpot may be If a play restriction state is entered during the execution of a specific effect, second specific effect, or special effect that has no possibility of a jackpot, the specific effect, second specific effect, or special effect that has no possibility of a jackpot may not be interrupted; alternatively, if a play restriction state is entered during the execution of a specific effect, second specific effect, or special effect that has no possibility of a jackpot, the specific effect, second specific effect, or special effect that has no possibility of a jackpot may be interrupted, while if a play restriction state is entered during the execution of a specific effect or first specific effect that has the possibility of a jackpot, the specific effect or first specific effect that has the possibility of a jackpot may not be interrupted.

[Decorative board installed on the rear lower performance unit]
Next, the decorative board provided on the rear lower performance unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be explained with reference to Figures 355 to 357.

As described above, the rear-lower performance unit 3300 has a rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and a rear-right movable decorative body 3302, whose adjacent base ends are supported so that they can rotate around axes in the front-to-back direction and can be raised and lowered. The rear-left movable decorative body 3301 is provided with rear-left movable decorative boards 3311-3314 on which LEDs 3311a-3314a that illuminate and decorate the rear-left movable decorative body 3301, and the rear-right movable decorative body 3302 is provided with rear-right movable decorative boards 3321-3324 on which LEDs 3321a-3324a that illuminate and decorate the rear-right movable decorative body 3302.

Note that the rear-left movable decorative boards 3311-3314 provided on the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear-right movable decorative boards 3321-3324 provided on the rear-right movable decorative body 3302 have the same configuration, so the following will only describe the rear-left movable decorative boards 3311-3314 provided on the rear-left movable decorative body 3301.

As shown in Figure 355, the rear left movable decorative boards 3311-3314 have a white solder resist (protective material) coating on their surfaces, and multiple full-color LEDs 3311a-3314a are mounted on the front mounting surface facing the player. In this example, the multiple LEDs 3311a-3314a mounted on the rear left movable decorative boards 3311-3314 are wide-angle top-view type LEDs that can emit light within a 130-degree angle range centered on an optical axis perpendicular to the front surface. Furthermore, some or all of the multiple LEDs 3311a-3314a mounted on the rear left movable decorative boards 3311-3314 (either board may be mounted with both top-view type LEDs and side-view type LEDs, or there may be boards with only top-view type LEDs and boards with only side-view type LEDs) may be wide-angle side-view type LEDs that can emit light within an angle range of 130 degrees around the horizontal optical axis, and are not limited to wide-angle top-view type LEDs or wide-angle side-view type LEDs, but may be any top-view type LED or side-view type LED.

When the multiple full-color LEDs 3311a-3314a mounted on the front mounting surface of each of the rear-left movable decorative boards 3311-3314 are illuminated, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 can be illuminated and decorated. Furthermore, the white solder resist coated on the surface of the rear-left movable decorative boards 3311-3314 makes the rear-left movable decorative boards 3311-3314 less visible through the illuminated decorative part of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301, and also allows the light from the LEDs mounted on the front mounting surface to be reflected by the surface of the rear-left movable decorative boards 3311-3314, allowing the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 to be illuminated and decorated more brightly.

In addition, on the front mounting surfaces of the rear left movable decorative boards 3311-3314, front mounting surface side markings 3311b-3314b indicating the position of electronic components and diode marks 3311c-3314c indicating the orientation of LEDs are silk-screened onto white resist using yellow paint, a light color that is inconspicuous against white. Furthermore, on the rear left movable decorative boards 3311-3314, board management numbers 3311d-3314d, which are unique identification numbers for managing each board, are formed in foil-punched characters (in other words, characters are formed by creating characters in the copper foil wiring pattern on the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed and then punching out the surrounding copper foil).

The color of the solder resist is not limited to white and can be green, black, silver, etc., and the front mounting surface markings 3311b-3314b and diode marks 3311c-3314c are not limited to yellow and can be printed in white, light blue, yellow-green, black, etc. Furthermore, the board control numbers 3311d-3314d are not limited to cut-out characters but can be left-on characters (i.e., characters formed by cutting out the copper foil in the corresponding area of the layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed), or can be printed on the resist by silk screen printing, like the front mounting surface markings 3311b-3314b and diode marks 3311c-3314c. Furthermore, the surface of the front mounting surface of the decorative board on which the LEDs are mounted (e.g., the rear-left movable decorative boards 3311-3314) may not be coated with solder resist, but rather substantially the entire front mounting surface of the decorative board on which the LEDs are mounted may be coated with a mirror-finish plating of solder. If the surface of the front mounting surface of the decorative board on which the LEDs are mounted is coated with silver solder resist or a mirror-like solder plating, the reflectivity of the front mounting surface of the decorative board on which the LEDs are mounted can be improved, preventing a decrease in the brightness of each LED mounted on each board, and allowing the board to be used as a reflector that reflects light from LEDs mounted on other boards onto the front mounting surface of the decorative board on which the LEDs are mounted. Furthermore, the mirror-like surface coated with silver solder resist or solder on the front mounting surface of the decorative board on which the LEDs are mounted may be positioned so that it is visible to players and used as part of the design of the pachinko machine 1. Furthermore, if substantially the entire front mounting surface of the decorative board on which the LEDs are mounted is coated with a mirror-like solder plating, no electronic components other than the LEDs may be placed on the front mounting surface of the decorative board on which the LEDs are mounted, and only a minimal wiring pattern may be provided, while electronic components other than the LEDs and wiring patterns other than the minimal wiring pattern may be provided on the back mounting surface.

In addition, in this example, board control numbers 3311d to 3314d are formed on both the front mounting surface and the back mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative boards 3311 to 3314. It is also possible to form the board control numbers 3311d to 3314d only on the back mounting surfaces of the rear-left movable decorative boards 3311 to 3314, where LEDs are not mounted. In this case, the reflectivity of the front mounting surfaces, where LEDs are mounted, of the rear-left movable decorative boards 3311 to 3314 can be made uniform, suppressing uneven light emission and enhancing the presentation effect.

Although not shown, wiring patterns and through-holes are also formed on the front mounting surfaces of the rear-left movable decorative boards 3311-3314. The wiring patterns are covered with white resist. The configuration in which an insulating film is applied to the lands of the through-holes for the input signal wiring patterns in the first to fourth embodiments may also be applied to the rear-left movable decorative boards 3311-3314 and the rear-right movable decorative boards 3321-3324. In other words, at least a portion of the lands formed on the rear-left movable decorative boards 3311-3314 and the rear-right movable decorative boards 3321-3324 may be configured to be covered with white resist.

In addition, the light intensity (brightness) of the LEDs 3311a to 3314a mounted on the front mounting surface of the rear left movable decorative boards 3311 to 3314 and the LEDs 3321a to 3324a mounted on the front mounting surface of the rear right movable decorative boards 3321 to 3324 can be adjusted by operating the light intensity adjustment button 228. This allows the light-emitting effects of the rear lower performance unit 3300 (rear left movable decorative body 3301 and rear right movable decorative body 3302) to be performed at the light intensity (brightness) preferred by the player, preventing discomfort to the player.

As shown in Figure 355, the board control numbers 3311d to 3314d are formed by a string of characters arranged in a straight line (in this example, a horizontal line). In this example, the board control numbers 3311d to 3314d are formed by a string of characters (in this example, three alphabetic characters plus four Arabic numerals) arranged in a straight line in the same direction (horizontal) as the board flow direction (reflow direction) when mounting electronic components on the rear left movable decorative boards 3311 to 3314. Furthermore, the LEDs 3311a to 3313a, front mounting surface side notations 3311b to 3313b, and diode marks 3311c to 3313c mounted on the front mounting surfaces of the rear left movable decorative boards 3311 to 3313 are arranged horizontally or vertically relative to the notation of the board control numbers 3311d to 3313d described above. That is, the LEDs 3311a to 3313a, which are surface-mounted electronic components (chip components, SMD (Surface Mount Devices), surface-mounted electronic components) mounted on the front mounting surface of the rear left movable decorative substrates 3311 to 3313, the front mounting surface side markings 3311b to 3313b, and the diode marks 3311c to 3313c are arranged horizontally or vertically relative to the board flow direction (reflow direction) when mounting the electronic components. Furthermore, although not shown, the wiring pattern on the front mounting surface of the rear left movable decorative substrates 3311 to 3313 is formed so that the majority of the parts are arranged horizontally or vertically relative to the notation of the board management numbers 3311d to 3313d. In other words, the wiring patterns on the front mounting surfaces of the rear left movable decorative boards 3311-3314 are formed so that when the direction of the wiring pattern is changed by 90 degrees, horizontal and vertical wiring patterns relative to the board flow direction (reflow direction) are connected by wiring patterns at 45 degrees to the board flow direction (reflow direction), but are formed so that the majority of the portions are horizontal or vertical to the board flow direction (reflow direction) when mounting electronic components.

As described above, the wiring patterns on the front mounting surfaces of the rear left movable decorative boards 3311-3314 are formed so that when the wiring pattern direction is changed by 90 degrees, horizontal and vertical wiring patterns relative to the board flow direction (reflow direction) are connected by a wiring pattern at 45 degrees relative to the board flow direction (reflow direction). In other words, when the board pattern is bent at a right angle, the pattern width at the bent portion widens, causing changes in impedance and reflections in this widened portion, resulting in ringing and noise. However, by connecting the wiring pattern at 45 degrees, the pattern width is suppressed, suppressing changes in impedance and reducing the occurrence of ringing and noise. Furthermore, when the excess copper foil on the board is dissolved using an etching solution during board manufacturing, the solution tends to accumulate inside the right-angle portions of the wiring pattern where the angle is changed by 90 degrees, potentially preventing clean etching of the inside of the right-angle portions. However, by changing the wiring pattern to a 45-degree angle, the solution is less likely to accumulate, allowing the inside 45-degree portion to be cleanly etched. The constituent characters of the board control numbers 3311d to 3314d are not limited to being formed by a line of characters arranged in a straight line in the same direction (horizontal) as the board flow direction (reflow direction) when mounting electronic components on the rear left movable decorative boards 3311 to 3314, but may also be formed by a line of characters arranged in a straight line (either horizontally or vertically) perpendicular to the board flow direction (reflow direction) when mounting electronic components on the rear left movable decorative boards 3311 to 3314.

On the other hand, the LED 3314a, front mounting surface side marking portion 3314b, and diode mark 3314c mounted on the front mounting surface of the rear left movable decorative board 3314 have a first LED group arranged horizontally or vertically relative to the notation of the board control number 3314d, and a second LED group arranged at an angle relative to the notation of the board control number 3314d. In other words, the LED 3314a, front mounting surface side marking portion 3314b, and diode mark 3314c, which are surface-mount type electronic components (chip components, SMD (Surface Mount Device)) mounted on the front mounting surface of the rear left movable decorative board 3314, are arranged horizontally or vertically relative to the board flow direction (reflow direction) when mounting the electronic components. Although not shown, the wiring pattern on the front mounting surface of the rear left movable decorative board 3314 is formed so that the majority of the portions are horizontal or vertical to the notation of the board control number 3314d. In other words, the wiring pattern on the front mounting surface of the rear left movable decorative board 3314 is formed so that the majority of the portions are horizontal or vertical to the board flow direction (reflow direction) when mounting electronic components.

Specifically, it comprises a first LED group consisting of three LEDs 3314a1 arranged at the top of the rear-left movable decorative board 3314, a front mounting surface side marking portion 3314b1, and a diode mark 3314c1, and is arranged horizontally or vertically relative to the notation of the board control number 3314d; and a second LED group consisting of four LEDs 3314a2 arranged in a row at the bottom of the rear-left movable decorative board 3314 along the outline of the rear-left movable decorative board 3314 (so that each of the four LEDs 3314a2 is approximately horizontal relative to the outline of the rear-left movable decorative board 3314), a front mounting surface side marking portion 3314b2, and a diode mark 3314c2, and is tilted relative to the notation of the board control number 3314d.

In the example of Figure 355, the front mounting surface of the rear left movable decorative board 3314 is equipped with an LED 3314a1 that is horizontal or vertical to the board management number 3314d, and an LED 3314a2 that is tilted relative to the board management number 3314d. Note that mounting an LED that is horizontal or vertical to the board management number and an LED that is tilted relative to the board management number on the front mounting surface of a single board is not limited to this. It is also possible to mount one of an LED that is horizontal or vertical to the board management number and an LED that is tilted relative to the board management number on the front mounting surface of a single board, and mount the other LED on the back mounting surface of that board, or it is also possible to mount one of an LED that is horizontal or vertical to the board management number and an LED that is tilted relative to the board management number on the front mounting surface of a single board, and mount the other LED on a different board.

In the above example, the orientation of an electronic component is defined as the direction of a line connecting the center points of two pads formed on a board facing or adjacent to each other for soldering a single electronic component in the case of surface-mount electronic components (chip components, SMD (Surface Mount Device)). In other words, electronic components for which the line connecting the center points of the pads is horizontal or vertical to the string of characters arranged linearly in a row with board control numbers 3311d to 3314d are defined as electronic components arranged horizontally or vertically with board control numbers 3311d to 3314d, and electronic components for which the line connecting the center points of the pads is inclined to the string of characters arranged linearly in a row with board control numbers 3311d to 3314d are defined as electronic components arranged at an angle with respect to board control numbers 3311d to 3314d. The pads formed on the board have a rectangular shape, and for electronic components that are arranged horizontally or vertically relative to the board control numbers 3311d to 3314d, the four sides of the pads formed on the board for soldering the electronic components are also horizontal or vertical relative to the board control numbers 3311d to 3314d, and for electronic components that are arranged at an angle relative to the board control numbers 3311d to 3314d, the four sides of the pads formed on the board for soldering the electronic components are also at an angle relative to the board control numbers 3311d to 3314d. In other words, the positional relationship between the board control numbers 3311d to 3314d and the electronic components (whether they are arranged horizontally, vertically, or at an angle, and the angle between the board control numbers 3311d to 3314d and the electronic components) matches the positional relationship between the board control numbers 3311d to 3314d and the four sides of the pads (whether they are arranged horizontally, vertically, or at an angle, and the angle between the board control numbers 3311d to 3314d and the four sides of the pads).

In addition, whether any one side of the electronic component's outline is horizontal or vertical to the board control numbers 3311d to 3314d may be used to determine whether the electronic component is arranged horizontally or vertically to the board control numbers 3311d to 3314d, or arranged at an angle to the board control numbers 3311d to 3314d. In the case where three pads, two adjacent pads and one pad facing the two adjacent pads, are formed on the board for soldering an electronic component, whether the perpendicular line from the center point of the pad facing the two adjacent pads to a line connecting the center points of the two adjacent pads is horizontal or vertical to the board control numbers 3311d to 3314d may be used to determine whether the electronic component is arranged horizontally or vertically to the board control numbers 3311d to 3314d, or arranged at an angle to the board control numbers 3311d to 3314d.

In addition, in the case of lead-type electronic components (lead components, insert-mount electronic components, and dip components), the orientation may be defined as the direction of a straight line connecting the center points of opposing or adjacent through-holes formed to mount an electronic component. In other words, electronic components for which the line connecting the center points of the through-holes is horizontal or vertical to the string of characters lined up in a straight line as board control numbers 3311d to 3314d may be defined as electronic components installed horizontally or vertically to board control numbers 3311d to 3314d, and electronic components for which the line connecting the center points of the pads is inclined to the string of characters lined up in a straight line as board control numbers 3311d to 3314d may be defined as electronic components installed at an angle to board control numbers 3311d to 3314d.

Furthermore, full-color LEDs 3311a-3314a are packaged LEDs (packaged LEDs) in which red, green, and blue light-emitting elements are arranged in a linear row and secured with sealing resin. They are configured to display all emitted colors (full color display) through RGB light emission. In this example, a highly hard and translucent epoxy resin is used as the sealing resin. This protects the red, green, and blue light-emitting elements from moisture and impact, and its dome-shaped design acts as a lens, focusing the light emitted from the red, green, and blue light-emitting elements. Furthermore, the light distribution can be controlled by mixing various powders into the sealing resin, or a fluorescent agent can be added to convert the light from the light-emitting elements to a desired wavelength (for example, to emit a desired color (such as white) from a monochromatic LED). Furthermore, when the LEDs 3311a to 3314a are arranged horizontally or vertically with respect to the character string arranged linearly in a row as the board control numbers 3311d to 3314d, the sealing resin as lenses provided on the surfaces of the red, green, and blue light-emitting elements of each of the LEDs 3311a to 3314a is horizontal or vertical with respect to the board control numbers 3311d to 3314d. On the other hand, when the LEDs 3311a to 3314a are arranged at an angle with respect to the character string arranged linearly in a row as the board control numbers 3311d to 3314d, the sealing resin as lenses provided on the surfaces of the red, green, and blue light-emitting elements of each of the LEDs 3311a to 3314a is at an angle with respect to the board control numbers 3311d to 3314d. That is, in the case of a packaged LED in which red, green, and blue light-emitting elements are arranged in a linear row and have sealing resin lenses on the surface, if the sealing resin lenses on the surfaces of the red, green, and blue light-emitting elements are horizontal or vertical to the board control numbers 3311d to 3314d, the LED can be defined as being arranged horizontally or vertically to the board control numbers 3311d to 3314d; and if the sealing resin lenses on the surfaces of the red, green, and blue light-emitting elements are tilted with respect to the board control numbers 3311d to 3314d, the LED can be defined as being tilted with respect to the board control numbers 3311d to 3314d.

Furthermore, the wiring pattern connected to the second LED group on the rear left movable decorative board 3314 is connected perpendicular to the pads of each LED 3314a2 in the second LED group, and is therefore tilted relative to the board control number 3314d near each LED 3314a2 in the second LED group. However, if the wiring pattern connected to each LED 3314a2 in the second LED group is connected to an electronic component (e.g., IC 3314e) that is arranged horizontally or vertically relative to the board control number 3314d, it is connected perpendicular to the pads of the electronic component, and is therefore horizontal or vertical relative to the board control number 3314d near the electronic component. In other words, even if the wiring pattern is connected to an electronic component that is arranged at an angle relative to the board control number 3314d, it is formed at an angle relative to the board control number 3314d near the electronic component, but is formed horizontal or vertical relative to the board control number 3314d at locations away from the electronic component, except when the direction of the wiring pattern is changed. In other words, the wiring pattern on each of the rear left movable decorative boards 3311-3314 is formed so that the largest number of sections are horizontal or vertical to the board control number 3314d.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 167 and 355, the portion of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 corresponding to the upper part of the rear-left movable decorative substrate 3314 has a width greater than a certain level and a generally straight shape without bending, while the portion of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 corresponding to the lower part of the rear-left movable decorative substrate 3314 has a tapered, bending shape with a changing width, and the rear-left movable decorative substrate 3314 has a shape that follows the outer shape of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301. In other words, the LEDs 3314a2 of the second LED group mounted on the front mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative substrate 3314 are arranged along the outer shape of the rear-left movable decorative substrate 3314 and also along the outer shape of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301. For example, in the example of Figure 355, each of the LEDs 3314a of the second LED group is arranged so that it is nearly horizontal or perpendicular to one side of the substrate. By configuring it in this way, light from the LEDs 3314a mounted on the rear left movable decorative board 3314 can be efficiently irradiated onto the curved and narrowed portion of the rear left movable decorative body 3301, thereby creating decorative illumination and preventing uneven lighting. In other words, the LEDs 3314a can be oriented to match the design of the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and emit light appropriately, achieving efficient light emission and enhancing the lighting effect of the LEDs 3314a (such as achieving high-brightness light emission to create a powerful lighting effect), preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In other words, at the bent and narrowed portion of the rear left movable decorative body 3301, the LED 3314a is tilted to match the inclination of the rear left movable decorative body 3301, so that the distances from each of the red, green, and blue light-emitting elements of the package LED to the bent and narrowed portion of the rear left movable decorative body 3301 are nearly equal, and the light from each of the red, green, and blue light-emitting elements of the package LED is projected from the LED 3314a to the inner surface of the rear left movable decorative body 3301. By irradiating light approximately perpendicularly through the sealing resin as a lens, light from the LED 3314a is irradiated in an optimal manner onto the rear-left movable decorative body 3301, preventing some of the light emitted from the red, green, and blue light-emitting elements of the packaged LED from becoming too strong. This allows light to be uniformly irradiated from each of the red, green, and blue light-emitting elements of the LED 3314a to every corner of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301, thereby preventing uneven light emission. Note that as long as each of the LEDs 3314a of the second LED group is tilted to match the shape of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301, the above-mentioned effects will be achieved, and the LEDs are not necessarily limited to being tilted nearly horizontally or vertically relative to one side of the board.

As described above, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 is a decorative part facing the player, has a predetermined design (in this example, a stylized letter "A"), and an illuminating decorative part formed from translucent resin, and is illuminated by the LED 3314a mounted on the rear-left movable decorative board 3314. The LED 3314a is tilted to match the tilt of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301, and light is irradiated approximately perpendicularly from the red, green, and blue light-emitting elements of the packaged LED through the sealing resin that acts as a lens onto the illuminating decorative part of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301. This allows the illuminating decorative part of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 to be illuminated evenly, enhances the luminous effect, and prevents a decline in interest in the game. The portion of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 that is located in front of the rear-left movable decorative substrate 3314 and that is illuminated by the LED 3314a may be entirely light-transmitting (light-emitting decorative portion), or may be a mixture of light-transmitting and non-light-transmitting portions (light-emitting decorative portion). The non-light-transmitting portions are plated, patterned, or otherwise processed to express designs such as letters or characters (in this example, a stylized design of the letter "A") on the rear-left movable decorative body 3301. The light-transmitting luminous decorative portion may be colorless and transparent, or colored and transparent. The light-transmitting luminous decorative portion may be processed to diffuse light, such as by lens cutting, or may not be processed to diffuse light. Additionally, a translucent member (such as a diffusion lens) may be provided between the light-transmitting luminous decorative portion and the rear left movable decorative substrate 3314, and the translucent member and luminous decorative portion may be formed integrally to give the luminous decorative portion a double structure, or the translucent member and luminous decorative portion may be formed separately.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 355, no other electronic components are mounted between each LED 3314a2 of the second LED group and the end of the rear-left movable decorative substrate 3314, which is positioned approximately horizontally relative to each LED 3314a2. This prevents the light emitted from the LED 3314a2 from being blocked by other electronic components, allowing light to be uniformly irradiated from the LED 3314a2 to the rear-left movable decorative body 3301, thereby reducing uneven light emission. Furthermore, by arranging the four LEDs 3314a2 in a row along the outer shape of the rear-left movable decorative substrate 3314, the distance from each of the four LEDs 3314a2 to the end of the rear-left movable decorative substrate 3314, which is positioned approximately horizontally relative to each LED 3314a2, can be made approximately uniform, allowing light to be uniformly irradiated from each LED 3314a2 to the rear-left movable decorative body 3301, reducing uneven light emission. In the example shown in Figure 355, the three LEDs 3314a1 of the first LED group, which are arranged horizontally or vertically relative to the board control number 3314d, are also shown arranged in a row along the outer shape of the rear left movable decorative board 3314, but the three LEDs 3314a1 of the first LED group, which are arranged horizontally or vertically relative to the board control number 3314d, may also be arranged regardless of the outer shape of the rear left movable decorative board 3314.

Furthermore, in parts where the outer shape of the board has a curved slope, the multiple LEDs that are arranged to be inclined relative to the board control number are arranged to be inclined relative to each other (arranged so that they are inclined at different angles relative to the board control number). On the other hand, in parts where the outer shape of the board has a linear slope, the multiple LEDs that are arranged to be inclined relative to the board control number are arranged to be horizontal or vertical relative to each other (arranged so that they are inclined at the same angle relative to the board control number). In this way, by arranging the multiple LEDs at an angle along the outer shape of the board, it is possible to uniformly irradiate light onto the outer shape of the board (in this example, the outer shape of the rear left movable decorative board 3314) and the decorative element arranged on the front side of the board (in this example, the rear left movable decorative element 3301), thereby reducing uneven light emission.

In addition, as shown in Figure 355, the markings 3314b and diode marks 3314c on the front mounting surface of the second LED group are also marked to match the inclination of the LEDs 3314a of the second LED group. This reduces the risk of misreading the LED orientation or placement when mounting the LEDs 3314a of the second LED group, thereby reducing the occurrence of defects. In addition, when the component numbers of the electronic components mounted on the front mounting surface of the rear left movable decorative board 3314 are also silk-screened as the front mounting surface side notation, the front mounting surface side notation of the component numbers of the LEDs 3314a of the first LED group may be arranged horizontally or vertically to the notation of the board management number 3314d, and the front mounting surface side notation of the component numbers of the LEDs 3314a of the second LED group may be arranged so as to be inclined to match the inclination of the LEDs 3314a of the second LED group, or both the front mounting surface side notation of the component numbers of the LEDs 3314a of the first LED group and the front mounting surface side notation of the component numbers of the LEDs 3314a of the second LED group may be arranged horizontally or vertically to the notation of the board management number 3314d. If the part number markings on the front mounting surface of the LEDs 3314a of the second LED group are inclined to match the inclination of the LEDs 3314a of the second LED group, the relationship between the part number and the LED becomes clear, preventing incorrect installation of the LEDs 3314a of the second LED group. If the part number markings on the front mounting surface of the LEDs 3314a of the second LED group are aligned horizontally or vertically with respect to the notation of the board control number 3314d, it becomes unnecessary to rotate the rear left movable decorative board 3314 to make it easier to check the part number when installing the LEDs 3314a of the second LED group, thereby improving workability when installing the LEDs 3314a of the second LED group.

In addition, electronic components other than LED 3314a may be mounted on the front mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative board 3314 of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301. In this example, as shown in Figure 355, IC 3314e is mounted on the front mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative board 3314. Furthermore, IC 3314e mounted on the front mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative board 3314 is arranged horizontally or vertically relative to the notation of board control number 3314d. In this way, among the electronic components mounted on the front mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative board 3314, electronic components that do not irradiate light onto the curved, narrowed portion of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 are arranged horizontally or vertically relative to the notation of board control number 3314d without being tilted to match the curved shape of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301. Therefore, when installing electronic components other than LED 3314a, mistakes in the installation direction or the placement position of the first terminal are reduced, thereby reducing the occurrence of defects. It is also possible to mount no electronic components other than LEDs 3311a-3314a on the front mounting surfaces of the rear-left movable decorative boards 3311-3314 of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301. Furthermore, if electronic components other than LEDs 3311a-3314a are mounted on the front mounting surfaces of the rear-left movable decorative boards 3311-3314 of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301, only electronic components with light-colored exteriors such as white or yellow (for example, connectors with white exteriors) may be mounted, and electronic components with dark-colored exteriors such as black (for example, resistors with black exteriors or capacitors with brown exteriors) may be mounted on the rear mounting surfaces. This allows for uniform reflectivity on the front mounting surfaces of the rear-left movable decorative boards 3311-3314, making it possible to reduce uneven light emission.

The electronic components mounted on the front mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative board 3314 of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 are not limited to IC 3314e, but may also be capacitors, resistors, connectors, etc. Furthermore, electronic components with dark exteriors may not be placed on the front mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative board 3314, and only electronic components with light-colored exteriors (e.g., white, yellow, light blue, yellow-green, etc.) may be placed thereon. In this case, capacitors and resistors may only be placed on the rear mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative board 3314. This prevents a decrease in reflectivity on the front mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative board 3314, uniforms the reflectivity, and prevents uneven light emission.

In addition, in the above example, a rear left movable decorative board 3314 was shown that includes LEDs 3314a of the first LED group that are arranged horizontally or vertically relative to the board management number 3314d, and LEDs 3314a of the second LED group that are arranged at an angle relative to the board management number 3314d. However, all of the LEDs 3314a mounted on the rear left movable decorative board 3314 are arranged at an angle relative to the board management number 3314d, and the front mounting surface side markings 3314b and diode marks corresponding to the LEDs 3314a are also arranged at an angle relative to the board management number 3314d. The mark 3314c is also arranged at an angle relative to the board control number 3314d, while electronic components other than the LED 3314a (in this example, the IC 3314e) are arranged horizontally or vertically relative to the board control number 3314d. The front mounting surface indicia 3314b corresponding to electronic components other than the LED 3314a and the 1-pin mark 3314e1 indicating the mounting orientation of the electronic component (mounting direction, location of the first terminal) are also arranged horizontally or vertically relative to the board control number 3314d. In this example, the 1-pin mark 3314e1 indicating the mounting orientation of the electronic component (mounting direction, location of the first terminal) is a symbol consisting of a circle with the number 1 surrounded by silk screen printing, as described above, printed on the resist. Furthermore, the 1-pin mark 3314e1 indicating the mounting orientation of the electronic component (mounting direction, location of the first terminal) is not limited to the above and may be a triangle (△) or a circle, for example.

In addition, in the above example, the front mounting surface of the rear left movable decorative board 3314 is divided into an area where the LEDs 3314a of the first LED group, which are arranged horizontally or vertically relative to the board control number 3314d, are mounted, and an area where the LEDs 3314a of the second LED group, which are arranged at an angle relative to the board control number 3314d, are mounted. However, the front mounting surface of the rear left movable decorative board 3314 may be configured so that the LEDs 3314a of the first LED group and the LEDs 3314a of the second LED group are mixed and arranged without separating the area where the LEDs 3314a of the first LED group are mounted from the area where the LEDs 3314a of the second LED group are mounted.

Alternatively, the LEDs may be divided into a first LED group and a second LED group based on their outer diameter shape, with the LEDs 3314a of the first LED group mounted on the rear left movable decorative board 3314 so that they are horizontal or vertical to the board control number 3314d, and the LEDs 3314a of the second LED group mounted on the rear left movable decorative board 3314 so that they are inclined to the board control number 3314d.

For example, as shown in Figure 356, LED 3314a1 of the first LED group having an outer diameter shape close to a square and LED 3314a2 of the second LED group having an outer diameter shape close to a rectangle may be mounted on the rear left movable decorative substrate 3314, and LED 3314a1 of the first LED group having an outer diameter shape close to a square may be arranged horizontally or vertically relative to the substrate control number 3314d, and LED 3314a2 of the second LED group having an outer diameter shape close to a rectangle may be arranged at an angle relative to the substrate control number 3314d. This makes it possible to make the distances from the red, green, and blue light-emitting elements of the packaged LED to the inner surface of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 nearly equal, in accordance with the shape of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301. This allows light to be uniformly irradiated from the red, green, and blue light-emitting elements of the LED to every corner of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301, thereby reducing the occurrence of uneven light emission.

In the above example, a full-color LED having a nearly rectangular outer diameter was shown, packaged with a red light-emitting element, a green light-emitting element, and a blue light-emitting element. However, even if it is a monochromatic LED packaged with only one of the red light-emitting element, green light-emitting element, or blue light-emitting element, as long as it has a nearly rectangular outer diameter and has sealing resin on the surface as a rectangular lens, by arranging it so that it is inclined (inclined relative to board control number 3314d) along the shape of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301, it is possible to make the distance from the longitudinal end of the sealing resin as a rectangular lens to the inner surface of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 nearly uniform. This prevents the light from being strong or weak in some parts of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301, and reduces the occurrence of uneven light emission.

In addition, in the above example, LED 3314a1 of the first LED group, which has an outer diameter shape close to a square, is mounted on the rear left movable decorative board 3314 so that it is horizontal or vertical to the board management number 3314d, and LED 3314a2 of the second LED group, which has an outer diameter shape close to a rectangle, is mounted on the rear left movable decorative board 3314 so that it is inclined to the board management number 3314d, but LED 3314a1 of the first LED group may be an LED with an outer diameter shape close to a rectangle, and LED 3314a2 of the second LED group may be an LED with an outer diameter shape close to a square. In this case, too, the distances from each of the red, green, and blue light-emitting elements of the packaged LED to the inner surface of the rear left movable decorative body 3301 can be made nearly equal, allowing light to be uniformly irradiated from each of the red, green, and blue light-emitting elements of the LED to every corner of the rear left movable decorative body 3301, thereby suppressing the occurrence of uneven light emission. Furthermore, at least one of the LEDs having an outer diameter shape close to a square and the LEDs having an outer diameter shape close to a rectangle may be configured with only those arranged at an angle relative to the board control number 3314d, while the other may be configured to include those arranged horizontally or vertically relative to the board control number 3314d and those arranged at an angle relative to the board control number 3314d; or at least one of the LEDs having an outer diameter shape close to a square and the LEDs having an outer diameter shape close to a rectangle may be configured with only those arranged horizontally or vertically relative to the board control number 3314d, while the other may be configured to include those arranged horizontally or vertically relative to the board control number 3314d and those arranged at an angle relative to the board control number 3314d.

In addition, in the above example, the LEDs mounted on the rear left movable decorative board 3314 so as to be horizontal or vertical to the board management number 3314d and the LEDs mounted on the rear left movable decorative board 3314 so as to be inclined to the board management number 3314d are shown to differ depending on the outer diameter shape of the LED, but for LEDs having at least one outer diameter shape, it is sufficient that they are mounted on the rear left movable decorative board 3314 so as to be horizontal or vertical to the board management number 3314d, and for LEDs having the other outer diameter shape, it is also possible to include those mounted on the rear left movable decorative board 3314 so as to be horizontal or vertical to the board management number 3314d and those mounted on the rear left movable decorative board 3314 so as to be inclined to the board management number 3314d. In other words, the LEDs of the first LED group mounted on the rear left movable decorative board 3314 so as to be horizontal or vertical to the board control number 3314d may include multiple types of LEDs with different outer diameter shapes, and the LEDs of the second LED group mounted on the rear left movable decorative board 3314 so as to be inclined with respect to the board control number 3314d may include only LEDs with a common outer diameter shape.

In addition, in the above example, LEDs with an outer diameter shape close to a square and LEDs with an outer diameter shape close to a rectangle (elongated) were classified as having different outer diameter shapes, but LEDs with different outer diameter shapes may be grouped in the same group (e.g., first LED group) as long as they have similar outer diameter shapes. For example, LEDs with an outer diameter shape that is not square but close to a square may be grouped in the same group as square LEDs, or LEDs that are symmetrical left and right or up and down and LEDs that are asymmetrical may be grouped into first LED group and second LED group as having different outer diameter shapes.

LEDs may also be categorized according to type. For example, single-color LEDs and full-color LEDs may be categorized, with the single-color LEDs mounted on the rear-left movable decorative board 3314 so as to be horizontal or vertical to the board management number 3314d, and the full-color LEDs mounted on the rear-left movable decorative board 3314 so as to be inclined relative to the board management number 3314d. Full-color LEDs may also be mounted on the rear-left movable decorative board 3314 so as to be horizontal or vertical to the board management number 3314d, and the single-color LEDs may also be mounted on the rear-left movable decorative board 3314 so as to be inclined relative to the board management number 3314d. The full-color LEDs may be mounted on the rear-left movable decorative board 3314, and may include full-color LEDs mounted on the rear-left movable decorative board 3314 so that they are inclined relative to the board reference number 3314d, and full-color LEDs mounted on the rear-left movable decorative board 3314 so that they are horizontal or vertical relative to the board reference number 3314d. Alternatively, the full-color LEDs may be mounted on the rear-left movable decorative board 3314 so that they are horizontal or vertical relative to the board reference number 3314d, and the monochromatic LEDs may be mounted on the rear-left movable decorative board 3314 so that they are inclined relative to the board reference number 3314d, and full-color LEDs may be mounted on the rear-left movable decorative board 3314 so that they are horizontal or vertical relative to the board reference number 3314d. Furthermore, the monochromatic LEDs and full-color LEDs may be mounted on the same board or on separate boards. In other words, the monochromatic LEDs and the full-color LEDs may be mounted on different boards, or both monochromatic LEDs and full-color LEDs may be mounted on the same board.

Also, a distinction can be made between top-view type LEDs and side-view type LEDs, with top-view type LEDs mounted on the rear-left movable decorative board 3314 so that they are horizontal or vertical to the board management number 3314d, and side-view type LEDs mounted on the rear-left movable decorative board 3314 so that they are inclined to the board management number 3314d. Alternatively, side-view type LEDs can be mounted on the rear-left movable decorative board 3314 so that they are horizontal or vertical to the board management number 3314d, and top-view type LEDs can be mounted on the rear-left movable decorative board 3314 so that they are inclined to the board management number 3314d. Alternatively, top-view type LEDs can be mounted on the rear-left movable decorative board 3314 so that they are horizontal or vertical to the board management number 3314d, and side-view type LEDs can be mounted on the rear-left movable decorative board 3314 so that they are inclined to the board management number 3314d. Alternatively, the side-view type LEDs may be mounted on the rear-left movable decorative board 3314 so that they are inclined with respect to the board control number 3314d, and those mounted on the rear-left movable decorative board 3314 so that they are horizontal or vertical with respect to the board control number 3314d. Alternatively, the side-view type LEDs may be mounted on the rear-left movable decorative board 3314 so that they are horizontal or vertical with respect to the board control number 3314d, and the top-view type LEDs may be mounted on the rear-left movable decorative board 3314 so that they are inclined with respect to the board control number 3314d, and those mounted on the rear-left movable decorative board 3314 so that they are horizontal or vertical with respect to the board control number 3314d. Furthermore, the top-view type LEDs and the side-view type LEDs may be mounted on the same board or on separate boards. That is, the board on which the top-view type LEDs are mounted and the board on which the side-view type LEDs are mounted may be different, or both top-view type LEDs and side-view type LEDs may be mounted on the same board. Furthermore, when mounting side-view type LEDs, light from the side-view type LEDs may be incident on a polarizing plate and irradiated in front of the mounting surface on which the side-view type LEDs are mounted.

In addition, packaged LEDs (packaged LEDs) that are soldered and electrically connected to the wiring pattern can be distinguished from bare chip LEDs (unpackaged LEDs) that are electrically connected to the wiring pattern by bonding wires. Packaged LEDs can be mounted on the rear left movable decorative board 3314 so that they are horizontal or vertical to the board management number 3314d, and bare chip LEDs can be mounted on the rear left movable decorative board 3314 so that they are inclined relative to the board management number 3314d. Alternatively, bare chip LEDs can be mounted on the rear left movable decorative board 3314 so that they are horizontal or vertical to the board management number 3314d, and packaged LEDs can be mounted on the rear left movable decorative board 3314 so that they are inclined relative to the board management number 3314d. The packaged LEDs may be mounted on the rear-left movable decorative board 3314 so as to be horizontal or vertical with respect to the board management number 3314d, and the bare chip LEDs may include those mounted on the rear-left movable decorative board 3314 so as to be inclined with respect to the board management number 3314d and those mounted on the rear-left movable decorative board 3314 so as to be horizontal or vertical with respect to the board management number 3314d, or the bare chip LEDs may be mounted on the rear-left movable decorative board 3314 so as to be horizontal or vertical with respect to the board management number 3314d, and the packaged LEDs may be mounted on the rear-left movable decorative board 3314 so as to be inclined with respect to the board management number 3314d and those mounted on the rear-left movable decorative board 3314 so as to be horizontal or vertical with respect to the board management number 3314d. The packaged LEDs and bare chip LEDs may be mounted on the same board or on separate boards. In other words, the board on which the packaged LEDs are mounted and the board on which the bare chip LEDs are mounted may be different, or both the packaged LEDs and the bare chip LEDs may be mounted on the same board.

The LEDs may also be divided according to their placement position. For example, the LEDs may be divided into central LEDs placed in the center of the rear-left movable decorative board 3314 and edge LEDs placed at the edges of the rear-left movable decorative board 3314, and the central LEDs may be mounted on the rear-left movable decorative board 3314 so that they are horizontal or vertical to the board management number 3314d, and the edge LEDs may be mounted on the rear-left movable decorative board 3314 so that they are inclined relative to the board management number 3314d. Alternatively, the edge LEDs may be mounted on the rear-left movable decorative board 3314 so that they are horizontal or vertical to the board management number 3314d, and the central LEDs may be mounted on the rear-left movable decorative board 3314 so that they are inclined relative to the board management number 3314d. The LEDs may be mounted on the rear left movable decorative board 3314 so as to be horizontal or vertical to the board management number 3314d, and the edge LEDs may include those mounted on the rear left movable decorative board 3314 so as to be inclined with respect to the board management number 3314d and those mounted on the rear left movable decorative board 3314 so as to be horizontal or vertical to the board management number 3314d.The edge LEDs may be mounted on the rear left movable decorative board 3314 so as to be horizontal or vertical to the board management number 3314d, and the central LEDs may include those mounted on the rear left movable decorative board 3314 so as to be inclined with respect to the board management number 3314d and those mounted on the rear left movable decorative board 3314 so as to be horizontal or vertical to the board management number 3314d.

LEDs may also be categorized according to the size of the LED package or the size of the LED element. For example, large LEDs that are larger than a predetermined standard size may be categorized from small LEDs that are smaller than a predetermined standard size, and the large LEDs may be mounted on the rear-left movable decorative board 3314 so that they are horizontal or vertical to the board management number 3314d, and the small LEDs may be mounted on the rear-left movable decorative board 3314 so that they are inclined relative to the board management number 3314d. Alternatively, the small LEDs may be mounted on the rear-left movable decorative board 3314 so that they are horizontal or vertical to the board management number 3314d, and the large LEDs may be mounted on the rear-left movable decorative board 3314 so that they are inclined relative to the board management number 3314d. The LEDs may be mounted on the rear left movable decorative board 3314 so that they are horizontal or vertical to the board management number 3314d, and the small LEDs may include those mounted on the rear left movable decorative board 3314 so that they are inclined to the board management number 3314d and those mounted on the rear left movable decorative board 3314 so that they are horizontal or vertical to the board management number 3314d.The small LEDs may be mounted on the rear left movable decorative board 3314 so that they are horizontal or vertical to the board management number 3314d, and the large LEDs may include those mounted on the rear left movable decorative board 3314 so that they are inclined to the board management number 3314d and those mounted on the rear left movable decorative board 3314 so that they are horizontal or vertical to the board management number 3314d.

In addition, in the above example, the rear-left movable decorative board 3314 is shown to have a shape that follows the outer shape of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301. However, if the rear-left movable decorative board 3314 does not have a shape that follows the outer shape of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301, the LEDs 3314a2 of the second LED group mounted on the front mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative board 3314 may be arranged along the outer shape of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301, rather than along the outer shape of the rear-left movable decorative board 3314. In this case, too, the light from the LEDs 3314a mounted on the rear-left movable decorative board 3314 can be efficiently irradiated onto the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 to provide an illuminated decoration, suppressing uneven illumination and enhancing the illumination effect, preventing a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, in Figures 355 and 356, the trunk portion of the rear-left movable decorative board 3314, which has a substantially linear outer shape (in this example, the portion where the three LEDs 3314a1 of the first LED group of the rear-left movable decorative board 3314 are mounted), is equipped with electronic components other than the LED 3314a (in this example, the IC 3314e), whereas the branch portion of the rear-left movable decorative board 3314, which has a curved outer diameter (in this example, the portion where the four LEDs 3314a2 of the second LED group of the rear-left movable decorative board 3314 are mounted), is equipped with no electronic components other than the LED 3314a. In other words, the branch portion is narrower than the trunk, and its shape makes it difficult for light from the LED 3314a to be irradiated. Therefore, if electronic components other than the LED 3314a are mounted, the light from the LED 3314a will be blocked by these electronic components, and there is a risk that the light irradiated onto the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 will be weakened. In this example, by not placing any electronic components other than the LED 3314a on the branch of the rear left movable decorative board 3314, the light irradiated onto the rear left movable decorative body 3301 is prevented from becoming weaker, and uneven light emission is suppressed.

In the above example, the rear left movable decorative board 3314 has a stem with a generally linear outer shape, and a branch with a curved outer diameter, but the branch may be a portion formed by protruding from a part of the stem (a part of the side of the stem) on the board on which the LEDs are mounted, and the LEDs 3314a2 of the second LED group may be mounted on the branch. The LEDs 3314a2 of the second LED group are not limited to being mounted only on the branch, but may also be mounted on some or all of the stem.

In addition, in the above example, multiple LEDs (in this example, each LED 3314a2 of the second LED group) arranged at an angle to the board management number are shown arranged in a row along the outline of the board (in this example, the rear left movable decorative board 3314). However, multiple LEDs may also be arranged at an angle to the board management number when arranged so as not to follow the outline of the board. In this case, the multiple LEDs arranged at an angle to the board management number may not be arranged in a row, or the multiple LEDs arranged at an angle to the board management number may be arranged so that they are not horizontal or vertical to each other (some of the multiple LEDs arranged at an angle to the board management number may be arranged so that they are horizontal or vertical to each other, but it is sufficient that at least half of the multiple LEDs arranged at an angle to the board management number are arranged so that they are horizontal or vertical to each other). In other words, when multiple LEDs are arranged to match the shape of the rear left movable decorative body 3301, they may not follow the outline of the board. In this case, by arranging the multiple LEDs so that they are each tilted relative to the board management number to match the shape of the rear left movable decorative body 3301, it becomes possible to arrange each LED so that light is emitted in an optimal manner to match the shape of the rear left movable decorative body 3301, thereby preventing uneven light emission and increasing the light emission effect, preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, electronic components other than LED 3314a may be mounted on the rear mounting surfaces of rear-left movable decorative boards 3311-3314, where LED 3314a is not mounted. As shown in Figure 357, in this example, the rear mounting surfaces of rear-left movable decorative boards 3311-3314 are also coated with white solder resist (protective material) in the same way as the front mounting surfaces, and IC 3311e, capacitor 3311f, and connector 3311g are mounted on the rear mounting surface of rear-left movable decorative board 3311, connector 3312g and resistor 3312f are mounted on the rear mounting surface of rear-left movable decorative board 3312, connector 3313g is mounted on the rear mounting surface of rear-left movable decorative board 3313, and connector 3314g is mounted on the rear mounting surface of rear-left movable decorative board 3314. Additionally, in this example, LEDs are not mounted on the rear mounting surfaces of the rear left movable decorative boards 3311-3314.

The rear mounting surfaces of the rear left movable decorative boards 3311-3314, on which the LEDs 3314a are not mounted, may be coated with a solder resist (protective material) of a different color than the front mounting surface. In other words, since there is no need to coat the rear mounting surfaces on which the LEDs are not mounted with a solder resist (protective material) of a color that increases the reflectivity of light from the LEDs, the front mounting surface may be coated with a solder resist (protective material) of a dark color, such as green or black, as a different color from the front mounting surface. However, by coating the rear mounting surfaces on which the LEDs 3314a are not mounted with a solder resist (protective material) of a color that increases the reflectivity of light from the LEDs, as in this example, it is possible to have them function as reflectors that reflect light from LEDs mounted on other boards.

Furthermore, through holes 3311h-3314h are formed on the rear mounting surfaces of the rear-left movable decorative boards 3311-3314, and rear mounting surface markings 3311b-3314b, indicating the positions for placing electronic components, are silk-screened on white resist using a bright yellow paint that is inconspicuous against white. On the rear-left movable decorative board 3311, a 1-pin mark 3314e1, indicating the mounting orientation (mounting direction, position of the first terminal) of IC 3311e, is silk-screened on white resist using a bright yellow paint that is inconspicuous against white. As with the front mounting surfaces of the rear-left movable decorative boards 3311-3314, board management numbers 3311d-3314d, which are unique identification numbers for managing each board, are formed using foil-punched characters (i.e., punched characters formed by creating characters using a copper foil wiring pattern on the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed and punching out the surrounding copper foil). In addition, the board control numbers 3311d to 3314d are the same on the front mounting surface and the back mounting surface of the same board, and the direction of the characters lined up in a straight line is also the same (the board control numbers 3311d to 3314d on the front mounting surface and the board control numbers 3311d to 3314d on the back mounting surface are horizontal). That is, the board control numbers 3311d to 3314d formed on the back mounting surface of the back left movable decorative board 3311 to 3314 are also formed on the front mounting surface of the back left movable decorative board 3311 to 3314. Like the board control numbers 3311d to 3314d formed on the front mounting surface of the back left movable decorative board 3311 to 3314, the back left movable decorative board 3311 to 3314 is formed by a character string (in this example, 3 alphabet letters + 4 digit Arabic numerals) lined up in a straight line in the same direction as the board flow direction (reflow direction) when mounting electronic components on the board. The board control numbers 3311d-3314d are not limited to being formed by characters arranged in a line in the same direction (horizontal) as the board flow direction (reflow direction) when mounting electronic components on the rear-left movable decorative boards 3311-3314, but may also be formed by characters arranged in a line (either horizontally or vertically) perpendicular to the board flow direction (reflow direction) when mounting electronic components on the rear-left movable decorative boards 3311-3314. Furthermore, the board control numbers 3311d-3314d formed on the front mounting surfaces of the rear-left movable decorative boards 3311-3314 and the board control numbers 3311d-3314d formed on the back mounting surfaces of the rear-left movable decorative boards 3311-3314 are not limited to being formed in the same direction (horizontal), but may also be formed vertically.

Figure 357 also shows the wiring patterns on the rear mounting surfaces of the rear-left movable decorative boards 3311-3314. The wiring patterns on the rear mounting surfaces of the rear-left movable decorative boards 3311-3314 are also formed so that the majority of the portions are horizontal or vertical relative to the board control numbers 3311d-3314d. In other words, the wiring patterns on the rear mounting surfaces of the rear-left movable decorative boards 3311-3314 are formed so that when the direction of the wiring pattern is changed by 90 degrees, horizontal and vertical wiring patterns are connected with wiring patterns at a 45-degree angle relative to the board flow direction (reflow direction) when mounting electronic components.

As shown in Figure 357, the electronic components mounted on the rear mounting surfaces of the rear-left movable decorative boards 3311-3314 are arranged so that they are horizontal or vertical to the notation of the board control numbers 3311d-3314d. Furthermore, the rear mounting surface notation sections 3311b-3314b and the 1-pin mark 3314e1 are also written so that they are horizontal or vertical to the notation of the board control numbers 3311d-3314d on the rear mounting surfaces and front mounting surfaces of the rear-left movable decorative boards 3311-3314. Furthermore, most of the wiring patterns on the rear mounting surfaces of the rear-left movable decorative boards 3311-3314 are arranged so that they are horizontal or vertical to the notation of the board control numbers 3311d-3314d on the rear mounting surfaces and front mounting surfaces of the rear-left movable decorative boards 3311-3314. In other words, the surface-mount type electronic components (chip components, SMD (Surface Mount Device)) IC 3311e, connectors 3311g-3314g, and resistor 3312f mounted on the rear mounting surface of the rear left movable decorative boards 3311-3313, as well as the rear mounting surface markings 3311b-3314b and 1-pin mark 3314e1, are arranged horizontally or vertically relative to the board flow direction (reflow direction) when mounting the electronic components.

As described above, LED 3314a2 of the second LED group mounted on the front mounting surface of the rear left movable decorative board 3314 is arranged so as to be inclined relative to the notation of the board management number 3314d provided on the front mounting surface of the rear left movable decorative boards 3311 to 3314. Furthermore, because the notation of the board control number 3314d is horizontal on the front mounting surface and back mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative board 3314, the LED 3314a2 of the second LED group mounted on the front mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative board 3314 is also tilted relative to the board control number 3314d on the back mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative board 3314.Furthermore, it is also tilted relative to the electronic components (IC 3311e, connectors 3311g-3314g, resistor 3312f) mounted on the back mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative board 3314 so that they are horizontal or perpendicular to the board control number 3314d on the back mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative board 3314, the back mounting surface side notations 3311b-3314b, and the 1-pin mark 3314e1 marked on the back mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative board 3314.

In this way, in this example, the electronic components mounted on the front mounting surface of the rear left movable decorative boards 3311 to 3314 include LEDs that are arranged horizontally or vertically relative to the notation of the board management numbers 3311d to 3314d, as well as LEDs that are arranged at an angle relative to the notation of the board management numbers 3311d to 3314d, while the electronic components mounted on the rear mounting surface of the rear left movable decorative boards 3311 to 3314 only include electronic components that are arranged horizontally or vertically relative to the notation of the board management numbers 3311d to 3314d. In other words, because the front mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative boards 3311-3314 facing the player is likely to attract the player's attention, the LEDs mounted on the front mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative boards 3311-3314 are tilted and positioned to match the shape of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301, allowing light from the LEDs 3314a to reach every corner of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 evenly, preventing uneven lighting and enhancing the lighting effect, preventing a decline in interest in the game. On the other hand, for electronic components placed on the rear mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative boards 3311-3314 that do not face the player, positioning them horizontally or vertically with respect to the notation of the board control numbers 3311d-3314d improves the ease of checking and installing the electronic components.

[Another example of the main board]
Next, a substrate on which both lead-type (through-hole mounting type, insertion mounting type) electronic components (lead components, insertion mounting electronic components, dip components) and surface-mount type electronic components (chip components, SMD (Surface Mount Device)) are mounted will be described with reference to FIGS. 358 to 359. 358 and 359 are schematic diagrams showing a part of main control board 1310 in another example, where Fig. 358(A) is a schematic diagram showing the mounting state of electronic components on mounting surface (surface) 1310x of main control board 1310, Fig. 358(B) is a schematic diagram showing through holes and pads on mounting surface (surface) 1310x of main control board 1310, Fig. 359(A) is a schematic diagram showing the wiring pattern on mounting surface (surface) 1310x of main control board 1310, and Fig. 359(B) is a schematic diagram showing the wiring pattern on solder surface (back surface) 1310y of main control board 1310. Note that only the parts that differ from the above-mentioned embodiment will be described below, and redundant description will not be provided.

The main control board 1310 in this example is designed to accommodate a mixture of lead-type (through-hole mounting type, insertion mounting type) electronic components, in which lead terminals are inserted and soldered into through-holes on the surface of the board, and surface-mount type electronic components, in which electrodes are soldered to pads on the surface of the board without using through-holes.

Surface-mount electronic components not only allow the use of both sides of a board, but also allow for higher packaging density by making the electronic components smaller than lead-type electronic components, even for the same type of electronic components. This makes it possible to shorten the wiring length on the board, allowing for faster circuits. However, since some electronic components used in gaming machines are manufactured only as lead-type components and not as surface-mount types, both lead-type and surface-mount type electronic components are mounted on a single board. However, because the majority of electronic components are manufactured as surface-mount types, the number of surface-mount type electronic components mounted on a single board will be greater than the number of lead-type electronic components mounted on that board.

Although not shown in Figure 358(A), a surface-side notation portion indicating some or all of the attributes of the surface-side electronic components (hereinafter referred to as surface-side electronic components) to be mounted on the surface (mounting surface 1310x), such as the component numbers of the electronic components (hereinafter referred to as surface-side electronic components) and the area indicating the position at which the surface-side electronic components are to be placed (which may also include the shape, size, mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the surface-side electronic components, and model of the surface-side electronic components), is formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x by silk printing in a color that stands out against the resist of the main control board 1310, specifically white paint that stands out against the green resist of the main control board 1310.

As such, the surface-side marking section is provided so that the surface-side electronic components can be mounted. However, in this example, although it is not provided so that the surface-side electronic components can be mounted, a special marking section (surface-side special marking section) is formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x separately from the surface-side marking section, indicating the attributes of the surface-side electronic components, such as the component number of the surface-side electronic component to be mounted and the area indicating the position where the surface-side electronic component will be placed (which may also include the shape of the surface-side electronic component, the size of the surface-side electronic component, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the surface-side electronic component, and the model of the surface-side electronic component).

In addition, a parts list area may be provided as an information area on either the mounting surface (front side) 1310x or the soldering surface (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, in which information corresponding to the identifiers of surface-mount type electronic components is displayed. Information displayed in the parts list area may include the name of the manufacturer of the surface-mount type electronic component (including abbreviations and symbols), the product number of the surface-mount type electronic component, etc.

Specifically, the parts list area may include a silkscreen print of an electronic component list, consisting of part numbers and catalog numbers aligned in a row, in white (or black). The part numbers and product numbers may be printed in white (or black) silkscreen print larger (e.g., three to five times larger) than the part numbers silkscreen print in white (or black) in the component placement area. A separator ":" may be placed between the part number and product number (catalog number) to prevent them from being identified as consecutive. This separator allows the part number and product number (catalog number) to be distinguished from each other. The manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) may also be silkscreen print in white (or black) along with the product number (catalog number). As a result, even if the display mode of the identifier attached to a surface-mount type electronic component mounted on the main control board 1310 is difficult to see, the identifier of the surface-mount type electronic component can be reliably seen from the information (manufacturer name, product number, etc.) corresponding to the identifier displayed in the component list area on the main control board 1310.

In addition, the parts list area may be configured to display a reduced version of the layout of electronic components on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and symbols or borders indicating the mounting direction of electronic components may be displayed near the electronic components separately from the front surface display area. This can prevent problems during mounting and improve the reliability of the gaming machine.

Here, surface-mount type electronic components generally have small outer diameters and protrude only a small amount (short height) from the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. On the other hand, lead-type electronic components generally have large outer diameters and protrude a large amount (short height) from the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. Therefore, on a board that mixes lead-type and surface-mount type electronic components, the surface-mount type electronic components and the surface-side markings formed corresponding to the surface-mount type electronic components may be difficult to visually see due to the lead-type electronic components.

In this example, the main control board 1310 is mounted with a mixture of surface-mount type electronic components and lead-type electronic components, but a special marking area where no surface-side electronic components are mounted is formed separately from the surface-side marking area on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x, and is designed to display some or all of the attributes of the surface-side electronic components, such as the part number of the surface-side electronic component to be mounted and the area indicating the position where the surface-side electronic component is to be placed (which may also include the shape of the surface-side electronic component, the size of the surface-side electronic component, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the surface-side electronic component, and the model of the surface-side electronic component). Therefore, for example, by forming a special marking in a position where it is not visually obstructed by lead-type electronic components, it becomes possible to check information related to the surface-side electronic components, preventing misreading of information related to the installed electronic components during inspection after the electronic components are installed (inspection of whether the correct electronic components are installed in the correct state (orientation, etc.) and whether illegal electronic components are installed), improving the reliability of the gaming machine, making it easier to discover illegal electronic components and preventing the occurrence of fraudulent activity, and further, the ease of visually checking information related to the surface-side electronic components reduces the workload during inspection.

The special notation portion may be formed for each electronic component to be mounted (one-to-one correspondence), or may be formed individually for electronic components of the same type (collectively one). The special notation portion may also be formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x by silkscreen printing with a color that stands out against the resist of the main control board 1310, specifically, white paint that stands out against the green resist of the main control board 1310, or may be formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x by silkscreen printing with paint of the same color as the surface-side notation portion, or may be formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x by silkscreen printing with paint of a different color than the surface-side notation portion. In addition, when electronic components are mounted on both the front surface (mounting surface (front surface) 1310x in the case of the main control board 1310) and the back surface (solder surface (back surface) 1310y in the case of the main control board 1310) (double-sided mounting), the back surface also has a back surface indicating some or all of the attributes of the back surface side electronic components, such as the component number of the back surface side electronic component, an area indicating the position where the back surface side electronic component is to be placed (which may further include the shape of the back surface side electronic component, the size of the back surface side electronic component, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the back surface side electronic component, and the model of the back surface side electronic component). In addition to the marking area, a special marking area (backside special marking area) on the back side (in the case of the main control board 1310, the solder surface (backside) 1310y) where backside electronic components will not be mounted may be formed to partially or completely display the part number of the frontside electronic component to be mounted, attributes of the frontside electronic component, such as an area indicating the position of the frontside electronic component (which may also include the shape, size, mounting orientation, and model of the frontside electronic component). Even in this case, by forming the special marking area in a location that is not obstructed by lead-type electronic components, for example, information related to the backside electronic component can be confirmed. This prevents misreading of information related to the installed electronic components during post-installation inspections (e.g., inspections to determine whether the correct electronic components are installed in the correct state (e.g., orientation) and whether incorrect electronic components are installed), improving the reliability of the gaming machine and making it easier to detect incorrect electronic components, thereby reducing the occurrence of fraudulent activities. Furthermore, the ability to easily view information related to the backside electronic components reduces the workload during inspections.

In addition, in this example, electronic components are mounted only on the front surface (mounting surface 1310x) of the main control board 1310, and no electronic components are mounted on the back surface (solder surface (back surface) 1310y) (single-sided mounting). In Figure 358(A), a setting indicator 1310g is disposed on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, above the center line of the rectangular main control board 1310 in the short direction (the vertical direction in Figure 358(A)) and near the end of the rectangular main control board 1310 in the short direction. This setting indicator is a lead-type electronic component (insertion-mounted electronic component) consisting of a single 7-segment LED indicator with a decimal point (so-called dot).

Note that the following describes the area around the setting display 1310g on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the area defined by a reference line passing through any part of the setting display 1310g; however, this is not limited to this, and a similar configuration may be adopted for the area around the base monitor 1310h, which is configured as a row of six (or a number other than six) seven-segment LEDs, or the area defined by a reference line passing through any part of the base monitor 1310h. Even if the setting display 1310g and the base monitor 1310h are integrated and the setting value is displayed on the base monitor 1310h, which is configured as a row of six (or a number other than six) seven-segment LEDs, during setting changes or setting confirmations, the area around the base monitor 1310h and the area defined by a reference line passing through any part of the base monitor 1310h may have a similar configuration to the area around the setting display 1310g, which will be described below, or the area defined by a reference line passing through any part of the setting display 1310g.

Furthermore, the following configuration is not limited to being adopted for the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and may also be adopted for a board other than the main control board 1310 (for example, the power supply board 630 or the payout control board 633). In other words, the following configuration may be adopted for the area of a specific board where a display that displays important information about the game (for example, the number of winning balls, base value, etc.) is mounted, or for a specific mounting area (for example, the area where the main control MPU 1310a is mounted, or the area where the board management number is displayed), as long as it improves the visibility of the display or the specific mounting area.

In the main control board 1310 of this example, in Figure 358(A), no lead-type electronic components are mounted in the area of the mounting surface (surface) 1310x from the area where the setting indicator 1310g is mounted to the longitudinal end (left-right direction in Figure 358(A)) of the main control board 1310 above the setting indicator 1310g. Specifically, as shown in Figure 358(A), within the range of width A of the setting indicator 1310g on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x, above the setting indicator 1310g, there are provided unmounted areas 1310m and 1310n where no electronic components are mounted under normal circumstances when no testing is being performed, and no lead-type electronic components (in this example, no surface-mounted electronic components are mounted, but surface-mounted electronic components may be mounted, or surface-mounted electronic components may not be mounted at all) are mounted. In this example, electronic components other than connectors among the electronic components for testing are mounted in the unmounted area 1310m, and connectors among the electronic components for testing are mounted in the unmounted area 1310n.

On the other hand, in Figure 358(A), three capacitors MC2 are provided as lead-type electronic components below the setting indicator 1310g within the range of width A of the setting indicator 1310g on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. Thus, in this example, in Figure 358(A), within the range of width A of the setting indicator 1310g on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, more lead-type electronic components are mounted below the setting indicator 1310g than above the setting indicator 1310g. In Figure 358 (A), lead-type electronic components may not be mounted within the range of width A of the setting indicator 1310g on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, regardless of whether it is above or below the setting indicator 1310g, and only surface-mounted electronic components may be mounted, or lead-type electronic components may be mounted at a predetermined distance from the setting indicator 1310g (for example, a distance equal to or greater than the width dimension in the short direction of the setting indicator 1310g (left-right direction in Figure 358 (A))).

Generally, surface-mount electronic components protrude less from the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 than lead-type electronic components. Furthermore, as noted above, surface-mount electronic components are smaller than lead-type electronic components. In the main control board 1310 of this example, within the width A of the setting indicator 1310g on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x, no lead-type electronic components are mounted above the setting indicator 1310g in FIG. 358(A), and lead-type electronic components are mounted below the setting indicator 1310g. Therefore, when the setting indicator 1310g is viewed from above the main control board 1310 with the main control board 1310 attached to the pachinko machine 1, the lead-type electronic components are prevented from obstructing the visibility of the setting indicator 1310g (information (setting values, etc.) displayed on the setting indicator 1310g), improving workability. Furthermore, if lead-type electronic components are configured so as not to be mounted below the setting display 1310g in Figure 358(A) at least within a specified range from the setting display 1310g (for example, the range of the width dimension in the short direction of the setting display 1310g (left-right direction in Figure 358(A))), when the main control board 1310 is attached to the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to prevent obstruction to the visibility of the setting display 1310g not only from above the main control board 1310 but also from below, further improving workability.

In the above example, the main control board 1310 is configured so that no lead-type electronic components are mounted above the setting indicator 1310g in FIG. 358(A) within the range of width A of the setting indicator 1310g on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. However, it is also possible to mount more lead-type electronic components below the setting indicator 1310g than above the setting indicator 1310g in FIG. 358(A) within the range of width A of the setting indicator 1310g on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. It is possible to prevent lead-type electronic components from being mounted within a predetermined range from the display 1310g (for example, a range of width dimensions in the short side direction of the setting display 1310g (left-right direction in Figure 358(A))), or to prevent lead-type electronic components from being mounted within at least a specific range below the setting display 1310g in Figure 358(A) (for example, a range of width dimensions in the short side direction of the setting display 1310g (left-right direction in Figure 358(A))), while it is possible to prevent lead-type electronic components from being mounted within a special range above the setting display 1310g in Figure 358(A) that is wider than the above-mentioned specific range (for example, a range of width dimensions in the long side direction of the setting display 1310g (up-down direction in Figure 358(A))). In other words, in FIG. 358, the area above the setting indicator 1310g may be wider than the area below the setting indicator 1310g and may have an area (specific area) adjacent to the setting indicator 1310g above, to the left, or to the right in the figure where no lead-type electronic components are mounted. This allows the setting indicator 1310g to be viewed from above the main control board 1310 without being obstructed by lead-type electronic components mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, improving operability.

Furthermore, specific areas adjacent to the setting indicator 1310g, located at least on the upper, left, and right sides, may be provided with surface-mount electronic components or the above-mentioned test electronic components, and may include unmounted areas 1310m and 1310n where no electronic components are mounted under normal conditions when testing is not being performed, traceability labels printed with marks such as board (mounting) recognition marks (also known as fiducial marks) and two-dimensional barcodes, and test points as check terminals. Furthermore, lead-type electronic components may be mounted in areas other than the specific areas above, left, and right of the setting indicator 1310g, or no lead-type electronic components may be mounted. That is, at least at the top, left, or right of the setting display 1310g, an area closer to the setting display 1310g than the mounting area for lead-type electronic components (which does not have to have lead-type electronic components mounted thereon) is an area where surface-mounted electronic components or the above-mentioned test electronic components are mounted, and unmounted areas 1310m and 1310n where no electronic components are mounted under normal circumstances when no testing is being performed, traceability stickers printed with marks such as board (mounting) recognition marks (also called fiducial marks) and two-dimensional barcodes, test points as check terminals, etc. may be provided. In this case, lead-type electronic components that protrude significantly from the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 are not mounted above, to the left, or to the right of the setting indicator 1310g in the figure, but are instead provided with surface-mounted electronic components that protrude minimally from the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, unmounted areas 1310m and 1310n where the above-mentioned test electronic components are mounted but where no electronic components are normally mounted when no testing is being performed, board (mounting) recognition marks (also known as fiducial marks), traceability stickers printed with marks such as two-dimensional barcodes, test points as check terminals, etc., so that visibility of the setting indicator 1310g is not obstructed.

Furthermore, in this example, the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is configured so that more lead-type electronic components are mounted below the line X-X in Fig. 358(A) than above the line X-X in Fig. 358(A), not just in the vicinity of the setting indicator 1310g, but in all areas. In other words, fewer lead-type electronic components are mounted in the area above the setting indicator 1310g on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 than in the area below the setting indicator 1310g. This prevents lead-type electronic components from obstructing visibility when checking the electronic components (such as the setting indicator 1310g) mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 while the main control board 1310x is attached to the pachinko machine 1, or when checking the component numbers and model numbers printed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 or the surface of the electronic components. Therefore, if tampering occurs, such as the mounting of unauthorized electronic components on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, which executes important processes that affect the player's interests, this can be easily detected, and fraudulent activity can be prevented.

Note that while line X-X in Figure 358(A) is set so as to pass through the top edge of setting indicator 1310g, it is also possible for more lead-type electronic components to be mounted in the area above and below the reference line, which passes through any point between the top and bottom edges of setting indicator 1310g. For example, line Y-Y may be set as a reference line passing through the bottom edge of setting indicator 1310g in Figure 358(A), and more lead-type electronic components may be mounted in the area below this Y-Y line than in the area above the Y-Y line. In this case, more lead-type electronic components will be mounted in the area below the setting display 1310g in Figure 358 (A) than in the area including not only the area above but also the areas to the left and right of the setting display 1310g. Therefore, when the main control board 1310 is attached to the pachinko machine 1, the setting display 1310g can be seen from above and to the left and right of the main control board 1310 without being obstructed by the lead-type electronic components mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, improving workability.

In addition, in Figure 358 (A), within the range of width B, no lead-type electronic components are mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the left-right direction of the setting indicator 1310g, at least within a predetermined range from the setting indicator 1310g (for example, within the range of the width dimension in the short direction of the setting indicator 1310g (left-right direction in Figure 358 (A))). This makes it possible, when the main control board 1310 is attached to the pachinko machine 1, to view the setting indicator 1310g from the left and right sides of the main control board 1310 without being obstructed by lead-type electronic components mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, improving operability. In FIG. 358(A), the area of the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 to the right of the setting indicator 1310g (the side closer to the longitudinal end of the main control board 1310) has a larger area where lead-type electronic components are not mounted than the area to the left of the setting indicator 1310g (the side farther from the longitudinal end of the main control board 1310). Therefore, when the main control board 1310 is attached to the pachinko machine 1, the setting indicator 1310g can be seen from the longitudinal end side (the right end side) of the main control board 1310 without being obstructed by the lead-type electronic components mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, improving operability.

In addition, the area Z surrounding the area where the setting display 1310g is installed on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 (for example, the area Z expanded from the top, bottom, left, and right sides of the setting display 1310g to an extent equivalent to the width of the setting display 1310g in the short direction; the area Z surrounded by the dotted line) is not limited to areas where surface-mounted electronic components are mounted, but may also be areas where the above-mentioned test electronic components are mounted, and may be provided with unmounted areas 1310m, 1310n where no electronic components are mounted under normal circumstances when no testing is being performed, traceability stickers printed with marks such as board (mounting) recognition marks (also called fiducial marks) and two-dimensional barcodes, test points as check terminals, etc. In other words, in the region Z surrounding the region of the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 where the setting indicator 1310g is installed, tall electronic components such as lead-type electronic components (electronic components that protrude significantly from the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 when mounted) are not placed, but rather, short electronic components such as surface-mount electronic components (electronic components that protrude only slightly from the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 when mounted), unmounted regions 1310m and 1310n that protrude little or only slightly from the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, traceability labels printed with marks such as board (mounting) recognition marks (also called fiducial marks) and two-dimensional barcodes, test points, etc. may be provided. This improves the visibility of the setting indicator 1310g mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, improving workability. The area Z surrounding the area where the setting display 1310g is installed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the mounting area for low-profile electronic components such as surface-mounted electronic components (electronic components that protrude only a small amount from the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 when mounted), non-mounted areas 1310m and 1310n that protrude little or only a small amount from the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, board (mounting) recognition marks (also called fiducial marks), tracers on which marks such as two-dimensional barcodes are printed, and the like are also included. It is sufficient that at least a portion of the area where traceability stickers, test points, etc. are formed overlaps with the area where traceability stickers, test points, etc. are formed. Surface-mount electronic components may be mounted across area Z surrounding the area where setting display 1310g is installed on mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of main control board 1310 and the area outside of area Z, or traceability stickers, test points, etc. may be formed in unmounted areas 1310m, 1310n, board (mounting) recognition marks (also called fiducial marks), two-dimensional barcodes, or other marks printed thereon.

In addition, within a predetermined range from at least one specific side of the four sides of the surface of the setting display 1310g of the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 toward the end of the main control board 1310 (for example, in Figure 358 (A), a predetermined range from the upper side of the four sides of the surface of the setting display 1310g toward the upper end of the main control board 1310), surface-mounted electronic components, unmounted areas 1310m, 1310n where electronic components are mounted but no electronic components are mounted under normal circumstances when testing is not being performed, board (mounting) recognition marks (also called fiducial marks), traceability stickers printed with marks such as two-dimensional barcodes, test points, etc. may be provided. As a result, tall electronic components such as lead-type electronic components are not mounted within a predetermined range from at least one specific side of the four sides of the surface of the setting display 1310g toward the end of the main control board 1310 (for example, in Figure 358 (A), a predetermined range from the upper side of the four sides of the surface of the setting display 1310g toward the upper end of the main control board 1310), which improves the visibility of the setting display 1310g mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 from this specific side, thereby improving workability. Even in this case, a predetermined range extending from a specific side of the four sides of the surface of the setting display 1310g on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 toward the end of the main control board 1310, a mounting area for low-profile electronic components such as surface-mounted electronic components (electronic components that protrude only slightly from the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 when mounted), unmounted areas 1310m and 1310n that protrude little or only slightly from the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, board (mounting) recognition marks (also called fiducial marks), two-dimensional barcodes, and other marks are printed. It is sufficient that at least a portion of the area where traceability labels, test points, etc. are formed overlaps with the area where they are formed; surface-mounted electronic components may be mounted over a specified range from one of the four sides of the surface of the setting display 1310g on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 toward the end of the main control board 1310, as well as an area outside of that specified range; or traceability labels, test points, etc. may be formed on which marks such as unmounted areas 1310m, 1310n, board (mounting) recognition marks (also called fiducial marks), and two-dimensional barcodes are printed.

Note that test points used as check terminals when conducting electrical inspections of circuit boards can be either land-shaped or via-hole shaped. However, in this example, of the test points formed on the main control board 1310, at least the ground (GND) line and power line are formed with via-hole shaped test points rather than land-shaped test points. By making the test points for the ground (GND) line and the test points for the power line the same shape, it is difficult to distinguish between test points for the ground (GND) line and test points for the power line, improving security. Furthermore, by using via-hole shaped test points, the tip of a contact probe that is brought into contact with a via-hole shaped test point as a check terminal when conducting an electrical inspection is less likely to slip, preventing short circuits.

In addition, in this example, the hole diameters of all via-hole-shaped test points are the same. This makes it more difficult to distinguish between test points for the ground (GND) line and test points for the power line, improving security. In addition, it also makes it possible to perform electrical testing using a common contact probe for test points formed on the ground (GND) line and power line of the main control board 1310, improving workability. Furthermore, when the hole diameters of all via-hole-shaped test points are the same, a predetermined number of test points may be formed according to (proportional to) the magnitude of the current flowing through the circuit (ground (GND) line or power line). For example, multiple test points may be formed for circuits through which large currents flow. This configuration ensures that when checking voltages, waveforms, and logic during electrical testing of the main control board 1310, the same stable measurement results can be obtained regardless of which test point TP is used as the reference, especially for the ground.

In addition, some or all of the test points formed on at least one of the ground (GND) line and power line of the main control board 1310 are positioned closer to the connector that supplies power to the main control board 1310 than the check points formed on the control signal lines. This configuration makes it possible to measure and test with the impedance of the ground (GND) line and power line minimized when checking voltages, waveforms, and logic during electrical testing of the main control board 1310, enabling stable measurements and testing.

In addition, in this example, the test points formed on the ground (GND) line and the test points formed on the power supply line of the main control board 1310 are not positioned near the test points formed on the control signal lines. This prevents the ground (GND) line or power supply line from accidentally shorting out with the control signal line when, for example, manually performing an electrical test on the main control board 1310, and prevents electronic components mounted on the main control board 1310 from failing due to a short-circuit between the ground (GND) line or power supply line and the control signal line.

Also, control signal lines may have via-hole shaped test points formed in the same way as ground (GND) and power lines, and the hole diameter may be the same as that of the via-hole shaped test points. This makes it difficult to distinguish between a test point for a ground (GND) line, a test point for a power line, or a test point for a control signal line, improving security.

Note that as long as at least the test points for the ground (GND) line and the test points for the power line are the same test points, they may be land-shaped test points, and the outer shape (size) of the land shape of these test points may also be the same. In this case, it becomes difficult to distinguish between a test point for the ground (GND) line and a test point for the power line, improving security. Furthermore, control signal lines may also be land-shaped test points, and the outer shape (size) of the land shape may also be the same. This makes it difficult to distinguish between a test point for the ground (GND) line, a test point for the power line, or a test point for the control signal line, improving security.

Furthermore, the main control board 1310 may be formed with only via-hole-shaped or land-shaped test points, or with both via-hole-shaped and land-shaped test points. Furthermore, via-hole-shaped test points and land-shaped test points may be formed on one or more (or all) of the ground (GND) line, power supply line, and control signal line. Alternatively, via-hole-shaped test points and land-shaped test points may be formed on one or two of the ground (GND) line, power supply line, and control signal line, and either via-hole-shaped or land-shaped test points may be formed on another line. In this case, either the diameter of the via-hole shape or the outer shape (size) of the land shape may be the same (for example, the same shape may be used for a line on which only via-hole-shaped or land-shaped test points are formed), or both. This makes it difficult to distinguish between test points for the ground (GND) line and those for the power line, improving security. Also, by making the majority (e.g., 80% or more) of the via-hole-shaped test points and land-shaped test points via-hole-shaped test points, it becomes possible to prevent short circuits.

As shown in Figure 358 (B), on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in this example, the through holes 1310r for mounting lead-type electronic components are formed closer to the edge of the board (edge face (in this example, the right edge of the main control board 1310)) than the pads 1310p for mounting surface-mount type electronic components. In other words, the lead-type electronic components are arranged closer to the edge of the board than the surface-mount type electronic components. Note that lead-type electronic components are particularly resistant to lateral impacts (pressure) because their lead terminals are inserted into the through holes 1310r and fixed by soldering, whereas surface-mount type electronic components are fixed by soldering connection terminals to the pads 1310, making them vulnerable to lateral impacts and making surface-mount type electronic components more susceptible to peeling off than lead-type electronic components (they have weaker mounting strength). In this example, the lead-type electronic components are positioned closer to the edge of the board than the surface-mount type electronic components, so if the side of the board is hit during manufacturing, the impact will be applied from the side to the lead-type electronic components that are mounted on the edge of the board and are resistant to lateral impacts, while the surface-mount type electronic components that are vulnerable to lateral impacts will not be subjected to the impact. This prevents electronic components mounted on the board (especially surface-mount type electronic components) from peeling off (detachment).

Furthermore, the main control board 1310 of this example contributes to improving the security of the mounted electronic components by differentiating the characteristics of the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the soldering surface (back surface) 1310y. Figure 359(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a portion of the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and Figure 359(B) is an explanatory diagram showing a portion of the wiring pattern formed on the soldering surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

As shown in Figures 359 (A) and (B), the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 has more wiring patterns formed in the vertical direction (vertical direction when the main control board 1310 is attached to the pachinko machine 1) than in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction when the main control board 1310 is attached to the pachinko machine 1), whereas the soldering surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 has more wiring patterns formed in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction when the main control board 1310 is attached to the pachinko machine 1) than in the vertical direction (vertical direction when the main control board 1310 is attached to the pachinko machine 1).

Furthermore, the wiring patterns formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 are mostly formed from wiring patterns in the illustrated vertical direction (vertical when the main control board 1310 is attached to the pachinko machine 1) and diagonal wiring patterns connecting two illustrated vertical direction (vertical when the main control board 1310 is attached to the pachinko machine 1) wiring patterns, and although some wiring patterns are formed in the illustrated horizontal direction (horizontal when the main control board 1310 is attached to the pachinko machine 1), the proportion is low.

On the other hand, the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is mostly formed by wiring patterns in the horizontal direction as shown (horizontal when the main control board 1310 is attached to the pachinko machine 1) and diagonal wiring patterns connecting two horizontal wiring patterns (horizontal when the main control board 1310 is attached to the pachinko machine 1). Although some wiring patterns are formed in the vertical direction as shown (vertical when the main control board 1310 is attached to the pachinko machine 1), the proportion is low.

In the above-mentioned main control board 1310, at least half of the wiring patterns formed on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 are formed by a wiring pattern in the illustrated vertical direction (vertical direction when the main control board 1310 is attached to the pachinko machine 1) and a diagonal wiring pattern connecting two illustrated vertical direction (vertical direction when the main control board 1310 is attached to the pachinko machine 1) wiring patterns, and at least half of the wiring patterns formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are formed by a wiring pattern in the illustrated horizontal direction (horizontal direction when the main control board 1310 is attached to the pachinko machine 1) and a diagonal wiring pattern connecting two illustrated horizontal direction (horizontal direction when the main control board 1310 is attached to the pachinko machine 1) wiring patterns. It is sufficient that at least the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 has more wiring patterns in the illustrated vertical direction (vertical direction when the main control board 1310 is attached to the pachinko machine 1) and more diagonal wiring patterns connecting two illustrated vertical direction (vertical direction when the main control board 1310 is attached to the pachinko machine 1) wiring patterns formed thereon than the soldering surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, and that the soldering surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 has more wiring patterns in the illustrated horizontal direction (horizontal direction when the main control board 1310 is attached to the pachinko machine 1) and more diagonal wiring patterns connecting two illustrated horizontal direction (horizontal direction when the main control board 1310 is attached to the pachinko machine 1) wiring patterns formed thereon than the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310.

In the above example, the ratio of vertical wiring patterns to horizontal wiring patterns varies depending on the mounting surface. However, it is sufficient if at least most of the data bus lines are formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. In this case, the data bus lines are difficult to see from the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, making tampering with the data bus lines more difficult and improving security. Furthermore, in this example, the vertical wiring patterns are primarily signal and power lines within the circuit blocks, while the horizontal wiring patterns connect multiple circuit blocks. Furthermore, by forming the horizontal wiring patterns on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, it becomes difficult to determine the connections between multiple circuit blocks from the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, making tampering more difficult and improving security.

Furthermore, because the main control board 1310 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape, a greater number of electronic components are mounted in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction when the main control board 1310 is attached to the pachinko machine 1) than in the vertical direction (vertical direction when the main control board 1310 is attached to the pachinko machine 1). Therefore, by forming most of the wiring pattern in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction when the main control board 1310 is attached to the pachinko machine 1) on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, it is possible to infer the connections of electronic components in the vertical direction (vertical direction when the main control board 1310 is attached to the pachinko machine 1) from the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, while it is difficult to infer the connections of electronic components in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction when the main control board 1310 is attached to the pachinko machine 1), thereby improving security. In other words, on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, it is possible to infer the connections from the wiring patterns for groups of multiple electronic components (such as electronic components that make up circuits that perform the same process) arranged in the vertical direction shown in the figure (vertical direction when the main control board 1310 is attached to the pachinko machine 1), but it is difficult to infer the connections from the wiring patterns for groups of multiple electronic components arranged in the horizontal direction shown in the figure (horizontal direction when the main control board 1310 is attached to the pachinko machine 1). This improves security and discourages fraudulent acts against the main control board 1310.

As described above, no electronic components are mounted on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. In other words, although wiring patterns, through holes, via holes, pads, etc. are formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, there are no wiring patterns connecting the pads of electronic components mounted on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 to the pads of electronic components mounted on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, or wiring patterns connecting the pads of electronic components mounted on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 to through holes or via holes. As a result, only the wiring patterns connecting the through holes, via holes, pads, etc. can be seen from the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. This makes it difficult to infer the connections of electronic components from the wiring pattern formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 in the horizontal direction shown in the figure (the horizontal direction when the main control board 1310 is attached to the pachinko machine 1), thereby improving security.

In addition, the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 may be configured to have a part or all of the unmounted areas 1310m, 1310n (for example, connector mounting area 1310n) formed on it, which are areas where electronic components for testing are mounted, but where no electronic components are mounted under normal circumstances when testing is not being performed. In this case, testing is performed with electronic components mounted on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 and a test circuit formed, so that during testing, the pads of the electronic components mounted on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 and the pads of the electronic components mounted on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 will not be connected to the main control board 1310. This allows users to check the wiring patterns connecting the pads of electronic components mounted on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 to the pads of electronic components mounted on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, as well as the wiring patterns connecting the pads of electronic components mounted on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y to through holes and via holes. However, during normal times when testing is not being performed (such as when the board is installed in an amusement facility or when games are being played), no electronic components can be mounted on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, thereby improving both security and workability during testing.

Furthermore, in this example, it can be seen that the terminals (pins) of lead-type electronic components (e.g., main control MPU 1310a, etc.) mounted on mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of main control board 1310 are connected to wiring patterns mainly on solder surface (back surface) 1310y of main control board 1310. In other words, most of the wiring patterns formed on mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of main control board 1310 are not directly connected to the terminals (pins) of lead-type electronic components (e.g., main control MPU 1310a, etc.), but rather the wiring patterns formed on solder surface (back surface) 1310y are directly connected to the terminals (pins) of lead-type electronic components (e.g., main control MPU 1310a, etc.), and are indirectly connected via through holes, via holes, etc. Thus, in this example, the wiring patterns directly connected to the terminals (pins) of lead-type electronic components (such as the main control MPU 1310a) mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 are more numerous on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 than on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x. This makes it difficult to guess the wiring patterns connected to lead-type electronic components such as the main control MPU 1310a, which is an important electronic component that executes processes related to the progress of the game and the player's interests, thereby improving security.

In addition, in this example, via holes and through holes are provided for purposes other than inserting and fixing the lead terminals of lead-type electronic components. Some provide interlayer connections to avoid obstacles in the wiring patterns, while others provide interlayer connections regardless of the presence of obstacles (even if no obstacles are present). By using via holes and through holes that provide interlayer connections regardless of the presence of obstacles as test points (check terminals), electrical testing of the main control board 1310 can be performed by abutting the tip of a contact probe from either the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x or the solder surface (back surface) 1310y. As described above, when main control board 1310 is not being tested, electronic components are mounted only on mounting surface (front surface) 1310x, and no electronic components are mounted on solder surface (back surface) 1310y. Because mounting surface (front surface) 1310x is packed with many electronic components and has limited space, forming test points (check terminals) only on mounting surface (front surface) 1310x could result in the tips of multiple contact probes coming into contact and causing a short circuit. In this example, via holes and through holes used as test points (check terminals) during electrical testing are distributed across mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and solder surface (back surface) 1310y, preventing defects such as short circuits caused by the tips of multiple contact probes coming into contact during electrical testing.

Furthermore, in addition to or separately from the above, the main control board 1310, power supply board 630, dispensing control board 633, etc. may be partitioned into an area where only surface-mount electronic components are mounted and an area where both surface-mount electronic components and lead-type electronic components are mounted. For example, in this example, important surface-mount electronic components are mounted in a specific area, and this is partitioned off from an area where both surface-mount electronic components and lead-type electronic components are mounted. This draws attention to the specific area and makes it difficult to touch the surface-mount electronic components mounted in this specific area, making it possible to prevent important surface-mount electronic components from falling off (mounting peeling), pranks, fraud, etc. As explained below.

As shown in Figure 360, in this example, the main control board 1310 has surface-mounted electronic components mounted in a specific region 1310t of the mounting surface (surface) 1310x, and through holes (which may also be via holes) are formed as test points surrounding this specific region 1310t to separate it from other regions. This makes it possible to draw attention to the specific region 1310t on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, making it difficult to touch the surface-mounted electronic components mounted in the specific region 1310t. This makes it possible to prevent, for example, the surface-mounted electronic components mounted in the specific mounting region from peeling off and from being tampered with or subjected to fraudulent activity.

Furthermore, surface-mount type electronic components and lead-type electronic components are mounted in areas other than the specific area 1310t on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. Note that only lead-type electronic components may be mounted in areas other than the specific area 1310t on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310.

In addition, the specific area 1310t of the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is not limited to being surrounded by through holes. Lead terminals may be inserted into the through holes surrounding the specific area 1310t and soldered to mount lead-type electronic components in the specific area 1310t, and the specific area 1310t may be partitioned by surrounding it with these mounted lead-type electronic components. Alternatively, a structure separate from the electronic components (for example, a cover (case) that covers the specific area 1310t, or a structure erected from the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 so as to surround the specific area 1310t) may be used. The specific area 1310t may be defined by a cover or case covering the main control board 1310t, which may have a sealing mechanism such as a crimped portion), or the specific area may be defined by providing a portion in the main control board box 1320 that defines the specific area 1310t (for example, a portion that stands upright so as to surround the specific area 1310t), or by mounting a surface-mount type electronic component on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 that corresponds to the specific area 1310t, that is, for the specific area 1310t, both the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 may be mounted. The specific area 1310t may be partitioned by defining a double-sided mounting area on one side where surface-mounted electronic components are mounted, and a single-sided mounting area on the other side where electronic components (both surface-mounted electronic components and lead-type electronic components, or only lead-type electronic components) are mounted only on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, or by differentiating the height of the mounting positions of the specific area 1310t and other areas (areas other than the specific area 1310t). For example, the main control board 1310 may be configured with multiple (for example, two) boards, and the first board may be The electronic components may be both surface-mount type electronic components and lead-type electronic components, or only lead-type electronic components, and a second board serving as a specific area 1310t on which the surface-mount type electronic components are mounted may be mounted on the first board, thereby defining the specific area 1310t by making the mounting position height different from that of the electronic components (particularly surface-mount type electronic components) mounted on the first board. Alternatively, this second board may be covered with or housed in a cover (metal or resin (which may be conductive resin), etc.), and inserted into or surface-mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310.

[Responses to fraudulent acts against the main control means]
The main board in the pachinko machine 1 draws a lottery to determine whether or not a game ball B has entered the first starting hole 2002 or the second starting hole 2004 provided on the game board 5, and if the result of the lottery is a win, controls the game to a special game state that is advantageous to the player. It is composed of the above-mentioned main control board 1310 and a plurality of boards (excluding the peripheral control board 1510) that are directly or indirectly connected to the main control board 1310 without going through the above-mentioned peripheral control board 1510. That is, the main board in this embodiment is composed of the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, the function display board 1402, the magnetic sensor board of the magnetic sensor 1050, the sensor board of the first starting hole sensor 3002, and the sensor board of the second starting hole sensor 2401.

The main control board 1310, payout control board 633, function display board 1402, magnetic sensor board for magnetic sensor 1050, sensor board for first start opening sensor 3002, and sensor board for second start opening sensor 2401 are important boards for controlling the pachinko machine 1, so there is a risk of fraud, such as tampering with the electronic components mounted on each board. Below, we will explain how the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment responds to such fraud.

First, in the main side board of this embodiment, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 have microprocessors installed and are located on the back side of the game board 5, and the front mounting surfaces (mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, mounting surface (front surface) of the payout control board 633) are facing the back side opposite the player, and are not visible to the player. In contrast, the function display unit 1400 on which the function display board 1402 is provided, the magnetic sensor board of the magnetic sensor 1050, the sensor board of the first start port sensor 3002, and the sensor board of the second start port sensor 2401, etc. do not have a microprocessor implemented, and their implementation surfaces (implementation surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, implementation surface (surface) of the payout control board 633) are provided on the front side, which is closer to the player, than the boards (on which the microprocessor is implemented) (main control board 1310, payout control board 633) which are faced to the back side, opposite the player. Here, devices and equipment such as the function display unit 1400, magnetic sensor 1050, first start hole 2002, and second start hole 2004 may be at least partially visible to the player. In this case, for example, they may be provided inside the gaming board 5 and be visible, or they may be provided on the panel 1110 of the gaming board 5 and be visible, or they may be visible through a hole or the like formed in the opaque gaming board 5. Furthermore, the boards provided on devices and equipment such as the function display unit 1400, magnetic sensor 1050, first start hole 2002, and second start hole 2004 may have their mounting surface (surface) facing the player, or they may face in a direction other than the player (for example, left/right or up/down directions of the pachinko machine 1).

The response to fraudulent behavior described above differs between the function display board 1402 mounted on the function display unit 1400, the magnetic sensor board mounted on the magnetic sensor 1050, the sensor board for the first start hole sensor 3002 mounted on the first start hole 2002, and the sensor board for the second start hole sensor 2401 mounted on the second start hole 2004, which are visible to the player, and the main control board 1310 and payout control board 633, which control the pachinko machine 1 but are not visible to the player. Therefore, the following describes in detail the configuration related to responses to fraudulent behavior, comparing the main control board 1310 and the function display board 1402. Note that the following description will not cover parts that overlap with the above-mentioned embodiment.

[Comparison of the main control board configuration and the function display board configuration]
As described above, the main control board 1310 has a mounting surface 1310x on which various electronic components are mounted and a solder surface 1310y on which no electronic components are mounted (single-sided mounting), and is a mixed-mount board on which both lead-type electronic components (through-hole mounting type, insertion mounting type) that are soldered by inserting lead terminals into through-holes provided on the surface of the board, and surface-mount type electronic components (chip components, SMD (Surface Mount Device)) that have electrodes (connection terminals) soldered to pads provided on the surface of the board without using through-holes are mounted. Surface-mount type electronic components not only allow the use of both sides of the board, but also enable higher mounting density by being smaller than lead-type electronic components of the same type. This makes it possible to shorten the wiring length (pattern length) on the board, thereby enabling faster circuits. Furthermore, by increasing the mounting density, it becomes possible to miniaturize the board (reduce the board area), which increases the rigidity of the board and suppresses deformation such as warping of the board, thereby preventing the mounted electronic components from peeling off.

The main control board 1310 is a single-sided mounting board in which lead-type electronic components and surface-mount type electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. Therefore, on the main control board 1310, the mounting surface (surface) 1310x is the front mounting surface.

In addition, the main control board 1310 is housed in a main control board box 1320 consisting of a transparent cover body 1301 and a transparent base body 1302, and the main control board 1310 is screwed to the inside of the cover body 1301 so that the mounting surface 1310x faces the inner surface of the cover body 1301, and the mounting surface 1310x is covered and hidden by the cover body 1301.Furthermore, the cover body 1301 and the base body 1302 are crimped together by a one-way screw or the like of the crimping portion 1303, which is a sealing mechanism. Furthermore, main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of crimping portions 1303, and main control board box 1320 can be closed by using a single sealing mechanism to crimp cover body 1301 and base body 1302 with one-way screws or the like of crimping portions 1303, and then, in order to open main control board box 1320, cover body 1301 cannot be removed from base body 1302 unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed. Therefore, by checking the condition and number of crimping portions 1303 provided on main control board box 1320, it is possible to determine whether main control board 1310 has been tampered with. In this way, the electronic components mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 can only be operated (repaired, modified, etc.) by destroying the crimped portion 1303 of the main control board box 1320 and opening the main control board box 1320, which prevents the electronic components mounted on the main control board 1310 from being tampered with illegally, thereby improving the security of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, since the main control board 1310 can only be seen by opening the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, even if the main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 is composed of a transparent cover body 1301 and a transparent base body 1302, the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 cannot be seen by a player playing the pachinko machine 1. On the other hand, lead-type electronic components and surface-mount type electronic components are mounted only on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and the main control board 1310 is housed in a main control board box 1320 composed of a transparent cover body 1301 and a transparent base body 1302. Therefore, an amusement hall manager or the like can open the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2 and visually inspect the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 through the transparent main control board box 1320, easily determining whether the electronic components mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 have been tampered with. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment can prevent tampering with the electronic components mounted on the main control board 1310, thereby improving the security of the pachinko machine 1.

The main control board 1310 also has a surface-side marking that indicates some or all of the attributes of the electronic components mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x, such as the part numbers of the electronic components and the areas indicating the locations where the electronic components are to be placed (as well as the shape, size, mounting orientation, model, and name of the company that manufactured the electronic components). The surface-side marking of the main control board 1310 is formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x by silk printing with a color that stands out against the resist of the main control board 1310, specifically, a light-colored paint such as white or yellow that stands out against the dark resist of the main control board 1310, such as green or black. The surface-side markings of the main control board 1310 may be formed near the corresponding electronic components, or may be formed so that it is visually possible to determine which electronic component the part number corresponds to; for example, the part number and the location where the electronic component is mounted may be connected via a lead wire or the like. Furthermore, a marking portion such as the front-side marking portion may be formed not only on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x but also on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the main control board 1310 may not have a front-side marking portion having multiple pieces of information as described above, but may have a component number marking portion that only lists component numbers that can identify electronic components.

The markings on the front side of the main control board 1310 facilitate visual identification of the electronic components mounted on the main control board 1310. However, as described above, the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is configured so that it cannot be seen by a player playing the pachinko machine 1, making it difficult for the player to identify the electronic components mounted on the main control board 1310 by checking the markings on the front side of the main control board 1310. On the other hand, an amusement hall manager can easily determine whether tampering has occurred, such as tampering with the electronic components on the main control board 1310, by opening the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 and visually inspecting the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 through the transparent main control board box 1320. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment can prevent tampering with the electronic components mounted on the main control board 1310, thereby improving the security of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, at least the surface-mount type electronic components among the electronic components mounted on the main control board 1310 have a printing portion formed on their surface. Specifically, the surface of the surface-mount type electronic components mounted on the main control board 1310 has a printing portion formed on its surface indicating at least part or all of the electronic component's part number, etc. Note that the printing portion may include information such as the name of the company that manufactured the electronic component, the mounting orientation of the electronic component, and the shape of the electronic component, in addition to the type of electronic component. Furthermore, it is desirable that the printing portion not only be formed on the surface of surface-mount type electronic components, but also on the surface of lead-type electronic components mounted on the main control board 1310.

The printed portions of the electronic components mounted on the main control board 1310 are formed in a color that stands out against the resist of the main control board 1310 and the surface of the electronic components. Specifically, the printed portions may be a bright white or yellow color that stands out against the dark green or black resist of the main control board 1310 and the black surface color of the electronic components, and are formed on the surface of the electronic components using white or yellow paint by silk printing, laser printing, or the like.

The printed portions of the electronic components mounted on the main control board 1310 make it easy to visually identify the electronic components mounted on the main control board 1310. However, as described above, the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is configured so that it cannot be seen by a player playing the pachinko machine 1, making it difficult for the player to identify the electronic components mounted on the main control board 1310 by checking the printed portions of the electronic components on the main control board 1310. On the other hand, an amusement hall manager can easily determine whether tampering has occurred, such as the tampering of electronic components on the main control board 1310, by opening the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 and visually inspecting the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 through the transparent main control board box 1320. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, it is possible to prevent unauthorized tampering with the electronic components mounted on the main control board 1310 located on the back side of the game board 5, thereby improving the security of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, the main control board 1310 has different characteristics for the wiring patterns formed on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the soldering surface (back surface) 1310y. Specifically, as shown in Figures 359(A) and 359(B), the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 has more wiring patterns formed in the vertical direction (vertical direction when the main control board 1310 is attached to the pachinko machine 1) than in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction when the main control board 1310 is attached to the pachinko machine 1), whereas the soldering surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 has more wiring patterns formed in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction when the main control board 1310 is attached to the pachinko machine 1) than in the vertical direction (vertical direction when the main control board 1310 is attached to the pachinko machine 1).

Furthermore, the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is mostly formed from wiring patterns in the illustrated vertical direction (vertical when the main control board 1310 is attached to the pachinko machine 1) and diagonal wiring patterns connecting two illustrated vertical direction (vertical when the main control board 1310 is attached to the pachinko machine 1) wiring patterns. For this reason, although some wiring patterns in the illustrated horizontal direction (horizontal when the main control board 1310 is attached to the pachinko machine 1) are formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the proportion is low.

The wiring pattern formed on the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is mostly composed of wiring patterns in the horizontal direction as shown (horizontal when the main control board 1310 is attached to the pachinko machine 1) and diagonal wiring patterns connecting two horizontal wiring patterns (horizontal when the main control board 1310 is attached to the pachinko machine 1). For this reason, although some wiring patterns in the vertical direction as shown (vertical when the main control board 1310 is attached to the pachinko machine 1) are formed on the solder side (back side) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the proportion is low.

In the main control board 1310 of this embodiment, the mounting surface (surface) 1310x has a higher proportion of vertical wiring patterns than horizontal wiring patterns. Therefore, even when the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is viewed through the transparent cover body 1301, it is easy to identify the connections of electronic components mounted vertically on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x, but it is possible to make it difficult to identify the connections of electronic components mounted horizontally on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x. This makes it difficult to determine the connections of all electronic components mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, preventing unauthorized tampering with the electronic components mounted on the main control board 1310 and improving the security of the pachinko machine 1.

In the above example, the ratio of the illustrated vertical wiring pattern to the illustrated horizontal wiring pattern varies depending on the mounting surface. More specifically, the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is equipped with a CPU (main control MPU 1310a) that controls the progress of the game, input circuits and output circuits connected to the main control MPU 1310a, and input and output connectors connected to the input and output circuits. The main control MPU 1310a receives input signals from data bus lines directly connected to the input circuits. The main control MPU 1310a analyzes the progress of the game from the received input signals and outputs appropriate output signals based on the analysis results to the output circuits from data bus lines directly connected to the output circuits. In other words, the data bus lines are signal lines that are not directly exposed to the outside, but are connected to input and output connectors exposed outside the main control board box 1320 via input and output circuits. This makes the data bus lines the most important wiring pattern of the wiring formed on the main control board 1310, even when it comes to understanding the overall circuit connections.

Furthermore, even vertical wiring patterns formed on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x may ultimately be connected to the data bus of the main control MPU 1310a, especially in areas where multiple vertical wiring patterns are formed in parallel. Therefore, the part numbers of nearby electronic components or test pad numbers printed when forming test pads in the wiring are printed in a way that actively conceals the areas where multiple parallel wiring patterns are formed, making the presence and direction of the wiring patterns difficult to discern. Specifically, at least most of the data bus lines of the wiring pattern are formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. In this case, most of the data bus lines are difficult to see from the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, making it difficult to identify the connections of related electronic components. This makes it more difficult to commit fraud on the data bus lines and improves the security of the pachinko machine 1.

In this example, the vertical wiring patterns shown are primarily signal lines and power lines within circuit blocks (input and output circuits composed of resistors, capacitors, diodes, transistors, integrated circuits (comparator ICs, various general-purpose logic ICs, etc.), and various electronic components), while the horizontal wiring patterns shown are data bus lines connecting multiple circuit blocks. Most of the vertical wiring patterns shown are formed on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, while the horizontal wiring patterns shown are formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. While visual inspection of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 may reveal the connections within each circuit block, it makes it difficult to reveal the connections between multiple circuit blocks, thereby improving the security of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, because the main control board 1310 is formed in a horizontally elongated rectangular shape, a greater number of electronic components are mounted in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction when the main control board 1310 is attached to the pachinko machine 1) than in the vertical direction (vertical direction when the main control board 1310 is attached to the pachinko machine 1). Therefore, by forming most of the wiring pattern in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction when the main control board 1310 is attached to the pachinko machine 1) on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, it is possible to infer the connections of electronic components in the vertical direction (vertical direction when the main control board 1310 is attached to the pachinko machine 1) from the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, while it is difficult to infer the connections of electronic components in the horizontal direction (horizontal direction when the main control board 1310 is attached to the pachinko machine 1), thereby improving security. In other words, on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, it is possible to infer the connections from the wiring patterns for groups of multiple electronic components (such as electronic components that make up circuits that perform the same process) arranged in the vertical direction shown in the figure (vertical direction when the main control board 1310 is attached to the pachinko machine 1), but it is difficult to infer the connections from the wiring patterns for each group of multiple electronic components arranged in the horizontal direction shown in the figure (horizontal direction when the main control board 1310 is attached to the pachinko machine 1). This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent acts against the main control board 1310 and improve the security of the pachinko machine 1.

Another example of a configuration in which the characteristics of the wiring patterns differ between the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is one in which the average length of the wiring patterns on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 (the length obtained by adding up the lengths of all wiring patterns formed on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and dividing this total by the number of wiring patterns) is shorter than the average length of the wiring patterns on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 (the length obtained by adding up the lengths of all wiring patterns formed on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y and dividing this total by the number of wiring patterns). In this configuration, the wiring patterns on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 are easier to make more complex than those on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y, making it difficult to infer the connections between electronic components from the wiring patterns even when the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x is visually inspected. This prevents fraudulent activity against the main control board 1310 and improves the security of the pachinko machine 1.

As mentioned above, security measures have been implemented on the main control board 1310 on the assumption that it will be difficult for players to see. In contrast, security measures have been implemented on the function display board 1402 on the assumption that it may be visible to players, and these measures will be explained below with reference to Figure 361. Figure 361 is a schematic diagram showing a function display unit 1400 in another example, and includes (A) a side view of the function display unit 1400, (B) a front view of the function display unit 1400, (C) a rear view of the function display unit 1400, (D) a front view of the function display unit 1400 with the translucent sheet 1404 removed, and (E) a cross-sectional view showing the inside of the function display unit 1400.

As shown in Figure 361, the function display board 1402 provided in the function display unit 1400 is a double-sided mounting board that has a front mounting surface and a rear mounting surface, with LEDs 1401 mounted on the front mounting surface and electronic components other than the LEDs 1401 mounted on the rear mounting surface. Furthermore, in this example, only surface-mount type electronic components (chip components, SMDs (Surface Mount Devices)) are mounted on the function display board 1402.

The function display board 1402 is not limited to the above, and may be a single-sided mounting board in which electronic components are mounted only on the front mounting surface, similar to the main board 1310, or a mixed-mount board in which both lead-type (through-hole mounting type, insertion mounting type) electronic components, which are soldered by inserting lead terminals into through-holes provided on the surface of the board, similar to the main control board 1310, and surface-mount type electronic components (chip components, SMD (Surface Mount Device)), in which electrodes (connection terminals) are soldered to pads provided on the surface of the board without using through-holes. In this case, only surface-mount type electronic components may be mounted on the front mounting surface of the function display board 1402, and only lead-type electronic components may be mounted on the back mounting surface, or both surface-mount type and lead-type electronic components may be mounted.

Surface-mount electronic components not only allow the use of both sides of a board, but also allow for greater packaging density by miniaturizing the electronic components compared to lead-type electronic components of the same type. This makes it possible to shorten the wiring length on the board (total wiring length (pattern length) and average wiring length (pattern length) between electronic components or between electronic components and through-holes, etc.), allowing for faster circuits and more compact boards. Furthermore, miniaturizing the board (reducing the board area) increases the rigidity of the board, which reduces deformation such as warping of the board and prevents mounted electronic components from peeling off the board.

Furthermore, the functional display board 1402 in this example is sufficient as long as at least surface-mount type electronic components are mounted on the front mounting surface. For example, both surface-mount type electronic components and lead-type electronic components may be mounted on the front and rear mounting surfaces of the functional display board 1402, or both surface-mount type electronic components and lead-type electronic components may be mounted on the front mounting surface of the functional display board 1402 and either surface-mount type electronic components or lead-type electronic components may be mounted on the rear mounting surface of the functional display board 1402, or only surface-mount type electronic components may be mounted on the front mounting surface of the functional display board 1402 and both surface-mount type electronic components and lead-type electronic components may be mounted on the rear mounting surface of the functional display board 1402, or only surface-mount type electronic components may be mounted on both the front and rear mounting surfaces of the functional display board 1402.

In contrast to the main control board 1310 housed in a main control board box 1320 consisting of a transparent cover body 1301 and a transparent base body 1302, the function display board 1402 is housed in a case 1410 consisting of an opaque front cover portion 1411 and an opaque back cover portion 1412, and the mounting surfaces (front mounting surface, back mounting surface) are covered by the opaque case 1410 of the function display unit 1400. Note that the opaque case 1410 of the function display board 1400 may be, for example, an opaque cover body with multiple through holes 1410a formed on the player side that covers the front mounting surface of the function display board 1400.

The function display unit 1400 is located on the front side of the gaming board 5, so at least a portion of it is visible to a player playing the pachinko machine 1. However, the front mounting surface of the function display board 1402 is covered by the opaque surface cover portion 1411, making it difficult to see the front mounting surface of the function display board 1402. Furthermore, the surface cover portion 1411 has multiple through-holes 1410a as described above. Even when the front mounting surface of the function display board 1402 is viewed through these through-holes 1410a, only a portion of the front mounting surface is visible, making it difficult to grasp the electronic components and wiring patterns mounted on the entire front mounting surface. Furthermore, the rear mounting surface of the function display board 1402, which is a double-sided mounting board, cannot be seen through the through-holes 1410a, making it difficult to grasp the electronic components mounted on the rear mounting surface or the wiring pattern on the rear mounting surface. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, it is possible to prevent unauthorized tampering with the electronic components mounted on the function display board 1402, thereby improving the security of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, the function display board 1402 in this example does not have a marking section like the marking section on the front surface of the main control board 1310. On the other hand, the main control board 1310 is provided on the back side of the game board 5 and can only be seen by opening the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, and therefore has a marking section on the front surface. In other words, although the front mounting surface of the functional display board 1402 is covered by the surface cover portion 1411 of the functional display unit 1400, since it is installed on the front side of the gaming board 5, there is a risk that it may be visually observed by players, or that wires or the like may be inserted through gaps in the gaming board 5 to perform pranks or fraudulent acts on the functional display unit 1400.If the functional display board 1402 is configured to have a marking portion like the marking portion on the front side of the main control board 1310, there is a risk that the marking portion may be visible and the electronic components mounted on the functional display board 1402 may be easily identified visually if the functional display board 1402 is visually observed through the through-hole 1410a formed in the surface cover portion 1411, or if the surface cover portion 1411 of the functional display unit 1400 is damaged and part or all of the front mounting surface of the functional display board 1402 is exposed. The function display board 1402 of this embodiment does not have a marking section like the marking section on the front side of the main control board 1310. Therefore, even if the front mounting surface of the function display board 1402 is visually observed through the through hole 1410a formed in the surface cover 1411, or if the surface cover 1411 of the function display unit 1400 is damaged and all or part of the front mounting surface of the function display board 1402 is exposed, it is difficult to visually identify the electronic components mounted on the front mounting surface of the function display board 1402. This prevents unauthorized tampering with the electronic components mounted on the function display board 1402 provided on the front side of the game board 5, thereby improving the security of the pachinko machine 1.

In this embodiment, the function display board 1402 does not have a marking section like the front-side marking section of the main control board 1310 as described above, but may have a marking section that displays attributes of the electronic components (front-side electronic components), such as an area indicating the position where the electronic components are to be placed, excluding the component number that can identify the electronic component (which may further include any of the shape of the electronic component, the size of the electronic component, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the electronic component, and the model of the electronic component).

In other words, this technical concept is sufficient as long as no markings indicating information that can identify an electronic component (e.g., the model number (part number) of an electronic component, etc.) are provided on at least the front mounting surface of the functional display board 1402; information that cannot identify an electronic component may be provided on one or both of the front and rear mounting surfaces, and a marking indicating information that can identify an electronic component (e.g., the model number (part number) of an electronic component, etc.) may be provided on the rear mounting surface. For example, shape symbols indicating the position at which an electronic component will be placed or the outer shape of an electronic component (e.g., L-shaped symbols indicating the four corners of the area where an electronic component will be placed, or a rectangular frame surrounding the area where an electronic component will be placed), or a symbol indicating the mounting direction of an electronic component for electronic components whose characteristics change depending on the mounting direction (e.g., a 1-pin mark), etc. may be formed on the front mounting surface or rear mounting surface of the functional display board 1402.

Specifically, on the front surface (surface, front mounting surface) of the functional display board 1402, a mark such as a circle, triangle, square, or number (e.g., pin number) is created near the position (outside or inside the area surrounded by the outer diameter symbol) corresponding to the front-side electronic component (surface-side electronic component) to be mounted, and a foil-removed reference terminal symbol formed by removing the copper foil around the outside of this mark, or a foil-retained reference terminal symbol formed by removing the copper foil of the mark, is formed on the front surface (surface) of the functional display board 1402, and a solid mark is applied to the front surface (surface, front mounting surface) of the functional display board 1402. Alternatively, foil-punched reference terminal symbols and foil-retaining reference terminal symbols corresponding to front-side electronic components (front-side electronic components) mounted on the front (front surface, front mounting surface) of the functional display substrate 1402 can be formed on the back (rear surface, rear mounting surface) of the functional display substrate 1402, and the foil-punched reference terminal symbols and foil-retaining reference terminal symbols can be covered by green resist liquid that is applied solid to the back (rear surface, rear mounting surface) of the functional display substrate 1402.

In addition, on the front surface (surface, front mounting surface) of the functional display board 1402, marks such as symbols such as circles, triangles, squares, and numbers (e.g., pin numbers) may be silk-screen printed near positions (outside or inside the outer diameter) corresponding to the front-side electronic components (surface-side electronic components) to be mounted, or marks such as symbols such as circles, triangles, squares, and numbers (e.g., pin numbers) corresponding to the front-side electronic components (surface-side electronic components) to be mounted on the front surface (surface, front mounting surface) of the functional display board 1402 may be silk-screen printed on the back surface (rear surface, rear mounting surface) of the functional display board 1402.

In addition, on the front surface (surface, front mounting surface) of the functional display substrate 1402, a silk-screen outline symbol is formed by silk-screen printing an outline symbol including the external features of the front-side electronic components (at least some of the recesses, notches, protrusions, etc.) near a position (outside or inside the outer diameter) corresponding to the front-side electronic components (surface-side electronic components) to be mounted, or a foil-cut outline symbol formed by cutting out the copper foil around the outline symbol or a foil-retained outline symbol formed by cutting out the copper foil of the outline symbol is formed, and the foil-cut outline symbol and the foil-retained outline symbol are each covered with a white resist liquid that is applied solid to the front surface (surface, front mounting surface) of the functional display substrate 1402. Alternatively, a silkscreen outline symbol including the external features of the front-side electronic components (at least some of the recesses, notches, protrusions, etc.) may be silkscreen printed on the back surface (rear surface, back mounting surface) of the functional display substrate 1402, or a foil-punched outline symbol or foil-remaining outline symbol corresponding to the front-side electronic components (front-side electronic components) mounted on the front surface (front surface, front mounting surface) of the functional display substrate 1402 may be formed on the back surface (rear surface, back mounting surface) of the functional display substrate 1402, and the foil-punched outline symbol or foil-remaining outline symbol may be covered by a white resist liquid that is applied solid to the back surface (rear surface, back mounting surface) of the functional display substrate 1402.

Also, either a shape symbol including the external features of the front-side electronic component (at least a portion of a recess, notch, protrusion, etc.) or a mark such as a circle, triangle, square, or number (e.g., pin number, etc.) may be formed on the front (front surface, front mounting surface) or back (rear surface, back mounting surface) of the functional display board 1402 by silk printing, foil cutting, foil leaving, etc., or both. Furthermore, the shape symbol including the external features of the front-side electronic component (at least a portion of a recess, notch, protrusion, etc.) may have a notch in one of the four corners of the area where the electronic component is placed to match the external shape of the electronic component (such as by chamfering or filling in an area including a corner, or by surrounding an area including a corner), or a notch in part of one side of a rectangular frame that surrounds the area where the electronic component is placed to match the external shape of the electronic component.

Furthermore, the external shape symbols are not limited to those that include external characteristics of the electronic component, as long as they can identify the orientation of the electronic component. For example, they may be symbols in which one side of a rectangular frame surrounding the area in which the electronic component is placed is thicker or thinner than the other sides. Because these symbols do not identify electronic components, even if a player sees them, there is little risk that they will be able to read information that can identify the installed electronic component or circuit information.

Furthermore, the surface-mounted electronic components mounted on the functional display board 1402 in this example do not have a printed portion on their surface like the electronic components mounted on the main control board 1310. On the other hand, the main control board 1310 is provided on the back side of the game board 5, and is only visible by opening the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, and has a printed portion on the surface of the electronic components of the main control board 1310. In other words, although the front mounting surface of the functional display board 1402 is covered by the surface cover portion 1411 of the functional display unit 1400, since it is installed on the front side of the gaming board 5, there is a risk that it may be visually observed by players, or that wires or the like may be inserted through gaps in the gaming board 5 to perform tampering or fraudulent acts on the functional display unit 1400. Therefore, if the electronic components mounted on the functional display board 1402 are configured to have the printing portions of the electronic components on the main control board 1310 formed on them, if the electronic components mounted on the functional display board 1402 are visually observed through the through-holes 1410a formed in the surface cover portion 1411, or if the surface cover portion 1411 of the functional display unit 1400 is damaged and part or all of the front mounting surface of the functional display board 1402 is exposed, the printing portions of the electronic components may be visible and the electronic components mounted on the functional display board 1402 may be easily identified. Since the functional display board 1402 of this embodiment does not have a printing portion on the surface of the electronic components of the main control board 1310, even if the electronic components mounted on the functional display board 1402 are visually inspected through the through-hole 1410a formed in the surface cover portion 1411 or if the surface cover portion 1411 of the functional display unit 1400 is damaged and part or all of the surface mounting surface of the functional display board 1402 is exposed, it is difficult to visually identify the electronic components mounted on the surface mounting surface of the functional display board 1402, and this makes it possible to prevent the electronic components mounted on the functional display board 1402 provided on the front side of the game board 5 from being tampered with, thereby improving the security of the pachinko machine 1. It is sufficient that the surfaces of the electronic components mounted on the front mounting surface of the functional display board 1402 do not have the same markings as those formed on the surfaces of the electronic components mounted on the main control board 1310, and the surfaces of the electronic components mounted on the back mounting surface of the functional display board 1402 may have the same markings as those formed on the surfaces of the electronic components mounted on the main control board 1310.

In the functional display board 1402, the characteristics of the wiring patterns formed on the front mounting surface and the back mounting surface are not different, but instead, fraudulent activity is prevented by the method described below. Specifically, while the main control board 1310 is equipped with control means such as the main control MPU 1310a, the functional display board 1402 is not equipped with control means. As a result, most of the wiring patterns formed on the functional display board 1402 are signal lines or power lines, preventing fraudulent activity on the functional display board 1402. Furthermore, the wiring patterns formed on the front mounting surface and back mounting surface of the functional display board 1402 are formed, for example, so that the length of the wiring patterns between electronic components is minimized on the front mounting surface and back mounting surface. With such a functional display board 1402, connections between electronic components can be easily identified visually, while also enabling faster circuitry and a more compact board. Furthermore, by miniaturizing the board (reducing the board area), the rigidity of the board can be increased, which reduces deformation such as warping of the board and prevents mounted electronic components from peeling off from the board. As with the main control board 1310, the function display board 1402 may have different characteristics for the wiring patterns formed on the front and rear mounting surfaces, which can prevent unauthorized tampering with the electronic components mounted on the function display board 1402 and improve the security of the pachinko machine 1.

In the above embodiment, the main control board 1310 was described as a main board that is provided on the back side of the gaming board 5 and whose front mounting surface (mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310, mounting surface (front) of the payout control board 633) faces the back side, away from the player. However, this is not limited to this, and other main boards such as the payout control board 633 on which a microprocessor is mounted may also be used. In other words, what is referred to as the main control board 1310 in the above embodiment can be read as other main boards such as the payout control board 633, and can be applied to those corresponding to each main board.

In the above embodiment, the function display board 1402 was described as a main board that is located on the front side, closer to the player, than the boards (main control board 1310, payout control board 633) whose mounting surfaces (mounting surface (front) 1310x of main control board 1310, mounting surface (front) of payout control board 633) face the back side, away from the player. However, this is not limited to this, and other main boards may be used, such as the magnetic sensor board for magnetic sensor 1050, the sensor board for first start opening sensor 3002, or the sensor board for second start opening sensor 2401. In other words, what is referred to as the function display board 1402 in the above embodiment can be read as other main boards, such as the magnetic sensor board for magnetic sensor 1050, the sensor board for first start opening sensor 3002, or the sensor board for second start opening sensor 2401, and can be applied to those corresponding to each main board.

[Configuration of magnetic sensor substrate]
The magnetic sensor 1050 includes a case made up of a box having a rectangular opening on one side and a flat cover covering the opening, and a magnetic sensor substrate 1050b housed in the box through the opening. The magnetic sensor 1050 is attached so that the front side of the box is in surface contact (abutment) with another member, and in this embodiment, the front side of the box is attached in surface contact (abutment) with the back side of a transparent flat panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100 of the game board 5.

The case that houses the magnetic sensor board 1050b is designed so that the box body and cover body are engaged without the use of screws or bolts. In this example, a pair of opposing sides of the cover body have locking pieces that engage with the bottom surface of the box body. By releasing the engagement between the cover body's locking pieces and the bottom surface of the box body, the housed magnetic sensor board 1050b can be removed without damaging the case.

The box of the magnetic sensor 1050 differs from the opaque front cover 1411 of the function display unit 1400 in that it is molded from a colorless, transparent resin. Furthermore, a rectangular connector housing insertion hole is formed on a side of the box different from the side where the opening is formed, so that a portion of the socket insertion opening of the connector housing MCN mounted on the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1050b (described later) is exposed. The outer shape of the box is larger than that of the magnetic sensor board 1050b, and when the magnetic sensor board 1050b is housed in the box, the distance (clearance) between the outer periphery of the magnetic sensor board 1050b and the inner periphery of the opening is approximately 0.5 mm to 0.7 mm. This technical concept is also applicable to magnetic sensor 1050 box molded from a colored, transparent resin. In other words, the box of the magnetic sensor 1050 is not limited to being molded from a colorless, transparent resin, but may also be molded from a colored, transparent resin.

Figure 362(a) is a perspective view showing the front (surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1050b of the magnetic sensor 1050, and Figure 362(b) is a perspective view showing the rear (back) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1050b of the magnetic sensor 1050. The configuration of the magnetic sensor substrate 1050b will be described in detail below with reference to Figures 362(a) and 362(b).

As shown in Figures 362(a) and 362(b), the magnetic sensor substrate 1050b has a magnetic detection element MSD mounted on its front surface (surface) that can detect magnetism, a controller CTR that can output magnetic detection determination results to the outside based on the detection signal from the magnetic detection element MSD, various resistors, various capacitors, etc. The front surface of the magnetic sensor substrate 1050b also has pads, through-holes, lands, etc. to which the electrodes (connection terminals) of front-side electronic components (surface-side electronic components) such as the magnetic detection element MSD, controller CTR, various resistors, and various capacitors are soldered, and a white resist layer (hereinafter simply referred to as "solid white resist") formed by applying a white resist liquid to the entire area except for the pads, through-holes, lands, etc. The white resist layer may also be formed on a partial area or the entire area of each land. The color of the resist layer formed on the front surface of the magnetic sensor substrate 1050b is not limited to white and may be other colors, such as green.

The magnetic sensor board 1050b of this embodiment does not have a marking portion like the front-side marking portion of the main control board 1310. A white resist layer is formed on the front (surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1050b, but no front-side marking portion (surface-side marking portion) is formed on the resist layer that indicates the attributes of the front-side electronic components (surface-side electronic components), such as the component number of the front-side electronic components (surface-side electronic components), an area indicating the position where the front-side electronic components (surface-side electronic components) are to be placed (which may also include the shape of the front-side electronic components (surface-side electronic components), the size of the front-side electronic components (surface-side electronic components), the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic components (surface-side electronic components), and the model number of the front-side electronic components (surface-side electronic components). In this embodiment, the magnetic sensor board 1050b does not have a front (surface) marking section containing multiple pieces of information like the main control board 1310 described above, but may have a marking section that indicates attributes of the front electronic components (surface electronic components), such as an area indicating the position at which the front electronic components are to be placed (excluding component numbers that can identify the electronic components) (which may also include the shape of the front electronic components, the size of the front electronic components, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the front electronic components, and the model of the front electronic components).

The magnetic sensor board 1050b also has a connector housing MCN mounted on its rear surface (backside) to which electrical wiring is connected, various ICs, various resistors, various capacitors, etc. The rear surface (backside) of the magnetic sensor board 1050b is provided with pads, through-holes, lands, etc. to which the electrodes (connection terminals) of the rear-side electronic components (rear-side electronic components) such as the connector housing MCN, various ICs, various resistors, and various capacitors are soldered, as well as a white resist layer formed on the entire surface excluding the pads, through-holes, lands, etc., consisting of a white coating film formed by applying a white resist liquid (hereinafter simply referred to as "solid white resist"). Note that a white resist layer may be formed on a partial area or the entire area of each land. The color of the resist layer formed on the rear surface (backside) of the magnetic sensor board 1050b is not limited to white and may be other colors, such as green.

In this embodiment, a white resist layer is formed on the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1050b, but no rear surface markings (back surface markings) indicating the attributes of the rear surface electronic components (back surface electronic components), such as the component number of the rear surface electronic components (back surface electronic components) and an area indicating the position of the rear surface electronic components (which may also include the shape of the rear surface electronic components (back surface electronic components), the size of the rear surface electronic components (back surface electronic components), the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the rear surface electronic components (back surface electronic components), and the model number of the rear surface electronic components (back surface electronic components) are formed on the resist layer. Note that the rear surface markings (back surface markings) may also be formed on the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor substrate 1050b. In this embodiment, the magnetic sensor board 1050b does not have a surface-side marking section on its rear surface (backside) that contains multiple pieces of information like the main control board 1310 described above, but may have a marking section that lists attributes of the front-side electronic components (surface-side electronic components), such as an area indicating the position at which the front-side electronic components are to be placed (excluding component numbers that can identify the electronic components) (which may also include the shape of the front-side electronic components, the size of the front-side electronic components, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the front-side electronic components, and the model of the front-side electronic components).

Furthermore, the surface-mount type electronic components mounted on the magnetic sensor board 1050b of this embodiment do not have a printed portion on their surface like those formed on the surfaces of electronic components mounted on the main control board 1310. Specifically, the magnetic detection element MSD and controller CTR mounted on the front surface (surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1050b and the various ICs mounted on the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1050b do not have a printed portion on their surface like those formed on the surfaces of electronic components mounted on the main control board 1310. It is sufficient that at least some of the electronic components mounted on the front mounting surface of the magnetic sensor board 1050b do not have a marking portion formed on their surfaces like those formed on the surfaces of electronic components mounted on the main control board 1310. Electronic components with a marking portion formed on their surfaces like those formed on the surfaces of electronic components mounted on the main control board 1310 may be mounted on the front mounting surface of the magnetic sensor board 1050b, or electronic components with a marking portion formed on their surfaces like those formed on the surfaces of electronic components mounted on the main control board 1310 may be mounted on the back mounting surface of the magnetic sensor board 1050b.

Furthermore, the magnetic sensor board 1050b does not have different characteristics for the wiring patterns formed on the front mounting surface and the back mounting surface. While the main control board 1310 is equipped with complex control means such as the main control MPU 1310a, the magnetic sensor board 1050b is equipped with only simple control means such as the controller CTR, and most of the wiring patterns formed on the magnetic sensor board 1050b are signal lines or power lines, preventing fraudulent activity on the magnetic sensor board 1050b. Furthermore, the wiring patterns formed on the front mounting surface and back mounting surface of the magnetic sensor board 1050b are formed, for example, so that the length of the wiring patterns between electronic components is minimized on the front mounting surface and back mounting surface.

Four terminals are arranged in a row in the socket insertion opening of the connector housing MCN so that they are parallel to the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1050b. In other words, the connector socket connected to the tip of the electrical wiring (harness) inserted into the socket insertion opening of the connector housing MCN is parallel to the rear surface (back surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1050b. This ensures that when the magnetic sensor board 1050b is housed in a box and the opening of the box is closed with a cover, the electrical wiring (harness) connected to the connector socket inserted into the socket insertion opening of the connector housing MCN does not overlap with the rear surface (back surface) or front surface (front surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1050b.

The controller CTR is electrically connected to the connector housing MCN via a wiring pattern formed on the magnetic sensor board 1050b, and the connector housing MCN is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via electrical wiring (harness), thereby electrically connecting the controller CTR to the main control board 1310. The four terminals of the connector housing MCN are composed of a power line (e.g., +5V DC), a ground (GND) line, signal line 1, and signal line 2. The controller CTR can output the magnetic detection results (whether or not a magnet is approaching) as a detection signal to the main control board 1310 via signal line 1 and/or signal line 2.

However, because the magnetic sensor 1050 detects unauthorized magnetism, if it is tampered with, it may not be able to notify the main control board 1310 of the approaching magnet. In this case, even if a player uses a magnet to guide a gaming ball into the first starting hole 2002 of the starting hole unit 2100, thereby increasing the chances of winning a lottery with a small number of balls, the main control board 1310 may not be able to detect this fraudulent activity. Because the magnetic sensor 1050 has a box molded from transparent resin, when the magnetic sensor board 1050b is housed in the box and the opening of the box is covered with a cover, and the magnetic sensor board 1050b is attached to the back side of the transparent, flat panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 of the gaming board 5, the amusement hall manager and players can visually confirm the state of the front (surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1050b of the magnetic sensor 1050 from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

However, a person attempting to commit fraud may be able to identify the mounted electronic components from the state of the front (surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1050b, particularly from the front-side notation (surface-side notation) that indicates the attributes of the front-side electronic components, such as the component numbers of the front-side electronic components printed by silk screen printing, the areas indicating the positions at which the front-side electronic components are to be placed, and other information (which may also include the shape, size, mounting orientation, and model of the front-side electronic components). The wiring patterns formed on the front (surface) and rear (back) surfaces of the magnetic sensor board 1050b may then be used to ascertain the circuit configuration and provide information for circuit modification.

In this embodiment, on the front (surface) and rear (rear) surfaces of the magnetic sensor substrate 1050b, no front-side marking portion (surface-side marking portion) or rear-side marking portion (rear-side marking portion) is present on the white resist layer. Furthermore, in this embodiment, on the front (surface) surface of the magnetic sensor substrate 1050b, information for identifying the type of electronic component each of the front-side electronic components (surface-side electronic components) is not formed by punching out the copper foil around the wiring pattern on the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, and no information for identifying the type of electronic component each of the rear-side electronic components (rear-side electronic components) is formed by punching out the copper foil around the wiring pattern on the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, and no information for identifying the type of electronic component each of the rear-side electronic components (rear-side electronic components) is formed by punching out the copper foil around the wiring pattern on the rear (rear) surface of the magnetic sensor substrate 1050b. In other words, in this embodiment, no information is written on the front (surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1050b to identify the type of front-side electronic components (front-side electronic components) mounted on the front (surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1050b, and no information is written on the rear (back) of the magnetic sensor board 1050b to identify the type of rear-side electronic components (rear-side electronic components) mounted on the rear (back) of the magnetic sensor board 1050b. This prevents the electronic components mounted on the magnetic sensor board 1050b from being identified visually, makes it difficult to understand the circuit configuration of the magnetic sensor board 1050b, and improves the security of the pachinko machine 1.

At least some of the surface-mounted electronic components mounted on the magnetic sensor board 1050b of this embodiment do not have a printed portion on their surface like those formed on the surfaces of electronic components mounted on the main control board 1310. This prevents at least some of the electronic components mounted on the magnetic sensor board 1050b from being identified visually, making it difficult to grasp the entire circuit configuration of the magnetic sensor board 1050b, thereby improving the security of the pachinko machine 1.

In the magnetic sensor board 1050b of this embodiment, the characteristics of the wiring pattern formed on the front mounting surface and the back mounting surface are not different. With such a magnetic sensor board 1050b, connections between electronic components can be easily identified visually, while also enabling faster circuit speeds and a more compact board. Furthermore, by miniaturizing the board (reducing the board area), the rigidity of the board can be increased, thereby suppressing deformation such as warping of the board and preventing mounted electronic components from peeling off from the board. Note that, like the main control board 1310, the magnetic sensor board 1050b may have different characteristics of the wiring pattern formed on the front mounting surface and the back mounting surface, which can prevent unauthorized tampering with the electronic components mounted on the magnetic sensor board 1050b and improve the security of the pachinko machine 1.

Alternatively, a wiring pattern may be formed only on the front mounting surface of the magnetic sensor substrate 1050b, with no wiring pattern formed on the rear mounting surface. This configuration eliminates the need to form through holes connecting the wiring pattern on the front mounting surface of the magnetic sensor substrate 1050b with the wiring pattern on the rear mounting surface, eliminating damage to the substrate due to through holes, which weakens the substrate's strength. This increases the rigidity of the entire magnetic sensor substrate 1050b compared to when wiring patterns are formed on both the front and rear mounting surfaces. Note that as long as no through holes are formed connecting the wiring pattern on the front mounting surface with the wiring pattern on the rear mounting surface, penetrations (such as positioning penetrations for accommodating the magnetic sensor substrate 1050b or mounting penetrations) may be formed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the magnetic sensor 1050 is housed in a box and cover molded from transparent resin. When attached to the back side of the transparent panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 of the gaming board 5, the gaming hall manager can visually check the state of the front (surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1050b of the magnetic sensor 1050 from the front of the pachinko machine 1. This allows the gaming hall manager to visually check the state of the front (surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1050b of the magnetic sensor 1050 from the front of the pachinko machine 1 and confirm whether or not there has been any tampering with the magnetic sensor board 1050b. Furthermore, when the gaming hall manager opens the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2, he or she can visually check the state of the rear (back) surface of the magnetic sensor board 1050b because the various components that make up the gaming board 5 are molded (formed) from transparent resin. This allows the manager of the gaming hall to visually check the condition of the rear (back) surface of the magnetic sensor board 1050b of the magnetic sensor 1050 from the front of the pachinko machine 1 to check whether or not there has been any tampering with the magnetic sensor board 1050b.

The case housing the magnetic sensor board 1050b is engraved with the product management number of the magnetic sensor 1050 (e.g., FDUFPA03A). As described above, the magnetic sensor board 1050b in this example does not have any markings, but the case housing the magnetic sensor board 1050b is engraved with the product management number. Furthermore, the magnetic sensor board 1050b does not have a board management number on either the front (top) or rear (bottom) surface of the magnetic sensor board 1050b. Therefore, it is difficult to determine the function of the magnetic sensor board 1050b just by visually inspecting it. However, by engraving the product management number on the case housing the magnetic sensor board 1050b, it is possible to determine that the magnetic sensor 1050 is housed by checking the engraving, for example, during the manufacturing process, thereby preventing installation errors.

The product control number of the magnetic sensor 1050 may be formed on at least one of the box body and cover body of the case, and may also be formed in a position visible from outside the case (for example, on the surface of the cover body). If the product control number of the magnetic sensor 1050 is formed in a position visible from outside the case, it becomes easier to check the product control number during the manufacturing process, and it can be immediately determined that the magnetic sensor 1050 is contained, improving work efficiency.

Furthermore, in addition to not having a CPU mounted on it, the magnetic sensor board 1050 executes processing based on signals from the main control MPU 1310a mounted on the main control board 1310 located on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, since it has little impact on the progress of the game or the player's profits and there is little need for stable operation, the magnetic sensor board 1050 in this example does not have a solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)). This allows for a higher mounting density of electronic components compared to when a solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) is formed on the magnetic sensor board 1050, and the board can be made smaller and more rigid, thereby suppressing deformation such as warping and preventing the mounted electronic components from peeling off. Furthermore, the miniaturization makes it possible to make boards such as the magnetic sensor board 1050, whose existence should be concealed, less noticeable to players. Concealing their existence reduces the risk of electronic components and circuit information mounted on the board being read, enhancing the deterrent effect of pranks and other tampering.

[Improved ease of detecting fraud 1]
Next, a description will be given of a configuration that improves the ease of visually determining whether or not a board on which surface-mounted electronic components are mounted has been tampered with.

The administrator of the gaming machine can determine whether tampering has occurred on the main control board 1310, such as tampering with electronic components, by opening the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2 and visually inspecting the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 through the transparent cover 1301. Specifically, when visually inspecting the main control board 1310, for example, the administrator visually inspects the surface-mounted electronic components that are more important for controlling the pachinko machine 1, and if tampering is confirmed in the important surface-mounted electronic components, it is determined that tampering has occurred on the main control board 1310. However, because multiple electronic components are mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, it is difficult to visually identify the important surface-mounted electronic components from among those multiple electronic components.

In consideration of the above circumstances, the main control board 1310 of this example has been designed to make it easy to visually identify important surface-mounted electronic components from among the multiple electronic components. Figure 363 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the mounting state of electronic components on the main control board 1310 of the other example described above.

As shown in Figure 363, multiple surface-mount electronic components and multiple lead-type electronic components are mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. Here, a surface-mount electronic component is, for example, an integrated circuit (hereinafter simply referred to as a chip component) IC1 that is fixed to the board by soldering a connection terminal IC1a to a pad 1310k formed on the board surface, and a lead-type (insertion-mount type) electronic component is, for example, a capacitor MC1 that is fixed to the board by inserting a lead terminal into a through-hole 1310r and soldering this lead terminal to the through-hole 1310r or a land.

A capacitor MC1, a lead-type electronic component, is mounted near chip component IC1, a surface-mount type electronic component mounted on mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of main control board 1310 (for example, a security-critical electronic component that inputs the start-up winning signal that triggers the lottery and the magnetic sensor detection signal that detects abnormalities). Capacitor MC1 provides a stable supply of power necessary to drive chip component IC1, and is mounted so that one chip component IC1 is paired with one capacitor MC1. More specifically, chip component IC1 and capacitor MC1 are mounted adjacent to each other (with electronic component mounting no-go area A in between) in positions that avoid electronic component mounting no-go area A (see Figure 364 (A)), where mounting is not permitted.

In this embodiment, the main control board 1301 is designed to mount surface-mounted components on the surface and perform a reflow process, after which insert components are inserted and mounted and then subjected to a flow process. Surface-mounted components are attracted to the pickup of the mounting device, transported to the mounting position, and mounted on the main control board 1301. The pickup of the mounting device that mounts the surface-mounted components is nozzle-shaped. Meanwhile, the pickup of the mounting device that mounts the insert components has a guide that guards the leads from the outside. The insert components are transported to the mounting position and mounted while guarded by the guide. Therefore, when mounting an insert component near a surface-mounted component that has already been mounted, the mounting position of the insert component must be determined so that the guide does not interfere with the surface-mounted component. In this embodiment, capacitor MC1 is mounted adjacent to chip component IC1 (with the electronic component mounting no-go area A in between) in a position that avoids the electronic component mounting no-go area A, which is determined based on the shape of the pickup of the mounting device. Vias and wiring patterns may be formed in the electronic component mounting prohibited area A, but other electronic components are restricted from being mounted between chip component IC1 and capacitor MC1, and are mounted in the closest position. This makes it easy to identify chip component IC1 as an important electronic component.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, capacitor MC1 is an electronic component that stably supplies the power necessary to drive chip component IC1, and therefore the markings on the front surface of main control board 1301 (the component number of capacitor MC1 and the component number of chip component IC1) are formed to avoid electronic component mounting no-go area A. In other words, electronic component mounting no-go area A is an area where vias and wiring patterns may be formed, but where other electronic components are not mounted, and where the front surface marking of capacitor MC1, which serves as a visual marker, is not formed. This makes it easy to identify chip component IC1 as an important electronic component.

The part number of capacitor MC1 is written on a blue exterior, but it is desirable that the part number be a color that enhances contrast with the exterior of capacitor MC1. Specifically, if the exterior of capacitor MC1 is blue, it is desirable that the part number be written in white, black, yellow, red, orange, green, purple, etc., or a combination of these colors.

Furthermore, when chip component IC1 is mounted on the outer periphery of the main control board 1301, an electronic component mounting no-go area A is provided on the outside of chip component IC1, and capacitor MC1 is mounted on the outside of chip component IC1 so that electronic component mounting no-go area A is sandwiched between chip component IC1 and capacitor MC1. As a result, even in cases where the board is directly touched, such as when assembling the board into cover body 1301 of board box 1320, the important chip component IC1 is mounted inside capacitor MC1, which serves as a visual target, with electronic component mounting no-go area A between them, preventing workers from coming into contact with chip component IC1 and allowing the board to be handled safely.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when an administrator opens the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2 and visually inspects the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 through the transparent cover 1301, the capacitor MC1, a lead-type electronic component mounted near the chip component IC1, a surface-mount electronic component, acts as a visual marker indicating the mounting position of the chip component IC1, a surface-mount electronic component, on the main control board 1310. Therefore, even if tampering occurs on the main control board 1310, the administrator can easily identify the chip component IC1 from among multiple electronic components using the capacitor MC1 as a visual marker, and easily determine whether tampering has occurred on the main control board 1310. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment can prevent tampering with electronic components mounted on the main control board 1310, thereby improving the security of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, capacitor MC1 is an insertion component, and as shown in Figure 367, its leads are formed to have two or more bent portions (in this example, the leads are formed to have two bent portions) and are inserted into the board and soldered. This means that its attachment strength to the board is much stronger than that of surface-mounted components that are attached to the board with solder, and its strength is higher than that of leads that have no bent portions or are formed to have only one bent portion, thereby increasing its reliability as a visual indicator. Furthermore, capacitor MC1 can stably supply the power required to drive chip component IC1, and since one capacitor MC1 is provided in pairs for each chip component IC1, it is desirable to use capacitor MC1 as a visual indicator for chip component IC1, which is an important surface-mounted component.

On the main control board 1301, grounds other than the wiring patterns for power and signals are formed on both sides of the board as so-called solid patterns (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) to ensure stable operation of the electronic circuits made up of various electronic components. For this reason, when mounting the lead-type capacitor MC1 on the main control board 1301, there is a risk that the solder adhesion will be poor, especially on the land on the ground side. In this embodiment, as shown in Figures 359(A) and 359(B), special lands (lands having a shape different from that of the lands on the power supply side, so-called thermal lands, in which a gap is provided between the land and the inner periphery of the solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) surrounding the outer periphery of the land, and which have a thermal pattern connected at only four points in four directions radially from the center of the land, each at a 45-degree angle) are used in the areas provided at both ends of the through-hole for mounting the lead-type capacitor MC1 formed on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1301. This prevents poor solder adhesion when mounting the capacitor MC1 on the main control board 1301. Note that the use of special lands is not limited to the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x side and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y side of the through-hole, and special lands may be used only on one of the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x side and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y side of the through-hole.

The main control board 1310 is also equipped with a CPU (main control MPU 1310a) that controls the progress of the game, input circuits and output circuits connected to the main control MPU 1310a, and input and output connectors connected to the input and output circuits. The main control MPU 1310a receives input signals from data bus lines directly connected to the input circuits. The main control MPU 1310a analyzes the progress of the game from the received input signals and outputs appropriate output signals based on the analysis results to the output circuits from data bus lines directly connected to the output circuits. For this reason, the data bus lines are the most important wiring patterns formed on the main control board 1310, and chip components such as IC1 that make up the input and output circuits and are directly connected to at least the data bus lines are important surface-mounted electronic components.

In addition, capacitor MC1, which is a lead-type electronic component, has a surface color that is easily noticeable, different from the resist of main control board 1310, the surface of chip component IC1, which is a surface-mount type electronic component, and the surface-side markings and stampings. Therefore, even if tampering has occurred on main control board 1310, such as tampering with chip component IC1, the administrator can more easily identify chip component IC1, which is a surface-mount type electronic component, from among multiple electronic components by using capacitor MC1, which is easily noticeable on mounting surface (surface) 1310x of main control board 1310, as a visual target, and can easily determine tampering with main control board 1310.

Specifically, the capacitor MC1, which is a lead-type electronic component, has a blue surface that is easily noticeable on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, unlike the dark green or black resist of the main control board 1310 and the black surface color of the chip component IC1, a surface-mount electronic component. Furthermore, even if the capacitor MC1 is a conspicuous color, it is desirable that the color be different from the bright white or yellow colors of the front-side notation and stamping. The surface color of the capacitor MC1 is not limited to blue, and may be any bright color that is easily noticeable against the dark colors of the resist of the main control board 1310 and the surface of the chip component IC1. For example, it may be a single color such as red, pink, orange, or purple, or a multicolor using at least two of these colors. If two or more colors are used, any color combination that makes the capacitor MC1 easily noticeable, such as a brown or black pattern on a yellow-green background, will suffice. In other words, any color combination that enhances the contrast with the color of the important electronic component or the color of the target electronic component itself will suffice.

In addition, capacitor MC1, a lead-type electronic component, is adjacent to chip component IC1, a surface-mount type electronic component, in a specific direction. Therefore, by using capacitor MC1 as a visual target on mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of main control board 1310, an administrator can more easily identify chip component IC1, a surface-mount type electronic component, which is adjacent to capacitor MC1 in the opposite direction to the specific direction, making it easy to determine any tampering with main control board 1310. Note that the specific direction is, for example, the longitudinal direction of chip component IC1, a surface-mount type electronic component.

In addition, capacitor MC1, which is a lead-type electronic component, is taller than surface-mounted electronic components (an electronic component that protrudes more from the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 when mounted). Therefore, even if tampering occurs on the main control board 1310, such as tampering with chip component IC1, the administrator can more easily identify chip component IC1, which is a surface-mounted electronic component, by using capacitor MC1, which is easily visible on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, as a visual target from among multiple electronic components, and can easily determine tampering with the main control board 1310.

Furthermore, the electronic components on the blue surface of the main control board 1310 may be mounted near all surface-mount type electronic components, or near at least one surface-mount type electronic component excluding all surface-mount type electronic components. In a configuration in which the electronic components on the blue surface of the main control board 1310 are mounted near all surface-mount type electronic components, even if tampering is committed on the main control board 1310, such as tampering with the electronic components, the administrator can more reliably identify the tampering by using the electronic components on the blue surface as a visual indicator. In contrast, in an embodiment of the main control board 1310 in which the blue-surface electronic component is mounted near at least one surface-mount type electronic component excluding all surface-mount type electronic components, by mounting the blue-surface electronic component near a more important surface-mount type electronic component (for example, the main control MPU 1310a or an electronic component related to the operation of the main control MPU 1310a (such as a transmitter)), the burden on the administrator who must visually inspect the front mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310 using the blue-surface electronic component as a visual target can be reduced, and the administrator can use the blue-surface electronic component as a visual target to identify tampering.

In addition, the above example illustrates a surface-mount type electronic component and a lead-type electronic component, chip component IC1 and capacitor MC1 provided to ensure the stable function of chip component IC1. However, this is not limited to a lead-type electronic component provided to ensure the stable function of a specific surface-mount type electronic component. A lead-type electronic component provided to ensure the stable function of a special surface-mount type electronic component that is different from the specific surface-mount type electronic component may be placed adjacent to the specific surface-mount type electronic component. Alternatively, both a lead-type electronic component provided to ensure the stable function of a specific surface-mount type electronic component and a lead-type electronic component provided to ensure the stable function of a special surface-mount type electronic component may be placed adjacent to the specific surface-mount type electronic component.

Furthermore, while the above example uses chip component IC1 as an example of a surface-mount type electronic component and capacitor MC1 as an example of a lead-type electronic component, the present invention is not limited to these. In other words, the present technical concept does not matter what type of electronic component it is, as long as at least one surface-mount type electronic component is provided as an electronic component placed adjacent to a surface-mount type electronic component. By giving the exterior of a specific electronic component a specific color, it becomes easier to identify the mounting location of an electronic component mounted adjacent to a specific electronic component (for example, a chip component, which is an important electronic component), rather than the specific electronic component itself, thereby improving the efficiency of administrators' work to check for tampering with boards.

Specific examples of lead-type electronic components that can replace capacitor MC1 include diodes and resistors. Diodes, in particular, have appearances not found in capacitors or resistors, such as glass tubes. For example, diodes are incorporated into circuits to cancel out the back electromotive force generated when a solenoid is driven. Multiple diodes are incorporated into a driver IC, an integrated circuit capable of driving multiple solenoids. Of these diodes, only the diode in one circuit that drives the most important solenoid may be a lead-type diode, or all diodes incorporated into all circuits may be lead-type diodes. Furthermore, diodes may be mounted adjacent to the driver IC, avoiding the electronic component unmountable area A, where diodes cannot be mounted on either side.

Capacitor MC1 has a surface that is a highly visible color (blue) on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, which could make it a target for tampering. However, because capacitor MC1 is a lead-type electronic component, it is more difficult to remove from the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 than surface-mounted electronic components, which can prevent tampering with the main control board 1310.

In contrast, no lead-type electronic components are mounted near surface-mounted electronic components on the front and back mounting surfaces of the functional display board 1402 and magnetic sensor board 1050b described above. Instead, fraudulent activity is prevented by the method described below.

Even if lead-type electronic components are mounted near surface-mount type electronic components on the functional display board 1402, the opaque back cover portion 1412 of the functional display unit 1400 makes it difficult for an administrator to visually determine whether tampering has occurred with the functional display board 1402. Furthermore, when a person attempting to commit tampering with the functional display board 1402 removes the functional display board 1402 from the opaque back cover portion 1412 of the functional display unit 1400, they may use the lead-type electronic components as visual markers to identify important surface-mount type electronic components mounted on the functional display board 1402. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, by not mounting lead-type electronic components near surface-mount type electronic components on the functional display board 1402, tampering with the electronic components mounted on the functional display board 1402 can be prevented, thereby improving the security of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, even if lead-type electronic components are mounted near surface-mount type electronic components on the magnetic sensor board 1050b, there is a risk that someone attempting to commit fraud against the magnetic sensor board 1050b could use the lead-type electronic components as visual targets to identify important surface-mount type electronic components mounted on the magnetic sensor board 1050b when visually examining the magnetic sensor board 1050b through the transparent cover of the magnetic sensor 1050. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, by not mounting lead-type electronic components near surface-mount type electronic components on the magnetic sensor board 1050b, it is possible to prevent the electronic components mounted on the magnetic sensor board 1050b from being tampered with, thereby improving the security of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, among the brightly colored lead-type electronic components, connectors may be mounted near the surface-mount type electronic components on the function display board 1402 and magnetic sensor board 1050b. Because such connectors stand out on the function display board 1402 and magnetic sensor board 1050b, workers connecting wiring to the connectors can easily identify them visually, improving the worker's work efficiency.

In the above embodiment, the main control board 1310 was described as a board that is provided on the back side of the gaming board 5 and whose front mounting surface (mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310, mounting surface (front) of the payout control board 633) faces the back side, away from the player. However, this is not limited to this, and other boards such as the payout control board 633 on which a microprocessor is mounted may also be used. In other words, what is referred to as the main control board 1310 in the above embodiment can be read as other boards such as the payout control board 633, and can be applied to those corresponding to each board.

In the above embodiment, the main control board 1310 is located on the back side of the rear box 3010 which constitutes the gaming board 5 and houses various presentation devices, a recovery route for collecting gaming balls, and a device for opening and closing the large prize opening, etc., and which is attached from the back side of the gaming board 5 so that these face the player.In contrast, the function display board 1402 is described as a board which is located on the front side of the rear box 3010 and is closer to the player than the boards (main control board 1310, payout control board 633) whose mounting surfaces (mounting surface (front) 1310x of the main control board 1310, mounting surface (front) of the payout control board 633) face the back side, opposite the player.However, this is not limited to this and may also be other boards such as a sensor board for the first start opening sensor 3002 or a sensor board for the second start opening sensor 2401. In other words, what is referred to as the functional display board 1402 in the above embodiment can be read as other boards such as the sensor board for the first start port sensor 3002 or the sensor board for the second start port sensor 2401, and can be applied to those corresponding to each board.

[Improved ease of detecting fraud 2]
In the above-described improvement 1 in ease of detecting tampering, a lead-type electronic component is placed adjacent to an important electronic component such as a chip component IC1 across an electronic component mounting prohibited area A, and the important electronic component such as the chip component IC1 is identified using the lead-type electronic component as a visual target. However, it is also possible to use a specific surface-mount type electronic component (chip component) as an indicator to make it possible to identify an important surface-mount type electronic component such as the chip component IC1, thereby making it easier to detect tampering with the main control board 1310. This point will be explained below. Note that the following will not explain parts that overlap with the above-described embodiment.

In the above-mentioned improvement 1 in the ease of identifying fraud, a capacitor MC1, which is a lead-type electronic component with a surface of a conspicuous color different from the resist of the main control board 1310, the surface of the chip component IC1, which is a surface-mount type electronic component, and the surface-side markings and stampings, is mounted adjacent to an important surface-mount type electronic component such as the chip component IC1 across an electronic component mounting no-go area A where electronic components cannot be mounted (avoiding the electronic component mounting no-go area A), and the conspicuous capacitor MC1 on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is used as a visual target from among multiple electronic components, making it even easier to identify the surface-mount type electronic component chip component IC1. However, in this example, the lead type The exterior color of the chip capacitor MC1', which is a surface-mount type electronic component (chip component) rather than a standard electronic component, excluding the electrodes, is made a more noticeable color that is different from the surface, surface-side notation, and stamped portion of chip component IC1, and it is mounted adjacent to important surface-mount type electronic components such as chip component IC1 across (avoiding) electronic component no-mount area A where electronic components cannot be mounted. By doing so, chip capacitor MC1', a surface-mount type electronic component (chip component) that is more noticeable on mounting surface (surface) 1310x of main control board 1310, can be used as a visual target to easily identify surface-mount type electronic component IC1.

Figure 368 shows an example in which a chip capacitor MC1', a specific surface-mount type electronic component, is mounted adjacent to an important surface-mount type electronic component such as a chip component IC1, across an electronic component unmountable area A where no electronic components can be mounted (avoiding the electronic component unmountable area A).

As shown in Figure 368, chip capacitor MC1', a specific surface-mount type electronic component, is placed adjacent to an important electronic component such as chip component IC1, with an electronic component mounting unavailability area A sandwiched between them. Figure 368(A) shows an example in which two pads 1310ka are provided on the short sides of chip component IC1 so that they are approximately parallel to the short sides of chip component IC1, and two electrodes MC1a' of chip capacitor MC1', a specific surface-mount type electronic component, are soldered to each of the two pads 1310ka, so that chip capacitor MC1' and chip component IC1 are placed in the same orientation.

As shown in Figure 368, by mounting a capacitor MC1, a lead-type electronic component having a surface of a conspicuous color different from the resist of the main control board 1310, the surface of chip component IC1, a surface-mount type electronic component, and the surface-side markings and stampings, adjacent to an important surface-mount type electronic component such as chip component IC1 across an electronic component mounting no-go area A where electronic components cannot be mounted (avoiding electronic component mounting no-go area A), it becomes possible to easily identify chip component IC1, a surface-mount type electronic component, using chip capacitor MC1', a surface-mount type electronic component (chip component), as a visual target.

Note that the arrangement shown in Figure 368 (A) is one example, and is not limited to the above arrangement, as long as the capacitor MC1, which is a lead-type electronic component having a surface of a conspicuous color different from the resist of the main control board 1310, the surface of the surface-mount type electronic component chip component IC1, and the surface-side markings and stampings, is mounted adjacent to important surface-mount type electronic components such as chip component IC1 across (avoiding) the electronic component mounting unavailable area A where electronic components cannot be mounted.

For example, an important surface-mount type electronic component such as chip component IC1 may be mounted adjacent to the chip component IC1 across an electronic component unmountable area A where electronic components cannot be mounted (avoiding the electronic component unmountable area A). Two pads 1310ka are provided on the long side of chip component IC1 so as to be approximately parallel to the long side of chip component IC1, and two electrodes MC1a' of a chip capacitor MC1', a specific surface-mount type electronic component, are soldered to each of the two pads 1310ka, thereby arranging the chip capacitor MC1' and chip component IC1 in directions that differ by 90°. Alternatively, two pads 1310ka are provided on both sides of the short side of chip component IC1 so as to be approximately parallel to the short side of chip component IC1, and two electrodes MC1a' of a chip capacitor MC1', a specific surface-mount type electronic component, are soldered to each of the two pads 1310ka provided on both sides of the short side of chip component IC1, thereby arranging the chip capacitor MC1' in the same direction as chip component IC1. Alternatively, two pads 1310ka may be provided on both sides of the long side of chip component IC1 so that they are approximately parallel to the long side of chip component IC1, and two electrodes MC1a' of chip capacitor MC1', a specific surface-mount type electronic component, may be soldered to each of the two pads 1310ka provided on both sides of the long side of chip component IC1, thereby sandwiching chip component IC1 between chip capacitors MC1' arranged in an orientation that differs by 90° from chip component IC1. Alternatively, two pads 1310ka may be provided on the short side of chip component IC1 so that they are approximately parallel to the long side of chip component IC1, and two electrodes MC1a' of chip capacitor MC1', a specific surface-mount type electronic component, may be soldered to each of the two pads 1310ka, thereby arranging chip capacitor MC1' and chip component IC1 in orientations that differ by 90°.

The exterior of the surface-mount chip capacitor MC1', which is a general-purpose component, including at least the widest surface that is horizontal to the board, excluding the electrode MC1a', is a light brown color that differs from the exterior color of the resist of the main control board 1310 and the chip component IC1. Because the surface-mount chip capacitor MC1' has an exterior color that differs from the exterior color of the resist of the main control board 1310 and the chip component IC1, it is easier to find when mounted on the main control board 1310.

Furthermore, the exterior of chip capacitor MC1' as a specific surface-mount type electronic component, excluding electrode MC1a', at least the widest surface that is horizontal to the board, in other words, the exterior of the top surface (outermost surface) of the surface-mount type electronic component excluding electrode MC1a', may be changed from the original light brown color shown in FIG. 368(A) to a color that is different from the dark green or black resist of the main control board 1310, or the black surface color of chip component IC1, a surface-mount type electronic component, and is a different blue color from light brown, as shown in FIG. 368(B). In this way, by changing the exterior color of chip capacitor MC1' as a surface-mount type electronic component to one that is more noticeable on mounting surface (surface) 1310x of main control board 1310, it becomes even easier to find when mounted on main control board 1310.

The exterior color of the exterior parts of chip capacitor MC1', excluding at least electrode MC1a', is not limited to being changed to blue. It may also be a light color that stands out against the dark colors of the resist of main control board 1310 and the surface of chip component IC1, i.e., a color that provides high contrast against the dark colors of the resist of main control board 1310 and the surface of chip component IC1 (in this example, a light color). For example, the color may be changed to a single color such as red, pink, orange, or purple, or a multi-color using at least two of these colors. If two or more colors are used, the color combination may be changed to make chip capacitor MC1' more noticeable, such as forming a brown or black pattern on a yellow-green background. In other words, the color combination may be changed to one that enhances the contrast with the color of important electronic components or the color of the target electronic component itself. Furthermore, the exterior color of the exterior parts of chip capacitor MC1', excluding at least electrode MC1a', should have a high contrast with the dark color of the resist on the main control board 1310 and the surface of chip component IC1, and should be a color that is easy to see, but is desirably a color different from the bright white or yellow of the front-side markings and stampings. Using a color different from the bright white or yellow of the front-side markings and stampings makes it easier to find chip capacitor MC1'.

Furthermore, Improvement 2 in Ease of Identifying Fakes can be implemented in combination with Improvement 1 in Ease of Identifying Fakes, and can achieve the same effects by implementing it under the same conditions as Improvement 1 in Ease of Identifying Fakes. In other words, the lead-type capacitor MC1 in Improvement 1 in Ease of Identifying Fakes can be replaced with a surface-mount chip capacitor MC1'.

[Improved ease of detecting fraud 3]
In the above-described improvement 2 in ease of detecting fraud, an important electronic component such as a chip component IC1, which is a surface-mount type electronic component, is identified using a specific surface-mount type electronic component (chip component) as an index. However, it is also possible to make the specific surface-mount type electronic component (chip component) easier to find by mounting the specific surface-mount type electronic component (chip component) on a board in an unconventional manner. This point will be explained below. Note that the following explanation will not cover parts that overlap with the above-described embodiment.

Figures 369 (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the mounting state of a chip capacitor MC1' as a specific surface-mount type electronic component. In this example, multiple pins 1315 are erected on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. These pins 1315 are U-shaped, and each of the two ends of the pins 1315 is inserted into a through-hole 1310r in the main control board 1310 and welded with solder or the like.

As shown in Figure 369, in this example, the chip capacitor MC1' is mounted on the main control board 1310 by soldering the electrodes MC1a' of the chip capacitor MC1' to each of two pins 1315 that are inserted into through holes 1310r of the main control board 1310 and welded with solder or the like to stand on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. The pins 1315 are made of a conductive material (in this example, a metal such as iron, copper, or an alloy thereof), and the two electrodes MC1a' of the chip capacitor MC1' are soldered to each of the two pins 1315, so that the two pins 1315 function as connection terminals.

In this way, in this example, the chip capacitor MC1', which is a specific surface-mount type electronic component, is not mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 by soldering the two electrodes MC1a' of the chip capacitor MC1' to two pads 1310ka formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, respectively. Instead, the chip capacitor MC1' is mounted at a position away from (above) the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 by soldering the two electrodes MC1a' of the chip capacitor MC1' to two pins 1315 that are inserted into the through holes 1310r of the main control board 1310 and welded by solder or the like and erected on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310.

As a result, by soldering each of the two electrodes MC1a' of the chip capacitor MC1' as a specific surface-mount type electronic component to each of the two pads 1310ka provided on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the mounting position of the chip capacitor MC1' as a specific surface-mount type electronic component can be raised compared to when the chip capacitor MC1' as a specific surface-mount type electronic component is directly mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310.This makes it easier to find the chip capacitor MC1' as a specific surface-mount type electronic component from among the multiple electronic components mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and by using the chip capacitor MC1' as a visual target, it becomes easier to identify the chip component IC1, a surface-mount type electronic component mounted adjacent to the chip capacitor MC1' across the electronic component no-mount area A (avoiding the electronic component no-mount area A). Therefore, when an administrator opens the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2 and visually inspects the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 through the transparent cover 1301, the presence and mounting position of the chip capacitor MC1' can be immediately detected, making it easy to determine whether any tampering has occurred with the main control board 1310.

In other words, as described above in Improvement 2 of Ease of Identifying Tampering, chip capacitor MC1', a specific surface-mount type electronic component, is positioned adjacent to chip component IC1, another surface-mount type electronic component, in a specific direction (see FIG. 368). Furthermore, chip capacitor MC1', a specific surface-mount type electronic component mounted near chip component IC1, a surface-mount type electronic component, acts as a visual marker indicating the position of chip component IC1, a surface-mount type electronic component, mounted on the main control board 1310. Even if tampering occurs on the main control board 1310, such as tampering with chip component IC1, the administrator can easily identify chip component IC1 from among multiple electronic components using chip capacitor MC1' as a visual marker, making it easy to identify tampering with the main control board 1310. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment can prevent tampering with electronic components mounted on the main control board 1310, thereby improving the security of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the chip capacitor MC1' is mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 by soldering each of the two electrodes MC1a' of the chip capacitor MC1' to each of the two pins 1315 that are inserted into the through hole 1310r of the main control board 1310 and welded with solder or the like and stand on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. In order to mount the chip capacitor MC1' on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, two pads 1310ka of the chip capacitor MC1' as a specific surface-mount type electronic component are respectively connected to two pads 1310ka provided on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. Compared to mounting a chip capacitor MC1' as a specific surface-mount type electronic component on the main control board 1310 by soldering each of the electrodes MC1a', the area of the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 covered by the chip capacitor MC1' can be reduced, making it possible to form a wiring pattern in the area below the chip capacitor MC1' between the lands 1310s of the two through holes 1310r into which the two pins 1315 on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 are inserted. This increases the flexibility of gaming machine design.

In this example, as shown in Figures 369(A) and (B), the pins 1315 are U-shaped, and two electrodes MC1a' of a chip capacitor MC1', a specific surface-mount type electronic component, are soldered to each of the two pins 1315. However, the shape of the pins 1315 and the welding form of the electrodes MC1a' to the pins 1315 (welding position, welding method (soldering or not), etc.) are not limited to those described above, as long as the chip capacitor MC1', a specific surface-mount type electronic component, can be mounted at a higher position than when directly mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310.

For example, the pin 1315 may be linear, L-shaped, or crank-shaped (having two or more bent portions), with one end (third connection portion) inserted into the through-hole 1310r of the main control board 1310 and welded with solder or the like, and the other end (fourth connection portion) welded to two electrodes MC1a' of a chip capacitor MC1', which is a specific surface-mount type electronic component. Alternatively, the pin 1315 may be flat as shown in Figure 369, or may be cylindrical in shape similar to a normal lead wire.

In this case, the electrode MC1a' of the chip capacitor MC1' as a specific surface-mount type electronic component may be arranged along a portion that constitutes part of the widest surface of the chip capacitor MC1' (the right side surface in Figure 369 (A) and the back surface in Figure 369 (B)), and the vicinity of the other end of the pin 1315 may be welded by solder or the like, or the electrode MC1a' of the chip capacitor MC1' as a specific surface-mount type electronic component may be arranged along a portion that constitutes part of the narrowest surface that is adjacent to the widest surface of the chip capacitor MC1' and is arranged perpendicular to the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 (the left and right side surfaces of the chip capacitor MC1' in Figure 369 (B)). In this case, the distance between the lands 1310s of the two through holes 1310r into which the pin 1315 is inserted can be wider than when the electrode MC1a' of the chip capacitor MC1', which is a specific surface-mount type electronic component, is arranged so as to follow the portion that constitutes part of the widest surface of the chip capacitor MC1', and the other end of the pin 1315 is welded with solder or the like.This makes it possible to create a larger space on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 below the chip capacitor MC1', and by making it possible to form a wiring pattern in this space, it becomes possible to improve the freedom of design of gaming machines with a single-sided mounted main control board 1310. Furthermore, because the other end of the pin 1315 is welded with solder or the like while aligned with the electrode MC1a' of the chip capacitor MC1', the contact area between the pin 1315 and the electrode MC1a' of the chip capacitor MC1' is increased, the weld between the pin 1315 and the electrode MC1a' of the chip capacitor MC1' is strengthened, and the pin 1315 is less likely to come off the electrode MC1a' of the chip capacitor MC1'. This further increases the rigidity of the board.

Furthermore, when a specific surface-mount type electronic component (in this example, chip capacitor MC1') is mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 using a pin 1315 having a crank shape (a shape with two or more bent portions), the spacing between the lands 1310s of the two through holes 1310r into which the above-mentioned one end of the pin 1315 is inserted can be wider than when a specific surface-mount type electronic component (in this example, chip capacitor MC1') is mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 using a pin 1315 without bent portions.This makes it possible to create a larger space on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 below the chip capacitor MC1', and by making it possible to form a wiring pattern in this space, the freedom of gaming machine design can be improved for a single-sided mounted main control board 1310. Furthermore, the spacing between the two through holes 1310r into which the one end of the pin 1315 is inserted need only be wider than the width of at least a specific surface-mount type electronic component (in this example, chip capacitor MC1'). For example, the spacing may be approximately the same as the width of chip component IC1, which is a surface-mount type electronic component mounted adjacent to chip capacitor MC1' across electronic component unmountable area A (avoiding electronic component unmountable area A), or it may be wider than the width of chip component IC1.

Furthermore, as described above in Improvement 2 for Ease of Identifying Tampering, the exterior of the surface-mount chip capacitor MC1', which is a general-purpose component, including at least the widest surface perpendicular to the board and excluding the electrode MC1a', is a light brown color that differs from the exterior color of the resist of the main control board 1310 and the chip component IC1 (the area shaded in Figure 369 (B)). In addition to the fact that the surface-mount chip capacitor MC1' has an exterior color that differs from the exterior color of the resist of the main control board 1310 and the chip component IC1, its elevated mounting position makes it easier to discover the chip capacitor MC1' when mounted on the main control board 1310. Using the chip capacitor MC1' as a visual target, it becomes easier to identify the chip component IC1, a surface-mount electronic component, which is mounted adjacent to the chip capacitor MC1' across the electronic component no-mount area A (avoiding the electronic component no-mount area A). Therefore, when an administrator opens the main frame 4 from the outer frame 2 and visually inspects the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 through the transparent cover 1301, the presence and mounting position of the chip capacitor MC1' can be immediately detected, making it easy to determine whether any tampering has occurred with the main control board 1310.

As with Improvement 2 in Ease of Identifying Tampering, the exterior of the chip capacitor MC1', a specific surface-mount type electronic component, excluding the electrode MC1a', may be changed from its original light brown to a color that is different from the dark green or black resist of the main control board 1310 and the black surface color of the chip component IC1, a surface-mount type electronic component, and is different from light brown (the area filled in in Figure 369 (B)).

For example, the exterior color of the exterior portion of chip capacitor MC1', excluding at least electrode MC1a', may be a light color that stands out against the dark colors of the resist of main control board 1310 and the surface of chip component IC1, i.e., a color that provides high contrast against the dark colors of the resist of main control board 1310 and the surface of chip component IC1 (a light color in this example). The color may be changed to a single color, such as blue, light blue, red, pink, orange, or purple, or a multi-color combination using at least two of these colors. If two or more colors are used, the color combination may be changed to make chip capacitor MC1' more noticeable, such as forming a brown or black pattern on a yellow-green background. In other words, the color combination may be changed to enhance the contrast with the color of important electronic components or the color of the target electronic component itself. Furthermore, the exterior color of the exterior parts of chip capacitor MC1', excluding at least electrode MC1a', should have a high contrast with the dark color of the resist on the main control board 1310 and the surface of chip component IC1, and should be a color that is easy to see, but is desirably a color different from the bright white or yellow of the front-side markings and stampings. Using a color different from the bright white or yellow of the front-side markings and stampings makes it easier to find chip capacitor MC1'.

Methods for changing the exterior color of chip capacitor MC1' include coloring the exterior color of chip capacitor MC1' a different color from its original light brown, and molding it with a resin (e.g., epoxy resin) of a different color from the original light brown of chip capacitor MC1' (using resin to electrically insulate and seal chip capacitor MC1' from the outside). Surface-mount chip capacitor MC1' is the smallest (in terms of volume, capacity, or surface area) of the surface-mount electronic components mounted on main control board 1310. By molding such a small electronic component with a resin (e.g., epoxy resin), the surface-mount chip capacitor MC1' can be made larger than if it were exposed, making it easier to find among the multiple electronic components mounted on mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of main control board 1310. In addition, by changing the color of the molding resin from the original light brown to a light color that stands out easily against the dark surface colors of the resist of the main control board 1310 and the surface of the chip component IC1, i.e., a color that contrasts highly with the dark surface colors of the resist of the main control board 1310 and the surface of the chip component IC1, it becomes easier to find the chip capacitor MC1'.

Moulding chip capacitor MC1' in a resin (such as epoxy resin) of a different colour from the chip capacitor's original light brown colour could make chip capacitor MC1' a target for tampering. However, by covering the part of chip capacitor MC1' where electrode MC1a' is soldered to pin 1315 with resin, etc., it is protected and the welding between electrode MC1a' of chip capacitor MC1' and pin 1315 is reinforced. Furthermore, pin 1315 is welded with solder while inserted into through hole 1310r of main control board 1310. This makes it more difficult to remove chip capacitor MC1' from mounting surface (surface) 1310x of main control board 1310 than if the two electrodes MC1a' of chip capacitor MC1' were each soldered to two pads 1310ka formed on mounting surface (surface) 1310x of main control board 1310, thereby preventing tampering with the main control board 1310.

Furthermore, surface-mount chip capacitor MC1' has a small surface area, and the chip capacitor MC1' in this example does not have a printed portion formed on its surface. The lack of a printed portion makes it difficult to confirm whether a genuine electronic component has been installed. As described above, by molding the surface-mount chip capacitor MC1' with resin (epoxy resin, etc.), the resin (epoxy resin, etc.) that covers the surface-mount chip capacitor MC1' forms a curved shape like a rugby ball. This increases the surface area compared to when the chip capacitor MC1' is exposed, making it possible to form a printed portion on the resin surface of this molded chip capacitor MC1'. This makes it easy to confirm whether a genuine electronic component has been installed by referring to the printed portion.

As shown in Figures 369(A) and 369(B), chip capacitor MC1' is arranged so that its widest surface is perpendicular to the substrate. The printed portion formed on the resin surface of molded chip capacitor MC1' is formed on the surface of the resin portion corresponding to the widest surface of chip capacitor MC1', i.e., the surface of the resin portion corresponding to the surface perpendicular to the substrate (the surface of chip capacitor MC1' in Figure 369(B)). Therefore, when mounting surface (surface) 1310x of main control board 1310 is viewed from directly above (front), the printed portion is difficult to see. However, when mounting surface (surface) 1310x of main control board 1310 is viewed from a horizontal direction, the printed portion can be seen. Therefore, it becomes difficult to identify electronic components by referring to the printed portion, which enhances the deterrent effect against tampering.

That is, surface-mount electronic components typically have electrodes soldered to pads on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, with the widest surface of the electronic component parallel to the board. Furthermore, surface-mount electronic components have a marking formed on the widest surface parallel to the board, in other words, on the top surface (outermost surface) of the surface-mount electronic component. Therefore, the marking can usually be easily seen by viewing the board from the front, making it easy to identify the electronic component. However, in this example, chip capacitor MC1' is mounted so that the widest surface of the surface is perpendicular to the board, and the marking is formed on the widest surface perpendicular to the board, in other words, on the side of molded chip capacitor MC1'. This makes it difficult to see the marking even when viewing the board from the front, making it difficult to identify the electronic component and enhancing the deterrent effect of tampering.

Furthermore, even when surface-mounted electronic components are directly mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, it is possible to arrange them so that the widest surface is perpendicular to the board. However, in this case, the welding between the pads of the main control board 1310 and the electrodes of the surface-mounted electronic components is weak. Furthermore, since the surface-mounted electronic components are mounted so that they protrude from the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the surface-mounted electronic components are likely to peel off from the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the event of contact, etc. On the other hand, in this example, the pins 1315 can be firmly welded to the electrodes of the surface-mounted electronic components, and the surface of the surface-mounted electronic components facing the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 can be changed to a surface with a smaller area. This allows for increased mounting density and shorter wiring patterns, thereby enabling faster circuitry.

In the above example, a surface-mount type electronic component that does not have a stamping portion formed thereon or a surface-mount type electronic component that is too small to form a stamping portion thereon is molded, and a stamping portion is formed on the surface of the molding resin. However, this is not limited to this; a surface-mount type electronic component that has a stamping portion formed thereon may also be molded, and a stamping portion may also be formed on the surface of the molding resin. In this case, the stamping portion may also be formed in the area corresponding to the widest surface that is arranged perpendicular to the substrate. That is, the orientation of the marking (from perpendicular to the board surface to horizontal to the board surface) may be changed. For example, when the electrodes of a surface-mount electronic component are soldered to pads formed on the board surface, the orientation of the surface-mount electronic component (the orientation of the widest surface of the electronic component) may be changed to change the orientation of the marking, and when the electrodes of a surface-mount electronic component are soldered to pins and mounted on the board, or the marking may be formed on the surface of the molding resin that corresponds to the widest surface of the changed surface-mount electronic component. This makes the marking difficult to read when the board is viewed from the front, making it difficult to identify the electronic component and providing a greater deterrent to tampering.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the color of the marking portion formed on chip capacitor MC1' be a color that enhances contrast with the color of the resin that molds chip capacitor MC1'. Specifically, if the color of the resin that molds chip capacitor MC1' is blue, it is desirable that the marking be white, black, yellow, red, orange, green, purple, etc., or a combination of these colors.

Fake Identification Ease Improvement 3 can be used in combination with either or both of the above-mentioned Fake Identification Ease Improvement 1 and Fake Identification Ease Improvement 2, and can also achieve the same effects by being used under the same conditions as either or both of the above-mentioned Fake Identification Ease Improvement 1 and Fake Identification Ease Improvement 2. That is, the part designated as capacitor MC1 in Fake Identification Ease Improvement 1 can be read as chip capacitor MC1', and the part designated as chip capacitor MC1' in Fake Identification Ease Improvement 2 can be read as chip capacitor MC1' mounted on main control board 1310 by soldering electrode MC1a' of chip capacitor MC1' to pin 1315 inserted into through hole 1310r of main control board 1310 and welded with solder or the like on mounting surface (surface) 1310x of main control board 1310.

[Prevention of peeling of surface-mounted electronic components 1]
Next, a method for preventing surface-mount electronic components from peeling off (separation) from a substrate on which the surface-mount electronic components are mounted will be described. Note that the following description will not cover parts that overlap with the above-described embodiment.

As mentioned above, surface-mount electronic components are fixed to the board by soldering connection terminals IC1a to pads 1310k formed on the board surface. Compared to lead-type (insertion-mounted, through-hole-mounted) electronic components that are fixed to the board by inserting lead terminals MC1a into through holes 1310r and soldering these lead terminals MC1a to through holes 1310r or lands 1310s, surface-mount electronic components are more vulnerable to deformation such as lateral impacts and board warping. If a surface-mount electronic component is subjected to a lateral impact or if force is applied to the board causing it to warp, it may peel off from the board surface (detached mounting), potentially causing problems with game control.

In consideration of the above circumstances, the main control board 1310 of this example has been designed to prevent surface-mounted electronic components from peeling off (detachment from mounting). Figure 364(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the mounting state of electronic components on the main control board 1310 of the other example described above, and is an enlarged view showing the mounting state of chip component IC1, which is a surface-mounted electronic component, in Figure 358 above.

As shown in Figure 364 (A), chip component IC1, a surface-mount type electronic component mounted on the main control board 1310, has its connection terminal IC1a soldered to pad 1310k (hatched portion in Figure 364 (A)) formed on the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310, and capacitor MC1 is arranged adjacent to chip component IC1, a surface-mount type electronic component, across an electronic component unmountable area A where no electronic components can be mounted (avoiding electronic component unmountable area A) (as long as they are arranged adjacent to each other without sandwiching other electronic components, through holes, lands 1310s, vias, test points, etc. other than electronic components may be provided), thereby enabling a stable supply of power required to drive chip component IC1. In this example, multiple pads 1310k are formed so as to be parallel to the longitudinal side of the main control board 1310 (horizontal when the main control board 1310 is installed in the pachinko machine 1), and by soldering each of the multiple connection terminals IC1a of chip component IC1 to the corresponding pads 1310k, the connection terminals IC1a of chip component IC1 are mounted so as to be parallel to the longitudinal side of the main control board 1310 (horizontal when the main control board 1310 is installed in the pachinko machine 1).

In this example, the capacitor MC1, which is positioned adjacent to the chip component IC1 (a surface-mount type electronic component) across the electronic component unmountable area A (avoiding the electronic component unmountable area A), is a lead-type (insertion-mount type) electronic component that is secured to the board by inserting a lead terminal MC1a (in this example, the lead terminal MC1a formed to have two or more bends) into the through-hole 1310r and soldering the lead terminal MC1a to the through-hole 1310r or the land 1310s. The lead terminal MC1a is made of iron, copper, or an alloy thereof (e.g., CP wire, which is copper-plated iron wire further plated with tin, or tin-plated Cu wire), and has a predetermined bending strength. The use of the lead terminal MC1a formed to have two or more bends provides it with greater strength than lead terminals with no bends or only one bend. That is, by inserting the lead terminal MC1a of the capacitor MC1, which is a lead-type (insertion-mounted) electronic component, into the through-hole 1310r and soldering this lead terminal MC1a to the through-hole 1310r or land 1310s, and fixing it to the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310 (insertion-mounted), the rigidity of the main control board 1310 can be increased and deformation such as warping can be suppressed. Note that, because iron has a higher bending strength than copper, it is desirable to use a capacitor MC1 with a lead terminal MC1a (CP wire) made of iron or an iron alloy.

In this way, in this example, lead-type (insertion-mounted) electronic components, which are stronger mounting means than surface-mounted electronic components, are mounted adjacent to surface-mounted electronic components in a specific direction across (avoiding) the electronic component unmountable area A, where electronic components cannot be mounted. This makes it possible to partially increase the rigidity of the main control board 1310, suppressing deformation such as warping in the area of the main control board 1310 where surface-mounted electronic components are mounted, and preventing surface-mounted electronic components from peeling off (detaching from mounting).

In addition, in this example, a capacitor MC1, which is a lead-type (insertion-mounted) electronic component that is taller than surface-mounted electronic components (an electronic component that protrudes a greater amount from the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310 when mounted), is mounted adjacent to chip component IC1, a surface-mounted electronic component, in a specific direction (for example, closer to the top, left, bottom, or right side of the main control board 1310 than chip component IC1) across electronic component unmountable area A, where electronic components cannot be mounted (avoiding electronic component unmountable area A). This prevents impacts from being applied to chip component IC1, a surface-mounted electronic component, from being peeled off (detached from mounting).

Furthermore, as mentioned above, chip component IC1, which is a surface-mount type electronic component, can be made smaller than lead-type electronic components. Therefore, by using chip component IC1, which is a surface-mount type electronic component, on mounting surface 1310x of main control board 1310, it is possible to reduce the density and volume of electronic components and increase mounting density. In addition, by arranging chip component IC1, which is a lead-type electronic component, adjacent to capacitor MC1 in a specific direction across electronic component unmountable area A where electronic components cannot be mounted (avoiding electronic component unmountable area A), it is possible to prevent chip component IC1, which is a surface-mount type electronic component, from peeling off (detaching from mounting), thereby improving the reliability of pachinko machine 1.

In this example, for certain surface-mounted electronic components (e.g., ICs) mounted on the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310, lead-type electronic components are used as adjacent electronic components arranged across (avoiding) the electronic component mounting no-go area A, which prevents electronic components from being mounted in a specific direction. This makes it possible to partially increase the rigidity of the main control board 1310 and prevent certain surface-mounted electronic components, such as important electronic components (e.g., ICs) that are involved in the progress of the game, from peeling off (coming off from mounting), thereby improving the reliability of the pachinko machine 1. Furthermore, lead-type electronic components may be placed adjacent to all of the surface-mount type electronic components mounted on the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310, with an electronic component unmountable area A in between (avoiding the electronic component unmountable area A) where electronic components cannot be mounted in a specific direction. In this case, the rigidity of the area of the main control board 1310 where surface-mount type electronic components are mounted can be increased, and peeling off (peeling off of mounting) of all surface-mount type electronic components mounted on the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310 can be suppressed, further improving the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 364 (A), in this example, the spacing (which may be the spacing between the outermost edges of the lands 1310s or the spacing between the centers of the through holes 1310r) between two adjacent through holes 1310r (including lands 1310s) for mounting adjacent lead-type electronic components across (avoiding) the electronic component unmountable area A where electronic components cannot be mounted in a specific direction is wider than the outer shape of the surface-mount electronic component. In other words, the surface-mount electronic component is configured to fit between two adjacent through holes 1310r (including lands 1310s) for mounting adjacent lead-type electronic components across (avoiding) the electronic component unmountable area A where electronic components cannot be mounted.

As a result, deformation such as warping can be suppressed in all areas of the main control board 1310 where surface-mounted electronic components are mounted (areas where surface-mounted electronic components are placed), and impacts from specific directions can be suppressed, preventing surface-mounted electronic components from peeling off (detachment).

Furthermore, the spacing between two through holes 1310r (including lands 1310s) for mounting adjacent lead-type electronic components across an electronic component non-mountable area A (avoiding electronic component non-mountable area A) in a specific direction of the surface-mount electronic component is wider than the outline including the connection terminal IC1a formed on chip component IC1, which serves as a surface-mount electronic component. Therefore, the lead-type electronic components inserted and mounted in these two through holes 1310r (including lands 1310s) increase the rigidity of the main control board 1310 over a distance wider than the connection terminal IC1a of chip component IC1, thereby suppressing deformation such as warping of the main control board 1310. Furthermore, by suppressing impacts from specific directions on the surface-mount electronic component, the connection terminal IC1a formed on chip component IC1, which serves as a surface-mount electronic component, can be prevented from peeling off from pad 1310k on mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310.

For surface-mount electronic components, the spacing between two adjacent through holes 1310r (including lands 1310s) for mounting lead-type electronic components across (avoiding) the electronic component non-mountable area A, where electronic components cannot be mounted, can be at least the same as the external shape of the main body excluding the connection terminal IC1a formed on chip component IC1 as a surface-mount electronic component, or wider than the external shape of the main body excluding the connection terminal IC1a formed on chip component IC1 as a surface-mount electronic component. Even in this case, the rigidity of the main control board 1310 is increased over a distance wider than the external shape of the main body of chip component IC1 as a surface-mount electronic component, thereby preventing deformation such as warping of the main control board 1310. Furthermore, the application of impacts from a specific direction to the main body excluding the connection terminal IC1a formed on chip component IC1 as a surface-mount electronic component can be prevented, thereby preventing the surface-mount electronic component from peeling off (detaching from mounting).

As shown in FIG. 364(A), chip component IC1, a surface-mount type electronic component, has connection terminals IC1a on two opposing sides of its main body, out of four sides. In this example, a capacitor MC1, a lead-type electronic component, is disposed on one of the two opposing sides of the main body of chip component IC1, on which no connection terminals IC1a are formed, as a specific orientation of chip component IC1, a surface-mount type electronic component. Therefore, by providing one capacitor MC1, a lead-type electronic component, on both of the connection terminals IC1a formed on the two opposing sides of the main body of chip component IC1, a surface-mount type electronic component, the rigidity of the main control board 1310 is increased in the area including both of the connection terminals IC1a formed on the two opposing sides of the main body of chip component IC1, thereby protecting the connection terminals IC1a and preventing the connection terminals IC1a formed on chip component IC1, a surface-mount type electronic component, from peeling off from pads 1310k on mounting surface 1310x of main control board 1310.

In addition, in this example, the straight line connecting the two through holes 1310r formed to mount lead-type electronic components is formed so as to be approximately parallel to the short side of the main control board 1310 (the vertical direction when the main control board 1310 is installed in the pachinko machine 1), and the lead-type electronic components are positioned so as to be approximately parallel to the short side of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the lead-type electronic components inserted and mounted in these through holes 1310r can suppress bending and warping about a straight line (horizontal when the main control board 1310 is installed in the pachinko machine 1) parallel to the longitudinal side of the main control board 1310 (the longest of the four sides of the main control board 1310). In addition, it can prevent direct lateral impacts from being applied to the surface-mounted electronic components from the specific direction of the short side of the main control board 1310 on which the lead-type electronic components are mounted (the shortest of the four sides of the main control board 1310), preventing the surface-mounted electronic components from peeling off (detachment), improving the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, in this example, two through holes 1310r are formed approximately on the extension of each of the pads 1310k to which the multiple connection terminals IC1a formed on the top and bottom of the chip component IC1 are soldered. Therefore, when bending or warping about a straight line parallel to the longitudinal side of the main control board 1310 is suppressed by the lead-type electronic components, the force applied to the connection terminals IC1a of the chip component IC1 can be suppressed by the lead-type electronic components, preventing surface-mounted electronic components from peeling off (detachment), thereby improving the reliability of the gaming machine. The through holes 1310r may be formed so that portions of the lands 1310s of the two through holes 1310r overlap approximately on the extension lines of each of the pads 1310k, or the upper and lower pads 1310k may be formed so that they fit within the space between the two through holes 1310 (the two through holes 1310 are formed outside the approximate extension lines of each of the pads 1310k). In this case as well, the force acting on the connection terminal IC1a of the chip component IC1 can be suppressed by the lead-type electronic component, preventing surface-mounted electronic components from peeling off (detachment from mounting), thereby improving the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the line connecting the two through holes 1310r formed for mounting surface-mount type electronic components is formed so as to be approximately parallel to the longitudinal side of the main control board 1310 (horizontal when the main control board 1310 is installed in the pachinko machine 1), and the lead-type electronic components are arranged so as to be approximately parallel to the longitudinal side of the main control board 1310, and multiple pads 1310k are formed so as to be parallel to the lateral side of the main control board 1310 (vertical when the main control board 1310 is installed in the pachinko machine 1), and by soldering each of the multiple connection terminals IC1a of the chip component IC1 to the corresponding pad 1310k, the connection terminals IC1a of the chip component IC1 The lead-type electronic components may be mounted parallel to the short side of the main control board 1310 (vertical when the main control board 1310 is installed in the pachinko machine 1). In this case, the lead-type electronic components inserted and mounted in these through holes 1310r can prevent bending or warping about a straight line parallel to the short side of the main control board 1310 (vertical when the main control board 1310 is installed in the pachinko machine 1). In addition, it can prevent direct lateral impacts from the long side of the main control board 1310 on which the lead-type electronic components are mounted from being applied to the surface-mounted electronic components, thereby preventing the surface-mounted electronic components from peeling off (detaching from the mounting).

Furthermore, surface-mounted electronic component A is formed so that the line connecting the two through holes 1310r is approximately parallel to the short side of the main control board 1310 (vertical when the main control board 1310 is installed in the pachinko machine 1) and is arranged approximately parallel to the long side of the main control board 1310, and surface-mounted electronic component B is formed so that the line connecting the two through holes 1310r is approximately parallel to the long side of the main control board 1310 (horizontal when the main control board 1310 is installed in the pachinko machine 1) and is arranged approximately parallel to the short side of the main control board 1310. It is also possible to mount both lead-type electronic component A and lead-type electronic component B, in which case the lead-type electronic component inserted into this through-hole 1310r can suppress bending or warping about the longitudinal side of the main control board 1310 (horizontal when the main control board 1310 is installed in the pachinko machine 1) as an axis, and can also suppress bending or warping about the lateral side of the main control board 1310 (vertical when the main control board 1310 is installed in the pachinko machine 1) as an axis, further preventing surface-mounted electronic components from peeling off (detachment from mounting).

In the above example, a capacitor MC1 as a lead-type electronic component is arranged on one of two opposing side surfaces on which the connection terminal IC1a is not formed among the four side surfaces of a chip component IC1 as a surface-mount type electronic component, but this is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 364(B), a capacitor MC1 as a lead-type electronic component may be arranged on one of two opposing side surfaces on which the connection terminal IC1a is formed among the four side surfaces of a chip component IC1 as a surface-mount type electronic component, or as shown in FIG. 364(C), a capacitor MC1 as a lead-type electronic component may be arranged on two opposing side surfaces on which the connection terminal IC1a is not formed among the four side surfaces of a chip component IC1 as a surface-mount type electronic component, or as shown in FIG. 364(D), a capacitor MC1 as a lead-type electronic component may be arranged on two opposing side surfaces on which the connection terminal IC1a is formed among the four side surfaces of a chip component IC1 as a surface-mount type electronic component, or as shown in FIG. 364(E), Of the four side surfaces of the chip part IC1 as a component, one of two opposing side surfaces on which the connection terminal IC1a is not formed may have a capacitor MC1 as a lead-type electronic component arranged in an extension of one of the connection terminals IC1a; or, although not shown, of the four side surfaces of the chip part IC1 as a surface-mount type electronic component, one of two opposing side surfaces on which the connection terminal IC1a is not formed may have one capacitor MC1 as a lead-type electronic component arranged in an extension of each of the connection terminals IC1a; or, although not shown, of the four side surfaces of the chip part IC1 as a surface-mount type electronic component, two capacitors MC1 as lead-type electronic components may be arranged in an extension of each of the connection terminals IC1a on two opposing side surfaces on which the connection terminal IC1a is not formed; In these cases, bending and warping of the main control board 1310 can be suppressed, and impacts from specific directions can be prevented from being applied to surface-mounted electronic components, preventing the surface-mounted electronic components from peeling off (detaching). Furthermore, when lead-type electronic components are arranged on two opposing side surfaces of a surface-mounted electronic component, bending and warping of the main control board 1310 can be suppressed more effectively than when lead-type electronic components are arranged on only one side surface. Furthermore, by protecting the surface-mounted electronic components from two directions, impacts can be prevented from being applied, making it possible to more effectively prevent the surface-mounted electronic components from peeling off (detaching).

The circuit board may also include one or more combinations of the circuit boards shown in FIG. 364(A), FIG. 364(B), FIG. 364(C), FIG. 364(D), FIG. 364(E), and a circuit board (not shown) in which capacitors MC1 as lead-type electronic components are arranged on one of two opposing side surfaces of a chip component IC1 as a surface-mounted electronic component that do not have connection terminals IC1a formed thereon, in a line extending from each of the connection terminals IC1a. In this case, the circuit board may be arranged in a manner appropriate to the importance of the surface-mounted electronic components to be mounted, their susceptibility to peeling (detachment), their susceptibility to warping, etc., thereby partially increasing the rigidity of the main control board 1310 and preventing surface-mounted electronic components from peeling (detachment).

In addition, in the above example, a surface-mount type electronic component and a lead-type electronic component were illustrated as a chip component IC1 and a capacitor MC1 provided to stably ensure the function of the chip component IC1. However, the electronic component is not limited to a lead-type electronic component provided to stably ensure the function of a first surface-mount type electronic component, but may also be a lead-type electronic component provided to stably ensure the function of a second surface-mount type electronic component that is different from the first surface-mount type electronic component (a lead-type electronic component provided in a circuit (circuit of the second electronic component) separate from the first electronic component). Alternatively, a lead-type electronic component (a lead-type electronic component provided in the circuit of the first electronic component) provided to ensure stable functionality of the first surface-mount type electronic component, and a lead-type electronic component provided to ensure stable functionality of the second surface-mount type electronic component, may both be placed adjacent to the first surface-mount type electronic component across the electronic component no-mount area A where electronic components cannot be mounted (avoiding the electronic component no-mount area A).

Furthermore, while the above example uses a chip component IC1 as an example of a surface-mount type electronic component and a capacitor MC1 as an example of a lead-type electronic component, the present invention is not limited to these. For example, diodes, resistors, etc. may also be used. In other words, the present technical concept does not limit the type of electronic component as long as at least one lead-type electronic component is provided adjacent to a surface-mount type electronic component (as long as it is arranged adjacent to the surface-mount type electronic component without sandwiching other electronic components, and through-holes, lands, vias, test points, etc. other than electronic components may be provided) across an electronic component unmountable area A where electronic components cannot be mounted (avoiding the electronic component unmountable area A).

Furthermore, the combination of a specific surface-mount type electronic component (e.g., an IC) and a lead-type electronic component is not limited to being arranged on a portion of the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310, but the combination of a specific electronic component (e.g., an IC) and a lead-type electronic component may be arranged over almost the entire area of the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310 (not limited to being arranged regularly, but may also be arranged irregularly). For example, at least one combination of a specific electronic component (e.g., an IC) and a lead-type electronic component may be arranged in each region of the mounting surface 1310x partitioned by dividing the longitudinal side of the main control board 1310 into n equal parts (n = approximately 2 to 8) (for example, the left and right regions of the main control board 1310 divided in half by the vertical dividing line Y-Y in FIG. 365). Alternatively, at least one combination of a specific electronic component (e.g., an IC) and a lead-type electronic component may be arranged in each region of the mounting surface 1310x partitioned by dividing the longitudinal side of the main control board 1310 into n equal parts (n = approximately 2 to 8) and the short side into m equal parts (m = approximately 2 to 4) (for example, each region of the main control board 1310 divided into four equal parts by the vertical dividing line Y-Y and the horizontal dividing line X-X in FIG. 365). This allows combinations of specific electronic components (e.g., ICs) and lead-type electronic components to be arranged across substantially the entire mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310. This not only prevents specific electronic components (e.g., ICs) from peeling off (detachment from mounting), but also prevents deformation such as warping across almost the entire area of the main control board 1310, making it possible to prevent surface-mounted electronic components other than specific electronic components (e.g., ICs) from peeling off (detachment from mounting), further improving the reliability of the pachinko machine 1. Furthermore, because the main control board 1310 in this example has a horizontally elongated rectangular shape, the division lines dividing the longitudinal sides of the main control board 1310 and the division lines dividing the lateral sides are perpendicular, and the division lines partition the main control board 1310 into multiple rectangular regions.

In addition, the line connecting the two through holes 1310r formed for mounting lead-type electronic components is formed so that it is approximately parallel to the short side of the main control board 1310 (vertical when the main control board 1310 is installed in the pachinko machine 1), and lead-type electronic components are arranged so that it is approximately parallel to the short side of the main control board 1310, and the line connecting the two through holes 1310r formed for mounting surface-mounted electronic components is formed so that it is approximately parallel to the long side of the main control board 1310 (horizontal when the main control board 1310 is installed in the pachinko machine 1). and/or a lead-type electronic component in which the lead-type electronic component is arranged so as to be approximately parallel to the longitudinal side of the main control board 1310, and a specific electronic component (e.g., a lead-type electronic component) in which a plurality of pads 1310k are formed so as to be parallel to the short-side side of the main control board 1310 (a vertical direction when the main control board 1310 is installed in the pachinko machine 1), and in which a plurality of connection terminals IC1a of the chip component IC1 are soldered to the corresponding pads 1310k, so that the connection terminals IC1a of the chip component IC1 are parallel to the short-side side of the main control board 1310 (a vertical direction when the main control board 1310 is installed in the pachinko machine 1). and a specific electronic component (e.g., IC) that is mounted such that a plurality of pads 1310k are formed parallel to the longitudinal side of the main control board 1310 (horizontal when the main control board 1310 is installed in the pachinko machine 1) and a plurality of connection terminals IC1a of the chip component IC1 are soldered to the corresponding pads 1310k, so that the connection terminals IC1a of the chip component IC1 are parallel to the longitudinal side of the main control board 1310 (horizontal when the main control board 1310 is installed in the pachinko machine 1). The main control board 1310 may be arranged in a regular pattern (not limited to regular patterns, but may also be arranged irregularly), which makes it possible to suppress either or both of bending and warping about a straight line parallel to the longitudinal sides of the main control board 1310 (horizontal when the main control board 1310 is installed in the pachinko machine 1) and bending and warping about a straight line parallel to the shorter sides of the main control board 1310 (vertical when the main control board 1310 is installed in the pachinko machine 1) across substantially the entire area of the game control board 1310, thereby suppressing peeling off of surface-mounted electronic components (mounting peeling) and improving the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, in the above example, a lead-type electronic component is mounted adjacent to a specific surface-mount type electronic component (e.g., an IC) across an electronic component mount-prohibited area A where the electronic component cannot be mounted (avoiding the electronic component mount-prohibited area A), thereby preventing the specific surface-mount type electronic component from peeling off (peeling off). However, the arrangement is not limited to placing a lead-type electronic component adjacent to a specific electronic component (e.g., an IC) across an electronic component mount-prohibited area A where the electronic component cannot be mounted (avoiding the electronic component mount-prohibited area A). Lead-type electronic components may be placed individually across almost the entire mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310, or a lead-type electronic component placed adjacent to a specific electronic component across an electronic component mount-prohibited area A where the electronic component cannot be mounted (avoiding the electronic component mount-prohibited area A), and a lead-type electronic component placed individually may be placed across almost the entire mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310. For example, at least one lead-type electronic component may be placed in each region of the mounting surface 1310x defined by dividing the longitudinal side of the main control board 1310 into n equal parts (n = approximately 2 to 8) (for example, the left and right regions of the main control board 1310 divided in half by the vertical dividing line Y-Y in FIG. 365), or at least one lead-type electronic component may be placed in each region of the mounting surface 1310x defined by dividing the longitudinal side of the main control board 1310 into n equal parts (n = approximately 2 to 8) and the short side into m equal parts (m = approximately 2 to 4) (for example, each region of the main control board 1310 divided into four equal parts by the vertical dividing line Y-Y and the horizontal dividing line X-X in FIG. 365), thereby allowing lead-type electronic components to be placed across almost the entire mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310. In this example, as shown in FIG. 365, multiple (two or more) capacitors MC1 are arranged as lead-type electronic components in each area of the main control board 1310, which is divided into four equal parts by vertical division line Y-Y and horizontal division line X-X. By arranging lead-type electronic components across almost the entire area of the main control board 1310 in this way, the rigidity of the main control board 1310 is increased, which suppresses deformation of the board such as bending and warping and prevents certain surface-mounted electronic components from peeling off (detachment).

In this case, the number of lead-type electronic components mounted in each region may be varied depending on the number of surface-mount type electronic components or specific surface-mount type electronic components mounted in each region of the partitioned mounting surface 1310x. For example, among the regions of the partitioned mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310 (for example, each region of the main control board 1310 divided into four equal parts by the vertical division line Y-Y and the horizontal division line X-X in Figure 365), regions with a higher number of surface-mount type electronic components or specific surface-mount type electronic components may be configured to have more lead-type electronic components mounted than regions with a lower number of surface-mount type electronic components or specific surface-mount type electronic components mounted. By configuring it in this way, the rigidity of the area of the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310 where many surface-mount type electronic components or specific surface-mount type electronic components are mounted can be increased, preventing the surface-mount type electronic components or specific surface-mount type electronic components from peeling off, and the rigidity can be optimized (without becoming excessive) according to the number of surface-mount type electronic components or specific surface-mount type electronic components mounted.

Even if lead-type electronic components are arranged over substantially the entire mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310, it is possible to avoid mounting lead-type electronic components in areas of the partitioned mounting surface 1310x where no surface-mounted electronic components are mounted.

[Prevention of peeling of surface-mounted electronic components 2]
In the above-described surface-mount electronic component peeling prevention 1, lead-type electronic components are mounted adjacent to surface-mount electronic components across an electronic component unmountable area A (avoiding the electronic component unmountable area A), where electronic components cannot be mounted, or lead-type electronic components are arranged over substantially the entire area of the main control board 1310, thereby suppressing bending and warping of the main control board 1310 and preventing surface-mount electronic components from peeling off (peeling off). However, deformation of the entire board may also be suppressed by suppressing deformation at the board edges (near the top, left, bottom, and right sides). This point will be explained below. Note that the following will not explain parts that overlap with the above-described embodiment.

As shown in Figure 363, in this example, both surface-mount type electronic components and lead-type electronic components are mounted on the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310.

In addition, in this example, lead-type (insertion mounting type) electronic components are used as multiple connectors mounted on the main control board 1310 to electrically connect the main control board 1310 to other boards (e.g., dispensing control board 633, peripheral control board 1510, etc.) and various sensors (e.g., first start port sensor 3002, second start port sensor 2401, etc.).

The multiple connectors MCN1 to MCN6, which are lead-type electronic components, are arranged in a row near the top edge of the main control board 1310, from the left edge toward the right edge; in other words, near the top edge of the main control board 1310, along the longitudinal edge of the main control board 1310 (horizontal when the main control board 1310 is installed in the pachinko machine 1). Because the multiple connectors MCN1 to MCN6, which are lead-type electronic components, are arranged in a row near the top edge of the main control board 1310 along the longitudinal edge of the main control board 1310 (horizontal when the main control board 1310 is installed in the pachinko machine 1), the rigidity of the main control board 1310 can be increased in the area where the multiple connectors MCN1 to MCN6 are arranged, and bending or warping about a straight line parallel to the shorter edge of the main control board 1310 is suppressed. This suppresses peeling (detachment) of surface-mounted electronic components, thereby improving the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, the majority of the multiple connectors MCN1 to MCN6 are arranged so that the longitudinal sides of their bodies are approximately parallel to the top longitudinal side of the main control board 1310. Specifically, all of the connectors MCN1 to MCN6, except for connector MCN3, are arranged so that the longitudinal sides of their bodies are approximately parallel to the top longitudinal side of the main control board 1310. In other words, the bodies of connectors MCN1, MCN2, and MCN4 to MCN6 are arranged so that they extend over a wider area relative to the longitudinal side of the main control board 1310.

In this way, by arranging the longitudinal sides of the main body of each of connectors MCN1, MCN2, MCN4 to MCN6 so that they are approximately parallel to the longitudinal sides of the main control board 1310 (in this example, the top and bottom sides), the rigidity of the main control board 1310 can be increased over a wide area of the top side, which is the longitudinal side of the control board 1310, and bending or warping about a straight line parallel to the short side of the main control board 1310 is suppressed. This prevents surface-mounted electronic components from peeling off (detachment), improving the reliability of the gaming machine.

Note that it is sufficient that multiple lead-type connectors are arranged in a line near any side (e.g., the top side) of the main control board 1310, and those arranged along any side of the main control board 1310 may be arranged such that the longitudinal sides of the multiple connectors are not approximately parallel to any side of the main control board 1310, or such that only a portion (less than half) of the connectors are arranged so that the longitudinal sides of the connectors are approximately parallel to any side of the main control board 1310.

Furthermore, the multiple lead-type connectors arranged in a row near any side (e.g., the top side) of the main control board 1310 are not limited to being arranged in a straight line along any side of the main control board 1310, but may be arranged from a specific side (e.g., the left side) adjacent to any side (e.g., the top side) toward the side opposite that side (e.g., the right side) so as to fit within a specified width from any side (e.g., the top side) of the main control board 1310 toward the side opposite that side (e.g., the bottom side).

Furthermore, a predetermined number of the multiple lead-type connectors may be arranged so that a portion of one connector body overlaps a portion of another connector body (which may be one, or two or more) in a direction (e.g., a unilateral direction) from any side (e.g., the top side) of the main control board 1310 to the side opposite that side (e.g., the bottom side). In this case, the rigidity of the main control board 1310 can be further increased in a predetermined range including the vicinity of the area where a portion of one connector body overlaps with a portion of another connector body (e.g., a range extending from any side (e.g., the top side) of the main control board 1310 to the side opposite that side (e.g., the bottom side)), and surface-mounted electronic components mounted in the predetermined range including the vicinity of the area where a portion of one connector body overlaps with a portion of another connector body can be prevented from peeling off (detachment).

In addition, lead-type electronic components other than the connectors may be arranged so that they partially overlap multiple lead-type connectors arranged in a row near any side (e.g., the top side) of the main control board 1310 in a direction (e.g., unilateral direction) from any side (e.g., the top side) of the main control board 1310 to the side opposite that side (e.g., the bottom side). This can further increase the rigidity of the main control board 1310 in a predetermined range including the vicinity of this overlapping area (e.g., the range extending from any side (e.g., the top side) of the main control board 1310 to the side opposite that side (e.g., the bottom side)), and can prevent surface-mounted electronic components mounted in a predetermined range including the vicinity of the area where the connectors and lead-type electronic components other than the connectors overlap from peeling off (detachment from mounting).

Specifically, in this example, lead-type IC2 is arranged so that it overlaps connectors MCN5 and MCN6 in the unilateral direction of main control board 1310, and surface-mounted chip component IC1 is arranged on the lower side of lead-type IC2. This increases the rigidity of main control board 1310 in a specified area, including the vicinity of the area where connectors MCN5 and MCN6 and lead-type IC2 overlap, thereby suppressing deformation such as warping, and by arranging surface-mounted chip component IC1 in this area with increased rigidity, it is possible to prevent surface-mounted chip component IC1 from peeling off (detaching from mounting).

Furthermore, in this example, surface-mount type chip component IC1 is placed in a predetermined area including the vicinity of the area where connectors MCN5 and MCN6 overlap with lead-type IC2, and a lead-type setting key switch 1311a is placed on the bottom side of surface-mount type chip component IC1. In this way, by placing lead-type electronic components not only on the top side but also on the bottom side of surface-mount type chip component IC1, the lead-type electronic components are placed so that they are sandwiched between the top and bottom sides of main control board 1310, increasing the rigidity of specific areas of main control board 1310 and suppressing deformation such as warping in these specific areas, further preventing surface-mount type chip component IC1 mounted in the specific area from peeling off (detachment).

Furthermore, the lead-type connectors MCN1 to MCN6 lined up along the top edge of the main control board 1310 are spaced apart at a predetermined interval (at least including the area A where electronic components cannot be mounted), as shown in Figure 363. The lead-type setting key switch 1311a, located near the bottom edge of the main control board 1310, is positioned to include the gap between connectors MCN5 and MCN6. Specifically, the lead-type setting key switch 1311a is positioned to include the area where the connectors MCN5 and MCN6 are not located (the area spaced apart by imaginary demarcation lines j-j and k-k) within the strip-shaped area defined by imaginary demarcation lines a-l extending from the left and right ends of the outer shape of each of the connectors MCN1 to MCN6 toward the inside of the main control board 1310 (the bottom edge opposite the top edge of the main control board 1310). In other words, the lead-type setting key switch 1311a is placed in an area of the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310 that has lower rigidity than the area below connectors MCN5 and MCN6. This makes it possible to form an area of increased rigidity below connectors MCN5 and MCN6 within the range of connectors MCN5 to MCN6 mounted on the main control board 1310, thereby suppressing deformation such as warping and preventing surface-mounted electronic components from peeling off (detachment).

Note that lead-type electronic components are not limited to the setting key switch 1311a, and include five non-specific areas (areas defined by imaginary demarcation lines b-b and c-c, and areas defined by imaginary demarcation lines d-d and e-e) within the strip-shaped area defined by imaginary demarcation lines a-l extending from both the left and right ends of the outer shape of each of the connectors MCN1 to MCN6 toward the inside of the main control board 1310 (the lower edge opposite the upper edge of the main control board 1310) where the connectors MCN1 to MCN6 are not located. The system is not limited to placing lead-type electronic components in all of the five non-specific areas (the area bounded by imaginary demarcation lines f-f and g-g, the area bounded by imaginary demarcation lines h-h and i-i, and the area bounded by imaginary demarcation lines j-j and k-k), but may place lead-type electronic components in some of the five non-specific areas (for example, the area bounded by imaginary demarcation lines j-j and k-k) and not place lead-type electronic components in the other areas.

Furthermore, in each of the five non-specific areas, lead-type electronic components may be arranged not only to encompass the entire non-specific area (for example, to encompass the entire area defined by imaginary demarcation lines b-b and c-c), but also to overlap at least a portion of the non-specific area (for example, to encompass a portion of the area defined by imaginary demarcation lines b-b and c-c). Furthermore, the complementary lead-type electronic components may be arranged between the edge where connectors MCN1 to MCN6 are installed (the upper edge in this example) and the edge opposite that edge (the lower edge in this example). In this case, an area with increased rigidity can be formed on the main control board 1310, suppressing deformation such as warping and preventing surface-mounted electronic components from peeling off (detachment).

Furthermore, the rigidity of the main control board 1310 is not limited to being increased by mounting lead-type electronic components that fill the gaps between the lead-type connectors MCN1 to MCN6 arranged in a row along the top edge of the main control board 1310. It is also possible to position a lead-type electronic component (e.g., capacitor MC1) so that it encompasses part of the gap between adjacent lead-type electronic components (e.g., IC2) that are positioned across (avoiding) the electronic component no-mountable area A, where electronic components cannot be mounted. In this case, too, an area with increased rigidity can be formed on the main control board 1310, which can suppress deformation such as warping and prevent the surface-mounted electronic components from peeling off (detachment).

In addition, in this example, multiple lead-type electronic components are mounted on the zip-type main control MPU 1310a and the main control board 1310 so that they overlap in the unilateral direction. Specifically, a lead-type connector MCN6, a lead-type capacitor MC1, and a lead-type IC2 are arranged on the upper side of the main control MPU 1310a, while a lead-type capacitor MC1 and a lead-type IC2 are arranged on the lower side of the main control MPU 1310a. This further increases the rigidity of the area of the main control board 1310 where the main control MPU 1310a, an important electronic component that controls the progress of the game, is arranged, suppressing deformation such as warping. This prevents the main control MPU 1310a from falling off the main control board 1310, improving the reliability of the gaming machine and preventing disadvantages to players.

In other words, since the main control MPU 1310a is the most important electronic component responsible for executing game-related controls, the use of ZIP-type electronic components not only makes the board more resistant to deformation such as warping and bending, but by placing multiple lead-type electronic components near the main control MPU 1310a, the rigidity of the main control board 1310 is further increased, preventing the main control MPU 1310a from falling off the main control board 1319 or problems such as poor contact. This improves the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, in this example, the area of the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310 where the connectors MCN1 to MCN6 are mounted and where the rigidity is increased, specifically the area on the left side of the main control board 1310 where the connectors MCN1 to MCN6 are mounted (the area from the connectors MCN1 to MCN6 towards the bottom side), is configured to accommodate more surface-mounted electronic components (e.g., chip component IC1, resistor MR, etc.) than the area on the right side of the main control board 1310 where the connectors MCN1 to MCN6 are not mounted.

Note that this does not necessarily mean that surface-mount electronic components are more likely to be located on the left side of the main control board 1310, where the connectors MCN1-MCN6 are installed and thereby increased rigidity, than on the right side of the main control board 1310, where the connectors MCN1-MCN6 are not installed. It is sufficient that at least certain surface-mount electronic components (e.g., important electronic components such as chip component IC1) are more likely to be located on the left side of the main control board 1310, where the connectors MCN1-MCN6 are installed and thereby increased rigidity, than on the right side of the main control board 1310, where the connectors MCN1-MCN6 are not installed. In this way, by placing more surface-mount electronic components and certain surface-mount electronic components in the area where the connectors MCN1-MCN6 are installed and thus increased rigidity, than on the lower side of the area where the connectors MCN1-MCN6 are not installed, the surface-mount electronic components and certain surface-mount electronic components are less likely to come off (detach), thereby improving the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, within the strip-shaped area defined by imaginary demarcation lines a-l extending from both the left and right ends of the outer shape of each of the connectors MCN1 to MCN6 provided on the upper edge of the main control board 1310 toward the inside of the main control board 1310 (the lower edge opposite the upper edge of the main control board 1310), the connectors MCN1 to MCN6 are arranged in six specific areas (the area surrounded by imaginary demarcation lines a-a and b-b extending from both the left and right ends of the outer shape of the connector MCN1 body, the area surrounded by imaginary demarcation lines c-c and d-d extending from both the left and right ends of the outer shape of the connector MCN2 body, and the area surrounded by imaginary demarcation lines d-d and d-e extending from both the left and right ends of the outer shape of the connector MCN3 body). In each of the following areas (the area surrounded by imaginary demarcation lines e-e and f-f extending from both the left and right ends, the area surrounded by imaginary demarcation lines g-g and h-h extending from both the left and right ends of the outline of the main body of connector MCN4, the area surrounded by imaginary demarcation lines i-i and j-j extending from both the left and right ends of the outline of the main body of connector MCN5, and the area surrounded by imaginary demarcation lines k-k and l-l extending from both the left and right ends of the outline of the main body of connector MCN6), a specific surface-mount type electronic component (IC1 in this example) is provided so that at least a portion of the outline including the connection terminals of the electronic component overlaps.

Each of the six specific regions has increased rigidity, suppressing warping and other problems. Furthermore, by arranging specific surface-mounted electronic components in the specific regions so that at least a portion of the external shape, including the connection terminals of the electronic components, overlaps with the specific regions, peeling off of these specific surface-mounted electronic components (peeling off of the mounting) is suppressed, thereby improving the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.

A specific surface-mount type electronic component (which may include connection terminals, or may be only the outer shape of the main body excluding the connection terminals) may be arranged so that its entire outer shape overlaps the specific area. In this case, since the specific surface-mount type electronic component can be arranged in the specific area, it is possible to prevent the specific surface-mount type electronic component from peeling off (detaching from mounting), improving the reliability of the pachinko machine 1. Furthermore, the specific surface-mount type electronic component is not limited to all electronic components of a specific type, but may also be some of the specific type of electronic components. For example, a specific surface-mount type IC1 among surface-mount type ICs (also called chip ICs) may be considered as a specific surface-mount type electronic component. In other words, a specific surface-mount type IC1 among multiple surface-mount type ICs may be arranged so that its entire outer shape overlaps the specific area.

Furthermore, it is not limited to arranging specific surface-mount type electronic components so that the outer shapes of the specific surface-mount type electronic components overlap part or all of all of the six specific areas. It is also possible to arrange specific surface-mount type electronic components only in some of the six specific areas (for example, the area defined by imaginary demarcation line i-i and imaginary demarcation line j-j), and not to arrange specific surface-mount type electronic components in other areas.

Furthermore, in this example, the main control board 1310 has a lead-type connector MCN7, a lead-type setting key switch 1311a, and a lead-type connector MCN8 arranged in a row from the left side toward the right side near the bottom side opposite the top side on which connectors MCN1 to MCN6 are mounted, in other words, along the longitudinal side of the main control board 1310 (horizontal when the main control board 1310 is installed in the pachinko machine 1) near the bottom side opposite the top side on which connectors MCN1 to MCN6 of the main control board 1310 are mounted.

In other words, the rigidity of the portion of the main control board 1310 is increased by arranging the lead-type connectors MCN1 to MCN6 in a row near the top edge of the main control board 1310, and the lead-type connector MCN7, lead-type setting key switch 1311a, and lead-type connector MCN8 in a row near the bottom edge, so that a portion of the main control board 1310 (in this example, the area from the center to the left side of the main control board 1310) is sandwiched between them. This reduces deformation such as warping in the portion of the main control board 1310 with increased rigidity, and by mounting more surface-mounted electronic components in this portion of the main control board 1310 than in other areas, peeling off of the surface-mounted electronic components can be reduced, thereby improving the reliability of the gaming machine.

In addition, it is not limited to surface-mounted electronic components being placed in greater numbers in areas where rigidity is increased by the lead-type connectors MCN1 to MCN6 lined up near the top edge of the main control board 1310 and the lead-type connector MCN7, lead-type setting key switch 1311a, and lead-type connector MCN8 lined up near the bottom edge, but it is sufficient that at least certain surface-mounted electronic components (e.g., important electronic components such as chip component IC1) are placed in greater numbers in areas where rigidity is increased by the lead-type connectors MCN1 to MCN6 lined up near the top edge of the main control board 1310 and the lead-type connector MCN7, lead-type setting key switch 1311a, and lead-type connector MCN8 lined up near the bottom edge. In this way, by arranging surface-mount type electronic components and specific surface-mount type electronic components in areas where rigidity is increased by the lead-type connectors MCN1-MCN6 lined up near the top edge of the main control board 1310 and the lead-type connector MCN7, lead-type setting key switch 1311a, and lead-type connector MCN8 lined up near the bottom edge, rather than in areas near the top or bottom edges where connectors MCN1-MCN6, connector MCN7, setting key switch 1311a, and connector MCN8 are not mounted, peeling off (detachment) of surface-mount type electronic components and specific surface-mount type electronic components is prevented, thereby improving the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.

[Prevention of peeling of surface-mounted electronic components 3]
In the above-described methods 1 and 2 for preventing peeling of surface-mounted electronic components, lead-type electronic components are used to prevent bending and warping of the main control board 1310, thereby preventing the surface-mounted electronic components from peeling off (peeling off). However, a configuration may also be adopted in which through-holes 1310r are provided and filled with solder to increase the rigidity of the main control board 1310 and prevent deformation of the board, such as warping, thereby preventing the surface-mounted electronic components from peeling off (peeling off). This point will be explained below. Note that the following description will not cover parts that overlap with the above-described embodiments.

Figure 365 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a through hole 1310r and the lands formed around the through hole 1310r in the main control board 1310 of the other example described above. Note that some of the through holes, lands, wiring patterns, and pads to which the connection terminals of surface-mounted electronic components are soldered are omitted from Figure 365. As shown in Figure 365, in addition to the through holes into which the lead terminals of lead-type electronic components are inserted, multiple through holes are formed throughout the main control board 1310 of this example.

In addition, the through-holes 1310r formed in the main control board 1310 are provided with both normal lands and thermal lands that are connected to a solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) via a cross-shaped pattern.

As shown in Figure 365, in the main control board 1310 of this example, a through-hole 1310r with a thermal land is formed near a specific surface-mount type electronic component (chip component IC1 in this example) among the multiple surface-mount type electronic components mounted on the mounting surface 1310x. In this example, the through-hole 1310r with a thermal land is formed without any other electronic components being placed between it and the specific surface-mount type electronic component. Note that the through-hole 1310r is not limited to having thermal lands on both the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x side and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y side. It is also possible to have a thermal land on only one of the lands on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x side or the solder surface (back surface) 1310y side of the through-hole 1310r, and not on the other (a normal land is used). Furthermore, in this example, a thermal land is used for the land of the through-hole 1310r for mounting the lead-type capacitor MC1, but this is not limited to through-holes 1310r for mounting lead-type electronic components. A thermal land may also be used for at least one of the lands on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x side and the solder surface (back surface) 1310y side of through-holes 1310r where no lead-type electronic components are mounted.

Here, a thermal land is a land formed on a solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) by removing part of the copper foil surrounding the land to form a cross-shaped thermal pattern, thereby electrically connecting the solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) with a smaller contact area than a normal land. With a thermal land, heat is less likely to be transferred to the solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) than with a normal land, which suppresses temperature drops (heat dissipation) when soldering electronic components, and allows solder applied to the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310 via the through-hole 1310r to be reliably sucked up to the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310.

In other words, during the reflow process or flow process described above, the solder applied to the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310 is sucked up to the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310 by the through-holes 1310r having thermal lands, thereby increasing the rigidity of the main control board 1310 with the solder filled in the through-holes 1310r. This reduces bending and warping of the main control board 1310 and prevents surface-mounted electronic components from peeling off (detaching), improving the reliability of the pachinko machine 1. On the other hand, main-side boards located closer to the player than the main control board 1310, such as the function display board 1402 provided in the function display unit 1400, the magnetic sensor board provided in the magnetic sensor 1050, the sensor board for the first start hole sensor 3002 provided in the first start hole 2002, and the sensor board for the second start hole sensor 2401 provided in the second start hole 2004, do not have through-holes with thermal lands. Furthermore, through holes that do not have thermal lands, i.e., through holes that use normal lands without thermal patterns, may be formed on all or part of the main boards that are located closer to the player than the main control board 1310, such as the function display board 1402 provided on the function display unit 1400, the magnetic sensor board provided on the magnetic sensor 1050, the sensor board for the first start hole sensor 3002 provided on the first start hole 2002, and the sensor board for the second start hole sensor 2401 provided on the second start hole 2004. Through holes that use normal lands may not be formed on all or part of the main boards that are located closer to the player than the main control board 1310, such as the function display board 1402 provided on the function display unit 1400, the magnetic sensor board provided on the magnetic sensor 1050, the sensor board for the first start hole sensor 3002 provided on the first start hole 2002, and the sensor board for the second start hole sensor 2401 provided on the second start hole 2004.

Furthermore, during the reflow and flow processes described above, the solder that has been sucked up to the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310 is cooled and welded to the copper foil of the thermal land formed on the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310, preventing the solder welded in the through-hole 1310r from peeling off or shifting from the copper foil. This further increases the rigidity of the main control board 1310, prevents bending and warping of the main control board 1310, and prevents surface-mounted electronic components from peeling off (detachment), thereby improving the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.

In this example, through-hole 1310r with a thermal land is formed adjacent to a specific surface-mount type electronic component without placing any other electronic components between the specific surface-mount type electronic component. This increases the rigidity of the specific area of main control board 1310, including the area where the specific surface-mount type electronic component is mounted. This reduces bending and warping in the specific area of main control board 1310 and prevents the specific surface-mount type electronic component from peeling off (detaching from mounting), improving the reliability of pachinko machine 1.

In addition, in this example, through holes 1310r with thermal lands are formed in areas other than the vicinity of specific surface-mount electronic components. Specifically, through holes 1310r with thermal lands are formed near areas where lead-type electronic components are mounted (without placing other electronic components between the lead-type electronic components) and in areas where neither lead-type electronic components nor surface-mount electronic components are located nearby (non-mounted areas, unmounted areas). By forming through holes 1310r with thermal lands near lead-type electronic components without placing other electronic components between them, the rigidity of certain areas of the main control board 1310 can be further increased by both the lead-type electronic components and the thermal lands, and bending and warping in certain areas of the main control board 1310 can be suppressed.

Furthermore, by forming through holes 1310r with thermal lands in areas (non-mounted areas) where neither lead-type nor surface-mounted electronic components are located nearby, the rigidity of areas of the main control board 1310 that are not reinforced because no electronic components are mounted thereon can be increased, thereby suppressing bending and warping.

In addition, in this example, through holes 1310r with thermal lands are arranged across substantially the entire area of the main control board 1310. Specifically, at least one thermal land is formed in each area of the main control board 1310, which is divided into four equal parts by a vertical dividing line (vertical dividing line Y-Y in Figure 365) that bisects the longitudinal sides of the rectangular main control board 1310, and a horizontal dividing line (horizontal dividing line X-X in Figure 365) that bisects the lateral sides. This increases the rigidity across substantially the entire area of the main control board 1310, suppressing bending and warping and preventing surface-mounted electronic components from peeling off (detachment).

The number of through holes 1310r with thermal lands may be varied depending on the number of surface-mount type electronic components or specific surface-mount type electronic components mounted. For example, in areas of the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310 where a large number of surface-mount type electronic components or specific surface-mount type electronic components are mounted, more through holes 1310r with thermal lands may be formed than in areas where a small number of surface-mount type electronic components or specific surface-mount type electronic components are mounted, thereby increasing the rigidity of the main control board 1310.

Furthermore, both the lead-type electronic component and the through-hole 1310r having a thermal land may be arranged in close proximity to the surface-mount type electronic component (for example, by arranging the lead-type electronic component between the through-hole 1310r having a thermal land).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 365, a capacitor MC1 as a lead-type electronic component may be mounted without any other electronic components between it and a specific surface-mount type electronic component (chip component IC1 in this example), and a through-hole 1310r having a thermal land may be formed without any other electronic components between it and the specific surface-mount type electronic component, and the specific surface-mount type electronic component (chip component IC1 in this example) may be placed between the capacitor MC1 as a lead-type electronic component and the through-hole 1310r having a thermal land.

In this case, by placing a specific surface-mount type electronic component in an area where rigidity is further increased by the lead-type electronic component and the through-hole 1310r having a thermal land, it is possible to prevent the specific surface-mount type electronic component from peeling off (detaching from mounting).

The through-hole 1310r having a thermal land may be provided for mounting a lead-type electronic component (e.g., capacitor MC1), i.e., for mounting a lead-type electronic component (it may be one in which a lead-type electronic component is actually mounted, or it may be provided in an unmounted area where no lead-type electronic component is mounted), or it may not be provided for mounting a lead-type electronic component (one in which no lead-type electronic component is mounted and there is no possibility of mounting).

When lead-type electronic components are mounted on the boards, and lead-type electronic components are actually mounted on the boards, the lead-type electronic components are more firmly welded to the copper foil, thereby increasing the rigidity of the main control board 1310 and preventing surface-mounted electronic components from peeling off (peeling off from mounting), thereby improving the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, of the predetermined number of through holes 1310r (two for capacitor MC1) for mounting one lead-type electronic component (e.g., capacitor MC1), only some (one of the two for capacitor MC1) may be through holes 1310r with thermal lands, or all (all two for capacitor MC1) may be through holes 1310r with thermal lands.

Furthermore, with regard to the through holes 1310r provided for mounting some of the lead-type electronic components mounted on the main control board 1310, of the predetermined number (two for capacitor MC1) of through holes 1310r for mounting one lead-type electronic component (e.g., capacitor MC1), only some (one of the two for capacitor MC1) may be through holes 1310r with thermal lands, or all (all two for capacitor MC1) may be through holes 1310r with thermal lands.

[Prevention of peeling of surface-mounted electronic components 4]
In the above-described methods 1 to 3 for preventing peeling of surface-mounted electronic components, bending and warping of the main control board 1310 and the like are suppressed by mounting both surface-mounted electronic components and lead-type electronic components, thereby preventing the surface-mounted electronic components from peeling off (peeling off). However, instead of the lead-type electronic components, a reinforcing member may be provided to prevent the surface-mounted electronic components from peeling off (peeling off). This point will be explained below. Note that the following will not explain parts that overlap with the above-described embodiments.

Figure 370 is an explanatory diagram showing a reinforcing member 1316 that prevents surface-mounted electronic components from peeling off (separation). As shown in Figure 370, in the main control board 1310 of this example, the reinforcing member 1316 is positioned adjacent to the chip component IC1, which is an important electronic component, with the electronic component unmountable area A sandwiched between them. The reinforcing member 1316 is made of a conductive metal or alloy (in this example, metals such as iron, copper, or their alloys) and has a predetermined bending strength. Note that the reinforcing member 1316 may be positioned adjacent to the important electronic component (chip component IC1 in this example) with the electronic component unmountable area A, where no electronic component can be mounted, sandwiched between them (avoiding the electronic component unmountable area A). Through-holes, lands, vias, test points, and the like other than electronic components may also be provided as long as the reinforcing member 1316 and the important electronic component are positioned adjacent to each other without sandwiching other electronic components.

The reinforcing member 1316 has a U-shape, with its two legs inserted and soldered into through holes formed in a board such as the main control board 1310. By firmly welding the reinforcing member 1316 to the main control board 1310, the rigidity of boards such as the main control board 1310 is increased, suppressing deformation such as warping of boards such as the main control board 1310, thereby improving the reliability of the pachinko machine 1. Furthermore, when mounting surface-mounted electronic components, there is the advantage that the mounting density of the electronic components on the board can be increased and the wiring length (pattern length) on the board can be shortened, thereby increasing the circuit speed. However, the board is vulnerable to deformation, and there is a risk that the surface-mounted electronic components may peel off (detach). However, by using reinforcing member 1316 to improve the rigidity of the board on which surface-mounted electronic components are mounted, it is possible to increase the mounting density of the electronic components on the board and shorten the wiring length (pattern length) on the board, thereby increasing the circuit speed, while suppressing deformation of the board and preventing the surface-mounted electronic components from peeling off (detaching), thereby improving the reliability of pachinko machine 1.

In addition, at least one of the two through holes into which one end of the reinforcing member 1316 is inserted may be a thermal land connected to a solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) using a cross-shaped pattern. As described above, a thermal land makes it more difficult for heat to be transferred to the solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) compared to a normal land, suppressing temperature drops (heat dissipation) when soldering electronic components. Furthermore, the through hole can reliably suck up solder applied to the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310 to the mounting surface 1310x side of the main control board 1310, thereby strengthening the welding of the reinforcing member 1316. Furthermore, both of the two through holes into which the two ends of the reinforcing member 1316 are inserted may have thermal lands, or only one through hole may have a thermal land and the other through hole may have a normal land.

Also, as shown in Figure 371 (A), chip component IC1, which is a surface-mount type electronic component mounted on the main control board 1310, has its connection terminal IC1a soldered to pad 1310k (hatched portion in Figure 364 (A)) formed on the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310, and a reinforcing member 1316 is arranged adjacent to chip component IC1, which is a surface-mount type electronic component, across (avoiding) an electronic component unmountable area A where no electronic components can be mounted (as long as they are arranged adjacent to each other without sandwiching other electronic components, and through holes, lands 1310s, vias, test points, etc. other than electronic components may be provided). In this example, multiple pads 1310k are formed so as to be parallel to the longitudinal side of the main control board 1310 (horizontal when the main control board 1310 is installed in the pachinko machine 1), and by soldering each of the multiple connection terminals IC1a of chip component IC1 to the corresponding pads 1310k, the connection terminals IC1a of chip component IC1 are mounted so as to be parallel to the longitudinal side of the main control board 1310 (horizontal when the main control board 1310 is installed in the pachinko machine 1).

The reinforcing member 1316, which is positioned adjacent to the chip component IC1 (a surface-mount type electronic component) across the electronic component unmountable area A (avoiding the electronic component unmountable area A), where electronic components cannot be mounted, is made of iron, copper, or an alloy thereof (such as a CP wire made from copper-plated iron wire that is further tin-plated, or a tin-plated Cu wire), and has a predetermined bending strength. Specifically, by inserting the two legs of the reinforcing member 1316 into the through-hole 1310r and soldering the reinforcing member 1316 to the through-hole 1310r or the land 1310s, the rigidity of the main control board 1310 can be increased and deformation such as warping can be suppressed. Because iron has a higher bending strength than copper, it is preferable to use a reinforcing member 1316 made of iron or an iron alloy.

In this way, in this example, by mounting the reinforcing member 1316 adjacent to the surface-mounted electronic components in a specific direction across the electronic component unmountable area A (avoiding the electronic component unmountable area A) where electronic components cannot be mounted, the rigidity of the main control board 1310 can be partially increased, suppressing deformation such as warping in the area of the main control board 1310 where the surface-mounted electronic components are mounted, and preventing the surface-mounted electronic components from peeling off (detaching from the mounting).

In addition, in this example, the reinforcing member 1316 adjacent to chip component IC1, a surface-mount type electronic component, in a specific direction (for example, closer to the top, left, bottom, or right side of main control board 1310 than chip component IC1) across electronic component unmountable area A, where electronic components cannot be mounted (avoiding electronic component unmountable area A), is made taller than the surface-mount type electronic component (protruding more from mounting surface 1310x of main control board 1310). This prevents impacts from being applied from specific directions to chip component IC1, a surface-mount type electronic component, and prevents chip component IC1, a surface-mount type electronic component, from peeling off (detaching from mounting).

In addition, in this example, the straight line connecting the centers of the two through holes 1310r formed to mount the reinforcing member 1316 is formed so as to be approximately parallel to the short side of the main control board 1310 (the vertical direction when the main control board 1310 is installed in the pachinko machine 1), and the reinforcing member 1316 is positioned so as to be approximately parallel to the short side of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the reinforcing member 1316 inserted into this through hole 1310r and welded to the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310 can suppress bending or warping about a straight line (horizontal when the main control board 1310 is installed in the pachinko machine 1) parallel to the longitudinal side of the main control board 1310 (the combined longer side of the four sides of the main control board 1310). In addition, it can suppress direct lateral impacts on surface-mounted electronic components from the specific direction of the shorter side of the main control board 1310 on which the reinforcing member 1316 is mounted (the combined shorter side of the four sides of the main control board 1310), suppressing peeling off of surface-mounted electronic components and improving the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.

Traditionally, only lead-type electronic components were mounted on the main control board 1310, but in recent years, demand for lead-type electronic components has plummeted, resulting in many of them being discontinued. Furthermore, on conventional main control boards 1310 that only mount lead-type electronic components, the electronic components are larger than surface-mount electronic components, making it difficult to increase the mounting density of the electronic components. It is also difficult to shorten the wiring length (pattern length) on the board, making it difficult to increase the speed of the circuit.

The above problem can be solved by replacing all of the lead-type electronic components mounted on the conventional main control board 1310 with surface-mounted electronic components. However, if all of the electronic components mounted on the main control board 1310 are changed to surface-mounted electronic components, the surface-mounted electronic components will be vulnerable to deformation such as board warping, and there is a risk that they will peel off (detach from mounting). If such electronic component peeling (detachment) occurs, there is a risk that the reliability of the pachinko machine 1 will be reduced.

The main control board 1310 is an important board that controls the progress of the game, including the lottery for prize balls (such as the win determination process (step S305)). If electronic components were to peel off, it could cause harm to players and gaming facilities, making it difficult to achieve this while also improving packaging density using surface-mounted electronic components.

In this example of the pachinko machine 1, the lead-type electronic components previously mounted on the main control board 1310 have been changed to surface-mounted electronic components, but the main control board 1310 is reinforced by welding a reinforcing member 1316 to it, thereby increasing the rigidity of the main control board 1310 and suppressing deformation of the board such as warping, and preventing the surface-mounted electronic components from peeling off (detaching from the mounting).

The electronic components mounted on a board such as the main control board 1310 may include surface-mounted electronic components (surface-mounted electronic components) and a reinforcing member 1316, and in addition to these, lead-type electronic components (lead-type connectors, setting key switches 1311a, etc.) may also be mounted. In this case, in addition to improving the rigidity of the board with the reinforcing member 1316, the rigidity of the board can be further improved with the lead-type electronic components, thereby improving the reliability of the pachinko machine 1. In this case, a lead wire may also be used as the reinforcing member 1316.

In addition, in the above example, the reinforcing member 1316 is arranged on one of the two opposing side surfaces on which the connection terminal IC1a is not formed among the four side surfaces of the chip component IC1 as a surface-mount type electronic component, but this is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 371(B), the reinforcing member 1316 may be arranged on one of the two opposing side surfaces on which the connection terminal IC1a is formed among the four side surfaces of the chip component IC1 as a surface-mount type electronic component, or as shown in FIG. 371(C), the reinforcing member 1316 may be arranged on each of the two opposing side surfaces on which the connection terminal IC1a is not formed among the four side surfaces of the chip component IC1 as a surface-mount type electronic component, or as shown in FIG. 371(D), the reinforcing member 1316 may be arranged on each of the two opposing side surfaces on which the connection terminal IC1a is formed among the four side surfaces of the chip component IC1 as a surface-mount type electronic component. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 371(E), the reinforcing member 1316 may be arranged on one of two opposing side surfaces on which the connection terminal IC1a is not formed among the four side surfaces of the chip part IC1 as a surface-mount type electronic component, or, although not shown, one reinforcing member 1316 may be arranged on each of two opposing side surfaces on which the connection terminal IC1a is not formed among the four side surfaces of the chip part IC1 as a surface-mount type electronic component, or, although not shown, one reinforcing member 1316 may be arranged on each of two opposing side surfaces on which the connection terminal IC1a is not formed among the four side surfaces of the chip part IC1 as a surface-mount type electronic component, or, although not shown, two reinforcing members 1316 may be arranged on each of two opposing side surfaces on which the connection terminal IC1a is not formed among the four side surfaces of the chip part IC1 as a surface-mount type electronic component. In these cases, bending and warping of the main control board 1310 can be suppressed, and impacts from specific directions can be prevented from being applied to surface-mounted electronic components, preventing the surface-mounted electronic components from peeling off (detaching). Furthermore, when lead-type electronic components are arranged on two opposing side surfaces of a surface-mounted electronic component, bending and warping of the main control board 1310 can be suppressed more effectively than when lead-type electronic components are arranged on only one side surface. Furthermore, by protecting the surface-mounted electronic components from two directions, impacts can be prevented from being applied, making it possible to more effectively prevent the surface-mounted electronic components from peeling off (detaching).

The circuit board may also include a combination of one or more of the circuit boards shown in FIG. 371(A), FIG. 371(B), FIG. 371(C), FIG. 371(D), FIG. 371(E), and a circuit board (not shown) in which one reinforcing member 1316 is disposed on each of two opposing side surfaces on which connection terminals IC1a are not formed, out of the four side surfaces of chip component IC1 as a surface-mounted electronic component. In this case, the rigidity of the main control board 1310 can be partially increased by appropriately selecting and arranging the reinforcing members 1316 depending on the importance of the surface-mounted electronic components to be mounted, their susceptibility to peeling (detachment), their susceptibility to warping, etc., and thereby preventing the surface-mounted electronic components from peeling (detachment).

Furthermore, a combination of specific surface-mounted electronic components (e.g., ICs) as important electronic components and reinforcing member 1316 may be arranged over substantially the entire area of main control board 1310. In this case, bending and warping can be suppressed over substantially the entire area of main control board 1310, and peeling off (detachment) of surface-mounted electronic components can be suppressed. In other words, the combination of specific surface-mounted electronic components (e.g., ICs) as important electronic components and reinforcing member 1316 is not limited to being arranged on a portion of mounting surface 1310x of main control board 1310, but may be arranged over substantially the entire area of mounting surface 1310x of main control board 1310 (not limited to being arranged regularly, but may also be arranged irregularly). For example, at least one combination of a specific surface-mounted electronic component (e.g., an IC) and a reinforcing member 1316 is arranged in each region of the mounting surface 1310x (e.g., a left region and a right region of the main control board 1310 bisected by the vertical dividing line Y-Y in FIG. 365) partitioned by dividing the longitudinal side of the main control board 1310 into n equal parts (n=approximately 2 to 8), or the longitudinal side of the main control board 1310 is divided into n equal parts (n=approximately 2 to 8) and the short side is divided into m equal parts (m=approximately 2 to 4). By arranging at least one combination of a specific surface-mounted electronic component (e.g., IC) and reinforcing member 1316 in each region of mounting surface 1310x partitioned by a vertical dividing line Y-Y and a horizontal dividing line X-X in FIG. 365 (for example, each region of main control board 1310 divided into four equal parts by vertical dividing line Y-Y and horizontal dividing line X-X in FIG. 365), it is possible to arrange combinations of specific surface-mounted electronic components (e.g., ICs) and reinforcing member 1316 over substantially the entire area of mounting surface 1310x of main control board 1310. This not only makes it possible to suppress peeling (mounting peeling) of specific surface-mounted electronic components (e.g., ICs), but also suppresses deformation such as warping over substantially the entire area of main control board 1310, making it possible to suppress peeling (mounting peeling) of surface-mounted electronic components other than the specific surface-mounted electronic component (e.g., ICs), thereby further improving the reliability of pachinko machine 1. Furthermore, because the main control board 1310 in this example has a horizontally elongated rectangular shape, the division lines dividing the longitudinal sides of the main control board 1310 are perpendicular to the division lines dividing the lateral sides, and the division lines divide the main control board 1310 into multiple rectangular regions.

Furthermore, the reinforcing member 1316 may be disposed over substantially the entire area of the main control board 1310, which makes it possible to suppress bending and warping over substantially the entire area of the main control board 1310 and prevent surface-mounted electronic components from peeling off (detaching). That is, the reinforcing member 1316 is not limited to being disposed adjacent to a specific surface-mounted electronic component (e.g., an IC) as an important electronic component, across an electronic component unmountable area A where the electronic component cannot be mounted (avoiding the electronic component unmountable area A). Alternatively, the reinforcing member 1316 may be disposed alone over substantially the entire area of the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310, or a combination of the reinforcing member 1316 disposed adjacent to the specific surface-mounted electronic component across an electronic component unmountable area A where the electronic component cannot be mounted (avoiding the electronic component unmountable area A) and the reinforcing member 1316 disposed alone may be disposed over substantially the entire area of the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310. For example, at least one reinforcing member 1316 may be placed in each region of the mounting surface 1310x partitioned by dividing the longitudinal side of the main control board 1310 into n equal parts (n = approximately 2 to 8) (for example, the left and right regions of the main control board 1310 divided into two equal parts by the vertical dividing line Y-Y in FIG. 365), or at least one reinforcing member 1316 may be placed in each region of the mounting surface 1310x partitioned by dividing the longitudinal side of the main control board 1310 into n equal parts (n = approximately 2 to 8) and the short side into m equal parts (m = approximately 2 to 4) (for example, each region of the main control board 1310 divided into four equal parts by the vertical dividing line Y-Y and the horizontal dividing line X-X in FIG. 365), so that the reinforcing member 1316 is placed over almost the entire mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310. In this way, by arranging the reinforcing member 1316 over substantially the entire area of the main control board 1310, the rigidity of the main control board 1310 is increased, suppressing deformation of the board such as bending or warping, and preventing certain surface-mounted electronic components from peeling off (detachment).

Even if the reinforcing members 1316 or a combination of specific surface-mounted electronic components (e.g., ICs) as important electronic components and the reinforcing members 1316 are arranged over substantially the entire mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310, the reinforcing members 1316 or a combination of specific surface-mounted electronic components (e.g., ICs) as important electronic components and the reinforcing members 1316 may not be mounted in areas of each partitioned mounting surface 1310x where no surface-mounted electronic components are mounted at all.

In addition, in the example shown in Figure 371, the spacing (which may be the spacing between the outermost edges of the lands 1310s or the spacing between the centers of the through holes 1310r) between the two through holes 1310r into which each of the two legs of the reinforcing member 1316 is inserted is set to a distance that allows adjacent surface-mount type electronic components to be accommodated across the electronic component unmountable area A (avoiding the electronic component unmountable area A) where no electronic components can be mounted (a spacing that is approximately the same as the external shape (width of the short side) of the main body excluding the connection terminal IC1a of the surface-mount type electronic component, or wider than the external shape (width of the short side) of the main body excluding the connection terminal IC1a). As a result, all surface-mounted electronic components are placed within the area whose rigidity is increased by the reinforcing member 1316, which makes it possible to suppress deformation such as warping in all areas of the main control board 1310 where surface-mounted electronic components are mounted (areas where surface-mounted electronic components are placed). Furthermore, since the reinforcing member 1316 prevents impacts from specific directions and prevents impacts from being applied to surface-mounted electronic components, it is possible to prevent surface-mounted electronic components from peeling off (detachment from mounting).

In this case, two through holes 1310r may be formed approximately on the extensions of the pads 1310k to which a pair of connection terminals IC1a formed along the opposing longitudinal sides of chip component IC1 are soldered, and the legs of reinforcing member 1316 may be inserted into each of these two through holes 1310r and welded to the mounting surface 1310x of main control board 1310. In this case, when reinforcing member 1316 is used to suppress bending or warping about a straight line parallel to the longitudinal sides of main control board 1310, the force applied to connection terminals IC1a of chip component IC1 can be suppressed by reinforcing member 1316, preventing surface-mounted electronic components from peeling off (detachment), thereby improving the reliability of the gaming machine. The through holes 1310r may be formed so that portions of the lands 1310s of the two through holes 1310r overlap approximately on the extension lines of each of the pads 1310k, or the upper and lower pads 1310k may be formed so that they fit within the space between the two through holes 1310 (the two through holes 1310 are formed outside the approximate extension lines of each of the pads 1310k). In this case as well, the force applied to the connection terminal IC1a of the chip component IC1 can be suppressed by the reinforcing member 1316, preventing surface-mounted electronic components from peeling off (detachment), thereby improving the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the spacing between the two through holes 1310r (including the lands 1310s) into which each of the two legs of the reinforcing member 1316 is inserted (which may be the spacing between the outermost edges of the lands 1310s or the spacing between the centers of the through holes 1310r) may be approximately the same as the spacing in the short direction between the IC1 body and a pair of connection terminals IC1a arranged along each of a pair of longitudinal sides facing each other across the body of the chip component IC1. Furthermore, the spacing in the short direction across the body of chip part IC1 between a set of connection terminals IC1a provided along each of a pair of opposing long sides of chip part IC1 may be the spacing between ends of a set of pads 1310k closer to the body of chip part IC1 (inside of a set of pads 1310k) to which a set of connection terminals IC1a provided along each of a pair of opposing long sides across the body of chip part IC1 are connected, or it may be the spacing between ends of a set of pads 1310k farther from the body of chip part IC1 (outside of a set of pads 1310k). In other words, it may be the spacing at any position between the ends of a set of pads 1310k closer to the body of chip part IC1 (inside of a set of pads 1310k) and the ends farther from the body of chip part IC1 (outside of a set of pads 1310k).

Furthermore, by forming each of the two legs of the reinforcing member 1316 into a crank shape with two or more bends, the spacing between the lands 1310s of the two through holes 1310r into which the reinforcing member 1316 is inserted can be set to a distance sufficient to accommodate adjacent surface-mount electronic components (avoiding the electronic component mountable area A) where electronic components cannot be mounted (a spacing approximately the same as the external dimensions (width of the short sides) of the main body excluding the connection terminal IC1a of the surface-mount electronic component, or wider than the external dimensions (width of the short sides) of the main body excluding the connection terminal IC1a). Furthermore, by configuring each of the two legs of the reinforcing member 1316 to have two or more bends, the bending strength of the reinforcing member 1316 is increased, thereby further increasing the rigidity of boards such as the main control board 1310, suppressing deformation such as warping, and further improving the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.

While the above example shows a reinforcing member 1316 having two legs integrally formed, the reinforcing member 1316 may alternatively be formed from two separate legs and a separate component (e.g., a surface-mount electronic component (chip component)), with one end of each leg welded to the separate component by solder or other means. By forming the reinforcing member 1316 from two legs made of iron, copper, or an alloy thereof (e.g., CP wire made of copper-plated iron wire further plated with tin, or tin-plated Cu wire) and a component with higher bending strength than the legs, the bending strength of the reinforcing member 1316 can be increased compared to a case where only the reinforcing member 1316 is provided, and the reinforcing member 1316 can suppress the force applied to the connection terminal IC1a of the chip component IC1, thereby preventing the surface-mount electronic component from peeling off (detaching from the mounting). This improves the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, when the reinforcing member 1316 is constructed from two separate legs and another component (such as a surface-mounted electronic component (chip component)), and one end of each of the two legs is welded to the other component using solder or the like, each of the two separate legs may be formed into a crank shape with two or more bent portions. By configuring each of the two legs of reinforcing member 1316 to have two or more bends, the bending strength of the two legs, which are made of iron, copper, or an alloy thereof (such as a CP wire made of copper-plated iron wire that is further plated with tin, or a tin-plated Cu wire), is increased. In addition, compared to a case where only reinforcing member 1316 made of iron, copper, or an alloy thereof (such as a CP wire made of copper-plated iron wire that is further plated with tin, or a tin-plated Cu wire), the bending strength of reinforcing member 1316 can be increased by using a component with a higher bending strength than the legs. This reduces the force applied to connection terminal IC1a of chip component IC1 by reinforcing member 1316, preventing surface-mounted electronic components from peeling off (detaching from the mounting). This improves the reliability of pachinko machine 1.

In addition, when reinforcing member 1316 is configured with two separate legs and a separate component (e.g., a surface-mount electronic component (chip component)), and one end of each of the two legs is welded to the separate component by soldering or other means, the separate component may be a surface-mount electronic component (chip component). In this case, the two separate legs of reinforcing member 1316 may be made conductive by being made of iron, copper, or an alloy thereof (e.g., CP wire, which is copper-plated iron wire further plated with tin, or tin-plated Cu wire), and the two separate legs of reinforcing member 1316 may function as lead terminals. In this case, the separate surface-mount electronic component (chip component) may be, for example, the surface-mount chip capacitor MC1' described above, or a diode or resistor. In this case, the electrode MC1a' of chip capacitor MC1', to which the two legs of reinforcing member 1316 are soldered, may be configured in a manner similar to Improvement in Tamper Detection 3. For example, the reinforcing member 1316 may be configured so that the two legs of the reinforcing member 1316 are arranged along a portion of the electrode MC1a' of the chip capacitor MC1' as a surface-mount type electronic component that constitutes part of the widest surface of the chip capacitor MC1', and one end of each of the two legs of the reinforcing member 1316 is welded to the electrode MC1a' by solder or the like; or the reinforcing member 1316 may be configured so that the two legs of the reinforcing member 1316 are arranged along a portion of the electrode MC1a' of the chip capacitor MC1' as a surface-mount type electronic component that constitutes part of the narrowest surface that is adjacent to the widest surface of the chip capacitor MC1' and is perpendicular to the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and one end of each of the two legs of the reinforcing member 1316 is welded to the electrode MC1a' by solder or the like. Furthermore, by arranging the two legs of the reinforcing member 1316 so that they align with the electrode MC1a' of the chip capacitor MC1' and welding one end of each of the two legs of the reinforcing member 1316 to the electrode MC1a' with solder or the like, the contact area between the legs of the reinforcing member 1316 and the electrode MC1a' of the chip capacitor MC1' is increased, and the welding between the legs of the reinforcing member 1316 and the electrode MC1a' of the chip capacitor MC1' is strengthened, making it less likely that the legs of the reinforcing member 1316 will come off the electrode MC1a' of the chip capacitor MC1'. This further increases the rigidity of the board.

Furthermore, by welding two legs of the reinforcing member 1316 to each of the two electrodes MC1a' of the chip capacitor MC1' as a surface-mount type electronic component and soldering the reinforcing member 1316 to the through-hole 1310r, the spacing between the two legs of the reinforcing member 1316 may be made wider than the spacing between the two electrodes MC1a' of the chip capacitor MC1'. For example, among the electrodes MC1a' of the chip capacitor MC1' as a surface-mount type electronic component, the one adjacent to the widest surface of the chip capacitor MC1' and With the two legs of the reinforcing member 1316 arranged along a portion that forms part of the narrowest surface that is perpendicular to the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, one end of each of the two legs of the reinforcing member 1316 can be welded to the electrode MC1a' using solder or the like, and the reinforcing member 1316 can be positioned adjacent to a specific surface-mounted electronic component (e.g., an IC) that is an important electronic component, across an electronic component mountable area A where the electronic component cannot be mounted (while avoiding the electronic component mountable area A).

In this case, as in Figure 371(A), two legs of the reinforcing member 1316 may be welded to each of the two electrodes MC1a' of the chip capacitor MC1' so that the short sides of the specific surface-mount electronic component (e.g., IC1) serving as the important electronic component and the long sides of the chip capacitor MC1' serving as the surface-mount type electronic component are approximately parallel, and the reinforcing member 1316 may then be soldered to the through-hole 1310r. Alternatively, as in Figure 371(B), two legs of the reinforcing member 1316 may be welded to each of the two electrodes MC1a' of the chip capacitor MC1' so that the long sides of the specific surface-mount electronic component (e.g., IC1) serving as the important electronic component and the long sides of the chip capacitor MC1' serving as the surface-mount type electronic component are approximately parallel, and the reinforcing member 1316 may then be soldered to the through-hole 1310r.

This allows the area of the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310 sandwiched between the two legs of the reinforcing member 1316 to be wider than when chip capacitor MC1' is mounted alone on the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310. This increases the rigidity of the area sandwiched between the two legs of the reinforcing member 1316 and the surrounding area. This reduces deformation such as warping of the main control board 1310 and prevents specific surface-mounted electronic components (e.g., IC1) located adjacent to the area sandwiched between the two legs of the reinforcing member 1316 from peeling off (detaching from their mounting), further improving the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, if the spacing between the two legs of the reinforcing member 1316 is to be wider than the spacing between the two electrodes MC1a' of the chip capacitor MC1', the two legs of the reinforcing member 1316 may be arranged along the portion of the electrode MC1a' of the chip capacitor MC1', which is a surface-mount type electronic component, that forms part of the narrowest surface adjacent to the widest surface of the chip capacitor MC1' and that is perpendicular to the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and one end of each of the two legs of the reinforcing member 1316 may be welded to the electrode MC1a' with solder or the like, or alternatively, the spacing between the two legs of the reinforcing member 1316 may be widened by forming each of the two legs of the reinforcing member 1316 into a crank shape having two or more bent portions. In this case, in addition to being able to widen the gap between the two legs of the reinforcing member 1316, the bending strength of the reinforcing member 1316 is increased, which further increases the rigidity of boards such as the main control board 1310, suppressing deformation such as warping and further improving the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, as a surface-mount type electronic component (chip component) for the separate component constituting the reinforcing member 1316, when the lead-type electronic component mounted on the main control board 1310 is changed to a surface-mount type, it is possible to use the smallest electronic component (e.g., a capacitor or resistor) among the surface-mount type electronic components mounted on the main control board 1310, a relatively small-sized electronic component among the surface-mount type electronic components mounted on the main control board 1310 (an electronic component smaller than the average size of the surface-mount type electronic components mounted on the main control board 1310), or an electronic component with a small number of connection terminals (e.g., a chip capacitor MC1' or resistor having an electrode MC1a' that is fewer than the connection terminal IC1a of IC1). That is, the smaller the size (volume, capacity, or surface area) of a surface-mounted electronic component, the smaller the area of the electrodes (pads) soldered to the board, and therefore the more likely it is to peel off (become delaminated) if the board is deformed, such as warping. Therefore, by using the smallest electronic components or relatively small electronic components among the surface-mounted electronic components mounted on main control board 1310 (electronic components smaller than the average size of surface-mounted electronic components mounted on main control board 1310) as part of reinforcing member 1316, it is possible to suppress deformation of the board, such as warping, and also to protect electronic components that are more likely to peel off (become delaminated) if the board is deformed.

As described above, surface-mount electronic components are arranged so that their widest surfaces are horizontal to the board by soldering electrodes to pads on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. However, when surface-mount electronic components (chip components) are used as separate components constituting the reinforcing member 1316, the widest surfaces of the surface-mount electronic components may be arranged so that they are perpendicular to the board when the reinforcing member 1316 is attached. This configuration increases the contact area between the legs of the reinforcing member 1316 and the electrodes of the surface-mount electronic components, strengthening the welding between the legs of the reinforcing member 1316 and the electrodes of the surface-mount electronic components. It also makes it possible to change the surface of the surface-mount electronic components facing the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 to a surface with a smaller area, thereby increasing the mounting density and shortening the wiring pattern, thereby enabling faster circuitry.

Furthermore, when reinforcing member 1316 is configured with two separate legs and a separate component (e.g., a surface-mount electronic component (chip component)), and one end of each of the two legs is welded to the separate component using solder or the like, at least the separate component and one end of the two legs of reinforcing member 1316 that is welded to the separate component may be molded with resin (e.g., epoxy resin) or the like (the resin electrically insulates and seals chip capacitor MC1' from the outside). Covering one end of the two legs of reinforcing member 1316 that is welded to the separate component with resin or the like protects the welded portion of the two legs of reinforcing member 1316 and prevents tampering or fraud at the welded portion, and the weld between the separate component and the two legs of reinforcing member 1316 can be reinforced with resin or the like. Additionally, by using molding to completely cover other components such as surface-mounted electronic components (chip components), it becomes difficult to distinguish them from lead-type electronic components, making it difficult for surface-mounted electronic components (chip components) and other components to be physically destroyed by tampering or fraud.

Furthermore, the surface-mount type electronic component (chip component) that constitutes the reinforcing member 1316 may not have a printed portion formed on its surface. In other words, if a surface-mount type electronic component with a small surface area is used as the separate component that constitutes the reinforcing member 1316, it would be difficult to form a printed portion. In this case, at least the separate component and the portions of the two legs of the reinforcing member 1316 that are welded to the separate component may be molded with resin (epoxy resin, etc.), and a printed portion may be formed on the curved surface of a rugby ball formed by the resin (epoxy resin, etc.) that surrounds the separate component. In this case, the printed portion may be formed on the surface of the resin portion that corresponds to the surface of the surface-mount type electronic component (chip component) that is perpendicular to the substrate. In this case, by arranging the widest surface of the surface-mounted electronic component so that it is perpendicular to the board when the reinforcing member 1316 is attached, the printed portion can be made difficult to see even when the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is viewed from directly above (from the front).The printed portion is difficult to see when viewed perpendicular to the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, but is easy to see when viewed horizontally to the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310.This makes it difficult for fraudulent persons to see the printed portion, and the inability to identify the electronic component increases the deterrent effect against mischief and the like.

Furthermore, it is sufficient that surface-mounted electronic components (surface-mounted electronic components) and reinforcing members 1316 are mounted on a board such as the main control board 1310, and in addition to these, lead-type electronic components (lead-type connectors, setting key switches 1311a, etc.) may also be mounted. In this case, in addition to improving the rigidity of the board with the reinforcing members 1316, the rigidity of the board can be further improved with the lead-type electronic components, further improving the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.

For example, the reinforcing member 1316 and a lead-type electronic component (such as a lead-type connector or setting key switch 1311a) may be arranged so that they overlap a perpendicular line to one side of the board, and a surface-mounted electronic component may be arranged between the reinforcing member 1316 and the lead-type electronic component so that the perpendicular line overlaps. In this case, the rigidity of the board between the reinforcing member 1316 and the lead-type electronic component can be increased to prevent bending and warping, and surface-mounted electronic components located in this area of increased rigidity can be prevented from peeling off (detachment from mounting).

Furthermore, as with Prevention of Peeling of Surface-Mounted Electronic Components 1, the reinforcing member 1316 may be placed over substantially the entire area of the main control board 1310. In this case, it is possible to prevent bending and warping over substantially the entire area of the main control board 1310, thereby preventing surface-mounted electronic components from peeling off (detachment).

Note that Surface Mount Electronic Component Peel Prevention 4 can be used in combination with the above-mentioned Surface Mount Electronic Component Peel Prevention 1 to Surface Mount Electronic Component Peel Prevention 3, and can achieve the same effects when used under the same conditions as the above-mentioned Surface Mount Electronic Component Peel Prevention 1. In other words, the part that corresponds to capacitor MC1 in Surface Mount Electronic Component Peel Prevention 1 to Surface Mount Electronic Component Peel Prevention 3 can be read as reinforcing member 1316.

In addition, the above-mentioned Prevention of Peeling of Surface-Mounted Electronic Components 1 to Prevention of Peeling of Surface-Mounted Electronic Components 4 mainly described electronic components mounted on the main control board 1310, but this is not limited to the main control board 1310; it can also be applied to any board on which surface-mounted electronic components are mounted, such as the dispensing control board 633 or peripheral control board 1510.

[Main side board]
Next, we will explain main boards that perform important control related to the progress of the game, such as main boards (in this example, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, but other boards may be added depending on the functions of the gaming machine, or some boards (for example, the payout control board 633) may be changed to other boards), boards equipped with LEDs that are directly controlled by signals output by the main board (for example, the function display board 1402), and boards equipped with sensors that output detection signals to the main board (for example, the magnetic sensor board 1050 built into the magnetic sensor 1050, the vibration sensor board built into the vibration sensor, etc.). Note that the following will not explain parts that overlap with the above-mentioned embodiments.

In the main board of this embodiment, the main control board 1310, payout control board 633, etc. are mounted on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 with their front mounting surfaces (mounting surface (front) 1310x on which the electronic components of the main control board 1310 are mounted, and mounting surface (front) on which the electronic components of the payout control board 633 are mounted) facing away from the player and are not visible to the player (they are accessible from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and inaccessible from the front side of the pachinko machine 1), whereas these boards Main boards that are located closer to the player than the board, such as the function display board 1402 located in the function display unit 1400, the magnetic sensor board located in the magnetic sensor 1050, the sensor board of the first start hole sensor 3002 located in the first start hole 2002, and the sensor board of the second start hole sensor 2401 located in the second start hole 2004 (which are accessible from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 but not from the back side of the pachinko machine 1), may be visible to the player. The term "front mounting surface" refers to the surface of a board installed in a device or equipment on which electronic components are mounted to realize predetermined functions. For example, on the functional display board 1402, it refers to the surface on which the LED 1401 is mounted, on the magnetic sensor board installed in the magnetic sensor 1050, it refers to the surface on which ICs etc. are mounted, on the sensor board of the first starting port sensor 3002 installed in the first starting port 2002, it refers to the surface on which ICs etc. are mounted, and on the sensor board of the second starting port sensor 2401 installed in the second starting port 2004, it refers to the surface on which ICs etc. are mounted.

Furthermore, devices and equipment such as the function display unit 1400, magnetic sensor 1050, first starting hole 2002, and second starting hole 2004 may be partially visible to the player, or may be embedded in the transparent gaming board 5 to be visible, or may be located on the rear side of the transparent gaming board 5 to be visible through a hole formed in the opaque gaming board 5, or may be located on the rear side of the opaque gaming board 5 to make it difficult to see from the player.

Furthermore, the functional display board 1402 provided on the functional display unit 1400 (whose front mounting surface does not face away from the player) provided on the front side of the game board 5, the magnetic sensor board provided on the magnetic sensor 1050, the sensor board of the first start hole sensor 3002 provided on the first start hole 2002, and the sensor board of the second start hole sensor 2401 provided on the second start hole 2004, etc., are not limited to having their mounting surfaces (surfaces) facing towards the player, but may also be oriented in a direction other than the side opposite the player (for example, either left/right or up/down directions of the pachinko machine 1).

For example, by mounting the board on the pachinko machine 1 so that an end surface (the surface of the base material between the front and rear mounting surfaces) that is different from the front and rear mounting surfaces faces the player, neither the front nor rear mounting surfaces of the board face the player, making it difficult to read the electronic components and circuit information mounted on the board. Furthermore, the end surface of the board corresponds to the thickness of the board, and a typical board is about 1.6 mm thick, so by positioning the end surface of the board facing the player, the presence of the board itself becomes less noticeable.

Specifically, if the front and back mounting surfaces of the magnetic sensor board provided in the magnetic sensor 1050 are arranged vertically so that they face the left and right of the pachinko machine 1, respectively, with the end surfaces facing the player, or if the front and back mounting surfaces of the magnetic sensor board are arranged horizontally so that they face the top and bottom of the pachinko machine 1, respectively, with the end surfaces facing the player, the front and back mounting surfaces of the magnetic sensor board will be difficult for the player to see, and even if the end surfaces of the magnetic sensor board are easily visible, they are extremely thin at around 1.6 mm, so the presence of the magnetic sensor board itself will be difficult to notice.

In this way, the functional display board 1402 provided on the functional display unit 1400 provided on the front side of the gaming board 5, the magnetic sensor board provided on the magnetic sensor 1050, the sensor board of the first start hole sensor 3002 provided on the first start hole 2002, and the sensor board of the second start hole sensor 2401 provided on the second start hole 2004 can be arranged so that the edge of the board faces towards the player, thereby concealing the existence of the board itself, and this configuration can be used to prevent pranks and fraud.

Furthermore, as described above, in this example, the main control board 1310, which is mounted on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 with its front mounting surface (the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x on which the electronic components of the main control board 1310 are mounted) facing away from the player and on which surface-mounted electronic components are mounted, can adopt one or more (or all) of the above-mentioned configurations 1 to 3 for preventing the surface-mounted electronic components from peeling off, or can be housed in a main control board box 1320 having multiple sealing mechanisms so that the electronic components mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 cannot be touched unless the sealing mechanisms are released, thereby increasing the rigidity of the main control board 1310 and preventing the surface-mounted electronic components from peeling off (peeling off). The main control board 1310 is located on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and the main control board box 1320 in which the main control board 1310 is housed can only be accessed by opening the main body frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2, so the main control board 1310 is reinforced to a degree that can prevent deformation such as warping due to deterioration over time.

On the other hand, main boards that are located closer to the player than the main control board 1310 and payout control board 633, such as the function display board 1402 located in the function display unit 1400, the magnetic sensor board located in the magnetic sensor 1050, the sensor board for the first start hole sensor 3002 located in the first start hole 2002, and the sensor board for the second start hole sensor 2401 located in the second start hole 2004, are provided with stronger reinforcement against deformation such as warping of the board compared to the main control board 1310, since they are located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 and there is a possibility of tampering with the front mounting surface of the board. The following explanation will use the function display board 1402 located in the function display unit 1400 as an example. Note that the following explanation will not cover parts that overlap with the above-mentioned embodiment.

[Function display board]
The function display board 1402 is a main board that is provided closer to the player than the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, etc., and has important functions. In this example, main boards that are provided closer to the player than the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, etc., and that have important functions include boards that display information related to the player's profits (for example, special lottery results, the type of jackpot or small jackpot, whether or not a specific jackpot has been won (such as a variable jackpot or a 15R jackpot), whether or not high probability control is being executed, whether or not time-saving control is being executed, etc.), boards that display information related to the profits of the player or the gaming parlor, boards that display important information related to the progress of the game, boards that detect fraudulent activity, boards that detect winning at a prize slot or passing through gate 2003, etc.

The functional display unit 1400 having the functional display substrate 1402 is located outside the play area 5a of the playboard 5 (outside the outer rail 1001) (in this example, in the upper left corner of the playboard 5). Furthermore, multiple monochromatic (red in this example) LEDs 1401 are mounted on the front mounting surface of the functional display substrate 1402. These LEDs 1401 are bare LED chips enclosed in LED packages and are directly mounted on the front mounting surface (LED mounting surface) of the functional display substrate 1402. Therefore, if a wire or other object is inserted into the playboard 5, it can easily reach the functional display substrate 1402, which is located outside the play area 5a. If the multiple LEDs 1401 mounted on the front mounting surface of the functional display substrate 1402 are tampered with using this wire or other object, or if pressure is applied to the functional display substrate 1402, causing deformation such as warping, the LEDs 1401 may peel off from the front mounting surface of the functional display substrate 1402, potentially preventing the proper display of information related to the player's interests. In this example, the functional display unit 1400 has measures in place to prevent the LED 1401 from peeling off.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 361, in this example, the functional display substrate 1402 is housed in a case 1410 formed of a colored, opaque (white in this example) resin or the like that does not have any translucency, and the mounting surface of the functional display substrate 1402 is not visible except through a through-hole 1410a formed in the case 1410 and an opening for exposing part of the connector 1402. The case 1410 is composed of a front cover 1411 on the front mounting surface side of the functional display substrate 1402 and a back cover 1412 on the back mounting surface side of the functional display substrate 1402, and the front cover 1411 covers the front mounting surface of the functional display substrate 1402, and the back cover 1412 covers the back mounting surface of the functional display substrate 1402, so that the functional display substrate 1402 is housed inside the case 1410 in a sandwiched (clamped) relationship between the front cover 1411 and the back cover 1412. It is sufficient that the case 1410 is configured so that at least the front mounting surface of the functional display substrate 1402 cannot be seen from outside the case 1410; the case 1410 may be configured to cover only the front mounting surface of the functional display substrate 1402, with the back mounting surface of the functional display substrate 1402 being visible from outside the case 1410.

The surface cover portion 1411 has a predetermined thickness (approximately 5 mm in this example) and has multiple ribs formed on the inside to form multiple honeycomb-shaped through-holes 1410a. The through-holes 1410a formed by the multiple ribs correspond to each of the LEDs 1401 mounted on the functional display board 1402. When manufacturing the functional display unit 1400, the surface cover portion 1411 is brought into close contact with the front mounting surface of the functional display board 1402 so that only one LED (one LED element) of the multiple LEDs 1401 mounted on the functional display board 1402 is positioned in each of the through-holes 1410a formed in the surface cover portion 1411, and the surface cover portion 1411 and back cover portion 1412 are fixed together without the use of screws or bolts.

In this way, in this example, the front cover portion 1411 is tightly attached to the front mounting surface of the functional display substrate 1402, and the front cover portion 1411 and the back cover portion 1412 are fixed together without the use of screws or bolts, etc., so that deformation such as warping of the functional display substrate 1402 is suppressed by the front cover portion 1411 and the back cover portion 1412, preventing the LEDs 1401 from peeling off from the front mounting surface of the functional display substrate 1402. Furthermore, in this example, multiple ribs are formed on the inside of the front cover portion 1411, and the front cover portion 1411 and the back cover portion 1412 are fixed together without the use of screws or bolts, with these ribs in close proximity to the front mounting surface of the functional display substrate 1402 (the ribs may be partially or completely abutting), preventing deformation such as warping of the functional display substrate 1402, preventing the LEDs 1401 from peeling off from the front mounting surface of the functional display substrate 1402.

In addition, an opening is formed in a portion of the rear cover 1412, which covers the rear mounting surface of the functional display board 1402 on which the LEDs 1401 are not mounted, to expose the connector 1402. Because the connector 1402 connects the wiring that connects the functional display board 1402 to an external board, it is necessary to expose the connector 1402 from the case 1410. However, exposing the connector 1402 exposes part of the functional display board 1402, which could lead to tampering. In this example, the connector 1402 is mounted on the rear mounting surface of the functional display board 1402, which is positioned facing away from the player and on which the LEDs 1401 are not mounted. Therefore, even if a wire or the like is inserted into the gaming board 5, it is difficult to make contact with the rear mounting surface of the functional display board 1402. This prevents the power supply to each LED 1401 on the functional display board 1402 and the control signal from the main control board 1310 from being interrupted, thereby preventing the occurrence of malfunctions such as important information related to the player's interests not being displayed.

In addition, in this example, the front cover portion 1411 and the back cover portion 1412 of the case 1410 are firmly fixed by welding or the like, so that the function display board 1402 cannot be removed from the case 1410 unless at least a portion of the case 1410 is destroyed. As mentioned above, the main control board box 1320 is equipped with multiple sealing mechanisms, and after destroying one of the multiple sealing mechanisms to open the main control board box 1320, the main control board box 1320 can be closed using a sealing mechanism different from the destroyed sealing mechanism. On the other hand, the case 1410 of the function display unit 1400 does not have such a sealing mechanism, so that once a portion of the case 1410 is destroyed to remove the case 1410, it cannot be returned to its original state. In this way, the functional display substrate 1402 is protected by being enclosed in the case 1410, which cannot be removed (exposed) without destroying at least a portion of it, and this prevents the LEDs 1401, which have important functions, from being physically destroyed by tampering, etc., and if the case 1410 is destroyed in connection with tampering, etc., the destruction of the case 1410 makes it easy to detect the tampering. In addition, by protecting the functional display substrate 1402 with the case 1410, deformation such as warping is suppressed, and the LEDs 1401 are prevented from peeling off from the front mounting surface of the functional display substrate 1402.

In addition, in this example, the opening created by the through-hole 1410a is blocked by adhering a light-transmitting sheet 1404 to the front side of the case 1410. At least a portion of the light-transmitting sheet 1404 (the portion corresponding to the opening of the through-hole 1410a: the display portion 1404a) is translucent (in this example, a cloudy, frosted glass-like shape), allowing the lighting state of the LED 1401 to be visually confirmed through the display portion 1404a of the light-transmitting sheet 1404. In this way, in the functional display unit 1400 of this example, the light-transmitting sheet 1404 is provided on the front side of the case 1410 to block the opening of the through-hole 1410a, preventing the LED 1401 mounted on the front mounting surface of the functional display substrate 1402 from being exposed. This prevents tampering with the front mounting surface of the functional display substrate 1402 or the LED 1401 mounted on the front mounting surface by inserting a wire or the like into the inside of the case 1410 through the through-hole 1410a. Furthermore, even if the light-transmitting sheet 1402 is torn and a wire is inserted inside the case 1410, the formation of multiple ribs on the inside of the surface cover portion 1411 prevents damage to the entire front mounting surface of the functional display substrate 1402, thereby preventing the damage from spreading.

Furthermore, in this example, the connector 1402 is mounted on the rear mounting surface of the functional display board 1402, where the LEDs 1401 are not mounted. Therefore, even if the light-transmitting sheet 1402 is torn and a wire is inserted inside the case 1410, damage to the connector 1402 is suppressed, and the supply of power to each LED 1401 on the functional display board 1402 and the control signal from the main control board 1310 are prevented from being cut off, preventing the occurrence of problems such as important information related to the player's interests not being displayed.

As described above, in this example, the functional display substrate 1402 is housed in a case 1410 made of a colored, opaque resin or the like, and the mounting surface of the functional display substrate 1402 cannot be seen from anywhere except through the through-hole 1410a formed in the case 1410 and the opening for exposing part of the connector 1402. This reduces the risk of electronic components and circuit information mounted on the functional display substrate 1402 being read, and is more effective in deterring tampering.

In this example, the case 1410 housing the function display board 1402 is formed from a colored, opaque white resin or the like, but the colored, opaque color may be black, gray, red, pink, light blue, blue, green, yellow, etc. in addition to white. Of the main boards provided closer to the player than the main control board 1310, payout control board 633, etc., main boards other than the function display board 1402 may be housed in cases formed from a colorless, transparent resin, rather than being limited to cases formed from a colored, opaque resin, etc.

Furthermore, in the functional display board 1402 of this example, in addition to the case 1410 described above suppressing deformation such as warping, the rigidity of the board is increased by increasing the mounting density of electronic components and miniaturizing the board, thereby suppressing deformation such as warping and preventing the mounted electronic components from peeling off. Specifically, the functional display board 1402 of this example is at least one-fourth the size of the main control board 1310, dispensing control board 633, etc., and has higher rigidity than the main control board 1310, dispensing control board 633, etc.

Furthermore, in the functional display board 1402 of this example, the mounting density of electronic components is increased by employing a distinctive configuration for one or both of the power supply pattern and the signal pattern, thereby achieving a more compact board. This will be explained below with reference to Figure 366. Figure 366(A) is an explanatory diagram showing the front mounting surface of the functional display board 1402 on which the LEDs 1401 are mounted, Figure 366(B) is an explanatory diagram showing the rear mounting surface of the functional display board 1402 on which the LEDs 1401 are not mounted, and Figures 366(C) and 366(D) are enlarged views of a portion of the rear mounting surface of the functional display board 1402. Note that although Figure 366(A) omits the illustration of the patterns formed on the front mounting surface of the functional display board 1402, multiple patterns are also formed on the front mounting surface of the functional display board 1402.

As shown in Figure 366, the functional display board 1402 of this example has a front mounting surface on which LEDs 1401 are mounted and a rear mounting surface on which no LEDs are mounted. Multiple LEDs 1401, which are bare chips, are mounted on the front mounting surface, while a surface mount type (also known as SMD type) connector 1420, a surface mount type (also known as SMD type) IC 1430, and a surface mount type (also known as SMD type) resistor 1440 are mounted on the rear mounting surface. Furthermore, multiple patterns 1402a are formed on the front and rear mounting surfaces of the functional display board 1402, and multiple through holes 1402b are also formed. Note that the functional display board 1402 of this example is not limited to being one on which only surface mount type electronic components are mounted, and may be one on which both surface mount type electronic components and insertion mount type electronic components are mounted.

Furthermore, as described above, the functional display board 1402 of this example does not have a marking section like the marking section on the front side of the main control board 1310, making it difficult to read information or circuit information that can identify the electronic components mounted on the functional display board 1402. As described above, it is sufficient that there is no marking section that indicates at least information that can identify the electronic components (for example, the model number (part number) of the electronic component, etc.), and information that cannot identify the electronic components as described above may be provided.

Furthermore, surface-mount type (so-called SMD type) electronic components have multiple connection terminals spaced at a predetermined interval, and the functional display board 1402 has pads 1402c to which the connection terminals of the electronic components are soldered, each corresponding to a different connection terminal (one pad 1402c for each connection terminal). In this example, the functional display board 1402 has patterns 1402a formed in part that are shorter than the spacing between the multiple pads 1402c provided to correspond to each of the connection terminals of the surface-mount type (so-called SMD type) electronic components, thereby shortening the average length of the patterns 1402a (the average length from one electronic component to another electronic component, through-hole, etc.), thereby increasing the packaging density of electronic components and enabling the board to be made more compact.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 366(C), the pattern 1402a connecting the pads 1402c and the through-holes 1402b is shorter than the spacing X1, X2 between the pads 1402c provided corresponding to the connection terminals 1430a of the IC 1430. This makes it possible to shorten the average length of the patterns 1402a formed on the functional display substrate 1402 compared to conventional substrates, thereby increasing the packaging density of electronic components. The substrate is made smaller and more rigid, which reduces deformation such as warping and prevents the mounted electronic components from peeling off. This also makes it harder for substrates whose existence should be concealed (e.g., the magnetic sensor substrate provided in the magnetic sensor 1050, the sensor substrate of the first start port sensor 3002 provided in the first start port 2002, and the sensor substrate of the second start port sensor 2401 provided in the second start port 2004, etc.) to be noticed. By concealing their existence, the risk of electronic components and circuit information mounted on the substrate being read is reduced, enhancing the deterrent effect against tampering.

In this example, the average length of the patterns formed between electronic components or between electronic components and through-holes, etc. is shorter on main-side boards such as function display board 1402 that are located closer to the player than on main-side boards that are located on the backside of pachinko machine 1 with their front mounting surface facing away from the player, compared to patterns formed on main-side boards such as main control board 1310 that are located on the backside of pachinko machine 1 with their front mounting surface facing away from the player. In other words, compared to main-side boards such as main control board 1310 that are located on the backside of pachinko machine 1 with their front mounting surface facing away from the player, main-side boards such as function display board 1402 that are located closer to the player than on main-side boards that are located on the backside of pachinko machine 1 with their front mounting surface facing away from the player can achieve a higher electronic component mounting density and smaller size. Furthermore, by making the board smaller, the rigidity of the board can be increased, which reduces deformation such as warping and prevents the mounted electronic components from peeling off. It also makes boards whose presence you want to conceal (such as the magnetic sensor board provided in magnetic sensor 1050, the sensor board for first starting port sensor 3002 provided in first starting port 2002, and the sensor board for second starting port sensor 2401 provided in second starting port 2004) less noticeable, and by concealing their presence, it reduces the risk of electronic components and circuit information mounted on the board being read, thereby increasing the deterrent effect of tampering.

Furthermore, for some of the multiple surface-mount type electronic components mounted on the functional display board 1402 of this example, which are surface-mount type (so-called SMD type) electronic components, pattern 1402a is not formed to connect the pads provided corresponding to the connection terminals of the surface-mount type (so-called SMD type) electronic components to other surface-mount type (so-called SMD type) electronic components, and instead the pads provided corresponding to the connection terminals of one electronic component are directly connected to the pads provided corresponding to the connection terminals of the other electronic component without going through pattern 1402a, thereby making it possible to reduce the size of the board.

In Figure 366 (C), IC 1430, resistor 1440, pad 1402c corresponding to connection terminal 1430a of IC 1430, and pad 1402c corresponding to connection terminal 1430 of resistor 1440 are directly connected without going through pattern 1402a. This shortens the average length of pattern 1402a compared to main control board 1310, etc., allowing for a higher density of electronic components. This allows for the miniaturization of function display board 1402 and increases the rigidity of the board, thereby suppressing deformation such as warping and preventing mounted electronic components from peeling off. It also makes boards whose existence should be concealed (such as the magnetic sensor board provided in magnetic sensor 1050, the sensor board for first start port sensor 3002 provided in first start port 2002, and the sensor board for second start port sensor 2401 provided in second start port 2004) less noticeable, and by concealing their existence, it reduces the risk of electronic components and circuit information mounted on the board being read, improving the deterrent effect against tampering.

In addition, for the lands of some of the multiple through holes 1402b formed with some of the surface mount type (so-called SMD type) electronic components among the multiple surface mount type electronic components to be mounted, the pads provided corresponding to the connection terminals of the surface mount type (so-called SMD type) electronic components and the lands of the through holes 1402 may be directly connected without going through pattern 1402a. In this case, too, the average length of the pattern 1402a formed on the functional display substrate 1402 can be shortened to increase the mounting density of electronic components, thereby enabling the substrate to be made smaller and more rigid, thereby suppressing deformation such as warping and preventing the mounted electronic components from peeling off. This also makes it harder for substrates whose existence you want to conceal (such as the magnetic sensor substrate provided in the magnetic sensor 1050, the sensor substrate of the first starting port sensor 3002 provided in the first starting port 2002, and the sensor substrate of the second starting port sensor 2401 provided in the second starting port 2004) to be noticed, and by concealing their existence, the risk of electronic components and circuit information mounted on the substrate being read can be reduced, thereby improving the deterrent effect against tampering.

In addition, the electronic component body (e.g., IC 1430) may also form a pattern 1402a in the mounting area, excluding the pads 1402c provided corresponding to the connection terminals 1430a of surface-mount type (so-called SMD type) electronic components. In this case, the average length of the patterns 1402a formed on the functional display substrate 1402 can be shortened to increase the mounting density of the electronic components. This allows for the miniaturization of the substrate and increases its rigidity, thereby reducing deformation such as warping and preventing the mounted electronic components from peeling off. This also makes it difficult to notice substrates whose existence should be concealed (e.g., the magnetic sensor substrate provided in the magnetic sensor 1050, the sensor substrate of the first start port sensor 3002 provided in the first start port 2002, and the sensor substrate of the second start port sensor 2401 provided in the second start port 2004, etc.). Concealing their existence reduces the risk of electronic components and circuit information mounted on the substrate being read, thereby enhancing the deterrent effect of tampering.

Normally, the pattern 1402a connected to the pad 1402c is formed vertically and connected to the tip of the pad 1402c, as in the pattern 1402a connected to the pad 1402c provided corresponding to the connection terminal 1430a of the IC 1430 in Figure 366(C). In this case, an area is required to form the pattern 1402a at the tip of the pad 1402c, which hinders the miniaturization of the board. In this example, as shown in Figure 366(D), the pattern 1402a connected to some of the pads 1402c provided corresponding to the connection terminal 1420a of the connector 1420, which is a surface-mount type electronic component, is formed horizontally and connected to the side of the pad 1402c rather than the tip. As a result, an area for forming pattern 1402a is not required at the tip of pad 1402c, allowing for a higher mounting density of electronic components. This allows for the board to be made smaller and its rigidity to be increased, thereby suppressing deformation such as warping and preventing mounted electronic components from peeling off. It also makes boards whose presence you want to conceal (such as the magnetic sensor board provided in magnetic sensor 1050, the sensor board for first starting port sensor 3002 provided in first starting port 2002, and the sensor board for second starting port sensor 2401 provided in second starting port 2004) less noticeable, and by concealing their presence, it reduces the risk of electronic components and circuit information mounted on the board being read, improving the deterrent effect against tampering.

Also, as shown in pad 1402c provided corresponding to connection terminal 1420a of connector 1420, typically only one pattern 1402a is formed to extend from one pad 1402c. In this example, pattern 1402a and one pad 1402c are shared, and pattern 1402a is formed to extend in multiple directions from this one pad 1402c.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 366 (D), pad 1402c is formed with the same width as pattern 1402a in the middle of pattern 1402a, which connects pad 1402c, which is provided corresponding to connection terminal 1420a of connector 1420, to through hole 1402b, and resistor 1440 is soldered to this pad 1402c. In other words, pad 1402c and pattern 1402a are made common, and pad 1402c is formed by exposing the copper foil on part of pattern 1402a without forming a resist layer, and resistor 1440 is soldered to this pad 1402c.

This allows surface-mount electronic components to be mounted without forming pads 1402c separately from pattern 1402a. This eliminates the need for pad 1402c, allowing for increased component mounting density. The board's miniaturization and increased rigidity reduce warping and other deformations, preventing mounted electronic components from peeling off. This also makes it difficult to spot boards whose presence should be concealed (e.g., the magnetic sensor board mounted on magnetic sensor 1050, the sensor board for first start port sensor 3002 mounted on first start port 2002, and the sensor board for second start port sensor 2401 mounted on second start port 2004, etc.). Concealing their presence reduces the risk of electronic components and circuit information mounted on the board being read, enhancing the deterrent effect against tampering. Furthermore, the ability to mount surface-mount electronic components using the simple method of not forming a resist layer on pattern 1402a increases design flexibility and facilitates circuit design.

The edges of the boards on which electronic components such as the main control board 1310, functional display board 1402, and magnetic sensor board 1050b are mounted are free of resist layers, leaving the substrate exposed. For example, in the main control board 1310, a resist layer is not formed along the edges of the board on the front mounting surface or rear mounting surface, leaving the substrate exposed for a width of approximately 0.1 mm. On the other hand, the functional display board 1402 in this example has a smaller area where the resist layer is not formed and the substrate is exposed than the main control board 1310. Specifically, the area of the functional display board 1402 where the resist layer is not formed and the substrate is exposed is 0.05 mm or less wide along the edges of the board on the front mounting surface or rear mounting surface.

This allows the functional display board 1402 and magnetic sensor board 1050b to be more compact and have a higher electronic component mounting density than the main control board 1310. This increases the rigidity of the functional display board 1402, thereby reducing deformation such as warping and preventing the mounted electronic components from peeling off. It also makes it harder for boards whose existence should be concealed (such as the magnetic sensor board provided in the magnetic sensor 1050, the sensor board of the first start port sensor 3002 provided in the first start port 2002, and the sensor board of the second start port sensor 2401 provided in the second start port 2004) to be noticed, and by concealing their existence, it reduces the risk of the electronic components and circuit information mounted on the board being read, thereby improving the deterrent effect against tampering.

In addition, in the functional display board 1402 and the magnetic sensor board 1050b, a resist layer may be formed on all edges of the front and back mounting surfaces to prevent any exposed base material. In this case, the mounting density of electronic components on the functional display board 1402 can be increased, further enabling miniaturization. This further increases the rigidity of the functional display board 1402, suppresses deformation such as warping, and prevents the mounted electronic components from peeling off. This also makes it difficult to notice boards whose existence should be concealed (for example, the magnetic sensor board provided in the magnetic sensor 1050, the sensor board of the first starting port sensor 3002 provided in the first starting port 2002, and the sensor board of the second starting port sensor 2401 provided in the second starting port 2004, etc.), and by concealing their existence, the risk of electronic components and circuit information mounted on the board being read can be reduced, thereby improving the deterrent effect against tampering.

As described above, the main control board 1310 has openings for inserting screws, and is housed within the main control board box 1320 by inserting screws into these openings and fastening them to the inside of the cover body 1301 with screws. On the other hand, the functional display board 1402 in this example does not have openings for inserting screws, but is sandwiched between the front cover portion 1411 and back cover portion 1412 of the case 1410, and is housed within the case 1410 by fastening the front cover portion 1411 and back cover portion 1412 in this state without using screws or bolts. In other words, the main control board 1310 has areas where patterns, etc. are formed and areas where electronic components are mounted, as well as areas where openings for inserting screws are formed, whereas the functional display board 1402 does not have areas where openings for inserting screws are formed.

In this way, the functional display board 1402 of this example does not have an area where openings for inserting screws are formed, thereby increasing the mounting density of electronic components. This allows the board to be made smaller and increases the rigidity of the functional display board 1402, thereby suppressing deformation such as warping and preventing the mounted electronic components from peeling off. It also makes it difficult to notice boards whose existence you want to conceal (for example, the magnetic sensor board provided in the magnetic sensor 1050, the sensor board of the first starting port sensor 3002 provided in the first starting port 2002, and the sensor board of the second starting port sensor 2401 provided in the second starting port 2004, etc.), and by concealing their existence, it is possible to reduce the risk of electronic components and circuit information mounted on the board being read, thereby increasing the deterrent effect of tampering.

In addition, positioning bosses and boss holes may be formed on the front cover portion 1411 and back cover portion 1412 of the case 1410, in which case an opening into which the boss is inserted may be formed in the functional display substrate 1402. Furthermore, in this case, by forming the boss to be thinner than a screw or bolt, the opening area for inserting the boss in the functional display board 1402 can be narrowed so as not to hinder the miniaturization of the board. This allows for a higher mounting density of electronic components, thereby achieving a more compact board. This increases the rigidity of the functional display board 1402, suppresses deformation such as warping, and prevents the mounted electronic components from peeling off. It also makes it harder for boards whose existence should be concealed (such as the magnetic sensor board provided in the magnetic sensor 1050, the sensor board of the first starting port sensor 3002 provided in the first starting port 2002, and the sensor board of the second starting port sensor 2401 provided in the second starting port 2004) to be noticed, and by concealing their existence, it is possible to reduce the risk of electronic components and circuit information mounted on the board being read, thereby improving the deterrent effect of tampering.

As mentioned above, the main board, which is mounted on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 with its front mounting surface facing away from the player, is equipped with a CPU (main control MPU 1310a, payout control MPU) and executes important processes related to the progress of the game (e.g., main control main processing, main control timer interrupt processing, or processing executed on the payout control board 633 in connection with the main control main processing and main control timer interrupt processing). To ensure stable execution of such important processes related to the progress of the game, a solid ground pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) is formed on both sides of the board, excluding wiring patterns for power and signals. This ensures stable operation of the electronic circuitry composed of various electronic components and enables stable execution of important processes related to the progress of the game, thereby minimizing disadvantages to players and improving the reliability of the gaming machine. In other words, the main circuit board, which is installed on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 with its front mounting surface facing away from the player, has an area for forming a solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (circuit board ground)) in addition to wiring patterns for power and signals, making it difficult to miniaturize the circuit board.

On the other hand, main boards such as the function display board 1402 and magnetic sensor board 1050, which are located closer to the player than the main board located on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 with their front mounting surface facing away from the player, do not have a CPU and execute processing based on signals from the main control MPU 1310a mounted on the main control board 1310 located on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. This means that they have little impact on the progress of the game or the player's profits, and there is little need for stable operation. For this reason, the function display board 1402 and magnetic sensor board 1050 in this example are designed not to form a solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)). This allows for a higher mounting density of electronic components compared to when a solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) is formed, and the board can be made smaller and more rigid, which reduces deformation such as warping and prevents mounted electronic components from peeling off. It also makes boards whose presence you want to conceal (such as the magnetic sensor board provided in magnetic sensor 1050, the sensor board for first starting port sensor 3002 provided in first starting port 2002, and the sensor board for second starting port sensor 2401 provided in second starting port 2004) less noticeable, and by concealing their presence, it reduces the risk of electronic components and circuit information mounted on the board being read, improving the deterrent effect against tampering.

In the above example, the functional display substrate 1402 was described as a substrate that increases the mounting density of electronic components and reduces their size, thereby increasing rigidity and preventing warping and deformation.However, the magnetic sensor substrate provided in the magnetic sensor 1050, the sensor substrate of the first starting port sensor 3002 provided in the first starting port 2002, and the sensor substrate of the second starting port sensor 2401 provided in the second starting port 2004 can also adopt a configuration similar to the functional display substrate 1402 to increase the mounting density of electronic components and achieve miniaturization of the substrate, thereby increasing the rigidity of the substrate, preventing warping and deformation, and preventing the mounted electronic components from peeling off. In other words, the above-described configuration for enabling miniaturization of the functional display substrate 1402 may be applied to the magnetic sensor substrate provided for the magnetic sensor 1050, the sensor substrate for the first start opening sensor 3002 provided for the first start opening 2002, and the sensor substrate for the second start opening sensor 2401 provided for the second start opening 2004, etc. In the above-described embodiment, what is referred to as the functional display substrate 1402 can be read as other substrates such as the sensor substrate for the first start opening sensor 3002 and the sensor substrate for the second start opening sensor 2401, and can be applied to those corresponding to each substrate. In this case, it is possible to suppress warping and deformation of the magnetic sensor substrate provided for the magnetic sensor 1050, the sensor substrate for the first start opening sensor 3002 provided for the first start opening 2002, and the sensor substrate for the second start opening sensor 2401 provided for the second start opening 2004, etc.

In this way, the main boards that perform important controls related to the progress of the game include the main control board 1310 and payout control board 633, which are installed on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 with their front mounting surfaces facing away from the player; in other words, the main control board 1310 and payout control board 633, which are installed with their front mounting surfaces facing away from the player and are accessible from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 but not accessible from the front side of the pachinko machine 1; and the function display board 1402, the magnetic sensor board provided in the magnetic sensor 1050, and the board provided in the first starting port 2002, which are installed on the player side of these boards. The protection modes for the boards are different for the sensor board of the first start hole sensor 3002 provided in the first start hole 2002, the sensor board of the second start hole sensor 2401 provided in the second start hole 2004, etc.; in other words, the function display board 1402 provided in the function display unit 1400, which has its front mounting surface facing the player and is accessible from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 relative to the front mounting surface but not from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the magnetic sensor board provided in the magnetic sensor 1050, the sensor board of the first start hole sensor 3002 provided in the first start hole 2002, and the sensor board of the second start hole sensor 2401 provided in the second start hole 2004, etc. These protection modes enable appropriate protection depending on the placement position, the orientation of the front mounting surface, the accessible side of the pachinko machine 1, etc.

In the above embodiment, the main control board 1310 was described as a board on which both surface-mounted electronic components (chip components, SMD (Surface Mount Device)) and lead-type (through-hole mounted, inserted mounted) electronic components (lead components, dip components, inserted components) are mounted. However, this is not limited to this, and other boards such as the dispensing control board 633 on which a microprocessor is mounted may also be used. In other words, what is referred to as the main control board 1310 in the above embodiment can be read as other boards such as the dispensing control board 633, and can be applied to the corresponding boards.

[Modification 1 for implementing fraud prevention measures]
The main boards described above perform important processes related to the progress of the game and are equipped with electronic components for detecting fraudulent activity. Among the main boards, the main control board 1310 and payout control board 633 are mounted on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, with their surfaces (front mounting surfaces) facing away from the player and accessible from the back side of the pachinko machine 1. Meanwhile, main boards mounted closer to the player than these boards, such as the sensor board 1052 mounted on the magnetic sensor 1050, the function display board 1402 mounted on the function display unit 1400, the sensor board for the first start hole sensor 3002 mounted on the first start hole 2002, and the sensor board for the second start hole sensor 2401 mounted on the second start hole 2004, do not have their surfaces (front mounting surfaces) facing away from the player and are therefore accessible from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, making them easy targets for fraudulent modifications. Variation 1, which incorporates fraud prevention measures, will be described in detail below with reference to FIG. 372. In addition, in the first modification example in which anti-fraud measures are implemented, only the parts that are different from the above embodiment (particularly the sensor board 1052 and the magnetic sensor board 1050b) will be explained, and a duplicate explanation will not be given.

Note that the following description focuses on the sensor board 1052A provided on the magnetic sensor 1050 as a main board located closer to the player than the main control board 1310, payout control board 633, etc. However, this technical concept can also be applied to main boards other than the sensor board 1052A, as long as they are located closer to the player than the main control board 1310, payout control board 633, etc., and can also be applied to sub-boards different from the main board (for example, decorative boards provided on the gaming board 5 with LEDs mounted on them). It is also possible to implement this in combination with the above-mentioned embodiments. For example, it is possible to implement this in combination with one or more of Improvement in Ease of Identifying Cheating 1 to Improvement in Ease of Identifying Cheating 3 and Prevention of Peeling of Surface-Mounted Electronic Components 1 to Prevention of Peeling of Surface-Mounted Electronic Components 4.

Figure 372 is an explanatory diagram showing the component mounting surface of a sensor board 1052A housed in a sensor case 1053A of a magnetic sensor 1050A in a modified example with anti-tamper measures. The surface (front board surface) of the magnetic sensor 1050A in this example is surface-mounted with a sensor body 1051A for detecting magnetism, a sensor board 1052A coated with green solder resist (protective agent) on both the front (front board surface) on which the sensor body 1051A is mounted and the back (back board surface) on which no electronic components are mounted, an opaque sensor case 1053A (not shown) covering the sensor board 1052A and sensor body 1051A, a capacitor 1053a, a transistor 1053b, and a connecting connector 1053c.

In this example, a green solder resist (protective agent) is coated on the surface (front substrate surface) of the sensor board 1052A on which the sensor main body 1051A is mounted and the back surface (back substrate surface) on which no electronic components are mounted, but the color of the solder resist is not limited to green and may be other colors such as white. Furthermore, the sensor board 1052A and sensor main body 1051A are not limited to being covered by an opaque sensor case 1053A; they may be covered by a transparent sensor case 1053A so that they can be seen from outside the sensor case 1053A.

In addition, in this example, the sensor board 1052A has electronic components mounted only on its front surface (front board surface), and a wiring pattern formed only on the front surface (front board surface); no electronic components are mounted on the back surface (back board surface), and no wiring pattern is formed either. Furthermore, only surface-mount electronic components are mounted on the sensor board 1052A in this example. Therefore, the sensor board 1052A does not have through-holes connecting the wiring pattern formed on the front surface (front board surface) with the wiring pattern formed on the back surface (back board surface). However, electronic components may be mounted on both the front surface (front board surface) and the back surface (back board surface) to form through-holes connecting the wiring pattern formed on the front surface (front board surface) with the wiring pattern formed on the back surface (back board surface). Alternatively, lead-type electronic components may be used for at least some of the electronic components, and mounted on either the front surface (front board surface) or the back surface (back board surface) of the sensor board 1052A, thereby forming through-holes connecting the wiring pattern formed on the front surface (front board surface) with the wiring pattern formed on the back surface (back board surface).

As shown in Figure 372, the surface (front board surface) of the sensor board 1052A in this example is formed with a wiring pattern (power supply line) 1052A1 that supplies various power sources (DC power sources such as +5V, +12V, +24V, etc.) created by the power supply board 630, a wiring pattern (GND line) 1052A2 for ground connection, and a wiring pattern (signal line) 1052A3 that transmits detection signals from the sensor main body 1051A, which are connected to the sensor main body 1051A, capacitor 1053a, transistor 1053b, and each terminal 1053c1 of the connection connector 1053c mounted on the surface (front board surface) of the sensor board 1052A, and are electrically connected to the main control board 1310. The capacitor 1053a and transistor 1053b mounted on the sensor board 1052A are electrically connected to a solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) 1312 formed on the main control board 1310 via a wiring pattern (GND line) 1052A2 for ground connection (they may be electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a relay board, or they may be electrically connected to the main control board 1310 without using a relay board).

Of the various surface-mounted electronic components, the terminals of the connector 1053c are designated, from the top of the drawing, as terminal 1 (VDD terminal), terminal 2 (GND terminal), and terminal 3 (OUT terminal). The power supply wiring pattern (power line) 1052A1 and ground connection wiring pattern (GND line) 1052A2 extend from the VDD and GND terminals of the connector 1053c, respectively, and are connected to the GND and power terminals of the IC (sensor body 1051A) that detects magnetism. Connection pads 1052Ab are formed midway between the GND line and the power line, and connection terminal 1053a1 of the capacitor 1053a is soldered to them.

Furthermore, wiring pattern (signal line) 1052A3, which transmits the detection signal extending from the OUT terminal, is connected to the collector terminal of open-collector transistor 1053b, which receives at its base terminal the signal output from the output terminal of sensor main body 1051A and switches the state of its collector terminal in response to the signal received at the base terminal. The emitter terminal is connected to the GND terminal of sensor main body 1051A by a wiring pattern of the same line width as GND line 1052A2 formed on the surface of the substrate on the back side of sensor main body 1051A. The wiring pattern formed to connect the output terminal from which sensor main body 1051A outputs a signal to the base terminal of transistor 1053b is also a wiring pattern of the same line width as signal line 1052A3.

Meanwhile, the harness connected to the connection connector 1053c is connected to the panel relay board 1710, and the panel relay board 1710 is further connected to the main control board 1310 via a harness. The OUT terminal is electrically connected to the main control input circuit provided on the main control board 1310, and is also connected via a resistor to the +5V power supply generated by the +5V generation circuit 1310g provided on the main control board, either on the relay board 1710 or the main control board 1310.

When sensor main body 1051A is not detecting magnetism, it outputs a signal to turn transistor 1053b ON, so the connection between the collector terminal, i.e., the OUT terminal, and the input circuit on main control board 1310 remains connected.When sensor main body 1051A is detecting magnetism, it outputs a signal to turn transistor 1053b OFF, so the connection between the collector terminal, i.e., the OUT terminal, and the input circuit is opened.

As a result, when the sensor main body 1051A detects magnetism, the current that had been flowing into the OUT terminal via the resistor stops flowing, and the potential of the OUT terminal, i.e., the signal input to the input circuit, changes from a potential lower than the +5V power supply to a potential equal to the +5V power supply, which causes the main control MPU 1310a mounted on the main control board 1310 to determine that there is a magnetic detection abnormality. The main control board 1310 then sends a command to the peripheral control board 1510 indicating that there is a magnetic detection abnormality, and the peripheral control board 1510 uses the performance display device 1600, speaker, and various lamps and LEDs to report the abnormality.

Therefore, an open state of the OUT terminal is equivalent to the signal line 1052A3 being disconnected, and if the circuit is destroyed due to disconnection, a magnetic detection abnormality will be reported. Furthermore, if the power supply line 1052A1 or GND line 1052A2 is disconnected, power will no longer be supplied to the sensor main body 1051A, making it impossible to output a signal to turn on transistor 1053b. As a result, the OUT terminal will remain open, and a magnetic detection abnormality will be detected and reported.

Furthermore, if the wiring pattern connecting the output terminal of sensor main body 1051A to the base terminal of transistor 1053b, or the wiring pattern connecting GND line 1052A2 to the emitter terminal of transistor 1053b, is peeled off and the circuit is destroyed, it will be determined to be a magnetic detection abnormality and an alert will be issued. In this way, even if someone attempts to commit fraud by destroying magnetic sensor 1050 and making magnetic detection impossible, an alert will be issued, making it possible to prevent and suppress fraud before it occurs.

In addition, in the sensor board 1052A of this example, a solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) is not formed, and in addition, the connection terminals (e.g., connection terminal 1053a1 of capacitor 1053a, connection terminal 1053b1 of transistor 1053b, connection terminal 1051A1 of sensor body 1051A, terminal portion 1053c1 of connector 1053c) of specific electronic components (e.g., capacitor 1053a, transistor 1053b, IC including sensor body 1051A, etc.) having a GND terminal are soldered to pads (e.g., pad 1052Ab to which connection terminal 1053a1 of capacitor 1053a is soldered, Pads 1052Ad to which connection terminals 1053b1 of transistor 1053b are soldered, pads 1052Ac to which connection terminals 1051A1 of sensor body 1051A are soldered, and pads 1052Aa to which terminal portions 1053c1 of connector 1053c are soldered are all formed as normal pads. There are no thermal pads with thermal patterns (patterns having a cross shape (which may be partially missing) or an x shape (which may be partially missing)) that electrically and physically connect the solid pattern (also called a solid ground) to the pads, and no thermal lands are formed. The various electronic components mounted on sensor board 1052A are connected to ground via wiring pattern 1052 for ground connection.

In addition, in general circuit boards such as the main control board 1310, payout control board 633, peripheral control board 1510, and decorative boards provided on the game board 5 on which LEDs are mounted, the line width of the wiring pattern for ground connection is formed with a line width thicker than the line width of the wiring pattern for signal transmission, but in the sensor board 1052A of this example, the line width of the wiring pattern 1052A2 for ground connection is formed with a thin line width that is the same (approximately the same (including within a range of about ±10%)) as the line width of the wiring pattern 1052A3 through which the detection signal from the sensor main body 1051A is transmitted. As a result, if a force is applied to remove a specific electronic component mounted on the surface (front substrate surface) of sensor board 1052A, and a force is applied in a direction that peels off the pads to which the connection terminals of the specific electronic component are soldered, wiring pattern 1052A for ground connection, or wiring pattern 1052A3 through which the detection signal from the sensor main body is transmitted, the pads, wiring pattern 1052A2 for ground connection, wiring pattern 1052A3 through which the detection signal from the sensor main body is transmitted, etc., are likely to peel off, causing the pads, wiring pattern 1052A2 for ground connection, and wiring pattern 1052A3 through which the detection signal from the sensor main body is transmitted to peel off and destroying the circuit, which deters unauthorized modifications to sensor board 1052A and improves security.

In addition, on typical circuit boards such as the main control board 1310, payout control board 633, peripheral control board 1510, and decorative boards on the gaming board 5 on which LEDs are mounted, the line width of the wiring pattern (power supply line) that supplies the various power sources (DC power sources such as +5V, +12V, +24V, etc.) created on the power supply board 630 is formed with a line width corresponding to each current (the higher the current, the thicker the line width). However, on the sensor board 1052A of this example, the line width of the ground connection wiring pattern 1052A2 and the line width of the wiring pattern 1052A3 to which the detection signal from the sensor main body 1051A is transmitted are not only formed with the same line width, Furthermore, the line width of the wiring pattern (power line) 1052A1 that supplies various power sources (DC power sources such as +5V, +12V, and +24V) created on the power supply board 630 is formed to be the same (including substantially the same (within a range of about ±10%)) as the line width of the ground connection wiring pattern 1052A2 and the line width of the wiring pattern 1052A3 that transmits the detection signal from the sensor main body 1051A, so that the line widths of all wiring patterns 1052A1, 1052A2, and 1052A3 formed on the sensor board 1052A are formed to be the same (including substantially the same (within a range of about ±10%)).

This makes it difficult to identify the purpose of wiring patterns 1052A1, 1052A2, and 1052A3 (whether they are wiring pattern (power line) 1052A1 that supplies various power sources (DC power sources such as +5V, +12V, +24V, etc.) created by power supply board 630, wiring pattern (GND line) 1052A2 for ground connection, or wiring pattern (signal line) 1052A3 that transmits detection signals from sensor main body 1051A), making it difficult to read the circuit of sensor board 1052A, thereby preventing unauthorized modifications and improving security. Furthermore, if a force is applied to remove a specific electronic component mounted on the surface (front board surface) of sensor board 1052A, and a force is applied in a direction that peels off the pads to which the connection terminals of the specific electronic component are soldered, wiring pattern 1052A for ground connection, and wiring pattern 1052A3 through which the detection signal from the sensor main body is transmitted, wiring pattern 1052A2 for pad and ground connection, wiring pattern 1052A3 through which the detection signal from the sensor main body is transmitted, and wiring pattern (power line) 1052A1 that supplies various power sources (DC power sources such as +5V, +12V, +24V) created on power supply board 630, will be prone to peeling. This will peel off wiring pattern 1052A2 for pad and ground connection, and wiring pattern 1052A3 through which the detection signal from the sensor main body is transmitted, destroying the circuitry, thereby preventing unauthorized modification of sensor board 1052A and improving security.

The line width of the wiring pattern 1052A2 for ground connection, the line width of the wiring pattern 1052A3 through which the detection signal from the sensor main body 1051A is transmitted, and the line width of the wiring pattern (power supply line) 1052A1 that supplies various power supplies (DC power supplies such as +5V, +12V, +24V) created on the power supply board 630 may be formed with the same line width (including approximately the same (within a range of about ±10%)). Instead of forming the line width of wiring pattern 1052A2 at a narrower line width than usual, the line width of wiring pattern 1052A3, which transmits detection signals from sensor main body 1051A, and the line width of wiring pattern (power line) 1052A1, which supplies various power sources (DC power sources such as +5V, +12V, +24V, etc.) created on power supply board 630, may be formed at the same line width (including approximately the same line width (within a range of about ±10%)) as the line width of wiring pattern 1052A2 for ground connection.

In other words, the line width of the wiring pattern 1052A2 for ground connection, the line width of the wiring pattern 1052A3 for transmitting the detection signal from the sensor main body 1051A, and the line width of the wiring pattern (power line) 1052A1 for supplying various power sources (DC power sources such as +5V, +12V, +24V) created by the power supply board 630 may be unified to any line width different from the normal line width of each of the line widths of the wiring pattern 1052A2 for ground connection, the line width of the wiring pattern 1052A3 for transmitting the detection signal from the sensor main body 1051A, and the line width of the wiring pattern (power line) 1052A1 for supplying various power sources (DC power sources such as +5V, +12V, +24V) created by the power supply board 630 may be unified to any line width different from the normal line width of each of them.

Furthermore, in the sensor board 1052A of this example, as described above, no solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) is formed, and the pads to which each connection terminal of a specific electronic component is soldered (for example, pads 1052Ab to which each connection terminal 1053a1 of capacitor 1053a is soldered) are not formed as thermal pads. This prevents the wiring pattern 1052A2 for ground connection from being identified from the solid pattern or thermal pad. This makes it difficult to read the circuit of the sensor board 1052A, thereby preventing unauthorized modification and improving security.

Furthermore, the sensor board 1052A in this example does not have a solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)), and the wiring pattern 1052A2 for ground connection is not connected to the solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) of the sensor board 1052A, whereas boards on which a solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) is formed, such as the main control board 1310, the dispensing control board 633, and the peripheral control board 1510, have a wiring pattern for ground connection connected to the solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) formed on each board. For example, thermal patterns that electrically and physically connect pads and lands to solid patterns are formed shorter than the spacing between adjacent electronic components across the non-mountable area, whereas on the sensor board 1052A, the wiring pattern 1052A2 for ground connection is formed longer than the spacing between adjacent electronic components across the non-mountable area. For this reason, in this example, boards such as the main control board 1310, dispensing control board 633, and peripheral control board 1510, which have solid patterns (solid ground (GND) (board ground)), are formed with a larger board area (more than 10 times larger) than the sensor board 1052A, but the wiring patterns (thermal patterns) for ground connection formed on the main control board 1310, dispensing control board 633, and peripheral control board 1510 are made shorter than the wiring pattern 1052A2 for ground connection on the sensor board 1052A.

In this way, on boards on which a solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) is formed, such as the main control board 1310, dispensing control board 633, and peripheral control board 1510, the length of the wiring pattern (thermal pattern) for ground connection until it connects to the solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) is configured to be short. In addition, in general circuit boards such as the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, the peripheral control board 1510, and the decorative board on the game board 5 on which LEDs are mounted, the line width of the wiring pattern (power supply line) that supplies various power sources (DC power sources such as +5V, +12V, +24V, etc.) created on the power supply board 630 is formed with a line width corresponding to each current (the greater the current, the thicker the line width), and the line width of the wiring pattern (power supply line) that supplies various power sources (DC power sources such as +5V, +12V, +24V, etc.) created on the power supply board 630 is formed with a line width corresponding to each current (the greater the current, the thicker the line width), but is configured so that the length of the wiring pattern (thermal pattern) for ground connection until it is connected to a solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) is short. By doing so, when a force is applied to remove a specific electronic component (such as an IC, capacitor, or transistor) that has a GND terminal and is mounted on the main control board 1310, dispensing control board 633, or peripheral control board 1510, and a force is applied in a direction that peels off the through-holes or pads to which the connection terminals of the specific electronic component are soldered, or the ground connection wiring pattern (thermal pattern), the through-holes or pads to which the connection terminals of the specific electronic component are soldered, or the solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) to which the ground connection wiring pattern (thermal pattern) is connected, can prevent the ground connection wiring pattern (thermal pattern) from peeling off or the specific electronic component from peeling off.

In addition, on boards on which a solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) is formed, such as the main control board 1310, the dispensing control board 633, and the peripheral control board 1510, at least one of the pads or through-hole lands to which each connection terminal of a specific electronic component (e.g., IC, capacitor, transistor, etc.) is soldered may be formed as a thermal pad or thermal land, and the pad or land may be physically connected to the solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) formed on each board via the thermal pattern. For example, on the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633, at least one of the through holes to which the lead terminals of a lead-type capacitor (which may be a lead-type resistor, etc.) serving as a specific electronic component are soldered may be formed from a thermal pad or thermal land, and the pad or land may be physically connected via the thermal pattern to a solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) formed on each of the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633. Alternatively, on the peripheral control board 1510, at least one of the pads to which the connection terminals of a surface-mounted capacitor (also known as a chip capacitor, or which may be a surface-mounted resistor (chip resistor)) serving as a specific electronic component are soldered may be formed from a thermal pad, and the pad may be physically connected via the thermal pattern to a solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) formed on the peripheral control board 1510.

As mentioned above, thermal pads and thermal lands with thermal patterns make it more difficult for heat to be transferred to a solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) compared to regular pads and lands without a thermal pattern. Therefore, by forming at least one of the pads or through-hole lands to which the connection terminals of specific electronic components are soldered using a thermal pad or thermal land, the temperature drop when soldering the specific electronic component is suppressed (heat dissipation is suppressed), making it possible to reliably melt the solder on the pad and reliably suck up the solder applied to the back surface to the front surface via the through-hole, thereby strengthening the welding of the specific electronic component and improving the rigidity of the board. In other words, on boards such as the main control board 1310, dispensing control board 633, and peripheral control board 1510 on which a solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) is formed, by forming at least one of the pads or lands to which the connection terminals of specific electronic components are soldered as a thermal pad or thermal land, not only is the welding of the capacitor (specific electronic component) stronger, but the rigidity of the board is also increased. Furthermore, as described above, the length of the ground connection wiring pattern (thermal pattern) leading to the solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) is shortened, so even if force is applied to remove a specific electronic component, the solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) to which the through-hole, pad, or ground connection wiring pattern (thermal pattern) is connected can prevent the ground connection wiring pattern (thermal pattern) from peeling off or the electronic component from peeling off.

In addition, the length of each thermal pattern (the length from the pad or land to the solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)), in other words, the length of each wiring pattern (thermal pattern) for ground connection until it is physically connected to the solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground) on the thermal pad or thermal land to which the connection terminal of a specific electronic component is soldered) is uniform, and each is formed to have a predetermined fixed length. On the other hand, in the sensor board 1052A of this example, the length of the solid pattern (solid ground ( GND (board ground)) is not formed, and the length of the ground connection wiring pattern 1052A2 is not constant. Therefore, when a force is applied to remove a specific electronic component, the force is applied uniformly to each thermal pattern, preventing parts of the thermal pattern from peeling off. On the other hand, in the sensor board 1052A of this example, when a force is applied to remove a specific electronic component, the force is concentrated on weaker parts of the ground connection wiring pattern 1052A2 (for example, longer wiring patterns 1052A2), making them more likely to peel off.

As described above, among the main boards, the main control board 1310 and payout control board 633, which are located on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and arranged with their surfaces (mounting surfaces 1310x, 633x) facing the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, are accessible from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 but not from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. On the other hand, the main boards located closer to the player than these boards, such as the sensor board 1052 provided for the magnetic sensor 1050, the function display board 1402 provided for the function display unit 1400, the sensor board for the first start hole sensor 3002 provided for the first start hole 2002, and the sensor board for the second start hole sensor 2401 provided for the second start hole 2004, do not have their surfaces (front mounting surfaces) facing away from the player and are therefore accessible from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. In this example, by differentiating the fraud prevention configurations for main boards that are inaccessible from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 (such as the main control board 1310 and payout control board 633) and main boards that are accessible from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 (such as the sensor board 1052A provided in the magnetic sensor 1050), it becomes possible to implement effective fraud prevention measures according to the layout and function of each.

[Modification 2 for implementing fraud prevention measures]
In the above-described variant 1, which implements fraud prevention measures, the main boards (such as the main control board 1310 and payout control board 633) that are inaccessible from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 are configured with different fraud prevention measures than the main boards (such as the sensor board 1052A provided for the magnetic sensor 1050) that are accessible from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. However, the configurations of the fraud prevention measures may also be different for the main boards (such as the sensor board 1052A provided for the magnetic sensor 1050) that are accessible from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 and the decorative boards that are accessible from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 and have LEDs mounted on their front (front board surface) and drivers that drive the LEDs mounted on either the front (front board surface) or rear (rear board surface). Variation 2, which implements fraud prevention measures, will be described in detail below with reference to FIG. 373. The rear-left movable decorative board 3311A will be described as an example of a sub-board accessible from the front side of the pachinko machine 1. Furthermore, the rear left movable decorative substrate 3311A is the same substrate as the above-mentioned rear left movable decorative substrate 3311, and in variant example 2, which provides anti-fraud measures, only the parts that differ from the above-mentioned embodiment (especially the rear left movable decorative substrate 3311) will be explained, and no duplicate explanations will be given.

Figure 373 is an explanatory diagram showing the back surface (back board surface) of the rear-left movable decorative board 3311A in this example, on which the LED 3314a is not mounted. As shown in Figure 373, the rear mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative board 3311A is coated with a white solder resist (protective material) like the front mounting surface, and an IC 3311e, a capacitor 3311f, and a connector 3311g are mounted. In addition, a 1-pin mark 3311e1, a circled number 1, indicating the mounting orientation (mounting direction, position of the first terminal) of the IC 3311e is silk-screened on the resist to the side of the pad 3311A1a (the lower left corner of the IC 3311e) to which the first terminal 3311ea of the multiple pads 3311A1a to which the multiple connection terminals 3311ea of the IC 3311e are soldered. Note that the pin 1 mark 3311e1 indicating the mounting orientation of the electronic component (mounting direction, placement position of the first terminal) is not limited to the above, and may be a triangle symbol (△), a circle, etc.

In addition, in the lower right corner of the illustration, the board management number 3311A3, which is a unique identification number for managing each board, is formed in foil-punched characters (i.e., punched characters formed by creating characters in the wiring pattern, which is copper foil, on the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed and then punching out the copper foil around them). Note that the board management number 3311A3 is not limited to being formed in foil-punched characters, but may also be formed in foil-retained characters (i.e., characters formed by punching out the copper foil in the area corresponding to the character on the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed), or may be printed on a resist by silk screen printing.

In addition, a solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) 3311A1 is formed over almost the entire back surface (back board surface) of the rear left movable decorative board 3311A, and one of the multiple connection terminals 3311ea of the IC 3311e mounted on the back surface (back board surface) of the rear left movable decorative board 3311A is connected to one of the multiple connection terminals 3311fa of the capacitor 3311f and one of the multiple connection terminals 3311ga of the connector 3311g, forming a power supply line that supplies various power sources (DC power sources such as +5V, +12V, +24V) created by the power supply board 630.

In this example, as shown in Figure 373, of the multiple connection terminals 3311A1a, 3311A1b, 3311A1c for the IC 3311e, capacitor 3311f, and connector 3311g, the pads 3311A1a, 3311A1b, 3311A1c to which the connection terminals (also called GND terminals) connected to the solid pattern are soldered are formed as thermal pads 3311A1a, 3311A1b, 3311A1c having thermal patterns. This makes it possible to firmly weld the IC 3311e, capacitor 3311f, and connector 3311g to the back surface (back board surface) of the rear left movable decorative board 3311A.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 373, the thermal pads 3311A1a, 3311A1b, and 3311A1c formed on IC 3311e, capacitor 3311f, and connector 3311g, respectively, have thermal patterns that physically connect pads 3311A1a, 3311A1b, and 3311A1c to solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) 3311A1, and each is formed to have a uniform length and a predetermined constant length. Furthermore, the length of each thermal pattern is formed to be shorter than the distance between adjacent electronic components across the non-mountable area. In other words, the IC 3311e, capacitor 3311f, and connector 3311g mounted on the back surface (back board surface) of the rear left movable decorative board 3311A each have a short wiring pattern (thermal pattern) for ground connection, and the length of the wiring pattern (thermal pattern) for ground connection until it connects to the solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) 3311A1 is approximately uniform. Therefore, when a force is applied to the back surface (back board surface) of the rear left movable decorative board 3311A to remove any of the IC 3311e, capacitor 3311f, or connector 3311g, the force is distributed evenly to each thermal pattern, and the solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) 3311A1, which is physically connected to each pad 3311A1a, 3311A1b, and 3311A1c at an extremely short distance, prevents the ground connection wiring pattern (thermal pattern) from peeling off or electronic components from peeling off.

In this way, the decorative board, which is a sub-side board accessible from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, has LEDs mounted on its front surface (front board surface) and drivers that drive the LEDs mounted on its front surface (front board surface) or back surface (back board surface), is configured to strengthen the welding of electronic components and prevent the electronic components from peeling off or the wiring pattern from peeling off.

On the other hand, as shown in Variation 1, which implements the above-mentioned fraud prevention measures, the sensor board 1052A and other components provided on the magnetic sensor 1050, which is the main board accessible from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, are completely devoid of any solid patterns (solid ground (GND) (board ground)), thermal pads, or thermal lands. The length of the wiring pattern for ground connection is longer than the spacing between adjacent electronic components across the non-mountable area, and the lengths of the wiring patterns for ground connection are uneven. Therefore, if force is applied to remove an electronic component mounted on the sensor board 1052A, the force will be concentrated on weaker parts (e.g., longer wiring pattern 1052A2) of the pad and ground connection wiring pattern 1052A2, wiring pattern 1052A3 that transmits detection signals from the sensor body, and wiring pattern (power line) 1052A1 that supplies various power sources (DC power sources such as +5V, +12V, +24V) created on the power supply board 630, causing the weaker parts to peel off and destroy the circuit.

In other words, the sub-board accessible from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 executes processes related to the game presentation, while the main-board accessible from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 executes processes related to the control of the game, and is an important board that affects the interests of players and the gaming facility, and if it is tampered with, there is a risk that it will cause harm to players or the gaming facility. On the other hand, even if the sub-board is tampered with, there is a low risk that it will cause harm to players or the gaming facility.

For this reason, of the boards accessible from the front of the pachinko machine 1, the sub-boards are protected by making the circuits less susceptible to destruction by strengthening the welding of electronic components and preventing the wiring patterns from peeling off, while the main boards are intentionally made more susceptible to destruction so that in the event of any illegal modifications, the circuit itself can be destroyed, preventing illegal modifications and preventing any disadvantage to players or the gaming facility.

In addition, special sub-side boards among those accessible from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 may be intentionally configured to have circuits that are easily destroyed, similar to Variation 1, which implements the above-mentioned fraud prevention measures. For example, among the sub-side boards accessible from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, decorative boards that are provided on the game board 5 and have LEDs mounted thereon but do not have drivers mounted to drive the LEDs (e.g., the rear left movable decorative board 3314) may be intentionally configured to have circuits that are easily destroyed, similar to Variation 1, which implements the above-mentioned fraud prevention measures. In this case, a solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) may not be formed on this decorative board. In this way, the circuits of the special sub-side boards are intentionally made easily destroyable. If tampering is attempted on boards that are less important because they do not have drivers mounted, the deliberate destruction of the circuitry can satisfy the tamperer and deter tampering on other boards, such as boards mounted with drivers or sensor board 1052A.

[Modification 1 for increasing the strength of the substrate]
The main boards described above perform important processes related to the progress of the game and are equipped with electronic components for detecting fraudulent activity. Among the main boards, the main control board 1310 and payout control board 633, in particular, perform important processes related to the progress of the game and important processes related to the player's profits (prize balls). In this example, the strength (bending strength, rigidity) of the boards that perform such important processes is increased to prevent the mounted electronic components from peeling off. Below, Variation 1, which increases the strength of the board, is described with reference to FIG. 374(A). Furthermore, in Variation 1, which increases the strength of the board, only the differences from the above embodiment (particularly the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 364) are described, and redundant explanations are omitted.

Note that while the following description will be given for the main control board 1310, this technical concept can also be applied to the dispensing control board 633 or the peripheral control board 1510. In other words, this technical concept can be applied to any board on which a specific electronic component (e.g., an IC) and an electronic component (e.g., a capacitor) adjacent to the specific electronic component with a mounting-prohibited area sandwiched between them are mounted. It can also be implemented in combination with the above-mentioned embodiments. For example, it can be implemented in combination with one or more of Improvement in Ease of Identifying Fakeness 1 to Improvement in Ease of Identifying Fakeness 3 and Prevention of Peeling of Surface-Mounted Electronic Components 1 to Prevention of Peeling of Surface-Mounted Electronic Components 4.

Figure 374 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the mounting state of a main control board 1310 in a modified example that increases the strength of the board, with a surface-mount type (chip component, SMD type) IC as a specific electronic component and an insertion-mount type (dip component) capacitor placed adjacent to the IC with a non-mountable area between them.

In this example, the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 has a solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) 1312 formed over almost the entire area, except for about 1 mm at the base end, and is equipped with multiple electronic components, including multiple surface-mount type IC1s that are fixed to the board by soldering connection terminals IC1a to pads 1310k formed on the board surface, and multiple lead-type capacitors MC1 that are fixed to the board by inserting lead terminals into through holes 1310r and soldering these lead terminals to the through holes 1310r or lands.

Furthermore, as described above, in this example, a lead-type capacitor MC1 is placed adjacent to the surface-mount type IC1 (with a non-mountable area in between), and one of the lands 1310s, 1310r of the two through-holes 1310r into which the lead terminal MC1a of this capacitor MC1 is inserted is formed as a thermal land 1310s' having a thermal pattern 1310v (hatched area in Figure 374 (A)) that electrically and physically connects the land to a solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) 1312.

In this way, by forming the land provided in one of the two through holes into which the lead terminal of capacitor MC1 is inserted as thermal land 1310s' with thermal pattern 1310v, heat is less likely to be transferred to solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) 1312) compared to a normal land 1310s that does not have thermal pattern 1310v and is directly connected (integrally formed with solid pattern 1312) to the solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) 1312), and therefore it is easier to solder lead-type capacitor MC1. This suppresses the temperature drop (heat dissipation) when the main control board 1310 is welded, and the through-holes 1310r allow the solder attached to the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310 to be reliably sucked up to the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310. This makes it possible to weld the capacitor MC1 more firmly to the main control board 1310 than with normal lands 1310s, and the stronger welding between the capacitor MC1 and the main control board 1310 suppresses bending and warping of the main control board 1310 and prevents surface-mounted electronic components from peeling off (detachment), improving the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.

In this example, the surface-mount type IC1, which is placed adjacent to the lead-type capacitor MC1 (across an unmountable area), is also configured to prevent peeling. Specifically, as shown in Figure 374(A), one of the multiple pads 1310k, 1310k' to which the connection terminal IC1a of IC1 is soldered on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is formed as a thermal pad 1310k' having a thermal pattern 1310v (hatched area in Figure 374(A)) that electrically and physically connects the pad to a solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) 1312.

In this way, by forming one of the pads 1310k, 1310k' to which the connection terminal IC1a of the surface-mount type IC1 is soldered as a thermal pad 1310k', heat is transferred less to the solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) 1312 than to a normal pad 1310k that does not have a thermal pattern 1310v and whose periphery is directly connected to the solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) 1312 (formed integrally with the solid pattern 1312). This reduces the temperature drop when soldering the surface-mounted IC1 (reduces heat dissipation), ensuring that the solder on the thermal pad 1310k' can be melted more reliably, allowing the IC1 to be more firmly welded to the main control board 1310 compared to the regular pad 1310k. Furthermore, the stronger weld between the IC1 and the main control board 1310 makes it less likely for the IC1 to come off (separation from mounting) even if the main control board 1310 is bent or warped, improving the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.

In this example, of the multiple pads 1310k to which the connection terminal IC1a of IC1 is soldered, the pad 1310k' located away from the adjacent capacitor MC1 to ensure stable operation of IC1 is formed as a thermal pad 1310k' having a thermal pattern 1310v. Specifically, of the multiple pads 1310k, 1310k' provided corresponding to the multiple connection terminals IC1a provided along the long sides of IC1, the pad provided corresponding to the connection terminal IC1a located closest to the short side on the left side in the figure where no capacitor MC1 is provided is formed as thermal pad 1310k'.

As described above, by implementing the lead-type capacitor MC1, the bending strength and rigidity of the area surrounding the capacitor MC1 on the main control board 1310 are increased, suppressing bending and warping. Furthermore, because bending strength and rigidity increase closer to the capacitor MC1, the connection terminal IC1a located closer to the capacitor MC1 of IC1 is less likely to peel off from the pad 1310k. On the other hand, because bending strength and rigidity decrease with distance from the capacitor MC1, bending and warping of the main control board 1310 become more likely to occur the further away from the capacitor MC1. Therefore, in this example, among the pads 1310k to which the connection terminal IC1a of the surface-mount type IC1 is soldered, a thermal pad 1310k' is formed at a position away from the adjacent capacitor MC1 to ensure stable operation of the IC1. As a result, the bending strength and rigidity decrease due to the distance from capacitor MC1, and in areas where the welding between IC1's connection terminal IC1a and pad 1310k is likely to come off, thermal pad 1310k' is formed, making the welding with IC1's connection terminal IC1a stronger than the other pads 1310k. This increases the bending strength and rigidity of the main control board 1310, making IC1's connection terminal IC1a less likely to come off thermal pad 1310k'.

In addition, the land provided in one of the two through holes 1310r into which the lead terminal MC1a of the capacitor MC1 is inserted is formed as a thermal land 1310s' having a thermal pattern 1310v. In addition, among the pads 1310k to which the connection terminal IC1a of the surface-mount type IC1 is soldered, a thermal pad 1310k' having a thermal pattern 1310v is formed at a position away from the adjacent capacitor MC1 to stably drive the IC1. The pad 1310s' and the thermal pad 1310k' provided for IC1 sandwich almost the entire area where IC1 is mounted, increasing the rigidity of almost the entire area where IC1 is mounted, thereby suppressing bending and warping of the area where IC1 is mounted, and improving the effectiveness of suppressing peeling off of IC1 compared to when all of the pads 1310k, 1310k' to which the connection terminal IC1a of the surface-mount type IC1 is soldered are formed from normal pads without thermal pattern 1310v, thereby improving the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.

As such, among the main boards, boards such as the main control board 1310 and payout control board 633, which perform important processes related to the progress of the game and the player's profits (prize balls), are configured with both thermal pads and thermal lands to increase the board's rigidity. On the other hand, main boards that are accessible from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 and are less important than the main control board 1310 and payout control board 633, such as the sensor board 1052 provided in the magnetic sensor 1050, the function display board 1402 provided in the function display unit 1400, the sensor board for the first start hole sensor 3002 provided in the first start hole 2002, and the sensor board for the second start hole sensor 2401 provided in the second start hole 2004, do not have either thermal pads or thermal lands.

Note that not all of the lands and pads formed on the main control board 1310 and electrically and physically connected to the solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) 1312 are necessarily thermal lands or thermal pads. Alternatively, some of the lands and pads electrically and physically connected to the solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) 1312 may be formed as thermal lands or thermal pads, with the remaining lands and pads being formed as regular lands and pads without thermal patterns. For example, lands (vias) and pads formed around the thermal lands and thermal pads and electrically and physically connected to the solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) 1312, but on which no electronic components are mounted, may be formed as regular lands (vias) and pads without thermal patterns.

Furthermore, in this example, the thermal pattern 1310v of the thermal land 1310s' provided for capacitor MC1 and the thermal pattern 1310v of the thermal pad 1310k' provided for IC1 are formed in different directions. Specifically, in Figure 374(A), the thermal pattern 1310v of the thermal land 1310s' provided for capacitor MC1 is formed in an orientation that intersects with the base end side at a 45-degree angle and is electrically and physically connected to the solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) 1312, while the thermal pattern 1310v of the thermal pad 1310k' provided for IC1 is formed in an orientation that intersects with the base end side vertically or horizontally and is electrically and physically connected to the solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) 1312. In Figure 374(A), the vertical direction corresponds to the base end of the long side of the main control board 1310, and the horizontal direction corresponds to the base end of the short side of the main control board 1310.

In this way, the thermal pattern 1310v of the thermal land 1310s' provided for the lead-type capacitor MC1, which is adjacent to the lead-type capacitor MC1 across the non-mountable area, and the thermal pattern 1310v of the thermal pad 1310k' provided for the surface-mountable IC1 are formed in different directions. This not only increases the bending strength in a specific direction (for example, along the long side or the short side), but also increases the bending strength in a direction tilted 45 degrees from the specific direction. This makes it possible to prevent specific electronic components, such as the surface-mountable IC1, from peeling off compared to when the thermal pattern 1310v of the thermal land 1310s' provided for the lead-type capacitor MC1, which is adjacent to the lead-type capacitor MC1 across the non-mountable area, and the thermal pattern 1310v of the thermal pad 1310k' provided for the surface-mountable IC1 are formed in the same direction.

Generally, the smaller the substrate size, the less likely deformation such as warping or bending will occur. For this reason, in this example, the sensor board 1052 provided for the magnetic sensor 1050, the function display board 1402 provided for the function display unit 1400, the sensor board for the first start port sensor 3002 provided for the first start port 2002, and the sensor board for the second start port sensor 2401 provided for the second start port 2004 are formed with smaller substrate sizes than the main control board 1310, the dispensing control board 633, and the peripheral control board 1510. This prevents deformation such as warping or bending from occurring in the sensor board 1052 provided for the magnetic sensor 1050, the function display board 1402 provided for the function display unit 1400, the sensor board for the first start port sensor 3002 provided for the first start port 2002, and the sensor board for the second start port sensor 2401 provided for the second start port 2004.

Furthermore, as described above, the sensor board 1052 provided in the magnetic sensor 1050, the function display board 1402 provided in the function display unit 1400, the sensor board of the first starting port sensor 3002 provided in the first starting port 2002, and the sensor board of the second starting port sensor 2401 provided in the second starting port 2004 are fixed and housed in a housing such as a case. In this way, being fixed to the case also helps to prevent deformation such as warping and bending.

Furthermore, among the sub-side boards, those accessible from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the various decorative boards (such as the rear left movable decorative board 3311A) provided on the game board 5) are formed in a smaller board size than the main control board 1310, payout control board 633, and peripheral control board 1510, but are formed in a larger board size than main-side boards accessible from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 and that are less important than the main control board 1310 and payout control board 633, such as the sensor board 1052 provided on the magnetic sensor 1050, the function display board 1402 provided on the function display unit 1400, the sensor board for the first start hole sensor 3002 provided on the first start hole 2002, and the sensor board for the second start hole sensor 2401 provided on the second start hole 2004, etc.

As described above, the main control board 1310 and the delivery control board 633 are mounted with both surface-mounted and insertion-mounted electronic components, and notations indicating the attributes of the electronic components, such as the component number and the area indicating the location where the electronic components are to be placed (which may also include the shape, size, orientation (mounting direction), and model of the electronic components), are silk-screened in white paint, which stands out against the green, onto a solid green resist coating on the main control board 1310 and the delivery control board 633. Only surface-mounted electronic components are mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, and notations indicating the attributes of the electronic components, such as the component number and the area indicating the location where the electronic components are to be placed (which may also include the shape, size, orientation (mounting direction), and model of the electronic components), are silk-screened in white paint, which stands out against the green, onto a solid green resist coating on the peripheral control board 1510.

Furthermore, on the sub-side boards accessible from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the various decorative boards (rear left movable decorative board 3311A, etc.) provided on the gaming board 5), only surface-mounted electronic components are mounted, and notation indicating the attributes of the electronic components, such as the component number and the area indicating the position where the electronic component is to be placed (which may also include the shape, size, mounting orientation (direction), and model of the electronic component), is silk-screened in yellow paint, which is inconspicuous against white and has a similar reflectivity, onto a solid white resist applied to the sub-side boards accessible from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the various decorative boards (rear left movable decorative board 3311A, etc.) provided on the gaming board 5).

Furthermore, on boards less important than the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633, such as the sensor board 1052 provided on the magnetic sensor 1050, the function display board 1402 provided on the function display unit 1400, the sensor board of the first start port sensor 3002 provided on the first start port 2002, and the sensor board of the second start port sensor 2401 provided on the second start port 2004, only surface-mounted electronic components are mounted and are coated with a solid white, green, or black resist, but no notation indicating the attributes of the electronic components, such as the part number of the electronic component, the area indicating the position where the electronic component is to be placed (which may also include the shape of the electronic component, the size of the electronic component, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the electronic component, and the model of the electronic component) is silk-screened.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the sub-side boards that are accessible from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the various decorative boards (such as the rear left movable decorative board 3311A) provided on the game board 5) are smaller than the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, and the peripheral control board 1510, and are formed in a larger board size than the main side boards that are accessible from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 and are less important than the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, such as the sensor board 1052 provided on the magnetic sensor 1050, the function display board 1402 provided on the function display unit 1400, the sensor board of the first start port sensor 3002 provided on the first start port 2002, and the sensor board of the second start port sensor 2401 provided on the second start port 2004. The main control board 1310, payout control board 633, and peripheral control board 1510 have the greatest number of patterns, followed by sub-side boards that are accessible from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 (such as the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 (such as the rear left movable decorative board 3311A)). The fewest patterns are formed on main side boards that are accessible from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 and are less important than the main control board 1310 and payout control board 633, such as the sensor board 1052 provided on the magnetic sensor 1050, the function display board 1402 provided on the function display unit 1400, the sensor board for the first start hole sensor 3002 provided on the first start hole 2002, and the sensor board for the second start hole sensor 2401 provided on the second start hole 2004.

For this reason, the sub-side boards that are accessible from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the various decorative boards (such as the rear left movable decorative board 3311A) provided on the game board 5) are the main-side boards that are accessible from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, and are more susceptible to deformation such as warping or bending than boards that are less important than the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, such as the sensor board 1052 provided on the magnetic sensor 1050, the function display board 1402 provided on the function display unit 1400, the sensor board for the first start hole sensor 3002 provided on the first start hole 2002, and the sensor board for the second start hole sensor 2401 provided on the second start hole 2004.

In this example, for the sub-side boards that can be accessed from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 (such as the rear left movable decorative board 3311A)), a solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) is formed over almost the entire area, and the pads to which the GND terminals of the mounted electronic components are connected are formed as thermal pads with thermal patterns.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 373, the pads to which the GND terminals of IC 3311e, capacitor 3311f, and connector 3311g mounted on the back surface (back board surface) of rear left movable decorative board 3311A are connected are formed as thermal pads 3311A1a, 3311A1b, and 3311A1c with thermal patterns. As described above, by forming them as thermal pads with thermal patterns, heat is less likely to be transferred to the solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) compared to regular pads without thermal patterns, which suppresses temperature drop (heat dissipation) when soldering surface-mount electronic components and ensures that the solder on the thermal pads can be melted more reliably, making it possible to weld surface-mount electronic components more firmly than with regular pads.

In this example, only surface-mount type (chip component) electronic components are mounted on the rear-left movable decorative board 3311A. However, by forming the pads 3311A1a, 3311A1b, and 3311A1c, to which the GND terminals of these surface-mount type electronic components are connected, as thermal pads with thermal patterns, heat is less likely to be transferred to the solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) 3311A1 compared to regular pads without thermal patterns. This reduces the temperature drop (heat dissipation) when soldering surface-mount type electronic components, ensuring reliable melting of the solder on the thermal pads. This makes it possible to more firmly weld surface-mount type electronic components to the rear-left movable decorative board 3311A compared to regular pads, making them less likely to peel off (come off) even if the rear-left movable decorative board 3311A is bent or warped.

As shown in Figure 374, a thermal land is formed to have a maximum of four thermal patterns, each of which is connected (electrically and physically) to a solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)). In contrast, a thermal pad is formed to have a maximum of three thermal patterns, each of which is connected (electrically and physically) to a solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)). In this way, a thermal land is connected to a solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) by a maximum of four thermal patterns, and a thermal pad is connected to a solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) by a maximum of three thermal patterns.

In addition, the thermal patterns from the thermal lands and thermal pads to the solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) are made shorter than the non-mountable area. As mentioned above, the thermal lands are connected to the solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) by more thermal patterns than the thermal pads, and their connection to the solid pattern is stronger than that of the thermal pads, making them less likely to peel off.

In this way, for the main control board 1310 and payout control board 633, which among the main boards perform important processes related to the progress of the game and important processes related to the player's profits (prize balls), thermal lands with higher peel strength (less likely to peel) than thermal pads are formed, and by forming thermal pads, bending and warping are suppressed, and peeling of the wiring pattern is also suppressed, thereby increasing the rigidity of the board and improving the reliability of the gaming machine.

In addition, the sensor board 1052 provided on the magnetic sensor 1050, the function display board 1402 provided on the function display unit 1400, the sensor board of the first start port sensor 3002 provided on the first start port 2002, and the sensor board of the second start port sensor 2401 provided on the second start port 2004 are formed without forming thermal lands or thermal pads, with a board size that is less than one-tenth of the main control board 1310 and the dispensing control board 633, and are fixed and housed in a case, thereby preventing deformation such as warping and bending.

Furthermore, among the sub-side boards, boards accessible from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 (such as the rear left movable decorative board 3311A)) are formed with a board size smaller than the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, but larger than the sensor board 1052 provided on the magnetic sensor 1050, the function display board 1402 provided on the function display unit 1400, the sensor board of the first start opening sensor 3002 provided on the first start opening 2002, and the sensor board of the second start opening sensor 2401 provided on the second start opening 2004. ) are smaller in size than the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and are therefore less susceptible to deformation such as bending or warping. However, they are larger in size than the sensor board 1052 provided in the magnetic sensor 1050, the function display board 1402 provided in the function display unit 1400, the sensor board of the first start hole sensor 3002 provided in the first start hole 2002, and the sensor board of the second start hole sensor 2401 provided in the second start hole 2004, and are therefore more susceptible to deformation such as bending or warping than these boards. For this reason, sub-side boards accessible from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 (such as the rear left movable decorative board 3311A)) are configured to suppress bending and warping by forming thermal pads.

In other words, in this example, different technologies are used to increase the strength of the board depending on the importance and size of the board, providing optimal strength for each. This prevents excessive strength being added to less important boards (over-spec) or insufficient strength for important boards (reducing insufficient strength), thereby providing optimal strength for each and improving the reliability of the gaming machine.

In addition, the peripheral control board 1510, which has a board size approximately equal to that of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, is a board of less importance than the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and therefore has a smaller board size than the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633, and may have a configuration similar to that of the sub-side boards that are accessible from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, various decorative boards (such as the rear left movable decorative board 3311A) provided on the game board 5), which are formed with a board size larger than the sensor board 1052 provided on the magnetic sensor 1050, the function display board 1402 provided on the function display unit 1400, the sensor board of the first start port sensor 3002 provided on the first start port 2002, and the sensor board of the second start port sensor 2401 provided on the second start port 2004. That is, by mounting only surface-mount type (chip component) electronic components on the peripheral control board 1510 and forming the pads to which the GND terminals of these surface-mount type electronic components are connected as thermal pads with thermal patterns, heat is less likely to be transferred to the solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) compared to normal pads, temperature drop when soldering surface-mount type electronic components (heat dissipation is suppressed), the solder on the thermal pad is reliably melted, and the surface-mount type electronic components are more firmly welded to the peripheral control board 1510 than with normal pads, making them less likely to peel off (come off) even if the peripheral control board 1510 is bent or warped.

The connectors mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 may be configured to be inserted into through-holes formed in the peripheral control board 1510 using lead-type electronic components (also called lead components). In this case, the lands of the through-holes to which the GND terminals of the connectors are soldered may be configured as thermal lands. In this case, the welding between the connectors and the peripheral control board 1510 is strong, preventing the wiring pattern and lands from peeling off when the connectors are inserted or removed. As shown in FIG. 170, the connectors on the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged in a row along the longitudinal side. Strong welding between the connectors and the peripheral control board 1510 prevents bending and warping of the longitudinal side of the peripheral control board 1510. Furthermore, the use of thermal pads allows surface-mount electronic components to be welded more firmly to the peripheral control board 1510 than with ordinary pads, making them less likely to peel off (detach) even if the peripheral control board 1510 bends or warps.

[Modification 2 for increasing the strength of the substrate]
As described above, in this example, the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 that executes important processes related to the progress of the game has a lead-type capacitor MC1 disposed adjacent to the surface-mount type IC1 (across an area where mounting is not possible), and of the two through holes 1310r into which the lead terminal MC1a of this capacitor MC1 is inserted, the through hole 1301r connected to the solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) 1312 has a thermal pattern 1310v. Furthermore, among the pads 1310k to which the connection terminal IC1a of IC1 is soldered, the pad 1310k connected to the solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) 1312 is formed as a thermal pad 1310k' having a thermal pattern 1310v, thereby increasing the strength of the main control board 1310 and suppressing bending and warping, and preventing surface-mounted electronic components from peeling off (detaching from mounting).

On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 does not perform important processes related to the progress of the game or the player's profits (prize balls), but it does perform important processes related to the presentation of the game. For this reason, in this example, the strength (bending strength, rigidity) of the peripheral control board 1510 is increased to prevent the electronic components mounted thereon from peeling off. Below, Variation 2, which increases the strength of the board, will be explained with reference to Figure 374 (B). Furthermore, in Variation 2, which increases the strength of the board, only the parts that differ from the above embodiment will be explained, and duplicate explanations will not be provided.

Note that while the following description focuses on the peripheral control board 1510, this technical concept can be applied to any board on which a specific electronic component (e.g., an IC) and an electronic component (e.g., a capacitor) are mounted adjacent to the specific electronic component across a mount-prohibited area. It can also be implemented in combination with the above-described embodiments. For example, it can be implemented in combination with one or more of Improvement in Ease of Identifying Tampering 1 to Improvement in Ease of Identifying Tampering 3, Prevention of Peeling of Surface-Mounted Electronic Components 1 to Prevention of Peeling of Surface-Mounted Electronic Components 4, and Variation 1 for Increasing the Strength of the Board.

Figure 374 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the mounting state of a peripheral control board 1510, which increases the strength of the board, with a surface-mount type (chip component, SMD type) IC as a specific electronic component and a surface-mount type (chip component, SMD type) capacitor placed adjacent to the IC with a non-mountable area between them.

In this example, a solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) 1513 is formed on almost the entire surface (mounting surface) 1510x and back surface (soldering surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510, except for about 1 mm of the base end. Multiple surface-mount electronic components are mounted on the board, including multiple surface-mount ICs 1 that are fixed to the board by soldering connection terminals IC1a to pads 1510k, 1510k' formed on the board surface, and multiple surface-mount capacitors MC1' that are fixed to the board by soldering connection terminals (electrodes) MC1a' to pads 1510k, 1510k' formed on the board surface.

In this example, a surface-mount type capacitor MC1' is placed adjacent to the surface-mount type IC1 (with a non-mountable area in between), and one of the pads 1510k, 1510k' to which the connection terminal MC1a' of this capacitor MC1' is soldered is formed as thermal pad 1510k' having thermal pattern 1510v (hatched area in Figure 374 (B)) that electrically and physically connects the pad to solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) 1513.

In this way, by forming one of the pads 1510k, 1510k' to which the surface mount type capacitor MC1' is soldered as a thermal pad 1510k', heat is less likely to be transferred to the solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) 1513) compared to a normal pad 1510k that does not have a thermal pattern 1510v and whose periphery is directly connected to the solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) 1513 (formed integrally with the solid pattern 1513), and therefore the surface mount type capacitor MC This suppresses the temperature drop when soldering MC1' (suppresses heat dissipation), allowing the solder on thermal pad 1510k' to melt reliably, making it possible to weld capacitor MC1' more firmly to peripheral control board 1510 than with a normal pad 1510k. Furthermore, stronger welding between capacitor MC1' and peripheral control board 1510 makes peripheral control board 1510 less likely to bend or warp, and makes it less likely that a surface-mounted IC placed adjacent to capacitor MC1' will come off, improving the reliability of pachinko machine 1.

In addition, in this example, the surface-mount type IC1 placed adjacent to the surface-mount type capacitor MC1' is also configured to prevent peeling. Specifically, as shown in Figure 374(B), one of the multiple pads 1510k, 1510k' to which the connection terminal IC1a of IC1 is soldered is formed as a thermal pad having a thermal pattern 1510v (hatched area in Figure 374(B)) that electrically and physically connects the pad to a solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) 1513.

In this way, by forming one of the pads 1510k, 1510k' to which the connection terminal IC1a of the surface-mount type IC1 is soldered as a thermal pad 1510k', heat is less likely to be transferred to the solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) compared to a normal pad that does not have a thermal pattern 1510v and is directly connected (formed integrally with the solid pattern 1513) to the solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) 1513, thereby suppressing temperature drop (heat dissipation) when soldering the surface-mount type IC. Because the solder on the thermal pad 1510k' can be reliably melted, it is possible to weld the IC1 more firmly to the peripheral control board 1510 than with a normal pad 1510k. In addition to the stronger welding between the capacitor MC1a' and the peripheral control board 1510, the stronger welding between the IC1 and the peripheral control board 1510 not only makes it less likely that the capacitor MC1 will cause the peripheral control board 1510 to bend or warp, but even if the peripheral control board 1510 does bend or warp, the IC1 is less likely to come off (detach from its mounting), improving the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, it is not necessary for all pads formed on the peripheral control board 1510 and electrically and physically connected to the solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) 1513 to be formed as thermal pads. Some of the lands and pads electrically and physically connected to the solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) 1513 may be formed as thermal lands or thermal pads, with the remaining lands and pads formed as normal lands and pads without thermal patterns. For example, lands (vias) and pads formed around the thermal pad and electrically and physically connected to the solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) 1513, but on which no electronic components are mounted, may be formed as normal lands (vias) and pads without thermal patterns.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the distance (length of thermal patterns 1310v, 1510v) from thermal land 1310s' and thermal pad 1510k' to solid patterns (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) 1312, 1513 is shorter than the distance between adjacent electronic components across the non-mountable area. As a result, even if a force is applied that would peel off an electronic component soldered to thermal land 1310s' or thermal pad 1510k', the solid patterns (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) 1312, 1513 adjacent to thermal land 1310s' or thermal pad 1510k' make it difficult for thermal land 1310s' or thermal pad 1510k' to peel off, and furthermore, the welding between thermal land 1310s' or thermal pad 1510k' and surface-mounted electronic components is strengthened, making it difficult for surface-mounted electronic components to peel off.

In this example, of the multiple pads 1510k to which the connection terminal IC1a of IC1 is soldered, the pad 1510k' located away from the adjacent capacitor MC1' to ensure stable operation of IC1 is formed as a thermal pad 1510k' having a thermal pattern 1510v. Specifically, of the multiple pads 1510k, 1510k' provided corresponding to the multiple connection terminals IC1a provided along the long sides of IC1, the pad provided corresponding to the connection terminal IC1a located closest to the short side on the left side of the figure where capacitor MC1' is not provided is formed as thermal pad 1510k'.

As described above, by forming the pad to which one of the connection terminals MC1a' of the surface-mount capacitor MC1' is soldered as thermal pad 1510k', the bending strength and rigidity of the area surrounding capacitor MC1' on the peripheral control board 1510 are increased, suppressing bending and warping. Furthermore, because bending strength and rigidity are higher the closer to capacitor MC1', connection terminal IC1a located closer to capacitor MC1' of IC1 is less likely to peel off from pad 1510k. On the other hand, because bending strength and rigidity decrease with increasing distance from capacitor MC1', bending and warping of the peripheral control board 1510 become more likely to occur the further away from capacitor MC1', and connection terminal IC1a located farther from capacitor MC1' of IC1 is more likely to peel off from pad 1510k. For this reason, in this example, among the pads 1510k to which the connection terminal IC1a of the surface-mount type IC1 is soldered, thermal pad 1510k' is formed at a position away from the adjacent capacitor MC1' to ensure stable operation of said IC1. As a result, the bending strength and rigidity decrease due to the distance from capacitor MC1', and in the area where the welding between IC1's connection terminal IC1a and pad 1510k is likely to come off, thermal pad 1510k' is formed, making the welding with IC1's connection terminal IC1a stronger than the other pads 1510k. This increases the bending strength and rigidity of the peripheral control board 1510, making it less likely that IC1's connection terminal IC1a will come off thermal pad 1510k'.

In addition, the pad to which one of the connection terminals MC1a' of the surface-mount type capacitor MC1' is soldered is formed as a thermal pad 1510k' having a thermal pattern 1510v. Among the pads 1510k to which the connection terminal IC1a of the surface-mount type IC1 is soldered, a thermal pad 1510k' having a thermal pattern 1510v is formed at a position away from the adjacent capacitor MC1' to stably drive the IC1. This allows the thermal pad 1510k' provided for the capacitor MC1' to be 10k' and thermal pad 1510k' provided for IC1 sandwich almost the entire area where IC1 is mounted, increasing the rigidity of almost the entire area where IC1 is mounted, thereby suppressing bending and warping of the area where IC1 is mounted, and improving the effectiveness of suppressing peeling off of IC1 compared to when all of pads 1510k, 1510k' to which connection terminal IC1a of surface-mount type IC1 are soldered are formed from normal pads without thermal pattern 1510v, thereby improving the reliability of pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, in this example, the thermal pattern 1510v of the thermal pad 1510k' provided for capacitor MC1' and the thermal pattern 1510v of the thermal pad 1510k' provided for IC1 are formed in the same direction. Specifically, the thermal pattern 1510v of the thermal pad 1510k' provided for capacitor MC1' in Figure 374(B) and the thermal pattern 1510v of the thermal pad 1510k' provided for IC1 are both formed in a direction that intersects perpendicularly or horizontally with the base end, and are electrically and physically connected to the solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) 1513. Note that in Figure 374(B), the up-down direction corresponds to the base end of the long side of the peripheral control board 1510, and the left-right direction corresponds to the base end of the short side of the peripheral control board 1510.

In this way, the thermal pattern 1510v of the thermal pad 1510k' provided for the surface-mount type capacitor MC1', which is adjacently arranged across the non-mountable area, and the thermal pattern 1510v of the thermal pad 1510k' provided for the surface-mount type IC1 are formed in the same direction, which further increases the bending strength in specific directions (for example, along the long sides or short sides), suppresses bending or warping in specific directions, and prevents specific electronic components such as the surface-mount type IC1 from peeling off.

As described above, by arranging the lead-type capacitor MC1 adjacent to the surface-mount type IC1 on the main control board 1310, the bending strength and rigidity are increased compared to the peripheral control board 1510, which arranges the surface-mount type capacitor MC1' adjacent to the surface-mount type IC1. Furthermore, on the main control board 1310, the thermal pattern 1310v of the thermal land 1310s' provided for the lead-type capacitor MC1, which is arranged adjacent to the surface-mount type IC1 across an unmountable area, and the thermal pattern 1310v of the thermal pad 1310k' provided for the surface-mount type IC1 are formed in different directions, increasing bending strength not only in a specific direction but also in a direction tilted 45 degrees from the specific direction. This results in higher bending strength and rigidity compared to the peripheral control board 1510, and is highly effective in preventing certain electronic components, such as the surface-mount type IC1, from peeling off. In this way, the main control board 1310, which executes important processes related to the progress of the game, is configured to have the highest bending strength and rigidity, while the peripheral control board 1510, which is not related to the progress of the game but controls the game presentation, is configured to have higher bending strength and rigidity than the decorative board on which LEDs and the like are mounted, but lower bending strength and rigidity than the main control board 1310. In other words, the boards are configured to have bending strength and rigidity appropriate to their importance (such as the degree of disadvantage to players and gaming parlors).

[Thermal land, thermal pad]
Next, we will explain thermal lands and thermal pads. Figures 375(A) to 375(L) are explanatory diagrams showing thermal lands for GND connection, Figures 375(M) to 375(P) are explanatory diagrams showing thermal pads for GND connection, Figure 375(Q) is an explanatory diagram showing a land for normal GND connection formed integrally with a solid pattern, and Figure 375(R) is an explanatory diagram showing a pad for normal GND connection formed integrally with a solid pattern. Note that while the solder resist (insulating coating) is omitted in Figure 375, in reality, the entire surface (including the thermal pattern) excluding the pads and lands is covered with solder resist. Note that, similar to the configuration in which the lands of the input signal wiring pattern through-holes are covered with an insulating coating in the first to fourth embodiments, portions of the pads and lands for GND connection may also be covered with solder resist.

As shown in Figure 375(Q), a land for normal GND connection is formed integrally with the solid pattern by exposing copper foil in a circular shape without covering part of the solid pattern with solder resist, and as shown in Figure 375(R), a pad for normal GND connection is formed integrally with the solid pattern by exposing copper foil in a rectangular shape without covering part of the solid pattern with solder resist.

On the other hand, as shown in Figures 375(A) to (L), a thermal land for GND connection consists of a circular land formed separately from the solid pattern and a thermal pattern formed around the land, electrically and physically connecting the land and solid pattern via the thermal pattern.

The thermal lands are classified into two types: those formed at an angle of 45 degrees to the base end edge, with the thermal pattern positioned to electrically and physically connect with the solid pattern (Figs. 375(A)-(F)), and those formed at an angle of vertical or horizontal to the base end, with the thermal pattern positioned to electrically and physically connect with the solid pattern (Figs. 375(G)-(L)). As mentioned above, the direction in which bending strength is increased can be changed by changing the orientation of the thermal pattern. Note that only one of the above two types of thermal lands may be formed, or both may be formed. Furthermore, when both types of thermal lands are formed, one may be formed in fewer numbers than the other, so that the other thermal pattern can be used as a marker.

In addition, a maximum of four thermal patterns can be provided for the thermal land, with virtual lines extending from each thermal pattern intersecting at 90 degrees at the center of the through hole.

On the other hand, the thermal pad is formed in a direction that intersects vertically or horizontally with the base end, and only has a thermal pattern arranged so that it is electrically and physically connected to the solid pattern (Figures 375 (M) to (P)). This allows for increased bending strength only in the vertical or horizontal direction with respect to the base end.

The thermal pad also has up to three thermal patterns, with virtual lines extending from each thermal pattern intersecting at 90 degrees at the center of the pad.

As such, thermal lands are electrically connected to a solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) by up to four thermal patterns, while thermal pads are electrically connected to a solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) by up to three thermal patterns. This means that thermal lands have a stronger physical connection to the solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) than thermal pads, making them less susceptible to peeling.

In other words, the main control board 1310 and payout control board 633 are configured to be stronger because they perform important processes related to the progress of the game and important processes related to the player's profits (prize balls), while the peripheral control board 1510, which is less important than the main control board 1310 and payout control board 633 and performs control related to the game's presentation, is not given excessive strength and is made to be weaker than the main control board 1310 and payout control board 633. In this way, by varying the strength of the boards according to their importance, it is possible to prevent excessive strength increases for less important boards (over-spec) and insufficient strength for important boards (insufficient strength), and the reliability of the gaming machine can be improved by providing optimal strength for each.

The same effect can be achieved by adopting the above configuration on any board, not just the peripheral control board 1510, in which a surface-mount type (chip component) capacitor is placed adjacent to a surface-mount type (chip component) IC (across an area where mounting is not possible). Furthermore, while the above example was described for the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, the same effect can also be achieved by adopting the above configuration on the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510.

Among the control boards installed in gaming machines, the main control board, which handles information related to gaming benefits, has several fraud prevention measures in place to ensure fairness. However, if the entire main control board is replaced with a counterfeit, it is not easy to detect. On the other hand, the daily in/out information for each gaming machine is managed by the hall computer connected to the gaming machine, so it is possible to detect gaming machines exhibiting suspicious behavior. Therefore, the main control board of the gaming machine of this embodiment has the following additional fraud prevention measures in place.
(1) When a harness that connects a peripheral control board, a delivery control board, or a panel relay board has a connector (plug connector) on both ends that is the insertion side and is connected to a connector (receptacle connector) on the receiving side, the joint cannot be seen from the outside. Taking advantage of this, the control number such as the connector model number and the name of the manufacturer of the delivery destination are written on the inside of the bottom edge or side wall of the receptacle connector provided on the main control board. The part to be written needs to be invisible when connected, and it may be written on the top of the side wall, etc.
(2) Also, since it is sufficient for the person checking to recognize that the markings are written in that area, the size of the markings themselves is written in a size that is difficult to see with the naked eye and can only be seen with a magnifying glass such as a loupe.
(3) The color of the marking itself is the same as the exterior color without any coloring, and is formed in an uneven shape so that it can be seen by the shadows when light is shone on it.
(4) In addition, once the connector is mounted on the main control board, it may be made completely invisible. Even in this case, it is sufficient for the person checking to recognize that it is written in that location, so it may be written, for example, on the back of the connector. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, too, it is written on the back of the receptacle connector to which the start port sensor that detects balls entering the start port is directly connected.
(5) Furthermore, the part to be marked may be marked in only one place or in multiple places.
(6) The number of connectors to be marked may be one or more. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, a connector to which (2) is applied and a connector to which (4) is applied are combined and implemented. By combining them, it is possible to identify that the main control board is a counterfeit imitation.
In this way, even after the fact, it is possible to strengthen the crime prevention system, which will also lead to deterrence and minimize damage.

The technical ideas of the claims and other aspects that can be understood from the above embodiments are described below, along with their effects.

A gaming machine (such as a pachinko machine or slot machine) equipped with a main control board 1310 related to the progress of a game,
Of the mounting surface 1310x and the solder surface 1310y of the main control board 1310, at least the mounting surface 1310x has a plurality of insertion-mount type electronic components (in this example, a capacitor MC1) and a plurality of surface-mount type electronic components mounted thereon.
A specific electronic component (IC1 in this example) among the surface-mount type electronic components mounted on the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the insertion-mount type electronic component (capacitor MC1 in this example) are adjacently disposed with an electronic component mounting unavailability area A interposed therebetween.
It is characterized by:

A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1, slot machine, etc.) that includes a main board related to the progress of a game (for example, a main control board 1310, a payout control board 633, a function display board 1402 provided in a function display unit 1400, a magnetic sensor board provided in a magnetic sensor 1050, a sensor board of a first start hole sensor 3002 provided in a first start hole 2002, and a sensor board of a second start hole sensor 2401 provided in a second start hole 2004, etc.),
The main side boards (for example, the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, the function display board 1402 provided in the function display unit 1400, the magnetic sensor board provided in the magnetic sensor 1050, the sensor board of the first start opening sensor 3002 provided in the first start opening 2002, and the sensor board of the second start opening sensor 2401 provided in the second start opening 2004, etc.) are provided on the back side (the island equipment side, in the case of a slot machine, the rear side inside the main body part (box body) 6004) of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1, slot machine) and implemented. a main control board 1310 arranged so that a display surface 1310x faces the rear side of the gaming machine, and a second main side board (such as a function display board 1402 provided in the function display unit 1400, a magnetic sensor board provided in the magnetic sensor 1050, a sensor board for a first start hole sensor 3002 provided in a first start hole 2002, or a sensor board for a second start hole sensor 2401 provided in a second start hole 2004) provided on the front side (player side) of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1, slot machine, etc.) of the main control board 1310,
A plurality of insertion-mount type electronic components (in this example, a capacitor MC1) and surface-mount type electronic components are mounted on the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310, and a surface-side marking section is formed to indicate a component number by which the electronic components can be identified.
At least a plurality of surface-mount type electronic components are mounted on the front mounting surface of the second main-side board, but no front-side marking portion indicating the component number is formed thereon;
A specific electronic component (IC1 in this example) among the surface-mount type electronic components mounted on the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the insertion-mount type electronic component (capacitor MC1 in this example) are adjacently disposed with an electronic component mounting unavailability area A interposed therebetween.
It is characterized by:

A gaming machine (such as a pachinko machine or slot machine) that includes a main control board 1310 that is involved in the progress of a game and a plurality of connectors (in this example, connectors MCN1 to MCN6) that connect wiring to the main control board 1310.
Of the mounting surface 1310x and the solder surface 1310y of the main control board 1310, at least the mounting surface 1310x has a plurality of insertion-mount type electronic components (in this example, a capacitor MC1) and a plurality of surface-mount type electronic components mounted thereon.
The plurality of connectors (in this example, connectors MCN1 to MCN6) are insertion-mount type electronic components (in this example, capacitor MC1),
A specific connector (in this example, connectors MCN1 to MCN6) among the plurality of connectors (in this example, connectors MCN1 to MCN6) is arranged along one end side of the main control board 1310 (in this example, at least one of the longest combination of four sides of the main control board 1310),
On the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310, a specific electronic component (e.g., IC1) among the plurality of surface mount type electronic components is arranged so that at least a portion thereof is arranged within a strip-shaped area defined by imaginary division lines (at least two adjacent division lines among imaginary division lines a to l) extending from both the left and right ends of the specific connector (in this example, connectors MCN1 to MCN6) in the direction of the side opposite to the one end side.
It is characterized by:

A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1, slot machine, etc.) that includes a main board related to the progress of a game (for example, a main control board 1310, a payout control board 633, a function display board 1402 provided in a function display unit 1400, a magnetic sensor board provided in a magnetic sensor 1050, a sensor board of a first start hole sensor 3002 provided in a first start hole 2002, and a sensor board of a second start hole sensor 2401 provided in a second start hole 2004, etc.),
The main side boards (for example, the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, the function display board 1402 provided in the function display unit 1400, the magnetic sensor board provided in the magnetic sensor 1050, the sensor board of the first start opening sensor 3002 provided in the first start opening 2002, and the sensor board of the second start opening sensor 2401 provided in the second start opening 2004, etc.) are provided on the back side (the island equipment side, in the case of a slot machine, the rear side inside the main body part (box body) 6004) of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1, slot machine) and implemented. a main control board 1310 arranged so that a display surface 1310x faces the rear side of the gaming machine, and a second main side board (such as a function display board 1402 provided in the function display unit 1400, a magnetic sensor board provided in the magnetic sensor 1050, a sensor board for a first start hole sensor 3002 provided in a first start hole 2002, or a sensor board for a second start hole sensor 2401 provided in a second start hole 2004) provided on the front side (player side) of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1, slot machine, etc.) of the main control board 1310,
A plurality of insertion-mount type electronic components (in this example, a capacitor MC1) and surface-mount type electronic components are mounted on the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310, and a surface-side marking section is formed to indicate a component number by which the electronic components can be identified.
At least a plurality of surface-mount type electronic components are mounted on the front mounting surface of the second main-side board, but no front-side marking portion indicating the component number is formed thereon;
An insertion-mount type electronic component (in this example, a capacitor MC1) mounted on the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310 includes a plurality of connectors (in this example, connectors MCN1 to MCN6) that connect wiring to the main control board 1310,
A specific connector (in this example, connectors MCN1 to MCN6) among the plurality of connectors (in this example, connectors MCN1 to MCN6) is arranged along one end side of the main control board 1310 (in this example, at least one of the longest combination of four sides of the main control board 1310),
On the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310, a specific electronic component (e.g., IC1) among the plurality of surface mount type electronic components is arranged so that at least a portion thereof is arranged within a strip-shaped area defined by imaginary division lines (at least two adjacent division lines among imaginary division lines a to l) extending from both the left and right ends of the specific connector (in this example, connectors MCN1 to MCN6) in the direction of the side opposite to the one end side.
It is characterized by:

A gaming machine (such as a pachinko machine or slot machine) equipped with a main control board 1310 related to the progress of a game,
A plurality of surface-mount type electronic components are mounted on at least the mounting surface 1310x of the mounting surface 1310x and the solder surface 1310y of the main control board 1310,
The main control board 1310 is
A front mounting surface side wiring pattern arranged on the mounting surface 1310x;
a solder surface side wiring pattern arranged on the solder surface 1310y;
a through hole electrically connecting the front substrate surface wiring pattern and the solder surface wiring pattern,
A specific through-hole among the through-holes formed in the main control board 1310 is disposed adjacent to a specific electronic component (IC1 in this example) among the plurality of surface-mount type electronic components, and has a thermal land on at least one of the surface mounting surface 1310x and the solder surface 1310y.
It is characterized by:

A gaming machine (such as a pachinko machine or slot machine) equipped with a main control board 1310 related to the progress of a game,
The main side boards (for example, the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, the function display board 1402 provided in the function display unit 1400, the magnetic sensor board provided in the magnetic sensor 1050, the sensor board of the first start opening sensor 3002 provided in the first start opening 2002, and the sensor board of the second start opening sensor 2401 provided in the second start opening 2004, etc.) are provided on the back side (the island equipment side, in the case of a slot machine, the rear side inside the main body part (box body) 6004) of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1, slot machine) and implemented. a main control board 1310 arranged so that a display surface 1310x faces the rear side of the gaming machine, and a second main side board (such as a function display board 1402 provided in the function display unit 1400, a magnetic sensor board provided in the magnetic sensor 1050, a sensor board for a first start hole sensor 3002 provided in a first start hole 2002, or a sensor board for a second start hole sensor 2401 provided in a second start hole 2004) provided on the front side (player side) of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1, slot machine, etc.) of the main control board 1310,
a plurality of surface-mount type electronic components are mounted on at least the front mounting surface of the main control board 1310 out of the mounting surface 1310x and the rear mounting surface, and a front-side marking section is formed which indicates a component number by which the electronic components can be identified;
At least a plurality of surface-mount type electronic components are mounted on the front mounting surface of the second main-side board, but no front-side marking portion indicating the component number is formed thereon;
The main control board 1310 is
A front mounting surface side wiring pattern arranged on the mounting surface 1310x;
a solder surface side wiring pattern arranged on the solder surface 1310y;
a through hole electrically connecting the front substrate surface wiring pattern and the solder surface wiring pattern,
a through-hole formed adjacent to a specific electronic component (IC1 in this example) among the surface-mount type electronic components mounted on the main control board 1310 has a thermal land as the surface-mount surface-side land,
a specific through-hole among the through-holes formed in the main control board 1310 is disposed adjacent to a specific electronic component (IC1 in this example) among the plurality of surface-mount type electronic components, and has a thermal land on at least one of the surface mounting surface 1310x and the solder surface 1310y;
The second main-side substrate is configured so that the thermal land is not formed thereon.
It is characterized by:

A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1, slot machine, etc.) that includes a main board related to the progress of a game (for example, a main control board 1310, a payout control board 633, a function display board 1402 provided in a function display unit 1400, a magnetic sensor board provided in a magnetic sensor 1050, a sensor board of a first start hole sensor 3002 provided in a first start hole 2002, and a sensor board of a second start hole sensor 2401 provided in a second start hole 2004, etc.),
The main side boards (for example, the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, the function display board 1402 provided in the function display unit 1400, the magnetic sensor board provided in the magnetic sensor 1050, the sensor board of the first start opening sensor 3002 provided in the first start opening 2002, and the sensor board of the second start opening sensor 2401 provided in the second start opening 2004, etc.) are provided on the back side (the island equipment side, in the case of a slot machine, the rear side inside the main body part (box body) 6004) of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1, slot machine) and implemented. a main control board 1310 arranged so that a display surface 1310x faces the rear side of the gaming machine, and a second main side board (such as a function display board 1402 provided in the function display unit 1400, a magnetic sensor board provided in the magnetic sensor 1050, a sensor board for a first start hole sensor 3002 provided in a first start hole 2002, or a sensor board for a second start hole sensor 2401 provided in a second start hole 2004) provided on the front side (player side) of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1, slot machine, etc.) of the main control board 1310,
A resist is formed on the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310, and a plurality of surface-mount type electronic components and insertion-mount type electronic components (in this example, a capacitor MC1) are mounted on the mounting surface 1310x.
A resist is formed on the front mounting surface of the second main-side board, and only a plurality of surface-mount type electronic components are mounted on the front mounting surface of the second main-side board, with no insertion-mount type electronic components being mounted thereon;
The main control board 1310 is provided with a solid ground pattern, and the second main side board is not provided with a solid ground pattern,
The surface-mount type electronic components mounted on the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310 include a specific electronic component (IC1 in this example) having an exterior of a specific color (e.g., black),
The insertion-mount type electronic component (in this example, capacitor MC1) mounted on the front mounting surface of the second main side board (such as the functional display board 1402 provided in the functional display unit 1400, the magnetic sensor board provided in the magnetic sensor 1050, the sensor board of the first starting port sensor 3002 provided in the first starting port 2002, or the sensor board of the second starting port sensor 2401 provided in the second starting port 2004) includes a special electronic component (in this example, IC1) having an exterior of a special color (e.g., light blue) different from the color (e.g., green) of the insulating coating formed on the main control board 1310 and the color (e.g., black) of the specific electronic component (in this example, IC1),
The specific electronic component (IC1 in this example) and the special electronic component (IC1 in this example) are adjacently disposed with an electronic component mounting unavailable area A therebetween.
It is characterized by:

A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1, slot machine, etc.) that includes a main board related to the progress of a game (for example, a main control board 1310, a payout control board 633, a function display board 1402 provided in a function display unit 1400, a magnetic sensor board provided in a magnetic sensor 1050, a sensor board of a first start hole sensor 3002 provided in a first start hole 2002, and a sensor board of a second start hole sensor 2401 provided in a second start hole 2004, etc.),
The main side board (for example, the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, the function display board 1402 provided in the function display unit 1400, the magnetic sensor board provided in the magnetic sensor 1050, the sensor board of the first start hole sensor 3002 provided in the first start hole 2002, and the sensor board of the second start hole sensor 2401 provided in the second start hole 2004, etc.) is provided on the back side (the island equipment side, in the case of a slot machine, the rear side inside the main body part (box body) 6004) of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1, slot machine) and is arranged so that the mounting surface 1310x faces the rear side of the gaming machine. The gaming machine has a main control board 1310 equipped with a main control MPU 1310a that executes control related to the progress of the game (main control main processing and main control timer interrupt processing), and a second main side board (such as a function display board 1402 provided in the function display unit 1400, a magnetic sensor board provided in the magnetic sensor 1050, a sensor board for a first start hole sensor 3002 provided in a first start hole 2002, or a sensor board for a second start hole sensor 2401 provided in a second start hole 2004) that is provided on the front side (player side) of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1, slot machine, etc.) of the main control board 1310,
An insulating coating is formed on the mounting surface 1310x and the rear mounting surface of the main control board 1310, and a plurality of wiring patterns for transmitting signals between electronic components are formed thereon.
A plurality of surface-mount type electronic components and insertion-mount type electronic components (in this example, a capacitor MC1) are mounted on the mounting surface 1310x of the first main control board 1310,
No insertion-mount type electronic components are mounted on the front mounting surface of the second main-side board, and only a plurality of surface-mount type electronic components are mounted on the front mounting surface of the second main-side board,
The plurality of wiring patterns formed on the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310 include more short wiring patterns formed along the short direction of the main control board 1310 than long wiring patterns (e.g., data bus lines) formed along the long direction of the main control board 1310,
The plurality of wiring patterns formed on the solder surface 1310y of the main control board 1310 include more long wiring patterns formed along the long direction of the main control board 1310 than short wiring patterns formed along the short direction of the main control board 1310.
It is characterized by:

A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1, slot machine, etc.) that includes a main board related to the progress of a game (for example, a main control board 1310, a payout control board 633, a function display board 1402 provided in a function display unit 1400, a magnetic sensor board provided in a magnetic sensor 1050, a sensor board of a first start hole sensor 3002 provided in a first start hole 2002, and a sensor board of a second start hole sensor 2401 provided in a second start hole 2004, etc.),
The main side boards (for example, the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, the function display board 1402 provided in the function display unit 1400, the magnetic sensor board provided in the magnetic sensor 1050, the sensor board of the first start opening sensor 3002 provided in the first start opening 2002, and the sensor board of the second start opening sensor 2401 provided in the second start opening 2004, etc.) are provided on the back side (the island equipment side, in the case of a slot machine, the rear side inside the main body part (box body) 6004) of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1, slot machine) and implemented. a main control board 1310 arranged so that a display surface 1310x faces the rear side of the gaming machine, and a second main side board (such as a function display board 1402 provided in the function display unit 1400, a magnetic sensor board provided in the magnetic sensor 1050, a sensor board for a first start hole sensor 3002 provided in a first start hole 2002, or a sensor board for a second start hole sensor 2401 provided in a second start hole 2004) provided on the front side (player side) of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1, slot machine, etc.) of the main control board 1310,
A plurality of insertion-mount type electronic components (in this example, a capacitor MC1) and surface-mount type electronic components are mounted on the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310.
No insertion-mount type electronic components are mounted on the front substrate surface of the second main-side substrate, and only a plurality of surface-mount type electronic components are mounted,
The main control board 1310 is provided with a solid ground pattern (solid ground, solid pattern), and the second main side board is not provided with a solid ground pattern,
An insertion-mount type electronic component (in this example, a capacitor MC1) mounted on the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310 includes a plurality of connectors (in this example, connectors MCN1 to MCN6) that connect wiring to the main control board 1310,
A specific connector (in this example, connectors MCN1 to MCN6) among the plurality of connectors (in this example, connectors MCN1 to MCN6) is arranged along one end side of the main control board 1310 (in this example, at least one of the longest combination of four sides of the main control board 1310),
On the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310, a specific electronic component (e.g., IC1) among the plurality of surface mount type electronic components is arranged so that at least a portion thereof is arranged within a strip-shaped area defined by imaginary division lines (at least two adjacent division lines among imaginary division lines a to l) extending from both the left and right ends of the specific connector (in this example, connectors MCN1 to MCN6) in the direction of the side opposite to the one end side.
It is characterized by:

A gaming machine (such as a pachinko machine or slot machine) equipped with a main control board 1310 related to the progress of a game,
The main side boards (for example, the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, the function display board 1402 provided in the function display unit 1400, the magnetic sensor board provided in the magnetic sensor 1050, the sensor board of the first start opening sensor 3002 provided in the first start opening 2002, and the sensor board of the second start opening sensor 2401 provided in the second start opening 2004, etc.) are provided on the back side (the island equipment side, in the case of a slot machine, the rear side inside the main body part (box body) 6004) of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1, slot machine) and implemented. a main control board 1310 arranged so that a display surface 1310x faces the rear side of the gaming machine, and a second main side board (such as a function display board 1402 provided in the function display unit 1400, a magnetic sensor board provided in the magnetic sensor 1050, a sensor board for a first start hole sensor 3002 provided in a first start hole 2002, or a sensor board for a second start hole sensor 2401 provided in a second start hole 2004) provided on the front side (player side) of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1, slot machine, etc.) of the main control board 1310,
A plurality of surface-mount type electronic components are mounted on at least the front mounting surface of the main control board 1310, out of the mounting surface 1310x and the rear mounting surface,
No insertion-mount type electronic components are mounted on the front substrate surface of the second main-side substrate, and only a plurality of surface-mount type electronic components are mounted,
The main control board 1310 is provided with a solid ground pattern (solid ground, solid pattern), and the second main side board is not provided with a solid ground pattern,
The main control board 1310 is
A front mounting surface side wiring pattern arranged on the mounting surface 1310x;
a solder surface side wiring pattern arranged on the solder surface 1310y;
a through hole electrically connecting the front substrate surface wiring pattern and the solder surface wiring pattern,
a through-hole formed adjacent to a specific electronic component (IC1 in this example) among the surface-mount type electronic components mounted on the main control board 1310 has a thermal land as the surface-mount surface-side land,
A specific through-hole among the through-holes formed in the main control board 1310 is disposed adjacent to a specific electronic component (IC1 in this example) among the plurality of surface-mount type electronic components, and has a thermal land on at least one of the surface mounting surface 1310x and the solder surface 1310y.
It is characterized by:

A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1, slot machine, etc.) that includes a main board related to the progress of a game (for example, a main control board 1310, a payout control board 633, a function display board 1402 provided in a function display unit 1400, a magnetic sensor board provided in a magnetic sensor 1050, a sensor board of a first start hole sensor 3002 provided in a first start hole 2002, and a sensor board of a second start hole sensor 2401 provided in a second start hole 2004, etc.),
The main side boards (for example, the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, the function display board 1402 provided in the function display unit 1400, the magnetic sensor board provided in the magnetic sensor 1050, the sensor board of the first start opening sensor 3002 provided in the first start opening 2002, and the sensor board of the second start opening sensor 2401 provided in the second start opening 2004, etc.) are provided on the back side (the island equipment side, in the case of a slot machine, the rear side inside the main body part (box body) 6004) of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1, slot machine) and implemented. a main control board 1310 arranged so that a display surface 1310x faces the rear side of the gaming machine, and a second main side board (such as a function display board 1402 provided in the function display unit 1400, a magnetic sensor board provided in the magnetic sensor 1050, a sensor board for a first start hole sensor 3002 provided in a first start hole 2002, or a sensor board for a second start hole sensor 2401 provided in a second start hole 2004) provided on the front side (player side) of the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1, slot machine, etc.) of the main control board 1310,
A plurality of insertion-mount type electronic components (in this example, a capacitor MC1) and surface-mount type electronic components are mounted on the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310.
No insertion-mount type electronic components are mounted on the front substrate surface of the second main-side substrate, and only a plurality of surface-mount type electronic components are mounted,
The main control board 1310 is provided with a solid ground pattern (solid ground, solid pattern), and the second main side board is not provided with a solid ground pattern,
A specific electronic component (IC1 in this example) among the surface-mount type electronic components mounted on the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the insertion-mount type electronic component (capacitor MC1 in this example) are adjacently disposed with an electronic component mounting unavailability area A interposed therebetween.
It is characterized by:

A gaming machine (such as a pachinko machine or slot machine) equipped with a rectangular main control board 1310 involved in the progress of a game,
Of the mounting surface 1310x and the solder surface 1310y of the main control board 1310, at least the mounting surface 1310x has a plurality of insertion-mount type electronic components (in this example, a capacitor MC1) and a plurality of surface-mount type electronic components mounted thereon.
The front mounting surface 1310x is divided into four equal parts by two dividing lines (vertical dividing line and horizontal dividing line) that bisect each of the opposing sides of the main control board 1310. In each area of the front mounting surface 1310x, a plurality of insertion-mount type electronic components (in this example, capacitors MC1) are arranged.
It is characterized by:

A gaming machine (such as a pachinko machine 1 or a slot machine) having a substrate on which surface-mounted components are mounted,
Among the boards, the main control board 1310 involved in the progress of the game is:
a mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 having pads 1310ka and through holes 1402b;
a pin 1315 having one end of the pin 1315 and another end of the pin 1315;
IC1 having a connection terminal IC1a;
a chip-chip capacitor MC1′ having an electrode MC1a′;
The connection terminal IC1a of the IC1 is welded to the pad 1310ka on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310,
The electrode MC1a' of the chip capacitor MC1' is welded to one end of the pin 1315,
The other end of the pin 1315 is welded to a through-hole 1402b in the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310.
It is characterized by:

A gaming machine (such as a pachinko machine 1 or a slot machine) having a substrate on which surface-mounted components are mounted,
The substrate is
a mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 having at least one of the pads 1310ka and the through-holes 1402b;
and a pin 1315 having one end of the pin 1315 and the other end of the pin 1315;
Among the boards, the main boards related to the progress of the game (for example, the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, the function display board 1402 provided in the function display unit 1400, the magnetic sensor board provided in the magnetic sensor 1050, the sensor board of the first start opening sensor 3002 provided in the first start opening 2002, and the sensor board of the second start opening sensor 2401 provided in the second start opening 2004, etc.) are
a main control board 1310 provided on the rear side of the gaming machine with its front board surface facing the rear side of the gaming machine, the main control board 1310 having a mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the pins 1315;
a second main side board (such as a function display board 1402 provided in the function display unit 1400, a magnetic sensor board provided in the magnetic sensor 1050, a sensor board of a first start hole sensor 3002 provided in the first start hole 2002, or a sensor board of a second start hole sensor 2401 provided in the second start hole 2004) that is provided on the front side of the gaming machine relative to the main control board 1310 and has a mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310;
The surface mount component is
An IC1 whose connection terminal IC1a is welded to a pad 1310ka on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310;
and a chip capacitor MC1', the electrode MC1a' of which is welded to one end of the pin 1315;
The other end of the pin 1315 is welded to a through-hole 1402b in the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310,
The surface-mounted components mounted on the main control board 1310 include the IC1 and the chip-chip capacitor MC1′.
The surface-mounted electronic components mounted on the second main side board (such as the functional display board 1402 provided on the functional display unit 1400, the magnetic sensor board provided on the magnetic sensor 1050, the sensor board of the first starting port sensor 3002 provided on the first starting port 2002, or the sensor board of the second starting port sensor 2401 provided on the second starting port 2004) consist only of the IC1,
It is characterized by:

A gaming machine (such as a pachinko machine 1 or a slot machine) equipped with a main board (such as a main control board 1310 or a payout control board 633) involved in the progress of a game,
The main-side board surface is composed of a front board surface (e.g., a mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310) and a back board surface (e.g., a solder surface 1310y of the main control board 1310), and at least a plurality of electronic components are mounted on the front board surface,
The electronic component is
a surface-mount type electronic component having a first exterior color (e.g., a black exterior color such as IC1);
a chip-chip capacitor MC1′ having a second exterior color (for example, the light brown exterior color of the chip-chip capacitor MC1′);
The chip-chip capacitor MC1' is a special electronic component in which pins 1315 are soldered to electrodes MC1a' of the chip-chip capacitor MC1' having a special exterior color (e.g., blue exterior color) different from the first exterior color (e.g., black exterior color of IC1) and the second exterior color (e.g., light brown exterior color of the chip-chip capacitor MC1'), and is disposed adjacent to IC1 of the surface-mount type electronic components.
It is characterized by:

A gaming machine (such as a pachinko machine 1 or a slot machine) equipped with a main board (such as a main control board 1310 or a payout control board 633) involved in the progress of a game,
The main-side board surface is composed of a front board surface (e.g., a mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310) and a back board surface (e.g., a solder surface 1310y of the main control board 1310), and at least a plurality of electronic components are mounted on the front board surface,
The electronic component is
A surface-mount type electronic component (for example, a surface-mount type electronic component (IC1, etc.)),
a chip chip capacitor MC1′;
The main side substrate is
A main control board 1310 is provided on the rear side of the gaming machine so that the front board surface faces the rear side of the gaming machine;
a second main side board (such as a function display board 1402 provided in the function display unit 1400, a magnetic sensor board provided in the magnetic sensor 1050, a sensor board of a first start hole sensor 3002 provided in the first start hole 2002, or a sensor board of a second start hole sensor 2401 provided in the second start hole 2004) provided on the front side of the gaming machine relative to the main control board 1310;
The electronic components mounted on the main control board 1310 are the surface-mount type electronic components and the chip-chip capacitor MC1′.
The electronic components mounted on the second main side board (such as the functional display board 1402 provided on the functional display unit 1400, the magnetic sensor board provided on the magnetic sensor 1050, the sensor board of the first starting port sensor 3002 provided on the first starting port 2002, or the sensor board of the second starting port sensor 2401 provided on the second starting port 2004) are composed only of the surface-mount type electronic components,
The chip-chip capacitor MC1' is a special electronic component in which pins 1315 are soldered to electrodes MC1a' of the chip-chip capacitor MC1', which has a special exterior color (e.g., blue exterior color) different from the exterior color inherent to the surface-mount type electronic component (e.g., black exterior color of IC1) and the exterior color inherent to the chip-chip capacitor MC1' (e.g., light brown exterior color), and is disposed adjacent to IC1 of the surface-mount type electronic components.
It is characterized by:

A gaming machine (such as a pachinko machine 1 or a slot machine) equipped with a main board (such as a main control board 1310 or a payout control board 633) involved in the progress of a game,
Of the front board surface (e.g., the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310) and the back board surface (e.g., the solder surface 1310y of the main control board 1310) of the main side board, at least a plurality of surface-mounted electronic components (surface-mounted type electronic components) are mounted on the front board surface,
The surface-mount electronic component is
an IC1 having a predetermined number of connection terminals (connection terminals IC1a);
a chip-chip capacitor MC1' having fewer connection terminals (electrodes MC1a') than the IC1;
The connection terminal IC1a of the IC1 is directly connected to a pad 1310ka formed on the front substrate surface of the main substrate,
The electrode MC1a' of the chip-chip capacitor MC1' of the IC1 is connected to a through-hole 1402b formed on the front substrate surface of the main substrate via a reinforcing member 1316.
It is characterized by:

A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1, slot machine, etc.) that includes a main board related to the progress of a game (for example, a main control board 1310, a payout control board 633, a function display board 1402 provided in a function display unit 1400, a magnetic sensor board provided in a magnetic sensor 1050, a sensor board of a first start hole sensor 3002 provided in a first start hole 2002, and a sensor board of a second start hole sensor 2401 provided in a second start hole 2004, etc.),
The substrate surface of the main substrate is composed of a front substrate surface and a back substrate surface, and at least a plurality of surface-mounted electronic components (surface-mounted type electronic components) are mounted on the front substrate surface,
The surface-mount electronic component is
an IC1 directly connected to a pad 1310ka formed on the front substrate surface of the main substrate;
a chip-chip capacitor MC1′ indirectly connected to a through-hole 1402b formed on the front substrate surface of the main substrate via a reinforcing member 1316;
The chip-chip capacitor MC1' has fewer connection terminals than the IC1,
The main side substrate is
a main control board 1310 on which the pads 1310ka and the through holes 1402b are formed;
and a second main side substrate on which the pad 1310ka is formed (such as a functional display substrate 1402 provided in the functional display unit 1400, a magnetic sensor substrate provided in the magnetic sensor 1050, a sensor substrate of the first starting port sensor 3002 provided in the first starting port 2002, or a sensor substrate of the second starting port sensor 2401 provided in the second starting port 2004, etc.),
The surface-mounted electronic components mounted on the main control board 1310 include the IC1 and the chip-chip capacitor MC1′,
The surface-mounted components mounted on the second main side board (such as the function display board 1402 provided on the function display unit 1400, the magnetic sensor board provided on the magnetic sensor 1050, the sensor board of the first start port sensor 3002 provided on the first start port 2002, or the sensor board of the second start port sensor 2401 provided on the second start port 2004) consist only of the IC1.
It is characterized by:

A gaming machine (such as a pachinko machine 1 or a slot machine) equipped with a main board (such as a main control board 1310 or a payout control board 633) involved in the progress of a game,
Of the front board surface (e.g., the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310) and the back board surface (e.g., the solder surface 1310y of the main control board 1310) of the main side board, at least a plurality of surface-mounted electronic components (surface-mounted type electronic components) are mounted on the front board surface,
The surface-mount electronic component is
a surface-mounted electronic component mounted on the front surface of the main board; and
a chip-chip capacitor MC1' that is disposed above and away from the front surface of the main board so as to protrude further than the ordinary surface-mount type electronic component when mounted on the front surface of the main board,
The chip-chip capacitor MC1' is disposed adjacent to IC1 of the ordinary surface-mount type electronic components.
It is characterized by:

A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1, slot machine, etc.) that includes a main board related to the progress of a game (for example, a main control board 1310, a payout control board 633, a function display board 1402 provided in a function display unit 1400, a magnetic sensor board provided in a magnetic sensor 1050, a sensor board of a first start hole sensor 3002 provided in a first start hole 2002, and a sensor board of a second start hole sensor 2401 provided in a second start hole 2004, etc.),
The substrate surface of the main substrate is composed of a front substrate surface and a back substrate surface, and at least a plurality of surface-mounted electronic components (surface-mounted type electronic components) are mounted on the front substrate surface,
The surface-mount electronic component is
a surface-mounted electronic component (a surface-mounted electronic component) to be disposed on the front substrate surface;
a chip-chip capacitor MC1' disposed at an upper position away from the front substrate surface,
The main side substrate is
A main control board 1310 is provided on the rear side of the gaming machine so that the front board surface faces the rear side of the gaming machine;
a second main side board (such as a function display board 1402 provided in the function display unit 1400, a magnetic sensor board provided in the magnetic sensor 1050, a sensor board of a first start hole sensor 3002 provided in the first start hole 2002, or a sensor board of a second start hole sensor 2401 provided in the second start hole 2004) provided on the front side of the gaming machine relative to the main control board 1310;
The surface-mounted electronic components mounted on the main control board 1310 include the normal surface-mounted electronic components and the chip-chip capacitor MC1′ disposed so as to protrude further than the normal surface-mounted electronic components,
The surface-mounted electronic components mounted on the second main side board (such as the functional display board 1402 provided on the functional display unit 1400, the magnetic sensor board provided on the magnetic sensor 1050, the sensor board of the first starting port sensor 3002 provided on the first starting port 2002, or the sensor board of the second starting port sensor 2401 provided on the second starting port 2004) are composed only of the normal surface-mounted electronic components,
On the first main-side substrate, the chip-chip capacitor MC1' is disposed adjacent to IC1 of the normal surface-mount electronic components.
It is characterized by:

A gaming machine (such as a pachinko machine 1 or a slot machine) equipped with a main board (such as a main control board 1310 or a payout control board 633) involved in the progress of a game,
The main-side board surface is composed of a front board surface (e.g., a mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310) and a back board surface (e.g., a solder surface 1310y of the main control board 1310), and at least a plurality of surface-mounted electronic components (surface-mounted electronic components) are mounted on the front board surface,
The surface-mount electronic component is
an IC1 having a plurality of connection terminals IC1a arranged at first intervals (intervals in the short direction across the IC1 body between a set of connection terminals IC1a arranged along each of a pair of opposing long sides of the IC1);
a chip-chip capacitor MC1' having a plurality of electrodes MC1a' arranged at a second interval (a longitudinal interval between a set of electrodes MC1a' arranged on each of the short sides of the chip-chip capacitor MC1' and sandwiching the body of the chip-chip capacitor MC1') that is narrower than the first interval,
The IC1 has connection terminals IC1a provided at the first intervals welded to pads 1310ka formed on the front substrate surface of the main substrate,
The chip chip capacitor MC1' is disposed adjacent to the IC1 as a special electronic component in which pins 1315 are soldered to the electrodes MC1a' of the chip chip capacitor MC1', and a plurality of connection terminals (pins 1315) are welded to through holes 1402b formed on the front substrate surface of the main side substrate at a third interval (the interval between each pair of pins 1315) wider than the second interval.
It is characterized by:

A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1, slot machine, etc.) that includes a main board related to the progress of a game (for example, a main control board 1310, a payout control board 633, a function display board 1402 provided in a function display unit 1400, a magnetic sensor board provided in a magnetic sensor 1050, a sensor board of a first start hole sensor 3002 provided in a first start hole 2002, and a sensor board of a second start hole sensor 2401 provided in a second start hole 2004, etc.),
The substrate surface of the main substrate is composed of a front substrate surface and a back substrate surface, and at least a plurality of surface-mounted electronic components (surface-mounted type electronic components) are mounted on the front substrate surface,
The surface-mount electronic component is
Regular surface-mount electronic components (regular surface-mount type electronic components) and
a chip-chip capacitor MC1' having electrodes MC1a' arranged at intervals (the longitudinal interval between a set of electrodes MC1a' provided on each of the short sides of the chip-chip capacitor MC1', with the chip-chip capacitor MC1' body sandwiched between them) that are narrower than the intervals (the lateral interval between a set of connection terminals IC1a provided along each of the opposing long sides of the IC1, with the chip-chip capacitor MC1' body sandwiched between them) between terminal portions (a set of connection terminals IC1a provided along each of the opposing long sides of the IC1) that are normally provided on the surface-mount electronic component,
The main side substrate is
A main control board 1310 is provided on the rear side of the gaming machine so that the front board surface faces the rear side of the gaming machine;
a second main side board (such as a function display board 1402 provided in the function display unit 1400, a magnetic sensor board provided in the magnetic sensor 1050, a sensor board of a first start hole sensor 3002 provided in the first start hole 2002, or a sensor board of a second start hole sensor 2401 provided in the second start hole 2004) provided on the front side of the gaming machine relative to the main control board 1310;
The electronic components mounted on the main control board 1310 are the normal surface-mount electronic components and the chip-chip capacitor MC1′.
The electronic components mounted on the second main side board (such as the functional display board 1402 provided on the functional display unit 1400, the magnetic sensor board provided on the magnetic sensor 1050, the sensor board of the first starting port sensor 3002 provided on the first starting port 2002, or the sensor board of the second starting port sensor 2401 provided on the second starting port 2004) are composed only of the normal surface-mounted electronic components,
The terminal portions of the normal surface-mounted electronic components are welded to pads (pads 1310ka formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, pads formed on the front (surface) of the magnetic sensor board 1050b) formed on the front board surface of the main control board 1310 or the second main side board (such as the functional display board 1402 provided on the functional display unit 1400, the magnetic sensor board provided on the magnetic sensor 1050, the sensor board of the first starting port sensor 3002 provided on the first starting port 2002, or the sensor board of the second starting port sensor 2401 provided on the second starting port 2004),
The chip chip capacitor MC1' has pins 1315 soldered to each of the electrodes MC1a' of the chip chip capacitor MC1', and the multiple pins 1315 are welded to through holes 1402b formed on the front board surface of the main control board 1310 at intervals (the interval between each pair of pins 1315) wider than the interval between terminal portions provided on the chip chip capacitor MC1' (the longitudinal interval between a pair of electrodes MC1a' provided on each of the short sides of the chip chip capacitor MC1' sandwiching the chip chip capacitor MC1' body), and are arranged adjacent to IC1 of the normal surface-mounted electronic components.
It is characterized by:

A gaming machine (such as a pachinko machine 1 or a slot machine) equipped with a main board (such as a main control board 1310 or a payout control board 633) involved in the progress of a game,
The main-side board surface is composed of a front board surface (e.g., a mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310) and a back board surface (e.g., a solder surface 1310y of the main control board 1310), and at least a plurality of electronic components are mounted on the front board surface,
The electronic component includes a surface-mount electronic component (a surface-mount type electronic component) having a unique shape,
The chip-chip capacitor MC1' among the surface-mount electronic components is a special electronic component having a different shape from the chip-chip capacitor MC1', and is disposed adjacent to IC1 among the surface-mount electronic components.
It is characterized by:

A gaming machine (pachinko machine 1, slot machine, etc.) that includes a main board related to the progress of a game (for example, a main control board 1310, a payout control board 633, a function display board 1402 provided in a function display unit 1400, a magnetic sensor board provided in a magnetic sensor 1050, a sensor board of a first start hole sensor 3002 provided in a first start hole 2002, and a sensor board of a second start hole sensor 2401 provided in a second start hole 2004, etc.),
The substrate surface of the main substrate is composed of a front substrate surface and a back substrate surface, and at least a plurality of electronic components are mounted on the front substrate surface;
the electronic component includes a surface-mount electronic component having a unique shape;
The main side substrate is
A main control board 1310 is provided on the rear side of the gaming machine so that the front board surface faces the rear side of the gaming machine;
a second main side board (such as a function display board 1402 provided in the function display unit 1400, a magnetic sensor board provided in the magnetic sensor 1050, a sensor board of a first start hole sensor 3002 provided in the first start hole 2002, or a sensor board of a second start hole sensor 2401 provided in the second start hole 2004) provided on the front side of the gaming machine relative to the main control board 1310;
The electronic components mounted on the main control board 1310 include the surface-mounted electronic components and special electronic components.
The electronic components mounted on the second main side board (such as the functional display board 1402 provided on the functional display unit 1400, the magnetic sensor board provided on the magnetic sensor 1050, the sensor board of the first starting port sensor 3002 provided on the first starting port 2002, or the sensor board of the second starting port sensor 2401 provided on the second starting port 2004) are composed only of the surface-mounted electronic components,
The chip-chip capacitor MC1' of the surface-mount electronic components is the special electronic component having a different shape from the chip-chip capacitor MC1' and is disposed adjacent to IC1 of the surface-mount electronic components.

[Attacker Unit Modification Example 1]
Next, as a different embodiment from the above, a configuration that makes it easier to check whether the first attacca unit 2400A and the second attacca unit 2600A attached to the game board 5 are operating normally will be described. Below, the first attacca unit 2400A and the second attacca unit 2600A, which are modifications of the first attacca unit 2400 and the second attacca unit 2600 described with reference to Figures 140 to 145, etc., will be described with reference to Figure 376, etc. Note that in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the components other than the first attacca unit 2400A and the second attacca unit 2600A have the same configuration as the pachinko machine 1 of the embodiment having the above-mentioned first attacca unit 2400 and the second attacca unit 2600, and the same components will be described with the same reference numerals.

Figure 376 is an oblique view showing different forms of first attacca unit 2400A and second attacca unit 2600A attached to the gaming board 5. Figure 377 is an oblique view showing the first attacca unit 2400A and second attacca unit 2600A removed from the gaming board 5. As shown in Figure 376, the first attacca unit 2400A and second attacca unit 2600A are attached to the front of the gaming board 5 from the front, and are fixed to the gaming board 5 by fixing means such as screws or bolts (not shown).

As shown in Figure 377, the first attacca unit 2400A and the second attacca unit 2600A can be removed from the front of the gaming board 5 toward the front after the fixing means such as screws or bolts have been removed. In detail, the first attacca unit 2400A is provided with a decorative cover 2450A that is almost entirely transparent and is formed in a roughly box-like shape with a portion of the rear surface open, and the decorative cover 2450A is attached to the front of the gaming panel 1100 of the gaming board 5 from the front by fixing means such as screws or bolts. The decorative cover 2450A is almost entirely transparent and has a decorative surface 2451A on the front side, which is the side visible to the player, on which a decorative sticker consistent with the theme of the pachinko machine 1 can be affixed. The second attacca unit 2600A is also equipped with a decorative cover 2650A that is almost entirely transparent and has a roughly box-like shape with a portion of the rear surface open, and the decorative cover 2650A is attached from the front to the front of the gaming panel 1100 of the gaming board 5 with fixing means such as screws or bolts. The decorative cover 2650A is almost entirely transparent, and has a decorative surface 2651A on the front side, which is the side visible to the player, on which decorative stickers matching the theme of the pachinko machine 1 can be affixed.

Figure 378 is an exploded perspective view showing the first attacca unit 2400A. As shown in Figure 378, the first attacca unit 2400A includes, in addition to a decorative cover 2450A, a first advancing/retreating device 2452A attached to the rear surface of the decorative cover 2450A from the rear. The first advancing/retreating device 2452A includes a case body 2453A that is transparent throughout and formed in a box shape with an open front, and a plate-shaped cover body 2454A that is transparent throughout and formed to cover the front surface of the case body 2453A. The first advancing/retreating device 2452A is also arranged within the case body 2453A and further includes a magnetic sensor 1050A that detects unauthorized magnetism, a special prize opening sensor 2402A and a second prize opening sensor 2401A that detect game ball B, a second prize opening door 2411A that can guide game ball B to the second prize opening sensor 2401A, a start opening solenoid 2412A that opens and closes the second prize opening door 2411A via a second link mechanism (not shown) depending on the result of the regular lottery, a special prize opening door 2413A that can guide game ball B to the special prize opening sensor 2402A, and an attacca solenoid (not shown) that opens and closes the special prize opening door 2413A via the first link mechanism 2455A depending on the result of the first or second special lottery.

Figure 379(a) is an oblique view showing the first advancing/retreating device 2452A in which the large prize opening door 2413A and the second starting opening door 2411A have transitioned to an advanced state, and Figure 379(b) is an oblique view showing the first advancing/retreating device 2452A in which the large prize opening door 2413A and the second starting opening door 2411A have transitioned to a retracted state. As shown in Figures 379(a) and 379(b), in the first advancing/retreating device 2452A, the second starting opening door 2411A and the large prize opening door 2413A are supported on the case body so that they can move forward and backward, and the second starting opening door 2411A and the large prize opening door 2413A can transition between an advanced state in which they advance into the play area 5a and a retracted state in which they retract from the play area 5a.

As shown in Figure 379(a), when the starting port solenoid 2412A is not energized, the plunger of the starting port solenoid 2412A protrudes due to the spring force, and the second starting port door 2411A transitions to an advanced state in which it is advanced into the forward playing area 5a via the second link mechanism. Also, as shown in Figure 379(b), when the starting port solenoid 2412A is energized, the plunger of the starting port solenoid 2412A retracts against the spring force, and the second starting port door 2411A transitions to a retracted state in which it is retracted from the forward playing area 5a via the second link mechanism. In this embodiment, when the second start port door 2411A transitions to the advance state, it contacts the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a to change its direction of travel, preventing the game ball B from moving toward the second start port sensor 2401A. When the second start port door 2411A transitions to the retract state, the degree of contact with the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a is reduced, and the game ball B is not prevented from moving toward the second start port sensor 2401A. In other words, in this embodiment, when the first attacker unit 2400A wins the normal lottery result, the start port solenoid 2412A is energized (ON), the plunger retracts against the spring force, and the second start port door 2411A transitions to the retract state, allowing the game ball B to be received by the second start port 2004A.

Also, as shown in Figure 379(a), when the attacca solenoid is not energized, the plunger of the attacca solenoid protrudes due to the spring force, and the large prize opening door 2413A transitions to an advanced state in which it is advanced into the forward playing area 5a via the first link mechanism 2455A. As shown in Figure 379(b), when the attacca solenoid is energized, the plunger of the attacca solenoid retracts against the spring force, and the large prize opening door 2413A transitions to a retracted state in which it is retracted from the forward playing area 5a via the first link mechanism 2455A. When the large prize opening door 2413A of this embodiment transitions to the advance state, it contacts the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a to change its direction of travel, preventing the game ball B from moving toward the large prize opening sensor 2402A. When the large prize opening door 2413A transitions to the retract state, it reduces the degree of contact with the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a and does not prevent the game ball B from moving toward the large prize opening sensor 2402A. In other words, in the first attacker unit 2400A of this embodiment, if the first or second special lottery result is a win, the attacker solenoid is energized (ON), the plunger retracts against the spring force, and the large prize opening door 2413A transitions to the retract state, allowing the game ball B to be received by the large prize opening 2005A.

In this embodiment, the second starting gate door 2411A and the special prize gate door 2413A transition from the advanced state to the retracted state when the respective solenoids are energized. However, they may also transition from the retracted state to the advanced state when the respective solenoids are energized. However, when the second starting gate door 2411A and the special prize gate door 2413A are in the advanced state as in this embodiment, if a game ball B flowing down the game area 5a is restricted from heading toward the special prize gate sensor 2402A and the second starting gate sensor 2401A, from the perspective of preventing game ball B from illegally entering the second starting gate 2004A and the special prize gate 2005A, it is preferable that the second starting gate door 2411A and the special prize gate door 2413A transition from the advanced state to the retracted state when the respective solenoids are energized.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second start gate door 2411A and the large prize gate door 2413A come into contact with the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a to change its direction of travel when transitioning to the advance state, preventing the game ball B from heading toward the second start gate sensor 2401A or the large prize gate sensor 2402A. In addition, when transitioning to the retreat state, the degree of contact with the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a is reduced, preventing the game ball B from heading toward the second start gate sensor 2401A or the large prize gate sensor 2402A. However, when transitioning to the advance state, the sensor may come into contact with game ball B flowing down the game area 5a to change its direction of travel, restricting game ball B to head toward the second start opening sensor 2401A or the large prize opening sensor 2402A, and when transitioning to the retreat state, the sensor may reduce the degree of contact with game ball B flowing down the game area 5a, and not restrict game ball B to head toward the second start opening sensor 2401A or the large prize opening sensor 2402A.

In addition, the second starting gate door 2411A and the special winning gate door 2413A are designed to be accessible from the outside when the decorative cover 2450A is removed, and are configured so that they can be freely transitioned between the advanced state and the retracted state by external contact operations (pushing, pulling, etc.) even when the starting gate solenoid 2412A and the attacca solenoid are not energized. This allows workers to check the operation of the second starting gate door 2411A and the special winning gate door 2413A during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, etc.

Figure 380 is an exploded perspective view showing the second attacca unit 2600A. As shown in Figure 380, the second attacca unit 2600A is equipped with a decorative cover 2650A that is almost entirely transparent, as well as a second advancing/retreating device 2652A that is attached to the rear surface of the decorative cover 2650A from the rear. The second advancing/retreating device 2652A has a case main body 2653A that is almost entirely transparent and formed in a box shape with an open front, and a plate-shaped cover body 2654A that is almost entirely transparent and formed to cover the front surface of the case main body 2653A. The second forward/backward moving device 2652A also includes a magnetic sensor 1050A that detects unauthorized magnetism, a bonus prize opening sensor 2601A that detects game ball B, a bonus prize opening door 2611A that can guide game ball B to the bonus prize opening sensor 2601A, and a bonus prize opening solenoid (not shown) that opens and closes the bonus prize opening door 2611A via a third link mechanism 2655A depending on the results of the first or second special lottery. The magnetic sensor 1050A, bonus prize opening sensor 2601A, third link mechanism 2655A, and bonus prize opening solenoid are disposed within the case body 2653A, and the bonus prize opening door 2611A is pivotally supported by a decorative cover 2650A so that it can be opened and closed.

Figure 381(a) is a front view showing the second advancing/retreating device 2652A in which the special prize winning door 2611A has transitioned to a retracted state, and Figure 381(b) is a front view showing the second advancing/retreating device 2652A in which the special prize winning door 2611A has transitioned to an advanced state. As shown in Figures 381(a) and 381(b), in the second advancing/retreating device 2652A, the special prize winning door 2611A is formed in a so-called blade shape that is rotatable around a lower rotation axis, and can transition between an advanced state in which it advances into the play area 5a and a retracted state in which it retreats from the play area 5a. As shown in Figure 381(a), when the special prize winning door solenoid is not energized, the plunger of the special prize winning door solenoid protrudes due to the spring force, and the special prize winning door 2611A is in a retracted state in which it retreats from the play area 5a in front. 381(b), when the device prize winning port solenoid is energized, the plunger of the device prize winning port solenoid retracts against the biasing force of the spring, and the device prize winning port door 2611A is in an advancing state in which it advances into the forward game area 5a. In this embodiment, the device prize winning port door 2611A contacts the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a in the advancing state to change the direction of travel of the game ball B, guiding the game ball B toward the device prize winning port sensor 2601A, and in the retracted state, contacts the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a to prevent the game ball B from moving toward the device prize winning port sensor 2601A. That is, in the second forward/backward moving device 2652A of this embodiment, if the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a win, the special prize winning port solenoid is energized (ON), and the plunger moves backward against the spring force, causing the special prize winning port door 2611A to transition to the advanced state, making it possible for the game ball B to be received by the special prize winning port 2006A.

In addition, from the perspective of preventing fraudulent winnings at the special prize winning port 2006A, in this embodiment the special prize winning port door 2611A is configured to transition from a retracted state to an advanced state when the special prize winning port solenoid is energized, but it may also be configured to transition from an advanced state to a retracted state when the special prize winning port solenoid is energized. In addition, in this embodiment, the device prize opening door 2611A comes into contact with the game ball B flowing down the play area 5a in the advancing state, guiding the game ball B toward the device prize opening sensor 2601A, and in the retracted state, it comes into contact with the game ball B flowing down the play area 5a, preventing the game ball B from moving toward the device prize opening sensor 2601A. However, it may also be configured such that in the advancing state, it comes into contact with the game ball B flowing down the play area 5a, preventing the game ball B from moving toward the device prize opening sensor 2601A, and in the retracted state, it comes into contact with the game ball B flowing down the play area 5a, guiding the game ball B toward the device prize opening sensor 2601A.

In addition, the prize winning device door 2611A is designed to be accessible from the outside when the decorative cover 2650A is removed, and is configured so that it can be freely changed between an advanced state and a retracted state by external contact (pushing, pulling, etc.) even when the prize winning device solenoid is not energized. This allows workers to check the operation of the prize winning device door 2611A during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, etc.

In a pachinko machine 1 in which the first attacca unit 2400A or second attacca unit 2600A described above is assembled to the game board 5, the doors can be transitioned to an advanced or retracted state, thereby enabling or facilitating the entry of game ball B into the winning opening or starting opening. Furthermore, as described above, when decorative cover 2450A or decorative cover 2650A is removed, it is possible to contact second starting opening door 2411A, large winning opening door 2413A, and special winning opening door 2611A, making it possible to check the operation of second starting opening door 2411A, large winning opening door 2413A, and special winning opening door 2611A during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1. However, in conventional pachinko machines 1, even though it was possible to check the operation of the second start gate door 2411A, the special prize gate door 2413A, and the special prize gate door 2611A during the manufacturing process, it was difficult to externally determine whether their operation (changes to the advance or retreat state) was normal. For example, while the second start gate door 2411A, the special prize gate door 2413A, and the special prize gate door 2611A could move in and out, it was difficult to determine whether the movement would interfere with game progress. If a malfunction occurred in the movement, it could cause harm to players and the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and ultimately reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 1. Below, we describe modifications made to the first attacker unit 2400A and the second attacker unit 2600A to solve these problems.

Figure 382(a) is a bottom view of the first advancing/retreating device 2452A when the second starting gate door 2411A and the special prize gate door 2413A have transitioned to an advanced state, and Figure 382(b) is a bottom view of the first advancing/retreating device 2452A when the second starting gate door 2411A and the special prize gate door 2413A have transitioned to a retracted state. For ease of explanation, the figure shows the second starting gate sensor 2401A and the special prize gate sensor 2402A removed. As shown in Figure 382(a) or 382(b), the bottom surfaces (the surfaces behind the upper surface through which the game balls flow) of the second starting gate door 2411A and the special prize gate door 2413A, which are formed in a plate shape, are provided with a viewing portion 2456A that can be seen from outside the first attacker unit 2400A or the first advancing/retreating device 2452A. The viewing portion 2456A is arranged so that it can be seen directly from the underside of the first advancing/retreating device 2452A or through a transparent portion when the first attacker unit 2400A is removed from the game board 5 or when the first advancing/retreating device 2452A is removed from the first attacker unit 2400A. In this example, the viewing section 2456A is arranged so that it can be seen directly from the underside of the first advancing/retreating device 2452A or through a transparent part when at least the second starting port sensor 2401A and the large prize port sensor 2402A are removed. However, it is preferable that the viewing section 2456A be arranged so that it can be seen directly from the underside of the first advancing/retreating device 2452A or through a transparent part, not only when the second starting port sensor 2401A and the large prize port sensor 2402A are removed, but also when the second starting port sensor 2401A and the large prize port sensor 2402A are attached. When the second starting opening sensor 2401A and the large prize opening sensor 2402A are attached, the viewing section 2456A is positioned so that it is located inside the through-holes of the second starting opening sensor 2401A and the large prize opening sensor 2402A in the retracted state. This makes it possible to view the viewing section 2456A directly from the underside of the first advancing/retreating device 2452A or through a transparent section, even when the second starting opening sensor 2401A and the large prize opening sensor 2402A are attached.

In this embodiment, the visible portion 2456A is a graphic notation, represented by a "★," provided on the underside (the surface behind the upper surface through which the game balls flow) of the second starting gate door 2411A and the special prize gate door 2413A. Such visible portion 2456A may be printed on the underside of the second starting gate door 2411A and the special prize gate door 2413A, or a sticker-like film member on which the visible portion 2456A is formed may be attached to the underside of the second starting gate door 2411A and the special prize gate door 2413A. Furthermore, the visible portion 2456A may be formed by raising the underside of the second starting gate door 2411A and the special prize gate door 2413A to form a convex mark, or by recessing the underside of the second starting gate door 2411A and the special prize gate door 2413A to form a concave mark. Furthermore, from the perspective of avoiding damage to the visible portion 2456A itself, it is preferable that the visible portion 2456A is formed integrally with the second starting gate door 2411A and the large winning gate door 2413A by printing or forming marks, rather than by a sticker-like film member.

As shown in FIG. 382(a), when the large prize opening door 2413A is in the advanced state and the first advancing/retreating device 2452A, which contacts the game ball B to prevent the game ball B from moving toward the large prize opening sensor 2402A, is in a non-winning state, the viewing portion 2456A of the large prize opening door 2413A is located forward of the imaginary line 2457A extending along the front edge of the case body 2453A. Also, when the second starting opening door 2411A is in the advanced state and the first advancing/retreating device 2452A, which contacts the game ball B to prevent the game ball B from moving toward the second starting opening sensor 2401A, is in a non-winning state, the viewing portion 2456A of the second starting opening door 2411A is located forward of the imaginary line 2457A extending along the front edge of the case body 2453A. In other words, the normal advanced state of the large prize entrance door 2413A and the second starting entrance door 2411A is such that the ``★'' marking on the viewing portion 2456A is completely exposed to the outside beyond the front edge of the case body 2453A (the entire viewing portion 2456A is positioned forward of the imaginary line 2457A extending along the front edge of the case body 2453A), and the viewing portion 2456A is positioned so that this is the normal advanced state of the large prize entrance door 2413A and the second starting entrance door 2411A. For this reason, when the large prize entrance door 2413A or the second starting entrance door 2411A is operated to the advanced state, if the "★" marking on the visible portion 2456A is not completely exposed outside the front edge of the case body 2453A (for example, if the visible portion 2456A is positioned so that part of it overlaps the front edge), then the large prize entrance door 2413A or the second starting entrance door 2411A is not in a normal advanced state, but rather is in an advanced state involving an abnormality that may have some effect on the progress of the game.

As shown in Figure 382 (b), in the winning state of the first advancing/retreating device 2452A, where the special prize opening door 2413A is in the retracted state and does not restrict the game ball B from moving toward the special prize opening sensor 2402A, the viewing portion 2456A of the special prize opening door 2413A is located behind the imaginary line 2457A extending along the front edge of the case body 2453A. Also, in the winning state of the first advancing/retreating device 2452A, where the second starting opening door 2411A is in the retracted state and does not restrict the game ball B from moving toward the second starting opening sensor 2401A, the viewing portion 2456A of the second starting opening door 2411A is located behind the imaginary line 2457A extending along the front edge of the case body 2453A. In other words, the normal retracted state of the large prize entrance door 2413A and the second starting entrance door 2411A during the progress of the game is such that the ``★'' marking on the viewing area 2456A is completely contained inside the front edge of the case body 2453A (a positional relationship in which the entire viewing area 2456A is located rearward of the imaginary line 2457A extending along the front edge of the case body 2453A). For this reason, when the special prize opening door 2413A or the second starting opening door 2411A is operated to the retracted state, if the "★" marking on the viewing area 2456A is not completely contained inside the front edge of the case body 2453A (for example, if the viewing area 2456A is positioned so that part of it overlaps the front edge), then the special prize opening door 2413A or the second starting opening door 2411A is not in a normal retracted state, but rather is in an abnormal retracted state that may have some effect on the progress of the game.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the special prize opening door 2413A or the second starting opening door 2411A is in the advanced state, it is possible to see from the outside, that is, from the underside of the first advancing/retreating device 2452A, that the viewing portion 2456A of the special prize opening door 2413A or the second starting opening door 2411A is positioned forward relative to the imaginary line 2457A extending along the front edge of the case body 2453A, and when the special prize opening door 2413A or the second starting opening door 2411A is in the retracted state, it is possible to see from the outside, that is, from the underside of the first advancing/retreating device 2452A, that the viewing portion 2456A of the special prize opening door 2413A or the second starting opening door 2411A is positioned forward relative to the imaginary line 2457A extending along the front edge of the case body 2453A. Since it is possible to see from the outside, on the underside of the first advancing/retreating device 2452A, that the first advancing/retreating device 2452A is positioned to the rear of the game board 5, by visually inspecting the first advancing/retreating device 2452A from the underside before it is attached to the game board 5 or the first advancing/retreating device 2452A after it has been removed from the game board 5, it is possible to use the visual inspection section 2456A provided on the large prize opening door 2413A and the second starting opening door 2411A as a visual target for the case body 2453A and easily visually determine whether the large prize opening door 2413A and the second starting opening door 2411A are in an advanced state or whether the large prize opening door 2413A and the second starting opening door 2411A are in a retracted state. Therefore, with the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, it is easy to check the operation of the large prize opening door 2413A and the second starting opening door 2411A during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, preventing problems with the entrance and exit operations of the large prize opening door 2413A and the second starting opening door 2411A, preventing disadvantages to players and gaming halls where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and ultimately increasing the reliability of the pachinko machine 1 for players, gaming halls, etc.

Furthermore, after the first advancing/retreating device 2452A (first attacker unit 2400A) is attached to the gaming board 5, the upper surface of the second starting gate door 2411A and the upper surface of the special prize gate door 2413A are easily visible to a player playing the pachinko machine 1, whereas the visible portion 2456A in this embodiment is provided on the lower surface of the second starting gate door 2411A and the lower surface of the special prize gate door 2413A. Therefore, even if a player were to look into the second starting gate door 2411A or the special prize gate door 2413A from above, it is impossible or difficult for the player to see the visible portion 2456A, and this prevents the aesthetic appeal of the first attacker unit 2400A or the decorativeness of the pachinko machine 1 from being impaired when the player views the visible portion 2456A.

In addition, after the first forward/backward moving device 2452A (first attacker unit 2400A) is attached to the gaming board 5, the gaming ball B flows down from the upper surface of the second starting gate door 2411A and the upper surface of the special winning gate door 2413A, whereas the viewing section 2456A of this embodiment is provided on the lower surface of the second starting gate door 2411A and the lower surface of the special winning gate door 2413A. Therefore, even when the viewing section 2456A is provided, it is possible to avoid the viewing section 2456A itself interfering with the flow of the gaming balls, and it is possible to prevent the viewing section 2456A itself from causing any disruption to the progress of the game.

In order to improve the visibility of the viewing area 2456A on the underside of the second starting gate door 2411A and the viewing area 2456A on the underside of the special prize gate door 2413A, which can be seen from the underside of the first forward/backward moving device 2452A through the case body 2453A, the case body 2453A and the cover body 2454A can be made colored and transparent or colorless and transparent so that they are transparent, while the second starting gate door 2411A and the special prize gate door 2413A can be made colored and opaque so that they are not transparent, and the viewing area 2456A can be provided on the underside of the second starting gate door 2411A or the special prize gate door 2413A, which are made colored and opaque. This makes it even easier to check the operation of the special prize gate door 2413A and the second starting gate door 2411A using the viewing area 2456A as a visual target during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the first forward/backward moving device 2452A may be configured to further include a locking mechanism that restricts the retreating movement of the second starting gate door 2411A and the large prize gate door 2413A that have transitioned to the advanced state, thereby enhancing the effectiveness of suppressing fraud against the second starting gate door 2411A and the large prize gate door 2413A. In this configuration, when checking the operation of the second start gate door 2411A and the special prize gate door 2413A during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, the worker visually inspects the first advance/retreat device 2452A removed from the game board 5 from below after releasing the locking mechanism, and by pushing the second start gate door 2411A rearward against the spring force of the start gate solenoid 2412A or by pushing the special prize gate door 2413A rearward against the spring force of the attacca solenoid, it is possible to visually determine whether the second start gate door 2411A can transition to a normal retracted state against the spring force of the start gate solenoid 2412A, or whether the special prize gate door 2413A can transition to a normal retracted state against the spring force of the attacca solenoid.

Furthermore, although the above has been described with respect to the second starting gate door 2411A and the large prize gate door 2413A which are supported by the first link mechanism 2455A or the second link mechanism and move forward or backward within the case body 2453A, the second starting gate door 2411A and the large prize gate door 2413A may also be supported by the first link mechanism 2455A or the second link mechanism outside the case body 2453A and move forward or backward along the top or bottom surface of the case body 2453A, or may be supported on the top or bottom surface of the case body 2453A and move forward or backward along the top or bottom surface of the case body 2453A by the first link mechanism 2455A or the second link mechanism. When the second starting gate door 2411A and the large prize gate door 2413A are advanced or retracted within the case body 2453A, the effectiveness of preventing fraud against the second starting gate door 2411A and the large prize gate door 2413A can be improved, whereas when the second starting gate door 2411A and the large prize gate door 2413A are advanced or retracted outside the case body 2453A, the efficiency of maintenance work for malfunctions that occur in the second starting gate door 2411A and the large prize gate door 2413A can be improved.

Furthermore, the visual confirmation portion 2456A may be provided anywhere on the underside of the second starting gate door 2411A or the underside of the large prize gate door 2413A, and the visual confirmation portion 2456A may be provided in any size. By using the visual confirmation portion 2456A provided on the second starting gate door 2411A or the large prize gate door 2413A as a visual target for the case body 2453A, the operator can easily confirm whether the second starting gate door 2411A or the large prize gate door 2413A is in the advanced state or whether the second starting gate door 2411A or the large prize gate door 2413A is in the retracted state. Below, for such an embodiment, the respective states of the second starting gate door 2411A or the large prize gate door 2413A and the positional relationship of the visual confirmation portion 2456A to the case body 2453A will be explained in detail.

Figure 383(a) is a schematic diagram of the first advancing/retreating device 2452A viewed from below, showing the second starting gate door 2411A and the special prize gate door 2413A in the advanced state; Figure 383(b) is a schematic diagram of the first advancing/retreating device 2452A viewed from below, showing the second starting gate door 2411A and the special prize gate door 2413A in the retracted state; and Figures 383(c) and (d) are schematic diagrams of the first advancing/retreating device 2452A viewed from below, showing the second starting gate door 2411A and the special prize gate door 2413A in a malfunctioning state. Note that the top of the figure is the front that faces the player when the first advancing/retreating device 2452A is attached to the gaming board 5, and the bottom of the figure is the rear that faces away from the player when the first advancing/retreating device 2452A is attached to the gaming board 5.

As shown in Figures 383(a) to 383(d), a viewing section 2456A having an outer diameter approximately equal to the diameter of game ball B is provided in the center in the left-right direction and the center in the front-to-back direction on the underside of the plate-shaped special prize opening door 2413A. Note that the viewing section 2456A in this example only needs to be provided in the center in the front-to-back direction on the underside of the special prize opening door 2413A, and may be provided in any left-to-right position on the underside of the special prize opening door 2413A. Furthermore, from the perspective of ease of visibility, it is preferable that the outer diameter of the viewing section 2456A in this example be approximately equal to the diameter of game ball B, but it may also be smaller than the diameter of game ball B.

329(a), when the special prize opening door 2413A is in the advanced state, the visual confirmation portion 2456A is positioned forward at a predetermined distance from the imaginary line 2457A extending along the front edge of the case body 2453A. Therefore, in this example, when checking the operation of the special prize opening door 2413A during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, the worker can visually confirm from the underside of the first advancing/retreating device 2452A removed from the gaming board 5 that the visual confirmation portion 2456A is positioned forward at a predetermined distance from the imaginary line 2457A extending along the front edge of the case body 2453A. This allows the worker to easily visually confirm that the special prize opening door 2413A can transition to the normal advanced state due to the biasing force of the attacca solenoid spring.

As shown in FIG. 383(b), when the special prize opening door 2413A is in the retracted state, the visual confirmation portion 2456A is positioned rearward at a predetermined distance from the imaginary line 2457A extending along the front edge of the case body 2453A. Therefore, in this example, when checking the operation of the special prize opening door 2413A during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, an operator visually checks the first forward/backward movement device 2452A removed from the gaming board 5 from below and pushes the special prize opening door 2413A rearward against the spring force of the attacca solenoid. When the operator confirms that the visual confirmation portion 2456A is positioned rearward at a predetermined distance from the imaginary line 2457A extending along the front edge of the case body 2453A, the operator can easily visually confirm that the special prize opening door 2413A can transition to the normal retracted state against the spring force of the attacca solenoid.

As shown in Figure 383 (c), when the special prize opening door 2413A is in an abnormal advancement state, the visible portion 2456A is not positioned forward and has a predetermined distance from the imaginary line 2457A extending along the front edge of the case body 2453A. Therefore, in this example, when checking the operation of the special prize opening door 2413A during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, the worker can visually inspect the first advancing/retracting device 2452A removed from the gaming board 5 from below, and if the worker confirms that the visible portion 2456A is not positioned forward and has a predetermined distance from the imaginary line 2457A extending along the front edge of the case body 2453A, the worker can easily visually confirm that the spring force of the attacca solenoid is preventing the special prize opening door 2413A from transitioning to a normal advancement state.

As shown in Figure 383 (d), when the special prize opening door 2413A is in an abnormal retracted state, the visual confirmation portion 2456A is positioned so that it is not positioned rearward and has a predetermined distance from the imaginary line 2457A extending along the front edge of the case body 2453A. Therefore, in this example, when checking the operation of the special prize opening door 2413A during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, an operator visually inspects the first forward/backward movement device 2452A removed from the gaming board 5 from below and pushes the special prize opening door 2413A rearward against the spring force of the attacca solenoid. If the operator confirms that the visual confirmation portion 2456A is not positioned rearward and has a predetermined distance from the imaginary line 2457A extending along the front edge of the case body 2453A, the operator can easily visually confirm that the special prize opening door 2413A is having difficulty transitioning to a normal retracted state against the spring force of the attacca solenoid.

As described above, the viewing portion 2456A is provided on the underside of the plate-shaped special prize opening door 2413A, in the center in the left-right direction and the center in the front-to-back direction, with an outer diameter approximately equal to the diameter of the game ball B. After visually checking the position of the viewing portion 2456A relative to the case body 2453A, an operator checking the operation of the special prize opening door 2413A during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1 can easily determine whether the special prize opening door 2413A can transition between the normal advance state and the normal retract state. This prevents malfunctions in the entry and exit operation of the special prize opening door 2413A and prevents disadvantages to players and the amusement hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, thereby further increasing the reliability of the pachinko machine 1 for players and the amusement hall. Note that the configuration of the viewing area 2456A provided on the underside of the large prize entrance door 2413A in this example may also be applied to the viewing area 2456A provided on the underside of the second starting entrance door 2411A, for example.

As shown in Figures 383(a) and 329(c), a viewing portion 2456A having an outer diameter smaller than the diameter of the game ball B is provided on the underside of the plate-shaped second starting door 2411A at the center in the left-right direction and the rear end in the front-to-rear direction. Note that in this example, the viewing portion 2456A only needs to be provided at the rear end in the front-to-rear direction of the underside of the second starting door 2411A, and may be provided at any left-to-right position on the underside of the second starting door 2411A. Furthermore, in this example, the outer diameter of the viewing portion 2456A is preferably smaller than the diameter of the game ball B from the perspective of ease of formation, but may also be approximately the same as the diameter of the game ball B.

As shown in Figure 383 (a), when the second starting opening door 2411A is in the advanced state, the visual confirmation portion 2456A is positioned forward of the imaginary line 2457A extending along the front edge of the case body 2453A. Therefore, in this example, when checking the operation of the second starting opening door 2411A during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, the worker can visually confirm from the underside of the first advancing/retreating device 2452A removed from the gaming board 5 that the visual confirmation portion 2456A is positioned forward of the imaginary line 2457A extending along the front edge of the case body 2453A. This allows the worker to easily visually confirm that the second starting opening door 2411A can transition to the normal advanced state due to the spring force of the starting opening solenoid 2412A.

As shown in Figure 383 (c), when the second starting opening door 2411A is in an abnormal advancement state, the visual confirmation portion 2456A is in contact with the imaginary line 2457A extending along the front edge of the case body 2453A in a bottom view, or is located rearward of the imaginary line 2457A. Therefore, in this example, when checking the operation of the second starting opening door 2411A during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, the worker can visually check the first advancing/retracting device 2452A removed from the gaming board 5 from below, and if the worker confirms that the visual confirmation portion 2456A is in contact with the imaginary line 2457A extending along the front edge of the case body 2453A in a bottom view, or is located rearward of the imaginary line 2457A, the worker can easily visually confirm that the spring force of the starting opening solenoid 2412A is preventing the second starting opening door 2411A from transitioning to a normal advancement state.

As described above, in the configuration of the viewing portion 2456A, the viewing portion 2456A is positioned forward of the imaginary line 2457A when the second starting gate door 2411A can normally transition to the advanced state, and is in contact with the imaginary line 2457A in a bottom view or is positioned rearward of the imaginary line 2457A when the second starting gate door 2411A cannot normally transition to the advanced state. The size of the viewing portion 2456A can be made smaller than the diameter of the game ball B, for example, which increases the ease of forming the viewing portion 2456A on the underside of the second starting gate door 2411A. This prevents problems with the entry and exit operation of the second starting gate door 2411A and prevents disadvantages to players and the amusement hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, thereby further increasing the reliability of the pachinko machine 1 for players and the amusement hall. Note that the configuration of the viewing area 2456A provided on the underside of the second starting gate door 2411A in this example may also be applied to the viewing area 2456A provided on the underside of the large prize gate door 2413A, for example.

As shown in Figures 383(b) and 329(d), a viewing portion 2456A having an outer diameter smaller than the diameter of the game ball B is provided on the underside of the plate-shaped second starting door 2411A at the center in the left-right direction and the front end in the front-to-back direction. Note that in this example, the viewing portion 2456A only needs to be provided at the front end in the front-to-back direction of the underside of the second starting door 2411A, and may be provided at any left-to-right position on the underside of the second starting door 2411A. Furthermore, from the perspective of ease of formation, the outer diameter of the viewing portion 2456A in this example is preferably smaller than the diameter of the game ball B, but may also be approximately the same as the diameter of the game ball B.

As shown in Figure 383 (b), when the second starting opening door 2411A is in the retracted state, the visual confirmation portion 2456A is positioned rearward of the imaginary line 2457A extending along the front edge of the case body 2453A. Therefore, in this example, when checking the operation of the second starting opening door 2411A during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, an operator visually inspects the first advancing/retreating device 2452A removed from the gaming board 5 from below and pushes the second starting opening door 2411A rearward against the spring force of the starting opening solenoid 2412A. When the operator confirms that the visual confirmation portion 2456A is positioned rearward of the imaginary line 2457A extending along the front edge of the case body 2453A, the operator can easily visually confirm that the second starting opening door 2411A can transition to the normal retracted state against the spring force of the starting opening solenoid 2412A.

As shown in Figure 383 (d), when the second starting door 2411A is in an abnormal retracted state, the viewing portion 2456A is in contact with the imaginary line 2457A extending along the front edge of the case main body 2453A when viewed from below, or is positioned forward of the imaginary line 2457A. For this reason, in this example, when checking the operation of the second starting gate door 2411A during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, an operator can visually inspect the first advancing/retreating device 2452A removed from the game board 5 from below and push the second starting gate door 2411A rearward against the spring force of the starting gate solenoid 2412A. If the operator confirms that the visual confirmation portion 2456A is in contact with the imaginary line 2457A extending along the front edge of the case main body 2453A when viewed from below or is positioned forward of the imaginary line 2457A, the operator can easily visually confirm that the second starting gate door 2411A is having difficulty transitioning to a normal retracted state against the spring force of the starting gate solenoid 2412A.

As described above, in the configuration of the viewing portion 2456A, the second starting gate 2411A is positioned rearward of the imaginary line 2457A when the second starting gate 2411A can normally transition to the retracted state, and the viewing portion 2456A is in contact with the imaginary line 2457A in a bottom view or is positioned forward of the imaginary line 2457A when the second starting gate 2411A cannot normally transition to the retracted state. The size of the viewing portion 2456A can be made smaller than the diameter of the game ball B, for example, which increases the ease of forming the viewing portion 2456A on the underside of the second starting gate 2411A. This prevents problems with the entry and exit operation of the second starting gate 2411A and prevents disadvantages to players and the amusement hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, thereby further increasing the reliability of the pachinko machine 1 for players and the amusement hall. Note that the configuration of the viewing area 2456A provided on the underside of the second starting gate door 2411A in this example may also be applied to the viewing area 2456A provided on the underside of the large prize gate door 2413A, for example.

Figure 384(a) is a schematic diagram of the first advancing/retreating device 2452A viewed from below, showing the second starting gate door 2411A and the large prize gate door 2413A in the advanced state; Figure 384(b) is a schematic diagram of the first advancing/retreating device 2452A viewed from below, showing the second starting gate door 2411A and the large prize gate door 2413A in the retracted state; and Figures 384(c) and (d) are schematic diagrams of the first advancing/retreating device 2452A viewed from below, showing the second starting gate door 2411A and the large prize gate door 2413A in a malfunctioning state. In the above embodiment, an aspect of the viewing portion 2456A that allows an operator to easily visually determine whether the operation of the special prize opening door 2413A is normal by visually checking the positional relationship of the viewing portion 2456A relative to the case body 2453A using Figures 383(a) to 383(d), etc., and an aspect of the viewing portion 2456A that allows an operator to easily visually determine whether the operation of the second starting opening door 2411A is normal and has improved ease of formation have been described. However, below, further aspects of the viewing portion 2456A will be described using Figures 384(a) to 384(d), etc.

As shown in Figures 384(a) to 384(d), a viewing section 2456A having an outer diameter approximately equal to the front-to-back width of the large prize opening door 2413A is provided on the underside of the plate-shaped large prize opening door 2413A in the center in the left-to-right direction and the center in the front-to-back direction. Note that the viewing section 2456A in this example only needs to be provided in the center in the front-to-back direction of the underside of the large prize opening door 2413A, and may be provided in any left-to-right position on the underside of the large prize opening door 2413A. Furthermore, from the perspective of ease of visibility, it is preferable that the outer diameter of the viewing section 2456A in this example be approximately equal to the front-to-back width of the large prize opening door 2413A, but it may also be larger than the diameter of the game ball B.

As shown in Figure 384 (a), when the special prize opening door 2413A is in the advanced state, the viewing portion 2456A is positioned such that its rear end contacts the imaginary line 2457A extending along the front edge of the case body 2453A when viewed from below. Therefore, in this example, when checking the operation of the special prize opening door 2413A during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, the worker can visually inspect the first advancing/retreating device 2452A removed from the gaming board 5 from below, and if the worker confirms that the rear end of the viewing portion 2456A contacts the imaginary line 2457A extending along the front edge of the case body 2453A when viewed from below, the worker can visually confirm that the special prize opening door 2413A can transition to the normal advanced state due to the biasing force of the attacca solenoid spring.

As shown in FIG. 384(b), when the special prize opening door 2413A is in the retracted state, the visual confirmation portion 2456A is positioned such that its front end contacts the imaginary line 2457A extending along the front edge of the case body 2453A in a bottom view. Therefore, in this example, when checking the operation of the special prize opening door 2413A during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, the worker visually checks the first forward/backward movement device 2452A removed from the gaming board 5 from below and pushes the special prize opening door 2413A rearward against the spring force of the attacca solenoid. If the worker confirms that the front end of the visual confirmation portion 2456A contacts the imaginary line 2457A extending along the front edge of the case body 2453A in a bottom view, the worker can visually confirm that the special prize opening door 2413A can transition to the normal retracted state against the spring force of the attacca solenoid.

As shown in Figure 384 (c), when the special prize opening door 2413A is in an abnormal advancement state, the visual confirmation portion 2456A is positioned such that its center contacts the imaginary line 2457A extending along the front edge of the case body 2453A when viewed from below. Therefore, in this example, when checking the operation of the special prize opening door 2413A during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, the worker can visually confirm from below that the first forward/backward movement device 2452A removed from the gaming board 5 is in contact with the imaginary line 2457A extending along the front edge of the case body 2453A when viewed from below, and that the visual confirmation portion 2456A is in contact with the imaginary line 2457A extending along the front edge of the case body 2453A when viewed from below. This allows the worker to visually confirm that the spring force of the attacca solenoid is making it difficult for the special prize opening door 2413A to transition to a normal advancement state.

As shown in Figure 384 (d), when the special prize opening door 2413A is in an abnormal retracted state, the visual confirmation portion 2456A is positioned so that its center contacts the imaginary line 2457A extending along the front edge of the case body 2453A when viewed from below. Therefore, in this example, when checking the operation of the special prize opening door 2413A during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, an operator visually checks the first forward/backward movement device 2452A removed from the gaming board 5 from below and pushes the special prize opening door 2413A rearward against the spring force of the attacca solenoid. If the operator confirms that the visual confirmation portion 2456A contacts the imaginary line 2457A extending along the front edge of the case body 2453A when viewed from below, the operator can visually confirm that the special prize opening door 2413A is having difficulty transitioning to a normal retracted state against the spring force of the attacca solenoid.

As described above, in the configuration of the viewing portion 2456A, which allows visual confirmation of whether the special prize opening door 2413A can normally transition to the advanced or retracted state based on the position where the viewing portion 2456A contacts the virtual line 2457A when viewed from below, there is no need to position the viewing portion 2456A in the front-to-rear direction when providing the viewing portion 2456A on the underside of the special prize opening door 2413A, and this increases the ease of providing the viewing portion 2456A on the underside of the special prize opening door 2413A. This prevents problems with the entry and exit operation of the special prize opening door 2413A and prevents disadvantages to players and gaming halls where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, thereby further increasing the reliability of the pachinko machine 1 for players and gaming halls. Note that the configuration of the viewing area 2456A provided on the underside of the large prize entrance door 2413A in this example may also be applied to the viewing area 2456A provided on the underside of the second starting entrance door 2411A, for example.

The viewing portion 2456A shown in Figures 384(a) and 384(c) is similar to the viewing portion 2456A shown in Figures 383(b) and 383(d) above, and has a viewing portion 2456A with an outer diameter smaller than the diameter of the game ball B, located in the center in the left-right direction and at the front end in the front-to-back direction on the underside of the plate-shaped second starting door 2411A. Note that the viewing portion 2456A in this example only needs to be located at the front end in the front-to-back direction of the underside of the second starting door 2411A, and may be located at any left-to-right position on the underside of the second starting door 2411A. Furthermore, from the perspective of ease of formation, the outer diameter of the viewing portion 2456A in this example is preferably smaller than the diameter of the game ball B, but may also be approximately the same as the diameter of the game ball B.

As shown in Figure 384 (a), when the second starting opening door 2411A is in the advanced state, the visual confirmation portion 2456A is positioned forward at a predetermined distance from the imaginary line 2457A extending along the front edge of the case body 2453A. Therefore, in this example, when checking the operation of the second starting opening door 2411A during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, the worker can visually confirm from the underside of the first advancing/retreating device 2452A removed from the gaming board 5 that the visual confirmation portion 2456A is positioned forward at a predetermined distance from the imaginary line 2457A extending along the front edge of the case body 2453A. This allows the worker to visually confirm that the second starting opening door 2411A can transition to the normal advanced state due to the spring force of the starting opening solenoid 2412A.

As shown in Figure 384(c), when the second starting opening door 2411A is in an abnormal advancement state, the visual confirmation portion 2456A is positioned forward of the imaginary line 2457A extending along the front edge of the case body 2453A at a distance smaller than the predetermined distance set in advance, or is in contact with the imaginary line 2457A when viewed from below. Therefore, in this example, when checking the operation of the second starting opening door 2411A during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, the worker visually inspects the first advancing/retracting device 2452A removed from the gaming board 5 from below, and if the worker confirms that the visual confirmation portion 2456A is positioned forward of the imaginary line 2457A extending along the front edge of the case body 2453A at a distance smaller than the predetermined distance set in advance, or is in contact with the imaginary line 2457A when viewed from below, the worker can visually confirm that the spring force of the starting opening solenoid 2412A is preventing the second starting opening door 2411A from transitioning to a normal advancement state.

As described above, when the second starting gate door 2411A can normally transition to the advanced state, it is positioned forward of the virtual line 2457A at a predetermined distance, and when the second starting gate door 2411A cannot normally transition to the advanced state, it is positioned forward of the virtual line 2457A at a distance smaller than the predetermined distance, or it contacts the virtual line 2457A when viewed from below. In this configuration, the size of the viewing portion 2456A can be made smaller than the diameter of the game ball B, which improves the ease of forming the viewing portion 2456A on the underside of the second starting gate door 2411A. This prevents problems with the entry and exit operation of the second starting gate door 2411A and prevents disadvantages to players and the amusement hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, thereby further increasing the reliability of the pachinko machine 1 for players and the amusement hall. Note that the configuration of the viewing area 2456A provided on the underside of the second starting gate door 2411A in this example may also be applied to the viewing area 2456A provided on the underside of the large prize gate door 2413A, for example.

The viewing portion 2456A shown in Figures 384(b) and 384(d) is similar to the viewing portion 2456A shown in Figures 383(a) and 383(c) above, and has a viewing portion 2456A with an outer diameter smaller than the diameter of the game ball B, located in the center in the left-right direction and at the rear end in the front-to-rear direction on the underside of the plate-shaped second starting door 2411A. Note that the viewing portion 2456A in this example only needs to be located at the rear end in the front-to-rear direction of the underside of the second starting door 2411A, and may be located at any left-to-right position on the underside of the second starting door 2411A. Furthermore, from the perspective of ease of formation, the outer diameter of the viewing portion 2456A in this example is preferably smaller than the diameter of the game ball B, but may also be approximately the same as the diameter of the game ball B.

As shown in FIG. 384(b), when the second starting opening door 2411A is in the retracted state, the visual confirmation portion 2456A is positioned rearward at a predetermined distance from the imaginary line 2457A extending along the front edge of the case body 2453A. Therefore, in this example, when checking the operation of the second starting opening door 2411A during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, the worker visually inspects the first advancing/retracting device 2452A removed from the gaming board 5 from below and pushes the second starting opening door 2411A rearward against the spring force of the starting opening solenoid 2412A. When the worker confirms that the visual confirmation portion 2456A is positioned rearward at a predetermined distance from the imaginary line 2457A extending along the front edge of the case body 2453A, the worker can visually confirm that the second starting opening door 2411A can transition to the normal retracted state against the spring force of the starting opening solenoid 2412A.

As shown in Figure 383 (d), when the second starting door 2411A is in an abnormal retracted state, the viewing portion 2456A is positioned rearward at a distance smaller than a predetermined distance from the imaginary line 2457A extending along the front edge of the case main body 2453A, or is in a position where it is in contact with the imaginary line 2457A when viewed from below. For this reason, in this example, when checking the operation of the second starting gate door 2411A during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, an operator can visually inspect the first advancing/retreating device 2452A removed from the game board 5 from below and push the second starting gate door 2411A rearward against the spring force of the starting gate solenoid 2412A. If the operator confirms that the visual confirmation portion 2456A is positioned rearward at a distance smaller than a predetermined distance from the imaginary line 2457A extending along the front edge of the case main body 2453A, or that it is in contact with the imaginary line 2457A when viewed from below, the operator can visually confirm that the second starting gate door 2411A is having difficulty transitioning to a normal retracted state against the spring force of the starting gate solenoid 2412A.

As described above, when the second starting gate door 2411A can normally transition to the retracted state, it is positioned rearward at a predetermined distance from the virtual line 2457A, and when the second starting gate door 2411A cannot normally transition to the advanced state or the retracted state, it is positioned rearward at a distance smaller than the predetermined distance from the virtual line 2457A or is in contact with the virtual line 2457A when viewed from below. In this configuration, the size of the viewing portion 2456A can be made smaller than the diameter of the game ball B, for example, thereby improving the ease of forming the viewing portion 2456A on the underside of the second starting gate door 2411A. This prevents problems with the entry and exit operation of the second starting gate door 2411A and prevents disadvantages to players and the amusement hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, thereby further increasing the reliability of the pachinko machine 1 for players and the amusement hall. Note that the configuration of the viewing area 2456A provided on the underside of the second starting gate door 2411A in this example may also be applied to the viewing area 2456A provided on the underside of the large winning gate door 2413A, for example.

In this embodiment, the positional relationship of the visual confirmation portion 2456A relative to the case body 2453A has been described in terms of the position of the visual confirmation portion 2456A relative to the imaginary line 2457A extending along the front edge of the case body 2453A. However, the imaginary line 2457A may extend, for example, along the rear edge of the cover body 2454A, along the front edge of the cover body 2454A, or along the rear edge of the case body 2453A. From the perspective of improving the work efficiency of an operator who visually confirms the position of the visual confirmation portion 2456A relative to the case body 2453A when checking the operation of the pachinko machine 1 during the manufacturing process, it is desirable that the visual confirmation portion 2456A be arbitrarily set to serve as a visual target relative to the case body 2453A.

In addition, in this embodiment, the visual confirmation portion 2456A is represented by a "★" symbol. However, the visual confirmation portion 2456A may have a different shape as long as it serves as a visual target for the case body 2453A when checking the operation of the second starting gate 2411A and the special prize gate 2413A. Figures 385(a) to 385(d) are schematic diagrams of the first forward/backward movement device 2452A viewed from below, showing the underside of the special prize gate 2413A provided with other visual confirmation portion 2456A. Specifically, the visual confirmation portion 2456A may be represented by a "●" symbol as shown in Figure 385(a), a "▲" symbol as shown in Figure 385(b), a "■" symbol as shown in Figure 385(c), or a symbol of multiple wires extending left and right arranged at a predetermined interval in the front-to-back direction as shown in Figure 385(d). The visible portion 2456A may also be a letter such as "shi" or "U." However, if a graphic "●" is used, if a player were to visually recognize it, the circular notation could evoke the image of game ball B, which could lead to some kind of misunderstanding (such as a misunderstanding regarding the manner in which the game ball is launched). In light of this, when using a graphic "●", it is desirable to use a "●" with a maximum diameter (e.g., 1 to 5 mm) smaller than the diameter of game ball B (e.g., 11 mm), or to use a "●" with a portion missing (e.g., semicircular), in order to avoid reminding the player of game ball B as much as possible.

Furthermore, particularly when the second starting gate door 2411A and the large prize gate door 2413A are unitized as in this example, when visually inspecting the first forward/backward moving device 2452A (first attacker unit 2400A) from below, it may be difficult to tell which of the second starting gate door 2411A and the large prize gate door 2413A it is. Therefore, the configuration of the viewing section 2456A may be different for the second starting gate door 2411A and the large prize gate door 2413A, preventing misidentification by workers. Alternatively, the configuration of the viewing section 2456A may be the same for the second starting gate door 2411A and the large prize gate door 2413A, improving worker efficiency.

In addition, in this embodiment, we have described an aspect in which the operation of the second starting gate door 2411A and the special winning gate door 2413A is checked using the visual inspection section 2456A provided on the second starting gate door 2411A and the special winning gate door 2413A as a visual target during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1. However, the operation of the second starting gate door 2411A and the special winning gate door 2413A may also be checked by visually inspecting the underside of the first advancing/retreating device 2452A (first attacker unit 2400A) removed from the gaming board 5, for example, in an amusement hall or the like where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Figure 386(a) is a partial rear view of a portion of the second advancing/retreating device 2652A when the special prize winning entrance door 2611A has transitioned to a retracted state, as viewed from the rear side, and Figure 386(b) is a partial rear view of a portion of the second advancing/retreating device 2652A when the special prize winning entrance door 2611A has transitioned to an advanced state, as viewed from the rear side. As shown in Figure 386(a) or 386(b), a viewing section 2656A that can be seen from outside the second advancing/retreating device 2652A is provided on the back side (rear surface) of the special prize winning entrance door 2611A. The viewing section 2656A is arranged so that it can be seen directly or through a transparent portion from the rear side of the second attacca unit 2600A (exterior of the second attacca unit 2600A) or the rear side of the second advancing/retreating device 2652A (exterior of the second advancing/retreating device 2652A) when the second attacca unit 2600A is removed from the gaming board 5 or the second advancing/retreating device 2652A is removed from the second attacca unit 2600A. It is desirable that the viewing section 2656A be arranged at the tip of the back side (rear surface) of the back of the special device winning entrance door 2611A, from the viewpoint of increasing the distance between the position when the special device winning entrance door 2611A is in the advanced state and the position when the special device winning entrance door 2611A is in the retracted state.

In this embodiment, the visible portion 2656A is a diagrammatic notation of "★" provided on the back side (rear face) of the prize winning entrance door 2611A. The visible portion 2656A may be printed on the back side (rear face) of the prize winning entrance door 2611A, or a sticker-like film member on which the visible portion 2656A is formed may be attached to the back side (rear face) of the prize winning entrance door 2611A. Furthermore, the visible portion 2656A may be formed by raising the back side (rear face) of the prize winning entrance door 2611A to form a convex mark, or by depressing the back side (rear face) of the prize winning entrance door 2611A to form a concave mark. Furthermore, from the perspective of avoiding damage to the visible portion 2656A itself, it is preferable that the visible portion 2656A is not a sticker-like film member, but is instead formed integrally with the prize winning opening door 2611A by printing or forming marks.

As shown in Figures 386(a) and 386(b), a viewing portion 2456A having an outer diameter larger than the diameter of game ball B at its tip is provided on the back side (rear surface) of the special prize winning door 2611A. In this example, the outer diameter of the viewing portion 2456A is preferably larger than the diameter of game ball B from the standpoint of ease of visibility, but may also be approximately the same as the diameter of game ball B.

As shown in Figure 386(a), when the reel prize opening door 2611A is in a retracted state and the second forward/backward movement device 2652A, which contacts the game ball B and prevents the game ball B from moving toward the game prize opening sensor 2601A, is in a non-winning state, the left end of the viewing portion 2656A of the reel prize opening door 2611A is in contact with the imaginary line 2657A that extends along the left edge of the decorative cover 2650A (the left edge when viewing the pachinko machine 1 from the front, the right edge in the figure) in a rear view. In other words, in the normal retracted state of the reel prize opening door 2611A, the viewing portion 2656A is positioned so that the left edge of the "★" mark on the viewing portion 2656A is in contact with the left edge of the decorative cover 2650A in a rear view. Therefore, when the retracted state of the prize winning door 2611A is operated, if the left edge of the "★" marking on the visible portion 2656A is not in contact with the left edge of the decorative cover 2650A when viewed from behind (for example, if the right end of the visible portion 2656A is in contact with the left edge of the decorative cover 2650A when viewed from behind), this is not a normal retracted state of the prize winning door 2611A, but rather a retracted state involving an abnormality that may have some effect on the progress of the game.

As shown in Figure 386 (b), in the winning state of the second forward/backward moving device 2652A, in which the special prize opening door 2611A is in the advanced state and does not restrict the game ball B from moving toward the special prize opening sensor 2601A, the viewing portion 2656A of the special prize opening door 2611A is located to the left with the largest preset distance from the left edge of the decorative cover 2650A (the left edge when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1, the right edge in the illustration). In other words, in the normal advanced state of the special prize opening door 2611A, the viewing portion 2656A is positioned so that the "★" mark on the viewing portion 2656A is located to the left with the largest preset distance from the left edge of the decorative cover 2650A (the left edge when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1, the right edge in the illustration). For this reason, when the retracted state is operated, if the left edge of the "★" marking on the visible portion 2656A is not positioned to the left of the left edge of the decorative cover 2650A (the left edge when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1, the edge on the right side in the illustration) at the largest preset distance (for example, if the visible portion 2656A is positioned to the left of the left edge of the decorative cover 2650A (the left edge when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1, the edge on the right side in the illustration) at a distance smaller than the largest preset distance), then the retracted state of the prize opening door 2611A is not a normal advanced state, but rather an advanced state involving an abnormality that may have some effect on the progress of the game.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the special device winning entrance door 2611A is in a retracted state, it is visible from the outside, that is, the back side of the second advancing/retreating device 2652A, that the viewing portion 2656A is in a position where its left end is in contact with an imaginary line 2657A extending along the left edge of the decorative cover 2650A (the left edge when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the right edge in the illustration), when viewed from behind; and when the special device winning entrance door 2611A is in an advanced state, it is visible from the outside, that is, the back side of the second advancing/retreating device 2652A, that the viewing portion 2656A is in a position where it is positioned to the left with the largest preset distance from the left edge of the decorative cover 2650A (the left edge when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the right edge in the illustration). Therefore, by visually observing the second advancing/retreating device 2652A from the rear side, the visual state of the visual confirmation portion 2656A provided on the bonus prize opening door 2611A can be used as a visual indicator for the decorative cover 2650A, making it easy to confirm whether the bonus prize opening door 2611A is in the advanced state or the retracted state. Therefore, with the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the operation of the bonus prize opening door 2611A can be easily confirmed during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, preventing malfunctions in the advancing/retreating operation of the bonus prize opening door 2611A and preventing disadvantages to players and gaming halls where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, thereby increasing the reliability of the pachinko machine 1 for players and gaming halls.

Furthermore, after the second forward/backward moving device 2652A (second attacca unit 2600A) is attached to the gaming board 5, the front of the prize winning device door 2611A is easily visible to a player playing the pachinko machine 1. However, the viewing section 2656A in this embodiment is provided on the rear side (back surface) of the prize winning device door 2611A. Therefore, even if a player were to peer into the prize winning device door 2611A from the front, it is impossible or difficult for the player to view the viewing section 2656A. This prevents the aesthetic appeal of the second attacca unit 2600A or the decorativeness of the pachinko machine 1 from being impaired when the player views the viewing section 2656A.

In addition, after the second forward/backward moving device 2652A (second attacker unit 2600A) is attached to the gaming board 5, the gaming ball B comes into contact with the left side of the special prize opening door 2611A, whereas the viewing section 2656A in this embodiment is provided on the rear side (back surface) of the special prize opening door 2611A. Therefore, even if the viewing section 2656A is provided, it is possible to avoid the viewing section 2656A itself interfering with the flow of the gaming ball B, and it is possible to prevent the viewing section 2656A itself from causing any disruption to the progress of the game.

In order to improve the visibility of the viewing area 2656A on the back side (rear side) of the prize winning door 2611A, which can be seen from the back side of the second forward/backward moving device 2652A through the case body 2653A, the case body 2653A and the cover body 2654A can be made colored transparent or colorless transparent so that they are transparent, while the prize winning door 2611A can be made colored opaque so that it is not transparent, and the viewing area 2656A can be provided on the back side (rear side) of the prize winning door 2611A, which is made colored opaque. This makes it even easier to check the operation of the prize winning door 2613A using the viewing area 2656A during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1.

The second advancing/retreating device 2652A may also be configured with a locking mechanism that restricts the advancing movement of the prize winning entrance door 2611A that has transitioned to the retracted state, thereby enhancing the effectiveness of preventing fraudulent activity against the prize winning entrance door 2611A. In this configuration, when checking the operation of the prize winning entrance door 2611A during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, a worker releases the lock using the locking mechanism and then visually inspects the second advancing/retreating device 2652A removed from the game board 5 from the back. By pulling the prize winning entrance door 2611A to the left against the spring force of the prize winning entrance solenoid, it is possible to visually determine whether the prize winning entrance door 2611A can transition to the normal advanced state against the spring force of the prize winning entrance solenoid.

The viewing area 2656A may be located anywhere on the rear (back) side of the prize winning door 2611A, and may be any size. By using the viewing area 2656A on the prize winning door 2611A as a visual target for the decorative cover 2650A, it is possible to easily check whether the prize winning door 2611A is in the advanced state or the retracted state. Below, we will explain in detail the various states of the prize winning door 2611A and the positional relationship of the viewing area 2656A to the decorative cover 2650A for such an embodiment. Figure 387(a) is a schematic diagram of the second advancing/retreating device 2652A viewed from behind, showing the retracted role prize opening door 2611A, and Figure 387(b) is a schematic diagram of the second advancing/retreating device 2652A viewed from behind, showing the retracted role prize opening door 2611A, and the advanced role prize opening door 2611A.

As shown in Figures 387(a) and 387(b), a viewing portion 2456A having an outer diameter smaller than the diameter of game ball B at its tip is provided on the back side (rear surface) of the special prize winning door 2611A. In this example, the outer diameter of the viewing portion 2456A is preferably smaller than the diameter of game ball B from the standpoint of ease of formation, but may also be approximately the same as the diameter of game ball B.

As shown in Figure 387(a), when the bonus prize opening door 2611A is in the retracted state, the visual confirmation portion 2656A is positioned to the left of the imaginary line 2657A extending along the left edge of the decorative cover 2650A. Therefore, in this example, when checking the operation of the bonus prize opening door 2611A during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, the worker can visually confirm from the back side of the second forward/backward movement device 2652A removed from the gaming board 5 that the visual confirmation portion 2656A is positioned to the left of the imaginary line 2657A extending along the left edge of the decorative cover 2650A. This allows the worker to easily see that the bonus prize opening door 2611A can transition to the normal retracted state due to the biasing force of the spring of the bonus prize opening solenoid.

In addition, when the bonus prize opening door 2611A is in the retracted state, the visible portion 2656A may be positioned so that it contacts the imaginary line 2657A extending along the left edge of the decorative cover 2650A in a rear view (the visible portion 2656A is visible as overlapping the imaginary line 2657A in a rear view). In this embodiment, when checking the operation of the bonus prize opening door 2611A during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, the worker can visually inspect the second advancing/retreating device 2652A removed from the gaming board 5 from the rear side. If the worker confirms that the visible portion 2656A contacts the imaginary line 2657A extending along the left edge of the decorative cover 2650A in a rear view, the worker can easily visually confirm that the bonus prize opening door 2611A can transition to the normal retracted state due to the biasing force of the spring of the bonus prize opening solenoid.

As shown in Figure 387 (b), when the special prize winning door 2611A is in the advanced state, the viewing portion 2656A is positioned to the left with the largest predetermined distance from the left edge of the decorative cover 2650A (the left edge when viewing the pachinko machine 1 from the front, i.e., the right edge in the figure). For this reason, in this example, when checking the operation of the prize opening door 2611A during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, an operator visually inspects the second forward/backward movement device 2652A removed from the game board 5 from the rear side and pulls the prize opening door 2611A to the left against the spring force of the prize opening solenoid. If the operator confirms that the visible portion 2656A is positioned to the left with the largest preset distance from the left edge of the decorative cover 2650A (the left edge when viewing the pachinko machine 1 from the front, or the right edge in the illustration), the operator can visually confirm that the prize opening door 2611A can transition to a normal advanced state against the spring force of the prize opening solenoid.

As described above, when the reel prize winning door 2611A can normally transition to the retracted state, the viewing section 2656A is located to the left of the imaginary line 2657A extending along the left edge of the decorative cover 2650A, and when the reel prize winning door 2611A can normally transition to the advanced state, the viewing section 2656A is located to the left at the largest predetermined distance from the left edge of the decorative cover 2650A (the left edge when viewing the pachinko machine 1 from the front, the right edge in the figure).Therefore, by visually inspecting the second forward/backward moving device 2652A from the rear side, the operator can use the viewing section 2656A provided on the reel prize winning door 2611A as a visual target for the decorative cover 2650A to confirm whether the reel prize winning door 2611A is in the advanced state or the retracted state. Therefore, with the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, it is easy to check the operation of the prize winning device door 2611A during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, preventing problems with the opening and closing operation of the prize winning device door 2611A and preventing disadvantages to players and gaming halls where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, thereby increasing the reliability of the pachinko machine 1 for players, gaming halls, etc.

In addition, the viewing portion 2656A may be provided on the base end side of the special prize winning door 2611A. In this embodiment, compared to an embodiment in which the viewing portion 2656A is provided on the tip end side of the special prize winning door 2611A, the distance between the viewing portion 2656A and the left edge of the decorative cover 2650A when the special prize winning door 2611A is in the advanced state is smaller, so the visibility of the operator visually checking that the special prize winning door 2611A can normally transition to the advanced state is reduced. However, since the width of the special prize winning door 2611A increases from the tip end side to the base end side, it is possible to improve the ease of forming the viewing portion 2656A on the back side (rear face) of the special prize winning door 2611A. This prevents malfunctions in the extension and retraction operation of the bonus prize opening door 2611A and prevents disadvantages to players and the amusement hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, thereby increasing the reliability of the pachinko machine 1 for players and amusement halls. Furthermore, the visual confirmation portion 2656A is not limited to a form in which its position relative to the left edge of the decorative cover 2650A is visually confirmed, but may also be a visual marker for, for example, the left end of the case body 2653A of the second advancing/retracting device 2652A or the left end of the cover body 2654A, making it easy to confirm whether the bonus prize opening door 2611A can normally transition to the advanced or retracted state.

In addition, while the visual confirmation portion 2656A is represented by a "★" in this embodiment, it may have a different shape as long as it serves as a visual target when checking the operation of the prize winning entrance door 2611A. Specifically, like the visual confirmation portion 2456A described above, the visual confirmation portion 2656A may be represented by a "●" or a "▲" or a "■" or a graphic notation of multiple wires extending left and right arranged at a predetermined interval in the front-to-back direction, or may be represented by letters such as "shi" or "U." Note that if a "●" is used, if a player were to visually confirm it, the circular notation could remind them of game ball B, which could lead to some kind of misunderstanding (for example, a misunderstanding regarding the launch mode of the game ball). In light of this, when using the graphic notation "●", it is desirable to use a "●" with a maximum diameter (e.g., 1-5 mm) smaller than the diameter of game ball B (e.g., 11 mm), or to use a "●" with a portion missing (e.g., semicircular), in order to avoid reminding the player of game ball B as much as possible.

In addition, in this embodiment, we have described an aspect in which the operation of the prize winning device door 2611A is checked using the visual indicator 2656A provided on the prize winning device door 2611A as a visual target during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1. However, the operation of the prize winning device door 2611A may also be checked by visually checking the back side of the second forward/backward moving device 2652A (second attacker unit 2600A) removed from the game board 5, for example, in an amusement hall or the like where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

[Attacker Unit Modification Example 2]
Next, as a further variation from the above, a configuration that makes it easier to check whether the first attacca unit 2400B and the second attacca unit 2600B attached to the game board 5 are operating normally will be described. Below, the first attacca unit 2400B and the second attacca unit 2600B, which are further modifications of the first attacca unit 2400 and the second attacca unit 2600 described with reference to Figures 140 to 145, etc., will be described with reference to Figure 388, etc. Note that in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the components other than the first attacca unit 2400B and the second attacca unit 2600B have the same configuration as the pachinko machine 1 of the embodiment having the above-mentioned first attacca unit 2400 and the second attacca unit 2600, and the same components will be described with the same reference numerals.

Figure 388(a) is a top view of the first advancing/retreating device 2452B with the second starting gate door 2411B and the large prize gate door 2413B transitioned to an advanced state, as viewed from the top side, and Figure 388(b) is a top view of the first advancing/retreating device 2452B with the second starting gate door 2411B and the large prize gate door 2413B transitioned to a retracted state, as viewed from the top side. As shown in Figure 388(a) or Figure 388(b), a viewing portion 2456B that can be seen from outside the first advancing/retreating device 2452B is provided on the top surface of the case body 2453B of the first advancing/retreating device 2452B. The viewing section 2456B is arranged so that it can be seen directly from the top side of the first advancing/retreating device 2452B, which is the outside of the first advancing/retreating device 2452B, or through a transparent portion when the first attacker unit 2400B is removed from the game board 5, or when the first advancing/retreating device 2452B is removed from the first attacker unit 2400B.

In this embodiment, the visible portion 2456B is represented by a "★" on the top surface of the case body 2453B. The visible portion 2456B may be printed on the inner or outer surface of the top surface of the case body 2453B, or a sticker-like film member on which the visible portion 2456B is formed may be attached to the inner or outer surface of the top surface of the case body 2453B. The visible portion 2456B may also be formed by raising the inner or outer surface of the top surface of the case body 2453B to form a convex mark, or by recessing the inner or outer surface of the top surface of the case body 2453B to form a concave mark. From the perspective of avoiding damage to the visible portion 2456B itself, it is preferable that the visible portion 2456B be integrally formed with the case body 2453B by printing or forming a mark, rather than by a sticker-like film member. Furthermore, the visual confirmation portion 2456B may be provided not only on the top surface of the case body 2453B, but also on the inner or outer surface of the bottom surface of the case body 2453B, or on the inner or outer surface of the side surface of the case body 2453B.

As shown in Figure 388 (a), when the large prize opening door 2413B is in the advanced state and the first forward/backward moving device 2452B, which comes into contact with the game ball B and prevents the game ball B from moving toward the large prize opening sensor 2402B, is in a non-winning state, the viewing portion 2456B of the case main body 2453B (the viewing portion 2456B on the right side in the figure) is located rearward of the imaginary line 2457B extending along the rear edge of the large prize opening door 2413B. Furthermore, when the second starting gate door 2411B is in the advanced state and the first advancing/retracting device 2452B, which comes into contact with the game ball B and restricts the game ball B from moving toward the second starting gate sensor 2401B, is in a non-entered state, the viewing portion 2456B of the case body 2453B (the viewing portion 2456B on the left side in the figure) is located behind the imaginary line 2457B extending along the rear edge of the second starting gate door 2411B. In other words, in the normal advanced state of the special prize gate door 2413B and the second starting gate door 2411B, the viewing portion 2456B is positioned so that the "★" mark on the viewing portion 2456B is located behind the imaginary line 2457B extending along the rear edge of the special prize gate door 2413B and the second starting gate door 2411B. For this reason, when the special prize entrance door 2413A or the second starting entrance door 2411A is operated to the advanced state, if the "★" marking on the viewing area 2456A is not positioned behind the imaginary line 2457B extending along the rear edge of the special prize entrance door 2413B or the second starting entrance door 2411B (for example, if part of the viewing area 2456B is positioned so as to overlap the rear edge), then the special prize entrance door 2413B or the second starting entrance door 2411B is not in a normal advanced state, but rather is in an advanced state involving an abnormality that may have some effect on the progress of the game.

As shown in Figure 388 (b), in the winning state of the first advancing/retreating device 2452B, in which the special prize opening door 2413B is in the retracted state and does not restrict the game ball B from moving toward the special prize opening sensor 2402B, the viewing portion 2456B of the case body 2453B (the viewing portion 2456B on the right side in the figure) is located forward of the imaginary line 2457B extending along the rear edge of the special prize opening door 2413B. Also, in the winning state of the first advancing/retreating device 2452B, in which the second starting opening door 2411B is in the retracted state and does not restrict the game ball B from moving toward the second starting opening sensor 2401B, the viewing portion 2456B of the case body 2453B (the viewing portion 2456B on the left side in the figure) is located forward of the imaginary line 2457B extending along the rear edge of the second starting opening door 2411B. In other words, the viewing section 2456B is positioned so that the normal retracted state of the large prize entrance door 2413B and the second starting entrance door 2411B is such that the "★" marking on the viewing section 2456B is positioned forward of the imaginary line 2457B extending along the rear edge of the large prize entrance door 2413B and the second starting entrance door 2411B. For this reason, when the special prize entrance door 2413A or the second starting entrance door 2411A is operated to the retracted state, if the "★" mark on the viewing area 2456A is not positioned forward of the imaginary line 2457B extending along the rear edge of the special prize entrance door 2413B or the second starting entrance door 2411B (for example, if part of the viewing area 2456B is positioned so as to overlap the rear edge), then the special prize entrance door 2413B or the second starting entrance door 2411B is not in a normal retracted state, but rather is in an abnormal retracted state which may have some effect on the progress of the game.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the special prize opening door 2413B and the second starting opening door 2411B are in the advanced state, it is possible to see from the outside, on the top surface of the first advancing/retreating device 2452B, that the viewing portion 2456B of the case body 2453B (the viewing portion 2456B on the right side in the illustration) is positioned rearward relative to the imaginary line 2457B extending along the rear edge of the special prize opening door 2413B and the rear edge of the second starting opening door 2411B, and when the special prize opening door 2413B and the second starting opening door 2411B are in the retracted state, it is possible to see from the outside, on the top surface of the first advancing/retreating device 2452B, that the viewing portion 2456B of the case body 2453B (the viewing portion 2456B on the right side in the illustration) is positioned rearward relative to the imaginary line 2457B extending along the rear edge of the special prize opening door 2413B and the rear edge of the second starting opening door 2411B. Since it is possible to see from the outside, that is, from the top side of the first advancing/retreating device 2452B, that the first advancing/retreating device 2452B is positioned forward of the virtual line 2457B extending from the game board 5, by visually inspecting the first advancing/retreating device 2452B from the top side before it is attached to the game board 5 or the first advancing/retreating device 2452B after it has been removed from the game board 5, it is possible to use the viewing portion 2456B (viewing portion 2456B on the right side in the illustration) provided on the case main body 2453B as a visual target for the large prize opening door 2413B and the second starting opening door 2411B, and easily confirm whether the large prize opening door 2413B and the second starting opening door 2411B are in an advanced state or whether they are in a retracted state. Therefore, with the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, it is easy to check the operation of the large prize opening door 2413B and the second starting opening door 2411B during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, preventing problems with the entrance and exit operations of the large prize opening door 2413B and the second starting opening door 2411B, preventing disadvantages to players and gaming halls where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and ultimately increasing the reliability of the pachinko machine 1 for players, gaming halls, etc.

In addition, the first advancing/retreating device 2452B is positioned behind the play area 5a, and a decorative surface that decorates the pachinko machine 1 is formed on the front of the play panel 1100 that defines the rear of the play area 5a. Therefore, even if a player tries to look at the top or bottom of the first advancing/retreating device 2452B (first attacker unit 2400B) after the first advancing/retreating device 2452B (first attacker unit 2400B) is attached to the play board 5, it is difficult for the player to see the top or bottom of the first advancing/retreating device 2452B (first attacker unit 2400B), making it impossible or difficult for the player to see the viewing portion 2456B, preventing the aesthetic appeal of the first attacker unit 2400B or the decorativeness of the pachinko machine 1 from being damaged when the player looks at the viewing portion 2456B.

In addition, after the first forward/backward moving device 2452B (first attacker unit 2400B) is attached to the gaming board 5, the gaming ball B comes into contact with the front surface of the cover body 2454B, whereas the viewing portion 2456B of this embodiment is provided on the upper surface of the case body 2453B. Therefore, even if the viewing portion 2456B is provided, it is possible to avoid the viewing portion 2456B itself interfering with the flow of the gaming ball, and it is possible to prevent the viewing portion 2456B itself from causing any disruption to the progress of the game.

In order to improve the visibility of the second starting gate door 2411B and the special prize gate door 2413B when viewed from the top side of the first advancing/retreating device 2452B through the case body 2453B, the case body 2453B and the cover body 2454B may be formed to be colored transparent or colorless transparent so as to have transparency, while the second starting gate door 2411B and the special prize gate door 2413B may be formed to be colored opaque so as not to have transparency, and a viewing section 2456B may be provided on the top surface of the case body 2453B which is colored transparent or colorless transparent. This makes it even easier to check the operation of the special prize gate door 2413B and the second starting gate door 2411B using the viewing section 2456B as a visual target during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the first advancing/retreating device 2452B may be configured to further include a locking mechanism that restricts the retreating operation of the second starting gate door 2411B and the large prize gate door 2413B that have transitioned to the advanced state, thereby enhancing the effectiveness of preventing fraudulent activity against the second starting gate door 2411B and the large prize gate door 2413B. In this configuration, when checking the operation of the second start gate door 2411B and the special prize gate door 2413B during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, the worker visually inspects the first advance/retreat device 2452B removed from the game board 5 from above after releasing the locking mechanism, and by pushing the second start gate door 2411B rearward against the spring force of the start gate solenoid or by pushing the special prize gate door 2413B rearward against the spring force of the attacca solenoid, it is possible to visually determine whether the second start gate door 2411B can transition to a normal retracted state against the spring force of the start gate solenoid or whether the special prize gate door 2413B can transition to a normal retracted state against the spring force of the attacca solenoid.

In addition, the second starting gate door 2411B and the large prize gate door 2413B may be supported by the first link mechanism or the second link mechanism and may be adapted to move forward or backward within the case body 2453B, or may be supported outside the case body 2453B by the first link mechanism or the second link mechanism and may be adapted to move forward or backward along the top or bottom surface of the case body 2453B, or may be supported on the top or bottom surface of the case body 2453B and may be adapted to move forward or backward along the top or bottom surface of the case body 2453B by the first link mechanism or the second link mechanism. When the second starting gate door 2411B and the large prize gate door 2413B are advanced or retracted within the case body 2453B, the effectiveness of preventing fraud against the second starting gate door 2411B and the large prize gate door 2413B can be improved, whereas when the second starting gate door 2411B and the large prize gate door 2413B are advanced or retracted outside the case body 2453B, the efficiency of maintenance work for malfunctions that occur in the second starting gate door 2411B and the large prize gate door 2413B can be improved.

Furthermore, the viewing portion 2456B may be provided at any position on the top surface of the case main body 2453B, and the viewing portion 2456B may be provided in any size. By using the viewing portion 2456B provided on the case main body 2453B as a visual guide for the second starting gate door 2411B or the large prize gate door 2413B, it is possible to easily confirm whether the second starting gate door 2411B or the large prize gate door 2413B is in the advanced state or whether the second starting gate door 2411B or the large prize gate door 2413B is in the retracted state. Below, for such an embodiment, the respective states of the second starting gate door 2411B or the large prize gate door 2413B and the positional relationship of the viewing portion 2456B to the second starting gate door 2411B or the large prize gate door 2413B will be explained in detail.

Figure 389(a) is a schematic diagram of the first advancing/retreating device 2452B viewed from above, showing the second starting gate 2411B and the special prize gate 2413B in the advanced state; Figure 389(b) is a schematic diagram of the first advancing/retreating device 2452B viewed from above, showing the second starting gate 2411B and the special prize gate 2413B in the retracted state; and Figures 389(c) and (d) are schematic diagrams of the first advancing/retreating device 2452B viewed from above, showing the second starting gate 2411B and the special prize gate 2413B in a malfunctioning state. Note that the top of the figure is the front that faces the player when the first advancing/retreating device 2452B is attached to the gaming board 5, and the bottom of the figure is the rear that faces away from the player when the first advancing/retreating device 2452B is attached to the gaming board 5.

As shown in Figures 389(a) to 389(d), the top surface of the case main body 2453B is provided with a viewing portion 2456B, which has an outer diameter approximately equal to the diameter of the game ball B, on the side of the special prize opening door 2413B and in the center in the front-to-back direction. Note that in this example, the viewing portion 2456B is preferably provided on the side of the special prize opening door 2413B on the top surface of the case main body 2453B from the perspective of visibility, but may be provided in either the left or right position on the top surface of the case main body 2453B. In this case, the viewing portion 2456B may be configured to vertically overlap the special prize opening door 2413B in the retracted state when viewed from above, or may not be configured to vertically overlap the special prize opening door 2413B in the retracted state. Furthermore, in this example, the outer diameter of the viewing portion 2456B is preferably approximately equal to the diameter of the game ball B from the perspective of ease of visibility, but may be smaller than the diameter of the game ball B.

As shown in FIG. 389(a), when the special prize opening door 2413B is in the advanced state, the visual confirmation portion 2456B is positioned rearward at a predetermined distance from the imaginary line 2457B extending along the rear edge of the special prize opening door 2413B. Therefore, in this example, when checking the operation of the special prize opening door 2413B during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, the worker can visually confirm from above that the first forward/backward movement device 2452B removed from the gaming board 5 is positioned rearward at a predetermined distance from the imaginary line 2457B extending along the rear edge of the special prize opening door 2413B. This allows the worker to easily visually confirm that the special prize opening door 2413B can transition to the normal advanced state due to the spring force of the attacca solenoid.

As shown in FIG. 389(b), when the special prize opening door 2413B is in the retracted state, the visual confirmation portion 2456B is positioned forward at a predetermined distance from the imaginary line 2457B extending along the rear edge of the special prize opening door 2413B. Therefore, in this example, when checking the operation of the special prize opening door 2413B during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, an operator visually checks the first forward/backward movement device 2452B removed from the gaming board 5 from above and pushes the special prize opening door 2413B rearward against the spring force of the attacca solenoid. When the operator confirms that the visual confirmation portion 2456B is positioned forward at a predetermined distance from the imaginary line 2457B extending along the rear edge of the special prize opening door 2413B, the operator can easily visually confirm that the special prize opening door 2413B can transition to the normal retracted state against the spring force of the attacca solenoid.

As shown in Figure 389 (c), when the special prize opening door 2413B is in an abnormal advancement state, the visual confirmation portion 2456B is not positioned rearward at a predetermined distance from the imaginary line 2457B extending along the rear edge of the special prize opening door 2413B. Therefore, in this example, when checking the operation of the special prize opening door 2413B during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, if an operator visually inspects the first advance/retract device 2452B removed from the gaming board 5 from above and confirms that the visual confirmation portion 2456B is not positioned rearward at a predetermined distance from the imaginary line 2457B extending along the rear edge of the special prize opening door 2413B, the operator can easily visually confirm that the spring force of the attacca solenoid is making it difficult for the special prize opening door 2413B to transition to a normal advancement state.

As shown in Figure 389 (d), when the large prize opening door 2413B is in an abnormal retracted state, the viewing portion 2456B is positioned so as not to be forward of the virtual line 2457B extending along the rear edge of the large prize opening door 2413B, with a predetermined distance therebetween. For this reason, in this example, when checking the operation of the special prize opening door 2413B during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, an operator can visually inspect the first forward/backward movement device 2452B removed from the game board 5 from above and push the special prize opening door 2413B rearward against the spring force of the attacca solenoid, and if it is confirmed that the visual confirmation portion 2456B is not positioned forward at a predetermined distance from the imaginary line 2457B extending along the rear edge of the special prize opening door 2413B, the operator can easily visually confirm that the special prize opening door 2413B is having difficulty transitioning to a normal retracted state against the spring force of the attacca solenoid.

As described above, the viewing portion 2456B is provided on the top surface of the case body 2453B, on the side of the special prize opening door 2413B and in the center in the front-to-back direction, with an outer diameter approximately equal to the diameter of the game ball B. This allows an operator who checks the operation of the special prize opening door 2413B during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1 to visually check the position of the viewing portion 2456B relative to the special prize opening door 2413B and easily determine whether the special prize opening door 2413B can transition to the normal advance state and the normal retract state. This prevents malfunctions in the entry and exit operation of the special prize opening door 2413B and prevents disadvantages to players and the amusement hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, thereby further increasing the reliability of the pachinko machine 1 for players and the amusement hall. Note that the configuration of the viewing portion 2456B provided on the top surface of the case body 2453B in this example may also be applied to, for example, the viewing portion 2456B provided on the second starting door 2411B side of the top surface of the case body 2453B.

As shown in Figures 389(a) and 389(c), the top surface of the case main body 2453B is provided with a viewing portion 2456B at its front end, which is positioned so as to overlap vertically with the second starting opening door 2411B in the retracted state when viewed from above, and which has an outer diameter smaller than the diameter of the game ball B. In this example, the viewing portion 2456B may be located at either the left or right side of the front end of the top surface of the case main body 2453B, and is preferably located on the second starting opening door 2411B side of the top surface of the case main body 2453B from the perspective of visibility. Specifically, the viewing portion 2456B may be configured so as to overlap vertically with the second starting opening door 2411B in the retracted state when viewed from above, or may not be configured so as to overlap vertically with the second starting opening door 2411B in the retracted state when viewed from above. Additionally, in this example, the outer diameter of the viewing portion 2456B is preferably smaller than the diameter of the game ball B from the standpoint of ease of formation, but may also be approximately the same as the diameter of the game ball B.

As shown in FIG. 389(a), when the second starting opening door 2411B is in the advanced state, the viewing portion 2456B is located rearward at a predetermined distance from the rear edge of the second starting opening door 2411B and is positioned so as not to come into contact with the rear edge of the second starting opening door 2411B in a top view. Therefore, in this example, when checking the operation of the second starting opening door 2411B during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, the worker can visually inspect the first advancing/retreating device 2452B removed from the gaming board 5 from above. If the worker confirms that the viewing portion 2456B is located rearward at a predetermined distance from the rear edge of the second starting opening door 2411B and does not come into contact with the rear edge of the second starting opening door 2411B in a top view, the worker can easily visually confirm that the second starting opening door 2411B can transition to a normal advanced state due to the spring force of the starting opening solenoid.

As shown in Figure 389 (c), when the second starting opening door 2411B is in an abnormal advance state, the viewing portion 2456B is positioned rearward from the rear edge of the second starting opening door 2411B at a distance smaller than a predetermined distance, or is in contact with the rear edge of the second starting opening door 2411B when viewed from above, or is positioned forward from the rear edge of the second starting opening door 2411B. For this reason, in this example, when checking the operation of the second starting gate door 2411B during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, an operator can visually inspect the first advancing/retreating device 2452B removed from the game board 5 from above, and if it is confirmed that the visual confirmation portion 2456B is positioned rearward from the rear edge of the second starting gate door 2411B at a distance smaller than the preset distance, or is in contact with the rear edge of the second starting gate door 2411B when viewed from above, or is positioned forward from the rear edge of the second starting gate door 2411B, the operator can easily visually confirm that the spring force of the starting gate solenoid 2412B is making it difficult for the second starting gate door 2411B to transition to a normal advanced state.

As shown in Figures 389(b) and 389(d), the top surface of the case main body 2453B is provided with a viewing portion 2456B at its rear end, which is positioned so as to overlap vertically with the second starting opening door 2411B in the retracted state when viewed from above, and which has an outer diameter smaller than the diameter of the game ball B. In this example, the viewing portion 2456B may be located at either the left or right side of the rear end of the top surface of the case main body 2453B, and is preferably located on the second starting opening door 2411B side of the top surface of the case main body 2453B from the perspective of visibility. Specifically, the viewing portion 2456B may be configured so as to overlap vertically with the second starting opening door 2411B in the retracted state when viewed from above, or may not be configured so as to overlap vertically with the second starting opening door 2411B in the retracted state when viewed from above. Additionally, in this example, the outer diameter of the viewing portion 2456B is preferably smaller than the diameter of the game ball B from the standpoint of ease of formation, but may also be approximately the same as the diameter of the game ball B.

As shown in Figure 389 (b), when the second starting opening door 2411B is in a retracted state, the viewing portion 2456B is positioned forward at a predetermined distance from the rear edge of the second starting opening door 2411B, and is positioned so as not to come into contact with the rear edge of the second starting opening door 2411B when viewed from above. For this reason, in this example, when checking the operation of the second starting door 2411B during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, an operator visually inspects the first forward/backward movement device 2452B removed from the game board 5 from above and pushes the second starting door 2411B rearward against the spring force of the starting door solenoid 2412B. If the operator confirms that the visual confirmation portion 2456B is positioned forward at a predetermined distance from the rear edge of the second starting door 2411B and is not in contact with the rear edge of the second starting door 2411B when viewed from above, the operator can easily visually confirm that the second starting door 2411B can transition to a normal retracted state against the spring force of the starting door solenoid.

As shown in Figure 389 (d), when the second starting opening door 2411B is in an abnormal retraction state, the viewing portion 2456B is positioned forward of the rear end edge of the second starting opening door 2411B at a distance smaller than a predetermined distance, or is in contact with the rear end edge of the second starting opening door 2411B when viewed from above, or is positioned rearward of the rear end edge of the second starting opening door 2411B. For this reason, in this example, when checking the operation of the second starting door 2411B during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, an operator can visually inspect the first advancing/retreating device 2452B removed from the game board 5 from above and push the second starting door 2411B rearward against the spring force of the starting door solenoid. If the operator confirms that the visual confirmation portion 2456B is positioned forward of the rear edge of the second starting door 2411B at a distance smaller than a predetermined distance, or is in contact with the rear edge of the second starting door 2411B when viewed from above, or is positioned rearward of the rear edge of the second starting door 2411B, the operator can easily visually confirm that the second starting door 2411B is having difficulty transitioning to a normal retracted state against the spring force of the starting door solenoid.

As described above, in the configuration of the viewing portion 2456B provided on the top surface of the case main body 2453B in a position that overlaps vertically with the second starting gate door 2411B in the retracted state when viewed from above, and at the front or rear end with an outer diameter smaller than the diameter of the game ball B, the size of the viewing portion 2456B can be set smaller than the diameter of the game ball B, for example, thereby improving the ease of formation when providing the viewing portion 2456B on the top surface of the case main body 2453B. This prevents problems with the entry and exit operation of the second starting gate door 2411B and prevents disadvantages to players and game halls where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, thereby further increasing the reliability of the pachinko machine 1 for players and game halls. In addition, the configuration of the viewing section 2456B provided on the second starting gate door 2411B side of the upper surface of the case main body 2453B in this example may also be applied to the viewing section 2456B provided on the large winning gate door 2413B side of the upper surface of the case main body 2453B, for example.

Figure 390 (a) is a schematic diagram of the first advancing/retreating device 2452B viewed from above, showing the second starting gate door 2411B and the large prize gate door 2413B in the advanced state, Figure 389 (b) is a schematic diagram of the first advancing/retreating device 2452B viewed from above, showing the second starting gate door 2411B and the large prize gate door 2413B in the retracted state, and Figures 389 (c) and (d) are top views of the first advancing/retreating device 2452B viewed from above, showing the second starting gate door 2411B and the large prize gate door 2413B in a malfunctioning state. In the above embodiment, the aspects of the viewing section 2456B that allow an operator to easily visually determine whether the operation of the large prize opening door 2413B is normal by visually checking the positional relationship of the viewing section 2456B relative to the second starting opening door 2411B or the large prize opening door 2413B using Figures 389(a) to 389(d), etc., and the aspects of the viewing section 2456B that allow an operator to easily visually determine whether the operation of the second starting opening door 2411B is normal and that are easy to form, have been described. However, below, further aspects of the viewing section 2456B will be described using Figures 390(a) to 390(d), etc.

As shown in Figures 390(a) to 390(d), a viewing portion 2456B having an outer diameter larger than the diameter of game ball B is provided on the top surface of case body 2453B, on the side of the special prize opening door 2413B and in the center in the front-to-back direction. In this example, viewing portion 2456B is preferably provided on the side of the special prize opening door 2413B on the top surface of case body 2453B from the perspective of visibility, but may be provided in either the left or right position on the top surface of case body 2453B. In this case, viewing portion 2456B may be configured to overlap vertically with special prize opening door 2413B in the retracted state when viewed from above, or may not overlap vertically with special prize opening door 2413B in the retracted state. In addition, in this example, the outer diameter of viewing portion 2456B is preferably larger than the diameter of game ball B from the perspective of ease of visibility, but may also be approximately the same as the diameter of game ball B.

As shown in FIG. 390(a), when the special prize opening door 2413B is in the advanced state, the visible portion 2456B is positioned such that its front end contacts the imaginary line 2457B extending along the rear edge of the special prize opening door 2413B in a top view. Therefore, in this example, when checking the operation of the special prize opening door 2413B during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, the worker can visually inspect the first advancing/retracting device 2452B removed from the gaming board 5 from above, and if the worker confirms that the front end of the visible portion 2456B contacts the imaginary line 2457B extending along the rear edge of the special prize opening door 2413B in a top view, the worker can visually confirm that the special prize opening door 2413B can transition to a normal advanced state due to the biasing force of the attacca solenoid spring.

As shown in Figure 390 (b), when the large prize opening door 2413B is in a retracted state, the viewing portion 2456B is positioned such that its rear end contacts the imaginary line 2457B extending along the rear edge of the large prize opening door 2413B when viewed from above. For this reason, in this example, when checking the operation of the special prize opening door 2413B during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, an operator visually inspects the first forward/backward movement device 2452B removed from the game board 5 from above and pushes the special prize opening door 2413B rearward against the spring force of the attacca solenoid. If the operator confirms that the rear end of the visible portion 2456B comes into contact with the imaginary line 2457B extending along the rear edge of the special prize opening door 2413B when viewed from above, the operator can visually confirm that the special prize opening door 2413B can transition to a normal retracted state against the spring force of the attacca solenoid.

As shown in Figure 390 (c), when the special prize opening door 2413B is in an abnormal advancement state, the visible portion 2456B is positioned such that its center contacts the imaginary line 2457B extending along the rear edge of the special prize opening door 2413B in a top view. Therefore, in this example, when checking the operation of the special prize opening door 2413B during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, the worker can visually inspect the first forward/backward movement device 2452B removed from the gaming board 5 from above, and if they confirm that the center of the visible portion 2456B contacts the imaginary line 2457B extending along the rear edge of the special prize opening door 2413B in a top view, the worker can visually confirm that the spring force of the attacca solenoid is making it difficult for the special prize opening door 2413B to transition to a normal advancement state.

As shown in Figure 390 (d), when the large prize opening door 2413B is in an abnormal retracted state, the viewing portion 2456B is positioned such that its center, when viewed from above, is in contact with the imaginary line 2457B extending along the rear edge of the large prize opening door 2413B. For this reason, in this example, when checking the operation of the special prize opening door 2413B during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, an operator can visually inspect the first forward/backward movement device 2452B removed from the game board 5 from above and push the special prize opening door 2413B rearward against the spring force of the attacca solenoid, and if it is confirmed that the center of the visible portion 2456B comes into contact with the imaginary line 2457B extending along the rear edge of the special prize opening door 2413B when viewed from above, the operator can visually confirm that the special prize opening door 2413B is having difficulty transitioning to a normal retracted state against the spring force of the attacca solenoid.

As described above, the configuration of the viewing portion 2456B, which allows visual confirmation of whether the special prize opening door 2413B can normally transition to the advanced or retracted state based on the position where the viewing portion 2456B contacts the virtual line 2457B in a top view, makes it easy to position the viewing portion 2456B in the front-to-rear direction when providing it on the top surface of the case body 2453B, and improves the ease of providing the viewing portion 2456B on the top surface of the case body 2453B. This prevents problems with the special prize opening door 2413B's advance/retract operation and prevents disadvantages to players and gaming halls where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, thereby further increasing the reliability of the pachinko machine 1 for players and gaming halls. Note that the configuration of the viewing portion 2456B provided on the top surface of the case body 2453B in this example may also be applied to, for example, the viewing portion 2456B provided on the second starting door 2411B side of the top surface of the case body 2453B.

The viewing portion 2456B shown in Figures 390(a) and 390(c) is similar to the viewing portion 2456B shown in Figures 389(b) and 389(d) above, and is provided on the upper surface of the case main body 2453B with a viewing portion 2456B that is positioned so as to overlap vertically with the second starting opening door 2411B in the retracted state when viewed from above, and that has an outer diameter smaller than the diameter of the game ball B at its rear end. Note that in this example, the viewing portion 2456B may be provided at either the left or right position at the rear end of the upper surface of the case main body 2453B, and is preferably provided on the second starting opening door 2411B side of the upper surface of the case main body 2453B from the perspective of visibility. Specifically, the viewing portion 2456B may be configured so as to overlap vertically with the second starting opening door 2411B in the retracted state when viewed from above, or may not be configured so as to overlap vertically with the second starting opening door 2411B in the retracted state when viewed from above. Additionally, in this example, the outer diameter of the viewing portion 2456B is preferably smaller than the diameter of the game ball B from the standpoint of ease of formation, but may also be approximately the same as the diameter of the game ball B.

As shown in Figure 390 (a), when the second starting opening door 2411B is in the advanced state, the visual confirmation portion 2456B is positioned rearward at a predetermined distance from the rear edge of the second starting opening door 2411B. Therefore, in this example, when checking the operation of the second starting opening door 2411B during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, the worker can visually confirm from above that the visual confirmation portion 2456B is positioned rearward at a predetermined distance from the rear edge of the second starting opening door 2411B by visually observing the first advancing/retreating device 2452B removed from the gaming board 5. This allows the worker to visually confirm that the second starting opening door 2411B can transition to the normal advanced state due to the spring force of the starting opening solenoid.

As shown in Figure 390 (c), when the second starting opening door 2411B is in an abnormal advancement state, the visual confirmation portion 2456B is positioned rearward from the rear edge of the second starting opening door 2411B at a distance smaller than the predetermined distance set in advance, or is in contact with the rear edge of the second starting opening door 2411B when viewed from above. Therefore, in this example, when checking the operation of the second starting opening door 2411B during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, an operator can visually confirm from above that the visual confirmation portion 2456B is positioned rearward from the rear edge of the second starting opening door 2411B at a distance smaller than the predetermined distance set in advance, or is in contact with the rear edge of the second starting opening door 2411B when viewed from above. This allows the operator to visually confirm that the spring force of the starting opening solenoid is preventing the second starting opening door 2411B from transitioning to a normal advancement state.

The viewing portion 2456B shown in Figures 390(b) and 390(d) is similar in configuration to the viewing portion 2456B shown in Figures 389(a) and 383(c) above, and is provided on the top surface of the case main body 2453B in a position that overlaps vertically with the second starting opening door 2411B in the retracted state when viewed from above, and has an outer diameter at its front end that is smaller than the diameter of the game ball B. Note that in this example, the viewing portion 2456B may be provided at either the left or right position at the front end of the top surface of the case main body 2453B, and is preferably provided on the second starting opening door 2411B side of the top surface of the case main body 2453B from the perspective of visibility. Specifically, the viewing portion 2456B may be configured to overlap vertically with the second starting opening door 2411B in the retracted state when viewed from above, or may not overlap vertically with the second starting opening door 2411B in the retracted state when viewed from above. Additionally, in this example, the outer diameter of the viewing portion 2456B is preferably smaller than the diameter of the game ball B from the standpoint of ease of formation, but may also be approximately the same as the diameter of the game ball B.

As shown in Figure 390 (b), when the second starting opening door 2411B is in the retracted state, the visual confirmation portion 2456B is positioned forward at a predetermined distance from the rear edge of the second starting opening door 2411B. Therefore, in this example, when checking the operation of the second starting opening door 2411B during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, the worker visually inspects the first advancing/retreating device 2452B removed from the gaming board 5 from above and pushes the second starting opening door 2411B rearward against the spring force of the starting opening solenoid. If the worker confirms that the visual confirmation portion 2456B is positioned forward at a predetermined distance from the rear edge of the second starting opening door 2411B, the worker can visually confirm that the second starting opening door 2411B can transition to the normal retracted state against the spring force of the starting opening solenoid.

As shown in Figure 390 (d), when the second starting opening door 2411B is in an abnormal retraction state, the viewing portion 2456B is positioned forward from the rear end edge of the second starting opening door 2411B at a distance smaller than a predetermined distance, or is in a position where it is in contact with the rear end edge of the second starting opening door 2411B when viewed from above. For this reason, in this example, when checking the operation of the second starting door 2411B during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, an operator can visually inspect the first advancing/retreating device 2452B removed from the game board 5 from above and push the second starting door 2411B rearward against the spring force of the starting door solenoid. If the operator confirms that the visual confirmation portion 2456B is positioned forward at a distance smaller than the preset distance from the rear edge of the second starting door 2411B or is in contact with the rear edge of the second starting door 2411B when viewed from above, the operator can visually confirm that the second starting door 2411B is having difficulty transitioning to a normal retracted state against the spring force of the starting door solenoid.

As described above, in the configuration of the viewing portion 2456B provided on the top surface of the case main body 2453B in a position that overlaps vertically with the second starting gate door 2411B in the retracted state when viewed from above, and at the front or rear end with an outer diameter smaller than the diameter of the game ball B, the size of the viewing portion 2456B can be set smaller than the diameter of the game ball B, for example, thereby improving the ease of formation when providing the viewing portion 2456B on the top surface of the case main body 2453B. This prevents problems with the entry and exit operation of the second starting gate door 2411B and prevents disadvantages to players and game halls where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, thereby further increasing the reliability of the pachinko machine 1 for players and game halls. In addition, the configuration of the viewing section 2456B provided on the second starting gate door 2411B side of the upper surface of the case main body 2453B in this example may also be applied to the viewing section 2456B provided on the large winning gate door 2413B side of the upper surface of the case main body 2453B, for example.

In this embodiment, the positional relationship of the viewing portion 2456B relative to the second starting gate door 2411B and the special prize gate door 2413B has been described in terms of the position of the viewing portion 2456B relative to the imaginary line 2457B that extends along the rear edge of the second starting gate door 2411B and the rear edge of the special prize gate door 2413B. However, for example, the imaginary line 2457B may extend along the center or front edge of the special prize gate door 2413B, or along the front edge, center, or rear edge of the second starting gate door 2411B. From the perspective of improving the work efficiency of workers who visually check the position of the viewing portion 2456B relative to the second starting gate door 2411B and the special prize gate door 2413B when checking operation during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, it is desirable to arbitrarily set the viewing portion 2456B to be a visual target relative to the imaginary line 2457B.

In addition, in this embodiment, the visual confirmation portion 2456B is described as a graphic notation of "★." However, the visual confirmation portion 2456B may have a different shape as long as it serves as a visual target when confirming the operation of the second starting gate 2411B and the special prize gate 2413B. Specifically, the visual confirmation portion 2456B may be a graphic notation of "●," "▲," "■," or a graphic notation of multiple wires extending left and right arranged at a predetermined interval in the front-to-back direction. The visual confirmation portion 2456B may also be a letter notation such as "shi" or "U." Note that if a graphic notation of "●" is used, if a player were to visually confirm it, the circular notation could remind them of game ball B, which could lead to some kind of misunderstanding (for example, a misunderstanding regarding the launch mode of the game ball). In light of this, when using the graphic notation "●", it is desirable to use a "●" with a maximum diameter (e.g., 1-5 mm) smaller than the diameter of game ball B (e.g., 11 mm), or to use a "●" with a portion missing (e.g., semicircular), in order to avoid reminding the player of game ball B as much as possible.

Furthermore, particularly when the second starting gate door 2411B and the large winning gate door 2413B are unitized as in this example, when visually inspecting the first advancing/retreating device 2452B (first attacker unit 2400B) from below, it may be difficult to tell which of the second starting gate door 2411B and the large winning gate door 2413B it is. Therefore, the configuration of the viewing section 2456B on the second starting gate door 2411B side and the large winning gate door 2413B side of the case body 2453B may be different, preventing misrecognition by workers; or the configuration of the viewing section 2456B on the second starting gate door 2411B side and the large winning gate door 2413B side of the case body 2453B may be the same, improving worker efficiency.

In addition, in this embodiment, we have described an aspect in which the operation of the second starting gate door 2411B and the special winning gate door 2413B is checked using the visual inspection section 2456B provided on the second starting gate door 2411B and the special winning gate door 2413B as a visual target during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1. However, the operation of the second starting gate door 2411B and the special winning gate door 2413B may also be checked by visually inspecting the underside of the first advancing/retreating device 2452B (first attacker unit 2400B) removed from the game board 5, for example, in a gaming hall or the like where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Figure 391(a) is a partial rear view of a portion of the second advancing/retreating device 2652B when the special device winning entrance door 2611B has transitioned to a retracted state, as viewed from the rear side, and Figure 391(b) is a partial rear view of a portion of the second advancing/retreating device 2652B when the special device winning entrance door 2611B has transitioned to an abnormal retracted state, as viewed from the rear side. As shown in Figure 391(a) or Figure 391(b), a viewing portion 2656B that can be seen from outside the second advancing/retreating device 2652B is provided on the back side (rear surface) of the decorative surface 2651B of the decorative cover 2650B. The viewing portion 2656B is arranged so as to be visible from the rear side of the second advancing/retreating device 2652B, which is outside the second advancing/retreating device 2652B, when the second attacker unit 2600B is detached from the gaming board 5, or when the second advancing/retreating device 2652B is detached from the second attacker unit 2600B. From the perspective of increasing the distance between the position of the special device winning entrance door 2611B in the advanced state and the position of the special device winning entrance door 2611B in the retracted state, it is desirable for the viewing portion 2656B to be arranged on the rear side (back surface) of the decorative surface 2651B of the decorative cover 2650B, in a position that makes contact with the tip side of the special device winning entrance door 2611B in the retracted state when viewed from behind.

In this embodiment, the visible portion 2656B is represented by a "★" on the reverse side (back surface) of the decorative surface 2651B of the decorative cover 2650B. The visible portion 2656B may be printed on the reverse side (back surface) of the decorative surface 2651B of the decorative cover 2650B, or a sticker-like film member on which the visible portion 2656B is formed may be attached to the reverse side (back surface) of the decorative surface 2651B of the decorative cover 2650B. Furthermore, the visible portion 2656B may be formed by raising the reverse side (back surface) of the decorative surface 2651B of the decorative cover 2650B to form a convex mark, or by recessing the reverse side (back surface) of the decorative surface 2651B of the decorative cover 2650B to form a concave mark. Furthermore, from the standpoint of avoiding damage to the viewing portion 2656B itself, it is preferable that the viewing portion 2656B is not a sticker-like film member, but is instead integrally formed on the rear surface (back side) of the decorative surface 2651B of the decorative cover 2650B by printing or forming marks. Furthermore, from the standpoint of ease of formation, the outer diameter of the viewing portion 2456B in this example is preferably smaller than the diameter of the game ball B, but may also be approximately the same as the diameter of the game ball B or larger than the diameter of the game ball B.

As shown in Figure 391(a), when the reel prize opening door 2611B is in a retracted state and the second forward/backward movement device 2652B, which contacts the game ball B and prevents the game ball B from moving toward the game prize opening sensor, is in a non-winning state, the viewing portion 2656B of the decorative cover 2650B is in contact with the game prize opening door 2611B when viewed from the rear. In other words, in the normal retracted state of the game prize opening door 2611B, the viewing portion 2656B is positioned so that the "★" mark on the viewing portion 2656B is completely covered by the game prize opening door 2611B. Therefore, when the special device winning entrance door 2611B is operated to the retracted state, if the "★" marking on the visible portion 2656B is not completely covered by the special device winning entrance door 2611B (for example, if part of the visible portion 2656B is visible to the right of the special device winning entrance door 2611B), this does not mean that the special device winning entrance door 2611B is in a normal retracted state, but rather that it is in an retracted state involving an abnormality that may have some effect on the progress of the game.

In addition, when the second forward/backward movement device 2652B is in a winning state in which the special prize opening door 2611B is in an advanced state and does not restrict the game ball B from moving toward the special prize opening sensor, the viewing portion 2656B of the decorative cover 2650B is located to the left of the tip of the special prize opening door 2611B at a predetermined distance in rear view. In other words, in the normal advanced state of the special prize opening door 2611B, the viewing portion 2656B is positioned so that the "★" marking on the viewing portion 2656B is not covered by the special prize opening door 2611B and is completely exposed (for example, located to the left of the tip of the special prize opening door 2611B at a predetermined distance in rear view). Therefore, when the special device winning entrance door 2611B is operated to the advanced state, if part of the "★" marking on the viewing area 2656B is covered by the special device winning entrance door 2611B, or if the "★" marking on the viewing area 2656B is positioned to the left of the tip of the special device winning entrance door 2611B at a distance smaller than the preset distance when viewed from behind, this does not mean that the special device winning entrance door 2611B is in a normal advanced state, but rather is in an advanced state involving an abnormality that may have some effect on the progress of the game.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the special prize winning door 2611B is in the retracted state, it is possible to see from the outside, that is, the rear side of the second advancing/retreating device 2652B, that the visible portion 2656B of the decorative cover 2650B is in contact with the special prize winning door 2611B in rear view, and when the special prize winning door 2611B is in the advanced state, the visible portion 2656B of the decorative cover 2650B is in contact with the tip of the special prize winning door 2611B in rear view. Because the positional relationship in which the second advancing/retracting device 2652B is positioned to the left with a certain distance between them can be seen from the outside, that is, from the rear side of the second advancing/retracting device 2652B, by visually observing the second advancing/retracting device 2652B from the rear side, the visual state of the visual confirmation portion 2656B provided on the decorative cover 2650B can be used as a visual indicator for the bonus prize opening door 2611B, and it can be easily confirmed whether the bonus prize opening door 2611B is in the advanced state or the retracted state. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the operation of the bonus prize opening door 2611B can be easily confirmed during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, malfunctions in the extension/retraction operation of the bonus prize opening door 2611B can be prevented in advance, and disadvantages to players and gaming halls where the pachinko machine 1 is installed can be prevented, thereby increasing the reliability of the pachinko machine 1 for players and gaming halls.

Furthermore, after the second forward/backward moving device 2652B (second attacca unit 2600B) is attached to the gaming board 5, the front of the decorative surface 2651B of the decorative cover 2650B is easily visible to a player playing the pachinko machine 1. However, the viewing portion 2656B of this embodiment is provided on the rear side (back surface) of the decorative surface 2651B of the decorative cover 2650B. Therefore, even if a player were to look into the decorative cover 2650B from the front, it is impossible or difficult for the player to view the viewing portion 2656B, preventing the aesthetic appeal of the second attacca unit 2600B or the decorativeness of the pachinko machine 1 from being damaged when the player views the viewing portion 2656B.

In addition, after the second forward/backward moving device 2652B (second attacker unit 2600B) is attached to the gaming board 5, the gaming ball B comes into contact with the left side of the special prize winning door 2611B, whereas the viewing portion 2656B of this embodiment is provided on the back side (rear surface) of the decorative surface 2651B of the decorative cover 2650B. Therefore, even if the viewing portion 2656B is provided, it is possible to avoid the viewing portion 2656B itself interfering with the flow of the gaming ball B, and it is possible to prevent the viewing portion 2656B itself from causing any disruption to the progress of the game.

In order to improve visibility of the back side (rear side) of the decorative surface 2651B of the decorative cover 2650B when viewed through the case body from the back of the second forward/backward moving device 2652B, the case body 2653B and cover body 2654B can be made colored and transparent or colorless and transparent to have transparency, while the bonus prize opening door 2611B can be made colored and opaque to have no transparency, and a viewing section 2656B can be provided on the back side (rear side) of the decorative surface 2651B of the decorative cover 2650B made colored and transparent or colorless and transparent. This makes it even easier to check the operation of the bonus prize opening door 2613B using the viewing section 2656B during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1.

The second advancing/retreating device 2652B may also be configured with a locking mechanism that restricts the advancing movement of the prize winning entrance door 2611B that has transitioned to the retracted state, thereby enhancing the effectiveness of preventing fraudulent activity against the prize winning entrance door 2611B. In this configuration, when checking the operation of the prize winning entrance door 2611B during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, an operator releases the lock using the locking mechanism and then visually inspects the second advancing/retreating device 2652B removed from the game board 5 from the back. The operator then pulls out the prize winning entrance door 2611B to the left against the spring force of the prize winning entrance solenoid, thereby visually checking whether the prize winning entrance door 2611B can transition to the normal advanced state against the spring force of the prize winning entrance solenoid.

In addition, the viewing portion 2656B may be located anywhere on the rear (back) side of the decorative surface 2651B of the decorative cover 2650B, and the outer diameter of the viewing portion 2656B may be any size. By using the viewing portion 2456B provided on the decorative cover 2650B as a visual target for the special prize opening door 2611B, it is possible to easily check whether the special prize opening door 2611B is in the advanced state or the retracted state. Below, the various states of the special prize opening door 2611B and the positional relationship of the viewing portion 2456B to the special prize opening door 2611B are explained in detail for such an embodiment.

As shown in Figure 391 (a), when the special feature winning entrance door 2611B is in the retracted state, the visual confirmation portion 2656B is positioned behind the special feature winning entrance door 2611B in a rear view. Therefore, in this example, when checking the operation of the special feature winning entrance door 2611B during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, the worker can visually check from the rear side the second forward/backward movement device 2652B removed from the gaming board 5, and if the worker confirms that the visual confirmation portion 2656B is positioned behind the special feature winning entrance door 2611B in a rear view, the worker can easily visually confirm that the special feature winning entrance door 2611B can transition to a normal retracted state due to the biasing force of the spring of the special feature winning entrance solenoid.

Furthermore, when the special feature winning entrance door 2611B is in the advanced state, the visual confirmation portion 2656B is positioned to the left of the tip of the special feature winning entrance door 2611B at a predetermined distance. Therefore, in this example, when checking the operation of the special feature winning entrance door 2611B during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, the worker visually checks the second forward/backward movement device 2652B removed from the game board 5 from the rear side and pulls the special feature winning entrance door 2611B to the left against the spring force of the special feature winning entrance solenoid. If the worker confirms that the visual confirmation portion 2656B is positioned to the left at a predetermined distance from the tip of the special feature winning entrance door 2611B, the worker can easily visually confirm that the special feature winning entrance door 2611B can transition to the normal advanced state against the spring force of the special feature winning entrance solenoid.

As shown in Figure 391 (b), when the reel prize opening door 2611B is in an abnormal retracted state, the visual confirmation portion 2656B is not located rearward of the reel prize opening door 2611B when viewed from behind. Therefore, in this example, when checking the operation of the reel prize opening door 2611B during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, the worker can visually check the second forward/backward movement device 2652B removed from the game board 5 from the rear side, and if the worker confirms that the visual confirmation portion 2656B is not located rearward of the reel prize opening door 2611B when viewed from behind, the worker can easily visually confirm that the spring force of the reel prize opening solenoid is making it difficult for the reel prize opening door 2611B to transition to a normal retracted state.

Furthermore, when the special feature winning entrance door 2611B is in an abnormal advancement state, the visual confirmation portion 2656B is positioned to the left of the tip of the special feature winning entrance door 2611B at a distance smaller than the preset distance. Therefore, in this example, when checking the operation of the special feature winning entrance door 2611B during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, the worker visually checks the second forward/backward movement device 2652B removed from the game board 5 from the rear side and pulls the special feature winning entrance door 2611B to the left against the spring force of the special feature winning entrance solenoid. If the worker confirms that the visual confirmation portion 2656B is positioned to the left of the tip of the special feature winning entrance door 2611B at a distance smaller than the preset distance, the worker can easily visually confirm that the special feature winning entrance door 2611B is having difficulty transitioning to a normal advancement state against the spring force of the special feature winning entrance solenoid.

As described above, in the case of a viewing portion 2656B having an outer diameter smaller than the game ball B, which is provided on the back surface of the decorative surface 2651B of the decorative cover 2650B so as to be visible from the outside of the second advancing/retreating device 2652B, by visually observing the second advancing/retreating device 2652B from the back side, the viewing portion 2656B provided on the back surface of the decorative surface 2651B of the decorative cover 2650B can be used as a visual target for the special prize opening door 2611B, allowing the operator to confirm whether the special prize opening door 2611B is in an advanced state or whether the special prize opening door 2611B is in a retracted state. Therefore, with the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, it is easy to check the operation of the prize winning device door 2611B during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, preventing problems with the opening and closing operation of the prize winning device door 2611B and preventing disadvantages to players and gaming halls where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, thereby increasing the reliability of the pachinko machine 1 for players, gaming halls, etc.

Figure 392(a) is a schematic diagram of the second advancing/retreating device 2652B showing the retracted role winning entrance door 2611B, as viewed from the back, and Figure 392(b) is a schematic diagram of the second advancing/retreating device 2652B showing the advanced role winning entrance door 2611B. The second advancing/retreating device 2652B shown in Figure 392(a) is similar to the viewing section 2656B shown in Figure 337(a) or Figure 391(b), in that the viewing section 2656B is provided on the back of the decorative surface 2651B of the decorative cover 2650B, but differs from the viewing section 2656B shown in Figure 391(a) or Figure 391(b) above in that the viewing section 2656B does not overlap in the front-to-rear direction with the retracted role winning entrance door 2611B.

In the configuration shown in FIG. 392(a), when the special feature winning entrance door 2611B is in the retracted state, the visual confirmation portion 2656B is positioned to the right (left in the illustration) at a predetermined first distance from the right side (left side in the illustration) of the special feature winning entrance door 2611B. Therefore, in this example, when checking the operation of the special feature winning entrance door 2611B during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, the worker can visually confirm from the rear side of the second forward/backward movement device 2652B removed from the gaming board 5 that the visual confirmation portion 2656B is positioned to the right (left in the illustration) at a predetermined first distance from the right side (left side in the illustration) of the special feature winning entrance door 2611B, allowing the worker to visually confirm that the special feature winning entrance door 2611B can transition to the normal retracted state due to the biasing force of the spring of the special feature winning entrance solenoid.

In addition, when the special prize winning door 2611B is in the advanced state, the viewing section 2656B is positioned to the right (left in the illustration) with a second distance that is preset relative to the tip of the special prize winning door 2611B. For this reason, in this example, when checking the operation of the special feature winning entrance door 2611B during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, an operator can visually check the second forward/backward movement device 2652B removed from the game board 5 from the rear side and pull the special feature winning entrance door 2611B to the left (right in the illustration) against the spring force of the special feature winning entrance solenoid. If the operator confirms that the visual confirmation section 2656B is positioned to the right (left in the illustration) at a predetermined second distance from the right side (left side in the illustration) of the special feature winning entrance door 2611B, the operator can visually confirm that the special feature winning entrance door 2611B can transition to a normal advanced state against the spring force of the special feature winning entrance solenoid.

In addition, in the configuration shown in FIG. 392(a), when the reel prize door 2611B is in an abnormal retracted state, the visual confirmation portion 2656B is positioned to the right (left in the illustration) at a distance greater than the preset first distance from the right side (left side in the illustration) of the reel prize door 2611B. Therefore, in this example, when checking the operation of the reel prize door 2611B during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, the worker can visually confirm from the rear side of the second forward/backward movement device 2652B removed from the gaming board 5 that the visual confirmation portion 2656B is positioned to the right (left in the illustration) at a distance greater than the preset first distance from the right side (left side in the illustration) of the reel prize door 2611B, allowing the worker to visually confirm that the spring force of the reel prize door solenoid is making it difficult for the reel prize door 2611B to transition to a normal retracted state.

In addition, when the special prize winning door 2611B is in an abnormal advance state, the viewing section 2656B is positioned to the right (left in the illustration) at a distance smaller than the second predetermined distance from the tip of the special prize winning door 2611B. For this reason, in this example, when checking the operation of the special feature winning entrance door 2611B during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, an operator visually inspects the second forward/backward movement device 2652B removed from the game board 5 from the rear side and pulls the special feature winning entrance door 2611B to the left (right in the illustration) against the biasing force of the spring of the special feature winning entrance solenoid. If the operator confirms that the visual confirmation section 2656B is positioned to the right (left in the illustration) at a distance smaller than the preset second distance from the right side (left side in the illustration) of the special feature winning entrance door 2611B, the operator can visually confirm that the special feature winning entrance door 2611B is having difficulty transitioning to a normal advanced state against the biasing force of the spring of the special feature winning entrance solenoid.

The second forward/backward moving device 2652B shown in Figure 392(b) is similar to the viewing section 2656B shown in Figure 337(a) or Figure 391(b), in that the retracted role-play winning opening door 2611B and the viewing section 2656B are arranged on the back side (rear side) of the decorative surface 2651B of the decorative cover 2650B so that they overlap in the front-to-back direction when viewed from behind. However, it differs from the viewing section 2656B shown in Figure 391(a) or Figure 391(b) above in that the viewing section 2656B is arranged on the base end side of the role-play winning opening door 2611B and the outer diameter of the viewing section 2656B is approximately equal to the diameter of the game ball B.

In the configuration shown in Figure 392 (b), when the special feature winning entrance door 2611B is in the retracted state, the visual confirmation portion 2656B is positioned so as to overlap the special feature winning entrance door 2611B in the front-to-back direction when viewed from behind. Therefore, in this example, when checking the operation of the special feature winning entrance door 2611B during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, the worker can visually confirm from the rear side that the second forward/backward movement device 2652B removed from the gaming board 5 overlaps the base end side of the special feature winning entrance door 2611B in the front-to-back direction when viewed from behind, and visually confirm that the special feature winning entrance door 2611B can transition to the normal retracted state due to the biasing force of the spring of the special feature winning entrance solenoid.

Furthermore, when the special feature winning entrance door 2611B is in the advanced state, the visual confirmation portion 2656B is positioned so as not to overlap the base end of the special feature winning entrance door 2611B in the front-to-back direction when viewed from behind. Therefore, in this example, when checking the operation of the special feature winning entrance door 2611B during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, the worker visually checks the second forward/backward movement device 2652B removed from the game board 5 from the rear side and pulls out the special feature winning entrance door 2611B to the left (right in the illustration) against the spring force of the special feature winning entrance solenoid. If the worker confirms that the visual confirmation portion 2656B does not overlap the base end of the special feature winning entrance door 2611B in the front-to-back direction when viewed from behind, the worker can visually confirm that the special feature winning entrance door 2611B can transition to the normal advanced state against the spring force of the special feature winning entrance solenoid.

In the configuration shown in Figure 392 (b), when the reel prize opening door 2611B is in an abnormal retracted state, at least a portion of the visible portion 2656B is positioned so that it does not overlap the reel prize opening door 2611B in the front-to-back direction when viewed from behind. Therefore, in this example, when checking the operation of the reel prize opening door 2611B during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, an operator can visually inspect the second forward/backward moving device 2652B removed from the game board 5 from the rear side, and if they confirm that at least a portion of the visible portion 2656B does not overlap the reel prize opening door 2611B in the front-to-back direction when viewed from behind, the operator can visually confirm that the spring force of the reel prize opening solenoid is making it difficult for the reel prize opening door 2611B to transition to a normal retracted state.

Furthermore, when the special feature winning entrance door 2611B is in an abnormal advancement state, at least a portion of the visible portion 2656B is positioned so that it overlaps the special feature winning entrance door 2611B in the front-to-back direction when viewed from behind. Therefore, in this example, when checking the operation of the special feature winning entrance door 2611B during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, the worker visually inspects the second forward/backward movement device 2652B removed from the game board 5 from the rear side and pulls out the special feature winning entrance door 2611B to the left (right in the illustration) against the spring force of the special feature winning entrance solenoid. If it is confirmed that at least a portion of the visible portion 2656B overlaps the special feature winning entrance door 2611B in the front-to-back direction when viewed from behind, the worker can visually confirm that the special feature winning entrance door 2611B is having difficulty transitioning to a normal advancement state against the spring force of the special feature winning entrance solenoid.

The visual confirmation portion 2656B provided on the decorative cover 2650B shown in Figures 392(a) and 392(b) serves as a visual indicator for the bonus prize opening door 2611B, allowing an operator to confirm whether the bonus prize opening door 2611A is in the advanced state or whether the bonus prize opening door 2611A is in the retracted state. Therefore, with the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, it is easy to check the operation of the bonus prize opening door 2611A during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, preventing problems with the extension and retraction operation of the bonus prize opening door 2611A and preventing disadvantages to players and gaming halls where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, thereby increasing the reliability of the pachinko machine 1 for players and gaming halls.

In addition, while the visual identification portion 2656B is represented by a "★" in this embodiment, it may have a different shape as long as it serves as a visual guide when checking the operation of the bonus prize entrance door 2611B. Specifically, like the visual identification portion 2456B described above, the visual identification portion 2656B may be represented by a "●" or a "▲" or a "■" or a graphic representation of multiple wires extending left and right arranged at a predetermined interval in the front-to-back direction, or may be represented by letters such as "shi" or "U." Note that if a "●" is used, if a player were to visually identify it, the circular representation could evoke the image of game ball B, leading to some kind of misunderstanding (for example, a misunderstanding regarding the launch mode of the game ball). In light of this, when using the graphic notation "●", it is desirable to use a "●" with a maximum diameter (e.g., 1-5 mm) smaller than the diameter of game ball B (e.g., 11 mm), or to use a "●" with a portion missing (e.g., semicircular), in order to avoid reminding the player of game ball B as much as possible.

In addition, in this embodiment, we have described an aspect in which the operation of the prize winning device door 2611B is checked using the visual inspection portion 2656B provided on the decorative cover 2650B as a visual target during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1. However, the operation of the prize winning device door 2611B may also be checked by visually inspecting the second advancing/retreating device 2652B (second attacker unit 2600B) removed from the game board 5 from the rear side, for example, in an amusement hall or the like where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

In the above-mentioned modified example 1 of the attacca unit, a configuration was described in which a visual confirmation section 2456A is provided on a movable piece such as the second starting gate door 2411A, the large prize gate door 2413A, or the special prize gate door 2611A, and a main body section that supports the movable piece such as the first advancing and retracting device 2452A or the second advancing and retracting device 2652A.In the above-mentioned modified example 2 of the attacca unit, a configuration was described in which a visual confirmation section 2456B is provided on a movable piece such as the second starting gate door 2411B, the large prize gate door 2413B, or the special prize gate door 2611B, and a main body section that supports the movable piece such as the first advancing and retracting device 2452B or the second advancing and retracting device 2652B.However, the visual confirmation section may be provided on both the movable piece and the main body section, and one visual confirmation section can be used as a visual target for the other visual confirmation section to allow the operator to confirm whether the movable piece is in an advanced state or a retracted state. Therefore, with a pachinko machine 1 of this type, it is easy to check the operation of the movable piece during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, preventing problems with the extension and retraction of the movable piece and preventing disadvantages to players and gaming halls where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, thereby increasing the reliability of the pachinko machine 1 for players, gaming halls, etc.

[Attacker Unit Modification Example 3]
Next, as a further variation from the above, a configuration that makes it easier to check whether the first attacca unit 2400C and the second attacca unit 2600C attached to the game board 5 are operating normally will be described. Below, the first attacca unit 2400C and the second attacca unit 2600C, which are further modifications of the first attacca unit 2400 and the second attacca unit 2600 described with reference to Figures 140 to 145, etc., will be described with reference to Figure 393, etc. Note that in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the components other than the first attacca unit 2400C and the second attacca unit 2600C have the same configuration as the pachinko machine 1 of the embodiment having the first attacca unit 2400 and the second attacca unit 2600 described above, and the same components will be described with the same reference numerals.

Figure 393(a) is a bottom view of the first advancing/retreating device 2452C when the second starting gate door 2411C and the special prize gate door 2413C have transitioned to an advanced state, and Figure 393(b) is a bottom view of the first advancing/retreating device 2452C when the second starting gate door 2411C and the special prize gate door 2413C have transitioned to a retracted state. As shown in Figure 393(a) or 393(b), the undersides of the second starting gate door 2411C and the special prize gate door 2413C of the first advancing/retreating device 2452C (the surface behind the upper surface through which the game balls flow down) are provided with a plurality of movable one-side viewing portions 2458C that can be seen from outside the first advancing/retreating device 2452C. Furthermore, a plurality of main body side viewing sections 2459C that can be seen from outside the first advancing/retreating device 2452C are provided on the underside of the case main body 2453C of the first advancing/retreating device 2452C. The movable half side viewing section 2458C and the main body side viewing section 2459C are provided so as to be visible from the underside of the first advancing/retreating device 2452C, that is, outside the first advancing/retreating device 2452C, when the first attacker unit 2400C is removed from the game board 5 or when the first advancing/retreating device 2452C is removed from the first attacker unit 2400C. In this example, the multiple movable one-side viewing sections 2458C and the multiple main body-side viewing sections 2459C are arranged so that they can be seen directly from the underside of the first advancing/retreating device 2452C or through a transparent section when at least the second starting port sensor and the large prize port sensor are removed. However, it is preferable that the multiple movable one-side viewing sections 2458C and the multiple main body-side viewing sections 2459C be arranged so that they can be seen directly from the underside of the first advancing/retreating device 2452A or through a transparent section, not only when the second starting port sensor and the large prize port sensor are removed, but also when the second starting port sensor and the large prize port sensor are attached. When the second start opening sensor and the special prize opening sensor are attached, the multiple movable one-side viewing sections 2458C are arranged so that they are positioned inside the through-holes of the second start opening sensor and the special prize opening sensor in the retracted state. This allows the multiple movable one-side viewing sections 2458C to be viewed directly from the underside of the first advancing/retreating device 2452C or through transparent sections, even when the second start opening sensor and the special prize opening sensor are attached. Furthermore, the multiple main body-side viewing sections 2459C may be provided not only on the underside of the case main body 2453C, but also on the inner or outer surface of the upper surface of the case main body 2453C, or on the inner or outer surface of the side of the case main body 2453C.

In this embodiment, the movable one-side viewing portion 2458C and the main body-side viewing portion 2459C are represented by a "★" on the underside of the second starting gate door 2411C and the special prize gate door 2413C (the surface behind the upper surface through which the game balls flow) or the underside of the case main body 2453C. The movable one-side viewing portion 2458C and the main body-side viewing portion 2459C may be printed on the underside of the second starting gate door 2411C and the special prize gate door 2413C or the underside of the case main body 2453C, or a sticker-like film member on which the movable one-side viewing portion 2458C or the main body-side viewing portion 2459C is formed may be attached to the underside of the second starting gate door 2411C and the special prize gate door 2413C or the underside of the case main body 2453C. Furthermore, the movable one-side viewing portion 2458C and the main body-side viewing portion 2459C may be formed by raising the underside of the second starting opening door 2411C and the large prize opening door 2413C or the underside of the case main body 2453C to form a convex mark, or by recessing the underside of the second starting opening door 2411C and the large prize opening door 2413C or the underside of the case main body 2453C to form a concave mark. From the standpoint of avoiding damage to the movable one-side viewing portion 2458C and the main body-side viewing portion 2459C themselves, it is preferable that the movable one-side viewing portion 2458C and the main body-side viewing portion 2459C be integrally formed with the second starting opening door 2411C, the large prize opening door 2413C, or the case main body 2453C by printing or forming a mark, rather than by a sticker-like film member.

As shown in FIG. 393(a), when the first advancing/retreating device 2452C, which is in a non-winning state and contacts the game ball B to prevent the game ball B from moving toward the special prize opening sensor when the special prize opening door 2413C is in the advanced state, the multiple main body side viewing portions 2459C of the case main body 2453C are located rearward of the multiple movable one side viewing portions 2458C of the special prize opening door 2413C. Also, when the second starting opening door 2411C is in an advanced state and contacts the game ball B to prevent the game ball B from moving toward the second starting opening sensor when the first advancing/retreating device 2452C is in a non-winning state, the virtual line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple main body side viewing portions 2459C of the case main body 2453C is located rearward of the virtual line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple movable one side viewing portions 2458C of the second starting opening door 2411C. In other words, the multiple movable one-side viewing sections 2458C and the multiple main body side viewing sections 2459C are arranged so that the normal advancement state of the large prize entrance door 2413C and the second starting entrance door 2411C is such that the ``★'' notation on the multiple main body side viewing sections 2459C is located behind the ``★'' notation on the multiple movable one-side viewing sections 2458C, or such that the virtual line 2457C passing through the center of the ``★'' notation on the multiple movable one-side viewing sections 2458C is located forward of the virtual line 2457C passing through the center of the ``★'' notation on the multiple main body side viewing sections 2459C. For this reason, when the large prize entrance door 2413C or the second starting entrance door 2411C is operated to the advanced state, if the "★" markings on the multiple main body side viewing sections 2459C are located behind the "★" markings on the multiple movable half side viewing sections 2458C, or if the imaginary line 2457C passing through the center of the "★" markings on the multiple movable half side viewing sections 2458C is not located forward of the imaginary line 2457C passing through the center of the "★" markings on the multiple main body side viewing sections 2459C, then the large prize entrance door 2413C or the second starting entrance door 2411C is not in a normal advanced state, but is in an advanced state involving an abnormality that may have some effect on the progress of the game.

As shown in Figure 393 (b), in the winning state of the first advancing/retreating device 2452C, where the special prize opening door 2413C is in the retracted state and does not restrict the game ball B from moving toward the special prize opening sensor, the multiple main body side viewing portions 2459C of the case main body 2453C are positioned so that they at least partially overlap in the front-to-back direction with the multiple movable one side viewing portions 2458C of the special prize opening door 2413C. Also, in the winning state of the first advancing/retreating device 2452C, where the second starting opening door 2411C is in the retracted state and does not restrict the game ball B from moving toward the second starting opening sensor, the imaginary line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple main body side viewing portions 2459C of the case main body 2453C is positioned so that it overlaps in the front-to-back direction with the imaginary line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple movable one side viewing portions 2458C of the second starting opening door 2411C. In other words, the normal retracted state of the large prize entrance door 2413C and the second starting entrance door 2411C is such that the "★" markings on the multiple main body side viewing sections 2459C are positioned so that they at least partially overlap in the front-to-back direction with the "★" markings on the multiple movable one side viewing sections 2458C, or such that the virtual line 2457C passing through the center of the "★" markings on the multiple movable one side viewing sections 2458C is positioned so that it overlaps in the front-to-back direction with the virtual line 2457C passing through the center of the "★" markings on the multiple main body side viewing sections 2459C. For this reason, when the large prize entrance door 2413C or the second starting entrance door 2411C is operated to the advanced state, if the "★" symbols on the multiple main body viewing sections 2459C are positioned so that they at least partially overlap in the front-to-back direction with the "★" symbols on the multiple movable half viewing sections 2458C, or if the imaginary line 2457C passing through the center of the "★" symbols on the multiple movable half viewing sections 2458C does not overlap in the front-to-back direction with the imaginary line 2457C passing through the center of the "★" symbols on the multiple main body viewing sections 2459C, then the large prize entrance door 2413C or the second starting entrance door 2411C is not in a normal retracted state, but rather is in an abnormal retracted state that may have some effect on the progress of the game.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the special prize opening door 2413C is in the advanced state, it is possible to see from the outside, that is, from the underside of the first forward/backward moving device 2452C, that the multiple main body side viewing sections 2459C of the case main body 2453C are positioned rearward of the multiple movable one side viewing sections 2458C of the special prize opening door 2413C, and when the special prize opening door 2413B is in the retracted state, the multiple main body side viewing sections 2459C of the case main body 2453C are positioned at least rearward from the multiple movable one side viewing sections 2458C of the special prize opening door 2413C in the front-to-rear direction. Since the positional relationship in which parts of the first advancing/retreating device 2452C overlap can be seen from the outside, on the underside, of the first advancing/retreating device 2452C, by visually inspecting the first advancing/retreating device 2452C removed from the game board 5 from the underside, it is possible to easily check whether the large prize opening door 2413C is in an advanced state or whether it is in a retracted state, using the multiple main body side viewing sections 2459C provided on the case main body 2453C and the multiple movable one side viewing sections 2458C provided on the large prize opening door 2413C as visual targets. Therefore, with the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, it is easy to check the operation of the large prize opening door 2413C during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, preventing problems with the entrance and exit operation of the large prize opening door 2413C and preventing disadvantages to players and gaming halls where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, thereby increasing the reliability of the pachinko machine 1 for players, gaming halls, etc.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the second starting opening door 2411C is in the advanced state, it is possible to see from the outside, that is, from the underside of the first advancing/retreating device 2452C, that the imaginary line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple main body side viewing portions 2459C of the case main body 2453C is located rearward of the imaginary line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple movable half side viewing portions 2458C of the second starting opening door 2411C, and when the second starting opening door 2411C is in the retracted state, it is possible to see from the outside, that is, from the underside of the first advancing/retreating device 2452C, that the imaginary line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple main body side viewing portions 2459C of the case main body 2453C is located rearward of the imaginary line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple movable half side viewing portions 2458C of the second starting opening door 2411C. Since it can be seen from the outside, that is, from the underside of the first advancing/retreating device 2452C, that the positional relationship is such that it overlaps in the front-to-back direction with the imaginary line 2457C passing through the center of the movable one-side viewing portion 2458C, by visually inspecting the first advancing/retreating device 2452C removed from the game board 5 from the underside, it is possible to easily confirm whether the second starting gate door 2411C is in the advanced state or whether the second starting gate door 2411C is in the retracted state, using the multiple main body side viewing portions 2459C provided on the case main body 2453C and the multiple movable one-side viewing portions 2458C provided on the large prize gate door 2413C as visual targets. Therefore, with the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, it is easy to check the operation of the second starting gate 2411C during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, preventing problems with the entry and exit operation of the second starting gate 2411C and preventing disadvantages to players and gaming halls where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, thereby increasing the reliability of the pachinko machine 1 for players, gaming halls, etc.

Furthermore, after the first advancing/retreating device 2452C (first attacker unit 2400C) is attached to the gaming board 5, the upper surface of the second starting gate door 2411C and the upper surface of the special prize gate door 2413C are easily visible to a player playing the pachinko machine 1, whereas the multiple movable one-side viewing sections 2458C of this embodiment are provided on the underside of the second starting gate door 2411C and the underside of the special prize gate door 2413C. Therefore, even if a player were to look into the second starting gate door 2411C or the special prize gate door 2413C from above, it is made impossible or difficult for the player to view the movable one-side viewing sections 2458C, preventing the aesthetic appeal of the first attacker unit 2400C or the decorativeness of the pachinko machine 1 from being impaired when the player views the movable one-side viewing sections 2458C.

In addition, after the first forward/backward moving device 2452C (first attacker unit 2400C) is attached to the gaming board 5, the gaming ball B flows down from the upper surface of the second starting gate door 2411C and the upper surface of the large winning gate door 2413C, whereas in this embodiment the multiple movable one-side viewing sections 2458C are provided on the lower surface of the second starting gate door 2411C and the lower surface of the large winning gate door 2413C. Therefore, even when multiple movable one-side viewing sections 2458C are provided, it is possible to prevent the multiple movable one-side viewing sections 2458C themselves from interfering with the flow of the gaming ball B, and it is possible to prevent the multiple movable one-side viewing sections 2458C themselves from causing problems in the progress of the game.

In addition, the first advancing/retreating device 2452C is positioned behind the play area 5a, and a decorative surface that decorates the pachinko machine 1 is formed on the front of the play panel 1100 that defines the rear of the play area 5a. Therefore, even if a player were to look at the top or bottom of the first advancing/retreating device 2452C (first attacka unit 2400C) after the first advancing/retreating device 2452C (first attacka unit 2400C) has been attached to the play board 5, it would be difficult for the player to see the top or bottom of the first advancing/retreating device 2452C (first attacka unit 2400C), making it impossible or difficult for the player to see the main body viewing portion 2459C. This prevents the aesthetic appeal of the first attacka unit 2400C or the decorativeness of the pachinko machine 1 from being impaired when the player looks at the main body viewing portion 2459C.

In addition, after the first forward/backward movement device 2452C (first attacker unit 2400C) is attached to the game board 5, the game ball B flows down from the upper surface of the second starting gate door 2411C and the upper surface of the large winning gate door 2413C, whereas in this embodiment the multiple main body viewing sections 2459C are provided on the underside of the case body 2453C. Therefore, even when multiple main body viewing sections 2459C are provided, it is possible to prevent the multiple main body viewing sections 2459C themselves from interfering with the flow of the game ball B, and it is possible to prevent the multiple main body viewing sections 2459C themselves from causing problems in the progress of the game.

In order to improve the visibility of the multiple movable one-side visual confirmation portions 2456C on the underside of the second starting gate door 2411C and the large prize gate door 2413C, which can be seen from the underside of the first advancing/retreating device 2452C through the case body 2453C, the case body 2453C and the cover body 2454C may be formed to be colored transparent or colorless transparent so as to have transparency, while the second starting gate door 2411C and the large prize gate door 2413C may be formed to be colored opaque so as not to have transparency, and multiple movable one-side visual confirmation portions 2458C may be provided on the underside of the second starting gate door 2411C and the large prize gate door 2413C, which are formed to be colored opaque. This makes it even easier to check the operation of the large prize gate door 2413C and the second starting gate door 2411C using the multiple movable one-side visual confirmation portions 2458C as visual targets during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the first forward/backward moving device 2452C may be configured to further include a locking mechanism that restricts the retreating movement of the second starting gate door 2411C and the large prize gate door 2413C that have transitioned to the advanced state, thereby enhancing the effectiveness of preventing fraudulent activity against the second starting gate door 2411C and the large prize gate door 2413C. In this configuration, when checking the operation of the second start gate door 2411C and the special prize gate door 2413C during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, the worker visually inspects the first advance/retreat device 2452C removed from the game board 5 from below after releasing the locking mechanism, and by pushing the second start gate door 2411C rearward against the spring force of the start gate solenoid or by pushing the special prize gate door 2413C rearward against the spring force of the attacca solenoid, it is possible to visually determine whether the second start gate door 2411C can transition to a normal retracted state against the spring force of the start gate solenoid or whether the special prize gate door 2413BC can transition to a normal retracted state against the spring force of the attacca solenoid.

In addition, the second starting gate door 2411C and the large prize gate door 2413C may be supported by the first link mechanism or the second link mechanism and may be adapted to move forward or backward within the case body 2453C, or may be supported outside the case body 2453C by the first link mechanism or the second link mechanism and may be adapted to move forward or backward along the top or bottom surface of the case body 2453C, or may be supported on the top or bottom surface of the case body 2453C and may be adapted to move forward or backward along the top or bottom surface of the case body 2453C by the first link mechanism or the second link mechanism. When the second starting gate door 2411C and the large prize gate door 2413C are advanced or retracted within the case body 2453C, the effectiveness of preventing fraud against the second starting gate door 2411C and the large prize gate door 2413C can be improved, whereas when the second starting gate door 2411C and the large prize gate door 2413C are advanced or retracted outside the case body 2453C, the efficiency of maintenance work for malfunctions that occur in the second starting gate door 2411C and the large prize gate door 2413C can be improved.

In addition, the multiple movable one-side viewing sections 2458C may be provided in any position on the underside of the second starting gate door 2411C or the large prize gate door 2413C, and each viewing section 2458C may be provided in any size, and the multiple main body side viewing sections 2459C may be provided in any position on the underside of the case main body 2453C, and each main body side viewing section 2459C may be provided in any size, and by using the multiple movable one-side viewing sections 2458C or the multiple main body side viewing sections 2459C as visual targets, it is possible to easily check whether the second starting gate door 2411C or the large prize gate door 2413C is in the advanced state or whether the second starting gate door 2411C or the large prize gate door 2413C is in the retracted state. Below, we will explain in detail the respective states of the second starting gate door 2411C or the large winning gate door 2413C and the positional relationship between the multiple movable one-side viewing sections 2458C and the multiple main body-side viewing sections 2459C for this aspect.

In the above-mentioned modified example 1 of the attacca unit, we described an aspect in which the movement of the movable piece is visually confirmed using a visual confirmation portion provided on the movable piece side as a visual target relative to the case body.In the above-mentioned modified example 2 of the attacca unit, we described an aspect in which the movement of the movable piece is visually confirmed using a visual confirmation portion provided on the case body side as a visual target relative to the movable piece.However, in the aspect of this example in which multiple movable piece side visual confirmation portions 2458C and multiple main body side visual confirmation portions 2459C are provided, as in modified example 1 of the attacca unit, the movement of the movable piece can be visually confirmed using the movable piece side visual confirmation portion 2458C as a visual target relative to the case body, and as in modified example 2 of the attacca unit, the movement of the movable piece can also be visually confirmed using the main body side visual confirmation portion 2459C as a visual target relative to the movable piece.Therefore, detailed explanations of these aspects will be omitted below.

Figure 394(a) is a schematic diagram of the first advancing/retreating device 2452C viewed from below, showing the second starting gate door 2411C and the large prize gate door 2413C in the advanced state; Figure 394(b) is a schematic diagram of the first advancing/retreating device 2452C viewed from below, showing the second starting gate door 2411C and the large prize gate door 2413C in the retracted state; and Figure 394(c) is a schematic diagram of the first advancing/retreating device 2452C viewed from below, showing the second starting gate door 2411C and the large prize gate door 2413C in an abnormal advance state. FIG. 395(a) is a schematic diagram of the first advancing/retreating device 2452C viewed from below, showing the second starting gate 2411C and the special prize gate 2413C in the abnormal retraction state; FIG. 395(b) is a schematic diagram of the first advancing/retreating device 2452C viewed from below, showing the second starting gate 2411C and the special prize gate 2413C in the abnormal advancement state; and FIG. 395(c) is a schematic diagram of the first advancing/retreating device 2452C viewed from below, showing the second starting gate 2411C and the special prize gate 2413C in the abnormal retraction state. Note that the top in each figure is the front facing the player when the first advancing/retreating device 2452C is attached to the gaming board 5, and the bottom in each figure is the rear facing away from the player when the first advancing/retreating device 2452C is attached to the gaming board 5.

As shown in Figures 394(a) to 395(c), the underside of the plate-shaped large prize opening door 2413C has a plurality of movable one-side viewing sections 2458C arranged left and right in the center in the front-to-back direction, with an outer diameter approximately equal to the diameter of the game ball B, and the underside of the case main body 2453C has a plurality of main body viewing sections 2459B arranged left and right in the center in the front-to-back direction on the side of the large prize opening door 2413C. The outer diameters of the movable one-side viewing sections 2458C and the main body viewing sections 2459C in this example may be larger than the diameter of the game ball B from the perspective of ease of visibility, or may be smaller than the diameter of the game ball B from the perspective of ease of formation.

As shown in FIG. 394(a), when the special prize opening door 2413C is in the advanced state, the virtual line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple movable one-side viewing portions 2458C is positioned forward of the virtual line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple main body-side viewing portions 2459C at a predetermined first distance in a bottom view. Therefore, in this example, when checking the operation of the special prize opening door 2413C during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, the worker visually inspects the first advancing/retreating device 2452C removed from the gaming board 5 from below, and confirms that the virtual line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple movable one-side viewing portions 2458C is positioned forward of the virtual line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple main body-side viewing portions 2459C at a predetermined first distance in a bottom view. This allows the worker to easily and accurately visually confirm that the special prize opening door 2413C can transition to the normal advanced state due to the spring force of the attacca solenoid.

As shown in Figure 394 (b), when the large prize entrance door 2413C is in a retracted state, the imaginary line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple movable one-side viewing portions 2458C is positioned forward of the imaginary line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple main body side viewing portions 2459C at a predetermined second distance when viewed from below. For this reason, in this example, when checking the operation of the special prize opening door 2413C during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, an operator visually checks the first forward/backward moving device 2452C removed from the game board 5 from below and pushes the special prize opening door 2413C rearward against the spring force of the attacca solenoid. If the operator confirms that the imaginary line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple movable half-side viewing sections 2458C is positioned forward at a predetermined second distance when viewed from below relative to the imaginary line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple main body-side viewing sections 2459C, the operator can easily and more accurately visually confirm that the special prize opening door 2413C can transition to a normal retracted state against the spring force of the attacca solenoid.

As shown in Figure 394 (c), when the large prize entrance door 2413C is in an abnormal advance state, the virtual line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple movable one-side viewing portions 2458C is positioned forward of the virtual line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple main body side viewing portions 2459C, with a distance smaller than the predetermined first distance when viewed from below. For this reason, in this example, when checking the operation of the large prize opening door 2413C during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, an operator visually inspects the first advance/retract device 2452C removed from the game board 5 from below, and if the operator confirms that the imaginary line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple movable half-side visual confirmation sections 2458C is positioned forward of the imaginary line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple main body-side visual confirmation sections 2459C at a distance smaller than the preset first distance when viewed from below, the operator can easily and accurately visually confirm that the spring force of the attacca solenoid is making it difficult for the large prize opening door 2413C to transition to a normal advanced state.

As shown in Figure 395 (a), when the large prize entrance door 2413C is in an abnormal retracted state, the virtual line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple movable one-side viewing sections 2458C is positioned forward of the virtual line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple main body side viewing sections 2459C, at a distance greater than the predetermined second distance when viewed from below. For this reason, in this example, when checking the operation of the special prize opening door 2413C during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, an operator visually checks the first forward/backward moving device 2452C removed from the game board 5 from below and pushes the special prize opening door 2413C rearward against the spring force of the attacca solenoid. If the operator confirms that the imaginary line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple movable half-side visual confirmation sections 2458C is positioned forward of the imaginary line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple main body-side visual confirmation sections 2459C at a distance greater than the preset second distance when viewed from below, the operator can easily and accurately visually confirm that the special prize opening door 2413C is having difficulty transitioning to a normal retracted state against the spring force of the attacca solenoid.

As shown in Figure 395 (b), the large prize opening door 2413C may be advanced at an angle from the case main body 2453C, for example, when an abnormality occurs in the support part on one side in the left-right direction. In such a case, it may be impossible to visually confirm the abnormal advancement or retraction state of the large prize opening door 2413C using a single visual confirmation part as a visual target. Specifically, if the visual confirmation part is located on either the left or right side of the underside of the large prize opening door 2413C, when an abnormality occurs in the support part on the other side supporting the large prize opening door 2413C, the visual confirmation part on one side of the large prize opening door 2413C may be located forward of the front edge of the case main body 2453C, and an operator who visually observes this may believe that the operation of the large prize opening door 2413C is normal.

When the special prize opening door 2413C is in an abnormal advance state, advanced at an angle, the virtual line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple movable one-side visual confirmation portions 2458C is inclined at an arbitrary angle in a bottom view relative to the virtual line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple main body-side visual confirmation portions 2459C. Therefore, in this example, when checking the operation of the special prize opening door 2413C during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, the worker can visually inspect the first advance/retract device 2452C removed from the gaming board 5 from below, and if they confirm that the virtual line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple movable one-side visual confirmation portions 2458C is inclined at an arbitrary angle in a bottom view relative to the virtual line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple main body-side visual confirmation portions 2459C, the worker can easily and accurately visually confirm that the spring force of the attacca solenoid is preventing the special prize opening door 2413C from transitioning to a normal advance state.

As shown in Figure 395 (c), when the large prize entrance door 2413C is in an abnormal retracted state in which it is retracted at an angle, the imaginary line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple movable one-side viewing portions 2458C is in a positional relationship in which it is inclined at an arbitrary angle when viewed from below relative to the imaginary line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple main body side viewing portions 2459C. For this reason, in this example, when checking the operation of the special prize opening door 2413C during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, an operator visually checks the first forward/backward moving device 2452C removed from the game board 5 from below and pushes the special prize opening door 2413C rearward against the spring force of the attacca solenoid. If this confirms that the imaginary line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple movable one-side viewing sections 2458C is tilted at an arbitrary angle when viewed from below relative to the imaginary line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple main body side viewing sections 2459C, the operator can easily and accurately visually confirm that the special prize opening door 2413C is having difficulty transitioning to a normal retracted state against the spring force of the attacca solenoid.

As described above, in an embodiment in which a plurality of movable one-side viewing sections 2458C having an outer diameter approximately equal to the diameter of game ball B are arranged side by side in the longitudinal center on the underside of the large prize opening door 2413C, and a plurality of main body side viewing sections 2459C having an outer diameter approximately equal to the diameter of game ball B are arranged side by side in the longitudinal center on the underside of the case main body 2453C, the worker checking the operation of the large prize opening door 2413C during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1 can use the plurality of movable one-side viewing sections 2458C and the plurality of main body side viewing sections 2459C as visual targets to easily and more accurately visually determine whether the large prize opening door 2413C can transition between the normal advance state and the normal retract state. This prevents malfunctions in the entrance and exit operation of the special prize opening door 2413C, prevents disadvantages to players and the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and further increases the reliability of the pachinko machine 1 for players and the gaming hall. Note that the aspects of the multiple movable one-side viewing sections 2458C and the multiple main body-side viewing sections 2459C in this example may be applied to, for example, the aspects of the multiple movable one-side viewing sections 2458C provided on the underside of the second starting opening door 2411C or the multiple main body-side viewing sections 2459C provided on the second starting opening door 2411C side of the case main body 2453C. Furthermore, in this example, the virtual line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple movable single-side viewing portions 2458C and the virtual line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple main body-side viewing portions 2459C have been described, but the virtual line 2457C may, for example, pass through the front or rear ends of the multiple movable single-side viewing portions 2458C, or the front or rear ends of the multiple main body-side viewing portions 2459C, and it is desirable to set the virtual line as desired from the perspective of improving the work efficiency of the worker who visually checks the state of the large prize entrance door 2413C.

As shown in Figures 394(a) to 395(c), the underside of the plate-shaped second starting door 2411C has a plurality of movable one-side viewing sections 2458C arranged in the left-right direction at the rear end in the front-to-rear direction, each having an outer diameter smaller than the diameter of the game ball B, and the underside of the case main body 2453C has a plurality of main body side viewing sections 2459B arranged in the left-to-right direction at the rear end in the front-to-rear direction on the side of the second starting door 2411C. In this example, the outer diameters of the movable one-side viewing sections 2458C and the main body side viewing sections 2459C are smaller than the diameter of the game ball B from the perspective of ease of formation, but may also be approximately the same as the diameter of the game ball B from the perspective of ease of visibility, or may be larger than the diameter of the game ball B.

As shown in Figure 394 (a), when the second starting door 2411C is in the advanced state, the imaginary line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple movable one-side viewing portions 2458C is located forward of the imaginary line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple main body side viewing portions 2459C at a predetermined first distance when viewed from below, and the imaginary line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple main body side viewing portions 2459C is located rearward of the rear end edge of the second starting door 2411C at a predetermined second distance. For this reason, in this example, when checking the operation of the second starting port door 2411C during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, an operator can visually inspect the first advancing/retreating device 2452C removed from the gaming board 5 from below and confirm that the virtual line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple movable half-side viewing portions 2458C is located forward of the virtual line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple main body-side viewing portions 2459C at a predetermined first distance when viewed from below, and that the virtual line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple main body-side viewing portions 2459C is located rearward of the rear edge of the second starting port door 2411C at a predetermined second distance. This allows the operator to easily and accurately visually confirm that the second starting port door 2411C can transition to a normal advanced state due to the spring force of the starting port solenoid.

As shown in Figure 394 (b), when the second starting opening door 2411C is in a retracted state, the virtual line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple movable one-side viewing portions 2458C is positioned forward of the virtual line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple main body side viewing portions 2459C at a predetermined third distance when viewed from below, and the virtual line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple main body side viewing portions 2459C is positioned so as to contact the rear end edge of the second starting opening door 2411C when viewed from below. For this reason, in this example, when checking the operation of the second starting door 2411C during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, the worker visually inspects the first advancing/retreating device 2452C removed from the gaming board 5 from below and pushes the second starting door 2411C rearward against the spring force of the starting door solenoid. This confirms that the virtual line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple movable half-side viewing portions 2458C is positioned forward of the virtual line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple main body-side viewing portions 2459C at a predetermined third distance in bottom view, and that the virtual line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple main body-side viewing portions 2459C is in contact with the rear edge of the second starting door 2411C in bottom view. This allows the worker to easily and accurately visually confirm that the second starting door 2411C can transition to a normal retracted state against the spring force of the starting door solenoid.

As shown in Figure 394 (c), when the second starting opening door 2411C is in an abnormal advance state, the virtual line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple movable one-side viewing portions 2458C is located forward of the virtual line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple main body side viewing portions 2459C at a distance smaller than the predetermined first distance when viewed from below, and the virtual line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple main body side viewing portions 2459C is located rearward of the rear end edge of the second starting opening door 2411C at a distance smaller than the predetermined second distance. For this reason, in this example, when checking the operation of the second starting gate door 2411C during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, an operator can visually inspect the first advancing/retreating device 2452C removed from the gaming board 5 from below and confirm that the imaginary line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple movable half-side viewing portions 2458C is positioned forward of the imaginary line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple main body-side viewing portions 2459C at a distance smaller than the preset first distance when viewed from below, and that the imaginary line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple main body-side viewing portions 2459C is positioned rearward of the rear edge of the second starting gate door 2411C at a distance smaller than the preset second distance. This allows the operator to easily and accurately visually confirm that the spring force of the starting gate solenoid is making it difficult for the second starting gate door 2411C to transition to a normal advanced state.

As shown in Figure 395 (a), when the second starting opening door 2411C is in an abnormal retraction state, the virtual line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple movable one-side viewing portions 2458C is located forward of the virtual line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple main body side viewing portions 2459C at a distance greater than the third predetermined distance when viewed from below, and the virtual line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple main body side viewing portions 2459C is positioned so as not to contact the rear end edge of the second starting opening door 2411C when viewed from below. For this reason, in this example, when checking the operation of the second starting door 2411C during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, the worker visually inspects the first advancing/retreating device 2452C removed from the game board 5 from below and pushes the second starting door 2411C rearward against the spring force of the starting door solenoid. If the worker confirms that the imaginary line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple movable half-side viewing portions 2458C is positioned forward of the imaginary line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple main body-side viewing portions 2459C at a distance greater than the third preset distance when viewed from below, and that the imaginary line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple main body-side viewing portions 2459C does not contact the rear edge of the second starting door 2411C when viewed from below, the worker can easily and accurately visually confirm that the second starting door 2411C is having difficulty transitioning to a normal retracted state against the spring force of the starting door solenoid.

As shown in Figure 395 (b), when the second starting opening door 2411C is in an abnormal advancement state in which it is advanced at an angle, the virtual line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple movable one-side viewing portions 2458C is inclined at an arbitrary angle in a bottom view relative to the virtual line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple main body side viewing portions 2459C, and is located forward of the virtual line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple main body side viewing portions 2459C at a distance smaller than the predetermined first distance in a bottom view, and the virtual line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple main body side viewing portions 2459C is inclined at an arbitrary angle in a bottom view relative to the rear end edge of the second starting opening door 2411C, and is located rearward of the rear end edge of the second starting opening door 2411C at a distance smaller than the predetermined second distance. For this reason, in this example, when checking the operation of the second starting gate door 2411C in the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, an operator visually checks the first advancing/retreating device 2452C removed from the game board 5 from the bottom side, and it is possible to see that the imaginary line 2457C passing through the centers of the plurality of movable one-side visual confirmation parts 2458C is inclined at an arbitrary angle in bottom view with respect to the imaginary line 2457C passing through the centers of the plurality of main body side visual confirmation parts 2459C, and that the imaginary line 2457C passing through the centers of the plurality of main body side visual confirmation parts 2459C is inclined at an arbitrary angle in bottom view with respect to the imaginary line 2457C passing through the centers of the plurality of main body side visual confirmation parts 2459C, and that the imaginary line 2457 .... When it is confirmed that the second starting port door 2411C is positioned forward at a distance smaller than the predetermined second distance, and that the imaginary line 2457C passing through the center of the multiple main body side viewing portions 2459C is inclined at an arbitrary angle relative to the rear edge of the second starting port door 2411C when viewed from below, and is positioned rearward at a distance smaller than the predetermined second distance relative to the rear edge of the second starting port door 2411C, the operator can easily and accurately visually confirm that the spring force of the starting port solenoid is making it difficult for the second starting port door 2411C to transition to a normal advanced state.

As shown in Figure 395 (c), when the second starting opening door 2411C is in an abnormal retracted state in which it is retracted at an angle, the virtual line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple movable one-side viewing portions 2458C is inclined at an arbitrary angle in a bottom view relative to the virtual line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple main body side viewing portions 2459C, and is located forward of the virtual line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple main body side viewing portions 2459C at a distance greater than the third predetermined distance in a bottom view, and the virtual line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple main body side viewing portions 2459C is inclined at an arbitrary angle in a bottom view relative to the rear end edge of the second starting opening door 2411C, and is located rearward of the rear end edge of the second starting opening door 2411C at an arbitrary distance. For this reason, in this example, when checking the operation of the second starting port door 2411C in the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, an operator visually checks the first advancing/retreating device 2452C removed from the game board 5 from the bottom side and pushes the second starting port door 2411C backward against the biasing force of the spring of the starting port solenoid, so that the imaginary line 2457C passing through the centers of the plurality of movable one-side visual confirmation parts 2458C is inclined at an arbitrary angle in bottom view with respect to the imaginary line 2457C passing through the centers of the plurality of main body side visual confirmation parts 2459C, and the imaginary line 2457C passing through the centers of the plurality of main body side visual confirmation parts 2459C is inclined at an arbitrary angle in bottom view with respect to the imaginary line 2457C passing through the centers of the plurality of main body side visual confirmation parts 2459C. When it is confirmed that the imaginary line 2457C is located forward of the imaginary line 2457C in a bottom view at a distance greater than the preset third distance, and that the imaginary line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple main body side viewing sections 2459C is inclined at an arbitrary angle in a bottom view relative to the rear edge of the second starting port door 2411C, and is located rearward at an arbitrary distance relative to the rear edge of the second starting port door 2411C, the operator can easily and accurately visually confirm that the second starting port door 2411C is having difficulty transitioning to a normal exit state against the spring force of the starting port solenoid.

As described above, the underside of the second starting door 2411C has a plurality of movable one-side viewing sections 2458C arranged in the left-right direction at the rear end in the front-to-rear direction, each having an outer diameter smaller than the diameter of the game ball B, and the underside of the case main body 2453C has a plurality of main body side viewing sections 2459B arranged in the left-to-right direction at the rear end in the front-to-rear direction on the side of the second starting door 2411C, each having an outer diameter smaller than the diameter of the game ball B. In this configuration, an operator checking the operation of the second starting door 2411C during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1 can use the plurality of movable one-side viewing sections 2458C and the plurality of main body side viewing sections 2459C as visual targets to easily and accurately visually determine whether the second starting door 2411C can transition between the normal advance state and the normal retract state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent malfunctions in the entry and exit operation of the second starting gate 2411C, and to prevent disadvantages from being caused to players and the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and ultimately to further increase the reliability of the pachinko machine 1 for players and the gaming hall. Note that the aspects of the multiple movable one-side viewing sections 2458C and the multiple main body-side viewing sections 2459C in this example may also be applied to, for example, the aspects of the multiple movable one-side viewing sections 2458C provided on the underside of the special prize gate door 2413C or the multiple main body-side viewing sections 2459C provided on the side of the special prize gate door 2413C of the case main body 2453C. Furthermore, in this example, the virtual line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple movable single-side viewing portions 2458C and the virtual line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple main body-side viewing portions 2459C have been described, but the virtual line 2457C may, for example, pass through the front or rear ends of the multiple movable single-side viewing portions 2458C, or the front or rear ends of the multiple main body-side viewing portions 2459C, and it is desirable to set the virtual line as desired from the perspective of improving the work efficiency of the worker who visually checks the state of the large prize entrance door 2413C.

Figures 396(a) to 396(d) are schematic diagrams showing the first forward/backward movement device 2452C from below, showing the large prize opening door 2413C in the advanced state, and all show other aspects of the movable one-side viewing portion 2458C and the main body-side viewing portion 2459C.

As shown in Figure 396 (a), the underside of the large prize entrance door 2413C may have a plurality of movable one-side viewing sections 2458C arranged in the front-to-back direction in the center of the left-to-right direction, each having an outer diameter smaller than the diameter of the game ball B, and the underside of the case main body 2453C may have a plurality of main body side viewing sections 2459B arranged in the front-to-back direction in the center of the left-to-right direction, each having an outer diameter larger than the diameter of the game ball B. In this example, the plurality of movable one-side visual confirmation portions 2458C and the plurality of main body-side visual confirmation portions 2459C are used as visual targets, and for example, the distance between the rear side movable one-side visual confirmation portion 2458C and the imaginary line 2457C passing through the centers of the plurality of main body-side visual confirmation portions 2459C may be visually confirmed, or the distance between the front side movable one-side visual confirmation portion 2458C and the imaginary line 2457C passing through the centers of the plurality of main body-side visual confirmation portions 2459C may be visually confirmed, and the operator can determine whether the advanced state and retracted state of the large prize entrance door 2413C are normal or not. Furthermore, for example, the operator can visually check the inclination of the virtual line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple main body side visual confirmation parts 2459C relative to the virtual line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple movable one side visual confirmation parts 2458C, and depending on whether the inclination is at a preset angle (a right angle in this example), the operator can visually check whether the large prize opening door 2413C is in an abnormal advance state where it has advanced at an angle, or whether the large prize opening door 2413C is in an abnormal retract state where it has retracted at an angle.

As shown in Figure 396 (b), the underside of the large prize entrance door 2413C may have a plurality of movable one-side viewing sections 2458C arranged in the left-right direction in the center of the front-to-back direction, each having an outer diameter smaller than the diameter of the game ball B, and the underside of the case main body 2453C may have a plurality of main body side viewing sections 2459B arranged in the front-to-back direction on one side of the left-to-right direction, each having an outer diameter larger than the diameter of the game ball B. In this example, the plurality of movable one-side visual confirmation portions 2458C and the plurality of main body-side visual confirmation portions 2459C are used as visual targets, and for example, the distance between the virtual line 2457C passing through the centers of the plurality of movable one-side visual confirmation portions 2458C and the rear side main body-side visual confirmation portion 2459C may be visually confirmed, or the distance between the virtual line 2457C passing through the centers of the plurality of movable one-side visual confirmation portions 2458C and the front side main body-side visual confirmation portion 2459C may be visually confirmed, and the operator may determine whether the advancement state and retraction state of the large prize entrance door 2413C are normal or not. Furthermore, for example, the operator can visually check the inclination of the virtual line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple main body side visual confirmation parts 2459C relative to the virtual line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple movable one side visual confirmation parts 2458C, and depending on whether the inclination is at a preset angle (a right angle in this example), the operator can visually check whether the large prize opening door 2413C is in an abnormal advance state where it has advanced at an angle, or whether the large prize opening door 2413C is in an abnormal retract state where it has retracted at an angle.

As shown in Figure 396 (c), the underside of the large prize entrance door 2413C may be provided with a plurality of movable one-side viewing sections 2458C having an outer diameter smaller than the diameter of the game ball B at one front end in the left-right direction and the other rear end in the left-right direction, and the underside of the case main body 2453C may be provided with a plurality of main body side viewing sections 2459B having an outer diameter smaller than the diameter of the game ball B at one front end in the left-right direction and the other rear end in the left-right direction. In this example, the plurality of movable one-side visual confirmation portions 2458C and the plurality of main body side visual confirmation portions 2459C are used as visual targets, and for example, the distance between the front movable one-side visual confirmation portion 2458C and the front main body side visual confirmation portion 2459C may be visually confirmed, or the distance between the rear movable one-side visual confirmation portion 2458C and the rear main body side visual confirmation portion 2459C may be visually confirmed, allowing the operator to visually confirm whether the advancement state and retraction state of the large prize entrance door 2413C are normal or not. For example, by visually checking the inclination of the virtual line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple main body side visual confirmation parts 2459C relative to the virtual line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple movable one side visual confirmation parts 2458C, and depending on whether the inclination is at a preset angle (parallel in this example), the operator can visually check whether the large prize opening door 2413C is in an abnormal advance state where it has advanced at an angle, or whether the large prize opening door 2413C is in an abnormal retract state where it has retracted at an angle.

As shown in Figure 396 (d), the underside of the large prize entrance door 2413C may have a plurality of movable one-side viewing sections 2458C arranged in the left-right direction at the front and rear ends, each having an outer diameter smaller than the diameter of the game ball B, and the underside of the case main body 2453C may have a plurality of main body side viewing sections 2459B arranged in the left-right direction at the front and rear ends, each having an outer diameter smaller than the diameter of the game ball B. In this example, the plurality of movable one-side viewing portions 2458C and the plurality of main body-side viewing portions 2459C are used as visual targets, and for example, the distance between the imaginary line 2457C passing through the center of the front movable one-side viewing portion 2458C and the imaginary line 2457C passing through the center of the front main body-side viewing portion 2459C may be visually confirmed, or the distance between the imaginary line 2457C passing through the center of the rear movable one-side viewing portion 2458C and the imaginary line 2457C passing through the center of the rear main body-side viewing portion 2459C may be visually confirmed, and the advancement and retraction state of the large prize entrance door 2413C may be confirmed. The worker can visually check whether the condition is normal or not, and can also visually check, for example, the inclination of the virtual line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple main body side visual confirmation sections 2459C on the front side relative to the virtual line 2457C passing through the centers of the multiple movable half side visual confirmation sections 2458C on the rear side, and depending on whether the inclination is at a preset angle (parallel in this example), the worker can visually check whether the large prize opening door 2413C is in an abnormal advance state where it has advanced at an angle, or whether the large prize opening door 2413C is in an abnormal retract state where it has retracted at an angle.

As described above, even in an embodiment in which multiple movable one-side viewing sections 2458C are provided on the underside of the special prize opening door 2413C and multiple main body-side viewing sections 2459C are provided on the underside of the case main body 2453C, workers who check the operation of the special prize opening door 2413C during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1 can easily and accurately determine whether the special prize opening door 2413C can transition between the normal advance state and the normal retract state by using the multiple movable one-side viewing sections 2458C and the multiple main body-side viewing sections 2459C as visual markers. This prevents malfunctions in the entry and exit operation of the special prize opening door 2413C and prevents disadvantages to players and the amusement hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, thereby further increasing the reliability of the pachinko machine 1 for players and the amusement hall. The configuration of the multiple movable one-side viewing sections 2458C provided on the underside of the large prize opening door 2413C and the multiple main body side viewing sections 2459C provided on the large prize opening door 2413C side of the case main body 2453C may also be applied to, for example, the multiple movable one-side viewing sections 2458C provided on the underside of the second starting opening door 2411C or the multiple main body side viewing sections 2459C provided on the second starting opening door 2411C side of the case main body 2453C.

In this embodiment, the first advancing/retreating device 2452C is described as comprising a second starting gate door 2411C having multiple movable one-side viewing sections 2458C on its underside, a large prize gate door 2413C having multiple movable one-side viewing sections 2458C on its underside, and a case main body 2453C having multiple main body viewing sections 2459C on its underside. However, the first advancing/retreating device 2452C may also be configured such that multiple viewing sections are provided on at least one of the second starting gate door 2411C, the large prize gate door 2413C, and the case main body 2453C, and the multiple viewing sections can be used as visual markers to allow the operator to visually confirm whether the second starting gate door 2411C or the large prize gate door 2413C can transition to the normal advance state or the normal retract state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the visual confirmation portions 2458C and 2459C are described as being represented by a "★" symbol. However, the visual confirmation portions 2458C and 2459C may have different shapes as long as they serve as visual markers for confirming the operation of the second starting gate 2411C and the special prize gate 2413C. Specifically, the visual confirmation portions 2458C and 2459C may be represented by a "●" symbol, a "▲" symbol, a "■" symbol, or a symbol in which multiple wires extending left and right are arranged at a predetermined interval in the front-to-back direction. Furthermore, the visual confirmation portions 2458C and 2459C may be represented by letters such as "shi" or "U." Note that if a "●" symbol is used, if a player were to visually confirm the symbol, the circular shape could evoke the image of game ball B, leading to some kind of misunderstanding (for example, a misunderstanding regarding the launch mode of the game ball). In light of this, when using the graphic notation "●", it is desirable to use a "●" with a maximum diameter (e.g., 1-5 mm) smaller than the diameter of game ball B (e.g., 11 mm), or to use a "●" with a portion missing (e.g., semicircular), in order to avoid reminding the player of game ball B as much as possible.

Furthermore, particularly when the second starting gate door 2411C and the large prize gate door 2413C are unitized as in this example, when visually inspecting the first advancing/retreating device 2452C (first attacker unit 2400C) from below, it may be difficult to tell which component is which, the second starting gate door 2411C or the large prize gate door 2413C. Therefore, the configuration of the movable one-side viewing portion 2458C may be different for the second starting gate door 2411C and the large prize gate door 2413C, which will prevent workers from making mistakes in recognition. Alternatively, the configuration of the movable one-side viewing portion 2458C may be the same for the second starting gate door 2411C and the large prize gate door 2413C, which will improve the work efficiency of workers. Furthermore, the main body side viewing section 2459C may be configured differently on the second starting gate door 2411C side and the large prize gate door 2413C side of the case main body 2453C, preventing misrecognition by workers; the main body side viewing section 2459C may be configured in the same manner on the second starting gate door 2411C side and the large prize gate door 2413C side of the case main body 2453C, improving worker efficiency.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, an aspect has been described in which the operation of the second starting gate door 2411C and the special winning gate door 2413C is confirmed using the multiple movable half-side visual confirmation parts 2458C and the multiple main body-side visual confirmation parts 2459C as visual targets during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1. However, confirmation of the operation of the second starting gate door 2411C and the special winning gate door 2413C may also be performed, for example, in a gaming hall or the like where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, by visually confirming from below the first advancing/retreating device 2452C (first attacker unit 2400C) removed from the gaming board 5.

Figure 397(a) is a partial rear view of a portion of the second advancing/retreating device 2652C in which the special prize winning door 2611C has transitioned to a retracted state, as viewed from the rear, and Figure 397(b) is a partial rear view of a portion of the second advancing/retreating device 2652C in which the special prize winning door 2611C has transitioned to an abnormal retracted state, as viewed from the rear. Figure 398(a) is a partial rear view of a portion of the second advancing/retreating device 2652C in which the special prize winning door 2611C has transitioned to an advanced state, as viewed from the rear, and Figure 398(b) is a partial rear view of a portion of the second advancing/retreating device 2652C in which the special prize winning door 2611C has transitioned to an abnormal advanced state, as viewed from the rear.

As shown in Figures 397(a) to 398(b), a plurality of movable one-side viewing sections 2658C that are visible from outside the second advancing/retreating device 2652C are provided on the rear back side (back surface) of the role winning entrance door 2611C. In addition, a plurality of main body side viewing sections 2659C that are visible from outside the second advancing/retreating device 2652C are provided on the rear back side (back surface) of the decorative surface 2651C of the decorative cover 2650C. The plurality of movable one-side viewing sections 2658C and the plurality of main body side viewing sections 2659C are arranged so as to be visible from the rear side of the second advancing/retreating device 2652C, that is, outside the second advancing/retreating device 2652C, when the second attacca unit 2600C is removed from the gaming board 5 or when the second advancing/retreating device 2652C is removed from the second attacca unit 2600C. Furthermore, from the standpoint of increasing the distance that changes between the position when the special prize winning door 2611C is in the advanced state and the position when the special prize winning door 2611C is in the retracted state, it is desirable that at least one of the multiple movable single-side viewing sections 2658C be provided at the tip side of the back side (rear surface) of the special prize winning door 2611C.

In this embodiment, the movable one-side viewing portion 2658C and the main body-side viewing portion 2659C are represented by a "★" on the rear back side (rear side) of the prize opening door 2611C or the rear back side (rear side) of the decorative surface 2651C of the decorative cover 2650C. The movable one-side viewing portion 2658C and the main body-side viewing portion 2659C may be printed on the rear back side (rear side) of the prize opening door 2611C or the rear back side (rear side) of the decorative surface 2651C of the decorative cover 2650C, or a sticker-like film member on which the movable one-side viewing portion 2658C or the main body-side viewing portion 2659C is formed may be attached to the rear back side (rear side) of the prize opening door 2611C or the rear back side (rear side) of the decorative surface 2651C of the decorative cover 2650C. The movable one-side viewing portion 2658C and the main body-side viewing portion 2659C may be formed by raising the rear surface (rear surface) of the prize opening door 2611C or the rear surface (rear surface) of the decorative surface 2651C of the decorative cover 2650C to form a convex mark, or by recessing the rear surface (rear surface) of the prize opening door 2611C or the rear surface (rear surface) of the decorative surface 2651C of the decorative cover 2650C to form a concave mark. From the perspective of avoiding damage to the movable one-side viewing portion 2658C and the main body-side viewing portion 2659C themselves, it is preferable that the movable one-side viewing portion 2658C and the main body-side viewing portion 2659C be integrally formed with the prize opening door 2611C or the decorative surface 2651C of the decorative cover 2650C by printing or forming marks, rather than by using a sticker-like film member.

As shown in Figure 397 (a), when the special device winning port door 2611C is in a retracted state and the second forward/backward moving device 2652C, which comes into contact with the game ball B and prevents the game ball B from moving toward the special device winning port sensor, is in a non-winning state, the positional relationship between the multiple movable one-side viewing sections 2658C and the multiple main body side viewing sections 2659C that serve as visual targets is, for example, such that the inclination of the virtual line 2657C passing through the centers of the multiple main body side viewing sections 2659C relative to the virtual line 2657C passing through the centers of the multiple movable one-side viewing sections 2658C is a predetermined angle (parallel in this example). In other words, the normal retracted state of the bonus prize opening door 2611C is such that the inclination of the virtual line 2657C passing through the center of the "★" markings on the multiple movable one-side viewing sections 2658C and the multiple main body-side viewing sections 2458C is parallel to the inclination of the virtual line 2657C passing through the center of the "★" markings on the multiple main body-side viewing sections 2659C. Therefore, when the bonus prize opening door 2611C is operated to the retracted state, if the inclination of the virtual line 2657C passing through the center of the "★" markings on the multiple movable one-side viewing sections 2658C is not parallel to the inclination of the virtual line 2657C passing through the center of the "★" markings on the multiple main body-side viewing sections 2659C, this means that the bonus prize opening door 2611C is not in a normal retracted state, but rather is in an abnormal retracted state that may have some effect on the progress of the game.

As shown in Figure 398 (a), in the winning state of the second forward/backward moving device 2652C, in which the special device winning port door 2611C is in the advanced state and comes into contact with the game ball B, not restricting the game ball B from moving toward the special device winning port sensor, the positional relationship between the multiple movable one-side viewing sections 2658C and the multiple main body side viewing sections 2659C that serve as visual targets is, for example, such that the inclination of the virtual line 2657C passing through the centers of the multiple main body side viewing sections 2659C relative to the virtual line 2657C passing through the centers of the multiple movable one-side viewing sections 2658C is a predetermined angle (in this example, a right angle). In other words, the multiple movable one-side viewing sections 2458C and the multiple main body-side viewing sections 2459C are arranged so that the normal advanced state of the bonus prize opening door 2611C is such that the inclination of the virtual line 2657C passing through the center of the "★" notation of the multiple movable one-side viewing sections 2658C and the virtual line 2657C passing through the center of the "★" notation of the multiple main body-side viewing sections 2659C is perpendicular to the inclination of the virtual line 2657C passing through the center of the "★" notation of the multiple movable one-side viewing sections 2658C. Therefore, when the bonus prize opening door 2611C is operated to the advanced state, if the inclination of the virtual line 2657C passing through the center of the "★" notation of the multiple movable one-side viewing sections 2658C and the virtual line 2657C passing through the center of the "★" notation of the multiple main body-side viewing sections 2659C is not perpendicular, then the bonus prize opening door 2611C is not in a normal advanced state, but rather is in an advanced state involving an abnormality that may have some effect on the progress of the game.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the bonus prize winning door 2611C is in the retracted state, it is possible to visually confirm from the outside, that is, the rear side of the second advancing/retreating device 2652C, that the inclination of the virtual line 2657C passing through the centers of the multiple main body side viewing sections 2659C relative to the virtual line 2657C passing through the centers of the multiple movable one side viewing sections 2658C is at a predetermined angle (parallel in this example), and when the bonus prize winning door 2611C is in the advanced state, the inclination of the virtual line 2657C passing through the centers of the multiple movable one side viewing sections 2658C relative to the virtual line 2657C passing through the centers of the multiple main body side viewing sections 2659C is at a predetermined angle (parallel in this example). Since it is possible to see from the outside, that is, the back side of the second advancing/retreating device 2652C, that the inclination of the virtual line 2657C passing through the center of the side viewing portion 2659C is at a predetermined angle (right angle in this example), by visually inspecting the second advancing/retreating device 2652C removed from the game board 5 from the back side, it is possible to easily check whether the reel prize opening door 2611C is in a retracted state or whether the reel prize opening door 2611C is in an advanced state, using the multiple movable one side viewing portions 2658C and the multiple main body side viewing portions 2659C as visual targets. Therefore, with the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, it is easy to check the operation of the prize winning device door 2611C during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, preventing problems with the opening and closing operation of the prize winning device door 2611C and preventing disadvantages to players and gaming halls where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, thereby increasing the reliability of the pachinko machine 1 for players, gaming halls, etc.

In addition, after the second forward/backward moving device 2652C (second attacker unit 2600C) is attached to the gaming board 5, the front of the decorative surface 2651C of the decorative cover 2650C and the front of the prize winning device door 2611C are easily visible to the player playing the pachinko machine 1, whereas the multiple movable one-side visible portions 2658C are provided on the rear side (back surface) of the prize winning device door 2611C, and the multiple main body side visible portions 2659C are provided on the back of the decorative surface 2651C of the decorative cover 2650C. Because it is on the back side (rear face), even if a player looks into the second advancing/retreating device 2652C (second attacker unit 2600C) from the front, it is impossible or difficult for the player to see the multiple movable one-side viewing sections 2658C or the multiple main body-side viewing sections 2659C, which prevents the aesthetic appeal of the second attacker unit 2600C or the decorativeness of the pachinko machine 1 from being impaired when the player sees the multiple movable one-side viewing sections 2658C or the multiple main body-side viewing sections 2659C.

In addition, after the second forward/backward moving device 2652C (second attacker unit 2600C) is attached to the gaming board 5, the gaming ball B comes into contact with the left side of the special device winning entrance door 2611C, whereas in this embodiment the multiple movable one-side viewing sections 2658C and multiple main body-side viewing sections 2659C are provided on the back side (rear side) of the special device winning entrance door 2611C and the back side (rear side) of the decorative surface 2651C of the decorative cover 2650C. Therefore, even if multiple movable one-side viewing sections 2658C and multiple main body-side viewing sections 2659C are provided, it is possible to prevent the multiple movable one-side viewing sections 2658C and multiple main body-side viewing sections 2659C themselves from interfering with the flow of the gaming ball B, and it is possible to prevent the multiple movable one-side viewing sections 2658C and multiple main body-side viewing sections 2659C themselves from causing problems in the progress of the game.

In order to improve the visibility of the multiple movable one-side viewing sections 2658C and multiple main body-side viewing sections 2659C, which can be seen from the back of the second forward/backward moving device 2652C through the case body 2653C, the case body 2653C and cover body 2654C can be made colored and transparent or colorless and transparent so that they are transparent, while the special device winning opening door 2611C can be made colored and opaque so that it is not transparent, and the multiple movable one-side viewing sections 2658C can be provided on the back side (rear side) of the special device winning opening door 2611C, which is made colored and opaque. This makes it even easier to check the operation of the special device winning opening door 2613C using the multiple movable one-side viewing sections 2658C and multiple main body-side viewing sections 2659C during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1.

The second advancing/retreating device 2652C may also be configured with a locking mechanism that restricts the advancing movement of the prize winning entrance door 2611C that has transitioned to the retracted state, thereby enhancing the effectiveness of preventing fraudulent activity against the prize winning entrance door 2611C. In this configuration, when checking the operation of the prize winning entrance door 2611C during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, an operator releases the lock using the locking mechanism and then visually inspects the second advancing/retreating device 2652C removed from the game board 5 from the back. The operator then pulls out the prize winning entrance door 2611C to the left against the spring force of the prize winning entrance solenoid, thereby visually checking whether the prize winning entrance door 2611C can transition to the normal advanced state against the spring force of the prize winning entrance solenoid.

In addition, the multiple movable one-side viewing sections 2658C may be provided in any position on the back side (rear surface) of the reel prize entrance door 2611C, and the outer diameter of the movable one-side viewing sections 2658C may be provided in any size, and by using the multiple movable one-side viewing sections 2658C provided on the reel prize entrance door 2611C as a visual target, it is possible to easily check whether the reel prize entrance door 2611C is in the advanced state or whether the reel prize entrance door 2611C is in the retracted state. Furthermore, the multiple main body viewing sections 2659C may be located anywhere on the rear (back) side of the decorative surface 2651C of the decorative cover 2650C, and the main body viewing sections 2659C may have any outer diameter. Using the main body viewing sections 2659C located on the rear side of the decorative surface 2651C of the decorative cover 2650C as a visual target, it is possible to easily check whether the special prize opening door 2611C is in the advanced state or the retracted state. The positional relationship between the multiple movable one-side viewing sections 2658C and the multiple main body viewing sections 2659C in each state of the special prize opening door 2611C is described in detail below.

As shown in Figures 397(a) to 398(b), on the back side (rear face) of the reel prize opening door 2611C, multiple movable one-side viewing sections 2458C, each with an outer diameter smaller than the diameter of the game ball B at its tip and base ends, are arranged in a vertical direction above and below the retracted reel prize opening door 2611C, and on the back side (rear face) of the decorative surface 2651C of the decorative cover 2650C, multiple main body viewing sections 2459B, each with an outer diameter approximately equal to the diameter of the game ball B, are arranged in a vertical direction at positions that at least partially overlap the retracted reel prize opening door 2611C in a rear view. The outer diameters of the movable one-side viewing sections 2458C and the main body viewing sections 2459C in this example may be larger than the diameter of the game ball B from the perspective of ease of visibility, or may be smaller than the diameter of the game ball B from the perspective of ease of formation.

As shown in Figure 397(a), when the bonus prize opening door 2611C is in the retracted state, the virtual line 2657C passing through the centers of the multiple movable one-side viewing portions 2658C is inclined at a predetermined angle (parallel in this example) relative to the virtual line 2657C passing through the centers of the multiple main body-side viewing portions 2659C. Therefore, in this example, when checking the operation of the bonus prize opening door 2611C during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, the worker can visually inspect the second forward/backward movement device 2652C removed from the gaming board 5 from the rear side and confirm that the virtual line 2657C passing through the centers of the multiple movable one-side viewing portions 2658C is inclined at a predetermined angle (parallel in this example) relative to the virtual line 2657C passing through the centers of the multiple main body-side viewing portions 2659C. This allows the worker to easily visually confirm that the bonus prize opening door 2611C can transition to the normal retracted state due to the biasing force of the spring of the bonus prize opening solenoid.

As shown in Figure 397(b), when the bonus prize opening door 2611C is in an abnormal retracted state, the virtual line 2657C passing through the centers of the multiple movable one-side viewing portions 2658C is in a positional relationship in which its inclination is different from the preset angle (parallel in this example) relative to the virtual line 2657C passing through the centers of the multiple main body-side viewing portions 2659C. Therefore, in this example, when checking the operation of the bonus prize opening door 2611C during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, an operator can visually inspect the second forward/backward movement device 2652C removed from the gaming board 5 from the rear side and confirm that the virtual line 2657C passing through the centers of the multiple movable one-side viewing portions 2658C is inclined at a different angle (parallel in this example) relative to the virtual line 2657C passing through the centers of the multiple main body-side viewing portions 2659C. This allows the operator to visually confirm that the spring force of the bonus prize opening solenoid is preventing the bonus prize opening door 2611C from transitioning to a normal retracted state.

As shown in Figure 398 (a), when the special prize winning entrance door 2611C is in the advanced state, the imaginary line 2657C passing through the centers of the multiple movable one-side viewing portions 2658C is positioned so that it is inclined at a predetermined angle (in this example, a right angle) relative to the imaginary line 2657C passing through the centers of the multiple main body side viewing portions 2659C. For this reason, in this example, when checking the operation of the bonus prize opening door 2611C during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, an operator visually inspects the second advance/retract device 2652C removed from the game board 5 from the rear side and pulls the bonus prize opening door 2611C to the left against the spring force of the bonus prize opening solenoid. If the operator confirms that the imaginary line 2657C passing through the centers of the multiple movable one-side viewing sections 2658C is inclined at a predetermined angle (a right angle in this example) relative to the imaginary line 2657C passing through the centers of the multiple main body side viewing sections 2659C, the operator can visually confirm that the bonus prize opening door 2611C can transition to a normal advanced state against the spring force of the bonus prize opening solenoid.

As shown in Figure 398 (b), when the special prize winning door 2611C is in an abnormal advance state, the imaginary line 2657C passing through the centers of the multiple movable one-side viewing sections 2658C is in a positional relationship with the imaginary line 2657C passing through the centers of the multiple main body side viewing sections 2659C such that its inclination is different from a predetermined angle (in this example, a right angle). For this reason, in this example, when checking the operation of the prize opening door 2611C during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1, an operator visually inspects the second advance/retract device 2652C removed from the game board 5 from the rear side and pulls the prize opening door 2611C to the left against the spring force of the prize opening solenoid. If the operator confirms that the inclination of the imaginary line 2657C passing through the centers of the multiple movable one-side visual confirmation sections 2658C relative to the imaginary line 2657C passing through the centers of the multiple main body side visual confirmation sections 2659C is different from the preset angle (a right angle in this example), the operator can visually confirm that the prize opening door 2611C is having difficulty transitioning to a normal advanced state against the spring force of the prize opening solenoid.

As described above, on the rear back side (back surface) of the reel prize winning door 2611C, multiple movable one-side viewing sections 2658C with outer diameters smaller than the diameter of the game ball B at the tip and base ends are arranged in a line above and below the retracted reel prize winning door 2611C, and on the rear back side (back surface) of the decorative surface 2651C of the decorative cover 2650C, multiple main body side viewing sections 2659C with outer diameters approximately equal to the diameter of the game ball B are arranged in a line above and below the retracted reel prize winning door 2611C in a position that overlaps at least partially with the retracted reel prize winning door 2611C when viewed from the rear.In this configuration, an operator checking the operation of the reel prize winning door 2611C during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1 can use the multiple movable one-side viewing sections 2658C and the multiple main body side viewing sections 2659C as visual targets to easily and accurately visually determine whether the reel prize winning door 2611C can transition between the normal advanced state and the normal retracted state. This prevents malfunctions in the opening and closing operation of the bonus prize opening door 2611C and prevents disadvantages to players and the amusement hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, thereby further increasing the reliability of the pachinko machine 1 for players and the amusement hall. While this example describes the virtual line 2657C passing through the centers of the multiple movable one-side viewing portions 2658C and the virtual line 2657C passing through the centers of the multiple main body viewing portions 2659C, the virtual line 2657C may, for example, pass through the left and right ends of the multiple movable one-side viewing portions 2658C or the left and right ends of the multiple main body viewing portions 2659C. It is desirable to set the virtual line arbitrarily from the perspective of improving the work efficiency of the worker who visually checks the state of the bonus prize opening door 2611C.

In this embodiment, the movable one-side visual confirmation portion 2658C and the main body-side visual confirmation portion 2659C are represented by a "★" symbol, but they may have a different shape as long as they serve as a visual guide when checking the operation of the bonus prize entrance door 2611C. Specifically, the movable one-side visual confirmation portion 2658C and the main body-side visual confirmation portion 2659C may be represented by a "●" symbol, a "▲" symbol, a "■" symbol, a symbol of multiple wires extending left and right arranged at a predetermined interval in the front-to-back direction, or a letter such as "shi" or "U." If a "●" symbol is used, if a player were to see it, the circular symbol could remind them of game ball B, which could lead to some kind of misunderstanding (for example, a misunderstanding regarding the launch mode of the game ball). In light of this, when using the graphic notation "●", it is desirable to use a "●" with a maximum diameter (e.g., 1-5 mm) smaller than the diameter of game ball B (e.g., 11 mm), or to use a "●" with a portion missing (e.g., semicircular), in order to avoid reminding the player of game ball B as much as possible.

In addition, in this embodiment, we have described an aspect in which the operation of the role winning opening door 2611C is checked using multiple movable side viewing sections 2658C and multiple main body side viewing sections 2659C as visual targets during the manufacturing process of the pachinko machine 1. However, the operation of the role winning opening door 2611C may also be checked by visually checking the back side of the second forward/backward moving device 2652C (second attacker unit 2600C) removed from the game board 5, for example, in an amusement hall or the like where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

[Modification of test points on main control board]
Next, modified examples of the test points (also called test pins or check terminals) formed on the main control board 1310 will be described. The following modified examples can be implemented in combination with the other embodiments described above. For example, they can be implemented in combination with one or more of Improvement in Ease of Identifying Tampering 1 to Improvement in Ease of Identifying Tampering 3 and Prevention of Peeling of Surface-Mounted Electronic Components 1 to Prevention of Peeling of Surface-Mounted Electronic Components 4.

Figure 399 is an enlarged view showing the area surrounding the test point TP formed on the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310. As shown in Figure 399(A), the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310 in this example has circular test points TP as check terminals. As described above, in this example, of the test points TP formed on the main control board 1310, at least the ground (GND) line and power line have via-hole-shaped test points rather than land-shaped test points. Furthermore, the land outer shape (size) of the test points TP for the ground (GND) line and the test points TP for the power line may also be the same. By making the test points TP for the ground (GND) line and the test points TP for the power line the same shape, it becomes difficult to easily distinguish between test points for the ground (GND) line and test points for the power line, improving security. Furthermore, by using via-hole shaped test points TP, it is possible to insert part of the tip of a contact probe (also called a probe needle) into the through-hole 1310r when performing electrical testing, making it less likely for the tip of the contact probe to slip when it comes into contact with the via-hole shaped test point TP as a check terminal, preventing short circuits.

In addition, in this example, the via-hole shaped test points TP have the same hole diameter. This makes it more difficult to distinguish between a test point TP for a ground (GND) line and a test point TP for a power line, improving security. In addition, it also makes it possible to perform electrical testing using a common contact probe for test points TP formed on the ground (GND) line and power line of the main control board 1310, improving workability. Furthermore, when the via-hole shaped test points TP have the same hole diameter, a predetermined number of test points TP may be formed according to (proportional to) the magnitude of the current flowing through the circuit (ground (GND) line or power line). For example, multiple test points TP may be formed for a circuit through which a large current flows. This configuration ensures that when checking voltage, waveform, and logic during electrical testing of the main control board 1310, the same stable measurement results can be obtained regardless of which test point TP is used as the reference test point, especially for the ground.

In addition, some or all of the test points TP formed on at least one of the ground (GND) line and power line of the main control board 1310 are positioned closer to the connector that supplies power to the main control board 1310 than the test points TP formed on the control signal lines. This configuration makes it possible to measure and test with the impedance of the ground (GND) line and power line reduced as much as possible when checking voltages, waveforms, and logic during electrical testing of the main control board 1310, enabling stable measurements and testing.

Furthermore, in this example, the test points TP formed on the ground (GND) line of the main control board 1310 and the test points TP formed on the power supply line are not positioned near the test points TP formed on the control signal lines. This prevents the ground (GND) line or power supply line from accidentally shorting out with the control signal line when, for example, manually performing an electrical test on the main control board 1310, and prevents electronic components mounted on the main control board 1310 from failing due to a short between the ground (GND) line or power supply line and the control signal line.

Also, for control signal lines, via-hole shaped test points TP may be formed, similar to the ground (GND) and power supply lines, or land shaped test points TP may be formed. If via-hole shaped test points TP are formed on control signal lines, the hole diameter may be the same as the via-hole shaped test points TP formed on the ground (GND) and power supply lines. This makes it difficult to distinguish whether a test point TP is for the ground (GND) line, the power supply line, or the control signal line, improving security.

Furthermore, for via-hole shaped test points TP, the external shape (size) of the land for the via-hole shaped test points TP formed on the ground (GND) line and power supply line may also be the same for the control signal line. In this case, too, it becomes difficult to distinguish whether the test point TP is for the ground (GND) line, the power supply line, or the control signal line, improving security.

[Configuration to eliminate poor contact at test points]
In this example, at least the land of the test point TP, which is formed in the form of a via hole on the ground (GND) line, is formed as a thermal land 1310s' having a thermal pattern 1310v (a pattern having a cross shape (which may have a part missing) or an x shape (which may have a part missing)) that electrically and physically connects the solid pattern (also called solid ground) and the land of the test point TP.

As described above, thermal land 1310s' is provided on a solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) and is composed of an insulating portion 1310w where the surrounding copper foil has been removed, and a thermal pattern 1310v where the surrounding copper foil remains. Insulating portion 1310w is formed by removing part of the copper foil around the land, and this insulating portion 1310w causes thermal pattern 1310v to be formed into a cross or x shape. Thermal pattern 1310v has a smaller contact area with the solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) than a normal land due to thermal pattern 1310v. In this way, the thermal land 1310s' has a smaller contact area with the solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) than a normal land, so heat is less likely to be transferred to the solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) than with a normal land, which suppresses temperature drops (suppresses heat dissipation) when soldering electronic components, and ensures that the solder applied to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 via the through hole 1310r can be reliably sucked up to the mounting surface 1310x side of the main control board 1310.

In conventional electrical testing, electrical testing is performed by inserting a portion of the tip of a contact probe into the through-hole 1310r of a via-hole-shaped test point TP, with the outer periphery of the contact probe's tip contacting the inner corner of the through-hole 1310r of the via-hole-shaped test point TP. However, if the land of the via-hole-shaped test point TP is formed as a regular land without a thermal pattern 1310v, heat is dissipated from the regular land to a solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)), which tends to cause a drop in land temperature when electronic components are soldered. This makes it difficult to wick solder applied to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 through the through-hole 1310r to the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310. Therefore, if the land of the via-hole-shaped test point TP is formed as a normal land without the thermal pattern 1310v, the inner corner of the through hole 1310r of the test point TP is not covered with solder, exposing the wiring portion formed by the copper plating on the inner periphery of the through hole 1310r. In this case, when the tip of a contact probe is partially inserted into the through hole 1310r of the test point TP during an electrical test, the tip of the contact probe may come into contact with the inner corner of the through hole 1310r of the via-hole-shaped test point TP, potentially damaging the wiring portion at the inner corner of the through hole 1310r. Furthermore, damage to the wiring portion at the inner corner of the through hole 1310r of the via-hole-shaped test point TP causes poor contact between the contact probe and the test point TP during an electrical test, making it difficult to measure accurate values. In particular, because the ground (GND) line is the reference for various potentials, if the wiring portion of the test point TP formed on the ground (GND) line is damaged and contact resistance occurs, there is a problem in that accurate measurement values cannot be obtained using the contact probe.

In this example, on the main control board 1310, at least the lands of the via-hole-shaped test points TP formed on the ground (GND) line are formed as thermal lands 1310s' having thermal patterns 1310v that electrically and physically connect the solid pattern (also called solid ground) and the lands of the test points TP, and insulating portions 1310w where the copper foil has been removed. This prevents the temperature of the thermal lands 1310s' from dropping when electronic components are soldered, and the solder applied to the solder surface (back surface) of the main control board 1310 can be reliably sucked up by the through holes 1310r to the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310. This means that the copper-plated wiring at the inner corners of the through holes 1310r can be covered and protected by the sucked-up solder, preventing damage to the wiring at the inner corners of the through holes 1310r of the via-hole-shaped test points TP due to contact with the tip of a contact probe, for example.

In addition, solder is less hard and more viscous than the copper foil that makes up the wiring. Therefore, when the contact probe is brought into contact with it, it deforms to fit the shape of the tip of the contact probe, making it easier for the tip of the contact probe to come into contact with the solder. Furthermore, since the surface of the copper foil on the land is covered with solder, it is protected and oxidation is suppressed, which reduces contact failure with the contact probe and makes it possible to obtain accurate measurement values.

Conventionally, thermal land 1310s', which has thermal pattern 1310v (a pattern having a cross shape (which may have a portion missing) or an x shape (which may have a portion missing)) that electrically and physically connects a solid pattern (also called a solid ground) and a land, and insulating portion 1310w, is formed as a land for through-hole 1310r used to mount electronic components, and is used to reliably suck up solder on the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of main control board 1310 to the mounting surface 1310x side of main control board 1310, and insert lead wires into through-hole 1310r to ensure good electrical connection between the electronic component soldered to mounting surface 1310x and the wiring section of main control board 1310.

In this example, among the test points TP formed on the main control board 1310, at least the test points TP formed on the ground (GND) line and power line are not land-shaped (also called pad-shaped) without through-holes 1310r, but rather via-hole-shaped with through-holes 1310r and not used for mounting electronic components. These test points TP are configured with thermal patterns 1310v and insulating portions 1310w, which ensure that solder applied to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is reliably drawn up to the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310. This also protects the copper-plated wiring within the through-holes 1310r of the via-hole-shaped test points TP by coating them with solder. This prevents damage to the wiring at the inner corners of the through-holes 1310r and reduces poor contact between the contact probes and the test points TP, enabling accurate measurement values to be obtained. Furthermore, because the test point TP of this example, which includes thermal pattern 1310v and insulating portion 1310w, is not used for mounting electronic components, it has a smaller size (surface area) than a land configured with a thermal pattern and insulating portion as a land for through-hole 1310r used for mounting conventional electronic components. The smaller the surface area of a land, the easier it is to heat up but also the easier it is to cool down. Therefore, by configuring test point TP, which has a smaller surface area than the land for through-hole 1310r used for mounting electronic components, with thermal pattern 1310v and insulating portion 1310w, the temperature drop is more effectively suppressed, and the copper-plated wiring portion within through-hole 1310r of via-hole-shaped test point TP can be protected by being covered with solder.

In addition, in this example, TP frames surrounding the test points TP and TP marks indicating the test points TP are silk-screened in white paint on a solid green resist on the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310. This makes it easier to identify the positions of the test points TP when inspecting the main control board 1310 during manufacturing, improving workability. Note that the test points TP are not used to inspect the main control board 1310 after the main control board 1310 is attached to the pachinko machine 1. In other words, the TP frames surrounding the test points TP and the TP marks indicating the test points TP silk-screened on the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310 are information necessary only when inspecting the board during manufacturing of the main control board 1310, and are unnecessary information because the board is not inspected after it is attached to the pachinko machine 1.

Therefore, in this example, when the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320, at least a portion of the information related to the test points TP silk-screened on the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310 (part of the TP frame surrounding the test point TP silk-screened on the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310, or part of the TP mark indicating the test point TP) is made difficult to see. Specifically, when the TP frame or TP mark is viewed from the front, the portion of the main control board box 1320 that overlaps with at least a portion of it (part of the TP frame or part of the TP mark) is affixed with a sticker (such as a sealing sticker), engraved with the manufacturing date or the company's logo, or left with a pin mark made by a push pin (ejector pin) used when removing the product from the mold during injection molding. This makes it possible to easily determine the location of the test points TP when the main control board 1310 is manufactured (before the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320), and makes it difficult to determine the location of the test points TP when the main control board 1310 is attached to the pachinko machine 1 (when the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320), improving security.

In the above example, in addition to forming the via-hole shaped land of the test point TP formed in the solid pattern as thermal land 1310s' having thermal pattern 1310v, multiple via holes are formed around the test point TP. By forming multiple via holes around the test point TP in the solid pattern, it is possible to increase the amount of heat transferred from the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 to the solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) formed on the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310 when soldering electronic components, and to suppress temperature drops in the solid pattern. This heats the solid pattern around the thermal land 1310s' of the via-hole shaped test point TP, further suppressing heat dissipation from the thermal land 1310s' of the test point TP to the solid pattern, making it easier for the solder attached to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 to penetrate into the through-hole 1310r of the via-hole shaped test point TP.

In addition to forming multiple via holes around the test point TP, a predetermined number of the multiple via holes formed around the test point TP may be formed as via holes with thermal land 1310s', or a predetermined number (which may be one, two or more) of via holes with thermal land 1310s' may be formed around the test point TP. As described above, thermal land 1310s' is electrically and physically connected to the solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) via thermal pattern 1310v. This makes it difficult for heat to be transferred from thermal land 1310s' to the solid pattern. When soldering electronic components, heat transferred from the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 remains within thermal land 1310s', raising the temperature. Heat is then gradually transferred from the multiple thermal lands 1310s' to the solid pattern, raising the temperature of the solid pattern around the thermal lands 1310s' of the hole-shaped test points TP. This further suppresses heat dissipation from the thermal lands 1310s' of the test points TP to the solid pattern, making it easier for the solder attached to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 to enter the through holes 1310r of the via-hole-shaped test points TP.

In addition, in the above example, the land of the via-hole-shaped test point TP is formed as a thermal land 1310s' having a thermal pattern 1310v, thereby suppressing temperature drop when soldering electronic components and enabling the solder applied to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 by the through-hole 1310r to be reliably sucked up to the mounting surface 1310x side of the main control board 1310, and the wiring portion formed by copper plating within the through-hole 1310r of the via-hole-shaped test point TP is covered and protected with solder.However, the test point TP may be formed as a land shape without a through-hole 1310r or as a via-hole shape with a through-hole 1310r but without a thermal land 1310s', and multiple through-holes 1310r may be formed around the test point TP to densely pack multiple through-holes 1310r around the test point TP. In this case, compared to when the test points TP are formed in an area where the through holes 1310r are not densely packed, it is possible to increase the amount of heat transferred to the solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) in the area of the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310 where the through holes 1310r are densely packed, thereby suppressing the temperature drop in the area of the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310 where the test points TP are formed, and protecting the wiring portion formed by copper plating in the through holes 1310r of the via hole-shaped test points TP by covering it with solder. In this case, test points that are provided on signal lines or the like where it is difficult to create a thermal land can be formed in an area of the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310 where multiple through holes are densely located, making it easier to suck up the solder attached to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 to the mounting surface 1310x side of the main control board 1310, and the copper-plated wiring portion in the through hole 1310r of the via hole-shaped test point TP can be covered with solder for protection.

The above-mentioned effects can also be achieved by forming test points TP formed on the ground (GND) line as pads (lands) without through-holes 1310r, configuring them so that no electronic components are mounted, and forming them as thermal pads with a thermal pattern that electrically and physically connects the solid pattern (also called a solid ground) and the test point TP pad, and an insulating section where the copper foil has been removed. This means that the temperature drop of the thermal pad when soldering electronic components can be suppressed. Therefore, if solder paste is applied to the thermal pad when mounting electronic components, specifically when heating the board in a reflow oven, the solder paste can be reliably melted, covering and protecting the thermal pad. This not only prevents damage to the tip of the contact probe due to contact with the thermal pad, but also, because the surface of the copper foil on the thermal pad is covered with solder, it deforms to match the shape of the tip of the contact probe when the contact probe is brought into contact with it, making it easier for the tip of the contact probe to come into contact with the solder. Furthermore, because the copper foil on the thermal pad is protected and oxidation is suppressed, poor contact with the contact probe is suppressed, making it possible to obtain accurate measurement values.

In addition, while the above example shows the test points TP formed in a circular shape, they may also be formed in a rectangular shape. Forming the test points TP in a circular shape allows them to be hidden in through holes for signal wiring, improving security. Furthermore, when test points TP are formed in a rectangular shape, the corners dissipate heat more easily than the sides, making it easier for the temperature to drop in the land and pad portions of the test points TP or for uneven temperatures to occur, resulting in the risk of incomplete solder welding. In contrast, when test points TP are formed in a circular shape, heat dissipation occurs evenly, making it less likely for uneven temperatures to occur in the land and pad portions of the test points TP, ensuring reliable solder welding and preventing poor contact.

[Configuration 1: Strengthening the rigidity of the substrate by using thermal lands]
Next, we will explain a method for strengthening the rigidity of a board (e.g., main control board 1310, peripheral control board 1510, dispensing control board 633, power supply board 630, decorative board with LEDs and drivers, etc.) that has multiple electronic components, particularly surface-mounted electronic components, mounted thereon and that has a solid pattern (solid ground). Note that the following description will not cover overlapping portions with the above-described embodiments. The following modifications can be implemented in combination with the other embodiments described above. For example, they can be implemented in combination with one or more of Improvements in Ease of Identifying Fraud 1 to Improvements in Ease of Identifying Fraud 3 and Prevention of Peeling of Surface-Mounted Electronic Components 1 to Prevention of Peeling of Surface-Mounted Electronic Components 4.

In the configuration for eliminating contact failures at the above test points, rather than a land-shaped (also called a pad-shaped) test point without a through-hole 1310r, the test point TP is formed as a via-hole with a through-hole 1310r that is not used for mounting components, and the land is formed as a thermal land 1310s' with a thermal pattern 1310v. However, this configuration may also be used to strengthen the rigidity of the board.

In other words, by forming the land of the test point TP as a thermal land 1310s' having a thermal pattern 1310v, it becomes easier for the solder attached to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 to enter the through hole 1310r than when it is formed as a normal land 1310s without the thermal pattern 1310v, and the solder can be reliably sucked up to the mounting surface 1310x side of the main control board 1310 and filled into the via hole-shaped through hole 1310r of the test point TP, thereby strengthening the rigidity of the main control board 1310.

As described above, conventionally, thermal lands 1310s' have thermal patterns 1310v (patterns having a cross shape (which may have a portion missing) or an x shape (which may have a portion missing)) that electrically and physically connect a solid pattern (also called a solid ground) and a land. By forming these as lands for through holes 1310r used for mounting electronic components, the solder applied to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is reliably sucked up to the mounting surface 1310x side of the main control board 1310, and lead wires are inserted into the through holes 1310r to solder electronic components to the mounting surface 1310x, and the wiring of the main control board 1310 is reliably connected. This improves the electrical connection with the wires, and in this example, of the test points TP formed on the main control board 1310, at least the test points TP formed on the ground (GND) line and power line are not land-shaped and do not have through-holes 1310r, but rather have via-hole shapes that have through-holes 1310r and are not used for mounting components. This ensures that the solder applied to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is reliably sucked up to the mounting surface 1310x side of the main control board 1310, filling the through-holes 1310r of the via-hole-shaped test points TP. This increases the rigidity of the main control board 1310.

As mentioned above, the main control board 1310, peripheral control board 1510, payout control board 633, power supply board 630, and light-emitting boards on which light emitters such as LEDs are mounted are equipped with a large number of surface-mounted electronic components. Surface-mounted electronic components are fixed to the board by soldering connection terminals to pads formed on the board surface. Therefore, they are more vulnerable to deformation such as lateral impacts and board warping than lead-type (insertion-mounted, through-hole-mounted) electronic components, which are fixed to the board by inserting lead terminals into through-holes and soldering these lead terminals to the through-holes or lands. If surface-mounted electronic components are subjected to a lateral impact or if force is applied to the board causing it to warp, they may peel off from the board surface (detached mounting), potentially causing problems with game control.

In this example, in consideration of the above circumstances, measures have been taken to prevent surface-mounted electronic components from peeling off (detachment). Below, we will explain the configuration for strengthening the rigidity of the board by using test points TP formed on the main control board 1310. Note that this technical concept is not limited to the main control board 1310, and can be applied to any board that mounts at least surface-mounted electronic components.

Figure 399(A) is an enlarged view showing the area surrounding the test point TP formed on the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310, Figure 399(B) is an enlarged view of the test point TP having a thermal land 1310s' formed on the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310, Figure 399(C) is an enlarged view of the through hole 1310r having a normal land 1310s formed on the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310, and Figure 399(D) is an enlarged view showing the state in which the thermal land 1310s' of the test point TP formed on the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310 is covered with solder.

As shown in Figures 399(A) and 399(B), in the main control board 1310 of this example, the via-hole shaped test point TP land formed in the ground (GND) line of the mounting surface 1310x is formed as thermal land 1310s' having an insulating portion 1310w where the surrounding copper foil has been removed, and a thermal pattern 1310v (a pattern having a cross shape (which may have a portion missing) or an x shape (which may have a portion missing)) where the surrounding copper foil remains and which electrically and physically connects the solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) and the test point TP land using this copper foil.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 399 (C), the normal lands 1310s formed on the solid pattern remain without removing the surrounding copper foil, and are formed integrally with the solid pattern. In other words, the normal lands 1310s formed on the solid pattern are formed integrally with the solid pattern, and are defined by not covering the circular area including the through-holes 1310r formed in the solid pattern with solder resist (the area excluding the lands 1310s of the solid pattern is covered with solder resist). Furthermore, because the solid pattern is provided over a wide area on the main control board 1310, it is difficult to heat up. As a result, heat is transferred from the normal lands 1310s formed on the solid pattern to the solid pattern, making it easy for the temperature of the lands 1310s to drop, and therefore it is difficult for the through-holes 1310r to absorb the solder applied to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310.

In contrast, as shown in Figure 399(B), thermal land 1310s' has an insulating portion 1310w where the copper foil around the land has been removed, and is electrically and physically connected to the solid pattern by thermal pattern 1310v where the copper foil remains. As a result, thermal land 1310s' makes it difficult for heat to be transferred to the solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)), suppressing temperature drops when soldering electronic components (suppressing heat dissipation).

This makes it difficult for heat to be transferred from the thermal land 1310s' of the via-hole-shaped test point TP to the solid ground, and suppresses the temperature drop of the thermal land 1310s' compared to a normal land 1310s that does not have a thermal pattern 1310v. This makes it easier for the solder attached to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 to penetrate into the through-hole 1310r of the via-hole-shaped test point TP. This not only makes it possible to fill the through-hole 1310r with solder as shown in Figure 399(D), but also makes it possible to cover the thermal land 1310s' and thermal pattern 1310v on the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310 with solder. Note that in Figure 399(D), hatching corresponding to the areas covered with solder resist is not shown to make it easier to see the solder coverage.

Filling solder into the through-holes 1310r of the via-hole shaped test points TP increases the rigidity of the main control board 1310, preventing warping and bending. Also, by covering the thermal lands 1310s' and thermal pattern 1310v on the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310 with solder overflowing from the through-holes 1310r, the solder is firmly welded to the through-holes 1310r, thermal lands 1310s', and thermal pattern 1310v. This prevents surface-mounted electronic components mounted on the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310 from peeling off (detachment).

Also, as shown in Figures 399(A) and 399(B), in this example, TP frames surrounding test points TP and TP marks indicating test points TP are silk-screened in white paint on a solid green resist on the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310. In addition to the TP frames and TP marks, the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310 also has notations indicating the attributes of the electronic components, such as the part number of the electronic component to be mounted and the area indicating the position where the electronic component is to be placed (which may also include the shape, size, mounting orientation (mounting direction), and model of the electronic component), silk-screened in white paint on the solid green resist.

In the notation, the part number is composed of a combination of a symbol corresponding to the type of electronic component installed (for example, a symbol C representing a capacitor or a symbol R representing a resistor) and a consecutive number (for example, a number assigned consecutively from the lowest numbers between 1 and 20). On the other hand, the TP mark indicating the test point TP in this example is composed of a combination of a symbol corresponding to the test point (T in this example) and a predetermined number (100 in this example), as shown in FIG. 399(B). It is not consecutive with the numbers that make up the part number in the notation, and uses a number that is separate from the numbers that make up the part number in the notation (for example, if the numbers that make up the part number in the notation are assigned consecutively from the lowest numbers between 1 and 30, the number that makes up the TP mark indicating the test point TP may be a number one digit larger or a round number such as 100, or the number that makes up the TP mark may be a single-digit number such as 1, and the number that makes up the part number in the notation may be a number of two or more digits that are assigned consecutively from the lowest numbers).

In addition, the area indicating the position where the electronic component is to be placed is formed in a rectangular shape in the notation section. On the other hand, the TP frame surrounding the test point TP in this example is formed in a circular shape.

This makes it possible to silk-screen the TP frame and TP mark on the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310 in a special format (special symbols) that differs from the marking area, making it easier to find the TP frame and TP mark on the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310 and identify the test point TP, improving workability during inspection.

In this example, the TP mark of the test point TP is composed of a combination of a symbol corresponding to the test point and a predetermined number, but it may also be composed of only the symbol corresponding to the test point (for example, T) without including the predetermined number. In this case, the TP mark can also be composed of a special form (special symbol) that differs from the part number in the notation, making it easier to find the TP mark on the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310 and identify the test point TP, improving workability during inspection.

In addition, in this example, the via-hole shaped test point TP lands formed on the ground (GND) line of the mounting surface 1310x on the main control board 1310 are formed as thermal lands 1310s' having thermal patterns 1310v (patterns having a cross shape (which may have a portion missing) or an x shape (which may have a portion missing)) that electrically and physically connect the solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) and the test point TP lands. In addition, as shown in Figure 399 (A), through-hole lands not used for mounting electronic components are formed as thermal lands 1310s' having thermal patterns 1310v.

In this way, in this example, a certain number of through holes not used for mounting electronic components, including via-hole shaped test points TP, are formed to include thermal lands 1310s' having thermal patterns 1310v, thereby increasing the rigidity of multiple parts of the main control board 1310 and suppressing warping and bending, thereby suppressing peeling (separation) of surface-mounted electronic components mounted on the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310.

It is also possible to provide multiple via-hole shaped test points TP, with the through-holes of the multiple test points TP being formed to include thermal lands 1310s' with thermal pattern 1310v, or to provide only one via-hole shaped test point TP, with a thermal land 1310s' with thermal pattern 1310v separate from the test point TP, and a predetermined number of through-holes not used for mounting electronic components. In this case as well, the rigidity of multiple parts of the main control board 1310 can be increased to suppress warping and bending, thereby suppressing peeling (mount peeling) of surface-mounted electronic components mounted on the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310.

It may also be possible to have at least one via-hole shaped test point TP equipped with a thermal land 1310s' having a thermal pattern 1310v. In this case, by forming this test point TP in an area of low rigidity on the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310, such as an area where no electronic components are mounted, or in a specific area where rigidity needs to be increased, such as an area where specific electronic components are mounted, rigidity can be increased and warping or bending in the specific area can be suppressed.

In addition, in the above example, the via-hole shaped test point TP was configured to have a thermal land 1310s' with a thermal pattern 1310v, but the above-mentioned effects can be achieved not only for test points TP, but also for through holes that are not used to mount electronic components, as long as they have a thermal land 1310s' with a thermal pattern 1310v.

[Configuration 2: Strengthening the rigidity of the board by using thermal lands]
In the above-mentioned configuration 1 for strengthening the rigidity of the board using thermal lands, a predetermined number of through holes (for example, through holes 1310r of test points TP) that are not used for mounting electronic components are configured to have thermal lands 1310s' having thermal patterns 1310v, thereby increasing the rigidity of specific parts of the main control board 1310 and suppressing warping and bending.In addition to the above, through holes used for mounting electronic components may also be configured to have thermal lands 1310s' having thermal patterns 1310v, thereby increasing the rigidity of specific parts of the main control board 1310 and suppressing warping and bending.

For example, by combining a configuration similar to configuration 1, which uses thermal lands to strengthen the rigidity of the board, with prevention of peeling of surface-mounted electronic components 1, the rigidity of specific parts of the main control board 1310 can be increased to suppress warping and bending. This is explained below with reference to Figure 400.

Figure 400 is an enlarged view showing a partial area of the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310. Note that the following description will not cover portions that overlap with the above-described embodiments. The following modified example can be implemented in combination with the other embodiments described above. For example, it can be implemented in combination with one or more of Improvement in Ease of Identifying Tampering 1 to Improvement in Ease of Identifying Tampering 3 and Prevention of Peeling of Surface-Mounted Electronic Components 1 to Prevention of Peeling of Surface-Mounted Electronic Components 4.

As shown in Figure 400, in this example, chip component IC1, which is a surface-mount type electronic component mounted on the main control board 1310, has its connection terminal IC1a soldered to pad 1310k formed on the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310, and is adjacent to chip component IC1, which is a surface-mount type electronic component, (avoiding electronic component mounting no-go area A) where electronic components cannot be mounted (see Figure 364 (A)) and is arranged adjacent to chip component IC1 (without other electronic components sandwiched between them). (Through holes and lands 1310r, vias, test points, etc. other than electronic components may be provided.) A lead terminal MC1a (in this example, the lead terminal MC1a is formed to have two or more bent portions) is inserted into the through hole 1310r, and this lead terminal MC1a is soldered to the through hole 1310r or land 1310s, thereby providing a lead-type (insertion mounting type) capacitor MC1 that is fixed to the board.

As described above, the lead terminal MC1a is made of iron, copper, or an alloy thereof (such as a CP wire made by further plating copper-plated iron wire with tin, or a tin-plated Cu wire), and has a predetermined bending strength. In addition, by using lead terminal MC1a formed to have two or more bends, the strength is higher than that of lead terminals that have no bends or are formed to have only one bend.

By inserting the lead terminal MC1a of the lead-type (insertion mounting type) capacitor MC1 configured in this manner into the through-hole 1310r and soldering this lead terminal MC1a to the through-hole 1310r or land 1310s, and fixing it to the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310 (insertion mounting), the rigidity of the main control board 1310 can be increased and deformation such as warping can be suppressed. Furthermore, because iron has a higher bending strength than copper, it is desirable to use a capacitor MC1 with a lead terminal MC1a (CP wire) made of iron or an iron alloy.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, in order to ensure stable operation of the electronic circuits made up of various electronic components, the main control board 1310 forms grounds other than the wiring patterns for power supplies and signals in the form of so-called solid patterns (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) on both sides of the board. When mounting the lead-type capacitor MC1 on the main control board 1310, the ground-side land uses thermal land 1310s', which has an insulating portion 1310w where the surrounding copper foil has been removed, and a thermal pattern 1310v where the surrounding copper foil remains and which is electrically and physically connected to the solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) by this copper foil.

This prevents temperature drops when mounting electronic components, and allows the lead terminal MC1a of the lead-type (insertion-mounted) capacitor MC1 to be more firmly welded to the through-hole 1310r and thermal land 1310s' than to lands 1310s that do not have a normal thermal pattern. This increases the rigidity of the main control board 1310 and prevents surface-mounted electronic components from peeling off (detaching from mounting), improving the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.

In the above example, a lead-type (insertion-mount type) capacitor MC1 is placed adjacent to a chip component IC1, which is a surface-mount type electronic component, across an electronic component unmountable area A where electronic components cannot be mounted. However, as long as the through-hole 1310r used to mount the electronic component is configured to have a thermal land 1310s' with a thermal pattern 1310v, the lead-type (insertion-mount type) capacitor MC1 is not limited to being placed adjacent to a surface-mount type electronic component. In other words, the lead-type (insertion-mount type) capacitor MC1 may be placed at a certain distance or more from the surface-mount type electronic component.

Also, as shown in Figure 400, the land of the test point TP in the form of a via hole formed on the ground (GND) line of the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310 is formed as a thermal land 1310s' having an insulating portion 1310w where the surrounding copper foil has been removed, and a thermal pattern 1310v (a pattern having a cross shape (which may have a portion missing) or an x shape (which may have a portion missing)) where the surrounding copper foil remains and which is electrically and physically connected to the solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) by this copper foil.

Furthermore, on the main control board 1310, the lands for the via-hole shaped test points TP formed on the ground (GND) line of the mounting surface 1310x are formed as thermal lands 1310s' having thermal patterns 1310v, making it easier for the solder attached to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 to enter the through holes 1310r of the via-hole shaped test points TP, making it possible to fill the through holes 1310r with solder. By filling the through holes 1310r of the via-hole shaped test points TP with solder, the rigidity of the main control board 1310 can be increased, and warping and bending can be suppressed.

In this way, at least one (the ground-side land) of the through-holes 1310r into which the lead terminals of lead-type (insertion-mount type) electronic components are inserted and soldered is configured to include a thermal land 1310s' (the thermal land 1310s' used to mount the electronic component), and the land of the through-hole not used to mount the electronic component (in this example, the land of the via-hole-shaped test point TP) is formed as a thermal land 1310s' (the thermal land 1310s' of the through-hole 1310r not used to mount the electronic component). This further increases the rigidity of the main control board 1310, preventing warping and bending. This prevents surface-mount electronic components from peeling off (detachment), improving the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, in this example, the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310 has dense regions where electronic components are densely arranged, and sparse regions where electronic components are sparsely arranged or where there are almost no electronic components. The thermal lands 1310s' used to mount electronic components are formed in the dense regions, and the thermal lands 1310s' of the through holes 1310r not used to mount electronic components are formed in the sparse regions. By configuring the main control board 1310 in this manner, the rigidity of the dense and sparse regions can be increased on the main control board 1310, thereby uniforming the rigidity of the entire main control board 1310 and specific regions near where the thermal lands 1310s' are formed. This prevents surface-mounted electronic components from peeling off (detachment), improving the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.

[Configuration 3: Strengthening the rigidity of the substrate by using thermal lands]
In the configuration 2 for strengthening the rigidity of the board by the thermal land, at least one (land on the ground side) of the through holes 1310r into which the lead terminals of the lead type (insertion mounting type) electronic components are inserted and soldered is configured to have a thermal land 1310s' (thermal land 1310s' used for mounting the electronic component), and the land of the through hole not used for mounting the electronic component (in this example, the land of the test point TP in the form of a via hole) is configured to have a thermal land 1310s' (thermal land 1310s' used for mounting the electronic component). In the above description, the thermal land 1310s' is formed as a thermal pad to increase the rigidity of the entire main control board 1310 and specific areas near where the thermal land 1310s' is formed, thereby suppressing warping and bending of the entire main control board 1310 and specific areas. However, this is not limited to thermal lands 1310s' used for mounting lead-type (insertion-mount type) electronic components, and it is also possible to increase the rigidity of specific areas of the main control board 1310 and suppress warping and bending even when a thermal pad having a thermal pattern is provided for pads used for mounting surface-mount type electronic components. This will be described below with reference to FIG. 401.

Figure 401 is an enlarged view showing a partial area of the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. Note that the following description will not cover parts that overlap with the above-described embodiments. The following modifications can be implemented in combination with the other embodiments described above. For example, they can be implemented in combination with one or more of Improvement in Ease of Identifying Tampering 1 to Improvement in Ease of Identifying Tampering 3 and Prevention of Peeling of Surface-Mounted Electronic Components 1 to Prevention of Peeling of Surface-Mounted Electronic Components 4.

As shown in FIG. 401, in this example, chip component IC1, a surface-mount type electronic component mounted on peripheral control board 1510, has its connection terminal IC1a soldered to pad 1510k formed on surface (mounting surface) 1510x of peripheral control board 1510. Adjacent to chip component IC1, a surface-mount type electronic component, is a surface-mount type capacitor MC1', which is fixed to the board by soldering its two electrodes MC1a' to two pads 1510k, 1510k' formed on surface (mounting surface) 1510x of peripheral control board 1510, with an electronic component unmountable area A, where no electronic components can be mounted, sandwiched between them (avoiding electronic component unmountable area A). (These capacitors may be arranged adjacent to each other without sandwiching other electronic components; through-holes, lands, vias, test points, etc. other than electronic components may be provided.)

Furthermore, in order to ensure stable operation of the electronic circuits made up of various electronic components, the peripheral control board 1510 forms grounds other than the wiring patterns for power supplies and signals as so-called solid patterns (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) on both sides of the board. When mounting the surface-mount type capacitor MC1' on the peripheral control board 1510, the ground-side pad uses thermal pad 1510k', which has an insulating portion 1510i where the surrounding copper foil has been removed, and a thermal pattern 1510v where the surrounding copper foil remains and which is electrically and physically connected to the solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) by this copper foil.

Surface-mount type electronic components are mounted by applying solder paste to the pads formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, placing the electronic component on top of it, and heating it in a reflow furnace to melt the solder paste and weld the electronic component to the pad.

Furthermore, the normal pads 1510k formed on the solid pattern remain without the surrounding copper foil being removed, and are formed integrally with the solid pattern. In other words, the normal pads 1510k formed on the solid pattern are formed integrally with the solid pattern, and are defined by not covering a circular area including a specific area of the solid pattern with solder resist (areas other than the pads 1510k of the solid pattern are covered with solder resist). Furthermore, because the solid pattern is provided over a wide area on the peripheral control board 1510, it is difficult to heat up, and as a result, the normal pads 1510k formed on the solid pattern are also difficult to heat up and their temperature does not rise easily, which may make it difficult for the solder paste applied to the normal pads 1510k on the peripheral control board 1510 to melt.

In contrast, thermal pad 1510k' has an insulating portion 1510i where the copper foil around the pad has been removed, and is electrically and physically connected to the solid pattern by thermal pattern 1510v where the copper foil remains. Furthermore, thermal pad 1510k' is provided over a much smaller area than the solid pattern. Therefore, when heated in a reflow oven, the temperature of thermal pad 1510k' is more likely to rise. Furthermore, heat is less likely to be transferred from thermal pad 1510k' to the solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)), which suppresses temperature drops when soldering electronic components (suppressing heat dissipation). Furthermore, when mounting electronic components, solder paste may be applied in advance to thermal pad 1510k' where no electronic components are mounted. In this case, the solder paste applied to thermal pad 1510k' on peripheral control board 1510 is more likely to melt when heated in a reflow oven.

This makes it easier for the temperature of the thermal pad 1510k' to rise compared to a normal pad 1510k that does not have the insulating portion 1510i and thermal pattern 1510v, making it easier for the solder paste applied to the thermal pad 1510k' on the peripheral control board 1510 to melt, allowing surface-mounted electronic components to be welded with the solder paste applied to the thermal pad 1510k' completely melted.

Since the electrode MC1a' of the surface-mounted capacitor MC1' is welded to the thermal pad 1510k' more firmly than a normal pad 1510k that does not have a thermal pattern, the rigidity of the peripheral control board 1510 is increased, preventing surface-mounted electronic components from peeling off (detachment), thereby improving the reliability of the pachinko machine 1. The main control board 1310 may also be provided with thermal pads on which no electronic components are mounted. In this case, when mounting electronic components on the main control board 1310, solder paste may not be applied to the thermal pads on which no electronic components are mounted, and when mounting electronic components on the peripheral control board 1510, solder paste may be applied in advance to the thermal pads 1510k′ on which no electronic components are mounted, thereby covering and protecting the copper foil of the thermal pads 1510k′ with solder. Alternatively, when mounting electronic components on the main control board 1310, solder paste may be applied in advance to the thermal pads on which no electronic components are mounted, thereby covering and protecting the copper foil of the thermal pads with solder. Alternatively, when mounting electronic components on the peripheral control board 1510, solder paste may not be applied to the thermal pads 1510k′ on which no electronic components are mounted. Thermal pads configured in this manner may also be used as test points TP. That is, one of the test points TP that are covered and protected with solder and the test points that are not covered with solder may be provided on the main control board 1310, and the other on the peripheral control board 1510, or both may be provided on the main control board 1310 and one on the peripheral control board 1510, or one may be provided on the main control board 1310 and both on the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition, in the above example, surface-mount capacitor MC1' is placed adjacent to chip component IC1, which is a surface-mount electronic component, across an electronic component non-mountable area A where electronic components cannot be mounted. However, as long as the pads used to mount the electronic components are configured to include thermal pads 1510k' having thermal patterns 1510v, the surface-mount capacitor MC1' is not limited to being placed adjacent to the surface-mount electronic component. In other words, surface-mount capacitor MC1' may be placed at a certain distance or more from the surface-mount electronic component.

Also, as shown in Figure 401, on the peripheral control board 1510, the via-hole shaped test point TP land formed on the ground (GND) line of the surface (mounting surface) 1510x is formed as thermal land 1510g' having thermal pattern 1510v (a pattern having a cross shape (which may have a portion missing) or an x shape (which may have a portion missing)) that electrically and physically connects the solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) and the test point TP land.

Furthermore, on the peripheral control board 1510, the lands for the via-hole-shaped test points TP formed on the ground (GND) line of the surface (mounting surface) 1510x are formed as thermal lands 1510g' having thermal patterns 1510v. This makes it easier for the solder paste applied to the thermal lands 1510g' on the peripheral control board 1510 to melt when soldering surface-mounted electronic components. This allows the surface-mounted electronic components to be more firmly welded to the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board compared to when they are formed as normal lands 1510f without thermal patterns 1510v. This increases the rigidity of the peripheral control board 1510, suppresses warping and bending, and improves the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.

In this way, at least one of the pads (ground-side land) to which the electrodes of surface-mount electronic components are soldered is configured to include thermal pad 1510k' (thermal pad 1510k' used to mount electronic components), and the through-hole land not used to mount electronic components (in this example, the land of the via-hole-shaped test point TP) is formed as thermal land 1510g' (thermal land 1510g' not used to mount electronic components). This further increases the rigidity of the peripheral control board 1510, preventing warping and bending. This prevents surface-mount electronic components from peeling off (detachment), improving the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, in this example, the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 has a dense region where electronic components are densely arranged, and a sparse region where electronic components are sparsely arranged or where there are almost no electronic components. The thermal pads 1510k' used to mount electronic components are formed in the dense region, and the thermal lands 1510g' of the through holes 1510r not used to mount electronic components are formed in the sparse region. By configuring the peripheral control board 1510 in this manner, the rigidity of the dense and sparse regions can be increased on the peripheral control board 1510, thereby uniforming the rigidity of the entire peripheral control board 1510 and specific regions near where the thermal pads 1510k' and thermal lands 1510g' are formed. This prevents surface-mounted electronic components from peeling off (detachment), improving the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.

In the above example, the rigidity of the peripheral control board 1510 is increased by using thermal pad 1510k' used to mount electronic components and thermal land 1510g' in through-hole 1510r not used to mount electronic components. However, the rigidity of the peripheral control board 1510 may also be increased by using thermal pad 1510k' used to mount electronic components and thermal pad 1510k' in through-hole 1510r not used to mount electronic components. In other words, in configuration 3, in which the rigidity of the board is increased by using thermal lands, the rigidity of the peripheral control board 1510 can be increased even if the part relating to thermal land 1510g' is replaced with the part relating to thermal pad 1510k'.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 401, the thermal pad 1510k' used to mount the electronic components is formed in a rectangular shape, while the thermal land 1510g' of the through hole 1510r not used to mount electronic components is formed in a circular shape (the same is true for the thermal pad 1510k' not used to mount electronic components). In the rectangular thermal pad 1510k', the thermal pattern 1510v is formed on the side and has corners, whereas the circular thermal land 1510g' has no corners. Furthermore, because corners dissipate heat more easily than side portions, the rectangular thermal pad 1510k' is prone to uneven temperature distribution in the thermal pad 1510k'. On the other hand, the round (circular) thermal land 1510g' has no corners, allowing heat to be dissipated evenly from the entire periphery, making it less likely for uneven temperature distribution to occur and preventing areas where the solder is incompletely melted, ensuring reliable solder welding and increasing the rigidity of the specific control board.

As shown in Figure 401, in this example, one of the thermal lands 1510g' of the through hole 1510r that is not used to mount an electronic component is used as a test point TP. Note that even when a thermal pad 1510k' that is not used to mount an electronic component is formed in place of the thermal land 1510g' of the through hole 1510r that is not used to mount an electronic component, at least one of the thermal pads 1510k' that are not used to mount an electronic component may be used as a test point TP.

In this case, when installing electronic components, the thermal land 1510g' of the through hole 1510r that is not used to install the electronic component used as the test point TP can easily allow the solder attached to the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510 to enter the through hole 1510r of the via hole-shaped test point TP, filling the through hole 1510 with solder and coating the thermal land 1510g' and thermal pattern 1510v on the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 with solder. Furthermore, even when a thermal pad 1510k' not used for mounting an electronic component is formed in place of the thermal land 1510g' of a through hole 1510r not used for mounting an electronic component and used as a test point TP, solder paste may be applied to the thermal pad 1510k' and heated in a reflow oven without placing an electronic component on it, thereby coating the thermal pad 1510k' with solder. This covers the copper foil portions of the test point TP including the thermal land 1510g' and the test point TP including the thermal pad 1510k' with solder, thereby preventing oxidation of the portion of the test point TP that the contact probe contacts and poor contact with the contact probe, thereby enabling accurate measurement values to be obtained during testing. Thermal pads 1510k' not used as test points TP may also be coated with solder.

As described above, test points TP with thermal lands 1510g' on through holes 1510r not used for mounting electronic components and test points TP with thermal pads 1510k' not used for mounting electronic components are both formed in a round (circular) shape. Round (circular) thermal lands 1510g' and thermal pads 1510k' are less likely to experience uneven heat dissipation effects than rectangular thermal pads 1510k', making it possible to achieve a uniform thickness of the solder coating. By uniformly coating solder on test points TP with thermal lands 1510g' on through holes 1510r not used for mounting electronic components and test points TP with thermal pads 1510k' not used for mounting electronic components, variation in test measurements is reduced, allowing for accurate measurement values to be obtained.

Furthermore, if a thermal pad without a through-hole is made round (circular), the thermal pad has a flat surface to begin with, so there is no need to fill the through-hole with solder; instead, solder paste is applied to the flat surface and then melted and hardened. Therefore, even if multiple round (circular) thermal pads of the same size are used, the thickness of the solder coated on each one will be nearly constant and there will be no variation, making it possible to obtain accurate measurement values from any test point TP.

Also, multiple via holes and multiple pads not used for mounting electronic components may be formed around test points TP that have thermal lands 1510g' of through holes 1510r that are not used for mounting electronic components, or test points TP that have thermal pads 1510k' that are not used for mounting electronic components. In this case, when soldering electronic components, the amount of heat transferred from the multiple via holes and multiple pads formed around the test points TP in the solid pattern to the solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) formed on the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 can be increased, thereby suppressing temperature drops in the solid pattern. This heats the solid pattern around test points TP that have thermal lands 1510g' in through holes 1510r that are not used to mount electronic components, and test points TP that have thermal pads 1510k' that are not used to mount electronic components, further suppressing heat dissipation from the thermal lands 1510g' and thermal pads 1510k' of the test points TP to the solid pattern.

In the above example, thermal pads 1510k' that are not used to mount electronic components as test points TP are provided on the peripheral control board 1510. However, thermal pads (without through-holes) that are not used to mount electronic components as test points TP may also be provided on the main control board 1310, or thermal lands (with through-holes) that are not used to mount electronic components as test points TP and thermal pads (without through-holes) that are not used to mount electronic components as test points TP may also be provided on the main control board 1310. Furthermore, thermal lands (with through-holes) that are not used to mount electronic components as test points TP may also be provided on the peripheral control board 1510, or thermal lands (with through-holes) that are not used to mount electronic components as test points TP and thermal pads (without through-holes) that are not used to mount electronic components as test points TP may also be provided on the peripheral control board 1510. Additionally, as with the case where the test points TP are provided on the peripheral control board 1510, it is preferable to form them in a round (circular) shape, which is less likely to cause unevenness in the heat dissipation effect compared to a rectangular shape.

[Configuration 4: Strengthening the rigidity of the substrate by using thermal lands]
In the above-described configurations 1 to 3, in which the rigidity of the board is strengthened by the thermal land, test points formed on the ground (GND) line and power supply line are described. However, in addition to one or any combination of these, the following configuration for test points formed on the signal line may also be adopted. Note that, although the main control board 1310 is described below, this technical concept can be applied to any board on which a test point TP of a signal line is formed (e.g., the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, the delivery control board 633, etc.). The description will be made with reference to FIG. 402.

Figure 402 is an enlarged view showing an example of a test point TP formed on a signal line of the main control board 1310 in a modified example. Figure 402(A) is an enlarged view showing an example of a test point TP formed on a signal line of the main control board 1310 and including a normal land 1310s that is not used for mounting electronic components. Figure 402(B) is an enlarged view showing an example of a test point TP formed on a signal line and including a normal pad 1310k that is not used for mounting electronic components. Note that the following description will not cover parts that overlap with the above-described embodiments. The following modified example can be implemented in combination with the other embodiments described above. For example, it can be implemented in combination with one or more of Improvements in Ease of Identifying Tampering 1 to Improvements in Ease of Identifying Tampering 3 and Prevention of Peeling of Surface-Mounted Electronic Components 1 to Prevention of Peeling of Surface-Mounted Electronic Components 4.

As shown in Figure 402(A), the test point TP in this example has a through-hole 1310r (land 1310s) formed in the signal line and not used for mounting electronic components. The test point TP in this example also has a normal land 1310s formed in a circular shape and not having a thermal pattern.

In this example, the outer peripheral edge 1310s1 of the land 1310s is covered with green solder resist, which is an insulating coating that is applied solidly to the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310, and only a portion of the copper foil of the signal line is exposed. In this example, since it is used as a test point TP, a contact probe must be brought into contact with the land 1310s, and at least a portion of the land 1310s is not covered with solder resist, leaving the copper foil exposed.

This configuration not only prevents bending and warping of the main control board 1310, but also prevents disconnection and peeling of the signal lines formed on the main control board 1310.

In other words, because a certain range from the outer edge 1310s1 of the signal line land 1310s toward the center is covered with solder resist, peeling of the copper foil portion from the outer edge 1310s of the land 1310s of the signal line test point TP can be prevented even if the main control board 1310 is bent or warped.

This increases the rigidity of the main control board 1310, suppressing warping and bending, and preventing surface-mounted electronic components from peeling off (detachment), improving the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.In addition, even if the main control board 1310 bends or warps, as long as the curvature or warping is within a specified range, peeling of the copper foil portion of the land 1310s at the test point TP can be suppressed, making it possible to carry out inspections accurately and improving the reliability of the gaming machine.

Similarly, as shown in Figure 402(B), a test point TP having a pad 1310k formed on a signal line and not used to mount an electronic component has a normal pad 1310k formed in a circular shape and not having a thermal pattern.

In this example, the outer peripheral edge 1310s1 of pad 1310k is covered with green solder resist, which is an insulating coating that is applied solidly to the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310, and only a portion of the copper foil of the signal line is exposed. In this example, since it is used as a test point TP, a contact probe must be brought into contact with pad 1310k, and at least a portion of pad 1310k is not covered with solder resist, leaving the copper foil exposed.

This configuration not only prevents bending and warping of the main control board 1310, but also prevents disconnection and peeling of the signal lines formed on the main control board 1310.

In other words, because a certain area from the outer edge 1310k1 of the signal line pad 1310k toward the center is covered with solder resist, peeling of the copper foil portion from the outer edge 1310k1 of the signal line test point TP pad 1310k can be prevented even if the main control board 1310 is bent or warped.

This increases the rigidity of the main control board 1310, suppressing warping and bending, and preventing surface-mounted electronic components from peeling off (detachment), improving the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.In addition, even if the main control board 1310 bends or warps, as long as the curvature or warping is within a specified range, peeling of the copper foil portion of the pad 1310k at the test point TP can be suppressed, making it possible to carry out inspections accurately and improving the reliability of the gaming machine.

Also, as shown in Figures 402(A) and (B), in this example, the TP frame surrounding the test point TP is silk-screened so that it overlaps the signal line connected to land 1310s or pad 1310k. This makes it possible to increase the peel strength of the signal line, improving the reliability of the gaming machine. In addition, the TP frame surrounding the test point TP may be silk-screened so that it overlaps a solid ground that is less likely to peel off by being formed over a wide area to the side of the signal line, further increasing the peel strength of the signal line and further improving the reliability of the gaming machine. Furthermore, separately from or in addition to the TP frame, the TP mark may also be silk-screened so that it overlaps the signal line, or it may be silk-screened so that it overlaps the signal line and the solid ground. In this case as well, it is possible to increase the peel strength of the signal line, improving the reliability of the gaming machine.

A solid ground may also be provided around the signal lines and signal line lands 1310s. In this case, the solid ground increases the rigidity of the substrate, reducing the effects of substrate warping and other factors, thereby preventing the signal lines and signal line lands 1310s from peeling off. In this case, multiple signal lines and multiple signal line lands 1310s may be formed to sandwich via holes formed in the solid ground. Forming these via holes as thermal lands further increases rigidity and reduces the effects of substrate warping, further improving the effect of preventing the signal lines and signal line lands 1310s from peeling off.

Note that, as the test points TP for the signal lines mentioned above, we have described test points TP that have through holes 1310r (lands 1310s) formed on the signal lines and that are not used to mount electronic components, and test points TP that have pads 1310k formed on the signal lines and that are not used to mount electronic components, but it is sufficient if they have at least one of these.

In addition, in configurations 1 to 3, which use thermal lands to enhance the rigidity of the board, test points formed on ground (GND) lines and power lines are provided with thermal lands or thermal pads, making it easier to weld solder to them. In contrast, in this example, test points formed on signal lines are provided with regular lands or regular pads, and a certain area from the outer edge toward the center is covered with solder resist that is applied solidly to the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310, making it more difficult to weld solder to them.

In other words, the test point TP in this example includes a through hole 1310r (land 1310s) formed on a signal line and not used for mounting an electronic component. The land 1310s of the through hole 1310r not used for mounting an electronic component is generally formed with a smaller surface area than the land 1310s of the through hole 1310r provided for mounting an electronic component. In this example, by forming the test point TP, which is provided on an important signal line and is a potential target for fraud, as the land 1310s of the through hole 1310r not used for mounting an electronic component, not only is the mounting of fraudulent electronic components prevented, but also by covering a certain range from the outer edge 1310s1 of the land 1310s of the through hole 1310r toward the center with solder resist, the exposed surface area of the copper foil is reduced, making it more difficult to weld solder, thereby making the mounting of fraudulent electronic components more difficult.

In this way, it becomes more difficult to weld solder to test points formed on signal lines, making it more difficult to solder unauthorized electronic components to the lands and pads of test points formed on signal lines, thereby improving security.

In the above example, we have described lands and pads of test points TP formed on signal lines, but these are not limited to those used as test points TP, as long as they are through holes (lands) or pads formed on signal lines that are not used to mount electronic components. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent breaks and peeling of signal lines and improve security.

In addition to or separately from the above (this may be implemented in combination with one or more of Improving Ease of Identifying Tampering 1 through Improving Ease of Identifying Tampering 3 and/or Preventing Peeling of Surface-Mounted Electronic Components 1 through Preventing Peeling of Surface-Mounted Electronic Components 4), a certain area from the outer edge toward the center of the lands and pads formed on the signal lines and used to mount the electronic components may be covered with solder resist applied solidly to the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310. This configuration not only prevents the mounted electronic components from peeling off, improving the reliability of the pachinko machine 1, but also reduces the exposed area of the copper foil, making it difficult to identify the signal lines and read the circuit, thereby improving security.

[Relationship with the stop state]
In the above example, abnormalities such as the opening of the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 or magnetism are monitored even during the stop state, and if an abnormality is detected, the performance display device 1600 displays a message indicating that an abnormality has occurred. However, if the game has already entered the stop state and play is restricted, abnormality monitoring may not be performed (no detection by the detection sensor (no detection signal output)), or no notification may be issued even if an abnormality is detected (no notification is issued even if a detection signal from the detection sensor is input to the main control board 1310 or peripheral control board 1510), in which case power consumption can be reduced. However, not monitoring for abnormalities or not issuing a notification even if an abnormality is detected may lead to fraud during the stop state. Countermeasures against fraud during the stop state are described below. Note that only differences from the above embodiment will be described below, and redundant explanations will be omitted.

While the following description focuses on the sensor board 1052A, the technical concept can also be applied to main boards other than the sensor board 1052A, and to sub-boards other than the main board (such as a decorative board on which LEDs are mounted, which is provided on the gaming board 5). It can also be implemented in combination with the other embodiments described above. For example, it can be implemented in combination with one or more of: Improvement in the Ease of Identifying Tampering 1 to Improvement in the Ease of Identifying Tampering 3; Prevention of Peeling of Surface-Mounted Electronic Components 1 to Prevention of Peeling of Surface-Mounted Electronic Components 4; Configuration 1 to Configuration 4 for Strengthening the Rigidity of the Board with Thermal Lands; and Configuration 1 to 4 for Covering the Insulating Coating of the Lands of the Through Holes Formed on the Front (Front Mounting Surface) of Each Decorative Board on the Gaming Board in the First Embodiment to Configuration 1 to Cover the Lands of the Through Holes Formed on the Front (Front Mounting Surface) of Each Decorative Board on the Gaming Board in the Fourth Embodiment.

As mentioned above, the main control board 1310 and payout control board 633, which are main boards that are located on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and have their surfaces (front mounting surfaces) facing away from the player, making them accessible from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, are located closer to the player than the main control board 1310 and payout control board 633.These boards, such as the sensor board 1052 provided on the magnetic sensor 1050, the function display board 1402 provided on the function display unit 1400, the decorative board provided on the sub-function display unit, the sensor board for the first start port sensor 3002 provided on the first start port 2002, the sensor board for the second start port sensor 2401 provided on the second start port 2004, and the rear upper first decorative board provided on the information display, do not have their surfaces (front mounting surfaces) facing away from the player when attached to the gaming board 5 and are accessible from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, making them easy targets for illegal modifications. In this example, fraud prevention measures are taken during the stop state by adopting a configuration similar to that of Variation 1 that implements fraud prevention measures and Variation 2 that implements fraud prevention measures.

As described above, when the main control MPU 1310a executes the ball counting process (step S107), it counts both the game balls (safe balls) received by the winning slots such as the general winning slot 2001, first starting slot 2002, second starting slot 2004, large winning slot 2005, and special winning slot 2006, and the game balls (out balls) received by the out slot 1008, first sub-out slot 2021, and second sub-out slot 2022, calculates the ratio of the number of payouts to the total number of safe balls and out balls, that is, the ratio of the number of payouts (total number of paid-out prize balls) to the total number of game balls shot into the game area 5a, and stores the calculation result in a base calculation area in a specific area of the main control's built-in RAM.

In this example, when the ball counting process (step S107) is executed, the main control MPU 1310a, in addition to the above processes, calculates the difference between the number of shots (excluding the number of balls processed as foul balls) and the number of payouts (number of payouts - number of shots), and stores this calculation result as a "stop counter" in a specific area of the main control's built-in RAM. The stop counter is a counter that indicates an increase or decrease from a predetermined initial value. The main control MPU 1310a also determines whether the value of the stop counter has reached a specific value, and if so, turns on a stop flag. This stop flag is turned off when the RAM clear switch is operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned back on, executing a RAM clear process (step S38) that initializes the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a (i.e., the main control's built-in RAM).

In addition, in this example, the number of launches (the number of game balls shot into the game area 5a (excluding the number of balls treated as foul balls)) is calculated based on the detection results of a launch sensor (not shown) that detects game balls launched from the ball launcher 540. However, the number of launches (the number of game balls shot into the game area 5a (excluding the number of balls treated as foul balls)) may also be calculated based on the counting results of both game balls (safe balls) received by winning ports such as the general winning port 2001, first starting port 2002, second starting port 2004, large winning port 2005, and special winning port 2006, and game balls (out balls) received by the out port 1008, first sub-out port 2021, and second sub-out port 2022.

In addition, when the value of the stop counter reaches a specific value during jackpot play, the system may transition to the stop preparation state without turning the stop flag ON, and by turning the stop flag ON after the jackpot play ends, the system may not transition to the stop state until the jackpot play ends, even if the value of the stop counter reaches a specific value during jackpot play. In other words, the timing when the value of the stop counter reaches a specific value may be different from the timing when the stop state begins. This delays the timing of the start of the stop state, allowing the player to receive prize balls during the jackpot play without losing them midway, thereby preventing dissatisfaction among players. In this case, when a game ball is received into a prize port other than the large prize port 2005 (for example, the general prize port 2001, the first start port 2002, the second start port 2004, or the special feature prize port 2006), prize balls may be paid out based on the game ball being received into that prize port, or when a game ball is received into a prize port other than the large prize port 2005 (for example, the general prize port 2001, the first start port 2002, the second start port 2004, or the special feature prize port 2006), prize balls may not be paid out based on the game ball being received into that prize port.

Furthermore, in this example pachinko machine 1, when main control timer interrupt processing is performed during a play stop state as shown in FIG. 403, even if an abnormality detection means (for example, a sensor or switch such as the magnetic sensor 1050, vibration sensor, full tank detection sensor 154, bulb out detection sensor 574, or door frame open switch, which inputs a detection signal to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310) detects the abnormality and inputs a detection signal from the abnormality detection means to the input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU 1310a, no processing will be performed based on the input of the detection signal.

Specifically, when the main control side timer interrupt processing begins, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the timer is in a stopped state (step S100a). If it does not determine that the timer is in a stopped state (NO in step S100a), it executes steps S100 to S122. If it determines that the timer is in a stopped state (YES in step S100a), it terminates the main control side timer interrupt processing without executing steps S100 to S122. Whether the timer is in a stopped state is determined by whether the stop flag described above is ON.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, even if the main control timer interrupt process is performed during the play-stop state, it is disabled without confirming detection by the abnormality detection means. It is also possible to prevent detection by the abnormality detection means during the play-stop state, or to disable interrupts during the play-stop state, thereby preventing the main control timer interrupt process from being executed and thereby disabling detection by the abnormality detection means.

In addition, in this example, when the pachinko machine 1 reaches a stoppage state, the RAM clear switch is operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned back on, and a RAM clear process (step S38) is executed to initialize the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a (i.e., the main control built-in RAM), thereby canceling the stoppage state and returning the machine to its normal state.

In addition, even during the stalled state, the switch input processing (step S104) may be executed, and if a detection signal from the abnormality detection means is input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU 1310a, it may be stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM. Alternatively, the switch input processing (step S104) may not be executed during the stalled state, so that even if a detection signal from the abnormality detection means is input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU 1310a, it is not stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control's built-in RAM.

Furthermore, if the switch input process (step S104) is executed even during the stalled state, and a detection signal from the abnormality detection means is input to the input terminal of a specified input port of the main control MPU 1310a and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control's internal RAM, the input information is stored in the input information storage area of the main control's internal RAM, but an abnormality notification based on the input information stored in the input information storage area of the main control's internal RAM during the stalled state may not be issued. In this case, the input information storage area of the main control's internal RAM may be initialized and the input information cleared when the stalled state is released, that is, when the RAM built into the main control MPU 1310a (i.e., the main control's internal RAM) is initialized.

When the main control MPU 1310a determines that the value of the stop counter has reached a specific value, it turns on the stop flag and outputs a stop signal indicating that the stop flag has been turned on to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control IC 1510a, which integrates the CPU, RAM, and various I/O interfaces of the peripheral control board 1510 on a single semiconductor chip, activates the specific decorative boards (door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, door frame top right decorative board 457 of the door frame top unit 450, door frame left side upper decorative board 422 of the door frame left side unit 420, door frame left side lower decorative board 423 of the door frame left side unit 420, and the left decorative board 424 of the left decorative lens 272) provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 when the stop signal is input from the main control board 1310. Decorative board 273, door frame right side lower decorative board 433 of door frame right side unit 430, dish right decorative board 278 provided behind dish right decorative lens 277, door frame right side upper decorative board 432 of door frame right side unit 430, back front left upper decorative board 3129 for illuminating and decorating back front left upper logo decoration part 3122, back front left decorative board 3128 for illuminating and decorating back front left logo decoration part 3121, back front left upper logo decoration part 3122 and back front left sub decoration part 3123, back front lower logo decoration board 3173 for illuminating and decorating back front lower logo decoration body 3167, illuminating back front lower middle decoration body 3161 a back front lower middle decorative substrate 3168 for illuminating the back front lower left inner decorative body 3163, a back front lower left outer decorative substrate 3170 for illuminating the back front lower left outer decorative body 3164, a back front lower right inner decorative substrate 3171 for illuminating the back front lower right inner decorative body 3165, a back front lower right outer decorative substrate 3172 for illuminating the back front lower right outer decorative body 3166, a back front lower right decorative substrate 3152 for illuminating the back front right logo decorative portion 3141, a back front upper right decorative substrate 3151 for illuminating the back front upper right logo decorative portion 3142, etc. The LED installed in the machine is controlled to emit light in a predetermined manner (for example, lit in red (or turned off)) for a predetermined period of time or until a predetermined clear condition is met, the sound output from the speaker is controlled in a predetermined manner (for example, "Play has stopped. Please end play" or a warning beep), and the effect display device 1600 is controlled to display in a predetermined manner (for example, "Play has been restricted as the daily ball output limit of 100,000 balls has been reached. Please call an attendant.") for a predetermined period of time or until a clear condition is met.

In addition, when the main control MPU 1310a turns ON the stop-play flag in the ball counting process (step S107), it stops the awarding of prize balls in the prize ball control process (step S108), and in the launch permission signal setting process (step S113), it sets the launch permission signal that tells the payout control board 633 that it is permitted to launch game ball B to launch stop logic (launch non-permission logic), thereby prohibiting the launch of game balls by the ball launcher 540, and in the special pattern and special electric device control process (step S114) and the normal pattern and normal electric device control process (step S116 ... The display of the changing special symbols and the changing normal symbols is stopped, and the LEDs mounted on the functional display board 1402 provided in the functional display unit 1400, the LEDs mounted on the decorative board provided in the sub-functional display unit, and the LEDs mounted on the first decorative board on the rear upper back provided in the information display are controlled to emit light in a stopped state (for example, all LEDs are turned off, or all or some of the LEDs (for example, status indicators) are lit in a predetermined color (for example, red)), and a stop signal is output to the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120).

This allows control of the game's stop state to be executed, with the main control MPU 1310a restricting play, and the peripheral control IC 1510a controlling the LEDs, performance display device 1600, speakers, etc. mounted on specific decorative boards on the door frame 3 and game board 5 in a manner appropriate to the game's stop state.

In this example, when a play-stop signal is input from the main control MPU 1310a, the peripheral control IC 1510a responds to the play-stop state by displaying the background image for the play-stop state (for example, black) on the entire display screen 1600 without displaying decorative patterns or the background image for normal times (when play is possible), and displaying the message "The daily ball output limit of 100,000 balls has been reached, so play is being restricted. Please call an attendant." for a predetermined period of time, followed by the message "Play is restricted." This is displayed on the door frame 3 of the specific decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5. The LEDs mounted on the board (which may be all or some of the lamps and LEDs on the door frame 3) flash red for a predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds) and then turn off, and the LEDs mounted on the board on the game board 5 of the specific decorative boards mounted on the door frame 3 or game board 5 (which may be all or some of the lamps and LEDs on the game board 5) are turned off, and a sound is output from the speaker for a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) saying "Play has stopped. Please end your game." and then the sound is muted. Then, when the clear condition is met, the mode corresponding to the play stop state ends and normal control begins.

In addition, the display mode of the background image and game unplayable display on the performance display device 1600 when the game is stopped will be a still image that does not change over time and will continue until the clear condition is met, the light emission mode of the LEDs mounted on the board mounted on the door frame 3 of the specific decorative boards mounted on the door frame 3 or the game board 5 will be in an off state without any change in light emission mode except for a predetermined period after the start of the game stop state and will continue until the clear condition is met, the light emission mode of the LEDs mounted on the board mounted on the game board 5 of the specific decorative boards mounted on the door frame 3 or the game board 5 will be in an off state without any change in light emission mode and will continue until the clear condition is met, and the sound output mode from the speaker will be in a mute state without any change in sound output mode and will continue until the clear condition is met. Furthermore, the control during the stop state described above is one example, and is not limited to the above control, as long as it changes the light emission mode of the LEDs mounted on the board mounted on the door frame 3 among the specific decorative boards mounted on the door frame 3 or the gaming board 5 and the LEDs mounted on the board mounted on the gaming board 5 among the specific decorative boards mounted on the door frame 3 or the gaming board 5 according to the stop state. For example, during the stop state, each time the main control timer interrupt process is executed, a signal may be output to the LEDs mounted on the board mounted on the door frame 3 among the specific decorative boards mounted on the door frame 3 or the gaming board 5 and the LEDs mounted on the board mounted on the gaming board 5 among the specific decorative boards mounted on the door frame 3 or the gaming board 5 to change the light emission mode according to the stop state.

In this way, in this example, when the game reaches a dead-end state, the presentation modes (display mode, light emission mode, sound output mode) of the presentation means provided in the pachinko machine 1 (presentation display device 1600, LEDs mounted on a board provided in the door frame 3, LEDs mounted on a board provided in the game board 5, speakers, etc.) are set to a dynamic mode that changes over time for a predetermined period after the game reaches a dead-end state, and thereafter to a static mode that does not change over time or changes very little.

The above-mentioned mode when the game is stopped is an example, and it may be controlled to other modes. When the game is stopped, the performance modes (display mode, light emission mode, sound output mode) of the performance means provided in the pachinko machine 1 (performance display device 1600, LEDs mounted on a board provided in the door frame 3, LEDs mounted on a board provided in the game board 5, speakers, etc.) may be immediately changed to static modes without being changed to dynamic modes. For example, when a game is stopped, the effect display device 1600 may not display decorative patterns or the background image used during normal play (when play is possible), but may instead display the background image for the game being stopped (for example, black) on the entire screen and a message indicating that play is disabled, stating "Play is restricted as the daily ball limit of 100,000 balls has been reached.", and the LEDs mounted on the boards mounted on the door frame 3 of the specific decorative boards mounted on the door frame 3 or the game board 5 (which may be all the lamps and LEDs mounted on the door frame 3, or only some of the lamps and LEDs) may be lit in white, the LEDs mounted on the boards mounted on the game board 5 of the specific decorative boards mounted on the door frame 3 or the game board 5 (which may be all the lamps and LEDs mounted on the game board 5, or only some of the lamps and LEDs) may be turned off, and the speaker may be muted.

Also, when a play-stop state is reached, only some of the presentation means provided in the pachinko machine 1 (for example, speakers) may be configured to provide dynamic presentations for a certain period of time or until the clear condition is met, while other presentation means (such as the presentation display device 1600, LEDs mounted on a board provided in the door frame 3, LEDs mounted on a board provided in the game board 5, etc.) may be configured to provide static presentations until the clear condition is met.

In addition, when special conditions are met, the timing for starting control of the stop state may be delayed from the time when it is determined that the value of the stop counter has reached a specific value (controlling the stop state to a stop state in a subsequent interrupt process rather than controlling the stop state to a stop state in the same interrupt process (for example, not turning on the stop flag in the interrupt process that determines that the value of the stop counter has reached a specific value, but turning on the stop flag in the subsequent interrupt process)). In this case, it may be possible to win prize balls in accordance with the reception of game balls into a specific prize slot during the specific period from the time when it is determined that the value of the stop counter has reached a specific value to the start of control of the stop state.

In addition, if the timing for starting control of the stop state is configured to be delayed from the timing when it is determined that the value of the stop counter has reached a specific value, the display mode of the performance display device 1600 during the specific period from when the value of the stop counter has reached a specific value to when control of the stop state is started, the light emission mode of the LEDs mounted on a specific decorative board provided on the game board 5 or door frame 3, the light emission mode of the LEDs mounted on the functional display board 1402 provided on the functional display unit 1400, the light emission mode of the LEDs mounted on a decorative board provided on the sub-functional display unit, and the like will be displayed. The light-emitting modes of the LEDs mounted on the first decorative board on the rear of the information display may be different from the display mode of the effect display device 1600 during the game-stop state, the light-emitting modes of the LEDs mounted on specific decorative boards on the game board 5 or door frame 3, the light-emitting modes of the LEDs mounted on the function display board 1402 on the function display unit 1400, the light-emitting modes of the LEDs mounted on decorative boards on the sub-function display units, and the light-emitting modes of the LEDs mounted on the first decorative board on the rear of the information display. For example, when it is determined that the value of the stop counter has reached a specific value, the effect display device 1600 may issue a pre-notification such as "Control of the stop-state will begin. Play will end for today after the specific period has elapsed." Once control of the stop-state has begun, the effect display device 1600 may issue an end-notification such as "Control of the stop-state has begun. Play will end for today." This allows for gradual notification of the stop-state.

In addition, in the stop state, even if a game ball enters a start port (first start port 2002 or either first start port 2002 or second start port 2004), the display of the changing special symbol on the function display unit 1400 and the display of the changing fourth symbol on the sub-function display unit 2250 will not begin. In this example, when the stop state begins in the pachinko machine 1, all LEDs on the function display unit 1400 are turned off as the light-emitting mode for the stop state, and all LEDs on the sub-function display unit 2250 are turned off as the light-emitting mode for the stop state, and this continues until the clear condition is met.

In this way, during the game-stop state, the effect display device 1600 does not display decorative patterns or the background image used during normal play (when play is possible), but instead displays the background image for the game-stop state (for example, black) and the game-stopped display in a static format that does not change over time. This makes it easy for players and gaming facility staff to notice that the game has reached a game-stop state.

As described above, in this example, the pachinko machine 1 does not issue warnings or alerts based on the detection of abnormalities by sensors (such as the magnetic sensor 1050) or switches (such as the door frame open switch) while the game is stopped. This raises the risk of fraudulent activity being committed against the pachinko machine 1.

In this example, by adopting a configuration similar to that of the above-mentioned variant 1 with anti-fraud measures and variant 2 with anti-fraud measures, anti-fraud measures are taken against the sensor substrate 1052A provided on the magnetic sensor 1050 during the stop state.

For example, as shown in FIG. 372, in the magnetic sensor 1050 of this example, the wiring patterns provided on the sensor board 1052A (ground connection wiring pattern 1052A2, wiring pattern 1052A3 for transmitting detection signals from the sensor main body 1051A, and wiring pattern (power line) 1052A1 for supplying various power supplies (DC power supplies such as +5V, +12V, +24V) created on the power supply board 630) are all formed with approximately the same line width (including a range of about ±10%), and the wiring patterns 1052A1, 1052A2, and 1052A3 are used for various purposes (power supply board This makes it difficult to identify whether the wiring pattern (power line) 1052A1 supplies various power sources (DC power sources such as +5V, +12V, and +24V) created by the board 630, the wiring pattern (GND line) 1052A2 for ground connection, or the wiring pattern (signal line) 1052A3 for transmitting detection signals from the sensor main body 1051A, and makes it difficult to read the circuitry of the sensor board 1052A, thereby preventing unauthorized modifications while the device is in a stopped state and improving security.

In addition, in the magnetic sensor 1050, the wiring patterns formed on the sensor substrate 1052A, such as the wiring pattern 1052A2 for ground connection and the wiring pattern 1052A1 for supplying various power sources (DC power sources such as +5V, +12V, +24V, etc.), are typically made thicker than the wiring pattern 1052A3 through which the detection signal from the sensor main body 1051A is transmitted. On the other hand, the wiring pattern formed on the sensor substrate 1052A in this example is configured so that the line width of the ground connection wiring pattern 1052A2 and the wiring pattern (power supply line) 1052A1 that supplies various power sources (DC power sources such as +5V, +12V, +24V, etc.) is formed to be approximately the same as the line width of the wiring pattern 1052A3, based on the wiring pattern 1052A3 that transmits the detection signal from the sensor main body 1051A, and the line width of the ground connection wiring pattern 1052A2 and the wiring pattern (power supply line) 1052A1 that supplies various power sources (DC power sources such as +5V, +12V, +24V, etc.) is narrower than usual. As a result, the peel strength of the wiring pattern formed on the sensor board 1052A is weakened, and if a force is applied in a direction that would remove a specific electronic component mounted on the surface (front board surface) of the sensor board 1052A while it is in a stopped state, such that the pads to which the connection terminals of the specific electronic component are soldered, the wiring pattern 1052A for ground connection, and the wiring pattern 1052A3 through which the detection signal from the sensor main body is transmitted are peeled off, the wiring pattern formed on the sensor board 1052A becomes more likely to peel off, which prevents the sensor board 1052A from being tampered with and improves security.

In addition, by forming the wiring pattern 1052A2 for ground connection without forming a solid ground (also called a solid pattern) on the sensor substrate 1052A, the wiring pattern 1052A2 for pad and ground connection, the wiring pattern 1052A3 for transmitting detection signals from the sensor main body, and the wiring pattern (power line) 1052A1 for supplying various power sources (DC power sources such as +5V, +12V, +24V) created on the power supply substrate 630 are likely to peel off, so it is necessary to form the wiring pattern 1052A2 on the surface (front substrate surface) of the sensor substrate 1052A during the stopped state. If a force is applied to remove a specific electronic component mounted on the sensor board, and the force is applied in a direction that peels off the pads to which the connection terminals of the specific electronic component are soldered, the wiring pattern 1052A for ground connection, or the wiring pattern 1052A3 through which the detection signal from the sensor body is transmitted, the pads, the wiring pattern 1052A2 for ground connection, and the wiring pattern 1052A3 through which the detection signal from the sensor body is transmitted will peel off, destroying the circuitry and preventing unauthorized modification of the sensor board 1052A, thereby improving security.

Furthermore, in this example, the pads to which the connection terminals of specific electronic components are soldered (for example, pads 1052Ab to which the connection terminals 1053a1 of capacitor 1053a are soldered) are not formed as thermal pads. This prevents the ground connection wiring pattern 1052A2 from being identified from the solid pattern or thermal pads, even if the surface of sensor board 1052A is viewed while in a locked state. This makes it difficult to read the circuitry of sensor board 1052A, preventing unauthorized modifications and improving security while in a locked state.

Furthermore, in this example, the sensor board 1052A has no markings at all, and no board reference number is formed on either the front (surface) or rear (back) surface of the sensor board 1052A. Meanwhile, the case housing the sensor board 1052A is engraved with the product reference number of the magnetic sensor 1050 (e.g., FDUFPA03A). This makes it difficult to identify the function of the board even if the board surface of the sensor board 1052A is visually inspected while it is in a stopped state. Meanwhile, since the product reference number is engraved on the case housing the sensor board 1052A, it is possible to confirm the marking during, for example, the manufacturing process and determine that the sensor board 1052A is housed therein, preventing installation errors. The product reference number engraved on the case housing the sensor board 1052A may be engraved in a position visible from the outside of the case (e.g., on the outside of the case), or in a position that is difficult or impossible to see from the outside of the case (e.g., on the inside of the case).

In addition, on boards such as sensor board 1052A that are likely to be targets of fraudulent activity while in a stalled state, the board surface is coated with an insulating film (solder resist). The wiring patterns formed on the surface of these boards (for example, wiring pattern 1052A2 for ground connection, wiring pattern 1052A3 for transmitting detection signals from sensor main body 1051A, and wiring pattern (power line) 1052A1 for supplying various power sources (DC power sources such as +5V, +12V, +24V) created on power supply board 630) are covered with an insulating film (solder resist). This makes it difficult to identify the wiring patterns even if the board surface is visually inspected while in a stalled state, thereby preventing fraudulent modifications.

In addition, in boards that are likely to be targets of fraudulent activity during the mounting stop state, some or all of the pads (which may or may not be used for mounting surface-mount electronic components) and lands of the through-holes (which may or may not be used for mounting insertion-type electronic components) formed on the board surface (for example, outer peripheral edge 1310s1 of pad 1310k shown in FIG. 402(B) or outer peripheral edge 1310s1 of land 1310s of through-hole 1310r shown in FIG. 402(A)) may be covered with an insulating coating (solder resist) that is applied solidly to the board surface. This not only makes it difficult to identify the wiring pattern even if the board surface is visually inspected during the mounting stop state, but also reduces the surface area of exposed copper foil, making it more difficult to deposit solder, thereby making it more difficult to mount fraudulent components, thereby improving security.

In this way, the sensor board 1052A in this example is designed to strengthen security against fraudulent activity during the game-stop state. Furthermore, in this example, the main control board 1310 and payout control board 633, which are installed with their front board surfaces facing in a different direction from the sensor board 1052A (towards the back of the pachinko machine 1), also employ configurations similar to Improvement in Ease of Identifying Fraud 1 to Improvement in Ease of Identifying Fraud 3 and Configuration 1 to Configuration 4 for Strengthening Board Rigidity with Thermal Lands, to provide countermeasures against fraud during the game-stop state.

For example, as shown in FIG. 400, in this example, chip component IC1, a surface-mount type electronic component mounted on main control board 1310, has its connection terminal IC1a soldered to pad 1310k formed on mounting surface 1310x of main control board 1310. Adjacent to chip component IC1, a surface-mount type electronic component, is a lead-type (insertion-mounted) capacitor MC1, which is fixed to the board by inserting a lead terminal MC1a (in this example, the lead terminal MC1a is formed to have two or more bent portions) into through hole 1310r and soldering this lead terminal MC1a to through hole 1310r or land 1310s, and then soldering this lead terminal MC1a to through hole 1310r or land 1310s.

Furthermore, the lead-type electronic component capacitor MC1 has a conspicuous blue surface, which contrasts with the green resist of the main control board 1310, the black surface of the surface-mounted electronic component chip component IC1, and the white and yellow of the surface-side markings and stampings. In this example, while the resist of the main control board 1310 and the surface colors of the surface-mounted electronic components are dark green or black, the lead-type electronic component capacitor MC1 has a light-colored exterior and is blue, which contrasts with the bright white and yellow of the surface-side markings and stampings. Therefore, even if tampering occurs on the main control board 1310 during a stop state, such as tampering with the chip component IC1, the administrator can more easily identify the surface-mounted electronic component chip component IC1 by visualizing the capacitor MC1, which is conspicuous on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, from among the multiple electronic components, and easily identify tampering with the main control board 1310.

In addition, capacitor MC1, which is a lead-type electronic component, is mounted higher than chip component IC1, which is a surface-mount type electronic component. Therefore, even if tampering occurs by tampering with chip component IC1 on main control board 1310 while in a stalled state, the administrator can easily find capacitor MC1, which protrudes from the surface of main control board 1310, among multiple electronic components. Using capacitor MC1 as a visual target, it is even easier to identify chip component IC1, which is a surface-mount type electronic component, and tampering with main control board 1310 can be easily identified.

In this example, the wiring pattern formed on the surface of the main control board 1310 is covered with an insulating film (solder resist). This makes it difficult to identify the wiring pattern even if the board surface is visually inspected while in a stopped state, thereby preventing unauthorized modifications. Also, as shown in Figure 402, in this example, the outer edges (a certain range from the outer periphery toward the center of the land or pad) of the lands and pads of the test points TP formed on the signal lines of the main control board 1310 are covered with solder resist applied solidly to the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310. This not only makes it difficult to identify the wiring pattern even if the board surface of the main control board 1310 is visually inspected while in a stopped state, but also reduces the surface area of exposed copper foil on the signal lines formed on the main control board 1310, making it difficult to weld solder. This makes it difficult to install unauthorized components and connect them to the signal lines, thereby improving security.

In addition, since the capacitor MC, a lead-type (insertion-mount type) electronic component, is placed adjacent to the chip component IC1, a surface-mount type electronic component, across the electronic component unmountable area A where electronic components cannot be mounted (avoiding the electronic component unmountable area A), the rigidity of the main control board 1310 can be increased compared to when only surface-mount type electronic components are mounted.Furthermore, by placing the lead-type electronic component adjacent to the surface-mount type electronic component across the electronic component unmountable area A where electronic components cannot be mounted (avoiding the electronic component unmountable area A), the strength of the area of the main control board 1310 where the surface-mount type electronic components are mounted is partially increased, and deformation such as warping can be suppressed.This means that even if fraudulent activity is committed against the main control board 1310 during a game-stopping state, it is possible to suppress the peeling off of important electronic components (chip component IC1 in this example) (detachment from mounting), improving the reliability of the gaming machine.

In this example, the lead terminal MC1a of the capacitor MC, a lead-type (insertion-mounted) electronic component, is formed to have two or more bent portions and soldered to the through-hole 1310r or land 1310s to secure it to the board. This provides greater strength than lead terminals formed to have no bent portion or only one bent portion. This partially increases the strength of the area of the main control board 1310 where surface-mounted electronic components are mounted, thereby suppressing deformation such as warping. Therefore, even if fraudulent activity is committed against the main control board 1310 during a game-stopping state, it is possible to prevent important electronic components (in this example, chip component IC1) from peeling off (detaching from their mounting), improving the reliability of the gaming machine. As described above, the lead terminal MC1a is made of iron, copper, or an alloy thereof (e.g., CP wire, which is copper-plated iron wire further plated with tin, or tin-plated Cu wire), and has a predetermined bending strength. Additionally, because iron has a higher bending strength than copper, it is desirable to use a capacitor MC1 with lead terminals MC1a (CP wires) made of iron or an iron alloy.

In addition, in this example, at least one of the through-hole lands to which each lead terminal MC1a of the capacitor MC, which is a lead-type (insertion-mounted type) electronic component, is soldered on the main control board 1310 is formed as a thermal land, and the land is physically connected to a solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) formed on the main control board 1310 via the thermal pattern. As described above, a thermal land having a thermal pattern makes it more difficult for heat to be transferred to a solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) compared to a normal land that does not have a thermal pattern. Therefore, by forming at least one of the through-hole lands to which each connection terminal of a specific electronic component is soldered using a thermal land, the temperature drop when soldering the specific electronic component is suppressed (heat dissipation is suppressed), and the solder attached to the back surface (solder surface 1310y) of the main control board 1310 can be reliably sucked up to the front surface (mounting surface 1310x) by the through-hole, thereby strengthening the welding of the specific electronic component and improving the rigidity of the board. In other words, by forming at least one of the pads or lands on the main control board 1310 to which the connection terminals of a specific electronic component are soldered as a thermal pad or thermal land, not only is the welding of the specific electronic component, capacitor IC1, stronger, but the rigidity of the main control board 1310 is increased, so that even if a force is applied to remove the specific electronic component while it is in a stopped state, the through-hole or the solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) to which the ground connection wiring pattern (thermal pattern) is connected can prevent the ground connection wiring pattern (thermal pattern) from peeling off or the electronic component from peeling off.

The above configuration may be adopted not only for the main control board 1310, but also for boards on which a solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) is formed, such as the dispensing control board 633 and peripheral control board 1510. In this case, specific electronic components are firmly welded to each board, and the rigidity of each board is increased. Therefore, even if a force is applied to remove a specific electronic component while it is in a stopped state, the solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) to which the through-hole or ground connection wiring pattern (thermal pattern) is connected can prevent the ground connection wiring pattern (thermal pattern) from peeling off or the electronic component from peeling off.

In addition to the through-hole lands to which the connection terminals of specific electronic components (e.g., ICs, capacitors, transistors, etc.) are soldered, at least one of the pads to which the connection terminals of specific electronic components (e.g., ICs, capacitors, transistors, etc.) are soldered may be formed as a thermal pad, and the pad may be physically connected via the thermal pattern to a solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) formed on each board. In this case, the specific electronic components are firmly welded to each board and the rigidity of each board is increased, so even if a force is applied to remove a specific electronic component while it is in a stopped state, the solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) to which the pad or ground connection wiring pattern (thermal pattern) is connected can prevent the ground connection wiring pattern (thermal pattern) from peeling off or the electronic component from peeling off.

Furthermore, in this example, as shown in FIG. 364(A), the spacing (which may be the spacing between the outermost edges of the lands 1310s or the spacing between the centers of the through holes 1310r) between two through holes 1310r for mounting a lead-type electronic component is wider than the external width of the surface-mount electronic component, allowing the surface-mount electronic component to fit between the two through holes 1310r (including lands 1310s) for mounting the lead-type electronic component. This increases the rigidity of the area of the main control board 1310 sandwiched between the two through holes 1310r (including lands 1310s) to which each pair of connection terminals MC1a of the lead-type electronic component is soldered, thereby suppressing deformation such as warping. By mounting a surface-mount electronic component in this area with increased rigidity, it is possible to prevent the surface-mount electronic component placed adjacent to the lead-type electronic component from peeling off, even if a force is applied that would remove the specific electronic component while it is in a stopped state.

Furthermore, as described above, in this example, the outer peripheral edges (a certain range from the outer periphery toward the center of the land or pad) of the lands and pads of the test points TP formed on the signal lines of the main control board 1310 are covered with solder resist that is applied solid to the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310. Therefore, if fraudulent activity is committed against the main control board 1310 during a stop-play state, causing the main control board 1310 to bend or warp, the copper foil portions of the lands 1310s of the test points TP are less likely to peel off than if the outer peripheral edges of the lands and pads of the test points TP were normal lands or pads that are not covered with solder resist. This makes it possible to carry out inspections accurately, thereby improving the reliability of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, in the main control board 1310 of this example, as shown in Figures 402 (A) and (B), the TP frame surrounding the test point TP is silk-screened so that it overlaps the signal lines connected to the lands 1310s and pads 1310k. This also makes it possible to increase the peel strength of the signal lines through silk-screening, and if fraud is committed against the main control board 1310 during a game-stopping state, causing the main control board 1310 to bend or warp, it is more difficult to peel off the copper foil portion of the land 1310s of the test point TP than if the TP frame were not silk-screened so that it overlaps the signal lines connected to the lands and pads of the test point TP. This makes it possible to carry out inspections accurately, improving the reliability of the gaming machine.

In addition to the above, in the main control board 1310 of this example, the TP frame surrounding the test point TP is silk-screened so that it overlaps the solid ground, which is difficult to peel off, by being formed over a wide area on the side of the signal line. Therefore, the TP frame silk-screened on the solid ground increases the peel strength of the signal line. If fraud is committed against the main control board 1310 during a stalled state, causing the main control board 1310 to bend or warp, the copper foil portion of the land 1310s of the test point TP is less likely to peel off than if the TP frame were not silk-screened so that it overlaps the solid ground. This makes it possible to perform inspections accurately, improving the reliability of the gaming machine.

Furthermore, in addition to or separately from the above, the main control board 1310 in this example has a TP mark silk-screened so that it overlaps the signal line, which also makes it possible to increase the peel strength of the signal line through silk-screening.If fraudulent activity is committed against the main control board 1310 during a stalled state, causing the main control board 1310 to bend or warp, it is more difficult to peel off the copper foil portion of the test point TP land 1310s than if the TP mark were not silk-screened so that it overlaps the signal line connected to the test point TP land or pad.This makes it possible to carry out inspections accurately, thereby improving the reliability of the gaming machine.

In addition, in this example, at least one of the pads and through-hole lands to which the connection terminals of specific electronic components (e.g., ICs, capacitors, transistors, etc.) are soldered is formed as a thermal pad or thermal land with a thermal pattern, and the pads and lands are physically connected via the thermal pattern to a solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) formed on each board. Therefore, compared to when using ordinary pads and lands without a thermal pattern, it is possible to fill the through-holes with solder applied to the solder surface (back surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, or to weld surface-mounted electronic components with the solder paste applied to the thermal pad completely melted. This increases the rigidity of the main control board 1310, and prevents electronic components soldered to the thermal pad or thermal land from peeling off even if force is applied to remove a specific electronic component while it is in a stopped state.

In addition, as described above, decorative boards that mount LEDs mounted on a board provided on the door frame 3 that are controlled to emit light in a rainbow or gold effect, decorative boards that mount LEDs mounted on a board provided on the game board 5, decorative boards that mount LEDs mounted on a board provided on the door frame 3 among specific decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 or game board 5 that are set to emit light in the event of a dead-end state (which may overlap in part or in whole with decorative boards that mount lamps or LEDs that are controlled to emit light in a rainbow or gold effect), and decorative boards that mount LEDs mounted on a board provided on the game board 5 among specific decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 or game board 5. The decorative board on which these lights are mounted (which may overlap in part or in whole with the decorative board on which lamps or LEDs with light emission controlled to produce rainbow or gold effects are mounted) is configured with a white solder resist (protective material) coating on the LED mounting surface to increase reflective efficiency, so when the light emission mode for the stopped state is selected during the stopped state, the decorative light can be brighter and more vivid (clear), enhancing the effect of the display, making it easier to notice that the state has reached the stopped state, and making the decorative board less noticeable even when the lights are turned off during the stopped state to achieve the stopped state light emission mode.

Furthermore, in this example, there are decorative boards that mount LEDs mounted on a board provided on the door frame 3 that are controlled to emit light in a rainbow or gold effect, decorative boards that mount LEDs mounted on a board provided on the game board 5, decorative boards that mount LEDs mounted on a board provided on the door frame 3 among specific decorative boards that are provided on the door frame 3 or game board 5 that are set to emit light in the event of a dead-end state (which may overlap in part or in whole with decorative boards that mount lamps or LEDs that are controlled to emit light in a rainbow or gold effect), and decorative boards that mount LEDs mounted on a board provided on the door frame 3 or game board 5. Among the specific decorative boards provided, those provided on the game board 5 that mount LEDs (which may overlap in part or in whole with the decorative boards that mount lamps or LEDs controlled to emit light in rainbow or gold effects) have notations on the LED mounting surface that indicate the attributes of the electronic components, such as the component number of the electronic component and an area indicating the location where the electronic component is to be placed (which may also include the shape, size, mounting orientation, and model of the electronic component). Yellow is a bright color like white, yet is less noticeable against white, so the notations can be made less noticeable even when the light is turned off as the lighting mode for the stop state during the stop state. Furthermore, because yellow has a high reflectivity, while lower than the reflectivity of white, it can achieve a uniform reflectivity on the LED-mounted surface and suppress uneven light emission. This allows for a brighter, more vivid (clear) illumination when the light emission mode for the light-emitting diode (LED) state is selected during the LED-mounted state, enhancing the presentation effect and making it easier to notice that the LED state has been reached. It is also possible to avoid providing a marking on at least the LED-mounted surface. In this case, the marking can be prevented from being visible even when the LED is turned off during the LED-mounted state, and the light emission mode can be selected during the LED-mounted state without uneven light emission, enhancing the presentation effect and making it easier to notice that the LED state has been reached. In this case, the marking can be provided on the non-LED-mounted surface where no LEDs are mounted, or it is also possible to provide no marking on either the LED-mounted surface or the non-LED-mounted surface.

In addition, in this example, the decorative boards mounting LEDs mounted on a board attached to the door frame 3 whose light emission is controlled to produce rainbow or gold effects, the decorative boards mounting LEDs mounted on a board attached to the gaming board 5, the decorative boards mounting LEDs mounted on a board attached to the door frame 3 among the specific decorative boards mounted on the door frame 3 or gaming board 5 that are set to emit light in the event of a dead-end state (which may overlap in part or in whole with the decorative boards mounting lamps or LEDs whose light emission is controlled to produce rainbow or gold effects), and the decorative boards mounting LEDs mounted on a board attached to the gaming board 5 among the specific decorative boards mounted on the door frame 3 or gaming board 5 (which may overlap in part or in whole with the decorative boards mounting lamps or LEDs whose light emission is controlled to produce rainbow or gold effects) are configured so that the outer periphery of the through-hole lands and pads is covered with white solder resist formed on the surface of the board. As a result, the area of exposed copper foil on the LED mounting surface can be kept small, making the through-hole lands and pads less noticeable even when the light is turned off as the light emission mode for the stopped state during the stopped state. This also makes it possible to make the reflectance of the LED mounting surface uniform and suppress uneven light emission, enhancing the presentation effect, so that when the light emission mode for the stopped state is used during the stopped state, it is easy to notice that the state has been stopped.

The above configuration may be adopted only for boards with a solid ground (solid pattern), including decorative boards mounting LEDs mounted on a board attached to the door frame 3 whose light emission is controlled for rainbow or gold effects, decorative boards mounting LEDs mounted on a board attached to the game board 5, decorative boards mounting LEDs mounted on a board attached to the door frame 3 among specific decorative boards mounted on the door frame 3 or game board 5 that are set to an emission mode when a game is stopped (this may overlap in part or in whole with decorative boards mounting lamps or LEDs whose light emission is controlled for rainbow or gold effects), and decorative boards mounting LEDs mounted on a board attached to the game board 5 among specific decorative boards mounted on the door frame 3 or game board 5 (this may overlap in part or in whole with decorative boards mounting lamps or LEDs whose light emission is controlled for rainbow or gold effects).

In addition, the first decorative board on the rear upper back of the information display will also be set to an illumination mode appropriate for a game-stopped state (for example, turning off all LEDs, or lighting up all or some of the LEDs in a specific color (e.g., red) (displaying the message "game-stopped state")) during the game-stopped state. This allows players and gaming facility staff to easily recognize that a game-stopped state has occurred.

The first decorative board on the rear upper back of the information display may also be a decorative board that mounts LEDs mounted on a board attached to the door frame 3 that are controlled to emit light in rainbow or gold effects, a decorative board that mounts LEDs mounted on a board attached to the game board 5, a decorative board that mounts LEDs mounted on a board attached to the door frame 3 among the specific decorative boards attached to the door frame 3 or game board 5 that are set to emit light in the event of a dead-end state (this may overlap in part or in whole with the decorative board that mounts lamps or LEDs that are controlled to emit light in rainbow or gold effects), or a specific decorative board attached to the door frame 3 or game board 5. Similar to the decorative board on which LEDs are mounted (which may overlap in part or in whole with the decorative board on which lamps and LEDs that are controlled to emit light in rainbow or gold colors) mounted on the board provided on game board 5 of the board, the LED mounting surface may be coated with a light-colored solder resist (protective material) such as white to increase reflective efficiency; in this case, when the information display emits light in the light emission mode for the hit-stop state during the hit-stop state, it can emit light more brightly and vividly (clearly), enhancing the effect and making it easier to notice that the hit-stop state has been reached.

The LED mounting surface of the first decorative substrate on the rear upper back of the information display may also be coated with a dark colored solder resist (protective material) such as green or black. In this case, when the information display is illuminated in the illumination mode for the illuminated state during the illuminated state, light interference on the LED mounting surface can be suppressed and the light emitted from each LED can be distinguished, preventing misinterpretation of the content displayed by the information display, and making the first decorative substrate on the rear upper back less noticeable when the information display is turned off in the illumination mode for the illuminated state during the illuminated state.

In addition, the first decorative board on the rear upper back of the information display may be a decorative board that mounts LEDs mounted on a board attached to the door frame 3 that is controlled to emit light in rainbow or gold effects, a decorative board that mounts LEDs mounted on a board attached to the game board 5, a decorative board that mounts LEDs mounted on a board attached to the door frame 3 of specific decorative boards attached to the door frame 3 or game board 5 that are set to emit light in the event of a dead-end state (this may overlap in part or in whole with a decorative board that mounts a lamp or LED that is controlled to emit light in rainbow or gold effects), or a decorative board that mounts LEDs mounted on a board attached to the door frame 3 or As with the decorative boards (which may partially or completely overlap with decorative boards mounting LEDs) mounted on boards mounted on the gaming board 5 among the specific decorative boards mounted on the gaming board 5, which are mounted with lamps or LEDs whose light emission is controlled to produce rainbow or gold effects, a notation indicating the attributes of the electronic component, such as the component number of the electronic component and an area indicating the position where the electronic component is to be placed (which may also include the shape, size, mounting orientation (direction), and model of the electronic component), may be silk-screened with yellow paint on a solid white resist. In this case, the notation can be made less noticeable even when the information display is turned off as the light-emitting mode for the stop state during the stop state. Furthermore, the reflectivity of the LED mounting surface of the first decorative board on the rear upper back of the information display can be made uniform, and uneven light emission is suppressed, so when the information display emits light in the light emission mode for the stopped state during the stopped state, it can emit light more brightly and vividly (clearly), enhancing the dramatic effect and making it easier to notice that the state has been stopped.

It is also possible to avoid providing a notation on the LED mounting surface of the first decorative board on the rear upper back of the information display. In this case, even when the notation is turned off as the light-emitting mode for the stopped state during a stopped state, it is possible to prevent the notation from being visible. Furthermore, when the light-emitting mode for the stopped state is used during a stopped state, the notation can be made to emit light without unevenness, enhancing the dramatic effect and making it easy to notice that the state has reached a stopped state. In this case, it is also possible to provide a notation on the non-LED mounting surface where no LEDs are mounted, or to provide no notation on either the LED mounting surface or the non-LED mounting surface.

In addition, the first decorative board on the upper rear back of the information display may also be configured so that the outer periphery of the through-hole lands and pads is covered with solder resist formed on the surface of the board, similar to decorative boards that mount LEDs mounted on a board mounted on the door frame 3 and whose light emission is controlled to produce rainbow or gold effects, decorative boards that mount LEDs mounted on a board mounted on the gaming board 5, decorative boards that mount LEDs mounted on a board mounted on the door frame 3 among specific decorative boards mounted on the door frame 3 or gaming board 5 that are configured to emit light in the event of a game-ending state (which may overlap in part or in whole with decorative boards that mount lamps or LEDs that are controlled to produce rainbow or gold effects), and decorative boards that mount LEDs mounted on a board mounted on the gaming board 5 among specific decorative boards mounted on the door frame 3 or gaming board 5 (which may overlap in part or in whole with decorative boards that mount lamps or LEDs that are controlled to produce rainbow or gold effects). In this case, the area of exposed copper foil on the LED mounting surface of the first decorative board on the rear of the information display can be minimized. This makes the through-hole lands and pads less noticeable even when the information display is turned off in the stopped state. This also makes it possible to achieve a uniform reflectivity on the LED mounting surface and suppress uneven lighting, enhancing the visual effect. This makes it easy to notice that the display is in the stopped state when the display is turned off in the stopped state.

The first decorative substrate on the rear upper back of the information display may also be configured to have a solid ground (solid pattern), and at least some of the lands (which may or may not have electronic components mounted) and pads (which may or may not have electronic components mounted) of the through holes formed on the first decorative substrate on the rear upper back of the information display may be physically connected to the solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) via a thermal pattern. This increases the rigidity of the first decorative substrate on the rear upper back of the information display, and prevents the through holes and the solid pattern (solid ground (GND) (board ground)) to which the ground connection wiring pattern (thermal pattern) is connected from peeling off or the electronic components from peeling off, even if force is applied to remove a specific electronic component while the display is in a stopped state.

The technical ideas of the claims and other aspects that can be understood from the above embodiments are described below, along with their effects.

A gaming machine (such as a pachinko machine 1 or a slot machine) having a plurality of boards on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted,
Specific boards among the plurality of boards (main control board 1310, peripheral control board 1510, dispensing control board 633, power supply board 630, decorative boards on which LEDs and drivers are mounted, etc.)
Solid ground (solid pattern, board ground, GND),
A plurality of test points (check terminals) are formed to be used for testing the mounted electronic components,
A specific test point (ground line test point) among the plurality of test points includes an insulating portion (insulating portion 1310w, 1510i) from which the copper foil has been removed, and a conductive portion (thermal pattern 1310v, 1510v) connected to the solid ground and from which the copper foil remains.
It is characterized by:

According to the above invention, the specific test point formed on the specific board is configured to include an insulating portion where the copper foil has been removed and a conductive portion where the copper foil remains and is connected to the solid ground. This reduces temperature drops when mounting electronic components compared to when a test point is formed that connects to the solid ground without an insulating portion where the copper foil has been removed, prevents incomplete melting of the solder, and allows the specific test point to be covered with solder. This not only reduces contact failures when contact is made with an inspection tool such as a contact probe, but also prevents damage, allowing for accurate inspections to be performed, thereby improving the reliability of the gaming machine.

A gaming machine (such as a pachinko machine 1 or a slot machine) having a plurality of boards on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted,
The plurality of substrates include:
The machine is provided with specific control boards (main control board 1310, peripheral control board 1510, payout control board 633, power supply board 630, etc.) on which microprocessors (main control MPU 1310a, payout control MPU 633aa, display control MPU, etc.) that execute processing related to games are mounted,
The specific control board includes:
Solid ground (solid pattern, board ground, GND),
A plurality of through holes (through holes 1310r, 1510r) are formed,
a plurality of specific through holes (through holes 1310r, 1510r, etc. of ground (GND) lines provided in a solid pattern) among the plurality of through holes are used as test points (check terminals) used for testing electronic components mounted on the specific control board,
The special test points (ground line test points) among the plurality of test points include insulating portions (insulating portions 1310w, 1510i) from which the copper foil has been removed, and conductive portions (thermal patterns 1310v, 1510v) connected to the solid ground and from which the copper foil remains.
It is characterized by:

According to the above invention, multiple specific through holes formed on a specific control board are used as test points for testing electronic components mounted on the specific control board, and special test points among the multiple test points formed on this specific control board are configured to include an insulating portion where the copper foil has been removed and a conductive portion where the copper foil remains and is connected to a solid ground.This makes it possible to suppress temperature drops when mounting electronic components compared to test points configured as test points connected to a solid ground without having an insulating portion where the copper foil has been removed, and to strengthen the rigidity of the specific control board by melting solder and welding it to the inside of the specific through holes.

A gaming machine (such as a pachinko machine 1 or a slot machine) having a plurality of boards on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted,
Among the plurality of boards, the main control board (main control board 1310) equipped with a main control means (main control MPU 1310a) that executes processing related to the progress of the game has a surface mount type electronic component (e.g., IC1) and an insertion mount type electronic component (e.g., capacitor MC1) mounted on its front board surface (mounting surface 1310x).
Solid ground (solid pattern, board ground, GND),
A plurality of through holes (through holes 1310r) are formed,
The plurality of through holes are
a mounting through-hole into which the insertion-mount type electronic component is mounted (for example, a through-hole 1310r into which a lead terminal MC1a of a lead-type (insertion-mount type) capacitor MC1 is inserted and soldered);
a non-mounted through-hole in which no insertion-mount type electronic component is mounted (a through-hole 1310r in which a lead terminal of a lead type (insertion-mount type) is inserted and not soldered),
Among the mounting through-holes, a specific mounting through-hole (a land on the ground side of a through-hole 1310r into which a lead terminal MC1a of a lead-type (insertion mounting type) capacitor MC1 is inserted and soldered) includes a specific insulating portion (insulating portion 1310w) from which the copper foil has been removed, and a specific conductive portion (thermal pattern 1310v) from which the copper foil remains and which is connected to the solid ground,
Among the non-mounted through holes, the special non-mounted through hole (a through hole 1310r of a ground (GND) line provided on a solid ground) has a special insulating portion (insulating portion 1310w) around which the copper foil has been removed, and a special conductive portion (thermal pattern 1310v) around which the copper foil remains and which is connected to the solid ground.
It is characterized by:

According to the above invention, specific mounting through holes among mounting through holes in which insertion-mount type electronic components are mounted are configured with specific insulating portions where the copper foil has been removed and specific conductive portions where the copper foil remains around and is connected to the solid ground. Also, special non-mounting through holes among non-mounting through holes in which insertion-mount type electronic components are not mounted are configured with special insulating portions where the copper foil has been removed and special conductive portions where the copper foil remains around and is connected to the solid ground. This reduces temperature drops during mounting of electronic components, prevents incomplete solder melting, and allows solder to penetrate and fuse the interiors of the specific mounting through holes and special non-mounting through holes. This increases the rigidity of the main control board and reduces warping and bending. This prevents mounted electronic components from peeling off and the copper foil from peeling off, improving the reliability of the gaming machine.

A gaming machine (such as a pachinko machine 1 or a slot machine) having a plurality of boards on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted,
The device is equipped with specific control boards (main control board 1310, peripheral control board 1510, delivery control board 633, power supply board 630, etc.) that have a solid ground (solid pattern, board ground, GND) and whose entire front board surface is covered with an insulating film (solder resist),
The front board surface (mounting surface 1310x, front surface (mounting surface) 1510x) of the specific control board has:
a mounting portion (a through-hole or a pad on which an electronic component is mounted) on a copper foil portion not covered with the insulating film, on which the electronic component is mounted;
a non-mounting portion (a through-hole or a pad where no electronic component is mounted) where no electronic component is mounted is formed in the copper foil portion that is not covered with the insulating film,
The specific mounting portion of the mounting portion includes a specific insulating portion (insulating portion 1310w, 1510i) from which the surrounding copper foil has been removed, and a specific conductive portion (thermal pattern 1310v, 1510v) connected to the solid ground and from which the surrounding copper foil remains,
The special non-mounting portion of the non-mounting portion includes a special insulating portion (insulating portion 1310w, 1510i) from which the surrounding copper foil has been removed, and a special conductive portion (thermal pattern 1310v, 1510v) connected to the solid ground and from which the surrounding copper foil remains.
It is characterized by:

According to the above invention, the front surface of the specific control board is formed with mounting sections where electronic components are mounted on copper foil sections not covered with an insulating film, and non-mounting sections where electronic components are not mounted on copper foil sections not covered with an insulating film. The specific mounting sections of the mounting sections are configured to include a specific insulating section where the surrounding copper foil has been removed and a specific conductive section that connects to the solid ground and where the surrounding copper foil remains. The special non-mounting sections of the non-mounting sections are configured to include a special insulating section where the surrounding copper foil has been removed and a special conductive section that connects to the solid ground and where the surrounding copper foil remains. This reduces temperature drops when mounting electronic components, prevents incomplete melting of solder, and increases the rigidity of the specific control board by welding solder to the specific mounting sections and special non-mounting sections. This reduces warping and bending, preventing mounted electronic components from peeling off and the copper foil from peeling off, improving the reliability of the gaming machine.

A gaming machine having a plurality of boards on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted,
The device is provided with specific control boards (main control board 1310, peripheral control board 1510) having solid grounds (solid patterns, board grounds, GND),
The front board surface (mounting surface 1310x, front surface (mounting surface) 1510x) of the specific control board has:
a mounting portion (a through hole or a pad on which the electronic component is mounted) on which the electronic component is mounted;
a non-mounting portion (a through-hole or a pad where no electronic component is mounted) where the electronic component is not mounted is formed,
The specific mounting portion of the mounting portion includes a specific insulating portion (insulating portion 1310w, 1510i) from which the surrounding copper foil has been removed, and a specific conductive portion (thermal pattern 1310v, 1510v) connected to the solid ground and from which the surrounding copper foil remains,
The special non-mounting portion of the non-mounting portion includes a special insulating portion (insulating portion 1310w, 1510i) from which the surrounding copper foil has been removed, and a special conductive portion (thermal pattern 1310v, 1510v) connected to the solid ground and from which the surrounding copper foil remains,
The specific mounting portion is formed of a rectangular copper foil portion (a rectangular thermal pad 1510k'),
The special non-mounting portion is formed of a circular copper foil portion (a round (circular) thermal land 1510g' or a round (circular) thermal pad 1510k').
It is characterized by:

According to the above invention, the front surface of the specific control board is formed with mounting sections where electronic components are mounted and non-mounting sections where no electronic components are mounted. The specific mounting sections of the mounting sections are configured with a specific insulating section where the surrounding copper foil has been removed and a specific conductive section connected to the solid ground and where the surrounding copper foil remains. The special non-mounting sections of the non-mounting sections are configured with a special insulating section where the surrounding copper foil has been removed and a special conductive section connected to the solid ground and where the surrounding copper foil remains. Because the specific mounting sections are formed with square-shaped copper foil sections and the special non-mounting sections are formed with circular copper foil sections, temperature drops during electronic component mounting are suppressed, solder melting is suppressed, and solder can be welded to the specific mounting sections and special non-mounting sections to increase the rigidity of the specific control board. Warping and bending are suppressed, which suppresses peeling of mounted electronic components and peeling of the copper foil, improving the reliability of the gaming machine. Additionally, because the special non-mounted area, where no electronic components are mounted, is made of a circular copper foil section, heat dissipation is uniform from the entire periphery, making it less likely that uneven temperature distribution will occur in the special non-mounted area, preventing areas where the solder is incompletely melted and allowing the solder to be welded evenly, thereby increasing the rigidity of the special control board.

A gaming machine (such as a pachinko machine 1 or a slot machine) having a plurality of boards on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted,
The device is provided with specific substrates (main control substrate 1310, peripheral control substrate 1510) having a solid ground (solid pattern, substrate ground, GND) and having substantially the entire surface covered with an insulating film (solder resist),
The front substrate surface (mounting surface 1310x, front surface (mounting surface) 1510x) of the specific substrate has:
Mounting joints (through holes or pads on which electronic components are mounted) where electronic components are mounted;
Non-mounting joints (through holes and pads with no electronic components mounted)
A front substrate side signal pattern (signal line, control signal line, signal wire, wiring pattern for signal) is formed,
A specific non-mounting joint (ground line test point) connected to the solid ground among the non-mounting joints includes an insulating portion (insulating portion 1310w, 1510i) from which copper foil has been removed, and a conductive portion (thermal pattern 1310v, 1510v) from which copper foil remains and which is connected to the solid ground,
Among the non-mounting joints, special non-mounting joints (test points of signal lines) connected to the front board surface side signal patterns are at least partially covered with the insulating film (the outer peripheral edge 1310s1 of the land 1310s is covered with a green solder resist, which is an insulating coating solidly applied to the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310, and only a portion of the copper foil of the signal line is exposed).
It is characterized by:

According to the above invention, among the non-mounting joints where electronic components are not mounted, the specific non-mounting joints that connect to the solid ground are configured to include an insulating section where the copper foil has been removed and a conductive section where the copper foil remains and connects to the solid ground. This suppresses temperature drops at the specific non-mounting joints when electronic components are mounted, preventing incomplete melting of the solder. This allows solder to be welded to the specific non-mounting joints, increasing the rigidity of the specific board. This suppresses warping and bending, preventing the mounted electronic components from peeling off and the front board surface side signal pattern from peeling off, improving the reliability of the gaming machine. In addition, among the non-mounting joints where electronic components are not mounted, the special non-mounting joints that connect to the front board surface side signal pattern are configured to be at least partially covered with an insulating film. This prevents the special non-mounting joints that connect to the front board surface side signal pattern from peeling off due to the insulating film, even if the specific board is warped or bent, improving the reliability of the gaming machine.

A gaming machine (such as a pachinko machine 1 or a slot machine) having a plurality of boards on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted,
The device is provided with specific substrates (main control substrate 1310, peripheral control substrate 1510) that have a solid ground (solid pattern, substrate ground, GND) and are covered with an insulating film (solder resist) over substantially the entire surface of the front substrate on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted,
The front substrate surface (mounting surface 1310x, front surface (mounting surface) 1510x) of the specific substrate has:
Multiple test points (ground line test points, signal line test points, etc.) used to inspect mounted electronic components;
A wiring pattern for signals on the front board surface (a signal line, a control signal line, a signal line, a wiring pattern for signals formed on the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the front surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510) is formed,
A specific test point (ground line test point) connected to the solid ground among the plurality of test points includes an insulating portion (insulating portion 1310w, 1510i) from which the surrounding copper foil has been removed and to which solder cannot be welded, and a conductive portion (thermal pattern 1310v, 1510v) from which the surrounding copper foil portion remains and to which solder can be welded,
The special test points (signal line test points) connected to the front board surface side signal wiring pattern among the plurality of test points comprise: a front board surface side land portion (land 1310s) connected to the front board surface side signal wiring pattern; and a back board surface side land portion (a land of a through hole of a signal line formed on the solder surface 1310 of the main control board 1310 or the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510)) connected to a back board surface side signal wiring pattern (a signal line, a control signal line, a signal wire, a wiring pattern for a signal formed on the solder surface 1310 of the main control board 1310 or the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510)) formed on the back board surface of the specific board (a solder surface 1310 of the main control board 1310, or the back surface (solder surface) 1510y of the peripheral control board 1510),
The front board surface side land portion has an unweldable portion at least a part of which is covered with the insulating film and made unweldable by solder (a portion within a certain range from the outer periphery toward the center, which portion is covered with a solder resist solidly applied to the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310).
It is characterized by:

According to the above invention, among the multiple test points used to inspect mounted electronic components, specific test points connected to solid ground are configured to include an insulating portion where the surrounding copper foil has been removed and solder cannot be welded, and a conductive portion where the surrounding copper foil remains and solder can be welded. Among the multiple test points, special test points connected to the front-side signal wiring pattern are configured to include a front-side land portion connected to the front-side signal wiring pattern and a back-side land portion connected to the back-side signal wiring pattern. At least a portion of the front-side land portion is covered with an insulating film and has an unweldable portion where solder cannot be welded. This makes it difficult to weld solder to special test points that are easily targeted for tampering due to their connection to the front-side signal wiring pattern. This prevents unauthorized electronic components from being mounted on special test points and improves security against tampering with electronic boards.

A gaming machine (such as a pachinko machine or slot machine) that has a plurality of circuit boards on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, performs a symbol variation game based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and awards a gaming profit according to the result of the symbol variation game,
A determination means for determining whether a predetermined value (amount of balls dispensed) calculated based on the gaming profits given to the player has reached a specific value (a part in which the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines whether the amount of balls dispensed has reached a specific value);
When it is determined that the predetermined value has reached the specific value, a game suppression means (a part in which the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 controls the game to a stop state) controls subsequent games in a suppression mode that is more suppressed than before it is determined that the predetermined value has reached the specific value;
a magnetic detection substrate (magnetic sensor substrate 1050b) on which a magnetic detection means (magnetic detection element MSD) capable of detecting magnetism is mounted;
and a magnetic detection notification means capable of notifying that the magnetic detection board has detected magnetism (a part that controls the light emission of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) to an abnormality notification light emission mode, or/and a part that controls the light emission of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 side to an abnormality notification light emission mode (which may be turned off or may be turned on in a predetermined color (for example, red))).
The magnetic detection notification means does not notify that the magnetic detection board has detected magnetism during control in the suppression mode by the gaming suppression means,
The magnetic detection board is configured so that no marking portion (front side marking portion, back side marking portion) on which a component number that can identify a mounted component is written is provided on either side of the board (front board surface or back board surface).
It is characterized by:

According to the above invention, when it is determined that the predetermined value has reached a specific value, subsequent play is controlled in a suppressed mode. For example, by suppressing the awarding of gaming benefits in subsequent play, the player is prompted to stop play, thereby optimizing the management of gaming machines that have awarded a large gaming benefit. Furthermore, since the magnetic detection board does not report that it has detected magnetism while the game suppression means is controlling in a suppressed mode, power consumption can be reduced compared to when the magnetic detection board reports that it has detected magnetism while the game suppression means is controlling in a suppressed mode. Furthermore, not reporting that the magnetic detection board has detected magnetism while the game suppression means is controlling in a suppressed mode raises the risk of fraudulent activity against the magnetic detection board. However, since the magnetic detection board is configured so that no markings bearing component numbers that can identify components mounted on the board are provided on either side of the board, the circuitry of the magnetic detection board is difficult to ascertain, thereby preventing fraudulent activity against the magnetic detection means mounted on the magnetic detection board.

A gaming machine (such as a pachinko machine or slot machine) that has a plurality of circuit boards on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, performs a symbol variation game based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and awards a gaming profit according to the result of the symbol variation game,
A determination means for determining whether a predetermined value (amount of balls dispensed) calculated based on the gaming profits given to the player has reached a specific value (a part in which the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines whether the amount of balls dispensed has reached a specific value);
When it is determined that the predetermined value has reached the specific value, a game suppression means (a part in which the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 controls the game to be stopped) controls subsequent games in a suppressed manner;
A specific substrate (e.g., a main control substrate 1310) on which an insulating film is formed over substantially the entire surface of the substrate;
An abnormality detection means (e.g., a door frame opening switch or a main frame opening switch) capable of detecting a specific abnormality (e.g., a door open abnormality state that detects that the door frame 3 is opened relative to the main frame 4 or that the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2),
When the abnormality detection means detects the specific abnormality, an abnormality control means is provided which is capable of executing error control corresponding to the abnormality (a part which controls the emission of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200 and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) to an abnormality notification emission mode, or/and a part which controls the emission of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 side to an abnormality notification emission mode (which may be turned off or may be turned on in a predetermined color (for example, red))),
The abnormality control means does not execute error control corresponding to the specific abnormality even if the abnormality detection means detects the specific abnormality during control in the suppression mode by the gaming suppression means,
a specific electronic component (capacitor MC1) among the plurality of electronic components and a special electronic component (IC1) among the plurality of electronic components are arranged adjacent to each other on a front substrate surface of the specific substrate;
the specific electronic component has an exterior color (e.g., light blue) different from the color (e.g., green) of the insulating film formed on the front substrate surface of the specific substrate and the color (e.g., black) of the special electronic component;
It is characterized by:

According to the above invention, when it is determined that the predetermined value has reached a specific value, subsequent play is controlled in a suppressed mode. For example, by suppressing the awarding of gaming profits in subsequent play, the player is encouraged to stop play, thereby optimizing the management of gaming machines that have awarded a large amount of gaming profits. Furthermore, even if the anomaly detection board detects a specific abnormality during control in a suppressed mode by the gaming suppression means, error control corresponding to the abnormality is not executed. This reduces power consumption compared to when error control corresponding to the abnormality is executed during control in a suppressed mode by the gaming suppression means. Furthermore, even if the anomaly detection board detects a specific abnormality during control in a suppressed mode by the gaming suppression means, not executing error control corresponding to the abnormality may lead to fraudulent activity against the specific board. However, since a specific electronic component of a color different from both the insulating film formed on the front surface of the specific board and the color of the special electronic component is mounted near the specific electronic component on the specific board, the specific electronic component can be easily checked as a guide when checking whether the specific board has been tampered with, making it easier to detect if the special electronic component has been tampered with.

A gaming machine (such as a pachinko machine or slot machine) that has a plurality of circuit boards on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, performs a symbol variation game based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and awards a gaming profit according to the result of the symbol variation game.
A determination means for determining whether a predetermined value (amount of balls dispensed) calculated based on the gaming profits given to the player has reached a specific value (a part in which the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines whether the amount of balls dispensed has reached a specific value);
When it is determined that the predetermined value has reached the specific value, a game suppression means (a part in which the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 controls the game to be stopped) controls subsequent games in a suppressed manner;
a specific board (e.g., a main control board 1310) on whose front surface insertion-mount type electronic components and surface-mount type electronic components are mounted;
When a specific abnormality (for example, a door open abnormality state in which the door frame 3 is opened relative to the main frame 4 or the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2) occurs, an abnormality control means is provided (a part that controls the emission of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) to an abnormality notification emission mode, or/and a part that controls the emission of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 side to an abnormality notification emission mode (which may be turned off or may be turned on in a predetermined color (for example, red))), which is capable of executing error control corresponding to the abnormality,
The abnormality control means does not execute error control corresponding to the specific abnormality even if the specific abnormality occurs during control in the suppression mode by the gaming suppression means,
a specific electronic component (an insertion-mount type capacitor MC1) among the plurality of insertion-mount type electronic components mounted on the front substrate surface of the specific substrate and a special electronic component (a surface-mount type IC1) among the plurality of surface-mount type electronic components are adjacently arranged with an electronic component mounting unavailability area interposed therebetween;
It is characterized by:

According to the above invention, when it is determined that the predetermined value has reached a specific value, subsequent games are controlled in a suppressed mode. For example, by suppressing the awarding of gaming profits in subsequent games and encouraging a halt to play, it is possible to optimize the management of gaming machines that have awarded a large amount of gaming profits. Furthermore, even if the anomaly detection board detects a specific abnormality during control in a suppressed mode by the gaming suppression means, error control corresponding to the abnormality is not executed. This reduces power consumption compared to when error control corresponding to the abnormality is executed during control in a suppressed mode by the gaming suppression means. Even if the anomaly detection board detects a specific abnormality during control in a suppressed mode by the gaming suppression means and does not execute error control corresponding to the abnormality, cheating on the specific board occurs. Because a specific electronic component among the multiple insertion-mount type electronic components mounted on the front surface of the specific board and a special electronic component among the multiple surface-mount type electronic components are adjacently positioned across an electronic component mounting-prohibited area, the specific electronic component increases the rigidity of the main control board, suppressing bending and warping of the main control board. This prevents surface-mount type electronic components from peeling off, improving the reliability of the gaming machine.

A gaming machine (such as a pachinko machine or slot machine) that has a plurality of circuit boards on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, performs a symbol variation game based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and awards a gaming profit according to the result of the symbol variation game,
A determination means for determining whether a predetermined value (amount of balls dispensed) calculated based on the gaming profits given to the player has reached a specific value (a part in which the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines whether the amount of balls dispensed has reached a specific value);
When it is determined that the predetermined value has reached the specific value, a game suppression means (a part in which the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 controls the game to be stopped) controls subsequent games in a suppressed manner;
a specific substrate (e.g., a main control substrate 1310) on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, the entire surface of which is covered with an insulating film;
When a specific abnormality (for example, a door open abnormality state in which the door frame 3 is opened relative to the main frame 4 or the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2) occurs, an abnormality control means is provided (a part that controls the emission of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) to an abnormality notification emission mode, or/and a part that controls the emission of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 side to an abnormality notification emission mode (which may be turned off or may be turned on in a predetermined color (for example, red))), which is capable of executing error control corresponding to the abnormality,
The abnormality control means does not execute error control corresponding to the specific abnormality even if the specific abnormality occurs during control in the suppression mode by the gaming suppression means,
On the front board surface of the specific board, a front board surface side signal wiring pattern (a signal line, a control signal line, a signal line, a wiring pattern for signals formed on the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the surface (mounting surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510) is formed, and a plurality of test points (a test point for a ground line, a test point for a signal line, etc.) are formed,
A specific test point among the plurality of test points (a test point of a signal line formed on the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310) is connected to the front board side signal wiring pattern, and has a non-weldable portion that is partially covered with the insulating film to make it impossible to weld solder (a portion that is a certain range from the outer peripheral edge of the land 1310s of the through hole 1310 formed as a test point of the signal line formed on the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310 toward the center, and is covered with solder resist that is solidly applied to the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310).
It is characterized by:

According to the above invention, when it is determined that the predetermined value has reached a specific value, subsequent play is controlled in a suppressed mode. For example, by suppressing the awarding of gaming profits in subsequent play, the player is encouraged to stop playing, thereby optimizing the management of gaming machines that have awarded a large amount of gaming profits. Furthermore, even if the anomaly detection board detects a specific abnormality during control in a suppressed mode by the gaming suppression means, error control corresponding to the abnormality is not executed. This makes it possible to reduce power consumption compared to when error control corresponding to the abnormality is executed during control in a suppressed mode by the gaming suppression means. Furthermore, even if the anomaly detection board detects a specific abnormality during control in the suppression mode by the gaming suppression means, but does not execute error control corresponding to the abnormality, resulting in fraudulent activity on the specific board, the specific test points connected to the front-surface-side signal wiring pattern among the multiple test points formed on the front surface of the specific board are configured to have unweldable sections that are partially covered with an insulating film and cannot be soldered. This makes it difficult to solder to specific test points that are easily targeted for fraud due to their connection to the front-surface-side signal wiring pattern, thereby preventing the installation of fraudulent electronic components on the specific test points and improving security against fraudulent activity on the specific board.

A gaming machine (such as a pachinko machine or slot machine) that has a plurality of circuit boards on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, performs a symbol variation game based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and awards a gaming profit according to the result of the symbol variation game.
A determination means for determining whether a predetermined value (amount of balls dispensed) calculated based on the gaming profits given to the player has reached a specific value (a part in which the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines whether the amount of balls dispensed has reached a specific value);
When it is determined that the predetermined value has reached the specific value, a game suppression means (a part in which the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 controls the game to be stopped) controls subsequent games in a suppressed manner;
a specific substrate (e.g., a main control substrate 1310) on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, the entire surface of which is covered with an insulating film;
When a specific abnormality (for example, a door open abnormality state in which the door frame 3 is opened relative to the main frame 4 or the main frame 4 is opened relative to the outer frame 2) occurs, an abnormality control means is provided (a part that controls the emission of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards of the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, tray unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) to an abnormality notification emission mode, or/and a part that controls the emission of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 side to an abnormality notification emission mode (which may be turned off or may be turned on in a predetermined color (for example, red))), which is capable of executing error control corresponding to the abnormality,
The abnormality control means does not execute error control corresponding to the specific abnormality even if the specific abnormality occurs during control in the suppression mode by the gaming suppression means,
The front substrate surface of the specific substrate has
Mounting through-holes (through-holes in which electronic components are mounted) on which electronic components are mounted;
a non-mounting through-hole (a through-hole on which no electronic component is mounted) on which no electronic component is mounted;
The special non-mounting through holes (through holes formed as test points for signal lines) among the non-mounting through holes have a front board surface land (land 1310s) electrically connected to the front board surface wiring pattern, and a back board surface land (a land for a through hole of a signal line formed on the solder surface 1310 of the main control board 1310) electrically connected to the back board surface wiring pattern,
The outer periphery of the front board surface side land is covered with the insulating film (the outer periphery of the land 1310s of the through hole 1310 formed as a test point of the signal line formed on the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310 is covered with a solder resist solidly applied to the mounting surface 1310x of the main control board 1310).
It is characterized by:

According to the above invention, when it is determined that the predetermined value has reached a specific value, subsequent play is controlled in a suppressed mode. For example, by suppressing the awarding of gaming profits in subsequent play, the player is encouraged to stop playing, thereby optimizing the management of gaming machines that have awarded a large amount of gaming profits. Furthermore, even if the anomaly detection board detects a specific abnormality during control in a suppressed mode by the gaming suppression means, error control corresponding to the abnormality is not executed. This makes it possible to reduce power consumption compared to when error control corresponding to the abnormality is executed during control in a suppressed mode by the gaming suppression means. Furthermore, even if the anomaly detection board detects a specific abnormality during control in the suppression mode by the game suppression means but does not execute error control corresponding to the abnormality, resulting in fraudulent activity on the specific board, the special non-mounting through holes, which do not have electronic components mounted thereon and which have a front-surface-side land electrically connected to the front-surface-side wiring pattern and a back-surface-side land electrically connected to the back-surface-side wiring pattern, are configured so that the outer edge of the front-surface-side land is covered with an insulating film. This makes it difficult to deposit solder on the front-surface-side land of the special non-mounting through hole, which is easily targeted for fraud due to its connection to the front-surface-side signal wiring pattern. This prevents fraudulent electronic components from being mounted on the front-surface-side land of the special non-mounting through hole, thereby improving security against fraudulent activity on the specific board.

A gaming machine (such as a pachinko machine or slot machine) that has a plurality of circuit boards on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, performs a symbol variation game based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and awards a gaming profit according to the result of the symbol variation game,
A determination means for determining whether a predetermined value (amount of balls dispensed) calculated based on the gaming profits given to the player has reached a specific value (a part in which the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines whether the amount of balls dispensed has reached a specific value);
When it is determined that the predetermined value has reached the specific value, a game suppression means (a part where the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 controls the game to a stop state) controls the game to a suppression state in which the game is suppressed from proceeding thereafter;
A specific light-emitting substrate (for example, various decorative substrates for door frame units (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, dish unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided on the door frame 3) in which substantially the entire surface of the front substrate on which a plurality of light-emitting bodies are mounted is covered with an insulating film),
and a light-emitting control means for controlling the plurality of light-emitting elements mounted on the specific light-emitting board (the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards of the door frame unit).
The light emission control means controls the plurality of light emitters mounted on the specific light emission board during the control of the suppression state by the game suppression means to a mode corresponding to the suppression state (for example, a mode in which the light emitters are lit in white or red (which may not include blinking)),
The specific light-emitting substrate includes:
A front substrate surface side signal wiring pattern (a signal line formed on the front substrate surface of various decorative substrates of the door frame unit) arranged on the front substrate surface;
A rear board side signal wiring pattern (a signal line formed on the rear board surface of various decorative boards of the door frame unit) arranged on the rear board surface;
A through hole is formed that connects a front board surface land (a land for a through hole of a signal line formed on the front board surface of various decorative boards of the door frame unit) that is electrically connected to the front board surface signal wiring pattern, and a back board surface land (a land for a through hole of a signal line formed on the back board surface of various decorative boards of the door frame unit) that is electrically connected to the back board surface signal wiring pattern,
Among the through holes formed in the specific light-emitting substrate, specific through holes (through holes on which electronic components including the light-emitting body are not mounted) have specific front substrate surface lands at least partially covered with the insulating film (a certain range from the outer edge portion of the land of a through hole provided on a signal line on which no electronic components are mounted, toward the center, and covered with solder resist solidly applied on the front substrate surface of various decorative substrates of the door frame unit),
It is characterized by:

According to the above invention, when it is determined that the predetermined value has reached a specific value, subsequent play is controlled in a suppressed mode. For example, by suppressing the awarding of gaming benefits in subsequent play, the player is encouraged to stop play, thereby optimizing the management of gaming machines that have awarded a large amount of gaming benefits. Furthermore, among the through-holes formed on a specific light-emitting substrate mounted with multiple light-emitting elements that are controlled in a mode corresponding to the suppression state during control in a suppression mode by the game suppression means, specific through-holes that do not mount electronic components including light-emitting elements are formed to have specific front-substrate-side lands at least partially covered with an insulating film. This allows for uniform reflectivity on the front substrate surface of the specific light-emitting substrate, and when control in a suppression mode by the game suppression means is being performed, the multiple light-emitting elements mounted on the specific light-emitting substrate can be controlled in a mode corresponding to the suppression state to emit light evenly and efficiently, making it easier for players to notice that control in a suppression mode by the game suppression means is being performed.

A gaming machine (such as a pachinko machine or slot machine) that has a plurality of circuit boards on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, performs a symbol variation game based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and awards a gaming profit according to the result of the symbol variation game,
A determination means for determining whether a predetermined value (amount of balls dispensed) calculated based on the gaming profits given to the player has reached a specific value (a part in which the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines whether the amount of balls dispensed has reached a specific value);
When it is determined that the predetermined value has reached the specific value, a game suppression means (a part where the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 controls the game to a stop state) controls the game to a suppression state in which the game is suppressed from proceeding thereafter;
and a plurality of light-emitting boards on which a plurality of light-emitting bodies are mounted (for example, boards on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted and which are provided in the door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, the door frame right side unit 430, the tray unit 200, and the door frame top unit 450 provided in the door frame 3), or a board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted and which is provided on the game board 5 side),
During the control of the suppression state by the game suppression means, among the plurality of light-emitting boards, a specific light-emitting board in which almost the entire surface of the front board is covered with a white insulating film (for example, a board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, which is provided in a door frame unit (such as the door frame left side unit 420, door frame right side unit 430, dish unit 200, and door frame top unit 450 provided in the door frame 3)) and a special light-emitting board in which almost the entire surface of the front board is covered with a green or black insulating film (for example, the rear upper first decorative board of the information display of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210) are mounted, and the plurality of light-emitting elements mounted on each of these are controlled to a light-emitting mode corresponding to the suppression state,
The special light-emitting substrate is
A signal wiring pattern on the front substrate surface (for example, a signal line formed on the front substrate surface of the rear upper first decorative substrate of the information display of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210) arranged on the front substrate surface;
A signal wiring pattern on the rear substrate surface (for example, a signal line formed on the rear substrate surface of the rear upper first decorative substrate of the information display of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210) arranged on the rear substrate surface,
It has a front board surface land (for example, a through hole land provided in a signal line formed on the front board surface of the back upper first decorative board of the information display of the back rear upper movable decorative body 3210) that is electrically connected to the front board surface side signal wiring pattern, and a back board surface land (for example, a through hole land provided in a signal line formed on the back board surface of the back upper first decorative board of the information display of the back rear upper movable decorative body 3210) that is electrically connected to the back board surface side signal wiring pattern,
Among the through holes formed in the special light-emitting board, special through holes that are not equipped with electronic components including the light-emitting body (for example, through holes that are provided in the signal line formed on the rear-upper first decorative board of the information display of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 and are not equipped with electronic components including LEDs) have special front board surface side lands (lands of through holes that are provided in the signal line formed on the rear-upper first decorative board of the information display of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 and are not equipped with electronic components including LEDs, within a certain range from the outer edge of the land toward the center, and having a portion covered with solder resist that is solidly applied to the front board surface of various decorative boards of the door frame unit) that are at least partially covered with the insulating film.
It is characterized by:

According to the above invention, when it is determined that the predetermined value has reached a specific value, subsequent play is controlled in a suppressed mode. For example, by suppressing the awarding of gaming benefits in subsequent play, the player is encouraged to stop play, thereby optimizing the management of gaming machines that have awarded a large amount of gaming benefits. Furthermore, among multiple light-emitting boards on which multiple light-emitting elements are mounted, which are controlled in a manner corresponding to the suppression state during control in a suppressed mode by the game suppression means, a special light-emitting board is formed on which the surface of the board is substantially entirely covered with a green or black insulating film, and the special through-holes on which electronic components including light-emitting elements are not mounted are formed to have special surface-side lands at least partially covered with an insulating film. This not only enables uniform reflectivity on the surface of the special light-emitting board, but also prevents light from light-emitting elements mounted on boards other than the special light-emitting board from reflecting off the surface of the special light-emitting board, thereby preventing the multiple light-emitting elements mounted on the surface of the special light-emitting board from being mistakenly recognized as emitting light during control in a suppressed mode by the game suppression means.

[Modification of the luminous decorative part]
Next, modified examples of luminous decorative parts that are detachably attached to the gaming board 5 will be described in detail with reference to Figures 404 to 409. Figure 404 is a front view showing the gaming board 5 to which the back-front left decorative unit 3120 and the back-rear lower performance unit 3300 are attached. As shown in Figure 404, the gaming board 5 has a plurality of luminous decorative parts, and in this embodiment, the luminous decorative parts are, for example, the back-front left decorative unit 3120 and the back-rear lower performance unit 3300 described above.

The rear-lower performance unit 3300 is attached to the center and lower position of the gaming board 5 in the vertical direction. As described above, the rear-lower performance unit 3300 has a rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and a rear-right movable decorative body 3302 that are adjacent to each other on the left and right. The rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear-right movable decorative body 3302 are supported at their base ends so that they can rotate around axes in the front-to-back direction and can be raised and lowered.

When the pachinko machine 1 is in its normal state, the rear-lower performance unit 3300 is retracted to a retracted position that is difficult for players to see. Under certain conditions, such as when a specific performance occurs or when checking operation upon power-on, the rear-lower performance unit 3300 is deployed to a deployment position that is easily visible to players. When the rear-lower performance unit 3300 is deployed to its deployment position, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear-right movable decorative body 3302 rotate around their base ends so that their respective tips move upward, and they rise. The right edge of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and the left edge of the rear-right movable decorative body 3302 come into contact with each other, causing a large decorative body with a stylized letter "A" to appear in the center of the game board 5 in this embodiment. The rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and the rear-right movable decorative body 3302 have the same configuration, and the following description will focus on the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 in detail.

Figure 405 is an exploded perspective view showing the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300. As shown in Figure 405, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300 has a rear-left movable decorative board 3315 with multiple LEDs 3315a mounted on the front mounting surface, and a storage section 3316 in which the rear-left movable decorative board 3315 is stored.

The rear left movable decorative board 3315 has multiple full-color LEDs 3315a mounted on its front mounting surface, which is positioned to face the player. The multiple LEDs 3315a may, for example, be configured to include wide-angle top-view type LEDs capable of emitting light within a 130-degree angle range centered on an optical axis perpendicular to the front surface, or wide-angle side-view type LEDs capable of emitting light within a 130-degree angle range centered on a horizontal optical axis, or may be configured to include regular top-view type LEDs or regular side-view type LEDs, without being limited to wide-angle top-view type LEDs or wide-angle side-view type LEDs.

The front mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative board 3315 is coated with white solder resist (protective material) and is provided with notations (not shown) indicating the positions where the multiple LEDs 3315a will be mounted and the part numbers of the LEDs 3315a. The notations are preferably silk-screened in a color such as yellow that is close to the brightness of the white solder resist, and together with the white solder resist, this can suppress uneven light emission on the rear-left movable decorative board 3315. From this perspective, it is preferable that no electronic components other than the multiple LEDs 3315a be mounted on the front mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative board 3315.

The storage section 3316 has a case body 3317 made of transparent resin in the shape of a box with an open rear, and a cover body 3318 made of transparent resin in the shape of a plate. The case body 3317 has a front surface 3317a facing the player, and a plate-shaped side wall portion 3317b formed along the edge of the front surface 3317a and extending rearward from the front surface 3317a.

The front surface 3317a of the case body 3317 may be plated, patterned, or otherwise processed to express letters, characters, or other designs (in this example, a stylized letter "A") as the rear left movable decorative body 3301. Furthermore, the front surface 3317a, in the area where light is irradiated from the multiple LEDs 3315a mounted on the front mounting surface of the rear left movable decorative board 3315, may be entirely light-transmitting, or may have a mixture of light-transmitting and non-light-transmitting areas. The light-transmitting areas may be colorless and transparent, or colored and transparent. Furthermore, the light-transmitting areas may be treated with a light-diffusing process, such as lens cutting, or may not be treated with a light-diffusing process. Additionally, a light-transmitting member (such as a diffusion lens) may be further provided between the front surface 3317a and the rear left movable decorative substrate 3315. In this case, the light-transmitting member and the case body 3317 may be integrally formed to form a double structure, or the light-transmitting member and the case body 3317 may be formed separately.

The rear-left movable decorative board 3315 is positioned within the case body 3317 so that its front mounting surface faces the front surface 3317a, and the positioned rear-left movable decorative board 3315 is attached to the case body 3317 with fixing members such as screws or bolts. After this, the cover body 3318 is attached to the case body 3317 with fixing members such as screws or bolts so as to cover the open rear surface of the case body 3317 to which the rear-left movable decorative board 3315 is attached.

Cover body 3318 is formed in a plate shape corresponding to the shape of case body 3317. That is, in this example, cover body 3318 is formed in the shape of a portion of the design featuring the stylized letter "A" (the left side of the design featuring the stylized letter "A") corresponding to case body 3317, which is formed in the shape of a portion of the design featuring the stylized letter "A" (the left side of the design featuring the stylized letter "A"). Cover body 3318 also has a first opening 3318a formed by leaving the edge of cover body 3318 intact, and a second opening 3318b formed by cutting out a portion of the edge of cover body 3318.

Figure 406(a) is a rear view showing the back of the rear left movable decorative body 3301 of the rear lower performance unit 3300, and Figure 406(b) is an A-A cross-sectional view of Figure 406(a). As shown in Figure 406(a), multiple electronic components other than the LED 3315a are mounted on the rear mounting surface of the rear left movable decorative board 3315. The multiple electronic components include, for example, an LED driver 3315b that controls the light emission of the multiple LEDs 3315a, a resistor 3315c that dissipates power as heat, and a connector 3315d used for connecting to the outside; the LED driver 3315b, resistor 3315c, and connector 3315d may generate heat when the LED 3315a is illuminated.

The first opening 3318a and second opening 3318b of the cover body 3318 are formed according to the positions of the LED driver 3315b, resistor 3315c, and connector 3315d, which are heat-generating electronic components mounted on the rear mounting surface of the rear left movable decorative board 3315. When viewed from the back of the rear left movable decorative body 3301, it is preferable that they be formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the LED driver 3315b, resistor 3315c, or connector 3315d. It is even more preferable that they be formed so as to surround, at a predetermined interval, the LED driver 3315b and resistor 3315c, which are mounted in a partially densely packed manner on the rear mounting surface of the rear left movable decorative board 3315.

In the above-mentioned rear-left movable decorative body 3301, the LED driver 3315b, resistor 3315c, and connector 3315d radiate heat when the multiple LEDs 3315a are illuminated, and some of the heated air inside the storage section 3316 is released to the outside of the storage section 3316 through the first opening 3318a and the second opening 3318b. However, in conventional pachinko machines 1, air stagnates inside the storage section of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301, making it difficult to effectively release the air heated by the heat dissipation from the LED driver 3315b, resistor 3315c, and connector 3315d when the multiple LEDs 3315a are illuminated. For example, the temperature of the rear-left movable decorative board 3315 may rise, causing the multiple LEDs 3315a to erroneously emit light, which may cause harm to players and the amusement hall where the gaming machine is installed, and ultimately may reduce the reliability of the gaming machine. Furthermore, when attaching the rear left movable decorative element 3301 to the rear lower performance unit 3300, or when attaching the rear lower performance unit 3300 to the gaming board 5, there is a risk that the worker's hand may come into contact with the LED driver 3315b, resistor 3315c, or connector 3315d through the first opening 3318a or second opening 3318b. This could damage the LED driver 3315b, resistor 3315c, or connector 3315d that comes into contact with the worker's hand, causing multiple LEDs 3315a to emit light erroneously, potentially causing harm to players and the gaming hall where the gaming machine is installed, and ultimately reducing the reliability of the gaming machine. Below, we will explain how modifications to the rear left movable decorative element 3301 have been made to solve these problems.

As shown in Figure 406 (b), in this embodiment, the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 has a cover body 3318 attached to the case body 3317 so as to form a gap S with a preset distance S1 between the rear-left movable decorative substrate 3315 and the cover body 3318. In detail, the front (inner surface) of the cover body 3318 is formed with a plurality of abutment portions 3318c that extend toward the rear-left movable decorative substrate 3315 and abut against the rear-left movable decorative substrate 3315, and when the cover body 3318 is attached to the case body 3317, the abutment portions 3318c abut against the rear-left movable decorative substrate 3315, thereby forming a gap S with a preset distance S1 between the rear-left movable decorative substrate 3315 and the cover body 3318.

The abutment portion 3318c of the cover body 3318 may be formed, for example, in a cylindrical or prismatic shape, as long as its height from the front (inner surface) of the cover body 3318 is equal to the above-mentioned preset distance S1. Furthermore, a fixing member such as a screw or bolt may be inserted into the abutment portion 3318c when fixing the cover body 3318 to the case body 3317 or when fixing the rear left movable decorative board 3315 to the case body 3317.

Figure 407 is an oblique view showing a portion of the back of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 of the rear-lower performance unit 3300. As shown in Figure 407, when certain conditions are met, a first area display section 3315f indicating the area corresponding to the first opening 3318a and a second area display section 3315g indicating the area corresponding to the second opening 3318b are formed on the rear mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative board 3315. The specific condition is that a predetermined amount of light is irradiated onto the back of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301. For example, when attaching the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 to the rear-lower performance unit 3300 or in a workshop where the rear-lower performance unit 3300 is attached to the game board 5, the back of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 is facing upward when the worker views the back of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301, and light from the workshop lighting is irradiated onto the back of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301.

In the case of the rear left movable decorative body 3301 of this embodiment, when light is shone on the back of the rear left movable decorative body 3301, such as when an operator looks at the back of the rear left movable decorative body 3301 in an attempt to attach the rear lower performance unit 3300 to the gaming board 5, a first area display unit 3315f is formed on the back mounting surface of the rear left movable decorative board 3315 by a shadow corresponding to the edge of the first opening 3318a, and a second area display unit 3315g is formed by a shadow corresponding to the edge of the second opening 3318b, and these first area display unit 3315f and second area display unit 3315g can notify the operator that the first opening 3318a and second opening 3318b have been formed on the back of the rear left movable decorative body 3301. This reduces the chance that an operator's hands will come into contact with the LED driver 3315b, resistor 3315c, or connector 3315d mounted on the rear mounting surface of the rear left movable decorative board 3315 through the first opening 3318a and second opening 3318b, preventing damage to the LED driver 3315b, resistor 3315c, or connector 3315d, which could cause the rear left movable decorative board 3315 to malfunction and cause harm to players or the amusement hall where the gaming machine is installed, and ultimately prevents a decline in the reliability of the gaming machine.

It is preferable that the rear-left movable decorative board 3315 be coated with white solder resist (protective material) on both the front mounting surface and the rear mounting surface. The white solder resist coated on the rear mounting surface provides a high contrast with the first area display portion 3315f and the second area display portion 3315g formed on the rear mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative board 3315 due to the shadows cast by the edges of the first opening 3318a and the second opening 3318b. This allows the worker to easily see the first area display portion 3315f and the second area display portion 3315g when certain conditions are met for the rear-left movable decorative body 3301. This further reduces the chance that an operator's hands will come into contact with the LED driver 3315b, resistor 3315c or connector 3315d mounted on the rear mounting surface of the rear left movable decorative board 3315 through the first opening 3318a and second opening 3318b, preventing damage to the LED driver 3315b, resistor 3315c or connector 3315d which could cause the rear left movable decorative board 3315 to malfunction and cause harm to players or the amusement hall where the gaming machine is installed, and ultimately prevents a decline in the reliability of the gaming machine.

In addition, it is preferable that the rear mounting surface of the rear left movable decorative board 3315 have a notation silk-screened in a bright color such as yellow or pink indicating the position, orientation, and part number of the LED driver 3315b, resistor 3315c, connector 3315d, and other electronic components other than the LED 3315a. The bright color notation, together with the white solder resist coated on the rear mounting surface, provides a high contrast with the first area display section 3315f and second area display section 3315g formed on the rear mounting surface of the rear left movable decorative board 3315, making it even easier for the worker to see the first area display section 3315f and second area display section 3315g when certain conditions are met for the rear left movable decorative body 3301.

In addition, the rear mounting surface of the rear left movable decorative board 3315 may have a notation silk-screened in a dark color such as brown or black indicating the position, orientation, and part number of the LED driver 3315b, resistor 3315c, connector 3315d, and other electronic components other than the LED 3315a. It is preferable that the dark notation be formed in a position that overlaps the first area display unit 3315f and the second area display unit 3315g formed on the rear mounting surface of the rear left movable decorative board 3315. By forming the first area display unit 3315f and the second area display unit 3315g overlapping each other, such dark notation can provide greater contrast against the white solder resist coated on the rear mounting surface, making it easier for the worker to see the first area display unit 3315f and the second area display unit 3315g when certain conditions are met for the rear left movable decorative body 3301.

Apart from the LED 3315a, other electronic components such as the LED driver 3315b, resistor 3315c, or connector 3315d are mounted in multiple locations near the LED driver 3315b. If the resistors 3315c and other electronic components have a dark exterior color such as brown or black, they are preferably mounted in a position that overlaps the first area display unit 3315f and the second area display unit 3315g. By forming the first area display unit 3315f and the second area display unit 3315g overlapping each other, resistors and other components with such dark exterior colors can provide greater contrast against the white solder resist coated on the rear mounting surface, making it even easier for the worker to see the first area display unit 3315f and the second area display unit 3315g when certain conditions are met on the rear left movable decorative body 3301.

The cover body 3318 may be formed opaque or colored transparent, but it is preferable that it be formed colorless and transparent from the viewpoint of visibility of the first area display portion 3315f and the second area display portion 3315g formed on the rear mounting surface of the rear left movable decorative substrate 3315. For example, if the cover body 3318 is opaque, the first area display portion 3315f and the second area display portion 3315g will be formed larger on the rear mounting surface of the rear left movable decorative board 3315, but there is a risk that the cover body 3318 itself will obstruct the visibility of the first area display portion 3315f and the second area display portion 3315g.Furthermore, if the cover body 3318 is colored and opaque, there is a risk that the cover body 3318 and the first area display portion 3315f and the second area display portion 3315g will become integrated, obstructing the visibility of the first area display portion 3315f and the second area display portion 3315g. Therefore, it is preferable that the cover body 3318 be formed colorless and transparent, which reduces the risk of obstructing the visibility of the first area display portion 3315f and the second area display portion 3315g.

Furthermore, the thickness of the cover body 3318 is preferably in the range of, for example, 0.2 mm to 4.0 mm. Assuming that the electronic components mounted on the rear-left movable decorative board 3315 are exposed without protruding from the first opening 3318a and the second opening 3318b, for example, the mounting height of the tallest electronic component mounted on the rear-left movable decorative board 3315 is 1.9 mm (SOP-type IC), and the mounting height of the shortest electronic component mounted on the rear-left movable decorative board 3315 is 0.2 mm (JIS Standard 0402 type chip capacitors, chip resistors, etc.). Therefore, ignoring the spacing S1 of the gap S, the thickness of the cover body 3318 is preferably 1.9 mm or more, but may be less than 1.9 mm taking into account the size of the spacing S1 of the gap S described below. Furthermore, the width of the shadow of the first opening 3318a or second opening 3318b that forms the first area display section 3315f and second area display section 3315g on the rear mounting surface of the rear left movable decorative substrate 3315 is proportional to the thickness of the cover body 3318. From the viewpoint that visibility is reduced if the width is excessively small, and that the range indicated by the first area display section 3315f and second area display section 3315g becomes unclear if the width is excessively large, it is more preferable that the thickness of the cover body 3318 be in the range of 0.5 mm to 3.0 mm, for example.

It is preferable that the edges of the cover body 3318 that form the first opening 3318a and the second opening 3318b are chamfered into a flat or curved shape. By chamfering the edges of the cover body 3318 that form the first opening 3318a and the second opening 3318b, light is diffusely reflected at the edges of the cover body 3318, which further reduces the brightness of the first area display portion 3315f and the second area display portion 3315g formed on the rear mounting surface of the rear left movable decorative substrate 3315, thereby further improving the visibility of the first area display portion 3315f and the second area display portion 3315g.

It is desirable that the spacing S1 of the gap S formed between the cover body 3318 and the rear-left movable decorative board 3315 be larger than the height from the rear mounting surface of electronic components such as the LED driver 3315b, resistor 3315c or connector 3315d mounted on the rear mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative board 3315, thereby preventing the tip of the electronic component mounted on the rear-left movable decorative board 3315 from protruding outside the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 through the first opening 3318a or the second opening 3318b, and preventing electronic components such as the LED driver 3315b, resistor 3315c or connector 3315d from coming into contact with objects outside the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and being damaged, for example, when multiple rear-left movable decorative bodies 3301 are stored stacked before being attached to the game board 5. Furthermore, since the connector 3315d is higher from the rear mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative board 3315 than the LED driver 3315b and resistor 3315c, the spacing S1 of the gap S formed between the cover body 3318 and the rear-left movable decorative board 3315 may be smaller than the height of the connector 3315d from the rear mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative board 3315.

The distance S1 of the gap S formed between the cover body 3318 and the rear-left movable decorative board 3315 is preferably in the range of 0.2 mm to 7.0 mm, for example. Assuming that the electronic components mounted on the rear-left movable decorative board 3315 are exposed without protruding from the first opening 3318a and the second opening 3318b, for example, the mounting height of the tallest electronic component mounted on the rear-left movable decorative board 3315 is 1.9 mm (SOP-type IC), and the mounting height of the shortest electronic component mounted on the rear-left movable decorative board 3315 is 0.2 mm (JIS standard 0402 type chip capacitors, chip resistors, etc.), so the distance S1 of the gap S should be 0.2 mm or greater. Furthermore, the width of the shadow of the first opening 3318a or second opening 3318b that forms the first area display section 3315f and second area display section 3315g on the rear mounting surface of the rear left movable decorative substrate 3315 is inversely proportional to the spacing S1 of the gap S. From the standpoint that an excessively small spacing S1 reduces visibility, and an excessively large spacing S1 makes the range indicated by the first area display section 3315f and second area display section 3315g unclear, it is more preferable that the spacing S1 of the gap S be in the range of 1.0 mm to 6.0 mm, for example.

In this embodiment, to improve the visibility of the first area display portion 3315f and the second area display portion 3315g, the thickness of the cover body 3318 and the spacing S1 of the gap S are set to appropriate values relative to the inner diameter of the first opening 3318a and the second opening 3318b. More specifically, for example, when the spacing S1 of the gap S is 0.2 mm, the thickness of the cover body 3318 is 1.7 mm or more to prevent electronic components from protruding from the cover body 3318. However, when the spacing S1 of the gap S is 0.2 mm, the cover body 3318 and the rear left movable decorative board 3315 are too close to each other, which may prevent the first area display portion 3315f and the second area display portion 3315g from being visible. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the first area display section 3315f or the second area display section 3315g indicates an area where two SOP type ICs are mounted side by side, the spacing S1 of the gap S may be set to 4.0 mm and the thickness of the cover body 3318 may be set to 2.0 mm, or the spacing S1 of the gap S may be set to 6.0 mm and the thickness of the cover body 3318 may be set to 3.0 mm.

In this embodiment, the cover body 3318 is formed in a plate shape and arranged parallel to the rear left movable decorative substrate 3315, but the cover body 3318 may also be formed in a manner in which a partial inclined surface is formed that is inclined relative to the rear left movable decorative substrate 3315 at the position where the first opening 3318a and the second opening 3318b are formed, thereby improving the visibility of the first area display portion 3315f formed by the shadow corresponding to the edge of the first opening 3318a and the second area display portion 3315g formed by the shadow corresponding to the edge of the second opening 3318b. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the first opening 3318a and the second opening 3318b are formed by cutting out the cover body 3318 vertically, but the first opening 3318a and the second opening 3318b may be formed by cutting out the cover body 3318 so that the inner surfaces of the first opening 3318a and the second opening 3318b are inclined relative to the front and rear surfaces of the cover body 3318, which can improve the visibility of the first region display portion 3315f formed by a shadow corresponding to the edge of the first opening 3318a and the second region display portion 3315g formed by a shadow corresponding to the edge of the second opening 3318b.

In addition, the abutment portion 3318c formed on the cover body 3318 may be formed in the shape of a weight, for example, by providing a positioning hole in the rear left movable decorative base plate 3315 and providing a protrusion on the top of the support post that is inserted into the positioning hole. In addition to regulating the distance S1 between the cover body 33318 and the rear left movable decorative base plate 3315, this can also make it easier to position the cover body 3318 relative to the case body 3317.

A preferred embodiment is for the cover body 3318 to have multiple abutment portions 3318c formed on it to improve stability when the cover body 3318 is attached to the case body 3317. The multiple abutment portions 3318c are formed to surround the periphery of the first opening 3318a and the second opening 3318b, and together with the first area display portion 3315f formed by the shadow corresponding to the edge of the first opening 3318a and the second area display portion 3315g formed by the shadow corresponding to the edge of the second opening 3318b, can notify the worker that the first opening 3318a and the second opening 3318b have been formed on the back surface of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301. This further reduces the chance that the worker's hands will come into contact with the LED driver 3315b, resistor 3315c, or connector 3315d mounted on the rear mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative board 3315 through the first opening 3318a and the second opening 3318b. Furthermore, if it is difficult to form the multiple abutment portions 33318c so that they surround the periphery of the first opening 3318a and the second opening 3318b, they may be formed between the first opening 3318a and the second opening 3318b, thereby improving the strength of the cover body 3318.

Furthermore, the side wall portion 3317b of the case body 3317 may be formed with multiple ribs perpendicular to the side wall portion 3317b. When the multiple ribs are formed on the inner surface of the side wall portion 3317b, they can increase the strength of the case body 3317, and the multiple ribs act as a lenticular lens with a semi-cylindrical unevenness, allowing the side wall portion 3317b to function as a diffuse reflector for the light emitted by the LED 3315a mounted on the rear left movable decorative substrate 3315. Furthermore, when the multiple ribs are formed on the outer surface of the side wall portion 3317b, in addition to increasing the strength of the case body 3317, they can increase the outer surface area of the side wall portion 3317b, thereby improving the heat dissipation effect.

The case body 3317 and cover body 3318 may be configured in such a way that, for example, a flat cover body 3318 having a rear-left movable decorative board 3315 attached thereto is attached to the case body 3317, or the cover body 3318 is attached to a U-shaped cross-section case body 3317 having a rear-left movable decorative board 3315 attached thereto, or an opening may be provided on the front portion 3317a of the U-shaped cross-section case body 3317, and the rear-left movable decorative board 3315 is attached to the case body 3317 side so that electronic components such as the LED driver 3315b, resistor 3315c and connector 3315d face the opening side (in this configuration, the cover body 3318 may be formed in a flat plate shape without an opening).

Figure 408 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line B-B of Figure 406. As shown in Figure 408, the multiple openings (three first openings 3318a and one second opening 3318b) formed in the cover body 3318 are connected to each other via a gap S formed between the cover body 3318 and the rear-left movable decorative substrate 3315. Therefore, in the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 of this embodiment, when electronic components such as the LED driver 3315b, resistor 3315c, or connector 3315d generate heat, the heated air in the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 is released to the outside through one opening, and external air flows into the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 through the other opening, creating an air flow within the rear-left movable decorative body 3301. As a result, air is prevented from stagnating within the rear left movable decorative body 3301, and heat generated by the LED driver 3315b, resistor 3315c and connector 3315d when the multiple LEDs 3315a are illuminated can be effectively dissipated to the outside. This prevents, for example, the temperature of the rear left movable decorative board 3315 from rising and causing the multiple LEDs 3315a to erroneously illuminate, causing harm to players or the amusement hall where the gaming machine is installed, and ultimately prevents a decrease in the reliability of the gaming machine.

The three first openings 3318a and one second opening 3318b are formed in the cover body 3318 so that they at least partially overlap in the vertical direction. Therefore, in the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 of this embodiment, when electronic components such as the LED driver 3315b, resistor 3315c, or connector 3315d generate heat, the heated air in the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 is released to the outside through the upper first opening 3318a, and external air flows into the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 through the lower second opening 33319b, creating an air flow from bottom to top within the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 as shown by the arrow in the figure. As a result, air stagnation within the rear left movable decorative body 3301 is more effectively prevented, and the heat generated by the LED driver 3315b, resistor 3315c and connector 3315d when the multiple LEDs 3315a are illuminated can be effectively dissipated to the outside. This prevents, for example, the temperature of the rear left movable decorative board 3315 from rising and causing the multiple LEDs 3315a to erroneously illuminate, causing harm to players or the amusement hall where the gaming machine is installed, and ultimately prevents a decrease in the reliability of the gaming machine.

The second opening 3318b is formed integrally with the notch 3317c, which is a cutout formed by cutting out a portion of the side wall 3317b of the case body 3317. Therefore, when electronic components such as the LED driver 3315b, resistor 3315c, or connector 3315d generate heat and the heated air inside the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 is released to the outside through the upper first opening 3318a, more external air can flow into the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 through the lower second opening 3319b, creating an air flow from bottom to top within the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 as shown by the arrows in the figure. This more effectively prevents air from stagnating inside the rear-left movable decorative body 3301, and effectively dissipates heat generated by the LED driver 3315b, resistor 3315c, and connector 3315d when the multiple LEDs 3315a are illuminated to the outside.

Furthermore, the second opening 3318b is formed integrally with the notch 3317c formed by cutting out a portion of the side wall 3317b of the case body 3317, and the rear left movable decorative body 3301 is operated in accordance with the effects of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, when the rear left movable decorative body 3301 operates, external air flows into the rear left movable decorative body 3301 from the second opening 3318b via the notch 3317c, and the air inside the rear left movable decorative body 3301 is released to the outside via the first opening 3318a. As a result, an air flow from bottom to top is created within the rear left movable decorative body 3301 as shown by the arrows in the figure, more effectively preventing air from stagnating within the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and effectively dissipating heat generated by the LED driver 3315b, resistor 3315c, and connector 3315d when the multiple LEDs 3315a are illuminated to the outside.

Among the electronic components such as the LED driver 3315b, resistor 3315c, and connector 3315d, the connector 3315d is preferably a so-called right-angle type, in which its fitting opening is perpendicular to the rear mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative board 3315. The right-angle type connector 3315d is mounted on the rear mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative board 3315 so that its fitting opening faces the notch 3317c of the second opening 3318b, making it easy to attach and detach the connector 3315d to the fitting opening via the notch 3317c of the second opening 3318b. Furthermore, the right-angle type connector 3315d has a smaller height from the rear mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative board 3315 compared to the straight-type connector described below, which prevents impediments to the flow of air flowing into the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 from the second opening 3318b.

Figure 409 is a cross-sectional view showing another embodiment of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301. As shown in Figure 409, the connector 3315d may be mounted as a so-called straight type, with the fitting opening parallel to the rear mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative board 3315. If the straight type connector 3315d is mounted on the rear mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative board 3315 so as to correspond to the second opening 3318b, it may impede the flow of air flowing into the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 from the second opening 3318b. Therefore, it is preferable to mount it at the top of the rear mounting surface of the rear-left movable decorative board 3315 so as to correspond to the uppermost first opening 3318a. Such a straight-type connector 3315d has a tip that protrudes outside the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 through the first opening 3318a, so that, as shown by the arrow in the figure, the heat generated by the LED driver 3315b and resistor 3315c transmitted through the rear-left movable decorative board 3315 can be released from the tip to the outside of the rear-left movable decorative body 3301. In addition, the straight-type connector 3315d mounted to correspond to the uppermost first opening 3318a can suppress impediments to the air flow within the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 and can also make it easier to attach and detach the connector to and from the fitting port of the connector 3315d. The connector 3315d may be mounted at the top and bottom of the rear left movable decorative substrate 3315 so as to correspond to the uppermost first opening 3318a or second opening 3318b, respectively, so as to sandwich electronic components such as the LED driver 3315b and resistor 3315c, excluding the connector 3315d, from above and below.

In the above embodiment, the first opening 3319a and the second opening 3319b are formed to correspond to the positions of the electronic components such as LED drivers, resistors, and connectors mounted on the rear mounting surface of the rear left movable decorative substrate 3315. The first opening 3319a is formed to surround the LED drivers and resistors mounted in a partially densely packed manner on the rear mounting surface of the rear left movable decorative substrate 3315 at a predetermined interval. All electronic components, including the ED driver and resistors, may be formed in multiple locations on the rear left movable decorative body 3301 so that each is exposed to the outside through a single first opening 3319a. This allows air to flow from bottom to top within the rear left movable decorative body 3301 through the multiple first openings 3319a and second openings 3319b, more effectively preventing air from stagnating within the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and effectively dissipating heat generated by the LED driver, resistors and connectors to the outside.

In addition, the cover body 3318 of the above embodiment may have a first opening 3319a and a second opening 3319b formed to correspond to the positions of all electronic components such as LED drivers, resistors, and connectors mounted on the rear mounting surface of the rear left movable decorative board 3315, or the first opening 3319a and the second opening 3319b may be formed to correspond to the positions of at least some of the electronic components such as LED drivers, resistors, and connectors mounted on the rear mounting surface of the rear left movable decorative board 3315. Electronic components that do not have openings formed in positions corresponding to their mounting positions on the rear mounting surface of the rear left movable decorative board 3315 will have a reduced heat dissipation efficiency for the heat generated by the electronic components, but this can further reduce contact from outside the rear left movable decorative body 3301 and prevent damage to the electronic components due to external contact.

In the above-mentioned rear-left movable decorative body 3301, when the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 is deployed to the deployed position and the multiple LEDs 3315a are illuminated, the heated air in the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 is released to the outside through one opening, and external air flows into the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 through the other opening, creating an air flow within the rear-left movable decorative body 3301, so that the heat generated by the LED driver 3315b, resistor 3315c and connector 3315d when the multiple LEDs 3315a are illuminated can be effectively dissipated to the outside. In addition, when the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 is deployed to the deployed position or retracted to the retracted position, external air flows into the rear-left movable decorative body 3301 through the notch 3317c of the second opening 3318b, and heated air is released to the outside through the first opening 3318a, creating an air flow within the rear-left movable decorative body 3301. This effectively dissipates heat generated by the LED driver 3315b, resistor 3315c, and connector 3315d when the multiple LEDs 3315a are illuminated. This prevents the temperature of the rear-left movable decorative board 3315 from rising and causing the multiple LEDs 3315a to erroneously illuminate, causing harm to players or the amusement hall where the gaming machine is installed, and ultimately prevents a decrease in the reliability of the gaming machine.

In the above embodiment, the rear left movable decorative body 3301, which moves in and out depending on the performance of the pachinko machine 1, is described as having a first opening 3318a and a second opening 3318b formed in the cover body 3318, and a gap S formed between the rear left movable decorative substrate 3315 and the cover body 3318. However, the configuration in which a first opening and a second opening are formed in the cover body and a gap is formed between the decorative substrate and the cover body may also be applied to other decorative bodies that have a decorative substrate and a storage section for storing the decorative substrate, and the rear left front decorative unit 3120 will be described below.

The back-front-left decorative unit 3120 comprises a back-front-left decorative board 3128 having multiple LEDs 3128a-3128i mounted on its front mounting surface, a back-front-left upper decorative board 3129 having LEDs mounted on its front mounting surface, a back-front-left lower decorative board 3130 having multiple LEDs 3130a-3130d mounted on its front mounting surface, and a back-front-left second decorative body 3125 and a back-front-left decorative body base 3127 which form a storage section in which the back-front-left decorative board 3128, the back-front-left upper decorative board 3129 and the back-front-left lower decorative board 3130 are stored.

The back-front-left decorative body base 3127 is entirely transparent and has a flat decorative plate portion 3127a and, when viewed from the front, board holders 3127b provided on the left, top, and bottom edges of the decorative plate portion 3127a (excluding the right edge). Furthermore, by attaching the back-front-left second decorative body 3125 from the front, the back-front-left decorative body base 3127 can, together with the back-front-left second decorative body 3125, form a box-shaped storage section with an open left edge. In detail, the back-front-left decorative board 3128 is held on the left side of the board holding portion 3127b with its front mounting surface facing right, the back-front-left upper decorative board 3129 is held on the top side of the board holding portion 3127b with its front mounting surface facing downward, and the back-front-left lower decorative board 3130 is held on the bottom side of the board holding portion 3127b with its front mounting surface facing upward.Then, the back-front-left second decorative body 3125 is attached to the back-front-left decorative body base 3127 from the front, and the back-front-left decorative board 3128, back-front-left upper decorative board 3129 and back-front-left lower decorative board 3130 are stored in a storage section consisting of the back-front-left second decorative body 3125 and the back-front-left decorative body base 3127.

The back-front-left decorative unit 3120 also has a back-front-left first decorative body 3124 attached to the front of the back-front-left second decorative body 3125, and a back-front-left third decorative body 3126 attached between the back-front-left second decorative body 3125 and the back-front-left decorative body base 3127.The back-front-left first decorative body 3124, the back-front-left second decorative body 3125 and the back-front-left third decorative body 3126 are entirely formed transparently and are illuminated and decorated in response to the light emitted by the LEDs mounted on the back-front-left decorative board 3128, the back-front-left upper decorative board 3129 or the back-front-left lower decorative board 3130.

The multiple LEDs mounted on the rear front left decorative board 3128, the rear front upper left decorative board 3129, or the rear front lower left decorative board 3130 may be configured to include, for example, wide-angle top-view type LEDs capable of emitting light within a 130-degree angle range centered on an optical axis perpendicular to the front surface, or wide-angle side-view type LEDs capable of emitting light within a 130-degree angle range centered on a horizontal optical axis, or may be configured to include regular top-view type LEDs or regular side-view type LEDs, not limited to wide-angle top-view type LEDs or wide-angle side-view type LEDs.

The front mounting surface of the back-front left decorative board 3128, back-front upper left decorative board 3129, or back-front lower left decorative board 3130 may be coated with a white solder resist (protective material), and may have a notation (not shown) formed on it indicating the position where the multiple LEDs are mounted and the part number. It is desirable for the notation to be silk-screened in a color similar in brightness to the white solder resist, such as yellow, which, together with the white solder resist, can suppress uneven light emission on the back-front left decorative board 3128, back-front upper left decorative board 3129, or back-front lower left decorative board 3130. From a similar perspective, it is preferable that no electronic components other than the multiple LEDs are mounted on the front mounting surface of the back-front left decorative board 3128, back-front upper left decorative board 3129, or back-front lower left decorative board 3130.

Other electronic components, excluding LEDs, are mounted on the rear mounting surface of the rear front left decorative board 3128, the rear front upper left decorative board 3129, or the rear front lower left decorative board 3130. These other electronic components include, for example, LED drivers that control the light emission of multiple LEDs, resistors that dissipate power as heat, and connectors used for connecting to the outside world; these LED drivers, resistors, and connectors may generate heat when the corresponding LEDs are illuminated.

In this embodiment, the storage section, which is composed of the back-front-left second decorative body 3125 and the back-front-left decorative body base 3127, has multiple first and second openings formed on the left side surface to correspond to the positions of electronic components such as LED drivers, resistors, and connectors mounted on the back mounting surface of the back-front-left decorative board 3128. The storage section may also have a third opening formed on the top surface to correspond to the positions of electronic components such as LED drivers, resistors, and connectors mounted on the back mounting surface of the back-front-left upper decorative board 3129, and a fourth opening formed on the bottom surface to correspond to the positions of electronic components such as LED drivers, resistors, and connectors mounted on the back mounting surface of the back-front-left lower decorative board 3130. The first, third, and fourth openings are formed while leaving the edges of the storage section intact, and the second opening is formed by cutting out a portion of the edge of the storage section (for example, the edge formed by the side and bottom surfaces of the storage section). Furthermore, the first through fourth openings are preferably formed with an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the LED drivers, resistors, and connectors, and more preferably are formed so as to surround the LED drivers and resistors that are partially densely mounted on the back mounting surface of each board, with a predetermined spacing between them.

In this embodiment, the back-front-left decorative unit 3120 has gaps of predetermined intervals between the left side of the storage section, which is composed of the back-front-left second decorative body 3125 and the back-front-left decorative body base 3127, and the back-front-left decorative board 3128, between the top surface of the storage section and the back-front-left upper decorative board 3129, and between the bottom surface of the storage section and the back-front-left lower decorative board 3130. In more detail, the inner surface of the storage section is formed with a plurality of abutment portions that extend toward and abut against each board, and each abutment portion abuts against the back-front-left decorative board 3128, back-front-left upper decorative board 3129, or back-front-left lower decorative board 3130, thereby forming gaps of predetermined intervals between the inner surface of the storage section and the back-front-left decorative board 3128, back-front-left upper decorative board 3129, and back-front-left lower decorative board 3130.

The abutment portion of the storage section may be formed, for example, in a cylindrical or prismatic shape, as long as its height from the inner surface of the storage section is equal to the preset distance. Furthermore, when fixing the back front left decorative board 3128, the back front upper left decorative board 3129, or the back front lower left decorative board 3130 to the back front left decorative body base 3127, a fixing member such as a screw or bolt may be inserted into the abutment portion.

When specific conditions are met such that a predetermined amount of light is irradiated onto the rear front left decorative unit 3120, an area display section showing the areas corresponding to the first through fourth openings is formed on the rear mounting surface of the rear front left decorative board 3128, the rear front upper left decorative board 3129, or the rear front lower left decorative board 3130. A specific condition would be, for example, when light from a work area light source is irradiated onto the rear front left decorative unit 3120 during work such as attaching the rear front left decorative unit 3120 to the game board 5.

In the rear front left decorative unit 3120 of this embodiment, when an operator visually inspects the rear front left decorative unit 3120 in an attempt to attach it to the gaming board 5, shadows corresponding to the edges of the first to fourth openings are projected onto the rear mounting surface of the rear front left decorative board 3128, the rear front upper left decorative board 3129 or the rear front lower left decorative board 3130, forming an area display unit, and this area display unit can notify the operator that the rear front left decorative unit 3120 has the first to fourth openings. As a result, the chances of an operator's hands coming into contact with the LED drivers, resistors, or connectors mounted on the rear mounting surface of the rear front left decorative board 3128, rear front upper left decorative board 3129, or rear front lower left decorative board 3130 through the first through fourth openings is reduced, preventing damage to the LED drivers, resistors, or connectors from causing malfunctions in the rear front left decorative board 3128, rear front upper left decorative board 3129, or rear front lower left decorative board 3130, which could cause harm to players or the amusement hall where the gaming machines are installed, and ultimately preventing a decline in the reliability of the gaming machines.

The back-front left decorative board 3128, the back-front upper left decorative board 3129, or the back-front lower left decorative board 3130 are coated with white solder resist (protective material) on both the front mounting surface and the back mounting surface. The white solder resist coated on the back mounting surface increases the contrast with the area display formed by the shadows of the edges of the first through fourth openings, making it even easier for workers to see the area display when certain conditions are met for the back-front left decorative unit 3120. This further reduces the chance that an operator's hands will come into contact with the LED drivers, resistors, or connectors mounted on the rear mounting surface of the rear front left decorative board 3128, rear front upper left decorative board 3129, or rear front lower left decorative board 3130 through the first through fourth openings, preventing damage to the LED drivers, resistors, or connectors from causing malfunctions in the rear front left decorative board 3128, rear front upper left decorative board 3129, or rear front lower left decorative board 3130, which could cause harm to players or the amusement hall where the gaming machines are installed, and ultimately prevents a decline in the reliability of the gaming machines.

In addition, on the rear mounting surface of the rear-front-left decorative board 3128, the rear-front-top-left decorative board 3129, or the rear-front-bottom-left decorative board 3130, there is silk-screened in bright colors such as yellow or pink notations indicating the placement position, orientation, and part numbers of electronic components other than LEDs, such as LED drivers, resistors, or connectors. The bright notations, together with the white solder resist coated on the rear mounting surface, provide a high contrast with the area indications formed by the shadows of the edges of the first through fourth openings on the rear mounting surface of the rear-front-left decorative board 3128, the rear-front-top-left decorative board 3129, or the rear-front-bottom-left decorative board 3130, making it even easier for workers to see the area indications.

In addition, the rear mounting surface of the rear front left decorative board 3128, the rear front upper left decorative board 3129 or the rear front lower left decorative board 3130 may have markings silk-screened in a dark color such as brown or black indicating the position, orientation and part number of electronic components other than LEDs, such as LED drivers, resistors or the like.The dark colored markings are formed in a position that overlaps with the area markings formed on the rear mounting surface of the rear front left decorative board 3128, the rear front upper left decorative board 3129 or the rear front lower left decorative board 3130, making the area markings more noticeable against the white solder resist coated on the rear mounting surface and making it easier for workers to see the area markings.

Other electronic components excluding LEDs, such as LED drivers, resistors, or connectors, that are mounted in multiple locations near LED drivers, such as resistors, may be mounted in a position overlapping the area display unit on the rear mounting surface of the rear front left decorative board 3128, rear front upper left decorative board 3129, or rear front lower left decorative board 3130 if they have a dark exterior color such as brown or black. This makes the area display unit stand out even more against the white solder resist coated on the rear mounting surface, making it even easier for workers to see the area display unit.

The storage section consisting of the rear front left second decorative body 3125 and the rear front left decorative body base 3127 may be opaque or colored and transparent, but is preferably formed colorless and transparent from the perspective of visibility of the area display unit formed on the rear mounting surface of the rear front left decorative board 3128, rear front upper left decorative board 3129, or rear front lower left decorative board 3130. For example, if the storage section is opaque, the area display unit will be large and formed on the rear mounting surface of the rear front left decorative board 3128, rear front upper left decorative board 3129, or rear front lower left decorative board 3130, but there is a risk that the visibility of the area display unit will be obstructed by the storage section itself. Also, for example, if the storage section is colored and transparent, there is a risk that the storage section and the area display unit will become one and obstruct visibility of the area display unit. Therefore, it is preferable that the storage section be formed colorless and transparent, which reduces the risk of obstructing visibility of the area display unit.

In addition, it is preferable that the thickness of the storage section consisting of the back front left second decorative body 3125 and the back front left decorative body base 3127 be in the range of 0.2 mm to 4.0 mm, for example. Assuming that the electronic components mounted on the back front left decorative board 3128, the back front upper left decorative board 3129 or the back front lower left decorative board 3130 are exposed without protruding from the first to fourth openings, for example, the mounting height of the tallest electronic component mounted on the back front left decorative board 3128, the back front upper left decorative board 3129 or the back front lower left decorative board 3130 is 1.9 mm (SOP type IC), and the mounting height of the shortest electronic component mounted on the back front left decorative board 3128, the back front upper left decorative board 3129 or the back front lower left decorative board 3130 is 0.2 mm (JIS standard 0402 type chip capacitors, chip resistors, etc.), the thickness of the storage section is preferably 1.9 mm or more, ignoring the gap spacing, but may be formed to be less than 1.9 mm, taking into account the size of the gap spacing. Furthermore, the width of the shadows of the first opening 3318a to the fourth opening that form the area display unit on the rear mounting surface of the rear front left decorative board 3128, the rear front upper left decorative board 3129, or the rear front lower left decorative board 3130 is proportional to the thickness of the storage unit. From the perspective that excessively small thicknesses reduce visibility, and excessively large thicknesses make the range indicated by the area display unit unclear, it is more preferable that the thickness of the storage unit be in the range of 0.5 mm to 3.0 mm, for example.

The storage section, consisting of the back front left second decorative body 3125 and the back front left decorative body base 3127, has flat or curved chamfered edges forming the first through fourth openings. By chamfering the edges of the storage section that form the first through fourth openings, the diffuse reflection of light at the edges of the storage section is increased, which further reduces the brightness of the area display section formed on the back mounting surface of the back front left decorative board 3128, back front upper left decorative board 3129, or back front lower left decorative board 3130, thereby further improving the visibility of the area display section.

The gap formed between the storage section consisting of the rear-front-left second decorative body 3125 and rear-front-left decorative body base 3127 and the rear-front-left decorative board 3128, rear-front-left upper decorative board 3129, or rear-front-left lower decorative board 3130 is desirably larger than the height from the rear mounting surface of electronic components such as LED drivers, resistors, or connectors. This prevents the tips of electronic components mounted on the rear-front-left decorative board 3128, rear-front-left upper decorative board 3129, or rear-front-left lower decorative board 3130 from protruding outside the storage section through the first to fourth openings. This prevents electronic components such as LED drivers, resistors, or connectors from coming into contact with objects outside the rear-front-left decorative unit 3120 and being damaged, for example, when multiple rear-front-left decorative units 3120 are stacked and stored before being attached to the gaming board 5. Note that because the connector is higher from the rear mounting surface than the LED driver and resistor, the gap may be smaller than the height from the rear mounting surface of the connector.

It is preferable that the gap formed between the storage section consisting of the back front left second decorative body 3125 and the back front left decorative body base 3127 and the back front left decorative substrate 3128, the back front left upper decorative substrate 3129 or the back front left lower decorative substrate 3130 be in the range of 0.2 mm to 7.0 mm, for example. Assuming that the electronic components mounted on the back front left decorative board 3128, the back front upper left decorative board 3129 or the back front lower left decorative board 3130 are exposed from the first to fourth openings without protruding, for example, the mounting height of the tallest electronic component mounted on the back front left decorative board 3128, the back front upper left decorative board 3129 or the back front lower left decorative board 3130 is 1.9 mm (SOP type IC), and the mounting height of the shortest electronic component mounted on the back front left decorative board 3128, the back front upper left decorative board 3129 or the back front lower left decorative board 3130 is 0.2 mm (JIS standard 0402 type chip capacitor, chip resistor, etc.), so the spacing S1 of the gap S may be 0.2 mm or more. Furthermore, the width of the shadows of the first to fourth openings that form the area display unit on the rear mounting surface of the rear front left decorative board 3128, rear front upper left decorative board 3129, or rear front lower left decorative board 3130 is inversely proportional to the gap spacing. From the perspective that excessively small gaps reduce visibility, and excessively large gaps make the range indicated by the area display unit unclear, it is more preferable that the gap spacing be in the range of 1.0 mm to 6.0 mm, for example.

In this embodiment, to improve the visibility of the area display unit, the thickness of the storage unit and the gap spacing are each set to an appropriate value relative to the inner diameter of the first through fourth openings. More specifically, for example, if the gap spacing is 0.2 mm, the storage unit thickness is 1.7 mm or more to prevent electronic components from protruding from the storage unit. However, if the gap spacing is 0.2 mm, the storage unit and the back front left decorative board 3128, back front upper left decorative board 3129, or back front lower left decorative board 3130 are too close, which could make the area display unit invisible. Therefore, in this embodiment, if the area display unit indicates an area where two SOP-type ICs are mounted side by side, the gap spacing may be 4.0 mm and the storage unit thickness may be 2.0 mm, or the gap spacing may be 6.0 mm and the storage unit thickness may be 3.0 mm.

In this embodiment, the storage section is formed in a rectangular box shape and is arranged parallel to the back front left decorative board 3128, the back front upper left decorative board 3129, or the back front lower left decorative board 3130. However, the storage section may also have a partially inclined surface that is inclined relative to the back front left decorative board 3128, the back front upper left decorative board 3129, or the back front lower left decorative board 3130 at the positions where the first through fourth openings are formed, thereby improving the visibility of the area display section formed by the shadow corresponding to the edges of the first through fourth openings. In addition, in this embodiment, the first through fourth openings are formed by vertically cutting out the storage section. However, the first through fourth openings may also be formed by cutting out the storage section so that the inner surfaces of the first through fourth openings are inclined relative to the respective surfaces of the storage section. This may improve the visibility of the area display section formed by the shadow corresponding to the edges of the first through fourth openings.

Furthermore, the side wall of the storage section may be formed with multiple ribs perpendicular to the side wall. When the multiple ribs are formed on the inner surface of the side wall, they can increase the strength of the storage section, and the multiple ribs act as a lenticular lens formed with semi-cylindrical irregularities, allowing the side wall to function as a diffuse reflector for light emitted by the LEDs mounted on the rear front left decorative board 3128, rear front upper left decorative board 3129, or rear front lower left decorative board 3130. Furthermore, when the multiple ribs are formed on the outer surface of the side wall, in addition to increasing the strength of the storage section, they can increase the outer surface area of the side wall, thereby improving the heat dissipation effect.

The multiple first and second openings formed in the storage compartment, consisting of the rear-front-left second decorative body 3125 and the rear-front-left decorative body base 3127, are connected via a gap formed between the storage compartment and the rear-front-left decorative board 3128. In the rear-front-left decorative unit 3120 of this embodiment, when electronic components such as the LED driver, resistor, or connector generate heat, the heated air inside the storage compartment is released to the outside through one opening, while external air flows into the storage compartment through the other opening, creating an air flow within the storage compartment. This prevents heated air from stagnating within the storage compartment, and effectively dissipates heat generated by the LED driver, resistor, and connector when the multiple LEDs are illuminated to the outside of the storage compartment. This prevents, for example, a rise in the temperature of the rear-front-left decorative board 3128 causing the multiple LEDs to erroneously illuminate, which can cause harm to players and the amusement hall where the gaming machine is installed, and ultimately prevents a decrease in the reliability of the gaming machine.

The multiple first openings and one second opening are formed in the storage section so that they at least partially overlap in the vertical direction. Therefore, in the rear-front-left decorative unit 3120 of this embodiment, when electronic components such as the LED driver, resistor, or connector generate heat, the warmed air inside the storage section is released to the outside through the upper first opening, and external air flows into the storage section through the lower second opening, creating a bottom-to-top air flow within the storage section. This more effectively prevents air from stagnating inside the storage section, and effectively dissipates heat generated by the LED driver, resistor, and connector when the multiple LEDs are illuminated. This prevents, for example, a rise in the temperature of the rear-front-left decorative board 3128 causing the multiple LEDs to erroneously illuminate, which can cause harm to players and the amusement hall where the gaming machine is installed, and ultimately prevents a decrease in the reliability of the gaming machine.

The second opening is formed by the left side of the storage section and a cutout formed by cutting out a portion of the underside of the storage section. Therefore, in the rear-front-left decorative unit 3120 of this embodiment, when electronic components such as the LED driver, resistor, or connector generate heat and the warmed air inside the storage section is released to the outside through the upper first opening, more outside air can flow into the storage section through the lower second opening, creating an air flow from bottom to top within the storage section. As a result, air stagnation within the storage section is more effectively prevented, and heat generated by the LED driver, resistor, and connector when the multiple LEDs are lit can be effectively dissipated to the outside.

In addition, in this embodiment, the rear-front-left decorative unit 3120 has a third opening formed on the top surface of the storage compartment and a fourth opening formed on the bottom surface of the storage compartment. This allows electronic components such as the LED driver, resistor, or connector to generate heat, causing the heated air inside the storage compartment to be released to the outside through the upper first and third openings, while more outside air flows into the storage compartment through the lower second and fourth openings, creating a bottom-to-top airflow within the storage compartment. This more effectively prevents air from stagnating inside the storage compartment, and effectively dissipates heat generated by the LED driver, resistor, and connector when the multiple LEDs are illuminated. This prevents, for example, a rise in temperature in the rear-front-left decorative board 3128, the rear-front-top-left decorative board 3129, or the rear-front-bottom-left decorative board 3130, which could cause multiple LEDs to erroneously illuminate, causing harm to players or the amusement hall where the gaming machine is installed, and ultimately prevents a decrease in the reliability of the gaming machine.

Among electronic components such as LED drivers, resistors, and connectors, connectors are preferably of the so-called right-angle type, with their mating openings perpendicular to the rear mounting surface of the rear-front-left decorative board 3128. Triangle-type connectors are mounted on the rear mounting surface of the rear-front-left decorative board 3128 so that their mating openings face the cutout in the second opening, making it easy to attach and detach the connector to the mating opening via the cutout in the second opening. Furthermore, right-angle type connectors have a smaller height from the rear mounting surface of the rear-front-left decorative board 3128 than the straight-type connectors described below, which helps prevent impediments to the flow of air flowing into the rear-front-left decorative unit 3120 from the second opening.

The connector may be a so-called straight-type connector whose mating port is parallel to the rear mounting surface of the rear-front-left decorative board 3128. If a straight-type connector is mounted on the rear mounting surface of the rear-front-left decorative board 3128 to correspond to the second opening, it may impede the flow of air entering the rear-front-left decorative unit 3120 from the second opening. Therefore, it is preferable to mount the straight-type connector at the top of the rear mounting surface of the rear-front-left decorative board 3128 to correspond to the uppermost first opening. Such a straight-type connector has its tip protruding outside the rear-front-left decorative unit 3120 through the first opening, allowing heat generated by the LED driver and resistors transmitted through the rear-front-left decorative board 3128 to be released from the tip to the outside of the rear-front-left decorative unit 3120. Furthermore, a straight-type connector mounted to correspond to the uppermost first opening can prevent impediment to the air flow within the rear-front-left decorative unit 3120 and also facilitates the attachment and detachment of the connector to the connector's mating port. The connectors may also be mounted at the top and bottom of the back-front-left decorative board 3128, corresponding to the uppermost first and second openings, so as to sandwich electronic components such as LED drivers and resistors (excluding the connectors) from above and below.

In the above embodiment, the first through fourth openings are formed to correspond to the positions of electronic components such as LED drivers, resistors, and connectors mounted on the rear mounting surfaces of the rear front left decorative board 3128, the rear front upper left decorative board 3129, and the rear front lower left decorative board 3130. The first through fourth openings are formed to surround the LED drivers and resistors that are partially densely mounted on the rear mounting surface of each board at predetermined intervals. However, the first, third, and fourth openings may be formed in multiple locations in the storage section so that all electronic components, including the LED drivers and resistors mounted on the rear mounting surface of each board, are exposed to the outside through the openings. This allows air to flow from below to above within the storage section through each opening, more effectively preventing air from stagnating within the storage section and effectively dissipating heat generated by the LED drivers, resistors, and connectors when the multiple LEDs are emitting light to the outside.

In addition, the storage section of the above embodiment may have first through fourth openings formed to correspond to the positions of all electronic components such as LED drivers, resistors, and connectors mounted on the rear mounting surfaces of the rear-front-left decorative board 3128, rear-front-upper-left decorative board 3129, and rear-front-lower-left decorative board 3130, or may have first through fourth openings formed to correspond to the positions of at least some of the electronic components such as LED drivers, resistors, and connectors mounted on the rear mounting surfaces of the rear-front-left decorative board 3128, rear-front-upper-left decorative board 3129, and rear-front-lower-left decorative board 3130. Electronic components that do not have openings formed in positions corresponding to their mounting positions on the rear mounting surfaces of the rear-front-left decorative board 3128, rear-front-upper-left decorative board 3129, and rear-front-lower-left decorative board 3130 will have a reduced heat dissipation efficiency for the heat generated by the electronic components, but this can further reduce contact from outside the rear-front-left decorative unit 3120 and prevent damage to the electronic components due to external contact.

[Information display]
Next, a modified example using an information display 3213 will be described. In recent years, the number of players has declined significantly, and attracting new players is an urgent need. However, the game itself has become more complicated than before, and there is a risk that new players will be put off from playing. Below, a modified example in which an information display 3213 is provided to display information about the game will be described. Note that in the following description of the information display, there may be overlapping explanations of configurations similar to those of the information display described above.

In this example, instead of the five 7-segment display units of the above-mentioned rear upper movable decorative body 3210, an information display 3213 using a dot matrix display unit is provided on the rear upper movable decorative body 3210. The information display 3213 is capable of switching the display content between a state in which information about the game is displayed (game information display mode) and a state in which game presentations are executed (game presentation mode).

The information display 3213 is capable of switching the display content when the operating means is operated within a specific period of time. The information display 3213 can execute, for example, one or any combination of the first through fourth controls. In the first control, the information display 3213 switches the display content when an operating unit such as the operation unit 301 is operated while a customer waiting demo effect is being executed. In the second control, the information display 3213 switches the display to display information about the game when an operating unit that can only be operated by a gaming parlor staff member (for example, when the RAM clear switch located on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is pressed or the setting key switch 1311a) is operated. In the third control, if an operating unit such as the operation unit 301 is operated while a variable effect is being executed on the effect display device 1600, the information display 3213 hides the display and switches the display content after the variable effect for which the operating unit 301 was operated is completed. In the fourth control, if an operation unit such as the operation unit 301 is operated while a variable effect is being performed on the effect display device 1600, the information display 3213 will not switch the display content during the variable effect, but will continue the current mode (game information display mode, game effect mode) and display information according to that mode, and will switch the display content after the variable effect for which the operation unit such as the operation unit 301 was operated has ended.

Figures 410(A) to (C) are front views showing the information display 3213 displaying information about the game. As shown in Figures 410(A) to (C), the information display 3213, when in a state where it displays information about the game (game information display mode), displays information about the game such as "jackpot," "left hit ←," and "right hit →." As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a game (so-called "right hit") is played with the aim of getting the game ball into the second starting hole 2004 during time-saving mode (low-probability time-saving mode (also called time-saving mode) or high-probability time-saving mode (also called probability mode)). Furthermore, during time-saving mode, the second start port 2004 is frequently opened, making it easier to achieve a start winning (a game ball entering the first start port 2002 or a game ball entering the second start port 2004) than during normal mode (low-probability non-time-saving mode (also called normal mode), high-probability non-time-saving mode), which is advantageous to the player. However, if the player does not play with the aim of getting the game ball into the second start port 2004 (a so-called "right hit") during time-saving mode, the player may not be able to enjoy this advantageous state, and in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in FIG. 410(C), the information display 3213 displays "right hit →" as an indication to instruct the player to play with the aim of getting the game ball into the second start port 2004 (a so-called "right hit") during time-saving mode. This prevents players from being unable to enjoy advantageous situations even during time-saving periods, and prevents players from being disadvantaged.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, during normal play (low-probability non-time-saving state (also called the normal state) and high-probability non-time-saving state), a game (so-called "left-hand hit") is played with the aim of getting the game ball into the first starting hole 2001. During normal play, the second starting hole 2004 is rarely opened, and the period during which it is open is extremely short compared to during time-saving play. Therefore, during normal play, a player who plays with the aim of getting the game ball into the second starting hole 2004 may be disadvantaged. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 410(B), the pachinko machine 1 of this example is configured to display "left-hand hit ←" on the information display 3213 as an indication that during normal play, the player should play with the aim of getting the game ball into the first starting hole 2001. This prevents players from being disadvantaged during normal play.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the information displayed in the dot matrix of the information display 3213 can instruct the player to hit to the left (to hit the game ball to the left of the center device 2500) or to hit to the right (to hit the ball with enough force to hit the stopper 1006 that protrudes inward from the outer rail 1001 that forms part of the periphery of the play area 5a), or instruct the player to play with the aim of getting the ball into the big prize opening 2005, thereby preventing disadvantages for both experienced and inexperienced players.

In addition, the information display 3213 may be a dedicated display for displaying information related to the game, and in such a configuration, the information displayed on the information display 3213 may be switched when the operating means is operated within a specific period. The information related to the game may include information for guiding the game (hit right, hit left, etc.) as shown in Figures 410(B) and (C) above, information related to the lottery results (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) of the variable effects as shown in Figure 410(A) (jackpot, miss, guaranteed jackpot, time-limited jackpot, etc.), setting information related to the lottery probability of winning or losing (such as the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 set in the setting change process and the probability of winning for the number of variable effects actually executed), and the number of game balls collected by the outlet 1008 (the number of game balls that were released into the game area 5a and were not used). The information may include the number of game balls that have won at a specific winning device (the number of game balls that have won at a specific winning device out of the game balls that have been launched into the game area 5a), the number of game balls that have won at a specific winning device (one or any combination of the first starting gate 2002, second starting gate 2004, large winning gate 2005, general winning gate 2001, etc. (it may be all of them), for example, the number of game balls that have won at the first starting gate 2002 and second starting gate 2004), or it may include one or any combination of information related to these games.

In this embodiment, the information display 3213 is configured to be provided on the inside of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002. However, the information display 3213 may also be configured to be provided on the outside of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002. This increases the degree of freedom in designing the area inside the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, allowing for the addition of structures or movable objects to enhance decorativeness and dramatic effects. In addition, while this embodiment describes an example in which a dot matrix display unit is used for the information display 3213, it is not limited to a dot matrix display unit; a 7-segment display unit may also be used to display information about games. Furthermore, the information display 3213 may be configured to be located on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and the information display 3213 may display information about games aimed at gaming parlor staff. This increases the degree of freedom in designing the front side of the pachinko machine 1, allowing for the addition of structures or movable objects to enhance decorativeness and dramatic effects.

In addition, the information display 3213 may be configured such that a red monochromatic LED is mounted on the first decorative board on the rear upper rear of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210, and the information display 3213 does not emit light (golden light) or rainbow light even during the execution of the gold or rainbow effect described above, but emits light in a color different from the gold or rainbow light. This ensures that information about the game displayed on the information display 3213 can be conveyed to the player reliably, even during the execution of the gold or rainbow effect. The monochromatic LED may be any other color (e.g., blue) as long as it is distinguishable from the gold or rainbow light and allows the display content of the information display 3213 to be identified, even during the execution of the gold or rainbow light.

The information display 3213 displays important information related to the game, and a dark-colored (e.g., green, black, purple, navy blue, etc.) insulating film is formed (resist treated) on the surface of the rear-upper first decorative substrate of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 (an insulating film of the same color may be formed on the rear mounting surface where the LEDs are not mounted, or an insulating film of a different color from the front surface may be formed on the back surface). This suppresses light interference on the front mounting surface where the LEDs of the rear-upper first decorative substrate are mounted, allowing the light from each of the multiple LEDs to be seen independently, allowing various information to be clearly displayed on the information display 3213. Furthermore, when gold or rainbow effects are being performed, a light-colored (white in this example) insulating film is formed on the surface of the substrate on which the LEDs that produce the gold or rainbow effect illumination (golden illumination) are mounted, whereas a dark-colored (e.g., green, black, purple, navy blue, etc.) insulating film is formed on the surface of the first upper-rear decorative substrate mounted on the upper-rear-rear movable decorative body 3210, which displays important information for players and gaming store staff (the same insulating film may be formed on the rear mounting surface where the LEDs are not mounted, or an insulating film of a different color than the front surface may be formed on the back surface). Therefore, if there is a problem with the LED's light emission, it is easy to determine whether the LED plays an important role by the color of the insulating film formed on the surface of the substrate.

On the front surface (front mounting surface) where the LEDs of the first decorative board on the rear upper back of the movable decorative body 3210 are mounted, a front-side marking section showing the part number corresponding to each LED and the attributes of the electronic components, such as the area indicating the position where the LED is to be placed (which may also include the shape, size, mounting orientation (direction) of the electronic component, and model of the electronic component), is silk-screened in white (not limited to white, but can also be yellow, black, etc.) paint. The area occupied by the front-side marking section (the area silk-screened in white (not limited to white, but can also be yellow, black, etc.) paint) on the front surface (front mounting surface) where the LEDs of the first decorative board on the rear upper back are mounted is smaller than the area occupied by the resist (an insulating film of a dark color (e.g. green, black, purple, navy blue, etc.)). As a result, the reflection efficiency on the front surface (front mounting surface) of the rear-upper first decorative substrate where the LEDs are mounted can be made approximately uniform, similar to when only resist is formed on the front surface (front mounting surface) of the rear-upper first decorative substrate where the LEDs are mounted, which prevents uneven light emission and reduces the reduction in the effect of suppressing interference between the light emitted from each of the multiple mounted LEDs.

The surface-side markings silk-screened on the front surface (front mounting surface) of the first upper back decorative board where the LEDs are mounted may be configured to display electronic components of the same type grouped together. For example, one surface-side marking such as "LEDs 1-5" may be provided for five LEDs mounted on the front surface (front mounting surface) of the first upper back decorative board. In this case, it is possible to reduce the proportion of the surface-side markings on the front surface (front mounting surface) of the first upper back decorative board where the LEDs are mounted compared to when a surface-side marking is provided for each electronic component, thereby making it possible to achieve more uniform reflection efficiency on the front surface (front mounting surface) of the first upper back decorative board where the LEDs are mounted. Additionally, the front side markings may not be silk-screened on the front surface (front mounting surface) of the rear upper first decorative board where the LEDs are mounted. In this case, the back side markings may be formed by silk-screen printing, foil cut-out letters, resist cut-out letters, etc. on the rear mounting surface where the LEDs are not mounted, or the front side markings may be formed by foil cut-out letters, resist cut-out letters, etc. on the front surface (front mounting surface) of the rear upper first decorative board where the LEDs are mounted.

In addition, only electronic components other than LEDs (e.g., connectors with green housings) with dark-colored (black, green, purple, etc.) exteriors (cases, packages, housings, etc.) may be mounted on the LED mounting surface of the first upper rear decorative board. Alternatively, only electronic components with dark-colored (black, green, purple, etc.) exteriors (cases, packages, housings, etc.) exteriors (e.g., one or more (any combination) of LED elements with black packages or connectors with green housings) may be mounted for a predetermined number of electronic components, including LED element packages, while electronic components with white or light-colored exteriors may be mounted on the non-LED mounting surface. This prevents the reflectivity of the LED mounting surface from being increased by electronic components mounted on the LED mounting surface of the first upper rear decorative board, and suppresses light interference on the LED mounting surface, allowing information such as letters and numbers to be displayed on the information display 3213 to be clearly displayed and reliably conveying this information to players.

As described above, if an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1 while the gold or rainbow effect is being executed, the LEDs provided on the game board 5 that provide the light-emitting decorations for the gold or rainbow effect (gold light emission) when the gold or rainbow effect is being executed are turned off, and the LEDs provided on the door frame 3 are controlled to emit light in an abnormality alert light mode (flashing red light at maximum brightness (light amount)). Specific examples of when an abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1 include when the opening of the door frame 3 relative to the main frame 4 is detected (when the opening of the door frame 3 makes it difficult to see the light emitted by the LEDs mounted on each of the multiple specific decorative boards provided on the door frame 3), when a vibration sensor (not shown) detects vibration of the game board 5 for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) (when it detects that an action such as hitting the pachinko machine 1 is being performed, or when the vibration of the pachinko machine 1 causes the light emitted by the LEDs mounted on each of the multiple specific decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 and the display of the performance display device 1600 to become blurred and difficult to see), when a detection signal is input from the full tank detection sensor 154 (when it detects that the lower tray 202 is full of game balls), when a ball out detection sensor (not shown) detects that the light emitted by the LEDs mounted on each of the multiple specific decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 has continued for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), When a minor error occurs, such as when a detection signal is input from sensor 574 (an error unlikely to indicate cheating, such as when it is detected that there are no game balls in guide passage 570a), when radio wave gouge is detected (when electromagnetic waves or the like cause noise in the light emitted by the LEDs mounted on each of the multiple specific decorative boards provided on door frame 3 or game board 5, or noise in the display of performance display device 1600), when magnetic gouge is detected, when a detection signal is input from second start gate sensor 2401 when second start gate 2004 is not open, or when a detection signal is input from large prize gate sensor 2402 when the game is not in a big win or small win game state, an error likely to indicate cheating, etc.

On the other hand, the display on the information display 3213 is designed to continue without being turned off even if an abnormality occurs during the execution of the gold or rainbow effect. In this way, a specific decorative board (coated with a white solder resist (protective material), and the front mounting surface (LED mounting surface) on which the LEDs of the specific decorative board are mounted) that is provided on the game board 5 or door frame 3 and that performs the luminous decoration of the gold effect (golden light emission) or the rainbow effect during the execution of the gold or rainbow effect, displays letters and symbols (electronic component part numbers) to avoid confusion with the mounted electronic components and other decorative boards, and attributes of the surface-side electronic components such as areas indicating the position where the electronic components are to be placed (which may also include the shape of the surface-side electronic component, the size of the surface-side electronic component, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the surface-side electronic component, and the model of the surface-side electronic component). The LEDs mounted on the front side display portion (applied by screen printing using ink of a bright and saturated color (for example, bright colors such as yellow or yellow-green)) will stop their gold-colored illumination decoration (golden illumination) or rainbow-colored illumination decoration if an abnormality occurs, but the rear upper movable decorative body 3215 (LEDs mounted on the rear upper first decorative substrate on which a dark-colored (for example, green, black, purple, navy blue, etc.) insulating film is formed) will continue to display even if an abnormality occurs (continue to display the predetermined lighting pattern until the fluctuation time has elapsed), and information related to the game can be displayed and notified even when an abnormality occurs. In addition, if a serious error occurs that satisfies a specific game stop condition among the above-mentioned serious errors (such as an abnormality in the main control board 1310), the game will be stopped, halting the launch of game balls and the execution of the game, including the lottery. The lighting pattern of the multiple LEDs mounted on the first upper rear decorative board of the upper rear decorative body 3210 may be changed to display a message corresponding to the serious error (such as a message saying "STOP!" to stop the game), or the multiple LEDs mounted on the first upper rear decorative board of the upper rear decorative body 3210 may be turned off all at once, making it possible to immediately determine whether a serious error has occurred. Furthermore, the specific game stop condition may not be limited to the above-mentioned serious errors (such as an abnormality in the main control board 1310), but may also be determined to be a situation that excessively increases gambling motivation, such as when a large number of balls are counted that exceeds a specific threshold (for example, 100,000 balls are paid out).

In addition, whether the information display 3213 continues to be displayed or is turned off and hidden may be changed depending on the type of abnormality. For example, if a minor error as described above occurs, the information display 3213 may continue to be displayed, and if a serious error as described above occurs, the information display 3213 may be turned off and hidden. This makes it possible to determine the severity of the abnormality.

Furthermore, as described above, the LEDs that illuminate the gold effect (golden light emission) and rainbow effect when gold or rainbow effects are being executed are controlled by the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 through the peripheral control unit's regular processing performed approximately every 33.3 ms, whereas the LEDs on the first decorative board provided on the rear upper rear movable decorative body 3210 are controlled by the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 through the main control timer interrupt processing performed approximately every 4 ms. In this way, the display content of the information display 3213 can be updated at a shorter interval than when the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the LEDs that emit gold light based on control signals from the main control board 1310. Even if a malfunction occurs and content different from the content that should be displayed on the information display 3213 is displayed, the display content can be updated immediately (after 4 ms) to change to the original display content, without causing any disadvantage to players, etc. In other words, the information display 3213, which displays important (highly significant) information regarding the game, is controlled to emit light in accordance with variable effects such as gold effects and rainbow effects, and outputs a control signal at a shorter cycle than the LEDs that emit light decorations for gold effects (golden emission) or rainbow effects, updating the light emission mode of the LED.Therefore, even if a problem occurs with the display content of the information display 3213, the display content can be immediately changed to normal, preventing the player from being disadvantaged by content that is different from what was intended being displayed. Furthermore, if the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 were configured to control the information display 3213 based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, there is a risk that a communication error could occur between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, causing problems with the information displayed by the information display 3213. However, in this example, the main control board 1310 directly controls the information display 3213, making it less likely that problems will occur with the information displayed by the information display 3213 compared to when the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the information display 3213, and preventing disadvantages to players.

In the above-described embodiment (and all embodiments, including variations), a white solder resist (protective material) is coated on the surface of the specific decorative board on which the LEDs are mounted (the LED mounting surface). Then, a surface-side marking is screen-printed on the white solder resist (protective material) using yellow ink to indicate the attributes of the surface-side electronic components, such as the LEDs and other electronic components to be mounted and their part numbers (to avoid confusion with other decorative boards), as well as the area indicating the location of the electronic components (which may also include the shape, size, mounting orientation, and model of the surface-side electronic components). This creates a golden effect (golden illumination) by making the LEDs mounted on the specific decorative board glow in a color similar to the yellow of the surface-side marking. However, this technical concept can also be applied to other effects. For example, the surface-side marking may be screen-printed using yellow-green ink, causing the LEDs mounted on the specific decorative board to glow in a color similar to the yellow-green of the surface-side marking. In other words, this technical concept can be applied to any effect where the light emitted by the multiple LEDs mounted on a specific decorative board is a color similar to the color of the indicia on the front side.

In addition, it is possible to not provide a front-side marking section for electronic components other than LEDs mounted on a specific decorative board, or to provide a back-side marking section on the back mounting surface where LEDs are not mounted. In addition, the front mounting surface of a specific decorative board on which multiple LEDs are mounted may be mounted with only electronic components (for example, one or more (any combination) of LED elements with white packages or connectors with white housings) that have a white or light-colored exterior (including colors that are recognized as white, such as beige, ivory, cream, natural, off-white, etc.) while the back mounting surface on which multiple LEDs are not mounted may be mounted with at least electronic components that do not have a white or light-colored exterior (for example, a resistor with a black exterior, a circuit that controls the light emission of multiple LEDs (for example, a constant current drive circuit), a capacitor with a brown exterior, a connector with a housing in a color different from white (such as light blue or yellow)) (this is not limited to cases where only electronic components that do not have a white or light-colored exterior are arranged on the back, but may also be configured with one or both electronic components that do not have a white or light-colored exterior and electronic components that have a white or light-colored exterior). This reduces the decrease in reflective efficiency on the front mounting surface where the LEDs are mounted, and increases the light output of the specific decorative board, allowing the gold and rainbow color effects (golden light emission) to be produced without unevenness in the light emission and to produce an impactful effect, increasing the enjoyment of the game.

The color of the packages of the multiple LEDs mounted on the specific decorative board may also be white (including colors that are recognized as (similar to) white, such as beige, ivory, cream, natural, and off-white). In this case, the reduction in reflection efficiency due to the exterior color of the LEDs themselves mounted on the specific decorative board can be suppressed, thereby increasing the light output of the specific decorative board. The specific decorative board may also include a first specific decorative board that mounts both multiple LEDs with white packages and a connector with a white housing on one surface, and a second specific decorative board that mounts multiple LEDs with white packages on one surface and a connector with a housing in a color different from white (e.g., light blue or yellow) on the other surface. In this case, connectors with white housings that are highly effective in suppressing reflectivity reduction (high reflectivity) are mounted on the same surface as the front mounting surface on which the LEDs are mounted (the LED mounting surface (also referred to as the front mounting surface)), while connectors with non-white housings that are less effective in suppressing reflectivity reduction (low reflectivity that may reduce reflectivity) (connectors with housings other than white and light colors with high reflectivity (close to white) may also be mounted on a surface different from the front mounting surface on which the LEDs are mounted (the non-LED mounting surface (also referred to as the back mounting surface)), thereby maintaining high reflection efficiency on the front mounting surface on which the LEDs are mounted. Note that this technical concept does not exclude mounting electronic components with white exteriors, such as connectors with white housings, on the non-LED mounting surface; mounting electronic components with white exteriors on the non-LED mounting surface also prevents the reflection efficiency of the LED mounting surface from being reduced by electronic components other than the LED. This maintains high reflection efficiency on the LED mounting surface, allowing the LED light to be used efficiently and reducing a reduction in light intensity.

In addition, in the above example, the surfaces of all specific decorative boards that are mounted with LEDs that provide luminous decorations for gold effects (golden light emission) or rainbow effects when gold or rainbow effects are being performed are coated with white solder resist (protective material), but this is not limited to this. Some of the specific decorative boards that are mounted with LEDs that provide luminous decorations for gold effects (golden light emission) or rainbow effects when gold or rainbow effects are being performed may be coated with solder resist (protective material) in a color other than white (for example, green or black) on the surface, or all or some of the specific decorative boards that are mounted with LEDs that provide luminous decorations for gold effects (golden light emission) or rainbow effects when gold or rainbow effects are being performed may be coated with white solder resist (protective material) only on the surface where the LEDs are mounted (forming a white insulating coating), and the back surface where the LEDs are not mounted may be coated with solder resist (protective material) in a color other than white (for example, a dark color such as green or black) (forming an insulating coating other than white). In addition, if the substrates connected to the specific decorative board by a harness (other substrates such as relay substrates, driver substrates, decorative substrates on which LEDs are mounted, etc.) have the same configuration as the specific decorative board to which they are connected, i.e., the surface of the specific decorative board is coated with a white solder resist (protective material), and the surface-side notation indicating the attributes of the surface-side electronic components such as letters and symbols (part numbers of electronic components) to avoid confusion with the mounted electronic components and other decorative boards, and the area indicating the position where the electronic components are to be placed (which may also include the shape of the surface-side electronic components, the size of the surface-side electronic components, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the surface-side electronic components, and the model of the surface-side electronic components) is screen-printed using ink of high brightness and saturation (for example, bright colors such as yellow and yellow-green), then the surface of the substrates connected to the specific decorative board by a harness (other substrates such as relay substrates, driver substrates, decorative substrates on which LEDs are mounted, etc.) may also be coated with a white solder resist (protective material), and the surface-side notation indicating the attributes of the surface-side electronic components such as letters and symbols (part numbers of electronic components) to avoid confusion with the mounted electronic components and other decorative boards, and the area indicating the position where the electronic components are to be placed (which may also include the shape of the surface-side electronic components, the size of the surface-side electronic components, the mounting orientation (mounting direction) of the surface-side electronic components, and the model of the surface-side electronic components) may also be screen-printed using ink of high brightness and saturation (for example, bright colors such as yellow and yellow-green). That is, the game board 5 contains a mixture of boards coated with white solder resist (protective material) and boards coated with green solder resist (protective material). Therefore, if a malfunction occurs with a specific decorative board and the harness or connection of the specific decorative board needs to be checked, the board connected to the specific decorative board will be coated with the same color solder resist (protective material) as the specific decorative board, and the surface markings will be screen-printed using ink of the same color, making it possible to quickly find the board connected to the specific decorative board and to identify it without confusing it with other boards (boards coated with green solder resist (protective material)).

In addition, connectors with the same color exterior may be used for each of the boards connected to the specific decorative board by a harness. In this case, the board connected to the specific decorative board can be identified by the connector's exterior color, allowing the board to be quickly found. Furthermore, connectors mounted on the front mounting surface (the surface facing the front of the gaming machine) of boards connected to the specific decorative board by a harness (other boards such as relay boards, driver boards, and decorative boards with LEDs mounted on them) may also have a white exterior, while connectors with an exterior color different from white may be mounted on the back mounting surface (the surface facing the rear of the gaming machine) of boards connected to the specific decorative board by a harness (this does not exclude boards that have a white exterior connector mounted on a surface where LEDs are not mounted). This allows the boards connected to the specific decorative board to be found more accurately and quickly, and also reduces the reduction in reflective efficiency on the front mounting surface of boards connected to the specific decorative board by a harness. This allows the efficient use of light emitted by light-emitting elements such as LEDs installed on the gaming machine, reducing the reduction in light intensity.

In the above example, an information display 3213 visible from the front of the pachinko machine 1 was shown, but this is not a limitation; an information display visible only from the rear of the pachinko machine 1 may also be placed on the rear of the pachinko machine 1. In this case, the information display may display information about the gaming machine for gaming parlor staff, etc. (such as the number of jackpots, error occurrences, number of prize balls paid out, number of shots, number of balls entered into a specified winning slot (which may display the number of balls entered into all winning slots together, or may display the number of balls entered into multiple winning slots separately, or may display the number of balls entered into a specified number (including one) together)). Furthermore, even when an information display is placed on the rear of the pachinko machine 1, it may be controlled in the same way as the information display 3213 visible from the front of the pachinko machine 1 described above (for example, by continuing to emit light even when an abnormality occurs).

In addition, there are no light emitters that perform light effects on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, or there are fewer light emitters that perform light effects on the rear side compared to the front side of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, when an information display is placed on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, the visibility of the information display is less likely to be obstructed by other light emitters, and because the island equipment is dark, the contents displayed on the information display are easier to see than when the information display is placed on the front side of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, when an information display is placed on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, this information display does not produce any light-emitting effects and only displays information to gaming facility staff and others separate from players. Therefore, the color of the light emitted is not particularly important, and the light intensity does not need to be very high to allow gaming facility staff and others to recognize the information. Therefore, a white insulating coating is formed on the LED mounting surfaces of multiple specific decorative boards that produce the rainbow and gold effects described above, and some or all of the land KRDx1 on the front (front mounting surface) side of the LED mounting surface is covered with a white insulating coating. However, a dark insulating coating such as green or black may be formed on the LED mounting surface of the first decorative board on the rear rear of the information display placed on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, or in addition to or separately from this, all of the land KRDx1 on the front (front mounting surface) side of the LED mounting surface may not be covered with an insulating coating. This allows the LEDs mounted on the rear upper first decorative substrate, which has a dark insulating coating, to stand out when illuminated in a dark island, and because the reflectivity is not too high, it does not feel dazzling, ensuring that the information displayed on the information display can be conveyed reliably. Furthermore, by forming a dark insulating coating on the rear upper first decorative substrate, it becomes difficult to distinguish the wiring pattern formed on the rear upper first decorative substrate when placed in a dark island, improving security.

Various decorative boards that are attached to the door frame 3 or game board 5 and that provide luminous decoration for gold effects (golden light emission) or rainbow effects when gold or rainbow effects are activated are mounted in decorative bodies (which may be cases, covers, etc.) made of a translucent material, while the movable upper rear decorative body 3210 (which may be a case, cover, etc.) that houses the upper rear first decorative board that does not provide luminous decoration for gold effects (golden light emission) or rainbow effects when gold or rainbow effects are activated may be formed from a non-translucent material. In this case, it is possible to determine whether or not an LED that plays a key role is installed depending on whether or not the decorative body (which may be a case, cover, etc.) on which the board is mounted is translucent.

Figure 411(a) is a perspective view showing the front side of the information display 3213, and Figure 411(b) is a perspective view showing the back side of the information display 3213. Figure 412 is a cross-sectional view showing the A-A cross section of Figure 411(a). As shown in Figures 411 and 412, the rear-upper first decorative substrate 3214 provided on the information display 3213 that does not emit gold light when gold light is being emitted is stored in a rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 (which may be a case, cover, etc.). The rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 (which may be a case, cover, etc.) has a box-shaped front-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3215 that covers the surface of the rear-upper first decorative substrate 3214 (the mounting surface of the LED 3214a), and a rear-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3210a that covers the back side of the rear-upper first decorative substrate 3214 (the non-mounting surface of the LED 3214a).

The rear-upper-rear-top movable decorative body 3210 may also be configured such that the front-side rear-upper-rear-top movable decorative body 3215 and the rear-side rear-upper-rear-top movable decorative body 3210a are firmly bonded by welding or the like, firmly housing the rear-upper-first decorative board 3214. In this case, the rear-upper-first decorative board 3214 can be detached from the rear-upper-rear-top movable decorative body 3210 by destroying a portion of the rear-upper-rear-top movable decorative body 3210. With this information display 3213, the rear-upper-rear-top first decorative board 3214 cannot be detached from the rear-upper-rear-top movable decorative body 3210 without destroying a portion of the rear-upper-rear-top movable decorative body 3210 (which may be a case, cover, etc.). This prevents the rear-upper-rear-top first decorative board 3214 from being illegally replaced with an unauthorized board, prevents a malfunction of the unauthorized board from causing harm to players or the amusement hall where the gaming machine is installed, and prevents a decrease in the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, decorative bodies (which may be cases, covers, etc.) that are provided on the door frame 3 or game board 5 and have various decorative substrates that provide luminous decoration for gold effects (golden emission) or rainbow effects when gold or rainbow effects are activated may be designed so that the decorative substrates can be removed without destroying any part of the decorative body. For light-emitting means such as LEDs (light-emitting means of less importance than the information display 3213) that are provided on the door frame 3 or game board 5 and provide luminous decoration for gold effects (golden emission) or rainbow effects when gold or rainbow effects are activated without displaying important information, the light-emitting means can be replaced without destroying the decorative body (which may be a case, cover, etc.), making maintenance of the decorative body easier.

In addition, in the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 of this embodiment, the surface of the rear-upper first decorative substrate 3214 (mounting surface of LED 3214a) is covered only by the front-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3215, and the front-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3215 covering the surface of the rear-upper first decorative substrate 3214 (mounting surface of LED 3214a) and the back-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3210a covering the back surface of the rear-upper first decorative substrate 3214 (non-mounting surface of LED 3214a) abut on the back side of the rear-upper first decorative substrate 3214. In other words, the joint between the front-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3215 and the back-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3210a is configured to be located on the back side of the rear-upper first decorative substrate 3214. Therefore, even if light enters the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 from the joint between the front-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3215 and the rear-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3210a, light can be prevented from entering the surface of the rear-upper first decorative substrate 3214, thereby suppressing uneven light emission from the rear-upper first decorative substrate 3214. Furthermore, the joint between the front-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3215 and the back-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3210a need only be configured so as not to be on the front side of the back-upper first decorative substrate 3214. Even if the front-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3215 and the back-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3210a abut between the front and back sides of the back-upper first decorative substrate 3214 (the joint between the front-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3215 and the back-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3210a abuts so as to be positioned on the side of the back-upper first decorative substrate 3214), the same effect as above can be achieved.

An interference suppression means may be formed inside the upper rear-rear movable decorative body 3210 (which may be a case, cover, etc.) to suppress interference between the light emitted from each of the multiple LEDs 3214a mounted on the upper rear-rear first decorative board 3214. The front-side upper rear-rear movable decorative body 3215 of this embodiment has an inner surface 3215a facing the player, and an inner surface 3215b extending rearward from a portion of the inner surface 3215a and abutting the surface of the upper rear-rear first decorative board 3214 (the mounting surface of the LEDs 3214). The front-side upper rear-rear movable decorative body 3215 also has multiple hole-shaped through-holes 3216 formed through the inner surface 3215a, including the inner surface 3215b. The plurality of through-holes 3216 are formed to correspond to the plurality of LEDs 3214a mounted on the rear upper first decorative substrate 3214, and each of the plurality of through-holes 3216 accommodates one of the plurality of LEDs 3214a mounted on the rear upper first decorative substrate 3214, and the surface of the rear upper first decorative substrate 3214 (the mounting surface of the LEDs 3214a) is partitioned by the inner surface portion 3215b. This restricts the direction of travel of light emitted from each of the plurality of LEDs 3214a mounted on the rear upper first decorative substrate 3214, suppresses interference between light emitted from LEDs 3214a mounted adjacent to the surface of the rear upper first decorative substrate 3214 (the mounting surface of the LEDs 3214a), and makes it easier to individually distinguish the light colors of the plurality of light-emitting means. Furthermore, since it is possible to clearly distinguish between lit and unlit LEDs 3214a on the information display 3213, information related to the game can be clearly displayed on the information display 3213.

In addition, as described above, if an abnormality occurs, multiple LEDs mounted on a specific decorative board that provide light-emitting decoration for gold effects (golden light emission) or rainbow effects when gold or rainbow effects are executed will be turned off, while the information display 3213 will emit light while maintaining its normal brightness.Therefore, the reduced brightness in the game window during an abnormality makes the light emitted by the information display 3213 stand out, making it easier to see the information about the game displayed on the information display 3213. Furthermore, if an abnormality occurs, the LEDs mounted on the door frame 3 that are mounted on specific decorative boards and that provide illumination for gold effects (golden illumination) or rainbow effects when gold or rainbow effects are being performed are controlled to emit light in an abnormality alert light mode (flashing red light at maximum brightness (light output)). However, because the interior of the upper rear rear movable decorative body 3210 (which may also be a case or cover) has an interference suppression means that suppresses interference between the light emitted by each of the multiple LEDs 3214a mounted on the upper rear rear first decorative board 3214, even when the LEDs mounted on the door frame 3 are controlled to emit light in an abnormality alert light mode (flashing red light at maximum brightness (light output)), the light emission state of each of the multiple LEDs 3124a mounted on the upper rear rear first decorative board 3124 can be easily determined.

In the information display 3213 of this embodiment, the front mounting surface on which the LED 3214a of the rear upper first decorative substrate 3214 is mounted is coated with a dark-colored solder resist (a dark-colored insulating coating is formed), so even if light emitted from the LED 3214a installed within the through-hole 3216 leaks outside the through-hole 3216, diffusion of the light can be suppressed.

The rear-upper-back movable decorative body 3210a, which covers the back surface (non-mounted surface of LED 3214a) of the rear-upper-back first decorative board 3214, may have only a minimal opening formed. For example, the rear-side rear-upper-back movable decorative body 3210a, which covers the back surface (non-mounted surface of LED 3214a) of the rear-upper-back first decorative board 3214, may have only an opening 3210b formed for the connector 3214b mounted on the back surface (non-mounted surface of LED 3214a) of the rear-upper-back first decorative board 3214. This prevents light from entering the through hole 3216 formed in the front-side rear-upper-back movable decorative body 3215 from the back side of the rear-upper-back movable decorative body 3210, preventing erroneous information from being displayed on the information display 3213 and improving the reliability of the information displayed on the information display 3213.

In this embodiment, the upper rear-rear movable decorative body 3210 is formed by firmly adhering the front-side upper rear-rear movable decorative body 3215 and the back-side upper rear-rear movable decorative body 3210a by welding or the like, but it may also be formed by firmly adhering the front-side upper rear-rear movable decorative body 3215 and the back-side upper rear-rear movable decorative body 3210a by fitting them together, for example. Specifically, a first abutment portion 3217 is formed extending from the inner surface portion 3215a of the front-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3215 toward the back-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3210a, and a second abutment portion 3210c is formed on the rear side of the back-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3210a extending toward the front-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3215 and abutting against the first abutment portion 3217, and a pin and a hole into which the pin firmly fit may be formed in the first abutment portion 3217 or the second abutment portion 3210c, and the configuration can be such that the back-upper first decorative substrate 3214 can be detached from the back-upper movable decorative body 3210 by destroying a portion of the back-upper movable decorative body 3210.

The front-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3215 may also be formed with a positioning pin 3218 extending from the inner surface 3215a toward the rear-upper first decorative substrate 3214. The positioning pin 3218 is inserted into a hole 3214c formed in the rear-upper first decorative substrate 3214 when the rear-upper first decorative substrate 3214 is attached to the front-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3215, thereby facilitating the positioning of the rear-upper first decorative substrate 3214 attached to the front-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3215.

The first abutment portion 3217, the second abutment portion 3210c, and the positioning pin 3218 may be formed, for example, in a cylindrical or rectangular shape. The first abutment portion 3217 may have a contact surface that abuts the second abutment portion 3210c and a hole or opening formed on the contact surface into which a pin formed on the second abutment portion 3210c is inserted (or a pin that is inserted into a hole or opening formed in the second abutment portion 3210c), or may be formed only with a pin that is inserted into a hole or opening formed in the second abutment portion 3210c. The positioning pin 3218 may be configured to consist of a support surface portion that abuts against the rear upper first decorative substrate 3214 and supports the rear upper first decorative substrate 3214 together with the inner surface portion 3215b, and a pin formed on the upper part of the support surface portion and inserted into a hole or opening formed in the rear upper first decorative substrate 3214 (or a hole or opening formed in the rear upper first decorative substrate 3214 into which a pin is inserted), or it may be configured to consist only of a pin that is inserted into a hole or opening formed in the rear upper first decorative substrate 3214.

In the above-mentioned information display 3213, the front-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3215 and the back-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3210a are firmly bonded by welding or the like, and are configured so that the back-upper first decorative substrate 3214 cannot be detached from the back-upper movable decorative body 3210 without destroying part of the back-upper movable decorative body 3210, thereby preventing the back-upper first decorative substrate 3214 from being illegally replaced with an unauthorized substrate. However, there is a risk that the first decorative board 3214 on the upper rear back, which is equipped with multiple LEDs 3214a used for important light-emitting effects, along with the movable upper rear back decorative body 3210 that houses the first decorative board 3214, will be replaced with an unauthorized decorative body and light-emitting board. In such a case, it would be difficult for even the administrator managing the pachinko machine 1 to verify whether the decorative body and light-emitting board are genuine. This could cause harm to players and the amusement hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed when an unauthorized light-emitting board is activated, and ultimately could reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 1. Below, we will explain an embodiment in which the front side movable upper rear back decorative body 3215 of the movable upper rear back decorative body 3210 has been modified in order to solve this problem.

[Modification example 1 of the front, back, and upper movable decorative body]
Figure 413 is a perspective view showing a portion of the first back-up decorative substrate 3214 removed from the front-side back-up movable decorative body 3215A and the front-side back-up movable decorative body 3215A. Figure 414 is a perspective view showing a portion of the first back-up decorative substrate 3214 attached to the front-side back-up movable decorative body 3215A and the front-side back-up movable decorative body 3215A. As shown in Figure 413 or Figure 414, the front-side back-up movable decorative body 3215A is formed in a box shape with an open back. Unlike the front-side back-upper movable decorative body 3215 of the above-mentioned embodiment, the front-side back-upper movable decorative body 3215A has multiple visible portions 3219A formed on its inner surface (inner surface portion 3215a, inner surface portion 3215b, inner surface portion 3215c, etc.), and the multiple visible portions 3219A of this embodiment are covered by the back-upper first decorative substrate 3214 after the back-upper first decorative substrate 3214 is positioned from the rear side of the front-side back-upper movable decorative body 3215A, making them invisible from the outside.

In this embodiment, the visible portion 3219A is a "★" mark provided on the front-side, back-upper, movable decorative body 3215A. Such visible portion 3219A is not provided on the front side (front side) or outer surface side of the front-side, back-upper, movable decorative body 3215A, but is provided only on the back side (rear side) of the front-side, back-upper, movable decorative body 3215A. The visible portion 3219A may be printed on the front-side, back-upper, movable decorative body 3215A, or a sticker-like film member on which the visible portion 3219A is formed may be attached to the front-side, back-upper, movable decorative body 3215A. Furthermore, the multiple visible portions 3219A may be formed by raising the front-side, back-upper, movable decorative body 3215A to create convex marks, or by depressing the front-side, back-upper, movable decorative body 3215A to create concave marks, or by combining these printed forms, forms in which a film member is attached, and forms formed by marks. From the perspective of avoiding damage or detachment of the visible portions 3219A themselves, it is preferable that the visible portions 3219A be integrally formed with the front-side, back-upper, movable decorative body 3215A by printing or marks, rather than by using a sticker-like film member.

In the information display 3213 of this embodiment, for example, by storing the highly important rear upper first decorative substrate 3214 in the front side rear upper movable decorative body 3215A, it is possible to prevent malfunctions caused by external factors such as unauthorized access to the rear upper first decorative substrate 3214 or dust. Furthermore, even if the rear-upper first decorative board 3214 is illegally replaced with an unauthorized light-emitting board and the decorative body housing the light-emitting board along with the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 housing the rear-upper first decorative board 3214, by removing the rear-upper first decorative board 3214 from the front-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3215A and checking for the presence or absence of the multiple visual identification portions 3219A formed on the front-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3215A, it is possible to confirm whether the front-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3215A is genuine or unauthorized. This makes it possible to detect and prevent fraudulent acts, such as the illegal replacement of the rear-upper first decorative board 3214 with the front-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3215A. As a result, it is possible to prevent disadvantages to players and the amusement halls where the pachinko machine 1 is installed due to fraudulent acts or defects in the rear-upper first decorative board 3214, and ultimately to prevent a decline in the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, in the information display 3213 of this embodiment, the visible portion 3219A is covered by the rear-upper first decorative substrate 3214, which is positioned from the rear side of the front-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3215A, making it impossible to see from the outside, and the visible portion 3219A cannot be seen unless at least a portion of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 is destroyed and the rear-upper first decorative substrate 3214 is removed from the front-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3215A. This increases the secrecy of the visible portion 3219A, making it difficult to create a visible portion on an unauthorized decorative body formed to imitate the genuine front-side, back-upper, movable decorative body 3215A. Even if the back-upper first decorative substrate 3214, along with the back-upper movable decorative body 3210 that houses the back-upper first decorative substrate 3214, is fraudulently replaced with an unauthorized light-emitting substrate and decorative body that houses the light-emitting substrate, it is possible to confirm whether the front-side, back-upper, movable decorative body 3215A is genuine or unauthorized by removing the back-upper first decorative substrate 3214 from the front-side, back-upper, movable decorative body 3215A and checking the multiple visible portions 3219A formed on the front-side, back-upper, movable decorative body 3215A.

The multiple visible portions 3219A may be located anywhere on the front-side, back-upper, movable decorative body 3215A as long as they are covered by the back-upper first decorative substrate 3214, which is positioned through the rear surface of the front-side, back-upper, movable decorative body 3215A and cannot be seen from the outside; the multiple visible portions 3219A may be any size; the multiple visible portions 3219A may be any shape as long as it is a pre-set shape; the multiple visible portions 3219A may be uncolored or colored in any color; and the visible portions 3219A can be used as a visual indicator to easily check whether the front-side, back-upper, movable decorative body 3215A is genuine or non-genuine.

From the perspective of increasing the concealment of the visible portions 3219A and making it even more difficult to create counterfeit products that are imitations of the front-side, rear-upper movable decorative body 3215A, it is preferable that the multiple visible portions 3219A are formed, for example, dispersedly on the inner surface of the front-side, rear-upper movable decorative body 3215A in the area that is covered by the front mounting surface of the rear-upper first decorative substrate 3214. Specifically, it is preferable that the multiple visible portions 3219A are formed dispersedly on the inner surface portion 3215a on the base end side of the positioning pin 3218, the inner surface portion 3215b where the multiple through holes 3216 are formed, the inner surface portion 3215c on the apex side of the substrate support protrusion 3230, etc. In this example, the visible portions 3219A are positioned at different distances from the edge of the installed back-up first decorative substrate 3214 so that all of the visible portions 3219A cannot be seen from the outside simply by slightly lifting the edge of the back-up first decorative substrate 3214 from the front-side back-up movable decorative body 3215A. In other words, all of the visible portions 3219A cannot be seen from the outside unless the back-up first decorative substrate 3214 is completely removed from the front-side back-up movable decorative body 3215A. This increases the secrecy of the visible portions 3219A and makes it even more difficult to create visible portions 3219A on an unauthorized decorative body that is formed to imitate the genuine front-side back-up movable decorative body 3215A.

Furthermore, if the information display 3213 of this embodiment is fraudulently modified to create an unauthorized information display, it is conceivable that unauthorized electronic components capable of receiving at least an external operation signal may be installed on the authorized rear-upper first decorative substrate 3214. In such cases, the unauthorized rear-upper first decorative substrate may be larger than the authorized rear-upper first decorative substrate 3214, or a predetermined portion of the authorized rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 may be scraped away due to the installation of unauthorized electronic components, resulting in the formation of an unauthorized rear-upper movable decorative body. In consideration of such cases, in this embodiment, the viewing portion 3219A is located on the inner surface 3215b abutting the rear-upper first decorative substrate 3214 and on the inner surface 3215c on the apex side of the substrate support protrusion 3230, so that when the inner surface of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210 is scraped away, the viewing portion 3219A of the front-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3215A is also scraped away, providing clear evidence of fraud. This makes it possible to check whether or not the front, back, upper movable decorative element 3215A has been tampered with by checking for the presence or absence of multiple visible parts 3219A.

In addition, the position and number of the multiple visible portions 3219A formed on the inner surface portions 3215a, 3215b, 3215c of the front-side, back-upper, movable decorative body 3215A are preferably formed according to a forming pattern that is preset in accordance with the specific conditions of the pachinko machine 1 (manufacturing conditions such as the model or the production lot even for the same model), so that only those who are aware of the existence of the visible portions 3219A in advance (such as the pachinko machine 1 manager or the worker performing maintenance on the pachinko machine 1) can confirm the front-side, back-upper, movable decorative body 3215A in accordance with the forming pattern, making it even more difficult to create visible portions 3219A on an unauthorized decorative body that is formed to imitate the genuine front-side, back-upper, movable decorative body 3215A.

When providing multiple viewing areas 3219A, it is preferable to provide at least some of the viewing areas 3219A in locations that are difficult to find unless the person is aware of the existence of the viewing areas 3219A in advance (such as the manager of the pachinko machine 1 or a worker performing maintenance on the pachinko machine 1). For example, in this embodiment, multiple viewing areas 3219A are provided on the inner surface 3215b where the multiple through holes 3216 are formed, and the viewing areas 3219A are provided at position A, which is not surrounded by the multiple through holes 3216, and position B, which is surrounded by the multiple through holes 3216. In particular, at position B, a smaller visible portion 3219A is placed among the multiple through holes 3216, and even if the rear upper first decorative substrate 3214 is removed from the front side rear upper movable decorative body 3215A, it will be difficult for anyone other than those who are aware of the existence of the visible portions 3219A at each position in advance (such as the manager of the pachinko machine 1 or a worker performing maintenance on the pachinko machine 1) to find the smaller visible portion 3219A, making it even more difficult to create a visible portion 3219A on an unauthorized decorative body that is formed to imitate the genuine front side rear upper movable decorative body 3215A.

Furthermore, when placing a smaller visible portion 3219A at position B surrounded by multiple through-holes 3216 so that it blends in with the multiple through-holes 3216, another example of making it more difficult for counterfeiters to find it is to make the visible portion 3219A resemble the shape of the through-hole 3216. For example, if the shape of the through-hole 3216 is a substantially circular hole (e.g., an ellipse), the visible portion 3219A at position B can also be a similar substantially circular mark (e.g., an elliptical mark), or if the shape of the through-hole 3216 is a substantially rectangular hole (e.g., a square hole), the visible portion 3219A at position B can also be a similar substantially rectangular mark (e.g., a square mark). In this way, by providing the visible portion 3219A as a mark with a shape similar to the shape of the through-hole 3216, it is possible to make it more difficult for counterfeiters to find it.

Figures 415(a) to (d) are rear views showing a portion of the front-side, back-up, movable decorative body 3215A. In this embodiment, the multiple visual identification portions 3219A, which are represented by the mark "★," have been described. However, the multiple visual identification portions 3219A may have different shapes as long as they serve as visual markers for determining whether the front-side, back-up, movable decorative body 3215A is genuine or non-genuine. Specifically, the visual identification portion 3219A may be represented by the mark "●" as shown in Figure 415(a), the mark "▲" as shown in Figure 415(b), the mark "■" as shown in Figure 415(c), or a mark consisting of multiple wires extending in one direction and arranged at a predetermined interval on the other perpendicular to the first wire as shown in Figure 415(d), or may be represented by letters such as "shi" or "U." Furthermore, when a mark is used for the visible portion 3219A, the mark may be missing a portion (for example, a semicircular mark in the case of a "●" mark), making it difficult for anyone other than those who are aware of the existence of the visible portion 3219A beforehand (such as the manager of the pachinko machine 1 or the worker performing maintenance on the pachinko machine 1) to recognize that the visible portion 3219A is a visual marker for checking the front, back, upper, movable decorative body 3215A.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the size and shape of the multiple visible portions 3219A formed on the inner surface 3215a and inner surface 3215b of the front-side, back-up, movable decorative body 3215A be formed according to a formation pattern that is preset in accordance with, for example, the specific conditions of the pachinko machine 1 (manufacturing conditions such as the model or the production lot even for the same model). Only those who are aware of the existence of the visible portions 3219A in advance (such as the pachinko machine 1 administrator or workers performing maintenance on the pachinko machine 1) can confirm the front-side, back-up, movable decorative body 3215A in accordance with the formation pattern, making it even more difficult to create visible portions 3219A on an unauthorized decorative body that is formed to imitate the authentic front-side, back-up, movable decorative body 3215A. In addition, in the formation pattern of the multiple visible portions 3219A, the sizes and shapes of the multiple visible portions 3219A may be uniform, or the sizes and shapes of the multiple visible portions 3219A may differ.

The color of the multiple visible portions 3219A may be any color, but for example, it may be the same color as the front-side back-upper movable decorative body 3215A, a color similar to the front-side back-upper movable decorative body 3215A, or a dark color corresponding to the solder resist coated on the back-upper first decorative substrate 3214. If the multiple visible portions 3219A are the same color as or similar to the front-side back-upper movable decorative body 3215A, the visibility of the visible portions 3219A can be reduced, making it difficult for anyone other than those who are aware of the existence of the visible portions 3219A in advance (such as the administrator of the pachinko machine 1 or a worker performing maintenance on the pachinko machine 1) to see the visible portions 3219A, making it even more difficult to create visible portions 3219A on an unauthorized decorative body that is formed to imitate the genuine front-side back-upper movable decorative body 3215A. Furthermore, if the multiple visible areas 3219A are dark in color according to the solder resist coated on the rear upper first decorative substrate 3214, diffusion of light emitted from the LED 3214a provided inside the through-hole 3216 can be suppressed when the light leaks outside the through-hole 3216.

As shown in Figures 415(a) to (d), the visible portion 3219A formed on the inner surface 3215b of the front-side, back-upper, movable decorative body 3215A may be formed in accordance with a specific arrangement pattern of multiple through holes 3216 formed on the inner surface 3215b. When the multiple through holes 3216 are formed in accordance with a specific arrangement pattern, anyone except those who are aware of the existence of the visible portion 3219A in advance (such as the administrator of the pachinko machine 1 or workers performing maintenance on the pachinko machine 1) can mistake the visible portion 3219A for the through hole 3216, thereby increasing the confidentiality of the visible portion 3219A and making it even more difficult to create a visible portion on an unauthorized decorative body formed to imitate the genuine front-side, back-upper, movable decorative body 3215A.

[Modification example 2 of the upper rear movable decorative body]
Figure 416 is a perspective view showing a portion of the first decorative substrate 3214 removed from the front-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3215B and the front-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3215B. Figure 417 is a perspective view showing a portion of the first decorative substrate 3214 attached to the front-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3215B and the front-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3215B. The front-side, rear-upper, movable decorative body 3215B, which is formed in a box shape with an open rear, has multiple visible portions 3219B formed thereon.As shown in Figure 416 or Figure 417, the multiple visible portions 3219B of this embodiment are formed on the inner surface portion 3215a of the front-side, rear-upper, movable decorative body 3215B and the tip surface portion 3215e of the outer peripheral standing wall portion 3215d of the front-side, rear-upper, movable decorative body 3215B, and differ from the multiple visible portions 3219A of modified example 1 in that some are not covered by the rear-upper first decorative substrate 3214 arranged from the rear side of the front-side, rear-upper, movable decorative body 3215B.

In this embodiment, the visible portion 3219B is a "★" mark provided on the front-side, back-upper, movable decorative body 3215B. Such visible portion 3219B is not provided on the front side (front side) or outer surface side of the front-side, back-upper, movable decorative body 3215B, but is provided only on the back side (rear side) of the front-side, back-upper, movable decorative body 3215B. The visible portion 3219B may be printed on the front-side, back-upper, movable decorative body 3215B, or a sticker-like film member on which the visible portion 3219B is formed may be attached to the front-side, back-upper, movable decorative body 3215B. Furthermore, the multiple visible portions 3219B may be formed by raising the front-side, back-upper, movable decorative body 3215B to create convex marks, or by depressing the front-side, back-upper, movable decorative body 3215B to create concave marks, or by combining these printed forms, forms in which a film member is attached, and forms formed by marks. From the perspective of avoiding damage or detachment of the visible portions 3219B themselves, it is preferable that the visible portions 3219B be integrally formed with the front-side, back-upper, movable decorative body 3215B by printing or marks, rather than by using a sticker-like film member.

In the information display 3213 of this embodiment, for example, by storing the important first upper back decorative substrate 3214 in the front-side upper back decorative body 3215B, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the first upper back decorative substrate 3214 or malfunctions caused by external factors such as dust. Furthermore, by forming a visible portion 3219B on the front-side upper back decorative body 3215B and positioning this visible portion 3219B in a position that is not covered by the first upper back decorative substrate 3214 even when the first upper back decorative substrate 3214 is stored, it is possible to confirm whether the front-side upper back decorative body 3215B is genuine or non-genuine by checking the presence or absence of the visible portion 3219B. This makes it possible to detect and prevent unauthorized acts, such as the unauthorized exchange of the first upper back decorative substrate 3214 with the front-side upper back decorative body 3215B. Furthermore, because the visible portion 3219B is not covered by the rear-upper first decorative board 3214, by recognizing the visible portion 3219B provided on the front-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3215B, it is easy to recognize that this front-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3215B is the part to be checked to determine whether it is genuine or non-genuine. As a result, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts or malfunctions with the rear-upper first decorative board 3214 from causing harm to players or gaming halls where gaming machines are installed, and ultimately to prevent a decline in the reliability of gaming machines.

In addition, in the information display 3213 of this embodiment, a visible portion 3219B is formed on each of multiple inner surfaces (inner surface 3215a, tip surface 3215e, etc.) that have steps on the back side of the front-side back-upper movable decorative body 3215B, and the visible portion 3219B formed on tip surface 3215e is positioned so that it can be seen from the back side even when the back-upper first decorative substrate 3214 is attached to the front-side back-upper movable decorative body 3215B. Therefore, by recognizing the visible portion 3219B of the front-side back-upper movable decorative body 3215B from the back side, it can be easily recognized that this front-side back-upper movable decorative body 3215B is a part that needs to be checked to determine whether it is genuine or non-genuine.

The visible portion 3219B formed on the tip surface portion 3215e may be located at any position on the tip surface portion 3215e as long as it can be recognized from the back side of the front side, back, upper, movable decorative body 3215B; the visible portion 3219B may be any size; the visible portion 3219B may be any shape as long as it is a pre-set shape; the multiple visible portions 3219B may be uncolored or colored in any color; and the visible portion 3219B can be used as a visual indicator to easily check whether the front side, back, upper, movable decorative body 3215B is genuine or non-genuine.

In addition, it is preferable that the position and number of the visible portions 3219B formed on the tip surface portion 3215e are formed according to a forming pattern that is preset according to the specific conditions of the pachinko machine 1 (manufacturing conditions such as the model or the production lot even for the same model), and only those who are aware of the existence of the visible portions 3219B formed in advance on the tip surface portion 3215e (such as the pachinko machine 1 manager or the worker performing maintenance on the pachinko machine 1) can confirm the front-side, back-side, upper-rear movable decorative body 3215B according to the forming pattern, making it even more difficult to create visible portions 3219B on an unauthorized decorative body that is formed to imitate the genuine front-side, back-side, upper-rear movable decorative body 3215B.

The visible portion 3219B formed on the tip surface portion 3215e may be any size, but from the perspective of making it difficult for a tamper-evident individual to recognize its presence, the visible portion 3219B formed on the tip surface portion 3215e may be formed smaller than the other visible portions 3219B. Specifically, the visible portion 3219B formed on the inner surface portion 3215a of the front-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3215B may be formed relatively larger than the visible portion 3219B formed on the tip surface portion 3215e, thereby increasing the likelihood that a tamper-evident individual will overlook the visible portion 3219B (the visible portion 3219B formed on the tip surface portion 3215e) formed in a position not covered by the rear-upper first decorative substrate 3214. Furthermore, even if the back-side back-up movable decorative body 3210a is removed from the front-side back-up movable decorative body 3215B, the smaller visible portion 3219B is difficult to see unless someone who is aware of the existence of the visible portion 3219B in advance (such as the pachinko machine 1 administrator or a worker performing maintenance on the pachinko machine 1) does so, making it even more difficult to create a visible portion 3219B on an unauthorized decorative body that imitates the genuine front-side back-up movable decorative body 3215B. Furthermore, when multiple visible portions 3219B are formed on the tip surface portion 3215e, it is preferable that at least some of them are the same size, which makes it easier for someone who is aware of the existence of the visible portion 3219B in advance (such as the pachinko machine 1 administrator or a worker performing maintenance on the pachinko machine 1) to check them.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the multiple visual identification portions 3219B formed on the tip surface portion 3215e and the other visual identification portions 3219B are described as being represented by a common "★" mark, but the visual identification portion 3219B formed on the tip surface portion 3215e and the other visual identification portions 3219B may have different shapes as long as they serve as a visual marker for determining whether the front-side, back-upper, movable decorative body 3215B is genuine or non-genuine. Specifically, the visual identification portion 3219B formed on the tip surface portion 3215e may be represented by a "●" mark, while the visual identification portion 3219B formed on the inner surface portion 3215a of the front-side, back-upper, movable decorative body 3215B may be represented by a "▲" mark. Furthermore, if a common mark is used for the visible portion 3219B formed on the tip surface portion 3215e and the other visible portions 3219B, for example, only the visible portion 3219B formed on the tip surface portion 3215e may have a mark missing from it (for example, in the case of the mark "●", the mark may be semicircular, etc.), making it difficult for anyone other than those who are aware of the existence of the visible portion 3219B in advance (such as the manager of the pachinko machine 1 or the worker performing maintenance on the pachinko machine 1) to recognize that the visible portion 3219B formed on the tip surface portion 3215e is a visual marker for checking the front, back, upper, movable decorative body 3215B.

The color of the visible portion 3219B formed on the tip surface portion 3215e may be any color, but for example, it may be the same color as the front-side back-upper movable decorative body 3215B, a color similar to the front-side back-upper movable decorative body 3215B, or a dark color corresponding to the solder resist coated on the back-upper first decorative substrate 3214. If the visible portion 3219B formed on the tip surface portion 3215e is the same color as or a similar color to the front-side back-upper movable decorative body 3215B, the visibility of the visible portion 3219B can be reduced, making it difficult for anyone other than those who are aware of the existence of the visible portion 3219B in advance (such as the manager of the pachinko machine 1 or a worker performing maintenance on the pachinko machine 1) to see the visible portion 3219B, making it even more difficult to create the visible portion 3219A on an unauthorized decorative body that is formed to imitate the genuine front-side back-upper movable decorative body 3215B. Furthermore, if the visible portion 3219B formed on the tip surface portion 3215e is a dark color corresponding to the solder resist coated on the rear upper first decorative substrate 3214, diffusion of light emitted from the LED 3214a provided inside the through-hole 3216 can be suppressed when the light leaks outside the through-hole 3216.

In the above-mentioned information display 3213, the back-side back-upper movable decorative body 3210a is attached to the box-shaped front-side back-upper movable decorative body 3215 so as to cover the back-upper first decorative substrate 3214. However, the information display 3213 may also be attached to the box-shaped front-side back-upper movable decorative body 3215 so as to cover at least a portion of the back-upper first decorative substrate 3214, or may be attached to the box-shaped front-side back-upper movable decorative body 3215 so as not to cover the back-side back-upper movable decorative body 3210a.

[Modification example 3 of the upper rear movable decorative body]
Figure 418 is an exploded perspective view showing the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210C and the rear-upper first decorative substrate 3214 removed from the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210C. As shown in Figure 418, the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210C of this embodiment differs from the rear-upper movable decorative body of the above-mentioned modified example 1 and modified example 2 in that the rear-upper first decorative substrate 3214 is stored in the rear-upper first decorative substrate storage section 3214C, and the rear-upper first decorative substrate storage section 3214C is stored in addition to the rear-upper first decorative substrate 3214. Below, the aspects of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210C will be described, but explanations of points that overlap with the rear-upper movable decorative body of modified example 1 and modified example 2 will be omitted.

The rear-upper first decorative board storage section 3214C includes an opaque front-side storage member 3214C1 formed in a box-like shape with an open back (rear) and an opaque rear-side storage member 3214C6 covering the open back of the front-side storage member 3214C1. The rear-side storage member 3214C6 may be formed in a plate-like shape or in a box-like shape with an open front (front) and is formed to abut the front-side storage member 3214C1 at a position on the back side of the rear-upper first decorative board 3214 stored in the front-side storage member 3214C1. Therefore, even if light enters the rear-upper first decorative board storage section 3214C through the joint between the front-side storage member 3214C1 and the rear-side storage member 3214C6, it is possible to prevent light from entering the surface of the rear-upper first decorative board 3214, thereby reducing uneven light emission from the rear-upper first decorative board 3214. Furthermore, the joint between the front storage member 3214C1 and the rear storage member 3214C6 need only be configured so that it is not on the front side of the rear upper first decorative substrate 3214. Even if the front storage member 3214C1 and the rear storage member 3214C6 are configured to abut between the front and back surfaces of the rear upper first decorative substrate 3214 (the joint between the front storage member 3214C1 and the rear storage member 3214C6 is abutted so as to be located on the side of the rear upper first decorative substrate 3214), the same effects as those described above can be achieved.

Furthermore, only a minimum number of openings need to be formed in the rear storage member 3214C6. For example, the rear storage member 3214C6 covering the rear surface (non-mounted surface of the LED 3214a) of the rear upper first decorative board 3214 only needs to have an opening 3214C7 for a connector mounted on the rear surface (non-mounted surface of the LED 3214a) of the rear upper first decorative board 3214. This prevents light from entering the rear upper first decorative board storage section 3214C and prevents erroneous information from being displayed on the information display 3213C, improving the reliability of the information displayed on the information display 3213C.

The front storage member 3214C1 is box-shaped with an open back (rear) and includes a plate-shaped front surface (front face) 3214C2 and a side wall 3214C3 extending rearward from the end of the front surface 3214C2. The front surface 3214C2 has a plurality of hole-shaped through-holes 3214C4 that penetrate the front surface 3214C2 in the front-to-rear direction. The through-holes 3214C4 are formed to correspond to the LEDs 3214a mounted on the rear-upper first decorative board 3214 housed in the front storage member 3214C1, and one of the LEDs 3214a mounted on the rear-upper first decorative board 3214 is disposed in each of the through-holes 3214C4.

Furthermore, the inner surface of the front storage member 3214C1 is formed with an interference suppression means for suppressing interference between the light emitted from each of the multiple LEDs 3214a mounted on the rear upper first decorative substrate 3214. The interference suppression means extends rearward from a portion of the inner surface of the surface portion 3214C2 and is formed so as to abut the front mounting surface (mounting surface of the LEDs 3214a) of the rear upper first decorative substrate 3214. As a result, the direction of travel of the light emitted from each of the multiple LEDs 3214a mounted on the rear upper first decorative substrate 3214 is restricted, suppressing interference between the light emitted from the LEDs 3214a mounted adjacent to the surface (mounting surface of the LEDs 3214a) of the rear upper first decorative substrate 3214, making it easier to individually distinguish the emitted colors of the multiple light-emitting means. Furthermore, since it is possible to clearly distinguish between lit and unlit LEDs 3214a on the information display 3213C, information related to the game can be clearly displayed on the information display 3213C.

Figure 419 is an exploded perspective view showing the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210C in which the rear-upper first decorative board storage section 3214C is stored. As shown in Figures 418 and 419, the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210C has a front-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3210C1 formed in a box shape with an open back (rear), and a rear-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3210C6 covering the open back surface of the front-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3210C1. The rear-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3210C6 may be formed in a plate shape or in a box shape with an open front (front). Furthermore, only a minimum number of openings need be formed in the rear-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3210C6. For example, only an opening 3210C7 corresponding to the connector opening 3214C7 formed in the rear-side storage member 3214C6 covering the back surface (non-mounted surface of the LED 3214a) of the rear-upper first decorative board 3214 needs to be formed. This further prevents light from entering the rear upper movable decorative body 3210C, preventing incorrect information from being displayed on the information display 3213C and improving the reliability of the information displayed on the information display 3213C.

The front-side, rear-upper movable decorative body 3210C1 is formed in a box shape with an open back (rear) and has a plate-shaped surface (front) portion 3210C2 and a side wall portion 3210C3 extending rearward from the end of the surface portion 3210C2. The surface portion 3210C2 has multiple hole-shaped through-holes 3210C4 that penetrate the surface portion 3210C2 in the front-to-rear direction. The multiple through holes 3210C4 are formed to correspond to the multiple LEDs 3214a mounted on the rear upper first decorative board 3214 stored in the front side rear upper movable decorative body 3210C1 together with the rear upper first decorative board storage section 3214C (to correspond to the multiple through holes 3214C4 formed in the front side storage member 3214C1 stored in the front side rear upper movable decorative body 3210C1), and one of the multiple LEDs 3214a mounted on the rear upper first decorative board 3214 is arranged in each of the multiple through holes 3210C4.

When the first rear-upper decorative board storage section 3214C is stored in the front-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3210C1, the surface portion 3210C2 of the front-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3210C1 abuts against the surface portion 3214C2 of the front-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3210C1. This restricts the direction of light emitted from each of the multiple LEDs 3214a mounted on the first rear-upper decorative board 3214, preventing interference between the light emitted from the LEDs 3214a mounted adjacent to the surface of the first rear-upper decorative board 3214 (the mounting surface of the LEDs 3214a). This allows a clear distinction between the lit LEDs 3214a on the information display 3213C and the unlit LEDs 3214a, enabling the information display 3213C to clearly display information related to the game.

The front-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3210C1 also has a partition wall 3210C5 that extends rearward from the surface portion 3210C2 and partitions the inner surface of the front-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3210C1. The partition wall 3210C5 is formed to surround the rear-upper first decorative board storage portion 3214C at the position where the rear-upper first decorative board storage portion 3214C is stored. The partition wall 3210C5 also has an engagement portion 3210C5a into which the rear-upper first decorative board storage portion 3214C stored in the front-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3210C1 is fitted, and an engagement portion 3210C5b with a hook-shaped tip that can engage the rear-upper first decorative board storage portion 3214C fitted into the engagement portion 3210C5a. The locking portion 3210C5b is formed independently in part of the partition wall portion 3210C5 so as to face the mating portion 3210C5a. This allows the flexibility of the locking portion 3210C5b to easily attach and detach the rear-upper first decorative board storage portion 3214C to the front-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3210C1. In this embodiment, the partition wall portion 3210C5 is formed continuously from the side wall portion 3210C3 in order to increase the strength of the partition wall portion 3210C5, but it may also be formed independently and not continuously from the side wall portion 3210C3.

The information display 3213C, which is configured with the above-mentioned rear upper movable decorative body 3210C, displays information about the game, such as "jackpot," "left hit ←," and "right hit →," when in a state displaying information about the game (game information display mode). As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a game (so-called "right hit") is played with the aim of getting the game ball to enter the second start port 2004 during time-saving mode (low-probability time-saving mode (also called time-saving mode) or high-probability time-saving mode (also called probability variable mode)). Furthermore, because the second start port 2004 is frequently opened during time-saving mode, it is easier to achieve a start win (a game ball entering the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004) than during normal mode (low-probability non-time-saving mode (also called normal mode) or high-probability non-time-saving mode), which is advantageous to the player. However, if the player does not play with the aim of getting the game ball into the second starting hole 2004 (so-called "right hit") during the time-saving period, the player may not be able to enjoy the advantageous state, and in this example, the pachinko machine 1 displays "Right Hit →" on the information display 3213C as a display instructing the player to play with the aim of getting the game ball into the second starting hole 2004 (so-called "right hit") during the time-saving period. This prevents the player from being unable to enjoy the advantageous state even during the time-saving period, and prevents the player from being disadvantaged.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, during normal play (low-probability non-time-saving state (also called the normal state) and high-probability non-time-saving state), a game (so-called "left-hand hit") is played with the aim of getting the game ball into the first starting hole 2002. During normal play, the second starting hole 2004 is rarely opened, and the period during which it is open is extremely short compared to during time-saving play. Therefore, during normal play, there is a risk that a player who plays with the aim of getting the game ball into the second starting hole 2004 may be disadvantaged. For this reason, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, "left-hand hit ←" is displayed on the information display 3213C as an indication that the player should play with the aim of getting the game ball into the first starting hole 2002 during normal play. This makes it possible to prevent a player from being disadvantaged during normal play.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the information displayed on the dot matrix display unit of the information display 3213C can instruct the player to hit to the left (to hit the game ball to the left of the center device 2500) or to hit to the right (to hit the ball with enough force to hit the stopper 1006 that protrudes inward from the outer rail 1001 that forms part of the periphery of the play area 5a), or instruct the player to play with the aim of getting the ball into the big prize opening 2005, thereby preventing disadvantages for both experienced and inexperienced players.

In addition, the information display 3213C may be a dedicated display for displaying information related to the game, and in such a configuration, the information displayed on the information display 3213C may be switched when the operating means is operated during a specific period. The information related to the game may include information for guiding the game (hit right, hit left, etc.), information related to the lottery results of the variable effects (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) (jackpot, miss, guaranteed jackpot, time-limited jackpot, etc.), setting information related to the lottery probability of winning or losing (such as the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 set in the setting change process and the probability of winning for the number of variable effects actually executed), and the number of game balls collected by the outlet 1008 (the number of game balls collected by the outlet 1008 out of the game balls fired into the game area 5a). The information may include the number of game balls that entered a specific winning device (the number of game balls that entered a specific winning device out of the game balls that were shot into the game area 5a), and the number of game balls that entered a specific winning device (one or any combination of the first starting gate 2002, second starting gate 2004, large winning gate 2005, general winning gate 2001, etc. (it may be all of them), for example, the number of game balls that entered the first starting gate 2002 and second starting gate 2004), or it may include one or any combination of information related to these games.

In this embodiment, the information display 3213C is configured to be provided inside the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002. However, the information display 3213C may also be configured to be provided outside the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002. This increases the design freedom in the area inside the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, allowing structures or movable objects to be provided to enhance decorativeness and presentation effects. In addition, in this embodiment, an example has been described in which a dot matrix display unit is used for the information display 3213C. However, information about games may also be displayed using a 7-segment display unit instead of a dot matrix display unit. Furthermore, the information display 3213C may be configured to be located on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and information about games targeted at gaming parlor staff may be displayed on the information display 3213C. This increases the design freedom on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, allowing structures or movable objects to be provided to enhance decorativeness and presentation effects.

Furthermore, the rear-upper first decorative board storage section 3214C of this embodiment is configured with a rear-side storage member 3214C6, but may also be configured without the rear-side storage member 3214C6. Similarly, the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210C of this embodiment is configured with a rear-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3210C6, but may also be configured without the rear-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3210C6. In this type of configuration, for example, after the rear-upper first decorative board storage section 3214C or the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210C is attached to the gaming board 5, the gaming panel 1100 prevents light from entering the rear-upper first decorative board storage section 3214C or the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210C from the outside, allowing a clear distinction to be made between the lit and unlit LEDs 3214a in the information display 3213C, and enabling information related to the game to be clearly displayed on the information display 3213C.

The dot matrix display unit of the information display 3213C in this embodiment is smaller than the dot matrix display unit of the information display 3213 described above. The rear-upper first decorative substrate 3214 is stored in the rear-upper first decorative substrate storage section 3214C, and the rear-upper first decorative substrate storage section 3214C that stores the rear-upper first decorative substrate 3214 is further stored in the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210C. However, even with this type of information display 3213C, there is a risk of fraudulent activity, such as replacing a genuine information display 3213C with an unauthorized information display. If such fraudulent activity were to occur and a malfunction were to occur, it could cause harm to players and the amusement hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and ultimately reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 1. Below, we will explain how modifications to the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210C have been made to resolve this issue.

Figure 420 is a rear view showing the front-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3210C1 of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210C. As shown in Figures 419 and 420, the front-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3210C1, which is formed in a box shape with an open rear, has multiple visible areas 3219C that are visible from the rear side. Such visible areas 3219C are not provided on the front or side of the front-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3210C1, but are only provided on the rear of the front-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3210C1. Specifically, the multiple visible areas 3219C are formed on the rear of the surface portion 3210C2, the rear of the side wall portion 3210C3, and the rear of the partition wall portion 3210C5.

In this embodiment, the visible portion 3219C is a "★" mark provided on the front-side, rear-upper, movable decorative body 3210C1. The visible portion 3219C may be printed on the front-side, rear-upper, movable decorative body 3210C1, or a sticker-like film member on which the visible portion 3219C is formed may be attached to the front-side, rear-upper, movable decorative body 3210C1. Furthermore, the multiple visible portions 3219C may be formed by raising the front-side, rear-upper, movable decorative body 3210C1 to form protruding molding marks, or by depressing the front-side, rear-upper, movable decorative body 3210C1 to form concave molding marks, or may be a combination of these printed, attached film member, and molded mark formations. Furthermore, from the standpoint of avoiding damage or detachment of the visible portion 3219C itself, it is preferable that the visible portion 3219C be formed integrally with the front, back, upper, movable decorative body 3210C1 by printing or molding marks, rather than by using a sticker-like film material.

In the information display 3213C of this embodiment, for example, the rear upper first decorative substrate 3214, which is of high importance, is stored in the rear upper first decorative substrate storage section 3214C, and then further stored in the rear upper movable decorative body 3210C, thereby preventing malfunctions caused by external factors such as unauthorized access to the rear upper first decorative substrate 3214 or dust. Furthermore, even if the rear-upper first decorative board 3214 is illegally replaced with an unauthorized light-emitting board and the decorative body housing the light-emitting board, along with the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210C housing the rear-upper first decorative board 3214, by removing the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210C from the gaming board 5 and checking for the presence or absence of the multiple visual identification portions 3219C formed on the front-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3210C1, it is possible to confirm whether the front-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3210C1 is genuine or unauthorized. This makes it possible to detect and prevent fraudulent acts, such as the illegal replacement of the rear-upper first decorative board 3214 with the front-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3210C1. As a result, it is possible to prevent disadvantages to players and gaming halls where the pachinko machine 1 is installed due to fraudulent acts or malfunctions with the rear-upper first decorative board 3214, and ultimately to prevent a decline in the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, in the information display 3213C of this embodiment, the visible portion 3219C of the front-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3210C1 is formed in a position that is not covered by the rear-upper first decorative board storage portion 3214C stored in the front-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3210C1, so that after removing the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210C from the gaming board 5, it is possible to easily check for the presence or absence of multiple visible portions 3219C formed on the front-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3210C1, and it is possible to easily confirm whether the front-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3210C1 is genuine or non-genuine. As a result, it becomes possible to detect and prevent fraudulent acts such as the unauthorized replacement of the rear upper first decorative board 3214 together with the front rear upper movable decorative body 3210C1, and it is possible to prevent disadvantages to players and gaming halls where the pachinko machine 1 is installed due to fraudulent acts or malfunctions with the rear upper first decorative board 3214, and ultimately to prevent a decline in the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.

The visible portions 3219C of the front side rear upper movable decorative body 3210C1 are formed in multiple locations on the top of the side wall portion 3210C3 of the front side rear upper movable decorative body 3210C1 (the rear end surface of the side wall portion 3210C3 extending rearward from the surface portion 3210C2). When viewed from the back of the front-side, rear-upper, movable decorative body 3210C1, the top of the side wall 3210C3 has a gap between it and the rear-upper, first decorative board storage section 3214C stored in the rear-upper, first decorative board storage section 3214C, and also has a front-to-back distance from the rear end face of the rear-upper, first decorative board storage section 3214C. Therefore, it is difficult for anyone other than those who are aware of the existence of the visible part 3219C in advance (such as the manager of the pachinko machine 1 or a worker performing maintenance on the pachinko machine 1) to find the visible part 3219C, making it difficult to create the visible part 3219C on an unauthorized decorative body formed to imitate the genuine front-side, rear-upper, movable decorative body 3210C1.

In addition, multiple visible portions 3219C may be formed on the top of the partition wall portion 3210C5 of the front-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3210C1 (the rear end surface of the partition wall portion 3210C5 extending rearward from the surface portion 3210C2). The top of the partition wall portion 3210C5 of the front-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3210C1 is at a front-to-rear distance from the rear end surface of the rear-upper first decorative board storage portion 3214C when viewed from the back of the front-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3210C1. Therefore, it is difficult for anyone other than those who are aware of the existence of the visible portion 3219C in advance (such as the administrator of the pachinko machine 1 or a worker performing maintenance on the pachinko machine 1), making it difficult to create the visible portion 3219C on an unauthorized decorative body formed to imitate the genuine front-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3210C1. In particular, if the color of the front-side, rear-upper, movable decorative body 3210C1 is different from the color of the rear-upper, first decorative board storage section 3214C, the eye is likely to be drawn to the rear-upper, first decorative board storage section 3214C, making it difficult to find the visible portion 3219C located near the rear-upper, first decorative board storage section 3214C, making it even more difficult to create the visible portion 3219C on an unauthorized decorative body that is formed to imitate the genuine front-side, rear-upper, movable decorative body 3210C1. From a similar perspective, the visible portion 3219C may also be formed on the top of the fitting portion 3210C5a or the locking portion 3210C5b.

In addition, the multiple visible portions 3219C of the front-side, rear-upper, movable decorative body 3210C1 may include a covering visible portion 3219Ca formed in a position covered by the rear-upper first decorative board storage portion 3214C stored in the front-side, rear-upper, movable decorative body 3210C1. Specifically, the covering visible portion 3219Ca is formed on the back surface of the surface portion 3210C2 of the front-side, rear-upper, movable decorative body 3210C1 at a position where the rear-upper first decorative board storage portion 3214C is stored, avoiding the through portion 3210C4, so that the covering visible portion 3219Ca cannot be seen from the outside unless the rear-upper first decorative board storage portion 3214C is completely removed from the front-side, rear-upper, movable decorative body 3210C1. As a result, the secrecy of the multiple visible parts 3219C as a whole, including the covered visible part 3219Ca, is improved, making it difficult to create multiple visible parts 3219C on an unauthorized decorative body that is formed to imitate the genuine front, back, upper movable decorative body 3210C1.

The covering visible portion 3219Ca may be formed in a position that is covered by the rear-upper first decorative board storage portion 3214C stored in the front-side rear-upper movable decorative body 3210C1. For example, as shown in FIG. 420, it may be formed in a position that is not surrounded by multiple through-holes 3210C4, or it may be formed in a position that is surrounded by multiple through-holes 3210C4, or multiple portions may be formed in each of these positions. The covering visible portion 3219Ca formed in a position surrounded by multiple through-holes 3210C4 may be formed in an empty space so as to be surrounded by multiple through-holes 3210C4 arranged in a predetermined pattern, or it may be formed in place of at least one of the multiple through-holes 3214C arranged in a predetermined pattern. The covering visible portion 3219Ca is formed in a manner that blends in with the multiple through-holes 3210C4, and such covering visible portion 3219Ca may be formed in a position that is not surrounded by multiple through-holes 3210C4 as shown in FIG. 420, or it may be formed in a position that is surrounded by multiple through-holes 3210C4, or multiple portions may be formed in each of these positions. Even if the first decorative board storage section 3214C on the back rear upper side is removed from the movable decorative body 3210C1, it will be difficult for anyone other than those who are aware of the existence of the visible parts 3219C in each position in advance (such as the manager of the pachinko machine 1 or a worker performing maintenance on the pachinko machine 1) to discover the covered visible parts 3219Ca, making it even more difficult to create multiple visible parts 3219C on an unauthorized decorative body formed to imitate the genuine front side back rear upper movable decorative body 3210C1.

The front-side, back-upper, movable decorative body 3210C1 may have, in addition to multiple visible portions 3219C, multiple specific visible portions 3219C1 formed to imitate the visible portions 3219C. The specific visible portions 3219C1 are formed to differ in shape, size, color, etc. from the visible portions 3219C, making it difficult to create visible portions 3219C on an unauthorized decorative body formed to imitate the genuine front-side, back-upper, movable decorative body 3210C1. From the perspective of preventing confusion between the visible portions 3219C and the specific visible portions 3219C1, it is desirable for the specific visible portions 3219C1 to be formed outside the partition wall portion 3210C5 that defines the position where the back-upper first decorative board storage portion 3214C is stored when viewed from the back of the front-side, back-upper, movable decorative body 3210C1.

The rear upper first decorative board storage section 3214C and the rear upper movable decorative body 3210C may be formed from opaque resin, but the rear upper first decorative board storage section 3214C and the rear upper movable decorative body 3210C may also be formed from resins of different colors, for example, which can improve the visibility of the rear upper first decorative board storage section 3214C stored in the rear upper movable decorative body 3210C and can improve the work efficiency of workers who attach and detach the rear upper first decorative board storage section 3214C to and from the rear upper movable decorative body 3210C.

Figures 421(a) to (f) are rear views showing a portion of the front-side, back-up, movable decorative body 3210C1. In this embodiment, the multiple visual identification portions 3219C, which are represented by the mark "★," have been described. However, the multiple visual identification portions 3219C may each have a different shape as long as they serve as a visual indicator for determining whether the front-side, back-up, movable decorative body 3210C1 is genuine or non-genuine. Specifically, the visual identification portion 3219C may also be represented by the mark "●" as shown in Figure 421(a), the mark "▲" as shown in Figure 421(b), the mark "■" as shown in Figure 421(c), or a mark consisting of multiple wires extending in one direction and arranged at a predetermined interval on the other perpendicular to the first, as shown in Figure 421(d), or may be represented by letters such as "shi" or "U."

Furthermore, when a mark is used for the visible portion 3219C, the mark may be missing a portion (for example, in the case of a "●" mark, the mark may be semicircular, etc.), making it difficult for anyone other than those who are aware of the existence of the visible portion 3219C in advance (such as the manager of the pachinko machine 1 or the worker performing maintenance on the pachinko machine 1) to recognize that the visible portion 3219C is a visual marker for checking the front, back, upper, movable decorative body 3210C1. Specifically, as shown in Figure 421 (e), the missing portion of the visible portion 3219C may be formed so that it abuts the outer edge of the side wall portion 3210C3 or the partition wall portion 3210C5 when viewed from behind the front side rear upper movable decorative body 3210C1, or as shown in Figure 421 (f), the missing portion of the visible portion 3219C may be formed so that it abuts the inner edge of the side wall portion 3210C3 or the partition wall portion 3210C5 when viewed from behind the front side rear upper movable decorative body 3210C1.

The size and shape of the multiple visible portions 3219C formed on the front-side, back-up, movable decorative body 3210C1 are preferably formed according to a formation pattern that is preset according to the specific conditions of the pachinko machine 1 (manufacturing conditions such as the model or production lot even for the same model), and only those who are aware of the existence of the visible portions 3219C (such as the pachinko machine 1 manager or workers performing maintenance on the pachinko machine 1) can confirm the visible portions 3219C on the front-side, back-up, movable decorative body 3210C1 according to the formation pattern, making it even more difficult to create visible portions 3219C on an unauthorized decorative body that is formed to imitate the authentic front-side, back-up, movable decorative body 3210C1. Note that in the formation pattern of the multiple visible portions 3219C, the sizes and shapes of the multiple visible portions 3219C may be uniform, or the sizes and shapes of the multiple visible portions 3219C may differ.

The color of the multiple visible portions 3219C may be any color, but for example, it may be the same color as the front-side, back-up, movable decorative body 3210C1, or a color similar to the front-side, back-up, movable decorative body 3210C1. If the multiple visible portions 3219C are the same color as or a similar color to the front-side, back-up, movable decorative body 3210C1, the visibility of the visible portions 3219C can be reduced, making it difficult for anyone other than those who are aware of the existence of the visible portions 3219C in advance (such as the manager of the pachinko machine 1 or workers performing maintenance on the pachinko machine 1) to see the visible portions 3219C, making it difficult to create visible portions 3219C on an unauthorized decorative body that is formed to imitate the genuine front-side, back-up, movable decorative body 3210C1.

In this embodiment, we have described an aspect in which a visible portion 3219C is formed on the front side of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210C1 of the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210C. However, a visible portion may also be formed on the front side storage member 3214C1 of the rear-upper first decorative board storage section 3214C in the same manner as the visible portions described in the above-mentioned rear-upper movable decorative body variant 1 to rear-upper movable decorative body variant 3. For example, if only the rear-upper first decorative board storage section 3214C is formed together with the rear-upper first decorative board 3214 from the rear-upper first decorative board 3214, Even if the light-emitting board and the storage unit that houses it are illegally replaced with an illegal one, by removing the rear-upper movable decorative body 3210C from the gaming board 5 and checking for the presence or absence of multiple visual identification areas formed on the front storage member 3214C1, it is possible to confirm whether the front storage member 3214C1 is genuine or illegal. This makes it possible to detect and prevent fraudulent acts such as the illegal replacement of the rear-upper first decorative board 3214 with the front storage member 3214C1. As a result, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts or malfunctions with the rear-upper first decorative board 3214 from causing disadvantage to players or gaming halls where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and ultimately to prevent a decline in the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.

[Example of modified main control board box]
Fig. 422 is a rear perspective view showing the main control unit 1300, and Fig. 423 is an exploded perspective view showing the main control unit 1300. As shown in Fig. 422 or 423, the main control unit 1300 of this embodiment includes a main control board 1310A (see Fig. 170) that controls the game content and the payout of game balls, etc., a main control board box 1320A that houses the main control board 1310A and is attached to the board holder 1200, and a plurality of sealing mechanisms 1325A that restrict the release of the main control board box 1320A.

The main control board 1310A of this embodiment is integrally formed with a setting change board that can set game performance, and in addition to the main control MPU 1310Aa described above, is equipped with a setting key switch 1311Aa that can switch and check the setting values of the pachinko machine 1, a setting switch button that can select and switch setting values, and a setting change permission lamp that indicates that switching of the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 is permitted. The main control unit 1300 may be equipped with the main control board 1310 and setting change board 1311 separately, or may not be equipped with the setting change board 1311 and therefore cannot change the setting values.

The main control board box 1320A is composed of a cover body 1321A and a base body 1326A. The cover body 1321A and the base body 1326A are made of polycarbonate resin and are formed into a transparent box. The internal space formed by the cover body 1321A and the base body 1326A is capable of housing the main control board 1310A. Because the cover body 1321A and the base body 1326A are made of transparent polycarbonate resin, the condition of the mounting surface 1310Ax and the back side of the main control board 1310A (whether or not tampering has occurred or whether or not unauthorized electronic components are installed) can be visually confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320A.

In the main control board box 1320A of this embodiment, after the main control board 1310A is stored in the cover body 1321A so that the mounting surface 1310Ax of the main control board 1310A faces the cover body 1321A, the cover body 1321A is attached to the base body 1326A, and the base body 1326A is attached to the rear of the gaming board 5 so that the mounting surface 1310Ax of the main control board 1310A faces backward. Note that the main control board box 1320A may also be configured such that after the main control board 1310A is stored in the base body 1326A so that the back surface opposite the mounting surface 1310Ax faces the base body 1326A, the cover body 1321A is attached to the base body 1326A, and the base body 1326A is attached to the rear of the gaming board 5 so that the mounting surface 1310Ax of the main control board 1310A faces backward.

The main control board box 1320A also has multiple sealing mechanisms 1328A corresponding to the cover body 1321A and the base body 1326A, respectively. The sealing mechanisms 1328A are destroyed when the cover body 1321A is removed from the base body 1326A (when the main control board box 1320A is opened) after the cover body 1321A is closed relative to the base body 1326A (after the main control board box 1320A is closed), and therefore traces of the opening and closing of the cover body 1321A relative to the base body 1326A (trace of the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320A) can be left behind. As a result, with the main control board box 1320A of this embodiment, the administrator of the pachinko machine 1 can visually inspect the sealing mechanism 1328A to check for signs of opening and closing, thereby detecting any unauthorized opening or closing of the main control board box 1320A, thereby enhancing the deterrent effect against fraudulent acts against the main control board 1310A.

The sealing mechanism 1328A includes, for example, a one-way screw or the like, and is configured by fastening the cover body 1321A and the base body 1326A together when the main control board box 1320A is closed using the one-way screw or the like. From the perspective of ensuring visibility of the main control board 1310A when viewed through the cover body 1321A, such sealing mechanism 1328A is preferably provided at the ends of the cover body 1321A and the base body 1326A when viewed from the back of the main control board box 1320A. In this embodiment, two sealing mechanisms 1328A are provided side by side with a predetermined distance between them on the right sides of the cover body 1321A and the base body 1326A. Note that the sealing mechanisms 1328A may be provided on multiple sides of the cover body 1321A and the base body 1326A, as long as this does not hinder the ease of attaching the main control board box 1320A to the game board 5, for example.

Conventionally, multiple molding marks 1320X are formed on the cover body 1321A and base body 1326A of the main control board box 1320A during their manufacture. The multiple molding marks 1320X include multiple gate marks 1320X1 formed according to the shape of the inlet through which molten resin flows into the mold during molding, and multiple ejector pin marks 1320X2 formed by pressing the molded resin with an ejector pin to remove it from the mold. The multiple gate marks 1320X1 are formed on the outer surfaces of the cover body 1321A and base body 1326A assembled as the main control board box 1320A, while the multiple ejector pin marks 1320X2 are formed on the inner surfaces of the cover body 1321A and base body 1326A assembled as the main control board box 1320A.

In recent years, efforts have been made to miniaturize electronic components mounted on boards. As a result, surface-mount electronic components, in which electrodes of electronic components are bonded to pads on the surface of the board, are now being mounted on the main control board 1310A, instead of insertion-mount electronic components, in which lead-equipped electronic components are inserted into through-holes in the board and bonded. Surface-mount electronic components have inferior bonding strength to the board compared to insertion-mount electronic components, but are superior in that they can be made smaller (reduced maximum dimensions) and the density of electronic components mounted per unit area can be increased.

Figure 424 is a partially enlarged view showing a portion of the main control board 1310A as seen through the conventional cover body 1321. As shown in Figure 424, a plurality of surface-mount type electronic components 1310An and a plurality of insertion-mount type electronic components 1310Am are mounted on the mounting surface 1310Ax of the conventional main control board 1310A. However, if multiple surface-mount type electronic components 1310An with reduced maximum dimension W are mounted on the main control board 1310A, when the mounting surface 1310Ax of the main control board 1310A is viewed through the cover body 1321, the surface-mount type electronic components 1310An that overlap with the molding marks 1320X with diameter dimension L are emphasized by being contained within the molding marks 1320X, which could lead to an operator mistaking the surface-mount type electronic components 1310An for special electronic components that are different from the other surface-mount type electronic components, which could prevent inspections of the main control board 1310A from being carried out properly.

Specifically, if the maximum dimension W (e.g., the length of the long side when viewed from behind) of the surface-mount electronic component 1310An is 5.0 mm and the diameter dimension L (e.g., the largest diameter when viewed from behind) of the molding mark 1320X superimposed on the surface-mount electronic component 1310An is 11.0 mm, the surface-mount electronic component 1310An will be contained within the molding mark 1320X, and the molding mark 1320X will be visually perceived as emphasizing the surface-mount electronic component 1310An. This could lead to workers mistaking the surface-mount electronic component 1310An for a special electronic component different from other surface-mount electronic components 1310An, potentially preventing proper inspection of the main control board 1310A. As a result, if a malfunction occurs in the main control board 1310A, it could cause disadvantages to players and the amusement hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and ultimately reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 1. Below, we will explain how modifications have been made to the main control board box 1320A to resolve these issues.

Figure 425 is a rear view showing the cover body 1321A and a portion of the main control board 1310A as viewed through the cover body 1321A. As shown in Figure 425, the gate mark 1320X1 and ejector pin mark 1320X2 of this embodiment are formed so that their diameter dimension L is larger than the maximum dimension W of the surface-mounted electronic components when viewed from the rear of the main control board box 1320A. For example, it is difficult to reduce the diameter dimension L of the gate mark 1320X1 from the perspective of the inflow efficiency of the resin flowing into the mold, and it is difficult to reduce the diameter dimension L of the ejector pin mark 1320X2 in order to distribute the pressure when the ejector pin presses the cover body 1321A. For this reason, in the rear view of the main control board box 1320A, the molding marks 1320X of this embodiment are formed with a diameter dimension L larger than the maximum dimension W of certain surface-mount type electronic components (miniaturized electronic components, such as IC 1310A1, resistor 1310A2, transistor 1310A3, capacitor 1310A4, etc.) among the multiple surface-mount type electronic components.

In light of the above, the gate marks 1320X1 and ejector pin marks 1320X2 of this embodiment are formed on the cover body 1321A with a diameter L of 8.0 to 14.0 mm. Furthermore, certain surface-mount electronic components such as IC 1310A1, resistor 1310A2, transistor 1310A3, and capacitor 1310A4 are formed with a maximum dimension W of 2.0 to 7.0 mm.

When viewed from the back of the main control board box 1320A (when the mounting surface 1310Ax of the main control board 1310A is viewed from the rear through the cover body 1321A), the molding mark 1320X is formed in a position that does not overlap with specific surface-mount type electronic components (electronic components that have been miniaturized, such as IC 1310A1, resistor 1310A2, transistor 1310A3, capacitor 1310A4, etc.) among the multiple surface-mount type electronic components. As a result, electronic components such as IC 1310A1, resistor 1310A2, transistor 1310A3, and capacitor 1310A4 are prevented from being highlighted by being contained within molding marks 1320X, which are gate marks 1320X1 and ejector pin marks 1320X2. This reduces misidentification by an operator visually inspecting mounting surface 1310Ax of main control board 1310A from behind through cover body 1321A, and inspections of main control board 1310A are carried out normally, reducing defects in main control board 1310A. This prevents disadvantages to players and gaming halls where pachinko machine 1 is installed, and ultimately reduces a decline in the reliability of pachinko machine 1.

Below, as a specific example of molding marks 1320X formed in a position that does not overlap specific surface-mounted electronic components such as IC 1310A1, resistor 1310A2, transistor 1310A3, and capacitor 1310A4, we will explain an example in which molding marks 1320X are formed in a position that overlaps with main control board 1310A when viewed from the back of main control board box 1320A.

Figure 426 is a rear view showing the cover 1321A and a portion of the main control board 1310A as viewed through the cover 1321A. As shown in Figure 426, the mounting surface 1310Ax of the main control board 1310A can be divided into a dense area 1310A6 where surface-mounted electronic components and insertion-mounted electronic components such as ICs 1310A1, resistors 1310A2, transistors 1310A3, and capacitors 1310A4 are densely mounted; a sparse area 1310A7 where no electronic components are mounted; and a test area 1310A8 surrounded by dashed lines or other notation in the sparse area 1310A7. Surface-mounted electronic components and insertion-mounted electronic components may be sparsely mounted in the sparse area 1310A7. Furthermore, electronic components for testing the main control board 1310A, such as during testing of the main control board 1310A, can be mounted in the test area 1310A8. Test area 1310A8 may be the same circuit area as the "empty test circuit" in the other example described above, or it may be a circuit area similar to the "empty test circuit."

In the main control board 1310A shown in Figure 426, the molding marks 1320X, which are gate marks 1320X1 and ejector pin marks 1320X2, are formed on the cover body 1321A so as to avoid the dense area 1310A6 of the mounting surface 1310Ax when the mounting surface 1310Ax of the main control board 1310A is viewed from the rear side through the cover body 1321A. Since the molding marks 1320X are formed on the cover body 1321A to avoid the dense area 1310A6 where multiple specific surface-mount type electronic components such as ICs 1310A1, resistors 1310A2, transistors 1310A3, and capacitors 1310A4 are mounted, even if an error occurs in the viewing direction of an operator viewing the mounting surface 1310Ax of the main control board 1310A from the rear side through the cover body 1321A due to individual differences, it is possible to prevent the specific surface-mount type electronic components such as ICs 1310A1, resistors 1310A2, transistors 1310A3, and capacitors 1310A4 from being contained within the molding marks 1320X, which are the gate marks 1320X1 and ejector pin marks 1320X2, and being emphasized. As a result, inspections of the main control board 1310A can be carried out normally, preventing malfunctions in the main control board 1310A and preventing disadvantages to players and gaming halls where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, which in turn prevents a decline in the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the molding marks 1320X, which are gate marks 1320X1 and ejector pin marks 1320X2, are formed on the cover body 1321A so as to avoid the test area 1310A8 of the mounting surface 1310Ax when the mounting surface 1310Ax of the main control board 1310A is viewed from the rear side through the cover body 1321A. When inspecting the main control board 1310A, the molding marks 1320X are formed on the cover body 1321A to avoid the test area 1310A8 where multiple specific surface-mount type electronic components such as ICs 1310A1, resistors 1310A2, transistors 1310A3, and capacitors 1310A4 are mounted.Therefore, even if an error occurs in the viewing direction of an operator viewing the mounting surface 1310Ax of the main control board 1310A from the rear side through the cover body 1321A due to individual differences, it is possible to prevent the specific surface-mount type electronic components such as ICs 1310A1, resistors 1310A2, transistors 1310A3, and capacitors 1310A4 from being contained within the molding marks 1320X, which are the gate marks 1320X1 and ejector pin marks 1320X2, and being highlighted. As a result, inspections of the main control board 1310A can be carried out normally, preventing malfunctions in the main control board 1310A and preventing disadvantages to players and gaming halls where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, which in turn prevents a decline in the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, the molding marks 1320X, which are gate marks 1320X1 and ejector pin marks 1320X2, are formed on the cover body 1321A so as to overlap with the sparse area 1310A7, avoiding the dense area 1310A6 and test area 1310A8 of the mounting surface 1310Ax, when the mounting surface 1310Ax of the main control board 1310A is viewed from the rear side through the cover body 1321A. Because no electronic components are mounted in the sparse region 1310A7, even if an error occurs in the viewing direction of an operator viewing the mounting surface 1310Ax of the main control board 1310A from behind through the cover body 1321A due to individual differences, it is possible to prevent specific surface-mounted electronic components such as the IC 1310A1, resistor 1310A2, transistor 1310A3, and capacitor 1310A4 from being highlighted within the molding marks 1320X, which are the gate marks 1320X1 and ejector pin marks 1320X2. As a result, inspections of the main control board 1310A can be performed normally, preventing defects from occurring in the main control board 1310A and preventing disadvantages to players and gaming halls where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and ultimately preventing a decrease in the reliability of the pachinko machine 1. Note that it is sufficient that at least some of the molding marks 1320X are formed on the cover body 1321A so as to overlap with the sparse region 1310A7, which can reduce misidentification by an operator visually inspecting the mounting surface 1310Ax of the main control board 1310A from behind through the cover body 1321A.

The above describes a specific example of molding marks 1320X formed in a position that does not overlap with specific surface-mounted electronic components, where molding marks 1320X are formed in a position that overlaps with main control board 1310A when viewed from the back of main control board box 1320A. However, below we describe a situation where molding marks 1320X are formed in a position that does not overlap with main control board 1310A in order to more reliably prevent misidentification by workers.

Figure 427 is a rear view showing the cover body 1321A and the main control board 1310A as viewed through the cover body 1321A. As shown in Figure 427, when the mounting surface 1310Ax of the main control board 1310A is viewed from the rear side through the cover body 1321A, the cover body 1321A has an off-board area 1321A1 that does not overlap with the main control board 1310A, and a sealing mechanism installation area 1321A2 in which the sealing mechanism 1328A is provided. The off-board area 1321A1 is provided on the cover body 1321A so as to surround the main control board 1310A when viewed from the back of the main control unit 1300, and the sealing mechanism installation area 1321A2 is provided on the cover body 1321A so as to be located on one short side of the main control board 1310A (in this embodiment, so as to be located on the left side of the cover body 1321A when viewed from the back of the cover body 1321A).

The ejector pin mark 1320X2 may be formed in the off-board area 1321A1. The ejector pin mark 1320X2 may be formed in the off-board area 1321A1 excluding the sealing mechanism installation area 1321A2, or may be formed in the off-board area 1321A1 so as to be located on the other short side of the main control board 1310A opposite the sealing mechanism installation area 1321A2 (so as to be located on the right side of the cover body 1321A when viewed from behind). Because no specific surface-mount type electronic components are present in the off-board area 1321A1, when the mounting surface 1310Ax of the main control board 1310A is viewed from behind through the cover body 1321A, it is possible to prevent specific surface-mount type electronic components from being contained within the ejector pin mark 1320X2 and being highlighted. As a result, it is possible to more reliably prevent misidentification by workers who view the mounting surface 1310Ax of the main control board 1310A from behind through the cover body 1321A, allowing inspections of the main control board 1310A to be carried out normally, preventing malfunctions in the main control board 1310A, preventing disadvantages to players and gaming halls where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and ultimately preventing a decline in the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.

Even if the width of the off-board area 1321A1 is smaller than the diameter dimension L of the molding mark 1320X, multiple ejector pin marks 1320X2 may be formed per unit area to distribute the pressure exerted by the ejector pins when pressing against the cover body 1321A. In this case, the value of the diameter dimension L of the ejector pin marks 1320X2 can be made smaller than the above-mentioned 8.0 mm. Furthermore, as long as at least some of the multiple ejector pin marks 1320X2 are formed in the off-board area 1321A1, this can reduce misidentification by an operator visually inspecting the mounting surface 1310Ax of the main control board 1310A from behind through the cover body 1321A. Furthermore, if the off-substrate area 1321A1 is provided sufficiently wide, the gate mark 1320X1 may be formed in the off-substrate area 1321A1, which can achieve the same effects and advantages as the ejector pin mark 1320X2.

It is desirable that molding marks 1320X, such as gate marks 1320X1 and ejector pin marks 1320X2, are not formed in the sealing mechanism installation area 1321A2. This prevents molding marks 1320X, such as gate marks 1320X1 and ejector pin marks 1320X2, from interfering with the visual inspection of the sealing mechanism 1328A when visually checking whether the sealing mechanism 1328A has been destroyed.

The above describes the form of molding mark 1320X formed in a position that does not overlap with specific surface-mounted electronic components. Below, however, we will describe the form in which molding mark 1320X is formed in a position that does not overlap with other components provided on main control board 1310A, in order to further reduce misidentification by workers.

As shown in FIG. 426, the mounting surface 1310Ax of the main control board 1310A may be formed with test points 1310A9a used when inspecting surface-mounted electronic components and insertion-mounted electronic components, through holes 1310A9b not used for mounting electronic components, multiple markings indicating information about the surface-mounted electronic components and insertion-mounted electronic components (for example, information indicating the component number of the electronic component, the orientation of the electronic component, etc.), and copper foil exposed on the mounting surface 1310Ax of the main control board 1310A. As with the specific surface-mount electronic components described above, when the mounting surface 1310Ax of the main control board 1310A is viewed from behind through the cover 1321A, these test points 1310A9a, through holes 1310A9b, markings, copper foil, etc. overlap with the molding marks 1320X. This means that the test points 1310A9a, through holes 1310A9b, markings, copper foil, etc. that fall within the molding marks 1320X are emphasized more than the other test points 1310A9a, through holes 1310A9b, markings, copper foil, etc., and an operator may mistakenly identify the test points 1310A9a, through holes 1310A9b, markings, copper foil, etc., which could result in inspections of the main control board 1310A not being performed properly.

In this embodiment, the molding marks 1320X, which are the gate marks 1320X1 and ejector pin marks 1320X2, are formed on the cover body 1321A so as not to overlap with the test points 1310A9a, through holes 1310A9b, markings, copper foil, etc., when the mounting surface 1310Ax of the main control board 1310A is viewed from the rear through the cover body 1321A. As a result, the test points 1310A9a, through holes 1310A9b, markings, copper foil, etc. are prevented from being contained within and highlighted by the molding marks 1320X, which are the gate marks 1320X1 and ejector pin marks 1320X2. This further reduces misidentification by an operator viewing the mounting surface 1310Ax of the main control board 1310A from the rear through the cover body 1321A, allowing inspections of the main control board 1310A to be carried out normally. This prevents malfunctions in the main control board 1310A, preventing disadvantages to players and the gaming halls where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and ultimately prevents a decline in the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.

The sparse area 1310A7 of the main control board 1310A may be defined as an unused area 1310A7a that is free of test points 1310A9a, through holes 1310A9b, markings, copper foil, etc. Molding marks 1320X, such as gate marks 1320X1 and ejector pin marks 1320X2, may be formed on the cover body 1321A so as to overlap with the unused area 1310A7a of the sparse area 1310A7 when the mounting surface 1310Ax of the main control board 1310A is viewed from the rear side through the cover body 1321A. Since the unused area 1310A7a does not have any specific surface-mount type electronic components, test points 1310A9a, through holes 1310A9b, markings, copper foil, etc., it is possible to more reliably prevent specific surface-mount type electronic components such as IC 1310A1, resistor 1310A2, transistor 1310A3, and capacitor 1310A4, test points 1310A9a, through holes 1310A9b, markings, copper foil, etc. from being contained within and highlighted by molding marks 1320X, which are gate marks 1320X1 and ejector pin marks 1320X2. As a result, it is possible to prevent misidentification by an operator who views the mounting surface 1310Ax of the main control board 1310A from behind through the cover body 1321A, allowing inspections of the main control board 1310A to be carried out normally, preventing malfunctions in the main control board 1310A, preventing disadvantages to players and gaming halls where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and ultimately preventing a decline in the reliability of the pachinko machine 1. Note that at least some of the multiple molding marks 1320X may be formed on the cover body 1321A so as to overlap the unused area 1310A7a, which can more reliably prevent misidentification by an operator who views the mounting surface 1310Ax of the main control board 1310A from behind through the cover body 1321A.

Furthermore, as described above, the mounting surface 1310Ax of the main control board 1310A defines a test area 1310A8 in which electronic components for testing, etc., are mounted during testing of the main control board 1310A, and the test area 1310A8 may be provided with test points 1310A9a, through holes 1310A9b, markings, copper foil, etc. In the test area 1310A8, molding marks 1320X, such as gate marks 1320X1 and ejector pin marks 1320X2, may be formed on the cover body 1321A in a position that does not overlap with the test points 1310A9a, through holes 1310A9b, markings, copper foil, etc., when the mounting surface 1310Ax of the main control board 1310A is viewed from the rear side through the cover body 1321A. As a result, even in the test area 1310A8, the test points 1310A9a, through holes 1310A9b, markings, copper foil, etc. are prevented from being contained within the molding marks 1320X, which are the gate marks 1320X1 and ejector pin marks 1320X2, and are thereby prevented from being highlighted. This prevents misidentification by an operator who views the mounting surface 1310Ax of the main control board 1310A from behind through the cover body 1321A, allows inspections of the main control board 1310A to be carried out normally, prevents defects from occurring in the main control board 1310A, prevents disadvantages to players and gaming halls where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and ultimately prevents a decline in the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.

Incidentally, during the development process of the pachinko machine 1 and during actual machine testing by public security, surface-mounted electronic components dedicated for testing are mounted in the test area 1310A8, but the diameter dimension L of the molding marks 1320X, which are the gate marks 1320X1 and ejector pin marks 1320X2 formed on the cover body 1321A, may be larger than the maximum dimension W of the surface-mounted electronic components dedicated for testing. As described above, the molding marks 1320X, which are the gate marks 1320X1 and ejector pin marks 1320X2, may be formed on the cover body 1321A in a position that does not overlap with the test points 1310A9a, through holes 1310A9b, markings, copper foil, etc., and does not overlap with the positions where the surface-mounted electronic components dedicated for testing are mounted, when the mounting surface 1310Ax of the main control board 1310A is viewed from the rear side through the cover body 1321A. As a result, during the development process of the pachinko machine 1 or when the actual machine is tested by the public security police, surface-mounted electronic components used exclusively for testing, test points 1310A9a, through holes 1310A9b, markings, copper foil, etc. are prevented from being contained within and highlighted by molding marks 1320X, which are gate marks 1320X1 and ejector pin marks 1320X2, thereby more reliably preventing misidentification by workers.

In addition, in this embodiment, the molding mark 1320X may be formed on the cover body 1321A so as to overlap with specific surface-mount type electronic components, test points 1310A9a, through holes 1310A9b, markings, copper foil, etc., when viewed from the back of the main control board box 1320A (when the mounting surface 1310Ax of the main control board 1310A is viewed from the rear side through the cover body 1321A), if the molding mark 1320X is formed with a diameter dimension L that is smaller than the maximum dimension W of the specific surface-mount type electronic components, test points 1310A9a, through holes 1310A9b, markings, copper foil, etc., such as IC 1310A1, resistor 1310A2, transistor 1310A3, capacitor 1310A4, etc. When the diameter dimension L of the molding mark 1320X is smaller than the maximum dimension W of a specific surface-mount type electronic component, test point 1310A9a, through hole 1310A9b, markings, copper foil, etc., as viewed from the rear of the main control board box 1320A, the specific surface-mount type electronic component, test point 1310A9a, through hole 1310A9b, markings, copper foil, etc. will not fit within the molding mark 1320X, preventing the electronic component, test point 1310A9a, through hole 1310A9b, markings, copper foil, etc. from being highlighted by the molding mark 1320X. As a result, inspections of the main control board 1310A can be performed normally, preventing defects in the main control board 1310A and preventing disadvantages to players and gaming halls where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and ultimately preventing a decline in the reliability of the pachinko machine 1. It also improves ease of design for the molding marks 1320X formed on the cover body 1321A.

In addition, in this embodiment, to prevent confusion between the above-mentioned RAM clear switch 1310f, error reset switch, enter key button, setting switch button 1311b, etc., transparent stickers with the name or description of each button printed in black or other characters may be affixed to the cover body 1321A in positions corresponding to each switch or button, or a transparent sticker with the model name of the pachinko machine 1 that the main control board box 1320A is compatible with (the model name of the pachinko machine 1 that the main control board 1310A is compatible with) printed in black may be affixed, or a transparent sticker with the model number of the main control board 1310A printed in black may be affixed, or instead of these stickers, each letter may be formed on the cover body 1321A using recesses or protrusions, etc., and a letter area where the stickers are affixed or the letters are formed is defined.

When molding marks 1320X are formed in the character area of cover body 1321A, there is a risk that molding marks 1320X may obstruct the visibility of the characters within the character area. Therefore, molding marks 1320X, such as gate marks 1320X1 and ejector pin marks 1320X2, may be formed on cover body 1321A so as to avoid the character area of cover body 1321A. In this manner, molding marks 1320X are prevented from obstructing the visibility of the characters provided on cover body 1321A, and the main control board box 1320A and main control board 1310A can be handled normally, thereby preventing malfunctions in main control board 1310A and preventing disadvantages to players and gaming halls where pachinko machines 1 are installed, and ultimately preventing a decline in the reliability of pachinko machines 1.

Figures 428(a) to (f) are partially enlarged views showing a portion of the cover body 1321A on which the molding mark 1320X is formed. The molding mark 1320X, which is the gate mark 1320X1 or the ejector pin mark 1320X2 in this embodiment, is formed on the cover body 1321A as a recessed portion recessed within a circular frame, as shown in Figure 428(a). Note that the molding mark 1320X may be a recessed portion recessed within a triangular frame, as shown in Figure 428(b), a recessed portion recessed within a rectangular frame, as shown in Figure 428(c), or a recessed portion recessed within another polygonal frame. Furthermore, the molding marks 1320X may be recessed recesses within a circular or polygonal frame as shown in FIG. 428(d), or may be scratches formed on a flat surface as shown in FIG. 428(e), or protrusions protruding from the cover body 1321A as shown in FIG. 428(f), or may be uneven portions formed in the shape of multiple circular or polygonal frames as shown in FIG. 428(g).

[Modification of cover body]
Fig. 429 is a rear view showing the cover body 1321B and a portion of the main control board 1310A visible through the cover body 1321B. As shown in Fig. 429, the cover body 1321B of this embodiment differs from the above-described cover body 1321A in that the position where the molding mark 1320Y is formed is determined based on the size of the diameter dimension L of the molding mark 1320Y and the visual appearance of the molding mark 1320Y. Below, the appearance of the cover body 1321B will be described, but explanations of points that overlap with those of the cover body 1321A will be omitted.

The multiple molding marks 1320Y formed on the cover body 1321B include multiple transparent molding marks 1320Y1, which are formed as recesses within the frame and have a transparent visible appearance, with the inside of the frame lines being transparent, as shown in Figures 428(a) to (d), and multiple opaque molding marks 1320Y6, which are formed as scratches, slopes, or unevenness within the frame and have a semi-transparent or opaque visible appearance, with no transparency within the frame lines, as shown in Figures 428(e) to (f).

The cover body 1321B of this embodiment has an extra-board area 1321B1 that does not overlap with the main control board 1310A when the mounting surface 1310Ax of the main control board 1310A is viewed from the rear through the cover body 1321B, and an intra-board area 1321B2 that overlaps with the main control board 1310A. Multiple transparent molding marks 1320Y1 are formed in the extra-board area 1321B1 of the cover body 1321B. As a result, when the mounting surface 1310Ax of the main control board 1310A is viewed from the rear through the cover body 1321B, it is possible to prevent surface-mount type electronic components from being located within the transparent molding marks 1320Y1, and to prevent the surface-mount type electronic components from being emphasized by the transparent molding marks 1320Y1. This prevents misidentification by an operator who views the mounting surface 1310Ax of the main control board 1310A from behind through the cover body 1321B, allowing inspections of the main control board 1310A to be carried out normally, preventing malfunctions in the main control board 1310A, preventing disadvantages to players and gaming halls where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and ultimately preventing a decline in the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.

In addition, at least some of the transparent molding marks 1320Y1 may be formed on the cover body 1321B so as to overlap with the intra-board area 1321B2. Specifically, some of the transparent molding marks 1320Y1 are formed in the intra-board area 1321B2 of the cover body 1321B so as not to overlap with surface-mounted electronic components, test points 1310A9a, through-holes 1310A9b, markings, copper foil, etc., when the mounting surface 1310Ax of the main control board 1310A is viewed from the rear side through the cover body 1321B. As a result, surface-mount electronic components, test points 1310A9a, through-holes 1310A9b, markings, copper foil, etc. are prevented from being contained within and highlighted by the transparent molding marks 1320Y1, preventing misidentification by an operator viewing the mounting surface 1310Ax of the main control board 1310A from behind through the cover body 1321B, and allowing inspections of the main control board 1310A to be carried out normally. This prevents malfunctions in the main control board 1310A from causing disadvantage to players or gaming halls where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and ultimately prevents a decline in the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.

When the transparent molding mark 1320Y1 is formed in the intra-board region 1321B2, the transparent molding mark 1320Y1 may be formed on the cover body 1321B so as to overlap with the unused region defined on the main control board 1310A as described above when the mounting surface 1310Ax of the main control board 1310A is viewed from behind through the cover body 1321B. Because the unused region does not contain specific surface-mount electronic components, test points 1310A9a, through-holes 1310A9b, markings, copper foil, etc., it is possible to more reliably prevent the specific surface-mount electronic components, test points 1310A9a, through-holes 1310A9b, markings, copper foil, etc. from being contained within and highlighted by the transparent molding mark 1320Y1. As a result, it is possible to prevent misidentification by an operator who views the mounting surface 1310Ax of the main control board 1310A from behind through the cover body 1321B, allowing inspections of the main control board 1310A to be carried out normally, preventing malfunctions in the main control board 1310A, preventing disadvantages to players and gaming halls where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and ultimately preventing a decline in the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.

Furthermore, when transparent molding mark 1320Y1 is formed in intra-board region 1321B2, transparent molding mark 1320Y1 may be formed on cover body 1321B so as to overlap with the test area defined on main control board 1310A as described above when mounting surface 1310Ax of main control board 1310A is viewed from the rear side through cover body 1321B. Since test points 1310A9a, through holes 1310A9b, markings, copper foil, etc. are all provided in the test area, transparent molding mark 1320Y1 formed to overlap with the test area is formed on cover body 1321B in a position that does not overlap with test points 1310A9a, through holes 1310A9b, markings, copper foil, etc. when mounting surface 1310Ax of main control board 1310A is viewed from the rear side through cover body 1321B. As a result, even in the test area, the test points 1310A9a, through holes 1310A9b, markings, copper foil, etc. are prevented from being contained within the transparent molding marks 1320Y1 and being highlighted, preventing misidentification by an operator viewing the mounting surface 1310Ax of the main control board 1310A from behind through the cover body 1321B. This allows inspections of the main control board 1310A to be carried out normally, preventing malfunctions in the main control board 1310A, preventing disadvantages to players and gaming halls where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and ultimately preventing a decline in the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.

Incidentally, during the development process of the pachinko machine 1 and during actual machine testing by public security, surface-mounted electronic components dedicated to testing are mounted in the above-mentioned test area, but there is a risk that the diameter dimension L of the transparent molding mark 1320Y1 formed on the cover body 1321B will be larger than the maximum dimension W of the surface-mounted electronic components dedicated to testing. As described above, the transparent molding mark 1320Y1 may be formed on the cover body 1321B in a position that does not overlap with the test points 1310A9a, through holes 1310A9b, markings, copper foil, etc., and does not overlap with the positions where the surface-mounted electronic components dedicated to testing are mounted, when the mounting surface 1310Ax of the main control board 1310A is viewed from the rear side through the cover body 1321B. As a result, during the development process of the pachinko machine 1 or when the actual machine is tested by the public security police, surface-mounted electronic components used exclusively for testing, test points 1310A9a, through holes 1310A9b, markings, copper foil, etc. are prevented from being contained within and highlighted by the transparent molding marks 1320Y1, more reliably preventing misidentification by workers.

Figures 430(a) and (b) are partially enlarged views showing the cover body 1321B and a portion of the main control board 1310A visible through the cover body 1321B. As shown in Figures 430(a) and (b), multiple opaque molding marks 1320Y6 are formed in the intra-board area 1321B2 of the cover body 1321B. The opaque molding mark 1320Y6 has a semi-transparent or opaque appearance with no transparency within its frame. Therefore, when the mounting surface 1310Ax of the main control board 1310A is viewed from the rear side through the cover body 1321B, even if it overlaps with specific surface-mounted electronic components such as the IC 1310A1, resistor 1310A2, transistor 1310A3, and capacitor 1310A4, the test point 1310A9a, the through hole 1310A9b, the markings, the copper foil, etc., the overlapping IC 1310A1, resistor 1310A2, transistor 1310A3, and capacitor 1310A4, the overlapping IC 1310A1, resistor 1310A2, By simply making it difficult to see specific surface-mount type electronic components such as the resistor 1310A3 and the capacitor 1310A4, the test point 1310A9a, the through-hole 1310A9b, the markings or the copper foil, it is possible to prevent the overlapping specific surface-mount type electronic components such as the IC 1310A1, the resistor 1310A2, the transistor 1310A3 and the capacitor 1310A4, the test point 1310A9a, the through-hole 1310A9b, the markings or the copper foil from being highlighted by the opaque molding marks 1320Y6. As a result, it is possible to prevent misidentification by an operator who views the mounting surface 1310Ax of the main control board 1310A from behind through the cover body 1321B, allowing inspections of the main control board 1310A to be carried out normally, preventing malfunctions in the main control board 1310A and preventing disadvantages to players and gaming halls where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and ultimately preventing a decline in the reliability of the pachinko machine 1. Note that some of the multiple opaque molding marks 1320Y6 may be formed in the off-board region 1321B1 of the cover body 1321B, which can improve the ease of designing the mold for molding the cover body 1321B.

Furthermore, the multiple transparent molding marks 1320Y1 may be formed in the intra-board area 1321B6 of the cover body 1321B if the diameter dimension L is smaller than the maximum dimension W of the surface-mount type electronic component that overlaps when the mounting surface 1310Ax of the main control board 1310A is viewed from the rear through the cover body 1321B. If the diameter dimension L is smaller than the maximum dimension W of the surface-mount type electronic component that overlaps the transparent molding mark 1320Y1 when viewed from the rear of the main control board box 1320A, the surface-mount type electronic component will not fit within the transparent molding mark 1320Y1, thereby preventing the surface-mount type electronic component from being emphasized by the transparent molding mark 1320Y1. As a result, it is possible to prevent misidentification by an operator who views the mounting surface 1310Ax of the main control board 1310A from behind through the cover body 1321B, allowing inspections of the main control board 1310A to be carried out normally, preventing malfunctions in the main control board 1310A and preventing disadvantages to players or gaming halls where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and ultimately preventing a decline in the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.

The transparent molding mark 1320Y1 is mainly formed by the ejector pin that pushes the cover body 1321B out of the mold, and has a transparent visible aspect with transparency inside the frame lines, similar to the ejector pin marks shown in Figures 427(a) to (d). The opaque molding mark 1320Y6 is mainly formed by the inlet through which resin is poured into the mold, and is formed as a circular, multiple frame-shaped uneven portion, similar to the gate marks shown in Figures 427(e) or (g), and has a semi-transparent or opaque visible aspect with no transparency inside the frame lines.

Furthermore, while the cover body of the present embodiment described above has multiple molding marks formed thereon, multiple molding marks of each of the above-mentioned aspects may be combined and formed depending on the molding marks formed on the cover body. This prevents specific surface-mounted electronic components, test points, through-holes, markings, copper foil, etc. from being highlighted by the molding marks, further reducing misidentification by workers viewing the mounting surface 1310Ax of the main control board 1310A from behind through the cover body, allowing inspections of the main control board 1310A to be carried out normally and reducing defects in the main control board 1310A, preventing disadvantages to players and gaming halls where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and ultimately preventing a decline in the reliability of the pachinko machine 1.

[Modification of the configuration for preventing unauthorized tampering with electronic components]
Next, we will explain the configuration that prevents fraudulent acts on the boards, such as tampering with the electronic components mounted on the sub-side boards on which driver ICs 5 and MPUs that control movable objects, lighting devices (light-emitting objects such as LEDs), speakers, etc., which are installed in the pachinko machine 1 and used for game performances, are mounted (for example, the peripheral control board 1510, the drive board that controls the drive motors and drive solenoids that operate the movable decorative objects for performances, the drive board that controls the speakers, the light-emitting control board that controls the light-emitting objects, the board on which the power supply IC that generates the power supply used in the pachinko machine 1 is mounted, etc.).

In the following, as an example, we will explain a peripheral control board 1510 that is equipped with an MPU and a driver IC5 (chopper-type two-phase bipolar drive stepping motor driver) that controls the drive motor for the movable body. However, this technical concept can be applied to any sub-side board that is provided in the pachinko machine 1 and that is equipped with a driver IC5 or MPU that controls the movable body, illumination devices (light emitters such as LEDs), speakers, etc. used in game presentations (for example, the peripheral control board 1510, a drive board that controls the drive motors and drive solenoids that operate the movable decorative bodies used in presentations, a drive board that controls the speaker, a light emission control board that controls the light emitters, a board equipped with a power supply IC that generates the power used in the pachinko machine 1, etc.).

Furthermore, while Variation 1 of the configuration for preventing unauthorized tampering with electronic components to Variation 5 of the configuration for preventing unauthorized tampering with electronic components, which are described below, can each be implemented independently, it is also possible to solve the problem by combining and implementing each technical concept. Furthermore, they can also be implemented in combination with the other embodiments described above.

[Modification 1 of the configuration for preventing unauthorized tampering with electronic components]
In the first modified example of the configuration for preventing unauthorized tampering with electronic components, an administrator of the gaming machine or the like can open the main frame 4 relative to the outer frame 2 and visually inspect the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 through the transparent cover body 1501, thereby determining whether or not tampering has occurred with the electronic components mounted on the peripheral control board 1510. In more detail, when visually inspecting the peripheral control board 1510 to determine whether or not there has been any tampering with the electronic components that are important for controlling the effects executed in the pachinko machine 1, for example, the administrator visually inspects the electronic components to determine whether or not there is any evidence of tampering with the electronic components that are important for controlling the effects executed in the pachinko machine 1, and if any evidence of tampering is found in the important electronic components, it is determined that there has been tampering with the peripheral control board 1510. However, in conventional peripheral control boards 1510, multiple electronic components are mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x, making it difficult for an administrator or other person visually inspecting the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 to find (identify) important electronic components from among the multiple electronic components mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510.

In consideration of the above circumstances, the peripheral control board 1510 of this example has been designed to make it easy to visually identify important electronic components from among multiple electronic components. Figures 431(A)-(F) and 432(G) are explanatory diagrams showing an example of how electronic components are mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 of the other example described above.

As shown in Figure 431 (A), multiple surface-mounted electronic components are mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510.

In this example, the peripheral control board 1510 is equipped with a +12V driver circuit that drives and controls the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 via a +12V fuse.

The +12V driver circuit is primarily composed of a surface-mounted driver IC5 (part number: IC5) that drives the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5, resistor MR60 (part number: MR60) and resistor MR61 (part number: MR61) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "resistor MR60 and resistor MR61 provided in the +12V driver circuit") for appropriately setting the output current output from this surface-mounted driver IC5 to the drive motor, resistor MR63 (part number: MR63) for detecting when a current exceeding the specified value flows in the drive motor, and resistor MR64 (part number: MR64) and capacitor MC30 (part number: MC30) for setting the control frequency.

In this embodiment, resistor MR61 provided in the +12V driver circuit of peripheral control board 1510 is a surface-mount type (so-called SMD type) resistor, and as described above, is an electronic component used to properly set the output current (torque) output to the drive motor. For example, if a resistor with a resistance value outside the allowable range is installed, the movable body may become jerky or stop mid-motion, resulting in malfunction and failure to operate normally. As such, even electronic components such as resistors connected to driver IC 5 affect the performance of the driver IC 5 itself. Therefore, even when selecting a single resistor, precision is required (some have a narrow range between the allowable minimum and maximum values, or a narrow fluctuation range with temperature changes, etc.). Carelessly selecting a component with a large allowable value fluctuation range may result in unexpected malfunctions because the required performance is not met.

Near the driver IC5 (in this example, an electronic component important for game presentation, such as the surface-mounted driver IC5 that drives the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5), which is a surface-mounted electronic component mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, are mounted surface-mounted electronic components such as resistors MR60 and MR61, resistors MR63 and MR64, and capacitor MC30, which are electrically connected to the surface-mounted driver IC5 by wiring patterns formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and each of the surface-mounted resistors MR60 is electrically connected by wiring patterns formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. For example, surface-mount resistors MR60 and MR61 are designed to appropriately set the output current from the surface-mount driver IC 5 to the drive motor. Each resistor has a small tolerance for fluctuation (with a ±1% variation) and a small fluctuation range with respect to temperature changes. They are adjacently positioned across an electronic component-restricted area B, where no electronic components can be mounted. Note that at least one surface-mount resistor may be placed adjacent to one surface-mount driver IC 5. While vias and wiring patterns may be formed in the electronic component-restricted area B, other electronic components are restricted from being mounted between the surface-mount driver IC 5 and surface-mount resistor MR60, and between the surface-mount driver IC 5 and surface-mount resistor MR61. Therefore, surface-mount resistors MR60 and MR61 are mounted closest to the surface-mount driver IC 5. Furthermore, it is also possible to restrict the mounting of other electronic components between surface mount type resistors MR60 and MR61, and to arrange them adjacent to each other with an electronic component no-mount area in between, where no electronic components can be mounted, even at the most adjacent positions.

As described above, surface-mount resistors MR60 and MR61 are electronic components that appropriately set the output current output from surface-mount driver IC 5 to the drive motor. Therefore, the component numbers of surface-mount resistors MR60 and MR61 formed on peripheral control board 1510 are formed to avoid electronic component mounting no-go area B. In other words, vias and wiring patterns may be formed in the electronic component mounting no-go area, but other electronic components are not mounted there, and the component numbers of surface-mount resistors MR60 and MR61 are not formed there either. In this example, the component numbers of resistors MR61, MR64, and capacitor MC30 are also formed to avoid electronic component mounting no-go area B. Note that with driver IC 5, for example, the number or symbol indicating terminal 1 may be formed within electronic component mounting no-go area B, while the component number may be formed to avoid electronic component mounting no-go area B.

In addition, in this example, most of the electronic components mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 (more than half of the electronic components mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, and even those that account for the largest proportion of the electronic components mounted on the peripheral control board 1510) have black exteriors, and the surface-mount driver IC 5 that drives the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 also has a black exterior. Meanwhile, for example, a surface-mount resistor MR60, which is positioned adjacent to the surface-mount driver IC 5 that drives the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 across the electronic component mounting no-go area B, has a light blue exterior (which may also be blue, yellow-green, etc.) that is different from black. This makes it easier to find the surface-mount resistor MR60 with a light blue exterior on the peripheral control board 1510, and it becomes easier to identify the surface-mount driver IC 5 positioned adjacent to the surface-mount resistor MR60 across the electronic component mounting no-go area B using this surface-mount resistor MR60 as a visual target.

In other words, when an administrator visually inspects the mounting surface (front surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, the surface-mount resistor MR60 mounted near the surface-mount driver IC 5 (positioned adjacent to the electronic component mounting prohibited area B), which is an important electronic component for controlling the effects executed by the pachinko machine 1, can act as a visual marker indicating the location of the surface-mount driver IC 5. Even if fraud such as tampering with the surface-mount driver IC 5 on the peripheral control board 1510 occurs, the administrator can easily identify the surface-mount driver IC 5 from among multiple electronic components using the surface-mount resistor MR60 as a visual marker and easily determine whether fraud has occurred on the peripheral control board 1510. This makes it possible to prevent fraud such as tampering with the electronic components mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, thereby improving the security of the pachinko machine 1. Even if fraud does occur, it can be quickly discovered, preventing any disadvantage to players.

In this way, an administrator who knows that the surface-mount driver IC5, an electronic component important for controlling the effects executed in the pachinko machine 1, is placed adjacent to the surface-mount resistor MR60, which has a light blue (or alternatively, blue or yellow-green) exterior that is different from black, with the electronic component mounting no-go area B in between, can identify the surface-mount driver IC5 using the surface-mount resistor MR60 as a visual target. On the other hand, an individual (a person attempting to tamper with the peripheral control board 1510) who does not know that the surface-mount driver IC5, which is placed adjacent to the surface-mount resistor MR60 with the electronic component mounting no-go area B in between, is an electronic component important for controlling the effects executed in the pachinko machine 1, can be tricked into paying attention to the surface-mount resistor MR60, which has a light blue (or alternatively, blue or yellow-green) exterior that is different from black and therefore more noticeable, and thus leads to the tampering of the surface-mount driver IC5, thereby preventing tampering with the important electronic component.

In addition, the surface-mount type driver IC 5 may be configured with surface-mount type resistors MR60 and MR61 having exteriors in a light blue (or other color, such as blue or yellow-green) different from black, with the electronic component no-mount area B sandwiched between them. In this case, multiple groups of resistors having exteriors in a light blue (or other color, such as blue or yellow-green) different from black can be arranged together, making the surface-mount type resistors MR60 and MR61 arranged together more noticeable on the mounting surface (front surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. Furthermore, by arranging the surface-mount type resistors MR60 and MR61 adjacent to each other across the electronic component no-mount area B, where electronic components cannot be mounted, the surface-mount type resistors MR60 and MR61 having exteriors in a light blue (or other color, such as blue or yellow-green) different from black can be arranged more integrally, making the surface-mount type resistors MR60 and MR61 even more noticeable.

Furthermore, the exterior of the surface-mount type driver IC5 only needs to be black, and may have an exterior of multiple colors, including black and colors other than black. The exterior of the surface-mount type resistor MR60 only needs to be a specific color different from black (light blue in this example), and may have an exterior of multiple colors, including the specific color and colors other than the specific color. In other words, one or both of the exteriors of the surface-mount type driver IC5 and the surface-mount type resistor MR60 may be configured to include multiple colors. However, it is preferable that the exterior of the surface-mount type driver IC5 does not include the specific color of the exterior of the surface-mount type resistor MR60, and that the exterior of the surface-mount type resistor MR60 does not include the black color of the exterior of the surface-mount type driver IC5. This configuration makes it possible to distinguish between the surface-mount type driver IC5 and the surface-mount type resistor MR60 by the color used on only one of the surface-mount type driver IC5 and the surface-mount type resistor MR60.

Furthermore, when multiple surface-mount resistors MR60 and MR61 are placed adjacent to the surface-mount driver IC5 that drives the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the gaming board 5, both may be surface-mount resistors, but at least one of them should have an exterior color other than black (blue, light blue, yellow-green, etc.). In addition to a surface-mount resistor with an exterior color other than black (blue, light blue, yellow-green, etc.) adjacent to the surface-mount driver IC5 that drives the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the gaming board 5, a surface-mount resistor with a black exterior may also be placed. For example, a surface-mount resistor MR60 with a black exterior and a surface-mount resistor MR60 with an exterior color other than black may be placed adjacent to the surface-mount driver IC5 that drives the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the gaming board 5.

Furthermore, the color used for the exterior of the surface-mount resistor MR60, which is placed adjacent to the surface-mount driver IC5 that drives the +12V electrical drive source (drive motor) of the game board 5 across the electronic component mounting prohibited area B, may be a color that is not used for the exterior of other electronic components on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. In other words, of the multiple electronic components mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, only the surface-mount resistor MR60 may be configured to have an exterior color of a specific color, while the other electronic components may have exterior colors different from the specific color. With this configuration, only the surface-mount resistor MR60 on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 has an exterior color of a specific color, making it possible to identify the surface-mount resistor MR60 simply by searching for electronic components with exterior colors, making it easier to identify the surface-mount resistor MR60.

The connector mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 may be configured to be inserted into a through-hole formed in the peripheral control board 1510 using a lead-type electronic component (also referred to as a lead component). In this case, the land of the through-hole to which the GND terminal of the connector is soldered may be configured as a thermal land. In this case, the welding between the connector and the peripheral control board 1510 is strong, preventing the wiring pattern and land from peeling off when the connector is inserted or removed. Furthermore, the pad to which the connection terminal of a specific electronic component (e.g., a specific resistor or a specific capacitor) among the surface-mount type electronic components mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 is soldered may be formed as a thermal pad. In this case, the welding between the surface-mount type electronic component and the peripheral control board 1510 is stronger than with a normal pad, making the specific electronic component less likely to peel off (detach) even if the peripheral control board 1510 bends or warps.

In addition, instead of providing a +12V driver circuit on the peripheral control board 1510, a +12V driver circuit that drives and controls the electrical drive source (drive motor) may be provided on a subsequent board (driver board, etc.) to the peripheral control board 1510.

Furthermore, as described above, in the main control board 1310, a surface-mounted IC1 is mounted on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 as an electronic component important in terms of security, to which the start-up winning signal that triggers the lottery and the magnetic sensor detection signal that detects abnormalities are input, and a capacitor MC1 is arranged adjacent to this surface-mounted IC1, sandwiching an electronic component mounting unavailable area A (see Figure 364 (A)) where no electronic components can be mounted. Furthermore, most of the electronic components mounted on the main control board 1310 in this example are configured with black exteriors, and the surface-mounted IC1 also has a black exterior. On the other hand, the capacitor MC1, which is placed adjacent to the surface-mounted IC1 across the electronic component mounting no-go area A, has a blue (or light blue, yellow-green, green, etc.) exterior that is different from black. This makes it easier to find the capacitor MC1 with its blue exterior on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, and it is easier to use this capacitor MC1 as a visual target to identify the surface-mounted IC1 placed adjacent to the capacitor MC1 across the electronic component mounting no-go area A.

The color used for the exterior of capacitor MC1, which is placed adjacent to surface-mount-type IC1, a security-critical electronic component, across electronic component mounting prohibited area A, may be a color not used for the exterior of other electronic components on mounting surface (surface) 1310x of main control board 1310. In other words, of the multiple electronic components mounted on mounting surface (surface) 1310x of main control board 1310, only capacitor MC1 may be configured to have an exterior color that is special, while the other electronic components may have exterior colors that are different from the special color. With this configuration, only capacitor MC1 has an exterior color that is special on mounting surface (surface) 1310x of main control board 1310, making it possible to identify capacitor MC1 simply by searching for electronic components with exterior colors that are special, making it easier to identify capacitor MC1.

In addition, the main control board 1310 is configured to make it easier to identify important electronic components compared to the peripheral control board 1510. Specifically, on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, a surface-mount resistor MR60, for example, is arranged adjacent to the surface-mount driver IC 5 across the electronic component mounting no-go area A, with its connection terminals soldered to pads formed on the board, making it a surface-mount electronic component that protrudes less from the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 than lead-type electronic components. On the other hand, on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, a capacitor MC1 is arranged adjacent to the surface-mount IC1 across the electronic component mounting no-go area A, with its leads formed to have two or more bent portions (in this example, leads formed to have two bent portions) inserted into the board and soldered, making it a lead-type electronic component that protrudes more from the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 than surface-mount type electronic components. Lead-type electronic components are more noticeable because they protrude more from the board surface than surface-mount type electronic components.

Furthermore, in this example, on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, a matte (matt, low gloss, or almost no gloss) color is used as a different color from the black used for the exterior of the surface-mount resistor MR60, which is placed adjacent to the surface-mount driver IC5 across the electronic component mounting no-go area B. On the other hand, on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, a glossy (or highly glossy) color is used as a different color from the black used for the exterior of the capacitor MC1, which is placed adjacent to the surface-mount IC1 across the electronic component mounting no-go area A. Glossy (or highly glossy) electronic components are more noticeable due to reflections from lighting in the gaming facility than matte (matte, low gloss, or almost no gloss) electronic components.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, most of the electronic components mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 have black exteriors, and like the peripheral control board 1510, most of the electronic components mounted on the main control board 1310 also have black exteriors. Furthermore, the black exteriors of the electronic components mounted on the main control board 1310 and peripheral control board 1510 in this example are non-glossy (matte, low-gloss, or almost non-glossy). In other words, most of the electronic components mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 have non-glossy (matte, low-gloss, or almost non-glossy) black exteriors.

Furthermore, on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, a large number of electronic components with non-glossy (matte, low-gloss, or almost non-glossy) black exteriors are mounted, and among these, capacitor MC1 with a glossy (or high-gloss) blue exterior is mounted, making capacitor MC1 highly visible due to reflections from lighting and the like within the amusement facility. On the other hand, on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, a surface-mount resistor MR60 with a non-glossy (matte, low-gloss, or almost non-glossy) light blue exterior is mounted among a large number of electronic components with non-glossy (matte, low-gloss, or almost non-glossy) black exteriors, and therefore, surface-mount resistor MR60 is less noticeable due to weak or almost no reflection from lighting and the like within the amusement facility. In this way, on the main control board 1310, compared to the peripheral control board 1510, a specific electronic component (in this example, capacitor MC1) placed adjacent to an important special electronic component (in this example, surface-mounted IC1) across the electronic component mounting no-go area A is more noticeable.

In this way, this example is configured so that it is easier to find capacitor MC1 on main control board 1310 than to find surface-mount resistor MR60 on peripheral control board 1510, making it easier to identify surface-mount IC1, an important electronic component located adjacent to capacitor MC1 across electronic component mounting prohibited area A. In other words, compared to peripheral control board 1510, which is mounted with electronic components important for controlling the presentation executed by pachinko machine 1, the main control board 1310, which is mounted with more important electronic components for security purposes that input start-up winning signals that trigger lottery draws and magnetic sensor detection signals that detect abnormalities, allows for faster detection of fraud. This makes it possible to prevent fraud on the main control board 1310, and even if fraud is committed, it can be detected quickly, preventing any disadvantage to the player.

[Modification 2 of the configuration for preventing unauthorized tampering with electronic components]
Next, a second modified example of the configuration for preventing unauthorized tampering with electronic components will be described. In the first modified example of the configuration for preventing unauthorized tampering with electronic components, a specific electronic component having an exterior color different from black is placed adjacent to the important component, with the electronic component mounting prohibited area B sandwiched therebetween, to prevent unauthorized tampering with the important component. However, by using a color different from the black used for the exterior of the specific electronic component placed adjacent to the important component that is less noticeable on the board, it is possible to make it easier for an administrator of the gaming machine who knows in advance that the exterior of the specific electronic component is a color that is less noticeable on the board to find the specific electronic component, while making it more difficult for someone who does not know in advance that the exterior of the specific electronic component is a color that is less noticeable on the board (a person who attempts to tamper with the important component) to find the specific electronic component, thereby preventing tampering of the important component.

As shown in Figure 431 (B), on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, the surface-mount type resistor MR60 is arranged adjacent to the surface-mount type driver IC 5 across an area B where electronic components cannot be mounted, and is electrically connected to the surface-mount type driver IC 5 by a wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510.The exterior of the surface-mount type resistor MR60 is colored in a color that contrasts little with the color of the solder resist (protective agent) coated over almost the entire mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. In this example, a plurality of surface-mount resistors MR60, MR61, MR64, and MR63 are arranged adjacent to one surface-mount driver IC 5, and each of the surface-mount resistors MR60, MR61, MR64, and MR63 is electrically connected to the surface-mount driver IC 5 by a wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface (front surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, but it is sufficient that at least one surface-mount resistor is arranged adjacent to one surface-mount driver IC 5. Furthermore, vias and wiring patterns may be formed in the electronic component mounting no-go area B, but other electronic components are restricted from being mounted between the surface-mount driver IC 5 and the surface-mount resistors (resistors MR60, MR61, MR64, and MR63) and are mounted in the closest positions. Furthermore, when multiple surface-mount type resistors (resistors MR60, MR61, MR64, MR63) are placed adjacent to one surface-mount type driver IC 5, the surface-mount type resistors (resistors MR60, MR61, MR64, MR63) may also be placed adjacent to each other with an electronic component unmountable area in between, where electronic components cannot be mounted.

Specifically, in this example, the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is coated with green solder resist, and the surface-mount type driver IC 5 mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 has a black exterior, while the surface-mount type resistors MR60, MR61, and MR64 arranged adjacent to the surface-mount type driver IC 5 on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, across the electronic component mounting unavailability area B, have a yellow-green exterior.

The surface-mount driver IC5 mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 has a black exterior, which contrasts greatly with the green solder resist formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, making it easily noticeable on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. On the other hand, the surface-mount resistors MR60, MR61, and MR64, which are arranged adjacent to the surface-mount driver IC5 mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 across the electronic component mounting no-go area B, have a yellow-green exterior, which contrasts little with the green solder resist formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, making them less noticeable on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510.

The surface-mounted driver IC 5, an important component, has a black exterior that contrasts highly with the green solder resist formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, making it highly visible on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. However, since most of the electronic components mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 in this example have black exteriors and are provided as one of many electronic components with black exteriors, it is difficult to identify the surface-mounted driver IC 5 by visually inspecting the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510.

On the other hand, surface-mount resistors MR60, MR61, and MR64, which are arranged adjacent to surface-mount driver IC 5 mounted on mounting surface (surface) 1510x of peripheral control board 1510, across electronic component mounting no-go area B, are mounted among the numerous electronic components with black exteriors mounted on peripheral control board 1510, but are less noticeable on mounting surface (surface) 1510x of peripheral control board 1510 because they have a yellow-green exterior that contrasts little with the green solder resist formed on mounting surface (surface) 1510x of peripheral control board 1510.

In this example, the electronic components with black exteriors, which account for the majority of the electronic components mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, are provided with a high contrast against the green solder resist formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. However, because they are provided as one of the many electronic components with black exteriors, it is difficult to visually identify the type of electronic component on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. Among the electronic components having a predominantly black exterior, a specific electronic component (in this example, a surface-mount resistor MR60) is placed adjacent to a special electronic component (in this example, a surface-mount driver IC5) across an electronic component mounting no-go area B. Although the specific electronic component (in this example, a surface-mount resistor MR60) has a yellow-green exterior that is different from black, the contrast with the green solder resist formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 is reduced, making it difficult for someone viewing the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 to notice the presence of the specific electronic component.

In this way, an administrator who knows that a special electronic component (in this example, a surface-mounted driver IC5), which is an important electronic component for controlling the effects executed in the pachinko machine 1, is placed adjacent to a specific electronic component (in this example, a surface-mounted resistor MR60) with a yellow-green exterior that contrasts little with the green solder resist formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, across the electronic component mounting no-go area B, can easily find the specific electronic component on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and use this specific electronic component as a visual target. While it is easy to identify the special electronic component using this, it is difficult for someone (someone attempting to tamper with the peripheral control board 1510) to notice the presence of the special electronic component if they are unaware that the specific electronic component placed adjacent to the special electronic component across the electronic component mounting no-go area B has a yellow-green exterior that contrasts poorly with the green solder resist formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, making it difficult to identify the special electronic component using this specific electronic component as a visual target, thereby preventing tampering with the important special electronic component.

Furthermore, on the main control board 1310, as with the peripheral control board 1510, the special electronic component (surface-mounted IC1 in this example) that is important for security and is mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 has a black exterior, which provides a high contrast with the green solder resist formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and makes it easy to see on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. However, because it is one of many electronic components with a black exterior mounted on the main control board 1310, it is difficult to identify the special electronic component by visually inspecting the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, a specific electronic component (in this example, capacitor MC1) that is placed adjacent to a special electronic component important for security (in this example, a surface-mount type IC1) across an electronic component mounting no-go area A is configured to have an exterior color (in this example, blue) that contrasts highly with the green solder resist formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, making it highly visible on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. This makes it easier to find the specific electronic component with a blue exterior on the main control board 1310, and to use this specific electronic component as a visual target to easily identify the special electronic component that is placed adjacent to the specific electronic component across the electronic component mounting no-go area A.

As a result, an administrator who knows that a special electronic component (in this example, a surface-mount type IC1) that is important from a security perspective is placed adjacent to a specific electronic component (in this example, capacitor MC1) that has an exterior color (blue in this example) that contrasts highly with the green solder resist formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, with the electronic component mounting no-go area A in between, can identify the special electronic component using the specific electronic component as a visual target. On the other hand, an individual (a person attempting to tamper with the main control board 1310) who is unaware that the special electronic component placed adjacent to the specific electronic component across the electronic component mounting no-go area A is important from a security perspective can be tricked into paying attention to the specific electronic component, which has an exterior color that is blue (or can be blue or yellow-green, etc.), which is more noticeable than black, and thus leads to tampering with the specific electronic component, thereby preventing tampering with the important special electronic component.

Note that the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 may be configured so that the specific electronic components (in this example, surface-mount resistors MR60, MR61, and MR64) placed adjacent to the special electronic component (in this example, surface-mount driver IC5), which is an important electronic component for controlling the effects executed by the pachinko machine 1, across the electronic component mounting prohibited area B, have an exterior color that is less conspicuous. The combination of the color of the solder resist formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 and the exterior color of the specific electronic components is not limited to the above. For example, a green solder resist may be formed over substantially the entire mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and the specific electronic components mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 may have an exterior color similar to the green of the solder resist formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 (e.g., yellow-green or light blue).

In addition, it is not limited to changing the degree of contrast with the color of the solder resist formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 or the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, but it is also possible to change the difference between the color of the solder resist and the three color attributes (hue (difference in color), saturation (degree of vividness), and value (degree of brightness)). For example, the numerous electronic components mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510 (including important special electronic components (in this example, surface-mounted driver IC5)) can be configured to have an exterior color that greatly differs in at least one of the three color attributes from the green solder resist formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and the specific electronic components (in this example, surface-mounted resistors MR60, MR61, and MR64) that are placed adjacent to the special electronic components across the electronic component mounting no-go area B can be configured to have an exterior color that minimizes the differences in all of the three color attributes from the green solder resist formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, the same effect as above can be achieved.

Furthermore, the color used for the exterior of a specific electronic component (in this example, surface-mount resistors MR60, MR61, and MR64) placed adjacent to a special electronic component (in this example, surface-mount driver IC5), which is an important electronic component for controlling the effects executed by pachinko machine 1, across electronic component mounting prohibited area B, may be a color that is not used for the exterior of other electronic components on mounting surface (surface) 1510x of peripheral control board 1510. In other words, of the multiple electronic components mounted on mounting surface (surface) 1510x of peripheral control board 1510, only the specific electronic components (in this example, surface-mount resistors MR60, MR61, and MR64) may be configured to have an exterior of a specific color, and the other electronic components may be configured to have exteriors of a color different from the specific color. With this configuration, only specific electronic components (in this example, surface mount resistors MR60, MR61, and MR64) have exteriors of a specific color on the mounting surface (front surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, so that specific electronic components (in this example, surface mount resistors MR60, MR61, and MR64) can be identified simply by searching for electronic components with exteriors of a specific color, making it easy to identify the specific electronic components (in this example, surface mount resistors MR60, MR61, and MR64).

Furthermore, on the main control board 1310, as with the peripheral control board 1510, the color used for the exterior of a specific electronic component (in this example, capacitor MC1) placed adjacent to a security-critical special electronic component (in this example, surface-mounted IC1) across the electronic component mounting prohibited area A may be a color not used for the exterior of other electronic components on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. In other words, of the multiple electronic components mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, only the specific electronic component (in this example, capacitor MC1) may be configured to have an exterior color that is special, while the other electronic components may have exterior colors that are different from the special color. With this configuration, only the specific electronic component (in this example, capacitor MC1) has an exterior color that is special on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the specific electronic component (in this example, capacitor MC1) can be identified simply by searching for electronic components with exterior colors that are special, making it easier to identify the specific electronic component (in this example, capacitor MC1).

In addition to the above, on the mounting surface (front surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, the color used for the exterior of the specific electronic components (in this example, surface-mount resistors MR60, MR61, MR64) placed adjacent to the special electronic component (in this example, surface-mount driver IC5), which is an electronic component important for controlling the presentation, across the electronic component mounting prohibited area B, may be non-glossy (matte, low-gloss, or almost non-glossy). As described above, most of the electronic components mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 are configured with non-glossy (matte, low-gloss, or almost non-glossy) black exteriors, and among these, specific electronic components are provided with non-glossy (matte, low-gloss, or almost non-glossy) exteriors. Therefore, the specific electronic components reflect little or no light from the lighting in the gaming facility, making them less noticeable.

Furthermore, on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, a glossy (or highly glossy) color may be used for the exterior of a specific electronic component (in this example, capacitor MC1) that is placed adjacent to a special electronic component (in this example, a surface-mount type IC1) that is important for security, across the electronic component mounting prohibited area A. As described above, most of the electronic components mounted on the main control board 1310 are configured with non-glossy (matte, or low gloss, or almost non-glossy) black exteriors, and among these, specific electronic components are mounted with glossy (or highly glossy) exteriors, which makes the specific electronic components more noticeable due to reflections from lighting and other factors inside the gaming facility.

In this example, on the peripheral control board 1510, it is difficult to find the surface-mount resistors MR60, MR61, and MR64, making it difficult to identify the surface-mount driver IC5 that is placed adjacent to the surface-mount resistors MR60, MR61, and MR64 across the electronic component mounting prohibited area B. This prevents the surface-mount driver IC5, an important electronic component, from being tampered with. On the other hand, on the main control board 1310, attention is drawn to the capacitor MC1, encouraging tampering by tampering with this capacitor MC1, thereby preventing the surface-mount IC1, an important electronic component, from being tampered with.

Furthermore, because the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 use different means to prevent unauthorized tampering with important electronic components, even if an important electronic component is identified on one of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, it becomes difficult to identify an important electronic component on the other board. In other words, unauthorized tampering with important electronic components can be prevented from spreading to multiple boards (spread of damage).

In addition, on the mounting surface (front surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, a configuration may be adopted in which an insulating coating is applied to the land of a through hole provided near a special electronic component (in this example, a surface-mounted driver IC5) that is an electronic component important for controlling the presentation. In this case, the area of the copper foil on the land that is exposed and not covered by solder resist can be reduced compared to a normal land of a through hole. This reduces reflections from lighting, etc., inside the gaming facility caused by the copper foil, making the presence of the special electronic component less noticeable.

Furthermore, on the mounting surface (front surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, a configuration similar to that in which an insulating coating is applied to the land of the through hole may be adopted for the pad to which the electrode of a specific electronic component (in this example, capacitor MC1) is soldered, which is placed adjacent to a special electronic component (in this example, a surface-mounted driver IC5) that is an important electronic component for controlling the presentation, across an electronic component mounting prohibited area B. In other words, the pad may be configured so that a portion, including its outer edge, is covered with solder resist. In this case, the area of the exposed portion of the copper foil on the pad that is not covered by solder resist can be reduced compared to a normal pad. This reduces reflections from lighting in the gaming facility caused by the copper foil, making the presence of the specific electronic component less noticeable.

[Modification 3 of the configuration for preventing unauthorized tampering with electronic components]
Next, a third variation of the configuration for preventing unauthorized tampering of electronic components will be described. In the third variation of the configuration for preventing unauthorized tampering of electronic components, multiple specific electronic components are placed around an important component with an electronic component mounting no-go area between them, thereby preventing unauthorized tampering with the important component. This is explained below.

As shown in Figure 431 (C), in this example, the peripheral control board 1510 has, on its mounting surface (surface) 1510x, surface-mount type resistors MR60, MR61, and MR64 of different external sizes arranged adjacent to the surface-mount type driver IC 5 with an area B where electronic components cannot be mounted sandwiched between them, and are electrically connected to the surface-mount type driver IC 5 by wiring patterns formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. In this example, a plurality of surface-mount resistors (resistor MR60, resistor MR61, resistor MR64) are arranged adjacent to one surface-mount driver IC 5, and the surface-mount resistors (resistor MR60, resistor MR61, resistor MR64) are electrically connected to each other by a wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface (front surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. However, it is sufficient that at least one surface-mount resistor (any one of resistor MR60, resistor MR61, resistor MR64) is arranged adjacent to one surface-mount driver IC 5. Furthermore, vias and wiring patterns may be formed in the electronic component mounting prohibited area B, but other electronic components are restricted from being mounted between the surface-mount driver IC 5 and surface-mount resistor MR60, between the surface-mount driver IC 5 and surface-mount resistor MR61, and between the surface-mount driver IC 5 and surface-mount resistor MR64, and are mounted in the most adjacent positions. Furthermore, surface mount type resistors MR60, MR61, and MR64 may be arranged adjacent to each other with an electronic component unmountable area in between, where electronic components cannot be mounted. Furthermore, surface mount type resistors MR60, MR61, and MR64 may be electrically connected to each other by a wiring pattern formed on mounting surface (front surface) 1510x of peripheral control board 1510.

Surface mount resistors MR60 and MR61 have a relatively small external size among electronic components of the same type (same function) (surface mount resistors in this example) mounted on mounting surface (surface) 1510x of peripheral control board 1510, and surface mount resistor MR64 has a relatively large external size among electronic components of the same type (same function) (surface mount resistors in this example) mounted on mounting surface (surface) 1510x of peripheral control board 1510.

In this way, among the surface-mount type resistors provided on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, the surface-mount type resistors MR60 and MR61, which have relatively small external dimensions, and the surface-mount type resistor MR61, which has a relatively large external dimension, are arranged adjacent to the surface-mount type driver IC 5 with the electronic component mounting unavailability area B in between, and are electrically connected to the surface-mount type driver IC 5 by the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. Electronic components of the same type (with the same function) with large differences in external size between resistors MR60, MR61, and MR64 are more noticeable on the mounting surface (front surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, making it easier to find surface-mount type resistors MR60, MR61, and MR64, and using these surface-mount type resistors MR60, MR61, and MR64 as visual targets, it becomes easier to identify the surface-mount type driver IC 5 that is placed adjacent to surface-mount type resistors MR60, MR61, and MR64 across the electronic component mounting no-go area B.

In other words, when the administrator visually inspects the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, the surface-mounted resistors MR60 and MR70, which are relatively small in external size among the surface-mounted resistors provided on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, are mounted near the surface-mounted driver IC 5 (arranged adjacent to each other across the electronic component mounting no-go area B), which is an important electronic component for controlling the effects executed in the pachinko machine 1, and are electrically connected to the surface-mounted driver IC 5 by wiring patterns formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. MR61 and the relatively large surface-mount resistor MR64 can act as visual markers indicating the location of the surface-mount driver IC 5. Even if fraud such as tampering with the surface-mount driver IC 5 on the peripheral control board 1510 occurs, the administrator can easily identify the surface-mount driver IC 5 from among multiple electronic components using the surface-mount resistors MR60 and MR61 and the surface-mount resistor MR64 as visual markers, and easily determine whether fraud has occurred on the peripheral control board 1510. This makes it possible to prevent fraud such as tampering with the electronic components mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, thereby improving the security of the pachinko machine 1. Even if fraud does occur, it can be quickly discovered, preventing any disadvantage to the player.

In addition, as shown in Figure 431 (C), among the surface-mount type resistors provided on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, surface-mount type resistors MR60 and MR61, which have a relatively small external size, and surface-mount type resistor MR64, which has a relatively large external size, are arranged adjacent to each other on the side of the same of the four sides of the surface-mount type driver IC 5, with an electronic component mounting unavailability area B in between, and are electrically connected to connection terminals provided on the same side of the driver IC 5 by wiring patterns formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, As shown in FIG. 431 (D), among the surface mount type resistors provided on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, surface mount type resistors MR60 and MR61 having a relatively small external size and surface mount type resistor MR63 having a relatively large external size may be arranged adjacent to each other on the sides of different of the four sides of the surface mount type driver IC 5, with an electronic component mounting unavailability area B in between, and each may be electrically connected to connection terminals provided on different sides of the driver IC 5 by wiring patterns formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, surface mount type resistors MR60, MR61, and MR63 are electronic components of the same type (with the same function) that have a large difference in external size and are adjacently arranged on different sides of the four sides of surface mount type driver IC 5, with electronic component mounting no-go area B sandwiched between them, and are electrically connected by a wiring pattern formed on mounting surface (surface) 1510x of peripheral control board 1510. This makes surface mount type resistors MR60, MR61, and MR63 more visible on mounting surface (surface) 1510x of peripheral control board 1510, making surface mount type resistors MR60, MR61, and MR63 easier to find. This makes it easier to identify surface mount type driver ICs that are adjacently arranged to surface mount type resistors MR60, MR61, and MR63 across electronic component mounting no-go area B using surface mount type resistors MR60, MR61, and MR63 as visual targets.

Furthermore, the color used for the exterior of the surface-mount resistors MR60 and MR61, which have relatively small external dimensions among the surface-mount resistors mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, may be different from the color used for the exterior of the surface-mount resistors MR64 and MR63, which have relatively large external dimensions. For example, as shown in Figures 431(C) and (D), the surface-mount resistors MR60 and MR61, which have relatively small external dimensions among the surface-mount resistors mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, may be configured to have an exterior color of a specific color, such as light blue, while the surface-mount resistors MR64 and MR63, which have relatively large external dimensions, may be configured to have an exterior color (e.g., black) different from the specific color. In this case, the color of the exterior of the surface-mount resistor MR60 may not be used for the exterior of other electronic components on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, it becomes easy to find the surface-mount type resistor MR60 by the color of the exterior of the surface-mount type resistor MR60.

Furthermore, among the surface-mount type resistors mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, the exteriors of surface-mount type resistors MR60 and MR61, which have relatively small external dimensions, may have at least a specific color, or may have exteriors of multiple colors including the specific color and colors other than the specific color. The exteriors of surface-mount type resistors MR64 and MR63, which have relatively large external dimensions, may have exteriors of multiple colors, or may have exteriors of at least a color different from the specific color. In other words, among the surface-mount type resistors mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, the exteriors of surface-mount type resistors MR60 and MR61, which have relatively small external dimensions, and/or the exteriors of surface-mount type resistors MR64 and MR63, which have relatively large external dimensions, may be configured to include multiple colors. However, it is desirable that the exterior of surface-mount resistors MR64, 63, which have a relatively large external size among the surface-mount resistors mounted on mounting surface (surface) 1510x of peripheral control board 1510, does not include the specific color of surface-mount resistors MR60 and MR61, which have a relatively small external size, and that the exterior of surface-mount resistors MR60 and MR61, which have a relatively small external size, does not include the exterior color of surface-mount resistors MR64, 63, which have a relatively large external size. By configuring in this manner, it becomes possible to identify surface-mount resistors MR60, MR61 and surface-mount resistors MR64, 63 by the color used only for surface-mount resistors MR60, MR61, which have a relatively small external size, or surface-mount resistors MR64, 63, which have a relatively large external size, among the surface-mount resistors mounted on mounting surface (surface) 1510x of peripheral control board 1510.

Furthermore, the surface mount resistors MR60 and MR61 having a relatively small outer size may have an outer size smaller than the average outer size of all surface mount resistors mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, or may have the smallest outer size of all surface mount resistors mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. Similarly, the surface mount resistors MR64 and MR63 having a relatively large outer size may have an outer size larger than the average outer size of all surface mount resistors mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, or may have the largest outer size of all surface mount resistors mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510.

Alternatively, multiple surface-mount resistors with different resistance values may be arranged adjacent to the surface-mount driver IC 5 across the electronic component mounting no-go area B, and electrically connected to each other by wiring patterns formed on the surface-mount driver IC 5 and the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, the surface-mount resistors MR60 and MR61 having relatively small resistance values may have a value smaller than the average value of all surface-mount resistors mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, or may have the smallest value among all surface-mount resistors mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. Similarly, the surface mount resistors MR64, MR63 having a relatively large value may have a value greater than the average value of all surface mount resistors mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, or may have the largest value of all surface mount resistors mounted on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510.

Furthermore, as described above, on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the capacitor MC1 is positioned adjacent to the surface-mount type IC1 across the electronic component mounting unavailable area A, and is electrically connected to the surface-mount type IC1 by a wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. Although only one capacitor MC1 is provided for the surface-mount type IC1, it is a lead-type electronic component that is soldered by inserting a lead formed to have two or more bent portions (in this example, a lead formed to have two bent portions) into the board. Therefore, it protrudes more on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 than a surface-mount type electronic component, and further has a blue (or light blue, yellow-green, green, etc.) exterior that is configured to be glossy (or highly glossy), making it more noticeable on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. This makes it easier to find capacitor MC1 on the main control board 1310, and by using this capacitor MC1 as a visual target, it becomes easier to identify the surface-mount type IC1 that is placed adjacent to capacitor MC1 across the electronic component mounting no-go area A.

As a result, an administrator who knows that the surface-mount type IC1, which is important from a security perspective, is located adjacent to the capacitor MC1 on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, with the electronic component mounting no-go area A between them, can identify the surface-mount type IC1 using the capacitor MC1 as a visual target. On the other hand, an administrator who does not know that the surface-mount type IC1 located adjacent to the capacitor MC1 with the electronic component mounting no-go area A between them is an electronic component important from a security perspective (a person attempting to tamper with the main control board 1310) can be tricked into focusing on the capacitor MC1 and committing a tampering that will tamper with the capacitor MC1, thereby preventing the surface-mount type IC1, which is an important electronic component, from being tampered with.

In this way, in this example, the peripheral control board 1510 and the main control board 1310 use different means to prevent unauthorized tampering with important electronic components. Therefore, even if an important electronic component is identified on one of the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control board 1510, it will be difficult to identify the important electronic component on the other board. In other words, unauthorized tampering with important electronic components can be prevented from spreading to multiple boards (the spread of damage).

[Variation 4 of the configuration for preventing unauthorized tampering with electronic components]
Next, a fourth variation of the configuration for preventing unauthorized tampering with electronic components will be described. In the fourth variation of the configuration for preventing unauthorized tampering with electronic components, multiple specific electronic components are arranged on either side of an electronic component mounting no-go area around an important component, and these multiple specific electronic components include at least a first specific electronic component having an exterior with a first specific color and a second specific electronic component having an exterior with a second specific color, thereby preventing tampering with important components. This is explained below.

As shown in Figure 431 (E), in this example, the peripheral control board 1510 has surface-mount type resistors MR60, MR61, MR63, and MR64 arranged adjacent to the surface-mount type driver IC 5 on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x, with an area B where electronic components cannot be mounted sandwiched between them, and are electrically connected to the surface-mount type driver IC 5 by wiring patterns formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. In this example, a plurality of surface-mount type resistors (resistor MR60, resistor MR61, resistor MR64) are arranged adjacent to one surface-mount type driver IC 5, and the surface-mount type resistors (resistor MR60, resistor MR61, resistor MR64) are electrically connected to each other by a wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface (front surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, but it is sufficient if at least one surface-mount type resistor (one of resistor MR60, resistor MR61, resistor MR64) is arranged adjacent to one surface-mount type driver IC 5. Furthermore, vias and wiring patterns may be formed in the electronic component mounting no-go area B, but other electronic components are restricted from being mounted between the surface mount type driver IC 5 and surface mount type resistor MR60, between the surface mount type driver IC 5 and surface mount type resistor MR61, between the surface mount type driver IC 5 and surface mount type resistor MR63, and between the surface mount type driver IC 5 and surface mount type resistor MR64, and are mounted in the most adjacent positions. Furthermore, the surface mount type resistor MR60, the surface mount type resistor MR61, and the surface mount type resistor MR64 may also be arranged adjacent to each other with the electronic component mounting no-go area in between. Furthermore, the surface mount type resistors MR60, MR61, and MR64 may be electrically connected by a wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, or the surface mount type resistors MR60, MR61, and MR64 may not be electrically connected by a wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, but may instead be electrically connected to the surface mount type driver IC 5 by a wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510.

Surface-mount type resistors MR60 and MR61 have light blue (or alternatively blue, yellow-green, etc.) exteriors, while surface-mount type resistor MR64 has a black exterior. In this example, surface-mount type resistors MR60 and MR61 and surface-mount type resistor MR64 are electrically connected by a wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface (front surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510.

In this way, the surface-mount type resistors MR60 and MR61 with light blue exteriors and the surface-mount type resistor MR64 with black exteriors are placed adjacent to the surface-mount type driver IC 5 with the electronic component mounting no-go area B in between, and are electrically connected to the surface-mount type driver IC 5 by a wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface (front surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. This allows for the surface-mount type resistors MR60 and MR61 and the resistor MR64 to be electrically connected to the surface-mount type driver IC 5 via a wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface (front surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. Although they are components, the different exterior colors make them more noticeable on the mounting surface (front surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, making it easier to find surface mount type resistors MR60, MR61, and MR64. Therefore, using these surface mount type resistors MR60, MR61, and MR64 as visual targets, it becomes easier to identify the surface mount type driver IC 5 that is placed adjacent to the surface mount type resistors MR60, MR61, and MR64 across the electronic component mounting no-go area B.

In other words, when an administrator visually inspects the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, the surface-mount type resistors MR60 and MR61 with light blue exteriors and the surface-mount type resistor MR64 with black exteriors, which are mounted near (positioned adjacent to each other across the electronic component mounting no-go area B) the surface-mount type driver IC 5, which is an important electronic component for controlling the presentation executed in the pachinko machine 1, and are electrically connected to the surface-mount type driver IC 5 by wiring patterns formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, can act as visual markers indicating the location where the surface-mount type driver IC 5 is mounted.Even if fraud has been committed on the peripheral control board 1510 such as tampering with the surface-mount type driver IC 5, the administrator can easily identify the surface-mount type driver IC 5 from among the multiple electronic components using the surface-mount type resistors MR60 and MR61 and the surface-mount type resistor MR64 as visual markers, and easily determine whether fraud has been committed on the peripheral control board 1510. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent attempts such as tampering with the electronic components mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, improving the security of the pachinko machine 1, and even if fraud does occur, it can be discovered immediately, preventing any disadvantage to the player.

While the above example illustrates electronic components of the same type (with the same function) being placed adjacent to the surface-mount driver IC 5 across the electronic component mount-prohibited area B and electrically connected to the surface-mount driver IC 5 via a wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, electronic components of different types (with different functions) may also be placed adjacent to the surface-mount driver IC 5 across the electronic component mount-prohibited area B and electrically connected to the surface-mount driver IC 5 via a wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. For example, surface-mount resistors MR60 and MR61 and a surface-mount capacitor may be placed adjacent to a surface-mount driver IC 5 with a black exterior across the electronic component mount-prohibited area B and electrically connected to the surface-mount driver IC 5 via a wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, the surface mount resistors MR60 and MR61 may have an exterior that is a first specific color (e.g., light blue), and the surface mount capacitor may have a second specific color (e.g., brown). In this case, too, it becomes easier to find the first and second specific colors, which are only provided in small numbers, on the mounting surface (front surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, which has many electronic components with black exteriors mounted thereon, and it becomes easier to identify the surface mount driver IC 5 using the surface mount resistors MR60 and MR61 and the surface mount capacitor as visual indicators.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 431(E), the surface mount type resistors MR60 and MR61 having light blue exteriors and the surface mount type resistor MR64 having black exteriors are arranged adjacent to each other on the side of the same of the four sides of the surface mount type driver IC 5, with the electronic component mounting no-go area B sandwiched between them, and the connection terminals provided on the same side of the driver IC 5 are electrically connected to the surface mount type driver IC 5 by wiring patterns formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 431(F), the surface mount type resistors MR60 and MR61 having light blue exteriors and the surface mount type resistor MR63 having black exteriors may be arranged adjacent to each other on the side of different of the four sides of the surface mount type driver IC 5, with the electronic component mounting no-go area B sandwiched between them, and the connection terminals provided on different sides of the driver IC 5 are electrically connected to the surface mount type driver IC 5 by wiring patterns formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, surface-mount type resistors MR60, MR61, and MR63, which are electronic components of the same type (with the same function) but have different exterior colors, are arranged adjacent to each other on different sides of the four sides of the surface-mount type driver IC 5, with the electronic component mounting no-go area B sandwiched between them, and are electrically connected by wiring patterns formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. This makes surface-mount type resistors MR60, MR61, and MR63 more visible on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, making it easier to find surface-mount type resistors MR60, MR61, and MR63. This makes it easier to identify the surface-mount type driver IC5 that is arranged adjacent to surface-mount type resistors MR60, MR61, and MR63, with the electronic component mounting no-go area B sandwiched between them, using surface-mount type resistors MR60, MR61, and MR63 as visual targets.

Furthermore, the exteriors of surface-mount resistors MR60 and MR61 need only have the specific color (light blue in this example), and may have multiple colors including the specific color and colors other than the specific color. The exteriors of surface-mount resistors 64 and 63 need only have a color different from the specific color (black in this example), and may have multiple colors. In other words, one or both of the exteriors of surface-mount resistors MR60 and MR61 and the exteriors of surface-mount resistors 64 and 63 may be configured to include multiple colors. However, it is preferable that the exteriors of surface-mount resistors 64 and 63 do not include the specific color of surface-mount resistors MR60 and MR61, and that the exteriors of surface-mount resistors MR60 and MR61 do not include the color of the exteriors of surface-mount resistors 64 and 63. By configuring it in this way, it becomes possible to identify surface mount type resistors MR60 and MR61 and surface mount type resistors 64 and 63 by the color used for only one of surface mount type resistors MR60 and MR61 and surface mount type resistors 64 and 63.

Furthermore, the specific color of the exterior of surface-mount resistors MR60 and MR61 may be a color that is not used for the exterior of other electronic components on the mounting surface (front surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, it becomes easier to find surface-mount resistors MR60 and MR61 by the specific color that only the exterior of surface-mount resistors MR60 and MR61 has.

Furthermore, as described above, on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the capacitor MC1 is positioned adjacent to the surface-mount type IC1 across the electronic component mounting unavailable area A, and is electrically connected to the surface-mount type IC1 by the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. Although only one capacitor MC1 is provided for the surface-mount type IC1, it is a lead-type electronic component that is soldered by inserting a lead formed to have two or more bent portions (in this example, a lead formed to have two bent portions) into the board. Therefore, it protrudes more on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 than a surface-mount type electronic component, and further has a blue exterior (which may be light blue, yellow-green, green, etc.), and the blue is configured to be glossy (or highly glossy), making it more noticeable on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. This makes it easier to find capacitor MC1 on the main control board 1310, and by using this capacitor MC1 as a visual target, it becomes easier to identify the surface-mount type IC1 that is placed adjacent to capacitor MC1 across the electronic component mounting no-go area A.

As a result, an administrator who knows that the surface-mount type IC1, which is important from a security perspective, is located adjacent to the capacitor MC1 on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, with the electronic component mounting no-go area A between them, can identify the surface-mount type IC1 using the capacitor MC1 as a visual target. On the other hand, an administrator who does not know that the surface-mount type IC1 located adjacent to the capacitor MC1 with the electronic component mounting no-go area A between them is an electronic component important from a security perspective (a person attempting to tamper with the main control board 1310) can be tricked into focusing on the capacitor MC1 and committing a tampering that will tamper with the capacitor MC1, thereby preventing the surface-mount type IC1, which is an important electronic component, from being tampered with.

In this way, in this example, the peripheral control board 1510 and the main control board 1310 use different means to prevent unauthorized tampering with important electronic components. Therefore, even if an important electronic component is identified on one of the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control board 1510, it will be difficult to identify the important electronic component on the other board. In other words, unauthorized tampering with important electronic components can be prevented from spreading to multiple boards (the spread of damage).

[Variation 5 of the configuration for preventing unauthorized tampering with electronic components]
Next, a fifth variation of the configuration for preventing unauthorized tampering with electronic components will be described. In the fifth variation of the configuration for preventing unauthorized tampering with electronic components, multiple specific electronic components are placed around an important component with an electronic component mounting no-go area between them, thereby preventing unauthorized tampering with important components. This is explained below.

As shown in Figure 432 (G), in this example, the peripheral control board 1510 has surface-mount type resistors MR60 and MR61, as well as resistors MR63 and MR64, arranged adjacent to the surface-mount type driver IC 5 on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x, with the electronic component mounting unavailability area B sandwiched between them, and each is electrically connected to the surface-mount type driver IC 5 by a wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510.

Surface-mount resistors MR60, MR61, MR63, and MR64 are arranged adjacent to each other on different sides of the four sides of the surface-mount driver IC 5, with the electronic component mounting unavailability area B sandwiched between them, and are electrically connected to connection terminals on different sides of the driver IC 5 via wiring patterns formed on the mounting surface (front surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. In this example, surface-mount resistors MR60, MR61, and MR64 are arranged on the left side of the surface-mount driver IC 5 in Figure 432 (G) so as to be electrically connected to connection terminals on the left side of the surface-mount driver IC 5 via wiring patterns formed on the mounting surface (front surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, and surface-mount resistor MR63 is arranged on the bottom side of the surface-mount driver IC 5 so as to be electrically connected to a connection terminal on the bottom side of the surface-mount driver IC 5.

In this way, the surface-mount type resistors (resistor MR60, resistor MR61, resistor MR63, resistor MR64) are arranged adjacent to each other on different sides of the four sides of the surface-mount type driver IC 5, with the electronic component mounting area B sandwiched between them, and are electrically connected to the surface-mount type driver IC 5 by a wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface (front surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. Electronic components of the same type (with the same function), that is, surface-mount type resistors (resistor MR60, resistor MR61, resistor MR63, resistor MR64), are provided so that the surface-mount type driver IC 5 is sandwiched between the surface-mount type resistors (resistor MR60, resistor MR61, resistor MR63, resistor MR64), and by identifying the surface-mount type resistors (resistor MR60, resistor MR61, resistor MR63, resistor MR64), the administrator can easily identify the surface-mount type driver IC 5 using the surface-mount type resistors (resistor MR60, resistor MR61, resistor MR63, resistor MR64) as visual indicators. Therefore, even if tampering has been performed on the peripheral control board 1510 such that the surface-mount type driver IC 5 is tampered with, it becomes easy to determine whether tampering has been performed on the peripheral control board 1510. In other words, by identifying the surface-mount resistors (resistor MR60, resistor MR61, resistor MR63, resistor MR64), the administrator can immediately identify the surface-mount driver IC 5 surrounded (sandwiched) by these surface-mount resistors (resistor MR60, resistor MR61, resistor MR63, resistor MR64). This prevents fraudulent attempts to tamper with electronic components mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, improving the security of the pachinko machine 1. Even if fraud is committed, it can be quickly discovered and no harm is inflicted on the player. It is sufficient for the resistors MR60 to be provided on two or more different sides of the surface-mount driver IC 5 and electrically connected to the surface-mount driver IC 5 via wiring patterns formed on the mounting surface (front surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510.

In addition, in this example, the surface-mount type resistors (resistor MR60, resistor MR61, resistor MR63, resistor MR64) are arranged adjacent to each other on the sides of different of the four sides of the surface-mount type driver IC 5, with an electronic component mounting unavailability area B sandwiched between them, and are electrically connected to the connection terminals provided on different sides of the driver IC 5 by wiring patterns formed on the mounting surface (front surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510.They are configured to have a light blue (or blue, yellow-green, etc.) exterior, which is different from the surface-mount type driver IC 5, which has a black exterior. As described above, most of the electronic components mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 of this example (more than half of the electronic components mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, and may even account for the largest proportion of the electronic components mounted on the peripheral control board 1510) are configured with black exteriors, so the surface-mount type driver IC 5 with a black exterior is surrounded by surface-mount type resistors (resistor MR60, resistor MR61, resistor MR63, resistor MR64) with light blue (or blue, yellow-green, etc.) exteriors (resistor MR60, resistor MR61, resistor MR63, resistor MR64). By sandwiching the resistors (resistor MR60, resistor MR61, resistor MR63, resistor MR64) with light blue exteriors on the peripheral control board 1510, it becomes easier to find them, and by using these surface mount resistors (resistor MR60, resistor MR61, resistor MR63, resistor MR64) as visual targets, it becomes easier to identify the surface mount driver IC 5 that is placed adjacent to the surface mount resistors (resistor MR60, resistor MR61, resistor MR63, resistor MR64) across the electronic component mounting no-go area B.

The exterior of the surface-mount resistors (resistor MR60, resistor MR61, resistor MR63, resistor MR64) only needs to have a specific color (light blue in this example), and may have multiple colors, including the specific color and colors other than the specific color. This configuration makes it possible to identify the surface-mount resistors (resistor MR60, resistor MR61, resistor MR63, resistor MR64) by the color used only for them. Furthermore, the specific color of the exterior of the surface-mount resistors (resistor MR60, resistor MR61, resistor MR63, resistor MR64) may not be used for the exterior of other electronic components on the mounting surface (front surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, it becomes easy to find the surface mount resistors (resistor MR60, resistor MR61, resistor MR63, resistor MR64) by the specific color that only the exterior of the surface mount resistors (resistor MR60, resistor MR61, resistor MR63, resistor MR64) has.

Furthermore, at least one of the surface-mount resistors (resistor MR60, resistor MR61, resistor MR63, resistor MR64) surrounding (sandwiching) the surface-mount driver IC 5 with a black exterior can be configured to have an exterior of a specific color, such as light blue (or alternatively, blue or yellow-green). Alternatively, the surface-mount driver IC 5 with a black exterior can be surrounded (sandwiched) by surface-mount resistors with the same black exterior as the driver IC 5 and resistors with exteriors of a specific color, such as light blue (or alternatively, blue or yellow-green). In this case, surrounding (sandwiching) the driver IC 5 with resistors of the same type (same function) but with exteriors of different colors makes it easier to identify the surface-mount resistors with exteriors of a specific color, such as light blue, and the surface-mount resistors with black exteriors on the peripheral control board 1510. Using these surface-mount resistors as visual markers, it becomes easier to identify the surface-mount driver IC 5 located adjacent to the surface-mount resistor across the electronic component mounting no-go area B.

Furthermore, the surface-mount type resistors (resistor MR60, resistor MR61, resistor MR63, resistor MR64) surrounding (sandwiching) the surface-mount type driver IC 5 having a black exterior may include a surface-mount type resistor (e.g., resistor MR60) having an exterior color of a first specific color (e.g., light blue) and a surface-mount type resistor (e.g., MR63) having an exterior color of a second specific color (e.g., brown) different from the first specific color. In this case, by surrounding (sandwiching) the driver IC 5 with resistors of the same type (same function) but with exterior colors of different colors, it becomes easier to identify the surface-mount type resistors having exterior colors of the first specific color and the second specific color on the peripheral control board 1510. Using these surface-mount type resistors (e.g., resistors MR60, MR63) as visual markers, it becomes easier to identify the surface-mount type driver IC 5 located adjacent to the surface-mount type resistor across the electronic component mounting no-go area B.

While the above example shows electronic components of the same type (with the same function) surrounding (sandwiching) the surface-mount driver IC 5, different electronic components may also be arranged surrounding (sandwiching) the surface-mount driver IC 5. For example, a surface-mount resistor MR60 and a surface-mount capacitor may be arranged surrounding (sandwiching) a surface-mount driver IC 5 having a black exterior, and each may be electrically connected to the surface-mount driver IC 5 by wiring patterns formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. In this case, the surface mount resistor MR60 may have an exterior that is a first specific color (e.g., light blue), and the surface mount capacitor may have a second specific color. In this case, too, it becomes easier to find the first and second specific colors, which are provided in small numbers on the mounting surface (front surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510, which is equipped with many electronic components that have black exteriors, and it becomes easier to identify the surface mount driver IC5 using the surface mount resistor MR60 and the surface mount capacitor as visual markers.

Furthermore, as described above, on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the capacitor MC1 is positioned adjacent to the surface-mount type IC1 across the electronic component mounting unavailability area A, and is electrically connected to the surface-mount type IC1 by the wiring pattern formed on the mounting surface (surface) 1510x of the peripheral control board 1510. Only one capacitor MC1 is provided for the surface-mount type IC1, and although it is not arranged to surround (sandwich) the surface-mount type IC1, it is a lead-type electronic component that is soldered by inserting leads formed to have two or more bent portions (in this example, leads formed to have two bent portions) into the board. Therefore, it protrudes more on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 than surface-mount type electronic components, and further has a blue exterior (which may be light blue, yellow-green, green, etc.), and the blue is configured to be glossy (or highly glossy), making it easily noticeable on the mounting surface (surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. This makes it easier to find capacitor MC1 on the main control board 1310, and by using this capacitor MC1 as a visual target, it becomes easier to identify the surface-mount type IC1 that is placed adjacent to capacitor MC1 across the electronic component mounting no-go area A.

As a result, an administrator who knows that the surface-mount type IC1, which is important from a security perspective, is located adjacent to the capacitor MC1 on the mounting surface (front surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, with the electronic component mounting no-go area A between them, can identify the surface-mount type IC1 using the capacitor MC1 as a visual target. On the other hand, an administrator who does not know that the surface-mount type IC1 located adjacent to the capacitor MC1 with the electronic component mounting no-go area A between them is an electronic component important from a security perspective (a person attempting to tamper with the main control board 1310) can be tricked into focusing on the capacitor MC1 and committing a tampering that will tamper with the capacitor MC1, thereby preventing the surface-mount type IC1, which is an important electronic component, from being tampered with.

In this way, in this example, the peripheral control board 1510 and the main control board 1310 use different means to prevent unauthorized tampering with important electronic components. Therefore, even if an important electronic component is identified on one of the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control board 1510, it will be difficult to identify the important electronic component on the other board. In other words, unauthorized tampering with important electronic components can be prevented from spreading to multiple boards (the spread of damage).

In the above example, the electronic components constituting the +12V driver circuit mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, specifically resistors MR60 and MR61 connected to driver IC 5, were used as visual targets. However, electronic components that are part of a circuit constituting another function may be placed adjacent to driver IC 5 across electronic component mounting area B as long as it does not cause any problems, and used as a visual target for driver IC 5. In other words, the electronic components used as visual targets to find important electronic components do not necessarily have to be part of a circuit configured to achieve a common function; any electronic component that is convenient for the visual target may be used. In this case, taking into account factors such as wiring routing, it is preferable to use electronic components that are part of a circuit constituting another adjacent function. In addition to resistors, electronic components may also be capacitors, coils, or diodes.

In addition, while the above embodiment describes a +12V driver circuit mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, the driver IC 5 may be mounted on a board separate from the MPU, and the +12V driver circuit board may be housed in the same board box. In other words, multiple boards housed in the board box may be connected to each other using harnesses or connectors.

In addition, electronic components used as visual targets may be selected and provided for each circuit comprising important electronic components (for example, a circuit that controls a movable body using a drive motor, a circuit that controls a movable body using a drive solenoid, a circuit that controls a speaker, a circuit that controls a light emitter, or a circuit that generates power for use in pachinko machine 1). If multiple circuits comprising important electronic components are provided on the same board, it is advisable to provide a visual target for each circuit. Alternatively, if circuits comprising important electronic components are provided on each board, a visual target may be provided for each board, or a visual target may be provided for each board box, with a visual target provided on one of the boards housed in a board box. It is desirable to provide visual targets on as many boards and board boxes as possible. The more locations there are, the greater the chance of overlooking something.

In the above embodiment, the circuit comprising the important electronic components, including the target electronic component, was mounted on a surface visible from the outside of the board box when the board box was attached to the gaming machine. However, it may also be mounted on a surface that is not visible. Alternatively, the electronic component used as the target may be mounted on the surface opposite to the surface on which the important electronic components are mounted. By providing a target on a surface opposite to the surface on which the target electronic components are mounted, it is possible that the target electronic component may be overlooked, and this is expected to be the case. Note that in the above embodiment, if the target electronic component is mounted on the same surface as the important electronic components and numerous other electronic components, i.e., when the mounting density of the mounted surface is high, the matte yellow-green resistor used for the target electronic component's exterior color may make it possible that the target electronic component may be overlooked among the numerous other electronic components with black exterior colors. On the other hand, if the target electronic component is mounted on the surface opposite to the important electronic components, i.e., when the mounting density of the mounted surface is low, this may be possible by making the target electronic component a color close to the resist color (green).

It is also a good idea to place important electronic components and electronic components other than the target electronic component close to the target electronic component so that they blend in as much as possible. In such cases, it is desirable to make them the same size as the target electronic component. Note that if electronic components are intentionally placed closely together, it can be difficult to silk-screen print the component numbers, which also serve as identification information for the electronic components, close to the electronic components. In such cases, it is a good idea to create a separate component number area on the same surface as the electronic components and silk-screen the components together there. Enclose the area where the electronic components are mounted with a border, and silk-screen the component numbers together in the component number area, matching the arrangement of the mounted electronic components. It is also a good idea to enclose the component number areas with a border, and link the enclosed areas with lines, or print a common symbol such as an "A" or a single alphabet character near each area to link them together.

In addition, in the above example, a surface-mount resistor was used as the target, but the exterior color was yellow-green and the surface-mount resistor had no markings on it. Generally, the resistance value is written on the exterior of a surface-mount resistor, but in this invention, since only the administrator knows this, the exterior is only one color to make it less conspicuous.

Furthermore, for boards that mount circuits made up of important electronic components, in order to make it easier for managers to identify the location where the targeted electronic components are mounted, for example, on boards that are mounted vertically to the gaming machine, the components are mounted in the upper half of the board, or on the side that is not visible when the board is mounted. This saves time.

Furthermore, the exterior color of the electronic component used as the visual target can be different for each circuit that comprises a critical electronic component. For example, the exterior color of the electronic component used as the visual target for the +12V driver circuit could be a matte yellow-green, and the exterior color of the electronic component used as the visual target for the circuit that controls the speaker could be a matte light blue. If there is something wrong with the range of motion of the movable body, simply locate the electronic component with the yellow-green exterior color as the visual target, and the visual target color can be identified from the symptoms of the abnormality. If an electronic component with a yellow-green exterior color is installed, it can be assumed that there is a malfunction in the circuit containing the critical electronic component. However, if an electronic component of a different color is installed instead of the electronic component used as the visual target, it can be determined that the malfunction is malicious. Furthermore, when multiple circuits with the same function are installed, it is best to use the same exterior color for the electronic components used as visual targets, even if they are mounted on the same side or both sides of the board.

In addition, while the above embodiment describes a peripheral control board 1510 on which an MPU is mounted, the invention may also be applied to a +12V driver circuit board in which the driver IC 5 is mounted on a board separate from the MPU. The +12V driver circuit board also functions as a relay board located between the peripheral control board 1510 and the drive motor. Gaming machines with multiple moving bodies require multiple drive motors, with one driver circuit provided for each drive motor. For this reason, multiple connectors are also mounted to relay various signals. When connectors are inserted or removed, the board bends, causing stress on the connection terminals of the various electronic components mounted on the board. To avoid this, it is desirable to position circuits comprising important electronic components as far away as possible from the connector mounting position. The driver IC 5 package in the above embodiment uses a QFP with 12 terminals per side, for a total of 48 terminals. Since each of the 12 terminals on all four sides is fixed with solder, the stress mentioned above is not a major concern. However, since the resistor MR60, the electronic component used as the target, only has two terminals, to prevent peeling due to stress, if the connector is mounted with its terminals aligned horizontally on a board mounted vertically to the gaming machine, it is recommended to mount the driver IC 5 below the connector and then place the resistor MR60 adjacent to it further below the lower edge of the driver IC 5, with an electronic component mounting no-go area B between them. If a similar connector is mounted further below that, it is recommended to place another driver IC or another electronic component equivalent to the driver IC, such as an integrated circuit with a total of 14 or more terminals, in between.

In addition, in the above example, resistors MR60 and MR61 connected to driver IC5, which constitutes the +12V driver circuit mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, were used as targets. However, the main control board uses capacitors as targets for important electronic components, and electronic components with different functions are used than those in the peripheral control board 1510. In this way, by using different types of electronic components, such as resistors as targets on one side and capacitors as targets on the other, there is hope that the possibility of overlooking one can be eliminated.

In addition, the exterior color of the capacitor used as a visual target on the main control board has been changed from the typical brown exterior color to a bright, glossy blue to contrast with the black exterior color of the important electronic components and the electronic components mounted around them, and the green solder resist coated on the surface of the mounted board. Furthermore, surface-mount capacitors, which are also used on peripheral control boards, are used, with both ends of the electrodes of these surface-mount capacitors directly welded to one end of the lead frame and the other end inserted into through-holes formed in the board, allowing the visual target capacitor to be seen from a closer position when the board housed in the board box is viewed from the outside. In this way, by using different methods - making one less noticeable and the other more noticeable - it is hoped that one will be less likely to be overlooked.

Furthermore, when applying the invention described in this embodiment to a board stored in a board box, there is room for improvement in that the board box must be opened. However, from the perspective of making it less noticeable, the board box storing the board on which the circuit comprising important electronic components is mounted may be made colored and transparent instead of colorless and transparent. For example, in the case of a black-based colored and transparent board box, as mentioned above, the exterior of the important electronic components and the electronic components mounted around them are typically black, so an administrator who can identify the location where the target electronic components are mounted will easily notice the target electronic components with a different exterior color (matt yellow-green). In such cases, it is preferable for the target electronic components to be smaller in size.

Also, ventilation holes can be drilled into the surface of the board box that houses the board on which the circuit comprising the important electronic components is mounted, and the ventilation holes can be positioned so that they intentionally overlap with the target electronic component, making it difficult to distinguish that the exterior color of the target electronic component is different.

The main control board is the most important board mounted on the gaming machine, as it is equipped with a circuit that functions to derive lottery results. Therefore, the surface-mount resistors used as targets on the sub-system boards may be mounted on the main control board with a black exterior color, and the outer size of the pad for one of the surface-mount resistors may be made larger than the outer size of the pad for the other surface-mount resistors. If applied to the pad of a resistor in a circuit that carries a relatively large current, heat dissipation from the pad is promoted, allowing the size of the surface-mount resistor itself to be one or two sizes smaller, which in total reduces the area required for implementation.

In this way, in the above embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 is exemplified as a sub-board (a board on which the movable body, as well as the circuits necessary to execute the presentation of the lottery results using images and sounds are mounted, while the main control board, which is the main board, is mounted with the circuits necessary to derive the lottery results), and in particular, the electronic components that make up the +12V driver circuit mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, specifically resistors MR60 and MR61 (resistors used to appropriately set the output current output to the drive motor) connected to driver IC5 (a chopper-type two-phase bipolar drive stepping motor driver) are We have explained the use of components such as external connection components for the driver IC 5 as visual targets, but even electronic components such as resistors connected to the driver IC 5 can affect the performance of the driver IC 5 itself, so even when selecting a single resistor, precision is required (some have a narrow range between the minimum and maximum allowable values, or only a small fluctuation range in response to temperature changes, etc.). If a component with a large allowable value fluctuation range is carelessly selected, it may not meet the required performance and may cause unexpected problems (for example, the movement of the moving body may become jerky or stop mid-operation).

The driver IC5, an important electronic component mentioned above, cannot actually be made with just one type of electronic component to meet the control form desired by the developer. For this reason, electronic component manufacturers produce a large number of series of electronic components that have the same appearance, common terminal functions, and the same terminal numbers, but where other terminals have different functions. (For example, the output circuit built into a driver may have the same performance, but the input circuit may be of a parallel signal input type or a serial signal input type.) Because these components all have the same appearance, if series products with different model numbers are carelessly installed, the moving body may not move at all, or may move in an unintended manner.

In other words, even if someone maliciously copies a peripheral control board and pretends to be a player in an attempt to induce unnecessary trouble, if they can find the target and find that electronic components different from the important electronic components have been installed, they can avoid suffering any disadvantages and also act as a deterrent in the future.
Furthermore, even if the target of fraud in a gaming machine is the main control board, and the peripheral control boards are also copied and replaced with mistakenly different electronic components, and the fraud using the main control board does not work, if an abnormality is detected in the operation of the moving body, a visual indicator can be found, and if it is found that electronic components different from the important electronic components are installed, it can be realized that some kind of fraud targeting the main control board has been hatched on the main control board, and future disadvantages can be avoided.

The above describes embodiments for implementing the present invention, but the above embodiments can be modified as appropriate without departing from the technical concept of the present invention. In other words, the technical concept of the present invention can be applied even to embodiments in which some of the above embodiments are modified or multiple embodiments are combined.

In addition, while the description has been given of a board for a pachinko machine in which games are played using game balls and a storage unit for storing said board, it is also possible to apply this to a light-emitting board mounted with multiple light emitters used for highly important purposes and a storage unit for storing said light-emitting board in a slot machine in which games are played using coins instead of game balls as the gaming medium.

1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 1000 Front component 1100 Game panel 1300 Main control unit 1310A Main control board 1320X, 1320Y Molding marks 1320A, 1320B Cover body 3000 Back unit 3300 Back rear lower performance unit 3210 Back rear upper movable decorative body 3213 Information display 3214 Back rear upper first decorative board 3214a LED
3219C Visibility section

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that includes a plurality of substrates on which a plurality of electronic components are mounted, that performs a lottery based on the establishment of a start condition, and that awards a benefit based on the result of the lottery,
The plurality of substrates include:
a main control board that executes processing related to the lottery;
a plurality of performance boards related to the control of a plurality of performance means operable based on the result of the lottery executed by the main control board;
A plurality of electronic components are mounted on the special performance board among the plurality of performance boards,
The plurality of electronic components mounted on the special performance board are:
a special integrated circuit component that controls a special effect means among the plurality of effect means;
a plurality of discrete components electrically connected to the special integrated circuit component;
Among the plurality of discrete components, the special discrete components having a common function include a first special discrete component having a relatively small outer shape among the special discrete components, and a second special discrete component having a relatively large outer shape among the special discrete components mounted on the special performance board;
the first special discrete component and the second special discrete component have different colors in appearance except for the markings of electrical characteristics, and are disposed without any other electronic components between the first special discrete component and the second special discrete component;
A gaming machine characterized by: